THE  UNIVERSITY 


OF  ILLINOIS 
LIBRARY 

557 

xb 

no.  63Z-GdAr 


Return  this  book  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below.  A 
charge  is  made  on  all  overdue 

books.  u.  of  I.  Library 


18 1940 

NOV  1 1 1940 


2 7 


'JAN  3 19 


17625-S 


DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  INTERIOR 

Franklin  K.  Lane,  Secretary 


United  States  Geological  Survey 

George  Otis  Smith,  Director 


Bulletin  692 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA 

REPORT  ON  PROGRESS  OF 
INVESTIGATIONS  IN 


1917 


BY 

G.  C.  MARTIN  AND  OTHERS 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1919  >«- 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/miningmineraldep6926capp 


CONTENTS. 


1 

XP 


Page. 


Preface,  by  G.  C.  Martin 1 

Administrative  report,  by  G.  C.  Martin 3 

The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1917,  by  G.  C.  Martin 11 

Water-power  investigations  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  G.  H.  Canfield 43 

Mining  developments  in  the  Ketchikan  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin 85 

Geology  and  mineral  resources  of  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island,  by  R.  M. 

Overbeck 91 

Platinum-bearing  auriferous  gravels  of  Chistochina  River,  by  Theodore 

Chapin 137 

Mining  on  Prince  William  Sound,  by  B.  L.  Johnson 143 

Mineral  resources  of  Jack  Bay  district  and  vicinity,  Prince  William  Sound, 

by  B.  L.  Johnson 153 

Mining  in  central  and  northern  Kenai  Peninsula,  by  B.  L.  Johnson 175 

Gold  lode  mining  in  the  Willow  Creek  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps 177 

Mineral  resources  of  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains,  by  S.  R.  Capps 187 

Mineral  resources  of  the  upper  Chulitna  region,  by  S.  R.  Capps 207 

Platinum-bearing  gold  placers  of  the  Kahiltna  Valley,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr 233 

Chromite  deposits  in  Alaska,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr 265 

Geologic  problems  at  the  Matanuska  coal  mines,  by  G.  C.  Martin 269 

Sulphur  on  Unalaska  and  Akun  islands  and  near  Stepovak  Bay,  by  A.  G. 

Maddren 283 

The  beach  placers  of  the  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island,  by  A.  G.  Maddren 299 

Mining  in  the  Fairbanks  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin 321 

A molybdenite  lode  on  Healy  River,  by  Theodore  Chapin 329 

Mining  in  the  Hot  Springs  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin 331 

Tin  deposits  of  the  Ruby  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin 337 

The  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  the  Tolstoi  district,  by  G.  L.  Harrington 339 

Tin  mining  in  Seward  Peninsula,  by  G.  L.  Harrington 353 

Graphite  mining  in  Seward  Peninsula,  by  G.  L.  Harrington 363 

The  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  the  Kiwalik-Koyuk  region,  by  G.  L.  Harring- 
ton  369 

Index 401 

Recent  Survey  publications  on  Alaska i 

C* 


III 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Plate  I.  Map  of  southeastern  Alaska  showing  location  of  gaging  stations. ..... 

II.  Geologic  sketch  map  of  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island,  Sitka 
district 

III.  Geologic  sketch  map  of  Jack  Bay  and  vicinity 

IV.  Geologic  sketch  map  of  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains 

V.  Geologic  sketch  map  of  the  upper  Chulitna  region 

VI.  Geologic  sketch  map  of  the  Kahiltna  Valley 

VII.  Map  of  Alaska  showing  location  of  sulphur  deposits 

VIII.  Map  of  Kodiak  Island 

IX.  Geologic  sketch  map  of  the  Tolstoi  district 

X.  Geologic  sketch  map  of  Kiwalik-Koyuk  region 

Figure  1.  Structure  section  across  Slate  Creek  miles  above  its  mouth 

2.  Index  map  showing  location  of  the  Jack  Bay  district 

3.  Map  of  the  Seldovia  district 

4.  Map  of  the  Eska  Creek  coal  mines 

5.  Structure  sections  at  the  Eska  Creek  coal  mines - 

6.  Hypothetical  correlation  of  coal  beds  on  west  bank  of  Eska  Creek.. 

7.  Sketch  map  of  Makushin  Volcano  and  vicinity 

8.  Sketch  map  of  part  of  Makushin  Volcano  showing  location  of  sul- 

phur claims 

9.  Sketch  map  of  sulphur  area  on  Makushin  Volcano 

10.  Map  of  Unalaska  and  Akun  islands  showing  location  of  sulphur 

deposits 

11.  Sketch  of  sulphur  claims  on  Akun  Peak 

12.  Map  of  Stepovak  Bay  and  vicinity  showing  location  of  sulphur 

deposits * - •••;*• 

13.  Sketch  map  showing  tungsten  lode  claims  in  the  Fairbanks  district. 


Page. 

44 

96 

158 

188 

208 

236 

284 

300 

340 

370 

138 

154 

266 

270 

272 

276 

284 

285 

286 

293 

294 

298j 

324 


IV 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


By  G.  C.  Martin  and  others. 


PREFACE. 


By  G.  C.  Martin. 


This  volume  is  the  fourteenth  of  a series  of  annual  bulletins1 
treating  of  the  mining  industry  of  Alaska  and  summarizing  the 
results  achieved  during  the  year  in  the  investigation  of  the  mineral 
resources  of  the  Territory.  These  reports  are  intended  to  give 
prompt  publication  of  the  more  valuable  economic  results  of  the 
year.  The  time  available  for  their  preparation  does  not  permit  full 
office  study  of  the  field  notes  and  specimens,  and  some  of  the  state- 
ments made  here  may  be  subject  to  modification  when  the  study  has 
been  completed.  Those  interested  in  any  particular  district  should 
therefore  procure  a copy  of  the  complete  report  on  that  district  as 
soon  as  it  is  available. 

This  volume,  like  the  others  of  the  series,  contains  an  account  of 
the  mining  industry,  including  statistics  of  mineral  production, 
and  also  preliminary  statements  on  investigations  made  by  the 
Geological  Survey.  It  is  intended  that  this  series  of  reports  shall 
serve  as  convenient  reference  works  on  the  mining  industry  for  the 
years  which  they  cover.  It  is  not  possible  for  a member  of  the  Sur- 
vey to  visit  every  mining  district  each  year,  and  therefore  the  infor- 
mation used  in  preparing  the  summary  on  mining  development  is  in 
part  obtained  from  other  reliable  sources. 

Again,  as  for  many  years  in  the  past,  the  Geological  Survey  is 
under  great  obligation  to  residents  of  the  Territory  for  statistical 
data.  Those  who  have  thus  aided  include  the  many  mine  operators 
who  have  made  reports  on  production  as  well  as  developments. 
There  are  still  some  Alaskan  mineral  producers  who  fail  to  respond 
to  requests  for  information,  but  many  prospectors,  Federal  officials, 


xThe  preceding  volumes  in  this  series  are  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bulls.  259,  284,  314,  345, 
379,  442,  480,  520,  542,  592,  622,  642,  and  662. 


5177 


1 


2 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


engineers,  and  officers  of  transportation  and  commercial  companies 
have  contributed  valuable  data.  It  is  impracticable  to  enumerate  all 
who  have  aided  in  this  work,  but  it  should  be  stated  that  without 
the  assistance  of  these  public-spirited  citizens  it  would  be  impossible 
to  prepare  this  report.  Special  acknowledgments  should  be  made 
to  the  Director  and  other  officers  of  the  Mint;  the  officers  of  the 
Alaska  customs  service;  Wells,  Fargo  & Co.;  the  members  and 
officers  of  the  Alaskan  Engineering  Commission ; the  Alaska  Mexican 
Gold  Mining  Co.,  Alaska  United  Gold  Mining  Co.,  and  Alaska  Tread- 
well Gold  Mining  Co.,  of  Treadwell;  B.  L.  Thane,  of  Juneau;  G.  H. 
Miller,  of  Skagway;  George  M.  Esterly,  of  Nizina;  James  J.  God- 
frey, of  McCarthy;  Stephen  Birch,  of  Kennicott;  John  E.  Hughes, 
of  Valdez;  John  Ronan,  of  Seward;  William  K.  McLennan,  of 
Chisana;  J.  A.  Kemp,  of  Steel  Creek;  Jos.  Danker,  of  Chicken; 
U.  G.  Myers,  of  Eagle;  Frank  A.  Reynolds,  of  Circle;  First  National 
Bank,  American  Bank  of  Alaska,  Tanana  Valley  Railroad,  A. 
Bruning,  J.  A.  Fairborn,  George  Hutchinson,  Falcon  Joslin,  Alex 
Mitchell,  and  R.  C.  Wood,  of  Fairbanks;  Frank  Hagel,  of  Berry; 
J.  C.  Felix,  of  Nenana;  George  L.  Morrison  and  S.  S.  Rowell,  of 
Hot  Springs;  A.  Bock  and  Joseph  Heller,  of  Tofty;  George  W. 
Ledger,  of  Rampart;  W.  H.  Carney,  of  Tanana;  Frank  Cook,  of 
Ruby;  C.  P.  Wood  and  Miners  & Merchants  Bank,  of  Iditarod; 
Harry  Fothergill,  of  Ophir;  Harry  Madison,  of  Tolstoi;  George 
W.  Pilcher,  of  Fortuna  Ledge;  Henry  Howard,  of  Aniak;  W.  F. 
Green,  of  Tokotna;  William  Loisell  and  A.  Stecker,  of  Quinhagak; 
R.  W.  J.  Reed,  of  Nome;  John  D.  Flannigan,  of  Council;  Lars  Gun- 
derson, of  Haycock ; and  Lewis  Lloyd,  of  Shungnak. 


ADMINISTRATIVE  REPORT, 


By  G.  C.  Martin. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Eleven  parties  were  engaged  during  1917  in  Alaska  surveys  and 
investigations.  The  length  of  the  field  season  ranged  from  2-J  to  12 
months,  being  determined  by  the  character  of  the  work  and  by  the 
climatic  conditions  prevailing  in  different  parts  of  the  Territory. 
The  parties  included  9 geologists,  1 topographer,  1 engineer,  and  18 
packers,  cooks,  and  other  auxiliaries.  Nine  of  the  parties  were  en- 
gaged in  geologic  surveys,  one  in  topographic  surveys,  and  one  in 
stream  gaging.  The  areas  covered  by  reconnaissance  geologic  sur- 
veys on  a scale  of  1:250,000  (4  miles  to  an  inch)  amount  to  1,750 
square  miles;  by  detailed  geologic  surveys  on  a scale  of  1:  62,500  (1 
mile  to  an  inch),  275  square  miles.  Much  of  the  time  of  the  geolo- 
gists was  devoted  to  the  investigation  of  special  problems  relating  to 
the  occurrence  of  minerals,  the  results  of  which  can  not  be  expressed 
in  terms  of  area.  About  1,050  square  miles  was  covered  by  reconnais- 
sance topographic  surveys  on  a scale  of  1:250,000  (4  miles  to  an 
inch).  In  cooperation  with  the  Forest  Service,  stream  gaging  was 
continued  in  southeastern  Alaska. 

In  1917  the  entrance  of  the  United  States  into  the  war  and  the 
beginning  of  the  construction  of  the  Government  railroad  in  Alaska 
gave  more  than  ordinary  importance  to  the  collection  of  reliable 
statistics  of  mineral  occurrence  and  production.  Many  govern- 
mental agencies  connected  more  or  less  directly  with  the  prosecution 
of  the  war  were  seeking  information  concerning  available  supplies 
and  reserves  of  raw  material.  Therefore,  the  greater  number  of  the 
geologists  assigned  to  Alaskan  work  were  charged  with  investiga- 
tions of  the  occurrence  and  production  of  minerals  of  economic  value, 
among  which  were  tin,  tungsten,  platinum,  copper,  chrome  iron  ore, 
nickel,  and  sulphur. 

Of  the  five  parties  whose  work  may  be  classified  geographically, 
two  parties  worked  in  southeastern  Alaska,  two  on  Prince  William 
Sound,  and  one  in  the  region  tributary  to  the  Government  railroad. 

3 


4 MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

The  following  tables  show  the  allotments,  including  both  field 
and  office  work,  of  the  total  appropriation  of  $100,000  for  the  fiscal 
year  1917,  classified  by  regions,  by  kinds  of  surveys,  and  by  kinds  of 
expenditures.  In  addition  to  these  funds  a balance  of  about  $6,000 
from  last  year’s  appropriation  was  expended  in  equipping  parties  for 
the  season’s  field  work.  In  the  first  table,  the  general  office  expenses 
are  apportioned  to  the  several  allotments,  account  being  taken  of 
variations  in  character  of  work.  The  results  are  expressed  in  round 
numbers.  Salaries  of  the  permanent  staff  are  included  up  to  the 
end  of  the  fiscal  year  1918,  but  expenses  other  than  these  include  only 
the  cost  of  field  and  office  work  during  1917.  The  “ general  investi- 
gations ” include,  among  other  things,  the  cost  of  collecting  mineral 
statistics,  of  office  work  relating  to  the  field  investigations  of  previous 
seasons,  and  of  investigations  under  the  direct  administration  of 
the  geologic  branch.  A balance  of  about  $37,300  is  available  for 
equipping  the  field  parties  in  1918. 

Approximate  general  distribution  of  appropriations  for  Alaska  investigations , 


1917. 

Southeastern  Alaska $20,  30t> 

Prince  William  Sound,  Copper  River,  and  Controller  Bay_  10.  300 

Cook  Inlet  and  Susitna  Basin 7,  600 

Southwestern  Alaska 3,  900 

Yukon  Basin 5,  500 

Seward  Peninsula 1,  900 

General  investigations 13,  200 

To  be  allotted  to  field  work,  1918 37,  300 


100,000 

Approximate  allotments  to  different  kinds  of  surveys  and  investigations , 1917, 


Reconnaissance  geologic  surveys $9, 100 

Detailed  geologic  surveys 3,  400 

Special  geologic  investigations 17,  500 

Reconnaissance  topographic  surveys 4,  000 

Investigations  of  water  resources 5,  400 

Collection  of  mineral  statistics 1,  600 

Miscellaneous,  including  administration,  inspection,  cler- 
ical salaries,  office  supplies  and  equipment,  and  map 

compilation 21,  700 

To  be  allotted  to  field  work,  1918 37,  300 


100,000 

Allotments  for  salaries  and  field  expenses,  1917. 

Scientific  and  technical  salaries $24, 964 

Field  expenses 18,  536 

Clerical  and  administrative  salaries  and  miscellaneous 

expenses 19,  200 

To  be  allotted  to  field  work,  1918 37,  300 


106,000 


ADMINISTRATIVE  REPORT. 


5 


The  following  table  exhibits  the  progress  of  investigations  in 
Alaska  and  the  annual  grant  of  funds  since  systematic  surveys  were 
begun  in  1898.  It  should  be  noted  that  a varying  amount  is  spent 
each  year  on  special  investigations  that  yield  results  which  can  not 
be  expressed  in  terms  of  area. 


Progress  of  surveys  in  Alaska,  1898-1017. 


Year. 


Areas  covered  by 
geologic  surveys. 


Areas  covered  by  topographic 
surveys/t 


©8 

*7? 

t-H  r—i 

o 


3 O 


8 . 


^ a 

-h  O 


Water 

resources 

investiga- 

tions. 


cj  a 
co  >> 

c — 


1898 

1899 

1900 

1901 

1902 

1903 

1904 

1905 

1906 

1907 

1908 

1909 

1910 

1911 

1912 

1913 

1914 

1915 

1916 

1917 


Percentage  of  total 
area  of  Alaska 


$46, 189 

25. 000 

60. 000 
60, 000 
60,000 
60, 000 
60, 000 
80, 000 
80, 000 
80, 000 
80, 000 
90, 000 
90, 000 

100, 000 
90, 000 
100, 000 
100, 000 
100, 000 
100, 000 
100, 000 


Sq.m. 
9, 500 
6, 000 
3,300 
6,200 
6, 950 

5.000 
4,050 

4.000 

5.000 
2,600 

2.000 
6, 100 


Sq.m. 


Sq.m. 


8,000 


3, 500 

1,000 


6, 700 
5,800 
10, 050 
8,000 

3.500 

4.100 

4.000 
1,400 
2,850 

5.500 
8,635 

10,550 

2.000 
2,950 
7,  700 

10, 700 

5. 100 
1, 750 


Sq.m. 
12, 840 
8,  690 
630 
10, 200 
8, 330 


Sq.m. 

2,070 


Sq.m. 


Miles. 


96 


800 


536 

421 

442 

604 

450 

321 

496 

525 

180 

325 

200 

636 

275 


6,190 


150 

450 

970 

000 

480 

880 

500 

120 

980 

170 

815 

460 


96 


3,  400 
• 600 


480 

787 

40 

501 

427 

444 

36 

246 

298 

287 

10 

12 

67 


86 

202 


95 


286 

457 

556 

703 

429 

309 

381 


1,561,189  73,200 


101,285 


5,507 


51,680  148,030  3,731  453 


12.48 


1.  727 


0. 94 


8. 81 


25.24 


0.  64 


a The  Coast  and  Geodetic  and  International  Boundary  surveys  and  the  General  Land  Office  have  also 
made  topographic  surveys  in  Alaska.  The  areas  covered  by  these  surveys  are,  of  course,  not  included  in 
these  totals. 


GEOGRAPHIC  DISTRIBUTION  OF  INVESTIGATIONS. 

GENERAL  WORK. 

Alfred  H.  Brooks,  geologist  in  charge  of  the  division  of  Alaskan 
mineral  resources,  was  engaged  in  office  and  administrative  work 
until  May  IT,  when  he  entered  the  military  service  as  captain  of  the 
Corps  of  Engineers,  United  States  Army,  and  was  assigned  to  active 
duty  in  France,  where  he  is  now  serving  as  lieutenant  colonel.  His 
time  in  office  in  the  early  part  of  1917  was  divided  as  follows:  Fifty 


6 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


days  to  routine  and  administrative  work,  23-|  days  to  the  preparation 
of  the  progress  report,  3J  days  to  writing  a pamphlet  on  mineral 
supplies  of  Alaska,  6|  days  to  a memorial  of  Dr.  C.  Willard  Hayes, 

5 days  to  compilation  of  mineral  statistics  of  Alaska,  2J  days  to  the 
critical  reading  of  manuscript,  5J  days  to  field  plans,  2 days  to  scien- 
tific meetings,  2^  days  to  study  of  the  physiography  of  Alaska,  and  11 
days  to  matters  connected  with  military  service. 

The  writer  has  been  acting  geologist  in  charge  of  the  Alaska  divi- 
sion since  May  17.  He  was  engaged  in  office  work  till  August  1,  when 
he  started  for  Alaska.  Two  days  were  spent  in  Juneau,  collecting 
data  on  mining  developments.  The  time  from  August  15  to  21  was 
spent  in  the  Katalla  oil  field.  The  time  from  August  26  to  September 

6 was  devoted  to  a field  conference  with  the  engineer  in  charge  of  the 
Government  coal  mines  in  the  Matanuska  Valley.  A brief  visit  was 
then  made  to  the  Nenana  coal  field.  He  returned  to  Washington  on 
October  11. 

In  the  office  the  writer  devoted  his  time  to  the  following  work: 
Forty-seven  days  to  study  of  notes  and  preparation  of  report  on  the 
Nenana  coal  field,  22  days  to  report  on  upper  Matanuska  region, 
43  days  to  compilation  of  data  for  use  in  establishing  leasing  units 
in  the  Nenana  coal  field,  5 days  to  preparation  of  memorandum 
for  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  on  the  Nenana  coal  field,  13  days  to 
preparation  of  memorandum  for  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  on  the 
Matanuska  coal  field,  5 days  to  proof  reading,  2 days  to  study  of 
Alaska  stratigraphy,  and  9 days  to  the  Alaska  press  bulletin. 

During  the  writer’s  absence  in  Alaska  F.  H.  Moffit  was  acting 
geologist  in  charge  and  devoted  considerable  time  to  executive  work. 
Since  June  11,  1917,  most  of  Mr.  Moffit’s  time  has  been  given  to  as- 
sisting Maj.  Bagley  in  his  investigations  of  airplane  mapping,  and 
since  November  he  has  devoted  himself  exclusively  to  that  work. 

R.  H.  Sargent  continued  the  general  supervision  of  the  Alaska 
topographic  surveys  and  map  compilation  until  May  26,  when  he 
was  furloughed  to  accept  a scientific  position  abroad.  He  has  since 
returned  to  the  Survey  and  is  doing  topographic  work  in  the  North- 
western States. 

E.  M.  Aten  continued  as  office  assistant  to  the  acting  geologist  in 
charge  and  assisted  in  the  collection  of  statistics  of  production  of 
precious  metals  in  Alaska  until  July  13,  when  he  went  into  the  mili- 
tary service  as  captain  in  the  Quartermaster  Corps,  United  States 
Army.  After  that  date  Miss  L.  M.  Graves  took  up  Mr.  Aten’s  ad- 
ministrative duties  and  T.  R.  Burch  assisted  in  the  collection  and  com- 
pilation of  the  mineral  statistics. 

J.  W.  Bagley’s  investigations  of  photo-topographic  methods  were 
early  recognized  as  of  potential  military  value.  Both  he  and  F.  H. 
Moffit  devoted  considerable  time  to  this  work  early  in  the  year  and  on 


ADMINISTRATIVE  REPORT. 


7 


June  22  Mr.  Bagley  received  a commission  as  captain  (now  major) 
of  engineers.  Since  that  date  he  has  devoted  all  his  time  to  airplane 
mapping  work.  He  has  been  assisted  by  Mr.  Moffit,  Capt.  C.  E. 
Giffin,  and  J.  B.  Mertie. 

A systematic  investigation  of  the  heavy  placer  minerals  of  Alaska 
was  begun  by  G.  L.  Harrington  and  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.,  during  the 
year.  This  work  has  already  yielded  results  of  considerable  value. 
Platinum  was  found  in  concentrate  from  Aloric  River  in  the  Kus- 
kokwim  Delta  and  also  from  Marshall.  Tin  ore  (cassiterite)  was 
found  in  concentrates  from  Yentna  River  in  such  amount  as  to  indi- 
cate that  it  possibly  occurs  in  commercial  quantities.  Cassiterite 
was  also  found  in  small  quantities  in  concentrates  from  Boob  Creek 
in  the  Tolstoi  district,  from  Willow  Creek  near  Nome,  and  from 
Riglagalik  River  in  the  Ivuskokwim  Delta.  Scheelite  was  deter- 
mined in  a number  of  concentrates  from  the  vicinity  of  Nome  and 
from  Bonanza  Creek  at  the  base  of  Seward  Peninsula.  These  lo- 
calities are  not  new  but  are  important  as  indicating  that  the  mineral 
may  occur  in  sufficient  amount  to  be  a valuable  by-product  of 
placer  mining.  Scheelite  was  also  found  at  a new  locality  on  Jack 
Wade  Creek. 

SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA. 

Field  work  in  southeastern  Alaska  included  special  investigations 
of  Paleozoic  stratigraphy  and  paleontology  by  Edwin  Kirk,  a contin- 
uation of  the  geologic  reconnaissance  of  the  Ketchikan  district  by 
Theodore  Chapin,  a reconnaissance  of  parts  of  Chichagof  Island  with 
special  investigations  of  the  nickel  deposits  by  R.  M.  Overbeck,  a 
reconnaissance  of  Lituya  Bay  and  special  investigations  of  the  iron 
ores  of  the  Ketchikan  district  and  of  mining  conditions  in  the  Juneau 
district  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.,  and  a continuation  of  the  investigation 
of  water  resources  by  G.  H.  Canfield. 

Studies  of  the  ore  deposits  and  mining  developments  in  the 
Ketchikan  district  were  continued  by  Theodore  Chapin,  who  de- 
voted the  time  from  July  10  to  20  and  from  September  25  to  No- 
vember 4 to  this  work.  Especial  attention  was  given  to  the  copper 
deposits. 

An  investigation  of  the  reported  occurrence  of  platinum  at  Lituya 
Bay  was  made  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.,  in  July.  Mr.  Mertie  also  in- 
vestigated the  iron  ores  of  southeastern  Alaska  in  October. 

A reconnaissance  of  the  geology  and  mineral  deposits  of  the  Sitka 
district,  with  especial  reference  to  the  nickel-bearing  copper  ore 
on  the  west  side  of  Chichagof  Island,  was  made  by  R.  M.  Overbeck. 

The  investigation  of  the  water  resources  of  southeastern  Alaska, 
begun  in  1915  under  a cooperative  agreement  with  the  Forest  Service, 
was  continued  throughout  1917.  G.  H.  Canfield,  who  had  charge  of 


8 MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

this  work,  maintained  IT  automatic  gages  throughout  the  year.  In 
addition  to  these  gages  8 others  were  installed  in  cooperation  with 
individuals  and  corporations.  The  results  are  briefly  summarized 
in  another  section  of  this  report.  This  work  dould  not  have  been 
carried  on  without  the  cordial  cooperation  of  the  Forest  Service, 
many  members  of  which  have  given  substantial  aid ; particular 
acknowledgment  should  be  made  to  W.  G.  Weigle,  special  agent  at 
Ketchikan,  and  to  Leonard  Lundgren,  district  engineer  at  Port- 
land, Oreg. 

A study  of  the  Paleozoic  rocks  of  southeastern  Alaska  was  as- 
signed to  Edwin  Kirk  in  the  summer  of  1917.  He  left  Washington 
July  1 and  remained  in  the  field  until  the  later  part  of  September 
studying  the  stratigraphy  and  making  large  collections  of  fossils 
from  localities  in  southeastern  Alaska. 

PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND  AND  COPPER  RIVER  REGION. 

Mr.  B.  L.  Johnson  in  1917  continued  his  investigations  of  mining 
developments  in  the  Prince  William  Sound  region  and  the  eastern 
part  of  Kenai  Peninsula.  He  also  made  a detailed  survey  of  part 
of  the  Jack  Bay  district.  Mr.  Johnson  devoted  the  time  from  July 
14  to  October  19  to  this  work. 

The  reconnaissance  topographic  survey  of  the  Prince  William 
Sound  region,  which  wTas  begun  several  years  ago,  was  extended 
eastward  by  D.  C.  Witherspoon  in  1917.  The  season’s  work  com- 
prised 1,000  square  miles,  including  the  eastern  shore  line  of  Prince 
William  Sound  from  Fidalgo  Bay  to  the  entrance  of  Orca  Inlet, 
which  was  mapped  on  a scale  of  1 : 250,000.  In  addition,  Mr.  Wither- 
spoon surveyed  the  eastern  end  of  Hawkins  Island. 

A brief  investigation  of  the  reported  nickel  ore  in  the  Copper 
Biver  valley  was  made  by  R.  M.  Overbeck,  who  devoted  a few  days 
in  August  to  this  work. 

COOK  INLET,  SUSITNA  REGION,  AND  SOUTHWESTERN  ALASKA. 

The  progress  of  construction  of  the  Government  railroad  in 
Alaska  created  a demand  for  information  on  the  geology  and  min- 
eral resources  of  the  region  tributary  thereto.  S.  R.  Capps  was 
charged  with  the  investigation  of  an  area  tributary  to  the  railroad 
in  the  upper  Susitna  Valley.  Between  July  1 and  September  7 he 
made  geologic  reconnaissance  surveys  covering  an  area  of  more 
than  1,500  miles  on  a scale  of  1:250,000,  and  also  investigated  the 
copper  and  gold  lodes  of  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains  and  of 
the  Willow  Creek  district. 

Investigations  of  the  platinum  deposits  of  the  Yentna  district 
and  of  the  chromite  deposits  of  lower  Cook  Inlet  were  made  by  Mr. 
Mertie. 


ADMINISTRATIVE  REPORT. 


9 


The  sulphur  deposits  of  Makushin  and  Akun  islands  and  near 
Stepovak  Bay  were  investigated  by  A.  G.  Maddren.  Mr.  Maddren 
also  made  a brief  visit  to  the  beach  placers  on  the  west  side  of 
Kodiak  Island.  His  field  work  extended  from  July  21  to  Sep- 
tember 22. 

YUKON  REGION. 

The  work  in  the  Yukon  region  included  special  investigations  of 
the  tungsten,  tin,  and  platinum  deposits  of  the  Fairbanks,  Hot 
Springs,  and  Ruby  districts  by  Theodore  Chapin ; a special  investiga- 
tion of  platinum  deposits  in  the  Tolstoi  district  by  G.  L.  Harrington ; 
and  an  examination  of  the  coal  along  the  main  line  of  the  railroad 
west  of  Nenana  River  by  G.  C.  Martin.  No  areal  surveys  were 
undertaken. 

SEWARD  PENINSULA. 

Work  on  the  Seward  Peninsula  included  investigations  by  G. 
L.  Harrington  of  the  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  the  Candle  and 
Koyuk  districts,  of  the  placer  and  lode  tin  and  the  graphite  of  the 
York  district  and  Imuruk  basin,  and  of  the  general  mining  devel- 
opments. No  areal  surveys  were  made. 

COLLECTION  OF  STATISTICS. 

The  collection  of  statistics  of  production  of  metals  in  Alaska, 
begun  by  the  Alaska  division  in  1905,  was  continued  as  usual.  Pre- 
liminary estimates  of  mineral  production  for  1917  were  published 
on  January  1,  1918. 

PUBLICATIONS. 

During  1917  the  Survey  published  1 bulletin  and  1 water-sup- 
ply paper  relating  to  Alaska.  In  addition,  2 professional  papers 
and  5 bulletins  were  in  press,  and  21  reports,  including  this  volume, 
were  in  preparation  at  the  end  of  the  year.  Five  topographic  maps 
were  in  press  at  the  end  of  the  year. 

REPORTS  ISSUED. 

Bulletin  657.  The  use  of  the  panoramic  camera  in  topographic  surveying, 
with  notes  on  the  application  of  photogrammetry  to  aerial  surveys,  by  J.  W. 
Bagley. 

Water-Supply  Paper  418.  Mineral  springs  of  Alaska,  by  G.  A.  Waring. 

REPORTS  IN  PRESS. 

Professional  Paper  109.  The  Canning  River  region,  northern  Alaska,  by  E. 
DeK.  Leffingwell. 

Professional  Paper  120-D.  The  structure  and  stratigraphy  of  Gravina  and 
Revillagigedo  islands,  Alaska,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  (Published  Aug.  22,  1918.) 

Bulletin  655.  The  Lake  Clark-Central  Kuskokwim  region,  Alaska,  by  P.  S. 
Smith.  (Published  Apr.  17,  1918.) 


10 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Bulletin  662.  Mineral  resources  of  Alaska,  1916,  by  Alfred  H.  Brooks 
and  others.  (Published  Aug.  1,  1918.) 

Bulletin  667.  The  Cosna-Nowitna  region,  Alaska,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  (Pub- 
lished Apr.  12,  1918.) 

Bulletin  668.  The  Nelchina-Susitna  region,  Alaska,  by  Theodore  Chapirw 

Bulletin  675.  The  upper  Chitina  Valley,  Alaska,  by  F.  H.  Moffit,  with  a 
description  of  the  igneous  rocks,  by  R.  M.  Overbeck.  (Published  June  26,  1918.) 

REPORTS  IN  PREPARATION. 

Bulletin  664.  The  Nenana  coal  field,  Alaska,  by  G.  C.  Martin. 

Bulletin  682.  The  marble  resources  of  southeastern  Alaska,  by  E.  F.  Buc- 
chard. 

Bulletin  683.  The  Anvik-Andreafski  region,  Alaska,  by  G.  L.  Harrington. 

Bulletin  687.  The  Kantishna  region,  Alaska,  by  S.  R.  Capps. 

The  lower  Kuskokwim  region,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 

The  Kotsina-Kuskulana  district,  by  F.  H.  Moffit. 

The  upper  Matanuska  basin,  by  G.  C.  Martin. 

Geology  of  the  Glacier  Bay  and  Lituya  region,  Alaska,  by  F.  E.  Wright  and 
C.  W.  Wright. 

Geology  of  the  region  along  the  international  boundary  from  Porcupine  River 
to  the  Arctic  Ocean,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 

The  Porcupine  district,  Alaska,  by  H.  M.  Eakin. 

The  Yakataga  district,  Alaska,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 

The  Mesozoic  stratigraphy  of  Alaska,  by  G.  C.  Martin. 

The  Port  Valdez  and  Jack  Bay  district,  Alaska,  by  B.  L.  Johnson. 

The  Ruby-Kuskokwim  region,  Alaska,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.,  and  G.  L.  Har- 
rington. 

The  Cretaceous  and  Tertiary  flora  of  Alaska,  by  Arthur  Hollick. 

The  Ketchikan  district,  Alaska,  by  Theodore  Chapin. 

The  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  Latouche  and  Knight  Island  districts, 
Alaska,  by  B.  L.  Johnson. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  in  the  northern  part  of  the  Yukon-Tanana  region, 
Alaska,  by  Eliot  Blackwelder. 

The  western  Talkeetna  Mountains,  Alaska,  by  S.  R.  Capps. 

The  Juneau  district,  Alaska,  by  A.  C.  Spencer  and  H.  M.  Eakin. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS  IN  PRESS. 

Lower  Matanuska  Valley,  by  R.  H.  Sargent ; scale,  1 : 62,500 ; contour  inter- 
val, 50  feet.  Sale  edition.  (Issued  Feb.  28,  1918.) 

Reconnaissance  map  of  Cosna-Nowitna  region,  Alaska,  by  H.  M.  Eakin,  C.  E. 
Giffin,  and  R.  B.  Oliver ; Yukon  River  from  Fort  Gibbon  to  Nowitna  River  from 
Alaska  Road  Commission;  scale,  1:250,000;  contour  interval,  200  feet.  (Issued 
April  12,  1918,  as  Plate  I,  Bulletin  667.) 

Reconnaissance  map  of  Lake  Clark-Central  Kuskokwim  region,  Alaska,  by  R. 

H.  Sargent,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and  C.  E.  Giffin;  scale,  1:250,000;  contour  in- 
terval, 200  feet.  (Published  Apr.  17,  1918,  as  Plate  I,  Bulletin  655.) 

Reconnaissance  map  of  Upper  Chitina  Valley,  Alaska,  by  International 
Boundary  Commission,  F.  H.  Moffit,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and  T.  G.  Gerdine ; 
scale,  1:250,000;  contour  interval,  200  feet.  (Issued  June  26,  1918,  as  Plate 

I,  Bulletin  675.) 

Juneau  and  vicinity  Alaska,  by  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  control  by  U.  S.  Coast  and 
Geodetic  Survey,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and  Alaska  Gastineau  Mining  Co. ; scale, 
1:24,000;  contour  interval,  50  feet.  Sale  edition.  Issued  July  27,  1918.) 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917, 


By  G.  C.  Martin. 


GENERAL.  FEATURES. 

The  mineral  production  of  Alaska  in  1917  is  valued  at  $40,700,212. 
This  output  is  less  than  that  for  1916,  which  was  $48,632,138,  but  is 
greater  than  that  of  any  other  year.  The  decrease  is  chiefly  in 
copper,  production  of  which  fell  from  119,602,028  pounds,  valued  at 
$29,484,291,  in  1916,  to  88,783,400  pounds,  valued  at  $24,240,598,  in 
1917.  The  reduction  in  the  output  of  copper  was  due  largely  to 
labor  troubles,  which  included  a strike  at  the  Kennecott  mine  and 
shortage  of  labor  at  other  mines.  The  production  of  gold  fell  off 
about  $2,500,000  and  is  the  smallest  since  1904.  The  reduction  in 
the  output  of  gold  is  due  chiefly  to  curtailment  of  operations  be- 
cause of  the  scarcity  of  labor  and  the  high  cost  of  materials  but  is 
also  due  in  part  to  the  disaster  at  the  Treadwell  mine  and  the  de- 
pletion of  some  of  the  richer  placers.  There  was  a reduction  in  the 
output  of  silver,  which  was  due  to  the  decrease  in  production  of  gold 
and  copper.  The  value  of  silver  produced  in  Alaska  in  1917  was, 
however,  the  greatest  in  the  history  of  mining  in  the  Territory.  The 
production  of  lead  increased  somewhat.  The  production  of  tin 
showed  a considerable  decrease,  although  the  value  of  tin  produced 
was  greater  than  ever  before.  The  production  of  antimony  fell  to 
very  small  proportions,  owing  to  the  inability  of  the  producers  in  the 
interior  of  Alaska  to  compete  with  the  cheaper  foreign  product. 
The  production  of  coal  was  the  largest  in  the  history  of  mining  in 
Alaska,  owing  to  the  beginning  of  commercial  mining  in  the  Mata- 
nuska  field.  Tungsten  mining  continued  in  the  Fairbanks  district  and 
the  Seward  Peninsula  on  about  the  same  scale  as  in  the  preceding 
year.  Petroleum  continued  to  be  produced  from  the  single  patented 
claim  near  Katalla,  and  the  local  refinery  was  operated  on  about  the 
customary  scale.  The  production  of  marble  and  gypsum  in  south- 
eastern Alaska  was  somewhat  less  than  in  1916.  The  year  1917 
marks  the  beginning  of  the  production  of  chromite  in  Alaska.  The 
production  of  platinum,  which  was  begun  in  1916,  continued  on  an 
increased  scale.  The  production  of  platinum  was  chiefly  from  the 
Chistochina  district  and  from  Seward  Peninsula,  but  small  amounts 

11 


12 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


were  also  produced  at  other  localities,  and  discoveries  of  platinum 
were  recorded  at  many  localities  in  different  parts  of  Alaska.  It  is 
believed  that  these  discoveries  forecast  the  beginning  of  regular 
platinum  production  in  Alaska,  at  least  on  a small  scale. 

The  statistics  for  the  mineral  production  of  Alaska  for  the  last 
three  years  are  given  in  the  following  table.  The  output  of  marble, 
gypsum,  petroleum,  and  certain  other  substances  is  given  as  a single 
item,  because  a separate  listing  might  reveal  the  production  of  in- 
dividual properties. 


Mineral  output  of  Alaska,  1915,  1916,  and  1917. 


1915 

1916 

1917 

Quantity. 

Value. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

Gold fine  ounces. . 

Silver do 

Copper pounds.. 

Tin,  metallic tons.. 

Antimony,  crude  ore do 

Lead short  tons.. 

Coal do 

Marble,  gypsum,  petroleum, 
platinum,  tungsten,  chro- 
mium, and  graphite 

807,966 
1.071,782 
86, 509,312 
102 
833 
437 
1,400 

$16,702,144 
543,393 
15, 139, 129 
78,846 
74,000 
41,118 
3,300 

a 272, 299 

834,068 

1,379,171 

119,602,028 

139 

1,458 

820 

12,200 

$17,241,713 
907,554 
29, 484, 291 
121,000 
134,000 
109, 120 
55,000 

b 579,500 

709,050 
1, 239, 150 
88,793,400 
100 
165 
852 
53,955 

$14,657,353 
1,021,060 
24,240, 598 
123,300 
28,000 
146,584 
265,317 

218,000 

32,854,229 

48,632,178 

40, 700,212 

a No  platinum,  chromium,  or  tungsten  included. 
b No  chromium  included. 


Regular  mining  may  be  said  to  have  begun  in  Alaska  in  1880,  when 
the  Juneau  gold  placers  were  first  exploited.  It  is  estimated  that 
since  that  time  mineral  wealth  has  been  produced  to  the  value  of 
more  than  $390,000,000.  This  output,  by  years  and  substances,  is 
summarized  in  the  following  table : 

Value  of  total  mineral  production  of  Alaska,  1880-1917. 


By  years. 

By  substances. 

1880-1890 $4,686,714 

1891 916,920 

1904  $9,569,715 

1905  16,480,762 

Gold $292,758,009 

Si  her 4,750,525 

18SS 1,098,400 

1893  1,051,610 

1894  1,312,567 

1895  2,388,042 

1896  2,981,877 

1897  2,540,401 

1898  2,587,815 

1899  5,706,226 

1900  8,241,734 

1901  7,010,838 

1902  8,403,153 

1903  8,944,134 

1906  23,378,428 

1907  20,850,235 

1908  20,145,632 

1909  21,146,953 

1910  16,887,244 

1911  20,691,241 

1912  22,536,849 

1914  19,065,666 

1915  32,854,229 

1916  48,632,212 

1917  40,700,205 

Copper 88,644,470 

Tin  703, 152 

Antimony 236,000 

Lead.../. 363,964 

Coal 686,150 

Marble,  gypsum,  pe- 
troleum, etc 2, 143, 861 

390,286,131 

390,286, 131 

THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


13 


GOLD  AND  SILVER. 

The  following  table  gives  an  estimate  of  the  total  production  of 
gold  and  silver  since  the  beginning  of  mining  in  1880.  For  the 
earlier  years,  the  figures,  especially  for  the  silver,  are  probably  far 
from  being  correct,  but  they  are  based  on  the  best  information  now 
available. 

Gold  and  silver  produced  in  Alaska,  1880-1917. 


18S0. 

1881. 

1882. 

1883. 

1884. 

1885. 

1886. 

1887. 

1888. 


1891. 

1892. 

1893. 

1894. 

1895. 

1896. 

1897. 

1898. 

1899. 

1900. 

1901. 

1902. 

1903. 

1904. 

1905. 

1906. 

1907. 

1908. 

1909. 

1910. 

1911. 

1912. 

1913. 

1914. 

1915. 

1916. 

1917. 


Gold. 

Silver. 

Quantity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

Quantity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Commer- 
cial value. 

967 

$20,000 

1,935 

40,000 

7,256 

150,000 

14, 561 
9,724 

301.000 

201.000 

10,320 

$11, 146 

14,512 

300,000 

21,575 

446,000 

32,653 

675,000 

41,119 

850,000 

2,320 

2, 181 

43,538 

900,000 

8,000 

7,490 

36,862 

762,000 

7,500 

6,071 

43, 538 

900,000 

8,000 

7,920 

52,245 

1,080,000 

8,000 

7,000 

50,213 

1,038,000 

8,400 

6,570 

62,017 

1,282,000 

22,261 

14,257 

112,642 

2,328,500 

67,200 

44,222 

138, 401 

2,861,000 

145,300 

99,087 

118,011 

2,439,500 

116,400 

70,741 

121,760 

2,517,000 

92,400 

54,575 

270,997 

5,602,000 

140, 100 

84,276 

395,030 

8, 166,000 

73,300 

45,494 

335,369 

6,932,700 

47,900 

28,598 

400,709 

8,283,400 

92,000 

48,590 

420,069 

8,683,600 

143,600 

77,843 

443,115 

9, 160,000 

198, 700 

114,934 

756, 101 

15, 630,000 

132, 174 

80,165 

1,066,030 

22,036,794 

203,500 

136,345 

936,043 

19,349, 743 

149, 784 

98,857 

933,290 

19,292,818 

135,672 

71,906 

987,417 

20,411,716 

147,950 

76,934 

780, 131 

16,126,749 

157,850 

85,239 

815,276 

16,853,256 

460,231 

243,923 

829, 436 

17, 145, 951 

515, 186 

316,839 

755,947 

15,626,813 

362,563 

218,988 

762,596 

15,764,259 

394,805 

218,327 

807, 966 

16,702, 144 

1,071,782 

543,393 

834,068 

17,241,713 

1,379,171 

907,554 

709, 050 

14,657,353 

1,239, 150 

1,021,060 

14, 162, 169 

292,758,009 

7,541,519 

4,750,525 

The  subjoined  table  gives  an  estimate,  based  on  the  best  available 
data,  of  the  source  of  the  gold  and  silver  produced  in  Alaska  since 
mining  began  in  1880.  About  $65,100,000  worth  of  gold,  or  nearly 
one-third  of  the  total  estimated  output,  was  produced  before  1905, 
and  there  is  but  scant  information  about  its  source.  For  the  period 
since  that  time  fairly  complete  statistical  returns  are  available,  and  it 
is  probable  that  the  figures  presented  in  the  following  table  are 
sufficiently  accurate  to  be  valuable.  The  figures  given  for  the  silver 
recovered  from  placer  gold  and  from  siliceous  ores  are  probably  less 
accurate  than  those  for  the  gold.  Copper  mining  did  not  begin  in 
Alaska  until  1901,  and  the  figures  for  gold  and  silver  derived  from 
115086°— 19 2 


14 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


this  industry,  as  now  presented,  are  therefore  a close  approximation 
to  the  actual  output. 


Estimated  sources  of  gold  and  silver  produced  in  Alaska,  1880-1917. 


Gold. 

Silver. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

Quantity. 

Value 

Siliceous  ores  a 

Fine  ounces. 
4,066, 033 
75, 593 
10,020,543 

$84, 052, 353 
1, 562, 664 
207, 142,992 

Fine  ounces. 
1, 229, 825 
4, 608,461 
1,703,323 

$841,332 

2,947,429 

961,764 

Copper  ores 

Placers 

14, 162, 169 

292, 758,009 

7,541,609 

4,750,525 

a Including  small  amounts  of  lead  ore. 


The  above  table  shows  that  about  28J  per  cent  of  the  total  gold  pro- 
duction of  Alaska  has  been  obtained  from  the  auriferous  lode  mines 
(siliceous  ores).  In  1917  the  lode-gold  production  was  31  per  cent; 
in  1916,  38  per  cent;  in  1915,  37  per  cent;  in  1914,  32  per  cent;  in 
1913,  31.6  per  cent;  and  in  1912,  29  per  cent.  In  the  following  table 
the  production  of  precious  metals  in  1917  has  been  distributed  as  to 
sources: 

Sources  of  gold  and  silver  produced  in  Alaska,  1917. 


■ 

Total 

quantity. 

Gold. 

Silver. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

Quantity. 

Value 

Siliceous  ores 

Copper  ores 

Placers  

Tom. 

3,414,660 

659,951 

Fine  ounces. 
221, 507 
12,829 
474,559 
155 

$4,578,930 
265, 223 
9,810,000 
3,200 

Fine  ounces. 
131, 503 
1,040, 185 
64,410 
3,052 

$108,358 
857, 113 
53,074 
2,515 

Lead  and  lead-copper  ores 

46 

4,074,657 

709,050 

14,657,353 

1,239, 150 

1,021,060 

Thirty-one  gold-lode  mines  were  operated  in  1917.  There  was  also 
a production  from  nine  prospects  or  small  mines  that  were  not  in 
regular  operation.  Twenty-nine  mines  were  operated  in  1916.  The 
value  of  the  lode  gold  output  decreased  from  $5,912,736  in  1916  to 
$4,581,453  in  1917.  Southeastern  Alaska,  especially  the  Juneau  dis- 
trict, is  still  the  only  center  of  large  quartz-mining  developments 
in  the  Territory.  Next  in  importance  is  the  Willow  Creek  lode  dis- 
trict. There  was  also  considerable  gold  lode  mining  on  Prince  Wil- 
liam Sound.  The  production  in  the  Fairbanks  district  increased 
slightly,  but  lode  mine  owners  of  Fairbanks  are  still  awaiting  the 
cheapening  of  operating  costs,  especially  of  fuel,  which  will  be 
brought  about  by  the  Government  railroad.  Of  the  producing  mines 
10  were  in  southeastern  Alaska,  3 on  Prince  William  Sound,  4 on 
Kenai  Peninsula,  5 in  the  Willow  Creek  district,  and  9 in  the  Fair- 
banks district.  In  1917  the  average  value  of  the  gold  and  silver  con- 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


15 


tents  for  all  siliceous  ores  mined  was  $1.37  a ton;  the  average  for 
1916  was  $1.70  a ton.  These  averages  reflect  the  dominance  in  the 
total  lode  production  of  the  large  tonnage  produced  from  the  low- 
grade  ores  of  the  Juneau  district. 

The  production  by  districts  of  gold  and  silver  in  1917  from  gold 
lode  mines,  including  small  amounts  from  lead-silver  mines  which 
can  not  be  given  separately  without  disclosing  individual  produc- 
tions, is  given  in  the  following  table : 


Production  of  gold  and  silver  from  gold  lode  mines  by  districts,  1917. 


District. 

Mines 

operated. 

Ore  mined 
(short  tons). 

Gold. 

Silver. 

Average 
value  of 
ore  in 
gold  and 
silver. 

Fine 

ounces. 

Value. 

Fine 

ounces. 

Value. 

Southeastern  Alaska 

10 

3,400,120 

205,107 

$4, 239, 914 

129,691 

$106, 865 

$1.28 

Prince  William  Sound 

® 3 

5,350 

4,509 

93,208 

697 

575 

17.53 

Kenai  Peninsula 

4 

140 

223 

4,614 

124 

102 

33.68 

Willow  Creek 

5 

7,885 

9, 466 

195, 662 

713 

588 

24.89 

Fairbanks  district  b 

e 9 

1,200 

2,311 

47,781 

2,217 

1,827 

41.34 

Seward  Peninsula  d 

CO 

5 

13 

274 

145 

119 

78.60 

13 

3,414, 700 

221,629 

4,581,453 

133, 587 

110, 076 

1.37 

a Also  5 prospects. 
b Includes  some  lead  ore. 
e Also  2 prospects. 
d Lead  ore. 

« One  prospect  on  Seward  Peninsula;  also  1 shipment  from  an  unknown  locality. 

The  value  of  the  output  of  placer  gold  in  Alaska  in  1917  was 
about  $9,810,000 ; in  1916  it  was  $11,140,000.  The  decrease  Was  due 
chiefly  to  restriction  of  operations  because  of  the  high  cost  of  sup- 
plies and  the  scarcity  of  labor.  These  adverse  conditions  were  felt 
in  all  parts  of  Alaska  and  everywhere  tended  to  reduce  the  output  of 
gold.  Production  was  increased  only  where  local  conditions  per- 
mitted an  expansion  of  the  industry  in  spite  of  increased  costs.  Such 
conditions  existed  in  some  of  the  newly  discovered  camps,  and  con- 
sequently there  was  an  increase  in  the  output  of  placer  gold  in  the 
Tolovana,  Marshall,  Tolstoi,  and  Koyuk  or  Dime  Creek  districts. 
The  production  of  the  Ruby  district  increased  slightly,  owing  to  the 
very  successful  operation  of  the  Greenstone  dredge.  There  was 
also  an  apparent  increase  in  the  output  of  the  Kuskokwim  region, 
but  this  may  be  due  to  underestimates  of  the  production  of  the 
previous  year. 

It  is  estimated  that  about  610  placer  mines  were  operated  in  the 
summer  of  1917  and  200  during  the  previous  winter,  but  many  for 
only  a part  of  the  season.  About  3,550  men  were  engaged  in  pro- 
ductive placer  mining  in  the  summer  and  950  in  the  winter.  In 
addition,  several  hundred  men  were  engaged  in  prospecting  or  other 
nonproductive  work  relating  to  placer  mining.  The  only  new  placer- 
bearing areas  discovered  during  1917  were  in  the  Kuskokwim  region, 
and  these  have  not  as  yet  made  any  large  production. 


16 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  following  table  shows  approximately  the  total  bulk  of  gravel 
mined  annually  and  the  value  of  the  gold  recovered  per  cubic  yard. 
The  table  is  based  in  part  on  returns  made  by  placer  mine  operators 
and  in  part  on  certain  other  information  which  is  not  available  this 
year.  The  figures  for  1917  are  based  on  an  assumption  that  the 
ratio  of  the  recovery  per  cubic  yard  for  the  mines  which  supplied 
complete  information  to  the  recovery  per  cubic  yard  for  all  mines  is 
the  same  as  in  1916.  Although  the  table  is  thus  only  approximately 
correct,  the  amounts  given  are  probably  near  the  true  figures. 


Estimated  amount  of  gravel  sluiced  in  Alaskan  placer  mines  and  value  of  gold 

recovered,  1908-1917. 


Year. 

Total  quan- 
tity of  gravel. 

Value  of 
gold  re- 
covered 
per  cubic 
yard. 

Year. 

Total  quan- 
tity of  gravel. 

Value  of 
gold  re- 
covered 
per  cubic 
yard. 

1908 

Cubic  yards. 

4.275.000 

4.418. 000 

4. 036. 000 

5.790.000 

7.050.000 

$3. 74 
3. 66 
2. 97 
2.17 
1.70 

1913  

Cubic  yards. 
6, 800, 000 

8. 500. 000 

8. 100. 000 

7. 100.000 

5. 900. 000 

$1.57 

1.26 

1.29, 

1.57 

1.68 

1909 

1914  

1910 

1915 

1911 

1916  

1912 

1917  

The  above  table  shows  that  from  1908  to  1914  there  was  a decline 
in  the  average  gold  content  of  the  gravels  mined.  This  decline  re- 
flects the  improved  methods  of  placer  mining  that  have  been  intro- 
duced, especially  in  the  use  of  dredges.  If  data  were  available  on 
the  average  recovery  of  gold  previous  to  1908  a far  greater  decline 
w^ould  be  noted.  The  rise  of  the  average  recovery  from  1914  to  1917 
is  due  largely  to  the  fact  that  the  Alaskan  dredges  were  for  the  most 
part  working  on  far  richer  placers.  This  change  is  also  influenced  by 
the  fact  that  in  1916  and  1917  a larger  percentage  of  the  placer  gold 
came  from  the  rich  deposits  of  the  newer  districts,  where  recoveries 
of  $7  to  $20  a cubic  yard  are  not  uncommon.  In  the  final  analysis 
the  movement  of  the  miners  away  from  the  lower-grade  placers,  made 
evident  by  the  average  recoveries  for  1915  to  1917,  is  the  result  of  the 
present  economic  conditions,  which  affect  gold  mining  more  adversely 
than  most  other  industries. 

Thirty-six  gold  dredges  were  operated  in  Alaska  in  1917,  two  more 
than  in  1916.  Twenty-eight  dredges  were  in  Seward  Peninsula,  three 
in  the  Iditarod,  and  one  each  in  the  Ruby,  Fairbanks,  Circle,  Forty- 
mile,  and  Yentna  districts.  These  dredges  produced  about  $2,500,000 
worth  of  gold  and  handled  about  3,700,000  cubic  yards  of  gravel.  In 
1916  the  34  dredges  handled  about  3,900,000  cubic  yards  of  gravel  and 
recovered  gold  worth  $2,679,000.  The  average  recovery  of  gold  per 
cubic  yard  was  about  67£  cents  in  1917  and  69  cents  in  1916.  The 
gold  dredges  of  Seward  Peninsula  made  an  average  recovery  of  49 
cents  a cubic  yard  in  1917  and  53  cents  in  1916.  The  dredges  of  the 
Alaska  Yukon  districts  are  working  on  placers  of  relatively  high 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


17 


gold  tenor.  The  value  of  gold  recovered  per  cubic  yard  in  1917  was 
about  94  cents ; in  1916,  about  85  cents. 

Though  dredges  were  built  for  use  in  the  Alaska  Yukon  as  early  as 
1898  and  at  Nome  in  1900,  this  method  of  placer  mining  did  not  reach 
a profitable  stage  until  1903,  when  two  small  dredges  were  suc- 
cessfully operated  in  Seward  Peninsula.  Dredging  began  in  the 
Fortymile  district  in  1907;  in  the  Iditarod,  Birch  Creek,  and  Fair- 
banks districts  in  1912 ; and  in  the  Yentna  district  in  1916.  Up  to  the 
end  of  1917  gold  to  the  value  of  $17,610,000  has  been  mined  by 
dredges.  The  distribution  of  this  output  by  years  is  shown  in  the 
following  table: 


Estimate  of  gold  produced  from  dredge  mining  in  Alaska,  1903-1917. 


Year. 

Number 
of  dredges 
operated. 

Value  of 
gold  output. 

Year. 

Number 
of  dredges 
operated. 

Value  of 
gold  output. 

1903 

2 

$20,000 

25.000 

40.000 
120, 000 

250.000 

171.000 

425.000 

800.000 
1,500,000 

1912 

38 

$2,200,000 

2,200,000 

2.350.000 

2.330.000 

2.679.000 

2.500.000 

1904 

3 

1913 

36 

1905 

3 

1914 

42 

1906 

3 

1915 

35 

1907 

4 

1916 

34 

1908 

4 

1917 

36 

1909 

14 

18 

1910 

17,610,000 

1911 

27 

COPPER. 

The  copper  production  of  Alaska  in  1917  was  about  88,793,400 
pounds,  valued  at  about  $24,240,598.  This  is  less  than  the  production 
in  1916,  which  was  119,854,839  pounds,  valued  at  $29,484,291,  but  is 
greater  than  the  production  of  any  other  year.  The  reduction  in 
total  output  for  the  year  was  due  largely  to  scarcity  of  labor  and  to 
a strike  at  the  Kennecott-Bonanza  mine.  During  the  year  17  copper 
mines  were  operated,  compared  with  18  in  1916.  Of  these  mines 
seven  are  in  Ketchikan  district,  seven  in  the  Prince  William  Sound 
district,  and  three  in  the  Chitina  district.  Small  shipments  of  copper 
were  also  made  from  nine  prospects  or  mines  not  in  regular  operation. 
The  output  of  the  Alaska  copper  mines  by  districts  is  shown  in  the 
following  table: 


Output  of  Alaska  copper  mines  by  districts  in  1917. 


Mines. 

Ore 

(tons). 

Copper. 

Gold. 

Silver. 

Pounds. 

Value. 

Fine 

ounces. 

Value. 

Fine 

ounces. 

Value. 

Ketchikan  district 

o7 
b 3 
d 7 

41,060 

267,541 

351,356 

2,646,553 

70,587,110 

15,559,737 

$722,509 
19,270,281 
4, 247, 808 

2,338 

$48,337 

6 

217,557 

20,500 

887,880 

132,773 

$16,891 
731,614 
109, 405 

Chitina  district 

Prince  William  Sound  c. . . 

16,524 

659,957 

88,793,400 

24,240,598 

12,862 

265,900 

1,041,153 

857,910 

« Also  small  shipments  from  two  prospects. 

b Also  a small  amount  of  placer  copper  and  small  shipments  from  four  prospects, 
c Including  a small  amount  from  Cook  Inlet. 
d Also  small  shipments  from  three  prospects. 


18 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

The  average  copper  content  of  the  ores  mined  in  1917  was  6.4  per 
cent.  The  ores  also  yielded  an  average  of  $0,382  in  gold  and  $1,233 
in  silver.  The  average  yield  for  1916  was  9.7  per  cent  of  copper  and 
$1.60  to  the  ton  in  gold  and  silver.  The  decrease  in  the  content  of 
copper  for  1917  was  due  to  the  smaller  proportion  of  high-grade 
Kennecott  ores  in  the  total  production.  The  following  table  shows 
the  total  production  of  copper  in  Alaska  by  years: 

Copper  produced  in  Alaska,  1880-1917. 


Year. 


Ore  mined. 


Copper  produced. 


1880 

1881-1900 

1901  

1902  

1903  

1904  

1905  

1906  

1907  

1908  

1909  

1910  

1911  

1912  

1913  

1914  

1915  

1916  

1917  


Tons. 


a 40, 000 


52, 199 
105, 729 
98,927 
51,509 
34, 669 
39,365 
68,975 
93,452 
135, 756 
153, 605 
369, 600 
617, 264 
659,957 


2,521,007 


Quantity. 


Pounds. 

3,933 


250.000 

360.000 
1,200,000 
2,043,586 
4, 805, 236 
5,871,811 
6,308,786 
4,585,362 
4, 124, 705 
4,241,689 

27,267,878 
29,230,491 
21,659,958 
21,450, 628 
86,509,312 
119, 654, 839 
88,793,400 


428,561,614 


Value. 


$826 


40,000 
41,400 
156,000 
275, 676 
749,617 
1, 133,260 
1,261,757 
605,267 
536,211 
538,695 
3,408,485 
4,823,031 
3,357,293 
2,852,934 
15, 139, 129 
29,484,291 
24,240,598 


88, 644,470 


a Estimated. 


Among  the  noteworthy  features  of  copper  mining  in  Alaska  in 
1917  was  the  continued  enormous  output  of  the  Kennecott-Bonanza 
mine  in  the  Chitina  district,  which,  as  in  previous  years,  over- 
shadowed all  other  operations.  The  total  output  of  the  coastal  mines 
increased  in  1917,  largely  owing  to  the  increased  production  of  the 
Beatson  mine,  but  the  aggregate  production  of  the  so-called  inde- 
pendent mines  was  also  larger  than  in  1916  in  spite  of  the  shortage 
of  labor  and  ships.  The  heavy  production  from  the  smaller  low- 
grade  mines  is,  of  course,  due  to  the  high  price  of  copper  and  will 
not  be  maintained  by  all  of  them.  However,  some  of  the  mines 
which  are  now  being  placed  on  a productive  basis  or  on  an  enlarged 
capacity  under  the  stimulus  of  high  prices  will  probably  be  able  to 
maintain  their  output  with  copper  at  a lower  price,  and  the  copper 
industry  of  Alaska  will  in  general  continue  to  advance,  although 
there  will  doubtless  be  temporary  setbacks.  Work  preparatory  to 
the  production  of  copper  was  continued  energetically  on  several  of 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


19 


the  nonproducing  mines  and  prospects  in  all  three  of  the  Alaska 
copper  districts.  No  important  new  discoveries  were  reported. 

LEAD. 

The  production  of  lead  in  Alaska  in  1917  is  estimated  at  852  tons, 
valued  at  $146,584.  This  is  the  largest  production  in  the  history 
of  mining  in  Alaska.  The  production  of  1916,  which  was  larger 
than  that  of  any  previous  year,  was  820  tons,  valued  at  $113,160. 
Lead  in  Alaska  is  still,  as  in  past  years,  derived  chiefly  from  the  con- 
centrates of  the  gold  mines  at  Juneau.  The  production  of  lead  in 
1917  includes  small  amounts  derived  from  the  galena  ores  of  the 
Fairbanks  district  and  Seward  Peninsula  and  from  copper-lead  ores 
of  southeastern  Alaska.  Though  silver-lead  ores  are  found  in  many 
parts  of  Alaska,  most  of  the  deposits  have  not  yet  been  opened  on 
a commercial  basis.  The  following  table  shows  the  production  of 
lead  in  Alaska,  so  far  as  it  can  be  determined  from  available  data : 


Estimate  of  lead  produced  in  Alaska,  1892-1917. 


Year. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

1892  

Tons. 

30 

$2,400 

3,040 

2,310 

1906. 

1893  

40 

1907. 

1894  . . 

35 

1908. 

1895 

20 

1,320 

1909. 

1896  

30 

1,800 

1910. 

1897  

30 

2, 160 
2, 240 

1911. 

1898  

30 

1912. 

1899  

35 

3, 150 
3,440 

1913. 

1900  

40 

1914. 

1901  

40 

3,440 

2,460 

2,520 

1915. 

1902  

30 

1916. 

1903 

30 

1917. 

1904 

30 

2,580 

1905 

30 

2,620 

Quantity. 

V alue. 

Tons. 

30 

$3,420 

30 

3, 180 

40 

3,360 

69 

5,934 

75 

6,600 

51 

4,59o 

45 

4,050 

6 

588 

28 

1,344 

437 

41,118 

820 

113,160 

852 

146, 584 

2,933 

369,348 

TIN. 

The  Alaskan  mines  produced  about  100  tons  of  metallic  tin,  valued 
at  $123,300,  in  1917,  compared  with  139  tons,  valued  at  $121,000,  in 
1916.  The  decrease  was  due  in  part  to  unusually  heavy  rains,  which 
interfered  with  the  work  of  the  Seward  Peninsula  dredges,  and  in 
part  to  the  cessation  of  large  gold-mining  operations  in  the  Hot 
Springs  district  on  account  of  the  high  cost  and  scarcity  of  supplies 
and  labor.  Not  all  of  the  tin  ore  mined  in  1917  was  shipped,  for 
Knopf1  estimates  that  the  ore  mined  and  shipped  in  1917  yielded 
about  80  tons  of  metallic  tin.  This  amount  is  considerably  smaller 
than  that  given  by  the  collector  of  customs,  who  states  that  219  long 
tons  of  tin  ore,  containing  219,894  pounds  (about  110  short  tons)  of 


1 Knopf,  Adolph,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Mineral  Resources,  1917,  pt.  1,  p.  63,  1919. 


20 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


metallic  tin,  was  shipped  during  1917.  The  difference  is  probably  due 
to  the  fact  that  a large  amount  of  ore  mined  in  1916  was  not  shipped 
till  1917.  The  following  table  shows  the  production  of  tin  in  Alaska 
since  1902 : 


Tin  produced  in  Alaska,  1902-1917. 


Year 

Quantity. 

Value 

Year. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

1902 

Tons. 

15 

25 

14 

6 

34 

22 

25 

11 

10 

$8,000 
14,000 
8,000 
4,000 
38,640 
16,752 
15, 180 
7,638 
8,335 

1911 

Tons. 

61 

130 

69 

104 

102 

139 

100 

$52,798 
96,000 
44, 103 
66,560 
78,846 
121,000 
123,300 

1903 

1912 

1904 

1913 

1905 

1914 

1906 

1915 

1907 

1916 

1908 

1917 

1909 

867 

703, 152 

1910 

Most  of  the  tin  ore  mined  in  1917  came  from  the  placers  of  the 
York  district,  Seward  Peninsula,  where  two  dredges  and  some  sluic- 
ing yielded  about  146  tons  of  tin  ore.  The  gold  placer  mines  of  the 
Hot  Springs  district  yielded  about  25  tons  of  stream  tin. 

Some  development  work  was  done  on  the  tin  lode  claims  of  the 
York  district,  but  no  ore  was  milled  or  shipped.  In  the  Hot  Springs 
district  there  appears  to  be  a considerable  amount  of  stream  tin  in 
the  old  tailings  and  in  the  unworked  ground.  Prospecting  in  1917 
showed  that  both  gold  and  stream  tin  occur  in  the  basin  of  Sullivan 
Creek,  considerably  below  the  area  which  has  been  mined.  Pros- 
pecting on  Midnight  Creek  in  the  Ruby  district  has  shown  the  pres- 
ence of  tin  at  several  places. 

The  systematic  examination  of  placer  concentrates  by  the  United 
States  Geological  Survey  has  shown  that  tin  ore  (cassiterite)  exists 
in  considerable  amounts  and  possibly  in  commercial  quantities  in  the 
placers  of  the  Yentna  district.  This  locality  is  a new  one  for  tin 
ore  and  is  the  first  at  which  tin  ore  has  been  authentically  reported 
south  of  the  Alaska  Range.  Cassiterite  was  also  found  in  concen- 
trates from  Boob  Creek  in  the  Tolstoi  district,  from  Willow  Creek 
near  Nome,  and  from  Riglagalik  River  in  the  Kuskokwim  Delta. 
The  occurrence  on  Boob  Creek  possibly  indicates  an  extension  of  the 
previously  known  area  that  contains  tin  in  the  Ruby-Poorman  dis- 
trict. 

TUNGSTEN. 

The  production  of  tungsten  in  Alaska  in  1917  is  estimated  at  about 
28  tons  of  scheelite  concentrates  valued  at  about  $45,000.  The  Fair- 
banks district  and  Seward  Peninsula  were  the  principal  producers 
of  tungsten  in  Alaska  in  1917.  In  the  Fairbanks  district  two  tung- 
sten mines  are  in  course  of  development.  At  one  of  these  mines  one 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


21 


unit  of  a 75-ton  mill  is  in  operation  and  late  in  the  summer  was 
turning  out  several  hundred  pounds  of  scheelite  concentrates  daily. 
At  the  other  mine  a similar  mill  was  in  course  of  construction.  Un- 
derground work  was  in  progress  at  both  mines.  The  present  indi- 
cations give  promise  of  a large  increase  in  the  production  of  tung- 
sten in  the  Fairbanks  district.  In  Seward  Peninsula  tungsten  was 
produced  principally  by  sluicing  the  residual  scheelite-bearing  lode 
material  in  Sophie  Gulch.  Smaller  quantities  were  recovered  as 
the  result  of  placer  mining  at  other  localities. 

As  a result  of  the  examination  of  placer  concentrates  by  the  United 
States  Geological  Survey,  scheelite  was  determined  in  a number  of 
concentrates  from  the  vicinity  of  Nome  and  from  Bonanza  Creek 
at  the  base  of  Seward  Peninsula.  These  localities  are  not  new  but 
are  nevertheless  of  importance,  as  there  appears  to  be  a possibility 
of  the  production  of  scheelite  as  a valuable  by-product  of  placer 
gold  mining.  A new  locality,  on  Jack  Wade  Creek,  in  the  Forty  mile 
district,  was  found  for  this  mineral. 

ANTIMONY. 

The  Alaska  output  of  antimony  in  1917  was  about  165  tons  of 
crude  ore  worth  about  $28,000.  The  entire  output  came  from  the 
Fairbanks  district  and  part  of  it  was  derived  from  reworking  of  old 
tailings. 

Production  of  antimony  in  Alaska,  1915-1917. 


Year 

Quantity 
of  crude 
ore. 

Value. 

1915 

Tons. 

833 

1,458 

165 

$74,000 

134,000 

28,000 

1916 

1917 

2,456 

236,000 

PLATINUM. 

It  is  estimated  that  the  output  of  platinum  in  Alaska  in  1917  was 
about  81  ounces  of  crude  platinum  valued  at  about  $5,500.  The 
largest  productions  were  from  Dime  Creek  on  Seward  Peninsula, 
from  Boob  Creek  in  the  Tolstoi  district,  and  from  Slate  Creek  in  the 
Chistochina  district.  Small  amounts  were  produced  from  Sweep- 
stakes  Creek  in  Seward  Peninsula  and  from  the  beach  placers  of 
Kodiak  Island. 

Platinum  is  proving  to  be  very  widely  distributed  in  Alaska.  In 
addition  to  the  localities  at  which  it  has  been  previously  recorded,1 
it  has  been  found  as  a result  of  the  systematic  investigation  of  placer 
concentrates  by  the  Geological  Survey  in  concentrates  from  Aloric 

1U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  662,  pp.  21-25,  1918;  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  666-P,  p.  8, 
1917. 


22 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

River  in  the  Ivuskokwim  Delta  and  from  the  Marshall  district.  It 
has  also  been  reported  from  the  placers  of  Anvik  River  and  of 
Valdez  Creek,  but  these  reports  have  not  been  confirmed. 

CHROMITE. 

The  first  production  of  chromite  in  Alaska  was  in  1917,  when  ship- 
ments were  made  from  Port  Chatham  near  the  lower  end  of  Cook 
Inlet.  The  Cook  Inlet  deposits  have  been  known1  for  a number  of 
years,  but  were  reexamined  in  1917  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.,2  who  has 
written  a paper  on  the  subject  which  appears  elsewhere  in  this 
volume. 

NICKEL. 

Nickel  ore  has  been  reported  at  three  localities  in  Alaska — on  the 
west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island,  near  Copper  River,  and  on  Knight 
Island,  Prince  William  Sound.  The  deposits  on  Chichagof  Island 
and  near  Copper  River  were  examined  in  the  summer  of  1917  by 
R.  M.  Overbeck,3  who  has  written  an  account  which  appears  else- 
where in  this  volume.  A brief  statement  of  the  results  of  that 
examination  follows: 

The  nickel  deposits  of  Chichagof  Island  are  situated  on  the  west  coast  of 
the  island  about  3 miles  northwest  of  Pinta  Bay,  or  about  65  miles  northwest 
of  Sitka.  The  developments  consisted  in  1917  of  a 180-foot  shaft,  with  155  feet 
of  drifts  at  the  80  and  180  foot  levels,  and  of  several  prospect  holes. 

The  ore  occurs  in  and  near  the  margin  of  a mass  of  hornblende  gabbro  or 
norite  which  is  intrusive  into  quartz-mica  schist.  This  contact  is  parallel  to 
the  shore.  The  ore  is  exposed  in  twTo  outcrops  about  half  a mile  apart.  A shaft 
was  sunk  at  the  more  northerly  of  these  outcrops.  There  is  a third  outcrop 
about  half  a mile  farther  north,  where  a mass  of  limonite  is  believed  to  be 
the  weathered  capping  of  the  ore.  These  outcrops  form  irregular  areas,  about 
70  feet  in  maximum  diameter,  projecting  somewhat  above  the  surrounding 
surface.  At  several  other  places  the  ore  minerals  were  seen  to  be  disseminated 
in  small  amounts  through  the  country  rock. 

The  ore  contains  copper  and  nickel,  the  most  abundant  sulphide  minerals 
being  pyrrhotite,  chalcopyrite,  and  pentlandite.  Pentlandite  is  an  iron-nickel 
sulphide,  (FeNi)S,  containing  22  per  cent  of  nickel.  The  minerals  in  the 
ore  include  also  a small  amount  of  niccolite,  which  is  an  arsenide  of  nickel 
containing  about  43.9  per  cent  of  nickel.  Two  selected  samples  of  ore  from 
the  80-foot  level  contain  4.68  and  3.93  per  cent  of  nickel  and  a trace  of  cobalt. 

The  number,  size,  and  shape  of  the  ore  bodies  have  not  been  determined. 
The  only  opportunity  for  underground  observation  in  1917  was  in  the  80-foot 
level  at  the  center  outcrop.  The  shaft  is  in  igneous  rock  that  is  free  from  ore 

1 Grant,  U.  S.,  The  southeastern  coast  of  Kenai  Peninsula  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull. 
587,  pp.  237-238,  1915. 

2 Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  Chromite  deposits  in  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Press  Bull.  361, 
p.  1,  April,  1918. 

8 Overbeck,  R.  M.,  Nickel  in  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Press  Bull.  376,  p.  2,  August, 
1918. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


23 


minerals.  The  drift  for  about  30  feet  from  the  shaft  is  also  in  barren  horn- 
blende gabbro,  but  the  last  30  feet  of  the  drift  is  in  massive  ore.  At  the  face 
of  the  drift  there  are  some  masses  of  barren  rock,  but  the  drill  holes  in  the 
face  are  apparently  in  sulphides.  There  has  been  some  faulting  at  this  level, 
but  its  extent  is  not  known.  The  drift  at  the  180-foot  level  could  not  be 
reached,  but  it  is  said  to  be  about  80  feet  long  and  to  reveal  ore  which  has 
apparently  been  somewhat  broken  up  by  faulting. 

The  three  outcrops  described  above  apparently  have  no  surface  connection 
and  may  have  no  connection  underground.  They  may  possibly  be  the  exposures 
of  a single  continuous  ore  body,  but  they  are  more  likely  to  be  outcrops  of 
separate  ore  bodies  that  lie  in  a mineralized  zone  along  the  intrusive  contact. 
This  zone  probably  contains  other  ore  bodies  that  do  not  show  at  the  surface. 

Neither  the  outcrops  nor  the  underground  workings  are  of  sufficient  extent 
to  permit  any  reliable  estimate  of  the  amount  of  ore  that  may  be  present  at 
this  locality.  Ore  bodies  of  this  kind  are  generally  very  irregular.  The  amount 
of  ore  shown  in  the  present  workings  therefore  does  not  justify  large  invest- 
ments in  facilities  for  mining,  ore  treatment,  or  shipping.  The  amount  of  ore 
in  sight  and  the  geologic  conditions  at  the  locality  do,  however,  encourage  the 
hope  that  workable  ore  bodies  will  be  developed,  and  justify  the  expenditure 
of  a mederate  amount  of  money  in  blocking  out  the  known  ore  body  and  in  the 
search  for  other  ore  bodies.  This  search  should  include  the  thorough  pros- 
pecting of  the  entire  area  along  the  contact  of  the  intrusive  rock  with  the 
schist.  It  is  believed  that  diamond  drilling  near  the  known  outcrops,  and 
at  the  localities  where  disseminated  ore  is  seen,  may  reveal  additional  ore 
bodies  that  do  not  reach  the  surface. 

The  Copper  River  nickel  locality  is  situated  near  the  headwaters  of  Canyon 
Creek  about  13  miles  east  of  Copper  River  opposite  Mile  121  on  the  Copper 
River  & Northwestern  Railroad  at  an  altitude  of  more  than  4,000  feet.  Mining 
claims  have  been  located  on  the  outcrops  of  basic  dikes  which  cut  the  schists, 
but  only  a little  underground  work  has  been  done.  Pyrrhotite  and  chalcopyrite 
are  localized  at  a few  places,  but  there  is  no  evidence  of  extensive  mineraliza- 
tion. The  amount  of  ore  can  not  be  estimated  on  account  of  the  small  amount 
of  underground  work  and  the  fact  that  at  one  locality,  at  least,  the  ore  body 
has  been  faulted.  A selected  specimen  of  ore  contains  7.23  per  cent  nickel  and 
a trace  of  cobalt,  but  most  of  the  known  ore  is  believed  to  be  of  much  lower 
grade. 

A nickel  deposit  is  said  to  have  been  discovered  on  Knight  Island,  Prince 
William  Sound.  It  is  reported  that  this  deposit  was  being  prospected  with  a 
diamond  drill  in  the  summer  of  1917,  but  the  locality  has  not  been  visited  by 
any  member  of  the  Geological  Survey  and  no  authentic  information  is  available. 

MOLYBDENUM. 

No  molybdenum  has  yet  been  produced  from  Alaska,  but  opera- 
tions preparatory  to  mining  were  undertaken  in  1917  at  a molybde- 
nite-bearing lode  near  Shakan  on  the  west  coast  of  Prince  of  Wales 
Island,  at  the  molybdenite  prospect  9 miles  north  of  Skagway,  and 
at  a molybdenite  deposit  on  Reid  Creek,  a tributary  to  Little  Susitna 
River  in  the  Willow  Creek  district.  A molybdenite  deposit  is  re- 
ported on  Ptarmigan  Creek,  a tributary  to  the  Dry  Delta  about  50 
miles  above  the  Tanana.  An  occurrence  of  molybdenite  on  Healy 
River  is  described  by  Theodore  Chapin  elsewhere  in  this  volume. 


24  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

COAL  MINING. 

The  production  of  coal  in  Alaska  in  1917  was  53,955  tons,  valued 
at  about  $265,317.  This  production  was  by  far  the  largest  in  the 
history  of  coal  mining  in  Alaska,  and  it  probably  marks  the  begin- 
ning of  coal  mining  on  a moderate  but  permanent  commercial  scale. 
The  major  part  of  the  production  was  derived  from  the  Matanuska 
coal  field,  especially  from  the  Eska  Creek  mines,  which  were  opened 
under  private  auspices  in  1916  but  were  taken  over  and  operated  by 
the  Alaskan  Engineering  Commission  in  1917.  The  Matanuska 
branch  of  the  Government  railroad  was  completed  late  in  the  fall 
of  1917,  which  rendered  the  coal  on  Chickaloon  River  available  for 
exploitation.  The  coal  on  Chickaloon  River  is  being  opened  by  the 
Alaskan  Engineering  Commission.  A large  amount  of  underground 
work  must  be  done  before  mining  can  be  attempted  on  a large  scale, 
but  small  shipments  of  coal  obtained  in  the  course  of  development  of 
the  mines  were  made  late  in  1917.  A small  mine  on  Moose  Creek  was 
operated  under  a mining  permit  throughout  the  year,  and  work  pre- 
paratory to  mining  was  undertaken  by  private  lessees  on  Moose 
Creek  and  near  Chickaloon  River.  A more  extended  account  of  min- 
ing in  the  Matanuska  field  is  given  elsewhere  in  this  volume. 

The  lignite  fields  on  Cook  Inlet  rank  next  to  the  Matanuska  coal 
fields  in  point  of  production  for  1917.  A considerable  quantity  of 
lignite  that  was  mined  near  Bluff  Point  was  shipped  to  towns  on 
Cook  Inlet  for  local  consumption.  A lignite  mine  on  Cache  Creek 
in  the  Yentna  district  was  operated  during  part  of  the  year  in  order 
to  supply  fuel  for  a gold  dredge. 

Steps  preparatory  to  opening  the  Nenana  coal  field  were  in  prog- 
ress throughout  the  year.  The  Government  railroad  was  being  ex- 
tended south  toward  this  field  from  Nenana  on  Tanana  River.  The 
more  accessible  coal  lands  in  the  Nenana  field  were  offered  for  leasing 
early  in  1918. 

There  was  apparently  no  coal  mining  in  the  Bering  River  field 
during  1917.  A railroad  under  construction  from  the  east  shore  of 
Controller  Bay  to  a patented  coal  claim  in  the  eastern  part  of  Bering 
River  field  is  reported  to  be  nearing  completion.  No  leases  had  been 
granted  in  the  Bering  River  field  up  to  the  close  of  1917,  but  two 
claims  have  been  patented,  and  it  is  said  that  one  application  for 
patent  is  still  pending. 

The  following  table  gives  the  estimated  production  of  coal  in 
Alaska  since  1888.  The  production  for  1888  to  1896  is  estimated 
from  the  best  data  available  but  is  only  approximate.  The  figures 
for  1897  to  1917  are  based  for  the  most  part  on  data  supplied  by 
operators.  Most  of  the  coal  mined  before  1916  was  lignite.  There 
was  a small  production  of  bituminous  coal  from  the  west  end  of  the 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


25 


Bering  River  field  in  1906.  The  table  does  not  include  855  tons  of 
coal  mined  in  the  Bering  River  field  in  1912  and  1,100  tons  mined  in 
the  Matanuska  field  in  1913  for  test  by  the  United  States  Navy. 


Production  of  coal  in  Alaska,  1888  to  1917. 


Year. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

1888-1S96 

Short  tons. 
6,000 

$84,000 

28,000 

14,000 

1897 

2,000 

1898 

1,000 

1,200 

1,200 

1899 

16,800 

1900 

16, 800 

1901 

1,300 

2,212 

15, 600 
19,048 
9,782 
7,225 

1902 

1903 

1,447 

1904 

1,694 

1905 

3,774 

13,250 
17, 974 

1906 

5,541 
10, 139 

1907 

53,600 

Year. 

Quantity. 

Value. 

1908 

Short  tons. 
3,107 
2,800 
1,000 
900 
355 
2,300 

$14,810 

12,300 

15,000 

9,300 

2,840 

13,800 

1909 

1910 

1911 

1912 

1913 

1914 

1915 

1,400 
13,073 
53, 955 

3,300 

52,317 

265,317 

1916 

1917 

116,397 

685,063 

The  following  table  shows  the  coal  consumption  of  Alaska,  in- 
cluding both  local  production  and  imports  since  1899.  Most  of  the 
coal  shipped  to  Alaska  was  bituminous,  but  a little  was  anthracite : 

Coal  consumed  in  Alaska,  1899-1917,  in  short  tons. 


1899. 

1900. 

1901. 

1902. 

1903. 

1904. 

1905. 

1906. 

1907. 

1908. 

1909. 

1910. 

1911. 

1912. 

1913. 

1914. 

1915. 

1916. 

1917. 


Produced 
in  Alaska, 
chiefly  sub- 
bituminous 
and  lignite. 

Imported 
from  States, 
chiefly  bi- 
tuminous 
from  Wash- 
ington. 

Total 
foreign 
coal,  chiefly 
bituminous 
from  British 
Columbia. 

Total  coal 
consumed. 

1,200 

10,000 

o 50. 120 

61,320 

1,200 

15,048 

a 56',  623 

72,871 

1,300 

24,000 

a 77,674 

102,974 

2,212 

40,000 

a 68, 363 

110,575 

1,447 

64, 626 

a 60, 605 

126,678 

1,694 

36,689 

a 76, 815 

115,198 

3, 774 

67, 713 

a 72,567 

144,054 

5,541 

69, 493 

a 47, 590 

122, 624 

10, 139 

46, 246 

a 88, 596 

144,981 

3, 107 

23,893 

« 72, 831 

99, 831 

2,800 

33,112 

a 74,316 

110,228 

1,000 

32,138 

a 73, 904 

107,042 

900 

32,255 

« 88, 573 

121,728 

355 

27,767 

a 59, 804 

87,926 

2,300 

61,666 

« 60, 600 

124,566 

41,509 

46, 153 

87, 662 

1,400 

46,329 

29,457 

77, 186 

13,073 

44,934 

53,672 

111,679 

53, 955 

58,116 

56, 589 

168, 660 

107, 397 

775,534 

1,214,852 

2,097,783 

« By  fiscal  years  ending  June  30. 

It  is  too  early  to  forecast  the  future  of  coal  mining  in  Alaska, 
especially  in  the  Bering  River  and  Matanuska  fields.  If  future  dis- 
coveries in  the  Matanuska  field  reveal  any  considerable  extension  of 
the  known  coal  lands,  especially  the  lands  containing  high-grade 
coal,  the  areas  of  which  as  now  known  are  very  small ; if  it  be  found 
that  the  greatly  disturbed  bituminous  coals  of  the  Bering  River  and 
Matanuska  fields  can  be  mined  at  a moderate  cost ; if  the  Matanuska 
or  Bering  River  coal  proves  to  be  suitable  for  the  manufacture  of 
coke ; or  if  it  is  found  that  there  is  a supply  of  coal  suitable  for  the 


26 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Navy  in  the  Matanuska  or  Bering  River  fields  and  if  the  Navy  re- 
quires coal  rather  than  oil — then  there  will  probably  be  a rapid  ex- 
pansion of  coal  mining  in  one  or  both  of  these  fields.  The  facts  now 
known  indicate,  however,  that  there  may  be  considerable  difficulty 
in  producing  and  in  selling  any  large  amount  of  coal  at  a profit, 
and  that  mining  in  both  these  fields  will  probably  proceed  at  a mod- 
erate rate.  If  the  general  public  still  retains  the  extravagant  and 
entirely  false  impression  that  was  created  by  sensational  magazines' 
a few  years  ago  as  to  the  amount  and  value  of  Alaska  coal  it  should 
be  prepared  for  disappointment. 

The  future  of  the  Nenana  coal  field  is  more  definite.  This  field 
contains  a large  amount  of  lignite  of  fair  grade  that  can  be  mined 
at  a moderate  cost.  The  market  is  reasonably  certain.  Although 
this  coal  is  not  suitable  for  export,  it  will  furnish  a valuable  and 
much-needed  fuel  in  portions  of  interior  Alaska  that  are  now  de- 
pendent on  a scanty  and  expensive  supply  of  wood.  The  coal  of  the 
Nenana  field  will  probably  be  used  as  locomotive  fuel  on  the  Gov- 
ernment railroad,  for  power  and  thawing  at  the  mines  in  the 
Tanana  Valley,  as  domestic  fuel  in  the  Tanana  Valley,  and  as  fuel 
on  local  Tanana  River  boats  and  possibly  on  some  of  the  Yukon 
steamers.  The  coal  of  the  Nenana  field  should,  if  possible,  be  used 
on  the  greater  part  of  the  railroad,  rather  than  the  higher-grade 
Matanuska  coal,  because  the  heavy  freight  traffic  will  be  north- 
bound, leaving  southbound  empties  available  for  hauling  coal.  The 
Nenana  coal  field  is  nearer  the  summit  of  the  Alaska  Range  than 
any  known  coal  south  of  the  divide.  It  seems  reasonable  to  expect 
that  a coal-mining  industry  of  moderate  size  will  begin  in  this  field 
in  the  near  future.  The  growth  of  coal  mining  in  this  field  will  be 
dependent  on  the  growth  of  other  industries.  Gold  mining,  coal 
mining,  and  agriculture  in  the  Tanana  Valley  should  be  mutually 
interdependent,  and  each  industry,  through  the  stimulating  effect  of 
the  others,  should  expand  at  a gradually  accelerating  rate. 

The  possibility  of  the  growth  of  an  important  coal-mining  industry 
on  Cook  Inlet  should  not  be  overlooked.  There  is  a large  amount  of 
lignite  on  Cook  Inlet,  and  it  is  of  fair  quality,  being  of  about  the 
same  grade  as  the  lignite  of  the  Nenana  field.  Much  of  it  is  situated 
on  waters  that  are  navigable  throughout  the  year,  and  it  lies  in  beds 
that  are  but  slightly  folded.  Its  mining  and  shipment  should,  there- 
fore, be  relatively  cheap.  The  possibility  of  coal  mining  on  Cook 
Inlet  on  a large  scale  depends,  however,  on  the  success  of  experiments 
in  the  treatment  of  lignite  in  order  to  render  it  available  for  purposes 
for  which  the  higher-grade  coals  are  now  required.  If  lignites  can, 
at  a moderate  cost,  be  rendered  suitable  for  such  purposes  the  lignites 
of  Cook  Inlet  must  be  regarded  as  one  of  the  most  important  factors 
in  the  Alaska  coal  situation. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


27 


PETROLEUM. 

The  production  of  petroleum  from  the  only  oil  claim  patented  in 
Alaska,  in  the  Katalla  district,  was  increased  somewhat  in  1917  by 
cleaning  out  the  old  wells.  The  Katalla  refinery  was  operated  as 
usual.  Two  new  wells  were  drilled,  and  drilling  was  continued  at  a 
well  started  in  a previous  year,  but  no  new  productive  wells  were  ob- 
tained. Some  of  the  oil  claims  in  the  Katalla  field  were  surveyed 
preparatory  to  application  for  patent. 

The  consumption  of  petroleum  in  Alaska  is  indicated  approxi- 
mately by  the  imports,  which  are  shown  in  the  following  table : 


Petroleum  products  shipped  to  Alaska  -from  other  parts  of  the  United  States, 

1905-1917,  in  gallons .° 


1905. 

1906. 

1907. 
190S. 

1909. 

1910. 

1911. 

1912. 

1913. 

1914. 

1915. 

1916. 

1917. 


Oil  used  for 
fuel,  includ- 
ing crude  oil, 
gas  oil,  re- 
siduum, etc. 

Gasoline,  in- 
cluding all 
lighter  prod- 
ucts of  dis- 
tillation. 

Illuminat- 
ing oil. 

Lubricating 

oil. 

2,715,974 

713, 496 

627,391 

83,319 

2, 688, 940 

580, 978 

568, 033 

83,992 

9, 104, 300 

636, 881 

510, 145 

100, 145 

11,  S91, 375 

939, 424 

566, 598 

94, 542 

14,119,102 

746, 930 

531,  727 

85, 687 

19, 143. 091 

788, 154 

620,  972 

104, 512 

20,  878,  843 

1, 238, 865 

423, 750 

100, 141 

15, 523, 555 

2, 736, 739 

672, 176 

154, 565 

15,682,412 

1,735,658 

661, 656 

150, 918 

18,601,384 

2, 878, 723 

731, 146 

191,  876 

16,910,012 

2,413,962 

513, 075 

271, 981 

23, 555, 811 

2, 844, 801 

732, 369 

373, 046 

23,971,114 

3, 256, 870 

750, 238 

465, 693 

194,785,913 

21,511, 481 

7,909, 276 

2, 260, 417 

a Compiled  from  Monthly  Summary  of  Foreign  Commerce  of  the  United  States,  1905  to  1917,  Bureau 
of  Foreign  and  Domestic  Commerce. 


STRUCTURAL  MATERIAL,  ETC. 

One  marble  quarry  and  one  gypsum  mine  were  operated  in  south- 
eastern Alaska  in  1917.  No  barite  was  shipped.  Work  was  con- 
tinued on  two  graphite  deposits  in  Seward  Peninsula,  and  consid- 
erable graphite  was  mined  and  shipped.  A brickyard  was  operated 
at  Anchorage,  and  it  is  reported  that  one  is  being  operated  at  Seward. 
A small  limestone  quarry  and  kiln  and  a deposit  of  marl  near  Anchor- 
age were  worked  and  made  small  productions  of  lime. 


REVIEW  BY  DISTRICTS. 

The  following  review  summarizes  briefly  the  principal  develop- 
ments in  all  the  districts.  Many  of  the  districts  were  not  visited  by 
members  of  the  Geological  Survey  in  1917  and  some  operators  failed 
to  make  reports,  so  that  the  information  at  hand  about  mining  in 
some  of  the  districts  is  incomplete  and  scanty.  The  space  here  de- 
voted to  any  district  is  therefore  not  necessarily  an  indication  of  its 
relative  importance.  The  arrangement  is  geographic,  from  south  to 
north. 


28 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 
SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA. 

The  mineral  production  of  southeastern  Alaska  in  1917  was  de- 
rived from  10  gold  lode  mines,  8 copper  mines,  3 placer  mines,  1 
gypsum  mine,  and  1 marble  quarry.  The  value  of  the  mineral  pro- 
duction fell  from  $7,032,010  in  1916  to  $5,407,902  in  1917.  The  value 
of  the  different  products  is  shown  in  the  following  table : 


Mineral  production  of  southeastern  Alaska,  1917. 


Gold  lode  mines. 

Copper  mines. 

Placer  mines. 

Value  of 
products 
of  all 

mines  and 
quarries. 

Quan- 

tity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

Quantity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

Quan- 

tity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

Gold 

205, 107 
129, 691 

$4,239,914 
106,  825 

2,338 
20, 500 

Pounds. 
2, 646, 553 

$48,337 
16, 891 

722,  509 

1,790 

133 

$37,000 

109 

$4,825,251 
123, 825 

721,686 

236,317 

Silver 

Copper 

Lead,  marble,  gypsum,  etc 

5, 407,902 

The  largest  mining  operations,  as  in  previous  years,  were  at  the 
gold  mines  in  the  Juneau  district.  All  the  productive  copper  min- 
ing of  southeastern  Alaska  was  in  the  Ketchikan  district.  Placer 
mining  was  limited  to  the  Porcupine  district  and  to  small  beach 
operations  at  Yakataga  and  Lituya  Bay. 

The  principal  copper  producers  in  the  Ketchikan  district  were  the 
Kush  & Brown,  It,  Jumbo,  and  Mount  Andrew  mines.  The  Mamie 
mine  was  closed  down  in  the  spring,  and  an  increased  output  ^vas 
made  at  the  It.  The  Kich  Hill  copper  property,  on  Kasaan  Penin- 
sula, is  being  developed  and  made  a small  production.  A 60-ton 
flotation  mill  was  constructed  on  the  Salt  Chuck  mine  (formerly  the 
Goodro  mine).  A molybdenite-bearing  lode  in  the  vicinity  of  Sha- 
kan,  on  the  west  coast  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  is  being  developed. 
Marble  quarrying  at  Tokeen  was  continued  about  as  usual.  The 
Dunton  mine  was  the  only  gold  mine  in  operation.  It  is  reported 
that  a small  plant  for  treating  ore  is  under  construction  at  the  Com- 
plex mine  on  Moira  Sound. 

Development  of  the  copper  lodes  of  the  Ketchikan  district,  par- 
ticularly on  Kasaan  Peninsula,  has  led  to  the  uncovering  of  large 
bodies  of  magnetic  iron  ore  at  a number  of  places.  This  magnetite, 
which  contains  in  general  about  0.5  per  cent  of  copper,  has  hitherto 
been  regarded  only  as  a low-grade  copper  ore.  Attention  has  re- 
cently been  redirected  to  these  ores  as  a source  of  iron.  Magnetic 
separation  should  yield  a high-grade  iron  ore  and  a valuable  by- 
product of  chalcopyrite  to  pay  for  the  cost  of  separation.  Plans  for 
utilizing  these  iron  ores  are  now  being  considered. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


29 


Gold  lode  mining  continued  on  a large  scale  at  the  mines  near 
Juneau. 

As  a result  of  a cave-in  at  the  Treadwell,  700-foot,  and  Mexican 
mines,  which  occurred  on  April  21,  these  mines  are  now  flooded  with 
sea  water  and  are  not  in  operation.  The  surface  equipment  of  these 
three  mines  is  being  dismantled  and  sold.  The  Keady  Bullion  mine, 
though  connected  at  the  1,350-foot  level  with  the  Mexican  mine,  was 
saved  by  a concrete  bulkhead,  which  after  the  cave-in  was  made  per- 
manent and  greatly  strengthened.  At  the  end  of  June  the  drawing 
of  all  broken  and  caved  ore  above  the  2,000-foot  level  was  discon- 
tinued, in  order  to  render  the  mine  entirely  safe,  and  all  open  stopes 
are  now  being  filled  with  waste.  Development  of  the  mine  con- 
tinued in  the  lower  levels.  The  2,400-foot  level  is  now  completed, 
and  rapid  progress  is  being  made  in  the  2,600- foot  level.  The  pres- 
ent plans  contemplate  the  ultimate  extension  of  the  new  No.  2 shaft 
to  the  3,000-foot  level.  If  the  ore  is  of  satisfactory  grade  at  that 
depth  a prospect  drift  will  be  run  along  the  ore  body  underneath 
the  flooded  workings  of  the  other  mines.  The  production  of  gold  at 
the  Beady  Bullion  mine  was  decreased  to  one-third  the  normal 
quantity  when  work  above  the  2,000-foot  level  was  discontinued  but 
will  gradually  be  increased  as  the  lower  levels  are  opened  up. 

The  Alaska-Gastineau  (Perseverance)  mine  and  mill  operated 
throughout  the  year.  Operations  were  restricted  by  the  scarcity  of 
labor ; there  were  only  712  men  employed  in  1917  against  940  in  1916. 
The  supply  of  broken  ore  in  the  stopes  overcame  the  deficiency  caused 
by  the  shortage  of  labor,  and  the  mine  and  mill  were  operated  on  a 
somewhat  larger  scale  than  in  1916.  Development  and  prospecting 
for  ore  bodies  was  prosecuted  as  energetically  as  conditions  permitted. 
A total  of  15,472  feet  of  drifts,  crosscuts,  and  raises  and  12,754  feet 
of  diamond  drilling  was  completed.  The  principal  object  of  this 
work  was  to  find  new  and  richer  ore  bodies  in  order,  to  maintain  the 
average  glade  of  the  ore  sent  to  the  mill  and,  if  possible,  to  increase 
the  average  value.  The  mine  is  said  to  be  in  condition  to  furnish  a 
maximum  tonnage  of  ore  whenever  the  necessary  labor  is  available. 
The  milling  plant  has  shown  a capacity  of  not  less  than  10,000  tons 
a day,  and  the  transportation  system,  both  underground  and  from 
the  mine  to  the  mill,  is  in  a position  to  supply  this  tonnage. 

The  Alaska  Juneau  mine  was  operated  throughout  the  year.  The 
new  mill  at  this  mine  was  started  in  April  but  has  been  running  at 
less  than  half  its  capacity. 

Development  work  was  continued  at  the  Alaska-Ebner  mine.  The 
Jualin  mine,  at  Berners  Bay,  was  operated  during  most  of  the  year 
but  shut  down  in  October  on  account  of  the  scarcity  and  high  price 
of  supplies  and  labor.  Other  properties  in  the  Juneau  gold  belt  were 
115086°— 19 3 


30 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


also  developed  or  operated  in  a small  way,  and  prospecting  for  new 
lodes  was  continued. 

Development  work  continued  at  the  molybdenite  prospect  9 miles 
jiorth  of  Skagway. 

On  Chichagof  Island  both  the  Chichagoff  gold  mine  and  the  gyp- 
sum mine  of  the  Pacific  Coast  Gypsum  Co.  were  operated  on  about 
the  same  scale  as  last  year.  The  main  tunnel  of  the  Chichagoff  mine 
is  now  over  4,400  feet  long.  At  the  gypsum  mine  work  was  started 
on  the  new  300- foot  level.  This  mine  has  been  a steady  producer 
since  1906. 

Development  work  was  continued  on  the  group  of  copper  claims 
near  the  head  of  Pinta  Bay,  about  15  miles  northwest  of  Chichagof. 
A little  prospecting  but  no  underground  development  work  was 
done  on  the  copper-nickel  deposit  at  Nickel,  about  22  miles  north- 
west of  Chichagof. 

COPPER  RIVER  REGION. 

The  largest  mining  operations  of  the  Copper  River  region  in  1917, 
as  in  several  years  preceding,  were  at  the  Jumbo  and  Kennecott- 
Bonanza  copper  mines.  Considerable  copper  was  also  shipped  from 
the  Mother  Lode  mine  and  small  shipments  were  also  made  from 
several  other  properties.  Other  mineral  production  included  placer 
gold  mining  in  the  Nizina  and  Chistochina  districts. 

The  Jumbo  and  Kennecott-Bonanza  mines  and  the  mill  at  Kenne- 
cott  were  operated  on  a large  scale  throughout  the  year,  although 
production  was  considerably  smaller  than  in  1916.  This  reduction  in 
the  output  was  due  to  a strike  in  the  middle  of  summer  and  to  short- 
age of  labor  throughout  much  of  the  year.  The  mill  was  operated 
at  practically  its  full  capacity  throughout  the  winter,  and  this  was 
the  first  time  that  it  had  not  been  necessary  to  shut  down  during  the 
winter  on  account  of  the  shortage  of  water.  The  ammonia  leaching 
plant  continued  in  successful  operation,  and  it  is  reported  that  its 
capacity  will  be  increased. 

Automobile  roads  for  hauling  ore  from  the  Mother  Lode  and 
Nugget  creek  mines  were  constructed.  Much  development  work  was 
done  at  these  mines  and  also  at  several  other  mines  in  the  region. 

Hydraulic  placer  mining  continued  on  a large  scale  in  the  Nizina 
district,  where  2 mines  employing  4 miners  were  operated  in  the  win- 
ter of  1916-17,  and  6 mines  employing  91  miners  in  the  summer  of 
1917.  These  mines  produced  about  $120,000  in  placer  gold  and  also 
a little  placer  copper.  No  important  developments  or  discoveries  are 
reported. 

Placer  mining  on  Slate  Creek  in  the  Chistochina  district  was  con- 
tinued on  a large  scale.  The  production  of  this  district  is  estimated 
at  about  $100,000  worth  of  gold  and  15  or  20  ounces  of  platinum. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


31 


Platinum  is  said  to  occur  in  about  the  proportion  of  one  part  by 
bulk  of  platinum  to  100  parts  of  gold,  but  not  all  of  the  platinum  is 
saved. 

Some  underground  work  was  done  on  the  American  Eagle  lode 
near  Tiekel,  and  a small  production  of  gold  was  made.  It  is  said 
that  a small  mill  will  be  installed  in  1918. 

PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 

The  value  of  mineral  production  on  Prince  William  Sound  was 
$4,667,929  in  1917  compared  with  about  $3,000,000  in  1916.  This 
amount  is  the  value  of  the  product  at  seven  copper  mines  and  three 
gold  mines  which  can  be  classed  as  regular  producers  and  of  addi- 
tional small  shipments  from  eight  other  small  mines  or  prospects. 


Mineral  production  of  Prince  William  Sound,  1917. 


Ore 

(tons). 

Gold 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

Silver 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

Copper 

(pounds). 

Value. 

Copper  mines  a 

Cold  minfis 

351, 356 
5,350 

10,524 

4,509 

$217, 557 
93, 208 

132, 773 
697 

$109, 406 
575 

15, 559, 737 

$4, 247, 808 

356,706 

15,033 

310, 765 

133, 470 

109,981 

15, 559, 737 

4,247,808 

a Including  one  small  shipment  from  Cook  Inlet. 


The  productive  copper  mines  in  1917  included  the  Beatson,  Black- 
bird, Schlosser  property,  Midas,  Mackintosh  property,  and  Ellamar. 
The  Blackbird  group,  on  Latouche  Island,  began  shipping  after  lying 
dormant  for  several  years.  At  the  Beatson-Bonanza  large  operations 
were  continued,  the  capacity  of  the  milling  plant  was  increased,  and 
350  men  were  employed.  On  the  Blackbird  25  men  were  employed 
and  a new  ore  body  was  opened  up.  On  the  Schlosser  property  27 
men  were  employed  and  considerable  underground  work  was  done. 
The  Mackintosh  property  employed  13  men  stoping  an  old  lead  and 
extending  the  adit  tunnels  on  it  and  crosscutting  to  a new  lead.  The 
Ellamar  mine,  which  employed  100  men,  continued  operations 
throughout  the  year  on  about  the  usual  scale.  At  the  Midas  50  men 
were  employed  during  the  year,  underground  operations  were  con- 
tinued, the  tram  was  operated,  and  large  shipments  were  made.  On 
the  Rua  property  600  feet  of  tunnel  and  crosscuts  were  driven.  A 
large  low-grade  copper  property  was  discovered  on  Long  Bay.  Some 
diamond  drilling  on  a nickeliferous  deposit  on  Knight  Island  is 
reported. 

A detailed  statement  regarding  the  mining  on  Prince  William 
Sound  is  given  in  another  chapter  of  this  volume. 


32  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

KENAI  PENINSULA. 

The  mineral  production  of  Kenai  Peninsula  includes  about  $30,000 
of  placer  gold,  $4,600  of  lode  gold,  a small  amount  of  silver  obtained 
incidentally  to  the  mining  of  the  gold,  a considerable  amount  of 
chromite,  which  was  mined  at  Port  Chatham  on  Cook  Inlet,  and  some 
lignite  mined  at  Bluff  Point  on  Cook  Inlet.  There  was  very  little 
activity  in  lode  gold  mining  and  no  extensive  developments  are  re- 
ported. A mill  and  tram  are  being  installed  at  the  Honan  & James 
mine  in  the  Moose  Pass  district.  The  largest  placer  mining  opera- 
tions were  on  Resurrection  and  Crow  creeks.  Preliminary  steps 
were  taken  toward  the  inauguration  of  large-scale  operations  at 
Canyon  Creek.  Very  heavy  rains  in  the  fall  caused  serious  damage 
at  the  placer  mines  throughout  the  district. 

WILLOW  CREEK  DISTRICT. 

The  mineral  production  of  the  Willow  Creek  district  in  1917  in- 
cluded $195,662  worth  of  gold  and  $586  worth  of  silver,  all  derived 
from  quartz  mines.  The  Alaska  Free  Gold,  Gold  Bullion,  Gold 
Cord,  Mabel,  and  Talkeetna  (formerly  Matanuska)  mines  were  op- 
erated. The  amount  of  ore  milled  was  7,883  tons.  A promising  new 
quartz  vein  which  was  opened  at  the  Gold  Cord  mine  at  the  head  of 
Fishhook  Creek  has  already  been  traced  for  several  claim  lengths. 

YENTNA  DISTRICT. 

The  Cache  Creek  district  continues  to  be  the  principal  source  of 
placer  gold  in  the  Yentna  basin.  The  inaccessibility  of  the  placers 
on  Cache  Creek  has  made  mining  expensive,  but  a new  wagon  road, 
which  is  now  under  construction,  from  Talkeetna,  on  the  Government 
railroad,  to  Cache  Creek,  will  soon  afford  a quick  and  easy  approach 
to  the  district.  A dredge  that  burned  local  coal  was  operated  on 
Cache  Creek,  and  15  hydraulic  plants  were  working  on  Cache  and 
Peters  creeks  during  the  summer.  More  than  100  men  were  employed, 
producing  placer  gold  valued  at  $125,000  to  $150,000.  Operations  at 
the  end  of  the  season  were  hampered  by  protracted  rains  and  serious 
floods,  which  caused  considerable  damage  to  several  mining  plants. 
Late  in  the  fall  a Hudson  dry  dredge  was  installed  on  ground  along 
the  north  side  of  Kichatna  River,  at  the  mouth  of  Nakochna  River, 
to  begin  mining  in  the  spring  of  1918.  Some  prospecting  and  min- 
ing were  done  in  the  Camp  Creek  and  Lake  Creek  basins. 

Along  the  lower  Kahiltna  River  prospecting  for  platinum  was  car- 
ried on  by  one  company  at  two  localities — one  about  3 miles  below 
the  mouth  of  Peters  Creek  and  the  other  a short  distance  upstream 
from  the  mouth  of  the  river.  A hand  drill  and  two  power  drills 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


33 


were  used  in  prospecting  the  river  bars,  about  12  men  having  been 
employed  in  this  work.  The  prospecting  is  to  be  continued  next 
season.  Platinum  occurs  at  many  other  places  in  the  S'usitna  basin, 
including  Cache,  Peters,  Camp,  and  Lake  creeks,  as  well  as  on 
Kichatna  and  Chulitna  rivers,  and  placers  that  contain  platinum  in 
commercial  quantities  may  ultimately  be  found. 

An  examination  of  placer  concentrates  from  Yentna  River  by  the 
United  States  Geological  Survey  has  revealed  the  presence  of  tin  ore 
(cassiterite)  in  considerable  amount  and  possibly  in  commercial 
quantities. 

UPPER  SUSITNA  REGION. 

The  mineral  production  of  the  upper  Susitna  valley  is  still  re- 
stricted to  the  placer  gold  of  the  Valdez  Creek  district.  The  lodes 
of  the  Broad  Pass  and  Talkeetna  districts  are  being  prospected. 

In  1916  and  1917  about  20  groups  of  claims  were  staked  on  gold 
and  copper  bearing  lodes  in  the  basin  of  Iron  Creek,  a tributary  of 
Talkeetna  River  from  the  southeast,  but  practically  no  underground 
work  has  yet  been  done.  The  discovery  of  a large  dike  that  carries 
gold  is  reported  from  upper  Talkeetna  River.  Some  massive  bornite 
that  carried  visible  free  gold  and  that  was  reported  to  have  been 
found  in  the  basin  of  Kashwitna  River  was  brought  in  by  a party 
of  prospectors. 

The  prescribed  amount  of  annual  assessment  wmrk  wTas  performed 
on  about  a dozen  groups  of  lode  claims  in  the  upper  basin  of  Chulitna 
River,  which  is  often  referred  to  as  the  Broad  Pass  district.  No 
mines  in  this  district  are  yet  productive,  but  more  vigorous  exploita- 
tion of  the  gold,  copper,  and  antimony  deposits  awaits  the  better 
transportation  that  will  be  furnished  by  the  Government  railroad. 

A new  discovery  of  copper  is  said  to  have  been  made  near  the  head 
of  MacLaren  River.  The  vein  is  reported  to  be  chalcopyrite  from 
2 to  10  inches  wide  in  amygdaloidal  greenstone. 

SOUTHWESTERN  ALASKA. 

The  known  mineral  production  in  southwestern  Alaska  in  1917 
comprised  a test  shipment  of  copper  ore  from  a locality  near  Kami- 
shak  Bay  and  some  placer  gold  from  the  Kodiak  beaches,  from  a 
creek  near  Katmai  Bay,  and  from  Portage  Creek  in  the  Clark  Lake 
district. 

YUKON  BASIN. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

The  value  of  the  gold  produced  by  the  placer  mines  of  the  Alaska 
Yukon  districts  in  1917  is  estimated  to  have  been  $6,583,000,  com- 


34 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


pared  with  $7,550,000  in  1916.  About  380  placer  mines  were  oper- 
ated in  the  summer  of  1917,  giving  employment  to  about  2,550  men, 
and  about  165  placer  mines  were  operated  in  the  winter,  employing 
about  790  men.  Nine  small  lode  mines,  all  in  the  Fairbanks  district, 
were  productive  in  1917.  The  following  table  gives  the  estimated 
gold  output  of  the  principal  Yukon  placer  camps: 


Estimated  value  of  gold  produced  from  placers  of  Yukon  basin,  1917. 


Iditarod 

Fairbanks 

Tolovana 

Ruby 

Hot  Springs. 
Marshall 


$1,  500, 000 
1,  310, 000 
1, 150,  000 
885,  000 
450,  000 
425,  000 


Koyukuk- 

Circle 

All  others. 


$250,  000 
200,  000 
413,  000 


6,  583,  000 


The  Yukon  placer  mines  also  produced  about  $39,000  worth  of 
silver  in  1917.  The  above  figures  do  not  include  the  output  of  the 
lode  mines,  which  in  1917  produced  gold  and  silver  to  the  value  of 
$49,607.  There  was  also  a small  output  of  tin  from  the  Hot  Springs 
district,  and  considerable  tungsten  and  some  antimony  ore  was  mined 
in  the  Fairbanks  district.  (See  pp.  20-21.)  The  total  value  of  the 
entire  mineral  production  from  the  Alaska  Yukon  in  1917  was 
$6,747,835 ; that  in  1916  was  $7,839,757.  Since  mining  began  in  1886 
the  Alaska  Yukon  has  produced  minerals  to  the  value  of  $123,180,000, 
of  which  $121,625,000  has  been  derived  from  the  gold  placers. 

The  most  noteworthy  feature  of  the  placer  mining  of  the  year  was 
the  increased  output  of  the  Tolovana  placers.  There  was  also  an  in- 
creased production  in  the  Marshall,  Tolstoi,  and  Ruby  districts.  The 
other  districts  show  a decreased  output,  owing  chiefly  to  a general 
retrenchment  by  operators  because  of  the  high  cost  of  supplies  and 
scarcity  of  labor. 

FAIRBANKS  DISTRICT. 


The  mineral  production  of  the  Fairbanks  district  in  1917  included 
placer  gold  worth  $1,310,000,  lode  gold  worth  $47,781,  placer  silver 
worth  $6,904,  lode  silver  worth  $1,826,  and  lead,  tungsten,  and  anti- 
mony worth  $58,257.  The  total  value  of  the  mineral  output  for  1917 
was  $1,424,768.  The  aggregate  value  of  the  entire  mineral  output 
of  the  district  up  to  the  close  of  1917  is  $70,417,000.  Much  the  larger 
part  of  this  amount  represents  the  value  of  the  placer  gold,  the  pro- 
duction of  which  is  shown  by  years  in  the  subjoined  table.  In  ad- 
dition to  the  actual  production  of  the  district  about  $1,000,000  worth 
of  gold  mined  in  tributary  areas  passes  through  Fairbanks  each  year. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


35 


Placer  gold  and  silver  produced  in  the  Fairbanks  district,  1903-1911. 


1903. 

1904. 

1905. 

1906. 

1907. 

1908. 

1909. 

1910. 

1911. 

1912. 

1913. 

1914. 

1915. 

1916. 

1917. 


Gold. 

Silver. 

Quantity 
(fine  ounces). 

Value. 

Quantity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

1,935.00 

29.025.00 

290. 250.00 

435.375.00 
387,000.00 

445.050.00 

466. 818. 75 

295. 087. 50 

217. 687. 50 
200, 756. 25 

159.637.50 

120.937.50 

118. 518. 75 

87.075.00 
63,371.25 

$40,000 
600, 000 
6, 000,  000 

9.000.  000 

8.000,  000 

9. 200. 000 

9. 650. 000 

6. 100. 000 

4. 500. 000 

4. 150.000 

3.300.000 

2. 500. 000 

2. 450. 000 

1. 800. 000 
1, 310, 000 

348 
5, 225 
52,245 
78, 367 
69, 660 
79, 900 
84,027 
53, 116 
52, 245 
48, 182 
20, 274 
29,024 
28, 444 
11,058 
8,379 

$188 
2, 821 
28, 212 
42, 318 
37,616 
43, 151 
45,375 
28, 683 
27,690 
29,632 
12, 245 
16,050 
14, 421 
7,276 
6,904 

3,318,525.00 

68,600,000 

620, 503 

342, 582 

The  available  information  as  to  the  source  of  the  gold  by  creeks  is 
not  very  accurate.  An  attempt  has  been  made  in  the  following 
table,  however,  to  distribute  the  total  placer  gold  production  of  the 
Fairbanks  district  by  the  creeks  on  which  the  mines  are  located: 

Approximate  distribution  of  gold  produced  in  Fairbanks  district,  1903-1917. 


Cleary  Creek  and  tributaries $22,  860, 000 

Goldstream  Creek  and  tributaries 13,  800,  000 

Ester  Creek  and  tributaries 11, 230,  000 

Dome  Creek  and  tributaries 7,  910,  000 

Fairbanks  Creek  and  tributaries 7,  400,  000 

Vault  Creek  and  tributaries 2,  640,  000 

Little  Eldorado  Creek 2, 100,  000 

All  other  creeks 660,  000 


68,  600,  000 

No  new  discoveries  or  important  developments  in  placer  mining 
were  made  in  1917.  A large  dredge  wTill  be  installed  on  upper  F air- 
banks  Creek  to  begin  operations  in  1918. 

Gold  lode  mining  in  the  Fairbanks  district  declined  from  1913  to 
1916  but  showed  a slight  increase  in  production  in  1917.  The  cost 
of  supplies  and  fuel  has  become  so  high  that  many  operators  will 
wait  for  more  favorable  conditions  rather  than  work  at  a low  profit 
and  run  the  risk  of  actual  loss.  Eight  gold  lode  mines  were  worked 
in  a small  way,  and  five  of  these  operated  their  own  mills.  One 
silver-lead  deposit  is  being  worked  and  made  an  output.  One  anti- 
mony mine  was  in  operation  and  some  ore  was  hand-picked  from  old 
tailings  and  shipped.  Two  tungsten  mines  are  in  process  of  develop- 
ment. One  is  in  operation  and  during  the  fall  produced  500  pounds 
of  scheelite  concentrates  a day.  On  the  other  the  mill  was  in  course 
of  construction,  and  surface  and  underground  development  work  was 
in  progress. 


36 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Details  regarding  lode  mining  are  presented  by  Mr.  Chapin  in 
another  chapter  of  this  report.  The  following  table  shows  the  pro- 
duction of  gold  and  silver  from  the  Fairbanks  lode  mines  since  this 
form  of  mining  began  in  1910 : 


Lode  gold  and  silver  produced  in  the  Fairbanks  district,  1910-1917. 


Year. 

Crude  ore 
(tons). 

Gold. 

Silver. 

Quantity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

Quantity 

(fine 

ounces). 

Value. 

1910 

148 
875 
4, 708 
12,237 
6, 526 
5, 845 
1,111 
1,200 

841.19 
3, 103.02 
9, 416.54 
16,904.98 
10, 904. 75 
10,534.91 
1, 904. 81 
2, 211.38 

$17,339 
64, 145 
194, 657 
349, 457 
225, 421 
217,  776 
39, 376 
47,  731 

106 
582 
1,578 
4, 124 
2,209 
1, 796 
140 
2,217 

$57 

308 

971 

2,491 

1,222 

910 

92 

1,826 

1911 

1912 

1913 

1914 

1915 

1916 

1917 

32,650  55,921.58 

1, 155,952 

12,752 

7,877 

CHISANA  DISTRICT. 

Placer  mines  were  operated  on  Bonanza,  Big  Eldorado,  Gold  Run, 
and  Little  Eldorado  creeks  in  the  Chisana  district.  A total  of  11 
mines  employed  44  men  and  produced  gold  to  the  value  of  about 
$40,000.  This  camp  is  growing  smaller  year  by  year  in  spite  of  the 
fact  that  there  is  considerable  prospecting  on  the  neighboring  creeks 
during  winter.  Only  two  mines  were  operated  last  winter.  Pros- 
pecting is  still  going  on  in  Notch  Creek,  but  the  ground  is  deep  and 
thawed,  and  water  consequently  has  to  be  pumped.  Gold  has  been 
found  in  the  gravel,  but  bedrock  has  not  thus  far  been  reached. 

FORTYMILE  DISTRICT. 

The  mineral  production  of  the  Fortymile  district  in  1917  con- 
sisted of  placer  gold  worth  about  $80,000  that  was  derived  from  25 
mines  employing  68  miners,  which  operated  in  the  winter  of  1916-17, 
and  35  mines  employing  93  miners,  which  operated  in  the  summer  of 
1917.  In  addition  to  this  mining  a small  dredge  was  operated  at 
Franklin.  It  is  reported  that  the  benches  on  Fortymile  River  are 
proving  very  good.  Preparations  are  being  made  for  mining  the 
bench  claims  at  several  localities  additional  to  those  at  which  mining 
has  already  been  carried  on.  The  discovery  of  stibnite  is  reported 
on  the  Middle  Fork  of  Fortymile  River,  12  miles  south  of  Josephs 
village. 

EAGLE  DISTRICT. 

Twelve  placer  mines  employing  25  men  were  operated  in  the 
Eagle  district  in  1917  and  yielded  a gold  production  of  about  $13,000. 
The  largest  number  of  mines  and  miners  and  the  largest  production 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


37 


was  on  American  Creek.  Preparations  were  being  made  for  the  in- 
stallation of  a hydraulic  outfit  on  Seventymile  River  in  1918.  The 
hydraulic  plant  on  Alder  Creek  tributary  to  Seventymile  River  had 
to  close  down  early  in  the  season  for  lack  of  water.  A 6-mile  ditch 
was  being  completed  on  Long  Creek  preparatory  to  hydraulic  mining 
in  1918. 

CIRCLE  DISTRICT. 

Owing  to  unfavorable  conditions,  chiefly  lack  of  rain  during  the 
later  part  of  August  and  during  September,  the  gold  production  for 
nearly  all  creeks  in  the  Circle  district  was  greatly  curtailed.  The 
production  was  about  $200,000,  which  is  about  $100,000  less  than  in 
1916.  About  the  same  number  of  mines  were  operated  and  the  same 
number  of  men  employed  as  last  year.  The  chief  developments  for 
1917  included  the  installation  of  a hydraulic  plant  on  Independence 
Creek,  and  the  survey  of  placer  mining  ground  for  patent  on  Mam- 
moth, Mastodon,  Independence,  and  Miller  creeks.  Material  for  the 
construction  of  a hydraulic  plant  on  Deadwood  Creek  has  been 
landed  at  Circle. 

RAMPART  DISTRICT. 

The  value  of  the  gold  produced  in  the  Rampart  district  in  1917 
was  about  $33,000.  This  gold  was  obtained  from  the  operation  of  2 
mines  employing  5 men  in  the  winter  of  1916-17  and  10  mines  em- 
ploying 26  men  in  the  summer  of  1917.  The  largest  production  was 
on  Hunter  and  Little  Minook  creeks. 

TOLOVANA  DISTRICT. 

The  output  of  the  placer  mines  of  the  Tolovana  district  for  1917 
was  about  $1,150,000,  which  is  a 50  per  cent  increase  over  the  produc- 
tion for  1916.  About  50  mines  were  operated.  Considerable  pros- 
pecting has  been  reported,  but  authentic  information  as  to  the  results 
is  not  at  hand. 

HOT  SPRINGS  DISTRICT. 

The  gold  production  of  the  Hot  Springs  district  in  1917  is  esti- 
mated to  be  $450,000.  Placer  mines  employing  190  men  were  operated 
on  30  claims  situated  on  Eureka,  Sullivan,  American,  and  Boulder 
creeks.  The  tin  production  is  estimated  at  25  tons.  The  decrease  in 
the  production  of  both  gold  and  tin  is  due  in  part  to  the  cessation  of 
large  operations  on  Woodchopper  Creek  and  in  part  to  the  high  cost 
of  food  and  of  mining  supplies,  which  has  prevented  the  working  of 
any  except  high-grade  ground.  Although  the  tin  output  was  small, 
there  appears  to  be  a considerable  amount  of  stream  tin  in  the  old 
tailings  and  in  the  unworked  ground.  Prospecting  in  1917  showed 
that  both  gold  and  stream  tin  occur  in  the  basin  of  Sullivan  Creek, 


38 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


considerably  below  the  area  which  has  been  mined,  and  that  large 
bodies  of  low-grade  gravels  occur  on  Boulder  Creek.  It  is  reported 
that  several  prospectors  are  at  work  in  Gold  Basin,  where  they  are 
finding  considerable  tin  but  only  little  gold. 

RUBY  DISTRICT. 

Mining  operations  in  the  Ruby  district  in  1917  were  conducted  on 
about  the  same  scale  as  in  1916,  and  placer  gold  worth  $885,000  was 
produced,  which  is  a little  more  than  the  production  of  1916.  It  is 
reported  that  19  mines,  employing  310  men,  were  at  work  in  the  sum- 
mer of  1917  and  19  mines,  employing  520  men  in  the  winter  of  1917- 
18.  The  largest  productions  were  on  Greenstone,  Poorman,  Long, 
Spruce,  and  Tamarack  creeks.  The  dredge  on  Greenstone  Creek  had 
a successful  season,  but  the  dredging  ground  has  been  worked  out  and 
the  dredge  will  be  moved.  Good  ground  was  discovered  by  winter 
prospecting  on  Ketchum  Creek,  but  the  ground  is  too  deep  for  easy 
exploitation.  Prospecting  on  Midnight  Creek  has  shown  the  presence 
of  placer  tin  at  several  places. 

INNOKO  DISTRICT. 

The  gold  production  of  the  Innoko  district  in  1917  is  estimated  at 
$125,000.  About  7 mines  employing  46  men  operated  in  the  winter  of 
1916-17  and  20  mines  employing  78  men  in  the  summer  of  1917.  The 
chief  activity  was  on  Yankee,  Gaines,  Little  Spruce,  and  Ophir  creeks. 
There  were  no  new  developments  during  the  year. 

TOLSTOI  DISTRICT. 

In  the  winter  of  1916-17  a stampede  to  Tolstoi  occurred,  and  there 
were  at  times  as  many  as  400  men  at  that  camp.  There  was  much 
prospecting  during  the  winter  and  spring,  but  not  over  50  men  were 
there  in  July.  About  $50,000  was  taken  out  during  the  winter  and 
summer  in  the  Tolstoi  district,  the  result  of  the  operations  of  about 
25  men  on  5 plants,  most  of  the  production  being  made  by  one  outfit 
on  Boob  Creek.  Boob  Creek  is  the  only  creek  from  which  there  was 
any  production  of  platinum.  It  was  not  separated  from  the  gold 
but  was  sold  with  it  to  a bank  in  Iditarod.  The  platinum  in  the  gold 
was  said  to  amount  to  about  1 per  cent,  which  would  make  approxi- 
mately 30  ounces  of  platinum  produced. 

IDITAROD  DISTRICT. 

The  placer  gold  production  of  the  Iditarod  district  in  1917  was 
about  $1,500,000,  about  $450,000  less  than  the  production  of  1916. 
The  decrease  was  due  largely  to  continued  breakdowns  of  the  Otter 
Creek  dredge.  Detailed  information  concerning  mining  in  this  dis- 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


39 


trict  is  not  at  hand,  but  it  is  believed  that  in  addition  to  the  3 dredges 
there  were  about  15  mines  employing  nearly  400  men  at  work  in  the 
summer  of  1917  and  2 mines  employing  about  10  men  in  the  winter 
of  1916-17. 

KOYUKUK  DISTRICT. 

Very  little  authentic  information  has  been  received  concerning 
mining  in  the  Koyukuk  district  except  as  a small  proportion  of  the 
operators  have  supplied  data  on  the  output  of  their  own  properties. 
It  is  estimated  that  the  total  value  of  the  gold  produced  in  the  Koyu- 
kuk district  was  about  $250,000,  which  is  considerably  less  than 
the  production  for  1916.  In  the  Indian  Kiver  district  8 men  were 
at  work  in  the  summer  of  1917  on  Indian  Creek,  Felix  Fork,  and 
Black  Creek,  and  they  produced  about  $4,000  in  placer  gold. 

MARSHALL  DISTRICT. 

The  production  at  Marshall  was  about  $425,000,  as  compared  with 
$270,000  in  1916.  Most  of  this  gold  was  produced  by  5 mines  on 
Willow  Creek,  employing  about  200  men,  but  some  smaller  plants 
were  at  work  on  Willow,  Disappointment,  and  Elephant  creeks.  A 
small  amount  of  platinum  occurs  with  the  gold  on  some  of  the  creeks 
at  Marshall,  but  none  has  yet  been  saved. 

SMALLER  YUKON  DISTRICTS. 

About  4 placer  mines  employing  9 men  are  known  to  have  been 
operated  in  the  Chandalar  district.  It  is  estimated  that  the  total 
production  of  the  district  was  about  $15,000.  No  information  con- 
cerning lode  mining  has  been  received. 

The  Richardson  district,  in  the  Tanana  region,  apparently  pro- 
duced about  $25,000,  which  is  considerably  smaller  than  in  1916.  The 
discovery  of  a promising  gold  lode  on  Democrat  Creek  has  been 
reported.  No  production  has  been  reported  from  the  Goodpaster 
region,  though  it  is  known  that  considerable  prospecting  was  done. 

There  were  no  large  mining  operations  in  either  the  Bonnifield 
or  the  Kantishna  district  during  1917.  The  value  of  the  output  of 
the  Bonnifield  district  is  estimated  at  $12,000  and  of  the  Kantishna 
district  at  $15,000,  both  of  which  are  somewhat  less  than  in  1916. 
There  was  also  some  lode  development  in  both  districts 

There  was  no  gold  production  in  the  Gold  Mountain  district,  but 
considerable  dead  work  is  said  to  have  been  done  preparatory  to 
mining  next  year.  Open  cuts  were  made  at  Lancaster  Creek,  Ameri- 
can Gulch,  and  Grant  Creek,  and  a hydraulic  plant  was  installed  on 
Mason  Creek.  The  ground  is  said  to  average  12  to  20  feet  deep.  The 
benches  consist  of  wash  gravel  and  are  not  frozen.  Very  little  pros- 
pecting has  been  done  on  them. 


40  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

A strike  is  said  to  have  been  made  on  Anvik  River  by  two  men. 
Platinum  is  reported  in  association  with  the  gold. 

KUSKOKWIM  REGION. 

The  gold  production  of  the  Kuskokwim  region  in  1917,  according 
to  the  best  information  at  hand,  was  about  $135,000.  The  largest 
production  was  on  Candle  and  Moore  creeks.  The  dredge  that  was 
shipped  in  last  year  will  be  placed  on  the  upper  end  of  Candle  Creek 
to  work  downstream.  It  is  reported  that  a new  strike  was  made  on 
the  left  limit  of  Nixon  Fork,  between  Nixon  Fork  and  the  North 
Fork  of  the  Kuskokwim,  a little  below  the  mouth  of  South  Fork. 

Another  new  discovery  of  placer  gold  was  said  to  have  been  made 
on  'VVahmus  or  Watermouse  Creek,  in  the  Goodnews  Bay  district, 
where  it  is  said  that  4 men  took  out  between  $12,000  and  $20,000  in  3 
weeks.  The  gravels  are  said  to  be  about  4 feet  thick  and  to  yield  from 
$2  to  $4  to  the  square  foot.  It  is  also  reported  that  prospecting  on 
Holitna  River  is  yielding  encouraging  results.  The  Kuskokwim  re- 
gion is  still  without  adequate  means  of  transportation,  so  both  pros- 
pecting and  mining  are  done  under  great  difficulties. 

SEWARD  PENINSULA. 

The  mines  of  Seward  Peninsula  produced  gold  to  the  value  of 
about  $2,600,000  in  1917  as  against  $2,950,000  in  1916.  The  value 
of  tin,  tungsten,  silver,  and  graphite  produced  in  1917  was  about 
$147,600;  in  1916  it  was  $170,000.  The  value  of  the  total  gold  pro- 
duction since  mining  began  in  1897  is  about  $76,892,000.  Nearly  all 
this  gold  was  taken  from  placers;  up  to  the  present  time  little  has 
been  produced  from  lodes.  Silver,  tin,  and  other  substances  have 
been  produced  to  the  value  of  about  $1,027,600.  This  amount  makes 
the  value  of  the  total  mineral  output  of  Seward  Peninsula  to  the 
end  of  1917  about  $77,900,000. 

Approximately  750  men  were  employed  in  placer  mining  in  Sew- 
ard Peninsula,  exclusive  of  those  employed  on  dredges.  They  worked 
with  170  plants.  About  half  the  men  were  employed  in  the  Nome 
and  Council  precincts. 

In  1917  twenty-eight  gold  dredges  were  operated  on  the  penin- 
sula— 7 in  the  Nome  district,  5 in  the  Solomon  River  district,  10 
in  the  Council  district,  2 in  the  Port  Clarence  district,  2 in  the  F air- 
haven  district,  and  2 in  the  Ivougarok  district. 

Gold  production  on  Dime  Creek  was  greater  than  in  the  preced- 
ing year,  6 plants  making  a very  large  part  of  the  $150,000  produced 
by  deep  mining  during  late  winter  and  early  spring.  An  additional 
$20,000  will  about  cover  the  summer  production,  mostly  from  three 
open  cuts.  Platinum  occurs  with  the  gold  in  the  ratio  of  about  1 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


41 


ounce  of  platinum  to  $5,000  worth  of  gold  on  the  lower  claims  of  the 
creek  and  on  bench  claims.  The  proportion  of  platinum  is  some- 
what larger  on  claims  near  the  head  of  the  creek.  The  platinum 
production  in  1917  amounted  to  about  35  ounces.  In  all  17  plants 
worked  during  the  winter  and  summer,  employing  about  85  men. 
This  mining  was  done  on  4 claims,  but  on  other  claims  there  was 
prospecting  or  setting  up  of  plants  for  winter  work.  A number  of 
men  were  engaged  in  this  work  for  short  periods  during  the  summer, 
as  well  as  in  constructing  ditches  and  in  sluicing  winter  dumps. 

About  $10,000  was  produced  on  Sweepstakes  Creek,  between  Bear 
Creek  and  Dime  Creek,  by  4 plants  employing  11  men.  This  gold 
also  contains  a small  amount  of  platinum,  about  an  ounce  having 
been  separated  from  the  gold. 

The  gold  production  from  Bear  Creek  is  not  known.  Four  out- 
fits, employing  14  men,  worked  during  the  season.  Some  prospect- 
ing also  was  done  on  this  creek.  A few  pennyweights  of  platinum 
were  produced. 

Exclusive  of  dredge  production,  the  gold  produced  from  the  Port 
Clarence  precinct  is  estimated  at  $27,000.  That  from  the  Kougarok 
precinct,  likewise  exclusive  of  dredge  production,  is  estimated  at 
$55,000. 

Lode  mining  developments  for  the  year  consisted  for  the  most 
part  of  little  more  than  the  necessary  assessment  work.  The  high 
prices  of  lead  and  silver  gave  an  impetus  to  the  search  for  those 
metals  in  the  vicinity  of  Lost  River  and  on  the  Kugruk,  consider- 
able work  having  been  done  on  some  properties  in  both  localities.  A 
mill  was  set  up  on  a gold  lode  property  near  Bluff. 

During  the  summer  two  tin  dredges  were  in  operation  in  the  York 
region — one  on  Buck  Creek,  the  other  on  Grouse  Creek  below  the 
mouth  of  Buck.  In  addition  to  the  tin  won  by  the  dredges,  a small 
amount  of  placer  tin  was  sluiced  by  two  men  working  on  Iron  Creek, 
which  flows  into  Sutter  Creek,  a tributary  of  Buck  Creek.  One  of 
the  dredges  was  prospecting  for  future  dredging  ground,  as  the  next 
season  will  finish  up  their  present  ground.  Unusually  heavy  rains 
during  the  last  week  in  August  delayed  the  work  of  both  dredges. 

I About  25  men  were  engaged  in  the  placer  mining  of  tin. 

Some  development  work  was  done  on  tin  lode  claims  at  the  head 
of  Buck  Creek,  Tin  City,  Lost  River,  and  Ear  Mountain.  No  ore 
was  milled  or  shipped  from  any  of  these  properties. 

Most  of  the  tungsten  ore  (scheelite)  produced  in  1917,  as  in  1916, 

Icame  from  Sophie  Gulch.  A few  pounds  was  saved  as  the  result 
of  smaller  placer  operations  on  one  of  the  small  tributaries  of  Snake 
River,  below  Glacier  Creek,  and  a small  production  was  made  on 
Sunset  Creek,  in  the  Port  Clarence  district. 


42 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Work  was  done  on  two  graphite  properties  during  the  summer  of 
1917.  On  one  of  these  properties  it  consisted  only  of  assessment 
work.  On  the  other  property  about  4 miles  of  road  were  constructed 
from  the  property  to  Graphite  Bay,  an  arm  of  Imuruk  Basin.  Some 
graphite  was  mined  and  was  hauled  to  Graphite  Bay  by  a gasoline 
tractor. 

KOBUK  RIVER. 

During  the  year  about  20  men  were  mining  on  Kobuk  Biver,  but 
they  took  out  grubstakes  only.  The  production  of  the  district  was 
probably  about  $25,000.  The  ground  is  worked  by  open  cut  in  sum- 
mer, the  deeper  spots  being  worked  in  winter.  Most  of  the  mining 
is  done  on  Klery  Creek.  One  outfit  was  prospecting  on  Ambler 
Biver  and  another  on  the  Noatak.  It  is  reported  that  a strike  was 
made  at  Walker  Lake  during  the  summer  and  that  4 or  5 men  were 
rocking  out  $10  to  $15  a day.  About  9 mines  employing  16  men 
were  operated  on  Lynx,  Biley,  and  Dahl  creeks  and  Shungnak 
Biver  making  an  estimated  production  of  about  $5,000. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN 

ALASKA.1 


By  George  H.  Canfield. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  streams  of  Alaska  have  been  important  factors  in  its  industrial 
growth.  The  success  of  placer  mining  in  northern  and  central 
Alaska  has  depended  primarily  on  the  water  available  for  hydraulick- 
ing  and  dredging,  and  in  southeastern  Alaska  water  power  has  long 
been  used  by  mines,  canneries,  sawmills,  and  other  industries,  although 
until  recently  most  of  the  plants  have  been  small. 

Since  1906  the  United  States  Geological  Survey  has  made  system- 
atic studies  of  the  water  resources  of  Alaska.  Investigations  with 
special  reference  to  placer  mining  have  been  made  in  Seward  Pen- 
insula 2 and  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,3  and  reconnaissance  surveys 
for  water  power  have  been  made  about  Prince  William  Sound,  Cop- 
per River,  Kenai  Peninsula,  and  in  other  parts  of  southeastern 
Alaska. 

In  the  summer  of  1914  Leonard  Lundgren,  district  engineer  of  the 
Forest  Service,  made  a reconnaissance  of  water-power  sites  to  deter- 
mine the  possibility  of  establishing  the  pulp  industry  in  the  Tongass 
National  Forest,  which  covers  a large  part  of  southeastern  Alaska. 
In  connection  with  this  reconnaissance  a census  of  water  powers  was 
taken  (see  following  table),  which  has  been  revised  by  Mr.  Lundgren 
to  January  1,  1917,  and  is  here  published  by  courtesy  of  the  Forester. 

Developed  water  powers  in  southeastern  Alaska  Jan.  1,  1917,  in  horsepower. 

[Prepared  by  Leonard  Lundgren,  district  engineer,  U.  S.  Forest  Service.] 


Ketchikan  region: 

Citizens  Light,  Power  & Water  Co 2,  000 

New  England  Fish  Co 2,  200 

Miscellaneous  plants 1,  000 

5,200 

Wrangell  region 0 


1 In  cooperation  with  the  United  States  Forest  Service. 

2Henshaw,  F.  F.,  and  Parker,  G.  L.,  Surface  water  supply  of  Seward,  Peninsula,  with  a sketch  of  the 
geography  and  geology  by  P.  S.  Smith  and  a description  of  methods  of  placer  mining  by  A.  H.  Brooks: 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  314, 1913. 

3 Ellsworth,  C.  E.,  and  Davenport,  R.  W.,  Surface  water  supply  of  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,  Alaska: 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  342,  1915;  A water-power  reconnaissance  in  south-central  Alaska, 
with  a section  on  southeastern  Alaska  by  J.  C.  Hoyt:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  372,  1915. 

43 


44 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Sitka  region: 

Sitka  Wharf  & Power  Co 350 

Chichagoff  Mining  Co 750  • 

Miscellaneous  plants 150 


Juneau  region : 

Alaska-Treadwell  Mining  Co. : 

Douglas  Island  plant 4,  000 

Sheep  Creek  plant 4, 100 

Nugget  Creek  plant 5,700 


Alaska-Gastineau  Mining  Co. : 

Salmon  Creek  plant,  No.  1 5,  000 

Salmon  Creek  plant,  No.  2 5,  000 

Annex  Creek  plant 5,  000 

— —15,  000 

Alaska  Electric  Light  & Power  Co 1,  000 

Miscellaneous  plants 1,  000 

30,  800 

Skagway  region 100 


37,  350 

During  the  last  few  years  some  large  water-power  plants  have  been 
installed  near  Juneau  to  supply  power  for  mining,  and  attention  has 
been  called  to  the  feasibility  of  improving  other  power  sites  in  that 
region  and  elsewhere  in  southeastern  Alaska,  to  meet  the  increasing 
demand  for  power  to  be  used  in  mining,  lumbering,  and  fisheries,  and 
the  possible  future  demand  for  its  use  in  the  manufacture  of  wood 
pulp  and  electrochemical  products.  The  streams  on  which  it  is  pos- 
sible to  develop  power  and  the  bays  or  other  water  bodies  into  which 
these  streams  discharge  are  listed  in  the  following  table  and  shown 
on  the  map  (PI.  I) : 

Streams  affording  power  sites  in  southeastern  Alaska,  with  position  or  water  bodies  into 

which  they  flow. 

Mainland. 

Porcupine  River,  near  Porcupine.1 

Endicott  River,  west  coast  of  Lynn  Canal. 

Sherman  Creek.2 

Cowee  and  Davies  creeks,  Berners  Bay. 

Lemon  Creek,  near  Juneau.3 

Gold  Creek,  at  Juneau.4 

Sheep  Creek,  near  Juneau.4 

Carlson  Creek,  Taku  Inlet.4 

Turner  Lake  outlet,  Taku  Inlet.5 

Speel  River,  Speel  River  project,  Port  Snettisham.4 

Grindstone  Creek,  north  shore  of  Stephens  Passage.4 

Rhein  Creek,  north  shore  of  Stephens  Passage. 

i Gaging  station  maintained  in  1909  by  Porcupine  Gold  Mining  Co. 

a Gaging  station  maintained  for  short  period  by  mining  company  of  Juneau. 

s Gaging  station  maintained  by  Kensington  Mining  Co.,  Aug.  17,  1914,  to  Dec.  31, 1916.  See  U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  662,  p.  102,  1918. 

4 See  list  of  gaging  stations,  p.  46. 

6 Gaging  station  maintained  in  1908  and  1909  by  Alaska-Treadwell  Gold  Mining  Co. 


o t fHI 
l flf 


, GEOLOGICAL  SURVEY 


Cape  Cross^ 


Precipitation  station 
MAP  OP  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA  SHOWING  LOCATION  olp  GAGING  STATIONS. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  45 

Long  Lake  outlet,  Speel  River  project,  Port  Snettisham.1 
Crater  Lake  outlet,  Speel  River  project,  Port  Snettisham.1 
Tease  Lake  outlet,  Speel  River  project,  Port  Snettisham. 

Sweetheart  Falls  Creek,  south  arm  of  Port  Snettisham.1 
Port  Houghton,  Stephens  Passage. 

Farragut  Bay,  Frederick  Sound. 

Cascade  Creek,  Thomas  Bay.1 
Mill  Creek,  near  Wrangell.1 

Bradfield  Canal,  upper  end  of  Cleveland  Peninsula. 

Smugglers  Cove,  southeast  shore  of  Cleveland  Peninsula. 

Helm  Bay,  southeast  shore  of  Cleveland  Peninsula. 

Shelockum  Lake  outlet,  Bailey  Bay.1 
Chickamin  River,  east  shore  of  Behm  Canal. 

Rudyerd  Bay,  east  shore  of  Behm  Canal. 

Baranof  Island. 

Port  Conclusion,  southeast  coast. 

Port  Walter.2 

Patterson  Bay,  east  coast.2 
Red  Bluff  Bay,  east  coast. 

Cascade  Bay,  east  coast.2 

Baranof  Lake  outlet,  Warm  Spring  Bay,  east  coast.1 
Kasnyku  Bay,  east  coast. 

Green  Lake  outlet,  Silver  Bay,  west  coast.1 
Necker  Bay,  west  coast. 

Deep  or  Redoubt  Lake,  west  coast. 

Chichagof  Island. 

Slocum  Arm,  west  coast. 

Suloia  Bay,  Peril  Strait.2 
Khaz  Bay,  west  coast. 

Freshwater  Bay,  east  coast. 

Sitkoh  Bay,  southeast  coast. 

Basket  Bay,  southeast  coast. 

Penta  Bay,  west  coast. 

Admiralty  Island. 

Kootznahoo  Inlet,  west  coast. 

Hood  Bay,  west  coast. 

Kosciusko  Island. 

Davidson  Inlet.2 

Prince  of  Wales  Island. 

Karta  River,  Karta  Bay.1 

Whale  Passage,  behind  Thorne  Island,  northeast  coast. 

Myrtle  Lake  outlet,  near  Niblack  post  office.1 
Reynolds  Creek,  near  Coppermount. 

Revillagigedo  Island. 

Orchard  Lake  outlet,  at  Shrimp  Bay.1 
Beaver  Falls,  George  Inlet.1 
White  River,  George  Inlet. 

Swan  Lake  outlet,  east  shore  near  head  of  Carroll  Inlet.1 
Fish  Creek,  Thome  Arm.1 
Gokatchin  Creek,  Thorne  Arm. 

Ketchikan  Creek,  at  Ketchikan.1 

Annette  Island. 

Tamgas  Harbor. 

2 See  list  of  miscellaneous  measurements  at  end  of  report. 


1 See  list  of  gaging  stations,  p.  46. 
115086°— 19 4 


46 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Lack  of  definite  information  in  regard  to  the  quantity  of  water 
available  and  other  physical  factors  that  determine  the  feasibility  of  a 
power  site  has  been  one  of  the  principal  impediments  to  development. 
For  this  reason  a systematic  investigation,  designed  to  determine 
the  location  and  the  feasibility  of  water-power  sites  in  southeastern 
Alaska,  was  begun  by  the  Geological  Survey,  in  cooperation  with  j 
the  Forest  Service,  in  the  spring  of  1915. 

The  practicability  of  a water-power  site  depends  on  the  quantity 
of  water  available,  the  fall,  and  the  possibility  of  storing  water. 
Information  in  regard  to  fall  and  storage  can  be  obtained  by  surveys 
at  any  time,  but  the  volume  and  distribution  of  flow  can  be  deter- 
mined only  by  observations  extending  over  several  years,  as  future 
flow  must  be  predicted  from  that  of  the  past.  In  beginning  the 
investigations,  therefore,  the  collection  of  stream-flow  data  was  given 
precedence  and  constituted  the  principal  work.  Some  general 
information,  however,  has  been  obtained,  and  in  the  fall  of  1915  a 
few  rainfall  stations  were  established  at  higher  elevations  to  supple- 
ment observations  at  mean  sea  level  by  the  United  States  Weather 
Bureau.  As  a result  of  the  investigations  records  of  flow  are  now 
available  for  20  gaging  stations,  as  shown  by  the  following  list  and 
indicated  by  corresponding  numbers  on  Plate  I.  The  date  of 
establishment  is  indicated  in  parentheses. 

1.  Myrtle  Lake  outlet  at  Niblack,  Prince  of  Wales  Island  (July  30,  1917). 

2.  Ketchikan  Creek  at  Ketchikan  (established  November  1,  1909;  discontinued  : 
June  30,  1912;  reestablished  July  1,  1915). 

3.  Beaver  Falls  Creek  at  George  Inlet,  Revillagigedo  Island  (Aug.  3,  1917). 

4.  Fish  Creek  near  Sea  Level,  Revillagigedo  Island  (May  19,  1915). 

5.  Swan  Lake  outlet  at  Carroll  Inlet,  Revillagigedo  Island  (Aug.  24,  1916). 

6.  Orchard  Lake  outlet  at  Shrimp  Bay,  Revillagigedo  Island  (May  28,  1915). 

7.  Shelockum  Lake  outlet  at  Bailey  Bay  (June  4,  1915). 

8.  Karta  River  at  Karta  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales  Island  (July  16,  1915). 

9.  Mill  Creek  on  mainland,  near  Wrangell  (June  17,  1915). 

10.  Cascade  Creek  at  Thomas  Bay,  near  Petersburg  (Oct.  27,  1917). 

11.  Green  Lake  outlet  at  Silver  Bay,  near  Sitka  (August  22,  1915). 

12.  Baranof  Lake  outlet  at  Baranof,  Baranof  Island  (June  28,  1915). 

13.  Sweetheart  Falls  Creek  near  Snettisham  (July  31,  1915). 

14.  Crater  Lake  outlet  at  Speel  River,  Port  Snettisham  (Jan.  23,  1913). 

15.  Long  River  below  Second  Lake,  at  Port  Snettisham  (Nov.  11,  1915). 

16.  Speel  River  at  Port  Snettisham  (July  15,  1916). 

17.  Grindstone  Creek  at  Stephens  Passage  (May  6,  1916). 

18.  Carlson  Creek  at  Sunny  Cove,  Taku  Inlet  (July  18,  1916). 

19.  Sheep  Creek  near  Thane  (July  26,  1916). 

20.  Gold  Creek  at  Juneau  (July  20,  1916). 

In  addition  to  the  stations  in  this  list,  records  for  Long  Lake 
outlet  (Jan.  23,  1913,  to  Nov.  10,  1915)  and  for  Sherman  Creek  at 
Kensington  mine,  Lynn  Canal  (Aug.  17,  1914,  to  Dec.  31,  1916)  are 
contained  in  the  report  for  1916. 1 


i U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  662,  pp.  136-139,  150-153, 1918. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN'  SOUTHEASTERN-  ALASKA.  47 

The  available  power  sites  in  each  area  were  carefully  considered, 
and  gaging  stations  were  established  at  those  which  apparently 
afforded  the  greatest  opportunities  for  development. 

The  records  have  been  collected  in  accordance  with  the  standard 
methods  used  elsewhere  in  the  United  States  by  the  Geological  Survey. 
Owing  to  the  inaccessibility  of  the  stations,  water-stage  recorders  were 
used  at  all  the  stations  except  that  on  Ketchikan  Creek,  and  cables 
have  been  installed  from  which  discharge  measurements  are  made. 
Special  arrangements  were  made  for  observations  through  the  winter 
to  obtain  a record  of  the  low-water  flow  which  occurs  at  that  season. 

The  data  collected  at  the  gaging  stations  are  presented  in  the  fol- 
lowing pages  and  include  a general  description  of  each  station  and 
tables  showing  the  results  of  discharge  measurements  and  the  com- 
puted daily  discharge. 

Much  of  the  work  has  been  made  possible  by  the  use  of  the  Forest 
Service  launches,  on  which  transportation  has  been  furnished  to  the 
engineers  and  others  engaged  in  installing  and  maintaining  the 
stations.  The  local  knowledge  of  the  Forest  Service  employees  has 
also  been  of  great  assistance  in  carrying  on  the  work,  and  special 
acknowledgment  is  due  to  W.  G.  Weigle,  forest  supervisor  at  Ketch- 
ikan, who  has  represented  the  Forest  Service  in  the  cooperation; 
to  Leonard  Lundgren,  district  engineer;  and  to  George  L.  Drake, 
J.  W.  Wyckoff,  C.  T.  Gardner,  George  H.  Peterson,  James  Allen, 
W.  H.  Babbitt,  Lyle  Blodgett,  and  Milo  Caughrean,  who  have 
assisted  in  various  ways. 

During  the  winter  of  1916-17  the  field  work  was  carried  on  by 
C.  O.  Brown,  assistant  engineer,  United  States  Geological  Survey. 

The  following  individuals  and  organizations  assisted  in  maintaining 
gaging  stations  as  indicated: 

T.  J.  Jones,  Seattle,  Wash.,  furnished  a Stevens  water-stage 
recorder,  materials,  and  labor  for  installing  a gage  on  Swan  Lake 
outlet. 

The  Alaska  Gastineau  Mining  Co.  installed  gages  and  furnished 
gage-height  records  for  Gold  Creek  near  Juneau,  Sheep  Creek  near 
Thane,  and  Carlson  Creek  at  Sunny  Cove. 

The  Alaska  Taku  Mining  Co.  furnished  a Lietz  gage,  labor,  mate- 
rial, and  transportation  for  the  installation  of  a gage  on  Grindstone 
Creek  at  Taku  Inlet. 

The  Speel  Kiver  Project  (Inc.),  of  Juneau,  installed  and  main- 
tained gages  and  furnished  gage  readings  for  Crater  Lake  outlet 
at  Speel  Kiver,  Long  Lake  outlet  at  Port  Snettisham,  Long  River 
below  Second  Lake,  and  Speel  River  at  Port  Snettisham. 

The  Kensington  Mining  Co.,  of  Comet,  furnished  gage  readings  for 
Sherman  Creek  at  Kensington  mine. 

The  Citizens  Light,  Power  & Water  Co.,  of  Ketchikan,  furnished 
gage  readings  for  Ketchikan  Creek  at  Ketchikan. 


48 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  G.  M.  Wakefield  Mineral  Lands  Co.  furnished  gage,  materials, 
and  part  of  labor  for  the  installation  of  a gaging  station  on  Myrtle 
Lake  outlet  at  Niblack;  maintained  gage,  and  furnished  gage  record. 

Mr.  C.  W.  Bloodgood  furnished  gage  and  part  of  materials  for 
installation  of  gaging  station  on  Cascade  Creek  at  Thomas  Bay. 

GAGING- STATION  RECORDS. 

MYRTLE  CREEK  AT  NIBLACK,  PRINCE  OF  WALES  ISLAND. 

Location. — Halfway  between  beach  and  Myrtle  Lake  outlet  which  is  one-third  mile 
from  tidewater,  1 mile  from  Niblack  in  north  arm  of  Moira  Sound,  Prince  of  Wales 
Island,  and  35  miles  by  water  from  Ketchikan. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — July  30  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. -^Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  right  bank;  reached  by  a trail 
which  leaves  beach  near  mouth  of  creek. 

Discharge  measurements.' — At  medium  and  high  stages  from  a cable  across  creek 
at  outlet  of  lake;  at  low  stages  made  by  wading. 

Channel  and  control. — The  gage  is  in  a pool  10  feet  upstream  from  a contracted 
portion  of  channel  at  a rocky  riffle  which  forms  a well-defined  and  permanent 
control.  At  the  cable  section  the  bed  is  smooth,  the  water  deep,  and  the  current 
uniform  and  sluggish. 

Extremes  op  stage. — Maximum  stage  during  the  period  4.40  feet  at  5 p.  m.  No- 
vember 18;  minimum  stage,  1.27  feet  at  7 a.  m.  August  10. 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  not  affected  by  ice.  Data  inadequate  for  determina- 
tion of  discharge. 

Myrtle  Lake,  the  outlet  of  which  is  800  feet  from  tidewater,  is  at  an  elevation  of  95 
feet  above  sea  level  and  is  122  acres  in  area.  Niblack  Lake,  the  outlet  of  which  is 
5,700  feet  from  tidewater,  is  at  an  elevation  of  450  feet  above  sea  level  and  is  383 
acres  in  area.  Mary  Lake,  which  is  unsurveyed,  is  about  6,000  feet  from  tidewater 
and  650  feet  above  sea  level. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Myrtle  Creek  at  Niblack  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  b;  — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis-  . 
charge. 

July  30  . . 

G.  U.  Canfield.. 

Feet. 

1.39 

Sec.-ft. 

42 

Nov.  25 . . 

do 

2. 81 

104 

Daily  gage  height , in  feet,  of  Myrtle  Creek  at  Niblack  for  1917. 


Day. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1.46 

1.87 

2. 17 

3.8 

2.15 

1.49 

1.78 

2.40 

3.6 

1.95 

1.41 

1.72 

2.49 

3.25 

1.90 

1.37 

1.66 

2. 47 

3.25 

1.85 

1,35 

1.61 

2.7 

3.5 

1.82 

1.34 

1.56 

2.42 

4.05 

1.78 

1.32 

1.52 

2.28 

4. 1 

1. 75 

1.29 

1.49 

2.22 

3.75 

2.05 

1.29 

1.45 

2. 16  1 

3.4 

2.35 

i 

1.31 

1.42 

2.14 

3.5 

2. 40 

1.43 

1.42 

2.20 

3.25 

2. 30 

1.40 

1.73 

2.13  ' 

3. 15 

2.15 

1.38 

1.82 

2.15  ] 

3. 75 

2.00 

1.40 

1.87 

2.08 

4.3 

1.92 

1.67 

2. 01 

2.02 

3.95 

1.80 

Day. 

July. 

Aug. 

j Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

16 

1.82 

2. 00 

1.96 

3.55 

1.80 

17 

1.85 

1.88 

2.10 

4.05 

1.77 

18 

2. 13 

1.  90 

2. 55 

4.3 

1.73 

19 

2.6 

2.03 

2.42 

4. 1 

1.70 

20 

2. 39 

1.95 

2. 55 

3.7 

1.68 

21 

2.16 

1.95 

2.42 

3.35 

1.66 

22 

2.31 

1.98 

2.  55 

3.05 

1.64 

23 i 

2.  IS 

1.93 

2.50 

2.9 

1.62 

24 

2.06 

1.88 

2.  43 

2.9 

1.59 

25 

1.94 

1.93 

2.36 

2.85 

1.58 

26 

2.  00 

1.97 

2.  25 

2.9 

1.56 

27 

2.  27 

2. 10 

2. 16 

3.  1 

1.54 

28  

2.  43 

2.42 

2.65 

2.  85 

1. 53 

29 

2.20 

2.35 

2.7 

2.6 

2.05 

30 

1.39 

2.06 

2.23 

2.85 

2.35 

2.6 

31 

1.38 

1.  96 

3. 1 

3. 1 

Notf..— Gage  heights  Nov.  29  to  Dec.  15  and  Dec.  21-31  estimated  from  maximum  and  minimum  stages 
indicated  by  recorder  and  comparison  with  gage-height  graph  for  Karta  River. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  49 


KETCHIKAN  CREEK  AT  KETCHIKAN. 

Location. — One-fourth  mile  below  power  house  of  Citizens  Light,  Power  & Water 
Co.,  one- third  mile  northeast  of  Ketchikan  post  office,  downstream  200  feet  from 
mouth  of  Schoenbar  Creek  (entering  from  right),  miles  from  mouth  of  Granite 
Basin  Creek  (entering  from  left),  and  1J  miles  from  outlet  of  Ketchikan  Lake. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — November  1, 1909,  to  June  30, 1912;  June  9, 1915,  to  December 
31,  1917. 

Gage. — Vertical  staff  fastened  to  a telephone  pole  near  board  walk  on  left  bank  at 
bend  of  creek  200  feet  downstream  from  mouth  of  Schoenbar  Creek;  read  by- 
employee  of  the  Citizens  Light,  Power  & Water  Co.  The  gage  used  since  June 
9,  1915,  consists  of  the  standard  United  States  Geological  Survey  enameled  gage 
section  graduated  in  hundredths,  half-tenths,  and  tenths  from  zero  to  10  feet. 
The  original  gage,  established  November,  1909,  and  read  until  June  30,  1912, 
is  at  same  location  and  same  datum.  It  is  a staff  with  graduations  painted  every 
tenth. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages  from  footbridge  about  500 
feet  upstream  from  gage ; measuring  section  poor,  as  the  bridge  makes  an  angle  of 
20°  with  the  current,  and  at  high  stages  the  flow  is  broken  by  large  stumps  near 
left  bank  and  at  middle  of  bridge.  Low-stage  measurements  made  by  wading 
50  feet  below  bridge  or  at  another  section  100  feet  above  gage.  The  flow  of 
Schoenbar  Creek  has  been  added  to  obtain  total  flow  past  gage. 

Channel  and  control. — Gage  is  located  in  a large  deep  pool  of  still  water  at  a 
bend  in  creek.  The  bed  of  the  stream  at  the  outlet  of  this  pool  is  a solid  rock 
ledge,  but  changes  in  a gravel  bar  at  lower  right  side  of  pool  cause  occasional 
changes  in  stage-discharge  relation. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  recorded  during  year,  8.3  feet,  November 
18  (discharge  not  determined);  minimum  stage  recorded,  0.08  foot  December 
27  (discharge  not  determined). 

1909-1912  and  1915-1917:  Maximum  stage  recorded  8.3  feet  November  18, 
1917;  minimum  stage  recorded  0.28  foot  September  24,  1915  (discharge,  34 
second-feet).  A stage  of  0.08  foot  recorded  December  27,  1917,  but  rating  curve 
is  not  sufficiently  well  defined  to  determine  discharge  at  that  stage. 

Ice. — Ice  forms  along  banks  but  control  remains  open. 

Diversions. — A small  quantity  of  water  is  diverted  above  the  station  for  the  use  of 
the  town  of  Ketchikan,  the  New  England  Fish  Co.,  and  the  Standard  Oil  Co. 

Regulation. — Small  timber  dam  and  headgates  are  located  at  outlet  of  Ketchikan 
Lake.  Water  diverted  through  power  house  is  returned  to  creek  above  gage  but 
causes  very  little  diurnal  fluctuation.  During  low  water  the  flow  is  increased  by 
water  from  the  reservoir. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  changed  during  high  water  August  19.  Rating 
curve  used  January  1 to  August  18  well  defined  below  and  poorly  defined  above 
2,000  second-feet.  Gage  read  to  hundredths  once  daily.  Daily  discharge 
ascertained  by  applying  gage  height  to  rating  table.  Sufficient  discharge  measure- 
ments have  not  been  made  to  define  rating  curve  applicable  August  19  to  Decem- 
ber 31.  Records  fair. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Ketchikan  Creek  at  Ketchikan  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  24 
Aug.  24 
26 

C.  O.  Brown 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 

1.13 

1.23 

1.10 

Sec.-ft. 

151 

218 

191 

Oct.  18 
Nov.  27 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 

0.94 

2.20 

Sec.-ft. 

172 

615 

50  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Ketchikan  Creek  at  Ketchikan  for  period  Jan.  1 to 

Aug.  18, 1917. 


1 

2 

3 

4 


6 

7 

8 
9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June, 

July. 

Aug. 

118 

61 

54 

42 

125 

228 

720 

180 

69 

54 

54 

42 

93 

196 

382 

200 

71 

54 

61 

245 

90 

196 

493 

160 

66 

108 

66 

241 

74 

196 

720 

180 

64 

176 

69 

125 

76 

220 

616 

160 

74 

249 

66 

99 

160 

308 

357 

160 

142 

232 

61 

82 

160 

216 

382 

160 

262 

285 

54 

79 

523 

436 

285 

160 

87 

212 

50 

76 

285 

262 

180 

142 

262 

216 

50 

76 

220 

196 

160 

241 

267 

168 

52 

71 

216 

'200 

160 

142 

115 

125 

54 

76 

220 

204 

142 

125 

82 

523 

52 

76 

212 

204 

142 

108 

79 

450 

48 

64 

200 

204 

142 

160 

74 

740 

44 

64 

180 

204 

142 

285 

64 

377 

44 

64 

180 

196 

139 

241 

66 

180 

66 

66 

180 

204 

139 

332 

66 

118 

61 

90 

285 

553 

142 

1, 290 

85 

108 

54 

142 

220 

493 

142 

74 

69 

61 

176 

200 

332 

125 

61 

66 

54 

142 

180 

382 

125 

64 

66 

71 

139 

172 

357 

125 

102 

64 

69 

142 

160 

220 

125 

142 

64 

56 

142 

176 

220 

285 

204 

61 

54 

142 

180 

180 

155 

125 

61 

54 

142 

176 

180 

125 

122 

64 

44 

142 

180 

180 

180 

90 

54 

44 

139 

180 

160 

142 

66 

46 

142 

216 

160 

142 

64 

44 

139 

220 

180 

142 

61 

42 

220 

180 

Daily  gage  height,  in  feet,  of  Ketchikan  Creek  at  Ketchikan  for  period  Aug.  19  to  Dec. 

31,  1917. 


Day. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

Day. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

0.60 

1.00 

5.4 

0. 50 

16 

1.18 

1.00 

1.9 

0.20 

2 

.60 

1.80 

4.4 

.42 

17 

.90 

1.00 

3.5 

. 20 

3 

.50 

1.84 

1.8 

.34 

18 

1.00 

1.00 

8.3 

.20 

4 

.50 

1.40 

1.  4 

.20 

19 

6.0 

.80 

.90 

5.3 

. 18 

5 

.50 

3.30 

1.2 

.30 

20 

4.0 

.60 

1.40 

2.9 

.18 

6 

.50 

1.70 

4.0 

.40 

21 

2.0 

.60 

1.50 

2.0 

.16 

7 

.46 

1.20 

7.7 

.90 

22 

4.5 

.60 

2.5 

1.2 

.10 

8 .. 

.40 

.90 

3.  4 

2.1 

23 

1.8 

.58 

2.4 

1.2 

.10 

9 

.40 

.82 

1.8 

.90 

24 

1.3 

.58 

1.3 

1.8 

.10 

10 

.40 

.70 

2.4 

.50 

25 

1.1 

1.10 

1.2 

1.9 

.10 

11  

.50 

1.40 

1.9 

.30 

26 

1.0 

.66 

1.3 

1.6 

.10 

12 

.56 

1.20 

1.6 

.20 

27 

1.4 

1.10 

1.2 

2.5 

.08 

13 

.60 

1.00 

6.3 

.20 

28 

2.0 

1.40 

1.7 

1.4 

. 10 

14 

.80 

.90 

7.8 

.20 

29 

1.2 

1.62 

1.3 

.9 

1. 12 

15  . 

1.10 

1.00 

3.7 

.20 

30 

1.1 

1.56 

2.8 

.64 

1.30 

31 

1.06 

1.20 

Monthly  discharge  of  Ketchikan  Creek  at  Ketchikan  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-ofl 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January 

267 

61 

106 

6, 520 
9, 940 

February 

740 

54 

179 

March 

71 

42 

54.8 

3,370 
6,  780 
11,800 
14,800 
14,800 
8,  780 

April 

245 

42 

114 

May 

523 

74 

192 

553 

160 

249 

July 

720 

125 

240 

August  1-18 

1,290 

108 

246 

The  period 

76, 800 

WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  51 


BEAVER  FALLS  CREEK  AT  GEORGE  INLET,  REVILLAGIGEDO  ISLAND. 

Location. — Two  hundred  feet  above  diversion  dam  and  flume  for  shingle  mill  and 
salmon  cannery;  800  feet  from  beach  on  west  shore  of  George  Inlet;  10  miles  by 
water  from  Ketchikan. 

Drainage  area. — 5.9  square  miles  (United  States  Forest  Service  survey  made  in 
1917). 

Records  available. — August  3 to  October  10,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank,  a quarter  of  a mile 
frqm  tidewater;  reached  by  a corduroy  trail  which  leaves  beach  back  of  cannery 
buildings.  The  gage  was  washed  out  by  high  water  in  November. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages,  made  from  log-gaging 
bridge  across  stream  a quarter  of  a mile  upstream  from  gage ; at  low  stages  made  by 
wading  under  bridge. 

Channel  and  control. — The  gage  is  in  a partly  sheltered  pool  in  a narrow,  deep, 
rocky  canyon,  15  feet  upstream  from  a small  rocky  fall,  which  forms  a well-defined 
and  permanent  control. 

Diversions. — A small  quantity  of  water  is  diverted  about  200  yards  below  station 
into  a flume  for  use  of  shingle  mill  and  cannery. 

Lower  Silvis  Lake,  whose  elevation  is  790  feet  above  sea  level,  is  1J  miles  from  the 
beach,  and  its  area  is  62  acres.  The  elevation  of  upper  Silvis  Lake,  whose  outlet  is 
only  1,100  feet  from  the  upper  end  of  the  lower  lake,  is  1,100  feet  above  sea  level,  and 
its  area  is  234  acres.  Drainage  area  above  outlet  of  lower  lake  is  4.9  square  miles; 
above  outlet  of  upper  lake,  3.6  square  miles. 

Data  inadequate  for  determination  of  discharge. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Beaver  Falls  Creek  at  George  Inlet  in  1917 . 
[Made  by  G.  H.  Canfield.] 


Date. 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

July  26 

Feet. 

Sec.-ft. 

88 

83 

Oct.  13 

Feet. 

1.71 

1.32 

Sec.-ft. 

149 

98 

Aug.  3 

1.30 

Oct.  18 

Daily  gage  height , in  feet , of  Beaver  Falls  Creek  at  George  Inlet  for  1917. 


Day. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Day. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Day. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

j Oct. 

1 

0.68 

.60 

.57 

.48 

.43 

.39 

.36 

.33 

.30 

.29 

1.66 

2.80 

2.31 

3.29 

2.01 

1.28 

1.03 

.87 

1.07 

1.76 

11 

1.13 

1.08 

1.00 

1.08 

2.16 

3.05 

3.10 

4.03 

4.40 

3.54 

0.35 

.79 

1.28 

2.09 

2.42 

1.85 

1.28 

1.75 

1.22 

1.28 

21 

2.53 

3.42 

2.34 

1.93 

1.58 

1.18 

1.85 

2.50 

1.68 

3.08 

2.96 

2.24 

1.37 

! 

2 

12 

22 

3 

1.35 

1.17 

1.07 

.98 

.95 

.90 

.86 

.90 

13 

23 

4 

14 

24 

5 

15 

25 

6 

16 

26 

7 

17 

27 

2.63 

2.75 

1.80 

1.11 

.82 

8 

18 

19 

28 

9 

29 

10 

20 

30 

31 

FISH  CREEK  NEAR  SEA  LEVEL,  REVILLAGIGEDO  ISLAND. 

Location. — In  latitude  55°  24'  N.,  longitude  131°  12'  W.,  near  outlet  of  Lower  Lake 
on  Fish  Creek,  600  feet  from  tidewater  at  head  of  Thorne  Arm,  2 miles  northwest 
of  mine  at  Sea  Level,  and  25  miles  by  water  from  Ketchikan. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — May  19,  1915,  to  December  31,  1917. 


52 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  right  shore  of  Lower  Lake,  200 
feet  above  outlet. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages  made  from  cable  across 
creek,  1 mile  upstream  from  gage  and  500  feet  above  head  of  Lower  Lake;  at  low 
stages  made  by  wading  at  cable.  Only  one  small  creek  enters  Lower  Lake,  at  point 
opposite  gage,  between  the  cable  site  and  control. 

Channel  and  control. — The  lake  is  about  500  feet  wide  opposite  the  gage.  Outlet 
consists  of  two  channels,  each  about  60  feet  wide,  separated  by  an  island  40  feet 
wide.  From  the  lake  to  tidewater,  200  feet,  the  creek  falls  20  feet.  Bedrock 
exposed  at  the  outlet  of  the  lake  forms  a well-defined  and  permanent  control. 
Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  year,  5.33  feet  at  6 p.  m.  November 
1 (discharge,  computed  from  an  extension  of  rating  curve,  4,600  second -feet) ; mini- 
mum stage  0,81  foot,  March  16  (discharge,  57  second-feet). 

1915-1917 : Maximum  stage  5.33  feet  November  1,  1917  (discharge,  4,600  second- 
feet);  minimum  stage,  0.50  foot,  February  11,  1916  (discharge,  22  second-feet). 

Ice. — Lower  Lake  freezes  over,  but  as  gage  is  set  back  in  the  bank  ice  does  not  form  in 
well,  and  the  relatively  warm  water  from  the  lake  and  the  swift  current  keep  the 
control  open. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  affected  by  brush  lodged  at  control  January  1 
to  August  17;  most  of  brush  removed  April  10  and  remainder  washed  out  on 
August  17.  Rating  curve  used  January  1 to  April  10  well  defined  below  and  poorly 
defined  above  400  seconddeet;  curve  used  April  11  to  August  17  well  defined; 
curve  used  August  18  to  December  31  is  open-water  curve  used  May  19,  1915,  to 
August  23,  1916,  and  is  well  defined  below  and  extended  above  1,500  second-feet. 
Operation  of  water-stage  recorder  satisfactory  except  for  periods  indicated  by 
breaks  in  record  shown  in  the  footnote  to  daily-discharge  table.  Daily  discharge 
ascertained  by  applying  to  rating  table  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspect- 
ing gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days  of  considerable  fluctuation,  by  averaging 
results  obtained  by  applying  to  rating  table  mean  daily  gage  heights  for  regular* 
intervals  of  day.  Records  excellent,  except  for  short  periods  of  break  in  record 
and  for  period  when  control  was  obstructed  by  brush,  for  which  they  are  fair. 

There  are  three  large  lakes  in  the  upper  drainage  basin:  Big  Lake, 2 miles  from  beach 
at  elevation  275  feet,  covers  1,700  acres;  Third  Lake,  250  acres;  and  Mirror  Lake,  at 
elevation  1,000  feet,  800  acres.  Two-thirds  of  the  drainage  basin  is  covered  with  a thick 
growth  of  timber  and  brush  interspersed  with  occasional  patches  of  beaver  swamp  and 
muskeg.  Only  the  tops  of  the  highest  mountains  are  bare.  This  large  area  of  lake  sur- 
face and  vegetation,  notwithstanding  the  steep  slopes  and  shallow  soil,  affords  a little 
ground  storage  and  after  a heavy  precipitation  maintains  a good  run-off.  During  a 
dry,  hot  period  in  summer,  however,  after  the  snow  has  melted,  the  flow  becomes 
very  low  because  of  lack  of  ice  or  glaciers  in  the  drainage  basin. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Fish  Creek  near  Sea  Level  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  25 
Mar.  2 
Apr.  16 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 

al.48 

o.86 

61.16 

Sec.-ft. 

243 

65 

164 

June  23 
Oct.  12 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 
cl.  89 
dl.82 

Sec-ft. 

557 

550 

. .do. . . 

do 

G.  H.  Canfield 

a Control  obstructed  by  brush  and  logs.  c Obstruction  on  control. 

b Part  of  obstruction  on  control  removed  Apr.  10.  d Control  clear. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  53 


Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Fish  Creek  near  Sea  Level  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

137 

130 

76 

70 

394 

710 

482 

256 

254 

857 

4,240 

302 

2 

135 

119 

67 

69 

382 

616 

623 

354 

208 

686 

3,  C80 

243 

3 

127 

107 

69 

70 

370 

547 

670 

370 

168 

830 

3,940 

192 

4 

119 

96 

83 

127 

342 

495 

870 

315 

142 

766 

1,200 

161 

5 

109 

87 

83 

159 

337 

502 

978 

265 

126 

1,060 

1,300 

142 

6 

107 

93 

76 

176 

354 

766 

906 

234 

108 

1,030 

1,620 

123 

7 

156 

169 

72 

190 

382 

879 

734 

212 

96 

694 

2,500 

126 

8 

284 

278 

72 

162 

595 

1,150 

630 

188 

87 

539 

2,620 

200 

9 

408 

290 

70 

137 

897 

1,150 

528, 

170 

82 

428 

1,780 

302 

10 

499 

284 

67 

132 

897 

822 

436 

152 

76 

368 

1,400 

351 

11 

492 

284 

65 

130 

670 

609 

382 

148 

73 

395 

974 

296 

12 

408 

284 

64 

130 

540 

502 

354 

152 

91 

525 

750 

243 

'13 

316 

300 

64 

130 

560 

450 

320 

162 

197 

588 

1,380 

192 

14 

244 

420 

62 

130 

567 

456 

290 

168 

384 

553 

3,000 

161 

15 

202 

788 

58 

136 

521 

456 

270 

265 

870 

486 

2,680 

139 

16 

166 

874 

57 

162 

469 

436 

265 

581 

1,730 

440 

1,730 

123 

17 

143 

748 

69 

180 

436 

406 

275 

1,150 

1,250 

440 

1,820 

116 

18 

127 

541 

98 

194 

443 

514 

275 

1,960 

814 

486 

3,  220 

108 

19 

127 

338 

91 

242 

495 

942 

275 

2,380 

618 

454 

3, 900 

101 

20 

132 

227 

89 

270 

514 

1,050 

265 

2,260 

480 

532 

3,060 

96 

21 

137 

179 

87 

256 

495 

942 

252 

1,510 

384 

588 

1,840 

89 

22 

198 

162 

91 

242 

443 

806 

242 

1,040 

368 

806 

1,160 

84 

23 

198 

143 

107 

229 

394 

616 

229 

857 

525 

947 

830 

80 

24 

198 

127 

102 

224 

370 

502 

275 

618 

460 

947 

702 

76 

25 

249 

114 

98 

251 

400 

436 

388 

447 

473 

848 

602 

73 

26 

263 

102 

107 

275 

482 

406 

388 

351 

694 

655 

602 

69 

27 

244 

91 

100 

305 

581 

376 

337 

318 

726 

512 

774 

61 

28 

198 

83 

93 

337 

670 

354 

295 

492 

1,190 

574 

734 

61 

29 

169 

87 

365. 

742 

342 

2C0 

525 

1,680 

744 

574 

180 

30 

153 

82 

388 

766 

337 

234 

414 

1,300 

1,080 

414 

606 

31 

140 

76 

726 

220 

324 

2,690 

1,730 

Note.— Discharge  Jan.  21-24,  Jan.  29  to  Mar.  1,  Apr.  5-16,  Oct.  3-11  estimated,  because  of  stopping  gage 
clock,  from  maximum  and  minimum  stages  indicated  by  the  recording  pencil,  from  weather  records,  and 
from  comparison  of  the  hydrograph  for  this  stream  with  hydrographs  of  other  streams  in  near-by  drainage 
basins. 

Monthly  discharge  of  Fish  Creek  near  Sea  Level  for  1917. 


Month. 


January 

February 

March 

April 

May 

June 

July 

August 

September 

October 

November 

December 

The  year 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

J 

Mean. 

499 

107 

212 

13,000 

874 

83 

266 

14,800 

107 

57 

80.2 

4,930 

388 

69 

196 

11,700 

897 

337 

524 

32,  200 

1,150 

337 

619 

36, 800 

978 

220 

418 

25, 700 

2,380 

148 

601 

37,000 

1,730 

73 

524 

31,300 

2,690 

368 

727 

44, 700 

4,240 

414 

1,830 

109,000 

1,730 

61 

220 

13,500 

4,240 

57 

518 

375,000 

SWAN  LAKE  OUTLET  AT  CARROLL  INLET,  REVILLAGIGEDO  ISLAND. 

Location. — Halfway  between  Swan  Lake  and  tidewater;  on  east  shore  of  Carroll 
Inlet,  1 mile  from  its  head;  30  miles  by  water  from  Ketchikan. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — August  24,  1916,  to  October  13,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank,  half  a mile  from  tide- 
water; reached  by  a trail  which  leaves  beach  back  of  old  cabin  one-fourth  mile 
south  of  mouth  of  creek.  Gage  was  washed  out  by  extreme  high  water  in 
November,  1917. 


54 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages,  made  from  a cable  across 
stream  100  feet  downstream  from  gage;  at  low  stages  made  by  wading. 

Channel  and  control. — The  gage  well  is  in  a deep  pool  25  feet  upstream  from  a 
contracted  portion  of  channel,  where  a fall  of  a foot  over  bedrock  forms  a per- 
manent control.  The  effect  of  the  violent  fluctuation  of  the  water  surface  outside 
of  gage  well  is  decreased  in  the  inner  float  well  because  the  intake  holes  at  the 
bottom  are  very  small.  At  the  cable  section  the  bed  is  rough,  the  water  shallow, 
and  the  current  very  swift.  Point  of  zero  flow  is  at  gage  height  0.0 ±0.2  foot. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  period,  6.35  feet  at  7 p.  m.  Au- 
gust 19,  1917  (discharge,  computed  from  extension  of  rating  curve,  1,900  second- 
feet);  minimum  stage,  1.01  feet  at  10  p.  m.  April  2,  1917  (discharge,  39  second- 
feet). 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  not  affected  by  ice. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent.  Rating  curve  fairly  well  defined 
between  50  and  900  second-feet.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorder  satisfactory 
except  January  1-25  and  September  16-30.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by 
applying  to  rating  table  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspecting  gage-height 
graph.  Records  fair. 

Swan  Lake,  whose  area  is  about  350  acres,  is  1^  miles  from  tidewater,  at  an  elevation 

of  225  feet  above  sea  level. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Swan  Lake  outlet  at  Carroll  Inlet  in  1917 . 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  26 
Feb.  2 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 

1.72 

1.27 

Sec. -ft. 
205 
78 

Apr.  7 
June  23 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 
1.52 
3. 14 

Sec. -ft. 
141 
645 

do 

do 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Swan  Lake  outlet  at  Carroll  Inlet  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

1 

104 

92 

82 

44 

452 

799 

816 

388 

319 

2 

99 

80 

78 

42 

423 

716 

850 

452 

272 

3 

96 

76 

71 

40 

407 

633 

918 

426 

238 

4 

84 

89 

71 

58 

398 

584 

1,060 

378 

213 

78 

145 

67 

102 

404 

633 

1,020 

344 

173 

6 

74 

*251 

65 

136 

468 

816 

952 

325 

170 

7 

169 

356 

62 

148 

534 

850 

782 

294 

154 

8 

263 

468 

60 

142 

833 

969 

683 

285 

139 

9 

340 

468 

58 

133 

969 

969 

600 

260 

127 

10  . 

404 

436 

54 

130 

833 

799 

551 

254 

118 

11 

388 

391 

52 

133 

650 

666 

518 

254 

115 

12  . 

340 

344 

53 

130 

584 

584 

485 

269 

124 

13 

272 

414 

52 

130 

666 

567 

452 

282 

288 

683 

14 

216 

518 

49 

133 

650 

633 

423 

306 

468 

15 

163 

891 

46 

148 

584 

633 

436 

551 

1,010 

16  . 

136 

901 

44 

172 

551 

617 

430 

910 

17 

109 

683 

45 

200 

534 

584 

452 

1,300 

18 

96 

502 

53 

229 

568 

666 

452 

1,600 

1 

19 

96 

375 

62 

260 

584 

864 

449 

1,700 

20 

99 

294 

60 

278 

584 

884 

426 

1,600 

21... 

104 

235 

59 

269 

534 

833 

433 

1,160 

22 

124 

191 

59 

263 

485 

765 

388 

986 

23 

127 

169 

69 

260 

446 

666 

372 

833 

24 

127 

145 

65 

282 

452 

584 

468 

650 

25 

191 

127 

62 

334 

534 

567 

534 

502 

26 

206 

112 

62 

375 

650 

551 

502 

430 

27 

184 

102 

62 

398 

749 

518 

426 

468 

28  . 

154 

89 

58 

433 

816 

502 

394 

600 

29  . 

133 

54 

452 

867 

502 

356 

518 

30 

115 

53 

485 

850 

502 

337 

420 

31  .. 

102 

48 

833 

340 

388 

Note. — Discharge  Jan.  1-25  estimated  from  maximum  and  minimum  stages  indicated  by  recording 
pencil  and  comparison  with  gage-height  graphs  for  Fish  Creek  near  Sea  Level;  discharge  Sept.  16-30  esti- 
mated at  1,100  second-feet  by  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Fish  Creek. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  55 


Monthly  discharge  of  Swan  Lake  outlet  at  Carroll  Inlet  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  secor  d-feet. 

4 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January 

404 

74 

168 

10.300 
17, 700 

3,600 

15.600 
37, 400 

40.600 

34. 300 
38,000 
40,500 

February 

901 

76 

319 

March 

82 

48 

59.2 

April 

485 

40 

211 

May 

969 

398 

609 

June 

969 

502 

682 

July 

1,060 

1,700 

337 

558 

August 

254 

618 

September  

681 

1 

The  period 



238,000 

1 

ORCHARD  LAKE  OUTLET  AT  SHRIMP  BAY,  REVILLAGIGEDO  ISLAND. 

Location. — In  latitude  55°  50/  N.,  longitude  131°  27'  W.,  at  outlet  of  Orchard  Lake, 
one-third  mile  from  tidewater  at  head  of  Shrimp  Bay,  an  arm  of  Behm  Canal, 
46  miles  by  water  from  Ketchikan. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — May  28,  1915,  to  October  10,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  right  bank  300  feet  below  Orchard 
Lake  and  100  feet  above  site  of  timber-crib  dam,  which  was  built  in  1914  for 
proposed  pulp  mill  and  washed  out  by  high  water  August  10,  1915.  Datum  of 
gage  lowered  2 feet  September  15,  1915.  Gage  heights  May  29  to  August  10,  1915, 
referred  to  first  datum;  August  11,  1915,  to  August  17,  1916,  to  second  datum. 
Datum  of  gage  lowered  1 foot  August  17,  1916.  Gage  heights  August  18,  1916,  to 
October  10,  1917,  referred  to  this  datum.  Gage  washed  out  in  November,  1917. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages  made  from  cable  50  feet 
downstream  from  gage;  at  low  stages  by  wading  near  cable. 

Channel  and  control. — From  Orchard  Lake,  at  elevation  134  feet  above  high  tide, 
the  stream  descends  in  a series  of  rapids  for  1,000  feet  through  a narrow  gorge,  then 
divides  into  two  channels  and  enters  the  bay  in  two  cascades  of  100-foot  vertical 
fall.  Opposite  the  gage  the  water  is  deep  and  the  current  sluggish.  At  the  site 
of  the  old  dam  bedrock  is  exposed,  but  for  30  feet  upstream  the  channel  is  filled 
in  with  loose  rock  and  brush  placed  during  construction  of  dam.  This  material 
forms  a riffle  which  acts  as  a control  for  water  surface  at  gage  at  low  and  medium 
stages  and  is  scoured  down  when  ice  goes  out  of  lake ; the  rock  outcrop  at  site  of 
old  dam  acts  as  a control  at  high  stages  and  is  permanent. 

Extremes  op  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  period,  8.4  feet  at  2 a.  m.  October 
16,  1915  (discharge  6,230  second-feet);  minimum  discharge  estimated,  20  second- 
feet  February  11,  1916. 

Ice. — Ice  forms  on  Orchard  Lake,  but  because  of  swift  current  and  relatively  warm 
water  from  lake  the  outlet  and  control  remain  open. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  changed  January  12  when  logs  lodged  on  con- 
trol; also  on  August  16,  when  logs  were  washed  out  and  old  gravel  cofferdam 
under  cable  was  scoured  down  farther.  Rating  curve  used  January  1-11  same 
as  curve  used  April  13  to  December  31,  1916,  and  is  fairly  well  defined.  Seven 
discharge  measurements  were  made  and  six  points  for  platting  were  computed 
by  comparison  with  record  of  Fish  Creek  during  the  period  January  1 to  October 
10  by  means  of  which  rating  curves  have  been  constructed  which  are  applicable 
as  follows:  January  12  to  August  16,  well  defined  below  and  poorly  defined  above 
500  second-feet;  August  17  to  October  10,  poorly  defined.  Operation  of  water- 
stage  recorder  satisfactory,  except  January  15-29,  when  it  stopped.  Daily 
discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  rating  tables  daily  gage  height,  determined 
by  inspecting  gage-height  graph,  or  for  days  of  considerable  fluctuation  by  aver- 
aging the  discharge  for  equal  intervals  of  the  day.  Records  fair. 


56 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1017. 


The  highest  mountains  on  this  drainage  basin  are  only  3,500  feet  above  sea  level  and 
are  covered  to  an  elevation  of  2,500  feet  by  a heavy  stand  of  timber  and  a thick  under- 
growth of  brush,  ferns,  alders,  and  devil’s  club.  The  topography  is  not  so  rugged  as 
that  of  the  area  surrounding  Shelockum  Lake,  and  the  proportion  of  vegetation,  soil 
cover,  and  lake  area  is  greater,  so  that  more  water  is  stored  and  the  flow  in  the  Orchard 
Lake  drainage  basin  is  better  sustained. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Orchard  Lake  outlet  at  Springs  Bay  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by— 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by— 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  30 

Brown  and  Gardner 

Feet. 

1.04 

Sec.-ft. 

101 

Aug.  1 

Drake  and  Blodget 

Feet. 

2.38 

Scc.-ft. 

460 

Mar.  6 

.74 

67 

26 

C.  T.  Gardner 

2.09 

358 

Apr. , 14 
June  21 

G.  H.  Canfield 

1.39 

180 

Oct.  11 

G.  H.  Canfield 

3.26 

880 

4.22 

1,070 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Orchard  Lake  outlet  at  Shrimp  Bay  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

1 

93 

82 

79 

54 

690 

1,400 

935 

380 

270 

840 

2 

91 

72 

74 

50 

595 

1,140 

1,020 

495 

226 

807 

3 

89 

65 

70 

49 

578 

970 

1,100 

465 

192 

1,380 

4 

84 

67 

70 

62 

542 

858 

1,430 

380 

166 

1,170 

5 

76 

95 

70 

123 

560 

948 

1,340 

342 

150 

2.080 

6 

77 

165 

67 

172 

630 

1.280 

1,170 

318 

136 

1.220 

7 

133 

282 

66 

184 

770 

1,370 

690 

280 

123 

710 

8 

262 

435 

66 

182 

1,170 

1,400 

730 

262 

116 

560 

9 

357 

495 

65 

170 

1,490 

1,250 

630 

230 

110 

455 

10 

398 

465 

62 

161 

1, 170 

995 

560 

218 

105 

410 

11 

440 

420 

61 

170 

835 

860 

525 

216 

102 

12 

322 

355 

61 

170 

690 

790 

510 

235 

112 

13 

248 

368 

60 

170 

970 

770 

465 

239 

249 

14 

196 

495 

56 

174 

1,020 

880 

420 

300 

450 

15 

163 

1,000 

54 

214 

880 

880 

420 

606 

1, 500 

16 

125 

1,400 

51 

264 

835 

790 

405 

1,150 

2,370 

17 

98 

880 

52 

330 

792 

750 

450 

2,560 

1.700 

18 

78 

578 

60 

380 

880 

790 

435 

2,860 

1,180 

19 1 

79 

392 

72 

380 

835 

995 

435 

2,  880 

915 

20 

83 

290 

75 

405 

835 

1,020 

435 

2,420 

630 

21  

83 

222 

72 

380 

730 

1.070 

495 

1,520 

508 

22 

83 

183 

74 

368 

650 

1,070 

420 

1,300 

840 

23 

83 

154 

78 

368 

595 

860 

380 

1,060 

890 

24 

85 

130 

75 

432 

630 

750 

510 

730 

690 

25 

132 

117 

68 

510 

835 

750 

730 

525 

730 

26 

216 

106 

70 

578 

1,070 

750 

710 

410 

890 

27 

188 

95 

67 

612 

1,370 

670 

525 

410 

790 

28 

154 

86 

65 

670 

1,520 

612 

435 

508 

2,000 

29  

128 

62 

710 

1,640 

595 

372 

508 

2, 240 

30 

112 

56 

770 

1,550 

595 

318 

410 

1,480 

31 

95 

54 

1,430 

318 

328 

Note. — Discharge  Jan.  1-14  estimated,  because  of  stopping  of  clock,  from  maximum  and  minimum 
stages  indicated  by  the  recorder,  from  weather  records,  and  from  records  of  flow  for  Karta  River. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Orchard  Lake  outlet  at  Shrimp  Bay  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January 

440 

76 

157 

9,650 

February  

1,400 

79 

65 

339 

18.800 

March. . . 

51 

65.6 

4.030 

April 

770 

49 

309 

18,400 
57, 100 

May 

1,640 

542 

928 

June  

1,400 

595 

929 

55.300 

July 

1.430 

318 

623 

38.300 

August 

2,880 

215 

791 

48,600 

September  

2,370 

102 

729 

43,400 

October  1-10  

2,080 

410 

963 

19.100 

The  period 


313,000 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  57 


SHELOCKUM  LAKE  OUTLET  AT  BAILEY  BAY. 

Location. — In  latitude  56°  00'  N.,  longitude  131°  36'  W.,  on  mainland  near  outlet  of 
Shelockum  Lake,  three-fourths  mile  by  Forest  Service  trail  from  tidewater  at 
north  end  of  Bailey  Bay,  and  52  miles  by  water  north  of  Ketchikan. 

Drainage  area. — 18  square  miles  (measured  on  sheets  Nos.  5 and  8 of  the  Alaska 
Boundary  Tribunal,  edition  of  1895). 

Records  available. — June  1,  1915,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  right  shore  of  lake,  250  feet  above 
outlet.  Gage  house  was  pushed  off  the  well  by  a snowslide  January  4,  1917. 
Gage  not  put  into  operation  again  until  May  23. 

Discharge  measurements. — Made  from  cable  across  outlet  of  lake,  200  feet  below 
gage  and  50  feet  upstream  from  crest  of  falls. 

Channel  and  control. — Opposite  the  gage  the  lake  is  600  feet  wide;  at  the  outlet 
bedrock  is  exposed  and  the  water  makes  a nearly  perpendicular  fall  of  150  feet. 
This  fall  forms  an  excellent  and  permanent  control  for  the  gage.  At  extremely 
high  stages  the  lake  has  another  outlet  about  200  feet  to  left  of  main  outlet. 
Point  of  zero  flow  is  at  gage  height  0.6  foot. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — 1915-1917:  Maximum  stage  during  year,  6.84  feet,  at  8 
a.  m.  November  1 (discharge,  2,780  second-feet);  minimum  discharge,  estimated 
from  climatic  records,  2.5  second-feet,  January  31. 

Ice. — Ice  forms  on  Shelockum  Lake  and  at  gage,  but  because  of  the  swift  current  and 
relatively  warm  water  from  lake,  the  control  remains  open  and  stage-discharge 
relation  is  not  affected  by  ice. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent.  Rating  curve  well  defined.  Gage 
not  in  operation  January  4 to  May  22.  Operation  cf  water-stage  recorder  for 
rest  of  year  satisfactory  except  for  periods  of  break  in  record  shown  in  the  foot- 
note to  daily-discharge  table.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  the 
rating  table  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspection  of  gage-height  graph,  or, 
for  days  of  considerable  fluctuation,  by  averaging  the  discharge  for  equal  inter- 
vals of  the  day.  Records  January  4 to  May  22  and  June  2-20  poor;  excellent  for 
rest  of  year  except  those  for  October  1-10  and  December  1-27,  which  are  fair. 

Shelockum  Lake,  at  elevation  344  feet,  is  only  350  acres  in  area.  The  drainage 
basin  above  the  lake  is  rough  and  precipitous  and  is  covered  with  little  soil  or  vege- 
tation. There  are  no  glaciers  or  ice  fields  at  the  source  of  the  tributary  streams. 
Therefore,  as  there  is  little  natural  storage,  the  run-off  after  a heavy  rainfall  is  rapid 
and  not  well  sustained,  and  during  a hot,  dry  summer  the  flow  becomes  very  low. 
The  large  amount  of  snow  that  accumulates  during  the  winter  months  maintains  a 
good  flow. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Shelockum  Lake  outlet  at  Bailey  Bay  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  31 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 

(a) 

(a) 

3.30 

Sec.-ft. 

62.5 

Apr.  13 
June  21 

G.  H.  Canfield 

42 

do 

420 

a Gage  buried  in  snow  and  was  not  read.  & Discharge  estimated. 


58 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Shelockum  Lake  outlet  at  Bailey  Bay  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

47 

379 

510 

259 

104 

204 

2,300 

107 

2 

45 

510 

338 

72 

222 

1,540 

91 

3 

44 

620 

252 

59 

366 

500 

84 

4 

788 

185 

58 

525 

305 

77 

5 

600 

150 

45 

835 

407 

71 

6 

480 

125 

39 

742 

518 

65 

7 

352 

110 

34 

366 

1,160 

71 

8 

325 

100 

31 

238 

674 

91 

9 

288 

91 

27 

179 

435 

107 

10  

260 

88 

25 

225 

640 

123 

11  

250 

106 

31 

435 

495 

107 

12  

243 

110 

94 

366 

495 

91 

13 

42 

227 

109 

187 

352 

1, 250 

78 

14  

202 

170 

450 

308 

2,400 

68 

15 

204 

366 

480 

255 

1, 270 

60 

16 

229 

792 

379 

218 

525 

58 

17 

282 

858 

480 

189 

685 

48 

18 

275 

950 

480 

229 

1,670 

44 

19  

275 

1,010 

308 

220 

1.670 

41 

20  

243 

820 

248 

308 

1*630 

39 

21  

435 

227 

480 

366 

450 

640 

37 

22 

1 

435 

296 

525 

379 

560 

465 

35 

23 

236 

366 

189 

407 

288 

600 

421 

33 

24 

258 

341 

318 

280 

300 

560 

318 

31 

25 

330 

341 

347 

202 

407 

393 

252 

30 

26 

393 

320 

305 

191 

352 

288 

258 

28 

27 

421 

288 

232 

312 

548 

211 

366 

27 

28 

435 

262 

194 

495 

720 

223 

282 

25 

29 

450 

262 

160 

344 

480 

393 

198 

41 

30 

435 

280 

136 

225 

298 

465 

134 

88 

31 

25 

407 

142 

154 

1,190 

740 

Note. — Discharge  estimated,  because  of  no  gage-height  record  after  Jan.  3,  from  flow  Jan.  1-3,  two  dis- 
charge measurements,  weather  records,  and  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Orchard  Lake  outlet,  as 
follows:  Jan.  1-31, 16  second-feet;  Feb.  1-28,  40  second-feet;  Mar.  1-31, 16  second-feet;  Apr.  1-30,  80  second- 
feet;  May  1-22,  235  second-feet;  June  2-20,  350  second-feet;  estimates  only  roughly  approximate  and  should 
be  used  with  caution.  Discharge  Oct.  1-10  and  Dec.  1-27  estimated  from  maximum  and  minimum  stages 
indicated  by  the  recorder  and  comparison  of  the  hydrograph  of  this  station  with  the  hydrograph  for  Orchard 
Lake  outlet. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Shelockum  Lake  outlet  at  Bailey  Bay  for  1917. 

[Drainage  area,  18  square  miles.] 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off. 

Month. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

January  

16 

0.889 

1.02 

984 

2,220 

February 



40 

2.22 

2.31 

March 

16 

.889 

1.02 

984 
4, 760 

April 

80 

4.44 

4.95 

May 

200 

11.1 

12.80 

12,300 
20,500 
19. 100 
21,000 

15.400 
23,600 

46.400 
5,220 

June 

345 

19.2 

21.42 

July  

788 

136 

310 

17.2 

19.83 

August 

1,010 

88 

342 

19.0 

21.90 

September 

720 

25 

259 

14.4 

16.07 

October 

1,190 

2,400 

179 

384 

21.3 

24.56 

November 

134 

780 

43.3 

48.31 

December 

740 

25 

84.9 

4.72 

5.44 

The  vea  r 

2,400 

238 

13.2 

179. 63 

172,000 

WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  59 


KARTA  RIVER  AT  KARTA  BAY,  PRINCE  OF  WALES  ISLAND. 

Location. — In  latitude  55°  34'  N.,  longitude  132°  377  W.,  at  head  of  Karta  Bay,  an 
arm  of  Kasaan  Bay,  on  east  coast  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  42  miles  by  water 
across  Clarence  Strait  from  Ketchikan. 

Drainage  area. — 49.5  square  miles  (U.  S.  Forest  Service  reconnaissance  map  of 
Prince  of  Wales  Island,  1914). 

Records  available. — July  1,  1915,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank,  half  a mile  above  tide- 
water, at  head  of  Karta  Bay  and  1J  miles  below  outlet  of  Little  Salmon  Lake. 
Two  per  cent  of  total  drainage  of  Karta  River  enters  between  outlet  of  lake  and 
gage. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages  made  from  cable  across 
river  50  feet  upstream  from  gage ; at  low  stages  by  wading  at  cable  section. 
Channel  and  control. — From  Little  Salmon  Lake,  1|  miles  from  tidewater,  the 
river  descends  105  feet  in  a series  of  rapids  in  a wide,  shallow  channel,  the  banks 
of  which  are  low  but  do  not  overflow.  The  bed  is  of  coarse  gravel  and  boulders; 
rock  crops  out  only  at  outlet  of  lake.  Gage  and  cable  are  at  a pool  of  still  water 
formed  by  a riffle  of  coarse  gravel  that  makes  a well-defined  and  permanent  control. 
Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  year,  5.5  feet  at  11  p.  m.  Novem- 
ber 1 (discharge  determined  from  extension  of  rating  curve,  5,070  second-feet); 
minimum  flow,  estimated  by  a comparison  with  the  record  for  Fish  Creek,  80 
second-feet  on  March  16. 

1915-1917:  Maximum  stage,  5.5  feet  November  1,  1917  (discharge,  5,070  second- 
feet);  minimum  flow,  21  second-feet,  February  11,  1915. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent.  Rating  curve  well  defined  between 
80  and  1,500  second-feet;  extended  below  80  second-feet  to  the  point  of  zero  flow 
and  above  1,500  second-feet  by  estimation.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorded 
satisfactory  except  for  periods  indicated  by  breaks  in  record  as  shown  in  footnote 
to  daily-discharge  table.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  rating  table 
mean  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graphs,  or  for  days 
of  considerable  fluctuation  by  averaging  results  obtained  by  applying  to  rating 
table  mean  gage  height  for  regular  intervals  of  day.  Records  excellent  except 
for  periods  of  break  in  record  and  for  discharge  above  1,500  second-feet,  for  which 
they  are  fair. 

The  combined  area  of  Little  Salmon  Lake  at  elevation  105  feet,  and  Salmon  Lake 
at  elevation  110  feet,  is  1,600  acres.  The  slopes  along  the  right  shore  of  lakes  and  at 
head  of  Salmon  Lake  are  gentle,  and  the  area  included  by  the  250-foot  contour  above 
lake  outlet  is  5,500  acres.  The  drainage  area  to  elevation,  2,000  feet,  is  heavily  covered 
with  timber  and  dense  undergrowth  of  ferns,  brush,  and  alders.  The  upper  parts  of 
the  mountains  are  covered  with  thin  soil  and  brush.  Only  a few  peaks  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  3,500  feet  are  bare.  This  large  lake  and  flat  area  and  thick  vegetal  cover 
affords  considerable  natural  storage,  which,  after  heavy  precipitation,  maintains  a 
good  run-off.  The  snow  usually  melts  by  the  end  of  June,  and  the  run-off  becomes 
very  low  during  a dry,  hot  summer. 

The  Forest  Service  in  the  summer  of  1916  constructed  a pack  trail  from  tidewater 
to  outlet  of  Little  Salmon  Lake. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Karta  River  at  Karta  Bay  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Feb.  6 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 

1.48 

Sec.-fL 

289 

524 

June  25 

G.  H.  Canfield 

1.85 

60 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA.  1917. 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Karta  River  at  Karta  Bay  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov.  1 

Dec. 

1 j 

229 

100 

633 

722 

402 

184 

280 

943 

4,440 

480 

2 

152 

192 

88 

595 

641 

415 

184 

228 

898 

3,770 

382 

3 

145 

206 

83 

558 

467 

176 

197 

1,070 

1,880 

308 

4 

149 

210 

86 

515 

565 

164 

172 

1,050 

1,270 

259 

5 

121 

238 

83 

515 

501 

748 

156 

149 

1,480 

1,700 

229 

6 

118 

290 

86 

543 

558 

773 

145 

153 

1,070 

2,020 

206 

377 

389 

118 

610 

595 

625 

135 

121 

748 

2,360 

201 

8 

697 

501 

125 

952 

665 

543 

121 

112 

588 

1,820 

338 

9 

790 

118 

1,030 

633 

501 

118 

100 

467 

1,270 

730 

10 

824 

536 

106 

862 

565 

434 

121 

94 

408 

2, 120 

756 

11 

764 

508 

103' 

645 

501 

376 

118 

83 

460 

1,940 

625 

12 

588 

460 

103 

572 

448 

332 

112 

91 

474 

1,880 

494 

13 

460 

536 

558 

422 

296 

112 

168 

508 

2,540 

396 

14 

370 

756 

565 

448 

264 

121 

202 

494 

3,860 

282 

15 

302 

1,170 

558 

494 

248 

192 

1,020 

448 

3, 500 

285 

16 

254 

1,040 

580 

494 

254 

370 

1 070 

428 

1,700 

248 

17 

220 

739 

565 

487 

274 

665 

907 

448 

1,820 

220 

18....: 

210 

550 

588 

487 

259 

808 

1,120 

641 

3,100 

197 

19 

215 

408 

565 

487 

243 

1,420 

1,070 

565 

3,520 

180 

20 

224 

308 

370 

588 

494 

229 

1,370 

817 

782 

2,820 

168 

21 

233 

248 

363 

565 

543 

220 

990 

756 

880 

1,880 

260 

22 

332 

201 

350 

501 

673 

206 

1,170 

1,040 

1,220 

1,220 

142 

23 

332 

180 

338 

467 

649 

197 

1, 070 

990 

1,540 

1,060 

132 

24 

332 

152 

350 

467 

610 

224 

799 

817 

2,060 

1, 070 

128 

25 

370 

132 

396 

536 

515 

228 

588 

739 

1,590 

990 

118 

26 

434 

121 

454 

649 

448 

220 

467 

765 

1,070 

934 

109 

27 

402 

112 

501 

730 

383 

220 

494 

799 

764 

1,480 

103 

28 

363 

103 

588 

799 

350 

248 

543 

1,710 

925 

1,220 

97 

29 

320 

625 

862 

320 

228 

494 

2,120 

1,640 

860 

396 

30 

290 

665 

853 

308 

206 

415 

1,440 

1,760 

625 

1,270 

31 

259 

625 

192 

338 

3,100 

2,430 

Note.— Discharge  Jan.  28  to  Feb.  5 estimated,  because  of  stopping  of  clock,  from  maximum  and  minimum 
stages  indicated  by  recorder  and  from  a comparison  of  hydrograph  for  this  station  with  that  for  Fish  Creek. 

No  gage-height  record,  owing  to  stick  caught  in  float  wheel;  discharge  estimated  from  a comparison 
of  hydrograph  for  this  station  with  that  for  Fish  Creek:  Mar.  13-31, 120  second-feet;  Apr.  1-20, 140  second-feet. 
Discharge  Dec.  27  interpolated. 

Monthly  discharge  of  Karta  River  at  Karta  Bay  for  1917. 

[Drainage  area,  49.5  square  miles.] 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off. 

Month. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

Ja.Tma.ry 

824 

118 

348 

7.03 

8. 10 

21,400 
19, 900 
6,890 

February 

1,170 

103 

358 

7.23 

7. 53 

March... 

112 

2. 26 

2. 61 

April... 

255 

5. 15 

5. 75 

15, 200 

May 

1,030 

722 

467 

634 

12.8 

14. 76 

39, 000 
30,800 
21,100 

.Tune 

308 

517 

10.4 

11.60 

July 

773 

192 

343 

6.93 

7.99 

August 

1,420 
2, 120 
2,960 
4,440 
2,430 

112 

457 

9. 23 

10.64 

28, 100 
38, 300 
60, 100 
120, 000 

September 

83 

644 

13.0 

14. 50 

October 

408 

977 

19.7 

22.71 

November 

625 

2,020 

393 

40.8 

45. 53 

December 

97 

7.94 

9. 15 

24,200 

The  year 

4,440 

587 

| 11.9 

160.87 

425,000 

MILL  CREEK  NEAR  WRANGELL. 

Location. — In  latitude  56°  2S/  N.,  longitude  132°  12'  W.,  near  outlet  of  Lake  Vir- 
ginia on  east  shore  of  Eastern  Passage,  a narrow  channel  between  Wrangell  Island  i 
and  mainland,  6 miles  by  water  from  Wrangell. 

Drainage  area. — 50  square  miles  (measured  on  U.  S.  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey 
chart  8200). 

Records  available. — June  17,  1915,  to  September  30,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank  one-fourth  mile  below  Lake  Vir- 
ginia and  three-fourths  mile  above  tidewater.  Gage  washed  out  by  extreme  high  I 
water  November  14,  1917 ; record  August  8 to  November  14  lost  with  gage. 

Discharge  measurements. — Made  from  cable  across  creek,  10  feet  upstream  from  gage. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  61 


Channel  and  control. — From  the  outlet  of  the  lake,  at  an  elevation  of  100  feet 
above  sea  level  and  at  a distance  of  1 mile  from  tidewater,  the  creek  descends 
in  a series  of  rapids  and  falls.  The  bed  is  glacial  drift  and  boulders  at  the  rapids 
and  rock  outcrop  at  points  of  concentrated  fall.  The  gage  is  in  a pool  of  still 
water  created  by  a small  fall  at  a contracted  point  of  channel.  This  fall  makes 
a well-defined,  permanent,  and  sensitive  control. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — 1915-1917:  Maximum  stage,  8 feet  October  16,  1915  (dis- 
charge, computed  from  extension  of  rating  curve,  about  3,310  second-feet,  differs 
from  that  published  in  Bulletin  642  because  of  revision  of  rating  curve) ; minimum 
stage,  0.02  foot  February  11,  1916  (discharge,  15  second-feet). 

Ice. — Ice  forms  on  the  lake,  at  gage,  and  along  the  banks,  but  the  swift  current  and 
flow  of  relatively  Warm  water  from  the  lake  keeps  the  control  open. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent;  not  affected  by  ice.  Rating  curve 
well  defined  below  1,200  second-feet;  extended  above  1,200  second-feet.  Oper- 
ation of  water-stage  recorder  not  satisfactory  January  1 to  May  18  and  July  15  to 
August  1.  Daily  discharge,  except  for  periods  shown  in  footnote  to  daily-dis- 
charge table  ascertained  by  applying  to  the  rating  table  mean  daily  gage  height 
determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days  of  considerable  fluctua- 
tion, by  averaging  results  obtained  by  averaging  discharge  for  equal  intervals  of 
the  day.  Results  good  except  for  periods  when  water-stage  recorder  was  not  oper- 
ating satisfactorily. 

The  drainage  basin  is  covered  with  a heavy  stand  of  timber  to  an  elevation  of  2,500 
feet  and  a dense  undergrowth  of  ferns,  brush,  alders,  and  devil’s-club,  but  because 
of  the  steep  slopes  and  thin  soil  the  run-off  after  heavy  rains  is  rapid  and  the  ground 
storage  is  small.  During  a dry,  hot  period  in  summer  the  flow  is  augmented  by  melt- 
ing ice  from  glaciers  at  the  headwaters  of  two  of  the  tributary  streams. 

No  discharge  measurements  were  made  at  this  station  during  the  year. 


Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Mill  Creek  near  Wrangell  for  1917. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 
9. 

10. 

11. 

12. 

13. 

14. 

15. 

16. 

17. 

18. 

19. 

20. 
21. 
22. 

23. 

24. 

25. 

26. 

27. 

28. 

29. 

30. 

31. 


Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

60 

60 

70 

38 

380 

965 

909 

590 

57 

55 

65 

36 

350 

715 

1,030 

1,030 

55 

48 

60 

34 

330 

540 

1,150 

680 

53 

55 

60 

38 

310 

492 

1,660 

510 

51 

70 

58 

45 

330 

760 

1,250 

430 

51 

110 

58 

62 

460 

1,340 

965 

388 

70 

120 

56 

85 

580 

1,030 

715 

409 

100 

190 

54 

85 

700 

965 

742 

130 

260 

52 

78 

820 

875 

645 

160 

188 

50 

78 

580 

645 

558 

180 

170 

47 

78 

350 

540 

540 

160 

155 

46 

78 

280 

510 

525 

140 

200 

45 

78 

540 

525 

. 575 

120 

300 

43 

80 

600 

680 

525 

100 

700 

40 

85 

520 

662 

85 

1,230 

40 

87 

490 

575 

72 

'700 

40 

92 

465 

575 

62 

400 

40 

108 

525 

662 

55 

280 

50 

125 

492 

750 

57 

220 

55 

149 

489 

750 

59 

190 

55 

170 

397 

715 

60 

160 

55 

160 

331 

698 

60 

140 

55 

160 

302 

592 

65 

120 

55 

190 

361 

558 

85 

105 

55 

230 

525 

525 

150 

95 

52 

270 

645 

510 

130 

85 

51 

300 

732 

475 

110 

75 

50 

340 

770 

439 

95 

46 

365 

830 

454 

80 

43 

400 

790 

492 

70 

40 

965 

Note.— Water-stage  recorder  not  working  property  for  the  following  periods:  Jan.  1 to  May  18;  daily  dis- 
charge estimated  from  discharge  measurement  Jan.  21,  stafi  gage,  readings  Jan.  21,  Feb.  10,  Mar.  10,  Apr.  20, 
May  11,  maximum  and  minimum  stages  indicated  by  the  recorder  for  each  of  periods  Jan.  1-20,  Jan.  22  to 
Feb.  9,  Feb.  11  to  Mar.  9,  Mar.  13  to  Apr.  19,  Apr.  21  to  May  10,  and  May  12-18,  and  from  a comparison  of 
hydrograph  for  this  station  with  that  for  Orchard  Lake  outlet;  discharge  July  15-31  (625  second-feet^  estimated 
from  maximum  and  minimum  stages  indicated  by  recorder  and  by  comparison  with  records  for  Ba'ranof  Lake 
outlet;  discharge,  Aug.  7-30,  estimated  at  850  second-feet  and  Sept.  1-30,  725  second-feet,  by  comparison 
with  records  of  now  for  Baranof  Lake  outlet. 


115086°— 19 5 


62  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 

Monthly  discharge  of  Mill  Creeh  near  Wrangell  for  1917. 


[Drainage  area,  50  square  miles.] 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off. 

Month. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

January 

180 

51 

89.7 

1.79 

2.06 

5,520 

12,800 

3,150 

February ». 

1,230 

48 

231 

4.62 

4.81 

March 

70 

40 

51.2 

1.02 

1. 18 

April 

400 

34 

137 

2. 74 

3.06 

8.150 

Mav 

965 

280 

524 

10.5 

12.11 

32,200 

39,700 

June 

1,340 

439 

667 

13.3 

14.84 

July 

723 

14.5 

16. 72 

44.500 

48.500 

August 

a 788 

15.8 

18.22 

September 

1 

a 725 

14.5 

16. 18 

43.100 

The  period 

,238,000 

1 1 

a Estimated. 


CASCADE  CREEK  AT  THOMAS  BAY,  NEAR  PETERSBURG. 

Location. — One-fourth  mile  above  tidewater  on  each  shore  of  south  arm  of  Thomas 
Bay;  22  miles  by  water  from  Petersburg.  One  small  tributary  enters  the  river 
from  the  left  one-half  mile  above  gage  and  2 miles  below  lake  outlet. 

Drainage  area. — 21  square  miles  (measured  on  the  United  States  Geological  Survey 
geologic  reconnaissance  map  of  the  Wrangell  mining  district,  edition  of  1907). 
Records  available. — October  27  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank,  one-fourth  mile  from 
tidewater;  reached  by  trail'  which  leaves  beach  back  of  old  cabin  at  mouth  of 
creek. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages,  made  from  log  footbridge 
across  stream  one-fourth  mile  upstream  from  gage;  at  low  stages,  made  by  wading. 
Channel  and  control. — From  the  outlet  of  a lake  at  an  elevation  of  1,200  feet 
above  sea  level  and  3 miles  from  tidewater  the  river  descends  in  a continuous 
series  of  rapids  and  falls  through  a narrow,  deep  canyon.  Gage  is  in  a protected 
eddy  above  a natural  rock  weir,  which  forms  a well-defined  and  permanent  control. 
The  bed  of  river  under  the  footbridge  is  rough  and  the  current  swift  and  irregular, 
but  this  section  is  the  only  place  on  whole  river  where  even  at  low  and  medium 
stages  there  are  no  boils  and  eddies. 

Extremes  of  stage. — Maximum  stage  during  period,  7.65  feet  at  11  p.  m.,  Novem- 
ber 18;  minimum  stage,  1.95  feet  about  December  31. 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  not  affected  by  ice. 

Data  inadequate  for  determination  of  discharge. 

The  first  site  on  this  stream  for  a storage  reservoir  is  at  a small  lake  3 miles  from  tide- 
water and  at  elevation  of  1,200  feet  above  sea  level.  The  drainage  area  above  the 
gaging  station  is  21  square  miles  and  above  the  lake  outlet,  17  square  miles.  Flow 
during  summer  is  augmented  by  melting  ice  from  glaciers  on  upper  portion  of  drain- 
age area. 

The  following  discharge  measurement  was  made  by  G.  H.  Canfield: 

October  29,  1917:  Gage  height,  3.24  feet;  discharge,  181  second-feet. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATION'S  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  63 


Daily  gage  height , in  feet , of  Cascade  Creek  at  Thomas  Bay , near  Petersburg,  for  1917. 


Day. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

Day. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

Day. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

5. 65 
6.6 
4. 95 
4. 25 

4. 05 

4.2 
4. 75 
4.2 
3.8 

4.6 

2.79 
2.67 
2. 55 
2. 43 

2.37 

2. 33 
2. 32 
2.5 
2. 47 

2. 38 

11 

4. 65 
4.  55 
5.2 
6.8 
5. 85 

4.9 

5.2 

7.2 
7. 25 
6.6 

2. 33 
2. 25 
2. 20 
2. 15 

21 

5.6 

5. 05 
4. 55 
4.0 

3.7 

3.6 
3.  65 
3. 35 
3. 15 
2.  93 

9 

12 

22 

3 

13 

23 

4 

14 

24 

5 

15 

25 

6 

16 

26 

7 

17 

27 

2.9 
3.4 
3.2 
3.7 
4. 55 

8 .... 

18 

28 

9 

19 

29 

10 

20 

30 

31 

GREEN  LAKE  OUTLET  AT  SILVER  BAY,  NEAR  SITKA. 

Location. — In  latitude  56°  59'  N.,  longitude  135°  W W.,  at  outlet  of  Green  Lake,  at 
head  of  Silver  Bay,  10^  miles  by  water  south  of  Sitka. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — August  22,  1915,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  water-stage  recorder  on  right  bank  at  outlet  of  lake,  reached  by  trail 
which  leaves  the  beach  one-fourth  mile  north  of  mouth  of  stream,  ascends  a 600- 
foot  ridge,  and  then  drops  down  to  the  outlet  of  the  lake.  Gage  datum  lowered 
1.0  foot  December  27,  1916. 

Discharge  measurements. — Made  from  cable  across  outlet  30  feet  below  gage. 
Channel  and  control. — From  Green  Lake,  240  feet  above  sea  level  and  1,800  feet 
from  tidewater,  the  stream  descends  in  a series  of  falls  and  rapids  through  a nar- 
row canyon  whose  exposed  rock  walls  rise  perpendicularly  more  than  a hundred 
feet. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  year,  10.74  feet  at  12.30  a.  m. 
November  20  (discharge,  2.220  second-feet);  minimum  stage,  0.12  foot  April  2 
(discharge,  15  second-feet). 

1915-1917:  Maximum  stage,  11.22  feet  (referred  to  datum  used  after  December 
27,  1916)  on  September  19,  1916  (discharge,  2,400  second-feet);  minimum  stage, 
0.12  foot  April  2,  1917  (discharge,  15  second-feet). 

Ice  — Ice  forms  on  lake  and  at  gage,  but  because  of  current  and  flow  of  relatively 
warm  water  from  the  lake  the  control  remains  open. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent.  Rating  curve  Well  defined  between 
10  and  1,300  second-feet.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorder  satisfactory  except 
for  periods  indicated  by  breaks  in  record,  as  shown  in  the  footnote  to  the  daily- 
discharge  table.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  the  rating  table 
mean  daily  gage  height,  determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days 
of  considerable  fluctuation,  by  averaging  results  obtained  by  applying  to  rating 
table  gage  heights  for  regular  intervals  of  day.  Records  good,  except  those  for 
periods  when  gage  was  not  operating  satisfactorily,  which  are  only  roughly 
approximate. 

In  the  fall  and  winter  the  flow  is  low  because  there  is  little  ground  storage,  and  on 
most  of  the  drainage  area  the  precipitation  is  in  the  form  of  snow.  This  accumulated 
snow  produces  a large  run-off  during  the  spring,  and  the  melting  ice  from  the  glacier 
and  the  ice-capped  mountains  augment  the  run-off  from  precipitation  during  the 
summer.  The  area  of  Green  Lake  is  estimated  to  be  only  100  acres. 

The  following  discharge  measurement  was  made  by  G.  H.  Canfield: 

August  12,  1917:  Gage  height,  3.82  feet;  discharge,  377  second-feet. 


64 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Green  LaJce  outlet  at  Silver  Bay  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July, 

Aug. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

27 

18 

233 

599 

866 

712 

121 

2 

23 

15 

177 

490 

728 

800 

108 

3 

20 

15 

397 

728 

406 

99 

4 

14 

16 

152 

388 

662 

262 

94 

5 

12 

18 

161 

442 

599 

912 

262 

87 

6 

13 

22 

172 

424 

620 

471 

391 

85 

7 

23 

258 

406 

557 

1,160 

835 

92 

8 

22 

480 

415 

641 

866 

458 

138 

9 

21 

442 

452 

480 

1,130 

247 

177 

10 

136 

26 

294 

362 

433 

774 

830 

134 

11  

120 

32 

206 

294 

433 

797 

816 

96 

12 

101 

34 

188 

286 

424 

380 

568 

537 

79 

13 

101 

35 

194 

397 

424 

337 

499 

631 

68 

14 

156 

39 

212 

537 

406 

317 

508 

1,470 

65 

15 

470 

58 

226 

547 

406 

943 

62 

16 

346 

71 

270 

480 

278 

438 

59 

17 

212 

70 

262 

490 

206 

400 

55 

18 

138 

67 

286 

480 

200 

1,010 

53 

19 

97 

68 

312 

547 

226 

1,280 

52 

20 

67 

246 

620 

490 

1,800 

55 

21  

65 

212 

662 

607 

1 140 

54 

22 

73 

200 

599 

741 

684 

53 

23 

85 

188 

557 

985 

470 

52 

24 

107 

206 

528 

751 

371 

50 

25 

142 

286 

480 

480 

346 

49 

26  

161 

371 

470 

371 

380 

48 

27 

156 

512 

480 

240 

480 

46 

28  

177 

751 

442 

362 

336 

45 

29 

247 

684 

461 

548 

200 

44 

30 

278 

641 

530 

799 

145 

56 

31  

620 

1,130 

145 

1 ( 

Note. — Water-stage  recorder  not  working  properly  for  the  following  periods:  Jan.  1 to  Feb.  9 and  Feb.  20  j 
to  Apr.  1;  discharge  estimates  from  climatic  records  and  comparison  of  hydrograph  for  this  station  with  | 
that  for  Baranoff  Lake  outlet,  as  follows:  Jan.  7-31,  90  second-feet;  Feb.  1-9,  110  second-feet;  Feb.  20-28,  ] 
45  second-feet;  Mar.  1-31,  50  second-feet;  May  19-20,  daily  discharge  estimated  from  maximum  and  mini-  i 
mum  stages  indicated  by  the  recorder.  Discharge  estimated  by  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Baranoff  (l 
Lake  outlet  as  follows:  July  15-31,  425  second-feet;  Aug.  1-11,  400  second-feet;  Aug.  15-31,  640  second-feet;  i 
Sept.  1-30,  620  second-feet;  Oct.  1-4,  930  second-feet.  Gage  well  frozen  Dec.  22-28;  discharge  interpolated. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Green  Lake  outlet  at  Silver  Bay  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January 

76.1 

4,680 
6,660 
3,070 
4, 420 

February 

470 

120 

March 

50 

April 

278 

15 

74.3 

May 

751 

152 

310 

19, 100 

June 

662 

286 

475 

• 28,300 

30,200 
32, 300 

491 

August 

526 

September 

620 

36,900 
40, 100 
37,800 
4,800 

October 

200 

652 

November 

1,800 

177 

145 

636 

December 

44 

78.1 

The  year 

343 

248,000 

WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  65 


BARANOF  LAKE  OUTLET  AT  BARANOF,  BARANOF  ISLAND. 

Location. — In  latitude  57°  5'  N.,  longitude  134°  54'  W.,  at  townsite  of  Baranof,  at 
head  of  Warm  Spring  Bay,  east  coast  of  Baranof  Island,  18  miles  east  of  Sitka  across 
island,  but  96  miles  from  Sitka  by  water  through  Peril  Strait. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — June  28,  1915,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  right  bank  700  feet  below  Baranof 
Lake  and  800  feet  above  tidewater  at  head  of  Warm  Spring  Bay. 

Discharge  measurements. — Made  from  cable  across  stream  100  feet  below  lake 
and  600  feet  above  gage. 

Channel  and  control. — From  Baranof  Lake,  at  elevation  130  feet  above  sea  level 
and  1,500  feet  from  tidewater,  the  stream  descends  in  a series  of  rapids  and  small 
falls  and  enters  the  bay  in  a cascade  of  about  100  feet  concentrated  fall.  The 
bed  is  of  glacial  drift,  boulders,  and  rock  outcrop.  The  gage  is  in  an  eddy  50 
feet  downstream  from  the  foot  of  a small  fall  and  i00  feet  upstream  from  a riffle 
which  forms  a well-defined  control. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  year,  4.90  feet  at  6 p.  m.  Novem- 
ber 19  (discharge,  2,780  second-feet);  minimum  stage,  0.40  foot  April  3 (discharge, 
31  second-feet). 

1915-1917:  Maximum  stage,  5.3  feet  August  10,  1915  (discharge,  computed 
from  extension  of  rating  curve,  3,350  second-feet);  minimum  flow  estimated  by 
discharge  measurement  and  climatic  data,  28  second -feet  on  February  13,  1916. 

Ice. — Because  of  the  swift  current  and  flow  of  relatively  warm  water  from  the  lake, 
the  stream  remains  open. 

Diversions. — The  flume  to  Olsen’s  sawmill  diverts  from  the  stream  200  feet  below 
gage  only  sufficient  water  to  operate  a 25-horsepower  Pelton  water  wheel. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent;  not  affected  by  ice.  Rating  curve 
well  defined  below  2,000  second-feet.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorder  satis- 
factory except  for  short  periods  indicated  in  footnote  to  daily-discharge  table. 
Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  rating  table  mean  daily  gage  height 
determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days  of  considerable  fluctua- 
tion, by  averaging  discharge  for  equal  intervals  of  day.  Records  good  except  for 
periods  when  recorder  did  not  operate  satisfactorily  and  for  periods  when  water 
was  frozen  in  well,  for  which  they  are  fair. 

The  drainage  area  is  rough  and  precipitous,  and  the  vegetable  and  soil  cover  is 

thin,  even  on  the  foothills  of  the  mountains.  The  run-off  is  rapid,  and  the  ground 

storage  is  small.  During  a dry,  hot  period,  however,  the  flow  is  greatly  augmented 

by  melting  ice  from  several  small  glaciers  and  ice-capped  mountains. 

No  discharge  measurements  were  made  at  this  station  during  the  year. 


66 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Baranof  Lake  outlet  at  Baranof  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

64 

45 

36 

352 

930 

1,280 

590 

420 

668 

590 

208 

2 

61 

i 

43 

33 

321 

788 

1,100 

668 

392 

695 

448 

177 

3 

59 

45 

31 

294 

651 

1050 

640 

384 

1,280 

345 

153 

4 

46 

34 

288 

615 

930 

568 

370 

1 280 

294 

137 

5 

42 

36 

279 

615 

855 

545 

342 

l’  140 

291 

122 

6 

44 

37 

288 

615 

820 

545 

327 

695 

291 

116 

7 

48 

37 

330 

615 

788 

545 

309 

1,380 

376 

110 

8 

46 

37 

590 

615 

788 

545 

300 

1 100 

384 

112 

9 

44 

36 

695 

615 

695 

545 

276 

l’lOO 

339 

108 

10 

42 

37 

545 

545 

668 

545 

264 

855 

464 

104 

11 

40 

42 

432 

496 

695 

590 

261 

820 

755 

96 

12 

39 

51 

366 

480 

695 

545 

• 545 

668 

695 

91 

13 

i 

37 

57 

352 

568 

725 

492 

678 

568 

725 

86 

14 

35 

59 

388 

725 

668 

460 

640 

500 

1,330 

81 

15 

34 

69 

440 

788 

640 

500 

855 

448 

1,050 

76 

16 

37 

80 

460 

755 

668 

725 

668 

380 

615 

71 

17 

52 

86 

460 

725 

725 

1,050 

980 

336 

500 

67 

18 

57 

92 

468 

725 

695 

1,100 

1,650 

309 

890 

63 

19 

57 

108 

500 

788 

788 

1,540 

1,380 

306 

1,840 

59 

20 

56 

114 

480 

890 

820 

1,170 

1,230 

400 

2,000 

69 

21 

54 

110 

412 

930 

755 

820 

1,100 

532 

1,230 

70 

22 

78 

55 

108 

380 

890 

668 

1,010 

1,180 

695 

820 

65 

23 

72 

60 

113 

376 

855 

640 

1,230 

930 

890 

590 

63 

24 

66 

50 

129 

388 

820 

615 

930 

640 

788 

620 

61 

25 

60 

57 

175 

452 

820 

615 

668 

480 

590 

480 

59 

26 

55 

62 

183 

568 

755 

590 

590 

444 

460 

464 

57 

27 

52 

57 

201 

725 

725 

545 

930 

934 

362 

545 

55 

28 

48 

51 

222 

930 

725 

522 

1,050 

2,000 

330 

388 

53 

29 

46 

285 

1,010 

725 

492 

855 

1,430 

380 

303 

50 

30 

50 

352 

1,050 

788 

444 

615 

930 

432 

245 

65 

31 

37 

1,010 

464 

488 

800 

90 

Note. — Discharge  estimated  for  following  periods,  because  of  unsatisfactory  operation  of  water-stage 
recorder:  Jan.  4-31  (80  second-feet)  and  Feb.  1-28  (100  second-feet)  from  weather  records  and  by  compari- 
son with  records  of  flow  for  streams  in  near-by  drainage  basins.  Discharge  Dec.  12-18  interpolated  and 
Dec.  23-31  estimated  by  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Green  Lake  outlet. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Baranof  Lake  outlet  at  Baranof  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January 

78.2 

4,810 

February 

90.4 

5,020 

March 

62 

34 

47.4 

2,910 

April 

352 

31 

99.7 

5,930 

May 

1,050 

279 

504 

31,000 

June 

930 

480 

719 

42,800 

1,280 

444 

724 

44,500 

August 

1,540 

460 

745 

45,800 

September 

2,000 

261 

745 

44,300 

October 

1,380 

306 

683 

42,000 

November 

2,000 

245 

664 

39,500 

December 

208 

50 

90.1 

5,540 

The  year 

2,000 

31 

434 

314,000 

SWEETHEART  FALLS  CREEK  NEAR  SNETTISHAM. 

Location. — In  latitude  57°  56^'  N.,  longitude  133°  41'  W.,  on  east  shore  1 mile  from 
head  of  south  arm  of  Port  Snettisham,  3 miles  south  of  mouth  of  Whiting  River, 

7 miles  by  water  from  Snettisham,  and  42  miles  by  water  from  Juneau.  No  large  jj 
tributaries  enter  river  between  gaging  station  and  outlet  of  large  lake,  miles  i 
upstream. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  67 


Drainage  area. — 27  square  miles  (measured  on  the  United  States  Geological  Survey 
topographic  map  of  the  Juneau  gold  belt,  edition  of  1905). 

Records  available. — July  31,  1915,  to  March  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  water-stage  recorder  on  right  bank  300  feet  upstream  from  tidewater 
on  east  shore  of  Port  Snettisham.  Gage  washed  out  by  high  water  in  November, 
1917,  and  record  from  April  20  last  with  the  gage. 

Discharge  measurements. — Made  from  cable  across  river  one-fourth  mile  upstream 
from  gage. 

Channel  and  control. — From  the  outlet  of  lake  at  an  elevation  of  520  feet  above  sea 
level  and  2\  miles  from  tidewater  the  river  descends  in  a series  of  rapids  and  falls 
through  a narrow,  deep  canyon.  Gage  is  in  a pool  at  foot  of  two  falls,  each  25  feet 
high,  which  are  known  as  Sweetheart  Falls;  outlet  of  pool  is  a natural  rock  weir 
which  forms  a well-defined  and  permanent  control  for  gage. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  period,  4.2  feet  August  14,  1915 
(discharge,  computed  from  an  extension  of  the  rating  curve,  1,420  second-feet); 
minimum  flow,  estimated  from  discharge  measurement  and  climatic  data,  15 
second-feet  February  11,  1916. 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  not  seriously  affected  by  ice. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  practically  permanent;  affected  by  ice  January 
29  to  February  16.  Rating  curve  well  defined  between  40  and  1,300  second-feet, 
extended  beyond  these  limits  by  estimation.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorder 
satisfactory  except  for  periods  indicated  by  breaks  in  record,  as  shown  in  footnote 
to  daily  discharge  table.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  rating  table 
mean  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph.  Records 
excellent  except  for  periods  of  break  in  record,  for  which  they  are  fair. 

In  the  fall  and  winter  the  run-off  is  small  because  the  precipitation  is  in  the  form  of 
snow  and  because  of  the  small  amount  of  ground  storage ; during  a hot,  dry  period  the 
low  run-off  from  the  ground  and  lake  storage  is  augmented  by  melting  ice  from  one 
glacier. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Sweetheart  Falls  Creek  near  Snettisham  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by— 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Mar.  9 
Apr.  24 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 

0.32 

.66 

Sec.-ft. 

48 

94 

May  25 
Sept.  14 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 

1.71 

1.71 

Sec.-ft. 

412 

410 

do 

do 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Sweetheart  Falls  Creek  near  Snettisham  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

1 

26 

51 

80 

11 

70 

77 

42 

21 

57 

141 

48 

2 

28 

48 

80 

12 

68 

67 

40 

22 

59 

110 

45 

3 

31 

54 

59 

13 

68 

150 

37 

23. 

56 

99 

55 

4 

19 

64 

51 

14 

67 

296 

36 

24 

67 

91 

65 

5 

18 

77 

57 

15 

64 

224 

35 

25 

84 

83 

' 77 

6 

18 

98 

55 

16 

57 

258 

32 

26 

82 

82 

65 

7 

57 

127 

51 

17 

56 

242 

36 

27 

70 

82 

55 

8 

70 

150 

47 

18 

63 

195 

46 

28 

63 

82 

45 

9 

70 

127 

45 

19 

67 

178 

51 

29 

57 

40 

10 

70 

94 

43 

20 ' 

61 

148 

50 

30  .. 

56 

35 

31 

54 

30 

Note. — Because  of  clock  stopping  or  backwater  from  ice,  discharge  estimated  from  weather  records  at 
Juneau  and  from  comparison  of  hydrograph  for  this  station  with  hydrographs  for  Crater  and  Carlson  creeks. 
Jan.  7-13,  Jan.  29  to  Feb.  16,  and  Mar.  23-31. 


68 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Sweetheart  Falls  Creek  near  Snettisham  for  1917. 
[Drainage  area,  27  square  miles.] 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

January 

84 

18 

56.5 

2.09 

2.41 

3,480 

February 

242 

48 

127 

4.70 

4.89 

7,o:o 

March 

80 

30 

49.5 

1.83 

2.11 

3,010 

The  period 

13,500 

CRATER  LAKE  OUTLET  AT  SPEEL  RIVER,  PORT  SNETTISHAM. 

Location. — At  outlet  of  Crater  Lake,  1 mile  upstream  from  the  edge  of  tide  flats  at 
head  of  north  arm  of  Port  Snettisham,  2 miles  by  trail  from  cabins  of  Speel  River 
Project  (Inc.),  which  are  42  miles  by  water  from  Juneau. 

Drainage  area. — 11.9  square  miles  at  outlet  of  Crater  Lake  and  13  square  miles 
at  mouth  of  stream  at  beach  (measured  on  topographic  maps  of  the  Alaska 
Boundary  Tribunal,  edition  of  1895). 

Records  available. — January  23,  1913,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  water-stage  recorder  on  left  shore  of  lake,  100  feet  upstream  from 
outlet.  A locally  made  water-stage  recorder  having  a natural  vertical  scale  and 
a time  scale  of  1 inch  to  24  hours  was  used  until  replaced  by  Stevens  gage  June 
29,  1916.  The  gage  datum  remained  the  same  during  the  period.  During  the 
winter  months,  because  of  inaccessible  location  and  deep  snow,  the  operation  of 
the  gage  at  the  lake  was  discontinued,  and  the  stage  read  at  staff  gage  in  channel 
exposed  at  low  tide  at  beach.  The  first  gage  at  beach  was  set  at  an  unknown 
datum  and  washed  out  in  winter  of  1915-16.  Another  staff  gage  was  set  at  about 
the  same  location  and  used  after  November  24,  1916. 

Discharge  measurements. — Made  from  cable  across  outlet  of  lake,  100  feet  down- 
stream from  gage  and  10  feet  upstream  from  crest  of  first  falls.  The  rope  sling  from 
which  discharge  measurements  were  first  made  was  replaced  in  fall  of  1915  by  a 
standard  United  States  Geological  Survey  gaging  car,  making  more  accurate 
measurements  possible. 

Channel  and  control. — The  gage  is  on  left  shore  of  lake,  100  feet  upstream  from 
outlet  where  the  stream  becomes  constricted  into  a narrow  channel,  the  bed  of 
which  is  composed  of  large  boulders  and  rock  outcrop,  which  form  a well-defined 
and  permanent  control. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  the  year,  5.0  feet  August  19 
(discharge,  1,270  second -feet) ; minimum  flow,  12  second-feet  March  15-16  and 
April  13-15. 

1913-1917 : Maximum  stage  during  the  period,  5.9  feet  August  13,  1915  (dis- 
charge, estimated  from  extension  of  rating  curve,  1,680  second -feet) ; minimum 
flow,  5 second-feet  February  1-13,  1916,  estimated  from  one  discharge  measure- 
ment and  weather  records. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent.  Rating  curve  defined  by  19  dis- 
charge measurements,  13  of  which  were  made  by  employees  of  the  Speel  River 
Project  (Inc.)  and  6 by  an  engineer  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey,  and 
is  well  defined  below  and  extended  above  1,000  second -feet.  Rating  curve  used 
January  1 to  May  25  for  staff  gage  at  beach,  fairly  well  defined.  Operation  of 
water-stage  recorder  satisfactory  except  June  30  to  July  3,  when  gage  clock  was 
run  down,  September  13-16,  19-30,  and  November  1 to  December  31.  Discharge 
record  January  1 to  May  25  computed  from  gage-height  records  for  staff  gage  at 
beach.  Daily  discharge  May  26  to  October  31  ascertained  by  applying  to  rating 
table  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days 
of  considerable  fluctuation,  by  averaging  results  obtained  by  applying  to  rating 
table  mean  gage  heights  for  regular  intervals  of  the  day.  Discharge  September 
13-16,  19-30,  and  November  1 to  December  31  estimated  by  comparison  with 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  69 


records  of  flow  for  Long  River.  Records  obtained  from  gage  at  lake,  good;  those 
from  gage  at  beach,  fair;  those  obtained  by  comparison  with  records  for  Long 
River  only  roughly  approximate. 

Crater  Lake  is  at  an  elevation  of  1,010  feet  above  sea  level  and  covers  1.1  square 
miles.  The  sides  of  the  mountains  surrounding  the  lake  are  steep  and  barren,  and 
the  tops  are  covered  by  glaciers. 

Discharge  measurements  of  Crater  Lake  outlet  at  Speel  River , Port  Snettisham,  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Feet. 

Sec.-ft. 

Feet. 

Sec.-ft. 

Jan.  1 

Grosseth  and  Hayes. . . 

1. 12 

33.6 

Mar.  29 

C.  N.  Hayes 

0.98 

27.3 

9 

do, 

1.  43 

44.  8 

31 

do 

.87 

19.7 

10 

Gust  Grosseth 

. 10 

37.4 

Apr.  5 

do 

.75 

14.5 

10 

Brown  and  Hayes 

1.36 

44.6 

10 

do 

.69 

13.1 

12 

do 

1. 16 

32.2 

12 

do 

.69 

12.9 

17 

Grosseth  and  Hayes. . . 

.96 

20.9 

18 

do 

.80 

17. 1 

29 

Gust  Grosseth 

.05 

22.  5 

22 

Brown  and  Hayes 

.89 

22.  3 

31 

Grosseth  and  Hayes. . . 

.97 

19.7 

23 

C.  O.  Brown...' 

.88 

21.2 

Feb.  7 

do. . . 

1.  38 

48.  6 

24 

do 

1.06 

34.  5 

24 

C.  N.  Hayes 

1.  22 

39.  0 

25 

C.  N.  Hayes 

1.00 

32.  4 

26 

do 

1.  10 

30.8 

27 

do 

1.11 

42.2 

Mar.  2 

do 

.93 

19.9 

29 

do 

1.28 

70 

10 

do 

o.84 

14.8 

May  10 

do 

1.68 

211 

14 

o.  75 

13.9 

12 

do 

1.  50 

128 

17 

Brown  and  Hayes 

o.69 

13.4 

16 

do 

1.  54 

136 

24 

do 

1. 17 

44.4 

24 

G.  H.  Canfield 

1.45 

103 

27 

do 

1.  09 

38.0 

Dec.  7 

do 

61.  08 

39 

a Stage-discharge  relation  changed  owing  to  blasting  rocks  out  of  channel. 
b New  gage  and  datum  at  same  location  as  old  gage  at  beach. 

Note.— All  discharge  measurements  except  those  made  by  Gust  Grosseth  Jan.  10  and  29  were  made  at 
the  beach;  gage  heights  referred  to  gage  at  beach. 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Crater  Lake  outlet  at  Sped  River , Port  Snettisham, 

for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

1 

37 

21 

20 

19 

65 

304 

402 

697 

223 

186 

2 

30 

18 

20 

17 

60 

280 

487 

642 

198 

231 

3 

L7 

22 

20 

15 

60 

245 

642 

416 

184 

408 

4 

25 

28 

19 

15 

60 

241 

547 

316 

183 

443 

5 

24 

32 

19 

15 

65 

304 

472 

272 

184 

338 

6 

46 

39 

18 

15 

100 

350 

388 

265 

191 

282 

7 

69 

46 

17 

14 

150 

306 

472 

272 

194 

517 

8 

58 

53 

16 

14 

200 

253 

443 

282 

191 

502 

9 

50 

47 

16 

14 

270 

223 

327 

282 

189 

710 

10 

46 

41 

15 

13 

211 

200 

293 

293 

192 

517 

11 

39 

36 

16 

13 

150 

183 

304 

362 

221 

675 

12 

33 

37 

17 

13 

125 

193 

375 

362 

414 

416 

13 

30 

38 

14 

12 

129 

229 

388 

316 

429 

14 

26 

60 

14 

12 

132 

269 

350 

293 

293 

15 

25 

82 

12 

12 

136 

362 

402 

429 

212 

16 

23 

78 

12 

13 

140 

338 

429 

648 

143 

17 

21 

74 

13 

14 

130 

304 

472 

955 

402 

105 

18 

25 

71 

15 

17 

140 

327 

723 

885 

780 

90 

19 

28 

68 

16 

28 

145 

443 

692 

1,050 

90 

20 

32 

60 

24 

26 

150 

416 

562 

1,070 

86 

21 

41 

54 

25 

24 

120 

362 

429 

724 

90 

22 

39 

48 

32 

22 

100 

388 

338 

728 

87 

23 

37 

43 

39 

28 

105 

362 

338 

815 

103 

24 

36 

36 

45 

29 

108 

338 

532 

594 

101 

25 

45 

33 

43 

30 

118 

350 

610 

375 

90 

26 

40 

30 

40 

36 

127 

338 

594 

293 

84 

27 

36 

26 

37 

42 

167 

316 

444 

709 

70 

28 

32 

24 

32 

54 

200 

316 

327 

955 

70 

29 

30 

28 

67 

221 

304 

267 

698 

94 

30 

27 

24 

70 

241 

316 

229 

416 

108 

31 

24 

20 

280 

381 

280 

203 

Note. — Daily  discharge  for  days  when  staff  gage  was  not  read  during  period  Jan.  1 to  May  25  estimated 
from  weather  records  and  records  of  flow  for  Long  River.  Daily  discharge  June  30  to  July  3 estimated 
from  maximum  and  minimum  stages  indicated  by  the  recorder  and  records  of  flow  for  Long  River. 
Records  Jan.  1 to  May  26  show  discharge  at  beach;  May  26  to  Dec.  31  discharge  at  outlet  of  Crater  Lake. 
Discharge  estimated,  because  gage  was  not  operating,  by  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Long  River, 
as  follows:  Sept.  13-16,  330  second-feet;  Sept.  19-30,  .480  second-feet;  Nov.  1-30,  250  second-feet;  Dec.  1-31, 
35  second-feet.  Records  for  these  periods  only  roughly  approximate. 


VO 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1911 


Monthly  discharge  of  Crater  Lake  outlet  at  Speel  River , Port  Snettisham,  for  1917. 
[Drainage  area  13.0  square  miles  at  tidewater;  11.9  square  miles  at  outlet  of  Crater  Lake.] 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-ofT. 

Month. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

January 

69 

21 

34.9 

2. 68 

3.09 

3.56 

2,150 

2,470 

1,380 

February 

82 

18 

44.  5 

3.42 

March 

45 

12 

22.  5 

1.73 

1.99 

April 

70 

12 

23.8 

1.83 

2.04 

1,420 

8,730 

18,100 

May 

280 

60 

142 

10.9 

12.57 

June 

443 

183 

305 

25.6 

28.56 

July 

723 

229 

441 

37.1 

42.77 

27.100 

33.100 
21,500 

August 

265 

265 

539 

45.  3 

52.23 

September 

183 

361 

30.3 

33. 81 

October 

710 

70 

251 

21. 1 

24.  33 

15,400 

14,900 

2,150 

November 

250 

21.0 

23.  43 

December 

35 

2.94 

3.39 

Note. — Records  Jan.  1 to  May  25  show  discharge  at  beach.  Records  May  26  to  Dec.  31  show  discharge 
at  outlet  of  Crater  Lake.  See  footnote  to  daily-discharge  table. 


LONG  RIVER  BELOW  SECOND  LAI£E,  AT  PORT  SNETTISHAM. 

LocAnoN. — One-half  mile  downstream  from  outlet  of  Second  Lake,  1 mile  down- 
stream from  outlet  of  Long  Lake,  one-half  mile  upstream  from  head  of  Indian 
Lake;  2\  miles  by  trail  and  boat  across  Second  Lake  from  cabins  of  the  Speel 
River  project  at  head  of  the  North  Arm  of  Port  Snettisham,  42  miles  by  water 
from  Juneau. 

Drainage  area. — 33.2  square  miles  (measured  on  sheet  No.  12  of  the  Alaska  Bound- 
ary Tribunal  maps,  edition  of  1895). 

Records  available. — November  11,  1915,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  right  bank  one-half  mile  below 
outlet  of  Second  Lake. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages  made  from  cable  across 
river  at  gage;  at  low  stages  made  by  wading  one-fourth  mile  downstream. 

Channel  and  control. — At  the  gage  the  channel  is  deep  and  the  current  sluggish; 
banks  are  low  and  are  overflowed  at  extremely  high  stages;  bed  smooth  except 
for  one  large  boulder.  A rapid,  500  feet  downstream,  forms  a well-defined  and 
permanent  control. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  year,  7.35  feet  at  1 a.  m.  August  20 
(discharge,  2,900  second-feet);  minimum  stage,  0.28  foot  March  26  (discharge,  37 
second-feet). 

1916-17:  Maximum  stage,  7.35  feet  August  20,  1917  (discharge,  2,900  second- 
feet);  minimum  flow,  23  second-feet,  February  13,  1916. 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  affected  by  ice  during  January,  February,  and  March. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent;  affected  by  ice  or  poor  connection 
between  well  and  river  January  3-6,  21,  22,  January  27  to  February  7,  February 
19-28,  and  April  15  to  May  5 . Rating  curve  fairly  well  defined  between  50  and  400 
second-feet  and  well  defined  between  400  and  2,000  second-feet.  Operation  of 
water-stage  recorder  satisfactory  throughout  year  except  January  18-19,  February 
22-27,  June  23-28,  July  28  to  August  3,  November  21-25,  and  November  30  to 
December  31.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  the  rating  table  daily 
gage  height  determined  by  inspecting  the  gage-height  graph.  Records  good 
except  for  stages  below  400  second-feet,  for  which  they  are  fair. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  71 


The  area  draining  to  Long  River  between  Long  Lake  outlet  and  this  station  com- 
prises only  1.3  square  miles,  including  First  Lake  and  Second  Lake.  Because  this 
area  is  at  a low  altitude  and  has  no  glaciers  the  run-off  per  square  mile  from  it  is  greater 
early  in  the  spring  but  much  less  in  summer  than  that  from  the  area  above  Long  Lake, 
which  is  partly  covered  by  glaciers. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Long  River  below  Second  Lake,  at  Port  Snettisham,  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by— 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  11 
20 

Mar.  22 
Apr.  20 

C.  O.  Brown 

Grosseth  and  Hayes 

Brown  and  Hayes 

do 

Feet. 

1.10 

.77 

.40 

.62 

Sec.-ft. 

95 

57 

47.1 

57 

May  23 
24 

July  5 

Charles  Hayes 

G.  H.  Canfield 

do 

Feet. 
2.10 
2. 10 
4. 56 

Sec.-ft. 

271 

277 

1,190 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Long  River  below  Second  Lake,  at  Port  Snettisham,  for 

1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

81 

77 

85 

57 

680 

908 

1,580 

660 

506 

470 

154 

2 

73 

73 

77 

57 

680 

1,090 

1,550 

582 

408 

377 

130 

3 

69 

68 

72 

57 

600 

1,280 

1,110 

530 

885 

276 

120 

4 

56 

64 

70 

49 

620 

1,330 

908 

502 

998 

216 

118 

5 

53 

60 

61 

51 

720 

1,180 

780 

495 

863 

222 

114 

6 

63 

130 

57 

52 

263 

720 

1,040 

740 

492 

660 

227 

112 

7 

133 

198 

54 

52 

303 

680 

1,090 

740 

498 

1,180 

488 

109 

8 

183 

222 

51 

51 

380 

620 

1,020 

760 

492 

1,260 

399 

105 

9 

119 

129 

50 

49 

464 

565 

840 

760 

478 

1,600 

298 

103 

10 

102 

103 

49 

49 

412 

502 

760 

760 

478 

1,330 

318 

100 

11 

92 

91 

48 

48 

318 

467 

760 

862 

478 

1,600 

530 

99 

12 

82 

82 

45 

48 

295 

488 

840 

908 

495 

1,720 

526 

98 

13 

75 

106 

45 

48 

303 

548 

840 

840 

660 

1,040 

620 

96 

14 

69 

179 

43 

48 

332 

620 

800 

800 

840 

780 

1,410 

95 

15 

66 

263 

42 

326 

720 

862 

1,020 

1,100 

600 

1,520 

93 

16 

59 

196 

40 

315 

700 

908 

1,380 

1,180 

422 

930 

91 

17  

73 

179 

40 

309 

680 

1,020 

908 

1,230 

306 

620 

88 

18 

96 

164 

41 

326 

720 

1,360 

1,960 

1,630 

276 

975 

86 

19 

118 

157 

42 

350 

862 

1,410 

2,360 

2,370 

276 

1,460 

83 

20 

77 

150 

43 

362 

862 

1,260 

2, 580 

2,110 

306 

1,960 

82 

21 

74 

143 

44 

318 

840 

1,040 

1,750 

2,370 

234 

1,300 

81 

22 

71 

136 

45 

290 

885 

885 

1,810 

1,900 

232 

1 000 

81 

23 

68 

130 

41 

268 

840 

840 

1,990 

1,340 

309 

’800 

80 

24 

75 

123 

49 

268 

780 

1,020 

1,630 

908 

303 

670 

79 

25 

130 

116 

53 

309 

760 

1,130 

1,160 

640 

276 

550 

78 

26 

104 

109 

37 

362 

760 

1,160 

1,410 

640 

271 

460 

77 

27 

99 

103 

48 

428 

740 

1,040 

1,460 

565 

182 

408 

77 

28 

95 

97 

46 

488 

740 

885 

1,990 

582 

182 

332 

76 

29 

91 

54 

530 

720 

760 

1,630 

760 

284 

250 

76 

30... 

86 

73 

582 

730 

660 

1, 130 

680 

335 

192 

76 

31 

82 

62 

680 

840 

820 

582 

76 

Note. — Water-stage  recorder  not  working  properly  or  stage-discharge  relation  affected  by  ice  or  poor 
connection  between  well  and  river  for  following  periods:  Jan.  3-6, 18-19,  21-22,  Jan.  27  to  Feb.  7,  Feb.  19-28; 
daily  discharge  estimated  from  weather  records  and  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Crater  Creek. 
Discharge  estimated  from  weather  records  and  by  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Crater  Lake  outlet 
as  follows:  Apr.  15-31,  80  second-feet;  May  1-5,  160  second-feet.  Discharge  June  23-28,  July  28  to  Aug.  3, 
and  Nov.  21-25  estimated  from  maximum  and  minimum  stages  indicated  by  the  recorder  and  comparison 
with  records  of  flow  for  Crater  Lake  outlet  and  Speed  River.  Discharge  Nov.  29  to  Dec.  31  estimated  from 
readings  of  staff  gage  Dec.  10, 19,  and  28  and  from  weather  records. 


72 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Long  River  below  Second  Lahef  at  Port  Snettisham,  for  1917 . 

[Drainage  area,  33.2  square  miles.] 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off. 

Month. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

January 

183 

53 

87.6 

2.64 

3.04 

5,390 

7,220 

3,190 

February 

263 

60 

130 

3.92 

4.08 

March 

85 

37 

51.9 

1.56 

1.80 

April 

66.5 

2.00 

2. 23 

3,960 
20, 600 
41,400 
61,200 

79.300 
54,900 
40, 100 

39.300 
5,820 

May 

680 

335 

10. 1 

11.64 

June 

885 

467 

695 

19.4 

21.64 

July 

1,410 

660 

995 

30.0 

34. 59 

August 

2,580 

2,370 

1,720 

740 

1,290 

38.9 

44. 85 

September 

478 

923 

27.8 

31.02 

October 

182 

652 

19.6 

22. 60 

November 

1,960 

154 

192 

660 

19.9 

22. 20 

December 

76 

94.6 

2.85 

3.29 

The  year 

2,580 

37 

501 

15.1 

204. 66 

362,000 

SPEEL  RIVER  AT  PORT  SNETTISHAM. 

Location. — At  entrance  of  canyon  one-fourth  mile  downstream  from  mouth  of  Long 
River,  and  8 miles  upstream  from  tide  flats  and  the  cabins  of  the  Speel  River 
Project  (Inc.),  which  are  at  head  of  north  arm  of  Port  Snettisham  and  42  miles 
by  water  from  Juneau. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — July  1,  1916,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  150  feet  to  the  left  of  the  constric- 
tion of  the  river  at  the  entrance  of  the  canyon.  The  gage  is  reached  from  cabins 
of  the  Speel  River  Project  by  trail  to  head  of  Second  Lake,  boat  across  Second 
Lake,  trail  to  head  of  Indian  Lake,  boat  across  Indian  Lake,  trail  down  Long  River 
and  Indian  River  to  canyon,  and  cable  across  river  near  entrance  of  the  canyon 
— a total  distance  of  about  7 miles. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  all  stages  made  from  cable  having  a clear  span  of 
400  feet  across  river,  one-half  mile  below  gage  and  one-fourth  mile  below  lower 
end  of  canyon. 

Channel  and  control. — For  several  miles  above  the  canyon  the  river  flows  in  sev- 
eral channels  through  a wide,  flat,  sandy  valley  in  which  the  channels  are  con- 
tinually shifting.  The  river  is  constricted  from  a width  of  500  feet  to  75  feet  at 
entrance  of  canyon.  This  constriction  of  channel  and  rock  outcrop  at  entrance 
of  canyon  form  a very  sensitive  and  permanent  control.  The  extreme  range  in 
stage  is  28  feet.  Above  a stage  of  22  feet  part  of  the  flow  passes  through  a second- 
ary channel  (the  bed  of  which  is  rock  overgrown  with  brush)  which  begins  near 
gage  and  rejoins  main  channel  at  lower  end  of  canyon.  Below  a stage  of  about 
4 feet  (discharge,  920  second-feet)  water  from  stream  does  not  reach  the  well 
except  by  seepage  through  gravel  and  water  in  well  does  not  assume  the  level  of 
the  water  in  river.  At  the  gaging  cable  the  bed  of  the  river  is  gravel,  with  one 
large  rock  outcrop  near  middle  of  stream.  The  current  is  very  swift  and  carries 
a large  quantity  of  sand  in  suspension. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  period  of  record,  21.5  feet,  Sep- 
tember 19,  1917  (discharge  determined  from  an  extension  of  the  rating  curve, 
18,000  second-feet);  minimum  flow,  150  second-feet  April  14,  1917,  estimated  by 
aid  of  discharge  measurement  March  25  and  by  comparison  with  record  of  flow 
of  Long  River. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  73 


Ice. — Ice  does  not  form  at  control,  but  so  much  frost  forms  in  gage  shelter  and  on 
metal  parts  of  gage  that  the  gage  does  not  operate  satisfactorily  during  the  winter. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent,  but  for  stages  below  4 feet  (920 
second-feet)  water  from  river  does  not  reach  gage  well  except  by  seepage  through 
gravel.  For  low  stages,  therefore,  water  in  the  well  does  not  assume  the  level  of 
the  water  in  the  river  and  frequent  measurements  are  necessary  to  estimate  the 
flow.  Rating  curve  fairly  well  defined  between  1,200  and  10,000  second-feet; 
extended  above  10,000  second-feet.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorder  not  satis- 
factory for  periods  indicated  in  footnote  to  daily-discharge  table  because  of  the 
frequent  stopping  of  clock,  due  to  the  binding  of  paper-supply  roll  or  to  running 
down  at  times  when  ice  on  lakes  was  unsafe  for  crossing.  Daily  discharge  ascer- 
tained by  applying  to  rating  table  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspecting 
gage-height  graph.  Records  fair  for  periods  when  gage  was  operating  satisfac- 
torily; poor  for  periods  when  clock  was  not  running. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Speel  River  at  Port  Snettisham  in  1917 . 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  13 
Mar.  25 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 
1. 82 
.94 

Sec.-ft. 

302 

185 

Apr.  21 
Sept.  15 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 

2.25 

13.9 

Sec.-ft. 

334 

5,910 

doj 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Daily  discharge , in  second-feet , of  Speel  River  at  Port  Snettisham  for  1917. 


Day. 


1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

11. 

12. 

13. 

14. 

15. 

16. 

17. 

18. 

19. 

20. 

21. 

22. 

23. 

24. 

25. 

26. 

27. 

28. 

29. 

30. 

31. 


Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

410 

500 

165 

180 

1,040 

3,530 

410 

500 

165 

180 

980 

3,330 

410 

500 

165 

180 

950 

3,280 

410 

500 

165 

210 

920 

3,530 

410 

500 

165 

210 

920 

3,710 

410 

500 

165 

210 

980 

3,590 

410 

500 

165 

210 

1,380 

3,380 

410 

500 

165 

210 

1,630 

3,600 

410 

500 

165 

210 

1,700 

3,600 

410 

500 

165 

210 

1,630 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

210 

1,420 

3,600 

330 

500 

165 

210 

1,350 

3,600 

290 

500 

165 

210 

1,520 

3,600 

265 

500 

165 

210 

1,740 

3,600 

260 

500 

165 

210 

1,770 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

210 

1,700 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

210 

1,630 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

210 

1,630 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

210 

1,630 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

210 

1,560 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

340 

1,420 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

340 

1,380 

3,600 

340 

500 

165 

380 

1,420 

3,600 

340 

500 

185 

540 

1,560 

3,600 

340 

500 

185 

620 

1,800 

3,600 

340 

500 

185 

700 

2, 190 

3,600 

340 

500 

185 

700 

2,430 

3,600 

340 

500 

185 

700 

2, 680 

3,600 

340 

185 

950 

2, 950 

3,600 

340 

180 

1,040 

3,180 

3,600 

340 

180 

3,530 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

6,100 

3,800 

5,500 

2,720 

500 

6,100 

3,800 

5,500 

2,470 

500 

6,100 

3,800 

5,500 

2,270 

500 

6,100 

3,800 

5,500 

2,050 

500 

6, 100 

3,280 

5,500 

1,910 

500 

4,690 

3,230 

5,500 

1,770 

500 

5,770 

3,230 

5,500 

1,980 

500 

4,900 

5,060 

3,180 

5,500 

2,230 

500 

4,370 

3,180 

5,500 

2,050 

500 

4,550 

3, 130 

6,800 

1,940 

500 

4,310 

3,130 

8,050 

2,230 

500 

4,620 

3,250 

5, 220 

2,310 

500 

4,490 

3,300 

4,900 

3,040 

500 

4,490 

4,000 

4,430 

8,050 

500 

4,980 

5,300 

4,250 

4,690 

500 

5,140 

5,060 

4,070 

3,590 

500 

5,390 

5,140 

3,890 

3,180 

500 

9,600 

9,050 

3,650 

5, 140 

500 

6,000 

16,000 

3,530 

9, 400 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

3,330 

12,100 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

3,180 

6,800 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

3,040 

4,760 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

2,900 

4,010 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

2,810 

3,530 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

2,720 

3,230 

500 

6,000 



6,800* 

2,230 

1,800 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

2,510 

1,800 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

2,430 

1,800 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

2,390 

1,800 

500 

6,000 

6,800 

2,350 

1,800 

500 

6,000 

2,820 

500 

Note. — Discharge  estimated  by  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Long  River  as  follows:  Jan.  1—10; 
Jan.  16  to  Mar.  23;  Apr.  4-20;  June  8 to  July  5;  July  19  to  Sept.  4;  Sept.  12-14;  Sept.  20  to  Oct.  9;  Nov. 
10-17;  and  Nov.  26  to  Dec.  3l.  Braced  figures  show  mean  discharge  for  periods  included.  Discharge 
Aug.  1-31  estimated  8,500  second-feet. 


74 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 
Monthly  discharge  of  Sped  River  at  Port  Snettisham  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January 

356 
500 
170 
329 
1,700 
3,570 
5,670 
8,500 
5, 120 
4,230 
3,550 
500 

21,900 

27,800 

10,500 

19,600 

105.000 

212.000 

349.000 

523.000 

305.000 

260.000 
211,000 

30,700 

February 

March 

April 

May 

3,530 

920 

June 

July 

August 

September 

16,000 

October 

November 

12, 100 

December 

The  year 

16,000 

2,860 

2,080,000 

GRINDSTONE  CREEK  AT  TAKU  INLET. 

Location. — On  north  shore  of  Taku  Inlet  between  Point  Bishop  and  Point  Salisbury, 
one-fourth  mile  west  of  mouth  of  Rhine  Creek  and  11  miles  by  water  from  Juneau. 

Drainage  area. — Not  measured. 

Records  available. — May  6,  1916,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank,  200  feet  from  tidewater, 
installed  September  16,  1916.  A Lietz  seven-day  graph  water-stage  recorder 
was  used  May  6 to  June  17,  1916. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  all  stages  made  by  wading  either  in  the  channel 
on  the  beach,  which  is  exposed  at  low  tide,  or  100  feet  below  gage  at  high  tide. 

Channel  and  control. — For  a distance  of  one-fourth  mile  from  tidewater  the  stream 
descends  in  a series  of  rapids  and  falls  through  a narrow,  rocky  channel.  The 
gage  is  at  upper  end  of  a turbulent  pool  between  two  falls,  the  lower  of  which 
forms  a well-defined  control.  When  gage  was  installed,  logs  were  jammed  in 
channel  near  upper  end  of  pool. 

Extremes  op  discharge. — 1916-17:  Maximum  stage,  5.33  feet  at  5 p.  m.,  August 
19,  1917  (discharge,  estimated  from  extension  of  rating  curve,  600  second-feet); 
minimum  stage,  —0.03  foot,  estimated  from  climatic  records  to  have  occurred 
April  2,  1917  (discharge,  5 second-feet). 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  not  affected  by  ice. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent.  Rating  curve  well  defined  below 
150  second-feet;  extended  above  150  second-feet  by  estimation.  Operation  of 
water-stage  recorder  satisfactory  except  for  periods  shown  in  the  footnote  to  daily 
discharge  table.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  rating  table  daily 
gage  height  determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph  or  for  days  of  considerable 
fluctuation  by  averaging  results  obtained  by  applying  to  rating  table  mean  gage 
heights  for  regular  intervals  of  day.  Records  excellent  except  those  for  periods 
of  break  in  record  and  discharge  above  150  second-feet,  which  are  fair. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Grindstone  Creek  at  Taku  Inlet  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Jan.  5 
Feb.  14 
June  13 

C.  O.  Brown 

do 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 

0.23 

.63 

1.24 

Sec.-ft. 

10.6 

20.5 

66 

Sept.  7 
Nov.  13 
Dec.  7 

G.H.  Canfield 

do 

Feet. 

0.73 

1.24 

.64 

Sec.-ft. 

23 

68 

21 

WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  75 
Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Grindstone  Creek  at  Taku  Inlet  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

14 

6.8 

7.7 

5.4 

35 

100 

76 

119 

43 

46 

28 

2 

13 

6.6 

7.5 

5.0 

27 

76 

71 

78 

40 

37 

26 

3 

12 

6.4 

7.3 

5.5 

24 

65 

79 

61 

46 

31 

24 

4 

11 

6.4 

7.1 

11 

25 

80 

128 

51 

72 

39 

23 

5 

10 

6.6 

6.8 

11 

25 

109 

98 

47 

65 

21 

22 

6 

9.0 

8.1 

6.6 

7.7 

27 

131 

111 

47 

70 

52 

21 

7 

8.6 

23 

6.4 

6.4 

39 

110 

205 

43 

25 

168 

60 

21 

8 

16 

17 

6.2 

5.7 

53 

88 

115 

43 

24 

105 

43 

20 

9 

18 

11 

6.0 

5.5 

51 

82 

84 

36 

23 

99 

41 

19 

10 

11 

11 

6.0 

5.5 

42 

70 

73 

35 

22 

94 

60 

18 

11 

10 

11 

5.9 

5.5 

36 

63 

65 

43 

22 

80 

70 

18 

12 

10 

11 

5.9 

5.5 

40 

63 

82 

37 

22 

67 

70 

16 

13 

9.4 

12 

5.7 

5.5 

44 

67 

65 

30 

29 

65 

80 

14 

14 

9.0 

25 

5.9 

5.5 

49 

78 

63 

32 

25 

61 

196 

14 

15 

8.8 

83 

6.4 

5.9 

47 

112 

60 

49 

42 

55 

129 

14 

16 

8.4 

44 

7.9 

6.6 

46 

90 

60 

71 

29 

49 

60 

14 

17 

8.2 

18 

8.1 

7.5 

46 

79 

74 

70 

35 

49 

46 

14 

18 

8.4 

12 

8.1 

8.4 

47 

97 

118 

61 

82 

50 

151 

14 

19 

8.8 

11 

8.1 

9.8 

50 

107 

93 

358 

118 

57 

214 

14 

20 

8.  2 

11 

8.2 

12 

60 

95 

94 

83 

68 

202 

14 

21 

7.9 

10 

8.2 

16 

51 

96 

77 

67 

53 

151 

13 

22 

7.3 

9.6 

8.  2 

33 

46 

95 

64 

59 

63 

102 

12 

23 

6.8 

9.  2 

8.  2 

21 

43 

76 

78 

63 

70 

85 

13 

24 

6.6 

9.0 

8. 1 

25 

47 

68 

95 

53 

67 

67 

13 

25 

8.2 

8.8 

7.9 

32 

52 

66 

103 

49 

57 

75 

12 

26 

9.0 

8.4 

7.5 

32 

57 

62 

128 

50 

49 

96 

12 

27 

8.6 

8.  2 

7. 1 

31 

62 

61 

83 

46 

42 

112 

11 

28 

7.7 

7.9 

6.  8 

35 

65 

58 

66 

49 

46 

62 

11 

29 

6.9 

6.4 

46 

70 

56 

56 

46 

41 

39 

11 

30 

6.9 

6.0 

44 

72 

57 

50 

48 

63 

33 

10 

31 

6.9 

5.7 

142 

79 

53 

10 

Note.— Gage-height  record  Jan.  5 to  Apr.  24  condensed  so  that  it  covered  only  about  a foot  of  record 
paper;  sticking  of  the  supply  paper  on  guides  caused  paper  to  feed  too  slowly;  gage-height  record  for  this 
period  redrawn  to  normal time  scale  by  aid  of  the  peaks  and  troughs  of  the  condensed  graph,  readings  of 
staff  gage  Jan.  5,  Feb . 14,  and  Mar.  16,  and  comparison  with  gage-height  graphsfor  Sheep,  Gold,  and  Carlson 
creeks.  Discharge  July  15  and  16 interpolated.  Gage  float  caught  Aug.  20  to  Sept.  6;  discharge  estimated 
by  comparison  with  records  of  flow  for  Carlson  Creek  as  follows:  Aug.  21-31, 125  second-feet;  Sept.  1-6, 30 
second-feet.  Discharge  Nov.  18  to  Dec.  6 estimated  from  maximum  and  minimum  stages  indicated  by 
the  recorder  and  comparison  of  gage-height  record  for  this  station  with  that  for  Carlson  Creek.  Discharge 
Dec.  26-31  estimated  from  weather  records. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Grindstone  Creek  at  Taku  Inlet  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January 

18 

6.6 

9.50 

584 

February 

83 

6.4 

14.7 

816 

March 

8.2 

5.7 

7.03 

432 

April 

46 

5.0 

15.2 

904 

May 

142 

24 

49.0 

3,010 

131 

56 

81. 9 

4,  870 

July 

205 

50 

86.  9 

5’ 340 

August 

358 

30 

90.7 

5,580 

September 

118 

22 

43.0 

2,  560 

October 

168 

40 

64.7 

3,980 

November 

214 

21 

82.3 

4,900 

December 

28 

10 

16.0 

984 

The  year 

358 

5.0 

46.9 

34, 000 

76 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


CARLSON  CREEK  AT  SUNNY  COVE. 

Location. — At  Sunny  Cove  on  west  shore  of  Taku  Inlet,  20  miles  by  water  from 
Juneau. 

Drainage  area. — 22.26  square  miles  (determined  by  engineering  department  of 
Alaska  Gastineau  Mining  Co.  from  surveys  made  by  that  company). 

Records  available. — July  18,  1916,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank,  2 miles  from  tidewater;  inspected 
several  times  a week  by  employees  of  the  Alaska  Gastineau  Mining  Co. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  high  stages,  made  from  cable  across  river  one-half 
mile  downstream  from  gage;  at  medium  and  low  stages,  by  wading  500  feet 
upstream  from  gage. 

Channel  and  control. — Above  the  gage  the  stream  meanders  in  one  main  channel 
and  several  small  channels  through  a flat,  sandy  basin  about  a mile  long;  just 
below  gage  channel  contracts  and  stream  passes  over  rocky  falls  that  form  a well- 
defined  and  permanent  control.  Point  of  zero  flow,  gage  height  — 1.5  feet. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — 1916-17:  Maximum  stage  during  the  year,  6.65  feet  at 
4 p.  m.,  August  19,  1917  (discharge,  computed  from  extension  of  rating  curve, 
3,800  second-feet);  minimum  flow  estimated  from  climatic  data  and  hydrographs 
for  streams  in  near-by  drainage  basins,  28  second-feet,  April  4,  1917. 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  affected  by  ice  January  1 to  April  28  and  December 
1-31. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent.  Rating  curve  well  defined  between 
90  and  2,400  second-feet,  extended  below  90  second-feet  to  point  of  zero  flow 
and  above  2,400  second-feet  by  estimation.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorder 
satisfactory  except  for  a few  days;  as  gage  was  visited  several  times  a week, 
breaks  in  record  caused  by  clock  stopping  were  short.  Daily  discharge  ascer- 
tained by  applying  to  rating  table  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspecting 
gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days  of  considerable  fluctuation,  by  averaging  results 
obtained  by  applying  to  rating  table  mean  gage  heights  for  regular  intervals  of 
the  day.  Records  good  except  for  stages  below  90  second-feet  and  above  2,400 
second-feet,  for  which  they  are  fair. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Carlson  Creek  at  Sunny  Cove  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Feb.  27 
May  1 

C.  O.  Brown.  . 

Feet. 
-0.  08 
.38 

Sec.-ft. 
a 52.  8 
173 

Sept.  19 
Nov.  13 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 
4.53 
1. 30 

Sec.-ft. 

1,970 

363 

do 

do 

a About  1.8  second-feet  should  be  deducted  to  give  flow  past  the  gage.  Stage-dischargerelationaflected 
by  ice. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  77 
Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Carlson  Creek,  at  Sunny  Cove  for  1917 . 


Day. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

1 

177 

840 

1,120 

1,720 

292 

330 

268 

2 

142 

620 

1,100 

832 

264 

344 

196 

3 

128 

495 

1,330 

525 

242 

1,300 

156 

4 

125 

610 

1,120 

428 

231 

692 

134 

5 

136 

908 

760 

408 

231 

495 

128 

159 

885 

708 

450 

231 

510 

143 

7 

169 

725 

1,150 

430 

223 

1,400 

151 

8 

780 

570 

785 

416 

204 

711 

249 

9 

540 

550 

585 

403 

200 

1,530 

164 

311 

465 

620 

417 

188 

964 

198 

11 

238 

465 

638 

672 

183 

682 

248 

12 

240 

585 

840 

510 

212 

638 

335 

13 

306 

725 

666 

373 

495 

558 

444 

14 

360 

725 

555 

408 

474 

416 

2,440 

15 

350 

885 

708 

955 

729 

338 

931 

16 

330 

708 

735 

1,200 

422 

251 

360 

17 

325 

690 

950 

1,190 

634 

216 

265 

18 

384 

780 

1,830 

1,120 

2,080 

260 

622 

19 

414 

1,020 

1,020 

2,510 

2,520 

301 

1,550 

20 

403 

800 

908 

1,550 

1,080 

249 

1,500 

21 

306 

908 

638 

655 

1,400 

196 

1,000 

22 

272 

930 

525 

1,270 

1,300 

168 

725 

23 

274 

725 

628 

885 

780 

183 

480 

24 

332 

725 

952 

690 

492 

186 

320 

25 

414 

742 

1,160 

430 

330 

179 

267 

26 

534 

638 

1,182 

622 

453 

168 

376 

27. 

570 

620 

708 

2,040 

342 

138 

386 

28 

620 

602 

495 

1,400 

527 

177 

248 

29 

672 

602 

430 

690 

760 

216 

153 

30 

655 

585 

389 

436 

513 

665 

136 

31 

930 

1,060 

338 

651 

Note. — Because  of  clock  stopping  or  backwater  from  ice,  discharge  estimated  from  weather  records  at 
Juneau  and  from  comparison  of  hydrograph  for  this  station  with  those  for  Gold,  Sheep,  and  Grindstone 
creeks  as  follows:  Jan.  1-31,  50  second-feet;  Feb.  1-28,  80  second-feet;  Mar.  1-31,  40  second-feet;  April  1-28, 
50 second-feet;  Nov.  20-21,  daily  discharge;  Dec.  1-31,  64  second-feet. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Carlson  Creek  at  Sunny  Cove  for  1917. 

[Drainage  area,  22.26  square  miles.] 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off. 

Month. 

Maximum. 

\ 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

January 

50 

2.  25 

2.  59 

3,070 

4,440 

February 

80 

3.  59 

3.  74 

March  

40 

1.  80 

2.  08 

2,460 
3,570 
23, 000 
41,900 
52, 100 
51, 500 

April 

60 

2.  70 

3.01 

May 

930 

125 

374 

16.  8 

19.  37 

June 

1,020 

465 

704 

31.  6 

35.  26 

July 

1,830 

389 

848 

38. 1 

43.  93 

August 

2,510 
2, 520 
1,530 

338 

838 

37.6 

43.  35 

September 

183 

601 

27.0 

30. 13 

35, 800 

29.900 

28. 900 
3,940 

October 

138 

487 

21.9 

25.  25 

November .• 

2,440 

128 

486 

21.  8 

24.  33 

December 

64 

2.  88 

3.  32 

The  year 

2, 520 

388 

17.4 

236.  36 

281, 000 

115086°— 19 6 


78 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


SHEEP  CREEK  NEAR  THANE. 

Location. — At  lower  end  of  flat  basin,  above  diversion  dam  for  flume  leading  to 
Treadwell  power  house  at  beach,  and  1 mile  by  tramway  and  ore  railway  from 
Thane. 

Drainage  area. — 4.57  square  miles  above  gaging  bridge  (measured  on  United 
States  Geological  Survey  map  of  Juneau  and  vicinity,  edition  of  1917). 

Records  available. — July  26,  1916,  to  December  31,  1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  right  bank  at  pool  formed  by  an 
artificial  control  just  below  small  island  three-tenths  mile  upstream  from  diver- 
sion dam.  Recorder  inspected  once  a week  by  an  employee  of  the  Alaska  Gas- 
tineau  Mining  Co. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  extremely  high  stages  made  from  gaging  bridge 
two-tenths  mile  downstream  from  gage;  at  low  stages  made  by  wading  near  bridge 
section.  No  streams  enter  between  gage  and  measuring  section,  but  seepage 
inflow  varies  from  a small  amount  to  10  per  cent  of  total  flow,  the  per  cent  of  in- 
flow usually  being  large  after  periods  of  heavy  precipitation. 

Channel  and  control. — The  station  is  near  lower  end  of  flat  basin  through  which  the 
stream  meanders  in  a channel  having  low  banks  and  bed  of  sand  and  gravel.  An 
artificial  control  was  built  2 feet  below  intake  for  gage  well  to  confine  the  flow  in 
one  channel  during  high  water  and  to  insure  a permanent  stage-discharge  relation. 
The  spillway  of  the  control  at  low  stages  consists  of  a timber,  16  feet  long,  set  in 
the  bed  of  the  stream.  During  medium  and  high  stages  another  timber,  8 feet 
long,  bolted  at  top  near  right  end,  forms  part  of  the  control.  A 3-foot  cut-off  wall 
is  driven  at  upstream  face  of  spillway.  There  are  wing  walls  at  each  end  and  an 
8-foot  apron  extends  downstream  from  control. 

Extremes  op  discharge. — Maximum  stage  during  year,  2.47  feet  at  5 p.  m.,  Novem- 
ber 14  (discharge,  from  extension  of  rating  curve,  580  second-feet);  minimum 
stage,  0.15  foot  April  7 (discharge,  0.8  second-foot). 

Ice. — Ice  forms  in  the  channel  above  and  below  but  not  on  the  spillway  of  the  control. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  permanent,  but  from  August  19  to  September 
7 and  September  20-24  intake  pipe  was  obstructed  with  gravel,  so  that  water 
surface  in  well  was  maintained  at  level  of  water  surface  in  creek  10  feet  upstream 
from  control  by  seepage  through  gravel.  Rating  curve  used  August  19  to  Septem- 
ber 7 and  September  20-24  based  on  three  discharge  measurements  and  is  fairly 
well  defined  below  150  second-feet;  curve  used  remainder  of  year  based  on  14 
discharge  measurements  and  is  well  defined  below  250  second-feet.  Operation 
of  water-stage  recorder  satisfactory  except  for  short  periods  indicated  in  footnote 
to  table  of  daily  discharge.  Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  rating 
table  daily  gage  height  determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days 
of  considerable  fluctuation,  by  averaging  results  obtained  by  applying  to  rating 
table  mean  gage  heights  for  regular  intervals  of  the  day.  Records  fair. 


Discharge  measurements  of  Sheep  Creek  near  Thane  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by — 

Gage 

height. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Feb.  22 

C.  O.  Brown 

Feet. 
0. 70 

Sec.-ft. 

21.2 

Sept.  7 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 

0.83 

Sec.-ft. 

40 

Apr.  7 

do 

.15 

.8 

22 

do 

a 1.18 

115 

May  3 

G.  H.  Canfield 

.78 

38 

26 

do 

1.02 

83 

June  5 

do 

1.17 

125 

Oct.  3 

do 

1.10 

102 

9 

do 

1.05 

95 

Dec.  22 

do 

.53 

12.9 

July  18 

, 

1.35 

176 

a Intake  pipe  clogged;  elevation  of  water  surface  in  gage  well  higher  than  that  in  river. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  79 


Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Sheep  Creek  near  Thane  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

10.8 

2.8 

17.0 

2.2 

41 

106 

98 

161 

63 

62 

53 

40 

2 

10.4 

2.6 

16.5 

2.0 

38 

85 

90 

90 

52 

64 

53 

41 

3 

9.6 

2.8 

15.5 

1.8 

36 

70 

101 

70 

48 

96 

40 

36 

4 

8.8 

3.0 

15.0 

1.8 

36 

90 

128 

64 

39 

110 

31 

33 

5 

8.0 

3.0 

14.5 

1.4 

36 

125 

98 

66 

40 

111 

41 

30 

6 

7.6 

3.0 

14.0 

1.0 

38 

139 

96 

66 

42 

118 

39 

27 

7 

8.8 

3.7 

13.0 

1.0 

55 

120 

176 

64 

42 

222 

75 

26 

8 

9.2 

7.0 

12.5 

1.0 

88 

101 

111 

60 

43 

155 

55 

24 

9 

9.2 

11.2 

12.5 

1.2 

75 

93 

88 

57 

43 

236 

47 

22 

10 

9.2 

14.5 

12.0 

1.2 

62 

78 

80 

60 

43 

152 

75 

20 

11 

8.8 

15.5 

11.2 

1.2 

53 

75 

73 

73 

43 

125 

80 

19 

12 

8.0 

15.5 

10.4 

1.4 

49 

75 

78 

66 

45 

125 

101 

18 

13 

6.7 

15.5 

10.0 

1.4 

53 

83 

66 

55 

93 

106 

125 

17 

14 

5.8 

17.5 

9.6 

1.2 

60 

93 

64 

55 

64 

98 

387 

16 

15.. 

4.9 

74 

10.0 

1.2 

62 

111 

73 

85 

96 

80 

176 

15 

16 

4.3 

62 

9.6 

1.2 

62 

88 

85 

117 

62 

66 

111 

15 

17 

4.0 

47 

9.  2 

1.4 

64 

85 

90 

111 

80 

57 

93 

14 

18 

3.7 

32 

8.8 

1.6 

68 

96 

167 

93 

185 

55 

147 

14 

19 

3.4 

27 

8.0 

2.2 

70 

111 

120 

219 

216 

51 

265 

13 

20 

3.2 

25 

7.0 

2.8 

68 

96 

117 

208 

270 

64 

265 

13 

21 

2.8 

23 

6.4 

3.7 

55 

96 

96 

122 

134 

51 

191 

13 

22 

2.6 

22 

5.8 

5.8 

49 

98 

78 

124 

124 

57 

147 

12 

23 

2.2 

22 

5.5 

9.6 

47 

83 

96 

114 

108 

64 

120 

12 

24 

1.6 

21 

5.2 

16 

43 

80 

101 

100 

86 

60 

93 

11 

25 

2.8 

20 

4.9 

25 

62 

80 

114 

80 

73 

55 

78 

10 

26 

4.0 

20 

4.6 

30 

75 

73 

161 

82 

85 

45 

80 

10 

27 

3.4 

19.0 

4.0 

31 

70 

70 

104 

149 

68 

43 

85 

9.6 

28 

3.2 

18.0 

3.7 

38 

60 

70 

83 

144 

73 

45 

68 

9.2 

29 

3.2 

3.4 

43 

70 

68 

73 

94 

90 

41 

53 

9.2 

30 

3.0 

3.0 

43 

75 

70 

66 

77 

78 

84 

38 

9.0 

31 

3.0 

2.6 

141 

109 

67 

83 

9.0 

Monthly  discharge  of  Sheep  Creek  near  Thane  for  1917. 

[Drainage  area,  4.57  square  miles. 1 


Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off. 

Month. 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

Per 

square 

mile. 

Depth  in 
inches  on 
drainage 
area. 

Total  in 
acre-feet. 

January 

10.8 

1.6 

5.68 

1.24 

1.43 

349 

February 

74 

2.6 

19.6 

4.29 

4.47 

1,090 

566 

March 

17 

2.6 

9. 21 

2.02 

2. 33 

April 

43 

1.0 

9.18 

2.  01 

2.  24 

546 

May 

141 

36 

60.0 

13.1 

15.10 

3,690 

5.370 
6,110 
5, 930 
5,020 
5, 520 

6. 370 
1,130 

June 

139 

68 

90.3 

19.8 

22. 09 

July 

176 

64 

99.4 

21.8 

25.13 

August 

219 

55 

96.5 

21.1 

24.33 

September 

270 

39 

84.3 

18.4 

20.53 

October 

236 

41 

89.7 

19.6 

22.  60 

November 

387 

31 

107 

23.4 

26.11 

December 

41 

9.0 

18.3 

4.00 

4.61 

The  year 

387 

1.0 

57.6 

12.6 

170.97 

41,700 

80 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


GOLD  CREEK  AT  JUNEAU. 

Location. — At  highway  bridge  at  lower  end  of  Last  Chance  basin,  200  feet  upstream 
from  diversion  dam  of  Alaska  Electric  Light  & Power  Co.,  and  one-fourth  mile 
from  Juneau. 

Drainage  area. — 9.47  square  miles  (determined  by  engineering  department  of 
Alaska  Gastineau  Mining  Co.,  from  surveys  made  by  that  company). 

Records  available. — July  20,  1916,  to  December  31, 1917. 

Gage. — Stevens  continuous  water-stage  recorder  on  left  bank  at  upstream  side  of 
highway  bridge.  A staff  gage  was  installed  September  19,  1916,  on  left  wing 
wall  of  diversion  dam  200  feet  downstream  and  used  in  determining  the  time  of 
changes  in  stage-discharge  relation  at  the  well  gage. 

Discharge  measurements. — At  medium  and  high  stages  made  from  gaging  bridge 
suspended,  at  right  angles  to  current,  from  floor  of  highway  bridge ; at  low  stages, 
made  by  wading  near  gage. 

Channel  and  control. — Station  is  at  lower  end  of  a flat  gravel  basin  three-fourths  j 
mile  long.  For  20  feet  upstream  from  gage  the  stream  is  confined  between  the 
abutments  of  an  old  bridge,  and  for  15  feet  downstream  it  is  confined  between  the  \ 
abutments  of  present  bridge.  For  a distance  of  130  feet  farther  downstream  the  ■ 
stream  is  confined  in  a narrow  channel  which  is  not  subject  to  overflow.  Because  I 
of  the  steep  gradient  of  channel  opposite  and  for  150  feet  below  gage,  a short  j 
stretch  of  the  channel  immediately  below  the  gage  acts  as  the  control.  The  ) 
operation  of  the  head  gates  of  flume  at  diversion  dam,  200  feet  downstream,  does  ; 
not  affect  the  stage-discharge  relation  at  gage,  but  the  swift  current  during  high 
stages  shifts  the  gravel  in  bed  of  stream,  thereby  causing  changes  in  the  stage- 
discharge  relation. 

Extremes  of  discharge. — 1916-17:  Maximum  mean  daily  discharge,  600  second- 
feet,  August  19,  1917;  minimum  mean  daily  discharge,  4 second-feet  February  : 
5 and  April  1, 1917. 

Ice. — Stage-discharge  relation  affected  by  ice  in  December. 

Diversion. — Water  diverted  at  several  points  upstream  for  power  development  is 
returned  to  creek  above  gage,  except  about  20  second-feet  for  7 months  (when 
there  is  a surplus  over  the  amount  used  by  the  Alaska  Electric  Light  & Power 
Co.,  which  has  the  prior  right)  and  1 second-foot  the  remainder  of  the  year  used 
by  the  Alaska  Juneau  Gold  Mining  Co.  The  dam  200  feet  downstream  diverts 
water  into  the  flume  of  the  Alaska  Electric  Light  & Power  Co. 

Regulation. — No  storage  reservoir  above  station  that  regulates  the  flow  more  than  ii 
a few  hours  in  low  water. 

Accuracy. — Stage-discharge  relation  changed  during  periods  of  high  water;  11  dis-  j 
charge  measurements  and  3 simultaneous  readings  of  water-stage  recorder  and 
staff  gage  at  diversion  dam  were  made  during  the  period,  by  use  of  which  rating 
curves  have  been  constructed  which  are  applicable  as  follows:  January  1 to 
April  24,  well  defined;  April  25  to  August  19,  well  defined  below  and  fairly  well  | 
defined  above  500  second-feet;  August  20  to  noon,  September  19,  poorly  defined; 
September  19-21,  poorly  defined;  September  22  to  October  8,  poorly  defined;  I 
October  9 to  December  31,  well  defined.  Operation  of  water-stage  recorder  satis-  9 
factory,  except  for  short  periods  indicated  in  footnote  to  daily-discharge  table.  I 
Daily  discharge  ascertained  by  applying  to  the  rating  table  daily  gage  height  I 
determined  by  inspecting  gage-height  graph,  or,  for  days  of  considerable  flue-  1 
tuation,  by  averaging  the  results  obtained  by  applying  to  rating  table  mean  i 
gage  heights  for  equal  intervals  of  the  day.  Records  fair. 


WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  81 
Discharge  measurements  of  Gold  Creek  at  Juneau  in  1917. 


Date. 

Made  by — 

Staff 
gage  of 
dam. 

Gage 

height.® 

Dis- 

charge. 

Date. 

Made  by— 

Gage 

height.® 

Dis- 

charge. 

Feb. 

23 

C.  0.  Brown... 

Feet. 

Feet. 
0. 34 

Sec.-ft. 

19 

Sept.  6 
20 

G.  H.  Canfield 

Feet. 

1.23 

Sec.-ft. 

58 

Apr. 

12 

do 

.01 

5.4 

do 

2.39 

255 

30 

do 

-0.05 

.80 

65 

25 

do 

1.65 

116 

May 

5 

do 

.61 

44 

Oct.  4 

do 

1.88 

151 

8 

do 

.67 

1.59 

228 

Nov.  6 

do 

.88 

46 

31 

G.  H.  Canfield . 

1.03 

1.98 

350 

20 

do 

2.  46 

439 

Sept. 

1 

1.48 

96 

Dec.  21 

do 

.33 

7.0 

a Gage  at  highway  bridge. 


Daily  discharge , in  second-feet,  of  Gold  Creek  at  Juneau  for  1917. 


Day. 

Jan. 

Feb. 

Mar. 

Apr. 

May. 

June. 

July. 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 

Nov. 

Dec. 

1 

9.0 

5.0 

13 

4.0 

58 

260 

302 

462 

102 

93 

79 

58 

2 

9.0 

4.7 

12 

4.4 

46 

195 

266 

230 

92 

85 

76 

52 

3 

8.1 

4.5 

11.5 

4.8 

51 

151 

325 

162 

80 

277 

62 

47 

4 

7.3 

4.3 

11.5 

5.2 

50 

190 

378 

135 

93 

235 

42 

43 

5 

6.1 

4.0 

11 

7.7 

43 

289 

263 

127 

72 

170 

55 

38 

6 

5.2 

5.0 

11 

7.0 

50 

308 

273 

145 

70 

145 

51 

35 

7 

13 

8.0 

10 

6.1 

107 

263 

411 

135 

72 

395 

97 

32 

8 

13 

9.0 

9.5 

5.8 

210 

202 

283 

124 

59 

230 

65 

28 

9 

10 

11 

9.0 

5.5 

162 

180 

200 

120 

51 

470 

45 

25 

10 

10 

13 

8.5 

5.5 

109 

145 

183 

129 

50 

315 

69 

23 

11 

9.5 

15 

8.5 

5.8 

83 

139 

178 

197 

55 

115 

105 

21 

12 

9.0 

15 

8.5 

5.5 

80 

164 

197 

147 

65 

186 

124 

18 

8.5 

17 

7.7 

5.5 

100 

183 

178 

107 

160 

177 

152 

16 

14 

8.1 

33 

7.7 

5.8 

118 

224 

157 

116 

121 

128 

587 

15 

15 

7.7 

206 

7.7 

6.7 

111 

279 

192 

254 

180 

101 

247 

13 

16 

7.7 

86 

7.3 

7.3 

111 

213 

226 

360 

100 

72 

94 

10 

17 

6.0 

59 

7.7 

9.0 

114 

216 

243 

325 

128 

62 

69 

9 

18 

7.7 

44 

7.7 

10 

129 

242 

444 

260 

431 

62 

179 

8 

19 

7.3 

42 

7.7 

12 

135 

299 

315 

600 

560 

63 

446 

8 

20 

6.0 

35 

7.7 

13 

135 

251 

282 

348 

2S0 

82 

505 

8 

21 

6.4 

27 

7.7 

13 

102 

266 

208 

235 

298 

58 

362 

8 

22 

5.8 

21 

7.7 

14 

91 

295 

171 

235 

370 

72 

279 

7 

23 

5.8 

17 

7.7 

18 

90 

227 

213 

185 

270 

86 

177 

7 

24 

10 

16 

7.7 

25 

107 

202 

276 

156 

170 

75 

142 

7 

25 

11 

14 

7.3 

38 

129 

202 

302 

111 

110 

58 

117 

7 

26 

7.0 

13 

6.7 

43 

141 

183 

376 

137 

135 

48 

130 

6 

27 

6.5 

14 

6.7 

46 

157 

176 

224 

390 

93 

41 

150 

6 

28 

6.2 

13 

6.4 

54 

176 

169 

171 

382 

118 

46 

96 

6 

29 

5.8 

6. 1 

65 

192 

171 

133 

227 

173 

51 

76 

6 

30 

5.5 

6. 1 

68 

185 

192 

116 

154 

140 

151 

06 

6 

31 

5.2 

5.8 

295 

280 

114 

158 

6 

Note. — Discharge  Jan.  3-6  and  Jan.  22  to  Feb.  11  estimated,  because  of  clock  stopping,  from  weather 
data  and  comparison  of  hydrograph  for  this  station  with  that  for  Sheep  Creek.  Discharge  Nov.  29  to 
Dec.  31  estimated,  because  stage-discharge  relation  was  affected  by  ice,  from  weather  records  and  one 
discharge  measurement. 


82  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Monthly  discharge  of  Gold  Creek  at  Juneau  for  1917. 


Month. 

Discharge  in  second-feet. 

Run-off 
(total  in 
acre-feet). 

Maximum. 

Minimum. 

Mean. 

January  

13.0 

5.2 

7.85 

483 

February 

206 

4.0 

27.0 

1,500 

518 

March 

13.0 

5.8 

8.  42 

April 

68 

4.0 

17.3 

1,030 
7, 260 

May . . 

295 

43 

118 

June 

308 

139 

216 

12,900 

15,400 

July 

444 

116 

251 

August 

600 

107 

220 

13,500 

9,340 

8,550 

9,400 

September 

560 

50 

157 

October 

470 

41 

139 

November 

587 

42 

158 

December 

58 

6 

18.7 

1,150 

The  year 

600 

4.0 

112 

81,000 

STORAGE  RESERVOIRS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA. 

In  1917  reconnaissance  was  made  of  some  of  the  streams  in  south- 
eastern Alaska  for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the  location,  size, 
and  elevation  of  lakes  which  may  be  used  as  storage  reservoirs. 
The  result  of  this  investigation  is  shown  in  the  table  which  follows. 
Elevations  of  the  lakes  above  sea  level  were  determined  by  aneroid 
barometer.  Areas  and  distances  were  estimated. 

Lakes  available  for  storage  reservoirs  in  southeastern  Alaska. 


Location  of  lakes. 

Area. 

Elevation 
above  sea 
level. 

First  lake  above  mouth  of  Mahoney  Creek  tributary  to  the  west  shore  of  George 
Inlet,  Reviliagigedo  Island,  one-fourth  mile  from  tidewater 

Acres. 

600 

Feet. 

75 

Second  lake  above  mouth  of  Mahoney  Creek,  2 miles  from  tidewater 

180 

2,000 

400 

A lake  2 miles  upstream  from  mouth  of  unnamed  creek  tributary  to  Thomas  Bay 
near  Petersburg.  Mouth  of  creek  is  1£  miles  north  of  Wind  Point  on  west  shore 
of  Thomas  Bay 

400 

First  lake  above  mouth  of  unnamed  creek  tributary  to  head  of  Cascade  Bay, 
Baranof  Island,  300  feet  from  tidewater 

100 

80 

Second  lake  above  mouth  of  the  foregoing  creek,  1£  miles  from  tidewater  at  head  of 
Cascade  Bay 

185 

Lake  500  feet  above  mouth  of  unnamed  creek  tributary  to  southern  entrance  to 
Patterson  Bay,  Baranof  Island 

500 

350 

Lake  300  feet  above  mouth  of  unnamed  creek  tributary  to  head  of  west  arm  of 
Patterson  Bay,  Baranof  Island 

200 

110 

Lake  1,000  feet  above  mouth  of  unnamed  creek  tributary  to  head  of  Big  Port 
Walter,  Baranof  Isiand 

450 

500 

First  lake,  one-fourth  mile  above  mouth  of  unnamed  creek  tributary  to  head  of 
Port  Armstrong,  Baranof  Island,  near  whaling  station 

200 

260 

Second  lake  above  mouth  of  the  foregoing  creek,  1 mile  from  tidewater 

400 

265 

A lake,  1 mile  above  mouth  of  unnamed  creek  tributary  to  head  of  Davidson  Inlet, 
Kosciusko  Island 

520 

WATER-POWER  INVESTIGATIONS  IN  SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA.  83 


MISCELLANEOUS  MEASUREMENTS. 

Miscellaneous  discharge  measurements  in  southeastern  Alaska  in  1917. 


Date. 

Stream. 

Tributary  to — 

Locality. 

Dis- 

charge. 

Mar.  7 

Mahoney  Creek.. 

George  Inlet,  Revil- 

One-fourth  mile  above  first  lake,  1J  miles 

Sec.-ft. 

2 

Oct.  13 

do 

lagigedo  Island. 

do 

above  beach  on  west  shore  of  George 
Inlet  1 mile  north  of  Beaver  Falls. 

300  feet  upstream  from  beach 

95 

Aug.  9 

Unnamed  creek . . 

Thomas  Bay,  mainland 

Mouth  at  low  tide,  11  miles  north  of 

45 

13 

near  Petersburg. 
Suloia  Bay,  Chichagof 

Wind  Point  on  west  shore  of  Thomas 
Bay. 

Mouth  at  low  tide,  at  head  of  small  bay 

18 

14 

do 

Island. 

Cascade  Bay,  Baranof 

at  north  end  of  Suloia  Bay. 

At  narrows  near  middle  of  first  lake, 

528 

15 

do 

Island. 

Patterson  Bay,  Baranof 

half  a mile  from  tidewater  at  head  of 
Cascade  Bay. 

Mouth  at  low  tide,  at  south  entrance  of 

90 

15 

..  do 

Island. 

do 

Patterson  Bay. 

Stream  at  head  of  small  cove  near  south- 

a  50 

16 

do 

do 

ern  entrance  of  Patterson  Bay. 

Mouth,  at  low  tide,  at  head  of  west  arm 

110 

17 

do 

Big  Port  Walter,  Bara- 

of Patterson  Bay. 

Near  outlet  of  lake  on  stream  at  head  of 

72 

20 

do 

nof  Island. 

Davidson  Inlet,  Kos- 

Big Port  Walter. 

Half  a mile  upstream  from  beach,  at 

57 

ciusko  Island. 

head  of  Davidson  Inlet. 

a Estimated. 


MINING  DEVELOPMENTS  IN  THE  KETCHIKAN  DISTRICT. 


By  Theodore  Chapin. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  mineral  output  of  the  Ketchikan  district  was  smaller  than  in 
1916.  Six  copper  mines  were  in  operation  and  at  two  other  places  mills 
were  in  course  of  construction.  A molybdenum  lode  was  opened  up 
near  Shakan  on  Prince  of  Wales  Island  and  is  in  course  of  develop- 
ment. One  gold  lode  mine  was  operated  for  a part  of  the  year,  and  gold 
and  silver  were  also  won  from  ores  mined  primarily  for  copper.  The 
decrease  in  mineral  production  is  due  in  part  to  the  closing  of  the 
Mamie  mine  for  some  months  during  the  year,  in  part  to  the  failure 
of  several  small  mines  to  make  any  production,  and  to  a general 
decrease  in  production  at  nearly  all  the  large  mines. 

PRODUCTION. 

The  gold,  silver,  and  copper  production  of  the  Ketchikan  district 
is  shown  in  the  following  table: 

Copper,  gold,  and  silver  produced  in  the  Ketchikan  mining  district  in  1915, 1916, 

and  1917. 


Ore 

Copper. 

Gold. 

Silver. 

Total 

mined. 

Quantity. 

Value,  a 

Quantity. 

Value. 

Quantity. 

Valued 

value. 

Tons. 

50,997 

76,111 

41,768 

Pounds. 
1,728, 182 
3,526,703 
2,643,543 

$302,431 
867,569 
721, 686 

Fine  oz. 
1,727. 38 
2, 769.  61 
2,545.71 

$35,708 
57, 253 
52,623 

Fine  oz. 
11,666 
19,361 
20, 218 

$5,914 
12, 640 
16,658 

$344,053 

937,462 

790,967 

a Computations  based  on  average  price  of  copper  in  1915  ($0,175),  1916  ($0,246),  and  1917  ($0,273). 
b Computations  based  on  average  price  of  silver  in  1915  ($0,507),  1916  ($0,658),  and  1917  ($0,824). 


PRINCE  OF  WALES  ISLAND. 

K ASA  AN  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 

The  Granby  Consolidated  Mining,  Smelting  & Power  Co.  (Ltd.) 
were  the  largest  operators  in  the  vicinity  of  Kasaan  Bay.  The  Mamie 
mine,  which  was  taken  over  by  the  Granby  Co.  in  1913,  was  closed 
down  in  the  spring,  and  work  was  increased  at  the  It  mine.  The  ore 
bodies  at  the  It  occur  in  limestone  near  the  contact  of  a large  intrusive 
mass  of  quartz  diorite  and  appear  to  have  formed  along  the  borders 

85 


86 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


of  an  older  dioritic  dike  now  largely  altered  to  epidote  and  other 
secondary  minerals.  The  ore  occurs  as  bunches  of  chalcopyrite  in 
the  altered  dike  and  in  the  garnet  rock  formed  by  the  replacement  of 
the  limestone.  The  power  plant  at  the  beach  is  equipped  with  a 
coal-burning  boiler  and  air  compressor.  During  the  summer  of  1917 
a geologic  map  of  the  vicinity  was  made  and  prospecting  was  carried 
on  which  has  led  to  the  discovery  of  other  surface  outcrops. 

The  Goodro  mine  near  the  head  of  Kasaan  Bay  changed  hands 
during  the  year  and  is  now  operated  by  the  Salt  Chuck  Mining  Co. 
No  production  was  made  during  1917.  Development  work  was 
carried  on,  and  a flotation  mill  that  was  started  in  the  spring  was 
completed  before  the  end  of  the  year.  The  mill  is  situated  on  the 
edge  of  the  salt  chuck.  The  ore  is  trammed  from  the  mine  to  the  mill, 
dumped  into  bins,  passed  over  a grizzly  into  a crusher,  and  con- 
veyed to  a 75-ton  bin,  from  which  it  is  automatically  fed  to  the  ball- 
mill  (using  four  sizes  of  chilled  steel  balls),  whence  it  is  taken  by  a 
bucket  conveyor  to  the  flotation  tank  for  treatment.  Mixtures  of 
pine  tar  and  creosote  will  be  used.  The  fines  are  frothed  off  and  go 
to  settling  tanks.  A scraper  belt  conveys  the  coarse  ore  and  gangue 
on  bottom  to  a trommel.  The  oversize  from  trommel  goes  to  the 
mill,  and  the  undersize  to  a Deister-Overstrom  table,  where  the  ore 
is  separated  from  the  gangue.  The  capacity  of  the  mill  is  60  tons  a 
day.  The  ore  bodies  are  in  gabbro,  and  the  ore  minerals  are  essen- 
tially bornite  and  chalcocite  and  lesser  amounts  of  other  copper 
sulphides.  The  ore  also  carries  gold  and  traces  of  platinum  and 
palladium.  Mine  assays  of  the  concentrates  show  copper  content  as 
high  as  81  per  cent,  indicating  the  presence  of  some  native  copper. 

The  Rush  & Brown  mine  near  the  head  of  Karta  Bay  was  operated 
on  about  the  usual  scale.  The  mine  is  developed  on  two  lodes,  a 
contact  deposit  of  copper-bearing  magnetite  and  a shear  zone  mineral- 
ized with  copper  sulphides.  The  new  working  shaft  on  the  sulphide 
ore  body  has  been  deepened  to  the  350-foot  level  and  drifts  extended 
each  side  of  the  shaft.  At  the  foot  of  the  shaft  is  an  ore  lens  from 
to  3 i feet  wide  composed  of  high-grade  chalcopyrite  together  with 
a little  pyrite.  The  entire  width  of  the  ore  body  at  this  level  is  not 
evident  but  in  the  upper  levels  it  is  from  4 to  14  feet  and  carries 
lenses  of  ore  from  2 to  4 feet  wide.  The  magnetite  ore  body  is  a 
contact  deposit  occurring  along  the  border  of  intrusive  diorite  and 
altered  sediments.  It  has  been  developed  by  a glory  hole  100  feet 
deep  and  by  workings  on  the  underground  levels  for  250  feet  in  depth. 
In  the  fall  of  1917  a boiler  for  a compressor  plant  was  being  installed. 

The  Paul  Young  prospect  is  about  a mile  southwest  of  the  Rush  & 
Brown  mine  on  the  first  stream  west  of  Iron  Creek,  at  an  elevation  of 
100  feet.  It  is  about  three-quarters  of  a mile  northwest  of  the  Venus 
claim  and  2 miles  from  the  coast.  The  deposit  occupies  a shear  zone 


MINING  DEVELOPMENTS  IN  THE  KETCHIKAN  DISTRICT.  87 

that  strikes  northwest  nearly  parallel  to  the  stream  and  is  exposed 
along  the  northeast  bank.  The  only  work  done  is  surface  stripping 
along  the  stream.  The  country  rock  is  black  slate,  and  the  ore 
occurs  in  calcite  veins  that  follow  an  intrusive  porphyry  dike.  The 
calcite  veins  carry  chalcopyrite  and  pyrite,  and  the  bordering  black 
slate  is  impregnated  and  veined  with  these  sulphides.  The  width  of 
the  deposits  is  not  evident,  but  they  appear  to  extend  beneath  the 
creek  bottom.  The  water  was  turned  from  its  course  for  a short 
distance  to  uncover  the  deposit  in  the  creek  bottom,  but  the  exposed 
rock  is  again  covered  with  gravel.  The  deposit  is  exposed  in  the 
creek  bank  250  feet  lower  down.  Here  the  black  slate  is  impregnated 
with  pyrite  and  chalcopyrite  which  accompany  tiny  reticulating 
quartz  veinlets. 

The  Rich  Hill  group  of  claims,  comprising  the  Rich  Hill,  Magnet, 
Buffer,  Ouray,  Interval,  and  Red  Snapper,  has  recently  been  opened 
up  and  is  now  being  developed  by  the  Granby  Co.,  who  have  the 
property  bonded.  The  claims  are  on  Kasaan  Peninsula,  about  2 
miles  southeast  of  Kasaan.  The  main  workings  are  on  the  Rich 
Hill  claim  and  are  confined  to  a single  lens  of  very  rich  chalcopyrite 
ore.  This  lens  was  opened  by  a cut  50  feet  long  and  20  to  30  feet 
deep  and  yielded  160  tons  of  ore,  which  brought  $20,000.  The  min- 
eralized zone  can  be  traced  northwest  and  southeast  of  the  open  pit 
for  some  distance,  and  a short  adit  is  now  being  run  to  cut  the  deposit 
below  the  floor  of  the  open  cut.  On  the  adjoining  claims  prospect- 
ing has  been  carried  on  and  a number  of  mineralized  lodes  have 
been  opened.  On  the  Ouray  claim  a wide  contact  zone  extends 
from  the  beach  to  an  elevation  of  450  feet.  The  rock  of  this  zone 
is  a garnet-epidote-magnetite  contact  rock  that  carries  chalcopyrite. 
Several  openings  have  been  made,  which  disclose  bodies  of  commer- 
cial ore. 

South  of  Kart  a Bay  and  northwest  of  Twelvemile  Arm,  including 
the  vicinity  of  Hollis,  is  a mineralized  area  in  which  gold  lodes  pre- 
dominate. The  country  rock  is  a complex  assemblage  of  igneous 
and  sedimentary  rocks.  The  bedded  rocks  include  tuff,  breccia, 
schist,  limestone,  black  slate,  argillite,  and  graywacke,  and  are  cut 
by  a large  boss  of  quartz  diorite  and  associated  porphyritic  dikes. 
The  lodes  are  quartz  veins  that  occur  in  the  intrusive  and  the  bedded 
volcanic  rocks  as  well  as  in  the  sediments. 

A number  of  lodes  have  been  opened  in  this  gold. quartz  belt  and 
several  small  plants  installed,  but  none  has  made  a large  production. 
This  strongly  mineralized  region  has  never  received  the  attention 
which  it  has  deserved,  and  no  doubt  will  be  developed  in  the  future. 
One  large  company  might  consolidate  a number  of  these  small  prop- 
erties and  operate  them  to  advantage. 


88 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  only  mine  in  this  region  that  was  operated  in  1917  was  the  Dut- 
ton mine,  on  Harris  Creek.  The  Cracker  jack  claims  join  the  Ready 
Bullion  and  extend  south  and  southeast.  On  the  surface  three  veins 
are  recognized,  known  as  the  lower,  middle,  and  upper  veins.  These 
are  approximately  parallel  and  form  a lode  system  following  intrusive 
porphyry  dikes  that  cut  the  black  slate.  The  dikes  and  black  slate 
strike  N.  25°  W.  and  dip  35°-60°  SW.  The  principal  work  has 
been  done  at  an  elevation  of  850  feet  at  No.  1 tunnel.  This  tunnel 
penetrates  black  slate  for  300  feet,  until  it  cuts  the  vein  and  drifts 
on  it  for  700  feet  along  the  hanging  wall  of  the  porphyry  dike.  The 
quartz  vein  borders  the  porphyry  for  a footwall  and  follows  a well- 
defined  hanging  wall,  although  above  the  wall  occur  parallel  quartz 
stringers  that  cut  pyritized  slate,  which  is  said  to  carry  both  gold 
and  silver.  The  hanging-wall  vein  averages  about  5 or  6 feet  across 
and  at  one  place  is  over  12  feet.  Along  the  footwall  of  the  dike 
a smaller  quartz  vein  occurs.  A number  of  other  adits  have  been 
opened  on  this  lode  system. 

The  Lucky  Nell  claim,  formerly  known  as  the  Flora  and  Nellie,  is 
about  8 miles  northwest  of  Hollis  on  the  divide  between  Maybeso  and 
Harris  creeks,  at  an  elevation  of  about  1,400  feet.  The  lode  is  a 
quartz  fissure  vein  in  porphyry.  It  is  being  developed  by  an  open 
cut  and  two  adits  with  a connecting  winze.  The  principal  work  has 
been  done  on  the  lower  adit,  which  has  been  driven  along  the  vein  for 
500  feet.  The  vein  strikes  about  N.  70°  E.  and  dips  65°-80°  SE. 
The  vein  is  marked  by  two  strong  walls  and  averages  about  4 feet 
in  width.  It  is  strongly  metallized  with  pyrite,  chalcopyrite,  galena, 
and  sphalerite,  and  is  reported  to  carry  high  values  in  gold  and 
silver. 

HETTA  INLET. 

The  Jumbo  mine  on  Copper  Mountain,  near  the  head  of  Hetta 
Inlet,  was  operated  on  about  the  usual  scale  but  experienced  some 
difficulty  in  getting  shipping  facilities  for  the  transportation  of  ore 
to  the  smelter.  The  mine  is  developed  on  large  contact  deposits 
along  intrusive  diorite  that  forms  the  footwall  of  the  deposits.  The 
hanging  wall  is  crystalline  limestone  and  metamorphosed  sediments. 
The  copper  deposits  are  irregular-shaped  bodies  of  chalcopyrite- 
pyrrhotite  ore  and  chalcopyrite-magnetite  ore  set  in  a gangue  of 
garnet,  calcite,  epidote,  and  diopside. 

Copper  prospects  were  being  opened  by  Hal  Gould  on  the  south 
end  of  Sukkwan  Island,  about  3 miles  northeast  of  Jackson  Passage. 
The  prospects  occur  in  a zone  of  contact  schist  along  the  border  of 
the  large  mass  of  intrusive  granite  that  occupies  the  interior  of  the 
island.  This  schist  has  been  prospected  along  the  granite  contact 
for  about  a mile,  and  throughout  this  distance  shows  more  or  less 


MINING  DEVELOPMENTS  IN  THE  KETCHIKAN  DISTRICT.  89 

mineralization.  In  places  it  is  impregnated  with  pyrite  and  in 
others  is  veined  with  stringers  of  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite  that 
follow  the  schistosity  of  the  rock  and  cut  across  it.  Only  surface 
work  had  been  done  in  1917. 

WEST  COAST. 

Development  work  was  continued  on  the  Big  Harbor  mine  in 
Trocadero  Bay,  but  no  production  was  made. 

A molybdenite  lode  has  recently  been  opened  up  near  Shakan. 
The  property  is  three-quarters  of  a mile  south  of  Shakan,  at  an  ele- 
vation of  600  feet.  The  deposit  has  been  known  for  several  years, 
but  when  first  discovered  the  molybdenite  was  mistaken  for  galena, 
and  when  the  assays  showed  negative  results  for  lead  the  property 
was  abandoned.  It  has  recently  been  relocated  by  W.  H.  Butt  and 
bonded  to  the  Alaska  Treadwell  Mining  Co.,  who  are  installing 
machinery  for  its  development. 

The  deposit  is  a fissure  vein  of  quartz,  about  6 feet  wide,  that  cuts 
diorite  but  occurs  near  the  contact  of  the  diorite  and  tuffaceous  sedi- 
ments. The  quartz  vein  contains  considerable  feldspar,  especially 
along  the  footwall,  where  in  places  it  resembles  an  igneous  rock. 
The  diorite  from  the  footwall  is  also  mineralized.  The  vein  carries 
molybdenite  and  also  chalcopyrite  and  pyrite.  The  vein  strikes  N. 
85°  E.  and  25°  S.  The  deposit  is  covered  by  two  claims,  the  Alaska 
Chief  Nos.  1 and  2.  « 

Aside  from  the  output  of  the  Vermont  Marble  Co.,  who  operated 
on  about  the  usual  scale,  there  was  no  production  of  marble.  Devel- 
opment work  was  continued  at  the  El  Capitan  quarry,  on  Dry  Pass, 
for  a part  of  the  summer,  and  a number  of  diamond-drill  holes  were 
put  down,  aggregating  1,000  feet.  The  cores  show  white  crystalline 
marble,  with  some  beds  of  blue  and  some  of  black  and  white. 


- 

• 

GEOLOGY  AND  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  THE  WEST  COAST 
OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


By  R.  M.  Overbeck. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Chichagof  Island  is  the  northernmost  of  the  larger  islands  of  the 
Alexander  Archipelago  of  southeastern  Alaska.  It  lies  in  the  northern 
part  of  the  Sitka  mining  district  between  latitude  57°  22'  and  58°  17' 
N.,  and  between  longitude  134°  50'  and  136°  33'  W.  The  geography, 
geology,  and  mineral  resources  of  the  west  coast  of  the  island  are  dis- 
cussed in  this  report.  The  mining  activity  in  the  region  during  1917 
was  as  follows:  One  gold  quartz  mine  was  operating;  steps  were  being 
taken  toward  opening  another  during  1917-18;  and  some  develop- 
ment work  was  being  done  on  a copper-nickel  property  north  of  Port- 
lock  Harbor,  and  on  copper  claims  near  the  head  of  Pint  a Bay.  The 
metals  found  so  far  on  the  west  coast  are  gold,  copper,  and  nickel. 
An  important  gypsum  mine  is  on  the  east  side  of  the  island  outside 
the  district  discussed  here. 

Investigations  of  the  geology  of  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island 
were  made  by  C.  W.  Wright 1 in  1905  and  by  Knopf  2 in  1910.  The 
reports  and  notebooks  of  these  men  have  been  consulted  in  the  prepa- 
ration of  this  report.  This  report,  though  supplementary  to  the 
earlier  work,  is  in  a sense  preliminary  to  a study  of  the  geology  of  the 
whole  island. 

During  1917,  about  two  months  of  actual  field  work  was  done  on 
the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island,  and  another  month  was  spent  in 
carrying  the  work  along  Peril  Strait,  in  making  a trip  to  Sitka,  and  in 
making  the  run  from  Juneau  to  the  field  and  from  the  field  to  Ketchi- 
kan. The  field  season  extended  from  August  25  to  November  9. 
The  party  consisted  of  one  geologist  and  two  boatmen.  The  chief 
object  of  the  work  was  the  investigation  of  deposits  of  the  war 
minerals — copper  and  nickel.  The  areal  geologic  work,  therefore,  was 
incidental  to  the  main  object  of  the  expedition.  The  shores  of  the 
island  from  Cross  Sound  to  the  head  of  Hooniah  Sound  were  mapped 
geologically,  but  only  a small  amount  of  work  could  be  done  in  the 
hills  back  from  the  shore  because  of  an  exceptionally  early  fall  of 

1 Wright,  F.  E.  and  C.  W.,  The  Ketchikan  and  Wrangell  mining  districts,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  347,  pp.  38-43,  1908. 

2 Knopf,  Adolph,  The  Sitka  mining  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  504, 1912. 


91 


92 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


snow.  The  base  maps  used  were  charts  of  the  Coast  and  Geodetic 
Survey,  some  of  which  have  been  published  and  some  of  which  were 
being  made  during  1917.  Capt.  C.  G.  Quillian,  of  the  U.  S.  S.  Patterson , 
aided  materially  in  the  work  of  mapping  by  supplying  base  maps  and 
the  data  which  had  been  collected  by  his  parties.  Acknowledgments 
are  also  due  to  Mr.  Stuart  Fleming,  Mr.  J.  Freeburn,  Mr.  Wm.  Free- 
bum,  Mr.  T.  Baker,  Mr.  W.  H.  Roessel,  and  Mr.  Nordley. 

GEOGRAPHY. 

Chichagof  Island  and  Baranof  Island  together  form  a triangular 
land  mass  which  has  its  base  along  Cross  Sound  and  Icy  Strait 
and  its  vertex  150  miles  south-southeast  of  the  center  of  the  base. 
Peril  Strait,  which  in  its  narrowest  part  is  only  a quarter  of  a mile 
wide,  separates  Chichagof  Island  from  Baranof  Island.  Lisianski 
Strait  cuts  Yacobi  Island,  the  northwest  corner  of  the  land  mass,  from 
Chichagof  Island.  Chatham  Strait,  a long  fiord  about  7 miles  wide, 
runs  along  the  east  side  of  the  island,  the  Pacific  Ocean  is  on  the  west, 
and  Cross  Sound  and  Icy  Strait  are  on  the  north.  Chichagof  Island  is 
irregularly  shaped;  its  greatest  dimension,  from  northwest  to  south- 
east, is  about  80  miles.  The  fiords,  Lisianski  Inlet,  Idaho  Inlet,  Port 
Frederick,  Tenakee  Inlet,  Peril  Strait,  Hooniah  Sound,  Slocum  Arm, 
and  Lisianski  Strait,  penetrate  far  into  the  island  and  give  it  a very 
long  shore  line.  The  straightness  of  these  fiords  and  the  parallelism 
of  some  of  them  is  a noticeable  feature  of  the  map  of  the  island.  Two 
types  of  shore  line  are  also  evident  on  the  map — one  the  ragged, 
island-fringed  outer  coast;  the  other  the  straight,  relatively  un- 
indented shores  of  the  fiords.  The  water  along  the  outer  coast  is 
comparatively  shallow,  and  16  miles  offshore  is  only  600  feet  deep. 
Along  the  straight  fiord  shores  the  600-foot  depth  contour  is  at  most 
places  not  more  than  half  a mile  from  shore.  Navigation  near  the 
outside  coast  is  somewhat  hazardous,  owing  to  the  numerous  rocks 
and  reefs,  but  a detailed  chart  of  the  southern  part  of  the  coast  has 
been  published  and  one  of  the  northern  part  is  being  prepared. 

The  west  coast  region  of  Chichagof  Island  is  extremely  rugged. 
The  mountains  rise  steeply  to  a general  elevation  of  about  2,300  feet 
and  here  and  there  a peak  rises  to  a height  of  more  than  3,000  feet. 
The  mountain  slopes  are  precipitous  and  in  many  places  give  foothold 
to  only  the  most  scanty  vegetation.  Countless  lakes  fill  the  valleys 
and  the  hollows  between  the  ridges.  Streams  are  numerous,  and 
owing  to  the  heavy  rainfall  are  large  compared  to  the  size  of  their 
drainage  basins.  Most  of  the  streams  head  in  lakes  and  run  over 
series  of  waterfalls  into  the  sea. 

A prominent  physiographic  feature  of  the  west  coast  of  the  island 
is  the  coastal  plain,  which  extends  from  Cross  Sound  to  Khaz  Head 
at  the  entrance  to  Slocum  Arm.  This  plain  at  Nickel  is  about  2 miles 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


93 


wide,  and  has  a general  elevation  near  the  shore  of  less  than  100  feet 
and  a maximum  elevation  of  about  300  feet.  The  plain  consists  of 
rounded  hills  and  low  knobs,  which  rise  above  a terrain  of  swamps 
and  small  ponds.  The  land  slopes  gently  upward  toward  the  inner 
edge  of  the  plain  and  then  rises  abruptly  to  elevations  of  over  2,000 
feet.  A scant  growth  of  jack  pine  covers  the  plain  in  some  of  its 
drier  portions,  and  a fair  growth  of  spruce  and  hemlock  covers  most 
of  the  higher  hills.  Just  south  of  Nickel  this  plain  leaves  the  main 
part  of  the  island,  and  it  is.  continued  in  the  islands  offshore  south- 
ward to  Khaz  Head,  beyond  which  the.  mountains  descend  steeply 
into  the  sea.  A continuation  of  the  coastal  plain  is  found  beneath 
the  sea  in  the  coastal  shelf,  which  extends  offshore  for  about  16  miles, 
beyond  which  the  sea  bottom  descends  steeply  in  the  next  4 miles 
to  a depth  of  3,300  feet. 

The  long,  narrow  arms  of  the  sea,  such  as  Slocum  Arm,  Lisianski 
Inlet,  Hooniah  Sound,  and  Tenakee  Inlet,  are  typical  fiords.  The 
sides  are  straight  and  steep,  and  the  water  reaches  depths  such  as 
are  not  again  encountered  for  16  miles  offshore.  Slocum  Arm,  for 
example,  is  nearly  700  feet  deep.  This  fiord  shows  another  charac- 
teristic of  fiords  in  that  it  has  a deep  central  portion  and  a relatively 
shallower  portion,  or  threshold,  near  its  entrance.  Broad,  low  valleys 
extend  from  the  head  of  the  fiords.  The  one  at  the  head  of  Slocum 
Arm  was  once  selected  as  a mail  route,  so  that  mail  might  be  carried 
from  Sitka  to  Chichagof  without  necessitating  an  outside  trip.  Low 
valleys  connect  the  heads  of  Lisianski  Inlet  with  Hooniah  Sound  and 
Port  Frederick  with  Tenakee  Inlet.  Small  streams  enter  all  these 
fiords  at  their  heads.  Deep  submarine  channels  can  be  traced  in  the 
submerged  coastal  shelf  for  some  distance  from  the  entrance  of  these 
fiords.  Such  channels  were  noted  at  the  entrance  to  Peril  Strait, 
Slocitm  Arm,  and  Lisianski  Strait. 

A view  of  the  west  coast  of  the  island  from  several  miles  out  at  sea 
shows  a number  of  broad  valleys  whose  ends  appear  to  be  shut  off 
from  the  sea  by  a relatively  low  barrier.  A near  view  of  one  of  these 
valleys  north  of  Nickel  from  the  mountains  surrounding  it  shows  the 
whole  floor  to  be  occupied  by  a- lake  of  apparently  great  depth.  The 
barrier  is  a low  row  of  hills  about  700  feet  high.  A stream  runs  from 
the  lake  to  the  sea  over  a series  of  waterfalls.  Such  a valley,  if 
drowned,  would  form  a typical  fiord  with  its  steep  sides,  its  deep 
central  portion,  and  its  threshold,  or  barrier,  at  its  entrance. 

The  population  of  Chichagof  Island  is  small,  possibly  800,  white 
and  native.  Chichagof,  the  only  town  on  the  west  coast,  has  a popu- 
lation of  about  200.  Tenakee  is  a health  resort  on  the  east  side  of 
the  island.  Gypsum,  a mining  camp  on  the  east  side,  has  a popu- 
lation of  about  50.  Hooniah  is  a native  town  at  the  entrance  to 
Port  Frederick.  There  are  canneries  at  Hooniah,  on  Ford  Arm,  and 
115086°— 19 7 


94 

at  Chatham;  and  new  ones  are  being  built  at  Stag  Bay  and  at  Port 
Althorp.  Sawmills  have  been  installed  on  Suloia  Bay  and  in  Pavlof 
Harbor.  Logging  is  carried  on  in  a small  way,  for  timber  is  needed 
in  driving  fish  traps,  making  boxes,  and  timbering  mines. 

Weekly  boat  service  connects  the  towns  on  the  east  and  north 
sides  of  the  island  with  Juneau.  The  Chichagoff  Mining  Co.  operates 
a boat  between  Chichagof  and  Juneau,  which  carries  a few  passengers 
and  which  makes  trips  about  once  a week.  Sitka,  on  Baranof  Island, 
is  a port  of  call  for  some  of  the  larger  steamers,  and  has  besides  a 
regular  weekly  service  to  Juneau.  Motor  boats  may  be  hired  at 
Juneau  and  at  Sitka  to  make  the  trip  to  Chichagof. 

Prospecting  on  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island  should  be  car- 
ried on  from  a motor  boat,  for  the  many  arms  and  fiords  make  much 
of  the  island  accessible  from  a small  boat.  The  shores  of  the  island  i 
have  already  been  rather  extensively  prospected,  but  the  country  a 
short  distance  back  from  the  shore  seems  to  be  relatively  unexplored  ' 
and  unknown.  The  west  coast  of  the  island  is  rocky,  and  the  weather  i 
is  often  stormy,  but  by  those  with  local  knowledge  of  the  waters  much 
of  this  coast  may  be  examined  from  the  smooth  water  behind  the  r 
islands.  In  about  50  miles  of  coast,  from  the  head  of  Slocum  Arm  ; 
to  the  southwest  entrance  to  Lisianski  Inlet,  only  about  8 miles  of 
outside  water  need  be  traversed.  Almost  any  point  within  the  island  i 
could  be  reached  on  a two  days’  trip. 

Timber  is  in  general  not  abundant  in  the  western  part  of  Chichagof  < 
Island.  The  character  and  abundance  of  timber,  however,  depends 
on  local  conditions.  Timber  line  lies  anywhere  from  1,500  to  over  • 
2,000  feet  in  elevation.  Two  conditions  restrict  the  growth  of  the  i 
trees,  the  precipitousness  of  the  slope  and  the  marshiness  of  the  \ 
ground.  The  more  central  portion  of  the  island,  visible  from  the  d 
high  peaks  near  the  shore,  is  almost  barren  of  trees.  Much  timber  j 
near  enough  to  the  shore  to  be  dropped  into  the  water  has  been  1 
already  cut.  Timber  for  the  Chichagoff  mine  and  for  the  sawmill  in  i 
Suloia  Bay  comes  from  Baranof  Island.  Spruce,  hemlock,  and  cedar  i 
are  the  principal  trees,  and  their  height,  thickness,  and  soundness  I 
vary  greatly  in  different  localities. 

The  climate  of  the  region  is  cool  and  moist,  and  precipitation  is  i 
frequent  and  heavy.  No  weather  records  have  been  kept  for  the  I 
west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island,  and  since  there  are  great  seasonal  and  :i 
local  variations  in  temperature  and  precipitation,  the  observations  I 
that  extend  over  only  a few  seasons  are  of  little  value.  Although  j 
the  average  annual  precipitation  at  Sitka,  for  instance,  is  about  88  I 
inches,  during  the  summer  of  1917  there  was  a precipitation  in  one  i 
month  of  over  23  inches. 

The  game  on  the  island  should  furnish  the  prospector,  at  certain  j 
seasons  of  the  year,  with  a considerable  part  of  his  food  supply. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


95 


The  principal  large  game  is  deer  and  bear.  Deer  are  very  plentiful. 
Minks  seem  to  be  rather  plentiful,  for  a number  of  them  were  seen 
during  the  summer  of  1917.  Ducks  and  geese  are  abundant  during 
certain  seasons. 

GEOLOGY. 

PRINCIPAL  FEATURES. 

The  geology  of  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island  is  complex. 
This  complexity  is  the  result  largely  of  extensive  intrusion,  which 
has  metamorphosed  the  rocks  cut  by  the  intrusive  bodies  and  has 
complicated  their  structure.  Both  dynamic  and  contact  metamorphic 
rocks  are  found  along  the  coast  north  of  Dry  Pass  and  along  Peril 
Strait;  dynamic  metamorphic  rocks  prevail  in  Portlock  Harbor  and 
on  Slocum  Arm.  The  dynamic  metamorphism  is  probably  directly 
related  to  the  intrusion  of  the  larger  igneous  bodies.  The  geology  of 
the  island  will  be  discussed  under  the  following  heads:  (1)  Undiffer- 
entiated metamorphic  rocks;  (2)  graywacke;  (3)  igneous  rocks; 
(4)  development  of  the  topographic  features.  The  rocks  of  the 
undifferentiated  metamorphic  series  are  sheared  conglomerate,  lime- 
stone, argillite,  tuff,  flow  rock,  and  intrusive  rock,  and  several  types 
of  schist.  No  determinable  fossils  were  found  in  these  rocks;  and 
although  the  rocks  constituting  this  series  may  be  of  different  ages, 
they  are  probably  older  than  Jurassic  or  Lower  Cretaceous.  The 
graywacke  series  consists  of  graywacke,  of  some  slaty  and  argillaceous 
beds,  and  of  a little  greenstone.  The  igneous  rocks  are  both  intrusive 
rocks  and  flow  rocks.  Granite,  quartz  diorite,  diorite,  alaskite,  aplite, 
hornblende  gabbro,  norite,  greenstone,  and  possibly  some  andesite 
are  the  types  of  rock  represented.  Quaternary  deposits  are  practically 
absent,  but  the  results  of  the  action  .of  the  ice  are  remarkably  well 
shown  by  the  topographic  features. 

UNDIFFERENTIATED  METAMORPHIC  ROCKS. 

DISTRIBUTION  AND  CHARACTER. 

The  undifferentiated  metamorphic  rocks  occur  on  Lisianski  Strait 
and  Inlet,  in  the  bays  on  the  east  side  of  Portlock  Harbor,  and  at 
places  on  Slocum  Arm  and  on  Peril  Strait.  (See  Pl.  II.)  The 
quartz -mica  schist  at  the  south  entrance  to  Lisianski  Strait  (at  Canoe 
Pass)  and  the  rocks  along  the  seashore  from  Canoe  Pass  to  Dry  Pass 
are  mapped  as  graywacke,  because  gradations  from  graywacke  into 
these  rocks  can  be  traced,  and  these  rocks  consequently  are  believed 
to  be  the  metamorphic  equivalents  of  the  graywacke.  The  rocks  of 
the  east  and  west  shores  of  the  north  end  of  Lisianski  Strait  and  those 
along  Peril  Strait  and  Hooniah  Sound,  which  are  of  somewhat 
different  appearance  from  the  rocks  along  the  outer  coast,  may  be 
of  different  age. 


96 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Under  the  heading  of  undifferentiated  metamorphic  rocks  will  be 
considered  all  those  rocks  that  seem  to  underlie  the  graywacke. 
Metamorphosed  sedimentary,  volcanic,  and  intrusive  rocks  are 
included  in  the  group,  but  at  most  places  it  is  difficult  and  at  many 
places  impossible  to  tell  whether  the  rock  was  originally  sedimentary 
or  igneous.  The  rocks  in  their  present  metamorphosed  state  are 
chlorite  schist,  hornblende  schist,  schistose  greenstone,  quartz-mica 
schist,  schistose  limestone,  sheared  conglomerate,  and  tuff.  The 
chlorite  schist,  hornblende  schist,  and  schistose  greenstone  are  green 
and  at  some  places  show  contorted  banding.  The  quartz-mica  schist 
is  a fine-grained  dark-brown  rock  (gray  on  weathered  surface)  which 
breaks  into  flat  pieces,  and  the  original  bedding  is  represented  by 
wavy  bands  of  slightly  different  shades  of  brown.  The  schistose 
limestone  is  dark  blue  where  impure  and  white  where  pure;  the 
impure  variety  shows  banding  and  some  augen  texture,  and  the  white 
limestone,  or  marble,  is  greatly  fractured  but  does  not  show  banding. 
The  sheared  conglomerate  have  augen  texture.  The  tuffs  are  red, 
gray,  and  nearly  black,  and  show  shearing  and  confused  and  contorted 
banding. 

Green  rocks — hornblende  schist,  chlorite  schist,  and  sheared  green- 
stone— are  numerous  in  the  group  of  the  undifferentiated  meta- 
morphic rocks.  They  occur  wherever  these  rocks  are  found  but  are 
particularly  abundant  in  Portlock  Harbor.  Most  of  the  rocks  of 
Portlock  Harbor  are  sheared  greenstone,  although  in  the  field  it  is 
not  always  possible  to  tell  the  altered  greenstone  from  a green  con- 
glomerate or  a green  graywacke.  Some  of  the  greenstones  are  seen 
under  the  microscope  to  be  very  amygdaloidal,  and  these  are  probably 
flows;  others  are  porphyritic  and  fairly  coarse  grained  and  may 
represent  either  flows  or  intrusives.  Chlorite  is  the  most  abundant 
green  mineral  to  form  and  in  the  amygdaloidal  greenstones  both 
chlorite  and  epidote  fill  the  amygdules.  Calcite  is  fairly  abundant 
as  an  alteration  mineral  but  is  not  nearly  so  abundant  in  these  rocks 
as  in  the  altered  greenstones  of  the  Eagle  River  region.  The  green 
schist  at  the  Snowball  prospect  consists  of  chlorite  and  quartz,  and 
its  original  nature  can  not  be  told.  The  dark-green  rocks  at  the 
entrance  to  Lisianski  Strait,  in  Canoe  Pass,  and  near  Porcupine 
Harbor  probably  represent  altered  basic  intrusives.  The  green  rocks 
at  the  head  of  Sister  Lake  and  at  the  head  of  Deep  Bay  may  be  green- 
stone. The  light-green  chlorite  schist  at  the  entrance  to  Stag  Bay 
and  on  Soapstone  Point  are  highly  altered  rocks  and  do  not  preserve 
enough  of  their  original  characteristics  to  enable  a definite  determina- 
tion  to  be  made.  The  rocks  on  Soapstone  Point  somewhat  resemble 
greenstones  in  texture.  Variegated  black  and  green  rocks  were  seen 
at  a number  of  places,  but  no  satisfactory  identification  of  them  has 
yet  been  made.  The  apparent  abundance  of  green  rock  is  believed 
to  be  due  partly  to  the  action  of  sea  water  on  the  rock.  At  many 


mat  USi.'rtftjf 

OF  TNE 

iip  ft  f 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND.  97 

places  where  green  rocks  are  exposed  at  the  water  line,  gray  rocks 
occur  in  outcrops  away  from  the  water  line. 

The  rocks  along  the  shore  from  Dry  Pass  to  Canoe  Pass  are  chiefly 
dark-colored  schists  of  rather  fine  grain  and  of  uniform  appearance, 
in  which  an  abundance  of  mica  (mainly  biotite)  has  developed  and 
in  which  quartz  is  also  very  abundant.  At  places  the  typical  meta- 
morphic  minerals,  such  as  andalusite  and  corundum,  occur.  These 
schists  weather  light  gray  and  tend  to  break  into  rather  smooth 
blocks.  They  do  not  show  extensive  crinkling,  such  as  is  seen  in 
some  of  the  other  schists.  The  gradation  of  this  type  of  schist  into 
the  rocks  of  the  graywacke  series  can  be  traced  along  the  shores  of 
Dry  Pass,  and  there  can  be  little  doubt  that  this  schist  represents 
the  product  of  the  alteration  of  graywacke,  and  as  such  it  is  indicated 
on  the  map  (PI.  II).  A similar  type  of  alteration  was  found  on  the 
outer  sides  of  Hill  Island  and  of  Peel  Island. 

There  are  at  least  three  beds  of  limestone  in  the  rocks  of  the 
undifferentiated  series.  One  bed,  about  50  feet  thick,  more  or  less, 
occurs  at  the  mouth  of  Didrickson  Bay  and  on  both  sides  of  Deep 
Bay  ; a thinner  bed  of  dark-bluish  impure  limestone,  in  which  indeter- 
minate fossils  were  found,  lies  north  of  the  entrance  to  Didrickson  Bay 
and  again  just  within  the  mouth  of  Deep  Bay.  A thin  bed  of  lime- 
stone lies  close  to  the  contact  with  graywacke,  both  in  Portlock 
Harbor  and  in  Slocum  Arm.  A rather  thick  bed  of  limestone  occurs 
on  the  ridge  that  runs  between  Davison  Peak  and  Baker  Peak  and  at 
the  head  of  Pinta  Bay.  This  bed  of  limestone  can  probably  be  corre- 
lated with  the  so-called  limestone  “dike”  that  stretches  apparently 
uninterruptedly  from  Baker  Peak  to  White  Mountain.  Marble  was 
found  on  Peril  Strait  near  Poison  Cove,  in  Ushk  Bay,  Patterson  Bay, 
and  at  the  head  of  Hooniah  Sound. 

The  schistose  rocks  near  the  north  end  of  Lisianski  Strait  are 
mostly  obscure,  but  they  are  thought  to  be  in  large  part  of  sedi- 
mentary origin.  They  are  dark  and  are  extensively  cut  by  dikes 
and  by  rather  abundant  quartz  and  calcite  stringers.  The  rocks 
along  Peril  Strait  are  somewhat  similar  in  appearance,  although 
these  are  known  to  be  partly  sedimentary  because  of  the  presence  of 
limestones.  At  most  places  it  is  difficult  to  differentiate  these  rocks 
from  the  igneous  rocks  with  which  they  are  associated.  It  would 
seem  that  these  rocks  might  be  of  different  age  from  the  rocks  of 
Portlock  Harbor,  both  because  they  are  of  somewhat  different 
appearance  and  because  they  lie  to  the  east  and  apparently  under 
the  beds  of  Portlock  Harbor. 

Many  of  the  gray  schistose  rocks  are  indeterminate  in  character, 
but  some  of  them  are  closely  associated  with  flow  rocks,  and  these 
are  believed  to  be  in  part  tuffs.  A rock  of  this  kind  from  Pinta  Bay 
is  seen  under  the  microscope  to  consist  of  crushed  pieces  of  fine- 
grained igneous  rocks. 


98 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  metamorphic  rocks  are  probably  of  two  types — dynamic- 
metamorphic  rocks  and  contact-met  amorphic  rocks.  Weathering,  as 
a type  of  metamorphism,  will  not  be  discussed  here.  By  dynamic 
metamorphism  is  meant  alteration  in  the  rocks,  as  originally  deposited 
or  intruded,  brought  about  by  the  action  of  differential  pressures. 
Under  differential  pressure  rock  cleavage  is  developed  and  new 
minerals  are  formed  in  the  original  rocks.  The  rocks  consequently 
lose  much  of  their  original  character,  and  rocks  entirely  different  in 
color,  texture,  and  mineral  composition  are  formed.  It  is  impossible 
in  many  specimens  to  determine  what  the  original  character  of  the 
rocks  really  was.  In  contact-metamorphism  changes  in  the  rocks 
intruded  by  an  igneous  body  are  brought  about  by  pressure  due  to 
the  intrusion,  by  rise  in  temperature,  and  by  addition  of  material 
from  the  igneous  body.  The  results  of  contact  metamorphism  and 
dynamic  metamorphism  are  commonly  the  same;  so  that  it  may  be 
impossible  to  tell  whether  a specimen  is  the  result  of  one  or  the  other 
process.  No  attempt  has  been  made  here  to  differentiate  the  two 
types. 

In  the  metamorphic  rocks  under  discussion  chlorite  is  one  of  the 
most  abundant  secondary  minerals  formed,  but  hornblende,  mica^ 
corundum,  and  staurolite  are  locally  abundant.  Schistosity  has 
developed  extensively,  and  where  bedding  can  be  recognized  it  is 
approximately  parallel  with  the  schistosity.  Bedding  was  seen  in  the 
quartz-mica  schist  and  in  the  sheared  conglomerates  and  limestone. 

These  rocks  are  naturally  faulted  and  jointed,  and  secondary 
cleavage  has  developed.  Faulting  was  noticed  at  the  entrance  to 
Black  Bay.  Joints  or  secondary  cleavage  planes  have  at  places 
formed  rather  extensively,  perpendicular  to  the  schistosity.  The  dip 
of  the  schistosity  and  of  the  beds  at  most  places  on  Slocum  Arm  and 
in  Portlock  Harbor  is  steep  toward  the  southwest;  the  strike  is 
nearly  northwest.  Along  Lisianski  Strait  the  dip  of  the  schistosity 
is  toward  the  northeast,  and  the  strike  varies  between  northwest  and 
north.  Even  at  the  contact  with  the  batholith  the  dips  are  northeast 
and  hence  toward  the  batholith.  Along  Peril  Strait  the  beds  are 
extensively  intruded  by  bodies  of  igneous  rock,  and,  as  might  be 
expected,  strikes  and  dips  differ  greatly  in  direction  and  amount 
from  place  to  place. 

The  present  structure  of  the  rocks  is  thought  to  be  due  to  the 
intrusion  of  a great  mass  of  granodioritic  rock  on  the  island, 
which,  in  forcing  its  way  up  through  the  rocks,  squeezed  and  folded 
them.  The  rocks  at  most  places  dip  away  from  this  batholith. 
The  apparently  anomalous  dip  of  the  rocks  along  Lisianski  Strait 
may  have  been  caused  by  a still  later  intrusion  of  igneous  rock  repre- 
sented by  the  dioritic  intrusion  at  the  entrance  to  the  strait  or  it 
may  have  been  caused  by  slumping  at  the  edge  of  the  batholith. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


99 


AGE  AND  CORRELATION. 

Rocks  of  different  ages  are  probably  included  in  the  group  of 
undifferentiated  metamorphic  rocks.  No  determinable  fossils  were 
found  in  these  rocks,  and  their  relationships  to  rocks  of  known  geologic 
age  are  not  everywhere  clear;  consequently  their  position  in  the  geo- 
logic column  can  not  be  assigned  with  any  degree  of  certainty.  At 
all  places  except  one  these  rocks  appear  to  underlie  the  graywacke; 
but  as  the  rocks  at  this  one  place  where  they  overlie  the  gray- 
wacke are  lithologically  similar  to  the  rocks  that  everywhere  else 
underlie  the  graywacke,  it  is  assumed  that  faulting  has  occurred. 
At  most  places  transitional  beds  lie  between  the  typical  meta- 
morphic rocks  and  the  typical  graywacke.  Structurally  the  two 
groups  appear  to  be  conformable,  for  the  strikes  and  the  dips  are 
the  same  in  both.  The  underlying  beds  seem  to  be  more  meta- 
morphosed than  the  graywacke,  but  metamorphism  is  a function  of 
the  original  character  of  beds  that  are  altered  as  well  as  of  .the  intensity 
of  the  metamorphosing  forces.  Very  hard  quartzose  rocks  like  sand- 
stone would  probably  undergo  less  change  than  the  soft  and  relatively 
complex  volcanic  rocks  and  shaly  and  calcareous  sedimentary  rocks. 
These  highly  metamorphosed  rocks,  too,  lie  nearer  the  batholith,  which 
is  thought  to  be  the  cause  of  much  of  the  metamorphism,  than  the 
graywacke.  Nothing  definite  can  be  known  about  the  relations  of 
the  metamorphosed  rocks  of  Lisianski  Inlet  and  Peril  Strait  to  the 
metamorphosed  rocks  that  immediately  underlie  the  graywacke. 
The  two  groups  are  lithologically  different,  but  this  difference  may 
be  due  either  to  an  original  difference  in  type  or  to  more  intensive 
metamorphism.  If  the  beds  along  the  outer  part  of  Chichagof  Island 
are  part  of  the  west  limb  of  an  anticline  1 the  beds  on  Peril  Strait 
and  Lisianski  Inlet,  which  lie  nearer  the  center  of  the  anticline, 
would  be  older  than  the  beds  of  Slocum  Arm  and  Portlock  Harbor 
and  probably  of  a different  geologic  age. 

Lithologic  correlation  of  these  rocks  with  the  rocks  of  other  dis- 
tricts may  be  suggestive  but  can  not  be  of  great  scientific  value.  In 
the  Juneau  district 2 is  a series  of  tuffs,  slates,  flows,  and  limestone 
in  which  Triassic  fossils  have  been  found.  Chapin  3 correlates  some 
of  these  rocks  of  the  Juneau  district  with  the  beds  along  the  east  side 
of  Gravina  Island  and  some  of  them  with  the  rocks  along  the  west  coast 
of  Gravina  Island.  The  beds  along  the  east  side  of  Gravina  Island 
are  thought  to  be  of  Triassic  and  Jurassic  age  and  those  along  the 
west  coast  are  of  Triassic  age.  The  lithologic  similarity  of  the  sec- 
tions of  the  Juneau  district,  of  Gravina  Island,  and  of  the  west  coast 

1 Wright,  F.  E.  and  C.  W.,  The  Ketchikan  and  Wrangell  mining  districts,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  347,  p.  38, 1918. 

2 Brooks,  A.  H.,  unpublished  notes. 

8 Chapin,  Theodore,  unpublished  notes. 


100 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


of  Chichagof  Island  is  at  once  evident.  Chapin  1 2 separates  the  rocks 
that  immediately  underlie  the  graywackes  of  Gravina  Island  into  two 
parts — “a  lower  series  of  purely  igneous  material,  mainly  coarse 
pyroclastic  rocks  and  breccias,  and  an  upper  series  of  mixed  water- 
laid  tuffs  and  black  slates  and  limestone,  with  porphyritic  basic  rocks 
of  similar  composition,  evidently  partly  intrusive  and  partly  explo- 
sive.’J 2 In  Portlock  Harbor  the  rocks  near  the  contact  are  chiefly 
water-laid  and  those  in  the  bays  are  most  generally  igneous.  Tenta" 
tively,  then,  the  rocks  that  underlie  the  graywacke  on  the  west  coast 
of  Chichagof  Island  are  correlated  with  the  rocks  that  underlie  the  slate 
and  graywacke  of  Gravina  Island  and  which  are  placed  by  Chapin 3 
in  the  Upper  Triassic  or  Jurassic.  The  Wrights,4  however,  correlate 
the  series  of  slate,  greenstone,  lava,  tuff,  and  other  material,  on  the 
west  coast  of  Baranof  and  Chichagof  islands,  with  lithologically 
similar  rocks  on  Douglas  Island,  Cleveland  Peninsula,  and  Gravina 
Island  which  they  class  as  of  Permian  or  Pennsylvanian  age.  To  the 
north  of  Icy  Strait,  in  Glacier  Bay,  the  Silurian  is  represented  by 
great  thicknesses  of  limestone  which  are  underlain  by  a thick  argillite 
series  of  rocks.  No  thick  limestones  and  no  great  amount  of  argillite 
were  seen  on  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island.  On  the  east  side 
of  Chichagof  Island  the  lower  Carboniferous  is  represented  by  a thick 
series  of  limestone  of  a distinctive  character.  No  rocks  of  this  type 
were  seen  here.  These  facts  do  not  assist  much  in  determining  the 
age  of  the  rocks,  but  they  at  least  indicate  possible  correlations. 

GRAYWACKE. 

DISTRIBUTION  AND  CHARACTER. 

Graywacke  extends  along  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island  from 
Peril  Strait  to  Dry  Pass.  The  term  graywacke  is  used  here  in  the 
sense  of  a group  of  rocks  in  which  graywacke  is  the  prevailing  rock 
type.  North  of  Dry  Pass  the  graywacke  has  been  metamorphosed 
to  a quartz-mica  schist;  south  of  Peril  Strait  it  continues  beyond  the 
region  mapped.  The  graywacke  proper  forms  a band  that  has  a 
maximum  width  of  about  5 miles,  an  average  width  of  3 miles,  and 
a length  of  35  miles.  The  actual  width  of  this  band  may  be  greater, 
for  on  its  western  side  it  passes  beneath  the  sea.  The  metamorphic 
graywacke,  or  quartz-mica  schist,  extends  from  Dry  Pass  to  Lisianski 
Strait,  the  northern  limit  of  the  area  mapped,  a distance  of  7 miles. 
Exposures  of  these  rocks  are  almost  continuous  along  the  shores 
within  the  belt.  The  outer  coast  from  a point  about  a mile  south 

1 Chapin,  Theodore,  The  structure  and  stratigraphy  of  Gravina  and  Revillagigedo  Islands,  Alaska:  U.  S. 
Geol  Survey  Prof.  Paper  120-D,  pp.  83-100, 1918. 

2 Idem,  p.  95. 

3 Chapin,  Theodore,  op.  cit. 

4 Wright,  F.  E.  and  C.  W.,  The  Ketchikan  and  Wrangell  mining  districts,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  347,  p.  35,  1908. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


101 


of  Khaz  Head  to  Leo  Anchorage  could  not  he  approached  because 
of  stormy  weather,  but  from  its  general  appearance  and  from  the 
reports  of  prospectors  it  is  believed  to  form  a part  of  the  graywacke 
area  and  is  so  mapped. 

In  the  general  group  term  “graywacke”  are  included, besides  gray- 
wacke, some  slate,  argillite,  conglomerate,  and  greenstone.  Gray- 
wacke is  naturally  the  prevailing  rock  type,  and  the  other  types 
occur  in  relatively  small  amount.  Uniformity  in  appearance  char- 
acterizes the  outcrops  of  these  rocks,  which  at  most  places  are  weath- 
ered a somber  reddish  brown,  greenish  gray,  or  ash-gray.  The  rocks 
are  massive  and  are  greatly  fractured  and  jointed.  Where  the  rather 
coarse  sandy  graywacke  predominates  bedding  can  rarely  be  detected, 
hut  where  the  rocks  are  argillaceous  parallel  bedding  is  fairly  com- 
mon. Thin  stringers  of  argillitic  material  run  through  the  massive 
graywacke,  and  these  weather  out  and  allow  the  graywacke  to  break 
down  into  rather  large  lenticular  pieces.  At  other  places  series  of 
parallel  joints  are  common,  and  here  the  graywacke  breaks  into  large 
flat-sided  blocks. 

Variations  in  outcrop  from  the  one  just  described  naturally  exist. 
In  places  the  beds  are  fine  grained,  sandy,  and  argillaceous,  and  in  these 
places  a type  of  ribbon  structure  occurs  which  is  formed  by  an  alter- 
nation of  sandy  and  argillaceous  beds,  an  inch  or  less  thick,  of  some- 
what different  color.  Along  the  southwest  side  of  Slocum  Arm  the 
rocks  are  typical  dark  slates  which  contain  concretions  of  limestone. 
Near  the  head  of  Slocum  Arm  are  dark  beds  of  fine  graywacke  and 
argillite,  in  which  fossils  were  found.  On  Ford  Arm  near  the  head 
is  a very  coarse  conglomerate.  In  Ogden  Passage  a little  greenstone 
is  included  in  the  graywacke. 

Fresh  graywacke  is  a dark  massive  rock  of  medium  gram,  whose 
color  and  granularity  do  not  differ  greatly  hi  different  specimens. 
The  rock  is  hard  and  fresh  looking,  and  in  the  medium-grained  varie- 
ties glassy  quartz  and  angular  particles  of  slate  set  in  a dense,  dark 
groundmass  can  be  seen.  The  rock  is  an  indurated  impure  sand- 
stone, but  the  fine-grained  varieties  may  easily  be  mistaken  for  a fine- 
grained igneous  rock.  A specimen  from  the  mountain  between  the 
head  of  Slocum  Arm  and  Leo  Anchorage  is  a breccia  in  which  are 
large  angular  particles  of  slate  in  a brownish  sandy  groundmass. 
Conglomerate  occurs  on  Ford  Arm,  in  Ogden  Passage,  and  on  Slocum 
Arm.  The  conglomerate  on  Ford  Arm  consists  of  rounded  pebbles 
and  boulders  in  a sandy  matrix.  The  pebbles  in  the  conglomerate 
are  3 inches  or  less  in  diameter,  but  many  boulders  from,  3 inches  to 
6 inches  in  diameter  occur.  The  pebbles  are  graywacke,  sandstone, 
chert,  light,  fine-grained  igneous  rock,  and  limestone.  Quartz  is  not 
abundant.  Many  pebbles  are  sheared  across.  The  conglomerate 
is  at  least  a hundred  feet  thick  here,  but  it  could  not  be  found  along 


102 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


its  strike  on  the  west  side  of  the  Arm.  Conglomerates  were  found  in 
other  places,  but  none  could  compare  with  this  one  in  thickness  or  in 
coarseness  of  grain.  A conglomerate  seen  on  Peril  Strait  contains 
rather  abundant  pebbles  of  coarse-grained  igneous  rock. 

The  microscope  gives  a better  idea  of  the  composition  and  texture 
of  the  rock  than  the  examination  with  a hand  lens.  The  graywacke 
is  seen  to  consist  of  mineral  grains  and  fragments  of  rock  set  in  a 
very  fine  carbonaceous  groundmass  of  undeterminable  material. 
The  grains  are  somewhat  rounded,  but  characteristically  they  are 
angular.  The  mineral  grains  are  quartz,  feldspar,  and  hornblende. 
The  rock  fragments  are  fine  grained  and  for  the  most  part  indeter- 
minate, but  some  fine-grained  igneous  rocks  were  seen.  The  dark 
carbonaceous  pieces  are  probably  particles  of  slate.  A little  calcite 
and  some  particles  of  schist  were  noted  in  some  of  the  thin  sections. 

At  fairly  close  intervals  white  quartz  veins  of  various  sizes  cut  the 
rocks  of  the  graywacke  series.  These  quartz  veins  are  of  two  types — 
one  occurs  in  shear  zones  and  recements  the  crushed  material,  the 
other,  known  as  “frozen  veins”  by  the  prospectors,  is  composed  of 
simple  quartz  stringers  that  cut  across  the  beds  of  the  formation 
and  are  not  related  to  recognizable  shear  zones.  Mineralization  has 
taken  place  in  veins  of  the  first  type.  The  “frozen”  stringers  rarely 
show  the  iron  stain  that  indicates  the  presence  of  sulphides  and 
possible  gold  mineralization,  and  they  do  not  seem  to  be  of  more  than 
local  extent. 

The  source  of  the  material  of  which  the  graywacke  is  formed  is 
not  known.  The  angularity  of  the  particles  would  indicate  that 
they  have  not  been  transported  for  a long  distance.  The  presence 
of  the  quartz,  of  the  relatively  little-altered  feldspar  fragments,  and 
of  the  pieces  of  fine-grained  igneous  rock  would  indicate  that  an  area 
of  igneous  rock  furnished  a part  of  the  material.  The  conglomerates, 
however,  carry  but  little  coarse-grained  igneous  material,  such  as  is 
found  in  the  interior  of  the  island  at  the  present  time.  As  little  dark 
slate  is  found  in  the  rocks  that  underlie  the  graywackes,  the  source 
of  the  particles  of  slate  in  the  graywackes  is  not  known.  It  is 
possible  that  an  unconformity  may  exist  between  the  two  series  and 
that  the  slaty  rocks  have  been  removed  by  later  erosion.  The 
rounded  limestone  pebbles  in  the  conglomerates  might  well  have 
been  derived  from  the  limestone  in  the  underlying  metamorphic 
rocks.  The  hornblende  may  have  come  from  either  schist  or  igneous 
rocks. 

The  alteration  of  the  rocks  is  of  two  kinds — weathering  and  con- 
tact or  dynamic  metamorphism.  As  the  rocks  have  been  swept 
clean  rather  recently  by  the  ice,  weathering  has  not  been  extensive. 
The  chief  effect  of  the  weather  has  been  the  breaking  up  of  the  rocks 
by  purely  mechanical  means,  and  this  has  been  aided  by  the  weather- 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


103 


ing  out  of  the  argillaceous  stringers  in  the  rocks.  The  chief  chemical 
effect  on  the  graywackes  has  been  to  color  them  slightly  reddish, 
brownish,  or  greenish.  The  surfaces  are  somewhat  pitted  and  gashed 
where  the  stringers  of  the  softer  material  have  been  removed.  On 
the  mountain  tops  this  process  has  gone  a little  farther  than  it  has 
along  the  seashore.  Where  the  graywackes  have  been  intruded  by 
igneous  rocks  or  where  they  have  undergone  great  differential  pres- 
sures they  have  been  altered  to  fine-grained  dark-brown  quartz-mica 
schists.  At  places  where  the  bedding  has  been  preserved  it  is  seen 
to  coincide  rather  closely  with  the  secondary  structure  formed  by 
pressure.  The  metamorphic  minerals,  such  as  andalusite,  are  par- 
ticularly abundant  in  the  schist  at  some  places. 

STRUCTURE  AND  THICKNESS. 

The  graywacke  rocks,  as  previously  pointed  out  (see  p.  100), stretch 
along  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island  from  Peril  Strait  to  Dry  Pass. 
The  actual  width  of  the  band  of  graywacke  can  not  of  course  be  told, 
as  its  western  boundary  lies  under  the  sea.  The  greatest  known 
width  of  the  belt  is  5 miles.  The  inner  contact  of  the  rocks  strikes 
approximately  N.  30°  W.  to  Mine  Cove,  then  swings  to  N.  60°  W.  in 
Portlock  Harbor,  and  then  N.  30°  W.  to  Dry  Pass,  beyond  which  the 
graywacke  has  been  altered  to  schist.  Graywacke  can  not  be  certainly 
recognized  north  of  Canoe  Pass  at  the  entrance  to  Lisianski  Strait. 
Along  the  seaward  side  of  the  belt  on  Hill  Island,  on  Kukkan  Bay,  and 
at  the  entrance  to  Khaz  Bay,  a schist  was  found.  The  schist  on  Hill 
Island  is  believed  to  be  altered  graywacke,  for  the  gradation  from  gray- 
wacke to  schist  can  be  traced  along  the  north  side  of  Imperial  Pas- 
sage. The  agents  of  metamorphism  were  active  along  this  outer 
coast,  but  whether  the  metamorphism  is  due  to  pressure  or  to  the 
nearness  of  a large  igneous  body  could  not  be  told.  On  the  islands 
at  the  entrance  to  Khaz  Bay  the  metamorphism  is  undoubtedly  due 
to  the  presence  of  the  igneous  body  that  is  seen  on  some  of  the 
islands.  The  schist  on  Kukkan  Bay  appears  to  be  altered  greenstone 
that  was  intruded  into  the  graywacke. 

Reliable  strike  and  dip  readings  are  difficult  to  get  at  many  places 
because  of  the  lack  of  bedding  and  because  of  the  extensive  jointing. 
In  general  the  strikes  lie  between  west  and  N.  45°  W.  A few  strikes 
reach  N.  30°  W.  The  dips  are  almost  universally  to  the  south  and 
range  from  40°  to  70°.  At  some  places  the  beds  stand  vertical,  and 
even  (in  a very  few  places)  dip  steeply  to  the  north. 

The  rocks  are  greatly  fractured  and  jointed,  and  it  is  very  often 
difficult  to  distinguish  bedding  from  jointing.  Faulting  is  common 
and  extensive,  but  it  can  not  always  be  recognized,  as  the  non- 
homogeneity of  the  beds  and  the  frequent  occurrence  of  minor 
fracturing  do  not  permit  one  to  tell  what  movement,  if  any,  has 


104 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


taken  place.  Major  faults  are  recognized  by  the  great  quantity  of 
crushed  material  that  occurs  in  the  shear  zones,  and  also  by  the 
presence  of  quartz,  which  at  places  has  recemented  the  crushed  rock. 
Such  faults  are  very  common  and  where  they  have  been  followed  they 
seem  to  be  persistent.  The  Chichagoff  mine  and  most  of  the  pros- 
pects of  the  district  are  located  along  such  faults.  The  fault  in  the 
Chichagoff  mine  has  been  followed  underground  without  a break  for 
about  a mile,  and  the  strike  and  the  dip  of  the  fault  plane  are  remark- 
ably constant.  The  Hirst-Chichagof  mine  lies  on  another  such  fault 
which  seems  to  run  nearly  parallel  to  the  first  one.  These  crushed  zones 
are  of  varying  width;  the  same  fault  zone  may  be  a foot  or  more  wide 
in  one  place,  and  at  another  it  may  be  15  or  20  feet  wide.  Movement 
along  these  faults  did  n6t  take  place  all  at  one  time,  and  possibly 
movement  still  takes  place  along  them,  for  much  of  the  quartz  along 
the  zones  has  been  crushed  and  recrushed  since  its  deposition.  The 
dike  near  the  Chichagoff  mine  and  the  dike  in  the  upper  tunnel  of  the 
Hirst  mine  are  crushed.  The  graywacke  in  the  shear  zones  is  com- 
minuted, and  the  slaty  bands  have  been  reduced  to  shiny  slicken- 
sided  pieces  that  look  much  like  pieces  of  coal.  At  most  places  one 
wall  of  the  zone  is  well  defined  and  is  followed  by  a sticky  clay  gouge; 
the  other  wall  is  poorly  defined  and  grades  over  into  the  country 
rocks.  The  faults  dip  steeply  in  the  Chichagoff  mine  and  in  the 
Hirst  mine.  This  dip  shows  only  a slight  variation.  At  the  Smith 
prospect  the  fault  plane  dips  about  62°  S.,  but  in  depth  it  flattens 
to  45°  S.  All  the  fault  planes  so  far  examined  dip  to  the  south. 

Strike  and  dip  readings  show  that  the  graywacke  beds  have  nearly 
parallel  strikes  throughout  the  belt  and  that  they  all  dip  steeply  to 
the  south.  It  is  impossible  to  interpret  the  structure  of  the  region 
from  observations  over  such  a limited  area,  and  more  work  will  have 
to  be  carried  on  in  the  neighboring  areas.  From  the  few  facts  at 
hand  it  would  seem  that  the  beds  may  form  one  limb  of  an  anticline, 
for  they  seem  to  be  resting  on  rocks  of  greater  age.  The  beds  do  not 
possess  sufficient  peculiarities  to  enable  one  to  trace  recognizable  beds 
and  thus  to  detect  reduplication  of  beds.  In  such  a highly  disturbed 
region  reduplication  of  beds  almost  surely  exists,  and  this  may  be 
due  to  close  folding  or  to  faulting,  or  to  both.  Extensive  faulting  has 
taken  place.  The  suggestion  naturally  comes  that  the  structure  of 
the  rocks  is  related  to  the  large  intrusive  body  that  makes  up  the 
interior  of  the  island.  It  is  interesting  to  note  in  this  connection  that 
the  highly  schistose  rocks  along  Lisianski  Strait  all  dip  toward  that 
intrusive  body.  The  similarity  of  the  strikes  and  dips  of  the  gray-  J 
wackes  and  the  older  schists  suggests  a common  origin  for  their  later  jj 
structure — a structure  that,  in  some  of  the  schists,  must  have  been  i 
imposed  on  an  earlier  structure. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


105 


As  the  structural  relations  of  the  rocks  are  not  very  definitely  known, 
no  determination  of  their  thickness  can  be  made.  The  belt  in  its 
widest  part  is  exposed  continuously  for  5 miles.  Assuming  a dip  of 
60°  the  resultant  thickness  of  the  beds  exposed  would  be  23,000  feet, 
but  there  is  every  reason  to  believe  that  reduplication  of  beds  has 
occurred  and  that  the  actual,  thickness  of  the  exposed  formation  is 
much  less.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  not  possible  to  tell  how  far 
beneath  the  sea  the  graywacke  extends.  The  series  is  apparently 
thick,  although  no  actual  figures  can  be  given.  An  estimate  of  the 
thickness  of  this  series  of  rocks  made  by  the  Wrights,1  who  corre- 
lated it  with  similar  rocks  on  Douglas  Island  and  Glass  Peninsula, 
is  3,000  feet,  more  or  less. 

AGE  AND  CORRELATION. 

In  a consideration  of  the  age  of  the  graywacke  the  first  question 
that  arises  is  whether  the  argillitic  graywacke  beds  along  the  south- 
west side  of  Slocum  Arm,  which  are  fossiliferous,  should  be  included 
in  the  graywacke  series.  The  reasons  for  not  including  them  would  be 
that  their  relationships  with  the  typical  graywacke  are  not  known;  that 
they  are  somewhat  different  in  appearance  from  the  graywacke;  and 
that  fossils  have  not  been  found  anywhere  in  the  typical  graywacke, 
although  they  were  carefully  looked  for.  The  reasons  for  including 
them  are  that  the  rocks  are  graywackes  although  of  somewhat  different 
appearance;  that  the  pelecypods  found,  although  abundant  numer- 
ically, seem  to  be  limited  to  one  or  two  species  of  Aucella,  which  fact 
would  seem  to  indicate  a peculiarly  local  condition  of  deposition  (a 
similar  condition  apparently  of  the  occurrence  of  a single  fossiliferous 
bed  in  a great  series  of  unfossiliferous  rocks  has  been  observed  at 
Pybus  Bay) ; and  that  the  rocks  appear  to  be  interbedded  with  tuffs, 
flows,  and  limestones  similar  to  those  rocks  at  the  base  of  the  typical 
graywacke.  Whether  this  apparent  transition  is  due  to  infolding  or 
whether  such  a transition  series  to  the  underlying  schist  is  actually 
present  is  not  known. 

On  the  peninsula  southeast  of  the  Hole  in  the  Wall  at  Khaz  Head 
the  graywacke  is  massive  and  coarse  grained  and  breaks  down  into 
large,  smooth,  angular  blocks.  A little  farther  down  the  peninsula,  in 
Slocum  Arm,  the  graywacke  becomes  finer  grained  and  even  somewhat 
cross-bedded  but  shows  large,  rounded  pieces  of  light-colored  lime- 
stone several  inches  in  diameter  and  black  slate  pebbles  and  slivers. 
The  general  tone  of  the  graywacke  is  greenish  gray  on  the  weathered 
surface.  After  a short  concealed  interval  comes  highly  contorted 
greenish,  reddish,  and  grayish  schistose  rocks,  which  are  in  part 

1 Wright,  F.  E.  and  C.  W.,  The  Ketchikan  and  Wrangell  mining  districts,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  347,  p.  35,  1908. 


106  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 

volcanic  and  in  part  sedimentary.  These  rocks  extend  for  2 miles 
along  the  shore  with  which  their  strike  seems  to  be  nearly  parallel. 
The  schistose  beds  are  followed  here  by  a rather  massive  graywacke, 
which  is  at  places  a grit,  and  then  by  the  rather  fine-grained  gray- 
wacke in  which  Jurassic  fossils  were  found.  For  about  a mile  the 
rocks  exposed  are  chiefly  the  variegated  greenish  ones  of  the  pre- 
ceding 2 miles,  in  which  are  some  argillitic  rocks.  The  occurrence 
of  a limestone  bed  indicates  a sedimentary  origin  for  some  of  the 
rocks.  Beyond  the  green  rocks  is  slate.  The  slaty  rocks  carry  some 
limestone  concretions  and  throughout  most  of  their  extent  are 
markedly  parallel  banded.  The  bands  are  about  2 inches  wide  and 
are  indicated  by  differences  in  color.  The  slates  follow  the  shore  for 
about  a mile  and  are  then  succeeded  by  the  fossil-bearing  graywacke, 
which  continues  to  the  head  of  the  Arm.  A small  bed  of  limestone 
was  found  at  this  second  fossil  locality. 

The  contact  of  these  beds  with  the  greenish  volcanic  and  sedi- 
mentary beds  is  believed  to  lie  close  to  the  shore  along  this  side  of 
Slocum  Arm.  From  the  strike  and  dip  it  would  appear  that  the 
slates  and  graywackes  lie  under  the  greenish  rocks,  but  faulting  has 
probably  disturbed  the  relationships. 

The  graywacke  extends  unbroken  along  the  northeast  side  of 
Slocum  Arm  to  a point  within  4 miles  of  the  head.  A limestone  bed, 
15  to  25  feet  thick,  follows  the  graywacke  and  is  followed  in  turn  by 
tuffaceous  beds,  flows,  and  the  contorted  green  and  gray  schists. 
Graywacke  occurs  in  Flat  and  Hidden  coves  apparently  interbedded 
with  the  tuffaceous  beds  and  with  the  limestone.  At  one  place  it 
even  seems  to  underlie  the  schist.  The  strikes  and  dips  observed 
along  this  shore  would  indicate  that  the  graywacke  overlay  the  tuffs 
and  flows. 

The  section  up  to  the  2,800  and  2,360  foot  peaks  at  the  head  of  the 
arm  shows  no  graywacke  but  only  highly  contorted  green  and  gray 
schist  up  to  an  elevation  of  2,390  feet  and  then  greenstone. 

In  the  southeast  bay  at  the  head  of  Ford  Aim  the  graywacke 
series  is  interbedded  with  green  and  red  volcanic  rocks.  Along  the 
northeast  shore  of  the  northwest  bay  the  rocks  are  schistose  and 
probably  are  in  large  part  of  sedimentary  origin.  The  strikes  and 
dips  here  would  seem  to  throw  the  graywackes  over  the  tuffs  and 
schists. 

In  Sister  Lake  the  underlying  rock  is  a thinly  laminated,  extremely 
contorted  schist,  greenish  and  grayish  in  color,  and  at  places  very 
quartzose.  The  shore  of  the  northeast  bay  of  the  lake  is  almost 
entirely  a light-green  schistose  lock.  In  the  narrows  between  the 
two  lakes  the  rocks  are  gray  schist  and  chert. 

On  the  eastern  side  of  Lake  Anna,  near  the  entrance  to  the  narrows, 
some  greenstone  tuff  and  limestone  occur  apparently  within  the 
graywacke  series. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


107 


All  along  the  northeast  side  of  Slocum  Arm,  then,  the  rocks  of  the 
graywacke  series  appear  to  overlie  the  tuff,  flows,  and  schists  and  in 
part  to  be  interbedded  with  the  volcanic  rocks.  The  extreme  meta- 
morphism of  the  variegated  rocks  would  seem  to  point  to  a greater 
age  for  them  as  compared  with  the  graywacke.  The  tuffs  may  well 
be  interbedded  with  the  lower  beds  of  the  graywacke  series.  The 
relations  on  the  southwest  side  of  the  arm  may  indicate  that  the 
fossil  beds  do  not  belong  to  the  graywacke  series;  that  faulting  has 
taken  place  along  this  side  of  the  arm;  or  that  the  volcanic  and 
schistose  rocks  there  are  not  the  same  series  represented  on  the 
north  side,  but  that  they  are  considerably  younger  and  actually  do 
overlie  the  graywackes.  As  none  of  the  schistose  rocks  are  fossilif- 
erous  and  as  at  no  place  could  the  structural  relations  of  the  schist 
to  the  fossiliferous  beds  or  the  fossiliferous  beds  to  the  typical  gray- 
wacke formation  be  observed,  only  a surmise  of  the  actual  relations 
can  be  made  now.  The  question  whether  the  fossiliferous  beds 
should  be  included  with  the  graywackes  has  already  been  considered. 
The~only  evidence  for  faulting,  other  than  that  considered  below,  is 
the  occurrence  of  brecciated  graywacke  at  the  head  of  the  arm  about 
on  the  line  of  the  supposed  fault.  The  rocks  on  the  outer  side  of  the 
peninsula  could  not  be  visited  because  of  the  stormy  weather,  but 
they  are  reported  to  be  graywacke.  This  is  borne  out  by  the  gray- 
wacke observed  at  Khaz  Head  and  in  Peril  Strait.  If  this  is  true, 
then  the  graywackes  of  the  outer  coast  would  overlie  the  schistose 
beds,  as  they  do  on  the  north  side  of  the  arm,  and  a fault  along  the 
southwest  side  would  appear  probable.  So  far  as  lithologic  resem- 
blance can  be  used  as  a criterion,  the  schistose  rocks  on  the  north 
and  the  south  sides  of  the  arm  are  very  much  alike,  and  on  the  lack 
of  other  evidence  of  correlation  they  would  undoubtedly  be  placed 
together.  On  Peril  Strait  schist  is  found  on  the  line  of  strike  of  the 
schist  on  the  north  side  of  the  arm,  and  graywacke  is  found  on  the 
strike  of  the  schist  south  of  Slocum  Arm. 

In  Portlock  Harbor  the  contact  between  the  graywacke  and  the 
underlying  series  of  rocks  is  exposed  at  half  a dozen  places.  In  the 
narrow  strait  between  Portlock  Harbor  and  Ogden  Passage  a reddish 
gritty  sandstone,  which  contains  angular  particles  of  slate,  lies  at  the 
base  of  the  graywacke  rocks.  Under  the  grit  is  a bluish-gray  lime- 
stone about  50  feet  thick.  On  the  large  island  in  Portlock  Harbor 
northwest  of  the  entrance  to  Black  Bay  the  contact  is  exposed  at  two 
places;  on  the  southeast  side  of  the  island  the  contact  seems  to  be 
somewhat  gradational,  for  the  upper  beds  of  the  green  variegated 
rocks  seem  to  be  somewhat  sandy  in  character;  on  the  northwest 
side  the  contact  is  rather  of  the  same  type.  The  one  point  of  contact 
on  Peel  Island  shows  the  graywacke  in  contact  with  an  intrusive 
body.  At  the  Snipe  Islands  the  contact  passes  between  the  eastern 
island  and  the  two  western  ones  and  is  concealed  in  the  narrow  strait 


108 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


between  them.  On  the  eastern  island  the  rocks  are  greatly  sheared 
conglomerate,  quartzite  (?),  and  limestone.  On  the  southeast  side 
of  Hill  Island  the  rocks  at  the  contact  are  argillitic  rocks,  limestone, 
and  a sheared  conglomerate.  On  the  northwest  side  of  the  island 
the  rocks  at  the  contact  are  greenish  schist,  or  greenstones,  and 
limestone.  Beyond  this  point  the  rocks  all  become  schistose,  and 
the  graywackes  are  not  again  recognized  as  such. 

The  question  whether  the  metamorphic  series  and  the  graywacke 
series  are  separated  by  an  unconformity  can  not  be  definitely  settled. 
The  graywackes  rest  on  rocks  that  are  in  part  sedimentary.  On 
Slocum  Arm  the  underlying  beds  are  tuffs  and  limestones;  in  Portlock 
Harbor  the  underlying  beds  are  so  greatly  altered  that  tuffs  can  not 
be  definitely  recognized,  although  many  of  the  beds  are  extremely 
obscure  and  may  be  tuffs.  Limestones  are  almost  universally  present 
under  the  graywacke  in  Portlock  Harbor.  In  the  absence  of  fossils 
it  is  not  possible  to  say  whether  the  underlying  beds  of  Slocum  Arm 
and  those  of  Portlock  Harbor  are  of  the  same  age.  It  should  be 
noted  that  in  Slocum  Arm  the  graywacke  beds  are  apparently  inter- 
bedded  with  the  tuffs  of  the  underlying  series,  and  they  do  not  seem 
to  be  so  in  Portlock  Harbor.  The  strikes  and  dips  of  the  two  series  of 
rocks  appear  to  conform,  but  the  rocks  have  undergone  great  struc- 
tural disturbances  since  their  deposition,  and  the  result  of  the  action 
of  the  same  force  would  result  in  imposing  a somewhat  similar 
structure  on  the  rocks  of  both.  The  chief  reason  for  placing  an 
unconformity  between  them  would  be  the  great  difference  that 
exists  in  appearance  and  degree  of  alteration,  but  this  difference  may 
be  a result  of  the  character  of  the  rocks.  The  most  that  can  be  said, 
then,  from  field  observations  is  that  an  unconformity  may  exist 
between  the  two  series. 

The  age  of  the  graywacke,  determined  by  Stanton  from  fossils 
collected  on  the  shore  of  Slocum  Arm,  is  probably  Upper  Jurassic. 
The  report  on  the  fossils  follows : 

10147.  No.  17AOF7:  First  prominent  bight  on  southwest  side  of  Slocum  Arm,  3 
miles  southwest  of  Falcon  Arm. 

Aucella  sp.,  related  to  A.  fischeriana  (D’Orbigny). 

Belemnites  sp.,  fragments  of  a small  slender  form. 

10148.  No.  17AOF8:  Second  prominent  bight  on  southwest  side  of  Slocum  Arm,  5 
miles  southwest  of  Falcon  Arm. 

Aucella  sp.,  small  distorted  specimens  possibly  belonging  to  two  species,  one  of 
which  may  be  the  same  as  the  species  in  10147. 

The  form  of  Aucella  in  these  two  lots  appears  to  be  distinct  from  the  forms  identified 
as  A.  piochi  Gabb  and  A.  crassicollis  Keyserling  in  previous  collections  from  Pybus 
Bay,  Admiralty  Island.  The  present  collections  are  believed  to  be  of  Upper  Jurassic 
age.  It  should  be  remembered,  however,  that  the  distinction  between  Jurassic  and 
Lower  Cretaceous  on  the  basis  of  Aucella  alone  is  not  always  safe.  It  is  possible  that 
all  the  Aucdla-beaiing  rocks  of  southeast  Alaska  may  belong  in  the  same  series. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


109 


Correlations  of  the  rocks  of  the  graywacke  series  with  similar  rocks 
of  southeastern  Alaska  are  at  once  suggested.  The  rocks  of  the 
Berners  formation  (Upper  Jurassic  or  Lower  Cretaceous)  of  Eagle 
River  in  the  Juneau  district  are  lithologically  similar  to  the  rocks  of 
the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island,  and  fossils  show  them  to  be  of  the 
same  age.  Knopf  1 believed  the  Berners  formation  to  be  found  on  the 
Glass  Peninsula  and  at  Point  Young  on  Admiralty  Island.  That  the 
correlation  of  these  rocks  with  the  rocks  of  Pybus  Bay  at  the  south 
end  of  Admiralty  Island  is  open  to  some  doubt  is  indicated  in  the 
report  made  by  Stanton.  In  the  Ketchikan  district  the  rocks  would 
be  correlated  with  the  “conglomerate,  slate,  and  graywacke’ ’ of 
Chapin,2  which  are  found  on  Gravina  Island  and  in  the  western  part 
of  the  town  of  Ketchikan  and  at  Wards  Cove  on  Revillagigedo  Island. 
This  correlation  is  suggested  by  fossils,  by  lithographic  similarity, 
and  by  relationship  to  other  rocks.  The  suggestion  has  already  been 
made  that  these  rocks  may  be  correlated  with  the  graywacke  of  the 
Prince  William  Sound  region,  but  as  nothing  conclusive  is  known 
about  the  age  of  those  rocks  the  correlation  will  have  to  remain  a 
suggestion. 

IGNEOUS  ROCKS. 

The  largest  bodies  of  igneous  rock  in  the  region  are  those  that  are 
believed  to  be  part  of  the  Coast  Range  batholith.  These  rocks 
occupy  much  of  the  interior  of  the  island,  and  in  this  brief  report  no 
attempt  can  be  made  to  describe  the  various  types  that  are  found. 
Most  of  the  area  mapped  is  not  far  from  the  contact  between  these 
rocks  and  other  rocks,  and  consequently  the  rocks  of  the  intrusive 
body  are  very  greatly  sheared.  Thin  sections  show  that  most  of 
these  rocks  are  considerably  crushed  and  are  extensively  altered. 
The  rocks  seem  to  be  normally  quartz  diorites,  but  types  from  granite 
to  hornblendite  can  be  found.  A specimen  from  Stag  Bay  that  in 
the  hand  specimen  appears  to  be  a greenstone  is  seen  under  the 
microscope  to  consist  of  feldspar  (near  albite),  quartz,  green  horn- 
blende, chlorite,  and  epidote.  This  rock  was  probably  originally  a 
diorite.  On  Lisianski  Strait,  near  Miner  Island,  the  rock  is  a crushed 
albite  granite.  A little  farther  up  the  strait  the  rock  consists  entirely 
of  crushed,  coarsely  crystallized  hornblende.  A specimen  taken  on 
Lisianski  Inlet  consists  chiefly  of  crushed  and  recemented  quartz 
and  a little  plagioclase  feldspar.  The  rocks  on  Peril  Strait  and  in 
Hooniah  Sound  seem  to  be  somewhat  more  basic  than  the  rocks  on 
the  west  coast.  They  contain  some  quartz,  plagioclase  feldspar  (near 
andesine),  hornblende,  and  the  usual  alteration  minerals.  These 

1 Knopf,  Adolph,  The  Eagle  River  region,  southeastern  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  502,  pp.  17-18, 

1912. 

2 Chapin,  Theodore,  The  structure  and  stratigraphy  of  Gravina  and  Revillagigedo  Islands,  Alaska:  U.  S* 
Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  120-D,  pp.  97-98,  1918. 

115086°— 19 8 


110 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


rocks  appear  to  be  similar  to  the  contact  rocks  of  the  Coast  Range 
batholith  of  the  mainland,  and  they  are  correlated  with  them.  The 
age  of  the  Coast  Range  batholith  is  not  yet  definitely  determined, 
but  it  is  generally  thought  to  be  Jurassic  or  Cretaceous.  In  this  area 
these  rocks  cut  the  rocks  of  the  metamorphic  series,  whose  age  has 
not  been  determined. 

An  intrusive  body  of  large  size,  which  consists  of  a coarse-grained 
granite,  cuts  the  greenstones  and  schists  of  Morris  and  Elfendahl 
lakes.  The  rocks  of  this  body  are  very  fight  in  color  and  are  of  very 
coarse  grain.  They  are  somewhat  weathered,  but  otherwise  are  not 
greatly  altered.  They  differ  from  the  other  granites  of  the  region  in 
their  coarseness  of  grain,  their  fight  color,  their  uniformity  in  char- 
acter, and  in  the  fact  that  the  alkali  feldspar  is  orthoclase  instead  of 
albite.  Part  of  the  contact  between  this  body  and  the  greenstone 
was  carefully  examined,  but  no  signs  of  mineralization  were  found. 

Coarse  granite  was  found  on  the  Porcupine  Islands  and  on  the 
island  that  forms  the  outer  side  of  Cautious  Pass.  A specimen  of 
the  rock  shows  coarsely  granular  quartz,  feldspar  that  ranges  in  com- 
position from  albite  to  albite-ofigoclase,  greenish  biotite,  muscovite, 
garnet,  and  sericite.  This  rock  is  an  albite  granite.  Whether  it 
represents  the  same  period  of  intrusion  as  the  orthoclase  granite 
above  can  not  be  determined. 

The  rocks  represented  by  the  intrusive  body  at  Nickel  are  some- 
what variable.  They  are  fairly  fight  gray  but  at  places  become  a 
rather  dark  brown.  Diorite  and  gabbro  (norite)  are  the  chief  types 
represented.  Nickel  ore  occurs  with  these  rocks  and  a more  detailed 
description  of  them  is  given  under  the  discussion  of  the  nickel  ores. 
(See  p.  129.)  A similar  body  of  diorite  occurs  on  Lisianski  Strait 
north  of  Canoe  Pass. 

Dikes  are  fairly  abundant  in  the  region.  They  cut  the  graywacke, 
the  rocks  of  the  metamorphic  series,  and  the  greenstones.  Most  of 
the  dikes  are  rather  small  and  are  fight  in  color,  and  all  except  the 
dike  at  the  entrance  to  Deep  Bay  seem  to  be  of  the  same  type.  One 
of  these  dikes  occurs  on  the  property  of  the  Chichagoff  Mining  Co.,  at 
the  Golden  Gate  mill,  but  no  dikes  were  encountered  in  the  mine 
itself.  Another  forms  the  footwall  in  the  lower  tunnel  of  the  Hirst 
prospect.  The  dikes  are  rather  abundant  in  the  graywacke  on  i 
Slocum  Arm  between  Ford  Arm  and  Falcon  Arm.  Similar  dikes  \ 
cut  the  greenstone  at  the  copper  property  at  the  head  of  Pinta  Bay,  ; 
and  dikes  that  are  of  somewhat  different  appearance  cut  the  green- 
stone on  the  ridge  to  the  north  of  Morris  Lake.  The  dike  rock  in  i 
the  lower  tunnel  on  Baker  Peak  is  highly  mineralized  with  pyrite,  ! 
and  the  chalcopyrite  of  the  upper  prospects  seems  to  be  in  a greatly 
altered  dike  of  this  type. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


Ill 


The  dike  rocks  are  fine  grained  and  light  in  color.  The  minerals 
that  form  the  rock  can  not  be  determined  with  the  naked  eye,  but 
the  rocks  are  light  colored,  and  consequently  the  ferromagnesian 
minerals  are  practically  absent.  Pyrite  is  rather  abundant  in  some 
of  the  dikes,  and  these  weather  deep  red-brown  on  the  surface. 

Under  the  microscope  these  dike  rocks  are  all  seen  to  be  rather 
extensively  altered.  A specimen  of  the  rock  from  the  Golden  Gate 
mill  is  coarser  grained  than  most  of  the  dike  rocks  and  seems  to  be 
somewhat  less  altered.  These  rocks,  so  far  as  can  be  determined, 
carry  a little  quartz,  plagioclase  feldspar,  and  a few  dark  minerals. 
The  plagioclase  in  the  dike  of  the  Golden  Gate  appears  to  be  near 
albite-oligoclase,  and  the  rock  is  apparently  an  aplite.  Alteration, 
chiefly  to  sericite  and  to  chlorite,  is  extensive.  Although  there  is  a 
great  similarity  in  appearance  of  these  dike  rocks,  there  is  probably 
considerable  variation  in  their  character.  The  aplite  dikes  are  at 
most  places  mineralized  rather  highly  with  pyrite,  and  as  a conse- 
quence several  of  them  have  been  staked  as  prospects.  It  is  not 
known  whether  they  carry  gold. 

The  dike  at  the  entrance  to  Deep  Bay  is  of  a markedly  different 
type  from  that  of  the  other  dikes.  The  rock  is  rather  dark  in  color, 
and  is  porphyritic.  The  phenocrysts  are  feldspar  and  hornblende. 
The  groundmass  is  fairly  fine  grained,  and  contains  both  lath-shaped 
crystals  and  closely  spaced  irregular  grains.  The  feldspar  phenocrysts 
are  about  labradorite,  although  some  albite  appears  to  be  present. 
This  rock  is  an  andesite.  The  dikes  that  cut  the  greenstones  north 
of  Morris  Lake  are  of  a somewhat  similar  type. 

Greenstones  are  widespread  in  the  region,  including  both  intrusive 
and  extrusive  rocks.  As  their  name  implies,  they  are  extensively 
altered,  and  it  is  no  longer  possible  to  tell  exactly  the  type  of  basic 
rock  from  which  they  are  derived.  As  it  is  not  always  possible  in  the 
field  to  distinguish  the  true  greenstone  from  altered  sedimentary 
rocks  that  are  green  in  color,  especially  where  they  have  been  ren- 
dered schistose,  no  attempt  has  been  made  to  show  on  the  map  all  the 
greenstone  areas  of  the  region.  Greenstones  included  with  the 
metamorphic  rocks  were  seen  in  Portlock  Harbor,  in  Didrickson  Bay, 
and  in  Deep  Bay.  The  greenstones  which  have  been  indicated  north 
of  Morris  Lake  (see  PI.  II)  appear  to  be  of  a different  age  from 
the  green  schists  and  greenstones  included  with  the  schist,  for  they 
do  not  show  the  excessive  metamorphism  of  the  other  rocks.  They 
appear  to  have  a rather  gentle  dip  to  the  east  and  to  rest  on  the  steeply 
dipping  beds  of  the  schistose  series.  They  are  massive  fine-grained 
rocks  which  are  in  large  part  amygdaloidal.  They  are  notably 
homogeneous.  Epidote  is  widespread  in  the  rocks,  and  small  amounts 
of  chalcopyrite  are  present  in  nearly  every  specimen  of  the  greenstone 


112 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


collected.  The  amygdaloidal  character  of  the  greenstone  would 
indicate  that  it  is,  in  part,  a flow.  That  some  may  be  intrusive, 
however,  is  suggested  by  the  fact  that  in  the  green  schist  only  a short 
distance  from  the  supposed  contact  with  the  greenstone  is  a coarse- 
grained greenstone  which  appears  to  cut  the  schist  and  is  hence  of  a 
later  age.  An  amygdaloidal  greenstone  carrying  chalcopyrite  occurs 
on  the  peak  at  the  head  of  Slocum  Arm.  A similar  relationship  to 
that  on  the  Baker  Ridge  is  seen  in  that  a limestone  bed  lies  in  both 
places  almost  at  the  contact  between  schist  and  greenstone.  Green- 
stone is  reported  from  Rust  Lake,  near  Chichagof. 

The  age  of  the  greenstones  is  not  known.  They  may  be  of  the  same 
age  as  the  greenstones  of  the  Orca  group  of  Prince  William  Sound, 
which  are  probably  of  Mesozoic  age. 

A fresh-looking  basalt  was  seen  on  Lisianski  Strait  opposite  Miner 
Island.  The  rock  in  outcrop  shows  columnar  jointing,  and  it  has  not 
been  greatly  disturbed  since  its  deposition.  The  rock  is  porphyritic, 
vesicular,  and  has  a fine-grained  groundmass.  The  phenocrysts  are 
altered  hornblende  crystals.  This  body  of  igneous  rock  may  be  the 
youngest  in  the  region. 

DEVELOPMENT  OF  TOPOGRAPHIC  FEATURES. 

Most  of  the  physiographic  features  of  Chichagof  Island  are  due 
primarily  to  glaciation,  although  structure  and  the  character  of  bed- 
rock have  had  some  effect  in  modifying  the  action  of  the  ice.  The 
fiords  probably  owe  their  straightness  and  parallelism  to  the  directive 
action  of  bedrock  structure  on  the  moving  ice.  The  characteristic 
features  of  the  fiords,  the  lakes,  the  hanging  valleys,  the  broad 
U-shaped  valleys,,  the  steepened  slopes,  the  through  valleys  at  the 
heads  of  the  fiords,  and  the  holes  and  deepened  channels  off  the  coast 
are  all  undoubtedly  due  to  the  ice  action.  The  coastal  plain  appears 
to  be  a structural  feature  and  to  represent  an  uplift  of  this  part  of  the 
coast.  Minor  topographic  features,  such  as  the  rounding  of  the 
granite  peaks  and  the  pointing  of  the  greenstone  peaks,  are  due 
secondarily  to  the  nature  of  the  bedrock. 

MINERAL  RESOURCES. 

GOLD. 

OCCURRENCE. 

Prospecting  for  gold  on  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island  has  been 
carried  on  from  time  to  time  since  1905.  A number  of  prospects  have 
been  located,  but  at  the  present  time  only  one  mine  is  being  operated. 
Most  of  the  prospects  are  along  shear  zones  in  the  graywacke. 

The  most  active  prospecting  for  gold  has  been  done  near  Klag  Bay. 
Klag  Bay  is  about  54  miles  northwest  of  Sitka  by  boat.  It  is  con- 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND.  113 

nected  with  Juneau  by  a motor  boat  which  makes  regular  trips  about 
once  a week.  The  center  of  mining  activity  is  at  the  head  of  Klag 
Bay  at  Chichagof,  where  the  Chichagoff  mine  is  located.  Prospects 
have  been  located  on  Klag  Bay,  on  Mine  Cove  to  the  north,  and  on 
Slocum  Arm  to  the  south.  Practically  all  these  prospects  are  gold 
quartz  prospects,  and  most  of  them  have  been  held  for  a number  of 
years.  Only  one  mine  is  being  operated  at  the  present  time,  although 
another  may  be  opened  shortly.  Gold  was  first  found  by  a native  in 
1905  in  one  of  the  streams  near  the  head  of  Klag  Bay.  He  carried  the 
news  to  Sitka,  a small  stampede  followed,  and  a number  of  claims  were 
located.  The  history  of  the  Klag  Bay  region  has  been  given  by  Knopf.1 

The  claims  on  Klag  Bay  all  lie  near  the  shore.  The  coast  here  is 
similar  to  that  to  the  north.  The  coastal  plain  is  confined  here 
chiefly  to  the  islands,  which  consist  of  low  rounded  hills  and  marshy 
flats.  A line  between  the  coastal  plain  and  the  mountain  belt  passes 
south  of  Doolth  Mountain,  between  Lake  Anna  and  Sister  Lake,  and 
into  the  sea  at  Khaz  Head.  The  shore  line  is  extremely  irregular 
and  throughout  its  extent  is  rocky,  and  the  bottoms  near  the  shore 
are  foul.  Kocks  and  reefs  extend  offshore  for  about  5 miles  between 
Kukkan  Bay  and  The  Hole-in- the-Wall.  Lake  Anna  and  Sister 
Lake  are  tidal  basins  which  can  be  entered  with  safety  only  at  slack 
water.  Doolth  Mountain,  in  which  the  Chichagoff  mine  lies,  is  a 
smooth,  rounded  mountain  about  2,120  feet  in  elevation. 

The  rocks  of  the  Klag  Bay  region  are  of  two  general  types — the  un- 
differentiated metamorphic  rocks  and  the  graywacke.  The  only 
igneous  rocks  seen  in  the  vicinity  of  Klag  Bay  (except  the  altered 
igneous  rocks  in  the  schistose  series)  were  the  light-colored  dikes, 
which  are  fairly  abundant  in  the  graywacke.  The  graywacke,  as 
pointed  out  above  (p.  108),  is  believed  to  be  of  Upper  Jurassic  age. 
The  age  of  the  dike  rocks  is  not  known,  but  they  must  be  post- 
Jurassic. 

Graywacke  is  economically  the  most  important  rock  of  the  region 
at  the  present  time,  because  all  the  prospects  so  far  located  are  in 
graywacke,  although  there  is  no  apparent  Reason  why  mineraliza- 
tion should  not  have  taken  place  in  the  schistose  series  as  well. 
One  possible  reason  for  the  seeming  localization  of  the  mineralization 
in  the  graywacke  is  that  the  physical  properties  of  the  massive  grav- 
wacke  under  great  forces  may  have  caused  it  to  break  with  big  clean 
fractures  that  were  of  great  extent  and  that  furnished  excellent 
pathways  for  the  ore-bearing  solutions.  The  soft  schistose  rocks,  on 
the  other  hand,  would  not  give  clean  breaks  or  persistent  pathways, 
so  the  solutions  would  dissipate  through  the  schist  and  would  not 
concentrate  at  any  one  place.  Although  the  geology  of  the  district 
appears  to  be  simple,  the  interpretation  of  the  structure  is  difficult. 


i Knopf,  Adolph,  The  Sitka  mining  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  504,  pp.  18,  23, 1912. 


114 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


As  the  beds  are  not  fossiliferous  in  the  Klag  Bay  region,  fossil-bearing 
horizons  can  not  be  traced,  and  no  beds  were  found  that  have  per- 
sistent lithologic  characteristics.  Observations  of  the  strike  and  dip 
show  that  the  beds  have  a rather  constant  strike  toward  the  north- 
west and  a steep  dip  toward  the  south.  The  rocks  northeast  of  the 
slate-graywacke  series  shown  on  the  map  belong  to  the  complicated 
series  of  schists  and  volcanic  rocks  whose  exact  nature  is  in  many 
places  difficult  to  determine. 

CHICHAGOFF  MINE. 

The  Chichagoff  mine  is  at  the  head  of  Klag  Bay.  The  entrance  to 
the  mine  is  on  the  southeast  side  of  Doolth  Mountain,  and  the  end 
of  the  main  tunnel  is  now  past  the  center  of  the  mountain. 

Thirty  stamps  are  operated  at  the  mill  at  the  present  time,  and 
the  ore  is  concentrated  both  by  amalgamation  and  by  flotation. 
Electric  power  is  brought  from  the  generating  station  at  the  north 
end  of  Sister  Lake.  The  source  of  the  power  is  in  Rust  Lake,  1| 
miles  above  the  power  station  on  Sister  Lake. 

The  early  history  of  the  mine,  taken  from  the  report  by  Knopf,1 
is  inserted  here. 

The  ore  body  was  found  in  1905,  * * * by  tracing  to  its  source  the  quartz  float  so 

abundantly  strewn  in  the  bed  of  the  small  stream.  The  lode  did  not  outcrop  along  the 
shore  but  was  found  in  place  one-quarter  of  a mile  inland,  at  an  elevation  of  275  feet. 
At  the  outcrop  the  lode  ranged  from  2 to  4 feet  in  width.  The  float  ore  was  carefully 
gathered  and  shipped  to  the  smelter  at  Tacoma.  This  ore  was  rich  enough  to  yield  be- 
tween $15,000  and  $20,000.  The  proceeds  were  applied  to  development  work  and  the 
mine  has  paid  its  own  way  from  the  start.  A drift  tunnel  220  feet  long  was  run  on  the 
ledge,  and  two  ore  shoots  were  encountered,  the  second  of  which  was  18  feet  wide  at  a 
maximum  and  averaged  $63  a ton  across  this  width.  Later  a second  tunnel  was 
driven  162  feet  vertically  beneath  the  upper  tunnel,  commencing  behind  the  mill, 
which  is  situated  at  the  beach.  Ore  was  encountered  at  800  feet  from  the  portal, 
apparently  belonging  to  the  bottom  of  the  first  ore  shoot.  A raise  was  put  through 
to  the  upper  tunnel,  and  the  ore  thus  developed  is  now  being  stoped. 

The  present  Chichagoff  Mining  Co.  controls  both  the  original 
Chichagoff  or  De  Groff  ^mine  and  the  Golden  Gate  mine.  The  con- 
solidation took  place  in  1912.  Since  Knopf  wrote  his  report  it  has 
been  definitely  proved  that  both  mines  are  on  the  same  lode. 

A few  facts  collected  concerning  the  occurrence  of  the  ore  might 
be  of  general  interest,  as  this  mine  is  the  only  one  in  the  district 
that  has  been  extensively  developed,  and  as  it  is  probable  that  if 
other  mines  are  opened  up  in  the  region  the  occurrence  of  the  ore 
will  be  similar.  Of  course,  it  can  not  be  argued  that  because  the 
Chichagoff  mine  is  successful  every  mine  in  the  district  of  a similar 
type,  or  even  one  whose  ore  tenor  may  be  as  high  or  higher  than  that 
of  the  Chichagoff,  will  be  likewise  successful.  It  must  be  remembered 


1 Ivnopf,  Adolph,  The  Sitka  mining  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  504,  p.  23,  1912. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


115 


that  in  mining  relatively  low  grade  ore  the  management  of  a mine  is 
always  an  extremely  important  factor  in  determining  its  success  or 
failure. 

The  Chichagoff  ore  body  is  a vein  deposit  that  has  formed  along  a 
shear  zone  in  the  argillitic  graywacke.  The  shear  zone  is  a persistent 
one,  and  it  has  been  followed  continuously  for  over  4,500  feet.  The 
strike  of  the  zone  is  rather  constant,  and  the  dip  is  steep  although 
somewhat  variable.  The  shear  zone  may  range  in  width  from  less 
than  a foot  to  10  feet.  The  ore  does  not  occur  continuously  along 
the  shear  zone  but  is  distributed  in  shoots.  Five  such  shoots  have 
been  encountered  in  the  main  tunnel  of  the  mine.  Three  of  the 
shoots  have  been  already  worked  out.  In  one  of  the  shoots  the  ore 
gave  out  about  550  feet  below  sea  level;  in  another  at  400  feet.  Both 
shoots  reached  the  surface — one  at  230  feet  above  sea  level,  the  other 
at  1,370  feet.  The  shoots  are  tabular  and  are  irregular  in  outline. 
One  dips  about  80°  S.  and  the  other  stands  about  vertical.  The 
third  ore  shoot  was  small  and  is  really  part  of  one  of  the  other  shoots. 
The  other  two  ore  shoots  are  not  yet  fully  developed,  so  their  extent 
is  not  known. 

The  gold  is  associated  with  the  quartz,  which  is  white  and  glassy 
in  appearance.  Where  there  is  no  quartz  there  is  no  gold,  although 
there  may  be  abundant  iron  sulphide.  Extreme  irregularity  charac- 
terizes the  occurrence  of  the  gold;  it  is  irregularly  distributed  in 
irregularly  shaped  ore  shoots.  The  thickness  of  the  vein  averages 
2\  feet,  but  the  actual  thickness  differs  greatly  from  place  to  place. 
There  is  said  to  be  no  relation  between  the  thickness  of  the  vein  and 
the  distribution  of  the  gold.  The  value  of  the  gold  in  a thick  part 
of  the  vein  may  be  high  or  it  may  not.  It  seems  to  be  true,  however, 
that  where  the  quartz  contains  abundant  sulphides  it  is  likely  to  be 
richer  in  gold  than  at  places  where  the  sulphides  are  not  so  abundant. 
Sulphide  mineralization  and  gold  mineralization  in  the  quartz  seem 
to  be  genetically  connected,  although  heavy  pyrite  mineralization  in 
the  black  slate  does  not  seem  to  be  related  to  the  gold  mineralization. 
The  quartz  is  in  rather  lenticular  bodies,  and  their  thickness  varies 
greatly  in  short  distances.  At  places  the  quartz  bodies  are  twisted 
about  and  even  seem  to  be  cut  off  sharply.  This  feature  suggests 
that  movement  has  taken  place  subsequent  to  the  formation  of  the 
bodies,  and  this  is  further  borne  out  by  the  fact  that  in  thin  sections 
the  quartz  is  seen  to  be  very  greatly  crushed.  In  the  shoot  where 
the  bodies  of  quartz  are  very  irregular  and  appear  to  have  been 
subjected  to  movement  this  disturbed  part  of  the  body  is  followed 
by  a regular  vein  of  quartz  that  has  a uniform  thickness  of  about 
3 feet.  Another  characteristic  way  in  which  the  quartz  occurs  is  in 
the  ribbon  structure  already  described  by  Knopf.1  This  type  of 


1 Knopf,  Adolph,  op.  cit.,  p.  21. 


116  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

structure  is  caused  by  parallel  stringers  of  quartz,  which  are  sepa- 
rated by  black  slaty  or  carbonaceous  layers.  These  stringers  of 
quartz  break  away  so  cleanly  from  the  slaty  layers  that  the  slaty 
layer  has  every  appearance  of  being  one  of  the  walls  of  the  shear 
zone.  It  seems  to  be  advisable  to  put  in  a short  crosscut  here  and 
there  to  make  sure  that  the  vein  is  not  really  thicker  than  it  appears 
to  be. 

A thin  section  of  the  vein  matter  shows  crushed  coarsely  granular 
quartz,  which  together  with  some  calcite  surrounds  and  replaces  the 
crushed  slate  and  graywacke.  Calcite  is  not  abundant,  and  in  the 
specimen  examined  was  seen  only  with  the  fine-grained  quartz,  which 
was  replacing  the  country  rock.  Some  of  the  quartz  shows  wavy 
extinction,  due  to  the  pressure  to  which  it  was  subjected.  A thin 
section  of  the  ore  which  shows  free  gold,  pyrite,  galena,  and  quartz 
does  not  exhibit  features  which  would  indicate  the  relative  order  of 
formation  of  the  different  minerals.  \ The  pyrite  is  well  crystallized 
and  fits  in  with  the  quartz  mosaic  in  such  a way  that  simultaneous 
crystallization  is  suggested.  The  gold  is  in  the  form  of  a small 
stringer  that  appears  to  cut  across  a quartz  grain,  and  hence  from 
this  single  occurrence  it  would  appear  to.  be  later  than  the  quartz. 
A single  example  of  the  relationship  between  minerals  is  not  sufficient, 
however,  to  establish  a definite  order  of  succession.  The  galena 
occurs  between  the  quartz  grains,  and  there  is  nothing  to  suggest 
whether  it  is  older  or  younger  than  the  quartz,  or  of  the  same  age. 
The  quartz,  although  crushed,  does  not  show  nearly  the  same  amount 
of  crushing  that  the  dike  rocks  show;  so  it  seems  possible  that  the 
gold  mineralization  took  place  subsequent  to  the  intrusion  of  the  dike. 

The  source  of  the  ore-bearing  solution  is  not  known,  although  it 
probably  had  an  igneous  origin.  The  presence  of  a possible  igneous 
source  is  indicated  by  the  dike  rocks.  The  Coast  Range  batholith  is 
not  far  away,  and  that  ore-bearing  solutions  could  come  from  these 
rocks  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  at  many  other  places  in  southeastern 
Alaska  the  rocks  near  this  batholith  are  mineralized.  The  distance 
of  the  deposits  from  the  contact  would  not  necessarily  indicate  their 
distance  from  the  igneous  body,  which  may  lie  only  a short  distance 
under  the  surface.  It  is  at  least  probable  that  the  dikes  and  the  ore- 
bearing  solution  had  a common  origin,  and  that  the  ore-bearing  solu- 
tion represents  a later  stage  of  effusion  from  the  parent  igneous  mass. 
There  seems  to  be  no  good  evidence  to  show  that  the  gold  may  have 
been  leached  from  the  graywacke  and  redeposited  in  the  shear  zones, 
for  the  graywacke  is  fresh  and  shows  no  effect  of  weathering  or 
leaching. 

HIRST  PROPERTY. 

The  Hirst  property  lies  on  the  northwest  side  of  Doolth  Mountain 
in  Mine  Cove.  The  property  consists  of  three  claims  owned  by  Bernard 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


117 


Hirst,  of  Sitka.  These  claims,  together  with  the  Bahrt  claims  on  the 
opposite  side  of  Doolth  Mountain,  are  now  under  lease  by  the  Hirst- 
Chichagof  Mining  Co.  A considerable  amount  of  work  has  been  done 
on  this  property  but  nothing  within  the  past  few  years.  The  Hirst- 
Chichagof  Co.  proposes  to  open  the  property  as  soon  as  financial 
matters  can  be  arranged. 

There  are  two  tunnels  on  the  property — one  at  an  elevation  of  about 
255  feet  above  sea  level,  the  other  at  430  feet.  These  are  called  the 
250  and  the  450  foot  levels.  The  250-foot  or  lower  tunnel  is  about 
725  feet  long;  the  upper  about  427  feet.  A tunnel  at  100  feet  above 
sea  level,  which  is  expected  to  intersect  the  ore  body  at  about  900 
feet  from  the  entry,  is  projected. 

The  rocks  of  Mine  Cove  belong  to  the  graywacke  series,  but  they 
are  somewhat  more  carbonaceous  and  argillaceous  than  the  rocks  on 
Klag  Bay.  On  the  island  at  the  entrance  to  the  cove  there  is  a shear 
zone  cut  by  numerous  quartz  and  calcite  stringers.  An  old  prospect, 
the  Monte  Cristo,  lies  on  the  main  shore  just  south  of  this  island. 
Several  hundred  yards  west  of  the  Hirst  mine  a tunnel  about  30  feet 
long  has  been  driven  into  the  hillside  along  a small  shear  zone.  A 
quartz  stringer  about  6 inches  wide  at  the  mouth  of  the  tunnel 
diminishes  at  the  face  to  about  an  inch  wide. 

The  lower  tunnel  on  the  Hirst  property  shows  in  sections  across  its 
face  and  roof  a few  inches  of  soft  gray  clay  gouge,  about  a foot  of 
crushed  rock,  through  which  run  quartz  stringers  parallel  to  the  foot- 
wall,  and  several  feet  of  crushed  argillitic  rock  containing  small 
gnarled  quartz  stringers  a fraction  of  an  inch  thick.  The  crushed 
slate  is  very  much  slickensided  and  carbonaceous  and  contains  in  the 
carbonaceous  material  considerable  pyrite.  A dike  of  much-altered 
porphyry,  probably  alaskite,  similar  in  appearance  to  the  other  dikes 
of  the  region,  runs  along  the  footwall  for  most  of  the  way  through  the 
ore  shoot.  The  band  of  parallel  quartz  stringers  differs  in  width 
from  place  to  place  and  at  the  end  of  the  ore  shoot  disappears  entirely. 
These  stringers  follow  the  well-defined  footwall.  That  the  quartz  was 
deposited  later  than  the  movement  that  produced  the  shear  zone  is 
shown  by  the  fact  that  it  occupies  the  shear  zone;  and  that  some 
movement  has  taken  place  since  the  original  movement  is  shown  by 
the  crushed  condition  of  the  quartz. 

In  the  upper  tunnel  thin  quartz  stringers  occur  in  the  face.  The 
footwall  is  hard  and  quartzitic.  Quartz  bands  are  abundant  for 
about  8 inches  from  the  footwall,  which  here  strikes  about  N.  35°  W. 
and  dips  about  78°  S.  The  rock  toward  the  hanging  wall,  as  in  the 
lower  tunnel,  is  greatly  crushed  and  contains  but  little  quartz.  The 
width  of  the  band  of  parallel  quartz  stringers  ranges  between  a foot 
and  3 feet  in  the  ore  shoot.  This  quartz  occurs  chiefly  in  parallel 
bands  about  3 or  4 inches  wide,  which  are  separated  from  one  another 


118  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

by  narrow  dark  bands  of  argillitic  material.  Small  quartz  stringers 
cut  out  in  places  at  right  angles  to  the  footwall,  but  these  probably  do 
not  carry  gold.  The  footwall  is  at  most  places  a light-colored  clayey 
gouge  and  is  well  defined.  There  is  abundant  pyrite  with  this  gouge 
and  with  the  quartz  of  the  gouge.  Pyrite  is  rather  abundant,  too,  in 
crushed  material  along  the  hanging-wall  side  of  the  vein.  A light- 
colored  dike,  possibly  5 feet  wide,  occurs  in  the  graywacke  of  the  foot- 
wall near  the  north  end  of  the  ore  shoot.  It  is  cut  sharply  off  by  the 
fault.  The  lode  proper  in  this  tunnel  has  a maximum  width  of  a 
little  over  3J  feet  and  a stope  length  of  about  225  feet.  The  dip  of 
the  shoot  at  its  north  end  is  about  79°  W.  and  its  pitch  is  not  known. 

Quartz  crops  out  on  the  hillside  about  60  feet  above  the  mouth 
of  the  upper  tunnel,  and  about  a hundred  feet  higher  in  the  stream 
some  quartz  is  exposed  as  stringers  in  the  graywacke. 

The  quartz  in  the  tunnel  does  not  show  much  sulphide  mineraliza- 
tion. The  chief  sulphide  mineralization  occurs  in  the  crushed  rock  of 
the  hanging-wall  side  of  the  vein,  but  it  is  generally  reported  that  this 
sulphide  does  not  carry  the  gold.  The  pyrite  may  be  syngenetic — 
that  is,  it  may  have  been  originally  in  the  slate  in  the  form  of  iron, 
and  under  the  physical  and  chemical  conditions  to  which  it  was 
subjected  it  formed  coarsely  crystalline  pyrite.  It  might  in  this  way 
have  formed  independently  of  the  action  of  the  solution  which  brought 
in  the  gold.  One  assay,  for  instance,  is  reported  to  show  $9  in  gold 
in  the  quartz  portion  of  the  vein  and  only  $0.85  in  the  pyrite-bearing 
slaty  portion.  Values  as  high  as  $56  in  the  upper  level  and  $57  in 
the  lower  level  are  reported  by  the  company.  The  gold  appears 
to  be  irregularly  distributed.  The  ore  in  this  mine  probably  occurs 
in  shoots.  New  shoots  may  be  expected  along  the  shear  zone  if  it  is 
followed,  but  nothing  can  be  said  about  the  distance  that  may  have 
to  be  traversed  before  another  shoot  is  reached,  or  about  its  tenor. 

OTHER  PROSPECTS. 

A prospect  from  which  some  of  the  richest  ore  of  the  region  has 
been  taken  is  the  Jumbo  claim  on  the  west  side  of  Klag  Bay  about  half 
a mile  south  of  Chichagof.  This  is  one  of  a group  of  four  claims  that 
extend  over  the  hill  to  Ogden  Passage,  and  it  was  staked  in  the  early 
days.  At  the  present  time  the  workings  consist  of  a tunnel  about 
35  feet  long  and  an  inclined  shaft  48  feet  deep  that  is  now  filled  with 
water.  In  the  face  of  the  tunnel  there  is  a small  crushed  zone  about 
6 inches  wide  that  is  filled  with  crushed  slate  and  small  quartz 
stringers.  Two  large  quartz  stringers  cut  across  the  face  at  an  angle 
to  the  small  crushed  zone.  Pyrite  is  fairly  abundant  in  association 
with  quartz,  and  also  occurs  in  stringers  that  cut  the  slaty  country 
rock.  The  country  rock  is  a much-broken  argillitic  graywacke. 
The  strike  and  dip  of  the  fault  plane  is  variable.  Where  measured 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


119 


at  the  surface  it  strikes  N.  54°  W.  and  dips  62°  S.  The  plane  flattens 
to  about  45°*S.  at  the  bottom  of  the  incline.  The  material  in  the 
dump  shows  brecciated  slaty  particles  cemented  by  quartz  in  which 
are  rather  abundant  well-crystallized  pyrite,  some  galena,  and  some 
sphalerite.  It  is  said  that  the  quartz  which  shows  rather  abundant 
sphalerite  is  as  a rule  not  very  rich  in  gold.  Some  of  the  best  speci- 
mens of  free  gold  in  the  region  came  from  this  prospect. 

The  prospects  Sitka  No.  1 and  No.  2 are  on  the  east  slope  of 
Doolth  Mountain  about  a quarter  of  a mile  north  of  the  Chichagoff 
lode.  Development  only  is  reported.  The  upper  tunnel  lies  at  an 
elevation  of  about  950  feet.  At  the  entrance  to  the  tunnel  in  the 
creek  bed  a dozen  or  more  quartz  stringers  cut  across  the  direction 
of  the  tunnel.  The  tunnel  is  approximately  150  feet  long  and  follows 
a shear  zone  of  variable  width.  Almost  no  quartz  occurs  in  this 
tunnel.  A little  pyrite  was  noted  in  the  crushed  rock  of  the  shear 
zone.  The  strike  of  the  tunnel  is  about  N.  62°  W.,  and  the  dip  of  the 
fault  plane  is  52°  S.  Sticky  clay  gouge  follows  the  footwall  at  some 
places  and  the  hanging  wall  at  other  places.  The  lower  tunnel  is  at 
an  elevation  of  about  670  feet.  The  shear  zone  that  it  follows  strikes 
about  N.  52°  W.  and  dips  52°  S.  A little  quartz  occurs  in  the  crushed 
zone.  The  footwall  is  graywacke  and  the  hanging  wall  is  a carbona- 
ceous argillite.  At  the  face  of  the  drift  cross  stringers  of  quartz 
occur  in  fractures,  and  a little  pyrite  mineralization  was  seen  there. 
The  quartz  stringers  are  on  the  footwall  of  the  shear  zone. 

The  Flora  claim  lies  on  the  east  slope  of  Doolth  Mountain,  about 
800  feet  west  of  the  Golden  Gate  tunnel  of  the  Chichagof  mine.  The 
tunnel  is  in  a shear  zone  that  contains  some  quartz. 

The  Bahrt  claims,  Anna,  Rose,  and  Henrietta,  are  on  the  south 
side  of  Doolth  Mountain  at  the  head  of  Klag  Bay.  These  claims 
are  thought  to  lie  on  the  continuation  of  the  Hirst-Chichagof  shear 
zone,  and  the  Hirst-Chichagof  Co.  has  secured  a lease  on  the  property. 

The  Handy  property,  consisting  of  two  claims,  is  on  the  east  side 
of  Klag  Bay  opposite  Chichagof.  Considerable  prospecting  has  been 
done  on  these  claims.  There  is  at  the  present  time  a tunnel  about 
45  feet  long  and  an  inclined  shaft  about  175  feet  long.  Work  had  been 
suspended  at  the  time  of  visit.  The  dump  consists  chiefly  of  car- 
bonaceous slate,  most  of  which  is  slickensided  and  highly  graphitic. 
Some  pieces  of  the  quartz  show  mineralization  with  iron  sulphide. 
The  pyrite  in  most  of  the  specimens  occurs  at  the  edge  of  a quartz 
band  or  in  the  slaty  stringers  in  the  quartz.  About  40  feet  above  the 
tunnel  mouth  (80  feet  above  sea  level)  an  outcrop  shows  quartz. 
The  country  rock  is  graywacke.  The  quartz  stringers  are  lenticular 
and  are  practically  confined  to  the  footwall.  The  strike  of  the  rocks 
is  about  N.  50°-70°  W.  and  the  dip  is  very  steep  to  the  south.  The 
strike  of  the  Chichagoff  shear  zone  should  carry  it  across  the  bay 


120  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

somewhere  near  this  point.  The  work  on  this  prospect  was  started 
in  September,  1916,  and  was  discontinued  in  May,  1917. 

A prospect  is  located  on  the  island  between  Chichagof  and  the 
Handy  mine.  This  island  has  been  located  a number  of  times.  It 
is  now  called  the  Submarine  claim.  Its  workings  consist  of  a shallow 
water-filled  pit. 

Another  prospect  from  which  some  rather  rich  specimens  have 
been  taken  lies  just  within  the  entrance  to  Lake  Anna  and  continues 
through  to  Klag  Bay.  This  prospect  was  located  in  April,  1914. 

It  lies  along  a fault  zone  in  slaty  rock.  Small  iron-stained  stringers 
of  quartz  occur  in  the  rocks  on  the  dump.  A remarkably  smooth 
fault  plane,  which  strikes  about  N.  20°  E.  and  stands  about  vertical, 
forms  the  south  side  of  the  tunnel.  The  crushed  zone  as  exposed 
in  the  tunnel  is  about  3 to  5 feet  wide.  The  tunnel  is  about  100  feet 
long,  but  no  recent  work  has  been  done  in  it.  Considerable  pyrite 
occurs  with  the  quartz.  Some  quartz  was  found  which  contains 
pyrite,  galena,  pyrrhotite,  and  sphalerite.  Several  other  prospects 
of  the  types  just  described  occur  in  the  region,  but  they  were  not 
visited. 

Four  claims  at  the  head  of  Falcon  Arm  extend  from  the  beach  to 
the  top  of  the  peak,  a distance  of  about  4,500  feet.  A trail  runs 
from  the  head  of  Falcon  Arm  to  the  claims,  and  they  can  also  be 
reached  without  much  difficulty  from  the  head  of  Ford  Arm.  The 
claims  are  about  14J  miles  by  water  from  Chichagof.  At  an  eleva- 
tion of  about  400  feet  above  the  beach  a cabin  has  been  built,  and  a 
short  tunnel  has  been  run  in  on  a mineralized  dike.  This  dike  is  an 
altered  diorite  aplite,  and  contains  rather  abundant  pyrite.  The 
main  outcrop,  apparently  a mineralized  dike,  on  these  claims  lies  in 
a narrow  gully  at  about  1,650  feet  above  sea  level.  Below  the  out- 
crop a tunnel  about  30  feet  long  has  been  started  into  the  crushed 
slate  and  graywacke  to  intersect  the  dike.  Shots  have  been  put 
into  the  outcrops  of  several  other  iron-stained  dikes. 

The  geology  of  the  ridge  is  relatively  simple.  The  country  rock  is 
graywacke,  which  here  has  been  rather  extensively  intruded  by 
light-colored  dikes  that  range  from  3 to  15  feet  in  width.  The  dike 
at  the  cabin  is  mineralized  with  pyrite  and  is  reported  to  carry  gold. 
The  outcrop  at  1,550  feet  is  greatly  weathered,  and  as  no  develop- 
ment work  has  been  done  here  its  extent  or  relationships  are  not 
known.  The  prospecting  tunnel  is  in  crushed  slate,  and  it  does  not  j 
cut  the  mineralized  dike  above  it.  A few  scattered  quartz  stringers 
were  seen  in  the  tunnel. 

Galena,  pyrite,  and  sphalerite  occur  in  stringers  in  the  rock  from  :: 
the  outcrop.  Samples  from  this  outcrop  are  reported  to  carry  gold 
and  some  silver.  The  claims  were  located  in  the  fall  of  1916. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


121 


A group  of  four  claims  is  in  the  angle  between  Lisianski  Strait  and 
Lisianski  Inlet,  on  Yacobi  Island.  The  claims  were  located  in  1917. 
The  quartz  vein  along  which  the  claims  lie  was  first  located  about  30 
years  ago,  and  a tunnel  about  35  feet  long  was  run.  It  is  reported 
that  about  $1,100  worth  of  gold  was  taken  from  the  tunnel  at  that 
time.  The  exposure  of  the  quartz  is  at  tide  level,  and  it  appears  to 
be  in  a shear  zone,  associated  with  a clay  gouge.  The  width  of  the 
stringer  ranges  from  less  than  a foot  to  about  3 feet.  The  country 
rock  is  a rather  basic  intrusive  that  belongs  in  the  Coast  Range  batli- 
olith.  A few  feet  away  from  the  tunnel  entrance  is  a coarsely  grained 
hornblendite.  Both  the  country  rock  and  the  quartz  are  greatly 
fractured.  In  the  face  of  the  tunnel  the  quartz  has  pinched  out, 
but  on  the  hillside  at  an  elevation  of  about  75  feet,  apparently  on 
the  strike  of  the  vein,  quartz  is  exposed.  The  quartz  is  white,  fairly 
coarse  grained,  and  except  for  a little  chalcopyrite  is  practically  free 
from  sulphides.  A little  free  gold  was  seen  in  the  pure  white  quartz. 

A gold  claim  on  the  north  side  of  Stag  Bay,  about  one  fourth  mile 
northwest  of  the  cannery,  was  located  in  1917.  The  lode  is  in  dio- 
rite  and  occurs  as  a quartz  vein,  which  is  about  3 feet  wide  at  one 
place  and  about  1 foot  wide  a little  lower  down  and  is  reported  to 
extend  about  200  feet  up  the  cliff.  This  quartz  is  said  to  yield  colors 
when  crushed  and  panned.  No  development  work  has  been  done  on 
the  claim.  The  approximate  strike  of  the  quartz  stringer  is  N.  30 c 
E.  and  the  dip  about  vertical.  No  metallic  minerals  were  seen  in 
the  quartz.  Quartz  veins  of  similar  appearance  cut  the  diorite  at 
a number  of  places. 

COPPER. 

GOLD-COPPER  GROUP. 

A group  of  six  claims  called  the  Gold-Copper  group  lies  about  3 
miles  by  trail  from  the  head  of  Pinta  Bay.  The  metals  reported 
from  these  prospects  are  gold,  silver,  copper,  and  lead.  Seven 
claims  were  first  located  in  1910  and  were  held  by  the  Portlock  Har- 
bor Mining  Co.  This  company  is  said  to  have  failed  to  do  necessary 
assessment  work  and  the  ground  was  relocated  on  January  2,  1916, 
by  T.  Baker,  James  Toby,  and  George  Bolyan.  Six  claims  were  located 
and  were  called  the  Gold-Copper  group.  At  the  present  time  the 
claims  are  under  litigation. 

The  claims  are  reached  by  trail  from  the  head  of  Pinta  Bay. 
Pinta  Bay  lies  about  18  miles  northwest  of  Chichagof,  and  about  70 
miles  from  Sitka.  The  bay  is  a good  harbor,  as  it  is  protected  from 
the  sea  by  Hill  Island,  and  it  has  plenty  of  water.  No  reliable  charts 
of  the  region  exist  at  the  present  time,  but  it  is  hoped  that  one  will  be 
published  shortly.  The  claims  lie  at  elevations  of  1,370  to  2,360 
feet,  and  a pack  trail  about  3 miles  long  connects  them  with  the  head 


122  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

of  Pinta  Bay.  A tram  about  1^  miles  long  could  be  built  to  connect 
the  prospects  with  Baker  Arm.  An  abundant  supply  of  water  for 
power  is  available  in  the  stream  that  enters  Pinta  Bay  at  its  head. 

The  development  work  on  these  properties  is  not  extensive.  It 
consists  of  two  tunnels  at  elevations  of  1,360  and  1,440  feet,  which 
were  driven  by  the  original  holders  of  the  property,  the  Portlock 
Harbor  Copper  Mining  Co.  The  1,440-foot  tunnel  is  about  130  feet 
long  and  has  about  30  feet  of  crosscuts.  The  1,360-foot  tunnel  is 
about  50  feet  long.  Recent  work  has  been  done  at  a number  of 
places  on  the  hillside.  At  the  elevation  of  1,850  feet  there  is  a shaft 
about  10  feet  deep,  at  1,935  feet  a cut  about  25  feet  long,  at  1,875 
feet  a 91 -foot  tunnel,  and  at  1,880  feet  a small  open  cut. 

The  prospects  lie  near  the  western  edge  of  the  greenstone  area 
shown  on  the  map.  (See  PL  II.)  The  hills  to  the  north  are  all 
greenstone,  and  the  rocks  along  the  ridge  to  the  southwest  belong  to 
the  undifferentiated  metamorphic  series.  The  country  rock  on  top 
of  Baker  Peak  is  amygdaloidal  greenstone,  and  that  in  the  immediate 
neighborhood  of  the  prospects  is  a hard  fine-grained,  somewhat 
sheared  greenstone.  This  rock  is  very  much  altered  near  the  lode. 
Light-gray  dikes  of  fine-grained  igneous  rock  cut  the  greenstone. 
The  dikes  are  highly  mineralized  with  pyrite  and  are  so  badly  altered 
that  their  original  nature  can  not  be  definitely  told.  They  appear 
under  the  microscope  to  be  altered  aplites.  Such  iron-stained  dikes 
are  rather  common  on  this  hill  and  along  the  ridge  toward  the  sea. 
Although  mineralization  has  taken  place  both  in  the  greenstone  and 
in  the  dikes,  it  appears  to  be  connected  genetically  with  the  dikes. 
The  source  of  the  copper  may  be  in  the  greenstone,  but  the  dikes 
appear  to  have  had  some  influence  on  its  concentration.  Small 
amounts  of  chalcopyrite  were  seen  in  similar-looking  greenstone 
north  of  Morris  Lake  and  above  Slocum  Arm.  The  chief  visible 
metallic  minerals  of  the  lode  are  pyrite  and  chalcopyrite.  Assays 
are  reported  to  show  gold,  silver,  and  lead. 

The  most  promising  showing  of  ore  is  in  a new  cut  made  in  the  fall 
of  1917,  in  which  a zone  heavily  mineralized  with  chalcopyrite  about 
10  feet  wide  is  exposed.  At  this  place  the  country  rock  is  altered 
iron-stained  greenstone,  and  the  lode  rock  is  altered  dike  (?)  rock 
impregnated  with  and  cut  by  stringers  of  chalcopyrite.  This  lode 
rock  is  followed  by  about  10  feet  of  rather  massive  chalcopyrite.  The 
mineralized  zone  appears  to  strike  about  N.  30°-40°  W.  and  dip 
70°  W.  Along  the  strike  of  this  zone  about  250  feet  to  the  northwest 
a 10-foot  shaft  shows  a mineralized  zone  about  2 feet  wide. 

A small  open  cut  made  on  a dike  about  100  yards  east  of  the 
tunnel  of  the  new  workings  discloses  a rock  strongly  mineralized  with 
pyrite.  The  more  highly  mineralized  portion  is  about  6 feet  wide, 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


123 


and  its  strike  is  N.  50°-60°  W.  This  mineralized  rock  is  reported  to 
carry  silver  and  lead. 

SNOW  SLIDE  CLAIMS. 

A copper  prospect  is  located  in  Pinta  Bay  at  the  head  of  Baker 
Arm.  The  prospect  consists  of  two  claims  called  the  Snow  Slide 
claims.  They  were  located  in  1916  by  the  present  locators  of  the 
Gold-Copper  group.  The  prospect  is  on  the  steep  hillside  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  about  650  feet  and  about  1,100  feet  in  a straight  line  from  the 
beach.  Substantial  cabins  have  been  built  on  the  beach  and  at  the 
prospect.  The  outcrop  is  exposed  in  the  bed  of  a small  stream.  It 
consists  of  a zone  of  thin-banded  quartzose  green  schist  highly 
mineralized  with  pyrite,  chalcopyrite,  and  possibly  some  pyrrhotite. 
The  zone  where  exposed  is  about  6 feet  wide.  The  country  rock  is 
green  schist.  A tunnel  171  feet  long  has  been  driven  to  intersect 
this  mineralized  zone,  but  work  on  it  was  stopped  before  the  zone, 
if  it  continues  in  depth,  was  reached.  No  very  recent  work  has  been 
done  on  this  prospect. 

LITTLE  BAY  CLAIMS. 

At  the  head  of  Little  Bay,  between  Dry  Pass  and  Nickel,  four 
claims  were  located  in  1916.  The  claims  extend  from  the  beach  up 
the  small  creek  which  runs  from  Davison  Mountain.  Assays  of 
specimens  from  these  claims  are  reported  to  show  copper,  silver,  gold, 
and  in  one  specimen  a trace  of  nickel.  The  only  work  done  at  the 
prospect  on  the  beach  consists  of  a few  shots  put  into  the  outcrop. 
The  minerals  seen  in  the  beach  specimens  were  chalcopyrite  and 
pyrrhotite.  These  minerals  occur  in  a very  fine  grained  quartzitic 
rock,  whose  exact  nature  is  not  known.  The  immediate  country 
rock  is  not  exposed,  but  the  nearest  exposed  country  rock  is  the 
granitic  and  dioritic  intrusive  body  which  extends  from  Dry  Pass  to 
Cautious  Pass.  Near  the  head  of  the  bay  this  rock  shows  considerable 
variation  in  character,  and  it  is  probable  that  the  contact  between 
the  intrusive  body  and  the  intruded  body  is  not  far  away.  Owing 
to  the  lack  of  exposures  the  type  of  mineralization  that  has  taken 
place  here  can  not  be  told.  The  mineral  specimens  resemble  those  from 
the  prospect  at  Hot  Springs  more  than  they  do  those  from  Nickel. 

CONGRESS  CLAIMS. 

The  Congress  claims  lie  on  the  west  side  of  Hill  Island  in  the  second 
bight  north  of  Imperial  Passage.  A trail  leads  to  them  from  a bight 
on  Imperial  Passage.  These  claims  were  located  or  relocated  in  1916. 
The  workings  consist  of  a tunnel  about  25  feet  long,  which  is  on  the 
rocky  seashore  a few  feet  above  sea  level.  The  country  rock  is  a gray 


124 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


schist,  somewhat  micaceous  and  quartzose,  and  is  probably  a schistose 
phase  of  graywacke.  The  workings  expose  a quartzose  schist  zone 
body  about  11§  feet  wide  mineralized  with  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrho- 
tite.  The  sulphides  coat  the  thin  plates  of  schist.  On  the  south  side 
of  the  zone  is  a band  of  green  chloritic  and  hornblendic  schist,  which 
is  somewhat  quartzose  and  contains  a few  specks  of  chalcopyrite. 
On  the  north  side  of  the  zone  is  a thinly  plated  and  quartzose  gray 
schist.  The  green  schist  may  represent  an  altered  intrusive  with 
which  the  mineralization  is  genetically  connected.  The  type  of  ore 
body  is  similar  to  that  near  White  Sulphur  Springs.  (See  below.) 
No  very  recent  work  has  been  done  on  the  prospect. 

OTHER  PROSPECTS. 

A mining  claim  has  been  staked  on  the  shore  of  Bertha  Bay  about 
half  a mile  northwest  of  White  Sulphur  Springs.  This  claim,  or 
claims,  was  located  in  1916.  A few  shot  holes  represent  the  work 
done.  The  prospect  is  on  the  seashore,  which  here  consists  of  jagged 
rocks  that  rise  about  20  feet  above  the  water  and  which  is  deeply  cut 
by  narrow  ravines.  Bare  rock  is  exposed  for  about  50  feet  from  the 
edge  of  the  water  to  the  line  of  vegetation. 

The  rocks  along  this  shore  are  very  highly  metamorphosed,  and  the 
ordinary  metamorphic  minerals,  such  as  andalusite  and  mica,  are 
highly  developed.  The  nickel-bearing  gabbro  of  the  Sea  Level 
property  lies  about  7,000  feet  to  the  southeast.  Granite  lies  on  the 
Porcupine  Islands  about  8,000  feet  southwest  and  on  the  shore  about 
2,000  feet  north.  The  schist  rocks  that  form  the  country  rock  here 
probably  owe  their  schistose  character  to  the  dynamic  contact  action 
of  the  deep-seated  intrusive  rocks.  The  schist  is  dark  gray  and  con- 
torted. At  the  point  of  discovery  on  the  shore  is  a belt  of  light- 
colored  quartzitic  rock,  iron-stained  in  places,  which  is  parallel  to  the 
strike  of  the  schistosity.  It  is  separated  from  the  schist  by  a sharp 
contact,  and  faulting  may  have  taken  place.  This  belt  of  quartz 
rock  disappears  under  the  moss  at  one  end,  and  at  the  other  end  it 
pinches  down  to  nothing.  At  the  southeast  end  of  the  belt  the  rock 
in  contact  with  the  quartz  rock  is  a medium-grained  dark  hornblende 
rock,  which  seems  to  be  an  altered  basic  intrusive  in  the  schist. 
Mineralization  is  in  the  green  rock  at  the  contact  and  consists  of 
stringers  of  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrho tite. 

Similar  types  of  mineralization  in  which  chalcopyrite  occurs  in 
schist  associated  with  greenstone  were  seen  in  Canoe  Pass,  at  the 
entrance  to  Khaz  Bay,  on  Hill  Island,  and  in  Little  Bay.  This  type 
is  different  from  that  at  the  Alaska  Nickel  Mines  property,  and 
although  the  mineral  association  of  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite  is  the 
same,  little  or  no  nickel  seems  to  be  present.  None  of  these  bodies 
examined  appeared  to  have  more  than  local  extent. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


125 


NICKEL.1 

ALASKA  NICKEL  MINES. 

Nickel  is  known  to  be  present  in  only  one  locality  on  the  west  coast 
of  Chichagof  Island.  The  claims  of  the  Alaska  Nickel  Mines  lie  on  the 
outside  coast  between  Portlock  Harbor  and  Lisianski  Strait.  The 
principal  prospects  are  on  Fleming  Island,  a small  tidal  island,  about 
25  miles  by  water  northwest  of  Chichagof.  The  property  in  1917 
consisted  of  18  claims  and  two  fractions.  The  original  locations  were 
made  in  1911,  and  a relocation  was  made  in  1915.  The  company 
holding  the  property  was  called  the  Juneau  Sea  Level  Copper  Mines 
until  1917  when  the  name  was  changed  to  the  Alaska  Nickel  Mines. 
The  developments  in  1917  consisted  of  a 180-foot  shaft  with  levels  at 
80  feet  and  180  feet  (drifts  totaled  about  155  feet)  and  prospect  holes 
at  several  places.  A wharf  site  and  water-power  sites  have  been 
located  by  the  present  company. 

GENERAL  CHARACTER  OF  THE  DEPOSIT. 

Exposures  of  rock  in  this  part  of  the  coastal  plain  are  confined  to 
the  seashore,  for  everywhere  else  the  rocks  are  concealed  by  a heavy 
growth  of  vegetation  and  by  swamps.  Three  outcrops,  heavily 
stained  with  iron,  were  noted  on  the  shore.  These  outcrops  form 
irregular  areas  whose  maximum  diameter  is  about  70  feet  and  project 
somewhat  above  the  surrounding  rock.  The  extreme  outcrops  are 
about  a mile  apart.  The  northwest  cropping  shows  limonite,  and 
although  no  sulphides  were  seen  it  is  probable  that  they  would  be 
found  under  the  leached  zone.  The  180-foot  shaft  was  sunk  beside 
the  central  outcrop,  and  ore  is  reported  on  the  180-foot  level.  No 
work  has  been  done  on  the  southeast  outcrop,  but  the  ore  minerals  are 
found  on  the  surface.  At  a number  of  other  places  the  ore  minerals 
have  been  found  disseminated  through  the  country  rock  in  small 
amounts,  but  it  is  not  yet  known  whether  this  type  of  so-called 
“ disseminated  ore”  can  be  handled  profitably.  Two  of  the  principal 
outcrops  are  close  to  the  contact  between  the  igneous  rock  in  which 
the  ore  bodies  occur  and  the  quartz-mica  schist  which  these  igneous 
rocks  intrude.  The  northwest  outcrop  is  several  hundred  feet  from 
the  contact;  the  central  outcrop  is  a few  feet  from  the  contact;  and 
the  southeast  outcrop  also  may  be  near  a contact,  but  the  heavy  cloak 
of  vegetation  conceals  the  rock  a few  feet  away  from  the  outcrop. 
From  the  surface  outcrops,  then,  it  would  appear  that  the  distribution 
of  the  ore  bodies  is  to  some  extent  related  to  the  contact  between  the 
igneous  body  and  the  schist.  Most  of  the  “disseminated  ore”  has 
been  found  near  the  contact,  but  some  of  it  is  farther  away  from  the 

1 Nickel  is  definitely  known  to  occur  at  only  one  other  place  in  Alaska.  The  occurrence  is  on  Canyon 
Creek,  Copper  River  valley,  and  a brief  description  of  the  prospect  is  given  in  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  576, 

pp.  52-53,  1914. 

115086°— 19 9 


126 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

contact  than  are  the  two  main  outcrops.  The  only  chance  for 
underground  observation  was  in  the  80-foot  level  of  the  central 
outcrop.  The  shaft  is  in  light-colored  diorite  that  is  free  from  ore 
minerals.  The  drift  for  about  30  feet  from  the  shaft  is  in  barren 
hornblende  gabbro,  but  the  last  20  feet  are  in  massive  ore.  The 
contact  between  the  barren  rock  and  the  ore-bearing  portion  appears 
to  be  an  irregular  line.  There  is  a rather  rapid  transition  from  barren 
rock  to  rock  in  which  there  are  a few  disseminated  sulphides  and  then 
to  massive  ore.  The  change  does  not  appear  to  occur  progressively 
but  irregularly.  In  the  face  of  the  tunnel  and  in  a crosscut  near  the 
face  are  some  blocks  of  barren  rock,  but  the  drill  holes  in  the  face  of 
the  main  tunnel  are  apparently  in  sulphides.  Some  movement  has 
taken  place  in  this  tunnel,  but  its  extent  is  not  known.  The  180-foot 
level  could  not  be  visited,  but  it  is  reported  that  ore  was  encountered 
on  this  level.  The  report  that  a clay  gouge  occurs  in  this  level  indi- 
cates that  movement  has  taken  place.  The  presence  of  niccolite  on 
the  180-foot  level  indicates  a secondary  origin  for  some  of  the  ore  on 
that  level. 

MINERALOGY. 

The  chief  metals  that  may  be  of  commercial  importance  found  in 
this  deposit  are  copper  and  nickel.  Assays  furnished  by  the  com-  ■ 
pany  show  small  amounts  of  gold  and  silver.  The  principal  sulphide 
minerals  are  pyrrhotite,  chalcopyrite,  and  pentlandite.  In  the  hand 
specimen  of  the  rock  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite  are  the  only  minerals  i 
that  can  be  recognized,  but  in  a polished  specimen  of  the  ore  the 
pentlandite  can  be  plainly  seen.  A few  specimens  of  niccolite  have 
been  obtained  from  both  levels.  The  niccolite  is  a secondary  mineral  ' 
and  lines  crevices  in  the  country  rock.  Insufficient  underground  work 
has  been  done  to  afford  data  on  the  relative  abundance  of  the  ore 
minerals.  In  some  hand  specimens  chalcopyrite  is  more  abundant 
than  pyrrhotite,  in  other  specimens  the  reverse  is  true. 

The  minerals  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite  have  so  often  been 
described  and  are  so  common  that  they  are  known  to  all  prospectors. 
Pentlandite,  however,  is  a rare  mineral  and  besides  is  not  often  distin- 
guishable from  pyrrhotite  in  an  ore  specimen.  As  the  mixture  of 
chalcopyrite,  pyrrhotite,  and  pentlandite  looks  just  like  the  mixture 
of  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite,  the  only  way  of  determining  defi- 
nitely whether  nickel  is  present  is  to  make  a chemical  test.  A simple 
chemical  method  of  testing  for  nickel  is  as  follows: 1 

Grind  to  a fine  powder  a sample — 2 or  3 grams  (30  to  40  grains) ; treat  in  a test  tube 
with  a few  cubic  centimeters  of  aqua  regia  (a  mixture  of  1 part  nitric  acid  and  3 or 
4 parts  hydrochloric  acid),  and  boil  nearly  to  dryness;  then  add  enough  nitric 
acid  and  water  to  dissolve  all  soluble  substances.  Filter  if  necessary.  Dilute  to 


i Hess,  F.  L.,  Nickel:  U,  S.  Geol,  Survey  Mineral  Resources,  1914,  pt.  1,  pp.  929-930,  1916. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


127 


10-15  cubic  centimeters  (about  one-third  the  contents  of  a test  tube  6 inches  long 
and  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in  diameter),  add  a gram  or  more  (half  a teaspoonful) 
of  citric  acid  (solid),  and  dissolve  by  heating.  Make  the  solution  slightly  ammo- 
niacal,  noting  that  it  should  contain  no  precipitate.  To  the  slightly  ammoniacal 
solution  add  about  2 cubic  centimeters  (a  half  teaspoonful)  of  1 per  cent  alcoholic 
solution  of  dimethylglyoxime.  A voluminous  scarlet  precipitate  indicates  nickel. 

The  aqua  regia  solution  is  boiled  nearly  to  dryness  to  remove  from  it  the  large  excess 
of  acid  and  anything,  such  as  hydrogen  sulphide,  that  would  cause  the  precipitation 
of  iron,  cobalt,  nickel,  etc.,  in  the  ammoniacal  solution. 

The  citric  acid  will  prevent  the  precipitation  of  iron  and  aluminum  as  hydroxides, 
but  will  not  prevent  the  precipitation  of  sulphides  of  iron,  cobalt,  nickel,  and  some 
other  metals  in  the  ammoniacal  solution. 

If  a brown  precipitate  of  iron  forms  after  the  solution  is  made  ammoniacal,  it  contains 
an  insufficient  quantity  of  citric  acid. 

At  the  present  time  dimethylglyoxime  may  be  difficult  to  obtain. 
The  price  for  it  is  very  high,  but  a small  quantity  (as  much  as  will 
go  on  the  blade  of  a pocket  knife)  should  provide  the  prospector  with 
enough  solution  to  last  a year.  If  copper  is  present  the  acid  solution 
will  turn  deep  blue  when  ammonia  is  added  to  it. 

Pentlandite  is  an  iron-nickel  sulphide,  (Fe,  Ni)S.  It  is  brittle  and 
has  a hardness  of  3.5-4.  It  has  a metallic  luster  and  a light  bronze- 
yellow  color.  Pentlandite  carries  about  22  per  cent  nickel.  Except 
on  polished  surfaces  none  could  be  recognized  in  the  rough  hand 
specimens  of  the  ore. 

Niccolite  is  an  arsenide  of  nickel,  NiAs,  and  contains  about  43.9 
per  cent  nickel.  It  is  very  brittle  and  has  a pale  copper-red  color. 
It  was  found  in  small  amount  lining  crevices  in  the  rock. 

TYPE. 

One  of  the  purposes  of  the  rather  close  study  of  a deposit  that  is 
not  very  extensively  developed  is  to  determine  the  type  of  the  deposit 
if  possible  and  so  compare  it  with  known  deposits  of  similar  type  that 
have  been  extensively  developed.  Much  of  the  experience  gained 
in  the  development  of  the  known  deposit  can  then  be  applied  to  the 
development  of  the  relatively  unknown  deposit.  'One  can  not  argue, 
however,  that  if  one  deposit  is  large,  every  one  of  similar  type  is 
equally  large.  The  similarity  between  the  nickel  deposit  on  Chichagof 
Island  and  the  deposits  at  Sudbury,  Canada,  is  at  once  evident. 

A comparison  between  the  deposit  on  Chichagof  Island  and  the 
Sudbury  deposits  can  best  be  shown  in  the  form  of  a comparative 
table.  The  description  of  the  Sudbury  deposits  is  drawn  largely 
from  the  report  of  the  Royal  Ontario  Nickel  Commission.1 


Report  of  the  Royal  Ontario  Nickel  Commission,  pp.  95-286,  1917. 


128 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Comparison  of  Chichagof  nickel  deposit  and  the  Sudbury  deposits. 


Alaska  Nickel  Mines  deposit. 

1.  Two  of  the  outcrops  are  marginal  in 

igneous  rock,  norite  or  diorite.  The 
relations  of  the  third  outcrop  are  not 
known. 

2.  Predominating  sulphides  are  pyrrho- 

tite,  chalcopyrite,  and  pentlandite. 

3.  Ore  minerals  occur  in  places  as  blebs 

disseminated  in  norite. 

4.  Later  granitic  intrusive  bodies  cut  the 

norite. 

5.  In  general  the  rocks  at  the  margin  of 

the  large  intrusive  body  appear  to 
be  more  basic  than  the  rocks  at  a 
greater  distance  from  the  margin. 

6.  Barren  blocks  of  rock  seem  to  be  in- 

cluded in  the  ore  on  the  80-foot  level . 

7.  No  micropegmatite  found.  Acidic 

rocks  are  chiefly  albite  bearing. 

8.  Freshest  hypersthene  occurs  with  the 

ore. 

9.  Transition  from  nonore  to  ore  is  rather 

sharp. 

10.  Little  secondary  quartz  and  no  cal- 

cite  has  been  observed. 

11.  The  shape  of  the  ore  body  is  not 

known. 


12.  The  sulphides  are  later  than  the  sili- 
cates. The  pentlandite  is  appar- 
ently in  part  later  than  the  pyrrho- 
tite. 


Sudbury  deposits. 

1.  Ore  bodies  are  near  or  in  norite.  The 

chief  commercial  deposits  are  mar- 
ginal bodies  outside  the  norite. 

2.  Same. 

3.  Same. 

4.  Same. 

5.  Same. 


6.  Ore  is  rocky. 

7.  Micropegmatite  is  abundant. 

8.  Same. 

9.  Transition  from  nonore  to  ore  is  sharp 

in  Creighton  ore  body. 

10.  Secondary  quartz  and  cal  cite  is  re- 

ported from  some  of  the  deposits. 

11.  The  shape  of  the  commercial  ore 

bodies  is  for  the  most  part  rudely 
lenticular.  Some  are  in  irregular 
cylinders  or  tubes;  some  are  in  dis- 
tinct veins. 

12.  Same. 


The  nickel  deposits  of  Chichagof  Island  and  those  of  Sudbury  are 
seen  from  the  above  comparative  table  to  he  essentially  alike  both  in 
the  general  type  of  occurrence  of  the  deposits  and  in  the  mineralogy 
of  the  ores.  On  the  assumption,  then,  that  the  two  deposits  are 
genetically  similar  facts  determined  with  regard  to  the  Sudbury 
deposits  may  be  applied  to  these  deposits.  Two  types  of  occurrences 
have  been  recognized  at  Sudbury — u marginal”  deposits  and  “ offset” 
deposits**  Of  the  marginal  deposits  those  that  occur  in  the  rocks 
adjacent  to  the  norite  contain  the  commercially  important  ore  bodies. 
The  ore  bodies  found  on  Chichagof  Island  are  in  the  igneous  rock — 
norite,  hornblende  gabbro,  or  diorite — but  by  analogy  there  seems  to 
be  no  reason  why  the  deposits  should  not  be  looked  for  in  the  adja- 
cent mica  schist  also.  At  Sudbury  some  of  the  commercial  deposits 
are  surrounded  by  rock  in  which  the  ore  minerals  are  disseminated; 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


129 


on  Chichagof,  consequently,  outcrops  of  ore  bodies  should  be  looked 
for  wherever  so-called  “ disseminated  ores”  are  seen.  The  outlines 
of  the  partly  developed  ore  body  on  Chichagof  have  not  been  suffi- 
ciently delimited  to  afford  comparison  with  any  of  the  Sudbury  ore 
bodies.  The  ore  body  appears  to  stand  nearly  vertical  and  to  be 
somewhat  disturbed  by  faulting. 

Other  points  to  be  noted  in  prospecting  on  Chichagof  Island  are 
that  ore  so  far  has  not  been  found  in  the  very  coarse  grained  dark 
norite,  and  that  if  a very  coarse  grained  diorite — chiefly  one  containing 
large  hornblende  crystals  and  feldspar — is  found,  some  disseminated 
ore  minerals  will  be  found  in  the  rocks  near  by.  A diorite  that 
resembles  the  diorite  of  the  nickel  intrusive  and  differs  from  the  other 
diorites  of  the  region  is  shown  on  the  map  near  the  southwest  entrance 
to  Lisianski  Strait,  and  prospecting  may  reveal  some  nickel  deposits 
near  this  diorite.  The  irregularity  of  the  occurrence  of  the  Sudbury 
ore  deposits  suggests  the  necessity  of  careful  underground  explora- 
tion by  means  of  the  diamond  drill  to  determine  the  extent  of  the  ore 
bodies. 

PETROGRAPHY. 

As  the  general  type  of  occurrence  of  these  deposits  has  already  been 
discussed,  a description  of  some  thin  sections  of  rock  and  polished 
surfaces  of  ore  will  be  given  here.  The  deposits  are  found  in  a body 
of  medium  to  coarse  grained  igneous  rock  that  shows  considerable 
variations  in  type — variations  that  extend  all  the  way  from  granite 
to  gabbro.  This  igneous  body,  or  bodies,  intrudes  quartz-mica  schist, 
which  is  supposed  to  be  the  metamorphic  phase  of  the  graywacke 
that  occupies  much  of  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island. 

A thin  section  of  this  quartz-mica  schist  shows  biotite  in  parallel 
arrangement  making  up  much  of  the  slide;  muscovite  also  occurs, 
both  as  the  coarse-grained  variety  and  as  the  fine-grained  variety 
(sericite) ; quartz  is  fairly  abundant  as  grains  between  the  mica  laths. 
A more  intensely  altered  phase  of  this  schist  taken  from  the  contact 
with  the  intrusive  body  shows  a strong  development  of  biotite,  quartz, 
plagioclase  (about  oligoclase-andesine),  garnet,  muscovite,  and  acces- 
sory apatite.  The  minerals  all  show  undulatory  extinction.  Small 
grains  of  zircon  surrounded  by  pleochroic  haloes  occur  in  the  biotite. 

In  general  a gradation  in  rock  type  from  more  acidic  away  from  the 
contact  to  less  acidic  near  the  contact  appears  to  exist.  That  this 
gradation  is  due  entirely  to  differentiation,  however,  is  doubtful;  for 
the  most  acidic  bodies  of  rock,  such  as  those  in  Cautious  Pass  and 
those  in  Mirror  Harbor,  seem  to  be  later  than  the  diorite  and  intrusive 
in  it.  The  acidic  dikes  are  definitely  later  than  the  diorite  and  norite. 
A thin  section  of  a specimen  of  the  coarse  granite  of  the  type  similar 
to  that  found  in  Cautious  Pass  consists  of  coarsely  granular  quartz, 
feldspar,  greenish  biotite,  muscovite,  and  garnet.  The  feldspar  is 


130 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


albite  and  albite-oiigoclase.  The  rock  gives  evidence  of  having  under- 
gone considerable  pressure.  The  smaller  light  acidic  dikes  and  bodies 
that  cut  the  diorite  are  aplites  and  granites.  The  feldspar  is  albite 
and  oligoclase.  One  of  these  dikes  shows  in  thin  section  quartz, 
biotite,  feldspar,  and  sericite.  The  feldspar  is  variable  in  composition, 
showing  great  variation  in  a single  crystal,  and  ranges  from  albite 
to  andesine.  The  feldspar  crystals  in  the  specimens  examined  show 
some  alteration.  One  very  coarse  grained  rock  has  feldspar  crystals 
an  inch  or  more  in  length.  Practically  no  opaque  minerals — sulphides 
or  oxides — are  present  in  these  rocks. 

The  rock  that  makes  up  most  of  the  intrusive  body  falls  under 
the  general  term  of  diorite.  Different  specimens  show,  however, 
great  variation  in  color,  texture,  and  mineral  composition.  The 
descriptions  of  only  a few  specimens  can  be  given.  A sample  taken 
about  1,800  feet  south  of  the  main  nickel  outcrop  is  a light-colored, 
coarse-grained,  somewhat  gneissic  rock  containing  a few  scattered 
phenocrysts  of  feldspar.  The  microscope  shows  the  rock  to  be 
somewhat  crushed,  although  the  minerals  are  relatively  fresh  in 
appearance.  The  mineral  constituents  of  the  rock  are  plagioclase, 
biotite,  garnet,  apatite,  chlorite,  and  actinolite  ( ?) . The  plagioclase 
crystals  are  zonal  and  hence  are  of  variable  composition,  which 
ranges  from  that  of  oligoclase-andesine  to  andesine-labradorite. 
Biotite  is  almost  free  of  inclusions.  A few  magnetite  grains 
gathered  along  the  edges  of  the  biotite  may  represent  the  alteration 
of  seme  of  the  biotite.  The  chlorite  is  secondary  and  replaces  the 
garnet.  Many  needle-like  crystals  (actinolite?)  occur  as  inclusions 
in  the  garnet  and  the  feldspar.  The  absence  of  hornblende  is  to 
be  noted.  This  rock  is  a diorite.  Specimens  of  another  type  of 
diorite  collected  from  several  places  are  of  a fairly  dark  greenish- 
gray  rock,  which  is  coarse  grained  and  porphyritic.  The  thin  section 
shows  feldspar  and  hornblende  phenocrysts  set  in  a fairly  fine 
grained  groundmass.  The  feldspar  is  zonal,  is  variable  in  compo- 
sition, and  is  considerably  altered.  The  average  composition  of  the 
feldspar  is  about  andesine.  The  hornblende  phenocrysts  are  fresh 
and  unaltered.  The  groundmass  consists  of  altered  feldspar,  horn- 
blende, and  alteration  products.  Sericite,  chlorite  (pennine),  and  a 
small  amount  of  epidote  are  the  alteration  products.  A type  of 
diorite  that  has  been  noted  at  a number  of  places  near  occurrences 
of  “disseminated  ore”  is  a very  coarse  grained  hornblende-feldspar 
rock.  This  rock  in  thin  section  shows  hornblende  crystals  an  inch 
long,  set  in  a quartz-feldspar  matrix.  The  hornblende  crystals  are 
fresh  in  appearance  but  are  replaced  by  a little  chlorite;  they  are 
lath-shaped  and  seem  to  be  eaten  into  or  corroded  by  the  feldspar. 
At  one  place  feldspar  or  quartz  appears  to  have  replaced  the  whole 
central  portion  of  the  hornblende  crystal.  The  feldspar,  which  is 


THE  WEST# COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


131 


near  oligoclase  in  composition,  is  extensively  altered  and  replaced  by 
sericite.  Some  of  the  feldspar  is  broken  and  shows  bent  twinning 
lamellae.  This  rock  is  quartz  diorite  porphyry. 

The  most  basic  of  the  rocks — hornblende  gabbro  and  norite — are 
found  close  to  the  outcrops  of  the  ore  bodies.  A common  rock  of 
characteristic  appearance  that  occurs  near  the  ore  bodies  is  a very 
coarsely  grained  hornblende  gabbro  or  norite.  The  rock  weathers 
to  large  rounded  boulders  with  rough  and  pitted  surfaces.  Small 
amounts  of  ore  minerals  scattered  in  blebs  are  seen  at  some  places 
in  these  rocks.  A thin  section  of  this  type  of  rock  shows  it  to  con- 
sist chiefly  of  altered  hornblende  and  pyroxene.  Fresh-looking 
plagioclase  occurs  in  small  amount  and  is  very  basic  in  composition, 
being  near  labradorite-bytownite.  The  hornblende  and  pyroxene 
has  altered  almost  entirely  to  a fine-grained  aggregate  that  may  be 
talc  or  uralite.  Small  amounts  of  biotite,  chlorite,  and  sulphide  were 
also  noted.  Another  specimen  of  rock  taken  from  a locality  near  the 
main  nickel  outcrop  is  a hornblende  gabbro.  The  rock  is  medium 
to  coarse  grained  and  is  greenish-gray  in  color.  The  light  minerals 
and  the  dark  minerals  are  nearly  equal  in  amount.  The  thin  section 
shows  a rock  consisting  of  mineral  grains  one  twenty-fifth  of  an  inch 
or  less  in  diameter.  The  chief  minerals  are  feldspar  and  hornblende; 
accessory  minerals  are  sericite,  chlorite,  and  quartz.  The  feldspar  is 
near  labradorite  in  composition ; the  crystals  are  crushed,  show  undu- 
latory  extinction,  and  have  bent  twinning  lamellae.  The  hornblende 
is  pale  greenish  and  yellowish  and  is  not  strongly  pleochroic.  Small 
stringers  of  sericite  cut  and  replace  the  plagioclase.  The  quartz  is 
present  in  the  form  of  a stringer  that  cuts  across  a feldspar  crystal. 
A specimen  of  rock  from  a point  about  75  feet  from  the  outcrop  of 
the  main  ore  body  is  a fresh  light-colored  hornblende  diorite.  The 
thin  section  shows  hornblende,  feldspar,  and  quartz.  The  horn- 
blende is  green  and  strongly  pleochroic  and  is  fresh  and  somewhat 
shreddy.  The  feldspar  is  partly  altered  and  has  the  composition  of 
andesine-labradorite.  A specimen  of  the  rock  from  the  shaft  sunk 
alongside  the  main  ore  body  is  hornblende  gabbro.  This  rock 
consists  largely  of  plagioclase  that  has  a composition  near  that  of 
labradorite.  The  mafic  minerals  are  interstitial  and  are  chiefly 
common  hornblende.  The  apparently  homogeneous  crystals  of 
hornblende  in  this  rock  and  in  many  of  the  other  rocks  examined 
are  really  made  up  of  differently  oriented  crystals,  so  that  the  ex- 
tinction takes  place  at  different  times  in  different  parts  of  the  crystal. 
A specimen  of  rock  from  the  80-foot  level,  about  10  feet  from  the 
shaft,  is  a dark-greenish  medium-grained  hornblende  gabbro.  The 
microscope  shows  altered  hornblende,  plagioclase,  and  a little 
sulphide.  The  hornblende  is  greatly  altered;  the  feldspar  crystals 
are  broken  and  are  cut  by  stringers  of  chlorite  (?).  The  composition 


132 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


of  the  plagioclase  is  near  that  of  lahradorite.  Another  specimen 
taken  from  the  80-foot  level,  about  30  feet  from  the  shaft,  is  a coarse- 
grained greenish  hornblende  gabbro.  The  plagioclase  crystals,  which 
have  a composition  about  that  of  lahradorite,  are  somewhat  broken 
and  bent  and  are  replaced  in  part  with  sericite.  Some  of  the  horn- 
blende crystals  show  bending.  A specimen  of  the  “ disseminated 
ore”  is  a dark-brown  fairly  coarse  grained  rock.  It  consists  chiefly 
of  hornblende,  pyroxene,  and  feldspar,  together  with  disseminated 
pyrrho tite  and  chalcopyrite  and  a little  hiotite.  The  hornblende  is 
brownish  and  is  strongly  pleochroic.  The  pyroxene  is  orthorhombic; 
it  occurs  in  lath-shaped  crystals  rounded  at  the  ends  and  has  altered 
somewhat  to  hornblende.  Where  the  pyroxene  crystals  are  cut  by 
the  ore  minerals  there  is  a narrow  border  of  an  alteration  mineral 
(sericite?).  Pyroxene  makes  up  about  one-quarter  of  the  section. 
The  feldspar  is  plagioclase  that  has  an  average  composition  near 
that  of  lahradorite.  The  feldspar  is  clear  and  relatively  unaltered 
and  shows  zonal  arrangement.  One  of  the  crystals  has  been  broken 
across,  and  the  fracture  is  occupied  by  a differently  oriented  crystal 
of  plagioclase;  another  crystal  has  bent  twinning  lamellae.  A little 
chlorite  was  noted  replacing  the  feldspar.  Most  of  the  opaque 
minerals  replace  and  are  definitely  later  than  the  principal  silicates 
in  the  section.  The  replacement  of  the  pyroxene  by  sulphide  is 
particularly  evident.  The  opaque  minerals  also  occur  as  grains  in 
the  original  minerals.  Nickel  was  found  in  this  specimen. 

A thin  section  of  a specimen  of  the  ore  consists  chiefly  of  opaque 
minerals  with  a little  hornblende,  pyroxene,  and  feldspar.  The 
crystals  of  hornblende  and  pyroxene  are  rounded  and  are  replaced 
in  part  by  the  ore  minerals,  which  have  entered  the  cleavage  cracks 
of  these  minerals.  The  rounding  of  the  hornblende  and  the  pyroxene 
crystals  may  have  been  caused  by  their  replacement  by  ore  minerals, 
but  this  same  type  of  rounding  has  been  noted  in  specimens  of  norite 
and  hornblende  gabbro  in  which  there  are  no  ore  minerals.  If 
selective  replacement  of  feldspar  alone  had  taken  place  the  resulting 
appearance  of  the  mafic  minerals  would  have  been  the  same. 

A polished  surface  of  the  ore  shows  pyrrhotite,  pentlandite,  and 
chalcopyrite.  The  pentlandite  is  of  two  kinds,  one  of  which  is  in  large 
grains  that  show  cleavage  and  that  surround  and  appear  to  be  later  than 
grains  of  pyrrhotite,  and  the  other  is  in  stringers,  shreds,  and  patches  I- 
in  the  pyrrhotite  grains.  The  grains  of  pyrrhotite  show  blading  simi-  ; 
lar  to  that  seen  in  polished  surfaces  of  chalcopyrite.  Chalcopyrite  in 
this  particular  specimen  replaces  the  gangue  minerals  more  extensively 
than  do  the  other  minerals.  At  no  place  in  a dozen  specimens  exam- 
ined could  any  decisive  evidence  as  to  the  relative  time  of  formation  of 
the  sulphides  with  reference  to  one  another  be  obtained.  At  one  or 
two  places  the  pentlandite  appears  to  be  possibly  later  than  the 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


133 


pyrrhotite,  but  at  most  places  there  is  no  indication  which  mineral 
was  formed  later.  The  same  is  true  with  regard  to  the  relations  of 
the  chalcopyrite  to  the  pentlandite  and  pyrrhotite.  In  places  small 
stringers  of  pyrrhotite  definitely  cut  chalcopyrite,  and  there  can  be 
no  doubt  about  this  particular  bit  of  pyrrhotite  being  later  than  the 
chalcopyrite.  Until  more  evidence  is  available  than  is  afforded  by 
the  polished  specimens  examined,  a decision  as  to  the  relative  age 
of  the  opaque  minerals  to  one  another  will  have  to  be  postponed. 
They  are,  however,  definitely  later  than  the  original  silicates. 

USES  OF  NICKEL.1 

The  uses  of  nickel  depend  on  its  properties  of  toughening,  whitening,  hardening, 
increasing  the  elasticity,  and  preventing  the  oxidation  of  certain  alloys;  on  its  own 
resistance  to  alteration  under  atmospheric  conditions;  its  beautiful  white  luster;  the 
high  polish  it  takes;  and  the  ease  with  which  it  is  electroplated.  As  with  all  other 
metals,  its  use  depends  on  the  fact  that  it  is  isolated  from  its  ores  with  comparative 
ease  and  cheapness.  * * * 

The  crystalline  structure  of  nickel  steel  is  more  minute  and  the  modulus  of  elasticity 
is  about  the  same  as  that  of  carbon  steel,  and  it  is  harder. 

The  alloy  of  iron  and  nickel  known  as  “invar”  is  called  a steel.  Invar  containing 
36  per  cent  of  nickel  is  practically  without  expansion  or  contraction  when  exposed  to 
varying  temperatures.  It  is  used  for  scientific  instruments,  pendulums,  and  steel 
tapes. 

An  alloy  of  25  per  cent  nickel  and  75  per  cent  copper  is  used  in  the  5-cent  piece  or 
“nickel”  of  United  States  coinage.  The  small  coins  of  Belgium,  Denmark,  England, 
France,  Sweden,  and  Switzerland  contain  some  tin  and  zinc,  the  Italian  coins  only 
tin,  and  Chilean  coins  contain  copper  70  per  cent,  nickel  20  per  cent,  and  zinc  10  per 
cent.2  Some  other  countries  use  pure  nickel  for  their  subsidiary  coins.  From  1857 
to  1864  the  United  States  used  a composition  of  12  per  cent  nickel  and  88  per  cent 
copper  in  1-cent  pieces,  a very  much  better  alloy  than  that  now  in  use,  which  is  95 
per  cent  copper  and  5 per  cent  tin  and  zinc.3 

Monel  metal  is  an  alloy  of  nickel  and  copper  made  by  the  International  Nickel  Co. 
by  smelting  the  Sudbury  ores  without  separating  the  two  metals.  As  stated  by  the 
Bayonne  Casting  Co.  the  composition  is  67  per  cent  nickel,  28  per  cent  copper,  and  5 
per  cent  other  metals,  probably  mostly  iron  and  a little  cobalt.  It  has  a tensile 
strength  equal  to  good  nickel  steel,  resists  many  corrosive  agents,  and  has  a color  and 
takes  a polish  equal  to  that  of  nickel.  It  is  used  for  propellers  for  warships  and  smaller 
craft,  including  racing  motor  boats;  for  valves  on  high-pressure  steam  lines;  valve 
stems ; pump  rods  and  liners ; acid  pumps ; burning  points  in  enameling  and  japanning 
ovens;  pickle  frames  and  rods  in  tin-plate  mills;  wire  cloth;  golf -club  heads;  and 
roofing  materials. 

The  addition  of  a small  percentage  of  nickel  makes  a silver- white  alloy  with  copper, 
and  considerable  quantities  of  nickel  are  used  in  the  alloy  known  as  German  silver, 
used  for  the  more  valuable  metal.  German  silver  is  used  direct  for  table  ware  and 
other  utensils  and  as  a base  for  silver-plated  ware. 

Nichrome  is  a proprietary  name  for  an  alloy  of  nickel  and  chromium  whch  was 
first  used  for  resistance  wires  in  electrical  work.  It  stands  temperatures  considerably 
above  a red  heat  with  little  oxidation  and  without  melting,  so  that  it  is  used  in  small 
resistance  furnaces  in  place  of  platinum.  It  is  also  used  for  chemist’s  triangles,  etc., 

1 Hess,  F.  L.,  Nickel:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Mineral  Resources,  1915,  pt.  1,  pp.  761-763, 766, 1917. 

2 Brannt,  W.  T.,  The  metallic  alloys,  pp.  307-308, 1908. 

2 Ann.  Rept.  Director  of  Mint,  1911,  p.  9, 1912. 


134 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 


for  making  carbonizing  pots,  and  in  wire  cloth  for  dipping  baskets  where  articles  are 
to  be  dipped  in  acid  solutions.  * * * 

Great  quantities  of  nickel  are  used  for  plating  iron  and  other  articles  where  a beauti- 
ful protective  finish  is  desired. 

It  seems  remarkable  that,  with  its  toughness,  resistance  to  corrosion,  and  good  color, 
pure  nickel  cooking  utensils  are  not  manufactured. 

HOT  SPRINGS. 

Two  hot-spring  localities  were  visited  in  the  western  part  of  Chi- 
chagof Island.  Both  places  had  been  previously  visited  by  Waring1 
and  are  described  as  follows: 

HOT  SPRINGS  ON  NORTH  ARM  OP  PERIL  STRAIT. 

On  the  north  shore,  about  three-quarters  of  a mile  eastward  from  the  head  of  North 
Arm  of  Peril  Strait  (Hooniah  Sound) , heated  water  issues  at  about  half-tide  level  from 
the  mussel  and  kelp  covered  rocks.  As  the  warm  water  rises  beneath  or  flows  into  the 
cold  sea  water,  its  presence  is  betrayed  by  convection  currents,  which  give  an  oily 
appearance  to  the  surface;  but  when  examined  at  low  tide  the  warm  water  has  no 
noticeable  taste  nor  odor.  There  is  only  a little  bubbling,  as  of  gas,  and  a small 
amount  of  dark-green  vegetable  growth,  either  algae  or  a seaweed. 

The  three  principal  springs  found  issue  from  fissures  in  the  rock,  separated  by  spaces 
of  5 and  2 feet,  about  100  yards  northwest  of  a small  cold-water  stream.  The  tem- 
perature of  the  springs  was  101°  F.,  and  their  flow  per  minute,  as  near  as  it  could  be 
measured,  was,  respectively,  about  \\  gallons,  a quarter  of  a gallon,  and  three-quarters 
of  a gallon,  but  the  discharge  appeared  to  diminish  as  the  tide  fell,  perhaps  in  part 
because  of  the  draining  off  of  contaminating  sea  water  from  the  adjacent  rocks  above 
the  springs,  but  probably  in  greater  part  because  of  the  lowering  of  the  hydrostatic 
pressure  by  the  falling  tide  and  the  escape  of  the  warm  water  from  lower  crevices. 

The  analysis  of  the  water  of  the  largest  of  the  three  springs  * * * shows  that  it 
has  a high  total  mineral  content  and  is  of  the  sodium  sulphate  type.  Although  the 
sample  collected  contained  considerable  chloride  it  seems  not  to  have  been  greatly 
contaminated  with  sea  water  left  in  the  moss  and  gravel  by  the  receding  tide,  for  if  it 
had  been  so  contaminated  it  would  have  contained  more  chloride  than  sulphate. 

Beneath  a low  cemented  gravel  bank,  near  a large  boulder  100  yards  northwest 
of  the  principal  group  of  springs,  slightly  warmer  water  (temperature  103°  F.)  forms 
oil-like  convection  currents  over  an  area  of  several  square  yards  in  the  adjacent  bay 
water,  but  the  outlet  of  this  spring  lowers  with  the  tide,  so  that  its  discharge  is  not 
measurable.  No  other  warm  springs  were  found  in  a search  extending  from  the  head 
of  the  bay  to  a point  a quarter  of  a mile  east  of  the  cold-water  stream  near  the  main 
spring  group. 

Cliffs  of  massive  granitic  material  rise  from  the  narrow  bouldery  talus  slope  along 
the  shore.  In  the  main  the  rock  seems  to  be  comparatively  unaltered,  but  near  the 
springs  there  is  a zone,  possibly  a dike,  of  fractured  and  altered  dioritic  rock.  In 
the  hand  specimen  this  material  shows  considerable  epidote  and  chlorite,  products 
of  the  alteration  of  the  original  hornblende,  and  F.  L.  Hess,  of  the  United  States 
Geological  Survey,  noted  that  it  contains  much  sphene.  The  escape  of  the  spring 
water,  probably  heated  either  by  the  depth  from  which  it  rises  or  by  chemical  reactions 
in  the  altered  rock,  is  apparently  facilitated  by  the  presence  of  this  fractured  mass 
of  rock  in  the  larger  mass  of  intrusive  crystalline  material  of  the  region. 

Because  of  their  inconspicuous  issuance  and  their  inaccessible  location  for  bathing, 
the  springs  are  little  known,  and  no  attempt  has  been  made  to  improve  them. 


1 Waring,  G.  A.,  Mineral  springs  of  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  418,  pp.  33-35, 1917. 


THE  WEST  COAST  OF  CHICHAGOF  ISLAND. 


135 


HOONIAH  WARM  SPRINGS. 

Hooniah  Warm  Springs  are  on  the  oceanward  coast  of  Chichagof  Island,  about  70 
miles  northwest  of  Sitka.  They  may  be  reached  by  launch  in  calm  weather,  but 
as  the  coast  is  rocky  and  there  is  usually  a heavy  surf  they  have  not  been  often  visited. 
A log  bathhouse  or  sweat  chamber  has  been  built  over  the  principal  spring,  however, 
and  the  locality  is  the  occasional  camping  place  of  hunters  and  trappers.  The  springs 
are  in  a small  rock  cove,  in  which  much  driftwood  is  cast  up  on  a beach  of  large 
rounded  stones. 

The  principal  spring  issues  at  the  edge  of  the  forest,  a few  feet  above  the  limit  of 
drift  logs  and  about  25  yards  from  and  15  feet  above  normal  high-tide  level.  The 
water  issues  at  a temperature  of  111°  F.  from  a vertical  opening  the  size  of  one’s  hand, 
in  dark,  hard  schistose  rock.  After  flowing  through  a natural  rock  pool,  over  which 
the  bath  chamber  has  been  built,  the  discharge — 30  gallons  a minute — cascades  down 
to  tidewater. 

The  spring  water  tastes  only  faintly  sulphureted,  and  there  appears  to  be  no  escape 
of  gas.  A noticeable  bubbling  in  the  water  below  a small  cascade  in  the  run-off 
channel  is  probably  due  to  air  trapped  in  the  cascade  rather  than  to  gas  escaping 
from  the  water.  Much  pale  salmon-colored  to  white,  stringy  algal  growth  forms 
along  the  run-off  channel,  as  is  usual  at  sulphureted  warm  springs. 

The  analysis  of  water  from  this  spring  * * * shows  that  it  is  a moderately 
concentrated  sodium  chloride  water  containing  considerable  sulphate.  Silica  forms 
more  than  a third  of  the  total  content,  possibly  in  part  as  a soluble  silicate. 

A second  spring,  with  a temperature  of  110°  F.  and  a discharge  of  about  a gallon  a 
minute,  issues  among  the  cobbles  20  yards  east  of  and  7 feet  lower  than  the  main 
spring,  and  vapor,  possibly  from  the  same  spring  or  fissure,  issues  from  openings  in  the 
forest  soil  15  yards  shoreward.  A third  spring,  with  a temperature  of  84°  F.  and  a 
flow  of  half  a gallon  a minute,  rises  with  slight  bubbling  in  the  muck  of  a small  stream 
channel  50  yards  west  of  the  principal  spring. 

Conditions  at  the  main  spring,  where  the  water  appears  to  issue  directly  from  a 
fissure  in  the  schist,  indicate  that  the  thermal  water  rises  along  such  seams  in  the  rock, 
which  dips  80°  S.  20°  W.  The  abnormal  temperature  of  the  water  may  be  due  solely 
to  the  depth  from  which  it  rises,  but  it  seems  probable  that  it  is  due,  in  part  at  least, 
to  the  presence  of  intrusive  rocks,  which  form  a wide  zone  east  of  the  springs.  The 
schist  from  which  the  warm  water  issues  is  a common  alteration  phase  of  the  Paleozoic 
or  Mesozoic  sediments  near  their  contact  with  intrusive  rocks  throughout  southeastern 
Alaska. 

The  hot  springs  on  the  north  arm  of  Peril  Strait  (Hooniah  Sound) 
were  visited  at  high  tide,  so  the  actual  openings  could  not  be  observed. 
These  springs  issue  at  or  near  a contact,  for  although  the  rocks  on 
both  sides  of  the  arm  for  several  miles  are  granite,  the  small  island 
just  south  of  the  spring  is  composed  of  marble.  Other  springs 
probably  occur  on  the  hillside,  for  steam  could  be  seen  rising  now 
and  then  above  the  trees  several  hundred  feet  up  the  slope.  Time 
was  not  available  for  an  extended  search  for  these  springs.  The 
writer  was  told  of  these  springs  by  an  old  Indian,  who  said  that  he 
had  found  them  40  years  ago. 

The  White  Sulphur  Springs,  formerly  called  the  Hooniah  Warm 
Springs,  have  been  surveyed  by  the  Forestry  Bureau,  and  some 
attempt  is  being  made  to  attract  attention  to  them.  Two  cabins 
have  been  built,  and  a bathhouse  has  been  constructed  over  a pool 


136 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


made  in  the  native  rock.  This  work  was  started  in  the  fall  of  1916. 
The  temperature  in  the  hath  is  100°  to  105°  F.  A good  trail  runs 
to  the  small  bay  at  Nickel. 

The  water  issues  from  fissures  in  the  schist.  The  schist  is  a dark- 
gray  contorted  rock,  which  contains  large  metamorphic  minerals — 
mica,  garnet,  staurolite,  corundum,  and  others.  It  seems  to  have 
undergone  later  movement,  for  it  is  broken  and  recemented.  Light 
and  dark  colored  dikes  cut  the  schist.  The  nature  of  the  coastal 
plain  to  the  east  is  for  the  most  part  concealed  by  muskeg  swamps, 
but  the  few  exposures  show  the  same  type  of  schist.  A fairly  large 
body  of  igneous  rock  occurs  about  4,500  feet  southeast  of  the  springs, 
and  a smaller  body  about  3,500  feet  northwest.  The  rock  of  the 
Porcupine  Islands  off  the  coast,  1J  miles  southwest  of  the  springs, 
is  schist  intruded  with  granite  rocks.  Copper-nickel  ore  occurs  in 
the  igneous  body  to  the  southeast,  and  a copper-nickel  (?)  claim 
has  been  located  about  2,000  feet  northwest  of  the  springs. 

A hot  spring  is  reported  by  Waring  from  Lisianski  Inlet,  but  this 
spring  was  not  found. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  AURIFEROUS  GRAVELS  OF  CfflSTOCHINA 

RIVER. 


By  Theodore  Chapin. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Slate  Creek  is  the  best  known  of  a number  of  productive  gold- 
bearing  placer  streams  on  the  headwaters  of  Chistochina  River, 
on  the  south  side  of  the  Alaska  Range,  in  the  upper  Copper  River 
basin.  The  other  gold-bearing  streams  are  Ruby  Gulch,  Chisna 
River,  and  Lime  Creek,  all  of  which  are  within  a few  miles  of  Slate 
Creek. 

GEOLOGY. 


CARBONIFEROUS  ROCKS. 

The  oldest  rocks  of  the  region  are  the  Chisna  and  Mankomen  for- 
mations, both  of  Carboniferous  age.  As  originally  described,  the 
Chisna  formation,  the  older,  consists  of  tuffs,  quartzites,  and  con- 
glomerates; the  Mankomen  formation  is  essentially  black  slate  and 
limestone. 

TERTIARY  CONGLOMERATE. 

Unconformably  overlying  the  Mankomen  rocks  is  a conglomerate 
composed  essentially  of  well-rounded  boulders  of  amygdaloidal 
greenstone,  diorite,  and  quartz,  with  lesser  amounts  of  black  slate, 
limestone,  schist,  and  porphyry.  It  is  commonly  of  a brick-red 
color,  due  to  the  solutions  of  iron  oxide  that  have  penetrated  it,  and 
is  known  locally  as  the  red  conglomerate.  The  greenstone  pebbles 
are  the  most  permeable  of  the  boulders  and  are  often  almost  entirely 
weathered,  containing  only  a small  core  of  unaltered  rock.  The 
diorite  pebbles  are  less  permeable,  but  they  generally  contain  a 
stained  shell  and  are  extensively  fractured  in  parallel  planes  across 
the  boulders.  These  fracture  planes  appear  to  have  been  channels 
of  solution,  and  along  each  plane,  although  the  boulder  shows  no 
displacement,  is  a polished  surface  resembling  a slickenside.  The 
conglomerate  contains  locally  a great  many  boulders  of  Mankomen 
rocks,  both  slate  and  limestone,  but  no  Chisna  rocks. 


137 


138  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

Fault  blocks  of  similar  conglomerate  (see  fig.  1),  one  of  which 
occurs  in  the  bed  of  Slate  Creek  and  a parallel  one  that  extends  from 
the  head  of  Ruby  Creek  westward  to  John  Grosh  Gulch,  and  an 


5-  N. 


Figure  l. — Structure  section  across  Slate  Creek  14  miles  above  its  moutb. 


unknown  distance  beyond,  are  believed  to  be  composed  of  rocks  of 
the  same  formation  and  have  reached  their  present  position  through 
faulting.  These  rocks  are  not  believed  by  the  miners  to  be  the  same 
formation  as  the  auriferous  conglomerate  that  caps  the  ridge  at  the 
head  of  Miller  Gulch.  The  conglomerate  of  the  fault  blocks  is  not 
known  to  carry  any  appreciable  amount  of  gold,  but  it  does  contain 
a little  sandstone  and  shale  that  carries  thin  seams  of  coal  in  places. 
The  conglomerate  on  the  ridge  above  Miller  Gulch  and  Big  Four 
Gulch  is  called  “wash”  by  the  miners,  owing  to  the  presence  of  a 
thick  covering  of  residual  detritus  made  up  of  rounded  boulders 
derived  from  the  conglomerate.  The  firmly  cemented  conglomer- 
ate, however,  is  exposed  in  a number  of  places.  The  difference  in 
the  content  of  gold  is  easily  explained  by  the  fact  that  the  conglom- 
erate at  the  head  of  Miller  Gulch  lies  at  the  normal  base  of  the 
conglomerate,  where  the  heavy  minerals  would  naturally  be  con- 
centrated, whereas  in  the  fault  blocks  of  conglomerate  the  base  is 
nowhere  exposed.  The  presence  of  the  coal  seams  in  the  fault  blocks 
but  not  on  the  Miller-Big  Four  divide,  and  at  other  places  where  the 
conglomerate  rests  normally  upon  other  rocks,  is  easily  explained 
by  the  fact  that  the  rocks  exposed  in  the  fault  blocks  represent  a 
higher  part  of  the  section.  The  contact  of  the  conglomerate  with 
the  Chisna  formation  on  Slate  Creek  is  a fault.  At  the  head  of  ! 
Miller  Gulch  the  conglomerate  unconformably  overlies  the  Man-  ; 
komen  formation  and  on  Ruby  Creek  and  John  Grosh  Gulch  it 
occupies  a fault  block  that  has  dropped  down  between  Mankomen'  jj 
rocks  on  both  sides.  This  conglomerate  on  Slate  Creek  probably  j 
belongs  to  the  Gakona  formation,  of  Eocene  age,  as  mapped  by 
Moffit 1 in  the  Chistochina  district. 


i Moffit,  F.  H.,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  498,  1912. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GRAVELS  OF  CHISTOCHINA  RIVER.  139 


GLACIAL  GRAVELS  AND  STREAM  GRAVELS. 

The  bench  gravels  of  glacial  origin  and  the  stream  gravels  are 
younger  formations  than  the  Tertiary  conglomerate  and  are  of 
special  interest  on  account  of  their  valuable  deposits  of  gold  and 
platinum. 

DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  FORMATIONS  AND  STRUCTURE. 

The  distribution  of  the  formations  is  dependent  upon  the  struc- 
ture. (See  fig.  1,  p.  138.)  The  Chisna  formation,  which  at  this  place 
is  made  up  of  quartzite,  tuffaceous  conglomerate,  and  breccia, 
occupies  an  area  south  of  Slate  Creek.  It  is  bordered  by  a fault 
that  extends  along  the  south  bank  of  the  valley  of  Slate  Creek.  This 
appears  to  be  one  of  a system  of  parallel  faults  that  extend  in  an 
east-west  direction  and  dip  toward  the  north.  Four  main  faults 
which  were  observed  show  two  downfaulted  blocks  of  conglomerate 
inclosed  between  Mankomen  and  Chisna  rocks.  The  main  fault 
appears  to  be  the  one  on  the  south  side  of  Slate  Creek,  which  has 
brought  into  contact  the  Carboniferous  Chisna  rocks  and  the  Tertiary 
conglomerate.  One  of  the  downfaulted  blocks  of  conglomerate  is 
about  coincident  with  the  bed  of  Slate  Creek.  A parallel  block  of 
downthrown  conglomerate  extends  across  the  heads  of  Ruby  Creek 
and  John  Grosh  Gulch.  Along  the  upper  contact  of  each  of  these 
fault  blocks  there  was  thrust  faulting,  so  that  at  present  the  Car- 
boniferous rocks  of  the  Mankomen  formation  actually  overlie  the 
Tertiary  conglomerate. 

OCCURRENCE  OF  GOLD  AND  PLATINUM. 

Gold  and  platinum  occur  in  three  formations  (see  fig.  1,  p.  138) 
and  appear  to  represent  three  stages  of  concentration.  The  original 
bedrock  source  of  the  gold  and  platinum  is  not  known,  as  lodes  of 
neither  metal  have  been  found  in  this  region.  The  first  concentra- 
tion appears  to  be  the  “red  conglomerate/’  which  represents  a 
cemented  gold  and  platinum  bearing  gravel.  A second  concentration 
is  found  in  the  glacial  gravels  that  form  high  benches  on  the  south 
side  of  Slate  Creek.  These  benches  are  made  up  of  material  derived 
by  the  erosion  of  the  conglomerate  and  other  rocks.  The  third 
concentration  has  taken  place  in  the  stream  gravels.  These  three 
formations,  the  Tertiary  conglomerate,  the  bench  gravels,  and  the 
stream  gravels,  all  of  which  carry  both  gold  and  platinum,  are  re- 
garded as  promising  sources  of  these  metals.  The  stream  gravels 
are  very  rich  in  gold  and  have  been  worked  for  a number  of  years. 
The  bench  gravels  have  not  been  extensively  tested,  but  rich  deposits 
of  gold  that  occur  within  the  bench  deposits  have  been  mined  at  a 
profit,  and  recent  prospecting  and  sampling  at  a number  of  places 


140 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


indicate  that  there  are  very  large  deposits  of  this  gravel  which  can 
be  worked  at  a profit  when  sufficient  water  is  available  for  washing 
it.  There  is  less  chance  of  finding  workable  deposits  in  the  conglom- 
erate, but  recent  prospecting  has  shown  that  it,  too,  may  be  profitably 
mined  for  gold  and  platinum. 

The  gold  and  platinum  usually  occur  together  and  appear  to  have 
the  same  source  as  far  back  as  the  rocks  of  the  region  record  their 
history.  There  are  no  near-by  basic  rocks  from  which  the  platinum 
is  likely  to  have  been  derived.  The  only  basic  rocks  present  are 
some  small  dikes  that  cut  the  platinum-bearing  conglomerates. 

MINING. 

The  output  of  gold  on  Slate  Creek  in  1917  is  estimated  at  $100,000. 
No  assays  or  other  tests  have  been  made  to  determine  the  relative 
amount  of  platinum  accompanying  the  gold,  but  it  is  estimated  to 
be  a little  over  1 per  cent  of  the  volume  of  the  gold.  As  the-  amount 
of  platinum  bears  such  a small  proportion  to  that  of  the  gold,  its 
increased  production  is  not  easy  to  bring  about. 

In  1917  the  principal  productive  mining  was  on  Slate  Creek, 
where  two  hydraulic  plants  were  in  operation  but  a number  of 
outfits  were  mining  on  a small  scale.  The  M.  E.  W.  Gold  Mining 
Co.,  operated  by  J.  M.  Elmer,  F.  B.  Walker,  and  Ross  B.  Watkins, 
was  the  largest  producer.  The  M.  E.  W.  property  comprises  more 
than  20  claims  and  extends  from  a point  near  the  moraine  of  Chisto- 
china  glacier,  at  the  mouth  of  Slate  Creek,  to  the  lower  end  of  the 
claims  of  the  Jack  Miller  estate,  near  the  mouth  of  Miller  Gulch. 
It  includes  also  claims  near  the  divide  of  Slate  Creek  and  Chisna 
River,  claims  on  Big  Four  Creek,  and  bench  claims  on  Slate  Creek 
that  extend  to  the  ridge  between  Pyramid  Peak  and  the  head  of 
Miller  Gulch.  Options  were  taken  in  1914,  and  the  property  was 
acquired  during  the  following  year  and  prospecting  and  drilling  were 
done.  Most  of  the  season  in  1916  was  also  spent  in  dead  work, 
but  a short  run  was  made  and  $9,000  worth  of  gold  taken  out.  A cut 
1,300  feet  long  was  made  along  the  south  bank  of  Slate  Creek  from 
the  mouth  to  the  present  position  of  the  open  cut.  A flume  and 
ditch  was  also  constructed  to  bring  in  the  water  for  hydraulicking. 
This  ditch  takes  water  from  Chistochina  glacier  about  a mile  above 
the  mouth  of  Slate  Creek  and  at  present  supplies  1,500  inches  of 
water,  which  is  utilized  by  three  giants.  Two  giants  are  used  to  j 
move  gravels  at  the  sluice  head  and  one  to  stack  tailings.  A head  1 
of  125  feet  is  maintained  at  the  open  cut  and  175  feet  at  the  tailings  jj 
giant.  It  is  planned  to  develop  more  water  power  on  the  west  side 
of  Chistochina  glacier  and  bring  it  across  the  moraine. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GRAVELS  OF  CHISTOCHINA  RIVER.  141 

In  1917  work  was  commenced  June  15  and  continued  until  Sep- 
tember. Work  at  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit  had  been  largely 
confined  to  two  open  cuts  on  Slate  Creek.  The  deposits  are  in  part 
in  virgin  ground  and  in  part  in  rich  gravels  which  had  been  once 
partly  worked  by  the  hand  method  of  shoveling  into  sluice  boxes. 
The  old  method  never  proved  satisfactory,  for  the  gradient  of  the 
stream  is  too  low  to  admit  of  easy  disposal  of  tailings,  and  floods 
often  interfered  with  the  work. 

Besides  the  productive  mining  on  Slate  Creek,  assessment  and 
development  work  has  been  continued  on  Big  Four  Creek  and  on 
the  bench  gravels  of  Slate  Creek.  The  bench  gravels  contain  ex- 
tensive deposits  of  gold  and  platinum,  and  from  their  elevated 
position  could  be  easily  hydraulicked  when  water  is  obtained. 

The  claims  of  the  Jack  Miller  estate  were  worked  on  about  the 
usual  scale.  Twelve  men  were  employed  and  bench  gravels  at  the 
mouth  of  Miller  Gulch  were  hydraulicked.  Above  the  Jack  Miller 
claims  three  or  four  small  outfits  were  occupied  in  groundsluicing 
and  shoveling  in.  No  productive  mining  was  in  progress  on  any  of 
the  other  creeks. 


115086°— 19 10 


MINING  ON  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 


By  Bertrand  L.  Johnson. 


GENERAL  FEATURES. 

The  mineralization  of  the  closely  folded  rock  beds  that  border 
Prince  William  Sound  introduced  into  them  a considerable  variety  of 
minerals,  among  which  were  gold,  silver,  chalcopyrite,  chalmersite, 
pyrite,  pyrrhotite,  arsenopyrite,  galena,  sphalerite,  stibnite,  quartz, 
epidote,  albite,  chlorite,  calcite,  and  ankerite.  The  valuable  metals 
of  the  ores  of  this  region  are  copper,  gold,  and  silver.  The  gold  thus 
far  observed  is  native.  The  copper  occurs  chiefly  as  chalcopyrite, 
but  another  copper-iron  sulphide,  chalmersite,  which  contains  about 
23 1 per  cent  of  copper,  has  been  recognized  at  properties  on  Solomon 
Gulch,  Landlocked  Bay,  and  Knight  Island.  Silver  has  been  noted 
as  an  alloy  of  the  native  gold  and  is  also  associated  with  some  of  the 
copper  ores,  but  in  what  combinations  is  not  known. 

The  ore  deposits  of  this  region  may  be  broadly  grouped  into  two 
classes — copper  deposits  and  gold-bearing  quartz  lodes.  The  min- 
eral associations  in  both  gold  and  copper  deposits  are  in  general  the 
same.  The  copper  mines  produce  large  quantities  of  gold  or  silver 
or  both,  and  the  gold-quartz  lodes  contain  Very  small  quantities  of 
chalcopyrite. 

The  gold  quartz  ores  are  free  milling.  They  are  crushed  locally  in 
small  stamp  or  roller  mills  and  the  concentrates  are  shipped  to 
smelters.  The  copper  ores  are  sulphides  and  require  smelting,  with 
or  without  previous  concentration.  At  one  plant  a flotation  process 
is  in  operation.  As  no  local  smelters  are  available,  the  copper  ores 
are  shipped  to  smelters  at  Tacoma,  Wash.,  and  Anyox,  British 
Columbia,  where  their  copper,  geld,  and  silver  contents  are  recovered. 

The  productive  mines  on  Prince  William  Sound  in  1917,  so  far  as 
known,  included  nine  copper  and  eight  gold  mines.  A much  larger 
quantity  of  copper  ore  than  of  gold-bearing  quartz  was  mined  and 
treated,  and  the  total  value  of  the  metals  obtained  from  the  copper 
ores  was  several  times  that  of  the  metals  from  the  gold  quartz  ores. 
The  value  of  the  total  mineral  output  of  the  Prince  William  Sound 
region  in  1917  was  $4,667,929,  compared  with  $2,975,200  in  1916. 

143 


144  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA.  1917. 

COPPER  MINING. 

GENERAL  CONDITIONS. 

Copper  mining  was  actively  carried  on  in  the  Prince  William  Sound 
region  in  1917  and  a large  production  of  copper  was  made.  The  regular 
producers,  the  Kennecott  Copper  Corporation  at  Latouche ; the  Ellamar 
Mining  Co.,  at  Ellamar;  and  the  Granby  Consolidated  Mining,  Smelt- 
ing & Power  Co.  (Ltd.) , owner  of  the  Midas  mine  in  the  Y aldez  district, 
made  large  shipments  as  usual.  Considerable  ore  was  also  shipped  by 
the  Latouche  Copper  Mining  Co . from  the  Blackbird  group  on  Latouche 
Island;  the  Alaska  Mines  Corporation  controlling  the  Schlosser  prop- 
erty, on  Port  Fidalgo;  the  Fidalgo  Mining  Co.,  on  Port  Fidalgo; 
and  the  Dickey  Copper  Co.,  on  Port  Fidalgo.  Small  shipments  were 
reported  from  the  property  of  Harry  Moore  on  Knight  Island  and 
from  that  of  the  Patten  Cooperating  Co.  The  Threeman  Mining  Co., 
on  Landlocked  Bay,  which  has  shipped  much  ore  in  previous  years, 
made  no  shipments  in  1917.  Development  work  was  done  on  some 
of  the  nonproducing  properties  and  assessment  work  is  reported  on  i 
many  others.  Crude  ore  was  shipped  from  all  the  producing  prop- 
erties and  in  addition  copper-bearing  flotation  concentrates  were  I 
shipped  from  the  Beatson-Bonanza  mine,  on  Latouche  Island.  The  | 
C0PPer-bearing  mineral  in  all  the  ore  shipped  was  chalcopyrite. 
Much  of  the  copper  ore  mined  also  carries  either  gold  or  silver  or  both. 

WORK  DONE  DURING  THE  YEAR. 

LATOUCHE  AND  KNIGHT  ISLANDS. 

Large  operations  were  in  progress  at  the  Beatson  Bonanza  mine  of  the  j; 
Kennecott  Copper  Corporation  throughout  the  year;  the  enlargement 
of  the  milling  plant  to  a capacity  of  1,600  tons  daily  was  in  progress,  I 
with  consequent  changes  in  power  plant  and  mine.  An  average  force  j 
of  345  men  was  employed  by  the  company  during  the  year.  A large  I 
amusement  hall,  including  moving  pictures,  bowling  alleys,  and  club- 1 
rooms  for  the  use  of  the  employees,  was  completed  early  in  the  year.  | 
Other  surface  improvements  included  a new  store  and  warehouse,! 
several  new  houses,  a new  compressor  plant  and  building,  and  some  (l 
small  buildings  and  sheds.  The  head  frame  of  the  shaft  was  framed  J 
during  the  winter  and  erected  in  the  spring.  Three  Diesel  engines^ 
were  installed  in  the  power  plant.  The  capacity  of  the  shipping! 
bunkers  was  doubled.  Additional  crushing  and  flotation  equipment! 
was  installed  in  the  mill. 

A new  shaft  was  completed  and  put  in  operation  during  the  year,; 
and  a hoist  capable  of  handling  5-ton  skips  was  installed.  The  main, 
haulage  ways  and  drifts  were  widened  to  accommodate  larger  cars,! 
and  two  4J-ton  storage-battery  electric  locomotives  were  installed.! 


MINING  ON  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 


145 


A 500-ton  concrete  ore  pocket  was  also  finished.  A big  manway 
raise  was  completed  between  the  main  level  and  the  top  of  the  ore 
bluff.  Considerable  diamond-drill  work  was  done  during  the  year, 
some  of  it  on  the  100-foot  level.  No  other  work  was  done  on  this 
lower  level  during  the  year.  The  normal  development  work  was  in 
progress  through  the  rest  of  the  mine,  and  stoping  operations  were 
carried  on  between  the  main  haulage  level  and  the  surface  and  eastward 
into  the  hill  above  the  bluff  pit  level. 

The  Blackbird  claim  of  the  Latouche  Copper  Mining  Co.  on  Latouche 
Island  was  opened  up  and  operated  by  Mr.  W.  A.  Dickey.  This 
claim  lies  just  to  the  north  of  the  Beatson-Bonanza  mine,  and  the 
deposit  under  development  on  the  Blackbird  appears  to  lie  in  the 
northward  extension  of  the  same  mineralized  zone  which  includes 
the  Beatson-Bonanza.  Considerable  underground  development  work, 
done  both  on  the  main-tunnel  level  and  between  this  level  and  the 
surface,  has  developed  an  ore-bearing  zone  reported  to  be  from  12  to 
50  feet  in  width  and  said  to  be  traceable  underground  for  700  feet. 
During  the  year  crosscuts  and  drifts  were  run  to  the  extent  of  300 
feet,  and  four  s topes  were  opened  up.  Operations  were  in  progress 
from  June  to  October,  inclusive.  In  October  about  25  men  were 
employed.  A new  wharf  was  erected  during  the  year,  a new  black- 
smith shop  was  built  at  the  mouth  of  the  tunnel,  and  repair  work 
was  done  on  other  buildings  and  the  tram  line.  Several  shipments 
of  ore  were  made  from  the  property  during  1917.  The  last  previous 
shipment  was  in  1907. 

Little  was  done  on  the  other  copper  properties  on  Latouche  Island. 
No  development  work  in  known  to  have  been  done  on  the  Reynolds 
Alaska  Development  Co.’s  property  on  Horseshoe  Bay  or  on  the 
property  of  the  Seattle-Alaska  Copper  Co.  on  Montgomery  Bay. 

On  Knight  Island  no  productive  operations  were  in  progress.  The 
largest  developments  were  on  Rua  Cove  at  the  Copper  Bullion  claims 
(Rua  property),  which  had  previously  been  taken  over  by  Mr.  W.  A. 
Dickey.  A cabin  and  a house  were  erected  near  the  shore  of  the  cove, 
another  building  was  completed  at  the  upper  camp,  and  a new  black- 
smith shop  was  built  at  the  mouth  of  the  tunnel.  A small  water- 
power plant,  with  a two-drill  compressor  and  two  drills,  was  also 
installed.  Underground  work  completed  during  the  year  totaled 
about  600  feet  of  tunnel  and  crosscuts.  An  average  force  of  10  men 
was  employed  during  the  summer.  Operations  were  discontinued 
for  the  year  on  September  14,  1917,  after  a large  body  of  low-grade 
copper  ore  had  been  partly  blocked  out. 

Some  of  the  pyrrhotite  ores  of  Mummy  and  Drier  bays  are  reported 
to  carry  nickel,  and  during  the  season  short  tunnels  were  driven  on 
the  nickel-bearing  lodes  and  some  diamond  drilling  was  done. 


146 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


On  the  Copper  Coin  group  on  Drier  Bay  a small  wharf  was  erected 
in  the  spring,  and  a compressor  and  supplies  were  placed  on  the 
ground  but  not  installed.  Only  two  or  three  men  were  at  work  on 
the  property  during  the  year,  and  no  underground  work  is  known 
to  have  been  done. 

On  the  Pandora  group  on  the  Bay  of  Isles  the  only  work  done  in 
1917  consisted  of  some  open  cuts.  This  lead  is  now  reported  traceable 
a little  over  1 ,000  feet. 

Small  shipments  of  copper  ore  are  reported  from  the  Copper  Queen 
claim  on  Hogan  Bay  and  from  a property  of  Harry  Moore  on  Drier 
Bay. 

UNAKWIK  INLET,  WELLS  BAY,  LONG  BAY,  AND  GLACIER  ISLAND. 

A new  copper  discovery,  on  property  called  the  Globe  claims,  was 
made  back  of  Long  Bay  during  1917.  The  ore  body  is  reported  to 
be  of  low  grade,  several  feet  in  width,  and  two  claims  in  length.  No 
development  work  was  done. 

On  Cedar  Bay,  the  Lenora  group  of  five  claims  was  surveyed  for 
patent  in  1917.  Very  little  underground  development  work  was 
done  during  the  year.  Three  men  were  at  work  on  the  property  for 
three  months  in  the  spring,  and  about  75  feet  of  tunnel  was  driven. 

A small  force  of  men  is  also  reported  to  have  worked  underground 
on  the  property  late  in  the  fall.  Only  assessment  work  is  reported 
on  other  properties  in  this  vicinity. 

On  Glacier  Island  assessment  work  is  reported  on  the  Portsmouth 
and  Scotia  Bell  claims  of  Jens  Jensen.  The  ore  body  lies  a little 
more  than  half  a mile  south  of  Finski  Bay.  The  country  rock  is 
greenstone,  and  the  ore  minerals  consist  of  quartz,  epidote,  pyrite, 
and  chalcopyrite.  Some  development  work  has  been  done  on  min- 
eralized showings  along  a pronounced  gully  which  apparently  follows  , 
a large  shear  zone.  The  lower  tunnel,  which  has  about  225  feet  of  , 
workings,  is  at  an  elevation  of  about  250  feet.  The  main  drift,  150 
feet  in  length,  is  on  a shattered  zone  along  a nearly  north-south  break 
that  shows  only  a thin  trace  of  gouge.  This  fracture  dips  65°  W. 
The  maximum  mineralized  width  of  the  shattered  greenstone  is  t. 
about  3J  feet,  and  the  mineralization  appears  to  be  traceable  about  jj 
60  feet.  The  ore  is  a hard,  shattered  greenstone  firmly  cemented  . 
by  sulphide-bearing  quartz.  A crosscut  to  the  west  encountered  a 
mineralized  shear  zone  that  strikes  N.  20°  E.  and  dips  70°  W.,  along  , 
which  about  30  feet  of  drifts  have  been  driven.  A width  of  10  feet  of  ’ 
slightly  cupriferous  pyrite  is  reported  to  have  been  cut  at  one  point 
in  this  shear,  which  may  be  the  main  shear  followed  by  the  gulch. 
The  upper  tunnel,  at  about  500  feet  elevation,  is  driven  30  feet  on  a 
mineralized  shear  zone  that  outcrops  on  the  east  side  of  the  gulch.  ,;! 


MINING  ON  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 


147 


This  showing  is  not  traceable  very  far  on  the  surface.  The  iace  of 
the  tunnel  shows  4 feet  of  shattered  greenstone  cemented  by  much 
quartz  that  carries  sulphides,  chiefly  chalcopyrite.  A streak  of 
nearly  solid  chalcopyrite,  which  has  a maximum  width  of  3 inches, 
runs  along  the  hanging  wall.  Just  over  the  mouth  of  this  tunnel 
this  shear  strikes  N.  5°  W.  and  dips  about  65°  W.,  and  the  mineralized 
portion  of  the  shear  has  a width  of  5 to  12  inches. 

Between  these  two  tunnels  there  are  some  mineralized  outcrops  on 
which  a little  open-cut  work  has  been  done.  The  mineral  deposit  in 
each  place  is  in  a sheared  or  shattered  greenstone  and  has  a width 
of  1 to  6 feet,  but  the  mineralization  is  traced  only  short  distances 
by  the  present  development  work. 

PORT  VALDEZ  DISTRICT. 

The  Midas  mine  of  the  Granby  Consolidated  Mining,  Smelting  & 
Power  Co.,  on  Solomon  Gulch,  was  actively  developed  during  the  year 
and  was  one  of  the  important  shippers  of  crude  copper  ore  of  the 
Prince  William  Sound  region.  An  average  force  of  about  50  men 
were  employed  during  the  year  on  the  property.  Surface  improve- 
ments consisted  of  the  erection  of  a new  cook  and  bunk  house  and 
some  open-cut  work.  The  principal  underground  developments  con- 
sisted in  the  sinking  of  an  inclined  winze,  which  has  a dip  of  60°, 
from  No.  2 adit  to  a depth  of  100  feet.  No.  1 adit  was  also  extended 
and  considerable  drifting  done. 

A detailed  account  of  the  geology  of  this  copper  deposit  and  the 
copper-bearing  area  of  the  Port  Valdez  and  Jack  Bay  district  in 
which  it  is  found  is  given  elsewhere  in  this  bulletin  (pp.  157-173). 

ELLAMAR  DISTRICT. 

The  plant  of  the  Ellamar  Mining  Co.  was  operated  steadily  the 
entire  year  except  for  shutdowns  of  two  weeks  in  the  summer  and  a 
few  days  in  December.  An  average  force  of  a little  over  100  men 
was  employed  during  the  year.  Surface  improvements  consisted  of 
the  erection  of  a social  hall,  the  construction  of  a new  warehouse  on 
the  dock,  the  shifting  of  the  pump  house  to  a new  location  in  the 
glory  hole,  and  the  installation  of  foundations  for  a new  power  house. 
Most  of  the  underground  work  this  year  has  been  between  the  sur- 
face and  the  200-foot  level.  The  water  level  was  down  to  a few  feet 
below  the  500-foot  level  and  the  500-foot  level  was  open,  but  no 
work  was  being  done  on  that  level  during  1917.  Some  work  was 
done  on  the  100,  200,  300,  and  400  foot  levels,  but  stoping  operations 
were  confined  to  stopes  between  the  300-foot  level  and  the  surface. 
Some  diamond  drilling  was  also  done.  Regular  shipments  were  con- 
tinued as  usual. 


148  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 

No  shipments  were  made  from  the  property  of  the  Threeman 
Mining  Co.,  on  Landlocked  Bay,  and  only  one  man  is  reported  to 
have  been  at  work  on  the  property  during  the  year. 

On  the  property  of  the  Hemple  Copper  Mining  Co.  on  Landlocked 
Bay  development  work  started  in  May.  Six  men  were  at  work 
during  the  summer,  but  on  October  1 the  crew  was  reduced  to  three 
men.  Work  was  temporarily  stopped  early  in  October  but  is  said  to 
have  been  resumed  again  about  December  15.  The  work  done  up  to 
October  was  all  in  tunnel  No.  1 and  consisted  in  driving  a 110-foot 
crosscut,  which  cut  a slightly  mineralized  shear  zone  at  its  inner  end. 
On  October  8 the  shear  zone  showed  a width  of  8 feet,  but  at  that 
date  the  inner  wall  of  the  shear  had  not  been  encountered.  This 
shear  strikes  N.  70°  W.  and  dips  to  the  east. 

Up  to  October  1 no  work  had  been  done  in  1917  on  the  property 
of  the  Landlock  Bay  Copper  Mining  Co.,  on  Landlocked  Bay. 

Twenty-two  men  are  reported  to  have  been  at  work  early  in  the 
spring  on  the  property  of  the  Standard  Copper  Mines  Co.,  near  the 
entrance  to  Landlocked  Bay.  Later  in  the  season  a force  of  only 
10  men  was  employed  and  for  a period  of  about  a month  during  the 
summer  only  1 man  was  retained  on  the  property.  On  October  8 
only  the  watchman  was  on  the  ground.  A new  cookhouse  and  bunk 
house  were  erected  on  the  mountain  side,  and  a small  building  was 
put  up  at  one  of  the  tunnel  mouths.  The  tram  was  also  fixed  and 
was  operated  during  the  summer.  Some  underground  work  was 
also  done.  The  wharf  was  repaired,  but  no  shipments  of  ore  were 
made  during  the  year. 

Only  assessment  work  is  reported  on  the  Buckeye  group  on  Land- 
locked Bay. 

PORT  FIDALGO. 

Development  work  was  in  progress  at  two  of  the  copper  mines  on 
Port  Fidalgo,  and  shipments  of  ore  are  reported  from  all  three  mines. 
The  Fidalgo  Mining  Co.  worked  steadily  'with  an  average  force  of 
7 or  8 men  and  with  a maximum  number  of  about  13  throughout 
the  year.  Considerable  underground  development  work  was  done, 
and  some  ore  was  shipped.  Stoping  operations  were  carried  out 
between  tunnels  Nos.  1 and  2 and  above  tunnel  No.  2.  Tunnel  No.  2 
was  extended  and  a crosscut  already  started  was  driven  about  150 
feet  toward  a new  lead  to  the  east.  A new  lower  tunnel  (started  in 
1916)  was  extended  to  a length  of  300  feet.  Considerable  stripping 
was  also  done  on  the  new  lead. 

The  Alaska  Mines  Corporation  operated  the  old  Schlosser  property 
continuously  throughout  the  year  with  a crew  of  27  to  33  men. 
Underground  work  was  done  on  four  levels,  and  stoping  operations 
were  carried  on  over  several  of  the  levels.  The  ore  deposit  consists 
of  lenses  of  sulphides  occupying  a linked  system  of  shears.  The  ore 


MINING  ON  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 


149 


zone  as  now  developed  has  a width  of  100  feet  and  strikes  about 
N.  20°  E.  and  dips  nearly  vertically.  The  ore  shoots  pitch  to  the 
north  parallel  to  the  hillside.  Several  hundred  feet  of  development 
work  besides  stoping  is  reported  to  have  been  done  in  1917. 

The  Dickey  Copper  Co.,  owner  of  the  Mason  and  Gleason  claims 
on  Irish  Cove,  is  not  known  to  have  operated  during  the  year,  although 
a shipment  of  ore  is  said  to  have  been  made  from  this  property. 

Ed.  Banzer  is  reported  to  have  done  a little  work  on  a copper 
property  near  the  head  of  Port  Fidalgo,  but  no  details  are  available 
at  present.  # 

CORDOVA  AND  VICINITY. 

Development  was  in  progress  during  part  of  1917  on  a copper 
property  on  Fleming  Spit.  The  operations  were  in  charge  of  Mr. 
R.  E.  Hutchinson.  The  company,  the  Tacoma-Cordova  Mines  Co., 
employed  a force  of  three  or  four  men  from  June  to  September,  in- 
clusive. Considerable  work  was  done  in  two  tunnels  about  250  feet 
apart  vertically,  and  a number  of  open  cuts  were  made  on  the  out- 
crop of  the  ore  body  under  development. 

GOLD  MINING. 

GENERAL  CONDITIONS. 

The  gold  produced  in  the  Prince  William  Sound  region,  other  than 
that  obtained  from  the  gold-bearing  copper  ores,  comes  from  both 
gold  quartz  lodes  and  gold  placers.  The  placer  deposits  are  few, 
small,  and  irregularly  distributed.  They  are  worked  only  intermit- 
tently, on  a very  small  scale,  and  contribute  little  to  the  gold  pro- 
duction. The  producing  gold  quartz  lodes  are  in  the  Port  Wells  and 
the  Port  Valdez  districts.  The  Granite  mine,  on  Port  Wells,  and 
the  Cliff  and  Ramsay-Rutherford  mines  in  the  Port  Valdez  district 
are  the  largest  producers. 

WORK  DONE  DURING  THE  YEAR. 

PORT  WELLS  DISTRICT. 

The  Granite  mine  was  the  most  productive  property  in  the  Port 
Wells  district  in  1917  as  in  the  previous  years.  This  property  was 
in  operation  during  the  spring,  but  milling  was  stopped  about  the 
middle  of  May,  and  all  operations  were  discontinued  on  June  1. 
About  40  men  are  said  to  have  been  employed  during  the  spring 
operations.  The  property  is  to  remain  shut  down  until  water  power 
can  be  installed. 

The  Thomas-Culross  Mining  Co.,  on  Culross  Island,  completed  the 
installation  of  a milling  plant  early  in  the  spring,  and  the  mill  was  in 
operation  during  a part  of  the  season.  From  5 to  20  men  are  said  to 
have  been  employed.  A small  shipment  of  ore  is  also  said  to  have 
been  made  to  the  Tacoma  smelter. 


150 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  Alaska  Homestake  Mining  Co.,  whose  property  is  on  Harriman 
Fiord,  report  the  installation  of  a 12-ton  gyratory  mill,  crpsher,  and 
concentrator  in  1917.  The  mill  is  said  to  have  been  operated  only  a 
few  days.  Development  work  on  the  property  at  the  close  of  1917 
is  said  to  consist  of  an  upper  tunnel  225  feet  long,  a shaft  67  feet  deep, 
and  a lower  tunnel  150  feet  long  connected  with  the  shaft.  About 
18  men  were  employed  on  the  property  during  the  season. 

A new  mill  and  aerial  tram  were  erected  on  the  Sweepstakes  prop- 
erty on  Harriman  Fiord  in  1917  but  were  not  operated. 

On  the  Hermann-Eaton  property  on  Betties  Bay  a water-power 
plant,  air  compressor,  and  machine  drills  were  installed.  A crosscut 
tunnel  several  hundred  feet  in  length,  driven  at  an  elevation  of  about 
350  feet,  is  said  to  have  intersected  the  lead  on  the  claims  late  in  the 
fall.  From  5 to  9 men  were  employed  on  the  property  at  different 
times  during  the  year.  The  property  was  closed  down  for  the  year 
early  in  October. 

Development  work  is  reported  to  have  been  in  progress  on  the 
Banner  group  on  Betties  Bay,  and  the  adit  tunnel  on  that  property 
is  said  to  have  been  extended  to  a length  of  over  400  feet. 

Three  hundred  feet  of  development  work  is  reported  on  the  Wagner 
& Johnson  group  at  Golden. 

At  the  Osceola  group  on  College  Fiord  drifting  was  continued  on 
the  lead,  and  the  tunnel  is  said  to  have  been  extended  200  feet  during 
the  summer  to  a total  length  of  about  400  feet.  Five  men  were  em- 
ployed on  the  property,  and  operations  were  in  progress  only  during 
the  summer. 

A crosscut  tunnel  was  driven  on  the  property  of  Chris  Pedersen  on 
Pigot  Bay  and  a little  drifting  done  on  a lead  in  the  tunnel. 

Two  men  were  engaged  in  development  work  on  the  Tomboy  group 
on  Pigot  Bay. 

Assessment  work  is  said  to  have  been  done  on  many  other  prop- 
erties. 

PORT  VALDEZ  DISTRICT. 

The  producing  properties  in  1917  in  the  Port  Valdez  district  in- 
cluded the  Cliff,  Ramsay-Rutherford,  Valdez  Gold,  Cube,  and  Slide. 
Development  work  was  in  progress  on  a few  other  properties,  and  the 
annual  assessment  was  done  on  many  others. 

The  Cliff  mine  operated  throughout  the  year,  although  the  mill  was 
run  only  intermittently.  During  January  and  February  18  to  20 
men  were  employed,  and  the  remainder  of  the  year  about  9 men. 
As  the  shaft  and  lower  levels  were  flooded,  all  underground  work 
was  confined  to  the  100-foot  level  and  the  levels  above  and  to  the 
stopes  between  these  levels.  About  450  feet  of  drifts  and  crosscuts 
are  reported  to  have  been  driven  during  1917. 


MINING  ON  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 


151 


The  Ramsay-Rutherford,  after  operating  during  part  of  the 
year,  closed  down  early  in  June.  The  mill  is  reported  to  have 
been  in  operation  from  January  1 to  June  4,  although  not  running 
continuously.  Mining  operations  ceased  June  7.  From  13  to  19 
men  were  employed  at  different  times  during  the  season.  Surface 
improvements  are  said  to  have  consisted  in  the  installation  of  an  air 
compressor.  Underground  about  150  feet  of  drifting  is  reported  on 
the  lower  levels.  Stoping  operations  were  carried  on  between  several 
of  the  levels. 

The  Valdez  Gold  Co.  reports  only  assessment  work.  From  5 to  7 
men  were  at  work  on  the  property  during  July,  August,  and  part  of 
September.  A very  few  tons  of  ore  was  milled  and  only  a little 
underground  work  was  done. 

The  Cube  Mining  Co.  operated  its  mill  during  February  and  part  of 
March  and  also  for  about  a month  beginning  May  7.  About  25  men 
were  employed  during  the  spring.  The  property  was  closed  down 
early  in  July. 

A small  shipment  of  ore  was  made  from  the  Slide  gold  quartz  claim 
near  the  head  of  Mineral  Creek  during  the  year. 

On  the  Alaska  Gold  Hill,  formerly  known  as  the  Black  Diamond 
property,  5 or  6 men  were  employed  from  January  to  September,  two 
buildings  were  erected,  and  also  a blacksmith  shop  at  the  tunnel 
mouth.  This  shop  was  later  torn  down.  The  upper  tunnel  was 
extended  to  a length  of  605  feet. 

The  Valdez  Mining  Co.  let  a contract  late  in  the  fall  to  extend  the 
lower  tunnel  on  their  Valdez  Glacier  property  a distance  of  75  feet. 

Some  development  work  is  also  said  to  have  been  in  progress  during 
the  year  on  the  property  of  the  Patten  Mining  Co.  near  Swanport  with 
a force  of  6 or  7 men. 

On  the  Shoup  Glacier  properties  a little  development  work  was  in 
progress.  Two  men  were  at  work  on  the  Nymond  property,  and  about 
100  feet  of  tunnel  is  said  to  have  been  driven.  Work  was  also  done 
on  the  Olson  and  McDonald  properties. 

At  the  Gold  King  mine  on  Columbia  Glacier  4 men  were  at  work  up 
to  the  end  of  April.  The  mill  was  not  run.  Late  in  the  fall  it  is  re- 
ported that  a contract  was  let  for  sinking  50  feet  farther  a winze 
which  had  been  sunk  15  feet  during  the  spring  developments. 

At  the  Mayfield  on  Columbia  Glacier  2 men  did  the  annual  assess- 
ment work,  which  is  reported  to  have  consisted  in  driving  an  addi- 
tional 20  feet  in  the  upper  tunnel. 


* 

MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  DISTRICT  AND  VICINITY, 
PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND. 


By  Bertrand  L.  Johnson. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  object  of  this  preliminary  report  is  to  describe  briefly  the 
distribution,  geologic  relations,  and  characteristics  of  the  mineral 
deposits  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  and  the  adjacent  area  surrounding 
the  upper  portion  of  the  adjoining  valley  of  Solomon  Gulch.  A 
brief  presentation  of  the  geographic  factors  immediately  bearing  on 
the  economic  development  of  the  mineral  deposits  of  these  areas 
precedes  a short  summary  of  the  geology.  The  general  description 
of  the  mineral  deposits  is  followed  by  detailed  descriptions  of  the 
few  ore  bodies  which  have  so  far  been  found.  A more  complete 
account  of  the  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  these  areas  will  be 
incorporated  in  the  final  report  on  the  Port  Valdez  and  Jack  Bay 
districts  now  in  preparation. 

Detailed  geologic  mapping  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  and  vicinity 
was  done  in  the  summer  of  1917.  Several  trips  had  been  made  in 
previous  years,  however,  to  the  area  adjacent  to  the  Midas  copper 
mine,  near  the  head  of  Solomon  Gulch,  in  order  to  study  the  mineral- 
ization of  that  area  while  studying  the  geology  and  mineral  resources 
of  the  adjacent  Port  Valdez  district,  and  in  1912  the  writer  was  asso- 
ciated with  Mr.  S.  R.  Capps  in  a study  of  the  geology  and  mineral 
deposits  of  the  Ellamar  district,  which  adjoins  the  Jack  Bay  district 
on  the  south. 

GEOGRAPHY. 

The  Jack  Bay  district  comprises  the  small  part  of  the  Chugach 
Mountains  that  borders  the  northeast  corner  of  Prince  William  Sound, 
which  is  drained  by  the  several  streams  entering  J ack  Bay.  (See  fig.  2.) 
This  report  also  discusses  the  mountainous  area  that  surrounds  the 
head  of  Solomon  Gulch  and  Allison  Creek,  the  waters  of  which  flow  off 
the  northern  slopes  of  the  mountains  bordering  the  north  side  of  the 
south  arm  of  Jack  Bay  into  Port  Valdez.  The  area  under  considera- 
tion adjoins  on  the  north  the  mountainous  Port  Valdez  district  and 
on  the  south  the  less  rugged  Ellamar  district.  The  western  limit  is 
the  broad  Valdez  Arm  of  Prince  William  Sound. 


153 


154  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 

This  area  is  one  of  strong  relief.  The  Chngach  Mountains,  which 
inclose  Jack  Bay,  rise  from  sea  level  to  elevations  ranging  from  3,000 
to  nearly  6,000  feet.  The  lower  hills  and  mountains  bordering  the 
entrance  to  Jack  Bay  and  the  western  portion  of  the  ridge  between 
the  two  arms  of  Jack  Bay  have  the  rounded  characteristic  forms  of 
glacially  overridden  hills.  The  high  peaks  and  ridges  which  sur- 
round the  headwaters  of  the  streams  that  drain  into  the  heads  of 


Figure  2. — Index  map  showing  location  of  the  Jack  Bay  district. 


both  arms  of  the  bay,  however,  are  sharp  and  pinnacled,  and  rem- 
nants of  the  glacial  sculptors  of  this  rugged  alpine  topography  rest 
in  their  ice-carved  basins  and  feed  many  of  the  larger  streams.  In 
marked  contrast  to  the  rugged  topography  of  most  of  the  district 
are  the  flat  gravel-covered  lowlands  at  the  heads  of  both  arms  of 
Jack  Bay  and  the  long,  narrow  gravel-floored  basin  of  Solomon 
Gulch. 

Glaciers  cover  a relatively  small  part  of  the  district  but  feed 
many  of  the  larger  streams.  They  'are  all  of  the  alpine  type.  One 
through  glacier  lies  in  a col  that  connects  Solomon  Gulch  with  the 
headwaters  of  the  main  stream  that  drains  into  the  south  arm  of 
Jack  Bay,  and  another  in  cols  that  connect  Sawmill  Creek  and  a 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 


155 


parallel  stream  adjacent  to  it  on  the  west  with  the  valley  of  a stream 
that  enters  the  head  of  the  north  fork  of  Jack  Bay.  The  remaining 
glaciers  are  valley-head  glaciers  or  lie  in  cirques  along  the  valley 
walls  and  are  concentrated  chiefly  along  the  north  side  of  the  ridge 
on  the  north  side  of  the  south  arm  of  Jack  Bay. 

The  shore  line  of  both  arms  of  Jack  Bay  is  smooth  and  even.  The 
shores  are  steep,  in  may  places  precipitous,  and  rocky,  with  few 
islands  except  along  the  westward  continuation  of  the  range  which 
separates  the  two  forks  of  Jack  Bay.  The  heads  of  both  arms  are 
filled  by  tidal  mud  flats  sloping  up  into  the  gravel-covered  flood 
plains  of  glacial  streams.  Small  deltas  lie  at  the  mouths  of  some  of 
the  other  streams.  Near  Valdez  Arm  two  small  wide-mouthed  coves 
indent  the  southern  shore  of  Jack  Bay. 

The  drainage  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  enters  one  or  the  other  arm 
of  Jack  Bay.  Solomon  Gulch  and  Allison  Creek  flow  northward 
into  Port  Valdez.  The  streams  that  enter  Jack  Bay  are  all  less  than 
6 miles  in  length  and  drain  narrow,  steep-sided  glaciated  valleys. 
Solomon  Gulch  is  about  7\  miles  and  Allison  Creek  a little  over  4 
miles  in  length.  All  these  streams  derive  a considerable  part  of 
their  water  supply  from  melting  snow  or  ice,  and  the  stream  flow  is 
subject  to  wide  variations  during  the  year.  Two  power  plants 
have  been  in  operation  on  the  lower  end  of  Solomon  Gulch  in  the 
Port  Valdez  district  in  recent  years,  but  there  are  none  in  the  Jack 
Bay  district.  There  are  some  small  undeveloped  water  powers  in 
the  Jack  Bay  district. 

The  climate  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  closely  resembles  that  of  the 
adjacent  Port  Valdez  district.  Both  districts  are  somewhat  colder 
and  drier  than  the  more  southern  parts  of  Prince  William  Sound, 
which  are  more  directly  exposed  to  the  influence  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 
Numerical  comparisons  of  the  climatic  factors  of  these  two  districts 
can  not  be  made,  however,  because  of  the  lack  of  weather  observa- 
tions within  the  area  here  referred  to  as  the  Jack  Bay  district.  At 
Valdez  and  Fort  Liscum,  situated  at  sea  level,  in  the  Port  Valdez 
district,  weather  records  extend  over  a considerable  period  of  time. 
These  records  show  a total  annual  precipitation  of  about  56  inches  at 
Valdez  and  74  inches  at  Fort  Liscum;  the  annual  snowfall  at  Fort 
Liscum  is  at  least  30  feet.  The  average  temperature  for  the  three 
summer  months  in  the  Port  Valdez  district  is  52°  F.  and  for  the  three 
winter  months  21°  F.  Similarly  situated  portions  of  the  Jack  Bay 
district  would  appear  to  have  a slightly  greater  rainfall  and  to  be 
slightly  warmer,  owing  to  the  somewhat  greater  exposure  of  this 
district  to  the  ameliorating  influences  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Climatic 
conditions  in  the  higher  portions  of  the  district  are  much  more  severe. 

Only  that  portion  of  the  area  covered  by  this  report  which  imme- 
diately borders  the  shores  of  Jack  Bay  and  Valdez  Arm  is  forested. 


156 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  upper  limit  of  timber  extends  from  a few  hundred  feet  above 
sea  level  in  the  bottom  of  the  valley  at  the  head  of  the  north  arm  of 
Jack  Bay  to  elevations  of  about  1,750  feet  near  the  mouth  of  the 
bay.  Spruce  and  hemlock  greatly  predominate,  and  only  a few 
cottonwoods  are  found.  The  local  timber  from  this  and  adjacent 
districts  is  suitable  for  mine  workings  and  rough  lumber,  but  the 
better  grades  of  lumber  are  brought  from  Seattle.  All  of  the  tim- 
bered portion  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  lies  within  the  Chugach  Na- 
tional Forest.  Those  portions  of  Allison  Creek  and  Solomon  Gulch 
valleys  covered  by  this  report  are  not  timbered. 

The  larger  animals  reported  to  be  native  to  this  area  include  the 
bear,  mountain  goat,  and  mountain  sheep.  Both  the  goats  and  the 
sheep  are  said  to  have  been  obtained  in  the  high  mountains  surround- 
ing the  head  of  Jack  Bay,  but  only  goats  were  seen  during  the  present 
field  season.  Evidences  of  bears  are  plentiful  in  many  places  and 
both  brown  and  black  bears  are  reported. 

Wolverines,  marmots,  weasels,  and  porcupines  are  native  to  the 
area.  Squirrels  and  rabbits  are  found  in  the  adjacent  Port  Valdez 
district  and  probably  range  over  parts  of  this  area.  Mink,  marten, 
otter,  and  other  small  fur-bearing  animals  found  in  the  adjacent  dis- 
tricts are  probably  also  to  be  obtained  here,  although  no  evidences 
of  their  presence  were  seen  in  the  summer  of  1917. 

Ptarmigan  live  in  the  portions  of  the  region  above  timber  line,  and 
grouse  are  found  in  the  spruce  forests.  Geese,  ducks,  sandpipers, 
and  other  waterfowl  and  shore  birds  are  obtainable  here  in  season. 
Bald  eagles,  owls,  cormorants,  gulls,  terns,  magpies,  blue  jays,  ravens, 
crows,  divers,  and  smaller  birds  are  abundant. 

Several  varieties  of  salmon  are  caught  in  Jack  Bay  for  the  can- 
neries at  Valdez,  Cordova,  and  Port  Nellie  Juan.  Salmon  trout, 
bass,  and  flounders  are  also  obtained.  Blackfish  and  whales  are 
occasionally  reported  in  the  waters  of  Valdez  Arm.  Seals  are  com- 
mon, both  in  Jack  Bay  and  Valdez  Arm.  The  waters  of  the  glacier 
streams  flowing  into  the  head  of  Jack  Bay  are  milky  from  suspended 
rock  flour,  but  the  salmon  ascend  these  streams  for  at  least  short 
distances.  The  few  clear-water  streams  that  enter  the  bay  appear 
to  be  too  precipitous  in  gradient  to  offer  shelter  to  fresh-water  fish. 

Valdez,  the  supply  point  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  and  for  those 
portions  of  the  Port  Valdez  district  covered  by  this  report,  lies  at 
the  head  of  Port  Valdez.  The  town  has  a population  of  several 
hundred  and  is  provided  with  wharves,  bank,  hotels,  stores,  public 
schools,  telephones,  and  electric  lights.  A good  stock  of  supplies 
is  kept  on  hand,  and  prices  are  not  high,  except  for  fuel.  In  the  past 
the  town  has  suffered  from  occasional  floods  of  the  streams  from  the 
Valdez  Glacier,  but  it  is  now  protected  by  a dike  that  was  built  in 
1913-14. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY.  157 

Valdez  is  the  coastal  terminus  of  the  Valdez-Fairbanks  military 
road.  It  is  connected  by  cable  with  Seward,  Cordova,  Juneau,  and 
other  points  on  the  Alaska  coast  and  with  Seattle,  and  by  tele^aph 
with  Fairbanks.  Port  Valdez  is  open  to  navigation  throughout  the 
year.  Valdez  can  be  reached  in  six  days  by  steamer  from  Seattle. 
Two  companies  operate  steamers  to  Valdez,  giving  a summer  service 
of  about  eight  times  a month  and  a winter  service  of  four  to  six  times 
a month.  Freight  charges  in  1916  between  Seattle  and  Valdez 
ranged  from  $3  to  $45  a ton  according  to  classification.  Passenger 
rates  in  1917  between  Seattle  and  Valdez  were  as  follows:  First- 
class,  upper  deck,  $50;  first-class,  lower  deck,  $47.50,  and  second- 
class,  $30.  Regular  stops  in  the  Port  Valdez  district  are  Valdez 
and  Fort  Liscum,  but  there  is  also  a wharf  at  the  Midas  mine. 
There  are  no  stops  in  the  Jack  Bay  district. 

Transportation  along  the  coast  is  effected  largely  by  the  use  of 
gasoline  launches,  which  can  usually  be  hired  for  $10  to  $30  a day. 
Regular  service  is  maintained  between  Valdez  and  Fort  Liscum  by 
the  post  boat  and  between  the  wharf  of  the  Granby  Consolidated 
Mining,  Smelting  & Power  Co.  (Ltd.)  and  Valdez  by  the  company 
launch. 

Much  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  and  the  adjacent  portions  of  the 
Port  Valdez  district  are  but  a short  distance  from  tidewater.  The 
Midas  mine  and  the  country  adjacent  to  the  Solomon  Basin  are  readily 
reached  from  the  wagon  road  which  has  been  built  from  a point  on 
the  south  side  of  Port  Valdez  a short  distance  east  of  Fort  Liscum 
up  into  Solomon  Basin.  There  are  no  roads  in  the  Jack  Bay  district, 
and  but  one  prospect  is  connected  with  tidewater  by  a trail.  An 
aerial  tram  operated  by  the  Granby  Consolidated  Mining,  Smelting  & 
Power  Co.  (Ltd.)  between  its  wharf  on  Port  Valdez  and  the  Mid  s 
mine  near  the  head  of  Solomon  Gulch  is  used  only  for  the  transfer  of 
ore  and  supplies. 

GEOLOGY. 

DIVISIONS  OF  THE  ROCKS. 

The  Jack  Bay  district  lies  in  the  southern  part  of  the  Chugach 
Mountains,  which,  in  those  portions  bordering  Prince  William  Sound, 
consist  of  folded  and  faulted  Mesozoic  ( ?)  rocks — graywackes,  argil- 
lites, slates,  and  subordinate  amounts  of  conglomerates  and  dark- 
colored  limestones — altered  in  places  to  schistose  types  and  intruded 
at  diverse  points  by  granites  and  basic  igneous  rocks  of  Mesozoic  or 
Tertiary  age.  (See  PI.  III.) 

115086°— 19 11 


158 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  sedimentary  rocks  of  the  Prince  William  Sound  region  were 
subdivided  by  the  earlier  geologists  1 into  two  great  divisions — the 
Valdez  and  Orca  groups.  The  Valdez  group  was  described  as  con- 
sisting principally  of  graywacke  and  slate,  and  it  was  presumed  to 
be  older,  more  metamorphosed,  and  to  lie  unconformably  beneath 
another  great  series  of  sediments  of  somewhat  similar  lithologic 
character,  named  the  Orca  group.  The  Orca  rocks  were  stated  to 
consist  of  interbedded  slates  and  graywackes  with  extensive  basic 
lava  flows  and  thick  conglomerate  beds.  The  Valdez  group  was 
mapped  as  occurring  on  the  northern  and  western  shores  of  the  sound, 
whereas  the  Oroa  rocks  outcropped  on  the  eastern  shore  and  also 
formed  the  islands  of  the  sound.  The  Jack  Bay  district  lies  within 
the  Valdez  group  of  these  writers.  It  includes,  however,  some  small 
areas  of  greenstone  of  the  Orca  group  and  on  its  southern  border  an 
area  of  conglomerate  probably  also  of  Orca  age. 

ROCKS  OF  THE  VALDEZ  GROUP. 

LITHOLOGIC  SUBDIVISIONS. 

The  rocks  of  the  Valdez  group  in  the  Jack  Bay  district  are  all 
regionally  metamorphosed  types  of  sedimentary  rocks.  The  variety 
is  not  great  and  but  two  lithologic  subdivisions  have  been  made,  the 
graywackes  and  the  black  slates.  A thick  black  slate  formation  on 
the  east  side  of  Valdez  Arm  between  Jack  and  Galena  bays  appears 
to  underlie  the  massive  graywackes  south  of  Jack  Bay.  Broad 
bands  of  black  slates  and  argillite,  however,  also  occur  interbedded 
with  the  massive  graywackes.  In  fact,  all  gradations  exist,  both  in 
texture  and  in  thickness  of  beds,  for  the  rocks  range  from  slates  to 
conglomerates  and  the  beds  from  narrow  alternating  bands  of  slate 
and  graywacke  to  massive  members  of  both  rocks.  The  areas 
mapped  as  slate  are  underlain  dominantly  by  slate  and  argillite 
together  with  minor  amounts  of  graywacke.  The  graywacke  areas 
are  underlain  dominantly  by  graywackes  but  in  places  contain  a 
greater  or  less  proportion  of  slates  and  argillites. 

THE  GRAYWACKES. 

The  graywackes  and  argillites  cover  a much  larger  portion  of  the  area 
considered  in  this  report  than  any  of  the  other  formations.  They 
cover  the  entire  portion  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  south  of  Jack  Bay 

except  for  the  small  areas  of  slate  and  greenstone  along  Valdez  Arm, 

I 

1 Schrader,  F.  C.,  A reconnaissance  of  a part  of  Prince  William  Sound  and  the  Copper  River  district,  I 
Alaska  in  1898:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Twentieth  Ann.  Kept.,  p.  7,  pp.  404-417,  1900. 

Schrader,  F.  C.,  and  Spencer,  A.  C.,  The  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  a portion  of  the  Copper  River 
district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  special  publication,  pp.  32-40,  1901. 

Grant,  U.  S.,  and  Higgins,  D.  F.,  Reconnaissance  of  the  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  Prince  William  J 
Sound,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  443,  pp.  11,  20-33,  51-52, 1910. 


U.  S.  GEOLOGICAL  SUR  BULLETIN  692  PLATE  III 


EXPLANATION 


Gravels  sands^and  silts  < 
OL/j  landslide  debris  J 2 


Intrusive  grqmte 


S \ 


Basic  dikes 

( Southern  group  of Orca  age) 


Conglomerates 

UNCONFORMITY  (?) 


Greenstones 

UNCONFORMITY 


Gi  es 


Slates 


- — - — —-Fault 


□ Copper  mine  or 
copper  prospect 

x Gold  quartz 
prospect 


t\  $.  kologicat,  survey 


III 


BULLETIN  692  PI/ATE 


Fault 

□ Copper  mine  or 
copper  prospect 

x Gold  quartz 
prospect 


explanation 


\ l 

Basic  dikes 

(Southern  group  of  Orca  age) 


Conglomerates 

UNCONFORMITY  (?) 


Greenstones 

UNCONFORMITY 


Graywackes 


Slates 


m 

Gravels.sands,and  silts 

cl,  landslide  debris 


Intrusive  granite 


3 4 5 MILES 


GEOLOGIC  SKETCH  MAP  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 


MESOZOIC(?)  MESOZOIC  OR  TERTIARY  QUAT6RNARY 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY.  159 

most  of  the  northern  part  of  this  district,  and  much  of  the  central  por- 
tion between  the  two  arms  of  Jack  Bay  and  around  the  head  of  Sol- 
omon Gulch.  The  rocks  grade  from  fine  conglomeratic  graywackes 
in  a few  places  through  gray  to  dark-gray  coarse-grained  graywackes 
containing  feldspathic  material  to  the  darker  fine-grained  argillites 
and  slates.  The  formation  is  largely  made  up  of  graywacke,  but  the 
proportion  of  the  other  types  of  rocks  differs  widely.  The  area  south 
of  the  south  arm  of  Jack  Bay  contains  very  little  argillite  and  slate, 
but  these  two  types  are  very  abundant  in  the  graywacke  series 
between  the  two  arms  of  Jack  Bay  and  are  quite  abundant  in  the 
northern  part  of  the  district  and  along  the  middle  section  of  the 
Solomon  Gulch  valley.  The  graywackes  in  most  places  are  well 
bedded,  and  the  thickness  of  individual  beds  ranges  from  a few  inches 
to  man}-  feet.  Most  of  the  rocks  are  rather  fine  grained  and  are  com- 
posed of  subangular  fragments  of  quartz  and  plagioclase  feldspar, 
comparatively  little  decomposed,  in  a carbonaceous,  calcareous,  and 
argillaceous  matrix.  At  one  place  in  the  mountains  between  the 
arms  of  Jack  Bay  a rather  coarse  grained  graywacke  contained  nu- 
merous flat  fragments  of  a mottled  light-greenish  chlorite  schist. 
Locally  the  graywackes  adjacent  to  the  igneous  intrusions  and  also 
at  some  other  places  have  been  slightly  altered  to  a reddish-brown 
biotite-bearing  graywacke. 

BLACK  SLATES. 

The  black  slates  are  best  developed  along  the  east  coast  of  Valdez 
Arm  between  Jack  and  Galena  bays,  along  the  north  side  of  the 
streams  draining  into  the  heads  of  both  arms  of  Jack  Bay,  and  near 
the  Midas  mine  on  Solomon  Gulch.  The  slates  are  dark-gray  to 
black,  very  fine  grained  rocks  and  in  many  places  have  exceptionally 
well-developed  slaty  cleavage.  A small  amount  of  interbedded  gray- 
wacke and  argillite  occurs  in  this  formation.  Many  of  the  areas  that 
contain  slate  have  been  intruded  by  the  greenstones  of  the  Orca 
group,  and  the  slates  adjacent  to  these  intrusions  have  been  altered 
to  rocks  resembling  hornstones  and  charts  or  to  knotenschiefer. 
The  knotenschiefer  are  especially  prominent  at  the  head  of  Solomon 
Gulch.  Many  of  the  smaller  greenstone  intrusives  in  the  slates  in 
some  of  the  disturbed  areas  have  become  schistose,  their  schistosity 
paralleling  the  cleavage  of  the  slates.  Some  of  the  areas  of  slate  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  greenstone  intrusives  have  been  mineralized. 

AGE  OF  THE  VALDEZ  GROUP. 

The  age  of  sedimentary  rocks  here  assigned  to  the  Valdez  group  is 
not  definitely  known.  The  present  determination  of  a probable 
Mesozoic  age  for  these  rocks  rests  upon  the  unsatisfactory  evidence 
of  one  fossil,  a worm  tube,  Terebellina  palachei  Ulrich,  which  was 


160  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

found  in  1917  in  the  massive  graywacke  series  on  the  south  side  of 
Jack  Bay.  Similar  tubes  have  been  found  by  Grant  in  the  black 
slates  just  north  of  the  entrance  to  Galena  Bay.  These  fossils  are  not 
diagnostic  and  serve  only  to  determine  the  possible  age  of  the  con- 
taining rocks  within  wide  limits.  The  present  knowledge  of  this 
fossil  appears  to  indicate  a post-Triassic  and  probably  Mesozoic  age 
for  it  and  for  the  containing  rocks. 

ROCKS  OF  THE  ORCA  GROUP. 

LITHOLOGIC  SUBDIVISIONS. 

The  Orca  group  includes  both  sedimentary  and  igneous  rocks  and 
consists  of  a thick  series  of  basic  lava  flows,  many  basic  intrusive 
bodies  genetically  related  to  the  extrusives,  and  contemporaneous 
sediments.  The  intrusive  phases  of  the  igneous  rocks  are  more 
abundant  than  the  extrusive  in  this  area,  although  the  latter  type  are 
represented,  to  a certain  extent  at  least,  in  the  greenstone  area  just 
north  of  the  entrance  to  Galena  Bay.  All  these  igneous  rocks  are  now 
largely  altered  to  greenstones.  No  Orca  sediments  other  than  the 
conglomerates  have  been  recognized.  These  conglomerates,  which 
lie  above  the  greenstone  and  contain  pebbles  derived  from  it,  are 
tentatively  placed  in  the  Orca  group.  The  presence  of  the  green- 
stone pebbles  in  the  conglomerate  can  not  positively  he  construed 
as  indicating  an  unconformity  between  the  lavas  and  the  conglom- 
erate, for  the  flows  may  have  been  partly  subaerial,  erupted  con- 
temporaneously with  the  deposition  of  the  conglomerate,  and  the 
greenstone  boulders  and  pebbles  may  have  been  obtained  from  those 
portions  of  the  flows  exposed  above  sea  level  or  near  enough  to  sea 
level  to  suffer  erosion. 

GREENSTONES. 

All  the  igneous  rocks  of  this  area  are  in  this  preliminary  report! 
grouped  under  the  general  term  “greenstones.”  These  greenstones] 
and  their  schistose  equivalents,  the  green  schists,  are  the  derivatives  I 
of  basic  igneous  rocks  of  both  intrusive  and  extrusive  types.  They] 
comprise  flows,  dikes,  sills,  bosses,  and  some  large  irregular  intru-I 
sive  masses.  These  basic  rocks  in  many  parts  of  this  area  intruded': 
the  graywackes  and  slates  of  the  Valdez  group,  showing  a marked  | 
preference  for  the  slates.  In  the  southwestern  part  of  the  Jack  Bay! 
district  and  in  the  adjacent  Ellamar  district  they  broke  through  the! 
crust  and  flowed  out  over  the  surface  of  the  sedimentary  rocks. 

The  largest  single  mass  of  greenstone  lying  within  the  area  covered fj 
by  this  report  crosses  the  head  of  Solomon  Gulch  a short  distance 
above  the  Midas  mine.  This  mass  is  known  to  extend  in  an  east  and| 
west  direction  from  the  crest  of  the  divide  between  the  Solomon  j 
Gulch  and  Jack  Bay  drainage  far  up  on  the  eastern  slope  of  the  valley 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 


161 


of  Solomon  Gulch,  and  it  probably  extends  beyond  the  area  mapped 
for  a considerable  distance.  Its  width  at  the  bottom  of  Solomon 
Gulch  is  1 mile.  Many  sills  of  greenstone  lie  parallel  to  the  contact 
in  the  slates  and  graywackes  along  the  southern  border  of  this  mass. 

A small  part  of  the  immense  greenstone  area  of  the  Ellamar  dis- 
trict extends  into  the  southwestern  part  of  this  area  just  north  of  the 
mouth  of  Galena  Bay.  It  is  surrounded  on  the  north  and  northeast  by 
slates  and  is  partly  overlain  on  the  west  by  a small  area  of  conglom- 
erate. Inclusions  of  black  slate  occur  in  this  greenstone  along  its 
western  shore  southwest  of  the  conglomerate  area.  Ellipsoidal  flow 
structures  are  visible  in  places  on  the  western  slope  of  this  mass  and 
also  along  the  shore.  Several  basic  dikes  and  sills,  probably  of  the 
same  age  as  the  main  body  of  the  greenstone,  cut  the  slates  on  the 
eastern  shore  of  Valdez  Arm  just  north  of  this  large  greenstone 
mass. 

A long,  narrow  mass  of  greenstone  3 miles  in  length,  of  irregular 
width  and  only  one-fourth  mile  wide  in  its  widest  place,  has  intruded 
the  slates  and  graywackes  in  the  western  part  of  the  mountains 
between  the  arms  of  Jack  Bay.  It  contains  many  inclusions  of  the 
country  rock,  some  of  which  are  slightly  mineralized.  Numerous  sills 
and  dikes  occur  in  the  mountains  a little  farther  east. 

A small  boss  of  greenstone  about  1,000  feet  in  diameter  lies  in  the 
slates  just  south  of  the  Jumbo  lode  of  the  Midas  mine.  Near  the  All- 
American  lode,  also  on  the  same  property,  sills  and  dikes,  and  some 
small  irregular  masses  of  greenstone  are  intrusive  into  the  slate  and 
argillite  country  rock  and  are  well  exposed  in  the  canyon  of  Solomon 
Gulch  to  the  west  of  that  ore  body. 

The  greenstones  are  all  fine  grained.  The  textures  include  apha- 
nitic,  finely  porphyritic,  diabasic,  and  schistose.  Diabasic  textures 
were  observed  in  the  dikes,  in  the  sills,  and  in  some  of  the  larger 
masses.  Some  of  the  dikes  have  aphanitic  contacts  and  dense,  fine- 
grained, or  finely  porphyritic  centers.  The  color  of  the  greenstones 
ranges  from  light  greenish  gray  to  dark  green.  The  fine-grained 
dike  rocks  are  nearly  black  and  in  some  places  have  lighter  purplish- 
gray  contacts.  The  schistose  greenstones  of  the  large  area  at  the  head 
of  Solomon  Gulch  are  dark  green.  In  some  places  the  original  struc- 
ture and  texture  have  been  completely  masked  by  the  schistosity 
developed  by  the  shearing  of  the  greenstones  by  later  movements,  so 
that  the  rocks  in  many  places  now  appear  as  light-green  bands  of 
chlorite  schist.  This  schistosity  often  occurs  in  sills  and  dikes  in  the 
slates. 

The  greenstones  are  slightly  mineralized  in  some  places.  Chal- 
copyrite,  pyrrhotite,  pyrite,  ankerite,  and  quartz  were  noted.  The 
outcrops  of  these  mineralized  greenstones  are  usually  rusty. 


162 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


CONGLOMERATES. 

The  largest  exposure  of  conglomerate  at  present  considered  as  of 
Orca  age  in  the  Jack  Bay  district  lies  along  the  eastern  side  of  a small 
cove  in  the  east  side  of  Valdez  Arm,  about  1 mile  north  of  Galena  Bay. 
The  only  other  occurrence  of  conglomerate  of  this  age  within  this 
district  is  near  by  on  a small  island,  one  of  the  outer  islands  of  the 
group  at  the  north  side  of  the  entrance  to  Galena  Bay  and  about  a 
mile  west  of  the  first-mentioned  locality.  The  large  exposure  along 
the  eastern  shore  of  the  cove  north  of  Galena  Bay  is  about  1 mile  in 
length  and  has  a maximum  width,  near  its  southern  end,  of  three- 
tenths  of  a mile.  The  conglomerate  rests  in  a marked  depression 
within  the  arms  of  the  older  slates  and  graywackes  and  the  greenstones 
of  the  Orca  group  and  lies  on  the  western  slope  of  the  large  greenstone 
mass  forming  the  hills  to  the  southeast.  It  is  best  exposed  along  the 
shore  of  the  cove.  The  vertical  bluff  at  the  south  end  of  the  cove 
decreases  in  elevation  and  slope  northward  to  a low,  gently  sloping  : 
outcrop  at  the  north  end  of  the  bay.  The  general  tone  of  the  rock  is  a 
dark  bluish  gray,  and  it  resembles  in  many  ways  an  indurated  dark- 
colored  till. 

The  conglomerate  near  the  southern  end  of  the  bluff  is  a massive  i 
coarse-grained  heterogeneous  mixture  with  no  sign  of  bedding. 
There  are  abundant  angular  to  sub  angular  boulders  of  all  sizes,  the 
largest  of  which  are  several  feet  in  diameter.  Most  of  the  boulders, 
however,  are  small  and  less  than  a foot  in  diameter.  They  consist 
chiefly  of  greenstone,  graywacke,  slate,  and  argillite.  A few  small, 
exceptionally  well  rounded  pebbles  of  siliceous  argillite  are  found. 
The  greenstone  boulders  appear  most  abundantly  in  the  lower  part 
of  the  southern  end  of  the  bluff.  To  the  northward  the  conglomerate 
is  finer  grained,  and  a few  thin  lenticular  beds  of  graywacke  1 to  4 
inches  thick,  which  strike  N.  30°-45°  E.  and  dip  12°-25°  W.,  appear 
in  the  conglomerate.  The  pebbles  in  the  conglomerate  at  the  north 
end  of  the  bluff  are  mostly  1 to  2 inches  in  diameter,  although  in 
places  larger  boulders  occur. 

Except  for  the  greenstone  boulders,  which  weather  a light  yellowish 
brown,  the  pebbles,  boulders,  and  matrix  are  all  dark.  The  matrix 
of  the  conglomerate  is  predominantly  argillaceous. 

AGE  OF  THE  ORCA  GROUP. 

No  definite  evidence  is  available  regarding  the  age  of  the  Orca  ; 
rocks  of  this  area.  The  greenstones  intrude  the  Mesozoic  ( ?)  rocks  of 
the  Valdez  group,  so  that  it  can  be  said  that  they  are  post-Valdez  in 
age,  but  further  than  this  no  definite  statements  can  be  made,  and 
it  can  only  be  stated  that  the  volcanic  activity  took  place  either  in 
the  Jurassic  or  in  some  later  period  of  the  Mesozoic  or  Tertiary.  \ 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY.  163 


There  is  no  paleontologic  evidence  available  as  to  the  age  of  the  con- 
glomerates. From  lithologic  and  stratigraphic  evidence  they  appear 
to  be  younger  than  the  greenstones  and  may  possibly  be  separated 
from  them  by  an  unconformity. 

QUATERNARY  DEPOSITS. 

The  Quaternary  deposits,  which  were  laid  down  by  water  and  ice 
during  an  epoch  of  glaciation  that  has  not  yet  closed  are  the  youngest 
sediments  of  the  district.  The  area  has  experienced  intense  glacial 
erosion,  and  most  of  the  material  eroded  was  carried  by  the  ice  far 
beyond  the  confines  of  the  district.  The  Quaternary  deposits  con- 
sequently cover  relatively  small  areas  and  rest  unconformably  on  the 
glacial  abraded  surfaces  of  the  igneous  and  consolidated  sedimentary 
rocks  of  the  district.  They  consist  of  unconsolidated  material.  The 
materials  of  these  deposits  were  derived  largely  by  the  erosion  of  local 
glaciers  from  the  bedrock  of  the  area  and  consist  dominantly  of 
graywacke,  argillite,  slate,  conglomerate,  and  greenstone.  A small 
percentage  of  foreign  material,  however,  is  included,  as  is  indicated 
by  the  presence  of  boulders  of  granitic  and  dioritic  character  on  the 
eastern  shore  of  Valdez  Arm  between  Jack  and  Galena  bays.  No 
intrusions  of  the  character  of  these  boulders  are  known  in  place  in  the 
Jack  Bay  or  Port  Valdez  districts. 

The  unconsolidated  Quaternary  sediments  consist  of  glacial  de- 
posits; the  gravel,  sand,  and  silt  deposits  of  the  present  glacial  streams; 
small  marine  sand  spits,  short,  narrow,  barrier  beaches,  and  little 
beaches  filling  the  smaller  indentations  in  the  shore  line;  alluvial  fans; 
and  rather  inconspicuous  accumulations  of  talus. 

A thin,  patchy  mantle  or  veneer  of  glacial  till — a heterogeneous 
mixture  of  boulders  and  pebbles  in  a fine,  compact  sticky  blue  clay — 
covers  the  lower-lying  parts  of  the  district,  and  low  bluffs  of  till  a few 
feet  in  elevation  front  the  shore  in  places  on  Halibut  Point  and  the 
shore  to  the  west  and  south. 

The  fluvioglacial  deposits  were  laid  down  by  anastomosing  and 
aggrading  overloaded  glacial  streams  from  valley  glaciers,  and  then- 
deposition  in  front  of  the  retreating  ice  tongues  is  still  in  progress. 
They  consist  of  washed  boulders,  pebbles,  gravels,  sand,  and  silt, 
derived  from  the  graywacke,  argillite,  greenstones,  and  conglomerate 
bedrock,  and  occupy  long,  narrow,  glacially  excavated  rock  basins,  as 
on  Solomon  Gulch  and  on  the  main  creek  flowing  into  the  head  of  the 
north  arm  of  Jack  Bay,  or  they  form  outwash  delta  plains  which  fill 
the  heads  of  both  arms  of  Jack  Bay. 

On  the  geologic  map  (PI.  Ill,  p.  158)  only  the  larger  fluvioglacial 
areas  of  Jack  Bay  and  Solomon  Gulch,  the  few  small  alluvial  fans 
which  occur  at  the  mouths  of  some  of  the  streams  discharging  into 
Jack  Bay,  and  a sand  spit  in  the  southwestern  part  of  the  district, 


164 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917.- 


near  Galena  Bay,  are  indicated  by  the  Quaternary  pattern.  The 
glacial  deposits,  as  they  are  too  small  and  patchy  to  completely  mask 
the  underlying  bedrock,  are  not  mapped. 

MINERAL  RESOURCES. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

The  mineral  resources  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  and  those  portions 
of  the  adj  acent  Port  V aldez  district  covered  by  this  report  consist  of 
lode  deposits  which  contain  copper,  gold,  and  silver.  In  the  follow- 
ing discussions  of  the  relations  of  the  ore  deposits,  two  types  of  ores, 
copper-bearing  sulphide  ores  and  gold  quartz  ores,  are  recognized. 
At  present  only  the  copper  ores  are  mined,  but  all  the  valuable  metals 
mentioned  are  obtained  from  them.  The  copper  ore  of  the  Midas 
mine,  the  only  productive  property  of  the  area  under  consideration, 
contains  in  addition  to  its  copper  content  considerable  amounts  of 
gold  and  silver.  No  facilities  are  available  locally  for  the  smelting  of 
these  base  ores,  and  the  copper  ore  from  the  Midas  mine,  in  the  past, 
after  being  hand-sorted,  has  been  shipped,  for  further  treatment  and 
for  the  recovery  of  its  valuable  contents,  to  the  smelter  of  the  Granby 
Consolidated  Mining,  Smelting  & Power  Co.  (Ltd.),  at  Anyox, 
British  Columbia,  and  to  the  smelter  of  the  Tacoma  Smelting  Co.,  at 
Tacoma,  Wash.  But  few  gold-bearing  quartz  veins  have  been  dis- 
covered, and  none  of  those  yet  found  have  been  of  sufficient  present 
or  prospective  value  to  justify  extensive  development  work  on  them. 
Some  of  the  quartz  veins  contain  chalcopyrite,  the  valuable  copper 
mineral  in  the  copper-bearing  sulphide  ores,  but  the  amount  present 
in  these  quartz  veins  is  very  small,  and  it  is  of  no  value  as  a source  of 
copper. 

The  first  mineral  location  in  this  area  was  made  in  1901  by  H.  E. 
Ellis,  when  he  staked  what  is  now  known  as  the  All-American  lode  of 
the  Midas.  A little  development  work  was  done  on  this  lode  in  1905. 
The  following  year  the  Jumbo  lode  of  the  Midas  property  was  located. 
This  lode  received  considerable  attention  under  different  owners  in 
1911,  1912,  and  1913.  In  October,  1913,  the  present  owners  of  the 
Midas,  the  Granby  Consolidated  Mining,  Smelting  & Power  Co. 
(Ltd.),  purchased  the  property  and  have  brought  it  to  its  present 
position  as  an  important  copper  producer  of  the  Prince  William 
Sound  region.  As  a result  of  the  gold  quartz  boom  in  the  Port 
Valdez  district  in  1910  and  1911,  the  adjacent  Jack  Bay  district  re- 
ceived considerable  attention.  Few  discoveries  of  gold  quartz  veins 
were  made,  however,  in  this  rather  barren-looking  district,  and  little 
development  work  was  done  on  the  lodes  found.  Some  slightly 
mineralized  copper  showings  were  staked  on  which  short  tunnels  were 
driven,  but  the  general  belief  that  this  portion  of  Prince  William 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 


165 


Sound  was  underlain  by  auriferous  rocks  of  the  Valdez  group  appears 
to  have  hindered  the  search  for  copper  lodes  and  the  development  of 
the  known  copper  deposits. 

At  present  the  Midas  mine  is  the  only  property  that  is  actively  and 
continuously  worked,  and  assessment  work  is  being  done  on  only  a 
few  other  properties. 

The  area  considered  in  this  report  lies  entirely  within  the  Valdez 
recording  district,  the  recording  office  of  which  is  at  Valdez. 

GEOGRAPHIC  DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  ORE  DEPOSITS. 

The  Jack  Bay  district  and  that  portion  of  the  Port  Valdez  district 
covered  by  this  report  lie  between  the  Port  Valdez  gold  quartz 
district  on  the  north  and  the  Ellamar  copper  district  on  the  south 
and  immediately  adjoin  both  districts.  Both  copper-bearing  sul- 
phide deposits  and  gold  quartz  veins  occur  in  this  area.  The  copper 
mineralization  is  restricted  to  two  small  areas,  one  of  which  lies 
between  the  two  arms  of  Jack  Bay  and  the  other  surrounds  the  upper 
end  of  Solomon  Gulch  and  extends  into  the  adjacent  valleys.  Copper 
deposits  of  proved  economic  value  have  thus  far  been  found  only 
within  the  Solomon  Gulch  area.  The  gold-bearing  quartz  veins  lie 
mostly  to  the  south  of  the  south  arm  of  Jack  Bay,  although  a small 
vein  was  observed  in  the  broad  slate  band  north  of  the  head  of  this 
arm. 

The  mineralization  has  a known  vertical  range  of  at  least  2,500 
feet,  extending  from  sea  level  iir  the  Orion  quartz  claim  and  the  copper 
prospect  on  the  north  shore  of  the  south  arm  of  Jack  Bay  to  the 
Bay  view  copper  prospect  nearly  2,000  feet  above  sea  level  on  Solomon 
Gulch  and  the  gold  quartz  veins  south  of  Jack  Bay  at  an  elevation 
of  about  2,500  feet.  Both  gold  and  copper  prospects  occur  at  inter- 
mediate levels.  The  Midas  mine  is  at  an  elevation  of  about  800  feet. 

The  only  regularly  producing  property  within  the  area  discussed 
in  this  report  is  the  Midas  mine  of  the  Granby  Consolidated  Mining, 
Smelting  & Power  Co.  (Ltd.),  near  the  head  of  Solomon  Gulch. 
No  shipments  of  ore  are  known  to  have  been  made  either  to  smelters 
or  to  custom  mills  from  any  of  the  gold  or  copper  prospects  of  this 
area. 

GEOLOGIC  RELATIONS  OF  THE  ORE  DEPOSITS. 

The  copper  deposits  are  closely  associated  with  masses  of  intrusive 
greenstone.  They  occur  either  in  shear  zones  in  the  greenstones  or 
in  near-by  sedimentary  rocks,  or  else  as  mineralized  inclusions  of 
sedimentary  rocks  in  the  greenstones.  They  furthermore  appear  to 
favor  the  black  slates  and  argillites  rather  than  the  graywackes. 
In  the  adj  acent  Ellamar  district  the  black  slates  include  some  impure 
dark  limestones,  and  it  is  not  improbable  that  some  as  yet  unrecog- 


166 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


nized  dark  limestones  may  likewise  occur  in  the  black  slate  series 
of  this  area  and  in  the  Midas  mine  much  of  the  sulphide  impregnation 
and  replacement  may  be  the  result  of  the  action  of  sheared  calcareous  I 
sediments  upon  the  mineralizing  solutions. 

The  gold  quartz  deposits  occupy  simple  fissures.  Most  of  them  are  | 
in  the  folded  and  faulted  massive  graywacke  series  south  of  the  south 
arm  of  Jack  Bay,  but  one  occupies  a fissure  that  cuts  the  broad  band  | 
of  black  slates  on  the  north  side  of  the  head  of  that  arm  of  Jack  Bay.  \ 
Three  of  the  quartz  veins  measured  strike  nearly  north  and  south.  I 
The  other  two  had  strikes  of  N.  40°  E.  and  N.  75°  W.  The  dips  I 
range  from  60°  to  vertical.  The  veins  are  narrow,  not  exceeding  I 
3 feet.  The  character  of  the  country  rock  appears  to  have  had  I 
little  if  any  chemical  effect  upon  the  deposition  of  the  few  gold  I 
quartz  lodes  of  the  district.  The  country  rock  of  the  veins,  however,  I 
has  been  somewhat  affected  by  the  mineralizing  solutions  and  now  I 

in  some  places  is  impregnated  with  pyrite. 

The  mineralogy  of  both  types  of  ore  is  simple;  the  minerals  are  I 
few  and  are  common  to  most  of  the  properties  of  that  type.  Two  | 
small  mineralized  shear  zones  on  Solomon  Gulch,  however,  in  addi-  I 
tion  to  the  minerals  usually  found  in  the  copper  deposits,  contain  | 
chalmersite,  CuFe2S3,  a rare  copper-iron  sulphide  that  carries  about  I 
23.5  per  cent  of  copper,  which  has  not  yet  been  observed  in  the  other  I 

copper-bearing  ores  of  this  area.  >v  . 

The  economically  important  copper-bearing  mineral  is  chalco-l 
pyrite.  Gold  and  silver  both  occur  in  the  copper  ores  and  also  in  J 
the  gold  quartz  veins.  The  gold  is  probably  native.  In  the  gold; 
quartz  veins  the  silver  is  alloyed  with  the  gold.  The  combination] 
in  which  the  silver  occurs  in  the  copper  ores  is  not  known. 

The  original  metallic  minerals  of  the  copper  ores  are  chalcopyrite,  ij 
chalmersite,  pyrrhotite,  pyrite,  sphalerite,  arsenopyrite,  galena,  gold,! 
and  silver.  The  nonmetallic  minerals  associated  with  these  mineralsl 
in  the  copper  ores  are  quartz  and  calcite.  In  the  gold  quartz  veinsjj 
arsenopyrite,  pyrrhotite,  pyrite,  gold,  and  silver  are  the  ore  minerals, 
and  quartz  was  the  only  gangue  mineral  noted.  Limonite  occurs! 
in  the  weathered  outcrops  of  both  gold  and  copper  deposits  butlj 
most  abundantly  on  those  of  the  copper  deposits.  J 

In  all  the  mineral  deposits  of  this  area  which  were  exammed  thefl 
primary  sulphides  are  exposed  at  or  very  near  the  surface,  although! 
the  outcrops  of  the  ore  bodies  have  in  places  been  slightly  modified 
by  the  postglacial  oxidation  of  the  sulphides  in  the  veins  since  the! 
comparatively  recent  glaciation  of  this  area. 

genesis  of  the  ore  deposits. 

Two  distinct  periods  of  mineralization  are  now  thought  to  exisG 
in  the  Prince  William  Sound  region,  one  in  which  gold  quartz  veins 
were  formed  in  association  with  the  intrusion  of  granites  and  the  < 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 


167 


other  in  which  copper  ores  were  deposited  in  connection  with  the 
intrusion  of  large  greenstone  masses.  The  Jack  Bay  district  lies 
between  one  of  the  typical  gold  quartz  districts  of  the  Prince  William 
Sound  region,  the  Port  Valdez  district,  and  a typical  copper- district, 
the  Ellamar  district.  In  the  adjacent  Port  Valdez  district  the  gold- 
bearing  quartz  veins  appear  to  be  genetically  related  to  small  bosses 
of  granite.  In  the  Ellamar  copper  district  on  the  south  the  copper 
deposits  are  associated  with  greenstones  and  are  probably  genetically 
related  to  them.  In  the  Ellamar  district,  also,  there  are  a few  gold- 
bearing  quartz  veins  which  appear  to  have  the  same  relations  to 
the  greenstones  as  the  copper  deposits  and  which  were  probably 
formed  during  the  same  period  of  mineralization  as  the  copper  deposits 
and  by  solutions  from  the  same  source.  In  the  Jack  Bay  district 
and  in  those  parts  of  the  Port  Valdez  district  considered  here  the 
copper  deposits  are  associated  with  greenstones  and  the  mineralizing 
solutions  which  deposited  the  copper  deposits  appear  to  have  been 
genetically  related  to  these  basic  intrusive  rocks.  The  few  quartz 
veins  may  likewise  owe  their  origin  to  these  same  mineralizing 
solutions  or  they  may  be  of  the  same  age  and  origin  as  the  gold 
quartz  veins  of  the  Port  Valdez  district.  The  evidence  at  hand  is 
not  conclusive. 


SUGGESTIONS  FOR  PROSPECTING. 

The  possibility  of  finding  gold  quartz  lodes  of  economic  importance 
in  the  future  in  this  area  appears  slight.  Though  the  area  is  much 
fissured  and  a few  of  these  fissures  are  known  to  be  filled  with  slightly 
mineralized  quartz,  the  small  granite  bosses  and  acidic  dikes  with 
which  the  gold-bearing  quartz  veins  of  this  region  are  usually  asso- 
ciated are  lacking.  Several  of  these  bosses  and  dikes  occur  in  the 
adjacent  Port  Valdez  gold  district,  however,  and  some  of  the  miner- 
alizing solutions  which  formed  the  gold  lodes  of  that  district  may 
possibly  have  traveled  far  enough  along  the  many  fissures  of  the  region 
to  enter  and  fill  some  of  the  numerous  fractures  of  the  Jack  Bay 
area. 

The  chances  for  copper  prospecting  are  better,  although  most  of 
the  area  is  underlain  by  massive  graywackes  which  offer  little  if  any 
inducement  to  the  copper  prospector.  The  most  favorable  situations 
in  which  to  search  for  copper  lodes  would  seem  to  be  in  the  black 
slate  and  argillite  areas,  which  are  in  the  vicinity  of  masses  of  in- 
trusive greenstones. 


168 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 
MINES  AND  PROSPECTS. 


SOLOMON  GULCH  PROPERTIES. 

MIDAS  MINE. 

The  Midas  copper  mine,  now  the  property  of  the  Granby  Consoli- 
dated Mining,  Smelting  & Power  Co.  (Ltd.),  of  Canada,  is  on  the 
west  side  of  Solomon  Gulch,  about  4J  miles  from  Port  Valdez,  and  at 
an  elevation  of  about  800  feet  above  sea  level.  The  property  covers 
two  separate  ore  deposits.  The  Jumbo  lode,  where  the  present 
extensive  developments  are  being  made,  is  on  the  west  side  of  the 
valley  near  the  head  of  the  broad  gravel  flat  which  fills  Solomon 
Basin  and  at  the  base  of  the  high  mountain  ridge  which  forms  the 
west  wall  of  the  valley  of  Solomon  Gulch.  The  All-American  lode 
is  about  half  a mile  upstream  from  this  locality  and  in  the  middle  of 
the  valley  bottom  just  above  the  head  of  the  gravel  flat.  The  nearest 
available  standing  timber  is  about  4J  miles  away,  near  the  lower  end 
of  Solomon  Gulch. 

The  All-American  lode  was  originally  located  by  H.  E.  Ellis  as 
“King  Solomon’s  Copper  Mines  Nos.  1 and  2”  in  1901.  It  was  later 
located  by  C.  G.  Debney  and  relocated  in  1904  by  him  as  the  All- 
American  Nos.  1 and  2.  In  1905  an  option  on  the  claims  was  given 
to  B.  D.  Brown  and  P.  J.  L.  Parker,  and  in  the  summer  of  that  year 
a shaft  and  crosscut  totaling  150  feet  were  driven  by  them  on  this 
group.  The  Jumbo  lode  was  located  in  1906  by  Mary  G.  Debney. 
In  1911  J.  A.  Carson  procured  an  option  on  the  property  and  later 
assigned  it  to  A.  E.  Grigsby  and  T.  J.  Devinney,  who  transferred 
their  interests  to  the  Midas  Copper  Co.  in  July,  1912.  Some  develop- 
ment work  was  done  in  1911  and  1912,  and  about  100  tons  of  copper 
ore  was  shipped  to  the  Tacoma  smelter  in  1912.  The  Midas  Copper 
Co.  bonded  the  property  to  the  Alaska  Development  & Mineral  Co. 
from  September  21,  1912,  to  June  27,  1913.  Considerable  under- 
ground work  was  done  by  this  company  before  the  property  was 
turned  back  to  the  owners.  In  October,  1913,  the  Midas  Copper  Co. 
sold  the  property  to  the  present  owners,  the  Granby  Consolidated 
Mining,  Smelting  & Power  Co.  (Ltd.),  of  Canada,  who  started  develop- 
ment work  the  following  spring.  The  first  shipment  of  ore  under  the 
present  ownership  was  made  in  August,  1916,  and  the  mine  has  been 
an  important  shipper  ever  since.  A maximum  force  of  130  men 
were  employed  during  the  construction  of  the  tram  line.  The  aver- 
age force  employed  on  the  property  in  1917  was  50  men. 

The  principal  method  of  transportation  of  supplies  between  the  ;■ 
Midas  mine  and  the  wharf  is  an  80-bucket  Riblet  tram  line,  51  miles  f 
in  length.  The  erection  of  the  tram  line  was  started  in  May,  1914. 
Work  on  it  was  discontinued  on  September  1,  1914,  as  a result  of 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 


169 


the  European  war  and  was  not  started  again  until  the  following 
April.  The  tram  line  was  first  put  in  operation  in  August,  1915, 
and  has  been  operated  much  of  the  time  since.  The  tram  line  is 
driven  by  a 35-horsepower  220-volt  two-phase  General  Electric 
motor,  current  for  which  is  furnished  by  the  local  electric-light  plant 
on  Solomon  Gulch. 

All  passenger  travel  between  the  mine  and  the  camp  on  the  shore 
is  over  the  trail  to  the  foot  of  the  reservoir  and  then  either  over  the 
wagon  road  to  the  shore  near  Fort  Liscum  or  over  one  of  two  trails 
to  the  wharf. 

Surface  improvements  on  the  property  include  a wagon  road  from 
the  shore  of  Port  Valdez  to  the  mine;  an  aerial  tram,  5 1 miles  in 
length,  from  the  bay  to  the  mine;  a wharf  and  3,000-ton  storage 
bins  at  the  coast  terminal  of  the  tram;  several  buildings  on  the  shore 
near  the  wharf;  ore  bunkers,  blacksmith  shop,  cook  and  bunk  house, 
five  cottages,  sheds,  and  an  air-compressor  building  at  the  mine. 
A 200-horsepower  Diesel  engine  was  installed  at  the  mine  in  1916 
and  furnishes  all  the  power  needed  at  the  mine  at  present.  This  en- 
gine is  used  to  drive  a 160-horsepower  Imperial- type  Ingersoll-Rand 
air  compressor  and  a 54-kilowatt  125-volt  direct-current  generator, 
which  furnishes  light  for  the  camp  buildings  and  the  mine  and  power 
for  the  sorting  belt  and  various  small  machinery. 

The  underground  developments  on  the  principal  ore  body,  the 
Jumbo  lode,  total  nearly  4,000  feet  in  length  and  consist  chiefly  of 
four  tunnels,  500  to  900  feet  in  length,  driven  largely  in  the  ore- 
bearing  zone;  several  raises;  stopes  between  the  three  lower  tunnels; 
and  an  inclined  winze  with  a dip  of  60°,  which  starts  in  No.  2 tunnel 
and  extends  to  a depth  of  100  feet.  The  vertical  interval  between 
the  lowest  and  highest  tunnel  is  290  feet.  Considerable  open-cut 
work  and  stripping  has  also  been  done  on  the  east  side  of  the  valley 
in  an  attempt  to  trace  the  eastward  extension  of  this  lode.  On  the 
All-American  lode  there  are  some  shallow  shafts  and  open  cuts. 
The  underground  work  on  this  group,  which  was  done  in  1905,  is 
said  to  total  about  150  feet. 

The  Jumbo  and  All-American  lodes  lie  within  a broad  band,  com- 
posed dominantly  of  black  slates,  which  has  been  intruded  at  several 
places  by  small  bosses,  sills,  and  dikes  of  greenstone.  Interbedded 
with  the  black  slates  are  also  argillites,  cherts,  graywackes,  and 
quartzites.  Schistose  phases  of  these  rocks  have  resulted  from  the 
extensive  deformation  to  which  they  have  been  subjected.  This  slate 
band  crosses  Solomon  Gulch  in  a general  southeasterly  direction, 
but  the  individual  strikes  of  the  bedding  recorded  at  different  places 
range  from  S.  70°  E.  to  S.  83°  E.  The  dips  of  the  beds  are  from  40° 
to  67°  N.  This  slate  band  appears  to  grade  upward  rather  abruptly 
to  the  northeast  into  a graywacke  series,  the  individual  beds  of  gray- 


170 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


wacke  ranging  from  a few  inches  to  more  than  20  feet  in  thickness. 
On  the  southwest  the  slate  band  is  apparently  faulted  against  the 
massive  heavy-bedded  graywackes  of  the  peak  southwest  of  the  mine. 
A large  boss  of  greenstone  crops  out  within  the  slate  band  on  the  west 
side  of  Solomon  Gulch,  immediately  south  of  the  Jumbo  lode.  Nu- 
merous sills,  dikes,  and  lenses  of  greenstone  are  exposed  along  both 
sides  of  the  canyon  just  west  of  the  All-American  workings. 

The  present  developments  show  two  apparently  distinct  ore 
bodies — the  Jumbo  lode  on  the  west  side  of  the  valley,  where  the 
present  extensive  developments  are  being  made,  and  the  All-Ameri- 
can lode  about  half  a mile  upstream  from  this  locality,  in  the  middle 
of  the  valley  bottom.  Both  deposits  occur  in  mineralized  shear 
zones.  The  Jumbo  lead  has  been  traced  for  over  800  feet  into  the 
hill  by  the  tunnels.  On  the  surface  the  highest  showing  of  ore  is 
about  650  feet  above  the  lower  tunnel.  The  general  strike  of  the 
crushed  zone  appears  to  be  a little  north  of  east,  but  the  strikes  of 
individual  shears  within  the  major  shear  zone  range  from  N.  75°  W. 
to  S.  62°  W.  and  the  dips  range  from  40°  to  70°  N.  The  lead  splits 
in  the  two  lower  adits,  the  branches  having  strikes  of  N.  75°  W. 
and  S.  65°  W.  The  width  of  the  ore-bearing  shear  underground 
ranges  from  a few  inches  to  20  feet,  but  the  average  width  of  ore  is 
between  3 and  4 feet.  An  overthrust  fault  occurs  in  the  graywackes 
along  the  probable  extension  of  the  Jumbo  lead  to  the  southwest 
and  may  be  the  continuation  of  the  Jumbo  break.  The  All-American 
lode  appears  as  a sulphide-impregnated  shear  zone  in  the  sedimentary 
rocks  on  the  north  side  of  the  greenstone  intrusions  which  are  exposed 
in  the  canyon  nea^  by.  The  ore  body  strikes  a little  south  of  east 
and  dips  60°  N.  The  mineralized  zone  is  wider  than  the  Jumbo 
lode,  and  the  ore  in  this  zone  is  said  to  be  of  lower  grade  than  that 
in  the  developed  ore  body  of  the  Jumbo.  The  outcrop  of  the  All- 
American  lode  as  exposed  by  the  open  cuts  has  a width  of  about  25 
feet. 

The  ores  are  partly  replacements  and  impregnations  of  the  crushed 
country  rocks  and  partly  the  result  of  cementation  of  small  fractures 
by  the  ore  minerals.  The  sulphide  minerals  present  are  pyrite, 
chalcopyrite,  pyrrho tite,  and  sphalerite.  Abundant  beds  of  fine- 
grained pyrite  are  found  in  places.  A little  quartz  is  associated  with 
the  sulphides,  and  in  the  driving  of  the  lower  tunnel  on  the  Jumbo 
lode  lenses  of  quartz  which  had  a maximum  thickness  of  1 foot  were 
encountered.  Sulphide-bearing  quartz  stringers  are  also  reported 
to  occur  along  the  footwall  of  the  shear  zone  on  this  lode.  Gold  and 
silver  are  reported  in  assays  of  the  ores,  but  neither  metal  has  been 
observed  in  specimens.  Some  limonite  has  resulted  from  the  sur- 
ficial  oxidation  of  the  iron-bearing  sulphides,  and  malachite  stains 
from  the  carbonation  of  the  chalcopyrite. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY.  171 


BAYVIEW  CLAIM. 

The  Bayview  copper  claim  has  been  staked  recently  on  a mineral- 
ized zone  in  the  large  greenstone  area  that  crosses  the  head  of  Solo- 
mon Gulch.  The  claim  is  on  the  west  side  of  Solomon  Gulch,  near 
the  foot  of  a hanging  glacier  at  an  elevation  of  about  2,500  feet  and 
about  1§  miles  south  of  the  Midas  mine. 

OTHER  COPPER  DEPOSITS  ON  SOLOMON  GULCH. 

Small  sulphide  lenses  that  carry  chalcopyrite  and  chalmersite 
occur  in  short,  narrow  shear  zones  in  the  graywackes  and  slates 
along  the  southern  contact  of  the  large  intrusive  greenstone  mass 
at  the  head  of  Solomon  Gulch.  These  mineralized  shears  were  found 
in  similar  places  on  both  sides  of  the  valley.  The  mineralization  is 
too  slight  to  be  of  economic  importance  but  is  of  scientific  interest  as 
furnishing  the  only  occurrence  as  yet  known  of  the  rare  copper  min- 
eral chalmersite  (CuFe2S3)  in  the  Port  Valdez  or  Jack  Bay  districts. 
Other  minerals  present  in  these  small  shears  are  chalcopyrite,  quartz, 
and  limonite. 

JACK  BAY  PROPERTIES. 

COPPER  PROSPECTS  ON  JACK  BAY. 

A tunnel  about  40  feet  in  length  has  been  driven  at  an  elevation 
of  600  feet  on  the  north  side  of  the  north  arm  of  Jack  Bay  to  the 
northeast  of  the  large  island  between  the  two  arms  of  Jack  Bay. 
The  country  rock  is  a fine-grained  bedded  graywacke.  The  tunnel 
is  driven  on  a shear  zone  that  strikes  N.  10°  E.  and  dips  70°  W. 
The  tunnel  is  driven  at  the  foot  of  a bluff  at  the  lower  exposed  end  of 
the  shear,  which  shows  in  the  face  of  the  bluff  above  the  tunnel  for 
about  50  feet  with  a width  of  2 to  4 feet.  The  walls  of  the  shear  are 
free  and  well  defined  and  have  a thin  gouge  in  some  places.  The 
filling  of  the  shear  zone  is  not  very  badly  sheared,  and  the  shear  is 
only  slightly  mineralized.  The  sulphides  present  in  the  ore  are 
arsenopyrite,  chalcopyrite,  pyrrhotite,  sphalerite,  and  galena.  Quartz, 
calcite,  and  the  crushed  and  altered  country  rock  are  the  nonmetallic 
components  of  the  ore.  Some  of  the  quartz  occurs  as  small  stringers. 
Limonite  is  present  in  the  weathered  ore. 

A small  mass  of  greenstone  intrudes  the  sedimentary  rocks  on  the 
north  side  of  the  south  arm  of  Jack  Bay  about  1 mile  east  of  the  tip 
of  the  point  between  the  two  arms  of  the  bay.  Many  inclusions  of 
the  slate  and  argillite  country  rock  are  contained  in  this  greenstone, 
and  these  inclusions  are  slightly  metamorphosed  and  mineralized. 
The  mineralization,  however,  everywhere  appears  very  much  too 
slight  for  the  mineralized  rock  to  constitute  a possible  ore  body. 
These  mineralized  inclusions  have  been  located  as  copper  prospects, 


172 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


and  in  one  of  the  larger  inclusions  a tunnel  25  feet  in  length  and  with  a 
25-foot  approach  has  been  driven  a few  feet  above  high  tide.  Pyrite, 
pyrrhotite,  chalcopyrite,  sphalerite,  and  a very  little  quartz  are 
recognizable  in  the  mineralized  rock  at  this  locality. 

Some  mineralization  appears  in  the  sedimentary  rocks  along  the 
northern  contact  of  the  intrusive  greenstone  mass  on  the  crest  of  the 
divide  between  the  two  arms  of  Jack  Bay,  but  this  mineralization 
seems  slight.  Apparently,  too,  it  has  not  attracted  prospectors,  as 
no  evidence  of  development  work  was  seen  on  any  of  the  rusty 
croppings. 

Slightly  mineralized  float — iron-stained  metamorphosed  slates  that 
carry  specks  of  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite — was  found  in  creek 
wash  from  the  broad  area  of  slate  along  the  north  side  of  the  flat  at 
the  head  of  the  south  fork  of  Jack  Bay.  Heavily  mineralized  float 
that  carries  chalcopyrite  and  galena  is  said  to  have  been  found  on 
Friday  Creek.  The  lead  from  which  this  float  came  has  not  been 
located,  and  it  is  not  known  whether  this  lead  outcrops  within  the 
valley  of  Friday  Creek  or  whether  the  float  was  carried  into  that 
valley  from  the  eastern  portions  of  the  Jack  Bay  district  by  the 
glaciers. 

GOLD  QUARTZ  PROSPECTS. 

Curly  Kidney  prospect. — The  Curly  Kidney  claim  was  located  by 
E.  Rohrbach  in  1910  in  the  valley  of  a small  unnamed  creek  flowing 
into  Jack  Bay  from  the  south  about  2 miles  east  of  the  entrance.  A 
25-foot  tunnel  has  been  driven  on  the  west  bank  of  the  creek  at  an 
elevation  of  about  600  feet  above  sea  level,  and  some  stripping  has 
been  done  in  the  canyon  a little  farther  upstream.  The  country  rock 
is  dominantly  graywacke  accompanied  by  a little  argillite.  The  tun- 
nel is  driven  in  a southerly  direction  on  a shear  zone  2 to  4 feet  in 
width,  which  strikes  S.  5°  E.  and  dips  about  80°  E.  This  shear  is 
very  slightly  mineralized.  There  is  a small  amount  of  quartz  in 
very  small  stringers  and  a little  pyrite  both  in  the  quartz  and  in  the 
sheared  material.  The  main  showing  on  the  property  appears  to 
be  farther  upstream  in  the  bottom  of  the  stream  canyon  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  670  feet,  on  what  is  probably  one  of  a system  of  closely  linked 
shear  zones.  The  strike  of  this  shear  zone  is  about  north  and  south, 
the  dip  nearly  vertical,  and  the  width  as  exposed  is  from  2 to  10  feet 
and  probably  wider  in  places,  where  at  present  the  shear  is  not  fully 
exposed.  This  shear  contains  a few  lenses  and  stringers  of  quartz 
which  have  a maximum  thickness  of  3 feet.  These  stringers  and 
lenses  are  short,  and  most  of  them  are  only  a few  inches  thick.  In 
most  of  the  shear  no  quartz  is  visible  at  all.  Arsenopyrite  was  the 
only  sulphide  seen  in  the  ore.  Assays  of  the  ore  are  reported  by  the 
owner  to  show  gold  in  the  quartz. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  JACK  BAY  AND  VICINITY. 


173 


Orion  claim. — The  Orion  claim  is  at  sea  level  on  the  south  side  of 
the  south  arm  of  Jack  Bay  about  1J  miles  from  the  head  of  the  hay. 
The  country  rock  is  gravwacke  and  a little  argillite.  About  75  feet 
of  underground  work  has  been  done  on  the  claim  on  a curving  lead 
that  outcrops  on  the  shore.  This  lead  is  traceable  about  25  feet  across 
the  beach  and  for  about  50  feet  in  the  tunnel.  The  outer  end  strikes 
N.  6°  W.  and  dips  70°  W.  From  1 to  10  inches  of  quartz  is  visible  in 
the  lead,  and  this  in  places  shows  secondary  handing  parallel  to  well- 
defined  walls.  Arsenopyrite,  pyrrhotite,  and  quartz  were  the  only 
minerals  observed  in  the  ore. 

Other  gold  quartz  prospects. — A well-defined  quartz  vein,  6 inches  to 
3 feet  in  thickness,  was  observed  at  an  elevation  of  2,500  feet  in  the 
west  wall  of  a small  cirque  the  drainage  from  which  is  tributary  from 
the  south  to  the  stream  that  enters  the  head  of  the  south  fork  of 
Jack  Bay,  about  1 \ miles  east  of  the  head  of  the  bay.  The  vein  strikes 
N.  40°  E.  and  dips  60°  W.,  crosscutting  the  bedding  of  massive 
fine-grained  graywackes,  and  is  traceable  several  hundred  feet  by 
local  outcrops.  The  walls  break  free.  The  lead  does  not  appear  to 
be  very  well  mineralized.  Quartz,  arsenopyrite,  and  limonite  were 
the  only  minerals  seen  in  the  ore.  The  presence  of  traces  of  gold, 
however,  is  reported  to  have  been  shown  by  assays.  The  quartz 
shows  secondary  banding  parallel  to  the  walls  in  some  places. 

A smaller  quartz  vein,  only  a few  inches  wide  but  traceable  for  a 
considerable  distance,  crops  out  near  the  divide  on  the  side  of  the 
ridge  that  fronts  on  Galena  Bay. 

A small  quartz  vein  2 inches  thick  cuts  the  thick  black  slate  series 
on  the  north  side  of  the  flat  at  the  head  of  the  south  fork  of  Jack 
Bay.  The  vein  crops  out  in  the  west  wall  of  the  canyon  of  a stream 
at  an  elevation  of  100  feet  and  at  a distance  of  1\  miles  from  the 
head  of  the  bay.  The  bedding  and  cleavage  of  the  slates  here  strike 
S.  75°  E.  and  dip  60°  N.  The  vein  strikes  north  and  dips  55°  W. 
Chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite  were  the  only  metallic  minerals  observed 
in  the  ore. 


115086°— 19 12 


MINING  IN  CENTRAL  AND  NORTHERN  KENAI  PENINSULA. 


By  Bertrand  L.  Johnson. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  mineral  production  of  central  and  northern  Kenai  Peninsula 
comes  entirely  from  gold  quartz  lodes  and  placers.  Very  little  gold 
quartz  mining  was  in  progress  during  1917,  and  placer  operations 
were  restricted  to  a few  streams. 

GOLD  QUARTZ  MINING. 

The  producing  gold  lodes  in  1917  were  in  the  Moose  Pass  district, 
on  Porcupine  Creek,  and  in  the  Hope  district.  The  Kenai  Alaska, 
one  of  the  large  producers  of  former  years,  did  not  operate;  both  the 
mine  and  the  mill  were  closed  down.  In  the  Moose  Pass  district  a 
small  mill,  operated  by  water  power,  was  installed  on  the  Ronan  & 
James  property  on  Summit  Creek,  and  several  tons  of  ore  were 
milled.  The  installation  of  this  mill  was  started  June  15,  and  all 
operations  ceased  on  the  property  for  the  year  on  October  26.  Under- 
ground operations  consisted  in  the  driving  of  100  feet  of  tunnel  and 
the  removal  of  the  ore,  which  was  later  milled.  Surface  improvements 
also  included  the  erection  of  an  aerial  tramway  between  the  mine 
and  the  mill.  Present  underground  developments  on  the  property 
consist  of  a 137-foot  crosscut  to  the  lead,  a 210-foot  drift  on  the 
vein,  an  85-foot  raise  to  the  surface  at  the  point  where  the  lead  was 
struck,  and  a 30-foot  shaft  on  the  outcrop  of  the  ore  body. 

On  the  Gilpatrick  property,  in  Moose  Pass,  two  men  were  at  work, 
and  some  ore  was  milled  in  an  arras tre  which  had  been  erected  in 
previous  years  on  this  property. 

On  the  Columbia  and  Ophir  claims,  also  in  the  Moose  Pass  district, 
only  12  feet  of  tunnel  was  driven  during  the  year,  and  the  mill  on 
this  property  was  not  operated.  Only  assessment  work  is  reported 
on  the  Beatrice  and  Sampson  claims. 

On  Porcupine  Creek  two  or  three  men  were  said  to  have  been  at 
vork  on  the  Bluebell  and  Primrose  claims  in  1917,  and  a few  tons  of 
ore  are  reported  to  have  been  mined  and  milled  at  the  small  mills  on 
this  creek. 


175 


176 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Some  underground  work  was  done  on  a gold  lode  property  on 
Grant  Lake,  and  the  ore  mined  was  milled  in  the  arrastre  on  this 
property. 

The  mill  on  the  Lucky  Strike  property  on  Palmer  Creek,  near 
Hope,  was  operated  from  July  1 to  October  1,  one  shift  a day.  The  j 
mine  also  was  operated  from  June  1 to  October  1. 

GOLD  PLACER  OPERATIONS. 

Placer  operations  were  in  progress  on  Resurrection,  Crow,  Mills,  I 
Winner,  Canyon,  Cooper,  and  Stetson  creeks.  Large  mining  opera-  I 
tions  were  in  progress  only  on  Resurrection  and  Crow  creeks. 

On  Resurrection  Creek  several  hydraulic  outfits  are  said  to  have  I 
been  operating.  The  Mathison  Mining  Co.  operated  from  June  6 to  I 
September  18  with  a crew  of  nine  men.  E.  E.  Carson  hydraulicked  I 
stream  gravels  from  May  10  to  July  2 with  a crew  of  two  men.  I 
The  Pearsons  and  the  St.  Louis  Mining  & Milling  Co.  are  also  reported  I 
to  have  worked,  but  no  data  are  available  regarding  their  operations.  I 
Practically  all  these  placer  camps  suffered  greater  or  less  damage  I 
during  a heavy  rain  and  wind  storm  which  passed  over  the  Kenai  I 

Peninsula  early  in  September,  1917. 

A large  crew  was  at  work  on  the  Crow  Creek  placer  property  dui  mg  j 
the  summer,  and  considerable  work  was  done.  This  property  is  said 
to  have  suffered  extensively  also  in  the  September  storm.  On  I 
Winner  Creek,  a tributary  of  Glacier  Creek,  Axel  Lindblad  operated  I 

from  June  1 to  September  28.  _ 

On  Mills  Creek  Robert  Michaelson  worked  alone  throughout  tnej 
year,  driving  a tunnel,  now  96  feet  in  length,  in  an  old  channel  of 
Mills  Creek.  Fred  Matz,  on  this  same  creek,  groundsluiced  on  his  1 
placer  claim  from  June  1 to  October  1. 

* The  Dunfranwald  Gold  Mines  carried  on  extensive  development  d 
work  near  the  junction  of  Canyon  Creek  and  East  Fork  preparatory,* 
to  actual  mining  operations.  This  work  is  said  to  have  consisted  of  j 
the  construction  of  ditches,  dams,  and  flumes.  Some  development 
work  was  also  done  on  the  Lynx  Creek  gravels. 

The  major  operation  on  Canyon  Creek  was  at  the  property  of  the  J 
Kenai  Peninsula  Placer  Mines,  where  the  installation  of  a hydraulic  j 
plant  is  said  to  have  been  completed  in  September.  The  crew 
employed  at  this  property  during  the  season  comprised  30  to  401 
men,  and  they  were  engaged  in  opening  up  bench  gravels  on  the! 

left  limit  of  the  creek.  I 

Small  hydraulic  operations  are  reported  on  Cooper  and  btetsoD 
creeks.  The  property  of  the  Kenai  Mining  & Milling  Co.  at  the  mouth  j 
of  Cooper  Creek  was  not  in  operation. 

Two  men  were  at  work  on  the  Getchell  claims  on  Gulch  Creek 
mining  the  old  creek  channel  gravels  by  hydraulic  methods. 


GOLD  LODE  MINING  IN  THE  WILLOW  CREEK  DISTRICT. 


By  Stephen  R.  Capps. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Gold  mining  in  the  Willow  Creek  district  in  1917  was  confined  to 
the  exploitation  of  the  quartz  lodes,  from  which  almost  the  entire 
production  has  been  won  for  several  years.  Although  the  first  gold 
recovered  from  this  area  was  gained  by  placer  mining,  the  workable 
placers  were  soon  exhausted,  and  of  recent  years  their  output  has  been 
negligible.  The  production  from  this  camp  in  1917  was  made  by  four 
mines.  Two  of  these  mines,  the  Gold  Bullion  and  the  Alaska  Free  Gold, 
have  been  in  operation  for  many  years  and  have  produced  the  bulk  of 
the  output  of  the  district.  The  Independence  mine,  which  has  for  years 
been  a producer,  was  idle  in  1917,  though  the  mill  was  used  to  crush 
some  ore  from  a near-by  property.  In  1916  a mill  was  erected  and  put 
into  operation  on  the  Mabel,  and  in  1917  a mill  was  completed  on 
the  property  of  the  Talkeetna  Gold  Mining  Co.  To  summarize  these 
conditions,  in  1917  there  were  five  quartz  mills  in  the  district,  of 
which  three  were  operated  steadily  and  two  at  intervals,  and  another 
small  prospecting  mill  was  ready  to  be  set  up.  A report  on  the 
Willow  Creek  district,  comprising  a description  of  the  geology  and  an 
account  of  the  mining  developments  through  1913,  has  been  pub- 
lished.1 A later  summary  of  the  progress  of  mining  through  1915 
has  also  been  issued.2  The  following  notes  on  the  properties  are 
incomplete  but  are  intended  to  supplement  the  previously  published 
reports  by  carrying  forward  the  account  of  the  progress  of  mining  to 
the  fall  of  1917. 

In  the  accompanying  table  the  production  of  the  district  is  given 
by  years.  The  large  production  of  1914  is  due  to  the  fact  that 
during  that  year  the  cyanidation  of  accumulated  tailings  was  begun, 
and  the  gold  so  recovered  came  in  part  from  ores  previously  mined. 
In  1915  and  1916  the  two  cyanide  plants  were  operated  principally 
on  the  current  tailings.  In  1917,  as  a result  of  the  high  price  of 
potassium  cyanide,  considerable  quantities  of  tailings  were  ponded 
for  storage,  to  await  a time  of  more  favorable  operating  costs. 

1 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Willow  Creek  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  607,  1915. 

2 Capps,  S.  R.,  Gold  mining  in  the  Willow  Creek  district:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  642,  pp.  195-200, 1916. 

177 


178  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

Gold  and  silver  produced  at  lode  mines  in  Willow  Creek  district , 1908-1917. 


Year. 


1908. 

1909. 

1910. 

1911. 

1912. 

1913. 

1914. 

1915. 

1916. 

1917. 


Gold. 

Silver,  a 

Quantity 

Value. 

Quantity 

Commer- 

(ounces). 

(ounces). 

cial  value. 

87.08 

81,800 

6.28 

$3.64 

1,015.87 

21,000 

80.25 

41.73 

1,320.15 

27, 290 

104.29 

56.31 

2,505.82 

51,800 

197. 95 

109.91 

4,673.02 

96,600 

369.07 

226.97 

4, 883.94 

100,960 

385.83 

233.42 

14,376.28 

297, 184 

1,330.00 

735.00 

11,961.55 

247, 267 

811.00 

421.00 

14,473.46 

299, 193 

1,468.  00 

967.00 

9, 466.17 

195,662 

713.00 

586.00 

a The  silver  content  recovered  from  the  gold  bullion  is  estimated. 


GOLD  BULLION  MINING  CO. 

The  Gold  Bullion  mine  was  operated  throughout  the  open  season 
of  1917.  Milling  was  begun  on  June  1,  and  the  12-stamp  mill  was 
operated  at  different  proportions  of  its  capacity,  the  rate  depending 
upon  the  water  supply.  During  the  month  of  June  the  ore  was  sup- 
plied from  the  old  No.  2 tunnel,  but  from  July  1 to  the  end  of  the 
season  all  ore  milled  was  taken  from  the  Gold  Dust  tunnels  8,  9, 11, 
and  12.  About  65  men  were  employed,  of  whom  50  were  at  the 
mine  and  15  at  the  mill  and  camp.  At  the  mine  no  mechanical  power 
is  used,  and  hand  drilling  is  still  relied  upon.  Hydraulic  power  is  i 
obtained  for  the  mill  and  to  operate  a part  of  the  cable  tram.  The  : 
water  supply,  however,  has  always  been  inadequate,  and  the  quan-  < 
tity  of  ore  crushed  in  any  year  has  been  determined  in  large  part  I 
by  the  amount  of  power  available.  In  1916  five  1,050-pound  stamps 
were  added  to  the  mill,  making  a total  of  12  stamps,  and  a pipe  line 
and  small  Pelton  wheel  were  installed,  using  water  brought  from  a j 
small  stream  on  the  mountain  to  the  south  of  the  mill  under  a head  : 
of  425  feet,  thus  adding  notably  to  the  milling  capacity. 

The  cyanide  plant  for  the  treatment  of  the  sands  was  installed  | 
in  1914  and  has  operated  satisfactorily.  The  sands  accumulated 
before  the  installation  of  the  cyanide  plant  have  now  been  leached 
and  the  current  mill  product  is  being  handled  systematically.  The  j 
plant  has  six  leaching  tanks,  one  of  37  and  five  of  30  tons  capacity,  J 
and  three  other  tanks  for  solutions.  The  product  treated  is  coarser  I 
than  that  formerly  handled,  and  an  extraction  of  about  78  per  cent  I 
is  reported;  the  slimes  are  stored  for  possible  future  treatment.  I 
The  concentrates  from  the  mill  are  now  also  cyanided  on  the  ground  I 
and  the  precipitates  are  all  retorted,  so  that  the  only  product  shipped  I 
is  bullion. 

Several  faults  that  add  difficulty  to  the  recovery  of  ore  have  recently  i 
been  encountered  in  mining.  One  of  these  faults  is  exposed  in  Gold 


GOLD  LODE  MINING  IN  THE  WILLOW  CREEK  DISTRICT.  179 

Dust  tunnels  No.  8 and  No.  10  and  in  the  No.  3 raise  in  tunnel  No. 
8,  and  no  ore  has  been  found  beyond  it.  Another  fault  in  the  old 
No.  2 tunnel  cuts  off  the  ore  in  several  drifts  and  is  said  to  show  a 
displacement  of  50  feet. 

Exploratory  work  was  done  in  1917  on  a surface  showing  of  rich 
quartz  in  a saddle  of  the  Craigie- Willow  Creek  divide,  near  the  east 
end  of  the  Gold  Bullion  claims,  in  the  hope  of  locating  the  vein  in 
place.  About  20  tons  of  loose  ore  was  picked  up  at  this  locality  and 
taken  by  pack  horses  to  a chute  in  the  Gold  Dust  workings. 

The  progress  of  underground  mining  on  this  property  to  September, 
1917,  may  be  briefly  summarized  as  follows:  The  old  No.  2 tunnel 
has  now  over  3,300  feet  of  workings  in  addition  to  the  stopes.  Gold 
Dust  tunnel  No.  11,  started  in  1916,  extends  over  200  feet  in  a 
southerly  direction  and  has  three  southwest  drifts  of  an  aggregate 
length  of  550  feet.  Gold  Dust  tunnel  No.  12  lies  approximately  180 
feet  west  of  No.  11  and  is  about  150  feet  long,  with  a southwest  drift 
60  feet  long.  Gold  Dust  tunnels  11,  10,  and  8 are  now  connected. 
No.  10  is  215  feet  long,  and  much  ground  between  it  and  No.  11  is 
stoped  out.  Old  tunnel  No.  9 is  now  caved  and  a new  No.  9 has 
been  driven  to  a length  of  90  feet.  The  ground  between  the  old  and 
the  new  No.  9 tunnels  is  worked  out.  The  mam  No.  8 tunnel  is  225 
feet  long  and  has  four  southeast  drifts  that  aggregate  430  feet  of 
tunnel  in  addition  to  stopes. 

Plans  are  under  way  to  connect  the  Gold  Dust  No.  12  tunnel 
underground  with  the  main  No.  2 adit,  thus  making  it  possible  to 
haul  all  ore  from  the  Gold  Dust  workings  by  an  underground  tram 
to  the  head  of  the  wire  tram  at  the  mouth  of  No.  2.  This  work  would 
make  it  possible  to  eliminate  one  cable  tramway  and  a surface  tram 
line,  both  of  which  can  be  operated  only  during  the  open  season 
from  July  1 to  October  1 and  would  lengthen  the  possible  mining 
season.  It  was  also  proposed  to  drive  the  south  drift  of  No.  2 
tunnel  through  to  the  Willow  Creek  side  of  the  mountain,  to  make 
accessible  certain  ores  there  that  can  not  now  be  economically 
taken  to  the  mill. 

ALASKA  FREE  GOLD  MINING  CO. 

Milling  was  commenced  at  the  mine  of  the  Alaska  Free  Gold  Mining 
Co.  on  May  20,  1917,  and  was  continued  throughout  the  summer  and 
fall,  except  for  one  month  when  operations  were  suspended  on 
account  of  labor  trouble.  Before  the  strike  both  of  the  two  Lane 
mills  were  operated  for  24  hours  a day  for  about  a month,  but  since 
the  resumption  of  operations  only  one  mill  has  been  turning.  About 
25  men  have  been  employed  on  an  average,  and  the  mill  has  worked 
three  shifts,  but  the  mine  has  run  only  a single  day  shift.  Con- 
siderable improvements  have  been  made  on  the  property  since  1915. 


180 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


A comfortable  bunk  house  and  a mess  house  have  been  built  on  the 
mountain  near  the  workings,  thus  eliminating  a high  climb  daily  of 
the  entire  mining  force.  All  the  men  now  live  at  the  mine  except 
the  mill  crew  of  five  men.  A 16-horsepower  Fairbanks-Morse  gaso- 
line engine  and  an  Ingersoll-Rand  compressor  have  also  been 
installed  at  the  upper  camp  to  supply  power  for  an  Ingersoll-Rand 
jack  hammer.  One  man  now  does  all  the  drilling  and  blasting  and 
is  said  to  replace  12  hand  drillers.  The  cyanide  plant  was  idle  in  1917, 
as  the  increased  cost  of  chemicals  had  greatly  increased  operating 
expenses.  The  sands  are  ponded  for  future  treatment.  In  Septem- 
ber, 1917,  the  No.  8 tunnel  was  225  feet  long,  the  No.  9 tunnel  100 
feet  long,  and  the  crosscut  175  feet  long.  A new  150-foot  tunnel 
has  also  been  driven,  and  new  stopes  have  been  made  in  all  these 
workings.  At  the  time  of  the  visit  the  ore  was  being  taken  from 
surface  workings  on  the  outcrop  of  the  main  vein  south  of  the  open 
cut  that  was  made  in  1915. 

INDEPENDENCE  GOLD  MINES  CO. 

As  a result  of  increased  operating  costs  no  mining  was  done  in  1917 
on  the  property  of  the  Independence  mine.  In  1916  an  adit  was 
driven  below  the  old  working  tunnel  to  intercept  the  vein  at  a lower 
level.  The  vein  was  reached  at  a distance  of  278  feet  from  the  portal 
and  was  followed  for  28  feet,  but  although  its  average  thickness  was 
2 feet  the  gold  content  of  the  portion  mined  was  less  than  that  re- 
quired to  pay  costs  of  mining  and  treatment.  Inl916aNo.2  Denver 
Chilean  mill,  which  has  a proved  milling  capacity  of  36  tons  of  ore 
crushed  to  40  mesh,  was  installed.  In  1917  the  pipe  line  that  sup- 
plies the  Pel  ton  wheel  was  extended  to  a total  length  of  about  1,100 
feet,  giving  a head  of  210  feet  at  the  wheel.  A temporary  arrange- 
ment was  made  with  the  owners  of  the  Gold  Cord  prospect  for  the  use 
of  the  mill,  a tramway  was  erected  to  the  Gold  Cord  workings,  and  a 
few  hundred  tons  of  ore  was  milled. 

Considerable  prospecting,  including  several  open  cuts  and  a 33-foot 
tunnel  on  the  east  bank  of  Fishhook  Creek,  has  been  done  in  the  en- 
deavor to  locate  new  ore  bodies.  The  northward  strike  of  the  Gold 
Cord  vein  indicates  that  the  extension  of  the  vein  may  cross  the  In- 
dependence property,  and  this  possibility  has  stimulated  prospecting. 

GOLD  CORD  MINING,  MILLING  & POWER  CO. 

The  Gold  Cord  Mining,  Milling  & Power  Co.  has  nine  claims  on 
upper  Fishhook  Creek,  located  on  a quartz  vein  discovered  in  the  fall 
of  1915  by  Byron  and  Charles  Bartholf.  Developments  in  September, 
1917,  included  cook  and  bunk  tents,  245  feet  of  underground  workings, 
and  a wire-cable  tram  with  two  buckets  of  500  pounds  capacity,  sup- 
ported by  four  towers,  that  connects  the  workings  with  the  quartz 


GOLD  LODE  MINING  IN  THE  WILLOW  CREEK  DISTRICT.  181 

mill  of  the  Independence  mine,  at  a distance  of  2,400  feet.  The  slope 
from  the  mine  to  the  mill  is  insufficient  for  gravity  operation  of  the 
tram,  and  power  for  the  tram  is  supplied  from  the  mill. 

The  Gold  Cord  ore  body  consists  of  a main  vein,  the  so-called  “blue 
lode/’  of  blue-gray  to  greenish  quartz  mottled  with  white,  which 
strikes  in  a general  north-south  direction  and  dips  40°-44°  W.  The 
vein  ranges  in  width  from  2 to  9 feet  or  more  and  cuts  the  diorite,  that 
is,  the  country  rock,  for  all  the  mines  of  this  district.  The  quartz  con- 
tains scattered  specks  and  bunches  of  arsenopyrite  and  pyrite  and 
some  visible  free  gold.  Near  the  portal  of  the  tunnel  the  “ blue  lode  ” 
is  apparently  crossed,  at  an  acute  angle,  by  a vein  of  white  quartz 
that  strikes  west  of  north  and  dips  west.  At  the  time  of  visit  this 
portion  of  the  tunnel  was  partly  covered  by  timbers  and  lagging,  and 
the  conditions  could  not  be  satisfactorily  determined. 

The  ore  from  this  mine  is  said  to  carry  encouraging  amounts  of  gold, 
but  a mill  test  of  a few  hundred  tons  is  said  to  have  yielded  only 
a part  of  the  gold  content  upon  the  amalgamation  plates,  the  re- 
mainder being  so  entangled  with  sulphides  that  further  treatment  will 
be  necessary  for  its  recovery. 

MABEL  MINING,  MILLING  & POWER  CO. 

The  Mabel  mine  and  mill  were  operated  throughout  the  open  season 
of  1917,  beginning  May  23,  and  about  18  men  were  employed,  of  whom 
14  were  working  in  the  mine  and  4 at  the  mill.  This  property  was 
equipped  in  the  winter  of  1915-16  with  a 2-bucket  wire-cable  tram- 
way 3,500  feet  in  length,  which  has  a vertical  drop  of  about  1,500  feet, 
connecting  the  mine  with  the  mill,  in  which  a Denver  Chilean  mill  and 
crusher  of  about  15  tons  capacity  were  installed.  Power  is  obtained 
from  a 13-inch  turbine  wheel  that  is  operated  by  water  procured  from 
Archangel  Creek  through  a ditch  half  a mile  long  and  supplied  to  the 
wheel  under  a 30-foot  head.  After  leaving  the  amalgamation  tables 
the  tailings  are  ponded  for  future  chemical  treatment.  The  under- 
ground workings  in  September,  1917,  consisted  of  an  upper  tunnel 
200  feet  long,  not  including  stopes,  and  a lower  tunnel  260  feet  long. 
From  a hasty  examination  it  appears  that  the  workings  show  two  dis- 
tinct veins,  generally  parallel  and  about  70  feet  apart,  which  strike 
northeast  and  dip  about  30°  NW.,  and  a third  vein  that  is  quite  flat 
and  connects  the  other  two.  This  flat  vein  has  not  been  followed  be- 
yond its  intersection  with  the  two  northwestward-dipping  veins. 
The  underground  work  has  demonstrated  a marked  tendency  of  the 
veins  to  pinch  and  swell  within  short  distances.  Gold  is  also  irregu- 
larly distributed  in  the  veins,  but  for  the  last  two  years  the  mill  has 
been  supplied  to  capacity  with  ore  of  good  grade.  Near  the  surface 
cropping  of  the  main  vein  and  above  the  upper  tunnel  a small  stringer 
of  very  high  grade  ore  has  been  exploited.  This  stringer  consists  of 
banded  white  to  rusty  quartz  that  contains  patches  of  sulphides, 


182 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


stains  of  copper  carbonate,  and  abundant  visible  free  gold.  It  is  gen- 
erally reported  in  this  district  that  this  high-grade  ore  contains  gold 
tellurides,  but  samples  selected  by  the  owners  as  their  typical  “ tellu- 
ride  ore”  upon  analysis  in  the  chemical  laboratory  of  the  United 
States  Geological  Survey  failed  to  show  any  trace  of  tellurium. 

TALKEETNA  GOLD  MINING  CO. 

The  property  of  the  old  Matanuska  Gold  Mining  Co.,  in  the  upper 
basin  of  Fairangel  Creek,  was  purchased  in  the  fall  of  1915  by  the  Tal- 
keetna  Gold  Mining  Co.  The  property  was  equipped  in  1917  with  a 
Denver  Chilean  mill  of  about  12J  tons  crushing  capacity,  operated 
by  a Pelton  wheel  working  under  an  85-foot  head.  The  present 
water  supply  is  inadequate  during  part  of  the  season,  but  it  is  planned 
to  extend  the  intake  pipe  line  to  give  a head  of  125  feet  or  more  at  the 
mill.  Ore  is  brought  to  the  mill  from  the  mine  by  a wire-cable  tram- 
way composed  of  two  sections.  The  upper  section,  carried  by  f-inch 
cable,  with  one  supporting  tower,  is  1,500  feet  long  and  runs  from  the 
mine  to  an  angle  station.  The  lower  section  carries  the  ore  from  the 
angle  station  to  the  mill,  a distance  of  600  feet.  Comfortable  quar- 
ters for  the  men  have  been  erected  both  at  the  mill  and  at  the  mine, 
and  an  average  of  15  men  were  employed  in  1917.  In  September, 
1917,  the  main  tunnel  had  a length  of  60  feet.  The  tunnel  was 
driven  on  a vein  which  near  the  surface  showed  a width  of  1 to  3 feet 
but  which  in  the  breast  of  the  tunnel  was  only  2 to  6 inches  wide. 
Another  tunnel,  on  a second  vein,  had  a length  of  over  100  feet.  The 
veins  on  this  property,  as  elsewhere  in  the  district,  show  a tendency 
to  pinch  and  swell  within  short  distances. 

KELLY- WILLOW  CREEK  PROSPECT. 

The  Kelly-Willow  Creek  ground  comprises  five  full  claims  and 
three  fractional  claims  that  he  north  of  the  Independence  Gold 
Mines  property  and  adjoin  it.  The  owners  report  five  distinct 
quartz  veins,  all  showing  a tendency  to  lie  in  parallel  planes.  Two 
of  these  veins  are  near  the  summit  of  Independence  Mountain,  one  is 
considered  to  be  the  extension  of  the  Independence  vein,  and  of  the 
two  others  one  lies  300  feet  above  and  the  other  200  feet  below  the 
Independence  vein.  Development  work  has  been  directed,  in  large 
part,  toward  proving  the  continuity  of  the  Independence  vein  and 
toward  the  location  in  it  of  pay  shoots.  The  workings  consist  of  a 
number  of  open  cuts  and  two  short  tunnels  20  and  25  feet  long. 
The  open  cuts  seem  to  prove  that  the  Independence  vein  is  continu- 
ous northward  for  many  hundred  feet  beyond  the  boundaries  of 
the  Independence  property,  and  according  to  reports  it  carries  gold 
throughout  its  length,  locally  in  encouraging  amounts.  The  general 
strike  of  the  vein  is  N.  23°  W.  and  the  dip  35°  SW. 


GOLD  LODE  MINING  IN  THE  WILLOW  CREEK  DISTRICT.  183 


RAY- WALLACE  MINING  CO. 

The  Ray- Wallace  Mining  Co.  has  acquired  a lease  on  the  old 
Rosenthal  property  that  lies  on  the  high  ridge  which  borders  the 
basin  of  Fishhook  Creek  on  the  east.  The  old  tunnel  on  the  property 
is  reported  to  have  reached  a length  of  330  feet  in  1917,  and  a new 
tunnel,  on  the  Trickster  claim,  had  been  driven  a distance  of  30  feet 
to  intersect  a vein  that  crops  out  above,  but  it  had  not  yet  cut  the 
vein.  A new  vein,  on  the  Morning  Star  claim,  has  been  uncovered 
by  several  open  cuts.  It  strikes  nearly  due  east  and  dips  about 
55°  S.  and  shows  a maximum  of  6 inches  of  quartz  and  a foot  or 
more  of  crushed  and  oxidized  vein  matter.  The  quartz  contains 
some  pyrite  and  arsenopyrite  and  some  dark  material  in  spots  which 
is  said  to  contain  tellurides  but  which  upon  chemical  analysis  failed 
to  give  a trace  of  tellurium.  The  owners  of  this  property  plan  to 
install  a cable  tram  and  a mill  in  the  winter  of  1917-18. 

MOHAWK  MINING  CO. 

The  Mohawk  Mining  Co.,  which  is  incorporated  as  a stock  company, 
has  eight  claims  in  the  upper  basin  of  Sidney  Creek,  a tributary  of 
Archangel  Creek  from  the  south.  The  main  vein  has  been  developed 
by  two  tunnels,  one  about  70  feet  above  the  other.  The  lower 
tunnel,  30  feet  long,  failed  to  penetrate  through  the  loose  detrital 
material.  The  upper  tunnel,  which  is  160  feet  long,  is  now  partly 
caved  in.  It  follows  a band  of  decayed  diorite  and  gouge  in  which 
is  some  white  banded  quartz  that  shows  arsenopyrite.  The  vein 
pinches  and  swells  and  is  said  to  show  a maximum  thickness  of  30 
inches  of  quartz,  though  at  the  breast  the  quartz  vein  was  only 
6 to  8 inches  wide.  The  vein  strikes  N.  35°  W.  and  dips  45°  SW. 
Average  assays  of  the  vein  matter  are  said  to  have  given  promising 
returns  in  gold,  but  the  percentage  of  the  gold  content  that  can  be 
recovered  by  amalgamation  can  be  determined  only  by  mill  tests  on 
a considerable  amount  of  ore.  It  is  said  that  milling  equipment  for 
this  property  had  been  purchased,  but  it  was  not  installed  in  1917. 

NORTHWESTERN  MINE. 

A group  of  13  claims,  called  the  Northwestern  mine,  has  been 
located  on  the*  west  side  of  Moose  Creek,  about  3 miles  above  the 
canyon  through  which  that  stream  emerges  from  the  mountains. 
The  ore  body  lies  on  a high  mountain  ridge,  about  1,600  feet  above 
Moose  Creek,  at  an  elevation  of  about  3,800  feet.  A horse  trail 
leads  up  Moose  Creek  from  its  mouth,  through  the  canyon,  and  from 
the  valley  bottom  below  the  ore  body  a steep  switchback  foot  trail 
leads  to  the  prospect. 


184 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  country  rock  in  this  vicinity  exhibits  a gneissic  phase  of  the 
diorite  mass  that  forms  a large  part  of  the  Talkeetna  Mountains. 
Near  the  south  ridge  of  this  mass,  from  Moose  Creek  westward  across 
the  basin  of  Little  Susitna  River,  the  intrusive  rock  has  a more  or 
less  well-developed  gneissic  structure  and  locally  shows  a pronounced 
banding.  Certain  phases  are  also  highly  hornblendic.  A short  dis- 
tance south  of  the  property  here  described  Tertiary  arkoses  overlap 
and  conceal  the  gneissic  and  granitic  rocks.  The  ore  body,  which  is 
conspicuous  on  account  of  a rusty  red  gossan,  has  been  developed  by 
open  cuts,  strippings,  and  a 33-foot  tunnel.  It  has  been  formed 
through  the  replacement  of  the  gneissic  rock  by  sulphides,  chiefly 
pyrrhotite,  pyrite,  and  chalcopyrite.  Sphalerite  is  also  reported. 
The  banding  of  the  gneiss,  although  somewhat  wavy  and  twisted,  has 
a general  strike  of  N.  60°-75°  W.  and  a dip  of  65°  S.  to  vertical, 
and  the  ore  body  lies  parallel  to  the  gneissic  structure.  As  shown  by 
the  workings,  the  area  of  heavy  mineralization  appears  to  have  a 
thickness  of  25  to  30  feet,  and  disseminated  sulphides  occur  for  con- 
siderable distances  on  either  side.  The  body  of  massive  sulphides 
has  been  exposed  by  open  cuts  along  the  strike  for  at  least  80  feet, 
and  gossan  shows  beyond  the  cuts  in  both  directions.  Within  this 
ore  body  the  sulphides  range  in  abundance  from  scattered  specks 
disseminated  without  any  marked  arrangement  in  rather  massive 
diorite  to  bands  of  sulphides  that  follow  the  banding  of  gneissic 
materials  and  to  massive  sulphide  masses  in  which  no  gangue  or 
country  rock  appears.  Each  of  the  three  principal  sulphides — 
pyrite,  pyrrhotite,  and  chalcopyrite — occurs  in  places  in  large,  nearly 
pure  aggregates,  but  more  commonly  the  three  are  intermingled. 
The  tunnel  penetrates  through  the  gossan  into  sulphides  that  are  un- 
oxidized, except  along  joints  and  cracks  down  which  surface  waters 
have  circulated.  No  one  was  resident  on  this  property  at  the  time 
of  visit  but  assay  certificates  supplied  by  the  principal  owner  showed 
from  0.04  to  0.08  ounce  of  gold  and  0.8  to  1.2  ounces  of  silver  to 
the  ton,  and  from  a trace  to  5.6  per  cent  of  copper.  One  assay  also 
showed  the  presence  of  0.03  per  cent  of  nickel. 

OTHER  PROSPECTS. 

In  addition  to  the  properties  described  above,  there  are  many 
prospects  in  this  region  on  which  some  work  has  been  done.  Some 
of  these  prospects  were  visited  by  the  writer  in  1917.  Concerning 
others  that  he  could  not  examine  within  the  time  available,  infor- 
mation from  sources  that  were  believed  to  be  reliable  was  obtained. 
The  following  notes  include  such  information  as  seems  worth  pub- 
lishing. 

The  so-called  Jap  claims,  on  upper  Willow  Creek,  have  been 
leased,  and  work  was  continued  on  two  tunnels.  On  the  Eagle  claim 


GOLD  LODE  MINING  IN  THE  WILLOW  CREEK  DISTRICT.  185 

No.  2 the  tunnel  in  the  fall  of  1917  was  200  feet  long,  with  a 25-foot 
crosscut  and  a 50-foot  winze.  The  vein  is  said  to  be  6 feet  wide 
between  walls,  and  the  quartz  vein  matter  averages  12  inches  wide 
and  is  said  to  carry  gold  in  commercial  quantities.  On  the  Mary 
claim  is  a tunnel  100  feet  long  on  a quartz  vein  that  is  reported  to 
average  2 feet  wide  but  to  be  of  rather  low  grade.  Near  the  portal 
of  this  tunnel  a winze  has  been  started  on  a quartz  stringer  that  is 
said  to  be  rich  in  gold. 

The  Bluebird  claim,  south  of  the  Gold  Cord,  has  been  developed 
by  numerous  open  cuts  and  a 30-foot  shaft.  The  shaft  is  reported 
to  show  a large  body  of  quartz  that  contains  visible  free  gold. 

A group  of  four  claims,  also  known  as  the  Gold  Cord,  for  the 
owners  believe  them  to  contain  the  northward  extension  of  the  Gold 
Cord  vein  opened  in  the  head  of  Fishhook  Creek  valley,  has  ‘been 
staked  in  the  upper  basin  of  Sidney  Creek.  Open  cuts  show  a few 
inches  of  white  quartz  that  contains  stains  of  copper  carbonate  and 
is  said  to  carry  visible  free  gold. 

Smith  & Sutherland  hold  four  claims  in  the  southeastern  portion 
of  the  Sidney  Creek  basin.  It  is  reported  that  a 40-foot  tunnel 
driven  on  this  property  has  now  caved  in. 

Little  work  was  done  in  1917  on  the  Arch  group.  The  old  inclined 
tunnel  is  caved,  and  another  80-foot  tunnel  driven  at  a lower  point 
on  the  same  vein  has  now  caved  50  feet  from  the  portal  and  is  inac- 
cessible. 

The  Webbfoot  group  of  two  claims,  lying  on  the  south  side  of  Arch- 
angel Creek  and  west  of  Sydney  Creek,  has  been  developed  by  a large 
amount  of  stripping  along  the  outcrop  of  the  vein.  The  vein  is  said 
to  show  an  average  width  of  several  feet  of  quartz  and  to  carry 
encouraging  amounts  in  gold. 

The  Alaska  Quartz  group  of  two  claims,  on  the  mountain  ridge 
between  Archangel  and  Reed  creeks,  has  been  prospected  by  two 
tunnels  20  feet  and  212  feet  long.  In  the  longer  tunnel  the  vein 
carries  16  inches  of  quartz  at  the  portal,  but  the  quartz  pinches  out 
about  40  feet  from  the  portal,  and  beyond  that  point  the  tunnel  was 
driven  along  a slip  zone  that  contains  gouge. 

The  Babcock-McCoy  claims,  on  Reed  Creek,  are  developed  by  open 
cuts  and  by  a 100-foot  tunnel.  The  open  cuts  are  said  to  show  a 
vein  that  ranges  from  a few  inches  to  9 feet  in  thickness  and  that  is 
said  to  carry  promising  amounts  of  gold.  The  tunnel,  driven  to 
intersect  the  vein  at  some  distance  below  the  cropping,  has  not  yet 
reached  the  vein. 

The  Little  Gem  group  of  three  claims  lies  on  the  east  side  of  upper 
Archangel  Creek.  Two  tunnels,  the  upper  25  feet  and  the  lower  60 
feet  long,  have  been  driven  on  the  vein,  which  in  the  workings  shows 
a maximum  width  of  8 inches.  The  vein  carries  a very  rich  streak 


186 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


of  ore,  from  half  an  inch  to  2 inches  wide,  in  which  visible  gold  is 
abundantly  present.  The  owners  have  on  the  ground  a 5-ton  Buster 
Brown  mill  and  a 4-horsepower  Moline  gasoline  engine,  with  hemp 
rope  for  a tramway,  although  none  of  this  equipment  was  installed 
in  September,  1917. 

The  Hillis  group  of  three  claims,  commonly  known  as  the  Fern- 
Goodell  property,  is  situated  in  the  upper  basin  of  Archangel  Creek. 
An  adit  tunnel  that  has  a total  length  of  96  feet  was  driven  40  feet 
to  the  vein,  which  was  followed  for  56  feet  in  an  attempt  to  find  an 
ore  shoot  that  crops  out  on  the  surface.  The  vein  in  the  tunnel  is 
reported  to  have  a maximum  width  of  5^  feet  and  to  carry  some  gold 
throughout,  with  a particularly  rich  streak  a few  inches  wide  on  the 
hanging  wall.  The  vein  quartz  is  white  and  shows  arsenopyrite  and 
some  gold,  and  the  richest  ore  is  mottled  with  bluish  spots.  Tellu- 
rides  have  been  reported  from  this  property,  but  their  presence  has 
not  yet  been  conclusively  proved. 

Vein  quartz,  carrying  considerable  molybdenite,  has  been  found  in 
at  least  two  localities  in  the  Archangel  Creek  basin.  One  of  these 
localities  is  in  the  upper  basin  of  Fairangel  Creek,  and  the  other  is 
on  the  divide  between  Archangel  and  Purches  creeks.  Neither 
locality  was  visited  by  the  writer,  and  the  extent  of  the  deposits  has 
not  been  determined. 

The  Good  Hope  lode,  on  the  east  side  of  lower  Heed  Creek,  was 
staked  in  1916.  It  has  been  exposed  in  two  large  open  cuts  and  is 
said  to  show  a strong  vein,  several  feet  wide,  from  which  a few  colors 
of  free  gold  may  be  panned. 

The  Galena-Gold  group  of  three  claims  was  staked  in  1917  on  the 
head  of  Purches  Creek.  Little  development  work  has  been  done,  and 
neither  the  width  nor  the  length  of  the  ore  body  has  been  determined, 
but  it  is  said  that  at  least  1 foot  of  good  ore,  containing  chalcopyrite, 
pyrite,  galena,  and  free  gold,  shows  on  the  surface. 

The  Jessie  B group  of  two  claims  lies  in  the  upper  basin  of  Peters 
Creek.  The  vein  is  reported  to  be  from  2 to  5 feet  wide,  and  speci- 
mens of  ore  show  quartz  stained  with  copper  carbonates  and  iron 
oxide.  The  vein  matter  is  said  to  show  free  gold  upon  panning,  and 
a considerable  amount  of  ore  is  said  to  have  been  mined  and  stacked 
during  the  progress  of  development  work. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  THE  WESTERN  TALKEETNA 

MOUNTAINS. 


By  Stephen  R.  Capps. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  limits  of  the  region  here  called  the  western  Talkeetna  Moun- 
tains are  somewhat  arbitrarily  drawn.  It  includes  that  portion  of  the 
Talkeetna  mountain  mass  that  lies  west  of  a sinuous  line  extending 
from  the  head  of  Little  Susitna  River  northward  along  the  rugged 
crest  of  the  mountains  and  embraces  the  basins  of  a number  of 
westward-flowing  tributaries  of  Susitna  River  and  the  basins  of 
Sheep  River  and  Iron  Creek,  two  tributaries  of  Talkeetna  River. 

Although  the  Willow  Creek  gold  mining  district  is  geologically  and 
topographically  a part  of  this  region,  it  is  excluded  from  the  area 
here  treated,  as  a separate  account  of  its  mining  activities  is  given 
elsewhere.  (See  pp.  177-186.) 

Systematic  surveys  were  begun  in  this  part  of  Alaska  in  1898, 
when  G.  H.  Eldridge1  and  Robert  Muldrow,  of  the  United  States 
Geological  Survey,  ascended  the  Susitna  basin  to  Broad  Pass  and 
obtained  the  first  accurate  information  concerning  the  geography  of 
that  great  river  system.  During  that  same  year  W.  C.  Mendenhall,2 
while  attached  to  a War  Department  expedition  in  charge  of  Capt. 
F.  W.  Glenn,  ascended  Matanuska  River  to  its  head  and  proceeded 
northeastward  to  Delta  River,  thus  skirting  the  Talkeetna  Mountains 
on  the  south  and  east.  The  next  notable  survey  in  the  region  here 
discussed  was  carried  out  in  1906,  when  R.  H.  Sargent  and  Sidney 
Paige,3  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey,  ascended  Matanuska 
River  and  Chickaloon  Creek,  ascended  Talkeetna  River  to  Sheep 
River,  and  thence  followed  the  west  flank  of  the  mountains  southward 
to  Knik  Arm.  Their  topographic  and  geologic  surveys  thus  com- 
pletely surrounded  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains  but  left  inclosed 
within  their  route  of  travel  a large  unmapped  area.  In  1910  F.  J. 
Katz4  spent  a few  days  in  the  Willow  Creek  district,  and  in  1913  S.  R. 
Capps5 6  made  a detailed  study  of  that  area. 

1 Eldridge,  G.  H.,  A reconnaissance  in  the  Susitna  basin  and  adjacent  territory,  Alaska,  in  1898: 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Twentieth  Ann.  Rept.,  pt.  7,  pp.  1-29,  1900. 

2 Mendenhall,  W.  C.,  A reconnaissance  from  Resurrection  Bay  to  Tanana  River,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Twentieth  Ann.  Rept.,  pt.  7,  pp.  31-264, 1900. 

3 Paige,  Sidney,  and  Knopf,  Adolph,  Geologic  reconnaissance  in  the  Matanuska  and  Talkeetna  basins, 

Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  327,  1907. 

Katz,  F.  J.,  A reconnaissance  of  the  Willow  Creek  gold  region:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  480,  pp.  139-152, 

6 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Willow  Creek  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  607,  1915. 


188 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


On  the  Government  railroad  in  progress  of  construction  from 
Seward  to  Tanana  River,  rails  were  laid  by  the  fall  of  1917  from 
Tumagain  Arm  northward  as  far  as  Montana  Creek,  and  the  branch 
line  up  Matanuska  Valley  was  in  operation  to  the  Chickaloon  coal 
field.  Upon  the  laying  of  a stretch  of  track  along  the  north  shore  of 
Turnagain  Arm,  now  rapidly  approaching  completion,  rail  transporta- 
tion will  be  available  from  Seward  to  points  well  up  Susitna  Valley, 
and  the  area  thus  supplied  will  expand  as  construction  proceeds 
northward. 

The  western  Talkeetna  Mountains  have  long  been  considered  to 
offer  a promising  field  for  the  prospector.  In  1897  the  first  gold- 
placer  claims  were  staked  on  Willow  Cteek,  and  although  the  work- 
able ground  proved  to  he  of  small  area,  considerable  gold  was  pro- 
duced. In  1906  gold  quartz  was  discovered  in  the  Willow  Creek 
district,  and  since  that  time  the  production  of  lode  gold  has  steadily 
increased.  From  time  to  time  prospectors  attempted  to  extend  the 
productive  area  of  the  Willow  Creek  district  northward,  and  some 
encouraging  quartz  veins  were  found,  but  the  cost  in  time  and 
money  of  getting  supplies  into  that  area  grew  prohibitive  as  the  I 
distance  from  the  water  increased,  and  no  serious  attempts  were 
made  to  develop  mines  north  of  the  basins  of  Willow  Creek  and  Little 
Susitna  River. 

The  passage  of  a bill  by  Congress  authorizing  a Government  railroad 
up  Susitna  Valley  and  the  progress  of  construction  on  this  project 
greatly  encouraged  both  prospectors  and  those  seeking  agricultural 
lands  in  this  hitherto  remote  area,  and  it  became  desirable  to  complete 
topographic  and  geologic  surveys  along  the  route  to  be  served  by  the 
railroad.  Accordingly,  in  1915,  J.  W.  Bagley,  of  the  United  States  I 
Geological  Survey,  carried  out  a reconnaissance  topographic  survey  I 
in  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains,  covering  an  area  of  835  square  I 
miles  previously  unsurveyed.  In  1917  the  writer,  in  addition  to  I 
other  duties,  was  assigned  to  the  task  of  studying  the  more  important  1 
mineral  resources  of  that  area  and  of  mapping  the  areal  geology  in  so  \ 
far  as  time  for  that  work  was  available.  After  returning  from  a few  s 
weeks’  visit  to  the  upper  Chulitna  basin,  the  field  party,  consisting  j 
of  the  geologist,  a cook,  and  two  packers,  with  seven  pack  horses,  i 
left  Talkeetna  on  July  29  and  ascended  the  valley  of  Talkeetna  River 
and  of  Iron  Creek  to  the  vicinity  of  the  numerous  lode  prospects  in 
that  basin.  Two  weeks  was  spent  in  a study  of  the  prospects  and  of 
the  geologic  conditions  of  that  vicinity,  after  which  the  party  pro-  i 
ceeded  southward  through  the  mountains.  Only  16  days  was  I 
available  for  the  areal  geologic  mapping  of  several  hundred  square  l 
miles  of  rugged  mountains,  but  much  of  that  area  is  occupied  by  a 
single  geologic  unit,  and  it  is  believed  that  the  general  distribution  of 
formations,  as  shown  on  the  map  (PI.  IV),  is  approximately  correct  1 
in  its  larger  features. 


Oborin  i 

Of  THE 


/SSI  '/.■ 


GEOLOGICAL  SURVEY 


PLATE  IV 


EXPLANATION 


Unconsolidated  materials 
Glacial  moraines.outwash 
gravels,  and  deposits  of 
present  streams 


Basaltic  lava  flows 


Andesite  green  stone  flows 


Limestone,  marble, 
slate, argillite,  and 
quartzite 


B V 

Mies  schist  J 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  189 

The  conclusions  reached  in  this  paper  are  based  on  a preliminary 
study  of  the  data  gathered  and  are  subject  to  modifications  in  the 
moro  complete  report  now  in  preparation. 

GENERAL  FEATURES  OF  THE  REGION. 

GEOGRAPHY. 

The  region  here  described  as  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains  is, 
as  its  name  implies,  predominantly  an  area  of  high  relief.  On  its 
eastern  border  the  summit  peaks  of  the  mountain  mass  reach  elevations 
of  7,000  to  8,800  feet  and  nourish  many  glaciers,  the  largest  of  which 
has  a length  of  12  miles.  Farther  west  the  mountains  decrease  some- 
what in  height  but  are  extremely  rugged  and  steep  for  an  average 
distance  of  20  miles  from  the  divide.  Within  that  area  the  land 
forms  are  characteristically  those  of  a severely  glaciated  mountain 
mass  in  crystalline  rocks  with  multitudes  of  cirque  basins  and  rela- 
tively straight,  troughlike  trunk  valleys. 

As  the  Susitna  lowlands  are  approached  the  mountain  topography 
undergoes  a sharp  change  of  type.  The  ragged  sky  line  of  the  higher 
mountains  disappears,  and  the  interstream  ridges  on  the  western 
mountain  flank  have  rounded  contours  and  plateau-like  surfaces  up 
to  an  elevation  of  3,000  feet  or  more.  Many  facts  prove  that  this 
series  of  plateaus,  which  may  be  regarded  as  a high  beach  now  dis- 
sected, was  once  overridden  by  the  northward-moving  ice  of  the 
great  Susitna  glacier,  and  its  subdued  topography  and  rounded  forms 
are  due,  at  least  in  part,  to  the  erosive  effects  of  that  ice  mass. 

On  their  western  flank  the  Talkeetna  Mountains  merge  gradually 
into  the  Susitna  lowlands.  Susitna  River  flows  southward  through 
a broad  structural  basin  that  is  bordered  on  the  east  by  the  Talkeetna 
Mountains  and  their  northward  extension  and  on  the  west  by  the 
Alaska  Range  and  its  foothills. 

Between  these  two  mountain  masses  this  lowland  has  a width  of 
about  50  miles  in  the  latitude  of  Kashwitna  River  but  narrows  to  a 
width  of  20  miles  at  Talkeetna.  From  it  irregular  projections  extend 
up  the  valleys  of  the  larger  tributary  streams.  Along  the  axis  of 
this  basin  the  relief  is  slight,  and  the  gradient  southward  to  tidewater 
is  gentle.  Talkeetna,  at  the  mouth  of  Talkeetna  River,  is  80  miles 
from  the  head  of  Cook  Inlet,  yet  its  elevation  above  sea  level  is  only 
350  feet.  The  flatness  of  the  valley  floor  is  relieved  only  by  rolling 
morainic  hills  and  by  the  comparatively  shallow  trenches  of  the 
streams  that  cross  it.  Toward  its  borders  the  relief  increases,  the 
stream  trenches  are  of  greater  depth,  and  the  rolling  lowland  merges 
into  the  flanks  of  the  foothills  and  the  mountain  ranges. 

The  area  here  treated  contributes  all  its  drainage  to  Susitna  River. 
More  than  half  of  the  region  is  drained  directly  to  the  Susitna  by 
Willow  and  Little  Willow  creeks,  Kashwitna  River,  and  Montana 
115086°— 19 13 


190 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

and  Sunshine  creeks,  all  of  which  head  in  the  mountains  and  flow 
westward  to  emerge  into  the  lowlands  through  which  they  flow  to 
join  the  Susitna.  Sheep  River  and  Iron  Creek  both  head  in  glaciers 
at  the  summit  of  the  range  and  flow  in  parallel  courses  northwest- 
ward to  join  Talkeetna  River  16  and  30  miles,  respectively,  above  its 
mouth. 

GLACIATION. 

The  higher  parts  of  the  Talkeetna  Mountains  reach  above  the  level 
of  perpetual  snow  and  nourish  a large  number  of  glaciers.  A con- 
siderable portion  of  the  waters  of  Kashwitna  and  Sheep  rivers  and 
Iron  Creek  is  supplied  by  the  melting  ice  fields,  and  Montana  Creek 
receives  enough  glacial  drainage  to  cloud  its  waters  in  summer.  As 
measured  by  the  standards  of  the  neighboring  Chugach  and  Alaska 
ranges  all  the  glaciers  in  the  Talkeetna  Mountains  are  of  small  size, 
occupy  only  the  extreme  heads  of  the  cirques,  and  are  of  simple  form. 
Of  those  on  the  west  slope  of  the  mountains  only  three  of  four  are  of 
the  type  that  comprises  a somewhat  extended  main  lobe  fed  by 
numerous  tributaries. 

The  largest  glacier  in  the  Talkeetna  Mountains  is  that  in  which 
Sheep  River  heads.  The  upper  basin  of  Sheep  River  is  encircled  by 
the  highest  peaks  of  the  range,  and  the  northern  slopes  are  protected 
from  solar  radiation,  so  that  conditions  are  especially  favorable  for 
the  accumulation  of  glacial  ice.  In  addition  to  the  main  glacier 
there  are  more  than  thirty  smaller  ice  fields  over  half  a mile  long 
that  send  their  water  to  Sheep  River.  The  Kashwitna  and  Iron 
Creek  basins  also  contain  numerous  glaciers. 

Although  glaciers  are  so  numerous  in  the  range,  the  present  glaciers 
are  altogether  insignificant  as  compared  with  the  great  ice  fields  that 
once  covered  this  area.  During  the  earlier  period  of  glaciation  all 
the  mountain  valleys  were  filled  to  the  brim  with  glacial  ice,  so  that 
only  the  highest  peaks  and  ridges  projected  above  its  surface.  This 
ice  moved  slowly  down  the  valleys  to  join  the  enormous  glaciers  that 
occupied  Susitna  Valley.  Some  idea  of  the  volume  of  the  former 
Susitna  glacier  may  be  gained  from  the  statement  that  at  the  mouth 
of  Kashwitna  River  the  glacier  at  one  time  reached  a thickness  of 
close  to  4,000  feet  and  had  a width  of  over  50  miles. 

ROUTES  OF  TRAVEL. 

Although  not  far  distant  from  tidewater,  the  western  Talkeetna 
Mountains  have  always  been  rather  difficult  of  access,  and  few  white 
men  had  traveled  in  them  until  the  beginning  of  construction  on  the 
railroad  gave  promise  of  improved  transportation  to  the  region.  Two 
routes  of  approach  to  the  mountains  have  been  followed,  one  by  boat 
or  sled  up  Susitna  River  and  its  tributaries  and  the  other  along  the 
flank  of  the  mountains  northward  from  Willow  Creek,  the  route 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  191 

chosen  by  any  particular  party  being  determined  by  the  time  of  year 
when  the  trip  was  to  be  made  and  the  means  of  transportation  avail- 
able. Most  prospectors  and  trappers  in  interior  Alaska  prefer  to 
travel  in  winter  by  dog  sled,  when  the  frozen  streams  and  the  mantle 
of  snow  make  it  possible  to  haul  heavy  loads  with  the  least  effort 
and  equipment.  Trading  stations  and  stores  have  long  been  main- 
tained at  Knik,  on  Knik  Arm,  and  at  Susitna  station,  on  Susitna 
River  near  the  mouth  of  the  Yentna.  A trading  station  was  also 
operated  for  some  years  at  the  mouth  of  Talkeetna  River  but  was 
abandoned  in  1911.  Winter  travelers  obtained  supplies  from  one  of 
these  places  and  sledded  them  up  the  valleys  to  the  chosen  prospecting 
or  trapping  ground.  In  summer  Susitna  River  is  navigable  for  high- 
powered,  shallow-draft  boats  as  far  north  as  the  mouth  of  Indian 
River,  and  construction  camps  have  been  established  at  intervals 
along  the  line  of  the  railroad  by  the  Alaskan  Engineering  Commission. 
Talkeetna,  a considerable  village,  including,  in  addition  to  the  build- 
ings of  the  commission,  several  stores  and  many  dwellings,  has  sprung 
up  at  the  mouth  of  Talkeetna  River,  and  transportation  by  boat  was 
obtainable  in  1917  to  the  mouth  of  Indian  River.  The  tributaries 
of  Susitna  River  from  the  east,  however,  are  not  navigable  for  power 
boats.  Kashwitna  and  Talkeetna  rivers  may  be  ascended  for  some 
distance  by  poling  boat,  but  the  swift  current  and  shoal  waters  of 
these  streams  make  navigation  by  small  boat  difficult  and  dangerous. 

The  only  feasible  land  route  for  summer  travel  up  the  east  side  of 
Susitna  Valley  has  been  along  the  flank  of  the  mountain  pass.  The 
Susitna  lowlands  contain  much  swampy  ground  and  dense  thickets  of 
brush,  so  that  very  great  difficulties  were  encountered  in  endeavoring 
to  travel  through  them  with  horses.  The  higher  parts  of  the  moun- 
tains are  much  too  rugged  to  permit  taking  horses  across  them  from 
one  east-west  valley  to  another,  so  that  a route  between  these  two 
extremes  must  be  chosen.  Two  such  routes  have  been  followed  with 
pack  trains  in  1906,  1916,  and  1917  by  Geological  Survey  parties  and 
present  no  insurmountable  difficulties.  Between  the  east-west  valleys 
the  broad,  timberless  benches  afford  good  footing,  and  trails  have 
been  cut  across  the  brushy  valley  slopes. 

In  1917  construction  work  on  the  Government  railroad  was  pushed 
rapidly,  and  by  the  fall  of  that  year  rails  were  laid  to  Montana  Creek 
and  the  grade  was  practically  complete  to  Talkeetna.  Trails  and 
wagon  roads  that  roughly  followed  the  railroad  survey  through  the 
lowlands  had  been  built,  and  thus  a route  of  great  natural  difficulty 
became  the  main  highway  of  travel.  Completion  of  the  railroad  to 
Talkeetna,  and  the  consequent  building  of  trails  and  wagon  roads  up 
the  main  valleys  leading  into  the  mountains,  should  within  a few 
years  make  the  whole  of  this  region  easy  of  access. 


192 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


VEGETATION. 

A sharp  contrast  exists  between  the  thick  timber  and  brush  of 
parts  of  the  lowland  areas  of  this  region  and  the  barren  slopes  of  the 
higher  mountains.  The  Susitna  lowland  is  thickly  wooded  with  trees 
wherever  the  ground  is  fairly  well  drained.  Thus  there  is  a heavy 
growth  of  cottonwood  and  spruce  along  the  banks  of  all  the  streams, 
and  of  spruce  and  birch  on  the  rolling  hills  of  the  lowland  and  the 
slopes  of  the  mountain  flanks.  Groves  of  cottonwood  trees,  many  of 
which  reach  a diameter  of  3 or  4 feet,  grow  in  favorable  localities  in 
the  stream  flats,  and  birch  and  spruce  trees  attain  2 feet  in  diameter 
on  the  slopes.  Within  the  lowland  area,  however,  there  are  many 
places  in  which  drainage  is  sluggish  and  which  are  characterized  by 
marshes,  entirely  barren  of  trees  or  containing  only  stunted,  scrubby 
spruce  trees.  The  same  distribution  of  thick  timber  interspersed 
with  areas  of  scattered  stunted  trees  and  barren  marshes  is  found  in 
the  valleys  of  the  tributary  streams.  Timber  line  has,  in  general,  an 
elevation  of  about  2,000  feet;  below  that  elevation  well-drained  lands 
are  timbered,  but  above  it  few  trees  grow.  Although,  locally,  cotton- 
wood and  spruce  trees  of  sufficient  size  to  furnish  saw  logs  are  found, 
the  timber  is  for  the  most  part  too  small  and  of  too  poor  quality  to 
supply  lumber  for  any  but  local  uses,  and  no  lumber  industry  of 
magnitude  is  likely  to  be  developed.  There  is  a possibility,  however, 
that  considerable  areas  of  cottonwood  and  spruce  that  lie  near  the 
largest  streams  will  sometime  furnish  materials  for  a wood-pulp 
industry. 

Within  the  timber  of  the  lowlands  there  is  commonly  a thick 
growth  of  willow  and  alder  brush,  and  these  bushes  grow  at  a con- 
siderably greater  elevation  than  the  trees,  so  that  there  is  generally 
a belt  of  thick  brush  above  timber  line.  The  brush  affords  fuel  for 
the  camper  at  many  places  where  trees  are  lacking,  but  the  dense 
growth  greatly  impedes  travel,  and  the  man  traveling  with  horses 
who  leaves  the  few  poorly  defined  trails  must  do  much  trail  chopping 
to  penetrate  the  thickets. 

Grass  for  forage  for  horses  is  abundant  throughout  the  region,  and 
camping  grounds  can  nearly  everywhere  be  found  where  horses  will 
obtain  sufficient  grass  for  their  needs.  A variety  of  grass  locally 
known  as  red  top  is  particularly  abundant  near  timber  line,  and  over 
large  areas  it  grows  in  thick  stands  to  a height  of  5 or  6 feet.  While 
green  it  furnishes  good  forage  for  stock,  but  upon  freezing  in  the  fall 
it  loses  its  nourishing  qualities.  An  even  better  forage  grass  known 
as  bunch  grass  occurs  in  places,  usually  above  timber  line. 

GAME. 

The  big-game  animals  of  this  region  include  moose,  caribou, 
sheep,  and  bear.  Moose  are  generally,  distributed  throughout  the 
lowlands  and  range  wherever  trees  and  brush  grow.  Caribou  range 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  193 

in  the  areas  above  timber  line,  particularly  in  the  northeast  part  of 
this  region,  although  they  are  nowhere  abundant.  The  white  big- 
horn sheep  is  found  in  the  highest  mountains,  particularly  in  the 
headward  basins  of  Sheep  River  and  Iron  Creek.  Black  bears  live 
in  and  near  timbered  areas,  and  brown  and  grizzly  bears  may  be 
seen  almost  anywhere,  as  they  range  the  higher  mountains  and  also 
visit  the  stream  valleys  during  the  salmon  run. 

Rabbits  and  ptarmigan  are  very  abundant  during  some  years, 
but  their  numbers  vary  greatly  from  season  to  season,  and  in  1917 
few  were  seen.  Some  fur-bearing  animals,  including  fox,  lynx, 
mink,  and  marten,  are  captured  each  winter.  Salmon  run  up 
Susitna  River  and  most  of  its  tributaries  to  spawn,  and  practically 
all  streams  not  clouded  with  glacial  silt  are  stocked  with  grayling 
and  trout. 

POPULATION. 

There  are  settlements  of  natives  at  Knik,  Susitna  station,  and 
Talkeetna,  and  from  these  villages  hunters  and  trappers  have  long 
made  expeditions  into  the  mountains  for  fur  and  meat,  yet  the 
visible  evidences  of  their  occupancy  are  meager.  The  Indian  trans- 
ports his  few  belongings  by  dog  sled  in  winter,  following  the  frozen 
streams,  and  in  summer  uses  a boat  or  loads  his  effects  upon  his 
dogs,  himself,  and  his  family.  He  chops  no  trail  but  makes  detours 
around  obstructions,  and  his  trails  are  of  little  use  to  the  white  man 
who  travels  with  horses. 

Only  within  the  last  year  or  two  have  there  been  any  permanent 
white  inhabitants  in  the  mountainous  portions  of  this  region.  A 
single  group  of  claims  was  staked  on  Iron  Creek  in  1910  and  has 
been  visited  yearly  by  the  owners  since  that  time,  but  no  permanent 
buildings  were  constructed,  and  the  only  white  visitors  to  the  moun- 
tains were  a few  prospectors  and  trappers.  Within  the  last  few 
years,  however,  many  mining  claims  have  been  located  in  the  Iron 
Creek  basin,  and  some  prospects  are  known  in  Montana,  Kashwitna, 
Peters,  and  Purches  basins.  Some  log  cabins  have  been  constructed, 
and  the  number  of  permanent  residents  will  increase  as  railroad 
construction  stimulates  prospecting  and  mining. 

Susitna  station  has  long  been  a permanent  settlement  of  whites 
and  natives.  Talkeetna  has  had  white  inhabitants  at  intervals  and 
is  now  an  established  village. 

Since  1915,  the  development  of  an  agricultural  population  around 
Knik  Arm  and  in  Matanuska  Valley  has  proceeded  rapidly,  and  in 
1917  a large  quantity  of  agricultural  produce  was  raised  there.  Un- 
doubtedly this  development  will  extend  up  Susitna  Valley,  where 
much  land  has  farming  possibilities,  and  a gradually  increasing 
agricultural  population  may  be  expected  in  this  region. 


194  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

GENERAL  GEOLOGY. 

CHARACTER  OF  THE  ROCKS. 

The  striking  feature  that  at  once  becomes  apparent  on  inspection 
of  the  geologic  map  of  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains  is  the  great 
predominance  of  igneous  materials  over  sedimentary  rocks.  Great 
areas  of  deep-seated  granitic  intrusives,  older  deformed  lava  flows, 
and  little-disturbed  Tertiary  lavas  occupy  almost  all  the  region  in 
which  the  hard  rocks  are  exposed,  and  the  granitic  rocks  and  older 
lavas  doubtless  extend  westward  beneath  the  mantle  of  uncon- 
solidated materials.  Except  for  a narrow  and  interrupted  belt  of 
sediments  that  crosses  the  basins  of  Sheep  River  and  Iron  Creek 
and  a few  isolated  outliers  of  this  group  of  sediments,  with  some 
materials  of  sedimentary  origin  intimately  intruded  by  granitic 
rocks  in  the  area  between  lower  Sheep  River  and  Iron  Creek,  the 
entire  western  Talkeetna  Mountains  are  composed  of  igneous  mate- 
rials. As  has  already  been  stated,  the  areal  geologic  mapping  of 
this  whole  region  was  done  hastily,  for  the  prime  object  of  the 
writer’s  visit  to  the  Susitna  basin  was  the  investigation  of  the  min- 
eral resources  of  several  widely  separated  localities.  Time  was 
therefore  lacking  for  a careful  tracing  of  the  contacts  between  the 
formations,  and  more  careful  and  painstaking  work  probably  will 
make  considerable  modifications  in  the  geologic  boundaries  as  here 
given.  It  is  believed,  however,  that  the  general  outlines  of  the 
areas  occupied  by  the  different  rock  types  are  shown  in  approxi- 
mately their  proper  position. 

In  many  areas  sedimentary  rocks  that  contain  determinable  fos- 
sils give  the  geologist  certain  tie  points  from  which  he  can  draw  con- 
clusions as  to  the  age  of  the  rock  formations  with  which  he  deals. 
In  this  region,  however,  no  fossils  have  been  found.  The  few  sedi- 
mentary rocks  examined  are  highly  metamorphic,  and  this  meta- 
morphism included  deformation  and  recrystallization,  so  that  any 
fossils  which  the  rocks  may  have  once  contained  have  been  largely 
or  completely  destroyed.  By  their  very  nature  the  igneous  rocks 
are  unlikely  to  contain  recognizable  organic  remains,  so  the  age  de- 
termination of  the  rocks  in  this  area  must  be  inferred  from  their  cor- 
relation, upon  lithologic  or  structural  grounds,  with  other  formations 
in  surrounding  regions  where  more  satisfactory  age  determinations 
have  been  made. 

MICA  SCHIST. 

The  oldest  rocks  known  within  the  Talkeetna  Mountain  area  are 
the  mica  schists  that  occur  on  the  south  flank  of  the  Willow  Creek 
basin.  These  schists  have  been  described  elsewhere1  and  are  not 

1 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Willow  Creek  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  607,  pp.  26-30,  1915. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  195 

known  to  occur  in  the  region  here  discussed,  but  it  is  of  interest  to 
note  that  they  are  of  pre- Jurassic  age  and  constitute  one  of  the 
formations  into  which  the  granitic  materials  were  intruded. 

LIMESTONES,  MARBLES,  SHALES,  SLATES,  AND  QUARTZITIC 

SEDIMENTS. 

As  shown  on  the  geologic  map  (PL  IV)  a narrow  and  interrupted 
belt  of  sediments  occurs  at  the  contact  of  the  granitic  rocks  with 
the  andesite-greenstones  in  the  basins  of  Iron  Creek  and  Sheep 
River.  Small  outlying  patches  of  these  sediments  also  occur  both 
in  the  granitic  rocks  and  in  the  andesite.  The  most  conspicuous 
member  of  the  group  of  sediments  is  a heavy  bed  of  blue-gray  lime- 
stone that  forms  prominent  cliffs  on  the  north  side  of  Iron  Creek,  on 
the  Middle  Fork  of  Iron  Creek,  and  at  the  head  of  Prospect  Creek. 
It  has  in  places  a thickness  of  at  least  600  feet  and  from  a distance 
appears  to  be  massive.  Close  examination,  however,  shows  that 
the  rock  has  been  greatly  sheared  and  in  part  recrystallized.  Upon 
weathering  it  breaks  down  into  small  prismatic  bits  and  is  seamed 
with  thin  films  of  calcite  along  the  lines  of  cleavage.  Within  the 
limestone  there  are  local  masses  of  completely  recrystallized  mate- 
rial that  now  appears  as  beautiful  pure-white  marble.  Associated 
with  the  limestone  and  overlying  it  there  is  in  places  a considerable 
thickness  of  shales,  slates,  and  quartzitic  beds  that  represent  meta- 
morphosed clastic  materials. 

A few  miles  south  of  Sheep  River  this  group  of  sediments  occurs 
in  a narrow  northeast-southwest  belt.  There  the  limestones  have 
been  completely  altered  to  white  and  green  contorted  and  banded 
marble,  and  the  clastic  beds  to  siliceous  schists  and  quartzites. 
Fossils  have  nowhere  been  found  in  these  sediments,  and  their  age 
is  not  definitely  known,  but  from  a somewhat  similar  association  of 
limestones,  shales,  and  lava  flows  in  the  upper  Chulitna  region,  where 
the  limestones  are  of  Triassic  age,  it  is  suggested  that  the  sediments 
here  described  may  prove  to  be  Triassic. 

ANDE  SITE-GREENSTONE  S. 

A considerable  belt  of  territory,  extending  from  the  basin  of  Iron 
Creek  southward  to  the  basins  of  Montana  Creek  and  Kashwitna 
River,  is  occupied  mainly  by  lava  flows  that  are  dominantly  andesite- 
greenstones.  These  rocks  are  bordered  on  the  southeast  in  part  by 
the  series  of  limestones,  marbles,  and  associated  sediments  and  in 
part  by  an  intrusive  contact  with  the  granitic  rocks.  The  northwest 
border  of  the  andesite-greenstones  has  not  been  carefully  traced  out 
but  is  believed  to  be  an  intrusive  contact  with  granitic  materials. 
The  characteristic  phase  of  this  material  consists  of  a medium- 
grained blue-gray  or  greenish-gray  rock  full  of  amygdules  filled  with 


196  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

greenish-yellow  epidote.  The  epidote  commonly  displays  a radial, 
spherulitic  structure.  Associated  with  the  amygdaloidal  rocks  that 
were  poured  out  as  lava  flows  are  local  bodies  of  somewhat  coarser 
grained  dark-gray  or  black  greenstones  that  probably  represent  an 
intrusive  phase  of  the  same  period  of  igneous  activity  and  may  mark 
the  location  of  vents  through  which  the  lavas  reached  the  surface. 
The  andesite-greenstones  are  of  especial  economic  importance  in  the 
Iron  Creek  district,  for  it  is  in  those  rocks  that  the  copper  prospects 
of  that  basin  have  been  found.  Structurally  the  andesite-greenstones 
overlie  the  limestones,  marbles,  and  associated  sediments.  Paige  1 
has  described  similar  rocks,  associated  with  abundant  dacites,  rhyolites, 
and  tuffs,  that  occupy  a large  area  in  the  upper  Talkeetna  basin. 
The  area  here  shown  (PL  IV)  as  occupied  by  andesite-greenstones 
is  directly  connected  both  to  the  northeast  and  southwest  with  the 
areas  mapped  by  Paige.  No  definite  evidence  of  the  age  of  the 
greenstones  was  procured  by  the  writer  in  1917,  but  in  the  exten- 
sions of  this  area,  in  the  upper  Talkeetna  basin,  Paige  obtained 
evidence  that  led  him  to  classify  the  rocks  as  lower  Middle 
Jurassic,  and  that  age  determination  was  later  modified  to  Lower 
Jurassic. 

GRANITIC  ROCKS. 

The  dominant  geologic  feature  of  the  Talkeetna  Mountains  is  the 
great  mass  of  granitic  intrusive  rocks  that  occupies  a large  portion  of 
this  region.  These  rocks  form  a main  roughly  circular  area,  measuring 
about  50  miles  in  diameter,  and  some  smaller  areas  around  the 
periphery  of  the  central  mass.  The  largest  of  these  smaller  areas 
lies  for  the  most  part  in  the  lower  Talkeetna  basin  and  measures  at 
least  12  by  15  miles.  As  shown  on  the  map  (PI.  IV),  the  higher 
portions  of  this  mountain  mass  are  composed  exclusively  of  granitic 
materials,  and  the  rugged  character  of  the  mountain  peaks,  with 
their  multitudes  of  ragged  pinnacles  and  serrate  ridges,  is  due  to  the 
influence  that  this  rock  type  has  exerted  upon  the  forms  produced 
by  erosion. 

The  granitic  rocks  are  in  general  coarse-grained  gray  to  pink 
diorites  and  granites  and  show  a considerable  range  in  texture  and 
composition.  Throughout  most  of  the  area  in  which  they  occur  they 
are  massive,  little  altered,  and  free  from  the  effects  of  metamorphism. 
In  some  localities,  however,  they  have  been  metamorphosed  and  show 
all  gradations  from  unaltered  massive  materials  through  banded 
gneisses  to  hornblende  schists.  Within  those  areas  in  which  meta- 
morphism has  occurred  there  is  a larger  proportion  of  dark  liorn- 
blendic  rocks. 


1 Paige,  Sidney,  and  Knopf,  Adolph,  Geologic  reconnaissance  in  the  Matanuska  and  Talkeetna  basins, 
Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  327,  pp.  16-19,  1907. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  197 

Structurally  the  granitic  materials  are  found  in  intrusive  contact 
with  the  mica  schists  of  the  Willow  Creek  district,  with  the  limestones 
and  shales  of  Sheep  River  and  Iron  Creek  basins,  and  with  the  andesite- 
greenstones  of  those  areas.  They  are  therefore  younger  than  all 
those  formations.  They  are  unconformably  overlain  by  the  Tertiary 
lavas  of  upper  Iron  Creek  and  by  the  early  Tertiary  sediments  of  the 
lower  Matanuska  basin  and  so  are  known  to  be  pre-Tertiary.  The 
evidence  is  still  insufficient  to  prove  their  exact  age,  but  there  seems 
to  be  little  doubt  that  they  are  Mesozoic,  and  although  they  have 
generally  been  referred  to  the  Middle  Jurassic  are  now  believed  to 
be  of  Lower  Jurassic  age. 

TERTIARY  SEDIMENTS. 

Tertiary  sediments,  including  arkoses,  conglomerates,  sands,  shales; 
and  lignitic  coal,  occur  at  many  localities  around  the  borders  of  the 
Susitna  basin.  In  general  the  outcrops  occur  along  the  flanks  of  the 
surrounding  mountains  or  as  isolated  areas  in  which  the  Tertiary  beds 
are  surrounded  by  later  unconsolidated  materials  and  for  the  most 
part  covered  by  them.  The  area  of  Tertiary  deposits  shown  on  the 
map  (PI.  IV)  is  small,  but  the  economic  value  of  the  formation  is 
disproportionate  to  its  area,  for  the  lignitic  coal  beds  that  are  present 
in  many  places  offer  possibilities  of  the  development  of  a valuable 
fuel  supply.  The  best-known  occurrence  of  this  formation  is  in  the 
Matanuska  Valley,  where  a considerable  area  is  underlain  by  workable 
coal  beds.  Farther  west  and  north  the  beds  are  less  conspicuous, 
and  their  distribution  is  not  so  well  known.  On  the  south  flank  of 
the  Bald  Mountain  ridge,  which  separates  the  Willow  Creek  basin 
from  the  eastward-trending  portion  of  Little  Susitna  River  valley, 
there  is  a large  area  of  arkoses  and  conglomerates  of  Tertiary  age 
which  contains  no  lignite  beds  that  are  known  to  be  extensive.  An 
excavation  on  the  railroad  line,  in  the  spring  of  1917,  2 miles  west  of 
the  Little  Susitna  bridge,  showed  Tertiary  beds,  and  in  the  summer 
of  that  year  it  was  reported  that  a lignite  bed  was  uncovered  there. 
Lignite-bearing  Tertiary  beds  are  reported  on  the  west  flank  of  the 
Talkeetna  Mountains  in  the  basins  of  Willow  Creek  and  Kashwitna 
River,  but  these  localities  were  not  visited,  and  the  area  and  thickness 
of  the  formation  are  not  known. 

Similarly  unconsolidated  Tertiary  sands  and  shales,  which  contain 
a thick  lignite  bed,  are  reported  on  lower  Chunilna  Creek,  a southward- 
flowing tributary  of  Talkeetna  River,  4 miles  above  its  mouth.  What 
is  probably  the  western  extension  of  that  same  field  lies  along  the 
east  bank  of  Susitna  River,  from  7 to  12  miles  above  the  mouth  of  the 
Talkeetna,  and  was  briefly  examined.  In  that  locality,  a distance  of 
several  miles,  the  river  flows  against  a bluff  composed  of  blue-gray 
sands,  blue  clays,  a little  sandstone,  and  some  lignite.  Good  exposures 


198 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


of  undisturbed  material  are  scarce,  and  above  the  bluff  the  surface  is 
covered  by  younger  unconsolidated  deposits.  A 2-foot  bed  of  fairly 
good  lignite  was  seen,  and  scattered  detrital  materials  indicate  that 
other  lignite  beds  occur  in  the  same  section.  It  is  reported  that  at 
one  locality  a 4-foot  bed  is  exposed,  and  the  coal-bearing  area  is  said 
to  extend  to  the  west  side  of  the  river.  The  coal-bearing  beds  are 
believed  to  be  of  Eocene  age. 

TERTIARY  LAVAS. 

The  deposition  of  the  Tertiary  sediments  was  interrupted  from 
time  to  time  by  the  ejection  of  basaltic  lavas,  and  a large  volume  of 
this  material  was  poured  out  after  the  last  of  the  Tertiary  sediments 
were  laid  down.  Thus,  in  the  Willow  Creek  district  thin  basal  flows 
are  conformably  interbedded  with  Tertiary  arkoses.  The  greatest 
development  of  these  lavas,  however,  took  place  somewhat  later, 
when  large  areas,  including  most  of  the  earlier  formations,  were 
buried  beneath  extensive  flows  of  basalt.  These  lavas  reach  their 
greatest  development,  in  the  area  here  discussed,  in  the  upper  basin 
of  Iron  Creek,  where  they  form  a nearly  horizontal  capping  over 
many  ridges  and  lie  upon  an  erosion  surface  that  was  developed  on 
both  granitic  rocks  and  greenstones.  The  basalt  flows  are  of  Tertiary 
age.  Some  are  apparently  Eocene,  but  for  the  most  part  they  are 
believed  to  be  post-Eocene. 

UNCONSOLIDATED  DEPOSITS. 

The  unconsolidated  deposits  include  glacial  morainal  materials, 
glacial  outwash  gravels  of  both  present  and  past  glaciers,  and  the 
detrital  materials  of  the  present  stream  flats.  As  the  earlier  glaciers 
reached  so  great  a development  in  this  region,  filling  the  Susitna 
basin  to  a height  of  over  4,000  feet  and  completely  covering  all  the 
lower  slopes  of  the  mountains,  the  deposits  left  by  them  cover  a large 
area  and  have  a considerable  vertical  range.  On  the  map  (PI.  IV) 
the  distribution  of  those  materials  is  shown  only  in  the  localities 
where  they  are  present  in  sufficient  thickness  to  conceal  the  identity 
of  the  underlying  formations.  Glacial  materials  have  been  recog- 
nized over  a much  wider  area,  but  in  places  where  the  area  and  thick- 
ness of  the  material  are  small  and  where  the  character  of  the  underlying 
rocks  could  be  determined  with  little  uncertainty  the  glacial  materials 
were  not  shown  on  the  map.  During  the  withdrawal  of  the  old 
glaciers  large  volumes  of  outwash  gravels  and  sands  were  deposited 
over  the  lowlands,  and  these  materials  are  still  present  in  the  form  of 
gravel  plains,  locally  dissected  by  the  streams  to  form  benches  or 
terraces.  The  gravels  along  the  flood  plains  of  the  present  streams 
are  composed  both  of  the  outwash  from  the  present  glaciers  and  of 
the  products  of  normal  weathering  and  erosion  by  streams. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  199 

ECONOMIC  GEOLOGY. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

The  first  discovery  of  valuable  mineral  deposits  in  this  general 
region  was  made  in  1897,  when  gold  placer  gravels  were  found  in  the 
Willow  Creek  basin.  The  area  of  workable  gold  placer  deposits 
proved  to  be  small,  but  their  discovery  led  to  prospecting  for  the 
lodes  from  which  the  gold  came,  which  resulted  in  the  finding,  in  1906, 
of  the  lode  on  which  the  Alaska  Free  Gold  mine  is  located.  This 
discovery  was  soon  followed  by  others,  and  a permanent  gold  lode 
camp,  which  had  produced  over  $1,000,000  by  the  end  of  1916,  was 
established.  All  the  producing  mines  in  this  district  are  confined 
within  a small  area,  but  there  has  been  more  or  less  consistent  pros- 
pecting in  the  mountains  north  of  the  producing  area,  and  some 
promising  gold  lodes  have  been  discovered  but  await  improved  trans- 
portation for  further  development. 

In  1910  claims  were  staked  on  the  Copper  Queen  lode,  on  Iron 
Creek,  and  assessment  work  has  been  done  on  that  property  each  year 
since.  By  1916  it  became  apparent  that  rail  transportation  up 
Susitna  Valley  was  soon  to  be  realized,  and  a number  of  men  went 
into  the  basin  of  Iron  Creek,  and  many  claims  were  staked  on  copper 
and  gold  bearing  lodes,  and  the  activity  was  continued  in  1917.  More 
or  less  work  was  done  on  15  or  20  groups  of  claims,  and  a large  num- 
ber of  additional  claims  were  staked.  In  August,  1917,  about  20  men 
were  prospecting  or  carrying  on  development  work  in  the  Iron  Creek 
basin. 

At  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit,  in  August,  1917,  the  Iron  Creek 
district  could  be  reached  only  by  a poor  trail  that  offered  difficulties 
even  for  a pack  horse.  Supplies  for  the  prospectors  were  therefore 
limited  to  articles  that  had  been  brought  in  by  sled  during  the  pre- 
ceding winter  or  to  such  materials  as  could  be  transported  during 
the  summer  by  pack  horse.  As  a consequence  of  the  remoteness  of 
the  district  only  the  simplest  forms  of  prospecting  were  carried  out 
and  even  a small  amount  of  development  work  demanded  a large 
outlay  of  time  and  money.  The  ore  bodies  are  opened  only  by  rather 
shallow  open  cuts,  and  no  attempt  has  been  made  to  sink  shafts  or 
drive  tunnels.  In  many  places,  too,  the  undisturbed  bedrock  near 
the  ore  outcrops  is  covered  with  vegetation  or  loose  surficial  material, 
so  that  it  was  difficult  or  impossible  to  determine  either  the  size  or 
the  geologic  relations  of  the  ore  bodies.  No  property  in  the  dis- 
trict had  at  that  time  any  mass  of  ore  which  a conservative  mining 
engineer  would  consider  as  being  blocked  out. 

The  prospects  examined  were  believed  to  be  valuable  for  their 
content  of  copper  or  of  copper  and  gold.  Most  of  the  ore  bodies  are 
due  to  the  replacement,  along  zones  of  faulting  and  shearing,  of 


200 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


andesite-greenstone  by  metallic  minerals,  but  one  or  two  have  some 
of  the  aspects  of  contact-metamorphic  deposits,  though  they  lie  at 
some  distance  from  the  contact  of  the  diorite  and  greenstone.  So  far 
as  is  known  the  content  of  the  ores  in  free  gold  is  not  sufficient  to 
justify  the  installation  of  crushing  and  amalgamating  machinery  on 
the  ground.  The  base  character  of  the  ore  will  necessitate  smelting 
for  the  recovery  of  the  copper  and  gold.  Furthermore,  the  ores  con- 
tain large  amounts  of  metallic  minerals  in  addition  to  those  which 
carry  the  copper  and  gold,  so  that  concentration,  to  reduce  the  weight 
and  bulk  of  the  ores  shipped,  is  likely  to  offer  difficulties.  Locally 
there  are  bodies  of  nearly  pure  copper  sulphides  that  need  little 
concentration,  but  no  large  bodies  of  ore  of  this  type  have  been 
developed,  and  the  properties  that  develop  into  mines  will  probably 
prove  to  contain  large  bodies  of  ore  of  moderate  richness.  The 
imperative  need  of  a mining  camp  of  this  type  is  therefore  cheap 
transportation,  and  that  can  be  obtained  for  this  camp  only  by  the 
construction  of  a branch  line  of  the  Government  railroad  either  up 
Talkeetna  River  and  Iron  Creek,  or  up  the  Talkeetna  to  Sheep  River 
and  up  that  stream  to  and  through  the  divide  at  Rainbow  Lake  and 
thence  to  the  vicinity  of  the  junction  of  the  main  forks  of  Iron  Creek. 

PROSPECTS. 

The  following  descriptions  of  prospects  are  based  on  observations 
made  in  August,  1917.  An  attempt  was  made  to  visit  all  those 
properties  on  which  any  considerable  amount  of  development  work 
had  been  done  or  on  which  the  owners  were  at  work  at  the  time  of 
the  writer’s  visit.  The  properties  visited  are  described  in  order,  from 
west  to  east.  A large  number  of  claims  have  been  staked  in  the  dis- 
trict on  which  little  work  has  been  done,  and  time  was  not  available 
to  visit  all  of  these. 

COPPER  QUEEN  GROUP. 

The  Copper  Queen  group  includes  two  claims  that  lie  on  the  north 
side  of  Iron  Creek,  2 miles  below  the  mouth  of  East  Fork.  These 
claims  were  staked  in  1910  by  A.  O.  Wells,  Frank  Wells,  and  John 
Coffee  and  cover  the  first  lode  discovery  in  the  Iron  Creek  district. 
The  ore  body  lies  in  a rock  bluff  on  the  bank  of  Iron  Creek,  and  all  the 
work  done  on  it  is  in  the  valley  bottom.  Developments  have  been 
confined  to  stripping  the  vegetation  from  the  ore  body  and  to  the 
excavation  of  a shallow  open  cut.  The  country  rock  is  an  amygda- 
loidal  andesite-greenstone,  in  which  the  amygdules  are  filled  with 
greenish-yellow  epidote.  The  ore  body,  which  lies  along  a zone  of 
shearing  and  crushing  that  strikes  N.  10°  E.  and  stands  nearly  verti- 
cal, has  been  formed  by  the  replacement  of  the  sheared  andesite.  In 
the  open  cut  this  sheared  zone  is  heavily  mineralized  throughout  a 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  201 

width  of  21  feet  across  the  strike,  though  within  that  distance  there 
are  many  large  lenticular  horses  of  nearly  barren  country  rock. 
Pyrite,  arsenopyrite,  and  chalcopyrite  are  the  common  metallic 
minerals  and  occur  as  nearly  pure  masses  of  one  or  the  other  of  these 
sulphides  or  intimately  intergrown  with  one  another.  The  ore  is 
generally  banded  parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  shear  zone  and  in 
places  consists  of  parallel  alternating  bands  of  country  rock,  pyrite, 
and  chalcopyrite.  Some  quartz  is  present  in  the  ore  as  gangue  but 
is  not  abundant.  Scattered  specks  and  blotches  of  sulphides  occur 
both  in  the  horses  within  the  ore  body  and  in  the  wall  rock  for  some 
distance  back  from  the  zone  of  shearing.  The  owners  report  that  this 
ore  body  is  valuable  for  its  gold  as  well  as  its  copper  content,  picked 
samples  having  shown  upon  assay  several  dollars  a ton  in  gold,  in 
addition  to  the  copper. 

COPPER  KING  GROUP. 

The  Copper  King  group  comprises  six  claims  that  lie  on  the  south 
valley  wall  of  Iron  Creek  opposite  the  mouth  of  East  Fork.  The 
principal  workings  lie  at  an  elevation  of  about  3,300  feet,  1,500  feet 
above  the  valley  bottom.  Development  work  on  the  property  has 
been  directed  to  the  excavation  of  a large  number  of  trenches  and 
open  cuts  in  the  attempt  to  demonstrate  the  presence  of  a long  con- 
tinuous ore  body.  These  open  cuts  show  that  the  andesite-greenstone 
country  rock  is  cut  by  a shear  zone  that  strikes  northeast  and  dips 
about  60°  E.,  in  which  the  sheared  material  has  been  replaced  in  part 
by  metallic  minerals  and  some  quartz.  The  shear  ranges  from  6 to  20 
feet  in  width,  and  the  degree  of  replacement  of  the  sheared  andesite- 
greenstone  differs  greatly  from  place  to  place.  The  best  showing  of 
ore  was  in  a large  open  cut  that  had  been  excavated  down  to  undis- 
turbed bedrock.  In  this  cut,  through  a width  of  9 feet  across  the 
strike  of  the  shear  zone,  abundant  chalcopyrite  and  specular  hematite 
with  some  pyrite  and  a little  quartz  were  exposed.  The  ore  is  banded 
parallel  to  the  direction  of  the  shear  zone  and  consists  of  alternating 
bands  of  nearly  pure  chalcopyrite,  specular  hematite  intergrown  with 
quartz,  and  pyrite.  The  individual  bands  are  more  or  less  discon- 
tinuous, and  the  characteristic  mineral  of  one  band  may  be  present  in 
small  amounts  in  the  other  bands.  Another  cut  near  by  shows 
several  feet  of  nearly  pure  hematite  with  only  small  amounts  of 
sulphides.  Locally  some  quartz  is  present  in  the  shear  zone  in  small 
distinct  veins.  The  ore  from  this  group  of  claims  is  said  to  carry 
only  small  amounts  of  gold  and  silver. 

COPPER  WONDER  GROUP. 

The  Copper  Wonder  group  comprises  seven  claims  that  lie  on  the 
south  slope  of  the  Iron  Creek  valley,  south  of  the  mouth  of  Middle 
Fork.  These  claims  were  first  staked  in  June,  1917,  and  the  only 


202 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


development  work  done  by  August  of  that  year  was  the  excavation 
of  three  open  cuts  in  the  bluffs  of  Alder  Gulch,  at  an  elevation  of 
about  2;500  feet.  These  cuts  show  a zone  of  strong  shearing  in 
andesite-greenstone  country  rock,  but  the  ground  has  been  much 
disturbed,  and  in  the  shallow  excavation  the  strike  and  dip  of  the 
shear  zone  could  not  be  definitely  determined.  In  the  larger  open 
cut  the  andesite-greenstone  is  seen  to  be  much  altered  along  the  shear 
zone,  in  which  there  is  a heavy  deposit  of  specular  hematite,  together 
with  some  pyrite  and  bunches  of  chalcopyrite  as  large  as  one’s  fist. 
A little  quartz  was  also  noted  as  a gangue  mineral.  The  hematite 
has  a thickness  of  2 to  3 feet  through  an  exposed  vertical  distance  of 
20  feet,  and  there  is  considerable  copper  carbonate  stain  in  the  altered 
shear-zone  material.  Scattered  specks  of  sulphides  were  ^een  in  the 
andesite  country  rock  outside  of  the  shear  zone. 

PHOENIX  GROUP. 

The  Phoenix  group  includes  three  claims  on  Hyphen  Gulch,  a small 
tributary  of  Iron  Creek  from  the  northeast,  a little  more  than  a mile 
above  the  mouth  of  Middle  Fork.  The  only  locality  at  which  any 
noteworthy  excavation  had  been  made  was  at  an  elevation  of  3,600 
feet,  where  an  open  cut  showed  a small  shear  zone,  2 to  3 inches  wide, 
in  andesite-greenstone.  This  shear  zone,  or  line  of  faulting,  strikes 
S.  30°  W.  and  dips  65°  NW.  and  contains  gouge  and  decomposed 
materials  with  a little  quartz  and  some  copper  carbonate  stains.  The 
andesite-greenstone  wall  rock  is,  however,  much  stained  with  copper 
carbonate  and  has  locally  been  partly  replaced  by  chalcopyrite, 
bornite,  specular  hematite,  and  quartz.  The  bornite  is  closely  associ- 
ated with  chalcopyrite  and  is  apparently  a surface  occurrence  only,  for 
a shallow  excavation  made  at  the  best  showing  of  bornite  showed  little 
bornite  at  a depth  of  a few  feet  below  the  surface  but  an  increasing 
abundance  of  chalcopyrite.  A number  of  narrow  veins  of  nearly 
pure  hematite  with  little  associated  sulphides  have  been  found  on 
this  property. 

BLUE  LODE  GROUP. 

The  Blue  Lode  group  of  five  claims  lies  on  the  south  side  of  the 
valley  of  Middle  Fork  of  Iron  Creek,  about  2 \ miles  above  the  mouth 
of  that  stream  and  1 mile  northeast  of  the  Phoenix  group.  The 
principal  excavation  is  at  an  elevation  of  4,200  feet,  where  a large 
open  cut  has  been  made  along  a fault  or  shear  zone  about  2 feet  wide 
that  strikes  N.  16°  E.  and  dips  80°  W.  This  zone  is  filled  with  gouge, 
fine  crushed  and  decomposed  material,  and  some  quartz  that  contains 
chalcopyrite.  The  wall  rock  of  this  shear  zone  is  andesite-greenstone, 
which  has  locally  been  replaced  by  specks  and  bunches  of  bornite  and 
chalcopyrite.  An  andesite-greenstone  cliff  above  the  excavation 
shows  abundant  stains  of  azurite  and  malachite.  Broken  surfaces  of 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  203 

the  surface  wall  rock  show  bornite  and  chalcopyrite  intimately  inter- 
mingled, but  a few  feet  below  the  surface  the  bornite  becomes  rela- 
tively scarce  and  chalcopyrite  predominates,  suggesting  that  the 
bornite  occupies  only  a shallow  zone  of  enrichment  and  that  at  greater 
depth  the  chalcopyrite  will  prove  to  be  the  prevailing  sulphide. 
Another  open  cut  farther  down  the  mountain  shows  chalcopyrite  but 
no  bornite.  This  property  was  staked  only  a few  weeks  before  it  was 
visited,  and  too  little  development  work  had  been  done  to  determine 
either  the  size  of  the  ore  body  or  its  character  at  depth. 

EAST  VIEW  GROUP. 

The  Eastview  group  of  two  claims  lies  in  the  basin  of  Middle  Fork 
of  Iron  Creek  half  a mile  southeast  of  the  Blue  Lode  group  and  about 
the  same  distance  northeast  of  the  Phoenix,  at  an  elevation  of  4,500 
feet.  The  country  rock  is  andesite-greenstone,  and  the  workings 
include  three  open  cuts,  from  which  have  been  taken  large  lumps  of 
banded  quartz,  hematite,  and  chalcopyrite.  In  these  lumps  of  ore 
chalcopyrite  is  locally  abundant,  but  as  none  of  the  cuts  had  been 
carried  down  to  undisturbed  bedrock  at  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit, 
no  ore  in  place  was  seen,  and  nothing  is  definitely  known  about  the 
size  or  position  of  the  ore  body. 


TALKEETNA  GROUP. 

The  Talkeetna  group  of  nine  claims  lies  in  the  valley  of  Prospect 
Creek,  about  2 miles  above  the  mouth  of  that  stream.  The  claims 
were  staked  in  the  spring  of  1916,  and  their  exploration  and  develop- 
ment have  been  limited  to  strippings  and  open  cuts  made  in  the  en- 
deavor to  show  the  character  of  the  ore  in  place.  At  the  time  of  the 
writer’s  visit  eight  men  were  employed  on  this  property.  The  main 
ore  body  is  on  the  claim  known  as  Talkeetna  No.  2,  where  an  exten- 
sive gossan  on  the  steep  mountain  slope,  at  an  elevation  of  4,200 
feet,  renders  the  ore  deposit  conspicuous  from  a distance.  A number 
of  trenches  and  open  cuts  have  been  excavated  through  this  gossan, 
but  these  have  been  made  for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the  char- 
acter of  the  unoxidized  ore  body,  and  no  consistent  effort  has  been 
made  to  outline  the  area  of  mineralization  or  to  determine  its  struc- 
ture and  relations.  The  country  rock  is  an  amygdaloidal  andesite- 
greenstone,  and  the  amygdules  are  filled  with  epidote.  This  green- 
stone is  cut  by  a shear  zone  that  strikes  approximately  east  and  west 
and  dips  75°  N.  The  shear  zone  has  acted  as  a channel  for  the  cir- 
culation of  mineralizing  solutions,  and  the  sheared  material,  as  well 
as  the  massive  wall  rocks,  have  been  in  part  replaced  by  specular 
hematite,  chalcopyrite,  pyrite,  and  quartz.  The  area  of  heavy  min- 
eralization, as  well  as  could  be  determined  from  the  workings,  is 
several  hundred  feet  long  and  is  locally  at  least  30  feet  thick.  Its 


204 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


long  dimension  is  parallel  to  the  strike  of  the  shear  zone,  which  itself 
lies  almost  parallel  to  the  steep  mountain  face,  so  that  the  ore  is 
exposed  on  the  surface  through  a vertical  distance  of  at  least  50  feet. 
The  gossan  is  only  a few  feet  thick  and  is  abundantly  stained  with 
copper  carbonate. 

Specular  hematite  is  by  far  the  most  abundant  metallic  mineral  and 
occurs  in  massive  aggregates  many  feet  thick,  in  which  the  only  other 
conspicuous  mineral  is  granular  quartz  that  is  intimately  intergrown 
with  the  hematite.  Another  abundant  type  of  ore  consists  of  an  inter- 
grown aggregate  of  hematite,  chalcopyrite,  and  quartz  that  forms  the 
matrix  of  a breccia  and  surrounds  angular  fragments  of  andesite- 
greenstone,  themselves  partly  replaced  by  iron  and  copper  minerals. 
Elsewhere  the  ore  consists  of  sheared  and  schistose  andesite-green- 
stone largely  replaced  by  metallic  minerals,  which  is  banded  with 
small  quartz  veinlets  that  include  the  same  minerals — pyrite,  chalco- 
pyrite, and  hematite.  Veinlets  of  ore  shoot  off  from  the  main  ore 
body  into  the  country  rock,  and  sulphides  and  hematite  are  widely 
disseminated  in  the  country  rock  for  some  distance  on  both  sides  of 
the  shear  zone.  These  claims  are  being  prospected  as  a source  of 
copper,  and  a large  amount  of  work  must  be  done  before  a proper 
estimate  can  be  made  of  the  amount  of  copper  ore  of  any  particular 
grade  that  is  available.  The  principal  copper  mineral,  chalcopyrite, 
differs  greatly  in  abundance  from  place  to  place  within  the  ore  body. 
Locally  hematite  is  present  to  the  almost  complete  exclusion  of  the 
sulphides.  Elsewhere  chalcopyrite  forms  the  bulk  of  the  ore.  In 
some  places  the  chalcopyrite  crystals  are  surrounded  by  a thin  zone 
of  hematite  and  that  by  quartz.  It  is  reported  that  assays  show 
from  less  than  1 per  cent  to  8 per  cent  of  copper  and  small  amounts 
of  gold  and  silver.  Underground  exploration  alone  can  determine 
the  character  and  metallic  content  of  this  ore  body  with  depth,  but 
the  great  size  of  the  deposit  may  make  possible  the  development  of  a 
mine  even  with  a comparatively  low  grade  of  ore. 

Shallow  excavations  have  been  made  on  croppings  of  metallic  min- 
erals on  claims  No.  3 and  No.  7 of  this  same  group,  on  the  north  side 
of  Prospect  Creek,  where  a number  of  open  cuts,  for  the  most  part 
shallow  and  in  disturbed  ground,  show  similar  ores,  which  have  the 
same  association  of  pyrite,  hematite,  and  chalcopyrite. 

OTHER  PROSPECTS. 

A number  of  claims,  or  groups  of  claims,  in  addition  to  those  de- 
scribed above,  have  been  staked  in  the  basin  of  Iron  Creek,  but  on 
most  of  them  little  development  work  had  been  done,  and  the  restric- 
tions of  time  imposed  upon  the  writer  made  it  possible  to  visit  only 
those  properties  that  had  been  furthest  developed.  The  location  of 
many  of  these  groups  is  shown  on  the  accompanying  map  (PI.  IV). 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  WESTERN  TALKEETNA  MOUNTAINS.  205 

Vigorous  prospecting  in  this  district  has  been  carried  on  only  since 
the  spring  of  1916,  and  many  of  the  claims  were  staked  in  1917,  so 
that  the  amount  of  work  which  has  been  done  on  any  property  is  not 
necessarily  an  index  of  the  value  of  the  ore  deposit,  and  some  of  the 
properties  not  visited  and  not  described  specifically  may  be  of  greater 
merit  than  some  of  those  that  are  more  fully  described  here.  The 
possibilities  for  the  discovery  of  still  other  ore  deposits  in  this  area 
have  by  no  means  been  exhausted,  and  it  is  likely  that  other  ore 
bodies  more  valuable  than  any  yet  discovered  may  be  found.  A 
large  area  in  the  basins  of  Sheep  River,  Montana  Creek,  and  Kash- 
witna  River  has  received  scant  attention.  Hand  specimens  of  rich 
copper  and  gold  ores  have  been  brought  out  from  this  area  by  pros- 
pectors, but  the  localities  from  which  they  came  could  not  be  learned, 
and  the  deposits  were  not  visited  by  the  writer.  Late  in  the  summer 
of  1917  reports  were  circulated  of  the  discovery,  on  a northward- 
flowing tributary  of  Talkeetna  River  opposite  the  upper  basin  of  Iron 
Creek,  of  a large  dike  the  surface  croppings  of  which  yielded  gold 
upon  panning,  and  which  was  said  to  show  an  encouraging  gold  con- 
tent upon  assay.  A considerable  number  of  prospectors  visited  the 
locality,  and  many  claims  were  staked,  but  the  lateness  of  the  season 
prevented  a thorough  prospecting  of  the  deposit,  and  its  commercial 
value  is  yet  to  be  demonstrated.  The  next  few  years  will  probably 
witness  increasing  activity  in  prospecting  in  the  western  Talkeetna 
Mountains,  and  there  is  every  promise  that  some  producing  mines 
will  be  developed. 


115086°— 19 14 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  THE  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION. 


By  Stephen  R.  Capps. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  area  here  referred  to  as  the  upper  Chulitna  region  includes 
what  has  generally  been  called  the  Broad  Pass  mining  district.  The 
prospects  that  have  attracted  considerable  attention  to  this  part 
of  Alaska  lie  15  to  30  miles  southwest  of  Broad  Pass,  and  that  pass 
can  be  seen  only  in  the  distance.  Furthermore,  the  term  “Broad 
Pass  region”1  has  already  been  used  to  describe  an  area  including 
the  headwaters  of  Nenana  River  and  a part  of  the  upper  Susitna 
basin.  In  order  to  avoid  confusion,  therefore,  the  area  here  dis- 
cussed is  termed  the  upper  Chulitna  region.  It  lies  on  the  southeast 
slope  of  the  Alaska  Range  between  meridians  149°  and  150°  west 
longitude  and  parallels  62°  45'  and  63°  15'  north  latitude. 

Although  a few  prospectors  and  explorers  had  penetrated  to  this 
part  of  Alaska,  no  systematic  surveys  had  been  extended  to  it  until 
1898,  when,  through  the  discovery  of  the  rich  gold  placers  in  the 
Canadian  Klondike,  interest  in  Alaska  was  stimulated  and  a number 
of  surveying  expeditions  were  dispatched  by  the  United  States  Army 
and  the  Geological  Survey  to  different  parts  of  the  Territory.  One 
of  these  expeditions,  a Geological  Survey  party  in  charge  of  G.  H. 
Eldridge  and  Robert  Muldrow,  ascended  Susitna  River  to  Indian 
River  and  proceeded  thence  northeastward  through  the  upper  Chulitna 
basin  to  the  headwaters  of  Nenana  River.  The  map  published  as  a 
result  of  their  expedition  2 gave  the  first  authentic  geographic  infor- 
mation about  a large  area  on  the  upper  Susitna  basin.  In  1902 
A.  H.  Brooks,  of  the  Geological  Survey,  explored  the  west  and 
north  flank  of  the  Alaska  Range  from  the  head  of  Skwentna  River 
to  the  Nenana,  and  between  that  year  and  1912  several  mountaineer- 
ing, exploring,  and  railroad  survey  parties  reached  some  part  of  this 
district  but  left  no  records  that  were  available  for  the  public.  Among 
the  more  noteworthy  of  these  explorations  was  that  conducted  by 
F.  A.  Cook,  who  in  1903  pushed  southward  across  the  range  with 
pack  horses  through  a pass  lying  somewhere  between  Muldrow 

1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Broad  Pass  region,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  608,  1915. 

2 Eldridge,  G.  H.,  A reconnaissance  in  the  Susitna  basin  and  adjacent  territory,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Twentieth  Ann.  Rept.,  pt.  7,  map  3,  1900. 


207 


208 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Glacier  and  Nenana  River.  His  account  of  the  journey  is  not  clear, 
and  he  made  no  accurate  survey,  but  as  nearly  as  can  be  determined 
he  crossed  an  ice-filled  pass  at  the  head  of  Teklanika  River  and 
descended  Bull  River  to  the  Chulitna.  It  is  reported  that  the  first  dis- 
covery of  placer  gold  in  this  district  was  made  by  John  Coffee  in  1907 
on  Bryn  Mawr  Creek,  and  many  lode  claims  were  staked  in  the  basin 
of  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  in  1909.  In  1912  a mountaineering 
expedition,  conducted  by  Herschel  C.  Parker  and  Belmore  Browne, 
ascended  Susitna  and  Chulitna  rivers  and  what  is  now  called  Ohio 
Creek  by  dog  sled,  crossed  a high,  glacier-filled  pass  to  the  West  Fork 
of  Chulitna  Glacier,  and  from  the  head  of  that  glacier  penetrated 
across  another  divide  to  the  north  slope  of  the  Alaska  Range.  The 
sketch  map  of  their  route  constitutes  the  first  published  record  of  the 
drainage  along  their  line  of  travel  through  the  range.  In  1913  F.  II. 
Moffit 1 and  J.  W.  Bagley,  of  the  Geological  Survey,  mapped  both 
the  geology  and  topography  of  an  area  extending  from  Broad  Pass 
eastward  to  the  West  Fork  of  Susitna  Glacier,  and  in  1914  D.  L. 
Reaburn,  of  the  Alaskan  Engineering  Commission,2  mapped  the 
topography  along  the  line  of  the  Government  railroad  survey  between 
the  mouth  of  Indian  River  and  Broad  Pass. 

For  several  years  development  work  has  been  done  on  a num- 
ber of  lode  claims  in  the  upper  Chulitna  basin,  and  encouraging 
reports  have  been  circulated  concerning  large  bodies  of  gold  ore 
there.  This  area,  at  present  so  remote,  will  become  readily  accessible 
upon  the  completion  of  the  Government  railroad  now  in  progress  of 
construction  between  Seward,  on  the  coast,  and  Fairbanks,  on 
Tanana  River.  It  was  therefore  deemed  advisable  to  make  at  least 
a hasty  geologic  investigation  of  the  area,  to  determine  the  geologic  j 
conditions  of  the  ore  bodies  and  the  probabilities  of  the  development  i 
in  this  area  of  producing  mines.  Upon  the  entrance  of  the  United  ; 
States  into  the  European  war,  a large  nmnber  of  the  topographers 
of  the  Geological  Survey  were  called  upon  for  military  work,  and  no  ; 
topographer  was  available  for  making  a topographic  survey  of  the  j 
region,  but  the  maps  of  the  Alaskan  Engineering  Commission  along 
the  main  Chulitna  Valley  furnished  control  from  which  foot  traverse 
and  compass  sketching  could  be  carried  westward.  Plans  were 
therefore  made  for  a geologic  party  to  visit  this  area  during  the 
summer  of  1917,  and  the  writer  was  assigned  to  carry  them  into 
effect.  The  season's  work  was  to  include  investigations  in  other 
parts  of  the  Susitna  basin  as  well,  so  that  only  a short  time  could  be 
spent  in  this  area.  The  party,  consisting  of  the  geologist  and  three  j 
camp  hands,  with  seven  pack  horses,  left  Anchorage  by  railroad  on 
June  18  for  Matanuska,  from  which  the  horses  were  driven  over  the 

1 Moffit,  F.  II.,  op.  cit.,  Pis.  I and  II. 

2 Reports  of  the  Alaskan  Engineering  Commission  for  the  period  from  Mar.  12,  1914,  to  Dec.  31,  1915:  3 
64th  Cong.,  1st  sess.,  II.  Doc.  610,  pt.  2,  map  6, 1916. 


U.  S.  GEOLOGICAL  SUKVEY 


BULLETIN  692  PLATE  V 


EXPLANATION 


8s 


Unconsolidated  deposits . 

Glacial  morainal  materials 
and  gravels, bench  gravels, and 

deposits  of  present  streams 


& 


Partly  consolidated  sand, 
mud, and  gravel. locally 
containing  lignitic  coal 


Cantwell  formation 
Shale, argilljte, and  con- 
glomerate with  intrusives 


' // / //  / 
/ / / 


Predominantly  argillite  and 
slate, with  some  graywacke  and 
conglomerate,  cut  by  dikes 


Conglomerate.tuff,  green-  j 
stone, limestone.and  shale,  | 
locally  intimately  intruded  i 

by  dikes  and  sills  ) 


Green  stone,  tuff,  chert.and 
metamorphosed  sediments 


Granitic  intrusives 
with  some  sediments 


Gold  lode 
Gold-silver  lode 
V Gold  - silver-copper  lode 
■ Copper  lode 
a Antimony  lode 
x Gold  placer  prospect 
«»  Lignitic  coal 


PRE-TRIASSIC  TRIASS1C  POST-TRIASSIC  TERTIARY  QUATERNARY 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  209 

trail  to  the  terminus  of  the  rails,  at  that  time  at  Little  Susitna  River. 
From  that  point  the  pack  train  followed  the  construction  road  and 
trails  along  the  general  route  of  the  railroad  survey  up  Susitna  and 
Chulitna  valleys  to  Middle  Fork  of  Chulitna  River,  where  a trail 
branching  off  to  the  northwest  leads  up  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River 
to  the  vicinity  of  the  lode  prospects.  In  all  a period  of  only  24  days 
was  spent  between  the  time  of  departure  from  Indian  River  and  the 
return  to  that  place.  During  this  time  all  the  prospects  in  West 
Fork  of  Chulitna  and  Ohio  Creek  basins  on  which  any  considerable 
development  work  has  been  done  were  visited  and  the  larger  features 
of  the  geology  of  the  area  were  mapped.  The  southeastward-flowing 
tributaries  of  Chulitna  River  have  not  yet  been  accurately  surveyed, 
and  the  position  of  the  drainage  lines,  shown  on  the  accompanying 
sketch  map  (PL  Y),  as  determined  by  foot  and  compass  traverse, 
can  be  considered  as  only  approximate. 

As  already  stated,  the  information  on  which  this  report  is  based 
was  procured  in  the  course  of  a hasty  visit  to  the  region,  and  during 
practically  the  whole  time  the  weather  conditions  were  very  bad.  The 
areas  of  the  different  geologic  formations,  as  shown  on  the  map 
(PL  Y),  are  therefore  subject  to  revision  when  more  detailed  field 
work  is  done. 

GENERAL  FEATURES  OF  THE  REGION. 

GEOGRAPHY. 

The  upper  Chulitna  region  consists  essentially  of  the  valley  of 
Chulitna  River,  a broad  northeast-southwest  basin,  which  is  bordered 
on  both  sides  by  rugged  mountains.  At  a point  just  west  of  Chulitna 
Pass  Chulitna  River  flows  at  an  elevation  of  1,200  feet,  and  at  Broad 
Pass  the  basin  floor  rises  to  a height  of  about  2,400  feet.  The  south- 
east margin  of  the  Chulitna  basin  lies  only  a few  miles  away  from  the 
river  and  is  formed  by  a ridge  of  sharp  and  rugged  peaks  that  rise 
to  heights  of  5,000  to  6,000  feet.  The  streams  that  drain  this  ridge 
are  all  of  moderate  size,  and  their  water  is  clear,  indicating  the  absence 
of  any  large  glaciers  in  those  mountains.  To  the  northwest  the 
Chulitna  basin  is  of  a different  character,  for  it  includes  a long  section 
of  the  southeast  slope  of  the  Alaska  Range.  There  the  lateral  spurs 
of  the  main  range  begin  only  a short  distance  back  from  Chulitna 
River  and  become  constantly  higher  and  more  inaccessible  toward 
the  crest  of  the  range,  20  to  35  miles  from  the  river.  All  the  larger 
tributary  streams  from  the  Alaska  Range,  including  Ohio  Creek, 
West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River,  Bull  River,  and  their  principal  tribu- 
taries, carry  glacial  waters,  and  large  areas  in  the  valley  heads  are 
occupied  by  glacial  ice.  In  the  rugged  ice-filled  portion  of  the  range 
travel  is  difficult  and  hazardous,  and  a large  area  is  still  entirely 
unexplored. 


210  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

GLACIATION. 

The  portion  of  the  Alaska  Range  that  drains  to  Chulitna  River  is 
characterized  by  the  number  and  large  size  of  its  existing  glaciers 
and  by  the  pronounced  manner  in  which  the  surface  forms  have  been 
modeled  by  the  greater  glaciers  of  earlier  times,  of  which  the  present 
ice  tongues  are  the  remnants.  The  southeast  side  of  the  Alaska 
Range  nourishes  some  of  the  largest  alpine  glaciers  of  the  continent. 
Two  of  these  glaciers,  tributaries  of  Chulitna  River  though  lying 
south  of  the  area  here  discussed,  are  several  miles  wide  and  probably 
over  30  miles  long.  In  the  region  with  which  this  report  is  concerned 
the  larger  streams  that  drain  from  the  Alaska  Range,  including  Ohio 
and  Copeland  creeks  and  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  and  Bull  rivers,  as 
well  as  their  larger  tributaries,  are  glacier-fed.  The  size  of  the 
glaciers  is  determined  by  the  altitude  of  the  surrounding  mountains 
and  the  area  of  the  catchment  basins. 

There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  present  glaciers  are  small  compared 
with  those  that  occupied  this  region  in  times  past.  At  the  time  of 
greatest  glaciation,  ice  from  the  Alaska  Range  moved  southward 
down  Chulitna  and  Susitna  valleys,  was  augmented  by  other  glaciers 
from  the  Talkeetna  and  Kenai  mountains,  and  pushed  down  the 
Cook  Inlet  depression  at  least  as  far  as  the  Forelands.  Thus  the 
entire  Susitna  basin  was  a great  ice  field  and  was  connected  to  the 
east  by  way  of  the  upper  Susitna  basin  with  a similar  ice  field  that 
filled  the  Copper  River  basin.  In  order  to  drain  southward,  as  it 
did,  this  glacier  must  have  had  a surface  slope  to  the  south  of  steeper 
gradient  than  that  of  the  present  valley  floor,  so  that  in  the  area 
here  discussed  the  glacial  ice  must  have  reached  a great  thickness, 
and  this  conclusion  is  verified  by  evidence  of  ice  sculpture  high  on  the 
flanks  of  Chulitna  Valley.  The  divide  between  West  Fork  of  Chulitna 
River  and  Long  Creek  was  overridden  by  glacial  ice  to  an  elevation 
of  at  least  4,500  feet,  2,300  feet  above  the  valley  of  West  Fork, 
directly  to  the  north.  The  east  wall  of  Chulitna  Valley  near  Anti- 
mony Creek  also  shows  erosion  by  a southward-moving  glacier  to  a 
height  of  much  more  than  4,000  feet.  In  the  lack  of  an  accurate  topo- 
graphic map  of  this  region  as  a whole  it  is  not  yet  possible  to  outline 
the  area  reached  by  the  glaciers  at  the  time  of  their  greatest  exten- 
sion, but  it  is  certain  that  at  that  time  only  the  high  peaks  and  ridges 
of  the  mountains  projected  above  the  ice  and  that  from  the  crest 
of  the  Alaska  Range  to  the  Pacific  Ocean  the  area  of  land  above  the 
ice  was  very  much  less  than  the  area  of  the  glaciers. 

ROUTES  OF  TRAVEL. 

The  upper  Chulitna  region  has  always  been  difficult  of  access,  and 
those  who  have  visited  it  have  done  so  only  at  the  cost  of  much  time 
and  effort.  The  Alaskan  prospector  knows  no  barriers  of  distance 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  211 

or  bad  trail  if  he  is  convinced  that  his  chosen  field  offers  a fair  chance 
for  the  discovery  of  valuable  minerals,  but  the  time  consumed  in 
going  to  and  from  a remote  area  must  be  subtracted  from  the  total 
season  available  for  prospecting,  and  the  actual  time  spent  in  the 
search  for  valuable  ground  is  short  when  the  trail  to  it  is  long  and 
arduous.  Heretofore  two  distinct  methods  of  transportation,  or  a 
combination  of  the  two,  have  been  chiefly  employed  by  those  who 
have  visited  the  region.  The  most  favored  has  been  the  use  of  dog 
sleds  up  the  frozen  streams  in  winter.  Supplies  were  procured  from 
Talkeetna,  where  a store  was  maintained  for  some  years,  from  Susitna 
station,  or  from  Knik.  A considerable  part  of  the  prospecting  was 
done  by  a group  of  men  who  brought  their  supplies  in  during  the  fall, 
trapped  for  fur  in  the  winter,  and  spent  the  summer  in  prospecting. 
Summer  traveling  was  done  for  the  most  part  by  launch  or  poling 
boat  up  Susitna  River  to  the  mouth  of  Indian  River,  and 
thence  by  trail  up  Indian  River  through  Chulitna  Pass  and  up 
Chulitna  Valley,  crossing  East  and  Middle  forks  to  West  Fork  near 
the  mouth  of  Bull  River.  A few  parties  came  in  by  pack  train  from 
Knik  Arm,  following  the  west  flank  of  the  Talkeetna  Mountains  to 
Talkeetna  River  and  crossing  that  stream  to  ascend  Susitna  Valley 
to  Indian  River.  This  method  of  travel  was  slow  and  costly  and  was 
used  for  the  most  part  by  surveying  parties,  whose  work  was  a 
study  of  the  entire  route  rather  than  an  effort  to  reach  the  upper 
Chulitna  by  the  easiest  means. 

In  the  spring  of  1915  active  construction  on  the  Government 
railroad,  which  is  planned  to  extend  from  Seward  to  Fairbanks,  was 
commenced,  and  the  town  of  Anchorage  was  established  as  a base 
of  supplies.  During  that  year  the  work  was  for  the  most  part  con- 
fined to  the  areas  bordering  Knik  and  Turnagain  arms  and  to  the 
construction  of  a branch  line  to  the  coal  fields  of  Matanuska  Valley, 
but  in  1916  and  1917  construction  was  carried  on  along  the  main 
line,  up  Susitna  Valley,  and  power  boats  were  operated  for  trans- 
porting passengers  and  freight  up  Susitna  River  to  the  mouth 
of  Indian  River.  In  June,  1917,  the  rails  extended  to  the  rail- 
road crossing  of  Little  Susitna  River  174  miles  from  Seward,  and 
stretches  of  wagon  road,  connected  by  trail,  followed  the  railroad 
route  as  far  north  as  Talkeetna  River.  Above  the  Talkeetna  a 
passable  trail  for  pack  horses  was  available  all  the  way  to  West 
Fork  of  Chulitna  River.  By  the  end  of  1917  it  was  reported  that  the 
rails  were  in  place  as  far  north  as  Montana  Creek,  210  miles  from 
Seward,  and  much  of  the  railroad  grade  was  completed  as  far  as 
Dead  Horse,  about  halfway  between  Talkeetna  and  Indian  rivers. 
As  soon  as  construction  is  completed  to  Broad  Pass,  the  upper 
Chulitna  district  will  become  easily  accessible,  and  the  improved 
transportation  will  greatly  stimulate  mining  and  prospecting. 


212 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


A favorable  pass  across  the  Alaska  Range  at  the  head  of  West 
Fork  of  Chulitna  River  has  been  used  for  sledding  supplies  across 
the  range  in  winter  and  has  been  crossed  by  pack  trains  in  summer. 
It  is  necessary  to  ascend  the  glacier  at  the  head  of  West  Fork  of 
Chulitna  River  for  a distance  of  10  or  12  miles  to  a low  pass,  which 
leads  perhaps  2 miles  down  another  small  glacier  to  the  edge  of 
Muldrow  Glacier,  which  is  followed  northward  for  about  10  miles  to 
the  north  base  of  the  Alaska  Range.  The  route  presents  no  insur- 
mountable difficulties  late  in  summer,  though  travel  would  be  diffi- 
cult until  the  soft  snow  has  disappeared  from  the  surface  of  the 
glacier.  The  distance  from  the  last  spruce  timber  on  West  Fork  of 
Chulitna  River  to  the  first  brush  near  Muldrow  Glacier  is  about  20 
miles,  and  under  favorable  conditions  the  trip  may  be  made  by 
pack  train  in  one  day. 

The  completion  of  the  railroad  will  make  the  region  easily  accessi- 
ble from  points  on  Tanana  River  by  way  of  Nenana  River. 

VEGETATION. 

• 

In  the  upper  Chulitna  region  timber  is  confined  to  the  valleys  of 
the  principal  streams.  The  valley  of  Chulitna  River  has  a growth 
of  trees,  mainly  spruce,  but  including  some  cottonwood  and  birch, 
up  to  an  average  altitude  of  2,000  feet  above  sea  level,  though  locally 
trees  grow  above  that  altitude  and  considerable  areas  below  2,000 
feet  are  untimbered.  In  the  valleys  tributary  to  the  Chulitna 
through  from  the  northwest  a fringe  of  trees  extends  along  the  lower 
valley  walls  to  an  elevation  of  perhaps  2,500  feet.  Thus  spruce 
groves  composed  of  trees  reaching  a foot  or  more  in  diameter  are 
present  on  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  to  a point  within  2 miles  of 
the  glacier  in  which  the  stream  heads,  and  Ohio  Creek  has  patches  of 
good  cottonwood  and  spruce  trees  for  about  2 miles  above  the 
mouth  of  Christy  Creek,  whereas  Copeland,  Long,  Colorado,  and 
Costello  creeks,  with  steeper  gradients,  follow  timberless  valleys  in 
their  upper  courses,  and  even  brush  of  sufficient  size  to  supply  the 
moderate  needs  of  the  camper  is  lacking. 

There  is  little  timber  in  the  Chulitna  basin  that  is  fit  for  other  than 
local  uses.  Patches  of  cottonwood  trees,  in  the  bottoms  of  the 
larger  streams,  will  supply  logs  as  much  as  4 feet  in  diameter,  and 
these  will  furnish  a small  number  of  saw  logs.  The  spruce  and 
birch  trees  are  generally  small,  few  attaining  a diameter  of  more  than 
2 feet,  and  although  they  will  furnish  cabin  logs,  mining  timbers, 
cordwood,  and  an  inferior  grade  of  lumber,  the  products  of  the  forests 
will  be  used  only  locally. 

Grass  sufficient  for  forage  can  generally  be  found  throughout  the 
region.  There  are  considerable  areas  of  marshy  bench  lands  and  of 
spruce-covered  bottoms  in  which  the  prevailing  ground  cover  is 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  213 


sphagnum  moss  and  low  brush  and  in  which  grass  for  horses  is  not 
abundant,  but  within  those  areas  there  are  scattered  well-drained 
spots  in  which  horses  will  find  sufficient  food  for  a short  time.  The 
two  principal  varieties  of  forage  grass  are  locally  known  as  “red  top/’ 
which  grows  to  a height  of  several  feet,  and  as  “bunch  grass,”  which 
affords  a less  heavy  growth  but  exceeds  the  “red  top”  in  nutritive 
value.  At  a few  localities  a vetch,  known  to  the  prospectors  as  the 
“pea  vine,”  is  abundant  on  the  stream  gravel  bars  and  affords  excel- 
lent forage. 

GAME. 

Although  big  game  is  not  particularly  abundant  in  the  upper 
Chulitna  basin,  the  prospector  is  occasionally  able  to  furnish  his 
larder  with  fresh  meat.  Caribou  range  over  most  of  the  area,  and 
although  usually  found  in  small  bands  or  as  scattered  individuals, 
when  once  seen  they  are  easily  procured  by  the  hunter  and  so  are  the 
most  useful  animals  for  food.  Moose  are  present  in  the  timbered 
areas,  though  in  small  numbers,  and  on  rare  occasions  the  white 
mountain  sheep  are  seen  in  the  areas  of  rugged  relief.  Black  bears 
are  not  uncommon,  especially  in  the  timbered  and  brushy  tracts,  and 
brown  and  grizzly  bears  are  sometimes  encountered.  The  relative 
scarcity  of  big  game  on  this  side  of  the  Alaska  Range  is  especially 
striking,  for  on  the  north  slope  of  the  range,  not  many  miles  away, 
is  one  of  the  most  prolific  game  fields  of  North  America.  There  sheep, 
caribou,  and  moose  graze  in  great  numbers,  and  their  preference  for 
the  north  slope  of  the  range,  rather  than  the  south  slope,  is  due 
directly  or  indirectly  to  climatic  differences.  The  Chulitna  slope  of 
the  mountains  has  a heavy  precipitation,  both  in  summer  and  in 
winter.  The  heavy  winter’s  snows  impede  free  travel  and  cover  the 
herbage  on  which  the  animals  feed,  whereas  the  small  snowfall  on  the 
north  slope  leaves  wide  areas  of  bare,  wind-swept  pasture  upon  which 
the  game  herds  graze.  In  summer,  too,  the  drier,  sunny  climate  of 
the  north  slope  and  the  abundant  pasturage  there  are  preferred  by 
the  wild  animals. 

Of  the  smaller  wild  animals  rabbits  and  ptarmigan  are  perhaps  most 
useful,  for  they  furnish  a valuable  supply  of  fresh  meat.  At  times 
both  are  extremely  abundant,  but  in  1916  and  1917  they  had  almost 
completely  disappeared.  Trout  and  grayling  may  be  caught  in  most 
of  the  clear-water  streams,  but  as  most  of  the  rivers  are  glacier-fed 
and  turbid,  the  opportunities  for  the  traveler  to  get  fish  are  infrequent. 
Each  winter  numerous  fur-bearing  animals  are  taken,  including  lynx, 
fox,  mink,  and  marten. 

NATIVES. 

There  are  no  established  settlements  of  natives  in  the  area  dis- 
cussed in  this  report.  The  nearest  settlement  is  at  the  mouth  of 
Talkeetna  River,  where  a few  families  spend  part  of  each  year  catch- 


214 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


ing  salmon.  Without  doubt  the  natives  at  times  ascend  the  tributa- 
ries of  Chulitna  River  on  hunting  or  trapping  expeditions,  but  they 
have  left  little  evidence  of  their  visits.  During  the  summer  of  1917  no 
natives  were  encountered  by  the  Geological  Survey  party  north  of 
Talkeetna  River. 

GENERAL  GEOLOGY. 

CHARACTER  OF  THE  ROCKS. 

The  rocks  of  the  upper  Chulitna  region  consist  of  a wide  range  of 
materials  that  have  undergone  different  degrees  of  metamorphism. 
They  include  cherts,  slates,  and  highly  metamorphosed  tuffs;  less 
altered  shales,  graywackes,  limestones,  and  tuffs;  closely  folded 
shales  and  graywackes;  a thick  series  of  shales  and  conglomerates; 
partly  consolidated  sands  and  clays  with  associated  lignite;  and 
several  types  of  unconsolidated  glacial  and  stream  deposits.  Igneous 
rocks  are  also  present  as  basic  lava  flows,  as  dikes  and  sills,  and  as 
large  intrusive  masses.  As  shown  on  the  map  (PI.  V),  the  largest 
bodies  of  intrusive  rock  within  the  area  visited  lie  between  Chulitna 
and  Susitna  rivers.  Northwest  of  Chulitna  River  the  Alaska  Range 
proper  shows  on  its  flank  a considerable  amount  of  fragmental  vol- 
canic material  in  the  form  of  tuffs,  associated  with  normal  sediments. 
Farther  to  the  northwest  the  main  range  is  composed  predominantly 
of  sedimentary  beds. 

The  distribution  of  the  geologic  formations,  as  they  have  now  been 
differentiated,  is  shown  on  the  map  (PI.  V).  The  mapping,  however, 
was  done  in  the  course  of  a hasty  trip  of  only  three  weeks,  the 
principal  object  of  which  was  the  visiting  of  the  numerous  mining 
claims.  During  the  mapping  it  rained  almost  constantly.  In  this 
area  the  geology  is  by  no  means  simple,  and  the  grouping  together 
of  certain  lithologic  units  and  the  areas  assigned  to  them  can  be  con- 
sidered as  only  tentative  and  will  be  considerably  modified  when  more 
detailed  studies  are  made.  A base  map  was  available  only  along  the 
main  Chulitna  Valley.  The  main  portion  of  the  Alaska  Range,  from 
Chulitna  River  to  the  crest,  is  unmapped,  and  much  of  it  is  still 
unexplored.  The  drainage  lines  shown  on  the  map  as  solid  lines 
were  taken  from  the  surveys  of  the  Alaskan  Engineering  Commission. 
The  drainage  shown  in  broken  lines  was  mapped  by  foot  traverse 
during  the  progress  of  the  geologic  work  in  1917. 

STRUCTURE. 

The  dominant  structural  trend  of  the  rocks  on  the  southeast  flank 
of  the  Alaska  Range  is  north-northeast,  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the 
range  and  to  the  broad  trough  of  the  Chulitna.  A part  of  this  struc- 
ture was  developed  during  the  growth  of  the  present  mountain  range, 
and  the  structural  features  of  the  little-consolidated  Tertiary  lignite 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  215 

beds  may  be  attributed  entirely  to  those  mountain-building  move- 
ments. The  growth  of  the  present  range,  however,  took  place  in 
post-Mesozoic  time.  The  Mesozoic  and  older  rocks  are  more  strongly 
metamorphosed  than  the  Tertiary  lignite-bearing  beds,  and  their 
structure  must  therefore  be  in  part  ascribed  to  movements  that 
antedated  the  last  mountain-forming  processes.  Indeed,  in  exam- 
ining the  formations  it  is  seen  that  each  is  more  severely  metamor- 
phosed than  the  one  succeeding  it.  It  is  therefore  evident  that  the 
site  of  the  Alaska  Range  has  long  been  a zone  of  weakness  along 
which  folding  has  taken  place  from  time  to  time,  and  the  present 
mountains  are  but  the  topographic  expression  of  the  latest  of  the 
earth  movements.  Folding  and  faulting  have  both  been  operative 
in  forming  this  massive  range,  and  severe  earthquakes  in  recent 
years  suggest  that  even  now  the  same  slow  forces  are  at  work  and 
that  mountain  growth  still  continues. 

SEDIMENTARY  AND  METAMORPHIC  ROCKS. 

GREENSTONE  TUFFS,  SLATES,  AND  CHERTS. 

What  appears  to  be  the  oldest  group  of  rocks  in  the  area  here  de- 
scribed comprises  greenstone  tuffs,  cherts,  and  slates  that  form  the 
front  of  the  mountain  range  northwest  of  Chulitna  River.  These 
rocks  crop  out  at  intervals  along  the  valley  of  West  Fork  of  Chulitna 
River  below  the  mouth  of  Colorado  Creek  and  appear  also  on  Long, 
Copeland,  and  Ohio  creeks  in  the  areas  indicated  on  the  map  (PI.  V). 
These  rocks  are  prevailingly  so  metamorphosed  and  altered  that  their 
original  character  is  difficult  to  determine  in  the  hand  specimens.  At 
many  places  in  which  comparatively  fresh  and  unaltered  material  can 
be  obtained  the  characteristic  rock  consists  of  a multitude  of  frag- 
ments of  basic  dull-green  to  faint-purple  lavas  inclosed  in  a matrix  of 
finer  material  of  the  same  sort.  The  fragments  are  generally  angular 
and  of  irregular  shape  and  range  in  size  from  microscopic  grains  to 
pieces  several  inches  in  diameter.  These  rocks  are  composed  of  frag- 
mental material  that  was  ejected  violently  from  volcanic  vents  and 
accumulated  in  thick  deposits,  presumably  in  bodies  of  standing 
water.  Their  water-laid  character  is  inferred  not  from  any  character- 
istic of  the  tuffs  themselves,  for  they  are  free  from  any  evidence  of 
assortment  of  the  materials,  but  from  the  association  with  the 
tuff  beds  of  large  amounts  of  chert  and  slate  or  argillite.  At  places 
the  cherts  and  slates  are  notable  members  of  the  group,  preponderating 
over  the  tuffs.  Elsewhere  they  occur  as  thinner  layers  or  lenses  in 
areas  where  the  tuffs  are  the  prevailing  rock.  It  is  apparent  that  the 
normal  processes  of  sedimentation,  which  resulted  in  the  formation  of 
the  slates  and  cherts,  were  interrupted  from  time  to  time  by  volcanic 
outbursts,  during  which  large  quantities  of  fragmental  volcanic 
material  were  ejected  and  accumulated  rapidly  in  the  near-by  waters. 


216 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


Between  these  periods  of  volcanic  activity  the  normal  sediments  were 
laid  down.  The  dark-gray  to  black  slates  occur  in  thin  beds, 
alternating  with  light-green,  gray,  or  blue-gray  cherts. 

No  fossils  were  found  in  this  group  of  tuffs,  slates,  and  cherts,  and 
their  age  is  not  definitely  known.  As  will  be  shown  later,  however, 
they  are  known  to  be  overlain  by  other  materials  from  which  Triassic 
fossils  were  obtained.  The  structural  relation  between  this  group 
and  the  Triassic  rocks  has  not  been  fully  determined,  but  they  are 
believed  to  be  unconformable.  If  that  conclusion  is  correct,  the 
tuffs  and  associated  slates  and  cherts  are  pre-Triassic  and  probably 
Paleozoic.  No  closer  age  determination  is  justifiable  on  the  basis  of 
our  present  knowledge. 

TRIASSIC  TUFFS,  LIMESTONES  AND  SHALES,  AND  LAVA  FLOWS. 

Economically  the  most  important  group  of  rocks  in  the  district  is  a 
series  of  Triassic  tuffs,  limestones,  shales,  and  basic  lava  flows  with 
minor  amounts  of  conglomerate  and  graywacke,  which  apparently 
lies  unconformably  upon  the  beds  already  described.  Most  of  the 
mineralized  lodes  so  far  discovered  occur  in  these  rocks.  The  approx- 
imate position  of  the  contact  between  this  group  and  the  underlying 
group  composed  of  greenstone,  tuff,  slate,  and  chert  (see  PI.  V) 
crosses  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  a short  distance  below  the 
mouth  of  Colorado  and  Bryn  Mawr  creeks,  runs  southwestward  across 
the  valleys  of  Long  and  Copeland  creeks,  and  crosses  Ohio  Creek  just 
above  the  mouth  of  Christy  Creek.  Between  Costello  and  Long 
creeks  the  relations  between  the  two  groups  of  rocks  are  not  clear,  for 
the  surface  is  generally  covered  with  vegetation,  and  intrusive  dikes 
and  sills  are  unusually  abundant.  Farther  south  better  exposures 
are  available,  and  on  Ohio  Creek  an  excellent  section  is  exhibited. 
There  the  older  group  of  tuffs,  slates,  and  cherts  forms  the  walls  of  the 
lower  valley  as  far  northwest  as  Christy  Creek,  where  it  appears  to  lie 
unconformably  beneath  a heavy  bed  of  conspicuous  red  tuff  and 
agglomerate.  This  red  tuff  is  the  basal  member  of  a group  of  rocks 
that  has  an  aggregate  thickness  of  several  thousand  feet  and  includes 
tuffs,  agglomerates,  conglomerates,  amygdaloidal  greenstone  flows, 
and  massive  limestone  beds.  The  tuffs  range  in  texture  from  fine- 
grained rocks  that  resemble  red  sandstone,  through  coarser  rocks 
composed  of  angular  fragments  from  one-eighth  to  1 inch  in  diameter, 
to  coarse  agglomerates  containing  fragments  of  volcanic  debris  several 
inches  across.  They  range  in  color  from  vivid  red,  in  which  the 
composing  fragments  are  chiefly  j aspilite,  through  green  and  purple 
shades.  In  some  of  the  tuffs  the  fragments  ail  appear  to  be  sharply 
angular  in  outline;  in  others  some  fragments  are  angular  and  others 
partly  rounded.  These  tuffs  grade,  by  scarcely  perceptible  variations, 
into  rocks  composed  largely  of  beautifully  rounded  quartz  pebbles  the 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  217 

size  of  a pea,  so  that  characteristic  tuffs  and  typical  conglomerates  are 
apparently  connected  by  a series  of  intermediate  rocks.  On  upper 
Ohio  Creek  five  distinct  and  massive  limestone  beds  form  conspicuous 
features  of  the  landscape.  One  of  these  beds  yielded  fossils  that  were 
determined  by  T.  W.  Stanton  to  be  of  Triassic  age,  and  several  other 
collections  of  fossils,  taken  from  boulders  in  the  bed  of  Copeland 
Creek,  all  appear  to  be  of  the  same  age.  The  tuff  beds,  so  abundant 
in  the  lower  portions  of  this  group  of  rocks,  give  place  to  amygdaloidal 
lava  flows  in  the  higher  parts  of  the  group,  and  on  Ohio  Creek  a con- 
siderable thickness  of  lava  flows  appears  above  the  uppermost  lime- 
stone bed. 

On  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  the  section,  though  presenting 
certain  features  in  common  with  that  on  Ohio  Creek,  is  greatly 
different  in  detail.  The  red  and  green  tuffs  are  present  at  the  base 
and  appear  at  the  Riverside  claims  along  Bryn  Mawr  Creek  and  on 
the  claims  of  the  Golden  Zone  group.  The  abundant  intrusive 
material,  in  dikes  and  sills,  has  altered  the  surrounding  rocks  by 
contact  metamorphism,  and  as  a result  the  limestones,  here  incon- 
spicuous, are  generally  changed  to  marble,  and  white,  cream,  and 
bluish  cherts  appear.  The  amygdaloidal  greenstones,  so  abundant 
on  upper  Ohio  Creek,  are  relatively  scarce  on  West  Fork  of  Chulitna 
River,  where  the  group  is  overlain  by  a heavy  body  of  black  argillites, 
slates,  and  graywackes. 

ARGILLITES,  SLATES,  AND  GRAYWACKES. 

A conspicuous  group  of  rocks  that  crop  out  along  the  valley  of 
West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  and  forms  a large  element  of  the  Alaska 
Range  is  composed  predominantly  of  black  argillite,  together  with 
minor  amounts  of  graywacke  and  some  fine  conglomerate.  Its 
extent  along  the  strike,  from  northeast  to  southwest,  has  not  been 
determined,  but  from  the  width  of  the  belt  across  the  strike,  as  ex- 
posed on  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  for  a distance  of  over  7 miles, 
it  seems  certain  that  these  rocks  are  of  wide  distribution.  Their 
thickness  as  measured  across  the  strike  can  not,  however,  be  regarded 
as  the  normal  thickness  of  the  group,  for  there  is  abundant  evidence 
of  close  folding  and  faulting.  The  general  structural  trend  is  north- 
east, and  the  dips  average  45°  or  more  and  are  prevailingly  to  the 
northwest.  Intrusive  dikes  and  sills  are  present  throughout  this 
group  of  sediments.  Apparently  this  group  of  rocks  lies  structurally 
above  the  group  of  Triassic  tuffs,  limestones,  shales,  and  lavas,  though 
the  relations  between  the  two  groups  were  not  observed.  Neither 
was  it  possible  in  the  brief  time  available  for  the  study  to  determine 
the  relations  of  this  group  of  rocks  to  the  overlying  formation,  which, 
as  will  be  shown,  is  probably  of  early  Tertiary  age.  The  only  con- 
clusion that  can  now  be  drawn  is  that  these  beds  are  younger  than 
that  portion  of  the  Triassic  represented  by  the  fossiliferous  limestones 
and  older  than  Eocene. 


218 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


Certain  other  black  argillites,  slates,  and  graywackes  occur  on  the 
east  side  of  Chulitna  River  and  were  observed  from  Granite  Creek  to 
Antimony  Creek.  These  rocks  are  in  general  more  highly  metamor- 
phic  than  the  rocks  of  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River,  just  described, 
but  are  here  included  with  that  group,  though  the  correlation  is  only 
tentative. 

Eldridge  1 described  a group  of  slates  exposed  along  Susitna  River 
for  a distance  of  50  miles,  which  he  termed  the  Susitna  slates,  but  he 
made  no  statement  as  to  their  probable  age.  Brooks  2 described  a 
similar  belt  of  rocks  in  Kichatna  Valley  that  he  believed  to  be  “of 
unknown  age,  but  probably  chiefly  Paleozoic.”  Capps  3 found  the 
same  belt  of  rocks  to  be  continuous  from  the  Kichatna  locality  of 
Brooks  northeastward  and  traced  it  almost  to  the  area  described  by 
Eldridge.  He  classified  the  rocks  as  probably  of  Paleozoic  or  Mesozoic 
age.  Throughout  that  distance  the  slates,  argillites,  and  graywackes 
of  this  group  are  perhaps  the  most  abundant  single  element  in  the 
flank  of  the  Alaska  Range.  The  present  investigation  has  disclosed 
the  fact  that  a similar  formation  is  prominent  in  the  headwaters  of 
Chulitna  River,  and  although  the  correlation  is  by  no  means  certain, 
it  seems  probable  that  the  rocks  there  are  a continuation  of  series  of 
similar  rocks  mapped  farther  south.  The  evidence  that  the  beds  of 
the  upper  Chulitna  are  of  Mesozoic  age  indicates  a similar  age  for  the 
great  belt  of  rocks  extending  to  the  southwest,  if  future  studies  prove 
the  stratigraphic  continuity  between  the  two  localities. 

CANTWELL  FORMATION. 

In  the  upper  valley  of  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  the  valley 
walls  for  some  distance  above  and  below  the  terminus  of  the  glacier 
in  which  that  stream  heads  are  composed  of  conglomerates,  impure 
sandstones,  grits,  and  shales.  The  beds  are  gray  to  black.  Con- 
glomerates, in  unusual  abundance,  occur  throughout  the  formation. 
Among  the  included  pebbles  argillites,  graywackes,  and  slates  are 
most  conspicuous,  but  pebbles  of  other  rocks  and  of  quartz  are  also 
present.  Much  of  the  conglomerate  is  fine,  the  pebbles  averaging 
only  a small  fraction  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  but  some  coarser  beds, 
inclosing  boulders  as  much  as  a foot  in  diameter,  were  seen.  The 
matrix  consists  of  an  impure  gray  sand  or  grit.  All  gradations  are 
apparent  in  coarseness  of  bed,  from  coarse  conglomerate  through  fine 
conglomerates  and  grits  to  sandstones  and  shales. 

In  the  general  make-up  of  this  group  of  sediments  there  is  an  un- 
mistakable resemblance  to  the  Cantwell  formation  in  the  headwater 

1 Eldridge,  G.  H.,  A reconnaissance  in  Susitna  basin  and  adjacent  territory,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Twentieth  Ann.  Kept.,  pt.  7,  pp.  15-16, 1900. 

2 Brooks,  A.  H.,  The  Mount  Me Kinley  region,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  70,  pp.  67-68, 1911, 

s Capps,  S.  R..  The  Yentna  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  534,  pp.  24-28,  1913. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  219 

region  of  Nenana  River,  as  described  by  Moffit,1  and  in  the  upper 
Toklat  basin  as  described  by  Capps.2  In  those  localities  the  beds 
have  been  determined,  on  the  basis  of  fossil  plant  remains,  to  be  of 
Eocene  age,  and  as  the  area  here  described  is  directly  along  the  strike 
and  only  a few  miles  away  from  the  Toklat  locality,  and  as  the  litho- 
logic aspect  of  the  rocks,  although  unusual,  is  the  same  at  these 
localities,  the  beds  of  upper  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  are  referred 
with  little  hesitancy  to  the  Cantwell  formation.  The  Cantwell  for- 
mation is  generally  folded,  tilted,  and  faulted  and  is  cut  by  intrusive 
rocks.  In  places  lava  flows  are  interbedded  with  the  sediments. 
The  stratigraphic  and  structural  evidence  and  the  degree  of  indura- 
tion seem  to  indicate  that  these  beds  may  be  older  than  the  Eocene. 

COAL-BEARING  TERTIARY  BEDS. 

The  next  succeeding  formation  that  has  been  recognized  in  this 
region  comprises  the  Tertiary  coal-bearing  deposits  that  occur  at 
scattered  localities  throughout  the  Susitna  basin.  These  beds  include 
unconsolidated  or  slightly  consolidated  shales  or  clays,  sands,  gravels, 
conglomerates,  and  some  lignitic  coal.  With  the  area  here  described 
the  coal-bearing  formation  was  seen  at  only  two  localities,  and  at 
these  its  exposures  are  small,  but  the  presence  of  pieces  of  lignite  on 
the  gravel  bars  of  both  East  and  Middle  forks  of  Chulitna  River  indi- 
cates that  the  formation  occurs  on  both  of  those  streams  and  that  it 
may  be  of  considerable  extent  beneath  the  deposits  of  younger  gravels. 
The  coal-bearing  formation  crops  out  as  a bluff  of  fairly  firm  con- 
glomerate at  the  trail  crossing  of  Middle  Fork  of  Chulitna  River,  but 
no  lignite  was  seen  there.  On  Coal  Creek,  a small  tributary  of  Cos- 
tello Creek,  shales  and  sands,  with  lignitic  coal,  occur.  They  are 
described  below  (pp.  231-232). 

The  age  of  the  lignite-bearing  formation  throughout  the  Susitna 
basin  has  generally  been  regarded  as  Eocene.  Some  uncertainty, 
however,  has  arisen  during  the  last  few  years,  for  on  the  evidence  of 
the  fossil  plant  remains  obtained  from  the  Cantwell  formation  that 
also  has  been  classified  as  Eocene.  Throughout  the  area  in  which  it 
has  been  recognized  the  Cantwell  formation  consists  of  dark,  com- 
pletely indurated  rocks,  which,  though  carrying  a small  amount  of 
carbonaceous  material,  have  nowhere  been  found  to  contain  valuable 
coal  beds.  The  Cantwell  beds  are  also  generally  much  tilted  and 
deformed.  The  coal-bearing  Tertiary  beds,  by  contrast,  are  every- 
where light  in  color  and  are  generally  little  consolidated  and  only 
mildly  deformed.  In  both  lithologic  character  and  structure  they 
differ  greatly  from  the  Cantwell  formation  and  are  certainly  younger 


1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Broad  Pass  region,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  608,  pp.  40-49,  1915. 

2 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Kantishna  region,  Alaska:  U,  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  687,  pp.  37-44,  1919, 


220 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


than  the  Cantwell.  There  can  be  but  little  doubt,  however,  that  the 
lignite-bearing  beds  of  the  upper  Chulitna  basin  are  tc  be  correlated 
with  similar  deposits  that  occur  at  intervals  throughout  that  basin 
and  that  have  been  classed  as  of  Eocene  age. 

UNCONSOLIDATED  DEPOSITS. 

The  unconsolidated  deposits  include  a variety  of  relatively  young 
sediments,  including  the  morainal  materials  dropped  directly  by 
glaciers;  bench  or  high-level  gravels,  mainly  laid  down  by  the  streams 
that  carried  the  outwash  from  the  ancient  greater  glaciers;  and  the 
gravels  of  the  present  stream  flats,  composed  in  part  of  the  outwash 
from  existing  glaciers  and  in  part  of  the  products  of  normal  stream 
erosion.  All  these  deposits  are  undeformed.  Recognizable  moraines 
were  seen  only  near  the  lower  ends  of  the  glaciers  in  which  the  tribu- 
taries from  the  Alaska  Range  head,  but  a layer  of  unassorted  glacial 
till,  composed  of  blue  clay  studded  with  boulders  and  angular  frag- 
ments of  rock,  was  seen  at  many  places  and  may  be  expected  generally 
throughout  those  parts  of  the  lowlands  that  have  escaped  vigorous 
stream  erosion.  The  bench  gravels  are  strongly  developed  along 
the  main  Chulitna  and  in  the  lower  valleys  of  its  large  tributaries 
and  are  especially  conspicuous  from  the  trail  where  it  crosses  Little 
Honolulu  and  Honolulu  creeks  and  East  Fork  of  Chulitna  River.  At 
all  these  places  the  bench  gravels  are  yellowish  from  oxidation  and 
are  capped  by  bluish,  unoxidized  glacial  till.  The  present  stream 
gravels,  composed  in  part  of  glacial  outwash  and  the  reworked  bench 
gravels  and  glacial  materials,  include  also  the  products  of  present- 
day  rock  weathering  and  erosion. 

IGNEOUS  ROCKS. 

The  only  mass  of  intrusive  rock  of  sufficient  size  to  map  separately, 
in  an  investigation  such  as  that  on  which  tlie  present  report  is  based, 
is  a large  body  of  granitic  material  that  lies  on  the  east  side  of 
Chulitna  Valley  and  extends  from  a point  below  the  mouth  of  Indian 
River  northward  to  the  vicinity  of  Honolulu  Creek.  It  is  composed 
of  gray  to  pink  diorite  and  granite,  of  medium  to  coarse  grain,  and  is 
bordered  on  the  east  by  black  slates  and  by  unconsolidated  materials. 
The  area  shown  on  the  map  (PI.  V)  as  occupied  by  granitic  intrusive 
rocks  includes  also  some  large  bodies  of  slate  that  were  caught  up 
and  inclosed  by  the  molten  rock  when  it  was  injected,  but  time  was 
not  available  for  tracing  out  the  outlines  of  these  slate  bodies.  Dikes 
of  granite  and  diorite  also  radiate  from  this  central  mass  in  all  direc- 
tions and  ramify  through  the  neighboring  formations.  Indeed, 
acidic  dike  rocks  that  may  be  related  to  this  large  intrusive  mass  cut 
all  the  formations  already  described  except  the  Tertiary  coal-bearing 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  221 

formation  and  the  younger  unconsolidated  materials.  The  granitic 
intrusive  rocks  of  the  Alaska  Range  and  of  the  Talkeetna  Mountains 
have  generally  been  referred  to  a period  of  extensive  intrusion  in 
Lower  Jurassic  time,  and  the  rocks  here  described  are  of  similar  char- 
acter and  possibly  of  the  same  age.  This  age  determination  is  not 
considered  final,  however,  for  if  the  dike  rocks  that  cut  the  Cantwell 
are  referable  to  the  same  period  of  intrusion  as  the  large  granitic 
bodies  east  of  Chulitna  River,  and  the  Eocene  age  of  the  Cantwell  is 
accepted,  the  date  of  the  intrusion  must  be  post-Eocene.  At  present 
the  evidence  is  not  sufficiently  conclusive  to  justify  a definite  age 
determination  for  the  granitic  intrusives  as  a whole. 

The  group  of  tuffs  and  sediments  from  which  Triassic  fossils  were 
collected  contains  large  amounts  of  basic  lavas,  already  referred  to, 
and  some  basic  dikes  that  were  observed  may  be  related  to  the  same 
period  of  igneous  activity  as  the  lavas. 

ECONOMIC  GEOLOGY. 

HISTORY  OF  MINING  AND  PROSPECTING. 

Little  information  has  been  published  concerning  the  early  history 
of  prospecting  in  the  upper  Chulitna  region,  and  the  date  of  the 
a rival  of  the  first  prospectors  there  is  not  known  to  the  writer. 
Certainly  the  discovery  of  workable  gold  placer  gravels  on  Valdez 
Creek,  a headward  tributary  of  Susitna  River,  in  1903,  stimulated 
prospecting  in  the  upper  basin  of  the  Susitna,  and  it  is  likely  that  in 
the  following  years  some  adventurous  pioneers  made  their  way  into 
the  Chulitna  basin,  but  no  valuable  discoveries  of  gold  were  made, 
and  the  region  remained  generally  unknown.  So  far  as  could  be 
learned,  the  first  claim  Was  staked  in  this  region  by  John  Coffee  on 
Bryn  Mawr  Creek  in  1907,  and  that  claim  was  worked  by  the  owner 
in  1909.  It  is  also  reported  that  the  first  lode  claim,  the  Golden 
Zone,  was  staked  in  1909,  although  the  present  owners  date  their 
holding  from  1912.  The  Northern  Light  lode  was  discovered  in  1911, 
and  during  the  years  1911  and  1912  practically  all  the  claims  that 
are  now  held  and  many  other  claims  later  relinquished  were  first 
staked.  The  only  valuable  mineral  actually  recovered  from  this 
region  has  been  a small  amount  of  placer  gold,  which  was  taken  from 
the  head  of  Bryn  Mawr  Creek.  Most  of  the  interest  in  the  region 
centers  on  the  lodes,  which  contain  gold,  copper,  and  antimony  in 
encouraging  amounts.  The  ores  are  not  free  milling,  however,  and 
the  prospective  value  of  the  lodes  is  in  their  possibility  of  producing 
a large  tonnage  of  ore  of  moderate  richness  rather  than  small  quan- 
tities of  high-grade  ore.  For  the  development  of  properties  of  this 
kind  good  transportation  is  a prime  essential,  both  for  the  bringing 
in  of  supplies  and  equipment  and  for  the  shipment  of  the  mined  ore 
or  concentrates  to  a smelter.  The  remoteness  and  difficulty  of  access 
115086°— 19 15 


222 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


of  the  upper  Chulitna  region  has  so  far  effectually  prevented  any  lode 
mining,  but  the  transportation  to  be  furnished  by  the  Government 
railroad  should  make  it  possible  to  produce  metal  from  those  proper- 
ties that  carry  ores  of  sufficient  richness  to  pay  charges  for  mining, 
transportation,  and  smelting. 

LODE  DEPOSITS. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

No  ore  from  the  lode  deposits  of  the  upper  Chulitna  region  has  yet 
been  reduced,  and  as  a consequence  no  commercial  production  of 
metals  has  been  made,  so  that  all  the  lode  properties  are  still  to  be 
classified  as  prospects.  Active  development  work  has  been  carried 
out  on  eight  or  ten  groups  of  claims,  however,  and  a lesser  amount 
of  prospecting  has  been  done  on  several  other  properties.  The  fact 
that  no  producing  mines  have  yet  been  developed  in  no  way  reflects 
upon  the  character  of  the  ore  deposits  or  upon  the  industry  and 
initiative  of  the  prospectors,  for  the  lack  of  anything  more  than  the 
crudest  and  most  expensive  means  of  transportation  would  have  pre- 
vented the  mining  of  all  but  the  richest  bonanza  deposits.  The  real 
test  of  the  merits  of  the  properties  will  come  when  the  Government 
railroad  is  finished  and  the  best  transportation  that  can  be  hoped  for 
is  available.  Then,  if  the  richness  of  the  ore  bodies  justifies  it,  mines 
will  be  opened. 

Most  of  the  claims  in  this  region  were  staked  and  are  held  by  men 
of  small  means,  who  have  been  compelled  to  finance  their  prospecting 
ventures  in  the  summer  by  their  earnings  during  the  rest  of  the  year. 
As  the  simplest  mining  supplies  have  been  brought  to  this  remote 
country  only  at  great  cost  of  money,  time,  and  effort,  the  amount  of 
work  accomplished  in  opening  up  the  ore  deposits  is  small,  yet  it 
represents  the  utmost  zeal  and  enthusiasm  on  the  part  of  men  who 
have  worked  under  discouraging  conditions. 

The  accompanying  sketch  map  (PL  V)  shows  that  with  the  excep- 
tion of  a single  prospect  on  Antimony  Creek,  east  of  Chulitna  River, 
all  the  lode  prospects  in  the  upper  Chulitna  region  he  along  a nearly 
straight  line,  near  the  contact  between  the  older  greenstone  tuffs, 
cherts,  and  metamorphic  sediments  on  the  east  and  the  Triassic  tuffs, 
limestones,  and  shales  on  the  west,  and  all  he  within  the  Triassic 
materials.  Aside  from  the  lode  claims  on  Ohio  Creek,  which  are  of 
somewhat  different  character,  the  claims  that  have  received  most 
attention  he  in  a narrow  northeast-southwest  belt  about  7 miles  long, 
cut  across  almost  centrahy  by  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River. 

It  is  a significant  fact  that  in  that  part  of  the  group  of  Triassic 
tuffs  and  sediments  in  which  the  ore  bodies  occur  calcareous  rocks 
are  present,  either  as  hmestone,  marble,  or  limy  shale.  Furthermore, 
in  the  vicinity  of  the  ore  bodies  there  is  an  unusual  amount  of  igneous 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  223 


material,  injected  as  dikes  into  the  tuffs,  limestones,  and  shales. 
The  ore  bodies  themselves,  as  imperfectly  exposed  in  the  scanty 
workings,  are  not  sharply  outlined  and  have  not  generally  a definite 
veinlike  character.  They  appear  to  be  irregular  masses  in  which  the 
mineralization  is  heavy  in  places  but  fades  out  into  less  mineralized 
country  rock  in  all  directions.  Indeed,  scattered  specks  of  sulphides 
can  be  found  in  these  rocks  over  wide  areas.  The  principal  metallic 
minerals  recognized  include  arsenopyrite,  pyrite,  sphalerite,  chalcopy- 
rite,  pyrrhotite,  stibnite,  and  galena,  and  assay  returns  show  the 
presence  of  gold.  Some  small,  distinct  veins  cut  the  ore  bodies,  and 
these  carry  sulphides  in  a gangue  of  calcite  or  quartz,  or  both,  but 
most  of  the  ore  seems  to  consist  of  sulphides  that  have  replaced  limy 
rocks,  or  else  it  occurs  as  disseminated  sulphides  in  different  types  of 
material,  including  tuffs,  cherts,  limestones,  and  the  dike  rocks  them- 
selves. The  information  at  hand,  therefore,  indicates  that  as  the 
result  of  the  intrusion  of  acidic  dikes  the  intruded  rocks  suffered  some 
contact  metamorphism.  Mineralized  solutions  from  the  igneous  mass 
penetrated  the  neighboring  rocks  and  replaced  certain  of  the  limy 
beds.  The  calcareous  beds  were  not  alone  affected,  however,  for 
sulphide-bearing  solutions  also  penetrated  certain  tuff  and  chert  beds 
and  replaced  portions  of  these  with  sulphides,  but  the  larger  ore 
bodies,  as  at  present  exposed,  seem  to  represent  the  replacement  of 
calcareous  sediments  by  metallic  sulphides. 

One  great  disadvantage  under  which  the  prospectors  in  the  upper 
Chulitna  region  have  labored  is  the  difficulty  of  obtaining  assay 
returns  with  sufficient  promptness  to  guide  the  progress  of  develop- 
ment work.  In  ore  of  this  character  the  gold  content,  upon  which 
the  value  of  the  ore  largely  depends,  can  not  be  determined  without 
assaying,  and  the  difficulty  of  travel  to  and  from  the  region  has 
usually  resulted  in  compelling  the  prospector  to  have  only  a single 
group  of  assays  made  at  the  end  of  his  season’s  development  work. 

Such  assays  are  too  often  made  of  picked  samples  of  ore,  rather 
than  of  average  samples  across  an  entire  ore  body,  and  the  prospector 
is  thus  in  danger  of  deceiving  himself  in  regard  to  the  average  tenor 
of  the  ore. 

In  the  following  notes  those  lode  prospects  on  which  any  consider- 
able amount  of  development  work  has  been  done  are  described  in 
the  order  in  which  they  lie  from  northeast  to  southwest. 

j LODE  PROSPECTS. 

Northern  Light  group. — The  Northern  Light  group  consists  of  three 
claims  on  the  northeast  side  of  Costello  Creek,  a short  distance  below 
the  mouth  of  Camp  Creek.  These  claims  were  first  staked  by  A.  O. 
Wells,  Frank  Wells,  and  Joe  Focket  in  1911  and  are  still  held  by 


224 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


these  men  together  with  some  additional  partners,  who  later  bought 
interest  in  the  ground.  The  mineralized  area  first  attracted  attention 
on  account  of  the  rusty  red  discoloration  of  the  outcrops.  The 
country  rock  comprises  a confused  assemblage  of  volcanic  tuffs, 
impure  limestones,  and  shales,  cut  by  dike  rocks.  Much  of  the  rock 
is  so  badly  altered  that  its  original  character  is  obscure,  but  tuffs, 
sediments,  and  ore  are  highly  calcareous,  and  even  the  dike  rocks 
contain  calcium  carbonate.  The  area  of  strongest  mineralization 
is  irregular  in  outline  and  has  a greatest  width  of  about  30  feet. 
The  mineralized  rock  strikes  about  N.  65°  W.  and  dips  70°  SE.  It  is 
apparently  the  result  of  the  replacement  of  a limy  bed  by  sulphides 
and  contains  veins  and  hunches  of  quartz.  This  limy  bed  appears 
to  lie  between  metamorphic  tuffs,  which  the  owners  term  the  hanging 
wall,  and  a finely  granular  dike  rock  that  forms  the  footwall.  A 
tunnel  64  feet  long  has  been  driven  into  the  highly  stained  bluff  of 
Costello  Creek  through  material  that  everywhere  contains  finely 
disseminated  sulphides.  At  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit,  in  July, 
1917,  the  breast  of  the  tunnel  showed  a quartz  vein  6 inches  to  1 
foot  thick,  highly  mineralized.  Within  the  mineralized  zone  there 
are  many  horses  of  the  footwall  rock  that  are  comparatively  lean  in 
sulphides,  though  gold  and  silver  have  been  found  in  assays  of  the 
country  rock  on  both  sides  the  area  of  heaviest  mineralization,  which 
has  been  traced  along  the  surface  for  a distance  of  about  800  feet. 
The  metallic  minerals  that  have  been  recognized  include  arsenopyrite, 
pyrite,  chalcopyrite,  sphalerite,  and  a little  stibnite,  and  assays  are 
said  to  show  the  presence  of  gold  and  silver  in  encouraging  amounts. 

Lucrative  group. — The  Lucrative  group,  consisting  of  five  claims, 
lies  on  Costello  Creek  near  the  mouth  of  Camp  Creek.  The  only 
development  work  that  was  seen  consists  of  a tunnel  15  feet  long  that 
is  driven  into  a bluff  on  the  west  side  of  Camp  Creek,  about  1,500  feet 
above  its  mouth.  The  tunnel,  which  runs  S.  70°  W .,  follows  the 
strike  of  a rusty,  mineralized,  vertically  dipping  quartz  stockwork 
in  a mass  of  intrusive  rock.  The  stockwork,  as  shown  in  the  tunnel, 
is  15  to  18  inches  wide,  is  much  fractured  and  broken,  and  is  bordered 
on  each  side  by  a sharply  defined  wall,  along  which  movement  has 
taken  place,  as  shown  by  slickensides  and  gouge.  The  principal 
mineralization  consisted  in  the  formation  of  abundant  arsenopyrite 
in  bluish  banded  quartz,  with  some  specks  of  chalcopyrite.  . The 
owners  were  not  on  this  property  at  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit, 
and  no  information  was  obtained  concerning  the  content  of  the  ore 
in  gold  or  silver. 

Silver  King  group. — The  Silver  King  group,  consisting  of  two 
claims — the  Silver  King  and  Silver  King  Extension — lies  on  the 
northeast  side  of  Colorado  Creek  about  1^  miles  above  the  mouth 
of  that  stream.  This  ground  had  been  located  in  previous  years, 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  225 


but  the  title  had  lapsed,  and  it  was  staked  by  the  present  owner  in 
March,  1917.  At  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit  development  work 
on  this  ground  had  been  confined  to  the  excavation  of  a number  of 
open  cuts.  ’These  cuts  nowhere  penetrated  to  solid,  undisturbed 
ground,  so  that  the  geologic  structure  of  the  ore  deposit  could  not 
be  determined  with  accuracy.  As  shown  by  the  shallow  excavations 
the  center  of  mineralization  appears  to  be  in  a dike  that  is  highly 
altered.  The  dike  probably  cuts  calcareous  sediments,  for  it  con- 
tains much  calcite,  and  both  the  dike  rock  and  the  ore  effervesce 
freely  upon  the  application  of  dilute  hydrochloric  acid.  The  out- 
lines of  the  ore  body  had  not  been  determined,  but  there  is  apparently 
a large  mass  of  material  that  contains  abundant  sulphides.  The 
sulphides  that  were  recognized  include  arsenopyrite,  pyrite,  chal- 
copyrite,  pyrrhotite,  and  stibnite,  both  in  massive  aggregates  and 
finely  disseminated  throughout  the  country  rock.  Small  calcite 
veinlets  were  observed,  and  in  one  cut  a body  of  massive  stibnite 
from  6 inches  to  1 foot  thick  that  strikes  about  east  and  west  and 
dips  23°  S.  is  exposed.  No  assays  were  available,  and  the  content  of 
the  ore  in  gold  and  silver  was  not  known. 

Riverside  group. — The  Riverside  group  comprises  several  claims 
that  adjoin  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  on  its  southwest  side,  about 
a mile  above  the  mouth  of  Bryn  Mawr  Creek.  Developments  in  1917 
included  half  a dozen  large  open  cuts,  a shaft  15  feet  deep,  and  two 
tunnels,  one  10  feet  long  and  the  other  of  unknown  length,  now  caved 
in.  All  these  workings  are  at  the  base  of  a steep  rock  bluff,  at  the 
edge  of  the  broad  gravel  flat  of  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River.  The 
rocks  exposed  consist  predominantly  of  steeply  dipping  green  to  red 
tuffs,  with  which  are  associated  pale-pink,  green,  and  blue-gray 
cherts,  locally  banded;  rusty  gray  and  white  marble;  and  abundant 
dikes  of  medium-grained  acidic  intrusive  rocks.  The  tuffs  are  hard 
and  dense  and  range  in  texture  from  fine-grained  to  very  coarse. 
The  marbles  and  cherts  are  less  abundant  but  are  visible  in  several 
of  the  open  cuts.  Tuffs,  cherts,  and  calcareous  beds  are  all  more  or 
less  altered  by  contact  metamorphism,  as  a result  of  their  intimate 
intrusion  by  the  dike  rocks. 

The  openings  that  have  beeji  made  on  these  claims  are  unconnected, 
and  the  surface  between  them  is  covered  by  vegetation  and  by  loose 
glacial  deposits  and  talus,  so  that  little  can  now  be  said  in  regard  to 
the  geologic  relations  and  extent  of  the  mineralized  area.  Such  data 
as  could  be  obtained,  however,  indicate  that  here,  as  at  other  places 
in  the  district,  the  mineralization  is  the  result  of  the  replacement  of 
calcareous  beds  by  quartz  and  metallic  sulphides,  introduced  by 
mineralizing  solutions  that  were  related  to  the  intruded  dike  rocks. 
The  ore  examined  consists  of  a rusty  quartz  gangue  full  of  vugs  into 
which  project  quartz  prisms  terminated  by  rhombohedrons. 


226 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Abundant  sulphides,  including  arsenopyrite,  pyrite,  cbalcopyrite, 
galena,  and  probably  sphalerite  are  inclosed  by  the  quartz  gangue, 
and  specks  of  these  sulphides  occur  without  quartz  gangue  in  marble, 
tuffs,  and  dike  rocks.  A little  green  copper  carbonate  stain  was 
noted.  It  is  reported  that  average  assays  taken  over  a zone  in  the 
marble  12  feet  wide  yielded  several  dollars  a ton  in  gold  and  silver. 

Lindfors  group. — The  Lindfors  group  includes  three  claims,  known 
as  the  Hill  Top,  Morning  Glory,  and  Lucky  Strike,  all  lying  at  the 
head  of  Bryn  Mawr  Creek  and  adjoining  the  Golden  Zone  group. 
This  ground  was  staked  in  1913,  and  the  developments  consist  of  a 
number  of  open  cuts  and  strippings  along  both  bluffs  of  Bryn  Mawr 
Creek.  No  underground  work  had  been  done  on  these  claims  in 
July,  1917.  The  country  rock,  as  exposed  in  the  creek  bluffs  and 
the  open  cuts,  consists  of  a group  of  altered  materials,  the  original 
character  of  some  of  which  is  obscure.  Tuffs,  marbles,  and  dike 
rocks  in  different  stages  of  alteration  were  noted,  and  all  contain 
some  disseminated  sulphides.  It  is  evident  that  on  these  claims  the 
mineralization  was  due  to  the  replacement  of  calcareous  sediments 
by  quartz  and  sulphides  and  to  the  impregnation  of  different  types 
of  country  rock  with  sulphides  introduced  in  connection  with  the 
intrusion  of  acidic  dikes.  Apparently  the  intrusion  was  followed 
by  a period  of  pneumatolytic  alteration  of  both  the  dikes  and  the 
rock  into  which  they  were  intruded,  and  some  metallic  minerals 
may  have  been  introduced  at  that  time.  One  open  cut  shows  a vein 
of  massive  arsenopyrite  from  4 to  20  inches  thick  that  lies  between  a 
much  decomposed  dike  and  some  altered  tuffs.  Another  cut  showed 
a considerable  area  in  which  disseminated  sulphides  and  some  small 
sulphide-bearing  quartz  veinlets,  containing  also  a brown-weathering 
carbonate  that  is  probably  ankerite,  cut  through  much  altered  cal- 
careous materials.  Arsenopyrite,  pyrite,  chalcopyrite,  and  sphalerite 
were  recognized,  and  it  is  reported  that  some  rich  assays  have  been 
obtained  and  that  large  quantities  of  materials  carry  encouraging 
amounts  of  gold. 

Golden  Zone  group. — The  Golden  Zone  group  includes  three  claims 
in  the  upper  basin  of  Bryn  Mawr  Creek,  adjoining  the  Lindfors 
group  on  the  northwest.  The  claims  were  staked  in  1912,  attention 
having  been  attracted  to  this  locality  by  the  presence  of  a large  hill, 
the  rock  of  which  is  oxidized  to  a rusty  red  and  is  conspicuous  for  a 
long  distance.  This  hill  on  examination  proves  to  be  composed  of 
a body  of  acidic  rock  that  is  intruded  into  an  assemblage  of  materials 
including  tuff,  marble,  and  shale.  The  intrusive  mass  is  generally 
impregnated  with  scattered  specks  of  sulphides,  but  locally  the 
mineralization  is  heavy,  and  the  rock  is  cut  by  many  small  quartz 
veinlets.  In  places  the  intrusive  material  is  massive  and  appears 
fresh  in  hand  specimens,  but  in  the  more  heavily  mineralized  portion 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  227 


it  is  much  altered  and  broken  into  slabs  3 to  8 inches  thick,  separated 
by  layers  of  pulverulent  material  stained  by  iron  oxide  and  copper 
carbonate.  The  developments  include  many  small  open  cuts,  one 
large  cut  120  feet  long,  and  221  feet  of  underground  workings.  The 
large  open  cut  shows  altered  and  rusty  intrusive  material  that  con- 
tains disseminated  sulphides  and  a little  quartz,  and  an  average 
sample  through  the  whole  cut  is  said  to  have  yielded  an  encouraging 
amount  of  gold  and  silver.  The  tunnel,  which  was  driven  in  a 
northwest  direction  on  the  slope  of  the  hill  toward  Bryn  Mawr  Creek 
is  straight  for  137  feet  and  at  a point  82  feet  from  the  portal  has  a 
crosscut  to  the  southwest  84  feet  long.  The  main  tunnel  was  driven 
through  an  altered  and  generally  decomposed  mass  of  dike  rock  in 
which  iron  and  copper  sulphides  are  generally  disseminated  and  are 
especially  abundant  along  cracks,  joints,  and  slip  zones.  Some 
bunches  and  stringers  of  quartz  are  present  in  the  dike  rock.  The 
crosscut  follows  a slip  zone  which  contains  gouge.  Some  white  to 
buff  soft  calcareous  material  was  also  excavated  from  the  tunnel. 
The  metallic  minerals  that  have  been  recognized  on  this  property 
include  arsenopyrite,  pyrite,  sphalerite,  chalcopyrite,  galena,  mala- 
chite, and  probably  stibnite.  It  is  reported  that  assays  of  the  average 
material  removed  from  the  tunnel  show  several  dollars  a ton  in  gold 
and  silver,  and  some  rather  high  assays  were  procured.  No  one  was 
resident  on  this  property  when  it  was  visited  in  July,  1917. 

Hector  group. — The  Hector  group  includes  two  claims  that  lie  on  the 
Long  Creek  side  of  the  divide  between  Long  Creek  and  West  Fork 
of  Chulitna  River,  opposite  the  head  of  Bryn  Mawr  Creek.  The 
ground  was  staked  in  1914,  and  the  developments  include  only  a 
number  of  shallow  open  cuts.  These  cuts  were  made  on  small  rock 
exposures  that  projected  through  a covering  of  vegetation  and  of 
surficial  materials,  so  that  no  large  surface  of  bedrock  was  available 
for  examination,  either  for  deciphering  the  geologic  relations  or  for 
determining  the  extent  of  the  ore  bodies.  The  rocks  examined 
include  more  or  less  altered  materials  that  are  probably  the  metamor- 
phic  equivalents  of  siliceous  shales,  graywackes,  and  tuffs.  The  finer 
beds  are  banded  white,  brown,  and  green  cherts,  interbedded  with 
dense  graywackes  and  argillites.  The  beds  strike  S.  75°-80°  W.  and 
have  steep  dips,  generally  to  the  northwest.  The  whole  assemblage 
has  been  intimately  cut  by  acidic  intrusive  rocks,  which  form  dikes 
of  considerable  size  and  are  locally  interleaved  in  thin  layers  with 
the  sediments.  The  cherts  are  highly  siliceous,  but  all  the  other 
materials  have  an  appreciable  content  of  calcium  carbonate,  and 
both  the  graywackes  and  the  dike  rocks  effervesce  freely  with  dilute 
hydrochloric  acid. 

The  principal  ore  body,  as  exposed  in  a shallow  trench,  consists  of 
chalcopyrite  and  pyrrho tite,  intimately  mixed,  disseminated  through 


228 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


the  coarser  sediments  and  the  dike  rocks.  A trench  shows  minerali- 
zation over  a distance  of  30  feet  across  the  bedding,  and  other  open- 
ings along  the  strike  show  abundant  sulphides  250  feet  from  the 
principal  opening.  The  sulphides  replace  certain  beds  and  occur  in 
the  dike  rocks  themselves.  Chert  beds  that  cut  through  the  mineral- 
ized area  are  almost  free  from  sulphides.  The  sulphides  range  in 
abundance  from  scattered  small  specks  of  chalcopyrite  and  pyrrhotite 
to  masses  of  sulphides  in  which  little  rock  is  visible.  Some  small 
quartz  and  calcite  veinlets  cut  the  ore,  but  the  degree  of  mineralization 
seems  to  be  independent  of  their  presence.  Assays  of  the  best  ore 
are  said  to  have  yielded  17  per  cent  of  copper,  but  development  has 
not  yet  proceeded  far  enough  to  determine  the  probable  size  of  the 
ore  body  or  the  influence  of  depth  upon  the  character  and  degree  of 
mineralization. 

Ready  Cash  group. — The  Ready  Cash  group,  which  is  reported  to 
include  nine  claims,  lies  on  the  northeast  side  of  Ohio  Creek  about  3 
miles  above  the  mouth  of  Christy  Creek.  At  the  time  of  the  writer’s 
visit,  in  July,  1917,  no  one  was  resident  on  these  claims,  and  none  of 
the  owners  were  seen  in  the  country,  so  that  the  only  information 
gathered  was  that  procured  in  a brief  study  of  the  workings  that 
could  be  found  by  following  trails  from  the  camp  site.  The  country 
rock  in  the  vicinity  of  the  workings  consists  of  interbedded  argillites, 
graywackes,  and  greenstone  tuffs,  all  more  or  less  metamorphosed. 
The  local  structure  is  generally  difficult  to  determine,  but  the  pre- 
vailing larger  structural  features  strike  somewhat  east  of  north  and  in 
general  dip  rather  steeply  eastward.  Apparently  the  attention  of 
the  prospectors  was  attracted  to  this  locality  by  a quartz  vein  that 
crops  out  conspicuously  on  the  east  wall  of  a small  gulch  that  is  tribu- 
tary to  Ohio  Creek  from  the  north.  This  vein,  which  cuts  altered 
slates,  graywackes,  and  tuffs,  is  8 to  10  feet  wide,  strikes  N.  15°  E., 
and  dips  vertically.  It  is  rusty  and  shows  some  stains  of  copper 
carbonate.  A short  distance  down  the  mountain  an  adit  tunnel  170 
feet  long  was  driven  in  a direction  S.  80°  E.,  apparently  for  the  purpose 
of  cutting  the  quartz  vein  at  depth.  The  breast  of  the  tunnel  had  not 
yet  reached  the  vein  exposed  on  the  surface,  but  in  the  tunnel  a few 
small  quartz  veins  from  1 to  3 inches  wide  were  intersected.  No  data 
were  obtained  concerning  the  assay  values  of  the  ores  at  this  property. 

It  is  reported  that  another  tunnel  75  feet  long  has  been  driven  on 
this  property  a short  distance  downstream  from  the  tunnel  already 
mentioned  and  on  the  same  vein  as  that  which  the  170-foot  tunnel 
was  meant  to  cut.  The  vein  is  said  to  be  from  12  to  15  inches  wide, 
to  carry  abundant  galena,  and  to  show  high  assays  in  silver.  Pieces 
of  ore  which  were  found  at  the  entrance  to  the  long  tunnel  but  which 
presumably  come  from  the  other  tunnel  show  quartz  with  some  cal- 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  229 

cite  that  carries  abundant  arsenopyrite,  pyrite,  chalcopyrite,  and 
galena. 

North  Carolina  group. — The  North  Carolina  group  includes  several 
claims  that  lie  in  the  upper  basin  of  Antimony  Creek,  a small  tributary 
of  East  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  that  joins  that  stream  from  the  east 
at  the  trail  crossing,  1 mile  above  the  mouth  of  East  Fork.  Mining 
developments  include  a log  cabin,  in  the  highest  patch  of  timber  on 
the  creek,  two  tunnels,  40  and  10  feet  long,  and  a number  of  open  cuts 
and  strippings. 

The  mouth  of  Antimony  Creek  has  an  elevation  of  approximately 
1,625  feet  above  sea  level.  About  3 miles  above  the  mouth  of  the 
stream,  at  an  elevation  of  2,700  feet,  a 40-foot  tunnel  has  been  driven 
into  the  steep  north  bluff  of  the  valley,  about  75  feet  above  the  creek, 
on  a claim  called  North  Carolina  No.  3.  The  tunnel  follows  the  foot- 
wall  contact  of  a 3-foot  basic  dike  with  the  shale,  impure  limestone, 
and  graywacke  country  rock.  The  dike  strikes  S.  65°  W.  and  dips  60° 
SE.,  and  the  sediments  have  about  the  same  strike  hut  dip  more 
gently.  The  tunnel  is  timbered  and  lagged  and  is  caved  at  the  breast, 
so  that  no  opportunity  was  afforded  to  study  the  conditions  of  struc- 
ture and  mineralization  in  it.  It  is  reported  that  at  the  breast  there 
is  a gouge-filled  slip  zone,  in  which  are  scattered  cubes  and  bunches 
of  pyrite  in  the  gouge.  Pieces  of  ore  found  on  the  dump  show 
abundant  pyrite,  which  occurs  as  veins  or  streaks  in  the  altered  shales 
or  argillites.  The  sulphide  streaks  are  highly  calcareous,  and  where 
the  shales  that  carry  the  sulphides  are  more  siliceous  they  contain  tiny 
films  and  veinlets  of  calcite.  Some  secondary  crystalline  calcite  also 
occurs  surrounded  by  pyrite.  The  pyrite  is  probably  due  to  the 
replacement  of  limy  sediments  by  mineralized  solutions  that  circu- 
lated along  a fault  zone.  Assays  are  said  to  show  the  presence  of 
small  amounts  of  gold. 

Farther  up  Antimony  Creek,  on  the  top  of  the  bordering  ridge  on 
the  north,  at  an  elevation  of  about  4,000  feet,  a 10-foot  tunnel  has 
been  driven  on  a claim  known  as  North  Carolina  No.  5.  This  tunnel 
penetrates  black  argillites,  slates,  and  graywackes  that  on  the  surface 
are  so  weathered  and  disturbed  that  their  structure  is  not  determi- 
nable. The  tunnel  is  timbered  and  is  caved  at  the  breast,  so  that  the 
geologic  conditions  encountered  in  driving  it  could  not  be  determined. 
An  ore  pile  at  the  mouth  of  the  tunnel  contains  several  tons  of  massive 
stibnite  ore  that  includes  both  finely  granular  stibnite  and  a mixture 
of  the  granular  sulphide  with  acicular  crystals.  In  some  specimens 
there  is  a considerable  admixture  of  granular  quartz  through  the 
stibnite,  but  other  pieces  show  massive  sulphide  with  no  visible 
gangue.  Small  amounts  of  yellow  and  reddish  secondary  oxidation 
products,  probably  stibiconite  and  kermesite,  were  noted  on  weathered 
surfaces  and  in  fractures  in  the  ore,  and  some  rusty  quartz  is  associa  ted 


230 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


with.  it.  The  owners  report  that  the  stibnite  occurs  in  lenses  or  kid- 
neys that  have  a maximum  thickness  of  2 feet  and  are  only  a few  feet 
long  and  that  lie  parallel  in  the  vein.  They  report  also  that  the 
stibnite  carries  some  gold. 

Other  prospects.- — In  addition  to  the  prospects  already  described,  on 
which  a considerable  amount  of  systematic  development  work  has 
been  done,  there  are  within  the  upper  Chulitna  region  a number  of 
claims  or  groups  of  claims  that  show  different  degrees  of  mineralization 
and  on  which  the  annual  assessment  work  has  been  done  for  some 
years.  On  most  of  these  claims  too  little  work  has  been  done  to 
outline  the  ore  bodies  or  to  reveal  the  conditions  or  extent  of  the 
mineralization.  The  following  notes  mention  those  properties  in  this 
class  to  which  the  writer’s  attention  was  directed: 

The  Center  Star  group  of  two  claims  lies  northeast  of  the  Silver 
King  group  and  on  a line  between  it  and  the  Northern  Light  property. 
The  openings,  which  include  several  small  open  cuts  and  strippings, 
show  a bluish  dike  rock  in  which  disseminated  arsenopyrite,  pyrite, 
and  chalcopyrite  were  recognized. 

The  Flaurier  group  of  five  claims  adjoins  the  Riverside  group  on  the 
west.  The  country  rock  includes  the  same  group  of  cherts,  argillites, 
tuffs,  and  possibly  limestone  cut  by  dikes  that  have  already  been 
described  as  occurring  at  the  Riverside  group.  Open  cuts  show 
altered,  rusty  materials  that  locally  contain  considerable  quantities 
of  sulphides,  which  seem  to  be  scattered  through  the  rock  by  impreg- 
nation rather  than  to  occur  as  a segregated  replacement  deposit. 
Assays  taken  over  a considerable  area  of  this  material  are  said  to  show- 
a few  dollars  in  gold  and  silver  to  the  ton. 

The  Jumbo  is  a fractional  claim  adjoining  the  Riverside  and  lying 
2,000  feet  southwest  of  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River.  On  this  claim 
a large  open  cut  shows  a fine-grained  conglomerate  in  which  are 
bunches  and  specks  of  sulphides,  mainly  pyrrhotite  but  with  some 
pyrite  and  chalcopyrite. 

The  Golden  Zone  Extension  group  includes  some  claims  that  lie 
adjacent  to  the  Golden  Zone  group  on  the  southwest.  Prospecting 
has  been  carried  on  by  the  opening  of  a number  of  long,  shallow 
trenches,  which  for  the  most  part  fail  to  penetrate  through  the  loose 
surficial  material  to  undisturbed  bedrock.  The  underlying  rock 
apparently  consists  of  altered  tuff,  chert,  and  argillites  cut  by  dike 
rocks,  in  which  there  is  locally  some  disseminated  arsenopyrite. 

It  is  reported  that  a large  number  of  claims  have  been  staked  on 
the  main  northern  branch  of  West  Fork  of  Chulitna  River  for  man- 
ganese. The  manganese  is  said  to  occur  in  seams  in  slate  and  ser- 
pentine. The  surface  ores  are  all  soft  and  decomposed,  and  no 
excavations  have  been  made  that  show  the  character  of  the  man- 
ganese ore  at  depth. 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  UPPER  CHULITNA  REGION.  231 

GOLD  PLACER  MINES  AND  PROSPECTS. 

In  the  upper  Chulitna  region,  as  in  most  other  unexplored  coun- 
tries, the  efforts  of  the  earliest  prospectors  were  directed  to  the  search 
for  easily  mined  gold  placer  deposits,  and  in  1907  the  first  claims 
located  in  this  region  were  staked  for  placer  gold,  on  upper  Bryn 
Mawr  Creek.  In  1909  some  mining  was  done  on  this  ground,  and  a 
small  amount  of  gold  was  recovered.  Prospecting  for  gold  placer 
gravels  has  continued  since  that  time,  and  although  gold  has  been 
found  at  many  places,  it  has  nowhere  been  found  in  sufficient  amount 
to  warrant  mining  under  the  conditions  imposed  by  the  remoteness 
and  difficulty  of  access  of  the  region. 

In  1917  some  prospecting  for  gold  was  done  on  West  Fork  of 
Chulitna  River,  but  no  workable  deposits  were  found.  Two  men 
continued  the  attempt  to  discover  a pay  streak  on  lower  Shotgun 
Creek,  a tributary  of  lower  Ohio  Creek  from  the  west.  Encouraging 
amounts  of  gold  have  been  found  at  that  locality,  and  several  persons 
have  at  one  time  or  another  attempted  to  mine  there,  but  so  far  with- 
out success. 

The  gravels  of  Gold  Creek,  a tributary  that  joins  Susitna  River 
from  the  east  2 miles  below  the  mouth  of  Indian  River,  have  long 
been  known  to  be  auriferous,  and  attempts  to  mine  them  have  been 
made  at  intervals  by  different  men.  A small  amount  of  gold  has  been 
recovered,  but  no  ground  rich  enough  to  yield  a profit  to  the  miners 
has  yet  been  found. 

Some  gold  has  from  time  to  time  been  won  from  the  bars  of  Susitna 
River  near  the  mouth  of  Gold  Creek  and  a short  distance  below  Dead- 
horse  Hill.  This  gold  was  all  fine  and  occurred  near  the  top  of  the 
stream-gravel  deposits.  Deeper  holes  sunk  through  the  gold-bearing 
gravels  failed  to  show  any  increase  in  the  amount  of  gold  with  depth 
but  rather  a decrease. 

COAL. 

As  has  already  been  stated,  coal-bearing  Tertiary  beds  are  widely 
distributed  throughout  the  basin  of  Susitna  River  and  are  known  to 
occur  at  two  localities  in  the  upper  Chulitna  region.  The  only  one 
of  these  localities  that  was  visited  in  1917  lies  near  the  head  of  Coal 
Creek,  a small  stream  that  flows  into  Camp  Creek,  which  in  turn  is 
tributary  to  Costello  Creek  from  the  northeast.  There  the  bluffs 
show  a section  of  Tertiary  shale  and  lignite.  At  the  time  of  the 
writer’s  visit,  in  July,  1917,  a snow  bank  covered  much  of  the  out- 
crop, and  the  surface  of  the  beds  was  partly  masked  by  detritus,  but 
in  a vertical  section  of  24  feet  three  lignite  beds,  6,  5,  and  9 feet  thick, 
separated  by  shale  beds,  were  seen.  A 15-foot  tunnel,  driven  on 
one  coal  bed,  shows  a 6-foot  face  of  bright  black  lignite  of  fair  quality. 


232 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Neither  the  top  nor  the  bottom  of  this  bed  was  seen  in  the  tunnel,  so 
the  thickness  certainly  exceeds  6 feet.  The  coal  beds  dip  about  14°  E. 
The  area  of  the  coal  field  is  not  known,  for  exposures  are  few,  but  the 
coal  is  apparently  limited  on  the  west  by  Camp  Creek  and  is  said  to 
crop  out  at  least  1,200  feet  east  of  the  tunnel.  This  lignite  has  had  a 
small  local  use  by  the  prospectors  for  fuel  for  camps  and  as  forge  coal. 

It  is  reported  that  Tertiary  deposits  containing  a lignite  bed  several 
feet  thick  crop  out  in  the  valley  of  a tributary  of  Middle  Fork  of 
Chulitna  River,  about  11  miles  above  the  j miction  of  East  and  Middle 
forks,  between  the  trail  and  the  line  of  the  railroad  survey,  and  coal- 
bearing beds  are  said  to  crop  out  on  Coal  Creek,  a southeastward- 
flowing tributary  of  the  Chulitna,  south  of  Ohio  Creek. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  THE  KAHILTNA 

VALLEY. 


By  J.  B.  Mertie,  Jr. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  valley  of  Kahiltna  River  includes  an  area  about  80  miles  long 
and  from  5 to  20  miles  wide,  which  begins  at  the  confluence  of 
Kahiltna  and  Yentna  rivers  and  extends  somewhat  west  of  north 
to  the  crest  of  the  Alaska  Range.  This  strip  of  territory,  aggregat- 
ing about  1,000  square  miles,  forms  the  central  part  of  the  Yentna 
district.  Cache  Creek  and  its  tributaries  and  the  headwater  tribu- 
taries of  Peters  Creek  constitute  the  present  center  of  mining  activity 
in  the  Kahiltna  Valley. 

The  exploratory  expeditions  of  Spurr  1 and  Eldridge  2 in  1898  and 
of  Brooks  3 in  1902  yielded  the  first  geographic  and  geologic  knowl- 
edge of  Yentna  and  Susitna  rivers,  but  Kahiltna  River  and  its  tribu- 
taries were  not  visited  by  these  earlier  workers.  The  first  authentic 
geographic  knowledge  of  the  Kahiltna  Valley  'was  obtained  in  1906, 
when  the  area  now  known  as  the  Yentna  district  was  mapped  topo- 
graphically by  R.  W.  Porter,  working  independently  of  the  Geolog- 
ical Survey.  In  1911  Capps  4 visited  the  Yentna  district,  including 
the  valley  of  Kahiltna  River,  and  made  numerous  corrections  and 
additions  to  the  topographic  mapping  of  Porter,  and  two  years 
later  his  reconnaissance  topographic  and  geologic  map  of  the  region 
was  published. 

Placer  mining  began  in  the  Cache  Creek  and  Peters  Creek  basins 
in  1905  and  has  continued  to  the  present  time.  Capps,  in  addition 
to  his  geologic  work  in  this  district,  also  studied  the  gold  placers 
and  reported  on  their  occurrence,  origin,  and  value. 

The  Kahiltna  Valley,  including  Cache  and  Peters  creeks,  was 
visited  by  the  writer  in  September,  1917,  with  two  objects  in  view. 
First,  platinum  had  been  recently  reported  from  gold  placers  at 
several  localities  along  the  lower  part  of  Kahiltna  River,  and  the 

1 Spurr,  J.  E.,  A reconnaissance  in  southwestern  Alaska  in  1898:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Twentieth  Ann. 
Kept.,  pt.  7,  pp.  31-264,  1900. 

2 Eldridge,  G.  H.,  A reconnaissance  in  the  Susitna  basin  and  adjacent  territory,  Alaska,  in  1898:  Idem, 

pp.  1-30. 

3 Brooks,  A.  H.,  The  Mount  McKinley  region,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  70, 1911. 

4 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Yentna  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  534,  1913. 


233 


234  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

United  States  Geological  Survey  desired  to  investigate  these  occur- 
rences of  platinum  and  determine,  if  possible,  their  significance  and 
value,  as  well  as  to  search  for  other  platinum -bearing  gravels ; second, 
it  was  desirable  to  learn  the  amount  of  mining  development  which 
had  taken  place  during  the  preceding  six  years  and  thus  to  bring  up 
to  date  the  record  of  the  placer-mining  industry  in  this  district. 
These  objectives  were  accomplished  in  a trip  of  27  days,  starting 
from  and  returning  to  Anchorage. 

The  writer  takes  this  opportunity  to  acknowledge  gratefully  the 
hospitality  and  cordial  cooperation  of  the  mining  men  in  the  Cache 
Creek  district.  Special  thanks  are  due  to  Messrs.  Harris  and  Murray, 
of  the  Cache  Creek  Dredging  Co.  and  the  Cache  Creek  Mining  Co., 
respectively,  for  many  favors  received. 

GEOGRAPHY. 

The  geographic  features  of  the  Yentna  district  have  already  been 
stated  in  some  detail  by  Capps,1  and  the  following  notes  are  written 
only  as  a summary  of  the  data  for  Kahiltna  Valley.  Kahiltna 
River  has  its  source  in  Kahiltna  Glacier,  from  which  a number  of 
glacial  streams  emerge  and  flow  for  miles  as  a system  of  anasto- 
mosing channels  over  an  aggraded  flood  plain  of  sand  and  gravel 
but  gradually  unite  downstream  to  form  the  main  river.  A main 
channel  may  be  said  to  begin  at  the  mouth  of  Treasure  Creek,  about 
7 miles  in  an  air  line  from  the  foot  of  the  glacier,  but  even  from  this 
point  downstream  to  the  flats  the  river  flows  through  many  sloughs 
over  a wide  flood  plain.  At  the  Kahiltna  Flats  the  main  channel 
and  sloughs  unite  and  spread  out  across  the  valley  bottom  to  form  a 
wide  expanse  of  shadow  water  and  shifting  sand  bars,  through  which 
a shallow-draft  poling  boat  in  many  places  has  difficulty  in  finding 
a channel.  Below  the  flats  the  main  channel  is  well  defined,  though 
in  places  sloughs  cause  islands  in  the  river.  At  a point  20  miles  in 
an  air  line  below  the  glacier,  at  Camp  2,  the  river  enters  a canyon  and 
cuts  through  the  Eocene  coal-bearing  formation  for  several  miles  in 
a series  of  rapids.  Below  the  mouth  of  Peters  Creek  the  river  is 
incised  in  the  coal-bearing  rooks  at  many  places  and  is  a swift  stream, 
which  here  and  there  flows  in  a gorge.  A stretch  of  several  miles  of 
this  character  at  the  lower  end  of  the  Kahiltna  is  sometimes  referred 
to  as  the  lower  canyon  of  the  Kahiltna.  The  length  of  Kahiltna 
River,  from  Kahiltna  Glacier  to  its  junction  with  Yentna  River,  is 
about  42  miles  in  an  air  line,  though  much  more  than  that  by  the 
windings  of  the  stream. 

All  the  larger  tributaries  of  Kahiltna  River,  with  the  exception 
of  Treasure  Creek,  enter  from  the  east  side  of  the  valley  and  drain 


1 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Yentna  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  534,  pp.  11-22, 1913. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  235 

the  Dutch,  Peters,  and  Little  Peters  hills.  Named  in  order  down- 
stream, they  are  Granite,  Cache,  Hungryman,  Bear,  and  Peters 
creeks,  of  which  Cache  and  Peters  creeks  are  the  largest.  These 
eastern  tributaries  of  Kahiltna  River  emerge  from  the  hills  in  gorges, 
of  which  the  lower  canyon  of  Cache  Creek  is  typical,  and  flow  over 
the  Kahiltna  flood  plain  to  join  the  main  river.  The  east  side  of 
the  Dutch  and  Peters  hills  is  drained  by  Tokichitna  River  and  its 
tributaries,  which  head  against  the  headwater  tributaries  of  Peters 
and  Granite  creeks. 

The  Dutch,  Peters,  and  Little  Peters  hills  form  a kite-shaped  area 
that  is  bounded  on  the  northeast  by  the  valley  floor  of  Tokichitna 
River,  on  the  southeast  by  the  wide  alluvial  flats  of  Chulitna  and 
Susitna  rivers,  on  the  southwest  by  the  Kahiltna  flood  plain  and 
Kahiltna  Glacier,  and  on  the  northwest  by  Dutch  Creek,  a tributary 
of  Granite  Creek,  and  the  upper  Tokichitna  tributaries.  These  three 
groups  of  hills,  which  include  the  Cache  Creek  mining  district,  cover 
an  area  of  about  300  square  miles  adjoining  what  may  be  termed  the 
upper  Kahiltna  basin.  The  lower  Kahiltna  Valley  may  be  said  to 
begin  at  the  mouth  of  Peters  Creek  and  to  extend  to  Yentna  River. 
The  Dutch  Hills  rise  to  an  elevation  of  over  4,000  feet,  the  Peters 
Hills  between  3,000  and  4,000  feet,  and  the  Little  Peters  Hills  only 
2,000  feet.  A wide  trough-shaped  depression  of  glacial  origin,  occu- 
pied by  Cache  Creek  and  the  headwater  tributaries  of  Peters  Creek 
and  lying  for  the  most  part  between  elevations  of  2,000  to  2,400  feet, 
separates  the  Dutch  Hills  from  the  Peters  Hills  to  the  south.  The 
Peters  Hills  are  separated  from  the  Little  Peters  Hills  by  a wide, 
high,  level  flat  at  the  heads  of  Hungryman  and  Bear  creeks. 

The  valley  floor  of  Kahiltna  River  and  its  eastward  continuation 
into  the  Susitna  Flats  constitute  the  lowland  area  of  Kahiltna  Valley. 
These  lowlands  consist  of  wide  stretches  of  level  alluvium,  with  some 
low  rolling  hills,  separated  usually  from  one  another  by  lakes,  swamps, 
or  sluggish  meandering  streams.  The  lower  Kahiltna  V alley  ranges  in 
elevation  from  200  to  500  feet;  the  elevation  at  the  foot  of  Kahiltna 
Glacier  is  about  800  feet.  In  general,  the  lowland  areas  are  timbered 
and  densely  overgrown  by  low  brush. 

The  only  settlement  in  the  lower  Kahiltna  Valley  is  McDougall, 
on  the  north  bank  of  Yentna  River  about  8 miles  above  the  mouth 
of  the  Kahiltna.  The  nearest  post  office  is  at  Susitna,  on  the  east 
bank  of  Susitna  River  at  the  mouth  of  the  Yentna,  29  miles  in  an  air 
line  from  McDougall.  About  100  men  are  engaged  in  mining  in  the 
Kahiltna  Valley,  chiefly  in  the  valleys  of  Cache  and  Peters  creeks. 


236 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 
GEOLOGY. 


SLATE  AND  GRAYWACKE  SERIES. 

The  larger  geologic  units  of  Kahiltna  Valley  have  already  been 
described  and  mapped  by  Capps  1 and  are  shown  on  the  geologic 
sketch  map  in  this  report  (PL  VI).  The  oldest  rock  formation 
known  in  the  valley  is  a series  of  slates  and  graywackes,  with  certain 
phyllitio  and  quartzitic  phases,  which  forms  the  predominating 
country  rock  of  the  Dutch,  Peters,  and  Little  Peters  hills  and  extends 
to  the  northeast  and  southeast  along  the  south  flank  of  the  Alaska 
Range.  With  regard  to  the  lithologic  character  of  these  rocks,  par- 
ticularly in  the  Dutch  and  Peters  hills,  Capps  2 writes  as  follows: 

They  consist  chiefly  of  black  to  gray  slates  and  phyllites,  in  many  places  carbo- 
naceous, and  beds  of  graywacke,  which  range  from  fine-grained  to  coarse  gritty  rocks. 
In  some  places  the  rocks  are  massive,  with  argillites  instead  of  slates,  but  the  foliated 
types  are  much  more  widespread  than  the  massive  types.  It  is  difficult  to  estimate 
just  what  proportion  of  the  whole  series  is  formed  by  the  graywacke  beds.  Many 
sections  show  great  thicknesses  of  the  slaty  phases,  with  very  little  graywacke  present. 
At  other  localities  the  graywackes  preponderate,  occurring  in  thick,  massive  beds 
that  show  little  foliation  or  schistosity  and  that  are  often  mistaken  by  the  miners  for 
fine-grained  dike  rocks,  which  they  closely  resemble.  The  whole  series  is  much 
jointed,  the  graywackes  less  closely  than  the  slates,  which  are  in  many  places  broken 
into  long  prismatic  pieces  by  sets  of  intersecting  joints. 

Of  the  slates  in  general  Capps  2 further  says : 

Evidences  of  mineralization  are  widespread  in  these  rocks.  A characteristic  phase 
of  the  slates  in  many  places  throughout  the  region  contains  small  cubical  cavities,  the 
largest  a quarter  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  formed  by  the  leaching  out  of  cubes  of  iron 
pyrite,  the  rock  being  discolored  for  some  distance  around  each  cavity.  Some  of  the 
graywacke  beds  also  show  the  presence  of  much  finely  disseminated  pyrite. 

The  slate  and  graywacke  series  is  greatly  folded  and  faulted  and 
exhibits  great  variation  in  strike  and  dip.  The  average  strike, 
however,  is  about  N.  60°  E.,  and  the  general  dip  is  at  a high  angle 
to  the  south.  On  account  of  the  irregularity  of  structure  and  the 
lack  of  knowledge  of  these  rocks  over  a large  area,  no  reliable  estimate 
of  thickness  can  be  made  other  than  the  statement,  as  given  by 
Capps,3  that  the  series  is  several  thousand  feet  thick. 

This  slate  and  graywacke  series  was  correlated  by  Capps  3 with  a 
similar  series  of  rocks  observed  by  Brooks  4 in  the  valley  of  Kichatna 
River  and  with  the  Susitna  slate  described  by  Eldridge,5  and  for 
lack  of  conclusive  evidence  it  was  assigned  provisionally  to  the 
Paleozoic  or  Mesozoic.  During  the  season  of  1917  two  fossil  shells 


1 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Yentna  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  534,  pp.  22-47,  1913. 

2 Idem,  p.  25. 

8 Idem,  p.  27. 

4 Brooks,  A.  H.,  The  Mount  McKinley  region,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  70,  pp.  67-68, 1911. 

6 Eldridge,  G.  H.,  A reconnaissance  in  the  Susitna  basin  and  adjacent  territory,  Alaska,  in  1898:  U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Twentieth  Aim.  Rept.,  pt.  7,  pp.  15-16,  1900. 


Eocene  ancL  later  Pleistocene 


EXPLANATION 

Sedimentary  rocks 


Alluvium 

{Gravel,  sand,  and  silt 
of  flood  plains) 


Moraines  and  associated 
gravels 

{Glacial  till  and  g/adO'f/u vial 
bench  gravel,  sand,  and  silt) 


Eocene  coal-bearing  sedi- 
ments and  overlying  later 
Tertiary  gravel 


Slate  and  graywacke, 
with  some  quartzite 


IGNEOUS  ROCKS 


Diorite,  granite, and 
associated  dikes 


Gold  placer  mine 


Coal  mine 


MESOZOIC  TERTIARY  QUATERNARY 


-r*:-  ■ ■;  /ajvj 


-•  t -■ 


.•  ..  ' :i. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  237 


were  found  by  the  writer  on  Long  Creek,  in  the  Tokichitna  Basin.  The 
localities  and  the  determinations  made  by  T.  W.  Stanton  are  as 
follows: 

10124.  No.  4.  Angular  wash,  half  a mile  from  head  of  Long  Creek,  tributary  of 
Tokichitna  River.  Elevation,  2,500  feet. 

10125.  No.  5.  In  place,  a quarter  of  a mile  from  head  of  same  creek.  Elevation, 
2,600  feet. 

These  two  specimens  are  fragmentary  imprints  in  slate  and  probably  represent 
a single  species,  which  in  my  opinion  is  referable  to  a broad  form  of  Inoceramus  more 
like  some  of  the  Alaskan  Upper  Cretaceous  types  of  Inoceramus  than  those  known  from 
the  Jurassic.  It  is  probably  worthy  of  mention  that  the  lithology  of  the  matrix 
suggests  the  Yakutat  rocks  of  Woody  Island  and  that  the  fossils  themselves  have 
some  resemblance  to  Inoceramya  concentrica  Ulrich  from  that  locality,  though  they 
do  not  belong  to  that  species.  Though  other  fossils  are  needed  to  make  the  identifica- 
tion positive,  I think  that  these  fossils  are  probably  of  Upper  Cretaceous  age. 

Other  fossil  fragments  were  observed  in  the  slate  and  graywacke 
series  on  Long  Creek,  and  a careful  search  in  this  vicinity  might 
reveal  other  forms  or  better-preserved  specimens  of  the  same  one. 
It  is  evident,  at  all  events,  that  this  slate  and  graywacke  series  is 
Mesozoic  in  age  and  not  Paleozoic,  and  it  seems  probable  that  it 
represents  some  horizon  in  the  Cretaceous  system. 

TERTIARY  SYSTEM. 

Two  formations,  which  make  up  the  Tertiary  system,  overlie  uncon- 
formably  the  slate  and  graywacke  series.  The  older  of  these  is  the 
Eocene  coal-bearing  formation  correlated  with  the  Kenai,  and  the 
younger  is  a gravel  deposit  which  lies  conformably  on  the  coal-bearing 
rocks. 

In  the  valley  of  Kahiltna  River  the  coal-bearing  rocks  crop  out 
in  the  valley  of  Treasure  Creek,  in  the  basin  between  the  Dutch  and 
Peters  hills,  along  the  east  side  of  the  Kahiltna  Valley  from  the  Little 
Peters  Hills  to  Kahiltna  Glacier,  along  the  southeast  flank  of  the 
Peters  Hills,  and  in  the  lower  Kahiltna  Valley.  Later  alluvial 
deposits  probably  conceal  large  areas  of  these  rocks  in  the  Kahiltna 
and  Susitna  flats.  The  overlying  gravels  are  best  exposed  west  of 
Kahiltna  Valley,  at  the  head  of  Camp  and  Mills  creeks,  but  are  also 
said  by  Capps  1 to  occur  at  the  mouth  of  the  canyon  of  Nugget  Creek 
and  on  Cache  Creek  at  the  mouth  of  Windy  Creek.  They  were 
noticed  also  by  the  writer  on  Gopher  Creek,  a headwater  tributary  of 
Willow  Creek. 

The  Eocene  coal-bearing  rocks  are  described  by  Capps  2 as  follows: 

The  character  of  the  Eocene  beds  is  more  or  less  uniform  in  the  many  outcrops 
examined,  even  in  widely  separated  localities.  Most  of  the  exposures  show  only  a 
small  part  of  the  total  thickness  of  the  series,  but  even  where  the  outcrops  are  small 

1 Capps,  S.  R.,  The  Yentna  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  534,  p.  34,  1913. 

3 Idem,  p.  30. 

115086°— 19 16 


238 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


little  difficulty  is  encountered  in  identifying  them.  The  beds  consist  predominantly 
of  unconsolidated  or  loosely  consolidated  clays  and  sands,  containing  layers  of  fine 
pebbles,  and  commonly  some  lignitic  coal.  Even  where  the  surface  is  covered  with 
vegetation  pieces  of  lignite  in  the  stream  beds  often  serve  to  indicate  the  presence  of 
these  deposits.  At  the  few  localities  where  the  relation  between  the  Eocene  sediments 
and  the  underlying  slates  could  be  studied,  the  slates  and  graywackes  have  been 
deeply  weathered  and  decayed,  the  slates  having  broken  down  to  a bluish-white 
kaolinic  clay  and  the  graywackes  changed  to  a soft  gritty  sandstone  before  the  over- 
lying  materials  were  deposited.  It  is  often  difficult  to  determine  the  point  at  which 
the  clay  shales  of  the  Tertiary  succeed  the  residual  clays  of  the  slate  series.  The 
coal-bearing  sediments  consist  of  alternating  clays,  sands,  and  fine  gravels,  the  beds  in 
most  places  being  little  consolidated,  though  here  and  there  a coarser  layer  has  been 
cemented  into  a rather  fine  conglomerate  or  grit.  At  a bluff  on  the  east  bank  of 
Susitna  River  at  Susitna  station  there  is  an  outcrop  of  a coarse-grained  conglomerate 
which  Spurr  refers  provisionally  to  the  Kenai  formation,  of  Eocene  age,  but  nothing 
similar  to  this  rock  was  seen  in  the  Yentna  region. 

Lignitic  coal  occurs  in  the  Tertiary  rocks  in  many  places.  All  of  the  coal  examined 
was  rather  fibrous  and  woody,  of  a brown  to  black  color,  and  is  of  little  value  except  as  a 
source  of  local  fuel  supply.  The  beds  examined  are  from  a few  inches  to  12  feet  in 
thickness. 

Structurally,  the  coal-bearing  rocks  are  distinct  from  the  slate  and 
graywacke  series  in  that  they  are  only  loosely  consolidated  and, 
although  folded,  show  only  to  a small  degree  the  effects  of  meta- 
morphism. Only  exceptionally  are  the  coal-bearing  beds  inclined  at 
high  angles,  as  for  instance  about  2J  miles  below  the  canyon  on 
Peters  Creek,  where  these  rocks  and  their  included  coal  beds  dip  70° 
NW.  and  strike  N.  45°  E.  The  folding  is,  in  general,  of  the  broad, 
open  type,  and  the  rocks  are  only  imperfectly  indurated.  Their 
thickness  is  not  definitely  known  but  is  believed  to  exceed  1,000  feet. 

The  overlying  gravel  has  been  described  by  Capps  1 as  follows : 

The  gravels  are  rudely  stratified,  as  though  by  streams,  the  largest  boulders  being 
about  1 foot  in  diameter,  but  most  of  the  pebbles  measure  from  2 to  4 inches  through 
and  are  mixed  with  much  sandy  material.  A large  variety  of  rocks  is  represented  by 
the  pebbles — slates,  graywackes,  black  and  gray  conglomerates,  and  quartz  are  present 
as  well  as  diorites  and  many  other  types  of  igneous  rocks.  The  deposit  throughout 
its  thickness  shows  a yellowish  color  due  to  oxidation,  but  the  yellow  color  is  evidently 
only  a coating  on  the  pebbles,  for  it  has  disappeared  from  the  materials  that  have  been 
rehandled  by  streams.  The  great  age  of  these  gravels  is  attested  by  their  decayed 
condition,  many  of  the  pebbles  being  so  rotten  that  they  crumble  and  fall  to  pieces 
when  disturbed,  although  they  must  have  been  hard  and  firm  when  they  were  rounded 
and  deposited  by  the  streams. 

The  gravels,  where  seen  by  the  writer  on  Gopher  Creek,  formed  a 
rotten  conglomerate  made  up  in  the  main  of  greatly  decayed  pebbles 
a few  inches  in  diameter,  though  cobbles  as  large  as  18  inches  were 
also  seen.  This  conglomerate  formed  the  bedrock  underlying  the 
stream  placers  at  the  upper  end  of  Gopher  Creek.  The  total  thick- 
ness of  the  gravel  is  unknown,  but  at  least  600  feet  of  such  rock  was 
seen  by  Capps  2 in  the  upper  part  of  Treasure  Creek. 


Capps,  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  p.  34. 


Idem,  p.  35. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  239 

QUATERNARY  SYSTEM. 

With  the  advent  of  Quaternary  time  there  came  a gradual  change 
in  climatic  conditions,  which  resulted  in  the  development  of  glaciers 
in  this  area  on  a large  scale.  The  glaciers  gradually  extended  from 
the  Alaska  Range  southward  to  Cook  Inlet,  filling  the  valleys  and 
covering  all  the  prominent  hills  in  Kahiltna  Valley.  The  Peters 
and  Dutch  hills,  if  not  actually  overridden  by  ice,  were  covered  by  a 
neve  of  snow  and  ice  which  contributed  to  the  surrounding  ice  sheet. 
This  ice  advance,  which  occurred  during  Pleistocene  time  and  per- 
haps extended  into  Recent  time,  was  finally  stopped  by  further 
climatic  changes,  and  the  ice  fields  began  to  disappear.  It  is  prob- 
able that  the  retreat  of  the  ice  was  rhythmic  in  character — that  is, 
the  glacier  alternately  retreated  and  advanced — with  a cumulative 
net  loss  that  resulted  eventually  in  the  entire  disappearance  of  the 
ice  fields  and  the  restriction  of  the  ice  to  the  present  valley  glaciers. 

During  the  glacial  epoch  great  physiographic  changes  took  place. 
The  details  of  the  pre-Quaternary  topography  were  entirely  obliter- 
ated by  the  action  of  the  ice  and  topography  characteristic  of  a 
glaciated  area  was  developed.  Old  stream  valleys  were  scoured 
out  and  broadened  into  wide  U-shaped  valleys,  and  the  hills  were 
smoothed  and  rounded  by  overriding  ice.  The  Alaska  Range,  the 
accumulating  ground  of  the  snow  and  ice,  was  rendered  more  rugged 
and  precipitous  than  before,  owing  to  “bergschrund”  sapping  on 
the  high  ridges.  When  the  ice  fields  finally  disappeared  normal 
stream  erosion  again  became  effective,  with  the  result  that  the 
glacial  topography  is  now  in  the  process  of  re  transformation  to  the 
pre-Quaternary  type.  The  gorges  and  canyons  in  Kahiltna  River 
and  its  tributaries  are  an  index  of  the  degree  to  which  normal  stream 
erosion  has  been  reestablished.  Such  gorges,  though  conspicuous, 
are  relatively  minor  features  of  the  present  topography,  and  the  old 
glaciated  outlines  still  remain  the  dominating  topographic  features. 

These  erosional  processes  have  resulted  necessarily  in  the  develop- 
ment of  several  types  of  detrital  deposits.  During  the  period  of 
glacial  action  and  in  the  subsequent  retreat  of  the  glaciers  the  debris 
eroded  by  the  action  of  the  ice  was  deposited  in  moraines  of  different 
kinds,  of  which  the  ground  moraines  that  were  formed  under  the 
lower  reaches  of  the  ice  field  are  best  preserved.  Terminal  moraines 
at  the  ends  of  the  glaciers  appear  for  the  most  part  to  have  been 
removed,  either  as  they  formed  or  shortly  afterward,  by  glacial 
streams  that  issued  from  beneath  the  ice.  The  morainal  material 
removed  by  the  glacial  streams  was  distributed  over  a wide  area 
adjacent  to  the  glaciers  and  subsequently,  as  the  streams  entrenched 
themselves  in  it,  formed  the  bench  gravels  contiguous  to  the  present 


240 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


streams.  These  bench  gravels,  which  consist  of  reworked  glacio- 
flu  via  tile  deposits,  are  essentially  similar  to  the  morainal  material 
except  that  the  detritus  is  more  or  less  rounded  and  much  of  the  finer 
silt,  or  glacial  mud,  has  been  carried  away  by  the  transporting 
streams.  The  lower  portions  of  the  bench  deposits  carry  the  larger 
boulders  and  the  upper  portions  the  smaller  boulders,  cobbles,  and 
pebbles.  On  Cache  Creek  a short  distance  above  the  mouth  of  Nug- 
get Creek  the  bench  gravels  have  an  average  size  of  about  5 inches,  but 
some  of  those  at  the  base  of  the  deposits  are  as  much  as  3 feet  in 
diameter. 

As  the  glaciers  retreated  and  the  streams  began  to  adjust  them- 
selves in  the  vacated  valleys,  the  irregular  glacial  gradients  were 
gradually  transformed  by  alluviation  at  some  places  and  stream 
erosion  at  others  into  normal  or  approximately  normal  stream  gra- 
dients, with  the  characteristic  water  grades  and  headward  steepening. 
This  process  has  resulted  in  the  development  of  the  present  alluvial 
deposits  in  the  overdeepened  glacial  troughs  and  of  canyons  in  the 
valley  protuberances.  There  is  little  difference  between  the  bench 
and  stream  gravels  except  that  the  process  of  stream  sorting  has 
been  carried  still  further  in  the  stream  gravels.  The  coarser  parts  of 
the  bench  gravels,  which  the  streams  have  been  unable  to  handle, 
remain  in  the  headwater  alluvial  deposits,  and  the  finer  materials 
have  been  deposited  progressively  downstream.  In  the  lower 
courses  of  the  large  rivers  the  present  alluvium  is  largely  silt  and 
fine  sand. 

MINERAL  RESOURCES. 

VALUABLE  MINERALS  PRESENT. 

Placer  gold  is  the  only  mineral  that  has  been  exploited  on  a com- 
mercial scale  in  the  valley  of  Kahiltna  Eiver  up  to  the  present  time. 
Other  minerals  of  value,  however,  including  principally  platinum, 
cassiterite  (tin  oxide),  and  scheelite  (calcium  tungstate),  have  been 
found  in  the  placer  sands,  and  it  is  possible  that  some  of  these  may 
later  be  produced  in  commercial  amounts.  Provision  should  be 
made  for  the  recovery  of  platinum  in  the  gold  placers,  where  it  is 
found  in  any  considerable  amount,  and  the  district  should  be  further 
prospected  for  workable  deposits  of  placer  platinum.  Heavy  con- 
centrates of  cassiterite  from  the  placer  sands  were  noted  at  certain 
localities,  and  search  should  be  made  for  their  bedrock  sources.  The 
presence  of  scheelite  in  the  placers,  although  it  is  not  plentiful,  indi- 
cates the  presence  of  tungsten  ore  south  of  the  Alaska  Range  and 
should  be  remembered  when  prospecting  for  lode  deposits.  The 
Eocene  cqal  deposits  have  already  been  used  locally  as  a source  of 
fuel  and  power 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  241 

ECONOMIC  CONDITIONS. 

The  central  supply  for  Kahiltna  Valley  and  vicinity  is  the  town 
of  Anchorage,  at  the  head  of  Cook  Inlet.  From  that  point  passengers 
and  freight  are  transported  by  launches  across  the  inlet  and  up 
Susitna  Kiver  to  the  mouth  of  the  Yentna,  where  the  trading  station 
of  Susitna  is  located.  On  account  of  present  construction  work  on 
the  Government  railroad  up  Susitna  Valley  a small  steamboat  owned 
by  the  Government  plies  regularly  between  Anchorage  and  up-river 
points  on  the  Susitna,  stopping  at  Susitna  station.  Light-draft 
launches  navigate  Yentna  Kiver  to  a point  above  the  mouth  of  the 
Kichatna  but  seldom  go  above  the  trading  station  of  McDougall,  at 
the  mouth  of  Lake  Creek,  which  is  the  supply  depot  for  Kahiltna 
Valley.  A wagon  road  begins  at  McDougall,  follows  up  the  east 
side  of  the  Lake  Creek  valley  for  about  15  miles,  and  then  leads 
across  into  Kahiltna  Valley,  reaching  Kahiltna  Kiver  at  Camp  2, 
about  26  miles  in  an  air  line  above  its  mouth.  A bridge  spans  the 
river  at  this  point.  Camp  2 is  connected  with  the  Cache  Creek 
district  by  a soft,  difficult  trail.  During  the  summer  of  1917  the 
Cache  Creek  Dredging  Co.  operated  a small  boat,  fitted  with  a gasoline 
engine,  on  Kahiltna  Kiver,  transporting  freight  from  Camp  2 to  the 
mouth  of  Cache  Creek,  where  it  was  conveyed  by  wagon  up  the 
canyon  to  the  dredge,  a distance  of  about  7 miles.  A new  wagon 
road,  which  has  been  surveyed  from  Talkeetna  on  the  Government 
railroad  to  Cache  Creek  and  vicinity,  will  when  completed  greatly 
facilitate  communication  with  Kahiltna  Valley. 

The  transportation  of  supplies  into  Kahiltna  Valley  is  at  present 
slow,  laborious,  and  costly.  The  freight  rate  by  water  from  Anchor- 
age to  McDougall  was  SI 5 a ton  in  1917,  and  the  commercial  charge 
for  winter  dog-sled  freighting  from  McDougall  to  Cache  Creek  is  8 
to  10  cents  a pound,  though  by  the  use  of  bobsleds  and  horses  this 
may  be  reduced  to  4 cents  a pound.  An  extra  charge  of  2 to  5 cents 
a pound  is  made  for  taking  supplies  to  the  headwater  tributaries  of 
Cache  and  Peters  creeks.  The  commercial  freight  rate  in  summer 
from  McDougall  to  Cache  Creek  is  35  cents  a pound,  of  which  about 
25  cents  represents  the  actual  cost.  The  minimum  cost  of  freighting, 
therefore,  from  Anchorage  to  Cache  Creek  is  $95  a ton.  The  new 
wagon  road  to  Cache  Creek  used  in  conjunction  with  rail  transporta- 
tion from  Anchorage  to  Talkeetna  should  materially  reduce  the  cost 
of  supplies  and  will  also  make  the  district  more  accessible  than 
heretofore. 

Timber  for  use  in  mining  is  not  in  great  demand  in  Kahiltna  Valley, 
for  little  underground  work  is  done,  and  most  of  the  placer  mining  is 
accomplished  by  hydraulic  plants.  The  dredge  on  Cache  Creek  uses 
coal  to  generate  power.  Wood  is  used  chiefly  as  fuel  for  heating, 
and  for  this  as  well  as  for  lumber  and  other  necessities  there  is  an 


242  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1M7. 

abundance  of  timber.  Spruce  24  inches  in  diameter  and  cottonwood 
as  large  as  5 feet  in  diameter  are  available  1 in  the  lowlands,  but 
little  timber  grows  above  an  elevation  of  2,000  feet.  The  Cache 
Creek  mining  district,  on  account  of  its  general  elevation  above  2,000 
feet,  is  at  a disadvantage  because  the  wood  needed  must  be  brought 
up  from  the  timbered  valleys  below. 

Water  for  hydraulicking  is  taken  from  the  streams  at  some  distance 
above  the  placer  ground  and  led  by  ditches  to  the  hydraulic  pipes. 
The  rainfall  and  stream  flow  are  adequate  to  supply  plenty  of  water 
with  the  required  pressure  at  most  of  the  mining  plants.  Numerous 
good  power  sites  for  hydroelectric  plants  are  available  in  the  canyons 
of  different  streams  and  particularly  in  the  lower  valley  of  Cache 
Creek  below  the  mouth  of  Spruce  Creek,  where  a large  and  unfailing 
flow  of  water  falls  about  500  feet  within  a mile  and  a half  or  less. 

The  standard  wage  in  the  Cache  Creek  district  in  1917  was  $5  a 
day  and  board  for  eight  hours  of  labor,  and  winchmen,  cooks,  and 
other  specialized  workmen  were  paid  $6  a day  and  board.  On  the 
basis  of  a charge  of  $1.50  a day  for  each  man  for  the  cost  and  prepara- 
tion of  food,  the  total  cost  of  unskilled  labor  amounted  to  81  cents 
an  hour  and  for  skilled  labor  94  cents  an  hour. 

PLACER  DEPOSITS. 

CACHE  CREEK  BASIN. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

Cache  Creek  and  its  tributaries  drain  the  western  part  of  the 
glacial  trough  which  separates  the  Peters  Hills  from  the  Dutch  Hills. 
The  main  creek  rises  in  the  Dutch  Hills,  flows  in  a general  south- 
westerly direction  for  18  miles,  and  empties  into  Kahiltna  River  about 
13  miles  below  the  glacier.  Cache  Creek  has  a number  of  tributaries, 
of  which  those  entering  from  the  northwest  are  the  larger  and  the  more 
important  as  producers  of  placer  gold.  The  largest  of  those  named 
in  order  downstream  are  Nugget,  Thunder,  Falls,  and  Dollar  creeks. 
The  southwestward-flowing  tributaries  in  order  downstream  are 
Trout,  Long,  Windy,  and  Spruce  creeks,  of  which  only  Windy  and 
Spruce  creeks  have  gold  placers  worthy  of  attention.  The  basin 
of  Cache  Creek  embraces  an  area  of  about  75  square  miles. 

In  the  upper  part  the  basin  of  Cache  Creek  is  a wide,  open  U-shaped 
glaciated  valley,  with  a floor  of  soft  coal-bearing  rocks  of  Kenai  age, 
into  which  Cache  Creek  has  incised  a V-shaped  gorge  that  ranges 
from  250  to  300  feet  in  depth  throughout  its  length.  The  tribu- 
taries of  Cache  Creek,  including  also  upper  Cache  Creek,  lie  in  the 
hard  slate  and  graywacke  that  form  the  sides  of  the  valley  and  have 
not  been  incised  so  deeply.  For  this  reason  canyons  have  developed 


JCapps,  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  p.  18. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  243 

on  the  lower  courses  of  the  tributaries,  in  order  to  join  the  slate 
and  graywacke  valleys  with  the  more  deeply  incised  valley  of  Cache 
Creek.  Cache  Creek  also  has  cut  a canyon  in  its  lower  valley  in 
order  to  reach  on  a water  grade  the  more  deeply  scoured  valley  of 
Kahiltna  River. 

The  glacial  trough  that  forms  the  upper  basin  of  Cache  Creek  has 
an  elevation  of  nearly  2,400  feet  in  the  upper  valley.  Cache  Creek 
at  its  mouth  has  an  elevation  of  about  600  feet,  thus  showing  a 
fall  of  100  feet  to  the  mile  for  the  length  of  the  stream.  The  fall 
in  the  upper  valley  is  considerably  less  than  this  but  is  counter- 
balanced by  a heavy  fall  in  the  lower  valley  or  canyon  of  Cache 
Creek. 

The  location  of  the  gold  placer  mines  under  operation  in  the 
Kahiltna  Valley,  including  also  those  on  Cache  and  Peters  creeks, 
is  shown  on  the  map  (PL  VI). 

CACHE  CREEK. 

CREEK  PLACERS. 

There  are  two  sources  of  placer  gold  in  the  valley  of  Cache  Creek — 
one  in  the  glacial  till  and  gravel  that  overlie  the  Eocene  coal-bearing 
rocks  in  the  broad  valley  and  form  the  benches  along  the  creek,  and 
the  other  in  the  present  stream  gravels,  which  have  been  derived  in 
large  measure  from  the  erosion  of  the  glacial  debris  of  the  benches. 

Little  is  known  concerning  the  distribution,  number,  and  charac- 
ter of  pay  streaks  in  the  reworked  glacial  debris.  This  material, 
though  largely  till,,  has  also  zones  of  washed  gravel  and  boulders, 
showing  that  stream  as  well  as  glacial  action  has  effected  its  present 
distribution.  The  glacial  till  is  composed  of  unsorted  rocks  and 
boulders  of  all  sizes,  showing  usually  little  or  no  water  action,  together 
with  a great  amount  of  fine  clay  or  glacial  mud.  Gold  is  distributed 
throughout  the  glacial  material  in  greater  or  less  amount,  but  true 
pay  streaks  are  lacking  on  account  of  the  paucity  of  the  action  of 
water,  with  its  consequent  sorting  of  material  and  concentration  of 
the  heavy  metals  and  minerals.  At  some  localities,  more  particu- 
larly where  the  action  of  water  has  played  a more  important  part  in 
the  formation  of  the  deposits,  there  is  a slight  concentration  of  the 
gold,  so  that  the  deposits  may  be  mined  at  a profit  on  a small  scale. 
There  seems  to  be  no  regularity,  however,  in  the  distribution  of  the 
placers  in  the  bench  deposits,  and  no  method  is  known  whereby  they 
may  be  located  by  physiographic  deduction.  At  some  places  in  the 
Cache  Creek  district  quite  unsorted  glacial  till  has  been  mined  by 
placer-mining  methods  and  yielded  a profit,  but  such  occurrences 
must  be  regarded  as  altogether  fortuitous — that  is,  as  deposits  of  till 
which  happened  to  be  derived  from  rich  gold  lodes  and  suffered  little 


244 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


distribution  prior  to  their  final  deposition.  It  is  estimated  that  the 
content  of  gold  in  the  more  favored  localities  on  the  benches  may 
average  10  cents  a cubic  yard.  The  future  of  the  Cache  Creek  dis- 
trict as  a mining  center  is  dependent  on  the  mining  of  these  low- 
grade  bench  deposits  by  large-scale  hydraulic  methods.  By  large- 
scale  operation  and  economic  management  it  may  be  possible  to  mine 
such  placers  for  as  little  as  4 or  5 cents  a cubic  yard,  particularly 
after  communication  has  been  established  with  the  Government  rail- 
road and  the  district  becomes  more  accessible. 

The  present  stream  gravels  have  so  far  formed  the  more  attractive 
field  for  placer  mining  on  Cache  Creek.  Gold  was  first  discovered 
in  1906  on  Discovery  claim  in  the  upper  canyon  of  Cache  Creek, 
and  placer-mining  operations  have  been  carried  on  intermittently 
since  that  time  in  the  creek  placers.  The  creek  placers  at  the  canyon 
were  examined  in  1911  by  Capps,1  who  reported  as  follows  on  their 
distribution  and  character: 

The  ground  worked  was  that  of  the  present  stream  flat,  and  the  gravels  moved  range 
from  4 to  7 feet  in  depth  and  lie  on  slate  bedrock.  There  are  some  large  boulders 
present,  but  most  of  them  can  be  handled  by  one  man.  A short  distance  below  the 
canyon  the  slate  bedrock  gives  place  to  the  materials  of  the  coal-bearing  series,  which 
change  character  within  short  distances,  ranging  from  a fairly  firm,  gritty  sandstone 
to  soft  clay  shales.  The  pay  streak  is  said  to  be  rather  well  defined  in  the  canyon 
and  for  a short  distance  below  it  but  soon  spreads  out  in  the  wider  valley  below  and 
is  difficult  to  trace.  The  gold  is  rather  unevenly  distributed,  for,  though  most  of  it 
is  found  on  bedrock,  the  degree  of  its  concentration  depends  somewhat  on  the  char- 
acter of  the  bedrock,  the  harder  strata  having  retained  it  better  than  the  softer.  No 
records  have  been  kept  which  would  show  the  gold  content  of  the  gravels  to  the 
cubic  yard  or  to  the  square  yard  of  bedrock,  but  it  is  reported  that  the  returns  have 
averaged  about  $10  a day  for  each  man  employed.  The  sluice  boxes,  14  inches  wide, 
are  set  on  a grade  of  5 inches  to  the  box  length.  The  gravels  are  ground-sluiced  to  a 
depth  within  a foot  or  so  of  bedrock  by  the  aid  of  canvas  hose  and  water  under  pres- 
sure from  the  bench  to  the  southwest,  the  rest  of  the  gravel  being  shoveled  in  and 
bedrock  cleaned  by  hand.  The  stream  at  Discovery  claim  can  be  depended  upon 
to  run  a sluice  head  of  water  for  the  boxes  used  throughout  the  season,  and  most  of 
the  time  it  flows  two  sluice  heads.  The  gold  is  coarse,  bright,  and  somewhat  worn, 
though  many  pieces  are  rough,  and  some  cubes  of  crystalline  gold  have  been  found. 
Pieces  worth  $20  have  been  taken  from  this  claim,  and  only  about  one-third  of  the 
gold  recovered  will  pass  through  a 16-mesh  screen. 

The  coarseness  of  the  gold  and  the  roughness  of  some  of  it  indicate  that  it  has  trav- 
eled no  great  distance  from  its  bedrock  source.  It  must  originally  have  come  from 
the  quartz  veinlets  of  the  slate  and  graywacke  series  in  the  upper  part  of  the  Cache 
Creek  valley  or  at  the  head  of  Bird  Creek,  for  the  upper  valley  at  one  time  contained 
a vigorous  glacier,  and  ice  also  came  into  it  from  the  head  of  Bird  Creek  across  a low 
divide.  This  glacier  eroded  its  basin  and  doubtless  scattered  and  removed  any  pre- 
glacial gold  which  may  have  been  concentrated  in  its  upper  portion.  No  ground 
carrying  paying  quantities  of  gold  has  been  discovered  above  the  canyon  of  Cache 
Creek.  Toward  the  mouth  of  the  slate  valley  the  ice  scour  was  less  severe,  as  the 
glacier  joined  a large  sluggish  ice  sheet  in  the  broad  basin  between  Dutch  and  Peters 
hills.  Here  the  valley  deepening  was  not  pronounced,  and  a part  of  the  material 


1 Capps,  S R./  op.  cit.,  pp.  54-55. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  245 

picked  up  by  the  ice  in.  the  upper  valley  was  dropped.  It  may  be  that  the  glacial 
deposits  here  covered  up  portions  of  the  preglacial  channel  of  Cache  Creek  without 
disturbing  them.  When  the  glacier  melted  away,  the  stream  cut  through  the  glacial 
deposits  and  at  and  below  the  canyon  intrenched  itself  into  the  slates  and  the  softer 
beds  to  the  east.  In  the  rehandling  of  the  glacier  material  any  gold  that  it  contained 
was  concentrated  in  the  stream  bed,  and  if  the  valley  was  cut  through  any  undis- 
turbed portions  of  the  old  preglacial  channel  these  too  would  have  contributed  to 
the  richness  of  the  present  placer  deposits. 

In  1916  the  Cache  Creek  Dredging  Co.,  operating  under  a lease 
from  the  Cache  Creek  Mining  Co.,  built  a dredge  and  began  work  on 
Cache  Creek  in  the  placer  ground  owned  by  the  latter  company. 
Beginning  at  the  mouth  of  Windy  Creek,  the  dredge  had  worked 
upstream  three-quarters  of  a mile  by  the  fall  of  1917.  The  pay 
streak  is  from  150  to  300  feet  wide  and  is  believed  to  extend  upstream 
for  several  miles.  The  depth  of  the  gravels  ranges  from  3 to  7 feet, 
averaging  perhaps  4J  feet,  and  the  bedrock  is  the  soft,  loosely  con- 
solidated Eocene  sand,  clay,  and  gravel.  Practically  all  the  gold  is 
taken  from  the  gravels,  but  it  is  necessary  for  the  dredge  to  remove 
bedrock  in  shallow  ground  in  order  to  excavate  a channel  sufficiently 
deep  in  which  to  float.  The  problem  of  working  in  shallow  ground 
will  probably  be  accentuated  as  the  work  continues  upstream  and 
may  ultimately  render  necessary  the  reconstruction  of  the  dredge  or 
the  purchase  of  a new  one  of  lighter  draft. 

The  gold  recovered  by  the  Cache  Creek  dredge  is  a composite  of 
the  gold  from  various  tributaries  and  can  not  be  said  to  belong  to 
any  definite  type.  The  assay  value  ranges  from  $17.60  to  $17.80 
an  ounce.  Though  more  waterworn  than  the  gold  in  streams  like 
Thunder  Creek,  owing  to  its  further  transportation,  the  Cache  Creek 
gold  nevertheless  shows  in  its  lack  of  well-rounded  edges  the  fact 
that  it  has  undergone  comparatively  little  transportation.  Some 
very  angular  gold  recovered  is  doubtless  derived  from  the  weathering 
of  near-by  gravel  banks  of  glacio-fluviatile  origin,  and  the  generally 
small  proportion  of  well-rounded  gold  indicates  that  little  of  the  gold 
has  traveled  very  far.  The  gravel  banks  of  the  Cache  Creek  basin 
must  be  considered  the  source  of  most  of  the  gold,  as  far  as  the  pres- 
ent stream  is  concerned,  though  there  are  good  reasons  for  believing 
that  some  of  the  gold  has  entered  the  placers  from  bedrock  subse- 
quent to  the  retreat  of  the  glaciers.  The  ultimate  or  bedrock  source 
of  the  gold,  however,  is  harder  to  decipher  on  account  of  glacial 
action,  which  has  laid  down  a mantle  of  detrital  material  that  con- 
ceals most  of  the  original  bedrock  and  is  itself  by  no  means  so  sus- 
ceptible to  physiographic  interpretation  as  stream  detritus  would  be. 
It  is  believed  both  by  Capps  1 and  the  writer  that  the  bedrock  source 
of  the  Cache  Creek  gold  is  confined  mainly  to  the  near-by  hills — first, 
because  the  Cache  Creek  glacial  trough  appears  to  have  been  filled 


246 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


with  a sluggish  ice  sheet,  which  favored  a minimum  of  glacial  trans- 
portation, and,  second,  because  the  slate  and  graywacke  bedrock  in 
the  basins  of  Cache  and  Peters  creeks,  particularly  in  the  Dutch 
Hills,  yields  positive  evidence  of  gold  mineralization  at  several 
localities. 

A small  amount  of  platinum  metals,  about  0.003  per  cent  of  the 
gold  by  weight  and  less  than  0.02  per  cent  of  the  gold  in  value,  is 
also  recovered.  The  platinum  grains  are  small,  few  of  them  exceeding 
1 millimeter  in  size,  and  most  of  them  are  thin  and  flaky.  Two  kinds 
of  platinum  metals  appear  to  be  present.  The  more  common  type  is 
a dark-gray  to  bronzy  metal,  which  carries  probably  the  main  con- 
tent of  platinum.  The  second  variety  consists  of  bright  silvery  grains 
and  commonly  shows  what  appear  to  be  crystalline  outlines.  This 
variety  is  believed  to  be  mainly  iridosmium.  On  page  258  is  given 
an  analysis  of  the  platinum  metals  received  from  Poorman  Creek,  in 
the  Peters  Creek  basin,  and  it  is  most  likely  that  this  analysis  is  also 
a fair  index  of  the  character  of  the  platinum  metals  on  Cache  Creek. 
On  account  of  the  flaky  character  of  the  platinum  it  is  probable  that 
the  recovery  made  by  the  dredge  in  the  sluice  line  does  not  fairly 
represent  the  platinum  content  of  the  placers;  but,  on  the  other  hand, 
it  is  unlikely  that  enough  platinum  is  present  in  the  placers  to  make 
the  installation  of  more  refined  methods  for  its  recovery  worth  while. 

As  an  indication  of  possible  minerals  of  value  in  the  territory 
drained  by  Cache  Creek  the  concentrates  or  heavy  minerals  caught 
with  the  precious  metals  are  also  of  interest.  Examination  of  the 
concentrates  from  Cache  Creek  has  revealed  ilmenite,  magnetite, 
cassiterite  (tin  oxide),  zircon,  quartz,  garnet,  limonite,  pyrite,  and 
scheelite  (calcium  tungstate) . The  presence  of  cassiterite  and  scheel- 
ite  is  worthy  of  particular  mention,  for  the  ores  of  tin  and  tungsten 
have  heretofore  been  found  chiefly  north  of  the  Alaska  Range,  in 
interior  Alaska. 

The  dredge  operating  on  Cache  Creek  is  one  of  the  flume  type,  with 
buckets  of  7\  cubic  feet  and  a daily  capacity  of  2,000  cubic  yards. 
Power  is  supplied  by  a steam  boiler,  under  which  coal  is  used  for 
fuel.  The  coal  is  mined  on  Cache  Creek  at  the  mouth  of  Short  Creek 
and  is  hauled  by  teams  to  the  point  where  the  dredge  is  operating 
and  lightered  on  board  to  the  boiler.  A steam  electric  or  hydro- 
electric plant  is  contemplated,  and  either  should  materially  lessen  the 
ultimate  cost  of  mining.  Prospecting  is  carried  ahead  of  the  dredge 
by  means  of  an  8-horsepower  gasoline  drill.  The  dredge  in  1917  was 
handicapped  by  a short  season  and  by  two  heavy  floods  in  Cache 
Creek,  both  of  which  did  much  damage  and  caused  the  loss  of  con- 
siderable tune.  The  second  period  of  high  water,  which  occurred  in 


1 Capps,  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  p.  54,  1913. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OE  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  247 

September,  was  particularly  disastrous  on  Cache  Creek  and  its  trib- 
utaries, and  the  highest  known  water  marks  for  Kahiltna  and  Yentna 
rivers  were  surpassed. 

BENCH  PLACERS. 

On  upper  Cache  Creek,  just  above  the  mouth  of  Gold  Creek,  the 
bench  gravels  on  the  left  bank  of  the  creek,  at  an  elevation  of  2,300 
feet,  were  being  worked  in  1917  by  hydraulicking.  The  bedrock  at 
this  locality  is  composed  of  Eocene  coal-bearing  sediments  and  con- 
sists mainly  of  sandstone,  with  some  clay  shale  and  conglomerate  and 
coal  seams.  The  bedrock  surface  is  decidedly  irregular,  and  good- 
sized  “pot-holes”  are  exposed  as  the  surface  is  uncovered.  A lens 
of  conglomerate  covered  by  a seam  of  brown  to  black  iron  hydroxide 
forms  the  bedrock  surface  at  one  place,  and  on  this  irregular  surface 
coarse  gold  is  found.  Much  of  the  gold,  particularly  the  coarse  gold, 
occurs  on  such  iron-stained  bedrock  surfaces,  as  well  as  in  similar 
■unstained  gravel  beds  higher  up  in  the  placer  body.  Some  gold, 
however,  is  distributed  throughout  the  gravels. 

Most  of  the  gravel  is  well  rounded,  with  comparatively  little  sub- 
angular  material.  The  average  size  of  the 'gravel  is  about  4 or  5 
inches,  though  boulders  a foot  in  diameter  are  common,  and  others 
as  large  as  3 feet  were  seen.  A body  of  heavier  gravel  wash,  about 
7 feet  thick,  lies  next  to  bedrock.  It  is  apparent  that  such  bench 
gravels  have  undergone  a high  degree  of  stream  sorting  and  are 
clearly  to  be  distinguished  from  the  glacio-fluviatile  bench  gravels  at 
other  localities  in  this  vicinity,  as,  for  instance,  on  Bird  Creek. 

A clay  seam  which  has  some  interest  is  exposed  in  the  cut  at  this 
property.  This  seam  is  about  three-fourths  of  an  inch  thick,  strikes 
N.  22°  W.  and  dips  78°  W.,  and  cuts  through  both  the  bench  gravels 
and  the  underlying  bedrock.  To  the  east  of  this  seam  the  gravels 
are  well  rounded,  as  above  described,  but  to  the  west  the  detritus  is 
comparatively  unsorted  and  bears  more  resemblance  to  till  than  to  a 
fluviatile  deposit.  It  seems  certain  that  this  seam  of  clay  is  a fault 
gouge  and  indicates  that  fault  movements  have  taken  place  subse- 
quent to  the  deposition  of  the  bench  gravels. 

The  gold  at  this  property  is  bright  and  little  worn,  and  the  largest 
piece  so  far  recovered  was  worth  $1.40.  The  assay  value  is  about 
$17.50  an  ounce.  Considerable  heavy  sand  is  recovered  with  the 
gold,  and  samples  of  this  sand  contain  ilmenite,  magnetite,  garnet, 
zircon,  quartz,  and  pyrite. 

About  1,500  cubic  yards  of  gravel  had  been  hydraulicked  and 
sluiced  at  this  locality  by  the  early  part  of  September,  1917.  Water 
is  taken  from  Cache  Creek  and  Columbia  Gulch.  One  man  was  at 
work  at  this  property. 

Still  farther  upstream,  where  the  old  pack  trail  along  the  south 
side  of  the  Dutch  Hills  crosses  Cache  Creek,  hydraulicking  of  the 


248 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


bench  deposits  was  in  progress.  This  deposit,  though  showing  plainly 
the  effect  of  water  action,  is  not  nearly  so  well  assorted  as  the  one 
just  described.  It  may  be  considered  to  be  intermediate  in  character 
between  the  glacio-fluviatile  material  and  the  well-washed  bench 
gravels.  The  deposit  is  about  35  feet  thick,  and  the  lower  12  feet  is 
subangular  wash.  Overlying  this  wash  is  12  feet  of  blue  glacial  mud 
containing  angular  unsorted  boulders,  above  which  lies  8 feet  of  the 
same  material  stained  brown  by  surface  oxidation.  The  bedrock  is 
slate,  which  continued  downstream  for  several  hundred  feet  before 
the  Eocene  coal-bearing  formation  begins.  The  gold  is  said  to  be 
distributed  in  the  lower  12  feet  of  washed  gravel,  but  little  gold  is 
present  on  the  slate  bedrock. 

The  gold  is  coarse  and  rather  angular.  The  coarsest  piece  so  far 
found  is  valued  at  $9.  The  concentrates  are  composed  chiefly  of 
pyrite,  with  subordinate  amounts  of  magnetite,  arsenopvrite,  quartz, 
and  scheelite. 

One  man  was  working  this  placer.  Farther  downstream  prepara- 
tions were  being  made  to  open  another  bench  deposit,  and  for  this 
purpose  a ditch  1,000  fe§t  long  had  been  dug,  giving  a head  of  40  feet. 

NTJGGET  CREEK. 

Nugget  Creek  has  been  described  by  Capps1  as  follows: 

Nugget  Creek  is  the  uppermost  large  tributary  of  Cache  Creek,  joining  it  a few 
miles  below  its  head.  Its  source  is  in  the  Dutch  Hills,  through  which  it  flows  in  a 
wide,  straight,  U-shaped  valley,  which  shows  strongly  the  erosive  action  of  the  great 
glacier  that  once  occupied  it.  In  the  hills  the  basin  of  Nugget  Creek  is  composed 
of  the  rocks  of  the  slate  and  graywacke  series,  and  the  stream  flows  in  a postglacial 
canyon,  which  is  shallow  toward  the  valley  head  but  narrower  and  deeper  down- 
stream. At  the  point  where  it  leaves  the  slate  hills  the  creek  occupies  a canyon 
cut  200  feet  into  the  rocks,  but  at  the  base  of  the  hills  the  slates  give  place  to  the 
softer  rocks  of  the  coal-bearing  series,  and  through  these  the  stream  has  widened  its 
gorge,  though  the  valley  walls  are  high  and  steep  throughout  the  remainder  of  its 
course  to  Cache  Creek. 

During  the  summer  of  1917  one  plant  was  engaged  in  working 
the  creek  placers  below  the  mouth  of  the  canyon,  on  claim  No.  4 
below  Discovery,  about  1,000  feet  below  the  mouth  of  the  canyon, 
along  the  west  side  of  the  creek.  The  bedrock  is  the  coal-bearing 
formation,  chiefly  conglomerate  composed  of  pebbles,  cobbles,  and 
boulders  of  a graywacke,  made  up  of  fragments  of  flint,  chert,  and 
slate.  Overlying  the  bedrock  is  a thickness  of  7 to  8 feet  of  gravel, 
in  the  lower  part  of  which  and  on  the  bedrock  itself  is  found  most  of 
the  gold.  The  gold  is  coarse  and  is  neither  angular  nor  well  rounded. 
The  minerals  collected  with  the  gold  in  the  sluice  boxes  include 
quartz,  magnetite,  cassiterite,  pyrite,  garnet,  and  zircon. 


1 Capps,  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  p.  58. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  249 

This  deposit  is  mined  by  hydraulicking.  Two  nozzles  are  used, 
one  for  hydraulicking  the  gravels  and  the  other  for  stacking  the 
tailings.  Water  is  taken  from  Nugget  Creek  at  a point  some  dis- 
tance above  the  canyon,  and  a pressure  of  200  feet  is  thus  obtained. 
The  gravel  is  washed  toward  shear  boards  and  thence  into  a line 
of  sluice  boxes.  Six  men  were  at  work  on  this  property.  The 
owners  intend  to  work  out  the  creek  placers  on  both  the  east  and 
west  sides  of  the  creek  and  then  to  turn  their  attention  to  the  benches 
on  the  west  side.  In  spite  of  floods  and  adverse  mining  conditions, 
5,000  square  feet  of  bedrock  was  cleaned  at  this  property  in  1917. 

One  man  was  also  at  work  on  a bench  on  the  east  side  of  Nugget 

Creek,  about  200  feet  above  the  creek.  A cut  about  300  feet  long 

and  12  feet  wide  had  been  made,  and  9 feet  of  gravels  removed. 

The  lower  4 feet  consists  of  heavy,  well-washed  boulders.  Most  of 

the  gold  is  moderately  coarse,  though  some  of  it  is  fine,  and  is  rather 

rough.  The  concentrates  recovered  with  the  gold  consist  mainly 

of  pyrite,  with  some  magnetite,  arsenopyrite,  quartz,  and  a few 

grains  of  scheelite.  This  gravel  was  hydraulicked  by  a nozzle  under 

a head  of  50  feet,  with  water  taken  from  a ditch  3 miles  long. 

* 

THXJNDEB,  CREEK. 

Capps  1 thus  describes  Thunder  Creek : 

Thunder  Creek  heads  in  the  slates  and  graywackes  of  the  Dutch  Hills,  near  Nugget 
Creek.  On  leaving  the  hills  it  bends  to  the  south,  following  the  general  direction  of 
the  Cache  Creek  valley,  and  joins  Cache  Creek  3|  miles  below  the  mouth  of  Nugget 
Creek.  In  its  course  below  the  hills  it  is  intrenched  below  the  level  of  the  surround- 
ing plateau,  its  valley  lying  for  the  most  part  in  the  beds  of  the  coal-bearing  series. 
For  a portion  of  its  length,  however,  it  has  cut  through  the  softer  sediments  into  a 
ridge  of  underlying  slates.  The  bedrock,  therefore,  varies  in  different  portions  of  the 
stream’s  course. 

During  the  summer  of  1917  one  large  hydraulic  plant  was  operat- 
ing on  Thunder  Creek,  on  the  Battle-Axe  Association  ground,  about 
1J  miles  below  Discovery  claim.  A number  of  low  benches  along 
the  west  side  of  the  creek  have  been  worked  out,  and  present  opera- 
tions are  confined  to  a high  bench  on  the  east  side,  about  150  feet 
above  the  creek  level. 

The  gravel  deposit  at  this  locality  is  80  feet  thick  and  resembles 
considerably  the  gravel  bank  on  Cache  Creek,  above  the  mouth  of 
Gold  Creek,  in  that  the  gravel  shows  the  effect  of  much  water  action. 
The  lower  40  feet  is  much  iron-stained,  and  layers  of  hard  iron  hydrox- 
ide cement  near  the  bottom  render  this  part  of  the  deposit  more 
resistant  to  the  nozzle.  Overlying  the  lower  40  feet  is  a body  of 
fine,  well-washed  gravel  8 feet  thick  in  a dark-blue  clay  cement, 
overlain  in  turn  by  a yellow  gravel  deposit  much  like  the  lower  part. 


1 Capps,  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  p.  61. 


250 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


This  placer  body  is  most  remarkable,  however,  on  account  of 
the  peculiar  character  of  the  underlying  bedrock.  The  coal-bearing 
formation  is  considered  to  be  the  bedrock,  though  hydraulic  opera- 
tions have  cut  through  it  in  places,  exposing  a much  weathered 
phase  of  the  slate  and  graywacke  series,  which  projects  upward 
as  reefs.  It  is  evident,  therefore,  that  the  coal-bearing  formation 
forms  only  a thin  mantle  upon  the  slate  and  graywacke  series. 
This  mantle  of  soft  bedrock  constitutes  the  puzzling  feature.  In 
general,  the  rook  at  this  locality  is  a brown  clay,  locally  carrying 
thin  streaks  of  coal,  which  strikes  N.  40°  E.  and  dips  35°  NW., 
or  toward  Thunder  Creek.  Two  well-defined  beds  of  quartzose 
material,  however,  interbedded  with  the  clay  rock,  and  these  beds 
carry  coarse  angular  gold.  The  giant  has  little  effect  on  this  mate- 
rial, but  on  exposure  to  the  air  it  slacks  and  flows  away  in  a muddy 
ooze.  These  quartzose  seams  are  composed  largely  of  angular 
fragments  of  a much  weathered  and  disintegrated  gold  quartz  and 
a minor  amount  of  well-rounded  quartz  pebbles,  cemented  in  a white 
clayey  material,  which  on  close  examination  proves  also  to  consist 
largely  of  fine  fragments  of  quartz — that  is,  it  is  a siliceous  clay. 
Thin  seams  of  coal  also  are  found  in  these  siliceous  seams,  together 
with  fine  fragments  of  coal  in  all  orientations,  resembling  washed 
material.  A considerable  proportion  of  the  gold  recovered  at  this 
plant  comes  from  this  siliceous  clay,  and  even  the  adjoining  brown 
clay  contains  a little  gold.  Two  such  siliceous  deposits,  each  aver- 
aging about  12  feet  in  thickness,  are  exposed  in  the  cut,  about  50 
feet  apart  stratigraphically.  Both  these  deposits  can  be  traced 
downstream,  and  in  that  direction  they  appear  to  lie  farther  apart. 
Seams  of  clay  gouge  that  strike  N.  80°  W.  and  dip  85°  N.  cut  these 
seams,  as  well  as  the  other  coal-bearing  sediments,  showing  the 
presence  of  later  faulting. 

It  is  difficult  to  formulate  a satisfactory  genetic  interpretation  of 
these  siliceous  beds.  The  angular  shape  of  the  quartz  fragments  and 
particularly  the  lack  of  admixture  with  other  detrital  material  point 
unmistakably  to  a minimum  of  transportation  in  the  formation  of 
these  deposits.  On  the  other  hand,  the  presence  of  even  a small 
percentage  of  rounded  quartz  pebbles  indicates  that  the  action  of 
water  was  certainly  a factor  in  their  formation,  and  the  presence  of  coal 
seams  also  relates  them  to  the  detrital  Eocene  sediments.  One  fact 
that  must  have  an  important  bearing  is  the  evidence  of  deep  residual 
weathering  at  this  locality  during  the  deposition  of  the  coal-bearing 
sediments.  The  slate  and  graywacke  under  these  coal-bearing  beds 
are  extremely  decayed,  being  altered  almost  to  the  condition  of  a 
clay.  Some  of  the  quartz  pebbles  in  the  quartzose  seams  were  also 
found  to  be  badly  disintegrated  and  ready  to  fall  apart  into  angular 
fragments  when  separated  from  the  clay  matrix.  Moreover,  the 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  251 

matrix,  when  viewed  under  the  microscope,  is  seen  to  be  composed  of 
subangular  to  rounded  grains  of  decayed  cloudy  quartz.  All  the 
evidence  indicates  that  these  quartzose  seams  are  the  result  of  deep 
residual  weathering,  with  a minimum  of  water  transportation,  and 
the  only  logical  inference  is  that  some  large  gold-bearing  quartz 
veins  are  present  in  the  slate  and  graywacke  series  under  the  Eocene 
coal-bearing  mantle  at  no  great  distance  from  this  locality.  It  is 
not  safe,  however,  to  say  that  such  quartz  veins  will  be  uncovered  by 
following  the  quartzose  beds  in  any  particular  direction,  for  too  little 
is  known  of  the  conditions  of  deposition  or  of  the  direction  from  which 
the  detrital  material  came.  Neither  is  it  safe  to  infer  that  the  quartz 
veins  when  uncovered  will  prove  to  be  comparable  in  content  of  gold 
with  the  derived  detrital  material,  for  much  surface  enrichment  must 
have  occurred  in  such  deep  weathering.  If  representative  samples  of 
the  quartz  fragments  and  pebbles  could  be  obtained,  quite  free  of 
the  matrix,  assays  of  the  material  might  yield  an  approximate 
indication  of  the  gold  content  of  the  original  vein  material. 

The  gold  recovered  at  this  plant  is  coarse  and  bright,  and  most  of 
it  is  angular,  only  about  2 per  cent  being  rounded.  The  assays  range 
from  $17.50  to  $18.15  an  ounce  and  average  perhaps  $18.  The 
largest  pieces  of  gold  recovered  from  the  gravel  banks  were  valued 
at  about  $10  or  $12,  but  a nugget  worth  $100  has  been  taken  from  the 
Eocene  quartzose  seams.  The  concentrates  recovered  with  the  gold 
are  composed  of  quartz,  ilmenite,  magnetite,  garnet,  zircon,  pyrite, 
arsenopyrite,  cassiterite,  and  a few  grains  of  scheelite. 

Twelve  men  were  employed  at  this  plant  early  in  the  summer  of 
1917,  but  some  of  them  left  toward  the  end  of  the  season.  Three 
other  operators  were  placer  mining  in  a small  way  on  the  Battle-Axe 
Association  ground — two  below  this  plant,  working  low  benches  along 
Thunder  Creek,  and  one  upstream,  working  in  the  creek  placers. 
Considerable  native  copper  has  been  found  in  the  bed  of  Thunder 
Creek  at  the  upper  plant. 

FALLS  CREEK. 

Falls  Creek  is  described  by  Capps 1 as  follows: 

Falls  Creek  is  the  next  important  tributary  of  Cache  Creek  south  of  Thunder  Creek. 
It  heads  in  the  slates  and  graywackes  of  the  Dutch  Hills,  flows  in  a course  roughly 
parallel  to  that  of  Thunder  Creek,  and  joins  Cache  Creek  about  three-fourths  mile 
south  of  it.  At  the  point  where  it  passes  from  the  slates  to  the  beds  of  the  coal-bearing 
series  it  has  developed  a narrow  canyon  and  a waterfall,  which  suggested  its  name. 
Gold  was  first  mined  on  Falls  Creek  in  1905,  in  the  canyon  cut  through  the  slates,  and 
the  stream  afforded  considerable  production  for  a few  years.  In  the  narrower  portion 
of  the  canyon  the  difficulties  of  diverting  the  creek  prevented  mining  except  for  a short 
time  in  the  spring  when  the  volume  of  the  stream  was  small. 


Capps,  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  p.  62. 


252 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Two  small  placer  plants  were  in  operation  on  Falls  Creek  in  1917. 
One  of  these  plants  was  mining  a bench  placer  deposit  on  claim  No.  2 
above  Discovery,  about  35  feet  above  the  creek  level.  A hydraulic 
nozzle,  with  a head  of  90  feet,  was  used  to  remove  3 feet  of  gravel 
from  a slate  bedrock.  Water  was  being  taken  from  a tributary  of 
Falls  Creek  that  enters  from  the  east  side.  The  gold  is  moderately 
coarse  but  contains  no  exceptionally  large  pieces.  Earlier  in  the 
summer  the  same  operator  worked  on  an  association  of  six  claims 
that  lie  downstream  from  claim  No.- 1 below  Discovery.  This  work 
was  done  in  the  creek  placers  by  the  hydraulic  nozzle  under  a head  of 
125  feet.  The  tailings  also  were  stacked  by  means  of  the  nozzle. 
The  gold  recovered  was  rather  fine.  Four  men  were  employed. 

One  other  man  was  at  work  on  Discovery  claim  on  F alls  Creek,  just 
at  the  mouth  of  the  canyon. 

DOLLAR  CREEK. 

Capps  1 describes  the  general  character  of  Dollar  Creek  as  follows: 

Dollar  Creek,  the  lowest  large  tributary  of  Cache  Creek  from  the  west,  joins  Cache 
Creek  2 miles  below  the  mouth  of  Falls  Creek.  The  geologic  and  topographic  con- 
ditions in  its  basin  are  much  like  those  on  Thunder  and  Falls  creeks.  Dollar  Creek 
flows  from  the  slate  hills  at  its  head  out  onto  the  Cache  Creek  plateau  in  a sharply 
incised  valley,  which  gradually  becomes  deeper  downstream  until  at  the  mouth  of  the 
creek  the  valley  bottom  lies  over  300  feet  below  the  general  level  of  the  surrounding 
country.  Even  below  the  borddr  of  Dutch  Hills  the  slate  bedrock  is  exposed  by  the 
stream  cut  for  some  distance  out  upon  the  plateau,  showing  that  the  old  slate  surface 
on  which  the  soft  bedrock  sediments  were  laid  down  was  uneven. 

In  1917  placer  mining  was  being  carried  on  at  the  Anna  Bub  mine, 
a group  of  claims  extending  about  6 miles  along  Dollar  Creek.  The 
chief  work  was  done  on  claim  No.  1 above  Discovery. 

The  conditions  at  this  property  are  essentially  similar  to  those  on 
Thunder  Creek — that  is,  a hard  bedrock  composed  of  slate  and 
graywacke  is  overlain  by  a gold-bearing  quartzose  stratum  of  Kenai 
age,  which  in  turn  is  overlain  by  a body  of  gravel  and  glacial  mud. 
At  the  site  of  present  mining  operations,  on  the  east  end  of  the  creek, 
the  bedrock  is  a deeply  weathered  green  graywacke,  which  strikes 
N.  25°  E.  and  dips  from  70°  E.  to  90°.  In  the  creek  bed  the  bedrock 
consists  of  slate  in  a similar  state  of  alteration,  but  more  crushed  and 
folded,  and  therefore  with  a less  uniform  trend. 

The  quartzose  stratum  is  estimated  to  be  60  feet  thick  in  the 
middle  of  the  cut  and  contains  about  an  equal  number  of  fragments 
of  quartz  and  graywacke  which  are  imperfectly  rounded  to  angular, 
thus  showing  the  small  amount  of  water  transportation.  The  gray- 
wacke, which  is  more  susceptible  to  weathering  than  the  quartz,  is 
the  more  rounded,  but  even  the  quartz  at  this  locality  shows  some- 
what more  the  effect  of  the  action  of  water  than  the  quartz  on 


i Capps.  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  p.  62. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  253 

Thunder  Creek.  A bed  of  lignite  was  seen  on  this  deposit  and 
others  were  reported.  At  one  place  in  the  cut  a body  of  green  gray- 
wacke, about  75  feet  long  and  30  feet  thick,  lies  in  and  takes  the  place 
of  the  quartzose  bed,  about  10  feet  of  which  lies  both  above  and 
below  the  graywacke.  This  body  may  be  either  an  exceptionally 
large  detrital  boulder  lying  in  the  quartzose  formation,*  or  a reef 
projecting  upward  from  the  underlying  bedrock,  undercut  on  the 
west  side  and  filled  with  placer  material,  or  possibly  a block  of  gray- 
wacke faulted  upward  from  the  underlying  bedrock.  The  first 
hypothesis  seems  more  probable. 

Overlying  the  quartzose  beds  is  a bed  of  gravel,  from  a few  inches 
to  several  feet  in  thickness,  and  ranging  from  fine  “ chicken  feed”  to 
coarse  boulders.  This  gravel,  particularly  in  its  coarser  phases, 
carries  considerable  gold,  though  not  so  much  to  the  cubic  yard  as 
the  underlying  quartzose  deposit.  Above  the  gravel  lies  85  feet  of 
blue  reworked  glacial  mud,  which  contains  many  washed  boulders 
from  6 inches  to  3 feet  in  diameter  and  carries  only  a little  gold. 
The  uppermost  10  feet  of  the  placer  is  composed  of  sandy  wash  with 
some  gravel,  which  also  pans  a little  fine  gold. 

Most  of  the  gold  is  recovered  from  the  quartzose  deposit  and  from 
the  surface  of  the  underlying  graywacke.  Within  the  quartzose  body 
itself  gold  seems  to  be  localized  at  the  upper  surface  of  thin  bands  of 
fine  siliceous  mud  and  also  upon  the  lignite  beds,  both  of  which 
appear  to  have  acted  as  false  bedrock.  It  seems  certain  that  this 
deposit  has  been  acted  upon  by  water  to  a greater  degree  than  the 
Thunder  Creek  deposit,  though  the  two  deposits  had  essentially  the 
same  origin. 

The  gold  recovered  is  both  coarse  and  fine,  and  only  a little  of  it 
is  worn.  The  largest  nugget  so  far  recovered  is  worth  $90  and  is 
believed  to  have  come  from  the  gravel  bed  above  the  quartzose 
deposit.  An  $18  nugget,  with  well-rounded  outline,  was  found  on 
the  surface  of  the  graywacke  bedrock.  The  gold  ranges  from  $17.56 
to  $17.60  an  ounce  in  value. 

An  unusually  large  amount  of  pyrite  is  recovered  in  the  concen- 
trates. This  mineral  occurs  in  both  crystalline  and  massive  form, 
ranging  from  minute  crystals  up  to  balls  of  pyrite  inches  in 
diameter.  This  pyrite  was  assayed,  at  the  suggestion  of  the  writer, 
and  was  found  to  contain  4.03  ounces  of  gold  or  about  $71  to  the 
ton.  The  other  heavy  minerals  of  the  concentrates  include  mag- 
netite, ilmenite,  quartz,  zircon,  garnet,  and  cassiterite. 

This  property  has  been  worked  for  seven  years,  during  the  last 
four  years  of  which  work  has  been  done  largely  on  the  quartzose 
deposit.  Eight  men  were  employed  in  1917.  Seventy-five  sluice 
boxes,  each  about  6J  feet  in  length,  are  used  in  the  sluice  line,  and 
some  fine  gold  is  found  in  the  very  last  of  these.  Hydraulicking  is 
115086°— 19 17 


254 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


done  under  a head  of  200  feet,  and  when  conditions  are  favorable 
about  1,000  cubic  yards  of  material  can  be  put  through  the  boxes 
in  a day. 

WINDY  CREEK. 

Windy  Creek  rises  in  the  Peters  Hills  and  flows  in  a general  westerly 
course  to  join  Cache  Creek  between  Falls  and  Dollar  creeks.  It  is 
the  only  tributary  of  Cache  Creek  from  the  southeast  side  of  the 
valley  that  has  been  found  to  carry  placer  gold  in  economic  amounts. 

The  placer  is  a bench  deposit  about  80  feet  above  the  creek  level, 
on  the  left  side,  consisting  of  160  to  180  feet  of  glacio-flu  via  tile 
material.  The  lower  40  to  60  feet  consists  of  gravel,  of  which  the 
lower  6 feet  is  iron-stained  and  firmly  cemented.  This  body  of 
gravel  is  overlain  by  100  feet  of  blue  mud  containing  large  angular 
boulders,  and  this  in  turn  is  covered  by  20  feet  of  gravel  which 
extends  to  the  surface.  The  gravel  in  general  averages  5 inches  in 
diameter,  though  boulders  from  1 to  3 feet  in  diameter  are  uncovered. 
The  bedrock  is  clay  and  sandrock  of  the  coal-bearing  formation. 
Most  of  the  gold  occurs  in  the  lower  6 feet  of  the  deposit  and  is  fine 
and  flaky,  the  largest  piece  recovered  being  valued  at  $1.85.  The 
concentrates  are  composed  of  pyrite,  quartz,  ilmenite,  magnetite, 
garnet,  limonite,  arsenopyrite,  zircon,  and  a little  cassiterite.  Pyrite 
is  particularly  abundant  in  the  upper  gravel  bed.  Native  copper  in 
small  amount  and  scheelite  are  also  reported  from  the  concentrates. 

This  great  bank  of  gravel  and  mud  is  washed  down  by  two  nozzles, 
of  4 and  5 inches  diameter  respectively,  with  a head  of  225  feet. 
High  and  low  line  ditches  from  Windy,  Little  Windy  (a  fork  of 
Windy),  and  Fox  creeks  supply  the  necessary  water.  Between 
300,000  and  400,000  cubic  yards  of  material  was  hydraulicked  at 
this  property  in  1917.  Four  men  were  employed. 

PETERS  CREEK  BASIN. 

PETERS  CREEK. 

Peters  Creek  rises  in  the  Dutch  Hills,  flows  for  17  miles  to  the 
southeast,  cuts  through  the  Peters  Hills  in  a narrow  gorge,  and  then 
flows  in  a direction  south  of  west  for  about  19  miles  to  join  Kahiltna 
River  about  5 miles  below  Camp  2.  That  part  of  Peters  Creek 
which  drains  the  Dutch  and  Peters  hills — that  is,  the  upper  12  miles — 
is  the  scene  of  placer  mining  in  this  drainage  basin  and  is  the  subject 
of  discussion  in  this  paper.  Peters  Creek  in  its  lower  valley  flows  in 
a flat,  open-timbered  country,  over  the  outwash  of  glacio-fluviatile 
deposits. 

The  chief  headwater  tributaries  of  Peters  Creek  are  Cottonwood 
Creek,  which  enters  from  the  northeast,  and  Bird  Creek,  which  enters 
from  the  west  4 miles  upstream.  Poorman  and  Willow  creeks  are 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OP  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  255 

important  tributaries  of  Cottonwood  Creek  and  enter  from  the 
northwest  side  of  the  valley.  Cottonwood,  Willow,  and  Poorman 
creeks  really  drain  the  northeastward  extension  of  the  Cache  Creek 
glaciated  trough,  whereas  Bird  Creek  and  the  extreme  headwater 
tributaries  of  Peters  Creek  cut  back  into  the  Dutch  Hills.  A low 
saddle  west  of  the  mouth  of  Cottonwood  Creek  separates  Peters 
Creek  from  the  headwaters  of  Cache  Creek,  and  a similar  low  saddle 
separates  the  head  of  Cottonwood  Creek  from  Long  Creek,  a tributary 
of  Tokichitna  River. 

Capps-1  describes  the  physiographic  features  of  Peters  Creek  as 
follows: 

Peters  Creek  occupies  a valley  intermediate  between  Kahiltna  and  Tokichitna 
rivers  and  in  its  upper  portion  is  roughly  parallel  to  these  two  streams.  It  heads  in 
a broad,  severely  glaciated,  U-shaped  valley  in  the  Dutch  Hills,  turns  at  a right 
angle  to  cross  the  Cache  Creek  plateau,  crosses  the  Peters  Hills  through  a deep  trans- 
verse trough,  and  enters  the  broad  lowland  of  the  Susitna  Valley,  the  west  edge  of 
which  it  follows  to  its  junction  with  Kahiltna  River.  Its  total  length  is  more  than 
35  miles.  In  its  course  through  the  higher  parts  of  the  Dutch  Hills  it  flows  in  the  bot- 
tom of  the  glacial  trough  in  a channel  which  has  been  notched  little  or  not  at  all  into 
the  slates  and  graywackes  of  the  hills.  In  the  more  easily  eroded  coal-bearing  beds 
of  the  Cache  Creek  plateau  it  has  intrenched  itself  deeply  in  a canyon-like  valley 
that  extends  headward  into  the  slates  for  some  distance  above  the  mouth  of  Bird 
Creek,  and  a similar  canyon  extends  for  more  than  a mile  up  Bird  Creek.  The  down- 
ward slope  of  the  Cache  Creek  plateau  toward  Peters  Hills  causes  the  stream  valley 
to  become  shallower  and  wider  in  that  direction,  but  on  entering  the  valley  through 
these  hills  the  creek  again  flows  through  a rock  canyon.  This  second  slate  canyon 
terminates  at  the  east  border  of  the  Peters  Hills,  the  stream  once  more  flowing  between 
valley  walls  of  the  coal-bearing  series  and  the  banks  gradually  becoming  lower  down- 
stream through  the  little-known  area  of  the  Susitna  lowland  to  the  south  and  east. 

No  placer  mining  was  being  done  on  Peters  Creek  in  1917,  but 
prospecting  was  in  progress  along  the  benches  and  in  the  stream 
gravels  at  the  lower  end  of  the  Peters  Hills  canyon,  and  below  this 
locality.  About  2 miles  of  claims  in  this  vicinity  have  been  leased 
by  one  operator,  and  it  is  expected  that  these  placers  will  be  thor- 
oughly prospected  in  1918. 

With  regard  to  the  discovery  of  gold  on  Peters  Creek  and  particu- 
larly with  reference  to  the  earlier  work  done  in  and  near  this  canyon, 
Capps  2 writes  as  follows : 

Gold  was  discovered  at  a number  of  places  on  Peters  Creek  and  its  affluents  in  1905, 
and  mining  has  been  done  on  that  creek  each  summer  since  that  time.  In  1911  work 
was  in  progress  at  two  places  on  the  main  stream.  At  the  mouth  of  the  canyon, 
through  Peters  Hills,  a short  distance  above  the  point  at  which  the  stream  passes  from 
the  slates  onto  the  soft  bedrock,  two  men  were  mining  on  a bench  about  30  feet  above 
the  stream  level,  where  a few  feet  of  gravel  lie  on  a slate  bedrock.  Water  under  a 
pressure  of  70  feet,  brought  by  ditch  and  canvas  hose,  was  used  for  piping  the  gravels 
into  the  sluice  boxes.  The  gravels  contain  rather  abundant  boulders.  At  the  time 


i Capps,  S.  R.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  63-64. 


2Idem,  pp.  64-65. 


256 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


the  place  was  visited  some  of  the  ground  was  still  frozen.  The  gold,  which  is  for 
the  most  part  concentrated  on  bedrock,  is  coarse,  flat,  worn,  and  somewhat  rusty,  and 
gives  evidence  of  having  traveled  some  distance  from  its  source.  The  largest  nugget 
found  weighed  9 pennyweights,  and  the  gold  assays  about  $17.75  to  the  ounce.  The 
ground  worked  in  1910  was  a short  distance  downstream  from  that  worked  in  1911, 
on  a bench  only  a few  feet  above  the  stream.  The  bedrock  at  this  place  is  a hard, 
rusty  dike  intruded  into  the  slates.  Prospect  holes  in  the  creek  gravels  below  the 
canyon  show  placer  gold  on  a soft  bedrock,  but  the  gradient  of  the  creek  is  too  low 
and  the  ground  too  deep  to  permit  mining  by  pick  and  shovel  methods. 

The  bedrock  source  of  the  gold  in  lower  Peters  Creek  is  still  open  to  queston,  but 
this  gold,  like  that  in  the  other  parts  of  this  district,  was  doubtless  derived  from  the 
quartz  stringers  in  the  slates  and  graywackes.  In  lower  Peters  Creek  some  of  the 
gold  may  have  come  directly  from  the  rocks  of  Peters  Hills,  through  which  the  valley 
is  cut,  but  as  gold  is  found  in  the  stream  gravels  above  Peters  Hills  and  up  to  the  head 
of  the  stream  it  seems  probable  that  the  present  placers  are  in  large  part  the  product 
of  reconcentration  of  gold  that  was  scoured  from  the  upper  tributaries  of  the  streams 
by  glacial  ice,  scattered  throughout  the  valley,  and  again  reconcentrated  by  post- 
glacial erosion. 

About  three-fourths  mile  below  the  mouth  of  Bird  Creek,  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
upper  rock  canyon  of  Peters  Creek,  two  men  were  mining  in  1911  near  the  contact  of 
the  slates  with  the  soft  bedrock.  A dike  of  a crystalline  intrusive  rock  crosses  Peters 
Creek  at  this  place.  The  creek  gravels  average  about  6 feet  in  depth  and  the  gold 
values  are  concentrated  on  or  near  bedrock.  At  the  time  the  creek  was  visited  in 
1911  little  ground  had  been  mined,  but  the  claims  between  the  mouth  of  the  canyon 
and  Bird  Creek  are  said  to  have  produced  a few  thousand  dollars  altogether. 

In  1916  the  creek  gravels  on  a bar  west  of  the  creek  itself,  about 
2,000  feet  below  the  mouth  of  the  canyon,  were  mined  by  two  men. 
A cut  700  feet  long  and  48  feet  wide  was  worked  by  open-cuk  meth- 
ods, and  the  material  was  shoveled  into  sluice  boxes  in  three  16-foot 
cuts.  The  depth  to  bedrock  was  4 feet  but  increased  rather  ab- 
ruptly on  each  side  of  the  cut.  This  cut  is  an  old  watercourse  of 
Peters  Creek.  The  ground  is  reported  to  have  yielded  $1  a cubic 
yard  of  gravel  mined.  Downstream  from  this  cut  a number  of 
prospect  holes  have  been  begun,  but  at  a depth  of  5 or  6 feet  water 
was  encountered  and  the  work  ceased.  The  bedrock,  however,  is 
known  to  be  composed  of  the  Eocene  coal-bearing  formation,  con- 
sisting of  sandstone,  shale,  and  lignitic  coal  beds.  If  the  drill  shows 
that  this  lower  ground  is  favorable,  it  may  perhaps  be  worked  profit- 
ably by  dredging.  About  three-quarters  of  a mile  below  the  canyon 
the  valley  floor  that  is  suitable  for  dredging  is  about  1,200  feet  wide, 
and  the  canyon  is  a fine  power  site. 

At  the  lower  end  of  the  canyon,  at  an  elevation  of  1,880  feet  on 
the  west  side,  the  contact  between  the  slate  and  graywacke  series 
and  the  coal-bearing  formation  is  exposed.  The  slate  and  gray- 
wacke formation  at  this  locality  strikes  N.  70°  W.  and  dips  30°  N., 
though  the  original  strike  for  this  vicinity  is  probably  more  nearly 
N.  55°  E.,  and  the  dip  is  steep  to  the  northwest,  as  seen  farther  up 
in  the  canyon.  Numerous  diabase  dikes  cut  the  slate  and  gray- 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  257 


wacke  and  weather  out  conchoidally  as  “niggerheads.”  Quartz 
veinlets  and  stringers  are  also  numerous. 

In  this  vicinity — that  is,  at  the  lower  end  of  the  canyon — a small 
bench  placer  about  15  feet  above  the  creek  and  embracing  about 
5,000  square  feet  was  hydraulicked  in  1915  or  1916.  The  over- 
burden comprises  3 feet  of  gravel  and  3 feet  of  overlying  soil.  Far- 
ther from  the  stream  the  overburden  is  heavier,  and  the  work  was 
discontinued.  A similar  bench  about  50  to  80  feet  above  the  creek 
bed  was  worked  in  1916,  and  about  20,000  feet  of  bedrock  was 
cleaned.  It  is  possible  that  a larger  hydraulic  plant  could  be  in- 
stalled here  and  could  work  the  deeper  and  heavier  bench  gravels 
at  a profit. 

POORMAN  CREEK. 

The  headwaters  of  Poorman  Creek  rise  in  and  cut  through  the 
rock  of  the  slate  and  graywacke  series,  but  the  coal-bearing  forma- 
tion begins  a short  distance  downstream  and  continues  to  the  mouth. 
Discovery  claim  lies  at  the  contact  between  the  slate  and  graywacke 
series  and  the  coal-bearing  formation.  Twenty-four  claims,  cover- 
ing practically  the  whole  creek,  are  now  owned  by  two  men,  who  are 
working  this  ground  every  year.  In  1917  most  of  the  work  was 
done  on  claim  No.  1 below  Discovery  and  a smaller  amount  on  Dis- 
covery and  claim  No.  1 above  Discovery. 

On  claim  No.  1 below  Discovery  a bench  deposit  was  worked. 
This  deposit  consisted  of  25  feet  of  gravel,  lying  upon  a bedrock 
composed  of  Eocene  conglomerate  and  clay  shale.  The  lower  part 
of  the  gravel  is  a heavier  wash  than  the  upper  part  and  contains 
boulders  1 foot  in  diameter  and  some  as  large  as  4 feet.  It  is  also 
much  iron  stained.  The  upper  part  is  made  up  of  finer  gravel  and 
contains  a number  of  beds  of  peat  several  inches  thick.  Much  of 
the  gold  is  found  in  the  lower  part  of  the  gravel  and  on  bedrock. 
About  2,500  square  feet  of  bedrock,  aggregating  about  2,300  cubic 
yards  of  gravel,  was  hydraulicked  on  this  bench  in  1917.  Water  is 
usually  scarce,  and  the  hydraulicking  has  to  be  done  intermittently, 
when  the  dam  upstream  fills  with  water. 

Also  on  claim  No.  1 below  Discovery,  but  upstream  from  the  bench 
deposit  just  described,  at  the  mouth  of  Dandy  Creek,  a tributary  of 
Poorman  Creek,  two  men  worked  the  creek  gravels  by  hydraulick- 
ing. The  bedrock  is  composed  of  Eocene  conglomerate,  and  the 
overburden  is  about  10  feet  thick.  The  pay  streak,  which  ranges  in 
width  on  Poorman  Creek  from  6 to  150  feet,  is  here  at  its  widest. 
Some  hydraulic  mining  also  was  done  on  Poorman  Creek  above  the 
mouth  of  Dandy  Creek. 

The  gold  recovered  from  the  upper  end  of  Discovery  claim  and 
from  claim  No.  1 above  Discovery  is  coarse,  shotty,  and  rather  dark 
in  color,  and  some  of  it  is  much  iron  stained.  The  bench  gold  is 


258 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


similar  but  a little  coarser.  The  gold  from  Poorman  Creek  at  the' 
mouth  of  Dandy  Creek  is  brighter,  finer,  and  more  flaky.  The 
bright  gold  is  valued  at  $17.70  to  $17.78  an  ounce  before  melting, 
and  the  dark  gold  is  worth  somewhat  more. 

The  concentrates  taken  with  Poorman  Creek  gold  are  of  special 
interest  on  account  of  their  content  of  platinum  and  tin.  A mixed 
sample  of  the  concentrates  taken  from  bench  and  creek  placers 
showed  the  presence  of  garnet,  cassiterite,  zircon,  magnetite,  ilmen- 
ite,  pyrite,  quartz,  and  platinum.  This  sample,  after  examination 
by  the  writer,  was  submitted  to  Ledoux  & Co.,  of  New  York,  who 
report  the  presence  of  36.54  per  cent  of  tin — that  is,  the  sample 
must  have  contained  about  46  per  cent  of  cassiterite.  The  cassiter- 
ite is  present  as  small  crystals,  none  of  which  in  the  sample  examined 
exceeded  a quarter  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  Another  sample  of  con- 
centrates, which  weighed  647  grains  and  which  was  the  very  heaviest 
of  the  pannings  and  represented  perhaps  a five-hundredth  concen- 
tration of  the  first  sample,  was  found  to  have  a considerable  amount 
of  platinum  metals,  perhaps  100  grains. 

The  platinum  metals  from  Poorman  Creek  are  essentially  similar  to 
those  from  Cache  Creek.  Two  kinds  were  obtained — the  dark-gray 
to  bronze  flat,  flaky  pieces,  which  presumably  are  largely  platinum, 
and  the  bright,  silvery,  commonly  crystalline  variety,  which  is  sup- 
posed to  be  chiefly  iridium  and  osmium.  A sample  weighing  41.6 
grains  was  picked  by  hand  from  the  heavy  concentrates  above  men- 
tioned and  was  submitted  to  the  chemical  laboratory  of  the  United 
States  Geological  Survey  for  complete  analysis.  P.  C.  Wells,  the 
analyst,  reports  as  follows: 

Analysis  of  sample  of  platinum  metals  from  Poorman  Creek. 


Silica,  etc 1.0 

Iridosmium 32.  0 

Iridium 11.3 

Rhodium 1.  4 

Platinum 47.  3 

Iron 5.  2 

Gold 1.5 

Palladium Trace. 

Copper 1 

Nickel 03 

Zinc  and  silver Trace. 


99.  83 


Specific  gravity  of  sample,  18.1. 

More  platinum  was  seen  on  Poorman  Creek  than  at  any  other  place 
in  the  Kahiltna  Valley,  yet  even  at  this  locality  it  is  doubtful  whether 
enough  platinum  is  available  to  make  its  recovery  on  a commercial 
scale  worth  while. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  259 

Poorman  Creek  shows  evidence  of  intensive  mineralization.  On 
Discovery  claim,  at  the  contact  of  the  slate  and  graywacke  series  with 
the  coal-bearing  formation,  the  slate  strikes  N.  35°  E.  and  dips  55° 
NW.  A dike  of  soda  rhyolite  porphyry  cuts  the  slate  just  above  the 
contact,  and  others  crop  out  farther  upstream.  The  porphyry  consists 
of  phenocrysts  of  quartz  and  albite  in  a fine-grained,  much  altered 
groundmass  of  the  same  material,  and  both  phenocrysts  and  ground- 
mass  show  the  result  of  later  sericitization  (replacement  by  sericite) . 
Mineralized  quartz  veins  and  stringers  commonly  accompany  these 
dikes.  In  claim  No.  1 above  Discovery  the  slate  bedrock  is  soft,  de- 
composed, and  much  mineralized  by  pyrite.  This  zone  of  mineral- 
ization in  upper  Poorman  Creek  appears  to  extend  into  the  Willow 
Creek  and  Long  Creek  basins  and  must  have  had  a strong  influence  on 
the  placers  at  those  localities.  It  can  not  be  doubted  that  some  of 
the  placer  gold  on  Poorman  Creek  has  been  concentrated  directly  from 
sources  in  mineralized  bedrock  subsequent  to  the  retreat  of  the  ice, 
although  concentration  from  the  glacio-fluviatile  deposits  certainly 
took  a major  part  in  the  process.  One  fact  that  bears  on  the  localized 
origin  of  the  gold  on  Poorman  Creek  is  the  recent  discovery  of  a gold- 
bearing  gravel  channel  in  the  coal-bearing  sediments  just  above  their 
contact  with  the  slate  and  graywacke  series.  The  value  and  extent 
of  this  channel  have  not  been  investigated,  but  the  very  fact  of  its 
existence  indicates  that  some  of  the  gold  was  localized  in  this  drainage 
basin,  for  no  means  of  transportation  other  than  water  was  effective 
in  the  coal-forming  epoch.  The  origin  of  the  platinum  metals  is  not 
known. 

WILLOW  CREEK. 

On  Willow  Creek  placer  mining  was  carried  on  by  one  operator 
at  two  different  localities — on  Ruby  Creek,  a headwater  tributary  of 
Willow  Creek  that  enters  from  the  east  side,  and  on  the  main  Willow 
Creek  some  distance  downstream. 

On  Ruby  Creek,  where  most  of  the  summer’s  work  was  done,  the 
present  stream  gravels  were  being  worked  in  a pay  channel  at  least 
30  feet  wide,  in  which  4 feet  of  gravel  lies  upon  Eocene  coal-bearing 
bedrock.  The  gold  is  found  largely  on  the  bedrock.  About  400 
feet  of  the  creek  bed,  or  about  12,000  feet  of  bedrock,  was  worked  by 
the  hydraulic  nozzle  in  1917.  On  Willow  Creek  the  gravel  was 
shoveled  into  boxes. 

The  gold  is  rather  fine,  flaky,  and  bright.  It  resembles  very  much 
the  gold  from  Poorman  Creek  at  the  mouth  of  Dandy  Creek,  though 
it  is  a little  finer.  Platinum  in  small  amount  was  noticed  with  the 
gold,  though  it  may  be  considered  negligible  as  a commercial  product. 
The  concentrates  collected  with  the  gold  in  the  sluice  boxes  are  made 
up  of  garnet,  magnetite,  ilmenite,  zircon,  cassiterite,  pyrite,  and 


260 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 


quartz.  A sample  of  these  concentrates  was  submitted  to  Ledoux  & 
Co.,  of  New  York,  who  report  the  presence  of  20.03  per  cent  of  tin, 
hence  the  concentrates  must  consist  of  about  25  per  cent  cassiterite. 
The  cassiterite  is  of  the  same  character  as  that  found  on  Poorman 
Creek — that  is,  it  consists  of  small  crystalline  grains. 

On  Gopher  Creek,  another  headwater  tributary  of  Willow  Creek, 
which  enters  from  the  west  side,  another  man  was  hydraulicking  the 
creek  gravels.  A cut  1,200  feet  long  and  40  feet  wide  had  been 
worked,  exposing  Eocene  bedrock  in  the  lower  part  of  the  cut  and 
slate  bedrock  in  the  upper  part.  At  the  upper  end  of  the  cut  two 
subsidiary  pay  channels  that  cross  the  main  channel  were  discovered, 
and  plans  for  future  work  involve  the  working  of  a left-side  bench  in 
the  hope  of  finding  a continuation  of  these  channels.  The  overburden 
in  the  cut  is  about  4 feet  thick,  and  the  gold  lies  chiefly  on  bedrock. 
A preglacial  conglomerate,  composed  of  greatly  decayed  pebbles  of  all 
kinds,  the  largest  18  inches  in  diameter,  was  observed  at  the  upper  end 
of  the  cut.  The  gold  is  rather  fine,  the  largest  nugget  so  far  recovered 
being  valued  at  $4.  An  interesting  exhibit  from  this  placer  con- 
sisted of  a specimen  in  which  native  gold  and  lead  were  intimately 
intergrown. 

BIRD  CREEK. 

At  the  lower  end  of  Bird  Creek,  about  two  claim  lengths  from  the 
mouth  of  the  creek,  one  man  was  engaged  in  1917  in  working  a bench 
deposit  on  the  north  side  of  the  creek  and  about  50  feet  above  it. 
The  bedrock  is  composed  of  slate  and  is  overlain  by  a gravel  deposit 
which  is  8 feet  thick  at  the  north  side  of  the  cut  and  decreases  to  a 
few  inches  toward  the  creek.  The  bedrock  is  very  uneven,  owing 
partly  to  the  high  tilt  of  the  slate  and  partly  to  erosional  potholes. 
The  best  paying  material  is  found  mainly  on  the  bedrock.  The  gold 
is  coarse,  dark,  and  iron  stained.  The  largest  nugget  so  far  recov- 
ered weighed  1 ounce.  A soda  rhyolite  porphyry  dike  crosses  Bird 
Creek  just  above  the  bench,  and  numerous  quartz  stringers  occur  in 
the  slate  bedrock.  Mining  is  done  by  means  of  a hydraulic  nozzle, 
but  the  bedrock  is  picked,  cleaned,  and  shoveled  into  the  boxes  by 
hand. 

One  claim  length  farther  upstream  on  Bird  Creek  another  man  was 
at  work  on  the  St.  Louis  bench,  on  the  south  side  of  the  creek.  The 
bench  is  50  feet  above  the  creek  level,  and  a 40-foot  head  is  used  in 
hydraulicking  the  deposit. 

The  gold  placer  body  on  the  St.  Louis  bench  is  quite  different  from 
any  in  the  Peters  Creek  basin  previously  described,  and  so  far  as  any 
workable  placer  in  the  Cache  Creek  district  is  concerned  it  is  corre- 
latable  only  with  the  glacio-fluviatile  auriferous  deposit  on  Windy 
Creek,  in  the  Cache  Creek  basin.  This  deposit  seems  to  be  purely  of 
glacio-fluviatile  origin  and  consists  of  50  to  75  feet  of  glacial  mud 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  261 

and  angular  to  subangular  boulders  of  all  sizes,  resting  upon  a much 
broken,  decayed,  and  uneven-surfaced  slate.  The  upper  10  feet  is 
stained  yellowish  brown  from  the  effect  of  surface  oxidation.  Gold 
is  distributed  rather  evenly  throughout  the  placer  body,  with  no 
particular  concentration  at  or  near  bedrock. 

The  gold  is  both  coarse  and  fine  but  is  ahnost  universally  angular, 
only  about  1 or  2 per  cent  being  worn.  One  pretty  specimen  of 
dendritic  gold  and  others  of  wire  gold,  all  quite  unworn,  have  been 
recovered.  As  a rule  the  gold  is  dark  in  color,  and  the  largest  nug- 
gets are  deeply  iron  stained.  A piece  of  gold  worth  $12  is  the 
largest  so  far  found. 

The  concentrates  contain  about  95  per  cent  of  pyrite,  both  in 
cubical  and  massive  form.  The  few  remaining  constituents  include 
arsenopyrite,  magnetite,  and  a very  little  scheelite.  A little  native 
copper  is  also  found  occasionally  in  the  concentrates. 

TOKICHITNA  BASIN. 

LONG  CREEK. 

Long  Creek  heads  against  Cottonwood  and  Poorman  creeks  and 
flows  northeastward  for  about  6 miles  to  join  the  Tokichitna  a short 
distance  above  Home  Lake.  Its  drainage  basin  lies  entirely  within 
the  area  of  the  slate  and  graywacke  series.  In  1917  one  man  was 
engaged  in  placer  mining  on  Canyon  Creek,  a small  headwater  tribu- 
tary of  Long  Creek  that  enters  from  the  west.  Both  Canyon  Creek 
and  Long  Creek  above  the  mouth  of  Canyon  Creek  cut  through  the 
slate  in  gorges. 

The  valley  floor  of  Canyon  Creek  in  the  gorge  is  from  8 to  30  feet 
wide,  and  the  pay  channel  has  a greatest  width  of  7 to  15  feet,  averag- 
ing perhaps  6 feet  but  narrowing  in  places  to  1 foot.  A cut  600  feet 
long  in  this  channel  was  mined  in  1917,  the  placer  being  shoveled 
into  sluice  boxes.  At  the  upper  end  of  the  cut  the  gravel  is  only  2 
feet  thick,  but  it  increases  to  8 feet  at  the  lower  end.  Most  of  the 
gravels  are  in  the  form  of  cobbles  averaging  6 inches  in  diameter, 
though  boulders  as  large  as  2 feet  are  present.  The  gold,  which  is 
coarse,  lies  for  the  most  part  on  or  near  bedrock,  and  much  of  it  is 
iron  stained.  The  largest  nugget  found  was  worth  $34,  but  pieces 
worth  from  $1  to  $3  are  common.  A few  small  grains  of  platinum 
were  observed  with  the  gold  and  in  the  heavy  sands. 

The  concentrates  include  magnetite,  ihnenite,  garnet,  zircon,  cassit- 
erite,  specularite,  quartz,  and  occasionally  a little  platinum.  In  a 
sample  of  the  heaviest  of  these  minerals,  panned  from  the  general 
run  of  concentrates,  some  fine  specimens  of  crystalline  cassiterite, 
with  quite  unworn  edges,  were  noticed. 


262 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


At  the  lower  end  of  the  cut  on  Canyon  Creek  a zone  of  soft,  clayey 
decomposed  slate  about  50  feet  wide  is  exposed,  which  is  cut  by  quartz 
stringers  and  visibly  mineralized  by  pyrite.  This  zone  trends  N.  15° 
E.,  the  general  trend  of  the  slaty  cleavage  at  this  locality.  At  the 
head  of  Long  Creek  acidic  dikes  and  numerous  quartz  stringers  cut 
the  slate.  It  is  believed  that  much  of  the  Long  Creek  gold  in  the 
present  creek  placers  has  been  concentrated  directly  from  miner- 
alized bedrock  in  this  vicinity,  rather  than  from  the  glacio-fluviatile 
deposits. 

KAHILTNA  RIVER. 

In  1917  prospecting  for  gold  and  platinum  placers  was  carried  on 
at  two  localities  on  Kahiltna  River — -one  about  3 miles  by  stream 
below  the  mouth  of  Peters  Creek,  where  five  men  were  at  work;  the 
other  30  miles  downstream,  where  seven  men  were  employed. 

The  bedrock  at  the  upper  camp  is  the  coal-bearing  formation, 
composed  of  iron-stained  sandrock,  blue  clay  with  included  woody 
material,  and  numerous  lenses  of  fine  iron-stained  conglomerate. 
This  formation  is  exposed  above  and  below  the  camp  in  the  bluffs 
along  the  river.  Beds  of  lignitic  coal  are  also  present  in  this  vicinity. 
The  extreme  width  of  the  gravel  channel  is  several  hundred  yards, 
but  the  boundaries  of  a definite  pay  channel  had  not  yet  been  deter- 
mined at  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit.  Along  the  east  side  of  the 
river,  near  the  water’s  edge,  the  gravel  is  6 feet  thick,  but  farther 
back,  in  the  timber,  it  is  9 feet  to  bedrock.  Seven  drill  holes  had 
been  sunk  to  bedrock,  and  the  gravels  were  found  to  range  from  a 
few  inches  to  2 feet  in  diameter.  There  is  said  to  be  a heavy  con- 
centration of  black  sand  in  the  gravel.  The  gold  is  very  fine,  as  the 
coarsest  pieces  are  worth  1 or  2 cents,  and  it  is  said  to  be  worth  a 
trifle  over  $18  an  ounce  after  melting.  Platinum  is  also  reported  in 
these  gravels. 

Mining  on  a very  small  scale  has  been  carried  on  intermittently  for 
a number  of  years  along  the  bars  of  Kahiltna  River,  and  some  fairly 
rich  spots  have  been  found,  particularly  on  the  bars  projecting  into 
the  river  at  sharp  turns.  Sholan  Bar  at  this  upper  camp  contains 
some  surficial  placer  of  this  character.  Thirty  pans  of  gravel,  panned 
for  the  vriter,  contained  considerable  fine  gold  and  a few  grains  of 
platinum.  The  concentrates  taken  in  these  30  pans  consisted  of 
garnet,  magnetite,  ilmenite,  zircon,  and  quartz.  It  is  believed  by 
the  present  prospectors  that  a good  chance  exists  of  finding  similar 
amounts  of  gold,  but  more  particularly  platinum,  in  the  deeper 
gravels  extending  to  bedrock.  The  content  of  free  platinum,  how- 
ever, appears  to  be  small,  and  the  writer  finds  no  evidence  to  support 
the  idea  that  platinum  is  present  in  chemical  combination  with  other 
minerals  of  the  concentrates. 


PLATINUM-BEARING  GOLD  PLACERS  OF  KAHILTNA  VALLEY.  263 

At  the  lower  camp  on  Kahiltna  River  seven  men  were  engaged  in 
prospecting  and  related  work.  Forty-five  claims  are  owned  and 
options  are  held  on  36  others  in  the  vicinity  of  this  lower  camp  by 
the  same  owners  as  at  the  upper  camp.  Prospecting  has  been  done 
chiefly  at  the  bars  along  the  river  by  hand  methods  and  by  means 
of  two  gasoline  drills  of  4 and  8 horsepower.  Thirteen  drill  holes 
had  been  sunk  by  September,  1917. 

The  lower  camp  is  on  the  west  side  of  Kahiltna  River  just  above 
the  mouth  of  Beaver  Creek,  a small  tributary  entering  the  river  about 
8 miles  above  the  Yentna.  At  Round  Bend  Bar,  on  the  east  side  of 
the  Kahiltna  about  8 miles  above  the  camp,  about  $1,500  in  gold 
was  rocked  out  by  two  men  from  about  100  cubic  yards  of  gravel 
taken  from  the  bar  in  1908.  Some  platinum  was  found  with  the 
gold.  The  concentrates  included  magnetite,  ilmenite,  hematite,  limo- 
nite,  quartz,  garnet,  zircon,  and  a little  platinum.  Each  cubic  yard 
of  gravel  is  said  to  have  contained  3 pounds  of  black  sand.  About 
0.1  cubic  yard  of  gravel  from  the  water’s  edge  was  panned  for  the 
writer  and  found  to  contain  some  fine  gold  and  a few  grains  of  plati- 
num. Four  claims  are  held  at  Round  Bend  Bar  and  vicinity,  and 
seven  drill  holes  have  been  sunk,  but  none  of  them  have  reached 
bedrock. 

At  Boulder  Bench,  on  the  same  side  of  the  river  and  downstream 
from  Round  Bend  Bar,  a small  open  cut  about  600  square  feet  in 
extent  has  been  made  in  the  gravel  bank  about  15  feet  above  the 
river’s  edge.  This  has  been  prospected  at  different  times  since  1907. 
The  gold-bearing  bedrock  is  exposed  at  a height  of  about  6 feet  above 
the  river,  but  a layer  of  hardened  gravel  and  clay  about  9 feet  above 
the  river  has  been  used  as  a false  bedrock.  The  average  amount  of 
gold  to  the  cubic  yard  from  this  cut  indicates  a commercial  gold 
placer,  but  the  extent  of  the  pay  gravel  is  not  known.  A little  plati- 
num also  was  found  here  in  pieces  as  much  as  one-eighth  inch  in 
diameter.  No  drill  holes  have  been  sunk  at  Boulder  Bench. 

Other  barsf  along  the  Kahiltna  also  carry  some  gold.  At  Leslies 
Bar,  about  2 miles  above  the  camp,  on  the  west  side  of  the  river,  four 
men  working  in  1907  made  $13  a day  for  each  man,  and  another  bar 
near  by  produced  $500  in  1906.  At  both  these  localities,  however, 
the  pay  gravel  was  within  1 foot  of  the  surface.  One  drill  hole  was 
put  down  9 feet  on  Leslies  Bar  in  1916  and  is  said  to  have  shown 
favorable  conditions.  Five  drill  holes  were  sunk  in  1917  on  the  Red 
Hill  Bar,  across  the  river  from  the  Round  Bend  claims. 

COAL  DEPOSITS. 

The  coal-bearing  formation,  as  shown  on  the  accompanying  map 
(PI.  VI),  includes  many  beds  of  lignitic  coal,  which  crop  out  at  numer- 
ous localities  in  Kahiltna  Valley.  These  coal  beds  range  in  size  from 


264 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


mere  stringers  a few  inches  thick  up  to  beds  14  feet  thick.  The  coal 
is  classed  as  lignite,  though  it  varies  somewhat  in  grade.  There  is 
little  promise  that  such  fuel  will  ever  have  a market,  even  in  the 
near-by  Cook  Inlet  district,  because  of  the  presence  of  better  coal  in 
the  Matanuska  Valley  which  can  be  more  easily  procured.  Yet  a 
good  opportunity  exists  to  use  this  coal  locally  for  fuel  and  power, 
and  this  is  now  being  done  by  the  Cache  Creek  Mining  Co. 

A number  of  coal  beds  are  exposed  on  Short  Creek,  a tributary  to 
Cache  Creek.  Probably  the  best  one  is  a bed  of  high-grade  lignite 
about  8 feet  thick,  without  partings,  near  the  head  of  the  creek.  An 
entry  100  feet  long  was  driven  into  this  coal  seam,  and  it  was  mined 
for  a period  by  the  Cache  Creek  Dredging  Co.,  but  the  upkeep  of  the 
wagon  road  up  the  canyon  of  Short  Creek  was  found  to  be  too  costly 
and  the  work  was  abandoned. 

At  present  the  company  is  mining  another  coal  bed  at  the  mouth 
of  Short  Creek,  about  half  a mile  below  the  mouth  of  Falls  Creek. 
About  1,000  tons  a month  was  mined  during  the  summer  of  1917, 
most  of  which  was  used  for  generating  power  on  the  dredge.  Some 
of  it,  however,  was  used  for  heating  in  the  camp.  Ten  men,  includ- 
ing a foreman,  were  employed.  This  coal  bed  strikes  about  west,  or 
perhaps  N.  80°  W.,  and  dips  about  10°  S.  An  entry  475  feet  long, 
with  a height  of  6 feet  in  the  clear,  has  been  driven  on  the  strike  of 
the  seam,  and  rooms  have  been  turned  off  at  regular  intervals  to  the 
northwest,  at  an  acute  angle  with  the  tunnel,  in  order  to  avoid  work- 
ing directly  up  the  dip.  So  far  eight  rooms  have  been  turned  off, 
the  largest  of  which,  No.  8,  is  200  feet  long.  Gravity  haulage  is 
employed  in  the  rooms.  A tipple  with  a capacity  of  50  tons  has 
been  built  at  the  mine  entry,  and  from  this  tipple  coal  is  dumped 
into  wagons  and  then  hauled  downstream  to. the  dredge  on  Cache 
Creek. 

The  coal  seam  is  rather  uniform  in  thickness,  averaging  5 feet  2 
inches.  About  14  inches  of  coal  is  left  in  the  roof  to  support  the 
overlying  clay,  and  the  rooms  are  therefore  4 feet  high.  No  clay 
partings  are  present,  but  a streak  about  4 inches  thick  in  the  upper 
half  of  the  seam  is  of  noticeably  lower  grade. 

Another  promising  bed  of  coal  is  exposed  along  the  east  bank  of 
Peters  Creek  about  2J  miles  below  the  mouth  of  the  canyon.  This 
bed  contains  a fairly  high  grade  coal,  which  is  reported  to  do  fairly 
well  for  blacksmi thing.  The  strike  of  the  bed  is  about  N.  45°  E. 
and  the  dip  about  70°  NW.  The  shale  footwall  is  exposed,  but  the 
hanging  wall  is  covered  by  slide.  About  10  feet  of  coal  is  exposed, 
but  the  total  thickness  of  the  bed  is  probably  12  or  14  feet. 


CHROMITE  DEPOSITS  IN  ALASKA. 


\ 


By  J.  B.  Mertie,  Jr. 


Deposits  of  chromite  have  been  known  in  Alaska  for  a number  of 
years,  but  they  became  of  economic  interest  only  in  1917,  when  the 
relatively  high  price  of  the  ore  recalled  them  to  the  attention  of 
mining  men,  with  the  result  that  ore  is  commercially  mined  at  one 
property. 

The  chromite  deposits  of  present  economic  interest  are  at  the 
southwest  end  of  Kenai  Peninsula,  in  two  areas,  one  along  the  north 
shore  of  Port  Chatham  and  the  other  at  Red  Mountain,  about  16 
miles  to  the  northeast.  (See  fig.  3.)  Both  deposits  occur  in  bodies  of 
altered  peridotite,  and,  so  far  as  known,  these  are  the  only  bodies  of 
peridotite  in  this  vicinity,  but  exploration  farther  from  the  coast,  in 
the  mountains,  may  reveal  others. 

Peridotite  of  the  same  kind  also  occurs  in  large  and  small  masses 
at  several  other  places  in  the  area  between  Yukon  and  Tanana  rivers, 
and  at  Livengood,  in  that  area,  there  is  a deposit  of  chromite,  but 
the  ore  in  the  interior  of  Alaska  could  not  be  mined  profitably  except 
when  prices  are  very  high. 

The  chromite  of  southwestern  Kenai  Peninsula  occurs  in  lens- 
shaped bodies  that  range  in  thickness  from  a few  inches  to  20  feet 
and  that  lie  in  attitudes  ranging  from  horizontal  to  vertical.  None 
of  the  lenses  appear  to  be  more  than  150  feet  long,  and  most  of  them 
measure  considerably  less.  The  ore  is  not  of  uniform  grade.  Some 
of  it  averages  50  per  cent  of  chromic  oxide,  and  some  is  a mixture 
of  chromite  and  peridotite,  the  leanest  part  of  which  may  yield  only 
5 to  10  per  cent  of  chromic  oxide.  All  gradations  between  these 
extremes  are  found. 

The  deposit  now  being  mined  is  on  a spit  at  the  southeast  end  of  a 
peninsula  known  as  Claim  Point,  which  projects  southeastward  into 
Port  Chatham.  This  peninsula  measures  about  4,000  feet  from  east 
to  west  and  about  2,200  feet  from  north  to  south,  and  is  joined  to  the 
mainland  by  a neck  of  land  about  200  feet  wide.  The  rock  of  Claim 
Point  is  entirely  peridotite,  which  crops  out  also  on  the  mainland  to 
the  north  and  continues  southward  into  Port  Chatham  for  an  un- 
known distance.  The  known  area  of  peridotite  here  covers  about 
three-fifths  of  a square  mile. 


265 


266  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

The  ore  body  is  almost  completely  covered  by  water  at  high  tide, 
so  that  mining  must  be  done  between  low  and  half  tide.  The  deposit 
is  in  a vertically  placed  lens,  which  has  a length  of  about  100  feet 
and  a maximum  width  of  20  feet. 

About  800  tons  of  ore  containing  from  46  to  49  per  cent  of  chromic 
oxide  was  mined  in  1917,  and  about  as  much  more  remains  in  sight 


Figure  3. — Map  of  the  Seldovia  district.  Shaded  areas  show  location  of  chromite  deposits. 

above  half  tide.  Ultimately  it  will  be  necessary  to  work  from  a 
shaft  or  cofferdam  and  hoist  ore  to  the  surface,  a method  that  will 
increase  materially  the  cost  of  mining. 

Probably  the  upper  half  of  the  deposit  has  been  removed  by 
erosion.  If  so,  and  if  the  deposit  becomes  thinner  downward  for  50 
feet  and  the  ore  has  a specific  gravity  of  3.9,  only  4,000  or  at  most 
5,000  tons  remains  below  the  level  of  half  tide. 


CHROMITE  DEPOSITS  1 1ST  ALASKA. 


267 


Several  other  lenses  of  high-grade  ore,  none  more  than  3 feet  thick, 
occur  in  this  vicinity,  as  well  as  a number  of  bodies  of  low-grade  ore 
that  range  in  thickness  from  5 to  20  feet  and  in  content  of  chromic 
oxide  from  5 to  15  per  cent.  At  one  place  on  the  north  side  of  Claim 
Point,  near  the  crest  of  the  peninsula,  there  are  four  lodes  that  stand 
nearly  vertical,  and  the  owners  are  considering  the  feasibility  of 
driving  a tunnel  from  a lower  point  on  the  hillside  to  crosscut  them. 
These  four  bodies  should  produce,  when  concentrated,  about  3,000 
tons  of  50  per  cent  ore,  but  it  is  likely  that  the  tunnel  contemplated 
might  also  reveal  other  deposits.  There  should  be  available  at 
Claim  Point  at  least  15,000  tons  of  chromite  ore  of  a grade  containing 
50  per  cent  of  chromic  oxide. 

The  freight  rate  on  ore  from  Port  Chatham  to  Seattle  is  $3.50  a 
ton,  and  from  Seattle  to  an  eastern  smelter  is  about  $12  a ton,  to 
which  must  be  added  the  cost  of  lighterage  to  the  steamship  anchorage 
in  Port  Chatham  or  lighterage  to  the  wharf  at  Port  Graham. 

The  body  of  peridotite  at  Red  Mountain  is  much  larger  than  that 
at  Claim  Point  but  is  more  difficult  of  access,  and  the  grade  of  the  ore 
there  is  not  so  well  known.  The  peridotite  covers  about  3 square 
miles  and  contains  many  stringers  and  lenses  of  chromite  ore,  of 
both  high  and  low  grade.  The  largest  deposit  observed  was  a 
lenticular  body  of  high-grade  ore  not  more  than  75  feet  long,  that 
had  a maximum  thickness  of  8 feet  at  the  center  and  contained  prob- 
ably not  over  1,000  tons.  At  this  place  there  are  many  other 
smaller  deposits  and  perhaps  some  as  large  or  larger,  all  of  which 
should  yield  at  least  as  much  chrome  ore  and  possibly  several  times 
as  much  as  the  body  at  Claim  Point.  On  the  other  hand,  these  ores 
occur  at  an  elevation  of  about  3,000  feet  and  at  a minimum  distance 
of  6 miles  from  tidewater,  from  which  much  of  the  route  lies  through 
a precipitous  and  densely  vegetated  country.  In  winter  the  ore 
might  be  sledded  out  to  tidewater,  but  in  summer  it  would  have  to 
be  carried  by  a tram. 


GEOLOGIC  PROBLEMS  AT  THE  MATANUSKA  COAL  MINES. 


By  G.  C.  Martin. 


INTRODUCTION. 

A brief  visit  was  made  to  the  Matanuska  coal  fields  from  August 
26  to  31,  1917,  for  the  purpose  of  reviewing  the  mining  developments 
that  have  been  undertaken  since  the  detailed  geologic  survey1  of 
that  field  was  made  and  of  conferring  with  Mr.  Sumner  S.  Smith, 
the  engineer  in  charge  of  the  coal-mining  operations  of  the  Alaskan 
Engineering  Commission,  in  regard  to  structural  and  other  geologic 
problems  that  had  come  up  in  connection  with  mining. 

MINES  ON  ESKA  CREEK. 

GENERAL  GEOLOGY. 

The  mines  on  Eska  Creek  are  in  the  NE.  | NE.  J sec.  16,  T.  19  N., 
R.  3 W.,  which  is  part  of  leasing  block  No.  7.  At  the  time  that  the 
field  work  was  done  the  workings  included  nine  openings,  all  of  which 
are  drifts  from  natural  exposures  of  coal  beds  near  the  level  of  the 
creek.  Three  of  these  openings  were  productive  mines,  and  the 
others  included  prospect  openings,  abandoned  mines,  and  mines  that 
had  not  yet  become  productive.  (See  fig.  4.) 

The  coal  beds  that  are  being  mined  and  prospected  on  Eska  Creek 
are  exposed  in  a discontinuous  series  of  low  cliffs  that  extend  inter- 
mittently along  one  or  the  other  bank  of  the  creek  but  generally 
not  on  both  of  them.  Between  these  cliffs  are  covered  slopes,  and 
back  from  them  are  gravel  terraces  and  gently  sloping  areas  covered 
with  glacial  drift  and  containing  few  if  any  exposures  of  rock.  The 
outcrops  on  Eska  Creek  show  that  the  creek  cuts  across  two  eastward- 
trending belts  of  gently  dipping  coal-bearing  rocks — a southern  or 
northward-dipping  belt,  in  which  the  Emery,  David,  and  Kelly 
drifts  are  situated,  and  a northern  or  southward-dipping  belt,  in 
which  the  Maitland,  East  Eska,  Shaw,  Martin,  and  West  Eska 
drifts  are  situated.  The  southern  belt  lies  north  of  and  is  separated 
by  a concealed  interval  from  Cretaceous  rocks  that  are  older  than 
the  coal.  The  northern  belt  lies  south  of  and  merges  into  or  is 
separated  by  a fault  from  a belt  of  intensely  deformed  coal  measures 

1 Martin,  G.  C.,  and  Katz,  F.  J.,  Geology  and  coal  fields  of  the  lower  Matanuska  Valley:  U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull,  500,  98  pp.,  19  pis.,  1912. 


115086°— 19 18 


269 


270 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


that  probably  is  practically  barren  of  workable  coal  and  that  extends 
northward  into  the  great  zone  of  faulting  on  the  southern  border  of 
the  high  mountains.  For  immediate  practical  purposes  only  the 


Figure  4.— Map  of  the  Eska  Creek  coal  mines. 

two  gently  dipping  belts  of  coal  measures  need  to  be  considered  in 
further  detail.  As  shown  below  (p.  273),  these  belts  may  be  fault 
blocks  or  may  be  the  opposite  flanks  of  a syncline.  The  rocks  of  each 


GEOLOGIC  PROBLEMS  AT  THE  MATANUSKA  COAL  MINES.  271 


belt  are  cut  by  faults,  some  of  which  show  at  the  surface,  whereas 
others  have  been  encountered  in  mining.  Nowhere  has  the  magni- 
tude of  any  of  the  faults  been  determined. 

The  southern  or  northward-dipping  belt  of  coal-bearing  rocks 
extends  from  a point  near  the  northwest  corner  of  Eska  town  site 
to  a point  between  the  Kelly  drift  and  the  upper  railroad  bridge  just 
above  the  old  mine  camp.  The  strike  is  in  general  N.  60°-75°  E., 
and  the  dip  30°-40°  NW.  Near  the  northern  edge  of  this  belt  the 
following  section  is  exposed: 

Section  on  west  bank  of  Eska  Creek  opposite  old  mine  camp. 


Sandstone.  Ft. 

[Coal 2-2  J 

Coal  (Kelly  seam)  j 1 ‘ Clod  ” 4-6 

[Coal  (average) 3 

Concealed 10  ± 

6 

5 

4 

5 

2 


Shale  (partly  concealed) 

Sandstone 

Gray  shale  with  some  ironstone 

Shale 

[Coal 

Coal  (David  seam)-!  Yellow  shale 

[Coal 

Carbonaceous  shale 

Ironstone 

Gray  shale 

Ironstone 

Gray  shale 

Ironstone 

Gray  shale 

Ironstone 

Gray  shale 

Ironstone 

Gray  shale 

Ironstone  concretions 

Gray  shale 

Sandstone  lens  (grades  into  shale) . . 
Shale  with  a few  ironstone  nodules 

Shale  with  a little  coal 

Shale  and  coal 

Bone 


Coal  (Emery  seam) 


Coal 

Soft  shale. 

Coal 

Soft  shales. 
Coal 


These  beds  strike  about  N.  80°  E.  and  dip  30°  N. 
are  shown  graphically  in  figure  5. 


3 

£-2 

4 

2 I 
2 

5 
5 

12 

3 
2 


6 

li 

10 


6 

3 
1 

4 
2 

10 


Their  relations 


272 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Beneath  this  section  the  rocks  are  mostly  concealed.  Near  the 
bridge  at  the  lower  end  of  the  railroad  yards  is  an  outcrop  which 
shows  about  4 feet  of  impure  coal  that  strikes  N.  60°  E.  and  dips 


45°  N.  This  bed  should  be  about  300  or  400  feet  below  the  Emery 
seam,  if  there  is  no  fault  in  the  concealed  interval.  On  the  east  bank 
of  the  creek  near  the  northwest  corner  of  Eska  town  site  is  an  outcrop 


GEOLOGIC  PROBLEMS  AT  THE  MATANUSKA  COAL  MINES.  273 


of  shalek  in  part  coaly,  that  should  be  several  hundred  feet  lower 
than  the  coal  last  described. 

The  next  known  outcrops,  down  the  creek,  are  of  Cretaceous  sand- 
stone in  the  bluff  near  the  northeast  corner  of  sec.  21.  The  inter- 
vening gap,  about  half  a mile  wide,  would  contain  the  contact  of  the 
coal  measures  with  the  underlying  formation.  There  are  reasons  for 
suspecting  that  this  contact  is  locally  along  a fault.  The  base  of  the 
coal-bearing  formation  is  certainly  not  exposed  along  the  creek,  and 
apparently  it  is  not  exposed  in  the  near-by  hills.  Consequently  it  is 
not  possible  to  estimate  the  position  of  the  coal  beds  just  described 
relative  to  the  base  of  the  coal-bearing  formation,  or  to  state  whether 
there  are  other  coal  beds  beneath  them. 

The  northern  or  southward-dipping  belt  of  coal-bearing  rocks 
extends  from  the  upper  railroad  bridge  to  the  vicinity  of  the  main 
forks  of  Eska  Creek  near  the  northeast  corner  of  the  SE.  J SW.  J 
sec.  9.  The  general  strike  is  N.  60°-90°  E.,  and  the  dip  5°-35°  S. 
The  discontinuity  of  the  exposures,  the  presence  of  faults,  and  the 
presence  of  disturbances  that  may  be  caused  either  by  faulting  or  by 
slumping  and  tilting  of  blocks  of  strata  on  the  steep  hillsides  make  it 
impossible  to  describe  a complete  section  or  to  determine  the  thick- 
ness of  strata  and  the  number  and  position  of  the  coal  beds.  The 
exposed  strata  are  at  least  300  feet  thick  and  include  four  or  more 
coal  beds,  among  which  are  those  opened  at  the  Maitland,  Eska, 
Shaw,  and  Martin  drifts.  Detailed  measurements  and  discussions  of 
the  several  incomplete  local  sections  are  given  on  pages  274-275.  The 
base  of  the  coal  measures  is  not  exposed  in  this  belt,  and  there  is  no 
information  available  in  regard  to  the  total  thickness  of  the  coal 
measures  or  the  number  of  the  coal  beds  beneath  the  surface. 

The  contact  of  the  two  belts  of  gently  dipping  coal-bearing  rocks 
lies  in  a concealed  interval  near  the  upper  bridge  in  the  railroad  yards. 
Because  of  this  concealment  it  is  impossible  to  state  whether  these 
belts  lie  on  opposite  flanks  of  a syncline  or  are  fault  blocks.  As  their 
contact  lies  approximately  in  line  with  the  synclinal  axis  of  Wishbone 
Hill,  it  might  be  assumed  that  the  synclinal  relation  is  the  more 
probable.  However,  the  synclinal  structure  of  Wishbone  Hill  is 
shown  only  in  exposures  of  the  Eska  conglomerate,  which  is  less  dis- 
turbed than  the  coal  measures  and  overlies  them  possibly  in  uncon- 
formable  relation,  and  consequently  an  unfaulted  syncline  in  the 
conglomerate  need  not  necessarily  extend  east  to  Eska  Creek  or  down 
into  the  coal  measures.  Furthermore,  the  locality  here  discussed  is 
nearer  in  line  with  the  possible  fault  that  marks  the  southern  boundary 
of  the  conglomerate  mass  of  Wishbone  Hill  than  it  is  with  the  syn- 
clinal axis  of  the  hill  itself.  The  strata  exposed  on  the  opposite  sides 
of  the  concealed  interval  are  not  sufficiently  characteristic  (see  p.  274) 
to  furnish  reliable  evidence  as  to  whether  they  are  identical.  It  must 


274 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


be  concluded,  therefore,  that  either  a fault  or  a synclinal  axis  is 
possible  at  this  locality.  The  writer  believes  that  the  fault  is  more 
probable,  but  the  actual  relations  can  be  determined  with  absolute 
certainty  only  by  following  the  coal  underground  through  the  con- 
cealed interval. 

The  northern  or  southward-dipping  belt  of  coal-bearing  rocks 
appears  in  a discontinuous  series  of  exposures  that  extends  along  the 
east  bank  of  the  creek  for  about  600  feet,  beginning  near  the  railroad 
bridge,  or  about  400  feet  above  the  Kelly  drift.  (See  fig.  5.)  The 
southernmost  and  presumably  the  highest  (stratigraphically)  of  these 
exposures  is  the  following: 

Section  on  east  bank  of  Eslca  Creek  near  upper  railroad  bridge. 


Shale.  Feet. 

Coal,  with  shale  partings 4 

Sandstone  and  shale 20 

Sandstone 7 

Shale 3 

[Coal 3 

Coal  (Maitland  seam)  < Shale 3-6 

[Coal 3 


It  is  possible  that  the  Maitland  seam  is  the  same  as  the  Kelly  seam. 
This  correlation  is  suggested  by  the  general  similarity  in  section  of 
the  coal  seams  themselves  and  by  the  presence  of  a massive  sandstone 
above  the  Maitland  seam  like  that  above  the  Kelly  seam.  The  writer 
believes  that  this  correlation  should  be  considered  as  probable, 
though  not  proved. 

The  strata  are  mostly  concealed  for  a distance  of  about  300  feet  up 
the  creek  from  the  Maitland  drift.  About  150  feet  above  the  Mait- 
land drift  is  an  old  prospect  opening  that  shows  about  3 feet  of  coal. 
This  coal  bed  and  the  strata  in  the  concealed  intervals  on  each  side 
of  it  should  lie  below  the  Maitland  seam  and  have  a thickness  of  50  to 
150  feet  unless  they  have  been  faulted.  The  probable  presence  of  at 
least  one  fault  in  this  interval  is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  the  Eska 
coal,  which  has  been  opened  (see  section  below)  near  the  northern 
end  or  at  the  stratigraphic  base  of  this  concealed  interval,  is  not 
overlain  by  the  massive  cliff-making  sandstone  and  other  strata 
which  overlie  the  Eska  coal  on  the  west  bank  of  the  creek,  nor  is  there 
room  for  these  strata  in  the  concealed  interval.  (See  section,  p.  275.) 

At  the  upper  end  of  this  concealed  interval  is  an  exposure  in  which 
the  East  Eska,  Shaw,  and  Martin  drifts  have  been  driven.  The 
section  at  this  locality  is  as  follows: 

Section  on  east  bank  of  Eska  Creek  at  upper  end  of  railroad  spur. 


Ft.  in. 

Sandstone 20 

Shale 5 

Coal  (Eska  seam) ^ 2 6 


GEOLOGIC  PROBLEMS  AT  THE  MATANUSKA  COAL  MINES.  275 


Ft.  in. 

Shale 9 

Ft.  in. 

'Coal 1 1 

Shale 1 

Coal  (Shaw  seamV  Coal 10£ 

Shale 1* 

Coal 2 0 

4 2 

Concealed  (partly  shale  and  sandstone) 25  ± 

Coal  (Martin  seam) 3± 


Above  this  point  the  best  exposures  are  on  the  west  bank  of  Eska 
Creek,  where  there  is  a discontinuous  series  of  exposures  that  extends 
north  from  a point  opposite  the  upper  end  of  the  preceding  section. 
There  are  no  exposures  on  the  west  bank  of  the  creek  between  this 
point  and  the  Kelly  drift,  a distance  of  about  800  feet.  At  the  south- 
ern end  of  these  exposures  a drift  (West  Eska)  has  been  driven  on 
the  Eska  seam.  The  following  section  is  exposed  at  this  locality: 


Section  in  cliff  on  west  side  of  Eska  Creek  opposite  upper  end  of  railroad  spur. 


Ft.  in. 

Sandstone  (cliff) 75± 

Soft  sandstone 9 

Shale  with  a little  coal 2 

Concealed  (shale  and  sandstone) G4 

Shale 16 

Coal  (Eska  seam) 3 

Shale  with  coal  streaks 5 

Shale 14 

Carbonaceous  shale 2 

Shale  and  coal 5 


Ft.  in. 


Coal 11 

Shale 3 

Coal 10 

Coal  (Shaw?  seam)<  Shale 3 

Coal 10 

Shale 1 

.Coal 1 9 


Shale 

Ironstone 

Shale 

Coal  (shaly) 

Coal 

Shale 

Coal 

Shale  with  ironstone  concretions 

Coal 

Shale 

Coal 

Shale 


4 11 

5 
1 
5 

2 6 
2 

5 

2 2 
23 
1 

6 

1 . 

10 


276 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  thick  sandstone  at  the  top  of  this  section  forms  a cliff  that 
extends  continuously  westward  along  the  top  of  the  bluff  west  of 
Eska  Creek  from  the  West  Eska  drift  to  a point  near  the  northwest 
corner  of  the  NE.  \ sec.  16.  Beneath  this  sandstone  cliff  are  gentler 
slopes,  generally  covered  with  talus  and  soil,  in  which  reliable  expo- 
sures are  by  no  means  numerous  or  extensive.  Some  of  the  exposures 


-50 


L-0 

Figure  6. — Hypothetical  correlation  of  coal  beds  on  west  bank  of  Eska  Creek,  in 
the  N.  I NW.  I sec.  16,  T.  19  N.,  R.  3 E.  1,  Cliff  near  West  Eska  drift;  2,  about 
1,250  feet  below  forks;  3,  about  1,100  feet  below  forks. 

at  the  base  of  the  bluff  apparently  indicate  faults  and  local  folds  that 
were  not  seen  in  the  sandstone  of  the  cliff.  Some  of  the  exposures 
are  certainly  blocks  that  have  been  tilted  or  have  fallen  on  the 
steep  Hillside.  A larger  number  of  the  exposures  may  either  be  rocks 
in  place  or  tilted  or  fallen  blocks.  If  they  are  rocks  in  place  the 


GEOLOGIC  PKOBLEMS  AT  THE  MATANUSKA  COAL  MINES.  277 


soft  shales  and  coal  beds  may  have  yielded  more  than  the  massive 
sandstone  under  the  forces  that  caused  the  folding  and  faulting,  or  the 
sandstone  may  overlie  the  coal-bearing  shales  with  an  undetected 
unconformity  and  for  that  reason  does  not  partake  of  all  their 
structural  complexity,  or  it  may  he  that  there  is  an  undetected  fault 
along  the  base  of  the  sandstone  cliff. 

The  writer  has  published  elsewhere  1 a section  which  shows  the 
strata  beneath  the  massive  sandstone  at  a locality  about  1,200  feet 
above  the  West  Eska  drift.  In  another  section 2 he  shows  the 
strata  including  and  underlying  the  same  sandstone  at  a locality 
about  1,350  feet  above  the  West  Eska  drift. 

It  will  be  assumed,  in  the  absence  of  evidence  to  the  contrary,  that 
there  is  neither  an  unconformity  or  a fault  at  the  base  of  the  sand- 
stone. Therefore,  if  the  coal  beds  are  persistent  the  coal  beds  in 
section  36  and  those  in  the  upper  half  of  section  37  may  possibly  be 
correlated  with  the  coal  beds  exposed  in  the  cliff  near  the  West  Eska 
drift,  as  is  indicated  in  figure  6. 

A short  distance  above  the  place  where  section  37  was  measured 
several  faults  are  exposed  in  the  west  bank  of  the  creek.  One  of 
these  faults  shows  considerable  displacement.  This  fault  possibly 
marks  the  northern  edge  of  the  block  of  rock  that  forms  Wishbone 
Hill.  Just  north  of  this  fault  several  northward-dipping  coal  beds 
are  exposed,  of  which  the  following  section  was  measured: 


Section  on  west  bank  of  Eska  Creek  1,450  feet  above  West  Eska  drift. 


Sandstone. 

Coal  (lenticular) 

Shale 

Coal 

Shale 

Coal 

Shale 

Coal 

Shale 

Coal 

Shale 

Coal 

Shale 

Coal  (with  some  shale) 
Shale . - ’ 


Ft.  in. 
4 

14 

2 6 
2 

2 6 


4 

8 


2 

1 

1 

20 

2 

5 


The  northward  dip  at  this  locality  is  believed  to  be  a local  feature 
caused  by  drag  on  the  fault  plane.  The  next  exposures  up  the  creek 
are  of  southward-dipping  strata  and  do  not  show  coal  beds. 

The  exposures  on  the  west  fork  of  Eska  Creek,  above  the  main 
forks  in  the  SE.  J SW.  \ sec.  9,  are  of  closely  folded  and  much- 


1 Martin,  G.  C.,  and  Katz,  F.  J.,  Geology  and  coal  fields  of  the  lower  Matanuska  Valley,  Alaska:  U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Bull.  500,  pp.  84-85,  section  36,  1912. 

2 Idem,  pp.  85-87,  section  37. 


278  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

disturbed  rocks,  in  which  several  thin  coal  beds  and  stringers  of 
coal  were  noted.  The  thickest  coal  seen  is  near  the  northern  boundary 
of  sec.  9 and  is  recorded  in  section  38.1  This  exposure  is  possibly 
the  same  as  that  of  which  Mr.  Sumner  S.  Smith  has  furnished  the 
following  measurement: 

Coal  bed  on  west  bank  of  Eska  Creek  near  the  north  boundary  of  sec.  9 , T.  19  N.,  R.  3 E. 


Dark-brown  shale  that  contains  ironstone  nodules.  Ft.  in. 

Mixed  sandstone  and  shale 1 10 

Intrusive  (?) 2 6 

Dark-brown  shale  that  contains  petrified  wood  and  nodules 6 

Dirty  coal  that  carries  bands  of  sulphur 1 4 

Dark  shale 1 4 

Very  hard  black  coal 2 2 

Shale 1 

Very  hard  black  coal 3 

Shale 1^ 

Very  hard  black  coal 2 10 

Shale  that  contains  concretions 10 

Strike,  N.  70°  E.;  dip,  73°  S. 


The  writer  believes  that  any  coal  beds  that  may  occur  in  this 
belt  of  intensely  deformed  rocks  on  the  border  of  the  high  mountains 
are  so  inaccessible  and  probably  are  so  lenticular  that  they  have  no 
immediate  value. 

PROGRESS  OF  MINING. 

The  workings  on  Eska  Creek  consisted,  in  the  summer  of  1917, 
of  nine  openings,  three  of  which  (the  Kelly,  David,  and  Shaw  drifts) 
are  in  the  northward-dipping  belt  of  coal  measures,  and  the  others 
(the  Maitland,  East  Eska,  Shaw,  Martin,  and  West  Eska  drifts, 
and  the  unnamed  prospect  opening  between  the  Maitland  and  East 
Eska  drifts)  are  in  the  southward-dipping  belt  of  coal  measures. 
Some  of  these  mines  (the  Kelly,  David,  Emery,  and  Maitland  drifts 
and  perhaps  some  of  the  others)  were  formerly  worked  by  lessees. 
The  Kelly,  David,  and  Emery  drifts  had  been  abandoned,  because 
the  coal  had  been  cut  off  by  a fault,  up  to  which  it  had  been  worked 
out  above  drainage.  In  the  West  Eska  and  Martin  drifts  main 
entries  were  being  driven  preparatory  to  mining.  The  Maitland, 
East  Eska,  and  Shaw  drifts  were  producing  coal  in  an  aggregate 
average  amount  of  about  100  tons  a day.  In  addition  to  the  fault 
that  cut  off  the  coal  in  the  Kelly,  David,  and  Emery  drifts,  a fault 
cuts  off  the  coal  in  the  Maitland  drift,  and  since  the  writer  left  the 
field  faults  have  been  encountered  in  the  East  Eska,  Shaw,  and 
West  Eska  drifts.  None  of  these  faults  show  at  the  surface.  The 
position  of  each  of  these  faults  in  the  mines  is  indicated  in  figure  4. 
The  extent  of  the  faults  beyond  the  present  workings  is  not  known. 


1 Martin,  G.  C.,  and  Katz,  F.  J.,  op.  cit.,  p.  87. 


GEOLOGIC  PROBLEMS  AT  THE  MATANUSKA  COAL  MINES.  279 
CHICKALOON  RIVER. 

The  coal  outcrops  on  Chickaloon  River  are  situated  in  the  S.  J 
NE.  1 sec.  25,  T.  20  N.,  R.  5 E.,  and  in  the  SW.  \ NW.  J sec.  30,  T. 
20  N.,  R.  6 E.,  which  constitute  part  of  leasing  block  No.  12. 

Chickaloon  River  enters  the  general  area  of  the  Matanuska  coal 
field  (the  Matanuska  Valley  proper)  in  the  northern  part  of  T.  20 
N.,  R.  6 E.  After  flowing  through  a gorge  cut  in  the  Eska  conglom- 
erate in  sec.  5,  it  comes  out  into  a more  open  valley,  where  there  are 
discontinuous  exposures,  first  on  one  bank  and  then  on  the  other. 
These  exposures,  from  the  lower  end  of  the  conglomerate  gorge  in 
sec.  5 to  the  point  where  the  river  turns  west  in  the  SW.  \ NW.  1 
sec.  30,  consist  of  steeply  folded  rocks  that  belong  to  the  Chickaloon 
formation  and  of  several  intrusive  masses.  The  Chickaloon  forma- 
tion underlies  the  Eska  conglomerate  and  includes  the  coal  beds  of 
the  Matanuska  field.  However,  it  is  not  everywhere  coal  bearing, 
and  none  of  the  exposures  just  mentioned  contain  any  coal.  The 
outcrops  on  the  north  or  west  bank  of  Chickaloon  River  in  its  east- 
west  course  from  the  eastern  boundary  of  the  SW.  1 NW.  I sec.  30, 
T.  20  N.,  R.  6 E.,  to  the  bend  just  above  the  west  boundary  of  the 
NE.  \ sec.  25,  T.  20  N.,  R.  5 E.,  contain  numerous  exposures  of 
coal.  These  outcrops  will  be  discussed  more  fully  below.  The 
south  or  east  bank  of  the  river  in  this  interval  contains  no  known 
outcrops  of  coal.  From  this  locality  to  its  mouth  Chickaloon  River 
flows  past  almost  continuous  exposures  of  steeply  but  somewhat 
irregularly  folded  rocks  that  belong  to  the  Chickaloon  formation 
and  of  numerous  intrusive  masses.  These  exposures  contain  no  coal. 
Throughout  the  series  of  exposures  along  Chickaloon  River,  from  the 
point  where  it  comes  out  of  the  high  mountains  into  the  general  area 
of  the  Matanuska  coal  field  to  its  mouth,  the  general  dip  is  northward. 
The  structure,  however,  is  not  a simple  monocline,  for  the  rocks  are 
probably  repeated  by  faults  as  well  as  by  partly  overturned  folds. 
The  discontinuity  of  the  exposures,  the  presence  of  faults  of  un- 
determinable throw,  the  possibility  of  unseen  faults  and  folds  in  the 
concealed  intervals,  and  the  lack  of  characteristic  horizon  markers 
make  it  impossible  to  describe  the  structure  except  in  general  terms. 

The  area  back  from  the  river  is  mostly  covered  with  terrace  or 
glacial  gravels.  Exposures  are  in  fact  practically  confined  to  the 
banks  of  the  larger  streams  and  to  knobs  of  intrusive  rocks.  The 
only  exposures  of  coal  known  to  the  writer  in  the  area  between 
Chickaloon  and  Kings  rivers  are  an  18  or  20  inch  bed  of  impure 
coal  about  200  feet  above  the  mouth  of  the  creek  that  enters  Chicka- 
loon River  in  the  SW.  J NW.  \ sec.  25,  a 15-inch  bed  of  impure 
coal  in  the  NW.  J NW.  J sec.  22,  and  a 3 or  4 foot  bed  of  coke  where 
a creek  crosses  the  west  line  of  the  SW.  \ sec.  15. 

The  coal  exposures  on  Chickaloon  River  are  in  the  face  of  the  bluff 
that  extends  for  a little  more  than  half  a mile  along  the  north  or  west 


280 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


side  of  the  river  in  its  east-west  course  through  the  S.  \ NE.  J sec.  25, 
T.  20  N.,  R.  5 E.,  and  the  SW.  \ NW.  i sec.  30,  T.  .20  N.,  R.  6 E. 
This  bluff,  which  is  about  100  feet  high,  rises  from  the  alluvial  flat 
on  the  river’s  edge  to  a gravel  terrace  that  is  about  a quarter  of  a 
mile  wide.  The  upper  part  of  the  bluff  is  composed  of  terrace 
gravels,  and  the  lower  part  is  composed  of  steeply  dipping  coal- 
bearing rocks  that  are  partly  concealed  by  gravels  that  have  slid 
down  over  them.  Several  coal  beds  are  exposed  in  outcrops  on  this 
bluff,  but  more  complete  exposures  are  afforded  by  11  tunnels  that 
have  been  driven  into  the  face  of  the  bluff.  Detailed  measurements 
of  the  coal  beds  and  other  strata  in  these  tunnels,  as  they  Were 
exposed  in  1910,  are  given  elsewhere.1  Additional  measurements 
were  doubtless  made  by  the  engineers  of  the  Bureau  of  Mines  in  the 
course  of  their  mining  operations  of  1913,  but  these  have  not  been 
published. 

The  attitude  of  the  coal  beds  differs  somewhat  in  different  parts 
of  the  exposures.  The  tunnels  on  Chickaloon  River  are  situated  in 
four  groups  between  which  the  rooks  are  more  or  less  concealed. 
This  grouping  is  indicated  in  the  following  list,  in  which  the  tunnels 
are  arranged  in  sequence  from  east  to  west : 

Coal  tunnels  on  Chickaloon  River. 

1.  Bend  of  river  in  east  part  of  SW.  \ NW.  \ sec.  30,  T.  20  N.,  R.  6 E. 

A,  B,  2.  E.  i SE.  i NE.  £ sec.  25,  T.  20  N.,  R.  5 E. 

3,  C.  W.  i SE.  i NE.  i sec.  25,  T.  20  N.,  R.  5 E. 

D,  4,  5,  E,  F.  SW.  i NE.  1 sec.  25,  T.  20  N.,  R.  5 E. 

The  five  western  tunnels  (Nos.  D,  4,  5,  E,  and  F)  and  the  eastern- 
most tunnel  (No.  1)  are  situated  farther  north  than  the  others. 
At  all  of  these  tunnels  the  strike  is  approximately  east  and  the 
dip  is  50°-70°  N.  In  the  Southernmost  tunnels  (Nos.  A,  B,  and  2) 
and  probably  also  in  the  near-by  intermediate  group  (Nos.  3 and  C) 
the  strike  is  northwest  and  the  dip  is  65°-85°  S.  In  tunnel  No.  2, 
the  presence  of  what  seems  to  be  a typical  underolay  on  top  of  one 
of  the  coal  beds  indicates  that  the  rooks  are  locally  overturned. 

The  attitude  of  the  coal  beds  as  described  above,  and  the  restric- 
tion of  the  known  coal  outcrops  to  this  eastward  course  of  the  river, 
can  not  be  definitely  explained  at  present.  There  are  several  pos- 
sible theories  concerning  the  local  structure  that  may  explain  the 
known  facts,  but  none  of  them  can  be  proved  or  disproved  without 
further  knowledge  of  underground  conditions.  These  theories  are 
thus  outlined: 

(1)  That  the  coal  outcrops  lie  on  a monoclinal  northward-dipping 
block  of  coal-bearing  rocks,  in  the  southern  part  of  which  (as  in 
tunnels  A,  B,  and  2)  the  rocks  are  folded  beyond  the  vertical. 

1 Martin,  G.  C.,  and  Katz,  F.  J.,  Geology  and  coal  fields  of  tlie  lower  Matanuska  Valley,  Alaska:  U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Bull.  500,  pp.  78-81, 1912.  Regulations  governing  coal-land  leases  in  the  Territory  of  Alaska, 
86  pp.,  maps,  U.  S.  Dept.  Interior,  1916. 


GEOLOGIC  PROBLEMS  AT  THE  MATANUSKA  COAL  MINES.  281 

If  this  theory  holds,  the  coal  lies  only  north  of  the  river.  The 
rocks  south  of  the  outcrops  are  barren  of  coal  unless  another  block 
of  coal  or  another  horizon  at  which  coal  is  present  passes  under  them 
from  the  south.  Eastern  and  western  extensions  of  the  coal  belt 
may  lie  concealed  beneath  the  terrace  gravels,  or  these  extensions 
may  be  cut  off  by  transverse  faults. 

(2)  That  the  coal  outcrops  lie  in  an  anticline,  of  which  the  coal 
beds  of  tunnels  A,  B,  and  2 are  on  the  southern  limb. 

According  to  this  theory,  the  coal  may  be  present  in  depth  both 
north  and  south  of  the  river.  Such  an  anticline  may  extend  east 
and  west  beneath  the  terrace  gravels,  it  may  plunge  in  either  or  both 
directions,  or  it  may  be  out  off  at  one  or  both  ends  by  a transverse 
fault.  The  exposure  at  tunnel  No.  1 seems  to  indicate  anticlinal 
folding.  The  northward-dipping  rocks  along  the  river  below  the 
tunnels  indicate  that  the  anticline,  and  possibly  the  coal  beds  also, 
are  cut  off  by  a fault  and  do  not  extend  west  of  the  bend  of  the  river 
in  the  SW.  i NE.  I sec.  25,  T.  20  N.,  R.  5 E. 

(3)  That  the  coal  outcrops  lie  in  two  monoclinal  blocks  separated 
by  a fault. 

Under  this  theory  the  coal  may  underlie  at  considerable  depth  an 
area  both  north  and  south  of  the  river.  The  coal-bearing  strata 
may  extend  east  and  west  beneath  the  terrace  gravels  or  they  may 
be  cut  off  by  transverse  faults. 

The  actual  structure  at  the  Chickaloon  coal  outcrops  and  conse- 
quently the  extent  of  the  coal  in  depth  can  obviously  be  determined 
with  certainty  only  by  underground  exploration.  Because  of  this 
condition,  and  because  there  is  very  little  coal  above  drainage  at  this 
locality,  it  is  intended  to  sink  a slope  for  600  or  800  feet  on  one  of  the 
coal  beds  and  then  explore  in  depth  with  the  purpose  of  blocking  out, 
if  possible,  an  area  of  workable  coal. 

MINES  AND  PROSPECTS  ON  MOOSE  CREEK. 

The  Doherty  mine,  operated  by  the  Doherty  Coal  Co.  under  a 
10-acre  mining  permit,  is  situated  on  the  west  bank  of  Moose  Creek 
in  the  NW.  I sec.  2,  T.  18  N.,  R.  2 E.  This  mine  was  opened  in  1916. 
The  section  of  the  coal  bed  is  as  follows: 

Section  of  coal  in  Doherty  mine. 


Sandstone  (roof).  Ft.  in. 

Bone  (“cap  rock”) 1 1 

Goal 1 11 

Bone 1 

Coal 1 3 

Carbonaceous  shale  (“black  dirt”) 3 

Shale  (floor). 

Strike  N.  67°  E.,  dip  45°  SE. 


The  coal  is  mined  by  the  room  and  pillar  system  and  is  hoisted  on 
a slope  from  the  entry  on  the  400-foot  level.  On  reaching  the  surface 


282  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 

it  is  screened  and  handpicked  to  remove  the  pieces  of  “cap  rock” 
that  come  down  in  mining.  The  coal  that  goes  through  the  screens 
is  mixed  with  that  which  goes  past  the  pickers  and  is  hauled  by  a steam 
locomotive  over  a narrow-gage  railroad,  3,000  feet  long,  to  bunkers 
on  a railroad  spur  one-fourth  of  a mile  west  of  the  mouth  of  Moose 
Creek.  The  output,  about  50  tons  a day,  was  sold  in  part  to  the 
Alaskan  Engineering  Commission  and  in  part  to  the  public  in 
Anchorage.  It  is  reported  that  the  mine  has  been  abandoned. 

The  coal  shipped  from  this  mine  is  high  in  ash.  A cleaning  plant 
was  being  installed,  which  should  result  in  a better  product.  If  the 
operators  of  this  mine  are  able  to  compete  with  other  producers  they 
will  probably  be  able  to  find  a moderately  large  area  of  workable  coal 
in  the  vicinity  of  their  mine.  No  structural  disturbances  have  thus 
far  been  discovered.  The  mine  is  situated  on  the  north  flank  of  a 
small  local  basin  or  else  on  a southward-dipping  fault  block.  If 
mining  operations  are  extended  at  this  point  the  slope  should  be 
continued  either  to  the  axis  of  the  basin  or  to  the  lower  edge  of  the 
fault  block. 

A prospecting  tunnel  was  being  driven  into  the  hill  from  the  east 
bank  of  Moose  Creek  in  the  NW.  J sec.  27,  T.  19  N.,  R.  2 E.,  by 
prospective  lessees  of  leasing  blocks  2 and  3.  The  coal  beds  at  this 
locality  1 lie  near  the  supposed  zone  of  faulting  that  apparently  forms 
the  northern  boundary  of  the  structural  mass  of  Wishbone  Hill. 
They  are  badly  disturbed  and  have  also  been  burned.  The  tunnel 
was  being  driven  in  an  attempt  to  get  into  an  area  of  workable  coal 
beyond  the  disturbed  and  burned  zone.  At  the  time  the  locality 
was  visited  the  driving  of  the  tunnel  was  still  in  progress. 

LITTLE  SUSITNA  RIVER. 

A brief  visit  was  made  also  to  a locality  on  Little  Susitna  River, 
where  a bed  of  lignite  has  been  found  in  a “trap”  from  which  ballast 
was  being  taken  for  the  railroad.  The  locality  is  in  sec.  21,  T.  18  N., 
R.  3 W.,  near  mile  175  from  Seward.  The  bed  is  reported  to  have 
the  following  section : 

Section  of  lignite  near  Houston. 


Sand.  Ft.  in. 

Lignite 2 8 

Shale  and  bone 2 

Clay. 


At  the  time  the  locality  was  visited  by  the  writer  the  coal  was  not 
exposed,  the  pit  which  had  been  dug  into  it  being  filled  with  water. 
The  beds  exposed  in  the  trap  are  semi-indurated  sand  and  clay  like 
those  of  the  Kenai  formation  of  Cook  Inlet.  The  lignite  was  found 
at  the  level  of  the  swamp  and  is  said  to  dip  about  6°  N.  The  bed 
consequently  does  not  extend  above  drainage  level. 


1 Martin,  G.  €.,  and  Katz,  F.  J.,  op.  cit.,  p.  87  (sections  40-42). 


SULPHUR  ON  UNALASKA  AND  AKUN  ISLANDS  AND  NEAR 
STEPOVAK  BAY,  ALASKA. 


By  A.  G.  Maddren. 


INTRODUCTION. 

Sulphur  claims  have  been  recorded  at  three  localities  in  south- 
western Alaska — in  the  crater  of  Makushin  Volcano  on  Unalaska 
Island,  on  Akun  Island,  and  near  Stepovak  Bay  on  the  Alaska 
Peninsula.  (See  PI.  VII.)  The  deposits  covered  by  these  claims 
have  not  yet  been  mined,  but  during  the  last  year  they  have  received 
considerable  attention  with  a view  to  production. 

These  sulphur-bearing  deposits  are  of  the  volcanic  type  termed 
solfataras — that  is,  they  are  surface  deposits  formed  by  sublimation 
from  hot  sulphurous  volcanic  vapors.  They  are  situated  in  the  belt 
of  active  and  quiescent  volcanoes  that  extends  throughout  the  Alaska 
Peninsula,  the  Aleutian  Islands,  and  Japan.  Similar  deposits  un- 
doubtedly occur  at  other  localities  in  this  belt. 

Unalaska  and  Akun  islands  are  near  the  east  end  of  the  Aleutian 
Islands,  in  latitude  54°  N.  and  longitude  166°  W.  They  lie  west  of 
Unimak  Pass,  the  chief  thoroughfare  for  vessels  to  Bering  Sea. 
Stepovak  Bay  is  on  the  south  coast  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula,  about 
200  miles  northeast  of  Unimak  Pass,  in  latitude  55°  50'  N.  and 
longitude  159°  40'  W.,  about  1,600  miles  from  Puget  Sound. 

The  only  regular  access  to  southwestern  Alaska  is  by  a small  mail 
steamer  that  sails  from  Seward  once  a month.  Unalaska  is  about 
1,150  miles  from  Seward  and  about  1,750  miles  from  Seattle  in  an 
air  line  or  3,000  miles  by  way  of  Seward.  During  the  summer 
steamers  from  Seattle  to  Nome  and  St.  Michael  enter  Bering  Sea 
through  Unimak  Pass  but  seldom  call  at  Unalaska  or  near-by  ports 
because  of  lack  of  trade.  However,  they  would  be  available  for  ship- 
ment of  freight  to  Puget  Sound.  Fishing  vessels  and  Government 
patrol  and  supply  steamers  make  irregular  cruises  along  the  coast 
during  the  summer  and  occasionally  replenish  their  coal  bunkers  at 
Unalaska.  A Navy  wireless  station  at  Unalaska  is  available  for 
transmitting  commercial  messages. 


283 


284 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  following  descriptions  of  the  sulphur-bearing  deposits  are 
based  upon  examinations  made  by  the  writer  during  August  and 
September,  1917. 

MAKUSHIN  VOLCANO. 

TOPOGRAPHY. 

Makushin  Volcano,  about  6,000  feet  in  altitude,  is  in  the  northern 
part  of  Unalaska  Island,  about  12  miles  west  of  Dutch  Harbor.  (See 
figs.  7,  8.)  It  is  5 to  6 miles  from  the  northwest  coast  and  about  the 
same  distance  north  of  Makushin  Bay. 


Makushin  Volcano  is  a composite  volcanic  pile  built  up  of  alternat- 
ing accumulations  of  basaltic  lava,  scoria,  lapilli,  and  dust.  In  shape 
it  is  a broad  dome,  which  forms  a prominent  feature  of  the  landscape 
on  account  of  its  snow  and  ice  capped  summit  and  flanks.  Glaciers 
descend  its  slopes  to  points  about  2,500  feet  above  sea  level,  and 
rugged  radiating  ridges  lie  between  the  glaciers.  A ring  of  ragged 
peaks  surrounds  a broad  depression  which  marks  the  crater  of  a 
large  extinct  volcano.  The  mountain  topographically  dominates  the 
part  of  the  island  it  occupies  over  a radius  of  5 or  6 miles. 

The  crater  of  Makushin  Volcano,  as  defined  by  its  rim  ridges,  is 
broadly  oval  or  horseshoe-shaped  in  plan  and  is  nearly  2 by  14  miles 
in  dimensions.  Nearly  continuous  ridges  form  the  crater  rim  except 


MAP  OF  ALASKA  SHOWING  LOCATION  OF  SULPHUR  DEPOSITS 

loo  o loo 200 300 400  sooMfles 


500  Kilometers 


SULPHUK  ON  TJNALASKA  AND  AKUN  ISLANDS. 


285 


on  the  northwest  side,  at  Big  Gap,  and  at  lesser  gaps  in  the  south 
and  southeast  sides. 

The  floor  of  the  crater  is  300  to  500  feet  below  the  higher  crags 
of  the  rim,  but  the  floor  of  the  basin  is  exposed  only  in  an  area  of  20 
to  30  acres,  where  the  sulphur  deposits  occur.  Except  in  this  bare 
area,  the  basin  is  occupied  by  glacial  ice  and  snow  that  probably  is 
several  hundred  feet  thick  in  the  central  part  of  the  basin.  This  ice 
and  snow  sags  away  from  the  walls  of  the  crater  and  presents  a con- 
cave surface  that  ^ 


4 7" 


b_V 


7 


2U/ 
o <\ 


a: 

Y % 

U 


// 


rT- 

1 7 \ i 

-7  i TT\Crl? 

1 -L  U \|\  V'< 
, j_  i > -7 

r : 177 

prH 
— L A ! 

77  Fill! 
M ■+  i'v< 

Skate 


N 


X 


\ x 

o Man’  ^ 


v\ 


y \ 


/ 

/ x® 

7 


slopes  northwest- 
ward to  the  Big 
Gap.  This  gap  is 
the  chief  outlet  of 
the  crater,  and  the 
flow  of  ice  toward  it 
is  indicated  by  the 
crevasses. 

THE  SOLFATARA. 

POSITION  AND  CHAR- 
ACTER* 

The  sulphur  de- 
posit of  Makushin 
Volcano  is  situated 
a short  distance 
southwest  of  the  cen- 
ter of  the  crater  and 
is  the  only  part  of 
the  crater  that  ap- 
pears to  be  perma- 
nently free  from 
snow  and  ice.  The 
bare  area  comprises 
a main  southern 
portion  about  1,200  feet  long  and  TOO  feet  wide  and  a narrow  tongue- 
like strip  that  extends  north  from  the  main  area  for  about  1,500  feet 
and  has  an  average  width  of  200  feet.  (See  fig.  9.)  The  area  of 
these  tracts  is  estimated  to  be  20  and  10  acres  respectively.  Some 
minor  marginal  patches  extend  beneath  the  overhanging  edges  of  the 
ice.  These  marginal  areas  are,  however,  a variable  quantity  and  are 
inaccessible,  because  they  comprise  the  floors  of  grottoes  or  caverns 
and  tunnels  melted  from  the  under  surface  of  the  snow  and  their 
roofs  collapse  from  time  to  time. 

115086°— 19 19 


7*7 


7 


Snow  and 


Lava 


Scale 
Vfe 


Sulphur  - bearing 


ground 
Mi 


Figure  8. 


-Sketch  map  of  part  of  Makushin  Volcano  show 
ing  location  of  sulphur  claims. 


286 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  southern  part  of  the  solfatara  is  a hummocky  hill  or  ridge 
which  rises  about  100  feet  above  the  comparatively  smooth  surface 
of  the  surrounding  snow  and  ice.  On  the  southwest  flanks  of  this 
ridge  are  several  grottoes  or  tunnel-like  caverns.  These  grottoes  ap- 
pear to  lead  toward  a large  chimney-like  hole  in  the  ice,  about  150  feet 
in  diameter,  from  which  hot  vapor  discharges.  This  hole  evidently 
marks  a cleft  in  the  rock  from  which  hot  vapor  has  melted  the  ice, 
and  the  grottoes  are  irregular  passages  that  were  melted  in  the  ice 
by  the  circulation  of  hot  vapor.  The  sulphurous  character  of  the 

vapor  is  indicated  by  the 
sulphur  that  is  deposited 
about  the  mouth  of  the 
hole,  which  stains  the  snow 
slightly  yellow. 

It  is  evident  that  the  main 
solfataric  area  is  kept  bare 
by  subterranean  heat.  The 
heavy  persistent  clouds  of 
condensed  vapor  indicate 
that  the  radiation  of  heat 
is  active  and  fairly  con- 
stant. In  calm  weather  the 
condensed  vapor  rises  many 
hundred  feet  and  resembles 
smoke  from  a great  chimney 
or  a forest  fire,  but  as  vio- 
lent winds  are  common  the 
heavy  clouds  of  vapor  are 
usually  swirled  and  ed- 
died along  the  surface  of 
the  ice  in  different  direc- 
tions. If  the  wind  blows 
from  one  direction  for  some 
time  there  often  is  a per- 
ceptible yellowing  of  the  snow  with  sulphur.  At  such  times  the 
solfatara  is  approachable  only  from  the  direction  of  the  wind,  as  the 
sulphur  fumes  are  strong  and  the  thick  vapor  obscures  the  way  over 
the  crevassed  surface.  Probably  the  smokelike  grayness  of  the  vapor 
is  due  to  finely  divided  particles  of  sulphur,  and  the  precipitation  of 
these  particles  causes  the  yellow  film  on  the  ice. 


I 

.0 

I 


o Drill  hole 
x Surface  sample 

Figure  9. — Sketch  map  of  sulphur  area  on 
Makushin  Volcano. 


LITHOLOGY. 


As  a whole  the  sulphur-bearing  deposit  is  earthy  and  appears  to 
be  composed  chiefly  of  siliceous  residual  products  of  rock  decomposi- 


SULPHUR  OIsT  UN  ALASKA  AND  AKUN  ISLANDS. 


287 


tion  that  have  resulted  from  the  highly  corrosive  chemical  actions  of 
the  hot  solfataric  vapors  on  the  basalt.  No  outcrops  of  the  basalt 
rock  that  are  certainly  in  place  could  be  closely  examined,  because 
the  only  exposures  are  in  the  walls  of  the  deeper  fissures  and  down 
the  throats  of  fumaroles  from  which  vapors  issue  at  temperatures 
too  high  to  allow  near  approach.  The  firm,  massive  character  of  the 
walls  of  such  openings  probably  confines  the  escaping  vapor,  so  that 
it  issues  with  a loud,  roaring  sound.  The  country  rock  is  seen  only 
in  blocks,  slabby  fragments,  and  kernel-like  pebbles  and  scaly  flakes, 
in  various  stages  of  decomposition,  that  are  scattered  about  on  the 
surface  and  disseminated  throughout  finely  divided  residual  mate- 
rial. The  larger  and  least-altered  blocks  of  basalt,  from  1 to  2 feet 
in  dimensions,  have  somewhat  pitted  light-gray  surfaces  but  within 
are  dark  and  of  compact  crystalline  texture,  similar  to  the  non- 
vesicular  portions  of  the  lava  flows  on  the  flanks  of  the  mountain. 
The  underlying  rock  of  the  solfatara  area  is  thus  chiefly  compact 
crystalline  basaltic  lava,  but  it  probably  includes  also  some  porous 
vesicular  lava  and  possibly  some  fragmental  volcanic  material  such 
as  lapilli  and  dust,  which  are  present  in  the  old  crater  rim. 

The  olivine  is  considerably  decomposed  throughout  the  compact 
crystalline  lava.,  but  the  other  minerals  are  not  extremely  altered 
except  near  the  surface.  The  leached  surface  layers  of  these  blocks 
show  the  faded  texture  of  the  original  lava  and  have  a tendency  to 
exfoliate  or  spawl  off  as  concentric  shells,  especially  when  struck 
with  a hammer.  Some  of  the  blocks  have  the  form  of  roughly 
rounded  boulders  and  cobbles  and  thus  resemble  volcanic  bombs,  and 
the  residual  earth  suggests,  at  first  sight,  a light-colored  volcanic 
ash.  However,  none  of  the  boulders  show  the  vesicular  texture  that 
usually  characterizes  bombs,  and  the  earthy  deposit  appears  to  be 
mainly  residual  in  origin. 

The  residual  earth  that  constitutes  the  bulk  of  the  surface'  mantle 
of  the  solfataric  area  is  light  gray  to  creamy  white.  As  explained 
above,  most  of  it  was  formed  in  place,  although  naturally  some  has 
been  shifted  locally  by  winds  and  rains,  both  of  which  are  violent 
and  frequent,  and  no  doubt  much  of  the  finer  clayey  material  has 
been  washed  away.  Test  holes  drilled  into  the  deposit  show  that 
the  earthy  mantle  in  places  is  fully  16  feet  thick  and  that  it  changes 
little  in  character  to  that  depth,  although  some  thin  layers  are  dark 
brownish  red.  The  deposits  were  not  bored  to  a greater  depth  than 
16  feet,  but  below  that  depth  they  are  believed  to  grade  into  less 
decomposed  phases  of  the  country  rock.  For  the  most  part  the 
deposit  has  a coarse  mealy  texture,  but  some  of  it  resembles  loosely 
compacted  sandy  clay.  In  general  the  material  is  quite  porous  and 
comparatively  light  weight  when  dry.  It  resembles  kaolin,  although 
its  aluminous  content  is  low. 


288 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Although  the  earth  is  highly  siliceous  no  sinter  deposits  were  ol> 
served.  Slight  cementation  occurs,  but  the  somewhat  crusty  char- 
acter of  the  surface  zone  seems  to  be  due  in  part  to  the  drying  out 
induced  by  the  warmth  of  the  ground  and  also  to  the  deposition  of 
sulphur  in  the  upper  1 or  2 feet  of  porous  ground,  especially  on  the 
immediate  surface  of  the  tracts  that  are  more  or  less  constantly 
bathed  by  sulphurous  vapors. 

SOLFATARIC  ACTION. 

The  most  striking  feature  is  the  rather  vigorous  solfataric  activity 
of  the  greater  part  of  the  bare  ground.  This  activity  may  be  divided 
into  two  phases  that  are  somewhat  distinct  but  nevertheless  closely 
related.  The  most  manifest  activity  is  the  discharge  of  hot  sul- 
phurous vapor  that  deposits  sulphur  in  the  cooler  part  of  the  deposit. 
The  other  phase  of  solfataric  activity  is  the  corrosive  chemical  action 
upon  the  rock  in  the  zone  of  oxidation,  which  has  caused  the  forma- 
tion of  a highly  decomposed  earthy  residue  that  includes  the  bulk 
of  the  sulphur-bearing  deposit  and  that  rests  upon  the  volcanic  rocks 
from  which  the  hot  vapor  emanates.  Sulphurous  and  sulphuric  acids 
probably  are  formed  in  small  quantities  in  this  surface  zone. 

The  most  active  escape  of  hot  vapor  seems  to  be  in  the  southern 
part  of  the  area  of  bare  ground  near  the  highest  part  of  the  ridge. 
At  this  place  vapor  at  relatively  high  temperature  issues  with  a 
roaring  sound  from  several  openings.  The  largest  vent  is  at  the 
southeast  end  of  the  ridge  in  the  lower  wall  of  a pit,  about  75  feet  in 
diameter  and  40  feet  deep,  the  bottom  of  which  is  filled  with  steam- 
ing gray  mud.  The  sound  from  this  fumarole  can  be  distinctly  heard 
for  a distance  of  half  a mile.  The  temperature  of  this  fumarole  was 
not  measured,  but  that  of  a smaller  one  on  top  of  the  ridge  was 
810°  F.  at  a point  2 feet  down  its  throat.  Temperatures  of  170° 
and  180°  were  observed  in  crevices  from  which  the  escape  of  vapor 
was  much  less  active,  and  fragments  of  ice  were  boiled  in  about  10 
minutes  in  a kettle  placed  over  one  of  the  openings  after  the  crust 
of  sulphur  that  partly  sealed  it  was  broken  away. 

The  temperature  of  310°  F.  indicates  that  the  vapor  is  far  hotter 
than  the  melting  point  of  sulphur,  which  liquefies  at  about  240°. 
It  was  noted  that  no  sulphur  was  being  deposited  where  the  tem- 
perature was  310°,  although  near  the  cooler  border  of  the  opening 
was  a thin  incrustation  of  sulphur. 

Several  test  holes  that  were  drilled  into  cooler  parts  of  the  deposit 
tapped  hot  sulphurous  vapor  at  depths  of  4 to  8 feet,  indicating  that 
the  porous  earthy  mantle  is  more  or  less  charged  with  hot  vapor. 
Thus  it  appears  that  except  for  a comparatively  thin  superficial  zone 
the  solfataric  deposit  as  a whole  is  probably  too  hot  at  a short 


SULPHUR  ON  UNALASKA  AND  AKUN  ISLANDS. 


289 


distance  below  the  surface  to  permit  the  deposition  of  sulphur,  or 
conversely  that  the  heat  of  the  deposit  below  the  surface  is  sufficient 
to  keep  most  of  the  sulphur  that  may  be  present  in  a molten  or 
vaporized  state  until  it  reaches  the  surface.  In  this  connection  it  may 
be  noted  that  sulphur  may  be  extracted  from  ores  of  this  character 
by  melting  it  with  steam  under  a pressure  of  about  60  pounds  to  the 
square  inch.  Steam  under  this  pressure  has  a temperature  of  about 
292°  F.  No  field  evidence  was  noted,  however,  of  any  of  the  sulphur 
having  been  melted  after  its  deposition  by  sublimation. 

The  commercial  bodies  of  sulphur  in  this  deposit  are  clearly  sur- 
ficial.  The  percentage  of  sulphur  at  the  surface  does  not  indicate 
that  rich  deposits  exists  at  depth,  as  is  usually  believed  by  the 
optimistic  prospector. 

THE  SULPHUR  DEPOSITS. 

OCCURRENCE. 

The  richer  deposits  of  sulphur  occur  within  2 feet  of  the  surface, 
but  there  is  also  more  or  less  finely  divided  sulphur  disseminated 
to  a depth  of  at  least  16  feet,  the  greatest  depth  from  which  samples 
were  obtained.  Some  of  the  finely  divided  sulphur  may  be  rede- 
posited, especially  in  the  earthy  accumulations  along  the  lower 
flanks  of  the  ridge,  but  most  of  it  was  undoubtedly  sublimed  from 
the  vapor  where  it  is  now  found. 

The  most  conspicuous  deposits  of  sulphur  occur  along  crevices 
or  large  clefts  that  intersect  the  surface  of  the  ground  in  many  di- 
rections and  around  the  holes  from  which  large  volumes  of  hot  vapor 
issue  continuously.  Some  of  the  larger  holes  are  true  fumaroles. 
The  cracks  in  the  surface  might  be  attributed  to  shrinkage  of  the 
earthy  mantle,  but  as  they  have  no  geometrical  arrangement  it  is 
more  probable  that  they  lie  just  above  open  fissures  in  the  underlying 
rock. 

The  largest  masses  of  sulphur  occur  as  irregular  pieces,  some  of 
which  are  8 to  10  inches  in  diameter.  These  pieces  have  more  or  less 
completely  sealed  the  vents.  Incrustations  of  sulphur  an  inch  or 
more  thick  are  being  deposited  on  the  lips  of  crevices  and  about  the 
open  vents.  Hot  sulphurous  vapors  issue  from  these  openings  in 
considerable  volume,  but  only  small  amounts  of  vapor  escape  from 
sealed  crevices.  There  may  be  a circulation  of  the  sulphurous  vapors 
from  one  set  of  crevices  to  another  or  from  one  part  of  a crevice 
to  another  part  as  the  sealing  progresses,  the  vapors  seeking  an  out- 
let along  passages  of  least  resistance.  In  this  way  the  sulphur  may 
become  distributed  over  the  solfataric  area. 

At  present  the  most  abundant  deposition  of  sulphur  appears  to  be 
in  the  crevices  and  vents  which  have  temperatures  of  about  170°  to 


290 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


180°.  Comparatively  little  sulphur  is  being  deposited  about  the 
hot  fumaroles,  such  as  one  whose  temperature  is  approximately  310°. 

In  addition  to  the  sulphur  that  may  be  brought  from  primary 
sources  in  the  hot  vapors  and  deposited  directly  at  the  surface,  it  is 
probable  that  sulphur  is  revolatilized  from  the  hot  lower  zones  of  the 
deposit  and  recondensed  in  the  cooler  surface  zone.  Thus  there  may 
be  a migration  of  the  sulphur  from  deeper  parts  of  the  deposit  to  its 
surface.  It  also  seems  possible  that  some  of  the  sulphur  reaches  the 
surface  dissolved  in  superheated  water  vapor  and  is  directly  sublimed 
upon  condensation  of  the  water  vapor  in  the  cool  atmosphere. 

Some  of  the  sulphur  may  be  precipitated  from  mixtures  of  hydrogen 
sulphide  (H2S)*  and  sulphur  dioxide  (S02),  two  compounds  which 
presumably  can  not  exist  together  and  which  when  commingled  set 
sulphur  free.  To  judge  by  the  odor,  small  quantities  of  both  these 
compounds  seem  to  emanate  from  the  solfatara,  but  they  undoubtedly 
constitute  a very  small  percentage  of  the  total  vapor.  The  odor  of 
hydrogen  sulphide  was  evident  but  not  very  marked.  As  one  ten- 
thousandth  part  of  sulphur  dioxide  in  air  is  intolerable  to  human 
beings  there  probably  is  not  much  sulphur  dioxide  in  the  vapor,  for 
no  particularly  suffocating  effects  were  experienced  upon  breathing 
the  vapor,  even  near  the  hot  fumaroles.  Water  vapor  is  by  far  the 
most  abundant  emanation.  It  contains  some  dissolved  sulphur  which 
it  deposits  when  it  is  condensed  on  the  ice. 

AMOUNT. 

The  sulphur  deposit  has  not  been  sampled  comprehensively,  and 
it  is  very  doubtful  whether  ordinary  methods  of  sampling  will  give 
sufficiently  accurate  results  to  serve  as  a reliable  basis  for  estimating 
the  content  of  sulphur. 

The  deposit  may  be  divided  roughly  into  two  zones  on  the  basis  of 
percentage  of  sulphur — a richer  zone  that  forms  a surface  layer  from 
1 to  2 feet  thick  that  seems  to  owe  its  crusty  character  chiefly  to  the 
sulphur  deposited  in  it,  and  a poorer  subsoil  zone  that  consists  in 
greater  part  of  moist,  hot,  porous,  decomposed  material  in  which  a 
small  percentage  of  sulphur  is  disseminated  as  grains  and  blebs  to  a 
depth  of  at  least  15  to  20  feet  at  some  points. 

The  surface  crust  of  the  solfatara  is  rather  irregular  in  general 
contour  and  quite  uneven  and  hummocky  in  relief.  Its  minor  ridges, 
•hollows,  and  hummocks  seem  to  owe  their  form  partly  to  uneven 
deposition  of  sulphur  along  the  intricate  mesh  of  crevices  and  vents 
and  partly  to  subsequent  erosion  by  wind  and  rain.  The  higher  tracts 
along  the  main  ridge  of  the  solfatara  appear  to  owe  their  general 
prominence  to  the  proximity  to  the  surface  of  the  lava,  which  prob- 
ably underlies  the  whole  solfataric  area  at  no  great  depth,  for  all 


SULPHUR  ON  UNALASKA  AND  AKUN  ISLANDS. 


291 


the  blocks  that  are  scattered  about  on  or  protrude  from  the  surface 
of  these  tracts  are  of  a uniform  crystalline  basalt  and  the  walls  of 
the  fumaroles  and  larger  openings  appear  to  be  similar  solid  rock  to 
a level  within  a foot  or  so  of  the  surface. 

No  definite  data  regarding  the  thickness  of  the  lower  layer  or  zone' 
are  at  hand,  and  it  can  not  be  assumed  that  the  earthy  mantle  has  a 
uniform  thickness  throughout  the  solfataric  area.  It  is  assumed  to  be 
thickest  along  the  lower  flanks  of  the  area,  where  it  has  been  tested 
to  a depth  of  at  least  16  feet.  Over  some  of  the  higher  tracts  it  is 
generally  thin  and  in  places  is  entirely  absent. 

The  sulphur  is  very  irregularly  distributed  even  in  the  crusty  sur- 
face zone  of  the  deposit.  Although  practically  pure  masses  of  sul- 
phur occur  as  fillings  in  some  of  the  dormant  and  semidormant  crev- 
ices and  vents  and  seal  their  outlets  it  does  not  extend  down  these 
openings  very  far.  Some  of  these  masses  are  estimated  to  contain 
several  cubic  feet  of  reasonably  pure  sulphur  that  could  be  mined  by 
careful  hand  methods.  The  aggregate  crevice  and  vent  space  thus 
occupied  with  sulphur  is  relatively  small.  Although  a few  of  the 
crevices  are  10  to  12  inches  wide,  most  of  them  are  not  more  than  2 
or  3 inches  wide,  and  the  cracks  and  crevices  in  which  sulphur  has 
been  deposited  are  about  the  same  size.  The  sulphur-bearing  crust 
between  the  crevices  averages  about  12  inches  in  thickness,  although 
in  some  places  it  is  as  much  as  2 feet.  In  many  places  the  upper  half 
of  this  crust  is  composed  chiefly  of  sulphur,  and  the  lower  half  con- 
tains a large  percentage  of  earthy  material.  The  amount  of  sulphur 
in  the  solfatara  is  not  so  striking  as  the  area  of  gray  earth,  streaked 
and  dotted  here  and  there  by  the  sulphur  deposited  along  discon- 
tinuous cracks  and  about  small  vents  that  are  irregularly  distributed 
over  the  surface  of  the  ground  in  more  or  less  definite  tracts. 

Of  the  approximately  20  acres  of  bare  ground  that  comprise  the 
main  area  of  the  solfatara  probably  not  more  than  5 acres,  in  the 
southern  part  of  the  area,  may  be  classed  as  containing  a good  grade 
of  sulphur-bearing  material,  the  remainder  being  of  inferior  grade, 
and  only  certain  rather  small  tracts  in  the  5 acres  of  better  ground 
contain  high-grade  material,  even  in  the  surface  crust  zone.  Probably 
the  average  sulphur  content  of  this  surface  crust  is  about  60  per  cent 
of  the  material  that  would  be  handled  in  mining.  If  this  estimate  is 
correct  it  indicates  about  260,000  cubic  feet  of  sulphur,  on  a basis  of 
2 feet  of  depth,  which  is  12,500  tons  at  125  pounds  to  the  cubic  foot. 

The  high-grade  sulphur  deposited  at  the  open  vents  is  about  98  or 
99  per  cent  pure  and  is  estimated  to  constitute  about  5 per  cent  of 
the  surface  material  as  a whole.  It  is  estimated  that  about  70  per 
cent  of  this  surface  material,  to  a depth  of  1 or  2 feet,  is  composed 
of  material  of  which  four  analyses  show  a sulphur  content  of  86.3 


292 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


to  89.6  per  cent  and  average  about  88  per  cent.  According  to  these 
figures,  the  average  sulphur  content  of  the  surface  material  to  a depth 
of  1 or  2 feet  is  about  60  per  cent.  If  the  weight  of  the  dried  ma- 
terial is  about  70  pounds  to  the  cubic  foot,  as  is  indicated  by  the 
determination  of  the  specific  gravity  of  a sample  that  was  assumed 
to  be  representative,  the  5 acres  of  better  ground  should  contain 
about  1,800  tons  of  sulphur  to  the  acre  within  2 feet  of  the  surface. 

It  is  difficult  to  make  even  a rough  estimate,  like  that  just  given, 
for  the  sulphur  content  of  the  remainder  of  the  deposit,  especially 
of  the  earthy  portion  beneath  the  surface  crust.  In  the  first  place 
this  earth  can  not  be  assumed  to  be  of  uniform  thickness,  and  sec- 
ondly, in  the  absence  of  comprehensive  sampling  over  the  whole  area, 
the  quantity  of  sulphur  that  may  be  disseminated  in  it  is  a matter  of 
conjecture.  Five  samples  taken  in  the  southwestern  flanks  of  the 
deposit  from  depths  of  about  4,  8,  10,  12,  and  16  feet  contain,  re- 
spectively, 47,  29.8,  14.7,  13.8,  and  9.5  per  cent  of  sulphur,  averaging 
about  23  per  cent.  If  this  average  holds  the  zone  from  2 to  16  feet 
below  the  surface  should  contain  from  716  tons  of  sulphur  for  each 
acre-foot  at  a depth  of  4 feet  to  145  tons  for  each  acre-foot  at  a depth 
of  16  feet,  or  a total  for  the  entire  14-foot  zone  of  4,900  tons  to  the 
acre. 

PURITY. 

The  chief  impurity  of  the  sulphur  is  the  earthy  material  in  which 
it  is  deposited.  In  the  small  samples  collected  by  the  writer  this  im- 
purity ranges  from  1.5  or  2 per  cent  in  selected  pieces  of  solid  sul- 
phur to  75,  80,  and  even  90  per  cent  in  the  poorer  earthy  material. 
This  finely  divided  earthy  impurity  is  composed  chiefly  of  silica  and 
lime  and  is  comparatively  light  in  weight.  The  separation  of  the  sul- 
phur could  be  accomplished  by  heating  the  ore,  for  the  sulphur  would 
melt  at  a relatively  low  temperature  and  be  drained  off,  making  a 
commercial  product  of  nearly  pure  sulphur. 

AKUN  ISLAND. 

GEOGRAPHY. 

Akun  Island  lies  on  the  western  side  of  Unimak  Pass  about  23 
miles  southwest  of  Unimak  Island.  (See  fig.  10.)  The  settlement  of 
Unalaska,  on  Unalaska  Island,  is  about  45  miles  southwest  of  the 
northern  end  of  Akun  Island. 

Akun  Island  is  about  12  miles  long  from  north  to  south,  has  a very 
irregular  coast  line,  and  the  northern  part  is  nearly  divided  from  the 
southern  part  by  two  large  embayments  that  lie  opposite  each  other — 
Akun  Cove  on  the  east  coast  and  Lost  Harbor  on  the  west  coast.  The 
heads  of  these  bays  are  separated  by  a strip  of  low  land  about  1 mile 


SULPHUR  ON  UNALASKA  AND  AKUN  ISLANDS. 


293 


wide.  Except  this  narrow  strip  of  land,  the  island  is  comparatively 
high  and  has  a general  rolling  relief  that  is  marked  by  rugged  ridges. 
Rugged  topography  is  particularly  characteristic  of  the  northern 


third  of  the  island,  the  highest  point  of  which  is  the  summit  of  a 
roughly  conical  volcanic  mountain  2,500  feet  high.  This  volcanic 
mountain,  locally  called  Akun  Peak,  stands  near  the  northwest  shore, 


Figure  10. — Map  of  Unalaska  and  Akun  islands  showing  location  of  sulphur  deposits. 


294  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

and  its  westward  and  northward  slopes  terminate  as  abrupt  sea 
cliffs  500  to  1,000  feet  high. 

GEOLOGY. 

The  hard  rocks  of  Akun  Island  consist  at  the  base  of  rudely  strati- 
fied volcanic  fragmental  materials  (agglomerates  and  tuffs)  that  are 
overlain  by  andesitic  lava  flows.  Each  of  these  formations  is  1,000 
feet  thick  where  it  attains  its  maximum  development.  Akun  Peak  is 
a typical  volcanic  cone  and  appears  to  have  been  one  of  the  chief 
centers  of  outflow  for  the  lava  in  the  northern  part  of  the  island.  Its 
conical  form  suggests  that  it  is  a comparatively  recent  volcano,  and 
the  lavas  that  flowed  from  it  are  little  altered  except  by  surface 
weathering.  On  the  other  hand,  the  basal  deposits  of  agglomerates 
and  tuffs,  upon  which  the  lavas  rest,  are  considerably  cemented  and 
oxidized,  and  it  is  probable  that  they  are  considerably  older  than 
the  lavas.  At  one  exposure  on  the  north  side  of  Lost  Harbor,  where 
the  contact  between  the  lavas  and  the  agglomerates  and  tuffs  is  well 
displayed,  it  is  evident  that  the  lavas  flowed  out  and  buried  an  old 
land  surface  that  had  been  eroded  in  the  agglomerates  and  tuffs. 

THE  SULPHUR  DEPOSIT. 

LOCATION  AND  AREA. 

The  sulphur-bearing  area  on  Akun  Island,  upon  which  mining 
claims  have  been  located  (see  fig.  11) , is  situated  on  the  upper  flanks  of 
a rugged  mountain  ridge,  1,800  feet  high,  that  lies  about  a mile  north- 
east of  Akun  Peak.  This  ridge  is  a somewhat  detached  outlying  spur 


Figure  11. — Sketch  of  sulphur  claims  on  Akun  Teak. 


of  Akun  Peak,  and  divides  the  northward  and  southward  drainage  of 
this  part  of  the  island.  The  solfatara  lies  in  the  broad  headwater 
basin  of  a steep  gulch  that  descends  to  a small  cove  immediately  west 
of  Akun  Head  on  the  north  shore  of  the  island  and  is  about  1 mile 
from  the  cove.  The  southward  drainage  from  this  ridge  flows  to  the 
north  shore  of  Lost  Harbor  in  a gulch  about  2 miles  long,  and  the 
easiest  approach  to  the  solfataric  locality  is  by  way  of  this  valley. 
The  best  route  is  along  its  eastern  slopes  and  thence  through  a small 
gap,  at  the  head  of  a tributary  gulch,  that  lies  immediately  south  from 


SULPHUR  ON  UNALASKA  AND  AKUN  ISLANDS. 


295 


the  deposit  at  an  altitude  of  1,600  feet.  The  sulphur-bearing  area  is 
between  15  and  20  acres  in  extent  and  stands  from  1,300  to  1,500  feet 
above  sea  level,  but  the  part  of  the  deposit  that  is  characterized  by 
mild  solfataric  activity  comprises  only  about  5 acres. 

VOLCANIC  ACTIVITY. 

The  solfatara  is  in  rather  mild  or  semidormant  activity.  Within 
the  smaller  area  of  about  5 acres  small  volumes  of  steam  and  scalding 
water,  accompanied  by  a small  quantity  of  hydrogen  sulphide  gas 
(H2S),  issue  from  fissures  at  widely  spaced  intervals,  and  the 
remainder  of  the  area  shows  no  particular  evidences  of  the  escape  of 
subterranean  heat.  The  most  striking  evidence  of  solfatarism  is  of 
chemical  decomposition  of  the  rock. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

The  surface  of  the  deposit  consists  of  highly  decomposed  mate- 
rial, apparently  of  residual  origin,  that  resembles  the  deposits  of  the 
solfatara  in  the  crater  of  Makushin  Volcano  but  is  thinner.  This 
earth  is  light  gray  to  dull  yellowish  and  forms  a mantle  from  1 to  4 
feet  thick.  Much  of  it  is  essentially  in  place,  but  the  steepness  of 
the  slope  on  which  it  rests  has  caused  movement  of  some  of  the  mate- 
rial and  the  hot  waters  that  flow  from  crevices  are  transporting  a 
small  quantity  to  lower  levels. 

The  earthy  deposit  is  of  uniform  character  throughout  the  area  as 
is  proved  by  the  sections  exposed  in  numerous  open  cuts  that  were 
dug  in  191f.  Many  of  these  excavations  are  only  4 to  5 feet  deep, 
but  about  six  of  them  are  from  12  to  15  feet  deep  and  show  the 
nature  of  the  ground.  All  these  cuts  show  a highly  decomposed, 
leached,  porous  surface  layer  of  light-gray  earth  from  1 to  4 feet 
thick  that  conforms  to  the  slope  of  the  ridge. 

Beneath  the  surface  layer  is  a zone  of  dark-gray  semileached  de- 
composed rock  which  in  some  places  where  it  is  saturated  with  water 
resembles  massive  clay.  This  zone  ranges  from  6 to  10  feet  in  thick- 
ness, and  in  its  lower  parts,  where  less  decomposed,  the  joint  planes 
and  brecciated  fragments  may  be  seen.  Along  some  of  the  seams  in 
this  subsurface  zone  a small  quantity  of  alum  salts  is  being  deposited. 
This  salt  indicates  that  one  of  the  changes  which  is  taking  place  in 
the  country  rock  is  the  decomposition  of  the  feldspars. 

In  the  bottoms  of  the  deepest  cuts,  12  to  15  feet  below  the  sur- 
face, the  highly  decomposed  rock  of  the  subsurface  zone  grades 
downward  into  a less  decomposed  compact  crystalline  rock  and  al- 
though considerably  altered  shows  the  mineral  constituents  dis- 
tinctly. 

The  highly  decomposed  rock  and  earth  within  the  solfatara  ap- 
pears to  be  directly  derived  from  the  andesitic  lava  that  composes 


296 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


the  body  of  the  mountain  ridge,  good  outcrops  of  which  may  be  ob- 
served on  the  crest  of  the  ridge  immediately  above  the  solfatara. 
The  area  of  the  sulphur-bearing  earth  is  clearly  a locality  where 
solfataric  vapors  have  found  an  outlet  and  have  intensely  decayed 
the  rock  by  highly  corrosive  chemical  reactions. 

The  present  solfataric  activity  at  this  locality  is  of  a much  milder 
stage  than  that  of  the  solfatara  on  Makushin  Volcano.  In  fact  on 
Akun  Island  the  activity  seems  to  be  entering  into  the  hot  spring 
stage.  The  evidence  furnished  in  the  open  cuts  as  to  the  relatively 
shallow  depths  to  which  the  solfataric  decomposition  extends  indi- 
cates that  this  solfatara  has  never  been  extremely  active.  This  con- 
clusion is  further  indicated  by  the  comparatively  small  amount  of 
sulphur  present. 

THE  SULPHUR. 

MODE  OF  OCCURRENCE. 

The  sulphur  in  this  deposit  occurs  chiefly  in  the  form  of  crystal- 
line incrustations  one-sixteenth  to  one-eighth  of  an  inch  thick  on  the 
walls  of  narrow  crevices  and  small  cavities  in  the  porous  earthly 
surface  zone.  Most  of  the  crevices  are  not  more  than  one-eighth  inch 
wide,  and  few  of  the  larger  ones  are  as  much  as  one-fourth  to  one- 
lialf  inch  wide,  and  usually  they  are  only  partly  filled  with  sulphur. 
Some  sulphur  is  also  disseminated  through  the  decomposed  material, 
but  there  are  practically  no  solid  bodies  of  sulphur,  even  of  small 
size,  in  any  part  of  the  deposit.  Apparently  a small  quantity  of  sul- 
phur has  also  been  deposited  in  the  cooler  parts  of  the  subsurface 
zone,  as  is  shown  by  incrustations  observed1  along  the  walls  of  the 
deeper  open  cuts  at  points  10  to  12  feet  below  the  surface,  but  this 
sulphur  may  have  been  deposited  since  the  excavations  were  made 
by  small  jets  of  water  vapor  that  now  find  an  easier  passage  into 
the  excavations.  The  sulphur-bearing  vapor  evidently  rises  through 
the  material  of  the  subsurface  zone  from  a subterranean  source  by 
way  of  rather  tight  seams  that  mark  joint  fractures  in  the  original 
lava.  Where  these  crevices  have  been  exposed  in  the  excavations  the 
vapor  issues  from  them. 

The  temperature  of  the  vapor  is  little  above  the  boiling  point 
(212°  F.),  and  scalding  water  issues  from  some  of  the  crevices,  indi- 
cating that  a considerable  volume  of  the  vapor  condenses  before 
reaching  the  surface. 

AMOUNT. 

Most  of  the  sulphur  in  this  deposit  occurs  in  the  porous  earthy 
mantle  within  1 to  4 feet  of  the  surface.  The  average  thickness  of 
this  mantle  is  believed  to  be  about  2 feet.  Two  samples,  one  taken 


SULPHUR  ON  STEPOVAK  BAY. 


297 


at  the  surface  and  the  other  at  a depth  of  4 feet,  contained  55.5  and 
22.8  per  cent  of  sulphur,  respectively.  If  the  average  thickness  of 
the  sulphur-bearing  surface  mantle  is  2 feet,  and  if  its  average  sul- 
phur content  is  40  per  cent,  it  should  contain  1,200  tons  of  sulphur 
per  acre. 

MINING  AND  SHIPMENT. 

Although  this  deposit  is  of  low  grade  and  is  not  very  extensive, 
it  is  fairly  accessible.  If  the  material  should  prove  to  be  of  sufficient 
value  to  justify  mining  it,  there  are  no  engineering  difficulties  to 
hinder  development. 

The  sulphur-bearing  material  can  easily  be  excavated  and  could 
then  be  transported  to  Lost  Harbor  by  an  aerial  cable  tramway  that 
would  be  a little  more  than  2 miles  long.  The  rise  from  Lost  Har- 
bor to  the  gap  in  the  ridge  about  1,000  feet  south  of  the  solfatara  is 
1,600  feet  and  the  descent  from  this  gap  to  the  deposit  is  only  200  to 
800  feet. 

The  sulphur  doubtless  could  be  extracted  from  its  earthy  ganguo 
by  melting  in  retorts  with  steam,  but  there  is  no  fuel  on  the  island. 
Oil,  however,  is  now  shipped  from  California  to  a whaling  establish- 
ment on  Akutan  Harbor,  10  miles  from  Lost  Harbor,  for  use  in  gen- 
erating steam,  and  coal  which  might  be  developed  for  local  use  is 
reported  to  occur  on  Avatanak  Island,  about  5 miles  southwest  of 
Akun  Island.  It  would  probably  be  unprofitable  to  ship  the  sulphur- 
bearing  earth  in  bulk  to  a distant  point  for  treatment. 

Lost  Harbor  does  not  afford  good  shelter  for  vessels,  as  it  is  open 
to  the  heavy  southwest  swell  of  Bering  Sea  and  has  a rocky  bottom. 
Several  vessels  have  been  wrecked  on  its  shores  because  their  anchors 
failed  to  hold. 

STEPOVAK  BAY. 

Stepovak  Bay  is  on  the  south  shore  of  Alaska  Peninsula  in  latitude 
56°  N.  and  longitude  160°  W.  The  only  important  sulphur  deposit 
reported  in  the  vicinity  (see  fig.  12)  is  about  7 miles  northwest  of  the 
head  of  the  bay,  at  an  altitude  of  3,000  feet,  near  the  crest  of  the 
Aleutian  Range,  which  is  glaciated  and  contains  numerous  dormant 
or  active  volcanoes.  This  deposit  was  not  visited  because  of  the 
danger  in  crossing  the  crevassed  glaciers  covered  with  newly  fallen 
snow  that  obstruct  the  only  available  route  to  it.  As  seen  from  a 
distance  of  about  2 miles,  the  supposed  sulphur-bearing  bed  is  a light- 
colored  zone  100  feet  thick  and  half  a mile  long  in  the  wall  of  a 
cirque  that  may  be  the  site  of  an  extinct  crater.  A glacial  moraine 
that  extends  from  this  cirque  consists  largely  of  sulphur-bearing  rock 
that  was  probably  derived  from  the  light-colored  band  already  noted. 

The  sulphur-bearing  rock  in  the  morainic  deposits  consists  of 
porous  volcanic  breccia  that  contains  compact  crystalline  sulphur  in 


298 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


the  interstices  of  the  breccia  and  also  in  the  vesicles  of  the  constitu- 
ent fragments.  Some  specimens  probably  contain  20  per  cent  sul- 
phur (by  bulk)  in  veins  one-eighth  to  one-fourth  inch  thick  and 
show  masses  up  to  1 inch  long  at  the  intersections  of  the  veins.  In 
much  of  the  rock  the  sulphur  is  finely  disseminated  and  probably 
does  not  constitute  more  than  5 or  10  per  cent  of  the  rock.  In 
regard  to  the  sulphur  content  of  the  morainic  material  as  a whole, 
it  may  be  stated  that  parts  of  the  moraine  may  contain  10  per  cent 


of  sulphur,  but  larger  parts  are  practically  barren.  The  material  in 
the  moraine  is  probably  poorer  in  sulphur  than  the  bed  from  which 
it  was  derived  and  furthermore  is  a mixture  of  many  different  rocks 
rather  than  of  those  from  the  best  parts  of  the  sulphur  deposit.  Some 
pf  the  sulphur-bearing  boulders  are  30  to  40  feet  thick,  thus  'indi- 
cating a minimum  thickness  for  the  bed  from  which  they  are  derived. 
The  abundance  of  the  sulphur-bearing  material  in  the  moraine  also 
indicates  that  the  original  source  was  of  considerable  extent. 


THE  BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK 

ISLAND,  ALASKA. 


By  A.  G.  Maddren. 


INTRODUCTION. 

This  paper  is  based  on  about  three  weeks’  field  work  in  July,  1917. 
Previous  to  the  writer’s  visit  the  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island  had 
not  been  examined  by  the  Geological  Survey  since  1895,  when  Becker 
and  Dali 1 landed  there  in  the  course  of  an  extended  cruise  along  the 
Pacific  coast  of  Alaska.  Becker2  published  a brief  account  of  the 
beach  placer  mining  in  progress  at  the  time  of  his  visit. 

It  is  not  known  in  what  year  placer  gold  was  discovered  in  the 
beach  sands  on  the  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island,  but  mining  lias 
been  carried  on  there  for  about  30  years,  and  the  value  of  the  annual 
production  of  gold  is  estimated  to  have  been  from  $3,000  to  $10,000 
during  that  period.  The  total  production  of  the  west  coast  district 
is  variously  estimated  to  be  from  $50,000  to  $150,000. 

It  is  stated  that  as  many  as  100  men  have  mined  along  this  coast 
in  some  years,  especially  during  seasons  when  heavy  storms  have  re- 
worked and  concentrated  the  sands,  but  generally  the  number  of 
miners  has  averaged  not  more  than  25.  In  1917,  when  the  writer 
visited  the  district,  only  about  12  men  worked  for  part  of  the  year. 
The  most  profitable  operations  have  been  conducted  early  in  the 
spring  and  late  in  the  autumn.  During  the  winter  the  beach  deposits 
are  often  frozen,  and  during  the  summer  the  patches  of  sand  that  con- 
tain the  best  concentrations  are  as  a rule  covered  by  an  overburden 
of  light  sands  that  is  unprofitable  to  remove. 

GEOGRAPHY. 

GENERAL  RELATIONS. 

Kodiak  Island  (see  PL  VIII)  is  situated  between  57°  and  58° 
north  latitude  and  152°  and  155°  west  longitude.  It  is  about  90 
miles  long  from  northeast  to  southwest  and  50  miles  wide  from 

1Dall,  W.  H.,  Report  on  coal  and  lignite  of  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Seventeenth  Ann. 
Rept.,  pt.  1,  pp.  800,  843,  1896. 

2 Becker,  G.  F.,  Reconnaissance  of  the  go]r|  fields  of  (southern  Alaska  : TJ.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Eighteenth  Anp.  Rept.,  pt.  3,  p.  86,  1898. 


299 


300 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


northwest  to  southeast  and  is  the  largest  of  a group  of  islands  that 
is  separated  from  the  mainland  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula,  about  30 
miles  distant,  by  Shelikof  Strait.  Afognak  Island,  the  only  other 
large  member  of  the  group,  lies  northeast  of  Kodiak  Island  and  is 
separated  from  it  by  a narrow  channel.  The  remainder  of  the 
group  comprises  about  12  islands  of  comparatively  small  area,  which 
are  distributed  along  the  shores  of  the  two  large  islands.  The  group 
as  a whole  is  about  150  by  50  miles  in  extent  and  trends  southwest- 
erly. In  general  it  may  be  considered  to  be  the  submerged  exten- 
sion of  the  K3nai  Peninsula,  which  lies  to  the  northeast,  just  as 
Shelikof  Strait  may  be  considered  the  southwestward  extension  of 
Cook  Inlet. 

RELIEF  AND  SHORE  LINE. 

The  surface  of  Kodiak  Island  and  also  its  associated  islands  is 
dominantly  rugged  and  mountainous.  Altitudes  of  1,500  to  2,500 
feet  are  reached  in  many  sections  of  the  coast,  and  in  the  central  in- 
terior several  summits  stand  between  4,000  and  4,500  feet  in  eleva- 
tion. The  greater  part  of  the  shores  is  rock-bound  and  rugged,  and 
the  coast  line,  which  is  generally  irregular,  is  indented  by  numerous 
deep  narrow  fiords  and  bays,  some  of  which  extend  far  inland.  Many 
sections  of  the  coast  are  bordered  by  outlying  rocky  islets  and  reefs, 
and  most  of  the  bays  are  more  or  less  strewn  with  rocks. 

GEOLOGY. 

Only  the  general  features  of  the  bedrock  geology  of  Kodiak  Island 
are  known.  These  features  have  been  briefly  described  by  Martin,1 
but  the  observations  of  the  writer  in  the  western  part  of  the  island 
have  increased  the  knowledge  of  that  district.  In  this  report  the 
geology,  as  described  by  Martin,  will  be  reviewed  and  will  be  sup- 
plemented by  the  notes  of  the  writer  concerning  the  western  part  of 
the  island. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

T1  ie  rocks  of  Kodiak  Island  and  the  neighboring  islands  consist 
chiefly  of  slates  and  graywackes,  which  are  cut  by  numerous  but  for 
the  most  part  small  intrusive  masses,  partly  granitic.  Schists  that 
probably  underlie  the  slates  and  graywackes  are  present  along  the 
northwestern  part  of  the  island,  and  small  areas  of  poorly  consoli- 
dated Tertiary  sediments  are  reported  to  lie  along  the  southeastern 
flanks  of  the  island.  Quaternary  sediments  that  consist  of  ground 
moraine  overlain  by  glacial  outwash  gravels  and  recessional  moraines 
occupy  the  floors  of  all  the  larger  valleys  and  form  a considerable  belt 

1 Martin,  G.  C.,  Mineral  deposits  of  Kodiak  and  the  neighboring  islands : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull,  542,  pp.  128-131,  1913. 


U.  S.  GEOLOGICAL  SUEVEY 


BULLETIN  692  PLATE  VIII 


MAP  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND. 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  301 

of  coastal  plain  along  the  west  coast.  The  sequence  of  the  rocks  may 
be  expressed  as  follows: 

Sequence  of  rocks  of  Kodiak  Island,  Alaska. 

Quaternary : 

Present  stream  and  beach  deposits.  Glacial  outwash  sediments, 
recessional  moraines,  and  terrace  gravels  due  to  glacial 
ponding,  ground  moraine,  or  till. 

Tertiary  (?)  : 

Sandstones. 

Lignite-bearing  beds. 

Mesozoic  ( ? ) : 

Granitic  intrusive  rocks. 

Graywacke  and  slate. 

Cherts  and  volcanic  rocks  of  Triassic  (?)  age. 

Paleozoic  (?)  : 

Schist,  greenstone,  quartzite,  and  marble. 

SCHISTOSE  ROCKS. 

Schistose  rocks  have  been  observed  in  only  a small  area  on  the  north- 
west shore  of  Kodiak  Island  between  Uyak  and  Sevenmile  Beach,  but 
from  the  reports  of  prospectors  such  rocks  probably  form  a belt  that 
extends  southwestward  from  Uyak  to  the  vicinity  of  Cape  Ikolik  and 
northeastward  parallel  to  the  northwest  shore  of  the  island,  where 
they  appear  in  outcrops  on  most  or  all  of  the  promontories  that  over- 
look the  coast  of  Shelikof  Strait.  Near  Uyak  these  rocks  comprise 
fine-grained  quartzitic  schist,  crystalline  limestone,  and  chloride  schist 
and  constitute  a group  of  diverse  lithologic  character  but  of  uniform 
degree  of  metamorphism  and  structural  complexity. 

Associated  with  the  schistose  rocks  are  cherts  and  lavas,  presumably 
of  Triassic  age,  and  slates  and  graywackes,  but  the  relationship  of 
these  rocks  to  the  schists  has  not  been  determined.  However,  it  is 
presumed  that  the  schists  are  older  than  the  cherts  and  volcanic 
rocks,  which  are  tentatively  considered  to  be  of  Triassic  age  because 
they  closely  resemble  similar  rocks  in  Seldovia  Bay,  on  Kenai  Penin- 
sula, that  are  definitely  known  to  be  of  Triassic  age.  At  Seldovia 
Bay  highly  metamorphosed  rocks  similar  to  the  schists  here  consid- 
ered are  closely  associated  with  the  cherts  and  volcanic  rocks. 

On  the  west  coast  , of  Kodiak  Island  schistose  rocks  which  corre- 
spond to  those  near  Uyak  were  not  observed  in  place,  although  peb- 
bles and  cobbles  of  this  character  were  found  in  the  beach  deposits. 
These  materials  may  be  derived  from  the  Cape  Ikolik  peninsula, 
where  some  schistose  rocks  are  reported  to  occur.  This  area  was  not 
examined,  except  in  its  southern  part,  where  observations  were  made 
along  its  south  shore  for  a short  distance  west  from  the  mouth  of  a 
stream  that  is  locally  known  as  Old  Bed  Kiver.  At  this  locality  the 
rocky  sea  cliffs  consist  of  highly  deformed  and  somewhat  severely 
115086°— 19 20 


302 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


metamorphosed  volcanic  agglomerates,  tuffs,  and  breccias  whose 
massive  bedding  strikes  east  and  dips  40°-50°  N.  These  rocks  are 
composed  primarily  of  volcanic  fragmental  materials,  but  some  of 
the  tuffaceous  parts  contain  rounded  cobbles  of  dark-blue,  finely 
crystalline,  hard  brittle  limestone.  The  tuffaceous  matrix  in  which 
these  limestone  cobbles  are  embedded  is  schistose  and  well  foliated, 
especially  around  the  limestone  cobbles,  to  which  it  is  firmly  welded. 
Some  members  of  this  formation  are  highly  silicified,  and  one  mas- 
sive member  in  particular  is  altered  to  a bright-red  jasperoid  rock, 
but  it  shows  no  bedding-like  sedimentary  cherts. 

Possibly  these  volcanic  clastic  rocks  of  the  Cape  Ikolik  area  rep- 
resent a lithologic  phase  of  the  cherts  and  volcanic  rocks  near  Uyak, 
which  are  presumed  to  be  of  Triassic  age.  However,  the  degree  of 
metamorphism  of  the  Cape  Ikolik  rocks  suggests  that  they  may  be 
more  closely  related  in  age  to  the  schistose  rocks  of  the  island. 

SLATE  AND  GRAYWACKE. 

A series  of  interbedded  slates  and  graywacke  sandstones  of  con- 
siderable thickness  forms  most  of  the  bedrock  of  Kodiak  Island,  to 
judge  from  the  widespread  outcrops  of  these  rocks  that  have  been 
observed  along  the  northeast  and  northwest  coasts,  in  the  mountains 
of  the  southwestern  part  of  the  island,  and  along  the  shores  of  the 
long  fiord  inlets,  such  as  Uyak  and  Alitak  bays,  that  extend  far  into 
the  interior.  Apparently  the  only  other  rocks  that  may  displace  any 
considerable  areas  of  these  rocks  in  the  interior  of  the  island  are 
massive  bodies  of  granitic  intrusive,  one  of  which  occupies  a consid- 
erable area  along  the  shores  of  Alitak  Bay. 

For  the  most  part  these  semimetamorphosed  sediments  consist  of 
approximately  equal  amounts  of.  interbedded  graywacke  sandstone 
and  slate  in  moderately  thin  beds,  but  in  some  outcrops  the  beds  are 
more  massive.  Some  conglomerate  is  present  here  and  there ; in  one 
outcrop  it  is  a hundred  feet  or  more  in  thickness  in  the  foothills 
north  of  upper  Olga  Bay. 

The  slates  and  to  a less  degree  the  graywackes  have  well-developed 
secondary  cleavage,  which  has  generally  obliterated  the  bedding  ex- 
cept where  marked  differences  in  composition  preserve  it.  In  general 
the  dynamic  metamorphism  that  has  affected  these  rocks  is  expressed 
chiefly  as  thin  cleavage  in  the  slate  members,  which  commonly  show 
a tendency  toward  foliation,  and  as  brecciation  of  the  argillaceous 
graywacke  members,  which  is  generally  marked  by  an  intricate  net- 
work of  quartz  veinlets  deposited  along  the  fractures.  In  some 
zones,  however,  the  quartz-vein  mineralization  is  chiefly  of  the  tabu- 
lar type,  extending  along  bedding  planes. 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  303 

The  stratigraphic  thickness  of  these  slates  and  graywackes  and 
their  structural  details  are  not  known,  but  a thickness  of  at  least 
several  thousand  feet  and  probably  a much  greater  thickness  is  in- 
dicated. Isoclinal  structure  appears  to  be  dominant.  The  average 
strike  of  these  rocks  throughout  the  island  is  northeastward,  parallel 
with  the  trend  of  the  belt,  which  ranges  from  N.  20°  E.  to  N.  60°  E. 
(true),  and  the  dip  ranges  from  20°  to  80°  NW. 

INTRUSIVE  ROCKS. 

The  slates  and  graywackes  of  Kodiak  Island  are  intruded  by 
small  dikes  and  sills,  among  which  quartz-mica  diorite,  porphyrite, 
and  soda  rhyolite  have  been  recognized.  Large  massive  intrusive 
bodies  of  quartz-mica  diorite  and  mica  granodiorite  also  occur  at 
wider  intervals,  and  several  such  bodies  have  been  noted  along  the 
northeastern  coast  and  in  the  southwestern  part  of  the  island. 
Becker1  has  described  such  a granite  mass  which  forms  Karluk 
Head,  and  the  writer  observed  two  large  granitic  areas  in  the 
vicinity  of  Alitak  Bay,  one  of  which  forms,  the  peninsula  of  Cape 
Alitak  and  the  mountain  mass  named  the  Twins,  immediately  north 
of  Lazy  Bay,  and  the  other  a promontory  locally  known  as  Stock- 
holm Point,  on  the  south  shore  of  lower  Olga  Bay. 

In  general  the  age  of  these  intrusive  masses  is  considered  to  cor- 
respond to  that  of  the  great  bodies  of  similar  rocks  that  are  widely 
distributed  throughout  the  coastal  provinces  of  Alaska  and  which, 
where  stratigraphic  evidence  is  available,  have  been  assigned  with 
considerable  assurance  to  late  Mesozoic  or  early  Tertiary  time. 

TERTIARY  SEDIMENTS. 

The  Tertiary  sediments  so  far  reported  to  occur  on  Kodiak  Island 
appear  to  be  distributed  almost  wholly  along  the  southeastern  or 
Pacific  seaboard  of  the  island,  although  rocks  of  this  age  have  been 
mentioned  in  Russian  reports  of  doubtful  accuracy  as  occurring  in 
the  northwestern  part  of  the  island. 

The  only  locality  examined  by  the  writer  from  which  Tertiary 
sediments  have  been  reported  is  that  mentioned  by  Dali 2 as  situated 
in  the  bight  of  the  west  coast  near  Red  River  (locally  known  as 
Old  Red  River)  about  2 miles  north  of  Ayakulik  Island.  Upon 
careful  examination  the  outcrops  that  presumably  were  referred  to 
the  Tertiary  prove  to  be  marine  beach  sediments  interbedded  with 
deposits  of  till,  which  are  described  under  “ Quaternary  deposits.” 
(See  pp.  311-31G.) 


1 Becker,  G.  F.,  Reconnaissance  of  the  gold  fields  of  southern  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Eighteenth  Ann.  Kept.,  pt.  3,  pp.  36,  41-42,  1898. 

2 Dali,  W.  H.,  Report  on  coal  and  lignite  of  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Seventeenth 
Ann.  Rept.,  pt.  1,  p.  800,  1896. 


304 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  best-developed  Tertiary  sediments  on  Kodiak  Island  are  fresh- 
water deposits  which  contain  beds  of  lignite  and  are  generally  re- 
ferred to  as  of  Kenai  (Eocene)  age.  Sediments  of  this  character  are 
reported  at  several  localities  along  the  southeastern  coast  of  the 
island,  particularly  in  the  vicinity  of  Kiluda  Bay;  and  also  on  the 
high  island  of  Sitkinak,  situated  a few  miles  south  of  Cape  Trinity, 
the  southwestern  extremity  of  Kodiak.  The  lignite-bearing  de- 
posits of  Sitkinak  Island  are  reported  to  contain  a number  of  coal 
beds,  one  of  which  is  said  to  be  10  to  12  feet  thick. 

QUATERNARY  DEPOSITS. 

OCCURRENCE. 

Unconsolidated  deposits  of  Quaternary  age  are  well  developed  in 
many  parts  of  Kodiak  Island,  especially  about  its  borders,  and  more 
particularly  in  its  southwestern  part,  where  they  form  a coastal  plain 
of  considerable  extent.  As  the  sediments  of  this  coastal  plain  con- 
stitute a complete  section  of  the  Quaternary  deposits,  from  the  oldest 
to  the  youngest,  a description  of  them  may  serve  for  the  whole 
island. 

The  thick  covering  of  volcanic  detritus  that  was  deposited  over 
all  the  northeastern  part  of  the  island  by  the  eruption  of  Mount 
Katmai  in  June,  1912,  did  not  extend  west  of  Uyak  Bay  in  note- 
worthy amounts  and  need  not  be  considered  in  connection  with  the 
strictly  sedimentary  deposits,  although  fragments  of  pumice  occur 
in  the  beach  deposits. 

CLASSIFICATION. 

The  unconsolidated  sediments  of  the  island  may  be  divided,  ac- 
cording to  the  manner  in  which  they  have  been  formed  and  deposited, 
into  four  rather  distinct  but  related  classes.  In  sequence  from  oldest 
to  youngest  these  classes  comprise  (1)  the  ground  moraine  or  till 
deposited  by  glacial  ice  during  the  period  when  the  ice  was  advanc- 
ing over  the  island  from  the  interior  mountainous  highlands  to  and 
beyond  the  present  shore  line;  (2)  the  widespread  sheets  of  outwash 
gravels,  sands,  and  silts  that  rest  upon  or  are  incorporated  with 
the  till  and  were  formed  by  streams  that  accompanied  the  melting 
of  the  glacial  ice  during  its  movements  of  retreat  from  its  maximum 
limits  back  to  the  mountains;  (3)  the  terminal  and  lateral  moraines 
which  were  deposited  by  the  glaciers  at  points  where  they  halted 
temporarily  during  their  retreat  into  the  mountains,  and  the  most 
prominent  of  which  now  form  the  dams  that  retain  the  large  lakes 
occurring  in  many  of  the  glaciated  valleys;  and  (4)  the  sands  and 
gravels  of  the  present  beaches  and  streams,  which  are  the  result  of 
postglacial  erosion  and  deposition  and  are  derived  chiefly  from  the 
three  classes  of  glacial  material  just  outlined.  Some  of  the  material, 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  305 

however,  in  both  the  streams  and  beaches  is  due  to  postglacial  erosion 
of  bedrock,  especially  in  the  higher  mountains  and  along  the  rocky 
sections  of  the  coast. 

The  first  threo  classes  of  deposits  here  outlined  are  essentially 
aggradational,  or  are  built  up  by  the  deposition  of  superimposed 
unassorted  detritus.  Only  the  deposits  of  the  fourth  or  youngest 
class  are  of  the  degradational  or  assorted  type  favorable  to  the  segre- 
gation of  placer  metals,  and  on  Kodiak  Island  only  the  beach  deposits 
are  dominantly  of  this  kind,  for  the  present  stream  system  has  not 
materially  eroded  the  unconsolidated  deposits  or  the  bedrock  areas 
of  the  island. 

CHARACTER. 

The  most  extensive  exposures  of  the  unconsolidated  Quaternary 
sediments  on  Kodiak  Island  are  in  the  sea  bluffs  that  bound  the  coastal 
plain  along  its  western  shore  from  Cape  Alitak  to  Old  Red  River,  a 
distance  of  about  30  miles. 

These  bluffs  range  from  25  to  250  feet  in  height  and  their  continuity 
is  broken  at  only  a few  points  by  the  narrow  valley  mouths  of  the 
larger  streams.  Their  base  stands  at  the  average  level  of  high  tide, 
and  they  are  actively  eroded  by  the  waves  whenever  a surf  is  running, 
especially  during  violent  storms,  for  this  coast  is  open  to  the  full  sweep 
of  the  ocean  from  the  southwest. 

The  bluffs  are  chiefly  composed  of  typical  till  but  in  some  sections 
contain  also  a considerable  proportion  of  outwash  gravels  and  sands. 
At  several  localities  coarse  morainal  boulder  trains  are  present.  For 
the  most  part  the  till  is  compact  and  stands  well  in  the  bluff  faces 
where  freshly  exposed.  Where  it  is  of  uniform  clayey  composition, 
with  little  admixture  of  sand  and  gravel,  it  presents  characteristic 
massive  exposures  that  weather  to  a hackly  surface  owing  to  an  ir- 
regular incipient  fracturing  that  is  developed  in  it.  There  are,  how- 
ever, large  areas  of  the  bluffs  that  have  not  been  eroded  recently, 
where  the  steep  slopes  are  partly  mantled  by  loose  material  that 
slumps  and  slides  down  from  above  to  the  upper  edge  of  the  beach. 
The  till,  besides  making  up  the  chief  part  of  the  bluffs,  also  forms 
most  of  the  bedrock  of  the  coastal  platform  upon  which  the  loose 
beach  sands  and  gravels  rest.  Without  doubt  the  till  extends  some 
distance  seaward  as  the  floor  of  the  coastal  shelf  upon  which  the  surf 
is  cutting,  for  it  was  noted  that  the  sea  was  discolored  by  clay  in  sus- 
pension to  a distance  of  1,000  feet  or  more  offshore  whenever  the  surf 
was  active. 

The  till  is  unoxidized  and  of  a typical  gray  color,  as  are  also  most 
of  the  outwash  sediments  associated  with  it,  although  in  places  dis- 
continuous strata  in  the  outwash  sediments  and  some  portions  of  them 
near  the  tops  of  the  bluffs  are  discolored  brownish  red  and  are  slightly 
cemented  with  iron  oxide.  Springlike  seepages  are  not  uncommon  at 


306 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


the  contact  of  the  underlying  impervious  till  and  the  overlying  porous 
outwash  sediments.  Along  the  greater  part  of  the  bluffs  from  3 to  6 
feet  of  peaty  soil  or  turf  overlies  either  the  outwash  sediments  or 
rests  directly  on  the  till  deposits,  and  disrupted  masses  of  turf  are 
strewn  about  on  the  bluff  slopes  where  slumping  has  been  pronounced. 

Sand  dunes  20  to  30  feet  high  occur  locally  on  the  tops  of  some  of 
the  higher  bluffs. 

In  general  the  bluffs  consist  of  a basal  member  of  till  overlain 
by  gravels  and  sands  which  from  their  poor  assortment  and  the  cross- 
bedding are  thought  to  consist  of  outwash  material.  Considerable 
sections,  however,  consist  wholly  of  till,  and  some  sections  of  lesser 
extent  consist  chiefly  of  gravels  and  sands  with  little  typical  till. 
There  is  also  a section,  about  a mile  long,  in  which  two  distinct  mem- 
bers of  till  are  developed  that  are  separated  by  a more  or  less  con- 
tinuous but  variable  member  of  sands  and  gravels,  parts  of  which  at 
least  have  been  subjected  to  wave  washing  as  a beach,  for  they  con- 
tain many  water-worn  fragments  of  marine  shells,  some  specimens 
of  which  are  complete  enough  to  be  identified  specifically.  A con- 
siderable number  of  water-rounded  boulders  of  lignite  are  also  em- 
bedded in  the  beach  deposit.  On  weathering,  these  masses  of  lignite 
disintegrate  into  fragments  that  are  strewn  along  the  base  of  the 
bluffs.  Evidently  the  presence  of  these  masses  led  Becker  to  sur- 
mise that  Tertiary  lignite-bearing  sediments  were  present  in  the 
bluffs  of  this  vicinity,  as  noted  by  Dali,1  but  so  far  as  the  writer 
could  learn  lignite  beds  are  absent.  The  lignite  boulders  apparently 
have  been  transported  to  this  locality  from  a distance,  together  with 
the  outwash  deposits  with  which  they  are  associated,  and  it  is  prob- 
able they  once  were  morainal  debris. 

This  assorted  beach  outwash  material  crops  out  along  the  northern 
part  of  the  bluffs  north  of  a higher  part  of  the  bluffs  that  is  locally 
named  Canvas  Point,  or  from  1 to  2 miles  north  of  Ayakulik  Island. 
The  following  species  of  marine  shells  have  been  identified  tenta- 
tively by  W.  H.  Dali,  of  the  Survey,  from  the  collection  made  by 
the  writer,  with  the  comment  that  the  specimens  are  rolled  and 
broken  fragments  of  forms  now  living  in  the  vicinity  and  that  the  as- 
sembly indicates  a colder  temperature  than  that  now  normal  to  the 
locality. 


Pecten  (Chlamys)  islandicus  Muller. 
Monia  macroschisma  Deshayes. 

Tellina  lutea  Gray. 

Macoma  middendorffii  Dali. 
Venericardia  crebricostata  Krause. 
Venericardia?  paucicostata  Krause. 
Venericardia  crassidens  Broderip  and 
Sowerby. 


Mya  intermedia  Dali. 

Latisipho  halli  Dali. 
Tachyrhynchus  polaris  Beck. 
Astarte  borealis  Schumacher. 
Saxidomus  giganteus  Deshayes. 
Chrysodomus  sp.  fragment. 
Boreotroplion  sp.  fragment. 
Balanus  sp.  fragment. 


i Dali,  W.  II.,  Report  on  coal  and  lignite  of  Alaska  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Seventeenth 
Ann.  Rept.,  pt.  1,  p.  800,  1896. 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  30 7 

The  beach  sand  member  that  contains  the  marine  shells  just 
enumerated  and  with  which  the  water-rounded  masses  of  lignite  are 
closely  associated,  ranges  from  20  to  40  feet  in  thickness  and  is 
clearly  interbedded  with  till  deposits.  The  till  deposit  above  the 
sands  is  from  50  to  100  feet  thick,  and  the  till  below  them  is  exposed 
along  the  base  of  the  bluffs  to  heights  of  20  to  30  feet  above  the 
present  high-tide  level.  Thus  the  present  position  of  this  old  beach 
deposit,  lying  above  the  present  sea  level,  indicates  that  an  uplift  of 
30  to  50  feet  has  taken  place  along  this  particular  section  of  the 
coast.  It  is  clear  that  the  old  beach  deposit  was  formed  after  at 
least  30  to  40  feet  of  typical  till,  upon  which  it  rests,  was  laid  down 
by  glacial  ice;  that  the  ice  then  receded  sufficiently  to  allow  beach 
washing  and  deposition  to  take  place  at  this  locality,  and  that  this 
interval  was  followed  by  a readvance  of  the  glacial  ice  accompanied 
by  renewed  deposition  of  till  to  a thickness  of  50  to  100  feet  on  top 
of  the  old  beach  sediments.  This  wave-washed  beach  member  re- 
sulted from  sedimentation  that  took  place  in  the  interval  between  the 
deposition  of  the  older  and  the  younger  beds  of  till. 

The  same  relationship  between  beds  of  till  and  interstratified  grav- 
els is  indicated  along  other  sections  of  the  bluffs,  except  that  the 
absence  of  marine  shells  or  similar  fossil  remains  in  the  intertill 
sediments  shows  that  they  were  not  reworked  or  assorted  by  wave 
action  or,  in  other  words,  deposited  along  a strand  line.  Yet  in  some 
exposures  such  sands  and  gravels,  instead  of  being  cross-bedded, 
like  most  of  the  outwash  material,  are  fairly  well  assorted,  as  if 
deposited  in  ponded  waters,  and  it  is  reported  that  some  of  the  best 
placer  concentrations  occur  in  areas  along  the  beach  where  these 
sands  form  the  bedrock. 

Although  the  assorted  beach  material  that  contains  marine  shells 
and  occurs  along  about  a mile  of  the  bluffs  is  the  only  conclusive 
evidence  that  elevation  has  taken  place  on  this  coast  during  Quater- 
nary time,  the  bluffs  present  certain  structural  features  which  indi- 
cate that  slight  deformational  movements  occurred.  It  was  noted 
that  the  outcrop  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  basal  deposit  of  till,  as 
it  is  exposed  along  the  bluffs,  has  a broadly  undulating  configura- 
tion and  that  although  the  till  has  a considerable  horizontal  extent, 
there  are  sections  where  the  surface  of  the  till  sinks  below  the  pres- 
ent high-tide  level,  and  in  these  sections  the  bluffs  are  composed 
wholly  of  outwash  sands  and  gravels.  This  might  be  interpreted  as 
indicating  merely  irregularities  in  deposition  of  the  till  and  out- 
wash deposits,  such  as  often  characterize  glacial  sedimentation  of 
this  kind.  In  view,  however,  of  the  evidence  furnished  by  the  older 
elevated  marine  beach  along  the  northern  part  of  the  bluffs,  it 
seems  probable  that  a general  but  slight  deformation  of  the  uncon- 
solidated sediments  has  occurred  along  this  coast  in  late  Quaternary 


308 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


time.  This  deformation  is  chiefly  expressed  by  elevation  of  the 
lower  bed  of  till  to  the  extent  of  30  to  50  feet  above  high  tide,  and 
in  some  places  a corresponding  depression  in  others.  The  coastal 
plain  may  then  be  considered  to  be  made  up  of  gently  warped  beds 
that  form  broad  anticlines  and  synclines  whose  structure  is  possibly 
reflected  in  the  generally  rolling  surface  of  the  plain.  How, ever,  it 
must  be  borne  in  mind  that  such  features,  with  the  exception  of  the 
elevated  marine  beach,  may  be  fully  accounted  for  by  irregularities 
in  the  original  deposition  of  the  sediments. 

ORIGIN. 

As  all  placer  deposits  are  directly  or  indirectly  related  to  the  topo- 
graphic development  of  the  region  in  which  they  occur,  it  is  useful  to 
note  the  physiographic  processes  that  have  affected  the  placer  beach 
deposits  of  Kodiak  Island,  especially  because  here  they  are  clearly 
evident.  As  all  the  gold-placer  deposits  so  far  discovered  on  Kodiak 
Island  are  confined  to  the  present  ocean  beaches  and  as  practically 
no  valuable  placer  concentrations  have  been  found  in  any  of  the 
present  stream  gravels,  the  topographic  development  of  the  whole 
island  must  be  considered  in  a study  of  the  origin  of  the  placers. 
The  physiographic  history  of  the  island  is  therefore  treated  some- 
what more  fully  than  might  otherwise  be  considered  necessary. 

Glacial  erosion. — In  general  the  topography  of  Kodiak  and  the 
neighboring  islands  is  the  product  of  severe  glaciation.  The  length 
and  depth  of  the  fiord  inlets  and  channels  are  evidence  of  ice  erosion 
that  gave  the  major  surface  features  their  present  form;  and  the 
numerous  lakes  in  overdeepened  or  dammed-up  sections  of  glaciated 
valleys  afford  further  evidence  on  the  former  presence  of  ice  streams 
which  failed  to  erode  their  valley  troughs  to  the  depth  of  those  now 
occupied  by  the  sea.  The  arrangement  and  trends  of  the  fiords, 
channels,  and  deep  valley  troughs,  some  of  which  contain  large  lakes, 
shows  that  the  glaciation  of  Kodiak  Island  was  essentially  local  in 
origin  and  had  its  center  of  development  in  the  high  mountainous 
interior,  where  it  took  the  form  of  an  ice  cap  that  buried  all  but  the 
highest  summits  and  ridges.  This  ice  cap  was  the  source  and  feeding 
ground  of  numerous  glaciers  that  flowed  from  it  in  all  directions. 
At  the  stage  of  maximum  glacial  development  some  of  the  larger  ice 
flows  extended  even  beyond  the  present  limits  of  the  island.  In  fact, 
the  whole  of  Kodiak  Island  appears  to  have  been  generally  overrid- 
den by  ice,  with  the  possible  exception  of  a small  area  situated  in  its 
northwestern  part.  There  a group  of  low  mountains,  the  western  ex- 
tremity of  which  forms  Cape  Ikolik,  appears  to  have  remained  free 
from  ice,  as  a nunatak  area,  in  the  western  margin  of  the  ice  fields. 


BEACH  PLACEKS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  309 

With  particular  reference  to  the  western  part  of  the  island,  Uyak 
and  Alitak  bays  may  be  noted  as  examples  of  great  fiords  that  were 
fully  occupied  by  large  glaciers,  whose  terminal  lobes  extended  be- 
yond the  present  headlands  during  the  stage  of  maximum  ice  de- 
velopment. Olga  Bay  was  occupied  by  a great  ice  lobe  that  ex- 
tended to  and  beyond  the  present  western  shore  line  of  the  island  in 
the  vicinity  of  Low  Cape,  as  shown  by  the  morainal  deposits  that 
outcrop  in  the  present  coastal  bluffs.  The  present  western  shore  line 
of  this  bay  is  determined  by  a great  crescentic  terminal  moraine 
that  was  deposited  along  the  border  of  the  ice  lobe  during  a stand  in 
the  general  retreat  of  the  ice.  The  valley  of  Karluk  River  and  lake 
was  eroded  by  a long  glacier,  and  likewise  the  valley  basins  now 
occupied  by  Ayakulik  Lake  and  several  other  lakes  of  considerable 
extent,  contiguous  to  Olga  Bay,  were  eroded  by  glaciers  and  later 
dammed  off  by  moraines. 

Thus  the  whole  of  Kodiak  Island  is  dissected  by  a ramifying  series 
of  glaciated  valley  troughs,  some  of  which  now  stand  above  sea  level 
but  many  of  which  are  partly  occupied  by  the  sea.  These  valleys 
radiate  from  the  high  central  mountainous  part  of  the  island,  upon 
which  the  ice  cap  formerly  rested.  The  ice  cap  that  now  occupies 
much  of  southwestern  Kenai  Peninsula  illustrates  in  many  respects 
a stage  of  glaciation  through  which  Kodiak  Island  passed  before  the 
ice  disappeared  from  it. 

Glacial  deposition. — The  lowland  features  of  Kodiak  Island,  as 
well  as  its  highland  features,  are  distinctly  of  glacial  origin.  Thus, 
all  the  lowland  tracts  in  the  western  part  of  the  island  are  the  result 
of  glaciofluvial  sedimentation  that  accompanied  glacial  erosion  in 
the  highland  areas.  Primarily,  the  development  of  the  lowlands 
depended  upon  the  deposition  by  the  glaciers,  during  their  advance, 
of  large  quantities  of  detrital  material  that  was  eroded  and  trans- 
ported from  the  bedrock  of  the  highland  areas.  The  greater  part 
of  this  material  was  laid  down  about  the  borders  of  the  island  and 
along  the  larger  valleys  in  the  form  of  ground  moraine  or  till — 
sediments  composed  chiefly  of  clays,  with  some  sands  and  gravels — 
which  contain  scattered  angular  fragments  of  rock  and  subangular 
or  fairly  well  rounded  boulders  and  cobbles.  The  lowlands  also 
contain  widespread  outwash  deposits  of  silts,  sands,  and  gravels 
that  were  formed  during  the  retreat  of  the  ice  front  from  its  maxi- 
mum limit  back  into  the  valleys.  Besides  the  outwash  sediments  that 
overlie  much  of  the  ground  moraine  there  are  also  terminal  and 
lateral  moraine  deposits,  chiefly  of  the  recessional  type,  whose  form 
has  been  little  modified  since  they  were  laid  down. 

Practically  all  the  lowland  deposits  are  of  glaciofluvial  origin. 
They  are  present  at  the  heads  of  the  fiord  inlets  and  bays  and  along 
the  bottoms  of  the  valleys  that  extend  inland  from  tidewater;  but 


310 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


in  the  valleys  that  have  not  been  eroded  by  glaciers  below  the  present 
sea  level  the  valley  floors  are  flat  marshy  tracts  that  are  poorly 
drained  by  the  present  streams  and  that  contain  many  ponds  and 
small  lakes.  Many  of  these  valleys  contain  large  lakes  in  basins 
which  were  formed  either  by  unequal  erosion  of  the  bedrock  or  by 
the  deposition  of  moraines  that  formed  dams  across  the  valleys. 
In  some  places  both  causes  probably  acted  in  combination. 

The  most  extensive  lowland  tract  on  Kodiak  Island  extends  along 
its  western  coast  from  Cape  Alitak  northward  nearly  to  Cape  Ikolik. 
This  tract  constitutes  a typical  fluvioglacial  coastal  plain,  about  30 
miles  long  and  from  2 to  5 miles  wide,  made  up  of  coalescent  sheets 
of  ground  moraine  and  outwash  sediments  with  some  modified  ter- 
minal and  lateral  moraine  deposits.  Its  rolling  surface  stands  from 
25  to  200  feet  above  sea  level  and  has  the  typical  uneven  configuration 
of  glacial  sedimentary  deposits,  little  modified  by  the  erosion  of 
postglacial  streams.  The  greater  part  of  the  surface  of  this  coastal 
plain  apparently  stands  to-day  as  it  was  deposited  by  the  outwash 
drainage  from  the  retreating  ice.  Numerous  poorly  drained  ponds 
and  small  lakes  lie  on  its  surface,  and  the  few  large  streams  that 
flow  across  it  from  the  highlands  have  eroded  only  narrow  valleys 
into  the  plain. 

Along  its  coastal  margin  this  plain  is  bounded  by  practically  con- 
tinuous sea  bluffs  cut  in  the  unconsolidated  sediments  by  the  waves. 
These  bluffs  range  in  height  from  25  to  200  feet,  but  in  most  places 
along  the  greater  length  of  the  30  miles  of  coast  they  are  between 
50  and  100  feet  in  height.  This  rather  uniform  line  of  steep  wave- 
cut  bluffs  may  indicate  that  the  coastal  plain  was  elevated  since  its 
formation.  Some  evidence  to  support  this  view  was  found  in  the 
bluffs  at  one  locality,  where  marine  shells  occur  in  wave-deposited 
beach  sands  at  a height  of  20  feet  above  the  present  limit  of  high 
tide.  For  the  most  part,  however,  the  wave-cut  bluffs  may  be  con- 
sidered as  a measure  of  the  horizontal  wave  erosion  that  has  occurred 
along  this  section  of  the  coast  since  the  coastal  plain  was  formed, 
for  it  is  probable  that  the  original  limit  of  the  plain  was  seaward 
from  its  present  position  and  that  a marginal  belt  of  the  uncon- 
solidated sediments,  from  1 to  2 miles  wide,  has  been  cut  away  by 
postglacial  wave  action. 

At  any  rate,  it  is  clear  that  the  unconsolidated  deposits  of  this 
coast  have  been  eroded  and  reworked  by  the  wTaves,  and  it  is  logical 
to  presume  that  the  placer  metals  now  found  in  the  beach  sands  were 
concentrated  by  wave  action,  especially  as  no  placers  have  been  found 
in  the  narrow  valleys  cut  by  postglacial  streams  in  the  coastal-plain 
deposits.  There  are,  however,  several  factors  to  be  considered  in  this 
connection  that  will  be  discussed  with  reference  to  the  bedrock  sources 
of  the  placers. 


BEACH  PLACERS  OE  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  311 

Postglacial  erosion. — The  present  drainage  of  Kodiak  Island  was 
conditioned  by  the  drainage  that  preceded  glaciation.  All  the  larger 
streams  flow  in  valley  troughs  which  were  deeply  eroded  by  the 
glaciers  that  formerly  occupied  them,  and  most  of  the  large  streams 
are  merely  the  overflow  outlets  of  the  glacial  lakes  that  occupy  basins 
in  these  valleys.  There  are  only  two  large  streams  on  the  island,  Kar- 
luk  and  Ayakulik  or  Red  rivers,  and  both  of  these  drain  large  glacial 
lakes.  Consequently  most  of  the  stream  systems  consist  of  one  or 
more  headwater  branches  and  their  small  tributaries,  which  empty 
into  the  lakes,  and  a trunk  stream  that  drains  the  lake  to  the  sea.  In 
general,  the  present  streams  have  performed  an  insignificant  amount 
of  erosion  and  have  modified  only  slightly  the  dominantly  glacial 
topography  of  the  island.  The  sediments  that  the  headwaters  of  these 
streams  erode  from  the  bedrock  areas  of  the  highlands  are  deposited 
chiefly  in  the  lakes,  and  the  sediments  that  are  eroded  by  the  streams 
below  the  lakes  are  transported  to  the  sea  to  be  incorporated  in  the 
beaches.  The  principal  erosion  going  on  now  is  the  cutting  of  rela- 
tively narrow  valleys  across  the  unconsolidated  glacial  deposits  of  the 
lowlands.  Thus  little  erosion  or  concentration  either  of  mineralized 
bedrock  or  of  older  unconsolidated  sediments  which  could  form  placer 
deposits  of  commercial  value  has  been  done  by  the  present  streams. 

To  sum  up  the  evidence  presented  by  the  topographic  development 
of  Kodiak  Island  it  may  be  stated  that  postglacial  wave  erosion  and 
concentration  along  the  shores  of  the  island,  especially  along  the 
shores  composed  of  unconsolidated  fluvioglacial  sediments,  is  the  most 
active  agency  favorable  to  the  formation  of  placer  deposits. 

THE  BEACH  DEPOSITS. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

The  present  beach  along  the  foot  of  the  bluffs  that  extend  from 
Cape  Alitak  to  Old  Red  River,  a distance  of  about  30  miles,  is  the 
longest  section  of  continuous  sandy  shore  line  on  Kodiak  Island. 
Sevenmile  Beach,  so  named  from  its  approximate  length,  which  ex- 
tends westward  from  Uyak  Bay  along  the  foot  of  similar  bluffs  of 
till,  is  the  next  longest  beach  on  the  island.  None  of  the  other 
beaches,  most  of  which  extend  across  the  mouths  of  glaciated  valleys, 
are  more  than  1 or  2 miles  long,  and  the  greater  part  of  the  coast  line 
is  characterized  by  rocky  bluffs  and  headlands. 

The  width  of  the  west  coast  beach,  as  exposed  between  average 
high  and  low  tide  levels,  ranges  from  200  to  500  feet.  The  thick- 
ness of  the  loose  beach  deposits  is  from  3 to  6 feet,  but,  as  in  all  beach 
sands  and  gravels  that  are  undergoing  active  washing  by  surf,  the 
thickness  differs  from  place  to  place  and  time  to  time  according  to 
the  manner  in  which  the  deposits  are  shifted  back  and  forth  by  the 
surf  and  the  variations  effected  by  the  ebb  and  flow  of  the  tide. 


312  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  lOtf. 

As  the  upper  limit  of  the  beach  is  determined  in  greater  part  by  the 
base  of  the  bluffs,  which  in  turn  is  determined  by  the  average  limit 
of  high  tide,  there  is  a comparatively  small  development  of  higher 
storm  beach  deposits  along  this  coast.  The  only  beach  deposits  of 
this  kind  are  the  short  spits  across  the  narrow  valley  mouths  of  a few 
large  streams,  which  have  cut  down  through  the  coastal  plain  to  sea 
level,  and  several  sections  of  barrier  beach  across  the  entrances  to 
shallow  tidal  lagoons  that  occur  between  Cape  Alitak  and  Low  Cape, 
where  certain  tracts  of  the  coastal  plain  are  somewhat  less  elevated 
than  elsewhere. 

The  bedrock  or  marine  platform  upon  which  the  loose  beach  de- 
posits rest  is,  for  the  most  part,  the  compact  clay  till  that  forms  the 
chief  part  of  the  bluff's.  There  are  variations  in  the  composition  of 
the  bedrock,  however,  that  correspond  to  variation  in  the  material 
in  the  bluff's  and  which  are  directly  controlled  by  them.  Thus,  in  the 
localities  where  morainal  boulder  deposits  are  incorporated  with  the 
till  the  beaches  are  characterized  by  boulder  pavements  that  rest  on 
the  beach  platform  and  the  greater  part  of  the  beach  deposits 
consist  of  coarse  gravels,  cobbles,  and  boulders.  A few  of 
these  boulders  are  from  5 to  10  feet  in  greatest  dimensions  and  a 
number  of  them  reach  dimensions  of  2 to  3 feet.  Where  the  more  or 
less  assorted  outwash  sands  and  gravels,  which  are  associated  with 
the  till,  extend  below  sea  level  the  bedrock  is  commonly  com- 
posed of  sandy  silt  and  somewhat  resembles  quicksand  in  be- 
havior when  excavated.  This  condition  appears  to  be  due  to  its 
being  charged  with  considerable  water,  possibly  derived  from  seepage 
and  under  hydrostatic  pressure. 

The  typical  till  bedrock  is  said  to  be  somewhat  too  slippery  to  re- 
tain the  gold  as  well  as  the  “ quicksand  ” bedrock,  but  nevertheless 
good  concentrations  are  made  upon  it  under  certain  conditions,  par- 
ticularly during  violent  storms  that  sweep  it  quite  clean  of  the  loose 
beach  sands.  The  so-called  “ quicksand  ” bedrock  is  said  by  the  miners 
to  be  the  most  favorable  for  the  retention  of  the  placer  gold  and  to 
afford  the  best  yields,  but  the  areas  of  such  bedrock  are  not  extensive. 
The  boulder  pavement  areas  of  the  beach  platform  are  considered  to 
be  unfavorable  for  the  concentration  of  the  gold  in  profitable  amounts, 
and  besides  they  are  the  most  difficult  to  mine. 

DERIVATION  OF  THE  BEACH  PLACERS. 

It  is  evident  that  marine  wave  erosion  has  produced  the  practically 
continuous  line  of  till  and  outwash  bluffs  which  extends  for  about  30 
miles  along  the  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island,  and  that  the  present 
beach  deposits  along  the  bases  of  these  bluffs  are  the  result  of  concen- 
tration by  the  waves  of  the  sediments  that  compose  the  bluffs,  with  the 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  313 

exception  of  the  small  proportion  of  similar  sediments  deposited  on 
the  beach  by  the  larger  streams  that  cross  the  coastal  plain. 

If  the  present  configuration  and  extent  of  the  coastal  plain  are 
accepted  as  a basis  for  estimating  the  former  seaward  extension  of  the 
original  plain  it  would  appear  that  before  postglacial  marine  erosion 
set  in  the  former  shore  line  was  from  1 to  3 miles  west  of  the  position 
it  now  occupies.  If  the  composition  of  that  part  of  the  coastal  plain 
that  apparently  has  been  thus  eroded  away  was  similar  to  that  of  the 
present  bluffs  some  idea  may  be  formed  of  the  character  and  great 
quantity  of  sediments  that  have  been  acted  upon  by  marine  erosion 
during  postglacial  time  in  producing  the  present  beach  placers.  If 
the  placer  deposits  of  the  present  beach  represent  the  concentrations 
from  a belt  or  strip  of  coastal-plain  sediments  about  30  miles  long, 
2 miles  wide,  and  40  feet  thick,  it  would  appear  that  more  than 
2,000,000,000  cubic  yards  of  material  has  been  reduced  by  wave 
erosion.  Probably  the  average  gold  content  of  these  deposits  was  not 
more  than  1 cent  in  50  cubic  yards  of  the  original  coastal-plain 
deposits  as  laid  down  by  glacial  sedimentation.  The  small  gold  con- 
tent of  the  gravels  is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  practically  no  colors 
of  gold  have  been  obtained  in  prospecting  the  coastal-plain  sediments 
as  they  occur  in  the  bluffs,  even  in  those  parts  where  the  outwash 
gravels  and  sands  show  evidence  in  the  form  of  stratification  of  hav- 
ing been  somewhat  thoroughly  assorted.  The  writer  was  informed 
that  only  in  two  or  three  places  have  even  very  fine  colors  of  gold  been 
obtained  in  such  prospecting.  The  results  obtained  in  prospecting 
along  the  beds  of  the  present  streams  that  cross  the  coastal  plain  are 
also  reported  to  be  wholly  negative. 

Apparently  the  slight  stream  erosion  that  the  unconsolidated 
coastal-plain  deposits  have  undergone  since  they  were  formed  has 
contributed  practically  no  placer  metals  to  the  beach  deposits. 

CONCENTRATION  OF  THE  BEACH  PLACERS. 

Prospects  show  that  finely  divided  gold  is  present  along  the  whole 
length  of  the  beach  from  Cape  Alitak'  to  Old  Red  River,  as  well  as 
in  the  shorter  beaches  along  other  sections  of  the  coast  of  Kodiak 
Island.  However,  the  best  concentrations  occur  chiefly  in  the  form 
of  local  patches  that  are  comparatively  small  and  are  not  permanent 
as  to  position  or  richness,  because  the  loose  sands  and  gravels  and 
the  placer  metals  associated  with  them  are  being  continually  reas- 
sorted and  shifted  according  to  the  direction  and  violence  of  the 
storms.  Because  of  this  unstable  condition  of  the  beach  deposits 
the  concentrated  heavy  minerals  do  not  form  pay  streaks  in  the 
usual  sense,  although  the  heavier  sands  do  have  a tendency  to  ac- 
cumulate along  the  upper  limits  of  the  beaches  near  the  base  of  the 
bluffs  that  arrest  the  surf  and  regulate  its  backwash  action. 


314 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island  is  exposed  particularly  to  storms 
from  the  southwest  and  northwest  quarters  and  as  a rule  the  best  con- 
centrations of  the  beach  result  from  such  storms.  The  storms  of 
autumn  and  spring,  together  with  the  higher  tides  of  those  seasons, 
are  considered  to  be  the  most  effective  in  concentrating  the  placer 
metals  in  the  beach  sands.  The  waves  induced  by  these  storms  cut 
away  the  basal  parts  of  the  bluffs  and  add  small  quantities  of  new 
material  to  the  beach  to  be  concentrated.  Apparently  the  beaches 
have  become  enriched  by  this  process,  which  has  acted  for  a long 
period  of  time  on  a great  quantity  of  sediment. 

The  ordinary  range  of  tide  on  this  coast  is  from  8 to  10  feet,  and 
during  the  spring  and  autumn  the  extreme  range  is  from  12  to  16 
feet.  Thus  there  is  a considerable  increase  in  the  zone  of  wave  at- 
tack during  the  spring  and  autumn  that  enables  the  surf  to  reach 
and  erode  the  foot  of  the  bluffs  more  strongly.  The  higher  surf 
also  sweeps  the  rather  resistant  compact  clay  bedrock  quite  clear  of 
the  usual  overburden  of  gravel  and  sand  and  more  thoroughly  con- 
centrates the  fine  gold  with  the  heavier  sands  in  patches  that  may 
be  easily  mined  during  the  intervals  of  falling  tide,  provided  they 
are  found  at  once  and  recovered  without  delay. 

“ Banking  up  ” and  “ washing  down  ” are  the  terms  used  by  the 
miners  to  describe  the  constant  eroding  and  concentrating  action  of 
surf  on  the  beach.  The  power  of  the  storm  surf  on  this  coast  is  great 
enough  to  move  boulders  that  weigh  several  tons,  of  which  there 
are  a few  distributed  here  and  there  along  the  beach.  Boulders  of  this 
weight  have  been  noted  to  change  their  positions  appreciably  in  the 
course  of  several  years.  It  is  said  that  a moderate  surf,  such  as 
accompanies  a “ lazy  summer  swell,”  is  often  very  effective  in  “ wash- 
ing down  ” small  areas  of  the  beach  and  concentrating  the  fine  gold  on 
the  compact  beach  platform  of  till  in  patches  that  yield  good  returns 
in  mining,  although  the  surf  that  accompanies  ordinary  moderate 
weather  usually  “ banks  up  ” the  loose  sands  and  thus  builds  up  an 
overburden  of  the  lighter  sands  from  4 to  6 feet  thick  that  is  prac- 
tically barren  of  placer. 

Although  the  shifting  about  of  the  loose  sands  and  gravels  on  the 
beach  platform,  together  with  the  placer  metals  which  they  contain, 
is  always  more  or  less  marked  during  a single  storm  and  is  carefully 
noted  by  the  miners,  the  erosion  of  the  compact  till  bluffs  is  rarely 
noticeable  in  a short  period  of  time.  Apparently  there  are  periods 
of  several  years  during  which  the  appearance  of  the  bluffs  changes 
but  little  as  a result  of  marine  erosion.  On  the  other  hand,  there  are 
periods  in  which  the  accumulative  effects  of  wave  action  are  consid- 
erable, especially  in  conjunction  with  other  factors.  Miners  who  have 
resided  on  this  coast  say  that  for  several  years  previous  to  a series  of 
rather  violent  earthquakes  late  in  October  and  early  in  November,  1912, 
which  are  supposed  to  be  related  to  the  eruption  of  Mount  Katmai 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  315 

in  June  of  that  year,  the  bluffs  along  the  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island 
for  considerable  distances  had  the  aspect  of  a smooth  and  even-sloped 
escarpment,  the  surface  of  which  was  mantled  by  a well-established 
growth  of  turf  from  high-tide  level  to  the  top.  The  earthquakes  in 
1912,  however,  were  severe  enough  to  disrupt  not  only  the  bluffs  but 
the  greater  part  of  the  coastal  plain  as  well.  The  ground  was  frozen 
at  the  time,  so  that  the  surface  fracturing  was  emphasized.  The  com- 
pact till  was  ruptured  and  slightly  faulted,  some  blocks  were  dis- 
placed to  the  extent  of  3 feet  with  relation  to  one  another,  and  the 
turf-covered  surface  of  the  coastal  plain  was  greatly  broken  far 
inland  from  the  bluffs,  so  that  some  cracks  stood  open  as  much  as  a 
foot. 

Since  these  earthquakes  the  bluffs  have  been  eroded  back  by  the 
waves  15  to  20  feet  or  more  along  practically  their  entire  length,  as 
is  shown  by  well-established  landmarks,  such  as  cabins  and  other 
structures.  In  consequence  of  the  concentration  by  the  surf  of  the 
new  material  loosened  from  the  face  of  the  bluffs,  it  is  stated  that  the 
gold  content  of  the  beach  sands  in  recent  years  was  noticeably  greater 
than  it  had  been  for  several  years  previous  to  1912.  This  statement 
corroborates  the  view  that  the  placer  gold  is  derived  chiefly  from  the 
bluffs  of  till  and  outwash  sediments. 

In  1917  the  bluffs  presented  sheer  cliff  walls  for  long  distances,  and 
a]  though  some  sections  were  much  broken  by  steps  or  benches  the 
faces  of  the  bluffs  are  so  steep  that  ladders  have  to  be  provided  for 
their  ascent.  Slides  or  slumps,  such  as  characterize  steep  banks  that 
are  largely  composed  of  clay,  are  common  features,  and  small  trick- 
ling streams  erode  steep  gullies  back  short  distances.  No  doubt  such 
agencies  tend  to  reduce  the  bluffs  to  a more  mature  aspect  'during 
periods  when  they  are  not  disturbed  by  earthquakes  or  very  strong 
marine  erosion.  Although  no  data  are  at  hand  as  regards  their  num- 
ber, earthquakes  of  considerable  violence  are  known  to  occur  fre- 
quently in  this  part  of  Alaska,  and  they  may  accelerate  erosion,  espe- 
cially in  tracts  of  unconsolidated  sediments  such  as  the  coastal  plain 
here  considered,  where  steep  escarpments  facilitate  the  delivery  of 
loosened  material  upon  a beach  where  it  may  be  directly  attacked 
by  heavy  surf.  However,  storms  of  unusual  intensity  or  duration 
are  the  chief  factors  in  concentrating  the  loose  beach  deposits  and 
forming  the  temporary  segregations  of  placer  sands.  The  autumn 
of  1902  is  stated  to  have  been  a particularly  good  season  for  mining 
on  the  Kodiak  beaches,  the  good  yields  being  attributed  to  a series 
of  northwesterly  gales  that  washed  the  upper  parts  of  the  beaches 
almost  clean  of  the  overburden  of  gravel  and  sand  and  left  the  gold 
concentrated  in  patches  with  a minimum  of  waste. 

Thus  the  loose  beach  deposits  are  undergoing  a never-ending  as- 
sortment and  reassortment  with  the  addition  of  comparatively  small 


316 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


quantities  of  new  material  from  the  bluffs  at  irregular  intervals  of 
heavy  storm  erosion.  In  this  way  the  beach  placers,  whose  aggregate 
content  of  placer  metals  is  not  great,  pass  through  seasonal  periods 
of  temporary  local  enrichment  that  are  more  marked  in  some  years 
than  in  others.  These  periods  alternate  with  others  during  which 
erosion  and  concentration  by  the  waves  is  not  so  vigorous.  Successful 
mining  therefore  depends  chiefly  upon  the  opportune  recovery  of 
the  better  concentrations  at  localities  that  can  not  be  selected  before- 
hand and  at  times  that  can  not  be  predicted. 


THE  PLACER  MINERALS. 

The  chief  minerals  that  make  up  the  heavy  concentrates  of  the 
beach  comprise  magnetite,  pyrite,  chromite,  gold,  and  a little  plati- 
num. In  most  of  the  concentrates  as  mined  there  also  is  present  a 
considerable  percentage  of  artificially  introduced  metals,  such  as 
lead  in  the  form  of  bird  shot,  solder  from  cans,  and  shoe  nails  of 
iron  and  brass.  Some  of  the  concentrates  contain  many  heavy  flakes 
of  oxidized  iron  that  probably  are  derived  from  disintegrated  cans 
and  nails.  Amalgam  lost  from  previous  operations  is  recovered  in 
small  amounts. 

By  far  the  chief  mineral  of  the  concentrates  is  magnetic  black 
sand  (magnetite) , which  constitutes  fully  95  per  cent  of  several  sam- 
ples examined,  the  remaining  5 per  cent  of  nonmagnetic  material 
being  pyrite  and  chromic  sand,  which  in  dried  samples  may  be  readily 
separated  with  a hand  magnet. 

For  the  most  part  the  magnetite  sand  is  fine  grained;  nine-tenths 
of  it  readily  passes  the  40-mesh  screen,  of  which  from  one-third  to 
two-thirds  passes  the  100-mesh  screen. 

The  following  analysis  (No.  3214)  of  placer  platinum  from  Can- 
vas Point,  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island,  was  made  by  R.  C.  Wells,  of 
the  United  States  Geological  Survey : 


Analysis  of  placer  platinum  from  Kodiak  Island,  Alaska. 


Si02,  etc 

IrOs,  Rh 

Ir  from  part  of  IrOs_. 
Rh  from  part  of  IrOs. 

Pt 

Ir  

Fe 

Au 

Rh 

Pci 

Cu 

Ni 

Zn  and  Ag 


1.2 
26.9 
6.1 
.1 
55.3 
2.4 
6.  4 
.3 
.7 
.1 
.6 
.08 
Trace. 


Specific  gravity,  17.2. 


100. 18 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  317 

MINING  METHODS. 

The  mining  practice  has  been  that  usually  followed  by  beach 
miners,  that  is,  rough  washing  of  the  sands  in  rockers  or  small  port- 
able sluice  boxes  which  save  only  the  coarser  flake  or  scale  gold  and 
that  part  of  the  finer  gold  which  amalgamates  readily.  It  has  always 
been  realized  that  much  of  the  fine  or  flour  gold  and  also  some  of  the 
light  scaly  gold  was  lost  with  the  black-sand  concentrates.  Hereto- 
fore, the  concentrates  have  been  considered  an  unavoidable  hindrance 
to  the  recovery  of  the  gold,  especially  the  flour  gold,  and,  until  recently, 
they  have  been  discarded  as  soon  as  possible  without  secondary  treat- 
ment. The  platinum,  which  has  been  recently  recognized  in  small 
amounts,  in  association  with  the  gold,  was  overlooked  in  the  earlier 
years  of  mining,  for  the  manner  of  washing  the  sands  was  too  crude 
to  reveal  it.  Recently,  however,  secondary  panning  of  the  concen- 
trates, followed  by  drying  and  blowing  and  crude  separation  with 
small  horseshoe  magnets,  has  been  practiced  by  a few  of  the  more 
careful  miners  with  a view  of  saving  more  of  the  fine  gold ; and  this 
has  resulted  in  the  recovery  of  a few  pennyweights  of  platinum. 

The  use  of  undercurrents  in  treating  the  concentrates,  or,  better 
still,  the  use  of  some  form  of  concentrating  tables,  would  without 
doubt  give  a much  greater  saving  of  the  gold  in  the  sands  and  a 
better  separation  of  the  platinum  metals.  But  such  treatment  of  the 
concentrates  on  a commercial  scale,  to  be  fully  effective,  would  re- 
quire a community  of  interest  in  the  mining  operations  that  has  not 
existed  up  to  the  present  time  and  probably  would  be  difficult  to 
establish  and  maintain. 

Mining  operations  can  be  conducted  on  the  beaches  of  Kodiak  Island 
only  during  periods  of  receding  or  low  tides,  because  high  tides,  or 
at  least  the  wash  of  the  surf  during  such  periods,  reach  to  the  base  of 
the  bluffs  along  practically  the  whole  length  of  the  west  coast  at  all 
times.  Consequently  all  mining  equipment  must  be  removed  from  the 
beach  during  high  tide,  and  seldom  can  more  than  four  or  five  hours 
actual  mining  be  done  on  the  beach  in  one  day.  Thus  no  preliminary 
preparation  is  possible  beyond  prospecting  with  a pan  or  shovel  as 
the  tide  begins  to  ebb  to  determine  a favorable  place  to  mine.  In 
former  years  rockers  were  used  exclusively  for  such  transient  opera- 
tions, but  recently  small  portable  sluice-box  equipment  has  been  used 
to  a considerable  extent  along  certain  sections  of  the  beach  where 
water  is  obtainable.  Rockers  are  still  used  where  water  is  not  avail- 
able and  during  winter  when  the  water  supply  for  sluicing  freezes ; 
they  are  also  used  for  washing  rich  sands,  which  are  sometimes  col- 
lected from  the  beach  in  small  quantities  and  accumulated  in  holes  on 
the  bluffs  for  future  treatment  and  for  reworking  concentrates. 

The  sluicing  operations  are  generally  carried  on  by  two  or  three 
men  working  in  partnership  and  depend  upon  a water  supply  obtained 
115086°— 19 21 


318 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


from  the  small  lakes  or  ponds  that  lie  on  some  parts  of  the  coastal 
plain  within  short  distances  of  the  top  of  the  bluffs.  The  water  is 
brought  to  the  edge  of  the  bluffs  in  ditches,  and  thence  it  is  conveyed 
to  the  beach,  40  to  70  feet  below,  by  canvas  hose ; or,  in  favorable  situ- 
ations, where  the  bluffs  are  benched,  a combination  of  ditches  and 
flumes  is  built  to  carry  the  water  along  the  face  of  the  bluffs  in  either 
direction  from  the  supply  ditch,  so  that  it  is  available  for  sluicing 
operations  along  a considerable  section  of  the  beach.  The  same  result 
is  also  accomplished  by  extending  canvas  hose  along  the  bluffs.  Thus 
some  of  the  miners  are  able  to  use  the  portable  sluice  boxes  at  any  point 
along  a section  of  the  beach  within  half  a mile  of  their  main  ditch, 
and,  in  a general  way,  such  zones  of  operation  are  recognized  as  be- 
longing to  the  claimants  of  water  rights  and  main  ditches. 

The  portable  sluicing  equipment  consists  of  three  boxes  about  10 
feet  long,  10  inches  wide,  and  8 to  10  inches  deep.  The  two  lower 
boxes  are  fitted  with  wire  grating  on  top  of  burlap.  The  third  or  up- 
per box,  into  which  the  sands  and  gravels  are  shoveled,  is  provided 
with  slat  riffles.  A little  quicksilver  is  generally  used  in  the  upper 
part  of  the  lower  box.  The  box  line  is  set  up  on  four  or  five  horses 
that  admit  of  adjusting  both  .the  height  and  grade  as  desired.  The 
usual  grade  is  about  8 per  cent.  The  water  is  led  int©  the  boxes  by 
canvas  hose,  about  6 inches  in  diameter,  that  is  connected  with  the 
permanent  system  by  which  it  is  conveyed  along  the  bluffs. 

The  usual  practice  is  to  prospect  the  beach  as  the  tide  begins  to  fall 
and  thus  locate  a spot  where  good  concentration  is  taking  place 
without  too  much  overburden  of  barren  sand  and  gravel.  The  boxes 
are  set  up  on  a satisfactory  spot  as  soon  as  the  tide  has  receded  suf- 
ficiently. Generally  a foot  or  so  of  the  top  sands  is  shoveled  aside 
from  a strip  6 or  7 feet  wide  along  each  side  of  the  boxes,  and  6 to  12 
inches  of  the  heavier  sands  that  rest  on  the  clay  bedrock  are  shoveled 
into  the  boxes  from  both  sides.  The  area  of  beach  mined  during  one 
recession  of  the  tide  by  three  or  four  men  working  together  is  seldom 
more  than  may  be  properly  shoveled  into  the  boxes  as  they  are  set  up 
in  one  position — an  area  about  30  feet  long  and  14  feet  wide  or  from 
400  to  450  square  feet — although  occasionally  two  set-ups  or  about 
twice  this  area  may  be  mined.  When  the  tide  rises  the  equipment  is 
removed  to  a safe  place  on  the  bluffs. 

It  is  considered  unprofitable  to  attempt  to  mine  in  places  where  the 
overburden  is  more  than  2 feet  thick,  and  if  possible  a locality  is 
selected  where  the  back  wash  of  the  surf  has  temporarily  “ washed 
down  ” the  loose  sands  and  gravels  to  a foot  or  less  in  thickness.  Such 
“ washing  down  ” or  transient  concentration  of  the  beach  usually  oc- 
curs in  a marked  manner  as  a result  of  the  backwash  of  heavy  surf, 
and  occasionally  it  is  so  thorough  that  all  but  1 or  2 inches  of  the 
heaviest  placer-bearing  sands  are  swept  from  the  clay  bedrock  along 


BEACH  PLACERS  OF  THE  WEST  COAST  OF  KODIAK  ISLAND.  319 

the  base  of  the  bluffs.  But  the  areas  so  concentrated  are  generally 
small  and  of  little  permanence,  for  often  they  may  be  covered  by  2 
feet  of  lighter  sands  during  the  next  advance  of  the  tide  and  the 
placer  concentration  may  be  dispersed  with  this  change.  Such  con- 
centrations are  often  scraped  up  hurriedly,  shoveled  into  buckets,  and 
placed  in  safe  places  on  the  bluffs,  to  be  washed  later  with  rockers. 

The  miners  patrol  the  beach  at  frequent  intervals,  test  it  here  and 
there  by  panning  for  the  development  of  favorable  conditions  of  con- 
centration, and  thus  secure  the  best  yields.  But  under  such  transitory 
conditions  mining  is  uncertain,  and  a month  or  more  may  pass  without 
opportune  conditions  for  activity,  particularly  in  the  summer,  during 
which  many  of  the  miners  make  little  effort  to  work. 

The  compact  till  bedrock  usually  presents  a surface  that  allows 
very  little  of  the  gold  to  become  lodged  within  it,  especially  in  those 
areas  where  it  has  been  freshly  scoured  by  the  heavy  surf  that  forms 
the  best  concentrations.  Consequently  it  is  seldom  necessary  to  mine 
more  than  one-half  to  1 inch  of  the  somewhat  softened  surface  of  the 
bedrock  in  order  to  deliver  practically  all  the  gold-bearing  material 
to  the  washing  apparatus,  except  in  localities  where  the  bedrock  is  of 
the  so-called  “quicksand”  variety,  which  consists  essentially  of  a 
plastic  mixture  of  sand,  silt,  and  clay,  charged  excessively  with  water. 
In  this  quicksand  bedrock  the  gold  often  finds  lodgment  to  a depth  of 
6 to  12  inches  below  the  ordinary  surface  of  scour,  and  as  the  gold  is 
retained  by  it  to  better  advantage  such  areas  are  stated  to  be  more  en- 
riched than  those  where  the  bedrock  is  of  compact  till.  Such  areas  of 
bedrock  are  particularly  searched  for  by  the  miners  and  are  mined  to 
a depth  of  about  a foot.  Apparently  the  patches  of  so-called  quick- 
sand bedrock  occur  chiefly  along  those  sections  of  the  bluffs  where  out- 
wash  sediments  that  are  incorporated  with  the  till  deposits  dip  below 
sea  level  and  thus  form  the  beach  platform  upon  which  the  surf  scours. 
Sediments  similar  to  the  quicksand  may  be  observed  in  the  bluffs  above 
high-tide  level  that  do  not  contain  prospects  of  gold,  so  it  is  probable 
that  the  richer  concentrations  of  gold  noted  in  this  kind  of  bedrock 
are  formed  on  the  present  beach.  It  appears  that  the  quicksand  bed- 
rock favors  enrichment,  as  contrasted  with  the  compact  till,  simply  be- 
cause it  is  a looser-textured  medium  that  offers  more  secure  lodgment 
for  and  better  retention  of  the  heavier  beach  concentrates  from  the 
washing  action  of  the  surf  as  it  shifts  the  loose  sands  and  gravels  about 
on  the  beach  platform. 

Mining  is  seldom  attempted  on  those  sections  of  the  beach  where 
boulders  and  cobbles  are  particularly  abundant,  and  the  compara- 
tively small  amount  of  coarse  material  that  may  occur  in  areas  that 
are  mined  is  shoveled  or  rolled  aside,  according  to  size,  as  it  is  en- 
countered during  the  progress  of  digging. 


MINING  IN  THE  FAIRBANKS  DISTRICT. 


By  Theodore  Chapin. 


GENERAL  CONDITIONS. 

The  mineral  production  of  the  Fairbanks  district  in  1917  included 
placer  gold,  valued  at  $1,310,000;  lode  gold,  valued  at  $47,781; 
placer  silver,  valued  at  $6,904 ; lode  silver,  valued  at  $1,827 ; and  lead, 
tungsten,  and  antimony,  valued  at  $58,257.  The  total  value  of  the 
mineral  output  in  1917  was  $1,424,769,  as  against  $2,039,744  in  1916. 
The  decrease  was  due  in  large  part  to  a general  retrenchment  on  the 
part  of  operators  owing  to  the  high  cost  of  supplies,  which  prevented 
the  working  of  low-grade  ground.  Failures  were  recorded  in  1917 
on  ground  which  in  previous  years  netted  a good  profit,  and  but  for 
the  general  retrenchment  other  failures  would  doubtless  have  resulted. 

Quartz  mining  showed  a slight  increase,  which  in  large  part  was 
due  to  the  interest  in  tungsten  lodes.  Two  tungsten  mines  were 
in  course  of  development.  At  one  of  these  mines  one  unit  of  a 
75-ton  mill  was  in  operation,  and  in  the  summer  of  1917  was  turning 
out  several  hundred  pounds  of  scheelite  a day.  On  the  other  property 
a similar  mill  was  in  course  of  construction  during  the  summer. 
Development  was  in  progress  at  both  properties.  The  surface  show- 
ings indicate  the  possible  presence  of  large  tungsten-bearing  deposits. 

Five  gold  quartz  mills  were  in  operation  during  a part  of  the  year, 
and  several  other  properties  not  equipped  with  mills  made  small 
outputs.  On  the  whole  the  gold  quartz  mining  was  insignificant. 

The  production  of  antimony  in  1917  was  small.  Stibnite  was 
mined  at  two  localities,  and  at  a third  some  ore  was  recovered  from 
old  tailings. 

One  silver-lead  lode  in  process  of  development  made  several  ship- 
ments of  high-grade  argentiferous  galena. 

GOLD  LODES. 

FAIRBANKS  CREEK. 

The  Crites  & Feldman  mine  and  mill,  on  Moose  Creek,  a tributary 
of  Fairbanks  Creek,  were  operated  throughout  the  year.  The 
character  of  the  mineral  deposits  has  been  described  in  previous 
publications  and  need  not  be  repeated  here. 

The  Mizpah  mine  on  Fairbanks  Creek  was  operated  by  a small  crew. 
The  mine  is  developed  on  an  eastward-trending  vein  that  dips 

321 


322 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


steeply  south.  An  inclined  working  shaft  extends  along  the  vein 
to  a depth  of  160  feet,  from  which  drifts  extend  east  and  west.  On 
the  80-foot  level  a slope  170  feet  long  reaches  to  the  surface.  The 
lode  is  a quartz  vein  from  a few  inches  to  3 feet  wide.  It  carries 
considerable  stibnite  and  in  places  free  gold  is  abundant  and  some 
very  rich  shoots  occur.  On  the  east  end  of  the  workings  a galena- 
bearing lode  has  been  encountered,  which  has  been  traced  on  the 
surface  for  a long  distance.  Last  year  a little  scheelite  was  produced. 
The  mine  is  equipped  with  a Huntington  mill. 

Development  work  was  continued  on  the  Gilmore  & Stevens 
property  east  of  the  Mizpah  mine.  A prospecting  adit  is  being 
driven  northerly  into  the  hill  for  the  purpose  of  crosscutting  the 
Mizpah  and  other  lodes  which  have  been  opened  on  the  surface.  In 
September,  1917,  this  adit  was  800  feet  long  and  presumably  is  not 
far  from  the  ore-bearing  zone,  which  on  the  surface  contains  a number 
of  lodes.  The  property  is  equipped  with  a 5-stamp  mill. 

Near  the  head  of  Fairbanks  Creek  development  work  has  been 
continued  on  the  McCarty  property,  and  some  production  has  been 
made  of  both  gold  and  antimony. 

SKOOGY  GULCH. 

The  David  mine  on  Skoogy  Gulch  was  in  operation  during  the 
summer.  The  property  lies  west  of  that  of  the  Rainbow  mine  and 
is  probably  on  the  same  vein  that  is  exposed  in  the  Rainbow  workings. 
The  underground  workings  consist  of  an  adit  driven  from  Skoogy 
Gulch  along  the  vein  for  about  100  feet  and  an  overhead  stope  65 
feet  long.  The  lode  is  a quartz  vein  which  differs  in  width  from 
place  to  place  from  6 inches  to  a gouge  seam.  The  property  is 
equipped  with  a 2-stamp  Hendy  mill  with  two  8-foot  plates.  A 
wood-burning  boiler  furnishes  steam  for  mill,  hoist,  and  compressor. 
The  Rainbow  mine  is  idle  on  account  of  litigation. 

The  Overgard  property  on  Skoogy  Gulch  made  a small  production. 
This  property  is  equipped  with  a homemade  1 -stamp  mill. 

The  Heilig  & Creighton  property  on  the  divide  between  Skoogy 
Gulch  and  Cleary  Creek  is  now  being  prospected.  A shaft  has  been 
sunk  60  feet  and  crosscuts  started  which  show  two  parallel  veins 
that  strike  N.  30°  E.  and  dip  65°  NW.  The  mine  is  equipped  with 
a Little  Giant  mill  and  gasoline  engine. 

CLEARY  CREEK. 

Work  was  continued  on  the  Tony  Goessman  property  on  Bedrock 
Creek  tributary  to  Cleary  Creek  and  a small  production  was  made. 

There  was  no  mining  in  1917  at  the  Chatham  mine,  but  the  old 
tailings  were  picked  over  and  some  high-grade  ore  sorted  out  for 
shipment. 


MINING  IN  THE  FAIRBANKS  DISTRICT. 


323 


ESTER  CREEK  AND  VICINITY. 

Considerable  development  work  was  done  on  deposits  on  the 
divide  between  Eva  and  Ace  creeks.  Twenty-seven  claims  covering 
an  ore  body  known  as  the  Ryan  lode  and  a number  of  adjacent 
lodes  were  bonded  by  the  Alaska  Mineral  & Development  Co.,  and 
from  October,  1916,  to  June,  1917,  some  exploration  work  was 
done.  The  Ryan  lode  was  opened  by  one  adit  and  five  shafts, 
from  which  the  lode  was  prospected  by  nine  crosscuts  across  the 
lode  at  depths  of  50  to  100  feet.  Where  examined  by  the  writer 
the  lode  is  50  feet  or  more  wide.  It  is  a stringer  lode  and  is  com- 
posed of  veins  of  quartz  that  inclose  fractured  and  mineralized  schist 
and  seams  of  gouge.  The  lode  carries  considerable  stibnite  and  is 
highly  colored  with  the  stains  of  antimony  oxides.  The  lode  strikes 
about  north  and  dips  east  at  high  angles.  Development  work  was 
started  on  the  Ryan  lode  in  October,  1916,  and  was  suspended 
in  June,  1917. 

On  the  Combination  claim  a few  shallow  pits  exposed  a quartz 
vein  with  arsenopyrite  scattered  through  it  and  coatings  of  scoro- 
dite  and  cervantite.  The  size  or  extent  of  the  ore  body  was  not 
evident  from  the  few  exposures.  The  claim  is  on  the  slope  of  Eva 
Creek  near  the  Ryan  lode. 

Development  work  was  continued  by  McGlone  & Smith  on  the 
Bill  Sunday  Fraction  lode  claim.  This  claim  is  on  the  divide 
between  Eva  and  St.  Patrick  creeks,  northeast  of  the  Fairchance 
claim,  and  is  probably  on  the  same  or  a parallel  lode.  The  lode 
strikes  N.  25°  E.  and  dips  from  70°  SE.  to  nearly  vertical.  It  has 
been  opened  by  two  shafts  100  feet  and  20  feet  deep  and  by  surface 
cuts.  At  the  surface  the  lode  is  solid  quartz  about  3 feet  wide,  but 
at  depth  it  widens  considerably.  At  a depth  of  50  feet  the  lode 
consists  of  stringers  of  quartz  which  cut  mineralized  schist  and 
carry  large  seams  of  gouge.  The  quartz  carries  a large  amount  of 
stibnite  and  cervantite  and  in  places  free  gold.  Fine  gold  is  easily 
obtained  by  panning  either  the  quartz  or  schist  of  the  lode. 

The  St.  Paul  mine  at  the  head  of  Eva  Creek  was  operated  through- 
out the  year.  The  property  is  equipped  with  a 7-foot  roller  mill 
which  has  a capacity  of  20  tons  a day. 

Roy  McQueen  is  opening  an  antimony  lode  on  the  Jennie  C.  claim, 
situated  on  the  divide  between  Ready  Bullion  and  Nugget  creeks. 
The  lode  is  nearly  solid  stibnite  with  a little  quartz  and  occurs  in 
lenses.  In  places  it  is  18  to  24  inches  wide,  and  in  others  it  pinches 
to  a seam  of  gouge  matter.  The  vein  strikes  N.  45°  W.  and  dips 
75°  NE.  The  ore  is  mined  by  surface  trenching  and  is  hand  picked 
and  sacked  at  the  mine. 


324 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 
SILVER-LEAD  LODES. 

A silver-lead  deposit  is  being  developed  near  the  head  of  Cleary 
Creek  on  property  leased  from  the  Eldorado  Mining  & Milling  Co. 
Development  work  in  the  fall  of  1917  consisted  of  an  inclined  shaft 
45  feet  deep  and  about  30  feet  of  drifts  and  stopes.  On  the  surface 
the  vein  was  about  3 feet  wide,  and  where  the  shaft  was  sunk  it  was 
composed  principally  of  stibnite.  Below  the  surface  the  vein 
attains  a width  of  10  to  15  feet.  The  vein  incloses  large  bunches  of 
pure  galena,  which  is  said  to  be  rich  in  silver.  Disseminated  pyrite 
is  abundant  in  parts  of  the  lode.  A strong  hanging  wall  strikes 
N.  45°  E.  and  dips  steeply  northwest.  The  footwall  is  not  well 
defined  and  is  marked  by  a gradation  from  lode  to  country  rock.  The 
ore  is  hand  picked  and  sacked  for  shipment  at  the  mine. 

TUNGSTEN  DEPOSITS. 

Tungsten  lodes  have  been  discovered  at  two  neighboring  localities 
in  the  Fairbanks  district;  one  at  the  divide  between  the  tributaries 
of  Fish  and  Smallwood  creeks,  and  the  other  at  the  heads  of  First 


Figure  13.— Sketch  map  showing  tungsten  lode  claims  in  the  Fairbanks  district. 


Chance,  Steele,  and  Engineer  creeks.  (See  fig.  13.)  At  the  first 
property  one  unit  of  a mill  is  in  operation,  and  during  the  summer  of 
1917  it  was  producing  500  pounds  of  scheelite  concentrates  a day. 
At  the  other  property  a mill  was  in  course  of  construction  and  active 
development  work  was  being  carried  on.  Besides  these  two  mines, 
a number  of  claims  are  located  on  the  scheelite-bearing  lodes.  The 
scheelite  deposits  of  the  Fairbanks  district  are  believed  to  be  much 
more  extensive  than  the  surface  outcrops  show  and  to  give  promise 
of  a large  future  production  of  tungsten. 


MINING  IN  THE  FAIRBANKS  DISTRICT. 


325 


GEOLOGY. 

The  tungsten  lodes  occur  in  an  area  of  Birch  Creek  schist,  described 
by  Prindle  1 as  a series  of  highly  metamorphosed  siliceous  sediments 
that  consist  of  massive  quartzites,  quartzite  schists,  quartz-mica 
schists,  hornblende  schists  in  part  amphibolitic,  carbonaceous  schists, 
crystalline  limestone,  altered  calcareous  rocks,  and  associated  eclo- 
gitic  rocks,  andalusite  hornfels,  and  a small  amount  of  granitic 
gneiss  derived  from  intrusive  porphyritic  granite. 

ORE  DEPOSITS. 

The  ore  deposits  are  for  the  most  part  replaced  portions  of  the  lime- 
stone and  calcareous  beds  that  occur  interbedded  with  the  schists. 
The  deposits  as  far  as  noted  appear  to  lie  in  a more  or  less  continuous 
zone  that  strikes  about  N.  70°  E.  and  parallels  the  general  strike  of 
the  schist.  The  lodes  are  composed  of  quartz,  calcite  pyroxene, 
hornblende,  garnet,  epidote,  biotite,  and  scheelite — minerals  which 
are  believed  to  have  been  formed  by  the  replacement  of  the  lime- 
stone and  calcareous  sediments  by  the  tungsten-bearing  solutions. 
Besides  the  lodes  that  represent  replaced  calcareous  sediments 
there  are  quartz  veins  which  also  carry  scheelite.  The  quartz  veins 
follow  the  silicification  of  the  limestone  beds  and  in  places  cut  the 
earlier  formed  lodes,  resulting  in  an  enriched  ore  body.  The  known 
tungsten  deposits  of  this  region  all  occur  on  the  border  of  a body  of 
porphyritic  granite  and  are  believed  to  be  genetically  connected 
with  it. 

MINES  AND  PROSPECTS. 

ALASKA  TUNGSTEN  MINES  CO. 

The  Alaska  Tungsten  Mines  Co.  has  property  on  Yellow  Pup,  one 
of  the  tributaries  of  Fish  Creek  and  on  the  knob  between  the  heads 
of  Gilmore,  Smallwood,  and  Fish  creeks.  The  principal  work  has 
been  on  the  Tungsten  claim  at  an  elevation  of  2,472  feet.  The 
property  is  reached  by  a first-class  wagon  road  from  Gilmore  on  Pedro 
Creek  by  way  of  Gilmore  Creek.  The  lode  strikes  N.  70°  E.  parallel 
to  the  schistosity  of  the  country  rock  and  dips  from  20°  to  40°  NW. 
The  footwall  is  well  defined  and  follows  approximately  the  bedding 
planes  of  the  greenstone  and  quartzite  schist.  The  vein  ranges  in 
thickness  from  2 to  12  feet  and  more,  but  the  richest  ore  is  confined 
to  lenses  from  2 to  5 feet  thick.  There  is  no  definite  hanging  wall 
to  the  lode,  but  back  of  each  is  more  ore.  These  are  evidently 
structural  planes,  either  bedding  planes  or  less  permeable  zones  in 
the  original  rock  along  which  replacement  has  taken  place.  Thin 
stringers  of  scheelite-bearing  quartz  of  later  origin  than  the  replaced 
rock  follow  the  bedding  planes  and  cut  across  them. 


1 Prindle,  L.  M.,  Geology  of  the  Fairbanks  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  525,  pp.  59-131, 1913. 


326 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  mine  is  being  developed  by  an  inclined  shaft  driven  along  the 
vein.  In  September,  1917,  this  shaft  had  been  extended  for  160 
feet  and  dips  at  an  angle  of  40°  to  18°.  In  places  the  shaft  widens 
out  to  stopes  and  chambers,  and  the  lower  part  has  been  opened  to 
a width  of  40  feet. 

The  Scheelite  claim  joins  the  Tungsten  on  the  east,  and  the  ore 
bodies  on  the  two  claims  are  presumably  the  same.  No  mining  was 
in  progress  in  1917.  The  development  is  reported  to  consist  of  a 
75-foot  inclined  shaft  along  an  ore  shoot  10  feet  wide  and  from  4 to  6 
feet  high.1  About  250  tons  of  ore  was  shipped  from  this  property  in 
1915-16. 

The  mill  and  camp  of  the  Alaska  Tungsten  Mines  Co.  is  on  Yellow 
Pup  at  an  elevation  of  about  1,600  feet.  One  unit  of  a Faust  con- 
centrating mill  was  installed  during  the  summer  of  1917  and  in 
September  was  turning  out  500  pounds  of  scheelite  concentrates  a day. 

The  Murphy  claim,  on  Yellow  Pup  just  below  the  mouth  of  Pearl 
Creek,  is  under  option  to  the  Tungsten  Mines  Co.,  who  are  developing 
it.  At  the  time  of  the  writer’s  visit  the  workings  were  inaccessible. 
Grab  samples  taken  from  the  dump  and  crushed  and  panned  appeared 
to  be  rich  from  the  amount  of  concentrate  the  pannings  yielded. 
The  vein  is  said  to  be  4 feet  wide  and  to  strike  N.  75°  E. 

COLUMBIA  MINE. 

The  Columbia  mine  is  being  developed  by  the  Columbia  Mining 
Co.  The  group  of  claims  now  controlled  by  this  company  represents 
the  original  locations  of  J acob  Meier  and  other  claims  acquired  since. 
The  claims  are  at  the  head  of  Steele  Creek,  about  10  miles  from 
Fairbanks,  with  which  they  are  connected  by  a good  wagon  road. 

A number  of  scheelit e-bearing  lodes  have  been  located.  Location 
was  made  on  the  Columbia  claim,  where  a scheelite  lode  and  quartz 
vein  that  is  associated  with  it  have  been  exposed  by  an  open  cut  and 
adits.  The  upper  adit  has  been  driven  for  80  feet  along  the  vein 
which  follows  a granite  hanging  wall  and  strikes  about  N.  20°  W.  and 
dips  northeast.  The  lode  apparently  replaces  calcareous  beds  but  is 
cut  by  large  quartz  veins,  which  also  appear  to  carry  scheelite.  A 
lower  adit  is  now  being  driven  to  cut  this  lode. 

The  Spruce  Hen  claim,  now  being  developed  by  the  Columbia 
Mining  Co.,  is  on  the  divide  between  First  Chance  and  Steele  creeks. 
From  appearances  several  lodes  have  been  opened  by  crosscuts  at 
intervals  for  the  entire  length  of  the  claim.  The  principal  ore  body 
appears  to  be  an  iron-stained  lode  about  4 feet  wide.  This  lode  has 
been  opened  by  one  cut  to  a depth  of  8 feet.  It  strikes  N.  50°  E. 
and  dips  45°  NW.  The  lode  appears  to  be  composed  of  silicates, 

i Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  Lode  mining  in  the  Fairbanks  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  662,  p.  421, 
1917. 


MINING  IN  THE  FAIRBANKS  DISTRICT. 


327 


which  have  replaced  limestone  beds,  and  is  cut  hy  quartz  stringers. 
Both  the  silicates  and  later  quartz  stringers  are  rich  in  scheelite. 
A little  molybdenite  also  occurs.  Seams  of  gouge  occur  along  both 
walls  of  the  lode. 

The  camp  and  mill  were  in  course  of  construction  in  1917.  The 
camp  is  at  the  head  of  Steele  Creek  at  an  elevation  of  1,830  feet. 
The  mill  is  on  Steele  Creek  at  an  elevation  of  about  1,200  feet.  A 
Marathon  mill  was  first  constructed,  hut  this  did  not  prove  satis- 
factory. The  new  mill  is  a Faust  concentrating  mill. 

The  Ptarmigan  and  Franklin  claims,  on  the  head  of  Gilmore  Creek, 
are  being  developed  by  J.  F.  Zimmerman.  Surface  cuts,  made  across 
the  claims  at  a number  of  places,  have  disclosed  several  mineralized 
zones,  one  of  which  appeared  to  be  15  to  20  feet  across.  The  lodes 
strike  N.  40°  E.  and  dip  northwest.  The  lode  material  is  quartz, 
and  silicate  rock  has  presumably  replaced  limestone  along  selective 
zones.  Scheelite  occurs  in  the  quartz  and  silicates. 

The  Tanana  group  of  five  claims  occurs  at  the  head  of  First  Chance 
Creek.  On  the  Tanana  No.  1 claim  an  inclined  shaft  has  been  sunk 
40  feet  along  the  lode.  The  ore  body  is  a mineralized  zone  of  schist 
about  4 feet  wide  and  follows  the  schistosity  of  the  inclosing  quartzite 
schist.  The  lode  strikes  N.  50°  E.  and  dips  northwest. 

The  Tungsten  Hill  group  of  claims  lies  near  the  head  of  First 
Chance  Creek.  Of  these  Mertie1  says: 

Four  scheelite  lodes  had  been  discovered  on  these  claims  by  August,  1916,  and  it 
is  likely  that  others  are  present.  On  the  Grand  Duke  Nikolas  claim  a scheelite  lode 
in  the  schist  country  rock  had  been  exposed  in  an  open  cut.  This  deposit  consists 
of  6 to  8 feet  decayed  schist,  carrying  scheelite.  Vein  quartz  containing  a little  gold 
is  also  present,  cutting  the  mineralized  zone. 

On  the  Tungsten  No.  1 claim  another  open  cut  had  been  made  in  a country  rock  of 
mica  schist  and  quartzite  schist.  A zone  mineralized  by  scheelite  is  present,  but  the 
width  of  the  lode  was  not  apparent  from  the  work  done. 

On  the  General  Joffre  claim  a scheelite  lode,  14  feet  wide,  has  been  exposed.  The 
lode  as  a whole  was  considered  low-grade  ore;  but  it  contains  in  the  central  part  an 
18-inch  stringer  of  decayed  schist,  which  is  of  considerably  higher  grade. 

These  claims  certainly  deserve  further  prospecting,  for  they  are  as  advantageously 
situated  with  regard  to  the  granite  as  other  scheelite  claims  in  the  district  on  which 
workable  lodes  have  been  developed. 

The  Black  Bear  and  Blossom  claims  are  west  of  the  Tungsten  Hill 
group  and  are  apparently  in  the  same  mineralized  zone.  The  lodes 
consist  of  quartz  stringer  lodes  in  schist.  Considerable  open  trench- 
ing has  been  done  on  these  two  claims,  and  several  lodes  are  exposed 
that  apparently  extend  across  the  two  claims.  The  scheelite  occurs 
in  the  quartz  stringers  that  penetrate  the  schist.  These  stringers  in 
places  are  very  rich,  carrying  large  crystals  of  scheelite,  and  should 
be  further  developed. 


i Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  op.  cit.,  p.  424. 


■ 


. 


. : r.v 


' 


■ 


A MOLYBDENITE  LODE  ON  HEALY  RIVER. 


By  Theodore  Chapin. 


A molybdenite-bearing  quartz  vein  has  recently  been  opened  on 
Healy  River.  Its  location  is  near  the  extreme  head  of  the  river  on 
the  south  slope  of  Rainey  Mountain,  near  the  divide  between  Healy 
and  South  Fork  of  Goodpaster  rivers.  It  is  about  160  miles  southeast 
of  Fairbanks  by  trail.  This  deposit  was  not  visited  by  the  writer 
and  the  following  description  is  abstracted  from  a report  made  to 
the  owners  by  Albert  Johnson,  of  Fairbanks. 

The  ore  deposit  is  described  as  a quartz  fissure  vein  inclosed  in 
granite.  It  trends  east  and  dips  north.  The  lode  has  not  been 
developed  to  any  extent  but  has  been  traced  by  shallow  surface 
openings  and  float  for  three  claim  lengths  and  is  believed  to  be  con- 
tinuous for  this  distance.  The  vein  is  described  as  hard  white  quartz 
that  carries  bunches  of  molybdenite  scattered  sparingly  through  the 
vein  and  rather  evenly  distributed. 

The  deposit  is  6,000  to  6,500  feet  above  sea  level  and  considerably 
above  timber,  but  timber  is  said  to  be  available  on  Healy  River 
within  3 miles  of  the  property,  and  the  water  of  Healy  River  is 
regarded  as  sufficient  for  all  mining  purposes.  Supplies  are  brought 
up  Tanana  River,  a distance  of  130  miles,  to  the  mouth  of  Healy 
River,  where  a trading  post  has  been  established.  From  this  place 
to  the  molybdenite  deposit  it  is  40  miles.  In  summer  pack  horses 
may  be  taken  along  the  ridge  between  Volkmar  and  Healy  rivers 
and  in  winter  the  Healy  can  easily  be  traveled  by  double  enders. 

329 


■ 


MINING  IN  THE  HOT  SPRINGS  DISTRICT. 


By  Theodore  Chapin. 


MINERAL  PRODUCTION. 

The  chief  mineral  product  of  the  Hot  Springs  district  is  placer 
gold.  In  a portion  of  the  district  a considerable  amount  of  cassit- 
erite  (tin  oxide)  occurs  with  the  gold,  but  the  amount  recovered 
is  insignificant  in  value  compared  with  the  gold.  There  are  no 
independent  tin  placers,  but  the  tin  content  of  many  of  the  gold 
placers  is  sufficient  if  recovered  to  add  considerably  to  the  total 
value  of  the  output. 

The  production  of  gold  in  the  Hot  Springs  district  for  1917  was 
$450,000.  In  1916  it  was  $800,000.  This  decrease  was  due  to  sev- 
eral causes.  One  of  the  principal  causes  is  that  which  is  common  to 
all  placer  camps — the  depletion  of  the  bonanza  ground.  One  of 
the  immediate  causes,  however,  was  the  cessation  of  the  large  scale 
operations  of  Howell  & Cleveland,  who  for  the  last  two  years  em- 
ployed a large  force  of  men  on  Woodchopper  Creek.  Another 
important  factor  in  this  decline  is  the  high  cost  of  food  and  mining 
supplies,  which  prevented  the  working  of  any  except  the  richest 
ground. 

It  is  not  believed,  however,  that  a decline  in  mining  will  continue 
from  year  to  year,  for  there  are  large  bodies  of  low-grade  placer 
ground,  which,  under  normal  conditions,  will  be  worked  profitably 
for  a great  many  years. 

In  all  about  16  plants  operated  for  all  or  a part  of  the  season  and 
employed  about  150  men.  Besides  there  were  a number  of  men 
prospecting  and  working  in  a small  way.  Several  small  outfits  were 
reworking  old  tailings  for  the  recovery  of  tin  concentrates  and 
whatever  placer  gold  might  be  recovered  by  methods  more  refined 
than  those  used  when  the  ground  was  first  worked.  At  that  time 
the  miners  seldom  used  Hungarian  riffles  in  the  sluice  boxes,  and 
much  of  the  gold  was  lost  in  the  clay  lumps  which  would  go  over 
the  pole  and  bar  riffles  without  breaking  up. 

Prospecting  in  1917  showed  that  both  gold  and  tin  occur  in  the 
basin  of  Sullivan  Creek,  considerably  below  the  area  which  has  yet 
been  mined.  Large  bodies  of  low-grade  gravels  are  being  worked 
on  Boulder  Creek. 


331 


332 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  production  of  tin  in  the  Hot  Springs  district  in  1917  is 
estimated  at  about  25  tons  of  ore  that  contained  about  30,000 
pounds  of  tin,  valued  at  $14,400.  In  1916  about  70  tons  of  ore 
that  contained  about  84,000  pounds  of  tin,  valued  at  $36,500,  was 
recovered.  The  decrease  was  due  largely  to  the  shutting  down  of 
the  large  plants  on  Woodchopper  Creek. 

TIN  ORE. 

OCCURRENCE. 

Although  the  stream  tin,  which  occurs  with  the  gold,  has  proved 
a considerable  source  of  revenue,  it  is  nowhere  concentrated  to  such 
an  extent  that  it  can  at  present  be  mined  profitably,  except  as  an 
accessory  to  the  gold.  The  bedrock  sources  of  tin,  which  without 
much  doubt  occur  somewhere  within  the  drainage  basin  of  Sullivan 
Creek,  may  contain  workable  deposits  and  will  possibly  support  a 
more  permanent  mining  industry  than  the  placers. 

For  a number  of  years  the  tin  concentrates  were  thrown  aside  by 
the  miners  as  their  nature  and  value  were  not  known,  and  they 
were  considered  a nuisance,  as  they  blocked  the  riffles  and  interfered 
with  the  recovery  of  the  gold.  In  1911  the  true  nature  of  the  tin 
ore  was  pointed  out  to  the  miners  by  H.  M.  Eakin,  of  thp  Geological 
Survey,  during  a reconnaissance  of  this  district,  and  since  that  time 
about  173  tons  of  cassiterite  containing  208,000  pounds  of  tin, 
worth  about  $79,000,  has  been  recovered.  There  was  at  first  little 
incentive  to  save  the  ore,  as  the  miners  generally  did  not  know 
where  it  could  be  sold,  and  the  price  was  not  high  enough  to  make 
its  recovery  worth  while.  Speculators  at  first  offered  5 cents  a 
pound  for  the  concentrates,  and  shipped  them  to  Singapore  and 
Wales  for  smelting.  Since  that  time  the  price  has  advanced  until 
in  1917,  14  and  15  cents  a pound  was  offered  at  Hot  Springs  for  the 
concentrates,  a price  which  netted  the  producer  12  to  13  cents  a 
pound  at  the  mines. 

Since  the  value  of  the  tin  became  known,  most  of  the  operators 
have  recovered  as  much  of  it  as  could  be  readily  won.  The  tin  ore 
is  so  much  lighter  than  the  gold  that  by  a proper  elevation  of  the 
sluice  boxes  the  main  separation  of  cassiterite  and  gold  is  easily 
made.  The  small  amount  of  fine  gold  that  goes  over  with  the  tin 
concentrates  is  recovered  by  cyanidation  or  amalgamation.  The 
most  difficult  operation,  and  one  which  at  present  entails  a con- 
siderable waste  of  high-grade  tin  ore,  is  the  separation  of  the  cassit- 
erite from  other  heavy  concentrates,  principally  pyrite  and  hematite, 
which  are  not  easily  separated  from  the  tin  by  the  ordinary  sluicing 
methods.  The  tin  ore  ranges  in  size  from  particles  the  size  of  beach 
sand  to  boulders  several  inches  in  diameter  and  a few  pieces  nearly 


MINING  IN  THE  HOT  SPRINGS  DISTRICT. 


333 


a foot  in  diameter.  The  large  pieces  are  easily  hand  picked,  and  the 
ore  is  then  put  through  a screen  of  appropriate  mesh  to  remove  the 
pyrite.  The  pyrite  occurs  in  cubes,  the  largest  of  which  are  one- 
eighth  inch  in  diameter,  and  much  of  the  tin  ore  is  in  smaller  pieces. 
It  is  thus  obvious  that  much  of  the  tin  is  not  separable  by  screen- 
ing. At  present  it  is  not  profitable  to  ship  concentrates  which 
contain  any  pyrite,  and  a great  deal  of  tin  is  thus  wasted.  The  fine 
tin  ore  contains  a much  larger  proportion  of  metallic  tin  than  the 
large  pieces,  which  contain  more  quartz.  The  quartz  inclusions  of 
the  large  pieces,  however,  are  reported  to  carry  a considerable 
amount  of  gold,  which  might  partly  compensate  for  the  smaller 
content  of  tin.  The  separation  of  the  tin  ore  from  the  associated 
heavy  concentrates  should  be  easily  accomplished  by  the  use  of 
proper  machinery.  Where  no  pyrite  or  other  objectionable  heavy 
concentrates  are  present  there  is  no  difficulty  in  concentrating  the 
cassiterite. 

EXTENT  AND  SOURCE. 

The  tin  ore  is  practically  confined  to  the  basin  of  Sullivan  Creek, 
and  its  concentrations  in  general  appear  to  coincide  with  the  gold 
placers  of  that  basin.  Stream  tin  has  been  reported  on  several 
streams  below  the  workable  gold  placers,  but  naturally  the  lighter 
minerals  are  carried  farther  downstream.  The  upper  limit  of  the 
tin  ore  on  Sullivan  Creek  and  its  tributaries  appears  to  be  rather  well 
defined.  Evidently  the  bedrock  source  is  somewhere  in  the  present 
basin  of  Sullivan  Creek  and  is  presumably  covered  by  gravels.  Even 
if  the  lodes  of  Moose  Mountain  contain  tin,  they  are  not  believed  to 
be  the  source  of  the  tin  of  Sullivan  Creek,  for  then  the  heaviest  con- 
centrations of  stream- tin  ore  would  normally  occur  just  below  the 
lodes  and  decrease  downhill  toward  Sullivan  Creek.  As  a matter  of 
fact,  little  stream  tin  is  found  between  the  lodes  of  Moose  Mountain 
and  a point  a short  distance  above  Old  Tofty,  where  the  rich  con- 
centrations begin  very  abruptly. 

The  amount  of  tin  ore  that  can  be  won  under  present  conditions 
and  costs  is  not  large.  As  long  as  the  placers  of  Sullivan  Creek 
valley  continue  to  operate  on  their  present  scale,  there  should  be  a 
production  of  25  to  50  tons  of  tin  ore  a year,  or  possibly  twice  that 
amount  if  more  refined  methods  of  recovery  are  used.  In  the  old 
tailings  and  in  the  low-grade  gravels,  however,  several  thousand 
tons  of  tin  concentrates  could  be  recovered  at  a higher  cost  of  pro- 
duction. 

MINING  OPERATIONS. 

The  productive  area  of  the  Hot  Springs  district  extends  from  a 
point  near  Fish  Lake  northeastward  for  about  35  miles  to  Pioneer 
Creek,  a tributary  of  Eureka  Creek.  It  comprises  the  drainage  areas 
of  Boulder,  American,  Sullivan,  and  Baker  creeks. 

115086°— 19 22 


334  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

BAKER  CREEK  VALLEY. 

The  principal  operators  of  the  Baker  Creek  valley  are  Frank  & 
Graham  on  Pioneer  Creek,  a large  tributary  of  Eureka  Creek  that 
enters  from  the  northeast. 

The  south  side  of  the  valley  is  steep  walled  and  contains  no  gravel. 
North  of  the  stream  the  valley  wall  is  comparatively  flat  and  ex- 
tends a long  distance  to  the  summit  of  the  ridge.  Along  the  upper 
part  of  this  slope  What  Cheer  and  other  bars  are  partly  worked  out, 
but  below  the  bars  are  extensive  deposits  of  low-grade  gravels.  The 
entire  creek  is  now  controlled  by  Frank  & Graham,  who  are  working 
the  deposit  by  hydraulic  methods.  Two  cuts  are  worked  at  once,  so 
that  they  can  be  sluiced  on  alternate  days,  and  the  ground  can  be 
thawed  by  exposure  to  the  sun  and  air.  The  gravel  is  shallow,  and 
overburden  and  gravel  are  easily  handled  by  water  from  the  giants. 
Streams  that  cut  across  this  north  slope  of  Pioneer  Creek  contain 
much  richer  concentrations  of  gold.  One  of  the  richest  of  these 
tributary  streams  is  Seattle  Junior  Creek,  which  is  now  being  worked 
by  hydraulic  elevators.  Operations  here,  however,  are  intermittent, 
as  the  elevators  can  be  operated  only  when  there  is  an  ample  supply 
of  water. 

On  Eureka  Creek,  about  2 miles  above  the  mouth  of  Pioneer,  one 
company  which  employs  5 men  operated  a hydraulic  plant,  sluicing 
bench  gravels,  and  also  did  some  prospecting. 

On  Omega  Creek  two  men  drove  a drift  in  the  winter  of  1916-17 
and  dug  an  open  cut  during  the  summer  of  1917.  Water  is  scarce 
but  the  gravels  are  shallow  and  very  easily  worked.  A winter  dump 
was  also  taken  out  on  Chicago  Creek.  One  outfit  that  employed 
four  men  operated  on  Thanksgiving  Creek,  and  sluicing  was  also 
done  on  Rhode  Island  Creek  and  on  the  bench  between  Rhode  Is- 
land and  Glen  creeks. 

SULLIVAN  CREEK. 

The  only  active  mining  on  Cache  Creek  was  a little  sniping  for 
tin.  On  the  Midnight  Sun  and  Abe  Lincoln  claims,  near  Old  Tofty, 
small  plants  recovered  both  tin  and  gold.  On  Tofty  Gulch  and  the 
bench  to  the  west  three  men  reworked  tailings  and  recovered  several 
tons  of  tin  ore  and  considerable  gold.  One  small  plant  was  in  opera- 
tion on  Miller  Gulch,  and  between  Miller  Gulch  and  Woodchopper 
there  were  three  outfits  that  employed  from  50  to  60  men. 

Extensive  deposits  were  located  on  Woodchopper  Creek  in  1914 
and  for  the  two  years  following  were  actively  exploited  by  a large 
force  of  men.  These  mines  were  not  worked  in  1917,  and  there  was 
little  activity  on  Woodchopper  Creek. 


MINING  IN  THE  HOT  SPRINGS  DISTRICT. 


335 


AMERICAN  CREEK. 

American  Creek  is  a comparatively  short  creek  that  flows  into 
Fish  Lake.  Mining  is  carried  on  in  the  upper  part  of  the  valley, 
which  is  floored  with  a deposit  of  shallow  gravel  from  10  to  18  feet 
deep.  Below  the  mines  the  depth  of  the  gravels  increases  at  a steep 
grade  toward  Fish  Lake.  Three  plants  that  employed  about  16 
men  were  in  operation  in  1917,  using  both  open-cut  methods  and 
drifting.  Gravity  water  is  available  for  the  lower  workings,  but 
at  one  plant  it  is  necessary  to  pump  water  to  elevated  sluice  boxes. 

BOULDER  CREEK. 

Boulder  Creek  is  a stream  about  25  miles  long  that  flows  into  the 
swampy  lake  area  west  of  Fish  Lake.  Its  main  branch  heads  on 
the  south  slope  of  Moose  Mountain,  but  several  large  tributaries  enter 
it  from  the  north  and  head  in  the  main  ridge  that  forms  the  main 
divide  between  Yukon  and  Tanana  rivers.  Prospecting  has  been 
carried  on  in  Boulder  Creek  for  a number  of  years,  and  low-grade 
deposits  were  known  to  exist,  but  not  until  recently  were  there  any 
active  mining  operations. 

Ground  was  staked  on  the  main  fork  of  Boulder  Creek,  known 
locally  as  Big  Boulder,  1J  miles  above  the  main  forks,  and  active 
development  work  was  started  in  the  spring  of  1916,  when  work  was 
begun  on  a ditch  which  brings  water  4 miles  from  a point  near  the 
head  of  Boulder  Creek.  The  company  controls  4J  miles  of  ground. 
An  option  was  taken  on  this  ground  by  Cleveland  & Howell  and 
worked  by  them  during  a part  of  the  season  of  1917,  but  work  was 
stopped  in  August,  and  the  owners  continued  to  work  on  a small 
scale. 

The  south  wall  of  the  creek  is  steep  and  contains  no  gravel.  North 
of  the  creek  the  valley  wall  forms  a gentle  slope  which  is  floored  with 
shallow  alluvium,  from  8 to  12  feet  deep,  that  carries  gold.  The  de- 
posits are  low  grade  and  spotted  but  are  extensive  and  easily  worked 
by  hydraulic  methods.  The  gold  occurs  on  this  bench  for  a length  of 
several  miles,  and  the  workable  areas,  where  explored,  have  a width 
of  1,200  feet.  Over  200,000  feet  of  bedrock  was  cleaned  in  1917. 

One  man  was  prospecting  on  Little  Boulder,  the  main  tributary 
of  the  creek.  The  stream  was  diverted  from  its  course  and  carried 
for  half  a mile  through  the  flat  at  the  mouth  of  the  creek.  The  al- 
luvium is  from  6 to  12  feet  deep  and  consists  of  silt  that  carries  layers 
and  lenses  of  angular  slate  fragments. 

Trail  Creek  is  the  first  tributary  of  Boulder  that  enters  from  the 
north  below  the  main  forks.  On  one  of  its  branches,  known  as  Dry 
Creek,  one  plant  was  operating  in  1917.  The  gravels  are  shallow  and 
angular.  Where  exposed  by  the  cut  they  are  from  3 to  6 feet 
deep  and  are  composed  of  black  slate,  graywacke,  quartzite,  and 
schist,  rocks  similar  to  those  exposed  on  bedrock.  Water  is  not 
plentiful,  but  the  ground  is  easily  handled. 


* 


• • 


TIN  DEPOSITS  OF  THE  RUBY  DISTRICT. 


By  Theodore  Chapin. 


The  following  statement  is  based  on  a hasty  reconnaissance  of  the 
Ruby  district  in  1917  to  determine  the  possibility  of  the  production 
of  tin.  Although  stream  tin  occurs  at  a number  of  places  in  the 
gold  placers,  there  has  been  only  a slight  output.  Cassiterite  has 
been  noted  in  the  concentrates  from  Long,  Spruce,  Short,  Tamarack, 
Midnight,  Trail,  Monument,  Birch,  Ruby,  Poorman,  Flat,  and  Green- 
stone creeks.  The  cassiterite  is  plentiful  at  few  places,  and  at  no 
place  has  enough  been  found  to  pay  for  mining  it,  except  as  an  acces- 
sory to  the  gold.  The  gravels  on  Midnight  Creek  have  been  pros- 
pected for  tin,  and  14  sacks  of  concentrates  were  shipped  to  Singapore. 
This  shipment  consisted  of  1,037  pounds  of  ore  which  assayed  52.2 
per  cent,  or  537  pounds,  of  metallic  tin.  The  net  return  of  $156.22 
from  ore  recovered  from  6,000  square  feet  of  bedrock  gives  a yield 
of  about  2J  cents  a square  foot.  Evidently  the  amount  of  tin  recov- 
ered from  even  the  richest  tin  placers  now  known  is  so  small  that 
even  the  shallow  gravels  can  not  be  worked  profitably  for  the  tin 
alone.  At  best  it  adds  but  little  to  the  profit  derived  from  the  gold. 
It  is  also  evident  that  the  tin  ore  is  so  disseminated  that  it  will  be 
very  difficult  to  recover  any  large  quantity,  although  a few  tons  may 
be  saved  each  year  by  the  placer  gold  miners. 


337 


■ 


' 


THE  GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  THE  TOLSTOI 

DISTRICT. 


By  George  L.  Harrington. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  Tolstoi  district  as  considered  in  this  report  includes  an  area 
about  12  miles  wide  by  20  long  that  lies  on  the  northwest  flank  of 
Mount  Hurst.  The  drainage  from  the  district  reaches  the  Innoko 
mainly  through  Tolstoi  and  Dishna  rivers. 

A time  and  compass  traverse  was  made  of  the  Dishna  River  from 
its  mouth  to  the  mouth  of  the  Tolstoi,  and  thence  up  the  Tolstoi  to 
Madison  Creek.  Early  in  July,  1917,  two  weeks  were  spent  in  the 
vicinity  of  Tolstoi  in  collecting  the  data  upon  which  this  report  and 
a portion  of  the  accompanying  geologic  sketch  map  (PI.  IX)  are 
based. 

TOPOGRAPHY. 

Mount  Hurst,  the  highest  point  in  the  area,  reaches  an  elevation 
of  nearly  3,000  feet  and  gives  a maximum  relief  to  the  district  of 
approximately  2,500  feet.  Northeastward  from  Mount  Hurst  ex- 
tends a range  of  hills  which  have  elevations  between  1,200  and  1,800 
feet  above  sea  level,  becoming  lower  as  they  approach  the  Innoko 
to  the  northeast.  West  of  these  hills  the  country  presents  a much 
less  rugged  aspect,  and  low,  broad,  flat-topped  hills  between  which 
stretch  wide  valleys  are  the  characteristic  features,  though  some  of 
the  minor  streams  are  rather  sharply  incised.  Northward  toward 
the  Innoko  there  appears  to  be  a succession  of  low  hills,  between 
which  there  are  wide  swampy  areas  that  merge  on  the  west  with  the 
lowlands  of  Innoko  and  Dishna  rivers. 

Most  of  the  area  under  discussion  lies  within  the  basin  of  Tolstoi 
River,  and  the  high  ridge  of  hills  which  culminates  in  Mount  Hurst 
forms  the  divide  between  the  Tolstoi  drainage  and  that  of  the  upper 
Innoko. 

The  trend  of  the  drainage  when  taken  in  conjunction  with  the 
geologic  map,  indicates  that  the  northerly  course  of  a number  of 
streams  is  due  to  bedrock  structure.  Modifications,  however,  have 
been  caused  by  alluviation  or  by  lateral  erosion,  the  latter  in  places 
where  the  streams  flow  on  bedrock  as  well  as  where  the  banks  are  of 
unconsolidated  material. 


339 


340 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 


Numerous  lakes  are  a characteristic  feature  of  the  poorly  drained 
lowlands.  They  are  usually  small  in  area  and  occupy  slight  depres- 
sions in  unconsolidated  sediments  rather  than  depressions  in  bed- 
rock. They  lie  at  higher  elevations  than  the  oxbow  lakes  that  are 
formed  by  changes  in  stream  channels,  and  they  are  probably  the 
composite  result  of  a number  of  factors  which  include  soil  flow,  the 
damming  of  sluggish  streams  by  the  growth  of  vegetation,  and  the 
thawing  of  lenses  of  ground  ice. 

CLIMATE. 

Climatic  conditions  in  this  district  are  essentially  the  same  as  those 
found  elsewhere  within  the  lower  Yukon  drainage  basin.  Winters 
are  somewhat  more  moderate  than  in  the  Upper  Yukon,  although 
they  are  both  long  and  cold. 

Fair  days  in  summer  are  usually  very  pleasant,  but  their  number 
varies  from  year  to  year,  as  do  the  number  of  rainy  days  and  the 
amount  of  rainfall.  Usually,  however,  the  later  part  of  the  summer 
has  the  greater  precipitation.  During  July,  1917,  the  rains  were 
unusually  heavy  and  frequent,  so  that  the  Tolstoi  reached  and  main- 
tained a stage  of  water  for  about  10  days  comparable  with  that  of 
the  normal  spring  high  water.  In  one  rain  during  this  period  there 
was  a precipitation  of  more  than  2 inches  in  a few  hours.  In  the 
high  hills  near  Mount  Hurst,  the  rainfall  is  apparently  greater  than 
in  the  low  areas  along  the  lower  courses  of  Tolstoi  and  Dishna  rivers, 
as  these  hills  were  frequently  hidden  in  clouds  when  the  sky  was 
fairly  clear  over  the  valleys. 

VEGETATION. 

A heavy  carpet  of  sphagnum  mosses  covers  all  but  the  highest  peaks 
and  steep  slopes  or  heavily  timbered  areas.  Where  conditions  are  favor- 
able, in  areas  with  good  drainage,  grasses  make  up  a greater  propor- 
tion of  the  vegetal  covering.  Alders,  willows,  and  dwarf  birch  form 
the  low  growth  of  minor  stream  valleys  and  of  the  hillsides,  and  the 
larger  species  of  willows,  together  with  spruce,  tamarack,  cotton- 
wood, and  some  birch,  make  up  the  major  growth  along  the  Dishna 
and  Tolstoi  and  their  larger  tributaries,  where  thawed  and  drained 
ground  present  conditions  most  favorable  for  their  best  development. 
The  poorly  drained  interstream  areas  are  occupied  by  a scattered 
and  stunted  growth  of  spruce.  Tamarack  may  occasionally  be  found 
associated  with  it.  Good  timber  occurs  on  the  flanks  of  Mount 
Hurst  up  to  1,800  or  2,000  feet.  Though  this  timber  is  mostly 
spruce,  there  are  some  patches  of  tamarack  and  a few  birches. 

At  Tolstoi  there  were  gardens  where  the  more  rapidly  maturing 
vegetables  were  raised.  The  amount  so  produced,  however,  was 
only  a small  proportion  of  the  total  quantities  consumed,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  radishes  and  lettuce,  of  which  practically  the  entire  consump- 
tion was  of  local  production. 


U.  S.  GEOLOGICAL  SURVEY 


BULLETIN  692  PLATE  IX 


Scale  500,000 
o 5 


GEOLOGIC  SKETCH  MAP  OF  THE  TOLSTOI  DISTRICT. 


EXPLANATION 

SEDIMENTARY  ROCKS 


Unconsolidated  silt  sand, 
and  gravel 
(of fluvial,  lacustrine  or  marine , 
and  littoral  origin) 


Sandstone,  slate,  phyllite, 
and  conglomerate 


ii 


Chert  and  tuff 

(may  include  some  Cretaceous 
sediments) 


Limestone,  including  some 
slate  and  phyllite 


Slate,  phyllite,  tuff,  chert, 
greenstone,  diorite,  and  quartz 
monzonite 

IGNEOUS  ROCKS 


Soda  rhyolite 


Andesite 


Diorite 


Quartz  monzonite 


Greenstones 
(mainly  metamorphosed 
andesite  flows  ana  tuffs ) 


S3 


Ups?., 


mu? 

WtftniTr  of i i a, m 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  TOLSTOI  DISTRICT.  341 


ANIMAL  LIFE. 

Black  bear  are  said  to  be  fairly  common  in  this  region,  and  one 
was  seen  on  the  Dishna.  Caribou  are  only  occasionally  seen.  Smaller 
animals  are  numerous. 

Geese  and  ducks  were  seen  along  the  streams,  and  the  swampy 
areas  afford  ideal  breeding  places  for  them.  Ptarmigan  are  found 
on  the  higher  hills  in  small  flocks,  though  in  lesser  numbers  than  in 
former  years. 

Grayling  and  trout  are  found  in  the  streams  and  may  be  taken 
with  a fly.  Kijig  salmon  ascend  the  Dishna  and  sometimes  ascend 
the  Tolstoi  also.  The  smaller  species  of  salmon  were  taken  in  nets 
in  considerable  number  at  the  mouth  of  Mastodon  Creek. 

ECONOMIC  FACTORS  AFFECTING  MINING. 

In  the  vicinity  of  the  creeks,  where  there  has  been  more  or  less 
prospecting,  a scattered  growth  of  stunted  spruce  has  afforded  fuel 
for  the  small  plants  used  for  thawing.  With  an  increase  in  magni- 
tude of  operations,  however,  this  type  of  fuel  is  unsatisfactory  and 
uneconomical.  In  addition,  it  is  necessary  to  have  larger  timber  for 
use  in  mining.  For  the  operations  on  Boob  Creek  cordwood  and 
timber  were  hauled  a distance  of  2 to  4 miles  from  Tolstoi  River  and 
from  Mastodon  Creek.  On  other  creeks,  except  those  directly  tribu- 
tary to  Tolstoi  River,  where  mining  may  be  carried  on,  even  greater 
difficulty  in  obtaining  fuel  will  be  found,  and  it  is  probable  that  for 
large  operations  it  will  be  necessary  to  use  liquid  fuels. 

Such  fuels  can  be  carried  by  gasoline  scows  up  Tolstoi  River  as  far 
as  Tolstoi  and  possibly  still  farther  under  favorable  conditions  of 
high  water.  Winter  transportation  from  Tolstoi  River  would  prob- 
ably prove  most  economical.  Under  present  conditions  even  winter 
transportation  to  the  upper  portion  of  Madison  Creek  costs  about 
5 cents  a pound  from  Tolstoi  River.  Supplies  can  be  brought  by 
water  from  Holy  Cross  to  the  mouth  of  the  Tolstoi  for  2 or  3 cents 
a pound. 

Navigation  to  this  point  is  comparatively  free  from  difficulties 
except  in  unusually  low  stages  of  water  on  Innoko  and  Dishna  rivers. 
On  Tolstoi  River  navigation  is  not  practicable  for  power  boats  at 
low  stages. 

Wages  during  the  summer  of  1917  were  about  the  same  as  at  other 
Alaskan  camps,  $5  a day  of  8 hours  with  board  being  paid  for  under- 
ground work  and  $6  a day  of  10  hours  with  board  for  surface  work. 
No  natives  were  employed  in  mining  but  some  worked  at  the  saw- 
mill at  the  mouth  of  Tolstoi  River. 

The  early  summer  of  1917  was  unusually  wet,  yet  on  many  of  the 
smaller  streams  where  prospecting  was  being  carried  on  there  was 
but  little  surplus  of  water  over  that  required  for  sluicing.  In  normal 


342 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


seasons  it  would  appear  that  there  will  be  a scarcity  of  water  unless 
ditches  are  built  to  bring  in  water  from  two  or  more  streams,  or 
dependence  must  be  placed  either  on  the  water  supply  furnished  by 
the  melting  snow  in  spring  or  on  that  afforded  intermittently  by 
rains  during  the  summer.  An  intermittent  supply  may  be  obtained 
by  damming  and  “ splashing.” 

As  the  creek  gradients  are  low  in  the  lower  courses,  some  difficulty 
may  be  experienced  in  securing  dump  room  and  grade  for  sluice  boxes 
without  building  trestles. 

GEOLOGY. 

The  geology  of  the  region  in  general  is  simple,  though  its  interpre- 
tation is  at  first  somewhat  difficult  because  outcrops  of  the  forma- 
tions are  not  everywhere  common,  especially  on  the  lower  hills  and 
gentler  slopes.  Vegetation  covers  these  areas,  and  the  nature  of 
the  underlying  rocks  is  revealed  only  by  the  material  taken  from 
prospect  holes,  by  isolated  projecting  rocks,  or  by  exposures  here 
and  there  along  stream  courses.  The  trend  of  the  structural  fea- 
tures, however,  affords  considerable  help  in  geologic  mapping  and 
was  relied  on  where  other  data  were  lacking. 

PALEOZOIC  ROCKS. 

The  most  conspicuous  of  the  Paleozoic  rocks  is  a limestone,  which 
forms  the  high  conical  hills  on  the  northwest  and  west  flanks  of  Mount 
Hurst  and  extends  southwestward  nearly  to  Tolstoi  River.1  It 
crosses  Hurst  Creek  and  appears  at  the  base  of  the  hills  on  the  east 
side  of  this  stream  a short  distance  below  the  now  abandoned  Jap 
Roadhouse.  A small  outcrop  lies  between  the  forks  of  Mastodon 
and  Mammoth  creeks,  and  another  appears  on  the  south  side  of 
Myers  Creek.  Limestone  pebbles  are  found  in  the  gravels  of  Iron 
Creek,  and  this  rock  is  said  to  crop  out  on  the  north  side  of  the  creek. 
It  is  not  known  whether  or  not  it  extends  north  of  Madison  Creek. 

Schistose  and  siliceous  phases  of  the  limestone  appear  in  the  vicin- 
ity of  Mount  Hurst,  and  the  siliceous  rock  is  finely  crystalline.  Else- 
where the  rock  appears  to  show  but  slight  effects  of  crystallization. 

Areas  of  phyllites  or  schistose  argillitic  rocks  are  associated  with 
the  schistose  limestone,  but  they  are  comparatively  small,  and  on 
account  of  their  similarity  in  composition  can  not  everywhere  be 
readily  separated  from  some  of  the  Cretaceous  argillitic  rocks  which 
have  been  metamorphosed.  As  fossils  have  not  been  found,  it  is 
not  possible  to  make  a definite  statement  of  the  age  of  the  limestone. 
Because  of  their  lithologic  similarities  the  limestone  and  associated 
rocks  are  considered  to  be  of  late  Carboniferous  age  and  to  be  cor- 
related with  similar  rocks  on  the  lower  Kuskokwim  and  on  the  lower 
Yukon  near  Marshall. 


i Maddren,  A.  G.,  oral  communication. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  TOLSTOI  DISTRICT.  343 
PALEOZOIC  OR  MESOZOIC  ROCKS. 

GREENSTONES,  GREENSTONE  TUFFS,  AND  CHERTS. 

Although  the  rocks  of  this  group  are  of  widely  diverse  types  they 
are  believed  to  be  of  like  origin  and  to  be  closely  related  in  age.  They 
have  been  separated,  however,  in  mapping,  the  tuffs  and  cherts  being 
grouped  together  and  the  greenstones  shown  separately. 

They  occur  chiefly  on  the  northwest  flank  of  Mount  Hurst  and  along 
the  divide  between  Tolstoi  and  upper  Innoko  rivers,  at  the  heads  of 
Mastodon  and  Madison  creeks,  and  probably  also  between  Hurst 
Creek  and  upper  Innoko  River,  south  of  the  head  of  Mastodon  Creek, 
in  the  area  mapped  as  undifferentiated.  Small  areas  are  also  known 
from  other  parts  of  the  district,  and  cherts  appear  on  the  north  side 
of  Mastodon  Creek  about  a mile  northeast  of  Tolstoi.  As  consider- 
able faulting  and  folding  were  produced  by  the  intrusions  which  form 
Mount  Hurst  and  by  the  monzonite  between  Mastodon  and  Madison 
creeks,  numerous  other  small  patches  of  these  rocks  representing 
fault  blocks  will  probably  be  found  elsewhere  in  the  district. 

Andesite  rocks  constitute  a large  portion  of  the  greenstones,  includ- 
ing most  of  the  dense  fine-grained  dark-greenish  tuffs  between  Hurst 
Creek  and  Tolstoi  River  and  the  more  schistose  phases,  which  proba- 
bly represent  altered  flows,  at  the  head  of  Mastodon  Creek. 

In  addition  to  these  two  types  other  igneous  rocks,  including  ba- 
saltic flows  and  the  even  more  basic  intrusives,  which  are  probably 
the  source  of  platinum  in  this  district,  occur  in  a number  of  small 
areas  in  the  vicinity  of  Mount  Hurst  as  well  as  to  the  north  of  Mas- 
todon Creek.  Their  areal  extent  is  not  known,  for  they  are  not  con- 
spicuous in  places  where  they  are  associated  with  the  greenstones  and, 
as  has  already  been  pointed  out,  an  additional  difficulty  in  mapping 
is  caused  by  the  widespread  distribution  of  the  Quaternary  deposits,- 
which  effectually  conceals  the  underlying  bedrock.  Pyroxenites 
occur  in  close  association  with  the  greenstones.  They  are  dark, 
coarsely  granular,  nonporphyritic  rocks  that  consist  mainly  of  augite 
and  lesser  amounts  of  diallage.  In  some  platiniferous  placer  areas 
the  source  of  the  platinum  has  been  found  in  rocks  of  this  type. 

The  cherts  occur  north  of  Mastodon  Creek  and  along  the  ridge  lead- 
ing to  Mount  Hurst  west  of  Hurst  Creek.  They  may  be  either  light 
or  dark,  ranging  from  light  horn-colored  to  dark  greenish  gray,  and 
may  resemble  some  of  the  phases  of  the  tuffs  with  which  they  are 
closely  associated. 

No  definite  age  determination  has  yet  been  made  of  these  rocks, 
but  they  overlie  limestones  which  have  been  tentatively  assigned  to 
the  Carboniferous.  Chert  cobbles  and  pebbles  are  found  in  a con- 
glomerate which  overlies  the  greenstones  and  which  marks  the  base 
of  the  Cretaceous  in  this  district.  The  age  of  the  group  is  therefore 
very  late  Paleozoic  or  early  Mesozoic.  It  is  not  certain  whether  the 
basic  intrusive  rocks  are  of  this  age  or  younger. 


344  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

CRETACEOUS  ROCKS. 

In  the  Tolstoi  district  Cretaceous  rocks  have  considerable  extent, 
appearing  on  both  sides  of  Tolstoi  River  and  on  the  north  side  of  both 
Mastodon  and  Madison  creeks.  Small  patches  of  those  rocks  also 
appear  along  the  lower  part  of  the  ridge  west  of  Hurst  Creek,  and 
they  probably  form  the  bedrock  of  Boob  Creek  and  of  the  area  be- 
tween Boob  Creek  and  Tolstoi  River. 

The  lithology  shows  considerable  variation.  Wherever  the  base 
of  these  rocks  was  observed,  as  along  the  ridge  between  Hurst  and 
Ledge  creeks  and  also  north  of  Mastodon  Creek,  it  is  a conglomerate 
composed  of  chert  pebbles  that  rests  on  the  irregular  surface  of  the 
underlying  cherts.  The  sandstones  show  a greater  diversity  of  mate- 
rials, including  quartz,  feldspar,  fragments  of  carbonaceous  rocks,  and 
minerals  of  probably  secondary  origin,  such  as  chlorite  and  calcite. 
If  ferromagnesian  minerals,  such  as  hornblende,  augite,  or  olivine^ 
were  originally  present,  they  have  now  been  so  completely  altered  to 
secondary  minerals  as  to  be  unrecognizable.  The  feldspars  are  also 
undeterminable  on  account  of  kaolinization. 

A considerable  proportion  of  the  Cretaceous  sediments  are  of  the 
fine-grained  argillaceous  type  and  have  been  metamorphosed  to  form 
slates.  Intrusion  by  the  dioritic  mass  of  Mount  Hurst  as  well  as  by 
the  diorites  on  the  headwaters  of  Madison  Creek,  has  produced  phyl- 
litic  phases  of  some  of  these  rocks,  so  that  they  are  not  readily  dis- 
tinguishable from  the  older  phyllites  that  are  associated  with  the 
Paleozoic  limestone.  Both  the  slates  and  phyllites  are  cut  by  nu- 
merous small  quartz  veins,  which  are  probably  the  source  of  the 
gold.  Some  of  the  veined  slates  show  pyritization. 

No  fossils  were  found  in  the  Tolstoi  district,  so  that  correlations 
must  be  based  on  stratigraphic  and  lithologic  features.  These  rocks 
are  essentially  similar  to  the  slates  and  sandstones  in  near-by  regions 
which  are  of  known  1 Cretaceous  age  and  are  therefore  considered  as 
belonging  to  that  period. 

TERTIARY  IGNEOUS  ROCKS. 

QUARTZ  MONZONITE. 

Pinkish  quartz  monzonite,  which  is  locally  known  as  granite,  occurs 
along  the  ridge  between  the  Madison  and  the  Mastodon  drainage  at 
the  head  of  Eldorado  Creek,  between  Myers  and  Iron  creeks,  and  also 
between  Iron  and  Madison  creeks.  The  areas  mapped  as  monzonite 
may  also  contain  some  sedimentary  rocks,  as  between  Iron  and 
Madison  creeks,  where  limestones  occur. 


i Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  and  Harrington,  G.  L.,  Mineral  resources  of  the  Ruby-Kuskokwim  region,  Alaska: 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  642,  p.  233,  1916. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  TOLSTOI  DISTRICT.  345 

It  has  been  pointed  out  in  a previous  bulletin  1 that  elsewhere  in 
the  Ruby-Kuskokwim  region  there  is  a close  genetic  connection  be- 
tween the  auriferous  mineralization  and  the  monzonitic  rocks.  In 
the  Tolstoi  district  this  relation  also  probably  holds,  and  the  occur- 
rence of  gold  placers  is  to  be  attributed  to  these  intrusives.  There  is 
said  to  be  some  residual  placer  gold  on  the  slopes  of  gills  made  up  of 
the  monzonite,  and  the  auriferous  quartz  veins,  which  occur  in  the 
near-by  areas  of  sedimentary  rocks,  are  believed  to  be  derived  from 
the  monzonite  intrusion. 

The  quartz  monzonite  is  made  up  of  quartz,  orthoclase,  and  plagi- 
oclase  in  about  equal  amounts,  together  with  hornblende  and  biotite. 
Apatite  and  magnetite  are  present  as  minor  accessory  minerals. 

A correlation  with  similar  rocks  elsewhere  in  the  Ruby-Kuskokwim 
region  2 would  establish  a Tertiary  age  for  the  quartz  monzonite. 

diorite. 

Diorites  are  perhaps  more  widely  spread  than  the  geologic  map 
indicates,  for  it  is  extremely  likely  that  in  the  area  of  undifferentiated 
rocks  east  of  Hurst  Creek  a number  of  the  higher  peaks  are  composed 
of  this  type  of  rock.  There  are  also  numerous  small  outcrops  in  the 
greenstone  areas,  which  are  too  small  to  represent  on  the  map.  These 
outcrops  represent  dikes  from  the  larger  batholithic  intrusives  which 
form  Mount  Hurst  and  appear  on  Joffre  Creek.  From  the  relations 
of  the  diorite  and  greenstone  at  the  head  of  Joffre  Creek,  it  appears 
likely  that  even  where  the  diorite  is  not  exposed  it  lies  below  the  green- 
stone where  that  rock  appears  between  Mount  Hurst  and  Madison 
Creek.  There  are  also  dikelike  intrusions  of  considerable  extent  in  the 
Cretaceous  sediments,  in  the  limestones,  and  in  the  greenstones 
and  greenstone  tuffs.  In  the  greenstones  especially,  the  similarity 
of  appearance  on  weathered  surfaces  makes  a determination  of  the 
extent  of  these  intrusions  difficult. 

Some  differences  in  the  appearance  of  the  diorite  are  due  partly  to 
the  amount  of  weathering  that  the  rock  has  undergone  and  partly 
to  differences  in  composition.  Weathering  gives  the  rock  a much 
darker  and  greener  color  than  it  has  when  unaltered,  owing  to  the 
formation  of  secondary  silicates  and  ferromagnesian  minerals,  such 
as  zoisite,  chlorite,  and  hornblende,  as  well  as  hydrous  iron  minerals. 

Where  the  rock  is  unaltered  its  constituents  are  plagioclase  feldspar, 
biotite,  and  augite,  together  with  a minor  and  varying  amount  of 
quartz.  Apatite  and  magnetite  are  everywhere  present,  the  mag- 
netite varying  considerably  in  amount.  In  some  places  ilmenite 
appears  to  take  the  place  of  some  of  the  magnetite  and  occurs  in  some- 
what larger  grains.  The  feldspars  range  from  albite  oligoclase  to 
labradorite,  but  the  mean  appears  to  be  oligoclase  andesine. 


1 Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  and  Harrington,  G.  L.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  235,  264,  1916. 

2 Idem,  p.  235. 


346 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 


Possibly  the  basic  granular  rocks  that  are  associated  with  the 
greenstones,  and  from  which  the  platinum  is  derived,  are  differentiates 
from  the  dioritic  magma,  but  confirmatory  evidence  on  this  point  is 
lacking,  although  the  diorites  in  the  greenstones  are  somewhat  more 
basic  than  either  the  main  mass  of  Mount  Hurst  or  the  intrusive 
mass  on  Joffre  Creek. 

Although  gold  has  been  found  on  Joffre  and  Madison  creeks,  in  the 
diorite,  the  gold  may  not  have  been  derived  from  deposits  which  owe 
their  origin  to  the  intrusion  of  the  monzonite. 

Age  determinations  are  only  possible  where  relations  to  both 
younger  and  older  rocks  are  known.  The  diorite  cuts  Cretaceous 
rocks  and  therefore  is  post-Cretaceous  and  probably  early  Tertiary. 
Its  age  with  relation  to  the  monzonite  is  not  known  but  both  are 
assumed  to  have  been  introduced  during  the  same  period  of  igneous 
activity. 

SODA  RHYOLITE  AND  ANDESITE. 

North  and  northwest  of  Mount  Hurst  low  flat-topped  hills  appear  to 
merge  into  the  lowlands  of  the  Dishna  and  the  Innoko.  So  far  as  is 
known,  these  hills  are  made  up  of  rhyolite  flows  and  tuffs,  though 
andesite  is  present  in  dikes  and  flows  and  possibly  also  in  tuffs.  They 
are  mapped  separately,  but  the  rhyolite  areas  may  include  some 
andesite,  and  the  area  mapped  as  andesite  may  contain  some  rhyolite. 

The  rhyolites  are  light-colored  rocks  and  at  a distance  present 
an  appearance  like  that  of  limestones  with  a slight  buff  tinge.  In 
thin  section  they  are  seen  to  be  fine-grained  porphyritic  rocks,  the 
phenocrysts  being  quartz  and  the  plagioclase  feldspar.  The  quartz 
is  usually  of  the  smoky  variety.  Albite  is  the  principal  plagioclase, 
but  the  feldspars  range  between  albite  and  oligoclase.  Biotite  is 
usually  present  in  a few  foils,  which  are  also  sometimes  apparent  in 
the  hand  specimen.  Less  commonly  hornblende  may  be  seen  in  the 
section.  Magnetite  may  also  be  present.  For  the  most  part  the 
groundmass  is  very  fine  grained  and  almost  glassy  in  appearance. 
The  flow  or  tuffaceous  character  of  the  rock  is  apparent  from  the 
typical  texture  seen  in  thin  section. 

In  the  hand  specimen  the  andesites  are  fight  to  dark  greenish  gray 
and  can  be  readily  distinguished  from  the  rhyolites  on  account  of  their 
color.  Where  the  andesites  are  in  the  field  they  are  also  much  darker, 
and  they  are  usually  more  completely  covered  by  vegetation  than  the 
rhyolites.  Associated  with  the  flows  or  dikes  are  minor  areas  of 
dense  fine-grained  rocks  which  resemble  argillites  in  appearance  but 
which  are  probably  fine-grained  tuffs  or  volcanic  muds.  The  rhyolites 
appear  to  make  up  the  entire  hilltop  and  in  many  places  the  steep 
slope  to  the  flat  of  Tolstoi  River,  but  the  andesites  north  of  Tolstoi 
appear  at  an  elevation  below  the  crest  of  the  main  ridge  in  small  sub- 
sidiary ridges  which  trend  northeastward  in  conformity  with  the 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  TOLSTOI  DISTRICT.  347 

general  structural  trend.  Between  Eldorado  and  Mastodon  creeks 
the  andesites  occupy  higher  positions  on  the  ridges,  which  correspond 
to  those  occupied  by  the  rhyolites  farther  west. 

In  thin  section  andesine  feldspar  appears  to  be  the  chief  con- 
stituent of  the  rock,  making  up  the  phenocrysts  as  well  as  a consid- 
erable amount  of  the  very  fine  grained  groundmass.  Phenocrysts 
of  augite  are  also  present  in  places.  Magnetite  occurs  in  small  grains 
in  widely  varying  amount.  Much  of  the  groundmass  is  altered  and 
indeterminable  and  has  been  converted  in  part  to  secondary  hydrous 
iron  oxides,  which  give  a general  brown  appearance  to  the  section. 

It  is  not  possible  to  make  exact  age  determinations  of  these  rocks, 
although  some  generalization  may  be  made.  There  is  a suggestion 
as  to  the  relative  ages  of  the  andesite  and  rhyolite  afforded  by  the 
form  of  the  outcrops  of  the  andesite  and  by  the  relative  position  of 
the  two  series.  The  ridges  north  of  Tolstoi  may  represent  the  up- 
turned eroded  edges  of  flows  the  source  of  which  lay  eastward, 
although  this  is  by  no  means  proved.  If  this  supposition  is  correct 
the  rhyolites  which  lie  to  the  west  of  the  andesites  flowed  out  over 
and  are  younger  than  the  andesites. 

In  other  areas  in  western  Alaska  rocks  of  one  or  the  other  type.are 
rather  widely  distributed.  The  exact  lithologic  equivalent  of  the 
rhyolite  was  seen  on  the  north  bank  of  the  Innoko  about  halfway 
between  Shageluk  Slough  and  the  mouth  of  Iditarod  River.  Collier1 
reports  that  both  andesites  and  rhyolites  cut  the  Cretaceous  rocks 
between  Ruby  and  Holy  Cross.  Andesitic  and  dacitic  dikes,  tuffs, 
and  flows  were  found  by  the  writer2  to  have  a considerable  extent 
along  Anvik,  Stuyahok,  and  Bonsila  rivers,  as  well  as  in  places  along 
the  Yukon  between  Anvik  and  Andreafski.  At  these  occurrences 
they  are  younger  than  the  Cretaceous  rocks  with  which  they  are 
sometimes  associated  and  are  older  than  the  late  Tertiary  or  Quater- 
nary basalts  of  the  lower  Yukon.  In  other  portions  of  the  Ruby- 
Kuskokwim  region  both  rhyolites  and  andesites  have  been  found3 
which  are  of  late  Cretaceous  or  Tertiary  age,  and  these  are  to  be 
correlated  with  the  corresponding  rock  types  in  the  Tolstoi  area. 

QUATERNARY  DEPOSITS. 

Unconsolidated  material  which  is  mainly  of  Quaternary  age  covers 
much  of  the  lowland  area  of  the  Tolstoi  district  and  extends  nearly 
to  the  heads  of  many  of  the  smaller  streams  and  occupies  the  inter- 
stream ridges.  This  material  is  in  part  alluvial  but  probably  is  also 
in  part  of  marine  or  lacustrine  origin,  and  the  flat-topped  hills  at 

1 Collier,  A.  J.,  unpublished  notes. 

2 Harrington,  G.  L.,  The  Anvik-Andreafski  region,  Alaska  (including  the  Marshall  district):  U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  683,  pi.  2, 1919. 

3 Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  and  Harrington,  G.  L.,  Mineral  resources  of  the  Ruby-Kuskokwim  region,  Alaska: 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  642,  p.  236,  1916. 


348 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


elevations  of  800  to  1 ,000  feet  may  be  wave-cut  terraces  upon  which 
these  sediments  were  deposited.  For  the  most  part,  the  sediments 
are  thin  and  in  large  measure  have  been  removed  or  have  been  left 
in  only  small  areas.  In  the  lowlands  the  former  stream  courses 
were  filled  with  gravels,  sands,  and  silts,  but  upon  the  reestablish- 
ment of  drainage  systems  after  the  period  of  inundation  a large 
amount  of  the  unconsolidated  material  was  removed.  Between 
Tolstoi  and  Boob  Creek  prospect  holes  which  have  been  sunk  to  a 
depth  of  125  feet  pass  through  about  60  feet  of  muck  and  ice  which 
overlies  an  equal  thickness  of  silts,  sands,  and  gravels. 

In  the  silts  there  are  large  amounts  of  ice,  in  sheets  rather  than  in 
wedges.  These  ice  sheets  appear  to  contain  different  amounts  of 
silt  and  bands  of  clear  ice  from  an  inch  or  less  to  several  feet  in 
thickness,  alternating  with  bands  of  frozen  siltlike  material,  which 
show  variations  in  thickness  equally  great.  Possibly  some  of  the 
numerous  small  lakes  in  the  flatter,  low-lying  areas  are  due  to  depres- 
sions caused  by  the  melting  of  ice  layers  underneath. 

The  gold  and  platinum  content  of  the  gravels  has  been  concentrated 
by  either  the  action  of  waves  on  beaches  or  by  the  current  of  streams, 
or  there  may  have  been  a reconcentration  by  streams  from  older 
deposits  formed  along  beaches  or  streams. 

A somewhat  unusual  feature  in  connection  with  the  placer  gravels 
is  that  a short  distance  above  the  gravels  there  are  fragments  of 
vegetation  and  tufts  of  grass  which  resemble  the  niggerheads  on  the 
present  surface.  Their  presence  is  easily  explained.  There  is  a 
covering  of  silts  and  sheet  ice  over  practically  all  the  gentler  lower 
slopes,  and  when  a small  or  intermittent  stream  has  cut  through  the 
surface  mat  of  vegetation  it  rapidly  erodes  the  silt  and  ice  to  the 
gravels  or  to  bedrock.  By  sloughing  of  the  steep  sides  vegetation 
may  reach  the  bottom  of  the  cut,  20  feet  or  more  in  depth.  By 
continuous  sloughing,  or  by  repeated  freezing  and  thawing  in  fall 
and  winter,  the  crevice  is  completely  filled  with  ice  and  muck,  and 
the  following  year  the  stream  may  follow  a different  course. 

The  occurrence  of  tusks,  teeth,  and  other  bones  of  Pleistocene 
mammals  in  the  placer  gravels  indicates  the  age  of  the  deposits, 
although  it  is  possible  that  later  reworking  has  taken  place  and  that 
some  of  the  placers  are  later  than  the  Pleistocene. 

The  Quaternary  history  of  this  region  has  not  been  completely 
worked  out,  so  that  it  is  not  possible  to  differentiate  between  the 
Pleistocene  and  Recent  deposits  on  account  of  their  similarity  and 
the  grading  upward  of  one  into  the  other. 

The  deposits  which  are  definitely  of  Recent  age  embrace  stream 
alluvium,  talus,  and  other  detritus  produced  through  the  action  of 
frost  and  other  processes  of  weathering  and  the  vegetal  accumulations 
which  cover  large  areas  throughout  the  interior  of  Alaska. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  TOLSTOI  DISTRICT.  349 
MINERAL  RESOURCES. 

HISTORY  OF  MINING  DEVELOPMENT. 

The  earlier  history  of  the  region  has  been  given  in  the  report  of 
Maddren1  on  the  mining  developments  in  the  Innoko  basin  to  the 
time  of  his  investigations  in  1908.  Some  additional  notes  have  been 
contributed  by  Eakin2  as  the  result  of  a reconnaissance  trip  from 
Ruby  to  Iditarod  in  1912. 

Incident  to  the  stampede  to  the  Innoko,  in  the  vicinity  of  Ophir, 
many  claims  were  staked  on  streams  in  the  Dishna  drainage.  A few 
men  prospected  their  claims  faithfully,  although  the  high  cost  of 
supplies  and  the  difficulty  of  getting  them  at  any  price  necessarily 
made  prospecting  difficult.  Many  claims  were  held  by  other  men, 
however,  and  upon  them  only  sufficient  work  was  done  to  maintain 
titles  or  not  even  the  amount  of  work  required  by  law.  Title  to  most 
of  these  claims  had  been  permitted  to  lapse  by  1915,  and  when  a 
rush  during  the  spring  and  summer  of  1916  followed  the  discovery 
of  gold  during  the  previous  winter  most  of  the  ground  along  the 
creeks  lay  open  for  restaking.  Prospecting  was  carried  on  quite 
extensively  during  the  summer  of  1916,  but  Boob  Creek  alone  made 
any  production  and  that  small.  Preparations  for  mining  on  a 
larger  scale  were  made,  however,  and  during  the  winter  and  spring 
of  1916-17,  a considerable  production  was  made  by  the  plant  which 
operated  on  claim  No.  2 below  Discovery  and  the  adjoining  fraction 
above  this  claim.  During  the  winter  of  1916-17  there  was  a stampede 
from  Ruby,  Ophir,  and  Iditarod,  which  brought  the  population 
of  the  district  up  to  about  450,  most  of  whom  staked  claims.  This 
stampede  was  followed  during  the  winter  by  active  prospecting  on  a 
large  number  of  the  creeks  tributary  to  Tolstoi  River,  but  for  the 
most  part  this  work  failed  to  develop  workable  placer  ground.  As  a 
result  the  population  dwindled,  until  in  July,  1917,  there  were  only 
about  50  left  in  the  district.  About  150,000  in  gold  was  taken 
out  in  1917,  the  result  of  the  operations  of  about  25  men  on  five 
plants,  most  of  the  production  being  on  Boob  Creek.  Boob  Creek 
is  the  only  creek  in  the  district  that  produced  platinum.  The  plati- 
num was  not  separated  from  the  gold  but  was  sold  with  it  to  the 
bank  in  Iditarod.  The  platinum  in  the  gold  was  said  to  amount 
to  about  1 per  cent,  so  that  about  30  ounces  of  platinum  was  pro- 
duced in  1917. 

GOLD  PLACERS. 

The  only  plant  which  made  any  considerable  production  up  to 
July,  1917,  is  located  on  Boob  Creek.  Extensive  mining  operations 
have  been  confined  to  that  creek,  where  one  plant  was  in  operation, 

1 Maddren,  A.  G.,  The  Innoko  gold  placer  district,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  410,  pp.  19-24, 1910. 

J Eakin,  H.  M.,  The  Iditarod-Ruby  region,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  578,  p.  39, 1914. 

115086°— 19 23 


350  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

and  several  outfits  were  engaged  in  prospecting  during  the  spring 
and  summer. 

The  deposits  are  worked  by  underground  methods  for  the  aurif- 
erous gravels,  2 to  4 feet  thick,  lie  beneath  25  to  35  feet  of  muck 
and  ice.  The  surface  gradient  of  the  stream  is  low,  not  over  50  feet 
to  the  mile. 

Besides  gold  and  platinum  other  minerals  which  may  have  economic 
importance  are  cinnabar  and  cassiterite,  which  are  found  in  small 
amounts.  Cinnabar  occurs  in  small  pebbles  up  to  half  an  inch  in 
diameter  of  a characteristic  red  color.  Cassiterite  in  the  form 
known  as  wood  tin  occurs  in  the  typical  botryoidal  form,  showing 
radiate  structures  when  cracked  open.  The  pebbles  are  somewhat 
darker  than  those  seen  in  the  Ruby  district,  being  nearly  black. 
The  crushed  mineral  gives  a very  light  brown  powder. 

A small  sample  of  the  platinum  from  Boob  Creek  was  presented 
to  the  Survey  by  Mr.  J.  S.  Pitcher,  of  Tolstoi.  It  was  analyzed  by 
R.  C.  Wells  in  the  chemical  laboratory  of  the  Survey  and  found  to 
have  the  following  composition: 

Analysis  of  specimen  of  platinum  from  Boob  Creek,  Tolstoi  district. 


Platinum 83.4 

Iridium .4 

Palladium .3 

Copper None. 

Rhodium .3 

Iron 9.  8 

Osmiridium,  silica,  and  undetermined .6 

Nickel None. 


94.8 


Pyrite,  magnetite,  garnet,  feldspar,  and  quartz  also  occur  in  the 
concentrates.  The  quartz  is  found  in  small  brilliant  transparent 
crystals  as  well  as  in  the  milky  white  form  from  veins.  A considerable 
number  of  grains  of  nearly  opaque,  brownish-black  grains  of  obsidian 
or  volcanic  glass  were  also  noted. 

Some  of  the  tributaries  of  Tolstoi  River,  which  head  against 
Mount  Hurst  or  its  spurs,  were  prospected  during  the  spring  and 
summer.  Up  to  July  none  had  made  any  production.  Considerable 
prospecting  had  also  been  done  on  tributaries  of  Mastodon  Creek 
other  than  Boob,  but  without  result. 

On  Madison  Creek  and  several  of  the  streams  flowing  into  it, 
including  Esperanto,  Joffre,  and  Eldorado  creeks  and  their  tribu- 
taries, considerable  prospecting  has  been  done.  On  Iron  Creek, 
which  empties  into  Eldorado,  there  were  at  one  time  seven  or  eight 
outfits,  but  in  July  only  one  of  these  was  working  about  2 miles 
from  the  head  of  the  creek.  Mining  was  being  done  in  an  open  cut 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  TOLSTOI  DISTRICT.  351 

by  three  men  who  were  shoveling  into  the  boxes.  The  gravels  were 
largely  composed  of  phyllitic  rocks  and  granite  but  included  some 
pebbles  of  limestone.  Sections  show  from  2 to  4 feet  of  gravel 
overlain  by  about  4 feet  of  muck.  A considerable  amount  of  stripping 
had  been  done,  and  it  was  planned  to  work  during  the  summer. 
No  platinum  was  found  on  this  creek.  A considerable  amount  of 
prospecting  had  been  done  on  a number  of  claims  near  the  head  of 
Madison  Creek,  but  work  during  July  was  confined  to  two  claims. 
On  claim  No.  5 above  Discovery  three  men  were  working.  At  this 
locality  4 feet  of  muck  overlies  about  8 feet  of  gravel,  and  the  gold 
is  found  in  the  lower  4 feet.  The  gold  from  this  claim  is  flaky,  fine, 
and  worn.  No  platinum  was  seen  in  pannings,  which  in  addition 
to  the  gold  contained  magnetite,  ilmenite,  augite,  hornblende, 
garnet,  and  zircon,  none  of  which  have  economic  value  under  these 
conditions  of  occurrence.  The  creek  valley  is  about  150  to  200 
feet  wide  on  this  claim.  The  ground  in  the  center  is  said  to  be 
thawed,  although  it  is  frozen  on  either  side.  Operations  were 
largely  carried  on  with  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the  extent  and 
richness  of  the  stream  gravels.  A small  production  was  made  from 
this  and  adjoining  claims  under  the  same  ownership. 

One  man  was  working  on  claim  No.  7 above  Discovery.  A number 
of  prospect  holes  had  been  sunk  and  the  dirt  from  these  holes  and 
some  short  crosscuts  had  been  rocked  out.  The  gold,  although 
somewhat  worn,  is  considerably  coarser  than  that  found  on  claims 
lying  farther  down  the  creek  and  is  described  as  “shotty”  rather 
than  flaky.  An  association  of  minerals  similar  to  that  on  the 
lower  claims  is  found  in  the  concentrates. 


TIN  MINING  IN  SEWARD  PENINSULA. 


By  George  L.  Harrington. 


SUMMARY  OF  MINING  OPERATIONS. 

A resume  of  the  history  of  tin  mining  in  Alaska  up  to  1914  has 
been  compiled  by  Eakin,1  and  the  following  summary  of  operations 
up  to  that  date  is  largely  abstracted  from  his  report. 

Stream  tin  was  first  found  on  Buhner  Creek,  a tributary  of  Ani- 
kovik  River,  in  1900,  and  there  has  been  some  production  of  cassit- 
erite  from  placer  operations  in  the  York  region  since  1902.  In  1911 
a dredge  was  installed  on  Buck  Creek  which  has  been  in  operation 
each  season  since.  Two  dredges  were  installed  on  Anikovik  River 
in  1914  for  the  recovery  of  both  gold  and  cassiterite  but  were  oper- 
ated only  during  that  and  the  following  season.  A second  dredge 
was  installed  on  Buck  Creek  in  1915  and  has  worked  each  summer 
since  that  date.  The  machinery  of  one  of  the  dredges  on  Anikovik 
River  was  removed  from  the  hull  in  1916  and  installed  on  a dredge 
on  Swanson  Creek,  a tributary  of  Agiapuk  River.  The  hull  was 
carried  out  to  sea  by  high  water  and  lost.  The  other  dredge  on  Ani- 
kovik River  was  idle  in  both  1916  and  1917. 

Collier  states2  that  “small  specimens  of  stream  tin  have  been 
found  in  the  northern  part  of  Seward  Peninsula,  from  Cape  Prince 
of  Wales  to  the  south  shore  of  Kotzebue  Sound,  and  in  the  southern 
part  of  the  peninsula  the  ore  has  been  found  in  several  streams  of 
the  Nome  district.” 

Hess  mentions3  that  Goldbottom  Creek  in  the  Nome  district,  Fred 
Gulch,  north  of  Mount  Distin,  Dick  Creek,  Old  Glory,  and  a “ few 
other  creeks  of  the  Arctic  slope  east  of  Ears  Mountain  carry  some 
stream  tin.” 

Cassiterite  lodes  were  discovered  at  Cape  Mountain  in  1902  and 
on  Lost  River  the  following  year.  Mining  operations  have  been  car- 
ried on  at  both  localities  ever  since,  although  in  a somewhat  desul- 
tory fashion.  TVo  stamp  mills  have  been  erected  at  Tin  City  to 
handle  ore  from  two  properties,  and  a small  tonnage  has  been  pro- 
duced, but  both  properties  have  been  idle  for  several  years.  At  Lost 

1 Eakin,  H.  M.,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  622,  pp.  81-94,  1915. 

2 Collier,  A.  J.,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  259,  p.  126,  1905. 

3 Hess,  F.  L.,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  284,  p.  157,  1906. 

353 


354 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


River  assessment  work  has  been  done  annually  for  a number  of 
years  on  a group  of  claims,  and  a fair  stage  of  development  has  been 
reached.  This  property  has  been  leased  to  different  corporations 
which  did  some  mining,  milling  the  ore  in  a small  test  mill  at  the 
mine  on  Cassiterite  Creek.  In  1917  lumber  and  machinery  for  a 
mill  at  this  property  was  at  Teller,  but  the  only  assessment  work 
was  done  at  the  mine. 

Assessment  work  has  been  done  for  a number  of  years  on  several 
lode  prospects  at  several  places  in  western  Seward  Peninsula.  By 
far  the  largest  proportion  of  the  Alaskan  tin  production  has  come 
from  the  placer  operations  on  Buck  Creek  or  from  Grouse  Creek, 
into  which  it  flows.  A small  production  of  placer  tin  has  been,  made 
from  Cassiterite  Creek.1  Placer  tin  has  also  been  recovered  in  the 
Yukon-Tanana  region  in  the  Hot  Springs  district,  and  a small  pro- 
duction has  been  made  in  the  Ruby  district.  Investigations  of  the 
possibilities  of  the  tin  production  of  these  two  districts  were  made 
in  1917  by  Theodore  Chapin,  and  his  reports  appear  in  another 
chapter  of  this  volume. 

Investigations  of  the  tin  deposits  of  the  York  region  have  been 
made  by  a number  of  Geological  Survey  parties,  the  scope  ranging 
from  hasty  reconnaissance  trips  to  obtain  the  new  facts  revealed 
by  mining  developments  to  detailed  studies  of  the  one  occur- 
rence. The  most  complete  of  these  studies  were  made  by  Collier 
and  later  by  Knopf,  in  whose  reports  will  be  found  a description  of 
most  of  the  essential  features  covering  the  geologic  occurrence  of  the 
cassiterite.  The  following  publications  deal  primarily  with  the  tin 
deposits  of  Seward  Peninsula: 

Brooks,  A.  H.,  A new  occurrence  of  cassiterite  in  Alaska  : Science,  new  ser.,  vol, 
13,  No.  328,  p.  593,  1901. 

Brooks,  A.  H.,  An  occurrence  of  stream  tin  in  tlie  York  region,  Alaska : U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Mineral  Resources,  1900,  p.  270,  1901. 

Collier,  A.  J.,  The  tin  deposits  of  the  York  region,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  229,  1904. 

Collier,  A.  J.,  Recent  developments  of  Alaska  tin  deposits : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  259,  pp.  120-127,  1905. 

Hess,  F.  L.,  The  York  tin  region : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  284,  pp.  145-157, 
1906. 

Knopf,  Adolph,  Geology  of  the  Seward  Peninsula  tin  deposits,  Alaska : U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Bull.  358,  1908. 

Hess,  F.  L.,  Mineral  resources  of  Alaska,  1911 : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  520, 
pp.  89-92,  1912. 

Eakin,  H.  M.,  Tin  mining  in  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  622,  pp.  81-94, 
1915. 

The  following  publications  contain  only  incidental  references  to 
the  occurrence  of  tin  in  the  same  region : 


1 Eakin,  H.  M.,  op.  cit.,  p.  89. 


TIN  MINING  IN  SEWARD  PENINSULA. 


355 


Brooks,  A.  H.,  A reconnaissance  of  the  Cape  Nome  and  adjacent  gold  fields 
of  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Special  Pub.,  pp.  132-139, 1901. 

Collier,  A.  J.,  A reconnaissance  of  the  northwestern  part  of  Seward  Penin- 
sula, Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  2,  pp.  49-51,  1902. 

A demand  for  a knowledge  of  the  present  possibilities  of  produc- 
tion of  both  the  lode  and  placer  tin  deposits  of  the  York  region,  re- 
sulting from  the  urgent  need  of  tin,  and  the  desire  to  find  a source 
of  this  metal  nearer  than  the  Asiatic  deposits  led  to  the  somewhat 
brief  reconnaissance  of  portions  of  the  York  region  in  1917.  This 
report  aims  to  present  briefly  the  data  obtained  regarding  develop- 
ments and  possibilities  of  production  rather  than  to  present  geologic 
facts  which  have  been  given  in  the  reports  already  cited,  especially 
those  of  Collier,  Knopf,  and  Eakin. 

Acknowledgments  are  due  and  gladly  given  for  courtesies  received 
from  Mr.  T.  A.  Peterson,  of  the  York  Dredging  Co.,  and  Mr.  A. 
Graham,  of  the  American  Tin  Dredging  Co.,  on  Buck  Creek,  and 
Mr.  William  O’Brien  on  Lost  River.  Information  regarding  the  tin 
deposits  of  Ear  Mountain  was  received  from  Mr.  T.  Winfield,  of 
Teller.  Mr.  Fred  Hinton,  of  Teller,  gave  the  writer  his  information 
regarding  developments  at  Tin  City. 

CASSITERITE  LODES. 

Other  work  seriously  curtailed  the  scope  of  the  tin  investigations  in 
1917,  so  that  it  was  not  possible  to  visit  either  Ear  Mountain  or  Tin 
City.  A superficial  examination  of  the  lode  prospects  near  Potato 
Mountain  was  made,  and  portions  of  two  days  were  spent  on  Lost 
River. 

LOST  RIVER. 

In  September,  1917,  about  150  feet  of  additional  drifts  had  been 
driven  since  Eakin  visited  the  property  in  1914.  He  says  concerning 
the  development  on  Cassiterite  Creek  at  the  Cassiterite  and  Ida  Bell 
lodes  i1 

The  maximum  width  developed  is  23  feet,  and  the  average  width  is  estimated 
at  12  feet,  from  the  evidence  afforded  by  numerous  crosscuts  along  about  1,100 
feet  of  drifts.  The  extreme  limits  of  development  work  embrace  a horizontal 
distance  of  1,420  feet  and  a vertical  distance  of  410  feet  above  the  creek  bottom. 
The  indications  point  to  the  persistence  of  the  lode  in  form  and  character  below 
the  creek  level,  and  no  special  mining  difficulties  at  depth  are  indicated. 

Some  strong  veins  carrying  tin  crop  out  300  feet  north  of  the  Cassiterite  lode 
and  dip  45°  S.  The  lode  itself  dips  85°  in  the  same  direction,  and  if  these  dips 
persist  the  veins  should  meet  the  lode  at  a depth  of  about  300  feet  below  the 
creek  level. 

Developments  on  the  Cassiterite  lode  in  July,  1914,  consisted  of  1,094  feet  of 
drifts  on  five  levels,  besides  a number  of  crosscuts,  and  an  upraise  of  108  feet 
between  the  first  and  second  levels  east. 


1 Eakin,  H.  M.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  86,  87. 


356 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


About  2,000  tons  of  ore  taken  from  the  first  and  second  levels  east  lies  on  the 
dump  at  the  portal  of  the  lower  adit. 

The  test  mill  of  the  Lost  River  mine  plant  has  operated  for  two  successive 
seasons.  The  dump,  containing  about  2,000  tons  of  run-of-mine  ore,  was  sampled 
by  trenching  entirely  across  its  center  and  milling  all  the  ore  as  it  came.  The 
results  of  the  test  probably  indicate  very  closely  the  general  tenor  of  the  dump 
as  a whole  and  of  a large  body  of  minable  ore  blocked  out  by  the  developments 
indicated. 

The  managers  report  that  about  4 per  cent  of  concentrates  were  obtained  from 
the  ore  milled  during  the  two  seasons  and  that  no  notable  variation  was  ob- 
servable at  any  period  of  operation.  The  concentrates  are  very  clean  and  are 
said  to  contain  an  average  of  62.31  per  cent  of  metallic  tin  and  11.08  per  cent  of 
metallic  tungsten. 

The  Ida  Bell  lode  strikes  northeast  and  intersects  the  Cassiterite  lode  at 
the  surface  700  feet  west  of  the  creek  and  225  feet  above  creek  level.  Its  dip  is 
approximately  90°.  It  is  wider  than  the  Cassiterite  lode,  ranging  from  25  to  35 
feet.  Developments  on  this  lode  include  a 70-foot  adit  and  a 60-foot  winze  sunk 
at  its  extremity. 

Like  the  Cassiterite  lode,  the  Ida  Bell  is  a quartz  porphyry  dike,  but  the  pro- 
nounced alteration  of  the  former  is  not  here  duplicated.  For  the  most  part  the 
lode  consists  of  firm,  slightly  altered  quartz  porphyry  intricately  traversed  by 
thin,  rich  veinlets  with  cassiterite  as  the  only  conspicuous  valuable  mineral.  The 
ore  is  reported  to  be  of  good  quality,  but  owing  to  its  hardness  it  will  require 
different  treatment  from  that  adapted  to  the  Cassiterite  lode  ores,  which  are 
soft.  Further  development  of  this  part  of  the  mine  will  await  a higher  develop- 
ment of  the  reduction  plant. 

Development  work  since  1914  had  been  mainly  on  the  east  side  of  the 
creek;  that  for  1917  contemplated  the  enlarging  of  the  main  haulage- 
way of  the  lowest  level  of  the  mine. 

This  property  has  sufficient  ore  either  mined  and  on  the  dump  or 
developed  so  that  production  could  be  commenced  as  soon  as  a mill  is 
installed.  Milling  machinery  and  the  necessary  lumber  for  the  erec- 
tion of  a mill  building  were  at  Teller  in  1917.  It  is  probable  that 
this  equipment  could  be  most  easily  hauled  to  the  mine  during  the 
winter,  for  the  road  from  the  mouth  of  Lost  Liver  to  the  mine  crosses 
the  river  by  fords  severals  times  and  would  be  impassable  at  high 
stages  of  the  water.  Where  it  is.  above  high-water  stages,  this  road 
is  in  good  condition.  If  a great  amount  of  hauling  was  to  be  done 
it  would  probably  be  economical  to  build  a road  on  the  east  side  of 
the  creek,  which  would  involve  comparative^  little  work. 

For  summer  work  hydroelectric  installation  would  probably  prove 
most  satisfactory.  For  year-round  operation,  however,  auxiliary 
power  would  be  needed,  which  would  be  most  economically  furnished 
by  internal-combustion  engines,  using  crude  oil  or  distillate  as  fuel. 
No  timber  other  than  driftwood  on  the  beach  is  available  for  fuel. 
Timber  for  the  mines  must  be  shipped  in. 

In  addition  to  cassiterite  the  ore  contains  considerable  wolframite, 
which  may  equal  the  cassiterite  in  amount.  It  adds  materially  to  the 


TIN  .MINING  IN  SEWARD  PENINSULA. 


357 


value  recovered  from  the  ore.  The  two  minerals  should  be  separated 
before  smelting. 

This  property  appears  to  offer  the  greatest  hope  of  an  increased 
production  of  tin,  but  although  it  is  sufficiently  developed  to  warrant 
the  installation  of  a small  mill,  after  thorough  sampling  and  after 
data  have  been  obtained  as  to  costs  of  production,  the  output  in  the 
next  few  years  is  not  likely  to  amount  to  more  than  a very  small  per- 
centage of  the  country’s  needs. 

EAR  MOUNTAIN. 

The  lode  deposits  of  Ear  Mountain,  together  with  their  earliest 
geologic  features,  have  been  described  by  Knopf.1  A considerable 
amount  of  prospecting  has  been  done  in  this  vicinity,  and  there  has 
been  some  development  work  since  Knopf’s  visit.  This  work  has  for 
the  most  part  amounted  only  to  the  annual  assessment  work  necessary 
to  maintain  title  to  the  claims. 

This  area  is  much  more  difficult  of  access  than  Lost  River,  for  it  is 
12  miles  from  Shishmaref  Inlet — a large  lagoon  of  shallow  water 
navigable  only  to  very  shallow-draft  boats.  Light-draft  steamers 
must  unload  at  least  1J  miles  from  the  entrance  to  the  lagoon.  On 
account  of  these  conditions,  a considerably  higher  grade  of  ore  must 
be  found  in  this  locality  than  on  the  south  side  of  Seward  Peninsula 
in  order  to  make  mining  profitable. 

POTATO  MOUNTAIN. 

A number  of  open  cuts  have  been  made  on  the  tops  of  the  hills 
near  Potato  Mountain,  some  of  which  are  said  to  have  shown  good 
ore  in  the  bottom.  Bedrock  has,  however,  been  covered  by  the  caving 
in  of  the  sides  of  the  prospect  pits.  The  geologic  features  of  the 
deposits  of  this  area  are  described  by  Knopf.2  Since  Knopf’s  visit 
a number  of  other  cuts  and  prospect  holes  have  been  dug.  A short 
tunnel,  which  shows  some  stringers  of  quartz  with  cassiterite,  has 
also  been  driven.  Prospecting  has  failed  to  afford  any  indications  of 
the  extent  of  the  ore  bodies  shown  in  the  openings. 

This  prospect  lies  about  16  miles  from  York.  A road  which  has 
been  in  use  for  teaming  supplies  for  the  Buck  Creek  dredges  since 
1911,  runs  within  about  2 miles  of  the  prospect.  The  road  lies  mostly 
along  the  watercourses  of  Anikovik  River  and  Grouse  and  Buck 
creeks,  crossing  and  recrossing  them,  and  consequently  is  not  espe- 
cially good  for  heavy  hauling. 

Until  further  development  has  taken  place  the  possibilities  of  the 
production  of  this  property  can  not  be  stated.  Under  present  con- 

1 Knopf,  Adolph,  op.  cit.,  pp.  25-32. 

2 Idem,  pp.  32-35. 


358  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 

ditions  it  would  take  at  least  two  or  three  years  before  any  production 
could  be  made. 

CAPE  MOUNTAIN. 

A considerable  amount  of  work  was  done  for  a number  of  years 
near  Cape  Mountain.  A study  of  these  deposits  also  was  made  by 
Knopf  and  a description  of  them  is  contained  in  his  report.1 

Two  properties  have  been  extensively  prospected  by  tunnels,  shafts, 
and  winzes,  and  a number  of  other  claims  have  had  a small  amount 
of  work  done  on  them. 

On  the  property  formerly  belonging  to  the  Bartels  Tin  Mining 
Co.,  which  was  later  sold  to  the  Empire  Tin  Mining  Co.  and  still 
later  is  said  to  have  been  sold  at  marshal’s  sale  to  Fred  Hinton,  of 
Teller,  there  are  about  1,255  feet  of  tunnels  and  winzes.  Knopf 
states 2 that  at  the  time  of  his  visit  an  18-inch  belt  of  tin  ore  about 
400  feet  from  the  mouth  of  the  tunnel  had  not  been  exploited.  A 
few  tons  of  ore  were  milled  in  1914  from  the  North  Star  claim,  but 
the  place  in  the  workings  from  which  it  was  obtained  is  not  known. 
Some  of  the  ore  is  said  to  run  very  high  in  cassiterite,  but  the  re- 
ported average  of  such  ore  as  is  developed  is  about  3 or  4 per  cent. 
The  property  includes  a small  mill,  containing  three  stamps  and  a 
table.  This  group  of  claims  has  been  patented  and  no  work  has  been 
done  since  1914. 

Although  a considerable  length  of  tunnels,  cross  drifts,  and  winzes 
has  been  driven,  on  this  property,  there  appears  not  to  have  been 
development  commensurate  with  the  labor  expended.  Probably  the 
claims  of  the  group  contain  some  bodies  of  good  tin  ore,  but  the 
development  has  failed  to  outline  them,  and  further  work  is  neces- 
sary before  a statement  of  the  potentialities  of  the  property  can  be 
made. 

On  the  property  of  the  United  States  Tin  Mining  Co.  a shaft  has 
been  sunk  on  a quartz  ledge  and  a rather  long  tunnel  driven  in  hard 
granite  to  intersect  this  ledge.  A mill  has  been  erected  near  the  beach 
at  Tin  City  to  handle  ore  from  this  property.  The  claims  are  pat- 
ented, but  no  work  has  been  done  on  them  for  a number  of  years. 

Sufficient  data  are  not  at  hand  to  warrant  any  statement  as  to 
possibilities  of  production  from  the  group  of  claims  held  by  this 
company.  However,  as  no  work  has  been  done  for  some  time,  not- 
withstanding the  prices  prevailing  for  tin  in  recent  years,  it  may 
reasonably  be  inferred  that  the  stage  in  development  has  not  yet 
been  reached  where  any  appreciable  production  can  be  counted  on 
in  the  near  future. 


1 Knopf,  Adloph,  op.  cit.,  pp.  35—41. 

2 Idem,  p.  40. 


TIN  MINING  IN  SEWAKD  PENINSULA. 


359 


OTHER  LODES. 

In  addition  to  the  properties  above  mentioned,  there  are  a number 
of  other  prospects  in  the  York  region,  including  Brooks  Mountain 
and  others  than  those  already  mentioned  in  the  vicinity  of  Cape 
Mountain.  The  work  on  these  properties  has  been  of  a desultory 
character  and  of  relatively  small  amount.  They  appear  to  be  negli- 
gible in  any  consideration  of  the  possibilities  of  the  production  of  tin. 

Besides  the  lodes  which  are  being  worked  for  tin  mainly  or  chiefly, 
tin  could  possibly  be  recovered  as  an  accessory  mineral  from  other 
lodes  in  the  York  region.  There  are  a number  of  silver-lead  pros- 
pects on  Lost  River,  on  two  of  which  some  work  was  done  during 
the  summer  of  1917.  A third  on  Rapid  Creek,  a tributary  of  Lost 
River,  is  said  to  be  extensively  developed.  At  the  Southern  Cross 
lode  tunnel  on  Lost  River,  opposite  the  mouth  of  Tin  Creek,  assays 
are  said  to  show  a small  percentage  of  tin  and  tungsten,  which 
probably  occur  as  cassiterite  and  wolframite.  In  any  treatment  of 
the  ores  involving  concentration  on  tables  these  minerals  would  be 
recovered.  It  is  not  known  whether  or  not  cassiterite  occurs  at  the 
other  prospects.  The  output  of  tin  as  a by-product  of  these  lodes 
will  probably  be  small. 

CASSITERITE  PLACERS. 

LOST  RIVER. 

A small  production  of  placer  tin  was  made  one  year  on  Cassiterite 
Creek,  and  it  is  said  that  a considerable  amount  of  residual  placer 
tin  occurs  on  the  slope  of  the  hill  near  the  mine.  If  hydroelectric 
power  was  used  on  this  property  and  the  water  flumed  to  the  mil], 
this  ground  could  be  sluiced  and  the  tin  recovered. 

EAR  MOUNTAIN. 

A number  of  the  creeks  that  head  in  Ear  Mountain  carry  placer 
tin.  Knopf 1 states  that  nuggets  of  cassiterite  several  inches  in 
diameter  can  be  picked  off  the  bedrock  riffles  of  Eldorado  Creek,  but 
on  account  of  the  small  body  of  gravel  the  creek  offers  no  placer 
possibilities. 

The  gravels  on  Tuttle  Creek  are  said  to  carry  5 ounces  of  cas- 
siterite to  the  pan,  but  their  extent  is  not  known,  so  that  the  oppor- 
tunity for  commercial  placer  development  can  not  be  stated.  If  the 
gravels  are  as  rich  as  reported  a small  sluicing  plant  could  possibly 
operate  successfully.  Transportation  of  supplies  to  this  locality, 
however,  involves  a haul  to  the  edge  of  Shishmaref  Inlet  and  ship- 


1 Knopf,  Adolph,  op.  cit.,  p.  26. 


360 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


ment  across  this  lagoon  to  Sarichef  Island,  where  during  favorable 
weather,  small  coasting  schooners  lay  offshore  and  pick  up  or  deliver 
freight. 

BUCK  CREEK. 

By  far  the  largest  production  of  tin  in  the  York  region  has  been 
from  the  placers  of  Buck  Creek,  although  during  1916  and  1917  the 
York  Dredging  Co.  was  operating  on  Grouse  Creek,  into  which 
Buck  Creek  flows.  The  dredge  of  the  American  Tin  Dredging  Co. 
operated  on  Buck  Creek.  The  area  of  placer  ground  on  both  streams 
suitable  for  working  with  a dredge  is  small,  and  a very  few  more 
seasons  of  work  will  exhaust  the  deposits.  Sutter  Creek  was  being 
prospected  during  the  summer  with  a view  to  dredging,  but  this 
also  is  a short  stream  and  would  afford  not  over  two  or  possibly 
three  seasons’  work  with  a dredge.  There  is  a possibility  that  a 
considerable  amount  of  ground  above  the  limits  of  dredging  opera- 
tions can  be  worked  profitably  by  shoveling  or  scraping  into  sluice 
boxes.  The  amount  that  could  be  recovered  in  any  one  season  is 
small,  for  the  supply  of  water  for  sluicing  is  not  great  and  the  scope 
of  operations  would  depend  largely  upon  the  quantity  of  water 
available. 

During  the  summer  of  1917  two  men  took  out  a few  tons  of  cas- 
siterite  from  Iron  Creek,  a short  tributary  of  Sutter  Creek,  heading 
against  Buck  Creek  in  the  saddle  just  east  of  Potato  Mountain.  It 
is  estimated  that  the  gravels,  which  are  4 or  5 feet  deep,  carry  about 
15  pounds  of  tin  to  the  cubic  yard  for  a width  of  15  to  20  feet. 
Placer  ground  on  this  creek  extends  not  over  a mile,  and  the  upper 
limits  of  operations  had  been  nearly  reached  in  1917,  at  a point 
where  the  stream  valley  becomes  very  narrow  and  the  amount  of 
gravel  negligible  in  amount.  Water  for  sluicing  was  scarce,  and  an 
intermittent  supply  for  sluicing  was  obtained  by  building  a small 
dam,  which  gave  a full  sluice  head  for  a sufficient  length  of  time  to 
permit  the  successful  washing  of  the  gravel.  Three  boxes,  8 inches 
wide,  were  used,  and  the  grade  wTas  10  inches  to  the  box  length.  Iron 
riffles  were  employed. 

In  all  about  26  men  were  engaged  during  the  year  on  Iron,  Buck, 
and  Grouse  creeks  in  the  production  of  placer  tin.  Two  dredges  and 
one  plant  shoveling  in  were  operated. 

ANIKOVIK  RIVER. 

No  production  of  placer  tin  has  been  made  on  Anikovik  River 
since  1916.  The  one  dredge  on  this  stream  was  idle  in  1917  also. 
Assessment  work  was  done  on  a number  of  claims.  Data  are  not 
available  to  warrant  any  statement  as  to  their  placer  possibilities. 


TIN  MINING  IN  SEWARD  PENINSULA. 


361 


SUMMARY. 

Lode  mining  in  1917  was  confined  to  development  work  on  Lost 
River  and  Ear  Mountain  without  any  production.  Lost  River  is 
believed  to  have  possibilities  as  a producer  of  lode  tin.  Further 
development  is  necessary  at  other  properties. 

Placer  mining  in  1917  was  limited  to  the  vicinity  of  Buck  Creek. 
About  300  tons  a year  appears  to  be  the  limit  of  production  for  this 
area,  and  this  production  will  be  limited  to  a period  of  not  over 
five  years;  after  that  time  there  will  be  production  of  only  a few 
tons  annually  from  sluicing  operations.  Placers  may  be  developed 
in  the  vicinity  of  Ear  Mountain,  but  the  production  in  this  vicinity 
will  be  small.  On  Lost  River  a few  tons  of  residual  placer  tin  may 
be  recovered  when  water  is  available  for  sluicing.  Anikovik  River 
has  a greater  area  of  stream  gravels  which  may  be  dredged  than 
any  of  the  other  placers.  A bedrock  of  finger  slates,  in  a nearly 
vertical  attitude  and  with  numerous  reefs,  may  interpose  difficulties 
in  dredging,  involving  a loss  of  some  cassiterite  and  probably  a con- 
siderable amount  of  the  gold.  The  possibilities  of  the  stream  can 
not  be  stated. 


GRAPHITE  MINING  IN  SEWARD  PENINSULA. 


By  George  L.  Harrington. 


The  graphite  deposits  of  Seward  Peninsula  have  long  been  known, 
but  a number  of  factors  have  hitherto  prevented  their  exploitation 
and  development. 

Gold  has  so  long  occupied  the  dominant  position  in  the  min- 
eral production  of  the  district  that  other  minerals  have  been  but 
little  considered  by  the  miner.  Moreover,  gold  mining  possesses 
an  exceptional  advantage  in  that  the  product  has  usually  an  im- 
mediate local  market  through  banks  and  merchants,  at  a reasonably 
high  percentage  of  its  value,  the  base  price  remaining  constant. 
With  other  minerals,  and  especially  with  graphite,  it  has  been  neces- 
sary to  obtain  a higher  grade  of  product  than  that  which  results 
directly  from  mining  operations.  With  graphite  hand  sorting  at 
the  mine  and  further  treatment  after  shipment  to  Seattle  or  San 
Francisco  has  been  necessary  before  the  material  could  be  marketed. 
A system  of  treatment  had  to  be  developed  and  a market  found  for 
the  refined  product  after  tests  had  demonstrated  its  adaptability 
to  certain  uses  and  its  unsuitability  for  others.  The  rather  small 
market  on  the  Pacific  coast  and  the  distance  to  the  eastern  market 
have  also  affected  the  output.  Low  prices  until  recently  have  been 
an  additional  drawback  to  mining  in  Alaska,  where  comparatively 
high  prices  for  supplies  and  labor  prevail.  The  high  prices  in 
1917,  combined  with  the  fact  that  wages  and  southbound  freight 
charges  had  increased  but  little,  appeared  to  warrant  extensive  de- 
velopment of  the  deposits,  provided  a market  could  be  developed. 

These  deposits  were  described  by  Moffit 1 as  follows : 

Graphite  is  abundant  in  some  of  the  black  schist  beds  belonging  to  the  Nome 
and  Kigluaik  groups  and  gives  them  their  characteristic  color  but  is  not  known 
in  a form  to  make  it  of  economic  importance  within  the  Nome  and  Grand 
Central  quadrangles.  Just  north  of  the  Grand  Central  area,  however,  in  the 
headwater  areas  of  Grand  Central  River  and  Windy  Creek,  especially  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  divide  between  these  two  streams,  are  graphite  deposits  of  con- 
siderable size.  Their  occurrence,  as  well  as  that  of  graphite  on  the  north  side 
of  the  Kigluaik  Range  west  of  Cobblestone  River,  has  been  known  for  a long 
time,  but  only  recently  have  they  received  especial  attention  from  prospectors. 

1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  Geology  of  the  Nome  and  Grand  Central  quadrangles,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  533,  pp.  135-136,  1913. 


364 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 


A sharp  ridge  made  up  of  biotite  schist  striking  east  and  west  and  intruded 
by  dikes  and  sills  of  coarse  granitic  rock  or  pegmatite  rises  on  the  south  from 
the  saddle  between  the  Grand  Central  and  Windy  Creek.  Some  of  the  schist 
is  highly  graphitic,  the  graphite  appearing  as  abundant  small  scales  on  the 
cleavage  surface  and  much  of  it  not  being  distinguishable  on  casual  examina- 
tion from  flakes  of  biotite.  Locally  graphite  is  segregated  in  beds  or  much 
flattened  lenticular  masses  that  conform  in  direction  with  the  schist  cleavage 
and  reach  thicknesses  of  6,  8,  or  even  18  inches.  These  beds  include  thin  layers 
of  schist  containing  numerous  large  garnets  and  much  quartz.  The  raw 
graphite  found  at  this  place  is  heavier  than  the  higher  grades  of  graphite, 
owing  to  its  included  quartz. 

The  sills  and  dikes  of  pegmatite  cutting  the  schist  also  contain  graphite, 
which  is  associated  with  them  in  such  a way  as  to  suggest  a close  relationship 
between  the  intrusives  and  the  graphite.  Graphite  appears  to  be  an  original 
mineral  in  the  pegmatite  as  well  as  to  be  associated  with  it  in  the  schist.  At 
one  place  about  8 inches  of  solid  graphite  is  included  between  a pegmatite  sill 
and  the  overlying  schist.  The  steep  slopes  of  the  mountain  are  strewn  with 
graphite  fragments,  which,  owing  to  the  fact  that  they  are  much  lighter  in 
weight  than  either  the  schist  or  the  pegmatite,  appear  more  abundantly  on  the 
surface,  especially  in  gullies  where  water  has  brought  about  a rough  sorting. 
One  block,  with  dimensions  of  approximately  7 feet,  6 feet,  and  30  inches, 
consists  of  about  equal  thicknesses  of  schist  and  apparently  almost  pure 
graphite. 

The  graphite-bearing  schist  extends  eastward  beyond  the  east  fork  of  Grand 
Central  River  and  westward  across  Windy  Creek  and  the  head  of  Cobblestone 
River  to  the  region  south  of  Imuruk  Basin,  in  which  the  graphite  is  even 
more  extensively  developed  than  in  the  locality  described  and  from  which  a 
number  of  commercial  shipments  have  been  made. 

Development  work  has  been  chiefly  confined  to  those  deposits  on 
the  north  side  of  the  Kigluaik  or  Sawtooth  Range,  west  of  Cobble- 
stone River.  Most  of  the  work  has  been  limited  to  two  groups  of 
claims,  those  of  the  Alaska  Graphite  Mining  Co.  and  those  of  the 
Uncle  Sam  Alaska  Mining  Syndicate.  The  claims  of  the  first  group 
lie  about  4 miles  east  of  Graphite  Bay,  an  arm  of  Imuruk  Basin,  and 
2 miles  west  of  Cobblestone  River.  The  camp  of  the  other  group  is 
2 miles  south  of  Graphite  Bay  and  about  2 miles  west  of  the  camp 
of  the  Alaska  Graphite  Mining  Co. 

From  Graphite  Bay  there  is  a moderately  gently  sloping  gravel 
plain  that  extends  up  to  the  camps,  the  upper  part  of  the  slope  being 
somewhat  steeper  than  the  lower  part.  The  plain  is  formed  of  the 
gravels  and  alluvial  debris,  which  were  brought  down  from  the 
higher  parts  of  the  range,  and  talus  in  interstream  areas.  Streams 
flow  for  short  distances  in  V-shaped  valleys,  up  to  50  feet  deep 
through  the  talus  accumulations,  then  their  valleys  widen  and  coalesce 
with  the  frontal  plain  of  the  range. 

At  an  elevation  of  500  feet  a distinct  change  in  topography  marks 
the  contact  of  the  talus  and  alluvial  material  with  the  underlying 
schists  and  gneisses,  which  form  the  steep  north  slope  of  the  Kig- 
luaik Range.  Graphite  lenses  are  found  along  this  steep  slope  for 


GRAPHITE  MINING  IN  SEWARD  PENINSULA. 


365 


several  miles  west  of  Cobblestone  River.  Development  work  has  been 
confined  to  those  outcrops  which  lie  between  elevations  of  500  and 
1,000  feet,  although  there  are  said  to  be  other  lenses  higher  up  the 
slope.  In  September,  when  this  area  was  visited,  recent  snows  ex- 
tended down  to  about  750  feet,  preventing  any  geologic  work  above 
that  elevation. 

The  lenses  of  graphite  occur  in  association  with  quartz  schists  that 
carry  biotite,  but  garnetiferous  schists  that  carry  some  calcite  are 
also  locally  present.  Some  of  the  quartz  schists  have  the  appearance 
of  beds  of  metamorphosed  sandstone.  Tourmaline  was  noted  in  small 
grains  in  the  graphite  at  one  localit}^.  Granitic  rocks  appear  to 
make  up  a portion  of  the  core  of  the  range.  The  general  trend  of 
the  schists  in  which  the  graphite  occurs  is  a little  north  of  west,  and 
the  dip  is  60°-75°  N.  Locally  there  are  two  or  three  series  of 
graphite  lenses  which  are  parallel  in  strike  and  dip,  but  it  can  not 
be  positively  stated,  without  further  very  detailed  studies,  that  they 
represent  more  than  one  horizon  which  may  have  been  repeated  by 
faulting  or  close  folding. 

The  topographic  situation  and  nearness  to  water  transportation 
have  favored  development  work  at  these  deposits,  in  comparison  with 
those  which  are  said  to  occur  for  several  miles  eastward,  extending 
along  the  front  of  the  range  beyond  Cobblestone  River,  and  appear- 
ing on  the  hill  slopes  or  in  the  stream  valleys  which  are  incised  into 
the  range. 

The  first  claims  were  staked  in  1900,  but  in  the  succeeding  years 
little  has  been  done  until  recently  except  assessment  work.  Small 
shipments  have  been  made  from  time  to  time. for  making  mill  tests 
or  for  samples  of  the  material,  but  no  steady  production  has  been 
maintained.  About  120  tons  were  shipped  by  the  Uncle  Sam  Alaska 
Graphite  Mining  Syndicate  in  1912, 1 but  no  shipment  has  been  made 
by  this  company  since.  Assessment  work  has,  however,  been  done 
on  the  nine  claims  of  the  group.  As  the  lenses  dip  with  the  slope  of 
the  hillside,  but  more  steeply,  little  work  has  been  necessary  to  prove 
the  existence  of  the  bodies,  and  the  assessment  work  has  therefore 
taken  the  form  of  open  cuts,  from  each  of  which  a few  sacks  of 
graphite  have  been  taken,  so  that  there  is  now  sacked  and  ready  for 
shipping  a considerable  amount  of  hand-sorted  graphite.  Some  of 
this  graphite  will  require  resacking  before  shipping.  Two  short 
tunnels  have  been  driven  on  claims  of  this  group.  The  development 
work  to  date  has  shown  the  presence  of  a number  of  lenses  of  graphite 
which  may  be  continuous,  but  their  size  and  continuity  have  not 
been  proved. 

A small  frame  bunk  house  is  the  only  building  on  the  property. 

1Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  662,  p.  449,  1917. 

115086°— 19 24 


366 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


The  property  now  being  worked  by  the  Alaska  Graphite  Co.  con- 
sists of  five  claims  which  were  staked  in  1905  and  three  claims  which 
were  staked  by  N.  Tweet  in  1915  or  1916.  In  1906  the  bunk  house 
on  the  property  was  built,  and  the  following  year  about  35  tons  of 
graphite  was  picked  from  the  talus  on  the  steep  hillside  and  shipped. 
Other  smaller  shipments  followed  in  succeeding  years. 

Several  tons  of  graphite  were  mined  in  1916  but  not  shipped.  In 
1917  a large  portion  of  the  time  of  the  seven  men  employed  was  con- 
sumed in  making  and  repairing  the  road  to  Graphite  Bay,  as  the 
unusually  rainy  weather  during  August  made  it  necessary  to  cor- 
duroy the  roads  with  alders,  the  only  material  at  hand.  In  spite  of 
this  delay,  however,  a considerable  tonnage  of  hand-picked  graphite 
was  mined  from  an  open  cut  and  shipped  to  San  Francisco,  together 
with  that  which  was  mined  the  previous  year. 

Most  of  the  production  of  1916  and  1917  was  made  from  an  open 
pit  about  a hundred  yards  west  of  Glacier  Creek,  the  first  stream 
west  of  Cobblestone  River.  As  exposed  in  the  pit,  the  lens  on  which 
the  mining  was  done  had  a width  of  4 to  6 feet  of  graphite,  the  im- 
purities in  which  consisted  of  thin  seams  of  quartz  and  schist.  It 
appears  in  the  bottom  of  the  cut  for  a length  of  30  feet,  and  the  foot- 
wall  has  a height  of  about  20  feet.  The  graphite,  which  is  exposed  at 
one  end  of  the  cut,  has  a greater  horizontal  dimension  than  that 
given,  and  its  vertical  dimension  has  not  been  determined.  On  the 
east  side  of  Glacier  Creek  a lens  or  series  of  closely  spaced  lenses  of 
graphite  that  has  a total  vertical  height  of  400  feet  or  more  is  ex- 
posed. A few  small  open  cuts  afford  some  indications  of  a thickness 
which  is  comparable  to  that  in  the  pit  that  is  being  worked. 

An  8-inch  hydraulic  pipe  400  feet  long  serves  to  convey  the 
graphite  from  the  pit  to  the  loading  station,  150  feet  lower.  Hand- 
sorting is  done  at  the  pit,  and  there  are  a number  of  tons  of  low- 
grade  graphite  on  the  dump. 

Transportation  from  the  mine  to  Graphite  Bay  is  by  trucks  drawn 
by  a gasoline  caterpillar  tractor.  At  Graphite  Bay  the  graphite  is 
loaded  on  scows,  which  are  towed  to  Teller,  and  there  it  is  loaded  on 
ocean  steamers. 

In  addition  to  the  open  pit  near  Glacier  Creek  there  are  a number 
of  short  tunnels  and  open  cuts  about  a quarter  or  half  a mile  west  of 
Glacier  Creek,  near  the  bunk  house  and  cook  tent  of  the  company, 
from  which  there  has  been  some  production  in  previous  years. 

On  the  steep  hillside  between  the  pit  and  bunk  house  are  a num- 
ber of  exposures  of  graphite,  but  little  development  work  has  been 
done  to  afford  an  indication  of  the  size  of  the  bodies.  Some  of  these 
bodies,  so  far  as  can  be  told  on  a surface  partly  obscured  by  talus, 
are  at  least  100  feet  long,  50  feet  wide,  and  a foot  or  more  thick. 


GRAPHITE  MINING  IN  SEWARD  PENINSULA. 


367 


There  appears  to  be  an  opportunity  for  the  development  of  a large 
amount  of  graphite  from  these  deposits.  Transportation  problems 
are  relatively  simple.  If  a sufficient  tonnage  is  mined  aerial  trams, 
possibly  of  a gravity  type,  might  be  used  from  one  or  both, properties. 
For  smaller  tonnage  good  roads  could  be  easily  constructed  for  team 
or  power  haulage,  and  the  power  required  for  hauling  loads  would  be 
small,  on  account  of  the  generally  uniform  downhill  slope  to  the 
shipping  point.  Graphite  Bay  affords  a good  shallow  harbor,  for 
numerous  small  coves  and  islands  give  protection  from  storms. 

If  a mill  should  be  erected  at  either  property  hydroelectric  installa- 
tions would  probably  prove  the  more  economical  for  summer  opera- 
tions, power  being  derived  from  some  of  the  small  streams  which 
cross  the  claims.  For  winter  operations  other  power  would  be 
necessary. 


THE  GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  THE 
KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION. 


By  George  L.  Harrington. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  principal  work  of  the  Geological  Survey  in  the  general  region 
of  the  Kiwalik  and  Koyuk  basins  was  done  by  three  parties,  those 
of  Peters  and  Mendenhall,1  who  in  1900  ascended  the  Koyuk; 
of  Witherspoon  and  Moffit,2  who  mapped  both  topographically  and 
geologically  the  region  south  of  Kotzebue  Sound ; and  of  Smith  and 
Eakin,3  who  mapped  the  area  between  Nulato,  on  the  Yukon,  and 
Council.  In  addition  data  in  regard  to  water  resources  have  been 
obtained  through  the  work  of  F.  F.  Henshaw  4 in  1907  and  1909  and 
some  geologic  notes  were  also  obtained  by  Mendenhall 5 at  the  close 
of  the  field  season  of  1901,  when  he  visited  the  shores  of  Kotzebue 
Sound. 

The  following  report  is  based  upon  the  reports  of  the  earlier 
workers  in  this  field,  supplemented  by  data  obtained  by  the  writer 
during  August,  1917,  when  he  spent  a few  days  in  the  vicinity  of 
Candle,  two  days  on  Bear  Creek,  and  about  two  weeks  in  the  study  of 
the  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  Sweepstakes  and  Dime  creeks. 

No  additional  information  was  obtained  regarding  the  region  out- 
side of  the  Kiwalik,  Bear  Creek,  and  Koyuk  drainage,  but  for  the 
sake  of  completeness  the  drainage  and  geologic  features  of  the  adja- 
cent region  are  shown  on  the  accompanying  map  (PI.  X). 

The  kindly  hospitality  of  the  miners  and  prospectors  of  the  region 
is  gladly  and  gratefully  acknowledged  by  the  writer,  for  without  their 
assistance  it  would  not  have  been  possible  to  carry  out  the  investiga- 
tions so  easily  or  so  speedily. 

1 Mendenhall,  W.  C.,  A reconnaissance  in  the  Norton  Bay  region,  Alaska,  in  1900  : U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Special  Pub.,  1901. 

2 Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Fairhaven  gold  placers,  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  247,  1905. 

3 Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  A geologic  reconnaissance  in  southeastern  Seward 
Peninsula  and  the  Norton  Bay-Nulato  region,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  449,  1911. 

4 Henshaw,  F.  F.,  and  Parker,  G.  L.,  Surface-water  supply  of  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska : 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  314,  1913. 

5 Mendenhall,  W.  C.,  Reconnaissance  from  Fort  Hamlin  to  Kotzebue  Sound,  Alaska : 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  10,  1902. 


369 


370 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


GEOLOGY. 

GENERAL  FEATURES. 

The  region  covered  by  this  report  contains  a number  of  geologic 
units.  As  far  as  possible  these  units  have  been  mapped  separately, 
but  lack  of  outcrop  and  the  brevity  of  the  time  spent  not  only  by  the 
writer  but  by  other  Survey  parties  engaged  in  geologic  investigations 
in  this  region  have  prevented  the  obtaining  of  the  information  neces- 
sary for  accurate  mapping.  Errors  of  detail  may  therefore  occur, 
but  the  main  geologic  features  will  be  found  essentially  as  mapped. 
(See  PI.  X.)  For  the  sake  of  completeness,  the  map  is  made  larger 
than  necessary  to  cover  the  work  in  1917  in  order  to  show  the  broader 
areal  relations,  which  have  been  elucidated  by  the  work  of  previous 
investigators. 

The  oldest  rocks  of  the  region  are  the  series  of  Paleozoic  or  older 
schists,  slates,  and  limestones,  which,  in  the  northern  portion  of  the 
area,  appear  mainly  west  of  the  Kiwalik,  although  to  the  east  of  this 
river  some  outcrops  are  known.  The  series  extends  south  to  Golofnin 
Sound,  where  it  includes  also  some  metamorphosed  igneous  rocks. 

A series  of  andesitic  volcanic  rocks,  which  embraces  some  water- 
land  tuffs,  and  includes  flows  and  breccias,  occupies  much  of  the  area 
north  of  the  Koyuk  between  the  Kiwalik  and  the  Buckland.  These 
rocks  have  suffered  some  alteration,  owing  in  part  to  weathering  and 
in  part  to  the  stresses  to  which  they  have  been  subjected.  Upon  these 
and  the  other  rocks  Cretaceous  sediments  were  deposited  in  large 
areas  east  of  the  East  Fork  of  the  Koyuk  and  of  the  West  Fork  of  the 
Buckland,  and  in  much  smaller  areas  west  of  these  streams.  These 
rocks  for  the  most  part  show  considerable  deformation  of  the  beds, 
and  although  slaty  cleavage  has  been  developed  in  argillitic  rock 
types,  none  show  schistosity. 

At  several  geologic  periods  igneous  activity  has  been  mani- 
fested in  this  region  by  different  types  of  intrusions,  each  in- 
trusion resulting  in  the  deformation  of  some  of  the  older  rocks.  Of 
this  character  are  the  greenstones  of  the  Fish  and  Tubutolik  river 
valleys,  and  the  granites,  monzonites,  syenites,  and  diorites,  which 
are  found  more  or  less  widely  distributed  throughout  the  region,  in 
many  places,  as  at  Kiwalik  and  Granite  mountains,  making  up  the 
highest  points,  or  as  in  Bendeleben  and  Darby  mountains  constitut- 
ing an  integral  part  of  those  ranges. 

After  the  deformation  of  the  Cretaceous  beds,  which  probably  oc- 
curred during  early  Tertiary  time  and  was  caused  by  intrusions 
such  as  those  of  Granite  Mountain,  there  appears  to  have  been  pe- 
riods of  alternate  elevation  and  depression  of  the  land  surface  with 
respect  to  sea  level,  but  these  movements  have  been  of  regional  rather 
than  local  character,  and  though  there  may  have  been  some  slight 


1917. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  371 

tilting  of  the  land  surface  there  has  been  no  folding.  During  later 
Tertiary  time  vegetal  material  accumulated  to  form  lignite  beds 
such  as  those  at  the  head  of  the  Kiwalik.  Somewhat  later  in  the 
Tertiary  period  or  early  in  the  Quaternary  period  lavas  covered  much 
of  the  terrane  of  what  is  now  the  base  of  Seward  Peninsula  and  may 
have  covered  some  of  the  region  now  occupied  by  Norton  Bay. 

The  events  of  the  Quaternary  period  are  so  involved  that  it  will 
require  much  more  detailed  studies  than  it  has  been  possible  to  make 
to  work  out  the  complex  history  of  the  unconsolidated  deposits  of 
that  period.  Oscillations  of  the  land  surface  have  caused  inun- 
dations, and  each  change  of  base-level  has  affected  the  topography. 
The  stream  valleys  were  overflowed  by  the  sea,  which  later  withdrew 
either  partly  or  wholly.  In  those  areas  not  inundated,  and  in  the 
inundated  areas  after  their  emergence,  the  processes  of  erosion 
normal  to  subarctic  climates,  including  frost  disintegration  and  soil 
flow,  have  been  active.  There  has  resulted  an  almost  universal  cover 
of  Quaternary  deposits,  which  ranges  in  thickness  from  a few  inches 
to  200  feet  or  more.  In  a general  way  the  covering  due  to  rock  dis- 
integration in  place  and  to  solifluction  has  been  mapped  with  the 
underlying  bedrock,  and  only  those  deposits  of  alluvial  or  marine 
origin  have  been  represented  on  the  map. 

PALEOZOIC  ROCKS. 

The  Paleozoic  rocks  in  the  northern  part  of  the  region  have  been 
described  by  Moffit1  as  follows: 

Under  the  head  of  “ Metamorphic  series  ” are  grouped  together  a number  of 
rock  types  of  widely  different  character,  the  relationships  of  which  are  difficult 
to  establish  clearly,  and  the  ages  of  which  are  in  doubt.  They  possess  the  com- 
mon characteristics  of  having  been  in  all  cases  greatly  altered  from  their  origi- 
nal condition  at  the  time  of  consolidation.  The  changes  include  the  folding  of 
the  beds  and  the  production  of  secondary  structures,  such  as  schistosity,  cleav- 
age, jointing,  or  faulting,  resulting  from  pressure  and  the  various  movements 
of  the  rock  mass ; the  recrystallization  of  the  mineral  constituents  and  the  devel- 
opment of  new  minerals ; the  infiltration  of  quartz,  giving  the  numerous  veins, 
stringers,  and  lenses  of  that  mineral  which  are  so  frequent  in  the  outcrops  and 
are  so  important  in  some  places  because  of  their  gold  content ; the  peculiarities 
of  structure  due  to  the  intrusion  of  large  masses  of  igneous  rock ; and  other  less 
noticeable  features.  The  series  includes  massive  and  thin-bedded  crystalline 
limestones  and  marbles,  banded  black  and  gray  slates,  and  a variety  of  schistose 
rocks,  both  sedimentary  and  igneous,  among  which  are  micaceous,  graphitic, 
quartzose,  chloritic,  felspathic,  and  amphibolitic  phases. 

In  the  mapping,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  limestones  have  been 
shown  separately  from  the  other  Paleozoic  rocks.  In  the  area  vis- 
ited during  the  summer  of  1917  the  Paleozoic  rocks  were  seen  only  in 

1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Fairhaven  gold  placers,  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  247,  p.  19,  1905. 


372 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


the  vicinity  of  Candle  and  in  the  Haycock  Ridge  between  Dime  Creek 
and  the  Landing.  At  both  places  the  strike  is  about  N.  20°  E.,  and 
the  dip  is  nearly  vertical  or  steeply  to  the  west.  Schist  pebbles  were 
also  seen  in  the  gravels  of  Wilson  Creek,  at  the  head  of  the  Kiwalik 
drainage,  although  no  outcrops  were  noted.  A few  pebbles  of  slate 
and  schist  were  taken  from  the  bottoms  of  prospect  holes  on  Little 
Eldorado  Creek,  and  schist  was  seen  at  a few  places  on  the  east  slope 
of  the  ridge  farther  south.  The  rounded  knobs  from  which  Haycock 
Ridge  derived  its  name  are  of  a light-gray  schistose  limestone.  It  is 
flanked  on  the  east  by  a metamorphosed  argillitic  rock.  The  gravels 
on  the  claims  below  Discovery  on  Dime  Creek  contain  slate  pebbles 
which  may  be  derived  from  them  or  which  may  represent  a some- 
what metamorphosed  phase  of  some  of  the  more  argillaceous  Creta- 
ceous rocks. 

No  reliable  estimate  of  the  thickness  of  this  group  of  rocks  can  be 
made,  for  although  they  are  in  places  nearly  vertical  in  attitude, 
and  horizontal  distance  would  therefore  ordinarily  afford  an  ap- 
proximation of  their  thickness,  they  are  badly  faulted  and  show  some 
folding,  so  that  probably  there  has  been  much  duplication  of  bedding. 

Definite  age  determinations  have  not  been  possible  for  the  indi- 
vidual members  of  the  Paleozoic.  From  the  earlier  work  of  Smith 
and  Eakin 1 there  appears  to  be  ground  for  the  belief  that  these  rocks 
range  in  age  from  pre- Silurian  and  possibly  pre-Cambrian  to  Car- 
boniferous, and  that  the  greenstones  which  intrude  them  are  prob- 
ably Devonian  or  Carboniferous. 

ANDESITIC  TUFFS,  FLOWS,  AND  BRECCIAS. 

In  the  region  extending  from  the  Koyuk,  near  the  East  Fork, 
northward  along  the  Buckland-Kiwalik  divide,  is  a complex  series 
of  volcanic  rocks,  chiefly  andesitic  in  character  but  also  including 
diabases  and  peridotites.  These  rocks  occupy  one  of  the  areas  mapped 
by  Smith  and  Eakin2  as  “undifferentiated,  nomnet amorphic  in- 
trusives  and  effusives.”  In  the  northern  part  of  the  Buckland- 
Kiwalik  area  they  were  • grouped  in  mapping  by  Moffit 3 with  the 
much  later  basalts.  In  the  present  report  the  basalts  have  been  partly 
separated  in  mapping,  but  north  of  Quartz  Creek  the  data  at  hand 
are  not  sufficient  to  warrant  an  attempt  at  separation,  and  the  an- 
desites as  mapped,  therefore,  include  areas  of  the  later  basalts. 

A number  of  different  phases  occur  in  this  series  in  a section  that 
was  examined  for  several  hundred  feet  along  Sweepstakes  Creek. 

1 Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  A geologic  reconnaissance  in  southeastern  Seward 
Peninsula  and  the  Norton  Bay-Nulato  region,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  449,  pp. 
93-95,  1911. 

2 Idem,  pi.  6. 

2 Moffit,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  pi.  3. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  373 

Typical  graywacke  beds  appear,  together  with  conglomerates  and 
tuffaceous  rock,  yet  they  are  composed  of  fragments  of  the  near-by 
distinctively  effusive  andesites  or  of  essentially  the  same  minerals. 
These  rocks,  which  are  sedimentary  in  origin,  are  not  greatly  differ- 
ent in  appearance  from  the  effusive  types,  and  it  is  not  always  pos- 
sible to  separate  the  two  without  recourse  to  a microscopic  examina- 
tion of  thin  sections.  Practically  all  are  dark  gray,  usually  with  a 
strong  greenish  tinge.  Porphyritic  facies  are  fairly  common  and  the 
coarser  grained  of  these  are  locally  known  as  “diorite.”  Different 
degrees  of  metamorphism  have  been  suffered  by  the  series  in  different 
parts  of  the  area;  west  of  Granite  Creek,  between  it  and  the  bend 
of  Sweepstakes  Creek,  and  half  a mile  below  the  Hot  Springs  on 
Spring  Creek,  the  rocks  have  been  deformed  and  appear  to  be  much 
jointed,  faulted,  and  sheared  and  to  have  a considerable  development 
of  quartz  and  calcite  veins.  Elsewhere  they  have  suffered  little  de- 
formation, as  at  the  head  of  Greenstone  Creek,  where  they  can  not 
be  readily  distinguished  from  the  much  later  basalts,  which  here  are 
less  vesicular  than  usual. 

One  of  the  features  of  a phase  of  these  rocks  on  Dime  and  Sweep- 
stakes  creeks  is  the  weathering  along  closely  spaced  joints,  so  that  it 
is  difficult  to  get  a fresh  fracture  surface,  as  the  rock  tends  to  break 
along  the  joints.  The  brownish-black  weathered  surface  is  termed 
“ burnt  rock  ” or  “burnt  lava  ” by  the  miners. 

Typically  these  rocks  consist  of  phenocrysts  of  plagioclase,  chiefly 
andesine,  and  augite  in  a finer  groundmass;  of  similar  composition, 
and  accessory  magnetite  is  usually  present.  Ilmenite  and  olivine  may 
be  present  also  in  some  specimens.  Secondary  minerals  give  the 
rock  its  green  color  and  consist  largely  of  chlorite  and  some  horn- 
blende. 

With  the  rocks  of  this  composition,  which  are  essentially  extrusive 
in  character,  intrusive  rocks  are  closely  associated  in  some  small  areas. 
The  intrusives  are  generally  of  a more  basic  character  and  include 
gabbros,  diabases,  and  peridotites,  the  last  characterized  by  their 
dark  color,  as  they  consist  essentially  of  olivine  and  a dark  pyroxene. 
From  these  rocks  the  platinum  is  probably  derived,  as  well  as  the 
chrome  spinel,  which  together  with  the  olivine  appears  in  the  con- 
centrates wherever  platinum  has  been  found  in  this  area. 

Several  factors  prevent  the  determination  of  the  attitude  of  these 
rocks.  Exposures  in  undisturbed  outcrops  are  not  especially  com- 
mon and  where  present  are  generally  massive,  showing  little  or  no 
structural  features.  On  Sweepstakes  Creek,  on  some  of  the  sedi- 
mentary beds,  strikes  ranging  from  northeast  to  east  and  steep  north- 
erly dips  were  observed.  These  rocks  are  much  disturbed,  as  shown 
by  the  exposures  on  Spring  Creek,  yet  from  their  wide  distribu- 
tion and  the  general  lack  of  infolded  older  or  younger  geologic 


374 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


units,  it  is  apparent  that  the  series  must  have  a maximum  thickness  of 
several  thousand  feet. 

Data  as  to  the  age  of  these  rocks  do  not  permit  a statement  of  the 
exact  time  of  their  formation.  They  are  younger  than  the  Paleozoic 
rocks  and  older  than  the  Cretaceous  sediments,  so  that  they  may  be 
very  late  Paleozoic  or  early  or  middle  Mesozoic.  As  the  basic 
coarsely  granular  intrusives  in  this  series  are  not  known  to  occur 
elsewhere,  they  are  probably  closely  related  in  age  to  the  rocks  in 
which  they  occur. 

GRANITES,  SYENITES,  AND  DIORITES. 

The  granitic  rocks  in  the  southern  portion  of  the  area  have  been 
described  by  Mendenhall 1 and  by  Smith  and  Eakin,2  and  those  in  the 
northern  portion  by  Moffit.3  Only  one  area  of  these  rocks  was  seen 
by  the  writer,  the  intrusive  mass  which  forms  Granite  Mountain. 
Moffit 4 describes  these  rocks  as  follows : 

Hornblende  is  the  prevailing  dark  mineral  of  the  granites,  but  at  times 
biotite  takes  its  place.  By  a decrease  in  the  amount  of  quartz  the  granites  ap- 
proach syenites  in  composition,  such  phases  being  characterized  by  the  abun- 
dance and  large  size  of  orthoclase  crystals,  which  usually  show  Carlsbad  twin- 
ning and  have  a roughly  parallel  arrangement,  with  the  small  intervening 
spaces  filled  with  hornblende,  biotite,  and  a small  amount  of  quartz.  Titanite 
is  abundant. 

Moffit4  also  describes  a garnet  pyroxene  malignite  which  is  re- 
lated to  the  syenitic  rocks  just  mentioned.  Similar  types  appear  in 
the  gravels  of  Cub  Creek,  and  black  garnets  (melanite)  from  the 
same  source  are  very  common  in  the  concentrates  from  Rube  Creek 
and  less  so  in  those  from  Sweepstakes.  Coarsely  porphyritic  rocks  of 
approximately  the  same  nature  are  found  on  Sweepstakes  Creek  near 
the  mouth  of  Granite.  Near  the  hot  springs  on  Spring  Creek  the  rock 
is  a typical  diorite,  composed  essentially  of  plagioclase  feldspars  and 
hornblende,  together  with  small  amounts  of  accessory  constituents. 

Dikes  of  syenitic  type  cut  the  andesite  series,  so  that  the  dikes  are 
the  younger.  From  the  fact  that  the  pebbles  of  the  Cretaceous  con- 
glomerate5 along  the  East  Fork-Buckland  divide  are  similar  in  char- 
acter to  these  igneous  rocks,  their  pre- Cretaceous  age  appears  to  be 
well  established.  Possibly,  however,  some  of  the  types  are  pre- 
Cretaceous,  whereas  others  were  not  intruded  until  later  and  are 
approximately  synchronous  with  the  deformation  of  the  Cretaceous 
sediments. 

1 Mendenhall,  W.  C.,  Reconnaissance  in  the  Norton  Bay  region,  Alaska,  in  1900  : U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Special  Pub.,  p.  204,  1901. 

2 Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  64-70. 

3 Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Fairhaven  gold  placers,  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol. 
Bull.  247,  pp.  27-30,  1905. 

4 Idem,  p.  29. 

e Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  op.  cit.,  p.  56. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  375 

CRETACEOUS  SEDIMENTARY  ROCKS. 

From  a study  of  the  distribution  of  the  Cretaceous  rocks  of  western 
Alaska  it  appears  that  at  the  beginning  of  the  Cretaceous  period  a 
broad  valley  or  embayment  occupied  much  of  the  area  east  of  the 
Darby  Mountains,  which  included  much  of  the  Kovuk,  lower  Yukon, 
Innoko,  and  lower  Kuskokwim  valleys.  Scattered  through  this  wide 
area  were  small  land  areas,  such  as  the  Kaiyuh  Mountains  and  their 
northeastern  extension,  as  well  as  minor  elevated  points,  which  for 
a time  furnished  material  for  the  vast  amount  of  sediments  of  this 
age  but  which  were  later  covered  by  transported  silts  and  sands 
derived  from  other  sources.  In  this  region  the  presence  of  the  early 
Cretaceous  has  not  been  proved.  During  that  epoch  it  probably  con- 
stituted a portion  of  the  land  surface.  During  later  Cretaceous  time, 
however,  by  a subsidence  of  the  region  now  occupied  by  rocks  of  that 
age,  the  sea  gradually  encroached  upon  the  land  areas.  Where  the 
coasts  were  bold  and  rocky,  like  much  of  the  present  southern 
coast  of  Seward  Peninsula  between  the  mouth  of  the  Kwiniuk  River 
and  Topkok  Head,  conglomerates  were  deposited.  The  offshore  de- 
posits were  sands,  and  the  zone  of  conglomerates  was  relatively  nar- 
row. Where  the  sea  encroached  upon  delta  areas,  as  at  the  mouth 
of  the  Tubutulik  or  Kwik  or  the  much  larger  deltas  of  streams  cor- 
responding to  the  Yukon,  much  finer  sediments  were  laid  down,  such 
as  fine  sands  and  silts,  which  later  by  consolidation  formed  sand- 
stones, shales,  and  slates.  The  offshore  deposits  were  practically  all 
shales,  some  of  which  were  somewhat  calcareous.  The  coal  beds  of 
this  age  were  probably  accumulated  in  swampy  areas  but  little  above 
sea  level,  where  the  climatic  conditions  of  that  time  particularly  fav- 
ored vegetal  growth  and  accumulation. 

The  distribution  of  the  Cretaceous  sediments  is  indicated  on  the 
map  (PI.  X) , but  several  areas,  such  as  the  small  areas  on  Peace  River 
and  the  coal-bearing  bed  of  the  Kugruk,  have  not  been  delineated. 

Several  types  of  deposits  are  illustrated  by  the  rocks  in  the  valley 
of  Dime  Creek,  or  near  it.  At  the  mouth  of  Silver  Gulch  the  con- 
glomerates represent  the  near-shore  or  beach  deposits  along  a coast, 
the  rocks  of  which  were  Paleozoic  limestones  and  slates.  The  peb- 
bles of  the  conglomerate  are  largely  of  these  two  lithologic  types. 
Farther  out  in  the  valley  of  Dime  Creek  much  finer  grained  rocks 
appear.  They  are  highly  calcareous,  showing  that  the  probable 
source  of  a large  portion  of  the  grains  composing  them  was  the  lime- 
stone. Quartz  grains  and  clayey  material  make  up  most  of  the  re- 
mainder of  the  sandstones. 

The  grits  and  fine  conglomerates  found  near  the  landing  are  charac- 
terized by  the  presence  of  great  numbers  of  small  white  rounded 
quartz  pebbles.  It  appears  likely  that  these  sediments  represent  either 


376  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

stream  or  offshore  deposits.  Quartz  veins  in  the  Paleozoic  rocks  were 
the  source  of  the  pebbles. 

In  the  valley  of  Peace  River  a little  evidence  of  the  former  presence 
of  Cretaceous  rocks  is  found,  and  it  is  probable  that  detailed  examina- 
tions of  all  the  exposures,  and  of  fragments  of  bedrock  from  the 
numerous  prospect  holes  would  reveal  a much  wider  occurrence  of 
these  sediments  than  the  present  mapping  indicates.  On  Flat  Creek 
fragments  of  sandstone  were  seen  on  the  dump  of  a prospect  hole, 
and  on  Moon  Creek,  less  than  half  a mile  from  the  river,  another 
dump  showed  fragments  of  slate  and  many  white  pebbles  similar  to 
those  in  the  grits.  These  pebbles  were  probably  of  local  origin,  rather 
than  stream-borne  gravels. 

The  other  areas  of  Cretaceous  rocks  have  been  described  by  Smith 
and  Eakin 1 and  are  essentially  the  same  in  character  as  in  the  vicinity 
of  Dime  Creek.  Fossil  plants 2 * from  the  Kwik-Tubutulik  divide  serve 
to  establish  the  Cretaceous  age  of  the  series.  Moffits  correlates  the 
beds  associated  with  the  coal  on  the  Kugruk  with  those  of  the  Koyuk. 

TERTIARY  ROCKS. 

It  is  not  known  how  long  sedimentation  continued  after  the  close 
of  the  Cretaceous.  In  near-by  regions  there  is  reason  to  believe  that 
it  was  uninterrupted  until  well  into  the  Eocene.  By  that  time  a con- 
siderable thickness  of  Cretaceous  beds  had  accumulated,  a large  por- 
tion of  which  has  since  been  eroded.  At  or  near  the  close  of  the 
Eocene,  however,  earth  movements  of  considerable  magnitude  took 
place4  in  different  parts  of  Alaska,  and  this  region  was  affected  by 
them.  Igneous  intrusions  along  the  axes  of  the  folds  accompanied 
this  diastrophism.  Some  of  the  rocks  of  the  Granite  Mountain  area, 
already  described,  and  the  accompanying  dikes,  which  are  found  on 
Bear  and  Candle  creeks,  may  be  of  this  character. 

Smith  and  Eakin 5 describe  a series  of  rocks  which  range  in  charac- 
ter from  augite  andesite  to  augite  diorite  in  the  vicinity  of  Christmas 
Mountain,  and  on  the  Shaktolik  quartz  porphyry  was  found  by  them. 
These  rocks  are  post-Cretaceous. 

The  topography  formed  by  these  intrusions  and  the  earth  move- 
ments was  much  more  rugged  than  that  of  the  present,  and  conse- 
quently there  was  little  or  no  deposition  of  terrestrial  sediments  until 
quite  late  in  the  Tertiary,  when  land  forms  comparable  in  character 
with  those  now  found  had  been  developed.  In  some  of  the  basins  of 

1 Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  54-60. 

2 Idem,  p.  56. 

2 Moffit,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.  p.  26. 

4 Brooks,  A.  H.,  The  geography  and  geology  of  Alaska  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper 
45,  p.  266,  1906. 

B Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  70-71. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  377 

that  time  terrestrial  deposits  were  formed.  It  is  not  possible  to  state 
the  extent  of  these  deposits,  both  on  account  of  the  small  amount  of 
field  work  and  on  account  of  their  great  resemblance  to  alluvial  ma- 
terial of  considerably  later  age.  One  area  has  been  described  by 
Smith  and  Eakin 1 as  occurring  on  the  Rathlatulik.  Another  small 
area  was  observed  by  the  writer  on  Wilson  Creek,  one  of  the  head- 
water streams  of  the  Kiwalik.  At  both  areas  are  deposits  of  lignite 
in  association  with  clays. 

On  Wilson  Creek  the  lignite  is  several  feet  thick  and  contains 
squeezed  and  carbonized  tree  trunks  of  small  size.  Overlying  it  is  a 
bluish  clay,  which  is  oxidized  to  yellow  on  the  surface.  This  clay 
has  crept  or  flowed  over  the  lignite  until  it  has  almost  completely 
covered  it.  A small  amount  of  lignite  had  been  mined  and  the  open- 
ing showed  that  the  bed  was  at  about  the  level  of  the  creek.  Appar- 
ently overlying  the  clay  were  basalt  flows,  which  crop  out  on  the  west 
bank  of  the  stream  about  75  yards  or  less  from  it.  About  200  yards 
farther  downstream,  at  a second  small  cropping,  a thickness  of  6 or  8 
inches  of  lignite  was  exposed.  Neither  the  rocks  above  or  below  it 
were  exposed,  and  the  lignite  was  partly  covered  by  moss  and  other 
vegetation. 

There  is  no  direct  evidence  of  the  age  of  these  deposits,  whether 
Tertiary  or  Quaternary.  From  the  fact  that  they  are  apparently 
older  than  the  basalts,  which  are  believed  to  have  been  extruded  dur- 
ing the  late  Tertiary  or  early  Quaternary,  an  assumption  of  late 
Tertiary  age  is  made. 

BASALTS. 

Vesicular  basalts,  generally  containing  olivine  and  in  places,  as  at 
St.  Michael,  associated  with  tuffs,  are  widely  distributed  in  western 
Alaska,  especially  at  the  base  of  I.Seward  Peninsula  and  the  near-by 
regions  to  the  south.  In  the  Kiwalik-Koyuk  region  they  occupy 
areas  comparable  in  size  with  those  of  any  other  lithologic  unit  and 
form  the  divides  between  the  Koyuk  and  the  Buckland,  the  Koyuk 
and  the  Kiwalik,  and  the  divide  at  the  heads  of  the  Koyuk,  Kuzitrin, 
and  Goodhope.  They  probably  occupy  considerably  larger  areas 
along  the  Kiwalik-Buckland  divide  than  the  map  shows,  and  for- 
merly their  extent  was  certainly  much  greater  than  now.  Thus,  the 
entire  valley  of  Peace  River  may  have  been  filled,  so  that  the  areas  on 
either  side  of  the  river  near  Moon  Creek  were  continuous,  and,  in- 
deed, the  three  large  areas  already  mentioned  may  have  been  con- 
tinuous. The  basalts  would  thus  have  filled  the  entire  valley  of  the 
Koyuk  and  extended  south  to  include  the  area  north  of  the  Mukluk- 
tulik  and  that  on  the  Tubutulik.  Possibly  the  area  at  the  head  of  the 
Koyuk  had  a different  source  and  did  not  reach  the  other  flows. 


1 Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  op.  cit.,  p.  140. 


378 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

Whether  there  was  a connection  between  these  flows  and  those  on  the 
south  side  of  Norton  Sound  has  not  been  proved. 

Concerning  the  lavas  along  the  Koyuk,  Mendenhall 1 states : 

The  lava  is  a green,  gray,  or  black  rock,  the  color  depending  in  part  upon  its 
freshness.  It  is  compact  or  vesicular  and  usually  porphyritic,  olivine  being  the 
most  conspicuous  of  the  phenocrysts,  although  plagioclase  is  recognizable  mega- 
scopically  in  some  instances.  Sometimes  the  vesicles  are  filled  with  opal ; more 
frequently  they  are  without  filling.  The  rock  varies  in  texture,  having  sometimes 
a very  glassy  groundmass  and  in  other  cases  showing  a coarse,  well-defined, 
interstitial  arrangement  with  almost  no  glass.  * * * The  basalt  beds  have 

not  been  disturbed  since  they  were  poured  out.  They  are  horizontal  wherever 
their  attitude  is  determinable  and  overlie  all  the  other  rocks. 

Moffit,2 3  after  describing  the  lavas  west  of  the  Kugruk,  says : 

The  basalts  and  diabases  of  the  area  west  of  Kiwalik  River  are  somewhat 
different  in  occurrence  from  those  previously  described,  in  that  they  are  found 
at  considerably  higher  elevations  and  apparently  are  not  directly  connected  with 
those  of  the  more  western  area.  The  hills  facing  Kiwalik  River  on  the  east  are 
largely  made  up  of  lavas  in  which  the  diabases  predominate  over  the  basalts. 
Sheeted  flows  do  not  occur  frequently,  and  under  the  microscope  the  rock  is 
seen  at  times  to  be  somewhat  altered. 

Whether  the  Kiwalik-Buckland-Koyuk  flows  were  connected  with 
those  at  the  head  of  the  Koyuk  is  not  readily  apparent.  Probably  the 
lavas  were  discharged  from  different  vents,  even  though  the  Koyuk 
from  its  source  to  its  mouth  was  once  filled.  F rom  the  features  which 
have  been  described  by  Moffit  it  appears  likely  that  some  of  the  lavas 
from  the  vents  at  the  head  of  the  Koyuk  are  relatively  recent.  On  the 
lower  Koyuk,  however,  there  is  the  evidence  of  the  erosion  of  a thick- 
ness of  200  feet  or  more  of  these  rocks  from  the  valley  of  Peace  River, 
by  a relatively  small  stream,  which,  however,  probably  had  a gradient 
much  greater  than  it  now  possesses.  Valleys  cut  since  the  extrusion  of 
the  lava  have  been  filled  to  a depth  of  nearly  200  feet  with  gravel, 
and  new  channels,  such  as  the  present  course  of  the  Koyuk,  were  again 
cut.  From  this  evidence  it  is  apparent  that  the  lavas  must  have  been 
extruded  in  either  Tertiary  or  very  early  Quaternary  time. 

QUATERNARY  DEPOSITS. 

Since  the  extravasation  of  the  lavas,  which  in  this  area  at  least 
probably  occurred  in  late  Tertiary  time,  there  have  been  oscillations 
of  this  portion  of  the  earth’s  crust  which  have  caused  the  submersion 
and  emergence  of  the  land  surface  and  which  were  possibly  repeated 
several  times.  These  movements  took  place  with  little  or  no  attend- 
ant warping  or  folding.  From  the  forms  of  the  valleys  and  the 

1 Mendenhall,  W.  C.,  A reconnaissance  in  the  Norton  Bay  region,  Alaska,  in  1900: 

U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Special  Pub.,  p.  206,  1901. 

3 Moffit,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  p.  34. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  379 

depths  of  gravels,  which  in  places  lie  well  below  sea  level,  it  is  ap- 
parent that  the  land  surface  once  stood  at  least  50  feet  or  more 
higher  than  it  does  at  present  with  regard  to  sea  level.  An  elevation 
of  100  feet,  which  is  by  no  means  improbable,  would  now  make  a 
land  surface  of  Norton  Bay  and  much  of  Norton  Sound. 

Throughout  the  Quaternary  period  erosion  was  in  progress  wher- 
ever the  land  lay  above  sea  level.  From  the  erosional  debris  a com- 
plex series  of  imbricated  unconsolidated  marine  and  alluvial  deposits 
was  formed  through  surface  oscillations  and  filled  the  lowlands  and 
stream  valleys.  Sections  of  these  deposits  are  obtainable  only  from 
prospect  holes  and  show  alternations  of  sand  and  gravel.  In  places 
their  thickness  is  more  than  200  feet.  On  Dime  Creek  holes  over  100 
feet  deep  have  been  sunk.  In  some  of  these  holes  fragments  of  shells 
have  been  found,  but  the  fragments  are  not  of  a nature  to  permit  a 
determination  of  their  character  and  age. 

The  older  gravels  are  indistinguishable  from  those  that  occur 
along  the  present  stream  courses  and  beaches,  so  that  possibly  some 
of  them  may  antedate  the  extrusion  of  the  basalts,  but  until  more 
definite  information  is  at  hand  as  to  the  age  of  both  the  basalts  and 
the  older  gravels,  it  appears  logical  to  assume  that  the  basalts  are  of 
Tertiary  age  and  that  the  gravels,  some  of  which  contain  basalt 
pebbles,  are  of  Quaternary  age. 

In  addition  to  those  deposits  of  alluvial  or  marine  origin,  uncon- 
solidated debris  and  organic  deposits  cover  much  of  the  surface. 
Mechanical  disintegration  through  different  phases  of  weathering 
produces  an  angular  rock  talus  on  all  uncovered  slopes ; this  material 
is  gradually  transported  to  the  bottoms  of  the  valleys  by  solifluction, 
of  which  gravity  and  the  action  of  frost  appear  to  be  the  principal 
forces.  A large  number  of  the  gentler  slopes  show  the  lobate  forms 
which  characterize  soil  flows,  and  the  scarps  at  their  front  may  be 
exceptionally  as  much  as  6 to  10  feet  high,  but  normally  are  1 to  2 
feet. 

Except  on  the  very  steepest  slopes  and  on  some  of  the  strongly 
wind-swept  higher  ridges  there  is  an  almost  universal  covering  of 
vegetation,  largely  mosses  and  lichens.  This  vegetation  serves  to 
hold  moisture  and  also  to  prevent  the  melting  of  the  underlying 
frozen,  moisture-saturated  peaty  material,  thus  perpetuating  the 
conditions  most  favorable  for  growths  of  this  kind.  As  a result  ex- 
tensive bogs  cover  much  of  the  area,  on  the  broad,  flat-topped  ridges 
at  moderate  elevations  as  well  as  in  the  lowlands.  In  the  flatter  areas 
there  is  a tendency  toward  an  accumulation  of  peat,  but  on  the 
slopes,  the  vegetation  is  disturbed  by  the  soil  movements  and  shows 
less  tendency  to  accumulate. 


380  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 

MINERAL  RESOURCES. 

HISTORY  OF  MINING  DEVELOPMENT. 

Soon  after  the  discovery  of  gold  at  Nome  there  was  active  pros- 
pecting over  much  of  the  more  readily  accessible  streams  of  Seward 
Peninsula,  and  Candle  Creek  was  staked 1 during  July,  1901.  Bear 
Creek  was  staked  and  recorded  in  August  of  the  same  year  but  is  said 
to  have  been  staked  though  not  recorded 1 in  1900. 

Mining  has  resulted  in  a considerable  production  yearly  from 
Candle  Creek.  The  annual  output  from  Bear  Creek  has  shown 
considerable  variation;  in  some  years  little  or  no  production  was 
made. 

In  the  basin  of  the  Koyuk  some  prospecting  has  been  done  on  a 
number  of  streams  during  the  period  from  1899  or  1900  2 up  to  the 
present.  A summary  of  this  work  up  to  1909  is  included  in  the  report 
of  Smith  and  Eakin.3  Until  that  time  no  workable  placers  had  been 
discovered  in  the  Koyuk  region.  In  1909  some  prospecting  had  been 
done  on  Peace  River  near  the  mouth  of  Sweepstakes  Creek,  and  in  the 
fall  of  that  year  Sweepstakes  Creek  was  staked  for  about  9 miles, 
practically  its  entire  length,  by  S.  B.  Smith  and  several  associates. 
After  prospecting  for  a number  of  years,  the  title  to  the  lower  4 
miles  of  the  creek  was  allowed  to  lapse.  Gold  valued  at  a few 
thousand  dollars  is  said  to  have  been  taken  out  from  this  creek  in 
1910,  and  an  average  annual  production  between  $4,000  and  $5,000  is 
reported  for  the  period  from  1910  to  1917,  inclusive. 

In  1910  Dime  Creek  was  staked  and  some  prospecting  was  done  on 
some  of  the  lower  claims,  but  no  commercial  placer  ground  was  dis- 
covered. Rube  Creek,  then  called  Diamond  Creek,  is  also  said  to 
have  been  staked  the  same  year,  and  a small  amount  of  prospecting 
was  done  but  with  negative  results.  No  further  work  was  done  by 
the  original  holders  of  this  ground,  and  their  title  was  lost.  In  1915 
Dime  Creek  was  again  prospected,  and  gold  was  discovered  at  the 
mouth  of  Eldorado  Creek  on  April  4.  On  the  hypothesis  that 
the  gold  had  been  derived  from  the  metamorphic  rocks  which  form 
the  divide  between  Peace  River  and  Dime  Creek,  the  discoverers 
staked  the  first  claims  on  Eldorado  Creek,  leaving  what  proved  to 
be  the  richest  ground  open  to  staking  by  later  comers,  who  staked  not 
only  the  creek  but  the  first  and  second  tier  bench  claims,  on  both  the 
right  and  left  limits  of  Dime  Creek.  Many  of  its  smaller  tributaries 

1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Fairhaven  gold  placers,  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  247,  p.  50,  1905. 

2 Mendenhall,  W.  C.,  A reconnaissance  in  the  Norton  Bay  region,  Alaska,  in  1900  : U.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Special  Pub.,  p.  212,  1901. 

3 Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  A geologic  reconnaissance  in  southeastern  Seward 
Peninsula  and  the  Norton  Bay-Nulato  region,  Alaska  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  449,  pp. 
110-115,  1911. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  381 

have  also  been  staked,  as  have  a number  of  the  near-by  tributary 
streams  and  gulches  of  both  Koyuk  and  Peace  rivers,  as  well  as  some 
of  the  tributaries  of  Sweepstakes  Creek.  A number  of  claims  were 
staked  on  Rube  Creek  and  some  small  gulches  tributary  to  it  on 
March  31,  1917. 

When  the  first  claims  were  staked  on  Sweepstakes  and  later  on 
Dime  Creek,  recording  had  to  be  done  at  Council,  as  the  Koyuk 
Basin  lay  within  the  limits  of  the  Council  City  precinct.  To  facili- 
tate recording,  however,  a new  precinct  was  formed  by  dividing  the 
Council  City  precinct  into  the  Council  City  and  the  Koyuk  precincts. 
The  Koyuk  precinct,  as  defined  by  a decree  of  the  court  dated  De- 
cember 28,  1916,  includes  the  drainage  basins  of  the  Inglutalik, 
Koyuk,  and  Kwik  rivers,  as  well  as  a few  small  streams  that  lie 
between  the  Inglutalik  and  Kwik  and  that  flow  into  Norton  Bay. 

ECONOMIC  CONDITIONS. 

MEANS  OF  COMMUNICATION. 

Candle,  on  the  northern  side  of  the  peninsula,  is  located  on 
Kiwalik  River,  about  7 miles  from  the  town  of  Kiwalik,  at  the  mouth 
of  the  river,  where  supplies  are  brought  in  summer  by  small  coast- 
wise vessels  from  Nome  or  by  the  larger  freighters  direct  from  San 
Francisco  or  Seattle.  They  are  carried  up  the  river  in  shallow- 
draft  power  scows.  The  effects  of  the  higher  tides  are  sometimes 
noted  at  Candle.  On  the  other  hand,  at  normal  or  low  stages  of 
water,  if  a south  wind  is  blowing,  considerable  difficulty  may  be  ex- 
perienced in  reaching  Candle  by  boat,  for  the  wind  may  be  sufficient 
to  overcome  the  effects  of  the  incoming  tide.  In  summer  the  mail 
is  brought  from  Nome  by  a small  coasting  vessel,  on  a two  or  three 
weeks’  schedule,  which  may  be  lengthened  to  nearly  a month  by  un- 
favorable conditions.  In  winter  communication  and  transportation 
of  the  mail  is  by  dog  team,  and  the  mail  is  on  a fortnightly  schedule. 
There  is  a telephone  line  from  Candle  to  Nome,  and  a local  line  from 
Candle  out  to  Candle  Creek. 

Bear  Creek  is  about  40  miles  from  Candle,  with  which  it  is  con- 
nected by  a wagon  trail  that  is  poorly  defined  on  some  of  the  wide, 
flat- topped  tundra-covered  ridges  over  which  it  runs.  Most  of  the 
mining  supplies  are  brought  to  Bear  Creek  in  the  spring  by  horse 
team  and  sled,  although  some  supplies  are  brought  in  by  wagon  dur- 
ing the  summer.  Mail  for  this  creek  goes  to  Candle. 

It  is  about  15  miles  from  Bear  Creek  over  Granite  Mountain  to 
Sweepstakes  Creek,  at  the  mouth  of  Granite  Creek,  about  10  miles 
from  Sweepstakes  to  the  road  house  on  Dime  Creek,  and  about  7 
miles  from  there  to  the  place  known  as  Dime  Landing,  or  simply 
“the  Landing,”  on  Koyuk  River.  A number  of  small  gasoline 
115086°— 19 25 


382 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


schooners,  some  of  which  made  an  effort  to  maintain  a 6-day  round- 
trip  schedule,  afford  frequent  communication  between  Nome,  Golof- 
nin  (Cheenik),  and  the  Landing.  During  the  summer  of  1917 
mails  were  brought  on  a monthly  schedule  to  Golofnin  from  Nome 
and  St.  Michael  and  carried  from  there  to  the  Koyuk.  Haycock  post 
office  is  located  at  the  mining  center  on  Dime  Creek.  F reighting  was 
done  from  the  Landing  to  the  creek  over  two  very  soft  trails.  The 
miners  on  Sweepstakes  got  in  most  of  their  supplies  during  the  win- 
ter, but  some  freighting  was  also  done  by  wagon  during  the  summer. 

SUPPLIES. 

A large  part  of  the  supplies  for  both  Candle  and  Dime  creeks  are 
brought  from  Nome.  The  local  rate  from  Nome  to  Kiwalik  was  $20 ; 
that  from  Seattle  to  Kiwalik  on  general  merchandise  in  1917  was  $19 
for  less  than  car-lot  shipments  and  $14  for  car  lots,  not  including 
lighterage.  Freight  from  Kiwalik  to  Candle  was  $5  a ton.  From 
Candle  to  the  mouth  of  Patterson  Creek  (claim  19  above  Discovery), 
the  summer  rate  was  2J  cents  a pound.  A considerable  amount  of  the 
tonnage  of  supplies  to  all  the  creeks  in  the  area  consists  of  gasolene 
and  distillate  for  use  of  the  engines  used  in  pumping  or  on  the  dredge 
on  Candle  Creek.  A fairly  good  wagon  road  to  the  mining  plants 
makes  summer  freighting  at  Candle  but  little  more  difficult  than  that 
to  many  mining  camps  in  the  States.  Supplies  are  hauled  as  far  as 
possible  in  winter. 

Supplies  are  obtained  on  the  Koyuk  from  both  Nome  and  Golofnin, 
and  the  freight  rate  from  Nome  to  the  Landing  on  the  Koyuk  is  $20  a 
ton.  An  example  of  the  effect  of  poor  roads  on  the  cost  of  haulage  is 
shown  by  the  fact  that  the  summer  rate  from  the  Landing  to  Dime 
Creek  is  4 cents  a pound,  when  the  hauling  is  done  over  the  extremely 
poor  and  rough  roads  across  the  tundra,  whereas  the  winter  rate  is  1 
cent  a pound,  when  the  hauling  is  done. by  sleds  and  the  roads  are 
fairly  good.  The  cost  of  freight  from  Seattle  to  Nome,  when  added 
to  the  charges  just  mentioned,  makes  prices  at  Dime  Creek  about  6 
cents  a pound  higher  than  those  in  Seattle  through  transportation 
charges  alone.  At  one  of  the  stores  on  the  creek  the  following  prices 
were  charged  in  August,  1917:  Potatoes,  12  cents;  flour,  12  cents; 
bacon,  60  cents;  ham,  50  cents;  sugar,  16^  cents  a pound.  A road  is 
to  be  constructed  by  the  Territorial  Koad  Commission  from  the  Land- 
ing to  the  center  of  mining  operations  on  Dime  Creek,  and  this  should 
reduce  the  cost  of  transportation  considerably. 

During  the  winter  and  spring  of  1916-17  supplies  were  difficult  to 
obtain,  largely  on  account  of  the  shortage  of  teams  for  hauling.  In 
the  fall  of  1917  conditions  had  improved,  for  in  addition  to  two  or 
three  teams  used  for  private  hauling  there  were  two  teams  engaged 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  383 

in  freighting,  and  it  was  reported  that  others  were  coming.  If  a 
shortage  occurs  during  the  winter,  supplies  could  be  freighted  from 
Golofnin. 

Little  wild  game,  except  ducks  and  geese,  is  to  be  found  in  this, 
region.  Rabbits  are  sometimes  plentiful.  Ptarmigan  are  scarce. 
Occasionally  bear  are  seen,  but  not  often.  The  few  caribou  that  are 
reported  here  have  probably  strayed  from  one  of  the  reindeer  herds 
which  are  pastured  near  by. 

In  the  smaller  streams,  where  mining  operation  have  not  muddied 
the  water,  both  grayling  and  trout  are  found.  In  the  larger  streams 
salmon  are  caught  and  dried  for  dog  feed. 

TIMBER  AND  COAL. 

A scanty  growth  of  spruce  covers  parts  of  eastern  Seward  Peninsula, 
and  good-sized  trees  are  found  along  the  high,  well-drained  banks  of 
the  larger  streams  up  to  about  400  feet  elevation  or  possibly  a little 
higher.  There  is  no  timber  in  the  vicinity  of  Candle,  although  it 
grows  on  the  upper  part  of  the  Kiwalik  and  Buckland  rivers.  In  the 
Koyuk  basin  good-sized  timber,  suitable  for  ginpoles  or  masts  for 
mining,  is  found  along  some  of  the  larger  tributaries,  such  as  Peace 
River  and  the  East  Fork.  Timber  is  present  for  only  a short  dis- 
tance up  Sweepstakes  Creek.  A fair  growth  is  said  to  have  once 
fringed  Dime  Creek,  but  this  has  been  removed  and  there  now  re- 
mains only  scattered  stunted  trees  common  to  poorly  drained  and 
boggy  hillsides,  although  some  of  the  steeper-sided  valleys,  where  the 
drainage  is  better,  support  timber  which  furnishes  excellent  fuel,  and 
even  house  logs  are  obtained.  A large  number  of  logs  of  good  size 
will  be  required  in  the  construction  of  the  road  from  the  Landing  to 
Dime  Creek,  and  this  will  materially  decrease  the  available  timber. 

Gasoline  and  distillate  are  used  generally  wherever  pumping  is  to 
be  done  and  on  the  dredge  on  Candle  Creek.  Coal  is  the  principal 
fuel  used  in  the  vicinity  of  Candle,  but  on  Dime  Creek  its  use  appears 
to  be  confined  mainly  to  domestic  purposes  at  present.  Within  a very 
short  time  it  will  be  necessary,  on  account  of  the  scarcity  of  timber, 
to  use  coal  or  oil  for  power  and  thawing  in  mining  operations  also. 
It  appears  likely  that  the  production  of  gold  in  1917  would  have  been 
somewhat  larger  had  there  been  a sufficient  number  of  teams  to  haul 
wood  for  fuel  during  the  spring  and  early  in  the  summer,  and  mining 
operations  could  then  have  been  carried  on  much  later  than  they  were. 
It  is  said  that  some  wood  was  hauled  by  dog  teams.  The  cost  of  wood 
at  the  boilers  ranged  from  $16  to  $20  a cord. 

Lignite  is  obtainable  in  the  Candle  district  from  the  vicinity  of  Chi- 
cago Creek,  on  the  Kugruk.  This  coal  formerly  sold  at  about  $30  in 
Candle,  but  none  had  been  brought  from  the  mine  in  1915,  1916,  or 


384 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


1917,  and  bituminous  coal,  which  had  been  shipped  in,  was  used.  It 
cost  about  twice  as  much  as  the  Kugruk  coal  but  was  rated  about  twice 
as  high  for  steaming.  Coal  of  a generally  similar  character  is  found 
near  the  mouth  of  the  Koyuk,  just  about  at  sea  level,  where  one  4- foot 
seam  is  said  to  be  exposed.  Near  by  is  a 2-foot  seam,  and  several 
seams  of  a few  inches  in  width  also  occur.  In  this  connection  it  is 
interesting  to  note  that  a fragment  of  coal  was  picked  up  from  the 
dump  of  a prospect  hole  at  about  claim  9 below  Discovery  on  Dime 
Creek,  together  with  some  angular  sandstone  pebbles,  indicating  that 
the  coal  series  is  probably  present  in  this  general  vicinity.  An  analysis 
of  the  coal  at  the  mouth  of  the  Koyuk,  made  for  Mr.  John  La 
Montaigne,  is  given  for  comparison  with  that  from  the  Kugruk. 


Analyses  of  coal  from  Seward  Peninsula. 


Koyuk 

coal. 

Kugruk 

coal.® 

Fixed  carbon 

39.87 

33.58 

Volatile  combustible 

33.94 

38. 15 

Moisture 

19.89 

24.92 

Ash 

5.86 

3.85 

Sulphur 

.44 

.68 

100. 00 

101. 18 

a Analysis  made  in  laboratory  of  the  Geological  Survey.  See  Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Fairhaven  gold 
placers,  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  247,  p.  67,  1905. 


The  locality  on  the  Koyuk  was  not  visited,  but  it  is  said  to  be  near 
or  at  tidewater,  and  some  difficulty  might  be  had  at  times  in  mining 
on  account  of  flooding  the  workings.  This  coal  is  about  20  miles 
from  the  scene  of  mining  operations  on  Dime  Creek,  and  winter 
haulage  should  present  little  difficulty.  Summer  haulage  might  be 
attempted  by  boating  the  coal  up  to  the  Landing  in  scows  and  haul- 
ing it  by  wagon  from  there.  If  the  deposit  is  workable,  it  should 
furnish  a fuel  at  least  as  good  as  wood  at  about  the  same  price  a ton 
as  the  wood  costs  a cord. 

Another  possible  source  of  fuel  is  the  lignite  on  Wilson  Creek,  one 
of  the  headwater  tributaries  of  Kiwalik  River.  This  deposit  lies 
about  2 or  3 miles  from  SwTeepstakes  Creek,  and  is  therefore  between 
12  and  14  miles  from  Dime  Creek.  A small  opening  has  been  made 
on  the  lignite,  but  it  was  badly  caved  at  the  time  of  the  writer's 
visit  and  but  little  could  be  told  of  the  nature  of  the  bed  or  its  extent. 
It  lies  on  the  west  bank  of  the  creek,  and  apparently  has  a slight  dip 
into  the  bank  and  upstream.  The  lignite  is  extremely  fibrous  and 
contains  tree  stems,  in  some  of  which  the  annular  rings  are  still 
plainly  discernible,  the  wood  apparently  being  altered  but  little, 
although  it  appears  carbonized.  A thickness  of  3 feet  was  exposed 
in  the  face  by  digging,  but  from  the  occurrence  of  the  coal  in  the 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  385 

caved-in  adit,  it  appears  that  the  total  thickness  is  much  greater,  7 or 
8 feet  or  even  more  not  being  improbable.  Overlying  the  coal  is  a 
very  stiff  gummy  clay,  and  apparently  overlying  the  clay  are  basaltic 
lavas.  The  lignite  was  exposed  along  the  stream  for  a distance  of 
about  15  feet,  but  most  of  it  was  covered  by  the  clay,  which  had  crept 
down  over  it.  Fragments  of  the  lignite  appear  below  the  outcrop 
in  the  stream  gravels  for  several  yards.  About  200  yards  down- 
stream a second  outcrop  shows  a thickness  of  a few  inches,  but  the 
thickness  of  the  deposit  may  be  much  more  than  this. 

It  has  been  used  to  a small  extent  for  domestic  purposes  and  seems 
to  be  quite  satisfactory.  No  tests  had  been  macA,  so  far  as  known, 
of  its  suitability  for  making  steam. 

WATER. 

As  in  many  other  parts  of  Seward  Peninsula,  the  question  of  a 
water  supply  in  this  region  is  serious,  and  numerous  expedients  have 
been  adopted  to  utilize  the  water  that  is  available.  Ditches  have 
been  constructed  and  pumps  are  used  to  some  extent,  probably  much 
more  than  in  most  Alaskan  mining  districts.  Where  winter  work  is 
done,  a large  part  of  the  sluicing  of  the  winter  dumps  is  done  with 
the  flood  waters  which  result  from  the  melting  of  the  winter  snows. 

In  the  vicinity  of  Candle  the  problem  is  especially  serious.  A 
ditch  from  west-side  tributaries  of  the  Kiwalik  furnishes  water  for 
hydraulicking  operations  on  John  Bull  Hill,  near  Candle,  but  at 
times  during  the  season  the  ditch  carries  so  little  water  that  mining 
is  impossible.  The  same  conditions  prevail  on  Candle  Creek  and  its 
tributaries,  but  the  dredge  can  operate  in  its  pond,  even  though  but 
little  additional  water  is  coming  in.  Those  plants  which  pump  wTater 
are  somewhat  better  off  than  those  which  depend  on  ditch  water  for 
sluicing,  although  some  losses  of  gold  are  probably  entailed  in  the 
use  of  dirty  water.  On  the  benches  there  is  difficulty  in  getting  water, 
and  often  short  ditches  are  cut  in  the  face  of  the  hillsides  to  catch 
the  run-off  for  use  in  sluicing,  in  connection  with  the  water  obtained 
from  some  of  the  small  depressions.  At  times  Patterson  Creek  car- 
ries considerable  water,  and  this  has  been  utilized  in  mining. 

It  is  said  that  if  water  was  available,  it  would  pay  to  groundsluice 
off  the  overburden  from  a number  of  claims  on  the  benches  and  to 
rework  the  old  piles  of  tailings  as  well.  It  may  be  possible  to  work 
some  of  this  ground  with  water  from  the  Kiwalik  ditch  after  the 
exhaustion  of  the  placer  gravels  upon  which  the  ditch  company  is  now 
operating,  but  rather  extensive  surveys  would  be  necessary  in  order 
to  determine  how  much  of  the  Candle  Creek  benches  could  be  worked 
in  this  manner. 


386 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


On  Bear  Creek  the  problem  of  water  supply  is  much  less  serious 
than  elsewhere,  largely  because  the  water  for  the  ditch  and  other 
mining  plants  is  taken  from  streams  that  head  in  a high  ridge  on 
which  there  is  a much  greater  and  more  frequent  precipitation  than 
elsewhere  in  the  region.  In  dry  seasons,  however,  even  on  this  creek 
a shortage  of  water  is  sometimes  felt.  Aside  from  the  operations  of 
the  ditch  company,  mining  is  being  done  on  the  beds  of  small  streams 
which  usually  furnish  sufficient  water  for  sluicing  the  auriferous 
gravels  as  they  are  shoveled  into  the  boxes. 

In  a general  way  the  conditions  on  Sweepstakes  Creek  are  analo- 
gous to  those  on  Bear  Creek,  for  the  streams  that  head  in  the  high 
peak  of  Granite  Mountain  usually  have  a flow  of  water  sufficient  for 
all  the  operations  now  being  carried  on.  The  same  conditions  prevail 
in  part  on  Rube  Creek  and  other  tributaries  of  Peace  River,  but  the 
flow  of  these  streams  is  normally  only  moderate  in  amount,  and 
difficulty  may  arise  in  protracted  periods  of  dry  weather  in  getting 
sufficient  water  to  carry  on  mining  operations,  if  more  than  one  or 
two  plants  are  at  work,  unless  additional  supplies  are  obtained  from 
near-by  creeks. 

On  Dime  Creek  the  conditions  as  regards  water  supply  somewhat 
resemble  those  on  Candle  Creek,  and  conservation  and  complete  utili- 
zation are  aimed  at.  The  latest  claims  staked  on  the  benches  are  con- 
fronted with  the  greatest  problems,  for  the  rights  of  the  earlier  staker 
to  creek  water  which  may  be  brought  onto  the  benches  must  be  ob- 
served, and  recourse  is  had,  therefore,  to  numerous  expedients,  such  as 
pumping  the  dirty  water  from  the  creek  or  digging  wing  ditches  on 
the  hillside  above  to  collect  spring  and  summer  run-off.  The  supply 
of  water  of  these  systems  is  frequently  augmented  by  the  construction 
of  ditches  to  one  or  more  small  draws  or  pups.  A fairly  satisfactory 
supply  of  water  is  obtained  in  this  way  for  sluicing  winter  dumps, 
but  for  continuous  summer  work  it  will  prove  far  from  satisfactory. 
Stripping  operations  by  groundsluicing  are  practically  limited  to 
those  claims  which  have  ditch  water  obtained  from  the  creek,  or 
which  pump  the  water  from  and  return  it  to  the  creek. 

WAGES  AND  LABOR  CONDITIONS. 

The  wages  common  to  most  Alaskan  camps,  $5  a day  and  board  and 
higher  wages  to  hoistmen  and  blacksmiths,  are  also  paid  in  this 
region.  Both  at  Candle  and  at  Dime  Creek  most  of  the  mining  is 
done  during  the  winter,  and  only  a subordinate  amount  during  the 
summer,  although  there  is  some  prospecting  in  the  summer.  On 
Candle  Creek  most  of  the  summer  work  is  done  on  the  shallow  ground 
of  the  creek.  On  Bear  and  Sweepstakes  creeks  only  summer  open- 
cut  work  is  done.  On  Dime  Creek  summer  operations  were  confined 
to  three  plants  which  were  open  cutting  and  to  a small  amount  of 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  RIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  387 

underground  work,  largely  of  a nature  preparatory  to  winter  mining. 
A considerable  amount  of  prospecting  and  ditch  construction  was 
also  done. 

At  Candle  but  few  men  were  idle  who  wanted  employment,  for  the 
road-repair  work  engaged  most  of  those  who  had  worked  in  the 
mines  during  the  winter.  On  Dime  Creek  a number  of  men  were 
idle  during  August. 

GOLD  PLACERS. 

PHYSIOGRAPHY. 

The  origin  of  the  placers  is  so  intimately  connected  with  the 
physiographic  history  of  the  region  that  it  is  appropriate  to  discuss 
this  feature  in  connection  with  the  placers,  and  an  interpretation  of 
the  topographic  forms  may  throw  some  light  on  the  mode  of  concen- 
tration of  these  deposits. 

A striking  topographic  feature  in  many  parts  of  the  region  be- 
tween Eschscholtz  Bay  and  Norton  Bay  is  the  terraced  character  of 
many  of  the  hills  and  mountains.  These  terraces  attain  the  greatest 
prominence  in  areas  of  massive,  well-indurated  rocks  like  the  gran- 
ites or  the  series  of  agglomerates,  tuffs,  and  flows  of  an  andesitic 
character  which  lie  chiefly  north  of  the  Koyuk.  Moffit 1 states  “ that 
a given  bench  could  often  be  traced  from  one  locality  to  another,  but 
the  contour  interval  [used  in  the  topographic  mapping]  was  too 
great  to  permit  any  extended  correlation  of  levels.”  The  areas  of 
older  metamorphic  rocks  do  not  present  this  terraced  appearance, 
although  broad  flat-topped  or  very  smooth-crowned  ridges  are  pre- 
dominant. It  is  possible,  although  by  no  means  certain,  that  these 
flat-topped  ridges  correspond  to  the  terraces  in  the  more  resistant 
rocks  and  with  the  terraces  represent  marine  benches.  If  so,  there  is 
lacking  the  confirmatory  evidence  of  widely  distributed  beach  pebbles, 
such  as  might  be  expected  if  the  benches  were  water  cut.  Although 
Moffit2  states  that  on  some  of  the  upper  tributaries  of  the  Kiwalik 
and  on  Old  Glory  Creek  elevated  benches  of  gravel  were  seen  at  an 
altitude  of  about  500  or  600  feet  above  sea  level,  the  presence  of 
gravels  on  the  terraces  is  unusual,  for  he  says : 1 

't'he  floors  of  the  benches  are  usually  covered  with  debris,  which  is  angular 
or  rounded,  and  is  probably  due  to  weathering  rather  than  to  grinding  by 
water  currents.  The  edges  of  the  benches  are  made  up  of  angular  blocks  pro- 
duced by  the  action  of  the  frost  on  the  bedrock,  now  only  occasionally  visible. 
The  blocks  appear  not  to  have  been  moved  any  considerable  distance  but  simply 
to  have  tumbled  down  and  formed  a talus  along  the  front  of  the  rock  wall, 
which  they  now  conceal  in  nearly  all  cases. 

1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  The  Fairhaven  gold  placers,  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  247,  p.  44,  1905. 

2 Idem,  p.  40. 


388 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OE  ALASKA,  1917. 


If  these  terraces  were  formed  by  wave  erosion  the  gravel  and  sand 
which  were  produced  in  the  incision  of  the  benches  have  been  largely 
if  not  wholly  removed  from  most  of  them,  although,  as  already  cited, 
some  of  the  high-lying  gravels  still  remain.  It  is  somewhat  difficult 
to  believe  that  wave-cut  terraces  would  still  present  such  definite 
scarps  as  are  found  at  even  the  highest  elevations,  and  that  erosion 
took  place  of  sufficient  magnitude  to  remove  all  the  unconsolidated 
beach  debris  which  had  been  formed  in  cutting  the  benches  as  the 
sea  encroached  by  stages  upon  the  land  surface.  If  it  is  assumed 
that  some  of  the  terraces  were  cut  as  the  land  surface  emerged  from 
the  sea,  an  even  longer  period  of  endurance  of  the  highest  terraces 
is  thereby  postulated.  It  may  therefore  be  possible  that  some  at 
least  of  the  terraces  owe  their  origin  to  some  other  cause,  although 
it  is  believed  that  the  land  surface  has  been  depressed  to  a depth  of 
several  hundred  feet  below  sea  level.  In  the  Yukon-Koyukuk  re- 
gion similar  high  terraces  have  been  ascribed  by  Eakin  1 to  a proc- 
ess termed  u altiplanation,”  a phase  of  solifluction  that  under  cer- 
tain conditions  finds  expression  in  terrace-like  forms  and  flattened 
summits.  Until  definite  proof  of  a marine  origin  is  obtained,  it 
appears  logical  in  this  region  also  to  accept  Eakin’s  hypothesis  of 
origin  for  the  highest  of  the  terraces,  although  the  sea  probably 
covered  the  land  to  a height  of  500  or  600  feet  and  carved  the  land 
forms  to  that  elevation.  Stream  erosion  has  greatly  modified  the 
topography  since  emergence,  and  the  tendency  has  been  to  restore 
the  former  topography  by  sweeping  out  the  unconsolidated  sedi- 
ments from  the  filled  valleys.  On  the  hillsides  solifluction  has  been 
an  important  agent  in  the  transportation  of  the  debris  to  the  bottoms 
of  the  valleys,  where  it  was  removed  by  the  streams. 

The  numerous  exposures  of  basaltic  lavas  afford  some  indication 
of  the  topography  which  existed  previous  to  their  extravasation.  It 
appears  likely  that  at  that  time  a very  mature  topography  had  been 
developed  and  the  country  was  nearly  base-leveled.  It  may  be  that 
the  extrusion  of  the  lavas  occurred  shortly  after  the  emergence  of 
the  land  surface  nearly  to  its  present  level,  when  many  of  the  valleys 
were  nearly  if  not  quite  filled  with  gravels  and  sands  resulting  from 
inundation.  Drainageways  had  been  established,  however,  and  it 
was  down  these  that  the  lavas  took  their  course.  At  the  head  of 
Bear  Creek,  they  are  found  at  an  elevation  of  about  1,200  feet,  and 
this  appears  to  be  about  the  maximum  height  reached,  except  in  the 
area  at  the  head  of  the  Koyuk,  from  which  it  is  likely  that  a very 
considerable  part  of  the  lavas  came.  There  may  also  have  been  vents 
for  these  lavas  somewhere  on  the  Buckland-Kiwalik  divide.  Moffit 2 


1 Eakin,  H.  M.,  The  Yukon-Koyukuk  region,  Alaska  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  631,  p. 
78,  1916. 

2 Moffit,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  32-33. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  389 


describes  the  topographic  changes  due  to  the  lava  flows  in  the  fol- 
lowing terms : 

Important  modifications  of  the  drainage  were  brought  about  by  the  extru- 
sion of  the  lava,  which  occupied  the  depressions  and  flowed  down  the  valleys  in 
broad  rivers  of  molten  rock.  At  times  the  cooling  of  the  advancing  front  wall 
dammed  back  the  flow  and  forced  it  over  the  low,  rounded  divides  between  the 
watercourses  into  the  next  valley  beyond,  or  formed  a lake  [of  molten  lava] 
which  finally  overflowed  the  obstruction  and  resumed  its  original  course,  only 
to  repeat  the  process  a little  farther  on. 

In  this  way  islands  of  bare  ground  were  left  between  the  great  finger-like 
protrusions  along  the  edge  of  the  sheet.  At  the  same  time  a shifting  of  the 
watercourses  was  brought  about,  for  when  not  of  sufficient  volume  to  fill  it  the 
lava  occupied  the  lowest  part  of  the  valley  and  the  waters  sought  a new  channel 
parallel  to  the  old  one,  along  the  edge  of  the  hardened  flow.  A number  of  lakes 
and  ponds  also  owe  their  existence  to  the  damming  of  streams  by  lava,  among 
which  may  be  mentioned  Lake  Imuruk,  the  largest  body  of  fresh  water  on  the 
peninsula. 

Observations  made  by  Collier  on  Noxapaga  River  showed  these  more  recent 
lavas  overlying  gravels  which  are  cemented  near  the  contact  by  indurated  clays 
and  contain  pebbles  of  an  older  flow — conclusive  evidence  that  considerable 
time  must  have  elapsed  between  the  first  outbreaks  and  the  solidification  of  the 
flows  just  described.  The  source  from  which  the  recent  basalts  of  Noxapaga 
and  Ivuzitrin  rivers  were  discharged  lies  to  the  southwest  of  Lake  Imuruk, 
this  being  shown  by  the  scattered  lava  cones  as  well  as  by  the  direction  of 
movement  of  the  flows  themselves. 

On  the  upper  part  of  Koyuk  River  a similar  relation  of  basalts  and  gravels 
was  observed  by  Mendenhall.  He  found  on  the  truncated  edges  of  the  schists 
5 feet  of  gravel,  made  up  of  schist,  vein  quartz,  and  granite;  this  in  turn  was 
covered  by  an  undisturbed  horizontal  sheet  of  olivine  basalt,  which  had  been 
but  little  affected  by  the  erosive  action  of  the  stream  since  it  came  to  rest,  and 
was  therefore  believed  by  him  to  be  of  Pleistocene  age. 

No  evidence  of  flows  as  recent  as  those  between  Noxapaga  and  Kuzitrin  rivers 
was  seen  by  the  writer  in  the  country  toward  the  northeast,  where  the  lavas 
have  been  subjected  to  weathering  for  a much  longer  time  and  have  suffered 
correspondingly.  In  the  region  south  of  Kotzebue  Sound  it  is  probable  that  a 
drainage  system  differing  very  little  from  the  present  one  and  containing  a con- 
siderable body  of  gravels  was  invaded  and  partly  filled  by  the  basic  lavas, 
which  formed  a sheet  of  no  great  thickness  across  the  valleys.  The  present 
streams  then  resumed  their  work  and  cut  down  through  the  thin  lava  sheet, 
uncovered  again  the  older  channels,  and  left  the  conspicuous  rim  of  lava  now 
seen  surrounding  many  of  the  valleys.  In  evidence  of  this  may  be  mentioned 
the  fact  that  the  lavas  in  almost  all  cases  appear  well  up  on  the  sides  of  the 
narrow  valleys,  and  that  there  is  no  indication  that  they  ever  covered  the 
higher  hills  above  the  valleys.  In  one  instance,  at  the  west  end  of  the  big  bend 
of  Kugruk  River,  the  lavas  appear  at  the  water’s  edge;  in  all  other  cases,  as 
far  as  observed  by  the  writer,  they  are  above  the  streams,  which  at  present 
occupy  channels  in  the  older  metamorphic  schists  and  limestones.  It  should  be 
stated,  however,  that  no  contact  of  lavas  overlying  gravels,  such  as  that  de- 
scribed by  Mendenhall  and  Collier,  was  observed  in  the  region,  since  the  great 
quantity  of  broken  blocks,  thrown  down  largely  by  the  action  of  the  frost,  pre- 
vented a view  of  the  base  of  the  flows.  This  condition  also  prevented  any  accu- 
rate determination  of  the  thickness  of  the  lava,  though  two  flat-topped  hills  of 
it  south  of  the  upper  part  of  Cottonwood  Creek  have  an  elevation  of  60  feet 


390 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


above  the  plain  on  which  they  rest.  In  the  one  nearer  the  Cottonwood  the  base 
is  formed  by  some  8 feet  of  agglomerate  containing  boulders  of  basalt.  This 
relation  of  the  lavas  to  the  gravels  is  a question  of  some  interest,  since,  if  the 
ideas  here  advanced  are  correct,  it  is  possible  that  valuable  placer  gravels  may 
be  present  somewhere  beneath  the  lavas. 

Where  the  lava  rim  was  seen  on  the  Kiwalik,  about  a mile  above 
Candle,  it  was  a far  less  pronounced  feature  than  in  the  areas  to  the 
west  that  are  described  by  Moffit.  At  the  headwaters  of  the  Kiwalik, 
on  Wilson  Creek  across  the  divide  from  Sweepstakes,  and  at  the  head 
of  Moon  Creek  on  the  west  side  of  Peace  River,  the  basalt  caps  the 
hills,  and  on  the  east  side  of  the  river  opposite  Moon  Creek  it  appears 
nearly  to  the  crest  of  the  ridge.  In  places  at  each  of  these  three 
occurrences  there  appears  a distinct  scarp  or  rim,  but  elsewhere  the 
presence  of  the  basalt  is  only  indicated  by  the  numerous  large  angular 
pieces  of  the  rock  which  cover  the  very  gentle  slopes.  Wherever  bed- 
rock was  seen  in  the  banks  of  Peace  River  it  consisted  of  the  much 
older  series  of  andesitic  tuffs  and  flows,  generally  overlain  by  uncon- 
solidated gravels.  At  the  head  of  the  Kiwalik,  the  basalt  appears  to 
overlie  clay  beds  above  a bed  of  very  fibrous  lignite. 

It  appears  likely  from  the  distribution  of  the  basalts  that  they  once 
covered  the  gravels  which  occupied  the  valleys  of  Peace  River  and 
Sweepstakes  Creek,  but  west  of  Peace  River  and  north  of  Sweep  - 
stakes  Creek  they  have  since  been  removed  by  erosion.  Moffit 1 states 
that  the  presence  of  the  lava  on  Candle  Creek  is  shown  by  fragments 
in  the  gravel  and  on  the  hill  slopes  and  by  a few  outcrops.  It  prob- 
ably also  filled  the  valley  of  Kiwalik  River  from  Candle  up  to  a 
point  between  the  mouths  of  Lava  and  Hunter  creeks.  It  is  likely 
that  detailed  work  would  reveal  the  presence  of  remnants  of  this  flow 
on  the  west  side  of  the  Kiwalik  also. 

None  of  the  recent  basalts  are  found  on  Bear  Creek  except  at  its 
head,  where  their  position  indicates  that  if  Bear  Creek  flowed  in  its 
present  valley  at  the  time  of  their  extrusion  a lava  stream  must  cer- 
tainly have  flowed  down  this  depression.  They  are  not  now  present 
in  this  valley,  so  far  as  known. 

In  like  manner,  basalts  occur  on  the  divide  between  Dime  Creek  and 
Peace  River,  west  of  Eldorado  Creek,  and  at  the  head  of  Flat  Creek 
in  positions  which  indicate  that  they  would  have  flowed  down  a de- 
pression corresponding  to  the  present  valley  of  Dime  Creek  had  it 
existed  at  the  time  of  their  extrusion.  These  basalts  have  been  re- 
moved without  leaving  a trace  of  their  former  presence  except  the 
olivine  found  in  the  heavy  sands  of  the  clean-ups. 

The  presence  of  the  lava  on  the  divide  between  Mukluktulik  River 
and  Kenwood  Creek  indicates  from  its  position  that  it  must  once  have 
been  connected  with  the  basalt  areas  to  the  north  in  the  Koyuk  basin. 


1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  p.  61. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  391 


A measure  of  tlie  amount  of  erosion  since  the  extrusion  of  the  lavas 
is  afforded  by  these  numerous  flows.  An  interpretation  of  the  age 
relations  is  presented  on  page  381. 


CANDLE  CREEK. 

Candle  Creek  has  been  one  of  the  large  gold-producing  creeks  of 
Seward  Peninsula  for  many  years.  The  earliest  workings  were  on 
creek  claims,  and  mining  operations  in  summer  are  still  largely 
confined  to  the  creek,  although  some  of  the  more  shallow  benches 
are  now  being  worked  by  open-cut  methods.  After  the  discovery 
of  the  creek  placers,  prospecting  revealed  the  presence  of  valuable 
ground  on  the  benches,  and  deposits  of  such  gravels  have  been 
worked  there  for  a number  of  years. 

The  bedrock  in  the  lower  claims  is  mainly  schist,  but  on  the  bench 
claims  it  is  in  many  places  a coarsely  porphyritic  andesite.  It  is 
said  that  on  the  upper  bench  the  pay  streak  follows  rather  closely 
the  contact  between  the  andesite  and  the  schist.  On  the  creek 
claims,  according  to  Moffit:1 

Schist  (often  coarse  and  angular,  at  times  finely  divided)  forms  much  the 
larger  part  of  the  gravels  in  the  channel.  Quartz-vein  stuff  with  some  lime- 
stone makes  up  the  remainder.  An  ice  bed  of  variable  thickness,  which  meas- 
ures about  12  feet  near  Patterson  Creek  and  extends  to  the  west  of  the  stream 
channel  several  hundred  feet,  overlies  the  gravels  in  the  bottom  of  the  valley. 
The  tendency  of  the  debris  on  the  slopes  of  either  side  of  the  valley  to  slide 
down  towrard  the  creek  is  shown  by  the  bulging  up  of  the  clay  from  the 
bottom  of  the  cuts  and  by  the  closing  in  of  the  sides.  In  consequence  of  this 
tendency  the  gravels  are  usually  much  disturbed  and  there  is  no  uniformity 
in  the  sections.  At  the  mouth  of  Patterson  Creek  there  are  from  6 to  8 feet 
of  gravel  and  slide  resting  on  a blue-clay  bedrock ; at  Willow  Creek  the  gravels 
measure  from  5 to  8 feet ; on  a bench  claim  below  Patterson  Creek  the 
gravels  are  not  so  thick — 4 or  5 feet  of  fine  schist,  “ chicken  feed,”  is  covered 
by  10  or  12  feet  of  ice  and  2 feet  of  muck ; on  a bench  claim  nearly  1,000  feet 
west  of  Candle  Creek  a 33-foot  hole  put  down  wdth  a thawer  gave  the  fol- 
lowing section: 

Section  near  Candle  Creek. 

Feet. 

Muck  3 

Slide  consisting  of  yellowish  and  reddish  quartz  sand  with 

“chicken  feed”  (finely  ground  schist) 28 

Sand  1 

Gravel  with  rounded  quartz  pebbles 1 

Bedrock,  yellowish  clay  with  pieces  of  lava. 

The  gold  on  tlie  creek  claims,  where  the  bedrock  is  schist,  is  flat- 
tened and  black;  that  taken  from  bench  claims,  where  andesite  is 
the  bedrock,  is  said  usually  to  be  bright.  u Iron  stones,”  rounded 
pebbles  o-f  hematite  or  limonite,  are  generally  found  in  close  asso- 


1 Moffit,  F.  II.,  op.  cit.,  p.  61. 


392  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

ciation  with  the  richer  deposits.  Other  minerals  found  in  the  sluice 
boxes  in  the  clean-up  includes  arsenopyrite,  pyrite,  galena,  chalco- 
pyrite,  magnetite,  ilmenite,  rutile,  zircon,  garnet,  and  cerusite.  Of 
these  minerals,  arsenopyrite  appeared  to  make  up  far  the  largest  pro- 
portion on  a claim  near  the  mouth  of  Patterson  Creek.  The  chalco- 
pyrite  occurs  in  association  with  the  galena  in  the  same  grains. 
Some  of  the  galena  is  coated  with  cerusite.  These  minerals  are 
found  also  in  the  cuts  of  the  Keewalik  Mining  Co.  on  John  Bull 
Hill  south  of  Candle,  but  the  iron  oxides  appear  to  predominate  and 
occur  in  well-rounded  grains  or  small  pebbles.  In  addition  to  the 
minerals  above  mentioned,  shot  coated  with  lead  oxide  are  found 
with  the  heavy  sands. 

About  12  small  plants,  employing  in  all  about  30  men,  were  at  work 
during  the  winter  of  1916-17,  either  engaged  in  mining  or  in  pros- 
pecting on  Candle  Creek  and  its  tributaries,  including  11  men  who 
worked  on  Jump  Creek.  In  summer  about  55  men  were  engaged  in 
mining,  about  half  of  them  with  two  of  the  eleven  plants  that  were 
operating.  Power  scrapers  were  used  on  a number  of  claims.  On 
some  it  was  necessary  to  pump  water  in  order  to  get  sufficient  eleva- 
tion and  suitable  grade  for  the  boxes,  as  well  as  dumping  room  for 
tailings.  One  dredge  was  in  operation,  and  two  plants  hydraulicked 
the  overburden  and  the  auriferous  gravels.  China  pumps  were  used 
on  some  of  the  creek  claims  to  remove  water  from  the  pits. 

The  dredge  was  operating  on  claim  No.  5 above  Discovery.  An- 
other dredge  was  to  be  moved  to  the  creek  during  the  winter  of 
1917-18.  These  dredges  will  operate  on  the  creek  claims,  and  some 
of  the  ground  will  be  reworked. 

It  is  said  that  many  of  the  bench  claims  contain  sufficient  gold  in 
the  tailings  from  former  operations  to  warrant  reworking  if  water 
could  be  obtained.  Considerable  losses  were  entailed  in  washing  the 
clayey  gravels  by  the  methods  previously  used,  largely  because  of 
insufficient  water.  Projects  have  been  proposed  for  getting  water  on 
these  claims  by  the  construction  of  a ditch,  but  the  high  initial 
expense  has  served  to  delay  the  carrying  out  of  any  of  these  plans 
while  the  ownership  of  the  ground  to  be  worked  is  as  widely  dis- 
tributed as  at  present. 

BEAR  CREEK. 

Bear  Creek  is  tributary  to  Buckland  Kiver  on  the  northern  drain- 
age slope  of  Seward  Peninsula.  Gold  has  been  mined  on  the  main 
creek  and  two  of  its  tributaries,  Sheridan  and  Cub  creeks.  The 
first  claims  recorded  were  staked  in  1901  and  some  work  was  done 
later  on  the  richest  gravels,  Moffit 1 stating  that  in  1903  about  $10,000 


1 Moffit,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  p.  G4 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  393 

was  taken  out.  Concerning  the  later  developments,  Smith  and 
Eakin  1 give  the  following  information : 

From  1903  to  1907  a little  desultory  prospecting  and  mining  was  done,  but 
during  the  latter  year  the  building  of  a ditch  along  the  west  slope  of  the  valley 
revived  interest  in  the  region.  The  small  precipitation  of  1908,  however,  pre- 
vented any  extensive  use  of  the  new  ditch,  and  in  1909  there  was  no  evidence 
that  productive  mining  was  in  progress. 

Since  1909  changes  in  ownership  have  taken  place,  and  in  addition 
to  the  hydraulicking  plant  of  the  former  ditch  company  there  has  been 
installed  a hydraulic  elevator  of  the  open-flume  type,  which  oper- 
ated in  1916  and  1917.  This  plant  was  working  on  Bear  Creek  near 
the  mouth  of  Split.  In  1917  two  men  were  engaged  in  open-cut  work 
on  a beach  claim  near  this  plant,  one  man  was  open  cutting  on  a 
claim  about  a mile  below,  and  one  man  was  working  on  an  open  cut 
on  Sheridan  Creek.  In  addition  some  assessment  work  was  done  on 
a number  of  other  claims  on  Bear  Creek,  and  Cub  Creek  had  been 
restaked  recently,  although  no  work  had  been  done  on  it  early  in 
August. 

For  the  most  part,  the  bedrock  is  a series  of  altered  andesite  tuffs 
and  flows,  but  intrusive  rocks  of  a more  basic  character  are  associated 
with  them,  for  pebbles  of  diabase  were  seen  in  the  creek  gravels. 
Probably  the  platinum  that  is  obtained  in  small  amount  on  Bear 
Creek  is  derived  from  rocks  of  this  character.  In  addition  to  the 
basic  intrusives  there  are  numerous  dikes  of  acidic  intrusives;’  fresh 
andesite  dikes,  which  cut  the  metamorphosed  andesitic  rocks,  were 
seen  on  the  hills  north  of  Split  Creek,  and  pebbles  of  syenite 
and  diorite  were  noted  below  the  mouths  of  small  streams  between 
Split  and  Cub  creeks.  In  the  bed  of  the  main  stream  dikes  were  seen, 
but  they  were  so  badly  weathered  that  their  original  nature  was  not 
determinable.  The  bedrock  on  the  lower  part  of  Cub  Creek  is  of  the 
metamorphosed  andesite  series,  but  a large  proportion  of  the  boulders 
of  the  creek  are  composed  of  porphyritic  syenite,  monzonite,  or  dio- 
rite, and  some  of  them  carry  the  brown  garnet  melanite.  These  rock 
types  correspond  to  those  described  by  Moffit2  as  occurring  in  the 
vicinity  of  Granite  Mountain.  Pyritic  mineralization,  of  which  the 
deposition  of  the  gold  is  a phase,  accompanied  the  intrusion  of  these 
rocks. 

The  bedrock  surface  in  the  creek  is  extremely  irregular,  and  its 
unevenness  appears  to  prevent  large-scale  operations  by  methods 
other  than  those  now  being  used.  A considerable  portion  of  the  gold 
lies  close  to  bedrock,  and  it  must  therefore  be  thoroughly  cleaned  for 
successful  mining.  In  the  concentrates  found  in  the  clean-ups  by  far 

1 Smith,  I\  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  A geologic  reconnaissance  in  southeastern  Seward 
Peninsula  and  the  Norton  Bay-Nulato  region  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  449,  pp.  125-126, 
1911. 

Moffit,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  29-30. 


394 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


the  largest  proportion  of  the  heavy  sands  consist  of  the  iron  oxides, 
magnetite  and  hematite.  The  magnetite  is  easily  removed  by  the 
magnet,  but  the  hematite  gives  some  trouble,  as  it  is  not  readily  sepa- 
rable from  the  gold.  In  addition  to  these  minerals  smaller  amounts 
of  limonite,  ilmenite,  pyrite,  garnet,  olivine,  and  some  of  the  lighter 
silicates  are  also  found.  Of  special  interest  in  connection  with  the 
platinum  is  the  occurrence  of  rounded  grains  and  perfect  octahedra  of 
a chrome  spinel,  which  resembles  magnetite  but  is  only  very  faintly 
magnetite,  and  in  addition  appears  to  have  a more  vitreous  rather 
than  metallic  luster.  A similar  association  of  minerals  is  found  on 
Sheridan  Creek,  where  the  geologic  conditions  are  essentially  the 
same  as  those  on  the  main  stream. 

RUBE  CREEK. 

Rube  Creek  is  a small  stream  that  enters  Peace  River  from  the 
west  about  7 or  8 miles  above  Sweepstakes  Creek.  It  flows  close  to 
the  base  of  the  mountain  mass  that  lies  to  the  south,  so  that  there 
is  less  workable  placer  ground,  either  stream  or  bench,  on  that  side 
than  on  the  north,  where  between  Rube  and  Farmer  creeks  there  is 
a sloping  tundra  plain  in  which  these  two  streams  have  only  slightly 
intrenched  themselves.  A nhmber  of  claims  have  been  staked  on 
both  creeks  as  well  as  on  some  of  the  tributaries  of  Rube  Creek  from 
the  south.  Most  of  the  work  in  August,  1917,  had  been  done  on  a 
group  of  claims  on  Rube  Creek,  where  a ditch  had  been  dug  and  two 
open  cuts  had  been  made.  Most  of  the  work  of  development  had  been 
done  on  the  lower  cut,  which  was  about  100  feet  long  and  from  3 to 
8 feet  deep.  Gold  is  found  on  a false  bedrock,  an  impervious  clayey 
stratum,  and  in  the  superjacent  2 to  3 feet  of  gravel.  Overlying  the 
pay  gravel  is  an  uneven  thickness  of  barren  gravel  and  sand,  which 
is  overlain  by  2 feet  or  more  of  muck  and  vegetation.  North  of 
Rube  Creek  the  depth  to  bedrock  is  greater,  and  in  one  section  6 feet 
or  more  of  ice  containing  a small  amount  of  gray-blue  muck  is  ex- 
posed below  the  surface  covering  of  vegetation.  At  one  place  several 
alternating  thin  layers  of  gravel  and  muck  were  noted.  These  layers 
were  probably  formed  by  the  deposition  of  the  gravels  on  the  moss- 
covered  surface  by  successive  spring  overflows,  and  the  accumulation 
of  moss  and  finer  material  on  the  surface  between  flows. 

Pannings  from  the  pay  gravels  showed  several  colors  to  the  pan 
of  bright  gold,  somewhat  less  flaky  than  that  on  Dime  Creek.  No 
platinum  was  seen  in  the  pannings,  but  it  is  said  to  be  found.  The 
heavy  sands  include  an  unusual  amount  of  black  garnet.  Besides  the 
lighter  silicates,  hematite,  olivine,  zircon,  and  chrome  spinel  are  also 
present.  Only  a few  grains  of  the  chrome  spinel  were  seen. 

In  one  of  the  bare  patches  between  Rube  and  F armer  creeks  a pan 
of  dirt  was  washed  and  showed  a few  fine  colors.  The  minerals  in 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  395 

the  concentrates  were  essentially  the  same  as  those  on  Rube  Creek, 
the  black  garnet  being  conspicuous. 

SWEEPSTAKES  CREEK. 

Sweepstakes  Creek  is  the  main  tributary  of  Peace  River  from  the 
west,  and  at  their  junction  the  two  streams  are  about  the  same  size. 
It  is  untimbered  except  near  Peace  River.  Like  Rube  Creek  it  flows 
close  to  its  south  bank,  and  there  is  a very  gentle  slope  on  the  north 
side. 

During  the  summer  four  plants,  which  employed  about  12  men, 
were  in  operation.  Work  Avas  done  on  rather  Avidely  separated 
claims,  extending  from  the  mouth  of  Bear  Gulch,  about  2 miles 
below  Discovery  claim,  which  is  near  the  forks  of  Sweepstakes,  to 
claim  No.  10  above  Discovery.  The  ground  is  shallow,  and  open- 
cutting is  practiced.  A large  part  of  the  overburden  of  muck  and 
vegetation,  as  well  as  the  upper  part  of  the  gravels,  is  sluiced  off,  and 
the  auriferous  gravels  are  then  shoAreled  into  a line  of  sluice  boxes. 

On  the  upper  claims  worked  the  depth  to  bedrock  is  about  6 feet, 
the  upper  2 feet  of  which  consists  largely  of  muck  and  vegetation. 
The  material  on  this  claim  contains  many  angular  fragments  of  rock, 
8 inches  or  larger  in  dimensions  and  comparatively  little  rounded 
gravel. 

On  the  lower  claims  the  depth  to  bedrock  is  somewhat  greater, 
ranging  from  7 to  15  feet,  of  which  the  gravels  make  up  from  4 to  9 
feet.  The  gravel  is  well  rounded  and  relatively  small,  although 
some  boulders  are  present.  The  bedrock  is  similar  in  character  to 
that  of  most  of  the  material  of  the  gravels  and  is  somewhat  decom- 
posed, so  that  often  the  bedrock  is  excavated  to  a depth  of  a few 
inches  and  put  through  the  sluice  boxes  also,  in  order  to  prevent 
the  loss  of  gold. 

On  most  of  the  creek  the  bedrock  consists  of  the  metamorphosed 
andesite  series,  but  there  are  places  where  the  much  older  metamor- 
phic  rocks  seem  to  underlie  the  auriferous  gravels.  Elsewhere,  as 
near  the  mouth  of  Granite  Creek  and  on  the  uppermost  claims  being 
worked,  syenitic  rocks  appear. 

Platinum,  comparable  in  the  ratio  of  its  occurrence  Avith  the  gold 
to  that  on  Dime  Creek,  is  found  on  the  Circle  claim  at  the  mouth  of 
Bear  Gulch,  and  pannings  from  Bear  Gulch  are  also  said  to  carry 
considerable  amounts  of  this  metal.  It  was  not  reported  in  the  gold 
from  the  upper  claims. 

The  heavy  sands  include  magnetite,  olivine,  broAvn  and  red  garnets, 
zircon,  hematite,  and  a small  amount  of  ilmenite.  Chrome  spinel  is 
present  also  in  considerable  amounts,  and  it  is  probably  derAed  from 
the  same  source  as  the  platinum. 


396 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


DIME  CREEK. 

Dime  Creek  is  tributary  to  Koyule  River  from  the  northeast  be- 
tween Peace  River  and  East  Fork.  The  first  claims  were  staked  in 
1910  by  Sam  Smith  and  his  associates.  Prospect  holes  were  sunk 
on  the  lower  claims,  but  the  results  obtained  did  not  warrant  further 
operations,  and  the  claims  were  abandoned.  On  April  4,  1915,  gold 
was  discovered  near  the  mouth  of  Little  Eldorado  Creek  by  Tom 
Moon  and  Henry  Ryan.  There  resulted  a stampede  to  the  creek; 
and,  after  what  were  supposed  to  be  the  good  claims  on  Little  Eldo- 
rado Creek  were  staked,  the  late  comers  took  first  the  creek  claims 
and  then  the  bench  claims  on  Dime  Creek  as  well  as  its  tributaries, 
and  claims  were  also  staked  in  the  basins  of  near-by  streams.  A pro- 
duction of  about  $3,000  is  said  to  have  been  made  from  three  claims  1 
during  that  year.  Neither  machinery  nor  supplies  were  near  at  hand, 
and  they  had  to  be  brought  from  Golofnin  or  Nome,  so  that  no  con- 
siderable production  was  made  until  the  following  year.  It  has  been 
estimated  2 that  the  production  of  1916  was  about  $100,000  from  eight 
claims. 

In  1917  about  17  plants  in  operation  on  16  claims  employed  a total 
of  85  men.  It  is  believed  that  the  production  from  winter  and  sum- 
mer operations  was  about  $150,000.  In  addition  to  the  gold  about 
35  ounces  of  platinum  was  produced.  It  is  said  that  on  the  creek  and 
bench  claims  at  the  lower  end  of  Dime  Creek  there  is  about  1 ounce 
of  platinum  to  each  $5,000  of  gold ; on  the  upper  claims  this  ratio  is 
considerably  higher,  so  that  it  may  amount  to  as  much  as  1 ounce  to 
each  $2,000  in  gold. 

The  following  analysis  of  platinum  from  Dime  Creek  was  made 
by  R.  C.  Wells  in  the  laboratory  of  the  Geological  Survey: 

Analysis  of  platinum  from  Dime  Creek,  Seward  Peninsula. 


Gold 0.  6 

Silver 9.  5 

Lead 1.4 

Platinum 71.  5 

Iridium  (?) 3.8 

Palladium . 9 

Copper . 1 

Rhodium . 9 

Iron 6. 1 

Osmiridium,  silica,  and  undetermined 3.  4 

Nickel x trace 


98.  2 


1 Brooks,  A.  H.,  The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1915  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  642, 
p.  70,  1916. 

2 Mertie,  J.  B.,  Lode  and  placer  mining  on  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  662,  p.  454,  1917. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  397 

The  highest  values  that  have  been  reported  for  the  gold  from 
this  creek  are  $19.84  and  $19.88  a fine  ounce.  The  fineness  of  the 
gold  worth  $19.88  an  ounce  was  961  parts  gold  and  32  parts  silver. 

The  depth  to  bedrock  differs  considerably.  In  a general  way  the 
claims  at  the  upper  end  of  the  creek  are  somewhat  more  shallow  than 
those  farther  downstream,  and  the  depth  to  bedrock  increases  still 
more  on  claims  as  far  down  as  claims  8 or  9 below  Discovery.  Where 
mining  is  being  carried  on,  from  claim  7 above  to  claim  1 below,  the 
depths  range  from  10  or  12  feet  to  about  30  feet  on  the  creek  claims. 
On  the  right  limit  benches  the  depths  range  from  6 to  10  feet;  on 
the  left  limit,  the  first  tier  opposite  claim  2 above,  the  depths  are 
about  the  same  but  increase  downstream,  so  that  on  the  second  tier 
bench  opposite  Discovery  the  depths  to  bedrock  range  from  25  to  50 
feet.  Bedrock  lies  a little  higher  than  the  present  surface  of  the 
stream.  The  section  made  known  by  mining  operations  differs  ac- 
cording to  the  depths  of  the  holes.  Normally,  however,  there  is  a 
gravel  layer  from  2 to  8 feet  in  thickness  overlain  by  a few  feet  of 
muck  and  ice,  which  in  turn  is  covered  by  about  1 or  2 feet  of  vegeta- 
tion and  peaty  material.  In  some  of  the  deeper  holes,  especially  on 
the  benches,  there  is  a layer  of  angular  rocks  and  clayey  material 
which  appears  to  be  largely  hillside  talus.  This  is  locally  known  as 
“ slide  ” and  contains  little,  if  any,  rounded  gravel.  All  the  ground 
worked  is  frozen. 

Summer  operations  were  largely  confined  to  open-cut  work,  pros- 
pecting, repairing  of  ditches,  and  getting  equipment  and  supplies 
for  winter  work.  A few  small  plants  that  were  worked  during  the 
summer  hoisted  with  a windlass.  There  appears  to  be  little  reason 
why,  if  it  is  possible  to  obtain  fuel  and  other  supplies,  deep  mining 
should  not  be  carried  on  during  the  summer,  as  well  as  in  winter. 
Open  cutting  was  in  progress  in  August,  1917,  on  three  claims;  one 
plant  used  ditch  water  for  stripping  and  sluicing,  one  pumped  from 
Dime  Creek,  and  the  third  supplemented  water  that  was  pumped 
from  the  creek  by  ditch  water  when  it  was  available.  A large  pro- 
portion of  the  overburden  of  the  auriferous  gravels  on  these  claims 
consisted  of  muck  and  ice  below  a protective  mantle  of  vegetation. 
When  this  covering  had  been  removed  even  a small  amount  of  water 
was  effective  in  stripping. 

The  gold  is  found  mostly  on  or  near  bedrock,  but  some  is  dis- 
tributed through  2 or  3 feet  of  gravel,  so  that  it  is  necessary  to 
mine  and  sluice  this  amount  of  material.  The  amount  ranges  from 
50  cents  to  over  $2  a square  foot  of  bedrock  mined.  Though  the 
pay  streak  on  the  creek  claims  is  fairly  well  defined,  it  may  in  places 
be  divided  and  on  the  bench  claims  there  appear  to  be  several  lines 
along  which  concentration  has  taken  place,  as  though  effected  by 
wave  action  along  beaches  at  successive  stages  of  elevation  or  de- 
115086°— 19 26 


398 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


pression  of  the  land  surface.  Further  data  are  required  to  prove 
this  hypothesis,  which  can  best  be  obtained  from  actual  mining  op- 
erations and  observations  as  to  the  lineal  continuity  of  pay  streaks. 
In  association  with  the  gold  and  platinum  in  the  sands  from  clean- 
ups a number  of  heavy  minerals  have  been  found.  These  minerals 
include  a little  magnetite,  hematite,  and  limonite,  and  large  amounts 
of  chrome  spinel  and  olivine,  together  with  some  pyroxene.  Garnets 
are  found,  although  rarely.  Rutile  was  noted  from  one  of  the  left- 
limit  second-tier  bench  claims. 

Bedrock  on  the  creek  consists  largely  of  the  metamorphosed 
andesite  series.  The  older  slates  and  limestones  appear,  however,  on 
the  west  side  of  the  creek,  and  Little  Eldorado  Creek  follows  along 
the  contact. 

At  the  mouth  of  Silver  Gulch  a Cretaceous  conglomerate,  which 
contains  pebbles  of  limestone  and  slate,  appears  in  the  stream  banks, 
and  with  Cretaceous  shale  and  sandstone  forms  the  bedrock  of  most 
of  the  creek  claims  below  this  tributary. 

Pebbles  of  glassy  lava  in  the  stream  gravels  indicate  that  some- 
where on  the  creek  this  rock  forms  the  bedrock.  The  olivine  and 
pyroxene,  which  are  green  and  greenish-black  minerals  in  the  heavy 
sands,  may  have  been  derived  from  the  recent  basaltic  lavas  which 
occur  along  the  divide  between  Dime  Creek  and  Flat  Creek,  as  well 
as  on  the  ridge  between  Dime  Creek  and  Peace  River,  and  probably 
once  occupied  or  covered  Dime  Creek  valley,  or  they  may  have  been 
derived,  together  with  the  chrome  spinel,  from  a peridotite  at  the 
head  of  Dime  Creek.  This  rock  probably  is  the  source  of  the  plat- 
inum also,  and  the  fact  that  the  platinum  grains  are  so  rounded  af- 
fords an  indication  of  the  distance  traveled  and  the  amount  of  abra- 
sion to  which  they  have  been  subjected.  Grains  of  platinum  from  the 
upper  claims  appeared  more  commonly  to  be  angular,  although  even 
there  a large  proportion  is  shotlike. 

A composite  sample  of  chrome  spinel  from  several  claims  on  Dime 
Creek  and  a sample  of  concentrates  from  the  left-limit  second-tier 
bench  claim  opposite  Discovery,  Dime  Creek,  were  analyzed  by  Chase 
Palmer  in  the  laboratory  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey  and 
were  found  to  contain  51.14  and  15.42  per  cent  of  chromic  oxide 
(Cr2Os),  respectively. 

LODE  PROSPECTS. 

There  has  been  but  little  attempt  at  lode  mining  within  this  region, 
probably  largely  on  account  of  the  poor  exposures,  except  along 
streams  throughout  much  of  the  area.  In  the  mountainous  areas  at 
the  heads  of  the  larger  streams  exposures  are  somewhat  better,  but 
the  difficulties  of  transportation  are  such  that  even  moderately  rich 
ores  could  scarcely  be  worked  at  a profit  except  on  a large  scale  and 
after  the  completion  of  roads  or  railroads  to  them. 


GOLD  AND  PLATINUM  PLACERS  OF  KIWALIK-KOYUK  REGION.  399 

Only  two  prospects  are  known  to  tlie  writer.  What  is  known  as  the 
Beltz  prospect  consists  of  ten  or  more  small  open  cuts  on  the  north 
side  of  Split  Creek,  a tributary  of  Bear  Creek.  These  lie  at  an  aver- 
age elevation  of  about  TOO  feet  above  the  mouth  of  Split  Creek.  The 
pits  are  badly  caved  and  filled  with  talus  from  the  slope,  so  that  it 
was  not  possible  to  obtain  any  data  on  width,  dip,  or  strike  of  the 
vein.  Near  some  of  these  pits  vein  quartz  was  seen,  which  carried 
some  copper  as  chalcopyrite.  The  weathering  of  the  chalcopyrite 
had  caused  the  rock  to  appear  rusty  from  the  iron  oxide  with  small 
patches  of  green  copper  carbonate.  There  does  not  appear  ever  to 
have  been  any  production  of  ore  from  this  property,  and  it  is  not 
possible  to  make  any  statement  of  its  potentialities. 

On  the  Kugruk  about  a quarter  of  a mile  east  of  the  mouth  of  In- 
dependence Creek  there  is  an  argentiferous  lead  prospect  owned  by 
Perkeypile  & Ford,  which  was  not  visited.  Considerable  develop- 
ment work  is  said  to  have  been  done  on  this  property  by  open  cuts, 
tunnels,  and  winzes.  In  addition  to  lead  and  silver  assays  show  a 
considerable  percentage  of  zinc,  traces  of  copper,  and  a small  amount 
of  gold. 

Transportation  of  supplies  to  this  prospect  and  of  the  ore  or  con- 
centrates from  it  appear  to  be  the  controlling  factors  in  this  develop- 
ment. Candle,  25  miles  distant,  is  the  nearest  town  to  which  sup- 
plies could  be  brought,  although  it  is  possible  that  they  could  be 
brought  up  the  Kugruk  to  a point  somewhat  nearer.  The  future  of 
this  property  appears  to  be  dependent  upon  the  proving  of  a suffi- 
ciently large  ore  body  to  warrant  the  construction  of  a road  or  rail- 
road from  the  mine  to  Candle  or  Deering  for  the  economic  handling 
of  supplies  and  ore.  If  a road  was  built  to  Candle,  advantage  could 
probably  be  taken  of  that  already  constructed  up  Candle  Creek.  For 
a small  plant  winter  transportation  of  both  supplies  and  ore  would 
doubtless  prove  most  economical.  Coal  for  fuel  and  power  could  be 
obtained  on  the  Kugruk  within  15  or  20  miles. 

COAL. 

The  workable  deposits  of  coal  in  this  area  have  already  been  quite 
fully  discussed  under  the  consideration  of  the  economic  factors  that 
affect  the  mining  of  placer  gold.  (See  pp.  383-385.)  In  addition  to 
these  occurrences  small  deposits  are  also  known  at  the  head  of  Hunter 
Creek  and  near  the  mouth  of  the  Buckland.  Nothing  further  is 
known  regarding  these  deposits. 

HOT  SPRINGS. 

A slight  depression  on  a bench  50  feet  above  the  west  bank  of 
Spring  Creek,  about  half  a mile  above  the  forks,  contains  hot  springs 
which  rise  up  through  angular  fragments  of  diorite  and  metamor- 
phosed andesite.  Several  basins  have  been  artificially  excavated, 


400  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  191*7. 

and  the  water,  most  of  which  comes  from  a spring  at  the  upper  end  of 
the  series,  flows  successively  through  these  basins.  The  temper- 
ature is  such  that  the  hand  can  be  held  in  the  uppermost  pool  without 
discomfort  and  is  probably  about  105°  F.  The  lower  pools  are 
slightly  cooler.  South  of  the  main  spring  is  a small  seep.  In  the 
basins  is  a considerable  growth  of  red,  yellow,  pink,  and  green  algae. 
There  is  a slight  odor  of  sulphur  dioxide  in  the  vicinity.  The  rocks 
over  which  the  spring  waters  flow  have  a thin  white  tasteless  coating, 
but  there  are  no  deposits  of  siliceous  or  calcareous  material.  Bub- 
bles of  an  odorless,  noninflammable  gas,  probably  carbon  dioxide, 
rise  almost  constantly  in  the  pool  of  the  principal  spring. 

In  the  bank  of  the  stream  just  below  the  spring  is  a small  out- 
crop of  a gray  hornblende  diorite,  which  is  intrusive  in  the  andesitic 
series.  It  appears  likely  that  the  spring  is  fed  by  atmospheric  water, 
which  falls  on  the  upper  slopes  of  Granite  Mountain  and  follows 
joints  and  fissures  in  the  rocks  down  to  the  zone  where  it  acquires  its 
heat  and  then  rises  along  another  fissure  to  form  the  spring.  The 
water  is  tasteless  and  odorless  and  fairly  potable  after  cooling, 
although  a trifle  “ flat.”  No  utilization  has  been  made  of  the  springs. 

SOURCE  OF  VALUABLE  PLACER  MINERALS. 

The  essential  facts  concerning  the  source  of  the  placers  have  been 
included  in  the  preceding  discussion.  It  may,  however,  be  well  to 
summarize  briefly  the  main  features  of  their  origin. 

The  ’origin  of  the  gold  is  attributed  to  syenitic  and  dioritic  intru- 
sions and  possibly  on  Candle  Creek  to  the  more  porphyritic  andesite. 
At  Candle  Creek  a portion  of  the  gold  of  the  placers  is  also  probably 
to  be  attributed  to  the  breaking  down  of  auriferous  quartz  veins  in 
the  older  metamorphic  rocks.  In  a general  way,  there  seems  to  have 
been  comparatively  little  quartz  deposited  in  veins  accompanying  the 
deposition  of  the  gold,  but  the  quartz  was  deposited  in  thin  fissures  in 
the  older  andesites  and  metamorphic  series.  The  gold  was  concen- 
trated in  the  placers  along  marine  beaches  or  along  stream  valleys; 
some  deposits  were  undoubtedly  subjected  to  both  beach  and  stream 
concentration. 

The  platinum,  which  is  found  in  the  placers  on  Bear,  Sweepstakes, 
and  Dime  creeks,  and  of  which  a few  grains  are  reported  from 
Candle  Creek  differs  in  origin  from  the  gold  in  that  it  is  a constit- 
uent of  the  basic  igneous  rock  and  is  not  due  to  an  intrusion  later  than 
the  platinum-bearing  rock.  The  history  of  its  concentration  in 
placers  is  essentially  the  same  as  that  of  the  gold  with  which  it 
occurs.  The  chrome  spinel  and  probably  some  of  the  olivine  found  in 
the  platiniferous  placers  were  derived  from  the  same  rock  as  the 
platinum. 


INDEX, 


A.  Page. 

Abe  Lincoln  claim,  Hot  Springs  district, 

placer  mining  on 334 

Acknowledgments  for  aid 1-2, 

47-48,92,234,355,369 

Admiralty  Island,  water-power  sites  on 45 

Akun  Island,  location  of  and  access  to..  283,292-294 

sulphur  deposit  on 294-297 

Alaska,  map  of,  showing  location  of  sulphur 

deposits 284 

southeastern,  map  cf,  showing  location  of 

gaging  stations 44 

Alaska  Free  Gold  Mining  Co.,  operations  cf.  179-180 
Alaska-Gastineau  mine,  Juneau  district, 

operations  in 29 

Alaska  Gold  Hill  property,  Port  Valdez  dis- 
trict, development  work  on 151 

Alaska  Graphite  Mining  Co.,  operations  of. . 364-367 
Alaska  Homestake  Mining  Co.,  operations  of. . 150 

Alaska  Juneau  mine,  Juneau  district,  mining 

and  milling  at 29 

Alaska  Mineral  & Development  Co.,  opera- 
tions of 323 

Alaska  Mines  Corporation,  mining  by 148-149 

Alaska  Nickel  Mines,  Chichagof  Island,  de- 
scription of 125-133 

Alaska  Quartz  claims,  Willow  Creek  district, 

prospecting  on 185 

Alaska  Tungsten  Mines  Co.,  operations  of. . 325-326 

Alder  Creek,  hydraulic  mining  on 37 

Allison  Creek,  description  of 155 

Ambler  River,  prospecting  on 42 

American  Creek,  placer  mining  on 335 

American  Gulch,  work  on 39 

Anchorage,  facilities  of,  as  a supply  point 241 

Anikovik  River,  tin  mining  on 360,361 

Animals  and  fish,  distribution  of . . 192-193, 213, 341 
Anna  Bub  mine,  Kahiltna  Valley,  hydraulick- 

ingat 252-254 

Annette  Island,  water-power  site  on 45 

Antimony,  occurrence  and  mining  of  .36, 229-230, 323 

production  of 21 

Antimony  Creek,  mining  on 229-230 

Anvik  River,  gold  and  platinum  on 40 

Appropriation,  distribution  and  allotments  of.  4 
Arch  claims,  Willow  Creek  district,  condition 

of 185 

Archangel  Creek,  mining  on 185-186 

Aten,  E.  M.,  work  of 6 

B. 

Babcock-McCoy  claims,  Willow  Creek  dis- 
trict, development  on 185 

Bagley,  J.  W.,  work  of 6-7 

Bahrt  claims,  Chichagof  Island,  description  of.  119 

Bailey  Bay,  Shelockum  Lake  outlet  at 57-58 

Baker  Creek  valley,  mining  in 334 

Banner  claims,  Betties  Bay,  work  on 150 

Baranof  Island,  water-power  sites  on 45 


Page. 

Baranof  Lake  outlet  at  Baranof 65-66 

Barite,  no  shipment  of,  in  1917 27 

Bay  of  Isles,  operations  on 146 

Bayview  claim,  Jack  Bay  district,  location  of.  171 

Bear  Creek,  placer  mining  on 41,393-394 

rocks  on 376 

Beatrice  claim,  Moose  Pass  district,  work  on.  175 
Beatson-Bonanza  mine,  Latouche  Island, 

operations  in 144-145 

Beaver  Falls,  Mahoney  Creek  near 83 

Beaver  Falls  Creek  at  George  Inlet,  Revilla- 

gigedo  Island 51 

Bedrock  Creek,  lode  mining  on 322 

Beltz  prospect,  Kiwalik-Koyuk  region, 

location  and  minerals  of 399 

Bering  River  coal  field,  future  of 25-26 

Bertha  Bay,  Chichagof  Island,  claim  on 124 

Betties  Bay,  Prince  William  Sound,  opera- 
tions on 150 

Big  Eldorado  Creek,  mining  on 36 

Big  Four  Creek,  mining  on 141 

Big  Harbor  mine,  development  on 89 

Bill  Sunday  Fraction  claim,  Fairbanks  dis- 
trict, development  on 323 

Bird  Creek,  placer  mining  on 260-261 

Black  Bear  claim,  Fairbanks  district,  tung- 
sten lodes  on 327 

Blackbird  claim,  Latouche  Island,  mining  on . 145 

Black  Creek,  production  on 39 

Black  Diamond  property.  See  Alaska  Gold 
Hill  property. 

Blossom  claim,  Fairbanks  district,  tungsten 

lodes  on 327 

Bluebell  claim,  Kenai  Peninsula,  work  on. . . 175 

Bluebird  claim,  Willow  Creek  district,  devel- 
opment on 185 

Blue  Lode  claims,  Talkeetna  Mountains, 

minerals  on 202-203 

Bluff,  Seward  Peninsula,  mill  built  near 41 

Bonanza  Creek,  mining  on 36 

Bonnifield  district,  production  in. 39 

Boob  Creek,  placer  mining  on 349-350 

production  on 38 

rocks  on 344,348 

timber  supply  on 341 

Boulder  Bench,  Kahiltna  Valley,  prospecting 

on 263 

Boulder  Creek,  minerals  on 38 

placer  mining  on 335 

Bricks,  making  of 27 

Broad  Pass  region.  See  Chulitna  region, 
upper  part  of. 

Brooks,  Alfred  H.,  administrative  work  and 

military  service  of 5-6 

Brooks  Mountain,  prospecting  for  tin  on 359 

Bryn  Mawr  Creek,  mining  on 226-227, 230, 231 

Buck  Creek,  tin  mining  on 41,360,361 

Buckeye  claims,  Landlocked  Bay,  work  on. . 148 

Burch,  T.  R.,  work  of 6 


401 


402 


INDEX 


C. 


Page. 


Cache  Creek,  geography  of  the  basin  of 242-243 

placer  mining  on 32, 243-248, 334 

transportation  to 241 

Camp  Creek  basin,  mining  in 32 

Candle,  Kiwalik  region,  access  to 381 

Candle  Creek,  placer  mining  on 391-392 

production  on 40 

rocks  on 372,391 

Canfield,  George  H.,  Water-power  investi- 
gations in  southeastern  Alaska..  43-83 

work  of 7-8 

Canyon  Creek,  Kahiltna  Valley,  placer  min- 
ing on  261-262 

Kenai  Peninsula,  mining  operations  on.  32, 176 

Cape  Mountain,  prospecting  for  tin  on 358 

Capps,  Stephen  R.,  cited 236, 237-238, 244-245, 

248, 249, 251, 252, 255-256 
Gold  lode  mining  in  the  Willow  Creek 

district 177-186 

Mineral  resources  of  the  upper  Chulitna 

region 207-232 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Western  Talkeet- 

na  Mountains 187-205 

work  of. 8 

Carlson  Creek  at  Sunny  Cove 76-77 

Carroll  Inlet,  Revillagigedo  Island,  Swan 

Lake  outlet  at 53-55 

Cascade  Creek  at  Thomas  Bay,  near  Peters- 
burg  62-63 

Cassiterite.  See  Tin. 

Cassiterite  Creek,  tin  mining  on 355-356 

Cedar  Bay,  development  work  on 146 

Center  Star  claims,  upper  Chulitna  region, 

minerals  on 230 

Chandalar  district,  production  in 39 

Chapin,  Theodore,  A molybdenite  lode  on 

Healy  River 329 

Mining  developments  in  the  Ketchikan 

district 85-89 

Mining  in  the  Fairbanks  district 321-327 

Mining  in  the  Hot  Springs  district 331-335 

Platinum-bearing  auriferous  gravels  of 

Chistochina  River 137-141 

Tin  deposits  of  the  Ruby  district 337 

work  of 7, 9 

Chatham  mine,  Fairbanks  district,  work  on.  322 

Chicago  Creek,  placer  mining  on 334 

Chichagof  Island,  access  to 94 

game  on 94-95 

gold  and  gypsum  mining  on 30 

population  and  industries  of 93-94 

water-power  sites  on 45 

west  coast  of,  climate  and  vegetation  of- . 94 

copper  deposits  on 121-124, 136 

development  of  topography  of 112 

dike  rocks  of 110-111 

field  work  on 91 

geography  of. 92-95 

geologic  sketch  map  of 96 

geology  of 95-112 

gold  deposits  on . . r 112-121 

graywacke  on,  age  and  correlation 

of 105-109 

distribution  and  character  of.  - - 100-103 

structure  and  thickness  of 103-105 

hot  springs  on 134-136 


Page. 

Chichagof  Island,  west  coast  of,  igneous  rocks 

of 109-112,129-132 

nickel  deposits  on 22-23,125-133,136 

undifferentiated  metamorphic  rocks  of. . 95-100 

Chichagof!  mine,  description  of 114-116 

Chickaloon  River,  coal  beds  on.. 278-281 

Chisana  district,  mining  in 36 

Chistochina  River,  platinum-bearing  aurif- 
erous gravels  of 137-141 

Chitina  district,  copper  production  in 17, 18 

Chromium,  occurrence  and  mining  of 265-267, 

398, 400 

production  of 22, 32 

Chugach  Mountains,  altitudes  of 154 

Chulitna  region,  upper  part  of,  geography  of.  209-214 

upper  part  of,  geologic  sketch  map  of 208 

geology  of 214-221 

mines  and  prospects  in 33,221-232 

surveys  in 207-209 

Chulitna  River,  Middle  Fork  of,  lignite  on. . . 232 

West  Fork  of,  mining  on 225-226, 

227-228,230,231 

Circle  district,  mining  in 37 

Claim  Point,  chromite  deposit  on 265-267 

Cleary  Creek,  lode  mining  on 322,324 

Cliff  mine.  Port  Valdez  district,  operation  of.  150 

Coal,  occurrence  and  mining  of 219-220, 

231-232, 263-264, 304, 383-385, 399 

production  of 24-26 

Coal  Creek,  lignite  beds  on 231-232 

College  Fiord,  mining  on 150 

Colorado  Creek,  mining  on 224-225, 230 

Columbia  claim,  Moose  Pass  district,  work  on.  175 

Columbia  Glacier,  mining  on 151 

Columbia  mine,  Fairbanks  district,  develop- 
ment in 326 

Combination  claim,  Fairbanks  district,  min- 
erals on 323 

Congress  claims,  Chichagof  Island,  descrip- 
tion of 123-124 

Cook  Inlet,  mining  operations  on 32 

Cook  Inlet  coal,  future  of 26 

Cook  Inlet  region,  field  work  in 8 

Cooper  Creek,  Kenai  Peninsula,  placer  min- 
ing on 176 

Copper,  production  of 17-19, 28 

Copper  Bullion  claims,  Prince  William  Sound, 

development  on 145 

Copper  Coin  claims,  Prince  William  Sound, 

work  on 146 

Copper  King  claims,  Talkeetna  Mountains, 

ore  body  on .....  201 

Copper  Queen  claim,  Prince  William  Sound, 

shipments  from 146 

Copper  Queen  claims,  Talkeetna  Mountains, 

ore  body  in 200-201 

Copper  River,  nickel  deposit  near 23 

Copper  River  region,  field  work  in 8 

mining  operations  in 30-31 

Copper  Wonder  claims,  Talkeetna  Mountains, 

minerals  on 201-202 

Cordova,  operations  near 149 

Costello  Creek,  prospecting  on 223-224 

Crater  Lake  outlet  at  Speel  River,  Port  Snet- 

tisham 68-70 


INDEX 


403 


Page. 

Crites  & Peldman  mine,  Fairbanks  district, 


operation  of 321 

Crow  Creek , placer  mining  on 32, 176 

Cube  Mining  Co.,  operations  of 151 

Culross  Island,  Prince  William  Sound,  min- 
ing on 149 

Curly  Kidney  prospect,  Jack  Bay  district, 

description  of. 172 

Cyanide  plants,  operation  of 177, 178, 180 

D. 


Dahl  Creek,  production  on 42 

Dali,  W.  H.,  fossils  determined  by 306 

David  mine,  Fairbanks  district,  equipment  of.  322 

Dead  wood  Creek,  hydraulic  plant  for 37 

Democrat  Creek,  lode  on 39 

Dime  Creek,  placer  mining  on 396-398 

production  on 40 

rocks  on 372-373, 375, 379 

Disappointment  Creek,  mining  cn 39 

Discharge  measurements,  miscellaneous 83 

Doherty  mine,  Matanuska  coal  field,  opera- 
tions in 281-282 

Dollar  Creek,  placer  mining  on 252-254 

Dredging,  production  of  gold  from 16-17 

Drier  Bay,  operations  on 145, 146 

Dry  Creek,  placer  mining  on 335 

Dutton  mine,  ore  bodies  of 88 

E. 


Eakin,  H.  M.,  cited 355-356,393 

Eagle  claim  No.  2,  Willow  Creek  district,  de- 
velopment on 184-185 

Eagle  district,  mining  in 36-37 

Ear  Mountain,  conditions  affecting  mining 

on 357,359-360,361 

tin  lode  claims  near 41 

Eastview  claims,  Talkeetna  Mountains,  min- 
erals on 203 

Economic  conditions  affecting  mining 156-157, 

241-242, 341-342, 381-387 


Elephant  Creek,  mining  on 39 

Ellamar  Mining  Co.,  operations  and  ship- 
ments by 147 

Eska  Creek,  coal  beds  on 269-278 

coal  mining  on 278 

sections  on  east  bank  of 274-275 

sections  on  west  bank  of 271, 275, 277, 278 

Ester  Creek,  mining  on 323 

Eureka  Creek,  placer  mining  on 334 

Eva  Creek,  lode  mining  on 323 


F. 


Fairangel  Creek,  lodes  on 186 

Fairbanks  Creek,  lode  mining  on 321-322 

Fairbanks  district,  mineral  production  in 14, 

15,16,34-36,321 

silver-lead  deposit  in 324 

tungsten  deposits  in 324-327 

Falcon  Arm,  Chicagof  Island,  claims  on 120 

Falls  Creek,  placer  mining  on 251-252 

Felix  Fork,  production  on 39 

Fem-Goodell  property.  Willow  Creek  dis- 
trict, development  on 186 

Fidalgo  Mining  Co.,  operations  by 148 

Field  work,  record  of 3 


Page. 

Fish,  distribution  of 192-193, 213, 341 

Fish  Creek  near  sea  level,  Revillagigedo  Is- 
land  51-53 

Fishhook  Creek,  new  quartz  vein  on 32 

First  Chance  Creek,  tungsten  lodes  on 326,327 

Flaurier  claims,  Chulitna  region,  minerals  on . 230 
Flora  claim,  Chichagof  Island,  description  of.  119 

Forest  Service,  cooperation  by 8,43,47 

Fortymile  district,  mining  in 36 

Frank  & Graham,  mining  operations  by 334 

Franklin  claim,  Fairbanks  district,  develop- 
ment on 327 

Freight  rates.  See  Economic  conditions  af- 
fecting mining. 

Fuel.  See  Economic  conditions  affecting 
mining. 

G. 


Gaging  stations,  list  of 46 

records  of 48-82 

Gaging  stations  in  southeastern  Alaska,  map 

showing  location  of 44 

Gaines  Creek,  production  on 38 

Galena-Gold  claims.  Willow  Creek  district, 

ore  body  on 186 

Game.  See  Animals  and  fish. 

Geographic  distribution  of  work 5-7 

George  Inlet,  Revillagigedo  Island,  Beaver 

Falls  Creek  at 51 

Giffin,  C.  E.,  work  of 7 

Gilmore  & Stevens  property,  Fairbanks  dis- 
trict, development  on 322 

Gilmore  Creek,  tungsten  lodes  on 327 

Gilpatrick  property,  Moose  Pass  district, 

work  on 175 

Glaciation,  present  and  past 154-155, 

190, 198, 210, 239-240 

Glacier  Creek,  graphite  deposit  on 366 

Glacier  Island,  development  work  on 146-147 

Globe  claims,  Prince  William  Sound,  copper 

discovery  on 146 

Gold,  production  of 13-42 

Gold  Basin,  tin  and  gold  in 38 

Gold  Bullion  Mining  Co.,  operations  of 178-179 

Gold-Copper  group  of  claims,  Chichagof  Is- 
land, description  of 121-123 

Gold  Cord  claims.  Willow  Creek  district,  de- 
scription of 185 

Gold  Cord  Mining,  Milling  & Power  Co., 

property  of 180-181 

Gold  Creek  at  Juneau 80-82 

upper  Chulitna  region,  prospecting  for 

placers  on 231 

Gold  King  mine,  Port  Valdez  district,  work 

on 151 

Gold  Mountain  district,  mining  work  in 39 

Gold  Run,  mining  on 36 

Golden,  Prince  William  Sound  region,  devel- 
opment at 150 

Golden  Zone  claims,  Chulitna  region,  miner- 
alization on 226-227 

Golden  Zone  Extension  claims,  Chulitna  re- 
gion, prospecting  on 230 

Good  Hope  lode,  prospecting  on 186 

Goodpaster  region,  prospecting  in 39 

Goodro  mine,  ores  of,  and  mode  of  treatment. . 86 

Gopher  Creek,  placer  mining  on 260 


404 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Granite  mine,  Port  Wells  district,  operations 

in 149 

Grant  Creek,  work  on 39 

Grant  Lake,  Kenai  Peninsula,  mining  on 176 

Graphite,  deposits  of,  on  Seward  Peninsula . 363-367 

production  of 27,42 

Graves,  Miss  L.  H.,  work  of 6 

Graywacke,  age,  nature,  and  distribution  of, 
on  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof 

Island 100-109 

Green  Lake  outlet  at  Silver  Bay,  near  Sitka. . 63-64 

Greenstone  Creek,  production  on 38 

Grindstone  Creek  at  Taku  Inlet 74-75 

Grouse  Creek,  tin  mining  on 41,360 

Gulch  Creek,  placer  mining  on 176 

Gypsum,  mining  of 27,30 

H. 

Handy  property,  Chichagof  Island,  descrip- 
tion of 119-120 

Harriman  Fiord,  Prince  William  Sound,  min- 
ing on 150 

Harrington,  George  L.,  Graphite  mining  in 

Seward  Peninsula 363-367 

The  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  the 

Kiwalik-Koyuk  region 369-400 

The  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  the  Tol- 
stoi district 339-351 

Tin  mining  in  Seward  Peninsula 353-361 

work  of 7, 9 

Healy  River,  molybdenite  lode  on 329 

Hector  claims,  Chulitna  region,  mineraliza- 
tion on 227-228 

Heilig  & Creighton  property,  Fairbanks  dis- 
trict, prospecting  on 322 

Hemple  Copper  Mining  Co. , development  by.  148 
Hermann-Eaton  property,  Betties  Bay, 

development  on 150 

Hess,  F.  L.,  cited 126-127 

Hetta  Inlet,  mining  operations  near 88-89 

Hillis  claims,  Willow  Creek  district,  ore 

body  on 186 

Hirst  property,  description  of 116-118 

Holitna  River,  prospecting  on 40 

Hooniah  Warm  Springs,  Chichagof  Island, 

description  of 135-136 

Hot  springs,  descriptions  of 134-136 

Hot  Springs  district,  mineral  production  in. . 20, 37- 

38,331-332 

tin  ore  in,  occurrence  and  source  of 332-333 

Hunter  Creek,  gold  production  on 37 

Hurst  Creek,  rocks  on 342, 343, 345 

I. 

Ida  Bell  lode,  description  of 356 

Iditarod  district,  production  in 38-39 

Independence  Creek,  mining  on 37 

Independence  Gold  Mines  Co. , operations  of. . 180 

Indian  Creek,  production  on 39 

Innoko  district,  production  in 38 

Iridium.  See  Platinum  metals. 

Iron,  extraction  of,  from  magnetite 28 

Iron  Creek, Talkcctna  Mountains, claims  on . 199-205 
Talkeetna  Mountains,  lode  claims  staked 

on 33 

Seward  Peninsula,  placer  tin  on 41 

tin  mining  on 360 

Tolstoi  district,  placer  mining  on 350-351 

It  mine,  ore  bodies  in 85-86 


Page. 


Jack  Bay  and  vicinity,  geologic  sketch  map 

Of 158 

J ack  Bay  district,  animals  and  fish  of 156 

geography  of 153-157 

geology  of 157-164 

mineral  resources  of 164-167 

mines  and  prospects  in 168-173 

ore  deposits  in,  distribution  of 165 

genesis  of 166-167 

geologic  relations  of *.  165-166 

suggestions  for  prospecting  in 167 

Jap  claims,  Willow  Creek  district,  work  on. . 184 

Jennie  C . claim,  antimony  lode  on 323 

Jessie  B.  claims.  Willow  Creek  district,  ore 

body  on 186 

Johnson,  Bertrand  L.,  Mineral  resources  of 
Jack  Bay  district  and  vicinity, 

Prince  William  Sound 153-173 

Mining  in  central  and  northern  Kenai 

Peninsula 175-176 

Mining  on  Prince  William  Sound 143-151 

work  of 8 

Jumbo  claim,  Chichagof  Island,  description 

of 118-119 

Chulitna  region,  minerals  on 230 

Jumbo  mine,  Copper  River  region,  operation 

of 30 

Ketchikan  district,  ore  bodies  of 88 

J ump  Creek,  placer  mining  on 392 

Juneau,  Gold  Creek  at 80-82 

Juneau  region,  developed  water  power  in 44 

gold  mining  in 28,29-30 

Juneau  Sea  Level  Copper  Mines.  See  Alaska 
Nickel  Mines. 

K. 


Kahiltna  Valley,  coal  deposits  in 263-264 

economic  conditions  in 241-242 

geography  of 234 

geologic  sketch  map  of 236 

geology  of 236-240 

location  and  exploration  of 233-234 

mineral  resources  of 240-264 

placer  mining  on 262-263 

prospecting  for  platinum  on 32-33 

Kamishak  Bay,  copper  deposit  near 33 

Kantishna  district,  production  in 39 

Karta  Bay,  ore  bodies  south  of. 87 

Karta  River  at  Karta  Bay,  Prince  of  Wales 

Island 59-60 

Kasaan  Bay,  vicinity  of,  mining  operations 

in 85-88 

Kashwitna  River,  prospecting  on 33 

Katmai  Bay  region,  placer  gold  in 33 

Kelly-Willow  Creek  prospect,  development 

on 182 

Kenai  Peninsula,  chromite  deposits  on 265-267 

mineral  production  on 14, 15, 32 

mining  on 175-176 

Kennecott-B  onanza  mine , operation  of 30 

Kennecott  Copper  Corporation,  operations 

of 144-145 

Ketchikan  Creek  at  Ketchikan 49-50 

Ketchikan  district,  copper  mining  in 28 

mineral  production  in 17,85 

developed  water  power  in 43 


INDEX 


405 


Page. 

Ketchum  Creek,  prospecting  on 38 

Kichatna  River,  dredge  installed  on 32 

Kirk,  Edwin,  work  of 7, 8 

Kiwalik-Koyuk  region,  coal  beds  in . . . 383-385, 399 

economic  conditions  in 381-387 

explorations  in 369 

geologic  sketch  map  of 370 

geology  of 370-379 

hot  springs  in 399-400 

mineral  resources  of 380-400 

placers  in,  descriptions  of 391-398 

origin  of 387-391,400 

Klag  Bay,  gold  prospects  on 112, 114 

Klery  Creek,  production  on 42 

Knight  Island,  nickel  deposit  on 23, 31 

operations  on 145 

Knopf,  Adolph,  cited 114 

Kobuk  River  district,  production  in 42 

Kodiak  Island,  bluffs  of,  material  and  de- 
velopment of 305-312 

geography  of 299-300 

geology  of 300-316 

glaciation  on 308-310 

map  of 300 

placers  on,  development  and  composition 

of 312-316 

methods  of  mining 317-319 

production  on 33,299 

Kosciusko  Island,  water-power  site  on 45 

Kougarok  precinct , production  in  — 41 

Koyukuk  district,  gold  production  in 39 

Kugruk  River,  silver-lead  prospect  on 399 

Kuskokwim  region,  production  in 40 

L. 

Lake  Anna,  prospect  on 120 

Lake  Creek  basin,  mining  in 32 

Lancaster  Creek,  work  on 39 

Landlocked  Bay,  operations  on 148 

Latouche  Island,  mining  operations  on 31, 

144-145 

Lead,  production  of 19, 28 

Lenora  claims,  Prince  William  Sound,  devel- 
opment work  on 146 

Leslies  Bar,  Kahiltna  Valley,  placer  mining 

on 263 

Lime,  burning  of 27 

Lindfors  claims,  Chulitna  region,  mineraliza- 
tion on 226 

Lisianski  Inlet,  hot  spring  on 136 

Little  Bay  claims,  Chichagof  Island,  descrip- 
tion of .,... 123 

Little  Boulder  Creek,  prospecting  on 335 

Little  Eldorado  Creek,  mining  on 36 

Little  Gem  claims,  Willow  Creek  district,  ore 

body  on 185-186 

Little  Minook  Creek,  gold  production  on 37 

Little  Spruce  Creek,  production  on 38 

Little  Susitna  River,  coal  bed  on 282 

Lode  mines,  output  of  gold  and  silver  from. . 14-15 

Long  Bay,  copper  discovery  near 146 

Long  Creek,  Eagle  district,  ditch  for  hydraulic 

mining  on 37 

Ruby  district,  production  on 38 

Tokichitna  basin,  placer  mining  on 261-262 

upper  Chulitna  region,  mining  on 227 


Page. 

Long  River  below  Second  Lake,  at  Port  Snet- 

tisham 70-72 

Lost  River,  tin  mining  on 41, 355-357, 359, 361 

Lucky  Nell  claim,  ore  body  of 88 

Lucky  Strike  property,  Kenai  Peninsula, 

mining  on 176 

Lucrative  claims,  Chulitna  region,  minerals 

on 224 

Lynx  Creek,  production  on 42 

M. 

M.  E.  W.  Gold  Mining  Co.,  property  of. . . 140-141 
Mabel  Mining,  Milling  & Power  Co.,  opera- 
tions of. 181-182 

McCarty  property,  Fairbanks  district,  devel- 
opment on 322 

McDonald  property,  Port  Valdez  district, 

work  on 151 

McDougall,  supplies  obtained  from 241 

MacLaren  River,  copper  deposit  on 33 

Maddren,  A.  G.,  Sulphur  on  Unalaska  and 
Akun  islands  and  near  Stepovak 

Bay,  Alaska 283-298 

The  beach  placers  of  the  west  coast  of 

Kodiak  Island,  Alaska 299-319 

work  of. „ 9 

Madison  Creek,  prospecting  on 350, 351 

Magnetite,  utilization  of 28 

Mahoney  Creek  near  Beaver  Falls 83 

Makushin  Volcano,  sulphur  deposit  in 285-292 

topography  of 284-285 

Manganese,  occurrence  of 230 

Maps,  topographic,  in  press 10 

Marble,  occurrence  and  quarrying  of. . . 27, 28, 89, 97 

Marl,  production  of 27 

Marshall  district,  production  in 39 

Martin,  G.  C..  Administrative  report 3-10 

Geologic  problems  at  the  Matanuska  coal 

mines 269-282 

Preface 1-2 

The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1917 11-42 

work  of. 6, 9 

Mary  claim,  Willow  Creek  district,  ore  body 

of 185 

Mason  Creek,  hydraulic  plant  installed  on. . . 39 

Mastodon  Creek,  prospecting  on 350 

Matanuska  coal  field,  coal  beds,  and  mining 

in 269-282 

future  of. 25-26 

production  in 24-25 

Mayfield  property,  Port  Valdez  district,  work 

on 151 

Mendenhall,  W.  C.,  cited 378 

Mercury,  occurrence  and  mining  of 350 

Mertie,  J.  B.,  jr.,  Chromite  deposits  in 

Alaska. 265-267 

cited 327 

Platinum-bearing  gold  placers  of  the 

Kahiltna  Valley 233-264 

work  of 7, 8 

Mexican  mine,  dismantlement  of 29 

Midas  mine,  Port  Valdez  district,  history  and 

description  of. 168-170 

Port  Valdez  district,  location  of  lodes  of.  164 

shipments  from 147 

working  of 164,165 


406 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Midnight  Creek,  tin  on 38 

Midnight  Sun  claim,  Hot  Springs  district, 

placer  mining  on 334 

Mill  Creek  near  Wrangell 60-62 

Miller,  Jack,  estate,  claims  of 140, 141 

Miller  Gulch,  placer  mining  on 334 

Mills  Creek,  Kenai  Peninsula,  placer  mining 

on 176 

Mineral  Creek,  mining  on 151 

Minerals,  summary  of  production  of 11-12 

Mizpah  mine,  Fairbanks  district,  operation 

of 321-322 

Moffit,  F.  H.,  cited ....  363, 374, 378, 387, 389-390, 391 

work  of 6, 7 

Mohawk  Mining  Co.,  property  of 183 

Moira  Sound,  milling  on 28 

Molybdenum,  occurrence  of 23, 

30,89, 186,327,329 

Moore  Creek,  production  on 40 

Moose  Creek,  Fairbanks  district,  lode  mining 

on 321 

Matanuska  coal  field,  coal  bed  on 281-282 

Moose  Pass  district,  lode  mining  in 175 

milling  operations  in 32 

Mount  Hurst,  rocks  in  and  near . . . 342, 343, 345, 346 

Mount  Katmai,  detritus  from 304 

Mummy  Bay,  operations  on 145 

Murphy  claim, Fairbanks  district,  ore  body  on  326 
Myrtle  Creek  at  Niblack,  Prince  of  Wales 

Island 48 

N, 

Natives,  settlements  of 193,213-214 

N enana  coal  field . future  of 26 

Niblack,  Prince  of  Wales  Island,  Myrtle  Creek 

at 48 

Nickel,  prospecting  at 30 

Nickel,  chemical  test  for 126-127 

occurrence  and  mining  of 125-133, 136, 145 

production  of 22-23 

uses  of 133-134 

Nixon  Fork,  strike  on 40 

Nizina  district,  placer  mining  in 30 

Noatak  River,  prospecting  on 42 

North  Carolina  claims,  Chulitna  region,  min- 
eralization on 229-230 

Northern  Light  claims,  Chulitna  region,  min- 
erals on 223-224 

Northwestern  Mine,  Willow  Creek  district, 

location  and  ore  body  of 183-184 

Notch  Creek,  prospecting  on 36 

Nugget  Creek,  mining  on 248-249, 323 

Nymond  property,  Port  Valdez  district,  work 

on 151 

O. 

Orion  claim,  Jack  Bay  district,  description  of.  173 
Osceola  claims, College  Fiord,  development  on.  150 
Osmium.  See  Platinum  metals. 

Overbeck,  R.  M.,  Geology  and  mineral  re- 
sources of  the  west  coast  of  Chi- 
chagof Island 91-136 

work  of 7,8 

Overgard  property,  Fairbanks  district,  opera- 
tion of 322 

Ohio  Creek,  mining  on 228-229 


Page. 

Olson  property,  Port  Valdez  district,  work  on  151 

Omega  Creek,  placer  mining  on 334 

Ophir  claim,  Moose  Pass  district,  work  on 175 

Ophir  Creek,  production  on 38 

Orca  group,  rocks  of 158, 160-163 

Orchard  Lake  outlet  at  Shrimp  Bay,  Revilla- 

gigedo  Island 55-56 

P. 

Palmer,  Chase,  analysis  by 398 

Palmer  Creek,  Kenai  Peninsula,  mining  on. . 176 

Pandora  claims,  Prince  William  Sound, 

work  on 146 

Patten  Mining  Co.,  development  by 151 

Paul  Young  prospect,  ore  bodies  of. 86-87 

Pederson,  Chris,  development  by 150 

Peril  Strait,  Chichagof  Island,  hot  springs 

on 134,135 

Perkeypile  & Ford,  property  of 399 

Peters  Creek,  Kahiltna  Valley,  coal  bed  on. . 264 

Kahiltna  Valley,  mining  on 32 

Willow  Creek  district,  mining  on 186 

physiography  of 255 

placer  mining  on 254-257 

Petroleum,  consumption  of 27 

operations  for 27 

Phoenix  claims,  Talkeetna  Mountains,  min- 
erals on 202 

Pigot  Bay,  mining  on 150 

Pinta  Bay,  development  of  copper  claims 

near 30 

Pioneer  Creek,  mining  on 334 

Platinum  metals,  occurrence  and  mining  of . . 33, 

39,  40,  41,  139-141,  246,  258, 
259, 261, 262, 316, 350, 396, 400 

production  of 21-22, 30-31, 38 

Poorman  Creek,  Kahiltna  Valley,  placer  min- 
ing on 257-259 

Ruby  district,  production  on 38 

PorcupineCreek,  Kenai  Peninsula, mining  on.  175 

Porcupine  district,  placer  mining  in 28 

Port  Chatham,  chromite  deposit  on 265-267 

Port  Clarence  precinct,  production  in 41 

Port  Fidalgo,  mining  on 148-149 

Port  Snettisham,  Crater  Lake  outlet  at 68-70 

Long  River  below  Second  Lake  at 70-72 

Speel  River  at 72-74 

Port  Valdez  district,  mining  in 147, 150-151 

Port  Wells  district,  gold  mining  in 149-150 

Portage  Creek,  placer  gold  on 33 

Portlock  Harbor  Mining  Co.,  claims  of 121-123 

Portsmouth  claim,  Prince  William  Sound 

region,  work  on 146-147 

Potato  Mountain,  prospecting  for  tin  on. . . 357-358 
Primrose  claim,  Kenai  Peninsula,  work  on. . 175 

85-89 
45 


Prince  of  Wales  Island,  mining  operations  on 

water-power  sites  on 

Prince  William  Sound  region,  copper  produc 

tionin 17,31 

field  work  in 8 

gold  and  silver  productionin 14, 15, 31 

mining  operations  in 143-1 51 

Ptarmigan  claim,  Fairbanks  district,  develop- 
ment on 327 

Publications  issued  or  in  preparation 9-10 

Purches  Creek,  mining  on 186 


INDEX 


407 


R. 

Page. 

Railroad,  Government,  progress  of 188,191 

Rainbow  mine,  Fairbanks  district,  litigation 

over 322 

Rampart  district,  gold  production  in 37 

Ramsay-Rutherford  mine,  Port  Valdez  dis- 
trict, operation  of 151 

Rapid  Creek,  tin  on 359 

Ray-Wallace  Mining  Co.,  operations  of 183 

Ready  Bullion  mine,  operations  in 29 

Ready  Cash  claims,  Chulitna  Region,  miner- 
alization on 228-229 

Red  Hill  Bar , Kahiltna  V alley,  prospecting  on  2G3 

Red  Mountain,  chromite  deposit  at 267 

Reed  Creek,  mining  on r 185, 186 

Resurrection  Creek,  placer  mining  on 32, 176 

Revillagigedo  Island,  water-power  sites  on..  45 

Rhode  Island  Creek,  placer  mining  on 334 

Rich  Hill  claims,  ore  bodies  of 87 

Richardson  district,  production  in 39 

Riley  Creek,  production  on 42 

Riverside  claims,  Chulitna  region,  min- 
erals on 225-226 

Ronan  & James  property,  Kenai  Peninsula, 

operations  on 175 

Round  Bend  Bar,  Kahiltna  Valley,  placer 

mining  at 263 

Ruby  Creek,  placer  mining  on 259-260 

Ruby  district,  production  in 38 

stream  tin  in 337 

Rush  & Brown  mine,  development  of  ore 

bodies  in 86 

Ryan  lode,  Fairbanks  district,  development 

on 323 

S. 

St.  Paul  mine,  Fairbanks  district,  operation 

of 323 

Sampson  claim,  Moose  Pass  district,  work  on . 175 

Sargent,  R.  H.,  work  of 6 

Scheelite.  See  Tungsten. 

Scheelite  claim,  Fairbanks  district,  workings 

on 326 

Scotia  Bell  claim,  Prince  William  Sound  re- 
gion, work  on 146-147 

Sea  Level,  Revillagigedo  Island,  Fish  Creek 

near 51-53 

Seattle  Junior  Creek,  placer  deposits  on 334 

Seven  Hundred-foot  mine,  dismantlement  of.  29 

Seventymile  River,  hydraulic  mining  on 37 

Seward  Peninsula,  field  work  on 9 

gold  and  silver  production  on 15, 16, 40-41 

graphite  mining  on 42, 363-367 

tin  mining  on 353-361 

tin  production  on 20, 40-41 

Shakan,  molybdenite  lode  near 89 

Sheep  Creek  near  Thane 78-79 

Shelockum  Lake  outlet  at  Bailey  Bay 57-58 

Short  Creek,  coal  beds  on 264 

Shoup  Glacier  claims,  Port  Valdez  district, 

development  on 151 

Shrimp  Bay,  Revillagigedo  Island,  Orchard 

Lake  outlet  at -r. 55-56 

Shungnak  River,  production  on 42 

Sidney  Creek,  Willow  Creek  district,  claims 

on 185 


Pago. 

Silver,  production  of 13-15,28 

Silver  King  claims,  Chulitna  region,  ore  de- 
posit on 224-225 

Sitka,  Green  Lake  outlet  at  Silver  Bay  near. . 63-64 
Sitka  No.  1 and  No.  2 prospects,  description 

of 119 

Sitka  region,  developed  water  power  in 44 

Skagway  region,  developed  water  power  m . . 44 

Skoogy  Gulch,  lode  mining  on 322 

Slate  Creek,  gold  and  platinum  on 139-141 

gravels  of 139 

placer  mining  on 30-31 

rocks  bordering 137-139 

Slide  claim,  Mineral  Creek,  shipment  from. . . 151 

Smith,  P.  S.,  and  Eakin,  H.  M.,  cited 393 

Smith  & Sutherland,  claims  of,  in  the  Willow 

Creek  district 185 

Snake  River,  tungsten  produced  near 41 

Snettisham,  Sweetheart  Falls  Creek  near 66-68 

Snow  Slide  claims,  Chichagof  Island,  de- 
scription of 123 

Solfatara  on  Unalaska  Island,  description 

of 285-289 

Solomon  Gulch,  description  of 155 

mines  on 147, 168-171 

ore  deposits  on 164^165 

Sophie  Gulch,  tungsten  produced  on 41 

Southeastern  Alaska,  field  work  in 7-8 

mining  operations  and  production  in — 28-30 

Southwestern  Alaska,  field  work  in 9 

mineral  production  in 33 

Speel  River  at  Port  Snettisham 72-74 

Split  Creek,  placer  prospects  on 399 

Springs,  hot,  occurrence  of 399-400 

Spruce  Creek,  production  on 38 

Spruce  Hen  claim,  Fairbanks  district,  ore 

bodies  on 326 

Stag  Bay,  Chichagof  Island,  description  of. . . 121 

Standard  Copper  Mines  Co.’s  property,  Land- 
locked Bay,  work  on 148 

Stanton,  T.  W.,  fossils  determined  by 108,237 

Steel  Creek,  tungsten  lodes  on 326-327 

Stepovak  Bay,  sulphur  deposit  on 297-298 

Storage  reservoirs  in  southeastern  Alaska 82 

Structural  material,  operation  for 27 

Submarine  claim,  Chichagof  Island,  descrip- 
tion of 120 

Sudbury,  Canada,  nickel  deposit,  comparison 
of,  with  nickel  deposit  on  Chi- 
chagof Island 127-129 

Sukkwan  Island,  copper  prospects  on 88-89 

Sullivan  Creek,  gold  and  tin  on 37-38,333 

placer  mining  on 334 

Sulphur,  deposits  of 289-292, 294-298 

Summit  Creek,  operations  on 175 

Sunny  Cove,  Carlson  Creek  at 76-77 

Sunset  Creek,  tungsten  produced  on 41 

Surveys,  appropriations  for  and  progress  of, 

1898-1917 5 

Susitna  region,  field  work  in 8 

mining  operations  in 33 

prospecting  for  placers  on 231 

Susitna  River,  transportation  on 190-191 

Sutter  Creek,  tin  mining  on 360 

Swan  Lake  outlet  at  Carroll  Inlet,  Revillagi- 
gedo Island 53-55 


408 


INDEX 


Page. 

Sweepstakes  Creek,  placer  mining  on 395 

production  on 41 

rocks  on 372-374 

Sweepstakes  property,  Harriman  Fiord, 

development  on 150 

Sweetheart  Falls  Creek  near  Snettisham 66-68 


U. 


Page. 


Unalaska  Island,  location  of  and  access  to. . . 283 

sulphur  deposit  on 285-292 

Uncle  Sam  Alaska  Mining  Syndicate,  graph- 
ite mining  by 364-365 


T. 


V 


Taku  Inlet,  Grindstone  Creek  at 74-75 

Talkeetna  claims,  Prospect  Creek,  develop- 
ment on 203-204 

Talkeetna  district,  lode  prospecting  in 33 

Talkeetna  Gold  Mining  Co.,  property  and 

equipment  of 182 

Talkeetna  Mountains,  western  part  of,  geogra- 
phy of. 189-193 

western  part  of,  geologic  sketch  map  of . . . 188 

geology  of 194-198 

mineral  resources  of 199-205 

surveys  in 187-188 

Tamarack  Creek,  production  on 38 

Tanana  claims,  Fairbanks  district,  tungsten 

lode  on 327 

Thane,  Sheep  Creek  near 78-79 

Thanksgiving  Creek,  placer  mining  on 334 

Thomas  Bay  near  Petersburg,  Cascade  Creek 

at 62-63 

Thomas-Culross  Mining  Co.,  operations  of. . 149 

Three  man  Milling  Co.’s  property,  Landlocked 

Bay,  work  on 148 

Thunder  Creek,  placer  mining  on 249-251 

Timber  supply.  See  Economic  conditions 
affecting  mining. 

Tin,  occurrence  and  mining  of. . . 33, 38, 246, 258, 260, 
261, 332-333, 350, 353-361 

production  of 19-20,37-38,41 

Tin  City,  tin  lode  claims  near 41 

Tofty  Gulch,  placer  mining  on 334 

Tokeen,  marble  quarrying  at 28 

Tokichitna  Basin,  placer  mining  in 261-262 

Tolovana  district,  mineral  production  in 37 

Tolstoi  district,  economic  conditions  in 341-342 

geography  of 339-341 

geologic  sketch  map  of 340 

geology  of 342-348 

mineral  resources  of 349-351 

production  in 38 

Tomboy  claims,  Pigot  Bay,  development  on  150 

Tony  Goessman  property,  Fairbanks  district, 

mining  on 322 

Transportation.  See  Economic  conditions 
affecting  mining. 

Treadwell  mine,  dismantlement  of 29 

Tungsten,  occurrence  and  mining  of 246, 

324-327,356-357 

production  of 20-21,41 

Tungsten  Hill  claims,  Fairbanks  district, 

scheelite  lodes  on 327 


Valdez,  location  and  industries  of 156-157 

Valdez  Creek  district,  mining  in 33 

Valdez  Gold  Co.,  development  by 151 

Valdez  Mining  Co.,  development  by 151 

Vegetation,  kinds  and  prevalence  of 94, 


155-156, 192, 212, 340, 383 


Wages.  See  Economic  conditions  affecting 
mining. 

Wagner  & Johnson  claims,  Port  Wells  dis- 
trict, development  on 150 

Wahmus  Creek,  discovery  of  placer  gold  on. . 40 

Walker  Lake,  strike  reported  at 42 

Waring,  G.  A.,  cited 134-135 

Water  supply,  importance  of,  for  mining  and 

other  industries 43 

See  also  Economic  conditions  affecting 
mining. 

Water  power,  developed,  in  southeastern 

Alaska 43-^4 

information  needed  on 46 

sites  for,  in  southeastern  Alaska AA-Ah 

Watermouse  Creek,  discovery  of  placer  gold 

on 40 

Webbfoot  claims,  Willow  Creek  district, 

development  on 185 

Wells,  It.  C.,  analyses  by 258,316,396 

White  Sulphur  Springs,  Chichagof  Island, 

description  of 135-136 

Willow  Creek,  Kahiltna  Valley,  placer  mining 

on 259-260 

Marshall  district,  production  on 39 

Willow  Creek  district,  production  in 14, 

15,32, 177-178 

Windy  Creek,  placer  mining  on 254 

Winner  Creek,  placer  mining  on 176 

Witherspoon,  D.  C.,  work  of 8 

Woodchopper  Creek,  placer  mining  on 37,334 

Wrangell,  Mill  Creek  near 60-62 


Y. 


Yacobi  Island,  claims  on 121 

Yankee  Creek,  production  on 38 

Yellow  Pup  Creek,  antimony  lodes  on 325,326 

Yentna  district,  mining  operations  in 32-33 

York  region,  tin  mining  in 353-361 

Yukon  region,  field  work  in 9 

mineral  production  in 33-40 


RECENT  SURVEY  PUBLICATIONS  ON  ALASKA. 

[Arranged  geographically.  A complete  list  can  be  had  on  application.] 

All  these  publications  can  be  obtained  or  consulted  in  the  following  ways : 

1.  A limited  number  are  delivered  to  the  Director  of  the  Survey,  from  whom 
they  can  be  obtained  free  of  charge  (except  certain  maps)  on  application. 

2.  A certain  number  are  delivered  to  Senators  and  Representatives  in  Con- 
gress for  distribution. 

3.  Other  copies  are  deposited  with  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Wash- 
ington, D.  C.,  from  whom  they  can  be  had  at  prices  slightly  above  cost.  The 
publications  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*)  in  this  list  are  out  of  stock  at  the 
Survey,  but  can  be  purchased  from  the  Superintendent  of  Documents  at  the 
prices  stated. 

4.  Copies  of  all  Government  publications  are  furnished  to  the  principal  public 
libraries  throughout  the  United  States,  where  they  can  be  consulted  by  those 
interested. 

The  maps  whose  price  is  stated  are  sold  by  the  Geological  Survey  and  not  by 
the  Superintendent  of  Documents.  On  an  order  amounting  to  $5  or  more  at  the 
retail  price  a discount  of  40  per  cent  is  allowed. 

GENERAL. 

REPORTS. 

* The  geography  and  geology  of  Alaska,  a summary  of  existing  knowledge,  by 
A.  H.  Brooks,  with  a section  on  climate,  by  Cleveland  Abbe,  jr.,  and  a topo- 
graphic map  and  description  thereof,  by  R.  U.  Goode.  Professional  Paper  45, 
1906,  327  pp.  No  copies  available.  May  be  consulted  at  many  public  libraries. 

*Placer  mining  in  Alaska  in  1904,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  259,  1905,  pp. 
18-31.  15  cents. 

The  mining  industry  in  1905,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  284,  1906,  pp.  4-9. 

* The  mining  industry  in  1906,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  314,  1907,  pp.  19-39. 
30  cents. 

* The  mining  industry  in  1907,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  345,  1908,  pp.  30-53. 
45  cents. 

* The  mining  industry  in  1908,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  379,  1909,  pp.  21-62. 
50  cents. 

*The  mining  industry  in  1909,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp.  20-46. 
40  cents. 

The  mining  industry  in  1910,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  480,  1911,  pp.  21-42. 
The  mining  industry  in  1911,  by  A.  H.  Brooks  In  Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  19-44. 
50  cents. 

The  mining  industry  in  1912,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  542,  1913,  pp.  18-51. 

* The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1913,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914, 
pp.  45-74.  60  cents. 


i 


II  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1914,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915, 
pp.  15-68. 

The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1915,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  642,  1916, 
pp.  17-72. 

The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1916,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  662,  1917, 

pp.  11-62. 

The  Alaskan  mining  industry  in  1917,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  In  Bulletin  692, 
1918,  pp.  11-42. 

Railway  routes,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  284,  1906,  pp.  10-17. 

Railway  routes  from  the  Pacific  seaboard  to  Fairbanks,  Alaska,  by  A.  H.  Brooks. 
In  Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  45-88. 

♦Geologic  features  of  Alaskan  metalliferous  lodes,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin 
480,  1911,  pp.  43-93. 

♦The  mineral  deposits  of  Alaska,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp. 
18-44. 

♦The  future  of  gold  placer  mining  in  Alaska,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  622, 
1915,  pp.  69-79. 

*Tin  resources  of  Alaska,  by  F.  L.  Hess.  In  Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  89-92.  50 
cents. 

♦The  petroleum  fields  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  Alaska,  with  an  account  of  the 
Bering  River  coal  deposits,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  Bulletin  250,  1905,  64  pp. 
15  cents. 

Alaska  coal  and  its  utilization,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  Bulletin  442-J,  reprinted  1914. 
*The  possible  use  of  peat  fuel  in  Alaska,  by  C.  A.  Davis.  In  Bulletin  379, 

1909,  pp.  63-66.  50  cents. 

*The  preparation  and  use  of  peat  as  a fuel,  by  C.  A.  Davis.  In  Bulletin  442, 

1910,  pp.  101-132.  40  cents. 

♦Methods  and  costs  of  gravel  and  placer  mining  in  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  Puring- 
ton.  Bulletin  263,  1905,  362  pp.  No  copies  available.  (Abstract  in  Bulletin 
259,  1905,  pp.  32-46.) 

♦Prospecting  and  mining  gold  placers  in  Alaska,  by  J.  P.  Hutchins.  In  Bulletin 
345,  1908,  pp.  54—77.  45  cents. 

♦Geographic  dictionary  of  Alaska,  by  Marcus  Baker ; second  edition  prepared 
by  James  McCormick.  Bulletin  299,  1906,  690  pp.  50  cents. 

Tin  mining  in  Alaska,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  81-94. 
Antimony  deposits  of  Alaska,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  Bulletin  649,  1916,  67  pp. 

The  use  of  the  panoramic  camera  in  topographic  surveying,  by  J.  W.  Bagley. 
Bulletin  657,  1917,  88  pp. 

The  mineral  springs  of  Alaska,  by  G.  A.  Waring.  .Water-Supply  Paper  418, 
1917,  114  pp. 

Alaska’s  mineral  supplies,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  Bulletin  666-P,  pp.  1-14. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 

Map  of  Alaska  (A)  ; scale  1:  5,000,000;  1912,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  20  cents  retail 
or  12  cents  wholesale. 

Map  of  Alaska  (B)  ; scale  1: 1,500.000;  1915,  by  A.  H.  Brooks  and  R.  H.  Sar- 
gent. 80  cents  retail  or  48  cents  wholesale. 

Map  of  Alaska  (C)  ; scale  1: 12,000,000;  1916.  1 cent  retail  or  five  for  3 cents 
wholesale. 

Map  of  Alaska  showing  distribution  of  mineral  deposits ; scale  1 : 5,000,000 ; 
by  A.  H.  Brooks.  20  cents  retail  or  12  cents  wholesale.  New  editions  in- 
cluded in  Bulletins  642  and -662. 

Index  map  of  Alaska,  including  list  of  publications ; scale  1 : 5,000,000 ; by  A.  H. 
Brooks.  Free. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917, 


III 


SOUTHEASTERN  ALASKA. 

REPORTS. 

*The  Porcupine  placer  district,  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  Wright.  Bulletin  236,  1904, 
35  pp.  15  cents. 

♦Economic  developments  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  F.  E.  and  C.  W.  Wright. 

In  Bulletin  259,  1905,  pp.  47-68.  15  cents. 

♦The  Juneau  gold  belt,  Alaska,  by  A.  C.  Spencer,  pp.  1-137,  and  a reconnais- 
sance of  Admiralty  Island,  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  Wright,  pp.  138-154.  Bulletin 
287,  1906,  161  pp.  75  cents. 

Lode  mining  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  F.  E.  and  C.  W.  Wright.  In  Bulletin 
284,  1906,  pp.  30-53. 

Nonmetallic  deposits  of  southeastern  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  Wright.  In  Bulletin 
284,  1906,  pp.  54-60. 

Lode  mining  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  Wright.  In  Bulletin  314,  1907, 
pp.  47-72. 

Nonmetalliferous  mineral  resources  of  southeastern  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  Wright. 
In  Bulletin  314,  1907,  pp.  73-81. 

Reconnaissance  on  the  Pacific  coast  from  Yakutat  to  Alsek  River,  by  Eliot 
Blackwelder.  In  Bulletin  314,  1907,  pp.  82-88. 

♦Lode  mining  in  southeastern  Alaska,  1907,  by  C.  W.  Wright.  In  Bulletin  345, 

1908,  pp.  78-97.  45  cents. 

♦The  building  stones  and  materials  of  southeastern  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  Wright. 

In  Bulletin  345,  1908,  pp.  116-126.  45  cents. 

♦The  Ketchikan  and  Wrangell  mining  districts,  Alaska,  by  F.  E.  and  C.  W. 

Wright.  Bulletin  347,  1908,  210  pp.  60  cents. 

♦The  Yakutat  Bay  region,  Alaska ; Physiography  and  glacial  geology,  by  R.  S. 
Tarr ; Areal  geology,  by  R.  S.  Tarr  and  B.  S.  Butler.  Professional  Paper  64, 

1909,  186  pp.  50  cents. 

♦Mining  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  C.  W.  W right.  In  Bulletin  379,  1909,  pp. 
67-86.  50  cents. 

♦Mining  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  In  Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp. 
133-143.  40  cents. 

♦Occurrence  of  iron  ore  near  Haines,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  In  Bulletin  442,  1910, 
pp.  144-146.  40  cents. 

♦Report  of  water-power  reconnaissance  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  J.  C.  Hoyt. 

In  Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp.  147-157.  40  cents. 

Geology  of  the  Berners  Bay  region,  Alaska,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  Bulletin  446, 

1911,  58  pp. 

Mining  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  In  Bulletin  480,  1911,  pp. 
94-102. 

The  Eagle  River  region,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  In  Bulletin  480,  1911,  pp.  103-111. 
The  Eagle  River  region,  southeastern  Alaska,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  Bulletin  502, 

1912,  61  pp. 

The  Sitka  mining  district,  Alaska,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  Bulletin  504,  1912,  32  pp. 
The  earthquakes  at  Yakutat  Bay,  Alaska,  in  September,  1899,  by  R.  S.  Tarr 
and  Lawrence  Martin,  with  a preface  by  G.  K.  Gilbert.  Professional  Paper 
69,  1912,  135  pp. 

Marble  resources  of  Ketchikan  and  Wrangell  districts,  by  E.  F.  Burchard.  In 
Bulletin  542,  1913,  pp.  52-77. 

Marble  resources  of  the  Juneau,  Skagway,  and  Sitka  districts,  by  E.  F. 

Burchard.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp.  95-107. 

A barite  deposit  near  Wrangell,  by  E.  F.  Burchard.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp. 
109-117. 


IV 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


*Lode  mining  in  the  Ketchikan  district,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914, 
pp.  75-94.  60  cents. 

The  geology  and  ore  deposits  of  Copper  Mountain  and  Kasaan  Peninsula,  Alaska, 
by  C.  W.  Wright.  Professional  Paper  87,  1915,  110  pp. 

Mining  in  the  Juneau  region,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  95-102. 

Notes  on  the  geology  of  Gravina  Island,  Alaska,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In  Professional 
Paper  95,  1916,  pp.  97-105. 

Mining  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  642,  1916, 
pp.  73-104. 

Water-power  investigations  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  G.  H.  Canfield.  In  Bul- 
letin 642,  1916,  pp.  105-127. 

Mining  developments  in  the  Ketchikan  and  Wrangell  districts,  by  Theodore 
Chapin.  In  Bulletin  662,  1917,  pp.  63-75. 

Lode  mining  in  the  Juneau  gold  belt,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  662,  1917, 
pp.  71-92. 

Gold  placer  mining  in  the  Porcupine  district,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  662, 
1917,  pp.  93-100. 

Water-power  investigations  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  G.  H.  Canfield.  In  Bul- 
letin 662,  1917,  pp.  101-154. 

Water-power  investigations  in  southeastern  Alaska,  by  G.  H.  Canfield.  In  Bul- 
letin 692,  1919,  pp.  43-83. 

The  structure  and  stratigraphy  of  Gravina  and  Bevillagigedo  islands,  Alaska, 
by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Professional  Paper  120-D,  1918,  pp.  83-100. 

Mining  developments  in  the  Ketchikan  mining  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin, 
In  Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  85-89. 

The  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  the  west  coast  of  Chichagof  Island, 
by  R.  M.  Overbeck.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  91-136. 

In  preparation. 

Marble  deposits  of  southeastern  Alaska,  by  E.  F.  Burchard.  Bulletin  682. 

The  Porcupine  district,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  Bulletin  699. 

The  Juneau  district,  by  A.  C.  Spencer  and  H.  M.  Eakin. 

Geology  of  the  Glacier  Bay  and  Lituya  region,  Alaska,  by  F.  E.  and  C.  W. 
Wright. 

The  Ketchikan  district,  Alaska,  by  Theodore  Chapin. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 

* Juneau  gold  belt,  Alaska  ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; compiled.  In  *Bulletin  287.  75 
cents.  Not  issued  separately. 

Juneau  special  (No.  581A)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  W.  J.  Peters.  10  cents  retail 
or  6 cents  wholesale. 

Berners  Bay  special  (No.  581B)  ; scale,  1:  62,500;  by  R.  B.  Oliver.  10  cents  re- 
tail or  6 cents  wholesale. 

Kasaan  Peninsula,  Prince  of  Wales  Island  (No.  540A)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by 
D.  C.  Witherspoon,  R.  H.  Sargent,  and  J.  W.  Bagley.  10  cents  retail  or  6 
cents  wholesale.  Also  contained  in  Professional  Paper  87. 

Copper  Mountain  and  vicinity,  Prince  of  Wales  Island  (No.  540B)  ; scale, 
1 : 62,500 ; by  R.  H.  Sargent.  10  cents  retail  or  6 cents  wholesale.  Also  con- 
tained in  Professional  Paper  87. 

Eagle  River  region  (No.  581C)  ; scale,  1:  62,500;  by  J.  W.  Bagley,  C.  E.  Giffin, 
and  R.  E.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  502.  Not  issued  separately. 

Juneau  and  vicinity  (No.  581D)  ; scale,  1:24,000;  contour  interval,  50  feet;  by 
D.  C.  Witherspoon.  10  cents. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


V 


CONTROLLER  BAY,  PRINCE  WILLIAM  SOUND,  AND  COPPER  RIVER  REGIONS. 

REPORTS. 

♦The  petroleum  fields  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  Alaska,  with  an  account  of  the 
Bering  River  coal  deposits,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  Bulletin  250,  1905,  64  pp.  15 
cents. 

♦Geology  of  the  central  Copper  River  region,  Alaska,  by  W.  C.  Mendenhall. 

Professional  Paper  41,  1905,  133  pp.  50  cents. 

♦Geology  and  mineral  resources  of  Controller  Bay  region,  Alaska,  by  G.  C. 

Martin.  Bulletin  335,  1908,  141  pp.  70  cents. 

♦Notes  on  copper  prospects  of  Prince  William  Sound,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulle- 
tin 345,  1908,  pp.  176-178.  45  cents. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Kotsina-Chitina  region,  by  F.  H.  Moffit  and  A.  G. 
Maddren.  Bulletin  374,  1909,  103  pp. 

♦Copper  mining  and  prospecting  on  Prince  'Vyilliam  Sound,  by  U.  S.  Grant  and 
D.  F.  Higgins,  jr.  In  Bulletin  379,  1909,  pp.  78-96.  50  cents. 

♦Gold  on  Prince  William  Sound,  by  U.  S.  Grant.  In  Bulletin  379,  1909,  p.  97. 
50  cents. 

Mining  in  the  Kotsina-Chitina,  Chistochina,  and  Valdez  Creek  regions,  by 
F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  379,  1909,  pp.  153-160. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Nabesna-White  River  district,  by  F.  H.  Moffit  and 
Adolph  Knopf;  with  a section  on  the  Quaternary,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin 
417,  1910,  64  pp. 

Mining  in  the  Chitina  district,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp. 
158-163. 

Mining  and  prospecting  on  Prince  William  Sound  in  1909,  by  U.  S.  Grant.  In 
Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp.  164-165. 

Reconnaissance  of  the  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  Prince  William  Sound, 
Alaska,  by  U.  S.  Grant  and  D.  F.  Higgins.  Bulletin  443,  1910,  89  pp. 
Geology  and  mineral  resources  of  the  Nizina  district,  Alaska,  by  F.  H.  Moffit 
and  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin  448,  1911,  111  pp. 

Headwater  regions  of  Gulkana  and  Susitna  rivers,  Alaska,  with  accounts  of 
the  Valdez  Creek  and  Chistochina  placer  districts,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  Bulletin 
498,  1912,  82  pp. 

♦The  Chitina  district,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  105-107.  50 
cents. 

♦Gold  deposits  near  Valdez,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  108-130. 
50  cents. 

Coastal  glaciers  of  Prince  William  Sound  and  Kenai  Peninsula,  Alaska,  by 
U.  S.  Grant  and  D.  F.  Higgins.  Bulletin  526,  1913,  75  pp. 

The  McKinley  Lake  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  542,  1913,  pp. 
78-80. 

Mining  in  Chitina  Talley,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  542,  1913,  pp.  81-85. 
Mineral  deposits  of  the  Ellamar  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps  and  B.  L.  Johnson.  In 
Bulletin  542,  1913,  pp.  86-124. 

The  mineral  deposits  of  the  Yakataga  region,  by  A.  G.  Maddren.  In  Bulletin 
592,  1914,  pp.  119-154. 

♦Preliminary  report  on  water  power  of  south-central  Alaska,  by  C.  E.  Ellsworth 
and  R.  W.  Davenport.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp.  155-194. 

The  Port  Wells  gold  lode  district,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp. 
195-236. 

Mining  on  Prince  William  Sound,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp. 
237-244. 

115086°— 19 27 


VI  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

Geology  of  the  Hanagita-Bremner  region,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  Bulletin  576,  1915,  56 

pp. 

The  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  Kenai  Peninsula,  by  G.  C.  Martin,  B.  L. 

Johnson,  and  U.  S.  Grant.  Bulletin  587,  1915,  243  pp. 

Mineral  deposits  of  the  Kotsina-Kuskulana  district,  with  notes  on  mining  in 
Chitina  Valley,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  103-117. 
Auriferous  gravels  of  the  Nelchina-Susitna  region,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In 
Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  118-130. 

Mining  on  Prince  William  Sound,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp. 
131-139. 

The  gold  and  copper  deposits  of  the  Port  Valdez  district,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In 
Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  140-188. 

The  Ellamar  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps  and  B.  L.  Johnson.  Bulletin  605,  125  pp. 
A water-power  reconnaissance  in  south-central  Alaska,  by  C.  E.  Ellsworth  and 
R.  W.  Davenport.  Water-Supply  Paper  372,  173  pp. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  upper  Chitina  Valley,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  642, 
1916,  pp.  129-136. 

Mining  on  Prince  William  Sound,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  642,  1916,  pp. 
137-145. 

Mining  in  the  lower  Copper  River  basin,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  662,  1917, 
pp.  155-182. 

Retreat  of  Barry  Glacier,  Port  Wells,  Prince  William  Sound,  Alaska,  between 
1910  and  1914,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Professional  Paper  98,  1916,  pp.  35-36. 
Mining  on  Prince  William  Sound,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  662,  1917,  pp. 
183-192. 

Copper  deposits  of  the  Latouche  and  Knight  Island  districts,  Prince  William 
Sound,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  662,  1917,  pp.  193-220. 

The  Nelchina-Susitna  region,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  Bulletin  668,  1918,  67  pp. 
The  upper  Chitina  Valley,  by  F.  H.  Moffit,  with  a description  of  the  igneous 
rocks,  by  R.  M.  Overbeck.  Bulletin  675,  1918,  82  pp. 

Platinum-bearing  auriferous  gravels  of  Chistochina  River,  by  Theodore 
Chapin.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  137-141. 

Mining  in  Prince  William  Sound,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919, 
pp.  143-151. 

Mineral  resources  of  Jack  Bay  district  and  vicinity,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In 
Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  153-173. 

Mining  in  central  and  northern  Kenai  Peninsula  in  1917,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In 
Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  175-186. 

In  preparation. 

The  Kotsina-Kuskulana  district,  by  F.  H.  Moffit. 

The  Latouche  and  Knight  Island  districts,  Prince  William  Sound,  Alaska,  by 
B.  L.  Johnson. 

The  Valdez- Jack  Bay  district,  Prince  William  Sound,  Alaska,  by  B.  L.  Johnson. 
The  Yakataga  region,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 

Central  Copper  River  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  T.  G. 

Gerdine.  In  *Professional  Paper  41.  50  cents.  Not  issued  separately. 
Headwater  regions  of  Copper,  Nabesna,  and  Chisana  rivers,  reconnaissance 
map;  scale,  1:250,000;  by  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  T.  G.  Gerdine,  and  W.  J. 
Peters.  In  * Professional  Paper  41.  50  cents.  Not  issued  separately. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


VII 


Controller  Bay  region  (No.  601A)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  E.  G.  Hamilton  and 
W.  R.  Hill.  35  cents  retail  or  21  cents  wholesale.  Also  published  in  *Bulletin 
335.  70  cents. 

Chitina  quadrangle  (No.  601),  reconnaissance  map;  scale,  1:250,000;  by  T.  G. 
Gerdine,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and  others.  50  cents  retail  or  30  cents  wholesale. 
Also  published  in  Bulletin  576. 

Nizina  district  (No.  601B)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  D.  C.  Witherspoon  and  R.  M. 
La  Follette.  In  Bulletin  448.  Not  issued  separately. 

Headwater  regions  of  Gulkana  and  Susitna  rivers ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  D.  C. 
Witherspoon,  J.  W.  Bagley,  and  C.  E.  Giffin.  In  Bulletin  498.  Not  issued 
separately. 

Prince  William  Sound  ; scale,  1 : 500,000  ; compiled.  In  Bulletin  526.  Not  issued 
separately. 

Port  Valdez  district  (No.  602B)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  J.  W.  Bagley.  20  cents 
retail  or  12  cents  wholesale. 

The  Bering  River  coal  fields ; scale,  1 : 62,500 ; by  G.  C.  Martin.  25  cents  retail 
or  15  cents  wholesale. 

The  Ellamar  district  (No.  602D)  ; scale,  1:  62,500;  by  R.  H.  Sargent  and  C.  E. 
Giffin.  Published  in  Bulletin  605.  Not  issued  separately. 

Nelchina-Susitna  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  J.  W.  Bagley,  T.  G.  Gerdine, 
and  others.  In  Bulletin  668.  Not  issued  separately. 

Upper  Chitina  Valley,  reconnaissance  map;  scale,  1:250,000;  contour  interval, 
200  feet ; by  International  Boundary  Commission,  F.  H.  Moffit,  D.  C.  Wither- 
spoon, and  T.  G.  Gerdine.  In  Bulletin  675.  Not  issued  separately. 

In  preparation. 

The  Kotsina-Kuskulana  district  (No.  601C)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  D.  C.  Wither- 
spoon. 

The  Port  Wells  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  J.  W.  Bagley. 

Jack  Bay  district ; scale,  1 : 62,500 ; by  J.  W.  Bagley. 

COOK  INLET  AND  SUSITNA  REGION. 

REPORTS. 

*The  petroleum  fields  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  Alaska,  with  an  account  of  the 
Bering  River  coal  deposits,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  Bulletin  250,  1905,  64  pp.  15 
cents. 

*Gold  placers  of  Turnagain  Arm,  Cook  Inlet,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  259, 
1905,  pp.  90-99.  15  cents. 

*Mineral  resources  of  the  Kenai  Peninsula,  Alaska,  by  F.  H.  Moffit  and  R.  W. 
Stone.  Bulletin  277,  1906,  80  pp. 

♦Gold  placers  of  the  Mulchatna,  by  F.  J.  Katz.  In  Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp.  201- 
202.  40  cents. 

♦Geologic  reconnaissance  in  the  Matanuska  and  Talkeetna  basins,  Alaska,  by 
Sidney  Paige  and  Adolph  Knopf.  Bulletin  327,  1907,  71  pp. 

The  Mount  McKinley  region,  Alaska,  by  A.  H.  Brooks,  with  descriptions  of  the 
igneous  rocks  and  of  the  Bonnifield  and  Kantishna  districts,  by  L.  M.  Prindle. 
Professional  Paper  70,  1911,  234  pp. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  of  the  Iliamna  region,  Alaska,  by  G.  C.  Martin  and 
F.  J.  Katz.  Bulletin  485,  1912,  138  pp. 

Geology  and  coal  fields  of  the  lower  Matanuska  Valley,  Alaska,  by  G.  C.  Martin 
and  F.  J.  Katz.  Bulletin  500,  1912,  98  pp. 

The  Yentna  district,  Alaska,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin  534,  1913,  75  pp. 

Gold  lodes  and  placers  of  the  Willow  Creek  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In  Bulletin 
592,  1914,  pp.  245-272. 


VT1I 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

Mineral  resources  of  tiie  upper  Matanuska  and  Nelchina  valleys,  by  G.  C. 

Martin  and  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.  In  Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp.  273-300. 

Preliminary  report  on  the  Broad  Pass  region,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  592, 
1914,  pp.  301-306. 

Mining  in  the  Valdez  Creek  placer  district,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  592, 
1914,  pp.  307-308. 

The  geology  and  mineral  resources  of  Kenai  Peninsula,  Alaska,  by  G.  C.  Martin 
B.  L.  Johnson,  and  U.  S.  Grant.  Bulletin  587,  1915,  243  pp. 

The  Willow  Creek  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin  607,  1915,  86  pp. 

The  Broad  Pass  region,  by  F.  H.  Moffit  and  J.  E.  Pogue.  Bulletin  608,  1915. 

80  pp. 

Auriferous  gravels  of  the  Nelchina-Susitna  region,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In 
Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  118-130. 

The  Turnagain-Knik  region,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In  Bulletin  642,  1916,  pp.  147-194. 
Gold  mining  in  the  Willow  Creek  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In  Bulletin  642, 
1916,  pp.  195-200. 

The  Nelchina-Susitna  region,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  Bulletin  668,  1918,  67  pp. 
Mineral  resources  of  the  upper  Chulitna  region,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In  Bulletin 
692,  1919,  pp.  207-232. 

Gold  lode  mining  in  the  Willow  Creek  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In  Bulletin  692, 
1919,  pp.  177-186. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  western  Talkeetna  Mountains,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In 
Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  187-205. 

Platinum-bearing  gold  placers  of  Kahiltna  Valley,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.  In  Bul- 
letin 692,  1919,  pp.  233-264. 

Chromite  deposits  of  Alaska,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919, 
pp.  265-267. 

Geologic  problems  at  the  Matanuska  coal  mines,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  In  Bulletin 
692,  1919,  pp.  269-282. 

In  preparation . 

The  geology  of  upper  Matanuska  basin,  by  G.  C.  Martin. 

The  western  Talkeetna  Mountains,  Alaska,  by  S.  R.  Capps. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 

Kenai  Peninsula,  southern  portion ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; compiled.  In  Bulletin 
526.  Not  issued  separately. 

Matanuska  and  Talkeetna  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by 
T.  G.  Gerdine  and  R.  H.  Sargent.  In  *Bulletin  327.  25  cents.  Not  issued 
separately. 

Lower  Matanuska  Valley;  scale,  1:62,500;  by  R.  H.  Sargent.  In  Bulletin  500. 
Not  issued  separately. 

Yentna  district,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  R.  W.  Porter.  Re- 
vised edition.  In  Bulletin  534.  Not  issued  separately. 

Mount  McKinley  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 625,000 ; by  D.  L.  Rea- 
burn.  In  Professional  Paper  70.  Not  issued  separately. 

Kenai  Peninsula,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  R.  H.  Sargent, 
J.  W.  Bagley,  and  others.  In  Bulletin  587.  Not  issued  separately. 

Moose  Pass  and  vicinity  (602C)  ; scale,  1:  62,500;  by  J.  W.  Bagley.  In  Bulletin 
587.  Not  issued  separately. 

The  Willow  Creek  district;  scale,  1:62,500;  by  C.  E.  Giffin.  In  Bulletin  607. 
Not  issued  separately. 

The  Broad  Pass  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  J.  W.  Bagley.  In  Bulletin  608. 
Not  issued  separately. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


IX 


Lower  Matanuska  Valley  (602A)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  contour  interval,  50  feet; 
by  R.  H.  Sargent.  10  cents. 

Nelchina-Susitna  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  J.  W.  Bagley.  In  Bulletin  668. 
Not  issued  separately. 

SOUTHWESTERN  ALASKA. 

REPORTS. 

♦A  reconnaissance  in  southwestern  Alaska,  by  J.  E.  Spurr.  In  Twentieth 
Annual  Report,  pt.  7,  1900,  pp.  31-264.  $1.80. 

♦Gold  mine  on  Unalaska  Island,  by  A.  J.  Collier.  In  Bulletin  259,  1905,  pp. 
102-103.  15  cents. 

♦The  petroleum  fields  of  the  Pacific  coast  of  Alaska,  with  an  account  of  the 
Bering  River  coal  deposits,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  Bulletin  250,  1905,  64  pp.  15 
cents. 

Geology  and  mineral  resources  of  parts  of  Alaska  Peninsula,  by  W.  W.  Atwood. 
Bulletin  467,  1911,  137  pp. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  of  the  Iliamna  region,  Alaska,  by  G.  C.  Martin  and 
F.  J.  Katz.  Bulletin  485,  1912,  138  pp. 

Mineral  deposits  of  Kodiak  and  the  neighboring  islands,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  In 
Bulletin  542,  1913,  pp.  125-136. 

The  Lake  Clark-Central  Kuskokwim  region,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  Bulletin  655, 
1918,  162  pp. 

The  beach  placers  of  the  west  coast  of  Kodiak  Island,  Alaska,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 
In  Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  299-319. 

Sulphur  on  Unalaska  and  Akun  islands  and  near  Stepovak  Bay,  Alaska,  by 
A.  G.  Maddren.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  283-298. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 

Herendeen  Bay  and  Unga  Island  region,  reconnaissance  map;  scale,  1:250,000; 

by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  467.  Not  issued  separately. 

Chignik  Bay  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In 
Bulletin  467.  Not  issued  separately. 

Iliamna  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  D.  C.  Witherspoon 
and  C.  E.  Giffin.  In  Bulletin  485.  Not  issued  separately. 

♦Kuskokwim  River  and  Bristol  Bay  region  ; scale,  1 : 625,000 ; by  W.  S.  Post.  In 
Twentieth  Annual  Report,  pt.  7.  $1.80.  Not  issued  separately. 

Lake  Clark-Central  Kuskokwim  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; 
by  R.  H.  Sargent,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and  C.  E.  Giffin.  In  Bulletin  655.  Not 
issued  separately. 

YUKON  AND  KUSKOKWIM  BASINS. 

REPORTS. 

♦The  coal  resources  of  the  Yukon,  Alaska,  by  A.  J.  Collier.  Bulletin  218,  1903, 
71  pp.  15  cents. 

♦Occurrence  of  gold  in  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,  by  L.  M.  Prindle.  In  Bulletin 
345,  1908,  pp.  179-186.  45  cents. 

The  Fortymile  quadrangle,  Yukon-Tanana  region,  Alaska,  by  L.  M.  Prindle. 
Bulletin  375,  1909,  52  pp. 

Water-supply  investigations  in  Yukon-Tanana  region,  Alaska,  1907-8  (Fair- 
banks, Circle,  and  Rampart  districts),  by  C.  C.  Covert  and  C.  E.  Ellsworth. 
Water-Supply  Paper  228,  1909,  108  pp. 

The  Innoko  gold  placer  district,  Alaska,  with  accounts  of  the  Central  Kusko- 
kwim Valley  and  the  Ruby  Creek  and  Gold  Hill  placers,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 
Bulletin  410,  1910,  87  pp. 


X 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Mineral  resources  of  Nabesna-White  River  district,  by  F.  H.  Moffit  and  Adolph 
Knopf,  with  a section  on  the  Quaternary  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin  417,  1910, 
64  pp. 

♦Placer  mining  in  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,  by  C.  E.  Ellsworth.  In  Bulletin 
442,  1910,  pp.  230-245.  40  cents. 

♦Occurrence  of  wolframite  and  cassiterite  in  the  gold  placers  of  Deadwood 
Creek,  Birch  Creek  district,  by  B.  L.  Johnson.  In  Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp. 
246-250.  40  cents. 

Placer  mining  in  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,  by  C.  E.  Ellsworth  and  G.  L.  Parker. 
In  Bulletin  480,  1911,  pp.  153-172. 

Gold  placer-mining  developments  in  the  Innoko-Iditarod  region,  by  A.  G.  Mad- 
dren.  In  Bulletin  480,  1911,  pp.  236-270. 

Placer  mining  in  the  Fortymile  and  Seventymile  river  districts,  by  E.  A.  Porter. 

In  *Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  211-218.  50  cents. 

Placer  mining  in  the  Fairbanks  and  Circle  districts,  by  C.  E.  Ellsworth.  In 
♦Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  240-245.  50  cents. 

Gold  placers  between  Woodchopper  and  Fourth  of  July  creeks,  upper  Yukon 
River,  by  L.  M.  Prindle  and  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.  In  *Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  201- 
210.  50  cents. 

The  Bonnifield  region,  Alaska,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin  501,  1912,  162  pp. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  of  a part  of  the  Rampart  quadrangle,  Alaska,  by 
H.  M.  Eakin.  Bulletin  535,  1913,  38  pp. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  of  the  Fairbanks  quadrangle,  Alaska,  by  L.  M. 
Prindle,  with  a detailed  description  of  the  Fairbanks  district,  by  L.  M. 
Prindle  and  F.  J.  Katz,  and  an  account  of  lode  mining  near  Fairbanks,  by 
P.  S.  Smith.  Bulletin  525,  1913,  220  pp. 

The  Koyukuk-Chandalar  region,  Alaska,  by  A.  G.  Maddren.  Bulletin  532,  1913, 
119  pp.  Price  25  cents. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  of  the  Circle  quadrangle,  Alaska,  by  L.  M.  Prindle. 
Bulletin  538,  1913,  82  pp. 

Placer  mining  in  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,  by  C.  E.  Ellsworth  and  R.  W.  Daven- 
port. In  Bulletin  542,  1913,  pp.  203-222. 

The  Chisana  placer  district,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  *Bulletin  592,  1914,  pp. 
309-320. 

♦Placer  mining  in  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin 
592,  1914,  pp.  357-362.  60  cents. 

♦Lode  developments  near  Fairbanks,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  592, 
1914,  pp.  321-355.  60  cents. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Yukon-Koyukuk  region,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  *Bulletin 
592,  1914,  pp.  371-384. 

The  Iditarod-Ruby  region,  Alaska,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  Bulletin  578,  1914,  45  pp. 
Surface  water  supply  of  the  Yukon-Tanana  region,  1907  to  1912,  by  C.  E.  Ells- 
worth and  R.  W.  Davenport.  Water-Supply  Paper  342,  1915,  343  pp. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Chisana-White  River  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In 
Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  189-228. 

Mining  in  the  Fairbanks  district,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp. 
229-238. 

Mining  in  the  Hot  Springs  district,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp. 
239-245. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Lake  Clark-Iditarod  region,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In  Bulle- 
tin 622,  1915,  pp.  247-271. 

Quicksilver  deposits  of  the  Kuskokwim  region,  by  P.  S.  Smith  and  A.  G.  Mad- 
dren. In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  272-291. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


XI 


Gold  placers  of  the  lower  Kuskokwim,  by  A.  G.  Maddren.  In  Bulletin  622, 

1915,  pp.  292-360. 

An  ancient  volcanic  eruption  in  the  upper  Yukon  Basin,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Pro- 
fessional Paper  95-D,  1915,  pp.  59-64. 

Preliminary  report  on  Tolovana  district,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  642, 

1916,  pp.  201-209. 

Exploration  in  the  Cosna-Nowitna  region,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  642, 

1916,  pp.  211-222. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Ruby-Kuskokwim  region,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.,  and 
G.  L.  Harrington.  In  Bulletin  642,  1916,  pp.  22S-266. 

The  Chisana-White  River  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin  630,  1916,  130  pp. 
The  Yukon-Koyukuk  region,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  Bulletin  631,  1916,  88  pp. 

Mineral  resources  of  the  Kantishna  region,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  In  Bulletin  662, 
. 1917,  pp.  279-331. 

The  gold  placers  of  the  Tolovana  district,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr. 

1917,  pp.  221-277. 

Gold  placers  near  the  Nenana  coal  field,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 

1917,  pp.  363-402. 

Lode  mining  in  the  Fairbanks  district,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr. 

1917,  pp.  403-424. 

Lode  deposits  near  the  Nenana  coal  field,  by  R.  M.  Overbeck. 

1917,  pp.  351-362. 

Gold  placers  of  the  Anvik-Andreafski  region,  by  G.  L.  Harrington. 

662,  1917,  pp.  333-349. 

The  Lake  Clark-central  Kuskokwim  region,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  Bulletin  655,  1918, 

162  pp. 

The  Nenana  coal  field,  by  G.  C.  Martin.  Bulletin  664,  1919,  54  pp. 

The  Cosna-Nowitna  region,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  Bulletin  667,  1918,  54  pp. 

The  Anvik-Andreafski  region,  by  G.  L.  Harrington.  Bulletin  683,  1918,  70  pp. 
The  Kantishna  district,  by  S.  R.  Capps.  Bulletin  687,  1919,  116  pp. 

Mining  in  the  Fairbanks  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919, 
pp.  321-327. 

A molybdenite  lode  on  Healy  River,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919, 
p.  329. 

Mining  in  the  Hot  Springs  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919, 


In  Bulletin  662, 
In  Bulletin  662, 
In  Bulletin  662, 
In  Bulletin  662, 
In  Bulletin 


pp.  331-335. 

Tin  deposits  of  the  Ruby  district,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919, 
p.  337. 

The  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  the  Tolstoi  district,  by  G.  L.  Harrington.  In 
Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  339-351. 


In  preparation. 

The  Ruby-Kuskokwim  region,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.,  and  G.  L.  Harrington. 

The  Lower  Kuskokwim  region,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  in  the  northern  part  of  the  Yukon-Tanana  region, 
Alaska,  by  Eliot  Blackwelder. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 


Circle  quadrangle  (No.  641)  : scale,  1:  250,000;  by  T.  G.  Gerdine,  D.  C.  Wither- 
spoon, and  others.  50  cents  retail  or  30  cents  wholesale.  Also  in  *Bulletin 
295.  35  cents. 

Fairbanks  quadrangle  (No.  642);  scale,  1:250,000;  by  T.  G.  Gerdine,  D.  C. 
Witherspoon,  R.  B.  Oliver,  and  J.  W.  Bagley.  50  cents  retail  or  30  cents 
wholesale.  Also  in  *Bulletins  337  (25  cents)  and  525. 


XII 


MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 


Fortymile  quadrangle  (No.  640)  ; scale,  1:  250,000;  by  E.  C.  Barnard.  10  cents 
retail  or  6 cents  wholesale.  Also  in  Bulletin  375. 

Rampart  quadrangle  (No.  643)  ; scale,  1:250,000;  by  D.  C.  Witherspoon  and 
R.  B.  Oliver.  20  cents  retail  or  12  cents  wholesale.  Also  in  *Bulletin  337 
(25  cents)  and  part  in  Bulletin  535. 

Fairbanks  special  (No.  642A)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  T.  G.  Gerdine  and  R.  H. 

Sargent.  20  cents  retail  or  12  cents  wholesale.  Also  in  Bulletin  525. 
Bonnifield  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  J.  W.  Bagley,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and 
C.  E.  Giffin.  In  Bulletin  501.  Not  issued  separately. 

Iditarod-Ruby  region,  reconnaissance  map  ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  C.  G.  Anderson, 
W.  S.  Post,  and  others.  In  Bulletin  578.  Not  issued  separately. 

Middle  Kuskokwim  and  lower  Yukon  region ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; by  C.  G.  Ander- 
son, W.  S.  Post,  and  others.  In  Bulletin  578.  Not  issued  separately. 
Chisana-White  River  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  C.  E.  Giffin  and  D.  C.  Wither- 
spoon. In  Bulletin  630.  Not  issued  separately. 

Yukon-Koyukuk  region ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  631. 
Not  issued  separately. 

Cosna-Nowitna  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  H.  M.  Eakin, 
C.  E.  Giffin,  and  R.  B.  Oliver.  In  Bulletin  667.  Not  issued  separately. 

Lake  Clark-Central  Kuskokwim  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; 
by  R.  PI.  Sargent,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and  C.  E.  Giffin.  In  Bulletin  655.  Not 
issued  separately. 

Anvik-Andreafski  region  ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  R.  H.  Sargent.  In  Bulletin  683. 
Not  issued  separately. 

Marshall  district ; scale,  1 : 125,000 ; by  R.  H.  Sargent.  In  Bulletin  683.  Not 
issued  separately. 

Nenana-Kantishna  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  C.  E.  Giffin,  J.  W.  Bagley,  R.  B. 
Oliver,  and  D.  C.  Witherspoon.  In  Bulletin  687.  Not  issued  separately. 

In  preparation. 

Lower  Kuskokwim  region ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; by  A.  G.  Maddren. 

Ruby  district;  scale,  1:  250,000;  by  C.  E.  Giffin  and  R.  H.  Sargent. 
Innoko-Iditarod  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  R.  H.  Sargent  and  C.  E.  Giffin. 

SEWARD  PENINSULA. 

REPORTS. 

The  Fairhaven  gold  placers  of  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  Bul- 
letin 247,  1905,  85  pp. 

Gold  mining  on  Seward  Peninsula,  by  F.  H.  Moffit.  In  Bulletin  284,  1906,  pp. 
132-141. 

The  Kougarok  region,  by  A.  H.  Brooks.  In  Bulletin  314,  1907,  pp.  164-181. 
Geology  and  mineral  resources  of  Iron  Creek,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In  Bulletin  314, 

1907,  pp.  157-163.  7 

The  gold  placers  of  parts  of  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska,  including  the  Nome, 
Council,  Kougarok,  Port  Clarence,  and  Goodhope  precincts,  by  A.  J.  Collier, 
F.  L.  Hess,  P.  S.  Smith,  and  A.  H.  Brooks.  Bulletin  328,  1908,  343  pp. 
♦Investigation  of  the  mineral  deposits  of  Seward  Peninsula,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In 
Bulletin  345,  1908,  pp.  206-250.  45  cents. 

Geology  of  the  Seward  Peninsula  tin  deposits,  by  Adolph  Knopf.  Bulletin  358, 

1908,  72  pp. 

Recent  developments  in  southern  Seward  Peninsula,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In 
♦Bulletin  379,  1909,  pp.  267-301. 


THE  ALASKAN  MINING  INDUSTRY  IN  1917. 


xm 


♦The  Iron  Creek  region,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In  Bulletin  379,  1909,  pp.  302-354. 
50  cents. 

♦Mining  in  the  Fairhaven  district,  by  F.  F.  Henshaw.  In  Bulletin  379,  1909, 
pp.  355-369.  50  cents. 

Geology  and  mineral  resources  of  the  Solomon  and  Casadepaga  quadrangles, 
Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  Bulletin  433,  1910,  227  pp. 

Mining  in  Seward  Peninsula,  by  F.  F.  Henshaw.  In  *Bulletin  442,  1910,  pp. 
353-371. 

A geologic  reconnaissance  in  southeastern  Seward  Peninsula  and  the  Norton 
Bay-Nulato  region,  by  P.  S.  Smith  and  H.  M.  Eakin.  Bulletin  449,  1911, 
146  pp. 

♦Notes  on  mining  in  Seward  Peninsula,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  In  Bulletin  520,  1912, 
pp.  339-344.  50  cents. 

Geology  of  the  Nome  and  Grand  Central  quadrangles,  Alaska,  by  F.  H.  Moffit. 
Bulletin  533,  1913,  140  pp. 

♦Surface  water  supply  of  Seward  Peninsula,  Alaska,  by  F.  F.  Henshaw  and 
G.  L.  Parker,  with  a sketch  of  the  geography  and  geology  by  P.  S.  Smith 
and  a description  of  methods  of  placer  mining  by  A.  H.  Brooks ; including 
topographic  reconnaissance  map.  Water-Supply  Paper  314,  1913,  317  pp. 
45  cents. 

♦Placer  mining  on  Seward  Peninsula,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin  592, 
1914,  pp.  385-396.  60  cents. 

♦Lode  developments  on  Seward  Peninsula,  by  Theodore  Chapin.  In  Bulletin 
592,  1914,  pp.  397-407.  60  cents. 

Iron-ore  deposits  near  Nome,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915,  pp.  361- 
365. 

Placer  mining  in  Seward  Peninsula,  by  H.  M.  Eakin.  In  Bulletin  622,  1915, 
pp.  366-373. 

Lode  mining  and  prospecting  on  Seward  Peninsula,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.  In 
Bulletin  662,  1917,  pp.  425-449. 

Placer  mining  on  Seward  Peninsula,  by  J.  B.  Mertie,  jr.  In  Bulletin  662,  1917, 
pp.  451-458. 

Tin  mining  in  Seward  Peninsula,  by  G.  L.  Harrington.  In  Bulletin  692,  1919, 
pp.  353-361. 

Graphite  mining  in  Seward  Peninsula,  by  G.  L.  Harrington.  In  Bulletin  692, 
1919,  pp.  363-367. 

The  gold  and  platinum  placers  of  the  Kiwalik-Koyuk  region,  by  G.  L.  Harring- 
ton. In  Bulletin  692,  1919,  pp.  369-400. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 

Seward  Peninsula ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; compiled  from  work  of  D.  C.  Witherspoon, 
T.  G.  Gerdine,  and  others,  of  the  Geological  Survey,  and  all  available  sources. 
In  Water-Supply  Paper  314.  Not  issued  separately. 

Seward  Peninsula,  northeastern  portion,  reconnaissance  map  (No.  655)  ; scale, 
1 : 250,000 ; by  D.  C.  Witherspoon  and  C.  E.  Hill.  50  cents  retail  or  30  cents 
wholesale.  Also  in  Bulletin  247. 

Seward  Peninsula,  northwestern  portion,  reconnaissance  map  (No.  657)  ; scale, 
1 : 250,000 ; by  T.  G.  Gerdine  and  D.  C.  Witherspoon.  50  cents  retail  or  30 
cents  wholesale.  Also  in  Bulletin  328. 

Seward  Peninsula,  southern  portion,  reconnaissance  map  (No.  656)  ; scale, 
1 : 250,000 ; by  E.  C.  Barnard,  T.  G.  Gerdine,  and  others.  50  cents  retail  or 
30  cents  wholesale.  Also  in  Bulletin.  328. 


XIV  MINERAL  RESOURCES  OF  ALASKA,  1917. 

Seward  Peninsula,  southeastern  portion,  reconnaissance  map  (Nos.  655-656)  ; 
scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  E.  C.  Barnard,  D.  L.  Reaburn,  H.  M.  Eakin,  and  others. 
In  Bulletin  449.  Not  issued  separately. 

Nulato-Norton  Bay  region ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; by  P.  S.  Smith,  H.  M.  Eakin,  and 
others.  In  Bulletin  449.  Not  issued  separately. 

Grand  Central  quadrangle  (No.  646A)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  T.  G.  Gerdine, 
It.  B.  Oliver,  and  W.  R.  Hill.  10  cents  retail  or  6 cents  wholesale.  Also  in 
Bulletin  533. 

Nome  quadrangle  (No.  646B)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  T.  G.  Gerdine,  R.  B.  Oliver, 
and  W.  R.  Hill.  10  cents  retail  or  6 cents  wholesale.  Also  in  Bulletin  533. 

Casadepaga  quadrangle  (No.  646C)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by  T.  G.  Gerdine,  W.  B. 
Corse,  and  B.  A.  Yoder.  10  cents  retail  or  6 cents  wholesale.  Also  in  Bul- 
letin 433. 

Solomon  quadrangle  (No.  646D)  ; scale,  1:62,500;  by.  T.  G.  Gerdine,  W.  B. 
Corse,  and  B.  A.  Yoder.  10  cents  retail  or  6 cents  wholesale.  Also  in  Bul- 
letin 433. 

NORTHERN  ALASKA. 

REPORTS. 

*A  reconnaissance  in  northern  Alaska  across  the  Rocky  Mountains,  along  Koyu- 
kuk,  John,  Anaktuvuk,  and  Colville  rivers  and  the  Arctic  coast  to  Cape 
Lisburne  in  1901,  by  F.  C.  Schrader,  with  notes  by  W.  J.  Peters.  Professional 
Paper  20,  1904,  139  pp.  40  cents. 

♦Geology  and  coal  resources  of  the  Cape  Lisburne  region,  Alaska,  by  A.  J. 
Collier.  Bulletin  278,  1906,  54  pp.  15  cents. 

Geologic  investigations  along  the  Canada-Alaska  boundary,  by  A.  G.  Maddren. 
In  ^Bulletin  520,  1912,  pp.  297-314. 

The  Noatak-Kobuk  region,  by  P.  S.  Smith.  Bulletin  536,  1913,  160  pp. 

The  Koyukuk-Chandalar  region,  Alaska,  by  A.  G.  Maddren.  Bulletin  532,  1913, 
119  pp. 

The  Canning  River  region  of  northern  Alaska,  by  E.  de  K.  Leffingwell  Profes- 
sional Paper  109,  1919,  251  pp. 

TOPOGRAPHIC  MAPS. 

♦Koyukuk  River  to  mouth  of  Colville  River,  including  John  River;  scale, 
1 : 1,250,000 ; by  W.  J.  Peters.  In  *Professional  Paper  20.  40  cents.  Not 

issued  separately. 

Koyukuk  and  Chandalar  region,  reconnaissance  map ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; by 
T.  G.  Gerdine,  D.  L.  Reaburn,  D.  C.  Witherspoon,  and  A.  G.  Maddren.  In 
Bulletin  532.  Not  issued  separately. 

Noatak-Kobuk  region ; scale,  1 : 500,000 ; by  C.  E.  Giffin,  D.  L.  Reaburn,  H.  M. 
Eakin,  and  others.  In  Bulletin  536.  Not  issued  separately. 

Canning  River  region ; scale,  1 : 250,000 ; by  E.  de  K.  Leffingwell.  In  Profes- 
sional Paper  109.  Not  issued  separately. 

North  Arctic  coast ; scale,  1 : 1,000,000 ; by  E.  de  K.  Leffingwell.  In  Professional 
Paper  109.  Not  issued  separately. 

Martin  Point  to  Thetis  Island ; scale,  1 : 125,000 ; by  E.  de  K.  Leffingwell.  In 
Professional  Paper  109.  Not  issued  separately. 


o 


DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  INTERIOR 

Franklin  K.  Lane,  Secretary 


United  States  Geological  Survey 

George  Otis  Smith,  Director 

Bulletin  693 


THE  EVAPORATION  AND  CONCENTRATION  OF 
WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM 
AND  NATURAL  GAS 


BY 

R.  VAN  A.  MILLS 


AND 


WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1919 


651 

\ax>  « t 

CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Introduction 5 

Results  of  the  investigation f 5 

Acknowledgments 7 

Field  work 8 

Location  of  quadrangles  studied 9 

Geology  of  the  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  fields 9 

Geologic  reports  relative  to  the  areas  studied 9 

Areal  geology 11 

Stratigraphy  and  structure 11 

Lithology  and  mineralogy  of  the  sediments 12 

Kinds  of  rock 12 

Results  of  petrographic  examination  of  rock  specimens 14 

Results  of  chemical  examination  of  rock  specimens 16 

Results  of  physical  examination  of  rock  specimens 20 

Characteristics  of  the  oil  and  gas  in  the  Appalachian  fields 22 

Occurrence  and  distribution  of  water  in  the  strata 22 

Present  distribution  of  water  in  the  oil  and  gas  bearing  rocks  22 

Water-bearing  sands 22 

Dry  sands 23 

Mode  of  occurrence  of  petroleum,  natural  gas,  and  water  in  the  water-bearing 

sands 25 

Oil,  gas,  and  water  mixtures 25 

Evidence  of  the  occurrence  of  oil,  gas,  and  water  mixtures 26 

Temperature  and  pressure 27 

Characteristics  of  the  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field  waters 29 

Deep-seated  brines  and  their  comparison  with  sea  water 29 

Analyses  of  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field  waters 33 

Shallow  well  waters 40 

Changes  in  oil'  and  gas  field  waters  as  deduced  from  field  observations  and 

chemical  analyses 44 

Mineral  deposition  during  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas 44 

Changes  in  the  deep-seated  waters  during  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas 50 

Method  of  study 50 

Comparison  of  waters  from  the  same  well 51 

Comparisons  of  waters  from  the  same  geologic  horizons  in  neighboring 

fields 55 

Evidence  that  similar  differences  in  the  waters  have  been  brought  about 

during  geologic  time 57 

Comparison  of  waters  from  different  geologic  horizons 57 

Evidence  of  the  natural  escape  of  gases 60 

Relations  between  the  geologic  history  of  certain  reservoir  rocks  and 

their  included  waters 63 

Hypotheses  concerning  the  origin  of  the  oil  and  gas  field  waters 64 

Hypotheses  previously  suggested 64 

Present  hypothesis 67 


3 


4 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

History  of  the  oil  and  gas  field  waters 68 

Inclusion  and  migration  of  waters  of  sedimentation 68 

Changes  in  the  waters  of  sedimentation 70 

Deep-seated  waters  as  agents  of  cementation 76 

Retention  of  waters  associated  with  gas  and  oil 76 

Evaporation  of  water  at  depth - 77 

Variables  involved 77 

Limiting  moisture  content  of  natural  gas 79 

Effect  of  the  increase  of  temperature  with  increasing  depth 83 

Effects  due  to  changes  of  pressure 1 84 

Solubility  of  natural  gas  in  oil  and  water 86 

Origin  of  the  gases  as  related  to  the  evaporation  of  the  associated  waters. . . 87 

Related  phenomena  and  deductions  of  practical  value 89 

Association  of  rock  salt  with  deposits  of  natural  gas  and  petroleum 89 

Origin  of  salt  domes 90 

Amount  of  gas  available  for  evaporation 94 

Accumulations  of  gas  and  oil  associated  with  salt  domes 94 

Induced  segregation  of  oil  and  gas 95 

Clogging  of  oil  and  gas  sands 98 

Prospecting  for  oil  and  gas 98 

Determining  the  source  of  infiltrating  waters 99 

Need  for  further  investigation 100 

Index 101 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Page. 

Plate  I.  Generalized  sections  showing  the  oil  and  gas  sands  and  the  accom- 
panying beds  from  which  water  and  rock  samples  were  collected . 12 

II.  Salt  crusts  formed  during  the  production  of  natural  gas 48 

III.  Incrusted  sandstone  from  oil  wells  near  Evans  City,  Butler 

County,  Pa 50 

IV.  Sulphate  crusts  from  oil  wells  in  Butler  County,  Pa 52 

Figure  1.  Index  map  showing  location  of  the  Summerfield  and  Woodsfield 

quadrangles,  Ohio,  the  Zelienople  and  Butler  quadrangles,  Pa., 
and  the  names  and  positions  of  other  quadrangles  for  which  struc- 
tural maps  have  been  prepared 9 

2.  Sketch  map  showing  the  areal  geology  of  the  Appalachian  coal  basin . 11 

3.  Structure  contour  map  of  the  Appalachian  coal  basin,  showing  con- 

tours on  the  Big  Injun  sand 11 

4.  Curve  showing  the  rates  of  production  of  oil  and  water  from  well  No. 

1,  Schroeder  heirs’  farm,  Miltonsburg,  Malaga  Township,  Monroe 
County,  Ohio,  when  water  samples  were  collected  from  that  well . . 51 

5.  Temperature- vapor  pressure  curve  for  pure  water 81 


THE  EVAPORATION  AND  CONCENTRATION  OF  WATERS 
ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND 
NATURAL  GAS. 


By  R.  Van  A.  Mills  and  R.  C.  Wells. 


INTRODUCTION. 

RESULTS  OF  THE  INVESTIGATION. 

The  association  of  saline  waters1  with  petroleum  and  natural  gas 
has  been  widely  observed,  but  the  origin  or  mode  of  formation  of 
these  waters  has  remained  a perplexing  problem.  It  has  been  com- 
monly assumed  that  the  dissolved  salts  were  derived  through  the 
leaching  of  the  sediments  by  percolating  ground  waters,  or  that  the 
deep-seated  brines  are  essentially  fossil  ocean  waters  which  were  in- 
cluded and  buried  in  the  marine  sediments  at  the  time  of  deposition. 
In  the  light  of  the  present  investigation  these  relatively  simple  con- 
cepts give  way  to  the  conclusion  that  the  brines  are  the  result  of  a 
complex  and  long-continued  evolution  in  which  waters  of  sedimenta- 
tion together  with  ground  waters  from  other  sources  have  undergone 
deep-seated  evaporation  and  concentration  accompanied  by  note- 
worthy chemical  changes. 

Our  interpretation  of  the  mode  of  formation  of  many  oil  and  gas 
field  brines  is  partly  the  outcome  of  a study  of  changes  in  the  brines 
incident  to  the  extraction  of  gas  and  oil  from  their  reservoir  rocks. 
It  appears  that  the  waters  undergo  deep-seated  concentration, 
brought  about  by  their  evaporation  into  moving  and  expanding  gas. 
During  this  concentration  there  is  a definite  order  of'  change  in  the 
relative  proportions  of  the  dissolved  constituents  in  the  waters. 
Carbon  dioxide  and  other  gases  are  lost  from  solution.  Calcium, 
magnesium,  and  iron  separate  from  solution  as  carbonates,  and  under 
favorable  conditions  sodium  and  minor  proportions  of  calcium  and 

1 The  term  water  is  frequently  used  throughout  this  paper  to  mean  a dilute  aqueous 
solution  or  weak  brine. 


6 WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

magnesium  separate  as  chlorides — a process  illustrated  in  the  salting 
up  of  gas  wells.  A further  separation  of  the  dissolved  constituents,  > 
more  particularly  of  calcium,  magnesium,  iron,  sodium,  barium, 
strontium,  carbonate,  and  silica,  is  brought  about  when  waters  from 
different  beds  and  having  different  properties  of  reaction  become 
mixed.  Lastly,  the  ratio  of  calcium  to  chlorine  in  the  waters  in- 
creases and  the  ratio  of  sodium  to  chlorine  decreases  with  the  con- 
centration. 

It  is  a logical  step  to  pass  from  the  facts  just  recorded  to  a theory 
of  the  formation  of  the  brines.  The  brines,  as  they  occur  in  their 
reservoir  rocks,  prior  to  the  extraction  of  gas  and  oil  from  these 
rocks  by  man,  vary  greatly  in  their  degree  of  concentration,  and 
it  may  be  stated  as  a rule  that  the  concentration  of  the  dissolved 
constituents  of  the  waters  increases  with  depth,  and  that  the  differ- 
ences between  the  concentrated  and  relatively  dilute  waters  are  of 
the  same  sort  as  those  brought  about  during  the  artificial  extraction 
of  gas  and  oil.  There  are,  however,  noteworthy  exceptions  to  this 
rule ; waters  that  appear  to  have  remained  deeply  buried  under  thick 
covers  of  relatively  impermeable  beds  since  their  inclusion  in  the 
sediments  seem  to  be  less  concentrated  than  those  occurring  in  more 
shallow  beds  directly  beneath  and  above  certain  unconformities. 

We  are  led  to  conclude  that  the  changes  in  the  waters  incident  to 
the  extraction  of  gas  and  oil  are  largely  of  the  same  order  as  those 
by  which  the  brines  were  formed.  Marine  water  of  sedimentation 
and  ground  water  from  other  sources  have  been  included  and  deeply 
buried  in  the  sediments,  where,  in  association  with  gas  and  oil,  they 
have  migrated  and  undergone  concentration,  accompanied  by  changes 
in  the  nature  and  relative  proportions  of  the  dissolved  constituents. 
Concentration  is  due  in  part  to  the  leaching  of  the  sediments  by  the 
migrating  waters  but  mainly  to  the  evaporation  of  water  into  gases 
that  are  moving  and  expanding  through  natural  channels.  Reactions 
between  the  dissolved  constituents  of  different  types  of  waters  and 
between  the  dissolved  constituents  of  the  waters  and  the  organic 
and  inorganic  constituents  of  the  sediments  have  been  important 
factors  in  the  formation  of  the  brines  and  so  also  have  mass  action 
and  reactions  due  to  deep-seated  thermal  conditions. 

During  the  deep-seated  concentration  of  the  waters  various  con- 
stituents have  separated  from  solution  as  their  points  of  saturation 
were  reached.  Under  favorable  conditions  the  concentration  has 
proceeded  sufficiently  to  cause  the  deposition  from  solution  of  sodium 
chloride.  Chemical  reactions  and  precipitation  have  also  been  ef- 
fective in  bringing  about  these  separations.  Much  evidence  of  what 
has  taken  place  through  deep-seated  natural  agencies  is  furnished 


INTRODUCTION. 


7 


by  studies  of  the  salts  interstitially  included  in  the  sediments  from 
which  gas  and  oil  have  not  been  extracted,  but  the  most  striking 
example  of  the  deep-seated  natural  deposition  of  salt  is  furnished 
by  the  salt  domes  of  Louisiana  and  Texas.  We  attribute  the  forma- 
tion of  these  great  salt  masses  largely  to  the  geophysical  and  geo- 
chemical processes  herein  described;  deep-seated  evaporation  and 
concentration  of  chloride  waters  due  to  the  movement  and  expansion 
of  gases  through  natural  passages,  more  particularly  through  fault 
fissures,  having  been  agencies  of  prime  importance. 

The  salts  deposited  in  wells  during  the  extraction  of  gas  and  oil, 
those  occurring  interstitially  in  the  sediments,  and  those  constituting 
the  Louisiana  and  Texas  salt  domes  all  agree  closely  in  composition 
with  hypothetical  salts  whose  loss  from  solution  during  concentra- 
tion has  been  predicated  by  us  through  comparisons  of  the  analyses 
of  the  dilute  and  concentrated  brines  under  scrutiny. 

It  is  our  purpose  to  describe  the  mode  of  concentration  of  these 
waters,  the  changes  they  have  undergone,  and  some  of  the  relations 
that  the  changes  bear  to  the  occurrence  and  production  of  petroleum 
and  natural  gas.  Though  samples  of  the  waters  under  investigation 
were  collected  only  in  the  Appalachian  fields,  the  conclusions  are 
widely  applicable. 

As  shown  in  the  concluding  chapter,  many  of  the  principles  herein 
set  forth  are  capable  of  practical  application,  and  it  is  intended  that 
this  bulletin  shall  be  of  economic  value  to  oil  and  gas  operators  as 
well  as  of  scientific  interest.  We  shall  feel  repaid  for  our  studies  if 
we  make  apparent  the  need  for  further  detailed  field  and  laboratory 
investigations  of  the  chemical  and  physical  interactions  between 
petroleum  and  natural  gas,  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  associated  waters 
and  reservoir  rocks,  on  the  other. 

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. 

We  are  indebted  to  our  colleagues  D.  Dale  Condit  and  G.  B.  Rich- 
ardson for  cooperation  and  assistance  during  the  field  investigations 
relative  to  this  paper,  and  to  M.  I.  Goldman  for  petrographic  studies 
of  rock  specimens.  E.  S.  Larsen  and  W.  T.  Schaller  have  also  made 
brief  petrographic  examinations  of  some  of  the  rock  and  mineral 
specimens  collected.  A.  F.  Melcher  made  the  porosity  tests  and  S.  C. 
Dinsmore  many  of  the  water  analyses  herein  published.  The  hearty 
cooperation  of  numerous  oil  and  gas  companies  and  individual  oper- 
ators is  also  gratefully  acknowledged.  To  Herman  Stabler  and 
Chase  Palmer  we  are  especially  indebted  for  assistance  during  the 
chemical  investigation  of  materials  collected  in  the  field  and  for  help- 
ful criticism  and  advice  during  the  preparation  of  the  manuscript. 


8 WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

FIELD  WORK. 

The  field  investigations  upon  which  this  paper  is  based  were  made 
by  R.  Van  A.  Mills,  D.  Dale  Condit,  Frank  Reeves,  and  G.  B.  Rich- 
ardson during  the  summers  of  1914,  1915,  and  1916.  The  oil  and 
gas  resources  of  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quadrangles,  in 
southeastern  Ohio,  were  studied  by  Messrs.  Condit,  Mills,  and  Reeves 
for  four  months  during  the  summer  of  1914.  Subsequently  the  field 
work  in  these  areas  was  continued  by  Mr.  Mills  during  April  and 
May,  1915,  and  June,  1916.  Messrs.  Richardson  and  Mills  also 
studied  the  oil  and  gas  resources  of  the  Butler  and  Zelienople  quad- 
rangles, in  western  Pennsylvania,  during  the  summer  of  1915. 

In  the  course  of  these  economic  investigations  particular  attention 
was  paid  to  the  distribution  and  mode  of  occurrence  of  the  water 
associated  with  petroleum  and  natural  gas,  with  a view  to  studying 
some  of  the  physical  and  chemical  relations  between  the  hydrocar- 
bons, the  reservoir  rocks,  and  the  associated  waters.  As  material 
for  use  in  studying  the  possible  changes  that  the  waters  have  under- 
gone, both  before  and  after  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas  commenced, 
samples  of  oil,  gas,  oil  and  gas  bearing  rocks,  and  the  waters  associ- 
ated with  the  oil  and  gas  were  collected  for  laboratory  study. 

The  oil  samples  were  collected  fresh  as  the  oil  emerged  from  the 
wells  and  were  placed  in  glass  bottles  for  shipment.  The  gas  samples 
were  collected  in  large  glass  containers  by  the  displacement  of  air  and 
also  by  the  displacement  of  water. 

In  collecting  water  samples  from  deep  wells  it  is  difficult  to  obtain 
a truly  representative  sample  from  a particular  bed.  Water  from 
one  sandstone  is  likely  to  enter  another  through  poorly  plugged, 
abandoned  wells,  or  through  and  around  faulty  casings.  The  ef- 
fort was  therefore  made  to  collect  samples  from  tightly  cased  wells 
and  in  newly  drilled  fields,  where  water  from  shallow  sources  had 
not  leaked  into  the  deeper  sands  through  abandoned  wells.  The 
samples  were  collected  directly  as  the  waters  came  from  the  wells 
and  were  therefore  not  affected  by  standing  in  tanks.  So  far  as  pos- 
sible, the  samples  of  water  were  collected  where  collateral  data  re- 
garding the  depth,  thickness,  texture,  and  structure  of  the  productive 
sands,  the  geology  of  the  region,  and  the  history  of  production  were 
available. 

The  rock  samples  were  collected  when  they  were  freshly  removed 
from  the  wells,  except  where  otherwise  noted.  Lump  samples  and 
loose  sand  blasted  from  the  deep  beds  when  the  wells  were  shot  were 
collected  in  preference  to  the  finely  pulverized  fragments  contained 
in  drill  sludge. 


GEOLOGY  OF  APPALACHIAN  FIELDS. 


9 


LOCATION  OF  QUADRANGLES  STUDIED. 

The  location  of  the  four  quadrangles  studied  is  shown  on  the  index 
map  (fig.  1).  The  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quadrangles,  which 
include  parts  of  Belmont,  Monroe,  Noble,  and  Guernsey  coun- 
ties, in  southeastern  Ohio,  are  from  25  to  45  miles  southwest  of 
Wheeling,  W.  Va.,  and  from  25  to  40  miles  north  of  Marietta,  Ohio. 
The  Butler  and  Zelienople  quadrangles,  including  parts  of  Butler, 
Lawrence,  and  Beaver  counties,  in  western  Pennsylvania,  are  from 
20  to  40  miles  north  of  Pittsburgh,  Pa.,  and  about  80  miles  northeast 
of  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quadrangles. 


Figure  1. — Index  map  showing  location  of  the  Summerfield  and  Woodsfield  quadrangles, 
Ohio  (Nos.  1 and  2,  heavily  shaded),  the  Zelienople  and  Butler  quadrangles,  Pa. 
(Nos.  25  and  26,  heavily  shaded),  and  the  names  and  positions  of  other  quad- 
rangles for  which  structural  maps  have  been  prepared  (light  shading).  3,  Flush- 
ing ; 4,  Cadiz  ; 5,  Steubenville  ; 6,  Claysville  ; 7,  Burgettstown  ; 8,  Carnegie  ; 9,  Beaver ; 
10,  Sewickley ; 11,  Amity ; 12,  Rogersville ; 13,  Waynesburg ; 14,  Wooster ; 15,  Fox- 
burg  ; 16,  Clarion  ; 17,  Kittanning ; 18,  Rural  Valley  ; 19,  Elders  Ridge  ; 20,  Latrobe ; 
21,  Brownsville,  22,  Connellsville  ; 23,  Masontown  ; 24,  Uniontown. 

GEOLOGY  OF  THE  APPALACHIAN  OIL  AND  GAS 

FIELDS. 

GEOLOGIC  REPORTS  RELATIVE  TO  THE  AREAS  STUDIED. 

Two  brief  geologic  reports  on  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield 
quadrangles  1 have  been  published  by  the  United  States  Geological 

1 Condit,  D.  D.,  Structure  of  the  Berea  oil  sand  in  the  Summerfield  quadrangle, 
Guernsey,  Noble,  and  Monroe  counties,  Ohio  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  621,  pp.  217-231, 
1916  (Bull.  621— N)  ; Structure  of  the  Berea  oil  sand  in  the  Woodsfield  quadrangle, 
Belmont,  Monroe,  Noble,  and  Guernsey  counties,  Ohio  : Idem,  pp.  233-249,  1915  (Bull. 
621-0). 


10  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


Survey,  and  a more  detailed  report  on  the  oil  and  gas  resources  of 
the  same  areas  is  now  under  preparation.  Geologic  reports  on  the 
Butler  and  Zelienople  quadrangles  are  also  being  prepared  for  pub- 
lication by  the  Survey.  In  addition  to  these,  the  Survey  has  pub- 
lished the  following  bulletins  concerning  oil  and  gas  fields  in  Ohio, 
West  Virginia,  and  Pennsylvania : 

198.  The  Berea  grit  oil  sand  in  the  Cadiz  quadrangle,  Ohio,  by  W.  T.  Griswold. 
1902.  43  pp.,  1 pi. 

279.  Economic  geology  of  the  Kittanning  and  Rural  Valley  quadrangles,  Pa., 
by  Charles  Butts.  1906.  198  pp.,  11  pis. 

286.  Economic  geology  of  the  Beaver  quadrangle,  Pa.  (southern  Beaver  and 
northwestern  Allegheny  counties),  by  L.  H.  Woolsey.  1906.  132  pp., 

8 pis. 

300.  Economic  geology  of  the  Amity  quadrangle,  eastern  Washington  County, 
Pa.,  by  F.  G.  Clapp.  1907.  145  pp.,  8 pis. 

304.  Oil  and  gas  fields  of  Green  County,  Pa.,  by  R.  W.  Stone  and  F.  G.  Clapp. 
1907.  110  pp.,  3 pis. 

318.  Geology  of  oil  and  gas  fields  in  Steubenville,  Burgettstown,  and  Clays- 
ville  quadrangles,  Ohio,  W.  Va.,  and  Pa.,  by  W.  T.  Griswold  and  M.  J. 
Munn.  1907.  196  pp.,  13  pis. 

346.  Structure  of  the  Berea  oil  sand  in  the  Flushing  quadrangle,  Harrison, 
Belmont,  and  Guernsey  counties,  Ohio,  by  W.  T.  Griswold.  1908.  30  pp., 
2 pis. 

349.  Economic  geology  of  the  Kenova  quadrangle,  Ky.,  Ohio.,  and  W.  Va.,  by 
W.  C.  Phalen.  1908.  158  pp.,  6 pis. 

454.  Coal,  oil,  and  gas  of  the  Foxburg  quadrangle,  Pa.,  by  E.  W.  Shaw  and  M.  J. 
Munn.  1911.  85  pp.,  10  pis. 

456.  Oil  and  gas  fields  of  the  Carnegie  quadrangle,  Pa.,  by  M.  J.  Munn.  1911. 
99  pp.,  5 pis. 

541-A.  Oil  and  gas  in  the*  northern  part  of  the  Cadiz  quadrangle,  Ohio,  by  D.  D. 
Condit.  1913.  9 pp.,  1 pi. 

621-H.  Anticlines  in  the  Clinton  sand  near  Wooster,  Wayne  County,  Ohio,  by 
C.  A.  Bonine.  1915.  12  pp.,  1 pi. 

661-A.  The  Cleveland  gas  field,  Cuyahoga  County,  Ohio,  with  a study  of  rock 
pressure,  by  G.  S.  Rogers.  1917.  68  pp.,  2 pis. 

The  following  geologic  folios  contain  descriptions  of  oil  and  gas 
fields  in  Ohio,  West  Virginia,  and  Pennsylvania: 

69.  Huntington,  W.  Va.-Ohio,  by  M.  R.  Campbell.  1900. 

72.  Charleston,  W.  Va.,  by  M.  R.  Campbell.  1901. 

82.  Masontown-Uniontown,  Pa.,  by  M.  R.  Campbell.  1902. 

115.  Kittanning,  Pa.,  by  Charles  Butts  and  Frank  Leverett.  1904. 

121.  Waynesburg,  Pa.,  by  R.  W.  Stone.  1905. 

146.  Rogersville,  Pa.,  by  F.  G.  Clapp.  1907. 

176.  Sewickley,  Pa.,  by  M.  J.  Munn.  1911. 

177.  Burgettstown-Carnegie,  Pa.,  by  E.  W.  Shaw  and  M.  J.  Munn.  1911. 

178.  Foxburg-Clarion,  Pa.,  by  E.  W.  Shaw,  E.  F.  Lines,  and  M.  J.  Munn.  1911. 
180.  Claysville,  Pa.,  by  M.  J.  Munn.  1912. 

184.  Kenova,  Ky.-W.  Va.-Ohio,  by  W.  C.  Phalen.  1912. 


GEOLOGY  OF  APPALACHIAN  FIELDS. 


11 


AREAL  GEOLOGY. 

The  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  fields  are  in  the  great  geosyncline 
generally  known  as  the  Appalachian  coal  basin,  which  lies  between 
the  Cincinnati  an- 
ticline on  the  west 
and  the  Appalach- 
ian uplift  on  the 
east.  Over  most  of 
the  area,  as  shown 
by  figure  2,  the 
rocks  exposed  at 
the  surface  are  of 
Pennsylvanian  age, 
but  Permian  beds 
cover  the  center  of 
the  basin  and  both 
Mississippian  and 
Devonian  beds 
crop  out  around 
the  edges. 

STRATIGRAPHY 
AND  STRUCTURE. 

In  the  fields  un- 
der discussion  pe- 
troleum and  nat- 
ural gas  occur  as- 
sociated with  saline 
waters  in  relatively 
porous,  open  - tex- 
tured “ pay  sands  ” 
in  marine  deposits 
and  in  continental 
deposits  laid  down 
at  or  near  sea  level. 

The  sediments  in 
southeastern  Ohio 
are  estimated  to 
have  a total  thick- 
ness of  more  than 
9,000  feet.  Some 
of  the  productive 
oil  and  gas  bearing 
strata,  such  as  those  of  the  Catskill  (?)  formation  in  western  Penn- 
sylvania and  those  in  the  overlying  coal  measures,  are  probably  not 


Figure  2. — Sketch  map  showing  the  areal  geology  of  the  Ap- 
palachian coal  basin.  11,  Permian  ; 12,  Pennsylvanian  ; 13, 
Mississippian  ; 14,  Devonian  ; 15,  Silurian  ; 16,  Ordovician. 


Figure  3. — Structure  contour  map  of  the  Appalachian  coal 
basin,  showing  contours  on  the  Big  Injun  sand.  (After 
Reeves.) 


12  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

of  marine  origin,  but  were  deposited  sufficiently  close  to  the  sea  to 
become  interbedded  with  marine  deposits.  Under  such  conditions 
the  nonmarine  sediments  have  probably  become  more  or  less  perme- 
ated by  marine  waters  of  sedimentation,  as  will  be  explained  in  the 
following  text. 

The  regional  structure  and  general  position  of  the  great  Appa- 
lachian geosyncline  are  shown  by  figure  3.  In  the  four  quadrangles 
studied  during  the  preparation  of  this  bulletin  (see  fig.  1)  the  strata 
dip  gently  to  the  south  and  southeast,  toward  the  trough  of  the 
geosyncline.  The  dips  average  approximately  50  feet  to  the  mile, 
though  there  are  numerous  minor  folds  in  which  they  are  more  pro- 
nounced. In  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quadrangles,  in  south- 
eastern Ohio,  where  a very  large  number  of  well  records  were  pro- 
cured, there  is  much  evidence  that  the  strata  of  Mississippian  age 
had  been  distorted  by  small,  relatively  sharp  folds  prior  to  the  de- 
position of  the  overlying  Pennsylvanian  sediments.  Detailed  studies 
in  these  two  quadrangles  have  therefore  rendered  the  unconformity 
between  the  beds  of  Mississippian  and  Pennsylvanian  age  especially 
evident.  A generalized  section  of  the  formations  in  eastern  Ohio  is 
given  on  the  following  page. 

The  stratigraphic  position  of  the  reservoir  rocks  from  which 
samples  of  water  and  of  oil  and  gas  bearing  rocks  were  collected  is 
shown  in  Plate  I.  It  will  be  observed  that  these  beds  range  in  age 
from  late  Devonian  to  early  Pennsylvanian.  The  oil  and  gas  sands 
are  for  the  most  part  lenticular,  many  of  the  productive  beds  at  the 
same  stratigraphic  horizons  being  isolated  from  one  another  by  rela- 
tively impermeable  shales,  tightly  cemented  sandstones,  or  grada- 
tions between  the  two. 

For  detailed  descriptions  and  structure  contour  maps  of  the  oil 
and  gas  sands  in  southeastern  Ohio  and  western  Pennsylvania,  the 
reader  is  referred  to  the  publications  listed  on  page  10. 


GENERALIZED  SECTIONS  SHOWING  THE  OIL  AND  GAS  SANDS  AND  THE  ACCOMPANYING  BEDS  IN  THE  AREAS 
FROM  WHICH  WATER  AND  ROCK  SAMPLES  WERE  COLLECTED. 


MISSISSIPPI  AN 


V.  8. 


GKOLOOICAt. 


9URVIV 

A 


GEOLOGY  OF  APPALACHIAN  FIELDS, 


13 


Generalized  section  of  formations  in  eastern  Ohio.a 


System. 

Group  or 
formation. 

Thick- 

ness 

(feet). 

Character. 

Driller’s  description. 

Carboniferous. 

(Permian 
series. ) 

Washington  for- 
mation. 

400 

Nonpersistent  sandstone  members 
with  shale  and  clay  of  general 
reddish-brown  color.  A few 
thin  beds  of  coal  and  limestone 
in  lower  portion. 

( Pennsylvanian  series. ) 

Monongahela  for- 
mation. 

255-275 

Limestone,  shale,  and  a little  sand- 
stone. Contains  the  Pitts- 
burgh, Pomeroy,  Meigs  Creek, 
Uniontown,  arid  Waynesburg 
coal  beds,  all  of  more  or  less  value 
in  the  Woodsfield  quadrangle. 

Conemaugh  for- 
mation. 

460-475 

Irregular  members  grading  into 
shales,  commonly  of  reddish- 
brown  or  variegated  colors. 
Upper  and  lower  Pittsburgh 
limestone  members  near  top; 
Ames  and  Cambridge  limestone 
members  a little  below  middle. 
Mahoning  sandstone  member  at 
the  base,  locally  productive  of 
oil. 

Includes  First  Cow 
Run,  Buell  Run,  and 
Mahoning  sands. 

Allegheny  forma- 
tion. 

250-265 

Sandstone,  shale,  and  important 
clay  and  coal  beds,  including  the 
Lower  Kittanning,.  Middle  Kit- 
tanning, and  Lower  and  Upper 
Freeport. 

Includes  P e e k e r, 
Macksburg  500-foot, 
and  Second  Cow 
Run  oil  sands  named 
in  descending  order. 

Pottsville  for- 

mation. 

155-170 

Consists  largely  of  sandstone  and 
conglomerate,  which  rest  with 
uneven  contact  on  the  eroded 
surface  of  the  Mississippian 
beds.  The  sandstone  is  gen- 
erally divided  into  several  parts 
by  beds  of  clay  shale,  and  coals 
are  also  locally  present. 

Includes  Maxton  sand. 

(Mississippian  series.) 

Maxville  lime- 

stone. 

0-100 

Dark-gray  and  bluish  to  light-gray 
limestone  with  interbedded 
shale  and  fine-grained  sandstone. 

Big  lime;  ihcludes  Big 
lime  sand. 

— Unconformity 

Logan  formation. 

25-100 

Consists  of  sandstone,  the  Keener 
sand,  interbedded  with  shale;  a 
valuable  source  of  oil  and  gas. 

Includes  Keener  oil 
sand. 

Black  Hand  for- 
mation. 

75-175 

Coarse  sandstone  interbedded 
with  and  grading  laterally  into 
sandy  shale. 

Probably  includes  Big 
Injun  and  Squaw  oil 
sands. 

Cuyahoga  for- 

mation. 

350-450? 

Mostly  sandy  shale  in  lower  part, 
with  a few  beds  of  shaly  sand- 
stone. 

Includes  Welsh  oil 
sand. 

Sunbury  shale. 

25-40 

Dark  carbonaceous  shale. 

Black  shale. 

Berea  sandstone. 

0-40 

Berea  sand,  consisting  of  coarse  to 
fine  grained  gray  to  white  sand- 
stone. Lenticular  in  the 
Woodsfield  and  Summerfield 
quadrangles. 

Berea  oil  and  gas  sand. 

a The  part  of  this  section  below  the  Berea  sandstone  is  taken  from  a paper  by  G.  S.  Rogers  (The  Cleve- 
land gas  field,  Cuyahoga  County,  Ohio:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  661,  p.  5,  1917). 


14  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS, 


Generalized  section  of  formations  in  eastern  Ohio — Continued. 


System. 

Group  or 
formation. 

Thick- 

ness 

(feet). 

Character. 

Driller’s  description. 

Devonian  or 
Carbonifer- 
ous. 

Bedford  shale. 

20-40? 

Mottled  gray,  reddish,  and  brown- 
ish shale. 

Ohio  shale,  1,100-3,000 
feet,  usually  treated 
as  a unit  in  southern 
Ohio. 

Devonian. 

Unconformity 

Silurian. 

Ohio  shale  group. 

Cleveland 

shale. 

50-120 

Massive  hard  black  bituminous, 
with  a few  bluish  layers  in  lower 
portion. 

Chagrin  shale. 

850-1,200 

Soft  bluish-gray  clay  shale,  with 
some  concretionary  layers. 

Huron  shale. 

Black  and  bluish  shale  in  upper 
and  lower  portions,  with  a band 
of  gray  shale  near  middle . 

Olentangy?  shale. 

80 

Gray  calcareous  shale. 

Delaware  lime- 
stone. 

500-700 

Blue  and  gray  limestone,  becom- 
ing dolomitic  in  lower  part. 
Contains  a 30  to  50  foot  bed  of 
white  quartz  sandstone,  350  to 
450  feet  below  top. 

Big  lime;  includes 
Newburg  sand  and 
some  “stray”  sands 
in  lower  300  feet, 
490-1,825  feet. 

| 

Columbus  lime- 
stone. 

Monroe  formation. 

Salina  formation. 

400-600 

Shale,  dolomite,  anhydrite  or 
gypsum,  and  rock  salt. 

Niagara  limestone. 

400-600 

Dolomite  and  limestone. 

“Clinton”  for- 

mation. 

150-250 

Crystalline  limestone  of  various 
fight  colors:  calcareous  shale  and 
thin-bedded  limestone,  with 
sandstone  layer  in  lower  part. 

Includes  Little  lime, 
75-150  feet. 

j Clinton  sand,  0-60  feet. 

25-75  feet. 

“Medina”  shale. 

300-400 

Red  clay  shale,  with  thin  layers  of 
sandstone. 

Medina  red  rock. 

Ordovician. 

Shale  and  lime- 
stone of  Cincin- 
natian age. 

750-1,250 

Dark  shale,  with  thin  layers  of 
limestone,  especially  in  upper 
part. 

Slate  and  shells. 

Trenton  (?)  lime- 
stone. 

(?) 

Limestone. 

Trenton  lime. 

LITHOLOGY  AND  MINERALOGY  OF  THE  SEDIMENTS. 

KINDS  OF  ROCK. 

The  reservoir  rocks  are  principally  porous  dolomitic  limestones  and 
quartzitic  and  calcareous  sandstones  interbedded  with  relatively  im- 
permeable shales,  tightly  cemented  sandstones,  and  gradations  be- 


GEOLOGY  OF  APPALACHIAN  FIELDS, 


15 


tween  these  rocks.  Fragments  of  the  oil  and  gas  bearing  rocks 
were  collected  when  they  were  cleaned  from  wells  in  the  different 
fields  and  have  been  examined  both  petrographically  and  chemically. 

RESULTS  OF  PETROGRAPHIC  EXAMINATION  OF  ROCK  SPECIMENS. 

For  the  petrographic  study  of  the  rock  specimens  we  are  indebted 
to  M.  I.  Goldman,  who  reports  as  follows : 

The  results  of  the  petrographic  study,  presented  herewith,  are  only  tenta- 
tive, as  more  detailed  microscopic  observations  and  more  extensive  study  of  the 
relation  of  the  history  and  distribution  of  wells  to  the  observed  petrographic 
features  are  necessary  to  establish  the  conclusions. 

The  primary  object  of  the  investigation  was  to  find  any  characteristics  of 
the  rocks  that  might  bear  on  the  distribution  of  oil  in  them.  As  the  work 
progressed  it  appeared  that,  in  addition,  light  might  be  thrown  on  some  of 
the  early  stages  of  metamorphism  and  their  relation  to  geologic  conditions.  It 
was  found  impracticable  to  make  determinations  of  pore  space,  because,  by 
the  tearing  out  of  soft  minerals  and  in  other  ways,  holes  are  produced  in  grind- 
ing the  thin  sections.  As  methods  for  the  determination  of  the  primary  or 
syngenetic  features  of  sedimentary  rocks  from  their  thin  sections  are  still 
rather  undeveloped  and  inadequate,  no  attempt  was  made  to  determine  those 
features  beyond  recognizing  that  quartz,  feldspar,  mica,  and  clay  substance 
were  the  principal  constituents  of  the  rocks  examined.  Otherwise  the  investi- 
gation was  limited  to  the  study  of  secondary  or  epigenetic  minerals. 

The  following  minerals  were  recognized : 

Quartz  as  a secondary  growth  around  the  original  grains  and  in  continuous 
crystallographic  orientation  with  them  was  found  in  almost  all  the  sandstones 
that  were  not  too  argillaceous.  The  approach  to  quartzite  was  in  general  great- 
est in  the  deepest  beds,  though  this  relation  was  highly  variable. 

Kaolinite,  known  as  a common  mineral  in  sandstones,  was  found  in  fine 
crystalline  aggregates  filling  the  pore  spaces. 

Calcite  and  other  carbonates  seemed  to  be  particularly  abundant  in  pro- 
ductive sandstones  in  older  fields  in  which  wells  were  very  numerous,  thus 
indicating  a relation  to  recent  ground-water  circulation  resulting  from  drilling. 

Sulphides  (pyrite  or  marcasite)  were  scarce  in  oil  and  gas  bearing  rocks 
from  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quadrangles  and  occurred  mainly  in  the 
clays  associated  with  carbonaceous  matter,  a common  syngenetic  relation.  It 
is  significant,  however,  as  illustrating  the  mineralogic  and  chemical  individ- 
uality of  different  fields,  that  in  some  regions  outside  of  these  areas  in  Ohio  and 
Pennsylvania  the  sulphides  are  common  in  large  aggregations  in  sandstones. 

Chert  and  opal  growths  were  scarce  and  difficult  to  recognize  and  received 
no  special  attention. 

Micas  are  probably  the  most  significant  of  the  secondary  minerals.  They 
are  of  various  species  and  types,  from  almost  colorless  to  yellowish  green  and 
from  brilliantly  polarizing  to  almost  isotropic.  Their  differentiation  from 
syngenetic  micas  is  difficult,  being  based  mainly  on  habit  and  distribution. 
They  are  the  minerals  that  most  require  further  study,  but  so  far  as  can  be 
stated  at  present  their  development  in  the  pay  sands  seems  to  be,  like  that 
of  the  carbonates,  related  to  circulation  of  water  resulting  from  the  opening  of 
wells.  However,  as  is  shown  in  the  subsequent  discussion  by  Messrs.  Mills  and 
Wells,  the  chemical  changes  that  resulted  in  the  formation  of  these  secondary 
micas,  like  those  that  produced  the  carbonates  and  other  epigenetic  minerals, 
probably  also  took  place  during  the  slow  natural  circulation  that  preceded 


16  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

drilling.  In  regard  to  changes  in  composition  of  the  waters  associated  with 
oil  and  gas  it  is  significant  that  some  of  the  secondary  micas  are  evidently 
chlorites  and  that  magnesium  would  therefore  have  been  used  in  forming  them. 

There  were  some  indications  that  the  development  of  secondary  quartz  and 
sulphides  might  also  be  related  to  the  circulation  of  water  resulting  from  the 
removal  of  oil  and  gas. 

An  interesting  feature  is  the  apparent  granulation  and  recementing  by  silica 
of  some  of  the  grains  of  quartz  in  a few  of  the  samples.  This  may  be  the 
beginning  of  the  mechanical  part  of  metamorphism,  but  the  possibility  has 
also  been  suggested  that  it  is  due  to  crushing  resulting  from  blows  of  the  drill 
in  sinking  the  well,  with  subsequent  cementing.  A choice  between  these  two 
interpretations  could  be  made  only  on  the  basis  of  a study  of  the  distribution 
of  the  samples  showing  this  feature.  The  assumption  of  metamorphism  due 
to  pressure  resulting  from  the  weight  of  overlying  beds  is  favored  by  the 
two  facts  that  the  phenomenon  is  apparently  rare  and  that,  so  far  as  may  be 
concluded  from  this  preliminary  study,  it  occurs  mainly  in  samples  from 
greater  depths,  especially  in  one  from  a depth  of  2,230  feet. 

No  determinations  of  possible  water-soluble  minerals  in  the  sections  could  be 
made,  as  these  would  be  removed  in  grinding. 

It  may  be  noticed  that  all  the  factors  considered  above  are  related  to  the 
occurrence  and  circulation  of  underground  waters  in  the  rocks.  The  under- 
ground waters  in  turn,  as  shown  elsewhere  in  this  paper,  have  important  bear- 
ings on  the  occurrence  of  oil  and  gas. 

A dark-brown  stain,  believed  to  be  due  to  oil,  is  found  in  connection  with 
carbonaceous  matter  in  some  of  the  clays,  a relation  well  recognized  in  the 
oil  shales  of  the  western  United  States.1  No  other  direct  relation  between  the 
oil  and  gas  associated  with  the  rocks  and  their  microscopic  features  was  estab- 
lished. The  porosity  would  of  course  be  one  of  the  most  important  properties 
to  consider  if  the  conditions  under  which  thin  sections  are  produced  permitted 
its  determination  under  the  microscope. 

As  regards  metamorphism  in  general,  it  is  suggested  that  at  least  during 
the  earliest  stages  an  important  factor  may  be  the  presence  of  open  fissures  or 
passages  of  exceptional  porosity  which  would  facilitate  the  flow  of  water 
through  the  rocks. 

RESULTS  OF  CHEMICAL  EXAMINATION  OF  ROCK  SPECIMENS. 

In  order  to  supplement  the  microscopic  examination  of  the  rock 
specimens  obtained  from  the  oil  and  gas  wells,  a number  of  chemical 
determinations  were  made,  together  with  a few  fairly  complete 
analyses.  The  proportions  of  the  water-soluble  constituents  were 
first  determined  by  extracting  2-gram  portions  of  the  powdered 
samples  with  about  100  cubic  centimeters  of  water  at  ordinary  tem- 
perature, filtering,  evaporating  the  filtrates  to  dryness  at  110°  C., 
and  weighing  the  residues.  In  Table  1 the  results  are  stated  as 
percentages  of  the  rocks  66  soluble  in  water.”  The  composition  of  the 
water-soluble  material  was  not  ascertained  in  the  first  determina- 
tions, but  it  is  believed  to  have  been  largely  sodium  chloride,  as  indi- 
cated in  Tables  3 and  15.  The  proportion  of  water-soluble  materials 


1 See  the  studies  of  the  late  C.  A.  Davis. 


GEOLOGY  OF  APPALACHIAN  FIELDS.  ' 17 

ranged  from  0.25  to  0.84  per  cent.  Next  the  leached  portions  of  the 
samples  were  extracted  with  1/10  hydrochloric  acid  in  order  to  gain 
an  insight  into  the  nature  of  the  acid-soluble  constituents.  The  re- 
sults are  stated  as  percentages  of  the  rock  u soluble  in  HC1.”  After 
this  treatment  the  residue  was  extracted  with  5 per  cent  solution  of 
soditfm  carbonate  to  determine  the  amount  of  soluble  silica  present. 


Table  1. — Chemical  determinations  on  rock  specimens  from  oil  and  gas  wells. 
[Percentages  of  samples  by  weight.  Determinations  by  It.  C.  Wells.] 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Soluble  in  wfiter®  

0.05 

0.17 

0. 35 

0. 84 

0.57 

0.10 

Soluble  in  1/10  HC1: 

gJOg  

.29 

.97 

.12 

.10 

.04' 

.08 

Fe2Oab 

. 95 

4.75 

2.35 

1. 13 

.11 

.68 

A1203  

.33 

1.  47 

.32 

.14 

.03 

.09 

CaO 

.12 

.37 

2.72 

1. 35 

.08 

.19 

MgO  

.08 

.56 

.73 

.37 

None. 

.09 

p2o5  

.02 

.10 

.03 

.01 

.02 

Trace. 

co2  

Trace. 

2. 14 

4.  23 

1.80 

None. 

Trace. 

Soluble  in  5 per  cent  solution  of  Na2C03: 

Si02 - 

. 15 

.63 

.14 

.18 

.07 

.17 

1 

a Mainly  chlorides.  i>  All  Fe  as  F 6203. 


1 Keener  sand,  of  late  Mississippian  age;  depth  1,451  to  1,469  feet;  Jerusalem,  Simsbury  Township. 
Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Fragments  of  sandstone  had  been  shot  and  cleaned  from  an  old  oil  well  and  had 

lain  exposed  to  the  weather  for  several  months  before  being  collected. 

2 Shale  underlying  Third  sand,  of  probable  late  Devonian  age;  depth,  l,450±feet;  Evans  City,  Butler 
County.  Pa.  Fragments  of  shale  drilled  from  a new  well  and  collected  at  once. 

3.  Berea  sand,  of  early  Mississippian  age;  Armstrongs  Mills,  Washington  township,  Belmont  County, 
Ohio.  Fragments  of  sandstone  cleaned  from  a gas  and  oil  well  10  years  old.  The  sample  was  collected  as 

S °4 n B erea^^n^,^! V^ar ly°Missis si ppian  age;  depth,  1,900±  feet;  Woodsfield,  Center  Township,  Monroe 
County,  Ohio.  Fragments  of  sandstone  cleaned  from  a g%s  and  oil  well  10  years  old.  The  sample  was 

collected  as  soon  as  it  was  removed  from  the  well.  . . . , . Ann  , 

5 Big  lime  sand  (sandy  phase  of  Maxville  limestone),  of  late  Mississippian  age;  depth,  1, 400 ± feet,  Ozark 

Sunsbury  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Fragments  of  sandstone  shot  and  cleaned  from  a new  oil  well 
in  an  old  field.  The  sample  was  collected  assoon  as  it  was  removed  from  the  well. 

6.  Third  sand,  of  probable  late  Devonian  age;  depth  1,430  to  1,460  feet;  Evans  City,  Forward  Township, 
Butler  County,  Pa.  Fragments  of  sandstone  shot  and  cleaned  from  a new  oil  well  m a new  field.  The 
sample  was  collected  as  soon  as  it  was  cleaned  from  the  well. 


In  Table  2 are  presented  the  results  of  the  more  complete  analyses. 


Table  2. — Analysis  of  rock  specimens  from  oil  and  gas  wells. 


[R.  C.  Wells,  analyst.] 


* 

2 

3 

93. 82 

62. 17 

85.90 

1.75 

7.54 

2.82 

173 

16.84 

1.68 

.19 

.44 

2.96 

.25 

1.46 

.84 

.02 

.10 

.03 

Trace. 

2. 14 

4.23 

.12 

.87 

.12 

2.31 

3.95 

1.35 

99. 19 

95. 51 

99. 93 

1.  Keener  sand,  of  late  Mississippian  age;  depth  1,451  to  1,469  feet;  Jerusalem,  Simsbmy  Townshlp 
Monroe  County,  6hio.  Fragments  of  sandstone  had  been  shot  and  cleaned  from  an  old  oil  well  and  had 

lain  exposed  to  the  weather  for  several  months  before  being  collected.  ~ 

2 Shale  underlying  Third  sand,  of  probable  late  Devonian  age;  depth,  1,450±  feet,  Evans  City,  Butler 

County,  Pa.  Fragments  of  shale  drilled  from  a new  well  and  collected  atonce.  ~ . 

3.  Berea  sand,  of  early  Mississippian  age;  Armstrongs  Mills, Washington i Township,  Belmont  County. 
Fragments  of  sandstone  cleaned  from  a gas  ana  oil  well  10  years  old.  The  sample  was  collected 


Ohio, 
as 


soon  as  it  was  removed  from  the  well. 


91818°— 19 2 


18  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

The  chemical  tests  were  made  partly  to  ascertain  the  character  of 
the  cementing  material.  That  generally  found  in  sandy  sediments 
includes  silica  and  hydrous  silicates  of  iron,  aluminum,  calcium,  and 
magnesium,  the  composition  depending  somewhat  on  the  foreign 
substances  in  the  sand.  As  a matter  of  fact,  pure  siliceous  sandstones 
are  the  exception.  When,  as  in  the  rocks  examined,  clay,  mud,  and 
carbonates  are  also  present  the  list  of  possible  cements  is  greatly  in- 
creased and  includes  the  carbonates  of  iron,  magnesium,  and  calcium 
and  various  phosphates  and  sulphates: 

Tables  1 and  2 show  that  the  proportion  of  carbonates  in  the  sands 
examined  is  not  large;  in  fact,  carbonates  are  absent  in  the  Bib  lime 
sand,  and  only  traces  are  found  in  the  specimens  of  the  Keener  and 
Third  sands.  Much  of  the  iron  found  in  the  shale  below  the  Third 
sand  and  in  the  Berea  sand  from  Woodsfield  and  practically  all  of 
that  in  the  Berea  sand  from  Armstrongs  Mills  is  present  as  ferrous 
carbonate,  although  reported  as  ferric  oxide;  the  determination  of 
ferrous  iron  is  unreliable  in  the  presence  of  organic  matter.  Mag- 
nesium was  found  in  all  but  one  of  the  sands,  and  some  calcium  in 
all.  Sands  2,  3,  and  4 effervesce  with  acid,  but  the  other  three  sands 
show  no  appreciable  effervescence.  Sample  4,  collected  from  an  old 
well  yielding  oil  and  gas  from  the  Berea  sand,  is  salty  to  the  taste 
and  shows  the  largest  proportion  of  material  soluble  in  water.  None 
of  the  specimens  shows  a marked  amount  of  silica  soluble  in  acid  or 
in  sodium  carbonate  after  treatment  with  acid,  except  the  shale  be- 
low the  Third  sand.  This  rock  may  contain  a magnesium  silicate 
which  is  decomposed  by  acid.  The  magnesium  content  of  all  the 
specimens  appears  to  be  low,  though  it  must  be  remarked  that  the 
relatively  insoluble  magnesium  silicates  would  not  be  dissolved  under 
the  conditions  of  these  experiments.  Dolomite  is  present  only  in 
small  amounts,  but  specimens  of  the  deeply  buried  limestones  that 
have  been  previously  reported  as  dolomitic  could  not  be  procured  for 
examination. 

Small  proportions  of  water-soluble  salts,  more  particularly  sodium 
chloride,  were  found  in  all  the  rock  samples  in  which  these  constit- 
uents were  sought.  Some  uncertainty  as  to  the  mode  of  occurrence 
of  the  salts  is  introduced  by  the  small  proportions  contained  in  the 
rocks  examined.  The  salts  are  present  in  smaller  proportions  than 
would  be  found  in  a sandstone  having  a total  porosity  of  15  per  cent 
if  it  were  saturated  with  an  average  Appalachian  oil  field  brine  and 
then  dried.  It  may  therefore  be  suggested  that  the  salts  in  the  speci- 
mens examined  have  been  deposited  merely  by  the  drying  of  small 
amounts  of  brine  contained  in  the  rocks  when  the  specimens  wTere 
collected.  This  suggestion  would  be  reasonable  if  the  rocks  had  been 
saturated  with  water  when  they  were  collected  from  the  wells,  but 
some  of  them  were  partly  saturated  with  oil  and  came  from  rela- 


GEOLOGY  OE  APPALACHIAN  EIELDS. 


19 


tively  water-dry  strata.  The  occurrence  in  a sedimentary  rock,  now 
relatively  dry  of  water,  of  0.5  per  cent  of  water-soluble  matter,  of 
which  82.7  per  cent  is  made  up  of  chlorides,  suggests  that  salts  of 
this  type  were  deposited  in  the  rock  as  a result  of  deep-seated 
evaporation. 

As  will  be  explained  later,  the  brines  associated  with  oil  and  gas 
in  the  Appalachian  fields  have  probably  undergone  concentration, 
and  the  salt  that  occurs  in  densely  cemented  barren  rock  may  have 
been  included  in  other  minerals  deposited  chemically  from  the  waters 
before  they  reached  their  present  stage  of  concentration.  In  other 
words,  water  concentration  and  cementation  have  probably  been  more 
or  less  concomitant  processes,  and  the  soluble  salts,  especially  sodium 
chloride,  may  have  been  mechanically  included  in  the  cements.  It  is 
significant  that  chlorides,  especially  sodium  chloride,  occur  in  the 
densely  cemented  sediments  and  in  secondary  deposits  of  calcite  and 
barite  collected  from  oil  wells.  The  possibility  that  the  included 
sodium  chloride  was  formed  concomitantly  with  calcium  carbonate 
by  the  mixing  and  concentration  of  waters  of  different  types  is  dis- 
cussed in  the  succeeding  text.  As  related  to  the  concentration  prob- 
lem, which  is  also  developed  in  succeeding  pages,  it  seems  important 
that  sodium  chloride  constitutes  86.5  to  100  per  cent  of  the  chlorides 
present  in  the  samples  examined,  whereas  the  salts  obtained  by  the 
complete  evaporation  of  the  brines  contain  about  20  per  cent  of  cal- 
cium chloride  and  5 per  cent  of  magnesium  chloride. 

Table  3. Water-soluble  material,  chlorides,  and  sodium  chloride  in  deeply 

buried  sediments. 


[S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst.] 


Percentage 
of  water- 
soluble 
material  in 
the  rocks. 

Percentage 
of  chlorides 
in  the 
rocks. 

Percentage 
of  NaCl  in 
the  rocks. 

Percentage 
of  NaCl 
in  the 
chlorides. 

0. 131 

0.029 

0.029 

100.0 
AK  C 

.245 

.157 

.173 

. 150 

yo.  t) 

.332 

. 165 

95. 4 

.139 

.098 

.096 

98. 0 

.509 

.421 

.364 

86. 5 

.092 

.043 

.043 

100. 0 

— 

. 

O.  nuuuicu-wuu  oo-uu, 

gas,  oil,  and  water  were  practically  absent. 


20  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

The  analyses  on  which  Table  3 is  based  were  made  in  the  following 
manner  : 

A 50-gram  portion  of  the  finely  pulverized  sample  was  leached 
with  300  cubic  centimeters  of  distilled  water  at  45°  C.  for  17  hours, 
with  frequent  stirring.  The  resultant  solution  was  then  filtered  into 
a graduated  500  cubic  centimeter  flask  and  the  leached  sample  washed 
with  distilled  water  until  the  filtrate  attained  a volume  of  500  cubic 
centimeters.  Aliquot  portions,  representing  10  grams  of  the  sample, 
were  taken  for  determinations  of  total  water-soluble  material,  Ca, 
Mg,  N-a,  K,  S04,  and  Cl.  The  material  that  was  soluble  in  water 
was  determined  by  evaporating  to  dryness  and  heating  at  110°  C. 
for  one  hour,  cooling  the  residue  in  a desiccator,  and  weighing.  Other 
analytical  determinations  were  made  in  the  usual  manner. 

RESULTS  OF  PHYSICAL  EXAMINATION  OF  ROCK  SPECIMENS. 

In  order  to  study  further  the  character  of  these  rocks,  physical 
tests  were  made  on  lump  specimens  to  determine  the  percentage  of 
total  pore  space  in  which  oil,  gas,  and  water  might  occur  or  in  which 
mineral  matter  might  be  deposited.  For  this  work  we  are  indebted 
to  A.  F.  Melcher,  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey.  The  total 
proportions  of  pore  space  in  the  fragments  tested  are  shown  in  Table 
4 to  range  from  4 or  5 up  to  18  or  19  per  cent  of  the  rock  volume. 
Notwithstanding  the  care  exercised  in  collecting  the  specimens, 
some  of  the  lumps  of  rock  that  are  thought  to  be  pay  sand,  which 
were  obtained  after  productive  oil  and  gas  wells  had  been  shot,  may 
represent  hard,  relatively  dense  layers  of  the  sandstone  and  not  the 
porous,  open-textured  pay  sands  from  which  the  oil  and  gas  are  de- 
rived. Apparently  no  consistent  relation  exists  between  the  porosity 
of  the  sands  and  the  size  and  shape  of  the  component  grains.  The 
variations  in  porosity  are  due  largely  to  the  irregularity  with  which 
the  sediments  have  been  cemented  both  before  and  during  the  extrac- 
tion of  oil  and  gas. 

In  addition  to  the  porosities  shown  in  Table  4 Richardson 1 reports 
that  some  lump  samples  of  the  Hundred- foot  sand  collected  in  But- 
ler County,  Pa.,  have  total  porosities  as  low  as  4.5  to  7.3  per  cent. 
It  seems  probable  that  the  total  pore  space  in  the  relatively  open-tex- 
tured parts  of  the  Hundred-foot  sand  may  be  at  least  15  to  18  per 
cent  or  more  of  the  rock  volume,  though  we  have  no  positive  data 
on  this  subject. 

1 Richardson,  G.  B.,  Note  on  Appalachian  oil  field  brines : Econ.  Geology,  vol.  12, 
pp.  39-41,  1917. 


Table  4. — Total  pore  space  in.  oil  and  gas  bearing  sands  and  associated  rocks , with  diameter  and  density  of  the  component  grains. 


GEOLOGY  OE  APPALACHIAN  FIELDS.  21 


22  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  OIL  AND  GAS  IN  THE 
APPALACHIAN  FIELDS. 

The  chemical  examination  by  the  Bureau  of  Mines  of  crude  pe- 
troleum and  natural  gas  collected  during  our  field  studies  and  the 
many  other  available  analyses  of  the  oils  and  gases  from  the  areas 
studied1  indicate  that  the  oils  are  composed  essentially  of  members 
of  the  paraffin  series  and  contain  no  asphalt.  It  is  evident  from  their 
generally  low  specific  gravity,  ranging  from  0.6837  to  0.8482,  and 
also  from  their  fractional  distillation,  especially  between  150°  and 
300°  C.,  that  the  oils,  with  but  few  possible  exceptions,  contain  no 
considerable  proportions  of  the  aromatic  series.  The  sulphur  content 
of  the  oils  is  also  insignificant. 

Analyses  of  natural  gas  from  the  Appalachian  fields,  reported  in 
percentages  by  volume,  moisture  free,  show  that  the  gas  consists  es- 
sentially of  the  paraffin  hydrocarbons  methane  and  ethane.  The 
usual  methane  content  ranges  from  66.0  to  98.0  per  cent  and  that  of 
ethane  from  less  than  1 to  more  than  29  per  cent.  The  carbon  dioxide 
content  ranges  from  less  than  0.1  to  more  than  5 per  cent ; • and 
that  of  nitrogen  from  less  than  0.5  to  more  than  5 per  cent.  The 
oxygen  content  is  generally  less  than  0.5  per  cent.  The  proportions 
of  hydrogen  sulphide  and  other  minor  constituents  are  practically 
negligible. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  little  or  no  attention  has  been  paid  to  the 
accurate  determination  of  the  moisture  content  of  natural  gas  as  it 
is  drawn  from  the  reservoir  rocks  and  that  inadequate  study  has  been 
given  to  the  physical  and  chemical  relations  existing  between  pe- 
troleum and  natural  gas  on  the  one  hand  and  their  associated  waters 
and  reservoir  rocks  on  the  other. 

OCCURRENCE  AND  DISTRIBUTION  OF  WATER  IN  THE 

STRATA. 

PRESENT  DISTRIBUTION  OF  WATER  IN  THE  OIL  AND  GAS 
BEARING  ROCKS. 

WATER-BEARING  SANDS. 

In  the  Appalachian  fields  the  oil  sands  of  both  the  Pennsylvanian 
and  Mississippian  series  are  generally  water  bearing  throughout, 
though  some  of  the  beds  are  locally  termed  dry  because  they  do  not 
yield  perceptible  flows  of  water  into  open  wells.  Thus  in  the  Woods- 
field  and  Summerfield  quadrangles,  in  southeastern  Ohio,  the  Big 
lime  sand,  a lenticular  sandstone  in  the  Maxville  limestone,  of  late 

1 Day,  D.  T.,  The  production  of  petroleum  in  1913  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Mineral  Re- 
sources, 1913,  pt.  2,  pp.  1126-1284,  1914. 


DISTRIBUTION  OF  WATER  IN  THE  STRATA. 


23 


Mississippian  age,  is  locally  termed  dry,  though  in  places  within 
these  quadrangles,  it  is  characteristically  water  bearing.  The  Keener 
and  Big  Injun  sands  in  southeastern  Ohio  are  characteristically  water 
bearing,  though  they  too  fail  to  yield  appreciable  flows  of  water  in 
certain  oil  and  gas  fields  and  in  some  barren  areas.  In  general 
wherever  in  western  Pennsylvania  paying  quantities  of  oil  are 
found  in  the  Hundred-foot  sand,  of  probable  early  Mississippian 
age,  that  sand  contains  abundant  water. 

DRY  SANDS. 

Some  of  the  oil  and  gas  bearing  sands  are  relatively  free  from 
water — that  is,  they  fail  to  yield  perceptible  flows  of  water  into 
open  wells  and  are  consequently  termed  dry  sands.  In  some  of  the 
beds  of  the  Devonian  system  or  of  probable  Devonian  age,  more 
particularly  those  of  the  Catskill  ( ? ) formation  in  western  Pennsyl- 
vania, the  apparent  absence  of  water  is  the  rule  rather  than  the  ex- 
ception. Here  again,  however,  the  distribution  of  water  is  irregular, 
parts  of  the  so-called  dry  sands  evidently  being  saturated  with  water. 

We  believe  that  in  strata  penetrated  by  the  drill  the  existence  of  a 
sand  actually  dry  of  water  is  doubtful.  The.  occurrence  of  small 
amounts  of  water  in  a sand  may  be  overlooked  because  the  water 
evaporates  into  gas  entering  wells,  or  because  the  proportion  of 
water  accompanying  oil  may  be  too  small  to  be  observed.  Water  is 
generally  found  at  the  bottoms  of  inclosed  or  covered  field  tanks 
that  receive  oil  from  so-called  dry  sands.  Such  sands  are  only  rela- 
tively dry  of  water.  The  failure  of  a bed  to  yield  a perceptible  flow 
of  gas,  oil,  or  water  into  a well  does  not  necessarily  signify  the  ab- 
sence of  any  of  these  fluids.  In  beds  such  as  shales  and  tight  sands 
the  rock  interstices  may  be  too  fine  to  emit  noticeable  amounts  of  the 
fluids,  or  the  fluid  movements  into  a well  may  be  so  slow  as  to  require 
several  days  or  even  weeks  to  make  the  presence  of  gas,  oil,  or  water 
noticeable.  The  fact  that  water  introduced  into  a well  is  absorbed  by 
a sand  indicates  merely  the  comparative  dryness  of  that  sand  but  in 
no  way  signifies  the  absence  of  water. 

Several  explanations  have  been  offered  to  account  for  the  so-called 
dry  sands.  In  a recent  contribution  Reeves 1 concludes  that  the  “ non 
water-bearing  ” sandstones  of  what  has  been  called  the  Catskill  for- 
mation in  southwestern  Pennsylvania  and  West  Virginia  were  dried 
out  while  exposed  to  the  air  under  the  semiarid  conditions  which  he 
supposes  to  have  existed  during  the  Catskill  time.  He  further  postu- 
lates the  exclusion  of  water  from  these  beds  during  later  submer- 
gence, owing  to  the  presence  of  interstitially  included  air. 

1 Reeves,  Frank,  The  absence  of  water  in  certain  sandstones  of  the  Appalachian  oil 
fields  : Econ.  Geology,  vol.  12,  pp.  354-378,  1917. 


24  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  -NATURAL  GAS. 

The  abundance  of  epigenetic  minerals  with  which  the  so-called 
dry  sands  are  cemented  and  which  were  evidently  deposited  from 
circulating  water  suggests  to  us  the  long-continued  presence  of  more 
water  than  the  so-called  dry  sands  now  contain.  What  therefore 
seems  to  be  a more  plausible  explanation  for  the  comparative  dryness 
of  certain  beds  is  that  the  displacement  of  water  in  these  beds  by 
compacting  and  cementation  or  by  the  incursion  of  petroleum  and 
natural  gas  1 has  been  relatively  complete,  or  that  the  sands  may  have 
been  partly  dried  out  by  the  evaporative  processes  herein  described. 
In  regard  to  this  last  suggestion,  it  is  a significant  fact  that  the  water 
content  of  the  strata  decreases  and  that  the  degree  of  concentration 
of  the  dissolved  constituents  of  the  waters  increases  with  increasing 
depth.  t 

An  argument  used  by  Reeves,  that  red  beds  are  proof  of  the  former 
existence  of  an  arid  climate,  is  somewhat  weakened  by  the  fact  that 
red  ferric  oxide  may  be  formed  from  hydrated  ferric  oxide  by  the 
dehydrating  action  of  salt  solutions,  just  as  anhydrite  is  similarly 
formed  from  gypsum.  Daubree2  states  that  he  carried  out  this 
dehydration  experimentally  in  a saturated  solution  of  sodium  chloride 
at  only  150°  C.  According  to  him,  Elie  de  Beaumont3  seems  to 
have  been  the  first  to  point  out  the  causal  relation  between  salt  for- 
mations and  the  variegated  red  tint  of  certain  clays,  sandstones,  and 
even  of  salt  itself. 

In  showing  that  water  does  not  always  disappear  at  depth,  Reeves  4 
calls  attention  to  the  occurrence  of  salt  water  in  the  Lower  Devo- 
nian rocks  near  Charleston,  W.  Va.,  and  McDonald,  Pa.  In  a deep 
well  at  McDonald,  salt  water  was  encountered  at  a depth  of  6,260 
feet,  presumably  in  the  Oriskany  sandstone,  and  rose  4,000  feet  in 
the  well.  During  the  preparation  of  this  bulletin  we  have  collected 
and  examined  waters  from  the  Upper  Devonian  series  in  Butler 
County,  Pa.,  where  the  beds  in  many  places  are  termed  dry. 

Broadly  speaking,  we  believe  that  within  the  Appalachian  basin  all 
the  sands  reached  by  the  drill  are  water  bearing  and  that  there  is  no 
regional  level  of  water  saturation  above  which  a deeply  buried  oil 
and  gas  bearing  rock  is  dry.  The  so-called  water  surfaces,  the  upper 
limits  of  water  saturation,  and  the  so-called  non  water-bearing  por- 
tions of  the  oil  and  gas  bearing  sands  are  only  local  in  their 
occurrence. 


1 Johnson,  R.  H.,  The  r61e  and  fate  of  the  connate  water  in  oil  and  gas  sands : Am. 
Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  51,  pp.  587—592,  1916. 

2 Etudes  et  experiences  synth€tiques  sur  le  metamorphisme : Annales  des  mines,  5th 
ser.,  vol.  16,  p.  411,  1859  ; Smithsonian  Inst.  Ann.  Rept.,  1861,  p.  270. 

3 Daubr£e’s  reference  is  “ Explication  de  la  carte  g£olegique  de  France,  vol.  2,  p.  94.” 

4 Reeves,  Frank,  The  absence  of  water  in  certain  sandstones  of  the  Appalachian  oil 
fields  : Econ.  Geology,  vol.  12,  pp.  354-378,  1917. 


OCCURRENCE  OF  OIL,  GAS,  AND  WATER  IN  THE  SANDS.  25 

The  irregular  distribution  and  arrangement  of  the  gas,  oil,  and 
water  content^  of  the  productive  sands  are  due,  no  doubt,  to  a com- 
plex succession  of  events  in  which  rock  movements,  the  displacement 
of  water  by  oil  and  gas,  compacting  and  cementation  of  the  sedi- 
ments, conditions  of  structure,  texture,  and  lenticularity  of  the  beds, 
the  evaporation  of  water  into  moving  and  expanding  gases,  and, 
finally,  the  movements  of  the  fluids  incident  to  gas  and  oil  extrac- 
tion by  man  have  afforded  important  modifying  conditions. 

Surface  waters  are  constantly  percolating  into  the  shallow  rocks, 
so  that  near  the  surface  and  near  the  outcrops  of  the  reservoir  rocks 
the  saline  waters  undergo  dilution  by  incursions  of  water  from  shal- 
lower sources.  The  distribution  of  typical  Appalachian  oil-field 
brines,  having  only  chloride  salinity,  is  therefore  limited  to  those  beds 
in  which  the  excessive  influx  of  surface  water  has  been  prevented. 

MODE  OF  OCCURRENCE  OF  PETROLEUM,  NATURAL 

GAS,  AND  WATER  IN  THE  WATER-BEARING  SANDS. 

OIL,  GAS,  AND  WATER  MIXTURES. 

In  order  to  explain  more  clearly  the  changes  that  the  waters  asso- 
ciated with  petroleum  and  natural  gas  undergo  during  the  extrac- 
tion of  these  substances  from  their  reservoir  rocks,  it  is  necessary  to 
consider  the  mode  of  occurrence.  A fact  that  seems  to  have  been 
generally  overlooked  is  that  in  most  of  the  water-saturated  pay  sands 
in  the  Appalachian  fields  the  natural  segregation  of  gas  and  oil 
above  water  is  very  incomplete,  so  that  gas,  oil,  and  water  occur  in- 
timately mixed  in  the  interstices  of  the  pay  sands.  Munn1  has  de- 
scribed this  mode  of  occurrence  of  petroleum  in  the  Sewickley  quad- 
rangle, in  Pennsylvania,  where  portions  of  tl>e  Hundred-foot  sand 
were  inferred  by  him  to  be  completely  saturated  with  mixtures  of 
oil  and  water.  Field  observations  supplemented  by  inquiries  among 
operators  in  the  Butler  and  Zelienople  quadrangles,  in  western  Penn- 
sylvania, have  led  to  the  conclusion  that  similar  mixtures  occur  in 
the  Hundred- foot  sand  throughout  these  two  quadrangles.  A more 
thorough  investigation  in  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quad- 
rangles, in  southeastern  Ohio,  affords  convincing  evidence  that  this 
is  a common  mode  of  occurrence  of  both  gas  and  oil  in  the  water- 
saturated  sands  in  these  areas.  This  mode  of  occurrence  of  mixtures  _ 
of  gas,  oil,  and  water  involves  a very  indefinite  demarcation  between 
water  and  overlying  mixtures  rich  in  the  hydrocarbons,  the  so-called 
oil-water  surfaces  being  extremely  irregular  gradations  from  mix- 
tures containing  large  proportions  of  oil  and  gas  to  mixtures  less  rich 
in  these  substances  or  to  water  containing  too  little  gas  and  oil  to 

1 Munn,  M.  J.,  Geology  of  the  oil  and  gas  fields  in  the  Sewickley  quadrangle,  Pa. : 
Pennsylvania  Top.  and  Geol.  Survey  Comm.  Kept.  1,  p.  85,  1910. 


26  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

warrant  production.  Where  the  top  of  a typical  water-bearing  pay 
sand  is  relatively  high,  owing  to  folding  or  to  the  lenticular  character 
of  the  sand,  gas  and  oil  are  frequently  found  more  completely  segre- 
gated above  the  water  than  in  the  adjacent  portions  of  the  same  sand 
where  the  mixtures  are  less  rich  in  gas  and  oil. 

Another  important  fact,  brought  forth  by  these  detailed  studies, 
is  that  the  so-called  oil-water  surfaces,  the  irregular  and  indefinite 
contacts  between  oil  and  water,  appear  from  well  logs  to  be  inclined 
in  the  same  direction  as  the  tops  of  the  pay  sands,  though  less  steeply. 
Such  inclined  oil-water  surfaces  in  Oklahoma  have  been  described 
by  Beal.1 

EVIDENCE  OF  THE  OCCURRENCE  OF  OIL,  GAS,  AND  WATER 

MIXTURES. 

Evidence  bearing  upon  the  conditions  above  set  forth  has  been 
procured  by  inquiries  among  oil  and  gas  men,  together  with  detailed 
observations  in  the  different  fields  that  we  have  studied.  Gas,  oil, 
and  water  are  generally  produced  simultaneously  from  wells  drilled 
either  to  the  tops  of  water-saturated  pay  sands  or  only  a few  feet 
into  them.  Many  of  these  wells  continue  to  produce  mixtures  of  oil 
and  water  together  with  gas  for  periods  of  10  to  30  years.  Some  of 
them  flow  at  first  several  hundreds  or  thousands  of  barrels  of  mixed 
oil  and  water  a day.  Those  that  originally  yield  large  quantities  of 
oil  with  practically  no  water  generally  yield  both  water  and  oil  as 
the  initial  rates  of  flow  diminish.  These  phenomena  are  due  partly 
to  the  differential  flow  of  oil  and  water  through  the  sands,  but  it  is 
not  probable  that  great  volumes  of  oil,  gas,  and  water  would  be 
yielded  together  from  the  top  of  a pay  sand  just  tapped  if  the  segre- 
gation of  the  gas  and  oil  above  the  water  were  at  all  complete. 

In  several  fields  it  has  been  possible  to  compare  the  yields  from 
individual  wells  that  were  first  drilled  to  the  tops  of  the  pay  sands 
and  were  subsequently  drilled  deeper  into  the  same  pays.  For  ex- 
ample, a well  near  Miltonsburg,  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County, 
Ohio,  was  first  drilled  3 feet  into  the  Keener  sand  in  November, 
1915,  and  had  an  initial  daily  rate  of  production  of  9 barrels  of  oil 
with  12  barrels  of  salt  water.  After  having  been  pumped  for  three 
months  the  well  was  yielding  only  3J  barrels  of  oil  a day,  though 
the  daily  production  of  water  remained  at  about  12  barrels.  In 
April,  1916,  the  daily  rate  of  oil  production  had  declined  still  fur- 
ther, though  the  water  production  remained  about  the  same.  The 
well  was  then  drilled  6 feet  deeper  into  the  pay  sand  and  yielded 
7 barrels  of  oil  a day,  with  about  18  barrels  of  salt  water.  If  at  this 
place  the  segregation  of  oil  above  the  water  had  been  nearly  com- 

1 Beal,  C.  H.,  Geologic  structure  in  the  Cushing  oil  and  gas  field,  Okla.,  and  its  rela- 
tion to  the  oil,  gas,  and  water  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  658,  1917. 


TEMPERATURE  AND  PRESSURE. 


27 


plete,  the  increase  in  depth  of  the  well  would  probably  have  brought 
about  a relatively  large  increase  in  the  amount  of  water  produced 
and  a correspondingly  small  increase  in  the  amount  of  oil.  On  the 
contrary,  however,  the  production  of  oil  was  increased  100  per  cent 
by  drilling  the  well  deeper,  whereas  the  production  of  water  was  in- 
creased only  50  per  cent.  The  oil  and  water  must  have  been  rather 
intimately  mixed,  a large  proportion  of  the  oil  occurring  below  the 
water  that  was  being  produced  before  the  well  was  deepened. 

The  example  cited  is  typical  of  a large  number  of  such  occurrences 
reported  during  our  field  Studies.  It  must  be  noted,  however,  that 
drilling  wells  deeper  in  water-saturated  sands  is  dangerous,  because 
of  the  large  amounts  of  water  that  may  be  encountered  under  the 
rich  oil  and  water  mixtures  in  the  same  or  underlying  pay  sands. 
Many  valuable  wells  have  been  spoiled  in  this  way. 

TEMPERATURE  AND  PRESSURE. 

The  temperatures  at  which  oil,  gas,  and  water  occur  in  their  reser- 
voir rocks  were  not  measured  during  our  field  investigations  but  are 
shown  by  the  deep-well  temperature  measurements  of  Hallock, 1 
Johnston,2  and  Van  Orstrand  3 to  range  from  18°  or  19°  C.  at  a depth 
of  1,000  feet  to  about  3&°  to  36°  C.  at  a depth  of  3,000  feet.  To  what 
extent  the  rocks  together  with  their  included  waters  and  hydrocar- 
bons have  cooled  subsequent  to  periods  of  regional  deformation  or 
subsequent  to  periods  of  deepest  burial  is  of  course  uncertain,  but  it 
is  reasonable  to  assume  that  the  waters  under  scrutiny  have  been  sub- 
jected to  much  higher  temperatures  than  those  just  quoted.  Such  a 
supposition  is  strengthened  by  the  occurrence  of  highly  heated  saline 
waters  in  the  oil  fields  of  Louisiana  and  Texas. 

Data  relative  to  initial  gas  pressures  encountered  in  various  reser- 
voir rocks  were  furnished  by  operators.  These  pressures  range  from 
only  a few  pounds  to  the  square  inch  in  the  shallow  sands  to  several 
hundred  pounds  in  the  deeper  beds.  In  the  Woodsfield  and  Summer- 
field  quadrangles  the  initial  gas  pressures  may  be  summarized  as 
follows : Big  lime  sand,  400  to  440  pounds  to  the  square  inch ; Keener 
sand,  470  to  480  pounds;  Big  Injun  sand,  500  pounds;  Berea  sand, 
565  to  735  pounds.  In  the  Butler  and  Zelienople  quadrangles  the 
following  initial  gas  pressures  in  the  deeper  sands  are  reported: 
Hundred-foot  sand,  750  to  810  pounds  to  the  square  inch ; Third  sand, 
750  to  820  pounds;  Fourth  sand,  810  to  930  pounds,  and  Fifth  sand, 
860  to  875  pounds. 

1 Hallock,  William,  Subterranean  temperatures  at  Wheeling,  W.  Va.,  and  Pittsburgh, 
Pa.  : School  of  Mines  Quart.,  vol.  18,  pp.  148-153,  1897. 

2 Johnston,  John,  Note  on  the  temperature  in  the  deep  boring  at  Findlay,  Ohio : 
Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  4th  ser.,  yol.  36,  pp.  131-133,  1913. 

3 Van  Orstrand,  C.  E.,  unpublished  manuscript,  U.  S.  Geological  Survey. 


28  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

The  following  table  contains  some  data  from  the  literature  and 
from  our  unpublished  notes  on  gas  pressures : 


Table  5. — Initial  gas  pressures  at  different  depths  in  several  gas  fields. 


Name  of  bed. 

Locality. 

Depth 

(feet). 

Initial 

gas 

pressure 

(pounds 

per 

square 

inch). 

Average 
increase  of 
pressure 
per 

lOOfeet 
(pounds 
per  square 
inch). 

Authority. 

Woodsfield,  Ohio 

1,295 

1,310 

280 

22 

Authors’  notes: 

365 

28 

Data  furnished  by 
various  oil  and 
gas  companies. 
Do. 

Do 

Wayne  Township,  Bel- 
mont County,  Ohio. 
Southeast  corner  of  Ma- 

1,412 

1,465 

400 

28 

Do. 

Do 

laga  Township,  Monroe 
County,  Ohio. 

Wayne  Township,  Bel- 
mont County,  Ohio. 
Woodsfield,  Ohio 

440 

30 

Do. 

Keener  sand 

1,515 

475 

31 

Do. 

Big  Injun  sand 

do 

1,468 

500 

34 

Do. 

Berea  sand .... 

do 

2,090 

1,698 

710 

34 

Do. 

Do 

Summerfield,  Ohio 

565 

33 

Do. 

Do 

Sunsbury  Township,  Mon- 
roe County,  Ohio. 
Summit  Township,  But- 
ler County,  Pa. 

Butler,  Pa ' 

2, 060 

735 

36 

Do. 

Butler  gas  sand 

1,200 

380 

32 

Do. 

Hundred-foot  sand 

1,400 

780 

56 

Do. 

Do. 

Third  sand 1 

1 do i 

1,700 

785 

46 

Do 

do 1 

1,452 

1,800 

600 

41 

Do. 

Fourth  sand 

870 

48 

Do. 

Do 

do ! 

1,568 
1,950 
2, 700 

225 

14 

Do. 

Fifth  sand 

do 

870 

45 

Do. 

“Clinton”  sand 

Harrison  Township,  1 
Knox  County,  Ohio. 

Cleveland,  Ohio 

810 

30 

Do. 

Do 

/ 2,500 
\ 2, 900 
3,000 

800 
1, 100 
425 

J-32-38 

Rogers.® 
Wan  Hom.i 

Do *. 

Newberg,  Ohio ! 

14 

* Trenton”  limestone 

Findlav,  Ohio 

950 

400-450 

42-47 

Orton,  c 

Do 

Kokomo,  Ind 

650 

328 

50 

Do. 

Do 

Cleveland,  Ohio 

4, 500 

37 

0. 82 

Van  Horn.b 

Benson  sand 

Barbour  County,  W.  Va. . 
West  Virginia.! 

4, 090 
2, 989 

1,800 

44 

I.  C.  White.d 
Do. 

(?) 

1,420 

47 

(?) 

Havre,  Mont 

947 

490 

52 

Stebinger. « 
Do. 

(?) 

do 

1,370 

540 

39 

(?) 

Louisiana 

1,650 

1,800 

650 

39 

Knapp./ 

Do.ff 

Unconsolidated  sand 

do 

600 

33 

(?) 

Loco,  Okla 

750 

310 

41 

McMurray  and 
Lewis.A 

a Rogers,  G.  S.,  The  Cleveland  gas  field,  Cuyahoga  County,  Ohio:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  661,  p.  37, 

b Van  Horn,  F.  R.,  Reservoir  gas  and  oil  in  the  vicinity  of  Cleveland,  Ohio:  Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans., 
vol.  56,  p.  839,  1917. 

c Orton,  Edward,  The  Trenton  limestone  as  a source  of  petroleum  and  natural  gas  in  Ohio  and  Indiana: 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Eighth  Ann.  Rept.,  p.  645,  1889. 

d Personal  communication. 

eStebinger,  Eugene,  Possibilities  of  oil  and  gas  in  north-central  Montana:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  641, 
p.  73, 1916. 

/ Knapp,  I.  N.,  discussion  of  paper  by  R.  W.  Johnson,  The  role  and  fato  of  connate  water  in  oil  and  gas 
sands:  Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  51,  p.  593,  1915. 

g Knapp,  I.  N.,  discussion  of  paper  by  W.  H.  Kobbe,  The  recovery  of  petroleum  from  unconsolidated 
sands:  Idem,  vol.  56.  p.  825,  1917. 

h McMurray,  W.  F..  and  Lewis,  J.  O.,  Underground  wastes  in  oil  and  gas  fields  and  methods  of  preven- 
tion: Bur.  Mines  Tech.  Paper  130,  p.  13, 1916. 


v 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS. 


29 


Dr.  I.  C.  White 1 reports  gas  pressures  in  West  Virginia  ranging 
from  600  pounds  to  the  square  inch  in  the  Big  Injun  sand  to  as  much 
as  1,800  pounds  in  a sand  4,090  feet  deep.  Rogers2  reported  gas 
pressures  of  800  to  1,100  pounds  to  the  square  inch  in  the  so-called 
Clinton  sand  near  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

Table  5 shows  that  in  several  localities  there  is  a rough  proportion 
between  initial  gas  pressure  and  depth,  especially  in  the  deeper  sands. 
It  is  well  recognized  that  gases  forming  from  organic  matter  develop 
pressure  when  confined.  To  what  extent  these  gas  pressures  or  “ rock 
pressures  ” are  due  to  this  or  other  causes  is  problematic,  but  whatever 
the  source  or  origin  of  the  gases  and  the  causes  of  the  pressure,  the 
table  suggests  that  there  have  been  adjustments  of  pressure  according 
to  depth.  It  seems  probable  that  hydrostatic  pressure,  weight  of 
superincumbent  strata,  rock  movements,  deep-seated  thermal  con- 
ditions, the  long-qontinued  formation  of  natural  gases,  and  the  re- 
sistance to  fluid  movements  through  the  strata  all  enter  into  the 
causes  for  “ rock  pressure.”  In  other  words,  “ rock  pressures  ” are 
not  necessarily  “ fossil  pressures  ” but  represent  a summation  of 
effects  from  remote  time  up  to  the  present. 

CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  APPALACHIAN  OIL  AND 
GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 

DEEP-SEATED  BRINES  AND  THEIR  COMPARISON  WITH  SEA 

WATER. 

As  the  result  of  our  studies  we  have  concluded  that  the  deep-  \ 
seated  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field  brines  are,  in  part,  the  deriva-  J 
tives  of  former  ocean  water.  Certain  fundamental  differences  in 
composition,  however,  exist  between  ocean  water  and  the  waters 
under  consideration.  These  differences  have  been  noted  in  the 
literature3  and  are  strikingly  shown  by  Table  6.  In  the  part  of  the 
table  on  page  30  analyses  of  the  dissolved  solids  are  expressed  as  per- 
centages of  the  several  constituents.  The  proportions  of  total  dis- 
solved solids  in  the  different  waters  are  also  shown  here,  in  terms  of 
grams  per  kilogram  or  grams  per  liter.  On  page  31  are  shown  ratios 
of  some  of  the  constituents  to  chlorine.  As  the  chlorine  content  of 
the  dissolved  solids  in  the  waters  under  comparison  is  more  uniform 

1 Personal  communication. 

2 Rogers,  G.  S.,  The  Cleveland  gas  field,  Cuyahoga  County,  Ohio  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  661,  p.  37,  1917. 

8 Hunt,  T.  S.,  Chemical  and  geological  essays,  pp.  11-12,  Boston,  1875.  Palmer, 
Chase,  The  geochemical  interpretation  of  water  analyses  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  479, 
Table  2,  opposite  p.  14,  1911.  Washburne,  C,  W.,  Chlorides  in  oil-field  waters  : Am. 
Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans,  vol.  48,  pp.  687-693,  1914. 


30  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

than  that  of  the  other  constituents  or  of  the  total  dissolved  solids 
themselves,  the  ratios  of  the  different  constituents  to  chlorine  are 
used  as  a basis  for  comparison.  The  ratios  are  first  stated  in  terms 
of  the  actual  percentages  of  the  dissolved  solids.  In  the  lower  part 
of  the  table  these  ratios  are  expressed  in  terms  of  the  chemical 
reacting  values  of  the  constituents.  The  principle  of  reacting  values 
has  been  applied  in  the  interpretation 4 and  comparison  of  water 
analyses  by  several  American  investigators,  among  whom  may  be 
mentioned  Stabler,1  Palmer,2  Spencer,3  Emmons  and  Harrington,4 
Van  Winkle,5  Waring,6  Clapp,7  Siebenthal,8  and  Kogers.9 

Table  6. — Comparison  between  ocean  water  and  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field 

brines. 


Ocean  water. 


Bitterns 

cSSnt?atio?of  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field  waters, 
ocean  water.  I 


1 

2 

3 

4 

Pennsylvania. 

Ohio. 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 



0. 01 

0.06 

0.41 

1 

.03 

Trace. 

.08 

0.06 

0.05 

.01 

a. 10 

.10 

.70 

1.20 

1.18 

0.26 

8.57 

9.56 

8.40 

8. 19 

5. 18 

.16 

1.31 

Trace. 

None. 

Trace. 

Trace. 

3.71 

3.59 

3.72 

10. 05 

1.46 

.94 

1.47 

1.30 

1.63 

30.54 

31.08 

32.06 

20.39 

27.34 

24.50 

27.59 

27.82 

29.88 

1.11 

.71 

.78 

2.25 

.20 

1.97 

.10 

.49 

.96 

.05 

.18 

None. 

None. 

None. 

None. 

None. 

.31 

None. 

None. 

.03 

.70 

7.68 

7.72 

5.78 

14.64 

.02 

.02 

.10 

None. 

None. 

55.21 

54.39 

56.18 

49.99 

61.97 

61.38 

62.29 

62.00 

60.44 

.19 

1.15 

1.22 

2.68 

.16 

.26 

100.  00 

100.00 

100.00 

100.00 

100.00 

100.00 

100.00 

100.00 

100.00 

1 £r 

r-o  co 
rO 

} 37.66 

275. 46 

337. 12 

122. 16 

263.64 

131. 89 

b 141.13 

& 53. 06 

Si02 

(Al,  Fe)203. 

Fe" 

Al 

v^Ca 

Sr 

Ba 

Mg 

Na 

K 

C03 

HCOg 

\^S04 

Cl 

Br,  I 


Total  dissolved  solids, 
grams  per  kilogram. . 


0 Total  iron. 


6  Grams  per  liter. 


1 Stabler,  Herman,  Industrial  water  analyses  and  their  interpretation  by  the  engi- 
neer : Eng.  News,  vol.  60,  p.  355,  1908. 

2 Palmer,  Chase,  The  geochemical  interpretation  of  water  analyses : U.  S.  Geol. 

Survey  Bull.  479,  pp.  12-14,  1911  ; Mineralogy  of  waters  from  artesian  wells  at  Charles- 

ton, S.  C.  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  90,  pp.  92-93,  1914. 

3 Spencer,  A.  C.,  Chalcocite  enrichment : Econ.  Geology,  vol.  8,  p.  646,  1913. 

4 Emmons,  W.  H.,  and  Harrington,  G.  L.,  A comparison  of  waters  of  mines  and  hot 
springs : Econ.  Geology,  vol.  8,  p.  661,  1913. 

5 Van  Winkle,  Walton,  Quality  of  the  surface  waters  of  Washington : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  339,  pp.  34-35,  1914 ; Quality  of  the  surface  waters  of 
Oregon  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  363,  pp.  37-38,  1914. 

6 Waring,  G.  A.,  Springs  of  California  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  338, 

pp.  22-23,  1914. 

7 Clapp,  C.  H.,  Sharp  Point  hot  spring,  Vancouver  Island,  British  Columbia  : Canada 
Geol.  Survey  Summary  Kept,  for  1913,  pp.  80-83,  1914. 

8 Siebenthal,  C.  E.,  Origin  of  the  zinc  and  lead  deposits  of  the  Joplin  region,  Mis- 
souri, Kansas,  and  Oklahoma  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  606,  1915. 

9 Rogers,  G.  S.,  The  interpretation  of  water  analyses  by  the  geologist : Econ.  Geology, 
vol.  12,  pp.  56-88,  1917  ; Chemical  relations  of  the  oil-field  waters  in  San  Joaquin  Valley, 
Cal.  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  653,  1917. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS. 


31 


Table  6. — Comparison  between  ocean  icater  and  Appalachian  oil,  etc. — Contcl. 


Ratios  of  the  percentages  of  certain  constituents  to  that  of  chlorine. 


Ocean  water. 

Bitterns 
derived  from 
concentration  of 
ocean  water. 

Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field  waters. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

Pennsylvania. 

Ohio. 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Na 

0. 553 

0.571 

0.571 

0.408 

0. 441 

0. 399 

0.443 

0. 449 

0.494 

Ca 

.022 

.022 

.005 

.000 

.138 

.156 

.135 

.132 

.086 

Mg.... 

.067 

.066 

.066 

.201 

.024 

.015 

.024 

.021 

.027 

S04 

.139 

.142 

.103 

.292 

.0003 

.0003 

.002 

.000 

.000 

Ratios  of  the  reacting  values  a of  certain  constituents  to  that  of  chlorine. 

[Per  thousand  of  chlorine.] 


Na 

852.5 

880.2 

880.2 

628.9 

679.8 

615.1 

682.9 

692.1 

761.5. 

Ca 

38.4 

38.4 

8. 19 

244.9 

275.7 

238.7 

233.8 

151.7 

Mg 

196.6 

192.5 

193.0 

586.2 

68.8 

44.7 

68.8 

61.1 

78.6 

SO4 

102.7 

104.9 

76.0 

216.1 

.2 

2 

1.19 

.0 

.0 

a The  meaning  of  the  term  “reacting  value”  is  explained  by  Herman  Stabler  (Some  stream  waters  of 
the  western  United  States:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  "Water-Supply  Paper  274,  p.  167,  1911)  as  follows:  “If  the 
number  of  parts  per  million  (or  per  thousand  or  per  hundred)  of  each  radicle  found  by  analysis  be  multi- 
plied by  its  reaction  coefficient  (reciprocal  of  combining  weight),  a number  will  be  obtained  which  may 
be  called  the  'reacting  value’  for  that  analysis.  ” 

1.  Mean  of  77  analyses  of  ocean  water  from  many  localities,  collected  by  the  Challenger  expedition, 
W.  Dittmar,  analyst.  Challenger  Kept.,  Physics  and  chemistry,  vol.  1,  p.  203,  1884.  Total  dissolved 
solids,  3.301  to  3.737  per  cent.  Analysis  revised  to  show  bicarbonates  by  R.  C.  Wells,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Professional  Paper  120-A,  p.  15, 1918. 

2.  Analysis  of  Mediterranean  ocean  water.  Specific  gravity  of  water,  1.0258.  J.  Usiglio,  analyst. 
Annales  chim.  phys.,  3d  ser.,  vol.  27,  pp.  92-172,  1849.  Analysis  reduced  to  ionic  form  and  to  percentages 
of  total  solids  by  F.  W.  Clarke,  Data  of  geochemistry,  3d  ed.,  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  616,  p.  219,  1916. 

3.  Analysis  of  Mediterranean  ocean  water  concentrated  from  density  of  1.0258  to  density  of  1.21.  Refer- 
ence same  as  that  for  2. 

4.  Analysis  of  Mediterranean  ocean  water  concentrated  from  density  of  1.0258  to  density  of  1.264. 
Reference  same  as  that  for  2. 

5.  Analysis  of  brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand,  probably  of  early  Mississippian  age;  depth,  1,170  feet±. 
Sample  collected  from  an  old  oil  well,  August  15, 1915,  on  McGrath  farm,  Center  Township,  Butler  County, 
Pa.  Specific  gravity  of  water,  1.0876.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst.  The  amount  of  sample  available  for  analysis 
was  insufficient  for  a direct  determination  of  the  total  carbon  dioxide,  if  present. 

6.  Analysis  of  brine  from  sandstone  of  early  Devonian  age,  depth  6,260±  to  6,300  feet.  From  gas  well 
8 miles  southwest  of  Imperial,  Washington  County,  Pa.  Specific  gravity  of  water,  1.211.  George  Steiger, 
analyst.  Quoted  by  F.  W.  Clarke  (Water  analyses  from  the  laboratory  of  the  United  States  Geological 
Survey:  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  364,  p.  9, 1914). 

7.  Analysis  of  brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand,  probably  of  early  Mississippian  age,  depth  1,359  feet. 
Sample  collected  by  G.  B.  Richardson  from  old  oil  well  on  farm  of  Charles  Hoffman,  5 miles  northeast  of 
Butler,  Pa.  W.  B.  Hicks  and  R.  K.  Bailey,  analysts.  Quoted  by  G.  B.  Richardson  (Note  on  the  diffu- 
sion of  sodium  chloride  in  Appalachian  oil-field  waters:  Washington  Acad.  Sci.  Jour.,  vol.  7,  pp.  73-75, 
1917). 

8.  Analysis  of  brine  from  Big  lime  sand,  of  late  Mississippian  age,  depth  1,431  to  1,444  feet.  Sample 
collected  by  R.  Van  A.  Mills,  April  24,  1915,  from  an  old  oil  well  in  an  old  oil  and  gas  field,  well  No.  5 on 
F.  Mellotte  farm,  in  the  northeast  corner  of  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  S.  C.  Dinsmore, 
analyst. 

9.  Analysis  of  brine  from  Berea  sand,  of  early  Mississippian  age,  depth  1,748  to  1,760  feet.  Sample 
collected  by  R.  Van  A.  Mills,  April  28,  1915,  from  a gas  well  14  months  old,  on  the  Gulic  farm.  1 mile  west 
of  Summerfield,  Marion  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 


It  will  be  observed,  by  referring  to  Table  6 and  to  the  analyses 
quoted  on  pages  33-39,  that  the  concentration  of  the  Appalachian  oil 
and  gas  field  brines  ranges  from  slightly  less  to  several  times  greater 
than  that  of  ocean  water.  The  ratios  of  sodium  to  chlorine,  mag- 
nesium to  chlorine,  and  sulphate  to  chlorine  are  all  smaller  in  the  oil 
and  gas  field  waters  than  in  ocean  water,  sulphate  being  compara- 
tively absent  in  the  oil  and  gas  field  waters.  In  contrast  to  this, 


32  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


the  ratios  of  calcium  to  chlorine  in  the  oil  and-  gas  field  waters  are 
much  greater  than  in  ocean  water. 

By  comparing  the  analyses  of  bitterns  derived  from  the  evapora- 
tion of  ocean  water  (3  and  4 in  Table  6)  with  the  analyses  of  oil  and 
gas  field  waters  shown  in  the  same  table,  it  will  be  observed  that  the 
differences  between  these  types  of  brine  become  more  striking  as  the 
evaporation  of  the  ocean  water  progresses.  This  is  due  to  the  order 
of  deposition  of  the  dissolved  constituents  from  ocean  Avater  during 
concentration.  Calcium  is  deposited  as  carbonate  and  sulphate,  but 
magnesium  is  retained  longer  in  solution,  the  proportion  of  this  con- 
stituent being  consequently  increased  as  calcium  is  eliminated. 
After  the  elimination  of  calcium,  the  proportion  of  sulphate  remain- 
ing in  solution  increases,  as  is  shown  by  analysis  4,  Table  6.  The 
sodium  content  of  some  bitterns  derived  from  ocean  water  may  be 
comparable  with  the  sodium  content  of  oil  and  gas  field  brines,  but 
the  other  differences  are  none  the  less  pronounced.  These  items  make 
it  apparent  that  the  oil  and  gas  field  brines  under  consideration  have 
not  originated  merely  from  the  concentration  of  water  such  as  now 
constitutes  the  ocean. 

By  applying  Palmer’s  system  of  classification,1  the  reader  will  see 
(Table  7)  that  the  properties  of  reaction  of  all  the  oil  and  gas  field 
waters  whose  analyses  are  shown  in  Table  6 lie  approximately  be- 
tween those  of  normal  ocean  water  and  the  concentrated  ocean  water 
represented  by  analysis  4.  The  properties  expressed  under  9,  Table  7, 
approach  most  nearly  those  of  normal  ocean  water,  and  the  proper- 
ties expressed  under  6,  Table  7,  approach  most  nearly  those  of  the 
concentrated  ocean  water  (4).  Although,  as  expressed  by  Palmer’s 
classification,  the  properties  of  reaction  of  the  waters  under  compari- 
son have  striking  similarities,  it  must  be  noted,  as  shown  in  the  pre- 
ceding discussion,  that  the  saltness  of  normal  and  concentrated  ocean 
waters  is  due  partly  to  sulphate,  whereas  the  saltness  of  oil  and  gas 
field  waters  is  due  almost  entirely  to  chloride.  It  should  also  be 
noted  that  the  proportion  of  magnesium  in  the  constituents  of  nor- 
mal and  concentrated  ocean  water  is  greater  and  the  proportion  of 
calcium  is  less  than  in  the  constituents  of  the  oil  and  gas  field  brines.^ 
Water  with  the  properties  expressed  under  9,  Table  7,  and  the  com- 
position expressed  under  9,  Table  6,  might  be  derived  from  normal 
ocean  water  by  concentration  if  practically  all  the  sulphate  and  part 
of  the  magnesium  and  sodium  were  removed  and  a certain  amount  of 
calcium  added.  In  the  succeeding  pages  we  show  some  of  the  prob- 
abilities regarding  these  changes. 

1 Palmer,  Chase,  The  geochemical  interpretation  of  water  analyses : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  479,  1911. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS. 


33 


Table  7. — Properties  of  reaction  of  ocean  water  and  of  Appalachian  oil  and 
gas  field  waters,  expressed  in  percentages A 


Properties  of  reaction. 

Ocean  water. 

Bitterns  de- 
rived from  the 
concentration 
of  ocean  water. 

Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field  waters. 

Pennsylvania. 

Ohio. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Primary  salinity 

78.8 

79.4 

81.6 

53.2 

69.2 

66.5 

69.0 

70.4 

77.2 

Secondary  salinity hr. 

20.8 

20.2 

18.4 

46.8 

30.8 

33.5 

31.0 

29.6 

22.2 

Secondary  alkalinity 

.4 

.4 

.0 

.0 

.0 

.0 

.0 

.0 

.6 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

a The  waters  whose  properties  of  reaction  are  shown  in  this  table  are  the  same  as  those  shown  in  Table  6. 


ANALYSES  OF  APPALACHIAN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 

Table  8. — Analyses  of  waters  from  the  Hundred-foot  sand. 


Grams  per  liter. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Si02 

0. 24 

0. 18 

0. 15 

0.11 

0.  78 

0. 01 

Fe.: 

0. 07 

.01 

0. 04 

.02 

.02 

a.  11 

A1 

.49 

.26 

.12 

b.  12 

.57 

b.  04 

Ca 

12. 21 

10. 29 

10.85 

7.  25 

7.48 

13.59 

11.40 

Sr 

c.  21 

Mg 

2. 14 

1.85 

1.71 

1.35 

1.35 

1.46 

1.95 

Na 

40. 10 

33.76 

31.46 

27.59 

27.37 

41.74 

36.30 

K 

. 14 

.26 

2.67 

.16 

Present. 

2.13 

.26 

hco3 

S04 

Cl 

Br.... 

! None. 
.14 
90. 54 

.02 
.12 
78. 78 

.03 

.22 

77.39 

.03 

None. 

59.61 

.02 

None. 

58.52 

.07 

None. 

96.56 

None. 

Trace. 

82.35 

.22 

Specific  gravitv 

145.34 
d 1. 102 

125. 82 

124.81 

96. 28 

94.97 

156. 92 

132. 85 
1.088 

Reacting  values,  in  milligram  equivalents  per  liter.* 


Fe 

2.5 
610.5 
176.1 

1,743.4 

3.6 

0.5 

513.7 

152.3 

1,468.0 

6.0 

1.2 

541.7 

140.7 
1,368.0 

68.0 

1.0 

679.0 

120.0 
1,815.0 

54.0 

0.4 
569.1 
160. 4 
1,578.0 
6.7 
4.9 

Ca 

362.0 

111.0 
1, 200.  0 

4.1 

374.0 

111.0 
1,190.0 

Mg 

Na 

K 

Sr 

Total  basic  radicles 

HCOg 

2,536.1 

2, 140.5 

2,119.6 

1,677.1 

1, 675. 0 

2, 669. 0 

2,319.5 

.4 

2.6 

2, 222. 0 

.5 

4.5 

2, 182. 0 

1.0 
None. 
2, 723. 0 

None. 
Trace. 
2, 322. 0 
3.0 

S04 

2.9 

2,553.4 

Cl.. 

1,681.0 

1,  650. 0 

Br 

Total  acid  radicles 

2,556.3 

2,225.0  | 2,187.0 

1,681.0 

1, 650. 0 

2, 724.0 

2, 326. 0 

o Ferrous  iron. 
b Al203+Fe203. 
c Barium  absent. 
d Calculated  from  content  of  salts. 

« It  is  believed  that  these  terms  will  be  clear  without  elaborate  explanation.  A solution  containing  a 
milligram  equivalent  per  liter  would  be  “thousandth  normal”  in  the  terms  of  analytical  chemistry,  a 
milligram  equivalent  of  any  element  or  radicle  being  as  many  milligrams  of  the  element  or  radicle  as  are 
equivalent  in  capacity  for  chemical  reaction  to  1.008  milligrams  of  hydrogen  or  8.000  milligrams  of  oxygen. 

91818°— 19 3 


34  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


Table  8. — Analyses  of  waters  from  the  Hundred-foot  sand — Continued. 


Reacting  values,  in  per  cent. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

Sr  

0.1 

12.2 

3.5 

34.1 

.1 

Ca 

12.0 

3.4 

34.5 

.1 

.1 

49.9 

11.6 

3.4 

34.9 

.1 

12.4 

3.2 

32.8 
1.6 

.1 

49.9 

10.8 

3.3 

35.8 

.1 

11.3 
3.4 

35.3 

12.4 
2.2 

34.4 
1.0 

Mg: 

Na 

K.  . 

S04 

Cl.'. 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

49.9 

.1 

Br. . . 

100. 0 | 100.  0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

Approximate  percentages  of  principal  salts. 


CaCl2 - 

MgCl2 

NaCl 

KC1 

23.2 

5.8 

70.8 

.2 

22.5 
5.7 

71.5 
.3 

23.9 

5.3 

66.7 

4.1 

21.0 

5.5 

73.2 

.3 

22.6 

5.6 

71.8 

25.0 

3.8 

68.6 

2.6 

24.1 

5.7 

69.9 

.3 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

160. 0 

100.0 

1.  Brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand;  depth  1,359  feet;  well  No.  2,  Charles  Hoffman  farm, 
Oakland  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  Sample  collected  in  October,  1915.  Na  and  K 
determined  by  W.  B.  Hicks ; the  rest  of  the  determinations  by  R.  K.  Bailey,  Econ. 
Geology,  vol.  12,  p.  39,  1917. 

2.  Brine  from  Ilundred-foot  sand;  depth  1,018  to  1,035  feet;  well  No.  1,  Harlan  Book 
farm,  Muddy  Creek,  Clay  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  This  is  a new  oil  well  which 
had  just  been  completed  when  the  sample  was  collected  in  October,  1915.  Well  drilled 
by  Parker  & Edwards  Co.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

' 3.  Brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand ; well  No.  2,  Mary  B.  Heist  farm,  Center  and 
Butler  townships,  Butler  County,  Pa.  Sample  collected  in  September,  1915.  S.  C. 
Dinsmore,  analyst. 

4.  Brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand ; depth  1,361  to  1,387  feet ; well  No.  3,  W.  H. 
Cooper  farm,  Penn  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  This  was  an  oil  well  drilled  about 
one  year  prior  to  the  collecting  of  the  sample.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

5.  Same  water  as  No.  4.  Chas«  Palmer,  analyst. 

6.  Brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand,  well  on  the  Charles  Kaiser  farm,  eastern  part  of 
Summit  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  Sample  collected  in  September,  1915.  S.  C. 
Dinsmore,  analyst. 

7.  Brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand;  depth  l,170±feet;  old  McCarrier  & Waid  well  on 
McGrath  farm,  Pine  tract,  Center  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  Sample  collected  in 
August,  1915.  Sample  was  clear  when  collected,  but  reddish-yellow  precipitate  formed 
on  standing  24  hours.  R.  C,  Wells,  analyst. 


Table  9. — Analyses  of  waters  from  various  sands. 


Grams  per  liter. 


8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

* 

Si02-  _ - - . 

0.019 

.007 

1.87 

.02 

0.080 

Trace. 

.011 

.050 

0.05 
0 None. 

b.  05 
2.89 

c.  07 
.80 

19.50 
.23 
.26 
None. 
38. 54 
.16 

0.09 
* .02 
. 15 
11.56 

0. 02 
a.  08 
None. 
5. 58 
.04 
1.03 
23. 85 
.25 
.32 
None. 
50.33 
.15 

0.08 

.01 

.56 

11.36 

Fe 

Present. 

Present. 

0.89 

A1 

Ca 

.060 

7.58 

Sr 

Mg 

.32 
9. 81 

.030 
2. 640 

1.62 
30. 45 

.010. 

.299 

.055 

.261 

None. 

.435 

1.83 
39.  27 
.70 
.03 
None. 
87.50 

1.63 

38.32 

.51 

.03 

None. 

84.71 

Na 

K 

hco3 

.16 

.102 

None. 

4.200 

.09 

None. 

64.93 

S04 

Cl 

17.28 

Br 

Total 

28.  46 

7. 123 

106.56 

1.201 

62.55 

1.044 

141.15 
d 1. 102 

81.65 

1.056 

137. 21 

Specific  gravity 

« Ferrous  iron. 


6 Al203+Fe203. 


c Barium  absent. 


d Calculated  from  salt  content. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS.  35 


Table  9. — Analyses  of  waters  from  vai'ious  sands — Continued. 

Reacting  values,  in  milligram  equivalents  per  liter. 


8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

Fe  

1.0 

378.0 

133.0 
1,324.0 

None. 

144.3 

65.8 

847.8 

5.9 

1.6 

0.6 

577.9 

150.6 

1,707.0 

17.8 

3.0 

278.6 

84.8 

1,037.0 

6.4 

.9 

0.5 

567.8 

134.0 

1,666.0 

13.0 

Ca 

22.3 

25.9 

426.4 

3.0 

2.5 

114.8 

2.5 

.8 

13.0 

1.4 

Mg 

Na 

K 

Sr 

Total  basic 
radicles 

474.6 

120.3 

1,836.0 

17.7 

1,067.4 

2, 453.9 

1, 410.  7 

2,381.3 

hco3 

a2.5 

4.3 

None. 

12.3 

4.3 

None. 

1,087.0 

2.0 

1.0 
None. 
2, 468.0 

5.3 

None. 

1,419.0 

1.9 

1.0 

None. 

2,389.0 

SO* 

Cl 

487.3 

118.5 

1,831.0 

Br 

Total  acid 
radicles 

489.  8 

118.5 

1,831.0 

16.6 

1,093.3 

2, 469. 0 

1, 426. 2 

2,390.0 

Reacting  values,  in  per  cent. 


Fe 

0. 1 

Ca 

2.3 

1.2 

10.3 

7.5 

6.6 

11.8 

9.8 

♦ 11.9 

Mg 

2.6 

1. 1 

3.6 

2.4 

3. 1 

3.0 

3.0 

2.8 

35.0 

n! 

45.1 

47.7 

36.1 

35.9 

40.0 

34.8 

36.9 

K 

4.2 

.3 

.4 

.2 

.3 

hco3 

.2 

12.9 

.2 

.2 

Cl 

49.8 

50.0 

50.0 

37.1 

49.7 

50.0 

49.8 

50.0 

Br 

.1 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

Approximate  percentages  of  principal  salts. 


CaCl2 

4.4 

2.4 

12.3 

14.5 

12.7 

22.7 

18.9 

23.0 

MgCl2 

4.3 

1.8 

6.6 

4.0 

5.0 

5.1 

4.9 

4.7 

NaCl I 

KC1 

} 91.3 

95.8 

81.1 

/ 69.9 

\ 11.6 

81.6 

71.3 

.9 

75. 6 
.6 

71.6 

.7 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

j 100. 0 

100.0 

100.0 

a Includes  HS. 


8.  Brine  from  Five  Hundred-foot  sand ; depth  420  feet ; well  No.  7,  Vorhies  farm, 
Center  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected  in  December,  1915.  The  well 
from  which  the  sample  was  collected  is  one  of  a group  of  several  shallow-sand  wells 
that  yielded  small  amounts  of  oil  for  a few  years.  In  March,  1917,  the  well  was  not 
being  pumped.  The  sample  was  clear  when  collected,  but  a rusty  yellow  precipitate 
formed  during  the  first  24  hours  after  the  water  was  collected.  On  standing  a few 
weeks  this  yellowish  precipitate  was  replaced  by  a black  precipitate  of  ferrous  sulphide. 
It  is  not  known  whether  the  iron  was  originally  present  or  was  contributed  by  the  iron 
piping  in  the  well,  but  it  is  evident  that  a soluble  sulphide  was  present  and  that  it  re- 
acted with  the  iron  upon  standing.  Chase  Palmer,  analyst. 

9.  Brine  from  Cow  Run  sand  ; depth  900  feet ; well  of  American  Oil  Development  Co. 
on  Cave  Run,  Pleasants  County,  W.  Va.  Production  of  water  2 barrels  daily.  S.  C. 
Dinsmore,  analyst.  Reeves.  Frank,  Econ,  Geology,  vol.  12,  p.  374,  1917. 

10.  Brine  from  Salt  sand  ; depth  1,600  feet ; S.  E.  Elliot  well  No.  12,  South  Penn  Oil 
Co.,  Bell  Run,  Lafayette  district,  Wirt  County,  W.  Va.  Production  of  water  25  barrels 
daily.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst.  Reeves,  Frank,  op.  cit.,  p.  374. 

11.  Artesian  water  from  shallow-sand  well  on  Neigh  farm,  Summit  Township,  Butler 
County,  Pa.  Water  comes  from  depth  of  about  350  feet.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

12.  Brine  from  Maxton  sand  ; depth  905  feet ; well  No.  1,  David  Bintz  farm,  sec.  33. 
Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  near  Monroefield.  Well  drilled  in  August, 
1912  ; sample  collected  in  November,  1916.  Very  dark  green  to  black  oil,  containing 
brownish-yellow  specks  collected  with  the  water.  Rust-colored  precipitate  at  bottom 
of  bottle  after  standing  48  hours.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst. 

13.  Brine  from  Big  lime  sand ; depth  1,431  to  1,444  feet ; well  No.  5,  F.  Mellotte 
farm,  northeast  corner  of  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected 
April  24,  1915.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

14.  Brine  from  Big  lime  sand  ; depth  1,339  to  1,349  feet ; well  No.  1,  Egger  Bros.’ 
farm,  sec.  10,  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  near  Miltonsburg.  Well  com- 
pleted in  January,  1916  ; sample  collected  in  September,  1916.  Gas  well,  initial  open- 
flow  production  1,500,000  cubic  feet  a day ; initial  gas  pressure  360  pounds  to  the 
square  inch.  Production  of  water  1£  barrels  a week.  Black  deposit  on  inside  of  bottle 
in  air  space  just  above  water,  also  dirty-gray  flocculent  precipitate  floating  at  top  of 
water  and  a somewhat  lighter-colored  gray  flocculent  precipitate  at  bottom  of  bottle. 
No  oil  was  present.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst. 

15.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth  1,451  to  1,469  feet;  well  No.  2,  J.  R.  Scott  farm, 
near  Jerusalem,  Sunsbury  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected  April  24, 
1915.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 


36  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


Table  10. — Analyses  of  waters  from  the  Keener  sand. 


Grams  per  liter. 


16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

0.08 

.01 

.35 

5.68 

0. 14 
.02 
.62 
12.98 

0.05 
a.  01 
&.05 
2.98 
c.  08 
.82 
19.85 
.23 
.17 
None. 
38. 89 
.11 

0.06 

0.04 

0.02 

.04 

Fe 

A1 

b.  08 
11.20 

Ca 

8.02 

8.34 

10.84 

Sr  

Mg 

1.04 
22. 84 
.60 
.08 
None. 
48.46 

1.69 
43.40 
2. 47 
.04 
None. 
97.96 

1. 42 
28.76 

1.82 
38. 64 

1.48 

29.74 

2.99 

41.53 

Na 

K 

HCO3 

.03 

.04 

.03 
None. 
64. 10 

.03 

.01 

91.70 

SO4 

Cl 

62. 48 

83.88 

Br..  .. 

Specific  gravity 

79.15 

159. 32 

100.71 

63.24 

1.043 

135.72 

103.73 

147. 16 

Reacting  values,  in  milligram  equivalents  per  liter. 


Fe  . 

0.4 

0.6 

Trace. 

1.0 

Ca 

283.9 

648.0 

400.3 

148.8 

559. 2 

416.0 

541.0 

Mg 

85.5 

139.5 

116.9 

67.5 

149.7 

122.0 

240.0 

Na 

993.0 

1,887.0 

1,250.0 

863.1 

1,680.0 

1,293.0 

1,806.0 

K 

15.0 

63.0 

5.9 

Sr..  . . 

1.9 

Total  basic  radicles 

1,377.8 

2,738.1 

1,767.2 

1,087.2 

2, 388. 9 

1,831.0 

2,594.0 

HCO 

1.0 

.6 

.6 

2.8 

.7  1 

Trace. 

SO4...  

None. 

None. 

None. 

None. 

Cl. 

1, 367. 0 

2,763.0 

1,762.0 

1,097.0 

2, 366. 0 

1,808.0 

2,586.0 

Br 

1.4 

Total  acid  radicles 

1,368.0 

2,763.6 

1,762.6 

1, 101. 2 

2,366.7 

1,808.0 

2,586.0 

Reacting  values 

, in  per  cent. 

Sr 

0.1 

Ca 

10.4 

11.7 

11.3 

6.7 

11.8 

11.5 

10.5 

Mg 

3.1 

2.5 

3.3 

3.1 

3.2 

3.4 

4.7 

Na 

36.0 

34.7 

35.4 

39.8 

35.0 

35.1 

34.8 

K 

.5 

1.1 

.3 

HC03 

.1 

Cl 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

49.9 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

Approximate 

percentages  of  principal  salts. 

CaCh 

20.2 

22.6 

22.0 

13.2 

23.0 

22.5 

20.5 

MgCl2 

5.2 

4.1 

5. 6 

5. 1 

5.3 

5. 6 

8.0 

NaCl 

73.2 

70.3 

72.4 

81.0 

71.7 

71.9 

71.5 

KC1 

1.4 

3.0 

.7 



100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0  1 

1C0.0 

100.0 

100.0 

a Ferrous  iron.  b AI2O3+  Fe203.  c Barium  absent. 

16.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth  1,465  to  1,471  feet;  well  No.  1,  Schroeder  heirs’  farm,  1$  miles  south 
of  Miltonsburg,  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Rate  of  production  from  this  new  well,  150 
barrels  of  oil  a day,  with  large  amounts  of  gas  and  small  amounts  of  brine  when  the  sample  was  collected, 
April24, 1915.  The  wellwas  the  first  in  the  field  and  was  drilled  in  March,  1915.  S.C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

17.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth  870  to  880  feet;  well  No.  2,  Mancel  Secrest  farm,  1^  miles  southeast 
of Chaseville,  Seneca  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected  May  1,  1915.  S.  C.  Dinsmore, 
analyst. 

18.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  well  No.  1 (gas  well),  A.  Clause  farm,  NE.  J sec.  10,  Malaga  Township, 
Monroe  County,  Ohio,  near  Miltonsburg.  Well  completed  February  18,  1916;  sample  collected  in  Sep- 
tember, 1916.  Chase  Palmer,  analyst. 

19.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth  1,302  feet;  well  No.  4 (oil  well),  C.  J.  Clause  farm,  sec.  27,  Malaga 
Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  near  Monroefield.  Well  drilled  in  July,  1913;  sample  collected  No- 
vember 7, 1916.  Dull  amber-colored  oil  was  collected  with  the  water.  The  water  was  clear  when  col- 
lected, but  a reddish  rusty  precipitate  settled  at  the  bottom  of  the  bottle  within  24  hours.  R.  C.  Wells, 
analyst. 

20.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth  1,451  to  1,469  feet;  well  No.  2,  J.  R.  Scott  farm,  NE.  \ sec.  23,  Suns- 
bury  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  half  a mile  southeast  from  Jerusalem  village.  Old  oil  and  gas 
well,  drilled  in  1904.  The  well  is  reported  to  have  flowed  and  sprayed  oil  at  the  rate  of  350  barrels  a day 
with  very  little  water  at  first.  In  June,  1916,  it  was  yielding  daily  2 barrels  of  oil  together  with  5 
barrels  of  water.  Sample  collected  in  August,  1916.  Chase  Palmer,  analyst. 

21.  Brine  from  the  same  well  as  that  described  under  No.  16  but  collected  in  September,  1916.  Chase 
Palmer,  analyst. 

22.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth  1,700  feet;  American  Oil  Co.’s  well  on  J.  T.  Craw  farm,  Cave  Run, 
Pleasants  County  W.  Va.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst.  Reeves,  Frank,  Econ.  Geology,  vol.  12,  p.  374,  1917. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS, 


37 


Table  11. — Analyses  of  waters  from  the  Big  Injun  sand. 


Grams  per  liter. 


23 

24 

25 

26 

0. 70 
.02 
.60 
12.22 
2.89 
45.88 
.35 
.02 
None. 
102. 14 

0.21 

.03 

0.19 

.02 

0. 13 
.04 

Fe 

A1  

Ca  

11.94 

1.81 

} 37.67 

.04 

None. 

84.35 

10. 24 
1.63 

33.47 

.01 

None. 

74.38 

17.12 
2. 96 

53.69 

Mg 

Na 

K 

hco3  

so4 

None. 
121. 63 

Cl 

164.82 

136.05 

119.94 

195. 63 

Reacting  values,  in  milligram  equivalents  per  liter. 


Fe 

0.6 

610.1 

236.6 

1,995.0 

9.0 

1.0 

596.0 

149.0 
1,710.0 

1.0 

511.0 

134.0 
1,455.0 

1.0 

855.0 

244.0 
2,334.0 

Ca 

M"  

Na 

K 

Total  basic  radicles 

2,851.3 

2,455.0 

2, 101.0 

3,434.0 

HC03  

.3 

None. 

2,181.0 

SO4 

None. 

2,379.0 

None. 

2,097.0 

None. 

3,430.0 

Cl 

Total  acid  radicles 

2,881.3 

2,379.0 

2,097.0 

3, 430.  0 

Reacting  values,  in  per  cent. 


10.6 

12.5 

12.2 

12.4 

4.1 

3.1 

3.2 

3.6 

35.1 

.2 

34.4 

34.6 

34.0 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

Approximate  percentages  of  principal  salts. 


MgCl2 

NaCl 

KC1 

20.8 

6.9 

71.9 

.4 

24.4 
5.2 

70.4 

23.7 

5.3 

71.0 

24.6 

5.9 

69.5 



100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

23.  Brine  from  Big  Injun  sand;  depth  1,200  feet;  well  No.  1,  Henry  H.  Moore  farm,  near  Summerfield, 
Marion  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected  April  27,  1915.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

24.  Brine  from  Big  Injun  sand;  depth  1,425  feet;  Carter  Oil  Co.’s  well  No.  2,  on  Russell  heirs’  farm,  near 
Paden  City,  Wetzel  County,  W.  Va.  Production  of  water  5 barrels  daily.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 
Reeves,  Frank,  Econ.  Geology,  vol.  12,  p.  374, 1917. 

25.  Brine  from  Big  Injun  sand;  depth  1,355  feet;  E.  A.  Bradley  well  No.  2,  Fiel  farm,  Jackson  Township, 
Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Production  of  water  3 barrels  daily.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst.  Reeves,  Frank, 
op.  cit.,  p.  374. 

26.  Brine  from  Big  Injun  sand;  depth  2,000  feet;  South  Penn  Oil  Co.’s  well  No.  1,  Isaiah  Baker  farm, 
Muddy  Creek,  Tyler  County,  W.  Va.  Production  of  water  20  barrels  daily.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 
Reeves,  Frank,  op.  cit.,  p.  374. 


38  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


Table  12. — Analyses  of  waters  from  the  Berea  sand. 

Grams  per  liter. 


27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

SiO. 

0.090 

0.22 

0. 14 

0.08 

Fe 

.006 

.06 

.01 

A1  

.022 

.37 

.50 

Ca  

.220 

2.75 

2.79 

9.24 

7.34 

Mg 

.070 

.86 

1.01 

2. 06 

1.16 

Na 

.475 

15.85 

19.49 

32.66 

25.82 

K . . . 

.055 

.51 

.50 

HCO3 

.146 

.37 

.05 

.02 

.06 

SO* 

None. 

None. 

None. 

None. 

None. 

Cl 

1.045 

32.07 

38.69 

72.60 

55.46 

Sneeifie  ?ravitv_  

2.129 

53.06 

I 63. 18 

116.66 

1.08 

98.84 

1.06 

1 

1 

Reacting:  values,  in  milligram  equivalents  per  liter. 


V,. 

0.2 

2.0 

0.3 

Ca 

11.0 

137.3 

139.3 

461.3 

366. 5 

Mg 

5.7 

71.0 

83.0 

169.6 

95.5 

Na 

21.3 

689.1 

847.4 

1,420.0 

1, 123. 0 

K... 

1.4 

13.0 

13.0 

Total  basic  radicles 

39.6 

912.4 

1,083.0 

2,050.9 

1.585.0 

HCOj-.... 

2.4 

6.1 

.8 

.4 

.9 

SO* 

None. 

None. 

None. 

None. 

None. 

Cl 

29. 5 

904.4 

1,091.0 

2, 047. 0 

1,564.0 

Total  acid  radicles 

31.9 

910.5 

1,091.8 

2,047.4 

1,564.9 

Reacting  values,  in  per  cent. 


Fe  

0.3 

0.1 

Ca 

17.3 

7.5 

6.4 

11.3 

11.7 

Mg 

8.9 

3.9 

3.8 

4.1 

3.1 

Na.. 

21.3 

37.8 

39.2 

34.6 

35.2 

K 

2.2 

.7 

.6 

HC03 

3.8 

.3 

Cl 

46.2 

49.7 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

Approximate  percentages  of  principal  salts. 


34.8 

14.6 

12.3 

21.8 

23.1 

MgCl  2 

15.5 

6.  5 

6.3 

6.9 

5.1 

NaCl 

KC1 

43.4 

6.3 

77.1 

1.8 

79.9 

1.5 

} 71.3 

71.8 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

27.  Brine  from  Berea  sand;  depth  2,141  to  2,162  feet;  well  No.  4 (old  oil  well),  Taylor  heirs'  farm,  2 miles 
east  of  Woodsfield,  Center  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected  April  26,  1915,  from  a 
separating  tank  at  the  well;  had  probably  undergone  dilution  after  being  brought  to  the  surface.  S.  C. 
Dins  more,  analyst. 

28.  Brine  from  Berea  sand;  depth,  1,748  to  1,760  feet;  well  No.  2 (gas  well),  Gulic  farm,  1 mile  west  of 
Summerfield,  Marion  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected  April  28,  1915.  S.  C.  Dinsmore, 
analyst. 

29.  Brine  from  Berea  sand;  depth  1,570  to  1,592  feet;  well  No.  2,  S.  L.  Murphy  farm,  near  Chascville, 
Seneca  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio.  Sample  collected  April  30, 1915.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

.30.  Brine  from  Berea  sand;  depth  1,727  to  1,740  feet;  well  No.  1 (old  oil  well).  J.  A.  Adams  farm,  half  a 
mile  west  of  Barnesville,  Warren  Township,  Belmont  County,  Ohio.  The  well  was  yielding  48  barrels  of 
oil  and  8 barrels  of  salt  water  a month  when  visited  in  June,  1916;  the  initial  yield  of  oil  from  the  well  about 
20  years  prior  to  this  was  about  180  barrels  of  oil  a month.  Both  oil  and  gas  were  produced  in  this  field 
Sample  collected  July  24, 1916.  Chase  Palmer,  analyst. 

31.  Brine  from  Berea  sand;  depth  2,141  to  2,162  feet;  well  No.  4 (old  oil  well),  Taylor  heirs’  farm.  2 miles 
east  of  Woodsfield,  Center  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  The  well  had  been  yielding  oil  and  salt  water 
since  1905.  Sample  collected  July  25,  1916;  sample  27,  collected  from  same  well  a year  previously.  Chase 
Palmer,  analyst. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS. 


39 


Table  13. — Analyses  of  tvaters  from  various  sands 


Grams  per  liter. 


32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

Si02 

0.01 

.07 

Trace. 
o0.14 
& .02 
13.79 
c .11 
2. 22 
37.93 
.73 
.04 
.18 
88.82 
.19 

0.05 

.04 

0. 12 
.05 
.83 
15.82 

0.05 

0.03 

.09 

Fe 

0. 19 

A1 

b . 08 
15.36 

Ca 

10. 16 

7.91 

10.28 

30.50 
d 4.30 
3.00 
78.20 
6.25 

2.58 

1.05 

.44 

5.01 

.49 

*.41 

None. 

13.80 

1.11 

Sr 

Mg 

1.48 

31.65 

1. 47 
28.60 
.35 
.03 
.01 
62.65 

1.87 
40.  80 
.95 
.03 
.13 
97.61 

2.  04 
40. 58 
.76 
.02 
Trace. 
95. 80 

1.54 
32.  84 

Na 

K 

hco3 

.05 

.37 

70.70 

.03 

.04 

73.15 

S04 

.06 
196. 00 
.85 

Cl 

Br 

Specific  gravity 

114.49 

144. 17 
1.099 

101. 18 

158.  21 

154.69 

118.00 

319.35 

1.211 

24.89 

1.160 

Reacting  values,  in  milligram  equivalents  per  liter. 


Fe 

2.0 

507.0 

122.0 
1,376.0 

0.5 

688.3 

182.8 

1,649.0 

18.7 

2.5 

1.0 

395.0 

121.0 
1, 243. 0 

9.0 

3.0 

513.0 

127.0 
1,428.0 

7.0 
1,523.0 
247.0 
3, 400.  0 
160.  0 
98.0 

Ca 

790.5 
154. 0 
1.774.0 
24.4 

766.8 

167.9 
1, 764. 0 

19.5 

129.0 

35.6 

217.8 

12.5 

24.0 

Mg 

Na 

K 

Sr 

Total  basic  radicles 

2.007.0 

2,541.8 

1, 769. 0 

2, 742. 9 

2, 718. 2 

2,071.0 

5,435.0 

418.9 

HC03 

.7 
3.7 
2, 505. 0 
2.4 

Trace. 

None. 

389.2 

13.9 

SO4  

2.3 
2, 752. 0 

Trace. 
2, 702. 0 

1.0 

5,527.0 

10.0 

Cl 

1,998.0 

1, 767. 0 

2,063.0 

Br 

Total  acid  radicles 

1,998.0 

2, 511.8 

1, 767. 0 

2, 754.3 

2,702.0 

2,063.0 

5,538.0 

403.1 

Reacting  values,  in  per  cent. 


Sr 

0.9 

3.0 

Ca 

12.7 

13.8 

11.2 

14.4 

14.2 

12.5 

13.8 

16.0 

Mg 

3.0 

3.6 

3.4 

2.8 

3. 1 

3. 1 

2.2 

4.4 

Na 

34.3 

32.2 

35.2 

32.4 

32.3 

34.4 

31.6 

25. 1 

K 

. 4 

.2 

.4 

.4 

1.5 

1.5 

Cl 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

50.0 

49.9 

48.3 

Br 

.1 

1.7 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

Approximate  percentages  of  principal  salts. 


CaCl2 

! 24. 7 

26.6 

21.8 

27.8 

27.6 

24.3 

28.4 

32.3 

MgCl2 

I 5.1 

6.1 

5.7 

4.6 

5.2 

5.2 

3.7 

7.7 

NaCl 

} 70.2 

/ 66.3 

71.8 

66.4 

66.2 

70.5 

64.2 

55.8 

KC1 

l 1.0 

.7 

1.2 

1.0 

3.7 

4.2 

: 100. 0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

100.0 

a Ferrous  iron.  b Al203+Fe203.  * Barium  absent.  d Trace  of  Ba.  e Trace  of  C03. 


32.  Brine  from  Second  sand;  depth  948  to  964  feet;  well  No.  19,  A.  B.  Kelly  farm.  Tionesta  Township, 
Forest  County,  Pa.  Production  of  water  was  originally  5 barrels  daily  but  had  declined  to  3 barrels  daily 
when  the  sample  was  collected.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst.  Reeves,  Frank.  Econ.  Geology,  vol.  12.  p.374, 1917. 

33.  Brine  from  Third  or  Fourth  (?)  sand;  depth  1,842  to  1,870  feet;  well  No.  2 (oil  well),  Cyrus  Step  farm, 
Penn  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  The  initial  production  of  oil  from  this  well,  about  20  years  ago,  is 
reported  to  have  been  100  barrels  of  oil  daily,  with  very  little  water.  In  August,  1915,  when  the  sample 
was  collected,  the  well  was  yielding  three-fourths  of  a barrel  of  oil  and  10  barrels  of  salt  water  a day.  The 
usual  yellowish  precipitate  formed  at  the  bottom  of  the  bottle  upon  standing.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst. 

34.  Brine  from  Fourth  sand;  depth  1,623  to  1,654  feet;  South  Penn  Oil  Co’s,  well  No.  1 on  D.  C.  Rankin 
farm,  Fairview  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  Production  of  water  H barrels  daily.  S.  C.  Dinsmore, 
analyst.  Reeves,  Frank,  op.  cit.,  p.  374. 

35.  Brine  from  Bowlder  sand,  depth  1,701  to  1,720±  feet;  well  No.  1 (new  oil  well),  Mrs.  Henry  Welsh 
farm,  Penn  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  Sample  collected  in  September,  1915.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

36.  Duplicate  of  sample  35.  Chase  Palmer,  analyst. 

37.  Brine  from  Fifth  sand;  depth  2,200  feet;  well  No.  1 of  South  Penn  Oil  Co.,  on  Maggie  McDonald  farm, 
McDonald,  Allegheny  County,  Pa.  Production  of  water  1 or  2 barrels  daily.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 
Reeves,  Frank,  op.  cit.,  p.  374. 

38.  Brine  from  Peoples  Natural  Gas  Co’s,  well,  8 miles  southwest  of  Imperial,  Washington  County,  Pa. 
Depth  of  well  when  sample  was  collected  6,300  feet.  Geologic  horizon  believed  to  be  that  of  Oriskany 
sandstone.  The  water  rose  4,000  feet  in  the  well.  This  water  is  remarkable  for  its  very  high  content  of 
strontium.  George  Steiger,  analyst.  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  364,  p.  9,  1914. 

39.  Water  from  a deep  well  on  Slaughters  Creek,  near  Coalburg,  W.  Va.  The  water  is  said  to  occur  at  a 
depth  of  5,590  feet  in  a stratum  of  fine  black  sand  whose  geologic  horizon  is  not  reported.  The  water  rose 
in  the  well  about  3,000  feet.  Sample  collected  in  July,  1912,  by  William  Seymour  Edwards  Oil  Co.,  Charles- 
tonand  Kanawha,  W.  Va.  Chase  Palmer,  analyst.  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Water-Supply  Paper364,  p.  11, 1914. 


40  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

SHALLOW  WELL  WATERS. 

The  15  analyses  shown  in  Table  14  are  selected  from  the  files  of 
the  water-resources  branch  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey 
and  represent  waters  from  shallow  wells  in  or  near  the  areas  studied 
during  the  preparation  of  this  bulletin.  Though  all  the  analyses 
except  No.  15  were  made  to  show  the  quality  of  the  water  for  use  in 
boilers  and  are  incomplete,  they  nevertheless  afford  a good  idea  of 
the  character  of  the  waters  from  the  shallow  rocks. 

Ground  waters  of  meteoric  origin,  such  as  are  obtained  from  shal- 
low wells,  when  percolating  through  soils  and  rocks  near  the  surface 
take  into  solution  various  mineral  constituents,  so  that  the  nature 
and  proportions  of  the  dissolved  constituents  depend  largely  on  the 
kinds  of  rock  with  which  the  waters  have  been  in  contact.  Calcium, 
magnesium,  and  carbonate  are  characteristic  of  waters  in  limestone 
areas.  Sulphate  is  generally  a derivative  of  surface  oxidation. 
Sodium,  whose  reacting  value  exceeds  the  combined  reacting  values 
of  chlorine  and  sulphate  in  the  waters  represented  by  analyses  2,  8, 
9,  and  15,  has  doubtless  been  derived  from  rocks  rich  in  sodium- 
bearing minerals.  Chlorine  is  present  in  all  the  waters  analyzed 
and  has  been  acquired  either  through  the  leaching  of  soluble  chlo- 
rides from  the  shallow  rocks  or  by  the  mixing  of  normal  ground 
waters  with  chloride  waters  such  as  constitute  the  deep-seated  brines. 

The  proportion  of  chlorine  varies  too  much  to  warrant  its  use  as 
a basis  for  extended  comparison,  but  by  comparing  the  analyses 
given  in  Table  14  with  those  given  in  Tables  8 to  13  a few  broad  dif- 
ferences between  the  shallow  and  deep  waters  are  apparent.  The 
proportions  of  total  dissolved  solids  in  the  shallow  waters  are  ex- 
tremely diverse  but  are  always  smaller  than  in  the  deep-seated  waters. 
All  but  one  of  the  shallow  waters  contain  a relatively  large  propor- 
tion of  sulphate,  and  the  reacting  value  of  this  constituent  exceeds 
that  of  chlorine  in  each  of  the  waters  represented  by  analyses  1,  2,  3,  4, 
11,  12,  13,  and  14.  The  proportions  of  sulphate  in  the  deep-seated 
brines  are  practically  negligible.  The  shallow  waters  are  character- 
ized by  a large  proportion  of  carbonate,  whereas  that  constituent  is 
present  in  relatively  small  amount  in  the  deep-seated  waters.  In  all  the 
shallow  waters  except  the  one  represented  by  analysis  2 calcium  ex- 
ceeds magnesium.  This  relation  also  holds  in  the  deep-seated  waters, 
but  the  proportions  of  calcium  and  magnesium  in  the  dissolved  solids 
of  the  shallow  waters  are  larger  than  in  the  deep-seated  waters.  In 
each  of  the  shallowT  waters  except  those  represented  b}^  analyses  3,  5, 
6,  and  10,  the  reacting  value  of  sodium  is  either  equal  to  or  greater 
than  that  of  chlorine.  In  the  deep-seated  brinss  the  reacting  values 
of  sodium  are  less  than  those  of  chlorine. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS. 


41 


A wide  range  of  properties  of  reaction  of  the  different  shallow 
waters  is  shown  in  the  lower  part  of  Table  14.  Primary  salinity 
predominates  in  waters  5,  8,  10,  and  15.  The  secondary  chloride 
salinity  of  waters  3,  5,  6,  and  10  indicates  that  these  approach  most 
nearly  the  deep-seated  oil-field  brines.  Primary  alkalinity  is  the  pre- 
dominating property  of  reaction  in  waters  2 and  9,  and  secondary 
alkalinity  is  the  principal  property  of  reaction  in  the  waters  repre- 
sented by  analyses  1,  3,  4,  7,  11,  12,  13,  and  14.  Though  primary 
salinity  predominates  in  the  waters  represented  under  analyses  8 and 
15,  the  total  properties  of  reaction  of  these  two  waters  are  also  made 
up  partly  of  primary  alkalinity.  Primary  alkalinity  in  the  deep- 
seated  brines  of  the  Appalachian  fields  is  exceptional. 

The  large  proportions  of  total  dissolved  solids,  the  relatively  large 
proportions  of  chlorine  with  respect  to  sodium,  and  the  compara- 
tively small  proportions  of  sulphate,  due  possibly  to  precipitation  or 
reduction  in  the  waters  represented  by  analyses  5 and  15,  lead  to 
the  conclusion  that  these  waters  are  mixtures  of  waters  from  shallow 
and  deep  sources.  Waters  such  as  these,  which  are  intermediate 
between  normal  ground  waters  and  deep-seated  brines,  deserve  fur- 
ther study  than  we  have  been  able  to  give  them.  We  have  found  it 
difficult  to  procure  representative  samples  of  such  waters,  which  are 
unsatisfactory  for  industrial  uses  and  are  also  generally  excluded 
from  deep  wells  by  casings.  It  is  probable,  however,  that  studies 
of  the  waters  accompanying  oil  in  the  shallow-sand  territories  of 
the  Appalachian  fields  and  of  the  waters  immediately  above  and 
below  the  shallow  oil  sands  would  show,  in  places  near  the  outcrops, 
evidences  of  the  incursion  of  ground  waters.  The  gradations  from 
normal  ground  waters  to  characteristic  deep-seated  brines  must 
depend  partly  on  the  extent  to  which  the  deeper  waters  have  received 
accessions  of  shallow  ground  waters.  In  the  succeeding  pages  we 
show  some  of  the  reactions  that  are  involved  when  shallow  ground 
waters  of  one  type  leak  into  oil  wells  and  mix  with  deep-seated 
waters  of  a different  type.  We  believe  that  similar  changes  have 
occurred  in  past  geologic  time,  and  this  belief  is  strengthened  by  the 
fact  that  the  reactions  that  would  be  produced  by  mixing  and  con- 
centrating certain  deep  and  shallow  waters  would  bring  about  much 
the  same  difference  that  we  observe  between  deep  and  shallow  brines. 


Table  14. — Partial  analyses  of  waters  from  shallow  wells  in  the  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  fields. 


42  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


15 

O O O O ;0  1 
O O d id  !h 
»OH  io  co  • o 
CO  ^ • CM 

° 1 
o j 
3 j 

^ i 

s j 

95.6 
12.3 

5.8 

8.9 

30.7 
314.1 

467.4 

CO 

66.3 

11.7 

1.3 

1.9 

41.2 

209.3 

331.7 

CM 

80.2 

20.9 

1.2 

1.9 

60.3 

272.8 

CO 

CO 

a 

11.7 

5.6 

2.0 

3.0 

4.7 
58.0 

o 

a 

o 

19.0 

6.7 

34.4 

67.4 
11.6 
43.9 

183.0 

10  05  N 


OX  00  X CO  CM 

id  CM  d rf  o N 
CO  CM  CO 


05  lO  t>-  CM  O 

oco  d no  d 


O CM  lO  HNrf 

00  id  N-  CM*  id  CO 
CM  CM  TfrH05 


00  O o CM  CO 

00*  CO  O id  CM*  05 
CO  1-t  O TT  CO  CM 


HIO  O ^ CO*H 

Is  1 i2§ 


co  t-  ~i  o o 

2 °*g?S 


| cr> 
co  ! Sg  ^ 


O'?  N 


Tj<  d •-<  ONV 
O U3  — i X 


<M  ONC 


5 I 


- 


: i 


d &p  a f _ 


o 

oP 


tOO  (N 

- 


05  O CM 
i-5  cd 


O to 
O CO 


O -H 

* CM  CO* 


1 oo 
’ co  cm* 


x o ^ 

CO  CO  CM* 


to  to  CM  | o 
CO  to  oc  ! o 


I N-  00 

> CO  00 


00  CO  o 

O cd  d 

CO  CM 


o to  to  05  o * 


-o  I o 

I 


CM  N-  CO 

04  ‘ g 


co  co  cm  ; o 


to  TT  o 

CO  CM  CO 


05  CM  O O 


to  ^ CO 
CM*  d O 


05  ^ to  o 

0*0  05*  o* 


CM 

05*  CO  !-? 


Naoac 
lO  3 


05  o o> 
io  tj!  ci 


t"  C*5  O 

^ <s  oc 


O-H  05 

oico  « 


o © o 

00  1^05 


co  r o 
I © 


05  O)  05  I O 

oo  «o  oo  | o 


■ ■ : : ■ J.O 
J be  ci  • • o ° 


I co  co 

• <N  O 


1'  C (M 

CO  OH 
£ 


O CO  r-t  H co  O 

o 

05  30*  CM*  CM*  to  CM* 

§ 

(NH  N-  OXO 

o 

XH  05  O 

CO  1-H  CO 

1 

05  -r  -r  os 

° 

" *©°g 

o ! 

! o 

! 

j x^  x n«o 

O 

id  o cd  cd  d Cl*  ( 
1 CM  CM 

8 

] ON  N NNffl 

O 

O t-  O*  CO  d CM* 

o* 

— CM  CO  i—i 

o 

OX-  CM  to  05  CO 

o 

CM  *— < w td  CO 

§ j 

C55  50  00  05  CC  1 

i °. 

td  i—i  CM*  CO  CM* 

-r  CM  CM  1 

1 1 

to  05  CO  CO  CM  CM 

1 © 

co  co  05  05  td  td 

1 ©■ 

CM  I-*  i-i  CM 

1 © | 

L-0  -O  05  O ^ CO 

1 ° ! 

x*  o’  o’  o cd  d 

§ i 

ON  rt  XtOh 

1 ° 

i £ 5?  ° 

8 

| ON  X X O CM 

O 

o d d d »d  cd 

CO  1—4  ^ 

O* 

o 

to  CO  CM  CM  X O 

o 

! d 05  O*  00  CM*  05* 

CO  i—i  CM 

8 

05  rj*  CO  i-H  CO 

o 

cm'  td  d ^H  d d 

o’ 

© 

t>  CO  O CM  O CM 

© 

td  X*  d 05  1-H  05  1 
CM  — < *-h  CM  j 

8 

■ ‘ - ip 

J tea  • *nCJ 

oS^WooqW 


Properties  of  reaction,  in  per  cent. 


CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE  WATERS, 


43 


CM  .000  j 

I ! t-  oo* 

t'-  * 

100.0 

4.1 

10.6 

CO 

33 

100.0 

1.4 

19.4 

Z’6 1 

100.0 

0.9 

21.8 

CO 

0 

1 

7.6 

8.4 

o 

oo 

o 

o’ 

o 

52.4 

22.4 

CM 

•O 

CM 

100.0 

oo  Icoco 

CM  Ip 

o 

8 

»0  • I'-  00 

‘O  • 05  Tt< 
»Q  * CM  H 

100.0 

39.2 

10.5 

50.3 

o 

o* 

o 

41.8 

16.4 

oo 

*** 

o 

8 

54.  6 
32.0 

a 

CO 

o 

8 

CO  O 
05 

% 

o 

8 

12.4 

29.6 

o 

oo 

lO 

O 

8 

10.8 

72.6 

16.6 

100.0 

28. 1 
13.5 

GO 

«o 

o 

8 

: : 

: &&-a 


c3  C3 

3 4 


o 

3 

o 

£ 

3 

3 

3 

4^> 

§ 

a 


^d 

.20 


P o3  S 

$ 2| 


+5  Oh  c-^  <3±i  du  o M 

g«W5M(5| 


o 

rt 

o 

t3> 
a 
• 3 

O «! 


a o1 
1 So  o 


aa ® 2 * 

S os  feVi  0<c«  fe'Srst 


"53^ 

o3  c3 

O ® 


B £ 

> o 
o o 
£-•  ® 

|1 

CC  03 

si 


m2? 
'3  3 

fc§ 

fl  CO 
°2 


si 

CO  ^ 

3 2 
3 S 

"2  0,5 
03  fl 


5 ^3  i^J-i  HJ-C^  ^03(5-C?a>  •,-«•£' 

^•§3“3-S  23-23®'S'2  ^ 


SOS  2«2-S^o3o^  p.§«3io 

^Ei^g-S^E^^Scjl 

t>  <d^«92IjW^  o)?  <d  hr{^\  is  o ^ 

!^!*jif§ti 

l|IJl|IS!§li!ll 


« H >»j 

pi  ®rQ  , 


! ®E-< 


3T3rt'c3  to  "S'O  3 'S  3 3 o32  c 

• *p  O W iH  'S  CM  *3  CO  3 ® *0 

05  C »“H  r-H  CH  Cr-H  £ t-H  ^ rH  <I> 

3 £ < 3 3 £ ift 


’cO  Q 


\ - SoS 

a 3 oo  § 

6“  >»mO 

3 s3-S2 

-riS-S-s 

p-g^e  3 
b.w  fe  § 

03  O 


q 

3 . 

l-»  o 


■H  ,7  K fl^j  C2H 


°3<~>£G 

tie*  £2 


a a 

I !_ 
1 

03  -uTJ 
® 03  03 

P-l  §*— 
oT  ® 3 
M .■«« 
£ o-h  o 

3<->  g| 
^ So 

• 3 22°3 


1 j2p5c 

30.83, 


03  o :=!  3 £ 
Si^p^s 


^-h  O ^ 32 

® • ^ § > § ^3  C2 

^ o utS  1 ®2o  S 03 

■H.O  (*>«*««  ®M 2^u>pq 
^•oggS^S  ^r?5«3rt 


*V-J  ZL  *h  O 0^03  *Z?  is 

2 2 c3  d >rO  OJXJra  •_  w © _ 

'^2^  •.§  ^2^3S-2c3253'5 


*°£ 


1 d 03  fl  c3  dd3  0.CJ  d>  g.g  gd2 

! £«  o|g|  i"  |ag.s 

t,3  ^ 3 3 c,  9 in"  t<  S 

3o3Tj3^3t;3-q3  >>3^ 

03^o3®o3-H03.HdSc332c3.H 

oioo*j  h guid'd  "i qo  § 

a 3 **l  "<!  ■&  3 *< 


44  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS  AS 

DEDUCED  FROM  FIELD  OBSERVATIONS  AND  CHEMI- 
CAL ANALYSES. 

MINERAL  DEPOSITION  DURING  THE  EXTRACTION  OF  OIL  AND 

GAS. 

The  field  observations  and  preliminary  deductions  upon  which  the 
studies  outlined  in  this  paper  are  largely  based  are  here  given  in  con- 
siderable detail. 

The  so-called  salting  up  or  clogging  of  gas  wells  oy  deposits  of 
sodium  chloride,  a matter  with  which  most  petroleum  geologists  who 
have  worked  in  the  Appalachian  fields  are  familiar,  is  a common 
cause  of  trouble  to  gas-well  operators.  Another  cause  of  trouble  that 
has  not  been  generally  recognized  is  the  clogging  of  the  productive 
sandstones  themselves  by  the  deposition  of  inorganic  mineral  matter 
in  the  rock  interstices.  During  the  field  investigations  in  south- 
eastern Ohio  and  western  Pennsylvania  preparatory  for  this  report 
it  was  noted  that  tubings  were  pulled  from  oil  and  gas  wells  be- 
cause newly  deposited  inorganic  crusts  had  so  caked  the  productive 
sands  and  the  tubings  of  the  wells  as  to  interfere  seriously  with  pro- 
duction. Pieces  of  sandstone  that  were  shot  and  cleaned  from  old 
wells  were  crusted  and  impregnated  with  similar  newly  deposited 
materials. 

Many  instances  of  the  “ salting  up  ” of  gas  wells  were  reported 
that  could  not  be  investigated,  so  that  information  on  this  subject 
has  been  partly  obtained  from  operators.  We  are  indebted  to  Mr. 
M.  E.  Lytle,  of  the  Ohio  Fuel  Supply  Co.,  for  the  following  account 
of  the  deposition  of  salt  in  a gas  well  in  Harrison  Township,  Knox 
County,  Ohio.  The  well  was  drilled  to  the  so-called  Clinton  sand, 
in  which  gas  was  encountered  at  a depth  of  about  2,700  feet.  The 
sand  was  apparently  dry  of  water,  was  34  feet  thick,  and,  under 
conditions  of  open  flow,  yielded  gas  at  the  rate  of  6,800,000  cubic  feet 
in  24  hours.  The  closed  “ rock  pressure  ” was  810  pounds  to  the 
square  inch.  Tubing  and  pipe-line  connections  were  put  in  at  once, 
but,  except  for  being  blown  off  and  tested  with  a pressure  gage  once 
a month,  the  well  was  not  operated.  Four  months  later  gas  from  the 
well  was  turned  into  the  pipe  line,  but  within  a day  or  so  investiga- 
tion proved  that  the  wTell  was  “ dead.”  Further  investigation  showed 
that  the  inside  of  the  tubing  was  dry  and  free  from  obstructions 
clear  to  the  bottom  of  the  well.  When  the  tubing  was  pulled  out, 
salt  water,  which  was  said  to  have  been  previously  excluded,  leaked 
in  from  a shallow  sand  above  the  packer  and  partly  filled  the  well. 
While  this  water  was  being  bailed  out,  lumps  of  salt  were  found,  and 
within  12  hours  approximately  4,000  pounds  of  salt  was  cleaned  from 
the  well.  Then  some  gas  commenced  flowing.  Being  satisfied  that 
the  Clinton  sand  was  salted  up,  the  operators  lowered  40  quarts  of 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATEKS. 


45 


nitroglycerin  and  exploded  it  at  the  productive  horizon.  This  started 
gas  flowing  at  the  rate  of  7,000,000  cubic  feet  in  24  hours  and  also 
ejected  more  salt.  The  well  has  been  in  constant  use  for  11  years 
and,  though  never  clogged  again,  has  continued  to  eject  lumps  of  salt 
with  the  gas. 

Under  the  conditions  described  it  seems  difficult  to  explain  how 
great  masses  of  salt  could  accumulate  in  the  rocks  at  the  bottom  of 
the  well  or  between  the  tubing  and  casing  unless,  during  the  time  the 
well  was  not  used,  salt  water  leaked  in  from  the  Clinton  or  overlying 
sands  and  was  exposed  to  the  evaporative  effects  of  expanding  gas. 
This  gas  must  have  leaked,  either  to  the  surface  or  possibly  from 
the  Clinton  sand  into  overlying  beds  in  which  lower  gas  pressures 
prevailed.  Such  movements  of  gas  would  cause  the  evaporation  of 
relatively  small  quantities  of  salt  water  that  might  leak  into  the  well. 

Concerning  a somewhat  similar  deposition  of  salt  in  a Clinton 
sand  gas  well  Mr.  Lytle  wrote : 

In  another  well  drilled  by  us,  from  which  we  used  gas  and  which  was  watered 
with  fresh  water  twice  a week  and  allowed  to  stand  three  days  out  of  six  with 
water  in  it,  the  salt  gradually  formed  in  the  tubing  until  it  had  very  nearly 
filled  60  feet  of  3-inch  tubing  and  300  feet  of  2-inch.  We  were  obliged  to  pull 
the  packer  and  shoot  this  well.  We  have  not  had  the  tubing  salt  up  since. 
This  well  has  been  producing  for  about  7 years. 

Another  striking  example  of  the  salting  up  of  gas  wells  is  reported 
by  a field  employee  of  the  Ohio  Fuel  Supply  Co.  to  have  taken 
place  in  the  Stumptown  gas  field,  Wayne  Township,  Belmont  County, 
Ohio.  During  the  years  1905  to  1910  much  natural  gas  was  produced 
at  this  place  from  a sandy  phase  of  the  Maxville  limestone  (Big  lime 
sand  of  Ohio,  of  late  Mississippian  age)  at  a depth  of  1,250  feet. 
One  of  the  wells  here  is  reported  to  have  yielded  gas  at  the  rate  of 
5,000,000  cubic  feet  a day  when  flowing  openly,  the  initial  rock  pres- 
sure being  approximately  440  pounds  to  the  square  inch.  No  salt 
water  could  be  detected  in  the  wells,  but  the  operators  observed  that 
crusts  of  crystalline  salt  formed  about  the  tubings  at  the  productive 
horizon,  so  as  to  choke  the  wells  and  retard  the  flow  of  gas.  Attempts 
were  made  to  dissolve  these  salt  incrustations  by  introducing  fresh 
water  into  some  of  the  wells  and  then  pumping  it  out,  but  the  pump 
valves  at  the  bottoms  of  the  wells  became  so  rapidly  clogged  by  salt 
as  to  interfere  with  this  procedure.  The  fresh  water  that  was  intro- 
duced into  the  wells  rapidly  disappeared,  and  sometimes  when  the 
wells  were  allowed  to  “ blow  off  ” to  remove  the  water  and  dissolved 
salt  that  could  not  be  pumped  out,  fine  particles  of  dry  salt  were 
ejected  from  the  wells.  It  seems  probable  that  the  water  with  its 
dissolved  salt  was  included  in  the  gas  as  a spray  and  was  evaporated 
into  the  relatively  great  volumes  of  expanding  gas  before  reaching 
the  top  of  the  well,  leaving  only  the  particles  of  dry  salt.  In  some 
of  the  fields  where  salting  up  of  gas  wells  was  reported  the  salt  was 


46  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

successfully  removed  by  introducing  water  into  the  wells  and  subse- 
quently pumping  off  or  blowing  off  the  water  with  the  dissolved  salt. 

At  Barnesville,  Warren  Township,  Belmont  County,  Ohio,  Berea 
gas  wells  are  also  reported  to  have  become  salted  up,  and  at  one  place 
near  the  Barnesville  field  crystalline  salt,  an  analysis  of  which  is 
given  in  Table  15,  was  collected  from  a gas  line  pressure  regu- 
lator 4 to  7 miles  from  the  wells  that  furnished  the  gas.  Salt  was 
deposited  here  in  so  large  amounts  that  it  became  necessary  to  remove 
the  accumulations  once  a year.  It  appears  from  this  that  particles 
of  salt  water  were  carried  several  miles  in  the  form  of  a fine  spray 
suspended  in  gas  moving  rapidly  under  pressure.  On  further  ex- 
pansion of  the  gas  more  complete  evaporation  of  the  water  took  place 
and  crystalline  salt  was  deposited.  The  interior  of  the  regulator  was 
sometimes  observed  to  be  wet.  About  15,000,000  cubic  feet  of  gas  a 
month  passed  through  this  apparatus,  in  which  the  gas  line  pressure 
was  reduced  from  100  to  20  pounds  to  the  square  inch.  Three-inch 
pipe  lines  were  in  use.  Small  amounts  of  salt  water  were  pumped 
and  blown  off  from  the  Berea  gas  wells  at  Barnesville,  and  water 
traps  were  used  to  remove  water  from  the  gas  before  it  went  into  the 
pipe  lines. 

Salting  up  of  gas  wells  at  Cleveland,  Ohio,  is  reported  by  G.  S. 
Rogers,1  who  collected  pieces  of  crystalline  salts  that  formed  in  wells 
at  the  horizon  of  the  so-called  Clinton  sand.  This  sand  yields  gas 
in  the  Cleveland  field,  but  salt  water,  if  present,  can  not  be  observed 
because  of  its  evaporation  into  the  gas.  Rogers  attributes  the  depo- 
sition of  salt  to  the  evaporation  of  salt  water  into  expanding  gas 
and  thinks  the  water  may  leak  to  the  Clinton  sand  from  the  higher 
lime  sand  (of  early  Devonian  age;  see  stratigraphic  table,  p.  14), 
which  is  known  to  be  water  bearing. 

We  are  indebted  to  Dr.  I.  C.  White  for  an  account  of  the  deposi- 
tion of  salt  in  a gas  well  near  Warfield,  Ky.  The  well  burned  for 
about  20  years,  during  which  the  gas  was  not  utilized.  During  that 
period  the  well  occasionally  became  choked  by  salt,  but  when  the  gas 
pressure  increased  sufficiently  the  salt  was  blown  from  the  well  and 
the  flow  of  gas  began  again  as  usual. 

At  Woodsfield,  Center  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  fragments 
of  salt-incrusted  Berea  sandstone  were  collected  as  soon  as  they 
were  bailed  from  an  old  oil  well.  On  examination  these  specimens 
were  found  to  contain  0.59  per  cent  by  weight  of  salts  soluble  in 
water,  of  which  89.5  per  cent  by  weight  was  sodium  chloride.  The 
well  had  been  yielding  oil  together  with  a little  gas  and  salt  water 
for  ten  years  prior  to  the  collection  of  the  incrusted  fragments. 

In  this  bulletin  it  is  possible  to  cite  only  a few  of  the  many  ex- 
amples of  the  deposition  of  salt  in  gas  and  oil  wells.  In  addition  to 
the  examples  above  cited,  we  have  received  reports  of'  similar 

1 Rogers,  G.  S.,  The  Cleveland  gas  field,  Cuyahoga  County,  Ohio  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  061,  pp.  19-20,  21,  31,  1917. 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


47 


phenomena  in  Butler,  Lawrence,  Beaver,  Armstrong,  and  McKean 
counties,  Pa.,  and  Belmont,  Monroe,  Noble,  Guernsey,  Knox,  Wayne, 
and  Licking  counties,  Ohio.  A few  isolated  cases  in  West  Virginia 
have  also  been  reported.  The  short  time  available  has  not  permitted 
a more  extensive  investigation  of  the  subject. 

The  salting  up  of  gas  wells  is  attributed  largely  to  the  evapora- 
tive effects  of  expanding  gas,  but  under  certain  conditions  chilling 
of  deep-seated  brines  entering  the  wells  is  another  cause  of  the 
deposition  of  salt.  Where  great  volumes  of  highly  compressed  gas 
are  allowed  to  escape  through  an  open  well  or  into  low-pressure  gas 
lines,  the  temperature  of  salt  water  accompanying  the  gas  is  pro- 
bably lowered  sufficiently  to  cause  the  deposition  of  salt. 

Apparently  the  phenomenon  is  common  in  both  oil  and  gas  fields, 
though  frequently  it  is  not  observed  because  of  the  very  small 
amounts  of  salt  deposited.  In  the  Appalachian  fields  the  salt  con- 
tent of  specimens  of  the  productive  sands  collected  from  oil  wells 
is  usually  less  than  1 per  cent  by  weight,  as  is  shown  in  Tables  1 
and  3.  The  proportions  of  salt  in  specimens  of  pay  sand  from  gas 
wells  would  doubtless  be  much  greater.  Analyses  of  some  of  the 
water-soluble  salts  collected  during  the  studies  relative  to  this  paper 
are  shown  in  Table  15. 

Table  15. — Analyses  of  water-soluble  salt  crusts  collected  from  oil  and  gas  icells. 


Percentages  by  weight. 


1 

2 

3 

Na 

38.70 

35.2 

38. 82 

Ca 

0.  15 

3.4 

. 09 

Mg 

Trace. 

.3 

None. 

Fe 

.04 

Cl 

59.80 

60.2 

None. 

59.92 

S04 

.18 

. 16 

C03  

None 

.9 

None 

Insoluble  in  H2O 

.38 

.32 

Organic  matter 

Present. 

Present. 

99. 21 

100.0 

99.35 

Conventional  combinations  calculated  from  the  above  figures,  expressed  as  percentages  by- 

weight. 


NaCl 

98.37 

89.5 

98. 64 

CaCl2 

.20 

7.6 

. 14 

MgCl2 

Trace. 

1.3 

None. 

FeS04 

. 11 

CaS04 

.26 

.14 

1.6 

Insoluble  in  H26 

.38 

.32 

Organic  matter 

Present. 

Present. 

99.21 

100.0 

99.35 

1.  Salt  crust,  98.83  per  cent  soluble  in  water,  from  a Clinton  sand  gas  well,  Cleveland,  Ohio.  Collected 
by  G.  S.  Rogers.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst. 

2.  Water-soluble  portion  of  Berea  sand  from  an  oil  well  10  years  old,  Woodsfield,  Center  Township, 
Monroe  County,  Ohio,  representing  0.59  per  cent  of  the  sand.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst. 

3.  Salt  crust,  99.03  per  cent  soluble  in  water,  collected  from  a gas-pressure  regulator  between  4 and  7 
miles  from  the  Berea  wells  that  yielded  gas  together  with  water  from  which  the  salt  was  deposited,  Barnes- 
ville,  Belmont  County,  Ohio.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst. 

A few  examples  of  the  deposition  of  inorganic  substances  other 
than  soluble  chlorides  may  be  of  interest.  In  Forward  Township, 


48  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

Butler  County,  Pa.,  fragments  of  a crust  consisting  of  barium  sul- 
phate, with  strontium  and  calcium  sulphates,  ferric  oxide,  and 
soluble  chlorides,  as  shown  by  analysis  3,  Table  16,  were  collected 
from  an  old  oil  well.  The  well  had  been  yielding  oil  and  salt  water 
for  about  15  years  and  had  become  badly  fouled  by  mineral  incrusta- 
tions, when  it  was  shot  and  cleaned.  Angular  fragments  of  the 
crust,  2 inches  wide  and  half  an  inch  thick,  containing  included 
globules  of  gelatinous  hydrocarbons,  were  then  collected.  The  crusts 
were  formed  at  the  horizon  of  the  productive  bed  (Third  sand, 
depth  1,470  feet). 

A deposit  of  barium  sulphate  and  calcium  carbonate  in  an  oil 
well  was  also  observed  in  Butler  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa., 
where  the  bottom  portion  of  the  tubing  of  a well  was  found  to  be 
so  incrusted  with  these  substances  as  to  close  most  of  the  intake 
perforations  completely,  practically  stopping  production  from  the 
well.  Only  the  bottom  length  of  the  tubing,  the  part  which  was  im- 
mersed in  salt  water  and  oil,  was  incrusted.  The  well  yielded  oil  and 
salt  water  from  the  Hundred-foot  sand  at  a depth  of  1,380  feet.  In 
this  well  the  deposition  of  calcite  upon  the  tubing  had  been  followed 
by  that  of  barium  sulphate,  which  had,  in  turn,  been  followed  by 
further  deposition  of  calcite.  The  resultant  banded  nature  of  the 
crust  is  shown  by  Plate  IY  (p.  52).  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  the 
crusts  were  so  deposited  upon  surfaces  wet  with  oil  and  water  as  to  ex- 
clude both  oil  and  water  from  the  intake  perforations.  The  well 
was  double-cased  halfway  through  the  Hundred-foot  sand,  and  the 
operators  claimed  that  afterward  practically  no  water  leaked  in 
from  beds  above  the  Hundred-foot  sand. 

The  coarsely  crystalline  texture  of  the  barium  sulphate  crusts  in- 
dicates slow  deposition,  but  the  causes  for  this  deposition  in  oil 
wells  are  uncertain.  Among  the  possible  causes  may  be  mentioned 
the  mixing  in  the  wells  of  dilute  solutions  of  soluble  barium  salts 
with  solutions  containing  soluble  sulphates.  It  seems  probable  that 
notwithstanding  the  agitation  of  the  solutions  at  the  productive 
horizons  in  the  oil  wells  the  precipitation  of  barium  sulphate  must 
have  been  slow,  because  of  the  very  dilute  solutions  of  sulphates  and 
soluble  barium  salts  involved.  Siebenthal 1 has  quoted  Carles’s  work  2 
to  show  that  some  barium  may  remain  in  solution  in  the  presence  of 
some  sulphate  in  bicarbonate  waters.  It  may  be  that  in  these  oil-field 
waters,  particularly  where  bicarbonate  waters  leak  into  the  wells 
from  rocks  near  the  surface,  the  breaking  down  of  bicarbonates,  due 
to  the  loss  of  carbon  dioxide  from  solution,  together  with  other  gases, 
facilitates  the  slow  deposition  of  barium  sulphate.  This  mode  of 

1 Siebenthal,  C.  E.,  Origin  of  the  zinc  and  lead  deposits  of  the  Joplin  region,  Mis- 
souri, Kansas,  and  Oklahoma  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  606,  pp.  55-56,  1915. 

2 Carles,  M.  P.,  Presence  de  la  baryte  dans  les  eaux  min£rales  sulphat6es : Annales 
chim.  anal.,  vol.  7,  pp.  91-93,  1902. 


U.  S.  GEOLOGICAL  SURVEY 


BULLETIN  693 


PLATE  II 


A.  FRAGMENT  OF  SALT  CRUST  FROM  A CLINTON  SAND  GAS  WELL,  CLEVELAND, 

OHIO. 

Collected  by  G.  S.  Rogers.  The  composition  of  the  crust  is  shown  by  analysis  1,  Table  15. 


B.  FRAGMENT  OF  SALT  CRUST  AT  BARNESVILLE,  OHIO. 

Collected  for  the  authors  by  a field  employee  of  the  Ohio  Fuel  Supply  Co.  The  salt  was  deposited 
in  a gas-line  pressure  regulator  situated  between  4 and  7 miles  from  the  Berea  wells  supplying 
the  gas.  The  composition  of  the  crust  is  shown  by  analysis  3,  Table  15. 

SALT  CRUSTS  FORMED  DURING  THE  PRODUCTION  OF 
NATURAL  GAS. 


Photographs  three  times  natural  size. 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


49 


slow  deposition  is  suggested  by  the  uniform  thickness  and  coarsely 
l crystalline  texture  of  the  crusts  and  also  by  the  admixture  of  barium 
| sulphate  with  calcium  carbonate,  which  would  be  precipitated  as  a 
j carbonate  on  the  loss  of  carbon  dioxide  from  bicarbonate  solutions. 

Calcium  carbonate,  magnesium  carbonate,  and  ferrous  carbonate 
are  deposited  on  tubings,  on  the  walls  of  the  wells,  and  in  the  inter- 
stices of  productive  sands.  The  carbonate  deposits  are  most  com- 
monly found  in  the  bottoms  of  old  oil  wells,  though  some  carbonates 
are  believed  to  be  deposited  in  the  interstices  of  the  sands  at  consid- 
erable distances  from  the  producing  wells.  This  inference  has  been 
suggested  by  the  petrographic  and  chemical  examination  of  a large 
number  of  mineral  crusts  and  specimens  of  oil  and  gas,  bearing  sand- 
stones collected  from  both  old  and  new  wells.  Analyses  of  a few  of 
these  carbonate  deposits  are  given  in  Table  16.  The  photographs 
reproduced  in  Plates  II.  III.  and  IV  illustrate  the  mode  of  occur- 
rence of  the  crusts. 


Table  16. — Analyses  of  mineral  crusts  collected  from  oil  icells. 


Percentages  by  weight. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

QaIiiRIa  in  vrro Ini'  ft.  

0.10 

.53 

.27 

0.11 

.69 

.20 

0.34 

0. 47 
.32 
3.63 

F02O3-  - 

.11 

b 61. 07 
.81 
1.61 

0.60 

56.71 

4.41 

53.37 
.16 
.60 
42. 98 

53.  08 
.46 
.49 
c 43. 17 

1. 44 

Qrn  

MctO  

.18 

1.32 

.17 

91.69 

.97 

.12 

2.33 

31.85 

2.12 

Trace. 

34.29 

98.  01 

98.20  98.23 

100. 19' 

98. 14 

Revised  analyses. 


finlnblft  in  wntpf  O 

0.10 

0.11 

0.34 

0.47 

.27 

.20 

.11 

3.63 

0.60 

95.27 

94.90 

Trace. 

2. 30 

5.00 

ftrPOo  

.23 

.65 

MpC<  )•,  - 

1.33 

1.08 

.20 

.25 

TTaP/Oo  

.86 

1.11 

.52 

DnCO.  

92. 95 

86. 26 

firSO..  

2.86 



1.97 

.29 

3.91 

d.03 

Vfo-O  

d . 09 

91.69 

2. 12 

Organic  matter  and  moisture 

el.  99 

el.  80 

el.  77 

.97 

100.  05 

99. 85 

100.  00 

100. 19 

98.14 

a Essentially  sodium  chloride.  a £roDamy  present  as  smcaie. 

b Calculated  for  S03.  Presence  proved  by  qualitative  tests.  e By  difference, 
c Calculated  to  satisfy  bases. 

1.  Crust  cleaned  from  tubing  of  an  old  well  yielding  oil  and  salt  water  from  the  Hundred-foot  sand, 
Summit  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  The  depth  at  which  the  crust  formed  is  not  known.  The  sample 
was  collected  from  the  derrick  floor  after  the  tubings  had  been  cleaned.  R.  C.  W ells,  analyst. 

2 Crust  cleaned  from  tubing  of  an  old  oil  well  yielding  oil  and  salt  water  from  the  Hundred-foot  sand, 
Summit  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.,  about  a quarter  of  a mile  from  well  where  sample  1 was  collected. 


for  about  15  years, 

^4' 1 'incriisl^i  fragments  of  sandstone  cleaned  from  the  bottom  of  an  old  well  that  had  been  idle  for  about 
15  to  18  years,  Evans  City.  Butler  County,  Pa.  The  well  had  formerly  yielded  oil  and  salt  water  from  the 
Hundred-foot  sand.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst.  , , , „ . ...  ..  „ , 

5.  Crust  (see  B,  PI.  IV)  collected  from  the  bottom  part  of  the  tubing  of  an  old  well  yielding  oil,  gas,  ana 
salt  water  from  the  Hundred-foot  sand,  Butler  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

91818°— 19 4 


50  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

The  deposition  of  carbonates  seems  to  be  caused  partly  by  the 
leaking  into  the  wells  and  mixing  of  carbonate  waters  from  shallow 
rocks  with  the  deep-seated  brines.  When  such  waters  are  mixed  and 
subsequently  undergo  concentration,  any  sodium  carbonate  in  the 
shallow  water  will  react  with  the  calcium  chloride  of  the  deeper 
water  to  form  calcium  carbonate,  sodium  chloride,  carbon  dioxide, 
and  water,  according  to  the  reaction 

2 NaHC08+CaCl2=CaCOs+2  NaCl+C02+H20 

In  this  connection  it  is  important  to  note  the  presence  of  sodium 
chloride  in  the  carbonate  crusts  from  old  oil  and  gas  wells,  and  also 
the  fact  that  calcium  carbonate  crusts  in  such  wells  are  particularly 
abundant  in  Butler  County,  Pa.,  where  some  of  the  waters  of  the 
shallow  rocks  contain  sodium  in  excess  of  the  strong  acid  radicles 
and  therefore  have  primary  alkalinity.  The  decrease  in  the  solubility 
of  calcium  carbonate  in  the  presence  of  increasing  proportions  of 
calcium  chloride  is  also  a probable  factor  in  the  formation  of  these 
deposits,  especially  where  waters  that  have  dissolved  calcium  car- 
bonate become  mixed  with  the  deep-seated  waters.  Another  cause 
for  the  deposition  of  carbonates  is  the  previously  mentioned  breaking 
down  of  soluble  bicarbonates  due  merely  to  the  liberation  of  carbon 
dioxide,  together  with  other  gases,  from  solution  in  water.  In  all 
these  processes  the  concentration  of  the  waters  due  to  the  removal  of 
water  vapor  in  the  escaping  natural  gases  is  believed  to  play  an 
important  part. 

CHANGES  IN  THE  DEEP-SEATED  WATERS  DURING  THE  EXTRAC- 
TION OE  OIL  AND  GAS. 

METHOD  OF  STUDY. 

The  partial  removal  of  some  of  the  dissolved  constituents  from 
the  waters  necessarily  results  in  changes  in  the  proportions  of  the 
remaining  constituents.  In  order  to  understand  these  changes  as  fully 
as  possible  and  to  correlate  the  evidence  furnished  -by  the  deposition 
of  mineral  matter  just  described,  we  compared  analyses  of  water  col- 
lected at  different  periods  of  production  from  the  .initial  well  in  a 
new  oil  and  gas  field.  Similar  comparisons  were  also  made  between 
waters  from  the  same  geologic  horizon  in  old  and  new  fields  and 
between  waters  from  different  horizons  in  the  same  or  neighboring 
fields.  These  comparisons  have  resulted  in  the  discovery  of  certain 
general  relations  between  the  changes  in  the  waters  during  the  extrac- 
tion of  oil  and  gas  by  man  and  the  natural  changes  that  have  taken 
place  during  the  lapse  of  geologic  time. 


U.  S.  GEOLOGICAL  SURVEY 


BULLETIN  693  PLATE  III 


INCRUSTED  SANDSTONE,  IMPREGNATED  BY  CARBONATES,  FROM  OLD  OIL  WELLS 
NEAR  EVANS  CITY,  BUTLER  COUNTY,  PA. 

A,  Collected  by  R.  Van  A.  Mills,  Hundred-foot  sand,  depth  1,060  feet.  B,  Collected  by  a field  employee 
of  the  South  Penn  Oil  Co.,  Hundred-foot  sand,  depth  1,050  feet.  C,  Transverse  section  of  B,  showing 
interstitially  deposited  carbonates  as  white  patches.  AH  photographs  three  times  natural  size. 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


51 


COMPARISON  OF  WATERS  FROM  THE  SAME  WELL. 

Analyses  of  water  from  the  Keener  sand,  Miltonsburg,  Monroe 
County,  Ohio,  collected  from  the  same  well  at  different  periods  of 
production  are  shown  in  Table  IT,  and  some  of  the  conditions  of 
production  are  indicated  in  figure  4.  It  is  evident  that  the  propor- 
tion of  total  dissolved  solids  in  the  waters  collected  from  the  same 


Figure  4. — Curve  showing  the  rates  of  production  of  oil  and  water  from  well  No.  1, 
Schroeder  heirs’  farm,  Miltonsburg,  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  when 
water  samples  were  collected  from  that  well. 

well  increased  as  production  continued.  Moreover,  the  analyses  indi- 
cate changes  in  the  relative  proportions  of  the  different  constituents, 
the  ratio  of  calcium  to  chlorine  being  greater  and  the  ratio  of  sodium 
to  chlorine  being  smaller  in  the  more  concentrated  water.  Of  the 
changes  involved  that  in  concentration  is  the  most  pronounced.  We 
believe  that  such  a change  would  be  noted  in  waters  from  practically 
all  initial  wells  in  new  fields  where  infiltrating  waters  are  excluded 


52  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


and  there  is  a noteworthy  escape  of  gas.  This  belief  is  based  partly  on 
our  numerous  comparisons  of  waters  from  the  same  sands  in  new 
and  old  fields  wdiere  gas  was  being  extracted. 

Table  17. — Analyses  of  brine  collected  at  different  periods  of  production  from 
Keener  sand  in  well  No.  1,  Schroeder  heirs’  farm,  Miltonsburg , Ohio. 


[Depth  of  sand  1,465  to  1,471  feet.  This  was  the  initial  well  in  a new  oil  and  gas  field.  Analyses  in  grams 

per  liter.] 


1 

2 

Si02  

0.08 

0.04 

Fe  

.01 

A1  

.36 

Ca  

5.68 

8.34 

Mg  

1.04 

1.48 

Na j 

22.84 

} 29.74 

K 

.60 

COs  . 

None. 

None. 

HCOs  . . 

.08 

.03 

SO4  - 

None. 

None. 

Cl 

48.46 

64. 10 

79. 15 

103. 73 

Ca-4-Cl 

. 117 

.130 

Na-v-Cl 

.471 

.464 

1.  Collected  April  24,  1915,  when  the  well  was  1 month  old.  „S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst.  Gas,  oil,  and 
water  were  flowing  from  the  well.  The  approximate  rate  of  production  at  that  time  is  shown  by  figure  4. 

2.  Collected  when  the  well  was  18  months  old.  Chase  Palmer,  analyst.  The  gas  pressure  had  declined 
and  the  well  had  ceased  to  flow.  The  rate  of  production  of  oil  had  declined  and  the  rate  of  production 
of  water  had  increased,  as  shown  by  figure  4. 

Several  explanations  may  be  offered  to  account  for  the  changes 
noted.  It  is  believed  that  the  evaporation  of  water  into  the  escaping 
gas  is  the  principal  cause  for  the  change  in  concentration.  Another 
possible  explanation  is  that  the  more  concentrated  water  comes  from 
a part  of  the  sand  where  the  water  has  undergone  advanced  con- 
centration either  prior  to  drilling  or  in  an  older  oil  and  gas  field. 
The  suggestion  that  the  changes  in  concentration  are  related  to  the 
\ extraction  of  gas  is  strengthened  by  the  fact  that  water  from  certain 
deep  wells  where  oil  and  gas  are  practically  absent  has  shown  for 
many  years  no  significant  change  in  character  or  concentration.1 

No  single  explanation  for  the  changes  other  than-  that  of  concen- 
tration can  be  advanced  without  reservation.  It  will  be  understood, 
for  instance,  that  the  changes  in  the  relative  proportions  of  the  dis- 
solved constituents  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  leakage  into  the  wells 
of  carbonate  waters  having  primary  alkalinity.  The  reaction  that 
is  involved  when  such  waters  are  mixed  with  the  deep-seated  brines 
and  subsequently  concentrated  has  been  briefly  described  on  page 
50.  Relatively  little  sodium  chloride  is  lost  from  the  solution,  but 
both  calcium  and  magnesium  are  deposited  as  carbonates.  This  pre- 

1 Bownocker,  J.  A.,  Salt  deposits  and  the  salt  industry  in  Ohio : Ohio  Geol.  Survey, 
4th  ser..  Bull.  8,  p.  27,  190G. 

Stephenson,  L.  W.,  and  Palmer,  Chase,  A deep  well  at  Charleston,  S.  C.,  with  a 
report  on  the  mineralogy  of  the  water : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  90,  p.  90,  1914. 


U.  S.  GEOLOGICAL  SURVEY 


BULLETIN  893  PLATE  IV 


A.  FRAGMENTS  OF  A SULPHATE  CRUST. 


Collected  for  the  writers  by  J.  C.  Mettler,  Evans  City,  Pa.  The  deposit  was  cleaned  from  an  old  well 
that  had  been  yielding  oil  and  salt  water  from  the  Third  sand  (probably  Upper  Devonian)  for  about 
15  years.  Locality,  1 mile  northeast  of  Water  station.  Forward  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.  The 
dark  mass  (a)  is  a soft  waxy  hydrocarbon  that  is  included  in  the  crust.  The  composition  of  the 
deposit  is  shown  by  analysis  3,  Table  16.  Photograph  three  times  natural  size. 


* 


B.  FRAGMENT  OF  A MIXED  SULPHATE  AND  CARBONATE  CRUST  FROM  THE 
BOTTOM  PART  OF  THE  TUBING  OF  AN  OLD  WELL  YIELDING  OIL,  GAS,  AND  SALT 
WATER  FROM  THE  HUNDRED-FOOT  SAND,  BUTLER  TOWNSHIP. 

Collected  by  R.  Van  A.  Mills.  Petrographic  examination  has  shown  that  the  specimen  consists  essen- 
tially of  barite  and  calcite  in  alternate  layers.  Small  amounts  of  sodium  chloride  are  also  present. 
The  calcite  and  barite  crystals  are  slightly  interlocked  in  comblike  structure. 


SULPHATE  CRUSTS  FROM  OIL  WELLS  IN  BUTLER  COUNTY,  PA. 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


53 


cipitation  tends  to  bring  about  differences  in  the  sodium-chlorine  and 
calcium- chlorine  ratios,  such  as  have  been  noted.  Furthermore  the 
extensive  occurrence  in  the  sands  of  secondary  carbonates  containing 
small  proportions  of  sodium  chloride  indicates  changes  of  this  type. 

The  deposition  of  sodium  chloride,  with  possibly  very  minor 
amounts  of  calcium  and  magnesium  chlorides,  during  the  concentra- 
tion of  the  water  would  also  cause  such  changes  in  the  relative  pro- 
portions of  the  dissolved  constituents  as  are  actually  noted.  The  oc- 
currence of  deposits  of  sodium  chloride  in  gas  wells  and  in  the  inter- 
stices of  the  productive  rocks  indicates  this  mode  of  change  in  many 
fields. 

To  ascertain,  approximately,  the  dissolved  constituents  that  may 
be  lost  from  the  brines  during  concentration  so  as  to  cause  the  dif- 
ferences shown  in  Table  IT,  we  have  made  further  comparisons  of 
the  analyses  in  that  table,  and  the  results  are  set  forth  in  Table  18. 
Here  the  analyses  are  simplified  by  rejecting  the  minor  constituents 
and  by  slightly  altering  the  values  for  sodium  until  an  exact  balance 
between  the  bases  and  chlorine  is  obtained  so  that  the  dissolved  con- 
stituents can  be  expressed  as  chlorides.  The  analyses  are  given 
under  1 and  2 respectively.  The  values  in  column  la  are  obtained 
by  multiplying  those  in  column  1 by  an  arbitrary  factor  (1.482), 
which  is  equivalent  to  making  a hypothetical  concentration  of  the 
more  dilute  water  to  67.48  per  cent  of  its  original  volume.  This 
hypothetical  concentration  has  been  selected  in  order  that  the  calcium 
content  of  water  la  and  water  2 should  be  approximately  the  same. 
Calcium  chloride,  being  more  soluble  than  sodium  chloride,  would 
not  be  expected  to  deposit  with  sodium  chloride  at  first ; nevertheless 
small  amounts  of  calcium  and  magnesium  chloride  seem  to  accom- 
pany the  sodium  chloride  actually  found  in  the  oil  and  gas  bearing 
rocks,  so  that  the  hypothetical  concentration  has  been  carried  to  a 
point  to  yield  a slight  excess  of  calcium  chloride.  No  error  is  thus 
introduced,  inasmuch  as  the  results  more  nearly  agree  with  conditions 
actually  noted.  Moreover,  if  the  hypothetical  concentration  of  the 
dilute  water  should  be  varied  slightly  in  either  direction,  the  hypo- 
thetical salt  deposit  would  still  approximate  the  salt  deposits  found 
in  the  reservoir  rocks,  sodium  chloride  being  the  predominating  con- 
stituent. 

It  will  be  seen  from  Table  18  that  the  difference  in  the  salt  con- 
tents of  the  waters  under  comparison  is  expressed  essentially  as  one 
of  sodium  chloride.  It  will  also  be  noted  that  the  composition  of 
the  salts  hypothetically  removed  from  the  dilute  water  during  its 
concentration  agrees  closely  with  the  composition  of  natural  salt  de- 
posits and  with  that  of  salt  crusts  collected  from  wells.  The  com- 


54  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


parison  therefore  furnishes  further  evidence  that  the  change  in  the 
waters  may  be  due  to  the  loss  of  sodium  chloride  during  the  concen- 
tration of  the  water  accompanying  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas. 

Table  18. — Analyses  illustrating  the  probable  loss  of  sodium  chloride  from  solu- 
tion during  the  concentration  of  a Keener  brine  issuing  from  the  initial  well 
in  a new  field  near  Miltonsburg,  Ohio. 


[The  figures  given  under  1 and  2 in  this  table  have  been,  recalculat'd  from  analyses  1 

and  2,  Table  17.] 


1 

la 

2 

3 

CaCU 

Grams  per 
liter. 

15. 76 
4. 08 
57. 39 
1. 14 

Grams  per 
liter. 

23. 36 
6.04 

} 86. 78 

Grams  per 
liter. 

23. 13 
5. 81 

74.16 

Grams 

{la-2). 

0.23 

.23 

12.62 

Per  cent. 

1. 76 
1. 76 
96.48 

MgCl2 

NaCl 

KC1 

78.37 

116. 18 

103. 10 

13.  08 

100. 00 
■ 

1.  Simplified  analysis  of  water  collected  when  the  well  was  one  month  old.  Gas,  oil,  and  water  were 
flowing  from  the  well.  The  approximate  rates  of  oil  and  water  production  are  shown  by  figure  4 (p.  51). 

la.  Same  water  as  1?  hypothetically  concentrated  to  67.48  per  cent  of  its  original  volume  (factor  1.482). 

2.  Simplified  analysis  of  water  collected  when  the  well  was  18  months  old.  During  the  interval  between 
the  collecting  of  samples  1 and  2 large  amounts  of  gas  and  oil  had  been  produced  from  this  and  neighboring 
wells.  The  changes  in  the  rates  of  production  of  oil  and  water  from  tne  well  are  shown  by  figure  4. 

3.  Approximately  the  weights  and  relative  proportions  of  the  salts  whose  removal  from  1.482  liters  of 
water  1 together  with  evaporation  would  yield"  1 liter  of  water  2. 


From  another  point  of  view,  however,  it  is  well  to  note  that  the 
differences  between  the  dissolved  solids  in  the  waters  under  compari- 
son can  be  expressed  merely  as  the  differences  between  columns  1 and 
2 in  Table  18.  One  liter  of  the  more  concentrated  water  whose  dis- 
solved constituents  are  represented  in  column  2 may  be  considered 
as  having  formed  through  the  introduction  into  an  equal  volume  of 
the  more  dilute  water  of  7.37  grams  of  calcium  chloride,  1.73  grams 
of  magnesium  chloride,  and  15.63  grams  of  sodium  and  potassium 
chlorides.  This  implies  an  accession  to  the  formerly  dilute  water  of 
salts  consisting  of  29.80  per  cent  of  calcium  chloride,  7 per  cent  of 
magnesium  chloride,  and  63.20  per  cent  of  sodium  and  potassium 
chlorides.  These  salts  are  too  soluble  to  have  remained  undissolved 
in  wTater  such  as  first  issued  from  the  well  and  were  therefore  not 
acquired  by  simple  leaching  during  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas.  It 
is  possible,  however,  that  waters  containing  relatively  large  propor- 
tions of  calcium  chloride  may  have  gained  access  to  the  well  from 
various  sources  as  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas  proceeded.  As  water 
is  drawn  from  a sandstone  reservoir  more  or  less  water  doubtless 
percolates  into  the  sand  from  the  surrounding  rocks.  Water  from 
shales  and  other  argillaceous  strata  might  contain  a relatively  large 
proportion  of  calcium  derived  through  the  exchange  of  sodium  in  the 
brines  for  calcium  in  the  reactive  minerals  of  the  shales.  The 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


55 


nature  of  the  reactions  involved  is  discussed  on  page  75. — The-^n- 
trance  of  such  waters  into  the  sands,  with  or  without  concentration, 
may  thus  account  for  the  changes  in  the  waters  noted  during  the  ex- 
traction of  oil  and  gas.  The  comparison  of  the  waters  can  thus 
be  made  on  the  basis  of  changes  of  either  type.  We  retain  the  com- 
parison in  terms  of  the  loss  of  sodium,  because  it  is  sufficient  for  the 
purpose  in  view  and  because  it  also  expresses  the  changes  that  occur 
when  the  waters  are  concentrated  to  the  point  of  deposition  of 
sodium  chloride. 

COMPARISONS  OF  WATERS-  FROM  THE  SAME  GEOLOGIC  HORIZONS  IN 
NEIGHBORING  FIELDS. 

From  numerous  detailed  comparisons  between  the  dissolved  con- 
stituents of  waters  collected  from  the  same  sands  in  neighboring 
fields  Tables  19  and  20  have  been  compiled  to  illustrate  the  evidence 
thus  obtained.  In  general,  the  more  concentrated  waters  occur  in  the 
older  fields.  Also,  with  but  few  exceptions,  the  ratio  of  calcium  to 
chlorine  is  greater  and  the  ratio  of  sodium  to  chlorine  is  smaller  in 
the  more  concentrated  waters.  Furthermore,  it  is  shown  that  almost 
invariably  the  concentration  of  the  more  dilute  water,  together  with 
the  removal  of  dissolved  constituents  consisting  essentially  of  sodium 
chloride,  would  yield  the  more  concentrated  water.  Again,  the  salts 
whose  removal  from  solution  can  thus  be  postulated  agree  in  com- 
position closely  with  the  salts  from  wells  and  with  natural  deposits 
of  chloride  salts.  The  differences  between  the  more  dilute  and  more 
concentrated  waters  in  the  same  sand  are  of  practically  a uniform 
type,  no  matter  whether  the  waters  are  drawn  from  a single  well  at 
different  stages  in  its  operation  or  from  neighboring  fields  where  the 
conditions  of  production  have  been  widely  different. 


56  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


Table  19. — Comparison  of  analyses  of  two  waters  from  the  Big  lime  sand  show- 
ing the  constituents  whose  removal  from  the  more  dilute  water,  together  with 
evaporation,  would  yield  the  more  concentrated  water. 


I Samples  collected  from  different  fields  4]  miles  apart  in  the  northern  part  of  Monroe  County,  Ohio.] 


1 

la 

2 

3 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0.02 
.08 
5. 58 
1.04 
23. 86 
= 25 
.32 
5C.  40 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0.04 
.17 
12.00 
2. 24 
51.30 
.54 
.69 
. 1 08. 36 

Groms 
per  liter. 
0.09 
.02 
11.56 
1.83 
39.27 

!03 
87. 50 

Grams 
(la-2). 
-0.05 
.15 
.44 
.41 
12.03 
- .15 
.66 
20. 86 

Per  cent. 

Fe..  

0.43 
1.27 
1. 19 
34.82 

Ca - 

Mg 

Na 

K 

C 

c 

1.91 
60. 38 

Cl 

Ca-f-Cl 

81.55 
0.  Ill 
.473 

175.34 

140. 99 
0. 132 
.449 

34.35 

100. 00 

Na-s-Cl 

Weights  and  proportions  of  compounds  whose  removal  from  2.150  liters  of  water  1,  together 
with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 

[Recalculated  from  No.  3,  above.] 


• 

Grams. 

Per  cent. 

co2 

0. 24 

0. 70 

II2Oa 

.10 

.29 

FeC03 

.31 

.91 

CaC03 

.20 

.58 

CaCl2....- 1 

1.00 

2.90 

MgCb * 

1.61 

4.66 

NaCl 

31.09 

89.  96 

KC1 

CaS04 

34.  55 

100. 00 

a This  represents  only  the  water  from  bicarbonates,  a very  small  amount  in  comparison  with  the  water 
lost  by  evaporation. 

1.  Brine  collected  September  15,  1916,  from  Big  lime  sand;  depth  1,339  to  1,349  feet;  new  gas  well  in  a 
new  oil  and  gas  field  near  Miltonsburg,  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Specific  gravity  of  the 
water  1 . 0559 . R . C . W ells,  analyst . 

la.  Same  water  as  No.  1,  hypothetically  concentrated  to  46.51  per  cent  of  its  original  volume  (factor 
2.150). 

2.  Brine  collected  April  24,  1915,  from  Big  lime  sand;  depth  1,431  to  1,444  feet;  from  an  old  oil  and  gas 
field  in  the  northeastern  part  of  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  near  Jerusalem  village.  S.  C. 
Dinsmore,  analyst. 

3.  Approximately  the  weights  and  relative  proportions  of  the  constituents  whose  removal  from  2.150 
liters  of  water  1,  together  with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 

Table  20. — Comparison  of  analyses  of  two  waters  from  the  Keener  sand,  show- 
ing the  constituents  whose  removal  from  the  more  dilute  water,  together  with 
evaporation,  would  yield  the  more  concentrated  water. 


[Samples  collected  from  different  fields  1\  miles  apart  in  the  northern  part  of  Monroe  County,  Ohio.] 


1 

la 

2 

3 

Si02 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 05 
.01 
2.98 
.08 
.83 
19.84 
.23 
.17 
38. 92 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0.20 
.14 
11. 62 
.31 
3.24 
77.38 
.90 
.66 
151.  79 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0.08 

Grams 
(la-2). 
0.12 
.04 
.26 
.31 
1. 61 
39.06 
.39 
.63 
67. 08 

Per  cent. 
0.11 
.04 
.24 
.28 
1.47 
35.  67 
.36 
.57 
61.26 

Fe 

Ca 

11.36 

Sr 

Mg 

1.63 
38. 32 
.51 
.03 
84.71 

Na 

K 

hco3 

Cl 

Can- Cl 

63.11 

.076 

246. 14 

136.  64 
. 134 
.452 

109.50 

100.00 

Na-r-Cl 

.510 

CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


57 


Table  20. — Comparison  of  analyses  of  tico  waters,  etc. — Continued. 

Weights  and  proportions  of  compounds  whose  removal  from  3.900  liters  of  water  1,  together 
with  evaporation,  would  yield  lvliter  of  water  2. 


[Recalculated  from  No.  3,  p.  56.) 


Grams. 

Per  cent. 

Si02 

0.12 

0.11 

CO  2 

.23 

.21 

H20« 

.09 

.08 

FeC03 

.08 

.07 

CaC03 

.42 

.38 

.47 

.42 

MgCl2 

6. 29 

5.  75 

NaCl 

101. 05 

92.30 

KC1 

.75 

.68 

109.  50 

100.00 

a This  represents  only  the  water  from  bicarbonates,  a very  small  amount  in  comparison  with  the  water 
lost  by  evaporation. 

1.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth,  1,302  feet:  sample  collected  November  7, 1916,  from  a new  oil  well  in 
a new  field  near  Monroefield,  Malaga  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio.  Very  little  gas  was  produced  in 
this  field.  Specific  gravity  of  the  water  1.0437.  R.  C.  Wells,  analyst. 

la.  Same  water  as  No.  1,  hypothetically  concentrated  to  25.64  per  cent  of  its  original  volume  (factor 
3.900). 

2.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth,  1,451  to  1,469  feet;  sample  collected  April  24, 1915,  from  an  old  oil  and 

gas  well  in  an  old  oil  and  gas  field  near  Jerusalem  Village,  Sunsbury  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio. 
S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst.  , 

3.  Approximately  the  weights  and  relative  proportions  of  the  constituents  whose  removal  from  3.900 
liters  of  water  1,  together  with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 

EVIDENCE  THAT  SIMILAR  DIFFERENCES  IN  THE  WATERS  HAVE 
BEEN  BROUGHT  ABOUT  DURING  GEOLOGIC  TIME. 

COMPARISON  OF  WATERS  FROM  DIFFERENT  GEOLOGIC  HORIZONS. 


In  the  foregoing  text  we  have  presented  evidence  that  changes  in 
the  waters  under  scrutiny  occur  during  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas 
from  the  reservoir  rocks.  The  changes  are  indicated  by  differences 
in  concentration,  differences  in  the  relative  proportions  of  the  dis- 
solved constituents,  the  apparent  loss  of  certain  constituents  from 
solution,  and  the  possible  accession  of  other  constituents.  It  appears, 
however,  that  such  changes  are  not  only  closely  related  to  the 
extraction  of  oil  and  gas  but  have  also  occurred  from  natural  causes 
during  geologic  time. 

As  evidence  bearing  on  this  subject  we  submit  in  Tables  21,  22, 
and  23  comparisons  of  waters  collected  from  beds  at  different 
geologic  horizons  in  the  same  and  neighboring  fields.  The  waters 
under  comparison  in  each  table  have  been  subjected  to  the  effects  of 
oil  and  gas  production  for  approximately  equal  periods  of  time,  the 
conditions  of  production  being  nearly  the  same,  but  nevertheless  the 
waters  show  marked  differences  in  concentration  as  well  as  in  the 
proportions  of  their  dissolved  constituents.  These  differences  are 
practically  the  same  as  those  which  appear  to  be  brought  about 
under  the  various  conditions  of  oil  and  gas  extraction  by  man.  We 
are  therefore  led  to  ascribe  them  to  the  same  causes.  The  more 


58  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

concentrated  solutions  have  probably  been  concentrated,  owing  to 
evaporation  into  expanding  gas  which  has  removed  more  water  than 
has  been  lost  from  the  dilute  solutions.  We  shall  next  attempt, 
therefore,  to  examine  the  evidence  of  the  natural  escape  of  gas  that 
might  afford  conditions  for  concentration  and  changes  in  the  waters 
similar  to  those  brought  about  during  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas. 


Table  21. — Comparison  of  analyses  of  two  gas-field  waters  from  different  geo- 
logic horizons,  shoicing  the  constituents  whose  removal  from  the  more  dilute 
water , together  icith  evaporation,  icould  yield  the  more  concentrated  water. 


1 

la 

2 

3 

Si02 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 22 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 99 

Grams 
per  liter , 
0. 70 

Grams 

(la-2). 

0.29 

Per  cent. 
0. 40 

Fe 

.06 

.27 

.02 

.25 

.35 

Ca 

2.75 

12.35 

12. 22 

.13 

.18 

Mg 

.86 

3.86 

2.88 

.98 

.35 

Na 

15. 85 

71:17 

45.88 

25.29 

34.95 

K 

.51 

2. 29 

.35 

1.94 

2.68 

hcc3 

.37 

1.66 

.02 

1.64 

2.27 

Cl 

32. 07 

143. 99 

102. 14 

41.35 

57.82 

Ca-r-Cl ; 

52.69 

0.086 

236.60 

164.  21 
0.120 

72.37 

100.00 

Na-i-Cl 

.494 

.449 

Weights  and  proportions  of  compounds  whose  removal  from  4.490  liters  of  water  1,  together 
with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 


[Recalculated  from  No.  3,  above.] 


Grams. 

Per  cent. 

Si02 

0.29 
.59 
.24 
.52 
.33 
.48 
3.30' 
62. 92 
3.70 

0.39 
.80 
.33 
.71 
. 45 
.66 
4.56 
86.98 
5.12 

co2 

HaOa 

FeCOs 

CaC03 

MgC03 

MgClo 

NaCl 

KCl 

72. 37 

100.00 

a This  represents  only  the  water  from  bicarbonates,  a very  small  amount  in  comparison  with  the  water 
lost  by  evaporation. 

1.  Brine  from  Berea  sand;  depth  1,748  to  1,760  feet;  sample  collected  April  2^,  1915,  from  a gas  well  1$ 
years  old  situated  in  an  old  gas  field  at  Summerfield,  Marion  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio.  S.  C.  Dins- 
more,  analyst. 

la.  Same  water  as  No.  1 hypothetically  concentrated  to  22.37  per  cent  of  its  original  volume  (factor  4.490). 

2.  Brine  from  Big  Injun  sand;  depth  1,200  feet;  sample  collected  April  27,  1915,  irom  a new  gas  well  in  an 
old  gas  field  at  Summerfield,  Marion  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio,  2'2  miles  lrom  well  in  which  sample 
1 was  obtained.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

3.  Represents  approx’'-nately  the  weights  and  relative  proportions  of  the  different  constituents  whose 
removal  from  4.490  liters  of  water  1,  together  with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  EIELD  WATERS. 


59 


Table  22. — Comparison  of  analyses  of  tiro  oil  and  gas  field  waters  from  differ- 
ent geologic  horizons,  showing  the  constituents  whose  removal  from  the  more 
dilute  water,  together  with  evaporation , would  yield  the  more  concentrated 
water. 


1 

la 

2 

3 

Sid2 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0.14 
.01 
.50 
2.79 
1.01 
19.49 
.50 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 66 
.05 
2.35 
13.11 
4.75 
91.60 
2.35 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 14 
.02 
.62 
12  98 
1.69 
43.40 
2.47 

Grams 

(la-2). 

0.52 

.03 

1.73 

.13 

3.06 

48.20 

.12 

Per  cent. 

0.38 
.02 
1.26 
.09 
2.  22 
34.99 

Fe 

A1 

Ca 

Mg 

Na 

K 

C03 

HCO3 

.05 

.24 

.04 

.20 

.15 

S04 

Cl 

38.69 

181. 84 

97.96 

83.88 

60.89 

Ca  • Cl  . v . 

63.18 
0. 072 
.503 

296. 95 

159.32 

0.133 

.443 

137.63 

100.00 

Na-nCl 

Weights  and  proportion  of  compounds  whose  removal  from  4.700  liters  of  water  1,  together 
with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 

[Recalculated  from  No.  3 above.] 


Grams. 

Per  cent. 

0.52 

0.38 

C02 

.07 

.05 

H2Oo  

.03 

.02 

.06 

.04 

CaC03 

.10 

.08 

CaCl2 

.18 

.21 

MgCl2 

12.00 

8.72 

NaCl  

124.69 

90.50 

137.75 

100.00 

a This  represents  only  the  water  from  bicarbonates,  a very  small  amount  in  comparison  with  the  water 
lost  by  evaporation. 

1.  Brine  April  30, 1915,  from  Berea  sand;  depth  1,570  to  1,592  feet;  from  an  old  oil  and  gas  well  in  an  old 
oil  and  gas  field,  Chaseville,  Seneca  Township.  Noble  County,  Ohio.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

la.  Same  water  as  No.  1,  hypothetically  concentrated  to  21.28  per  cent  of  its  original  volume  (factor 
4.700). 

2.  Brine  from  Keener  sand;  depth  870  to  880  feet;  sample  collected  May  1,  1915,  from  an  old  oil  and  gas 
well  in  an  old  oil  and  gas  field,  Chaseville,  Seneca  Township,  Noble  County,  Ohio,  1 mile  from  well  in  which 
sample  1 was  obtained.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

3.  Approximately  the  weights  and  relative  proportions  of  the  different  constituents  whose  removal 
from  4.700  liters  of  water  1 would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 


60  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


Table  23. — Comparison  of  analyses  of  two  oil  and  gas  field  waters  from  dif- 
ferent geologic  horizons,  showing  the  constituents  icliose  removal  from  the 
more  dilute  water,  together  with  evaporation,  would  yield  the  more  concen- 
trated water. 


1 

la 

2 

3 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 24 
.01 
.49 
10.  29 
1.85 
33. 76 
.26 
.02 
.12 
78. 78 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 37 
.01 
.76 
15.94 
2. 87 
52.30 
.40 
.03 
.19 
122. 04 

Grams 
per  liter. 
0. 12 
.05 
.83 
15.82 
1. 87 
40.79 
.95 
.03 
.13 
97. 61 

Grams 

(la-2). 

0.25 

-.04 

-.07 

.12 

1.00 

11.51 

-.55 

Per  cent. 
0.67 

Fe 

A1 

Ca 

.32 

2.68 

30.80 

Mg 

Na 

K 

HCOg 

S04 

.06 

24.43 

.16 
65. 37 

Cl 

Ca-5-Cl 

125. 82 
0. 131 
.429 

194. 91 

158. 20 
0. 162 
.418 

36.71 

100.00 

Na-i-Cl 

Weights  and  proportions  of  compounds  whose  removal  from  1.549  liters  of  water  1,  together 
with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of  water  2. 


[Recalculated  from  No.  3 above.] 


Grams. 

Per  cent. 

CaCl2 

MgCl2 - 

NaCl 

CaS04 

0.25 
.26 
3.92 
32. 86 
.08  ! 

0.67 
.70 
10.48 
87. 94 
.21 

37.37 

100.00 

1.  Brine  from  Hundred-foot  sand  ; depth  1,018  to  1,035  ; sample  collected  in  September, 
1915,  from  a new  oil  well  in  a new  oil  and  gas  field  where  production  had  not  yet  begun, 
Harlan  Book  farm,  on  Muddy  Creek  in  Clay  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.,  S.  C.  Dins- 
more,  analyst. 

la.  Same  water  as  No.  1,  hypothetically  concentrated  to  64.55  per  cent  of  its  original 
volume  (factor  1.549). 

2.  Brine  from  Bowlder  sand  ; depth  1,701  to  1,720  feet ; sample  collected  in  Septem- 
ber, 1915,  from  a new  oil  well  in  a new  field  where  production  had  just  begun,  Welsh 
farm,  Penn  Township,  Butler  County,  Pa.,  12|  miles  from  field  in  which  sample  1 was 
obtained.  S.  C.  Dinsmore,  analyst. 

3.  Approximately  the  weights  and  relative  proportions  of  the  constituents  whose  re- 
moval from  1.549  liters  of  water  1,  together  with  evaporation,  would  yield  1 liter  of 
water  2. 


EVIDENCE  OF  THE  NATURAL  ESCAPE  OF  GASES. 


Examples  of  gases  escaping  from  their  reservoir  rocks  under  such 
conditions  as  would  probably  bring  about  the  concentration  of  asso- 
ciated waters  are  found  to-day  in  many  parts  of  the  world,  and  it  is 
doubtful  if  there  are  any  important  oil  and  gas  regions  where  sur- 
face evidences  of  the  escape  of  gases  are  absent.  The  common  associ- 
ation of  gas  with  oil  and  the  almost  invariable  evidence  of  the  natural 
escape  of  oil  from  the  known  deposits  substantiate  this  statement. 

At  numerous  places  in  the  Appalachian  fields  gas  escapes  in  shal- 
low-water wells  and  in  springs,  such,  for  instance,  as  have  given  rise 


CHANGES  m OIL  AFTD  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


61 


to  the  name  Burning  Springs,  in  Wirt  County,  W.  Ya.  The  gas 
springs  in  Wirt  and  Kanawha  counties,  W.  Ya.,  have  been  described 
in  the  county  reports  of  the  West  Virginia  State  Geological  Survey. 
Similar  occurrences  in  western  New  York  have  been  repeatedly  de- 
scribed.' Concerning  the  natural  escape  of  gas  near  Fredonia,  Chau- 
tauqua County,  N.  Y.,  Orton1  says:  “ From  some  of  these  joints  gas 
constantly  escapes.  The  currents  are  much  weaker,  however,  at  the 
present  time  than  they  were  in  earlier  days.  When  water  occupies 
the  openings  formed  by  the  joints,  the  gas  appears  in  bubbles,  forcing 
its  way  through  the  water.  Such  springs  were  known  by  the  early 
French  explorers  of  the  country  as  “ fontaines  qui  bouillent.”  Escap- 
ing gas  is  also  reported  in  Jefferson 2 and  Allegany 3 counties,  N.  Y. 
Campbell 4 reports  the  escape  of  natural  gas  from  rock  crevices  near 
Richlands,  Tazewell  County,  Ya.  Munn5  reports  gas  seepages  near 
Memphis,  Tenn.  Gas  springs  are  reported  in  New  Brunswick  and 
Alberta,  Canada,  by  Clapp  and  others.6  Wegemann7  reports  a gas 
seepage  in  Palo  Pinto  County,  Tex.  “A  bubbling  spring  of  salt 
water,”  where  gas  is  evidently  escaping,  has  also  been  observed  in 
the  central  Australian  desert  by  Gregory.8 

Probably  the  most  striking  examples  of  the  natural  escape  of  the 
hydrocarbon  gases  are  afforded  by  the  so-called  mud  volcanoes,  which 
emit  enormous  volumes  of  combustible  gas,  together  with  concen- 
trated brines,  mud,  and  sand.  Thompson9  describes  mud  volcano 
phenomena  in  Russia,  Borneo,  Sumatra,  Burma,  Colombia,  and  Trin- 
idad. He  describes  violent  eruptions  of  gas,  which  becomes  ignited, 
in  the  Poota  and  Bingadi  districts,  near  Baku,  Russia,  and  he  also 
states  that  “ on  the  ridge  of  hills  fringing  the  Poota  Yalley  near  Baku 
there  is  an  area  of  about  an  acre  where  the  escaping  gas  is  rarely  if 
ever  extinguished.”  “ In  the  Yenangyat  district  of  Burma  a some- 
what similar  phenomenon  is  observed  at  Yenang  Daung.”  The  same 
writer  describes  many  other  outbursts  of  gas,  some  of  them  occur- 
ring under  subterranean  conditions. 

1 Orton,  Edward,  Petroleum  and  natural  gas  in  New  York : New  York  State  Mus. 
Bull.,  vol.  6,  No.  30,  p.  495,  1899. 

2 Idem,  p.  457. 

3 Haworth,  Erasmus,  Report  on  oil  and  gas : Kansas  Univ.  Geol.  Survey,  vol.  9, 
p.  11,  1908. 

4 Campbell,  M.  R.,  personal  communication. 

6  Munn,  M.  J.,  Explorations  for  natural  gas  and  oil  at  Memphis,  Tenn.  : Resources 
of  Tennessee,  vol.  2,  No.  2,  pp.  48-50,  1912. 

6 Clapp,  F.  G.,  Petroleum  and  natural  gas  resources  of  Canada,  vol.  2,  pp.  52-53, 
294-295,  1915. 

7 Wegemann,  C.  H.,  A reconnaissance  in  Palo  Pinto  County,  Tex.,  with  special  ref- 
erence to  oil  and  gas  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  G21,  p.  53,  1916. 

8 Gregory,  H.  E.,  Lovely  Australia,  the  unique  continent : Nat.  Geog.  Mag.,  vol.  30, 
p.  556,  1916. 

9 Thompson,  A.  B.,  Oil-field  development,  pp.  176-184,  New  York  and  London,  1916. 


62  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


Relative  to  the  salt  industry  of  the  East  Indies,  Harris 1 says : 

On  the  Island  of  Java  salt  is  also  made  from  brine  springs,  which  flow  from 
Miocene  beds  and  usually  contain  iodine  and’  bromide  salts,  as  well  as  sodium 
chloride.  Many  of  these  brines  contain  petroleum  and  gas.  The  most  striking 
are  those  of  Grobogan,  northeast  of  the  city  of  Samarang,  in  north-central 
Java.  According  to  Karsten,  the  brines,  which  are  associated  with  mud'  vol- 
canoes, are  in  a limestone  formation  that  forms  a circular  plain  half  a mile  in 
extent.  The  brine  springs  occur  in  large  numbers  and  boil  from  fissures  in  the 
rocks.  The  water  is  strongly  saline  and  gives  very  good  salt  on  evaporation. 
In  the  center  of  the  limestone  region  is  a remarkable  volcanic  phenomenon. 
On  approaching  this  from  a distance  one  sees  a dense  cloud  of  steam  that  at 
intervals  of  several  seconds  rises  and  then  disappears.  This  is  accompanied 
by  a roar  like  distant  thunder.  Near  by  one  perceives  a hemispherical  mass 
about  16  feet  in  diameter,  composed  of  black  mud  saturated  with  salt  water. 
This  mass  is  regularly  raised  to  a height  of  30  feet  by  an  underground  force 
and  then  explodes  with  a deafening  roar,  and  globular  masses  of  the  black  mud 
are  thrown  in  every  direction.  After  an  interval  of  two  to  four  seconds  the 
mass  of  mud  is  again  raised  and  again  torn  to  pieces  by  an  explosion.  For 
many  years  the  natives  have  obtained  salt  by  evaporating  the  brines  ejected 
by  these  mud  volcanoes.  The  salt  water  is  led  away  in  ditches  to  the  outskirts 
of  the  region  and  is  then  evaporated.  Some  200  metric  tons  are  made  annually. 

In  considering  the  subject  further  Harris  adds  that  “small  mud 
volcanoes  with  pools  of  salt  water  are  also  found  on  Ceram,  one  of 
the  Spice  Islands.” 

The  escape  of  gases,  especially  methane,  from  unconsolidated  car- 
bonaceous sediments  is  so  common  as  to  require  no  particular  com- 
ment. 

Shaw  2 has  described  emanations  of  gases  from  the  unconsolidated 
sediments  at  the  mouths  of  Mississippi  River.  Knapp 3 describes 
gas  seeps  in  Terrebonne  Parish,  La.,  and  also  quotes  from  the  New 
Orleans  Times-Democrat  of  November  26,  1911,  an  account  of  a gas 
eruption  in  the  sea  off  Erin  Point,  Trinidad,  on  November  11,  1911. 
After  describing  the  eruption,  the  account  says : “ The  next  day  it 
was  found  that  an  island  of  2^  acres  had  been  formed.  A landing 
party  found  the  place  still  warm  and  by  laying  down  boards  were 
able  to  examine  two  cones,  12  to  15  feet  high,  from  which  gas  was 
escaping.  The  air  was  saturated  with  the  odor  of  sulphur  and  oil.” 
In  the  same  contribution  Knapp  quotes  a report  that  gas  is  con- 
tinually forcing  up  cones  of  pitch  and  mud  in  the  pitch  lakes  region 
of  Trinidad. 

The  occurrence  of  native  bitumens  filling  fissures  is  in  some  locali- 
ties a surface  indication  of  the  presence  of  oil  and  gas  deposits  in 


1 Harris,  G.  D.,  Rock  salt,  its  origin,  geological  occurrences,  and  economic  importance 
in  the  State  of  Louisiana:  Louisiana  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  7,  pp.  198-199,  1908. 

2 Shaw,  E.  W.,  The  mud  lumps  at  the  mouths  of  the  Mississippi : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Prof.  Paper  85,  pp.  11-27,  1913. 

3 Knapp,  I.  N.,  discussion  of  paper  by  Roswell  H.  Johnson,  The  role  and  fate  of  the 
connate  water  in  oil  and  gas  sands  : Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  51,  pp.  593-597, 
1915. 


CHANGES  IN  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


63 


deeper  reservoir  rocks.  In  other  fields  fissures  filled  by  calcite  with 
scattered  inclusions  of  waxy  hydrocarbons  are  considered  an  indica- 
tion of  oil  or  gas.  The  solubility  of  certain  waxy  hydrocarbons  in 
gases  under  high  pressure  and  the  relative  insolubility  of  these 
hydrocarbons  in  the  same  gases  under  lower  pressures,  as  well  as  the 
fact  that  much  gas  is  evolved  during  the  mining  of  native  bitumens, 
suggest  that  vein  deposits  of  these  substances  may  owe  their  origin 
largely  to  the  influence  of  gases  that  escaped  through  fissures. 
Thompson1  states  that  masses  of  bitumen  are  often  ejected  with 
violence  from  the  working  faces  of  bitumen  mines  by  gas  which  has 
collected  under  pressure  in  the  minerals. 

Twenty  years  ago  I.  C.  White 2 called  attention  to  the  association 
of  deep-seated  deposits  of  petroleum  and  natural  gas  with  a fissure 
deposit  of  grahamite  in  Kitchie  County,  W.  Va.,  and  attributed  the 
formation  of  the  grahamite  in  part  to  the  escape  or  exudation  of 
petroleum  accompanied  by  its  oxidation.  He  furthermore  cited  the 
occurrence  of  coaly  bituminous  material,  believed  to  be  some  of  the 
hydrocarbon  minerals  originating  from  petroleum,  at  depths  of 
more  than  1,600  feet  as  evidence  that  outflows  of  petroleum  occurred 
in  the  Cairo  region  of  West  Virginia  “ at  the  close  of  the  lower 
Carboniferous  epoch.”  It  seems  probable  that  natural  gas  would 
have  accompanied  such  outflows  of  petroleum. 

Subsurface  movements  of  gas  unaccompanied  by  surface  emana- 
tions, though  probably  common  at  the  present  time,  can  not  be  de- 
tected. Furthermore,  as  most  of  the  natural  gas  seeps  that  have  been 
described  in  the  literature  were  detected  by  ebullitions  of  gas  through 
surface  waters,  it  is  obvious  that  numerous  seeps  where  the  gas  passes 
directly  into  the  air  have  never  been  detected. 

RELATIONS  BETWEEN  THE  GEOLOGIC  HISTORY  OF  CERTAIN  RESERVOIR 
ROCKS  AND  THEIR  INCLUDED  WATERS. 

In  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quadrangles,  in  southeastern 
Ohio,  the  occurrence  of  relatively  dilute  waters  in  the  deeply  buried 
Berea  sand,  which  is  overlain  several  hundred  feet  higher  by  the  Big 
lime,  Keener,  and  Big  Injun  sands,  containing  more  concentrated 
waters  (see  Tables  21  and  22),  is  interesting  because  it  suggests  a 
relation  between  the  geologic  history  of  these  reservoir  rocks  and  the 
concentration  of  their  included  waters,  namely,  that  the  more  con- 
centrated brines  are  now  found  in  the  strata  where  geologic  condi- 
tions were  at  one  time  favorable  for  the  escape  of  gas  and  the  con- 
sequent evaporation  of  water. 


1 Thompson,  A.  B.,  Oil-field  development,  p.  197,  New  York  and  London,  1916. 

2 Origin  of  grahamite  : Geol.  Soc.  America  Bull.,  vol.  10,  pp.  277-284,  1898. 


64  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

The  Berea  sand  in  the  Woodsfield  and  Summerfield  quadrangles 
is  lenticular  and  is  interbedded  in  thick  deposits  of  shale.  It 
overlies  the  unconformity  at  the  base  of  the  Mississippian  series  and 
is  overlain  by  several  hundred  feet  of  relatively  impermeable  shale. 
In  other  words,  the  lenses  of  Berea  sand  from  which  water  samples 
were  collected  and  studied  for  this  bulletin  have  remained  deeply 
buried  since  the  overlying  shales  were  deposited. 

The  Big  lime,  Keener,  and  Big  Injun  sands,  on  the  other  hand, 
closely  underlie  the  old  erosion  surface  that  marks  the  unconformity 
between  the  strata  of  Mississippian  and  Pennsylvanian  age,  and 
in  parts  of  the  two  quadrangles  the  Big  lime  sand  has  evidently  been 
removed  by  the  pre-Pennsylvanian  erosion.  Where  these  formerly 
shallow  rocks  were  not  eroded  they  were  covered  onty  by  a relatively 
thin  series  of  limestone,  shale,  and  sandstone  that  would  have  per- 
mitted the  escape  of  at  least  a part  of  their  gaseous  content.  We 
therefore  infer  that  the  brines  in  the  Big  lime,  Keener,  and  Big 
Injun  sands  were  concentrated  largely  by  the  evaporative  effect  of 
escaping  gases  during  pre-Pennsylvanian  erosion.  The  evaporation 
may  have  been  assisted  by  arid  climatic  conditions.  During  these 
changes  the  waters  in  the  lenses  of  Berea  sand  would  have  remained 
less  subject  to  evaporation  because  the  sand  was  protected  by  a thick 
cover  of  relatively  impermeable  shales. 

So  far  we  have  found  nothing  to  contradict  the  conclusion  set 
forth  above,  it  being  improbable  that  this  lenticular  part  of  the 
Berea  sand  would  constitute  a channel  for  the  deep  migration  of 
water  entering  the  bed  at  its  outcrop. 

HYPOTHESES  CONCERNING  THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  OIL 
AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 

HYPOTHESES  PREVIOUSLY  SUGGESTED. 

Before  fully  stating  our  hypothesis  relative  to  the  formation  of 
the  deep-seated  oil  and  gas  field  brines  we  will  discuss  some  of  the 
suggestions  offered  by  other  investigators.  As  long  ago  as  1875 
Hunt1  concluded  that  certain  deep-seated  chloride  waters  from  On- 
tario, which  are  characterized  by  their  large  content  of  calcium  and 
magnesium  chlorides,  are  long-buried  bitterns  derived  from  the 
evaporation  of  ancient  sea  water  which  was  considerably  richer  in 
calcium  chloride  than  the  sea  water  of  the  present  day.  He  sup- 
posed that  part  of  the  sodium  in  this  water  had  been  deposited  as 
sodium  chloride  and  that  the  sulphate  had  been  removed  as  gypsum. 
This  hypothesis  involves  widespread  arid  conditions  and  an  ancient 
sea  containing  a high  proportion  of  calcium  chloride.  Arid  condi- 


1 Hunt,  T.  S.,  Chemical  and  geological  essays,  p.  117.  Boston,  1875. 


HYPOTHESES  CONCERNING  ORIGIN  OE  WATERS. 


65 


tions  exist  in  certain  parts  of  the  world  at  the  present  time  and  may 
have  occurred  during  past  geologic  periods  that  would  have  left  the 
bitterns  somewhere  near  their  present  positions. 

Though  the  character  of  the  ancient  sea  has  been  a subject  of 
much  discussion,  it  remains  extremely  hypothetical.  Hunt’s  hypothe- 
sis regarding  the  excessive  calcium  chloride  content  of  early  ocean 
water  has  been  supported  by  Lane 1 in  several  contributions.  Daly,2 3 
on  the  other  hand,  postulates  a limeless  ocean  of  pre-Cambrian  time, 
and  in  a later  contribution 8 he  outlines  the  probable  changes  in 
the  salinity  of  the  ocean. 

We  believe  that  the  abundance  of  marine  fossils  in  sediments  that 
are  either  oil  and  gas  bearing  themselves  or  are  interbedded  with 
productive  sands  proves  that  conditions  in  the  early  seas  where  such 
sediments  were  deposited  were  suited  to  marine  life  that  could  not 
have  existed  in  brines  such  as  are  now  derived  from  oil  and  gas 
bearing  sands.  The  changes  by  which  the  brines  have  been  formed 
are  therefore  inferred  by  us  to  have  taken  place  since  the  inclusion 
of  the  waters  in  sedimentary  deposits. 

In  order  to  explain  the  abundance  of  calcium  chloride  in  certain  oil- 
field waters,  Washburne4 * *  offers  the  hypothesis  that  ancient  sea  water, 
after  being  entrapped  in  the  sediments,  has  been  deprived  of  its 
sodium  chloride  by  precipitation  due  to  concentration  of  the  water 
by  the  drying  influence  of  ascending  rock  gases,  such  as  nitrogen, 
carbon  dioxide,  and  methane,  but  he  drops  this  hypothesis,  with  mere 
mention,  in  favor  of  the  hypothesis  that  such  waters  have  received 
calcium  and  magnesium  as  well  as  sodium  chlorides  in  emanations 
from  deep-seated  basic  magmas.  The  part  played  by  gases  in  the 
concentration  of  the  brines  is  the  principal  subject  of  the  present 
contribution,  but  the  assumption  that  deep-seated  basic  rocks  have 
been  the  source  of  the  calcium  and  magnesium  chlorides  seems,  on 
consideration,  to  have  but  little  evidence  in  its  favor.  There  is  no 
reason  to  assume  that  the  oil  and  gas  bearing  strata  are  underlain  by 
basic  igneous  rocks,  and  the  data  from  deep  drilling  in  the  Appalach- 
ian fields  furnish  no  substantiating  evidence.  Even  were  the  pres- 
ence of  the  basic  igneous  rocks  proved,  it  would  be  difficult  to  con- 
ceive how  magmatic  emanations  entering  the  deeper  sediments  dur- 

1 Lane,  A.  C.,  The  chemical  evolution  of  the  ocean  : Jour.  Geology,  vol.  14,  pp.  221-225, 
1906  ; Mine  waters  and  their  field  assay  : Geol.  Soc.  America  Bull.,  vol.  19,  pp.  501-512, 
1908;  Connate  waters  of  the  Atlantic  coast  [abstract]:  Science,  new  ser.,  vol.  32, 
p.  190,  1910. 

2 Daly,  R.  A.,  The  limeless  ocean  of  pre-Cambrian  time:  Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  4th  ser.,  vol. 
23,  pp.  93-115,  1907. 

3 Daly,  R.  A.,  Some  chemical  conditions  in  the  pre-Cambrian  ocean : Cong.  g6ol. 
internat.,  lle  s?ss.,  Stockholm,  1910,  Compt.  rend.,  pp.  503-509,  1912. 

4 Washburne,  C.  W.,  Chlorides  in  oil-field  waters  : Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  48, 

pp.  687-693,  1914. 

91818°— 19 5 


66  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

mg  early  or  recent  geologic  time  could  have  so  extensively  permeated 
the  thousands  of  feet  of  overlying  sediments. 

In  a well  at  Findlay,  Ohio,1  pre-Cambrian  granite  or  granite 
gneiss  was  found  at  a depth  of  2,770  feet.  This  granite  rock  is  over- 
lain  by  sediments,  principally  quartzites,  calcareous  sandstones,  and 
dolomitic  limestones,  with  interbedded  clays  and  shales,  which  con- 
tain oil,  gas,  and  salt  water.  A natural  bittern,  called  Blue  Lick 
water,2  that  occurs  in  beds  of  St.  Peter  (Lower  Ordovician)  age,  was 
here  found  780  feet  above  the  granitic  rocks  and  apparently  in  no 
way  related  to  “basic  magmas”  as  postulated  by  Washburne. 

To  substantiate  his  hypothesis,  Washburne  states  that,  in  general, 
the  total  salinity  of  these  oil-field  waters  increases  with  depth. 
There  are,  however,  numerous  exceptions  to  this  rule.  In  the  Woods- 
field  and  Summerfield  quadrangles,  Ohio,  brines  from  lenticular 
portions  of  the  Berea  grit  are  less  saline  than  waters  occurring  in 
the  Maxton,  Big  lime,  Keener,  and  Big  Injun  sands,  several  hun- 
dred feet  higher  in  the  geologic  section.  The  lenses  of  Berea  sand, 
from  which  the  relatively  dilute  waters  are  derived,  are  overlain  and 
underlain  by  several  hundred  feet  of  shale.  Other  examples  of  deep- 
seated  chloride  waters  at  higher  horizons  than  comparatively  fresh 
water  are  cited  in  the  literature.3 

Richardson4  has  recently  called  attention  to  the  improbability 
that  the  deep-seated  brines  in  the  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  fields 
are  connate  waters  and  suggests  that  they  may  have  been  formed  by 
the  prolonged  leaching  of  great  masses  of  sedimentary  beds  by  per- 
colating ground  waters  and  by  the  diffusion  of  sodium  chloride  dis- 
solved from  deeply  buried  salt  beds.  The  retention  of  the  waters 
in  the  sediments  is  attributed  largely  to  the  troughlike  structure 
of  the  Appalachian  geosyncline. 

Under  certain  conditions  these  factors  have  been  influential,  but 
they  do  not  in  themselves  adequately  explain  the  formation  of  the 
brines.  Ground  waters  of  meteoric  origin  must  have  leached  the 
sediments  to  some  extent,  and  where  salt  beds  have  been  in  contact 
with  water-bearing  strata  salt  has  undoubtedly  been  transferred  by 
diffusion.  It  is  improbable,  however,  that  salt  beds  have  occurred 

1 Condit,  D.  D.,  Deep  wells  at  Findlay,  Ohio : Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  4th  ser.,  vol.  36, 
p.  123,  1913. 

2 Condit,  D.  D.,  op.  cit.  Orton,  Edward,  Ohio  Geol.  Survey  Kept.,  vol.  6,  p.  298,  1888. 

3 Sanford,  Samuel,  Saline  artesian  waters  of  the  Atlantic  Coastal  Plain  : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Water-Supply  Paper  258,  pp.  75-86,  1911. 

Stephenson,  L.  W.,  and  Palmer,  Chase,  A deep  well  at  Charleston,  S.  C.  : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Prof.  Paper  90,  pp.  69-94,  1915. 

Rogers,  G.  S.,  Chemical  relations  of  oil-field  waters  in  San  Joaquin  Valley,  Cal.  : 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  653,  p.  21,  1917. 

Lane,  A.  C.,  discussion  of  “ Chlorides  in  oil-field  waters,”  by  C W.  Washburne  : 
Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  48,  p.  693,  1914. 

4 Richardson,  G.  B.,  Note  on  Appalachian  oil-field  brines : Econ.  Geology,  vol.  12, 
pp.  37-41,  1917  ; Note  on  the  diffusion  of  sodium  chloride  in  Appalachian  oil-field  waters: 
Washington  Acad.  Sci.  Jour.,  vol.  7,  pp.  73-75,  1917. 


HYPOTHESES  CONCERNING  ORIGIN  OF  WATERS. 


67 


in  proximity  to  all  the  sands  of  the  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  fields 
in  which  concentrated  waters  are  now  found,  and  the  distances 
through  which  the  diffusion  of  salt  has  been  effective  can  only  be 
conjectured.  Some  additional  factors  to  account  for  the  concen- 
tration of  the  waters  seem  necessary.  It  must  also  be  noted  that 
the  salts  derived  through  the  complete  evaporation  of  brines  occur- 
ring in  very  deep  strata,  those  relatively  near  the  salt  beds  in  the 
Appalachian  fields,  generally  contain  smaller  proportions  of  sodium 
chloride  than  the  salts  from  brines  occurring  in  shallow  sands  that 
are  separated  from  salt  beds  by  thousands  of  feet  of  comparatively 
impermeable  shale.  This  makes  it  desirable  to  explain  more  fully 
the  causes  for  the  differences  in  the  relative  proportions  of  the  dis- 
solved constituents  in  the  oil  and  gas  field  waters. 

PRESENT  HYPOTHESIS. 

The  deep-seated  brines  of  the  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  fields,  as 
viewed  by  us,  are  only  in  part  the  derivatives  of  waters  of  sedimenta- 
tion which  were  included  when  the  sediments  were  deposited.  The 
chlorine  in  the  brines  has  been  derived  directly  or  indirectly  from 
the  waters  of  sedimentation,  but  practically  all  the  other  noteworthy 
constituents  have  been  derived,  at  least  in  part,  from  other  sources. 

Extensive  migration  and  the  partial  expulsion  of  the  originally 
included  waters  have  been  caused  by  the  consolidating  processes  to 
which  the  sediments  have  been  subjected,  more  especially  by  com- 
pacting due  to  the  increasing  weight  of  subsequently  deposited  ma- 
terial. Cementation,  heat,  rock  movements,  and  the  incursion  of  pe- 
troleum and  natural  gas  have  also  taken  part  in  causing  the  migra- 
tion and  expulsion  of  the  interstitial  waters. 

During  periods  of  erosion  ground  waters  of  meteoric  origin  have 
from  time  to  time  entered  the  sedimentary  rocks  and  have  been  re- 
tained and  buried  together  with  the  waters  of  sedimentation  or  their 
derivatives.  The  final  retention  of  the  waters  has  been  due  to  deep 
burial  under  relatively  impermeable  covers,  to  the  sealing  of  the  rock 
interstices,  and  to  the  basin-like  structure  of  the  Appalachian 
geosyncline.  ^ 

Profound  changes  in  the  waters  subsequent  to  their  inclusion  in 
the  sediments  have  resulted  from  the  mere  solution  of  certain  rock 
constituents  such  as  chlorides,  sulphates,  carbonates,  and  silicates, 
from  organo-chemical  processes  such  as  the  reduction  of  sulphates 
during  the  decomposition  of  organic  matter ; from  chemical  reactions 
brought  about  through  the  mixing  of  waters  having  different  proper- 
ties of  reaction,  which  is  illustrated  on  pages  50  and  75;  from  re- 
actions due  to  heat,  as  described  on  page  72;  and  from  reactions 
between  the  dissolved  constituents  of  the  waters  and  the  constituents 


68  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

of  the  rocks  with  which  the  waters  have  been  in  contact,  as  described 
on  page  74. 

The  waters  have  also  undergone  deep-seated  concentration.  This 
concentration,  which  we  believe  to  have  been  an  important  factor  in 
many  of  the  changes  that  the  waters  have  undergone,  was  assisted 
in  some  places  by  heat  and  very  generally  by  moving  or  expanding 
gases,  which  have  carried  off  water  as  vapor.  The  concentration 
thus  brought  about  has  been  accompanied  by  the  loss  from  the  waters 
of  certain  dissolved  constituents,  such  as  carbon  dioxide,  together 
with  other  gases,  carbonates  of  iron,  calcium,  and  magnesium,  small 
amounts  of  sulphates  of  barium,  strontium,  and  calcium,  and  also 
small  amounts  of  silica  as  quartz  or  combined  with  other  minor  con- 
stituents. Under  favorable  conditions  the  concentration  has  pro- 
ceeded to  the  extent  of  causing  the  separation  of  sodium  chloride 
with  minor  proportions  of  calcium,  magnesium,  and  potassium 
chlorides. 

In  the  succeeding  pages  these  deep-seated  processes,  which  have,  no 
doubt,  been  closely  related  and  which  have  acted  together,  so  that 
their  combined  effects  are  now  to  be  observed  in  the  oil  and  gas  field 
brines,  are  considered  in  detail. 

HISTORY  OF  THE  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 
INCLUSION  AND  MIGRATION  OF  WATERS  OF  SEDIMENTATION. 

During  periods  of  sedimentation  vast  quantities  of  sea  water  are 
included  interstitially  in  marine  sediments.1  The  water  content 2 of 
muds  such  as  those  recently  deposited  along  sea  coasts  range  from  40 
or  50  per  cent  to  as  much  as  90  per  cent  by  volume.  In  freshly  de- 
posited, unconsolidated  sands  the  water  content  may  vary  from  15 
or  20  per  cent  to  more  than  30  per  cent  of  the  volume.  King3  has 
shown  that  the  interstitially  included  waters  of  sedimentation,  or 
“ connate  waters,”  4 as  they  have  been  called  by  some  investigators, 
have  probably  undergone  extensive  upward  migration  toward  the 
regions  of  least  pressure  during  the  consolidation  and  induration  of 
the  sediments.  The  processes  of  compacting  under  increasingly 
great  pressure,  rearrangement  of  the  mineral  constituents  of  the  sedi- 
ments, and  cementation  due  to  the  deposition  of  dissolved  mineral 

1 King,  F.  H.,  Principles  and  conditions  of  the  movements  of  ground  water : TJ.  S. 
Geol.  Survey  Nineteenth  Ann.  Rept.,  pt.  2,  p.  77,  1898. 

2 King,  F.  H.,  idem.  Shaw,  E.  W.,  discussion  of  paper  by  R.  W.  Johnson,  The  role 
and  fate  of  the  connate  water  in  oil  and  gas  sands : Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  51, 
p.  597,  1915. 

3 King,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  59-294. 

4 The  Century  Dictionary  defines  the  word  “ connate  ” as  follows : “ Inborn,  im- 
planted at  or  existing  from  birth.”  The  word  was  first  used  to  designate  interstitially 
included  waters  of  sedimentation  by  A.  C.  Lane  (Mine  waters  and  their  field  assay : 
Geol.  Soc.  America  Bull.,  vol.  19,  pp.  501-512,  1908). 


HISTORY  OF  THE  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


69 


matter  from  interstitial  waters  were,  no  doubt,  contributive  causes 
of  this  expulsion  of  water.  It  also  seems  probable  that  thermal 
migration,  due  in  part  to  the  expansion  of  interstitial  gases,1  and 
migration  resulting  from  pressure  accompanying  rock  movement2 
may  have  been  factors  worthy  of  consideration. 

Relative  to  the  migration  of  waters  of  sedimentation,  King 1 says : 

In  the  case  of  extensive  beds  of  clay  deposits  which  have  given  rise  to  shales 
and  rocks  of  that  type,  it  is  not  improbable  that  the  extremely  large  original 
pore  space  of  40  to  50  per  cent  in  these  sediments  has  been  reduced  to  its  pres- 
ent small  proportions  3 through  compression ; but  be  this  as  it  may,  there  must 
even  then  have  been  a ground-water  movement  measured  by  the  actual  reduc- 
tion of  pore  space  which  has  taken  place,  for  the  water  of  sedimentation  must 
of  necessity  have  been  expelled  before  the  reduction  of  volume  could  have 
occurred. 

He  also  says : 4 

The  final  or  nearly  complete  consolidation  of  50,000  square  miles  of  sediment 

1.000  feet  deep,  having  a pore  space  of.  33  per  cent,  filled  with  water,  involves 
the  actual  transfer  to  a different  region  of  the  equivalent  of  a sheet  of  water 

50.000  square  miles  in  area  and  300  feet  deep,  when  there  is  still  left  within  the 
mass  a pore  space 'of  3 per  cent  filled  with  water. 

There  can  be  little  doubt,  therefore,  that  very  great  volumes  of 
water  of  deposition  have  passed  through  or  along  relatively  porous 
beds  of  sand,  and  that  under  favorable  conditions  water  originally 
included  in  deeper  sediments  has  been  retained  and  is  now.  found  in 
sandstone  reservoirs.  If  this  is  true,  it  follows  that  waters  in  oil 
and  gas  bearing  strata  can  not  be  “ connate”  in  the  strict  sense  of 
the  word. 

Lane5  has  called  attention  to  the  original  differences  between 
waters  of  sedimentation.  Some  were  probably  fresh  water,  others 
may  have  been  brackish  or  even  highly  concentrated  waters  from 
inclosed  basins,  but  the  greatest  sources  of  these  waters  were  seas, 
which  were  probably  less  saline  than  those  of  present  time.6  During 
their  migration  through  the  sediments  the  waters  of  sedimentation 
of  different  types  must  have  undergone  more  or  less  mixing,  both 
with  waters  of  sedimentation  of  other  types  and  with  various  ground 
wTaters  of  meteoric  origin.  The  oil  and  gas  field  waters  are  believed 
to  be  largely  the  derivatives  of  these  mixtures. 

1 King,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  p.  84. 

2 Daly,  M.  R.,  The  diastrophic  theory  : Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  52,  pp.  1137-1151, 
1916. 

3 The  average  total  porosity  of  shales  may  be  considered  about  13  per  cent. 

4 King,  F.  H.,  op.  cit.,  p.  83. 

6 Lane,  A.  C.,  Mine  waters  and  their  field  assay  : Geol.  Soc.  America  Bull.,  vol.  19, 
pp.  501-512,  1908. 

8 Daly,  R.  A.,  Some  chemical  conditions  in  the  pre-Cambrian  ocean  : Cong.  geol. 
internat.,  lle  sess.,  Stockholm,  1910,  Compt.  rend.,  pp.  503-509,  1912. 


70  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

CHANGES  IN  THE  WATERS  OF  SEDIMENTATION. 

The  chemical  changes  that  waters  of  sedimentation  undergo  soon 
after  they  are  included  in  the  sediments  on  the  ocean  floor  have  been 
investigated  by  Murray  and  Irvine,1  who  show  that  sea  water  asso- 
ciated with  the  deposits  at  the  sea  bottom  is  often  of  a different 
chemical  composition  from  the  normal  sea  water  overlying  the  de- 
posit, and  especially  so  in  the  deposits  known  as  blue  muds.  The 
mud  waters  were  collected  from  coastal  as  well  as  pelagic  deposits 
and  are  shown  by  a series  of  analyses  to  contain  only  about  50  per 
cent  as  much  sulphate  as  the  normal  ocean  water.  This  difference  is 
attributed  to  the  reducing  effects  accompanying  the  process  of  decom- 
position of  organic  matter.  The  reduction  of  the  sulphate  is  accom- 
panied by  the  formation  of  carbonate,  the  proportion  of  carbonate 
in  the  mud  waters  being  thereby  increased.  At  the  same  time  an 
unstable  sulphide  of  iron  is  deposited  in  the  muds,  imparting  to  them 
their  characteristically  blue  color.  It  has  been  proved  that  the 
reduction  of  the  sulphates  and  the  contemporary  formation  of  car- 
bonate and  sulphide  are  due  not  merely  to  the  presence  of  decompos- 
ing organic  matter  but  to  the  action  of  microorganisms.2  Rogers  3 
has  recently  contributed  a detailed  discussion  of  the  reduction  of 
sulphates  in  oil-field  waters  and  cites  evidence  that  the  sulphates  are 
reduced  directly  by  contact  with  the  constituents  of  petroleum  and 
natural  gas,  as  well  as  by  bacterial  action. 

Ammonia  and  hydrogen  sulphide  formed  from  decomposing 
organic  matter  have  been  repeatedly  detected  in  deep  ocean  water 
and  bottom  muds,  and  the  proportion  of  ammonium  salts  in  the  mud 
waters  exceeds  that  in  normal  ocean  water.  It  has  been  suggested 
that  ammonium  carbonate,  reacting  with  interstitially  included  cal- 
cium and  magnesium  salts,  precipitates  calcium  carbonate  and  some 
magnesium  carbonate.4  This  precipitation  may  be  increased,  experi- 
mentally, by  boiling  the  solution.  Relative  to  the  changes  in  mud 
waters,  Daly  discusses  the  results  obtained  by  Murray  and  Irvine5 
as  follows: 

In  the  mud  water  calcium  sulphate  is  absent,  magnesium  sulphate  is  deficient 
when  compared  with  average  sea  water,  calcium  carbonate  is  increased,  and 

1 Murray,  John,  and  Irvine,  Robert,  On  the  chemical  changes  in  the  composition  of 
sea-water  : Roy.  Soc.  Edinburgh  Trans.,  vol.  37,  pp.  481—507,  1895. 

2 Meyer,  Lother,  Chemische  Untersuchung  der  Thermen  zu  Landeck  in  der  Grafschaft 
Glatz  : Jour,  prakt.  Chemie,  Band  91,  pp.  5-6,  1864.  Plauchud,  E.,  Recherches  sur  la 
formation  des  eaux  sulfureuses  naturelles  : Compt.  Rond.,  vol.  84,  p.  235,  1877  ; Sur  la 
reduction  des  sulfates  par  les  sulfuraires,  et  sur  la  formation  des  sulfures  mStalliques, 
naturels : Idem,  vo*l.  95,  p.  1363,  1S82.  Etard,  A.,  and  Oliver,  L.,  De  la  reduction  des 
sulfates  par  les  gtres  vivants  : Idem,  vol.  95,  p.  846,  1882. 

3 Rogers,  G.  S.,  Chemical  relations  of  the  oil-field  waters  in  San  Joaquin  Valley,  Cal. : 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  653,  1917. 

4 Daly,  R.  A.,  The  limeless  ofcean  of  pre-Cambrian  time  : Am.  Jour.  Sci.,  4th  ser.,  vol.  23, 
pp.  93-115,  1907. 

5 Murray,  John,  and  Irvine,  Robert,  op.  cit. 


HISTORY  OF  THE  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS. 


71 


magnesium  carbonate  and  ammonium  sulphate  are  both  present.  The  high 
chlorides  show  that  the  carbonates  are  not  in  excess  because,  of  fresh-water 
inflow.  The  ratio  of  magnesium  carbonate  to  calcium  carbonate  is  1:3.  When 
the  clear  water  filtered  from  the  mud  was  boiled  for  a short  time,  a crystalline 
precipitate  was  thrown  down,  consisting  of  73.3  per  cent  calcium  carbonate  and 
26.7  per  cent  magnesium  carbonate.  The  formation  of  both  carbonates  is 
ascribed  by  Murray  and  Irvine  to  the  reaction  of  ammonium  carbonate  chiefly 
on  the  sulphates,  a conclusion  which  can  not  be  doubted,  especially  in  view 
of  the  presence  of  ammonium  sulphate  in  the  mud  water.  The  alkaline  car- 
bonate was,  of  course,  derived  from  decaying  animal  matter  contained  in  the 
muds. 

The  slight  increase  in  the  proportion  of  chlorine,  due  to  its  reten- 
tion while  certain  other  constituents  are  lost  from  solution,  is  another 
step  toward  the  formation  of  the  brines. 

To  what  extent  the  chemical  changes  continue  during  the  deeper 
burial  of  the  mud  waters  can  only  be  conjectured,  though  it  seems 
certain  that  the  waters  associated  with  buried  organic  matter  must 
have  been  changed  during  the  formation  of  natural  gas  and  petro- 
leum. We  would  therefore  accept  Rogers’s  conclusions  that  sul- 
phates were  practically  removed  from  the  waters  during  the  earlier 
part  of  the  period  when  they  were  buried  or  during  their  long 
association  with  organic  matter.  As  ammonia  and  carbon  dioxide 
are  not  found  in  any  noteworthy  concentration  in  the  Appalachian 
oil-field  waters,  it  seems  logical  to  assume  that  those  compounds 
have  either  escaped  with  other  gases  or  entered  into  more  stable 
combinations. 

Another  striking  characteristic  remaining  to  be  explained  is  the 
calcium  and  magnesium  content  of  these  deep-seated  waters.  Pos- 
sibty  the  common  occurrence  of  dolomitic  limestones  in  oil  and  gas 
bearing  strata  may  throw  some  light  on  this  problem.  It  seems  prob- 
able that  some  of  the  magnesium  in  dolomite  may  have  been  con- 
tributed directly  to  the  sediments  by  the  same  organisms  that  secreted 
calcium  carbonate.1  In  addition  to  this,  magnesium  in  solution  may 
have  been  exchanged  in  part  with  the  calcium  in  solid  calcium  car- 
bonate, thus  forming  dolomite.  Experimental  evidence  for  and 
against  this  possibility  is  presented  by  Clarke.2 

An  essential  requirement  for  the  formation  of  dolomite  by  the 
last-mentioned  reaction  appears  to  be  an  appreciable  elevation  of 
temperature.  But  if  a moderate  elevation  of  temperature  is  postu- 
lated there  is  the  simple  possibility  that  during  thermal  concentra- 
tion the  solutions  undergo  hydrolysis  and  magnesium  is  precipitated 
as  hydroxide,  basic  carbonate,  or  carbonate,  as  indicated  by  the 

1 Clarke,  F.  W.,  and  Wheeler,  W.  C.,  The  inorganic  constituents  of  marine  inverte- 
brates : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Prof.  Paper  102,  1917. 

2 Clarke,  F.  W.,  The  data  of  geochemistry,  3d  ed. : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  616, 
pp.  559-570,  1916. 


72  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

studies  of  Davis1  and  Fisher.2  The  reactions,  which  for  simplicity 
may  be  regarded  as  those  accompanying  the  hydrolysis  of  a solution 
of  magnesium  carbonate  or  of  magnesium  chloride — 


MgC03+H20=Mg  (OH)  2+C02 
MgCl2+2H20=Mg(0H)2+2HCl 

would  be  followed  by  the  evolution  of  carbon  dioxide,  according  to 
the  first  equation  cited  or  from  the  reaction  of  the  hydrochloric  acid 
with  carbonates. 

If,  for  instance,  a reaction  according  to  the  second  equation  should 
take  place  in  the  presence  of  calcium  carbonate,  calcium  chloride, 
carbon  dioxide,  and  water  would  be  formed.  A striking  example  of 
this  was  observed  during  the  field  studies  relative  to  this  bulletin. 
The  water  jackets  of  the  gas  engines  used  for  pumping  oil  and  water 
from  the  wells  become  badly  caked  with  calcium  carbonate  crusts 
when  shallow  well  waters  are  used  for  cooling  the  engines.  To 
remove  these  crusts  oil-well  brines  are  passed  through  the  water 
jackets.  When  subjected  to  the  heat  of  the  engines  the  magnesium 
chloride  in  solution  in  the  brines  hydrolyzes  according  to  the  second 
equation,  and  the  calcium  carbonate  crusts  are  removed  as  calcium 
chloride,  carbon  dioxide,  and  water  according  to  the  reaction 

CaC03+2HCl=CaCl2+C02+H20 

The  fact  that  these  changes  take  place  when  the  oil-field  brines  are 
subjected  to  moderate  heat  gives  direct  evidence  bearing  on  the  pos- 
sible loss  of  magnesium  and  accession  of  calcium  in  the  waters.  It 
must  also  be  observed  that  the  introduction  of  calcium  chloride  into 
the  deep-seated  waters  would  affect  the  solubility  of  sodium  chloride 
in  the  same  solutions  and  thus  influence  the  changes  that  have  been 
noted.  In  the  absence  of  recorded  quantitative  data  on  this  subject 
we  have  determined  the  solubility  of  sodium  chloride  at  25°  C.  in  the 
presence  of  different  amounts  of  calcium  chloride,  with  the  results 
stated  in  Table  24.  The  solutions  were  agitated  in  a thermostat  for 
a period  of  over  two  hours  for  each  determination.  The  specific 
gravity  was  determined  by  weighing  5 or  10  cubic  centimeter  por- 
tions run  out  from  a pipette  after  filling  the  pipette  by  suction 
through  a small  asbestos  cap  which  served  as  a filter. 


1 Davis,  W.  A.,  Studies  of  basic  carbonates  : Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  Jour.,  vol.  25,  p.  788,  1906. 

2 Fisher,  Ferd,  Dingler’s  Polyt.  Jour.,  vol.  212,  p.  208. 


HISTORY  OF  THE  OIL  AHD  GAS  FIELD  WATERS.  73 

Table  24. — Solubility  of  sodium  chloride  in  water  containing  calcium  chloride 

at  25°  C. 


Specific 
gravity  of 
solution. 

CaCl2  in 
solution 
(per  cent 
by  weight). 

NaClin 
solution 
(per  cent 
by  weight). 

1.202 

0.000 

26. 43 

1.207 

1.103 

25. 30 

1.210 

2.160 

24.32 

1.209 

3. 220 

23.37 

1.216 

5. 451 

20.43 

1.220 

7.598 

19.17 

1.225 

9.500 

17. 55 

1.233 

11.48 

15.91 

1.241 

17. 77 

10.  54 

1.257 

21.00 

8.05 

1.276 

24.58 

5.63 

It  will  be  observed  from  this  table  that  the  solubility  of  sodium 
chloride  is  greatly  diminished  by  the  presence  of  calcium  chloride. 
This  accords  with  the  fact  that  the  concentrated  oil  and  gas  field 
waters  containing  the  greatest  proportions  of  calcium  chloride  also 
contain  the  smallest  proportions  of  sodium  chloride. 

Evidence  in  regard  to  the  precipitation  of  magnesium  from  heated 
sea  water  is  given  by  Rowan,1  who  presents  a series  of  analyses  of 
boiler  crusts  formed  from  sea  water.  These  crusts  contain  from  1.8 
to  40  per  cent  of  magnesium  oxide.  The  crusts  containing  the  most 
magnesium  and  least  calcium  were  deposited  at  relatively  low  tem- 
perature and  pressure.  Those  containing  the  most  calcium  and  the 
least  magnesium  were  deposited  at  relatively  high  pressure  and  tem- 
perature. Magnesium  was  probably  precipitated  as  hydroxide  and 
calcium  as  calcium  sulphate. 

It  is  also  very  probable  that  magnesium  has  been  lost  from  the 
waters  to  form  magnesium  silicates.  Hunt2  has  proved  that  mag- 
nesium chloride  reacts  with  calcium  silicates  to  form  magnesium 
silicates  and  calcium  chloride.  That  this  or  a similar  reaction  may 
have  caused  the  removal  of  magnesium  and  the  introduction  of  cal- 
cium into  the  waters  is  made  to  appear  more  probable  by  the  fact 
that  secondary  magnesium  silicates  (chlorites)  are  disseminated 
through  some  of  the  oil  and  gas  bearing  rocks. 

In  discussing  the  interaction  between  certain  silicates  and  the  dis- 
solved constituents  of  saline  waters  Sullivan 3 refers  to  the  early 
investigations  of  Lemberg,  as  follows : 

In  1870  Lemberg  began  the  publication  of  bis  work  on  the  transformation  of 
silicates  by  salt  solutions.  His  experiments,  whose  number  runs  into  the  hun- 
dreds, constitute  a mine  of  important  observations  in  the  chemistry  of  minerals 

1 Rowan,  F.  J.,  The  practical  physics  of  the  steam  boiler,  p.  613  (appendix  3),  New 

York,  D.  Van  Nostrand  & Co.,  1903. 

3 Hunt,  T.  S.,  Chemical  and  geological  essays,  p.  122,  1878. 

3 Sullivan,  E.  C.,  The  interaction  between  minerals  and  water  solutions,  with  special 
reference  to  geologic  phenomena  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  312,  p.  20,  1907. 


74  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


and  of  geologic  processes.  The  silicates  used  were,  in  the  main,  those  related 
to  the  zeolites,  but  others  were  included.  The  solutions  were  chiefly  of  salts 
of  the  alkalies  and  alkaline  earths,  but  embraced  also  such  bases  as  iron, 
aluminum,  silver,  and  thallium.  The  outcome  of  the  experiments  was  usually 
either  (1)  exchange  of  bases  in  equivalent  quantity  between  silicate  and  solu- 
tion; (2)  addition  of  base  to  the  silicate,  especially  from  alkaline  solution; 
(3)  addition  of  entire  salt;  or  (4)  addition  or  subtraction  of  water.  Fre- 
quently, if  not  usually,  transformation  to  a different  mineral  species,  often  crys- 
talline in  form,  ensued.  Most  of  the  work  was  done  at  temperatures  ranging 
between  100°  and  200°  C.,  although  some  of  it  was  performed  at  ordinary  room 
temperature.  The  first  papers1  contain  studies  of  the  action  of  magnesium 
salt  solutions  on  such  silicates  as  apophyllite,  gehlenite,  vesuvianite,  datolite, 
and  wollastonite ; practically  equivalent  substitution  of  magnesium  for  calcium 
and  potassium  took  place.  The  work  with  wollastonite  was  conducted  at  room 
temperature  and  also  at  100°  C.,  with  the  following  results : 


Action  of  magnesium  sulphate  on  wollastonite. 


CaO. 

MgO. 

Wollastonite,  nrifn'nal  content _ _ 

44.1 

Wollastonite  after  contact  with  MgSO*  solution: 

Two  years  at  room  temperature 

27.4 

11.5 

Twenty -five  days  at  100°  C 

1.0 

32.0 

The  action  is  the  same  in  the  cold  as  at  100° — an  approximately  equivalent 
exchange  of  calcium  for  magnesium. 

Palmer2  has  called  our  attention  to  the  long-established  use  of 
sodium  silicate  as  a precipitant  of  magnesium  from  hard  waters  con- 
taining both  magnesium  and  calcium  and  suggests  that  similar 
reactions  may  have  occurred  in  nature.  Artificial  zeolites  (complex 
alkali  aluminosilicates),  under  the  name  permutite,  have  recently 
come  into  use  in  wajter  softening.  Hard  water  filtering  through  a 
bed  of  this  material  deposits  its  calcium  and  magnesium  and  takes 
up  an  equivalent  amount  of  sodium.  The  permutite  is  regenerated 
by  passing  through  it  a strong  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  the  mag- 
nesium and  calcium  in  the  bed  being  thereby  carried  out  as  magne- 
sium chloride  and  calcium  chloride,  and  the  sodium  zeolite  is  re- 
newed. The  reaction  is  reversible,  going  in  one  direction  or  the 
other  in  accordance  with  the  concentration  of  calcium  and  magne- 
sium or  of  sodium  in  the  solution. 

The  type  reaction  between  the  constituents  of  a hard  water  and 
an  alkali  aluminosilicate  may  be  expressed  as 

Na2Al2Si2Os+Ca  (HC03)  2=CaAl2Si208+2NaHC03 
in  which  K may  be  substituted  for  Na;  S04,  2C1,  or  2NOa  for 

1 Deutsch.  geol.  Gesell.  Zeitschr.,  vol.  22,  pp.  335,  803,  1870 ; vol.  24, 'p.  187,  1872. 

2 Palmer,  Chase,  personal  communication. 


HISTORY  OF  THE  OIL  AND  GAS  FIELD  WATERS.  75 

2(HC03)  ; and  Mg,  Ba,  or  Sr  for  Ca.  The  type  reaction  when  the 
process  is  reversed  may  be  expressed  as 

CaAl2Si2Os+2NaCl=Na2Al2Si208+CaCl2 

in  which  Mg,  Ba,  or  Sr  may  be  substituted  for  Ca,  and  K for  Na,  as 
in  the  preceding  reaction. 

It  appears  probable  that  the  hydrated  alkali  aluminosilicates  which 
occur  as  disseminated  constituents  in  shales  and  sandstones  or  in  beds 
such  as  the  bentonite  deposits  of  the  western  United  States,  and  which 
originated  through  the  decomposition  of  igneous  and  metamorphic 
rocks,  have  caused  changes  in  these  deeply  buried  waters  similar  to 
those  just  described.  For  instance,  it  is  possible  that  hard  waters  con- 
taining calcium  and  magnesium,  reacting  with  certain  hydrated  alkali 
aluminosilicates  in  the  reservoir  rocks,  or  with  the  constituents  of  pri- 
mary alkaline  waters  such  as  are  represented  in  Table  14  (pp.  42-43), 
have  deposited  calcium  and  magnesium.  The  subsequent  incursion 
of  concentrated  sodium  chloride  waters  would  then  convert  the  cal- 
cium and  magnesium  into  chlorides,  the  reaction  being  accompanied 
by  an  equivalent  loss  of  sodium  from  solution.  It  is  significant  that 
there  is  a wide  range  of  glassy  rocks  and  minerals  and  their  deriva- 
tives which,  when  hydrated,  will  react  to  remove  magnesium  and 
calcium  from  hard  waters  and  which  will  give  up  the  calcium  and 
magnesium  thus  removed  if  treated  with  a concentrated  solution  of 
sodium  chloride.  Many  of  these  minerals  and  their  hydrated  decom- 
position products  have  been  recognized  during  studies  of  deep-sea 
deposits  collected  by  the  Challenger  expedition.1  Feldspars  and 
micas  are  common  constituents  of  some  of  the  oil  and  gas  bearing 
rocks,  and  the  fact  that  more  of  the  alkali-bearing  silicates  are  not 
recognized  in  the  sedimentary  rocks  of  the  Appalachian  oil  and  gas 
fields  may  be  due  to  the  more  or.  less  complete  alteration  of  these 
minerals  to  yield  calcium  and  magnesium  bearing  silicates  or  other 
secondary  minerals.  More  detailed  studies  of  the  Appalachian  oil 
and  gas  field  sediments  and  of  the  bentonite  deposits  and  their  asso- 
ciated waters  in  the  western  United  States  will  doubtless  throw  light 
on  this  subject. 

Another  reaction  between  the  saline  waters  and  certain  minerals  in 
the  sediments  is  described  by  Sullivan,2  who  has  discussed  at  some 
length  the  removal  of  potassium  from  saline  waters  through  the  selec- 
tive action  of  hydrated  aluminosilicates  such  as  those  that  occur  in 
muds  and  shales.  The  affinity  of  potassium  for  these  silicates  is 
greater  than  that  of  sodium,  and  hence  they  retain  potassium  in  pref- 
erence to  sodium. 

The  concentration  of  the  interstitially  included  waters  by  the  re- 
moval of  water  vapor  in  escaping  gases  and  to  a dess  extent  by  the 


1 Challenger  Rept.,  Deep-sea  deposits,  p.  321,  1891. 

2 Sullivan,  E.  C.,  op.  cit.,  p.  22. 


76  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

hydration  of  minerals  probably  began  soon  after  the  waters  were 
buried,  and,  in  conjunction  with  chemical  reaction,  it  has  resulted  in 
the  loss  of  several  constituents,  among  which  may  be  mentioned  cal- 
cium carbonate,  calcium  sulphate,  and  possibly  some  magnesium  sul- 
phate, where  sulphates  were  present.  Under  favorable  conditions 
the  concentration  was  also  followed  by  the  deposition  of  sodium 
chloride  with  calcium  and  magnesium  chlorides  as  impurities.  The 
repeated  deposition  and  re-solution  of  the  salts,  accompanied  by  the 
more  ready  deposition  of  sodium  chloride  and  the  retention  or  more 
ready  re-solution  of  calcium  and  magnesium  chlorides  might  also 
have  influenced  the  composition  of  the  waters. 

It  is  evident  that  there  is  a wide  range  of  possibilities  whereby  the 
acquisition  or  loss  of  the  various  constituents  in  oil  and  gas  field 
waters  can  be  explained. 

DEEP-SEATED  WATERS  AS  AGENTS  OF  CEMENTATION. 

W aters  having  primary  alkalinity — that  is,  waters  whose  alkalinity 
is  in  part  such  as  is  due  to  the  hydrolysis  of  sodium  and  potassium 
carbonates — have  been  recognized  by  Palmer 1 as  characteristic  silica 
carriers,  but  when  waters  possessing  primary  alkalinity  react  with 
solutions  possessing  secondary  salinity — that  is,  salinity  such  as  is  due 
to  calcium  and  magnesium  chlorides  or  sulphates — their  capacity  to 
carry  silica  may  be  diminished  so  that  quartz  and  other  silicates  will 
be  deposited.  Calcite,  which  is  a common  cementing  material  in  sedi- 
mentary rocks,  may  also  result  from  the  mixing  of  solutions  having 
different  properties  of  reaction,  as  just  described,  or  it  may  be  depos- 
ited from  deep-seated  waters  through  the  loss  of  carbon  dioxide  from 
solution,  as  explained  on  page  48.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that  dur- 
ing .the  complex  changes  that  have  affected  the  reservoir  rocks  in- 
cluded waters  having  different  properties  of  reaction  have  mingled 
and  reacted  with  one  another  in  such  a manner  as  to  deposit  certain  of 
their  dissolved  constituents,  thus  cementing  the  sediments. 

The  deposition  of  quartz,  calcite,  and  other  cementing  material  is 
no  doubt  facilitated  by  the  concentration  of  the  mixtures.  Such  a 
process  of  cementation,  through  the  agency  of  deep-seated  waters, 
we  believe  to  have  been  an  important  factor  in  the  retention  of  gas, 
oil,  and  water  through  vast  periods  of  geologic  time.  The  sediments 
themselves,  more  especially  the  colloidal  matter  of  muds,  have  fur- 
nished an  ample  source  of  silica  and  alumina  for  cementation. 

RETENTION  OF  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  GAS  AND  OIL. 

As  the  result  of  consolidating  processes  which  probably  began  in 
the  sediments  soon  after  deposition 2 and  which  were  accompanied  by 

1 Palmer,  Chase,  The  geochemical  interpretation  of  water  analyses  : U.  S.  Geol.  Survey 
Bull.  479,  p.  22,  1911. 

2 Leith,  C.  K.,  and  Mead,  W.  J.,  Metamorphic  geology,  p.  191,  New  York,  1915. 


EVAPORATION  OF  WATER  AT  DEPTH. 


77 


partial  expulsion  and  rearrangement  of  interstitially  included 
fluids,  there  have  been  gradual  changes  from  conditions  of  hydraulic 
migration  to  those  approaching  capillary  equilibrium.  The  resist- 
ance to  movements  of  water  through  increasingly  fine  water-filled 
interstices,  due  to  friction,  adhesion,  viscosity,  and  capillary  phe- 
nomena, has  gradually  become  so  great  as  to  prevent  the  escape  of 
deeply  buried  water,  oil,  and  compressed  gases  whose  expansive 
power  is  commonly  referred  to  as  “ rock  pressure.”  Deep-seated 
conditions  approaching  equilibrium  have  then  prevailed  through  vast 
periods  of  time  but  have  been  interrupted  by  readjustments  due  to 
rock  movements  and  to  variations  in  depth  produced  by  the  deposition 
or  erosion  of  sediments.  Both  Assuring  accompanying  rock  move- 
ments and  erosion  have  in  places  permitted  the  escape  or  movement 
of  gas,  oil,  and  water  until  the  rock  passages  again  became  sealed. 
The  same  conditions  under  which  gas,  oil,  and  water  have  been 
retained  under  great  pressure  have,  of  course,  assisted  in  preventing 
the  entrance  of  water  from  neighboring  regions. 

EVAPORATION  OF  WATER  AT  DEPTH. 

VARIABLES  INVOLVED. 

In  considering  the  evaporation  of  water  at  depth  it  may  be  well 
to  discuss  briefly  some  of  the  principles  that  govern  evaporation  both 
from  the  surface  of  the  earth  and  from  the  deep-seated  rocks. 
Various  factors  that  assist  evaporation  at  the  earth’s  surface,  such 
sl&  heat,  wind,  and  dryness  of  the  atmosphere,  are  ,well  known,  and 
analogous  factors  may  be  supposed  to  have  influenced  evaporation 
beneath  the  surface.  But  underground  conditions  differ  from  sur- 
face conditions  in  several  particulars.  For  example,  the  tempera- 
ture may  be  higher  than  that  at  the  surface,  the  pressure  may  be  and 
generally  is  considerably  higher  than  atmospheric  pressure,  and  the 
movement  of  gases  is  in  general  immensely  restricted  compared  to 
movements  of  the  atmosphere.  The  possible  range  in  temperature 
and  pressure  is  much  greater  than  the  normal  range  at  the  surface. 
It  may  be  stated,  however,  that  no  conclusions  in  the  present  discus- 
sion depend  for  their  validity  on  the  existence  of  temperature  greater 
than  200°  C.  or  pressure  greater  than  200  atmospheres. 

The  choice  of  the  variables  that  may  be  said  to  govern  evaporation 
depends  somewhat  on  whether  one  has  in  mind  merely  the  process  of 
evaporation  or  the  rate  and  amount  of  evaporation  at  some  particular 
place.  The  movement  of  gas  may  aid  in  transferring  water  vapor 
from  one  region  to  another,  just  as  a dry  wind  assists  evaporation 
from  the  earth’s  surface,  a certain  volume  of  gas  being  no  sooner 
saturated  than  it  is  replaced  by  a fresh  volume  of  unsaturated  gas. 
Furthermore,  gases  may  take  up  moisture,  if  water  is  present,  not 


78  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

only  at  the  time  of  formation  of  the  gases,  but  subsequently,  during 
expansion,  as  the  expansion  of  a gas  affords  unsaturated  space  into 
which  water  will  pass  as  vapor  until  the  space  is  saturated.  But  in 
the  examples  just  mentioned  an  unsaturated  condition  of  the  gas  is 
tacitly  assumed.  The  more  common  phenomenon  below  the  surface 
will  be  that  of  an  equilibrium  between  water  vapor  and  aqueous 
solutions,  and  the  essential  variables  governing  evaporation  will  then 
be  those  affecting  this  equilibrium  in  one  way  or  another.  These 
variables  are  temperature,  pressure,  and  salt  content  of  the  solution. 

The  discussion  of  evaporation  may  be  made  more  precise  by  the 
use  of  the  term  “ vapor  pressure,”  which  may  be  described  as  follows: 
If  at  a definite  temperature  a liquid  is  admitted  into  a vacuum,  some 
of  the  liquid  will  evaporate  and  the  vapor  so  formed  will  attain  a 
definite  pressure.  This  definite  pressure  is  called  the  vapor  pressure 
of  the  liquid  at  the  given  temperature,  and  when  once  it  is  attained 
the  space  is  said  to  be  saturated  with  the  vapor.  For  every  liquid 
there  is  a definite  relation  between  temperature  and  the  vapor  pres- 
sure of  the  liquid.  The  relation  between  the  vapor  pressure  of  pure 
water  and  the  corresponding  temperature  is  shown  by  the  vapor 
pressure  curve  in  figure  5 (p.  81).  The  vapor  pressure  of  aqueous 
solution's  decreases  with  increasing  proportions  of  dissolved  salts,  but 
both  for  pure  water  and  for  solutions  the  vapor  pressure  increases 
with  rising  temperature.  It  follows,  therefore,  that  a moderate  rise 
of  temperature  would  largely  offset  the  influence  of  dissolved  salts. 

Although  vapor  pressures  may  be  measured  by  starting  with  a 
vacuum,  as  illustrated  above,  the  amount  of  vapor  in  a given  space 
and  the  corresponding  partial  pressure  of  the  vapor  formed  from  a 
liquid  will  be  practically  the  same,  according  to  Dalton’s  law, 
whether  or  not  another  gas  is  present,  provided  only  that  the  other 
gas  is  one  which  does  not  react  chemically  with  the  vapor.  The  con- 
centration of  water  vapor  in  a given  volume  of  saturated  gas  may 
therefore  be  considered  as  known  if  the  temperature  and  salt  con- 
tent of  the  solution  involved  are  known.  In  a water-saturated  sand 
gas  pressure  may  be  considered  merely  as  one  of  the  variables  deter- 
mining the  volume  of  the  gaseous  space. 

Certain  physical  conditions  are  obviously  required  to  render  the 
effects  of  evaporation  at  depth  permanent,  and  the  principal  require- 
ment is  the  exclusion  of  surface  waters.  Furthermore,  in  order  to 
account  for  noteworthy  effects  produced  by  deep-seated  evaporation 
it  is  necessary  to  postulate  either  long-continued  evaporation  at 
moderate  temperature  due  to  the  formation  and  escape  of  relatively 
large  quantities  of  gas  in  association  with  small  quantities  of  water, 
or  else,  possibly,  more  extensive  evaporation  in  conjunction  with 
the  escape  of  less  gas  at  a higher  temperature. 


EVAPORATION  OF  WATER  AT  DEPTH. 


79 


LIMITING  MOISTURE  CONTENT  OF  NATURAL  GAS. 

In  our  preliminary  consideration  of  this  problem  we  assumed  that 
among  the  gases  that  are  chemically  inert  with  respect  to  water, 
natural  gas  would  be  no  exception  in  permitting  the  evaporation  of 
water.  Subsequently  the  suggestion  was  made  by  one  of  our  col- 
leagues that  water  might  not  evaporate  into  natural  gas  containing 
the  vapors  of  various  oils  as  it  does  into  air.  However,  we  find  a 
statement  in  the  literature  that  Pittsburgh  natural  gas  carries  0.7 
per  cent  by  volume  of  moisture,  although  the  temperature  is  not 
stated.1  To  remove  any  possible  doubt  on  the  matter,  very  careful 
determinations  were  made  of  the  amount  of  moisture  that  the  illumi- 
nating gas  used  in  Washington,  D.  C.,  is  able  to  take  up  under  ordi- 
nary conditions,  with  results  entirely  confirmatory  of  our  anticipa- 
tions. The  gas  used  had  the  following  composition  by  volume : 


Composition  of  illuminating  gas  used  in  Washington,  D.  C. 


Carbon  dioxide 3. 3 

Oxygen , . 6 

Benzol 1 . 6 

Toluol . 2 

Xylol,  etc . 4 

Ethylene 10.9 

Carbon  monoxide 28.  7 


Hydrogen 33.  5 

Methane 15.  0 

Ethane 1.  2 

Nitrogen 3.  5 


97.9 


A considerable  volume  of  gas  was  passed  into  a large  bottle  over 
water,  the  bottle  serving  as  a reservoir.  For  each  determination  a 
portion  of  the  gas  was  passed  from  the  bottle,  first  through  a satur- 
ator to  saturate  the  gas  with  moisture  at  a definite  temperature,  and 
then  through  weighed  calcium  chloride  tubes  to  retain  the  moisture. 
The  calcium  chloride  tubes  were  weighed  again,  and  the  increased 
moisture  content  was  determined.  The  volume  of  gas  used  was  cal- 
culated from  the  volume  of  water  flowing  out  of  an  aspirator.  The 
water  in  the  aspirator  had  first  been  saturated  with  gas  in  order  to 
prevent  any  interchange  of  gas  between  the  water  and  the  gas  drawn 
in.  The  calcium  chloride  tubes  were  protected  from  a backward 
diffusion  of  moisture  by  a small  additional  calcium  chloride  tube. 
The  pressure  of  gas  in  the  aspirator  and  reservoir  was  kept  equal  to 
that  of  the  atmosphere  by  regulating  the  flow  of  water  or  entrance 
of  fresh  gas.  All  temperatures  were  maintained  as  constant  as  pos- 
sible, and  the  temperature  of  the  saturator  was  measured  by  a ther- 
mometer giving  a reading  which  was  known  to  be  correct  within 
0.02°  C.  on  the  hydrogen  scale.  The  saturator  consisted  of  a large 
U-tube  containing  strips  of  moist  filter  paper  and  enough  water  to 
seal  the  passage,  the  whole  being  immersed  in  a vessel  of  water  which 
was  maintained  at  a constant  temperature.  The  calcium  chloride 
tubes  containing  the  moisture  that  had  been  removed  by  the  gas 
were  weighed  with  a counterpoise.  The  theoretical  weights  of  water 
were  calculated  by  equation  (1)  on  page  81. 

1 Burrell,  G.  A.,  and  Robertson,  I.  W.,  The  compressibility  of  natural  gas  at  high 
temperatures : Bur.  Mines  Tech.  Paper  131,  p.  5,  1916. 


80  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

Tlie  amounts  of  moisture  found  in  the  volumes  of  saturated  gas 
used,  together  with  the  theoretical  amounts  that  should  be  found,  ac- 
cording to  the  gas  laws,  are  shown  in  the  following  table.  The  re- 
sults of  some  preliminary  determinations  are  omitted  because  the 
temperature  of  saturation  was  not  measured  with  sufficient  accuracy 
to  make  them  significant. 


Table  25. — Determination  of  moisture  in  saturated  illuminating  gas  at 

Washington,  D.  C. 


No. 

Volume 
of  gas 
used. 

Tempera- 
ture of 
saturator. 

Weight  of 
water 
found. 

Weight  of 
water 
calcu- 
lated. 

1 

Cc. 

2,001 

1,990 

1;986 

°C. 
22. 29 
20.93 
20.85 

Gram. 

0.0402 

.0365 

.0356 

Gram. 

0. 0395 
.0363 
.0361 

2 

3 

From  the  results  in  Table  25  it  is  evident  that  the  vapors  of  oily 
substances  do  not  affect  the  evaporation  of  water  into  spaces  occupied 
by  natural  gases.  That  a layer  of  oil  on  the  surface  of  water  might 
retard  evaporation  is  admitted.  But  in  the  earth  either  there  is 
abundant  time  for  water  to  become  distributed  between  the  liquid 
and  gaseous  phases  by  diffusion  under  static  conditions,  or  else  gas, 
oil,  and  water  occur  so  irregularly  mixed  as  to  bring  them  into  new 
and  frequent  association  during  movement,  as  shown  more  fully  on 
pages  25  and  95. 

The  weight  of  moisture  in  a given  volume  of  saturated  gas  in  con- 
tact with  pure  water  depends,  first  of  all,  on  the  temperature,  ac- 
cording to  the  well-known  temperature- vapor  pressure  curve  of  water 
shown  in  figure  5.  The  vapor  pressures  for  a number  of  tempera- 
tures, taken  from  the  Smithsonian  physical  tables  for  1916,  are  given 
in  Table  26. 

Table  26. — Vapor  pressure  of  water  at  different  temperatures  on  hydrogen  scale . 


Temperature. 

Pressure. 

Temperature. 

I Pressure. 

Temperature. 

Pressure. 

°C. 

Millimeters. 

°C. 

Millimeters. 

C.° 

Millimeters. 

0 

4.58 

80 

355. 5 

190 

9,404 

5 

6.  54 

90 

526 

200 

11,647 

10 

9.21 

100 

760 

220 

17,376 

15 

12.79 

no 

1,074 

240 

25,064 

20 

17. 54 

120 

1,489 

• 260 

35,127 

25 

23.76 

130 

2,026 

280 

48,011 

30 

31.83 

140 

2,709 

300 

64,290 

40 

55. 34 

150 

3,569 

320 

84, 480 

50 

92.  54 

160 

4,633 

340 

109,300 

60 

149.  5 

170 

5,937 

360 

139; 480 

70 

233. 8 

180 

7,514 

370 

157, 200 

All  quantitative  deductions  in  this  bulletin  concerning  the  trans- 
portation of  moisture  by  gases  are  based  primarily  on  Table  26,  which 
gives  the  vapor  pressure  when  the  gas  is  in  contact  with  pure  water. 
In  dealing  with  a solution  of  salt  instead  of  with  pure,  water,  it  is 
necessary  to  apply  a correction  for  the  decrease  of  vapor  pressure 
due  to  the  dissolved  substance.  The  vapor  pressures  of  water  from  a 


EVAPORATION  OF  WATER  AT  DEPTH. 


81 


great  many  kinds  of  solutions  are  known,  so  that  almost  any  solu- 
tion can  be  dealt  with  if  required.1  The  relative  lowering  of  the 

vapor  pressure,  where  p is  the  vapor  pressure  of  water  and  A p 

is  the  lowering  of  vapor  pressure  due  to  the  presence  of  a dissolved 
substance,  is  roughly  independent  of  the  temperature — a fact  which 
simplifies  the  correction  considerably.  For  instance,  an  8 per  cent 
solution  of  calcium  chloride  has  a vapor  pressure  about  5 per  cent 
lower  than  that  of  pure  water,  and  a brine  saturated  with  ordinary 


Figure  5. — Temperature-vapor  pressure  curve  of  pure  water. 


salt  has  a vapor  pressure  about  25  per  cent  less  than  that  of  pure 
water. 

The  amount  of  moisture  in  a given  volume  of  saturated  gas  at  a 
given  temperature  is  computed  from  the  vapor  pressure  at  that  tem- 
perature by  the  gas  laws  as  follows : 

Mpv 

~RT 


w- 


(1) 


where  w is  the  weight  of  the  gas  under  consideration,  in  this  case  water 
vapor;  M its  molecular  weight,  equal  to  18  for  water;  p the  partial 
pressure  of  the  particular  gas,  here  the  vapor  pressure  of  water, 
measured  in  millimeters  of  mercury;  v the  volume,  in  cubic  centi- 
meters, of  the  total  space  in  which  the  gas  is  contained;  R the  gas 
constant  equal  to  62,860 ; and  T the  absolute  temperature. 


1 See  any  collection  of  physico-chemical  tables,  such  as  the  Smithsonian  physical  tables 
or  those  of  Landolt-Bornstein-Meyerhoffer. 


91818°— 19 6 


82  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

In  Table  27  will  be  found  the  weights  of  moisture  for  a number  of 
temperatures  computed  by  equation  (1)  and  expressed  in  grams  per 
cubic  meter  and  in  pounds  per  1,000  cubic  feet  of  gas.  The  pres- 
sures are  stated  in  order  to  show  the  conditions  necessary  for  the 
maintenance  of  the  liquid  phase.  If  the  pressure  at  any  given  tem- 
perature were  not  equal  to  or  greater  than  that  stated  in  the  table  the 
water  would  completely  evaporate  and  the  weight  of  moisture  would 
be  smaller  than  that  given  in  the  table. 

Without  doubt  there  is  considerable  uncertainty  in  the  weights 
calculated  for  the  highest  temperatures  on  account  of  deviations 
from  the  gas  laws  at  the  high  pressures  considered.  Steam  tables 
cover  a part  of  the  field  and  show  slightly  higher  weights  of  steam 
at  the  higher  temperatures  and  pressures.  It  is  to  be  expected  that 
as  the  density  of  a gas  increases — owing,  for  instance,  to  compres- 
sion— the  molecules  will  be  brought  so  much  more  closely  together 
that  they  will  exert  an  attraction  for  one  another  and  cause  devia- 
tions from  the  gas  laws.  The  solubility  of  water  vapor  in  compressed 
gases  is  therefore  probably  greater  than  that  calculated  in  the  tables, 
but  experimental  data  on  this  point  are  lacking.  For  these  reasons 
the  calculated  figures  are  retained  only  as  first  approximations.  It 
can  be  seen  from  the  tables  that  a given  volume  of  gas  can  transport 
surprisingly  large  quantities  of  moisture  at  the  higher  temperatures. 


Table  27. — Weights  of  water  in  saturated  gas. 


Tem- 

perature 

(CC). 

Pressure 

(atmos- 

pheres). 

Weight  of  water. 

Grams  per 
cubic  meter. 

Pounds  per 
1,000  cubic 
feet. 

0 

0. 006 

4.84 

0. 302 

10 

.012 

9.39 

.586 

20 

.023 

17. 27 

1.078 

25 

.031 

23.01 

1.436 

30 

.042 

30. 32 

1.893 

40 

.073 

51.02 

3.185 

50 

.122 

82.69 

5.163 

60 

.197 

129.5 

8. 085 

70 

.308 

196.7 

12.28 

80 

.468 

290.6 

18. 14 

90 

.692 

418.1 

26. 10 

100 

1.00 

510.7 

31.88 

110 

1.41 

809.9 

50. 57 

120 

1.96 

1,093 

68.  24 

130 

2.  67 

1, 451 

90.60 

140 

3.56 

1,893 

118.1 

150 

4.70 

2,435 

152.0 

160 

6. 10 

3,088 

192.8 

170 

7.81 

3,866 

241.3 

180 

9. 89 

4,788 

298.9 

190 

12.37 

5, 861 

365.9 

200 

15.32 

7,107 

443.7 

220 

22. 86 

10, 170 

635.0 

240 

32. 97 

14,090 

879.7 

260 

46.22 

19,020 

1, 187 

2S0 

63.17 

25,060 

1,564 

300 

84.59 

32,370 

2,021 

320 

111.10 

41,110 

2,566 

340 

143. 80 

51,  450 

3,212 

360 

183.50 

63,600 

3,971 

370 

206.  80 

70,550 

4,405 

EVAPORATION"  OF  WATER  AT  DEPTH. 


83 


EFFECT  OF  THE  INCREASE  OF  TEMPERATURE  WITH  INCREAS- 
ING DEPTH. 

As  the  temperature  of  the  earth  increases  about  1°  C.  for  every  100 
feet  of  depth  from  the  surface,  it  is  evident  that  at  depths  of  about 
10,000  feet  aqueous  solutions  would  attain  a temperature  at  which 
they  would  boil  if  under  atmospheric  pressure.  But  as  the  pressures 
prevailing  underground  tend  to  be  greater  than  atmospheric  pressure, 
the  boiling  points  are  likewise  higher,  so  that  it  becomes  somewhat 
problematic  whether  under  ordinal  conditions  aqueous  solutions 
would  ever  boil  merely  on  account  of  the  increase  of  temperature 
with  increasing  depth.  If  free  egress  for  the  vapor  were  blocked 
the  conversion  of  much  water  into  vapor  wrould  be  prevented  by  the 
high  pressure  that  would  be  produced.  In  fact,  the  pressure  caused 
simply  by  the  weight  of  a continuous  column  of  water  from  any 
point  in  the  earth  to  the  surface  would  be  great  enough  to  prevent 
ebullition  caused  merely  by  the  increase  of  temperature  with  depth. 
In  deep  unproductive  wells  filled  with  water,  therefore,  or  in  fissures 
and  channels  filled  with  water  where  the  evolution  of  gas  is  not 
violent  enough  to  displace  the  water,  the  boiling  points  would  not 
be  attained  under  the  existing  pressures. 

As  a matter  of  fact,  however,  a continuous  column  of  water  is  not  to 
be  expected  under  the  geologic  conditions  that  prevail  in  most  oil  and 
gas  fields.  Strata  such  as  the  shales  in  which  the  more  or  less  lenticu- 
lar bodies  of  productive  sandstone  are  interbedded  are  relatively  im- 
permeable, the  water-filled  rock  interstices  being  sufficiently  fine  to 
modify  the  cumulative  pressure  effect  of  water  in  overlying  beds. 
Moreover,  the  rock  pores  in  some  beds  are  filled  with  gas  and  oil, 
which  would  interfere  with  a so-called  continuous  water  column. 
We  see  no  reason  to  suppose,  therefore,  that  pressures  exactly  equal 
to  the  hydrostatic  pressures  of  corresponding  water  columns  would  be 
exerted  upon  gases  at  all  depths  down  to  the  zone  of  rock  flowage, 
although,  as  pointed  out  on  page  28,  the  so-called  rock  pressure  in 
many  wells  is  roughly  proportional  to  the  depth.  Observations  in 
different  oil  and  gas  fields  indicate  that  in  relatively  shallow  rocks 
the  gas  pressure  may  be  greater  or  less  than  would  be  caused  merely 
by  the  hydrostatic  head  of  a column  of  water  reaching  the  surface. 

It  appears  that  at  depths  greater  than  about  10,000  feet  the  ebulli- 
tion of  aqueous  solutions  would  be  possible  only  under  very  favorable 
conditions,  but  if  it  occurred  it  would  result  in  a great  concentra- 
tion of  the  solutions.  Under  the  conditions  that  generally  exist,  how- 
ever, there  would  be  merely  a high  concentration  of  water  in  the 
vapor  phase,  and  the  removal  of  this  water  would  await  an  escape  of 
gas,  which  at  the  temperatures  under  consideration  would  result  in  a 
considerable  transfer  of  moisture,  leaving  either  salt  or  more  con- 
centrated solutions  behind. 


84  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

Dismissing  the  possibility  of  ebullition  as  being  too  slight  to  be  of 
any  great  importance  to  the  subject  in  hand,  we  feel  certain  that 
wherever  there  is  a gas  in  the  earth  in  contact  with  a liquid  the  con- 
centration of  vapor  in  the  gas  will  be  greater  the  greater  the  depth, 
owing  to  the  increase  of  temperature  with  increasing  depth. 

EFFECTS  DUE  TO  CHANGES  OF  PRESSURE. 

When  a gas  that  is  not  saturated  with  water  vapor  is  made  to  move 
through  water  or  across  a surface  of  water,  it  is  evident  that  fresh 
volumes  of  gas  are  continually  coming  into  contact  with  the  water. 
No  sooner  does  a certain  part  of  the  gas  become  saturated  or  partly 
saturated  with  water  vapor  than  it  is  replaced  by  another  lot  of 
unsaturated  gas,  and  in  this  way  evaporation  is  hastened.  At  any 
given  temperature  the  amount  of  water  vapor  required  to  saturate  a 
certain  volume  of  gas — that  is,  the  amount  of  water  vapor  that  can 
be  evaporated  into  the  fixed  volume  of  gas — is  the  same  whether  the 
gas  is  blown  through  or  across  the  water  or  whether  the  water  and 
gas  are  at  rest.  The  presence  of  the  gas  does  not  influence  the  total 
capacity  of  a given  space  to  hold  moisture  but  may  afford  the  un- 
saturated  space  into  which  evaporation  takes  place.  For  instance, 
when  a gas  expands  under  a decrease  of  pressure,  at  a constant 
temperature,  its  capacity  for  taking  up  moisture  is  increased  because 
the  unsaturated  space  occupied  by  the  gas  in  increased.  An  expand- 
ing gas  must  transport  increasing  amounts  of  moisture  as  long  as  its 
expansion  continues  at  a constant  temperature  in  the  presence  of 
water. 

As  already  stated,  we  have  no  data  as  to  how  strictly  the  propor- 
tionality between  volume  and  water  content  holds  for  very  highly 
compressed  gases,  but  proportionality  can  certainly  be  assumed  over 
a wide  range  of  pressures  from  low  pressures  up.  Evaporation  of 
water  caused  by  an  expanding  gas  can  therefore  be  offered  as  an  ex- 
planation of  the  concentration  of  the  brines  even  when  the  original 
compressed  gas  is  saturated  with  moisture,  as  the  capacity  of  the 
gas  for  moisture  is  created  entirely  by  the  expansion. 

If  the  simple  proportionality  just  mentioned  is  assumed,  a tenfold 
expansion  of  methane,  for  example,  would  create  a tenfold  space  for 
moisture.  In  this  way  it  may  be  calculated  that  a cubic  meter  of 
gas  confined  at  a pressure  of  100  atmospheres  would  be  able  to  evap- 
orate 5,049  grams  of  water  by  the  time  it  had  expanded  to  atmos- 
pheric pressure,  if  the  expansion  were  gradual  and  in  contact  with 
pure  water  at  40°  C.  In  contact  with  a saturated  sodium  chloride 
brine  the  loss  by  evaporation  would  amount  to  about  3,800  grams  of 
water,  which  would  cause  the  precipitation  of  about  1,400  grams  of 
salt.  The  effects  with  other  salts  and  other  temperatures  would 
differ,  as  has  been  previously  stated. 


EVAPORATION  OF  WATER  AT  DEPTH.  85 

The  preceding  figures  apply  to  a temperature  of  40°  C.  At  other 
temperatures  the  results  would  be  different.  They  would  be  different, 
also,  if  the  expansion  took  place  in  such  a manner  as  to  involve  a 
considerable  fall  in  temperature.  As  a given  volume  of  water- 
saturated  gas  passing  under  constant  pressure  from  a warmer  to  a 
colder  zone  would  deposit  water,  it  is  evident  that  pressure  and  tem- 
perature must  be  considered  conjointly.  It  is  not  difficult,  however, 
to  calculate  by  the  gas  laws  what  volume  a gas  would  attain  under 
any  given  temperature  and  pressure  if  its  volume  at  any  other  tem- 
perature and  pressure  is  known.  The  initial  and  final  water  content 
of  the  gas  can  therefore  be  obtained  from  Table  27,  and  the  differ- 
ence between  these  quantities  will  represent  the  weight  of  water 
that  the  gas  would  gain  or  lose,  as  the  case  may  be.  The  principal 
difficulties  are  met  in  attempting  to  postulate  conditions  at  consid- 
erable depths  in  the  earth.  A horizontal  flow  of  gas,  very  gradually 
expanding  in  the  presence  of  water,  would  certainly  cause  evapora- 
tion, for  no  effective  change  in  temperature  would  be  involved.  For  a 
vertical  flow  consideration  must  be  given  to  the  earth  temperature 
gradient,  and  it  is  possible,  as  already  stated,  that  under  certain 
conditions  a decrease  in  temperature  might  overcome  the  evaporative 
effect  of  gas  expansion.  From  the  slope  of  the  vapor-pressed  curve 
it  is  evident  that  temperature  is  more  likely  to  become  the  major 
variable  at  the  higher  temperatures. 

Adiabatic  expansion  cools  a gas,  and  when  this  effect  is  localized 
the  cooling  may  be  very  considerable.  For  the  purposes  of  our  in- 
vestigation, however,  any  condensation  of  moisture  due  to  this  cause 
in  gas  conduits  may  be  considered  an  after  effect.  There  may  possi- 
bly be  regional  cooling  in  the  earth  as  a result  of  such  expansion, 
but  the  chances  seem  to  us  to  lie  rather  in  the  other  direction,  which 
means  that  ascending  gases  will  contribute  heat  to  the  inclosing  rocks. 
However  that  may  be,  the  volume  and  heat  capacity  of  the  strata  are 
so  great  with  reference  to  the  probable  quantities  of  gas  involved 
that  it  seems  logical  to  suppose  that  only  small  geologic  temperature 
effects  could  be  permanently  produced  in  this  way.  We  have  there- 
fore restricted  our  discussion  to  the  temperature  changes  due  to  a 
normal  earth  gradient. 

The  belief  that  great  amounts  of  the  natural  gases  undoubtedly  exist 
in  the  earth  dissolved  in  water  and  oil  is  warranted  by  the  known 
solubilities  of  gases  in  both  water  and  oil  and  by  the  commonly  ob- 
served escape  of  gases  from  these  liquids  during  periods  of  produc- 
tion* in  oil  and  gas  fields.  An  increase  in  pressure  tends  to  increase 
the  solubility  of  a gas  in  a liquid,  and  it  follows  that  any  decrease  in 
pressure  facilitates  the  concomitant  liberation  and  expansion  of  a 
gas  so  dissolved.  Gases  such  as  propane  (below  97°  C.)  and  some 
other  hydrocarbons,  as  well  as  hydrogen  sulphide  (below  100°  C.), 


86  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

may  occur  at  considerable  depth  as  fluids  liquefied  by  pressure.  These 
fluids  will  of  course  vaporize  and  expand  on  release  of  the  pressure, 
thus  furnishing  space  into  which  water  may  also  vaporize. 

SOLUBILITY  OF  NATURAL  GAS  IN  OIL  AND  WATER. 

Knowledge  of  the  solubility  of  the  hydrocarbons  in  oil  under  vari- 
ous conditions  is  meager.  It  is  stated 1 that  1 volume  of  certain 
California  oils  absorbs  0.15  volume  of  the  natural  gas  used  in  Pitts- 
burgh, Pa.,  and  that  1 volume  of  claroline  oil  dissolves  0.31  volume 
of  pure  methane  and  1.96  volumes  of  pure  ethane  at  atmospheric 
pressure.  At  higher  pressure  the  amounts  dissolved  would  be  greater. 
These  figures  suggest  that  propane  and  higher  hydrocarbons  would 
be  much  more  soluble  than  ethane.  Nitrogen  and  oxygen  are  far 
more  soluble  in  petroleum  than  in  water,  and  ethylene  is  soluble  to 
the  extent  of  0.14  volume  in  1 volmne  of  petroleum.2  Other  data  on 
the  solubility  of  certain  hydrocarbons  are  given  by  McDaniel.3 

The  following  table  is  quoted  from  Rogers:4 

Solubility  of  certain  gaseous  hydrocarbons  in  icater. 


[At  20°  C.  and  760  millimeters  pressure,  except  propane,  which  is  at  17.8°  C.  and  753 

millimeters  pressure.] 


Name. 

Formula. 

Volumes 
soluble 
in  100 
volumes 
of  water. 

Authority. 

Methane 

CH4.  . . . 

3.31 

4.72 

6.50 

0 

12.2 

22.1 

Winkler.® 

Do. 

Lebeau.b 
Frankland.  e 
Winkler,  d 
Von  Than.e 

Ethane 

c2h6.... 

Propane 

c3h8 

Butane 

C4H 10  T 

Ethylene 

c2h4  . 

Propylene 

c3H6.. 

a Winkler,  L.  W.,  Die  Loslichkeit  der  Gasse  in  Wasser:  Deutsche  chem.  Gesell.  Ber.,  Band  34,  pp.  1417- 
1421,  1901. 

^frtebeau,  Paul,  Sur  quelques  proprietes  physiques  du  propane:  Compt.  Rend.,  vol.  140,  pp.  1454-1456, 

c Frankland,  Edward,  TIeber  die  Isolirung  der  organischen  Radicale:  Annalen  der  Chemie,  Band  71, 
p.  171,  1849.  (Frankland  states  that  butane  is  insoluble  in  water,  but  it  is  desirable  that  this  early  work 
be  checked  with  the  more  refined  methods  now  in  use.) 

d Winkler,  L.  W.,  unpublished  data  cited  by  Landolt-Bomstein,  Physikalisch-chemische  Tabellen 
p.  604,  1905.  ’ 

e Von  Than,  Carl,  Der  Absorptionscoeificient  des  Propylengases:  Annalen  der  Chemie.  Band  123  p 187 
1862.  * 

In  general,  as  the  density  of  a gas  is  increased,  owing  to  compres- 
sion, for  instance,  the  molecules  are  brought  so  much  more  closely 
together  that  they  begin  to  show  some  of  the  properties  of  liquids.  It 
has  been  shown,  for  example,  that  methane  at  a pressure  of  300 

1 Burrell,  G.  A.,  Seibert,  F.  M.,  and  Oberfell,  G.  G.,  The  condensation  of  gasoline  from 
natural  gas  : Bur.  Mines  Bull.  88,  pp.  29-34,  1915. 

2 Gniewosz,  St.,  and  Walfisz,  A.,  Ueber  die  Absorption  von  Gaseu  durch  Petroleum:' 
Zeitschr.  physikal.  Chemie,  vol.  1,  p.  70,  1887. 

8 McDaniel,  A.  S.,  The  absorption  of  hydrocarbon  gases  by  nonaqueous  liquids  : Jour. 
Phys.  Chemistry,  vol.  15,  pp.  587-610,  1911. 

4 Rogers,  G.  S.,  Chemical  relations  of  the  oil-field  waters  in  San  Joaquin  Valley,  Cal. : 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  653,  p.  106,  1917. 


EVAPORATION  OF  WATER  AT  DEPTH. 


87 


atmospheres  acquires  an  appreciable  solvent  action  on  paraffine, 
which  is  deposited  in  brilliant  spangles  when  the  gas  is  allowed  to 
expand  to  ordinary  pressure.1  Compressed  ethylene  is  a still  more 
active  solvent  of  the  higher  hydrocarbons.  So  far  as  we  can  judge 
from  the  experimental  evidence  available,  therefore,  the  behavior  of 
water  and  of  hydrocarbons  toward  gases  shows  a marked  contrast. 
The  expansion  of  a gas  would  tend  to  increase  the  evaporation  of 
water,  if  present,  but  to  cause  the  deposition  of  such  higher  hydro- 
carbons as  might  exist  in  the  compressed  gas. 

ORIGIN  OF  THE  GASES  AS  RELATED  TO  THE  EVAPORATION  OF 
THE  ASSOCIATED  WATERS. 

To  attempt  to  discuss  in  this  bulletin  the  numerous  theories  rela- 
tive to  the  origin  of  natural  gas  would  be  unwise.  It  is  sufficient  to 
state  that,  if  classified  according  to  their  origin,  two  general  types 
of  deep-seated  gases  must  be  considered — those  from  deep-seated  in- 
organic sources  and  those  evidently  formed  from  organic  remains 
through  the  agency  of  microorganisms,  heat,  or  chemical  changes  due 
to  other  causes.  There  is  so  little  evidence  to  substantiate  the  hy- 
pothesis that  the  natural  gases  associated  with  petroleum  are  of  in- 
organic origin  that  we  give  the  subject  only  brief  consideration.  If 
inorganic  gases  entered  the  sediments  the  evaporative  effects  may 
have  been  similar,  in  some  respects,  to  those  of  the  organic  gases. 
There  is,  however,  some  uncertainty  as  to  the  amount  of  moisture 
that  would  have  been  introduced  into  the  sediments  with  gas  of  in- 
organic origin.  The  chemical  effects  upon  oil  and  gas  field  waters 
that  might  accompany  the  incursion  of  such  gases  have  been  con- 
sidered by  Washburne.2 

The  gases  of  the  second  type,  those  formed  in  sediments  through 
the  agency  of  heat  or  chemical  changes  due  to  other  causes,  constitute 
a series  of  hydrocarbon  gases  whose  principal  constituents  are 
methane  and  ethane,  together  with  small  amounts  of  hydrogen,  hy- 
drogen sulphide,  carbon  dioxide,  and  nitrogen.  The  formation  and 
escape  of  enormous  volumes  of  these  natural  gases  in  the  presence  of 
interstitially  included  waters  would  doubtless  cause  the  evaporation 
and  concentration  of  the  waters  from  the  very  beginning  of  their 
burial.  In  discussing  the  probable  changes  in  waters  of  sedimenta- 
tion we  have  shown  the  possibilities  for  evaporation  of  this  sort  to 
occur.  No  doubt  such  evaporation  has  been  a factor  in  bringing 
about  the  concentration  of  the  waters  under  scrutiny. 

1 Villard,  P.,  Dissolution  des  liquides  et  des  solidos  dans  les  gaz  : Jour,  physique,  3d  ser., 
vol.  5,  p.  453,  1896. 

2 Washburne,  C.  W.,  Chlorides  in  oil-field  waters  : Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Trans.,  vol.  48, 
pp.  687-693,  1914. 


88  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

It  is  a familiar  fact  that  in  carbonaceous  matter  both  the  capacity 
to  emit  gases  and  the  percentage  of  water  present  show  a continuous 
decrease  in  the  series  from  peat  to  anthracite.  Porter  and  Ovitz1 
have  shown  that  upon  being  allowed  to  stand  at  atmospheric  pres- 
sure and  ordinary  temperature  for  five  months  after  mining,  a sample 
of  bituminous  coal  yielded  a volume  of  methane  equal  to  one  and 
three-fourths  times  the  volume  of  the  coal  itself.  Had  the  sample 
been  subjected  to  heat  or  had  it  stood  indefinitely  a much  greater 
volume  of  gas  would  probably  have  been  emitted.  Concerning  the 
primary  decomposition  of  coal  by  heat  Taylor  and  Porter2  say: 

A high-grade  bituminous  coal  of  the  gas-making  type  decomposes  by  heat 
primarily  into  paraffine  hydrocarbons  and  a completely  altered  nonvolatile  resi- 
due, with  small  quantities  of  water,  C02,  and  CO.  The  three  latter  products 
are  the  first  produced,  although  in  small  quantity;  from  some  other  types  of 
bituminous  coal  they  are  produced  in  greater  relative  quantities  than  from  the 
gas-coal  type.  Complex  and  varied  secondary  reactions  induced  by  superheating 
the  hydrocarbons,  water  vapor,  and  C02  are  of  great  importance  in  industrial 
high-temperature  carbonization. 

The  products  of  low-temperature  carbonization  from  coal  of  the  Pittsburgh 
type  on  an  industrial  scale  at  about  800°  to  900°  F.  (427°  to  482°  C.)  will  con- 
sist of  a rich  gas  amounting  to  0.6  to  0.7  cubic  foot  per  pound  of  coal,  and  a 
large  yield  of  oil  or  tar,  comprising  10  to  12  per  cent  of  the  coal.  This  tar  con- 
sists chiefly  of  paraffin  hydrocarbons,  is  very  low  or  possibly  entirely  devoid  of 
benzene  and  naphthalene  derivatives,  and  practically  devoid  of  free  carbon. 
The  gas  will  contain  6 to  7 per  cent  of  unsaturated  hydrocarbons  and  20  to  25 
per  cent  of  ethane  and  its  higher  homologues  and  consequently  will  have  a high 
calorific  and  illuminating  value.  The  tar  may  be  either  redistilled  or  subject  to 
cracking  processes  so  as  to  produce  light  oils — gasoline  substitutes — whose  yield 
will  be  greater  than  and  probably  at  least  double  that  obtained  by  high-tempera- 
ture carbonization. 

The  gas  formed  in  such  processes  would  of  course  take  up  moisture 
if  water  were  present.  Taking  rough  averages  of  various  determina- 
tions, we  have  the  following  percentages  of  moisture  in  carbonaceous 
matter:  Peat,  25  per  cent;  lignite,  20  per  cent;  bituminous  coal,  8 per 
cent;  anthracite,  1.6  per  cent;  and  finally  a graphitoid  rock  is  re- 
corded with  only  1 per  cent  of  moisture.  The  conclusion  seems  in- 
evitable that  gases  escaped  during  the  changes  that  converted  peat 
into  anthracite  and  that  the  escaping  gases  assisted  in  carrying  off 
the  water  as  water  vapor.  It  also  seems  evident  that  gases  have  es- 
caped and  that  water  has  been  removed  during  the  metamorphism  of 
organic  matter  such  as  occurs  in  the  carbonaceous  shales  frequently 
associated  with  oil  and  gas  deposits. 

1 Porter,  H C.,  and  Ovitz,  F.  K.,  The  escape  of  gas  from  coal : Bur.  Mines  Tech. 
Paper  2,  1911. 

2 Taylor,  G.  B.,  and  Porter,  H.  C.,  The  primary  volatile  products  of  the  carbonization 
of  coal : Mines  Tech.  Paper  140,  pp.  50-51,  1916. 


WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS.  89 

RELATED  PHENOMENA  AND  DEDUCTIONS  OF  PRAC- 
TICAL VALUE. 

ASSOCIATION  OF  ROCK  SALT  WITH  DEPOSITS  OF  NATURAL  GAS 

AND  PETROLEUM. 

It  is  a matter  of  common  knowledge  that  masses  of  rock  salt  are  in 
many  places  associated  with  deposits  of  petroleum  and  natural  gas. 
Striking  examples  are  furnished  by  the  salt  domes  of  Louisiana  and 
Texas,  and  somewhat  similar  occurrences  of  salt  are  reported  in 
southern  Vera  Cruz,  Mexico ; in  Algeria ; in  Hanover,  Germany ; and 
at  Maros-Ujvas,  Transylvania.  Harris1  gives  a comprehensive  sum- 
mary of  the  rock-salt  deposits  in  different  parts  of  the  world,  showing 
that  many  of  the  salt  masses  in  foreign  countries  resemble  those  of 
the  Louisiana  and  Texas  salt  domes,  both  as  to  their  general  aspects 
and  as  to  their  probable  mode  of  origin.  Thompson2  suggests  that 
some  of  the  structural  features  in  Egypt,  in  the  Hanoverian  fields  of 
Germany,  and  in  the  Ural-Caspian  area  may  be  due  to  salt-dome 
phenomena.  He  adds  that  it  is  not  improbable  that  some  of  the 
structural  features  of  the  Rumanian  and  Galician  oil  fields  are  also 
associated  with  crystalline  growths  of  salt  that  now  form  the  “ cores  ” 
of  some  of  the  oil  fields. 

Although  these  associations  have  puzzled  many  investigators,  the 
facts  that  have  been  brought  out  in  the  present  paper  concerning  the 
evaporative  action  of  gases  seem  to  establish  the  theory  that  natural 
gases  under  certain  favorable  conditions  are  able  to  concentrate 
natural  waters,  even  to  the  point  of  depositing  water-soluble  salts. 
It  is  interesting  in  this  connection  to  recall  that  Bunsen  proved  that 
the  rock  salt  of  Wielieczka  contains  marsh  gas.3  It  is  also  interest- 
ing to  note  that  in  September,  1664,  the  first  recorded  explosion  of 
fire  damp  occurred  in  the  Hallstatt  salt  mine.4  Marsh  gas  and  hy- 
drogen sulphide  are  both  present  in  the  salt  masses  of  northern  Ger- 
many and  Galicia,  and  there  are  numerous  records  of  inflammable 
gases  in  salt  mines.  Knapp5 6  has  recently  described  the  exudation 
of  both  gas  and  oil  under  high  pressure  from  the  salt  masses  at 
Belle  Isle,  La.  It  would,  however,  be  rash  to  deny  that  the  salt  beds 
now  found  near  deposits  of  petroleum  and  natural  gas  in  some  parts 

1 Harris,  G.  D.,  Rock  salt,  its  origin,  geological  occurrences,  and  economic  importance 
in  the  State  of  Louisiana : Louisiana  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  7,  1908 ; Oil  and  gas  in 
Louisiana,  with  a brief  summary  of  their  occurrences  in  adjacent  States  : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  429,  1910. 

2 Thompson,  A.  B.,  Oil-field  development,  pp.  241-245,  New  York  and  London,  1916. 

8 Annales  chimie  et  phys.,  3d  ser.,  vol.  38,  p.  269,  1853. 

4 Harris,  G.  D.,  Rock  salt,  its  origin,  geological  occurrences,  and  economic  importance 

in  the  State  of  Louisiana ; Louisiana  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  7,  p.  173,  1908. 

6 Knapp,  I.  N.,  discussion  of  paper  by  A.  F.  Lucas  (A  review  of  the  exploration  at  Belle 
Isle,  La.)  : Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  Bull.  133,  p.  88,  January,  1918. 


90  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

of  the  world  owe  their  development  as  well  as  their  preservation  to 
solar  evaporation  and  to  arid  climatic  conditions.  We  therefore  dif- 
ferentiate between  the  two  types  of  salt  deposits  and  confine  this 
discussion  to  those  formed  through  deep-seated  agencies. 

It  is  obvious  that  the  evaporative  effects  due  to  moving  gases  will 
depend  somewhat  on  the  distribution  of  water.  Relatively  small 
amounts  of  water  subjected  to  evaporation  into  escaping  gases  would 
be  more  readily  concentrated  so  as  to  deposit  salt  than  would  exces- 
sive amounts  of  water.  For  instance,  where  the  conditions  are  such 
as  to  permit  the  continued  influx  of  surface  waters,  as  in  certain 
shallow  strata  of  the  Appalachian  fields,  the  brines  do  not  attain, 
or  at  least  do  not  retain,  the  same  degree  of  concentration  as  those 
in  the  deeper  strata.  If.  on  the  other  hand,  small  quantities  of  salt 
water  trickling  into  a fissure  should  come  into  contact  with  unsatu- 
rated gases  rising  from  some  deeper  source,  the  salt  water  would  be 
evaporated  and  salt  deposited  in  the  fissure  if  the  solution  were  suffi- 
ciently concentrated.  The  extreme  concentration  of  some  of  the 
brines  ejected  from  mud  volcanoes  has  already  been  mentioned  as 
being  due  partly  to  the  removal  of  water  by  escaping  gases. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  gases  escape  to  the  surface  in  order  to 
cause  evaporation,  for  in  deep-seated  strata,  under  certain  conditions, 
especially  where  the  beds  have  undergone  Assuring,  gas  may  flow 
from  one  bed  where  the  pressure  is  high  to  another  bed  where  a 
lower  pressure  prevails.  The  evaporative  effects  of  the  migrating 
gas  would,  under  these  conditions,  be  none  the  less  important.  The 
deposition  of  constituents  other  than  chlorides,  such  as  carbonates 
or  sulphates,  if  they  are  present,  might  be  caused  by  evaporation, 
so  as  to  produce  the  unusual  relations  sometimes  observed  in  salt 
domes.  It  also  seems  probable  that  where  the  salt  masses  are  asso- 
ciated with  deposits  of  calcium  sulphate  and  calcium  carbonate,  geo- 
chemical processes  yielding  sodium  chloride,  together  with  the  other 
compounds,  have  been  brought  about  through  the  mixing  of  solu- 
tions that  have  different  properties  of  reaction  or  through  reactions 
between  the  constituents  of  certain  solutions  and  those  of  the  con- 
taining rocks. 


ORIGIN  OF  SALT  DOMES. 

It  is  our  belief  that  salt  domes,  such  as  are  found  in  Louisiana 
and  Texas  and  seem  to  be  closely  related  to  the  occurrence  of 
natural  gas  and  petroleum,  have  been  formed  in  part  by  these 
geochemical  processes  accompanied  by  the  evaporation  of  saline 
waters  through  the  agency  of  escaping  gases.  Many  of  the  domes 
occur  along  faults,  and  some  of  the  salt  masses  are  situated  at  the 
intersections  of  fault  planes.  It  is  also  significant  that  emanations 


BELATED  PHENOMENA  AND  DEDUCTIONS  OF  VALUE, 


91 


of  the  gaseous  hydrocarbons  are  commonly  associated  with  the  salt 
domes. 

The  extensive  literature  dealing  with  the  origin  of  salt  deposits 
has  been  summarized  by  Hahn.1  Harris  2 3 reviews  in  detail  several  of 
the  theories  that  have  been  advanced  to  explain  the  origin  of  the  salt 
domes  in  the  Gulf  region  of  the  United  States. 

As  early  as  1901  Hill s wrote : “ These  uplifts  are  most  probably  due 
to  isostatic  movements  rather  than  to  accumulations  of  gas.”  The 
next  year,  however,  he  ventured  the  opinion  that  the  domes  were 
caused  by  the  uplifting  force  of  water  or  oil  rising  under  enormous 
hydrostatic  pressure.4  In  1904  Hager 5 proposed  the  “ volcanic 
plug  ” hypothesis,  an  important  element  of  which  is  the  view  that 
the  cause  of  the  domes  goes  back  to  faulting  and  igneous  activity 
in  the  deeper  rocks,  including  the  intrusion  of  laccoliths.  Certain 
features  of  Hager’s  hypothesis  seem  to  fit  the  later  phases  of  the  dome 
building  so  well  that  the  following  quotation  is  made  from  his  article, 
though  we  do  not  consider  igneous  activity  essential  to  the  phenomena 
under  discussion: 

By  contact  with  the  molten  intrusives  vast  quantities  of  gas  were  generated 
from  the  reduction  of  metallic  sulphides  and  the  distillation  of  lignites  and 
organic  substances.  These  gases,  accompanied  by  steam  under  tremendous 
pressure,  forced  theil*  way  to  the  surface  through  the  unconsolidated  sands  and 
clays  of  the  overlying  Tertiary  material,  perhaps  giving  rise  to  mud  volcanoes, 
such  as  occur  in  many  of  the  world’s  great  oil  fields  of  the  present  day.  Heated 
waters  from  great  depths  found  vent  along  the  same  channels,  carrying  in 
solution  carbonates  of  lime  and  magnesium,  gypsum,  and  salt.  By  ebullition  and 
evaporation  these  solutions  became  concentrated  until,  saturation  resulting, 
precipitation  commenced,  forming  the  necklike  masses  of  salt,  gypsum,  and 
dolomite  now  encountered.  With  the  cooling  of  the  intrusive  masses  and  the 
choking  of  the  vents  the  process  practically  ceased.  A period  of  subsidence 
followed,  during  wdiich  the  coastal  Quaternary  beds,  which  at  present  cap  the 
mounds,  were  laid  down,  followed  by  a secondary  movement  along  the  old  lines 
of  weakness,  resulting  in  the  present  elevation  of  the  mounds  above  the  sur- 
rounding prairie. 

Fenneman 6 discusses  the  domes  and  says : 

Both  the  abnormal  temperatures  and  the  abnormal  salinity  suggest  upward 
movements  of  ground  waters.  Further  study  may  perhaps  show  that  ground 
waters  have  been  concerned  in  making  the  salt  and  gypsum  of  the  mounds,  as 
well  as  the  crystalline  limestone.  * * * It  may  even  appear  that  the  pressure 
exerted  during  the  growth  or  alteration  of  these  bodies  was  sufficient  to  raise 
the  mounds. 

1 Hahn,  F.  F.,  The  form  of  salt  deposits ; Econ.  Geology,  vol.  7,  pp.  120-125,  1912. 

2 Harris,  G.  D.,  Rock  salt,  its  origin,  geological  occurrences,  and  economic  importance 
in  the  State  of  Louisiana  : Louisiana  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  7,  p.  59,  1908. 

3 Hill,  R.  T.,  The  coast  prairie  of  Texas : Science,  vol.  14,  p.  326,  1901. 

4 Hill,  R.  T.,  The  Beaumont  oil  field,  with  notes  on  other  oil  fields  of  the  Texas  region : 
Franklin  Inst.  Jour.,  vol.  154,  pp.  273-281,  1902. 

e Hager,  Lee,  The  mounds  of  the  southern  oil  fields : Eng.  and  Min.  Jour.,  vol.  78, 
pp.  137-139,  180-182,  1904.  It  appears  that  the  idea  of  a volcanic  neck  or  plug  was 
in  the  minds  of  A.  F.  Lucas  and  others  some  time  before  this. 

6 Fenneman,  N.  M.,  Oil  fields  of  the  Texas-Louisiana  Gulf  Coastal  Plain : U.  S.  Geol. 
Survey  Bull.  282,  p.  121,  1906. 


92  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


\ 


Harris,1  in  the  publication  already  cited,  goes  on  to  inquire : “ How 
can  rising  columns  of  water  be  made  to  precipitate  their  salt,  even 
though  saturated,  and,  second,  what  is  the  force  that  lifts  up  a certain 
hundred  or  thousand  feet  of  superficial  strata  in  limited  areas,  almost 
never  2 miles  across  ? ” In  brief,  he  answers : u Precipitation  is  due  to 
decrease  in  temperature;  and,  second,  the  requisite  uplifting  force 
is  amply  accounted  for  by  the  power  of  growing  crystals.” 

Against  the  explanation  in  the  last  sentence,  it  may  be  noted  that 
the  solubility  of  gypsum,  which  frequently  accompanies  salt  in  many 
of  the  domes,  increases  with  falling  temperature.  Moreover,  two 
conditions  must  be  assumed  in  this  explanation  of  the  domes,  namely, 
that  certain  waters  have  been  concentrated  to  the  point  of  satu- 
ration and  that  the  growth  of  new  crystals  takes  place  between 
rigid  solids  and  not  in  free  brine.  Although  it  is  true  that  the 
solubility  of  salt  decreases  with  falling  temperature,  the  change  is 
small.  The  amount  of  salt  that  will  precipitate  from  a cubic  meter 
of  saturated  brine  on  cooling  from  60°  to  20°  C.  is  about  11  kilo- 
grams. This  salt  will  occupy  a volume  of  about  5 liters.  The  brine, 
however,  on  cooling  from  60°  to  20°  C.  contracts  to  the  extent  of 
about  18  liters,  so  that  if  the  brine  were  held  stationary,  instead  of 
moving  and  being  continuously  replenished,  there  would  be  a decided 
net  contraction  instead  of  an  expansion.  Evidently  no  expansive  force 
could  be  exerted  by  the  cooling  brine.  The  force  sufficient  to  open  up 
or  to  maintain  channels  for  continued  circulation  would  have  to  be 
exerted  entirely  by  the  solid  crystals  of  salt.  The  deposition  of  the 
11  kilograms  of  salt,  cited  in  the  illustration,  would  leave  883  kilo- 
grams of  water  saturated  with  317  kilograms  of  salt  as  a brine  taking 
no  part  in  the  process,  so  that  the  amount  of  brine  necessary  to  form 
a dome  by  deposition  due  to  cooling  would  be  very  Jarge.  Although 
the  disposition  of  this  relatively  large  amount  of  brine  can  be  ex- 
plained by  saying  that  it  merely  escaped  at  the  surface,  the  theory  of 
evaporation  by  natural  gas  could  not  only  account  for  an  initial  con- 
centration of  the  waters  but  also  for  the  deposition  of  almost  30 
times  as  much  salt  as  could  be  deposited  by  the  simple  cooling  of 
a saturated  brine.  In  other  words,  the  quantities  of  salt  water  re- 
quired for  the  formation  of  the  domes  by  deposition  due  to  evapora- 
tion are  much  less  than  those  required  by  the  theory  of  deposition 
due  to  cooling. 

On  the  hypothesis  of  a cooling  brine,  then,  we  calculate  that  a 
cubic  meter  of  saturated  brine  would  deposit  11  kilograms  of  salt  on 
cooling  from  60°  to  20°  C.,  whereas  the  same  amount  of  salt  could  be 
deposited  from  such  brine,  through  evaporation,  by  the  escape  of 
790  cubic  meters  of  gas  at  40°  C.,  307  cubic  meters  at  60°  C.,  or  74 
cubic  meters  at  100°  C.  If  the  gas  expands  a hundredfold  at  the 


1 Harris,  G.  D.,  op.  cit.,  p.  76. 


RELATED  PHENOMENA  AND  DEDUCTIONS  OF  VALUE.  93 

temperatures  mentioned,  the  volumes  of  compressed  gas  required 
would  be  only  about  a hundredth  of  those  mentioned.  In  short,  the 
volumes  of  compressed  gas  would  have  to  be  from  24  to  260  times 
greater  than  a given  volume  of  brine  to  leave  salt  as  the  final  product 
under  reasonably  favorable  conditions.  The  volumes  of  gas  required 
are  145  and  1,550  times  the  volume  of  salt  formed  at  100°  C.,  and  40° 
C.,  respectively.  Looked  at  in  another  way,  1 cubic  meter  of  brine 
could  deposit  11  kilograms  of  salt  by  cooling  or  330  kilograms  by 
evaporation. 

A factor  which,  so  far  as  we  know,  has  not  been  mentioned  as  a 
cause  for  the  deposition  of  the  salt  forming  the  domes  is  the  change 
in  the  solubility  of  the  salt  with  a change  of  pressure.  The  solu- 
bility of  salt  at  24.05°  C.  increases  from  35.90  parts  per  100  parts  of 
water  under  a pressure  of  1 atmosphere,  to  37.36  parts  under  a pres- 
sure of  1,500  atmospheres.1  Although  this  change  is  small,  it  may  be 
effective  where  saturated  solutions  move  upward  from  regions  of 
very  great  pressure.  It  is  comparable  with  the  small  change  in  solu- 
bility with  change  of  temperature,  which  is  the  basis  of  Harris’s 
theory,  and  the  two  factors  influencing  the  solubility  may  act  con- 
comitantly. 

Several  European  geologists  have  recently  revived  the  old  and 
long-neglected  view  that  salt-dome  structure  is  due  to  the  flow  of  salt 
made  plastic  by  pressure.2  Lachmann 3 calls  attention  to  the  variety 
of  deformations  found  in  the  German  salt  deposits  and  shows  that  the 
structural  features  range  from  those  that  are  entirely  conformable 
to  the  strata  in  which  the  salt  deposits  are  found  to  those  of  domes 
which  show  practically  no  relation  to  the  adjoining  strata,  having 
apparently  been  formed  by  the  flowage  of  salt.  Arrhenius4  has  dis- 
cussed some  of  the  physical  and  chemical  problems  involved  in  the 
formation  of  the  German  salt  deposits  and  applies  the  principles  of 
isostasy  to  explain  the  salt  column  in  Drake’s  Saline,  La.  Before 
this  explanation  can  be  accepted,  experiments  upon  the  plastic  flow 
of  salt,  with  special  reference  to  the  effect  of  temperature  and 
pressure,  the  action  of  water,  and  the  possibility  of  flow  by  fracturing 
and  granulation,  followed  by  recementation  and  recrystallization  are 
needed.  Inasmuch  as  Arrhenius  assumes  that  solutions  have  acted 


1 Smithsonian  physical  tables,  p.  143,  1916. 

2 Grupe,  O.,  Zechsteinformation  und  ihr  Salzlager  im  Untergrunde  des  hannoverschen 
Eichsfelds : Zeitschr.  prakt.  Geologie,  vol.  17,  p.  185,  1909.  Harbort,  E.,  Geologie  der 
nordhannoverschen  Salzhorste:  Deutsch.  geol.  Gesell.  Monatsber.,  1910,  p.  326,  Lach- 
mann, Richard,  Salinare  Spalteneruption  gegen  Eksemtheorie : Idem,  p.  597,  Stille,  H., 
Aufsteigen  des  Salzgebirges  : Zeitschr.  prakt.  Geologie,  vol.  19,  p.  91,  1911. 

3 Lachmann,  Richard,  Der  Salzauftrieb,  Halle,  1911.  Separate  from  Kali,  vol.  4. 
Nos.  8,  9,  22,  23,  and  24,  1910.  Studien  ueber  den  Bau  von  Salzmassen  : Idem,  vol.  6, 
pp.  342-353,  366-375,  397-401,  418-431,  1913. 

4 Arrhenius,  Svante,  Zur  Physik  der  Salzlagerstatten  : Meddelanden  k.  v.  Nobelinstitut, 
vol.  2,  No.  20,  25  pp.,  1912. 


94  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


to  some  extent  as  a lubricant  for  the  movement  of  the  salt  and  also 
that  many  of  the  unusual  structural  forms  found  in  the  German 
potash  salts  are  due  to  rearrangements  brought  about  by  water  given 
off  from  hydrated  minerals  at  depth,  we  feel  that,  even  if  the  preced- 
ing views  are  accepted,  the  evaporation  of  solutions  by  gases  is  worthy 
of  consideration. 

Conditions  of  comparative  weakness  that  might  permit  the  plastic 
flow  of  salt  under  great  pressure  would  also  permit  the  movement 
and  probably  the  escape  of  solutions  and  gases,  especially  where  the 
movements  of  salt  were  accompanied  by  faulting  »and  fracturing  of 
the  overlying  strata.  Probably  no  one  of  the  theories  we  have  cited 
will  suffice  to  explain  all  the  unusual  phenomena  of  salt  domes,  but 
it  is  evident  that  in  conjunction  with  any  of  the  processes  mentioned 
the  evaporation  of  water  into  moving  and  expanding  gas  must  be7 
regarded  as  important.  / 

AMOUNT  OF  GAS  AVAILABLE  FOR  EVAPORATION. 

Having  showm  that  under  reasonable  conditions  about  145  to  1,550 
volumes  of  gas  under  a pressure  of  100  atmospheres  would  be  required 
to  cause,  through  expansion  and  evaporation,  the  deposition  of  1 
volume  of  salt  from  a saturated  solution,  we  must  now  consider 
whether  the  supply  of  gas  is  adequate  to  be  considered  a factor  in 
the  formation  of  salt  domes  in  this  way.  It  is  difficult  to  decide  the 
question  positively,  because  little  is  known  of  the  conditions  involved, 
such  as  the  thickness  and  character  of  the  sediments  in  which  gases 
might  form  and  the  dimensions  and  volumes  of  the  salt  masses.  Even 
the  origin  of  the  gases  is  not  known  with  certainty.  Until  the  results 
of  detailed  studies,  including  deep  boring,  in  the  salt-dome  region  of 
Louisiana  and  Texas  become  available,  calculations  as  to  the  quantity 
of  gas  available  can  have  little  value.  Enormous  volumes  of  gas 
are  continuing  to  escape  in  the  Gulf  region,  and  we  feel  that  although 
the  amount  of  gas  that  has  escaped  is  perhaps  not  sufficient  to  account 
for  the  complete  development  of  the  domes  by  this  theory  alone  it 
is  adequate  to  show  that  the  theory  sets  forth  at  least  one  of  the 
important  factors  in  the  development. 

ACCUMULATIONS  OF  GAS  AND  OIL  ASSOCIATED  WITH  SALT 

DOMES. 

In  considering  the  escape  of  compressed  natural  gas  we  find  that 
two  facts  are  at  once  apparent.  First,  where  deposits  of  natural  gas 
occur  only  part  of  the  available  gas  has  escaped;  second,  under  the 
conditions  that  permitted  the  escape  of  compressed  gases  part  of 
the  associated  oil  and  water  must  also  have  escaped  or  migrated 
through  the  strata  toward  the  regions  of  least  pressure.  These  move- 


RELATED  PHENOMENA  AND  DEDUCTIONS  OF  VALUE. 


95 


ments  may  have  influenced  the  accumulation  of  gas  and  oil  by  facili- 
tating the  segregation  of  the  hydrocarbons  above  the  water  and  by 
causing  the  migration  of  gas  and  oil  to  favorable  rock  entrapments 
or  reservoirs.  It  is  not  improbable  that  the  accumulations  of  natural 
gas  and  petroleum  associated  with  the  salt  domes  have  been  formed 
partly  in  this  way.  Evidence  that  this  principle  is  widely  applicable 
to  gas  and  oil  deposits  is  furnished  by  the  relatively  complete  segre- 
gation of  gas  and  oil  above  water  in  the  sharply  folded,  more  or  less 
fissured  anticlines  of  certain  fields  and  the  relatively  incomplete 
segregation  that  has  taken  place  in  the  gentle  folds  of  the  Appa- 
lachian fields. 

Among  the  factors  that  have  retarded  the  escape  of  gas,  oil,  and 
water  the  sealing  of  the  rock  passages  by  the  deposition  of  mineral 
matter  has  been  of  prime  importance.  A common  surface  indica- 
tion of  petroleum  and  natural  gas  in  some  localities  is  the  occurrence 
of  fissures  sealed  by  calcite  or  even  by  certain  solidified  hydrocarbons 
themselves. 

Where  salt  masses  similar  to  those  in  Louisiana  and  Texas  are  un- 
accompanied by  gas  and  oil,  it  may  be  assumed,  if  the  salt  masses 
are  held  to  have  originated  in  part  through  the  evaporative  action 
of  natural  gases,  that  the  escape  of  the  gases  has  been  relatively  com- 
plete. As  bituminous  matter  and  carbonaceous  shales  are  associated 
with  many  of  the  European  salt  masses,  where  but  little  gas  or  oil  is 
now  present,  this  view  seems  perfectly  reasonable. 

INDUCED  SEGREGATION  OF  OIL  AND  GAS. 

During  the  more  or  less  extensive  movements  through  water-satu- 
rated sands,  which  occur  incidentally  to  the  extraction  of  oil  and  gas 
and  which  facilitate  evaporation  and  concentration,  oil  and  gas  tend 
to  segregate  above  the  water  in  the  higher  portions  of  the  pay  sands. 
This  process  we  have  termed  induced  segregation.1  The  movements 
by  which  the  segregation  is  facilitated  are  caused  by  the  expansion 
of  gas  under  pressure,  either  assisted  or  retarded  by  hydrostatic 
pressure,  the  tendency  being  to  replace  the  materials  extracted 
through  the  wells. 

It  has  not  been  possible  to  measure  the  extent  of  the  movements 
in  the  sands,  but  by  studying  the  porosity  and  thickness  of  the  sands 
and  by  calculating  the  volumes  of  rock  necessary  to  contain  the  vast 
quantities  of  oil  and  water  that  have  been  produced  in  some  of  the 
fields,  it  is  possible  to  approximate  roughly  the  extent  of  migration. 
In  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  there  is  evidence  that  production  from  oil 
wells  is  accompanied  by  movements  of  water,  oil,  and  gas  through 

1 Mills,  R.  V.  A.,  and  Wells,  R.  C.,  The  evaporation  of  water  at  depth  by  natural  gases 
(abstract)  : Washington  Acad.  Sci.  Jour.,  vol.  7,  pp.  309-310,  1917. 


96  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


the  Keener  sand  for  distances  ranging  from  half  a mile  to  1J  miles. 
Such  migrations,  we  believe,  must  involve  considerable  segregation 
of  gas  and  oil  above  the  water. 

The  principles  of  induced  segregation  are  worthy  of  consideration 
in  the  practical  recovery  of  oil  and  gas.  It  is  partly  due  to  this  segre- 
gation that  certain  wells  which  penetrate  the  higher  parts  of  a water- 
saturated  pay  sand  yield  oil  and  gas  more  persistently  than  wells 
which  penetrate  lower  parts  of  the  same  sand.  In  sands  which  are 
only  partly  filled  with  water  or  in  which  the  water  level  is  lowered 
during  production  induced  migration  and  segregation  will  still  occur, 
but  the  oil  will  not  necessarily  be  found  in  the  higher  portions  of 
the  pay  sands.  A particular  part  of  a pay  sand  may  become  so  en- 
riched by  induced  migration  and  segregation  as  to  increase  the  rate 
of  oil  production  from  a certain  well  or  group  of  wells,  whereas  the 
rate  of  production  from  neighboring  wells  will  continually  decrease 
until  the  wells  are  abandoned.  The  abandonment  of  wells  yielding 
large  amounts  of  water  with  relatively  little  oil  may  have  a detri- 
mental effect  upon  neighboring  wells  by  decreasing  the  movements 
that  bring  about  induced  segregation,  or  by  permitting  the  so-called 
44  drowning  out  ” of  the  productive  wells  by  water.  Many  wells  that 
have  been  abandoned  because  of  their  excessive  yields  of  water  might 
have  been  successfully  operated  had  the  "geologic  conditions  and  re- 
arrangements of  fluids  been  understood.  Where  the  supply  of  deep\ 
seated  water  is  very  large,  the  continued  pumping  of  poorly  pro- 
ductive wells  that  tap  relatively  high  portions  of  pay  sands  should 
bring  about  increased  oil  production  through  induced  migration  and 
segregation  unless  the  textural  conditions  in  the  sand  are  unfavorable. 
On  the  other  hand,  where  the  water  level  is  lowered  by  pumping, 
wells  penetrating  relatively  low  portions  of  the  pay  sand  may  be  bene- 
fited. Numerous  examples  justifying  these  statements  have  been  / 
noted  during  the  field  investigations  for  this  paper. 

Near  Miltonsburg,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  a Keener  well  had  an 
initial  daily  yield  of  1J  barrels  of  oil,  with  150  barrels  of  water. 
By  persistently  pumping  the  well  for  one  month  the  rate  of  oil 
production  was  slightly  increased.  At  the  end  of  16  months  the 
daily  production  was  5 barrels  of  oil,  with  80  barrels  of  water.  Dur- 
ing the  same  period  the  rate  of  oil  production  from  a neighboring 
-well  increased  from  4 to  7 barrels  of  oil  a day,  while  the  rate  of  water 
production  decreased  from  100  to  25  barrels  a day.  Within  dis- 
tances of  500  to  2,000  feet  wells  drilled  a few  months  previously 
and  apparently  yielding  oil  and  water  from  the  same  pay  sand 
were  gradually  producing  less  oil  and  more  water.  It  appears  that 
the  increased  production  from  two  of  the  wells  was  due  to  deep- 


RELATED  PHENOMENA  AND  DEDUCTIONS  OF  VALUE.  97 

seated  movements  and  rearrangements  of  the  fluids,  induced  segre- 
gation being  facilitated  by  conditions  of  structure,  lenticularity,  or 
texture  of  the  productive  sand. 

In  sec.  13,  Center  Township,  Monroe  County,  Ohio,  two  Keener 
oil  wells  have  yielded  more  than  80,000  barrels  of  oil  and  250,000 
to  300,000  barrels  of  salt  water,  the  total  volume  of  which  (oil 
and  water  combined)  appears  to  be  enough  to  fill  the  productive 
sand  completely  throughout  an  area  of  at  least  1 square  mile.  Never- 
theless these  two  wells  are  surrounded  by  11  so-called  dry  holes 
and  two  poorly  productive  oil  wells  at  distances  of  only  a few  hun- 
dred to  a few  thousand  feet.  The  two  best  wells  tap  a relatively 
high  part  of  the  pay  sand,  the  top  of  which  is  6 to  9 feet  higher  than 
in  the  surrounding  wells,  and  have  been  operated  steadily  since  1906. 
In  the  poorly  productive  and  nonproductive  wells  larger  quantities 
of  salt  water  with  relatively  little  oil  were  encountered  in  lower 
portions  of  the  same  pay  sand.  The  water  together  with  oil  seems, 
unquestionably,  to  have  migrated  to  the  productive  wells  during 
their  operation. 

A somewhat  similar  instance  of  induced  migration  and  segrega- 
tion was  noted  near  Jerusalem  Village,  in  Sunsbury  Township, 
Monroe  County,  Ohio,  where  a small  group  of  Keener  oil  wells  has 
yielded  approximately  120,000  barrels  of  oil  together  with  400,000 
or  500,000  barrels  of  salt  water.  Of  these  amounts  a single  well  on 
the  J.  R.  Scott  farm  has  yielded  approximately  80,000  barrels  of 
oil  and  150,000  barrels  of  salt  water.  The  top  of  the  pay  sand 
in  this  very  productive  well  is  15  feet  higher  than  in  the  surround- 
ing wells.  Furthermore  this  well  was  drilled  in  1904  and  has 
yielded  oil  and  water  steadily,  whereas  most  of  the  other  wells  within 
distances  of  a few  hundred  to  a few  thousand  feet  have  been  aban- 
doned because  of  the  excessive  yields  of  water  with  comparatively 
little  oil. 

Detailed  field  investigations  by  Munn 1 suggest  that  induced  migra- 
tion and  segregation  may  be  important  factors  in  the  recovery  of 
oil  from  the  Hundred-foot  and  other  water-bearing  sands  in  the 
Sewickley  quadrangle.  The  significance  of  hydraulic  movements 
in  oil  and  gas  accumulation  was  emphasized  bjr  Munn 2 in  1909,  and 
what  we  have  said  regarding  induced  migration,  segregation,  and 
accumulation  of  gas  and  oil  can  be  regarded  as  an  outgrowth  from 
his  work. 

1 Munn,  M.  J.,  Geology  of  the  oil  and  gas  fields  in  Sewickley  quadrangle : Pennsyl- 
vania Top.  and  Geol.  Survey  Comm.  Rept.  1,  1910. 

2 Munn,  M.  J.,  The  anticlinal  and  hydraulic  theories  of  oil  and  gas  accumulation : 
Econ.  Geology,  vol.  4,  pp.  509-529,  1909. 

91818°— 19 7 


98  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 


CLOGGING  OE  OIL  AND  GAS  SANDS. 

Another  process  that  has  an  influence  on  the  extraction  of  oil  and 
gas  and  is  closely  related  to  this  investigation  is  the  deposition  of 
mineral  matter  in  the  interstices  of  a pay  sand  after  extraction  has 
begun.  The  clogging  of  the  interstices  may  seal  a pay  sand  suffi- 
ciently to  retard  or  stop  production  from  a well  or  group  of  wells 
long  before  the  gas  and  oil  are  exhausted.  Part  of  the  trouble 
attributed  to  the  paraffining  of  oil  wells  is  no  doubt  due  to  the  clog- 
ging of  the  sands  by  the  deposition  of  mineral  salts.  As  the  result 
of  chemical  changes,  such  as  those  which  are  expressed  by  the  type 
reaction  set  forth  on  page  50  and  which  are  brought  about  through 
the  mixing  and  concentration  of  certain  waters  having  different 
properties  of  reaction,  carbonates  and  sulphates  are  commonly  depos- 
ited, not  only  in  the  wells  and  in  the  interstices  of  the  productive 
sands  immediately  around  the  wells  but  also  in  portions  of  the  sands 
that  are  remote  from  the  wells.  In  this  way  many  oil  fields  where 
the  sands  have  been  flooded  by  injurious  Avaters  have  been  ruined. 
A new  well  drilled  in  an  old  field  where  much  oil  and  gas  remain 
unextracted  may  be  nonproductive  owing  to  such  clogging  of  the 
sands. 

Waters  that  on  being  concentrated  deposit  carbonates  or  that  react 
with  the  deep-seated  brines  to  form  carbonate  or  sulphate  should  be 
carefully  excluded  from  all  productive  sands.  If  such  waters  have 
entered  the  productive  sands  or  if  it  is  impossible  to  exclude  them 
from  wells  it  may  be  feasible  to  use  chemical  reagents  to  prevent  the 
deposition  of  mineral  matter  in  the  wells  and  the  sand  interstices 
or  to  remove  such  material  which  has  previously  been  deposited.  A 
detailed  discussion  of  the  practical  methods  of  preventing  or  remov- 
ing these  mineral  deposits  would  be  inappropriate  in  this  bulletin, 
though  the  subject  is  worthy  of  further  investigation. 

PROSPECTING  EOR  OIL  AND  GAS. 

In  prospecting  for  oil  and  gas  in  a region  known  to  be  petrolif- 
erous the  mere  presence  or  absence  of  water  in  a deep-seated  sand  is 
frequently  an  important  consideration.  Thus,  in  prospecting  the 
Hundred-foot  sand  for  oil  in  western  Pennsylvania,  the  operators 
welcome  the  presence  of  water  in  the  sand,  because  as  a rule  in  that 
region  wells  yielding  mixtures  of  oil  and  water  last  longer  and  are 
more  profitable. 

From  the  analyses  of  Appalachian  oil  and  gas  field  waters  that  are 
available,  it  appears  that  sulphates  are  characteristically  lacking  in 
the  waters  associated  with  the  oil  and  gas,  but  that  they  are  present 
in  considerable  proportions  in  the  waters  from  shallow,  nonpetrolifer- 
ous  rocks  overlying  oil  and  gas  bearing  deposits.  Sulphates  also 
occur  in  noteworthy  amounts  in  waters  from  the  deep-seated  non- 


BELATED  PHENOMENA  AND  DEDUCTIONS  OF  VALUE.  99 

petroliferous  rocks  in  many  places  outside  of  oil  and  gas  fields. 
Rogers1  has  described  the  application  of  these  facts  to  the  search 
for  oil  and  gas  in  California,  where  for  a number  of  years  the 
absence  of  sulphates  from  deep-seated  waters  has  been  considered  one 
indication  of  the  proximity  of  oil  or  gas.  The  same  principle  may  be 
applicable  in  the  Appalachian  as  well  as  other  fields,  although  the 
presence  of  barium  and  strontium  in  certain  deep-seated  brines  may 
afford  an  explanation  for  the  absence  of  sulphates  in  these  waters. 

The  concentrated  chloride  waters  associated  with  oil  and  gas  in 
the  Appalachian  fields,  besides  lacking  sulphates,  also  generally  lack 
carbonate  but  contain  noteworthy  proportions  of  calcium.  The  cal- 
cium, together  with  sodium  and  magnesium,  is  deposited  as  chloride 
on  complete  evaporation.  How  generally  this  distinction  holds  true 
in  waters  outside  of  the  Appalachian  fields  can  be  determined  only 
by  further  study,  but  in  prospecting  for  oil  and  gas  in  any  field  it 
should  be  advantageous  to  determine  the  characteristics  of  the  waters 
associated  with  oil  and  gas  in  the  nearest  productive  territory  as  com- 
pared with  the  waters  in  nonproductive  strata. 

In  proved  territory  the  presence  or  absence  of  newly  deposited  car- 
bonates in  the  interstices  of  a pay  sand  suggests  whether  or  not  that 
part  of  the  sand  has  been  influenced  by  former  production.  If,  for 
instance,  oil,  gas,  and  water  have  been  drawn  from  that  part  of  the 
sand,  carbonates  have  probably  been  deposited  in  consequence  of  the 
liberation  of  carbon  dioxide,  together  with  other  gases,  from  the 
water.  Also  if  the  sand  has  been  flooded  by  waters  leaking  in  from 
abandoned  or  poorly  plugged  wells  the  fact  may  be  recognized  through 
the  presence  of  newly  deposited  carbonates  in  the  interstices  of  the  pay 
sand,  through  the  low  concentration  of  the  constituents  in  the  water, 
or  through  the  high  proportion  of  sulphate  and  carbonate  in  those 
constituents. 

DETERMINING  THE  SOURCE  OF  INEILTRATING  WATERS. 

Some  of  the  detrimental  effects  produced  when  waters  of  certain 
types  leak  into  wells  and  flood  oil  and  gas  sands  have  been  sufficiently 
described  to  emphasize  the  importance  of  excluding  injurious  waters 
from  the  wells.  To  do  this  most  effectively  the  source  of  an  infiltrat- 
ing water  that  is  causing  damage  to  a well,  a group  of  wells,  or  the 
productive  sands  themselves  should  be  determined  and  appropriate 
efforts  made  to  stop  the  leaks.  Studies  of  the  waters  occurring  in 
the  different  strata  in  any  particular  field  and  of  the  probable  reac- 
tions and  precipitation  that  might  ensue  when  such  waters  are 
mixed,  concentrated,  or  diluted  to  form  new  solutions  should  throw 
valuable  light  upon  this  subject,  if  supplemented  by  studies  of  freshly 

1 Rogers,  G.  S.,  Chemical  relations  of  the  oil-field  waters  in  San  Joaquin  Valley,  Cal. : 
U.  S.  Geol.  Survey  Bull.  653,  1917. 


100  WATERS  ASSOCIATED  WITH  PETROLEUM  AND  NATURAL  GAS. 

formed  mineral  deposits  and  solutions  collected  from  wells  actually 
affected  by  infiltrating  waters. 

It  is  evident,  for  instance,  that  the  injurious  sulphate  deposits 
which  have  interfered  with  the  production  of  oil  from  certain  old 
wells  in  Butler  County,  Pa.,  are  due  to  the  infiltration  of  sulphate- 
bearing waters  from  the  shallow  nonpetroliferous  beds,  the  sulphate 
having  reacted  with  soluble  barium  and  strontium  salts  of  the  deep- 
seated  brines  in  the  wells  where  the  leaks  occurred.  Carbonates  are 
similarly  deposited  in  some  of  these  old  wells  in  consequence  of  the 
infiltration  from  shallow  beds  of  primary  alkaline  waters  which  react 
with  the  deep-seated  brines  as  explained  on  page  50.  The  shallow 
waters  causing  these  deposits  have  not  been  properly  excluded  from 
the  wells  in  which  the  deposits  are  formed. 

NEED  FOR  FURTHER  INVESTIGATION. 

In  concluding  this  paper  we  would  emphasize  the  need  for  further 
investigation  of  the  relations  between  the  occurrence  and  produc- 
tion of  petroleum  and  natural  gas  and  the  chemistry  of  the  associ- 
ated waters.  Preliminary  studies  give  proof  of  the  Value  of  such 
work,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  future  analytical  and  experi- 
mental studies  will  furnish  additional  criteria  to  be  applied. 

Where  oil  and  gas  are  being  drawn  from  water-bearing  strata, 
careful  consideration  should  be  given  to  the  mode  of  occurrence  of 
the  gas,  oil,  and  water;  the  movements  and  rearrangements  they 
undergo  incident  to  extraction,  especially  with  relation  to  structure, 
texture,  and  lenticularity  of  the  sands;  the  physical  and  chemical 
changes  that  the  waters  undergo ; the  effects  of  these  changes  on  the 
reservoir  rocks  and  well  casings  and  tubings ; the  effects  that  infiltrat- 
ing waters  of  certain  types  have  on  the  reservoir  rocks  and  wTells 
owing  to  concentration  and  to  chemical  reaction  and  precipitation; 
and  the  methods  of  remedying  these  effects  and  their  causes. 

The  prevention  of  the  formation  of  inorganic  deposits  in  oil  and 
gas  sands  and  in  wells,  together  with  the  removal  of  such  deposits 
through  the  use  of  chemical  reagents,  constitutes  in  itself  an  im- 
portant field  for  study.  The  application  of  knowledge  of  the  chemis- 
try of  oil-field  waters  in  the  exclusion  of  infiltrating  waters  from 
wells  or  in  the  sealing  and  plugging  of  wells  is  also  important.  If 
well  tubings  and  productive  sands  become  clogged  by  inorganic  de- 
posits from  oil-field  waters,  it  may  be  feasible  to  utilize  knowledge 
of  the  processes  involved  to  exclude  injurious  waters  from  wells.  The 
waters  themselves  may  be  made  to  furnish  cementing  material. 
Further  consideration  of  these  and  other  technologic  phases  of  the 
study  of  oil  and  gas  field  waters  is  outside  the  province  of  this  paper 
but  presents  an  inviting  field  for  investigation. 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Acknowledgments  for  aid 7 

Allegany  County,  N.  Y.,  escape  of 

gas  in 61 

Aluminosilicates,  alkali,  precipitation 
of  calcium  and  magne- 
sium by 74-75 

Analyses  of  Appalachian  oil  and  gas 

field  waters 33—39 

salt  crusts  from  oil  and  gas 

wells 47 

Bacteria,  reduction  of  sulphates'  by_  70 
Baku,  Russia,  mud  volcanoes  near — 61 

Barium  sulphate,  deposition  of,  in  oil 

wells 47-49 

Barnesville,  Ohio,  “ salting  up  ” of 

gas  wells  at 46 

Benson  sand,  gas  pressures  in 28 

Berea  sand,  analyses  of  brines  from_  38 

comparison  of  brines  from,  with 
brines  from  Big  Injun 

and  Keener  sands 57—59 

dilute  waters  in 63—64 

gas  pressures  in 27,  28 

pore  space  and  sizes  of  grains 

in 21 

Big  Injun  sand,  analyses  of  brines 

from 37 

comparison  of  brine  from,  with 

brine  from  Berea  sand-  57-58 
concentration  of  brine  by  escape 

of  gas  from 63-64 

gas  pressures  in 27,  28,  29 

pore  space  and  sizes  of  grains  in_  21 

Big  Lime  sand,  analyses  of  brines 

from 35 

comparison  of  waters'  from 56 

concentration  of  brine  by  escape 

of  gas  from 63-64 

gas  pressures  in 27,  28 

Bitumen,  gas  associated  with 62—63 

Boiling  points,  raising  of,  by  under- 
ground pressures 83 

Bowlder  sand,  analyses  of  brine 

from 39 

Butler,  Pa.,  gas  sand,  gas  pressures 

in 28 

Butler  quadrangle,  Pa.,  location  of — 9 

Butler  Township,  Pa.,  crust  formed 

in  oil  well  at 48,  100 

Calcite,  occurrence  of 15 

Calcium  chloride,  effect  of,  on  the 
solubility  of  sodium 

chloride 72-73 

Canada,  escape  of  gas  in 61 


Page. 

Carbonates,  deposition  of,  in  oil 

wells 48-50,  100 

indications  from,  in  prospecting-  99 

Cementation,  deep-seated  waters  as 

agents  of 76 

Center  Township,  Monroe  County, 

Ohio,  wells  in,  migra- 
tion of  oil  to 97 

Chlorine,  ratio  of  other  constituents 
to,  in  ocean  and  in  oil 

field  waters' 31 

Cleveland,  Ohio,  “ salting  up  ” of  gas 

wells  at 46 

“ Clinton  ” sand,  gas  pressures  in 28,  29 

Clogging  of  oil  and  gas  sands,  retard- 
ing of  production  by_  44-50, 
98-100 

Coal,  emission  of  gas  from 88 

Coalburg,  W.  Va.,  well  near,  analy- 
sis of  water  from 39 

Comparison  of  waters  from  different 

geologic  horizons 57-60 

from  the  same  sand  in  neighbor- 
ing fields 55—57 

Concentration  of  saline  waters 6 

Comlit,  D.  Dale,  work  of 8 

Connate  waters,  inclusion  and  mi- 
gration of 68-69 

Constituents  of  deep-seated  waters, 
changes  in,  during  geo- 
logic time 57-64 

changes  in,  during  recent  time — 50-57 
Cow  Run  sand,  analysis  of  brine 

from  35 

Crusts,  deposition  of 6—7 

from  oil  and  gas  wells,  plates 

showing 48,  50,  52 

mineral,  deposition  of,  in  oil  and 

gas  wells 47-50 

from  oil  and  gas  wells,  an- 
alyses of 49 

salt,  from  oil  and  gas  wells,  an- 
alyses of 47 

Crystallization  of  salt,  force  exerted 

by  92-93 

Daly,  R.  A.,  cited 70-71 

on  the  saline  content  of  the  pre- 

Cambrian  ocean 65 

Deposits,  mineral,  formation  of,  in 

oil  and  ga,s  wells 

44-50,  98-100 

Dinsmore,  S.  C\,  analyses  by 7,  19 

Dolomite,  genesis  of,  in  oil  and 

gas  sands 71-76 


101 


102 


IKDEX, 


Page. 

Engines,  removing  crusts  from 72 

Evaporation  of  water  at  depth,  con- 
ditions affecting 77-8S 

by  gas  45 

Fenneman,  N.  M.,  cited 91 

Field  work,  record  of 8 

Fifth  sand,  Allegheny  County,  Pa., 

analysis  of  brine  from_  39 
Five  Hundred  Foot  sand,  analysis  of 

brine  from 35 

Flow  of  salt,  formation  of  salt 

domes  attributed  to — 93—94 
Forward  Township,  Pa.,  crust 

formed  in  oil  well  at — 47-48 
Fourth  sand,  Butler  County,  Pa., 

analysis  of  brine  from_  39 
Fredonia,  N.  Y.,  escape  of  gas 

near  61 

Gas,  artificial,  used  at  Washington, 

D.  C.,  composition  of — 79 

artificial,  used  at  Washington, 

D.  C.,  moisture  ab- 
sorbed by 79—80 

natural,  characteristics  of 22 

escape  of 60—63 

mixtures  of,  with  water 25—27 

pressures  of 27-29 

causes  of 29 

origin  of,  in  relation  to  the 

evaporation  of  water-  87—88 
saturated,  weights  of  water 
in,  at  given  tempera- 
tures   81-82 

solubility  of,  in  oil  and 

water  86-87 

Gas  fields,  Appalachian,  areal 

geology  of 11 

Appalachian,  published  reports 

on  9-10 

stratigraphy  and  structure 

of  11-14 

Genesis  of  deep-seated  brines 29 

Goldman,  M.  I.,  work  of 7,  15—16 

Grahamite,  escape  of  gas  associated 

with  63 

Hager,  Lee,  cited 91 

Harris,  G.  D.,  cited 62,  91,  92 

Harrison  Township,  Knox  County, 

Ohio,  salting  up  of  gas 

well  in 44—45 

History  of  the  oil  and  gas  field 

waters  68-77 

Hundred-foot  sand,  analyses  of 

waters  from 33-34 

comparison  of  brine  from,  with 
brine  - from  Bowlder 

sand  60 

gas  pressures  in 27,  28 

porosity  of 20 

Hunt,  T.  S.,  on  the  origin  of  deep- 

seated  chloride  waters-  64-65 


Page. 

Infiltration  of  injurious  waters,  de- 
termination and  stop- 
page of 99-100 

Investigation,  subjects  suggested  for_  100 

Java,  brine  springs  on 62 

Jefferson  County,  N.  Y.,  escape  of 

gas  in 61 

Jerusalem  Village,  Ohio,  well  near, 

migration  of  oil  to 97 

Kanawha  County,  W.  Va.,  gas  springs 

in 61 

Kaolinite,  occurrence  of 15 

Keener  sand,  analyses  of  brines 

from 35-36 

comparison  of  waters  from 51—55, 

56-57 

concentration  of  brine  by  escape 

of  gas  from 63-64 

gas  pressures  in 27,  28 

pore  space  and  sizes  of  grains 

in 21 

King,  F.  H.,  cited 69 

Lane,  A.  C.,  on  the  origin  of  deep- 

seated  chloride  waters-  65 

Larsen,  E.  S.,  work  of 7 

Lytle.  M.  E.,  acknowledgment  to 44 

cited 45 

Magnesium,  removal  of,  from  waters 

of  sedimentation 70—76 

Magnesium  carbonate  and  chloride, 

hydrolysis  of 72 

Maxton  sand,  analysis  of  brine  from_  35 

Melcher,  A.  F.,  work  of 7,  20 

Memphis,  Tenn..  escape  of  gas  near 61 

Mica,  occurrence  of - 15-16 

Microorganisms,  reduction  of  sul- 
phates by 70 

Migration  of  connate  waters,  causes 

and  results  of 68-69 

of  oil  and  gas,  facilitation  of,  by 

pumping 95-97 

Miltonsburg,  Ohio,  well  near,  com- 
parison of  waters  from_  51-55 
well  near,  oil  yield  of.  increased 

by  deepening 26-27 

wells  near,  oil  yield  of.  in- 
creased by  pumping 96-97 

Mississippi  River,  escape  of  gases  at 

mouth  of .62 

Mixtures  of  oil,  gas,  and  water,  evi- 
dence of 26-27 

Mud  volcanoes,  occurrences  of 61 

Muds,  blue,  changes  in  water  in- 
cluded in 70-71 

Munn,  M.  J.,  study  of  oil  and  gas  ac- 
cumulation by 97 

Occurrence  of  water  with  oil  and 

gas 25-29 

Ocean  water,  comparison  of,  with  oil 

and  gas  field  brines 29—33 


INDEX, 


103 


Page. 

Ohio,  eastern,  generalized  section  of 

formations  in 13—14 

Oil,  characteristics  of 22 

mixtures  of,  with  water 25—27 

Oil  fields,  Appalachian,  areal  geol- 
ogy of 11 

Appalachian,  published  reports 

on 9-10 

stratigraphy  and  structure 

of 11-14 

Organic  matter,  decomposing,  reduc- 
tion of  sulphates  by — 70 

Origin  of  oil-field  waters,  hypotheses 

concerning 5-7,  64-68 

Palmer,  Chase,  acknowledgment  to_  7 

Palo  Pinto  County,  Tex.,  escape  of 

gas  in 61 

People’s  Natural  Gas  Co.’s  well, 
Washington  County, 

Pa.,  analysis  of  brine 

from 39 

Permutite,  use  of,  in  softening 

water 74-75 

Petroleum.  See  Gil. 

Porter,  H.  C.,  Taylor,  G.  B.,  and, 

cited 88 

Potassium,  removal  of,  from  saline 

waters 75 

Pressure,  changes  of,  evaporation  of 

moisture  affected  by — 84-86 

of  gas  in  reservoir  rocks 27-29 

causes  of  — . 29 

Prospecting,  indications  that  aid 98-99 

Quartz,  secondary,  occurrence  of 15 

Red  color  in  rocks,  cause  of 24 

Reeves,  Frank,  work  of 8 

Reports,  geologic,  on  Appalachian 

oil  and  gas  fields 9-10 

Results  of  the  investigation 5-7 

Retention  of  waters  in  oil  and  gas 

sands 76—77 

Richardson,  G.  B.,  on  the  genesis  of 

deep‘seated  waters 66-67 

work  of 8 

Richlands,  Va.,  escape  of  gas  near 61 

Rocks,  generalized  sections  of,  from 
which  samples  were 

collected 12 

reservoir,  chemical  composition 

of 16-20 

deep-lying,  water  in 24 

kinds  of 14-15 

mineral  composition  of 15—16 

pore  space  and  sizes  of 

grains  in 20-21 

temperatures  of 27 

See  also  Sands,  oil  and  gas. 


Salinity,  primary  and  secondary,  of 
ocean  and  oil  field 
waters 33 


Salt,  deposition  of,  from  cooling 

brine 92-93 

deposition  of,  from  solutions 
evaporated  by  moving 

gases 89-95 

solubility  of,  in  presence  of 

calcium  chloride 72-73 

increased  by  pressure 93 

Salt  domes,  accumulations  of  gas  and 

oil  associated  with 94-95 

amount  of  gas  available  for 

evaporation  under 94 

origin  of 90-94 

Salt  sand,  analysis  of  brine  from 35 

gas  pressures  in 28 

“ Salting  up  ” of  gas  wells,  causes  of_  45,  47 

instances  of 44—47 

Salts,  crusts  of,  formed  in  oil  and 
gas  wells,  plates  show- 
ing   48,  50,  52 

Samples,  collection  of 8 

Sands,  oil  and  gas,  dilute  brines  in 63—64 

oil  and  gas,  generalized  sections 

showing 12 

water  in 22-25 

Schaller,  W.  T.,  work  of 7 

Schroeder  heirs’  farm,  well  No.  1 on, 
constituents  of  waters 

from 51-53 

Second  sand,  Forest  County,  Pa., 

analysis  of  brine  from_  39 

Sedimentation,  waters  of,  changes  in_  70-76 

waters  of,  inclusion  and  migra 

tion  of 68-69 

Segregation,  induced,  of  oil  and  gas, 

practical  results  of 95-97 

Solubility  of  salt,  decreased  by  cal- 
cium chloride 72-73 

increased  by  pressure 93 

Stabler,  Herman,  acknowledgment  to_  7 

Stumptown  gas  field,  Belmont 
County,  Ohio,  “ salting 

up  ” of  gas  wells  in 45-46 

Sullivan,  E.  C.,  cited 73-74 

Sulphates,  damage  from  infiltration 

of 100 

indications  from,  in  prospect- 
ing   98—99 

reduction  of,  in  sea  muds 70-71 

Sulphides,  occurrence  of 15 

Summerfield  quadrangle,  Ohio,  loca- 
tion of 9 

Summit  Township,  Butler  County, 

Pa.,  analysis  of  arte- 
sian water  from 35 

Taylor,  G.  B.,  and  Porter,  H.  C., 

cited 88 

Temperatures  of  oil,  gas,  and  water.  27 

subterranean,  effect  of,  on  the 
concentration  of  vapor 

in  gas 83-84 

Terrebonne  Farish,  La.,  escapes  of 

gas  in 62 


104 


INDEX, 


Page. 

Third  sand,  Butler  County,  Pa., 

analysis  of  brine  from-  39 

“ Trenton  ” limestone,  gas  pressures 

in 28 

Trinidad,  escapes  of  gas  on 62 

Vapor  pressure,  decrease  of,  by  con- 
tact with  solutions 80-81 

definition  of 78 

of  water  at  different  tempera- 
tures   80 

Warfield,  Ky.,  “ salting  up  ” of  gas 

well  at 46 

Washburne,  C.  W.,  on  the  source  of 
chlorides  in  oil-field 

waters 65-66 

Washington,  D.  C.,  artificial  gas  at, 

composition  of 79 


Page. 


Washington,  D.  C.,  artificial  gas  at, 

moisture  absorbed  by — 79-80 

Wells,  R.  C.,  analyses  by 17 

Wells,  clogging  of,  by  deposits  of 

salts 44-50,  98—100 

deepened,  yield  of  oil  and  water 

from 26-27 

shallow,  composition  and  react- 
ing values  of  water 

from 41-43 

White,  I.  C.,  acknowledgment  to 46 

Wirt  County,  W.  Va.,  gas  springs  in_  61 
Woodsfield,  Ohio,  salt  crust  in  well 

at 46 

Woodsfield  quadrangle,  Ohio,  Idea- 
tion of 9 

Zelienople  quadrangle,  Pa.,  location 

of 9 


ADDITIONAL  COPIES 
OP  THIS  PUBLICATION  MAY  BE  PROCURED  FROM 
THE  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMENTS 
GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 
WASHINGTON,  D.  C. 

AT 

20  CENTS  PER  COPY 
V 


DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  INTERIOR 

Franklin  K.  Lane,  Secretary 


United  States  GeologWTal  Survey 

George  Otis  Smith,  Director 


Bulletin  694 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  THE  METALS  OF 
THE  PLATINUM  GROUP 

PLATINUM,  PALLADIUM, 

IRIDIUM,  RHODIUM,  OSMIUM,  RUTHENIUM 

1748-1917 


BY 


JAS.  LEWIS  HOWE 


AND 


H.  C.  HOLTZ 


WASHINGTON 


GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 


1919 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Preface * 5 

Journals  examined  in  preparation  of  the  bibliography 7 

Bibliography 11 

Author  index 455 

Subject  index 485 


3 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  THE  PLATINUM 

GROUP: 


PLATINUM,  PALLADIUM,  IRIDIUM,  RHODIUM, 
OSMIUM,  RUTHENIUM. 

1748-1917. 


By  Jas.  Lewis  Howe  and  H.  C.  IIoltz. 


PREFACE. 

By  Jas.  Lewis  Howe. 

The  purpose  of  this  bibliography  is  to  enumerate  the  articles 
upon  the  metals  of  the  platinum  group  found  in  scientific  literature 
to  the  end  of  the  year  1917.  It  has  been  my  aim  to  make  the  record 
of  the  chemistry  of  these  metals  as  complete  as  possible,  and  it  is 
believed  that  few  references  of  importance  are  omitted.  Of  the 
chloroplatinates  of  organic  bases  only  those  early  formed  or  of  special 
interest  are  considered.  Outside  of  the  department  of  chemistry 
several  divisions  of  the  subject — for  example,  the  use  of  platinum 
in  electrical  apparatus,  in  photography,  and  in  connection  with  tho 
X rays — have  not  been  followed  beyond  the  earlier  references. 

After  having  been  engaged  on  this  work  for  some  time,  I obtained 
a copy  of  the  pamphlet  “Fragment  einer  Monographie  des  Platins 
und  der  Platinmetalle,”  by  C.  Claus.  This  was  published  in  1883 
by  the  St.  Petersburg  Academie  des  Sciences,  from  papers  found 
after  Prof.  Claus’s  death,  which  had  occurred  more  than  20  years 
before.  Only  300  copies  of  the  pamphlet  were  printed,  and  it  is  very 
rare.  Together  with  other  material  it  contains  a fairly  complete 
bibliography  of  the  platinum  metals,  brought  down  to  1861,  but 
unfortunately,  probably  owing  to  the  illegibility  of  the  manuscript, 
it  suffers  from  many  errors.  It  is  a critical  bibliography  and  hence, 
owing  to  the  author’s  unique  knowledge  of  the  platinum  metals,  is 
very  valuable. 

Much  of  the  work  on  the  bibliography  to  1896 1 was  done  in  the 
library  of  the  American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences  and  in  that 
of  the  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology,  and  I have  been  greatly 

i Howe,  J.  L.,  Bibliography  of  the  metals  of  the  platinum  group,  1748-189G:  Smithsonian  Mise.  Coll., 
No.  1804,  1897. 


5 


6 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


indebted  to  the  librarians  for  the  facilities  offered  at  both  these 
places.  Especially  valuable  was  the  assistance  rendered  by  the  late 
Dr.  Holden,  the  librarian  of  the  Academy,  and  more  recently  by 
Mrs.  Holden.  I would  also  gratefully  acknowledge  the  aid  received 
from  my  former  pupil,  Miss  M.  M.  Tevis,  and  from  the  late  Dr.  H. 
Carrington  Bolton,  Prof.  T.  H.  Norton,  Prof.  H.  P.  Talbot,  and  many 
others  who  can  not  be  enumerated.  Dr.  Bolton’s  invaluable  “Cata- 
logue of  scientific  periodicals”  and  the  Royal  Society’s  catalogue 
have  been  freely  used  and  were  of  great  help  in  the  verification  of 
data. 

In  1912  my  friend  M.  Louis  Quennessen,  of  Paris,  put  into  my  hands 
the  manuscript  of  a supplement  to  the  first  bibliography,  which 
brought  the  record  of  literature  down  through  1910.  This  supplement 
was  prepared  at  the  instance  of  M.  Quennessen  by  Dr.  Hendrick 
Coenraad  Holtz,  then  of  Amsterdam,  who  had  spent  some  years 
in  work  on  platinum  and  its  congeners  under  Prof.  Duparc  at  Geneva 
and  M.  Quennessen  at  Paris  and  had  gained  an  extensive  knowledge 
of  the  literature  of  these  metals.  As  this  supplement  contained  few 
references  from  English  and  American  journals,  I undertook  to  fill 
these  gaps  and  later  to  bring  the  record  down  as  nearly  as  possible 
to  date. 

In  this  connection  appreciation  should  be  expressed  for  the  valuable 
suggestions  and  assistance  rendered  by  M.  Quennessen;  by  Mr.  James 
M.  Hill,  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey;  by  Mr.  Edward  A. 
Colby  and  Dr.  F.  E.  Carter,  of  Baker  & Co. (Inc.) ; and  by  Mr.  Albert  R. 
Merz,  of  Washington,  D.  C. 

At  the  suggestion  of  several  users  of  the  first  edition,  the  subject 
index  has  been  arranged  alphabetically,  as  being  more  convenient 
for  general  use.  To  facilitate  the  use  of  the  indexes  the  number  of 
each  title  includes  the  year.  The  abbreviations  used  are  generally 
those  recommended  by  the  committee  on  bibliography  of  the  Ameri- 
can Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science  and  for  the  later 
years  those  recommended  by  the  American  Chemical  Society. 
Anonymous  articles  are  indicated  by  a dash  ( ). 

Washington  and  Lee  University,  Lexington,  Va. 

December  24,  1918. 


JOURNALS  EXAMINED  IN  PREPARATION  OF  THE 
BIBLIOGRAPHY.1 


*Abhandlungen  der  Koniglich-bohmischen  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften  Prague. 
*Abhandlungen  der  Kdniglichen  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften  zu  Berlin. 
*Abhandlungen  der  Mathematisch-physikalische  Classe  der  Koniglich-bayerischen 
Akademie  der  Wissenschaften,  Munich  (complete  to  1888). 

*Allgemeines  Journal  der  Chemie  (Scherer). 

^American  Chemical  Journal. 

^American  Chemist. 

^American  Journal  of  Science. 

^Analyst. 

*Annalen  der  Chemie  (Pharmacie)  (Liebig). 

*Annalen  der  Physik  (Gren,  Gilbert,  Poggendorff,  Wiedemann)  (complete  to  1894) 

*Annales  de  chimie. 

fAnnales  de  chimie  analytique. 

*Annales  de  chimie  et  de  physique. 

*Annales  de  l’Ecole  polytechnique,  Delft,  1884  to  1891. 
fAnnales  de  physique. 

*Annales  des  mines. 

*Annals  of  Philosophy. 

*Archiv  fur  die  gesammte  Naturlehre  (Kastner). 

*Atti  della  Accademia  delle  scienze,  Turin. 

*Atti  della  Reale  accademia  dei  Lincei,  Rome. 
fBerg-  undhuttenmannische  Zeitung. 

*Berichte  der  Deutschen  chemischen  Gesellschaft. 

Berichte  der  Deutschen  physikalischen  Gesellschaft. 

*Berichte  fiber  die  Verhandlungender  Koniglich-s&chsischen  Gesellschaft  der  Wis- 
senschaften (from  1897). 

Beytrage  zu  den  chemischen  Annalen  (1785-1794). 

*Biblioth&que  britannique. 

*Bibliotheque  universelle  de  Geneve. 

*Bihang  till  Kongliga  svenska  Vetenskaps  Akademiens  Handlingar  (to  1893). 
^Bulletin  de  l’Academie  imp^riale  des  sciences  de  St.-P6tersbourg. 

Bulletin  de  la  classe  physico-mathematique  de  l’Acad&nie  imp6riale  des  sciences 
de  St.-Petersbourg  (vols.  8-17,  except  9,  11,  13,  16). 

^Bulletin  de  la  Soci6t6  chimique  de  France. 

Bulletin  de  la  Societe  des  naturalistes,  Moscow  (1829-1892). 
fBulletin  of  the  American  Iron  and  Steel  Association. 

^Bulletin  scientifique  publie  par  l’Acad4mie  imp6riale  des  sciences  de  St.-P6ters- 
bourg. 

^Canadian  Chemical  Journal. 

*Chemical  Abstracts. 

f*Chemical  and  Metallurgical  Engineering. 

^Chemical  Gazette. 

*Chemical  News. 
fChemiker-Zeitung. 

*Chemische  Annalen  (Crell). 

Chemische  Industrie  (1885-1892). 

*Chemisches  Journal  (Crell). 

1 Complete  files  of  journals  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*)  were  examined  as  far  as  published  or  until  the  files 
were  held  up  by  censorship.  Journals  marked  with  a dagger  (f)  were  completely  examined  only  subsequent 
to  1896. 


7 


8 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


♦Chemisches  Zentralblatt  (formerly  Pharmaceutisches  Centralblatt  and  Chemisches 
Centralblatt)  (from  1832,  except  1834,  1886,  1888). 

Chemisch-technischen  Mittheilungen  (Eisner)  (to  1882). 

♦Comptes  rendus  hebdomadaires  des  seances  de  l’Acad4mie  des  sciences. 
♦Edinburgh  Journal  of  Science  (Brewster). 

♦Edinburgh  New  Philosophical  Journal  (Jameson). 

♦Edinburgh  Philosophical  Journal. 
fElektrochemische  Zeitschrift. 

Engineering  and  Mining  Journal. 
fEngineering  Magazine, 
f Engineering  News. 

Forhandlingar  i Yidenskabs  Selskabet,  Christiania  (1858-1889,  except  1883). 
f Fortschritte  der  Chemie,  Physik  und  physikalischen  Chemie. 

♦Gazzetta  chimica  italiana. 
t International  Zeitschrift  fiir  Metal! ographie. 

*Jahresbericht  fiber  die  Fortschritte  der  Chemie. 

♦Jahresbericht  fiber  die  Fortschritte  der  physischen  Wissenschaften  (Berzelius). 
Journal  de  chimie  medical  e (complete  to  1861). 

♦Journal  des  mines. 

* Journal  fiir  Chemie  (Schweigger). 

♦Journal  fiir  die  Chemie  (Gehlen). 

♦Journal  fiir  praktische  Chemie. 

♦Journal  fiir  technische  und  okonomische  Chemie. 

♦Journal  of  Analytical  and  Applied  Chemistry  (Hart). 

♦Journal  of  Industrial  and  Engineering  Chemistry. 

♦Journal  of  Physical  Chemistry. 

♦Journal  of  the  American  Chemical  Society  (except  1886-1890). 

♦Journal  (Memoirs  and  Proceedings)  of  the  Chemical  Society,  London, 
f Journal  of  the  Faraday  Society. 

♦Journal  of  the  Franklin  Institute. 

♦Journal  of  the  Institute  of  Metals. 

Journal  of  the  Iron  and  Steel  Institute. 

♦Journal  of  the  Russian  Physical-Chemical  Society. 
t*Journal  of  the  Society  of  Chemical  Industry. 
t*Journal  of  the  Washington  Academy  of  Sciences, 
f Koll  oid-Zeitschrift . 

Kongliga  svenska  Vetenskaps  Akademiens  Handlingar,  Stockholm  (1804-1847, 
1865-1891). 

♦Magazm  fiir  Pharmacie. 

♦Melanges  physiques  et  chimiques  tires  du  bulletin  physico-matk^matique,  Aca- 
demie  imperiale  des  sciences  de  St.-Petersbourg. 

Memoires  de  l’Academie  imperiale  des  sciences  de  St.-Petersbourg. 

♦Memoires  presentes  a l’Acad&nie  imperiale  des  sciences  de  St.-Petersbourg  par 
divers  savans  etranges. 

fMemoirs  and  Proceedings  of  the  Manchester  Literary  and  Philosophical  Society. 
Memorie  della  Accademia  delle  scienze  dell  Istituto  di  Bologna  (to  1891). 

Memorie  della  Accademia  delle  scienze,  Turin  (1853-1893,  except  vol.  18). 
♦Memorie  della  Reale  accademia  dei  Lincei,  Rome. 

♦Metallurgical  and  Chemical  Engineering. 
fMetallurgie. 

♦Mineral  Industry. 

Mining  and  Scientific  Press. 

♦Monatsberichte  der  Koniglich-preussischen  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften  zu  Berlin. 
♦Monatshefte  der  Chemie. 


JOURNALS  EXAMINED. 


9 


Monatshefte  fur  Chemie. 

*Neues  allgemeines  Journal  der  Chemie  (Gehlen). 

*Nicholson’s  Journal  of  Natural  Philosophy,  Chemistry,  and  the  Arts. 

Nova  acta  Academiae  scientiarum  imperialis  petropolitanae. 

Nova  acta  Regiae  societatis  scientiarum,  Upsala  (1815-1891). 

Oefversigt  af  Kongliga  svenska  Yetenskaps  Akademiens  Forhandlingar  (1848-1893). 
Oesterreichische  Zeitschrift  fur  Berg-  und  Htittenwesen. 

*Oversigt  over  det  Kongelige  danske  videnskabernes  Selskabs  Forhandlingar. 
*Pharmaceutisches  Centralblatt.  See  Chemisches  Zentralblatt. 

Philosophical  Magazine  (complete  to  1894). 

*Philosophical  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London. 

*Physikalische  Zeitschrift. 

*Polytechnisches  Journal  (Dingier). 

^Proceedings  of  the  Cambridge  Philosophical  Society. 

Proceedings  of  the  Glasgow  Philosophical  Society  (complete  to  1893). 

*Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  London. 

Quarterly  Journal  of  Science  (to  1885). 

Records  of  the  Geological  Survey  of  New  South  Wales. 

Recueil  des  travaux  chimiques  des  Pays-Bas  (complete  to  1893). 

*Rendiconti  del  Reale  istituto  lombardo  di  scienze  e lettere,  Milan  (complete  to  1892). 
*R6pertoire  de  chimie  appliqu^. 

*Repertoire  de  chimie  pure. 

Repertorium  der  analytischen  Chemie. 

Revue  de  metallurgie. 

School  of  Mines  Quarterly  (to  1895,  except  vols.  11,  12). 

*Science  Reports  of  the  Tohoku  Imperial  University. 

Scientific  American. 

*Sitzungsberichte  der  Koniglich-bohm.ischen  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften, 
Prague  (to  1893). 

*Sitzungsberichte  der  Koniglich-preussischen  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften  zu 
Berlin. 

*Sitzungsberichte  der  Mathematisch-naturwissenschaftliche  Classe  der  Kaiserlichen 
Akademie  der  Wissenschaften,  Vienna. 

*Skrifter  der  Kongelige  danske  videnskabernes  Selskabs,  Copenhagen. 
■{•Transactions  and  Proceedings  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Canada. 

Transactions  of  the  Cambridge  Philosophical  Society  (complete  to  1894). 
Transactions  of  the  Edinburgh  Royal  Society  (1805-1892). 

Transactions  of  the  Royal  Irish  Academy,  Dublin  (to  1886). 

■{■Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of  Tasmania. 

Universitets  Ars-skrift,  Lund  (1864-1893,  except  vols.  3,  4,  8,  18). 

*Verhandlungen  der  Koniglichen  Akademie  der  Wissenschaften  zu  Berlin. 
*Verhandlungen  der  Schweizerischen  naturforschenden  Gesellschaft,  Basel  (to  1893). 
*Verhandlungen  des  Naturhistorischen  Vereins  des  preussischen  Rheinlands  und 
Westphalens  (to  1891). 

*Zeitschrift  fur  analytische  Chemie  (Fresenius). 

*Zeitschrift  fur  anorganische  Chemie. 

*Zeitschrift  fur  Chemie  und  Industrie  der  Kolloide. 

*Zeitschrift  fur  die  angewandte  Chemie. 

Zeitschrift  fiir  die  chemische  Industrie. 

*Zeitschrift  fur  Elektrochemie. 

fZeitschrift  fur  Instrumentenkunde. 

fZeitschrift  fiir  Krystallographie  and  Mineralogie. 

*Zeitschrift  fiir  physikalische  Chemie. 

^Zeitschrift  fiir  physiologische  Chemie. 
fZeitschrift  fiir  wissenschaftliche  Mikroskopio. 


- 


. 


. 


.. 


. 


. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


1748:  1.  Don  Antonio  de  Ulloa.  “Relation  historica  del  viage  a 
la  America  Meridional.  ” Madrid,  1748.  (First  reference  to 
platinum,  vol.  i,  lib.  vi,  cap.  x,  p.  606.)  Pt. 

1751:  1.  Wm.  Watson  (and  W.  Brownrigg).  Several  papers  con- 
cerning a new  semi-metal  called  platina.  Pt. 

1.  Letter  enclosing  metal,  by  W.  Brownrigg,  p.  581. 

2.  Memoirs  of  a semi-metal  called  Platina  di  Pinto,  found  in 

the  Spanish  West  Indies,  p.  585. 

3.  Letter  from  Watson,  p.  590. 

4.  Note,  p.  593  (incorrectly  paged  589). 

5.  Further  experiments,  by  Wm.  Brownrigg,  p.  594. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  46  (1751),  584;  Phil.  Trana.  London,  Abridg.,  10 
(1809),  97. 

1751 : 2.  T.  Scheffer.  (Properties  of  the  ore.)  Pt. 

Handl.  Akad.  Stockholm,  14  (1751),  275. 

1755:  1.  Wm.  Lewis.  Experimental  examination  of  a white  sub- 
stance, said  to  be  found  in  the  gold  mines  of  the  Spanish  West 
Indies,  and  there  known  by  the  appellation  of  Platina,  Platina 
di  Pinto,  Juan  Blanca.  (Solution,  alloys,  purification.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  48  (1755),  638;  50  (1757),  148;  Phil.  Trans.  London, 
Abridg.,  11  (1807),  97;  (1809), 495. 

1758:  1.  M.  . . . [Morin].  “La  platine,  For  blanc,  o-u  le  huitieme 
metal.  ” Paris,  1758.  (Treatise  on  the  ore,  including  papers 
of  Watson,  Scheffer,  and  Lewis.)  Pt. 

1758:  2.  Macquer  (and  Baume).  Sur  For  blanc  ou  la  platine. 
(Gives  attempt  to  fuse  platinum  with  burning  glass.)  Pt. 

Hist.  Acad.  sci.  Paris,  1758,  51;  Mem.  Acad.  sci.  Paris,  1758,  119. 

1761 : 1.  A.  S.  Marggraf.  Versuche  mit  dem  neuen  mineralischen 
Koerper  Platina  del  Pinto  genannt.  Pt. 

Marggraf;  Chymische  Schriften,  1. 

1764:  1.  A.  F.  Cronstedt.  Nagra  von  och  Anm&rkningsar  vid 
Platina  di  Pinto.  Pt. 

Kong.  vet.  Akad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  1764,  221;  K.  schw.  Akad.  Ab- 
handl.,  1765,  167. 

1774:  1.  G.  G.  L.  de  Buffon.  (Platinum  an  alloy  of  gold  and  iron.) 

Obs.  sur  phys.  (Rozier),  3 (1774),  324.  Pt. 


11 


12 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1774:  2.  Blondeau.  Lettre  (upon  platinum  as  an  alloy  of  gold  and 
iron  as  averred  by  Buffon).  Pt. 

Obs.  sur  phys.  (Rozier),  4 (1774),  154;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1786,  ii,  -68. 

1775 : 1 . G.  de  Morveau.  Lettre  a Buffon,  sur  la  fusibility  la  mal- 
leability le  magn6tisme,  la  density  la  cristallization  de  la 
platine,  et  son  alliage  avec  Facier.  Pt. 

Obs.  sur.  phys.  (Rozier),  6 (1775),  193. 

1775:  la.  A.  Murray.  Om  platinas  magnetismus.  Pt. 

Kong.  vet.  Akad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  1775,  349. 

1775:2.  T.  Bergman.  (Fusibility  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Obs.  sur  phys.  (Rozier),  Sept.  (1775). 

1776:  1.  J.  Ingenhousz.  Easy  methods  of  measuring  the  diminu- 
tion of  bulk,  etc.,  together  with  experiments  on  platina. 
(Magnetism,  etc.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  66  (1776),  257. 

1777:  1.  G.  de  Morveau,  Maret,  and  Durande.  (Fusibility  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Elemens  de  chymie  de  l’Acad.  de  Dijon,  2 (1777),  153. 

1777:  2.  T.  Bergman.  Anmarkningsar  om  Platina.  Pt. 

Kong.  vet.  Akad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  1777,  31;  K.  schw.  Akad.  Ab- 
handl.  1777,  301. 

1777:  3.  Ueber  das  weisse  Gold  oder  die  Platina  del 

Pinto.  Pt. 

Abliandl.  einer  Privatgesel.  in  Bohmen,  precursor  to  Bohm.  Gesel. 
(Prag),  3 (1777),  337. 

1779:  1.  Tillet.  Memoire  sur  le  moyen  de  dissoudre  la  platine  par 
Facide  nitreux.  (Solution  of  platinum  in  nitric  acid.)  Pt. 

M6m.  Acad.  sci.  Paris,  1779,  373,  385,  545;  Hist.  Acad.  sci.  Paris,  1779, 
13;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),.  1784,  i,  345. 

1779:  2.  Achard.  Leichte  Methode,  Gefiisse  aus  Platina  zu  berei- 
ten.  (Fusibility  of  platinum  with  arsenic.)  Pt. 

Mem.  Akad.  Berlin  (1779);  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1784,  i,  1. 

1780:  1.  T.  Bergman  (and  G.  de  Morveau).  Opuscula  physico- 
chimica.  Platina,  vol.  ii,  p.  166. 

Opuscules  chymiques  et  physiques,  trad,  par  Do  Morveau. 
Dijon  1785.  Sur  la  platine  (with  many  comments  by 


Morveau),  vol.  ii,  pp.  172,  418.  Pt. 

1782:  1.  Graf  von  Sickingen.  Versuche  uber  die  Platina.  Ueber- 
setzt  von  G.  A.  Suckow.  Mannheim,  1782.  Pt. 

1782:  2.  C.  F.  Wenzel.  (Solution  of  platinum  in  aqua  regia  and 
affinity  of  platinum  chlorid  for  potash.)  Pt. 

Lehre  der  Verwandschaft  der  Korper,  p.  175. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


13 


1783: 

1784: 

1784: 

1784: 

1784: 

1785: 

1786: 

1786: 

1786: 

1787: 

1787: 

1788: 


1.  R.  de  lTsle.  (Crystallization  of  ammonium  platinum 
chlorid.)  Pt. 

Essai  de  cristallographie,  2d  edition,  i,  408. 

1.  L.  Crell.  Einige  Yersuche  mit  der  Platina  im  Porcel- 

lainofen.  (Unschmelzbar  wenn  rein.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1784,  i,  828. 

2.  Graf  yon  Sickingen.  (Magnetische  Kraft  und  Schmel- 

zung  des  Platins  durch  den  electrischen  Schlag.)  Pt. 

J.  Ingenhouss,  Yermischte  Schriften  physisch.-med.  Inhalts,  2te  Aufl., 
Wien,  1784,  i,  419;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1785,  ii,  372. 

3.  G.  L.  L.  de  Buffon.  (Platina  ein  Legirung  Goldes  mit 

Eisen.)  Pt. 

Obs.  sur  phys.  (Rozier),  1784,  252,  324,  417;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1784, 
ii,  541. 

4.  Yon  Milly.  (Platina  ein  Legirung  Goldes  und  Eisens 

mit  Quecksilber.)  Pt. 

Obs.  sur  phys.  (Rozier),  1784,  252,  324,  417;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1784, 
ii,  542. 

(Both  the  above  credited  also  to  Register  Acad.  Dijon.) 

1.  G.  de  Morveau.  (Ueber  die  Yerfertigung  von  Gerath- 
schaften  aus  Platina).  Pt. 

Nouv.  mem.  Acad.  Dijon,  1785,  i,  106;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1792,  i,  168. 

1.  G.  de  Morveau.  Brief  (Platina  zu  Tiegeln  nicht  geeignet 

da  es  von  Salpeter  angegriffen  und  zerstort  wird.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1786,  i,  157. 

2.  R.  Landriani.  Brief  (Platina  durch  starkes  Gluhen  nicht 

halb  durchsichtig).  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1786,  ii,  141. 

3.  G.  [de  Morveau?!.  Buffon’s  Hist.  nat.  des  mineraux, 

vols.  2 and  3.  (Kritik  auf  Angaben  dass  Platina  eine  Mis- 
chung  Goldes,  Arsens  und  Eisens  sei.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1786,  ii,  371. 

1.  G.  de  Morveau.  Brief  (uber  Platina  Gefasse).  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1787,  i,  333. 

2.  G.  de  Morveau.  Brief  (uber  Platina  Gefasse).  (Pla- 

tina zu  Tiegeln  sehr  geeignet  wenn  die  Platinaproduct  nicht 
zu  eingeschrangt  sei.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1787,  ii,  243. 

1.  M.  R.  de  Celis.  An  account  of  a mass  of  native  iron 
found  in  South  America.  (Occurrence  of  Platina.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  78  (1788),  41. 


14  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1789:  1.  T.  Willis.  (Schmelzversuche  mit  Kohle  imd  Borax.) 

Obs.  eur  Phys.  35  (1789),  217;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1790,  i,  242.  Pt. 

1790:  1.  A.  M.  Cortinovis.  Che  la  platina  americana  era  un 
metallo  eonosciuto  dagli  antichi  [etc.].  (Identical  with“elec- 
trum.”)  Bassano.  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  12  (1792),  59  (Review);  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1796,  i,  166. 

1790:  2.  Hielm.  Union  du  platine  avec  I'oxide  de  molybdene  et 
avec  le  molybdene.  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  4 (1790),  17. 

1790:  3.  Leonhardi.  Brief.  (Konigsaure  Platina  Niederschlag 
mit  alkalische  Baumohlseife).  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1790,  ii,  127. 

1790:  4.  Lavoisier,  Observations  sur  le  platine.  (Utilization  of 
platinum  for  vessels.)  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  5 (1790),  137;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1792,  ii,  85. 

1790:  5.  Herr  von  R.  (in  Paris).  Brief  (Platina  Gefasse  in  Paris 
von  Jeanty  billig  zu  kaufen).  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1790,  ii,  53. 

1790:  6.  Von  Ruprecht.  Versuche  uber  die  metallische  Natur 
der  Bitter-,  Kalk-,  und  Kieselerde  [etc.].  (Schmelzung  der 
Platina.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1790,  ii,  195. 

1790:  7.  Von  Ruprecht.  Ueber  den  Platinakdnig,  und  damit 
verwandte  Gegenstande.  (Schmelzung  der  Platina.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1790,  ii,  387. 

1791:  1.  Willir  and  Norvel.  Experiences  sur  la  platine.  (Spe- 
cific gravity.)  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  9 (1791),  219. 

1791:  2.  Von  Born.  Neuere  Nachrichten  uber  die  Metallization 
der  alkalischen  Erde.  (Fusion  of  platinum  by  Von  Tihavsky.) 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1791,  i,  3.  Pt. 

1792:  1.  T.  Bergman.  L’ or  blanc  ou  platine  du  Pinto.  (Note  on 
occurrence  from  “Un  chapitre  de  la  geographie  physique.”)  Pt. 

J.  des  mines  [3],  16  (1792),  25. 

1792:  2.  Pelletier.  Le  phosphure  de  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  13  (1792),  105. 

1792:  3.  C.  L.  Berthollet  and  Pelletier.  Rapport  fait  au  Bu- 
reau de  Consultation,  sur  les  moyens  proposes  par  M.  Jeanty 
pour  travailler  le  platine.  (Contains  first  reference  to  throw- 
ing platinum  into  river,  to  prevent  its  misuse.)  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  14  (1792),  20. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


15 


1793:  1.  Hauy.  Troisieme  extrait  du  traite  in6dit  de  minera- 
logie;  4me  classe,  Substances  metalliques.  Pt. 

Supplement  (Platine),  J.  des  mines,  5 (An.  V),  457  (Platine,  p.  466);  6 
(An.  V),  692. 

1796:  1.  W.  A.  Lampadius.  Vermischte  chemische  Versucke.  (Al- 
loying of  platinum  with  gold  and  silver.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1796,  i,  219. 

1797:  1.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Sur  les  sels  et  pr£cipit£s  de 
platine. 

Neue  besondere  Versuche  mit  der  Platina.  (Ammonium  and 
potassium  platini-chlorids.)  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  24  (1797),  205;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1797,  i,  195. 

1797:  2.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Sur  Tamalgame  du  platine. 

Noch  einige  Bemerkungen  und  Versuche  uber  die  Platina. 
(Platinum  amalgam  and  alloy  with  copper.)  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  24  (1797),  209;  Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1797,  ii,  26. 

1797 : 3.  D.  Richter.  Beantwortung  der  von  Herrn  A.  v.  Mussin- 
Puschkin  aufgeworfenen  Frage:  “Wie  die  schnelle  Wiederher- 
stellung  der  Platina  durch  Quecksilber  aus  dem  Platinasalz 
bey  der  Bildung  des  Amalgama’s,  und  die  noch  viel  schnellere 
Verkalkung  des  Quecksilbers  bey  der  Beriihrung  des  Amal- 
gama’s  mit  Wasser  zu  erklaren  seye.”  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1797,  ii,  202;  Ann.  de  chim.  28  (1798),  206. 

1797:  4.  S.  Tennant.  On  the  action  of  nitre  upon  gold  and 
platina.  (Corroded  by  fused  niter.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  87  (1797),  219. 

1798:  1.  G.  de  Morveau.  Examen  de  quelques  propri6t6s  du 
platine,  densite,  tenacite. — De  1’ adhesion  du  platine  au  mer- 
cure. — De  Tamalgame  du  platine. — De  Taction  du  muriate 
oxigen6  de  potasse  sur  le  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  25  (1798),  3,  10,  12,  17;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  1 
(1799),  369;  Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  1 (1798),  971. 

1798:  2.  G.  de  Morveau.  De  Taction  du  nitre  en  fusion  sur  . . . 
le  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  27  (1798) , 42. 

1798:  3.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Quelques  nouvelles  observa- 
tions et  experiences  sur  le  platine.  Alliago  avoc  cuivre  et 
argent.  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  28  (1798),  85. 


16 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1798:  4.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Bemerkungen  fiber  Titan- und 
Chromium-Met  all,  fiber  Platina  und  einige  andere  Gegen- 

stande.  (Fusion  and  purification  of  platinum  with  potash 

six  days.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1798,  ii,  44,3. 

1798:  5.  A.  Rochon.  (Use  of  platinum  for  telescopes  and  in  the 
arts.)  Pt. 

J.  de  phys.;  Phil.  Mag.  2 (1798),  19,  170. 

1799:  1.  J.  L.  Proust.  Experimentos  hechos  en  la  platina. 

Experiences  sur  le  platine.  Pt. 

1.  Des  corps  etranges  qui  se  trouvent  m61es  au  platine,  p. 

146. 

2.  Du  separation,  147. 

4.  Du  soufre  mineralisateur  du  platine,  151. 

5.  D’ oxidation  de  platine,  153. 

6.  Essais  de  Tackle  nitrique  sur  le  platine,  158. 

7.  Essais  de  Tackle  nitro-muriatique,  160. 

8.  Du  graphite  des  mines  de  platine,  161. 

9.  Sur  les  dissolutions  du  platine,  163. 

10.  Sur  les  dissolutions  du  platine  en  grande,  165. 

11.  Experiences  sur  la  poudre  noire,  168. 

12.  De  la  cristallisation  des  dissolutions  de  platine,  225. 

13.  De  la  composition  de  Tackle  nitro-muriatique  pour  la 

dissolution  de  la  mine  de  platine,  232. 

14.  Dissolution  du  platine,  244. 

Madrid,  An.  hist.  nat.  1 (1799),  51. 

Ann.  de  chim.  38  (1801),  146,  225;  Phil.  Mag.  11  (1801),  44,  118  (trans- 
lation). 

1799:  2.  J.  Priestley.  Experiments  on  the  transmission  of  acids 
and  other  liquors  in  the  form  of  vapour,  over  several  sub- 
stances in  a hot  earthen  tube.  (Solution  of  platinum  in  aqua 
regia,  p.  11.)  Pt. 

Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  Trans.  5 (1802),  1. 

1799:  3.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Erkennung  des  Kali  durch  salzsauren 

Platina.  Pt. 

Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  3 (1799),  438. 

1799:  4.  E.  Brugnatelli.  Versuch  liber  die  Kobaltsaure.  (In 

Platinaauflosung  keine  Veranderung.)  Pt. 

Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  3 (1799),  647. 

1799:  5.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Vermischte  Bemerkungen  fiber 
das  Chromium,  das  Salz  bey  der  Zersetzung  der  Platina- Amal- 
gama’s  und  verwandte  Gegenstande.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1799,  i,  451. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


17 


1799:  6.  A.  y.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Einige  Bemerkungen  iiber  das 
Platina-amalgamas.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1799,  ii,  3. 

1799:  7.  A.  y.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Einige  neuere  Versuche  liber  das 
Platina-amalgama;  nebst  Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Vervolstandi- 
gung  chemische  Thatsachen.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1799,  ii,  359;  J.  des  mines,  15  (1804),  198. 

1800:  1.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Ueber  zwey  neue  Platina-salze, 
und  die  metallische  Krystallization  derselben.  (Sodium 
platini-chlorids.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1800,  i,  91;  J.  des  mines,  15  (1804),  199. 

1800:  2.  S.  Tennant.  De  Taction  du  nitre  sur  Tor  et  le  platine. 

J.  de  phys.  51  (1800),  157.  Pt. 

1800:  3.  Experiments  performed  at  the  London  Philo- 

sophical Society.  (Fusion  of  platinum  by  oxygen  gas  on  char- 
coal.) Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  8 (1800),  264. 

1800:  4.  R.  Knight.  A new  and  expeditious  process  for  rendering 
platina  malleable.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  6 (1800),  1;  Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  7 (1801),  26. 

1800:  5.  A.  y.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Fine  neue  Methode  die  Platina 
zu  schmieden.  Pt. 

Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  4 (1800),  411;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  4 (1800), 
492  (from  Hamburger  Unpartheiischer  Correspondent,  Nr.  33,  1800). 

1800:  6.  W.  Henry.  Account  of  a series  of  experiments  under- 
taken with  a view  of  decomposing  muriatic  acid.  (Platinum 


black.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  90  (1800),  188;  Ann.  de  chim.  43  (1802),  306;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  7 (1801),  265. 

1800:  7.  A.  Rociion.  Abhandlung  liber  die  Platina  und  ihre  Nutz- 
barkeit  in  besonders  zu  Spiegel-Teleskopen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  4 (1800),  282. 

1801:  1.  J.  L.  Proust.  Faits  detaches  sur  le  platine.  Pt. 

J.  de  phys.  52  (1801),  409. 

1802.  1.  W.  Thomson.  (Regarding  a platinum  mine.)  Pt. 


N6velle  di  letteratura,  scienze,  arti,  e commercio,  Napoli,  Oct.  28,  1802, 
No.  18;  Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  10  (1803),  570. 

1802:  2.  J.  Cuthbertson.  A series  of  experiments  upon  metals 
with  an  electrical  battery,  shewing  their  property  of  absorbing 
oxigen  from  the  atmosphere  when  exploded  by  electric  dis- 
charges. (Oxidation  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Nicholson’s  J.  5 (1802),  136;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  11  (1802),  411. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 2 


18 

1802: 

1802: 

1802: 

1802: 

1802: 

1803: 

1803: 

1803: 

1803: 

1803: 

1803: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

3.  Alloys  of  gold  with  platina.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  13  (1802),  405. 

4.  M.  yan  Marum.  Experiences  sur  la  colonne  electrique. 

(Fusion  du  platine.)  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  40  (1802),  314;  Nicholson’s  J.  1 (1802),  178;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Gilbert),  10  (1802),  121. 

5.  R.  Hare.  Account  of  the  fusion  of  strontites  and  the 

volatilization  of  platinum,  and  also  of  a new  arrangement  of 
apparatus.  Pt. 

Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  Trans.  6 (1809),  99;  Phil.  Mag.  14  (1802),  304;  Ann.  de 
chim.  45  (1802),  113;  60  (1807),  81. ' 

6.  It.  Chenivix.  Analysis  of  corundum.  (Use  of  platinum 

crucibles  for  fusion  of  caustic  potash.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  92  (1802),  337;  J.  de  Phys.  55  (1802),  409. 

7.  M.  H.  Klaproth.  Anwendbarkeit  der  Platina  zu  Verzie- 

rungen  auf  Porcellan.  Pt. 

Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  9 (1802),  413;  Nicholson’s  J.  7 (1804),  286;  Phil. 
Mag.  17  (1803),  135.  [From  “Samml.  d.  deutsch.  Abh.  d.  k.  Akad. 
d.  Wiss.  Berlin,  1788-9,  12,  p.  160”?] 

1.  R.  Chenivix.  Enquiries  concerning  the  nature  of  a new 

metallic  substance  lately  sold  in  London,  as  a new  metal, 
under  the  title  of  palladium.  Pd. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  93  (1803),  290;  Ann.  de  chim.  47  (1803),  151,  192; 
J.  de  phys.  57  (1803),  127,  217;  N.  allg.  J.  Ohem.  (Gehlen),  1 (1803), 
174;  Nicholson’s  J.  7 (1804),  85, 176;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 
121;  Bibl.  Brit,  23  (1803),  384;  24  (1803),  32  (in  full);  J.  des  mines, 
14  (1803),  372;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  14  (1803),  241;  J.  phys.  chim. 
(Van  Mons),  No.  11,  Sept. 

2.  R.  Chenivix.  L’annonce  d’un  nouveau  mStal,  palladium. 

Ann.  de  chim.  46  (1803),  333.  Pd,  Pt. 

3.  R.  Chenivix.  Palladium  compose  de  platin  et  mercure. 

Ann.  de  chim.  46  (1803),  336.  Pd,  Pt. 

4.  Some  account  of  a pretended  new  metal  offered 

for  sale,  and  examined  by  Richard  Chenivix,  Esq.  Pd,  Pt. 

Nicholson’s  J.  5 (1803),  136. 

5.  Note  sur  un  nouveau  metal  (palladium).  Pd,  Pt. 

J.  des  mines,  14  (Ann.  xi),  240,  320. 

6.  J.  B.  Richter.  Beytrag  zu  Herrn  Chenivix’s  Abhandlung 

fiber  das  Palladium.  Pd,  Pt. 

N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  1 (1803),  547;  Ann.  de  chim.  52  (1804),  17; 
Nicholson’s  J.  11  (1805),  61. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


19 


1803:  7.  V.  Rose  and  A.  F.  Gehlen.  Priifende  Verhandlungen 
liber  das  von  Chenivix  kiinstlich  nachgemachte  Palladium. 

Pd,  Pt. 

N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  1 (1803),  529;  Ann.  de  chim.  52  (1804),  5; 
Nicholson’s  J.  11  (1805),  61. 

1803:8.  L.  N.  Yauquelin.  Palladium  ou  nouvel  argent.  (Proper- 
ties and  reactions.)  Pd. 

Ann.  de  chim.  46  (1803),  334. 

1803:  9.  A.  F.  Fourcroy  and  L..  N.  Vauquelin.  Extrait  d’un 
memoire  sur  le  platine.  (Reactions,  showing  impurity  [Ir ?].) 

Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  48  (1803),  177;  Ann.  Mus.  nat.  d’hist.  nat.  3 (1803),  149; 
N.  allg.  J.  chem.  (Gehlen),  2 (1804),  269;  Phil.  Mag.  19  (1804),  117;  J. 
de  phys.  57  (1803),  450. 

1803:  10.  H.  V.  Collet-Descotils.  Notice  sur  la  cause  des  cou. 
leurs  differents  qu’affectent  certains  sels  de  platine.  (Red  and 
yellow  chlorids;  two  states  of  oxidation  [iridium  probably  pres- 
ent].) Pt,  [Ir?]. 

J.  des  mines,  15  (1803),  46;  Ann.  de  chim.  48  (1803),  153;  N.  allg.  J. 
Chem.  (Gehlen),  2 (1804),  73;  J.  de  phys.  57  (1808),  384;  Nicholson’s 
J.  8 (1804),  118. 

1803:  11.  G.  de  Morveau.  Pyrom^tre  de  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  de  chim.  46  (1803),  276;  Nicholson’s  J.  6 (1803),  89. 

1803:  12.  G.  de  Morveau.  Sur  l’alliage  de  For  avec  le  platine.  Pt. 
Ann.  de  chim.  47  (1803),  300. 

1803:  13.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Bereitung  von  Platin-amalgam. 

Pt. 

Allg.  J.  Chem.  (Scherer),  6 (1803),  134;  J.  des  mines,  15  (1803),  195; 
Chem.  Ann.  (Crell),  1799,  i,  452. 

1803:  14.  Strauss.  Bemerkungen  uber  das  Platina-Amalgama. 
(Method  of  coating  copper  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  der  Pharm.  (Trommsd.),  11  (1803),  18;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  24 
(1806),  402;  Nicholson’s  J.  9 (1804),  303. 

1803:  15.  A.  Tilloch.  On  Pepys’  experiment.  (Fusion  of  plati- 
num by  the  galvanic  current.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  12  (1803),  96. 

1804:  1.  R.  Chenivix.  Ueber  Palladium.  (Not  an  alloy.)  Pd. 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  17  (1804),  115. 

1804  : 2.  R.  Chenivix.  Respecting  the  new  metal  contained  in  crude 
platina.  Pd. 

Nicholson’s  J.  7 (1804),  117. 


20  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1804:  3.  [W.  H.  Wollaston.]  Reward  of  £20  for  artificial  pro- 
duction of  palladium.  Pd. 

Nicholson’s  J.  7 (1804),  75,  159. 

1804 : 4.  J.  Hume.  On  the  supposed  new  metal  lately  discovered  in 
platina.  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  19  (1804),  29. 

1804:  5.  J.  B.  Trommsdorff.  Ueber  Chenivix’s  Palladium.  Pd. 

N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  2 (1804),  238. 

1804:  6.  A.  v.Mussin-Puschkin.  Ueber  Palladium,  Chromium  und 
eine  neue  Yerfahrungsart  das  Platin  zu  Schmieden.  Pd,  Pt. 

N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  3 (1804),  450. 

1804:  7.  A. v.Mussin-Puschkin.  Renseignements sur le palladium. 

J.  chim.  (Van  Mons),  6 (1804),  229.  Pd. 

1804:  8.  A.  F.  Fourcroy  and  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Experiences  sur 
le  platine  brut,  sur  1’ existence  de  plusieurs  metaux,  et  d’une 
espece  nouvelle  de  metal  dans  cette  mine.  (In  platinum  are 
found  Ti,  Cr,  Cu,  Fe,  and  a new  metal,  Ir.  Description  of  prop- 
erties of  iridium.)  pt  [Ir]. 

Ann.  de  chim.  49  (1804),  188,  219;  50,  5;  N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  3 
(1804),  262. 

1804:  9.  A.  F.  Fourcroy.  Premier  r6sultat  des  nouvelles  re- 
cherches  sur  le  platine  brut,  et  annonce  d’un  nouveau  metal 
qui  accompagne  cette  esp&ce  de  mine.  Pt,  Rh. 

Ann.  Mus.  nat.  hist.  nat.  Paris,  3 (1804),  149. 

1804:  10.  A.  F.  Fourcroy.  Notice  d’une  suite  de  recherches  sur  le 
nouveau  metal  qui  existe  dans  le  platine  brut.  Pt,  Rh. 

Ann.  Mus.  nat.  hist.  nat.  Paris,  4 (1804),  77. 

1804:  11.  H.  V.  Collet-Descotils.  (New  metal  in  crude  platina.) 

Nicholson’s  J.  7 (1804),  76;  from  “J.  d.  chim.”  Pt,  Rh  (?). 

1804:  12.  S.  Tennant.  On  two  metals  found  in  the  black  powder 
remaining  after  the  solution  of  platina.  (Separation,  proper- 
ties, and  naming  of  iridium  and  osmium,  including  osmium 
amalgam,  p.  418.)  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  94  (1804),  411;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 
161;  Ann.  de  chim.  52  (1804),  47;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  19  (1805)' 
118;  J.  des  mines,  18  (1804-5),  81;  J.  de  phys.  59  (1804),  97;  N.  allg.  J. 
Chem.  (Gehlen),  5 (1805),  166;  Nicholson’s  J.  8 (1804),  220;  10  (1805), 
24;  Phil.  Mag.  20  (1805),  162;  Bibl.  brit.  27  (1804),  51  (in  full). 

1804:  13.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  On  a new  metal  found  in  crude 
platina.  (Discovery  of  rhodium  with  its  properties.)  Pt,  Rh. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  94  (1804),  419;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 
162;  Ann.  d.  chim.  52  (1804),  51;  J.  des  mines,  18  (1805),  91;  Nicholson’s  j 
J.  10  (1805),  34;  N.  allg.  J.  chem.  (Gehlen),  5 (1805),  175;  Phil.  Mag.  j 
20  (1805),  168;  21  (1805),  89;  Bibl.  brit.  Aug.  1804. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  21 

1804:  14.  S.  Tennant  and  W.  H.  Wollaston.  (Note  on  exami- 
nation of  crude  platina.)  Pt,  Ir,  Os.  Rh. 

Bui.  des  sciences,  90  (1804),  234;  Nicholson’s  J.  11  (1805);  59. 

1804:  15.  A.  y.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Notes  surle  platine.  Pt. 

J.  des  mines,  15  (1804),  195. 

1804:  16.  A.  v.  Mussin-Puschkin.  Method  of  preparing  malleable 
platina  and  triple  muriatic  salts  of  platina.  (Barium  and 
magnesium  platino-chlorids.)  Pt. 

Nicholson’s  J.  9 (1804),  65;  Ann.  d.  chim.  54  (1805),  220;  Phil.  Mag.  20 
(1805),  76. 

1804:  17.  J.  L.  Proust.  Sur  le  platine  noir.  Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  49  (1804),  177;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Gehlen),  1 (1806),  347. 

1804:  18.  C.  L.  Berthollet.  On  the  difference  between  effects  of 
electricity  and  of  heat.  (Platinum  little  heated  by  discharge.) 

Nicholson’s  J.  8 (1804),  80.  Pt. 

1804:  19.  Amicus.  Note  respecting  suspension  of  zinc  in  hydrogen 
and  the  consequent  ignition  and  fusion  of  platinum  wire.  Pt. 
Nicholson’s  J.  9 (1804),  24. 

1804:  20.  J.  W.  Ritter.  Ueber  den  Galvanismus.  I.  Ueber  die 
Stelle  des  Palladiums  und  anderer  Metallgemisehe  in  ihr.  Pd. 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  16  (1804),  293. 

1805:  1.  R.  Chenivix.  On  the  action  of  platina  and  mercury  upon 
each  other.  Pt,  Pd. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  95  (1805),  104;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 
175;  Ann.  d.  chim.  66  (1808),  82;  N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  6 (1806), 
696;  Nicholson’s  J.  11  (1805),  162;  Phil.  Mag.  22  (1805),  26,  102. 

1805:  2.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  Letter  concerning  palladium.  Pd. 
Nicholson’s  J.  10  (1805),  204. 

1805:  3.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  On  the  discovery  of  palladium,  Y/ith 
observations  on  other  substances  found  with  platina. 

Pd,  Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

1.  Ore  of  iridium,  p.  316. 

2.  Hyacinths,  318. 

3.  Precipitation  of  platinum,  319. 

4.  Deposition  of  palladium  and  palladium  amalgam,  322. 

5.  Reasons  for  thinking  palladium  a new  metal,  324. 

6.  Additional  properties  of  palladium,  326. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  95  (1805),  316;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 

207;  Ann.  d.  chim.  61  (1807),  89;  Bibl.  brit.  28  (1805),  230;  J.  fiir  Chem. 
(Gehlen),  1 (1806),  231;  J.  des  mines,  21  (1807),  131;  Nicholson’s  J.  13 
(1806),  117  (in  full);  Phil.  Mag.  22  (1805),  272. 

Palladium  for  sale  (note),  Pd. 

Nicholson’s  J.  11  (1805),  304. 


1805:  4. 


22 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1805:5.  [C.  L.  Berthollet.]  Sur  le  palladium.  (Letter  regarding 

origin  of  the  specimens.)  Pd. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  54  (1805),  198. 

1805:  6.  H.  V.  Collet-Descotils.  Sur  le  rhodium  et  le  palladium. 

J.  des  mines,  18  (1805),  185.  Rh,  Ft. 

1805:  7.  A.  Tilloch.  Note  on  new  metal  in  platina.  (Rhodium.) 

Phil.  Mag.  21  (1805),  188.  Rh,  Pt. 

1805:8.  A.  Tilloch.  A new  process  for  rendering  platina  malleable. 

Phil.  Mag.  21  (1805),  175.  Pt. 

1805:  9.  L.  W.  Gilbert.  Ueber  die  neuen  Metalle  in  der  Platina 
und  uber  das  Palladium.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  19  (1805),  120. 

1805:  10.  [L.  W.  Gilbert?]  Zusatz  die  neu  entdeckten  Metalle  in 

der  Platina  betreffend.  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  19  (1805),  254. 

1805:  11.  [A.  F.  Gehlen?]  Beytrage  zur  Geschichte  der  neuern 

Untersuchungen  iiber  die  Platina.  (Review  of  Wollaston, 
Nicholson,  Chenivix,  Tennant,  etc.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  4 (1805),  219. 

1805:  12.  A.  F.  Gehlen.  Einige  Bemerkungen  iiber  das  Palla- 
dium. Pd. 

N.  allg.  J.  Chem.  (Gehlen),  5 (1805),  234. 

1805:  13.  J.  Stodart.  Precipitation  of  platina  as  a covering  or 
defense  to  polished  steel,  and  also  to  brass.  Pt. 

Nicholson’s  J.  11  (1805),  282;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  24  (1806),  117. 

1806:  1.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Sur  F existence  du  platine  dans  les 
mines  d’ argent  de  Guadalcanal  en  Estremadura.  Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  60  (1806),  317;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  24  (1806),  406; 
25  (1807),  206;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Gehlen),  2 (1806),  694;  Nicholson’s  J.  17 
(1807),  128  (in  full);  Phil.  Mag.  27  (1807),  335;  29  (1807),  278;  Mem. 
de  l’lnst.  Paris,  1807,  sem.  1,  289. 

1806:  2.  C.  F.  Bucholz.  (Ore  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Acad,  scien.  Erfurt,  Mar.  4,  1806;  Nicholson’s  J.  15  (1806),  337. 

1806 : 3.  A.  F.  Fourcroy  and  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Notice  sur  les  pro- 
prietes  comparees  dans  quatre  metaux  nouvellement  de- 
couverts  dans  le  platine  brut.  (History  of  discovery  of  the 
platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Ann.  mus.  nat.  hist.  nat.  Paris,  7 (1806),  401;  M4m.  de  l’Institut,  Paris, 
6(1806),  565;  Ann.  d.  Phys.  (Gilbert),  24  (1806),  209;  Nicholson’s  J.  15 
(1806),  328;  J.  flir  Chem.  (Gehlen),  2 (1806),  672;  Phil.  Mag.  26  (1807), 
370. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


23 


1806:  4.  J.  B.  Trommsdorff.  Beitrage  zu  den  nenesten  Unter- 
suchungen  des  rohen  Platina  und  Bestatigung  der  darin 
neuentdeckten  Metalle:  des  Osmiums,  Iridiums,  Rhodiums 
und  Palladiums.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

J.  der  Pharm.  (Trommsd.),  14  (1806),  3. 

1806:  6.  L.  W.  Gilbert.  Einiges  zur  Geschichte  des  Palladiums, 
aus  Brief en  und  Aufsatzen  der  Herrn  Chenivix  und  Wol- 
laston. Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  24  (1806),  220. 

1806:  6.  Correa.  Note  sur  un  chalumeau  hydrostatique.  (Hare’s 
blowpipe  and  fusion  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  60  (1806),  81. 

1807:  1.  H.  V.  Collet-Descotils.  Note  sur  la  purification  du 
platine.  (Melting  ore  with  zinc.)  Pt. 

Mem.  phys.  chim.  de  la  Soc.  d’Arcueil,  1 (1807),  370;  Ann.  d.  chim.  64 
(1807),  334;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  27  (1807),  231;  J.  fur  Chem. 
(Gehlen),  5 (1808),  321;  Phil.  Mag.  37  (1811),  65. 

1808:  1.  H.  V.  Collet-Descotils.  Ueber  Chenivix’s  Quecksilber- 
platin.  (Letter  to  Gehlen.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  fhr  Chem.  (Gehlen),  7 (1808),  195. 

1808:  2.  C.  L.  Berthollet.  Sur  des  experiences  de  M.  Chenivix 
et  de  M.  Descotils  sur  le  platine.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  67  (1808),  86;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Gehlen),  7 (1808),  47;  Nichol- 
son’s J.  25  (1810),  65. 

1809:  1.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  On  platina  and  native  palladium 
from  Brazil.  Pt,  Pd. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  99  (1809),  189;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 
330;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  36  (1810),  303;  Nicholson’s  J.  25  (1810), 
18;  Phil.  Mag.  33  (1809),  250;  35  (1810),  164;  Bibl.  brit,  44  (1810),  232. 

1809:  2.  J.  Cloud.  An  account  of  experiments  made  on  palladium 
found  in  combination  with  pure  gold  (from  Brazil).  Pd. 

Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  6 (1809),  407;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  36 
(1810),  310;  Ann.  d.  chim.  74  (1810),  99;  Nicholson’s  J.  -30  (1812), 
137;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  1 (1811),  362. 

1809:  3.  J.  Scott.  On  the  superiority  of  platina  for  making  the 
pendulum  spring  of  watches.  Pt. 

Nicholson’s  J.  22  (1809),  148. 

1809:  4.  G.  de  Morveau.  Memoire  sur  la  tenacity  des  mdtaux 
ductiles.  (Tenacity  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

M£m.  de  l’Inst.  Paris,  1809,  267;  Ann.  d.  chim.  71  (1809),  194;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  34  (1810),  209;  Nicholson’s  J.  26  (1810),  102. 


24 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1809:  5.  J.  G.  Children.  Experiments  performed  with  a view  to 
ascertain  the  most  advantageous  method  of  constructing  a 
voltaic  apparatus.  (Fusion  of  platinum  wire,  etc.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  99  (1809),  32;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  36  (1810), 
366;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  1 (1811),  374. 

1810:  1.  G.  de  Morveau.  Sur  la  mine  de  platine  de  Saint- 
Domingue.  • Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  73  (1810),  334;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  36  (1810),  301; 
Nicholson’s  J.  31  (1812),  77. 

1810:  2.  Percy.  Sur  du  platine  trouve  a Saint-Domingue.  Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  74  (1810),  111. 

1810:  3.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Analyse  du  platine  trouve  a Saint- 
Domingue.  Pt. 

Ann.  Mus.  nat.  hist.  nat.  Paris,  15  (1810),  317;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert), 
36  (1810),  357;  Bui.  sc.  Soc.  pliilom.  Aug.  1810. 

1810:  4.  H.  Davy.  Researches  on  the  oxymuriatic  acid,  its  nature 
and  combinations,  etc.  (Action  of  platinum  on  aqua  regia.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  100  (1810),  243;  Ann.  d.  chim.  76  (1810),  134; 
J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  3 (1811),  110;  Bibl.  brit.  45  (1810),  229; 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  39  (1811),  3;  Brugnatelli,  Giornale,  4 (1811), 
129;  J.  de  Phys.  71  (1810),  326. 

1810:  5. Fusion  of  iridium  and  osmium  at  the  Royal 

Institution.  (Note  on  lecture.)  Ir,  Os. 

Phil.  Mag.  35  (1810),  463. 

1811:  1.  A.  F.  Gehlen.  Platinum  und  Palladium  in  Brazilien  und 
St.  Domingo  gefunden.  (Resume.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  1 (1811),  362. 

1811:  2.  A.  von  Humboldt.  Essai  politique  sur  le  royaume  de  la 
Nouvelle-Espagne.  (Sur  les  mines  du  Mexique.)  Pt. 

J.  des  mines,  29  (1811),  101. 

1811:  3.  II.  Davy.  Elements  of  chemical  philosophy.  (Expansion 
of  platinum  and  palladium,  melting  of  platinum  in  electric 
light,  oxides  of  platinum  and  palladium,  and  sulphide  of  palla- 
dium.) Pt,  Pd. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  8 (1813),  336,  342;  Phil.  Mag.  40  (1812), 
442. 

1811:  4.  IL.  Davy.  On  some  of  the  combinations  of  oxymuriatic 
gas  and  oxygene.  (Action  of  alkalies  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  101  (1811),  1;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 
385;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  3 (1811),  209,  212,  232;  Ann.  d.  chim. 
78  (1811),  298;  79  (1811),  5;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  39  (1811),  43; 
J.  de  phys.  72  (1811),  358;  Nicholson’s  J.  29  (1811),  222. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


25 


1811. 

1811: 

1812: 

1812: 

1812: 

1812: 

1813: 

1813: 

1813: 

1813: 


5.  G.  de  Morveau.  De  la  platinure  et  du  double  ou  plaqu6 

de  platine.  (Plating  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  77  (1811),  297;  J.  des  mines,  29  (1811),  392;  Nicholson’s 
J.  30  (1812),  292;  Brugnatelli,  Giornale,  4 (1811),  356. 

6.  M.  E.  Chevreul.  Recherches  chimiques  sur  le  bois  de 
Campeche.  (Precipitation  of  albumen  by  iridium  chloride.)  Ir. 

Ann.  Mus.  nat.  hist.  nat.  Paris,  17  (1811),  339;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger), 
8 (1813),  290;  Ann.  d.  chim.  81  (1812),  158;  Bull,  de  pharm.  3 (1811), 
546;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  42  (1812),  145. 

1.  P.  Johnson.  Experiments  which  prove  platina,  when 
combined  with  gold  and  silver,  to  be  soluble  in  nitric  acid.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  40  (1812),  3. 

2.  E.  Davy.  On  the  combinations  of  sulphur  and  phosphorus 

with  platina.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  40  (1812),  27;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  10  (1814),  382. 

3.  E.  Davy.  On  some  new  combinations  of  platina.  Pt. 
With  sulphur,  p.  209. 

With  phosphorus,  oxygen,  chlorine,  ammonia,  p.  263. 

With  sulphuric  acid,  potassium  sulphate,  sodium  sulphate, 
etc.,  p.  350. 

Fulminating  platina,  p.  361. 

Phil.  Mag.  40  (1812),  209,  263,  350. 

4.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Forsok  till  ett  rattfardigande  af  de  theo- 

retiskt-chemiska  asigter.  (Oxides  and  sulphides  of  the  plati- 
num metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Kong.  Yet.  Acad.  Handl.  Stockholm,  33  (1813),  175,  196,  204;  Ann. 
of  Phil.  (Thomson),  3 (1813),  252,  353;  5 (1815),  20;  J.  fur  Chem. 
(Schweigger),  7 (1813),  55,  66;  Ann.  d.  chim.  83  (1812),  167,  168; 
87  (1813),  126,  138. 

1.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Memoire  sur  le  palladium  et  le 

rhodium.  (History,  separation,  properties,  compounds.) 
(Best  resume  of  the  history  of  palladium.)  Pd,  Rh. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  88  (1813),  167;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  4 (1814),  216, 
271,  308;  5 (1815),  21;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  12  (1814),  265;  Phil. 
Mag.  44  (1814),  33;  Brugnatelli,  Giornale,  8 (1815),  221. 

2.  Leitiiner.  (Process  of  rendering  platinum  malleable.)  Pt. 
Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  5 (1815),  20. 

3.  A.  F.  Gehlen.  Ueber  ein  neues  Verfahren  das  Platin  zum 

Verarbeiten  geschickt  zu  machen.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  7 (1813),  309. 

4.  J.  S.  C.  Schweigger.  Ueber  Leithner’s  Verfahren  Platin 

zum  Verarbeiten  geschickt  zu  machen.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  7 (1813),  514. 


26 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1813:  5.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  A method  of  drawing  extremely  fine 
wires.  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  103  (1813),  114;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1 (1832), 
455;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  1 (1813),  224;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert), 
52  (1816),  284;  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  1 (1816),  119. 

1813:  6.  [K.  A.]  Neumann.  Bemerkungen  fiber  Platingefasse.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  9 (1813),  213. 

1813:  7.  A.  Marcet.  On  an  easy  method  of  procuring  a very 
intense  heat.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  2 (1813),  99;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  11 
(1814),  45;  Brugnatelli,  Giornale,  7 (1814),  230. 

1813:  8.  F.  C.  Vogel.  Beitrage  zu  der  Lehre  von  den  bestimmten 
chemischen  Mischungs-Verhaltnissen.  (Oxides  of  platinum 
and  palladium  and  platinum  amalgam.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  7 (1813),  188. 

1814 : 1.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  M&moire  sur  P iridium  et  sur  P osmium. 
(History,  obtaining,  properties,  compounds,  alloys.)  Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  89  (1814),  150,  225;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  24  (1818), 
21;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  6 (1815),  433;  Hermbstadt,  Museum,  6 
(1815),  83. 

1814:  2.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Sur  le  palladium  et  le  rhodium. 

Pd,  Rh. 

J.  des  mines,  35  (1814),  141,  from  Nouv.  bul.  des  sc.;  J.  fiir  Chem. 
(Schweigger),  12  (1814),  265;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  4 (1814),  216, 
271;  Phil.  Mag.  44  (1814),  33. 

1814:  3.  A.  Laugier.  Nouvelle  maniere  de  retirer  P osmium  du 
platine  brut.  Os. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  89  (1814),  191;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  19  (1817), 
70;  Phil.  Mag.  44  (1814),  51. 

1814:  4.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Experiences  sur  le  muriate  d’iridium 
et  de  potasse.  Ir. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  90  (1814),  260. 

1814:5.  R.  L.  Ruhland.  Beitrage  zur  Geschichte  des  Iods.  (Ver- 
bindung  des  Iods  mit  Platin.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  11  (1814),  137;  Miinchen,  Denkschriften, 
1814-15,  151. 

1814:  6.  J.  S.  C.  Schweigger.  Amalgamiren  des  Platins  mittelst 
des  electrischen  Stromes.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  12  (1814),  224. 

1814:  7.  J.  P.  J.  D’Arcet.  Note  sur  Pessai  des  alliages  de  platine 
et  d’ argent.  Pt. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  89  (1814),  135. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


27 


1814:8.  W.  A.  Lampadius.  Legirung  des  Nickels  und  Platins.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  10  (1814),  175;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson), 
5 (1815),  61. 

1814:  9.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Platinagefasse  (besonders  in 
Paris  zu  chemischem  Gebrauche  verfertigte)  und  Bemerk- 
ungen  fiber  das  Yerhalten  der  Salpetersauren  Alkalien  gegen 
Platin  und  fiber  Kali.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chepi.  (Schweigger),  10  (1814),  217. 

1814:  10.  Joris.  Ueber  Verfertigung  von  Platingefassen,  Ausbes- 
serung  schadhaft  gewordener,  und  fiber  eine  Gedachtniss- 
mfinze  aus  Platin  auf  den  Sieg  bei  Leipzig.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  11  (1814),  385. 

1814:  11.  Scholz.  Ueber  Platinaverarbeitung.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  12  (1814),  349. 

1815:  1.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Note  sur  la  maniere  d’obtenir  le 
muriate  ammoniaco  de  rhodium,  regulierement  cristallise.  Rh. 

Ann.  d.  chim.  93  (1815),  204. 

1815:  2.  J.  G.  Children.  Experiments  with  a large  voltaic  bat- 
tery. (Fusion  of  platinum,  etc.)  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  105  (1815),  363:  Ann.  d.  chim.  96  (1815),  120; 
Brugnatelli,  Giornale,  9 (1816),  282;  Ann.  der  Phya.  (Gilbert),  52 
(1816),  353;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  16  (1816),  355. 

1816:  1.  C.  Ridolfi.  (Purification  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Giornale  di  scienza  ed  arti  (Firenza);  Quart.  J.  Sci.  1 (1816),  259;  Ann. 
of  Phil.  (Thomson),  7 (1817),  29,  13  (1819),  70;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweig- 
ger), 24  (1818),  439;  Phil.  Mag.  48  (1816),  72;  53  (1819),  68;  Bibl.  brit. 
[2],  2 (1816),  73. 

1816:  2.  Chaudet.  Memoire  sur  quelques  experiences  tendantes  a 
determiner  par  la  coupellation  . . . le  titre  exact  d’un  lingot 
con  tenant  de  For,  du  platine,  de  Y argent  et  du  cuivre.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  2 (1816),  264;  Karsten,  Archiv  f.  Bergbau,  11  (1826), 
66;  Ann.  des  mines,  2 (1817),  105. 

1816:  3.  J.  P.  Dessaignes.  Phenomenes  de  repulsion  et  detrac- 
tion sans  electricite.  (Platinum  plates  in  evening  air  by  win- 
dow attract  and  repel  needle.)  Pt. 

J.  de  phys.  83  (1816),  15;  J.  fiir  Qhem.  (Schweigger),  20  (1817),  86. 

1817:  1.  A.  von  Humboldt.  Ueber  die  Hohe  von  Bergen  in  Hin- 
dostan.  (Occurrence  of  platinum  in  South  America,  p. 
31.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  56  (1817),  1. 


28 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1817: 

1817: 

1817: 

1817: 

1817: 

1817: 

1817: 

1817: 


2.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Sur  le  sulfure  de  platine,  sur  ses  oxides, 

et  quelques  combinaisons  de  ce  metal.  (Also  on  platinum 
chloride.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phyg.  5 (1817),  260;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  20  (1817), 
394,  398;  J.  de  phys.  85  (1817),  21,  113,  355;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson), 
12  (1818),  18;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  4 (1818),  74;  N.  J.  der  Pharm.  (Trommsd.), 
2 (1818),  325;  Ann.  des  mines,  3 (1818),  195. 

3.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Sur  quelques  sets  triples  de  platine,  et 

notamment  sur  le  muriate  de  ce  metal  et  de  soude.  (Also  on 
platinum  sulphate.)  IJt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  5 (1817),  392;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  20  (1817), 
451;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  12  (1818),  28;  Ann.  des  mines,  3 (1818), 
195. 

4.  A.  F.  Gehlen.  Ueber  die  Reduction  der  Metalle  durch 

einander,  und  die  dabei  stattfindenden  Licht-Erscheinungen. 
(Action  of  platinum  on  arsenious  oxide,  iron,  copper,  zinc,  etc., 
p.  356.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  20  (1817),  353. 

5.  E.  Davy.  On  a new  fulminating  platinum.  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  107  (1817),  136;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (1833),  63;  Ann. 

of  Phil.  (Thomson),  7 (1816),  468;  9 (1817),  229;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  5 
(1817),  413;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  19  (1817),  91;  Phil.  Mag.  49 
(1817),  146;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  3 (1817),  131;  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  5 (1817),  160; 
6 (1817),  155;  Ann.  des  mines,  3 (1818),  197. 

6.  T.  von  Grotthus.  Beitrag  zur  Geschichte  der  Anthrazo- 

thionsaure.  (Platinanthrazothionhydrat,  p.  242.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  20  (1817),  225;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  13 
(1819),  39. 

7.  H.  A.  von  Vogel.  Notiz  fiber  das  Lithion.  (Einwirkung 

von  Lithion  auf  Platintiegeln.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  21  (1817),  345. 

8.  E.  D.  Clarke.  Account  of  some  experiments  made  with 

Newman’s  blowpipe  by  inflaming  a highly  condensed  mixturo 
of  the  gaseous  constituents  of  water.  (Fusion  and  alloys  of 
platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  2 (1817),  104;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  3 (1816),  39;  Ann.  dea 
mines,  1 (1816),  453;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  55  (1817),  8,  119;  J. 
fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  18  (1816),  239;  Oken,  Isis,  1 (1817),  956. 

9.  E.  D.  Clarke.  Further  observations  respecting  the  de- 

composition of  earths,  and  other  experiments  made  by  burn- 
ing a highly  compressed  mixture  of  the  gaseous  constituents 
of  water.  (Similar  to  above.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  9 (1817),  89,  194;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert), 
62  (1819),  339;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  21  (1817),  385. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  29 

1817:  10.  H.  Davy.  Some  new  experiments  and  observations  on 
the  combustion  of  gaseous  mixtures,  with  an  account  of  a 
method  of  preserving  a continued  light  in  mixtures  of  inflam- 
mable gases  and  air  without  flame  (by  platinum  and  palla- 
dium). Pt,Pd. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  107  (1817),  77;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (1833), 
61;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  20  (1817),  178;  J.  de  phys.  84  (1817), 
225;  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  5 (1817),  319. 

1817:  11.  G.  Schubler.  Ueber  das  Entgliihen  erwarmter  Metalle 
im  Aetherdunst,  etc.  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  20  (1817),  199;  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  5 (1817),  147. 

1817:  12.  M.  F[araday].  Report  on  some  experiments  made  with 
compressed  oxygene  and  hydrogene,  in  the  laboratory  of  the 
Royal  Institution.  Pt. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  2 (1817),  461;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  18  (1816),  337. 

1817:  13.  J.  Murray.  On  the  phenomena  of  platinum  and  other 
wires  in  inflammable  media.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  49  (1817),  120,  142. 

1817:  14.  J.  T.  Cooper.  On  some  combinations  of  platinum. 
(Alloys  and  oxides.)  Pt. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  3 (1817),  119. 

1818:  1.  H.  Heuland.  On  a mass  of  platinum  at  Madrid  (from 
Choc6).  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  12  (1818),  200;  Phil.  Mag.  52  (1818),  382;  57 
(1821),  228;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  9 (1818),  331. 

1818:  2.  J.  Mawe.  Nachricht  von  dem  Vorkommen  . . . edler 
Metalle  in  Brazilien.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  59  (1818),  168. 

1818:  3.  J.  Cloud.  An  account  of  some  experiments  made  on 
crude  platinum,  and  a new  process  for  separating  palladium 
and  rhodium  from  that  metal.  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  [2],  1 (1818),  161;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  72 
(1822),  253;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  43  (1825),  316;  Bui.  math, 
chim.  (F^russac),  1 (1824),  313;  Ann.  des  mines,  4 (1819),  131;  Berze- 
lius Jsb.  3 (1824),  104. 

1818:  4.  F.  Accum.  A practical  treatise  on  chemical  reagents. 
London,  1818.  (Palladium  in  platinum  ore;  precipitated  by 
mercury  prussiate  and  heat.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Bibl.  brit.  [2],  9 (1818),  37. 

1818:  5.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Ueber  das  selenium.  (No  compound 
with  rhodium,  palladium,  or  platinum.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  23  (1818),  439. 


30 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1818:  6.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Forsok  att  narmare  bestamma  atskilliga 
oorganiska  kroppars  sammansattning,  till  vinnanda  af  en 
narmare  utveckling  af  laran  om  de  kemiska  proportionerna. 
(Yersuche  fiber  die  Zusammensetzung  der  Rhodiumoxyde, 
und  ihre  Verhaltnisse  zu  den  Sauren.)  Rh 

Hisinger,  Afhandl.  Fysik,  5 (1818),  879;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  23 
(1818),  285;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  11  (1819),  225;  J.  de  Phys.  86  (1818), 
356;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  12  (1822),  321;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  15  (1820), 
352. 

1818:  7.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Gewicbt  der  elementaren  Maasstheile. 

J.  fvir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  22  (1818),  317,  325,  327.  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

1818:  8.  A.  J.  Frere  de  Montizon.  Observation  sur  le  rapport  qui 
existe  entre  Toxidation  des  metaux  et  leur  pesanteur  sp6cifique. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  7 (1818),  9.  Pt,  Pd. 

1818:  9.  J.  Cloud.  An  attempt  to  ascertain  the  fusing  temperature 
of  metals.  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  [2],  1 (1818),  167. 

1818:  10.  J.  J.  Prechtl.  Schmelzung  von  Platin  durch  Ofenfeuer. 

Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  58  (1818),  111;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  13 
(1819),  229;  Bibl.  brit,  [2],  11  (1819),  80;  Ann.  des  mines,  4 (1819),  130. 

1818:  11.  L.  N.  Vauquelin.  Note  sur  une  nouvelle  espece  d’alcali 
mineral  (lithion).  (Action  of  lithia  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  7 (1818),  287;  Ann.  des  mines,  3 (1818),  119;  J.  fur 
Chem.  (Schweigger),  21  (1817),  450. 

1818:  12.  L.  J.  Gay-Lussac.  Sur  la  fixit6  du  degr6  d’6bullition  de3 
liquides.  (Use  of  platinum  wire  to  prevent  “bumping.”)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  7 (1818),  313;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  24  (1818). 
327;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  12  (1818),  129. 

1818:  13.  S.  T.  von  Sommerring.  Gliihung  des  Platins  liber  Alcohol. 
(Experiment  before  the  Academy  of  Science,  Munchen.)  Pt, 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  22  (1818),  228. 

1818:  14.  P.  Erman.  Ueber  eine  eigen thtimliche  reziproke  Wirkung 
der  zwei  entgegensetzten  elektrischen  Tliatigkeiten.  (Action  of 
the  incandescent  platinum  of  Davy’s  aphlogistic  lamp.)  Pt. 

Abhandl.  Akad.  Berlin,  1818-19,  351;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  25  (1824),  278. 

1818:  15.  T.  Gill.  On  a lamp  without  a flame.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  11  (1818),  217;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  1 (1819),  207. 

1818:  16.  H.  Davy.  On  an  ignited  wire  lamp.  Pt. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  5 (1818),  128;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  1 (1819),  309;  Phil.  Mag.  50 
(1817),  230. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


31 


1818:  17.  Emploi  du  camphre  pour  tenir  un  fil  de  platine 

rouge,  (Observation  of  H.  Davy.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  8 (1818),  443. 

1818:  18.  P.  L.  Dulong  and  A.  T.  Petit.  Recherches  sur  la  mesure 
des  temperatures.  (Specific  heat  of  platinum,  p.  148.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  7 (1818),  113;  J.  ftir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  25  (1819), 
322;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  13  (1819),  167;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert), 
58  (1818),  254;  J.  de  Phys.  82  (1818),  313;  J.  ficole  polyt.  Paris,  11 
(1820),  189. 

1819:  1.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Examination  of  some  compounds  which 
depend  upon  very  weak  affinities.  (Precipitation  of  platinum 
from  sulphate  solutions  by  barium  chloride,  p.  72.)  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  1 (1819),  63;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  14  (1820),  376;  J.  de  phys. 
87  (1818),  462. 

1819:  2.  L.  W.  Gilbert.  Das  Newman’sche  Geblase  mit  verdich- 
tetem  Knallgas,  nach  seinen  neuesten  Verb esser ungen  durch 
Dr.  E.  D.  Clarke.  (Melts  platinum,  p.  265;  alloy  of  platinum 


with  10  per  cent  gold  described,  p.  269.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  62  (1819),  247. 

1819:  3.  E.  D.  Clarke.  The  gas  blow-pipe,  or  art  of  burning  the 
gaseous  constituents  of  water.  London,  1819.  Pt. 

1819:  4.  E.  D.  Clarke.  On  the  alloy  of  platinum  and  lead.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  14  (1819),  229;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  5 (1821),  125. 

1819:  5.  E.  D.  Clarke.  On  the  alloy  of  platinum  and  tin.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  14  (1819),  470. 

1819:  6.  R.  W.  Fox.  Alloys  of  platinum  (with  tin,  antimony,  and 
zinc).  Pt. 


Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  13  (1819),  467;  Phil.  Mag.  54  (1819),  72;  Ann. 
g6n.  sci.  phys.  (Brux.),  1 (1819),  363. 

1819:  7.  T.  Howse.  Query  respecting  the  method  of  coating 
metals  with  platinum.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  14  (1819),  469. 

1819:  8.  L.  W.  Gilbert.  Das  Lampchen  ohne  Flamme.  Pt. 

Ann.  der.  Phys.  (Gilbert),  62  (1819),  337. 

1819:  9.  P.  L.  Dulong  and  A.  T.  Petit.  Recherches  sur  quelques 
points  importants  de  la  theorie  de  la  chaleur.  (Specific  and 
atomic  heat  of  platinum,  p.  403.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  10  (1819),  395;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  6 (1826),  394; 
J.  ftir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  28  (1820),  122;  Brugnatelli,  Giornale,  2 
(1819),  805;  J.  de  phys.  89  (1819),  80;  Bui.  Soc.  philom.  Paris,  1819, 
103;  Phil.  Mag.  54  (1819),  267;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  14  (1819),  189. 


32 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1820:  1.  E.  Davy.  On  some  combinations  of  platinum.  (Plat- 
inum sulphate  on  alcohol,  and  as  a test  for  gelatine;  a gray 
oxide  of  platinum;  platinum  fulminate.)  Pt. 

Pliil.  Trans.  London,  110  (1820),  108;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (1833), 
124;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  15  (1820),  297;  16  (1820),  385;  J.  fur  Chem. 
(Schweigger),  31  (1821),  340;  Berzelius  Jsb.  1 (1822),  59;  Bui.  Soc. 
philom.  Paris,  1820,  54;  Phil.  Mag.  56  (1820),  330;  Ann.  des  mines,  6 
(1821),  148. 

1820:  2.  T.  Thomson.  On  arsenic.  (Action  of  sodium  arseniate 
on  iridium,  rhodium,  and  platinum  salts.)  Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  15  (1820),  84;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  29 
(1820),  435. 

1820:  3.  T.  Thomson.  Repetition  of  Fox  and  Clarke’s  experi- 
ments on  the  alloy  of  platinum  and  tin.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  16  (1920),  18. 

1820:  4.  Id.  Rose.  Beitrage  zur  chemischen  Kenntniss  des  Glim- 
mers. (Oxydation  des  Platins  durch  Braunstein.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  29  (1820),  282. 

1820:  5.  G.  B.  Sowerby.  Crystallization  of  platinum.  n. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  16  (1820),  233;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  15  (1820),  111;  Polyt. 
J.  (Dingl.),  3 (1820),  125. 

1820:  6.  R.  Hare.  Strictures  on  a publication  entitled  “Clark’s 
gas  blow-pipe.”  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci,  2 (1820),  281. 

1820:  7.  J.  Stodart  and  M.  Faraday.  Experiments  on  the  alloys 
of  steel,  made  with  a view  to  its  improvement. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  9 (1820),  319;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  66  (1820),  197;  Ann. 
chim.  phys.  15  (1820),  157;  Ann.  des  mines,  6 (1821),  261;  Jern.  Kont. 
Ann.  5 (1821),  120;  J.  de  phys.  91  (1820),  378;  Phil.  Mag.  56  (1820), 
26;  Edin.  Phil.  J.  3 (1820),  308;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  2 (1824),  36. 

1821:  1.  Extraordinary  mass  of  platina  discovered  in 

Peru.  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  4 (1821),  214;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  4 (1822),  28. 

1821:  2.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Sur  la  composition  des  oxides  du  platine 
et  de  For.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  18  (1821),  146;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  33  (1821), 
422;  34  (1822),  81;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  12  (1822),  412;  Edin.  Phil.  J.  6 (1822), 
9;  Ann.  des  mines,  7 (1822),  137. 

1821:  3.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Om  de  svafvelbundna  alkaiiernas  sam- 
mamsattning.  (Sulphides  of  platinum  and  rhodium.)  Pt,  Rh. 
Akad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  1821,  i,  80;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  20  (1822),  34, 
113,  225;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  11  (1821),  388;  14  (1822),  209;  J.  fiir  Chem. 
(Schweigger),  34  (1822),  22,  57;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  4 (1822), 
284,  343. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  S3 

1821:  4.  J.  B.  Boussingault.  Sur  la  combinaison  du  silicium 
avec  le  platine.  (Not  compound  of  platinum  and  carbon  as 
first  thought.)  Pt. 

Aim.  chim.  phys.  16  (1821),  5;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger)  32  (1821), 
483;  Phil.  Mag.  59  (1822),  185;  Berzelius  Jsb.  2 (1823),  88;  Archiv  f. 
Bergbau  (Karsten),  5 (1822),  158;  Ann.  des  mines,  7 (1822),  139. 

1821:  5.  T.  Thomson.  (Oxide  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  18  (1821),  146;  Berzelius  Jsb.  2 (1823),  87. 

1821:  6.  C.  H.  Pfaff.  Ueber  die  Weinsteinsaure  und  das  salzsaure 

Platin  als  Reagentien  fur  Kali.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  33  (1821),  473. 

1821:  7.  J.  Murray.  On  the  change  of  colour  in  blue  vegetable 
colours  by  metallic  salts.  (Colored  green  by  platinic  chloride.) 

Pt, 

Phil.  Mag.  58  (1821),  273;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  33  (1821),  486. 

1821:  8.  J.  F.  Daniell.  On  a new  pyrometer.  (Platinum  amal- 
gam, p.  319.)  Pt. 

+or  Quart.  J.  Sci.  11  (1821),  309;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  33  (1821),  110. 

1821 : 9.  J.  Murray.  On  the  alloys  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  4 (1821),  202. 

1821:  10.  T.  J.  Seebeck.  Magnetische  Polarisation  der  Metalle 
und  Erze  durch  Temper  ature-Differenz.  (Platina  Tiegeln  aaf 
ihre  chemische  Reinheit  durch  Thermomagnetismus  zu  priifen.) 

Pt. 

Abhandl.  Acad.  Berlin.  1822-23,  265;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  46 
(1826),  101;  J.  techn.  Chem.  2 (1828),  102;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  6 
(1826),  1,  114,  265. 

1821:  11.  J.  P.  Charlton.  On  the  production  of  colours  by  me- 
chanical division.  (Effect  of  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  18  (1821),  182;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  33 
(1821),  240. 

1821:  12.  J.  P.  Charlton.  On  the  black  enamel  obtained  from 
platina.  (Colors  from  platinum  and  iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  18  (1821),  337;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  34 
(1822),  253;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  7 (1822),  350. 

• 

1821:  13.  E.  D.  Clarke.  Observations  upon  the  gas  blow-pipe. 
(Reduction  of  the  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  17  (1821),  424. 

1822:  1.  E.  Barruel.  Process  for  procuring  pure  platinum,  palla- 
dium, rhodium,  iridium,  and  osmium  from  the  ores  of  platinum. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  12  (1822),  246;  Phil.  Mag.  59  (1822),  171  (in  full);  Polyt. 
J.  (Dingl.),  8 (1822),  231;  Berzelius  Jsb.  3 (1824),  105. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 3 


34  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1822:  2.  L.  Gmelin  and  F.  Wohler.  Neue  Cyanverbindungen. 
(Potassium  platino-  and  pallado-cyanides.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Gmelin’s  Handbuch  der  theoret.  Chemie,  3te  Auflage,  2,  ii,  1692; 
J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  36  (1822),  230. 

1822:  3.  J.  Murray.  On  the  combination  of  the  earths  with  plati- 
num. (With  antimony,  zirconium,  glucinum,  aluminum, 
potassium.)  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  6 (1822),  385. 

1822:  4.  J.  Stodart  and  M.  Faraday.  On  the  alloys  of  steel. 
(With  the  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  112  (1822),  253;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (1833), 
169;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  21  (1822),  62;  Edin.  Phil.  J.  7 (1822),  350; 
Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  21  (1823),  202;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert), 
72  (1822),  225;  Mag.  f.  Naturvid.  2 (1823),  216;  Phil.  Mag.  60  (1822), 
363. 

1822:  5. Email  noir  obtenu  avec  le  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  20  (1822),  198;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  8 (1822),  506. 

1822:  6.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Gluhendes  Verbrennen  des  Alkohols 
durch  orhitzte  Metalle  und  Metalloxyde.  (Durch  Platindraht.) 

J.  fiir  Chem.  34  (1822),  91.  Pt.  - 

1822:  7.  Sur  Tackle  forme  par  la  combustion  de  Tether 

au  moyen  d’un  fil  de  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  20  (1822),  223. 

1823:  1.  C.  C.  On  the  existence  of  chrome  in  the  ore  of  platinum. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  22  (1823),  198.  Pt. 

1823:  2.  Puymaurin.  * Note  sur  le  palladium.  (Note  on  palladium, 
prices,  etc.)  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  encour.  (Paris),  22  (1823),  163;  Bibl.  univ.  83  (1823),  235; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  12  (1823),  375;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39 
(1823),  356. 

1823:  3.  B.  Silliman.  Test  for  platinum.  (Hydriodic  acid.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sc.  6 (1823),  276;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  42  (1824),  121; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  12  (1823),  465;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  22  (1823), 
397;  Ann.  des  mines,  10  (1825),  176;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  5 (1824),  262. 

1823:  4.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Undersokning  af  fluss-spatssyran  och 
dess  markvardigaste  foreningar.  (Flussspathsaures  Platin- 
oxyd,  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  1:36,  47 ; Flussspathsaures 
Kieselplatinoxyd,  1 : 201;  Einwirkung  von  Silicium  auf  Platin 
und  Rhodium,  1 : 220.)  Pt,  Rh. 

Acad.  Handl.  Stockholm,  1823,  284;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  1 (1824), 
36,  47,  201,  220;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  27  (1824),  53,  167;  Quart.  J.  Sci. 
18  (1825),  156;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  24  (1824),  337,  450. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1823:  5.  R.  Brandes.  Monographie  der  Kamphersaurc.  (Kam- 
phersaures  Platinoxyd,  p.  299.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  38  (1823),  269. 

1823:  6.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Neuentdeckte  merkwiirdige  Eigen- 
schaften  des  Platin-suboxyds,  des  oxyrdirten  Schwefel-Platins, 
und  des  metallischen  Platinstaubes.  (Oxidation  of  alcohol  to 
acetic  acid.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  38  (1823),  321;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  24  (1823), 
91  (in  full);  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  24  (1823),  54;  Edin.  Phil.  J.  10  (1824), 
153;  Arm.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  74  (1823),  269;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  16  (1823), 
375;  Ann.  of  Phil.  22  (1823),  464;  Phil.  Mag.  62  (1823),  289,  396; 
Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  7 (1824),  387;  N.  J.  der  Pharm.  (Trommsd.),  7 (1823), 
119;  Ann.  des  mines,  9 (1824),  243;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  4 (1823),  49,  127. 

1823:  7.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Platin  und  Wasserstoffgas.  Pt. 

Oken,  Isis,  1823,  989. 

1823:  8.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  das  Entgliihen  des  Platin- 

pulvers.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39  (1823),  159. 

1823:  9.  P.  L.  Dulong  and  L.  J.  Thenard.  Note  sur  la  propriete 
qui  possedent  quelques  metaux  de  faciliter  la  combinaison  des 
fluides  elastiques.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  23  (1823),  440;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  76  (1824), 
83;  Bibl.  brit.  [2]  24  (1823),  195;  Froriep,  Notizen,  6 (1824),  83;  Mem. 
Acad.  sci.  Paris,  5 (1821),  476;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  17  (1824),  138;  J.  fiir 
Chem.  (Schweigger),  39  (1823),  205;  Phil.  Mag.  62  (1823),  282;  Ann. 
of  Phil.  (Thomson),  6 (1823),  376;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  5 (1824),  142. 

1823:  10.  P.  L.  Dulong  and  L.  J.  Thenard.  Nouvelles  observa- 
tions sur  la  propriete  dont  jouissent  certains  corps  de  favoriser 
la  combinaison  des  fluides  elastiques.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  24  (1823),  380;  Ann.  der  Pin's.  (Gilbert),  76  (1824), 
89;  Mem.  Acad.  sci.  Paris,  5 (1821),  481;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger), 
40  (1824),  229;  Moniteur  (1823),  Nov.  12;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  1 (1824). 
81;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  8 (1824),  244. 

1823:  11.  A.  Garden.  On  the  ignition  of  platina  by  hydrogen  gas. 

Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  22  (1823),  466;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  49 

(1823),  115. 

1823:  12.  C.  G.  Gmelin.  Ueber  Dobereiner’s  Entdeckung  der 
Eigenschaft  des  Platinstaubes,  Wasserstoff  zu  entziinden.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  38  (1823),  515;  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  24  (1823),  278. 


1823:  13.  L.  W.  Gilbert,  Chladni,  and  J.  F.  Daniell.  Ueber  das 
Gliihlampchen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  75  (1823),  95. 


36  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1823:  14.  W.  Herapath.  On  Dobereiner’s  new  experiment  with 
hydrogen  gas  and  platinum  in  a finely  divided  state.  (Read 
before  Bristol  Phil.  Soc.  of  Inquirers.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  62  (1823),  286;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39.(1823),  255; 
Mag.  fur  Pharm.  5 (1824),  143,  240. 

1823:  15.  K.  Karmarsch.  Ueber  das  Glfihen  von  Metalldrahten  in 

den  Dampfen  flfichtiger  Substanzen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  75  (1823),  83. 

1823:  16.  C.  H.  Pfaff.  Ueber  die  von  Dobereiner  entdeckte  merk- 
wtirdige  Eigenschaft  des  metallischen  Platinastaubes  oder 
Platinaschwammes.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  40  (1823),  1;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  6 (1824),  138; 
8 (1824),  243. 

1823:  17.  A.  Pleischl.  Beobachtungen  fiber  das  Entglfihen  des 

Platinpulvers  im  Hydrogenstrome.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39  (1823),  142,  201;  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  25  (1824), 
112;  26  (1824),  38;  J.  d.  l’Inst.  roy.  No.  32. 

1823:  18.  A.  Pleischl.  Beobachtungen  fiber  das  Entglfihen  des 

Palladiums  im  Hydrogenstrome.  Pd. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39  (1823),  351;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  76 
(1824),  98. 

1823:  19.  J.  S.  C.  Schweigger.  Ueber  Dobereiner’s  neues  Feuer- 
princip.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39  (1823),  205;  40  (1824),  10,  239,. 277;  41 
(1824),  462;  Phil.  Mag.  64  (1824),  3. 

1823:  20.  J.  R.  Breant.  Description  d’un  procede  a l’aide  duquel 
on  obtient  une  espece  d’acier  fondu  semblable  a celui  des  lames 
damassees  orientales.  (Palladium  steel.)  Pd. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  24  (1823),  388;  Bibl.  univ.  83  (1823),  236;  Edinb. 
Phil.  J.  9 (1823),  404;  Ann.  des  mines,  9 (1824),  319;  Ann.  of  Phil. 
(Thomson),  8 (1824),  267;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  2 (1824),  38;  J.  fiir  Chem. 
(Schweigger),  40  (1824),  295;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  18  (1825),  386;  Techn.  Rep. 
(Gill),  6 (1824),  49;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  4 (1823),  215. 

1823:  21.  J.  R.  Breant.  (Palladium  medals.)  Pd. 

Moniteur  (1823),  June  22;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  2 (1824),  244. 

1823:  22.  A.  C.  Becquerel.  Sur  les  fils  tres-fins  de  platine  ct 

d’acier.  (Working  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  22  (1823),  113;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39  (1823), 
374;  Mem.  de  l’lnst.  Paris,  11  (1832),  13. 

1823:  23.  A.  C.  Becquerel.  Du  developpement  de  l’electricite  par 
le  contact  de  deux  portions  d’un  meme  metal,  dans  un  etat 
suffisamment  illegal  de  temperature.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  23  (1823),  135;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  39  (1823), 
448;  44  (1825),  176. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


37 


1824:  a.  Mollien.  (Travels  in  the  Republic  of  Colombia  in  the 
years  1822  and  1823),  pp.  307,  452.  Pt. 

1824:  b.  F.  Rever.  Les  anciens,  connaissent-ils  le  platine?  Paris, 
1824.  Pt. 

1824:  1.  Le  Baillif.  (Mittel  das  Palladium  von  der  Platina  zu 
unterscheiden.)  (By  iodine  and  cuprous  chloride.)  Pt,  Pd. 

IAnn.  de  l’industrie  nation.  15  (1824);  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  42 
(1824),  120;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  13  (1824),  275;  Berzelius  Jsb.  5 (1826), 
142. 

1824:  2.  A.  M.  del  Rio.  Analyse  d’un  alliage  d’or  avec  du  rho- 
dium, de  la  Maison  du  Depart  (Apartado)  de  Mexico.  Rh. 
Sol,  Dec.  11,  1824;  Ann.  chim.  pliys.  29  (1825),.  137;  Amor.  J.  of  Sci.  11 
(1826),  298;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  47  (1826),  65;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  10  (1827),  322;  Arch,  fiir  Bergbau  (Karstcn),  11  (1826),  386; 
Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  10  (1825),  251;  Ann.  des  mines,  12  (1826),  323. 

1824:  3.  A.  Adie.  Hydro-pneumatic  lamp.  Description  of  lamp 
devised  by  Mr.  Adie  as  an  improvement  on  Garden's  lamp. 

Pt. 

Edin.  J.  Sci.  1 (1824),  144;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  2 (1824),  333. 

1824  : 4.  S.  F.  Dana.  Ignition  of  platinum  (by  vapor  of  alcohol  or 
ether).  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  8 (1824),  198;  J.  fiir  Chem.  43  (1825),  380. 

1824:  5.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Wasserbildung,  und  uber  den 
Einfluss  der  Platina  auf  Hydrogen.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  42  (1824),  60;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  25 
(1825),  213;  Phil.  Mag.  65  (1825),  150. 

1824:  6.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Das  Platin,  etc.,  als  Begiinstiger  der 
Gasverbindung.  Pt. 

Archiv  ges.  Naturl.  2 (1824),  225. 

1824:  8.  A.  Fyfe.  Description  of  a hydro-pneumatic  lamp.  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  11  (1824),  341;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  2 (1824),  329;  Polyt. 
J.  (Dingl.),  15  (1824),  420;  Bibl.  brit,  [2],  28  (1825),  196. 

1824:  9.  L.  W.  Gilbert.  Noch  einiges  von  Herrn  Dobereiner  aus 
England.  (Gliihlampchen.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Gilbert),  76  (1824),  102. 

1824:  10.  W.  Henry.  On  the  action  of  finely  divided  platinum  on 
gaseous  mixtures,  and  its  application  to  their  analysis.  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  14  (1824),  266;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (1833), 
216;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  12  (1827),  181;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  25  (1825), 
416;  Phil.  Mag.  65  (1825),  269;  Ann.  des  mines  [2],  1 (1827),  172;  Ber- 
zelius Jsb.  6 (1827),  147. 


38 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1824:  11.  K.  W.  G.  Kastner.  Ueber  die  Imponderabilien,  Mag- 
netismus,  Elektricitat,  Licht  und  Warme,  etc.  (Platinum 
sponge  and  hydrogen.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  1 (1824),  68;  2 (1824),  230. 

1824:  12.  G.  Osann.  Das  Platin,  etc.,  als  Begiinstiger  der  Gas- 
verbindungen.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  2 (1824),  448. 

1824:  13.  P.  W.  Schmidt.  Ueber  die  Zundapparate  nach  Dobe- 
reiner.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  42  (1824),  247. 

1824:  14.  E.  Turner.  Experiments  on  the  application  of  Pro- 
fessor Dobereiner’s  recent  discovery  to  eudiometry.  (Read 
before  Roy.  Soc.  Edinburgh.)  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  11  (1824),  99;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  2 (1824),  210. 

1824:  15. Repetition  of  Dobereiner’s  experiments  by 

Children  and  by  Daniel  and  Turner.  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  21  (1824),  99;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  43  (1824),  380 
(“from  J.  of  Sci.  32,  374”). 

1824:  16.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  das  leichtflussige  Metall  und 
eine  kaltmachende  Metallmischung.  (Warme-entwickelung 
wenn  Platin  und  Zink-Natrium  auf  einander  wirken.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  42  (1824),  182;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  3 (1824), 
89;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  19  (1825),  341. 

1824:  17.  F.  P.  Dulk.  Bemerkungen  liber  Elektromagnetismus. 
(Conductivity  of  platinum,  p.  35;  Action  on  needle,  p.  38. 
From  “ Ueber  Magnetismus,”  etc.,  Konigsberg,  1824.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  1 (1824),  32. 

1825:  1.  A.  von  Humboldt.  Vorkommen  der  Platina  und  des 
Palladiums  in  Brazilien.  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  45  (1825),  54. 

1825:  2.  A.  Laugier.  Examen  du  platine  trouve  en  Russie.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  29  (1825),  289;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  46  (1826), 
94;  Phil.  Mag.  66  (1825),  285;  Berzelius  Jsb.  6 (1827),  212;  Ann.  des 
mines,  12  (1826),  324. 

1825:  3.  A.  Laugier.  Examen  du  platine  trouve  en  Siberie.  Pt. 

Ann.  sci.  nat.  5 (1825),  333. 

1825:  4.  W.  C.  Zeise.  En  ny  Forbindelse  af  Platinets  Forchlorid 
behandlet  med  Viinaand.  (Compound  of  platinum  chloride 
with  carbon  monoxide.)  Pt. 

Afh.  Danske  Yid.  Selsk.  3 (1828),  45;  Overs.  Danske  Yid.  Selsk.  1825-26, 
13;  Berzelius  Jsb.  7 (1828),  131;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  9 (1827),  632; 
Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  20  (1827),  346. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


39 


1825: 

1825. 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 

1825: 


6.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Om  Svafvelsalter.  (Compounds  of 

platinum  sulphide  with  sulphides  of  carbon,  arsenic,  mo- 
lybdenum, tungsten,  and  tellurium.)  Pt. 

Kong.  Vet.  Acad.  Handl.  1825,  232;  1826,  53;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
6 (1826),  453;  7 (1826),  150,  277;  8 (1826),  282,  419;  Ann.  chim.  phys. 
32  (1826),  60,  166,  265,  393;  Brugnatelli,  Giorn.  9 (1826),  297,  435. 

7.  A.  Pleischl.  Ueber  Hydrojodsaure  als  Beagens  fur 

Platin.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  5 (1825),  160;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  43  (1825), 
385;  Ann.  des  mines  [2],  1 (1827),  173. 

8.  A.  Pleischl.  Ueber  die  jodige  Saure.  (Reactions  with 

platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  45  (1825),  1;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  6 (1825),  155. 

9.  G.  Bisciiof.  Oxydation  des  Platins  durch  Schmelzen  des 

Aetzkalis.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  45  (1825),  209. 

10.  C.  G.  Gmelin.  Ueber  die  Wirkung  des  . . . Osmiums, 

Platins,  Iridiums,  Rhodiums,  Palladiums  . . . auf  den  thier- 
ischen  Organismus.  Os,  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Pd. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  43  (1825),  110;  J.  chim.  med.  2 (1826),  188; 
3 (1827),  126,  388;  Edinb.  J.  Med.  Sci.  3 (1827),  324. 

11.  T.  Gill.  On  a suggestion  for  improving  Dr.  Fyfe’s  Dober- 

einer’s  lamp.  Pt. 

Techn.  Repository,  6 (1825),  297;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  16  (1825),  301. 

12.  G.  Bischof.  Der  . . . Dobereiner’sche  Versuch,  ein  ziem- 

lich  empfindliches  Reagens  auf  Platin.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  45  (1825),  212. 

13.  H.  Davy.  On  the  safety  lamp  for  coal  miners,  with  some 

researches  on  flame.  (Aphlogistic  lamp.)  Pt. 

2d  ed.  with  additions;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  25  (1825),  459. 

14.  H.  A.  von  Vogel.  Ueber  eine  Feuererscheinung  des 
braunen  Bleioxyds  bei  Beruhrung  mit  schweflichtsaurem  Gas. 
(Bemerkungen  uber  das  Dobereiner’sche  Feuerzeug,  etc.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  4 (1825),  434. 

15.  J.  F.  John.  Ueber  Dobereiner’sche  Platinfeuerzeuge.  Pt. 
Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  4 (1825),  491. 

16.  F.  P.  Dulk.  Etwas  iiber  das  Dobereiner’sche  Phano- 

men.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  6 (1825),  467. 

17.  (Agency  of  platinum  in  effecting  formation  of 

water.)  Pt. 

“Bull,  des  sci.  No.  12”;  Phil.  Mag.  65  (1825),  158. 


40 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1825:  18.  S.  Stratingh.  Platine  spongieux  et  eamphre.  Pt, 

J.  de  Pharm.  11  (1825),  195. 

1825:  19.  F.  Wohler.  Ueber  die  Wirkung  des  Palladiums  auf  die 
Weingeist  Flamme.  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  3 (1825),  71;  Berzelius  Jsb.  5 (1825),  143;  Mag. 
fur  Pharm.  12  (1825),  282. 

1825:  20. Discussions  on  disputed  inventions.  2.  Dan- 

ielVs  platina  pyrometer,  partly  anticipated  by  Mr.  Guyton.  Pt. 

Edin.  J.  of  Sci.  2 (1825),  147. 

1825:  21.  Mr.  Nicholas  Mill's  platina  pyrometer.  Pt. 

Edin.  J.  of  Sci.  2 (1825),  338. 

1825:  22.  (Platina  strings  for  musical  instruments.)  Pt 

Neues  Kunst  und  Gewerbeblatt  (Apr.  1825);  Edin.  Phil.  J.  14  ( $-26), 
200.  (Also  Musical  Gazette,  Leipzig.) 

1826:  1.  A.  von  Humboldt  (J.  B.  Boussingault) . Ueber  die  Pr>- 
vinz  Antioquia  und  die  neu  entdeckte  Lagerstatte  der  Platina 
auf  Gangen.  (Also  platinum  in  the  Ural  Mountains.)  (Let- 
ter from  Boussingault,  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  7:  520.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Hertha,  7 (1826),  263;  Quart.  J.  of  Sci.  22  (1826),  225;  J.  de  pharm.  12 
(1826),  434;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  32  (1826),  204;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
7 (1826),  515;  J.  chim.  med.  2 (1826),  397;  Edin.  J.  of  Sci.  5 (1826), 
323;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  12  (1827),  384;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  47 
(1826),  368;  Phil.  Mag.  68  (1826),  306;  Bibl.  univ.  Nov.  (1826);  Le 
Globe,  July  20  (1826);  Edin.  N.  Phil.  J.  2 (1827),  197;  Ann.  des  mines 
[2],  1 (1827),  175,  178;  Berzelius  Jsb.  7 (1828),  184;  Mag.  fur  Pharm. 
16  (1826),  101,  353;  Ztsch.  fur  Min.  1826,  No.  12. 

1826:  la.  Erdmann.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  von  Russland.  Part 
2,  p.  132.  Pt, 

1826:  2. Platina  found  in  Russia.  Pt. 

Edin.  Phil.  J.  14  (1826),  173. 

1826:  3.  J.  Menge.  Geognostische  Nachrichten  aus  Sibirien;  Be- 
merkungen  fiber  die  Gold-  und  Platina-Bergwerke  des  Ural- 
Gebirges.  Pt. 

Leonhard,  Ztsch.  fiir  Min.  2 (1826),  245,  508;  Ann.  sci.  nat.  10  (1827), 
386;  Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  2 (1827),  199. 

1826:  4.  A.  Breithaupt.  Mineralogische  Untersuchung  des  rus- 
sischen  Platinsandes.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  8 (1826),  500;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  3 (1828),  72;  Edinb. 
N.  Phil.  J.  3 (1827),  272;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  20  (1827),  210;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  7 (1828),  185;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  38  (1828),  443;  J.  des  mines  russes, 
Aug.  (1827);  Ann.  des  mines  [2],  3 (1828),  283. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


41 


1826:  5.  G.  Osann.  Untersuchung  der  russischen  Platina.  (Very 
full  study  of  the  ore;  contains  announcement  of  three  new 
metals,  ruthenium,  pluran,  and  polin,  13  : 287.  Pluran  was 
perhaps  ruthenium,  but  Osann’s  ruthenium  and  polin  were 
errors.  Claus.  Cf.  1829:6.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  [Ru,  Po,  Plu]. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  8 (1826),  505;  11  (1827),  311;  13  (1828),  283;  14 
(1828),  329;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl,  16  (1829),  129;  Edinb.  New  Phil.  J.  3 
(1827),  276;  Quart.  J.  of  Sci.  26  (1828),  438;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  2 (1827), 
391;  Heusman  Repert.  de  chim.  Sept.  (1827);  J.  chim.  m6d.  4 (1828), 
554;  Bull.  math.  chim.  (Ferussac),  Sept.  (1828);  Mag.  fur  Pliarm.  20 
(1827),  346;  24  (1828),  185;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  16  (1829),  384;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  7 (1828),  185;  8 (1829),  206. 

1826:  6.  T.  Thomson.  Analysis  of  the  ore  of  iridium.  (Attempt 
to  determine  atomic  weights.)  Ir,  Rh. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  2 (1826),  17;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  16  (1826),  353; 
J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  47  (1826),  55;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  16  (1826), 
111;  Ann.  des  mines,  12  (1826),  326;  Berzelius  Jsb.  7 (1828),  183. 

1826:  7.  A.  J.  Balard.  Memoire  sur  une  substance  particuliere- 
ment  contenue  dans  Teau  de  la  mer  (le  brome).  (Compound 
of  platinum  and  bromine,  p.  362.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  32  (1826),  337;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  8 (1826),  333; 
J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  48  (1826),  87;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  28 
(1826),  416;  J.  de  Pharm.  12  (1826),  517;  N.  J.  der  Pharm. (Trommsd.), 
14  (1827),  80. 

1826:  8.  G.  Forchhammer.  Bemaerkninger  over  et  nyt  chemisk 
Provemiddel  paa  Platin,  det  salpetersure  Quiksolvforilte. 

(HgN03.)  Pt. 

Overs.  Danske  Yid.  Selsk.  1826-27,  8;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  52 
(1828),  3;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  24  (1828),  393. 

1826:  9.  H.  B.  Miller.  On  the  oxidation  of  palladium  during  its 
effecting  the  union  of  the  hydrogen  and  oxygen  gases  from 

ether,  alcohol,  etc.  Pd. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  28  (1826),  20. 

1826:  10.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Neue  Bereitung  des  Platinsuboxyds, 
hochst  dunner  Platin iiberzug  statt  Platinschwamm ; Gebrauch 
des  Essiglampchens  und  Bereitung  der  Essigsaure  im  Grossen 
mittelst  des  Platinsuboxyds.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  9 (1826),  341;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  18  (1827),  342. 

1826:  11.  — Observations  on  alloys  or  mixtures  of  metals. 

(Alloys  of  platinum  metals  with  copper,  molybdenum,  bis- 
muth, gold,  tin,  iron,  and  arsenic  are  mentioned.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir. 

Franklin  Jour.  1 (1826),  316;  from  Dictionnaire  technologique;  from 
Th6nard,  Chimie  61ementaire. 


42 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


1826:  12.  W.  Nasse.  Versuche  mit  einigen  Metallen  ...  in 
Porzellanfeuer.  (Unschmelzbarkeit  des  Platins.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  46  {1826),  80. 

1826:  13.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Platinschwammbereitung  und  Ge- 
brauch.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  47  (1826),  119;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  2 (1827),  388; 
Heusman  R5p.  de  chim.;  Berzelius  Jsb.  7 (1828),  130. 

1826:  14.  H.  B.  Miller.  Addition  to  the  list  of  substances  that 
cause  a coil  of  platinum  wire  to  continue  in  a state  of  incan- 
descence, etc.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson),  28  (1826),  21. 

1826:  15.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  der  relativen 
Anzahl  yon  einfachen  Atomen  in  chemischen  Verbindungen. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  8 (1826),  178.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

1826:  16.  S.  Marianini.  Experiences  pour  determiner  la  force 
elec tromo trice  relative  des  conducteurs  de  la  meme  classe.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  33  (1826),  14;  from  Saggio  di  esperienze  electromo- 
triche,  etc.,  Venezia,  1825;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  47  (1827),  47. 

1827:  1.  N.  Mamyscheff.  Beschreibung  der  Entdeckung  der 

Platina  in  Siberien.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  fur  Min.  (Leonhard),  1827,  265;  Berzelius  Jsb.  8 (1829),  202. 

1827:  2.  A.  T.  Kupffer.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  des  Platins  in 

Sibirien.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  12  (1827),  236. 

1827:  3.  Sur  le  minerai  de  platine  de  Siberie.  Pt. 

J.  des  mines  russ.  Aug.  (1827);  Ann.  des  mines  [2],  3 (1828),  284. 

1827:  4.  (Platinum  mines  of  the  Ural  Mountains.)  Pt. 

Bui.  univ.  Sept.  1827;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  14  (1828),  204. 

1827:  5.  A.  von  Humboldt.  Grosse  der  Korner  von  gediegenem 
Platin. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  10  (1827),  487;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  37  (1828), 
222;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  16  (1829),  389;  Bull.  math.  chim.  (F6russac), 
Nov.  (1828);  Berzelius  Jsb.  8 (1829),  203;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  28  (1829), 
129. 

j 

1827 : 6.  Arkhipoff.  Nouveau  moyen  d’extraire  Tor  du  minerai  de 
platine.  Pt. 

J.  des  mines  russ. ; Ann.  des  mines  [2],  1 (1827),  174. 

1827:  7.  Tafel  der  Atomengewichte  der  einfachen  Korper 

und  deren  Oxyde.  (Atomic  weights.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  10  (1827),  340. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


43 


1827:  8.  G.  Osann.  Merkwiirdiges  Verhaltniss  des  Eigengewiclits 
pulverisirter  Korper  zu  ihren  Atomengewichten.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  12  (1827),  487. 

1827:  9.  J.  B.  van  Mons.  Salzsaures  Platin.  (Verfluchtigung 
eines  weisses  Precipitats  mit  Chlorplatin.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  10  (1827),  59. 

1827:  10.  P.  A.  von  Bonsdorff.  Extrait  d’une  lettre  a M.  Gay- 
Lussac.  (Combination  of  chlorplatinic  acid  with  copper,  zinc, 
manganese,  iron,  etc.,  chlorides.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  34  (1827),  145;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  49  (1827), 
324. 

1827:  11.  (Note  on  double  chlorides  of  platinum  and  pal- 
ladium.) Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  11  (1827),  124. 

1827:  12.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Zur  Gescliiehte  des  Arseniks.  (Rau- 
chen  des  mit  Platin  tiberzogenen  Arseniks  nach  Erhitzen, 
p.  228.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  11  (1827),  224. 

1827:  12a.  E.  Mitscherlich.  Ueber  eine  neue  Oxydationsstufe 
des  Selens.  (Einwirkung  der  Selensaure  auf  Platin,  p.  630.) 

Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  9 (1827),  623;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  36  (1827),  100; 
Edinb . J.  of  Sci.  8 (1828),  294;  Quart.  J.  of  Sci.  2 (1827),  471. 

1827:  13.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Zur  Geschichte  des  Palladiums.  (Ver- 
halten  zu  den  Sauren,  p.  192;  zu  Reagentien,  197;  Doppelsaize, 
200.)  Pd. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  51  (1827),  192;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  4 (1828),  230, 
Heusman  Rep.  de  chim.  Feb.  (1828);  Ann.  des  mines  [2],  5 (1829); 
168;  Berzelius  Jsb.  8 (1829),  183. 

1827:  14.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Erzmetalle. 
(Properties  of  platinum  and  palladium,  p.  227.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  13  (1828),  223;  from  Bui.  d.  lat.  wiss.  Sect.  d. 
Schlesischen  Gesell.  fiir  vateriand.  Cultur,  1827. 

1827:  15.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Metallreduction  auf  nassem  Wegc, 
durch  andere  Metalle.  (Palladium,  9:  256  and  10:  607.  Os- 
mium, 12:  499.  Platinum,  palladium,  and  osmium,  12:  504.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg),  9 (1827),  256;  10  (1827),  607;  12  (1828),  499, 
504;  J.  de  Pharm.  16  (1830),  133. 

1827:  16.  M.  J.  Eiciifeld.  Eine  Erfmdung  das  Platin  zu  schmcl- 
zen.  Pt. 

Journal  d’Odessa,  1827,  63;  Bui.  d.  sci.  tech.  (1828),  280;  J.  techn.  Chem. 
2 (1828),  402;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  28  (1828),  477;  J.  Frank,  inst.  [2], 
2 (1828),  249;  Berzelius  Jsb.  9 (1830),  10G. 


44 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1827 


1827: 


1827: 


1827: 


1827: 


1827: 


1828: 


1828: 


1828: 


1828: 


1828: 


1828: 


17.  K.  W.  G.  Kastner.  Durchscheinbarkeit  des  Platins. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  10  (1827),  490  (footnote).  Pt. 

18.  T.  Cooper.  Experiments  and  observations  on  some  al- 
loys of  platinum.  (Alloys;  speculum  metal  containing 

platinum.)  Pt. 

Franklin  Joum.  3 (1827),  J98;  Teclm.  Repository,  1 (1827),  13;  J.  teelin. 
Chem.  1 (1828),  350;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  25  (1827),  401. 

19.  (Notes  on  alloys  of  gold,  palladium,  and  rho- 
dium.) * ' Pd,  Kb. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  10  (1S27),  321. 

20.  [J.  R.]  Breant.  (Sipbon  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  de  pharm.  June,  1827;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  50  (1827),  383. 

21.  C.  Despretz.  Sur  la  conductibilite  des  principaux 

metaux  et  de  quelques  substances  terreuses.  (Conductivity  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  36  (1827),  422;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  12  (1828),  282; 
Quart.  J.  of  Sci.  1 (1828),  220. 

22.  W.  S.  Harris.  On  tlie  relative  powers  of  various  metallic 

substances  as  conductors  of  electricity.  (Conductivity  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  107  (1827),  18;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (L833), 
298;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  12  (1828),  280;  Bull.  math.  chim. 
(Ferussac),  8 (1827),  33. 

1.  M.  vox  Exgelhardt.  Die  Lagerstatte  des  Goldes  und 
Platins  im  Ural-Gebirge.  Riga,  1828.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Bb. 

Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  24  (1828),  193  (very  full);  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  21  (1831), 
160. 

2.  F.  II.  Bemerkungen  fiber  die  Lagerstatte  des  Platins  am 

Ural.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  13  (1828),  566. 

3.  Native  platinum  from  Nijne  Taguilski.  Pt. 

Monthly  Mag.  Feb.  1828;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  3 (1S28),  232. 

4.  C.  M.  Marx  and  others.  Platinamassen  von  betracht- 
lichen  Grosse  und  Reichthum  an  Platin  und  Gold  im  Ural.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  54  (1828),  466. 

5.  Largest  known  masses  of  native  platina.  Pt. 

Edin.  N.  Phil.  J.  4 (1828),  185;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  4 (1828),  308. 

6.  A.  Breithaupt.  Die  Krystallisation  der  Markase.  (Iri- 

dosmin,  p.  171.)  Ir,  Os. 

J.  fui'  Chem.  (Schweigger),  52  (1828),  165. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


45 


1828:  7.  A.  Breithaupt.  Notiz  fiber  Verkauf  des  russischen 
Platins.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  52  (1828),  109;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  4 (1828),  458. 

1828:  7a.  Lubarsky.  Ural  platinum  in  nature.  Pt. 

“Mining  J.  8 (1828),  158”  [1842:3a  (?)]. 

1828:  7b.  Lubarsky.  Platinum  mines  in  district  of  Tagilsk.  Pt. 

“Mining  J.  1828,  125”  [1845:4a  (?)]. 

1828:  8. Miinzen  aus  Platina.  (Note.)  Pt. 

Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  23  (1828),  229;  Ann.  of  Phil.  (Thomson)  (1828),  Dec.; 
Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  6 (1829),  197. 

1828 : 9.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Forsok  ofver  de  mctaller  som  &tfolja  Plati- 
nan  samt  ofver  sattet  att  analysera  Platinans  nativa  legeringar 
eller  Maimer.  (Atomic  weights,  salts,  oxalates,  sulphates, 
etc.  Considered  ruthenium  as  iridium.  Rhodium  salts,  p.  32; 
palladium  salts,  46;  iridium  salts,  59;  osmium  salts,  81;  separa- 
tion of  platinum  from  ore,  103;  platinum  sulphide,  114.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Kong.  Yet.  Acad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  1828,  25;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  40 
(1829),  51, 138,  257,  337;  Ann.  derPhys.  (Pogg.),  J3  (1828),  435,  527;  J. 
techn.  Chem.  3 (1828),  465;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  5 Q829),  395;  6,  146;  Amer.  J. 
of  Sci.  18  (1830),  162;  Pol>t.  J.  (Dingier),  30  (1828),  315;  Oken,  Isis,  22 
(1829),  279;  Quart.  J.  of  Sci.  2 (1829),  174;  Ann.  des  mines  [2],  5 (1829), 
326;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  26  (1829),  106,  279;  Berzelius  Jsb.  9 (1830),  114, 
163,  169,  .171,  180,  194;  10  (1831),  112. 

1828:  10.  P.  A.  von  Bonsdorff.  Bidrag  till  afgorande  af  fragan 
om  Clilor,  Iod.  m.  fl.  metalloider,  i likhet  med  syre,  aro  syra- 
och  basbildande  Kroppar.  (Chioroplatinates,  bromoplati- 
nates,  and  bromopalladates.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Kong.  Yet.  Acad.  Handl.  Stockholm,  1828,  174;  1830,  117;  Ann.  der 
Phys.  (Pogg.),  17  (1829),  247;  18  (1829),  331;  19  (1830),  337; 
Ann.  chim.  phys.  44  (1830),  189,  244;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832), 
409,  41  J. 

1828:  11.  G.  Magnus.  Ueber  einige  neue  Verbindungen  des 
Platinchloriirs.  (Salt  of  Magnus,  first  platinum  base.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  14  (1828),  239;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  40  (1829), 
110;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  1 (1829),  420;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832),  142; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  9 (1830),  159;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  26  (1829),  297. 

1828:  12.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Vermischte  chemische  Erfahrungen 
fiber  Platina.  (Precipitation  by  zinc,  decomposition  of  carbon 
monoxide  by  dry  oxide  of  platinum,  platinum  sulphide,  and 
platinum  “feuerzeug.”)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  54  (1828),  412;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  18  (1830), 
151;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  2 (1829),  196;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832),  141;  Mag. 
fur  Pharm.  26  (1829),  298. 


46 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1828:  13.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Beitrage  zur  naheren  Kenntniss  des 
Platins  und  die  mit  demselben  in  Verbindung  vorkommenden 
Metalle,  namentlich  des  Rhodiums  nnd  Iridiums.  (Action 
of  various  reagents,  zinnsalz,  hydrogen  sulphide,  etc.) 

Ft,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  53  (1828),  108;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  24  (1828), 
•394;  28  (1829),  295. 

1828:  14.  L.  Kralovanszky.  Vermischte  chemische  Bemerkungen 
fiber  Lithium.  (Action  of  lithium  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  54  (1828),  232,  348. 

1828:  15.  G.  Wetzlar.  Beitrage  zur  chemischen  Geschichte  des 
Silbers.  (Recognition  of  palladium  by  action  of  copper 


chloride,  p.  474.)  Pd. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  52  (1828),  483. 

1828:  16. Ueber  die  Wirkung  zwischen  Gold  und  Silber 

im  starren  Zustande  und  die  Legirung  von  Gold  und  Plati- 
num. Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  14  (1828),  525. 

1828:  17.  O.  L.  Erdmann.  Technische  Amvendbarkeit  des  rohen 
Platins.  Pt. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  1 (1828),  362. 

1828:  18.  O.  L.  Erdmann.  Ueber  Dobereiner’s  Raucherlampchen 
und  das  Platiniren  des  Glases.  Pt. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  3 (18281,  395. 

1828:  19.  O.  L.  Erdmann.  Seebeck’s  Prufung  der  Platina  auf 
ihre  Reinheit  durch  Thermomagnetismus.  Pt. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  2 (1828),  89. 

1828:  20.  J.  Zuber.  (Platinirung.)  Pt. 

Pul.  Soc.  indust.  Mulhouse,  4,  ; J.  techn.  Chem.  2 (1828),  527. 

1828:  21.  Labonte  and  Depuis.  (Verfahren  Kupfer  mit  Platina 
zu  plaquiren.)  Pt. 


Bescr.  d.  machines  dans  les  brevets,  par  Christian,  1828,  523;  Rep.  of 
Pat.  Inventions,  Jure,  1828,  580;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  33  (1829),  129; 
J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  6 (1830),  176. 

1828 : 22.  J.  S.  C.  Schweigger.  Ueber  Nobili’s  eiektrochemischen 
Figuren.  (Platinum  plating  on  glass.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  54  (1828),  59. 

1828:  23.  J.  P.  J.  D’Arcet.  Ueber  die  Scheidung  des  Goldes  und 
Silbers  vom  Kupfer  mittelst  Schwefelsaure.  (Use  of  platinum 
vessels.)  Pt. 

Recueil  industriel,  Dec.  1828;  from  Memoire  on  Instructions  relative  to 
the  art  of  refining,  Paris,  1828  (or  1827?);  J.  techn.  ('hem.  4 (1829), 
424;  Polyt.  J.  (Di  igler),  31  (1828),  281;  Bibl.  univ.  Apr.  1829;  Amer.  J. 
of  Sci.  17  (1830),  179. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


47 


1828:  24.  K.  W.  G.  Kastner.  Gtite  und  Preis  des  Nlirnberger 
Blatt-  und  Maler-Platin.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  14  (1828),  162. 

1828:  25.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Zur  Geschichte  des  Platins.  (Wiir- 
meleitung  des  Platins,  also  chlorides  of  ammonium  and  plati- 
num.) Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  .14  (1828),  145;  J.  techn.  Chem.  3 (1828),  263;  Quart. 
J.  of  Sci.  5 (1829),  193;  Berzelius  Jsb.  9 (1830),  109,  113,  161;  Mag.  fur 
Pharm.  24  (1828),  347. 

1828:  26.  L.  Schwartz.  Sur  la  mesure  des  hautes  temperatures. 

Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  indust.  Mulhouse,  1 (1828),  22;  J.  techn.  Chem.  2 (1828),  341. 

1828:  27.  C.  H.  Pfaff.  Ueber  die  sogenannte  elektrische  Ladung 
der  Metalle  im  Kreise  der  voltaischen  Saule.  (No  change  in 


platinum  wire.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  53  (1828),  401. 

1828:  28.  Dublanc.  (Platinum  chloride  test  for  iodine.)  Pt. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  7 (1828),  148. 

1829:  1.  A.  T.  Kupffer.  Versuch  einer  geognostischen  Schild- 
erung  des  Urals.  (Occurrence  of  platinum,  p.  283.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  16  (1829),  260. 

1829:  2.  Platingewinnung  am  Ural  (Ausbeute).  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  15  (1829),  52;  J.  techn.  Chem.  5 (1829),  104. 

1829:  3. (Platinum  in  Ural  Mountains.)  Pt. 


“From  a Prussian  journal”;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  18  (1830),  190;  Phil.  Mag. 
[2],  7 (1830),  59;  Bibl.  uniy.fuly,  1829  [1830?]. 

1829:  4.  J.  C.  L.  Zincken.  Ueber  des  Palladium  im  Herzogthum 
Anhalt-Bernburg.  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  16  (1829),  491;  J.  techn.  Chem.  6 (1829),  235;  J. 
fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  56  (1825),  487;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  44  (1830), 
206;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832),  447;  Berzelius  Jsb.  10  (1831),  167; 
11  (1832),  202. 

1829:  5.  Benecke  and  Rienecker.  Ueber  des  Selen-Palladiimi 
bei  Tilkerode  im  Harze.  (Arbeit.)  Pd. 

1829:  6.  G.  Osann.  Berichtigung,  meine  Analyse  des  ural’schen 
Platins  betreffend.  (No  new  metal  present.) 

[Ru,  Po,  Plu,]  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 
•Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  15  (1829),  158;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  16  (1829), 
129;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  26  (1829),  294. 

1829:  7.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  Sur  la  preparation  du  palladium,  Pd. 
Ann.  chim.  phys.  41  (1829),  413. 


48 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1829:  8.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  Sur  la  preparation  cle  V osmium.  Os. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  41  (1829),  414. 

1829:  9.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Einige  nachtragliche  Bemerkungen 
liber  das  Iridium  und  das  Osmium.  (Continued  from  1828:9.) 

Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  15  (1829),  208;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  42  (1829),  185; 
Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832),  144. 

1829:  10.  W.  C.  Zeise.  Om  Platin  chloridet.  Havniae  (Copen- 
hagen), 1830.  Pt. 

Oversigt  Danske  Yid.  Sels.  1829-30,  21;  Afhandl.  Danske  Vid.  Sels.  5 
(1832),  55. 

1829:  11.  [E.]  Davy.  Fulminic  acid.  Pt. 

Roy.  Soc.  Dublin,  1829;  Berzelius  Jsb.  12  (1833),  95,  121;  Pharm.  Cen- 
trbl.  (1835),  8. 

1829:  12.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Eine  besondere  Art  von  Platinsalzen. 
(Organic  platinum  compound,  probably"  “ Acechlorplatin  ” of 
Zeise.)  Pt. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  9 (1830),  162;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  16  (1829),  82;  Mag. 
fur  Pharm.  28  (1829),  316. 

1829:  13.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  Sur  les  combinaisons  de  l’iode  avec 
le  manganese,  le  fer,  et  le  platine.  Pt, 

J.  chim.  rued.  5 (1829),  330;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832),  114;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  10  (1831),  152. / 

1829:  14.  K.  W.  G.  Kastner.  Unerwartetes  Reduction  der  auf- 
gelosten  Platinoxyds  durch  Aether.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  18  (1829),  388. 

1829:  15.  L.  H.  Zenneck.  Ueber  das  pneumatische  Verhalten 
einiger  Metalle  zur  Salzsaure.  (Platinum  in  hydrochloric 

acid,  p.  101.)  (Platinum  foil  helps  solution  of  metals  in  hy- 
drochloric acid,  p.  108.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  17  (1829),  92. 

1829:  16.  W.  A.  Lampadius.  Einige  neue  Erfahrungen  uber  das 
Verhalten  des  Silbers  gegen  Platin.  (Alloy  and  separation.) 

J.  techn.  C'hem.  4 (1829),  279;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832),  412.  Pt. 

1829:  17.  W.  A.  Lampadius.  Zerlegung  der  Iridchloride  durch 
Platinmetalle.  (Also  iridium  alloyTs  and  separation.)  Pt,  Ir. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  6 (1829),  453;  11  (1831),  1;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  1 (1832), 
412. 

1829:  18.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Ueber  Metallsuperoxyde.  (Palladium 
superoxide,  p.  218.)  Pd. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  16  (1829),  214;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  28  (1829),  317. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


49 


1829:  19.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Ueber  die  Wiederherstellung  der  Me- 
talle  durch  Stickstoff.  (Deduction  of  palladium  on  evapora- 
tion by  the  nitrogen  of  the  air;  also  observations  (p.  459)  by 
Kastner.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  18  (1829),  105,  457;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  17  (1829), 
137,  479;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  19  (1831),  371. 

1829:  20.  W.  H.  Wollaston.  On  a method  of  rendering  platina 
malleable.  (Bakerian  lecture,  1828.  Also  palladium,  and 
the  obtaining  of  the  oxide  of  osmium  in  a crystalline  state.) 

Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Pd. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  119  (1829),  1;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (1833), 
352;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  41  (1829),  403;  J.  techn.  Chem.  5 (1829),  235; 
6,  221;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  15  (1829),  299;  16,  158;  J.  fur  Chem. 
(Schweigger),  55  (1829),  376;  56,  253;  57,  69;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  5 (1829), 
65;  6,  1;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  31  (1829), 76;  32,  149;  34,  1;  Quart.  J.  of 
Sci.  6 (1829),  97;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  4 (1829),  226;  Bibl.  univ.  41 
<1829),  128;  Mech.  Mag.  279  (1828),  319;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  17  (1829), 
113;  Berzelius  Jsb.  9 (1830),  107;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  28  (1829),  314. 

1829:  21.  J.  N.  Planiava.  Bereitung  eines  leicht  zundenden 
Platinschwammes.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  fur  Phys.  (Baumgartner),  5 (1829),  9;  J.  techn.  Chem.  4 (1829),  121. 

1829:  22.  J.  von  Liebig.  Sur  le  precipite  noir  de  platine  de  M.  Ed- 
mund Davy,  et  sur  la  propriety  de  l’6ponge  de  platine  d’en- 
flammer  Fhydrogene.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  42  (1829),  316;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  18  (1830),  398;  Ann.  der 
Phys.  (Pogg.),  17  (1829),  101;  J.  techn.  Chem.  6 (1829),  467;  J.  Frank. 
Inst.  [2],  6 (1830),  269. 

1829:  23.  F.  Wohler.  Increased  combustibility  of  carbon  by 
platinum.  Pt. 

Quart.  J.  of  Sci.  6 (1829),  178;  Phil.  Mag.  [2],  6 (1829),  394. 

1829:  24.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Zur  weiteren  Kenntniss  der  chemi- 
schen  Dynamik  des  Platins,  etc.  (Platiniren  des  Glases.) 
(Quantitative  Bestimmung  des  Alkohols  mittelst  Platin- 
suboxydul.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  16  (1829),  111;  J.  techn.  Chem.  4 (1829),  496;  5 (1829), 
103;  Berzelius  Jsb.  10  (1831),  111. 

1829:  25.  T.  Graham.  On  the  application  of  spongy  platinum  to 
eudiometry.  Pt. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  2 (1829),  354;  J.  techn.  Chem.  8 (1830),  20;  Bibl.  brit.  [2], 
43  (1830),  387. 

1829:  26.  A.  C.  Becquerel.  De  pouvoir  thermo-electrique  des 
metaux.  (Copper-platinum  and  iron-platinum  couples.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  41  (1829),  353; Mem.  de  l’lnst.  Paris,  10  (1831),  237;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  16  (1829),  306;  17,  535;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger), 
57  (1829),  302. 


109733*-  -19— Bull.  694 4 


50  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1829:  27.  C.  Despretz.  Observations  sur  les  modifications  que 
subissent  les  metaux  dans  leurs  proprietes  physiques,  par 
Taction  combine©  du  gaz  ammoniacal  et  de  la  chaleur.  (No 
change  in  platinum,  p.  129.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  42  (1829),  122;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  17  (1829),  296; 
J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  58  (1830),  226;  Quart.  J.  of  Sci.  1 (1830),  201. 

1830:  1.  M.  von  Engelhardt.  Die  Lagerstatte  der  Diamanten  im 
ITral-Gebirge.  Riga,  1830.  (Occurrence  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  21  (1831),  160. 

1830:  2.  M.  von  Engelhardt.  Vorkommen  des  Platins  in  dem 
Porphyr.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  20  (1830),  532. 

1830:  3.  C.  M.  Marx.  Ueber  die  von  Struve’ sche  Mineralien-samm- 
lung.  (Description  of  platinum  and  iridosmium.)  Pt,  Os,  Ir. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  19  (1830),  370. 

1830:  4.  A.  von  Humboldt.  (Platin-Ausbeute.) 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  18  (1830),  273;  Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  21  (1831),  161. 

1830:  5.  Quesneville,  fils.  Une  methode  pour  separer  Tosmium 
et  Tiridium  de  la  mine  de  platine.  (Read  at  Soc.  de  Pharm., 
Aug.  11,  1830.)  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

J.  chim.  med.  6 (1830),  668;  J.  de  pharm.  16  (1830),  557;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  40  (1831),  73;  Berzelius  Jsb.  11  (1832),  144. 

1830:  6.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Oxyde  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  9 (1830),  110. 

1830:  7.  J.  von  Liebig.  Neue  Erfahrungen  fiber  J.  [!  E.]  Davy’s 
sogennantes  salpetrichtsaures  Platinoxyd  oder  Dobereiners 
Platinsuboxyd.  Pt. 

Mag.  fur  Pharm.  29  (1830),  101. 

1830:  8.  L.  Hunefeld.  Ueber  zwei  neue  Dopplesalze  aus  Chlor, 
Zink  und  Platin.  (Zinc  platino-  and  pla tini-chloride.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  60  (1830),  197;  Arch,  ges  Naturl.  21  (1831), 
471;  Berzelius  Jsb.  11  (1832),  191. 

1830:  9.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Bemerkungen  fiber  die  Platinmetalle. 
(Phosphorsaures  Rhodiumoxyd  u.  s.  w.)  Pt,  Pd,  Os,  Ir,  Rh. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  18  (1830),  256;  Berzelius  Jsb.  11  (1832),  143; 
Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  32  (1830),  314. 

1830:  9a.  Seleniuret  of  palladium.  Pd. 

Edinb.  J.  of  Sci.  [2],  3 (1830),  358. 

1830:  10.  G.  F.  Wach.  Ueber  das  Phanomen,  welches  von  Dutro- 
chet  mit  dem  Ausdrucke  Endosmose  und  Exosmose  bezeichnet 
wurde,  und  daran  sich  reihende  Beobachtungen  fiber  Metall- 
vegetationen.  (“Platinvegetation.”)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  58  (1830),  60. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


51 


1830:  11.  G.  Osann.  (Specific  gravity  of  platinum,  etc.)  Pt. 

Arch.  Chem.  (Kastner),  1 (1830),  58;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1831,  291. 

1830:  12.  K.  W.  G.  Kastner.  Vervollkommnung  des  Platin- 
schwamms.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  20  (1830),  425;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1831,  275. 

1830:  13.  M.  Faraday.  On  the  manufacture  of  glass  for  optical 
purposes  (Bakerian  lecture,  1829).  (Use  of  platinum  for 
vessels,  p.  16;  preparation  of  spongy  platinum,  p.  56.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  120  (1830),  1;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  2 (1833), 
388;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  18  (1830),  556,  577;  J.  techn.  Chem.  9 
(1830),  113;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  45  (1830),  225;  Froriep,  Notizen,  27 
(1830),  116. 

1830:  14.  W.  A.  Lampadius.  Einfaches  Verfahren  Kupfer  und 
Messing  mit  Silber  und  Platin  zu  bedecken.  Pt. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  8 (1830),  52. 

1830:  15.  J.  F.  Daniell.  On  certain  phenomena  resulting  from 
the  action  of  mercury  upon  different  metals.  (Mercury  on 
platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Roy.  Institution,  1 (1831),  1;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  20  (1830),  260; 
Bibl.  brit.  [2],  46  (1831),  32. 

1830:  16.  F.  Gobel.  Magnetische  Reaction  des  Platins.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  60  (1830),  415;  Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  11  (1831), 
388. 


1830:  17. (Imitation  of  platinum  by  copper  zinc  alloy.)  Pt. 

Recueil  indust.  Apr.  1830;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  22  (1832),  383. 


1830:  18.  W.  E.  Weber.  Ueber  die  specifische  Warme  fester 
Korper,  insbesondere  der  Metalle.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  20  (1830),  178;  Berzelius  Jsb.  11  (1832),  13. 

1830:  19.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Zur  Warmelehre,  besonders  in  Hin- 
sicht  auf  das  Leitungsvermogen  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  19  (1830),  507;  Berzelius  Jsb.  11  (1832),  13. 

1831:  1.  On  the  gold,  silver,  and  platina  of  Russia.  Pt. 

Featherstonehaugh ’s  Amer.  J.  of  Geol.  Sept.  1831;  Edinb.  N.  Phil. 
J.  13  (1832),  189. 


1831:  2.  J.  N.  Fuchs.  Plat.ingeschiebe  von  ausserordentlicher 


Grosse  von  Nische  Tagilsk. 


Pt. 


J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  62  (1831),  94. 


1831:  3. 


Verkauf  von  Osmium  Iridium.  (Price.)  Os,  Ir. 


J.  techn.  Chem.  10  (1831),  144. 


52  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1831:  4.  W.  C.  Zeise.  Von  der  Wirkung  zwischen  Platinchlorid 
und  Alkohol,  und  von  den  dabei  entstehenden  neuen  Sub- 
stanzen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  21  (1831),  497;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  62 
(1831),  393;  63,  121;  Mag.  fiir  Pharm.  35  (1831),  105;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 

2 (1831),  677,  693;  Berzelius  Jsb.  12  (1833),  300;  Mag.  fur  Pharm.  36 
(1831),  104. 

1831:  5.  W.  C.  Zeise.  Kulbrintet  Chlorplatin-ammoniak  [1831], 
(Gekohlenwasserstofftes  Chlorplatin-Ammoniak.)  Pt. 

Afhandl.  Danske  Vid.  Sels.  5 (1832),  141;  Oversigt.  Danske  Vid.  Sels. 
1830-31,  24;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  136;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  21  (1831),  542;  Edinb.  J.  of  Sci.  6 (1832),  328;  Berzelius  Jsb.  12 
(1833),  300. 

1831:  6.  A.  Connell.  On  the  acidification  of  Iodine  by  means  of 
nitric  acid.  (Iodic  acid  has  no  action  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  11  (1831),  72;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  62  (1831), 
495;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  21  (1832),  376. 

1831:  7.  A.  C.  Becquerel.  Du  carbonate  de  chaux  cristallise,  et 
de  1’ action  simultanee  des  matieres  sucrees  ou  mucilagineuses 
sur  quelques  oxides  metalliques,  par  Tintermediaire  des 
alcalis  et  des  terres.  (Action  on  oxide  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  47  (1831),  5;  J.  chim.  med.  7 (1831),  297;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1831,  415. 

1831:  8.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Zersetzung  des  Platinchlorids  von 
Oxalsaure  und  oxalsauren  Salzen  am  Sonnenlicht.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  62  (1831),  94;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1831,  383. 

1831 : 9.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Oxal-,  Ameisen-,  und  Essig. 
saure.  (Action  of  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  232. 

1831:  10.  F.  W.  Schweigger-Seidel.  Nachtrag  zu  Ddbcreiner’sl 
Oxal-,  Ameisen-  und  Essigsaure.  Pt.J 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  234. 

1831:  11.  F.  W.  Schweigger-Seidel.  Ueber  Platinagluhlampenl 
und  Lampenessig.  Pt.l 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  147. 

1831 : 12.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Platinmohr  und  einen  Essig-1 
bildungs-Apparat.  Pt.l 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  363;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  2 (1834),  520.J1 

1831:  13.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Entziindung  des  Knallgaseal 
durch  Platinmohr.  PtJl 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Sehweigger),  63  (1831)464;  Berzelfus  Jsb.  12  (1833),  114.H 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


53 


1831:  14.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Iridmohr  und  dessen  ausge- 
zeichnete  Ziindkraft.  Ir. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  465. 

1831:  15.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Portatives  Iridfeuerzeug.  Ir. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  467. 

1831:  16.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Merkwtirdige  Ammoniakbildung 
(aus  Salpetersaure,  Alkohol  und  Platin-  oder  Irid-mobr). 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  476,  Pt,  Ir. 

1831:  17.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Nobili’s  elektro-chemische 
Farbenfiguren.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  472. 

1831:  18.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  Platinaschwamm  und  die,  dessen 
Ziindkraft  vollig  aufhebende,  Eigenscbaft  der,  mit  Ammoniak- 
gas  vermischten,  atmospharischen  Luft.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  371;  J.  techn.  Chem.  12  (1831), 
233;  Berzelius  Jsb.  12  (18-33),  113;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1831,  785. 

1831:  19.  J.  S.  C.  Schweigger.  Ueber  Bottger  “fiber  Platina- 
schwamm, u.  s.  w.”  (Action  of  ammonia.)  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  375. 

1831:  20.  H.  Hess.  Sur  le  propriety  que  possede  le  platine  tres 
divise  d’operer  la  combinaison  de  l’oxigene  avec  l’hydrogene, 
et  sur  la  densite  du  platine.  Pt. 

Mem.  Acad.  St.  Petersb.  [6],  1 (1831),  587;  Gott.  Gelehrte  Anzeiger, 
1833,  139;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  379. 

1831:  21.  R.  Hare.  Asbestos  impregnated  with  platinum.  (Let- 
ter.) Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  20  (1831),  160;  J.  techn.  Chem.  14  (1832),  235;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  44  (1832),  231. 

1831:  22.  G.  Merryweatiier.  Account  of  a platina  lamp.  Pt. 

Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  10  (1831),  359;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  20  (1831),  385;  J.  fiir 
Chem.  (Schweigger),  63  (1831),  148;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  40  (1831), 
73;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1831,  812. 

1831:  23.  S.  F.  Hermbstadt.  Versuche  und  Beobachtungen  fiber 
die  Essigsaure.  (Action  of  platinum  black  on  alcohol.)  Pt. 

Abhand.  Acad.  Berlin,  1831,  285;  J.  techn.  Chem.  17  (1833),  232;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1833,  587. 

1831:  24.  J.  A.  Buchner.  (Action  of  fused  ammonium  nitrate  on 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Rep.  fiir  Pharm.  (Buchner),  39  (1831),  360;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832, 

240. 


54 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1831:  25.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Vanadins  foreningar  med  metaller. 
(Platinum-vanadium  alloy.)  Pt. 

Handl.  Vet.  Akad.  Stockholm,  1831,  22;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger), 
62  (1831),  349;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  47  (1831),  337;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  21  (1831),  1;  Phil.  Mag.  10  (1831),  321. 

1831:  26.  Stieren.  Platingefasse.  Pt. 

Rep.  fur  Pharm.  (Buchner),  39  (1831),  1;  J.  techn.  Chem.  13  (1832), 
492;  16  (1833),  376  (Berichtigung);  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  77. 

1831:27.  H.  Abich.  Chemische  Untersuching  des  Spinels.  (Steel 

press  for  platinum,  p.  309.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  23  (1831),  305;  Ann.  des  mines,  [3],  6 (1834), 
244. 

1831:  28.  J.  F.  Daniell.  Further  experiments  with  a new  register 
pyrometer  for  measuring  the  expansion  of  solids.  (Cause  of 
change  of  texture  of  platinum  when  heated  with  black  lead, 
p.  456.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  121  (1831),  443;  J.  techn.  Chem.  15  (1832),  459; 
Phil.  Mag.  1 (1832),  261. 

1831:  29.  Boudon  de  St.  Amand.  Platin  in  Porcellanfarbung 
u.  s.  w.  Pt. 

Desc.  d.  machines,  Brevets  d’inv.  par  Christian,  16,  5;  Polyt.  J.  (Ding- 
ier), 41  (1831),  219. 

1832:  1.  Platinausbeute  am  Ural.  Pt. 

J.  de  St.  Petersb.  (J.  des  mines  Russ.?)  (1832),  Mar.  8-20;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  12  (1833),  175. 

1832:  2.  J.  F.  W.  Herschel.  On  the  action  of  light  in  determining 
the  precipitation  of  muriate  of  platinum  by  lime  water.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  1 (1832),  58;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  26  (1832),  176; 
Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  3 (1832),  337;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger), 
65  (1832),  262;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  620;  Berzelius  Jsb.  13 

(1834),  141. 

1832:  3.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Platinoxyd-Natron  und  daraus 
bereiteten  Platinmohr.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  66  (1832),  298;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  141; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  13  (1834),  107,  142. 

1832:  4.  P.  A.  von  Bonsdorff.  Analys  af  tvenne  Brom-salter 
(Bromo-Platinas  Natricus  och  Bromo-Auras  Kalicus.)  Pt. 

Handl.  Vet.  Acad.  Stockholm,  1832,  88;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  33 
(1834),  61;  LTnstitut,  3 (1835),  105;  Berzelius  Jsb.  12  (1833),  158; 
Ann.  des  mines  [3],  7 (1835),  486. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


55 


1832:  5.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  Memoire  sur  les  iodures  de  platine  et  les 
composes  doubles  qu’ils  peuvent  former  avec  les  iodures 
basiques,  Tacide  hydriodique,  et  l’hydriodate  d’ammoniaque. 

Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  51  (1832),  113;  J.  chim.  med.  8 (1832),  705;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  33  (1834),  67;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  8 (1833), 
185;  J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  67  (1833),  30;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  3 (1833), 
384;  Berzelius  Jsb.  13  (1834),  142. 

1832 : 6.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  Recherches  sur  la  limite  de  sensibilite  de 
certains  reactifs  tres-employ6s  dans  Fanatyse  chimique. 
(Platinic  chloride.)  Pt. 

J.  chim.  med.  8 (1832),  513,  577;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  774,  914. 

1832:  7.  P.  Orfila.  Ueber  mehrere  mineralische  Gifte.  (Platinic 
chloride  for  potassium  iodide.)  Pt. 

J.  chim.  med.  8 (1832),  257;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  464;  Froriep,  Notizen, 
34  (1832),  33. 

1832:  8.  R.  J.  Kane  (and  R.  Phillips).  Analysis  of  some  com- 
pounds of  platinum.  (Iodides.)  (Observations  by  R.  Phillips 
in  Phil.  Mag.  2:  197.)  Pt. 

Dublin  J.  Med.  Chem.  Sci.  1 (1832),  304;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  2 (1833),  197. 

1832:  9.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Notizen  fiber  Sauerstoffatlier,  und 
verwandte  Gegenstande.  (Action  of  platinum  black  in  promo- 
tion of  the  oxidation  of  sulphur  dioxide  to  sulphuric  acid.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  24  (1832),  603;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  2 (1832), 
343;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  477. 

1832:  10.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  die  depotenzirende  Wirkung 
des  Ammoniaks  auf  den  Platinschwamm.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  1 (1832),  29. 

1832:  11.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  die  Bereitung  des  Platin- 
mohrs.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  2 (1832),  1;  J.  techn.  Chem.  14  (1832),  456;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1832,  515,  857. 

1832:  12.  Ueber  Essigsaureerzeugung.  (Use  of  plati- 
num black.  Subject  of  a prize  award.)  Pt. 

Ber.  Soc.  d.  Pharm.  Paris;  J.  de  pharm.  18  (1832),  364;  J.  fur  Chem. 
(Schweigger),  62  (1832),  285. 

1832:  13.  P.  Phillips.  Ueber  Fabrication  der  Schwefelsaure  ohne 
Salpeter.  (By  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  65  (1832),  443;  J.  techn.  Chem.  14  (1832),  330. 

1832:  14.  Bereitung  und  interessanteste  Eigenschaften 

verschiedener  merkwfirdiger  Platinpraparate  nebst  darauf 

gegrundeten  Apparaten  und  Versuchen.  (Chiefly  on  action 

of  platinum  black.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  113,  139,  145,  161,  177. 


56 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1832:  15.  W.  Marshall.  An  account  of  the  Russian  method  of 
rendering  platinum  malleable.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [2],  11  (1832),  321;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  4 (1832),  210; 
J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  65  (1832),  259;  J.  techn.  Chem.  14  (1832), 
319;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  45  (1832),  205;  Berzelius  Jsb.  13  (1834),  106. 

1832:  16.  C.  M.  Marx.  Die  Schweissbarkeit  des  Platins.  Pt. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  66  (1832),  159;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  8 
(1833),  182;  J.  techn.  Chem.  16  (1833),  127;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833, 
133;  Berzelius  Jsb.  13  (1834),  107. 

1832:  17.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Ueber  verschiedene  chemische  Opera- 
tionen  und  Gerathschaften.  (Platinum  crucibles,  p.  357.)  Pt. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  13  (1832),  320;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  767. 

1832:  18.  G.  Bischof.  Leichte  Zerstorbarkeit  von  Platingefassen. 

Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  64  (1832),  123;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1832,  126. 

1832:  19.  (Platinum  alloys.)  Pt. 

J.  chim.  mM.  Sept.  1832;  J.  techn.  Chem.  16  (1833),  133. 

1833:  1.  G.  Rose.  Ueber  die  im  Ural  vorkommenden  krystalli- 
sirten  Verbindungen  von  Osmium  und  Iridium.  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  29  (1833),  452;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  12  (1834), 
238;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  6 (1834),  270;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  5 (1834),  101. 

1833:  2. Gisement  du  platine  en  Sib  erie.  Pt. 

J.  de  St.-P6tersb.  (J.  des  mines  Russ.?)  (1833),  Sept.;  Ann.  des  mines 
[3],  5 (1834),  585. 

1833:  3.  H.  F.  Gaultier  de  Claubry.  (Discovery  of  platinum  in 
France  in  galena.)  Pt. 

Soc.  d ’encouragement.,  May  8,  1833;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  49  (1833), 
232;  L’lnstitut, ; J.  chim.  med.  9 (1833),  434. 

1833:4.  Dangaz.  (Platinum  in  France;  with  analysis.)  Pt. 

L’lnstitut,  No.  35  (1833);  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  591;  J. 
prakt.  Chem.  1 (1834),  76. 

1833:  5.  D’Argy.  Platine  en  galene.  (Discovery  of  platinum  in 
France.)  Pt. 

L’lnstitut,  No.  26  (1833),  218;  27  (1833);  46  (1833),  103;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  31  (1834),  16;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  125;  J.  chim.  med.  10 
(1834),  109;  Berzelius  Jsb.  14  (1835),  177. 

1 833 : 6.  J.  Prinsep.  Note  on  the  discovery  of  platina  in  Ava.  Pt. 

Asiatick  Researches,  18,  ii  (1833),  279;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  34  (1835), 
380;  Berzelius  Jsb.  16  (1837),  170. 

1833:  7.  W.  A.  Lampadius  and  G.  P.  Plattner.  Ueber  das 
gemeinschaftliche  Vorkommen  des  Platinerzes  und  des  gedic- 
genen  Silbergoldes  in  einem  Gangfossile  aus  Brazilien.  Pt. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  18  (1833),  453. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


57 


1833:  8.  F.  Wohler.  Sur  F extraction  de  Firidium  et  de  Fosmium 
du  residu  noir  de  platine.  Ir,  Oc. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  54  (1833),  317;  J.  chim.  m6d.  10  (1834),  127;  Ann. 
des  mines  [3],  5 (1834),  493. 

1833:  9.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Undersokning  af  Osmium-Iridium. 

Os,  Ir. 

Handl.  Vet.  Acad.  Stockholm,  1833,  313;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  32 
(1834),  232;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  6 (1835),  238;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  7 (1835), 
558;  Berzelius  Jsb.  14  (1835),  178. 

1833:  10.  A.  Breithaupt.  Ueber  einen  Korper,  der  schwerer  als 
Platin  ist.  (Osmiridium;  also  specific  gravity  of  palladium.) 

Os,  Ir,  Pd. 

J.  fur  Chem.  (Schweigger),  69  (1833),  1;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  12  (1834), 
239;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  894,  908;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  5 [1834], 
586;  Berzelius  Jsb.  14  (1835),  180. 

1833:  11.  A.  Breithaupt.  Vorlaufige  chemische  Untersuchungen 
des  schwersten  metallischen  Korpers,  den  man  kennt.  (Os- 
miridiums.)  Os,  Ir. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  69  (1833),  96;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  32. 

1833:  12.  J.  Persoz.  (Separation  of  osmium  and  iridium.)  Os,  Ir. 

J.  chim.  med.  9 (1833),  420;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  69  (1833),  99; 
Phil.  Mag.  [3],  4 (1834),  155;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1836,  142;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  14  (1835),  168;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  5 (1834),  489. 

1833:  13.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Atomgewichte  der  einfachen  Korper. 

Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  2.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

1833:  14.  R.  Phillips.  Experiments  on  platina.  (Reduction  by 
tartrates,  etc.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  2 (1833),  94;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  8 (1833),  189;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  288;  J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  68  (1833), 
42;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  1 (1834),  375;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  379;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  49  (1833),  128;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  7 (1835),  485. 

1833:  15.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  mehrere  neue  Platin  verbin- 
dungen.  (Oxalsaures  Platin,  und  Platinsauren  Natron.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  28  (1833),  180;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  8 (1833), 
189,  191;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  53  (1833),  204;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  28  (1835), 
130;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  472;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  5 (1834),  150;  Ann. 
des  mines  [3],  5 (1834),  484;  Berzelius  Jsb.  14  (1835),  123,  159. 

1833:  16.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  Sur  Fiodure  de  palladium.  Pd. 

J.  chim.  m6d.  9 (1833),  447,  from  Soc.  chim.  med. 

1833:  17.  R.  J.  Kane.  Remarks  on  the  composition  of  the  iodide 
of  platinum.  Pt. 

Dublin  J.  Med.  Chem.  Sci.  3 (1833),  211. 

1833:  18.  R.  J.  Kane.  Reclamation  au  sujet  de  la  decouverte  des 
iodures  de  platine.  Pt. 

J.  chim.  m6d.  9 (1833),  26. 


58  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

% 

1833:  19.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  Reponse  h M.  R.  J.  Kane.  (On  dis- 
covery of  iodides  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  chim.  med.  9 (1833),  27. 

1833:  20.  R.  Phillips.  Observations  on  Mr.  R.  J.  Kane’s  “ Analy- 
sis of  some  combinations  of  platinum”  (iodides).  (Cf.  1832:  8.) 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  2 (1833),  197.  Pt. 

1833:  21.  F.  Gobel.  Verhalten  der  Ameisensaure  zu  einigen 
Metalloxyden  und  Hyperoxyden.  (Action  on  oxides  of  plati- 
num and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  67  (1833),  74;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  176. 

1833:  22.  J.  B.  Boussingault.  Examen  d’une  substance  con- 
sid6ree  comme  un  compose  d’hydrogene  et  de  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  pliys.  53  (1833),  441;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  542; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  1 (1834),  251;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  5 (1834),  155;  Ann.  dee 
mines  [3],  5 (1834),  487;  Berzelius  Jsb.  14  (1835),  122. 

1833:  23.  R.  Bottger.  Einige  Bemerkungen  fiber  Bereitungs-  und 
Behandlungsweise  des  Platinschwammes  zum  Gebrauch  in 
Dobereiner’s  Apparat  zur  Entziindung  des  Hydrogens.  Pt. 

J.  fiir  Chem.  (Schweigger),  68  (1833),  390;  J.  techn.  Chem.  18  (1833), 
237;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1833,  819. 

1833:  24.  A.  F.  E.  Degen.  Ueber  ein  Eudiometer,  bei  dem  die 
Wasserbildung  durch  unvermischten  Platinschwamm  bewirkt 
wird.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  27  (1833),  557. 

1833:  25.  J.  L.  Prevost.  (Salzsaures  Natron-Platin  als  Heilmitte 
in  der  Epilepsie.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  5 (1833),  231,  from  Med.  Soc.  of  Geneva. 

1833:  26.  G.  F.  C.  Frick.  Ueber  die  Anwendung  des  Iridiums  zu 
Pore  ell  anfarben.  Ir. 

J.  techn.  Chem.  18  (1833),  406;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  17; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  94;  Ann.  des  mines  13],  7 (1835),  487;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  15  11836).  148. 

1833:  27.  E.  Lenz.  Ueber  die  Leitungsfahigkeit  der  Metalle  fur 
die  Electricitat,  bei  verschiedenen  Temperaturen.  Pt. 

M6m.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P4tersbourg,  2 (1833),  631;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
34  (1835),  430;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  863. 

1834:  1.  P.  Berthier  and  A.  C.  Becquerel.  Platin  in  Frank- 
reich.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  590. 

1834  : 2.  Villain.  (Platinum  in  France.) 

J.  chim.  mdd.  Feb.  (1834);  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  5 (1834),  158. 


Pt. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


59 


1834:  3. 

Platinum  in  France. 

Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  26  (1834),  389. 

1834:  4. 

G.  Rose.  Ueber  die  Lagerstatte  des  Platins  im  Ural. 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  673. 

Pt. 

1834:  5. 

E.  F.  Cooke.  Price  of  platinum. 
Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  26  (1834),  210. 

Pt. 

1834:  6. 

L.  F.  Svanberg.  Bidrag  till  narmare  kannedom  af  kemiske 

sammansattningen  af  de  Amerikanska  platinamalmerna. 
(Composition  of  platina  del  Pinto  and  other  South  American 
platinum  and  iridium.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Handl.  Yet.  Akad.  Stockholm,  1834,  84;  Ann.  der  Pliys.  (Pogg.),  36 
(1835),  471;  Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  205;  Bibl.  univ.  2 (1836),  382; 
L’Institut,  hfo.  67;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  7 (1835),  557. 

1834:  7.  P.  Sobolevsky.  Ueber  das  Ausbringen  des  Platins  in 
Russland.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  33  (1834),  99;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  13  (1835), 
42  (read  at  Gesellsch.  Naturf.  u.  Aerzte,  1834);  J.  de  Pharm.  21  (1835), 
181;  Bibl.  univ.  9 (1837),  179;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  7 (1835),  480; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  149. 

1834:  8.  F.  Wohler.  Ueber  die  Gewinnung  von  Iridium  und  Os- 
mium aus  dem  Platinriickstand.  (Heating  with  sodium  chlo- 
ride in  chlorine.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  161;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  9 (1834), 
149;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  26  (1834),  371;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  121; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  145;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  207. 

1834:  9.  J.  Persoz.  Memoire  sur  la  preparation  de  F osmium  et  de 
Tiridium,  et  sur  Faction  du  sulfate  acide  de  potasse  sur  les 
metaux  de  platine  en  presence  des  chlorures  alcalins.  (Also 
decomposition  by  sodium  sulphide.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  55  (1834),  210;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  12  (1834),  12; 
16  (1835),  204;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  2 (1834),  473;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  5 (1834), 
314;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  53  (1834),  129;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866), 
120. 

1834:  10.  R.  Bottger.  Neues  Verfahren,  aus  den  Chloriden  des 
Platins  und  Iridiums,  mittelst  fliissigen  Schwefelkohlenstoffs, 
Schwefelplatin  und  Schwefeliridiums  darzustellen.  Pt,  Ir. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  3 (1834),  267;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  16  (1835),  206; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  148,  153,  154. 

1834:  11.  R.  J.  Kane.  On  some  compounds  formed  by  the  action  of 
[proto]ch!oride  of  platinum  and  [proto]chloride  of  tin.  Pt. 

Dublin  J.  Med.  Chem.  Sci.  5 (1834). 

1834:  12.  W.  C.  Zeise.  Om  mercaptanet.  (Platinmercaptid.)  Pt. 

Afh.  Dansk.  Vid.  Sels.  6 (1837),  1;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  1 (1834),  409. 


60 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1834:  12a.  J.  C.  Booth.  (Potassium-iridium  cyanide.)  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  167;  Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  169. 

1834:  13.  J.  yon  Liebig.  Ueber  die  Constitution  des  Aethers 

und  seiner  Verbindungen.  (Entzundliches  Platinchlorur  von 
Zeise,  p.  9.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  9 (1834),  1;  Ann.  der  Pbys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  321. 

1834:  14.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Atomgewichte  der  einfachen  Korper. 

Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  2.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

1834:  15.  R.  Brandes.  Reagens  fur  Weinsteinsaure.  (Platinic 

chloride.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Cbem.  (Liebig),  9 (1834),  302;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  670. 

1834:  16.  K.  W.  G.  Kastner.  Chemikalische  Bemerkungen. 

(Kalium  platinichlorid  als  Zeugdruckfarbe,  p.  408;  Zusatz  von 
Weingeist  zur  Reinigung  des  Platinchlorids  und  des  Iridium- 
chlorids,  p.  409.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  26  (1834),  407. 

1834:  17.  P.  Berthier.  “Traite  des  essais  par  la  voie  seche.” 
Vol.  2,  p.  1002.  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  des  mines  [3],  5 (1834),  490;  Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  148. 

1834:  18.  L.  F.  Bley.  Platinmohr.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  2 (1834),  520;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1835,  15. 

1834:  19.  M.  Faraday.  On  the  power  of  metals  and  other  solids  to 
induce  the  combination  of  gaseous  bodies.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  124  (1834),  55;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  14  (1835),  1; 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  33  (1834),  151;  J.  de  pharm.  21  (1835),  36; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  51  (1834),  274;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1835,  458;  Lit. 
Gazette,  No.  888;  Phil.  Mag.  5 (1834),  161,  252,  334,  424;  Ann.  des 
mines  [3],  7 (1835),  483. 

1834:  20.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Sauers  toff  absorption  des  Platins. 

Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  31  (1834),  512,  aus  Preus.  Staatsztg.  Mar.  13, 
1834;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  12  (1834),  236;  Bibl.  brit.  [2],  56  (1834), 
332;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  7 (1835),  485. 

1834:  21.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ausserordentliche  Verdichtung  des 
Sauerstoffs  durch  Platinmohr.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  1 (1834),  76. 

1S34:  22.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Platinmohr.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  1 (1834),  254;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  50. 

1834:  23.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Das  Platin  als  reines  Oxyrrophon 
(Sauerstoffgassauger)  erkannt.  Pt.  ! 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  1 (1834),  114,  369;  Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  151;  Pharm.  j 
Centrbl.  1834,  477,  509. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


61 


1834:  24.  R.  Bottger.  Fernere  Ergebnisse  meiner  Versuche  iiber 


Bildung  einiger  Amalgame.  (Platinamalgame.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  3 (1834),  278;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1835,  105. 

1834:  25.  K.  Karamarsch.  Versuche  iiber  die  absolute  Festigkeit 
der  (zu  Draht  gezogenen)  Metalle.  Pt. 

Jahrb.  Polyt.  Inst.  Wien.  18  (1834),  54;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1834,  337. 

1835:  1.  Platina  and  gold  of  the  Uralian  Mountains.  Pt. 

Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  18  (1835),  366;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  28  (1835),  395. 

1835:  2.  Teploff.  Aper^u  de  la  richesse  minerale  de  F empire 
russe.  (Occurrence  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [3],  8 (1835),  51;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  60  (1835),  394. 

1835:  3.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  (Vorkommen  des  Platins  in  Ava  und  am 
Harz.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  34  (1835),  381. 

1835:  4.  L.  Hopff.  Platin  im  Rheinsande.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Naturl.  27  (1835),  394. 

1835:  5.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Analyse  des  “Ouro  poudre”  (faules 
Gold)  von  Slid  Amerika.  Pd. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  15  (1836),  205;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  35  (1835),  514. 

1835:  6.  G.  Rose.  Ueber  das  gediegene  Iridium.  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  34  (1835),  377. 

1835:  7.  G.  Osann.  Platin  mit  Meteoreisen.  (Is  platinum  me- 
teoric?) Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  38  (1836),  238. 

1835 : 8.  — Product  of  platinum  mines.  Pt. 


J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  15  (1835),  293;  from  Berlin  State  Gazette  and  London 
Mech.  Mag. 

1835:  9.  F.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  eine  neue  Methode  der  Analyse 
des  Platinerzes,  der  Darstellung  des  Platinmohrs  und  des 
chemisch  reinen  Palladiums.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  14  (1835),  251;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1835,  767;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  16  (1837),  108,  160. 

1835:  10.  J.  R.  Joss.  Wichtige  Bemerkung  als  Beitrag  zur  Zerle- 
gung  des  Osmium-Irids.  Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  4 (1835),  371. 

1835:  11.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Fernere  Mi ttheilungen  [iiber  Osmi- 
um-Irid,  platinsauren  Kalk  und  Platinoxydnatron].  Pt,  Os,  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  36  (1835),  464;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  26,  (1840), 
196;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  15  (1839),  445;  Bibl.  univ.  4 (1836),  167. 


62 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1835:  12.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Chemische  Eigenschaften  und  phys- 
ische  Natur  des  auf  nassem  Wege  reducirten  Platins.  (Reac- 
tion between  platinum  chloride  and  ferric  chloride,  etc.)  (Ann. 
Chem.  (Liebig)  14:15;  also  by  F.  Dobereiner  and  Weiss.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  14  (1835),  10,  15;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  36  (1835), 
308,  458;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  34(1838),  207;  L’Institut;  J.  de  pharm.  21 
(1835),  530;  Bibl.  univ.  1 (1836),  364;  3 (1836),  173;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 
1836,  63,  86;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  9 (1836),  381,  382;  Berzelius  Jsb.  16 
(1837),  105,  106,  107,  160. 

1835:  13.  J.  R.  Joss.  Ueber  eine  merkwurdige  Reduction  des 
Platins.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  4 (1835),  374. 

1835:  14.  W.  W.  Mather.  Crystallized  perchloride  of  platinum. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  27  (1835),  262.  Pt. 

1835:  15.  W.  W.  Mather.  Iodide  of  potassium  and  platinum.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  27  (1835),  257. 

1835:  16.  R.  J.  Kane.  On  some  combinations  of  protochloride  of 
platinum  with  protochloride  of  tin.  Pt. 

Brit.  Ass.  Rept.  1835,  ii,  44;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  7 (1835),  399;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  20  (1836),  187;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  7 (1836),  135;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 
1836,  301. 

1835:  17.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  M6moire  sur  les  combinaisons  de  Tiode 
avec  le  palladium  et  Tiridium.  Pd,  Ir. 

J.  chim.  med.  [2],  1 (1835),  57;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1835,  202;  Berzelius  Jsb. 
16  (1837),  153. 

1835:  18.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Atomgewichte  der  einfachen  Korper. 
(Atomic  weight  of  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os. 

Pharm.  Centrbl.  1835,  1. 

1835:  19.  W.  Maugham.  (Fusion  of  platinum  by  the  oxyhydrogen 
blowpipe.)  Pt. 

Soc.  of  Arts,  May  12  (1835);  Mag.  of  Pop.  Sci.  3 (1837),  208;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  61  (1836),  75. 

1835:  20.  W.  W.  Mather.  Amalgam  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  27  (1835),  263. 

1835:  21.  J.  yon  Liebig.  Ueber  die  Producte  der  Oxydation  des 
Alkohols.  (Oxidation  of  alcohol  by  means  of  platinum 
sponge.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  14  (1835),  133;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  59  (1835),  289; 
J.  de  pharm.  21  (1835),  472;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  36  (1835),  275; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1835,  649. 

1835:  22.  W.  Artus.  Ueber  die  Vernichtung  der  Ziindkraft  des 
Platinschwammes  durch  Schwefelwasserstoffgas.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  chem.  6 (1835),  176;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1836,  79. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


63 


1835: 

1835: 

1836: 

1836: 

1836: 

1836: 

1836: 

1836: 

1836: 


23.  G.  F.  Hanle.  Verbesserung  an  den  Platinfeuerzeugen. 

Pt. 

Repert.  fur  Pharm.  (Buchner),  2 (1835),  64;  Pharm.  Oentrbl.  1835,  633. 

24.  W.  C.  Henry.  Experiments  on  the  action  of  metals  in 
determining  gaseous  combination.  (Action  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  6 (1835),  362;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  36  (1835),  150; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  5 (1835),  109;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  31  (1837),  348;  Edinb. 
N.  Phil.  J.  (1836),  99;  Pharm.  Oentrbl.  1835,  838;  Ann.  des  mines  [3], 
9 (1835),  383. 

1.  E.  Hermann.  Ueber  Irit  und  Osmit,  zwei  neue  Min- 
er alien.  Ir,  Os. 

Bui.  Soc.  nat.  Moscou,  9 (1836),  215. 

2.  J.  E.  Herberger.  (Silberhaltiges  Platin.)  Pt. 

Repert.  fiir  Pharm.  (Buchner)  [2],  5 (1836),  211;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig), 
20  (1836),  186;  Pharm.  Oentrbl.  1836,  477. 

3.  E.  Hermann.  Ueber  einige  dreifache  Verbindungen  von 

Osmium-,  Iridium-  und  Platinchlorid  mit  Chlorkalium  und 
Chlor ammonium.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  37  (1836),  407;  Bibl.  univ.  4 (1836),  384;  Phil. 
Mag.  [3],  9 (1836),  232;  Pharm.  Oentrbl.  1836,  364;  Ann.  des  mines  [3], 
11  (1837),  276. 

4.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  mehrere  neue  Platinverbin- 

dungen.  (Cyanides  of  platinum,  platinum  and  mercury,  and 
platinum  and  hydrogen.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  37  (1836),  545;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  17  (1836), 
250;  J.de  Pharm.  22  (1836),  551;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  9 (1836),  314;  Pharm. 
Oentrbl.  1836,  417;  Bui.  univ.  4 (1836),  381;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  11 
(1837),  273. 

5.  W.  C.  Zeise.  Ny  undersogelse  over  det  braenbare  Chlor- 
platin.  (Combustible  chloride  of  platinum  with  alcohol.)  Pt. 

Afhand.  Danske  Vid.  Sels.  [4],  6 (1837),  333;  Oversigt  Danske  Vid.  Sels. 
1836-37,  9;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  63  (1836),  411;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  23 
(1837),  1;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  40  (1837),  234;  Berzelius  Jsb.  18 
(1839),  445. 

6.  L.  A.  Buchner,  Jr.  Ueber  der  Granzen  der  Wahrnehm- 
barkeit  mehrer  chemischer  Eeactionen.  (Platinum  with  stan- 
nous chloride,  mercurous  nitrate,  and  potassium  iodide.)  Pt. 

Pharm.  Oentrbl.  1836,  434. 

7.  V.  Eegnault.  Eecherches  relatives  a Faction  de  la  vapeur 
d’eau  a une  haute  temperature  sur  les  m6taux.  (Osmium, 
p.  366;  other  platinum  metals,  p.  368.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Eh. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  62  (1836),  337 ; Ann.  des  mines  [3],  11  (1837),  3;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  10  (1837),  139;  J.  de  pharm.  23  (1837),  185. 


64 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1836:  8.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  eine  sehr  leichte  Darstellung 
von  Platinschwarz.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  17  (1836),  67;  Bibl.  univ.  3 (1836),  396;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1836,  255;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  21  (1838),  64;  Ann.  des  mines 
[3],  11  (1837),  272;  Berzelius  Jsb.  1 (1838),  110. 

1836:  9.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Platinmohr.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  37  (1836),  548;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  9 (1836),  544; 
10  (1837),  154;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1836,  427;  J.  de  pharm.  July  (1836); 
Berzelius  Jsb.  1 (1838),  184. 

1836:  10.  W.  C.  Henry.  On  gaseous  interference  (with  water- 
forming action  of  platinum).  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  9 (1836),  324;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  23  (1837),  140;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  39  (1836),  385;  Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  (1836),  311; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  9 (1836),  347;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1837,  154. 

1836:  11.  C.  F.  Mohr.  Ueber  die  Herstellung  der  Ziindkraft  des 

Platinschwammchen.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  18  (1836),  55;  Berzelius  Jsb.  1 (1838),  110. 

1836:  12.  A.  F.  E.  Degen.  Versuche  fiber  die  Netzbarkeit  der 
Oberflache  verschiedener  Korper.  (Absorption  of  gases  by 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  38  (1836),  449;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1836,  695. 

1836:  13.  A.  F.  E.  Degen.  Wasserbildendefahigkeit  des  Platins. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  38  (1836),  454;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1836,  698.  Pt. 

1836:  14.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Zur  Chemie  des  Platins  in  wissen- 
schaftlicher  und  technischer  Beziehung.  Stuttgart,  1836.  Pt. 
Bibl.  univ.  7 (1837),  411. 

1836:  15.  J.  B.  Trommsdorff.  Kritik  von  J.  W.  Dobereiner’ s 
“Zur  Chemie  des  Platins.”  Pt. 

Ana.  Chem.  (Liebig),  18  (1836),  105.  . 

1836:  16.  J.  Pelouze.  Note  sur  la  fabrication  du  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  3 (1836),  421;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  62  (1836),  443;  J.  Frank.  Inst. 
[2],  20  (1837),  53;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  63  (1837),  281. 

1836:  17.  J.  von  Liebig.  (Short  note  on  preparation  of  platinum.) 

J.  chim.  med.  [2],  2 (1836),  581.  Pt. 

1836:  18.  J.  von  Liebig.  (Malleable  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  62  (1836),  443;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  11  (1837),  276. 

1836:  19.  C.  S.  M.  Pouillet.  Recherches  sur  les  hautes  tempe- 
ratures. (Specific  heat  of  platinum  from  100°  to  1,200°.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  3 (1836),  782;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  39  (1836),  571;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1837,  274. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


65 


1836: 

1837: 

1837: 

1837: 

1837: 

1837 

1837 

1837 


20.  — - (Alloys  which  may  be  substituted  for  platinum 

on  lightning  rods.)  Pt. 

J.  des  connais.  us.  et  pract.  Sept.  (1835);  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  17  (1836), 
427. 

1.  M.  Pettenkoffer.  (Very  general  occurrence  of  plati- 
num, as  in  all  silver  coins.)  Pt. 

Rep.  fur  Pharm.  (Buchner),  47  (1837),  72. 

2.  P.  N.  Johnson  and  W.  A.  Lampadius.  Ueber  brazilian- 
isches  Palladgold  und  dessen  Ausbringen  und  Scheidung.  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  10  (1837),  501;  11  (1837),  309;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  13 
(1838),  713;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  68  (1838),  153;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  29  (1846), 
130;  J.  Frank.  Soc.  [2],  19  (1837),  7;  (from  “Mining  J.”);  Berzelius 
Jsb.  18  (1839),  145,  214. 

3.  G.  F.  C.  Frick.  Ueber  die  Scheidung  des  Iridiums  zum 

technischen  Gebrauch  im  Grossen,  aus  den  R ticks  tanden  von 
der  Scheidung  des  Platins  in  Petersburg.  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  40  (1837),  209;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  13  (1838), 
488;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  24  (1837),  205;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  11  (1837), 
71;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  64  (1837),  373;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1837,  545; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  18  (1839),  139. 

4.  L.  R.  von  Fellenberg.  Neue  Methode  zur  Auflosung 

des  Indiums — mit  Berichtigung  (by  fusion  with  sulphur  and 
alkaline  carbonates).  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  41  (1837),  210;  44  (1838),  220;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  24  (1837),  207;  28  (1838),  238;  Bibl.  univ.  9 (1837),  425;  15 
(1838),  193;  J.  de  pharm.  23  (1837),  571;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  12  (1837), 
353;  15  (1838),  446;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  13  (1838),  480;  15  (1839),  446; 
Phil.  Mag.  [3],  12  (1838),  141;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1837,  544;  1838,  686; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  18  (1839),  142;  19  (1840),  225. 

5.  R.  W.  Bunsen.  Notiz  liber  die  Schmelzbarkeit  des  Iridi- 
ums. (Mit  Kohle  vor  dem  Knallgeblase.)  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  41 -(1837),  207;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  24  (1837), 
205;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  13  (1838),  479;  Bibl.  uriv.  12  (1837),  422; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1837,  543;  Berzelius  Jsb.  18  (1839),  144. 

6.  J.  F.  Simon.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  des  Arseniks  und 

seiner  Verbindungen.  (Arsenigsaures  Platinoxyd-Ammoniak, 
p.  444.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  40  (183?),  411;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  23  (,l83/), 
271;  Pharm.  Centr.  1837,  410. 

7.  C.  Rammelsberg.  Ueber  die  einfachen  und  doppelten 

Cyanmetalle.  (Platinum  cyanides,  p.  136;  palladium  cyanides, 
p.  137;  iridium  cyanides,  p.  139.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  42  (i837),  111;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  28  (1838), 
216;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1838,  39;  Berzelius  Jsb.  L8  (1839),  163. 
109733°— 19— Bull.  694 5 


66 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1837:  8.  J.  yon  Liebig.  Ueber  die  Aethertheorie,  in  besonderer 
Riicksicht  auf  die  vorhergehends  Abhandlung  Zeise’s  (uber 
entzundhches  Platinchlorid).  (Cf.  1836:5.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  23  (1837),  12;  J.  de  pharm.  24  (1838),  6;  Berze- 
lius Jsb.  18  (1839),  199. 

1837:  9.  G.  J.  Mulder.  Over  de  eigenschappen  en  de  zamenstei- 
ling  van  eenige  Oenanthaten.  (Platinum  oenanthate.)  Pt. 

Natuur-  en  Scheikundig  Archief  (Mulder),  5 (1837),  235. 

1837:  10.  F.  X.  Hindl.  Ueber  die  Probe  von  platinhaitenden 
Gold-  und  Silberlegirungen.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  10  (1837),  167. 

1837:  11.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  Iridiumamalgam.  Ir. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  12  (1837),  352  (from  Bottger,  Beitrage  zur  Phvsik  und 
Chemie,  p.  103);  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1838,  26;  Berzelius  Jsb.  i8  (1839), 
149. 

1838:  1.  G.  Aime.  Mineral  de  plomb  sulfure  d’ Alger.  (Contain- 
ing trace  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  7 (1838),  246. 

1838:  2.  A.  de  la  Rive.  Sur  Loxidation  du  platine,  et  la  tlieorie 
chimique  de  relectricite  voltaique.  Pt. 

C.  R.  7 (1838),  1061;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  46  (1839),  489;  L’Institut,  6 
(1838),  414;  Berzelius  Jsb.  19  (1840),  141. 

1838:  3.  F.  Dobereiner.  Darstellung  eines  moglichst  reinen  Pla- 
tin-salmiaks  aus  Platinerzlosung.  Pt. 

Archiv  der  Pharm.  14  (1838),  274;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  28  (1838),  238; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1838,  602. 

1838:  4.  E.  Biewend.  Analyse  des  Rhodiumcbloridnatriums,  und 
liber  eine  neue  Rhodium- verbindung.  (Aetherrhodiumchlo- 
ridnatrium.)  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  15  (1838),  126;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1838,  925;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  19  (1840),  268. 

1838:  5.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Platinchlorid  (resp.  Platinoxyd)  und 
Schwefligesaure.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  15  (1838),  315;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1839,- 175;  J.  chim. 
med.  [2],  6 (1840),  318  (separ.  Pt  and  Cu);  Berzelius  Jsb.  19  (1840), 
273. 

1838:  6.  J.  Gros.  Recherches  sur  une  serie  nouvelle  de  sels  de 
platine.  (Platinum-ammonium  base.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  69  (1838),  204;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  27  (1838),  241; 
Ann.  des  mines  [3],  15  (1839),  443;  Arab.  phys.  Kemi,  1839,  258; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1838,  819;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  18  (1841),  284;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  19  (1840),  269. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


67 


1838:  7.  R.  J.  Kane.  Ueber  die  Zusammensetzung  einiger  Queck- 
silberverbindungen  und  Ammoniakdoppelsalze.  (Platin- 

ammonium  compounds.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  26  (1838),  201. 

1838:  8.  W.  C.  Zeise.  Om  Acechlorplatin,  med  bemaerkninger 
over  nogle  andre  producter  af  virkningen  mellem  Platinchlorid 
og  Acetone.  Pt. 

Afhandl.  Danske  Yid.  Selsk.  [4],  8 (1841),  171;  Oversigt  Danske  Vid. 
'Selsk.  1838,  3;  1839,  11;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  72  (1839),  113;  Ann.  der 
Phys.  (Pogg.),  45  (1838),  332;  47  (1839),  478;  Erganz.  Bd.  2 (1842),  155, 
312;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  20  (1840),  193;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  33  (1840),  29; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1839,  43;  1840,  66,  81;  Phil.  Mag.  [33,  14  (1839),  84; 
Ann.  of  Elect.  (Sturgeon),  3 (1839),  488;  Berzelius  Jsb.  19  (1840), 
603;  20  (1841),  88,  521. 

1838:  9.  W.  H.  Ellet.  New  mode  of  obtaining  osmium.  Os 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  21  (1838),  384. 

1838:  10.  H.  Reinsch.  Ueber  das  FaUungsverhaltniss  der  wich- 
tigern  Metalle  gegen  Schwefelwasserstoffgas  aus  ihren  mit 


Hydrochlorsaure  angesauerten  Losungen.  (Platin,  p.  132.) 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  13  (1838),  132.  Pt. 

1838:  11.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  Sur  l’essai  des  soudes  iodurees.  (Use 
of  palladium  salts  for  the  determination  of  iodine  in  varec 
soda.)  Pd. 

J.  chim.  m6d.  [2],  4 (1838),  349;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1839,  80. 

1838:  12.  R.  Hare.  Notice  respecting  the  fusion  of  platina.  Pt. 


Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  33  (1838),  195;  35  (1839),  328;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  28  (1839), 
352;  Bibl.  univ.  13  (1838),  200;  17  (1838),  393;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  13 
(1838),  479;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  16  (1839),  512;  19  (1840),  180;  Ann.  der 
Phys.  (Pogg.),  46  (1839),  512;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  15  (1839),  487;  Ann.  of 
Elect.  (Sturgeon),  4 (1839),  70. 

1838:  13.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Einige  Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Er- 
fahrungen  Hartley’s  in  Betreff  des  Eisens.  (Platin-Eisen  Le- 
girung,  p.  17.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  43  (1838),  13;  Bibl.  univ.  13  (1838),  164;  J. 
prakt.  Chem.  14  (1838),  315;  Berzelius  Jsb.  19  (1840),  223. 

1838:  14.  R.  Bottger.  Licht  und  Warmeentwicklung  beim  Ver- 
binden  des  Zinks  und  Cadmiums  mit  dem  Platin.  Pt. 

Bottger,  Beitrag,  126;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1838,  128. 

1838:  15.  R.  Bottger.  Auf  welchem  Wege  lassen  sich  hochst- 
glanzende  Lichterscheinungen  bei  der  Vereinigung  gewisser 
Metalle  mit  Chlor  hervorrufen?  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  43  (1838),  660;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1838,  912. 


68 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1838:  16.  E.  Melly.  Note  sur  quelques  experiences  entreprises 
dans  le  but  d’appliquer  le  platine  sur  d’autres  metaux.  Pt. 

Bibl.  univ.  16  (1838),  375;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  16  (1839),  232;  Ann.  des  mines 
[4],  2 (1842),  228;  J.  chim.  med.  [2],  4 (1838),  569;  Berzelius  Jsb.  20 
(1841),  87;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  2 (1848-50),  95. 

1838:  17.  F.  Kuhlmann.  Note  sur  plusieurs  reactions  nouvelles 
determinees  par  l’eponge  de  platine,  et  considerations  sur  les 
services  que  cette  substance  est  appelee  a rendre  a la  science. 

Pt. 

C.  R.  7 (1838),  1107;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  15  (1839),  441;  J.  prakt.  Chem. 
16  (1839),  480;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  25  (1840),  135;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  37 
(1839),  198;  L’Institut,  No.  261-262,  496;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1839,  237; 
Phil.  Mag.  [3],  14  (1839),  157;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  73  (1839),  60;  Ann.  of 
Elect.  (Sturgeon),  4 (1839  -40),  157;  Berzelius  Jsb.  19  (1840),  178. 

1838:  18.  Musler.  (Remarks  on  Kuhlmann  Js  communication  on 
platinum  sponge,  referring  to  Berzelius:  Chemie,  ii,  pp.  43, 
44.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  7 (1838),  1162. 

1838:  19.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Observations  sur  le  role  electromoteur 
de  quelques  peroxides  metalliques,  du  platine  et  du  fer  passif. 

Bibl.  univ.  14  (1838),  150;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  43  (1838),  89.  Pt. 

1838:  20.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Letter  to  Mr.  Faraday  on  the  mutual 
voltaic  relations  of  certain  peroxides,  platina,  and  inactive 
iron.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  12  (1838),  225. 

1838:  21.  T.  Andrews.  On  the  action  of  nitric  acid  on  bismuth 
and  other  metals.  (Passive  state  in  bismuth  induced  by  con- 
tact with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  12  (1838),  305;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  45  (1838),  121;  Ber- 
zelius Jsb.  19  (1840),  222. 

1838:  22.  A.  Gaudin.  Note  sur  Papplication  de  la  lumiere  Drum- 
mond a Peclairage  public  et  prive.  (Properties  of  the  alloy 
of  platinum  and  iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  6 (1838),  862;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  16^1839),  55. 

1838:  23.  J.  W.  Dobereixer.  Wirkung  von  Iridosmium  -zur  In- 
duction der  Warme  in  Fliissigkeiten,  und  zur  Losung  des 
Zinnes  u.  s.  w.  Ir,  Os. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  15  (1838),  319;  Berzelius  Jsb.  19  (1840),  224. 

1838:  24.  G.  Bird.  Observations  on  some  peculiar  properties 
acquired  by  plates  of  platina  which  have  been  used  as  elec- 
trodes of  a voltaic  battery.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  13  (1838),  379. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


69 


1838: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 

1839: 


25.  C.  Matteucci.  (Polarization  of  platinum  electrodes.) 
L’Institut,  ; Phil.  Mag.  [3],  13  (1838),  469.  Pt. 

1.  G.  Rose.  Ueber  das  urspriingliche  Vorkommen  des  Golde3 

und  des  Platins  im  Ural.  Pt. 

Ber.  Acad.  Berlin,  1839,  265. 

2.  L.  Horner.  Verslag  van  een  geologish  onderzoek  van  het 

zuid-oostelijke  gedeelte  van  Borneo.  (Occurrence  and  work- 
ing of  platinum,  p.  Ill  and  following.)  Pt. 

Yerh.  Batav.  Genoot.  Kunst  Wetensch.  17,  ii  (1839),  89;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  55  (1842),  526;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  3 (1843),  850;  Edinb.  N. 
PhiL  J.  33  (1842),  284;  Bibl.  univ.  43  (1843),  195;  Berg-  und  Hiitten. 
Ztg.  1 (1842),  195;  Berzelius  Jsb.  23  (1844),  273. 

3.  F.  Wohler.  Osmium-Iridium  in  verarbeitetem  Gold. 

Os,  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  29  (1839),  336;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  17  (1840),  672; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1839,  590;  Bibl.  univ.  22  (1839),  398. 

4.  F.  J.  Malaguti.  Action  du  chlore  sur  plusieurs  sub- 

stances 6therees  et  sur  le  methylal.  (Theory  of  Zeise’s 
acechlorplatin.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  70  (1839),  337;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  32  (1839),  15; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  18  (1839),  27;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1839,  593. 

5.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Analyse  des  Meerschaums.  (Plati- 
num sponge  and  meerschaum  for  crucibles.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  17  (1839),  158. 

6.  Geiseler.  Ueber  die  Benutzung  des  brennenden  Was- 

serstoffgases  als  Lothrohrflamme.  (Platinum  glows  bril- 
liantly.) Pt. 

Arch,  der  Pharm.  [2],  17  (1839),  144;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1839,  189. 

7.  F.  Kuhlmann.  Travail  relatif  aux  proprietes  du  platine 

divise,  et  aux  phenomenes  de  V etherification.  Pt. 

C.  R.  9 (1839),  496;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  19  (1840),  50. 

8.  M.  Martens.  Sur  les  produits  de  la  combustion  lente  de 

Palcool  et  de  Tether  autour  du  fils  de  platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  Bruxelles,  6,  i (1839),  95;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  18  (1839), 
372. 

9.  W.  R.  Grove.  On  voltaic  series  and  the  combination  of 

gases  by  platinum.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  14  (1839),  127;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  67  (1839),  132. 

10.  W.  R.  Grove.  On  a new  voltaic  battery.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  14  (1839),  287;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  69  (1840),  600. 

11.  J.  B.  On  the  polarized  condition  of  platinum  electrodes 

and  the  theory  of  secondary  piles.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  14  (1839),  446. 


70 

1839: 

1840: 

1840: 

1840: 

1840: 

1840: 

1840: 

1840: 

1840: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

12.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Notice  on  some  peculiar  voltaic 
arrangements.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  15  (1839),  136;  Ann.  of  Elect.  (Sturgeon),  7 (1841),  285. 

а.  Koltovsky.  (Platinum  mines  in  the  district  of  Goro- 
blagodat.) 

Mining  J.,  1840,  i,  227;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  17  (1840),  227. 

1.  A.  Breithaupt.  Beitrage  zur  naheren  Kenntniss  einiger 

Kiese  und  der  Kies  bildenden  Metalle,  auch  neue  Isomorphie 
(Iridosmin).  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  51  (1840),  513. 

2.  Y.  A.  Jacquelain.  Observations  relatives  a la  cristallisa- 

tion  du  platine.  Modifications  apportees  dans  Tart  de  travail- 
ler  ce  metal.  Pt. 

C.  R.  11  (1840),  204;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  74  (1840),  213;  Ann.  des  mines 
[3],  19  (1841),  545;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  40  (1841),  289;  J.  prakt.  Chem. 
22  (1841),  22;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  78  (1840),  48;  89  (1842),  159;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  21  (1842),  103. 

3.  L.  R.  von  Fellenberg.  Ueber  die  Zersetzung  der  Schwe- 

felmetalle  durch  Chlorgas.  (Rhodium  sulphide,  p.  63;  palla- 
dium sulphide,  p.  65;  iridium  sulphide,  p.  66;  platinum 
sulphide,  p.  70.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  50  (1840),  61;  Berzelius  Jsb.  21  (1842),  91. 

4.  H.  D.  Rogers  and  M.  H.  Boye.  Upon  a new  compound  of 

the  deutochloride  of  platinum,  nitric  oxide,  and  hydrochloric 
acid.  (Aqua  regia  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  38  (1840),  186;  39  (1840),  369;  Trans.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc. 
7 (1841),  59;  Ann.  Chem.  (Leibig),  40  (1841),  289;  Berzelius  Jsb.  21 
(1842),  138;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  26  (1842),  150;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847,  319; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1842,  749;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  17  (1840),  397. 

5.  J.  Reiset.  Observations  sur  une  combinaison  nouvelle  de 

chlorure  de  platine  etc.  d;  ammoniaque,  consideree  comme  le 
radical  des  sels  de  Gros.  Pt. 

C.  R,  10  (1840),  870;  11  (1840),  711;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  36  (1840), 
111;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  20  (1840),  500;  Ann.  des  mines  [3],  19  (1841),  546; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  21  (1842),  104. 

б.  Parisot.  (Reduction  of  platinum  from  potassium  platini- 

chloride.)  Pt. 

J.  chim.  m6d.  Apr.  (1840);  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  77  (1840),  396. 

7.  F.  Hofer.  Observations  et  recherches  experiment  ales 
sur  le  platine  considere  comme  agent  physiologique  et  thera- 
peutique.  (Less  poisonous  than  gold;  useful  in  syphilis.)  Pt. 
Gaz.  medicale  (1840),  No.  48;  J.  de  Pharm.  27  (1841),  213;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 
1841,  111;  J.  chim.  m6d.  [2J,  8 (1842),  380. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


71 


1840:  8.  R.  Hare.  Exhibition  of  fused  platinum  at  meeting  of  the 
American  Philosophical  Society.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  38  (1840),  155,  163. 

1840:  9.  R.  Bottger.  Einige  neue  auf  die  Vergoldung  und 
Verplatinirung  der  Metalle  durch  Galvanismus  Bezug  habende 
Erfahrungen.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  35  (1840),  350;  Berzelius  Jsb.  21  (1842),  111, 

1840:  10.  [N.  W.  ?]  Fischer.  Platinum  wire  for  musical  instru- 
ments. Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  25  (1840),  359;  froip  Mech.  Mag.  and  Atheneum. 

1840:  11. — Uses  of  palladium.  Pd. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [2],  25  (1840),  201;  from  Lond.  J.  Arts  Sci. 

1840:  12.  V.  Regnault.  Recherches  sur  le  chaleur  specifique  des 
corps  simples  et  composes.  (Specific  heat  of  platinum,  73: 
45;  9:  345;  palladium,  73:  47;  iridium,  73:  53.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  73  (1840),  5;  [3],  9 (1843),  322;  Ann.  Chem.  Liebig),  36 
(1840),  108;  52  (1844),  170;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  51  (1840),  44,  221, 
223,236;  62  (1844),  74. 

1840:  13.  M.  H.  Jacobi.  Mesure  comparative  de  Taction  de  deux 
couples  voltai'ques,  Tun  cuivre-zinc,  T autre  platine-zinc.  Pt. 

Bull.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  6 (1840),  368;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  50 
(1840),  510;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  17  (1840),  241;  C.  R.  11  (1840),  1058. 

1840:  14.  A.  Smee.  On  the  galvanic  properties  of  the  metallic 
elementary  bodies.  (Plating  platinum  plates  with  plati- 
num.) Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  16  (1840),  315;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  61  (1844),  593; 
Proc.  Elect.  Soc.  London,  1837-40,  202. 

1841 : a.  Helmersen.  Reise  nach  dem  Ural  und  der  Kirgisensteppe. 

Beitrage  der  russischen  Reiches,  pp.  87,  105,  182,  205,  212.  Pt. 

1841:  1.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Platin  in  dem  goldhaltigen  Sande  des 
Rheins.  Pt. 

Archiv  der  Pharm.  25  (1841),  57;  Ann.  des  mines  [4]  3 (1843),  850;  Berze- 
lius Jsb.  22  (1843),  199;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  8 (1844),  72;  Edinb.  N.  Phil. 
J.  34  (1843),  184. 

1841 : 2.  F.  D.  H.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  und  die  Abscheidung  des 
Platins  in  dem  goldhaltigen  Rheinsande.  Pt. 

Archiv  der  Pharm.  25  (1841),  37. 

1841:  3.  R.  Hermann.  Ueber  Ural-Orthit  und  Irit,  zwei  neue 
Miner  alien.  Ir,  Os. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  23  (1841),  273;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22  (1843),  191;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1 49,  734;  1860,  742;  Kenngott,  Mineral.  Untersuchungen,  Heft  1,  61; 
Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  1 (1842),  897;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  3 (1843),  852. 


72 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1841:  4.  Quantites  de  . . . platin  exploit6es  en  Russie 

en  1840.  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  de  Russie,  1841,  424;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  5 (1844), 
620. 

1841:  5.  G.  Rose.  Ueber  die  Dimorphie  des  Iridiums.  Ir. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  54  (1841),  537;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22  (1843),  110; 
Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  1 (1842),  161. 

1841:  6.  T.  G.  Tilley.  Ueber  die  angebliche  Verwandlung  von 
Rhodium  in  Eisen.  Rh. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  39  (1841),  321. 

1841:  7.  G.  C.  Wittstein.  (Preparation  of  the  oxide  of  platinum.) 

Pt. 

Repert.  fur  Pharm.  (Buchner),  24  (1841),  45;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  44 
(1842),  276;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  2 (1842),  229;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1842, 
190;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22  (1843),  109. 

1841:  8.  A.  Delarive.  Nouvelles  recherches  sur  les  proprietes  des 
courants  electriques  discontinues.  (Oxidation  of  platinum.) 

Pt. 

Archives  de  l’electr.  1 (1841),  175;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  54  (1841),  378. 
Ann.  of  Elect.  (Sturgeon),  9 (1842),  91. 

1841:  9.  C.  Rammelsberg.  Ueber  die  bromsaure  Salze.  (Plati- 
num salts  exist  only  in  solution.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1841,  326;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  55  (1842),  86; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  24  (1841),  285;  25  (1842),  225;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22  (1843), 
142. 

1841:  10.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Ueber  die  neuen  platihaltigen  Salz- 
basen  (auch  Entdeckung  von  Reiset  privatim  mitgetheilt).  Pt. 
Berzelius  Jsb.  21  (1842),  105;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  38  (1841),  358; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1841,  804. 

1841:  11.  R.  [J.?]  Kane.  Abstract  of  the  history  of  a new  class  of 
platina-salts  discovered  by  M.  Gros.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  18  (1841),  293;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22  (1843),  108. 

1841:  12.  H.  Fehling.  Ueber  einige  Verbindungen  der  Palladium 
Haloide  mit  Ammoniak.  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  39  (1841),  110;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  20  (1842),  34;  Pharm*, 
Centrbl.  1841,  605;  Berzelius. Jsb.  22  (1843),  153. 

1841:  13.  Kemp.  (Separation  of  gold  from  platinum  by  oxalic 
acid.)  Pt. 

Repert.  fiir  Pharm.  (Buchner),  24  (1841),  235;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  2 
(1842),  230;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1841,  943. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


73 


1841:  14.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  die  Reduction  platinhaltiger  Fliis- 
sigkeiten  und  Salze  mittelst  Zink.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  37  (1841),  116;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  2 (1842),  229; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1841,  95;  Bibl.  univ.  35  (1841),  405;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22 
(1843),  107. 

1841 : 15.  C.  On  the  manufacture  of  platinum  (by  electricity).  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [3],  18  (1841),  442;  Bibl.  univ.  36  (1841),  199. 

1841:  16.  E.  Biewend.  Schweissbarkeit  des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  23  (1841),  248;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  40  (1841),  290; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1841,  478;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22  (1843),  110. 

1841:  17.  R.  Bottger.  Neue,  einfache  Methode,  Kupfer  und 
Messing  auf  sogenannten  nassen  Wege  mit  Platin  zu  iiber- 
ziehen.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  39  (1841),  175. 

1841:  18.  N.  W.  Fisher.  Ueber  das  Verhaltniss  der  Warmeleitung 
von  Kupfer,  Eisen,  und  Platin.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg),  52  (1841),  632. 

1841 : 19.  H.  Elkington.  Improvement  in  plating  with  platinum. 

Lond.  J.  Arts  Sci.  May  (1841);  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  2 (1841),  408.  Pt. 

1841:  20.  E.  J.  Johnson.  On  the  application  of  native  alloy  for 
compass  pivots.  (Iridosmium.)  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  of  Elect.  (Sturgeon),  6 (1841),  64;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  79  (1841),  79; 
The  Athenaeum,  No.  678. 

1841:  21.  M.  H.  Jacobi.  Sur  les  remarques  de  M.  Becquerel  rela- 
tives a ma  mesure  comparative  de  Paction  de  deux  couples 
voltaiques,  Pun  cuivre-zinc,  Pautre  platine-zinc.  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  8 (1841),  262;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  53 
(1841),  336;  Ann.  of  Elect.  (Sturgeon),  8 (1842),  18;  Proc.  Elect.  Soc. 
London,  1843,  35. 

1841:  22.  J.  C.  Poggendorff.  Giebt  es  galvanische  Ketten  ohne 
primitive  chemische  Action?  Pt. 

Ber.  Acad.  Berlin,  1841,  312;  Arch,  de  l’elect.  3 (1843),  117;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  25  (1842),  177;  J.  de  pharm.  1 (1842),  385;  Ann.  of  Elect. 
(Sturgeon),  9 (1842),  143;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  54  (1841),  353. 

1842:  1.  G.  Rose.  Mineralogisch-geognostische  Reise  nach  dem 
Ural.  (Gold  and  platinum  production  of  Russia  for  1841, 
2, 434.)  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hutten.  Ztg.  1 (1842),  701;  Berzelius  Jsb.  22  (1844),  273. 

1842:  2.  J.  Menge.  Nachricht  fiber  einen  mineralogischen  Ausflug 
in  das  Uralgebirge.  Pt. 

Schriften  Min.  Gesell.  St.  Petersb.  1 (1842),  105. 


74 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OP  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1842:  3.  Geschichte  und  wissenschaftliche  Beschaftigungen 

der  Gesellschaft.  (Contains  many  references  to  platinum: 
I.  W.  Below,  discoverer  of  platinum  in  Ural  Mountains  in  1825, 
p.  cxxxvi;  A.  N.  Demidow,  platinum  from  his  mines,  pp.  lxxiv, 


cxxxiii.)  Pt. 

Schriften  Min.  Gesell.  St.  Petersb.  1 (1842),  1. 

1842:  3a.  Lubarsky.  The  Ural  platinum  in  nature.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  8 (1842),  158. 

1842:  3b.  Sivkof.  Geognostic  description  of  certain  regions  of  the 
district  of  Gorohlagodat  studied  from  1834  to  1835.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  8,  iii  (1842),  225. 

1842:  3c.  Koltovsky.  Mines  of  Messrs.  Demidoff  in  the  district 
of  Nijni-Tagilsk.  (1846:  lb?)  Pt. 

Mining  J.  8 (1842),  272. 

1842:  4. [Platinausbeute  Russlands  1842.]  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Htitten.  Ztg.  1 (1842),  835. 

1842:  5.  Vorkommen  und  Verbreitung  der  Metalle  auf  der 

Erdoberflache.  (Platinum,  p.  9.)  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hutten.  Ztg.  1 (1842),  2. 


1842:  6.  L.  F.  Svanberg.  Om  nagra  mineralier  samt  om  platina- 
malmens  sammansattning.  (Composition  of  platinum  ore.) 

Pt. 

Forhandl.  Skand.  Naturforskare,  3 (1842),  505;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  31  (1844), 
169;  Berzelius  Jsb.23(1844),  273;  Berg-  und  Hutten.  Ztg.  3 (1844),  472. 

1842:  6a.  Minchin.  Chemical  analyses  of  the  different  kinds  of 
platinum  from  the  Urals.  Pt. 

Trans.  Min.  Soc.  St.  Petersburg,  1842,  ii,  101. 

1842:  7.  G.  Rose.  Ueber  die  Dimorphie  des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  55  (1842),  329;  Berzelius  Jsb.  23  (1844),  121; 
Berg-  und  Hutten.  Ztg.  1 (1842),  439. 

1842:  8.  R.  [J.  ?]  Kane.  Contributions  to  the  chemical  history  of 
palladium  and  platinum.  (Palladium  oxide,  p.  276;  chlorides, 
280;  sulphates,  287;  nitrates,  292;  oxalates,  297;  platinum 
chloride,  298;  pla  tin  ammonium  compounds,  299.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  132  (1842),  275;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  8 (1845),  231; 
Phil.  Mag.  [3],  21  (1842),  50;  Berzelius  Jsb.  24  (1844),  146,231,238; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1844,  737,  741. 

1842:  9.  A.  Litton  and  G.  H.  E.  Schnedermann.  LTeber  ein  neues 
Platinoxydul-Doppelsalz.  (Double  sulphite  of  platinum  and 
sodium.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  42  (1842),  316;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  44  (1843),  274; 
Ann.  des  mines  [4],  5 (1844),  446;  J.  de  pharm.  2 (1842),  248;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  23  (1844),  221. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


75 


1842:  10.  W.  Knop.  Ueber  eine  neue  Platinverbindung.  (Potas- 
sium platinocyanide,  copper  red  salt.  “Also  discovered  by 
Erdmann.”)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  42  (1842),  110;  43,  111;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  5 
(1844),  446;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1842,  542,  678;  1843,  192;  J.  de  pharm. 
2 (1842),  328;  Berzelius  Jsb.  23  (1844),  219. 

1842:  11.  C.  Himly.  Vorlaufige  Notiz  einer  neuen  Methode,  die 
Metalle  aus  ihren  Auflosungen  als  Schwefelmetalle  abzusclieiden 
und  von  einander  zu  trennen.  (Action  of  sodium  thiosulphate 
on  potassium  platiniehloride,  p.  152.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  43  (1842),  150;  J.  de  pharm.  2 (1842),  430. 

1842:  12.  It.  W.  Bunsen.  On  a new  class  of  cacodyl  compounds 
containing  platinum.  Pt. 

Mem.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1842),  63;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  20  (1842),  395. 

1842:  13.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Ueber  die  directe  Oxydirbarkeit  des 
Platins  und  des  Goldes.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  56  (1842),  145,  235;  Archiv.  de  P elect.  2 (1842), 
509;  Ber.  Nat.  Gesell.  Basel,  5 (1843),  21. 

1842:  14.  E.  Millon.  Recherches  sur  I’acide  nitrique.  (Solu- 
bility of  platinum  in  aqua  regia.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  14  (1842),  906. 

1842:  15.  R.  F.  Marchand.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  der  gliihende 
Metalle  auf  das  olbildende  Gas.  (Auf  Platinum  und  Palla- 
dium, p.  490.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  26  (1842),  478;  J.  de  pharm.  3 (1843),  60;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  44  (1842),  277;  Pharm.  Centrabl.  1842,  837. 

1842:  16.  J.  Haidlen  and  C.  R.  Fresenius.  Ueber  die  Anwend- 
ung  des  Cyankaiiums  in  der  chemischen  Analyse.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  43  (1842),  131,  145. 

1842:  17.  R.  Hare.  [Fusion  of  platinum  and  iridium.]  Pt,  Ir. 

Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  2 (1842),  196. 

1843:  1.  A.  von  Humboldt.  Note  sur  le  plus  grand  morceau  de 
platine  trouve  jusqu’ici  h Nijni  Tagenlse.  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [4},  3 (1843),  53;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  46  (1844),  212. 

1843:  2. Ein  neues  Stuck  gediegenes  Platina.  (23  pounds.) 

Bergm.  J.  1843,  119;  Berg-  und  Hutten.  Ztg.  5 (1846),  590.  Pt. 

1843:  3.  Weinlig.  Das  Vorkommen  von  Osmium-Iridium  in 
verarbeiteten  Golde.  Os,  Ir. 

Pharm.  Centrbl.  1843,  207. 


76 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OP  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1843:  4.  Ueber  die  in  den  uralischen  Hutten  in  der  ersten, 

Halfte  von  1843  gewonnene  Masse  von  Gold  und  Platina. 

Bergm.  J.  1843,  119;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  5 (1846),  585.  Pt. 

1843:  5.  J.  L.  L[assaigne].  Extraction  du  palladium  au  Bresil. 

Pd. 

Echo  du  monde  savant, ; J.  chim.  med.  [2],  9(1843),  614;  J.  Frank. 

Inst.  [3],  7 (1844),  255;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  23  (1843),  398;  Edin.  N.  Phil.  J. 
36  (1843),  207. 

1843.  6.  W.  J.  Cock.  On  palladium,  its  extraction,  alloys,  etc. 

Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  (Lond.),  1 (1843),  161;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  49  (1844), 
236;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  6 (1843),  329;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  5 (1844), 
443;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  30  (1843),  20;  J.  de  pharm.  6 (1844),  21;  Phil. 
Mag.  [3],  23  (1843),  16;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  89  (1843),  385;  Rev.  scientif. 
16  (1844),  466;  Chem.  Gaz.  1 (1843),  193;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1843,  159; 
Bibl.  univ.  47  (1843),  382. 

1843:  7.  J.  J.  Berzelius.  Om  Allotropi  hos  enkla  Kroppar 
sasom  en  af  orsakerna  till  isomeri  hos  deras  foreningar. 
(Allotropie  einfacher  Korper  als  eine  der  Ursachen  der  Iso- 
merie  bei  ihren  Verbindungen.)  Ir,  Os,  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

Handl.  Vet.  Acad.  Stockholm,  1843, 1;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  61  (1844), 
11;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  49  (1844),  247;  Scient.  Mem.  (Taylor),  4 
(1846),  240;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1844,  261;  Berzelius  Jsb.  25  (1844),  100. 

1843:  8.  C.  Gerhardt.  Ueber  die  chemische  Classification  der  or- 
ganischen  Substanzen.  (Analysis  of  chlorplatinates  of  quinine, 
strychnine,  and  quinoleine.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  28  (1843),  65. 

1843:  9.  P.  Berthier.  Sur  quel ques  separations  operees  au  moyen 
de  l’acide  sulfureux  ou  des  sulfites  alcalins.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [2],  7 (1843),  74;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  29  (1843),  75;  Ann. 
Chem.  (Liebig),  46  (1843),  182. 

1843:  10.  R.  Bottger.  Warum  versagt  Platinschwamm  so  oft 
seinen  Dienst?  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  47  (1843),  348,  J.  prakt.  Chem.  30  (1843),  272; 
Ann.  des  mines  [4],  5 (1844),  445. 

1843:  11.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Depotenzirende  Wirkung  des  Am- 
moniaks  auf  zundenden  Platinschwamm.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  28  (1843),  165;  Berzelius  Jsb.  24  (1845),  147. 

1843:  12.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Ueber  Glycerin  und  Mannit.  (Ein- 
wirkung  von  Platinschwamm.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  29  (1843),  451. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


77 


1843:  13.  J.  Reiset  and  E.  Millon.  Memoire  sur  les  phenomenes 
chimiques  dus  au  contact.  (Action  of  platinum  sponge  on 
organic  substances  at  high  temperatures.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  16  (1843),  1190;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  8 (1843),  280;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  48  (1843),  199;  Bibl.  univ.  46  (1843),  169;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  29 
(1843),  365;  L’Institut,  No.  493;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1843,  525; Berzelius 
Jsb.  24  (1845),  29. 

1843:  14.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Einige  Beobachtungen  und  Bemer- 
kungen  iiber  den  Einfluss,  den  gewisse  Gasarten  auf  die  Zund- 
kraft  des  Platins  ausliben.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  29  (1843),  238;  Bibl.  univ.  46  (1843),  113;  Berzelius  Jsb. 
24  (1845),  147. 

1843:  15.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  das  Verplatiniren  auf  galvanischen 
Wege.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  30  (1843),  267;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  47  (1843),  342. 

1843:  16.  — Covering  copper  and  brass  with  platinum.  Pt. 

Ann.  of  Chym.  and  Pract.  Pharm.  1843;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  6 (1843),  357. 

1844:  1.  M.  Leplay.  Recherches  geologiques  dans  TOural.  (Oc- 
currence of  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  19  (1844),  853. 

1844:  2.  M.  M.  Kositzky.  Notiz  iiber  das  uralsche  Platin.  (Com- 
position of  ore.)  Pt. 

Verhandl.  Min.  Gesell.  St.  Petersb.  1844,  165. 

1844:  3.  M.  M.  Kositzky.  Ueber  die  Scheidung  des  Iridiums  am 
Miinzhofe  zu  St.  Petersburg.  Ir,  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Os. 

Yerhandl.  Min.  Gesell.  St.  Petersb.  1844,  178. 

1844:  4.  C.  Claus.  Untersuchung  des  Platinruckstandes,  nebst 
vorlaufiger  Ankundigung  eines  neuen  Metalles  (Ruthenium). 
(Atomic  weight  of  Ru  = 104.57.)  * Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P6tersb.  3 (1845),  38,  311,  354;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig), 
56  (1845),  257;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  32  (1844),  479;  34  (1845),  173,  420;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  64  (1845),  192;  65  (1845),  200;  Ann.  des  mines  [4], 
*8  (1845),  234;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  48  (1845),  401;  Berzelius  Jsb.  25  (1846), 
206,  297;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1844,641,646,  858;  1845,353;  Chem.  Gaz. 
3 (1845),  Feb.  1;  J.  de  pharm.  7 (1845),  442;  8 (1845),  381;  Phil.  Mag. 
[3],  27  (1845),  230;  Bibl.  univ.  58  (1845),  387;  Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh. 
Stockholm,  2 (1845) rl I 3 (1846),  61. 

1844:  5.  C.  Claus.  (Chemical  investigation  of  the  residues  of 
Uralian  platinum  and  of  the  new  metal  ruthenium.)  Kazan, 
1844.  (Demidoff  prize  essay.  Title  in  Russian.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

1844:  6.  C.  Claus.  (Fallung  der  Rhodiumlosung  durch  Kalk  und 
durch  borsaures  Natron.)  Rh. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P6tersb.  2 (1843),  158. 


78  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1844:  7.  E.  Fremy.  Recherches  sur  les  acides  metalliques.  (Osmic 
acid.)  Os,  Ir. 

C.  R.  18  (1844),  144;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  12  (1844),  457;  Ann.  des  mine3 
[4],  5 (1844),  448;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  52  (1844),  271;  Amer.  j.  Sci. 
48  (1845),  185;  49,  199;  Berzelius  Jsb.  25  (1845),  203,  232;  J.  de  pharm. 
5 (1844),  188;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  31  (1844),  482;  34  (1845),  303;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1844,  266;  1845,  173;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  92  (1844) , 208 ; Phil. 
Mag.  [3],  24  (1844),  393,  474;  Revue  scient.  3 (1844),  333. 

1844:  8.  E.  Fremy.  Memoire  sur  rosmium.  (Very  full,  including 
atomic  weight  Os  = 199.65.)  Os. 

C.  R.  19  (1844),  468;  J.  de  pharm.  6 (1844),  241;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  33  (1844;, 
407. 

1844:  9.  L.  Schaffner.  Ueber  die  Zusammensetzung  einiger  Hy- 
drate. Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  51  (1844), 168;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1844,  913. 

1844:  10.  T.  Wertheim.  Untersuchung  des  Knoblauchols.  (Plati- 
num and  palladium  compounds.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  51  (1844),  289;  J.  de  pharm.  7 (1845),  174;  Berze- 
lius Jsb.  25  (1816),  639. 

1844:  11.  M.  Peyrone.  De  Faction  de  Fammoniaque  sur  le  proto- 
chlorure  de  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  12  (1844),  193;  L6  (1846),  432;  Ann.  Chem.  (Lie- 
big), 51  (1844),  1;  55  (1845),  205;  J.  de  pharm.  9 (1846),  158;  12  (1847), 
221;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  i844,  769,  784;  1846,  199;  Berzelius  Jsb.  25  (1846), 
215,  242;  26  (1847),  264. 

1844:  12.  J.  Reiset.  Memoire  sur  les  combinaisons  de  deux  nou- 
velles  bases  ale  alines  nontenant  du  platine.  (ReisePs  plat- 
ammonium  base.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  11  (1844),  417;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  33  (1844),  321; 
Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig);  52  (1844),  262;  Ann.  des  mines  (4],  8 (1845),  228; 
C.  R.  18  (1844),  1100;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1845,  113;  Berzelius  Jsb.  25 
(1846),  214,  234. 

1844:  13.  J.  Blyth.  On  the  composition  of  narcotine,  and  some  of 
its  products  of  decomposition  by  the  action  of  bichloride  of 
platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  London,  2 (1844),  163;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  50  (1814), 
29;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  25  (1844),  363. 

1844:  14.  R.  F.  Marchand.  Ueber  das  spec.ifische  Gewicht  der 
Platina.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  33  (1844),  385;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1845,  191. 

1844:  15.  F.  Reich.  Notiz  uber  das  Kohlenoxydgasgeblase 
(Schmelzen  des  Platins).  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  33  (1844),  478. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


79 


1844:  16.  A.  Pleischl.  Ueber  das  Entstehen  der  Blasen  in  Platin- 
gerathschaften.  Pt. 

Arm.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.'),  63  (1844),  111;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1845,  143. 

1844:  17.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Erhohung  der  oxydirenden  Eigen- 
schaften  des  Platinmohrs.  Pt. 

J.  fur  prakt.  Pharm.  9 (1844),  233;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1844,  879;  Berze- 
lius Jsb.  25  (1816),  213. 

1844:  18.  K.  A.  Hirschberg.  Ueber  Anfertigung  der  Platin- 
sehwammchen.  Pt. 

Berliner  Gew.-,  Indust.-  imd  Handelsblatt,  1,  2,  No.  20;  Polyt.  J.  (Ding- 
ier), 94  (1844),  208. 

1844:  19.  J.  C.  Poggendgrff.  Beschreibung  der  Wippe.  (Action 
of  platinized  platinum  plates.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  61  (1844),  593. 

1844:  20.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  den  gewisse 
Gasarten  auf  die  Zundkraft  des  Platins  ausiiben.  Pt. 

Ber.  Verh.  Naturf.  Gesell.  Basel,  6 (1844),  5. 

1844:  21.  G.  Wertheim.  Recherches  sur  Telasticite.  (Elasticity 
of  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  19  (1844),  229;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  12  (1844),  385;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  Erganz.  Bd.  2 (1848),  1. 

1845:  1.  E.  L.  Schubarth.  Ueber  die  vermeintliche  Kenntniss  der 


Alten  von  Platin.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  65  (1845),  621. 

1845:  2.  J.  S.  C.  Schweigger.  Ueber  Platina,  altes  und  neues. 
(History  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  34  (1845),  385. 

1845:  3.  J.  A.  Ueber  den  Platingewinn  in  Russland.  Pt. 

Allgemein.  preuss.  Ztg. ; Berg-  und  Hutten.  Ztg.  4 (1845),  956,  975. 

1845:  4. Gold-  und  Platin aausbeute  am  Ural.  Pt,  etc. 

Bergwerksfreund,  9,  Nr.  6;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1845,  751. 

1845  : 4a.  Lubarsky.  Platinum  mines  in  the  district  of  Tagilsk. 

Mining  J.  11  (1828),  125.  Pt. 


1845:  5.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  die  neuen  Metalle,  welche  von  Prof. 
Osann  in  dem  Platinriickstande  aufgefunden  worden  sind. 
(Polin,  ruthenium,  and  pluran.)  Plu,  Po,  Ru,  Os,  Ir,  Rh,  Pt,  Pd. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  5 (1847),  182;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  38  (1846), 
164;  Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  39  (1845),  199. 


80 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1845:  6.  G.  Osann.  Bemerkungen  liber  den  Aufsatz  des  Herrn 
Prof.  Claus,  die  von  mir  aufgefundenen  neuen  Metalle  in  dem 
Rtickstande  des  uralschen  Platins  betreffend.  (In  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  38,  164.)  Ru,  Plu,  Po. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  64  (1845),  208;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  39  (1846),  111; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1847,  74. 

1845:  7.  G.  Osann.  Analyse  des  in  Salpeter-Salzsaure  unauflosli- 
chen  Riickstands  des  uralschen  Platins. 

Plu,  Po,  Ru,  Os,  Ir,  Rh,  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  64  (1845),  197;  69  (1846),  453;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 
1847,  167.  ” 

1845:  8.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  das  Polin  des  Herrn  Prof.  Osann. 

Ru,  Po,  Plu,  Os,  Ir,  Rh,  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  64  (1845),  622. 

1845:  9.  [E.  Fremy.]  (Claim  of  priority  on  Claus’s  work  on  plati- 
num residues.)  Os. 

J.  de  pharm.  8 (1845),  381;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  27  (1845),  233. 

1845:  10.  G.  G.  Aquilina.  Memoire  sur  l’iode  et  sur  un  nouveau 
reactif  de  ce  corps.  (Iodic  acid  as  a reagent  for  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  chim.  med.  [3],  1 (1845),  682.  (Read  before  Soc.  med.  d’encourag. 
de  Malthe,  Feb.  20,  1845.) 

1845:  11.  E.  Cottereau,  fils.  Note  sur  la  valeur  relative  de 
Tamidon  et  du  chlorure  platinique  employee  comme  reactifs 
de  l’iode  et  des  composes  d’iode.  Pt. 

J.  chim.  med.  [3],  1 (1845),  637;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1846,  63. 

1845:  12.  H.  Kopp.  Specifisches  Yolum  und  specifisches  Gewicht- 
Tabellen.  Pt.  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  34  (1845),  5. 

1845:  13.  L.  Elsner.  Ueber  die  Trennung  des  Goldes  und  Platins 
von  Zinn  und  Arsenik.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  35  (1845),  310;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  98  (1845),  128;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1845,  895;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  4 (1845),  1128. 

1845:  14.  K.  W.  G.  Kastner,  Frei  erhalten  der  Platin-Tiegel, 
-Bleche,  -Loffel,  -Spatel,  und  dergleichen  vom  Beitritt  des 
Silicas  und  des  Eisens.  (Protected  in  a Hessian  crucible  filled 
with  calcium  carbonate.)  Pt. 

Arch,  der  Pharm.  94  (1845),  1;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1845,  800. 

1845:  15.  J.  Weiger.  (Preparation  of  alloys  containing  platinum 
and  palladium  for  dentists.)  (Alloys  of  platinum,  gold,  silver, 
and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

London  J.  of  Arts,  26  (1845),  398;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  97  (1845),  380. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


81 


1845:  16.  J.  W.  Dobereiner.  Neue  Beitrage  zur  Geschichte  der 
chemischen  Dynamik  des  Platins.  (Platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  64  (1845),  94;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  53  (1845), 
145;  J.  de  pharm.  7 (1845),  356;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  [2],  1 (1846),  110; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1845,  350;  Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  179. 

1845:  17.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  On  some  chemical  effects  produced 
by  platinum.  (Platinum  sponge  on  guaiacum,  potassium 
iodide,  potassium  ferrocyanide.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  London,  3 (1845),  17;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  67  (1846), 
233;  Phil.  Mag.  29  (1846),  40. 

1845:  18.  A.  Schrotter.  Modifications  apportees  a certaines  reac_ 
tions  chimiques  par  une  tres-basse  temperature.  (Platinum 
sponge  without  effect  on  knallgas.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  20  (1845),  193;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  64  (1845),  471. 

1845:  19.  P.  Riess.  Ueber  das  Gliihen  und  Schmelzen  von  Metall- 
drahten  durch  Elektricitat.  Pt. 

Abh.  Acad.  Berlin,  1845.  89;  Ber.  Acad.  Berlin,  1845,  185;  Ann.  der 
Phys.  (Pogg.),  65  (1845),  481;  Scientif.  Mem.  (Taylor),  4 (1846),  432; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  1. 

1846:  20.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Ueber  das  Vermogen  mehrerer  gas- 
und  dunst-formige  Korper  zu  polarisiren  und  auf  Iodkalium, 
Cyaneisenkalium,  etc.,  zersetzend  einzuwirken.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  34  (1845),  186;  Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  8. 

1845:  21.  J.  C.  Poggendorff.  [Galvanische  Reihe  in  Cyankalium- 
losung.]  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  66  (1845),  597;  Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  12. 

1846:  1.  R.  I.  Murchison.  Platinum  of  the  Ural  and  Siberia.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  [2],  2 (1846),  120;  from  “ Russia  and  the  Ural.” 

1846:  la.  Golochovsky.  Description  of  newly  discovered  mines 

of  platinum  and  gold.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  8 (1846),  103. 

1846:  lb.  Koltovsky.  Mines  of  Messrs.  Demidoff  in  the  district  of 

Nijni  Tagilsk.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  8 (1846),  272. 

1846:  2.  J.  Fritzsche.  Ueber  eine  vortheilhafte  Methode  der  Auf- 
schliessung  des  Osmium-Iridiums.  Os,  Ir,  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  5 (1847),  186;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  37  (1846),  483; 
J.  de  pharm.  1846,  Sept.;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  29  (1846),  420;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  103  (1847),  155;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  119;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1846,  511;  Berzelius  Jsb.  27  (1848),  129. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 6 


82 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1846:  3.  Schmidt  and  Johnston.  Sur  le  traitement  du  palladium. 

Pd. 

C.  R.  22  (1846),  335;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  11  (1847),  525;  L’Inatitut,  No.  634, 
65;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  98  (1846),  482;  Berg-u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  5(1846), 
793;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  1 (1846-48),  34. 

1846:  4.  G.  Osann.  Platin  im  oxydirten  Zustande.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  67  (1846),  374;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1846,  591. 

1846:  5.  W.  Knop  and  G.  H.  E.  Schnedermann.  Ueber  die  Cyan- 
verbindungen  des  Platins.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  37  (1846),  461;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  64  (1847),  300; 
J.  de  pharm.  10  (1846),  223;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1846,  633;  Berzelius  Jsb. 
27  (1848),  192. 

1846:  6.  W.  Haidinger.  Merkwiirdige  Farbenvertheilung  am  Cyan- 
platinmagnesium.  Pt. 

Haidinger  Ber.  1 (1846),  3;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  68  (1846),  302. 

1846:  7.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  die  chemischen  Verhaltnisbe  des  Ruthe- 
niums, verglichen  mit  denen  des  Iridiums.  Ru,  Ir. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  5 (1847),  241;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  59 
(1846),  234;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  11  (1847),  526;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  39 
(1846),  88;  J.  de  pharm.  11  (1847),  76,  137;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  29  (1846), 
556;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1846,  817;  Berzelius  Jsb.  27  (1848),  116  (with 
criticism  by  Berzelius),  132. 

1846:  8.  C.  Claus.  Test  for  ruthenium.  (Fusion  with  saltpeter 
and  potash.)  Ru. 

The  Chemist,  1846,  Jan.  1;  Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  [2],  2 (1846),  111. 

1846:  9.  L.  F.  Svanberg.  (Osmic  acid.)  Os. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forhand.  3 (1846),  36;  Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  181. 

1846:  10.  J.  Fritzsche  and  H.  Struve.  Ueber  die  Osman- 
osmium-saure.  Os. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P^tersb.  6 (1848),  81;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  64  (1847), 
263;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  15  (1849),  149;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  12  (1847),  304 
(with  Gerhardt’s  comments);  J.  prakt.  Chem.  41  (1847),  97;  Phil.  Mag. 
[3],  31  (1847),  534;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1847,  385;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  461; 
Rapp.  Ann.  (Berzelius),  1847,  92;  L’lnstitut,  17  (1849),  143;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  27  (1848),  155. 

1846:  11.  Raewsky.  Recherches  sur  les  divers  composes  platin- 
iques  derives  du  sel  vert  de  Magnus.  Pt. 

C.  R.  23  (1846),  353;  24  (1847),  1151;  25  (1847),  794;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3], 
22  (1848),  278;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  12  (1847),  223;  14  (1848),  315  (with 
Gerhardt’s  comments);  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  64  (1847),  309;  68  (1848), 
316;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1847,  636;  1848,  109;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  455;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  1 (1848),  189;  Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  158. 

1846:  12.  H.  Rose.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des  Wassers  auf  Chlor- 
metalle.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  Acad.  (Berlin),  1846,  186;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  68  (1846),  444, 
445;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  38  (1845),  498. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


83 


1846:  13.  C.  R.  Fresenius.  Ueber  die  Loslichkeitsverhaltnisse  von 
einigen  bei  der  quantitativen  Analyse  als  Bestimmungsformen, 
etc.,  dienenden  Niederschlagen.  (Solubility  of  ammonium  and 
potassium  platinichloride  in  alcohol.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  59  (1846),  117;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1847,  36. 

1846:  14.  L.  Crosnier.  Sur  Taction  reciproque  de  quelques  sul- 
fures  metalliques  naturels,  et  des  sels  de  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  23  (1846),  217. 

1846:  15.  R.  Hare.  Fusion  of  iridium  and  rhodium.  Ir,  Rh. 

Amer.  J.  of  Sci.  [2],  2 (1846),  365;  Rev.  scient.  9 (1846),  233;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1847,  415;  Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  76. 

1846:  16.  L.  Elsner.  Beobachtungen  fiber  das  Verhalten  regu- 
linischer  Metalle  in  einer  wassrigen  Losung  von  Cyankalium. 
(Platinum  not  soluble  when  used  as  anode.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  37  (1846),  441;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  101  (1846),  117;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1846,  652;  Berzelius  Jsb.  27  (1848),  8. 

1846:  17.  L.  Playfair  and  J.  P.  Joule.  Researches  on  atomic 
volumes  and  specific  gravity.  (Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Os,  Ir,  pp.  62,  63; 
Pt  sponge,  69;  Pt,  72;  PtS,  PdS,  89;  allotropic  conditions  of  Ir, 
Os,  97;  Pt,  98.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  London,  3 (1846),  57;  Phil.  Mag.  27  (1845),  474. 

1846:  18.  Tonnelier.  Einfaches  Verfahren,  chemische  Gefasse 
von  Gyps  zu  reinigen.  (Boiling  with  solution  of  potassium 
carbonate.)  Pt. 

Pharm.  Centrbl.  1846,  271. 

1846:  19.  M.  Faraday.  Magnetism  and  diamagnetism  of  metals. 

Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  136  (1846),  47;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  70  (1847), 
35;  Bibl.  univ.  arch.  2 (1846),  145. 

1846:  20.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  On  the  influence  exerted  by  elec- 
tricity, platinum,  and  silver  upon  the  luminosity  of  phos- 
phorus. Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  Lond.  3 (1846),  104;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  68  (1846), 
37;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  29  (1846),  122. 

1846:  21.  E.  Becquerel.  Recherches  sur  la  conductibilite  elcc- 
trique  des  corps  solides  et  liquides.  (Conductivity  of  plati- 
num and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  22  (1846),  416;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  17  (1846),  242;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  70  (1847),  243;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  8 (1849),  185;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48, 
289. 


34 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1846: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 


22.  W.  R.  Grove.  On  certain  phenomena  of  voltaic  igni- 
tion, and  the  decomposition  of  water  into  its  constituent  gases 
by  heat.  (Decomposition  by  platinum  and  osmiridium. 
Bakerian  lecture.)  Pt,  Os,  Ir. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  137  (1847),  1,  17;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  3 (1851), 
657;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  31  (1847),  20,  91,  96;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  21  (1847), 
129;  Bibl.  univ.  arch.  5 (1847),  18,  112;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  43  (1848),  309; 
J.  de  pharm.  12  (1847),  154;  14  (1848),  29;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  63 
(1847),  1;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  71  (1847),  194;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 
1847,  632. 

1.  Maximilian  Herzog  von  Leuchtenberg.  Weitere  Un- 
tersuchungen  des  schwarzen  Niederschlages,  welcher  sich  an 
der  Anode  bei  der  Zersetzung  des  Kupfervitriols  durch  den 
galvanischen  Strom  bildet.  (Platinum  in  copper  ores.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P5tersb.  6 (1848),  129;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  41  (1847), 
222;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  106  (1847),  35;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  1022; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  85. 

2.  Molnar.  (Platinum  in  sand  from  Ohlapian,  Hungary.) 

Haidinger  Ber.  3 (1847),  412,  475;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  1152.  Pt. 

3.  Kopetzky  and  A.  Patera.  (Platinum  not  in  Ohlapian 

sand.)  Pt. 

Haidinger  Ber.  3 (1847),  439;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  1152. 

4.  C*.  U.  Shepard.  Native  platinum  in  North  Carolina. 

(Rutherford  County.  Mistake,  see  1892:  1.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  4 (1847),  280;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  74  (1848),  320; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  45  (1848),  454;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  511;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  1847-48,  1152;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg>  8 (1849),  79. 

4a.  Quintus  Icilius.  Die  Atomgewichte  vom  Palladium, 
Kalium,  Chlor,  Silber,  Ivohlenstoff,  und  Wasserstoff,  nach  der 
Methode  der  kleinsten  Quadrate  berechnet.  Inaug.  Diss. 
Gottingen,  1847.  (Pd=  111.879.)  Pd. 

5.  M.  Pettenkofer.  Ueber  die  Affinirung  des  Goldes  und 

uber  die  grosse  Verbreitung  des  Platins..  Pt. 

Gelehrte  Anz.  Miinchen,  24  (1847),  589;  Bui.  Akad.  Sci.  Munehen, 
1847,  101;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  104  (1847),  118,  198;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  64  (1847),  294;  Repert.  der  Pharm.  1847,  72;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1847,  766;  Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  85. 

6.  H.  Hess.  Note  sur  le  traitement  du  mineral  de  platine. 

(Fusion  with  zinc.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P6tersb.  6 (1848),  80;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  64 
(1847),  267;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  15  (1849),  149;  19  (1851),  415; 
L’Institut,  17  (1849),  144;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  40  (1847),  498;  Polyt. 
J.  (Dingier),  104  (1847),  468;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  15  (1848),  388;  Jsb. 

Chem.  1847-48,  453;  Civ.  Eng.  and  Arch.  Jour.  ; Chem.  tech. 

Mitth.  (Eisner),  1 (1846-48),  48;  Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  85. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


85 


1847:  7.  C.  Claus.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Platinmetalle.  (Irid- 
ium chloride  and  sulphites,  p.  273;  osmium  sulphites,  278; 
platinum  sulphites,  287;  ruthenium  sulphites,  288.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  6 (1848),  273;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  63 
(1847),  337;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  42  (1847),  348;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  14  (1848), 
385;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1847,  849,  867;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  453,  457, 
458,  461;  LTnstitut,  17  (1849),  143,  244;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  19  (1851), 
415;  Phil.  Mag.  [3],  35  (1849),  396;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  9 (1850),  422; 
Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  76. 

C.  Claus.  (Iridiumchlorid.)  Ir. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  262. 

C.  Claus.  (Verhalten  des  Iridiums  gegen  schmelzendes 
Kali  und  Salpeter.)  Ir. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  184. 

1847:  10.  C.  Claus  (J.  J.  Berzelius).  (Vorkommen  des  Ruthe- 
niums, Methode  auszuziehen,  und  Beschreibung  der  Salze.) 
(This  contains  Berzelius’s  criticism  of  Claus’s  discovery  that 
the  3KC1,  IrCl3  of  Berzelius  is  really  2KC1,  RuC14 — in  reality 
it  is  2KC1,  RuC13NO;  see  1889:  9 and  1894:  11.)  Ru,  Ir. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  181. 

1847:  11.  N.W.  Fischer.  Zur  Geschichte  des  Palladiums.  (Verhalt 
zu  Sauren,  Pogg.  71 :432;  zu  Alkalien,  437;  Doppelsalze,  440.) 

Pd. 

Uebers.  Schles.  Gesell.  Breslau,  1847,  30;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.) 
71  (1847),  431;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  64  (1847),  260;  Pharm.  Centrbl 
1847,  554;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  457;  Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  86. 

1847:  12.  C.  Claus.  (Platin  Ammoniak:  Neue  Basis  aus  einem 
Atome  Platinoxyd  und  zwei  Aequivalente  Ammoniak.)  Pt. 

Berzelius  Jsb.  26  (1847),  180. 

1847:  13.  M.  Peyrone.  Richerche  comparative  sopra  alcuni  isomeri 
del  sal  verde  di  Magnus.  Pt. 

Mem.  Accad.  Torino,  10  (1849),  171;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  61  (1847), 
178;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1847,  411;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  454;  Berzelius 
Jsb.  28  (1849),  154. 

1847:  14.  B.  Quadrat.  Ueber  Verbindungen  des  Platincyanurs  mit 
Cyanmetallen  und  uber  die  Platinblausaure.  Pt. 

Abhandl.  Bohm.  Gesel.  [5],  5 (1847),  16;  Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  3 (1849), 
10;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  63  (1847),  164;  65  (1848),  249;  70  (1849), 
300;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  12  (1847),  457;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  97;  1849, 
657;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  482;  1849,  301;  Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  147. 

1847:  15.  C.  Rammelsberg.  Ueber  ein  neues  Kaliumkupfercyanur. 
(Mercury  platinocyanid.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  73  (1848),  117;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  41  (1847),  184; 
Ber.  Acad.  Berlin,  1847,  115;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-47,  484. 


1847:  8. 
1847:  9. 


86 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 

1847: 


16.  A.  Laurent.  Sur  les  polycyanures.  (Important  article 

on  theory  of  double  cyanides.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  26  (1848),  295;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  42  (1847),  128;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 
1848,  423;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  484. 

17.  W.  Haidinger.  Ueber  das  Schillern  der  Krystallflachen. 

(Platinocyanides  of  magnesium,  barium,  and  potassium,  and 
platinum  oxalate.)  Pt. 

Haidinger,  Ber.  2 (1847),  98;  Haidinger  Abhandl.  1 (1847),  143; 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  70  (1847),  574;  71  (1847),  321;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1847-48,  195. 

18.  W.  Haidinger.  Platinverbindungen  mit  schillernden 

Flachen.  (Cyanides  and  oxalate.)  Pt. 

Haidinger,  Ber.  2 (1847),  198,  263. 

19.  W.  Hittorf.  Ueber  die  Bildung  einer  blauen  Oxydations- 

stufe  des  Platins  . . . auf  galvanischem  Wege.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  72  (1847),  481;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  64  (1847), 
268;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  42  (1847),  469;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  23;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1847-48,  453;  Berzelius  Jsb.  28  (1849),  84. 

20.  L.  Kessler.  Note  sur  Femploi  de  Y acetate  ferreux  comme 

moyen  de  separation  de  Y argent.  (Precipitation  of  platinum  by 
iron  sulphate  with  acetic  acid.)  Pt. 

J.  de  pharm.  [3],  11  (1847),  86;  Palomba,  Raccolta.  3 (1847),  379;  Pharm. 
Centrbl.  1847,  413. 

21.  R.  Hare.  On  certain  improvements  in  the  construction 

and  supply  of  the  hydro-oxygen  blowpipe,  by  which  rhodium, 
iridium,  or  the  osmiuret  of  iridium,  also  platinum  in  the  large 
way,  have  been  fused.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

J.  Frank.  Inst,  [3],  13  (1847),  196;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  4 (1847),  37;  Phil. 
Mag.  [3],  31  (1847),  147,  356;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  108  (1848),  270. 

22.  R.  Hare.  Apparatus  for  the  fusion  of  iridium  or  rhodium, 
or  masses  of  platinum  less  than  5 ounces  in  weight. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  14  [1847],  128.  Pt,  Ir,  Rll. 

23.  H.  H[ess].  Schmelzbarkeit  des  Iridiums,  des  Osmiridi- 

ums  und  des  Rhodiums.  Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  6 (1847),  107. 

24.  F.  Ludersdorff.  (Platinum  on  porcelain.)  Pt. 

Verh.  Gew.  Bef.  Preus.  1847,  ii,  67;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  105  (1847),  36; 

Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48, 1067;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  1 (1846-48),  18. 

25.  Mention  and  Wagner.  Piatin  als  Legirung  zu  Schmuck- 

sachen,  etc.  Pt. 

Brevets  d’invention,  1847,  425;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  1848,  Mar.  1;  Polyt,  J. 
(Dingier),  108  (1848),  396. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


87 


1847: 

1847: 

1848: 

1848: 

1848: 

1848: 

1848: 

1848: 

1848: 


26.  G.  Wilson.  On  the  decomposition  of  water  by  platinum 
and  the  black  oxide  of  manganese  at  a white  heat,  with  some 
observations  on  the  theory  of  Mr.  Grove’s  experiments.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  Lond.  3 (1847),  332;  Trans.  Scot.  Soc.  Arts,  3 (1851), 
170;  Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  43  (1847),  244;  Chem.  Gaz.  5 (1847),  198;  Phil. 
Mag.  31  (1847),  177. 

27.  J.  Lamont.  Reduction  der  Schwingungen  eines  Magnets 

auf  den  luftleeren  Raum.  (Polaritat  des  Palladiums  und  Plat- 
inums.) Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  71  (1847),  128. 

1.  R.  Gueymard.  Memoire  historique  sur  la  decouverte  du 

platine  dans  les  Alpes.  Pt. 

Moniteur  indust.  1848,  Sept.  14;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  45  (1848),  454;  C.  R. 
29  (1849),  814;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  14  (1848),  331;  16  (1849),  495; 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  79  (1850),  480;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  7 (1849),  137; 
Phil.  Mag.  [3],  36  (1850),  323;  Jsb.  Chem.  1849,  726;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  115  (1850),  395;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  9 (1850),  479. 

2.  A.  Faber.  Producte  Ostindiens.  (Platinum  in  Bur- 
ma.) Pt. 

Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  569. 

3.  M.  Pettenkofer.  Ueber  die  grosse  Verbreitung  des 

Platins  und  sein  Vorkommen  in  alien  giildischen  Silbermun- 
zen.  Pt. 

Bui.  Akad.  Miinchen,  1848,  142;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  74  (1848) 
316;  Rep.  fur  Pharm.  (Buchner)  [2],  47  (1847),,  72;  Revue  scientifique, 
5 (1849),  231;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  453. 

4.  C.  F.  Plattner.  Untersuchung  des  Ruckstandes  von  der 

Freiberger  Silbererz-Amalgamation  auf  einen  Gehalt  an  Gold 
und  Platin.  . Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  7 (1848),  628. 

5.  N.  W.  Fischer.  Ueber  die  salpetrichsauren  Salze.  (Sal- 

petrichsaures  Palladiumoxydkali.)  Pd. 

Uebers.  Schles.  Gesel.  Breslau,  1848,  31;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  74 
(1848),  123;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  46  (1849),  318;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  401. 

6.  Raewsky.  Memoire  sur  les  combinaisons  du  platine 

avec  la  nicotine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  27  (1848),  609;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  25  (1849),  332;  J.  prakt.  Chem. 
46  (1849),  470;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  70  (1849),  232;  Pharm.  Centrbl. 
1849,  329. 

7.  Raewsky.  Recherches  sur  les  sels  anilicoplatiniques.  Pt. 
C.  R.  26  (1848),  424;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  400;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48, 

655. 


88  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1848:  8.  J.  Blyth.  On  the  composition  of  coniine,  and  its  prod- 
ucts of  decomposition.  (Action  of  platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1848),  345;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  70  (1849),  73. 

1848:  9.  F.  M.  Baumert.  Analyse  des  Platincyanmagnesiumsalz 
des  Quadrat’s.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  65  (1848),  250,  footnote;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  484. 

1848:  10.  Lyons  and  Mill  ward.  Alloy  of  copper  with  platinum 
and  palladium.  Pt,  Pd. 

Repert.  Patent  Invent.  Feb.  1848,  114;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  108  (1848), 
398. 

1848:  11.  G.  Osann.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  specifischer  Ge- 
wichte  fester  Korper.  (Specific  gravity  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  73  (1848),  605;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  330;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1847-48,  33. 

1848:  12.  G.  Rose.  Nachtragliche  Bemerkungen  fiber  das  speci- 
fische  Gewicht  des  pulverformigen  Platins.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  73  (1848),  13;  75  (1848),  403;  Ann.  Chem.  (Lie- 
big), 68  (1848),  159;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1848,  91;  Jsb.  Chem.  1847-48,  37. 

1849:  a.  R.  I.  Murchison.  Geology  of  European  Russia.  1849. 
Part  II,  pp.  113,  312.  Pt. 

1849:  1.  J.  J.  Ebelmen.  Rapport  sur  l’existence  du  platine  dans 
certains  minerais  du  departement  de  l’lsere.  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [4],  16  (1849),  505. 

1849:  2.  Platinum  in  California.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  8 (1849),  294;  Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  48  (1850),  185. 

1849:  3.  Sur  la  production  des  mines  d’or  et  de  platine 

de  l’Oural  en  1849.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  des  mines  [4],  16  (1849),  531. 

1849:  4.  P.  Jewreinow.  Ueber  ein  schwarzes  Salz,  das  man  bei 
Ausscheidung  des  Iridiums  aus  Platinrfickstanden  erhalt. 
(Potassium  iridium  chloride.)  Ir. 

Berg  J.  (St.  Petersburg),  1849,  Th.  J , Heft  3;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  12 
(1853),  193. 

1849:  5.  A.  Schrotter.  Ueber  die  auf  directem  Wege  darstell- 
baren  Verbindungen  des  Phosphors  mit  den  Metallcn.  (Union 
of  phosphorus  with  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien.  2 (1849),  301. 

1849:  6.  A.  Laurent  and  C.  Gerhardt.  De  Faction  de  Fammoni- 
aque  sur  le  chloroplatinate  d’ammoniaque.  (Theory  of  plati- 
num bases  and  double  cyanides.)  Pt. 

Laurent  et  Gerhardt,  C.  R.  1849,  113;  1850,  145;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig), 
73  (1850),  223;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  46  (1849),  511;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1850 
437,  471;  Jsb.  Chem.  1849,  289;  1850,  360. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


89 


1849:  7.  W.  Haidinger.  Ueber  die  Formen  und  einige  optische 
Eigenschaften  der  Magnesium-Platin-Cyanure.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  1849,  20;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  77  (1849),  89; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1849,  122. 

1S49:  8.  F.  Brauell.  De  acidi  osmici  in  homines  et  animalia 
effectu.  Casani,  1849.  Os. 

1849:  9.  M.  Pettenkofer.  Ueber  die  Bestandtheile  der  Schlacken, 
welche  beim  Schmelzen  des  Scheidegoldes  mit  Salpeter  gebildet 
werden,  und  uber  deren  Benutzung.  Pt,  Pd,  Os. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  111  (1849),  357;  Jsb.  Chem.  1849,  635;  Polyt.  Centrbl. 
(1849),  926,  933 ! 

1849:  10.  G.  Rose.  Ueber  die  Krystallform  der  rhomb oedrischen 
Metalle,  namentlich  des  Wismuths.  (Auch  Palladiums,  Iri- 
diums und  Osmiums.)  Pd,  Ir,  Os. 

Abhandl.  Acad.  Berlin  (Phys.),  1849,  72;  Ber.  Acad.  Berlin,  1849,  137; 
Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  76  (1850),  245;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  77  (1849), 
149;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  49  (1850),  163;  Jahrb.  Min.  1849,  566;  L’Institut, 
1849,  342;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1849,  489;  Jsb.  Chem.  1849,  13. 

1849:  11.  A.  Salvetat.  Note  sur  un  nouvel  emploi  du  platine  dans 
la  peinture  sur  porcelaine.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  25  (1849),  342;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  72  (1849), 
263;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  19  (1851),  414;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  47  (1849),  232; 
Pharm.  Centrbl.  1849,  260;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  112  (1849),  45;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1849,  652. 

1849:  12.  J.  Field.  On  the  chemical  combinations  induced  in 
gaseous  mixtures  by  contact  with  certain  metals,  with  especial 
reference  to  the  action  of  spongy  platinum  on  mixtures  of 
oxygen  and  hydrogen.  (Cause.)  Pt. 

Pharm.  J.  and  Trans.  8 (1849),  381;  Pharm.  Centrbl.  1849,  381. 

1849:  13.  C.  Despretz.  Sur  la  fusion  et  la  volatilization  des  corps 
refractaires.  Note  sur  quelques  experiences  faites  avec  le 
triple  concour  de  la  pile  voltaique,  du  soleil,  et  du  chalumeau. 

Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  29  (1849),  545;  Ann  des  mines  [4],  19  (1851),  333;  L’Institut,  811, 
226;  829,  368;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1850,  22. 

1850:  1.  C.  de  Paravey.  Sur  quelques  passages  de  Pline  FAncien 
qui  semblent  pouvoir  se  rapporter  au  platine  (livre  33  : 3 et 
34  : 16).  Pt. 

C.  R.  31  (1850),  179. 

1850:  2.  W.  Mallet.  On  the  minerals  of  the  auriferous  districts 
of  Wicklow.  Pt. 

J.  Geol.  Soc.  Dublin,  4 (1850),  269;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  11  (1851),  232;  Phil. 
Mag.  [3],  37  (1850),  393;  Jsb.  Chem.  1850,  699. 


90 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1850:  3.  R.  M.  Patterson.  Ueber  die  Beschaffenheit  imd  das  Vor- 
kommen  des  Goldes,  Platins  und  der  Diamanten  in  den  Verei- 
nigten  Staaten.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Ztsch.  Deutsch.  geol.  Geseli.  2 (1850),  60;  Jahrbuch  Min.  1851,  351;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1850,  698;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  9 (1850),  609. 

1850:  4.  J.  E.  Teschemacher.  Platinum  of  California.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  10  (1850),  121;  Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  51  (1851),  193;  Ohem. 
Centrbl.  1851,  640;  Jsb.  Chem.  1850,  699. 

1850:  5.  T.  Thomson.  Biographical  account  of  Dr.  Wollaston. 
(Account  of  his  discoveries.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

Proc.  Phil.  Soc.  Glasgow,  3 (1850),  129. 

1850:  6.  E.  Fremy.  Recherches  chimique  sur  Tor.  (Note  on  mak- 
ing platinates,  Ann.  chim.  phys.  31  : 482.)  Pt. 

C.  It.  31  (1850),  893;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  31  (1851),  478;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  79  (1851),  43;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  52  (1851),  159;  J.  de  pharm.  19 
(1851),  84. 

1850:  7.  C.  A.  Wurtz.  Memoire  sur  une  serie  d’alcaloides  homo- 
logues  avec  Fammoniaque.  (Platino-  and  platinichlo rides  of 
methyl-,  ethyl-,  and  amyl-amin.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  30  (1850),  443;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  52  (1851),  193; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1851,  166,  177;  Jsb.  Chem.  1850,  335,  443. 

1850:  8.  C.  Gerhardt.  Recherches  sur  les  combinaisons  ammo- 
niacales  du  platine.  Pt.  , 

. Gerhardt  et  Laurent,  C.  R.  1850,  273;  C.  R.  31  (1850),  241;  Ann.  Chem. 

(Liebig),  76  (1850),  307;  Ann.  des  mines  [4],  19  (1851),  414;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  51  (1850),  351;  53  (1851),  345;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1851,  97. 

1850:  9.  J.  Schabus.  Ueber  die  Krystallformen  des  Barium- 
Platin-Cyanurs.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  4 (1850),  569;  Jsb.  Chem.  1850,  360. 

1850:  10.  A.  Reynoso.  De  Faction  des  bases  sur  les  sels,  et  en 
particular  sur  les  arsenites.  (Reduction  of  palladium  salts 
by  silver  arsenite.)  Pd. 

C.  R.  31  (1850)  68;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  33  (1851),  245;  J.  prakt.  ChemJ 
51  (1850),  160;  54  (1851),  309. 

1850:  11.  A.  Masson.  Etudes  de  photometrie  61ectrique.  (Spectre 
du  platine  incandescent.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  31  (1850),  887;  32  (1851),  127;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  31  (1851),  323. 

1850:  12.  J.  P.  Joule.  On  some  amalgams.  (Platinum  amalgam, 
PtHg2.)  Pt. 

Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1850,  ii,  55;  Chem.  Gaz.  1850,  339;  L’Institut,  1850, 
327;  Jsb.  Chem.  1850,  333. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


91 


1850:  13.  A.  Baudrimont.  Experiences  sur  la  tenacity  des 
m6taux  malleables.  (Tenacity  of  palladium  and  platinum.) 

Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  30  (1850),  304;  C.  R.  31  (1850),  115;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  76  (1850),  123;  Ann.  der  phys.  (Pogg.),  82  (1851),  156; 
L’Institut,  18  (1850),  241;  J.  de  pharm.  19  (1851),  206;  Phil.  Mag.  [3], 
37  (1850),  308;  Jsb.  Chem.  1850,  78. 

1850:  14.  C.  Bromeis.  Ueber  das  Plattiren  mit  Platinum.  Pt. 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  116  (1850),  283;  Jsb.  Chem.  1850,  631. 

1850:  15.  A.  Wagner.  Ersatzmittel  des  Schwammplatin  bei  Wein- 
geistgluhlampen.  (Chromate  of  copper.)  Pt. 

Polyt.  Centrbl.  16  (1850),  Nr.  1;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  115  (1850),  159; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1850,  157. 

1850:  16.  D.  Brewster.  On  the  optical  properties  of  the  cyanurets 
of  platinum  and  magnesia,  and  of  barytes  and  platinum.  Pt. 
Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1850,  ii,  5. 

1851:  a.  Tserrener.  Erdkunde  Gouvernments  Perm.  Leipzig, 
1851.  Pt. 

1851:  1.  T.  S.  Hunt.  [Platinum  and  iridosmine  in  Canada.] 

Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Report  Geol.  Surv.  Canada,  1851-52,  120;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  15  (1853), 
448;  Ann.  des  mines  [5],  3 (1853),  683. 

1851:  2.  F.  A.  Genth.  Nord-Amerikanische  Mineralien.  (Plati- 
num from  Lancaster  County,  Pa.)  Pt. 

Nord-Amer.  Monatsber.  2 (1851),  June;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  55  (1852),  254; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1851,  417;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  11  (1852),  328. 

1851:  3.  G.  A.  Kenngott.  Irite.  Ir,  Os. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  11  (1851),  232;  from  Mineral.  Untersuchungen,  1,  61. 

1851:  4.  J.  J.  Ebelman.  Sur  la  cristallisation  par  la  voie  seche. 
(Artificial  octahedral  crystals  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  32  (1851),  710;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  80  (1851),  212. 

1851:  5.  F.  Claudet.  On  a class  of  ammoniacal  compounds  of 
cobalt.  (Platinum  salts  of  cobaltamins.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [4],  2 (1851),  253;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  33  (1851),  483; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  54  (1851),  270;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1851,  865;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  4 (1851),  355. 

*1851:  6.  H.  H.  Landolt.  Ueber  das  Stibmethyl  und  seine  Ver- 
bindungen.  (Double  chloride  of  platinum  and  tetramethylsti- 
bonium.)  Pt. 

Mitth.  nat.  forsch.  Gesell.  Zurich,  2 (1850-52),  349,  524;  Ann.  chim. 
phys.  34  (1852),  226;  37  (1853),  60;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  78  (1851),  91; 
84  (1852),  44;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  52  (1851),  385;  57  (1852),  129;  J.  de 
pharm.  20  (1851),  65;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1852,  625. 


92 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1851: 


1851: 


1851: 


1851: 


1851: 


1851: 


1851: 


1852: 


7.  A.  W.  Hofmann.  Researches  into  the  molecular  constitu- 
tion of  the  organic  bases.  II.  (Platinum  bases,  p.  397.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  141  (1851),  357;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  33  (1851), 
108;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  78  (1851),  253;  79,  11;  C.  R.  33  (1851),  95; 
L’Institut,  19  (1851),  189;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  20  (1851),  220,  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  53  (1851),  390;  Laurent  et  Gerhardt,  C.  R.  1851,  189;  Q.  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  4 (1852),  304;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1851,  772,  787;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1851,  496. 

8.  G.  B.  Buckton.  Observations  upon  the  deportment  of 

diplatosamine  with  cyanogen.  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  4 (1851),  26;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  78  (1851),  328;  J.  de 
pharm.  19  (1851),  393;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  53  (1851),  174;  Laurent  et 
Gerhardt,  C.  R.  1851,  91;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1851,  696;  Jsb.  Chem.  185i, 
370;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  (1851),  393. 

9.  J.  L.  Lassaigne.  Observations  sur  le  degr6  de  sensibilite 

des  divers  reactifs  par  l’iode,  et  ses  divers  composes.  (Use  of 
palladium  salts.)  Pd. 

J.  chim.  m£d.  [3],  7 (1851),  142;  J.  de  pharm.  19  (1851),  428. 

10.  A.  Butlerow.  Ueber  die  oxydirende  Wirkung  der 

Osmiumsaure  auf  organische  Korper.  Os. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  10  (1852),  177;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  84 
(1852),  278;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  56  (1852),  271;  L’Institut,  20  (1852), 
249;  Jsb.  Chem.  1852,  429;  Melanges  phys.  chim.  Acad.  St.-P5tersb. 
1 (1851),  355. 

11.  M.  G.  von  Paucker.  Das  astronomische  Langenmaas. 

(Ausdehnung  des  Platins.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  10  (1852),  209;  Jsb.  Chem.  1852,  2. 

12.  A.  Baudrimont.  Experiences  sur  1’ elasticity  des  corps 

heterophones.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  32  (1851),  288;  Jour,  fur  Physik,  2 (1851),  533;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1851,  82. 

13.  A.  C.  Becquerel.  Memoire  sur  les  effets  electriques  pro- 

duits  dans  les  tubercules,  les  racines  et  les  fruits,  lors  de  Y intro- 
duction d’aiguilles  galvanometriques  en  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R,  32  (1851),  657;  Mem.  l’lnstitut,  23  (1853),  301. 

1.  E.  Gueymard.  Recherches  analytiques  du  platine  dans 
les  Alpes.  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [5],  1 (1852),  345;  5 (1854),  165;  C.  R.  38  (1854),  941;  40 
(1855),  1274;  Arch,  des  sci.  phys.  nat.  2 7 (1854),  77;  Bui.  Soc.  g5ol. 
Paris,  12  (1854-55),  429;  Jsb.  Chem.  1852,  831;  1854,  80/;  1855;  905; 
L’Institut,  23  (L855),  212;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1855,  543;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten. 
Ztg.  12  (1853),  752. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


93 


1852:  2.  F.  A.  Genth.  On  some  minerals  which  accompany  gold 
in  California.  (Platinum  and  osmiridium.)  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Pioc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  6 (1852),  113;  Nord-Amer.  Monatsber.  2 
(1852),  205,  249;  Ana.  des  mines  [5],  4 (1853),  130;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2], 
14  (1852),  277;  Ediab.  N.  Phil.  J.  54  (1853),  182;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  58 
(1853),  245;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1852,  72;  Jsb.  Chem.  1852,  831;  Berg-  u. 
Hutten.  Ztg.  12  (1853),  751. 

1852:  3.  F.  A.  Genth.  On  a probably  new  element  with  iridos- 
mine  and  platinum  from  California.  Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Proc.  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila.  6 (1852),  209;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  15  (1853), 
446;  Ann.  des  mines  [5],  3 (1853),  683;  Chem.  Gaz.  11  (1853),  145; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  59  (1853),  156;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1853,  366;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1853,  389,  775. 

1852:  4.  C.  Palmstedt.  Platina  funnen  vid  sa  kallad  skedning  af 
silfvermynt  vid  Kongl.  Myntet  i Munchen.  Pt. 

Ofvers.  Vet.  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  9 (1852),  220. 

1852:  5.  Bericht  iiber  die  Gold-  und  Platina- Ausbeute  in 

Russland,  im  Jahre  1851.  Pt. 

Buss.  Berg.  J.  1852,  i,  149,  311,  457,  461,  463;  Berg-  u.  Hutten.  Ztg.  12 
(1853),  661. 

1852:  6.  C.  Karmrodt  and  E.  Uhrlaub.  Ueber  ein  neues  Iridium- 
salz.  (Double  chlorides  of  iridium  and  sodium  and  silver.)  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  81  (1852),  120;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  56  (1852),  190; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1852,  262;  Jsb.  Chem.  1851,  372. 

1852:  7.  Skoblikoff.  Recherches  sur  quelques  combinaisons  nou- 
velles  d’iridium.  (Irid-ammonium  compounds.)  Ir. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P<Hersb.  11  (1853),  25;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  84  (1852), 
275;  Chem.  Gaz.  11  (i853),  29;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  58  (1853),  31;  Amer. 
J.  Sci.  [2],  16  (1853),  412;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1852,  833;  Jsb.  Chem.  1852, 
428;  Melanges  phys.  chim.  Acad.  St.-Petersb.  1 (1852),  400. 

1852:  8.  G.  B.  Buckton.  Observations  upon  a new  series  of 
double  cblorids  containing  diplatosammonium.  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  5 (1852),  213;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  84  (1852),  270; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  57  (1852);  367;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1853,  218;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1852,  425. 

1852:  9.  T.  Andrews.  On  the  atomic  weights  of  platinum  and 
barium.  (Pt=  197.88.)  Pt. 

Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1852,  ii,  33;  Chem.  Gaz.  10  (1852),  379;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  85  (1853),  255;  L’Institut,  20  (1852),  346;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  57 
(1852),  377;  Jsb.  Chem.  i852,  425. 

1852:  10.  W.  Haidinger.  Ueber  den  Zusammenhang  der  Korper- 
farben  . . . und  der  Oberflachenfarben  gewisser  Korper. 
(Platinum  cyanides  and  oxalate,  palladium  chloride  and  irid- 
ium potassium  chloride.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  8 (1852),  97;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  42  (1854),  249. 


94 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1852:  11.  W.  Knop.  Notiz  fiber  den  Platinmohr  und  die  Aethyl- 
quecksilberverbindung  von  Sobrero  und  Selmi.  (Platinum  ethyl 
compound.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  56  (1852),  312;  Chem.  Gaz.  10  (1852),  313;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1852,  431;  Jsb.  Chem.  1852,  603. 

1852:  12.  H.  St.  Claire  Deyille.  Note  sur  la  temperature 
produite  par  la  combustion  du  charbon  dans  Fair.  (Furnace 
for  fusing  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  35  (1852),  796;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  127  (1853),  114;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten. 
Ztg.  12  (1853),  537. 

1852:  13.  A.  T.  Kupffer.  (Elasticity  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  obs.  phys.  centr.  Russie  (Kupffer),  1852,  ii;  Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.- 
Petersb.  12  (1854),  129;  Melanges  phys.  chim.  Acad.  St.-Petersb.  1 
(1853),  632;  Jsb.  Chem.  1853,  117. 

1853:  1.  H.  Muller.  Ueber  die  Palladamine.  Inaug.  Diss.  Got- 
tingen, 1853.  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  86  (1853),  341;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  40  (1854),  321; 
Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  16  (1853),  410;  Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  23  (1853),  291; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  59  (1853),  29;  Chem.  Gaz.  11  (1853),  241,  263;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1853,  241,  261;  Jsb.  Chem.  1853,  382. 

1853:  2.  A.  Bechamp.  Faites  pour  servir  a Fhistoire  analytique  du 
palladium  et  de  Fargent.  (Cyanide  of  palladium  and  silver.)  Pd. 

J.  de  pharm.  [3],  23  (1853),  413;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  60  (1853),  64. 

1853:  3.  R.  Kersting.  Ueber  Iodbestimmung.  (By  titration 
with  palladous  chloride.)  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  87  (1853),  19;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  41  (1854),  493; 
Chem.  Gaz.  12  (1854),  156;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1854,  65;  Jsb.  Chem.  1853, 
647. 

1853:4.  J.  Nickles.  Recherches  sur  le  polymorphisme.  (Crystal- 
lization of  palladium  and  iridium.)  Pd.  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  39  (1853),  404  (Abstr.  Thesis,  Fac.  des  sc.  Paris, 
July  25,  1853);  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  24  (1853),  5. 

1853:  5.  E.  R.  Schneider.  Bemerkungen  iiber  einige  Aequivalent- 
zahlen  (des  Rhodiums  und  des  Osmiums).  Rh,  Os. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  88  (1853),  314. 

1853:  6.  P.  A.  Bolley.  Die  bekannten  tcchnisch  gebrauchten 
Metall-legirungen  in  geordneter  Zusammenstellung  nach  Qua- 
litiit  und  Quantitat  der  Bestandtheile.  (Platinum  alloys.)  Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  129  (1853),  438  (from  Bolley’s  “Handbuch”);  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1854,  786. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


95 


1853:  7.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  das  Verplatiniren  glaserner  und  por- 
zellanener  Gefasse.  Pt. 

Ber.  Deutsch.  Nat.  Versamml.  1847,  364;  Jahrsber.  Phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt 
a.  M.  1853-54;  1855-56,  24;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  136  (1855),  464;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1855,  851;  1857,  273. 

1853:  8.  P.  Jewreinoff  [ = Jewreinow].  (Platiniren  von  Eisen 
und  Kupfer.)  Pt. 

La  technologist©;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  19  (1853),  509;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1853, 
624;  Jahrb.  Phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt,  1853-54;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  138 
(1855),  464;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  (1853),  168;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner) 
4 (1852-54),  154;  12  (1862-63),  139. 

1853:  9.  G.  G.  Stokes.  On  the  change  of  refrangibility  of  light. 
(Fluorescence  of  platinocyanides.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  143  (1853),  395;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  1850-54, 
333;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  96  (1855),  541;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  10  (1855), 
69,  95;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  132. 

1853:  10.  G.  G.  Stokes.  On  the  metallic  reflection  exhibited  by 
certain  nonmetallic  substances.  (Magnesium  platinocyanide.) 

Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [4],  6 (1853),  398;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  91  (1854),  307; 
Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  46  (1856),  504. 

1853:  11.  G.  Magnus.  Ueber  die  Verdichtung  der  Gase  an  der 
Oberflache  glatter  Korper.  (Condensation  on  platinum 

sponge.)  Pt. 

Ber.  Acad.  Berlin,  1853,  378;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  89  (1853),  604; 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  39  (1853),  344;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  6 (1853),  334. 

1853:12.  G.  Wiedemann  and  R.  Franz.  Ueber  die  Warmeleitungs- 
fahigkeit  der  Metalle.  (Platinum  and  palladium,  p.  513.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  89  (1853),  497;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  41  (1854), 
107;  Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  25  (1854),  338. 

1854:  1.  W.  P.  Blake.  On  the  gold  and  platinum  of  Cape  Blanco. 

(Oregon.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  18  (1854),  156;  20  (1855),  79;  Jsb.  Chem.  1854,  806. 

1854:  2.  H.  Dubois.  De  la  presence  de  Firidium  dans  For  de 

California.  Ir. 

Ann.  des  mines  [5],  6 (1854),  518;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  21  (1856),  205;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1855,  847;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  141  (1856),  109;  Bui.  Soc.  d’en- 
couragement,  Jan.  (1856),  31;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  (1855),  1183;  Chem.  tech. 
Mitth.  (Eisner),  5 (1854-56),  118. 

1854:  3. Jahresbericht  uber  die  Fortschritte  des  Miner- 

alogie  im  Jahre  1853.  Pt. 

Berg-  u.  Hutten.  Ztg.  13  (1854),  334. 


96  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1854:  4.  Platin-Fund  (in  Siebengebirgen).  Pt. 

Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  13  (1854),  232,  from  Casseler  Ztg. 

1854:  5.  E.  Fremy.  Nouvelles  recherchessurlesmetauxqui  accom- 
pagnent  le  platine  dans  sa  mine.  (Decomposition  of  iridos- 
mium  by  oxidation  in  current  of  air.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

C.  R.  38  (1854),  1008;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  62  (1854),  340;  J.  de  pharm. 
[3],  26  (1854),  99;  L’Institut,  22  (1854),  201;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1854, 
520;  Chem.  Gaz.  12  (1854),  241;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  133  (1854), 
270;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  120;  Jsb.  Chem.  1854,  367;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  7 (1854),  256;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  30  (1855),  412;  Atheneum, 
Sept.  (1855). 

1854:6.  C.  Claus.  Beitrage  zur  Cbemie  der  Platinmetalle,  Dorpat, 
1854.  (Full  description  of  the  chemistry  of  the  platinum 
metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  423,  444,  814,  905. 

1854:  7.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  die  Platinbasen.  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-P6tersb.  13  (1855),  97;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  63  (1854), 
99;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1854,  789;  Chem.  Gaz.  12  (1854),  441;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1854,  369;  Melanges  phys.  chim.  Acad.  St.-Petersb.  2 (1854),  130. 

1854:  8.  E.  Uricoechea.  Iridium  und  seine  Yerbindungen.  Inaug. 
Diss.  Gottingen,  1854.  (Phosphate,  bromide,  sulphate,  chlo- 
ride.) Ir. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  18  (1854),  447. 

1854:  9.  G.  B.  Buckton.  On  the  platino-tersulphocyanides  and 
the  platino-bisulphocyanides,  two  new  series  of  salts,  and 
their  decompositions.  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  7 (1854),  22;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  64  (1855),  65;  Ann.  Chem. 
(Liebig),  92  (1854),  280;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1854,  545;  Jsb.  Chem.  1854, 
379. 

1854:  10.  C.  G.  Williams.  On  the  presence  of  pyridine  among  the 
volatile  bases  in  the  naphtha  from  the  bituminous  shale  from 
Dorsetshire,  and  on  the  fractional  crystallization  of  platinum 
salts.  . Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [4],  8 (1854),  209;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  64  (1855),  54. 

1854:  11.  J.  H.  Gladstone.  Notes  on  some  substances  which  ex- 
hibit the  phenomena  of  fluorescence.  (Platinum  chloride  with 
potassium  iodide.)  Pt. 

Edinb.  N.  Phil.  J.  1 (1855),  83;  Chem.  Gaz.  12  (1854),  420;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  64  (1855),  438;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  133. 

1854:  12.  Benutzung  des  Irid-osmiums  zur  Losung  des 

Zinnes.  Os,  Ir. 

Arch,  der  Pharm.  80  (1854),  324;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1855,  56;  Polyt. 
Notizbl.  9 (1854),  192;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  25  (1854),  1084. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  9 7 

1854:  13.  H.  How.  Note  on  platinum  accompanying  silver  in 
solution  in  nitric  acid.  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  7 (1854),  48;  Chem.  Gaz.  12  (1854),  209;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  63  (1854)  125;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1854,  592;  Jsb.  Chem.  1854,  366. 

1854:  14.  W.  Lasch.  Auflosung  des  Platins  in  Glasretorten 


(unzweckmassig).  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  63  (1854),  344. 

1854:  15.  J.  Schabus.  Crystallogische  Untersuchungen.  (Mono-, 

bi-,  and  tetra-ethylammonium  platinum  chloride,  p.  43.) 
Wien,  1855.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  15  (1855),  200;  Jsb.  Chem.  1854,  379. 

1854:  16.  Savard.  (Plating  of  copper  with  platinum.)  Pt. 


Pract.  Mech.  J.  6 (1854),  256;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  131  (1854),  413. 

1854:  17.  A.  T.  Kupffer.  (Elasticity  of  torsion  of  platinum.) 

C.  R.  PObs.  cent.  Russie,  1854,  1;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  69.  Pt. 

1854:  18.  T.  Graham.  On  osmotic  force.  (Bakerian  lecture. 
Cf.  platinochloride,  Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  8:  59,  94.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  144  (1854),  177;  Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  8 (1855),  43; 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  45  (1855),  5;  Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  27  (1854). 

37. 

1855:  1.  M.  Booking.  Piatinerz  aus  Borneo.  (Analysis.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  96  (1855),  243;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  67  (1856),  207. 

1855:  2.  J.  W.  Mallet.  On  the  crystallization  of  platinum  from 
fusion.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  20  (1855),  340;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  67  (1856),  252;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  1856,  47;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  420;  Chem.  Gaz.  No.  317;  J.  Frank. 

Inst.  [3],  31  (1856),  139. 

1855:  3.  E.  Fremy.  Nouvelles  recherches  sur  la  mine  de  platine. 
(Composition,  p.  386;  preparation  of  osmium,  387;  ruthe- 
nium, 392;  iridium,  394;  rhodium,  395;  salts  of  rhodium, 
398.)  Pt,  Pd,  Os,  Ru,  Ir,  Rh. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  44  (1855),  385;  Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1855,  ii,  63; 

Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  422. 

1855:  4.  L.  P.  de  Saint-Gilles.  Action  de  la  chaleur  sur  Fhy- 
drate  et  sur  lAcetate  ferriques.  (Separation  of  iridium  from 
platinum  by  sodium  acetate.)  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  40  (1355),  1243;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  16  (1855),  144. 

1855:  5.  D’Hennin.  Procede  pour  Taffinage  de  l’or  allie  a F iridium 
dans  les  cendres  iridiferes.  Ir. 

C.  R.  40  (1855),  1203;  Bui.  Soc.  d’encour.  (1856),  Jan.;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier) 

141  (1856),  109;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  5 (1854-56),  102. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 7 


98  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1855:  6.  G.  Clementi.  Sulli  joduri  di  platino.  Pt. 

N.  Cimento,  2 (1855),  192;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  420. 

1855:  7.  R.  Lowig.  Doppelverbindungen  von  Chlorstibathylium 
mit  Platincblorid.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  64  (1855),  424  (from  Inaug.  Dias.  Breslau). 

1855:  8.  T.  Anderson.  Preliminary  notice  on  the  decomposition 
of  the  platinum  salts  of  the  organic  alkalies.  (Pyridin,  picolin, 
and  other  bases  produced  by  destructive  distillation  of  animal 
substances.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  21  (1857),  219;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  3 (1857), 
309;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  45  (1855),  366;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  96 
(1855),  199;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  9 (1855),  145,  214;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1855,  259; 
1856,  2;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  553;  Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1854,  ii,  64. 

1855:  9.  C.  A.  Wurtz.  (Criticism  of  Anderson  (1855:  8)  on  plati- 
num bases.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  45  (1855),  369;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  555. 

1855:  10.  M.  Peyrone.  Dell’  azione  dell’  acido  nitrico  sopra  il  sal 
verde  di  Magnus.  Pt. 

Cimento,  6 (1855),  872;  N.  Cimento,  2 (1855),  387;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  421. 

1855:  11.  M.  Peyrone.  Dell’  azione  dell’  acido  nitrico  sopra  l’iso- 
mero  giallo  del  sal  di  Magnus.  Pt. 

Cimento,  6 (1855),  874;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  421. 

1855:  12.  A.  Schafarik.  Ueber  die  Cyanverbindungen  des  Platins. 

Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  17  (1855),  57;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  66  (1855),  385;  Chem. 
Gaz.  13  (1855),  441;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1855,  721;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  439. 

1855:  13.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  die  Fluorescenz  des  Kaliumplatin- 
cyanurs.  (Fluorescence  in  solution.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  95  (1855),  176;  97  (1856),  333;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  10 
(1855),  69;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  132. 

1855:  14.  G.  G.  Stokes.  On  the  alleged  fluorescence  of  a solution 
of  platino-cyanide  of  potassium.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [4],  10  (1855),  95. 

1S55:  15.  H.  Vohl.  Anwendung  des  unterschwefligsauren  Natrons 
in  der  analytischen  Chemie.  (Action  on  platinum  salts.) 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  67  (1856),  177;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  96  (1855),  241; 
J.  de  pharm.  29  (1856),  74. 

1855:  16.  C.  Weltzien.  Ueber  die  Krystallformen  der  Platinsalze 
der  zusammengesetzten  Ammoniummoleciile  des  Aethyls.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  93  (1855),  272. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


99 


1855:  17.  C.  de  Marignac.  Recherches  sur  les  formes  cristallines 
de  quelques  composes  chimiques.  Geneve,  1855.  (Sodium 
platino-chloride,  p.  27.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  42  (1856),  288;  Mem.  Soc.  phys.  Geneve,  14  (1858),  202;  Jsb.  Chem, 
1855,  421. 

1855:  18.  Roseleur  and  Lanaux.  (Plating  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Polyt.  Centrbl.  1855,  57;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  138  (1855),  318;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1855,  852;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  (1855),  56;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  5 
(1854-56),  172. 

1855:  19.  R.  Bottger.  (Electroplating  copper  and  brass  with 
platinum;  after  Jewreinoff,  1853:  8.)  Pt. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  1855,  No.  4;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  1855,  1210;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  138  (1855),  318;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1855,  736;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855, 
852. 

1855:20.  W.  Haidinger.  Herapathit  Zangen.  (Optical  properties 
of  barium  and  magnesium  platinocyanides.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  15  (1855),  82;  Jsb.  Chem.  1855,  151. 

1855:  21.  A.  Vogel,  Jr.,  and  C.  Reischauer.  Ueber  eine  neue 
Form  der  bei  Lothrohrversuchen  angewandten  Platinpincetten 
und  Platindrahte.  Pt. 

Gelehrtes  Anz.  Mtinchen,  41  (1855),  Bull.  15;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  133 
(1855),  44. 

1855:  22.  J.  Stenhouse.  On  platinized  charcoal.  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  8 (1855),  105;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  45  (1855),  496;  Ann. 
Chem.  (Liebig),  96  (1855),  36;  J.  de  pharm.  28  (1855),  317;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  66  (1855),  380. 

1855:  23.  A.  Baudrimont.  Note  sur  rinflammabilite  de  l’hydro- 
gene  (par  le  platine).  Pt. 

C.  R.  41  (1855),  177;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  96  (1855),  351;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  67  (1856),  187. 

1855:  24.  R.  Adie.  On  thermo-electric  joints  formed  with  the 
metals  antimony,  bismuth,  and  palladium.  Pd. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  8 (1855),  36. 

1856:  1.  J.  B.  Boussingault.  Sur  un  gisement  de  platine  signale 
dans  un  filon  de  la  province  d’ Antioquia.  Observations  inedites 
sur  les  alluvions  auriferes  et  platiniferes  du  Choco.  Pt. 

C.  R.  42  (1856),  917;  L’Institut,  24  (1856),  191;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  829. 

| 1856:  2.  C.  Scheibler.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Lithionsalze. 
(Lithium  platinchloride.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  67  (1856),  485. 

1856:  3.  W.  F.  Salm-Horstmar.  Ueber  Chlorplatinaluminum.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  99  (1856),  638;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  70  (1857),  121; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  413. 


100 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1856:  4.  A.  W.  Hofmann  and  A.  Cahours.  Recherches  sur  lesl 
bases  phosphorees.  Pt. 

C.  R.  43  (1856),  1092;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  104  (1857),  1;  Phil.  Trans. 
147  (1857),  595;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  51  (1857),  5;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  70 ! 
(1857),  364;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  11  (1858),  56. 

1856:  5.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  einige  Rho  dan  verbin  dung.  (Platinum 

thiocyanate,  p.  48.)  PtJ 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  99  (1856),  48;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  49  (1857),  101  ;| 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  70  (1857),  52;  J.  de  pharm.  31  (1857),  125,;  Chem.  Gaz.B 
14  (1856),  344;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1856,  730;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  443. 

1856:  6.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  die  Ammoniummolecule  der  Metalle.lj 
(Theoretical  article  on  the  metal-ammonium  bases.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  98  (1856),  317;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  314. 

1856 : 7.  P.  Weselsky.  Ueber  einige  neue  der  Formel  R2Pt2Cy5nHO 
entsprechende  Platincyanverbindupgen,  ferner  iiber  rothesh 
HPtCy2,  5HO  und  gelbes  MgPtCy2,  6HO.  Pt.  j 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  20  (1856),  282;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  69  (1856),  276; H 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1856,  779;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  440. 

1856 : 8.  C.  Weltzien.  Ueber  die  Ammoniummolecule  der  Metalle.  ! 
(Theoretical  consideration  of  metal-ammonium  bases.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  97  (1856),  19;  100  (1856),  108;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1856,1 
114;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  313,  414. 

1856:  9.  C.  Grimm.  Beitrag  zur  Kenntniss  der  Platinbasen.  Pt.  I 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  99  (1856),  67;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  69  (1856),  420;  Phil,  j 
Mag.  [4],  12  (1856),  301;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1856,  750;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  415. 1 

1856:  10.  C.  Grimm.  Ein  neues  Platinsalz.  (Double  platosaminffl 
ammonium  chloride.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  99  (1856),  95;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  70  (1857),  61;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1856,  415. 

1856:  11.  W.  Gibbs  and  F.  A.  Genth.  Researches  on  the  ammonia- 
cobalt  bases.  (Platinum  chlorides  of  cobalt-ammonium  bases.) 

Pt. 

Smith.  Cont,  Knowl.  9 (1856);  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  23  (1857),  234,  319;  24 
(1857),  86;  J.  prakt,  Chem.  72  (1857),  148;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  104 
(1857),  150,  295;  Chem.  Gaz.  15  (1857),  141, 165,  188,  250,  266,  383,  404;. 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1858,  129,  257;  Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  234. 

1856:  12.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  Action  de  Tacide  iodhy- 
drique  sur  Y argent.  (Palladium  acted  on  by  hydriodic  acid, 
but  platinum  almost  unacted  on.)  Pt,  Pd* 

C.  R.  42  (1856),  894;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  101  (1857),  196;  J.  prakt* 
Chem.  69  (1856),  420. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


101 


1856:  13.  W.  Keferstein.  Ueber  die  Krystallformen  einiger  chemi- 
schen  Verbindungen.  (Ammonium  iridium  chloride,  ammon- 
ium rhodium  chloride,  barium  palladium  cyanide,  and  potas- 
sium platinum  thiocyanate.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  99  (1856),  275;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  69  (1856),  303; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  420,  442,  445. 

1856:  14.  Caranza.  Note  sur  un  nouveau  procede  de  fixage  pour 
les  epreuves  photographiques,  au  moyen  du  chlorure  acide  do 
platine.  (Only  title.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  42  (1856),  344;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1856,  192. 

1856:  15.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  Memoire  sur  la  production 
des  temperatures  tres  elevees.  (Fusion  of  platinum,  p.  198.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  46  (1856),  182;  Ann  Chem.  (Liebig),  102  (1857), 
326;  Bui.  Soc.  encour.  Paris,  55  (1856),  286;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  140 
(1856),  428;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  315. 

1856:  16.  H.  H.  Landois.  (Plating  metals  with  platinum  in  the 
cold.)  Pt. 

Cosmos,  rev.  encyclop.  Sept.  (1856),  309;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  142  (1856), 
157;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  32  (1856),  265;  Soc.  encour.  nat.  indust.  Paris 
(1855),  Dec.  25. 

1856:  17.  A.  Smee.  (Method  of  depositing  platinum  black  on  plat- 
inum and  silver.)  Pt. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  1856,  No.  21;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  142  (1856),  157;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1857,  96. 

1856:  18.  V.  Regnault.  Memoire  sur  la  chaleur  specifique  de 
quelques  corps  simples.  (Specific  heat  of  osmium,  p.  262; 
rhodium  and  iridium,  263.)  Os,  Rh,  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  46  (1856),  257;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg),  98  (1856), 
401;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  12  (1856),  493;  Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  31  (1856), 
316;  N.  Cimento,  3 (1856),  442;  Jsb.  Chem.  1856,  41. 

1857:  1.  A.  A.  Damour  and  A.  Descloizeaux.  Examen  de  divers 
6ch  antilions  de  sables  auriferes  et  platiniferes.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  51  (1857),  445. 

1857:  2.  Price  of  platinum  (in  1857).  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  101  (1857),  644;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  146  (1857), 

77. 

1857:3.  II.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  II.  Debray.  Des  metaux 
du  platine  et  de  lcur  traitement  par  la  voie  seche. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

C.  R.  44  (1857),  1101;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  104  (1857),  227;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  71  (1857),  371;  L’Institut,  25  (1857),  173,  181;  Chem.  Gaz.  15 
(1857),  310;  Cimento,  6 (1857);  Chem.  Centrbl.  1857,  433;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  145  (1857),  44;  Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  259. 


102 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1857:  4.  A.  Muckle  and  F.  WOhler.  Ueber  den  Platingehalt  der 
Platinriickstande.  (Separation  of  platinum  and  iridium.) 

Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  104  (1857),  368;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  73  (1858),  318; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  149  (1858),  237;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1858,  254;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1857,  262. 

1857 : 5.  O.  Kottig.  Krystallisirtes  Platin. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  71  (1857),  190;  Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  261. 

1857:  6.  E.  Wysocky.  Ueber  die  Affinirung  des  osmium-iridium- 
haltigen  Goldes  vom  Stabs  Capitain  Belozerow.  Os,  Ir. 

Oester.  Ztsch.  fur  Berg-  und  Hiittenwesen,  1857,  No.  26;  Chem.  Cen- 
trbl. 1857,  665. 

1857:  7.  T.  Oppler.  Ueber  die  Iodverbindungen  des  Iridiums. 
Inaug.  Diss.  Gottingen,  1857.  Ir. 

Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  263. 

1857 : 8.  V.  Schwarzenbach.  (Potassium  platinocyanide  and  mor- 
phine, etc.)  Pt. 

Vierteljahrssch.  prakt.  Pharm.  6 (1857),  422;  Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  602. 

1857:  9.  A.  W.  Hofmann.  Contributions  towards  the  history  of 
the  phosphorus-,  arsenic-,  and  antimony-bases.  (Platinum 
salts.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  8 (1856-57),  500;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  103 
(1857),  357;  J.  de  pharm.  34  (1858),  137;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1857,  947. 

1857:  10.  R.  Bottger.  Palladiumchlorur,  ein  ausgezeichnetes 
Reagens  fur  verschiedene  Gase.  Pd. 

Jsber.  phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt  a.  M.  1857-58.  45;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
106  (1859),  495;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  76  (1859),  233;  N.  Jahrb.  prakt. 
Pharm.  11  (1859),  263;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  152  (1859),  76;  R6p.  chim. 
pur.  1 (1859),  402;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1859,  321;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  257; 
Polyt.  Notizbl.  14  (1859),  102;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  25  (1859),  683;  Chem. 
tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  8 (1858-59),  55. 

1857:  11.  Q.  Sella.  Sulla  forme  cristalline  di  alcuni  sali  di  platino 
e del  boro  adamantino.  (Crystal  forms  of  platinum  bases.) 

Pt. 

Mem.  Accad.  Torino  [2],  17  (1858),  337;  Cimento,  5 (1857),  81;  7 (1858), 
228;  Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  34  (1857),  330;  Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  261;  Aim. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  100  (1857),  646. 

1857:  12.  H.  de  Senarmont.  Rammelsberg:  Die  neueste  Forsch- 
ungen  in  der  krystallinischen  Chemie,  Leipzig,  1857-8.  (Bire- 
fractive  crystals.)  Ru. 

Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  2G5. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


103 


1857:  13.  W.  J.  Grailich  and  V.  yon  Lang.  Untersuchungen 
uber  die  physikalischen  Verhaltnisse  krystallisirter  Korper. 

* (Double  platinocyanides,  p.  16.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  27  (1857),  3;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  235;  Kryst.  opt. 

Untersuchungen,  Wien  und  Olmiitz,  1858,  99. 

1857:  14.  A.  Descloizeaux.  Proprietes  optiques  birefringentes 
des  cyanure  de  barium  et  de  platine;  cyanure  de  magnesium 
et  de  platine:  chlorure  de  platine  et  d’ethylammoniaque.  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [5],  11  (1857),  301,  306,  324;  14  (1858),  393. 

1857:  15.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  Memoire  sur  le  silicium. 
(Action  of  silicon  on  platinum,  p.  66.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  49  (1857),  62;  J.  de  pharm.  31  (1857),  116. 

1857:  16.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  Schmelzung  schwer  schmelz- 
baren  Metalle.  Pt. 

Polyt.  Centrbl.  1857,  605;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1857,  461. 

1857:  17.  R.  Bottger.  Verhalten  . . . des  Platins  zu  dem  ge- 
scbmolzenen  chlorsauren  Kali.  Pt. 

N.  Rep.  fur  Pharm.  (Buchner),  6 (1857),  247;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1857,  636. 

1857:  18.  C.  G.  Mosander.  Filtrerings-apparater  af  Platina.  Pt. 

Oefver.  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  14  (1857),  263. 

1857:  19.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Preis  Platingerathe.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  101  (1857),  644;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1857,  844. 

1857 : 20.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Ueber  einige  neue  Reihen  chemischer 
Beruhrungswirkungen.  (Influence  of  platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Abh.  Bayer.  Akad.  Wise.  8 (1857),  37. 

1857  : 21.  A.  Bertin.  Sur  la  formation  de  Peau  par  des  lames  de 
platine  qui  ont  servi  a transmettre  un  courant  electrique.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  51  (1857),  450;  C.  R.  44  (1857),  1273;  J.  prakt. 

Chem.  71  (1857),  371;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1857,  607. 

1857:  22.  J.  Muller.  Abnahme  der  Elektricitatsleitung  in  Metal- 
len  bei  starke  Temperatur-Erhohung.  (Leitungswiderstand 

des  Platins.)  Pt. 

Programm  d.  Gymnasiums  zu  Wesel,  1857;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 

103  (1858),  176;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  110 

1857:  23.  L.  Cailletet.  De  l’influence  de  Thydrogene  naissant 
sur  Pamalgamation.  Pt. 

C.  R.  44  (1857),  1250;  Jsb.  Chem.  1857,  249. 

1858:  1.  S.  Bleekrode.  Platinerz  von  Borneo.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  103  (1858),  656;  J.  de  pharm.  34  (1858),  219; 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  74  (1858),  361;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  151  (1859),  156; 

Pharm.  J and  Trans.  18  (1859),  32;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  675. 


104  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1853:  2.  W.  Henke.  Verbindungen  der  Nitrile  mit  Chloriiren. 
(Cyanethyl  und  Platincblorid.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  106  (1858),  280;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  75  (1858),  204; 
J.  de  pharm.  34  (1858),  448. 

1858:3.  K.  yon  Thann.  Ueber  das  Platincyanathyl.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien,  31  (1858),  26;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  107  (1858), 
315;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  75  (1858),  190;  J.  de  pharm.  34  (1858),  449;  Rep. 
chim.  pur.  1 (1859),  137;  Chem.  Gaz.  17  (1859),  41;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1858,  787;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  235. 

185S:  4.  C.  G.  Williams.  (Platinehloride  and  quinoline.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Gaz.  16  (1858),  346;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  76  (1859),  251;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1858,  357. 

1858:  5.  W.  Gibbs  and  F.  A.  Genth.  Preliminary  notice  of  a new 
base  containing  osmium  and  the  elements  of  ammonia.  Os,  Ir. 

Amer.  J.  Chem.  [2],  25  (1858),  248;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1859;  130;  Rep.  chim. 
pur.  1 (1859),  326;  Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  1858,  197;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  214. 

1858:  6.  A.  Souchay  and  E.  Lennsen.  Ueber  die  Oxalate  der 
schweren  Metalloxyde.  (Oxalsaures  Platinoxydul  Natron.) 

Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  105  (1858),  256;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  74  (1858),  170. 

1858:  7.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  die  Reduction  des  Iridiumchlorids 
(IrCl2)  in  niedere  Chlorstufen.  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  107  (1858),  129;  Ann.  chim.  phvs.  [3],  54  (1858). 
423;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  76  (1859),  24;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  1 (1859),  86;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1858,  210. 

1858:  8.  C.  W.  Hempel.  Eisenoxydulsalz  mit  caustischem  Alkali 
als  Reductionsmittel.  (Reduction  of  platinum  chloride  by 
ferrous  sulphate  and  formation  of  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  107  (1858),  97;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  75  (1858),  444; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  149  (1858),  444;  Chem.  News,  1 (1860),  107;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1858,  190. 

1858:  9.  J.  Spiller.  On  some  remarkable  circumstances  tending 
to  disguise  the  presence  of  various  acids  and  bases  in  chemical 
analysis.  (Action  of  citric  acid  on  platinum  dioxide.)  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  10  (1858),  110;  J.  de  pharm.  33  (1858),  54. 

1858:  10.  A.  F.  Nogues.  Influences  des  hautes  temperatures  sur 
l’etat  moleculaire  de  certains  corps.  (Platinum  crystals.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  47  (1858),  832;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1859,  16;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  209. 

1858:  11.  F.  Crace-Calvert  and  R.  Johnson.  On  the  expansion 
of  metals,  alloys,  and  salts.  (Specific  gravity  and  expansion  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Rep.  Brit.  Assoc.  28  (1858),  46;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  10. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


105 


1858:  12.  L.  Elsner.  Ueber  die  Fluchtigkeit  einiger  Korper  in  der 
Weissgliihhitze.  (Sublimation  of  platinum,  palladium,  and 
iridium.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  7 (1857-58),  36;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  99  (1866), 
257;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  35. 

1858:  13.  W.  E.  Newton.  (Platinum  alloys.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh. 

Repertory  Pat.  Invent.  1858,  375;  Pharm.  J.  and  Trans.  18  (1859),  233 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  148  (1858),  415;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  208. 

1858:  14.  C.  Brunner.  Bereitung  yon  Platinschwarz.  Pt. 

Mitth.  Naturf.  Gesel.  Bern,  1858,  83;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  109  (1859), 
253;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  105  (1858),  496;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  1 (1859), 
294;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  1 (1859),  211;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1859,  30;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1858,  209;  Chem.  News,  1 (1860),  179;  Le  Monde  sci.  Mar.  1 
(1860). 

1858:  15.  T.  L.  Phipson.  La  force  catalytique  ou  etudes  sur  les 
phfoiomenes  de -contact.  (Combustion  under  the  influence  of 
platinum,  etc.  Memoire  couronne  par  la  Soc.  holland.  des 
sci.,  Haarlem,  1858.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

Nat.  Verh.  d.  Maatsch.  Wet.  Haarlem,  14  (1861),  1. 

1858:  16.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  des  Platins  auf 
chemisch-gebundenen  Sauerstoff.  Pt. 

Yerh.  Naturf.  Gesel.  Basel,  2 (1858),  35;  Gelehr.  Anz.  Munchen,  47 
(1858),  89;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  55  (1859),  216;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
105  (1858),  258;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  75  (1858),  101;  Jsb.  Chem. *1858,  56. 

1858:  17.  W.  J.  Grailich.  LTeber  Fluorescenz.  (Magnesium  pla- 
tino-cyanide.)  Pt. 

Yerh.  Akad.  Presburg,  2 (1857),  11;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  3. 

1858:  18.  F.  Crace-Calvert  and  R.  Johnson.  Sur  la  conductibi- 
lit6  de  la  chaleur  par  les  metaux  et  leurs  alliages.  (Conduc- 
tivity of  platinum  for  heat.)  Pt. 

C.  R,  47  (1858),  1069;  Phil.  Trans.  London,  148  (1858),  349;  Poht. 
J.  (Dingier),  152  (1859),  125;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  110. 

1858:  19.  A.  Arndtsen.  Ueber  den  galvanischen  Leitungswi- 
derstand  der  Metallc  bei  verschiedenen  Temperaturen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  104  (1858),  1;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  54  (1858), 

440. 

1858 : 20.  A.  Matthiessen.  Ueber  die  electrische  Leitungsfahigkeit 
der  Metalle.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  103  (1858),  428;  Phil.  Trans.  London,  148 
(1858),  383;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  16  (1858),  219;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  54 
(1858),  255;  Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  [2],  3 (1858),  310;  L’Institut,  26 
(1858),  402;  Chem.  CentrbL  1858,411;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  108:  Cimento, 
17  (1863),  47. 


106 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1S59:  1.  S.  Bleekrode.  Platinerz  von  Goenoeng  Lawack  auf 
Borneo.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  107  (1859),  189;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  77  (1859),  384; 
Rep.  chim.  pur.  1 (1859),  874;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  766. 

1859:2. — American  platinum.  (Vein  of  platinum  and  gold 

in  Missouri.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  1 (1859),  36. 

1859:  3.  Weil.  (Platinerze  aus  Californien.)  Pt. 

Genie  indust.  17  (1859),  262;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  153  (1859),  41;  Jahrb. 
der  Miner.  1860,  354;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  766;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg. 
19  (1860),  20;  20  (1861),  270;  Berggeist,  5 (1860),  No.  57. 

1859:  4.  W.  Haidinger.  Die  grosse  Platinstufe  im  K.  k.  Hof- 
Mineralien-Cabinet  (Wien).  Geschenk  des  Fursten  Anatole 
von  Demidoff.  (From  Nischnei-Tagilsk.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Acad.  Wien.  35  (1859),  345;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  766. 

1859:  5.  Soreze.  Krystallisation  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Berggeist,  4 (1859),  No.  48;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  19  (1860),  27. 

1859:  6.  M.  H.  Jacobi  (par  Pelouze  presente).  Medailles  frappees 
avec  des  alliages  de  platine  et  iridium.  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  49  (1859),  896;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  80  (1860),  499;  Chem.  News,  1 
(1860),  23;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  154  (1859),  118;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  254. 

1859:  7.  M.  H.  Jacobi  (par  Pelouze  presente).  Un  lingot  d’iridium 
fondu.  (267  grams  weight.)  Ir. 

C.  R.  49  (1859),  897;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  80  (1860),  499. 

1859:  8.  C.  Claus.  Neue  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Platinmetalle. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

I.  Ueber  das  Ruthenium  verglichen  mit  dem  ihm  ahnli- 
chen  Osmium.  Bui.  1 : 97. 

II.  A.  Einiges  Allgemeines  liber  die  Platinmetalle  und 
einiges  besonders  liber  das  Ruthenium,  2 : 158. 
B.  Ueber  das  Rhodium  im  Vergleicb  zum  Iridium, 
2 : 171. 

III.  A.  Ueber  ammoniumhaltige  Rutbeniumbasen,  4 : 454. 

B.  Ueber  die  Darstellung  des  Rutbeniumsalzes  und 

liber  die  verscbiedenen  Metbode  des  Aufschlies- 
sens  des  Osmium-Iridiums,  4 : 465. 

C.  Ein  Paar  Worte  liber  die  Cyanverbindungen,  na- 

mentlich  das  Osmiumcyankali,  4 : 482. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


10? 


IV.  Ueber  das/ Osmium,  6 : 145. 

(Original  analysis  of  ruthenium  “tetrachloride 
1 : 107.) 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  1 (1860),  97;  2 (1860),  158;  4 (1862),  453; 
6 (1863),  145;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  59  (1860),  111;  J.  prakt.  Chem. 
79  (I860),  28;  80  (1860),  282;  85  (1861),  129;  90  (1863),  65;  J.  de  pharm.. 
37  (1860),  391;  Chem.  Gentrbl.  1859,  961;  1860,  674,  689;  1862,  121. 
1.29;  1864,  497;  Chem.  News,  3 (1861),  194,  257;  4 (1861),  310;  7 (1863), 
115,  121;  R4p.  chim.  pur.  2 (I860),'  211;  3 (1861),  121;  4 (1862),  450; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  3 (1865),  115;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  29  (1860),  425  ; 34 
(1862),  183,  213;  Ztsch.  Chem.  5 (1862),  117;  J.  anal.  Chem.  1 (1862),  366; 
5 (1866),  117;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  247;  1860,  204,  742;  1861,  320;  1863, 
295;  Melanges  phys.  chim.  Acad.  St.-P£tersb.  4 (1860),  1,  294;  5 
(1861),  87;  5 (1863),  439. 

1859 : 9.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  H.  Debray.  Du  platine  et 
dos  metaux  qui  raccompagnent.  (Properties,  general,  p.  388; 
osmium,  392;  ruthenium,  405;  palladium,  413;  alloys,  414; 
rhodium,  415;  platinum,  419;  iridium,  431;  alloys,  433;  iridos- 
mium,  437;  analysis,  439;  assay,  453;  cupellation,  457;  assay 
of  residues,  463;  assay  of  iridosmium,  470;  metallurgy*  484; 
extraction  of  platinum  by  fusion,  489;  preparation  of  alloys, 
493.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  56  (1859),  385;  Ann.  des  mines  [5],  16  (1859),  1; 
Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  111  (1859),  209;  114  (1860),  78;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  107  (1859),  214;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  35  (1859),  336;  C.  R.  48 
(1859),  731;  L’Institut,  27  (1859),  118;  Pharm.  J.  and  Trans.  [2], 
1 (1859),  414,  470;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  153  (1859),  38;  154  (1859),  130; 
199,  287,  383;  Chem.  News,  1 (1860),  5,  15,  85;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1859, 
559,  668;  R6p.  chim.  pur.  1 (1859),  325,  537;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  1 (1859), 
435;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  29  (I860),  113,  373,  379;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3], 
40  (1860),  21;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  230,  767;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  19 
(1860),  2Q».  256,  260,  272;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  9 (1859-60),  125, 
Polyt.  Centrbl.  26  (1860),  960;  Polyt.  Cent.rhalle,  10  (1859),  542. 

1859;  10.  H.  Dullo.  Ueber  Loslichkeit  des  Platins  in  Konigs- 
wasser.  Pt 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  78  (1859),  369;  Chem.  News,  1 (1860),  204;  R4p.  chim 
pur.  2 (1860),  114;  R5p.  chim.  appl.  2 (1860),  183;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859, 
256;  J.  chim.  med.  [4],  6 (1860),  259;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  19  (I860), 
352;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  10  (1860-61),  126. 

1859:  11.  W.  Eichler.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  einiger  Osmium- 
verbindungen.  (Potassium  osmite,  osmichloride,  and  am- 
monio-silver  osmichloride.)  Os. 

Bui.  Soc.  nat.  Moscou,  32,  i (1859),  152;  Archiv  Russ.  19  (1860),  278; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1860,  214. 

1859:  12.  W.  Knop.  Notiz  liber  die  Bereitung  der  Platincyanid- 
doppelsalze.  Pt. 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1859,  17;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  1 (1859),  249;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1859,  274. 


108 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1859:  13.  G.  Werther.  Notiz  fiber  Magnesiumplatincyanur.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  76  (1859),  186;  Chem.  Gaz.  17  (1859),  448;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1859,  629;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  274. 

1859:  14.  V.  Schwarzenbach.  Verbindungen  der  Alkaloi'de  mit 
Platincyanur.  Pt. 

Vierteljahrsch.  prakt.  Pharm.  8 (1859),  516;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1860,  304. 

1859:  15.  W.  Knop.  Ueber  eine  Eigenschaft  des  Platinsalmiaks. 
Notiz  liber  ein  Zerzetzungsproduct  des  Platinsalmiaks. 
(Zerstauben  beim  Erhitzen;  mit  Natronlauge  gekocht  und  mit 
Essigsaure  versetzt,  giebt  Niederschlag.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1859,  241,  352;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  256. 

1859:  16.  J.  Schlossberger.  Kleesaurc  aus  Alkohol  durch  Platin- 
chlorid. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  110  (1859),  247;  Pep.  chim.  pur.  1 (1859),  419. 

1859:  17.  C.  A.  Martius.  Ueber  einige  Borverbindungen.  (Bor- 
platin;  p.  81.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  109  (1859),  79;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  77  (1859),  125; 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1859,  221;  Jsb.  Chem.  1858,  210. 

1859:  18.  E.  Becquerel.  Recherches  sur  divers  effets  lumineux 
qui  resultent  de  Taction  de  la  lumiere  sur  les  corps.  (Optical 
properties  of  the  platmocyanides,  p.  140.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  49  (1859),  27;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  57  (1859),  40;  Arch.  sci.  phys. 

nat.  6 (1859),  21;  Phil.  Mag.  18  (1859),  524. 

1859:  19.  C.  B.  Greiss.  Ueber  die  Fluorescenz  des  Magnesium 

Platincyanur.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  106  (1859),  645;  Jsb.  Chem.  1859,  275. 

1859:  20.  V.  Regnault.  Une  anomalie  de  la  chaleur  specifique 
d’ech  antilions  cTiridium.  (Owing  to  osmium  present.)  Ir,  Os. 

C.  R.  49  (1859),  897;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  80  (1860),  500. 

1859:  21.  G.  Jenzsch.  Universal  Platintriangle.  Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  151  (1859),  425. 

1859:  22.  H.  Dullo.  Ueber  das  Platiniren  von  Glas  und  Porcellan 
(and  solution  of  platinum  in  aqua  regia;  cf.  1859  : 10).  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  78  (1859),  367;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  157  (1860),  152; 

J.  chim.  m6d.  [4],  6 (1860),  258;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  42  (1861),  414; 

Bui.  Soc.  encour.  nat.  indust.  Paris. 

1859:  23.  L.  Elsner.  Porzellanflachen  mit  einem  starken  Uebcr- 

zuge  von  Platina  zu  iiberziehen.  Pt. 

Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  9 (1859-60),  124;  Chem;  News,  4 (1861),  13. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


109 


1859:  24.  C.  F.  Vasserot.  Plating  glass  with  platinum  and 
palladium.  Pt,  Pd. 

Repert.  of  Pat.  Invent.  [3],  33  (1859),  485;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  153  (1859), 
42;  Polyt.  Centrhalle,  10  (1859),  576;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner), 
9 (1859-60),  67. 

1859:  25.  Wild.  Einfache  Methode,  Kupfer  und  Messing  auf 
sogenanntem  nassen  Wege  mit  Platin  zu  iiberziehen.  Pt. 

Arch.  Pharm.  148  (1859),  112;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1859,  541;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  153  (1859),  238;  Polyt.  Centrhalle,  10  (1859),  560;  Chem. 
tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  9 (1859-60),  126. 

1859:  26.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Ueber  die  katalytische  Zersetzung  des 
WasserstofFsnperoxydes  durch  metallisches  Platin.  Pt. 

Gelehrte  Anz.  Munchen,  49  (1859),  169;  Verh.  Natf.  Gesel.  Basel,  2 
(1860),  280;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  109  (1860),  130;  Ann.  chim.  phys. 
[3],  58  (1860),  486. 

1859:  27.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Beitrage  zur  nahern  Kenntniss  des 

SauerstofFes.  Pt. 

Gelehrte  Anz.  Munchen,  49  (1859),  529;  Verh.  Natf.  Gesel.  Basel,  2 
(1860),  420;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  59  (1860),  102;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  79  (1860), 
65;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  1 (1862),  9;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  112  (1861), 
281. 

1859:  28.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  Ueber  die  chemische  Polarisation  des 

SauerstofFes.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  78  (1859),  88;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  58  (1860),  479;  Verh. 
Natf.  Gesel.  Basel,  2 (1860),  251;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  108  (1859), 
471;  Chem.  News,  1 (1860),  109,  254;  Phil.  Mag.  18  (1859),  510. 

1859:  29.  M.  H.  Jacobi.  Note  sur  Pemploi  d’une  contre-batterie  de 
platine  aux  lignes  electro-telegraphiques.  Pt. 

C.  R.  49  (1859),  610. 

1860:  1.  Y.  Cotta.  Krystallisirtes  gediegenes  Platin.  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  19  (1860),  495;  Jahrbuch  Min.  1861,  327;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1860,  743. 

I860:  la.  J.-Y.  Thevenet.  Sur  les  gisements  auriferes  et  plati- 
niferes  de  P Oregon.  Pt. 

Acad,  de  Lyon,  Cl.  des  sc.  10  (1860),  129. 

1860:  2.  M.  PI.  Jacobi.  Sur  le  platine  et  son  emploi  comme  mon- 
naie.  St.-Petersbourg,  1860.  8°.  Pt. 

1860:  3.  Ueber  die  Gewinnung  von  Roheisen,  Kupfer,  Gold 

und  Platin  in  den  Kronsberg  und  Huttenwerken  des  Ural- 
gebirges  im  Jahre  1858.  Pt. 

Russ.  Berg.  J.  1860;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  19  (1860),  489. 


110  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1860:4.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deyille  and  II.  Debray.  De  la  fusion 
et  du  moulage  du  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  50  (1860),  1038;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  80  (1860),  500;  Chem.  News,  2 
(1860),  24;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1860,  639;  L’Institut,  28  (1860),  194;  Polyt. 
J.  (Dingier),  157  (1860),  64;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  30  (1860),  158;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1860,  205;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  2 (1860),  220;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3], 
40  (1860),  123;  Berg-  u.  Hutten.  Ztg.  20  (1861),  170. 

I860:  5.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deyille  and  H.  Debray.  De  la  metal- 
lurgie  du  platine  et  des  m6taux  qui  l’accompagnent.  (Assay, 
Ann.  chim.  phys.  61:  8;  cupellation,  12,  30;  direct  fusion,  57; 
treatment  of  ores  in  dry  way,  67;  extraction  of  iridium  and 
rhodium,  76;  ruthenium  and  palladium,  78;  treatment  of  the 
platinum  of  old  Russian  coin,  88.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  des  mines  [5],  18  (1860),  71,  325;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  61  (1861), 
5;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  165  (1862),  198;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  27  (1861),  1263; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  881;  Berg-  u.  Hutten.  Ztg.  21  (1862),  76;  Chem.  tech. 
Mitth.  (Eisner),  12  (1862-63),  138. 

I860:  6.  W.  Gibbs.  Researches  on  the  platinum  metals.  (Ammo- 
nium compounds  of  osmium  and  palladium;  nitric  acid  com- 
pounds of  iridium.)  Os,  Pd,  Ir. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  29  (1860),  427;  Jsb.  Chem.  1860,  217;  Chem.  News,  2 
• (1860),  179. 

I860:  7.  Boedeker.  Die  Beziehung  zwischen  Dichte  und  Zusam- 
mensetzung  bei  festen  und  liquiden  Stoffen.  Leipzig,  1860. 
(Composition  and  specific  gravity  of  platinum  and  iridium 
chlorides  and  platinum  iodides.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Jsb.  Chem.  1860,  16. 

1860:8.  H.  Schiff.  Die  Polysulfurete  der  Schwermetalle.  (Plati- 
num.) Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  115  (1860),  73. 

I860:  9.  C.  Klippel.  Ueber  das  Methplumb&thyl.  (Methplumb- 

athylchlorur-Platinchlorid,  p.  298.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  81  (1860),  287. 

I860:  10.  J.  W.  Mallet.  On  osmious  acid  and  the  position  of 
osmium  in  the  list  of  elements.  Os. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  29  (1860),  49;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  19  (1860),  293;  Chem. 
News,  1 (1860),  206;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  2 (1860),  209;  Jsb.  Chem.  1860, 
213. 

I860:  11.  A.  W.  Hofmann.  Contributions  to  the  history  of  the 
phosphorus  bases.  (Analyses  of  chloroplatinates  of  phos- 
phorus bases.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  62  (1861),  385:  63  (1861),  257;  64  (1862),  110;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  13  (1860),  289;  14  (1861),  73,  316;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig), 
Suppl.  Band,  1 (1861),  1,  145,  275;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  87  (1862),  182;  Q. 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  13  (1861),  4;  Phil.  Trans.  London,  150  (I860),  409. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Ill 


I860:  12.  E.  A.  Hadow.  On  the  composition  of  the  platinid- 
cyanids.  Pt. 

Q.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  13  (1860),  106;  Chem.  News,  1 (1860),  183;  Rep.  chim. 
pur.  2 (1860),  220;  Jsb.  Chem.  1860,  226. 

1860:  13.  C.  Czudnowicz.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Ceroxydul- 
verbindungen  und  der  Lanthanoxydsalze.  (Cerium  plati- 
nocyanide,  p.  29;  lanthan  platinocyanide,  p.  36.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  80  (I860),  29;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1860,  1015;  Rep.  chim.  pur. 
2 (1860),  31 7,  321;  Ztsch.  Chem.  3 (1860),  532;  Jsb.  Chem.  1860,  124. 

I860:  14.  C.  A.  Martius.  Ueber  die  Cyanverbindungen  der  Platin- 
metalle.  (Inaug.  Diss.)  Gottingen,  1860. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  117  (1861),  357;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1861,  545;  1862, 
139;  Chem.  News,  5 (1862),  323;  R6p.  chim.  pur.  4 (1862),  97;  Phil. 
Mag.  [4],  21  (1861),  502;  Jsb.  Chem.,  1860,  202,  230. 

1860:  15.  A.  H.  Church  and  E.  Owen.  On  cespitine  and  other 
bases  produced  by  the  destructive  distillation  of  peat.  (Plati- 
num cespityl  ammonium.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [4],  20  (1860),  110;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  83  (1861),  225;  Chem.  News, 
2 (1860),  133,  146;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1860,  803;  Jsb.  Chem.  i860,  358. 

1860:  16.  G.  von  Rath.  Krystallographische  Beitrage.  Kalium- 
platinsesquicyanur,  2(KaCy)  -b  Pt2Cy3  + 5Aq.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  1L0  (1860),  110. 

1860:  17.  W.  Crossley.  On  the  melting  points  of  some  of  the 
elements.  (Relation  between  the  melting  point  and  atomic 
volume  of  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  2 (1860),  88. 

1860:  18.  Delanoue.  Entdeckung  hammerbar  Platins.  Pt. 

J.  des  mines,  1860,  548;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  20  (1861),  335. 

1860:  19.  O.  L.  Erdmann.  Ueber  die  Reinigung  der  Platintiegel, 
und  das  Verhalten  derselben  in  der  Gasflamme.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  79  (i860),  117;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  156  (1860),  393;  R5p. 
chim.  appl.  2 (1860),  127;  Ztsch.  Chem.  3 (1860),  316;  Jsb.  Chem.  1860, 
205;  Chem.  News,  2 (1860),  256;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  41  (1861),  196; 
Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  20  (1861),  40. 

1860:  20.  F.  G.  Cleaning  of  platinum  (with  sodium  amalgam).  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  2 (1860),  286;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  83  (.1861),  272;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  161  (1861),  75;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  41  (1861),  390;  42  (1862), 
180  (dupl.);  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  316. 

1860:  21.  J.  Pelouze.  Medaillen  aus  Legirungen  von  Platinum  mit 
Iridium.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  155  (i860),  118. 


112 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


I860:  22.  J.  Nickles.  Letter  on  new  alloys  of  platnum  (by  H. 
St.-C.  Deville  and  H.  Debray).  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  29  (1860),  270. 

1861:  1.  J.  Torrey.  Occurrence  of  iridosmium  in  California. 
(Footnote  to  Gibbs’s  Researches.)  * Ir,  Os. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  31  (1361),  69. 

1861:  2.  Q.  Sella.  Sulla  forme  cristalline  di  alcuni  sali  derivati 
dell’  ammoniaca.  (Chloroplatinates  of  ethylphosphins.)  Pt. 

Cimento,  13  (1861),  349;  14  (1861),  37;  15  (1862),  145;  Mem.  Accad.  Torino 
[2],  20  (1863),  355. 

1861:  3.  E.  Gueymard.  Notice  sur  le  dosage  du  platine  qui  se 
trouve  a l’etat  de  diffusion  dans  les  gites  metalliques  ou  dans  les 
roches  des  Alpes  du  Dauphine  et  de  la  Savoie.  Pt. 

C.  R.  53  (1861),  98;  Chem.  News  5 (1862),  7;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  3 (1861), 
365. 

1861 : 4.  A.  A.  Damour.  Note  sur  la  presence  du  platine  et  de 
1’  etain  metallique  dans  les  terrains  aurif  eres  de  la  Guyane.  Pt. 

C.  R.  52  (1861),  688;  Ann.  des  mines  [6],  8 (1865),  250;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  87 
(1862),  250;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  3 (1861),  221;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  3 (1861), 
181;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  969. 

1861 : 5.  M.  Faraday.  On  platinum.  (Lecture  at  the  Royal  In- 
stitution, Feb.  22,  1861.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Proc.  Roy.  Inst.  3 (1858-62),  321;  Chem.  News,  3 (1861),  136. 

1861:  6.  W.  Gibbs.  Researches  on  the  platinum  metals.  (Chiefly 
on  separation  of  the  metals;  review  of  history  and  proposal  of 
new  method  with  nitrites.)  (“  Reprinted  from  the  Contribu- 
tions to  Knowledge  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution,  vol.  12”; 
not,  however,  so  published.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru.  j 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  31  (1861),  63;  34  (1862),  341;  37  (1864),  57;  J.  prakt.  Chem. 

84  (1861),  65;  91  (1864),  171;  94  (1865),  10;  Chem.  News,  3 (1861),  130, 
148;  7 (1863),  61,  73,  97;  9 (1864),  121;  R5p.  chim.  pur.  3 (1861),  218; 

4 (1862),  259;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  2 (1864),  39;  3 (1865),  285;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1864,  355;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  120  (1861),  99;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  5 (1866),  117,  132,  136;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  166  (1862),  396;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1861,  328;  1862,  231;  1863,  290;  1864,  287;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  I 

21  (1862),  256. 

1861:  7.  G.  Kirchhoff  and  R.  W.  Bunsen.  Chemische  Analyse  j 
durch  Spectralbeobachtungen.  (Solubility  of  rubidium  and  j 
cesium  platinichlorides,  pp.  352,  371.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  113  (1861),  337;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  64  (1862),  257;  | 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  85  (1862),  65;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  40  (1861),  311;  Chem. 
News,  4 (1861),  44;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  1 (1862),  62;  rhil.  Mag.  [4],  | 

22  (1861),  329,  498;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  176,  180. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


113 


1861:  8.  M.  Holzmann.  Zur  Kenntniss  der  Cerverbindungen. 
(Cerchlorur  platinchlorid,  p.  80.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  84  (1861),  76;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  22  (1861),  216;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1861,  188. 

1861:  9.  J.  Lang.  Om  n&gra  nya  Platinoxydulforeningar.  Upsala, 
1861.  (Sulphate,  sulphite,  nitrite.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  83  (1861),  415;  R4p.  chim.  pur.  4 (1862),  220;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1861,  316. 

1861:  10.  J.  Lang.  Bidrag  till  Kannedomen  om  Platinachlorurens 
dubbelforeningar.  (Platinum  double  chlorides.)  Pt. 

Oefvers.  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  18  (1861),  227;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  86 
(1862),  126;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1862,  672;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  230. 

1861:  11.  E.  Baudrimont.  Action  exercde  par  le  perchlorure  de 
phosphore  sur  plusieurs  elements  chimiques.  (Action  of  phos- 
phorus pentachloride  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  53  (1861),  637;  J.  prakt,  Chem.  87  (1863),  303;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  4 
(1862),  61;  Ztsch.  Chem.  5 (1862),  119;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  113;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  1861,  117. 

1861:  12.  L.  T.  Lange.  Ueber  einige  neue  Cerverbindungen.  (Ce- 
rium platincyanur.) , Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  82  (1861),  144;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1861,  456;  Rep.  chim. 
pur.  3 (1861),  471;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  187. 

1861 : 13.  J.  Nickles.  Sur  les  combinaisons  formees  par  les  bro- 
mures  m^talliques  avec  Tether.  (Platinum  and  palladium 

bromide  with  ether.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  52  (1861),  869;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  39  (1861),  423;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  3 
(1861),  232;  L’lnstitut,  29  (1861),  150;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  200. 

1861:  14.  P.  Griess  and  C.  A.  Martius.  Note  sur  T^thvlene- 
chlorure  de  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  53  (1861),  922;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  _120  (1861),  324;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  86  (1862),  427;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1862,  773;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  4 
(1862),  112. 

1861:  15.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  nagra  ammoniakaliska  Chromfore- 
ningar.  (Platinum  chlorides  of  chromium  bases.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt.  Akad.  Forhandl.  Stockholm,  18  (1861),  163. 

1861:  16.  A.  Bechamp  and  C.  Saint  Pierre.  Recherches  sur  la 
separation  (par  voie  humide)  de  Tor  et  du  platine,  d’avec 
retain  et  Tantimoine.  Reduction  du  perchlorure  du  fer  par 
le  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  52  (1861),  757;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  84  (1861),  382;  Chem.  News,  4 
(1861),  284;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  3 (1861),  232;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  1861,  67; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  160  (1861),  372;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  865. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 8 


114 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1861 : 17.  Y.  Faget.  Observations  sur  une  note  de  M,  Bechamp  et 
Saint-Pierre.  Pt. 

Bill.  Soc.  chim.  1861,  66;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  865. 

1861:  18.  C.  Saint-Pierre.  Reponse  a M.  Faget.  (Reduction  of 
ferric  chloride  by  platinum.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  1861,  68. 

1861:  19.  E.  Saint-Edme.  Sur  la  faculte  qu’a  le  platine  rendu 
incandescent  par  un  courant  electrique  de  produire  des  combi- 
naisons  gazeuses.  Pt. 

C.  R.  52  (1861),  408;  Chem.  News,  3 (1861),  385;  4 (1861),  118. 

1861:  20.  F.  Crace-Calvert,  R.  Johnson,  and  G.  C.  Lowe.  On 
the  expansion  of  metals  and  alloys.  (Expansion  of  platinum.) 

Chem.  News,  3 (1861),  357;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  17.  Pt. 

1861:  21.  E.  F.  von  Gorup-Besanez.  Ueber  die  Producte  der 
Einwirkung  des  Platinmohrs  auf  Mannit.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  118  (1861),  257;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  84  (1861),  462; 
Rep.  chim.  pur.  3 (1861),  401. 

1861:  22..  V.  Regnault.  Sur  le  chaleur  specifique.  (Metaux  qui 
accompagnent  le  platine,  p.  13.)  Pt,  Os,  Rh,  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  63  (1861),  5;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  121  (1862),  237; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1862,  442;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  23  (1862),  110;  Rep.  chim. 
pur.  4 (1862),  81;  Ztsch.  Chem.  5 (1862),  178;  Jsb.  Chem.  1861,  26. 

1861:  23.  G.  Kirchiioff.  Untersuchung  fiber  das  Sonnenspectrum 
und  die  Spectren  der  chemischen  Elemente. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Abh.  Akad.  Berlin,  1861,  63;  1862,  227;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  68  (1863),  1; 
Cimento,  16  (1862),  199. 

1862:  1.  H.  Ludwig.  Calif ornisches  Platinerz.  Pt  (etc.). 

Arch,  der  Pharm.  [2],  110  (1862),  14;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  707. 

1862:  2.  C.  F.  Chandler.  A new  metal  in  the  native  platinum  of 
Rogue  River,  Oregon.  — , Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  32  (1862),  351;  Chem.  News,  6 (1862),  30;  Ann.  der 
Phys.  (Pogg.),  117  (1862),  190;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  88  (1863),  191;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1862,  559;  L’Institut,  30  (1862),  308;  Rdp.  chim.  pur.  4 (1862), 
409;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  24  (1862),  168;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  351;  J.  Frank. 
Inst.  [3],  55  (1868),  301. 

1862:  3.  H.  von  Jossa.  Ueber  die  Erzeugnisse  der  unter  der  Auf- 
sicht  des  uralischen  Oberbergamtes  stehenden  Privat  Berg- 
und  Huttenwerke  des  Uralgebirges  im  Jalire  1859.  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  21  (1862),  363. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


115 


1862:  4.  H.  yon  Jossa.  Ueber  die  Erzeugnisse  der  unter  dem  Mos- 
kauer  Oberbergamtes  stehenden  Trans-Moskowischen  Berg- 
und  Hiittenwerke  fiir  das  Jahr  1859.  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  21  (1862),  417. 

1862:5.  T.  L.  Phipson.  On  crystallized  platinum.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  5 (1862),  144;  Jab.  Chem.  1882,  229. 

1862:  6.  A.  Noble.  Crystallized  platinum.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  5 (1862),  168;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  229. 

1862 : 7.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  PI.  Debray.  Sur  la  metal- 
lurgie  du  platine.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

C.  R.  54  (1862),  1139;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  87  (1862),  293;  Chem.  News, 
6 (1862),  150;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1862,  507;  L’Institut,  30  (1862),  177; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  1.65  (1862),  205;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  642;  Chem.  tech. 
Mitth.  (Eisner),  12  (1862-63),  138. 

1862:  8.  Platinum  standard  kilogram.  (Report  from  C. 

R.  and  Prussian  government.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  5 (1862),  64. 

1862:  9.  C.  Claus.  (Ruthenium  als  Reagenz.)  Ru. 

Pharm.  Ztsch.  fiir  Russland,  1 (1862),  303;  Jsb.  Chem.  1863,  697. 

1862:  10.  C.  Claus.  Ueber  ein  allgemeines  Verfahren,  die  einzelnen 
Platinmetalle  in  ihren  verschiedenartigen  Verbindungen  zu 
erkennen.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Pharm.  Ztsch.  fur  Russland,  1 (1862),  333. 

1862:  11.  E.  Baudrimont.  Recherches  sur  les  combinaisons  du  per- 
chlorure  de  phosphore  avec  d’autres  chlorures.  Pt. 

C.  R.  55  (1862),  361,  419;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  88  (1863),  79;  91  (1864),  105; 
J.  de  pharm.  [3],  42  (1862),  190;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1863,  151;  Rep.  chim. 
pur.  4 (1862),  403;  Ztsch.  Chem.  5 (1862),  572;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  55. 

1862:  12.  H.  Sciiiff.  Zur  Kenntniss  der  metallhaltigen  Ammonium- 
derivate.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  123  (1862),  1. 

1862:  13.  C.  D.  Braun.  Ueber  ammoniakalische  Kobaltverbind- 
ungen.  Inaug.  Diss.  Gottingen,  1862.  (Platinum  salts  of 
cobalt  bases.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  125  (1863),  153,  197;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  207. 

1862:  14.  C.  Saint-Pierre.  Sur  la  reduction  du  perchlorure  de  fer 
par  le  platine,  le  palladium,  et  Tor;  reduction  des  chlorures 
d'or  et  de  palladium  par  le  platine.  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  54  (1862),  1077;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  1862,  74;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  90 
(1863),  380;  Rep.  chim.  pur.  4 (1862),  252;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  4 (1862), 
293;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  1 (1862),  482;  Ztsch.  Chem.  5 (1862),  433; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  80. 


19f.t 


116  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM-  GROUP* 

1862:  15.  J.  Personne.  Note  sur  la  reduction  du  perchlorure  de  fer 
par  Taction  de  la  chaleur  et  sur  son  pou voir  chlorurant.  (Re- 
duction by  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  1862,  66;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  196. 

1862:  16.  A.  C.  Becquerel  and  E.  Becquerel.  Reduction  61ectro- 
cbimique  du  cobalt,  du  nickel,  de  Tor,  de  T argent  et  du  platin-e. 

Pt. 

C.  R.  55  (1862),  18;  Chem.  News,  6 (1862),  126;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig), 
124  (1862),  311;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  86  (1862),  503;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1862, 
772;  R£p.  chim.  pur.  4 (1862),  321;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  165  (1862), 
373. 

1862:  17.  E.  Becquerel.  Recherches  sur  la  determination  des 
hautes  temperatures  et  T irradiation  des  corps  incandescents. 
(Fusion  of  platinum  and  palladium,  Ann.  chim.  phys.  68:  136; 
porosity  of  platinum  in  pyrometer.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  55  (1862),  826;  57  (1863),  855;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  68  (1863),  49; 
L’Institut,  31  (1863),  369;  Jsb.  Chem.  1863,  25. 

1862:  18.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  H.  Debray.  Platine  ag- 
glomere  par  voie  de  fusion.  Pt. 

Rep.  chim.  appl.  4 (1862),  294. 

1862:  19.  J.  P.  Joule.  On  some  amalgams.  (Platinum  amalgams, 
p.  122.)  Pt. 

Mem.  Phil.  Soc.  Manchester  [3],  2 (1865),  115;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  16  (1863), 
384;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1864,  222;  Jsb.  Chem.  1863;  382.  ■ K 

1862 : 20.  C.  Aubel.  Das  Schmelzen  des  Platins  mittelst  Holzkoh- 
len.  ' Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  165  (1862),  278;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  21  (1862),  392. 

1862:  21.  W.  Heraeus.  Ueber  das  Schmelzen  des  Platins  in  Beriih- 
rung  mit  Kohle.  Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  167  (1863),  132;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  28  (1862),  344,  1434; 
Rep.  chim.  appl.  5 (1863),  134;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  22  (1863),  256. 

1862:  22.  [F.  H.  Storer?]  American  process  of  working  plati- 
num. Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  33  (1862),  124;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  4 (1862),  294. 

1862:  23. Bericht  fiber  einzelne  Abtheilungen  der  Lon- 

doner Industrie-Ausstellung.  (Exhibit  of  Johnson,  Matthey 
& Co.,  p.  290.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  21  (1862),  289. 

1862:  24.  J.  Hunt.  (Bronzing  of  copper  and  copper  alloys  by  plati- 
num chloride.)  English  patent,  June  17,  1862.  Pt: 

London  J.  of  Arts,  17  (1863),  102;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  168  (1863),  35; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1863,  560;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  29  (1863),  549;  Chem. 
tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  12  (1862-63),  140. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.’ 


117 


1862:  25.  E.  Wiederholt.  Ueber  die  Zersetzung  des  chlorsauren 
Kalis,  bei  niederer  Temperatur  durch  Braunstein  (und  Platin- 
schwarz) . 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  116  (1862),.  171;  Chem.  News,  7 (1863),  157; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1862,  808;  R5p.  chim.  pur.  5 (1863),  9:  Ztsch.  Chem.  5 
(1862),  503;  Jsb.  Chem.  1862,  77. 

1862:  26.  W.  A.  Miller.  On  the  photographic  transparency  of  va- 
rious bodies  and  on  the  photographic  effects  of  metallic  and 
other  spectra  obtained  by  means  of  the  electric  spark.  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  152  (1862),  861;  L Chem.  Soc.  17  (1864),  77. 

1863:  1.  O.  C.  Marsh.  Platinum  and  platinum  metals  at  Interna- 
tional Exhibition  at  London,  1862.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  35  (1863),  256. 

1863:  la.  A.  Antipov.  The  character  and  present  condition  of  the 
mining  trade  in  the  Ural.  (From  Der  Charakter  der  Erzfiihr- 
ung  des  Ural,  und  der  gegenwartige  Zustand  des  Bergbau’s 
daselbst:  Beitr.  Russ.  Reich,  22  (1861),  1.)  Pt. 

Mining  J.  29  (1863),  498. 

1863:  lb.  ■ — Platinum  in  diorite  of  the  district  of  Nijni- 

Tagilsk.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  29  (1863),  416. 

1863:  2.  A.  Guyard.  Nouveau  precede  detraction  des  metaux 
des  residues  platiniferes.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

C.  R.  56  (1863),  1177;  Chem.  News,  8 (1863),  106;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1863, 
952;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  169  (1863),  278;  Ztsch.  Chem.  6 (1863),  740; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1863,  290;  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  22  (1863),  440;  Polyt. 
Centrbl.  29  (1863),  1236;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  13  (1863-64), 
152. 

1863:  3.  E.  Jacobi.  Monographia  metalla  Osmia.  (Monograph  of 
osmium.)  Dissertation,  St.  Petersburg,  1863.  Os. 

1863:  4.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  des  Thalliums  in 
salinischen  Mineralwassern.  (Bereitung  des  Platinchlorids 
von  Platinabfallen,  u.  s.  w.,  p.  246.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  128  (1863),  240;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1865,  127;  Be- 
gluckwunschschrift  phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt,  1863,  3;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 
3 (1864),  137;  Jsb.  Chem.  1863,  289;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  18  (1863),  309; 
Chem.  tech.  Repert.  2 (1863),  90;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  13 
(1863-64),  143. 

1863:  5.  E.  tMillon  and  A.  Commaille.  Etudes  chimiques  sur  le 
cuivre.  (Chloroplatinate  of  eupro-ammonium.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  57  (1863),  820;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1864,  181,  525;  Chem.  News,  9 (1864), 
49;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  1 (1864),  357;  Jsb.  Chem.  1863,  289. 


118  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1863:  6.  H.  Debus.  Ueber  die  Darstellung  des  Methylamins  aus 
Blausaure  und  Wasserstoff  (durch  Platinschwarz) . (Cyanide 
of  platinum  and  methylamin.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  128  (1863),  200;  BuL  Soc.  chim.  6 (1866),  381; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1884,  8;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  16  (1863),  249;  Ztsch.  Chem.  6 
(1863),  721;  Jsb.  Chem.  1863,  407. 

1863:  7.  W.  Delffs.  Ueber  ein  neues  zur  Diagnose  der  Alkaloide 
besonders  geeignetes  Reagens.  (Potassium  platinocyanide.) 

Pt. 

Verh.  Naturhist.  med.  Yer.  Heidelberg,  3 (1863?),  20;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 
3 (1864),  152;  Ztsch.  Chem.  6 (1863),  630. 

1863:  8.  C.  Matteucci.  Sur  la  diffusion  des  gaz  a travers  certains 
corps  poreux  (platine).  Pt. 

C.  R.  57  (1863),  251;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  5 (1866),  546;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1864, 
225;  L’Institut,  31  (1863),  253;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  45  (1864),  221;  N.  arch, 
ph.  nat.  18  (1863),  103;  Jsb.  Chem.  1863,  23. 

1863:  9.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deyille  and  L.  Troost.  De  la  mesure 
des  temperatures  elevees.  (Porosity  of  platinum  at  high  tem- 
peratures.) Pt;  Pd. 

C.  R.  56  (1863),  977;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  Suppl.  2.(1863),  387;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1863,  1048;  Chem.  News,  7 (1863),  294;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  5 
(1866),  433;  L’Institut,  31  (1863),  161;  N.  arch.  ph.  nat.  18  (1863),  99; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  171  (1864),  199;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  26  (1863),  336;  Rep. 
chim.  appl.  5 (1863),  236;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  2 (1863),  351;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1863,  23;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  52  (1866),  418. 

1863:  10.  W.  PIeldt.  Ueber  die  sogenannte  Passivitat  der  Metalle 
Platin  und  Zinn.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  90  (1863),  260. 

1863:  11.  T.  Richter.  Ueber  die  Schmelzung  des  Platins  mittelst 
Holzkohlen.  Pt. 

Berg-u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  22  (1863),  195;  from  Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Jahrb.  12 
(1863). 

1863:  12.  C.  Aubel.  Schmelzung  des  Platins  im  Focus  der  Diise 
eines  Eisenhohofens  auf  Retortenkoks-Unterlage.  Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  168  (1863)^28;  Rep.  chim.  appl.  5 (1863),  134;  Berg-  u. 
Hiitten.  Ztg.  22  (1863),  272. 

1863:  13.  C.  A.  Gruel.  Die  Schweissbarkeit  des  Platins  und  ihr 
Nutzen  in  der  physikalischen  Technik.  Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  170  (1863),  284. 

1863:  14.  P.  Tunner.  Bericht  iiber  die  metallurgischen  Gegen- 
stande  der  Londoner  Weltindustrie-AussteUung  von  1862. 
Wien,  1863.  (1(24,  H.  Muller,  Palladium-Platinirung;  27, 

Platindarstellung  nach  Deville  durch  Schmelzung.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Berg-  u.  Hiitten.  Ztg.  22  (1863),  168. 


1863:  15. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


119 

Pt. 


(Plating  with  platinum.) 

N.  Jahrb.  fur  Pharm.  19  (1863),  323;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1863,  896. 

1863:  16.  Hagar.  (Substances  which  should  not  be  fused  in 

platinum  crucibles.)  Pt. 

J.  de  pharm. ; Chem.  News,  8 (1863),  12. 

1863:  17.  W.  Frazer.  Osmium  spectrum.  Os. 

Chem.  News,  8 (1863),  34;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1864,  223;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2], 
36  (1863),  267;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  2 (1863),  353. 

1863:  18.  G.  Quincke.  Ueber  die  optische  Eigenschaften  der 

Metalle.  (Platinum.)  Pt. 

Monatsber.  Acad.  Berlin,  1863,  115;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.'),  119  (1863), 
385. 

1864:  1.  M.  C.  Lea.  Notes  on  the  platinum  metals,  and  their 
separation  from  each  other.  (Use  of  oxalic  acid  in  addition 
to  Claus’s  process.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  38  (1864),  81,  248;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  95  (1865),  351;  Chem. 
News,  10  (1864),  279,  301;  11  (1865),  3,  13;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1865,  393; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  6 (1866),  127;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  123; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1864,  290. 

1864:  2.  E.  Baudrimont.  Recherches  sur  les  elilorures  et  les 
bromures  de  phosphore.  (Action  of  phosphorus  pentachloride 
on  platinum,  p.  16.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  2 (1864),  5. 

1864:  3.  J.  G.  Gentele.  Ueber  einige  Platinbasen.  (Theoret- 
ical.) Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  93  (1864),  298;  Jsb.  Chem.  1864,  296. 

1864:  4.  C.  A.  Winkler.  Ueber  Siliciumlegirungen  und  Silicium- 
arsenmetalle.  (Silicium  Legirungen  mit  Platin,  p.  203.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  91  (1864),  193;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1864,  774;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  2 (1864),  32;  J.  de  pharm.  [3],  45  (1864),  553;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1864,  209. 

1864:  5.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  die  Reduction  der  Platindoppel- 
verbindungen  des  Casiums,  Rubidiums  und  Kaliums  auf 
nassem  Wege.  * Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  91  (1864),  251;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  3 (1864),  302. 

1864:  6.  C.  Geitner.  Ueber  das  Vcrhalten  des  Schwefels  und  der 
schwefligen  Saure  zu  Wasser  bei  hoher  Temperatur.  (Action 
of  sulphur  dioxide  on  platinum,  p.  358.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  129  (1864),  350;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  93  (1864),  99; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1864,  143;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  2 (1864],  438;  J.  de 
pharm.  [3],  45  (1864),  453,  457;  Jsb.  Chem.  1864,  143. 


120 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1864:  7.  C.  Brunner.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des  Wasserstoffgases 
auf  die  Losungen  einiger  Metallsalze.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Mitth.  Naturf.  Gesel.  Bern,  1864,  17;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  122  (1864), 
153;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1864,  604;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  2 (1864),  441;  Phil. 
Mag.  [4],  28  (1864),  226;  Ztsch.  Chem.  7 (1864),  660;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier), 
171  (1864),  287;  Jsb.  Chem.  1864,  124. 

1864:  8.  A.  Schrotter.  Ueber  ein  vereinfachtes  Verfahren  das 
Lithium,  Rubidium,  Casium  und  Thallium  aus  den  Lithion- 
glimmern  zu  gewinnen  (Anwendung  von  Platinchlorid) . (Solu- 
bility of  platinichlorides.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  50,  ii  (1864),  268;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  93  (1864),  282; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1865,  331;  N.  Jalirb.  der  Pharm.  23  (1865),  16,  65;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1864,  182. 

1864:  9.  W.  Crookes.  On  thallium.  (Thallium  platiniehloride;  alloy 

of  thallium  and  platinum,  p.  147.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  17  (1864),  112. 

1864:  10.  W.  Crookes.  On  the  solubility  of  some  thallium  salts. 
(Solubility  of  platinichlorides  of  potassium,  ammonium,  thal- 
lium, etc.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  9 (1864),  37;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  1 (1864), >266;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1864,256.  ' .... 

1864:  11.  L.  Ditscheiner.  Die  Krystallformen  einiger  Platin- 

cyanverbindungen.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  50,  ii  (1864),  373;  Anzeig.  Akad.  Wien,  1 (1864), 
169;  L’Institut,  33  (1865),  55. 

1864:  12.  Platinage  des  metaux.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  1 (1864),  301. 

1864:  13.  H.  Kopp.  Untersuchungen  fiber  die  specifische  Warine 
der  starren  und  tropfbarflfissigen  Korper.  (Specifische  Warme 
des  Platins  und  des  Iridiums,  p.  73;  des  Platinchlorid-Chlor- 


kaliums,  p.  95.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  Suppl.  Bd.  3 (1864),  1. 

1864:  14.  F.  J.  Pisko.  Beitrag  zur  Fluorescenz  des  Lichtes. 
(Cesium-platinum  sulphide.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  123  (1864),  167. 

1864:  15.  F.  M.  Raoult.  Recherches  sur  les  forces  elec tromo trices. 
(Force  produced  at  contact  of  platinum  and  gold.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  2 (1864),  317. 

1865:  1.  K.  Kraut.  Baryum  in  Platin.  Pt. 


Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  4 (1865),  369;  Chem.  News,  14  (1866),  34;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1865,  282. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OP  PLATINUM  GROUP.  121 

1865:  2.  V.  von  Zepharovich.  Krystallographische  Mittheilung 
uber  zwei  Platindoppelsalze  des  Piperidinharnstoffes.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akacl.  Wien,  52,  ii  (1865),  241. 

1865:  3.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Bidrag  till  kannedomen  om  ammoniakaliska 
Kromforeningar.  (Platinichlorides  of  chromium  bases.)  Pt. 

Handl.  Akad.  Stockholm  [2],  6,  (1866),  4. 

1865:  4.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Fdrelopande  underrattelser  om  nagra  brom- 
och  jodhaltiga  ammoniakaliska  Platinaforeningar.  (Bromine 
and  iodine  salts  of  platinum  bases.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  22  (1865),  487;  J.  prakt. 

Chem.  100  (1867),  22;  Jsb.  Chem.  1867,  321. 

1865:  5.  H.  Baubigny.  Ueber  ein  neues  Palladiumsalz  (Pallad- 
aminchlorur).  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  Suppl.  Bd.  4 (1865),  253;  Ztsch.  Chem.  9 (1866), 
508;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  276. 

1865:  6.  C.  Birnbaum.  Ueber  die  Bromverbindungen  des  Iridiums. 
Inaug.  Diss.  Gottingen,  1864.  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  133  (1865),  161;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  96  (1865),  207; 
Bui.  Soc.  ehim.  [2],  4 (1865),  112;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1865,  354;  Ztsch. 
Chem.  8 (1865),  22;  Jsb.  Chem.  1864,  292. 

1865:  7.  C.  Birnbaum.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  der  schwefligen 
Saure  auf  das  blaue  Iridiumoxydhy drat.  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  136  (1865),  177;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  5 (1866),  354; 

/;Chem,  Centrbl.  1865,  1132;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  98  (1866),  32;  Ztsch. 
Chem.  8 (1865),  459;  Jsb.  Chem.  1865,  283. 

1865:  8.  J.  Redtenbacher.  Ueber  die  Trennung  von  Rubidium 
und  Casium  in  Form  der  Alaune.  (Loslichkeit  des  Kalium, 
Rubidium  und  Casium  Platinchlorids.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  51,  ii  (1865),  247;  Anzeig.  Akad.  Wien,  2 (1865), 
39;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  94  (1865),  442;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1865,  625;  L’lnsti- 
tut,  33  (1865),  216;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  2 (1865),  375;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  4 
(1865),  97;  Ztsch.  Chem.  8 (1865),  345;  Jsb.  Chem.  1865,  705. 

1865:  9.  E.  A.  van  der  Burg.  Chemisehe  Mittheilungen  in  Betreff 
der  China- Alkaloide.  (Verhalten  der  China-Alkaloide  zu  einer 
Kaliumplatincyanurlosung,  p.  296.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  4 (1865),  272;  Jsb.  Chem.  1865,  439. 

1865:  10.  C.  Stahlschmidt,  Sy,  and  Wagner.  (Platinum-plated 
dishes  for  the  chemical  laboratory.)  Pt. 

Verh.  Yer.  Beford.  Gewerbefleisses  in  Preussen,  1865,  90;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  98  (1866),  320;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  179  (1866),  162;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  5 (1866),  99. 

1865:  11.  G.  Magnus.  (Note  on  plating  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  6 (1865),  146. 


122 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1865:  12.  A.  Salvetat.  Ueber  die  Spiegel  aus  platinirtem  Glase 
von  Creswell  und  Tavernier.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  encourage.  Sept.  (1865),  526;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  180  (1866), 
39;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  32  (1866),  407,  730;  Chem.  tech.  Repert.  4,  ii  (1865), 
39;  Deutsch.  indust.  Ztg.  6 (1865),  495;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner) 
15  (1865-66),  192. 

1865:  13.  J.  B.  A.  Dode.  (Platinspiegel.)  Pt. 

Les  Mondes,  7,  603;  Breslauer  Gewerbeblatt  (1865),  No.  13;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  3 (1865),  398;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  177  (1865),  79;  J.  Frank. 
Inst.  [3],  50  (1865),  273;  Lond.  J.  Arts.  Sci.  (1865),  July. 

: 14. Platinum  mirrors,  introduced  by  Dode.  Pt. 


1865 

1865 

1865 


Quart,  J.  of  Sci.  2 (1865),  497. 

15.  Schwarz.  Dode’s  Platinspiegel.  Pt. 

Breslauer  Gewerbebl.  (1865),  No.  13;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1865,  960. 

16.  P.  Weiskopf.  Platinaspiegeln  auf  Glas.  Pt. 

Deutsch.  Gew.  Ztg.  30  (1865),  468;  Chem.  tech.  Repert.  4,  ii  (1865),  40; 
Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  15  (1865f-66),  191. 

1865:  17.  K.  Kraut.  Ein  Vorlesungsversuch.  (Oxidation  von 
Ammoniak  zu  Ammoniumnitrat  mittelst  Platindraht.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  136  (1865),  69;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  51  (1866),  137. 

1865:  18.  E.  Sell.  Sur  un  produit  de  Toxydation  de  Terythrite 
(par  platinmohr).  Pt. 

C.  R.  61  (1865),  741;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  97  (1866),  251. 

1865:  19.  E.  Edlund.  Qvantitativ  bestamning  af  de  varmefeno- 
mener,  som  uppkomma  vid  metallers  volumforandring,  af 
veorsom  af  varmets  mekaniska  eqvivalent,  oberoende  af 
metallens  nire  arbete.  (Elasticitats-Coefficienten  des  Platins.) 

Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Stockholm,  22  (1865),  295;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
126  (1865),  565;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  8 (1867),  257. 

1866:1.  N.  von  Kokscharow.  Mineralogische  No tizen  fiber  . . . 
Platin.  (Platinum  ore  magnetic.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  11  (1867),  79;  Jahr.  Min.  1867,  194;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1866,  912. 

1866:  la.  N.  von  Kokscharow.  Materiaux  pour  la  mineralogie 
de  la  Russie,  vol.  5,  p.  177.  Pt. 

1866:  2.  F.  Wohler.  Ueber  ein  neues  Mineral  von  Borneo. 
(Laurit,  RuOsS.)  Ru,  Os. 

Gottingen  Nachrichten,  1866,  155;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  139  (1866), 
116;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  98  (1866),  226;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1866,  620;  €.  R. 
62  (1866),  1059;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  9 (1866),  515;  Natuurk.  Tijdsch. 
Batavia,  30  (1868),  416. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  123 

1866:3.  S.  Cloez.  Iridium  cristallise.  Ir.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  5 (1866),  162. 

1866:  4.  E.  Sonstadt.  Note  on  the  purification  of  platinum. 
(Cleaning  platinum  crucibles  from  iron  ores.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  13  (1866),  145;  J.  de  pharm.  [4],  4 (1866),  152;  Polyt. 
J.  (Dingier),  180  (1866),  365;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  51  (1866),  416;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1866,  267;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  32  (1866),  758;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth. 
(Eisner),  15  (1865-66),  163. 

1866:  5.  A.  Forster.  Zur  Kenntniss  und  Trennung  der  Platin- 
metalle  (Resume).  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  117;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  226. 

1866:  6.  C.  F.  Schonbein.  De  Faction  du  platine,  du  ruthenium, 
du  rhodium  et  de  Firidium  sur  Feau  de  chlor,  sur  les  dissolu- 
tions aqueuses  des  hypochlorites,  sur  les  peroxyde  d’hydrogene, 
et  sur  Foxygene  ozonize.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  7 (1866),  103;  8 (1866),  465;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  98 
(1866),  76;  Verh.  Naturf.  Gesel.  Basel,  4 (1867),  286;  J.  de  pharm.  [4], 
4 (1866),  395;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  7 (1867),  339;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  104; 
Sitzber.  Akad.  Miinchen,  1866,  i,  278;  Chem.  News,  13  (1866),  207. 

1866:  7.  C.  Birnbaum.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  schwefliger 
Saure  auf  Platinoxydhydrat.  (Also  separation  of  platinum 
and  iridium,  p.  177.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  139  (1866),  164;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  100  (1867),  123; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  6 (1866),  453;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1866,  854;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  405;  Ztsch.  Chem.  9 (1866),  235;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866, 
269. 

1866:  8.  P.  Schottlander.  Platinur-Natrium-Hyposulphit.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  140  (1866),  200;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  100  (1867),  381; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1867,  223;  Ztsch.  Chem.  9 (1866),  739;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866, 
268. 

1866:  9.  [F.  Wohler.]  Zur  Kenntniss  des  Osmiums.  Os. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  140  (1866),  253;  Chem.  News,  15  (1867),  86;  J. 
prakt.  Chem.  100  (1867),  407;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  7 (1867),  396;  Ztsch. 
Chem.  9 (1866),  742;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  276. 

1866:  10.  J.  H.  Gladstone.  On  pyrophosphotriamic  acid.  (Plat- 
inum salt,  p.  12.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  19  (1866),  1. 

1866:  11.  II.  Rossler.  Ueber  die  Doppelcyaniire  des  Palladiums. 
(Inaug.  Diss.)  Gottingen,  1866.  (Refers  also  to  double 
cyanides  of  platinum.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Chem.  9 (1866),  175;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  6 (1866),  323;  Ztsch, 
anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  403;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  275,  290. 

1866:  12.  P.  T.  Cleye.  Om  ammoniakaliska  Platinforeningar.  Pt. 

Nova  acta  Upsala  [3],  6 (1866),  5;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  7 (1867),  12;  Ztsch. 
Chem.  10  (1867),  228;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1867,  945;  Jsb.  Chem.  1867,  321. 


124 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1866:  13.  E.  A.  Hadow.  The  platinum-bases:  the  best  mode  of  ob- 
taining and  identifying  them;  some  new  compounds.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  19  (1866),  345;  Chem.  News,  13  (1866),  281;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1867,  625;  J.  prakt,  Chem.  100  (1867),  30;  Ztsch.  Chem.  9 (1866),  560; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  272. 

1866:  14.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  ein  sehr  auffallendes  Verhalten 
verschiedener  Stoffe  zu  Schwefel-Wasserstoffgas.  (Platin- 
schwarz  und  Schiesswolle.)  Pt. 

Jsb.  phys.  Yer.  Frankfurt,  1866-67;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  103  (1868),  310. 

1866:  15.  [F.  Wohler.]  Trennung  von  Kupfer  und  Palladium. 

(By  potassium  thiocyanate.)  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  140  (1866),  144;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  10  (1867), 
510;  Chem.  News,  15  (1867),  40;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  7 (1867),  40;  J. 
prakt.  Chem.  100  (1867),  440;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  182  (1866),  347; 
Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  403;  Ztsch.  Chem.  9 (1866),  754;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1866,  810. 

1866:  16.  A.  Commaille.  Sur  Faction  du  nitrate  d’argent  et  du 
protonitrate  de  mercure  sur  le  bichlorure  de  platine.  (Chloro- 
platinate  of  silver,  etc.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  63  (1866),  553;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  6 (1866),  262;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1867,  125;  Chem.  News,  14  (1866),  175;  J.  de  pharm.  [4],  4 (1866),  363; 
Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  6 (1867),  121;  Ztsch.  Chem.  9 (1866),  668;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1866,  267.  : . 

1866:  17.  R.  Finkener.  Ueber  die  Trennung  des  Kalium  vom 
Natrium  und  mehreren  anderen  Substanzen  vermittelst  Platin- 
chlorid.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  129  (1866),  637;  Chem.  Centrbl;  1867,  333;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  6 (1867),  213. 

1866:  18.  G.  Dragendorff.  Ueber  einige  neue  Reagentien  auf  Al- 
kaloide.  (Iridium  trichloride  and  ruthenium  trichloride .)  Ir , Ru. 

Pharm.  Ztsch.  f.  Russland,  5 (1866),  82;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1867,  87. 

1866:  19.  R.  Bunsen.  Flammenreactionen.  (Platinum  metals, 
pp.  284,  285.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  138  (1866),  257;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  32  (1866),  97,  100; 
N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  27  (1866),  25;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  371; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  780;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  55  (1868),  129,  266. 

1866:  20.  — Platinum  apparatus  (platinized  copper).  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  14  (1866),  179. 

1866:  21.  G.  C.  Wittstein.  Ueber  die  Ursache  der  allmaligen  Ge- 
wichtsabnahme  der  Platintiegel  beim  Gliihen.  Pt,  Os. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  179  (1866),  299;  Arch,  der  Pharm.  [2],  125  (1866),  242; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1866,  79;  Vierteljsch.  fur  Pharm.  15  (1866),  14;  Z£sch> 
Pharm.  fiir  Russland,  4,  475;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1866),  98;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1866,  267;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  21  (1866),  No.  2;  Pharm.  Centrhalle, 
7 (1866),  No.  1;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  15  (1865-66),  140;  Polyt. 
Centrbl.  32  (1866),  349,  611;  Deutsch.  111.  Gew.  Ztg.  (1866),  No.  9. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  125 

1866:  22.  A.  Scheurer-Kestner.  (Use  of  platinum  vessels  in  con- 
centrating sulphuric  acid,  and  its  waste.)  Pt. 

Mech.  Mag.  (1866),  Apr.;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  52  (1866),  69,  471. 

1866:  23.  J.  B.  Thomson.  (Deposition  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  52  (1866),  69. 

1866:  24.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  cine  sehr  geeignete  Flussigkeit  zum 
Yerplatiniren  von  Kupfer,  Messing,  Neusilber  und  dergl.  Pt. 
Jsb.  Phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt,  1866-67:  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  188  (1868),  252; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  103  (1868),  311;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  10  (1868),  166; 
Polyt.  Notizbl.  23  (1868),  No.  10;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  17 
(1867-68),  173. 

1866:  25.  T.  Graham.  On  the  absorption  and  dialytic  separation 
of  gases  by  colloid  septa.  Action  of  metallic  septa  at  a red 
heat.  (Platinum,  p.  415;  palladium,  426;  osmium  and  iri- 
dium, 431.)  Pt,  Pd,  Os,  Ir. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  156  (1866),  399;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  15  (1866), 
223;  Chem.  News,  14  (1866),  88;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  20  (1867),  235;  Ann. 
Chem.  (Liebig),  Suppl.  Bd.  5 (1867),  33,  53;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  12 
(1867),  505;  Ann.  der  Phys.  129  (1866),  576;  C.  R.  63  (1866),  471;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1866,  1017;  1867,  130;  L’lnstitut,  34  (1866),  315;  J.  de  pharm. 
[4],  4 (1866),  351;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  99  (1867),  126;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat. 
28  (1867),  193;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  32  (1866),  401,  503;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier), 
,182  (1866),  307;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  6(1867),  108;  Ztsch.  Chem.  10(1867), 

139;  jsb.  Chem.  1866,  43. 

;v,:  \ ' LA  \>i.  ' 7 ■■  : ■ 

1866:  26.  P.  de  Wilde.  Action  de  Fhydrogene  sur  Facetylene  sous 
F influence  du  noir  de  platine.  (Absorption  of  acetylene  by 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  Bruxelles,  21  (1866),  31;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  Suppl.  Bd. 
4 (1866),  378;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  5 (1866),  175;  12  (1869),  103;  J.  Frank. 
Inst.  [3],  51  (1866),  322;  Kosmos,  . 

1866:  27.  A.  Matthiessen.  On  the  expansion  by  heat  of  metals 
and  alloys.  (Palladium,  Pogg.,  130:59;  Platinum,  60.)  Pd,  Pt. 
Phil.  Trans.  London,  156  (1866),  861;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  15  (1867), 
220;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  130  (1867),  50;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  32  (1866), 
472;  Jsb.  Chem.  1866,  24. 

1866:  28.  V.  yon  Lang.  Orientirung  der  Warmeleitungsfahigkeit 
einaxiger  Krystalle.  (Platinocyanide  of  magnesium.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  54,  ii  (1866),  163;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  135(1868), 
29;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  16  (1869),  469:  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  58;  Anzeig. 
Akad.  Wien,  1866,  157. 

1867:  1.  Iridium  in  Canada.  Ir. 

Keystone  News,  Mar.  1 (1867);  Chem.  News,  15  (1867),  207. 


126 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1867:  2.  R.  Wagner.  Platinfabrikation  (auf  der  Pariser  Ausstel- 
lung),  aus  “Das  Hervorragende  auf  dem  Gebiete  der  chemi- 
schen  Technologie  in  der  allgemeinen  Industrieausstellung  in 
Paris  im  Jahre  1867,”  in  Kunst  und  Gewerbebl.  d.  polyt.  Ver. 
Bayern,  1867.  " Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  102  (1867),  125;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1868,  464;  Polyt.  Centrbl. 
33  (1867),  1282. 

1867:  3.  W.  yon  Schneider.  Ueber  Abscheidung  des  reinen  Pla- 
tins  und  Iridiums  (for  technical  use).  Diss.  Dorpat,  1868,  p. 
62.  Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  Suppl.  Bd.  5 (1867),  261;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  10 
(1868),  21;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1868,  875;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  7 (1868),  262; 
Ztsch.  Chem.  11  (1868),  182;  Jsb.  Chem.  1867,  314,  854;  Ztsch.  Pharm. 
fur  Russland,  1868,  406;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  190  (1868),  118;  Polyt. 
Centrbl.  34  (1868),  1657;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  23  (1868),  No.  19;  Chem.  tech. 
Mitth.  (Eisner),  18  (1868-69),  192. 

1867:  4.  K.  Birnbaum.  Ueber  einige  Doppelsalze  des  Platin- 
chlorids.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Chem.  10  (1867),  528;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  8 (1867),  416;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1867,  319;  Chem.  News,  17  (1868),  60. 

1867:  5.  K.  Birnbaum.  Ueber  die  Verbindungen  des  Aethylens 
und  seiner  Homologen  mit  dem  Platinchlorur.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  145  (1868),  67;  Ztsch.  Chem.  10  (1867),  388,  518; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1868,  680;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  14  (1868),  452;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  8 (1867),  339;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  104  (1868),  381. 

1867:  6.  R.  Weber.  Ueber  einige  Verbindungen  des  Platin- und 
des  Goldehlorids.  (Mit  Chlorwasserstoff  und  Nitrylchlorur.) 

Pt. 

Monatsber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1867,  77;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  131  (1867), 
441;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  8 (1867),  177;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1867,  329; 
L’Institut,  35  (1867),  277;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  101  (1867),  42;  N.  arch, 
sci.  phys.  nat.  30  (1867),  182;  Ztsch.  Chem.  10  (1867),  382;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1867,  319;  Chem.  News,  16  (1867),  24. 

1867:  7.  H.  H.  Croft.  Notes  on  some  compounds  of  palladium. 
(Chlorides  and  thiocyanates.)  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  16  (1867),  53;  Ztsch.  Chem.  10  (1867),  671;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  9 (1868),  313;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1868,  816;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  104  (1868), 
64;  Jsb.  Chem.  1867,  331. 

1867:  8.  E.  Carstanjen.  Ueber  das  Thallium  und  seine  Verbin- 
dungen. (Thallium-Platincyanur,  p.  144.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  102  (1867),  129;  Ztsch.  Chem.  11  (1868),  69;  Jsb. Chem. 
1867,  281. 

1867 : 9.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  nagra  derivator  af  den  Gros’ska  Platina- 
basen,  I,  II.  Pt. 

Handl.  Akad.  Stockholm  [2],  7 (1867),  6;  7 (1868),  7. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


127 


1867:  10.  J.  Thomsen.  En  raekke  Dobbeltchloride,  henhorende  til 
Platinbasernes  Gruppe.  Pt. 

Oversigt  Danske  Vid.  Selsk.  Forh.  Kjobenhavn,  1867,  225;  Resume 
Bui.  Soc.  roy.  Danske,  1867,  42;  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  278. 

1867:  11.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Nogle  analogier  mellem  Platin  og 
Tin,  et  bidrag  til  belysning  af  kiselsyrens  formel.  Pt. 

Skriften  Danske  Vid.  Selsk.  Kjobenhavn  [5],  6 (1867),  449. 

1867:  12.  M.  C.  Lea.  On  a new  test  for  hyposulphites.  (Purple 
with  ruthenium  salts  in  ammoniacal  solution.)  Ru. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  44  (1867),  222;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  103  (1868),  444. 

1867:  13.  Y.  Schwarzenbach.  Ueber  Aequivalenzverhaltnisse  der 
Eiweisskorper.  (Albumen  and  casein  with  platinum  chloride.) 

Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  144  (1867),  62;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  10  (1868),  57; 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  103  (1868),  57;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1867,  852. 

1867:  14.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deyille.  Sur  les  proprietes  du 
alliage  du  platine  et  plombe.  (Platinum-lead  alloy.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  64  (1867),  1098;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  185  (1867),  83;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1868,  272. 


1867:  15.  (Alloy  of  platinum  and  steel.)  Pt. 

Les  Mondes,  13  (1867),  No.  15;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  4 (1867),  427. 

1867:  16.  Church.  LTeber  das  Platiniren  von  Eisen,  Kupfer, 
Messing,  u.  s.  w.  Pt. 

Deutsch.  Gewerb.  Ztg.  32  (1867),  No.  43;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner), 
17  (1867-68),  173. 

1867:  17.  Church.  Bemerkung  zu  dem  Platinirverfahren.  Pt. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  22  (1867),  No.  22;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  17  (1867- 
68),  174. 

1867:  18.  R.  Bottger.  Platin uberziigen  auf  Glas  u.  s.  w.  Pt. 

Jahrb.  Phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt,  1867-68,  64;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  192  (1869), 
475;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  18  (1868-69),  193. 

1867:  19.  G.  Merz.  Einige  Beitrage  zur  Experimental-Chemie; 
24.  Platinmohr  in  einem  Strome  von  mit  Luft  vermischtem 
Leuchtgas.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  101  (1867),  271;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1868,  100. 

1867:  20.  W.  Artus.  Anwendung  des  feinzertheilten  Platins  in 

der  Schnellessigfabrication.  Pt. 

4 Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  186  (1867),  158;  Vierteljsch.  fur  techn.  Chem.; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1868,  272;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  17  (1867-68), 

171. 


128  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1868:  1.  R.  W.  Bunsen.  Ueber  das  Rhodium.  (Darstellung,  Ab- 
seheidung,  Verarbeitung  des  Platinruckstandes.) 

Rh,  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 
Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  146  (1868),  265;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  11  (1869),  308; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1868,  881;  Chem.  News,  21  (1870),  39;  Phil.  Mag.  [4], 
36  (1868),  253;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  58  (1869),  393:  J.  prakt.  Chem.  105, 
(1868),  350;  Ztsch.  Chem.  12  (1869),  3;  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  280. 

1868:  2.  H.  Kammerer.  Ueber  Chlorjodplatin.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  148  (1868),  329;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  11  (1869), 
411;  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  272;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  106  (1869),  250. 

1868:  3.  C.Diakonoav.  Ueber Platincyanverbindungen  der  Eiweiss- 
korper.  Pt. 

Med.  Chem.  Untersuch.  (Hoppe-Seyler),  1 (1866-71),  228;  Ztsch.  Chem. 
11  (1868),  67;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  10  (1868),  58. 

1868:  4.  W.  Skey.  On  the  formation  of  double  sulphocyanides  of 
certain  of  the  alkaloids.  (Morphin  thiocyanate,  etc.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  17  (1868),  184;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  105  (1868),  420. 

1868:  5.  V.  Marcano.  Sobre  un  nuevo  sulfocianato  de  platina. 

Pt. 

Yargasia  (Caracas),  1 (1868),  176;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  ’250; 
Ber.  13  (1880t,  925;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  277;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  403. 

1868:  6.  P.  Schutzenberger.  Sur  quelques  reactions  donnant 
lieu  a la  production  de  l’oxyehlorure  de  carbone,  et  sur  un 
nouveau  compose  volatil  de  platine.  (Platinum  carbonyl- 
chloride.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  66  (1868),  666,  747;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  10  (1868),  188;  Ann.  chim. 
phys.  [4],  15  (1868),  100;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1869,  623;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2], 
47  (1869),  423;  J.  de  pharm.  [4],  9 (1869),  218;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  107 
(1869),  122,  126;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  35  (1868),  452;  Ztsch.  Chem.  11  (1868), 
321,  382;  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  174,  277;  Chem.  News,  17  (1868),  191. 

1868:  7.  F.  Wohler.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  einiger  Metalle  im 
electrischen  Strome.  (Oxydirbarkeit  des  Palladiums,  des 
Osmiums,  des  Rutheniums  und  des  Osmiridiums.) 

Pd,  Os,  Ru,  Ir. 

Nachr.  Gesel.  Wiss.  Gottingen,  1868,  169;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  146 
(1868),  375;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  10  (1868),  352;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1868, 
889;  Ztsch.  Chem.  11  (1868),  385;  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  192. 

1868:  8.  H.  Topsoe.  Krystallografisk-kemisk  Undersogelse  over 
Platinets  dobbelthaloidsalte.  (Double,  chlorides,  bromides,  and 
iodides  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Oversigt  Danske  Vid.  Selsk.  Forh.  1868,  123;  1869,  74;  Resume  Bui. 
Soc.  roy.  Danske,  1868,  3;  1869,  19;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  35  (1569). 
58;  38  (1870),  297;  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  273;  1870,  388;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1870,  683. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


129 


1868:  9.  H.  Topsoe.  (Ueber  die  Hydrate  der  Platinsaure  und  das 
platinsaure  Barium.)  Pt. 

Tidsk.  Phys.  Chem.  7 (1868),  321;  Ber.  3 (1870),  462;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  14  (1870),  207;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  424;  Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870), 
652;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  386;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  47;  Amer.  Chemist. 
1 (1870),  116. 

1868:  10.  T.  Graham.  On  the  occlusion  of  hydrogen  by  metals. 
(Palladium  and  platinum.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  16  (1868),  422;  Chem.  News,  18  (1868),  55;  Ann, 
chim.  phys.  [4],  14  (1868),  315;  15  (1868),  501;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  36  (1868), 
63;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  6 (1868),  284;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  134 
(1868),  321;  Ann.  des  mines  [7],  1 (1872),  133;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  47 
(1869),  417;  Ber.  2 (1869),  382;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  11  (1869],  408; 
L’Institut,  36  (1868),  194;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  105  (1868),  293;  C.  R.  66 
(1868),  1014;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  32  (1868),  148;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier), 
191  (1869),  210,  251;  Yierteljschr.  fur  Pharm.  18  (1869),  449-;  Athe- 
neum,  Jan.  16  (1869);  Les  Mondes,  19  (1869),  126. 

1868:  11.  J.  Chalmers  and  R.  R.  Tatlock.  On  the  estimation  of 
potassium.  (Purification  of  platinum  residues.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Phil.  Soc.  Glasgow,  6 (1868),  390;  Chem.  News,  17  (1868),  199. 

1868:  12.  Vogel.  Verwendung  durchlocherter  Platintiegel.  Pt. 

N.  Rep.  fur  Pharm.  17  (1868),  275;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  8 (1869),  449. 

1868:  13.  D.  Forbes.  Glass  and  platinum  forceps  for  manipula- 
ting in  acid  and  other  solutions.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  18  (1868),  155. 

1868:  14.  J.  B.  A.  Dode.  Paltiniren  von  Metallen.  Pt. 

Deutsch.  Indust.  Ztg.  9 (1868),  No.  9;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  17 
(1867-68),  172. 

1868:  15.  G.  F.  C.  Frick.  Ueber  die  Verwendung  des  Iridiums  zu 
Porzellanfarben.  Ir. 

Polyt.  Natizbl. ; Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  194  (1869),  163;  Chem.  News, 

20  (1869),  286. 

1868:  16.  G.  Quincke.  Ueber  die  Capillaritats-Constanten  fester 
Korper  und  geschmolzener  Korper.  (Capillaritats-Coefiicient 
des  Platins  und  des  Palladiums.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Monatsber.i  Akad.  Berlin,  1868,  132,-350;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  134 
(1868),  356;  135  (1868),  621;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  15  (1868),  504;  16 
(1869),  502;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  32  (1868),  228;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  36 
(1868),  267;  Jsb.  Chem.  1868,  17,  20. 

1868:  17.  R.  Thalen.  Memoire  sur  la  determination  des  longeurs 
d’onde  des  raies  metalliques.  (Platinum,  p.  30,  and  Ann.  chim. 
phys.  18  : 237 ; palladium,  237;  osmium,  243.)  Pt,  Pd,  Os. 

Nova  acta  Upsala  [3],  6 (1868),  9;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  18  (1869),  202; 
Repert.  fiir  phys.  Technik,  6 (1870),  27. 


109733°— 19— Bull.  694 9 


130 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1869:  1.  Discovery  of  platinum  in  Scotland.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  19  (1869),  154,  from  “Mining  Journal. ” 

1869:  2.  [F.  Wohler.]  Vorkommen  des  Laurits  im  Platinerz  von 

Oregon.  Os,  Ru. 

Nachr.  Gesel.  Wiss.  Gottingen,  1869,  327;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  151 
(1869),  374;  Ztsch.  gesammt.  Naturw.  35  (1870),  231. 

1869:  3.  W.  M.  Watts.  On  the  atomic  weights  of  gold,  platinum, 
iridium,  osmium,  rhodium,  and  palladium. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh, 

Chem.  News,  19  (1869),  302;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  9 (1870),  155. 

1869:  4.  T.  Graham.  On  the  relation  of  hydrogen  to  palladium. 

Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  17  (1869),  212;  Chem.  News,  19  (1869),  52;  Ann. 
Chem.  (Liebig),  150  (1869),  353;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  16  (1869),  188; 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  136  (1869),  317;  C.  R.  68  (1869),  101;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1869,  719;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  22  (1869),  419;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3], 
57  (1869),  256;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  106  (1869),  426;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  37 
(1869),  122;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  194  (1869),  133;  Revista  minera,  20 
(1869),  129. 

1869:  5.  T.  Graham.  Additional  observations  on  hydrogenium.  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  17  (1869),  500;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  152  (1869), 
168;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  16  (1869),  188;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  138 
(1869),  49;  Chem.  News,  20  (1869),  16;  C.  R.  68  (1869),  1511;  J.  de 
pharm.  [4],  10  (1869),  168;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  38  (1869),  459;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  194  (1869),  133,  382. 

1869:  6.  C.  A.  Wurtz.  Note  sur  la  preparation  d’un  hydrure  de 
palladium.  Pd. 

C.  R.  68  (1869),  111. 

1869:  7.  R.  Bottger.  PaUadiumwasserstoff.  Pd. 

Ber.  2 (1869),  609;  from  43  Yersamml.  deutsch.  Naturf.  u.  Aerzte. 

1869:  8.  W.  C.  Roberts.  Note  on  the  experimental  illustration  of 
the  expansion  of  palladium  attending  the  formation  of  its 
alloy  with  hydrogenium.  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [4],  38  (1869),  51;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  18  (1S69),  381;  Ber.  2 
(1869),  287;  Student  and  Intel.  Obs.  3 (1869),  311; Jsb.  Chem.  1869,  298. 

1869:  9.  J.  Dewar.  On  the  motion  of  a palladium  plate  during 
the  formation  of  Graham’s  hydrogenium.  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  6 (1869),  504;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  37  (1869),  424;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1869,  297. 

1869:  10.  A.  W.  Hofmann.  (Account  of  a palladium  hydrogen 
medal  given  by  Graham  to  Magnus.)  Pd. 

Ber.  2 (1869),  476;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  194  (1869),  355. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


131 


1869:  11.  H.  Topsoe.  Krystallografisk-kemiske  undersogelser  over 
dobbelthaloidsaltene.  (Double  chlorides  of  palladium.)  Pd. 

Oversigt  Danske  Vid.  Selsk.  Forh.  1869,  246;  Resume  Bui.  Soc.  roy. 
Danske,  1869,  34;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  38  (1870),  374;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1870,  684;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  393.  * 

1869:  12.  K.  Birnbaum.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  der  schwefligen 
Saure  auf  Platinchlorid.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  152  (1869),  137;  159  (1871),  116;  Chem.  News,  20 
(1869),  189,  322;  24  (1871),  109;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1871,  532;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  139;  16  (1871),  82;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1871),  891; 
Ztsch.  Chem.  12  (1869),  504;  Jsb.  Chem.  1869,  293;  1871,  347;  Gaz. 
chim.  1 (1871),  602. 

1869:  13.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  eine  neue  Reihe  krystallisirter 
Platinverbindungen.  (Oxysulphide  of  platinum  and  tin.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  136  (1869),  105;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  100;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  12  (1869),  243;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  49  (1870),  109;  Chem. 
News,  19  (1869),  179;  Ztsch.  Chem.  12  (1869),  513;  Jsb.  Chem.  1869,  296. 

1869:  14.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  neue  Schwefelsalze.  (Platinum 
thiocyanate,  double  sulphides  of  platinum  and  palladium,  oxide 
of  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  136  (1869),  460;  138  (1869),  299,  604;  139  (1870), 
661;  141  (1870),  519;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  14  (1870),  205;  J.  prakt.  Chem. 
108  (1869),  22;  [2],  2 (1870),  141;  3(1871),  103;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  102, 
572;  Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870),  476;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1871),  313;  Gaz. 
chim.  1 (1871),  366;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  229,  231,  391. 

1869:  15.  P.  Weselsky.  Ueber  einige  Doppelcyanverbindungen. 
(New  method  of  forming.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  2 (1869),  588;  Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  60,  ii  (1870),  261;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  336;  Ztsch.  Chem.  31  (1871),  16;  Jsb.  Chem.  1869, 
313. 

1869:  16.  J.  Thomsen.  Ueber  eine  neue  den  Platinbasen  angehorige 
Gruppe  von  Doppelchloriden.  (Platinum  ammonium  bases.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  2 (1869),  668;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  503;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1869,  1034;  Jsb.  Chem.  1869,  292. 

1869:  16a.  C.  W.  Blomstrand.  Die  Chemie  der  Jetztzeit.  Heidel- 
berg, 1869. 

1869:  17.  C.  W.  Blomstrand.  Zur  Kenntniss  der  gepaarten  Ver- 
bindungen  des  funfatomigen  Sticks toffes.  (Cyanplatin  Ver- 
bindungen  and  Platinammonium  Basen.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  26  (1870),  201;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2], 
3 (1871),  186;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1871,  800;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  346. 


132 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1869:  18.  C.  W.  Blomstrand.  Zur  Kenntniss  der  gepaarten  Ver- 
bindungen  der  anorganiscben  Chemie.  (Platinum  double 
cyanides,  thiocyanates,  and  nitrites.)  Pt. 

Ber.  2 (1869),  202;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  144;  Ztsch.  Ghem.  12 
(1869),  439;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  49  (1869),  110. 

1869:  19.  C.  Scheibler.  Zur  Analyse  der  Gold-  und  Platinsalze 
organischer  Basen.  Pt. 

Ber.  2 (1869),  295;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  48;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 
9 (1870),  272. 

1869:  20.  P.  Owsjannikow.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  der  Osmiamid- 
verbindung  Fremy’s  auf  thierische  Gewebe.  Os. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersb.  13  (1869),  466;  J.  Prakt.  Chem.  108  (1869), 
186;  Chem.  News,  21  (1870),  132. 

1869:  21.  W.  Skey.  On  the  fusibility  of  platinum  in  tbe  blowpipo 
flame.  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  2 (1869),  155;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  268; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1871,  87;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  199  (1871),  426;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1870,  380;  Amer.  Chemist,  1 (1871),  314. 

1869:  22.  E.  Bottger.  Die  Erzeugung  von  glanzenden  Platin- 
uberziigen  auf  Glas,  Porcellan,  u.  s.  w.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  107  (1869),  43;  Ber.  2 (1869),  612;  from  43.  Versamml. 
deutsch.  Naturf.  u.  Aerzte;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  59  (1870),  360;  Chem. 
News,  20  (1869),  58;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  24  (1869),  No.  10;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  198  (1870),  475;  Deutsch.  Indust.  Ztg.  10  (1869),  No.  25. 

1869:  23,  Platinizing  fluid  (for  plating  copper,  etc.).  Pt. 

Quart.  J.  Sci.  6 (1869),  428. 

1869:  24.  Platiniren.  Pt. 

Scient.  Amer.  ; Deutsch.  Gewerb.  Ztg.  35  (1870),  No.  7;  Chem. 

tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  19  (1869-70),  156. 

1869:  25.  A.  W.  Hofmann.  Beitriige  zur  Kenntniss  des  Methylal- 
dehydes.  (Formation  of  platinum  mirror  by  methyl  alcohol.) 

Pt. 

Monatsber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1869,  362;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  107  (1869),  414; 
Ber.  2 (1869),  152;  Ztsch.  Chem.  12  (1869),  375. 

1869:  26.  M.  Reimann.  Indelible  ink  for  marking  linen.  (Use  of 
platinum  chloride  for  purple  ink.) 

Scient.  Amer.  21  (1869),  162;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  195  (1870),  285; 
Deutsch.  illust.  Gewerbeztg.  1869,  313;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  1264. 

1869:27.  A.  H.  L.  Fizeau.  Tableau  des  dilations  par  la  chaleur  de 
divers  corps  simples  metalliques,  etc.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 
C.  R.  68  (1869),  1125;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  138  (1869),  26;  Les  Mondea, 
20  (1869),  139;  Jsb.  Chem.  1869,  85. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


133 


1869:  28.  W.  Gibbs.  On  the  wave  lengths  of  the  spectral  lines  of 
the  elements.  Pt,  Pd,  Os. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  47  (I860),  194. 

1869:  30.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  das  Auftreten  activen  Wasser- 
stoff gases  bei  der  Elektrolyse  angesauerten  Wassers  mittelst 
eines  als  Kathode  dienenden  PaUadiumblechs.  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  107  (1869),  41;  Ztsch.  gesammt.  Naturw.  33  (1869),  378. 

1869:  31.  A.  von  Obermayer.  Experimentelle  Bcstimmung  des 
Leitungswiderstandes  in  Platin-Blechen.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  60,  ii  (1869),  245. 

1869:  32.  J.  M.  Gaugain.  Sur  les  forces  61ectromotrices  que  le 
platine  developpe  lorsqu’il  est  mis  en  contact  avec  divers 
liquides.  Pt. 

C.  It.  69  (1869),  1300;  Chem.  News,  20  (1869),  321;  L’Institut,  37  (1869), 
401;  Jsb.  Chem.  1869,  147. 

1869:  33.  E.  Villari.  Sulla  forza  elettro-mo trice  del  palladio 

nelle  pile  a gas.  Pd. 

Rendiconti  1st.  lombardo  [2],  2 (1869),  1085;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.) 
151  (1874),  608;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  123. 

1869:  34.  J.  C.  Poggendorff.  Ueber  das  galvanische  Verhalten 

des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Monatsber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1869,  116;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  136  (1869), 
483;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  108  (1869),  232;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  17  (1869), 
505;  Ber.  2 (1869),  74;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  12  (1869),  234;  Phil.  Mag.  [4], 
37  (1869),  474;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  192  (1869),  426;  Ztsch.  Chem.  12 
(1869),  348;  Jsb.  Chem.  1869,  298. 

1870:  1.  A.  E.  Nordenskjold.  Platin  in  Lappland.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  140  (1870),  336;  Arch,  der  Pharm.  [2],  144  (1870), 
183;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  487;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  96;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  197  (1870),  289;  Jsb.  Chenu  1870,  1270;  Amer.  Chemist,  1 
(1870),  157. 

1870:  la.  C.  F.  Hartt.  Geology  and  physical  geography  of  Brazil. 
Boston,  1870.  (Platinum  in  quartz,  p.  448;  palladium  of 
Minas  Geraes,  p.  542.)  Pt,  Pd. 

1870:  lb.  F.  A.  Genth.  Discovery  of  rhodium  gold  in  San 
Domingo. 

Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  11  (1870),  438. 

1870:  2.  P.  A.  Favre.  Recherches  thermiques  sur  le  caractere 
metallique  de  Thydrogene  associe  au  palladium.  Pd. 

C.  It.  71  (1870),  214;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  150;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  59  (1870), 
352;  Chem.  News,  19  (1869),  299;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  7 (1870),  105. 


134  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1870:  3.  S.  A.  Norton.  Ueber  ein  neues  Chlorplatin.  (With  5 
molecules  of  water.) 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  2 (1870),  469;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3J,  1 (1871),  375;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  15  (1871),  61;  Chem.  News,  23  (1871),  83;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1870,  388. 

1870:4.  J.  Thomsen.  Ueber  Berylliumplatinchlorid.  Pt. 

Ber.  3 (1870),  827;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  15  (1871),  50;  Chem.  News,  22 
(1870),  263;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1871),  202;  Gaz.  chim.  1 (1871),  266; 
Ztsch.  Chem.  14  (1871),  45;  Amer.  Chemist,  1 (1871),  268. 

1870:  5.  A.  Cahours  and  H.  Gal.  Recherches  sur  de  nouveaux 
derives  platiniques  des  bases  phosphorees.  Pt. 

C.  R.  70  (1870),  897;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  155  (1870),  223;  Ber.  3 (1870), 
501;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  14  (1870),  386;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  321; 
LTnstitut,  38  (1870),  129;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  2 (1870),  213;  Ztsch. 
Chem.  13  (1870),  349;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  808;  J.  de  l’anat.  (Robin), 
7 (1871),  396;  Amer.  Chemist,  1 (1870),  27. 

1870:  6.  A.  Cahours  and  H.  Gal.  Recherches  sur  de  nouveaux 
derives  de  la  triethylphosphine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  70  (1870),  1380;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  155  (1870),  355;  Ber.  3 (1870), 
800;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  14  (1870),  386;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  451; 
LTnstitut,  38  (1870),  140;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  2 (1870),  213;  Ztsch- 
Chem.  13  (1870),  349;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  808. 

1870:  7.  A.  Cahours  and  IT.  Gal.  Recherches  relatives  k T action 
des  chlorures  de  platine,  de  palladium  et  d’or  sur  les  phosphines 
et  les  arsines.  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  71  (1870),  208;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  156  (1870),  302;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  14  (1870),  387;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  500;  Chem.  News,  22 
(1870),  58;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  50  (1870),  415;  LTnstitut,  38  (1870),  212, 
250;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  2 (1870),  460;  Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870),  662; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  812;  Amer.  Chemist,  1 (1870),  147. 

1870:  8.  H.  Kolbe.  Ueber  die  chemische  Constitution  obiger  [von 
Cahours  und  Gal]  dargestellter  Phosphorplatinverbindungen. 
(Also  considers  platinum  ammonium  bases.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  2 (1870),  217;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  661;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1870,  813. 

1870:  9.  P.  Schutzenberger.  Recherches  sur  le  platine.  Combi- 
naisons  de  .jous  clilorure  de  platine  avec  l’oxyd  de  charbon  et 
trichlorure  de  phosphore.  (Compounds  of  platinum  bichloride 
with  carbonyl  chloride  and  with  phosphorus  trichloride  and  of 
platinum  tetrachloride  with  alcohol.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  70  (1870),  1134,  1287,  1414;  71  (1870),  69;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  21 
(1870),  350;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  483;  14  (1870),  17,  97,  178; 
Ber.  3 (1870),  505,  574,  678;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  387,  438,  456;  Chem. 
News,  21  (1870),  262,  298;  122  (1870),  107;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  Suppl. 
Bd.  8 (1872),  242;  LTnstitut,  38  (1870),  171;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  4 
(1871),  159;  Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870),  171,  408;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [2],  50 
(1870),  144,  414,  415;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  381,  382,  384,  388;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  24  (1871),  1009;  Amer.  Chemist,  1 (1870),  68,  150. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


135 


1870:  10.  E.  Fremy.  Recherches  sur  l’acide  azoteux.  (Reduction 


of  potassium  osmate  to  osmite  by  nitrous  acid.)  Os. 

C.  Pv.  70  (1870),  61;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  108;  J.  de  pharm.  11  (1870), 
193. 

1870:  11.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  n&gra  isomera  Platinabaser.  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  27  (1870),  777. 

1870:  12.  P.  T.  Cleye.  Om  Platina-baser,  hvilka  inneholla  organ- 
iska  radikaler.  (Anilin  bases,  etc.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  27  (1870),  883. 

1870:  13.  C.  Gordon.  Zur  Geschichte  der  Platinbasen.  Pt. 

Ber.  3 (1870),  174;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  518;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1870,  197;  Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870),  518;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  813. 

1870:  14.  C.  W.  Elomstrand.  Om  isomera  Platina-baser.  Pt. 
Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  27  (1870),  789. 


1870:  15.  S.  E.  Phillips.  On  the  platin-ammonia  compounds.  Pt. 
Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  49;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  391. 

1870:  16.  W.  Odling.  On  the  ammonia  compounds  of  platinum. 

Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Inst.  6 (1872),  176;  Chem.  News,  21  (1870),  269,  289;  Ber.  3 
(1870),  682;  Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870),  435;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  389. 

1870:  17.  H.  Topsoe.  Ueber  einige  Methoden  zur  Bestimmung  des 
Chlors,  des  Broms,  und  des  Iods  in  ihrer  Verbindungen  mit 
Platin.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  9 (1870),  30;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  14  (1870),  46. 

1870:  18.  E.  Johannsen.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  des  Platinclilorids 
gegen  Kalk-  und  Barytwasser.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  155  (1870),  204;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  15  (1871),  58; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  580;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  178;  Gaz.  chim.  2 
(1872),  44;  Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870),  683;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  386. 

1870:  19.  K.  Preiss.  Ueber  quantitative  Bestimmung  der  Doppel- 
cyanide.  (By  heating  with  oxalic  acid.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Bohm.  Gesell.  1870,  ii,  79. 

1870:  20.  [M.  G.  Farmer.]  Fusing  iridosmine.  Ir,  Os. 

Amer.  Chem.  1 (1870),  27;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  225;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  8 
(1871),  115. 

1870:  21.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  [Fusion  of  platinum  with 
spirting.]  Pt. 

C.  R.  70  (1870),  256,  287;  Chem.  News,  21  (1870),  94;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  7 
(1870),  287. 

1870:  22.  C.  Chojnacki.  Ueber  die  Verbindungen  des  Aethylens 
mit  Eisen-  und  Platinbromur.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Chem.  13  (1870),  419;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  15  (1871),  68. 


136 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1870:  23.  F.  Stolba.  Ueber  die  Gewichtsabnahme  der  Platintiegel 
bei  andauernder  Gluhhitze.  (And  use  of  sea  sand  for  cleaning 
platinum  crucibles.)  Pt. 

Abh.  Bohm.  Gesell.  [6],  4 (1870),  4,  5;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  198  (1870), 
177;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  737;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  275;  Polyt. 
Notiz.  25  (1870),  365;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  10  (1871),  333;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1870,  923. 

1870:24.  A.  Bauer.  Ueber  eine  Legirung  des  Bleis  mit  Platin.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  62,  ii  (1870),  46;  Ber.  3 (1870),  830;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  198  (1870),  218;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  15  (1871),  49;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1870,  691;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  263;  Gaz.  chim.  1 (1871), 
226;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1871),  202;  Ztsch.  Chem.  14  (1871),  55;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1870,  380;  Amer.  Chemist,  1 (1871),  268. 

1870:  25.  A.  Descloizeaux.  Note  sur  la  forme  cristalline  et  les 
proprietos  optiques  d’une  combinaison  de  protochlorure  de 
platine  et  de  triathylphosphine  analogue  au  sel  de  Magnus. 

C.  R.  70  (1870),  970.  Pt. 

1870:  26.  Platinapparat  fur  Goldproben  von  Johnson, 

Matthey  & Co.,  in  London.  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  29  (1870),  325. 

1870:  27.  A.  Jouglet.  Sur  la  fabrication  des  glaces  et  miroirs 
platinises.  (By  use  of  essence  of  lavender.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  70  (1870),  52;  Ber.  3 (1870),  37;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  13  (1870),  477; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  86;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  195  (1870),  464;  Quart. 
J.  Sci.  7 (1870),  262:  Deutsch.  Gewerb.  Ztg.  25  (1870),  No.  14;  Chem. 
tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  19  (1869—70),  175;  Gewerbebl.  aus  Wiirtembg. 
1870,  No.  16. 

1870:  28.  H.  Schwarz.  Ueber  Glanzgold,  Glanzplatin,  und  die 
Liisterfarben.  Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  197  (1870),  243;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1870,  555;  Polyt. 
Centrbl.  36  (1870),  1617;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  1157. 

1870:  29.  J.  Schoras.  LTeber  eigenthiimliche  Farbenerscheinungen 
gewisser  Platincyan-Metalle.  Pt. 

Ber.  3 (1870),  13. 

1870:  30.  L.  Schonn.  Zur  Passivitat  des  Eisens  und  zur  Elek- 
trolyse.  (Iron  made  passive  by  platinum  wire.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Erganz.  Bd.  5 (1871),  319;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871, 
124. 

1870:  31.  Schinz.  (Platinum  light.)  Pt. 

Cosmos,  rev.  encycl.  (1870),  Jan.  8;  Chem.  News,  21  (1870),  35. 

1870:  32.  J.  Thomsen.  Thermochemiske  LTntersogelser.  (Chlor- 
platinsaure,  p.  213.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  139  (1870),  193;  140  (1870),  524,  532;  Ber.  9 
(1876),  163;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  118,  122;  Skrifte  Danske  Selsk.  [5],  8 
(1870),  369;  9 (1873),  265. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  137 

1870:  33.  R.  Bunsen.  Calorimetrische  Untersuchungen.  (Spe- 
cific heat  of  ruthenium,  p.  27.)  Ru. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  141  (1870),  1;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  23  (1871), 
58;  Gaz.  chim.  1 (1871),  61;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  40  (1871),  25;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  10  (1871),  257;  Ztsch.  Chem.  14  (1871),  8;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1870,  83. 

1870:  34.  W.  Skey.  Absorption  of  sulphur  by  gold,  and  its  effects 
in  retarding  amalgamation.  (Action  of  hydrogen  sulphide  on 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  3 (1870),  216;  Chem.  News,  22  (1870),  282; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  1071. 

1870:  3 5.  W.  Skey.  On  the  absorptive  properties  of  platinum. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  3 (1870),  221.  Pt. 

1870:  36.  W.  Skey.  On  the  capability  of  certain  sulphides  to 

form  the  negative  pole  of  a galvanic  circuit  or  battery.  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  3 (1870),  225;  Chem.  News,  23  (1871),  291. 

1870:  37.  W.  Skey.  On  the  reduction  of  certain  metals  from 

their  solution  by  metallic  sulphides  and  the  relation  of  this 
to  the  occurrence  of  such  metals  in  a native  state.  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  3 (1870),  225;  Chem.  News,  23  (1871),  232; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1871,  374. 

1870:  38.  W.  Skey.  On  the  electro-motive  power  of  metallic  sul- 
phides. Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  3 (1870),  232;  Chem.  News,  23  (1871),  255. 

1870:  39.  E.  Edlund.  Om  den  elektromotoriska  Kraften  vid 

beroring  mellem  Metaller.  (Electromotive  force  from  con- 
tact of  copper  with  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  27  (1870),  3,  927;  Ann.  der  Phys. 
(Pogg.),  143  (1871),  404,  534  (Pt:  Pd,  547,  560;  Cu:  Pt  538,555);  Ann. 
chim.  phys.  23  (1871),  356;  L’lnstitut,  39  (1871),  152;  N.  arch.  sci. 
phys.  nat.  42  (1871),  402;  Phil.  Mag.  41  (1871),  18;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871, 
121. 

Gold-  und  Platingewinnung  in  Russland.  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  30  (1871),  361;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  37  (1871),  1447;' 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  203  (1872),  152;  Amer.  Chemist,  2 (1872),  5.35. 

R.  Bottger.  Reducirende  Wirkung  des  mit  Wasser- 
stoff  beladenen  Palladiums.  (Auf  Ferricyankalium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  4 (1871),  809;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1871,  721;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  26  (1871), 
No.  10;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  201  (1871),  80;  206  (1872),  155;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1871,  203  (from  44.  Versamml.  deutsch.  Naturf.  und  Aerzte);  Gaz. 
chim.  3 (1873),  89. 


1871:  1. 
1871:  2. 


138 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1871:  3.  K.  Lisenko.  (Quantity  of  hydrogen  in  hydride  of  palla- 
dium.) Pd. 

J.  Russ.  chem.  Gesel.  3 (1871),  307;  4 (1872),  210;  Ber.  5 (1872),  29:  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  17  (1872),  117;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  178;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1872,  278;  Gaz.  chim.  2 (1872),  115. 

1871:  4.  C.  F.  Mohr.  Ueber  die  metallische  Natur  des  Wasser- 
stoffs.  Pd. 

Ber.  4 (1871),  239:  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  202. 

1871:  5.  H.  Kolbe.  Ueber  die  reducirenden  Wirkungen  des  vom 
Palladium  absorbirten  Wasserst offgases.  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  4 (1871),  418;  Chem.  News,  25  (1872),  46;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1871,  203. 

1871:6.  H.  Lawrow.  Ueber  crystallisirtes  Platinchlorid.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Chem.  14  (1871),  615;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  17  (1872),  504;  Chem 
Centrbl.  1872,  354;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (1872),  600;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  277 
Gaz.  chim.  2 (1872),  401. 

1871:  7.  S.  P.  Sadtler.  On  the  iridium  compounds,  analogous  to 
the  aethylen  and  protochloride  of  platinum  salts.  (IrCl4, 

2C2H4,2KC1.)  Inaug.  Diss.  Gottingen,  1871.  Ir,  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  2 (1871),  338;  Ber.  4 (1871),  681;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2], 
17  (1872),  54;  Chem.  News,  24  (1871),  280;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (.1872),  48; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  335;  Gaz.  chim.  1 (1871),  536. 

1871:8.  W.  Gibbs.  Hexatomische  Verbindungen  des  Iridiums  mi t 
saltpetriger  Saure.  Ir. 

Ber.  4 (1871),  280;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  16  (1871),  82;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871, 
354;  Gaz.  chim.  1 (1871),  200. 

1871:  9.  R.  J.  Friswell.  A new  double  salt  of  thallium.  (Thal- 
lium platinocyanide  with  potassium  carbonate.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1871),  461;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  159  (1871),  383;  Ber. 
4 (1871),  529;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  16  (1871),  87;  Chem.  News,  23  (1871), 
249;  Ztsch.  Chem.  14  (1871),  414;  Gaz.  chim.  2 (1872),  26,  170. 

1871:  10.  F.  Toczynski.  Ueber  die  Platincyanide  und  Tartrate 
des  Berylliums.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Chem.  14  (1871),  275;  Pharm.  Ztsch.  Russland,  11  (1872),  166, 
201;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  16  (1871),  254;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1871,  564;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  24  (1871),  1013;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  359. 

1871:  11.  W.  C.  Lossen.  Ueber  die  Chlorhydrate  des  Hydroxyl- 
amins.  (Platinum  ammonium  bases  from  mixture  of  plati- 
num chloride  and  hydroxvlamin,  p.  247.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  160  (1871),  243;  Ztsch.  Chem.  14  (1871),  326. 

1871:  12.  P.  T.  Cleve.  On  ammoniacal  platinum  bases.  Pt. 

Handl.  Akad.  Stockholm  [2],  10  (1871),  No.  9;  Ber.  4 (1871),  70,  673; 
6 (1873),  1468;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  15  (1871),  161;  16  (1871),  203;  17 
(1872),  100,  294;  Chem.  News,  24  (1871),  73;  25  (1872),  47,  286,  311; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  342;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  349;  1872,  278;  Amer. 
J.  Sci.  [3],  4 (1872),  226;  Amer.  Chemist,  2 (1872),  391. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


139 


1871:  13.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  n&gra  marklige  isomerier  uti  den  oor- 


ganiska  Kemien.  (Platinum  ammonium  bases.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  28  (1871),  175. 

1871:  14.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Nitriter  af  nagra  platinabaser.  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  28  (1871),  181. 

1871 : 15.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Sulfiter  af  de  isomera  baserna  platosammin 
och  platosemidiammin.  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  28  (1871),  187. 

1871:  16.  C.  W.  Blomstrand.  Ueber  die  MetaUammoniake  oder 
die  Metall amine.  (Platinbasen.)  Pt. 

Ber.  4 (1871),  40,  70;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1871,  800. 


1871:  17.  C.  W.  Blomstrand.  Zur  Frage  fiber  die  Verbindungs- 
werte  der  Grundstoffe.  (Wertigkeit  des  Platins  in  Platin- 
basen.) Pt. 

Ber.  4 (1871),  639. 

1871:  18.  A.  Rabuteau.  Recherches  sur  les  proprietes  physio- 
logiques  de  divers  sels  du  genre  chlorure.  Des  albuminuries 
metalliques.  (Action  of  palladium  chloride.)  Pd. 

C.  R.  73  (1871),  1390;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  8. 

1871:  19.  H.  Topsoe  and  C.  Christiansen.  Krystallografisk- 

optiske  undersogelser,  med  saerligt  hensyn  til  isomorfe  stuff er. 
(Chloro-  and  bromoplatinates.)  Pt. 

Skrifter  Danske  Selsk.  Kjobenhavn  [5],  9 (1873),  623;  Ann.  chim.  phys. 
[5],  1 (1874),  41. 

1871:  20.  F.  Jean.  (Sodium  sulphide  as  blowpipe  reagent  for  plat- 
inum, palladium,  and  iridium.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Scientific  Press  (San  Francisco),  23  (1871),  No.  13;  Berg-  u.  Hfitten. 
Ztg.  30  (1871),  414;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  213. 

1871:  21.  J.  Thomsen.  Thermochemische  Untersuchungen.  (Neu- 
tralization of  chlorplatinic  acid,  p.  533.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  143  (1871),  497;  Ber.  4 (1871),  586;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  16  (1871),  163;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  106. 

1871:  22.  Manufacture  of  platinum  in  New  York.  (Edi- 
torial note.)  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  62  (1871),  218. 

1871:  23.  E.  J.  Chapman.  Fusibility  of  platinum  by  the  blow- 
pipe. Pt. 

Chem.  News,  23  (1871),  33;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  34G. 


140 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1871:  24.  A.  Bauer.  Ueber  einige  Legirungen.  (Bleiplatin  und 
Bleipalladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  63,  ii  (1871),  333;  Ber.  4 (1871),  449;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  200  (1872),  285;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  16  (1871),  78;  Gaz. 
chim.  1 (1871),  366;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1871),  1166;  Ztsch.  Chern.  14 
(1871),  542;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  316. 

1871 : 25.  Klinkerfues.  (Apparatus  for  lighting  gas  by  condensa- 
tion of  gas  on  platinum  wire.)  Pt. 

Deutsch.  Indust . Ztg.  1871,  365;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  49. 

1871:  26.  E.  Baudrimont.  Recherches  sur  Taction  intime  des 
substances  qui  aident  a la  decomposition  du  chlorate  de  potasse 
pour  en  degager  l’oxygene.  (Action  of  finely  divided 
platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  73  (1871),  254;  J.  de  pharm.  14  (1871),  81,  161;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  24 
(1871),  1154;  Moniteur  scientif.  13  (1871),  783. 

1871:  27.  W.  Skey.  On  the  electro-motive  and  electrolytic 
phenomena  developed  by  gold  and  platina  in  solution  of  the 
alkaline  sulphides  and  sulphuretted  hydrogen.  (And  in  sea 
water.)  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  4 (1871),  313;  Chem.  News,  23  (1871),  221; 
Amer.  Chemist,  2 (1872),  48;  Jsb.  Chem.  1871,  123. 

1872:  1.  A.  Bettendorff.  Ueber  die  Reindarstellung  der  Platin- 
metalle.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Sitzber.  Niederrhein.  Gesel.  Bonn,  29  (1872),  9. 

1872:  2.  W.  C.  Roberts  and  C.  R.  A.  Wright.  On  the  condition 
of  the  hydrogen  occluded  by  palladium,  as  indicated  by  the 
specific  heat  of  the  charged  metal.  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1873),  112;  Ber.  5 (1872),  996,  1062;  Chem.  News, 
26  (1872),  286;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1873,  258. 

1872:  3.  S.  A.  Norton.  Weitere  Mittheilung  liber  das  neue  Platin- 
chlorid  (PtCl4,5H20).  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  5 (1872),  365;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  4 (1872),  312;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  18  (1872),  220;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  372;  Gaz.  chim.  2 
(1872),  242;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (1872),  680;  Amer.  Chemist,  3 (1872),  69. 

1872:  4.  P.  Schutzenberger  and  C.  Fontaine.  Memoire  sur  les 
composes  phosphoplatiniques.  (Chlorure  et  les  acides  phospho- 
platineux  et  platinique.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  17  (1872),  386,  482,  529;  18  (1872),  101,  148;  Ber.  5 
(1872),  222,  555;  Chem.  News,  26  (1872),  36,  48;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872, 
549;  Gaz.  chim.  2 (1872),  399,  480,  486;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (1872), 
791;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  278. 

1872:  5.  G.  Saillard.  Sur  une  nouvelle  combinaison  phosplio- 
platinique  deriv6e  de  la  toluidine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  74  (1872),  1526;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  18  (1872),  254;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1872,  549;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  278;  Amer.  Chemist,  3 (1873),  307. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


141 


1872:  6.  P.  T.  Cleve  and  O.  M.  Hoeglund.  Sur  les  combinaisons 
de  Tyttrium  et  de  Terbium.  (Platinocyanides  of  yttrium, 
erbium,  didymium,  and  thorium,  with  crystallography.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  18  (1872),  198;  Bihang  Akad.  Handl.  Stockholm, 
1 (1872),  No.  8;  Ber.  6 (1873),  1468;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1873),  136. 

1872:  7.  H.  C.  Bolton.  Observations  on  the  platinocyanide  of 
magnesium.  (With  bibliography  of  the  literature  of  platino- 
cyanide of  magnesium,  p.  370.)  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  2 (1872),  367. 

1872:  8.  A.  Guerout.  De  Taction  de  Tacide  sulfureux  sur  les 
sulfures  insolubles  recemment  precipites.  (Platinum  sulphide 
not  acted  on.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  75  (1872),  1276;  Gaz.  chim.  3 (1873),  108;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  176. 

1872:  9.  H.  Topsoe.  KrystaUographisch-chemische  TJntersuch- 
ungen.  (Crystallization  of  platinum  bases.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  66,  ii  (1872),  5;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  163;  N.  arch, 
sci.  phys.  nat.  45  (1872),  76. 

1872:  10.  H.  Violette.  Fusion  du  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  75  (1872),  1027;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  28  (1873),  469;  Be”.  5 (1872) 
938;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  19  (1873),  39;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  785; 
Chem.  News,  26  (1872),  227;  27  (1873),  224,  246;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
26  (1873),  477;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  65  (1873),  157;  Gaz.  chim.  3 
(1873),  102;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  206  (1872),  283;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1872,  276;  1873,  291;  Amer.  Chemist,  3 (1873),  391;  4 (1873),  37; 
Les  Mondes  (1872),  Nov.  7;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  5,  ii  (1873),  56; 
Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  22  (1872-73),  219;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  10 
(1873),  415;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  39  (1873),  65. 

1872:  11.  J.  B.  Dumas.  Fusion  du  platine.  (Query  raised  on 
Violette’s  paper,  1872:  10.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  75  (1872),  1028;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  277. 

1872:  12.  R.  Hasenclever.  Ueber  Concentration  von  Schwefel- 
saure.  (Platin-apparat,  p.  506.) 

Ber.  5 (1872),  502. 

1872:  13.  Manufacture  of  platinum  in  Chester  County, 

New  York.  (Editorial  note.)  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  63  (1872),  9. 

1872:  14.  J.  B.  Thompson.  On  pyroplating  (with  platinum,  etc.) 

Chem.  News,  26  (1872),  26;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  18  (1872),  518.  Pt. 

1872:  15.  J.  L.  Smith.  A new  and  ready  method  of  forming  plati- 
num black.  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  2 (1872),  291;  Chem.  News,  26  (1872),  208;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  19  (1873),  119;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  273;  1873,  20;  Gaz.  chim.  3 
(1873),  179;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (1872),  790;  26  (1873),  141;  Polyt.  J. 
(Dingier),  204  (1872),  76;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  277. 


142 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  « 


1872:  16.  A.  Jouglet.  (Platinum  coinage.)  Pt. 

Moniteur scient.  (1872),  Dec.;  Chem.  News,  26  (1872),  288. 

1872:  17.  M.  Saytzeff.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des  vom  Palladium 
absorbirten  Wassers toffs  auf  einige  organische  Verbindungen. 

Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  6 (1872),  128;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  758;  Chem.  News, 
26  (1872),  241;  Gaz.  chim.  2 (1872),  469;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  279;  Amer. 
Chemist,  3 (1873),  305. 

1872:  18.  R.  Bottger.  (Ueber  das  Verhalten  von  Platin-  und 
Palladiumsalzen  zu  ameisensaurem  Natron.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Jsb.  Phys.  Yer.  Frankfort,  1872-73, 11, 14;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874, 322, 371; 
Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  13  (1874),  176;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  22 
(1872-73),  220;  Indust.  Blatter,  10  (1873),  No.  1. 

1872:  19.  P.  Desaines.  Recherches  sur  la  reflexion  de  la  chaleur 
a la  surface  des  corps  polis.  Pt. 

C.  R,  74  (1872),  1102,  1185;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  43  (1872),  544;  44  (1872),  77; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  103. 

1872:  20.  H.  Buff.  Ueber  die  Ausdehnungswarme  fester  Korper 

Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  145  (1872),  626;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  44  (1872), 
341;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  44  (1872),  544;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  59. 

1872:  21.  A.Merget.  (Sur des  nouveaux  precedes  pour  la  reduction 
des  sels  des  metaux  des  derniers  sections.)  (Photochimique?) 
Ann.  Soc.  agric.  Lyon,  5 (1872),  104.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

1872:  22.  J.  M.  Gaugain.  Sur  les  forces  electromotrices  develop- 
pees  au  contact  des  metaux  et  des  liquides  inactifs.  (Electro- 
motive action  of  wet  platinum  plates.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  74  (1872),  610,  1332;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  108. 

1872:  23.  H.  Helmholtz.  Ueber  die  galvanische  Polarisation  des 

Platin.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  gesammt.  Naturw.  6 (1872),  186;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1873),  463; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1872,  689. 

1873:  a.  Tschupin.  Geographical  and  statistical  dictionary  of  the 

State  of  Perm.  1873.  Pt. 

1873:  1.  A.  Vogel.  Platinerz  von  San  Domingo.  Pt. 

N.  Rep.  fur  Pharm.  22  (1873),  292;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  196;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1873,  291. 


1873:  la.  B.  Silliman.  Platinum  and  iridosmine  (in  Cherokee 
washings,  Butte  County,  Calif.)  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Amer.  J.  Sc.  [3],  6 (1873),  132. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


143 


1873:  2.  T.  Knosel.  Ueber  Verarbeitung  der  Platinr ticks tande . 

Pt. 

Ber.  6 (1873),  1159;  Polyt.  J.  (Dinger),  210  (1873),  189;  Bui.  Soc.  chini. 
[2],  21  (1874),  179;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1873,  723;  Chem.  News,  28  (1873), 
280;  Gaz.  chim.  4 (1874),  147;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  443;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1873,  291;  Amer.  Chemist,  4 (1874),  312;  Deutsche  Gewerb.  Ztg.  39 
(1874),  No.  3;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  23  (1873-74),  186. 

1873:  3.  J.  Dewar.  On  the  physical  constants  of  hydrogenium. 

Pd. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soe.  Edinb.  27  (1873),  167;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  47  (1874),  334; 
N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  50  (1874),  207;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874, 180;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  27  (1874),  866. 

1873:  4.  R.  W.  Raymond.  The  mining  industry  as  illustrated  at 
the  Vienna  Exposition.  (Platinum  industry  of  Russia,  and 
note  on  an  ingot  of  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Trans.  Amer.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  2 (1873),  138;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  6 (1873),  474. 

1873:  5.  C.  de  Marignac.  Notices  chimiques  et  eristallographiques 
sur  quelques  sels  de  glucine  et  des  metaux  de  la  c6rite.  (Chloro- 
platinates,  p.  212,  and  Ann.  chim.  phys.  p.  65.)  Pt. 

N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  46  (1873),  193;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [4],  30  (1873),  45; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  24. 

1873:  6.  A.  Welkow.  Beryllium-Platinchlorid.  Pt. 

Ber.  6 (1873),  1288;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  50;  Chem.  News,  29  (1874),  51. 

1873:  7.  W.  Gibbs.  Researches  on  the  hexatomic  compounds  of 
cobalt.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  6 (1873),  116;  Ber.  6 (18.73),  830. 

1873:  8.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  neue  Schwefelsalze.  (Double  sul- 
phide of  platinum  and  sodium.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  149  (1873),  381;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  8 (1873),  29; 
Gaz.  chim.  4 (1874),  143;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  20  (1873),  259;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  26  (1873),  1197;  Jsb.  Chem.  1873,  197. 

1873:  9.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  neue  Schwefelsalze.  (Double  sul- 
phides of  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  148  (1873),  625;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  7 (1873),  214; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  20  (1873),  259;  Gaz.  chim.  3 (1873),  585;  4 (1874), 
93;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1873),  1197;  Jsb.  Chem.  1873,  195. 

1873:  10.  S.  P.  Sharples.  Ammonio-platinous  chloride.  (Salt  of 
Magnus.)  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  4 (1873),  46;  Jsb.  Chem.  1873,  292. 

1873 : 1 1.  N.  O.  Holst.  Bidrag  till  kannedomen  om  Platinans  Cyan- 
foreningar.  (Platinocyanides  of  barium,  strontium,  etc.)  Pt. 

irs-skrift  Univ.  Lund,  10,  ii  (1873),  No.  6;  Ber.  8 (1875.).,  124;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1875,  238;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  ,[2],  22  (1874),  347;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  786. 


144 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1873:  12.  W.  J.  Russell.  On  the  action  of  hydrogen  on  silver  ni- 
trate (and  solutions  of  platinum  and  palladium,  p.  11).  Pt,  Pd. 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  3;  Ber.  6 (1873),  1423;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  447; 
Chem.  News,  28  (1873),  277 

1873:  13.  O.  Pettersson.  Untersuehungen  uber  Molecularvolu- 
mina  einiger  Reihen  von  isomorphen  Salzen.  (Double  salts 
of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Nova  acta  Soc.  Upsala  [3],  9 (1873);  Ber.  7 (1874),  478. 

1873:  14.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  H.  Debray.  (Alliage  du 
platine  et  de  Tiridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  48  (1873),  45;  Jsb.  Chem.  1872,  291;  Gazz.  chim. 
ital.  4 (1874),  167. 

1873:  15.  S.  Bottone.  Relation  zwischen  Atomgewicht,  speci- 
fischem  Gewicht,  und  Harte  metallischer  Elemente.  Pt,  Pd. 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  150  1873),  644;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  114;  Chem. 
News,  27  (1873),  215;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  6 (1873),  457;  Les  Mondes,  31 
(1873),  720. 

1873:  16.  F.  Stolba.  Ueber  Platinschmelztiegel.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Bohm.  Gesel.  Wiss.  1873,  325;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  114;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  13  (1874),  309;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  1011. 

1873:  17.  F.  Mohr.  Correction  des  Platintiegelgewichts.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  12  (1873),  150;  Chem.  News,  29  (1874),  27;  Amer. 
Chemist,  4 (1873);  233. 

1873:  18.  Helonis.  Platinbronce.  (Patent.)  Pt. 

Ber.  6 (1873),  42;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  19  (1873),  43;  Amer.  Chemist, 
4 (1873),  235;  Gaceta  indust.  No.  371;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  5,  ii  (1873), 
268;  Deutsch.  Indust.  Ztg.  14  (1873),  No.  1;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner), 
22  (1872-73),  221. 

1873:  19.  J.  B.  A.  Dode.  Platinage  aurifere  des  glaces.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  19  (1873),  572;  Ber.  6 (1873),  1273;  Deutsch.  Gewerb. 
Ztg.  39  (1874),  No.  4;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  23  (1873-74),  204; 
Deutsch.  Indust.  Ztg.  14  (1873),  No.  49;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  39  (1873),  1440; 
Polyt.  J.  (Dingl.),  211  (1874),  74;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  928. 

1873:  20.  W.  C.  Rontgen.  Ueber  das  Lothen  von  platinirten 
Glasern.  * Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  150  (1873),  331;  Chem.  News,  30  (1874),  187; 
Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  24  (1874-75),  128;  Repert.  fur  exp. 
Physik,  10,  No.  3;  Deutsch.  Indust.  Ztg.  15  (1874),  328. 

1873:  21.  A.  Merget.  Recherches  photochimiques  sur  l’emploi 
des  gaz  comme  r6velateurs,  et  sur  Tinfluence  des  conditions 
physiques  au  point  de  vue  de  la  sensibilisation.  (Reduction 
of  platinum  salts  by  hydrogen.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

C.  R.  76  (1873),  1470;  77  (1873),  38;  Chem.  News,  28  (1873),  70. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


145 


1873:  22.  H.  Pellet.  [Reduction  des  sels  du  platine  par  l’hydro- 
gSne.]  (Not  reduced;  reply  to  Merget,  C.  R.  77  : 38.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  77  (1873),  112;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  20  (1873),  258;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1873;  Gaz.  chim.  4 (1874),  93;  Jsb.  Chem.  1873,  291. 

1873:  23.  C.  Gourdon.  Nouvelles  observations  concernant  1’ influ- 
ence des  depots  metalliques  sur  le  zinc  mis  en  presence  des 
acides  et  des  alcalis;  nouveaux  procedes  d’heliogravure. 
(Effect  of  platinum  on  solution  of  zinc.)  Pt. 

C.  It.  Assoc,  franc.  2 (1873),  302;  C.  R.  76  (1873),  1250;  Ber.  6 (1873),  680. 

1873:  24.  C.  A.  Gruel.  Bedingungen  zur  sicheren  Zundong  der 
Dobereinschen  Platin-Feuerzeuge.  Pt. 

Indust.  Blatter,  10  (1873),  425;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  28  (1873),  bd;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1874,  119;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  929;  Polyt.  J.  (Dingier), 
211  (1874),  243. 

1873:  25.  R.  Bottger.  Vorlesungsversuche  mit  activem  Wasser- 
stoff  und  Sauerstoff.  Pd. 

Tagebl.  Naturf.  Versamml.  1873,  106;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1873,  818. 

1873:  26.  R.  Bottger.  Ueber  Aufbewahrung  und  Eigensehaften 
eines  auf  elektrolytischem  Wege  mit  Wasserstoff  ubersattigten 
Palladiumbleches.  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Jubelbd.  (1874),  150;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  12],  9 
(1874),  193;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  226;  Gaz.  chim.  4 (1874),  570;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  866,  1139;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  51  (1874),  185; 
Phil.  Mag.  [4],  49  (1875),  80;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  295;  Amer.  Chemist,  5 
(1874),  138;  5 (1875),  425. 

1873:27.  J.  J.  Coquillion.  Action  du  platine  et  du  palladium  sur 
les  hydrocarbures.  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  77  (1873),  444;  Ber.  6 (1873),  1264;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  20  (1873), 
493;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1873,  611;  Chem.  News,  28  (1873),  125;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  26  (1873),  1214;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  6,  ii  (1874),  28. 

1873:  27a.  (See  p.  454.) 

1873:  28.  A.  Voller.  Ueber  Aenderungen  der  elektromotorischen 
Kraft  galvanischer  Combinationen  durch  die  Warme  (Platin  in 
Salpetersaure).  (Inaug.  Diss.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  149  (1873),  394;  Jsb.  Chem.  1873,  122. 

1873:  29.  P.  A.  Favre.  Recherches  thermiques  sur  la  condensa- 
tion des  gaz  par  les  corps  solides.  Absorption  de  l’hydrogene 
par  le  noir  de  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  77  (1873),  649;  Chem.  News,  28  (1873),  213;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27 
(1874),  15. 

1873:  30.  H.  Schroder.  Dichtigkeitsmessungen.  Heidelberg,  1873. 
(Density  of  potassium  and  ammonium  chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  32. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 10 


146 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1874:  1.  H.  J.  Burkart.  Ueber  neue  mexicanische  Fundorte 
einiger  Mineralien.  (Occurrence  of  platinum  in  Mexico,  p. 
594.)  Pt. 

Neues  Jahrb.  Mineral.  1874,  587;  Dingl’.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  213;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1874,  1230;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  551. 

1S74:  2.  A.  Frenzel.  Mineralogisches  [8.  Eisenplatin].  (From 
Russia,  p.  684.)  Pt. 

Neues  Jahrb.  Mineral.  1874,  673;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  1230. 

1S74:  3.  H.  Morin.  Presentation  d’un  lingot  de  250  kilogrammes 
de  platine  et  d’iridium  allies,  fondu,  etc.  (Properties  of  alloy.) 

Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  78  (1874),  1502;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  213  (1874),  337;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874, 
1065;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  6,  ii  (1874),  298;  Polyt.  Centrbl.  40  (1874), 
966;  Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1874),  146. 

1S74:  4.  F.  Beilsteix.  Die  chemische  Grossindustrie  auf  der 
Weltausstellung  zu  Wien,  1873.  (Platinum  manufactory  of 
Johnson,  Matthey  & Co.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Poiyt.  J.  (Dingier),  211  (1874),  155;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  176;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1874,  1064. 

1874:  5.  Production  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Amer.  Chemist,  4 (1874),  440;  from  Engineering. 

1874:  6.  H.  Saixt-Claire  Deyille,  H.  Debray,  and  H.  Morin. 
(Separation  of  iridium  from  platinum  ores,  platinum-iridium 
alloys,  and  normal  meter;  also  poisonous  qualities  of  osmium.) 

Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Technologist©,  36  (1874),  194;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  609;  Polyt.  Centrbl. 
40  (1874),  966. 

1874:  7.  L.  J.  Troost  and  H.  Hautefeuille.  Note  sur  le  palla- 
dium hydrogene.  Density  de  Thydrogene  combing  avec 
metaux.  Pd. 

C.  R.  78  (1874),  686,  968;  Ann.  chim.  phvs.  [5],  2 (1874),  279,  287;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  22  (1874),  118,  120;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  153  (1874), 
144;  Ber.  7 (1874),  480;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  276;  Chem.  News,  29 
(1874),  196;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  660;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  9 (1874), 
199;  Phil.  Mag.  [4],  47  (1874),  397;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  293;  J.  Russ. 
Chem.  Soc.  6,  ii  (1874),  165;  Amer.  Chem.  5 (1874),  143. 

1874:  8.  J.  Moutier.  Sur  la  chaleur  degagee  par  la  combinaison 
de  rhydrogene  avec  les  metaux.  Pd. 

C.  R.  79  (1874),  1242;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  138;  L’Institut,  42  (1874), 
412;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  112. 

1874:  9.  P.  A.  Fayre.  Recherches  sur  Thydrogene.  (Heat  devel- 
opment of  platinum-hydrogen  and  palladium -hydrogen.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  78  (1874),  1257;  Ber.  7 (1874),  737;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  111;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  22  (1874),  486. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


147 


1874: 

1874: 

4874: 

1874: 

1874: 

1874: 

1874: 

1874: 

1874: 

1874: 

✓ 

1874: 


10.  P.  A.  Favre.  Recherches  thermiques  sur  la  condensation 

des  gas  par  les  corps  solides  et  la  chaleur  degagee  dans  Pacte 
de  cette  absorption.  (Condensation  of  hydrogen  by  platinum 
and  palladium,  pp.  215,  227,  256.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  1 (1874),  209. 

11.  J.  L.  Smith.  Condensation  of  air  on  the  surface  of  plati- 
num. Pt. 

Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1874),  212;  Chem.  News,  31  (1875),  55;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  28  (1875),  480. 

12.  J.  L.  Smith.  A ready  method  of  showing  the  absorption 

of  hydrogen  by  palladium.  Pd. 

Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1874),  213;  Chem.  News,  31  (1875),  56;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1874,  177;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  424. 

13.  J.  Thomsen.  Bery Ilium-Plat inchlorid.  Pt. 

Ber.  7 (1874),  75;  Chem.  Centrbl.  18/4,  245. 

14.  A.  Welkow.  Beryllium-Palladium chlorid.  Pd. 

Ber.  7 (1874),  38;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  21  (1874),  273;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1874,  245;  Chem.  News,  29  (1874),  155;  Gaz.  chim.  4 (1874),  278. 

15.  A.  Welkow.  Beryllium-Palladiumchlorur.  Pd. 

Be*.  7 (1874),  803;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  22  (1874),  499;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1874,  467;  Gaz.  chim.  5 (1875),  61. 

16.  A.  Welkow.  Aluminium-Platinchlorid.  Pt. 

Ber.  7 (1874),  304;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  22  (1874),  153;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1874,  292;  Gaz.  chim.  4 (1874),  302. 

17.  A.  Welkow.  Aluminum-Palladiumchlorur.  Pd. 

Ber.  7 (1874),  802;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2J,  22  (1874),  499;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1874,  467;  Chem.  News,  29  (1874),  265;  Gaz.  chim.  5 (1875),  61;  J. 
Russ-.  Chem.  Soc.  6,  ii  (1874),  313. 

18.  P.  T.Cleve.  Bidrag  till  jordmetallernas  kemi.  (Chlorides 

and  cyanides  of  platinum  and  thorium,  No.  6;  lanthanum,  7; 
didymium,  8;  yttrium,  12;  erbium,  12.)  Pt. 

Bihang  Akad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  2 (1874),  6-,  7,  8,  12;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2f,  2J  (1874),  115,  196,  246,  344;  Ber.  8 (1875),  128. 

19.  [F.  Wohler.]  Palladiumoxydul  in  Wasserstoffgas.  Pd. 
NachrichteD,  Gottingen,  1874,  420;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig-);  174  (1874), 

60;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  23  (1875),  267;  Gaz.  chim.  6 (1876),  213;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1874,  770;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  295;  Ztsch.  ges.  Wiss.  11  (1875), 
63;  Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1875),  384;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  7,  ii  (1875),  8. 

20.  [F.  Wohler.]  Notiz  liber  ein  Palladiumsalz.  (Sodium 

palladium  sulphite.)  Pd. 

Nachrichten,  Gottingen,  1874,  419;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  174  (1874), 
199;  Bull.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  23  (1875),  267;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1.874,  803; 
Chem.  News,  30  (1874),  275$  Gaz.  chim.  6 (1876),  224;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1874,  296;  Ztsch.  ges.  Wias.  11  (1875)^  67;  Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1875), 
353;  I,  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  134. 


148 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1874:  21.  W.  Skey.  On  the  formation  of  certain  double  metallic 
sulphocyanides  (of  platinum  with  aniline).  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  30  (1874),  33;  Ber.  7 (1874),  1459;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  300. 

1874:  22.  W.  Skey.  Notes  upon  the  production  of  certain  double 
salts  of  the  aniline  bases  and  indigo  with  metallic  salts  (with 
platinum  chloride  and  thiocyanate).  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  30  (1874),  33;  Ber.  7 (L874),  1459;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  300. 

1874:23.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  neue  Schwefelsalze.  (Summary.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  153  (1874),  588;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  11  (1875)/ 
91;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  533. 

1874:  24.  S.  Jolin.  Om  cerium  och  dess  foreningar.  (Double 
chlorides  and  cyanides  of  platinum  and  cerium.)  Pt. 

Bihang.  Akad.  Handl.  2 (1874),  14;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  21  (1874),  533. 

1874:  25.  F.  Gramp.  Ueber  Affinitatsverhaltnisse  der  Halogen- 
metallyerbindungen.  (Platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  7 (1874),  1723;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  423;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  49. 

1874:  26.  G.  Krause.  Beitrag  zur  Bestimmung  des  Kalium  als 
Kaliumplatinchlorid.  Pt. 

Arch,  fur  Pharm.  205  (1874),  407;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  14  (1875),  184; 
Pharm.  J.  5 (1875),  782;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  978;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1870), 
437. 

1874:  27.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deyille  and  H.  Debray.  Sur  une  pro- 
priety nouvelle  du  rhodium  metallique.  (Reduction  of  formic 
acid.)  Rh,  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Ru. 

C.  B.  78  (1874),  1782;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  22  (1874),  360;  Ber.  7 (1874), 
1038;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  513;  Chem.  News,  30  (1874),  98;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  27  (1874),  1076;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  296;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  6,  ii 
(1874),  301. 

1874:  28.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  [Poisonous  qualities  of 
osmic  acid.]  Os. 

C.  R.  78  (1874),  1509;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  610. 

1874:  29.  G.  Vulpius.  Ueber  Platinreduction.  (Preparation  of 
platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Arch,  fur  Pharm.  205  (1874),  417;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  786;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  29  (1876),  192;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  294;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876), 
437. 

1874:  30.  C.  A.  Winkler.  Ueber  die  Loslichkeit  des  legirten  Platins 
in  Salpetersaure.  (When  alloyed  with  silver,  copper,  lead,  bis- 
muth, or  zinc.) 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  13  (1874),  369;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  162;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  13  (1875),  428;  Berg-  u.  Htitten.  Ztg.  34  (1875),  145;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  7,  ii  (1875),  27;  Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1875),  402. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


149 


1874:  31.  H.  Topsoe.  Beitrage  zur  krystallographischen  Kenntniss 
der  Salze  der  seltenen  Erdmetalle.  (Double  platinum  chlorides 
and  cyanides.)  Pt. 

Bihang  Akad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  2 (1874),  5;  Ber.  8 (1875),  129. 

1874:  32.  A.  H.  L.  Fizeau.  Dilation  du  alliage  platine-iridium. 

Ir,  Pt. 

C.  R.  78  (.1874),  1205;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  70. 

1874:  33.  J.  L.  Smith.  Gold-lined  capsules  and  crucibles.  Pt. 

Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1874),  213;  Chem.  News,  31  (1875),  55;  Dingl.  pol. 
J.  219  (1876),  183;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  1096;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner), 
25  (1875-76),  203;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  14  (1875),  329. 

1874:  34.  H.  Carmichael.  (Platinum  digestor.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  1874;  Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1874),  163. 

1874 : 35.  E.  Reichardt.  Briichiges  Platin.  (With  silicon.)  Pt. 

Arch,  fiir  Pharm.  205  (1874),  123;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1874,  595;  Dingl. 
pol.  J.  213  (1874),  445;  240  (1881),  217;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  294;  Amer. 
Chemist,  6 (1875),  155. 


1874:  36.  A.  Polain.  De  la  resistance  du  bronze  phosphoreux  et 
de  ses  applications  dans  Tindustrie.  (Plating  phosphor- 
bronze  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Rev.  univ.  des  mines,  35  (1874),  595;  Dirgl.  pol.  J.  217  (1875),  494. 

1874:  37.  P.  de  Wilde.  Action  de  Fhydrogene  sur  1’ acetylene  et 
T ethylene  sous  h influence  du  noir  de  platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  Bruxelles,  37  (1874),  73;  Ber.  7 (1874),  353;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  21  (1874),  446;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  882. 

1874:38.  R.  C.  Bottger.  Ueber  Aufbewahrung  und  Eigenschaften 
eines  auf  elektrolytischem  Wege  mit  Wasserstoff  ubersiittigten 
Palladiumbleches.  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  9 (1874),  193;  Tageblatt  Naturf.  Versamml.  1875,  54; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  643;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  7,  ii  (1875),  97. 

1874:  39.  M.  Traube.  Zur  Theorie  der  Fermentwirkung.  (Plati- 
num black  on  sugar.)  Pt. 

Ber.  7 (1874),  115;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  13  (1874),  349;  N.  arch.  sci.  phys. 
nat.  49  (1874),  141;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  951. 

1874:40.  E.  Hagenbach-Bischoff.  Fernere  Versuche  fiber  Fluor- 
escenz.  (Of  platinocyanides,  p.  309.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Jubeib.  (1874),  303;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  155. 

1874:  41.  H.  Topsoe.  Krystallographisch-chemische  Untersuch- 
ungen  (iiber  Baryumplatinchlorid  und  Natriumplatin- 
bromid).  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Wien.  Acad.  69,  ii  (1874),  261;  Jsb.  Chem.  1874,  179. 


150 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1874:  42.  Willis,  Jr.  (Platinum  and  iridium  in  photography.) 

Pt,  Ir. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  (1874),  No.  6;  Amer.  Chemist;  5 (1874),  153;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1874,  583;  J.  Chem.  Soe.  27  (1874),  1019. 

1874:  43.  D.  Macaluso.  Untersuchung  liber  die  galvanische 
Polarisation  durch  Chlor  und  Wasserstoff.  Ueber  die  electro- 
motorische  Kraft  des  mit  kleinen  Mengen  von  Chlor  beladenen 
Platins.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  29  (1874),  225;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1874),  1044. 

1875:  1.  A.  Descloizeaux.  Note  sur  Y element  pyroxenique  de  la 
roche  associee  au  platine  de  FOuraL  Pt. 

C.  R.  80  (1875),  785;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  623. 

1875:  2.  G.  A.  Daubree.  Association,  dans  FOural,  du  platine 
natif  h la  roche  a base  de  peridot;  relation  d’origine  qui  unit 
ce  metal  avec  le  fer  chrome.  (Matrix  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  80  (1875),  707;  Bui.  Soc.  geol.  (Paris),  3 (1875),  311;  Neues  Jahrb. 
Mineral.  1875,  540;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875, 1194;  Ann.  des  mines  [7],  9 (1876), 
123;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876),  469;  Le  Technol.  1876,  No.  7. 

1875:  3.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  Sur  les  alliages  de  platine  et 
de  fer.  (Rejoinder  to  Daubree,  1875:  27.)  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  80  (1875),  589;  Chem.  News,  31  (1875),  171;  J.  Chem.  Soe.  28  (1875). 
534;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875,  232, 1196;  1880,  362;  Monit.  scientif.  [3],  6 (1876), 
548;  Chem.  Industrie,  3 (1880),  22. 

1875:  4.  K.  L.  F.  yon  Sandberger.  (Barytglimmer  vom  Habach- 
thal;  Brauneisenerz-Pseudomorphosen,  welche  Platin  enthal- 
ten,  aus  Mexico.)  Pt. 

Neues  Jahrb.  Mineral.  1875,  625;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1876),  54;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1875,  1194. 

1875:  5.  Werth  von  Metallen.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  34  (1875),  244  (from  Mining  and  Sci.  Press); 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  544. 

1875:  6.  Zur  Industrie  der  Edelmetalle.  (Scheidung  der 

alten  Thaler  in  Frankfurt  a.  M.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Indust.  Blatter,  12  (1875),  386;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  218  (1875),  376. 

1875:  7. (Apparatus  at  Conservatory  of  Arts  and  Trades 

[Paris]  for  fusion  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1875),  354;  from  La  Nature. 

1875:  8.  (Forging  of  a platinum  ingot.)  Pt. 

Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1875),  394;  from  La  Nature. 

1875:  9.  J.  R.  von  Wagner.  Ueber  die  Verwendbarkeit  des  Broms 
in  der  Hydrometallurgie,  der  Probirkunst,  und  der  chemischen 
Technologie.  (Extraction  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1875;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  218  (1875),  254;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2], 
25  (1876),  138. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  151 

1875:  10.  J.  L.  Smith.  A convenient  instrument  for  showing  the 
absorption  of  hydrogen  gas  by  palladium.  (Read  at  A.  A.  A. 
S.,  1875.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1875),  106;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875,  153;  Gazz.  chim.  ifcal.  6 
(1876),  101;  Rev.  scientif.  Feb.  (1876). 

1875:  11.  L.  H.  Laudy.  The  occlusion  of  hydrogen  by  palladium. 

Amer.  Chemist,  5 (1875),  362;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875,  154.  Pd. 

1875:  12.  L.  Troost  and  P.  Hautefeuille.  Sur  la  dissolution  de 
l’hydrogene  dans  les  metaux.  Pd. 

C.  R.  80  (1875),  788;  Chem.  News,  31  (1875),  196. 

1875:  13.  R.  Godeffroy.  Einige  neue  Salze  und  Reactionen  des 
Caesiums  und  Rubidiums.  (Double  platinum  chlorides.)  Pt. 

Ber.  8 (1875),  9;  Pharm.  Ztsch.  Russl.  14  (1875),  35;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 
14  (1875),  92. 

1875:  14.  A.  von  Lasaulx.  Ueber  die  Krystallformen  des  Natri- 
umiridium-  und  des  Natriumrhodium-Sesquichlorurs. 

Neues  Jahrb.  Min.  1875,  128.  Ir,  Rh. 

1875:  15.  B.  Delachanal  and  A.  Mermet.  Sur  une  compose  de 
platine,  d’etain  et  d’oxygene,  analogue  au  pourpre  de  Cassius. 
(Oxyde  platinostannique  de  M.  Dumas.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  81  (1875),  370;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  24  (1875),  435;  Ber.  8 (1875), 
1353;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  625;  Chem.  News,  32  (1875),  157;  Gaz. 
chim.  6 (1876),  159;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1876),  48;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875, 
232;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  7,  ii  (1875),  404;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876),  319. 

1875:  16.  S.  Kern.  On  the  action  of  sulphocyanides  on  palladium 
chloride  and  nitrate.  (No  precipitate.)  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  32  (1875),  242;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  7,  i (1875),  316;  Ber.  8 
(1875),  1684;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  17  (1878),  491;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875,  233. 

1875:  17.  S.  Kern.  On  some  reactions  of  iodine  and  palladium 
chloride  with  potassium  ferrocyanide.  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  33  (1876),  184;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  7,  i (1875),  316;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  325. 

1875:  18.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  H.  Debray.  Du  ruthe- 
nium et  de  ses  composes  oxygenes.  Ru. 

C.  R.  80  (1875).  457;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  4 (1875),  537;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  24  (1875),  191;  Ber.  8 (1875),  339;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  258; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1876),  48;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875,  233;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 
(1875),  189;  6 (1876),  396;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  6 (1876),  518. 


1875:  19.  A.  Atterberg.  Sur  quelques  combinaisons  du  glucin- 
ium (piatinocyanid).  Pt. 

• Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  24  (1875),  358;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  6 (1876),  159. 


152 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1S75:  20.  Y.  A.  Vidau.  Note  sur  les  cuprocyanures  et  le  pallado- 
cyanure  de  potassium.  Pd. 

J.  de  pharm.  22  (1875),  321;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876),  319;  Gazz,  cliim. 
it.al.  6 (1876),  224;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1877),  456. 

1875:  21.  F.  Selmi  (and  C.  Bettelli).  Nuovi  reattivi  per  ricono- 
scere  e discernere  gli  alcaloidi  venefici.  (Potassium  iodo- 
platinate  as  a reagent  for  the  alkaloids.)  Pt. 

Mem.  Accad.  sci.  Bologna,  6 (1875),  189,  201;  Bendiconti  Accad.  sci. 
Bologna,  1875,  104,  153;  Gaz.  chim.  5 (1875),  255;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  29 
(1876),  113,  114;  Ber.  8 (1875),  1198;  9 (1876),  196;  Bui.  med.  d.  Bo- 
logna, 19,  321. 

1875:  22.  H.  Zenger.  Eine  bis  jetzt  vernachlassigte  Iodquelle. 
(Susswasserpflanzen.)  (Detection  of  iodine  by  palladium 

iodide.)  Pd. 

Arch,  fur  Pharm.  206  (1875),  137;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1876),  876;  Amer. 
Chemist,  6 (1876),  259;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  14  (1875),  368. 

1875:  23.  W.  C.  Lossen.  Notiz  liber  die  reducirende  Wirkung 
des  Hydroxyl amins  auf  Platinchlorid).  Pt. 

Ber.  8 (1875),  357. 

1875:  24.  V.  Meyer  and  J.  Locher.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  der 
Sauren  auf  nitrirte  Fettkorper.  (Action  of  hydrogen  on 
hydroxylamin  in  presence  of  platinum  tetrachlorided  Pt. 

Ber.  8 (1875),  219  (footnote). 

1875:  25.  T.  J.  Fairley.  On  new  solvents  for  gold,  silver,  plati- 
num, etc.,  with  an  explanation  of  the  so-called  catalytic  action 
of  these  metals  and  their  salts  on  hydrogen  dioxide. 

Brit.  Assoc.  Hep.  45  (1875),  42  (title  only);  Ber.  8 (1875),  1600.  Pt. 

1875:  26.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  H.  Debray.  De  la 
densite  du  platine  et  de  F iridium  purs,  et  de  leurs  alliages. 

Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  81  (1875),  839;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  26  (1876),  157;  Ber.  8 (1875), 
1591;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  4;  Chem.  News,  32  (1875),  281;  Amer.  J. 
Sci.  [3],  11  (1876),  142;  Monit.  scient.  [3],  6 (1876),  75;  Phil.  Mag. 
[4],  50  (1875),  558;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1876),  523;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  15  (1876),  451;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875,  231;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  8,  ii 
(1876),  109;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876),  398;  J.  de  pharm.  23  (1876),  168; 
Gazz.  chim.  ital.  6 (1876),  475. 

1875:  27.  G.  A.  Daubree.  Experiences  sur  Fimitation  artifici- 
elle  du  platine  natif  magnetipolaire.  Pt. 

C.  R.  80  (1875),  526;  Ann.  des  mines  [7],  9 (1876),  123;  Bui.  Soc.  g£ol. 
Paris,  3 (1875),  310;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  216;  Jsb.  Chem.  1875, 
1195. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


153 


1875:  28.  A.  Scheurer-Kestner.  Dissolution  clu  platine  dans 
Facide  sulfurique,  pendant  l’operation  industrielle  de  la  con- 
centration. * Pt. 

C.  R.  81  (1875),  892;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  24  (1875),  501;  Ber  8 (1875), 
1593;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  11  (1876),  216;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  8;  Chem. 
News,  32  (1875),  281;  Gaz.  chim.  6 (1876),  162;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  29 
(1876),  345;  Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876),  296,  356. 

1875:  29.  A.  Bauer.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Schwefelsaure 


auf  Blei.  (And  lead-platinum  alloys.)  Pt. 

Ber.  8 (1875),  212;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  211. 

1875:  30.  P.  Weiskopf.  Kupferlegirung  und  Silber  intensiv 
schwarz  zu  farben.  (Durch  Platinchlorur.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  215  (1875),  470. 

1875:  31.  Heyl.  [Pflug’s  Platinfarbe.]  Pt. 


Gewerbeblatt  f.  Grossh.  Hessen,  38  (1875),  229;  Polyt.  Notizbl.  30  (1875), 
267;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1875,  710;  Amer.  Chemist,  6.(1875),  236. 

1875:  32.  J.  J.  Coquillion.  Sur  Faction  du  platine  et  du  palla- 
dium sur  les  hydrocarbures  de  la  serie  benzenique.  (Oxida- 
tion.) Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  80  (1875),  1089;  Ber.  8 (1875),  697;  Chem.  News,  31  (1875),  239; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1875),  1188. 

1875:  33.  P.  Champion,  H.  Pellet,  and  Grenier.  Application  de 
Felectricite  a Finflammation  des  fourneaux  de  mine,  torpilles, 
etc.,  et  a Findustrie  miniere.  (Amorces  a fils  de  platine, 
p.  84.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  5 (1875),  28. 

1876:  1.  A.  Terreil.  Analyse  du  platine  natif  magnetique  de 
Nischne-Tagilsk.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  25  (1876),  482;  C.  R.  82  (1876),  1116;  Ber.  9 (1876), 
850;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  408;  Chem.  News,  33  (1876),  213;  Gaz.  chim. 
7 (1877),  1116;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  386;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  290, 
^ 1218. 

1876:2.  G.  A.  Daubree.  Presence  du  nickel  dans  le  platine  natif. 

C.  R.  82  (1876),  1116;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  290.  Pt. 

1876:  3.  G.  von  Uslar.  Die  Platin  und  Silber  fuhrende  Seifen  von 
Santa  Maria  de  las  Animas  (Mexico).  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  35  (1876),  88;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  213. 

1876:  4.  H.  Rossler.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  von  Palladium, 
Platin  und  Selen  in  den  Silbermunzen.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  180  (1876),  240;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  27  (1877), 
284;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  11  (1876),  486;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  285. 

1876:  5.  Frantz.  Russlands  Montanproduction.  Pt. 

Oberschles.  Ztsch.  (1876),  No.  16;  Berg- und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  35  (1876),  179; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  384. 


154 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1S76: 

1876: 

1876: 

1876: 

1876: 

1876: 

1876: 

1876: 

1876: 


6.  Brachelli.  Jahrliche  Met  allproduction.  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  35  (1876),  179  (from  Die  Staaten  Europa’s); 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  368. 

7.  Die  Preise  aller  Metalle.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  35  (1876),  410  (from  Stummer’s  Ingenieur); 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  160. 

8.  Zur  Darstellung  des  Platins.  (Editorial  review.) 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  220  (1876),.  95. 

9.  J.  Philipp.  Darstellung  Platins  von  Heraeus  (auf  der 

Wiener  Ausstellung).  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Amtlicher  Ber.  iiber  Wiener  Ausst.  Heft  20,  999;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  220  (1876), 
95;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  1075. 

10.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  H.  Debray.  De 

rosmium.  (Preparation  and  properties.)  Os. 

C.  It.  82  (1876),  1076;  Ber.  9 (1876),  848;  Bull.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  26  (1876), 
339;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  417;  Chem.  News,  33  (1876),  230;  Gaz.  chim.  7 
(1877),  34;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  279;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  15  (1876), 
454;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  301;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1876),  120. 

11.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  H.  Debray.  Sur 

les  propri6t6s  physiques  et  chimiques  du  ruthenium.  (Im- 
portant memoir  on  preparation,  crystallization,  analysis, 
alloys,  and  tetroxide.)  Ru. 

C.  R.  83  (1876),  926;  Ber.  9 (1876),  1935;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  66;  Chem. 
News,  34  (1876),  265;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1877),  443;  J.  de  pharm.  25 
(1877),  182;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  302,  1004;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  9,  ii  (1877), 
245;  Amer.  Chemist.  6 (1876),  277. 

12.  L.  F.  Nilson.  Zur  Frage  uber  die  Valenz  der  seltenen 

ErH metalle.  (Chlorplatinates  of  the  rare  earths,  and  iron, 
chromium,  indium,  aluminum,  and  tin.)  Pt. 

Ber.  9 (1876),  1056,  1142;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  292;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  27 
(1877),  206;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  9,  ii  (1877),  98;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 
(1876),  242. 

13.  L.  F.  Nilson.  Untersuchung  iiber  Chlorosalze  und 

Doppelnitrite  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Nova  acta  Soc.  sci.  Upsala,  [3],  vol.  extraord.  (1877),  No.  15,  Oefversigt 
Akad.  Handl.  (Stockholm),  33  (1876),  No.  6,  3,  11,  23;  Ber.  9 (1876), 
1722;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  27  (1877),  208,  210,  242;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877, 
98,  291;  1878.  212;  Chem.  News,  34  (1876),  270;  36  (1877),  183; 
37  (1878),  31;  Gaz.  chim.  7 (1877),  1532;  8 (1878),  160;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
32  (1877),  115,  277;  34  (1878),  274;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  15  (1877),  177, 
260;  16  (1877),  241;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  295;  1877,  310. 

14.  A.  Guyard  (H.  Tamm).  Note  sur  le  siliciure  de  platine. 

Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  25  (1876),  510;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  217;  Gaz. 
chim.  3 (1878),  522;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  384;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876, 
292';  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  9,  ii  (1877),  98;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1877),  322. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


155 


1876:  15.  J.  B.  J.  Bqussingault.  Sur  la  siliciuration  du  platine  et 
de  quelques  autres  metaux.  Pt,  Pd,  Ru,  Ir. 

C.  R.  82  (1876),  591;  Ann.  china,  phys.  [5],  8 (1876),  145;  Ber.  9 (1876), 
503;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  26  (1876),  265;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  307;  Chem. 
News,  33  (1876),  148;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  225  (1877),  108;  Gaz.  chim.  6 (1876), 
496;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  47;  Jsb.  Chem.  1870,  291;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  8,  ii  (1876),  392;  9,  ii  (1877),  207. 

1876:  16.  F.  Kruger.  Ueber  Isomerien  bei  organischen  Sulfinver- 
bindungen.  (Platinum  salts  of  sulphur  bases.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  14  (1876),  193;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  7 (1877),  246. 

1876:  17.  W.  Heintz.  Ein  neues,  zwei  verschiedene  Ammoniak- 
basen  enthaltendes  Platinsalz.  (Triacetonamin  und  Triace- 
tonalkamin.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  183  (1876),  317;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  28  (1877), 
20;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1877),  592;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1877),  360. 

1876:  18.  G.  Quesneville.  Action  de  Tammoniaque  et  des  am- 
moniaques  composees  sur  les  chlorures  phosphoplatineux  et 
phosphoplatinique.  Pt. 

Monit.  scient.  [3],  6 (1876),  659;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  298. 

1876:  19.  P.  Casamajor.  On  the  amalgamation  of  iron  and  of 
some  other  metals.  (Platinum  and  palladium  amalgam.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876),  450;  Chem.  News,  34  (1876),  34;  Engin.  Mag. 
15  (1876),  305;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  281;  Archiv  Pharm.  [3],  11  (1877), 
464;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  474. 

1876:  20.  G.  H.  Billings.  The  properties  of  iron  alloyed  with 
other  metals.  (With  platinum,  p.  451.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Amer.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  5 (1876),  447;  Dingi.  pol.  J.  228  (1878),  430; 
Eng.  and  Min.  J.  23  (1877),  415. 

1876:  21.  A.  Chatin.  Des  causes  d’insucc&s  dans  la  recherche  de 
minimes  quantites  d’iode.  (Detection  of  iodine  by  palladium 
chloride.)  Pd. 

C.  R.  82  (1876),  128;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  15  (1876),  460. 

1876:  22.  F.  Becker.  Ueber  einige  Tellurverbindungen.  (Sepa- 
ration of  tellurium  and  platinum,  Ann.  Chem.,  p.  268.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Phys.  Med.  Soc.  Erlangen,  8 (1876),  23;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig), 
180  (1876),  257;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  15  (1876),  338. 

1876:  23.  M.  Kretschy.  Konnen  die  indirecten  Methoden  der 
Alkalibestimmung  sich  gegenseitig  controliren  oder  zu  Con- 

ttrole  der  directen  Methoden  verwendet  werden?  (Bestim- 
mung  des  Kalis  mittelst  Chlorplatin,  p.  49.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  ('hem.  15  (1876),  37. 


156 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1876:  24.  S.  Kern.  On  the  action  of  magnesium  on  some  metallic 
salts.  (Platinum  salts,  p.  112;  palladium  salts,  236.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  33  (1876),  112,  236;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  27  (1877),  111. 

1876:  25.  S.  Kern.  On  some  reactions  of  iodine  and  palladium 
chloride  with  potassium  ferrocyanide.  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  33  (1876),  184. 

1876:  26.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  H.  Debray.  Do  la 
decomposition  de  Teau  par  le  platine.  Pt. 

0.  It.  82  (1876),  241;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  26  (1876),  268;  J.  de  pharm.  23 
(1876),  166;  Ber.  9 (1876),  355;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  193;  Chem. 
News,  33  (1876),  74;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  43;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3], 
11  (1876),  318;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  299;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  6 (1876),  475. 

1876:  27.  F.  Wohler.  Notiz  liber  das  Verhalten  des  Palladiums  in 
der  Alkoholflamme.  (Decomposition  of  alcohol  and  ethyl- 
ene.) Pd. 

Nachrichten,  Gottingen,  1876,  489;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  184  (1877), 128; 
Ber.  9 (1876),  1713;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  28  (1877),  158;  Chem.  News, 
34  (1876),  269;  35  (1877),  55;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1877),  437;  Amer.  J. 
Sci.  [3],  13  (1877),  148;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  300;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1877), 
360;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  3 (1877),  35. 

1876:  28.  W.  Skey.  On  the  oxidation  of  silver  and  platinum  by 
oxygen  in  the  presence  of  water.  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  8 (1876),  332;  Chem.  News,  35  (1877),  203; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  303;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  608. 

1876:  29.  W.  Skey.  On  certain  chemical  effects  of  oxygenized 
graphite  and  platinum.  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  8 (1876),  347;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  60;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  609;  32  (1877),  710. 

1876:  30.  J.  Thomsen.  Ueber  die  Neutralization.  (Neutraliza- 
tionswarme  der  Ammoniumbasen.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  13  (1876),  241;  Chem.  Centrbl.  7 (1876),  545;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1876,  83. 

1876:  31.  F.  Kopfer.  On  the  use  of  platinum  in  the  ultimate 
analysis  of  chemical  compounds.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1876),  660;  Ber.  9 (1876),  508;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2J,  26 
(1876),  475;  Chem.  News,  33  (1876),  127. 

1876:  32.  F.  Kopfer.  Ueber  die  Anwendung  des  Platins  bei  der 
Elemen  tar  analyse.  Pt. 

Ber.  9 (1876),  1377;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1877),  228;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  958; 
Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1877),  316. 

1876:  33.  A.  Mitscherlich.  Elemen  tar  analyse  vermittelst  Queck- 
silberoxyd.  (Use  of  potassium  chlorplatinate  to  determine 
oxygen  directly,  p.  374.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  15  (1876),  371. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


157 


1876:  34.  E.  F.  Durre.  Studien  fiber  die  Ausnutzung  der  Warme 
in  den  Oefen  der  Hiittenwesen.  (Platinschmelzen  in  Kna.ll- 


gasgebl&se.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  220  (1876),  324. 

1876:  35.  C.  J.  H.  W.  Platinum  combustion  tubes.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  34  (1876),  67;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1877),  362. 

1876:  36.  W.  D.  Herman.  Platinum  combustion  tubes.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  34  (1876),  81. 

1876:  37.  W.  Jago.  Rapid  filtratioil  (by  platinum  filters).  Pt. 
Amer.  Chemist,  6 (1876),  351;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  959. 

1876:  38.  C.  Stockman.  Ueber  das  Aufschliessen  von  Silicaten. 
(Getting  melt  out  of  platinum  crucible.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  15  (1876),  283. 


1876:  39.  F.  Stolba.  Ueber  die  Anwendung  des  Borfluorkaliums 
als  Flussmittel  bei  Lothungen.  (Zur  Reinigung  der  Platin- 
tiegel  durch  Borfluorkalium  und  Borsaure.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Bohm.  Gesel.  (Prag),  1876,  220;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  16  (1877),  95. 

1876:  40.  F.  Bode.  Faure  und  Kessler’s  Platinschale.  (Zur 
Schwefelsaureconcentration.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  220  (1876),  334. 

1876:  41.  F.  Bode.  Concentration  von  Schwefelsaure  in  Platin- 
schalen  nach  Faure  und  Kessler.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  220  (1876),  336. 

1876:42.  F.  Bode  (nach  Scheurer-Kestner).  Ueber  Abniitzung 
der  Platingefasse  beim  Concentration  von  Schwefelsaure.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  221  (1876),  82;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  674. 

1876:  44.  L.  Kessler  (also  R.  Hasenclever  and  Johnson, 
Matthey  & Co.).  Ueber  Faure  und  Kessler’s  Platinschale. 


Dingl.  pol.  J.  221  (1876),  85.  Pt. 

1876:  45.  [J.  Zeman  and  F.  Fischer.]  Ueber  Faure  und  Kessler’s 

Platinschale.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  221  (1876),  384. 

1876:  46.  F.  Bode.  Neue  Formen  der  alten  Platinkessel.  Pt. 
Dingl.  pol.  J.  221  (1876),  541;  225  (1877),  281. 

1876:  47.  Lamy.  Appareils  a cuvette  de  platine  de  MM.  Faure  et 
Kessler  pour  la  concentration  d’acide  sulfurique.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  25  (1876),  279. 

1876:  48.  R.  C.  Bottger.  Neues  Verfahren  Mctalle  auf  galvan- 
ischem  Wege  mit  Platin  zu  uberziehen.  Pt. 


Jsb.  Phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt,  1876-77,  20;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  229  (1878),  395; 
J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  76  (1878),  348. 


158 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


1876:  49.  A.  Bertrand.  Reeherches  sur  la  production  de  d6p6ts 
electro-chimiques  . . . de  palladium.  Pd. 

C.  R.  83  (1876),  854;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  27  (1877),  382;  Chem.  News, 
34  (1876),  227;  Gaz.  chim.  7 (1877),  388;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1877),  161. 

1876:  50.  Frantz.  Application  6lectrochimique  du  palladium  en 
vue  de  suppleer  1’ argentine.  (French  patent  107961,  May  8, 
1875.)  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  25  (1876),  576;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  592;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  32  (1877),  239. 

1876:  51.  S.  de  Luca.  Sul  piombo  contenuto  in  due  punte  di 
platino  de’  parafulmini  dell’  Osservatorio  vesuviano.  (Lead 
in  platinum  points  on  lightning  rods.)  Pt. 

Rendiconti  Accad.  Napoli,  15  (1876),  69;  C.  R.  82  (1876),  1187;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  340;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  290. 

1876:  52.  — Untersuchung  von  Filsinger  fiber  die  soge- 

nannte  Pflug’sche  Platinanstrichmasse  (Platinfarbe).  (Con- 
tains no  platinum.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  221  (1876),  288, 

1876:  53.  J.  J.  Coquillion.  Proc6de  pour  doser  les  hydrocarbures 
et  en  particulier  le  grison  dans  les  mines.  (Use  of  palladium 
wire  for  ignition.)  Pd. 

C.  R.  83  (1876),  394;  Ber.  10  (1877),  730;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  17  (1878). 
329;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  959. 

1876:  54.  J.  J.  Coquillion.  Sur  les  limites  entre  lesquelles  peut 
se  produire  T explosion  du  grison,  et  sur  nouvelles  proprietes  du 
palladium.  (Combustion  without  explosion.)  Pd. 

C.  R.  83  (1876),  709;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  27  (1877),  314;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1876,  738;  Chem.  News,  34  (1876),  205;  Gaz.  chim.  7 (1877),  386; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1877),  166;  Jsb.  Chem.  1876,  301. 

1876:  55.  M.  R.  Zdrawkowitch.  Preparation  du  noir  de  platine  au 

moyen  de  la  glycerine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  25  (1876),  198;  Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  181  (1876), 
192;  Ber.  9 (1876),  443;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  322;  Chem.  News,  33 
(1876),  261;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  221  (1876),  288;  Gaz.  chim.  6 (1876),  202; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  47;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1876),  115;  J.  Russ. 
Chem.  Soc.  8,  ii  (1876),  252;  Pharm.  Centrh.  17  (1876),  179;  Jsb.  Chem, 
1876,  291;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  25  (1875-76),  203. 

1876:  56.  R.  C.  Bottger.  Palladiumwasserstoff.  Pd. 

Ber.  9 (1876),  1795  (from  49te  Versamml.  deutsch.  Naturf.  und  Aerzte). 

1876:  57.  E.  von  Meyer.  Ueber  die  bei  der  langsamen  Oxydation 
des  Wasserstoffs  und  Kohlenoxyds  mittelst  Platins  sich 
aussernden  Affinitatswirkungen.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  13  (1876),  121;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  40;  J.  Russ. 
Chem.  Soc.  8,  ii  (1876),  290. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


159 


1876:  58.  E.  yon  Meyer.  Beitrag  zur  Theorie  der  “ Katalytischen 
Wirkungen”  des  Platins.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  14  (1876),  124;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  28  (1877),  155; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  625;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1876),  486;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1876,  12. 

1876 : 59.  J.  B.  Dumas.  Etudes  sur  le  phylloxera  et  sur  les  sulfocar- 
bonates.  (Action  of  platinum  sponge  on  sulphocarbonates, 
p.  71.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  7 (1876),  1. 

1876:  60.  L.  Bleekrode.  On  electrical  conductivity  and  electro- 
lysis of  chemical  compounds.  (Nonelectrolysis  of  osmium 
tetroxide.)  Os. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  25  (1877),  322;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  [2],  3 
(1878),  161;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  5 (1878),  375,  439;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  148. 

1876:  61.  H.  Helmholtz  (and  E.  Root).  Bericht  iiber  Versuche 
des  Hrn.  Dr.  E.  Root  aus  Boston,  die  Durchdringung  des 
Platina  mit  elektrolytischen  Gasen  betreffend.  Pt. 

Monatsber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1876,  217;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  159  (1876), 
416;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1876,  401;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  2 (1876),  153;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  32  (1877),  161,  271. 

1876:  62.  C.  G.  Knott,  J.  MacGregor,  and  C.  M.  Smith.  The 
thermoelectric  properties  of  cobalt.  (Thermoelectric  prop- 
erties of  cobalt-palladium.)  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  9 (1878),  421;  Ann.  der  Phys.  Beibl.  2 (1878), 
277;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  136. 

1876:  63.  A.  Lallemand.  Recherches  sur  Fillumination  des  corps 
transparents.  (Polarisation  on  surface  of  platinum  black, 
p.  132.)  Pt- 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  8 (1876),  93. 

1876:  64.  G.  Pisati.  Sul Y elasticity  dei  metaJli  a diverse  tempera- 
ture. (Torsion  elasticity  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Gaz.  chim.  6 (1876),  57;  7 (1877),  61,  173. 

1876:  65.  G.  Matthey.  Regie  en  platine  iridie  de  F Association 
geodesique  internationale.  (Letter.)  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  83  (1876),  1090;  Amer.  Chemist,  7 (1877),  324. 

1876:66.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville.  Observations  sur  la  com- 
munication de  M.  Matthey  (regie  en  platine  iridi6).  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  83  (1876),  1091;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  8,  ii  (1876),  227. 

1877:  2.  S.  Kern.  On  Russian  platinum-ore  from  the  Oural 
Mountains.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Chem.  News  35  (1877),  88;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  287;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32 
(1877),  177;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  1259;  Quart.  J.  Sci.  14  (1877),  284. 


160 

1877: 


1877: 

1877: 

1877: 


1877: 


1877: 

1877: 

1877: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

3.  S.  Kern.  On  the  new  metal  davyum;  note  on  davyum;  on 

some  new  researches  on  the  metal  davyum;  on  the  spectrum  of 
the  metal  davyum;  solubility  of  sodium  davyum  chloride; 
some  remarks  on  the  metal  davyum.  Da. 

Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  4,  92,  114,  155,  164;  37  (1878),  65;  C.  R.  85 
(1877),  72,  623,  667;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  9,  i (1877),  295;  Ber.  10 
(1877),  1738;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  28  (1877),  566;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1877,  562,  642,  754;  J.  de  pharm.  27  (1878),  114;  Nature,  17  (1878), 
245;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  4 (1877),  158,  395;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  316;  1878, 
318;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  225  (1877),  210;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  7 (1877),  561; 
8 (1878),  217,  218. 

4.  A.  H.  Allen.  Contributions  on  chemical  analysis.  (Criti- 
cism on  S.  Kern’s  discovery  of  davyum.)  Da. 

Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  33;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  318. 

5.  K.  Karmarsch.  Betrachtungen  fiber  die  neueren 

Veranderungen  und  den  gegenwartigen  Zustand  des  euro- 
paischen  Miinzwesens.  (Platin  als  Munzmetall.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  223  (1877),  11. 

6.  L.  Opificius.  Die  Gewinnung  der  Platinmetalle  in  der 
deutschen  Gold-  und  Silberscheideanstalt  zu  Frankfurt  a.  M. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  224  (1877),  414;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  492;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877, 
1124;  Chem.  tech.  Mittli.  (Eisner),  27  (1877-78),  268;  Chem.  News, 
37  (1878),  112;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  29  (1878),  88. 

7.  J.  Thomsen.  Darstellung  einiger  Platinverbindungen. 

(Chloro-  and  bromo-platinites.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  15  (1877),  294;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  466;  Chem. 
News,  36  (1877),  183;  Gaz.  chim.  7 (1877),  532;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877), 
276;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  306. 

8.  F.  W.  Clarke.  Notes  upon  some  fluorides.  (Unsuccess- 
ful attempt  to  form  platinum  fluoride'.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  13  (1877),  292;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  304. 

9.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Platinoxyduloxyd.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  16  (1877),  344;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  600; 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  212;  Gaz.  chim.  9 (1879),  161;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877, 
304;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  200. 

10.  J.  Ribau.  Sur  quelques  proprietes  des  sulfures  de  platine 

au  point  de  vue  analytique.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  28  (1877),  241;  C.  R.  85  (1877),  283;  Amer.  J.  Sci. 
[3],  15  (1878),  52;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  631;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877), 
100;  Gaz.  chim.  8 (1878),  54;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  17  (1878),  99;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1877,  1070;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  9,  ii  (1877),  362;  Chem.  tech. 
Mitth.  (Eisner),  28  (1878-79),  36;  Arch.  Pharm.  [3],  13  (1878),  Aug. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


161 


1877:  11.  E.  yon  Meyer.  Ueber  die  Zusammensetzung  und  das 
chemische  Verbal  ten  des  “oxydirten  Schwefelplatins.”  Pt. 
J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  15  (1877),  1;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  13  (1877),  301;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  28  (1877),  362;  Chem.  News,  35  (1877),  116;  Gaz.  chim. 
7 (1877),  381;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  114;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  305; 
J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  9,  ii  (1877),  313. 

1877:  12.  E.von  Meyer.  Ueber  Osmiumoxysulfide.  Os. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  16  (1877),  77;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  313; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  641;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  225;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1877,  316;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  10,  ii  (1878),  305;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34 
(1878),  14. 

1877:  13.  P.  Claesson.  Ueber  Aethylmerkaptan.  (Merkaptide 
der  Platinmctalle,  p.  206.)  Pt,  Rh,  Ir. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  15  (1877),  193;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  295;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1877,  520. 

1877:  14.  A.  Cahours.  Recherches  sur  les  sulfmes.  (Chloro- 
platinate  of  triethylsulphine,  p.  41.)  Pt. 

Aim.  chim.  phys.  [5],  10,  (1877)  13. 

1877:  15.  W.  Gibbs.  Ueber  complexe  anorganisehe  Sauren.  (Pla- 
tomolybdates  and  tungstates.)  Pt. 

Ber.  10  (1877),  1384;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  14(1877),  61;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2], 
30  (1878),  31;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  658;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  847; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1877,294. 

1877:  16.  L.  F.  Nilson.  Om  inverkan  af  jod  och  alkoliol  pa  plato- 
nitrit.  (Action  of  iodine  and  alcohol  on  platonitrites.)  Pt. 
Oefversigt  Akad.  Forhand.  Stockholm,  34  (1877),  No.  5,  3;  Ber.  10  (1877), 
930;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  14  (1877),  149;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  450; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  710;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  313;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  10,  ii  (1878),  77. 

1877:  17.  L.  F.  Nilson.  Om  en  ny  platonitrosylsyra.  (A  new 
platonitrosyl  acid.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forhand.  Stockholm,  34  (1877),  No.  5,  9;  Ber.  10 
(1877),  934;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  362;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877, 
450;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  711;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  313. 

1877:  18.  R.  J.  Friswell  and  A.  J.  Greenaway.  Note  on  thalli- 
ous  platinocyanide.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  251;  Ber.  10  (1877),  1858,  1604;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  30  (1878),  120;  Chem.  News,  35  (1877),  272;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  314, 
336;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  10,  ii  (1878),  76;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 (1879),  205. 

1877 : 19.  G.  N.  Wyrouboff.  Note  sur  la  composition  et  les  formes 
cristallines  de  deux  nouvcaux  ferricyanures  et  d’un  sulfocyano- 
platinatc  dc  potassium.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  10  (1877),  409;  Ber.  13  (1880),  1137;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  402;  Chem.  News,  42  (1880),  166;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1877,  331;  Ztsch.  Kryst.  1 (1877),  403. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 11 


162 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1877 : 20.  L.  J.  Troost  and  P.  Hautefeuille.  Sur  les  corps  com- 
poses susceptibles  de  se  produire  a une  temperature  tres- 
superiaure  a celle  qui  determine  leur  decomposition  complete. 
(Yolatilizability  of  platinum  in  chlorine  gas.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  84  (1877),  946;  Ber.  10  (1877),  1172;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  402; 
Gaz.  chim.  7 (1877),  481;  J.  de  pharm.  26  (1877),  143;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877, 
202. 

1877:  21.  J.  H.  Debray.  Iridium;  ses  alliages;  fusion.  Ir,  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  27  (1877),  146;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  210. 

1877 : 22.  W.  Heintz.  Reducirende  Wirkung  der  Knochenkohle 
bei  niedere  Temperature.  (Auf  Platinchlorid  und  Platindop- 
pelsalze.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  187  (1877),  227. 

1877 : 23.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Verhalten  des  Wasserstoffplatin- 

chlorids  gegen  Silbernitrat.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  16  (1877),  342;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  500; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  212;  Gaz.  chim.  9 (1879),  161;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877, 
307;  Ber.  12  (1879),  1729;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  200. 

1877:  24.  E.  Duvillier.  Methode  pour  retirer  le  platine  des 

chloroplatinates.  Pt. 

C.  R.  84  (1877),  444;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  10  (1877),  572;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  28  (1877),  359;  Ber.  10  (1877),  730;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  291; 
Chem.  News,  35  (1877),  134;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  225  (1877),  210;  Gaz.  chim. 
7 (1877),  335;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  574;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  18 
(1879),  461;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1879),  587;  Arch.  Pharm.  [3],  13 
(1878),  Sept.;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  304;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  28 
(1878-79),  1. 

1877 : 25.  C.  R.  Fresenius.  Zur  Bestimmung  des  Kaliums  als 
Kaliumplatinchlorid,  namentlich  bei  Gegenwart  der  Chlor- 
verbindungen  der  Metalle  der  alkalischen  Erde.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  16  (1877),  63;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 (1879),  251. 

1877  : 26.  A.  Gawalovski.  Verfalschung  von  kauflich  bezogenem 
Natriumpalladiumchlorur  mit  Kochsalz.  Pd. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  16  (1877),  58;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  225;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1877,  1053. 

1877:  27.  W.  Schimper.  (Krystallformen  des  Triathylselenchlo- 
ridplatinchlorid.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Kryst.  1 (1877),  218;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  315. 

1877:  28.  A.  Gaiffe.  Note  sur  le  trefilage  du  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  85  (1877),  625;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  182;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881), 
216;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  8 (1878),  218;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  178;  Jsb.' 
Chem.  1878,  1114. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


163 


1877 : 29.  J.  H.  Johnson.  Ueberziehen  von  Eisen  mit  Platin 
(patent).  Pt. 

Ber.  10  (1877),  1974;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  112. 

1877:  30.  G.  Parodi  and  A.  Mascazzini.  Sulla  determinazione 
dello  zinco  e del  piombo  dai  loro  minerali  e prodotti  di  arte 
median te  Felettrolisi.  (Coating  of  platinum  with  zinc.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  7 (1877),  222;  Ber.  10  (1877),  84;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877, 
146;  Annali  di  chim.  67  (1878),  185. 

1877:  31.  (Platiniren.)  Pt. 

Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  27  (1877-78),  287;  from  Polyt.  Notizbl. 

1877:  32.  A.  W.  Wright.  On  the  production  of  transparent  me- 
tallic films  by  the  electrical  discharge  in  exhausted  tubes. 
(Production  of  platinum  film  on  glass.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  13  (1877),  49;  Monit.  scient.  [3],  8 (1878),  1061;  Dingl.  pol. 
J.  225(1877),  402;  Naturforscher,  10(1877),  108;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878, 1114. 

1877:33.  F.  Bode.  Ueber  Concentration  von  Schwefelsaure.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  223  (1877),  299. 

1877:  34.  F.  Bode.  Notizen  aus  der  Schwefelsaurefabrication. 
(Use  of  platinum  vessels  for  concentration.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  225  (1877),  281. 

1877:  35.  M.  Prentice.  Verbesserte  Platingefasse.  (Patent.) 

Bef.  10  (1877),  1170.  Pt. 

1877 : 36.  W.  Kummel.  Pfiug’s  Platinfarbe.  Pt. 

Deutsche  Bauztg.  1877,  267;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  225  (1877),  215;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1877,  1232: 

1877:  37.  R.  C.  Bottger.  Platinschwarzgewinnung.  Pt. 

Jsb.  Phys.  Ver.  Frankfurt;  Pharm.  Centrhalle,  18  (1877),  218;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1877,  576;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  114. 

1877:  38.  F.  Hoppe-Seyler.  Vorlaufige  Mittheilungen.  1.  Pal- 
ladiumwasserstoff  als  Oxydationsmittel.  2.  Benzol  oxydirt 
zu  Phenol  durch  Palladiumwasserstoff.  3.  Oxyhamoglobin 
reducirt  zu  Methamoglobin  durch  Palladiumwasserstoff.  Pd. 

Ztsch.  physiol.  Chem.  1 (1877),  396;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  306;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1877,  315. 

1877 : 39.  D.  Tommasi.  Ricerche  fisico-chimiche  sui  differenti 
stati  allotropici  dell’  idrogeno.  (Hydrogen  on  palladium.) 

Pd. 

Rendio.  1st.  lombardo  [2],  10  (1877),  520;  Monit.  scient.  [3],  8 (1878), 
829;  Ber.  10  (1877),  2056;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  83;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878, 
193. 


164 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1877:  40.  J.  J.  Coquillion.  Sur  la  dissociation  des  carbures  au 
moyen  du  fil  de  palladium,  et  sur  le  rapprochement  de  ces 
faits  avec  les  actions  de  presence  ou  phenomenes  catalitiques. 

Pd. 

C.  R.  84  (1877),  1503;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  561;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877), 
43;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  7 (1877),  500;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1877),  830. 

1877:  41.  J.  J.  Coquillion.  Application  du  fil  de  palladium  au 
dosage  des  hydrocarbures  m&les  en  petite  proportion  dans 
Fair.  “ Pd. 

C.  R.  85  (1877),  1106;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  104;  Chem.  News,  37  (1878), 
10;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 (1879),  248;  J.  de  pharm.  27  (1878),  451. 

1877:  42.  F.  W.  Clarke.  Some  specific  gravity  determinations. 
(Potassium  chloro platini te  and  plati thiocyanate.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  14  (1877),  282. 

1877:  43.  G.  Govi.  Sur  la  transparence  du  fer  et  du  platine  incan- 
descent. Pt. 

C.  R.  85  (1877),  699;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  204;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  229 
(1878),  565. 

1877:  44.  G.  L.  Ciamician.  Ueber  die  Spectren  der  chemischen 
Elemente  und  ihrer  Verbindungen.  (Spectra  of  platinum 
and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  76,  ii  (1878),  499;  Anzeig.  Akad.  Wien,  14  (1877), 
181;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  174;  Repert.  Exper.  Phys.  13  (1877),  432. 

1877:  45.  J.  Violle.  Chaleur  specifique  et  chaleur  de  fusion  du 
platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  85  (1877),  543;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  30  (1878),  167;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1877,  674;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  151;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  227  (1878),  108; 
Gazz.  chim.  ital.  8 (1878),  217;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  106;  Phil. 
Mag.  [5],  4 (1877),  318;  Jsb.  Chem.  1877,  95;  J.  de  phys.  7 (1878),  69; 
J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  10,  ii  (1878),  39. 

1877:  46.  J.  Thomsen.  Thermo chemische  Untersuchungen  fiber 
Platin  und  Palladium.  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  15  (1877),  435;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  271; 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1877,  546;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  224;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

32  (1877),  566. 

1877:  48.  N.  Gesechus.  (Elasticity  of  platinum  and  palladium.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  8,  ii  (1876),  311,  356;  Chem.  News,  36  (1877),  39. 

1878:  1.  J.  Piiilipp.  Le  platine  et  les  metaux  qui  l’accompagnent 

Monit.  scient,  20  (1878),  59.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1878:  2.  The  metallurgy  of  platinum.  (Notes  from  the 

Paris  Exposition.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Chem.  News,  38  (1878),  43. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


165 


1878:  3.  G.  Matthey.  The  preparation  in  a state  of  purity  of  the 
group  of  metals  known  as  the  platinum  series,  and  notes  upon 
the  manufacture  of  iridio-platinum.  Pt,  Ir,  Pd,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  28  (1879),  463;  Iron,  13  (1879),  654,  678;  Chem. 
News,  39  (1879),  175;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  213;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  11,  ii  (1879),  305. 

1878:  4.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  H.  Debray.  Dis- 
sociation des  oxydes  de  la  famille  du  platine. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

C.  R.  87  (1878),  441;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  682;  Ber.  11  (1879),  364;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  32  (1879),  294;  Chem.  News,  38  (1878),  188;  J.  de 
pharm.  28  (1878),  441;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  6 (1878),  394;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  10,  ii  (1878),-  331;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 (1879),  154;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1878,  123. 

1878:  4a.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  S.  Stas.  De 
T analyse  du  platine  iridie  employe  par  la  section  fran^aise  de 
la  commission  internationale  du  metre  a la  conferences  des 
prototypes.  Pt,  Ir. 

Proc.  verb,  du  Com.  des  poids  et.mesures,  1878. 

1878 : 5.  R.  Godeffroy.  Eigenschaften  einiger  Caesium-  und  Rubi- 
dium verbindungen.  (Cesium  palladium  chloride.)  Pd. 

Arch,  pharm.  212  (1878),  47;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  162;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1878,  237. 

1878:  6.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Bidrag  til  Kobaltammoniakforbind- 
elsernes  Chemi.  (Chloro-  and  bromo-platinates.)  Pt. 

Oversigt  Dansk.  Vid.  Sels.  Copenhagen,  1878,  7;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  18 
(1878),  209. 

1878:  7.  F.  T.  Frerichs  and  E.  F.  Smith.  Ueber  das  Didym  und 
Lanthan.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  191  (1878),  331;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  386;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1878,  445. 

1878:  8.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  nagra  lantan-  och  didymforeningar. 
(Chloroplatinates;  criticism  of  Frerichs  and  Smith.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  35  (1878),  No.  5,  9;  Ber.  11  (1878), 
910;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  29  (1878),  492;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  250. 

1878:  9.  D.  Cochin.  Sur  quelques  combinaisons  du  platine.  (Phos- 
phoplatinum  ethers.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  86  (1878),  1402;  Bui,  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  498;  Chem.  News, 

38  (1878),  20;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  315;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  10,  ii  (1878), 
287. 

1878 : 10.  C.  Seubert.  Ueber  einige  Doppelsalze  des  zweiwerthigen 
Iridiums.  (Double  sulphites.)  Ir. 

Ber.  11  (1878),  1761;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  32  (1879),  403;  Chem.  News, 

39  (1879),  74;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  230  (1878),  370;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879), 
125;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  316;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  11,  ii  (1879),  237. 


1G6 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1878:  11.  C.  Seubert.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Iridiums 
(192.744,  H=l.)  Ir. 

Ber.  11  (1878),  1767;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  32  (1879), 404;  Amer.  J.Sci.  [3], 
17  (1879),  64;  Chem.  News,  39  (1879).  74;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879),  125; 
Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  21  (1881),  155;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  316;  J.  Amer. 
Chem.  Soc.  1 (1879),  320;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  3 (1879),  322. 

1878:  12.  E.  yon  Meyer.  Ueber  einige  neue  Platinverbindungen : 
die  Knallplatine.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  18  (1878),  305;  Ber.  12  (1879),  130;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  33  (1880),  172;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 (1879),  99;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  309. 

1878:  13.  L.  F.  Nilson  and  O.  Pettersson.  Ueber  Darstellung 
und  Valenz  des  Berylliums.  (Platonitrites  and  chlorplatinate.) 

Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  [2],  4 (1878),  554;  Nova  acta  Soc.  sci.  Upsala, 
10  (1879),  No.  9;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  244. 

1878:  14.  L.  F.  Nilson.  Om  jodhaltiga  derivat  af  platonitrit. 
(Platoiodonitrites.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  35  (1878),  No.  3,  51;  Nova  acta  Soc. 
sci.  Upsala  10  (1879),  No.  16;  Ber.  11  (1878),  879;  13  (1880),  775;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  359;  Chem.  News,  38  (1878),  49;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  34  (1878),  706;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  21  (1880),  172;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1878,  312;  1880,  363;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  261;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc. 
’ 11,  ii  (1879),  305. 

1878:  15.  S.  E.  Phillips.  A study  of  plat-ammonia  compounds. 
(Concluding  with  The  general  character  of  the  metal  ammo- 
nium, p.  232.)  Pt,  Rh,  Ir,  Ru,  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  37  (1878),  209,  231;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  309. 

1878:  16.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  H.  Debray.  Sur 
un  nouveau  compose  du  palladium.  (Palladamin  chloride.) 

Pd. 

C.  R.  86  (1878),  926;  J.  de  pharm.  27  (1878),  422;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2], 
31  (1879),  440;  Chem.  Ceitrbl.  1878,  387;  Chem.  News,  37  (1878),  216; 
Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 (1879),  144,  267;  J Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  650;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1878,  316;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  10,  ii  (1878),  237. 

1878:  17.  A.  Berlin.  Sur  les  crist aux  idiocy clophanes.  (Platino- 
cyanide  of  yttrium,  p.  408.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  15  (1878),  396. 

1878:  18.  F.  W.  Clarke.  On  some  seleniocyanates.  (Potassium 
platinoseleniocyanate.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  16  (1878),  199;  Ber.  11  (1878),  1325;  Chem.  News,  38 
(1878),  170. 

1878:  19.  H.  yon  Jcptner.  Neue  Methode  der  quantitativen  Un- 
tersuchung  von  Gold-  und  Silberlegirungen.  Pt. 

Auzeiger  Akad.  Wien,  15  (1878),  161;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  448; 
Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  18  (1879),  104. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


167 


1878:  20.  R.  C.  Bottger.  (Losungsmittel  fur  Ammoniumchloro- 
platinate.)  (Sodium  citrate.)  Pt. 

Tagebl.  51te  Yersamml.  deutsch.  Naturf.  u.  Aerzte,  1878,  46;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1878,  786. 

1878:  21.  R.  C.  Bottger.  (Verhalten  des  Phosphors  zu  Metall- 
losungen.)  (Platinum  and  palladium  solutions.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  33  (1878),  30;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  208. 

1878:  22.  M.  Berthelot.  Sur  la  decomposition  des  hydracides  par 
les  metaux.  (Action  of  hydrochloric  acid  on  platinum  and 
palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  Pv.  87  (1878),  619;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  16  (J879),  433;  J.  de  pharm. 
28  (1878),  521;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  302. 

1878:  23.  J.  Volhard.  Die  Anwendung  des  Schwefelcyanammo- 
niums  in  die  Maassanaiyse.  (Presence  of  palladium  in  estim;  - 
tion  of  silver  injurious.)  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  191  (1878),  1;  Monit.  scient.  20  (1878),  390;  Chem. 
News,  37  (1878),  77. 

1878:  24.  P.  de  Clermont  and  Frommel.  Sur  une  nouvelle 
methode  de  separation  de  Y arsenic  des  autres  metaux.  (Sepa- 
ration from  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

C.  R.  86  (1878),  828;  C.  R.  Assoc,  frang.  7 (1878),  459;  J.  de  pharm.  28 
(1878),  176;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  29  (1878),  290;  Diagl.  pol.  J.  229 
(1878),  302;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  1051;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  8 (1878),  480. 

1878:  25.  G.  Broesike.  Ueberosmiumsaure  als  Mikroskopisch- 
farbemittel.  Os. 

Med.  Centrbl.  16  (1878),  833;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1879,  7;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  18  (1879),  460. 

1878:  26.  Pelletan.  A method  of  preserving  the  rotation  infu- 
soria, etc.,  with  their  organs  extended  (with  osmic  acid.)  Os. 

J.  Roy.  Micros.  Soc.  1 (1878),  189. 

1878:  27.  T.  L.  Brunton  and  J.  Fayrer.  Note  on  the  effect  of 
various  substances  in  destroying  the  activity  of  cobra  poison. 
(Action  of  platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  27  (1878),  465;  Jsb.  Chem.  L878,  1014. 

1878:  28.  A.  Pedler.  On  cobra  poison.  (Antidotal  action  of 
platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  27  (1878),  L7. 

1878:  29.  F.  Kopfer.  Das  Platin  als  Sauers  toff  iibertrager  bei  der 
Elcmentaranalyse  der  Kohlenstoffverbindungen.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  17  (1878),  1;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  32  (1879),  108;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1878,  1070. 


168 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1878:  30.  F.  W.  Clarke.  Some  specific  gravity  determinations. 
(Potassium  chlorplatinite.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  16  (1878),  206;  Ber.  11  (1878),  1504;  Chem.  News,  38 
(1878),  214;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879),  295,  1005;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  26. 

1878:  31.  W.  Hittorf.  Rechtfertigung  des  Satzes:  “ Electrolyte 
sind  Salze”  als  Erwiderung  auf  Dr.  L.  Bleekrode’s  Kritik 
[1876:  60].  (Verhalten  des  Natriumplatinchlorids,  p.  390; 
Ueberosmiumsaure,  p.  404.)  Os,  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  4 (1878),  374;  Jsb.  1878,  149. 

1878:  32.  F.  Morges.  (Electrolysis  of  platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  8 (1878),  479. 

1878:  33.  F.  A.  Gooch.  On  a new  method  for  the  separation  and 
subsequent  treatment  of  precipitate  in  chemical  analysis. 
(Gooch  crucible.)  Pt. 

Troc.  Amer.  Acad.  Sci.  13  (1878),  342;  Chem.  News,  37  (1878),  181; 
Amer.  Chem.  J.  1 (1879),  317;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  1039. 

1878:  34.  T.  Gar  side.  Mending  platinum  crucibles.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  38  (1878),  65;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  666;  Chem.  Ztg.  2 (1878), 
371;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  230  (1878),  451;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  1020. 

1878:  35.  Platinapparate  mit  gewelltem  Boden.  Pt. 

Chem.  Indnst.  1 (1878),  194;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  230  (1878),  511. 

1878:36.  F.  W.  Kalbfleisch.  Combinirte  Blei  und  Platinapparat 
zur  Concentration  von  Schwefelsaure.  (German  patent 

1005,  Oct.  9,  1877.)  Pt. 

Ber.  11  (1878),  999. 

1878:  39.  F.  Bode.  Ueber  Kalbfleisch’s  neuen  Platinapparat.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  228  (1878),  249. 

1878:  40.  A.  Sciieurer-Kestner.  Sur  la  dissolution  du  platine 
dans  l’acide  sulfurique,  pendant  F operation  industrielle  de  la 
concentration.  Pt. 

C.  It.  86  (1878),  1082;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  30  (1878),  28;  J.  de  pharm.  28 
(1878),  170;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  442;  Chem.  News,  37  (1878),  237;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  34  (1878),  650;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  309;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc. 
10,  ii  (1878),  239. 

1878:  41.  J.  B.  Boussingault.  Sur  la  production,  la  constitution 
et  les  proprietes  des  aciers  chromes.  (Platinum  steel,  p. 
98.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  15  (1878),  91. 

1878.  42.  M.  Bertiielot.  Sur  les  affinites  relatives  et  deplace- 
ments reciproques  de  Foxygene  et  des  elements  halogenes, 
combines  avec  les  corps  metalliques.  (Combinations  of 
platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  86  (1878),  628;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  15  (1878),  185;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1878,  251;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  103,  112. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


169 


1878:  43.  J.  Thomsen.  Thermochemische  Untersuchungcn.  Ucber 

die  Ccnstitution  der  wasserhaltigen  Salze.  (Chlorplatinates, 

pp.  38  et  seq.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  18  (1878),  1;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  793,  809;  Jsb. 

Chem.  1878,  88,  90. 

1878:  44.  J.  Violle.  Chaleur  specifique  et  chaleur  de  fusion  du 

palladium.  Pd. 

C.  R.  87  (1878),  981;  Bul.-Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  293;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1879,  98;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  72;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  11,  ii  (1879),  192. 

1878:  45.  R.  Sabine.  Motions  produced  by  dilute  acids  on  some 

amalgam  surfaces.  (Platinum  amalgam.)  Pt. 

Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1878,  435;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  6 (1878),  211;  Ann.  der  Phys. 

Beibl.  2 (1878),  618;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  154. 

1878:  46.  J.  Coquillion.  Action  de  la  vapeur  d’eau  sur  les  hydro- 
carbures  porte  a la  temperature  rouge.  (In  presence  of  plati- 
num and  palladium  wire.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  86  (1878),  1197;  87  (1878),  795;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  177; 

Chem.  News,  38  (1878),  287;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  367;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 

1879),  273. 

1878:  47.  A.  Crova.  Sur  la  mesure  spectrometrique  des  hautes 
temperatures.  (By  platinum  foil.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  87  (1878),  979;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  68. 

1878:  49.  J.  N.  Lockyer.  Researches  in  spectrum  analysis  in  con- 
nection with  the  spectrum  of  the  sun.  (Palladium  found  in 
the  sun.)  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  27  (1878),  279;  C.  R.  86  (1878),  317;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1878,  185. 

1878:  50.  D.  Tommasi.  SulF  azione  della  cosi  della  forza  catalitica 
spiegata  secondo  la  teoria  termodinamica.  (Action  of  plati- 
num sponge  on  gaseous  mixtures.)  Pt. 

Rendic.  1st.  lombardo  [2],  11  (1878),  128;  Monit.  scient.  21  (1879),  866; 

Ber.  11  (1878),  811;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878,  433;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  9. 

1878:  51.  D.  Tommasi.  Riduzione  del  cloruro  di  argento  e del 

cloruro  ferrico.  (By  platinum.)  Pt. 

Rendic.  1st.  lombardo  [2],  11  (1878),  281;  J.  de  pharm.  29  (1879),  291. 

1878:  52.  F.  Hoppe-Seyler.  Ueber  Gahrungsprozesse.  (Action 

of  palladium-hydrogen  in  decay,  p.  21.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ztsch.  physiol.  Chem.  2 (1878),  1;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  1025. 

1878:  53.  J.  H.  Gladstone  and  A.  Tribe.  Analogies  between  the 
action  of  the  copper-zinc  couple  and  of  occluded  and  nascent 
hydrogen.  (Reducing  action  of  palladium-hydrogen.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  33  (1878),  306;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  191. 


170 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1878: 

1878: 

1878: 

1878: 

1878: 

1878: 

1878: 

1878: 

1879: 

1879: 


54.  N.  Beketoff.  (Ermittelung  der  Warmecapacitat  des 

Wassers toffs  in  seiner  Legirung  mit  Palladium.)  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  11,  i (1878),  4;  Ber.  12  (1879),  686;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  31  (1879),  197;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1879,  242;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  91;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879),  590. 

55.  H.  F.  Morley.  On  Grove’s  gas  battery.  (Use  of  plati- 
num plates.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  5 (1878),  272;  Proc.  Phys.  Soc.  London,  2 (1879),  212. 
Ann.  der  Phys.  Beibl.  2 (1878),  266;  Chem.  News,  37  (1878),  78;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1878,  140. 

56.  G.  Gore.  On  the  thermo-electric  properties  of  liquids. 

(With  platinum  and  palladium  plates.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  27  (1878),  513;  Ann.  der  Phys.  Beibl.  2 (1878), 
617;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  135. 

57.  W.  Beetz.  Ueber  die  Electricitatserregung  beim  Con- 

tact fester  und  gasformiger  Korper.  (Contact  of  gases  with 
platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Munchen,  8 (1878),  140;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  5 
(1878),  1;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  7 (1879),  1;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  138. 

58.  F.  Exner.  Ueber  die  galvanische  Polarisation  des  Pla- 

tins  in  Wasser.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  77,  ii  (1878),  231;  Anzeig.  Akad.  Wien,  15  (1878), 
46;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  7 (1878),  388;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1878, 
337;  Jsb.  Chem.  1878,  140;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  5 (1878),  400;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
36  (1879),  578. 

59.  H.  Herwig.  Ueber  die  zur  vollen  Ladung  einen  con- 
densatorischen  Platinwasserzelle  erforderlich  Electricitats- 
menge  und  uber  die  Distanz  der  Molecule  im  flussigen  Wasser. 

Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  4 (1878),  465;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879),  194. 

60.  F.  Rossetti.  Indagini  sperimentali  sulla  temperatura 

del  sole.  (Pouvoir  emissif  du  platine,  Ann.  chim.  phys. 
17:  199,  202.)  Pt. 

Mem.  Accad.  Lincei,  Roma,  2 (1878),  169;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  17 
(1879),  177;  Nuovo  Cimento,  3 (1878),  238;  Spectrosc.  ital.  mem.  7 
(1878),  22;  Meteor.  Ztsch.  13  (1878),  420. 

61.  C.  Winkler.  Platinizing  porous  substances.  (German 
patent  4566,  Sept.  21,  1878.) 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1879),  300. 

1.  O.  Luthy.  Platinlager  in  den  Vereinigten  Staaten.  (In 

California.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  3 (1879),  559;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  213. 

2.  P.  J.  Jeremejew.  (Platin  sand.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Verh.  K.  min.  Gesell.  zu  St.  Petersburg,  14  (1879),  155;  Ztsch.  Kryst. 

3 (1879),  436;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  1180. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


171 


1879:  3.  A.  Guyard  (H.  Tamm).  De  rouralium—  un  nouveau 
metal  de  la  famille  du  platine.  Ur. 

Monit.  scient.  [3],  9 (1879),  795;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  309;  Chem.  News,  40 
(1879),.  57;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  79  (1880),  63;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  32 
(1879),  3. 

1 879 : 4.  G.  Matthey.  The  preparation  in  a state  of  purity  of  the 
group  of  metals  known  as  the  platinum  series,  and  notes  upon 
the  manufacture  of  iridio-platinum.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 
Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  28  (1879),  463;  Chem.  News,  39  (1879),  175;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879),  772;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  1100. 

1879:  5.  E.  J.  Jungfleisch.  Procede  de  preparation  dhridium.  Ir. 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  50. 

1879:  6.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  H.  Debray.  Sur  la 
laurite  et  de  platine  ferrifere  artificiels.  Pt,  Ru. 

C.  R.  89  (1879),  587;  Ber.  12  (1879),  2269;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1879,  729; 
Chem.  News,  40  (1879),  203;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  236  (1880),  86;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
38  (1880),  222;  Jahrb.  Min.  1880,  Ref.  178;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  1184; 
Ztsch.  Kryst.  4 (1881),  420. 

1879:7.  L.  Pitkin.  On  the  formation  of  compound  platinates  and 
a new  platino-potassium  salt.  (Chlorobromoplatinate.)  Pt. 
School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  1 (1880),  64;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1879), 
472;  Chem.  News,  41  (1880),  118;  Ber.  13  (1880),  568;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1880,  277;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  706;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  362. 

1879:8.  E.  Drechsel.  Ueber  Harnstoffpailadiumchlorur.  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  20  (1879),  469;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  34  (1880),  96; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  23;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  161;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1879,  342. 

1879:  9.  W.  Heintz.  Platinchloridverbindung  des  salzsauren  Plarn- 
stoffs.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  198  (1879),  91. 

1879 : 10.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitriige  zur  Chemie  der  Chromammo- 
niakverbindungen.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  20  (1879),  105;  from  Festschrift  beim  400  Jahresfeste 
der  Universitat  Kopenhagen,  Juni  1879;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880), 

199. 

1879:  11.  K.  Birnbaum.  Ueber  ein  neues  Salz  einer  Iridiumbase. 
(Sulfit  des  Iridammoniums.)  Ir. 

Ber.  12  (1879),  1544;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  34  (1880),  158;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1879,  659;  Chem.  News,  40  (1879),  300;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  13; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  308. 

1879:  12.  P.  Groth  and  L.  F.  Nilson.  Ueber  Platojodoni trite: 
krystallographische  und  chemische  Untersuchung.  Pt. 

Nova  acta  Soc.  sci.  Upsala  [3],  10  (1879),  No.  16. 


172  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1879:  13.  L.  L.  de  Koxinck.  Ueber  die  Angreifbarkeit  des  Platins 
durch  schmelzende  kohlensaure  Alkalien.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  18  (1879),  569;  Ber.  12  (1879),  2257;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1879,  819;  Chem.  News,  41  (1880),  25;  Chem.  Ztg.  3 (1879),  770;  Dingl. 
pol.  J.  235  (1880),  88;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  581;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879, 
1042;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  12,  ii  (1880),  97;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner), 
29  (1879-80),  5;  30  (1880-81),  218. 

1879:  14.  T.  A.  Edison.  Action  of  aqua  regia  on  platinum.  Pt. 

Scient.  Amer.  41  (1879),  216;  Chem.  Ztg.  3 (1879),  650. 

1879:  15.  E.  Drecksel.  Elektrolytische  Versuche.  (Platinelek- 
troden  auf  Ammoniumsalze . ) Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  20  (1879),  378;  Ber.  12  (1879),  2181;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1879,  753;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  300. 

1879:  16.  A.  Volta.  L’ozono  sopra  alcuni  metalli  nobili.  (Plat- 
inum, p.  526;  palladium,  527.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  9 (1879),  521;  Ber.  13  (1880),  203;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38 
(1880),  205;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  192. 

.1879:  17.  B.  Reinitzer.  (Verunreinigungen  des  Platinchlorids.) 

Ber.  Oster.  chem.  Gesell.  1879,  16;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  234  (1879),  432.  Pt. 

1879:  18.  F.  Seelheim.  Ueber  die  Fluchtigkeit  des  Platins  in 
Chlorgas.  Pt. 

Ber.  12  (1879),  2066;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1879),  479;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  34  (1880),  351;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1879,  818;  Chem.  News,  40  (1879), 
241;  41  (1880),  81;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  94;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  19 
(1880),  65;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  51,  306;  Chem.  Ztg.  3 (1879),  702. 

1879:  19.  V.  Meyer.  Antwort  auf  Herrn  F.  Seelheim’s  Kritik 
meiner  Versuche  liber  das  Chlor.  Pt. 

Ber.  12  (1879),  2202;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1879),  4S1;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1880,  5;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  51;  Chem.  Ztg.  3 (1879),  769. 

1879:  20.  "W.  Smith.  Behaviour  of  chlorine  at  a high  temperature, 

or  results  of  Victor  Meyer’s  recent  research.  (Platinum 
chlorides  as  a source  of  pure  chlorine  for  vapor  density  deter- 
mination.) Pt. 

Chem.  News,  40  (1879),  49,  69,  155,  225;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  51. 

1879:21.  F.  P.  Dunnington.  Dissociation  of  chlorine.  (Platinum 
chlorides  as  a source  of  chlorine.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  40  (1879),  141,  213. 

1879:  22.  H.  Precht.  Die  Bestimmung  des  Kaliums  als  Kalium- 
platinchloiid.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  18  (1879),  509;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  235  (1880),  133;  Ber. 
12  (1879),  2255;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  3S  (1880),  577;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  1043; 
1880,  1173. 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


1879: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  173 

23.  W.  F.  Gintl.  (Presence  of  auric  chloride  in  plati- 
num chloride.)  Pt. 

Ber.  Oestr.  Gesel.  Ford.  Chem.  Ind.  1,  17;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  449; 
Chem.  News,  43  (1881),  25;  44  (1881),  47;  Chem.  Ztg.  3 (1879),  653. 

24.  N.  W.  Perry.  Improved  method  for  making  platinum- 

alloy  assays.  Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Chem.  News,  39  (1879),  89;  Eng.  and  Mining  J.  (N.  Y.),  27  (1879),  29; 
Berg-  und  Hutten.  Ztg.  38  (1879),  372;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  217; 
Ztsch.' anal.  Chem.  19  (1880),  83;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879),  555;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1880,  1196;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  28  (1878-79),  35. 

25.  W.  Hempel.  Ueber  die  Grenze  der  Nachweisbarkeit  des 
Kohlenoxydgases.  (Mittelst  Natriumpalladiumchlorur.)  Pd. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  18  (1879),  399. 

26.  W.  Hempel.  Ueber  die  gasanalytische  Bestimmung  des 
Wasserstoff  durch  Absorption.  (Mittelst  Palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  12  (1879),  636;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  1025. 

27.  W.  PIempel.  Die  fractionirte  Verbrennung  von  Wasser- 
stoff und  Sauerstoff.  (Mittelst  Palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  12  (1879),  1006;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  27,  1025. 

28.  P.  de  Clermont.  De  Taction  des  sels  ammoniacaux  sur 
quelques  sulfures  metalliques  et  de  T application  des  faits 
observes  a Tanalyse.  (No  action  on  platinum  sulphides.)  Pt. 

C.  It.  88  (1879),  972;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  31  (1879),  483;  Ber.  12  (1879), 
2092;  C.  R.  Assoc,  fran?.  8 (1879),  446. 

29.  P.  de  Clermont  and  Frommel.  De  Taction  de  Teau  sur 

les  sulfures  metalliques.  (Platinum,  p.  203.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  18  (1879),  189;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  181. 

30.  H.  Topsoe.  Krystallografiske  Undersogelser  over  en 

Raekke  Dobbelt-Platonitrite.  Pt. 

Oversigt  Danske  Sels.  Forh.  Kjobenhavn,  1879,  1;  Ber.  12  (1879),  1730; 
Ztsch.  Kryst.  4 (1880),  469;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  307;  1880,  363. 

31.  E.  Lommel.  Ueber  die  dichroitische  Fluorescenz  des 

Magnesiumplatincyanurs.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  8 (1879),  634;  Sitzber.  Phys.  Med.  Soc. 
Erlangen,  12  (1880),  27;  Repert.  Exp.  Phys.  16  (1880),  714. 

32.  T.  J.  Parker.  On  some  applications  of  osmic  acid  to 

microscopic  purposes.  . Os. 

J.  Roy.  Micros.  Soc.  2 (1879),  381;  J.  of  Sci.  (Crooke’s?)  [3],  1 (1879),  704. 

33.  R.  Altmann.  Ueber  die  Verwerthbarkeit  der  Corrosion 

in  der  mikroskopischen  Anatomie.  (Use  of  osmic  acid.)  Os. 

Archiv  f.  mikros.  Anat.  16  (1879),  471;  J.  Roy.  Micros.  Soc.  2 (1879), 
610;  J.  of  Sci.  [3],  1 (1879),  704. 


174 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1879:  34.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  E.  Mascart.  Sur  la 
construction  de  la  regie  geodesique  internationale.  (Analysis 
and  properties  of  the  standard.)  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ann.  Ecole  normale,  Paris,  8 (1879),  9;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  16  (1879), 
506;  C.  R.  88  (1879),  210;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  232  (1879),  547. 

1879:  34a.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  S.  Stas.  Des 
types  en  platine,  en  iridium  et  en  platine  iridic  h diff brents 
litres.  Pt,  Ir. 

Proc.  verb.  Com.  despoids  et  mesures,  1879. 

1879 : 35.  Van  Allen.  (Letter  describing  John  Holland’s  process  of 
drilling  holes  in  osrniridium.)  Ir,  Os. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  78  (1879),  72. 

1879 : 36.  D.  Clerk  and  C.  A.  Fawsitt.  Coating  iron  and  steel  with 
platinum.  (English  patent  1182,  Mar.  25,  1879.)  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  2 (1880),  141;  Ber.  13  (1880),  585. 

1879:  37.  J.  B.  A.  Dode.  Coating  metals  with  platinum.  (U.  S. 
patent  219807.)  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  1 (1879),  407. 

1879:  38.  A.  P.  G.  Daumesnil.  Metalle  mit  schutzenden  Ueberzug 
zuversehen.  (German  patent,  Kiasse  48,  No.  10059,  Oct.  18, 
1879.)  (Plating  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  237  (1880),  302;  Chem.  Indust.  3 (1880),  279;  Chem.  Ztg.  4 
(1880).  522;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  1249. 

1879:  39.  L.  M.  Stoffel.  (Plating  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Monit.  scient.  [3],  9 (1879),  1099. 

1879:  40.  G.  Janecek.  (No  platinum  in  so-called  platina  amalgams 

in  dentistry.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Indust.  2 (1879),  249;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  216;  Chem.  tech 
Mitth.  (Eisner),  28  (1878-79),  193. 

1879:  41.  Koninck.  (Platineisen  Bilder  in  Photographie.)  Pt. 

Phot.  Mitth.  16  (1879),  73;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1879,  537. 

1879:  42.  Platindruckverfahren.  Pt. 

Photog.  Archiv,  No.  385;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  ( Eisner),  28  (1878-79),  235. 

1879:  43.  J.  Violle.  Chaleurs  specifiques  et  points  de  fusion  de 
divers  metaux  refractaires.  (Melting  point  of  palladium, 
platinum,  and  iridium  and  specific  heat-  of  iridium.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  89  (1879),  702;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  35  (1881),  434;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  235. 
(1880),  468;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  8 (1879),  501;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  19  (1880), 
203;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  92;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  12,  ii  (1880),  142. 

1879:  44.  J.  Violle.  Sur  la  radiation  du  platine  incandescent.  Pt. 

C.  R.  88  (1879),  171;  Chem,  News,  39  (1879),  83;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879), 
573. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


175 


1879:  45.  T.  A.  Edison.  On  the  phenomena  of  heating  metals  in 
vacuo  by  means  of  an  electric  current.  (Platinum  shows  green 
flame  and  loss  of  weight.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  1879,  173;  Chem.  News,  40  (1879),  152;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1879,  1090. 

1879:  46.  G.  D.  Liveing  and  J.  Dewar.  On  the  reversal  of  the 
lines  of  metallic  vapours.  (Platinum  and  palladium  give  no 
reversals,  p.  406.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  29  (1879),  402. 

1879:  47.  A.  Gouy.  Recherch.es  photometriques  sur  les  flammes 
colorees.  (Spectra  of  flames  charged  with  vapors  of  osmium, 
platinum,  palladium,  and  iridium,  p.  100.)  Os,  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  18  (1879),  1. 

1879:  48.  E.  L.  Nichols.  On  the  character  and  intensity  of  the 
rays  emitted  by  glowing  platinum.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  18  (1879),  446;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  157. 

1879:  49.  J.  H.  Gladstone  and  A.  Tribe.  Investigations  into  the 
action  of  substances  in  the  nascent  and  occluded  conditions. 
(Preparation  of  pure  platinum,  p.  176;  occluded  hydrogen  on 
palladium,  177;  platinum,  178.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (1879),  172;  Ber.  12  (1879),  389. 

1879:  50.  F.  Hoppe-Seyler.  Erregung  des  Sauerstoffs  durch 
nascirenden  Wasserstoff.  (Reducirende  Wirkung  des  Palla- 
diumwassers  toffs.)  Pd. 

Ber.  12  (1879),  1551;  Jsb.  Chem.  1879,  189. 

1879:  51.  K.  R.  Koch.  Ueber  die  Veranderung,  welche  die 
Oberflache  des  Platins  und  des  Palladiums  durch  die  Sauer- 
stoffpolarisation  erfahrt.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  8 (1879),  92;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1879),  1005. 

1879:  52.  G.  Gore.  Chemico-electric  relations  of  metals  in  solu- 
tions of  salts  of  potassium.  (Full  investigation.)  Pt,  Rh,  Ir,  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  30  (1879),  38;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  155. 

1879:  53.  R.  C.  Bottger.  (Ladungsphanomena  des  Palladiums 
und  des  Platins  mit  Sauers  toff  und  Wasserstoff.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  34  (1879),  39;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1879,  241. 

1879:  54.  J.  H.  Gladstone  and  A.  Tribe.  On  dry  copper-zinc 
couples  and  analogous  agents.  (Zinc-platinum  and  zinc- 
palladium,  p.  575;  magnesium-platinum,  576.)  Pd,  Pt.. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (i879),  567. 


176  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1879:  55.  L.  Schwendler.  On  a new  standard  of  light.  (Glowing 
platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Asiatic  Soc.  Bengal,  48,  ii  (1879),  83;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  235  (1880),  271; 
Phil.  Mag.  8 (1879),  392;  Nature,  21  (1880),  158;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880, 
1361;  Chem.  Ztg.  4 (1880),  190;  Scient.  Amer.  41  (1879),  216;  Chem. 
Ztg.  3 (L879),  650. 

1880:  1.  A.  Koppen.  (Discovery  [and  history?]  of  platinum  in 
Russia.)  Pt. 

Russische  Revue,  9 (1880),  460;  referred  to  Dingl.  pol.  J.  255  (1885),  489. 

1880:  2.  J.  S.  Newberry.  The  origin  and  classification  of  ore 
deposits.  (Platinum  deposits,  p.  38.) 

School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  1 (1880),  87. 

1880:  2a.  G.  F.  Becker.  Atomic  weight  determinations:  a digest 
of  the  investigations  published  since  1814.  1880.  Smith- 

sonian Miscellaneous  Collections,  xxvii;  Constants  of  nature, 
Part  4.  (Platinum,  p.  98;  palladium,  p.  95;  iridium,  p.  64; 
rhodium,  p.  101;  osmium,  p.  94;  ruthenium,  p.  103.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1880 : 2b..  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  S.  Stas.  De  la  regie 
type  en  forme  d’X  et  en  platine  iridie  pur  a 10  % d'iridium. 

Proc.  verb.  Com.  des  poids  et  mesures,  1880.  Pt,  Ir. 

1880:  3.  T.  Wilm.  (Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Platinmetalle.) 
(Preparation  of  platinum  metals,  especially  palladium.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  12,  i (1880),  81,  327;-  Ber.  13  (1880),  1198;  Bui. 
Chem.  Soc.  [2],  34  (1880),  679;  35  (1881),  66;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880, 
546;  1881,  37;  Chem.  News,  43  (1881),  292;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  237  (1880), 
332;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  854;  40  (1881),  226;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880, 
365,  1196;  Monit.  scient.  23  (1881),  799;  Chem.  Ztg.  4 (1880),  473. 

1880:  4.  G.  Praetorius-Seidler.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  Cyanamids. 
(Platindoppelsalze  des  Sulfoharnstoffs,  p.  142.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  21  (1880),  129. 

1889:5.  V.  Meyer  and  J.  Zublin.  Ueber  Platinbromid.  Pt. 

Ber.  13  (1880),  404;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  261;  Chem.  News,  42  (1880), 
120;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  445;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  362. 

1880:  6.  R.  Engel.  Sur  un  hypophosphite  platineux.  (Action  of 
phosphin  on  platinum  tetrachloride.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  91  (1880),  1068;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  35  (1881),  100;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1881,  68;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  361;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  13,  ii  (1881), 
247;  Chem.  Ztg.  5 (1S81),  61:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  226;  Chem. 
News,  43  (1881),  234. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  177 

1880:  7.  F.  Isambert.  Sur  les  combinaisons  du  gaz  ammoniac 
avec  le  chlorure  et  Fiodure  du  palladium.  Pd. 

C.  R.  91  (1880),  708;  Ber.  13  (1880),  2409;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  800; 
Chem.  News,  42  (1880),  294;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  366;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  13,  ii  (1881),  278. 

1880:  8.  O.  T.  Christensen.  Bidrag  til  Chromammoniakfor- 
bindelserncs  Kemi.  (Chloroplatinates  of  chromium  bases.) 

Pt, 

Oversigt  Dansk.  Yid.  Sels.  Kjobenhavn,  1880,  1;  1881,  85;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  [2],  23  (1881),  26,  54;  24  (1881),  74;  Bid.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  36 
(1881),  313,  316;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  237. 

1880:  9.  G.  N.  Wyrouboff.  Remarques  sur  le  sulfocyanate  de 
platine  de  M.  V.  Marcano.  (Of.  1868:  5.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  402;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  449;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  38  (1880),  618. 

1880:  10.  V.  Marcano.  Sulfocyanate  de  platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  250,  402;  Ber.  13  (1880),  925;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  1880,  277;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  2 (1880),  363,  430;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1880,  403. 

1880:  11.  R.  Scholtz.  Ueber  einige  Platincyandoppelvcrbind- 
ungen.  (With  measurements  of  crystals.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  82,  ii  (1880),  1233;  Ber.  11  (1881),  514;  Monatsh.  f. 
Chem.  1 (1880),  900;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  320;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881), 
707;  Chem.  Ztg.  5 (1881),  60. 

1880:  12.  A.  Richard  and  A.  Bertrand.  Sur  le  platinocyanure 
double  de  magnesium  et  de  potassium.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  34  (1880),  630;  Ber.  14  (1881),  108;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1881,  38;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  364. 

1880:  13.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  erbinjorden.  (Erbium  chloroplati- 
nate.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  37  (1880),  No.  7,  3;  C.  R.  91  (1880), 
381;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  305. 

1880:  14.  W.  Spring.  Recherches  sur  la  propriety  que  possedent 
les  corps  de  se  souder  sous  Faction  de  la  pression.  (Platinum, 
Ann.  chim.  phys.,  p.  187.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  Bruxelles,  49  (1880),  323;  Rev.  univ.  des  mines  [2],  8 (1880), 
470;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  22  (1881),  170. 

1880:  15.  A.  Ditte.  Action  de  Facide  chlorhydrique  sur  les 
chlorures  metalliques.  (On  platinum  tetrachloride.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  91  (1880),  986;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  22  (1881),  551;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1881,  36;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  154. 

1880:  16.  V.  Meyer.  Einige  Yersuche  iiber  die  Dampfdichten  der 
Alkalimetalle.  (Action  of  potassium  and  sodium  on  plati- 
num.) Pt. 

Ber.  13  (1880),  391. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  094 12 


178 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1880:  17.  J.  M.  Eder.  Ueber  die  hervorragenden  reducirenden 
Eigenschaften  des  Kaliumferrooxalates  und  einige  durch  das- 
selbe  hervorgerufene  Reactionen.  (Reduction  of  chloride  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  81,  ii  (1880),  196;  Ber.  13  (1880),  500;  Chem.  In- 
dust. 3 (1880),  142;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  770;  Monatsh.  f.  Chem.  1 (1880), 
137;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  21  (1882),  107. 

1880:  18.  T.  L.  Phipson.  On  the  reduction  of  auric  chloride  by 
hydrogen  in  presence  of  platinum.  (Hydrogen  condensed  on 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  41  (1880),  13;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  361. 

1880:  19.  D.  Tommasi.  On  the  reduction  of  chloride  of  gold  by 
hydrogen  in  the  presence  of  platinum.  (Hydrogen  condensed 
on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  41  (1880),  116;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  361. 

1880:20.  H.  Goldschmidt.  Die  Yalenz  des  Phosphors.  (Note  on 
action  of  platinum  on  phosphorus  penta chloride.)  Pt. 

Jsb.  Lese-  u.  Redehalle  d.  deutsch.  Stud.  Prag,  1889-81;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1881,  489;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  188. 

1880:  21.  A.  Certes.  Sur  1’ analyse  micrographique  des  eaux. 
(Osmium  tetroxide  in  water  analysis.)  Os. 

C.  R.  90  (1880),  1435;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  1144. 

1880:  22.  C.  Vincent.  Note  sur  les  reactions  produites  par  la 
dimethylamine  aqueuse  sur  les  dissolutions  metalliques.  (On 
platinum  and  palladium  solutions.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  156;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  278;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  19  (1880),  480. 

1880:23.  T.  T.  Morrell.  Estimation  of  small  quantities  of  potash 
with  platinic  chloride.  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  2 (1880),  145;  Ber.  13  (1880),  1886;  Chem.  Ztg.  4 
(1880),  509;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  1173;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  241  (1881),  140. 

1880:  24.  J.  von  Fodor.  (Palladium  chloride  as  reagent  for  carbon 
monoxide.)  Pd. 

Deutsch.  Vierteljsch.  off.  Gesundhpflege.  12  (1880),  377;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  22  (1883),  81;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  1555. 

1880 : 25.  H.  von  Juptxer.  Die  Trennung  des  Goldes  mittelst  Cad- 
mium. (From  the  platinum  metals.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Oester.  Ztsch.  Bergwesens,  28  (1880),  182;  Chem.  Ztg.  4 (1880),  276;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1880,  1196. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


179 


1880:  26.  C.  Luckow.  Ueber  die  Anwendung  das  elektrischen 
Stromes  in  der  analytischen  Cliemie.  (Electrolytic  determina- 
tion of  platinum,  p.  13.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  19  (1880),  1;  Chem.  News,  41  (1880),  213;  Dingl.  pol. 
J.  239  (1881),  307;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  1140. 

1880:27.  L.  Schucht.  Zur  Elektrolyse.  (Electrolytic  determina- 
tion of  palladium.)  Pd. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  39  (1880),  121;  Chem.  News,  41  (1880),  280; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  374;  Chem.  Ztg.  4 (1880),  293;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880, 
174,  1143. 

1880:  28.  J.  H.  Debray.  Action  des  acides  sur  les  alliages  du  rho- 
dium avec  le  plomb  et  le  zinc.  (Also  lead  alloys  with  the  other 
platinum  metals.)  Rh,  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

C.  R.  90  (1880),  1195;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  433;  Chem.  News,  41  (1880), 
295;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  706;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  368;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  12,  it  (1880),  377. 

1880:  29.  A.  D.  van  Riemsdi.tk.  Le  phenomene  de  Peelair  dans  les 
essais  d’or  et  Tinfluence  exercee  sur  ce  phenomene  par  les 
metaux  du  groupe  du  platine.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

Archiv.  neerland.  15  (1880),  185,  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  20  (1880),  66; 
Chem.  News,  41  (1880),  126,  266;  Ber.  13  (1880),  936;  Berg-  und  Hilt- 
ten.  Ztg.  39  (1880),  247,  275. 

1880:  30.  E.  Wiedemann.  Ueber  das  durch  electrische  Entlad- 
ungen  erzeugte  Phosphorescenzlicht.  (Electrischer  Dichrois- 
mus  des  Platincyanbariums.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  9 (1880),  157;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  186. 

1880:  31.  E.  Lommel.  Ueber  die  Erscheinungen,  welche  eine  senk- 
recht  zur  optischen  Axe  geschnittene  Platte  von  Magnesium- 
platincyantir  im  polarisirten  Licht  zeigt.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Phys.  med.  Soc.  Erlangen,  12  (1880),  33;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.) 
[2],  9 (1880),  108;  Repert.  Exp.  Phys.  17  (1881),  254. 

1880:  32.  E.  Lommel.  Ueber  Fluorescenz.  (Platinum  cyanides). 

Pt, 

Sitzber.  Phys.  med.  Soc.  Erlangen,  12  (1880),  53;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
10  (1880),  449,  631;  Repert.  Exp.  Phys.  16  (1880),  733. 

1880:  33.  P.  Groth  (L.  Calderon,  J.  H.  van’t  Hoff,  A.  Howe,  A. 
Fock).  (Crystallography  of  the  platinum  iodonitrites.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Kryst.  4 (1880),  492;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  363. 

1880:  34.  F.  Beilstein.  (Loss  of  weight  of  platinum  crucibles  by 
heating.)  Pt. 

Pharm.  Ztsch.  Russ.  19  (1880),  630;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  12,  i (1880),  298; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  614;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  1145;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 
20  (1881),  407. 


180 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1880:  35.  A.  Scheurer-Kestxer.  Sur  la  dissolution  du  platine 
dans  l’acide  sulfurique;  (During  concentration.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  91  (1880),  59;  Ber.  13  (1880),  1975;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  564; 

Chem.  News,  42  (1880),  61;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  706;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1880,  361;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  13,  ii  (1881),  46. 

1880:  36.  F.  Kuhlmann  (fils).  Explosion  d’un  alambic  de  platine 
servant  h la  concentration  de  l’acide  sulfurique.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  33  (1880),  50,  97;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  237  (1880),  253;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  38  (1880),  517;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  1249;  J.  Amer.  Chem. 

Soc.  2 (1880),  130;  Analyst,  5 (1880),  10;  Chem.  Ztg.  4 (1880),  8. 

1880:  37.  C.  Fabre.  (Platinotypie.)  Pt. 

Bui.  de  l’Assoc.  beige  de-  phot.  6,  302;  Photog.  Corresp.  17  (1880),  38; 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1880,  383;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  237  (1880),  416;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1880,  1393;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  30  (1880-81),  273. 

1880:  38.  M.  Berthelot.  Sur  quelques  relations  generates  entre 
la  masse  chimique  des  elements  et  la  chaleur  de  formation  de 
leurs  combinaisons.  (Platinum  and  palladium  compounds.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  21  (1880),  386;  C.  R.  90  (1880),  1511;  91  (1880), 

17;  Rev.  scient.  19  (1880),  26;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  134. 

1880:39.  P.  Desains  and  P.  Curie.  Recherches  sur  la  determina- 
tion des  longeurs  d’onde  des  rayons  calorifiques  a basse  tem- 
perature. (Of  glowing  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  90  (1880),  1506;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  196. 

1880:  40.  E.  Bouty.  Mesure  des  forces  electromotrices  thermo- 
£lectriques  au  contact  d’un  metal  et  d’unliquide.  (Platinum 
and  liquids.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  90  (1880),  917;  Seanc.  Soc.  phys.  Paris,  1880,  96;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880, 

160. 

1880:  41.  G.  Gore.  On  the  thermo-electric  behaviour  of  aqueous 
solutions  with  platinum  electrodes.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  31  (1881),  244. 

1880:  42.  C.  A.  Young.  On  the  thermo-electric  power  of  iron  and 
platinum  in  vacuo.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  20  (1880),  358;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  10  (1880),  450. 

1880:  43.  It.  Blondlot.  Sur  une  nouvelle  propri6te  electrique  du 
selenium  et  sur  Texistence  des  courants  tribo-61ectriques  pro- 
prement  dits.  (Selenium  and  platinum  in  contact.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  91  (1880),  882;  Seanc.  Soc.  phys.  Paris,  1880,  196;  Repert.  Exp. 

Phys.  17  (1881),  259;  Jsb.  Chem.  1880,  175. 

1880:44.  E.  H.  Hall.  On  a new  action  of  magnetism  on  a perma- 
nent electric  current.  (Platinum,  Phil.  Mag.,  p.  321.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  20  (1880),  161;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  10  (1880),  301;  Jsb. 

Chem.  1880,  172,  173. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


131 


1880:  45.  H.  Helmholtz.  Ueber  Bewegungsstrome  am  polarisirten 
Pktina.  Pt. 

Monatsber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1880,  285;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  11 
£1880),  737. 

1881 : 1 . W.  E.  Hidden.  Notes  on  mineral  localities  of  North  Caro- 
lina. (No  platinum  in  five  localities.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  22  (1881),  25;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  1347. 

1881:  2.  P.  Collier.  A remarkable  nugget  of  platinum.  (From 
Plattsburg,  N.  Y.;  with  analysis.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 
Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  21  (1881),  123;  Ztsch.  Kryst.  5 (1881),  515;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1881, 1347;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  426;  Jahrb.  f.  Min.  1883,  1,  Ref.  27. 

1881:3. Gold  and  platinum  in  Russia.  Pt. 

Engineering,  31  (1881),  163;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  152;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
40  (1881),  769. 

1881:  4.  Increased  importance  of  iridium.  Ir. 

Scient.  Amer.  44  (1881),  369;  Berg-  und  Htitten.  Ztg.  40  (1881),  327; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1882,  47. 

1S81 : 5.  T.  Wilm.  (Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Platinmetalle.)  (Pu- 
rification of  palladium;  precipitation  of  rhodium  and  palla- 
dium; solution  of  platinum  metals  in  hydrochloric  acid; 
rhodium  and  hydrogen.)  Rh,  Pd,  Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  13,  i (1881),  360,  517,  560;  Ber.  14  (1881),  629;  15 
(1882),  241  (abst.);  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  36  (1881),  436;  37  (1882),  344, 
545;  38  (1882),  139,  167;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1881,  321;  1882,  23,  153; 
Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  325;  244  (1882),  87;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881), 
514;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  306;  1882,  359,  1389;  Chem.  Ztg.  5 (1881),  252; 
Chem.  tech.  Mitth.  (Eisner),  30  (1880-81),  219. 

1881 : 6.  T,  Wilm.  (Ueber  das  Verhalten  von  Palladium,  Rhodium 
und  Platin  zu  Leuchtgas.)  Pd,  Rh,  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  13,  i (1881),  490;  Ber.  14  (1881),  874;  Amer.  Chem. 
J.  3 (1881),  154;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  36  (1881),  438;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  241 
(1881),  150;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  706;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  307; 
Chem.  Ztg.  5 (1881),  323. 

1881:  7.  W.  Gibbs.  On  osmyl-ditetramin.  Os. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  3 (1881),  233;  Ber.  14  (1881),  2820;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  42 
(1882),  144;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  308;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  14,  ii  (1882), 
207. 

1881 : 8.  O.  Hesse.  Neue  Platinsalze.  (Chlorplatinates  of  quinine 
derivatives.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Chem.  (Liebig),  207  (1881),  309;  Chem.  News,  44  (1881), 
83;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  922;  Monit.  scient.  23  (1881),  1122; 
Chem.  Ztg.  5 (1881),  400. 


182 

1881: 

1S81 : 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

9.  K.  Seubert.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Platins 

(194.177).  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Chem.  (Liebig),  297  (1881),  1;  Ber.  14  (1881),  865;  Pharm. 
Ztsch.  Russ.  20  (1881),  256;  Amer.  Chem.  J.  3 (1881),  157;  Amer. 
J.  Sci.  [3],  21  (1881),  398;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  36  (1881),  437;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1881,  321;  Chem.  News,  43  (1881),  252;  44  (1881),  82;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  ol4;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  6;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc. 
14,  ii  (1882),  64;  Chem.  Ztg.  5 (1881),  217;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  1 
(1881),  151. 

10.  A.  Orlowsky.  (Affinity  between  platinum  and  sulphur.) 

Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  13,  i (1881),  547;  Ber.  14  (1881),  2823;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1881,  24. 

11.  E.  Pomey.  Sur  les  combinaisons  phosphoplatiniques. 

Pt. 

C.  R.  92  (1881),  794;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  35  (1881),  420;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1881,  322;  Chem.  News,  43  (1881),  222;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  305. 

12.  P.  Schutzenberger.  Carbure  de  platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  35  (1881),  355;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  14,  ii  (1882), 

149. 

13.  F.  W.  Clarke  and  Mary  E.  Owens.  Some  new  com- 

pounds of  platinum.  (Action  of  potassium  cyanate  on  plati- 
num tetrachloride  and  on  Magnus’s  salt;  potassium  thiocyanate 
on  platinum  tetrachloride;  and  hydrogen  sulphide  on  strych- 
nine chloroplatinate.)  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  3 (1881),  351;  Ber.  15  (1882),  352;  Chem.  News,  45 
(1882),  62;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  37  (1882),  400;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1882,  153;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1882),  299;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  305;  Scient. 
Proc.  Ohio  Mech.  Inst.  1 (1882),  45;  Chem.  Ztg.  6 (1882),  69. 

14.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Kobaltani- 

moniakverbindungen.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  23  (1881),  227;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  36  (1881), 
311;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  251. 

14a.  A.  Colson.  Sur  la  diffusion  des  solides  dans  les  solides. 
(Platinum  does  not  react  with  carbon.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  93  (1881),  1074;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  79. 

15.  J.  Holland.  Process  of  fusing  and  moulding  iridium. 

(By  fusion  with  phosphorus.)  (U.  S.  patent  241216;  German 
patent  15979,  May  10,  1881.)  Ir. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  3 (1881),  158;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  244  (1882),  219; 
Oester.  Ztsch.  Berg-  und  Hiitten-Wesen,  29  (1881),  678;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1882,  334;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1388;  Chem.  tech.  Mitth. 
(Eisner),  31  (1881-82),  105. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


183 


1881:  16.  F.  W.  Clarke.  An  abstract  of  the  results  obtained  in  a 
recalculation  of  the  atomic  weights.  (Platinum  metals,  Phil. 
Mag.,  p.  108;  Am.  C.  J.,  p.  271.)  Pt,  Pd;  Ir,  Rli,  Os,  Ru. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  12  (1881),  101;  Amer.  Chem.  J.  3 (1881),  263;  Jab.  Chem. 

1881,  7. 

1881:  17.  J.  Dewar  and  A.  Scott.  On  some  vapor  density  deter- 
minations. (Platinum  bichloride.)  Pt 

Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1881,  597;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  7 (1883), 

149;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  48. 

1881 : 18.  G.  Campari.  Ricerca  dell’  oro  e platino  in  presenza  dell' 
arsenico,  dello  stagno  e dell’  antimonio.  (Quantitative  sepa- 
ration of  platinum  from  arsenic,  tin,  and  antimony.)  Pt. 

Annali  di  chim.  74  (1882),  1;  Ber.  15  (1882),  958;  Chem.  Ztg.  6 (1882), 

161. 

1881:  19.  F.  Field.  Laboratory  observations : On  the  detection  of 
small  quantities  of  platinum;  action  of  organic  substances  in 
reaction  with  platinum  iodide  and  potassium  iodide  in  water 
analysis.  Pt  (Pd,  Rh). 

Chem.  News,  43  (1881),  75,  180;  Ber.  14  (1881),  693,  1296;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  1881,  251;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  649;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 

21  (1882),  421;  22  (1883),  252;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1260;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 

Soc.  13,  ii  (1881),  340. 

1881 : 20.  D.  Lindo.  Estimation  of  potassium  as  platinum  salt. 

Pt. 

Chem.  News,  44  (1881),  77,  86,  97,  129;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  21  (1882),  406. 

1881:  21.  G.  Ulex.  Ueber  Kalibestimmung  als  Kaliumplatin- 
chlorid.  PL 

Repert.  anal.  Chem.  1 (1881),  306;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  22  (1883),  560. 

1881:  22.  R.  R.  Tatlock.  On  the  determination  of  potassium  as 
potassium  platino-chloride.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  43  (1881),  273. 

1881:  23.  S.  Zuckschwerdt  and  B.  West.  Ueber  die  Bestim- 
mung  des  Kaliums  als  Kaliumplatinchlorid.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  20  (1881),  185;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  241  (1881),  140;  Chem. 

News,  43  (1881),  251. 

1881:  24.  O.  Wallach.  Zur  Analyse  von  organischen  Platinsalzen. 
(Note.)  Pt. 

Ber.  14  (1881),  753;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  36  (1881),  575;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1881,  389;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  715;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  1194;  Chem. 

News,  47  (1883),  249;  Chem.  Ztg.  5 (1881),  289. 


184 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 

1881: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

25.  L.  Maggi.  Siill  analisa  protistologica  delle  aeque  potabili. 

(Use  of  palladium  chloride  in  place  of  osmium  tetroxide  in 
water  analysis.)  Pd,  Os. 

Le  stazioni  sperimentali  agrarie  ital.  11  (1882),  28;  Rendic.  1st.  lomb. 
Milano,  14  (1881),  621;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  13  (1883),  323;  Rev.  scient. 
3 (1882),  661;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  1526. 

26.  A.  Tsciiirikoff  (Schirikow).  (Use  of  jialladium  in  esti- 
mation of  hydrogen.)  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  14,  i (1882),  47;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  38  (1882),  171; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1882,  821;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  59,  1263;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  22  (1883),  240;  Ber.  15  (1882),  958;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.) 
Beibl.  8 (1884),  629;  Chem.  Ztg.  8 (1884),  1289;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  2 
(1882),  120. 

27.  [R.  '?]  Schneider.  Ueber  das  Palladiumehlorur  als  Rea- 

gens  auf  Kohlenoxvd.  Pd. 

Repert.  anal.  Chem.  1 (1881),  54;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1881,  201. 

28.  A.  Remont.  De  l'attaque  du  platine  sous  l’influence  de  la 

flamme.  (Crucibles.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  35  (1S81),  353  (note),  486;  Ber.  14  (1881),  1394; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1881,  440;  Chem.  News,  44  (1881),  169;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
40  (1881),  882;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  304;  School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart. 
3 (1882),  301;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  14,  ii  (1882),  236;  Repert.  anal. 
Chem.  1 (1881),  189. 

29.  C.  A.  M.  Balling.  Beitrag  zur  Volumetrie  einiger  Metalle. 
(Influence  of  platinum  in  quart ation  of  gold  by  cadmium.)  Pt. 

Oester.  Ztsch.  Berg-  und  H iitten-Wesen,  29  (1881),  51;  Chem.  Ztg.  5 
(1881),  113;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  1156. 

30.  E.  Lommel.  Ein  Polarisationsapparat  aus  Magnesium- 

platincyanur.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Phys.  med.  Soc.  Erlangen, 13  (1881),  31;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
[2],  13  (1881),  347. 

31.  H.  Bush.  Metallurgie  des  Platins.  (Use  of  platinum  al- 
loys.) Pt. 

Centralztg.  Optik.  Mech.  2 (1881),  30;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  216; 
Polyt.  Notizbl.  36  (1881),  54;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  1 (1881),  94. 

32.  — Zur  Herstellung  und  Verwendung  des  Platins. 

(Editorial  review.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  240  (1881),  213;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  792. 

33.  P.  Casamajor.  (New  filtering  apparatus.)  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  3 (1881),  125;  Chem.  News,  45  (1882),  148;  Monit. 

scient.  24  (1882),  884. 

34.  O.  J.  Broch,  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville,  and  J.  S. 

Stas.  De  la  regie  en  forme  d’X  et  en  platine  iridi6  pur  a 10 
pour  100  d’iridium.  Pt,  Ir,  Pd,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  22  (1881),  120;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1881),  680. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


185 


1881:  35.  — (Platindruck.)  Pt. 

Photog.  Archiv,  27  (1881),  2;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1881,  175;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  240 
(1881),  405;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1882),  115;  Jsb.  Chem.  1881,  1342. 

1881:  36.  E.  Baumann.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  aktiven  Sauerstoffs. 
(Palladiumwasserstoff.)  Pd. 

Ztsch.  physiol.  Chem.  5 (1881),  244. 

1881:  37.  J.  Violle.  Sur  la  loi  de  rayonnement.  (Intensites  lumi- 
neuses  des  radiations  emises  par  le  platine  incandescent.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  92.(1881),  833,  1204;  J.  Chem.  Soe.  40  (1881),  669;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1881,  116;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  13  (1882),  147. 

1881:  38.  E.  L.  Nichols.  Note  on  the  electrical  resistance  and  the 
coefficient  of  expansion  of  incandescent  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  1881,  24;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  22  (1881),  363;  Phil.  Mag. 
[5],  13  (1882),  38;  Ber.  15  (1882),  524;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1882),  354;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1881,  94;  1882,  149. 

1881:  39.  F.  Streintz.  Ueber  die  durch  Entladung  von  Leydener 
Flaschen  hervorgerufene  Zersetzung  des  Wassers  an  Platin- 
elektroden.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  83,  ii  (1881),  618;  Anzeiger  Akad.  Wien,  18  (1881), 
67;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  [2],  13  (1881),  644. 

1881:  40.  G.  H.  Johnson.  On  the  synthetical  production  of  am- 
monia by  the  combination  of  hydrogen  and  nitrogen  in  presence 
of  heated  spongy  platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  39  (1881),  128,  130;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  14,  ii  (1882),  146. 

1882:  1.  A.  von  Lasaulx.  Ueber  einen  ausgezeichneten  Krystall 
von  dunklem  Osmiridium  aus  dem  Ural.  (Crystallographic.) 

Os,  Ir. 

Sitzber.  Niederrliein.  Gesell.  Bonn,  39  (1882),  99;  Ztsch.  Kryst.  8 (1884), 
303;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  1902. 

1882:  2.  W.  H.  Seamon.  Examination  of  gold,  silver,  etc.,  alloys 
found  in  grains  along  with  the  native  platinum  of  Colombia, 
S.  America.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  46  (1882),  215;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  160;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1882,  1522. 

1882:  3.  W.  H.  Seamon.  Analysis  of  native  palladium-gold  from 
Taguaril,  near  Subara,  province  of  Minas  Geraes,  Brazil.  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  46  (1882),  216;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  160;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1882,  819;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1522. 

1882:  4.  J.  W.  Mallet.  Comment  on  W.  H.  Seamon’s  analysis  of 
palladium-gold  from  Brazil.  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  46  (1882),  216;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1522. 


186 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1S82:  5.  J.  H.  Debray.  Note  sur  la  reproduction  des  osmiures 
d’ iridium.  Ir,  Os. 

C.  R.  95  (1882),  878;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  39  (1883),  520;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1883,  4;  Chem.  News,  46  (1882),  280;  J.  C’hem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  298; 
J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  15,  ii  (1883),  424;  C’hem.  Ztg.  6 (1882),  1318. 

1SS2:  6.  E.  H.  Sainte-Claire  Deville  and  J.  II.  Debray.  Note 
sur  quelques  alliages  explosifs  du  zinc  et  des  metaux  du  platine. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

C.  R.  94  (1882),  1557;  ( ’hem.  Centrbl.  1882.  468;  Chem.  News,  46  (1882), 
10;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1386;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  15,  ii  (1883),  15;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  Beibl.  6 (1882),  655. 

1882:  7.  A.  Ditte.  Recherches  relatives  au  protoxyde  d’etain  et 
a quelques  unes  de  ses  composes.  (Palladium- tin  and  platinum- 
tin  salts.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  27  (1882;,  145;  C.  R.  94  (1882),  1114;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
42  (1882),  808:  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  14  (1882),  152. 

1882:  8.  B.  Gerdes.  Ueber  die  bei  Elektrolyse  des  carbamin- 
sauren  und  kohlensauren  Ammons  mit  Wechselstromen  und 
Platinelektroden  entstehenden  Platinbasen.  Inaug.  Diss. 
Leipzig,  1882.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  26  (1882),  257;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  39  (1883),  34; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1883,  132;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  27;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1882,  160:  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  15,  ii  (1883),  455. 

1882:  9.  E.  Drechsel.  Leber  die  Ammonplatindiammoniumver- 
bindungen.  (Criticism  of  B.  Gerdes.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  26  (1882),  277;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  28. 

1882:  10.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Bei tr age  zur  Chemie  der  Chromam- 
moniakverbindungen.  (Ckloroplatinate3  of  chromium  bases.) 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  25  (1882),  83,  321,  398;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  309.  Pt. 

1882:  11.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Rhodium am- 
moniakverbindungen.  (Vorlaufige  Mittheilung.)  Rh,  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  25  (1882),  346;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1882,  459;  Chem. 
News,  46  (1882),  67;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1882),  1173;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882, 
360. 

1882:  12.  F.  W.  Clarke.  A recalculation  of  the  atomic  weights. 
Constants  of  nature,  Part  V.  Smithsonian  Miscellaneous  Col- 
lections, Washington,  1882.  (Platinum  metals,  p.  249;  atomic 
weight,  Pt  = 194.867;  Pd=  105.981;  Ir=193;  Rh=  104.285; 
Os  =199.648;  Ru=  104.457;  0=16.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  22  (1883),  302. 

1882:  13.  C.  W.  Siemens  and  A.  K.  Huntington.  On  the  electric 
furnace.  (Fusion  of  platinum  by  electricity.) 

Rept.  Brit.  Assoc.  1882,  496;  Chem.  News,  46  (1882),  163;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1882,  1354. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


187 


1882:  14.  W.  L.  Dudley.  Holland’s  process  for  melting  iridium. 
(By  use  of  phosphorus.) 

Scient.  Proc.  Ohio  Mech.  Inst.  1 (1882),  35;  Trans.  Amer.  Inst.  Min. 
Eng.  12  (1SS3),  557;  ('hem.  News,  45  (1882),  168;  Ber.  15  (1882),  1190; 
J.  ('hem.  Soc.  42  (1882),  703;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1388;  1884,  1719;  Monit. 
scient.  [3],  14  (1884),  1170;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  2 (1882),  190. 

1882:  15.  R.  B.  Warder.  Note  on  W.  L.  Dudley’s  paper  on  Hol- 
land’s process  for  melting  iridium.  Ir. 

Scient.  Proc.  Ohio  Mech.  Inst.  1 (1882),  39. 

1882:  16.  T.  Wilm.  (Oxidation  of  platinum  metals.) 

Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  14,  i (1882),  240;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  38  (1882), 
611;  Ber.  15  (1882),  2225;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1882,  706;  Jsb.  ( hem.  1882, 
359. 

1882:  17.  L’Abbe  Mailfert.  Recherches  sur  1’ozone.  (Action  on 
palladium  compounds.)  Pd,  Pt. 

C.  R.  94  (1882),  860,  1186;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  224. 

1882:  18.  E.  Mulder  and  H.  G.  L.  van  der  Meulen.  Ozon  tegen- 
over  platinazwart.  (Action  of  platinum  black  on  ozone.)  Pt. 

Mededeel.  Akad.  Amsterdam,  18  (1883),  170;  Rec.  trav.  chim.  des  Pays 
Bas,  1 (1882),  167;  Ber.  16  (1883),  386;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  42  (1884), 
242;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  223. 

1882:  19.  A.  Gavazzi.  Studio  sopra  alcune  reazioni  dell’  idrogeno 
fosforato  gassoso.  (Action  of  phosphin  on  platinum  chloride.) 

Pt. 

Accad.  Bologna,  June  14,  1882;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  13  (1883),  324;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1883,  437. 

1882:  20.  F.  PIofmeister,  Jr.  Ueber  die  physiologische  Wirkung 
der  Platinbasen.  Pt. 

Arch,  exper.  Path.  16  (1882),  393;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1225;  Ber.  16  (1883), 
1508. 

1882:  21.  H.  Topsoe.  Krystallografisk-kemiske  Undersogelser 
over  homologe  Forbindelser.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Oversigt  Dansk.  Vid.  Sels.  Kjobenhavn,  1882,  1;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.) 
Beibl.  7 (1883),  826. 

1882:  22.  P.  E.  Lecoq  de  Boisbaudran.  Separation  du  gallium. 
(From  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  95  (1882),  1332;  Chem.  News,  45  (1882),  207,  228;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
44  (1883),  294;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1296. 

1882:  23.  C.  R.  Fresenius.  Zur  Bestimmung  des  Kalis  als  Kali- 
umplatinchlorid.  (Nach  der  neuen  Bestimmung  des  Platin- 
aquivalents  durch  Seubert.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  21  (1882),  234;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1282. 


188 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1882:  24.  J.  Post.  (Recovery  of  platinum  chloride  residues.)  Pt. 

Deutsch-Amer.  Apothek.  Ztg.  3 (1882),  Aug.  15;  Chem.  News,  46  (1882), 
243. 

1882:  25.  T.  P.  Blunt.  Note  on  the  use  of  platinic  chloride  as  an 
indicator  in  the  determination  of  free  iodine.  Pt. 

Analyst,  7 (1882),  135. 

1882:  26.  A.  D.  van  Riemsdijk.  (Cupellation  of  gold  in  presence 
of  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Mededeel.  Labor.  Rijks.  Munt.  1882,  No.  5;  Rec.  trav.  chim.  des  Pays 
Bas,  1 (1882),  188;  Ber.  16  (1883),  387. 

1882:  27.  Ucber  Platinirung  zinnerner,  messingerner, 

weissblechener  und  kupferner  Gerathschaften.  Pt. 

Pharm.  Centrh.  23  (1882),  88;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1882,  384;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 


42  (1882),  1145;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  1 (1882),  323. 

1882:  28.  W.  Spring.  Bildung  von  Legirungen  durch  Druck. 
(Platinum-silver  alloy.)  Pt. 

Ber.  15  (1882),  595;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  1357. 

1882:  29.  B.  J.  Grosjean.  Filtration  under  pressure.  (Use  of 
platinum  disks.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  45  (1882),  167. 

1882:  30.  P.  Casamajor.  Note  on  filtering  discs  (of  platinum). 

Chem.  News,  46  (1882),  8.  Pt. 

1882:  31.  J.  C.  Hoadley.  The  specific  heat  of  platinum,  and  the 
use  of  this  metal  in  the  pyrometer.  Pt. 


J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  84  (1882),  91;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  6 (1882), 
864;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  99. 

1882:  32.  J.  C.  Hoadley.  Observations  with  the  platinum-water 
pyrometer,  with  heat-carriers  of  platinum,  and  of  iron  encased 
with  platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  84  (1882),  169. 

1882:  33.  J.  C.  Hoadley.  The  platinum- water  pyrometer.  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  84  (1882),  252;  Chem.  News,  47  (1883),  171;  Ann. 
der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  7 (1883),  25;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  769; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  114;  Chem.  Ztg.  7 (1883),  585. 

1882:34.  S.  Kalischer.  Ueber  die  Molekularstructur  der  Metalle. 
(Platinum.)  Pt. 

Ber.  15  (1882),  702;  Repert.  Exp.  Phys.  18  (1882),  292;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1882,  262. 

1882:  35.  A.  Colson.  Sur  la  diffusion  des  solides.  (Silicides  of 

platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  94  (1882),  26;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  87. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


189 


1882:  36.  P.  Schutzenberger  and  A.  Colson.  Sur  le  silicium. 
(Platinum  silicides  in  the  flame.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  94  (1882),  1710;  Ber.  15  (1882),  2231;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  260. 

1882:  37.  W.  N.  Hartley.  Note  on  certain  photographs  of  the 
ultra-violet  spectra  of  elementary  bodies.  (Of  platinum  and 
palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  41  (1882),  84;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  180. 

1882:38.  A.  Joannis.  Chaleurs  de  formation  des  principaux  com- 
poses palladeux.  Pd. 

C.  R.  95  (1882),  295;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1882,  582;  Chem.  News,  46  (1882), 
113;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1882),  1258;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  133,  360;  j! 
Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  15,  ii  (1883),  14. 

1882:  39.  M.  Bertiielot.  Recherches  sur  l’absorption  des  gaz  par 
le  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  94  (1882),  1377;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [5],  30  (1883),  519;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  39  (1883),  109;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1882,  457;  Chem.  News,  45 
(1882),  262;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1882),  1022;  46  (1884),  702;  J.  de 
pharm.  6 (1882),  5;  J.  de  phys.  1 (1882),  341;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  60; 
1883,  74;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  15,  ii  (1883),  2;  Chem.  Ztg.  8 (1884),  264. 

1882:40.  M.  Traube.  Ueber  Aktivirung  des  Sauerstoffs.  (Action 
of  pa-lladium-hydrogen.)  Pd. 

Ber.  15  (1882),  659,  2421,  2434;  Jsb.  Schles.  Gesell.  Breslau,  1882,  125, 
128;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  218. 

1882:  41.  M.  Traube.  Ueber  die  Oxydation  des  Kohlenoxyds 
durch  Palladiumwasserstoff  und  SauerstofT.  (Vorlaufige  Mit- 
theilung.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  15  (1882),  2325;  Bui.  Soc.  chim  [2],  39  (1883),  210;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882, 
250;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  2 (1882),  381;  Chem.  Ztg.  6 (1882),  1251. 

1882:  42.  M.  Traube.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  von  Platin  oder  Palla- 
dium gegen  Kohlenoxyd  oder  Wasserstoff  bei  Gegenwart  von 
Sauerstoff  und  Wasser.  (Vorlaufige  Mittheilung.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  15  (1882),  2854;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  39  (1883),  447;  Dingl.  pol.  J. 
247  (1883),  95;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  250;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  5 (1883),  62. 

1882:  43.  G.  Poloni.  Nuovo  metodo  per  determinare  l’interna 
conducibilita  relativa  dei  metalli  pel  calore.  (Heat  conduc- 
tivity of  platiifum.)  Pt. 

Rendic.  1st.  lomb.  Milano  [2],  15  (1882),  386;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Fogg.), 
Beibl.  7 (1883),  34;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  115. 

1882:  44.  F.  Braun.  Ueber  galvanisclie  Elemente,  welche  angeb- 
lich  nur  aus  Grundstoffen  bestehen,  und  electromotorischen 
Nutzeffect  chemischer  Processe.  (Between  platinum  and 
chlorine.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  17  <1882),  593;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  146. 


190 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1S82:  45.  B.  J.  Goossexs.  Ueber  die  nietaliiscke  galvanische 
Kette  von  Perry  und  Ayrton.  (Platinum-magnesium.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  16  (1382),  551;  Jab.  Chem.  1832,  141. 

1SS2:  46.  F.  Streixtz.  Experiment alimtersuchiingen  uber  die 
galvanische  Polarisation.  Pt,  Pd. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  86,  ii  (1882),  216;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  17 
(1882),  841;  Jsb.  Chem.  1882,  162. 

1SS3:  a.  J.  A.  Poxd.  On  the  occurrence  of  platinum  in  quartz 
lodes  at  Thames  goldfields.  Pt. 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  15  (1883),  419. 

1SS3:  1.  C.  Claus.  Fragment  einer  Monographic  des  Platins  und 
der  Platmmetalle.  1865-1883.  St.  Petersburg,  1883.  (Post- 
humous work  containing  bibliography  of  the  platinum  metals 
to  1861.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1883:  la.  T.  Wilm.  Ueber  die  magnetische  Eigenschaft  von 
Platinerz.  Pt. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  664;  Chem.  News,  48  (1883),  249;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  248(1883), 
345;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  859;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  231. 

1883:  2.  T.  Wilm.  Vorlaufige  Mittheilung.  (New  metal  in  plat- 
inum ore.)  — , Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  15,  i (1883),  361;  Ber.  16  (1883),  1298;  Bui.  Soc.  chim; 
[2],  41  (1884),  179;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  954;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  456. 

Chem.  Ztg.  7 (1883),  803. 

1883:  3.  T.  Wilm.  Zur  Cliemie  der  Platmmetalle.  (Verarbei- 
tung  der  Platinerze.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  1524;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  249  (1883),  280;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1S83), 
1057:  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  457;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  41  (1884),  255. 

1883:  4.  W.  De  la  Rue  and  A.  W.  Muller.  On  the  electric  dis- 
charge with  the  chloride  of  silver  battery.  (Formation  of  a 


volatile  hydrogen  palladium  compound,  p.  482.)  Pd. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  174  (1883),  477. 

18S3:  5.  *T.  Wilm.  Ueber  ein  neues  Rhodiumsalz.  (Rh„Cl4, 

8XH4C1,  7Aq.)  Rh. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  15,  i (1883^  613;  Ber.  16  (1883),  3033:  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
46  (1884),  661;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  453;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  41  (1884),  392. 

1883:  6.  J.  H.  Debray.  Note  sur  un  nouveau  compose  du 

rhodium.  (Oxysulphide.)  Rh. 


C.  R.  97  (1883),  1333;  Ber.  17,  ii  (1884),  6;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  42  (1884), 
246;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1884  , 56;  Chem.  News,  49  (1884),  21;  J.  Russ. 
Chem.  Soc.  16,  ii  (1884),  130;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1884),  400;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1883,  439. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OP  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


191 


1883:  7.  P.  E.  Lecoq  de  Boisbaudran.  Reactions  tres  sensible# 
des  sels  d’iridium.  lr. 

C.  R.  96  (1883),  1336;  Ber.  16  (1883),  1394;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1883,  459; 
Chem.  News,  47  (1883),  240;  .T.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  905;  Ztsch.  anal 
Chem.  26  (1887),  80;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  437,  1583. 

1883:  8.  P.  E.  Lecoq  de  Boisbaudran.  Examen  d un  sulfate 
double  d?  iridium  et  de  potasse.  Ir. 

C.  R.  96  (1883),  1406;  Ber.  16  (1883),  1494;  Chem.  News,  47  (1883),  257; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  905;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  437,  1583. 

1883:  9.  P.  E.  Lecoq  de  Boisbaudran.  Remarques  sur  le  sulfate 
violet  d’iridium.  Ir. 

C.  R.  96  (1883),  1551;  Ber.  16  (1883),  1678;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  40  (1883), 
299;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1883,  458;  Chem.  News,  47  (1883),  293;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  44  (1883),  1057;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  437,  1583;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc. 
16,  ii  (1884),  43. 

1883:  10.  F.  W.  Clarke  and  O.  T.  Joslin.  On  some  phosphides 
of  iridium  and  platinum.  Ir,  Pt  (Pd,  Rh,  Ru,  Os). 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  5 (1883),  231;  Chem.  News,  48  (1883),  285;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  41  (1884),  636;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1884,  56;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48 
(1884),  400;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  439;  Chem.  Ztg.  7 (1883),  1529;  J.  Russ. 
Chem.  Soc.  17,  ii  (1885),  101. 

1883:  11.  J.  M.  Lovin.  Ueber  einige  Schwefelsubstitutionspro- 
ducte  der  Propionsaure.  (Thiomilchsaures  Platin.)  Inaug, 
Diss.  Lund,  1883.  Pt. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  789;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  1048. 

1883:  12.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  samarium.  (Chloroplatinate  and  pla- 
tinocyanid  of  samarium,  p.  22.)  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  40  (1883),  No.  7,  17;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
43  (1883),  362;  C.  R.  97  (1883),  94;  Chem.  News,  48  (1883),  *9,  74; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  362. 

1883:  13.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Rhodiumam- 
moniakverbindungen.  (Audi  vorlaufige  Versuche  iiber  this 
Atomgewicht  des  Rhodiums,  p.  486.)  (Rh  = 103.)  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  27  (1883),  433;  Ber.  16  (1883),  1862;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  41  (1884),  24;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1883,  502;  Chem.  News,  48  (1883), 
58;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  1058;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  440. 

1883:  14.  L.  Meyer  and  K.  Seubert.  Die  Atomgewichte  der 
Elemente  aus  den  Origin alzahlen  neu  berechnet.  Leipzig,  1883. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Chem.  News,  48  (1883),  211;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  22  (1883),  639. 

1883:  15.  L.  Opificius.  Darstellung  von  Platinchloridlosung.  Pt. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  38  (1883),  166;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  23  (1884),  207;  Chem. 
News,  50  (1884),  34. 


192 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1883:  16.  W.  Oechsner  de  Coninck.  Action  de  beau  bouillant 
sur  les  chlorplatinatcs  p}nidiques  et  quinoleiques.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  39  (1883),  263,  498;  42  (1884),  610. 

1883:  17.  A.  Levallois.  Reactions  du  sulfure  de  plomb  sur  les 
chlorines  metalliques.  (On  platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

0.  R.  96  (1883),  1666;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  395. 

1883:  18.  G.  Gore.  Reduction  of  metallic  solutions  by  means  of 
gases,  etc.  (Chlorides  of  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Proc.  Phil.  Soc.  Birmingham,  4 (1883-85),  61;  Chem.  News,  48  (1883), 
295;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  336. 

1883:  19.  W.  Konig.  Ueber  die  optischen  Eigenschaften  der  Platin- 
cyaniire.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Pliys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  19  (1883),  491;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  254;  Chem. 
Ztg.  7 (1883),  767. 

1883:  20.  C.  W.  Blomstraxd.  Zur  Frage  liber  die  Sattigungsca- 
pacitat  der  Grundstoffe,  insbesondere  des  Schwefels.  (Corre- 
spondence between  the  sulphur  and  nitrogen  bases  of  platinum, 
p.  189.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  27  (1883),  161;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  31. 

1883:  21.  E.  Donath  and  J.  Mayrhofer.  Bemerkungen  liber 
Affinitat  und  deren  Beziehungen  zu  Atomvolum,  Atomgewicht 
und  specifischem  Gcwicht.  (Platinum  metals.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  1588;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  26. 

1883:22. (Specific  gravity  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Engineer,  1883,  Nov.  23;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  4 (1884),  16. 

1883:  23.  F.  Stolba.  Zur  Analyse  des  Kalium-  und  Ammonium- 
Platinchlorids.  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Bohm.  Gesell.  Prag,  1883,  ii,  481. 

1883:  24.  A.  R.  Leeds.  Platinic  iodide  as  a test-reagent  for  dele- 
terious organic  substances  in  potable  water.  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  5 (1883),  74. 

1883:  25.  A.  Orlowski.  Ersetzung  des  Schwefelwassers toft’s  in 
qualitativer  Analyse  durch  unterschwefligsaures  Ammon. 
(Action  on  platinum  solutions.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  22  (1883),  357. 

1883:  26.  M.  Ballo.  Platinirtes  Magnesium  als  Reductionsmittel. 

Pt. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  694;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  249  (1883),  96;  Chem.  News,  48  (1883), 
247;  50  (1884),  55;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  2 (1883),  232. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


193 


1883:  27.  P.  E.  Lecoq  de  Boisbaudran.  Separation  du  gallium. 
(D’avec  le  rhodium;  des  remarques  sur  quelques  reactions  des 
sels  de  rhodium,  p.  152;  d’avec  l’iridium,  1696;  d’avec  le 
ruthenium  et  Y osmium,  1838.)  Rh,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

C.  R.  96  (1883),  152,  1696,  1838;  Chem.  News,  47  (1883),  100,  299;  48 

(1883),  15;  Ber.  16  (1883),  579;  Bill.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  40,  (1883),  350; 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1883,  130;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1883),  715;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1883,  1571,  1572. 

1883:  28.  A.  B.  Clemence.  Apparatus  (platinum  tube)  for  esti- 
mating carbon  in  steels.  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  86  (1883),  370;  Chem.  News,  48  (1883),  206;  Dingl.  pol.  J. 

254  (1884),  77;  Engineer,  56  (1883), -387;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  23  (1884), 

203;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  1554;  1884,  1691. 

1883:29.  W.  L.  Dudley.  The  iridium  industry.  Ir. 

Trans.  Amer.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  12  (1883),  577. 

1883:  30.  M.  Traube.  Ueber  Activirung  des  Sauers  toffs.  (By 

palladium  hydrogen.)  Pd. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  123,  1201;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  40  (1883),  438;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1883,  265,  270. 

8 83:  31.  F.  Hoppe-Seyler.  Ueber  Erregung  des  Sauerstoffs 
durch  nascirenden  Wasserstoff.  (From  palladium,  iridium, 
and  rhodium.)  Pd,  Ir,  Rh. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  117,  1917;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  40  (1883),  437;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  44  (1883),  848;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  268,  270. 

1883:  32.  P.  Chappuis.  Ueber  die  Warmeerzeugung  bei  der  Ab- 
sorption der  Gase  durch  feste  Korper  und  Fliissigkeiten. 
(Sulphur  dioxide  by  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  19  (1883),  21;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  141. 

1883:  33.  A.  Bartoli  and  G.  Papasogli.  Elettrolisi  della  glicerina 
con  elettrodi  di  carbone  e di  platino.  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  13  (1883),  287. 

1883:34.  C.  Fromme.  Electrische  Untersuchungen.  I.  Ueber  das 
Yerhalten  von  Platin,  Palladium,  etc.,  in  Chromsaurelosung. 
II.  Do.  in  Salpetersaurelosung.  III.  Versuche  zur  Kenntniss 
der  Wasserstoff-Condensation  und  -Absorption  durch  Platin 
und  Palladium.  Zusammenfassung  und  Erklarung.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  18  (1883),  552;  19  (1883),  86,  300;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  44  (1883),  698,  699,  766;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  208. 

1883:  35.  W.  Hankel.  Ueber  die  bei  einigen  Gasentwickelungen 
auftretenden  Electricitaten.  (Electrical  action  of  water  drops 
falling  into  platinum  dish.)  Pt. 

Abhand.  Sachs.  Ges.  Wiss.  20  (1883),  599;  Ber.  Sachs.  Ges.  Wiss.  35 

(1883),  123;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  22  (1884),  387;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1884,  235. 

109723°— 19— Bull.  694 13 


194  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1883:  36.  Krquchkoll.  Sur  les  courants  d' emersion  et  de  mouve- 
ment  d’un  metal  dans  un  liquide  et  les  courants  d’ emersion. 
(Platinum  in  acid  water.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  97  (1883),  161;  J.  de  phys.  2 (1883),  505;  Telegr.  J.  13  (1883),  338; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  209;  J.  Them.  Soc.  46  (1884),  2. 

1883:  37.  E.  Becquerel.  Remarque  sur  la  papier  de  Krouchkoli. 
(Platinum  in  acid  water.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  97  (1883),  164;  Jsb.  Chem.  1883,  209. 

1883:  38.  E.  Pirani.  Ueber  galvanische  Polarisation.  (Hydro- 
gen on  platinum  and  palladium.)  Berlin,  1883.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  21  (1884),  64;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  259. 

1883:  39.  E.  Baumann.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  activen  Sauerstoffs. 
(Palladium-hydrogen.)  Pd. 

Ber.  16  (1883),  2146. 

1883:  40.  A.  Guebhard.  Sur  la  force  elec tromo trice  des  depots 
electrolvtiques  de  peroxyde  de  plombe.  (Polarization  of  lead 
dioxide  vs.  platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  Assoc,  franc.  12  (1883),  311;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  Beibl.  8 (1884), 
771;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  259. 

1884:  1.  (Platinum  mines  in  Russia.)  Pt. 

Engineer.  1884,  Sept.  26;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  4 (1884),  383. 

1884:  la.  V.  Restrepo.  Estudio  sobre  las  minas  de  oro  y plata 
de  Colombia.  Bogota,  1884.  2d  edition,  Bogota,  1888.  (For 

English  translation,  see  1886:  la.)  Pt. 

1884:  2.  T.  Wilm.  (New  salt  of  rhodium.)  (Further  details  of 
1883:  3 and  5.)  Rh. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  16,  i (1884),  247;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  42  (1884),  327; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  355. 

1884:  3.  P.  Schutzenberger.  Sur  un  radical  metallique.  (Platino- 
stannates.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  98  (1884),  985;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  29  (1884),  304;  Ber.  17  (1884), 
24);  Chem.  Centrbl.  1884,  452;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  459. 

1884:  4.  D.  Tivoli.  Composti  di  platino  e di  arsenico.  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  14  (1884),  487;  Ber.  18  (1885),  137;  Bill.  Soc.  chim.  [2], 
45  (1886),  444;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  728;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  837; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  459;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  17,  ii  (1885),  100. 

1884:  5.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  derChromammo- 
niakverbindungen.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  30  (1884),  1;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  403. 

1884:  6.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Ueber  das  Verhaltniss  zwischen 
Luteo-  und  Roseosalzen.  (Rliodamins  and  platinum  haloids.) 

Pt,  1th. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  29  (1884),  409;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1884),  1095. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP* 


195 


1884:  7.  W.  Halberstadt.  Bestimmung  des  Atomgewichts  des 
Platins.  (194.57592.)  Pt. 

Ber.  17  (1884),  2962;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  29  (1885),  253;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48 
(1885),  355;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  25  (1886),  296;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  54; 
Repert.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1885),  96;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  357;  Ghent 
Industrie,  8 (1885),  59. 

1884:  8.  F.  W.  Clarke.  A recalculation  of  the  atomic  weights. 
(Pt=  194.867;  0=16,  p.  50;  Os=  199.648,  p.  62;  Ir=193,  p. 
62;  Pd  = 111.879,  p.  62;  Rh=  104.285,  p.  74;  Ru=  104.457, 
p.  74.  From  1882:  12.)  Pt,  Os,  Ir,  Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Chem.  News,  50  (1884),  50,  62,  74;  Chem.  Ztg.  8 (1884),  1288,  1358. 

1884:  9.  R.  Romanis.  Note  on  the  molecular  volume  of  some 
double  chlorides  (of  platinum).  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  49  (1884),  273;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  78. 

1884:  10.  F.  M.  Raoult.  Action  de  i’eau  sur  les  sels  doubles. 
(Sodium  chloroplatinate.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  99  (1884),  914;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  122. 

1884:  11.  Krouchkoll.  (Amalgamation  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  de  phys.  [2],  3 (1884),  139;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (PoggP,  Beibl.  8 (1884),  655; 
Ber.  17  (1884),  162;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884  , 443;  Chem.  Ztg.  8 (1884),  1290. 

1884:  12.  A.  Valentini.  Sopra  alcuni  experience  di  corso.  I. 
Apparecchio  per  la  combustione  dei  corpi  nelT  ossigeno.  (By 
platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chirn.  ital.  14  (1884),  214;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  312. 

1884:  13.  C.  Zulkowsky  and  C.  Lepez.  Zur  Bestimmung  der 
Halogen©  organischer  Korper.  (Use  of  platinized  quartz.)  Pt. 
Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  90,  ii  (1884),  365;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  591; 
Monatsh.  Chem.  5 (1884),  537;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  24  (1885),  607. 

1884:  14.  A.  Classen.  Quantitative  Analyse  durch  Elektrolyse. 
(Platinum,  p.  2477.)  Pt. 

Ber.  17  (1884),  2467;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  44  (1885),  268;  Dingl.  pot.  J. 
259  (1886),  92;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  191;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  24 
(1885),  250;  Analyst,  9 (1884),  228;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  217. 

1884:  15.  E.  Drechsel.  Elektrolysen  und  Elektrosynthesen. 
(Alternating  current  between  platinum  and  palladium  elec- 
trodes.) Pt,  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  29  (1884),  229;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1884),  1136. 

1884:  16.  A.  Bartoli  and  G.  Papasogli.  Sulla  elettrolisi  delle  solu- 
zione  di  fonelo  con  elettrodi  di  carbone  e di  plafcino.  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  14  (1884),  90;  Ber.  17  (1884),  572;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  46 
(1884),  170. 


196 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1884:  17.  E.  Harnack.  Ueber  die  quantitative  Iodbestimmung  im 
Harn.  (Use  of  palladium  solution.)  Pd. 

Ztscli.  physiol.  Chem.  8 (1884),  391;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1884),  1423. 

1884:  18.  G.  Vulpius.  Ueber  Ozonwasser.  (Use  of  palladium 
chloride  to  detect  ozone,  p.  276.)  Pd. 

Arch,  de  pharm.  222  (1884),  268;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  4 (1889),  175. 

1884:  19.  W.  Dittmar.  On  alkali-proof  metals.  (Action  of  lith- 
ium carbonate  and  alkalies  on  platinum  vessels.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  50  (1884),  3;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  3 (1884),  303;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  46  (1884),  1071;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  24  (1885),  75;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884, 
1557,  1729. 

1884:  20.  H.  J.  Seaman.  Note  on  patching  platinum  crucibles. 

Pt. 

Trans.  Amer.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  13  (1884),  140;  Eng.  and  Min.  J.  37  (1884), 
421;  Chem.  Ztg.  8 (1884),  933;  Chem.  News,  49  (1884),  274;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1884,  1687. 

1884:  21.  A.  Gawalovski.  Platinfilter.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  23  (1884),  372;  Chem.  Ztg.  8 (1884),  1509. 

1884:  22.  G.  L.  Anders.  Telephone  transmitters.  (Osmium  in 
microphone.)  Os. 

Sci.  Amer.  Suppl.  18  (1884),  7201;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  254  (1884),  442. 

1884:  23.  Tremeschini.  (Pyrometer  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Portefeuille  econom.  mach.  9 (1884),  64;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  254  (1884),  158. 

1884:  24.  J.  Lewis.  Brennerkopf  zur  Verbrennung  eines  Ge- 
misches  Leuchtgas  und  Luft  in  Platindrahtgewebe.  (German 
patent  30174,  May  16,  1884.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  259  (1886),  413. 

1884:  25.  W.  Siemens.  Lichteinheit  der  Pariser  Conferenz.  (Plati- 
num light  unit.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Berlin.  1884,  601;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  22  (1884), 
304;  Elektrotech.  Ztsch.  1884,  244;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  252  (1884),  529;  254 
(1884),  122;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  281. 

1884:  26.  J.  Violle.  Sur  l’etalon  absolu  de  lumiere.  (Platinum 
unit.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  98  (1884),  1032;  Ann.  ehim.  phys.  [6],  3 (1884),  373;  Dingl.  pol. 
J.  254  (1884),  499;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  281;  J.  fur  Gasbeleucht.  1884,  763; 
Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  249. 

1884:  27.  — Electrische  Einheiten  und  Lichteinheiten.  (Plati- 
num unit.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  22  (1884),  616;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  281. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


197 


1884:  28.  S.  Bidwell.  On  a relation  between  the  coefficient  of  the 
Thomson  effect  and  certain  other  physical  properties  of  metals. 
(Specific  heat  and  resistance  and  coefficient  of  expansion.)  - 
Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  37  (1884),  25.  Pt,  Pd. 

1884:  29.  C.  G.  Knott.  The  electrical  resistance  of  hydrogenized 
palladium.  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  12  (1884),  181;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  8 
(1884),  394;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884,  250. 

1884:  30.  L.  Weiller.  (Electrical  resistance  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Rev.  indust.  1884,  242;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  253  (1884),  134;  Jsb.  Chem.  1884, 
249. 

1884:  31.  A.  Macfarlane.  Arrangement  of  the  metals  in  an  elec- 
trofrictional  series. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  12  (1884),  412;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  9 
(1885),  432;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  225. 

1884:  32.  V.  Strouhal  and  C.  Barus.  Das  Wesen  der  Stahl- 
hartung  vom  elektrischen  Standpunkte  aus  betrachtet,  be- 
sonders  im  Anschluss  an  das  entsprechende  Verhalten  einiger 
Silberlegirungen.  (Electric  properties  of  silver  platinum.) 

Sitzber.  Bohm.  Gesell.  Prag  [6],  12  (1884),  14;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.), 
Beibl.  9 (1885),  353;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  255. 

1885:  1.  A.  Katterfeld.  Ueber  die  Platinaproduction  Russian ds. 

Pt. 

Russkie  Wedomosti, ; Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  44  (1885),  68;  Dingl. 

pol.  J.  255  (1885),  489;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  367;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48 
(1885),  942;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  435. 

1885:  la.  J.  Id.  Collins.  On  the  geology  of  the  Rio  Tinto  mines. 

Quart.  J.  Geol.  Soc.  No.  163  (1885),  245.  Pt. 

1885:  2.  T.  Wilm.  Zur  Analyse  von  Platinerz. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  17,  i (1885),  451;  18,  i (1886),  69;  Ber.  18  (1885), 
2536;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  181;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  1941;  Bui.  Soc. 
ehim.  [2],  45  (1886),  254;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  6 (1886),  226;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Ind.  4 (1885),  759. 

1885:  3.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Om  samariums  foreningar.  (Chloroplati- 
nates  and  platinocyanides.) 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  42  (1885),  No.  1,  15;  Nova  acta  Soc. 
sci.  Upsala  [3],  13  (1885),  2;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  43  (1885),  162;  Chem. 
News,  51  (1885),  145;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  486. 

1885:  4.  P.  T.  Cleve.  Nya  undersokningar  ofver  didyms  fore- 
ningen.  (Chloroplatinates.) 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  42  (1885),  No.  1,  21;  Nova  acta  Soc. 
eci.  Upsala  [3],  13  (1885),  5;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  43  (1885),  359;  Chem. 
News,  52  (1885),  227,  291;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  481. 


198  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1885:  5.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Kobaltammo- 
niakverbindungen.  (Chloroplatinates.) 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  31  (1885),  41,  262;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  726,  87-1; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  502,  512- 

1885:  6.  C.  Vincent.  Sur  trois  nouveaux  composes  de  1’iridium. 
(Chloriridates  of  methylamins.) 

C.  R.  100  (1885),  112;  Ber.  18  (1885),  48;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  43  (1885), 
153;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  165:  Chem.  News,  51  (1885),  61;  J.  ('hem. 
Soc.  48  (1885),  356:  Jsb.  Chem.  18$$>,  1613;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  325. 

1885:  7.  C.  Vincent.  Sur  trois  nouveaux  composes  du  rhodium. 
(Chlororhodates  of  methylamins.)  Rh. 

C.  R.  101  (1885),  322;  Ber.  18  (1885),  532;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  44  (1885), 
513;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  675;  Chem.  News,  52  (1885),  94:  53  (1886), 
37;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  1116;  50  (1886),  310;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2], 
33  (1886),  207;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  1614;  1886,  501;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  7 
(1885),  283. 

1885:  8.  P.  Jochum.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des  unterschweflig- 
sauren  Natrons  auf  Metallsalze.  Inaug.  Diss.  Berlin,  1885. 
(Action  on  platinous  chloride.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  642;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  395;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886), 

. 17. 

1885:  9.  H.  Moissan.  Action  du  platine  au  rouge  sur  les  fluorures 
de  phosphore. 

C.  R.  102  (1885),  763;  Ber.  19  (1886),  286;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  5 (1891), 
454;  Chem.  News,  53  (1886),  191:  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  363;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
50  (1886),  592;  Chem.  Ztg.  10  (1886),  Rep.  90. 

1885:  10.  A.  B.  Griffiths.  Carbides  of  platinum  formed  at  com- 
paratively low  temperatures.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  51  (1885),  97:  Ber.  18  (1885),  258;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885), 
487;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  571;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  18,  ii  (1886),  190;  Chem. 
Ztg.  9 (1885),  470. 

1885:  11.  C.  G.  Memminger.  On  a platinum  silicide.  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  7 (1885),  172;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  124;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  18,  ii  (1886),  190;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  1773. 

1885:  12.  C.  Enebuske.  Om  platinas  metylsulfinbaser.  Inaug. 
Diss.  Lund.  (See  C.  W.  Blomstrand,  1888:  15.)  Pt. 

Ars-skrift  Univ.  Lund,  22,  ii  (1885-86),  2;  Ber.  20  (1887),  107;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  [2],  38  (1888),  358;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  69;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 
2205. 

1885:  13.  C.  Rudelius.  Platinapropylsulfinforeningar.  Inaug.  Diss. 
Lund.  (See  C.  W.  Blomstrand,  1888:  15.)  Pt. 

Ars-skrift  Univ.  Lund.  22,  ii  (1885-86),  4;  Ber.  20  (1887),  108;  J.  prakt. 
Chem.  [2],  38  (1888),  497;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  189;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 
2207. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


199 


1885:  14.  • S.  G.  Hedin.  Om  pyridinens  platinabaser.  Inaug.  Diss. 
Lund.  Pt. 

Ars-skrift  Univ.  Lund,  22,  ii  (1885-86),  3;  Ber.  20  (1887),  108. 

1885:  15.  H.  G.  Soderbaum.  Om  dubbeloxalater  af  Platina.  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  42  (1885),  No.  10,  25;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
50  (1886),  532;  Bui.  Soc.  ohim.  [2],  45  (1886),  188;  Ber.  19  (1886>,  203; 
Chem.  News,  53  (1886),  14;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  1604. 

1885:  16.  P.  Kulisch.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des  Phosphorwasser- 
stoffs  auf  Met  alls  alzlosungen.  (No  definite  results  with  plat- 
inum salts,  p.  355.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  231  (1885),  327. 

1S85:  17.  H.  Schiff.  Palladium-' Wasserstoff  als  Vorlesungsver- 

such.  Pd. 

Ber.  18  (1885),  1727;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  1035;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885, 
354. 

1885:  18.  E.  Demarc  ay.  Sur  une  reaction  coloree  du  rhodium. 

(With  sodium  hypochlorite.)  Rh. 

C.  R.  101  (1885),  951;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  45  (1886),  260;  Chem.  News^ 
52  (1885),  263;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  125;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  1943; 
J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  8 (1886),  56. 

1885:  19.  J.  A.  Groshans.  Sur  les  poids  sp^cifiques  des  cristaux 
hydrates,  ayant  des  formules  analogues  et  des  nombres  egaux 
de  molecules  d’eau.  (Platinum  and  palladium  double  salts.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Rec.  trav.  chim.  des  Pays-Bas,  4 (1885),  236;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  20  (1885),  19, 
191;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  194;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  52. 

1885:  20.  F.  Rottger  and  H.  Precht.  Die  Bestimmung  geringer 
Mengen  Chlornatrium  neben  Chlorkalium.  (Durch  Chlor- 
platin.)  Pt. 

Ber.  18  (1885),  2076;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  25  (1886),  213;  26  (1887),  728. 

1885:  21.  A.  D.  van  Riemsdijk.  Sur  le  procede  de  d’Arcet  pour  le 
dosage  du  platine  dans  son  alliage  avec  F argent  ou  avec  For  et 
F argent.  Sur  Fessais  par  voie  humide  de  F argent  tenant 
platine.  Pt. 

Mededeel.  Lab.  Rijks.  Munt.  6 (1885);  Rec.  trav.  chim.  Pays  Bas,  1 
(1885),  263;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  952;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  1942;  Chem. 
Ztg.  9 (1885),  1854. 

1885:  22.  L.  Kritschewsky  (and  Sch  warzenbach)  . Ueber  die 
Anwendung  des  metallischen  (d.  h.  von  Palladium  absorbirten) 
Wasserstoffs  in  der  analytischen  Chemie.  Inaug.  Diss.  Bern, 
1885.  ’ Pd,  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  25  (1886),  374;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  1071. 


200 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM'  GROUP. 


1S85:  23.  N.  W.  Perry.  Iridium:  its  occurrence,  fusion,  electro- 
plating, and  applications  in  the  arts.  (Bibliography  of 
iridium,  Sch.  of  M.  Quart.  6:  114;  Chem.  News,  51:  32.) 

Ir,  Os. 

School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  6 (1885),  97;  Chem.  News,  51  (1885), 
1,  19,  31,  214,  298;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  814;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885), 
462;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  2044;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  7 (1885),  66;  Chem. 
Ztg.  9 (1885),  435. 

1885:  24.  Johnson,  Matthey  & Co.  The  fusion  and  working  of 
iridium.  (With  phosphorus.)  Ir. 

Chem.  News,  51  (1885),  71;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  2045. 

1885:  25.  — Iridium.  (Note  on  its  use,  etc.)  Ir. 

Scient.  Amer.  52  (1885),  115;  from  Chemist  and  Drug.;  Repert.  anal. 
Chem.  5 (1885),  254. 

1885:  26.  (A  copper-zinc-platinum  alloy  resembling  gold.) 

Pt, 

Techniker,  8 (1885),  199;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  813;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885, 
2048. 

1885:  27.  H.  Roessler.  Tiegelschmelzofen  mit  Luftvorwarmung. 
(For  melting  platinum-gold  alloys.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  257  (1885),  153. 

1885:  28.  J.  W.  Pratt.  Soldering  and  repairing  platinum  vessels  in 
the  laboratory.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  51  (1885),  181,  248;  Ber.  18  (1885),  320;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  258 
(1885),  74;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  1999;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  715;  J.  Amer. 
Chem.  Soc.  7 (1885),  150. 

1885:  29.  G.  T.  H.  Repairing  platinum  vessels.  (Claim  of  priority 
over  J.  W.  Pratt.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  51  (1885),  239. 

1885:  30.  J.  Bosscha  (and  A.  C.  Oudemans).  Relation  des  expe- 
riences qui  ont  servi  a la  construction  de  deux  metres  etalons 
en  platine  iridie,  compares  directement  avec  le  metre  des 
Archives.  Note  II.  A.  C.  Oudemans:  Analyse  du  metal  des. 
regies,  2,  112.  Pt,  Ir  (Ru). 

Ann.  l'Ecole  polyt.  Delft,  1 (1885),  65;  2 (1886),  1. 

1885:  31.  J.  S.  Stas.  Comite  international  des  poids  et  mesures. 
(Use  of  platinum  iridium  for  standards  of  weights  and  meas- 
ures.) Pt,  Ir. 

J.  pharm.  chim.  [5],  12  (.1885),  45;  Chem.  News,  52  (1885),  71. 

1885:  32.  C.  de  la  Harpe.  Triangle  en  platine  pouvant  servir  a 
des  creusets  de  dimensions  different s.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  Mulhouse,  55  (1885),  249;  Chem.  Ztg.  9 (1885),  1209. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


201 


1S85:  33.  L.  Scharnweber.  Kohlenhalterspitze  fur  elektrische 
Bogcnlampen,  aus  Osmiridium,  Platin  oder  Platiniridium. 
(German  patent  35395,  July  12,  1885.)  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Dingl.  pol.  j;  261  (1886),  314. 

1885:  34.  Crut.o’s  Gluhlampe.  (Of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  256  (1885),  353. 

1885:  35.  H.  Roessler.  (Verwendung  von  Metalllosungen  zum 
Farben  von  Thonwaaren.)  Pd,  Ir,  Pt. 

Sprechsaal,  1885,  385;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  258  (1885),  275;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885, 
2112. 

1885:  36.  H.  F.  Read.  (Use  of  fine  platinum  wire  for  cross  in  tele- 
scopes.) Pt. 

Polyt.  Notizbl.  40  (1885),  223;  from  Mining  and  Sci.  Press;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1885,  832;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  2044;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  5 
(1885),  414. 

1885:  37.  F.  Larroque.  (Use  of  palladium-hydrogen  in  photo- 
phone.) Pd. 

Lumiere  electrique,  18  (1885),  532;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  261  (1885),  475. 

1885:  38.  C.  A.  Needham.  Platindruck.  (Very  full  description  of 
this  method  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Photog.  Arch.  26  (1885),  17;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1885,  156;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885, 
2261. 

1885:  39.  M.  Traube.  Ueber  die  Mitwirkung  des  Wassers  bei  der 
langsamen  Verbrennung  des  Zinks,  Bleis,  Eisens,  und  Palla- 
diumwasserstoffs.  Pd. 

Ber.  18  (1885),  1877;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  1105;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885, 
365;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  4 (1885),  675. 

1885 : 40.  II.  Knoblauch.  Ueber  zwei  neue  Verfahren,  den  Polarisa- 
tionswinkel  der  Metalle  zu  finden.  Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  24  (1885),  258;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  336. 

1885:  41.  A.  Schleiermacher.  Ueber  die  Abhangigkeit  der 
Warmestrahlung  von  der  Temperatur  und  das  Stefan’sche 
Gesetz.  (Warmestrahlung  des  Platins.)  Pt. 

Ann  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  26  (1885),  287;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  125. 

1885:  42.  D.  Konowalow.  Ueber  die  Rolle  der  Contactwirkung 
bei  den  Erscheinungen  der  Dissociation.  (Action  of  platinum.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  18  (1885),  2808;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  9;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  224. 

1885:  43.  J.  Trowbridge.  A standard  of  light.  (Platinum  unit.) 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  30  (1885),  128;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  301.  Pt. 


202 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1S85:  44.  F.  Bellamy.  Action  de  quelques  m6taux  [platine]  sur 
la  melange  d’ acetylene  et  d’air.  Pt. 

C.  R.  100  (1885),  1460;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  1885),  951;  Jsb.  (‘hem.  1885, 
665;  Chem.  News,  52  (1885),  82;  .J.  de  pharm.  [5],  12  (1885),  55. 

1885:  45.  H.  Tomlinson.  The  influence  of  stress  and  strain  on  the 
physical  properties  of  matter.  The  alteration  of  the  electrical 
conductivity  of  . . . platinum-iridium  by  longitudinal 

traction.  Pt,  Ir. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  39  (1885),  503:  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  249. 

1885:  46.  L.  Cailletet  and  E.  Bouty.  Sur  la  conductibilite  elec- 
trique  du  mercure  solide  et  des  metaux  purs  aux  basses  tem- 
peratures. (Platinum.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  100  (1885),  1188;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1885),  855;  Jsb.  Chem.  1885,  257. 

1886:  1.  G.  C.  Hoffman.  Native  platinum  from  Canada  (British 
Columbia).  (With  analysis.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Canada,  5 (1887),  3,  17;  Rept.  Geol.  Surv.  Canada,  2 
(1886),  5;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  35  (1888),  257;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  679;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  109;  Neues  Jahrb.  f.  Min.  26,  ii  (1888),  Ret.  386; 
Ztsch.  Kryst.  15  (1888),  128;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  659;  Chem.  Ztg.  13 
(1889),  Rep.  11. 

1886:  la.  V.  Restrepo.  A study  of  the  gold  and  silver  mines  of 
Colombia.  English  translation  by  C.  W.  Fisher.  Colombian 

Consulate,  New  York,  1886.  (Translation  of  1884:  la.)  Pt. 

1886:  2.  J.  Noad.  Improvements  relating  to  the  extraction  or  sepa- 
ration of  gold,  silver,  and  platinum  from  ores  and  other  sub- 
stances, or  products  containing  such  metals.  (English  patent 
6810,  May  20,  1886.  Coat  with  iron  and  remove  with  a 
magnet.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  6 (1887),  516. 

1886:3.  E.  Prost.  Sels  du  platine,  simples  et  doubles.  (Nitrates, 
oxides,  chlorates,  sulphates.) 

Bnl.  Acad.  Belg.  [3],  11  (1886),  414;  Ber.  19  (1886),  666;  Bill.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  46  (1886),  156;  Chem.  News,  54  (1886),  213;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50 
(1886),  987;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  489;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  8 (1886),  176; 
Chem.  Ztg.  10  (1886),  Rep.  195;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [3],  11  (1886),  414. 

1886:  4.  F.  P.  Miles.  On  the  formation  of  platinum  silicide.  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  8 (1886),  428;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  450;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1886,  494. 

1886:  5.  W.  Gibbs.  Further  researches  on  complex  inorganic  acids. 
(Platinoarsenates,  tungstates,  and  molybdates.)  Pt. 

Amer.  ( hem.  J.  8 (1886),  289;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  113;  Jab.  Chem. 
1886,  493. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


203 


1886:  6.  T.  Wilm.  (Ueber  Alkali platincyanure.)  • Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  18,  i (1886),  376;  Ber.  19  (188G),  950;  Bui.  S>  . 
chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  281;  .J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  604;  Jsb.  Chem. 

1886,  490;  Chem.  Industrie,  10  (1887),  59. 

1886:  7.  T.  Wilm.  (Ueber  Haloid additionproducte  von  Kalin m- 
platincyaniire.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  18,  i (1886),  181,  402;  Ber.  19  (1886),  959;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  46  (1886),  826;  50  (1888),  281;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886 > , 605; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  492. 

1886:  8.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Constitution  der  Platinbasen.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  33  (1886),  489;  Ber.  19  (1886),  529;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
50  (1886),  857;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  1601. 

1886:  9.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Rhodium- 
ammoniakverbindungem.  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  34  (1886),  394;  Ber.  20  (1887),  7;  Chem.  News,  54 
(1886),  298;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  113,  114;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  494. 

1886:  10.  J.  D.  van  der  Plants.  Essai  de  calc-ul  des  poids  atomi- 
ques  de  M.  Stas.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [6],  7 (1886),  499;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  26  (1887),  276. 

1886:  11.  H.  Le  Chatelier.  Platine  iridie.  Modification  allotro- 
pique.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  45  (1886),  482. 

1886:  12.  G.  Foussereau.  Sur  la  decomposition  lente  des  chlo- 
rures  dans  leurs  dissolutions  etendues.  (Platinum  and  sodium- 
rhodium  chloride.)  Pt,  Rh. 

C.  R.  103  (1886),  243;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  50  (1886),  975;  Jsb.  them.  1886, 
271. 

1886:  13.  O.  Lehmann.  (Dissociation  of  magnesium  platmocyanide 
in  water.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Kryst.  12  (1886),  377;  Jab.  Chem.  1886,  504. 

1886:  14.  C.  R.  Fresenius.  Trennimg  des  . . . Platins  von  Zinn, 
Antiman  und  Arsen.  (Qualitative.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  25  (1886),  200;  Ber.  19  (1886),  629;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
50  (1886),  651;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  1951;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  18,  ii  (1886), 
254;  Analyst,  11  (1886),  93;  Chem.  Industrie,  9 (1886),  155;  Chem. 
Ztg.  10  (1886),  Rep.  100. 

1886:  15.  P.  J.  Dirvell.  Mode  rapide  de  separer  de  platine  d’avec 
Tantimome,  V arsenique,  et  retain.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  46  (1886),  806;  Ber.  20  (1887),  341;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1887,  97;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  263  (1887),  538;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  28  (1889), 
701;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  1951;  J.  anal.  Chem.  (Hart),  1 (1887),  208, 
Repert.  anal.  Chem.  7 (1887),  248;  Analyst,  12  (1887),  142;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Tad.  6 (1887),  384;  Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  Rep.  4. 


204 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OP  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1886: 


1886: 


1886: 


1886: 


1886: 

1886: 


1886: 


1886: 


1886: 


1886: 


16.  T.  Bailey.  On  the  analysis  of  allo}^s  and  minerals  con-i 

taining  heav3r  metals,  selenium,  tellurium,  etc.  (Separation 
of  metals  of  the  second  group.)  Pt. 

J.  Cliem.  Soc.  49  (1886),  735;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  1950. 

17.  K.  Ulscii.  Notizen  zur  Kjeldahrschen  Stickstoffbestim- 

mungsmethode.  (Use  of  platinum  chloride  in  the  Kjeldahl 
process.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  gesammt.  Brauwesen,  1886,  81;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1886,  375;  1887, 
284;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  863;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  1954. 

18.  F.  Hoppe-Seyler.  Ueber  die  Gahrung  der  Cellulose  mit 

Bildung  von  Methan  und  Kohlensaure.  (Separation  of  methane 
and  Irydrogen  by  palladium,  p.  429.)  Pd  (Pt). 

Ztsch.  physiol.  Chem.  10  (1886),  401;  11  (1887),  257;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52 
(1887),  618. 

19.  A.  Sudakopf.  (Use  of  palladium  asbestos  to  detect 

hydrogen.)  Pd. 

Arch,  fiir  Hygiene,  5 (1886),  166. 

20.  P.  Casamajor.  A platinum  filtering  bulb  for  Dr.  Carmi- 
chael’s system  of  filtration.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  53  (1886),  194;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  8 (1886),  17. 

21.  C.  A.  Paillard.  PaUadiumkupferlegirung.  (A  non- 

magnetizable  alloy  for  watches.  German  patent  38445,  May 
11,  1886.)  Pd  (Pt,  Rh). 

Ber.  20  (1887),  R.  179;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  471;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  264 
(1887),  634;  268  (1888),  189;  270  (1888),  143;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889), 
573;  Rev.  indust.  1888,  127;  Ztsch.  chem.  Indust.  1 (1887),  118;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1888,  2659;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  7 (1887),  466. 

22.  W.  A.  Thoms.  Improvements  in  the  deposition  of  plat- 
inum by  electricity.  (U.  S.  patent  367731;  English  patent  s 

10477,  Aug.  16,  1886.)  Pt.  j 

Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  1026;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  6 (1887),  518. 

23.  H.  II.  Lake.  Improvements  relating  to  the  uniting  of 

platinum  or  silver  or  nickel  or  alloys  of  these  metals.  (English  I 
patent  1473,  Feb.  1,  1886.)  " Pt.  | 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  6 (1887),  293. 

24.  W.  Banks  and  S.  Brierley.  Platindraht,  gliihend  durch  j 

elektrischen  Strom,  zum  Sengen  von  Geweben.  (German 
patent  38266,  July  19,  1886.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  263  (1887),  508. 

25.  E.  Vogel.  (Platin  in  Photograpliie.)  Pt. 

Photog.  Mittheil.  23  (1886),  251,  325;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  264  (1887),  447; 

267  (1888),  221;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2905. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


205 


1886:  26.  Pionchon.  Sur  1’ etude  calorimetrique  des  metaux  aux 
hautes  temperatures.  (Specific  heat  of  platinum-iridium  and 
platinum-palladium  alloys.)  Pt,  Ir,  Pd. 

C.  R.  102  (1886),  675;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  184. 

1886:  27.  E.  Grimaux.  Action  ox3^dante  du  noir  de  platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  45  (1886),  481. 

1886:  28.  T.  Ihmori.  Ueber  die  Aufnahme  des  Quecksilberdampfes 
durch  Platinmohr.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  28  (1886),  81;  Ber.  19  (1886),  382;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  50  (1886),  766;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  468. 

1886:  29.  B.  Dessau.  Ueber  Metallschichten,  welche  durch  Zer- 
stauben  einer  Kathode  entstehen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  29  (1886),  353. 

1886:  30.  E.  van  Aubel.  Note  sur  la  transparence  du  platine. 

Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  Belg.  [3],  11  (1886),  408;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  288;  1888,  2728; 

Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  Rep.  21;  Repert.  f.  Phys.  23  (1887),  537;  Dingl. 

pol.  J.  267  (1888),  239. 

1886:  31.  E.  tax  Aubel.  Quelques  mots  sur  la  transparence  du 
platine  et  des  miroirs  de  fer,  nickel,  cobalt,  obtenus  par 
electrolyse.  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  Belg.  [3],  12  (1886),  665;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  288;  J.  Soc.  Chem. 

Ind.  7 (1888),  215;  Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  71. 

1886:  32.  E.  Warburg  and  T.  Ihmori.  Ueber  das  Gewicht  und 
die  Ursache  der  Wasserhaute  bei  Glas  und  anderen  Korper. 
(Platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  27  (1886),  481;  Jsb.  Chem.  1886,  158. 

1886:  33.  F.  von  Hefner-Alteneck.  (Violle’s  Platineinheit  des 
Lichtes.)  Pt. 

J.  f.  Gasb el euchtung , 16  (1886),  3;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  262  (1886),  25. 

1886:  34.  0.  G.  Knott.  On  the  electrical  properties  of  hydrogen- 
ized palladium.  Pd. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  33  (1886),  171;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl. 

12  (1888),  114;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  373. 

1886:  35.  W.  Peddie.  On  the  increase  of  electrolytic  polarization 
with  zinc.  (Resistance  of  platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  14  (1886),  87,  221;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl. 

12  (1888),  381;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  394. 

1886:  36.  E.  Drechsel.  (Platinmohr  als  Electrode.)  Pt. 

Sep.  Abdruck,  Beiirag  f.  Physiol.  Ludwig  Festschrift,  Leipzig;  Jsb. 

Chem.  1886,  279. 


206 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1886: 

1886: 

1887: 

1887: 

1887: 

1887: 

1887: 

1887: 

1887: 

1887: 

1887: 


87.  Gautier.  Couple  zinc-platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  45  (1886),  418. 

38.  W.  Case.  Transformation  of  heat  energy  into  electric 
energy.  (Carbon,  platinum,  chloric  acid  element.  Patents 
334345,  334346,  334347,  June  29,  1886.)  Pt, 

N.  Y.  Elect.  Rev.  8 (1886),  3;  Electrotech.  Ztsch.  8 (1887),  506;  Aim. 
indust.  1887,  490;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  12  (1888),  120; 
Bingl.  pol . J.  267  (1888),  95;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  348. 

1.  G.  M.  Dawson.  Mineral  wealth  of  British  Columbia: 

platinum  and  osmiridium.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Ann.  Rept,  Geo!.  Surv.  Canada,  3 (1887),  R.  104,  156. 

2.  C.  C.  Hutchins  and  E.  L.  Holden.  On  the  existence  of 

certain  elements,  together  with  the  discovery  of  platinum  in 
the  sun.  Pt. 

Proc.  Amer.  Acad.  Sci.  23  (1887),  14;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  34  (1887),  451; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  1065;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  24  (1887),  325;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1887,  343. 

3.  B.  T.  Martin.  (Iridium  in  bullion  at  the  New  York  mint; 
from  Report  Director  Mint,  1885.)  Ir,  Os,  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Berg-  und  Htitten.  Ztg.  46  (1887),  255;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  1100; 
Repert.  anal.  Chem.  7 (1887),  454;  Chem.  Industrie,  10  (1887),  350. 

4.  H.  Malbot.  Sur  le  chlorhydrate  et  le  chlorplatinate  de 

diisobutylamine  et  le  chlorplatinate  de  triisobutylamine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  104  (1887),  366;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  461. 

5.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Kobaltammo- 

niakverbindungen.  (Chlorplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  35  (1887),  417;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  775;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1887,  451. 

6.  E.  Pomey.  Stir  le  chlorure  phosphoplatineux.  (Phos- 

phoplatinous  propyl  ester.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  104  (1887),  364;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  330;  Chem.  News,  55  (1887), 
117;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  458;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  612. 

7.  H.  Londahl.  Platinasulfinforeningar  af  normalbutyl,  iso- 
butyl och  benzyl.  (See  C.  W.  Blomstrand,  1888:  15.)  Pt. 

Ars-skrift  Univ.  Lund,  24,  ii  (1887-88),  4;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  38  (1888), 
512;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  189;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2212. 

8.  F.  W.  Semmler.  Ueber  das  fttherische  Oel  von  Allium 
ursinum  L.  (3.  Platinverbindungen  des  Yinylsulfids,  p.  132.) 

Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  241  (1887),  90;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  1089. 

9.  T.  Wilm.  (Kalium  platinocyanid.)  (Addition  products 

with  nitric  acid,  hydrogen  peroxide,  etc.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  19,  i (1887),  243;  Ber.  20  (1887),  R.  313;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1887,  689;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  635;  Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  874. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


207 


1SS7: 


1887: 


1887: 


1887: 


1887: 


1887: 


1887: 


1887: 


10.  A.  Cossa.  Ricerche  sopra  le  propriety  di  alcuni  com- 
post! ammoniacali  del  platino.  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  sci.  Torino,  22  (1887),  323;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  17  (3887),  3; 
Ber.  20  (1887),  462;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  330;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887), 
642;  jsb.  Chem.  1887,  611;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  19,  ii  (1887),  361; 
Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  Rep.  138. 

11.  L.  Reese.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Phtalsaureanhy- 

drid  auf  Amidosauren.  (a-Leucinphtaloylsaures  Platodiam 
monium,  p.  19.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  242  (1887),  1;  J.  Chem.  So c.  54  (1888),  148. 

12.  PI.  Alexander.  Ueber  hydroxylaminhaltige  Platin- 

basen.  Inaug.  Diss.  Konigsberg,  1887.  Pi. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  246  (1888),  239;  Ber.  21  (1888),  594;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  2 (1889),  22;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887, 1254;  1888,  1027;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  54  (1888),  425;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 661;  Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  Rep.  190. 

13.  W.  Dittmar  and  J.  McArthur.  Critical  experiments  on 

the  cbloroplatinate  method  for  the  determination  of  potas- 
sium, rubidium  and  ammonium;  and  a redetermination  of  the 
atomic  weight  of  platinum.  (Atomic  weight  of  platinum 

= 195.5.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  6 (1887),  799;  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  23  (1887),  561; 
Ber.  21  (1888),  412;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  425;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888, 
302;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  28  (1889),  761;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1888,  79; 
Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  2 (1888),  553;  J.  anal.  Chem.  (Hart),  2 (1888), 
429;  Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  Rep.  142. 

14.  J.  H.  Debray.  Sur  quelcpies  alliages  cristallises  des 

metaux  du  platine  et  de  retain.  Pt,  Rli,  Ir,  Ru,  Os. 

C.  R.  104  (1887),  1470;  Ber.  20  (1887),  454;  Bill.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  48  (1887), 
648;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  780;  Chem.  News,  56  (1887),  308;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  52  (1887),  779;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  612;  Ztsch.  chem.  Indust.  1 
(1887),  331,  Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  Rep.  138. 

15.  J.  H.  Debray.  Note  sur  les  produits  d’alteration  de 

quelques  alliages  par  les  acides.  (Alloys  of  platinum  metals 
with  tin,  etc.)  Pt,  Rh,  Ru,  Ir. 

C.  R.  104  (1887),  1577;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  48  (1887),  649;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1887  , 840;  J.  Chem.  Soc,  52  (1887),  779;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  613. 

16.  J.  H.  Debray.  Note  sur  les  residues  qui  resultent  de 
Paction  des  acides  sur  les  alliages  des  metaux  du  platine. 

Pt,  Os,  Ir,  Ru,  Rh. 

C.  R.  104  (1887),  1667;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  48  (1887),  650;  Chem.  News,  56 
(1887),  23;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  900;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  615. 

16a.  E.  Maumene.  Alliages  de  platine,  fer,  et  cuivre.  Pt. 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  47  (1887),  39;  Ber.  20  R.  (1887),  342;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1887,  139;  Chem.  News,  55  (1887),  81;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  778; 
Chem.  Industrie,  10  (1887),  103. 


208  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1887:  17.  C.  M.  Guldberg.  Metallernes  kritiske  Temperaturer. 
(Critical  temperature  of  platinum  and  palladium,  theoretical.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Forli.  Yid.  Selsk.  Christiania,  1887,  4;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chcm.  1 (1887),  231. 

1887:  18.  E.  Duclaux.  Sur  les  actions  comparees  de  la  chaleur  et 
de  la  lumiere  solaire.  (On  platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  104  (1887),  294;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  411. 

1887:  19.  V.  Meyer.  Zur  Kenntniss  einiger  Metalle,  (Action  of 
germanium  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ber.  20  (1887),  497;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  378. 

1887:  20.  S.  Cooke.  On  the  reducing  action  of  hydrogen  in  the 
presence  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Phil.  Soc.  Glasgow,  18  (1887),  285;  Chem.  News,  58  (1888),  103; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  1245;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  28  (1889),  329;  Ztsch. 
physik.  Chem.  3 (1889),  239. 

1887:  21.  E.  H.  Keiser.  On  the  combustion  of  weighed  quanti- 
ties of  hydrogen  and  the  atomic  weight  of  oxygen.  (Use  of 
palladium-hydrogen  for  weighing  hydrogen.)  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  10  (1888),  249;  Ber.  20  (1887),  2323;  22  (1889),  474;  Chem. 
News,  59  (1889),  262;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  29  (1890),  247;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1887,  386;  1888,  98. 

1887:  22.  F.  Osmond  and  Werth.  Sur  les  residues  que  Ton  ex- 
trait des  aciers  et  des  zincs  par  Faction  des  acides.  (Graphi- 
toidal  plates  from  steel  are  explosive  even  when  no  platinum 
is  in  the  steel.)  (Observations  of  Faraday.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  104  (1887),  1800;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  894;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  616. 

1887:  23.  H.  N.  Warren.  Detection  and  estimation  of  thallium 
in  platinum.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  55  (1887),  241;  Ber.  20  (1887),  483;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887, 
875;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  264  (1887),  635;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  702;  Ztsch. 
Chem.  Indust.  2 (1887),  38;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  7 (1887),  414;  Chem. 
Ztg.  11  (1887),  Rep.  144. 

1887:  24.  T.  Rosenbladt.  Ueber  Scheidung  des  Quecksilber  und 
Palladiums  von  einander  und  von  Blei,  Kupfer  und  Wismuth. 

Pd. 

Ztsch.  anal  Chem.  26  (1887),  15;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  152;  Chem.  News, 
55  (1887),  72;  Ber.  20  (1887),  396;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  302;  Repert, 
anal.  Chem.  7 (1887),  79;  Chem.  Industrie,  10  (1887),  191;  Chem.  Ztg. 
11  (1887),  Rep.  51. 

1887:  25.  G.  Kruss  and  L.  Hoffman.  Untersuchung  fiber  das 
Gold.  (IV.  Quantitative  Bestimmung  des  Goldes  und  seine 
Trennung  in  Besonderen  von  den  Platinmet alien,  p.  66.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  238  (1887),  30;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  554;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  27  (1888),  66. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


209 


1887:  26.  W.  Bettel.  Separation  of  gold  from  platinum  metals. 

Pt,  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  56  (1887),  133;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  1084;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1887,  1362. 

1887 : 27.  H.  Pirngruber.  Separation  of  platinum  from  gold  and 
other  rare  metals.  (Fusion  with  zinc.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Eng.  and  Mining  J.  44  (1887),  256,  326;  Ber.  21  (1888),  312;  Berg- und 
Hiitten.  Ztg.  47  (1888),  29;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  84;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
54  (1888),  656;  Ztsch.  chem.  Indust.  2 (1887),  306;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 

2560. 

1887 : 28.  F.  Wyatt.  Separation  of  metals  from  platinum  ores. 
(Reply  to  Id.  Pirngruber.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Eng.  and  Mining  J.  44  (1887),  273;  Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  Rep.  235. 

1887:  29.  C.  Reinhardt.  Ueber  die  Aufschliessung  in  Sauren  un- 
loslicher  Platinlegirungen.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  52;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  230;  Chem.  Industrie, 
10  (1887),  192;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  6 (1887),  389. 

1887:30.  E.  J.  Houston.  On  palladium  alloys  in  watches.  (Pail- 
lard’s  nonmagnetizable  alloy.)  Pd. 

Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  24  (1887),  419;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  95  (1888), 
. 161,  238;  Chem.  News,  58  (1888),  100;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  1329; 
Dingl.  pol.  J.  270  (1888),  143;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2659. 

1887:  31.  H.  Ostermann  and  A.  Prip.  Platinlegirung.  (German 
patent  44473,  Dec.  18,  1887.)  Pt. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  865;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2659;  Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  1426. 

1887:  32.  Cheap  method  of  platinizing  metals.  Pt. 

Scient.  Amer.  56  (1887),  169;  from  Le  Genie  civil;  Indust.  Blat.  24 
(1887),  207;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1887,  971. 

1887:  33.  ' W.  L.  Dudley.  Electro-deposition  of  iridium.  (De- 
scription of  patent.)  Ir. 

Electrical  Rev.  20  (1887),  604;  Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  Rep.  199. 

1887:  34.  (Description  of  platinum  mirror  on  glass  made 

by  Dode  in  1865,  which  is  still  intact.)  Pt. 

Scient.  Amer.  57  (1887),  56;  from  La  Nature;  Repert.  anal.  Chem.  7 
(1887),  720. 

1887:35.  Bright  Platinum  Plating  Co.  (Ltd.),  London.  Neuerung 
in  dem  Platinirverfahrcn  durch  Elektricitat.  (German  patent 
42418,  Feb.  3,  1887.)  Pt. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  200;  Chem.  Industrie,  11  (1888),  229;  Chem.  Ztg.  12 
(1888),  321. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 14 


210 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1887:  36.  Erlich  and  Storck.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  von 
druckfahig  Glanzplatin.  (German  patent  44044,  June  30, 
1887.)  Pt. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  878. 

1887:  37.  Erlich  and  Storck.  Neuerungen  im  Verfahren  zur 
Herstellung  von  . . . Glanzplatin.  (German  patent  46542, 
Nov.  20,  1887.)  Pt. 

Ber.  22  (1889),  281. 

1887:  38.  H.  Schwarz.  Herstellung  venetianischer  Mosaiken  und 
Glasstudien.  (Use  of  platinum  foil  on  “Deckglaser.”)  Pt. 

Verh.  Ver.  Beford.  Gewerbfieiss,  1887,  204;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  267  (1888),  326. 

1887:  39.  Himly,  Leiser,  and  Bardtholdt.  Verfahren  zur  Her- 
stellung eines  farbenwechselnden  Ueberzuges.  (Magnesium 
platinocyanide  as  sympathetic  ink.  German  patent  42312, 
May  6,  1887.)  Pt. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  205. 

1887:  40.  K.  Kraut.  Platinum  oder  Palladium  in  ammoniakhal- 
tigem  Sauerstoff.  (Oxidation.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber^20  (1887),  1113;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  34  (1887),  64;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[2],  48  (1887),  127;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887),  635. 

1887:  41.  T.  Ihmori.  Ueber  die  Aufnahme  des  Wasserdampfes 
durch  feste  Korper.  (Platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  [2],  31  (1887),  1006;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888), 
24;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  101. 

1887:  42.  R.  H.  M.  Bosanquet.  On  the  production  of  sudden 
changes  in  the  torsion  of  a wire  by  change  in  temperature. 
(Platinum  wire.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  24  (1887),  160;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  226. 

1887:  43.  J.  Violle.  Comparaison  des  energies  rayonnees  par  le 
platine  et  Y argent  fondants.  Pt. 

C.  It.  105  (1887),  163;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  34  (1887),  227;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
52  (1887),  1010;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  342. 

1887 : 44.  J.  T.  Bottomley.  On  (heat)  radiations  from  dull  and 
bright  surfaces  (of  platinum).  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  42  (1887),  433;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  336. 

1887:  45.  H.  Haga.  Etude  experimentale  sur  I’effet  thermo-61ec- 
trique,  decouvert  par  Thompson.  (La  mesure  de  la  convection 
electrique  de  la  chaleur  dans  le  platine.)  Pt. 

Ann.  l’Ecole  polyt.  Delft,  3 (1887),  43;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl. 
11  (1887),  593;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  295. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  211 

1887:46. (Platinum  in  photography.) 

Brit.  J.  Photog.  28  (1887),  30;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  267  (1888),  221;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1888,  2905. 

1887:47.  G.  Pizzighelli.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Photog.  Corresp.  24  (1887),  409;  Jahrbuch  f.  Phot.  1888,  335;  Chem.  Cen- 
trbl.  1889,  i,  87;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  267  (1888),  222;  Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887), 
Rep.  296;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  95  (1888),  77;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2905. 

1887:  48.  A.  Pringle.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Brit.  J.  Phot.  28  (1887),  2;  Photog.  Wochenbl.  1887,  91;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  267 
(1888),  221;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2905. 

1887:  49.  W.  Willis.  Improvements  relating  to  photochemical 
printing.  (Platinum  prints.  English  patent  16003,  Nov.  13, 
1887.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  7 (1888),  132. 

1887:  50.  Bory.  (Platinpapier  zum  Restauriren.)  Pt. 

Phot.  Rundschau;  Phot.  Wochenbl.  13  (1887),  298;  Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887), 
Rep.  236. 

1887:  51.  (Sepiabraun  Platindruck.)  Pt. 

Phot.  Rundschau,  1 (1887),  224;  Chem.  Ztg.  11  (1887),  Rep.  219. 

1887:  52.  J.  Miesler.  Ueber  elektromotorische  Verdiinnungscon- 

stanten.  (Platinum  chloride,  p.  369.)  Pt. 

Monatsh.  Chem.  8 (1887),  365;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  287. 

1887:  53.  H.  Le  Chatelier.  Thermoelement  aus  Palladium-Eisen, 
Platinum,  etc.  Pd,  Pt,  Ir,  Rh, 

J.  de  phys.  [2],  6 (1887),  23;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  11  (1887),  351; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  204. 

1887:  54.  C.  R.  A.  Wright  and  C.  Thompson.  Note  on  the  devel- 
opment of  voltaic  electricity  by  atmospheric  oxidation.  (On 
platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  42  (1887),  212;  Chem.  News,  55  (1887),  167;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1887,  289. 

1887 : 55.  J.  T.  Bottomly.  On  thermal  radiation  in  absolute  meas- 
ure. (From  platinum  wire.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  42  (1887),  357;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  209. 

1887:  56.  W.  II.  Preece.  On  the  heating  effects  of  electric  cur- 
rents. Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  43  (1887),  280;  44  (1888),  109;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 
370. 

1887:57.  F.  Streintz.  Experiment alun tersuchungen  iiber  die  gal- 
vanische  Polarisation.  (Palladium,  p.  843;  platinum,  846.) 

Pd,  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  96,  ii  (1887),  838;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  33 
(1888),  465;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  394;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  544. 


212 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1887:  58.  C.  Fromme.  Ueber  die  durch  kleine  electromotorische 
Krafte  erzeugte  galvanische  Polarisation.  (In  palladium  and 
platinum  electrodes.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  30  (1887),  320,  503;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  52  (1887), 
541. 

1887 : 59.  J.  H.  Koosen.  Ueber  die  Eigenschaften  der  Alkalien,  die 
electromotorische  Kraft  des  Zinks  zu  erhohen.  (Zinc-bromine - 
platinum  element.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  32  (1887),  508;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  210; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  281. 

1887:  60.  A.  Oberbeck.  Ueber  die  electromotorischen  Krafte 
d tinner  Schichten  und  ihre  Beziehung  zur  Molecularphysik. 
(Platinum  plates.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  31  (1887),  337;  Jsb.  Chem.  1887,  283. 

1888:  1.  S.  Kulibin.  Ausbeute  an  Edelmetallen  in  Kussland  in 
1885.  Pt. 

Dingl . pol.  J.  267  (1888),  188;  Chem.  Indust.  11  (1888),  383. 

1888:  la.  A.  M.  Saytzeff.  (On  mineral  localities  in  the  Urals.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Russ.  Geol.  Commission,  vol.  7,  265. 

1888:  lb.  Krotow.  (Geologic  researches  on  the  western  slope  of 
the  Ural,  in  the  vicinity  of  Tscherdyn  and  Solikamsk).  Pt. 

Trans.  Russ.  Geol.  Commission,  vol.  6. 

1888:2.  K.  Seubert.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Platins  (194.3). 

Pt. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  2179;  Bull.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  680;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54 
(1888),  1043;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  110;  J.  anal.  Chem.  (Hart),  2 (1888), 429. 

1888:  3.  K.  Seubert.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Osmiums 

(190.8).  Os. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  1839;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  363;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3], 
37  (1889),  75;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  964;  Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  179; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  921;  Ztsch.  anal,  Chem.  28  (1889),  139;  Ztsch. 
angew.  Chem.  (1888),  422;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 110;  J.  anal.  Chem.  (Hart), 
2 (1888),  427;  Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  Rep.  181. 

1888:  4.  R.  Engel.  Platine  chlorure  neutre.  (Normal  platinic 

chloride.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  100;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  1153;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  56  (1889),  20;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  661;  Chem.  Indust.  11  (1888), 
541;  Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  Rep.  229. 

1888:  5.  F.  Stolba.  (Chlorplatinic  acid  from  ammonium  chloro- 

platinate.)  Pt. 

Listy  chemike  (Prag),  12,  270;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  1024. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


213 


1888:6.  G.  J.  Laird.  (Crystallization  of  methyl- and  ethylsulphin- 
chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Kryst.  14,  1;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  12  (1888),  449,  Chem. 
Centrbl . 1888,  539;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  1418. 

1888:  7.  H.  Klinger  and  A.  Maassen.  Ueber  einige  Sulfinverbin- 
dungen  und  die  Valenz  des  Schwefels.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 
Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  243  (1888),  193;  J.  Chem.  Soe.  54  (1888),  357. 

1888:  9.  M.  Weibull.  Combinaisons  platiniques  des  sulfures  alco- 
holiques.  (Crystallography.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Kryst.  14,  116;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  369;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1889,  i,  10;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  1419. 

1888:  10.  E.  Leidie.  Sur  le  sesquichlorure  de  rhodium.  Rh. 

C.  R.  106  (1888),  1076;  Ber.  21  (1888),  347;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  50  (1888), 
658,  664;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  825;  Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  37;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  790;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  665. 

1888:  11.  E.  Leidie.  Sur  le  sesquisulfure  de  rhodium.  Rh. 

C.  R.  106  (1888),  1533;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  664;  Ber.  21  (1888), 
509;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  962;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  919;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1888,  665;  Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  37. 

1888:  12.  E.  Leidie.  Recherches  sur  quelques  sels  de  rhodium. 
(Chlorides,  sulphates,  oxalates.)  Rh. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [6],  17  (1889),  257;  C.  R.  107  (1888),  234;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  664;  Ber.  22  (1889),  225;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888, 
1167;  Chem.  News,  58  (1888),  71;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  1256;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1889,  225;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  18,  Rep.  216. 

1888:  13.  J.  H.  Debray  and  A.  Joly.  Recherches  sur  le  ruthe- 
nium. (Oxidation  du  ruthenium  et  dissociation  de  son 
bioxyde,  p.  100;  acide  hyperruth enique,  328;  rutheniates  et 
heptarutheniates,  1494.)  Ru. 

C.  R.  106  (1888),  100,  328,  1494;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  49  (1888),  241; 
Ber.  21  (1888),  193,  508;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  220,  462,  963;  Chem. 
News,  57  (1888),  51,  80,  241;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  426,  559,  920; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  669,  672,  674;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  20,  ii  (1888),  96; 
Chem.  Ztg.  12  (1888),  286. 

1888:  14.  A.  Joly.  Sur  les  combinaisons  que  forme  le  bioxyde 
d’ azote  avec  les  chlororuthenites  et  sur  le  poids  atomique  du 
ruthenium.  (Nitrosochlorides.  Atomic  weight,  101.5.)  Ru. 

C.  R.  107  (1888),  994;  Ber.  22  (1889),  92;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  127; 
Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  11;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  352;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  31  (1892),  364;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  677;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  21, 
ii  (1889),  116;  J.  anal.  Chem.  3 (1889),  352;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  5. 


214  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1888:  15.  C.  W.  Blomstrand.  Ueber  Schwefelplatinbasen  mil 
versehiedenen  Alkoholradikalen.  (With  work  of  Enebuske, 
Rudelius,  and  Londahl,  1885:  12;  1885:  13;  1887:  7.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  38  (1888),  345,  352,  497,  523;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3], 
2 (1889),  820;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  68,  69,  189,  214;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
56  (1889),  230,  367,  368;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2202,  2205,  2207,  2212,  2215. 

1888:  16.  T.  Wilm.  (Zum  chemischen  Verhalten  des  Kaliumpla- 
tincyaniirs.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  20,  i (1888),  444,  447;  Ber.  21  (1888),  1434;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [2],  50  (1888),  282;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  825,  1167;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  931;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  717. 

1888:  17.  M.  Freund.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  Platincyanathyls.  Pt. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  937;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  575;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888), 
571;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  717. 

1888:  18.  II.  G.  Soderbaum.  Bidrag  till  kannedomen  om  plato- 
oxalatens  reaktions  forhallanden.  Pt. 

Oefvers.  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  45  (1888),  123;  Ber.  21  (1888),  567. 

1888:  19.  E.  Koefoed.  Studier  i Platosoforbindelserne.  (Plati- 
num. bases.)  Pt. 

Skriften  Danske  Yid.  Selsk.  Kjobenhavn  [6],  4 (1888),  391. 

1888:  20.  W.  Haberland  and  G.  Hanekop.  Schwefligsaures 
Platosammoniumoxydnatron.  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  245  (1888),  235;  Ber.  21  (1888),  468;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  2 (1889),  21;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  824;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54 
(1888),  790;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  665. 

1888:  21.  J.  F.  Heyes.  On  valency,  validity,  and  residual  affinity. 
(Valence  of  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Os,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Ru. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  25  (1888),  297;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  80. 

1888:  22.  E.  Schurmann.  Ueber  die  Verwandschaft  der  Schwe- 
felmetalle  zum  Schwefel.  (Palladium.)  Inaug.  Diss.  Tu- 
bingen, 1888.  Pd. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  249  (1888),  326;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  468; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  10. 

1888:  23.  T.  Gerlach.  Specifische  Gewichte  wasseriger  Losungen. 
(Platinum  chloride  solution,  p.  279.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  27  (1888),  271. 

1888:  24.  W.  Hampe.  Ueber  die  electrolytische  Leitungsfahigkeit 
der  Haloid verbindungen.  (Of  platinum  compounds.) 

Pt,  Os,  Pd,  Ir,  Ru. 

Chem.  Ztg.  12,(1888),  171;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  890. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


215 


1888:  25.  P.  Walden.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  der  Molecular- 
grossen  von  Salzen  aus  der  elektrischen  Leitfahigkeit  ihrer 
wasserigen  Losungen.  (Chloroplatinic  and  platinocyanic 
acids,  p.  73.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  2 (1888),  49;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  440;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  54  (1888),  1008;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  385. 

1888:  26.  F.  Rudorff.  Zur  Constitution  der  Losungen.  (Chlorpla- 
tinates  and  platinocyanides.)  Pt.\ 

Ber.  21  (1888),  4,  1882,  3044;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  342;  56  (1889), 

98;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  244. 

1888:  27.  J.  M.  Crafts.  Sur  la  purification  du  mercure.  (Action 
of  mercury  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [2],  49  (1888),  856;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  17;  J.  Frank. 

Inst.  [3],  93  (1888),  419;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  648. 

1888:  28.  C.  Barfoed.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  der  Quecksilberoxy- 
dulsalze  gegen  Natron  und  Ammoniak.  (Reduction  of  plati- 
num chloride  by  mercury  vapor  and  hence  a reagent  for  mer- 
cury vapor,  p.  465.) 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2]  38  (1888),  441;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  650. 

1888:  29.  W.  R.  Hodgkinson  and  F.  K.  S.  Lowndes.  On  the 
action  of  incandescent  platinum  wire  on  gases  and  vapours. 

Pt. 

Chem.  News,  58  (1888),  223.;  Ber.  22  (1889),  64;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888, 

1525;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  20  208;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  660. 

1888:  30.  A.  Berliner.  Ueber  die  katalytische  Wirkung  der 
Metalle  auf  Knallgas  und  die  Occlusion  des  Wasserstoffs. 
Inaug.  Diss.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  35  (1888),  791;  Ber.  22  (1889),  125;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  1889,  i,  6;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  206;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 

28  (1889),  329;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  42. 

1888:  31.  A.  Berliner.  Ueber  das  Zerstauben  gliihender  Metalle. 
(Palladium,  platinum.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  33  (1888),  289;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  174. 

1888:  32.  H.  Kayser.  Zur  Zerstauben  gluhenden  Platins.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  34  (1888),  607;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  1014; 

Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  175;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  26  (1888),  393. 

1888:33.  L.  L.  de  Koninck  and  A.  Lecremier.  Qualitative  Tren- 
nung  des  . . . Platins  von  Arsen,  Antimon  und  Zinn.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  27  (1888),  462;  Ber.  21  (1888),  672;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1888,  688,  1106;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  1344;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2560; 

Rev.  univ.  des  mines,  1888,  238;  Chem.  News,  58  (1888),  172;  J. 

Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  21,  ii  (1889),  59;  Analyst,  13  (1888),  118;  Chem. 

Ztg.  12  (1888),  Rep.  99;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  7 (1888),  693;  J.  Amer. 

Chem.  Soc.  10  (1888),  156. 


216  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

18S8:  34.  L.  L.  de  Koninck.  Mittel  um  geschmolzene  Massen  aus 
den  Platintiegeln  herauszubringen.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1888,  569;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  1521;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  29  (1890),  165;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  2609;  Rev.  univ.  des  mines, 
1888,  Oct.;  Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  121;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  7 (1888), 
869;  Chem.  Industrie,  11  (1888),  560;  Analyst,  13  (1888),  216. 

1888:  35.  G.  Kassner.  Ueber  Aschenanalysen.  (Wetting  with 
platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

“P.  Ztg.”  33  (1888),  781;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  144;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889, 
2308. 

1888:  36.  W.  L.  Dudley.  Einige  Modificationen  in  den  Methoden 
der  organischen  Verbrennungsanalyse.  (Use  of  platinum 

tubes.)  Pt. 

Ber.  21  (1888),  3172;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  190;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 
2561. 

1888:37.  L.  L.  de  Koninck.  (Weighing  of  platinichlorides.)  Pt. 
Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1888,  427;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  7 (1888),  693. 

1888:  38.  P.  Vieth.  On  the  wear  and  tear  of  platinum  dishes.  Pt. 

Analyst,  13  (1888),  122;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1888,  453;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1888,  1147. 

1888:  39.  H.  N.  Morse  and  W.  M.  Burton.  On  the  supposed  disso- 
ciation of  zinc  oxide  and  the  condition  of  the  atmosphere 
within  a platinum  vessel  heated  by  a gas  flame.  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  10  (1888),  148;  Chem.  News,  57  (1888),  175;  J.  Cheir. 
Soc.  54  (1888),  652;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1888,  331. 

1888:  40.  W.  Lenz.  Note  fiber  ein  Platinfilter.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  27  (1888),  573. 

1888:  41.  I.  Klemencic.  Untersuchungen  fiber  die  Eignung  des 
Platiniridiundrahtes  und  andere  Legirungen  zur  Aniertigung 
von  Normalwiderstandeseinheiten.  Pt,  Ir. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Ber.  97,  ii  (1888),  838;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  369;  Chem. 
Ztg.  12  (1888),  1080. 

1888:  42.  S.  P.  Thompson.  Galvanischer  Platinfiberzug.  Pt. 

Centrbl.  f.  Electrotech.  10  (1888),  802;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl. 
13  (1889),  237;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  2625. 

1888:  43.  F.  Braun.  Elektrisches  Pyrometer.  Pt. 

Elektrotech.  Ztsch.  9 (1888),  421;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1888,  570;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1888,  371. 

1888:44.  W.  von  Uljanin.  Ueber  die  bei  Beleuchtung  entstehende 
electromotorische  Kraft  im  Selen.  (Use  and  preparation  of 
platinized  glass,  p.  244.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  34  (1888),  241;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888), 
883;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  365. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  217 

1888 : 45.  L.  Vidal  and  E.  Vogel.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Jahrb.  f.  Photog.  1888,  385;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  267  (1888),  220;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1888,  2905. 

1888:  46.  Reynolds.  (Toning  with  platinum  chloride.) 

Photog.  Corresp.  25  (1888),  260;  from  Bui.  Soc.  fran£. ; Chem.  Ztg.  12 
(1888),  Rep.  172;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  7 (1888),  588. 

1888 : 47.  E.  Rehkuh.  Die  elastische  Nachwirkung  bei  Silber,  Glas, 
Kupfer,  Gold  und  Platin,  insbesondere  die  Abhangigkeit 
derselben  von  der  Temperatur.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  35  (1888),  476;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  73. 

1888:  48.  W.  C.  Roberts-Austen.  On  certain  mechanical  proper- 
ties of  metals,  considered  in  relation  to  the  periodic  law. 
(Tensile  strength  and  elongation.)  Pd,  Rh. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  43  (1888),  425;  Chem.  News,  57  (1888),  133; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  105;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  7;  Iron,  1888,  462; 
J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  8 (1889),  52. 

1888:  49.  C.  Barus.  Maxwell’s  theory  of  the  viscosity  of  solids 
and  certain  features  of  its  physical  verification.  (Viscosity  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  36  (1888),  178;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  26  (1888),  183;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1888,  258. 

1888:  50.  J.  Trowbridge  and  W.  C.  Sabine.  Selective  absorption 
of  metals  (platinum  and  palladium)  for  ultra-violet  light. 

Pt,  Pd. 

Proc.  Amer.  Acad.  Sci.  23  (1888),  299;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  26  (1888),  316; 
Chem.  News,  58  (1888),  216;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  443;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56 
(1889),  1. 

1888:  51.  H.  F.  Weber.  Beginn  des  Gliihens  fester  Korper.  Pt. 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1888,  772;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  332. 

1888:  52.  E.  Liebenthal.  (Siemen’s  Platinnormallampe.)  Pt. 
Elec  trot.  1888,  445;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1888,  609. 

1888:  53.  A.  Kundt.  Ueber  die  Brechungsexponenten  der  Metalle. 
(Platinum.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1888,  255;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  34  (1888), 
469;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  26  (1888),  1;  Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  [3],  20  (1889), 
37;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  997;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  424. 

LS88:  54.  A.  Kundt.  Ueber  die  Aenderung  der  Lichtgeschwindig- 
keit  in  den  Metallen  mit  der  Temperatur.  (Platinum.)  Pt. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1888,  1387;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  36  (1889), 
824;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  749. 

1888:  55.  C.  Barus.  Certain  generic  electrical  relations  of  the 
alloys  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  36  (1888),  427;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  201. 


218 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1888:  58.  C.  H.  Draper.  On  the  polarization  of  platinum  plates. 
(In  sulphuric  acid.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  25  (1888),  487;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  392. 

1888:  57.  C.  Fromme.  Ueber  das  Maximum  der  galvanischen 
Polarisation  von  Platinelectroden  in  Schwefelsaure.  Pt. 


Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  33  (1888),  80;  38  (1889),  362;  39  (1890),  187; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  390;  58  (1890),  316,  675;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888, 
292;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  28  (1889),  495. 

1888:  58.  F.  Exner  and  J.  Tuma.  Studien  zur  chemischen  Theorie 
des  galvanischen  Elementes.  (Potential  difference  with  differ- 
ent solutions  and  platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Monatsh.  der  Chem.  9 (1888),  903;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  456;Sitzber. 
Akad.  Wien,  97,  ii  (1888),  917;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  350. 

1888:  59.  G.  Gore.  Effect  of  chlorine  on  the  electromotive  force  of 
a voltaic  couple  (of  platinum-magnesium). 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  44  (1888),  151;  Chem.  News,  57  (1888),  184; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  90;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  353. 

1888:  60.  E.  Wiedemann  and  H.  Ebert.  Ueber  electrische  Entla- 
dung  in  Gasen  und  Flammen.  (With  platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  35  (1888),  209;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  40. 

1888:  61.  R.  Nahrwold.  Ueber  die  Electricitatsentwicklung  an 
einem  gliihenden  Platindraht. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  35  (1888),  107;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  54  (1888),  1231; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  343. 

1888:  62.  H.  Jahn.  Experiment aluntersuchungen  liber  die  an  der 
Grenzflache  heterogener  Leiter  auftretenden  localen  Warmeer- 
scheinungen.  (Peltier’s  effect.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  34  (1888),  755;  Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  97,  ii 
(1888),  546;  Jsb.  Chem.  1888,  357. 


1889:  1. 


H.  L.  Wells.  Sperrylite,  a new  mineral.  (Arsenide  of 
platinum.)  Pt,  Rh,  Pd. 

S.  L.  Penfield.  On  the  crystalline  form  of  sperrylite. 
Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  37  (1889),  67;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  471;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1889,  i,  303;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  588. 


1889:  2.  F.  W.  Clarke  and  C.  Catlett.  A platiniferous  nickel  ore 
from  Canada.  Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  37  (1889),  372;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  835;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  ; Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  294;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  8 

(1889),  314. 


1889 : 3.  G.  C.  Hoffmann.  Annotated  list  of  the  minerals  occurring 
in  Canada.  (Iridosmine,  p.  87;  native  platinum,  95;  sperry- 
lite, 100.)  Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Canada,  7 (1889),  3,  65;  Berg- und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  48 
(1889),  62;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  450. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


219 


1SS9:  4. — Statistique  de  Findustrie  minerale  de  Russie  en 

1886.  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [8],  16  (1889),  593. 

1889:  5.  E.  H.  Keiser.  Redetermination  of  the  atomic  weight  of 
palladium  (106.351,  11=1).  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  11  (1889),  398;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  245;  Chem. 
News,  59  (1889),  262;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  17;  J.  anal.  Chem. 
(Hart),  4 (1890),  106;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  97  (1889),  298;  Ztsch.  physik. 
Chem.  3 (1889),  611;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  120. 

1889:  6.  L.  Pigeon.  Sur  le  chlorure  platinique.  (Action  of  sele- 
nium and  chlorine  on  platinum,  palladium,  iridium,  and  ruthe- 
nium.) Pt  (Pd,  Ir,  Ru). 

C.  R.  108  (1889),  1009;  Ber.  22  (1889),  387;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  3 (1890), 
365;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  69;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  834;  Chem. 
Ztg.  13  (1889),  Rep.  162;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  592. 

1889:  7.  G.  Rousseau.  Sur  la  formation,  aux  temperatures 
elevees,  des  platinates  alcalins  et  aicalins-terreux  cristallises. 

Pt. 

C.  R.  109  (1889),  144;  Ber.  22  (1889),  651;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  3 (1890), 
363;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  400;  Chem.  News,  60  (1889),  72;  J., 
Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  1125;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  Rep.  225;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1889,  590. 

1889:  8.  H.  Moissan.  Preparation  et  proprietes  du  fluorure  de 
platine  anhydre.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [6],  24  (1891),  282;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  22,  ii  (1890), 
43;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  9 (1890),  186;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  593;  C.  R.  109 
(1889),  807;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  5 (1891),  454;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  39 
(1890),  315;  Ber.  23  R.  (1890),  11;  24  R.  (1891),  386;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1890,  i,  86;  Chem.  News.  60  (1889),  291;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  217; 
60  (1891),  1433;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  Rep.  354. 

1889:  9.  A.  Joly.  Sur  les  combinaisons  nitrosees  du  ruthenium. 

Ru. 

C.  R.  108  (1889),  854;  Ber.  22  (1889),  385;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  743; 
Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  236;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  678;  Chem. 
Ztg.  13  (1889),  Rep.  139;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  597. 

1889:  10.  A.  Joly.  Sur  le  poids  atomique  du  ruthenium  (101.4, 
0 = 16).  Ru. 

C.  R.  108  (1889),  946;  Ber.  22  (1889),  386;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  3 (1890), 
345;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  69;  Chem.  News,  59  (1889),  265;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  56  (1889),  835;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  31  (1892),  364;  J.  anal.  Chem. 
(Hart),  3 (1889),  352;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  Rep.  161;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1889,  121. 

1889:  11.  A.  Joly.  Sur  les  combinaisons  ammoniacales  du  ruthe- 
nium. (And  chloroplatinate.)  Ru,  Pt. 

C.  R.  108  (1889),  1300;  Ber.  22  (1889),  545;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  2455 
Chem.  News,  60  (1889),  25;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  948;  Chem.  Ztg. 
13  (1889),  Rep.  194;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  599. 


220  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OP  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1889:  12.  A.  Joly  and  M.  Vezes.  Sur  quelques  azotites  doubles  dc 
ruthenium  et  de  potassium.  Ru. 

C.  R.  109  (1889),  667;  Ber.  23  (1890),  11;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  968; 
Chem.  News,  60  (1889),  257;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  17;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1889,  601. 

1839:  13.  T.Wilm.  (Ueber  das  Chloradditionsproduct  von  Kalium- 
platincyanur.)  (And  ammonium  derivatives.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  21,  i (1889),  346,  436;  Ber.  22  (1889),  1542;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [3],  2 (1889),  615;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  314;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  56  (1889),  951;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  594. 

1889:  14.  W.  Palmaer.  Ueber  die  Iridiumammoniakverbindungen. 

Ir. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  46  (1889),  355;  48  (1891),  417;  Ber. 
22  (1889),  15;  23  (1890),  3810;  24  (1891),  2090;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  1 
(1889),  366;  5 (1891),  590;  6 (1891),  730;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  277; 
1891,  i,  309,  372;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  352;  60  (1891),  402,  1165; 
J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  23,  ii  (1891),  61,  160;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  596. 

1889:  15.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Ueber  Metalldiaminverbindungen 
(des  Platins  und  des  Rhodiums).  Pt,  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  39  (1889),  1;  Ber.  22  (1889),  245;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3], 
2 (1889),  826;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  214;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  1949. 

1889:  16.  J.  Violle.  Sur  l’alliage  du  kilogramme.  (Platinum- 
iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  108  (1889),  894;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  i,  807. 

1889:  17.  P.  Silow.  Ueber  die  Legirungen.  (Theoretical  con- 
cerning gold-platinum.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  3 (1889),  605;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  70. 

1889:  18.  H.  N.  Warren.  The  action  of  silicon  on  the  metals  gold, 
silver,  plat’nim,  anl  mercury.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  60  (1889),  5;  Ber.  22  (1889),  654;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889, 
ii,  284;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  1125;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  Rep.  215; 
Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  589. 

1889:  19.  W.  Ostwald.  Zur  Dissociationstheorie  der  Elektrolyte. 
(Sodium  chloroplatinate,  p.  596.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  3 (1889),  588. 

1889:  20.  C.  Winkler.  Beitrage  zur  technischen  Gasanalyse. 
(Use  of  palladium  chloride  for  detection  of  carbon  monoxide.) 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  28  (1889),  269;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  924.  Pd. 

1889:  21.  K.  Jahn.  Ueber  synthetische  Bildung  von  Formalde- 
hyde. (By  action  of  palladium-hydrogen  on  carbon  mon- 
oxide.) Pd. 

Ber.  22  (1889),  989;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  1468. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


221 


1889:  22.  H.  yon  Juptner.  (Veraschen  in  Platintiegel.)  Pt. 
Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  1303;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  1011. 

1889:  23.  — (Glas  zu  platiniren.)  Pt. 

Sprechsaal,  22  (1889),  No.  3;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  271  (1889),  528;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1889,  2691. 

1889  : 24.  M.  Traube.  Zur  Lehre  von  der  Autoxydation.  (Action 
of  palladium  hydrogen.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  22  (1889),  1496,  3057;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56  (1889),  937;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1889,  384. 

1889:  25.  F.  Hoppe-Seyler.  Ueber  die  Activirung  des  Sauer- 
stoffs  durch  Wasserstoff.  (Reply  to  M.  Traube.)  Pd. 

Ber.  22  (1889),  2215. 

1889:  26.  M.  Thoma.  Ueber  die  Absorption  von  Wasserstoff  durch 
Metalle.  Pd. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  3 (1889),  69;  Ber.  22  (1889),  184;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  56 
(1889),  568;  Chem.  News,  60  (1889),  25;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  28  (1889),  351; 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.),  Beibl.  13  (1889),  529;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  342. 

1889:  27.  L.  Ilosvay  de  N.  Ilosya.  Union  d’azote  et  oxygene 
par  le  platine.  Pt. 

Soc.  hongroise  sci.  nat.  Oct.  12,  1889;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  2 (1889),  738; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  447. 

1889:  28. (Platinuranotypie.)  Pt. 

Brit.  J.  Phot.;  Phot.  Mittheilung,  25  (1889),  303;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889), 
Rep.  68. 

1889:  29.  K.  Fuchs.  (Ueber  Liebreich’s  toten  Raum  und  das 
Gluhen  des  Platins  in  Alkoholdampf.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  176;  from  Repert.  d.  Physik. 

1889:  30.  F.  von  Bruhl.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Phot.  Archiv,  1889,  154;  Dingl/ pol.  J.  274  (1889),  34. 

1889.  31.  J.  Schnauss.  Pizzighelli’s  neues  Platinpapier.  (For 
photography.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889),  390. 

1889:  32. (Kalte  Platinentwicklung.)  Pt. 

Brit.  J.  Phot.;  Phot.  Wochenbl.  15  (1889),  25;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889), 
. Rep.  52. 

1889:  33.  J.  M.  Eder.  Ueber  die  Fortschritte  der  Photographie 
und  der  photomechanischen  Druckverfahren.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  274  (1889),  34;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  2876. 

1889:  34. Neues  Platintcn  /erfahren.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  phot,  fran?.;  Phot.  Nachr.  1 (1889),  166;  Chem.  Ztg.  13  (1889), 
Rep.  360. 


222 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1889:  35.  C.  R.  Crawford.  An  improved  method  of  deciding  the 
correct  exposure  of  platinotype  printing  an  1 • n apparatus 
therefor.  (English  patent  10504,  June  28,  1889.)  Pt 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  9 (1890),  651. 

1889:  36.  P.  Mercier.  Sur  une  methode  generate  de  virage  des 
epreuves  photographiques  aux  sels  d’  argent,  au  platine  et 
aux  metaux  du  groupe  du  platine.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

C.  R.  109  (1889),  949;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  [3],  99  (1890),  149;  Jsb.  Chem. 
1889,  2882;  Bui.  Soc.  fran?.  photog.  1890, 195;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  19. 

1889:  37.  A.  Willis.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Phot.  Nachr.  1889,  35;  Phot.  Rundsch.  Steiglitz,  1889,  111;  Dingl.  pol.  J. 
274  (1889),  34;  283  (1892),  18. 

1889:  38.  R.  Emden.  Ueber  den  Beginn  der  Lichtermission 
gluhender  Metalle.  (Palladium  and  platinum.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  36  (1889),  214;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  310. 

1889:  39.  F.  Richarz.  Ueber  das  elektromotorische  Verhalten  von 
Platin  in  Ueberschwefelsaure  und  iiber  die  galvanische  Polar- 
isation bei  der  Bildung  derselben.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  4 (1889),  18;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889,  ii,  433;  Jsb. 
Chem.  1889,  298. 

1889:40.  Pratt.  (Soldering  platinum  crucibles.)  Pt. 

Revue scientif. ; J.  pharm.  chim.  [5],  20  (1889),  276;  Pharm.  Post  (Wien), 
22  (1889),  814;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  10. 

1889:  41.  H.  Le  Chatelier.  Sur  la  dilation  des  metaux  aus  tem- 
peratures eleves.  (Expansion  of  platinum  and  platinum- 
iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

C.  R.  108  (1889),  1096;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889, 151. 

1889:42.  Pizzighelli.  Der  Platindruck.  Pt. 

Phot.  Arch.  29,  301;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  274  (1889),  34;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1889, 
i,  87;  Jsb.  Chem.  1889,  2876,  2882. 

1890:  1.  C.  Blomeke.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  und  die  Production 
von  Zinn,  Nickel,  Platin  und  Quecksilber  auf  der  Erde. 
(Platinum  ore.)  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  49  (1890),  237. 

1890:  2.  Laurent.  L’industrie  de  Tor  et  du  platine  dans  POural. 

Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [8],  18  (1890),  537;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  50  (1891),  435; 
J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  11  (1892),  532;  Eng.  and  Min.  J.  53  (1892),  430. 

1890:  2a.  M.  E.  Krassnapolsky.  (Geologic  investigations  along 
the  eastern  side  of  the  Ural.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Russ.  Geol.  Commission,  11  (1890),  177. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


223 


1890:  2b.  Losch.  Two  specimens  of  native  platinum  of  Bissersk. 

Ft. 

Trans.  Min.  Soc.  Russia,  27  (1890),  44. 

1890:  2c.  C.  S.  Wilkinson.  Platinum  at  Broken  Hill,  N.  S.  W.  Pc. 
Rept.  Dept,  of  Mines,  New  South  Wales,  1889  (1890),  208. 

1890:  3.  F.  W.  Clarke  and  C.  Catlett.  A platiniferous  nickel  ore 
from  Canada.  Pt. 

Bui.  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey,  No.  64  (1890),  20;  Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  53; 
Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  44;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  286. 

1890:  4.  Platinausbeute  in  Russland,  1888-90. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os. 

Chem.  Indust.  13  (1890),  432;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  9 (1890),  1077. 

1890:  5.  G.  Trottarelli.  Analisi  chimica  dell’  aerolite  caduto  a 
Collescipoli  presso  Terni  il  3 Febbraio  1890.  (Palladium  in  a 
meteorite.)  Pd. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  20  (1890),  611;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  533. 


1890:  6.  Production  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Board  of  Trade  J.  1890,  558;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  9 (1890),  1040. 


1890: 


7. Robbery  of  platinum  at  Messrs.  Dunn  & Co., 

Stirling  Chemical  Works.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  62  (1890),  214. 


1890:  8.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  un  chloroplatinate  nitrose.  (Platinum 
nitrosochloride.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  110  (1890),  757;  Ber.  23  R.  (1890),  377;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  4 (1890), 
848;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  932;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  709. 


1890:  9.  K.  Seubert  and  K.  Kobbe.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des 
Rhodiums  (102.7,  0=15.96).  Rh. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  260  (1890),  314;  Ber.  24  (1891),  R.  107;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  5 (1891),  954;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  646;  Chem.  Ztg.  15 
(1891),  Rep.  21;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  31  (1892),  237. 

1890:  10.  K.  Seubert  and  K.  Kobbe.  Ueber  die  Zusammenset- 
zung  einiger  Doppelsalze  des  Rhodiums.  (Double  chlorides, 
sulphates,  and  sulphites,  and  platinum  and  iridium  sul- 
phites.) Rh,  Pt,  Ir. 

Ber.  23  (1890),  2556;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  4 (1890),  833;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
(1890),  ii,  736;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58,  (1890),  1383. 

1890:  11.  G.  Geisenheimer.  Sur  la  preparation  du  binoxyde 
dhridium.  Ir. 

C.  R.  110  (1890),  855;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  379;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  4 (1890), 
390;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  960;  Chem.  News,  61  (1890),  228;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  58  (1890),  948;  Chem.  Ztg.  14  (1890),  Rep.  148. 


224 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1890:  12.  G.  Geisenheimer.  Sur  les  chlorures  doubles  d’iridium 
et  de  phosphore.  Ir. 

C.  R.  110  (1890),  1004;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  380;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  4 
(1890),  391;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  1019;  Chem.  News,  61  (1890), 
265;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  1068. 

1890:  13.  G.  Geisenheimer.  Combinaisons  des  chlorures  doubles 
de  phosphore  et  d’iridium  avec  le  chlorure  d’arsenic.  Ir. 

C.  R.  110  (1890),  1336;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  550;  Bui.  Soc.  -chim.  [3],  6 
(1891),  1006;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  204;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890), 
1069. 

1890:  14.  G.  Geisenheimer.  Sur  les  bromures  doubles  de  phos- 
phore et  d’ iridium.  Ir. 

C.  R.  Ill  (1890),  40;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  552;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  6 (1891), 
1006;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  331;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  1383; 
Ann.  chim.  phys.  [6],  23  (1891),  231;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  ii,  (1892), 
32. 

1890:  15.  P.  Schutzenberger.  Sur  un  sulfocarbure  de  platine. 

Pt. 

C.  R.  Ill  (1890),  391;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  680;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  5 (1891), 
672;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  688;  Chem.  News,  62  (1890),  178; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  19;  Chem.  Ztg.  14  (1890),  Rep.  256. 

1890:  16.  H.  Londahl.  Bidreg  till  kannedomen  cm  platinasulfn 
basernas  konstitution.  Pt. 

Ars-skrift  Univ.  Lund,  27,  ii  (1890-91),  3. 

1890:  17.  E.  Leidie.  Recherches  sur  les  nitrites  doubles  du 
rhodium.  Rh. 

C.  R.  Ill  (1890),  106;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  4 (1890),  809;  Ber.  23  (1890), 
R.  630;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  332;  Chem.  News,  62  (1890),  62;  63 
(1891),  142;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  1382;  60  (1891),  808. 

1890:  18.  T.  Wilm.  (Nitrites  of  rhodium.)  Rh. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  22,  i (1890),  361;  Chem.  Ztg.  14  (1890),  1036. 

1890:  19.  A.  Joly.  Sur  une  nouvelle  serie  de  combinaisons  ammo- 
niacales  du  ruthenium,  derivees  du  chlorure  nitrose.  Ru. 

C.  R.  Ill  (1890),  969;  Ber.  24  (1891),  R.  68;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  5 (1891), 
673;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  i,  255;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  401. 

1890:  20.  A.  Joly.  Sur  les  chlorosels  de  l’iridium  et  sur  le  poids 
atomique  de  cet  Element  (192.75,  H=l).  Ir. 

C.  R.  110  (1890),  1131;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  548;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii, 
85;  Chem.  News,  61  (1890),  301;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  1067;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  89  (1890.),  747;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  6 (1890),  375. 

1890:  21.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Constitution  der  Cobaltbasen. 
I.  (Reference  to  platinum  bases.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  41  (1890),  429. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


22'5 


1890:  22.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Ueber  Metalldiaminverbindungen. 
(Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  41  (1890),  440. 

1890:  23.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Constitution  der  Kobalt-,  Chrom- 
und  Rhodiumbasen.  II.  (Reference  also  to  platinum  bases, 
and  chloroplatinates.)  Rh,  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  42  (1890),  206;  Ber.  23  (1890),  It.  682;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[3],  6 (1891),  1005;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  543;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58 
(1890),  1213. 

1890:  24.  A.  Cossa.  Sopra  un  nuovo  isomero  del  sale  verde  del 
Magnus.  (Platosemiaminchloride.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  20  (1890),  725;  Ber.  23  (1890),  2503;  24  (1891),  R.  388; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  645;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  1218;  Mem. 
Accad.  Torino  [2],  41  (1890),  1;  Atti  Accad.  Lincei,  Roma  [4],  7,  i 
(1891),  3. 

1890:  25.  O.  Carlgren.  Om  nagra  ammoniakaliska  platina- 
foreningar.  (Sulphites  of  platinum  base.) ' Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  47  (1890),  305;  Chem.  Ztg.  14  (1890), 
1460. 

1890:  26.  O.  Carlgren  and  P.  T.  Cleve.  Ueber  einige  ammonia- 
kalische  Platinverbindungen.  Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  47  (1890),  305;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem, 
1 (1892),  65;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  544;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  555;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  127. 

1890:  27.  L.  Pigeon.  Chaleur  de  formation  du  chlorure  platinique. 

Pt. 

C.  R.  110  (1890),  77;  Chem.  Centrbl.1890,  i,  517;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890), 
439;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  5 (1890),  274. 

1890:  28.  C.  T.  Heycock  and  F.  H.  Neville.  Molecular  weights 
of  metals  when  in  solution.  (Platinum  in  tin.)  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  57  (1890),  376;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1890,  158;  Ber.  24  (1891). 
R.  693;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  6 (1890),  190. 

1890:  29.  J.  Uhl.  Ueber  Einwirkung  von  Schwefeldioxyd  auf 
Metalle.  (Palladium  and  platinum.)  Pd,Pt. 

Ber.  23  (1890),  2151;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  1371. 

1890:  30.  A.  Classen.  Bestimmung  des  Atomgewichtes  des  Wis- 
muths.  (Note  on  presence  of  iron  in  platinum,  p.  951.)  Pt. 

Ber.  23  (1890),  938. 

1890:  31.  R.  Engel.  Sur  l’oxydation  de  Tackle  hypophospho- 
reux  par  un  palladium  hydrogene  on  T absence  d’oxygene. 

Pd. 

C.  R.  110  (1890),  786;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  378;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  690. 

109733 0 — 19 — Bull . 694 15 


226 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1890:  32.  O.  Loew.  Darstellung  eines  sehr  wirksamen  Platin- 
mohrs.  Pt. 

Ber.  23  (1890),  289;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  4 (1890),  351;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1890,  i,  577;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  277  (1890),  383;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890), 
453;  Chem.  Ztg.  14  (1890),  Rep.  56;  Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  242;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  31  (1892),  690;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  9 (1890),  550. 

1890:  33.  O.  Loew.  Bildung  von  Salpetrigsaure  und  Ammonia k 
aus  f reiem  Stickstoff . (Under  the  influence  of  platinum  black . ) 

Ber.  23  (1890),  1443;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  1051.  Pt. 

1890:  34.  O.  Loew.  Katalytische  Reduction  der  Sulfogruppe. 
(By  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Ber.  23  (1890),  3125;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  237. 

1890:  35.  H.  Dufet.  (Crystallography  of  potassium  ruthenate 
and  perrutbenate.)  Ru. 

Bui.  Soc.  frang.  min.  11,  215;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  374. 

1890:36.  H.  Dufet.  (Crystallography  of  nitrosoruthenium  deriva- 
tives and  rhodium  oxalates.)  Ru,  Rh. 

Bui.  Soc.  frang.  min.  12,  466;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  247. 

1890:  37.  H.  Dufet.  (Crystallography  of  double  iridium  chlorides.) 

Bui.  Soc.  fran£.  min.  ; Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  542.  lr. 

1890:  38.  J.  Thiele.  Zum  Nachweis  des  Arsens.  Inaug.  Diss. 
Halle  a.  S.,  1890.  (3.  Ueber  die  Anwendung  des  platinirten 

Zinks  im  Marsh’ chen  Apparat.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  265  (1891),  63. 

1890:  39.  E.  F.  Smith  and  H.  F.  Keller.  The  action  of  hydrogen 
sulphide  gas  upon  metallic  amines.  (On  palladium  bases.) 

Pd. 

Chem.  News,  62  (1890),  290;  Ber.  23  (1890),  3373;  24  (1891),  R.  109; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  i,  135;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  272. 

1890:40.  E.  F.  Smith  and  H.  F.  Keller.  The  electrolytic  method 
as  applied  to  palladium.  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  12  (1890),  212;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  130  (1890),  233;  Ber.  23 
(1890),  R.  414;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  946;  1891,  ii,  85;  Chem.  News, 
63  (1891),  253;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890),  831;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1891, 
650;  School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  11  (1890),  374. 

1890:  41.  E.  F.  Smith  and  L.  K.  Frankel.  Electrolytic  separa- 
tions. (Mercury  from  palladium.)  , Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  12  (1890),  428;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  267;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  58  (1890),  1029;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  9 (1890),  1067. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


227 


1890:  42.  E.  Matthey.  The  liquation  of  gold  and  platinum 
alloys.  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  183  A (1892),  629;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  4? 
(1890),  180;  Ber.  23  (1890),  R.  361;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  4 (1890),  824; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  669;  Chem.  News,  61  (1890),  111;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  58  (1890),  947;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  9 (1890),  624. 

1890:43.  W.  H.  Wahl.  On  the  electro  deposition  of  platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  130  (1890),  62;  Chem.  News,  62  (1890),  33,  40;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1890,  ii,  360;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1890,  455;  J.  Soc.  Chem 
Ind.  9 (1890),  867. 

1890:44.  L.  N.  P.  Poland.  Iridiumfaden  f tir  Glulilampen.  Ir. 
Electro  tech.  Ztsch.  1890,  Aug.  29;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  278  (1890),  46. 

1890:  45.  E.  H.  Griffiths.  On  the  determination  of  some  boiling 
and  freezing  points  by  means  of  the  platinum  thermometer. 

Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  182  A (1891),  43;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  48  (1890), 
220;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  251. 

1890:  46.  H.  L.  Callendar  and  E.  H.  Griffiths.  On  the  deter- 
mination of  the  boiling  point  of  sulphur  and  on  a method  of 
standardising  platinum  resistance  thermometers  by  reference 
to  it.  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  182  A (1891),  119;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  252; 
Chem.  News,  63  (1891),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1146;  Ztsch.  physik. 
Chem.  7 (1891),  332;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  31  (1892),  549. 

1890:  47.  R.  E.  Liesegang.  (Platinum  metals  in  photography.) 

Pt,  Ir,  Pd,  Os. 

Photog.  Archiv,  31  (1890),  170;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  19;  Chem.  Ztg. 
14  (1890),  Rep.  270. 

1890:  48.  F.  P.  Perkins.  Note  on  the  displacement  of  silver  by 


platinum  and  palladium  (in  toning  photographs).  Pt,  Pd. 
Chem.  News,  61  (1890),  87;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  577. 

1890:  49.  L.  Clark.  Platinum  toning.  London,  1890.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  18. 

1890:  50.  Gastein.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  fran$.  photog.  1890,  21;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  19. 

1890:  51.  Ein  neues  Platintonsalz.  Pt. 

Photog.  Archiv,  31  (1890),  33;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1890,  i,  552. 

1890:  52.  Lenhard.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Photog.  Corresp.  1890,  107;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  19. 

1890:  53.  Masse.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 


Photog.  Nachr.  1890,  165;  from  La  Nature;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  18. 


228 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1890:54.  Blanchard.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Photog.  Rundsch.  1890,  22;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  18. 

1890:  55.  Harrison.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Assoc,  beige  photog.  1890,  523;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  19. 

1890:  56.  Neues  Platintonverfahren.  Pt. 

Phot.  Mittheil . 26  (1890),  323;  Chem.  Ztg.  14  (1890),  Rep.  122. 

1890:  57.  C.  Berthiot.  (Iridium  in  photography.)  Ir. 

Photog.  Notizen,  1890,  No.  309;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  18. 

1890:  58.  (Iridium  chloride  paper  in  photography.)  Ir. 

Phot.  Mittheil.  27  (1890),  139;  Chem.  Ztg.  14  (1890),  Rep.  270. 

1890:  59.  J.  Elster  and  H.  Geitel.  Ueber  Ozonbildung  an 
gliihenden  Platinflachen.  Pt. 


Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  39  (1890),  321;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890), 
676;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  29  (1890),  376. 

1890:  60.  L.  Arons.  Beobaehtungen  an  elektrischpolarisirten  Pla- 
tinspiegeln. 

Sitzber.  Akad.  Berlin,  1890,  969;  Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  41  (1890), 
473;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  6 (1890),  287. 

1890:  61.  T.  Argyropoulos.  Oscillationen  eines  weissgliihenden 
Platindrahtes  durch  wiederholte  Stromunterbrechungen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  41  (1890),  503. 

1S90:  62.  H.  Le  Chatelier.  Sur  la  resistance  electrique  des 
metaux.  (Platinum  and  platinum-rhodium.)  Pt,  Rh. 

C.  R.  Ill  (1890),  454;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  280  (1891),  23;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891), 

5. 

1890:  63.  F.  Richarz.  Ueber  die  galvanische  Polarisation  von 
Platinelectroden  in  verdunnter  Schwefelsaure.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  39  (1890),  67,  201;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  58  (1890), 
551,  676;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  5 (1890),  284. 

1891:  1.  R.  Helmhacker.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  und  die  Produc- 
tion des  Platins  am  Ural.  Pt. 

Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  50  (1891),  157;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1891,  301. 

1891:  la.  Beloavsoy.  Platinum  of  the  Ural.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  61  (1891),  323. 

1891:  2. Production  des  Platins  in  Russland,  1881-1886. 

Chem.  Indust.  14  (1891),  15.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1891:  3.  K.  Seubert.  Die  Atomgewichte  der  Platinmetalle.  (Ru, 
101.4;  Rh,  102.7;  Pd.  106.35;  Os,  190.3;  Ir,  192.5;  Pt.  194.3; 
0=  15.96.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  261  (1891),  272;  Ber.  24  (1891),  R.  260;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  50;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  i,  492;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
60  (1891),  885;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1891,  148;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891), 
Rep.  65;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  30  (1891),  756. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


229 


1891 : 4.  K.  Seubert.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  desOsmiums  (190.3, 
0=  15.96).  Os. 

Ann.  Chem.  (Liebig),  2G1  (1891),  257;  Ber.  24  (1891),  R.  259;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  50;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  i,  492;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60 
(1891),  884;  J.  anal.  Chem.  (Hart),  5 (1891),  221;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891), 
Rep.  65. 

1891:  5.  L.  Pigeon.  Sur  deux  nouvelles  combinaisons  cristallisees 
du  chlorure  platinique  avec  Tackle  clilorhydrique.  Pt. 

C.  R.  112  (1891),  1218;  Ber.  24  (1891),  R.  592;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  6 (1891), 
548;  Chem.  News,  63  (1891),  284;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1325;  J. 
Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  23,  ii  (1891),  159;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  161. 

1891:  6.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  sels  bromoazotes  et  iodoazotes  du 
platine.  (Bromo-  and  iodo-nitrates.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  112  (1891),  616;  113  (1891),  696;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  6 (1891),  175; 
7 (1892),  148;  Ber.  24  (1891),  R.  348;  25  (1892),  R.  3;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1891,  i,  782;  1892,  i,  152;  Chem.  News,  63  (1891),  177;  64  (1891),  284; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  807;  62  (1892),  280. 

1891:  7.  I.  Guareschi.  (Platinum  thiocyanates.)  Pt. 

Giorn.  Accad.  med.  1891;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  620;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
62  (1892),  286. 

1891 : 8.  A.  Rosenheim.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Platinoxyd- 
hydrat  auf  wolframsaure  Salze.  Pt. 

Ber.  24  (1891),  2397;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  67;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1891,  ii,  454;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1323. 

1891:  9.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  zwei  neue  Selenosalze.  (Seleno- 
platinostannates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  44  (1891),  507;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  8 (1892),  682; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  151;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  281. 

1891:  10.  F.  Mylius  and  F.  Foerster.  Ueber  die  Verbindungen 
des  Kohlenoxydplatins.  Pt. 

Ber.  24  (1891),  2424;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  8 (1892),  194;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1891,  ii,  454;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1162;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  23,  ii 
(1891),  160;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  10  (1891),  955. 

1891:  11.  F.  Foerster.  Einige  weitere  Beobachtungen  uber 
kohlenoxydhaltige  Platin verbindungen.  Pt. 

Ber.  24  (1891),  3751;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  276;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892), 
352;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  8 (1892),  422. 

1891:  12.  W.  Pullinger.  Volatile  platinum  compounds.  (Plati- 
num carbonyl  compounds  and  preparation  of  platinum  bro- 
mide.) Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  59  (1891),  598;  Ber.  24  (1891),  2291;  24  (1891),  R.  853;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [3],  6 (1891),  852;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii.  453;  Chem.  News, 
63  (1891),  307;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  23,  ii  (1891),  224;  Chem.  Ztg.  15 
(1891),  919;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1891,  111. 


230 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1891: 

1891: 

1891: 

1891: 

1891: 

1891: 

1891: 

1891: 

1891: 

1891: 


13.  O.  T.  Christensen.  Rhodanchromammoniakforbindel- 

ser.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Skriften  Danske  Yid.  Selsk.  Kjobenhavn  [6],  7 (1891),  181;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
62  (1892),  798. 

14.  Le  Bel.  Sels  doubles  formes  par  les  chloroplatinates 

des  bases  ammoniaques.  Pt. 

Bull.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  5 (1891),  723. 

15.  A.  Joly.  Recherches  sur  Posmium;  aoide  osmiamique 

et  osmiamates.  Os. 

C.  R.  112  (1891),  1442;  Ber.  24  R.  (1891),  693;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 
(1892),  146;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  252;  Chem.  News,  64  (1891),  26; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1433. 

16.  A.  Joly.  Sur  quelques  combinaisons  salines  des  com- 

poses oxygenes  du  ruthenium  inferieurs  aux  acides  ruthe- 
nique  et  heptaruthenique.  Ru. 

C.  R.  113  (1891),  694;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  3;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892), 
148;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  152;  Chem.  News,  64  (1891),  284;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  62  (1892),  282;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  ii  (1892),  78. 

17.  A.  Joly.  Action  de  la  lumiere  sur  le  peroxyde  de  ru- 
thenium. Ru. 

C.  R.  113  (1891),  693;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  2;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892), 
147;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  152;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  282;  Chem. 
Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  328. 

18.  L.  Balbiano.  Sopra  una  nuova  serie  di  composti  del 

platino  derivanti  dai  pirazoli.  (Platinum  pyrazole  chlorides 
and  bases.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei,  Roma  [4],  7,  ii  (1891),  26;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892), 
885. 

19.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Rhodium- 

ammoniakverbindungen.  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  44  (1891),  48;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  371;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  60  (1891),  1325;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  6 (1891),  734. 

20.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Ueber  saure  Luteo-  und  Roseo- 

nitrate  (des  Rhodiums).  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  44  (1891),  63;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  372;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  60  (1891),  1327. 

21.  J.  J.  Sudborough.  Action  of  nitrosyl  chloride  on  metals. 

(Platinum,  p.  663.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  59  (1891),  655. 

22.  W.  Kwasnik.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Baryumsu- 

peroxyd  auf  Metallsalze.  (On  platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

Arch,  der  Pharm.  229  (1891),  573;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  408;  Ztsch. 
anal.  Chem.  31  (1892),  417. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


231 


1891:  23.  K.  Seubert  and  A.  Schmidt.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung 
von  Magnesium  auf  Chloride.  A.  Schmidt,  Inaug.  Diss.  Tu- 
bingen, 1891.  (Platinum,  p.  240.)  Pt. 

Ann.  derChem.  (Liebig),  267  (1892),  218. 

1891:24.  G.  Neumann  and  F.  Streintz.  Das  Yerhalten  des  Was- 
serstoffes  zu  Blei  und  anderen  Metallen.  (Occlusion  of  hydro- 
gen by  palladium,  p.  652;  by  platinum,  653.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Monatsh.  Chem.  12  (1891),  642;  Sitzber.  Akad.  Wien,  100,  ii  (1891),  618; 
Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  46  (1892),  431;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892), 
567;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  428;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  32  (1893),  73,  74. 

1891:  25.  L.  Pigeon.  Etude  calorimetrique  du  chlorure  platinique 
et  de  ses  combinaisons.  Pt. 

C.  R.  112  (1891),  791;  Ber.  24  R.  (1891),  513;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  6 (1891), 
548;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  i,  954;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  966;  J.  Russ. 
Chem.  Soc.  23,  ii  (1891),  136;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  8 (1891),  431. 

1891 : 26.  L.  Pigeon.  Chaleur  de  formation  du  bromure  platinique 
et  de  ses  principales  combinaisons.  Pt. 

C.  R.  113  (1891),  476;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  912;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62 
(1892),  3;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  ii  (1892),  32;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 
(1892),  118;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  9 (1892),  517. 

1891:  27.  J.  H.  Gladstone.  The  molecular  refraction  and  dis- 
persion of  various  substances  in  solution.  (Iridium  tetra- 
chloride.) Ir. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  59  (1891),  595. 

1891:  28.  E.  F.  Smith.  The  electrolysis  of  metallic  phosphates  in 
acid  solution.  (Platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  13  (1891),  206;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1140;  School  of 
Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  12  (1891),  340. 

1891:  29.  E.  F.  Smith  and  F.  Muhr.  Electrolytic  separations. 
(Silver,  cadmium,  and  mercury  from  platinum.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  13  (1891),  417;  Ber.  24  (1891),  2175;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891, 
ii,  497;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1296,  1396. 

1891:  30.  A.  Joly  and  E.  Leidie.  Sur  le  dosage  du  rhodrum  par 
voie  electrolytique.  Rh. 

C.  R.  112  (1891),  793;  Ber.  24  R.  (1891),  549;  Chem.  News,  63  (1891),  225; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1141;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  143. 

1891:  31.  A.  Joly  and  E.  Leidie.  Recherches  et  separation  des 
metaux  du  piatine  et  en  particulier  du  palladium  et  du  rho- 
dium en  presence  des  m6taux  communs. 

Pd,  Rh,  Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

C.  R.  112  (1891),  1259;  Chem.  News,  63  (1891),  292;  Ber.  24  R.  (1891), 
801;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  225;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1554; 
Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  174;  School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  13 
(1892),  179;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  25,  ii  (1893),  130. 


232  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1891:  32.  E.  F.  Smith.  The  electrolytic  method  applied  to  rho- 
dium. Rh. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  131  (1891),  296:  Chem.  Oentrbl.  1891,  i,  811;  Ztsch. 
physik.  Chem.  7 (1891),  518;  School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  12  (1891), 
340;  J.  anal.  Chem.  5 (1891),  201;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  10  (1891),  798: 
Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  143. 

1891 : 33.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  (Ueber  das  reine  Platin  und  einige 
seiner  Legirungen.)  (Platinumiridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ztsch.  Instrum.  Kunde,  11,  262;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1891,  ii,  371;  Chem. 
Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  170;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  31  (1892),  310;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Ind.  10  (1891),  773. 

1891:  34.  H.  Behrens.  Beitrage  zur  mikrochemischen  Analyse. 
(Platinum,  p.  152;  palladium,  153;  iridium,  rhodium,  ruthen- 
ium, osmium,  154.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Ru,  Os. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  30  (1891),  125;  Chem.  News,  64  (1891),  123;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  8 (1892),  1032;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  140. 

1891:  35.  H.  L.  Callendar.  On  the  construction  of  platinum 
thermometers.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  32  (1891),  104;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1892,  428;  Ztsch. 
physik.  Chem.  8 (1891),  572. 

1891:  36.  H.  N.  Warren.  Production  of  platinum  crucibles  (by 
folding  platinum  foil  like  filter  paper).  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  64  (1891),  146;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  31  (1892),  310. 

1891:  37.  — Platinid.  (An  alloy  of  platinum  and  nickel 

with  arsenic  and  iron  for  crucibles,  etc.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  282  (1891),  72;  from  Metallarbeiter. 

1891:  38.  H.  N.  Warren.  A novel  method  for  the  production  of 
sodium  and  potassium  nitrite.  (Using  platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  63  (1891),  290;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  1321. 


1891 : 39.  F.  Walter.  Die  Antiplatingliihlampe.  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  282  (1891),  188. 

1891 : 40.  W.  Crookes.  On  electrical  evaporation  (of  platinum 
and  palladium).  Pt,  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  63  (1891),  287. 

1891:  41.  J.  Mooser.  Ueber  die  durch  Zerstauben  der  Kathode 
erhaltenen  Metallschichten  (des  Platins).  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pog g.)  [2],  42  (1891),  639. 

1891:  42.  Brunel.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Rev.  de  photog.  1891,  185;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  286  (1892),  119. 

1891:  43.  A.  Stieglitz.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 


Amer.  Annual  of  Fhotog.  1891,  249;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  286  (1892),  136. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


233 


1891:44.  Hezekiel.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Ft. 

Photog.  Nadir.  1891,  708;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  286  (1892),  136. 

1891:  45.  J.  M.  Eder.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Ft. 

Jahrb.  f.  Photog.  (Eder),  1891,  74;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  283  (1892),  18. 

1891:  46.  A.  Huszar.  (Washing  platinum  prints.)  Pt. 

Der  amat.  Phot.  5,  74;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  10  (1891),  571. 

1891:  47.  W.  K.  Burton.  (Sodium  hypobromite  to  prevent  fog- 
ging in  platinum  printing.)  Ft. 

Brit.  J.  Phot.  38  (1891),  421;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  294. 

1891 : 48.  Fourtier.  (Palladium  toning  bath.)  Pd. 

Phot.  Gaz.;  Phot.  Wochenbl.  17  (1891),  61;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep. 
64.  172. 

1891:  49.  Pilet.  (Plating  with  palladium.)  Pd. 

Electrician,  26  (1891),  563;  Chem.  Ztg.  15  (1891),  Rep.  222. 

1891 : 50.  T.  Seliwanow.  (Expansion  of  platinum.)  Pt. 


,T.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  23,  ii  (1891),  152;  J.  physik.  Chem.  9 (1892),  91, 
519. 

1891:  51.  G.  Markovsky.  Ueber  die  electromotorische  Kraft  der 
Gasketten.  (Polarisation  of  platinum  by  oxygen  and  hydro- 
gen.) Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  44  (1891),  457;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  43  (1892), 
531;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  393. 

1891:  52.  G.  H.  Burch  and  V.  H.  Veley.  The  variations  of  elec- 
tromotive force  of  cells,  consisting  of  certain  metals,  platinum 
and  nitric  acid.  Pt. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  182  A.  (1891),  319;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  60  (1891),  514. 

1892:  1.  F.  P.  Venable.  On  the  supposed  occurrence  of  platinum 
in  North  Carolina.  (Its  occurrence  is  not  authentic.)  Pt. 

J.  Elisha  Mitchell  Soc.  8,  ii  (1891),  123;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  43  (1892), 
540;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  ii,  670. 

1892:  2.  Die  Platinausbeute  Russlands  im  Jahre  1891. 

Pt, 

Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892),  932;  J.  Soc.  Arts,  40,  807;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind. 
11  (1892),  752. 

1892:2a.  G.  F.  Kunz.  Report  on  mineral  industries.  Pt. 

Eleventh  Census  U.  S.  341. 

1892:  2b.  A.  M.  Saytzeff.  Geological  researches  in  the  district  of 
Nicolai-Pavdinsk.  Pt. 

Trans.  Russ.  Geol.  Commission,  13,  97. 


234  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1892:  2c.  J.  C.  H.  Mingaye.  Platinum  and  associated  metals  in 
lode  material  at  Broken  Hill,  N.  S.  W.  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Roy.  Soc.  New  South  Wales,  26  (1892),  371;  of.  also  Records  Geol. 
Surv.  New  South  Wales,  1891  (1892). 

1892:  3.  Query  regarding  fluctuation  of  price  of  plati- 
num. Pt. 

Chem.  News,  65  (1892),  86. 

1892:  4.  Platinum  in  Canada.  Pt. 

Eng.  and  Min.  J.  53  (1892),  327;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  11  (1892),  469. 

1892:  5.  Price  of  platinum.  (Review.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  11  (1892),  382;  from  Chemist  and  Druggist. 

1892:  6.  M.  Frenkel.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Palladiumver- 
bindungen.  (Determination;  action  of  potassium  chromate 
on  all  the  platinum  metals.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  217;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  917;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1892,  i,  880;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  195. 

1892:  7.  W.  Pullinger.  Platinum  tetrachloride.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  61  (1892),  422;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1892,  54;  Ber.  25  R. 
(1892),  661;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  10  (1893),  13;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892, 
i,  696;  Chem.  News,  65  (1892),  165;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892),  440;  Ztsch. 
anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  469. 

1892:  8.  W.  A.  Shenstone  and  C.  R.  Beck.  Platinous  chloride  and 
its  use  as  a source  of  chlorine.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  61  (1892),  445;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1892,  70;  Ber.  25  R. 
(1892),  662;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  10  (1893),  13;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892, 
i,  180;  Chem.  News,  65  (1892),  213;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892),  596;  Ztsch. 
anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  469. 

1892:  9.  T.  Wilm.  Ueber  Palladiumoxydul.  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  i (1892),  235;  Ber.  25  (1892),  220;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  680;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  427;  Chem.  Ztg. 
16  (1892),  Rep.  69;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  572;  Ztsch.  anorg 
Chem.  1 (1892),  256;  3 (1893),  389. 

1892:  10.  T.  Wilm.  Ein  Vorlesungsversuch.  (Occlusion  of  hydro- 
gen by  palladium.)  Pd. 

S.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  i (1892),  241;  Ber.  25  (1892),  217;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  680;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  427;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  62  (1892),  563;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  257;  3 (1893), 
389;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  11  (1892),  465. 

1892:  11.  T.  Wilm.  Ueber  einige  Rhodiumsalze.  (Double  chlorides 

with  ammonium.)  Rh. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  i (1892),  335,  526;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  143;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [3],  10  (1893),  181;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  ii,  569;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  213;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  51;  3 (1893),  389. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


235 


1892:  12.  M.  Vezes.  Surles  sels  azotes  du  platine.  (Nitrites.)  Pt 
C.  R.  115  (1892),  44;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [6],  29  (1893),  145;  Ber.  25  P. 
(1892),  714;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  664;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892, 
ii,  315;  Chem.  News,  66  (1892),  61;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  1283; 
Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  272. 

1892:  13.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  un  sel  chloro-azote  du  palladium 
(Chloronitrite.)  Pd 

C.  R.  115  (1892),  111;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [6],  29  (1893),  215;  Ber.  2 
R.  (1892),  715;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  665;  Chem.  Centrbl 

1892,  ii,  394;  Chem.  News,  66  (1892),  84;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892), 
1284;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  272. 

1892:  14.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  die  Reduction  des  Kaliumplatin- 
sulfostannates  und  iiber  ein  neues  Sulfosalz  des  Einfack- 
schwefelplatins,  das  Kaliumsulfoplatosat.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  45  (1892),  401;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  548;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  10  (1893),  96;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  851;  Chem.  Ztg.  16 
(1892),  Rep.  167. 

1892:  15.  E.  Fink.  Sur  les  combinaisons  phosphopalladiques.  Pd. 

C.  R.  115  (1892),  176;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  716;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892, 
ii,  395;  Chem.  News,  66  (1892),  98;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  1285; 
Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  272. 

1892:  16.  J.  Petersen.  Einige  Versuche  die  physischen  Verhalt- 
nisse  der  Metallammoniakverbindungen  betreffend.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  10  (1892),  580;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  148. 

1892:  17.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Chemie  der  Chromam- 
moniakverbindungen.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  45  (1892),  260;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  694. 

1892:  18.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Constitution  der  Kobalt-,  Chrom- 
und  Rhodiumbasen,  III.  Rh. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  45  (1892),  274;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  550;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  1892,  i,  694;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  783;  Ztsch.  anorg. 

Chem.  2 (1892),  269. 

1892:  19.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Constitution  der  Kobalt-,  Chrom- 
und  Rhodiumbasen,  IV.  Rh. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  279;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  147;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1893,  i,  340. 

1892.  20.  A.  Joly.  Composes  ammoniacaux  derives  du  sesqui- 
chlorure  de  ruthenium.  Ru. 

C.  R.  115  (1892),  1299;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  9 (1893),  183;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  1893,  i,  252;  Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  24;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

64,  ii  (1893),  172;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  12  (1893),  187;  J.  des  mines, 

1893,  Jan.  26. 


236 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1892:  21.  A.  Cossa.  Sopra  una  nuova  serie  di  combinazioni 
basiche  del  platino.  (Pyridin  and  etbylamin  bases.)  Pt. 
Gazz.  chim.  ital.  22,  ii  (1892),  620;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  182; 
Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  144;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  ii,  894;  Chem.  Ztg.  17 
(1893),  Rep.  63;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  i (1893),  365. 

1892:22.  L.  Balbiaxo.  Sopra  i compost i plato-pirrazolici.  Pt. 

Rendic.  Accad.  Lincei,  Roma  [5],  1,  ii  (1892),  366;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  23, 
i (1893),  524;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  935;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep. 
193;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  i (1893),  674. 

1892:23.  G.  Wallix.  Glykokollens  platinaforeningar.  Pt. 

Oefvers.  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  49  (1892),  21. 

1S92:  24.  G.  H.  Bailey  and  T.  Lamb.  The  atomic  weight  of  palla- 
dium (105.459).  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  61  (1892),  745;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1892,  138;  Ber.  25  R. 
(1892),  765;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  10  (1893),  8;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892, 
ii,  350;  Chem.  News,  66  (1892),  35;  69  (1894),  141;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892), 
1056;  J.  anal.  Chem.  6 (1892),  384;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  ii  (1892), 
208;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  32  (1893),  636;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892), 
474;  Ztsch.  physik.  C'hem.  10  (1892),  666. 

1892:  25.  H.  F.  Keller  and  E.  F.  Smith.  The  atomic  weight  of 
palladium  (106.91,  H = 1).  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  14  (1892),  423;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  38;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1892,  ii,  1064;  Chem.  News,  69  (1894),  141;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892), 
Rep.  325;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  73;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  32  (1893), 
636;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  389;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  11  (1893), 
121. 

1S92:  26.  F.  Mylius  and  F.  Foerster.  L'eber  die  Herstellung  von 
reinem  Platin.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  Instrum.  Kunde,  12,  93;  School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  15  (1894), 
377;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  33  (1894),  353;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892), 
272. 

1892:  27.  F.  Mylius  and  F.  Foerster.  Luber  die  Herstellung  und 
Beurtheilung  von  reinem  Platin.  Pt. 

Ber.  25  (1892),  665;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  8 (1892),  922;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1892,  i,  618;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892),  Rep.  120;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892), 
789,  920;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1892,  521;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892), 
332;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  11  (1892),  690. 

1892:  28.  A.  Sayxo.  Di  una  relazione  che  esiste  fra  il  modulo  di 
rottura  rispetto  alia  tensione,  la  temperatura  di  fusione,  la 
densita  ed  il  peso  atomico  di  alcuni  met  alii  omogenei.  Pt. 
Rendic.  1st.  lombardo  [2],  25  (1892),  637. 

1892:29.  G.  Neumann.  Das  Verhalten  des  Kupfers  und  der  Edel- 
metalle  zu  einigen  Gasen  und  Dampjfen.  Pt,  Pd. 

Monatsh.  f.  Chem.  13  (1892),  40;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  364;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[3],  7 (1892),  1050;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  942;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 
f2  (1893),  73,  74. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


09^7 

i 

1892:  30.  F.  Emich.  Zum  Verhalten  des  Stickoxydes  in  hohercr 
Temperatur.  (Action  on  platinum  metals  at  high  tempera- 
ture.) Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Pd. 

Monatsh.  f.  Chem.  13  (1892),  78;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  364. 

1892:  31.  P.  Sabatier  and  J.  B.  Senderens.  Action  de  Foxyde 
azotique  sur  les  metaux  et  sur  les  oxydes  m6talliques.  (Ac- 
tion of  nitrogen  dioxide.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  114  (1892),  1429;  J.  Chem.  Soe.  62  (1892),  1151. 

1892:  32.  U.  Antony.  Azione  del  cloro  e dell’  ossido  di  carbonio 
sull’  iridio.  Ir. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  22,  ii  (1892),  547;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  184;  Chem.  Centrhl. 
1893,  i,  513. 

1892:  33.  A.  Joly.  Action  du  chlore  sur  le  ruthenium:  sesqui- 
chlorure,  oxychlorure.  Ru. 

C.  R.  114  (1892),  291;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  308;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892), 
270;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  474;  Chem.  News,  65  (1892),  107;  Chem. 
Ztg.  16  (1892),  Rep.  70;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  688;  J.  Russ.  Chem. 
Soc.  24,  ii  (1892),  145;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  257. 

1892:34.  L.  Pigeon.  Chaleur  de  formation  du  bromure  de  plat  ine. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  118.  Pt. 

1892:  35.  C.  T.  Heycock  and  F.  H.  Neville.  On  the  lowering  of 
the  freezing  points  of  cadmium,  bismuth,  and  lead  when 
alloyed  with  other  metals.  (Action  of  platinum  and  palladium 
with  each.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  61  (1892),  888. 

1892:  36.  A.  W.  Pell.  (Physiologic  action  of  platinum  chloride.) 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  i (1892),  334.  Pt. 

1892:  37.  U.  Antony.  Separazione  del  platino  dall’  iridio.  Pt,  Ir. 

Rendic.  Accad.  Lincei,  Roma  [5],  1,  i (1892),  121;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  22, 
i (1892),  275;  Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  441;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892), 
1031;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  1004;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62  (1892),  1285; 
Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  474. 

1892:  38.  U.  Antony  and  L.  Niccoli.  Sul  metodo  analitico  del 
precipitato  prodotto  in  liquidi  acidi,  dall’  idrogeno  solforato, 
nelle  comuni  analisi  per  esercizio.  (Separation  of  metals  of 
second  group.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  22,  ii  (1892),  408;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  192. 

1892:  39.  E.  F.  Smith  and  D.  L.  Wallace.  Electrolytic  separa- 
tions. (Osmium  from  gold,  cadmium,  silver,  and  mercury.) 

Os. 

Ber.  25  (1892),  779;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  8 (1892),  667;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62 
(1892),  920. 


238  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1892:  40.  E.  F.  Smith.  The  electrolytic  separation  of  palladium 
and  platinum  from  iridium.  Pd,  Pt,  Ir. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  14  (1892),  435;  Ber.  26  It.  (1893),  60;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1892,  ii,  1049;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892),  Rep.  346;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii 
(1893),  97;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  391;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  12 
(1893),  606. 

1892:  41.  F.  Rudorff.  Quantitative  Analyse  durch  Elektrolyse  (of 
platinum).  Pt. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1892,  695;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  305. 

1892:  42.  E.  Matthey.  On  the  liquation  of  metals  of  the  plati- 
num group.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Phil.  Trans.  London,  183  A (1892),  629;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  51 
(1892),  447;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  474;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  12 
(1893),  448. 

1892:  43.  A.  F.  Holleman.  Die  Prufung  von  Platinchlorid  auf 
Reinheit.  (Sulphuric  acid  must  be  tested  for.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  16,(1892),  35;  School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  13  (1892),  380; 
Analyst,  17  (1892),  80;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  412;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  62 
(1892),  1526;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  470. 

1892:  44.  M.  Peligot.  Solubilite  comparative  des  chloroplatinates 
de  potasse  et  de  soude  dans  l’alcool  a divers  degres.  (Solu- 
bility of  alkaline  chloroplatinates  in  alcohol.)  Pt. 

Monit.  scient.  [4],  6 (1892),  872;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  104. 

1892:  45.  F.  Jean  and  Trillat.  Note  sur  le  dosage  de  la  potasse. 
(Use  of  chloroplatinate.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  7 (1892),  228;  School  of  Mines  (N.  Y.)  Quart.  13 
(1892),  380. 

1892:  46.  A.  Kolossow.  Neue  Methode  zur  Bearbeitung  der 
Gewebe  mit  Osmiumsaure.  Os. 

Ztsch.  wiss.  Mikroscop.  9 (1892),  38;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892),  Rep.  267. 

1892:  47.  H.  N.  Warren.  A quick  method  for  refining  gold,  silver, 
and  platinum  in  quantity.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  66  (1892),  140;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  60;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892, 
ii,  759;  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1892),  Rep.  322;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  17. 

1892:  48.  W C.  Heraeus.  Versuche  fiber  die  Angreifbarkeit  des 
Platins  und  einiger  seiner  Legirungen  mit  Iridium.  (Cf. 

1892:52.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1892,  34;  Chem.  News,  68  (1893),  77;  Ztsch.  anal. 
Chem.  32  (1893),  334. 

1892:49.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Erfahrungen  an  Schwefelsaure-Konzen- 
trations-Apparaten  aus  Platingoldkombination  im  Betrieb.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  475;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1892,  300. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


239 


1892:  50.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Vergoldung  von  Platinblech.  (Ger- 


man patent  63591,  Jan.  7,  1891.)  Pt. 

Ber.  25  R.  (1892),  923;  Chem.  Industrie,  15  (1892),  437;  Ohem.  Ztg.  18 
(1892),  1726;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1893,  53. 

1892:  51.  Burgemeister.  Schwefelsaureconcentration  in  mit  Gold 
plattirten  Platinkesseln.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1892,  384. 

1892:  52.  J.  Weineck.  Concentration  von  Schwefels&ure.  (Use  of 
platinum-iridium  vessels.)  (Cf.  1892:  48.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1892,  34. 

1892:  53.  H.  L.  Callendar.  On  platinum  pyrometers.  Pt. 


Iron  and  Steel  Inst.  London,  1892,  164;  Stahl  und  Eisen,  12  (1892),  606; 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  ii,  385. 

1892:  54.  G.  Lunge.  Concentration  of  sulphuric  acid.  (In  pla- 
tinum vessels.)  Pt. 

Eng.  and  Min.  J.  53  (1892),  374;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  11  (1892),  522. 

1892:55.  E.  H.  Griffiths  and  G.  M.  Clark.  Note  on  the  determi- 
nation of  low  temperatures  by  platinum  thermometers.  Pt. 

Proc.  Cambridge  Phil.  Soc.  8 (1892),  2;  Phil.  Mag.  [5],  34  (1892),  515. 

1892:  56.  J.  M.  Eder  and  E.  Valenta.  Fortschritte  und  Neuer- 
ungen  in  der  Herstellung  und  Verwendung  photographischer 


Praparate.  (Use  of  platinum  in  photography,  p.  481.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Industrie,  15  (1892),  476  et  seq.;  Photog.  Corresp.  1892,  ; 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  291  (1894),  96. 

1892:  57.  Fourtier.  (Palladium  in  photography.)  Pd. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  286  (1892),  119;  from  Phot.  Mag. 

1892:  58.  Pizzighelli.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Eder’s  Jahrb.  f.  Phot.  1892,  42;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  286  (1892),  136. 

1892:  59.  M.  Willis.  (Platinum  in  photography.)  Pt. 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  286  (1892),  136;  from  Engl.  Phot.  Soc. 

1892:  60.  Nichol.  Similiplatinprocess.  Pt. 

Photog.  Corresp.  1892, ; Dingl.  pol.  J.  291  (1894),  95. 

1892:  61.  F.  Parmentier.  Sur  la  lampe  sans  flam  me  obtenue  avec 
le  gaz  d'eclairage.  (Glowing  platinum  in  gas.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  114  (1892),  744;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1892,  i,  735. 

1892:  62.  FI.  Hertz.  Ueber  den  Durchgang  der  Kathodenstrahlen 
durch  dunne  Metallschichten.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  45  (1892),  28. 


1892:  63.  W.  Spring.  Ueber  die  Moglichkeit  des  Gaszustandes  far 
gewisse  Metalle  bei  einer  unter  dern  Schmelzpunkte  liegcnden 
Temperatur.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  1 (1892),  240;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  168. 


240 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GKOUP. 


1892:  64.  C.  Barus.  Thermo  elec  tries  of  platinum-iridium  and  of 
platinum-rhodium.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  34  [1892),  376;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  2 (1892),  463. 

1892:  65.  E.  F.  Herroun.  A note  on  the  electro-motive  forces  of 
gold  and  platinum  cells.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  33  (1892),  516;  Chem.  News,  65  (1892),  176. 

1892:  66.  V.  Bjerknes.  Die  Resonanzerscheinung  und  das  Ab- 
sorption s verm  ogen  der  Metalle  fur  die  Energie  electrischer 
Wellen.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  47  (1892),  69. 

1892:  67.  K.  R.  Koch  and  A.  Wullner.  Ueber  die  galvanische 
Polarisation  an  kleinen  Electroden.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  45  (1892),  475,  759. 

1892:  68.  A.  A.  Krakau.  (Electric  conductivity  of  palladium- 
hydrogen.)  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  24,  ii  (1892),  627;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  380. 

1893:  1.  Platinum  ores  in  Oural.  Pt. 

Eng.  and  Min.  J.  56  (1893),  569;  from  J.  des  mines;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  12 
(1893),  556. 

1893:  2.  G.  A.  Daubree.  Observation  sur  le  piatina  natif  dans 
F Oural.  Pt. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  156;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  623. 

1893:  3.  A.  Inostranzeff.  Gisement  primaire  de  platine  dans 
r Oural.  Pt. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  155;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  81;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  623; 
Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  7 (1894),  119;  Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1893,  183; 
J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  12  (1893),  841. 

1893:  3a.  R.  Helmhacker.  Platin  auf  primarer  Lagerstatten.  Pt, 

Ztsch.  prakt.  Geol.  1 (1893),  87. 

1893:3b. Platin-lagerstatten  bei  Broken  Hill,  N.  S.  W.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  prakt.  Geol.  1 (1893),  322. 

1893:  3c.  J.  B.  Jacquet.  Platinum  deposits  at  Broken  Hill, 
N.  S.  W.  Pt. 

Rept.  New  South  Wales  Dept,  of  Mines  for  1892  (1893),  142. 

1893:  3d.  J.  A.  Hooge.  Topographische,  geologische,  mineralo- 
gische  en  mynbouwkundige  beschryving  van  een  gedeelte  der 
afdeeling  Martapoena  (Borneo) . Pt. 

Jaarboek  voor  het  mynwezen  en  Ned.  Indien,  22  (1893),  408. 

1893:  3e.  C.  Bullman.  The  platinum  group  of  metals. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 


Mineral  Industry,  1 (1893),  373. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


241 


1893:  4.  J.  F.  Donald.  The  occurrence  of  platinum  in  Canada.  Pt. 

Eng.  and  Min.  J.  55  (1893),  81;  Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  52  (1893),  209; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  ii,  387. 

1893:  4a.  D.  H.  Browne.  Platinum  in  Canada.  Pt. 

Eng.  and  Min.  J.  56  (1893),  289. 

1893:  5.  T.  Wilm.  Ueber  ein  neues  Vorkommen  von  palladiumhal- 
tigem  Gold  in  Kaukasus.  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  25,  i (1893),  105,  505;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  741;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  874;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  ii,  416;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  475;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  4 (1893),  300,  476. 

1893:  6.  [R.  W.  Raymond?]  The  future  of  platinum.  (Full  re- 
view.) Pt. 

Eng.  and  Min.  J.  55  (1893),  194;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  12  (1893),  298. 

1893:  7.  The  production  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Scient.  Amer.  Sup.  39  (1893),  14,  465. 

1893.:  8.  A.Joly.  Proprietes  physiques  du  ruthenium  fondu.  Ru. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  430;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  221;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  9 
(1893),  477;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  634;  Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  187; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  285. 

1893:  9.  A.  Joly  and  M.  Vezes.  Sur  V osmium  metallique.  Os. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  577;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  265;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  717; 
Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  173;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  74;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  324;  J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  25,  ii  (1893),  144. 

1893:10.  H.  Moraht  and  C.  Wischin.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  des 
Osmiums.  (Ueber  SauerstofF-  und  Schwefelverbindungen,  p. 
155;  Halogen- und  Oxyhalogenverbindungen,  165.)  Os. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  153;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  224;  Chem.  Ztg.  17 
(1893),  Rep.  14;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  380. 

1893:  11.  C.  Montemartini.  Studii  sulla  combinazioni  inorganiche 
complesse.  I.  Cloroplatiniti.  (Chloroplatinites.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Torino,  28  (1893),  686;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  81. 

1893:  12.  W.  A.  Shenstone  an  1 C.  R.  Beck.  Note  on  the  prepara- 
tion of  platinous  chloride,  and  on  the  interaction  of  chlorine 
and  mercury.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1893,  38;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  558;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893, 
i,  717;  Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  116;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  317. 

1893:  13.  Le  Bel.  Sur  le  dimorphisme  du  chloroplatinate  de  dime- 
thylamine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  513;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  221. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 16 


242 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1893 : 14.  U.  Antony.  Preparazione  del  bisolfuro  d’iridio  e del  cloro- 
iridato  litico.  Ir. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  23,  i (1893),  190;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  310;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1893,  i,  718;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  86;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893), 
380;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  4 (1893),  395. 

1893:  15.  U.  Antony.  Sulla  composizione  del  precipitato  prodotto 
dalT  idrogeno  solforato  in  una  soluzione  di  cloro-iridato 
potassico.  Ir. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  23,  i (1893),  184;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  718;  Chem. 
Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  86;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  379;  Ztsch.  anorg. 
Chem.  4 (1893),  395. 

1893:  16.  P.  Petrenko-Kritschenko.  Zur  Kenntniss  der  Palla- 
diumsulfide.  Pd. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  4 (1893),  247;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  579;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  475. 

1893:  17.  R.  Schneider.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  des  Dinatrmm- 
platosulfoplatinats  gegen  Wasser  und  uber  zwei  neue  Sulfo- 
salze  des  Platins.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  48  (1893),  411;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  56, 
517;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,.  ii,  1080;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  98; 
Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  81. 

1893:  18.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  un  platonitrite  acide  do  potassium.  Pt. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  99;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  81;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  9 (1893), 
334;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  464;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  469,  Rep.  27; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  213;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  477. 

1893:  19.  M.  Vezes.  Etudes  electrometriques  du  triplatohexani- 
trite  acide  de  potassium.  Pt. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  185;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  140;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i, 
559;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  478. 

1893:  20.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Konstitution  der  Cobalt-,  Chro- 
mium- und  Rhodiumbasen,  V.  Rh. 

Ztg.  anorg.  Chem.  5 (1894),  147;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  4;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1893,  ii,  996;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  50. 

1893:  21.  A.  Cossa.  Sulla  reazione  di  Anderson.  (Action  of  pyrid- 
ine on  platinum  bases.)  Pt. 

Rendic.  Accad.  Lincei,  Roma  [5],  2 (1893),  332;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  24,  i 
(1894),  393;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  338. 

1893:  22.  A.  Werner.  Beitrag  zur  Konstitution  anorganischer 
Verbindungen,  I.  (Treatise  on  theory  of  double  chlorides, 
cyanides,  and  bases  of  the  platinum  metals.) 

Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Ru,  Os,  Pd. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  267;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  351;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
64,  ii  (1893),  379. 


1893: 

1893: 

1893: 

1893: 

1893: 

1893: 

1893: 

1893: 

1893: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  243 

23.  A.  Werner  and  A.  Miolati.  Contribute)  alio  studio  della 
constituzione  dei  composti  inorganici.  (Function  of  NH3  in 
metallic  bases.) 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  23,  ii  (1893),  140;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  14  (1894),  506; 
Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  864;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  407. 

24.  N.  Kurnakow.  Ueber  complexe  Metallbasen.  (Action 

of  thiocarbamid  on  potassium  chlo ro platini te.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  25,  i (1893),  565;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  50  (1894),  481; 
Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  339;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  i (1894),  273. 

25.  W.  J.  Sell  and  T.  H.  Easterfield.  Salts  of  a new  plati- 
num sulphurea  base.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  68  (1893),  223;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  83. 

26.  T.  Wilm.  Notiz  fiber  das  Natriumplatincyanur.  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  25,  i (1893),  507;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  4 (1893),  298; 

Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  740;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  874;  Chem.  Cen- 
trbl.  1893,  ii,  417. 

27.  W.  Prinz.  Sur  les  formes  crist allines  du  chrome  et  de 

Tiridium.  Ir. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  392;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  221;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  599; 
Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  61;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  281. 

28.  A.  Joly  and  E.  Leidie.  Sur  le  poids  atomique  du  palla- 
dium (105.4).  Pd. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  146;  Ber.  26  R:  (1893),  81;  Bui.  Soc.  cliim.  [3],  9 (1893), 
159;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  513;  Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  73;  69  (1894), 
141;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  25;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  284; 
Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  32  (1893),  636;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  3 (1893),  477; 
Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  11  (1893),  847. 

29.  W.  L.  Dudley.  The  action  of  gaseous  hydrochloric  acid 
and  oxygen  on  the  platinum  metals.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Proc.  Am.  Ass.  Adv.  Sci.  1893,  105;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  15  (1893),  272; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  53;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  ii,  749;  Chem. 
Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  257;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  5 (1894),  316;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Ind.  13  (1894),  255. 

30.  H.  N.  Warren.  The  action  of  silicon  on  the  metals  gold, 

silver,  platinum,  and  mercury.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  303;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  754;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893, 
ii,  256;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  474;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  5 (1894), 
316. 

31.  H.  Moissan.  Etude  de  quelques  phenomenes  nouveaux 

de  fusion  et  de  volatilisation  produits  au  moyen  de  la  chaleur  de 
Fare  electrique.  (Volatilization  of  platinum  in  the  electric 
arc.)  Pt. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  1429;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  11  (1894),  825;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
64,  ii  (1893),  507. 


244 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1893:  32.  R.  W.  Mahon.  The  effect  of  platinum  in  iron  solu- 
tions. Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  15  (1893),  578;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  92;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1894,  i,  106;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  318:  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem. 
6 (1894),  204;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  13  (1894),  546. 

1893:  33.  M.C.Lea.  Ueber  endothermischeReaktionen,  verursacht 
dureh  mechanische  Kraft  . . . und  durch  gleitenden  Druck. 

Pt. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  2;  Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  46  (1893),  241,  413. 

1893:  34.  L.  Mangin.  Sur  Temploi  du  rouge  de  ruthenium  en 
anatomie  vegetale.  Ru. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  653;  Chem.  News,  67  (1893),  181;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893), 
Rep.  102. 

1893:  35.  Nicolle  and  J.  Cantacuzene.  (Dyeing  properties  of 
ruthenium  red — ammonium  base — in  histology.)  Ru. 

Ann.  Inst.  Pasteur,  7 (1893),  331;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  170;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Ind.  12  (1893),  872. 

1893:  36.  W.  Gulewitsch.  Ueber  die  Verarbeitung  von  Osmium- 
rucks  tanden.  Os. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  5 (1894),  126;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  3;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1893,  ii,  934;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  270;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894), 
53. 

1893:  37.  H.  Borntrager.  Rasche  Reduction  des  Kaliumplatin- 
chlorids.  (By  potassium  soap.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  32  (1893),  188;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  i,  772;  Chem. 
News,  67  (1893),  205;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  64,  ii  (1893),  284. 

1893:  38.  A.  Villiers  and  F.  Borg.  De  Taction  du  zinc  et  du  mag- 
nesium sur  les  solutions  metalliques  et  du  dosage  deda  potasse. 

Pt. 

C.  R.  116  (1893),  1524;  Ber.  26  R.  (1893),  728;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  9 (1893), 
602;  Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  203. 

1893:  39.  W.  L.  Dudley.  The  electro-deposition  of  iridium;  a 
method  of  maintaining  the  uniform  composition  of  an  electro- 
plating bath  without  the  use  of  an  anode.  Ir. 

Proc.  Amer.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sci.  1893,  106;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  15  (1893), 
274;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  54;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1893,  ii,  846; 
Chem.  Ztg.  17  (1893),  Rep.  270;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  5 (1894),  406. 

1893:  40.  G.  Siebert.  Cascaden-Apparat  aus  Platin  zur  Concen- 
tration der  Schwefelsaure.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1893,  346. 

1893:  41.  J.  W.  Richards.  The  specific  heats  of  the  metals.  (Irid- 
ium, p.  129;  osmium,  palladium,  platinum,  184;  rhodium, 
ruthenium,  186.)  Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh,  Ru. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  136  (1893),  116,  178. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


245 


1893:  42.  J.  Paschen.  Ueber  die  Gesammtemission  gliihendes 
Platins.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  49  (1893),  50. 

1893:  43.  G.  B.  Rizzo.  Intorno  all’  assorbimento  della  luce  nel 
platino  a diverse  temperature.  (Absorption  of  light  by 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Torino,  28  (1893),  823;  II  nuovo  Cim.,  Jan.  (1894);  Chem. 
News.  69  (1894),  205;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  5 (1894),  398. 

1893:  44.  J.  B.  PIenderson.  Polarisation  of  platinum  electrodes  in 
sulphuric  acid.  Pt. 

Proc.  Poy.  Soc.  London,  54  (1893),  77;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  83. 

1893 : 45.  J.  Dewar  and  J.  A.  Fleming.  The  electrical  resistance  of 
metals  and  alloys  at  temperatures  approaching  the  absolute 
zero.  (Platinum,  p.  281;  palladium,  285.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  35  (1893),  271  ([5],  34  (1892),  326). 

1803:  46.  J.  Daniel.  Ueber  galvanische  Polarisationserschein- 
ungen  an  eine  dunne  metallische  Scheidewand  in  einem 
Voltameter.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  49  (1893),  281. 

1893:  47.  K.  R.  Koch.  Ueber  die  galvanische  Polarisation  kleiner 
Electro  den.  Eine  Erwiderung.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  48  (1893),  734. 

1894:  1.  A.  Inostranzeff.  Sur  les  formes  du  platine  dans  sa 
roche  mere  de  F Oural.  Pt. 

C.  R.  118  (1894),  264;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  i,  563. 

1894:  2.  S.  Meunier.  Observations  sur  la  constitution  de  la 
roche  m&re  du  platine.  Pt. 

C.  R.  118  (1894),  368;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  i,  564;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  13 
(1894),  639. 

3. Russian  platinum  deposits  and  their  working.  Pt. 


1894 

1894 

1894 

1894 

1894 


: 4. 


J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  13  (1894),  995;  from  Petersen’s  Trade  Rev. 
Gewinnung  und  Verbrauch  von  Platin. 


Pt. 


Dingl.  pol.  J.  292  (1894),  71;  from  Teknisk  Tidskrift,  nach  Eisenzeitung. 
: 5.  R.  Helmhacker.  Die  Platinproduction  Russlands.  Pt. 
Berg-  und  Hiitten.  Ztg.  53  (1894),  157;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  i,  1074. 

: 6.  A.  de  Keppen.  Aperpu  g6n6ral  sur  Tindustrie  mineral 
de  la  Russie.  (Platinum,  p.  213.)  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [9],  5 (1894),  180. 


6a.  J.  A.  Edman. 
California. 


Notes  on 


gold-bearing  black  sands  of 

Pt. 


Mining  Sci.  Press,  1874,  Nov.  10. 


246  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1894:  7.  H.  Erdmann.  Platinmetalle.  (Theoretical  comparison 
of  chlorides,  etc.,  of  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ztsch.  f Hr  Naturwiss.  55  (1894),  114;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  ii,  727. 

1S94.  7a.  A.  Joly.  Notice  sur  les  travaux  scientifiques.  Paris, 
1894.  Pt,  Pd,  It,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1894:  8.  M.  C.  Lea.  I.  On  some  new  methods  of  obtaining 
platino-chlorides.  II.  Probable  existence  of  a platinum  sub- 
chloride. Pt. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [3],  48  (1894),  397;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  8 (1895),  121; 
Ber.  28,  ii  (1895),  219;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  14  (1895),  283;  Chem. 
News,  70  (1894),  259;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  170;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1895,  i,  147. 

1894:  9.  E.  F.  Smith  and  D.  L.  Wallace.  Doppelbromure  von 
Palladium.  Pd. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  380;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  16  (1894),  465; 
Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  553;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  1284;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1894,  ii,  230;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  385. 

1894:  10.  L.  Pigeon.  Recherches  chimiques  et  calorimetriques 
sur  quelques  combinaisons  haloides  du  platine.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [7],  2 (1894),  433;  Ber.  28  R.  (1895),  173;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  455;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  7 (1894),  437;  Ztsch. 
physik.  Chem.  15  (1894),  517. 

1894:  11.  J.  L.  Howe.  Ruthenium  and  its  nitrosochlorides.  Ru. 

N.  D.  Clark.  On  the  crystallization  of  2CsCl.RuCl3NO. 

2HzO  and  2RbCl.RuCl3N0.2H20  (p.  395).  Ru. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  16  (1894),  388;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  1202; 
Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  ii,  269;  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  386;  Ztsch. 
anorg.. Chem.  7 (1894),  437. 

1894:  12.  C.  Reichard.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des  sauren  arsenig- 
sauren  Kaliums  auf  Metallsalze.  (On  platinum  and  palladium 
salts.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  27  (1894),  1019;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  12  (1894),  1066;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
66,  ii  (1894),  351. 

1894:  13.  A.  Joly  and  E.  Leidie.  Action  de  la  chaleur  sur  les 
azotites  doubles  alcalins  des  metaux  du  groupe  du  platine: 
composes  du  ruthenium.  Ru. 

C.  R.  118  (1894),  468;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  183;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  11 
(1894),  380;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  i,  671;  Chem.  News.  69  (1894), 
133;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  239. 

1894:  14.  H.  G.  Soderbaum.  Zur  Konstitution  der  Platosooxalyl- 
verbindungen.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  45;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  250;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1894,  i,  722;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  i (1894),  275. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  247 

1894:  15.  A.  Cossa.  Sui  compos ti  di  platosomonodiammina.  Pt. 

Rendic.  Accad.  Lincei,  Roma  [5],  3,  ii  (1894),  360;  Ber.28  R.  (1895),  108; 
Gazz.  chim.  ital.  25,  ii  (1895),  505;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [8],  16  (1896),  742; 
Chem.  Oentrbl.  1895,  i,  421;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  251. 

1894:  16.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Konstitution  der  Kobalt-, 
Chrom-  und  Rhodiumbasen,  VI.  Rn. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  7 (1894),  289;  Chem.  Oentrbl.  1894,  ii,  963;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  47. 

1894:  17.  A.  Werner  and  A.  Miolati.  Contribute)  alio  studio 
della  costituzione  dei  composti  inorganici,  II.  (Chlorides  and 
bases  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  24,  ii  (1894),  408;  Ber.  28  R.  (1895),  54. 

1894:  18.  E.  H.  Keiser  and  M.  B.  Breed.  The  atomic  weight  of 
palladium  (106.245,  H = 1).  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  16  (1894),  20;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  242;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[3],  12  (1894),  404;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  i,  579;  Chem.  News,  69  (1894), 
197,  211;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  141;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  33  (1894), 
619;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  435;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  14 
(1894),  556. 

1894:  19.  C.  T.  Heycock  and  F.  H.  Neville.  Freezing  points  of 
alloys  in  which  the  solvent  is  thallium.  (Platinum  in  thal- 
lium, p.  34.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  65  (1894),  31. 

1894:  20.  F.  W.  Clarke.  Report  of  committee  on  atomic  weights 
published  in  1894.  (Palladium  [Keiser]  = 106.51,  0=16.) 
(1894:  18.)  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  16  (1894),  20;  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  17  (1895),  208. 

1894:  21.  F.  C.  Phillips.  Phenomena  of  oxidation  and  chemical 
properties  of  gases.  (Oxidation  by  palladium- asbestos.)  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  16  (1894),  163;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  462;  J.Chem.  Soc.  66, 
ii  (1894),  294;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  213. 

1894:  22.  F.  C.  Phillips.  Phenomena  of  oxidation  and  chemical 
properties  of  gases.  (Action  of  hydrogen  on  chlorides  of  palla- 
dium, platinum,  and  ruthenium,  potassium  ruthenate,  and 

osmium  tetroxide.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ru,  Os. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  16  (1894),  255;  Ber.  27  R.  (1894),  728;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
66,  ii  (1894),  294;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  6 (1894),  229. 

1894:  23.  F.  Mylius  and  O.  Fromm.  IJeber  die  Abscheidung  der 
Metalle  aus  verdunnten  Losungen.  (By  zinc,  cadmium,  and 
lead,  forming  alloys.)  Pt,  Ir,  Pd. 

Ber.  27  (1894),  630;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  236. 


248 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1894:  24.  F.  Mylius  and  O.  Fromm.  L eber  die  Bildung  schwim- 
mender  Metallblatter  durch  Electrolyse.  (No  result  with 
platinum  metals,  p.  617.)  Pt.  Pd;  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ann.  der  Phvs.  (Pogg.)  [2].  51  (1894),  593. 

1S94:  25.  W.  Spring.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  gewisser  fur  den 
Flussigkeits-  und  Gaszustand  characteristischen  Eigenschaften 
bei  festen  Metallen.  (Fluidity  of  platinum  below  its  melting 
point.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  15  (1894\  65:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895).  37. 

1S94 : 26.  N.  Kurxakow.  U eber  die  Beziehung  zwischen  F arbe  und 
Konstitution  der  Halogendoppelsalze.  (Platinum  bases.)  Pt. 

Tagebl.  Cong.  Russ.  Naturf.  und  Aerzte,  1894,  No.  10;  Ztsch.  anorg. 

Chem.  6 (1894),  341. 

1894:  27.  G.  Michaud.  Influence  of  certain  metals  (platinum)  on 
the  stability  of  ammonium  amalgam.  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  16  (1894),  488;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  109. 

1894:  28.  W.  Gulewitsch.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  von  Platin  und 
Chlor  in  einer  Portion  mit  Erhaltung  der  organischen  Substanz. 

Pt. 

Tagebl.  Cong.  Russ.  Naturf.  und  Aertze,  1894,  No.  10;  Ztsch.  anorg. 

Chem.  6 (1894),  342. 

1894:  29.  R.  Sctttff  and  N.  Tarugi.  Ausschluss  des  Schwefel- 
wasserstoffstroms  aus  der  qualitativen  Analyse.  Dessen 

Ersatz  durch  Thioessigsaure.  (Platinum,  p.  3439.)  Pt. 

Ber.  27  (1894),  3437:  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  34  (1895),  456. 

1S94  : 30.  H.  Petrzilka.  Schutzkapseln  fur  Platinsckalen  und 
Platinschmelztiegeln.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem,  1894,  255;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1894,  i,  986;  Chem. 

News,  72  (1895),  85;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  33  (1894),  724. 

1894:  31.  G.  Lunge.  Die  Columbische  Weltausstellung  in  Chicago. 
(Gold-lined  platinum  concentration  apparatus  for  sulphuric 
acid.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1894,  7,  38. 

1S94:  32.  G.  Lunge.  Notizen  uber  Schwefelsaurefabricafion  in 
America.  (Concentration  in  platinum-gold.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  angew.  Chem.  1894,  134. 

1S94:  33.  Baker  & Co.,  Newark,  N.  J.  Data  concerning  plat- 
inum. etc.  3d  ed.  [1894].  (1st  ed.  [1892].)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  70  (1894),  234. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


249 


1894:  34.  W.  Ramsay.  The  passage  of  hydrogen  through  a palla- 
dium septum,  and  the  pressure  which  it  produces.  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  38  (1894),  206;  Ber.  28  R.  (1895),  4;  Chem.  News,  69 
(1894),  273;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  39;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem. 
15  (1894),  518. 

1894:  35.  L.  Cailletet  and  E.  Collardeau.  Recherches  sur  la 
condensation  des  gaz  de  Y electrolyse  par  les  corps  poreux  et 
en  particulier  par  les  metaux  de  la  famille  du  platine.  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  R.  119  (1894),  830;  Ber.  28  R.  (1895),  266;  J.  Chem.  Soe.  68,  ii 
(1895),  150. 

1894:  36.  M.  Berthelot.  (Criticism  of  paper  of  Cailletet  and  Col- 
lardeau.) Pd. 

C.  R.  119  (1894),  834;  Ber.  28  R.  (1895),  267. 

1894:  37.  J.  H.  Gray.  Method  of  determining  the  thermal  conduc- 
tivity of  metals  with  applications  to  copper,  silver,  gold,  and 
platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  56  (1894),  199;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  69. 

1894:  38.  K.  Noll.  Thermoelectricitat  chemisch  reiner  Metalle. 
(Platinum,  p.  889.)  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  53  (1894),  874;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  99. 

1894:  39.  F.  Paschen.  Notiz  fiber  die  Gultigkeit  des  KirchhofP- 

schen  Gesetzes  von  der  Emission.  Pt. 

Ann.  der  Phys.  (Pogg.)  [2],  51  (1894),  40. 

1894:  40.  B.  Neumann.  Ueber  das  Potential  des  Wasserstoffs  und 
einiger  Metalle.  (Platinum,  p.  213;  palladium,  219.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  14  (1895),  193;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  66,  ii  (1894),  373. 

1894:  41.  A.  Krakau.  (Ueber  die  Dissoziationsspannung  des  Pal- 
ladwassers  toffs.)  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Chem.  Soc.  1894,  398;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  8 (1895),  395. 

1895:  1.  A.  Inostranzeff.  Gisement  primaire  de  platine  dans 
FOural.  Pt. 

Trav.  Soc.  nat.  St.-Petersb.  22,  ii  (1895),  17;  Ztsch.  f.  Kryst.  24  (1895), 
514;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1895,  ii,  976. 

1895:  2.  J.  W.  Muschkjetoff.  Ueber  die  primare  Platinlager- 

statte  im  westlichen  Ural.  Pt. 

Verh.  Russ.  min.  Gesell.  [2],  29  (1895),  229;  Ztsch.  f.  Kryst.  24  (1895), 
505;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1895,  ii,  976. 

1895:  2a.  G.  W.  Card.  Mineralogical  notes,  No.  3,  Platinum  from 
Fifield.  Pt 

New  South  Wales  Geol.  Surv.  Rec.  4 (1895),  130. 


250 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1895:  3.  E.  Andreoli.  (Platinum  at  the  Antwerp  Exposition.) 

Pt. 

Rev.  univ.  Feb.  2,  1895;  Dingl.  pol.  J.  295  (1895),  208;  Ohem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  i,  681. 

1895:  4.  C.  Hoitsema.  Palladium-Wasserstoff.  Pd. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  17  (1895),  1;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1895,  ii,  154;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  388. 

1895:  5.  A.  Krakau.  Ueber  die  elektrische  Leitungsfahigkeit  des 
Pall adiumwassers toffs  in  Zusammenhang  mit  seiner  Dissocia- 
tionsspannung.  Pd. 

Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  17  (1895),  689;  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  5;  Ber.  29 

R.  (1896),  334. 

1895:  6.  L.  Pigeon.  Sur  un  nouveau  mode  de  preparation  de 
Facide  chloroplatineux  et  de  ses  sels.  Pt. 

C.  R.  120  (1895),  681;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  357;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  i,  871. 

1895: -7.  L.  Brizard.  Sur  quelques  sels  d’argent  du  ruthenium 

nitrosA  Ru. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  13  (1895),  1092;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  566. 

P895:  8.  F.  Roessler.  Synthese  einiger  Erzmineralien  und  analo- 
ger  Met  all  verb  indungen  durch  Auflosen  und  Krystallisirenlas- 
sen  derselben  in  geschmolzenen  Met  alien.  (Se  and  S com- 
pounds, p.  53;  As,  Sb,  and  Bi  compounds,  p.  60.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  9 (1895),  31;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  390. 

1895:  9.  R.  E.  Barnett.  Note  on  the  formation  of  platinic  pyro- 
phosphate. Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  67  (1895),  513;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1895,  89;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  ii,  16. 

1895:  10.  A.  Stavenhagen.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Arsenite. 

Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  51  (1895),  1;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  8 (1895),  404;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  217. 

1895:  11.  W.  Gibbs.  Platinotungstates  and  platinomolybdates. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  17  (1895),  73;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  229.  Pt. 

1895:  12.  A.  Joly  and  E.  Leidie.  Action  de  la  chaleur  sur  les  azo- 
tites  doubles  alcalins  des  metauxdu  groupe  du  platin ; composes 
de  Firidium.  Ir. 

C.  R.  120  (1895),  1341;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  503;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  ii,  211. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


251 


1895:  13.  A.  Werner.  Beitr&ge  zur  Konstitution  anorganisclier 
Verbindungen.  II,  III,  IV.  (Salts  and  bases  of  platinum 
metals.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  8 (1895),  153,  189;  9 (1895),  382. 

1895:  14.  N.  Kurnakow.  Ueber  die  zusammengesetzten  Metall- 
basen.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  52,  i (1895),  177,  490;  J,  Chem.  Soc.  68,  i (1896),  499 

70,  ii  (1896),  170;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  217. 

1895:  15.  O.  N.  Witt  and  A.  Buntrock.  (Joly’s  ruthenium  red.) 

Dingl.  pol.  J.  295  (1895),  235.  Ru. 

1895:  16.  W.  Palmaer.  Ueber  die  Iridiumammoniumverbind- 
ungen.  Ir. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  10  (1895),  320;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  179;  Ber. 

29  R.  (1896),  128. 

1895:  16a.  W.  Palmaer.  Krystallform  einiger  Iridium  verbind- 
ungen. (Ammonium  bases.)  Inaug.  Diss.  Upsala,  1895.  Ir. 

Ztsch.  Kryst.  28  (1897),  514;  Chem.  Oentrbl.  1897,  ii,  609. 

1895:  17.  P.  Klason.  Ueber  die  Constitution  der  Platin verbind- 
ungen. Pt. 

Ber.  28  (1895),  1477;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  400;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  ii,  436. 

1895:  18.  P.  Klason.  Ueber  Platindiammoniakdipyridin verbind- 
ungen. Pt. 

Ber.  28  (1895),  1489;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,'  i (1895),  557;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  ii,  451. 

1895:  19.  P.  Klason.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Platinathylsul- 
fid  verbindungen.  Pt. 

Ber.  28  (1895),  1493;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  i (1895),  488;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  ii,  440. 

1895:  19a.  Hamberg.  Krystallform  des  Platoathylsulfinjodids. 

Pt. 

Oefvers.  Vet.  Akad.  Forh.  1895:  312;  Ztsch.  Kryst.  28  (1897),  514;  Chem. 

Centrbl.  1897,  ii,  609. 

1895:  20.  E.  F.  Smith  and  H.  B.  Harris.  Electrolytic  determina- 
tion of  ruthenium.  Ru. 

J.  Ainer.  Chem.  Soc.  17  (1895),  652;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  16  (1896),  228; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  223;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  240;  Chem.  Centrbl. 

1895,  ii,  617. 

1895:  21.  E.  Priwoznik.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  einiger  Platinmetalle 
auf  die  Richtigkeit  der  bei  den  Gold-Inquartations-Proben 
erzielbaren  Resultate.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh. 

Oesterr.  Ztsch.  Berg-  u.  Hiitten-Wesen,  43  (1895),  272;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem. 

35  (1896),  73. 


252 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1895:21a.  E.  H.  Miller.  Assay  of  platinum.  Pt. 

School  of  Mines  (Columbia  University)  Quart.  17  (1895),  26. 

1895:  22.  L.  L.  de  Koninck.  Volumetrische  Bestimmung  der. 

Platinchloride.  Pt 

Chem.  Ztg.  19  (1895),  901;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  77;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1895,  ii,  186. 

1895:  23.  A.  L.  Winton.  On  some  conditions  affecting  the  ac- 
curacy of  the  determination  of  potash  as  potassium  platini- 
chloride.  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  17  (1895),  453;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  126. 

1895:  24.  W.  van  Dam.  (KjeldahFs  method  and  the  chloro- 

platinates.)  Pt. 

Rec.  trav.  chim.  Pays-Bas,  14  (1895),  217;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896), 
218;  Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  35  (1896),  594. 

1895:  25.  M.  Delepine.  Insufhsance  de  la  methode  de  Kjeldahl 
pour  doser  F azote  dans  les  chloroplatinates.  Pt. 

C.  R.  120  (1895),  152;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  290. 

1895:  27.  E.  Sonstadt.  Note  on  the  reduction  of  potassium 
platinochloride.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  67  (1895),  984;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1895,  162;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  16  (1896),  417. 

1895:  28.  D.  Vitali.  (Action  of  magnesium  on  platinum  and 
palladium  solutions.)  Pt,  Pd. 

L’Orosi,  18  (1895),  289;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  419. 

1895:  29.  A.  Stiebel.  Ueber  die  Verwendbarkeit  des  Zinkstaubes 
zum  Ausfallen  von  Edelmetallen  aus  photographisclien 
Abfall-losungen.  Pt. 

Jbuch  f.  phot.  Reproductiontechnik,  1895,  17;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1895, 
ii,  196. 

1895:  30.  F.  C.  Phillips.  On  the  possibility  of  the  occurrence  of 
hydrogen  and  methane  in  the  atmosphere.  (Detection  of 
hydrogen  by  palladium  chloride,  p.  806.)  Pd. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  17  (1895),  801;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  162. 

1895:  31.  H.  Dufet.  Sur  les  ferrocyanure,  ruthenocyanure  et 
osmiocyanure  de  potassium.  Ru,  Os. 

C.  R.  120  (1895),  377;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1895,  i,  629. 

1895:31a.  H.  Dufet.  (Crystallographic  notes) . Pd,  Os. 

Bui.  Soc.  fran?.  mineral.  18(1895),  414;  Ztsch.  Kryst.  27  (1897),  632; 

Chem.  Centrbl.  1897,  i,  1103. 

1895:  32.  A.  Sella.  Cloruro  di  platososemiammina  e di  platosodi- 
pyridina.  (Crystal  form.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  22,  ii  (1892),  622;  Ztsch.  Kryst.  24  (1895),  319;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1895,  ii,  756. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


253 


1895:  33.  J.  H.  Gladstone  and  W.  Hibbert.  Molecular  refraction 
of  dissolved  salts  and  acids.  (Platinum  chloride,  pp.  836,  844.) 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  67  (1895),  831.  Pt. 

1895:  34.  E.  D.  Campbell.  On  the  oxidation  of  some  gases  with 
palladinized  copper  oxide.  Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  17  (1895),  681;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  171. 

1895:  35.  L.  Mond,  W.  Ramsay,  and  J.  Shields.  Occlusion  by 
platinum  black.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  58  (1895),  242;  Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  10  (1895),  178  (in 
full);  J.  Chem.  Soc.  68,  ii  (1895),  492;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  123,  756;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1895,  ii,  354;  Ztsch.  physik.  Chem.  19  (1896),  25. 

1895:  36.  R.  Engel.  Sur  Taction  de  Tacide  chlorhydrique  sur  le 
cuivre.  Pt. 

C.  R.  121  (1895),  528;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  171 

1895:  37.  C.  T.  Heycock  and  F.  H.  Neville.  Platinum  resistance 
thermometers.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  67  (1895),  160;  Chem.  News,  71  (1895),  33;  Chem.  Centrbl. 
1895,  i,  465,  726. 

1895:  38.  Appelyard.  A direct-reading  platinum  thermometer. 

Chem.  News,  72  (1895),  267.  Pt. 

1895:  39.  H.  Crompton.  Latent  heat  of  fusion  of  platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  67  (1895),  315. 

1895:  40.  A.  Bartoli  and  E.  Stracciati.  (Specific  heat  of  plati- 
num.) Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  25,  i (1895),  389;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  145;  Chem. 
Centrbl.  1895,  ii,  274. 

1895:  41.  J.  Macintyre.  (Potassium  platinocyanide  for  Rontgen 
rays.)  Pt. 

Nature,  53  (1895),  523. 

1895:  42.  C.  Kellner.  Absorption  of  acid  and  alkali  from  solu- 
tions by  platinum  black  Pt. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedemann),  [2],  57  (1895),  79;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii 
(1896),  232;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  577. 

1895:  43.  L.  Holborn  and  W.  Wien.  (Measurement  of  high  tem- 
perature; fusing  point  of  platinum  and  palladium;  platinum- 
rhodium  thermo-couple.)  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedemann)  [2],  56  (1895),  360;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii 
(1896),  87. 

1895:  44.  J.  Dewar  and  J.  A.  Fleming.  Thermoelectric  powers  of 
metals  and  alloys.  Pt,  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [5],  40  (1895),  95;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  4. 


254 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1896:  a.  V.  Bourdakov  and  Hendrikov.  (Description  of  the 
platinum  deposits  belonging  to  Bourdakov  & Sons.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Soc.  naturalists  of  the  Ural  at  Ekaterinburg,  14  (1896),  197;  Jahrb. 
f.  Min.  1897,  i,  447;  Chem.  Centrbl.  1897,  ii,  374. 

1896:  b.  J.  E.  Carne.  (Platinum  and  platinoid  metals  from 
auriferous  sands  of  Richmond  River  districts,  N.  S.  W.) 

Rept.  New  South  Wales  Dept.  Mines  for  1895  (1896),  154.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

1896:  1. Australian  platinum.  Pt. 

Sci.  American,  74  (1896),  182;  from  Colliery  Guardian. 

1896:  2.  T.  L.  Walker.  Notes  on  sperrylite.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

Amer.  J.  Sci.  [4],  1 (1896),  110;  Tech.  Quart.  9 (1896),  29;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
70,  ii  (1896),  366;  Ztsch.  Kryst.  Min.  25  (1896),  561. 

1896:  3.  F.  W.  Clarke.  Third  annual  report  of  Committee  on 
Atomic  Weights.  (Pt=  194.89,  Pd  = 106.36,  Ir  = 193.12,  Rh  = 
103.01,  Os=  190.99,  Ru  = 101.68,  0 = 16,  p.  213.) 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  18  (1896),  197.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1896 : 4.  C.  H.  Herty.  Mixed  double  halides  of  platinum  and  potas- 
sium. Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  18  (1896),  130;  Ber.  29  (1896),  441;  Tech.  Quart.  9 
(1896),  5;  J Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  306;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  16 
(1896),  626. 

1896:  5.  A.  Miolati.  (Ueber  gemischte  Halogenplatinate.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei,  1896,  ii,  143;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  1051;  Ztsch. 
anorg.  Chem.  14  (1897),  237  (in  full). 

1896:  6.  H.  W.  Hake.  Preliminary  note  on  the  absorption  of 
moisture  by  deliquescent  salts.  (Chlorplatinic  acid.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1896,  33. 

1896:  7.  A.  Smits.  (Ueber  Magnesiumnitrid.)  (Action  on  plati- 
num chloride.)  Pt. 

Rec.  trav.  chim.  Pays-Bas,  15  (1896),  185;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  770. 

1896:  8.  L.  Brizard.  Action  des  r6ducteurs  sur  les  composes 
nitrosSs  du  ruthenium.  Ru. 

C.  R.  122  (1896),  730;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  478. 

1896:  9.  L.  Brizard.  Action  des  r6ducteurs  sur  les  composes 
nitroses  de  Vosmium.  Os. 

C.  R.  123  (1896),  182;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  653. 

1896:  10.  U.  Antony  and  A.  Lucchesi.  (Precipitation  of  platinum 
sulphide;  colloidal  sulphides.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  26,  i (1896),  211;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  528;  Ber.  29 
R.  (1896),  519. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


255 


1896:  11.  H.  Moissan.  Sur  la  solubilite  du  carbone  dans  le 
rhodium,  riridium  et  le  palladium.  Rh,  Ir,  Pd. 

C.  R.  123  (1896),  16;  J.  Ohem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  609;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896), 
613,  617. 

1896:  12.  E.  Vigouroux.  Action  du  silicium  sur  . . . le  plating 

Pt. 

0.  R.  123  (1896),  116;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  600;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896), 
618. 

1896:  13.  A.  Granger.  Sur  l’action  du  phosphore  sur  le  platine. 

C.  R.  123  (1896),  1284,  Pt. 

1896:  14.  A.  J.  Ferreira  da  Silva.  Sur  la  constitution  des  car- 
bonyles  metalliques.  (Platinum  carbonyl.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  15  (1896),  836. 

1896:  15.  F.  W.  Durkee.  Oxidation  of  sodium  sulphide  and  hydro- 
sulphide to  the  sulphate  by  electrolysis.  (Solution  of  platinum 
electrodes  and  formation  of  sodium  thioplatinate,  p.  536.)  Pt. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  18  (1896),  525. 

1896:  16.  M.  Finck.  Ethers  phosphop all adiques.  Derives  ammo- 
niacaux  des  Others  phosphopalladeux  et  phosphopalladique3. 

C.  R.  123  (1896),  603.  Pd. 

1896:  17.  D.  Schou.  Ueber  ein  neues  Doppelsalz  des  Platosemi- 
diammins.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  13  (1896),  36;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  1074. 

1896:  18.  W.  Palmaer.  Ueber  Iridiumammoniumverbindungen. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  13  (1896),  211;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  1079.  Ir. 

1896:  19.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Beitrage  zur  Constitution  der  Kobalt- 
Chromium-,  und  Rhodiumbasen.  VII,  VIII.  Rh. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  11  (1896),  416;  13  (1896),  172;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii 
(1896),  424;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  488,  1077. 

1896:  20.  A.  Werner.  Ueber  eine  eigentumliche  Klasse  von 
Platinverbindungen  und  die  sogenannten  isomeren  Platos- 
oxalsauren.  (Pyridin  bases.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anorg.  Chem.  12  (1896),  46;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  i (1896),  465;  Ber.  29 
R.  (1896),  629. 

1896:  21.  A.  Schertel.  Darstellung  der  Salze  der  Platincyan- 
wasserstoffsaure.  Pt. 

Ber.  29  (1896),  204;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  16  (1896),  669;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  i 
(1896),  197. 


256 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1896:  22.  J.  L.  Howe.  Contribution  to  the  knowledge  of  the 
ruthenocyanides.  Ru. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  18  (1896),  981. 

1896 : 23.  S.  Friedlander.  (Combination  of  argon  with  platinum.) 

Pt. 

Ztsch.  phvsik.  Chem.  19  (1896),  657;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  457; 

Ber.  29  It.  (1896),  764. 

1896:  24.  A.  Tilden.  An  attempt  to  determine  the  condition  in 
which  helium  and  associated  gases  exist  in  minerals.  (Non- 
absorption of  helium  by  palladium.)  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  59  (1896),  218;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  655. 

1896:  25.  W.  C.  Roberts-Austen.  Diffusion  of  metals.  (Bakerian 
lecture.)  Pt,  Rh. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  187  (1916),  383;  Science,  n.  s.  3 (1896),  827;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  590. 

1896:  26.  P.  Cohn  and  F.  Fleissner.  Ueber  die  Trennung  des 
Palladiums  von  Platin.  Pd,  Pt. 

Monatsh.  Chem.  17  (1896),  361;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  876. 

1896:  27.  N.  Tarugi.  SulF  amalgama  di  platino  e sua  applica- 
zione  nella  chimica  analitica.  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  26,  i (1896),  425;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  691. 

1896:  28.  E.  Hintz.  Volumetrische  Bestimmung  von  Chlorplati- 
naten,  Bestimmung  von  Kalium,  Ammoniak,  Stickstoff,  und 
Platin.  (Review.)  Pt. 

Ztsch.  anal.  Chem.  35  (1896),  72. 

1896 : 29.  C.  Fabre.  Sur  le  dosage  de  la  potasse.  Pt. 

C.  R.  122  (1896),  1331. 

1896:  30.  E.  D.  Campbell  and  E.  B.  Hart.  On  the  quantitative 
determination  of  hydrogen  by  means  of  palladium  chloride. 

Pd. 

Amer.  Chem.  J.  18  (1896),  294;  Tech.  Quart.  9 (1896),  18;  Bui.  Soc. 

chim.  [3],  16  (1896),  215;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  496;  Ber.  29  R. 

(1896),  1165. 

1896:  31.  R.  Ruer.  Bemerkungen  zur  Kalibestimmungsmethode 
der  Kaliwerke  zu  Leopoldshall-Stassfurt.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  20  (1896),  270;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  877. 

1896:  32.  E.  Bauer.  Zur  Bestimmung  des  Kalis  als  Kaliumplatin- 
chlorid.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  20  (1896),  270;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  878. 

1896:  33.  H.  Precht.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Bestimmung 
des  Kalis  als  Kaliumplatinchlorid.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  20  (1896),  209;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  564. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


257 


1896:  34.  A.  Hazen.  The  measurement  of  the  colors  of  natural 
waters.  (Use  of  platinum-cobalt  solution  standard.)  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  18  (1896),  264;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  548. 

1896:  35.  M.  E.  Mulder.  (Storender  Einfluss  der  schwefligen 
Saure  der  Gas-flamme  auf  die  Bestimmung  einiger  Verbind- 
ungen  und  uber  das  Mittel  denselben  zu  beseitigen.)  (Action 
of  S02  on  platinum  crucible.)  Pt. 

Rec.  trav.  chim.  Pays-Bas,  14  (1896),  307;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  433. 

1896:  36.  A.  A.  Kelly  and  H.  Humley.  Palladium  toning.  Pd. 

Sci.  American,  75  (1896),  150;  from  Phot.  Times. 

1896:  37.  V.  Meyer.  Ueber  die  Schmelzbarkeit  des  Platins  in 
Kohlen-Geblase-Ofen.  Pt. 

Ber.  29  (1896),  850;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  70,  ii  (1896),  429. 

1896:  37a.  T.  J.  Fairley.  Note  on  durability  of  platinum- 
iridium  vessels  in  laboratory  use.  Pt,  Ir. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  15  (1896),  886. 

1896:  38.  S.  W.  Holman,  R.  R.  Lawrence,  and  L.  Barr.  Melting 
points  of  aluminum,  silver,  gold,  and  platinum.  Pt. 

Tech.  Quart.  9 (1896),  24;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  1091;  Phil.  Mag.  42  (1896),  37. 

1896:  39.  W.  N.  Hartley.  On  the  temperature  of  certain  flames 
(Fusing  point  of  platinum  not  reduced  by  carbon  in  the 
flame.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  69  (1896),  846;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1896,  98. 

1896:  40.  H.  Moissan.  (Ueber  Verfliichtigung  einiger  schwer 
schmelzbarer  Korper.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [7],  9 (1896),  133;  Ber.  29  R.  (1896),  1097. 

1896:  41.  H.  Jackson.  Note  on  the  use  of  certain  phosphorescent 
substances  in  rendering  X-rays  visible.  (Phosphorescence  of 
the  salts  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  1896,  57;  Nature,  53  (1896),  499. 

1896:  42.  S.  Egbert.  Action  of  X-rays  through  plates  of  plati- 
num. Pt. 

Nature,  53  (1896),  502;  read  at  Acad.  Nat.  Sci.  Phila. 

1897:  1.  A.  F.  Stahl.  Gold  und  Platin  in  Nikolaje-Pawdinsk 
(Ural).  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  21  (1897),  394;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  ii,  58. 

1897:  2.  H.  Louis.  The  occurrence  and  treatment  of  platinum  in 
Russia.  Pt. 

Mineral  Industry,  6 (1897),  539. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 17 


258 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1897 : 3.  Gewinnung  des  Platins  in  Russland.  Pt. 

Polyt.  J.  (Dingier),  303  (1897),  240  (from  Eisenztg.);  Jahresb.  Min.  1897, 
ii,  7;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  ii,  630. 

1897:  3a.  T.  L.  Walker.  Geological  and  petrographic al  studies 
of  Sudbury  nickel  district,  Canada.  Pt. 

Quart.  J.  Geol.  Soc.  London,  53  (1897),  40. 

1897 : 4.  G.  Merer.  Procede  nouveau  pour  l’attaque  du  platine  et 
preparation  des  bromoplatinates  d’ammonium  et  de  potassium. 

Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  125  (1897),  1029;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  19  (1898),  195;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii,  (1898),  231;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  i,  438. 

1897 : 5.  H.  W.  Wiley.  Recovery  of  waste  platinum  chloride.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  19  (1897),  258;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  i,  799. 

1897:  6.  J.  R.  Rydberg.  Studien  liber  die  Atomgewichtszahlen. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  14  (1897),  66;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  399;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  i,  676. 

1897:  7.  R.  Lorenz.  Bemerkung  zu  der  Abhandlung  von  J.  R. 
Rydberg,  “Studien  uber  die  Atomgewichtszahlen”  (Zwillings- 
elemente)  (1897:  6).  Ru,  Rh,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  14  (1897),  103;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  399;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  i,  677. 

1897:  8.  P.  Rohland.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  einiger  Salze  der 
Platinchlorwasserstoffsaure.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  15  (1897),  412;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1897),  189;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  313. 


1897:  9.  M.  Groger.  Ueber  die  Darstellung  von  Kaliumplatin- 
chloriir.  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  10  (1897),  152;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  i,  685. 

1897:  10.  A.  Miolati.  Ueber  gemischte  Halogenplatinate.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  14  (1897),  237;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  323;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  i,  1046. 


1897:  11.  A.  Werner.  Beitrag  zur  Konstitution  anorganischer 
Verbindungen.  VIII.  Ueber  die  Anderson’sche  Reaktion. 
(Heating  organic  chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  15  (1897),  123;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  i (1897),  631;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  ii,  791. 


1897:  12.  A.  J.  Ferreira  da  Silva.  (Constitution  of  the  metal- 
. carbonyls.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  15  (1897),  835;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  406. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


259 


1897:  13.  M.  Vezes.  Ueber  Plato-plati-additionsverbindungen. 

Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  15  (1897),  278;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  74;  Cliem, 
Zentr.  1897,  ii,  1138. 

1897:  14.  H.  B.  Buxhoeyden  and  G.  Tammanm.  Die  Hydrate  des 
Magnesiumplatincyanurs  und  deren  Loslichkeit.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  15  (1897),  319;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  i (1898),  59;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  ii,  1139. 

1897:  15.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Konstitution  der  Kobalt-,  Chrom- 
und  Rhodiumbasen.  IX,  X.  Pt,  Rh. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  14  (1897),  404;  16  (1897),  184;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897), 
453;  74,  ii  (1898),  226;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  ii,  329;  1898,  i,  226. 

1897:  16.  A.  Cossa.  (The  constitution  of  platosemiammin  com- 
pounds.) Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  27,  ii  (1897),  11;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  14  (1897),  366;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  457;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  ii,  256. 

1897:  17.  D.  Schou.  Ueber  ein  neues  Doppelsalz  des  Platosemi- 
ammins.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  13  (1897),  36;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  18  (1897),  694;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  44. 

1897 : 18.  K.  A.  Hofmann.  Eine  neue  Klasse  von  Metallammoniak- 
verbindungen.  (Thio-carbonate  bases.)  Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  11  (1896),  379;  14  (1897),  263;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  18 
(1897),  829;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  320;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  i,  1064. 

1897:  19.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  un  nouveau  sel  platineux  mixte.  (Oxa- 
late.) Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  125  (1897),  525;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  (3),  17  (1897),  955;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  74,  i (1898),  64;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  ii,  999. 

1897:  20.  K.  A.  Hofman  and  W.  O.  Rabe.  Reaktionen  von  Mer- 
kaptiden  mit  Alkyljodiden.  (Merkaptids  of  platinum,  palla- 
dium, and  iridium.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  14  (1897),  293;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  i (1897),  310;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  i,  1013. 

1897:  21.  J.  Dewar.  The  absorption  of  hydrogen  by  palladium  at 
high  temperatures  and  pressures.  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  13  (1897),  192;  Chem.  News,  76  (1897),  274;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  20  (1898),  428;  Jahresb.  Chem.  1897,  429;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1898,  i,  90. 

1897:  22.  F.  Bullniieimer.  Das  Verhalten  des  Glycerins  gegcn 
Metalloxyde,  ein  Bcitrag  zur  quantitativen  Bestimmung  des 
Glycerins.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Forschungs-Ber.  Lebensmittel,  4 (1897),  12,  31;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii 
(1898),  262;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  i,  522,  733. 


260  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1897:  23.  B.  Sjollema.  Kalibestimmung  durch  Reduzieren  des 
Kaliumplatinchlorids  mittels  Natriumformiat.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  21  (1897),  739;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  309;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1897,  ii,  875. 

1897:  24.  P.  Sabatier  and  J.  B.  Senderens.  (Action  of  nickel  on 
ethylene.)  (No  action  by  palladium  and  platinum.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  124  (1897),  616;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  i (1897),  305;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1897,  ii,  257. 

1897 : 25.  E.  Harbeck  and  G.  Lunge.  Quantitative  Scheidung  des 
Aethylens  und  Benzoldampfes.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von 
Kohlenoxyd  auf  Platin  und  Palladium.  Dissertation,  Bern, 
1897.  ^ Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  16  (1898),  26,  50;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  166;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1898,  i,  437. 

1897:  26.  A.  Liversidge.  The  crystalline  structure  of  gold  and 
platinum  nuggets  and  gold  ingots.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  13  (1897),  22;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  71  (1897),  1125;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1897,  i,  617. 

1897:  27.  H.  Backstrom.  Krystallform  des  Iridiumtetramin- 
trichlorids.  Ir. 

Z.  Kryst.  Min.  28  (1897),  212;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  ii,  256. 

1897:  28.  L.  Mond,  W.  Ramsay,  and  J.  Shields.  On  the  occlu- 
sion of  oxygen  and  hydrogen  by  platinum  black.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  62  (1897),  50;  Z.  physik.  Chem.  25  (1898),  657; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  599;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  i,  1159. 

1897:  29.  L.  Mond,  W.  Ramsay,  and  J.  Shields.  On  the  occlu- 
sion of  hydrogen  and  oxygen  by  palladium.  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  62  (1897),  290;  Chem.  News,  76  (1897),  317; 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  16  (1898),  325;  Z.  physik.  Chem.  26  (1898),  109;  Bui. 

Soc.  chim.  [3]  20  (1898),  427;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  600;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1898,  i,  553. 

1897:  30.  W.  W.  Randall.  On  the  permeation  of  hot  platinum 
by  gases.  Pt. 

Am.  Chem.  J.  19  (1897),  682;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  482;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1897,  ii,  611. 

1897:  31.  H.  Kayser.  Die  Spektren  der  Elemente  der  Platin- 
gruppe.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Abh.  K.  preuss.  Akad.  1897;  Astro phys.  J.  7 (1899). 

1897:  32.  C.  M.  Gordon.  (Measurement  of  the  capacity  of  polar- 
ization.) (Use  of  platinized  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedemann),  [2],  61  (1897),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii 

(1897),  357. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


261 


1897:  33.  K.  R.  Klein.  (Depolarization  of  mercury  and  plati- 
num electrodes.)'  Pt. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedemann),  62  (1897),  259;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii 
(1898),  7. 

1897:  34.  W.  C.  Roberts-Austen.  The  alloys:  fourth  report  of 
the  committee  on  alloys. 

Proc.  Inst.  Mech.  Engineers,  1897,  31;  Engineering,  63  (1897),  220. 

1897:  35.  J.  Spiller.  The  platinum-silver  alloys;  their  solubility 
in  nitric  acid.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  13  (1897),  118;  Jahresb.  Chem.  1897,  1013;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  ii,  102. 

1897:  36.  C.  T.  Heycock  and  F.  H.  Neville.  Complete  freezing- 
point  curves  of  binary  alloys  containing  silver  or  copper, 
together  with  another  metal.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  60  (1896),  160;  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  189 
A (1897),  25;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  72,  ii  (1897),  245. 

1897:  37.  C.  T.  Heycock  and  F.  H.  Neville.  The  freezing  points 
of  alloys  containing  zinc  and  another  metal.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  13  (1897),  60;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  71  (1897),  383  (platinum- 
zinc  alloy,  p.  421);  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  i,  786. 

1897:  38.  C.  Roessler.  Ueber  die  Telluriumverbindungen  des 
Platins.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  15  (1897),  405;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3]  20  (1898),  309;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  166;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  i,  313. 

1897:  39.  C.  T.  Heycock  and  F.  H.  Neville.  Roentgen  ray 
photography  applied  to  alloys.  (Brief  reference  to  platinum- 
aluminum  alloys.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  13  (1897),  105;  J.  Chem.  SSc.  73  (1898),  714;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  247. 

1897:  40.  Soltsien.  Ueber  einige  Apparate  fur  die  analytische 
Praxis.  Platinveraschungsrohrchen.  Pt. 

Pharm.  Ztg.  42  (1897),  293;  Chem.  Zentr.  1897,  i,  1081. 

1897:41.  W.  Skey.  Laboratory  notes  from  New  Zealand.  (Plati- 
num couples.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  76  (1897),  109;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  61;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  ii,  785. 

1897:  42.  W.  L.  Hardin.  The  atomic  mass  of  tungsten.  (Absorp- 
tion of  tungsten  by  platinum,  p.  673.)  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  19  (1897),  657;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  336;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1897,  ii,  612. 

1897:  43.  J.  L.  Howe.  Bibliography  of  the  metals  of  the  platinum 
group,  1748-1896.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Smithsonian  Misc.  Coll.  1084,  1897. 


262 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1898:  1.  J.  W.  Mallet.  Claims  of  davyum  to  recognition  as  an 
element.  Da. 

Am.  Chem.  J.  20  (1898),  776;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  107;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  17. 

1898:  2.  A.  Saytzeff.  Die  Platinlagerstatten  am  Ural.  Tomsk, 
Burdakoff  und  Sohne,  1899.  Pt. 

Memoires  de  1’Univ.  de  Tomsk,  16  (1898);  Neues  Jahr.Min.  Geol.  1899,  i, 
400;  Z.  prakt.  Geol.  1898,  395;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  220. 

1898:  3.  R.  Helmacker.  The  platinum  deposits  of  the  Ural 
Mountains.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  Sept.  17,  1898. 

1898:  4.  R.  Beck.  (Les  excursions  du  7ieme  Congr£s  geologique 
dans  TOural.)  Pt. 

Z.  prakt.  Geol.  1898,  24. 

1898:  4a.  G.  F.  Kunz.  A trip  to  Russia  and  the  Ural  Mountains. 

J.  Franklin  Inst.  146  (1898),  193,  264.  Pt. 

1898:  5.  S.  Meunier.  Etude  sur  la  roche  mere  du  platine  de 
VOural.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend,  du  8ieme  Congrfes  geol.  intern.  1898,  157. 

1898:  6.  W.  E.  Hidden.  The  existence  of  sperrylite  in  North  Caro- 
lina. Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  6 (1898),  294,  381,  467;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  58. 

1898:  7.  Platinum  and  iridium.  Pt,  Ir. 

Mineral  Industry,  7 (1898),  569. 

1898:  7a.  J.  A.  Edman.  Platinum  metals  of  Plumas  County, 
Calif.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  1898,  401. 

1898:  8.  J.  C.  H.  Mingaye.  (Analysis  of  platinum  from  the  allu- 
vium of  Fifield.)  Pt. 

Records  Geol.  Surv.  New  South  Wales  1896,  5 (1898),  35. 

1898:  8a.  J.  B.  Jacquet.  The  occurrence  of  platinum  in  New 
South  Wales.  Pt. 

Records  Geol.  Surv.  New  South  Wales,  1896,  5 (1898),  133. 

1898:  9.  N.  P.  Steinfeldt.  (The  platinum  industry  in  Russia  in 
1898.)  Pt. 

Torgovo  Promishlennaia  Gazeta,  Aug.  23,  1898;  Mineral  Industry,  7 
(1898),  570. 

1898:  10.  F.  Mylius  and  R.  Dietz.  Reine  Platinmetalle  im 
Handel.  (Purification  of  the  platinum  metals.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ber.  31  (1898),  3187;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  (3),  22  (1899),  489;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
76,  ii  (1899),  160;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  409. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


263 


1898:  11.  F.  Zurn.  Verfahren  zur  Gewinnung  von  Platin  aus 
seinen  Erzen  auf  electrolytischem  Wege.  (German  patent 
107525.)  Ft. 

Patentbl.  21  (1898),  282;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  i,  932. 

1898:  12.  J.  L.  Howe.  Ruthenium  tetroxide:  an  explosion.  Ru. 

Chem.  News,  78  (1898),  269;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  18. 

1898:  13.  P.  Rohland.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  einiger  Salze  der 
Pla  tinchlorw  assers  toffs  aure.  P t . 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  16  (1898),  305;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  162;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  341;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  i,  984. 

1898:  14.  E.  Sonstadt.  Note  on  the  action  of  light  on  platinum, 
gold,  and  silver  chlorides.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  14  (1898),  179;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  102. 

1898:  15.  E.  Sonstadt.  On  the  dissociation  of  potassium  platini- 
chloride  in  dilute  solution;  and  the  production  of  platinum 
monochloride.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  14  (1898),  25;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  i,  709. 

1898:  16.  C.  von  Scheele.  Ueber  Praseodidym  und  dessen  wich- 
tigste  Yerbindungen.  (Chloroplatinate.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  18  (1898),  352;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii,  (1899),  99;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  168. 

1898:  17.  F.  Kohlrausch.  Erscheinungen  bei  der  Elektrolyse  des 
Platinchlorids.  Pt. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedemann),  [2],  63  (1898),  423;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74, 
ii  (1898),  203;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  i,  237. 

1898:  18.  N.  S.  Kursanoff.  Ueber  die  Aethylenverbindungen  des 
Nickels.  (Chloroplatinite  and  chloroplatinate.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1898),  872;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  22  (1900), 
466;  Chem.  Ztg.  1899,  41;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  i (1900),  209. 

1898:  19.  A.  Werner  (and  P.  Pfeiffer).  Beitrag  zur  Konstitu- 
tion  anorganischer  Verbindungen.  XIV.  Ueber  Moleciilver- 
bindungen  der  Zinntetrahalogenide  und  der  Zinnalkyle. 
(Theoretical.)  Pt . 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  17  (1898),  82;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  i (1898),  464;  Chem 
Zentr.  1898,  ii,  281. 

1898:  20.  N.  S.  Kurnakow.  Ueber  die  Beziehung  zwischen  der 
Farbe  und  der  Konstitution  der  Haloiddoppelsalze.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  17  (1898),  207;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  475;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1898,  ii,  247. 

1898:  21.  E.  Fink.  Action  de  Foxyde  de  carbone  sur  le  chlorure 
palladeux.  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  126  (1898),  646;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  (3),  19  (1898),  315;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  382;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  775. 


264 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1898:  22.  U.  Antony  and  A.  Lucchesi.  Azione  dell’  anidride  sol- 
forosa  sul  solfato  di  rutenio.  (S02  on  Eu(S04)2.)  Eu. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  28,  ii  (1898),  139;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  299; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  962. 

1898:  23.  J.  L.  Howe  and  E.  A.  O’Neal.  Formation  of  alums 
by  electrolysis.  (No  alum  formed  by  ruthenium  by  this 
method.)  Eu. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  20  (1898),  759;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  103; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  962. 

1898:  24.  A.  Joly  and  E.  Leidie.  Action  de  la  chaleur  sur  les 
nitrites  doubles  alcalins  des  metaux  du  gruppe  du  platine; 
composes  du  rhodium.  Eh. 

Compt.  rend.  127  (1898),  103;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  19  (1898),  1031;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  34;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  410. 

1898:  25.  J.  L.  Howe  and  H.  D.  Campbell.  Some  new  rutheno- 
cyanides  and  the  double  ferrocyanide  of  barium  and  po- 
tassium. Eu. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  20  (1898),  29;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  20  (1898),  383; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  i (1898),  615;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  i,  554. 

1898:26.  F.  Eeitzenstein.  Ueber  die  verschiedenen  Theorien  zur 
Erklarung  der  Konstitution  der  Metallammoniaksalze.  Habili- 
tationsschrift,  Wurzburg,  1898.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Eh,  Os,  Eu. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  18  (1898),  152;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  95;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1898,  ii,  1196. 

1898:27.  F.  Eeitzenstein.  Ammoniak-pyridinsalze  und  Hydrate 
bivalenter  Metalle.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  18  (1898),  253;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  160;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  290. 

1898:  28.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Konstitution  der  Kobalt-, 
Chrom-  und  Ehodiumbasen,  XI.  Pt,  Ir,  Eh. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  19  (1898),  109;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  293;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  472. 

1898:  29.  A.  Eosenheim  and  J.  A.  Maass.  Einige  Pyridinbasen 
des  vierwertigen  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  18  (1898),  331;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  163;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  429. 

1898:  30.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  sets  complexes  du  platine;  oxalates 
et  chlorures.  (Includes  preparation  of  K2PtCl4.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  19  (1898),  875;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  572;  76,  ii 

(1899),  492;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  18. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


265 


1898:  31.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  W.  O.  Rabe.  Einwirkung  von 
Halogenalkyl  auf  Merkaptide.  (Continuation  of  1897 : 20.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  17  (1898),  26;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  i (1898),  458;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1898,  ii,  266. 

1898:  32.  J.  Shields.  Nature  of  palladium-hydrogen.  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinburgh,  22  (1898),  169;  Beiblatter  Ann.  Phys.  Chem. 
23  (1900),  168;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  215. 

1898:  33.  N.  D.  Zelinsky.  Reduktionsvorgange  in  Gegenwart 
von  Palladium.  Pd. 

Ber.  31  (1898),  3203;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1898),  340;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [3],  22  (1899),  4,  359;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  181;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  410. 

1898:  34.  T.  Curtius  and  J.  Rissom.  Neue  Untersuchungen  fiber 
den  Sticks toffwassers toff  N3PI.  (Reaction  with  H2PtCl6.)  Pt. 

J.prakt.  Chem.  [2],  58  (1898),  281;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  90;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1898,  ii,  1238. 

1898:  35.  E.  A.  Klobbie.  (Volumetric  determination  of  osmic 
acid,  Os04.)  Os. 

Kon.  Akad.  v.  Wetensch.  4/5,  1898;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  184; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  65. 

1898:  36.  P.  Jannasch.  Ueber  quantitative  Metalltrennungen  in 
ammoniakalischer  und  saurer  Losung  durch  Hydroxylamin 
und  durch  Hydrazin.  (Separation  of  tellurium  and  pal- 
ladium.) Pd. 

Ber.  31  (1898),  2377;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  59;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898, 
ii,  1033. 

1898:  37.  A.  Atterberg.  Die  Kalibestimmungsmethode  und  die 
besten  Fallungsmittel  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  22  (1898),  522,  538;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  125;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1898,  ii,  316,  604. 

1898:  38.  M.  Margules.  Auflosung  von  Platin  und  Gold  in 
Elektrolyten.  Pt. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedemann)  [2],  65  (1898),  629;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74, 
ii  (1898),  497;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  411. 

1898:  39.  M.  Margules.  Nachtrag  zur  Mitteilung  fiber  die  Auflo- 
sung von  Platin  und  Gold  in  Elektrolyten.  Pt. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedemann)  [2],  66  (1898),  540;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76, 
ii  (1899),  200;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  17. 

1898:  40.  G.  Bredig.  Einige  Anwendungen  des  elektrischen 
Lichtbogens.  (Preparation  of  colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  4 (1898),  514;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  325. 


206  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1898 : 41 . G.  Bredig.  Darstellung  kolloidaler  Metalllosungen  durch 
elektrische  Zerstaubung.  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  1898,  951;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78, ii  (1900),  213;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1899,  i,  326. 

1898:  42.  A.  de  Hemptinne.  Sur  Faction  catalytique  de  la 
mousse  de  platine  et  de  palladium.  Pt,  Pd. 

Bui.  Acad.  roy.  Belgique  [3],  36  (1898),  155;  Z.  pliysik.  Chem.  27  (1898), 
429;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  146,  228;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  884. 

1898:  43.  F.  Haber.  Ueber  Elektrolyse  der  Salzsaure  nebst 
Mitteilungen  iiber  kathodische  Formation  von  Blei.  (Elec- 
trodes of  platinum  and  platinum-iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  16  (1898),  438;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  74,  ii  (1898),  364;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1898,  ii,  1234. 

1898:  44.  F.  Friedrichs.  Praktische  Fassung  fur  Platinspatel. 

Chem.  Ztg.  22  (1898),  917;  Chem.  Zentr.  1898,  ii,  1001.  Pt. 

1899:  1.  C.  W.  Purington.  The  platiniferous  deposits  of  the 
Toura.  Pt. 

Trans.  Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  29  (1899),  3;  Eng.  Mining  J.  12  (1904),  720. 

1899:  2.  J.  M.  Davison.  Platinum  and  iridium  in  meteoric  iron. 

Pt,  Ir. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  7 (1899),  4;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  308;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1899,  i,  569. 

1899:  3.  U.  S.  Consular  Reports,  59  (1899),  567.  Pt. 

1899:4.  E.  Leidie.  Sur  la  purification  de  F iridium.  Ir. 

J.  pharm.  chim.  [6],  10  (1899),  163;  Compt.  rend.  129  (1899),  214;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  664;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  471. 

1899 : 5.  W.  L.  Hardin.  Derivatives  and  atomic  mass  of  palladium. 
(Organic  palladammins;  atomic  weight  = 107.014.)  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  21  (1899),  943;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  85;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  1096. 

1899:  6.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  combinaisons  salines  de  Fosmium.  Os. 

Proc.  verb,  des  seances  de  la  Soc.  sci.  phys.  nat.  de  Bordeaux,  juin  1899. 

1899:  7.  A.  Rosenheim  and  E.  A.  Sasserath.  Zur  Kenntniss  des 
Osmiums.  (General  treatise;  many  salts  described.)  Os. 
Z.  anorg.  Chem.  21  (1899),  122;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  664;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  522. 

1899:  8.  O.  Sulc.  Die  Verfluchtigung  des  Osmiums  als  Os04  im 
Luft-  oder  Sauers toffstrome.  Os. 

Listy  Chemieke,  22,  233;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  19  (1899),  332;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
76,  ii  (1899),  299;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  520. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


2G7 


1899:9.  M.  Vezes.  Die  Verfluchtigung  des  Osmiums  im  Luft-  oder 
Sauerstoffstrome.  (Reply  to  1899:  8.)  Os. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  20  (1899),  230;  J.  Ghem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  492;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  1181. 

1899 : 10.  W.  Hittorf  and  H.  Salkowski.  Ueber  eine  merkwiirdige 
Klasse  unorganiscber  Sauren  und  ihrelektrolytiscbes  Verhalten. 
(H2PtCl40,  etc,)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  28  (1899),  546;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  398. 

1899:  11.  W.  Dittenberger  and  R.  Dietz.  Ueber  das  elektro- 
lytische  Verhalten  des  Platin-  und  Zinnchlorids.  (Further 
study  of  1899:  10.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  (Wiedmann)  [2],  68  (1899),  853;  J.  Chem.Sdc.  76,  ii 

(1899),  629;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  521. 

1899:  12.  E.  Leidie.  Sur  les  sesquichlorures  de  rhodium  et 
iridium.  Rh,  Xr. 

Compt.  rend.  129  (1899),  1249;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  146;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1900,  i,  279. 

1899:  13.  U.  Antony  and  A.  Lucchesi.  Contributo  alio  studio 
del  rutenio  e dei  suoi  composti;  Nota  preliminare;  I;  Sul  cloro- 
rutenati;  II,  SuLsolfato  di  rutenio;  III,  Azione  d’idrogeno 
solforato  e di  anidride  solforosa.  Ru. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  29,  i (1899),  312;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  558;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  ii,  472. 

1899:  14.  U.  Antony  and  A.  Lucchesi.  Contributo  alio  studio  del 
rutenio  e dei  suoi  composti;  sul  cloro-rutenato  potassico. 

Ru. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  29,  ii  (1899),  82;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  756;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  ii,  643. 

1899:  15.  U.  Antony  and  E.  Manasse.  Azione  dell’  anidride 
solforosa  sui  solfati  metallici,  e specialmente  sopra  il  solfato 
ferrico.  (Action  similar  to  that  on  ruthenium  sulphate.)  Ru. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  29,  i (1899),  483;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  753;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  ii,  516. 

1899:  16.  L.  Brizard.  Sur  un  nitrite  double  de  ruthenium  et.de 
potassium.  Ru# 

Compt.  rend.  129  (1899),  216;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  998;  Ann. 

chim.  phys.  [7],  21  (1900),  311;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  664;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  ii,  472. 

1899:  17.  L.  Brizard.  Sur  la  composition  des  osmiamates.  Os. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  170;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  559;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  824. 


268 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1899:  18.  P.  Beegsoe.  Baryumplatincyaniir  und  iridiumfreies 
Platin.  Pt,  Ir 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  19  (1899),  318;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  320;  76,  ii 
(1899),  299,  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  519. 

1899:  19.  C.  Matignon.  (Change  of  entropy  by  dissociation  in 
similar  heterogeneous  systems.)  (PdCl2  and  NH3.)  Pd 

Compt.  rend.  128  (1899),  103;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  273;  Chem 
Zentr.  1899,  ii  (1899),  467. 

1S99:  20.  A.  Werner,  W.  Megerle,  J.  Pastor,  and  W.  Spruck. 
Beitrag  zur  Konstitution  anorganischer  Verbindungen.  XVIII. 
Ueber  Aethylendiamin-  und  Propylendiaminverbindungen  von 
Salzen  zweiwertiger  Metalle.  Pt 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  21  (1899),  201;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  856;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  603. 

1899:  21.  N.  S.  Kurnakow  and  N.  J.  Gwosdarew.  Ueber  die 
Aethylendiamin  verbindungen  des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1899),  688;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  22  (1900),  384; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  i (1900),  209;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  i,  9. 

1899:  22.  A.  Werner  and  E.  Grebe.  Beitrag  zur  Konstitution 
anorganischer  Verbindungen.  XIX.  Ueber  Platinoxalato- 
verbindungen.  Pt, 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  21  (1899),  377;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  865;  Chem 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  698. 

1899:  23.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  sels  complexes  du  platine:  oxalates  et 
nitrites.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  143;  J.Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  671;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  726. 

1899:  24.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  sels  complexes  du  palladium:  pallado- 
oxalates.  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  172;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  672;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  824. 

1899:  25.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  sels  complexes  du  platine:  platooxalo- 
nitrite  de  potassium.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  481;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  i (1899),  741;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  17. 

1899:  26.  M.  C.  Harding.  Die  Verhaltnis  einiger  Salzlosungen 
gegen  eine  alkalische  Losung  des  Antimontrio xyds.  (Solu- 


tion of  H9PtCl6.) 


Pt. 


Z.  anorg.  Chem.  20  (1899),  235;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  490;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  i,  1179. 

1899:  27.  N.  Tarugi.  (Le  CaC2  reducteur  dans  les  analyses  par 
voie  seche.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  29,  i (1899),  509;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  24  (1900),  450; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  749. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


269 


1899:  28.  H.  Peterson.  Volumetrische  Bestimmung  des  Goldes 
und  Platins.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  19  (1899),  59;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  30  (1899),  633;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  253;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  380. 

1899:  29.  L.  Vanino  and  L.  Seemann.  Untersuchung  uber  das 
Gold.  I.  Zur  quantitativen  Bestimmung  des  Goldes  und  fiber 
seine  Trennung  yon  Platin  und  Iridium.  Ir,  Pt. 

Ber.  32  (1899),  1968;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  578;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899, 
ii,  320. 

1899:  30.  L.  G.  Kollock.  Electrolytic  determinations  and  sepa- 
rations. (Determination  of  palladium  and  platinum.) 

Pd,  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  21  (1899),  911;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  811;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  885. 

1899:  31.  S.  Cowper-Coles.  Notes  on  the  electro-deposition  of 
palladium.  Pd. 

Chem.  News,  79  (1899),  280;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  22  (1899),  811;  J.Chem. 
Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  755;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  176. 

1899:  32.  E.  Priwoznik.  Ueber  die  Scheidung  yon  platinhaltigem 
Gold.  Pt. 

Oesterr.  Z.  Berg-  u.  Hiittenw.  47  (1899),  356;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900), 
111;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  539. 

1899:  33.  C.  Winkler.  Die  elektrolytische  * Metallfallung  unter 
Anwendung  yon  Elektroden  aus  Platindrahtgewebe.  Pt. 

Ber.  32  (1899),  2192;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  723;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899, 
ii,  682. 

1899:  34.  D.  Tommasi.  Action  du  magnesium  sur  les  solutions 
salines.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  885;  J.Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii (1900),  16;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  1094. 

1899:  35.  R.  C.  Engel.  Sur  la  decomposition  de  Thyposulfite  de 
cuivre  par  le  palladium  precipite.  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  129  (1899),  518;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  750;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1899,  ii,  819. 

1899:  36.  A.  P.  Sabaneef.  Oxydation  de  Thydrazine  par  le  noir 
de  platine.  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1899),  163,  375;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  22 
(1899),  721;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  13;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  32. 

1899:  37.  G.  Bredig  and  R.  M.  v.  Berneck.  Ueber  anorganische 
Fermente.  I.  Ueber  Platinkatalyse  und  die  chemische  Dyn- 
amik  des  Wasserstoffsuperoxyds.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  31  (1899),  258;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1001),  662; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  213;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  i,  323. 


270 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1899:  38.  J.  Wagner.  Die  Reaktion  zwischen  Kaliumperman- 
ganat  und  Salzsaure  unter  den  Einfluss  von  Katalysatoren. 

Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  28  (1899),  33;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  275;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  584. 

1899:  39.  J.  Walden.  Ueber  die  gegenseitige  Umwandlung 
optischer  Antipoden.  Einfluss  von  Pafladiumoxydulhydrat. 

Pd. 

Ber.  32  (1899),  1833;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.[3],  22  (1899),  855;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

76,  ii  (1899),  538. 

1899:  40.  A.  Hebert  and  G.  Reynaud.  (An  X-ray  photometer.) 
(Use  of  K2Pt(CN)4.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  392;  J.Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  586;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  1265. 

1899:  41.  A.  Hebert  and  G.  Reynaud.  (Specific  absorption  of 
X-rays  by  metallic  salts.)  (Platinum  salts.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  394;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  586;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  i,  1265.  - 

1899:  42.  L.  Holborn  and  A.  Day.  Ueber  die  Thermoelektrizitat 
einiger  Metalle.  Pt,  Rh,  Pd. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  preuss.  Akad.  1899,  691;  Ann.  Physik  [4],  2 (1900),  519; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  466. 

1899:  43.  W.  R.  E.  Hodgkinson,  R.  Waring,  and  A.  P.  H.  Des- 
borough.  Alloys  of  platinum  and  palladium  with  cadmium, 
zinc,  and  magnesium.  Pt,  Pd. 

Report  Brit.  Assoc.  1899,  714;  Chem.  News,  80  (1899),  185;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

78,  ii  (1900),  282;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  1046. 

1899:  44.  H.  von  Juptner.  Beitrage  zur  Anwendung  des  Losungs- 
theorie  auf  Metalllegierungen.  Pt. 

Stahl  u.  Eisen,  19  (1899),  23;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  403. 

1899:  45.  P.  W.  Shimer.  Carbon  combustions  in  a platinum 
crucible.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  21  (1899), .557;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  76,  ii  (1899),  694;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1899,  ii,  458. 

1899:  46.  W.  Palmaer.  Einfacher  Schutz  fur  eingeschmolzcno 
Platindraht.  Pt. 

Ber.  32  (1899),  2570;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  8;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii. 

898. 

1899:  47.  E.  Merck.  Pniparate.  Osmiummetall.  (In  electric 
• incandescent  lights.)  Os. 

Merck’s  Jahresb.  1898,  25  (about  p.  140);  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  706. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


271 


1899:  48.  R.  H.  Adie.  Note  on  the  reactions  between  sulphuric 
acid  and  the  elements  (platinum  and  palladium).  Pt,  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  15  (1899),  132;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  ii,  8. 

1899:  49.  W.  C.  Heraus.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  einer  innigen 
Verbindung  zwischen  Platin  oder  Platinmetallen  und  nicht 
metallischen  Korpern.  (German  patent  111012,  Mar.  8,  1899.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Patentblatt,  21  (1899),  763;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  152. 

1899:  50.  E.  Valenta.  Verwendung  von  Phenylendiamin  boi 
Herstellung  von  Platintonbadern.  Pt. 

Photo.  Corr.;  Chem.  Zentr.  1899,  i,  761. 

1899:  51.  Liste  chronologique  des  travaux  de  Joly. 

(Travaux  sur  le  ruthenium.)  Ru. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  21  (1899),  12. 

1900:  1.  D.  T.  Day.  Note  on  the  occurrence  of  platinum  in  North 
America.  Pt. 

Trans.  Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  30  (1900),  702. 

1900:  la.  F.  Loewinson-Lessing.  Geologische  Skizze  der  Be- 
sitzung  Jushno-Saossersk  und  des  Berges  Deneskin-Kamen. 

Trav.  Soc.  nat.  St.-Petersbourg,  30,  v.  Pt. 

1900:  2.  W.  J.  Waterman.  Economic  geology  in  the  Similkameen 
district.  Pt. 

Brit.  Columbia  Min.  Record,  Nov.  (1900),  411. 

1900:  3.  J.  L.  Howe.  The  eighth  group  of  the  periodic  system 
and  some  of  its  problems.  (Vice-presidential  address.) 

Ru,  Os,  Rh,  Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

Proc.  Am.  Assoc.  Adv.  Sc.  49  (1900),  83;  Chem.  News,  82  (1900),  15,  30, 37, 
52;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  553. 

1900:  4.  E.  Leidie.  Separation  des  metaux  du  platine.  (Com- 
munication provisoire.)  Ru,  Os,  Rh,  Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  23  (1900),  898. 

1900:  5.  E.  Leidie.  Nouvelle  methode  de  separation  des  metaux 
rares  qui  accompagnent  le  platine.  Ru,  Os,  Rh,  Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  131  (1900),  888;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  25  (1900),  9;  J.  pharm. 
chim.  [6],  13  (1901),  18;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  62;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1901,  i,  64. 

1900:  6.  U.  Antony  and  A.  Lucchesi.  Contributo  alio  studio  del 
rutenio  e de’  suoi  composti:  IV.  Sopra  alcune  combinazioni 
solf orate  del  rutenio.  (RuS3,  RuS2.)  Ru. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.30,  ii  (1900),  539;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  247;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  i,  501. 


272  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1900:  7.  A.  Miolati.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  Platintetrachlorids.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  22  (1900),  445;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  87,  ii  (1900),  214;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1900,  i,  400. 

1900:  8.  A.  Miolati  and  I.  Bellucci.  Ueber  die  Pentachlorplatin- 
saure.  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  9,  ii(  1900),  51,97;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  30,  ii  (1900), 
565;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  26  (1901),  209;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  732; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  623,  717. 


1900:  9.  A.  Miolati  and  I.  Bellucci.  Ueber  das  Platintetra- 
bromid.  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  9,  ii  (1900),  140;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  30,  ii (1900),  580; 
Z.  anorg.  Chem.  26  (1901),  222;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  361;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  732;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  810. 

1900:  10.  L.  Brizard.  Recherches  sur  les  combinaisons  nitrosees 
du  ruthenium  et  de  Fosmium.  (Includes  osmiamates.)  Ru,  Os. 
Ann.  chim.  phys.  [7],  21  (1900),  311;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1900),  107; 
Chem.  Zentr,  1900,  ii,  1149. 

1900:  11.  C.  Benedicks.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntnis  des  Gadoliniums. 
(Chloro-  and  cyanoplatinates.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  22  (1900),  393;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  209;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1900,  i,  396. 


1900:  12.  F.  Kohlrausch.  Ueber  die  durch  die  Zeit  oder  durch 
das  Licht  bewirkte  Hydrolyse  einiger  Chlorverbindungeii  von 
Platin,  Gold  und  Zinn.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  33  (1900),  257;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  834;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  408;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  i,  1190. 


1900:  13.  W.  Oechsner  de  Coninck.  Sur  un  mode  de  decom- 
position des  perchlorures  metalliques.  (Decomposition  of 
platinum  chloride  by  animal  charcoal.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  130  (1900),  1551;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  23  (1900),  669;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  485;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  91. 


1900:  14.  E.  Biilmann.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Allylalkohol 
auf  Kaliumplatochlorid.  Pt. 

Ber.  33  (1900),  2196;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26(1901),  196;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78, i 
(1900),  543;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  424. 

1900:  15.  A.  Miolati  and  C.  C.  Tagiuri.  Sopra  alcuni  composti 
del  rutenio.  (Chlorides  and  sulphites.)  Ru. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  30,  ii  (1900),  511;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  246;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  i,  501. 


1900:  16.  W.  Prandtl  and  K.  A.  Hofmann.  Ueber  Platin- 
Kohlenstoff-Verbindungen.  (With  mesityl  oxide  and  with 
chloroform.)  Pt. 

Ber.  33  (1900),  2981;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  70;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  i 
(1901),  13;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  1196. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


273 


1900:  17.  A.  Rosenheim.  Zur  Kenntnis  des  Osmiums.  (Sul- 
phites and  bromides.)  Os. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  24  (1900),  420;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  660;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1900,  ii,  527. 

1900:  18.  U.  Antony  and  A.  Lucchesi.  Contributo  alio  studio 
del  rutenio  e de’  suoi  composti.  III.  Sulk  ottenimento  del 
ditionato  rutenoso  per  azione  di  anidride  solforosa  sul  sollato 
di  rutenio  Ru(S04)2.  II  solfito  rutenico  Ru2(S03)3  azzuro. 

Ru. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  30,  ii  (1900),  71;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  659;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1900,  ii,  663. 

1900:  19.  A.  Rosenheim  and  H.  Itzig.  Ueber  komplexe  Palla- 
diumsalze.  (Iodo-nitrites,  etc.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  23  (1900),  28;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  282;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1900,  i,  504. 

1900:  20.  E.  Leidie.  Sur  les  rhodicyanures.  Rh. 

Compt.  rend.  130  (1900),  87;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  i (1900),  212;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1900,  i,  401. 

1900:  21.  A.  Miolati  and  I.  Bellucci.  Sopra  alcuni  composti  del 
platino.  (Chlorocyanides,  thiocyanates  and  bromonitrites.) 

Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  30,  ii  (1900),  588;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  28  (1902),  774;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  246;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  i,  500. 

1900:  22.  P.  Walden.  Ueber  einige  zusammengesetzte  Rhodan- 
und  Cyanverbindungen.  (Ionization  of  K2Pt(SCN)6.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  23  (1900),  373;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  430;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1900,  i,  1218. 

1900:  23.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Konstitution  der  Platinbasen,  II 

III.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  24  (1900),  153;  25  (1900),  353;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  i (1900), 

542;  80,  i (1901),  163;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  166;  1901,  i,  90. 

1900:  24.  R.  Uhlenhuth.  Ueber  Platinverbindungen  mit  Ily- 
droxylamin.  Pt. 

Ann.  311  (1900),  120;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  24  (1900),  626;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

78,  ii  (1900),  485;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  12. 

19C0:  25.  R.  Uhlenhuth.  Bemerkung  zu  der  Abhandlung  liber 
Platinverbindungen  mit  Hydroxylamin.  Pt. 

Ann.  312  (1900),  235;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  24  (1900),  626;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

78,  ii  (1900),  659;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  556. 

1900:  26.  II.  Loiseleur.  Sur  un  nouvel  acide  complexe  et  ses  sels. 
(Pallado-oxalic  acid  and  pallado-oxalates.)  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  131  (1900),  262;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  i (1900),  542;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1900,  ii,  466. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 18 


274 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1900:  27.  L.  Wintrebert.  Sur  quelques  osmyloxalates.  Os. 

Compt.  rend.  131  (1900),  264;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  i (1900),  543;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1900,  ii,  466. 

1900:  28.  M.  E.  Pozzi-Escot  and  H.  C.  Couquet.  Nouvelle 
reaction  microchimique  du  palladium.  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  130  (1900),  1073;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  23  (1900),  633;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  371;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  i,  1092. 

1900:  29.  W.  Mietzschke.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  des  Iridiums  in 
Edelmetalllegierungen.  Ir. 

Berg,  hiittenm.  Ztg.  59  (1900),  61;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  371;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1900,  i,  572. 

1900:  30.  A.  Ditte.  Sur  la  cristallisation  de  Tor.  (Action  of 
NaCl  and  Na2S207  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  131  (1900),  143;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  23  (1900),  707;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  549;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  ii,  423. 

1900:  31.  H.  Euler.  (Catalysis.  III.  Theory  of  contact  ac- 
tion.) Pt. 

Oefversigt  Akad.  Forh.  Stockholm,  57  (1900),  267;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80, 
ii  (1901),  495. 

1900:  32.  W.  French.  Influence  of  finely  divided  platinum  on  the 
combination  of  hydrogen  and  oxygen.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  81  (1900),  292;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  718;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1900,  ii,  162. 

1900:  33.  R.  Hober.  Ueber  Platinkatalyse.  Beobachtungen  an 
Gasket  ten.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Physiol.  82  (1900),  631;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  151;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  i,  7. 

1900:  34.  G.  Lunge  and  J.  Akunoff.  Ueber  das  Verlialten  eines 
Gemenges  von  Benzoldampf  und  Wasserstoff  zu  Platin-  und 
Palladiumschwarz.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  24  (1900),  191;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  i (1900),  543;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1900,  ii,  158. 

1900:  35.  O.  Sulc.  Hydrolyse  der  Polysaccharide  und  Esterzer- 
setzung  unter  der  katalytischen  Wirkung  einiger  Metalle. 

Pd,  Os,  Ir,  Rh. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  33  (1900),  47;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  736;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  395;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  i,  942. 

1900:  36.  W.  A.  Tii.den.  Specific  heats  of  metals  and  the  relation 
of  specific  heat  to  atomic  weight.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  A 66  (1900),  244;  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  London, 
A 194  (1901),  233;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  524;  Chem.  Zentr.  1900,  i, 
1059. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


275 


1900:  37.  F.  Streintz.  Ueber  die  elektrische  Leitfahigkeit  von 
gepressten  Pulvern.  I.  Die  Leitfahigkeit  von  Platinmohr, 
amorphem  Kohlenstoff  und  Graphit.  Pt. 

Monatsh.  21  (1900),  461;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  641;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1900,  ii,  553. 

1900:  38.  E.  Steinmann.  Sur  les  proprietes  thermoelectriques 
de  divers  alliages.  (Platinum-iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  130  (1900),  1300;  Beiblatter  Ann.  Phys.  Chem.  24  (1901), 

819;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  523. 

1900:  39.  H.  Rossler.  Ueber  das  Verbalten  des  Rhodiums  in 
Edelmetalllegierungen.  Rh,  Pt,  Ir 

Chem.  Ztg.  24  (1900),  733;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  732;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1900,  ii,  717. 

1900:  40.  R.  W.  Hall.  Cause  of  the  loss  in  weight  of  commercial 
platinum  when  heated  under  some  conditions.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  22  (1900),  494;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  78,  ii  (1900),  659;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1900,  ii,  717. 

1901 : 1.  M.  P.  E.  Berthelot.  (Presence  of  platinum  among  the 
characters  of  a hieroglyphic  inscription.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  132  (1901),  729;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [7],  23  (1901),  5;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  318,  515. 

1901:  2.  W.  C.  Knight.  The  discovery  of  platinum  in  Wyoming. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  72  (1901),  845.  Pt. 

1901:  3.  W.  Majert.  Verfahren  zur  Darstellung  platinierter 

Kontaktsubstanzen.  (German patent  134928, Mar.  29,  1901.) 

Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1022.  Pt. 

1901:  4.  H.  Erdmann.  Ueber  den  gegenwartigen  Stand  der 

Atomgewichtsfrage.  (Atomic  weight  of  palladium.)  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  14  (1901),  841;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  721. 

1901:  5.  M.  Blondel.  Sur  un  nouveau  compose  du  platine. 

(Platinate?)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  25  (1901),  739. 

1901 : 6.  J.  W.  Mallet.  On  the  formation  of  platinum  tetrachlo- 
ride from  aqueous  hydrochloric  acid  by  atmospheric  oxidation 
in  contact  with  platinum  black.  Pt. 

Am.  Chem.  J.  25  (1901),  430;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  1053;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  454;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  19. 

1901:  7.  A.  Miolati  and  E.  Mascetti.  (Contribution  to  the 

knowledge  of  some  inorganic  acids.)  (Neutralization  and 

. .m  h. conductivity  of  H2PtCl6.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  31,  i (1901),  93;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  381;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1901.  i.  1137. 


276  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1901:  8.  A.  Baeyer  and  Y.  Villiger.  Ueber  die  basiscben  Eigen- 
scbaften  des  Sauerstoffs.  (Chloroplatinates  of  oxygen  bases.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  34  (1901),  2679;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  i (1901),  659;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901, 
ii,  973. 

1901 : 9.  A.  Werner  and  E.  Humphrey.  Ueber  stereoisomere 
Dinitritodiathylendiaminkobaltsalze.  (Chloroplatinites  and 
-platinates.)  Pt. 

Ber.  34  (1901),  1719;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  886;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
80,  i (1901),  511. 

1901:  10.  J.  L.  Howe.  Contributions  to  the  study  of  ruthenium. 
IV.  The  chlorides.  Hu. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  23  (1901),  775;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  il  (1902),  86;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  18. 

1901:  11.  A.  Piccini  and  L.  Marino.  Ueber  die  Alaune  des  Rho- 
diums. Anhang:  Trennung  des  Rhodiums  vom  Iridium. 

Rh,  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  27  (1901),  62;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  362;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  392;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  i,  1037. 

1901:  12.  C.  Renz.  Ueber  Indium.  (Platocyanide.)  Pt. 

Ber.  34  (1901),  2763;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  657;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901, 
ii,  971. 

1901:  13.  A.  Werner  and  C.  H.  Herty.  Beitrage  zur  Konstitu- 
tion  anorg anischer  Verbindungen.  IV.  Platindiammins.  Pt, 
Z.  physik.  Chem.  38  (1901),  331;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  28f<d902),  18;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),.  638;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  844. 

1901:  14.  F.  C.  Phillips.  Compounds  of  methyl  sulphide  with 
halides  of  metals.  (With  PdCl2.)  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  23  (1901),  250;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  675; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  i (1901),  444;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  183. 

1901:  15.  A.  Werner.  Ueber  Acetylacetonverbindungen  des  Pla- 

tins.  Pt. 

Ber.  34  (1901),  2584;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  28  (1902),  119;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
80,  i (1901),  682;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  917. 

1901:  16.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  sels  platiniques  complexes.  IV. 
Oxalonitrites  des  metaux  alcalino-terreux.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  25  (1901),  157;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  i (1901),  187;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1900,  i,  609. 

1901:  17.  L.  Wintrebert.  Sur  quelques  osmyloxalates.  03. 

Compt.  rend.  132  (1901),  824;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  i (1901),  313;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  i,  995. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


277 


1901:  18.  A.  Werner  and  K.  Dinklage.  Ueber  Nitrilopenta- 
chloroosmiumsaure  und  die  Konstitution  der  Osmiumsaure. 

Os. 

Ber.  34  (1901),  2698;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  28  (1902),  120;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

80,  li  (1901),  661;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  973. 

1901:  19.  A.  Coehn.  Ueber  kathodische  Polarisation  und  Bildung 
von  Legierungen.  (Pd-H  and  Pt-H.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  38  (1901),  609;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  2;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1901  ii,  1193. 

1901 : 20.  E.  Leidie  and  L.  Quennessen.  Sur  le  dosage  du  platine 
et  iridium  dans  les  minerais  de  platine.  Pt,  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  25  (1901),  840;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  695;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1901,  i,  1094. 

1901:  21.  A.  Berthold.  Methode  zur  Verarbeitung  von  Platin- 
riickstanden.  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  14  (1901),  621;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  557;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1901,  ii,  176. 

1901:  22.  G.  T.  Beilby  and  G.  G.  Henderson.  The  action  of 
ammonia  on  metals  at  high  temperatures.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  17  (1901),  190;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  79  (1901),  1245;  Bui. 

Soc.  chim.  [3],  28  (1902),  52;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  1297. 

1901:  23.  A.  Sachs.  Krystallographisch-optische  Studien  an  syn- 
thetisch  dargestellten  (anorganischen)  Verbindungen.  (K2Os- 
Br6,  K6H20s(S03)4C14,  and  (NH4)3Pd(S03)Cl3.H20.)  Pd,  Os. 

Z.  Kryst.  Min.  34  (1901),  162;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  i,  872. 

1901:  23a.  H.  Dufet.  (Crystallographical  measurements.)  Rh. 

Bui.  Soc.  fran£.  mineral.  24  (1901),  121;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  177. 

1901:  24.  A.  Winkelmann.  Ueber  die  Diffusion  von  Wasserstoff 
durch  Palladium.  Pd. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  6 (1901),  104;  J:  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  646;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1901,  ii,  678. 

1901:  24a.  G.  Bredig.  Ueber  die  fermentativen  Eigenschaften 
des  Platins  und  anderer  Metalle.  Pt. 

Physik.  Ztsch.  2 (1901),  7. 

1901 : 25.  G.  Bredig  and  K.  Ikeda.  Ueber  anorganische  Fer- 
mente.  II.  Die  Lahmung  der  Platinkatalyse  durch  Gifte.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  37  (1901),  1,  323;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  26  (1901),  1038; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  441;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  i,  1260. 

1901:  26.  R.  W.  Raudnitz.  Die  Lahmung  der  Platinkatalyse 

,(  durch  Gifte.  (Remarks  on  1899:  37.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  37  (1901),  551;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  496;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1901,  ii,  263. 


278  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1901:  27.  G.  Bredig.  Die  Lahmung  der  Platinkatalyse  durch 
Gifte.  (Response  to  1901 : 26.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  38  (1901),  122;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  596;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  ii,  614. 

1901:  28.  C.  Ernst.  Ueber  die  Katalyse  des  Knallgases  durch 
kolloi  dales  Platin.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  37  (1901),  448;  J.  Chem.  Soc.80,ii  (1901),  495;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  ii,  176. 

1901:  29.  L.  Wohler.  Die  pseudokatalytisclie  Sauerstoffaktivier- 
ung  des  Platins.  Karlsruhe,  1901.  Pt. 

1901:  30.  E.  Schaer.  (The  oxidizing  action  of  copper  salts.)  (In- 
fluence of  colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

Arch.  Pharm.  239  (1901),  610;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  140. 

1901:  31.  E.  Bose.  Untersuchungen  uber  die  elektromotorischo 
Wirksamkeit  der  elementaren  Gase.  II.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  38  (1901),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  589;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  ii,  611. 

1901:  32.  P.  Schonherr.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Polarisationskapazi- 
tat  des  blanken  Platins.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  6 (1901),  116;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  674. 

1901:  33.  E.  Wtarburg.  Ueber  die  Polarisationskapazitat  des 
Platins.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  6 (1901),  125;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  ii,  675. 

1901:  34.  E.  Muller.  Studien  uber  kathodische  Polarisation  und 
Depolarisation.  (With  platinum  cathodes.)  Habilitations- 
schrift,  Dresden.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  26  (1901),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  219;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  ii,  353. 

1901:  35.  O.  Brunck.  Ueber  einige  krystallisirte,  metallische  Ver- 
bindungen  des  Aluminiums.  (With  platinum,  Pt3Al10.)  Pt. 

Ber.  34  (1901),  2733;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  656;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901, 
ii,  908. 

1901:  36.  E.  Maey.  Das  spezifische  Yolum  als  Bestimmungs- 
merkmal  chemischer  Verbindungen  unter  den  Metalllegier- 
ungen.  (Pt-Ir.)  Ir,  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  38  (1901),  292;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  80,  ii  (1901),  655;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1901,  ii,  841. 

1901 : 37.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  einer  Platin- 
elektrode.  (German  patent  132588,  Mar.  22,  1901.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  489. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


279 


1901:  38.  Scholz.  Die  Osmiumgluhlampe  von  Auer  v.  Wels- 
bach.  Os. 

J.  Gasbel.  44  (1901),  101;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  i,  554. 

1901:  39.  F.  Blau  and  Elektrische  Gluhlampenfabrik, 
“Watt”  (Scharf  & Co.),  Wien.  Verfahren  zur  XJmwandlung 
drahtformiger  Leuchtkorper  aus  Kohle  in  solche  aus  Osmium, 
bezw.  Ruthenium.  (German  patent  132428,  Feb.  1,  1901.) 

Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  83.  Qs,  Ru. 

1901:  40.  Cohen.  Neue  Arzneimittel.  Palladium  Chloratum  (zur 
Behandlung  von  Tuberkulose).  Pd. 

Pharm.  Ztg.  46  (1901),  131;  Chem.  Zentr.  1901,  i,  641. 

1902:  1.  J.  F.  Kemp.  The  geological  relations  and  distribution  of 
platinum  and  the  associated  metals.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Bui.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  193,  95  pages;  J.  Iron  Steel  Inst.  1902,  i,  420. 

1902:  la.  L.  Duparc  and  F.  Pearce.  Recherches  geologiques  et 
petrographiques  sur  FOural  du  Nord.  Pt. 

Mem.  Soc.  physique  de  Geneve,  34,  i. 

1902:  lb.  F.  J.  Damaret.  Le  platine,  gisements,  exploitation  et 
metallurgie.  Pt. 

Echo  indust.  Bruxelles,  1902,  276. 

1902:  lc.  H.  D.  McCaskey.  Platinum  and  associated  rare  metals 
in  placer  formations.  Pt. 

Bui.  Philippine  Ids.  Min.  Bur.  1 (1902). 

1902:  Id.  — r — Platinum  in  New  South  Wales.  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Arts,  London,  50  (1902),  598. 

1902:  2.  H.  L.  Wells  and  L.  A.  Penfield.  A new  occurrence  of 
sperrylite.  (Rambler  mine,  Wyoming.)  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  13  (1902),  95;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  267;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1902,  i,  680. 

1902:  3.  J.  H.  L.  Vogt.  Platingehalt  im  norwegischen  Nickelerz. 

Z.  prakt.  Geol.  10  (1902),  258;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  850.  Pt. 

1902:  3a.  G.  Siebert.  Das  Platin,  sein  Gewinnung  und  seine 
Verwendung  in  der  Industrie.  Pt. 

Prometheus,  13  (1902),  632,  643. 

1902:  4.  Farbwerke  vorm.  Meister  Lucius  und  Bruning.  Ver- 
fahren zur  Reaktivierung  von  Platinkontakt  in  Schwefelsaurc- 
anhydridkontaktprozess.  (German  patent  135887,  Feb.  7, 
1902.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1228. 


280 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GEOUP. 


1902:  5.  A.  Miolati  and  C.  Gialdini.  (Contribution  a F etude 
de  riridium  et  de  ses  composes.)  Ir. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  11,  ii  (1902),  151;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  32,  ii  (1903),  513; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  32  (1904),  670;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  24; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1092. 

1902:  5a.  L.  Wintrebert.  Recherches  sur  quelques  sels  com- 
plexes de  Fosmium.  Thesis,  Paris,  1902.  Os. 

1902:  6.  L.  Wohler.  (Les  degres  d’oxydation  du  platine.)  Ha- 
bilitationsschrift,  Karlsruhe,  1902.  Pt. 

1902:  7.  E.  Leidie  and  L.  Quennessen.  L’ action  du  natrium  bi- 
oxyde  sur  les  metaux  du  groupe  du  platine. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  27  (1902),  179;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  360;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  907. 

1902:  8.  W.  L.  Dudley.  The  action  of  fused  sodium  peroxide  on 
metals.  Pd,  Pt. 

Am.  Chem.  J.  28  (1902),  59;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  30  (1903),  205;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  664;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  686. 

1902:  9.  I.  Bellucci.  (Sur  Facide  monochloroplatinique.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  11,  ii  (1902),  241,  271;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  33,  i (1903), 
134;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  155;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  130. 

1902:  10.  W.  Oechsner  de  Coninck.  Action  de  quelques  sels  sur 
platine  tetrachlorure.  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  roy.  Belg.  1902,  730;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  219;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  i,  435. 

1902:  11.  A.  Cleve.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntnis  des  Ytterbiums. 
(Chloro-,  bromo-  and  cyanoplatinates.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  32  (1902),  129;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  30  (1903),  487;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  659;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  981. 

1902:  12.  O.  Hesse.  (Hyoscin  und  Atroscin.)  (Properties  of  the 
chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  66  (1902),  194;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  i (1902),  817. 

1902:  13.  P.  Pfeiffer.  Die  Halogensalze.  (Contains  list  of  all 
known  bromo-  and  iodo-salts.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  31  (1902),  191;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  498;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902  ii,  243. 

1902:  14.  I.  Bellucci.  (Sur  le  tetraiodure  de  platine.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  11,  i (1902),  8;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  33,  i (1903),  147; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  267;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  i,  625. 

1902:  15.  P.  Klason  and  J.  Wanselin.  Ueber  gemischte  Plato- 
phosphinaminverbindungen.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  67(1902),  41;  J.Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1903),  238;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  i,  624. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


281 


1902:  16.  J.  Meyer.  Ueber  die  Bildung  der  Dithionsaure.  (Ref- 
erence to  work  of  Antony,  1898:  22.)  Ru. 

Ber.  35  (1902),  3429;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  18;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii, 
1294. 

1902:  17.  E.  Leidie.  Sur  les  nitrites  doubles  de  riridium.  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  134  (1902),  1582;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.[3],  27  (1902),  936;  Ann. 
chim.  phys.  [7],  26  (1902),  479;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  566;  84,  ii 
(1903),  24;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  338. 

1902:  18.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  sels  complexes  du  platine.  V. 
Reaction  des  nitrites  platooxaliques.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  27  (1902),  930;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  25;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1174. 

1902:  19.  A.  Baeyer  and  Y.  Villiger.  Ueber  die  basischc  Eigen- 
schaften  des  Sauerstoffs.  (“ Ethyl  platocyanide.”)  Pt. 

Ber.  35  (1902),  1201;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  i (1902),  355;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  i, 
997. 

1902:  20.  L.  Spiegel.  Ueber  Neutralaffinitaten.  (Theory  of  the 
platinum  bases.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  29  (1902),  365;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  248;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  699. 

1902:  21.  A.  Werner.  Ueber  Haupt-  und  Nebenvalenzen  und 
fiber  die  Konstitution  der  Ammoniumverbindungen.  Ueber  die 
Konstitution  der  Oxoniumsalze.  Pt. 

Ann.  322  (1902),  261,  296;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  i(1902),  686;  82,  ii  (1902), 
554;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  426,  427. 

1902:  22r  P.  Klason.  Ueber  die  Konstitution  der  Platinammo- 
niakverbindungen.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  67  (1902),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1902),  224;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  i,  620. 

1902:  23.  M.  Vezes  and  L.  Wintrebert.  Sur  les  sels  complexes 
dePosmium;  Tosmyloxalate  de  potassium.  Os. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  27  (1902),  569;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  i (1902),  587;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  ii,  338. 

1902:  24.  N.  Awerkieff.  (Precipitation  of  crystalline  gold  by 
formaldehyde.)  (Also  precipitation  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1902),  828;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  35  (1903), 
329;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  218,  603;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  562; 
ii,  188. 

1902:  25.  A.  Piccini  and  L.  Marino.  Ueber  einige  Vanadium- 
yerbindungen  von  der  Form  VX2.  (Action  of  VS04  on 

,j  platinum  salts.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  32  (1902),  55;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  663;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  ii,  884. 


282 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1902:  26.  P.  A.  E.  Richards.  Estimation  of  platinum,  gold,  and 
silver  in  alloys.  Pt, 

Analyst,  27  (1902),  265;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  701;  Chem.  Zentr 
1902,  ii,  1014. 

1902:  27.  G.  von  Knorre.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  von  Kohlen- 
stoff  bei  Gegenwart  von  Osmium.  Os. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  15  (1902),  393;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  427;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  1338. 

1902:  27a.  H.  Spi«ss.  Ueber  die  Jodometrie  von  Gold  und 
Platin.  Akademische  Dissertation,  Freiburg,  1902.  Pt. 

1902:  28.  E.  F.  Smith.  Electrochemical  analysis,  3d  ed.  Phila- 
delphia, 1902.  Pd,  Pt. 

1902:  29.  E.  Knoevenagel  and  E.  Ebler.  Ueber  die  Anwend- 
barkeit  der  Hydroxylamin-  und  Hydrazinsalze  in  der  quali- 
tativen  Analyse.  Ein  neuer  Trennungsgang  in  der  Schwefel- 
wasserstoffgruppe.  Pt. 

Ber.  35  (1902),  3055;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  697;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902, 
ii,  1150. 

1902:  30.  F.  Jean.  Sur  le  dosage  de  CO  et  C02  dans  Fair  gate. 
(Emploi  de  PdCl2.)  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  135  (1902),  746;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  29  (1903),  356;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  103;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1431. 

1902:  31.  K.  W.  Charitschkoff.  Ueber  die  fraktionierte  Ver- 
brennung  von  Wasserstoff,  Kohlenoxyd  und  Isopentan.  (By 
palladium  sponge.)  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1902),  461;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902), 
702;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  609. 

1902:  32.  H.  Dufet.  Notes  crist alio graphiques.  (Mixed  nitrites, 
oxalates,  and  osmiamates.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os. 

Bui.  Soc.  frang.  mineral.  25  (1902),  125;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1498. 

1902:  33.  L.  IIolborn  and  F.  Henning.  Zerstaubung  und  Re- 
krystallisation  der  Platinmetalle.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  preuss.  Akad.  1902,  936;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  664 j 
Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  840. 

1902:  34.  W.  Rosenhain.  The  recrystallization  of  platinum. 
(“ Brittle  platinum”)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  70  (1902),  252;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  863. 

1902:  35.  A.  Winkelmann.  Ueber  die  Diffusion  von  Wasserstoff 
durch  Platin.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik,  8 (1902),  388;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  552;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1902,  ii,  101. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


283 


1902:  36.  S.  Tanatar.  Katalyse  des  Hydroxylamins  und  Hydra- 
zins.  (In  presence  of  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  40  (1902),  475;  J.  C'hem.  Soc.82,  ii  (1902),  386;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  1150. 

1902:  37.  S.  Tanatar.  Katalyse  des  Hydrazins.  (In  presence  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  41  (1902),  37;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  495;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  ii,  183. 

1902:  38.  J.  A.  Trillat.  (Apparatus  for  studying  contact  reac- 
tions. Use  of  platinum  spiral.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  27  (1902),  797;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  602; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  673. 

1902:  39.  C.  Fredeniiagen.  Zur  Theorie  der  Oxydations-  und 
Reduktionskette.  (Catalytic  action  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  29  (1902),  396;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  238;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  693. 

1902:  40.  J.  W.  Mellor  and  E.  J.  Russell.  The  preparation  of 
pure  chlorine  and  its  behavior  toward  hydrogen.  (Influence 
of  palladium.)  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  18  (1902),  166;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  81  (1902),  1272;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  ii,  323. 

1902:  41.  C.  Engler  and  L.  Wohler.  Pseudokatalytische  Sauer- 
stoffiibertragung.  (Influence  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  29  (1902),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902)  127;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  239. 

1902:  42.  E.  Schaer.  (Intensifying  (“aktivirende”)  action  of 
reducing  agents,  colloidal  noble  metals,  alkaloids,  and  other 
basic  substances  on  oxidizing  agents.)  Pt. 

Ann.  323  (1902),  32;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  603. 

1902:  43.  A.  Gutbier.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntnis  anorganischer 
Kolloide.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  32  (1902),  347;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  30  (1903),  771;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  81;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1300. 

1902:  44.  J.  Billitzer.  Elektrische  Plerstellung  von  colloidalem 
Quecksilber  und  einigen  neuen,  colloidalen  Metallen.  Pt. 

Ber.  35  (1902),  1929;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  454;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902, 
ii,  250. 

1902:  45.  T.  S.  Price.  Notiz  uber  die  Wirkung  von  kolloidalem 
Platin  auf  Peroxydschwefelsiiure  und  ihre  Salze.  Pt. 

Ber.  35  (1902),  291;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  204;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902, 
i,  558. 


284 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1902:  46.  W.  Nernst  and  A.  Lessing.  Ueber  die  Wanderung  gal- 
vanischer  Polarisation  durch  Platin-  und  Palladiumplatten. 

Pd,  Pt. 

Nachr.  K.  Ges.  Wiss.  Gottingen,  1902,  146;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902), 
639;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  240. 

1902:  47.  F.  Foerster  and  A.  Friessner.  Zur  Kenntnis  der 
Elektrolyse  wassriger  Losungen  an  platinirten  Anoden  und 
uber  elektrolytische  Dithionatbildung.  Pt. 

Ber.  35  (1902),  2515;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  488;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902, 
ii,  415. 

1902:  48.  F.  Foerster  and  E.  Muller.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Elek- 
trolyse, zumal  der  Alkalichloride,  an  platinierten  Elektroden. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  8 (1902),  515;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  679.  1 Pt. 

1902:  49.  F.  Bran.  Untersuchungen  liber  die  Widerstandsfahig- 
keit  von  Platin- und  Platiniridiumanoden  bei  der  Salzsaureelek- 
trolyse.  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  8 (1902),  197;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  442;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  1085. 

1902:  50.  P.  Denso.  Untersuchungen  liber  die  Widerstandsfahig- 
keit  von  Platiniridiumanoden  bei  der  Alkalichloridelektro- 
lyse.  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  8 (1902),  147;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  i,  802. 

1902:  51.  F.  Haber  and  M.  Sack.  Kathodenauflockerung  und 
Kathodenzerstaubung  als  Folge  der  Bildung  yon  Alkalilegie- 
rungen  des  Ivathodenmaterials.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  8 (1902),  245;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  441;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  1388. 

1902:  52.  J.  Tafel.  Die  elektrolytische  Keduktion  der  Salpeter- 
saure  bei  Gegenwart  von  Salzsaure  oder  Schwefelsaure. 
(Platinum  and  palladium  cathodes.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  31  (1902),  289;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  28  (1902),  979;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  559;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  327. 

1902:  53.  W.  Campbell.  The  structure  of  metals  and  binary 
alloys.  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  154  (1902),  131;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902  ii,  728. 

1902:  54.  W.  Campbell  and  J.  A.  Mathews.  The  alloys  of  alu- 
minum. (With  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1902),  253;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  399;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  i,  1088. 

1902:  55.  A.  FIebebrand.  Platinschale  mit  Zuglochernh  und 
Schornstein.  Pt. 

Z.  Nahr.  Genuss.  5 (1902),  719;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  721. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


285 


1902:  56.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Ueber  die  Ursache  der  Zerstorung  der 
Platintiegel  bei  Phosphatanalysen.  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  15  (1902),  917;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  82;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1902,  ii,  1013. 

1902 : 57.  E.  Haagn.  Elektrisch  geheizte  Oefen  mit  Platinfolienent- 
wickelung.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  8 (1902),  509;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  ii,  673. 

1902:  58.  F.  Foerster.  Ueber  kunstlichen  Graphit  und  iiber 
Platiniridium  als  Anodenmaterialien.  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  8 (1902),  143;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  i,  801. 

1902:  59.  M.  Krause.  Platinelektroden  fur  die  Elektrolyse.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  26  (1902),  356;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  i,  1143. 

1902:  60.  C.  Auer  yon  Welsbach.  Aus  Osmium  bestehende 
Faden  fur  elektrische  Gluhlampen  uud  Yerfahren  zu  ihrer 
Herstellung.  (German  patent  138135,  Dec.  13,  1902.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  209. 

1902:  61.  W.  N.  Hartley.  An  investigation  into  the  composition 
of  brittle  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  18  (1902),  30;  Phil.  Mag.  [6],  4 (1902),  84,  Chem.  Zentr. 
1902,  i,  625. 

1902:  62.  H.  Moissan.  L’ action  du  chaux  fondu  sur  le  pla tine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  27  (1902),  665;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  82,  ii  (1902),  257;  Compt. 
rend.  134  (1902),  136;  Chem.  Zentr.  1902,  i,  560. 

1902:  63.  W.  Bettges.  Dissertation,  Heidelberg,  1902.  (Cf. 

1904:  25.)  Pd. 

t '■  ■ - 

1903:  1.  L.  Duparc.  Les  gisements  platiniferes  de  l’Oural.  Pt. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  [4],  15  (1903),  139,  287,  301,  377;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i, 
1274. 

1903:  la.  N.  Wyssolsky.  Preliminary  notice  on  the  platinum 
deposits  in  the  basins  of  the  rivers  Iss,  Wya,  Tura,  and 
Niasma.  Pt. 

Bui.  Russ.  Geol.  Commission,  22  (1903). 

1903:  lb.  E.  N.  Barbqt-de-Marnl  L’industrie  du  platine  de 

rOural.  Pt. 

Bull.  Soc.  ingen.  des  mines,  1903,  ii,  29. 

1903:  2.  C.  W.  Dickson.  Condition  of  platinum  in  the  nickel- 

copper  ores  from  Sudbury.  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  15  (1903),  137;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  302;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  i,  663. 

1903 : 3.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Reines  Rhodium.  Rh. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  34  (1903),  82;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  300;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  i,  695. 


286 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1903:  4.  Badische  Anilin  und  Soda  Fabrik.  Verfahren  zur 
Reaktivierung  unwirksam  gewordener  Platinkontaktmasse 
im  Schwefelsaurekontaktverfahren.  (German  pa  tent  142895, 
June  22,  1903.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  168. 

1903 : 5.  F.  W.  Clarke,  K.  Seubert,  and  T.  E.  Thorpe.  Bericht  der 
International  Atomgewichtskommission.  (Pd  =106.5.)  Pd. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  5;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  33  (1903),  242;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  19 
(1903),  2;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  429. 

1903:  6.  I.  Bellucci.  (Sur  les  acides  hexaoxyplatiniques.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  12,  ii  (1903),  635;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  180; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  572. 

1903:  7.  L.  Wohler,  Ueber  die  Oxydierbarkeit  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  3475;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  44;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii, 
1162. 

1903:  8.  A.  Segewetz  and  P.  Trawitz.  Action  du  persulfate 
d’ ammonium  sur  les  oxydes  metalliques.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  137  (1903),  130;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  29  (1903),  868;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  ii,  546. 

1903:  9.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  F.  Hociitlen.  Krystallisirte  Poly- 
sulfide von  Schwermetallen.  Pt. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  3090;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  728;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903, 
ii,  984. 

1903:  10.  A.  Miolati  (U.  Pendini  and  I.  Bellucci).  Beitrage  zur 
Kenntnis  der  ehlorierten  Platinsauren.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  33  (1903),  251;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  383. 

1903:  11.  A.  Miolati  and  U.  Pendini.  Ueber  die  Trichlorplato- 
saure.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  33  (1903),  264;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  384. 

1903:  12.  W.  Oechsner  de  Coninck.  Etudes  de  quelques  sets 
d’uranium.  (Summary  of  earlier  work;  reaction  between 
US04  and  PtCl4.)  ‘ . Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [7],  28  (1903),  5;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  314. 

1903:  13.  W.  Dilthey.  Ueber  Siliciumverbindungen.  Triacetyl- 
aeetonylsiliciumchloridplatinchloriddoppelsalz.  Pt. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  923;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1903),  405;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i, 
1024. 

1903:  14.  E.  Biilmann  and  A.  C.  Andersen.  Ueber  einige  Platin- 
verbindungen.  (H2PtBrc,  K2PtBr4  and  action  of  alcohol  on  it, 
platinum  bases.)  Pt. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  1565;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  488;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903, 
ii,  18. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  287 

1903:  15.  C.  Renz.  Ueber  Verbindungen  von  Metallhaloiden  mit 
organischen  Basen.  (Ruthenium  and  iridium  chlorides.) 

Ru,  Xr. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  36  (1903),  100;  Bui.  Soc.  cliim.  [3J,  32  (1904),  669;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1903),  774;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  578. 

1903:  16.  S.  C.  Lind.  The  constitution  of  potassium  ruthenium 
nitrosochloride  in  aqueous  solution.  Ru. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (1903),  928;  J.  Chem.  Soc.86,ii  (1904),  45;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1903,  ii,  1163. 

1903:  17.  L.  Wintrebert.  Recherches  sur  quelques  sels  com- 
plexes de  1’ osmium  hexavalent.  Os. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [7],  28  (1903),  15;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  219; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  314. 

1903:  18.  H.  Moissan  and  W.  Manchot.  Preparation  et  pro- 
priety d’un  siliciure  de  ruthenium.  Ru. 

Compt.  rend.  137  (1903),  229;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  2 (1904),  285;  Bui. 

Soc.  chim.  [3],  31  (1904),  559;  Ber.  36  (1903),  2993;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii 

(1903),  604;  86,  ii  (1904),  665;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  653. 

1903:  19.  A.  Rosenheim  and  W.  Loewenstamm.  Ueber  Platin- 
phosphorhalogenverbindungen  und  ihre  Derivate.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  37  (1903),  394;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  131;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1904,  i,  156. 

1903 : 20.  L.  Marino.  (Sur  les  aluns  de  T iridium  sesquioxyde.)  Ir. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  32,  ii  (1903),  511;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  32  (1904),  669; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  376;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  757. 

1903:  21.  C.  Chabrie  and  A.  Bouchonnet.  Preparation  du  ses- 
quiseleniure  d’iridium.  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  137  (1903),  1059;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  31  (1904),  821;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  132;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  255. 

1903:  22.  J.  A.  Muller.  Recherches  sur  l’action  du  CO  sur  les 
cyanures  manganeux-cobaltiques-chromiques  et  platiniques 
du  potassium.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  29  (1903),  27;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1903),  238;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1903,  i,  379. 

1903:  23.  H.  Grossmann.  Ueber  einige  Halogenrhodanide  und 
die  Beziehungen  des  Rhodanions  zu  den  Halogenionen  und 
dem  Cyanion.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  37  (1903),  411;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  i (1904),  147;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1904,  i,  160. 

1903:  24.  A.  Rosenheim,  W.  Loewenstamm,  and  L.  Singer. 
Ueber  Verbindungen  des  Acetessigesters  und  Acetylacetons 
i mit  Metallchloriden.  (With  PtCl4.)  Pt. 

Ber.  30  (1903),  1833;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1903),  603;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903, 


288  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1903:  25.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  les  acides  complexes  du  platine.  Yl. 
Platooxalonitrites  et  acide  platooxalonitreux.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  29  (1903),  83;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1903),  229;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  i,  497. 

1903:  26.  E.  Knoevenagel,  W.  Heckel,  A.  Tomasczewski,  J. 
Fuchs,  and  B.  Bergdolt.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Doppelbind- 
ungen.  (Behavior  of  benzhydrol  and  other  compounds  with 
double  bonds  on  heating  with  palladium  sponge.)  Pd. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  2816,  2823,  2829,  2848,  2857,  2861;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  32 
(1904),  620;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  i (1903),  819,  820,  830,  831,  837,  852; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  1127. 

1903 : 27.  N.  Tarugi.  (Hydroxylamin  salts  in  qualitative  analysis.) 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  33,  ii  (1903),  449;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  297.  Pt. 

1903:  28.  E.  Leidie  and  L.  Quennessen.  Sur  F analyse  qualita- 
tive et  quantitative  de  Tosmiure  d’iridium. 

Os,  Ru,  Ir,  Rh,  Pt,  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  136  (1903),  1399;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  29  (1903),  801;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  576;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  218. 

1903:  29.  E.  Neveu.  L’essai  du  platine  et  ses  alliages  avec  les 
metaux  nobles.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  anal.  8 (1903),  161;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  514;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  ii,  149. 

1903:  30.  R.  Willstatter.  Notiz  uber  ein  Verfahren  zur  Tren- 
nung  von  Gold  und  Platin.  Pt. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  1830;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  576;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903, 
ii,  218. 

1903:  31.  H.  Carmichael.  Separation  of  gold,  silver,  and  pla- 
tinum. Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  22  (1903),  1324;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  151;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  i,  544. 

1903:  32.  L.  Rostosky.  Akademische  Dissertation,  Heidelberg, 
1903.  (On  separation  of  palladium  in  acid  solution  by 
hydrazin  (?);  cf.  Jannasch  and  Rostosky,  1904:26.)  Pd. 

1903:  32a.  H.  Dufet.  (Crystallographic  notes.)  (Measurements 
of  crystals  described  in  1902:  12,  32;  1903:  17,  25.)  Pt,  Os. 

Bui.  Soc.  franc,  mineral.  26  (1903),  30;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  801. 

1903:  33.  F.  Foerster.  (Discussion  of  paper  by  Nissenson  and 
Danneel  on  precipitation  and  separation  of  metals  by  elec- 
trolysis: use  of  platiniridium  anodes,  at  Int.  Cong.  Appl. 
Chem.,  Berlin.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  Elektrocliem.  9 (1903),  764. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


289 


1903:  34.  O.  Brunck.  Die  fraktionierte  Verbrennung  von  Gasen 
mittels  Palladiumasbest.  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  16  (1903),  695;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  523. 

1903:  35.  C.  Matignon.  Action  d’un  melange  d’acide  chlor- 
hydrique  et  oxygene  sur  quelques  metaux.  II.  Palladium, 
ruthenium,  iridium,  rhodium,  et  osmium.  Pd,  Ru,  Ir,  Rh,  Os. 

Compt.  rend.  137  (1903),  1051;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  132;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  i,  254. 

1903:  36.  G.  T.  Beilby.  Intensification  of  chemical  action  by  the 
emanations  from  gold  and  platinum.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  88  (1903),  178;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  1048. 

1903:  37.  L.  Holborn  and  L.  Austin.  Zerstaubung  elektrisch 
gegluhter  Platinmetalle  in  verschiedenen  Gasen. 

Rh,  Pt,  Ir,  Pd. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  preuss.  Akad.  1903,  245;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  916. 

1903:  38.  A.  Trillat.  (Various  catalytic  reactions  brought  about 
by  metals;  activating  and  paralyzing  influences.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  137  (1903),  187;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  589. 

1903:  39.  II.  Neilson.  Hydrolysis  and  synthesis  of  fats  by  plat- 
inum black.  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Physiol.  10  (1903),  191;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  i (1904),  4;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1904,  i,  1634. 

1903:  40.  L.  Garbowski.  Anwendung  hoherwertiger  Phenole, 
Phenolsauren,  Aldehyde  und  Phenolaldehyde  zur  Herstellung 
der  Hydrosole  von  Gold,  Platin  und  Silber.  Pt. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  1215;  J.Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  432;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903, 
i,  1170. 

1903:  41.  F.  Henrich.  Ueber  eine  Methode  zur  Herstellung 
colloidaler  Metallosungen.  Pt. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  609;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  299;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903, 
i,  689. 

1903:42.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Positive  ionization  produced  by  hot 
platinum  in  the  air  at  low  pressures.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  6 (1903),  80;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  321. 

1903:  43.  PI.  A.  Wilson.  Electric  discharge  from  heated  plat- 
inum. Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  72  (1903),  272;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  1158. 

1903:  44.  M.  Sack.  Ueber  die  Entstehung  und  Bedeutung  von 
Natriumlegierungcn  bei  der  kathodischen  Polarisation.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  34  (1903),  286  (Pt,  p.  313);  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903), 
349;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  1013. 

109733 0 — 19-^-B ull . 694 19 


290 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1903:  45.  A.  Coehn  and  Y.  Osaka.  Studien  iiber  die  Bildung  von 
Metalloxyden.  II.  Ueber  anodische  Oxydation  von  Metal- 
len  und  elektrolytische  Sauerstoffentwickelung.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  34  (1903),  86;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  30  (1903),  1108;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  261;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  611. 

1903:  46.  R.  Ruer.  Ueber  die  elektrolytische  Auflosung  von 
Platin  mittels  Wechselstromen.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  9 (1903),  235;  Z.  physik.  Chem.  44  (1903),  81;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  407;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  917. 

1903:  47.  F.  Glaser.  Zur  Elektro analyse  des  Quecksilbers,  ein 
Beitrag  zur  Loslichkeit  des  Platins  in  Cyankalium.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  9 (1903),  11;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  242;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1903,  i,  361. 

1903:  48.  R.  Luther  and  F.  J.  Brislee.  Zur  Kenntnis  des 
Verhaltens  unangreifbare  Anoden,  insbesondere  bei  der  Elek- 
trolyse  von  Salzsaure.  (Platinum  and  iridium  anodes.) 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  45  (1903),  216;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  977.  Pt,  Ir. 

1903:  49.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  V.  Wolfl.  Das  radioaktive  Blei 
als  primar  wirksamer  Stoff.  (Transmission  of  activity  to 
platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  36  (1903),  1040;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  32  (1904),  437;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

84,  ii  (1903),  402;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  1172. 

1903:  50.  N.  Tarugi.  (Behavior  of  platinum  amalgam  with  nitric 
acid.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  33,  ii  (1903),  171;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  131;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1903,  ii,  1475. 

1903:  51.  J.  V.  R.  Stehman.  A platinum  crucible  for  carbon  com- 
bustions. Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (1903),  237;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  452;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1903,  i,  944. 

1 903 : 52.  H.  T.  Barnes  and  A.  McIntosh.  A new  form  of  platinum 
resistance  thermometer.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  6 (1903),  350;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  781. 

1903:  53.  R.  J.  Gulcher.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  von  Gliili- 
lampenfaden  aus  reinen  Iridium.  (German  patent  145456, 
Oct.  31,  1903,  and  supplement  145457,  Nov.  6,  1903.)  Ir. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  ii,  1153,  1226. 

1903:  54.  Oesterreiciiische  Gasgluhlicht-  und  Elektricitats- 
gesellsciiaft.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  eines  Osmium- 
leuchtfadens.  (Zusatz  zu  1902:60.)  (German  patent  140468, 
Mar.  26,  1903.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  903. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


291 


1903 : 55.  J.  T.  Conroy.  Action  of  sulphuric  acid  on  platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  22  (1903),  465;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  84,  ii  (1903),  433;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  ii,  160. 

1904:  1.  E.  Hussak.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  von  Palladium  und 
Platinum  in  Brazilien.  Pd,  Pt,  Ir. 

Sitzb.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  113  (1904),  379;  Oesterr.  Z.  Bcrg- 
Hiittenw.  53  (1905),  278;  Z.  prakt.  Geol.  14  (1906),  284;  J.  Cliem.  Soc. 
88,  ii  (1905),  598;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  107. 

1904:  2.  L.  Hundeshagen.  The  occurrence  of  platinum  in  wol- 
lastonite  on  the  island  of  Sumatra.  (Paper  read  before  the 
Institution  of  Mining  and  Metallurgy,  July  21,  1904.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Inst.  Min.  Met.  13  (1904),  550;  Chem.  News.  90  (1904),  77;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  ii,  843. 

1904:  3.  Badische  Anilin  und  Soda  Fabrik.  Verfahren  zur 
Reaktivierung  unwirksam  gewordener  Platinkontaktmasse 
im  Schwefelsaurekontaktverfahren.  (German  patent  148196^ 
Jan.  11,  1904.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  410. 

1904:  4.  L.  Wohler.  Die  Oxyde  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  40  (1904),  423;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  920;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  664;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  689. 

1904:  5.  I.  Bellucci  and  N.  Parra vano.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Stanni- 
verbindungen.  (Comparison  with  platinum  compounds;  ox- 
ides and  chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  13,  ii  (1904),  307,  324,  339;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  35,  i 
(1904),  241;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  45  (1905),  142;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904), 
822,  823;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  1523,  1636;  1905,  i,  1697. 

1904:  6.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  F.  Hochtlen.  Krystallisirte  Poly- 
sulfide von  Schwermetallen.  II.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  245;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  655;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86, 
ii  (1904),  179;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  635. 

1904:  7.  P.  Klason.  Zur  Darstellung  von  Kaliumplatinchlorur. 

Pt, 

Ber.  37  (1904),  1360;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  415;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i, 
1326. 

1904:  8.  M.  Berthelot.  Action  chimique  de  la  lumiere.  Action 
de  Vacide  chlorhydrique  sur  platine  et  or.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  138  (1904),  1297;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  3 (1904),  295;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [3],  31  (1904),  1199;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  569;  88,  ii 
(1905),  3;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  91. 

1904:  9.  J.  L . Howe.  Ruthenium.  V.  The  chlorides  (contin- 
ued). Ru. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1904),  543;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  490;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  ii,  91. 


292 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1904:  10.  J.  L.  Howe.  Ruthenium.  VI.  The  bromides.  Ru. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1904),  942;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  665;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  ii,  978. 

1904:  11.  L.  Stuchlik.  Analyse  des  von  Margules  dargestellten 
Platinsulfats.  Pt. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  2913;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  742;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904, 
ii,  1199. 

1904 : 12.  L.  Marino.  Ueber  Iridiumsesquisulfat  und  seine  Alaune 

Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  42  (1904),  213;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88, ii  (1905),  43;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  75. 

1904:  13.  A.  Brochet  and  J.  Petit.  Dissolution  electrolytic  du 
platine;  preparation  des  cyanures  de  platine.  (Including 
preparation  of  barium  platocyanide.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  138  (1904),  1095;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  31  (1904),  738,  1255, 
1257,  1265;  Z.  Elektrochem.  10  (1904),  909,  922;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86, 
ii  (1934),  414;  88,  ii  (1905),  27,  28;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  1560;  1905, 

i,  135,  160. 

1904:  14.  I.  Bellucci.  (Sur  les  combinaisons  sulfocyanhydriques 
du  palladium.)  Pd. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  13,  ii  (1904),  686;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  35,  i (1905), 
343;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  758;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  i (1905),  122; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  359. 

1904:  15.  P.  Klason.  Beitrage  zur  Constitution  der  Platinbasen. 

Pt. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  1349;  Arkiv  Kemi,  Min.  Geol.  1 (1904),  185;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  250;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  i (1904),  522;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1904,  i,  1328. 

1904:  16.  H.  and  A.  Euler.  Notizen  liber  ammoniakalische  Platin- 
verbindungen.  Pt. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  2391;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  569;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904, 

ii,  297. 

1904:  17.  G.  N.  St.  Schmidt.  Einfluss  der  Temperatur  und  des 
Druckes  auf  die  Absorption  und  Diffusion  des  Wassers toffs 
durch  Palladium.  Pd. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  13  (1904),  747;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  312;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  i,  1128. 

1904:  18.  L.  Quennessen.  Sur  h absorption  de  Thydrogene  par 
le  rhodium  et  le  palladium.  Rh,  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  139  (1904),  795;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  33  (1905),  191;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  43,  172;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  76. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  293 


1904;  19.  J.  Donau.  Ueber  die  Farbung  der  Boraxperle  durch 
kolloidal  geloste  Edelmetalle.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Monatsh.  25  (1904),  913;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  iL  (1904),  784;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1904,  ii,  1256. 


1904:  20.  J.  Donau.  Mikrochemische  Nachweis  des  Goldes  mit- 
tels  kolloidaler  Farbung  der  Seidenfaser.  (Also  detection  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Monatsh.  25  (1904),  545;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  684;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1904,  ii,  918. 


1904:  21.  O.  Brunck.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  hydroschweflig- 
sauren  Natron  auf  Metallsalze.  (On  salts  of  platinum  and 
palladium.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  366  (1904),  281;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  95;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1905,  i,  10. 


1904:  22.  E.  Rupp.  Ueber  volumetrische  und  gravimetrische 

Platinbestimmungen.  Pt. 

Arch.  Pharm.  242  (1904),  143;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  296;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  i,  1033. 

1904:  23.  A.  Hollaed  and  L.  Bertiaux.  Sur  P analyse  des  alli- 

ages  de  platine  avec  or  et  argent.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  anal.  9 (1904),  287;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  31  (1904),  1030;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  685;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  852. 

1904:  24.  P.  Jannasch  and  C.  Stephan.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung 
und  Trennung  des  Platins  von  Kalium,  Natrium,  Baryum, 
Strontium,  Calcium,  Magnesium,  Mangan,  Wolfram,  Kobalt, 
Nickel,  Kupfer,  Zink  und  Cadmium  in  ammoniakalischer 
Losung  durch  Hydrazin.  Pt. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  1980;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  573;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86, 
ii  (1604),  519;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  65. 


1904:  25.  P.  Jannasch  and  W.  Bettges.  Die  Bestimmung  des  Pal- 
ladiums und  dessen  Trennung  von  anderen  Metallen  durch 
Hydrazin.  Pd. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  2210;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  570;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

86,  ii  (1904),  519;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  262. 

1904:  26.  P.  Jannasch  and  L.  Rostosky.  Ueber  die  Trennung 
des  Palladiums  in  mineralsaurer  Losung  durch  Hydrazin.  Pd. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  2241;.  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  571;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

86,  ii  (1904),  594;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  368. 

1904:  27.  H.  Erdmann  and  O.  Makowka.  Die  Bestimmung  des 
Palladiums  und  dessen  Trennung  von  anderen  Metallen  durch 
Acetylen.  Pd. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  2694;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  34  [3],  (1905),  572;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

86,  ii  (1904),  594;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  478. 


294 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1904:  28.  R.  Amberg.  Elektrolytische  Fallung  de  - Palladiums. 

Pd. 

Z.  Elektrocliem.  10  (1904),  386;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  593;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1904,  ii,  386. 

1904:  29.  W.  J.  Sharwood.  On  the  cupellation  of  platinum  alloy* 
containing  silver  or  gold  and  silver.  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  23  (1904),  412;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86, ii  (1904),  450;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1904,  ii,  268. 

1904:  30.  R.  Silberberger.  Studien  liber  die  quantitative  Be- 
stimmung  von  Schwefelsaure.  (Platinum  not  retained  by 
BaS04  precipitate.)  Pt. 

Monatsh.  25  (1904),  220;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  342;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1904,  i,  1291. 

1904:  31.  A.  C.  Chapman.  Palladium-hydrogen  as  a reducing 
agent  in  quantitative  analysis.  Pd. 

Analyst,  29  (1904),  346;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  58;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1905,  i,  559. 

1904:  32.  W.  Muthmann  and  F.  Frauenberger.  Passivitat  der 
Metalle.  Ru. 

Sitzb.  Bayer.  Akad.  Wiss.  1904,  201;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  972. 

1904:  33.  E.  Goldstein.  Ueber  Sauerstoffentziehung  durch  Pia- 
tin.  Pt. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  4147;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904)  825;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904, 

ii,  1637. 

1904:  34.  G.  T.  Beilby.  The  action  of  certain  gases  on  glass  in 
the  neighborhood  of  heated  metals.  (Halo  around  heated 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  90  (1904),  180;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  1374. 

1904:  35.  J.  Bock.  Ueber  die  Wirkung  der  Kobalt-,  Rhodium- 
und  Chromammoniakverbindungen  auf  den  tierischen  Or- 
ganismus.  Rh. 

Arch.  exp.  Path.  Pharm.  52  (1904),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  49; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  1915. 

1904:  36.  G.  W.  A.  Karlbaum  and  E.  Sturm.  Aenderung  des 
spezifischen  Gewichtes  beim  Drahtziehen.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  14  (4904),  578;  J.  chim.  phys.  2 (1904),  537;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  805;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  578. 

1904:  37.  J.  Y.  Buchanan.  Compressibility  of  certain  solid 
bodies.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  73  (1904),  296;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  1642. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


295 


1904:  38.  G.  A.  Hulett  and  H.  W.  Berger.  Volatilization  of 
platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1904),  1512;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  42;  Ghem. 

Zentr.  1905,  i,  144. 

1904 : 39.  G.  T.  Beilby.  Hard  and  soft  states  in  metals.  Pt. 

Electro-Chem.  Metall.  3 (1904),  806;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  647. 

1904:  40.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Solubility  and  diffusion  in  solution 
of  dissociated  gases.  (Diffusion  of  hydrogen  through 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  7 (1904),  266;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  240;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1904,  i,  916. 

1904:  41.  O.  W.  Richardson,  J.  Nichol,  and  T.  Parnell.  Diffu- 
sion of  hydrogen  through  hot  platinum.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  8 (1904),  1;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  401. 

1904 : 42.  R.  Vondracek.  Beitrag  zur  Erklarung  des  Mechanismus 
der  katalytische  Wirkungen  des  Platinschwarzes.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  39  (1904),  24;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  9;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  390;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  994. 

1904.  43.  F.  Richardt.  Fraktionierte  Verbrennung  wasserstoff- 
haltiger  Gasgemenge  tiber  erhitztem  Palladiumdraht.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  38  0904),  65;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  15;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  167;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  344. 

1904:  44.  A.  Purgotti  and  L.  Zanichelli.  (Contribution  a la 
catalyse  de  Fhydrazine.)  Pt. 

Qazz.  chim.  ital.  34,  i (1904),  57;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  329;  Chem, 

Zentr.  1904,  i,  985., 

1904:  45.  C.  FI.  Neilson  and  O.  FI.  Brown.  Effect  of  ions  on  the 
decomposition  of  hydrogen  peroxide  by  platinum  black.  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Physiol.  10  (1904),  225;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  229;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1904,  i,  1634. 

1904:  46.  G.  Bredig  and  M.  Fortner.  Palladiumkatalyse  des 
Wasserstoffsuperoxydes.  Pd. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  798;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  32  (1904),  1434;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

86,  ii  (1904),  318;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  983. 

1904:  47.  N.  Castoro.  Die  Darstellung  kolloidaler  Metalle. 

Pt,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  41  (1904),  126;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  24  (1905),  908;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  742;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  938. 

1904:  48.  L.  Liebermann.  Wasserstoffsuperoxydkatalyse  durch 
kolloidale  Platinlosungen.  Pt. 

Arch.  ges.  Physiol.  104  (1904),  119;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  880. 


296 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1904:  49.  L.  Liebermann  and  W.  v.  Genersich.  Katalytische 
Wirkung  des  kolloidalen  Platins  auf  Wasserstoffsuperoxyd. 

Arch.  ges.  Physiol.  104  (1904),  155;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  881.  Pt. 

1904 : 50.  L.  Liebermann.  Guajakreaktion  des  kolloidalen  Platins. 

Arch.  ges.  Physiol.  104  (1904),  233;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  882.  Pt. 

1904:  51.  T.  S.  Price  and  J.  A.  N.  Friend.  The  effect  of  colloidal 
platinum  on  mixtures  of  Caro’s  persulphuric  acid  and  hydro- 
gen peroxide.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  20  (1904),  187;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  85  (1904),  1526;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  138. 

1904:  52.  F.  Plzak  and  B.  Husek.  Inversion  des  Rohrzuckers, 
hervorgerufen  durch  Platinmetalle.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Z.  physiol.  Chem.  47  (1904),  733;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  1220;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  391;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  1254. 

1904:  53.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Amberger.  Ueber  colloi'dale  Metalle  der 
Platingruppe.  I.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  124;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  32  (1904),  1242;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
86,  ii  (1904),  180;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  272. 

1904:  54.  L.  Liebermann.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Ferment- 
wirkungen.  (Solutions  of  colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  1519;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  474;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1904,  i,  1547. 

1904:  55.  W.  Biltz.  Ueber  die  gegenseitige  Beeinflussung  col- 
loidal geloster  Stoffe.  Pt. 

Ber.  37  (1904),  1095;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  324;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904, 
i,  1123. 

1904.  56.  W.  E.  Adeney.  Photographs  of  spark  spectra.  III. 
Ultra-violet  spark  spectra  of  platinum  and  chromium.  Pt. 

Sci.  Proc.  Roy.  Dublin  Soc.  10  (1904),  235;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905), 
493. 

1904:  57.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Ionization  produced  by  hot  plati- 
num in  gases  at  low  pressure.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  8 (1904),  400;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  969. 

1904:  58.  A.  Wehnelt.  Austritt  negativer  Ionen  aus  gluhender 
Metallverbindungen.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  14  (1904),  425;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  580. 

1904:  59.  E.  Rotiie.  Polarization  des  electrodes  de  platine,  or  et 
palladium.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  1 (1904),  215;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  308; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  i,  630,  980. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


297 


1904:  60.  A.  Fischer.  Ueber  die  elektrolytische  Bestimmung  und 
Trennung  von  Antimon  und  Zinn  aus  ihren  Sulfosalzlosungen 
nebst  einen  Anhang  fiber  die  Trisulfidmethode  des  Antimons. 
Ueber  die  Loslichkeit  und  die  Nichtreduzierbarkeit  des  Platins. 
(Anodic  solubility  of  platinum  and  platiniridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  42  (1904),  363;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  120;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  294. 

1904:  61.  C.  J.  Thatcher.  Elektrolytische  Oxydation  von  Natri- 
umthiosulfat  und  ihr  Mechanismus.  (Using  platinum  elec- 
trodes.) Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Cliem.  47  (1904),  691;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  86,  ii  (1904),  395;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1904,  i,  1321. 

1904:  62.  P.  Lewis.  Nachleuchten  von  Metalldampfen  in  Stick- 
stoff.  (With  platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  5 (1904),  546;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  937. 

1904:  63.  G.  Petrenko.  Ueber  die  katalytischen  Erscheinungen 
bei  der  Darstellung  von  Ueberschwefelsaure.  (Platinum  and 
iridium  electrodes.)  Pt,  Ir. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1904),  1081;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905), 
23;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  6. 

1904:  64.  G.  Siebert.  Ueber  die  Haltbarkeit  von  Platintiegeln. 

Chem.  Ztg.  28  (1904),  869;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  1181.  Pt. 

1904:  65.  V.  Rothmund  and  A.  Lessing.  Versuche  mit  dem  elek- 
trolytischen  Wellendetektor.  (With  platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  15  (1904),  193;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  1185. 

1904:  66.  A.  Lang.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  mit  Osmium  fiber- 
zogener  oder  impragnierter  Glfihkorper  fur  elektrische  Glfih- 
lampen.  (German  patent  153329,  July  7,  1904.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  749. 

1904:  67.  A.  Heil.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  feinster  Glfihfaden 
aus  Osmium.  (German  patent  154412,  Sept.  8,  1904.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  927. 

1904:  68.  R.  Namias.  (Etude  chimique  et  pratique  des  principaux 
bains  pour  la  galvanostegie.)  (Platinum-plating  baths.)  Pt. 

L’industria  chimica,  6 (1904),  158;  Chem.  Zentr.  1904,  ii,  623. 

1904:  69.  J.  L.  IIowe.  Report  on  the  recent  advances  in  our 
knowledge  of  the  metals  of  the  platinum  group,  1897-1903. 

Am.  Chem.  J.  31  (1904),  63.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1905:  1.  W.  P.  Headden.  Columbite,  etc.  (Description  of  an 
artificial  powder  containing  palladium,  possibly  from  Wyo- 
ming.) Pd. 

Proc.  Colorado  Sci.  Soc.  8 (1905),  55;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  37. 


298 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


\ 


1905:  2.  R.  Spring.  Einige  Beobachtungen  in  den  Platinwasch- 
erien  von  Nischnji-Tagil.  Pt. 

Z.  prakt.  Geol.  13  (1905),  49;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1428. 

1905:  2a.  L.  Duparc  and  F.  Pearce.  Recherches  geologiques  et 
petrographiques  sur  l’Oural  du  Nord.  2me  partie.  Pt. 

Mem.  Soc.  physique  de  Geneve,  34. 

1905:  2b.  Ball,  L.  C.  Gold,  platinum,  tinstone,  and  monazite  in 
the  beach  sands  on  the  south  coast, ^Queensland,  with  appen- 
dices on  the  beach  sands  of  New  South  Wales,  and  on  the 
physical  properties,  sources,  and  uses  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Queensland  Geol.  Surv.  Pub.  198,  1905. 

1905:  2c.  C.  W.  Dickson.  Distribution  of  platinum  metals  in  other 
sources  than  placers  (with  discussion).  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os. 

J.  Canadian  Mining  Inst.  8 (1905),  192. 

1905:  2d.  T.  T.  Read.  Platinum  and  palladium  in  certain  cop- 
per ores.  Pt,  Pd. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  79  (1905),  985. 

1905:  3.  R.  Amberg.  Palladium.  (Chemical  properties  and  com- 
bining weight;  Pd  = 106.688  ± 0.006.)  Inaugural  Dissertation, 
Aachen,  1905.  Pd. 

Ann.  341  (1905),  235;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  832;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905, 
ii,  1163. 

1905:4.  Parke.  Process  for  preparing  metallic  iridium.  (French 
patent  359668,  Nov.  21,  1905.)  Ir. 

C.  A.  1 (1907),  1345. 

1905:  5.  I.  Bellucci.  Ueber  die  Hexaoxyplatinsaure.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  44  (1905),  168;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  35,  i (1905),  163;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  175;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  327;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  999. 

1905:6.  I.  Bellucci.  (Sur  la  constitution  de  quelques  plumbates.) 
(Comparison  with  platinates  and  stannates.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lineei  [5],  14,  i (1905),  378;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  35,  ii  (1905), 
500;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  50  (1906),  107;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  87; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1552. 

1905:  7.  I.  Bellucci.  (Sur  une  nouvelle  serie  de  sels  isomorphes.) 
(Stannates,  plumbates,  and  platinates.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lineei  [5],  14,  i (1905),  457;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  35,  i (1905), 
509;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  50  (1906),  101;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906), 
713;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  395;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1632. 

1905:  8.  M.  Blondel.  Recherches  sur  quelques  composes  du 
platine.  (Platinates,  sulphates,  oxalates,  etc.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  6 (1905),  81;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii(1905),  720;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1415. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


299 


1905:  9.  I.  Bellucci.  (Remarques  sur  le  travail  de  Blondel  sur 
les  composes  du  pi  a tine.)  (Criticism  of  1905:  8.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  35,  ii  (1905),  334;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  832;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1418. 

1905:  10.  L.  Wohler  and  J.  Konig.  Die  Oxyde  des  Palladiums. 

Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  46  (1905),  323;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  941;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  722;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1079. 

1905:  11.  I.  Belluccl  Ueber  Palladiumdioxydhydrat.  (Reply 
to  Wohler  and  Konig,  1905:  10.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  47  (1905),  287;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  35;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1576. 

1905:  12.  L.  Wohler.  Oxyd a tion  des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  836;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  94;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  126. 

1905:  13.  A.  Gutbier  and  F.  Ransohoff.  Studien  liber  die 
Verbindungen  des  Rutheniums  mit  Sauerstoff.  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  45  (1905),  243;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  534;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  107. 

1905:  14.  G.  Wyrouboff  and  A.  Verneuil.  Recherches  sur  la 
chimie  des  terres  rares.  (Complex  platinum  compounds; 
oxides  and  chlorides.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  pliys.  [8],  6 (1905),  441;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  88;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  321. 

1905:  15.  I.  Bellucci  and  E.  Clavari.  (Sur  Toxyde  superieure 
du  nickel.)  (Analogies  with  platinum  metals.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Os,  Ru,  Rh,  Ir. 
Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  14,  ii  (1905),  234;  Gazz.  chim.  ital.  36,  i (1906), 
58;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1156;  1906,  i,  1145. 

1905:  16.  A.  Magnus.  Sauerstoffentziehung  durch  Platin. 

Pfcjrk.  Z.  6 (1905),  12;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  337.  Pt,  Ir,  Pd. 

1905:  17.  R.  Lucas.  Sauerstoffentziehung  durch  Platin.  (Oxygen 
not  absorbed  by  pure  platinum,  but  by  platiniridium,  owing 
to  the  iridium  present.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  182;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  396;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  1215. 

1905:  18.  G.  Pellizzari  and  C.  Cantoni.  (Action  of  cyanogen 
bromide  on  hydrazin.)  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  35,  i (1905),  291;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  i (1905),  576; 
Ch.em.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  122. 


800  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1905:  19.  A.  Gutbier.  Ueber  Doppelsalze  des  Pallado-chlorids 
und  -bromids;  uber  Derivate  des  Palladosammin-chlorids  und 
-bromids.  Pd. 

Ber.  38  (1905),  2105;  2107;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  46  (1905),  23;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  942;  J.  Chem.  Soc,  88,  i (1905),  584;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1905,  ii,  297. 

1905:  20.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  Krell.  Zur  Kenn trass  der  Halogen- 
verbindungen  des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Ber.  38  (1905),  2385;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  20;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
88,  ii  (1905),  534;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  452. 

1905:  21.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  Krell.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  Palladi- 
ums. (Organic  halides.)  Pd. 

Ber.  (1905),  3869;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  593;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  i 
(1906),  12;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  181. 

1905:  22.  A.  Gutbier,  A.  Krell,  and  K.  L.  Janssen.  Studien 
tiber  Palladium.  (Halides  and  bases.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  47  (1905),  23;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  i (1905),  876;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1315. 

1905:  23.  A.  Gutbier  and  C.  Trenkner.  Ueber  die  Halogen- 
verbindungen  des  Rutheniums.  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  45  (1905),  166;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  463;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  22. 

1905:  24.  E.  P.  Alvarez.  A new  iodized  compound  of  osmium, 
the  production  of  which  gives  a means  of  estimating  very- 
minute  quantities  (millionths  of  a gram)  of  osmium  in  soluble 
compounds.  Os. 

Chem.  News,  91  (1905),  172;  Compt.  rend.  140  (1905),  1254;  Gazz.  chim. 
ital.  35,  ii  (1905),  421;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  423;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1905,  i,  1483. 


1905:  25.  A.  Rosenheim  and  W.  Levy.  Ueber  Platinphosphorhalo- 
genverbindungen,  und  ihre  Deiivate.  II.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  43  (1905),  34;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905),  1097;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  88,  i (1905),  183;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  503. 

1905:  26.  L.  Wintrebert.  Sur  quelques  osmionitrites  (X20s(N02)5) 
et  un  osmiuinni trite  (0s(N02)3).  Os. 

Compt.  rend.  140  (1905),  585;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  261;  Chem.  - 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  999. 


1905:  27.  L.  A.  Levy.  Some  new  platinocyanides.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  21  (1905),  305;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  89  (1906),  125;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  1004. 

1905:  2c8.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff.  Ueber  komplexe  Verbindungen  der 
a-Dioxime.  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  37  (1905),  243;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  46  (1905), 
14 4;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  928, 1225;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  i (1905), 
743;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  960. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


301 


1905:  29.  W.  Biltz.  Beitrage  zur  Theorie  der  Farbevorganges. 
II.  Messungen  iiber  die  Bildung  anorganischer  Analoge  sub- 
stantiver  Farbungen.  (Ruthenium-ammoniak-oxychlorid.) 
Nachr.  Kgl.  Ges.  Wiss.  Gottingen,  1905,  46;  Ber.  38  (1905),  2963.  Ru. 

1905:  30.  L.  QuennEssen.  Sur  un  iridochloronitrite  de  potas- 
sium. Ir. 


Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  33  (1905),  1308;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  640; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  746. 


1905: 


31.  E.  P.  Alvarez.  A reaction  of  the  compounds  of  rhodium 
in  use  in  chemical  analysis.  (With  alkaline  hypochlorites.)  Rh. 
Chem.  News.  91  (1905),  216;  Compt.  rend.  140  (1905),  1341;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  485;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1738. 

1905:  32.  F.  Faktor.  Einige  Reaktionen  mit  Magnesium.  (On 
chloroplatinate  solutions.)  Pt. 

Pharm.  Post,  38  (1905),  153;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  455;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  1305. 

1905:  33.  F.  Faktor.  Quantitative  Gold-  und  Platinbestimmung 
mittels  Magnesium.  Pt. 

Pharm.  Post,  38  (1905),  175;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  485;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  1305. 

1905:34.  J.  Nordenskjold.  Technik  der  Bestimmung  von  Platin- 
metallen.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Svensk  Kem.  Tidskrift,  1905,  54;  Pharm.  Ztg.  50  (1905),  633;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  790. 

1905:  35.  L.  Quennessen.  Separation  de  platine  et  iridium. 
(Precipitation  by  magnesium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  33  (1905),  875;  Chem.  News,  92  (1905),  29;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  615;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  854. 

1905:  36.  P.  Jannasch  and  O.  von  Mayer.  Ueber  das  Verhalten 
der  Metalle  der  Platingruppe  zu  Hydrazin-  und  Plydroxyiamin- 
Salzen  und  einige  quantitative  Trennungen  derselben  von 
Gold.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ber.  38  (1905),  2130;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  981;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88, 
ii  (1905),  557;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  355. 

37.  H.  Senn.  Elektrolytische  Raffination  von  Blei  in  kiesel- 

fluorwasserstoffsaurer  Losung.  (Separation  of  lead  from  plat- 
inum and  platiniridium  impossible.)  Ir,  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  229;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  389;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,'  1365. 

38.  M.  Delepine.  Decomposition  du  sulfate  d’ ammonium 
par  l’acide  sulfurique  en  presence  de  platine,  par  la  chaleur. 
(Use  of  platinum  not  allowable  in  Kjeldahl  reaction.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  141  (1905),  886;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1905),  8;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  24;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  126. 


1905: 


1905: 


302  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1905 : 39.  J.  Donau.  Ueber  eine  rote,  mittels  Kohlenoxyd  erhaltene 
kolloidale  Goldlosung.  (Detection  of  CO,  compared  with  the 
PdCl2  reaction.)  Pd. 

Monatsh.  26  (1905),  525;  Bui.  Soc.  cliim.  [3],  35  (1906),  19;  J.  Chem 

Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  462;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  21. 

1905:  40.  J.  Brown.  Interaction  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  potas- 
sium permanganate  in  the  presence  of  various  inorganic  sails. 
(K2PtCl6.)  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  21  (1906),  41;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  47  (1905),  314;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  31;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  219,  530. 

1905:'  41.  M.  Delepixe.  Sur  la  dissolution  du  platine  dans  l’acide 

sulfurique.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  141  (1905),  1013:  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  10;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  93;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  328. 

1905:  42.  A.  Pochettixo.  (Luminescence  of  crystals.)  (Ra-rays 

and  X-rays  on  cyanoplatinites.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  14,  i (1905),  505;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  289. 

1905:  43.  H.  Ambronn.  Ueber  pleochroitische  Silberkrystalle  und 
die  Fiirbung  mit  Metallen.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  wiss.  Mikrosk.  22  (1905),  349;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  220. 

1905:  44.  G.  W.  A.  Kahlbaum  and  E.  Sturm.  Ueber  die  Veran- 
derlichkeit  des  spezifischen  Gewichtes.  (Platinum  and  platin- 
iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  46  (1905),  217;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  915;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  680;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1067. 

1905:  45.  J.  A.  Harker.  New  type  of  electric  furnace,  with  a re- 
determination of  the  melting  point  of  platinum.  (M.  p.= 
1,710°±5°.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  76  A (1905),  235;  Chem.  News,  91  (1905),  250; 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  143;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  798; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  370. 

1905:  46.  A.  Guntz  and  H.  Basset,  Jr.  Sur  la  sublimation  du 
platine  au-dessus  de  son  point  de  fusion.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  33  (1905),  1306;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  93;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1906,  i,  440. 

1905:  47.  F.  Emich.  I.  Dichte  der  Kolilensaure  bei  2,000°.  II. 
Zerstaubung  des  Iridiums  im  Kohlendioxyd  und  liber  die  Dis- 
sociation des  letzteren.  (Disintegration  of  iridium.)  Ir. 

Monatsh.  26  (1905),  505,  1011;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  441,  803;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1905,  ii,  314,  1238. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


303 


1905:  48.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Diffusion  of  hydrogen  through  pal- 
ladium. Pd. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  13  (1905),  27;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  233; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1210. 

1905:  49.  A.  Winkelmann.  Absorption  und  Diffusion  des  Wasser- 
stoffs  durch  Palladium.  Pd. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  16  (1905),  773;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  397;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  1362. 

1905:  50.  S.  Guggenheimer.  Dissociationszustand  der  yon  Me- 
tallen  abgespaltenen  Gase.  Pd. 

Physik.  Z.  6 (1905),  579;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1080. 

1905:  51.  P.  J.  Kirkby.  v Union  of  hydrogen  with  oxygen  at  low 
pressures  caused  by  the  heating  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  10  (1905),  467;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  695;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1311. 

1905:  52.  G.  Senter.  Das  wasserstoffsuperoxydzersetzende  En- 
zyme des  Blutes.  II.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  51  (1905),  673;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1684. 

1905:  53.  G.  Senter.  Role  of  diffusion  in  the  catalysis  of  hydrogen 
peroxide  by  colloidal  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  74  (1905),  566;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  379: 
Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1685. 

1905:  54.  G.  Senter.  Platinkatalyse  des  Wasserstoffsuperoxyds 
vom  Standpunkte  der  Diffusion.  Berichtigung.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  52  (1905),  737;  53  (1905),  604;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii, 
1010,  1656. 

1905:  55.  H.  J.  S.  Sand.  Role  of  diffusion  during  catalysis  by 
colloidal  metals  and  similar  substances.  Pt,  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  74  (1905),  356;  Z.  physik.  Chem.  51  (1905),  641; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  233;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  648. 

1905:  56.  PI.  Sirk.  Beschleunigung  bei  Chlorentwickelung  aus  Ka- 
liumchlorat  und  Salzsaure  durch  Gegenwart  von  Platin. 
Beitrag  zur  Theorie  der  elektrolytischen  Chloratbildung.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  261;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  381;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  1581. 

1905:  57.  R.  Vondracek.  Einfluss  der  Metalle  auf  die  Hydrolyse 
des  Rohrzuckers.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  50  (1905),  560;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  151;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  596. 


304 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1905:  58.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Amberger.  Zur  Kenntniss  des  Palla- 
diums (p.  1388).  (Reduced  by  hydrazin  to  metal.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir. 

Ueber  Palladiumwasserstoff  (p.  1394). 

Ueber  colloidale  Metalle  der  Platingruppe,  II  (p.  1398). 

Ueber  die  Aktivierung  des  Wasserstoffs  durch  colloidales 
Palladium  (p.  1406). 

Nachtrag  zur  Mitteilung  iiber  die  Aktivierung  des  Wasser- 
stoffs durch  colloidales  Palladium  (p.  2414). 

Ber.  38  (1905),  1388,  1394,  1398,  1406,  2414;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  34  (1905), 
1277;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  397,  533;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1492; 
ii,  452. 

1905:  59.  A.  Gutbier  and  G.  Hofmeier.  Kolloidale  Metalle  der 
Platinreihe.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  71  (1905),  358,  452;  Bull.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906), 
798;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  396,  533;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1554;  ii, 
108. 

1905:  60.  P.  Bergell.  Vergleich  zwischen  den  organischen  und 
anorganischen  Fermenten.  Pt. 

Z.  klin.  Med.  57  (1905),  381;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1310. 

1905:  61.  Kalle  & Co.  Verfahren  zur  Darstellung  von  Platin, 
Osmium,  bezw.  Palladium  in  kolloidaler  Form  enthaltenden 
Praparaten.  (German  patent  157172,  Mar.  10,  1905.) 

Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  908.  Pt,  Os,  Pd. 

1905:  62.  L.  Holborn  and  F.  Henning.  Ueber  die  Lichtemission 
und  den  Schmelzpunkt  einiger  Metalle.  Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  preuss.  Akad.  1905,  311;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1211. 

1905:  63.  J.  E.  Purvis.  The  influence  of  very  strong  electromag- 
netic fields  on  the  spark  spectra  of  ruthenium,  rhodium,  and 
palladium.  Ru,  Rh,  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  21  (1905),  241;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  440. 

1905:  64.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Discharge  of  electricity  by  hot 
platinum  in  vapours  of  phosphorus.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  9 (1905),  407;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1308. 

1905:  65.  O.  W.  Richardson.  The  fall  in  positive  potential  on 
hot  platinum  in  air  at  low  pressures.  Pt. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  13  (1905),  58;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  197. 

1905:  66.  F.  Streintz.  Temperatur-Koefhzient  des  Widerstandes 
von  Tantal.  (Electrical  resistance  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  273;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  432;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1905,  i,  1633. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


305 


1905:  67.  A.  Broca  and  Turchini.  Resistance  de  fils  metalliques 
pour  les  courants  electriques  de  haute  frequence.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  140  (1905),  1238;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  21. 

1905:  68.  J.  Tafel.  Polarisation  bei  kathodischer  Wasserstoffent- 
wickelung.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  50  (1905),  641;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  223;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1905,  i,  709. 

1905:  69.  R.  Tholdte.  Die  Bestimmung  der  galvanischen  Polari- 
sation wahrend  des  Schlusses  des  Stromes.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  18  (1905),  1061;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  428. 

1905:  70.  J.  B.  Westhaver.  Verhalten  von  Anoden  aus  Iridium, 
Platin  und  Rhodium  bei  der  Elektrolyse  verdiinnter  Schwef- 
elsaure.  Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  51  (1905),  65;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  226;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1905,  i,  984. 

1905:  71.  A.  Brochet  and  J.  Petit.  Dissolution  electrolytique  de 
platine  dans  l’acide  sulfurique.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  140  (1905),  655;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii,  (1905),  260;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1905,  i,  1081. 

1905:  72.  R.  Ruer.  Die  elektrolytische  Auflosung  von  Platin. 
(Reply  to  Brochet  and  Petit,  1905:  71.)  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  10;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  137;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1905,  i,  421. 

1905:  73.  A.  Brochet  and  J.  Petit.  Elektrolyse  mit  Wechsel- 
strom.  (Solubility  of  platinum  in  electrolyte.)  Ft. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  441;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  5 (1905),  307;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  672,  673;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  424. 

1905:  74.  R.  Ruer.  Ueber  die  elektrolytische  Auflosung  von 
Platin.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  661;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  795;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1414. 

1905:  75.  J.  A.  McClelland.  Secondary  radiation  (from  radium). 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  9 (1905),  230;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  713.  Pt. 

1905:  76.  C.  Bender.  Ueber  das  Loslosen  der  Sclimelzen  von 
Platintiegel.  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  18  (1905),  1025;  J.  Iron  Steel  Inst.  1905,  ii,  794;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1905,  ii,  270. 

1905:  77.  M.  W.  Travers  and  A.  G.  C.  Gwyer.  Comparison  of  the 
platinum  scale  of  temperature  with  the  normal  scale  at  tem- 
peratures between  444°  and  —190°,  with  notes  on  constant 
temperatures  below  the  melting  point  of  iron.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Sac.  London,  74  (1905),  528;  Z.  physik.  Chem.  52  (1905),  437; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  88,  ii  (1905),  981;  Chem  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1683;  ii,  589. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  G94 20 


306 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1905:  78.  A.  Campbell.  A direct-reading  resistance  thermometer. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  9 (1905),  713;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  1683.  Pt. 

1905:  79.  R.  Luther  and  Stuer.  Zur  Kenntnis  des  Ozons. 
(Iridium  and  platinum  electrodes.)  Ir,  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  11  (1905),  832;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  80;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  117. 

1905:  80.  Deutsche  Gasgluhlicht  Actien  Gesellschaft.  Aus 
Osmium  mit  oder  ohne  Gehalt  an  anderen  Platinmetallen 
bestede  Gliihfaden  fur  elektrische  Vacuumlampen.  (Zusatz- 
patentzu  138135,  1902:  60.)  (German  patent  162705,  Oct. 10, 
1905.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  ii,  1480. 

1905:  81.  Dr.  Blau.  Mitteihmgen  uber  die  Osmiumlampe.  (Vor- 
trag  im  Elektrotechnischen  Verein  in  Berlin.)  Os. 

J.  Gasbel.  48  (1905),  184;  Chem.  Zentr.  1905,  i,  974. 

1906:  a.  Zoloto  i Platina  (a  bimonthly  magazine).  St. 

Petersburg,  1908.  (Numerous  articles  in  each  number.)  Pt. 

1906:  1.  E.  Acre ,'mann.  Die  gegenwartigen  Go’dlager  im  Faleme- 
becken,  Ober-Senegal  und  Sudan.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  30  (1906),  19;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  589. 

1906:  2.  E.  Hussar.  Ueber  das  Vorkommen  von  Palladium  und 
Platin  in  Brazilien.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  prakt.  Geol.  14  (1906),  284;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  1456. 

19  Y : 3.  D.  T.  Day.  (Platinum  n Colombia.)  Pt. 

Min.  Resources  of  the  U.  S.  1906,  551;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  54 

1906:  3a.  D.  T.  Day  and  R.  H.  Richards.  Investigation  of 
black  sands  from  placer  mines.  Pt. 

U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Bui.  285  (1906),  150. 

1906:4.  F.  W.  Horton.  Platinum  in  1905.  Pt. 

Min.  Resources  of  the  U.  S.  1905;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  33. 

1906:  5.  J.  H.  Pratt.  Platinum  production  in  1903.  (Oregon 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Min.  Resources  of  the  U.  S.  1903,  4;  Neues  Jahr.  Min.  Geol.  1906,  i, 
356;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  466. 

1906:  6.  F.  W.  Horton.  Methods  of  extractirg  platinum  (in 
Russia).  . Pt. 

Indust.  World,  40  (1906),  749;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  164. 

1906:  7.  Farbenfabriren  vorm.  F.  Bayer  & Co.  Verfaliren  zur 
ewinnung  von  Platin  aus  platinhaltigen  Stoffen.  (German 
patent  193457,  May  20,  1906  (Jan.  4,  1908).)  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1121;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1912. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


307 


1906:  8.  F.  W.  Clarke.  Thirteenth  annual  report  of  the  committee 
on  atomic  weights.  Determinations  published  in  1905. 
(Amberg  on  palladium : Pd  =106.688.)  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  2 8 (1906),  293;  Chem.  News,  93  (1906),  203. 

1906:  9.  L.  Wohler  and  J.  Konig.  Die  Oxyde  des  Palladiums. 
(Zur  Berichtigung  von  Bellucci,  1905:  11.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  48  (1906),  203;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  276;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  534. 

1906:  10.  L.  Wohler.  Feste  Losungen  bei  der  Dissociation  von 
Palladiumoxydul  und  Kupferoxyd.  Pd. 

Z.  Elettrochem.  12  (1906),  781;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  33;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  ii,  1759. 

1906:  11.  A.  Gutbier  and  M.  Woernle.  Ueber  Halogensalze 
des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  4134;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  87;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i, 
224;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  530. 

1906:  12.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  Krell.  Ueber  Verbindungen  der 
Palladohalogenide  mit  aliphatischen  Basen  Pd. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  1292;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  1111;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
90,  i (1906),  402;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1647. 


1906:  13.  R.  Mohlau.  Notiz  uber  Doppelsalze  des  Palladichlorids 
mit  cyclischen  Nitrilen.  Pd. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  861;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  1112;  J.Chem.  Soc. 
90,  i (1906),  304;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1146. 

1906:  14.  A.  Werner  and  K.  Dinklage.  Ueber  Nitrilo-bromo- 
osmonate.  Os. 


Ber.  39  (1906),  499;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  176;  Chem.  Zentr.  1996, 
i,  816. 

1906:  15.  R.  H.  Pickard  and  J.  Kenyon.  Contributions  to  the 
chemistry  of  oxygen  compounds.  I.  The  compounds  of 
tertiary  phosphine  oxides  with  acids  and  salts.  (With  chloro- 
platinic  acid.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  22  (1906),  42;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  89  (1906),  262;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  1484. 


1906:  16.  M.  Delepine.  Action  de  Tackle  sulfurique  a chaud  sur 
les  sets  de  platine  et  iridium  en  presence  d’ ammonium 
sulfate.  Pt,  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  142  (1906),  631;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  796,  801; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  289;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1324;  C.  A.  1 
(1907),  143. 


1906:  17.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  le  sulfate  double  d’iridium  et  de 
potassium.  (Ir2(S04)3.3K2S04.)  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  142  (1906),  1525;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  796;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  551;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  413. 


308 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1906:  18.  S.  M.  Jorgensen.  Zur  Konstitution  der  Platinbasen. 
IV.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  48  (1906),  374;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  2 (1907),  30;  J. 

Cliem.  Soc.  90,  i (1906),  338;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1226. 

1906:  19.  S.  M.  Jorgensen  and  S.  P.  L.  Sorenson.  Ueber  eine 
neue,  mit  Magnus’  griinem  Salze  isomere,  rote  Yerbindung.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  48  (1906),  441;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  2 (1907),  31;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  289;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1325. 

1906:  20.  N.  Tarugi.  (Sur  la  preparation  du  sulfate  d’hydroxylo- 

platidiammine.)  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  36,  i (1906),  364;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  618;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1906,  ii,  492. 

1906:  21.  H.  Grossmann  and  B.  Schuck.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung 
von  Aethylendiamin  auf  einige  Kobalt-  und  Platinverbind- 
ungen.  Pt. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  1896;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  2 (1907),  362;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

90,  i (1906),  485;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  216. 

1906:  22.  L.  Bamberg.  Ueber  die  Platosalze  einiger  schwefel- 

haltigen  organischen  Sauren.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  50  (1906),  439;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  2 (1907),  585;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  90,  i (1906),  791;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  1402. 

1906:  23.  L.  Tschugaeff.  Zur  Kenntniss  der  Dioximine  und 
ahnlicher  Verbindungen.  Pd,  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  38,  i (1906),  7;  Ber.  39  (1906),  3382;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  90,  i (1906),  984. 

1906:  24.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  Krell.  Ueber  Derivate  des  Palla- 
dosammins.  Pd. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  616;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  1111;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

90,  i (1906),  244;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1085. 

1906:  25.  A.  Gutbier  and  M.  Woernle.  Die  Aethylen-  und 
Propylen-diaminverbindungen  des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  2716;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  i (1906),  805;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906, 

ii,  1479;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  46. 

1906:26.  P.  Klason  and  T.  Carlson.  Zur  Kenntniss  der  Thiogly- 
kolsaure.  (Compounds  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  732;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  i (1906),  232;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i, 

1089. 

1906:  27.  F.  Fischer.  Untersuchungen  liber  die  Widerstandsan- 
derun"  von  Palladiumdrahten  bei  WasserstofTokklusion.  Pd. 

o 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  20  (1906),  503;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  516;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1906,  ii,  395. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


309 


1906:  28.  A.  A.  Noyes.  A system  of  qualitative  analysis  including 
nearly  all  the  metallic  elements.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Technology  Quarterly,  16  (1906),  No.  2;  Chem.  News,  93  (1906),  134, 146, 
156,  171;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  803;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  71. 

1906:  29.  J.  Petersen.  Qualitativer  Nachweis  von  Gold  und 
Platin  in  der  anorganischen  Analyse.  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  45  (1906),  342;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  2 (1907),  586;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  583;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  361. 

1906:  30.  N.  A.  Orloff.  Ueber  einige  Reaktionen  des  Queck- 
silberjodids.  (Reaction  with  PdCl2.)  Pd. 

Chem.  Ztg.  30  (1906),  1301;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  89;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1907,  i,  424. 

1906:  31.  K.  Regel.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  des  Kaliums  mittels 
Platinchlorwasserstoffsaure  bei  Gegenwart  von  Sulfaten  der 
Alkalien  und  der  Erdalk alien.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  30  (1906),  684;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  631;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1906,  ii,  558. 

1906:  32.  J.  Donau.  Ueber  eine  neue  Methode  zur  Bestimmung 
von  Metallen  (besonders  Gold  und  Palladium)  durch  Leitfahig- 
keitsmessungen.  Pd. 

Monatsh.  27  (1906),  59;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  309;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1906,  i,  1116. 

1906:  33.  N.  A.  Orloff.  Zur  Technik  der  Analyse  von  Platin- 
metallen.  1.  Reaktion  des  Wasserstoffsuperoxyds  auf  Os- 
mium. 2.  Wirkung  des  Jodsilbers  auf  Palladiumchlorid. 

Os,  Pd. 

Chem.  Ztg.  30  (1906),  714;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  632;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1906,  ii,  630. 

1906:  34.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Kontaktvorrichtung  aus  Platin- 
drahtnetz  fur  die  organische  Elementaranalyse.  Pt. 

Ztsch.  chem.  Apparatenkunde,  1 (1906),  541;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906), 
900;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  907. 

1906:  35.  W.  Nernst  and  H.  v.  Wartenberg.  Ueber  denSchmelz- 
punkt  des  Platins  und  Palladiums.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  4 (1906),  48;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1146. 

1906:  35a.  H.  L.  Barvir.  Zur  Lichtbrechung  des  Gobles,  Silbers, 
Kupfers,  und  Platins.  Pt. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  bohm.  Ges.  Wiss.  1906,  35;  Neues  Jahr.  Min.  Geol.  1908. 
170;  Chem.  Centr.  1908,  ii,  149;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1235. 

1906:  36.  L.  Holborn  and  S.  Valentiner.  Temperaturmessungen 
bei  1600°  mit  dcm  Stickstoffthermometer  und  mit  dem 
Spektralphotometer.  Pd. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  preuss.  Akad.  1906,  811;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  84 


310  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1906 : 37.  H.  Moissan.  Sur  F ebullition  de  F osmium,  du  ruthenium, 
du  platine,  du  palladium,  de  Firidium  et  du  rhodium. 

Os,  Ru,  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh. 

Compt.  rend.  142  (1906),  189;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  272;  J.  Cliem. 
Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  175;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  645. 

1906;  38.  I.  Langmuir.  The  dissociation  of  water  vapor  and 
carbon  dioxide  at  high  temperatures.  (Vaporization  of  plat- 
inum and  rhodium.)  Pt,  Rh. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1906),  1357;  J.  Cliem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  848;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  i,  6. 

1906:  39.  A.  Winkelmann.  Bemerkungen  zu  der  Abhandlung  von 
O.  W.  Richardson,  J.  Nicol  und  T.  Parnell  fiber  die  Diffusion 
von  Wasserstoff  durch  heisses  Platin.  (Cf.  1904  : 41.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  19  (1906),  1045;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  336;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  1525. 

1906:  40.  A.  Lessing.  Ueber  die  Diffusion  elektrolytisch  ent- 
wickelten  Wassers toffs  durch  Palladium.  Pd. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  4 (1906),  569;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  932. 

1906:  41.  Z.  de  Vamossy.  Sur  Femploi  de  platine  et  cuivre  comme 
moyens  d Activation  dans  Fappareil  de  Marsh.  Pt. 

•Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  24;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  196;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  703. 

1906:  42.  L.  Wohler,  A.  Foss,  and  W.  Pluddemann.  Zur 
Kenntniss  des  Schwefelsaurekontaktprocess.  Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  39  (1906),  3538;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  846;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906, 
ii,  1738. 

1906:  43.  O.  Loew  and  K.  Aso.  Some  catalytic  actions  of  pla- 
tinum black.  Pt. 

Bui.  Col.  Agric.  Tokio,  7 (1906),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  862;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  ii,  492;  C.  A.  2 (1906),  150. 

1906:  44.  W.  Bray.  Einige  Reaktionen  des  Chlordioxyds  und  der 
chlorigen  Saure.  (Influence  of  platinum  as  a catalyst.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  48  (1906),  217;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  223;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  1140. 

1906:  45.  W.  A.  Bone  and  R.  V.  Wheeler.  Combination  of 
hydrogen  and  oxygen  in  contact  with  hot  surfaces.  (Hot 

platinum.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  77  A (1906),  146;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906), 
434;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  898. 

1906:  46.  F.  Haber  and  F.  Fleischmann.  Ueber  die  Knall- 
gaskette.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  51  (1906),  245;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  6;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  ii,  199. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


311 


1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 

1906: 


47.  F.  Haber.  Ueber  die  Kn allgasket te.  III.  PL 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  51  (1906),  356;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  321. 

48.  A.  Bringhenti.  (Catalyse  et  force  electronic  trice.) 

Pd,  Pt. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  36,  i (1906),  187;  J.  Cliem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1908),  428;- Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  1773. 

49.  0:  H.  Neilson.  Inversion  of  starch  by  platinum  black. 

Pt. 

Am.  J.  Physiol.  15  (1906),  412;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  i (1908),  235;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  1152. 

50.  C.  H.  Neilson.  Catalysis  and  enzyme  action.  (Simi- 
larity.) Pt. 

Am.  J.  Physiol.  15  (1906),  148;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  i (1906),  125;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  989. 

51.  J.  Donau.  Notiz  iiber  die  kolloidale  Natur  der  schwarzen, 

mittels  Kohlenoxyd  erhaltenen  Palladiumlosung.  Pd. 

Monatsh.  27  (1906),  71;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  289;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1906,  i,  1227. 

52.  E.  F.  Burton.  Properties  of  electrically  prepared  col- 
loidal solutions.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  11  (1906),  425;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  275:  Chem. 
Zentr.  1906,  i,  1522. 

53.  J.  Schneider  and  J.  Just.  Ultramikroskopie  der  Oleo- 

sole.  Ru,  Os,  Pt. 

Z.  wiss.  Mikrosk.  22  (1906),  481;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1190 

54.  T.  Svedberg.  Ueber  die  Eigenbewegung  der  Teilchen  in 

kolloidalen  Losungen.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  12  (1906),  853;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  17, 160;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  i,  148. 

55.  T.  Svedberg.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Stabilitat  kolloidaler 

Losungen.  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  1 (1906),  161;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  535; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  1088. 

56.  P.  Borissow.  (Sur  la  luminescence  de  quelques  combi- 

naisons  organiques  a des  temperatures  de  100°  a —190°.) 
(BaPt(CN)4.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  37  (1906),  249;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  317; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  1315. 

57.  J.  E.  Purvis.  Influence  of  very  strong  electro-magnetic 

fields  on  the  spark  spectra  of  (1)  vanadium  and  (2)  platinum 
and  iridium.  Pt,  Ir. 

Trans  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  20  (1906),  193;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  421; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  1478. 


312 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  *OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1906:  58.  J.  E.  Purvis.  Influence  of  a very  strong  magnetic  field 
on  the  spark  spectra  of  palladium,  rhodium,  and  ruthenium. 

Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  13  (1906),  325;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  2; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  1479. 

1906:  59.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Action  of  hydrogen  on  the  discharge 
of  electricity  from  hot  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  13  (1906),  2;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  898. 

1906:  60.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Ionization  produced  by  hot  plat- 
inum in  different  gases.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  78,  A (1906),  192;  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  London. 

207,  A (1907),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  6;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii, 

1155;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  3187. 

1906:  61.  N.  R.  Campbell.  Radiation  from  ordinary  materials. 

Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6].  11  (1906),  206;  Jahrb.  Radioakt.  Elektronik,  2 (1906), 

434;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  809. 

1906:  62.  C.  E.  Fawsitt.  Electrical  measurements  on  metals. 
(Potential  differences  in  the  same  metal  under  different  condi- 
tions.) Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinb.  25  (1906),  2;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  328; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  i,  899. 

1906:  63.  R.  Marc.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  des  Selens  gegen  Licht 
und  Temperatur.  III.  (Influence  of  platinum,  p.  455.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  50  (1906),  446;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  742;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1906,  ii,  1381. 

1906:  64.  E.  Muller  and  A.  Scheller.  Ueber  die  durch  Fluor-, 
Chlor-  und  Bromion  bewirkte  anomale  anodische  Polarisation. 

Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  48  (1906),  112;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  64;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1906,  i,  175. 

1906:  65.  E.  Muller  and  F.  Spitzer.  Ueber  anodische  Oxyd- 
bildung  und  Passivitat.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  50  (1906),  321;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  724;  Chem. 

Zehtr.  1906,  ii,  1375. 

1906:  66.  H.  Dember.  Ueber  den  lichtelektrischen  Effekt  und  das 
Kathodengefalle  an  einer  Alkalielektrode  in  Argon,  Helium, 
und  Wasserstoff.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  20  (1906),  379;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  516;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1906,  ii,  395. 

1906:  67.  W.  Guertler.  Ueber  die  elektrische  Leitfahigkeit  der 
Legierungen.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  51  (1906),  397;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  65;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  i,  326. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


313 


1906:  68.  R.  S.  Willows.  Electrical  resistance  of  alloys.  Pt,  Ir. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  12  (1906),  604;  Physik.  Z.  8 (1907),  173;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1907,  i,  225. 

1906:  69.  J.  F.  Thompson  and  E.  H.  Miller.  Platinum-silver 
alloys.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1906),  1115;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  765; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  1217. 

1906:  70.  R.  Ruer.  Ueber  die  Legierungen  des  Palladiums  mit 
Kupfer.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  51  (1906),  223;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  f 2,  ii  (1907),  32;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  i,  87;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  409. 

1906:  71.  R.  Ruer.  Ueber  die  Legierungen  des  Palladiums  mit 
Silber.  • Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  51  (1906),  315;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  99;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  i,  150;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  409. 

1906:  72.  R.  Ruer.  Ueber  die  Legierungen  des  Palladiums  mit 
Gold.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  50  (1906),  391;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  100;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  i,  150;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  409. 

1906:  73.  W.  Geibel.  Ueber  die  Verwendbarkeit  grau  platinierter 
Elektroden  fur  die  Alkalichloridelektrolyse.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  12  (1906),  817;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  83. 

1906:  74.  C.  E.  Guye  and  T.  Romilly.  Sur  la  fonctionnement  de 
la  lampe  a arc  au  mercure  avec  anode  de  platine.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  phys.  hist.  nat.  Geneve,  23  (1906),  18. 

1906:  75.  Grunebaum  and  Scheuer.  Platinbrenner.  (Platinum 
pyro-stencil.)  (German  patent  177858,  Nov.  8,  1906.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  439;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1504. 

1906:  76.  Deutsch  Gasgluhlicht  Aktien  Gesellschaft.  Leucht- 
korper  f ur  elektrische  Gluhlampen.  (Osmium  filament.)  (Ger- 
man patent  174221,  July  11,  1906.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  937. 

1906:  77.  L.  Quennessen.  Sur  Taction  de  Facide  sulfurique  sur 
le  platine.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  142  (1906),  1341;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  580,  619; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  90,  ii  (1906),  551;  Chem.  Zentr.  1906,  ii,  220. 

L906:  78.  J.  H.  Vogel.  Ueber  Carbid  und  Acetylen  in  der  Technik 
und  im  Laboratorium.  (Action  of  acetylene  flame  on  plati- 
num crucibles;  acetylene  as  a reagent  for  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  19  (1906),  49;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [3],  35  (1906),  874;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1906,  i,  615. 


314 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1906: 


1906: 

1906: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 


1907: 

1907: 


1907: 

1907: 


79.  A.  C.  Hyde  and  K.  R.  Swan.  Process  of  obtaining  an 

intimate  cohesion  between  a surface  of  iron,  nickel,  or  alloy 
thereof  and  a thin  sheet  of  platinum.  (British  patent  18803, 
Aug.  22,  1906.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  1 (1907),  2198. 

80.  R.  Jacoby.  Development  of  platinum  prints.  Pt. 

Jalirb.  Phot.  1906,  150;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  16. 

81.  Neue  photographische  Aktiengesellschaft.  Process 
of  imparting  permanent  catalytic  power  to  a platinum  picture. 
(British  patent  29480,  Dec.  27,  1906.) 

C.  A.  1 (1907),  2840. 

1.  G.  Katterfeld.  Sur  le  platine  dans  une  pyrite  de 

r Oural.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  oural.  amat.  sc.  nat.  25  (1907),  6;  Neues  Jahr.  Min.  Geol. 
1907,  ii,  354;  Chem.  Zentr.  1903,  i,  1204. 

2.  W.  Baragwanath,  Jr.  (Platinum  in  place  in  Victoria). 

Geol.  Surv.  Victoria,  Bui.  20;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1962.  Rt. 

2a.  D.  T.  Day.  (Platinum.)  Pt. 

Mining  J.  82  (1907),  637,  723. 

3.  Le  platine:  Thistoire,  l’emploi  de  ce  curieux 

metal.  Pt. 

Rev.  technique,  1907,  232. 

4.  T.  Gross.  Versuche  iiber  die  chemische  Zerlegung  des 

Platins  durch  Wechselstrom.  (Probability  of  a new  ele- 
ment.) Pt,  X. 

Elektrochem.  Z.  14  (1907),  146;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  199;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1729;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  739. 

5.  M.  Woerxle.  (Studies  on  compounds  and  atomic  weight 

of  palladium.)  (Pd  =106.69.)  Pd. 

Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soc.  Erlangen,  38,  278;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  739. 

6.  I.  Bellucci  and  E.  Clavari.  (Recherches  nouvelles  sur 

Toxyde  superieur  du  nickel.)  (Comparisons  with  palla- 
dium.) Pd. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  16,  i (1907),  647;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  474; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  209. 

7.  W.  Witzmann.  Die  Oxyde  des  Iridiums.  Dissertation, 

Karlsruhe.  Ir. 


8.  N.  A.  Orloff.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  des  Osmiumper- 
oxydes  auf  losliche  Metalljodide.  Os, 

Chem.  Ztg.  31  (1907),  1063;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  970;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1907,  ii,  2025. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


315 


1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 

1907: 


9.  L.  Wohler.  (Platinum  compound  analogous  to  purple 

of  Cassius.)  Pt. 

Verh.  deutsch.  Naturforsch.  Aerzte,  1907,  ii,  105;  Chem.  Ztg.  31  (1907), 
786;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  245. 

10.  A.  E.  Dunstan  and  L.  Cleaverley.  Benzoflavol.  (A 

new  type  of  chloroplatinate.)  Pt. 

Proc!  Chem.  Soc.  23  (1907),  86;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  91  (1907),  1619;  C.  A. 
2 (1908),  849. 

11.  A.  E.  Dunstan.  Note  on  the  formation  of  abnormal 

platinichlorides.  (A  correction.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  23  (1907),  290;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  955. 

12.  R.  II.  Pickard  and  J.  Kenyon.  Contributions  to  the 

chemistry  of  oxygen  compounds.  II.  The  compounds  of 
cineol,  diphenylsulphoxide,  nitroso-derivatives,  and  the  car- 
bamides  with  acids  and  salts.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  91  (1907),  896;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  81;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  239;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2246. 

13.  E.  Rimbach  and  F.  Korten.  Ueber  einige  Verbind- 

ungen  des  Iridiums.  (Halides,  sulphates,  cyanides,  and  thio- 
cyanides— the  last  not  formed.)  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  52  (1907),  406;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  276;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  i,  940;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1236. 

14.  A.  Gutbier  and  H.  Zwicker.  Ueber  Halogenosalze  des 

Rutheniums.  Ru. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  690;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  289;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907, 
i,  870;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1227. 

15.  P.  Lebeau  and  A.  Noyitzky.  Sur  un  nouveau  siliciure 

de  platine.  Pt. 

Compt,  rend.  145  (1907),  241;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  784;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1056;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2983. 

16.  E.  Vigouroux.  Sur  le  siliciure  de  platine,  SiPt,  et  un 

siliciure  double  de  platine  et  de  cuivre.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  145  (1907),  376;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  785;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1314;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  29S5. 

17.  L.  A.  Levy.  Some  new  platinocyanides.  (Guanidin, 

etc.,  and  uranyl.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  14  (1907),  159;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  689; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  796;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2672. 

18.  J.  Milbauek.  Ueber  das  Tetramethyliumplatincyaniir. 

Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  53  (1907),  135;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  158;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  92,  i (1907),  392;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  1186;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1550. 


316 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1907:  19.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  G.  Bugge.  Vergleich  des  Nitrile 
und  Isonitrile  im  Verhalten  gegen  Metallsalze,  ein  Beitrag  zur 
Konstitution  der  Doppelcyanide.  Pt. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  1772;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  445;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  : 
i (1907),  489;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  1740;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1986. 

1907:  20.  L.  Bamberg.  Ueber  Platinverbindungen  von  Phenyl- 
isonitril  und  Benzonitril.  * Pt. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  2578;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  604;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  I 
312;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2611. 

1907:  21.  L.  Tschugaeff.  Einige  Bemerkungen  uber  die  Bing- 
bildung  bei  Komplexverbindungen.  (Platinum  and  palla- 
dium oxalates  and  bases.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  (2)  76  (1907),  88;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  1208;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  830;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1062;  C.  A.  2 (1908), 
75. 

1907:  22.  L.  Tschugaeff.  Ueber  relative  Bestandigkeit  einiger 

o o 

Metallaminverbindungen.  Pt. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  173;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  1189;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92, 

i (1907),  187;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  708;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  991. 

1907:  23.  L.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Sokoloff.  Ueber  einige  Kom- 
plexverbindungen  des  optisch-aktiven  Z-Propylendiamins.  Pt. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  3461 ; J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  896;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii, 
1600;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  70. 

1907:  24.  S.  Zeisel  and  A.  Nowack.  Ueber  Palladiumhydroxam- 
mine.  Pd. 

Ann.  351  (1907),  439;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  276;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i, 
1177;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1238. 

1907:  25.  A.  Werner.  Ueber  Dihydroxo-tetrammin-platin-ver- 
bindungen.  Pt,  Bu. 

Ber.  40(1907),  4093;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  1197;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii 
(1907),  969;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1895;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  515. 

1907:  26.  A.  Werner.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Butheniumammoniak- 
verbindungen.  Beitrag  III  zur  Theorie  der  Hydrolyse.  Bu. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  2614;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  560;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii, 
381;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2769. 

1907:  27.  C.  Gialdini.  (Sur  quelques  sels  complexes  de  Tiridium. 
Oxalates  d’iridium.)  v Ir. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  16,  ii  (1907),  551,  648;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907) 
1005;  94,  i (1908),  3;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  107. 

1907:  28.  W.  J.  Pope  and  S.  J.  Peachy.  A new  class  of  organo- 
metallic  compounds.  Preliminary  notice.  Trimethyl  plan 
tinimethyl  hydroxide  and  its  salts.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  23  (1907),  86. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


317 


1907:  29.  F.  Emich  and  J.  Donau.  Ein  einfaches  Verfahren  zur 
Ermittlung  der  Farbe  kleiner  Mengen  von  schwach  gefarbten 
Flussigkeiten  und  seine  Anwendung  in  der  mikrochemischen 
Analyse.  Pt. 

Monatsh.  28  (1907),  825;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  809;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1907,  ii,  1443;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2964. 

1907:  30.  H.  Erdmann  and  O.  Markowka.  Ueber  den  gegenwar- 
tigen  Stand  der  Verwendung  des  Acetylens  als  analytisches 
Fallungsreagens  (p.  125).  Die  Abscheidung  und  Bestimmung 
des  Palladiums  durch  Fallen  mit  Acetylen  in  saurer  Losung 
(p.  141).  Verhalten  einiger  Edelmetalle  gegen  Acetylen 
(p.  145).  Pd,  Pt,  Os,  Ir. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  46  (1907),  125;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  2 (1907),  1405;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  399,  403;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  1073,  1075;  C.  A.  1 
(1907),  1239. 

1907:  31.  J.  Langness.  Electrolytic  determinations  and  separa- 
tions with  the  use  of  a rotating  anode.  Pt,  Pd,  Rh. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1907),  459;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  558;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  585;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  93;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  45. 

1907:  32.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Amberger.  Zur  Kenntnis  des  Osmiums. 
(Critique  of  analytical  methods.)  Os. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  1378;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  404;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i, 
1395;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1521. 

1907:  33.  H.  J.  F.  de  Vries.  (The  determination  of  potassium  by 
the  chloroplatinate  method.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Weekblad,  4 (1907),  231,  333,  455;  5 (1908),  176,  261;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
92,  ii  (1907),  504,  719;  94,  ii  (1908),  430,  534;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1647; 
C.  A.  3 (1909),  36'. 

1907:  34.  R.  Baumert.  Zur  vereinfachten  Verbrennungsmethode 
nach  Dennstedt.  Pt. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  3475:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  909;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii, 
1654;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  42. 

1907:  35.  A.  Jacobsen  and rf.  Lendesen.  Ueber  Verwendung  des 
Palladiums  als  Kontaktsubstanz  bei  der  Elementaranalyse.  Pd. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  3217;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii (1907),  718;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii, 
839;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2992. 

1907:  36.  M.  Dennstedt.  Ueber  Verwendung  des  Palladiums  als 
Kontaktsubstanz  bei  der  Elementaranalyse.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  40(1907),  3677;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  908;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii, 
1655;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2993. 

1907:  37.  A.  Holt,  Jr.  Decomposition  of  water  vapour  in  contact 
with  hot  platinum  wire.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  13  (1907),  630;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  450;  Chem.  Zentr, 
1907,  ii,  11;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2344. 


318 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1907:  38.  C.  W.  Field.  On  the  formation  of  specific  precipitin  in 
rabbits  after  inoculation  with  colloidal  platinum  and  col- 
loidal silver.  Pt. 

Proc.  Soc.  Exp.  Biol.  Med.  June  22,  1907;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2136. 

1907:  39.  E.  Pfuhl.  (Cultivation  of  anaerobic  bacteria  in  . . . 
bouillon  containing  platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Centr.  Bakt.  Parasitenk.  19,  i (1907),  378;  C.'A.  1 (1907),  2613. 

1907:  40.  F.  Limmer.  Ueber  krystalliertes  Platin.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  31  (1007),  1025;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  298;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  882;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1729. 

1907:  41.  H.  Baumhauer.  Ueber  einige  Platindoppelcyaniire, 
insbesondere  diejenigen  des  Calciums,  Strontiums  und  Ba- 
riums. Pt. 

Z.  Kryst.  Min.  43  (1907),  356;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  689;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  ii,  688. 

1907:  42.  H.  Bx\umhauer.  Ueber  die  Doppelbrechung  und  Dis- 
persion bei  einigen  Platindoppelcyanuren.  Pt. 

Z.  Kryst.  Min.  44  (1907),  23;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  917;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1908,  i,  120;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  505^ 

1907:  43.  F.  Henning.  Ueber  die  Ausdehnung  fester  Korper  bei 
tiefer  Temperaturen.  (Platinum,  palladium,  and  platinirid- 
ium.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir, 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  22  (1907),  631;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  1564. 

1907:  44.  K.  Scheel.  Versuche  uber  die  Ausdehnung  fester  Kor- 
per, insbesondere  von  Quarz  in  Bichtung  der  Hauptachse, 
Platin,  Palladium  und  Quarzglas  bei  der  Temperatur  der 
fliissigen  Luft.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  5 (1907),  3;  Physik.  Z.  8 (1907),  726;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1907,  i,  1480;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1823;  2 (1908),  623. 

1907:  45.  K.  Scheel  and  W.  Heuse.  Bestimmung  der  Ausdehn- 
ung des  Platins  zwischen  — 183°  *und  Zimmertemperature 
mit  dem  Komparator  und  dem  Fizeau’schen  Apparat.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  8 (1907),  756;  Ber.  physik.  Ges.  5 (1907),  449;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1907,  ii,  1962;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  623. 

1907:  46.  E.  Gruneisen.  Die  elastischen  Konstanten  der  Metallo 
bei  kleinen  Deformationen.  Rh,  Pd,  Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  22  (1907),  801;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  15. 

1907:  47.  T.  W.  Richards.  Die  Zusammendruckbarkeit  der 
Elemente.  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  13  (1907),  519;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1142. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


319 


1907:  48.  C.  W.  Waidnert  and  G.  K.  Burgess.  The  radiation 
from  and  the  melting  points  of  palladium  and  platinum. 

Pd,  Pt. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  3 (1907),  163;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  882;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1908,  i,  341;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2775. 

1907:  49.  W.  IIeald.  Die  Absorption  von  Wasserstoff  seitens 
d tinner  Metallschichten.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  8 (1907),  659;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  859;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1907,  ii,  1586;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1817. 

1907:  50.  A.  Sieverts.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Okklusion  und  Diffusion 
von  Gasen  durch  Metalle.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  60  (1907),  129;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  741;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1169;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2480. 

11907:  51.  H.  Baerwald.  Ueber  die  Adsorption  von  Gasen  durch 
Holzkohle  bei  tiefen  Temperaturen.  (Occlusion  by  palladium 
and  platinum  little  greater  than  at  ordinary  temperatures.) 

Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  23  (1907),  84;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  202;  C.  A.  1 (1907), 

1943. 

1907:  52.  J.  Liebig.  Letter  to  Dobereiner  on  the  catalytic  prop- 
erties of  platinum. 

Chem.  Ztg.  31  (1907),  1;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  687. 

11907:  53.  M.  Bodenstein  and  C.  G.  Fink.  Heterogene  kataly- 
tische  Reaktionen.  IV.  Kinetik  der  Kontaktschwefelsaure. 
V.  Allgemeine  Bemerkungen.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  60  (1907),  1,  46;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  749,  750; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  2018;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2849,  2850. 

(1907:  54.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Amberger.  Ueber  kolloidale  Metalle  der 
Platingruppe.  III.  Os. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  1392;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  360;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i, 

1396;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1522. 

M1907 : 55.  C.  Paal,  C.  Amberger,  and  J.  Gerum.  Ueber  kataly- 
tische  Wirkungen  kolloidaler  Metalle  der  Platingruppe.  I,  II. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os. 

Ber.  40  (1907),  2201,  2209;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  559;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1907,  ii,  213;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2851. 

1907:  56.  J.  Billitzer.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Stabilitat  kolloidaler 
Losungen.  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  1 (1907),  225;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  535; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  108S. 

1907:  57.  T.  Svedberg.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Stabilitat  kolloidaler 
Losungen.  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  1 (1907),  161;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  535; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  1088. 


320 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1907:  58.  T.  Svedberg.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Stabilitat  kolloidaler 
Losungen.  II.  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  2 (1907),  142;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  364; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  88. 

1907:  59.  T.  Svedberg.  Studien  zur  Lehre  von  den  kolloiden 
Losungen.  Pt. 

Nova  acta  Soc.  sci.  Upsala  [4],  2 (1907),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  23; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  87. 

1907:  60.  T.  Svedberg.  Quantitative  Untersuchungen  iiber  die 
elektrisclie  Kolloidsyn thesis.  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  1 (1907),  229;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  529; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  i,  1089;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2329. 

1907:  61.  H.  Bechhold.  Kolloidstudien  mit  der  Filtrations- 
methode.  (Platinsol.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  60  (1907),  257;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  24;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1374;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2762. 

1907:  62.  E.  Muller.  Das  optische  Verhalten  der  kolloidalen 
Metalle.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  24  (1907),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  829;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1726;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  503. 

1907:  63.  M.  Ascoli  and  G.  Izar.  Beeinflussung  der  Autolyse 
durch  anorganische  Kolloide.  II.  Wirkung  von  einigen  positiv 
geladenen  Kolloide,  sowie  von  kolloidalem  Palladium,  Arsen- 
trisulfid  und  Mangandioxyd  auf  die  Leberautolyse.  Pd. 

Biochem.  Z.  6 (1907),  192;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  897;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1907,  ii,  1643;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  868;  2 (1908),  425. 

1907:  64.  H.  Micheels  and  P.  de  Heen.  Seconde  communica- 
tion sur  Faction  excitatrice,  exercee  sur  la  germinaison  par 
des  melanges  de  solutions  colloidales.  Pt. 

Bui.  sci.  Acad.  roy.  belg.  1907,  1027;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1636. 

1907:  65.  L Meitner.  Ueber  die Zerstreuung  der  a-Strahlen.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  8 (1907),  489;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1379. 

1907:  66.  G.  W.  C.  Kaye.  Selective  absorption  of  Rontgen  rays. 

Pt. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  14  (1907),  236;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1887;  C.  A. 

2 (1908),  371. 

1907:  67.  F.  Deininger.  Ueber  den  Austritt  negativer  Ionen  aus 
einigen  gluhenden  Metallen  und  aus  gluhenden  Calciumoxyd. 

Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  5 (1907),  674;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  83;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1908  i,  326;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1232. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


321 


1907:  68.  G.  H.  Martyn.  Discharge  of  electricity  by  heated 
bodies.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  14  (1907),  306;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1203. 

1907:  69.  J.  G.  Davidson.  Einige  Wirkungen  des  ultravioletten 
Lichtes.  (Discharge  of  metal  wire.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  8 (1907),  658;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1581;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  362. 

1907:  70.  G.  Niccolai.  (Suite  des  recherches  sur  la  resistance 
electrique  specifique  de  quelques  metaux  purs  a des  tempera- 
tures tres  elevees  et  tres  basses.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  16  (1907),  906;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  514;  C.  A. 

2 (1908),  2505. 

1907:  71.  G.  Szivessy.  Ueber  die  Widerstandsanderung  von 
Metalldrahten  durch  Sauerstoffokklusion.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  23  (1907),  963;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1577;  C.  A.  2 (1908), 

373. 

1907:  72.  C.  E.  Guye  and  L.  Zebrikow.  Sur  la  difference  de 
potential  de  l’arc  a courant  continu  entre  des  electrodes  metal- 
liques.  Pt,  Pd. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  [4],  24  (1907),  549;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  150; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  915;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1529. 

1907:  73.  H.  C.  Barker.  Thermoelectromotive  force  of  potassium 
and  sodium  with  platinum  and  mercury.  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  24  (1907),  159;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  739;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1474;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2855. 

1907:  74.  K.  Badeker.  Ueber  die  elektrische  Leitfahigkeit  und 
die  thermoelektrische  Kraft  einiger  Schwermetallverbin- 
dungen.  Pt,  Rh. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  22  (1907),  749;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  327;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  i,  1567. 

1907:  75.  C.  Marie.  Sur  Toxydation  electrolytique  du  platine. 

Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  145  (1907),  117;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  698;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1395;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  2533.. 

1907:  76.  G.  Senter.  Electrolysis  of  dilute  solutions  of  acids  and 
alkalies  at  low  potentials : dissolving  of  platinum  at  the  anode 
by  a direct  current.  Pt. 

Trans.  Faraday  Soc.  2 (1907),  142;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  68;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1907,  i,  1304;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  820. 

1907:  77.  R.  Abegg,  The  Reason  Manufacturing  Co.,  Ltd.,  and 
H.  S.  Hatfield.  Verfahren  der  Elektrolyse  von  Losungen 
der  Quecksilberoxydsalze.  (German  patent  186878,  July  18, 
1907.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1217;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  598. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 21 


322 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1907: 


1907: 


1907 : 


1907: 


1907: 


1907: 


1907: 


1907: 


1907: 


1907: 


78.  R.  Lorenz  and  A.  Mohn.  Der  Neutralpunkt  der  Was- 

serstoffelektrode.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  60  (1907),  422;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  838;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1578. 

79.  G.  Tammann.  Ueber  die  Fahigkeit  der  Elemente  mit 

einander  Verbindungen  zu  bilden.  (General  consideration  of 
alloys.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  55  (1907),  289;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  857;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1289;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  5. 

80.  F.  Doerixckel.  Ueber  einigePlatinlegierungen.  (With 

copper,  silver,  gold,  tin,  and  lead.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  54  (1907),  333;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  785;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  215;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  785;  C.  A.  1 (1907), 
2873. 

81.  R.  Ruer.  Ueber  die  Legierungen  des  Palladiums  mit 

Blei.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  52  (1907),  345;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  275;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  i,  941;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1259. 

82.  E.  Isaac  and  G.  Tammann.  Ueber  die  Legierungen  des 

Eisens  mit  Platin.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem*  55  (1907),  63;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  786;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  882;  J.  Iron  Steel  Inst.  1907,  iii,  520;  C.  A.  1 (1907), 
2795. 

83.  H.  Moissan.  Sur  une  propriete  de  Tamalgame  de 

platine.  (Emulsion  with  water.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  144  (1907),  593;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  360;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  i,  1664;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1363. 

84.  P.  Lebeau.  Sur  quelques  observations  supplementaires 

concernant  une  propriete  de  i’amalgame  de  platine  annoncee 
par  H.  Moissan.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  144  (1907),  843;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  479;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  25;  C.  A.  1 (1907),  1830. 

85.  P.  Lebeau.  Sur  quelques  emulsions  des  amalgames 

avec  beau  et  differents  liquides.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  11  (1907),  340;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1593;  C.  A. 
1 (1907),  2851. 

86.  S.  A.  Tucker.  Platinum  resistance  furnace  for  melt- 
ing points  and  combustions.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Cliem.  Soc.  29  (1907),  1442;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  842;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  2014;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  373. 

87.  A.  Berninger  and  R.  Schuster.  Vergleichende  Unter- 
suchungen  an  Kohlenfadenlampen  und  an  Osmiumlampen. 

Os. 

Mitt.  tech.  Gewerbemuseum  Wien  [2],  17  (1907),  28;  Chem.  Zentr.  1907, 
ii,  433. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


323 


1907:  88.  F.  Leder.  Ueber  die  absolute  Intensitatsverteilung  im 
kontinuierlichen  Grunde  der  Alkalimetallspektren,  fiber 
die  Strahlung  der  Hefnerlampe  und  des  Osmiums.  Dis- 
sertation, Kiel,  1907.  Os. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  24  (1907),  305;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  5;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  201;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  938. 

1907:  89.  W.  C.  Heraeus  and  W.  Geibel.  Ueber  eine  Ursache 
der  Zerstorung  von  Platingefassen.  (Diffusion  of  hydrogen 
through  the  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  20  (1907),  1892;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  ii  (1907),  9G9;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1907,  ii,  1886;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  638. 

1908:  1.  W.  Geibel.  Platin:  Vorkommen,  Gewinnung,  Anwend- 
ung.  Pt. 

Festschr.  Westerauisch.  Ges.  Nat.  Hanau,  1908,  11;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908, 
ii,  1240;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1633. 

1908:  2.  L.  Duparc.  Sur  les  gisements  platiniferes  et  Forigine  du 
platine.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  phys.  hist.  nat.  Geneve,  25  (1908),  87;  Arch.  sci.  phys. 
nat.  Geneve  [4],  27  (1909),  198. 

1908:  3.  R.  Beck.  Ueber  die  Struktur  des  uralischen  Platins.  Pt. 

Ber.  Sachs.  Ges.  Wiss.  59  (1908),  387;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1645;  C.  A.  2 
(1908),  1405. 

1908:  4.  The  platinum  deposits  of  Colombia.  Pt. 

J.  Roy.  Soc.  Arts,  56  (1908),  884;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2778. 

1908:  4a.  O.  G.  Granger.  Gold  dredging  on  tbe  Choco  River, 
Republic  of  Colombia.  Pt. 

Trans.  Am.  Inst.  Mining  Eng.  39  (1908),  392. 

1908:  4b.  F.  E.  Studt,  J.  Cornet,  and  H.  Buttgenbach.  Carte 
geologique  du  Katanga.  (Platinum  on  the  Congo.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Musee  du  Congo,  ser.  2,  Katanga,  Brussels,  1908,  60  (Feb.) 

1908:  5.  A.  Seigle.  Verfahren  zum  Auslaugen  von  Kupfer,  Nickel, 
Silber,  Gold,  oder  Platin  aus  deren  Erzen  durch  Bildung  des 
Losemittels  (Salzsaure,  Chlor,  Cyankalium)  wahrend  der  Be- 
handlung  des  Erzes.  (German  patent  196215,  Mar.  7,  1908; 
U.  S.  patent  915705,  Mar.  16,  1909.).  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1234;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2072;  3 (1909),  1392. 

1908:  6.  E.  Cohen  and  T.  Strengers.  Physikalisch-cliemische 
Studien  an  den  explosiven  Platinmetallen. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  61  (1908),  G93;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  299;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  2139;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2485. 


324 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1908:  7.  G.  D.  Hinrichs.  Les  poids  atomiques  les  plus  exacts  do 
16  elements  chimiques.  Pt. 

Mon.  sci.  [4],  22,  i (1908),  155;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  574;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  1240;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  3314. 

1908:  8.  G.  I.  Kemmerer.  The  atomic  weight  of  palladium.  (Pd 
= 106.434).  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1908),  1701;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  1046; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  511;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  521. 

1908:  9.  C.  Marie.  Sur  Toxydabilite  du  platine.  Ir,  Pt. 

J.  chim.  phys.  6 (1908),  596;  Compt.  rend.  146  (1908),  475;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  299;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1373;  ii,  1498;  C.  A.  2 
(1908),  1531,  3318. 

1908:  10.  R.  Ruer.  Ueber  die  Passivitat  des  Platins.  (Oxida- 
tion at  anode.)  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  14  (1908),  309,  633;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  601,  954; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  133,  1484;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2491;  3 (1909),  16. 

1908:  11.  L.  Wohler  and  W.  Witzmann.  Die  Oxyde  des  Iri- 
diums. Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  57  (1908),  323;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  300;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  1526;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1794. 

1908:  12.  L.  Wohler  and  W.  Witzmann.  Feste  Losungen  bei 

der  Dissoziation  von  Iridiumoxyden.  Ir. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  14  (1908),  97;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  301;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  1152;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1523. 

1908:  13.  L.  Wohler  and  F.  Martin.  Eine  neue  Oxidationsstufe 
des  Palladiums.  (Pd203.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  57  (1908),  398;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  392;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  1674;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2054. 

1908:  14.  A.  Rosenstiehl.  Reactions  longtemps  connues,  expli- 
quees  par  Thydrolyse  des  sels.  (Odor  of  alkali  osmates.)  Os. 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  3 (1908),  86;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  164;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  1356;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1221. 

1908:  15.  H.  C.  P.  Weber.  Preparation  of  chloroplatinic  acid  by 
electrolysis  of  platinum  black.  Pt. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  4 (1908),  365;  J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1908),  29; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  1117;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  391; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  925;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  958. 

1908:  16.  E.  H.  Archibald,  W.  G.  Wilcox,  and  B.  G.  Buckley. 
A study  of  the  solubility  of  potassium  chloroplatinate.  Pt. 
J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1908),  747;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908), 492;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  226;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1933. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


325 


1908:  17.  A.  Hantzsch.  Unveranderlichkeit  der  Farbe  konstitu- 
tiv  unveranderlicher  Sauren  bei  der  Bildung  von  Alkalis alzen 
und  von  Ionen.  (Color  of  chloroplatinates).  Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  1216;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  447;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908, 
i,  1890;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2219. 

1908:  18.  I.  Bellucci  and  P.  de  Cesaris.  (Sur  les  acides  dichlo- 
ropalladeux.  Pd. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  38,  ii  (1908),  602;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  150; Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  633;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3050. 

1908:  19.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  la  preparation  des  chloroiridates  et 
chloroiridites  alcalins.  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  146  (1908),  1267;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  3 (1908),  901;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  702;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  291, 1337;  C.  A.  2 (1908), 
2347. 

1908:  20.  M.  Vezes.  Sur  la  preparation  des  chloroiridates  alca- 
lins. (Claim  of  priority  over  1908:  19.)  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  146  (1908),  1392;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  703;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  389;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2347. 

1908:  21.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  la  reduction  des  chloroiridates  alca- 
lins par  l’acide  oxalique.  (Reply  to  1908:  20.)  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  147  (1908),  198;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  765;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  763;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2347. 

1908:  22.  A.  Werner  and  O.  de  Vries.  Ueber  komplexe  Iridi- 
umverbindungen.  (Halides,  nitrites,  and  bases.)  Ir. 

Ann.  364  (1908),  77;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  151;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909, 
i,  512;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  867. 

1908:  22a.  O.  de  Vries.  Ueber  komplexe  Iridiumverbindungen. 
Dissertation,  Leyden,  1908.  Ir. 

1908:  23.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  Huttlinger.  Zur  Kenntnis  des 
Rhodiums.  (Chloro-  and  bromo-rhodites.)  Rh. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  210;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  200;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i, 
931;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1244. 

1908:  24.  S.  H.  C.  Briggs.  The  constitution  of  co-ordinated 
compounds.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1908),  94;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  93  (1908),  1564;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1337;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  153. 

1908:  25.  J.  A.  N.  Friend.  A criticism  of  Werner’s  theory,  and 
the  constitution  of  complex  salts.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1908),  122;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  93  (1908),  1006;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  388;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2052. 

1908:  2G.  P.  Lebeau  and  P.  Jolibois.  Sur  les  combinaisons  du 
silicium  avec  palladium.  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  146  (1908),  1028;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  602;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  15;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2343. 


326 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1908:  27.  K.  Friedrich  and  A.  Leroux.  Contribution  a la  con- 
naissance  des  systemes  binaires.  (Pt-As  and  As-Bi.)  Pt. 

Metallurgie,  5 (1908),  148;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  300;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1908,  i,  1925;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2670. 

1908:  28.  L.  A.  Levy.  The  fluorescence  of  platinocyanides.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1908),  178;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  93  (1908),  1446;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  938;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  3189. 

1908:  29.  L.  A.  Levy.  Platinocyanides.  (Barium  salt.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  14  (1908),  378;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i (1908),  252; 
C.  A.  2 (1908),  1788. 

1908:  30.  C.  H.  Herty  and  R.  O.  E.  Davis.  The  character  of  the 
compound  formed  by  the  addition  of  ammonia  to  ethyl- 
phospho-platino-chloride.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1908),  1084;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i (1908),  598;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  934;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2344. 

1908:  31.  C.  Gialdini.  (Sur  quelques  sels  complexes  de  Piridium.) 
(Irido-oxalates.)  Ir. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  16,  ii  (1908), 551,  648;  Gazz.  cliim.  ital.  38,  ii  (1908), 
485;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  92,  i (1907),  1005;  94,  i (1908),  3;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908, 
i,  107;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3174. 

1908:  32.  Iv.  A.  Hofmann  and  J.  v.  Narbutt.  Verbindungen  von 
Platinchlorur  mit  Di-cyclopentadien.  Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  1625;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i (1908),  519;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii, 
42;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2377. 

1908:33.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  G.  Bugge.  Platinblau.  (Platoacet- 
amid.)  Pt. 

Ber.  40  (1908),  312;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  4 (1908),  979;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i 
(1908),  141;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  812;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1429. 

1908:  34.  O.  Makowka.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Metallacetylenverbind- 
ungen.  Pd. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  824;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i (1908),  138;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i, 
1610;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1688. 

1908:  35.  C.  Paal,  J.  Gerum,  and  K.  Rotii.  I.  Ueber  das  flussige 
Hydrosol  des  Palladiumwasserstoffs  (p.  805). 

II.  Ueber  Palladiumwasserstoff  (p.  818). 

III.  Ueber  katalytische  Wirkungen  kolloidaler  Metalle  der 
Platingruppe.  Reduktionskatalysen  mit  kolloidalem  Palla- 
dium und  Platin  (p.  2273). 

IV.  Reduktionskatalysen  mit  kolloidalem  Platin  (p.  2282). 

Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  805,  818,  2273,  2282;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i (1908),  599;  94.  ii 
(1908),  392;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1525;  1908,  ii,  677,  678;  C.  A.  2 (1908), 
1792,  1794,  2932,  2933. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


327 


1908: 

1908: 

1908: 

1908: 

1908: 

1908: 

1908: 

1908: 

1908: 

1908: 


36.  R.  Willstatter  and  E.  W.  Mayer.  Reduktion  mit 
Platin  und  WasserstofF.  II.  Ueber  Dihydrocholesterin.  Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  2199;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i (1908),  636;  Cliem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii, 
390;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2807. 

37.  J.  Donau.  Ueber  den  Nacliweis  von  Gold,  Silber  und 
den  Platinmet alien  durch  die  Phosphors alzperle. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  2 (1908),  9,  273;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  434. 
Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1575;  C.  A.  2 (1909),  160. 

38.  N.  A.  Orloff.  Ueber  den  Nachweis  von  Ruthenium  in 

den  Platinlegierungen.  Ru,  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  32  (1908),  77;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  231;  Chem.  Zentr; 
1908,  i,  674;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  971. 

39.  J.  G.  Rose.  The  existence  of  platinum  metals  in  chemi- 

cals used  for  assaying.  (Read  at  Cape  Chemical  Society,  Cape- 
town, July  17,  1908.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  98  (1908),  104;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1205,  C.  A.  3 (1909), 
1914. 

40.  E.  G.  Bryant.  Platinum  in  so-called  pure  borax.  Pt. 
Chem.  News,  98  (1908),  210;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1829;  C.A.3(1909), 

1260. 

41.  M.  Dennstedt  and  F.  Hassler.  Die  Gleichzeitige 

Bestimmung  des  Stickstoffs  mit  Kohlenstoff,  Wasserstoff  u.  s.  w. 
in  organischen  Verbindungen  nach  der  Methode  der  verein- 
fachten  Elemen  tar  analyse.  (Use  for  expensive  platinum  com- 
pounds.) Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1903),  2778;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1467. 

42.  O.  Makowka.  Zur  Kenntnis  des  Osmiums.  (Action  of 

acetylene.)  Os. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  943;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  393;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i, 
1675;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1937. 

43.  G.  Wyrouboff.  Sur  la  tlieorie  de  la  valence  et  la  con- 
stitution des  seis.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  13  (1908),  523;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  368; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1754;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2321. 

44.  W.  Peters.  Ueber  die  Beziehungen  zwischen  Affini- 

tatsresiduum  und  Additionsvermogen.  (Platinum  chlorides 
and  cyanides.)  Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  3175;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  937;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii, 
1231;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  5. 

45.  G.  C.  Henderson  and  J.  G.  Galletly.  The  behaviour 

of  metals  when  heated  in  ammonia.  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  27  (1908),  387;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  485;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  15;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2051. 


328 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1908:  46.  A.  F.  Coca.  Beitrag  zur  Antikorperentstehung.  (Physi- 
ologic action  of  0s04.)  Os. 

Biochem.  Z.  14  (1908),  125;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  90;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1425. 

1908:  47.  E.  Gruneisen.  Zusammenhang  zwischen  Kompressi- 
bilitat,  thermischer  Ausdehnung,  Atomyolumen  und  Atom- 
warme  der  Metalle.  Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

Anu.  Physik  [4],  26  (1908),  393;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  563;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  379;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2476. 

1908:  48.  M.  Thiesen.  Die  Zustandsgleichung  der  Metalle.  (Re- 
lation of  specific  heat  to  coefficient  of  expansion  of  platinum.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  6 (1908),  410,  415,  604;  J.  Chem.. Soc.  94,  ii  (1908), 
659,  808;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  278;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  138. 

1908:  49.  W.  Schlett.  Ueber  die  Aenderung  der  Dichte  und 
spezifischen  Warme  bei  Platin  und  Nickel  und  fiber  Tem- 
peraturabhangigkeit  der  spezifischen  Warmen  derselben.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  26  (1908),  201;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  563;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  150;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2476. 

1908:  50.  H.  K.  Onnes  and  J.  Clay.  (Remarks  on  the  expansion 
of  platinum  at  low  temperatures.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Acad.  Wetenschappen,  10  (1908),  342;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  131. 

1908:  51.  C.  E.  Guye  and  S.  Mintz.  Recherches  sur  la  viscosite 
de  quelques  metaux  en  fonction  de  la  temperature.  Pt. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat,  [4],  26  (1908),  136;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  930; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1225;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  14. 

1908:  52.  F.  Emich.  Ueber  die  Zerstaubung  des  Iridiums  in 
Wasserdampf  und  Kohlendioxyd.  Ir. 

Sitzb.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  117  2 B (1908),  701;  Monatsh.  29  (1908), 
1077;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  150;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  521;  C.  A. 
2 (1909),  855. 

1908:  53.  D.  Tsakalotos.  Passage  of  hydrogen  through  a pal- 
ladium septum,  and  the  pressure  which  it  produces.  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  24  (1908),  208;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1853;  C.  A.  3 
(1909),  2974. 

1908:  54.  R.  Willstatter  and  E.  W.  Mayer.  Ueber  Reduktion 
mit  Platin  und  Wasserstoff  bei  gewohnlicher  Temperatur.  Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  1475;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i (1908),  383;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i, 
2087;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2218. 

1908:  55.  K.  Jablczynski.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Katalyse  in  hetero- 
genen  S}^stemen.  Zersetzung  des  Chromchlorurs  am  Platin- 
blech.  Pt. 

Anz.  Akad.  Sci.  Krakau,  1908,  398;  Abhandl.  Krakauer  Akad.  48  A. 
(1908),  75;  Z.  physik.  Chem.  64  (1908),  748;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2759;  3 
(1909),  606. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


329 


1908:  56.  W.  E.  Grove  and  A.  S.  Loevenhaut.  The  supposed 
hydrolytic  action  of  platinum  black.  Pt. 

Proc.  Am.  Soc.  Biol.  Chem.  1908,  28;  J.  Biol.  Chem.  6 (1908);  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  490. 

1908:  57.  C.  Kaestner.  Heizverfahren  mittels  katalytisch  wir- 
kender  Korper.  (German  patent  203967,  Nov.  5,  1908.)  Pt. 
Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1959;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  834. 

1908:  58.  B.  L.  Vanzetti.  (Reactions  catalytiques  et  equilibre 
photochimique.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  17,  ii  (1908),  285;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  915; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1712. 

1908:  59.  P.  Pikos.  Ameisensaure  in  Essigsaure.  (Rhodium  as  a 
catalyser  to  destroy  formic  acid.)  Rh. 

Chem.  Ztg.  32  (1908),  906;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1501;  C.  A.  3 (1909), 
2282. 

1908:  60.  H.  Freundlich.  Ueber  den  Begriff  der  Adsorption. 

Pd,  Pt,  Rh,  Ir,  Ru,  Os. 
Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  3 (1908),  212;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  20; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  245;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  610. 

1908:  61.  O.  Bobertag,  K.  Feist,  and  H.  W.  Fischer.  Ueber  das 
Ausfrieren  von  Hydrosolen.  Pt. 

Ber.  41  (1908),  3675;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  1024;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1908,  ii,  1799;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  395. 

1908:  62.  O.  Teague  and  B.  H.  Buxton.  Die  gegenseitige  Aus- 
flockung  von  Kolloiden.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  62  (1908),  287;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  365;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  2125;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2982. 

! 1908:  63.  A.  Lebedew.  Action  des  courants  alternatifs  sur  la 
decomposition  du  bioxyde  d’hydrogene  par  le  platine  colloidal. 

Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  3 (1908),  56;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  166;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  707;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1090. 

1908:  64.  I.  S.  Teletow.  Katalytische  Reaktionsgeschwindigkeit 
in  heterogenen  Systemen:  Vergleich  der  Zersetzung  des 
Wasserstoffperoxyds  an  Platinblechen  mit  der  Kolloidkatalyse 

Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  39  (1908),  1145,  1358;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  i; 
(1908),  95;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  793;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1378. 

1908:  65.  T.  Bokorny.  Platinkatalyse  und  physikalische  Kata- 
lyse.  Pt. 

Centr.  Bakt,  Parasitenk.  21,  ii  (1908),  193;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  217 
C.  A.  3 (1909),  1296. 


330 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1908:  66.  B.  E.  Moore.  Upon  the  magnetic  separation  of  the  lines 
of  barium,  yttrium,  zirconium,  and  osmium.  Os. 

Astrophys.  J.  28  (1908),  1;  Ann.  Physik  [4],  25  (1908),  309;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  138;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1024;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2334, 
3028. 

1908:  67.  T.  Martini.  (Production  of  a current  by  means  of  the 
couple  platinum — platinum  black  immersed  in  a salt  or  acid 
solution.)  Pt. 

J.  physique  [4],  7 (1908),  397;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  3185. 

1908:  68.  V.  Kohlschutter  and  T.  Goldschmidt.  Ueber  katho- 
dische  Zerstaubung  von  Metallen  in  verdunnten  Gasen.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  14  (1908),  221;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  457;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  1875;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2335. 

1908:  69.  F.  Haber.  Bestatigung  des  Faraday’schen  Gesetzes 
beim  Stromdurchgang  durch  heisses  Porzellan.  (Dissozia- 
tionsdruck  und  -Warme  des  Platinoxyds.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  57  (1908),  154;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  254;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  i,  1022;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1922. 

1908:  70.  O.  W.  Richardson.  Charge  of  ions  emitted  by  hot 
bodies.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  16  (1908),  740;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  1009;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1972;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  513. 

1908:  71.  O.  W.  Richardson.  The  kinetic  energy  of  the  ions 
radiated  from  hot  bodies.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  16  (1908),  890;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  421. 

1908:  72.  Id.  A.  Wilson.  Effect  of  hydrogen  on  the  discharge  of 
negative  electricity  from  hot  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  80  A (1908),  379;  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  203 
(1908),  247;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  134;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1116. 

1908:  73.  H.  Rubens  and  E.  Hagen.  Aenderung  des  Emissions- 
vermogens  der  Metalie  mit  der  Tempera tur.  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  6 (1908),  710;  Physik.  Z.  9 (1908)  874;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
98,  ii  (1910),  262;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  126;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  508. 

1908:  74.  S.  R.  Milner.  On  the  nature  of  the  carriers  of  the 
current  in  electrical  sparks.  (Platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  81  A (1903),  299;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  976. 

1908:  75.  A.  Wigand.  Die  elektrische  Leitfahigkeit  des  flussigen 
Schwefels.  (Platinum  sulphide  on  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  6 (1908),  495;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1903),  800;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1903,  ii,  1803;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  268. 

1908:  76.  G.  K.  Burgess.  Methods  of  obtaining  cooling  curves. 
(Thermoelements.)  Pt,  Rli,  Ir. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  5 (1908),  199;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  607. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


331 


1908:  77.  E.  Brunner.  Nachtrag  zu  meiner  Arbeit  liber  die 
Stromspannungskurve  in  Jod-Jodkaliumlosung.  (Experi- 
ments with  bright  platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  63  (1908),  487;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  754;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1765;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  3305. 

1908:  78.  L.  Hackspill.  Sur  les  alliages  platine- thallium.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  146  (1908),  820;.  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  504;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1908,  i,  1968;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2544. 

1908:  79.  N.  L.  Podkopajew.  (Sur  les  alliages  platine-etain.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1908),  249;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  391; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  493;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2367. 

1908:  80.  J.  W.  Mallet.  Interaction  of  mercury  with  alloys  of 
other  metals.  (With  alloys  of  platinum  and  tin.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  80  A (1908),  83;  J.  Chem.  Soc,  94,  ii  (1908),  187; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1033;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1633,  1934. 

1908:  81.  N.  A.  Puschin  and  N.  Paschski.  Die  Natur  der  Blei- 
Palladium-Legierungen.  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  40  (1908),  826;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  62  (1909),  360; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  860;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1567;  C.  A.  3 

(1909),  1000,  212. 

1908:  82.  Sir  W.  Crookes.  On  the  use  of  iridium  crucibles  in 
chemical  operations.  Ir. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  80  A (1908),  535;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  702; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  371;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  2199. 

1908:  83.  L.  Holborn  and  F.  Henning.  Ueber  das  Platin- 
thermometer  und  den  Sattigungsdruck  des  Wasserdampfes 
zwischen  50°  und  200°.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  26  (1908),  833;  Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1230;  C.  A.  3 

(1909),  1236. 

1908:  84.  H.  K.  Onnes  and  J.  Clay.  (Calibration  of  platinum 
resistance  thermometers  at  very  low  temperatures.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Acad.  Wetenschappen,  10  (1908),  200;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  131. 

1908:85.  The  work  of  the  Reichsanstalt  in  1907.  (Plati- 

num resistance  thermometers;  coating  of  platinum  vessels 
with  soot.)  Pt,  Rh. 

Engineering,  86  (1908),  818;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1234. 

1908:  86.  A.  Leroux.  (Friedrich’s  kryptol  and  platinum  test- 
tube  oven  for  small  experiments  and  fusions  of  the  most 
varied  kind.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  32  (1908),  1137;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  387. 

1908:  87.  G.  P.  Baxter.  Apparatus  for  the  centrifugal  draining  of 
small  quantities  of  crystals.  (Platinum  apparatus.)  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1908),  286;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  94,  ii  (1908),  369; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  i,  1441;  C.  A.  2 (1908),  1370. 


332 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1908:  88.  M.  Baum.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  Platiniiberzugen 
auf  schwerschmelzbaren  Unedelmetallen,  wie  Eisen,  Nickel, 
Kobalt  oder  Leg%3rungen.  (German  patent  201664-6,  Sept. 
12,  1908;  French  patent  396033,  Oct.  18,  1908;  British  patent 
22455,  Oct.  22,  1908.)  Pt, 

Chem.  Zentr.  1908,  ii,  1073;  Elektrochem.  Z.  16  (1909),  117,  185;  C.  A.  3 
(1909),  289,  2411,  2537,  2910;  4 (1910),  1716. 

1909:  1. — Russian  platinum  industry.  Pt. 

Metal  Ind.  7 (1909),  145;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  2 (1909),  329. 

1909:  la.  A.  Zawaritsky.  Report  on  the  researches  of  the  plati- 
num area  of  the  district  of  Nijni-Tagilsk.  Pt. 

Annual  Mining  Inst.  Empress  Catherine  II,  St.  Petersburg,  II,  No.  3. 

1909:  lb.  F.  Loewinson-Lessing.  A new  platinum  deposit  of  the 
Ural;  Sinia-Gora  at  Barantcha.  Pt. 

An.  Polyt.  Inst.  St.  Petersburg,  11  (1909),  427. 

1909:  lc.  J.  C.  Castillo.  Geology  of  the  platinum  deposits  of 
Colombia.  (Washings  on  Condo  to  River.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  98  (1909),  826. 

1909:  Id.  L.  de  Launay.  La  metallogenie  de  l’Asie  russe.  Pt. 

Ann.  des  mines  [10],  15  (1909),  220,  303. 

1909:  2.  J.  C.  H.  Mingaye.  Chemical  notes  on  lode  material  from 
Broken  Hill  containing  platinum  and  platinoid  metals. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Records  Geol.  Surv.  New  South  Wales,  8 (1909),  287;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  36. 

1909:  2a.  W.  B.  Winston.  Platinum  and  gold  losses  in  dredging. 


Mining  Sci.  Press,  99  (1909),  234.  Pt. 

1909:  2b.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Russian  platinum  industry  and  its 
regulation.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  85  (1909),  579. 

1909:  3.  The  production  of  platinum.  (Editorial.)  Pt. 

Engrais,  24  (1909),  938;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  37. 

1909:  3a.  Russlands  Platinahandel  und  Produktion.  Pt. 

Eisenztg.  1909,  Feb.  27. 


1909:  3b.  G.  E.  Walsh.  A Russian  money  trust.  (Affirms  only 
half  the  platinum  coinage  ever  offered  for  redemption.)  Pt. 
Mining  Sci.  Press,  99  (1909),  195. 

1909:  3c.  J.  B.  Landfield.  A Russian  money  trust.  (Reply  to 
1909:  3b;  also  states  Faberge,  a St.  Petersburg  jeweler,  first 
set  diamonds  in  platinum).  • Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  99  (1909),  287. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


333 


1909:  3d.  C.  W.  Purington.  A Russian  money  trust.  (Reply  to 
1909:  3b.)  Pt, 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  99  (1909),  626. 

1909:  4.  F.  W.  Clarke,  W.  Ostwald,  F.  E.  Thorpe,  and  G. 

Urbain.  Report  of  the  International  Committee  on  Atomic 
Weights,  1909.  (Pd=  106.708  (Wornle),  106.7±.05  (Haas), 
106.434  (Kemmerer).)  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1909),  1;  Ber.  42  (1909),  11;  Bui.  Soc.  chirn.  [4], 
5 (1909),  1;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  61  (1909),  147;  Z.  physik.  Chem.  65  (1909), 
385;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  79  (1909),  75;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  22  (1909),  146; 
Chem.  Ztg.  33  (1909),  2;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  488;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  621. 

1909:  5.  F.  W.  Clarke,  W.  Ostwald,  F.  E.  Thorpe,  and  G. 

Urbain.  Report  of  the  International  Committee  on  Atomic 
Weights,  1910.  (Pd  =106.689  (Gutbier,  Haas,  and  Geb- 
hardt).)  Pd. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (19 L0),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  95  (1909),  2216;  Ber.  43 
(1909),  6;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  7 (1910),  xxv;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  65 

(1910),  113;  J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  81  (1910),  93;  Chem.  Ztg.  33  (1909), 

1181;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  317;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  399. 

1909:  6.  E.  H.  Archibald.  Atomic  weight  of  platinum.  (Pt  = 

195.23.)  Pt, 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  Edinburgh,  29  (1909),  721;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  66  (1910), 
169;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10(1911),  310;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  51  (1912),  723; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  43;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1586;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
1951,  2781. 

1909:  7.  E.  H.  Archibald.  Atomic  weight  of  iridium.  The  analy- 
sis of  potassium  chloroiridate.  (Ir=  192.90.)  (Paper  read  at 
meeting  of  British  Assoc.  1909.)  Ir. 

Chem.  News,  100  (1909),  150;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  27. 

1909:  8.  A.  Gutbier,  A.  Krell,  and  M.  Woernle.  Ueber  das 
Atomgewicht  des  Palladiums.  I.  Die  Analyse  des  Palladosam- 
minchlorids.  (Pd  = 106.635.)  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  79  (1909),  235;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  407;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1466;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  27. 

1909:  9.  A.  Gutbier,  P.  Haas,  and  II.  Gebiiardt.  Ueber  das 
Atomgewicht  des  Palladiums.  II.  Die  Analyse  des  Palla- 
dosamminbromids.  (Pd  = 106.689.)  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  79  (1909),  457;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  585;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  339;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  28. 

L909:  10.  L.  Wohler  and  W.  Frey.  Feste  Losungen  bei  der  Dis- 
soziation  der  Oxyde  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909),  129;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  322;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1148;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  981;  4 (1910),  2407. 


334 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GPvOUP. 


1909:  11.  L.  Wohler  and  F.  Martin.  Die  Oxydationsstufe  drei- 
wertigen  Platins.  Pd. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  3958, 4100;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  1024;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1909,  ii,  1726,  2064;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  430,  882. 

1909 : 12.  L.  Wohler  and  F.  Martin.  Das  Platintrioxyd,  eine  neiie 
Oxydationsstufe  des  Platins.  Pt 

Ber.  42  (1909),  3326;  Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909),  769;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii 
(1909),  898;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1412;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  153,  542. 

1909:  13.  L.  Wohler  and  F.  Martin.  Ueber  die  Spaltung  von 
Platinoxydulhydrat  in  seine  extremen  Stufen.  (In  metal  and 
dioxide.)  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909),  791;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  1024;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1727;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  553. 

1909:  14.  A.  Gutbier,  H.  Zwicker,  and  F.  Falco.  Zur  Kenntnis 

des  Rutheniums.  (Ru04  and  properties.)  Ru. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  22  (1909),  487;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  323;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1386;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2780. 

1909:  15.  A.  Minozzi.  (Ueber  die  Platinselenide.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  18,  ii  (1909),  150;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  899; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1413;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1033. 

1909:  16.  A.  Gutbier  and  F.  Bauriedel.  Ueber  Platin.  (Bromo- 

platinates.)  Pt. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  4243;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  i (1910),  12;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i, 
90;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  449. 

1909:  17.  P.  C.  Ray  and  A.  C.  Ghosh.  Die  Zerzetzung  von  Am- 
moniumplatinchlorid  und  Ammoniumplatinbromid  durch 
Hitze.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  64  (1909),  184;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  898;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1840;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  425. 

1909:  18.  J.  Jacobsen.  Le  platine  fulminant.  (Decomposition  of 
silver  tetrachloroplatinate  by  water.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  149  (1909),  574;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  897;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1726;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1002. 

1909:  19.  R.  Fosse.  (Electropositive  character  of  the  dinaphtho- 
pyryl  radical.  VII.  Displacement  by  pyryl  chlorid  of  potas- 
sium, ammonium,  and  alkylammonium  chlorides  from  their 
chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  5 (1909),  797;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  302. 

1909:  20.  E.  H.  Archibald  and  W.  A.  Patrick.  Electrical  eon 
ductivity  of  solutions  of  iodine  and  platinum  tetraiodide  in 
ethyl  alcohol.  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  100  (1909),  150;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  271. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


335 


1909:21.  F.  Lindner.  Studien  iiber  das  Iridium.  (Hcxachloroiri- 
deates.)  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1909.  Ir. 

1909:  22.  A.  Gutbier  and  F.  Lindner.  Ueber  Hexachloroirideate. 

Ir. 

Z.  physilc.  Chem.  69  (1909),  304  (Arrhenius  Festschrift);  J.  Chem.  Sec. 
96,  ii  (1909),  1025;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  2066;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  729. 

1909:  23.  A.  Gutbier  and  M.  Riess.  LTeber  Iridium.  (Halides.) 

Ir. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  3905;  J.Chem.  Soc.  9G,  ii  (1909),  1025;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909, 
ii,  2067;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  729. 

1909:  24.  A.  Gutbier  and  M.  Riess.  Ueber  Hexahalogenoirideate. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  4770;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  510;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  881.  Ir. 

1909:  25.  A.  Gutbier  and  M.  Riess.  Ueber  Rhodium.  (Chloro- 
rhodites  and  ammonia  bases.)  Rh. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  1437;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  523;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i, 
1798;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2099. 

1909:  26.  M.  Delepine.  Chloroiridates  et  chloroiridites  de  V argent 
et  du  thallium.  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  149  (1909),  1072;  Bui.  Soc.chim.  [4],  7 (1910),  55;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  34;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  416;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  100 F 

1909:27.  A.  Gutbier  and  K.  Maiscii.  Ueber  Osmium.  (Halides.) 

Os. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  4239;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  45;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i, 
89;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  728. 

1909:  27a.  Maisch,  K.  Studien  liber  Platinmetalle.  Dissertation, 


Erlangen,  1909.  Os. 

1909:  28.  G.  A.  Leuchs.  Zur  Kenntnis  des  Rutheniums.  (Chloro- 
ruthenates.)  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1909.  Ru, 

1909:  29.  S.  C.  Lind  and  F.  W.  Bliss.  Velocity  of  hydrolysis  of  an 
inorganic  salt,  potassium-ruthenium  chloride.  Ru. 


J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1909),  868;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  743;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  968;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2645. 

1909:  30.  A.  Binet  du  Jassoneix.  Recherches  sur  les  combi- 
naisons  du  bore  avec  quelques  metaux.  (With  platinum.)  Ft. 
Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  17  (1909),  145;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  569; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  334;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2096. 

1909:  31.  W.  Stiiecker  and  M.  Schurigin.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung 
von  Halogenphosphor  auf  die  Platinmetallen.  Pt. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  1767;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  585;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909, 
ii,  10;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2418. 


336 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1909:  32.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  les  irido disulfates  metalliques.  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  149  (1909),  785;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  5 (1909),  1084,  1126; 
Mon.  sci.  54  (1910),  67;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  44;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1910,  i,  415;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  429,  729. 

1909:  33.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  K.  Buchner.  Zur  Kenntnis  der 
Nitrito-platosaure.  Pt. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  3392;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  i (1909),  783;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909, 
ii,  1315;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  172. 

1909:  34.  J.  E.  Reynolds.  Results  of  cooling  certain  hydrated 
platinocyanides  in  licpiid  air.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  82  A (1909),  380;  Chem.  News,  100  (1809),  2; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  i (1909),  558;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  592;  C.  A.  3 (1909), 
2416. 

1909:  35.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  les  sulfates  ammoniacaux  d’iridium. 

Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  148  (1909),  557;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  5(1909),  359;  Mon.  sci. 
54  (1910),  67;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1809),  408;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i? 
1149;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1734,  2779. 

1909:  36.  W.  A.  Burdakow.  (Preparation  and  composition  of 
double  compounds  of  Pt(NH3)2X2  with  Pt(NH3)4X2.  Prep- 
aration of  Pd(NH2.NH2)Cl2.)  “ “ Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  41  (1909),  757;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  899; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1728. 

1909:  37.  L.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Solokoff.  Ueber  das  (Z-Propyl- 
endiamin  und  tiber  einige  Derivate  der  optisch-aktiven 
Propylendiamine.  Pt. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  55;  J.Chem.  Soc.  96,  i (1909),  137;  Chem.  Zentr.  1809,  i, 
518;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  889. 

1909:38.  W.  J.  Pope  and  S.  J.  Peachey.  The  alkyl  compounds  of 
platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  25  (1909),  96;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  95  (1909),  571;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1978;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2683. 

1909 : 39.  M.  Vezes  and  A.  Duffour.  Sur  les  derives  complexes  de 
T iridium.  Iridodichloroxalates.  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  5 (1909),  869;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  i (1909),  762;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1629;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2912. 

1909:  40.  A.  Duffour.  Sur  les  derives  complexes  dhridium. 
L’acide  iridodichloroxalique  et  les  iridodichloroxalates.  Ir. 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  5(1909),  872;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  i (1909),  763;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1630;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2940. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


337 


19C9:  41.  C.  Paal,  K.  Roth,  J.  Gerum,  and  W.  Hartmann.  Ueber 
katalytische  Wirkungen  kolloidaler  Metalle  der  Platingruppe. 

Pt,  Pd. 

V.  Die  Reduktion  der  Fette  (p.  1541). 

VI.  Reduktionskatalysen  mit  kolloidalem  Palladium  (p. 

1553). 

VII.  Die  Reduktion  des  Aethylens  (p.  2239). 

VIII.  Die  stufenweise  Reduktion  der  Phenyl-propiolsaure 

(p.  3930). 

Ber.  42  (1909),  1541,  1553,  2239,  3930;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  i (1909),  358,  381, 
545,  926;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1801;  1909,  ii,  422,  1807;  C.A.  3 (1909), 
2158,  2454;  4 (1910),  314. 

I 1909:  42.  M.  LeBlanc  and  L.  Bergmann.  Die  Einwirkung  von 
Metallen  auf  geschmolzenes  Aetznatron.  I.  Pt. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  4728;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  123;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i, 
328;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  871. 

1909:  43.  A.  Sieverts.  Ueber  Reduktionsreaktionen  mit  phos- 
phoriger  und  unterphosphoriger  Saure.  (Reduction  of  PtCl4 
and  PdCl2.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  64  (1909),  29;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  883;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1720;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1277. 

1909 : 44.  J.  C.  H.  Mingaye.  Colorimetric  method  for  the  estimation 
of  small  amounts  of  platinum.  (With  potassium  iodide.)  Pt. 

Records  Geol.  Surv.  New  South  Wales,  8 (1909),  284;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
98,  ii  (1910),  78;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  36. 

1909 : 45.  A.  Gutbier  and  F.  Falco.  Bestimmung  von  Chi  or  neben 
Palladium  und  quantitative  Bestimmung  des  Palladiums 
durch  Reduktion  mit  Alkohol  in  alkalischer  Losung.  Pd. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  48  (1909),  555;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  768;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1379;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2918. 

1909:  46.  A.  Gutbier  and  L.  V.  Muller.  Studien  iiber  Rhodium. 
(Use  of  hydrazin  for  reduction  in  analysis.)  Rh. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  2205;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  674;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909, 
ii,  421;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2417. 

j 1909:  47.  P.  Rohland.  Die  Bestimmung  des  Kaliums  als  Kali- 
umplatinchlorid.  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  49  (1909),  358;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910, i,  2139;  C.A.  4 (1910), 
2250. 

1909:  48.  H.  J.  F.  de  Vries.  (Porcelain  Gooch  crucible  with  layer 
of  spongy  platinum.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Weekblad,  6 (1909),  816;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  1050;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii  2058. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 22 


338 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1909:  49.  M.  Widemann.  (A  substitute  for  a platinum  capillary 
in  the  determination  of  carbon  in  iron  by  the  chromic  acid 
method.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  33  (1909),  1186;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  261. 

1909:  50.  W.  Peters.  Affinitatsresiduum  und  Additionsvermogen. 
II.  (Ammonia  compounds.)  Pt. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  4826:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  114;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i, 
409;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  979. 

1909:  51.  A.  von  Szily.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  der  Osmiumsaure  auf 
das  Ambozeptorbindungsvermogen  der  roten  Blutzellen.  Os. 

Z.  Immunit.  1,  iii  (1909),  451;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1481. 


1909:  52.  C.  Fery  and  C.  Cheneveau.  Sur  la  temperature  do 
fusion  du  platine.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  148  (1909),  401;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  321;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1084;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1734. 


1909:  53.  C.  W.  Waidner  and  G.  K.  Burgess.  Melting  point  of 
platinum.  Pt. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  6 (1909),  2;  Met.  Chem.  Eng.  8 (1910),  77;  J.  Inst. 
Metals,  3 (1910),  293;  Compt.  rend.  148  (1909),  1177;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
96,  ii  (1909),  584;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  181;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1848. 

1909:  54.  A.  Knocke.  Ueber  Verdampfung  von  schwerfluchtigen 
Met  alien,  insbesondere  von  Piatin  und  Eisen,  in  evakuiertcn 
Glasgefassen.  Pt. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  206;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  211;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i, 
502;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1125. 

1909:  55.  L.  Houllevigue.  Preparation  de  lames  minces  par 
volatilization  dans  le  vide.  Pt. 


Ann.  chim.  phys.  20  (1910),  13S;  Compt.  rend.  149  (1909),  1368;  Intern. 
Z.  Metal!.  1 (1911),  256;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  986,  2054;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
977. 


1909:  56.  B.  Delachanal.  Recherches  sur  les  gaz  occlus  dans 
quelques  metaux  usuels.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  148  (1909),  561;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  402;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1225;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1378. 


1909:  57.  G.  Moreau.  Sur  la  diffusion  des  ions  a travers  les 
metaux.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  149  (1909),  118;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1193;  C.  A.  3 (1909), 
2526. 


1909:  58.  J.  Meunier.  (Combustion  of  gas  without  flame  and  the 
conditions  of  illumination  by  incandescence.)  (Platinum 
spiral;  Auer  mantle.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  148  (1909),  292;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1052;  C.  A.  3 (1909), 

1211. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


339 


1909:  59.  J.  Meunier.  Sur  les  conditions  necessaires  pour  tenir 
incandescent  un  fil  de  platine  dans  l’interieur  de  la  flamme  du 
bee  Bunsen.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  149  (1909),  924;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  15;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1910,  i,  211;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  709. 

1909 : 60.  G.  Just  and  W.  Berezowsky.  Beziehungen  zwischen  der 
Geschwindigkeit  chemischer  Reaktionen  und  der  Geschwindig- 
keit  ihrer  Teilvorgange.  (Influence  of  platinum  on  reduction 
of  K3Fe(CN)6  by  iodine.)  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909),  297;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  651;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  86;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2402. 

1909:  61.  A.  Bach.  Spaltung  des  Wassers  durch  Hypophospliite 
in  Gegenwart  von  Palladium  als  Katalysator.  Pd. 

Ber.  42  (1909),  4463;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  31;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i, 
142;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  873. 

1909:  62.  W.  D.  Harkins.  The  Marsh  test  and  excess  potential. 
(Influence  of  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1909),  518;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1848;  C.  A.  4 
(1910),  1585. 

1909:  63.  K.  Bornemann.  Einfluss  des  Wassers toffsuperoxyds 
auf  die  Eigenschaften  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909),  673;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1314;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 

r ii- 

1909:  64.  G.  A.  Brossa.  Anorganische  Fermente.  IV.  Die 
Iridiumkatalyse  des  Wasserstoffsuperoxyds.  Ir. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  66  (1909),  162;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  589;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1637;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2264. 

1909:  65.  A.  Gutbier.  Anorganische  Kolloide.  (Review  of 

Gutbier’s  work  on  colloids.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  4 (1909),  180,  256;  5 (1909),  46,  105;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1189;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  152. 

1909:  66.  M.  Traube-Mengarini  and  A.  Scala.  Kolloidale 

Silberlosung  erhalten  durch  die  Wirkung  von  reinem  dest'd- 
liertem  Wasser  auf  metallisches  Silber.  (Also  colloidal 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  18,  i (1909),  542;  Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  6 (1910), 
65;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  731;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  179;  C.  A.  4 
(1910),  1436. 

1909:  67.  M.  Traube-Mengarini  and  A.  Scala.  (Kolloidale 

Metallosungen  erhalten  durch  die  Wirkung  von  kochendcm 
des tdliertem  Wasser.)  II.  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  18,  ii  (1909),  111;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  809; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1411;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2079. 


340 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1909:68.  G.  Kernot  and  F.  de  Simone.  (Absorption  of  hydrogen 
by  colloidal  platinum  and  palladium  solutions.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Rend.  Accad.  sci.  fis.  math.  Napoli  [3],  15  (1909),  168;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii 
(1909),  878. 

1909:  69.  G.  Kernot  and  F.  Arena.  (Action  of  colloidal  iridium 
solutions  on  hydrogen  peroxide.)  Ir. 

Rend.  Accad.  sci.  fis.  math.  Napoli  [3],  15  (1909),  125;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii 
(1909),  880. 

1909:  70.  G.  Kernot.  (Influence  of  potassium  persulphate  on  the 
catalytic  decomposition  of  hydrogen  peroxide  by  means  of 
colloidal  iridium  solutions.)  Ir. 

Rend.  Accad.  sci.  fis.  math.  Napoli  [3],  15  (1909),  145;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii 
(1909),  880. 

1909:  71.  G.  Kernot  and  F.  Arena.  (Action  of  colloidal  rhodium 
solutions  on  hydrogen  peroxide.)  Rh. 

Rend.  Accad.  sci.  fis.  math.  Napoli  [3],  15  (1909),  157;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii 
(1909),  881. 

1909:  72.  B.  J.  Spence.  Colloidal  solutions  and  the  refractive 
indices  of  gold,  platinum,  and  silver.  Pt. 

Physic.  Rev.  28  (1909),  235;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1837. 

1909:  73.  B.  J.  Spence.  The  number  of  corpuscles  per  unit  volume 
of  the  metals  gold,  platinum,  and  silver.  Pt. 

Physic.  Rev.  28  (1909),  337;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2267. 

in  A 

1909:  74.  L.  Rolla.  (Contribution  a la  theorie  des  solutions 
colloidales.)  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  17,  ii  (1909),  650;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  131; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  615;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3037. 

1909:  75.  C.  Paal  and  Hartmann.  Knallgaskatalyse  mit  kolloi- 
dalem  Palladium.  Pd. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  80  (1909),  337;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  990; Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1836;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  853. 

1909:  76.  G.  A.  Buckmaster.  Action  of  colloidal  metals  pre- 
pared by  Bredig’s  method  on  solutions  of  guaiaconic  acid. 

Pt,  Pd. 

7th  Intern.  Cong.  Appl.  Chem.  1909;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  390; 
C.  A.  5 (1911),  3558. 

1909:  77.  H.  Finger.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  des  Mediums  auf  die 
Linien  in  Funkenspektren.  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  1909,  369;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1718;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
274. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


341 


1909:  78.  H.  Konen  and  H.  Finger.  Ueber  die  Spektren  von 
Funkenentladungen  in  Flussigkeiten.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909),  165;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  357;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1459;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1491. 

1909:  79.  R.  Pohl.  Ueber  den  lichtelektrischen  Effekt  an  Platin 
und  Kupfer  im  polarisierten  ultravioletten  Licht.  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  1909,  339;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1314;  C.  A.  3 (1909), 
2901. 

1909:  80.  H.  V.  Gill.  A preliminary  note  on  an  effect  observed 
when  palladium  foil  is  heated  in  air  at  a low  pressure.  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  82  A (1909),  464;  Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  14 
(1909),  573;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1194;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  744. 

1909:  81.  C.  Fery.  La  comparaison  des  corps  noirs  employes 
comme  receptors.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  148  (1909),  777;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1 737 ; C.  A.  3 (1909), 
1715. 

1909:  82.  W.  P.  White.  Specific  heats  of  silicates  and  of  platinum. 

Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  28  (1909),  334;  Rev.  metal.  7 (1910)  383;  Intern.  Z.  Metall. 
1 (1911)  265;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  966;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii, 
1789;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2899. 

1909:  83.  W.  Finke.  Magnetische  Messungen  an  Platinmetallen 
und  monoklinen  Krystallen,  insbesondere  der  Eisen-,  Kobalt-, 
und  Nickelsalze.  Pt,  Ir,  Pd,  Rh. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  31  (1909),  149;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  179;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  i,  718;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  860. 

1909:  84.  H.  A.  Wilson.  Effect  of  hydrogen  on  the  discharge  of 
negative  electricity  from  hot  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  82  A (1909),  71;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1075. 

1909:  85.  F.  C.  Brown.  The  kinetic  energy  of  the  positive  rays 
emitted  by  hot  platinum.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  17  (1909),  355;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  368;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1909,  i,  1137;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  622. 

1909:  86.  J.  J.  Thomson.  The  carriers  of  the  positive  charges  of 
electricity  emitted  by  hot  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  15  (1909),  64;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  290; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1847;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1362. 

1909:  87.  E.  Hagen  and  H.  Rubens.  Ueber  die  Abhangigkeit 
des  Emissions  verm  ogens  der  Metalle  von  der  Temperatur.  Pt. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  preuss.  Akad.  1909,  478;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  358; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1458;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  508. 


342  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1909:  88.  P.  E.  Spielmann.  On  the  electromotive  force  of  certain 
platinum  compounds,  with  special  reference  to  the  oxygen- 
hydrogen  gas  cell.  Pt. 

Trans.  Faraday  Soc.  5 (1909),  88;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  536. 

1909:  89.  F.  Foerster.  Ueber  das  elektromotorische  Verhalten 
des  Sauerstoffs.  (With  platinum  and  iridium  electrodes.) 

Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  69  (1909),  236  (Arrhenius  Festschrift);  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

96,  ii  (1909),  962;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  226;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  535. 

1909:  90.  R.  Lorenz  and  E.  Lauber.  Die  Oxydtheorie  der 
Sauerstoffelektrode.  (With  platinum  anode.)  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909)  206;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  371,  463; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1451;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  12. 

1909:  91.  R.  Lorenz  and  P.  E.  Spielmann.  Die  Oxydtheorie  der 
Sauerstoffelektrode.  IV,  V,  VI.  (With  platinum  electrodes.) 

Pt, 

Z.  Elektrochem.  15  (1909),  293,  349,  661;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  640; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  94,  331, 1191;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  12, 13. 

1909:  92.  Z.  Pfleiderer.  Die  Sauerstoffentwicklung  bei  der  Salz- 
saureelektrolyse  mit  Platinanode.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  68  (1909),  49;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  82;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 

272. 

1909:  93.  W.  Schulte.  Ueber  die  Abscheidung  des  Antimons 
aus  einer  Sulfantimoniatlosung.  (Anodic  solubility  of  plati- 
num.) Pt. 

Metallurgie,  6 (1909),  214;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  522;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1909,  i,  1741;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2245. 

1909:  94.  A.  Laborde.  Sur  la  condensation  de  Pemanation  du 
radium.  (On  platinum  black.) 

Compt.  rend.  148  (1909),  1591;  Radium,  6 (1909),  289;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

96,  ii  (1909),  634 ; Chem . Zentr.  1909,  ii,  262;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  411. 

1909:  95.  L.  Hackspill.  Alloys  of  platinum  with  alkali  metals  and 
with  thallium.  Pt. 

7th  Int.  Cong.  Appl.  Chem.  1909;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  28  (1909),  714; 

C.  A.  4 (1910),  1460. 

1909:  96.  N.  Puschin  and  P.  Lachtschenko.  Die  Natur  der 
Platin-Blei  Legierungen.  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  41  (1909),  23;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  62  (1909),  34; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  322;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1467;  C.  A.  3 

(1909),  1517. 

1909:  97.  K.  Friedrich  and  A.  Leroux.  Ueber  das  Schmelzdia- 
gramm  der  Platin-Antimon  Legierungen.  Pt. 

Metallurgie,  6 (1909),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909;,  245;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1909,  i,  829;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1863. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


343 


1909:  98.  E.  Janecke.  Die  ternaren  Legierungen  der  Metalle 
Kupfer,  Silber,  Gold;  Chromium,  Mangan;  Eisen,  Kobalt, 
Nickel;  Palladium,  Platin.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  67  (1909),  668;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1785. 

1909:  99.  W.  O.  Snelling.  The  Monroe  crucible.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1909),  456;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  431;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1909,  i,  1633;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1483. 

1909:  100.  O.  D.  Swett.  Solvents  for  use  with  the  Monroe  crucible. 

Pd,  Pt, 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  31  (1909),  928;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  96,  ii  (1909),  755; Chem. 

Zentr.  1909,  ii,  1691;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2658. 

1909:  101.  J.  G.  L.  Stern.  New  form  of  platinum  resistance  ther- 
mometer. Pt, 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  65  (1909),  667;  Chem.  Zentr.  1909,  i,  1299;  C.  A.  3 

(1909),  2647. 

1909:  102.  C.  W.  Waidner  and  G.  K.  Burgess.  Measurements 
with  the  platinum  resistance  thermometer  at  high  tempera- 
tures. Pt. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  6 (1909),  149;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  71; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1678;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  852. 

1909:  103.  C.  W.  Waidner  and  G.  K.  Burgess.  Platinum  resis- 
tance thermometry  at  high  temperatures.  Washington, 
Government  Printing  Office,  1909.  (Reprint  of  1909: 102.)  Pt. 

1909:  104.  G.  H.  Stanley.  A cheap  platinum  parting  apparatus. 

J.  Chem.  Met.  Soc.  S.  Africa,  9 (1909),  256;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  1708.  Pt. 

1909 : 105.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Verfahren  zur  Erzeugung  von  Iridium- 
blech,  das  als  Kathode  in  Quecksilbersalzlosungen  sich  nicht 
amalgamiert.  (German  patent  230734,  Dec.  9,  1909.)  Ir. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  522;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2597;  6 (1912),  576. 

1909:  106.  W.  J.  McCaughey.  The  electrolytic  deposition  of 
platinum.  Pt, 

Trans.  Am.  Electrochem.  Soc.  15  (1909),  523;  Electrochem.  Met.  Ind. 

7 (1909),  274;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2408. 

1909:  107.  C.  Ressel.  Platinum  plating.  Pt. 

Elektrochem.  Z.  16  (1909),  214;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  150. 

1909:  108.  J.  Bartlett.  Some  modifications  of  platinum  prints. 

J.  Frank.  Inst,  167  (1909),  182;  C.  A.  3 (1909),  2656.  Pt. 

TL  ; - 

1910:  1.  (Platinum  in  Russia.)  Pt. 

Revista  minera,  61  (1910),  454;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  5 (1911),  343. 


344 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1910:  la.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Original  occurrence  of  platinum  in 
the  Urals.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  90  (1910),  963  July  30,  Aug.  20. 

1910:  lb.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Ural  platinum  and  its  occurrences.  Pt. 
Mining  J.  90  (1910),  1065. 

1910:  lc.  F.  Loewinson-Lessing.  The  southernmost  platinum 
deposit  of  the  Ural,  River  Omoutnaia.  Pt. 

Pub.  Mineral.  Lab.  Polyt.  Inst.  St.  Petersburg;  Am.  Polyt.  Inst.  13 
(1910),  471. 

1910:  2.  L.  Duparc.  (Preliminary  note  on  some  curious  platinum 


deposits  in  the  Urals.)  Pt. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat,  30  (1910),  379;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1051. 

1910:  3.  C.  Camsell.  Platinum  in  British  Columbia,  Tulameen 
district.  Pt. 

J.  Can.  Mining  Inst.  13  (1910),  309;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  5 (1911),  260;  Mining 
World,  Mar.  26,  1910. 

1910:  3a.  A.  Lakes.  Platinum  in  British  Columbia.  Pt. 

Min.  Sci.  1910,  Mar.  3. 

1910:  3b.  D.  T.  Day.  Platinum  in  the  United  States.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  100  (1910),  582;  from  Science. 

1910:3c.  H.  Bancroft.  Platinum  in  southeastern  Nevada.  Pt. 

Bui.  U.  S.  Geol.  Survey,  430  D. 


1910:  4.  L.  Duparc  and  P.  Pamfil.  (Chemical  composition  and 
petrographic  resemblances  of  the  minerals  accompanying 
dunite  in  the  platinum  deposits.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  fran<p.  min.  33  (1910),  347;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1006. 

1910:  5.  B.  Neumann.  Technische  Fortschritte  im  Metallhiitten- 
wesen,  1909.  (Platinum,  p.  2076.)  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  23  (1910),  2068;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  280. 

1910:  5a.  W.  Geibel.  The  metallurgy  of  platinum  in  Russia.  Pt. 

Min.  Sci.  1910,  Dec.  29. 

1910:  5b.  E.  de  Hautpick.  The  Russian  platinum  industry  in  the 
year  1909.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  89  (1910),  482. 

1910:  5c.  Russian  platinum  developments.  Pt. 

Mines  and  Minerals,  1910,  Feb. 

1910:  5d.  V.  X.  Pravdinsky.  Russian  platinum  and  foreign  conR 
panies  in  Russia.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  1910,  May  14. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


345 


1910:  5e.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Government  monopoly  of  Russian 
platinum  industry.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  1910,  Nov.  5. 

1910:  6.  A.  W.  Blair.  Note  on  the  recovery  of  waste  platinum. 
(Reduction  by  standing  with  alcohol  in  the  sunlight.)  Pt. 

■ J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  2 (1910),  102;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  370;  C.  A.  4 
(1910),  1143. 

1910:  7.  F.  A.  MacDermott.  The  preparation  of  platinum  black. 

Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1910),  336;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1910),  310;  J. 
Inst,  Metals,  3 (1910),  263;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  65;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
98,  ii  (1910),  304;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910, i,  1334,  2071;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1279. 

1910:  8.  F.  W.  Clarke,  T.  E.  Thorpe,  W.  Ostwald,  and  G.  Ur- 
bain.  Report  of  International  Atomic  Weight  Committee  for 
1911.  (Pt=  195.23  (Archibald);  Rh=  102.92  (Renz),  102.93 
(Dittmar).)  Rh,  Pt. 

J.  Am.  C-hem.  Soc.  32  (1910),  1113;  Ber.  44  (1911),  1;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  69 
(1910),  97;  J.  prakt,  Chem.  (2),  83  (1911),  141;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  7 
(1910),  1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  97  (1910),  1861;  Chem.  Ztg.  34  (1910),  1105; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  336. 

1910:  9.  D.  Hoyermann.  Studien  uber  das  Iridium.  Das  Atom- 
gewicht  des  Iridiums.  (Ir=  193.188,  192.613.)  Dissertation, 
Erlangen,  1911.  Ir. 

Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soz.  Erlangen,  42  (1910),  260,  287;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  52 
(1913),  193. 

1910:  10.  Renz.  Das  Atomgewicht  des  Rhodiums.  (Rh=  102.92.) 
Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1910.  Rh. 

Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soz.  Erlangen,  40,  184. 

1910:  11.  H.  Dittmar.  Das  Atomgewicht  des  Rhodiums.  (Rh  = 
102.93.)  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1910.  Rh 

Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soz.  Erlangen,  40,  184. 

1910:  12.  F.  Bauriedel.  Untersuchung  uber  das  Platinhexa- 
bromplatineate  organischer  Ammoniumbasen.  Dissertation, 
Nurnberg,  1910.  (Cf.  1909:  16.)  Pt. 

1910:  12a.  O.  Ruff  and  F.  Bornemann.  Ueber  das  Osmium, 
seine  analytische  Bestimmung,  seine  Oxyde  and  seine  Chloride. 

Os. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  65  (1910),  429;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  246;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  305;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1691;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
1721. 

1910:  13.  A.  Gutbier.  Ueber  Bromsalze  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  3228;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1023;  Chem.  News, 
103  (1911),  84;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  32;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i, 
57;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  696. 


346 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1910:  13a.  P.  Walden.  Einige  Moleculargrossen  in  Phosphor- 
oxychlorid  als  kryoskopischen  Solvens.  (Molecular  weight 
of  0s04.)  Os. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  68  (1910),  307;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1074;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  93,  il  (1910),  1036;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1860;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  414. 

1910:  14.  A.  Gutbier.  Ueber  Chlorosalze  des  Osmiums.  Os. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  3234;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1020;  Chem.  News, 
103  (1911),  84;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  18;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  59; 
C.  A.  5 (1911),  697. 

1910:  15.  G.  Golubkin.  Contribution  a Fetude  des  derives  halo- 
genes  du  rhodium.  Rh. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  belg.  24  (1910),  311,  388;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911), 
45;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  843. 

1910:  16.  C.  Gerber.  (Action  of  platinum  compounds  on  the 
coagulation  of  milk  by  proteolytic  enzymes.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  biol.  68  (1910);  937,  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2953. 

1910:  17.  C.  Gerber.  (Action  of  platinous  salts  (PtCl4X2)  on  the 
coagulation  of  milk  by  proteolytic  enzymes.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  biol.  69  (1910),  102;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3084. 

1910:  18.  C.  Gerber.  (Action  of  palladium  salts  (PdX4M2)  on  the 
coagulation  of  milk  by  proteolytic  enzymes.)  Pd. 

Compt,  rend.  Soc.  biol.- 68  (1910),  939;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2953. 

1910:  19.  C.  Gerber,  (Action  of  salts  of  iridium  on  the  coagula- 
tion of  milk  by  proteolytic  enzymes.)  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  biol.  69  (1910),  104;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3085. 

1910:  20.  C.  Gerber.  (Action  of  salts  of  osmium,  of  ruthenium, 
and  of  rhodium  on  the  coagulation  of  milk  by  proteolytic  en- 
zymes.) Os,  Ru,  Rli. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  biol.  69  (1910),  106;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3085. 

1910:  21.  L.  Mond,  H.  Hirtz,  and  M.  D.  Cowap.  Some  new 
metallic  carbonyls.  Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  26  (1910),  67;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  97  (1910),  798;  Z.  anorg. 
Chem.  68  (1910),  207;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  521,  1084;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  i,  2075;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2118. 

1910:  22.  L.  H.  Baraduc-Muller.  Siliciures  metalliques  et  action 
du  carbure  de  silicium  sur  quelques  oxydes  metalliques. 
These,  Paris,  1910.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Ru. 

Rev.  metal.  7 (1910),  657;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  207;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
860. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


347 


1910:  23.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  les  sels  complexes.  VII.  Sur  la 
dissolution  du  platine  dans  Tackle  sulfurique  et  les  produits  de 
cette  reaction.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  150  (1910),  104;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  7 (1910),  99;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  135;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1418;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1437. 

1910:  24.  M.  Delepine.  (Action  of  pyridin  on  iridium  sulphate.) 

Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  151  (1910),  878;  Chem.  News,  103  (1911),  23;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1911,  i,  381;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  438. 

1910:  25.  Sir  W.  Crookes.  On  scandium.  (Scandium  platino- 
cyanide,  Sc2(Pt(CN)4)3.21II20.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  101  (1910),  49;  102  (1910),  85;  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London, 
83  A (1910),  277;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  81,  695. 

1910:  26.  C.  J.  Obermaier.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Kobalt 
auf  Hydroxylammoniumsalze  und  zur  Kenntnis  von  Platin 
und  Gold.  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1910.  Pt. 

1910:  27.  H.  Grossmann  and  B.  Schuck.  Zur  Kenntnis  der 
Dicyandiamidinverbindungen.  (Platinum  and  palladium 
salts.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  674;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  i (1910),  231;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910, 
i,  1234;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1309. 

1910:  28.  J.  Ostromisslensky  and  A.  Bergmann.  Untersuch- 
ungen  fiber  die  Iscmerie  der  Komplexverbindungen.  I.  Ueber 
die  asymmetrischen  Komplexverbindungen  des  Platins. 
(Semipyridinaminchlorosulfonsaures  Platin.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1910),  611;  Ber.  43  (1910),  2768;  Bui. 

Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  651,  1017;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  i (1910),  887; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1527;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  255. 

1910:  29.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff.  (Sur  quelques  complexes  de  la 
serie  des  dioximines.)  Pd,  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1910),  1466;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911), 
1301. 

1910:  30.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Subbotin.  Ueber  isomere 
Platinverbindungen  organischer  Sulfide.  (Mercaptans.)  Pt. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  1200;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  651;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
98,  i (1910),  354;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  2008;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2470. 

1910:  31.  L.  Ramberg.  Notiz  fiber  die  Umlagerung  eines  inneren 
Komplexes  dureh  Belichtung.  (Platinum  ethylthioglycollate.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  580;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  6;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  i 
(1910),  218;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1124;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1303. 


348  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1910:  32.  M.  Vezes  and  A.  Duffour.  Sur  les  sels  complexes 
d’ iridium:  les  iridodichloronitrooxalates.  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4]  7 (1910),  507;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  i (1910),  540;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  ii,  548;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2447. 

1910:  33.  A.  Duffour.  Sur  les  sels  complexes  d’iridium:  acide 
iridodichloronitrooxalique  et  les  iridodichloronitrooxalates.  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  7 (1910),  512;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  i (1910),  541;  C.  A. 
4 (1910),  2447. 

1910:  34.  P.  Breteau.  (Reductions  in  the  presence  of  palladium.) 
(Application  to  phenanthrene.)  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  151  (1910),  1368;  Chem.  News,  103  (1911),  72;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  100,  i (1911),  123;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1401. 

1910:  35.  J.  Ville.  (Formation  of  urobiligen  from  biliary  pig- 
ments by  the  reducing  action  of  palladium  hydride  in  presence 
of  hypophosphites.)  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  biol.  69  (1910),  419;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  714. 

1910:  36.  Vereinigte  chemische  Werke.  Darstellung  von  ge- 
sattigten  Fettsauren  aus  ungesattigten  Verbindungen  durch 
Palladium  oder  Palladiumhydroxydul.  (German  patent 
236488.)  Pd. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  317. 

1910:  37.  M.  Riess.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntnis  der  Platinmetalle. 
I.  Zur  qualitativen  Bestimmung  des  Rhodiums.  II.  Ueber 
Hexabromoirideate.  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1910.  Rh,  Ir. 

1910:  38.  A.  Gutbier  and  F.  Falco.  Zur  qu an titatiyen  Bestim- 
mung und  Trennung  des  Palladiums.  Also:  Nachtrag.  Pd. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  49  (1910),  287,  492;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  365, 
942;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  459,  756;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1384; 
ii,  915;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1723. 

1910:  39.  P.  Rohland.  Die  Bestimmung  des  Kaliums  als  Kali- 
umplatinchlorid.  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  49  (1910),  358;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  2139;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
2250. 

1910:  40.  M.  Nyman  and  R.  Bjorksten.  Fallung  von  Cocain- 
losungen  mit  Platinchlorid.  Pt. 

Pharm.  Zentralhalle,  52  (1911),  71;  Farm.  Notisblad,  1910,  179;  Apoth. 
Ztg.  (Berlin),  25  (1910),  642;  Analyst,  36  (1911),  354;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
100,  ii  (1911),  235;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1451;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1161. 

1910:  41.  L.  L.  de  Koninck.  Nettoyage  des  fils  de  platine 
employes  pour  les  reactions  par  coloration  de  la  flamme. 
(By  borax.)  Pt* 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  belg.  24  (1910),  103,  197;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  50  (1911),  574; 
Chem.  Ztg.  34  (1910),  R.  289;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  541;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  ii,  53;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2247. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


349 


1910:  42.  C.  Paal  and  W.  Hartmann.  Die  Gasvolumetrische 
Bestimmung  des  Wassers toffs  durch  katalytische  Absorp- 
tion. Pd. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  243;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  237;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910, 

i,  566;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1006. 

43.  W.  Burdakoff.  (Crystallography  of  palladium  salts.) 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  42  (1910),  730.  Pd. 

44.  E.  Gruneisen.  Ueber  die  thermische  Ausdehnung  der 

Metalle.  Ir,  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  33  (1910),  33;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  111;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  824;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  858;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3031. 

45.  E.  Gruneisen.  Einfluss  der  Temperatur  auf  die 

Kompressibilitat  der  Metalle.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  33  (1910),  1239;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  281. 

46.  C.  E.  Guye  and  H.  Schapper.  Sur  le  frottement  interne 

des  m6taux.  Pt,  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  150  (1910),  962;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  486;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  i,  2052;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2756. 

47.  O.  Ruff.  Ueber  einen  elektrischen  Vacuumofen.  (Melt- 
ing points  of  platinum  and  iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  1564;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  575;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910, 

ii,  181;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3026. 

48.  A.  L.  Day  and  R.  B.  Sosman  (and  E.  T.  Allen).  The 

nitrogen  thermometer  from  zinc  to  palladium;  with  an 
investigation  of  the  metals,  by  E.  T.  Allen.  Pd,  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  29  (1910),  93;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  72;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  262;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1085;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  851. 

49.  M.  Pirani  and  A.  R.  Meyer.  Ueber  das  Verhalten  von 

Platin-  und  Nickeldrahten  gegen  Wasserstoff  bei  hohen  Tem- 
peraturen.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  16  (1910),  444;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  77;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  719;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  274;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2399. 

1910:  50.  A.  Sieyerts.  Ueber  Losungen  von  Gasen  in  Metallen. 

(Solution  of  hydrogen  in  palladium.)  Pd. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  16  (1910),  707;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  78;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1445;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2019. 

1910:  51.  A.  Sieyerts  and  W.  Krumbhaar.  Ueber  die  Loslichkeit 
Yon  Gasen  in  Metallen  und  Legierungen.  (Solution  of  hydro- 
gen in  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  893;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  377;  Intern.  Z.  Metall. 
1 (1911),  77;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  410;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i, 
1680;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1951. 


1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 


1910: 

. T I 


1910: 


350 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1910:  52.  K.  Schick.  Platinum  contact  body  dor  use  in  making 
nitric  acid.  (U.  S.  patent  971149,  Sept.  27,  1910.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  4 (1910),  3286. 

1910:  53.  W.  D.  Harkins.  The  Marsh  test  and  excess  potential. 
(Influence  on  platinum  and  palladium  on  Marsh’s  test.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  32  (1910),  518;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1818;  C.  A.  4 
(1910),  1585. 

1910:  54.  H.  G.  Denham.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Katalyse  in  hetero- 
genen  Systemen.  Das  Gleichgewicht  TiHi + Hi^Tiiv  + H und 
die  Reaktion  HCN  + 2H2u±CH3XH2.  (Catalytic  influence  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  72  (1910),  641;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  519;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  598;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  66;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
2066. 

1910:  55.  F.  Haber.  Ueber  die  Darstellung  des  Ammoniaks  aus 
Stickstoff  und  Wasserstoff.  (Osmium  as  catalyzer.)  Os. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  16  (1910),  244:  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1559;  C.  A.  4 
(1910),  2356. 

1910:  56.  Badische  Anilin  und  Soda  Fabrik.  Verfahren  zur  Her- 
stellung  von  Ammoniak  durch  katalytische  Vereinigung  von 
Stickstoff  und  Wasserstoff  bei  erhohter  Temperatur.  (Osmium 
as  catalyzer.)  (German  patent  223408,  June  24,  1910.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  347;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2987. 

1910:  57.  L.  Golodetz.  Wodurch  ist  die  Osmiums aurereakt ion 
bedingt  ? Os. 

Chem.  Rev.  Fett-  Harz-Ind.  17  (1910),  72;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910), 
464;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1648;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1814. 

1910:  58.  N.  Castoro.  Ueber  die  Darstellung  kolloider  Metallo 
mit  Hilfe  von  Acrolein.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  6 (1910),  283;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  620; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  271;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2242. 

1910:  59.  G.  Bredig  and  F.  Sommer.  Anorganische  Fermente.  V. 
Die  Schardingersclu  Reaktion  und  ahnliche  enzymartige  Kata- 
lysen.  Pt,  Ir,  Pd,  Rh. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  70,  ii  (1910)  (Arrhenius  Festband),  34:  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
98,  ii  (1910),  284;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1103;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1408. 

1910:  60.  L.  Wohler  and  A.  Spengel.  Rotes  Platin  als  Analogon 
des  Cassiusschen  Goldpurpurs.  (Colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  7 (1910),  243:  Z.  angew.  Chem.  24  (1911),  752; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  1075;  Chem.  Ztg.  35  (1911),  25;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1870;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1376. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


351 


1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 

1910: 


61.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Hohenegger.  Ueber  die  Adsorption  des 

Acetylens  durch  kolloidales  Palladium  (p.  2684)  und  durch 
Palladiumschwarz  (p.  2692).  Pd. 

Ber.  43  (1910),  2684,  2692;  Bui.  Soc.  ehim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1017,  1018:  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  98,  i (1910),  806,  807;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1589,  1590; 
C.  A.  5 (1011),  295. 

62.  J.  M.  Eder  and  E.  Valenta.  Wellenlangemessungen  im 

sichtbaren  Bezirk  der  Bogenspektren.  Os,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

Sitzb.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  119  (1910),  1 ; J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910), 
561;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1273;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  424. 

63.  H.  y.  Wartenberg.  Optische  Konstanten  einiger  Ele- 

mente.  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  1910,  105;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  246;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  i,  1098;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1420. 

64.  H.  y.  Wartenberg.  Ueber  optische  Temperaturmes- 

sung  blanker  Korper.  Ir,  Rh,  Pt,  Ir. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  1910,  121;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  125;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  268;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1099;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1420. 

65.  W.  Meier.  Untersuchungen  fiber  Dispersion  und  Ab- 
sorption bei  Metallen  ftir  das  siehtbare  und  ul tra violet te  Licht. 

Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  31  (1910),  1017;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  124;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  369;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1574;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
1839. 

66.  C.  Zakrzewski.  Ueber  die  Dispersion  einiger  Metalle 

im  sichtbaren  Spektrum.  Pt. 

Anz.  Akad.  Wiss.  Krakau,  1910,  A,  77;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1958; 
C.  A.  5 (1911),  2026. 

67.  O.  Stuhlmann,  Jr.  Difference  in  photoelectric  effect 
caused  by  incident  and  emergent  light.  (Platinum  films.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  20  (1910),  331;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  23. 

68.  E.  Bauer  and  M.  Moulin.  Sur  la  constante  de  la  loi  de 

Stefan  et  remission  du  platine.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  150  (1910),  167;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1207;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 
2408. 

69.  H.  Rubens  and  E.  Hagen.  Ueber  die  Aenderung  des 

Emissions  verm  ogens  der  Metalle  mit  der  Temper  a tur  im  kurz- 
welligen  Teil  des  Ultrarots.  Pt,  Rh. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  1910,  172;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  262;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  i,  1210;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1571. 

70.  E.  Hagen  and  H.  Rubens.  Ueber  die  Aenderungen  des 

Emissionsvermogens  der  Metalle  mit  der  Tempcratur  im  kurz- 
welligen  ultraroten  Spektrum.  Pt,  Rh. 

Sitzb.  Kgl.  preuss.  Akad.  1910,  467;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  469; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  4;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2599. 


352 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1910:  71.  E.  P.  Hyde.  The  physical  production  of  light.  (Semi- 
popular  review  of  sources  of  illumination.)  Os,  Pt. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  169  (1910),  439;  170  (1910),  26;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii, 
1116;  C.  A.  4 (1911),  2598. 

1910:  72.  E.  P.  Hyde.  Radiation  from  metals.  Os,  Pt. 

Elec.  World,  55  (1910),  1654;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  124. 

1910:  73.  W.  W.  Coblentz.  The  reflecting  power  of  various 
metals.  Ir,  Rh. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  170  (1910),  169;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  125;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1359;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1713. 

1910:  74.  W.  W.  Coblentz.  The  luminous  efficiency  of  incan- 
descent lamps.  Pt. 

Elec.  World,  55  (1910),  1314;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  125;  C.  A.  4 
(1910),  2236. 

1910:  75.  P.  G.  Nutting.  Luminosity  and  temperature.  Os. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  6 (1910),  337;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  125;  C.  A. 
4 (1910),  1420. 

1910:  76.  J.  A.  Crowther.  The  transmission  of  /3-rays.  Pt. 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  15  (1910),  442;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  672; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  780;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2604. 

1910:  77.  R.  Whiddington.  Preliminary  note  on  the  properties  of 
easily  absorbed  Rontgen  radiation.  Pfcl 

Proc.  Camb.  Phil.  Soc.  15  (1910),  574;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1734;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  2465. 

1910:  78.  M.  v.  Pirani.  Ueber  die  Messung  der  wahren  Tem- 
peratur  von  Metallen.  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  1910,  301;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  117;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  i,  2006. 

1910:  79.  O.  Berg.  Ueber  den  Thomsoneffekt  in  Kupfer,  Eisen 
und  Platin.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  32  (1910),  477;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  122;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  ii,  276;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2600. 

1910:  80.  T.  W.  Richards  and  F.  G.  Jackson.  Die  spezifische 
Warme  der  Elemente  bei  niedrigen  Temperaturen.  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  70  (1910)  (Arrhenius  Festband),  414;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[4],  10  (1911),  70;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1328;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1405. 

1910:  81.  K.  Honda.  Die  thermomagnetischen  Eigenschaften  der 
Elemente.  Os,  Ir,  Pt,  Ru,  Rh,  Fd. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  32  (1910),  1027;  Verh.  Kon.  Akad.  Wet.  Amsterdam,  18 
(1910),  666;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  686;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii, 
857;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3003. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


353 


1910:  82.  G.  Grube.  Zui*  Theorie  der  Sauers  toff  el  ektrode.  Das 
elektromotorische  Verhalten  der  Platinoxyde.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  16  (1910),  621;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  926;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1910,  ii,  942;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  3035. 

1910:  83.  A.  Lafay.  Sur  la  mesure  de  haute  pression  au  moyen 
de  la  variation  de  la  resistivite  de  conducteurs  sounds  a ces 
pressions.  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  19  (1910),  289;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  118; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1670;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1355. 

1910:  84.  O.  W.  Richardson  and  H.  L.  Cooke.  The  heat  devel- 
oped during  the  absorption  of  electrons  by  platinum.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  20  (1910),  173;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  358;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1910,  ii,  533;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  23. 

1910:  85.  O.  W.  Richardson  and  E.  R.  Hulbirt.  The  specific 
charge  of  the  ions  emitted  by  hot  bodies.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  20  (1910),  545. 

1910:  86.  R.  B.  Sosman.  The  platinum-rhodium  thermo-element 
from  0°  to  1,755°.  Pt,  Rh. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  30  (1910),  1;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  121;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  681;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910;  ii,  710,  1109;  C.  A.  4 (1910), 

2398. 

1910:  87.  E.  Rudolfi.  Ueber  Thermoelektrizitat  von  Legier- 
ungen.  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  67  (1910),  65;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4].  10  (1911),  630;  Intern. 

Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  121;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  575;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1910,  ii,  142;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2624. 

1910:  88.  C.  H.  Lees.  On  the  laws  regarding  the  direction  of 
thermo-electric  currents  enunciated  by  M.  Thomas.  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  19  (1910),  508;  Proc.  Phys.  Soc.  London,  22  (1910),  273; 

Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  120. 

1910:  89.  K.  Bennewitz.  Beitrage  zur  Frage  der  Zersetzungs- 
spannung.  (Passive  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  72  (1910),  202;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  385;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1910,  i,  2054;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1708. 

1910:  90.  D.  Reichinstein.  Die  oszillographische  Untersuchung 
einiger  electrolytischer  Vorgange.  III.  (Polarization  at  plati- 
num and  palladium  electrodes.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  16  (1910),  916;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  1028;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1910,  ii,  1795;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  867. 

1910:  91.  H.  W.  Schmidt.  Beitrag  zur  Frage  fiber  den  Durchgang 
der  /3-Strahlen  durch  Materie.  Pd,  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  11  (1910),  262;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1676. 

109733° — 39 — Bull:  694 23 


354 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1910:  92.  A.  Hantzscii.  Optische  Untersuchungen  iiber  die 
Chromophore  farbiger  Salze  unci  Sauren.  (Cliloroplatinates.) 

Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  72  (1910),  362;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  510; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  370;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  ii,  3;  C.  A.  4 
(1910),  1704. 

1910:  93.  W.  Broniewski.  Sur  les  proprietes  thermo  el ectriques 
des  alliages.  Pd,  Pt. 

Rev.  metal.  7 (1910),  341;  Intern.  Z.  Metal!.  1 (1911),  120;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1910,  ii,  433. 

1910.  94.  E.  Janecke.  Isomorphie  ternarer  Mischungen  bei 
Vorhandensein  von  Mischungslucken.  Pd,  Pt. 

Metallurgie,  7 (1910),  510;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  262. 

1910:  95.  W.  Geibel.  Ueber  einige  elektrische  und  mechanische 
Eigcnschaften  von  Ed  elm  et  all-Legi  er  u ngen . (Palladium-gold, 
p.  38;  palladium-silver,  p.  240;  palladium-platinum,  p.  242; 
platinum-iridium,  p.  246;  platinum-gold,  p.  251.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  69  (1910),  38;  70  (1911),  240;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10 
(1911),  1087;  12  (1912),  130;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  271;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  i,  201,  1681;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  10,  361;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  2062. 

1910:  96.  W.  C.  Heraeus,  G.  m.  b.  H.  Harte  und  elastische 
Platiiilegierungen  fur  die  Herstellung  wissenschaftlicher  und 
techniseher  Getrauchsgegenstande.  (German  patent  239704, 
Mar.  9,  1910;  British  patent  29723,  Dec.  21,  1910.)  Pt,  Os. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  24  (1911),  2181;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1502;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  3043;  6 (1912),  2059. 

1910:  97.  F.  Wrede.  Ueber  die  Bestimmung  von  Verbrennungs- 
warmen  mittels  der  kalorimetrisehen  Bombe  unter  Benutzunor 

o 

des  Platinwiderstandsthermoineters.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  75  (1910),  81;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  408. 

1910:  98.  P.  H.  Walker  and  F.  W.  Smither.  Platinum  labora- 
tory utensils.  (Bad  quality  of  much  commercial  platinum 
and  methods  of  testing.)  Pt. 

Bur.  Chem.  Bui.  137  (1910),  180;  Science,  33  (1911),  349;  Z.  angew. 
Chem.  24  (1911),  993;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3183. 

1910:  99.  W.  D.  Coolidge.  Ductile  tungsten.  Pt. 

Proc.  Am.  Inst..  Elec.  Eng.  29  (1910),  953;  Elec.  World,  56  (1910),  1368; 
Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911),  117;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1848. 

1910:  100.  J.  W.  Howell.  Metal  filament  lamps.  (Comparisons.) 

Os. 

Proc.  Am.  Inst.  Elec.  Eng.  29  (1910),  819;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911), 
117;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1942. 


BIBLIOCRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


355 


1910:  101.  G.  S.  Merrill.  Tungsten  lamps.  Os,  Pt. 

Proc.  Am.  Inst.  Elec.  Eng.  29  (1910),  1433;  Intern.  Z.  Metall.  1 (1911), 
117. 

1910:  102.  R.  v.  Koch.  Zur  Frage  fiber  die  Lichtempfindlichkeit 
des  Auges.  (Use  of  osmium  lamp.)  Os. 

Physik.  Z.  11  (1910),  238;  Chem.  Zentr.  19J0,  i,  1563. 

1910:  103. Action  of  coal  gas  on  platinum;  effect  of  impuri- 

ties. (From  work  of  Phys.  tech.  Reichsanstalt  during  1909.) 

Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  916;  Z.  Instrumentenk.  30  (1910),  174;  Z. 
Eiektroehem.  17  (1911),  34. 

1910:  104.  R.  Rieke  and  K.  Endell.  Ueber  Lithiumsilicate. 
(Platinum  attacked  by  Li20  in  fusions  rich  in  lithium.)  Pt. 

Sprechsaal,  43  (1910),  683;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911  i,  7. 

1910:  105.  W.  J.  McCaughey  and  H.  E.  Patten.  The  electro- 
deposition  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Trans.  Am.  Electrochem.  Soc.  17  (1910),  275;  Met.  Chem,  Eng.  8 (1910), 
349;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  4 (1910),  299;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2771. 

1910:  106.  M.  Neumann.  Verfahren  zur  Herstellung  von  nur  an 
der  Oberflache  platinierten  Kontakttragern.  (German  patent 
218725,  Feb.  8,  1910.)  Pt, 

Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  875;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2031. 

1910:  107.  R.  Namias.  (Fixation  of  gold  and  platinum  on  silver 
images.)  Pt, 

Bui.  Soc.  franc,  photog.  [3],  1 (1910),  311;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  36. 

1910:  108.  K.  Vorbuchner.  (Ash  determinations  in  sugar  and 
other  products,  using  a quartz  instead  of  platinum  dish  and 
a quartz  muffle.)  Pt. 

Oesterr.  ung.  Z.  Zuckerind.  39  (1910),  423;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  2888. 

1910:  109.  L.  Kopa  and  R.  Konig.  Lotrolirperlen  ohne  Platin- 
draht.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  34  (1910),  256;  Chem.  Zentr.  1910,  i,  1484;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1585. 

1910:  110.  O.  F.  Kirby.  A substitute  for  platinum  wire  in  quali- 
tative analysis.  (Asbestos  threads  dipped  in  phosphoric 
acid.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  101  (1910),  170;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  98,  ii  (1910),  445;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1910,  i,  1769;  C.  A.  4 (1910),  1722. 

1910:  111.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Platinum  wire  substitute.  (Platinum 
shell  over  nickeled  copper.)  (German  patent  263868,  Mar.  9, 
1910.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1092;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3929. 


356 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1911:  1.  A.  G.  French.  Discovery  of  a new  element,  probably  of 
the  platinum  group.  (Name  canadium  suggested.)  Can. 
Chem.  News,  104  (1911),  283;  Ann.  Rept.  Minister  of  Mines,  Brit.  Co- 
lumbia, 1911;  S.  Afr.  J.  Sc.  8 (1911),  225;  9 (1912),  383;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[4],  12  (1912),  713;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  54;  C.  A.  6(1912), 
1105. 


1911:  2.  L.  Duparc.  Das  Platin  und  seine  Lagerstatten  im  Ural. 

Pt. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  [4],  31  (1911),  211,  322,  439,  516;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911, 
ii,  983;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3553. 

1911:  3.  L.  Duparc.  Sur  les  gites  platiniferes  de  FOural.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  phys.  nat.  28  (1911),  11;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911), 
733. 

1911:  4.  L.  Duparc.  Sur  quelques  gisements  anormaux  de  pla- 
tine  de  FOural.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  phys.  nat.  28  (1911),  68. 

1911:  4a.  Ospina.  Resena  sobre  la  geologia  de  Colombia,  y 
especialmente  del  antiguo  Departamento  de  Antioquia. 
Medellin,  1911,  pp.  56,  58.  Pt. 


1911:  5.  Hobson.  Platinum  and  associated  minerals.  (Plati- 
num metals  and  gold  in  concentrates.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  600. 

1911:  6.  Colorado.  San  Juan  region.  (Discovery  of 

platinum.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  421. 

1911:  7. Platinum  in  Wyoming.  (Rambler  mines.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  460. 

1911:  8.  — Oregon,  Lincoln  County.  (Platinum  in  beach 

sands.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  184. 

1911:  9. Platinum  in  British  Columbia.  (Similkameen 

and  Tulameen  rivers.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  300. 

1911:  9a.  Platinum  placers  in  British  Columbia.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  102  (1911),  377. 

1911:  10.  — Mining  platinum  in  Colombia.  (New  mining 

laws.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  426;  Mining  Sci.  Press,  102  (1911),  183. 


1911:  11.  W.  Jakob  and  S.  Tolloczko.  Chemische  Analyse  des 
Thorianits  von  Ceylon.  (Presence  of  rhodium,  0.008  per 
cent.)  Rh. 

Anz.  Akad.  Wiss.  Krakau,  1911.  A,  558;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  172; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  1140;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  971. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


357 


1911:  12. Reported  discovery  of  11  armor  plate”  ore. 

(Osmium  ore  for  osmium  steel  for  armor  plate.)  Os. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  451. 

1911:  13.  S.  Pina  de  Rubies.  (Composition  of  the  platiniferous 
dunite  of  the  Urals.)  Pt. 

Anales  fls.  quim.  9 (1911),  294;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  846. 

1911:  14.  L.  Duparc  and  H.  C.  Holtz.  Notiz  uber  die  chemische 
Zusammensetzung  einiger  Platinerze  aus  dem  Ural.  Pt. 

Min.  petrog.  Mitt.  [2],  29  (1911),  498;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  100;  C.  A.  6 
(1912),  66. 

1911:  14a.  Id.  C.  Holtz.  La  composition  des  principaux  minerals 
de  platine  de  1’Oural.  These,  Geneve,  1911. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1911:  15. Production  of  platinum  in  the  United  States  in 

1909.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  745. 

1911:  16.  F.  Hobart.  Gold,  silver,  and  platinum  in  1910.  Pt. 


Eng.  Mining  J,  91  (1911),  3. 

1911:  17.  Platinum  production  in  1910.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  130. 

1911 : 18. Note  on  supply  and  demand  for  platinum.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  892. 

1911:  19. LTnited  States  exports  and  imports  of  platinum 

in  1910.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  350. 

1911:  20. Production  of  platinum  in  Russia.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  599. 

1911:  21. Osmiridium  production  in  Russia.  Os,  Ir. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  1094. 

1911:  22. Output  of  platinum,  iridium,  palladium,  and 

rhodium.  Pt,  Ir,  Pd,  Rh. 

Brass  World,  7 (1911),  292;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3216. 

1911:  23.  Monthly  market  prices  of  platinum  in  1909  and 

1910.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  212. 

1911:  24. Metal  markets.  (Weekly  reports  of  prices  of 

platinum  and  iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  91,  92  (1911),  weekly. 


358 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1911:  24a.  High  price  of  platinum.  (St.  Petersburg  cor- 
respondence.) Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  102  (1911),  475. 

1911:  25.  Advance  in  price  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  480. 

1911:  26.  Advance  in  price  of  iridium.  Ir 

Eng.  Mining  J.  ,92  (1911),  955. 

1911:  27.  B.  Waser  and  R.  Kuhnel.  Platin  und  die  Platinme- 
talle.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

O.  Dammer:  Chemische  Technologie  der  Neuzeit,  vol.  2,  pp.  731-735. 

1911:  28. Concentration  of  copper  ores  containing  plati- 
num from  the  Rambler  mine,  Wyoming.  Pt. 

Met,  Cliem.  Eng.  9 (1911),  75;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  24  (1911),  914;  J.  Inst. 
Metals,  5 (1911),  267. 

1911:  29.  T.  Vogt.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Rutheniums. 
Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1912.  (Very  full  historically  and 
critically;  many  references  to  literature;  Ru02  used  for 
atomic  weight.  Ru=  101.66.)  Ru. 

.Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soz.  Erlangen,  43  (1911),  268. 

1911:  30.  E.  Fritzmann.  Ueber  Komplexverbindungen  des  Pla- 
tins  mit  organischen  Seleniden.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  73  (1911),  239;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  1930;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  599;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  i (1912),  71;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  i,  985;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  839. 

1911:  31.  P.  S.  Pistschimuka.  Ueber  die  Verwandlungen  der 
Tliio-  und  Selenphosphorsaureester.  (Chloroplatinates.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  84  (1911),  746;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  782;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  102,  i (1912),  68;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  989. 

1911:  32.  L.  Wohler.  (New  halides  of  iridium  and  platinum.) 
(PtCl3,  PtBr3,  Ptl3,  IrCl2,  IrCl.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Chem.  Ztg.  35  (1911),  798;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2897. 

1911:  33.  M.  Delepixe.  Sur  les  pyridinopentachloro-iridites.  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  152  (1911),  1390,  1589;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  9 (1911),  626, 
710,  771;  Chem.  News,  104  (1911),  47  , 72,  198;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i 
(1911),  565;  Chem.  Zentr  .1911,  ii,  126,  193,  845,  1109;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
2605,  2787,  3547. 

1911:  34.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  quelques  pretendus  clilorures  d’ iri- 
dium ; chlorures  condenses.  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  153  (1911),  60;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  9 (1911),  829;  Chem. 
News,  104  (1911),  150,  246;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  806;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  ii,  517;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3021;  6 (1912),  47. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


359 


1911:35.  A.  Duffour.  Sur  quelques  nouveaux  derives  complexes 
de  riridium:  iridotetrachloroxalates  et  tetrachloro-iridites 

(p.  1393).  Sur  quelques  nouveaux  types  d’acides  iridoxa- 
liques  et  d’iridoxalates  complexes  (p.  1591). 

Compt.  rend.  152  (1911),  1393,  1591;  Bui.  Soc.  ehim.  [4],  11  (1912),  82; 
Chem.  News,  104 (1911),  47, 72;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100  i,  (1911), 519;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  ii,  127,  193;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2605,  3020. 

1911:  36.  P.  Walbinger.  Studien  fiber  das  Osmium.  Disserta- 
tion, Erlangen,  1911.  (Organic  haloosmeates.)  Os. 

1911:37.  A.  Gutbier.  Ueber  Hexachloroosmeate.  Os. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  308;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1910),  1420;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
100,  i (1911),  191;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  710;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1602. 

1911:  38.  H.  Wiessmann.  Studien  iiber  das  Ruthenium.  (Haio- 
ruthenates?)  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1911.  Ru. 

1911:  39.  A.  Gutbier.  Ueber  Hexahalogenrutheneate.  Ru. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  306;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1420;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
100,  i (1911),  183;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  709;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1602. 

1911:40.  M.  Delepine.  Acide  pyridino-iridodisulfurique.  (Pre- 
liminary note.)  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4},  9 (1911),  77;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  81. 

1911:41.  A.  Lancien.  (Uranium-rhodium  nitrate.)  Rh. 

Bui.  sci.  pharmacolog.  18  (1911),  213;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  455; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1912,'i,  108;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1849. 

1911:  42.  S.  H.  C.  Briggs.  Isomerism  of  the  ferro' cyanides. 
(Levy’s  platinocyanides.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  99  (1911),  1019;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  273;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
3018. 

1911:  43.  G.  Jantsch  and  A.  Ohl.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Verbind- 
ungen  des  Dysprosiums.  (Platocyanide,  Dy2(Pt(CN)4)3. 
21H2Q.)  * ' ~ Pt. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  1274;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911)  1640;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
100,  ii  (1911),  492;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  12;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2600. 

1911:  44.  H.  Kirmreuther.  Dicliloro-disulfamino-platosalze,  ein 
Beitrag  zur  Storeoisomerie  des  Platins  und  zur  Umlagerungs- 
fahigkeit  der  Sulfaminsaure.  Pt. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  3115;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  649;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
100,  ii  (1911),  1098;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1775;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  581. 

1911:  45.  C.  S.  Robinson  and  G.  O.  Jones.  Complex  tliio-oxa- 
lates.  Pd;  Rh. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1911),  279;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  101  (1912),  62;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1048;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  1098;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
1284. 


360 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1911:  46.  S.  Tyden.  Di-tiodiglykolatoplatosyra  jamte  nagra  salter 
och  additionsderivate.  Lund,  1911,  p.  59.  Pt. 

1911:47.  S.  Valentiner.  (Absorption  of  hydrogen  by  palladium 
at  low  pressures  and  temperatures.)  Pd. 

Bei>  physik.  Ges.  13  (1911),  1003;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,.  ii  (1912),  169; 
J.  Inst.  Metals,  7 (1912),  274;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  825. 

1911:  48.  A.  Sieyerts  and  E.  Bergner.  Tantal,  Wolfram  und 
Wasserstoff.  (Absorption  of  hydrogen  by  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  2394;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  990;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii, 
1108;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  176. 

1911:  49.  P.  Sabatier.  Hydrogenations  et  deshy drogenations 
par  catalyse.  (Vortrag,  Deutsche  chemische  Gesellschaft, 
Mai  13,  1911.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  1984;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  702;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3269. 

1911:  50.  P.  Breteau.  Hydrogenation  au  moyen  du  palladium 
precipite  et  de  l'hypophosphite  de  sodium  (pp.  176,  515). 
Methodes  d'hydrogenation  en  presence  du  palladium  divise 
(pp.  729,  764).  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  9 (1911),  176,  515,  729,  764;  Chem.  News,  104  (1911), 
119,209;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i,  (1911),  533,  776;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii, 
184,  1142;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3231,  3397,  3547,  3683. 

1911:  51.  N.  D.  Zelinsky  and  N.  Glinka.  Ueber  gleichzeitige 
Reduktions- und  Oxidationskatalyse.  (With  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  23G5;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  43  (1911),  1084;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim  [4],  12  (19121,  172,  804;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  870; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1339;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3809. 

1911:  52.  N.  D.  Zelinsky.  Ueber  Dehydrogenization  durch 
Katalyse.  Pd. 

Ber.  44  (19111,  3121:  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  43  (1911),  1220,  1222; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  871;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  958; 
C.  A.  6 (1912),  598. 

1911:  53.  A.  Skita  and  PI.  H.  Frank.  LTeber  Alkaloid-Hy- 
drierungen.  (Reduktionskatalysen.)  Pd. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  2862;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  1017;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  231. 

1911:  54.  R.  Willstatter  and  E.  Waser.  Ueber  Cyclooctate- 
traen.  (Hydrogenation  by  the  platinum  metals.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  3423;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  i (1912),  17;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i, 
217;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  748. 

1911:  55.  L.  Oldenberg.  Ueber  Dihydromorphin.  (Reduction 
by  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  1829;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  668;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3261. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


361 


1911:  56.  A.  Kotz  and  R.  Rosenbusch.  Die  Konstitution  des 
Tropilens.  (Reduction  to  suberone  by  colloidal  platinum.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  464;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  338;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1762. 

1911:  57.  J.  Ville.  (Reducing  action  of  hydrogen  liberated  by 
hydrogenated  palladium  upon  bile  pigments.)  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  9 (1911),  480;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2637. 

1911:  58.  L.  J.  Curtman  and  P.  Rothberg.  Application  of  the 
“glow  reaction”  to  the  qualitative  detection  of  the  platinum 
metals.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  33  (1911),  718;  Analyst,  36  (1911),  434;  Eng.  Mining 
J.  92  (1911),  7,  8;  Mining  Sci.  Press,  102  (1911),  748;  J.  Inst.  Metals, 
6 (1911),  349;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  253;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii 
(1911),  661;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  489;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2046. 

1911:  59.  M.  E.  Pozzi-Escot.  Recherche  qualitative  rapide  des 
elements  done  les  sulfures  sont  precipites  par  Thydrogene  sul- 
fure  en  solution  acide.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  9 (.1911),  812;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  940;  C.  A. 
5 (1911),  3774. 

1911:  60.  M.  E.  Pozzi-Escot.  Emploi  en  microchimie  de  quelques 
reactions  de  precipitation  de  l’acide  dimethylaminobenzene- 
azobenzene-sulfonique.  Pd. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  9 (1911),  22;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1380. 

1911:  61.  F.  Freise.  Betriebs-  und  Laboratoriumsverfahrungen 
bei  der  Aufbereitung  von  Golderzen,  u.  s.  w.  (Influence  of 
Palladium.)  Pd. 

Oesterr.  Z.  Berg.  Hiittenw.  59  (1911),  243;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  494; 
C.  A.  5 (1911),  2480. 

1911:  62.  A.  Steinmann.  Kritische  Studie  liber  das  Probiren  von 
Platin.  Pt. 

Schweiz.  Wochsch.  49  (1911),  441,  453;  J.  suisse  chim.  pharm.  No.  32, 
33;  Analyst,  36  (1911),  605;  Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  1030;  93  (1912), 
228;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  7 (1912),  295;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  1035; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1061;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  201. 

1911 : 63.  A.  S.  Dart.  Assay  of  ores  containing  the  platinum  group 
of  metals.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  9 (1911),  75. 

1911:  64. — Parting  platinum-gold-silver  bullion.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  259;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  6 (1911),  349;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  3210. 

1911:  64a.  C.  B.  Durham.  Electrolytic  refining  at  the  U.  S. 
mint,  San  Francisco,  Calif.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Trans.  Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  42  (1911),  874. 


362 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1911:  65,  W.  C.  Arsem.  Separating  gold,  silver,  and  platinum. 
(U.  S.  patent  998665,  July  25,  1911.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  5 (1911),  3038. 

1911:  66.  F.  Mylius  and  C.  Huttner.  Anwendung  von  Aether 
in  der  Metallanalvse.  (Separation  of  gold  from  platinum.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  1315;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  540;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
2473. 

1911:  67.  F.  Mylius.  Quantitative  Goldanalyse mit  Aether.  (Sep- 
aration from  platinum  metals.)  Pt,  Ir,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  70  (1911),  203;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  51  (1912),  380;  Bill.  Soc. 
chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  251;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  444;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
2048. 

1911:  68.  L.  Wohler  and  A.  Spengel.  Ueber  die  Trennung  von 
Plat  in  und  Zinn.  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  50  (1911),  165;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  738;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1468;  Analyst,  36  (1911),  177;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
100,  ii  (1911),  338;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1250;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2047,  2474. 

1911:  69.  A.  Fiechter.  Ueber  eine  praktische  Methode  zur  Re- 
duktion  des  Kaliumplatinchlorids  bei  der  Bestimmung  des 
Kalis  als  Kaliumplatinchlorid.  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  50  (1911),  629;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  702;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  933;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1061;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  3391. 

1911:  70.  O.  Schultze.  Ueber  die  Anwendung  der  Osmiumsaure 
und  eine  neue  Osmiumhamatoxylinmethode.  Os. 

Z.  wiss.  Mikroscop.  27  (1911),  455;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1376;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  2793. 

1911:  71.  B.  Busson.  Bindungsversuche  mit  osmiertem  Eiweiss. 

Os. 

Z.  Immunit.  11,  i (1911),  515;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1822;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
114. 

1911:  72.  F.  J.  G.  Beltzer.  (Differentiation  of  natural  and  arti- 
ficial silk  by  ruthenium  red.)  Ru. 

Mon.  sci.  [5],  1,  ii  (1911),  633;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  47;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1492;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  297. 

1911 : 73.  E.  Bauer.  Ueber  das  periodische  System  der  Elemente. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  76  (1911),  569.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1911:  74.  C.  A.  Peters.  Die  Reaktionen  in  einem  System  von 
Nickel  oder  Platin,  Quccksilber  und  Natriumchlorid.  Pt. 
Z.  anorg.  Chem.  74  (1911),  170;  Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  32  (1911),  386;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  973;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  1095;  C.  A.  6 
(1912),  182. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


363 


1911:  75.  H.  B.  North.  L’action  du  chlorure  de  sulfuryle  sur  cer- 
tains metaux.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  9 (1911),  646;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  79S;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  ii,  665;  0.  A.  5 (1911),  3020. 

1911:  76.  A.  Ries.  Chemisch-krystallographische  Untersuchung 
der  Ghloro-  und  Bromoplatinate  und  -stannate  der  quater- 
naren  Ammoniuml) as en.  Pt. 

Z.  Kryst.  Min.  49  (1911),  513;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  953;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1636;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  726. 

1911:  77.  H.  Baumhauer.  KrystaUographisch-optische  Unter- 

suchungen.  (Platocyanides.)  Pt. 

Z.  Kryst.  Min.  49  (1911),  113;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  431;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  i,  1546;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  467. 

1911:  78.  O.  Ruff  and  O.  Goecke.  Ueber  das  Schmelzen  und 
Verdampfen  unserer  sogenannten  hoch  feu  erf  es  ten  Stoffe. 
(Melting  point  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  24  (1911),  1459;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1412;  C.  A.  6 
(1912),  1509. 

1911:  79.  W.  C.  Heraeus.  Hardening  platinum.  Pt. 

Brass  World,  6 (1911),  230;  j.  Inst.  Metals,  6 (1911),  330. 

1911:  80.  A.  J.  Berry.  The  occlusion  of  hydrogen  by  the  palla- 
dium-gold alloys.  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1911),  56;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  99  (1911),  463;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1583;  Chem.  News,  103  (1911),  141;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1911,  i,  1406;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2019. 

1911:  81.  Kalle  & Co.  Verfahren  zur  Darstellung  von  die  Hy- 
droxyde  der  Platinmetalle  in  kolloidaler  Form  enthaltenden 
Praparaten.  (German  patent  248525,  May  2,  1911.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Rh,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  1967;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  297;  C.  A.  6 
(1912),  2827. 

1911:  82.  Kalle  & Co.  Verfahren  zur  Darstellung  anorganisclie 
Kolloide  enthaltender  Salbenpraparate.  (German  patent 
268311,  May  2,  1911.  Zusatzpatent  zu  229306.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  319;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2827. 

1911:  83.  F.  Mylius  and  C.  Huttner.  (Platinum  and  illumina- 
ting gas.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  17  (1911),  38;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2375. 

1911:  84.  C.  D.  Harries  and  K.  O.  Gottlob.  Ueber  die  Zersetz- 
ung  einiger  Terpenkorper  durch  gliihende  Metalldrahte. 

Pt. 

Ann.  383  (1911),  228;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12(1912),  288;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
100,  i (1911),  798;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3583. 


364 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OP  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1911:  85.  O.  Aschan.  (Action  of  atmospheric  oxygen  on  cam- 
phene  in  the  presence  of  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Oefv.  Finska  Vet.  Soc.  Forh.  53  A 12  (1911),  1;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  3414. 

1911:  86.  R.  F.  Brunel.  Ueber  das  Gleichgewicht  zwischen 
Isobutyl-  und  Tertiarbutylbromid  bei  hoheren  Temperaturen. 
(Influence  of  platinized  asbestos.)  Pt. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  1000;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  i (1911),  413;  C.  A.  5(1911),  2826. 

1911 : 87.  J.  Milbauer.  Beitrag  zur  Theorie  der  Platinkatalyse  bei 
der  Oxydation  von  Wasserstoff  mit  Schwefelsaure.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  77  (1911),  380;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1714; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  872;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1203;  C.  A.  5 

(1911),  3769. 

1911:  88.  N.  Pappada.  Kolloides  Gold  und  Platin. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  9 (1911),  270;Gazz.  chim  ital.  42,  i (1912),  305; 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  1297;  Bull.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1542; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  169;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  984, 1978;  C.  A.  6 

(1912),  1245. 

1911:  89.  C.  Tiiomae.  Mitteilungen  aus  der  Praxis  der  Ultrami- 
kroskopie.  (Colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  9 (1911),  19;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  866; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1402;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  18. 

1911:  90.  T.  Svedberg  and  K.  Inouye.  Ultramikroskopische 
Beobachtungen  einer  Temperaturkoagulation.  (Platinum 
athylatherosol.)  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  9 (1911),  153;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  1077; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  1763;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  706. 

1911:  91.  N.  D.  Zelinsky.  Ueber  die  katalytisclie  Isomerisation 
des  a-Pinens.  (Influence  of  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  2782;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  540;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

100,  i (1911),  997;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  93. 

1911:  92.  C.  Paal  and  A.  Karl.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  fremder 
Stoffe  auf  die  Aktivitat  der  Katalysatoren.  Pd. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  1013;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  10  (1911),  1641;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

100,  ii  (1911),  479;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1786;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3649. 

1911:  93.  T.  Blackadder  and  G.  Bredig.  Anorganische  Fer- 
mente.  VI.  Katalytische  Zersetzung  der  Ameisensaure  durch 
Rhodium.  (Paper  before  83d  meeting,  Deutsch.  Naturf. 
Aerzt.,  Karlsruhe,  Sept.,  1911.)  Rh. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  24  (1911),  1910;  Chem.  Ztg.  35  (1911),  1095;  Z.  physik. 

Chem.  81  (1912),  385;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  537;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  36;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  682;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2912; 

7 (1913),  2334. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


365 


1911:  94.  A.  Lancien.  Du  rhodium  colloidal  electrique.  Rh. 

Compt.  rend.  153  (1911),  1088;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  73;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  i,  362;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1316. 

1911:  95.  T.  Royds.  The  reflective  power  of  lamp-  and  platinum 
black.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  21  (1911),  167;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  789;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
1018. 

1911:  96.  M.  v.  Pirani.  Ueber  optische  Temperaturmessungen. 
(Light  absorption  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  13  (1911),  19;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  865;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
1553. 

1911:  97.  O.  Stuhlmann,  Jr.  The  difference  in  the  photoelectric 
effect  caused  by  incident  and  emergent  light.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  22  (1911),  854;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  467;  C.  A.  6(1912), 
451. 

1911:  98.  A.  Miethe  and  B.  Seegert.  Ueber  Wellenlangemes- 
sungen  an  einigen  Platinmet  alien  im  kurzwelligen  ultravioletten 
Spektrum.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Z.  wiss.  Phot.  10  (1911),  245;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  2;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1912  i,  403. 

191 1 : 99.  A.  Dufour.  (Zeeman  effect  on  the  spectrum  of  rhodium.) 

Rh. 

Radium,  8 (1911),  97;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1783;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3003. 

1911:  100.  R.  Whiddington.  The  production  and  properties  of 
soft  Rontgen  radiation.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  85  A (1911),  99;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911), 
568;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1781;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3006. 

1911:  101.  F.  A.  Schulze.  Die  Warmeleitfahigkeit  einiger  Reihen 
von  Edelmetalllegierungen.  (Pd-Ag,  Pd-Au,  Pd-Pt,  Pt-Au, 
Pt-Ag.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  12  (1911),  1028;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  209;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  569. 

1911:  102.  G.  Reboul  and  E.  G.  de  Bollemont.  Transport  de 
particules  de  certains  metaux  sous  Paction  de  la  chaleur.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  152  (1911),  758;  Radium,  8 (1911),  406;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102, 
ii  (1912),  115;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1577;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  455. 

1911:  103.  J.  A.  LeBel.  Sur  l’echauffement  singulier  des  fils 
minces  de  platine.  (Self-warming  of  thin  platinum  wire.) 

Compt.  rend.  152  (1911),  129;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  864.  Pt 

1911:  104.  E.  Feytis.  Magnetisme  de  quelques  sels  complexes. 
(Platinum  chlorides,  cyanides,  and  oxalates.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  152  (1911),  708;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  367;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  i,  1276;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2028. 


366 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1911:  105.  H.  K.  Onnes.  Verdere  proeven  met  vloeibaar  helium. 
De  weerstand  van  Platina  bij  helium  temperaturen.  (Re- 
sistance of  platinum  at  temperature  of  liquid  helium.)  Pt. 

Afh.  Kgl.  Akad.  Wetensch.  19  (1911),  1187;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  i,  1492: 
C.  A.  6 (1912),  6. 

1911:  106.  W.  Broniewski  and  L.  Hackspill.  Sur  les  proprietes 
electriques  des  metaux  alcalins,  du  rhodium  et  de  Piridium. 

Rh,  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  153  (1911),  814;  Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  29  (1913),  455;  Bill. 
Soc.chim.  [4].  11  (1912),  556;  J.  Chem.  Soc.l00,ii  (1911),  1055;  Chem. 
News,  104  (1911),  293;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  70;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  960. 

1911:  107.  W.  Wilson.  The  discharge  of  positive  electricity  from 
hot  bodies.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  21  (1911),  634;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  181;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
2364. 

1911:  108.  H.  A.  Wilson.  The  relation  between  the  current  of 
hot  platinum  in  air  at  atmospheric  pressure  and  the  electric 
force.  Pt. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Canada  [3],  5,  iii  (1911),  53. 

1911:  109.  O.  W.  Richardson  and  H.  L.  Cooke.  The  heat  lib- 
erated during  the  absorption  of  electrons  by  different  metals. 

Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  21  (1911),  404;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  358;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  i,  1482;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2028. 

1911:  110.  L.  W.  Austin.  Thermoelemente  fur  Versuche  mit 
Hochfrequenzstromen.  (Te-Pt.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  12  (1911),  1226;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  466. 

1911:  111.  G.  R.  White.  Electrolytic  corrosion  of  some  metals. 

Pd. 

J.  Phys.  Chem.  15  (1911),  723;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  901;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  15;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912, i,  314;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  337. 

1911:  112.  H.  Dember.  Ueber  die  Einfluss  von  Radiums trahlen 
auf  die  lichtelektrische  Empfindlichkeit  der  Metalle.  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  13  (1911),  313;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  567;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1911,  i,  1783;  C'.  A.  5 (1911),  2463. 

1911:  113.  C.  H.  Mathewson.  Sodium-gold  alloys.  (Pt-Na, 
Pt-Au-Na,  Pt-Cu-Au-Na.)  ' Pt. 

Intern.  Z.  Metali.  1 (1911),  81;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  732;  C.  A.  5 
(1911),  2786. 

1911:  114.  W.  F.  Hillebrand,  P.  H.  Walker,  and  E.  T.  Allen. 
Preliminary  report  of  the  committee  on  quality  of  platinum 
laboratory  utensils.  Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  3 (1911),  6S6;  Met.  Chem.  Eng.  9 (1911),  649;  J.  Inst. 
Metals,  7 (1912),  274;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


367 


1911:  115.  W.  M.  Thornton,  Jr.  A radiator  for  platinum  cruci- 
bles. Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  3 (1911),  419;  Mining  Sci.  Press,  102  (1911),  852; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  413;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  2349. 

1911:  116.  F.  Fischer  and  E.  Tiede.  Ein  fur  chemische  Zwecke 
geeigneter  electrischer  Wolfram-Widerstandsofen  (also  plat- 
inum and  iridium  resistances).  Pt,  Ir. 

Ber.  44  (1911),  1717;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3641. 

1911:  117.  L.  y.  Liebermann.  Die  Platinelectroden  zur  Bestim- 
mung  der  H-  und  OH-Ionenkonzentrationen.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  35  (1911),  972;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  51  (1912),  486;  C.  A.  5 (1911), 
3641. 

1911:  118.  L.  IIolborn  and  F.  Henning.  Vergleichung  von 
Platinthermometern  mit  Stickstoff-,  Wasserstoff-  und  Plelium- 
thermometern  und  die  Bestimmung  einiger  Fixpunkte  zwis- 
chen  200°  und  500°.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  35  (1911),  761;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  6 (1911),  350;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  852;  Chem.  Zentr.  1911,  ii,  653;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  3642. 

1911:  119.  J.  Escard.  Procedes  actuels  de  preparation  des  fila- 
ments metalliques  pour  lampes  a incandescence.  (Osmium 
filaments.)  Os. 

Technique  moderne,  3 (1911),  539;  C.  A.  6 (1911),  1100. 

1911:  120.  U.  A.  von  Welsbach.  Eliminating  occluded  gases  from 
a filament  containing  osmium  (ruthenium,  iridium,  rhodium). 
(U.  S.  patent  1001105,  Aug.  22,  1911.)  Os,  Ru,  Ir,  Rh. 

C.  A.  5 (1911),  2763. 

1911:  121.  Fusion  in  platinum  crucibles.  (Care  of  cruci- 
bles.) Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  92  (1911),  128. 

1911:  121a.  Platinum  in  jewelry.  (Editorial.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  102  (1911),  516. 

1911:  122.  R.  C.  Benner.  A good  substitute  for  the  platinum 
triangle.  (Use  of  nichrome.)  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  33  (1911),  189;  Eng.  Mining  J.  91  (1911),  360;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  100,  ii  (1911),  269;  C.  A.  5 (1911),  1693. 

1911:  123.  C.  Arragon.  (Quartz  as  a substitute  for  platinum  in 
direct  determination  of  extract  and  mineral  matters  in  wines.) 

Schweiz.  Wochsch.  49  (1911),  633;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  527.  Pt. 

1911:  124.  Platinum  substitute.  (Editorial  note.)  Pt. 

Sci.  Amer.  105  (1911),  42. 


368 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912:  1.  H.  C.  Holtz.  Sur  quelques  anomalies  observees  dans 
T analyse  des  minerals  de  platine  de  l’Oural.  (Possible  new 
metal.)  Pt,  X (?). 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  27  (1912),  559;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  376: 
J.  Inst.  Metals,  9 (1913),  211;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  143;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  561;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3729. 

1912:  2.  T.  A.  Eastick.  Canadium.  (Letter,  showing  the  resem- 


blance of  canadium  to  the  amarillium  described  by  W.  M. 
Courtis,  Trans.  Amer.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  33  (1903),  347.)  Can. 

Chem.  News,  105  (1912),  36. 

1912:  3.  W.  H.  Patterson.  Canadium.  (Letter  noting  similar 
anomalies.)  Can. 

Chem.  News,  105  (1912),  84. 

1912:  4.  T.  Estreicher.  Canadium.  (Letter  criticising  prema- 
ture publication.)  Can. 

Chem.  News,  105  (1912),  119. 

1912:  5.  J.  P.  Hutchins.  The  Russian  Empire  in  1911.  (Plat- 
inum mining,  p.  91.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  90. 

1912:6.  E.  de  Haatsick.  Russian  platinum  placers.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  353  (from  Mining  J.  July  17,  1912). 

1912:  6a.  Mining  in  the  Urals.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  105  (1912),  621. 

1912:  7.  Platinum  and  gold  in  the  Urals.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  1179  (from  Mining  J.  May  25,  1912). 

1912:  8.  Exploration  for  platinum-bearing  gravel  east  of 

Lake  Baikal,  Siberia.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  158. 

1912:  8a.  L.  Perret.  Prospecting  frozen  ground.  (Abstract  of 
paper  on  gold  and  platinum  alluvial  deposits  in  Russia,  read 
before  Inst.  Min.  Met.  London,  May  16,  1912.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Inst.  Min.  Met.  21  (1912),  647;  Mining  Sci.  Press,  104  (1912),  856. 

1912:  8b.  Platinum  deposits  in  Mongolia.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  105  (1912),  597. 

1912:  8c.  Kimball.  Platinum  in  Colombia.  Pt. 

Bui.  Min.  Met.  Soc.  65  (1912),  276. 

1912:  9. Platinum  in  America.  Pt. 

Met.  Chem  Eng.  9 (1912),  659;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  8 (1912),  360. 

1912:  10. Notes  on  New  Rambler  mine,  Wyoming.  Pt,  Pd. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  1107;  94  (1912),  137,  570. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


369 


1912:  11. Exploration  for  platinum  near  Sudbury,  Ontario. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  138.  Pt. 

1912:  12. — Discovery  of  platinum  in  Mexico.  (South  of 

city  of  San  Luis  Potosi.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  476. 

1912:  12a.  G.  P.  Tschernik.  Zur  Mineralogie  der  Insel  Borneo. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 
Trav.  Mus.  Acad.  sc.  Petrograd,  6 (1912),  49;  Z.  Kryst.  Min.  55  (1915), 
184;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  440;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  484. 

1912:  12b.  A.  V.  Nikolaeev.  (Mineralogy  of  the  Kyshtym  Moun- 
tains.) Ir,  Os. 

Trav.  Mus.  Acad.  sc.  Petrograd,  6 (1912),  171;  Z.  Kryst.  Min.  55  (1915), 
182;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  441. 

1912:  13.  F.  W.  Horton.  Iridium  in  American  placer  platinum. 
(Full  discussion;  possibility  of  American  supply;  Trinity 
River,  Calif.)  ‘ Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  873;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  462. 

1912:  14.  — Osmiridium  in  the  Urals.  Ir,  Os. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  886  (from  Mining  J.  Mar.  9,  1912). 

1912:  15. Reported  discovery  of  osmiridium  in  Tasmania. 

Ir,  Os. 

Chem.  Druggist,  July  20,  1912;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  31  (1912),  728;  Eng. 
Mining  J.  95  (1913),  1270;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1471. 

1912:  16.  H.  Molinie  and  H.  Dietz.  L’ argent  et  les  metaux  de 
la  mine  de  platine.  Doin  et  Fils,  Paris,  1912.  (339  pp.) 

C.  A.  6 (1912),  1735.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 


1912:  17. Production  of  platinum  in  1910  (note).  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  33  (1912),  67. 

1912:  18.  — Production  of  platinum  in  1911.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  4. 

1912:  19.  F.  Hobart.  Gold,  silver,  and  platinum  in  1911.  Pt. 
Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  3. 

1912:  20. United  States  production  (of  platinum).  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  401,  585. 

1912:  21. Mineral  production  of  Russia.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  1074. 

1912:21a. Russian  mining  in  1911.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  104  (1912),  110. 

1912:21b.  Russian  platinum  production  in  1911.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  104  (1912),  411. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  G94 24 


370 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912 

1912; 

1912: 

1912: 

1912: 

1912: 

1912 

1912 

1912 


21c. 


Russian  platinum  market. 


Pt. 


Mining  Sci.  Press,  104  (1912),  419. 

2 Id.  A.  J.  Heindl.  Prussian  platinum  prices.  (Equivalent 
weights  and  prices.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  104  (1912),  668. 

22.  — Platinum  production  in  Colombia.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  83. 

23.  Incorporation  of  the  Platinum  & Gold  Extrac- 


tion Co.,  Newport,  Oreg.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  1155. 

24.  — - — — - United  States  exports  and  imports  of  platinum. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  340.  Pt. 

25.  — Kurze  Nachricht  fiber  Handel  und  Industrie, 

Paris.  (Note  on  the  platinum  market  in  Paris.)  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  2530. 

26.  — Metal  markets.  (Weekly  reports  of  prices.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93,  94  (1912).  Pt,  Ir. 

27.  Price  of  osmiridium.  (From  report  of  Tas- 
manian secretary  for  mines,  1911.)  Ir,  Os. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1022. 

28.  PI.  F.  Keller.  Platinum:  the  most  precious  of  the 
metals.  (Lecture  before  the  Franklin  Institute.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

J.  Frank.  Inst.  174  (1912),  525;  Met.  Chem.  Eng.  10  (1912),  788;  Mining 
Eng.  World,  Apr.  26,  1913,  J.  Inst,  Metals,  9 (1913),  241;  Chem.  Zeutr. 
1913,  i,  599;  C.  A.  7 (1912),  459. 

1912:  29.  E.  Priwoznik.  Ueber  Platin.  (History,  preparation, 
and  uses.)  Pt. 

Oesterr.  Z.  Berg.  Hiittenw.  60  (1912),  143,  155;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i, 
1433;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1732. 

1912:  30.  E.  Carthaus.  Das  Platin  irn  Bergbau,  Handel,  und  in 


1912 

1912 

1912 


der  Industrie. 

Ilimmel  und  Erde,  24  (1912),  445. 

31. Recovery  of  metallic  iridium. 


Pt. 


Ir. 


Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  808  (from  Brass  World,  Sept.  1912). 

32.  A.  Gutbier.  (New  investigations  of  osmium.)  Os. 

Chem.  Ztg.  36  (1912),  60;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1683. 

33.  C.  Fery  and  M.  Drecq.  Sur  le  pouvoir  diffusif  du  noir 

de  platine  et  le  coefficient  de  la  loi  de  Stefan.  Pt. 

Compt,  rend.  155  (1912),  1239;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  497;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
1657. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


371 


1912:  34.  H.  C.  P.  Weber.  The  atomic  weight  of  bromine.  (Use 
of  potassium  bromoplatinate  to  purify  bromine.)  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1912),  1294;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  233; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  433. 

1912:  35.  F.  Schulz.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Platins.  Dis- 
sertation, Erlangen,  1912.  Pt. 

1912:  36.  O.  L.  Shinn.  The  atomic  weight  of  palladium.  (Pd  = 
106.709  ± 0.016.)  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1912),  1448;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  350; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  1178;  Chem.Zentr.  1913, i,  227;  C.A.  7 
(1913),  433. 

1912:  37.  F.  Holzmann.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Iridiums. 
Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1912.  (Ir  = 193.41.)  Ir. 

Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soz.  Erlangen,  44  (1912),  84. 

1912:  38.  F.  Seybold.  Ueber  das  Atomgewicht  des  Osmiums. 
Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1912.  Os. 

1912:  39.  K.  A.  Hofmann.  Sauers  toff  iibertragung  durch  Osmium- 
tetroxyd  und  Aktivierung  von  Chloratlosungen.  Os. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  3329;  Analyst,  38  (1913),  78;  Chem.  News,  107  (1913),  96; 
Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  35  (1914),  189;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  62;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  227;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  999. 

1912:  40.  K.  A.  Hofmann.  Verfahren  zur  Aktivierung  von 
Chloratlosungen  durch  Osmium.  (German  patent  267906, 
Nov.  20,  1912;  British  patent  20593,  Sept.  11,  1913.)  Os. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  199;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  999;  9 (1915),  697. 

1912:  41.  F.  Rosenthal.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  der  Osmiumsaure 
auf  den  Receptorenapparat  der  Erythrocyten.  Os. 

Biochem.  Z.  46  (1912),  225;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1396;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  180;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  380. 

1912:  42.  M.  Boll  and  P.  Job.  Cinetique  photochimique  des 
acides  chloroplatiniques  en  solution  tres  etendue.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  154  (1912),  881;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  2038;  C.A.  7(1913), 
1133. 

1912:  43.  P.  Job  and  M Boll.  HydrolysB  photochimique  des 
solutions  tres  eteiuL  d’acides  cliloroplatiniques.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  155  (1912),  826;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  252;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  ii,  2038;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1134. 

1912:  44.  P.  S.  Pistschimuka.  (Transformation  of  thio-  and 
selenophosphoric  esters.)  (Chloroplatinates.)  (Cf.  1911:  31.) 

Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1912),  1406;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913), 
405. 


372 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912:45.  A.  Gutbier  and  M.  Blumer.  Ueber  Platinebromid.  Pt. 

Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soz.  Erlangen,  44  (1912),  108;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2913. 

1912:  46.  L.  yon  Muller.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Platinmetalle. 
(Bromoplatinates.)  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1912.  Pt. 

1912:  47.  E.  H.  Archibald  and  W.  A.  Patrick.  Electrical  con- 
ductivity of  solutions  of  platinum  tetraiodide  and  of  iodine  in 
alcohol.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1912),  369;  ' ul.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1317:  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  102;  ii  (1912),  423;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  98;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
1563. 

1912:  48.  A.  Duffour.  Isomorphisme  des  chlorosels  alcalins  de 
riridium  et  du  rhodium.  Ir,  Rh. 

Compt.  rend.  155  (1912),  222;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  135;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  849;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912, ii,  1264;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  739. 

1912:  49.  I.  Bellucci.  (Some  considerations  on  Werner’s  theory.) 
(Examples  of  the  two  chlororuthenites.)  Ru. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  42,  ii  (1912),  532;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14(1913),  299; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  1456. 

1912:  50.  L.  A.  Levy.  Studies  on  platinocyanides.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1912),  91;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  101(1912),  1081;  Chem. 
News,  105  (1912),  223;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1479;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  ii,  1107;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2719. 

1912:  51.  N.  Orlow.  Ueber  die  Darstellung  und  einige  Eigen- 
schaften  des  Scandiumplatincyanurs.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  36  (1912)  1407;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  686;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  743. 

1912:  52.  A.  Werner.  Ueber  Spiegelbildisomerie  bei  Rhodium- 
verbindungen.  (Rhodium  bases.)  Rh. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  1228;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1264;  Chem.  News,  105 
(1912),  312;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  i (1912),  418;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i, 
1885;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2369. 

1912:  53.  H.  Ley  and  K.  Ficken.  Ueber  innere  Komplexsalze  des 
Platins  und  Chroms.  (Mit  a-Aminosauren.)  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  377;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1124;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
102,  i (1912),  243;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  895;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2071. 

1912:  54.  L.  Ramberg  and  S.  Kallenberg.  Ueber  einige  Salze 
der  Tetrasulfaminoplatosaure.  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  1512;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1326;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
102,  ii  (1912),  651;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  232;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2723. 

1912:  55.  J.  Tschugaeff  and  B.  Orelkine.  Sur  quelques  com- 
poses complexes  du  chlorure  platineux  avec  l’amino-acetal.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  155  (1912),  1021;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  252;  Chem. 
News,  107  (1913),  11:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  23;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1913,  i,  95;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  768. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


373 


1912:  56.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  D.  Fraenkel.  Sur  quelques 
composes  complexes  du  bromure  platineux  et  des  sulfures 
organiques.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  154  (1912),  33;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  IT  (1912),  819;  Chem. 
News,  105  (1912),  96;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  i (1912),  70;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1912,  i,  643;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  860. 

1912:  57.  H.  O.  Jones  and  C.  S.  Robinson.  Nickelo-  and  palladio- 
dithio-oxalic  acids.  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1912),  129:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  101  (1912),  932;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  ii,  493;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2598. 

1912:  58.  H.  O.  Jones  and  C.  S.  Robinson.  Dithiomalonates.  Pd. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  28  (1912),  129;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  101  (1912),  935;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1445;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  493;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
2598. 

1912:  59.  A.  Sieverts  and  E.  Jurisch.  Platin,  Rhodium  und 
Wasserstoff.  Pt,  Rh. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  221;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1212),  1097;  Chem.  News, 
105  (1912),  180;  J.  Inst,  Metals,  7 (1912),  284;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii 
(1912),  263;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  710;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1262. 

1912:  60.  R.  Willstatter  and  D.  Hatt.  Hydrierung  aromati- 
scher  Yerbindungen  mit  Platin  und  Wasserstoff.  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  1471;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1335;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
2613. 

1912:  61.  A.  Schwarz.  Ueber  die  katalytische  Hydrogenisation 
ungesattigter  Verbindungen  durch  kolloidales  Platin  und 
uber  den  Einfluss  antikatalytischer  Stoffe  auf  den  Hydro- 
genisationsprozess.  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1912.  Pt. 

1912:  62.  A.  Skita.  Hydricrungen  mit  Platinmetallen  als  Kataly- 
sator.  Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  3312;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  375;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1913,  i,  396;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1187. 

1912:  63.  A.  Skita  and  W.  A.  Meyer.  Ueber  die  Herstellung  und 
Anwendung  kolloider  Platinmetalle.  Katalytische  Hydrier- 
ung ungesattigter  Stoffe.  Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  3579;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  53;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i, 
397;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2557. 

1912:  64.  A.  Skita  and  W.  A.  Meyer.  Ueber  die  Hydrierung  von 
Aldehyden  und  Ketonen  sowie  von  aromatischen  und  hetero- 
cyclischen  Stoffen  in  kolloiden  Losungen.  Pd,  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  3589;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  503;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

104,  i (1913),  54;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  398;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2558. 


374 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912:  65.  Vereinigte  Chinixfabriken  Zimmer  & Co.  Verfahren 
zur  Hydrierung  organischer  Verbindungen  (durch  Platin- 
metalle).  (German  patent  267306,  May  10,  1912;  British 
patent  10204,  Apr.  30,  1913;  French  patent  458963,  May  7, 
1913.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir,  Eh,  Os,  Ku. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  88;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2220. 

1912:  66.  N.  D.  Zelinsky.  (Hvdrogenization  and  dehydrogeniza- 
tion.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1912),  274;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912), 
1067. 

1912:  67.  N.  D.  Zelinsky  and  A.  M.  Herzenstein.  Ueber  die 
selektive  Dehydrogenisations-katalyse.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  3678;  J.  Russ.  Pliys.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1912),  275;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1067;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2224. 

1912:  68.  W.  A.  Meyer.  Ueber  katalytische  Hydrierungen  organ- 
ischer Verbindungen  mit  kolloidem  Palladium  und  Plat  in. 

Dissertation,  Karlsruhe,  1912.  Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  69.  G.  Bruxjes.  Katalytische  Reduktionen  von  Metallhy- 
droxyden  mittels  Palladiumwasserstoffhydrosols.  Disserta- 
tion, Erlangen,  1911.  Pd. 

1912:  70.  H.  Wielaxd.  Ueber  Hydrierung  und  Dehydrierung. 
(Includes  preparation  of  oxygen-free  palladium  black.)  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  484;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  (4)  12  (1912),  928;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1912,  i,  993;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1296. 

1912:  71.  Naamlooze  Yenxootschap  “Ant.  Jurgens’  Yereex- 
igde  Fabriekex.”  Verfahren  zur  Reduktion  organischer 
Verbindungen  mit  Wasserstoff  in  Gegenwart  von  Palladium. 
(German  patent  272340,  Mar.  26,  1912.)  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  278;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1385;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  2604. 

1912:  72.  V.  N.  Ipatief.  Katalyisclie  Reduktionen  bei  hohen 
Temperaturen  und  Drucken.  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  3218;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1912),  1002;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1569;  14  (1913),  253. 

1912:  73.  W.  Borsche.  Ueber  die  Reduktion  mehrfach  ungesattig- 
ter  Ketone  mit  gekreuzten  Doppelbindungen  nach  der  Methode 
von  Paal.  Ueber  die  Reduktion  einiger  mehrfach  ungesattig- 
ter  Sauren  nach  der  Methode  von  Paal.  (Reduction  by  palla- 
dium.) Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  46,  620;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4].  12  (1912),  939;  C.  A.  6(1912), 
870. 

1912:  74.  C.  Paal.  Ueber  die  stufenweise  katalytische  Hydrogeni- 
sation  mehrfach  ungesattigter  Verbindungen.  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  2221;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2929. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  G^OUP. 


375 


1912:  75.  A.  Kotz  and  E.  Schaeffer.  Reduktion  von  Oxymeth- 
ylen-Verbindungen  (durch  Palladium).  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  1952;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2757. 

1912:  76.  L.  C.  Kelber  and  A.  Schwarz.  Ueber  kolloidales  Palla- 
dium. Partielle  und  totale  Hydrogenisation  von  Phenyl- 
acetylen,  Tolan  und  Diphenyl-diacetylen.  Ueber  Hydrogeni- 
zation  mit  kolloidalem  Palladium.  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  1946;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  1442;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[4],  12  (1912),  1487;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  i (1912),  617;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912, 
ii,  598;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2757. 

1912:  77.  N.  D.  Zelinsky  and  N.  Uklonskaja.  Ueber  die  Dehy- 
drogenisations-katalyse  der  Hexahydro-benzoesaure.  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  3677;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2224. 

1912:  78.  A.  Wohl  and  B.  Mylo.  Ueber  den  Weinsauredialdehyd. 
(Reduction  by  colloidal  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  322;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  793;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1007. 

1912:  79.  F.  P.  Dewey.  The  direct  determination  of  small 
amounts  of  platinum  in  ores  and  bullion.  Pt. 

Bui.  Am.  Inst.  Mining  Eng.  1912,  439;  Mining  Sci.  65  (1912),  274;  Min- 
ing Sc i.  Press,  105  (1912),  87;  109  (1914),  20;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  4 
(1912),  257;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  2325;  Chem.  News,  106  (1912), 
8;  Analyst,  37  (1912),  281;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  8 (1912),  323;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
102,  ii  (1912),  810;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  384;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1580. 

1912:  80.  The  determination  of  platinum.  (Criticism  of 

1912:  79.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912),  515. 

1912:  81.  R.  Gaze.  Bemerkungen  zur  quantitativen  Bestimmung 
des  Platins  durch  Abscheidung  als  Sulfid.  (Addition  of 
HgCl2;  also  method  of  analysis  of  barium  platocyanide.)  Pt. 

Apoth.  Ztg.  Berlin,  27  (1912),  959;  Analyst,  38  (1913),  173;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),  440;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  464;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  577. 

1912:  82.  Trenkner.  Die  quantitative  Bestimmung  der  Edcl- 
metalle,  Gold,  Silber,  Platin.  Pt. 

Metallurgie,  9 (1912),  103;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  1449;  Eng.  Minin 
J.  93  (1912),  1280;  Met.  Chem.  Eng.  11  (1913),  567;  J.  Inst.  Metals, 
(1912),  292;  Analyst,  37  (1912),  281;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  392; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  1251;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1115. 

1912:  83.  A.  S.  Dart.  Assay  of  ores  containing  the  platinum 
group  of  metals.  Pt,  Pd. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  10  (1912),  219;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  8 (1912),  323;  C.  A.  6 
(1912),  1723. 


be  t>- 


376  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1912:  84.  E.  V.  Koukline.  (Some  notes  on  the  analysis  of  plati- 
num minerals.)  (Full  scheme  of  analysis.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rli,  Os,  Ru. 

Rev.  metal.  9 (1912),  817;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  31  (1912),  1036;  Eng. 
Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1234;  0.  A.  7 (1913),  1154. 

1912 : 85.  H.  Arnold.  Ueber  eine  Methode  zur  Analyse  von  Platin- 
legierungen.  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  51  (1912),  550;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  26  ii  (1913),  276;  Bui. 
Soc.  ehim.  [4],  14(1913),  158;  Analyst,  37  (1912),  420;  7.  Inst.  Metals, 
8 (1912),  323;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  870;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii, 
754;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2901. 

1912:  86.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  D.  Sturm.  Tetraformal-trisazin 
aus  Formaldehyd  und  Hydrazinhydrat,  ein  neues  Reduktions- 
mittel  fur  die  analytische  Chemie.  (Precipitation  of  platinum 
and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  1725;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2620. 

1912:  87.  L.  Duparc.  Sui*  la  separation  du  palladium  d’avec  le 
cuivre  et  le  fer.  (First  note  on  work  of  Wunder  and  Thuringer 
on  dimethylglyoxim.)  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  phys.  hist.  nat.  Geneve,  29  (1912),  20. 

1912:  88.  M.  Wunder  and  V.  Thuringer.  (Action  of  dimethyl- 
glyoxim on  platinum  salts.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  anal.  17  (1912),  328;  Analyst,  37  (1912),  524;  J.  Soc.  Chem. 
Ind.  31  (1912),  920;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  1102;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1912,  ii,  1751;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  39,  1461. 

1912:  89.  M.  Wunder  and  V.  Thuringer.  (Separation  of  nickel 
and  palladium  by  means  of  dimethylglyoxim.)  Pd. 

Ann.  chim.  anal.  17  (1912),  201;  Z.  angew.- Chem.  26,  ii  (1913),  276; 
Analyst,  37  (1912),  379;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  31  (1912),  663;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  691;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  550;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2585. 

1912:  90.  A.  Atterberg.  Die  Reduktion  des  Kaliumplatinchlorids 
durch  Magnesium.  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  51  (1912),  483;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  ii  (1913),  276;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1628;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2725. 

1912:  91.  A.  Guasco.  Sur  la  construction  d’un  toximetre  a gas 
oxyde  de  carbone.  (Absorption  of  CO  with  disengagement  of 

heat.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  155  (1912),  282;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  256;  C.  A. 
6 (1912),  3209. 

1912:  92.  F.  A.  Goocii  and  W.  L.  Burdick.  Electrolytic  analysis 
with  platinum  electrodes  of  light  weight.  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  34  (1912),  107;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  78  (1912),  213;  Eng.  Mining 
J.  94  (1912),  461;  Analyst,  38  (1913),  43;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  952; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  312. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


377 


1912:  93.  O.  Brunck.  Die  Bestimmung  kleiner  Mengen  von  Koh- 
lenoxyd.  (By  reduction  of  PdCl2.)  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  25  (1912),  2479;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  128;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
747. 

1912:  94.  A.  W.  Knapp.  Decomposition  of  water  at  ordinary  tem- 
perature by  magnesium.  (Accelerated  by  palladium  chloride.) 

Pd. 

Chem.  News,  105  (1912),  253;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1418;  C.  A. 
6 (1912),  2370. 

1912:  95.  W.  N.  Iwanow.  Eine  neue  Methode  der  qualitativen 
Bestimmung  der  Salpetersaure  bei  Gegenwart  von  salpetriger 
Saure.  (Blue  with  iridium.)  Ir. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1912),  1772;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14(1913), 
588;  Chem.  Ztg.  37  (1913),  157;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  844;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
951,  2024. 

1912:  96.  W.  Peters.  Die  Gultigkeit  der  Wernerschen  Theorien 
der  Nebenvalenz  fur  das  Gebiet  der  Ammoniakate. 

Pt,  Rh,  Ru,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  77  (1912),  137;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  175;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  ii,  2022;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  3376. 

1912:  97.  L.  Bitter.  Ueber  das  Absterben  von  Bakterien  auf  den 
wichtigeren  Metallen  und  Baumaterialien.  Pt. 

Z.  Hyg.  69  (1912),  483;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  1391;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  239. 

1912:  98.  E.  Billows.  (Crystallography  of  platinum  thiocyanate.) 

Pt. 

Rivista  min.  crist.  ital.  36,  49;  Z.  Kryst.  Min.  50  (1912),  509;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  102,  i (1912),  422;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  810. 

1912:  99.  E.  Billows.  (Crystallography  of  platinum  selenocyan- 
ate.)  Pt. 

Rivista  min.  crist.  ital.  39,  21;  Z.  Kryst.  Min.  50  (1912),  494;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  102,  i (1912),  422;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  810. 

1912:  100.  J.  Beuel.  Ueber  die  Fluorescenz  der  Platindoppel- 
salze.  (Platocyanides.)  Pt. 

Z.  wiss.  Phot.  11  (1912),  150;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  615;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  ii,  417;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2878;  8 (1914),  613. 

1912:  101.  F.  A.  and  C.  L.  Lindemann.  Bemerkung  liber  die 
Zugfestigkeit  von  Stoffen  bei  tiefen  Temperaturen.  Pt. 

Nernst-Festschrift,  264;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  984;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  585. 

1912:  102. A small  “ Hellberger ” electric  furnace  for 

melting  platinum.  Pt. 

Brass  World,  8 (1912),  273;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  574. 


378 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912:  103.  Sir  W.  Crookes.  The  volatility  of  metals  of  the  plati- 
num group.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  86  A (1912),  461;  Chem.  News,  105  (1912),  229, 
241;  Sci.  Amer.  Suppl.  74  (1912),  92;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  232;  C.  A.  6 
(1912),  2895;  7 (1913),  565. 

1912:  104.  F.  Rother.  Ueber  die  Kathodenzerstaubung  und  die 
Wasserstoffabsorption  des  Iridiums.  Ir. 

Ber.  Kgl.  sachs.  Ges.  Wlss.  64  (1912),  5;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102, ii  (1912), 
1179;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  1694;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2009. 

1912:  105.  C.  Gladitz.  Die  for  production  of  bars  from  finely 
divided  metallic  tungsten,  platinum,  etc.  (British  patent 
12244,  May  23,  1912.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  7 (1913),  3719. 

1912:  106.  J.  Johnston.  Fine  Beziehung  der  elastischen  Eigen- 
schaften  der  Metalle  zu  einigen  ihrer  physikalischen  Kon- 
stanten.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  76  (1912),  361;  J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1912),  78S;  J, 
Wash.  Acad.  Sc.  1 (1912),  260;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  153S; 
C.  A.  6 (1912),  560,  1873. 

1912:  107.  I.  S.  Joukof.  (Absorption  of  hydrogen  by  palladium.) 

Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Pliys.  Chem.  Soc.  44  (1912),  1004;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912), 
1540. 

1912:  108.  A.  Sieverts  and  E.  Bergner.  Versuche  fiber  die 
Loslichkeit  von  Argon  und  Helium  in  festen  und  flfissigen 
Metallen.  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  2576;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  1424;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2142. 

1912.  109.  O.  Loew.  Ueber  die  Assimilation  von  Nitraten  in 
Pflanzenzellen.  (Influence  of  platinum  sponge.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  1912,  Nr.  7;  Biochem.  Z.  41  (1912),  224;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2449. 

1912:  110.  O.  Baudisch.  Ueber  Nitrat-  und  Nitrit-Assimilation. 
Eine  Erwiderung  an  Herrn  Oskar  Loew  (1912:  109).  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  2879;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2448. 

1912:  111.  A.  V.  Kroll.  Ueber  Ultraphosphate.  (Platinum  ul- 
traphosphate, p.  394.)  Ft. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  76  (1912),  387;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  685;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
311. 

1912:  112.  H.  Wieland.  Zur  Verbrennung  des  Kohlenoxyds. 
(Influence  of  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  679;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4J,  12  (1912),  1125;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1912,  i,  1177;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1409. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


379 


1912:  113.  H.  Wieland.  Ueber  die  katalytische  Umwandlung  von 
Schwefeldioxyd  in  Schwefelsaure.  (Influence  of  palladium.) 

Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  685;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1114;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1912,  i,  1177;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1410. 

1912:  114.  H.  Wieland.  Studien  fiber  den  Mechanismus  der 
Oxydationsvorgange.  Einige  Bemerkungen  fiber  die  Hydrier- 
ung  aromatischer  Verbindungen.  (Mechanism  of  oxidation 
by  palladium.)  Pd. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  2606,  2615;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  179;  C.  A.  7 

(1913),  346. 

1912:  115.  A.  Sieyerts  and  F.  Loessner.  Die  katalytische 
Oxydation  wasseriger  Hypophosphitlosungen.  (Influence  of 
palladium.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  76  (1912)  1;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12(1912),  1420;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1912,  ii,  580;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2718. 

1912:  116.  J.  Thiroloix  and  A.  Langden.  (Colloidal  rhodium 
solution.)  Rh. 

L’ Union  pharm.  53  (1912),  69;  Pharm.  J.  89  (1912),  74;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2672. 

1912:  117.  Zentr alstelle  fur  wissenschaftlich-technisciie 
Untersuchungen.  Verfahren  zur  Darstellung  von  Ammo- 
niak  aus  den  Elementen  unter  Bcnutzung  eines  Katalysa- 
tors.  (Ruthenium  as  catalyst.)  (German  patent  252997, 
May  1,  1912;  British  patent  14585,  June  21,  1912.)  Ru. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  1755;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  541,  4050. 

1912:  117a.  Badische  Anilin  und  Soda  Fabrik.  (Employment 
of  osmium  and  ruthenium  or  their  compounds  for  catalytic 
purposes.)  (German  patent  292242,  Dec.  22,  1912.)  Os,  Ru. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1022. 

1912:  118.  A.  Partzsch  and  W.  IIallwachs.  Ueber  das  Reflex- 
ionsvermogen  dfinner  Metallschichten,  sowie  longitudinale 
Wirkung  und  Eindringungstiefe  bei  der  Lichtelektrizitat. 
(Platinum  films.)  Pt. 

Ber.  Kgl.  sachs.  Ges.  Wiss.  64  (1912),  147;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  877;  C.  A. 

7 (1913),  3448. 

1912:  119.  W.  W.  Coblentz.  The  diffusive  reflecting  power  of 
various  substances.  (Platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  9 (1912),  283;  J.  Frank.  Inst.  174  (1912),  549; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  372;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3072. 

1912:  120.  W.  A.  Harwood  and  J.  E.  Petavel.  Experimental 
work  on  a new  standard  of  light.  (Light  from  a platinum 
strip.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  86  A (1912),  409;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  85; 

C.  A.  6 (1912),  3038. 


380 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912:  121.  W.  N.  Hartley  and  H.  W.  Moss.  On  the  ultimate  lines, 
and  the  quantities  of  the  elements  producing  these  lines,  in 
spectra  of  the  oxyhydrogen  flame  and  spark.  Pt,  Ir. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  87  A (1912),  38;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  1080; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  303. 

1912:  122.  P.  E.  Dhein.  Messungen  am  Funkenspektrum  dos 
Palladiums.  Pd. 

Z.  wiss.  Phot.  11  (1912),  317;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  1114;  Cliem. 
Zentr.  1912,  ii,  1897;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2510. 

1912:  123.  O.  Luttig.  Das  Zeemanphanomen  von  . . . Palladium 
. . . im  sichtbaren  Spektrum.  Pd. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  38  (1912),  43;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  94;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
2352. 

1912:  124.  R.  Ruer  and  E.  Scharff.  Ueber  die  Lichtempfind- 
lichkeit  einer  anodisch  beladenen  Platinelektrode.  Pt. 

Nernst-Festschrift,  1912,  395;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  1087;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
2717. 

1912:  125.  O.  W.  Richardson  and  K.  T.  Compton.  The  photo- 
electric effect.  (On  platinum.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  24  (1912),  575;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  137;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
2029. 

1912:  126.  S.  Werner.  (The  photoelectric  effect  with  platinum 
films  deposited  by  cathode  rays.)  Pt. 

Arkiv.Math.  Astron.  Fysik,  8 (1912),  Nr.  27;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2153. 

1912:  127.  J.  C.  Chapman.  Fluorescent  Rontgen  radiation  from 
elements  of  high  atomic  weight.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  86  A (1912),  439;  C,  A.  7 (1913),  301. 

1912:  128.  K.  Honda.  Die  thermomagnetischen  Eigenschaften 
der  Elemente.  (Cf.  1910:  81.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Sci.  Rep.  Tohoku  Imp.  Univ.  1 (1912),  1. 

1912:  129.  M.  Owen.  Magnetochemische  Untersuchungen.  Die 
thermomagnetischen  Eigenschaften  der  Elemente.  II. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  37  (1912),  657;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  1956;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
1398. 

1912:  130.  II.  Alterthum.  Ueber  den  Plall-effekt  in  Metallen  bei 
tiefen  Temperaturen.  (Effect  of  magnetic  field  on  conduc- 
tivity.) Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  39  (1912),  933;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  370;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
3913. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


381 


1912:  131.  L.  Weissman.  Ueber  die  Abgabe  von  elektrischgela- 
denen  Teilchen  durch  einen  gliihenden  Platindraht  wahrend 
der  Katalyse  von  Knallgas.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  79  (1912),  257;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  12  (1912),  1105; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  412;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  1683;  C.  A.  6 
(1912),  1568. 

1912:  132.  C.  Grieb.  Ueber  die  Abgabe  von  elektrischgeladenen 
Teilchen  durch  einen  gliihenden  Platindraht  wahrend  der 
Katalyse  des  Wasserstoff-  und  Kohlenoxydknallgas.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  79  (1912),  377;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  413;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  i,  1684;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1568. 

1912:  133.  J.  C.  Pomeroy.  The  charges  on  thermions  produced  in 
air  and  hydrogen  at  atmospheric  pressure.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  23  (1912),  173;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  971;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  709. 

1912:  134.  J.  Clay.  (The  influence  of  electric  waves  upon  plati- 
num mirrors.)  (Coherer  action.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Acad.  Wetenschappen,  14  (1912),  126;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2343. 

1912:  135.  F.  W.  Aston.  On  the  influence  of  the  nature  of  the 
cathode  on  the  length  of  the  Crookes  dark  space.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  87  A (1912),  437;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912, ii,  2012; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  3900. 

1912:  136.  H.  T.  Barnes.  The  so-called  thermoid  effect  and  the 
question  of  superheating  of  a platinum-silver  resistance  used 
in  continuous-flow  calorimetry.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  86  A (1912),  330;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  298. 

1912:  137.  B.  Kremann  and  F.  Noss.  Zur  Theorie  des  Skinner- 
Caseschen  elektrolytischen  Thermoelements  Sn/CrCl3/Pt,  und 
uber  andere  Elemente  von  analogen  Typus.  Pt. 

Nernst-Festschrift,  1912,  234;  Sitzb.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  121,  Abt. 
II  b (1912),  1041;  Monatsh.  34  (1913),  7;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913), 
605;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  796;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1320. 

1912:  138.  H.  A.  Bumstead  and  A.  G.  McGougan.  On  the  emis- 
sion of  electrons  by  metals  under  the  influence  of  alpha 
rays.  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  34  (1912),  309;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  ii,  1802;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  21. 

1912:  139.  W.  Friedrich.  (Space  distribution  of  intensity  of 
X-rays  proceeding  from  a platinum  anticathode.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  39  (1912),  377;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  447. 

1912:  140.  L.  P.  Sieg.  Notes  on  the  elastic  peculiarities  of  plati- 
num iridium  wires.  Pt,  Ir. 

Physic.  Rev.  35  (1912),  347;  C.  A.  7 (191 3) , 1864. 


382 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912:  141.  Chouriguixe  (Schubigin).  Sur  les  alliages  du  platine 
avec  T aluminium.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  155  (1912),  156;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  127;  Rev. 
metal.  9 (1912),  874;  Chem.  News,  106  (1912),  108;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  8 
(1912),  323;  9 (1913),  213;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  849;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1912,  ii  702;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  3081. 

1912:  142.  W.  Sander.  Ueber  die  Legierungen  des  Palladiums 
mit  Antimon.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  75  (1912),  97;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4]  12  (1912),  1433;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  102,  ii  (1912),  651;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912, ii,  233;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 
2056. 

1912:  143.  Note  on  iridium  steel.  (Criticism  of  advertise- 

ment of  Becker  Steel  Works  in  Kolnische  Zeitung,  advocating 
iridium  for  high-speed  steels.)  Ir. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1157. 

1912:  144.  W.  Burton.  Note  on  the  earliest  industrial  use  of 
platinum.  (Used  as  early  as  1790  for  producing  thin  films  on 
pottery.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Manchester  Lit.  Phil.  Soc.  56  (1912),  27;  Eng.  Mining  J.  93  (1912), 
790. 

1912:  145.  Standard  for  commercial  platinum.  (Editorial 

criticism  of  report  of  committee  of  National  Jewelers’  Board  of 
Trade,  advocating  0.950  fine,  of  which  65  per  cent  platinum 
and  less  than  30  per  cent  other  metals  of  platinum  group; 
from  Keystone,  Oct.,  1912.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1038. 

1912:  146.  Platinum  and  its  uses.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  599. 

1912:  147.  A.  Jabs.  Ueber  das  Reinigen  von  mit  Kohlenasche 
angesetzten  Platinschalen.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  36  (1912),  422;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  51  (1912),  663;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1912,  i,  1649;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2048. 

1912:  148.  G.  K.  Burgess  and  H.  LeChatelier.  The  measure- 
ment of  temperatures,  3d  ed.  Wiley  & Sons,  New  York,  1912. 
(Platinum  thermometers.)  Die  Messung  hoher  Temperaturen, 
uebersetzt  von  G.  Leithauser,  von  3 ter  Ausg.  J.  Springer, 
Berlin.  Pt,  Rli. 

1912:  149.  G.  Moeller,  F.  Hoffmann,  and  W.  Meissner.  Yer- 
gleichungen  von  Quecksilberthermometern  mit  dem  Pla tin- 
thermometer.  Pt. 

Z.  Instrumentenk.  32  (1912),  217. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


383 


1912 : 150.  F.  E.  Smith.  On  bridge  methods  for  resistance  measure- 
ments of  high  precision  in  platinum  thermometry.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  24  (1912),  541;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  13. 

i912:  151.  G.  Berlemont.  Sur  un  procede  de  soudure  du  platine 
au  quartz.  Pt,  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  154  (1912),  1217;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  11  (1912),  71G;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1912,  ii,  19;  C.  A.  6 (1912),  2702. 

1912:  152.  I.  Langmuir.  A chemically  active  modification  of  hydro- 
gen. (Use  of  platinum  and  palladium  filaments.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  34  (1912),  1310;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  232; 

0.  A.  7 (1913),  723. 

1912:  153.  Le  R.  W.  McCay.  The  action  of  boiling  sulphuric  acid 
on  platinum.  Pt. 

8th  Int.  Cong.  Appl.  Chem.  1 (1912),  351;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  52  (1913),  576; 

Analyst,  37(1912),  590;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  713;  C.  A.  6 (1912), 

3242. 

1912:  154.  — Solubility  of  platinum  in  boiling  sulphuric  acid. 

Brass  World,  Nov.  1912;  Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1185.  Pt. 

1912:  155.  Siemens  & Halske.  Tantalum-platinum  ware.  (Tan- 
talum plated  with  platinum.)  (British  patent  23050.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  96  (1913),  696. 

1912.  156  B.  E.  Eldred.  Uniting  platinum  and  nickel  by  auto- 
genous soldering.  (U.  S.  patent  1043576,  Nov.  5*  1912.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1083;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  61. 

1912:  157.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Making  composite  welded  ingots  of 
platinum  and  a ferrous  metal.  (U.  S.  patent  1043577,  Nov. 
5,  1912.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1083;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  62. 

1912:  158.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Welding  platinum  to  other  metals. 
(U.  S.  patent  1043578,  Nov.  5,  1912.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1083;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  62. 

1912:  159.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Chemical  crucible  having  a core  layer 
of  ferrous  metal  and  surface  layers  of  platinum.  (LT.  S.  patent 
1043579,  Nov.  5,  1912.)  Pt, 

Eng.  Mining  J.  94  (1912),  1083;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  4. 

1912:  159a.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Pan  for  evaporating  corrosive  liquids. 
(U.  S.  patent  1043581,  Nov.  5,  1913.) 

C.  A.  7 (1913),  4. 

1912:  160.  A.  and  L.  Lumiere  and  A.  Seyewetz.  Comparison  of 
the  acids  used  in  the  platinum  toning  bath.  Pt. 

Brit.  J.  Phot.  59  (1912),  992;  Rev.  gen.  chim.  16  (1913),  302;  Z.  angew. 

Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  477;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  942. 


384 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1912:  161.  E.  Wedekind.  Ueber  die  Verwendung  von  Magnesia- 
stabchen  an  Stelle  von  Platindrahten  bei  analytischen  Xrbei- 
ten.  Pt. 

Ber.  45  (1912),  382:  Chem.  News,  105  (1912),  204;  Analyst,  37  (1912); 
222;  Chem.  Zentr.  1912,  i,  944:  C.  A.  6 (1912),  1413. 

1912:  162.  H.  S.  Shrewsbury.  Note  on  a counterfeit  gold  coin. 
(20-shilling  piece  of  1861,  platinum  plated  with  gold.  Ut- 
tered in  Trinidad.)  Pt. 

Analyst,  37  (1912),  7:  Chem.  Zentr.  1912.  i,  711. 

1913:  a. Platinum.  (Occurrence  and  production.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  106  (1913),  13. 

1913:  1.  W.  Wunder  and  V.  Thuringer.  Reponse  a Particle  de 
M.  le  Dr.  C.  Holtz:  <;sur  quelques  anomalies  observees  dans 
1’ analyse  des  minerals  de  platine  de  POural.”  (Probably 
impure  rhodium.  Cf.  1912:  1.)  Pt,  X (?). 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  30  (1913),  164:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  883; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1251;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3729. 

1913:  2.  A.  del  Campo  and  S.  Pina  de  Rubies.  (Sur  un  nouvel 
element  du  groupe  du  platine.)  (Spectroscopic  work  on 
Holtz’s  supposed  new  element;  no  new  lines  found,  but  Fe, 
Cu,  and  all  the  platinum  metals  except  Ru  are  present.) 

Pt,  X (?). 

Anales  fls.  quirn.  11  (1913),  562;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  274; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  209;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1266.  (Cf.  also  Ann. 
chim.  phys.  [9],  2 (1914),  59.) 

1913:  3. Russian  platinum  i .dustry.  Pt. 

Metal  Ind.  5 (1913),  211;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  10  (1913),  453. 

1913:  4.  S.  Pina  de  Rubies  and  P.  Coma.  (Platiniferous  dunites.) 

Pt. 

Anales  fis.  quirn.  11  (1913),  334;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1118; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  714. 

1913:  5.  L.  Duparc.  Sur  l’origine  du  platine  contenu  dans  les 
alluvions  de  certains  affluents  lateraux  de  la  Koswa  (Oural 
du  Nord).  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  156  (1913),  411:  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1457;  C.  A.  7(1913), 
2737. 

1913:  5a.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Occurrence  of  platinum  in  the  Urals. 

Mining  J.  1913,  Sept.  20.  Pt. 

1913:  ob.  New  .features  in  Ural  gold  and  platinum  indus- 
try. (New  business  methods.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  106  (1913),  705. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


385 


1913 

1913 

1913 

1913 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913 

1913: 


5c. 


Russian  platinum. 


Pt. 


Mining  Sci.  Press,  107  (1913),  581. 

5d.  J.  P.  Hutchins.  Dredging  by  hand  in  Siberia.  Pt. 
Mining  Sci.  Press,  1913,  Nov.  22. 

5e.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Gold  and  platinum  on  Mongolia.  Pt. 
Mining  J.  1913,  Feb.  1. 

6. Account  of  trip  to  platinum  country  in  Colombia. 

(Quotation  from  letter.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  96  (1913),  273. 

6a.  B.  Sonntag.  Kolombia  als  Platinproduktionsland.  Pt. 
Z.  Ver.  Bohrung  und  Bohrtech.  1913,  Mar.  15. 

6b.  C.  Camsell.  Platinum  in  British  Columbia.  Geology 


and  mineral  deposits  of  the  Tulameen  district. 

Geol.  Survey  of  Canada,  Mem.  26,  1913;  Mining  J.  1914,  523. 

\ 

Platinum  in  British  Columbia. 


7. 


7a. 


7b. 


Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  135. 

F.  Bailey.  Platinum  in  British  Columbia. 
Mining  J.  1913,  Mar.  1. 

— Platinum  in  British  Columbia. 


Pt. 


Pt. 


Pt. 


(Editorial; 

Can. 


criticism  of  A.  G.  French,  1911:  1.) 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  106  (1913),  436. 

8. Platinum  in  British  Columbia.  (Editorial;  dis- 

covery of  new  element  (canadium:  cf.  1911:  1)  not  sub- 
stantiated.) Pt,  Can. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  675. 

1913:  9.  Reported  discovery  of  platinum  from  Crawford 


1913 


Bay,  British  Columbia. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  926. 
10. Platinum  and 


allied  metals  in  the 


Pt. 

United 

Pt. 


States. 

Mines  and  Minerals,  33  (1913),  389;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  9 (1913),  233. 

1913:  11.  P.  R.  Heyl.  Platinum  in  North  Carolina  (Rockingham 
County) . Pt. 

Proc.  Amer.  Phil.  Soc.  52  (1913),  21;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2532. 

1913:  12. Reported  discovery  of  platinum  in  Delaware. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  590.  Pt. 


1913:  13. Australien  als  Platinproduktionsland.  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Ohem.  26,  iii  (1913),  417.  (Cf.  J.  W.  Clark  and  C.  Cutbcll, 
Australian  J.  Sc.  3,  372,  374.) 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 25 


386 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1913:  14.  R.  A.  Farquh  arson.  The  platinum  placers  of  Orepuki, 
New  Zealand.  Pt, 

Trans.  New  Zealand  Inst.  43  (1913),  448;  Z.  Krvst.  Min.  52  (1913),  419; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913;,  714;  C'hem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  899;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  888. 

1913:  14a.  C.  B.  Horwood.  Iridosmine  from  the  New  Rietfontein 
mines.  Ir?  Os. 

Chem.  News,  107  (1913),  230,  244,  253;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  807;  C.  A. 
7 (1913),  2917. 

1913:  15.  W.  H.  Twelyetrees.  Osmiridium  in  Tasmania.  Ir,  Os. 

Eng-.  Mining  J.  96  (1913),  1168. 

1913:  16.  L.  Quenxessex.  Ruthenium  in  Osmiridium.  (Letter.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  192.  Ru,  Il\  Os. 

1913:  17.  L.  Duparc  and  S.  Pina  de  Rubies.  (Separation  de 
chromite  platinifere  dans  les  sables  de  l’Oural.)  Pt. 

Anales  fls.  quim.  11  (1913),  367;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4].  16  (1914),  316;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  867. 

1913:  IS.  — — - — Note  on  prohibition  of  export  of  platinum  from 
Russia  owing  to  export  duty  of  30  per  cent  on  the  crude 


metal.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  96  (1913),  229. 

1913:  19.  — Notes  on  platinum  accumulation  and  new  laws 

in  Russia  affixing  export  duty  of  30  per  cent.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  96  (1913),  240. 

1913:  20.  Platinum  in  1912.  (Editorial.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  79. 

1913:  20a.  D.  T.  Day.  Production  of  platinum  in  1912,  Pt. 

Min.  Resources  of  U.  S.,  1912. 

1913:  21.  — — — Platinum  in  Russia  in  1912.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  151. 

1913:  22.  — New  platinum  operations  in  Colombia.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  976. 

1913:  22a. Imports  of  platinum  from  Colombia,  1907- 

1912.  Pt. 

Mineral  Industry,  1913. 

1913:  23. Production  of  platinum  and  palladium  at  Sud- 
bury, Ontario.  Pt.  Pd. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  135. 

1913:  24.  United  States  foreign  met  id  trade  in  1912.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  598. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


387 


1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 

1913: 


25.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Commercial  aspect  of  iridium  pro- 


duction. Ir. 

Mining  Sci.  67  (1913),  150;  0.  A.  7 (1913),  1404. 

26.  — Platinum  prices  in  1911-1912.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  53. 

27.  Increased  use  and  price  of  iridium.  Ir,  Pd. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  292. 

28.  — Metal  market.  (Weekly  reports  of  prices.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95,  96  (1913).  Pt,  Ir. 

28a.  C.  C.  Schatterbeck.  Condition  of  the  platinum  mar- 
ket. Pt. 

Min.  Sci.  1913,  May. 


29.  — Occurrence,  value  of  production,  extraction,  and 

uses  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Chem.  Eng.  16  (1913),  93;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  54. 

29a.  L.  K.  Hirshberg.  Mining  platinum.  Pt. 

Mex.  Mining  J.  1913,  June. 

29b.  A.  Eilers.  Occurrence  of  some  of  the  rarer  metals  in 
blister  copper.  Pt. 

Min.  Eng.  World,  1913,  Nov.  15;  Bui.  Am.  Inst.  Min.  Eng.  78  (1913), 
999. 

29c.  D.  H.  Stovall.  Method  of  saving  placer  platinum  on 
burlap  tables.  Pt. 

Min.  Eng.  World,  1913,  June  14. 

30.  D.  J.  de  Joug.  Die  Verarbeitung  von  Platinresten.  Pt. 

Chem.  Weekblad,  10  (1913),  833;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  969; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1952;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  635. 


31.  O.  A.  Hillman.  Separating  gold  and  platinum  filings. 

Metal  Ind.  11  (1913),  123;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2029.  Pt. 

32.  C.  Gaus.  Recovering  full  value  from  platinum  scraps 

and  filings.  Pt. 

Metal  Ind.  11  (1913),  211;  0.  A.  7 (1913),  3100. 

33.  E.  Bauer  and  O.  Nagel.  A process  of  extracting  gold, 

silver,  and  platinum.  (Absorption  by  carbon,  etc.)  (British 
patent  16898,  July  23,  1913.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  289. 

34.  Verein  Chemischer  Fabriken  in  Mannheim.  Ver- 

fahren  zur  Trennung  des  Platins  von  Iridium  und  anderen 
Metallen.  (Volatilization  in  stream  of  chlorine  at  585°.)  (Ger- 
man patent  273178,  Mar.  8,  1913.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914;,  62,  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1716;  G.  A.  8 
(1914),  2670. 


388 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1913:  35.  G.  Nikolaus.  (Notes  on  the  working  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Elektrochem.  Z.  20  (1913),  87;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3296. 

1913:  36.  A.  Gutbier.  Zur  Kenntnis  des  Osmiums.  (Preparation 
of  pure  metal  when  contaminated  with  carbon.)  Os. 

Chem.  Ztg.  37  (1913),  857;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  ii  (1913),  632;  J.  Inst. 
Metals,  10  (1913),  400;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  780;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1913,  ii,  752;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3937. 

1913:  37.  F.  W.  Clarke,  T.  E.  Thorpe,  W.  Ostwald,  and  G. 
Urbain.  Report  of  the  International  Committee  on  Atomic 
Weights,  1913.  (Reference  to  work  of  Hoyermami,  1910:  9.) 

Ir. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (1913),  227;  Ber.  46  (1913),  1;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  79 
(1913),  277;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  313;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  7. 

1913:  38.  F.  W.  Clarke,  T.  E.  Thorpe,  W.  Ostwald,  and  G. 
Urbain.  Report  of  the  International  Committee  on  Atomic 
Weights,  1914.  (Reference  to  Vogt  on  ruthenium  (1911:  29) 
and  to  Shinn  on  palladium  (1912:  36).)  Ru,  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (1913),  1807;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  84  (1913),  275;  Ber. 
47  (1914),  8;  Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1914),  216;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  105  (1914), 
2577;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1362. 

1913:  39.  A.  Gutbier  and  F.  Heinrich.  Ueber  die  wasserfreien 
Platinhalogenide,  PtCl4  und  PtBr4.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  81  (1913),  378;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1072;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104.  ii  (1913),  607;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  129;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
2913. 

1913:  40.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  Rausch.  Ueber  Hexabromoplatine- 
ate.  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  88  (1913),  409;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  19;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  1157;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1952;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  876. 

1913:  41.  N.  Dhar.  Untersuchungen  iiber  Doppelsalze  und  Kom- 
plexsalze.  (Conductivity;  Magnus’s  salt.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  80  (19131,  43;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  319;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  1749;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2168. 

1913:  42.  N.  Dhar  and  D.  N.  Bhattacharyya.  Leitvermogen 
verdiinnter  Losungen  einiger  Natriumsalze  in  Aethylalkohol. 
(Na2PtCl6.)  Pt, 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  82  (1913),  357;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1326;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  913;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3886. 

1913:  43.  M.  Boll.  Relation  entre  la  vitesse  d’une  reaction 
photochimique  et  l’energie  rayonnante  incidente.  (Reaction 
on  H2PtCl6.)  ^ Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  156  (1913),  138;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  503;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  104,  ii (1913),  171;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  770;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1324. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


389 


1913:  44.  R.  L.  Datta.  Double  platinum  and  cupric  iodides  of 
substituted  ammonium  bases.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1913),  79;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  103  (1913),  426;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  810;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  2021;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2362. 

1913:  45.  R.  L.  Datta.  Xodoplatinates  of  substituted  ammonium 
and  sulphonium  bases.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (1913),  1185;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14(1913),  1497; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  1047;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1377;  C.  A.  7 
■ (1913),  3510. 

1913:  46.  L.  Wohler  and  S.  Streicher.  Ueber  die  wasserfreien 
Chloride  von  vier  Valenzstufen  des  Iridiums.  Ir. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1577;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1009;  Chem.  News, 
108  (1913),  24;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  608;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii, 
129;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2727. 

1913:  47.  L.  Wohler  and  M.  Grunzweig.  Zur  Tensionsbestim- 
mung  von  Chlor  und  Schwefeltrioxyd  bei  Chloriden  und  Sul- 
faten.  (Iridium  chlorides.)  Ir. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1587;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  562;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2727. 

1913:  48.  L.  Wohler  and  S.  Streicher.  Ueber  das  Bestandig- 
keitsgebiet  von  vier  wasserfreien  Platinchloriden,  iiber  die 
Fliichtigkeit  des  Met  alls  im  Chlorgas  und  die  Darstellung 
sauerstofffreien  Chlors.  Pt,  Ir. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1591;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1008;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),  607;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  131;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2727. 

1913:  49.  L.  Wohler  and  S.  Streicher.  Ueber  reine  Valenzen 
des  Iridiums  und  Platins.  (Read  before  Verein  deutschcr 
Chemiker.)  Ir,  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  iii  (1913),  152. 

1913:  50.  L.  Wohler  and  S.  Streicher.  Ueber  Messung  relativer 
Oberflachenenergie  am  Iridiumtrichlorid.  Ir. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1720;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1409;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),  609;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  230;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3056. 

1913:  51.  O.  Y.  Fraenkel.  Ueber  einige  neue  Verbindungen  des 
Iridiums  und  Rhodiums.  (Hexachlorosalts  of  aliphatic  bases.) 

Ir,  Rh. 

Sitzb.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  122  II  b (1913),  1377;  Monatsh.  35  (1914), 
119;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  532;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1549: 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  1712. 

1913:  52.  A.  Gutbier.  Ueber  die  Alkali-hexabromo-osmeate.  Os. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  2098;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1253;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),,  713;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1127;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3280. 

1913:  53.  O.  Ruff.  Ueber  die  Fluoride  der  Edelmctalle. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  920;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1008;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),  416;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1860;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2358. 


390 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1013:  54.  O.  Ruff  and  F.  W.  Tschirch.  Ueber  die  Fluoride  des 
Osmiums.  Os. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  929;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1010;  J.  Ciiom.  Sj:-. 
104,  ii  (1913),  416;  Ckem.  News,  107  (1913;,  303;  Ckem.  Zontr.  1913,  i. 
1861;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2358. 

1913:  55.  G.  Scagliarixi  and  G.  B.  Rossi.  Su  aleuni  palladonit  riti 
di  metalli  bivalenti  fissati  per  mezzo  di  basi  organiche. 
(Double  palladium  nitrites  with  Mg.  Ni,  Mn,  Co,  and  organic 
bases.)  Pd. 

Atti  Accaci.  Lincei  {5],  22,  ii  (1913),  506;  Gazz.  ckim.  ifcal.  44,  i 19141. 
479;  Bui.  Soc.  ckim.  [4],  16  (1914),  275;  Ckem.  News,  109  ,1911,  108; 
J.  Ckem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  255;  Ckem.  Zen.tr.  1914,  i,  860;  ii,  362; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  1719. 

1913:  56.  L.  Tschugajew  and  W.  Chlqpix.  Ueber  Verbindungen 
des  Platonitrits  mit  organiseken  Dithioathern.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Ckem.  82  (1913),  401;  J.  Russ.  Pkys.  Ckem.  Soc.  45  (1913;, 
1862;  Bui.  Soc.  ckim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1347;  J.  Ckem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913), 
1148;  Ckem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1276;  C.  A.  7 (1913  , 3935. 

1913:  57.  L.  Tschugajew  and  P.  Teeabu.  Ueber  Piatinverbind- 
ungen  der  Isonitrile . Pt . 

J.  Russ.  Pkys.  Ckem.  Soc.  45  (1913),  2072;  Ber.  47  (1914),  568;  Bui. 
Soc.  ckim.  [4],  16  (1914),  545;  18  (1915),  52;  J.  Ckem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914), 
392;  Ckem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1176;  C.  A.  8 (1914  , 2704. 

1913:  58.  L.  Ramberg.  Einige  Notizen  fiber  Plato-ammoniakver- 
bindungen.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Ckem.  83  (1913),  33;  Bui.  Soc.  ckim.  [4].  16  (1911  , 78;  J.  Chen*. 
Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  969;  Ckem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  16-55;  C.  A.  8 <1914  , 31. 

1913.  59.  L.  Ramberg.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  komplex- 
bildenden  Sauren  oder  ikren  Salzen  auf  Piato-ammomak- 
verbindungen.  I.  Reaktionen  mit  Kalium-xantkogenat.  II. 
Reaktionen  mit  Aethyl-thioglykolsaure.  Pt, 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1696,  2353;  Bui.  Soc.  ckim.  [4],  14  (1913  , 1072,  1258;  16 
(1914),  687;  J.  Ckem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  952;  ii  (1913, , 607 ; Ckem.  Zentr. 
1913,  ii,  343,  849;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2526,  3283. 

1913:  59a.  L.  Ramberg.  Ueber  die  Konfiguration  der  be  den 
isomeren  Platoathylthioglykolate.  Pt. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  3S86;  J.Ckem.  Soc.  106,  i <1914;,  13;  Ckem.  Zentr.  1914,  i, 
228;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  707. 

1913:  60.  L.  Tschugajew  and  J.  Bexewolexsky.  Ueber  K>ta- 
Dlex  verbindungen  organischer  Sulfide  mit  vierwertigem  Platin. 

Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Ckem.  82  (1913),  420;  Bui.  S;»c.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913;,  1348;  J. 
('hem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  1149;  Ckem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1279;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
2936. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


391 


1913:  61.  L.  Tschugajew  and  A.  Kobljanski.  Ueber  die  elek- 
trische  Leitfahigkeit  einiger  Platinverbindungen  organisclier 
Disulfide.  . Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  83  (1913),  8;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1327;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  1148;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1372;  C.  A.  7 
(1913),  3935. 

1913:  62.  L.  Tschugajew  and  W.  Lebedinski.  Zur  Kenntnis 
der  Komplexverbindungen  des  Rhodiums  (mit  Dimethyl- 
glyoxim  u.  s.  w.).  Rli. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  83  (1913),  1;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  45  (1913),  669, 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1167,  1353;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913); 
1161;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1374;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3937. 

1913:  63.  A.  Duffour.  Contribution  a F etude  des  derives 
oxaliques  complexes  de  F iridium.  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  30(1913)  169,  433;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  1154; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  2101;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2348. 

1913:  64.  A.  Gutbier,  H.  Gebhardt,  and  B.  Ottenstein.  Ueber 
das  Yerhalten  von  Wassers toff  gegen  Palladium.  Pd. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1453;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1009;  Chem.  News, 
108  (1913),  24;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  10  (1913).  400;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii 
(1913),  608;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  26;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3441. 

1913:  65.  A.  Thiel  and  E.  Breuning.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntnis 
der  Ueberspannungserscheinungen.  I.  Die  Ueberspannung 
des  Wasserstoffs  an  reinen  Met  alien.  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  83  (1913),  329;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  15;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  i,  732;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  628. 

1913:  66.  A.  Madina veitia.  (Sur  F hydrogenation  catalytique 
par  les  metaux  divises.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Anales  fls.  quim.  11  (1913),  328;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1076;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  688;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1106. 

1913:  67.  F.  W.  Semmler  and  I.  Rosenberg.  Zur  Kenntnis  der 
Bestandteile  atherischer  Oele.  (Reduktion  von  Limen  mit 
Platinum.)  Pt. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  768;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  377;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1720. 

1913:  68.  G.  Vavon.  Preparation  des  alcools  par  hydrogenation 
catalytique  des  aldehydes  et  des  cetones  en  presence  du  noir 
de  platine.  .Vitesse  de  reaction  dans  les  hydrogenations 
catalytiques  en  presence  de  noir  de  platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  698;  15  (1914),  287;  19  (1916),  133;  Ann. 
chim.  phys.  [9],  1 (1914),  144;  Compt.  rend.  158  (1914),  409;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  189;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1504;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  L564, 
2349. 


392 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1913:  69.  R.  Willstatter  and  Y.  L.  King.  Ueber  Dihvdro- 
naphthalin.  II.  Ueber  Hydrierung  aromatischer  Verbind- 
ungen  mit  Platin  und  Wasserstoff.  Pt. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  527;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  353;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1508. 

1913:  70.  C.  Paal  and  E.  Wixdisch.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  von 
Fremdstoffen  auf  die  Aktivitat  der  Katalysatoren.  III. 
Yersuebe  mit  Platin  als  Wasserstoff -Uebertrager.  Pt.  Pd. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  4010;  Bui.  Soe.  chim.  [4].  16  (1914),  277;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

106,  ii  (1914),  116;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  329;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1902. 

1913:  71.  G.  Bargellixi.  Idrogenazione  della  santonina  in  pre- 
senza  di  nero  di  palladio.  Pd. 

AttiAccad.  Lincei[5],22,i  (1913),  443;  Rend.  Soc.  chim.  ital.  [2],  5(1913\ 

34;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  628;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2936. 

1913:  72.  G.  Dupoxt.  Hydrogenation  catalytique  des  7-glycols 
acetyleniques  en  presence  de  noir  de  palladium.  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  156  (1913),  1623;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913),  964;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  696;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3112. 

1913:  73.  M.  I.  Kousxetsof.  (Decomposition  catalytique  des 
aldehydes.)  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  45  (1913),  557;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913 », 

1166;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3126. 

1913:  74.  M.  Wunder  and  V.  Thuringer.  Zur  Analyse  der 
Platinerze.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  52  (1913),  740;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  148;  Bui. 

Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  447;  Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  229;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  1080;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  2058;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 

644. 

1913:  75.  G.  Malatesta  and  E.  Di  Xola.  (Detection  of  gold 
and  platinum  by  benzidin.)  . Pt. 

Boll.  chim.  farm.  52  (1913),  461;  Analyst,  38  (1913),  476;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 

104,  ii  (1913),  883;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  716;  C.  A.  8 (1912),  1397. 

1913:  76.  Y.  Yamauchi.  Reactions  of  ozone  with  certain  inor- 
ganic salts.  (No  apparent  reaction  with  H2PdCl4.)  Pd. 

Am.  Chem.  J.  49  (1913),  55;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  608;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  131;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1333. 

1913:  77.  W.  Schmidt.  Alpha-nitroso-beta-naphthol  als  Fallungs- 
mittel  yon  Palladium.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  80  (1913),  335;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1054; 

Analyst,  33  (1913),  289;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  440;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1913,  i,  1841;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2171. 

1913:  78.  C.  Auer  v.  Welsbach.  Die  Zerlcgung  des  Ytterbiums 
in  seine  Elemente.  (Coloration  by  ruthenium  from  the 
platinum  crucible.)  Ru,  Pt. 

Monatsh.  34  (1913),  1713;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  86  (1914),  58;  Chem.  Zeuu. 

1914,  i,  949. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


393 


1913:  79.  G.  H.  Clevenger  and  H.  W.  Young.  Estimation  of 
gold,  silver,  and  platinum  by  fire  assa}L  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  108  (1914),  614;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1941. 

1913:  80.  A.  F.  Crosse.  A method  of  assaying  concentrates  and 
battery  chips  for  gold  and  platinum  metals.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Met.  Soc.  S.  Africa,  14  (1913),  373,  422,  483;  Mining  Sci.  Press, 
108  (1914),  814;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1941,  2662,  3404. 

1913:  81.  L.  St.  Ranier.  Die  Fehlerquellen  der  Platinprobe 
(by*  assay).  Pt. 

Oesterr.  Z.  Berg.  Hiittenw.  61  (1913),  141,  155;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  ii, 
(1913),  377;  Analyst,  38  (1913),  294;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1542;  C.  A. 

7 (1913),  2170. 

1913:  82.  H.  D.  Greenwood.  Assay  method  for  palladium  and 
platinum.  Pd,  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  96  (1913),  1175;  Oesterr.  Z.  Berg.  Hiittenw.  62  (1914), 
578;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  586;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  220;  C.  A. 

8 (1914),  884. 

1913:  83.  A.  M.  Smoot.  Suggestions  on  the  platinum-palladium 
assay.  . Pd,  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  96  (1913),  1175. 

1913:  84.  J.  Gray  and  C.  Toombs.  The  determination  of  gold  in 
the  presence  of  iridium  and  allied  metals  in  materials  such  as 
black  sand.  Ir,  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Met.  Soc.  S.  Africa,  13  (1913),  292;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1941. 

1913:  85.  J.  Grail  Determination  of  gold  in  the  presence  of 
iridium  and  allied  metals  in  materials  such  as  black  sand.  Ir,Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Met.  Soc.  S.  Africa,  14  (1913),  2;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3943. 

1913:  86.  C.  Toombs.  Assay  for  gold  and  iridium  in  black  sand. 

Ir. 

J.  .Chem.  Met.  Soc.  S.  Africa,  14  (1913),  4;  Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914), 
229;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3942. 

1913:  87. Prize  for  method  of  estimating  iridium  in 

gold.  Ir. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  189. 

1913:  88.  M.  Wunder  and  V.  Thuringer.  Sur  la  separation  du 

t palladium  d’avec  les  metaux  du  groupe  du  platine,  et  sur 
1J analyse  des  minerals  du  platine.  (Preliminary  note  oil  use 
of  dimethylglyoxim.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Compt.  rend.  Soc.  phys.  hist.  nat.  Geneve,  30  (1913),  12. 


394 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


1913:  89.  M.  Wi  nder  and  V.  Thuringer.  Eine  neue  Method© 
zur  Bestimmung  von  Palladium,  sowie  zur  Trennung  dessel- 
ben  von  Kupfer  und  Eisen.  (Use  of  dimethylglyoxim.)  Pd. 
Z.  anal.  Chem.  52  (1913),  33,  101;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  ii  (1913;,  356; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  927;  Analyst,  38  (1913),  79;  J.  Iron 
Steel  Inst.  88,  ii  (1913),  702;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  11  (1914),  325;  J.  Chem.. 
Soc.  104,  ii(1913),  252;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913.  i,  657;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1143. 

1913:  90.  M.  Wuxder  and  V.  Thuringer.  Trennung  des  Palla- 
diums von  den  Edelme fallen,  Gold,  Platin,  Rhodium  und 
Iridium.  (By  dimethylglyoxim.)  Pd,  Pt,  Rh,  Ir. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  52  (1913),  660;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  316;  Z. 
angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  15;  Analyst,  38  (1913),  524;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104.  ii  (1913),  884;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1705;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3941. 

1913:  91.  M.  Wunder  and  V.  Thuringer.  Bestimmung  des 
Palladiums  mit  alpha-Nitroso-beta-naphthol  und  Trennung 
desselben  von  Kupfer  und  Eisen.  Pd. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  52  (1913),  737;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  148;  Bill. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  447;  Analyst,  39  (1914),  55;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  it  (1913),  1080;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  2059;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  476. 

1913:  92.  W.  P.  Hicks.  A rapid  modified  chloroplatinate  method 
for  the  estimation  of  potassium.  . Pt. 

J.  Inch  Eng.  Chem.  5 (1913),  650;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  114; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  877;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3581. 

1013:  93.  G.  Meillere.  Sur  le  dosage  de  la  potasse  a l’etat  dc 
chloroplatinate.  Pt. 

J.  pharm.  chim.  [7],  7 (1913),  281;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  13  (1913  . 736 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  434;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3093. 

1913:  94.  F.  Paxeth  and  G.  v.  Hevesy.  Ueber  die  Gewimumc 
von  Polonium.  (Precipitation  on  platinum  or  palladium 
and  recovery.)  Pt,  Pd 

Monatsh.  34(1913),  1605;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  1011;  Chem.  Zentr 
1914,  i,  118;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  13.  Also  in  book  form,  A.  Holder,  Wien 
1914;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1389. 

1913:  95.  G.  S.  Forbes  and  E.  P.  Bartlett.  The  increase  in  tin 
potential  of  dichromate  ion  on  platinum  caused  by  cert  ait 
reducing  agents.  An  improved  method  for  the  electrometri< 
titration  of  ferrous  salts.  Pt 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (1913),  1527;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914  ),  460 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  984;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3938. 

1913:  96.  M.  Heidenhaix.  Ueber  die  Bearbeitung  der  Selina 
zu  Kurszwecken,  insbesondere  iiber  die  Verwendung  de; 
Rutheniumrots,  u.  s.  w.  Ru 

Z.  wiss.  Mikroskop.  30  (1913),  161;  Analyst,  39  (1914;,  89;  Chem.  Zenti 
1913,  ii,  2163;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2174. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  395 


1913:  97.  P.  N.  Tschirwinski.  Kiystallographische^nte^siichimg 
von  zwei  Scandium-Platinum-Cyaniiren.  Ft. 

Z.  Rryst.  Min.  52  (1913),  44;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  348;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  1400;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2169. 

1913:  98.  A.  Fersmann.  Ueber  die  Kiyst  allform  der  Plat  i rise  mi- 
pyridiiiaminehlorsulfonsaure.  Pt. 

Bui.  Acad.  sci.  St.-Petersbourg,  1913,  263;  Chem.  Zentr.  19.13.  i,  1661; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  2224. 

1913:  99.  K.  Tangl.  (Surface  tension  between  platinum  and 
water.)  Pt. 

Aim.  Physik  [4],  42  (1913),  1221;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1531. 

1913:  100.  E.  Tiede.  Em  Kathodenstrahl-vakuum-ofen.  (Fusion 
of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  2229;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  655;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913, 
ii,  637;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3454. 

1913:  101.  G.  W.  C.  Kaye  and  D.  Ewen.  The  sublimation  of 
metals  at  low  pressures.  Ir,  Pt,  Rli,  Pd,  llu. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  89  A (1913),  58;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  830; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1126;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2100. 

1913:  102.  J.  H.  T.  Roberts.  The  disintegration  of  metals  at  high 
temperatures.  Condensation  nuclei  from  hot  wires.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Phil..  Mag.  [6],  25  (1913),  270;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  9 (1913),  222;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),  228;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1098;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1136. 

1913:  103.  J.  A.  Harker  and  G.  W.  C.  Kaye.  On  the  electrical 
emissivity  and  disintegration  of  hot  metals.  Pt,  Ir. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  88  A (1913),  522;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913), 
661;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  925;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3895. 

1913:  104.  H.  E.  Weightman.  Spot  (electric)  welding  of  platinum 
points.  , Pt. 

Elec.  Rev.  West,  Elec.  63  (1913),  686;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3924. 

1913:  105.  A.  E.  Freeman.  The  absorption  of  active  hydrogen 
by  platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (1913),  927;  Bui.  Soc.  chiin.  [4],  14(1913),  1332; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  866;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1276;  C.  A.  7 
(1913),  3562. 

1913.  106.  A.  Sieverts  and  E.  Bergner.  Die  Loslichkeit  von 
Scliwefeldioxyd  in  flussigen  Kiipferlegieruiigen  (mil  Gold, 
Silber,  und  Platinum).  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  82  (1913),  257;  Bui.  Soc.  chirn.  [4],  14  (1913),  660,  J 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  321;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1266;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
1659. 


396 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1913:  107.  A.  Holt,  E.  C.  Edgar,  and  J.  B.  Firth.  Die  Sorption 
von  Wasserstoff  durch  Palladiumblech.  Beriehtigung.  Pd. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  82  (1913),  513;  83  (1913),  507;  Z.  anal.  Chem.  52  (1913), 
473;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  330;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1400;  ii,  662; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  2878. 

1913:  108.  J.  H.  Andrew  and  A.  Holt.  The  thermal  effects  pro- 
duced by  heating  and  cooling  palladium  in  hydrogen.  Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  89  A (1913),  170;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  10  (1913),  424;  j 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  839;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1202;  C.  A.  8 i 
(1914),  457. 

1913:  109.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Hohexegger.  Ueber  die  Adsorption 
des  Acetylens  durch  Palladiumschwarz.  Pd. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  128;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  596;  Chem.  News,  107 
(1913),  180;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  241;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  600; 
C.  A.  7 (1913),  1312. 

1913:  110.  A.  Skita.  Platin  und  Palladiumkatalysen.  (Read 
at  85th Versamml.  DeutscherNat.  Aertze,  Wien,  1913.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  i (1913),  601;  Oesterr.  Chem.  Ztg.  16  (1913),  277; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  2293. 

1913:  111.  O.  Stark.  Eine  bequeme  Versuchsanordnung  bei  Re- 
duktion  mit  kolloidalem  Platin  oder  Palladium.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  2335;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1408;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  j 
104,  ii  (1913),  780;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  921;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  35:5. 

19i3:  112.  S.  Fokixe.  (Catalytic  oxidation  at  high  tempera- 
tures. Efficiency  of  catalysers.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  45  (1913),  286;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913), 
945;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  399;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2227. 

1913:  113.  J.  R.  Thompson.  Ueber  die  Vereinigung  von  Wasser- 
stoff und  Sauerstoff  in  Gegenwart  erhitzten  Platins  und 
erhitzer  Kohle.  ' Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  14  (1913),  11;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  95;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1913,  i,  594;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1682. 

1913:  114.  A.  Gutbier  (and  K.  Neundlixger).  Katalyse  des 
Hydrazins  durch  Platinmohr.  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  84  (1913),  203;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1244; 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (193),  939;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  746;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
3262. 

1913:  115.  E.  Baur.  Ueber  Bildung,  Zerlegung  und  Umwandlung 
der  Glykolsaure.  (Reduction  from  oxalic  acid.)  Rh,  Pt. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  852;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  443;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,- 
i,  1665;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2395. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


397 


1913:  116.  E.  Rosenthal  and  W.  Bamberger.  Exp erimen telle 
Untersuchung  uber  die  Beeinflussung  der  Platinkatalyse 
durch  Bakterienfiltrate.  Pt. 

Z.  Immunit.  [1],  19  (1913),  9;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  2000;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
1306. 

1913:  117.  C.  J.  Farmer  and  F.  Parker,  Jr.  The  effect  of  ultra- 
violet light  upon  the  catalytic  activity  of  colloidal  platinum. 

Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  35  (1913),  1524;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  12; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  942;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1846;  C.  A.  7 
(1913),  3906. 

1913:  118.  E.  Ott.  Ueber  symmetrische  und  asymmetrische  Dicar- 
bonsaurechloride.  (Poisonous  action  on  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  2172;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  825;  C.  A.  7 (1913), 
3328. 

1913:  119.  Gesellsciiaft  fur  Elektro-osmose.  (Palladium  ad- 
sorbent.) (Swiss  patent  64275,  Jan.  6,  1913.)  Pd. 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  2460. 

1913:  120.  A.  Sieverts.  Die  Einwirkung  wassriger  Hypophos- 
phitlosungen  auf  Platinsalze.  Ein  Beitrag  zur  Kenntnis  des 
kolloiden  Platins.  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  12  (1913),  263;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  606; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  488;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3935. 

1913:  121.  C.  Amberger.  Organosole  von  Metallen  der  Platin- 
gruppe.  I.  Darstellung  von  Palladiumorganosolen  unter  Ver- 
wendung  von  Wollfett  als  Schutzkolloid.  II.  Organosole  der 
Hydroxyde  des  zwerwertigen  Platins  und  Palladiums.  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  13  (1913),  310,  313;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914), 
60;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  859,  860;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1367,  1368. 

1913 : 122.  C.  Paal  and  II.  Oehme.  Ueber  katalytische  Wirkungen 
kolloidaler  Metalle  der  Platingruppe.  IX.  Die  Hydrogenisa- 
tion  des  Ei-Lecithins.  Pd. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1297;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  880;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  i (1913),  584;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2569. 

1913:  123.  O.  Wallach.  (Behavior  of  carvoxim  and  eucar- 
voxim  toward  free  h}Tdrogen  in  the  presence  of  colloidal  pal- 
ladium.) Pd. 

Nachr.  Ges.  Wiss.  Gottingen,  1913,  236;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1144; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  916. 

1913:  124.  II.  Wieland.  Ueber  den  Mechanismus  der  Oxyda- 
tionsvorgange  (mit  Palladiumschwarz).  Pd. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  3327;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  i (1913),  1304;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913, 
ii,  2085;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  715. 


308  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1913:  125.  C.  Paal  and  A.  Karl.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  von  Fremd- 
stoffen  auf  die  Aktivitat  der  K a t alys  a to  ren . II.  Versuehe 
mit  Palladium  als  Wasserstoff-ubertrager.  Pd. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  3069;  Bull  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  94;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),  1043;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  2087;  C.  A.  8 (.1914),  1902. 

1913:  126.  K.  A.  Hofmann,  O.  Ehrhart,  and  O.  Schneider.  Ak- 
tivierung  von  Chlo  r a tins  ungen  durcli  Osmium.  II.  Os. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  1657;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1152;  Chem.  News, 
108  (1913),  96;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913  \ 609;  Chem.  Zeutr.  1913,  ii, 
231;  C.  A.  7 (1913;,  3088. 

1913:  127.  K.  A.  Hofmann,  K.  Schumpelt,  and  ^a.  Ritter. 
Ueber  die  Oxydierbarkeit  der  Kokle  bei  mittleren  Tempera- 
turen.  (By  potassium  chlorate  in  the  presence  of  osmium 
tetroxide.)  Os. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  2854;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1486;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
104,  ii  (1913),  954;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  30. 

1913:  128.  F.  Lehmann.  Ueber  Wasserstoffubertragung  durcli 
Osmiumdioxyd,  (Used  for  hardening  fats.)  Os. 

Arch.  Pharm.  251  (1913),  152;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  806;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  331;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1267;  C.  A.  7 
(1913),  2690;  8 (1914),  586. 

1913:  129.  R.  Willstatter  and  E.  Sonnenfeld.  Ueber  Oxyda- 
tion  durch  Sauerstoffgas  bei  Gegenwart  von  metailischem 
Osmium.  II.  Os. 

Ber.  46  (1913),  2952;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  39;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104, 
i (1913),  1200;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1670;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  117. 

1913:  130.  Kalle  & Co.  Verfahren  nach  Patent  248525  zur  Dar- 
stellung  der  kolloidalen  Tetrahydroxyde  des  Osmiums  und 
Rutheniums  und  dieser  kolloidalen  Metalle  selbst.  Zusatz- 
Patent.  (German  patent  280365,  July  30,  1913.)  Os,  Ru. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1369;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1378. 

1913:  130a.  Kalle  & Co.  (Salve  preparations  containing  inor- 
ganic colloids.)  (Zusatzpatent  zu  229306.)  (German  patent 
289620,  July  13,  1913.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

C.  A.  10  (1913),  2618. 

1913:  131.  Badische  Anilin  und  Soda  Fabrik.  Verfahren  zur 
Ausfiihrung  von  Oxydationsreaktionen  (durch  Ruthenium). 
(German  patent  275518.)  Ru. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  279. 

1913:  131a.  Badische  Anilin  und  Soda  Fabrik.  (Contact  sub- 
stance for  production  of  sulphuric  acid  anhydride.  (Vanadic 
acid  as  substitute  for  platinum.)  (German  patent  291792, 
Oct.  10,  1913.)  Sub. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1024. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


399 


1913: 


1913: 


1913: 


1913: 


1913: 


1913: 


1913: 


1913: 


1913: 


132.  — (Use  of  ruthenium.)  (As  a catalyzer  in  prepa- 

ration of  NH3  from  N and  H.  Description  of  a German  pat- 
ent (1912:  117).)  Ru. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  990. 

133.  C.  Bergholm.  Ueber  Doppelbrechung  in  katlioden- 

zerstaubten  Metallschichten.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  43  (1913),  1;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  730;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
2516. 

134.  K.  Forsterling  and  V.  Freedericksz.  Die  optischen 

Ko  ns  tan  ten  einiger  Metalle  im  Ultrarot.  Pt,  Ir. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  40  (1913),  201;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  165;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  1172;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2898. 

135.  M.  Boll.  Mesure  de  1’energie  d’une  radiation  ultra- 
violette  emise  par  un  arc  au  mercure  sous  differents  regimes. 
Energie  absorbee  et  masse  formee  dans  une  reaction  photo- 
chimique.  Influence  de  la  longeur  d’onde  sur  la  vitesse  dhine 
reaction  photochimique.  (Action  on  cliloroplatinic  acid.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  156  (1913),  138,  313,  691;  157  (1913),  115;  Bui.  Soc.  chim. 
[4],  13  (1913),  611,  1043;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  171,  182,  265,  745; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  990,  1654;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1324,  2152,  3706. 

136.  J.  Robinson.  The  photoelectric  properties  of  thin  films 

of  platinum.  I.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  25  (1913),  115;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  9 (1913),  233;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  681;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  931. 

137.  K.  T.  Compton  and  O.  W.  Richardson.  The  photo- 
electric effect.  II.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  26  (1913),  549:  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  918;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1644;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  9. 

138.  C.  Stuhlmann  and  K.  T.  Compton.  The  photoelectric 

properties  and  contact  resistances  of  thin  cathode  films. 

(Platinum  films.)  Pt. 

Phys.  Rev.  2 (1913),  327;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  454. 

139.  J.  Donau.  Uol>er  eine  neuartige,  durch  die  Wasser- 

stoffllamme  hervorgerufene  Lumineszenz  an  Erdalkali-,  beson- 
ders  Calciumpraparaten,  welche  Wismuth  oder  Mangan  ent- 
halten,  sowie  liber  den  Nachweis  von  Spuren  der  letzeren. 
(Influence  of  PtCl4  and  PdCl2.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Sitzb.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  122,  Abt.  lib  (1913),  335;  Monatsh.  34 
(1913),  949;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913),  1231;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii 
(1913),  743;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3445. 

140.  E.  Symons.  Messimgen  nach  I. -A.  am  Bogcnspek- 

trum  von  Platin.  Pt. 

Z.  wiss.  Phot.  12  (1913),  277;  .1.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  648;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  ii,  574;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  618. 


400 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1913:  141.  J.  Herweg.  (The  spectrum  of  Rontgen  rays.  II. 
The  spectrograph  of  Rontgen  rays;  the  lines  of  platinum 
and  tungsten.)  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  16,  73;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1539. 

1913:  142.  E.  Hupka.  Ueber  den  Durchgang  von  Rontgen- 
strahlen  durch  Metalle.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  14  (1913),  623;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1019;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3569. 

1913:  143.  J.  G.  v.  Jungenfeld.  Ueber  den  Durchgang  der 
j8-Strahlen  durch  Materie.  Ir,  Rh. 

Physik.  Z.  14  (1913),  507;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  654;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  ii,  409;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3270. 

1913:  144.  R.  T.  Beatty.  The  energy  of  Rontgen  rays.  Pt,  Rh. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  89  A (1913),  314;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  2022; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  464. 

1913:  145.  O.  M.  Corbino.  Ricerche  termo-calorimetriche  sul 

platino  a temperatura  elevata.  Pt. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  22,  i (1913),  684;  Nuovo  cimento,  5 (1913),  313; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  342;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3901. 

1913:  146.  O.  M.  Corbino.  Thermo-kalorimetrische  Untersueh- 
ungen  an  Platin  bei  hohen  Temperaturen.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  14  (1913),  915;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1655. 

1913:  147.  J.  Dewar.  Atomic  specific  heats  between  the  boiling 
points  of  liquid  nitrogen  and  hydrogen.  I.  Mean  atomic 
specific  heats  of  elements  as  periodic  functions  of  atomic 
weights.  Ru,  Rh,  Pd,  Os,  Ir,  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  89  A (1913),  158;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913), 
827;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1359;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  457. 

1913:  148.  G.  Moreau.  Sur  les  couples  a flammes.  Sur  les 
couples  a deux  flammes.  (Ptx — flame  — flame  F2 — Pt2.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  157  (1913),  922, 1070;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  22;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  i,  104,  329;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2300. 

1913:  149.  K.  Honda  and  T.  Sone.  Die  thermomagnetischen 
Eigenschaften  der  Elemente.  Os. 

Sci.  Rep.  Tohoku  Imp.  Univ.  [1],  2 (1913),  25;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1947; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  618. 

1913:  150.  F.  Horton.  The  positive  ionization  produced  by 
platinum  and  by  certain  salts  when  heated.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  88  A (1913),  117;  Chem.  New^,  107  (1913),  5S; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  272;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  i,  1399;  C.  A.  7 
(1913),  3266. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


401 


1913:  151.  C.  Sheard  and  D.  A.  Woodbury.  Temperature  and 
surface  conditions  which  affect  the  positive  ionization  from 
heated  platinum.  Pt. 

Physik.  Rev.  2 (1913),  288;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  454. 

1913:  152.  K.  Fredenhagen.  Ueber  die  Elektrononemission  des 
Platins  und  fiber  die  Ursache  der  Wirksamkeit  der  Oxyd- 
electroden.  Pt. 

Ber.  Kgl.  sacks.  Ges.  Wiss.  65  (1913),  42;  J.  Chem,  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913), 
903;  Chem.  Zentr.  19i3,  ii,  229;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3702. 

1913:  153.  G.  Owen  and  R.  Halsall.  On  the  carriers  of  the 
negative  thermionic  current  in  a vacuum.  (Free  electrons 
and  not  heavy  ions.)  Pd,  Pt,  Ir. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  25  (1913),  735;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  463;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  ii,  211;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3068. 

1913:  154.  S.  Tanatar  and  E.  Bourkser.  (Separation  of  cor- 
puscles in  chemical  reactions.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  45  (1913),  1;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  14  (1913), 
801;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  273;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1830. 

1913:  155.  H.  L.  Cooke  and  O.  W.  Richardson.  The  absorption 
of  heat  produced  by  the  emission  of  ions  from  hot  bodies. 
(Osmium  wire  and  platinum.)  Os,  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  257(1913),  624;  26  (1913),  472;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  121, 
1543;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2350. 

1913:  156.  L.  Hackspill  and  W.  Broniewski.  Sur  les  proprietes 
electriques  des  metaux  alcalins,  du  rhodium  et  de  Tiridium. 

Rh,  Ir. 

Ann.  chim.  phys.  [8],  29  (1913),  455;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  10  (1913),  420; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  749;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3442. 

1913:  157.  F.  Rother.  Der  Elektrizitatsubergang  bei  sehr 
kleinen  Kontaktabstanden  und  die  Elektronenatmospharen 
der  Metalle.  Ir. 

Berg.  Kgl.  sachs.  Ges.  Wiss.  65  (1913),  214;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  602; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  2523. 

1913:  158.  R.  Seeliger.  Ueber  elektrische  Doppelschichten  auf 
Metalloberflachen  im  Vakuum.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  14  (1913),  1237;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  98. 

1913:  159.  E.  Taege.  Der  Einfluss  von  Gas  und  Elektroden- 
material  bei  Imrzen  Metallfunkenstrecken.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  14  (1913),  1041;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  1013;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  ii,  2021;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  612. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 26 


402 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1913:  160.  M.  Werner.  Ueber  die  E igensch af  ts  ii nde  r it ngen  bei 
den  polymorphen  Umwandkmgen  des  Thalliums,  Zinns,  Zinks 
und  Nickels.  (Die  thermo  elektrischen  Kurven  des  Zink- 
Platin.  . . . Thermoelements.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  83  (1913),  275;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  1057;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  1082. 

1913:  161.  E.  Marsdex  and  H.  Richardson.  The  retardation  of 
a particles  by  metals.  * Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  25  (1913;,  184;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  91;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  878;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  934. 

1913:  162.  Costanzo.  Sur  rocclusion  des  produits  du  radium. 
(Action  on  palladium.)  Pd. 

Compt.  rend.  156  (1913),  126;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  174;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1913,  i,  999;  €.  A.  7 (1913),  1440. 

1913:  163.  F.  Zimmermann.  Alloy  of  platinum  with  osmium. 
(U.  S.  patent  1055199,  Mar.  4,  1913:  reissue  13961,  Aug.  10, 
1915.)  Pt,  Os 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  11  (1913),  388;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  Ii (1914),  93;  Bui.  Soc. 
chim.  [4],  18  (1915),  51;  Trans.  Am.  Electrochem.  Soc.  24  (1914),  391; 
Chem.  Eng.  18  (1913),  99;  Eng.  Mining  J.  95  (1913),  759;  Mining  Sci. 
Press,  107  (1913),  533;  Chem.  News,  110  (1914),  62;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  10 
(1913),  407;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  526;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1347,  3954;  8 
(1914),  2332;  9 (1915),  2637. 

1913:  164.  F.  Heinrich.  Ueber  die  Legierimgen  des  Palladiums 
mit  Nickel.  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  83.  (1913),  322;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  186;  J. 
Inst.  Metals,  11  (1914),  307;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  1063;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  i,  618;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1083. 

1913:  165.  R.  J.  Wysor.  Life  of  platinum  crucibles  lengthened  by 
substitution  of  Meker  burner  for  blast  lamp  in  carbon  deter- 
minations. Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  5 (1913),  705;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1353;  C.  A.  7 
(1913),  3286. 

1913:  166.  — Schmelzgefassm aterialien,  Schutzdecken  und 

Schutzatmospharen  fur  die  metallographische  Laboratoriums- 
praxis.  Pt. 

Intern.  Z.  Metall.  4 (1913),  327. 

1913:  167.  G.  K.  Burgess.  A micropyrometer.  Pt. 

J.  Wash.  Acad.  Sc.  3 (1913),  7;  Z.  Instrumentenk.  33  (1913),  101. 

1913:  168.  A.  R.  Meyer.  Die  moderiie  Metalldrahtlampe  und 
ihre  Vorgeschichte.  (History  of  incandescent  lamp  fila- 
ments.) „ Pt,  lr;  Os. 

Dingl.  polyt.  J.  328  (1913),  305;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3924. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


403 


1913:  168a.  M.  J.  Anderson.  A new  method  of  sealing  electrical 


conductors  through  glass.  (Essentially  annealing.)  Pt. 

Brit.  Assoc.  Rept.  1913,  405;  J.  Soc.  Glass  Tech,  (abstr.),  2 (1918),  17. 

1913:  169.  J.  Canello.  Ductile  tungsten,  molybdenum,  and  os- 
mium. (British patent  5150,  Feb.  28,  1913.)  Os. 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  2654. 

1913:  170.  — Hilfsapparat  fur  Platingluhlampen.  (German 

patent  274132,  Oct.  17,  1913.)  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  378 

1913:  171.  M.  Kauffmann.  (A  new  obesity  drug:  colloidal  palla- 
dium hydroxydul.)  (“  Leptynol.”)  Pd. 

Miinch.  med.  Wochsch.  60  (1913),  525;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2064 

1913:  172.  M.  Kauffmann.  (Further  experiments  with  colloidal 
palladous  hydroxide.)  (“  Leptynol.”)  Pd. 

Miinch.  med.  Wochsch.  60  (1913),  1260;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  2795. 

1913:  173.  W.  Gorn.  (Experiments  with  colloidal  palladous  hy- 
droxide, “Leptynol.”)  Pd. 

Miinch.  med.  Wochsch.  60  (1913),  1935;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  4013. 


1913:  174.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Amberger.  Preparing  medicinal  mix- 
tures containing  colloidal  compounds  of  metals  of  the  platinum 
group.  (U.  S.  patent  1077854,  Nov.  4,  1913.) 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  208.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Gs,  Ru. 

1913:  175.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Amberger.  Making  medicinal  prepa- 
ration containing  a colloidal  soap  of  a metal  of  the  platinum 
group.  (U.  S.  patent  1077891,  Nov.  4,  1913.) 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  209.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1913:  176.  C.  D.  Manzoff.  (Removal  of  spots  from  platinum,  in 
analysis  of  leather.)  (Fusion  with  sodium  carbonate,  bicar- 
bonate, and  borax.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  anal.  18  (1913),  316:  Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  81;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  104,  ii  (1913),  866;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1340;  C.  A.  7 
(1913),  2854. 

1913:  177.  Electrodeposition  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Brass  World,  9 (1913),  55;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1675. 

1913:  178.  R.  FI.  Stevens.  Platinum-plated  tungsten  electrode. 
(U.  S.  patent  1077894,  Nov.  4,  1913.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  22. 

1913:  179.  R.  H.  Stevens.  Iridium-plated  tungsten  electrode. 
(U.  S.  patent  1077920,  Nov.  4,  1913.)  Ir. 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  22. 


404 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1913:  ISO.  C.  H.  Kerk.  Method  of  forming  metal  pins  entirely 
coated  with  platinum.  (U.  S.  patent  1081451,  Dec.  16,  1913.) 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  447.  Pt,  Sub. 

1913:  181.  W.  Willis.  Platinotype  printing.  (British  patent 
20022,  Sept.  4,  1913.)  ~ Pt. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  565. 

1913:  182.  A.  and  L.  Lumieee  and  A.  Seyewetz.  U action  com- 
parative des  diverses  acides  mineraux  et  organiques  dans  les 
virages  au  platine.  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4j.  13  (1913),  640;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  ii  (1913),  507; 

Brit.  J.  Phot.  60  (1913),  159;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  1447. . 

1913:  183.  Arnold.  Ueber  die  Fortschritte  auf  dem  Gebiet  der 
Metallanalyse  im  Jahre  1912.  (Analysis  of  alloys  used  to 
replace  platinum  wire;  criticism  of  Doring  (1913:  184).)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  37  (1913),  1225;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  1773. 

1913:  184.  T.  Doring.  (Review  in  field  of  metal  analysis  in  1912.) 
(Analysis  of  alloys  mentioned  in  1913:  183.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  37  (1913),  961,  1018,  1046. 

1913:  185.  L.  Kopa.  Flammenreaktionen  auf  Alkali-  und  Erdal- 
kalimetalle.  (Use  of  fine  graphite  rods  to  replace  platinum 
wire.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Chem.  Ztg.  37  (1913),  1506;  Z.  angevr.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  458;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1914,  i,  188;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  446. 

1913:  186.  L.  Kopa.  Ersatzmaterial  fur  Platin.  (Fine  quartz 
rods.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Chem.  Ztg.  37  (1913),  754;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  26,  ii  (1913),  662;  J.  Chem. 

Soe.  104,  ii  (1913),  722;  Chem.  Zentr.  1913,  ii,  558;  C.  A.  7 (1913),  3556. 

1914:  1.  J.  L.  Howe.  Chabaneau:  an  early  worker  on  platinum. 

Pt. 

Popular  Science  Monthly,  84  (1914),  64;  Chem.  News,  109  (1914),  229. 

1914:  la.  L.  De  Launay.  Traite  de  metallogenie.  (Contains  re- 
view of  the  distribution  of  platinum  over  the  world,  III,  744, 
759.)  Pt. 

1914:  lb. Large  platinum  nuggets.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  109  (1914),  246;  from  The  Jewelers’  Circular. 

1914:  2.  H.  C.  Holtz.  Encore  les  anomalies  dans  1’ analyse  des 
minerais  de-platine.  Pt,  X (?) 

Ann.  chim.  [9],  2 (1914),  56;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  748;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1914,  ii,  934;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3280. 

1914:  3.  D.  T.  Day.  Platinum  and  allied  metals. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Mineral  Pwesources  U.  S.  for  1913  (1914),  445;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1024. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


405 


1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 


3a.  E.  B.  Kimball.  Primitive  methods  of  working  the 
platinum  areas  of  Colombia.  Pt. 

Min.  Eng.  World,  Jan.  17,  1914. 

4.  L.  Duparc.  (The  black  sands  of  Madagascar  and  their 

pretended  richness  in  platinum.  Platinum-carrying  West- 
phalian quartzite.  Platinum  in  litharge.)  Pt. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  37  (1914),  37;  38  (1914),  401;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i, 
501;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1725;  9 (1915),  2497. 

5.  L.  Duparc,  R.  Sabot,  and  M.  Wunder.  (Minerals  of 

the  pegmatites  of  Amb a tof o tsikely , Madagascar.)  (No  plati- 
num found.)  Pt. 

Bull.  Soc.  frang.  min.  37  (1914),  19;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  664; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  1724. 

5a.  W.  Hommel.  Platinum  in  Germany.  Pt. 

Metal  und  Erz,  1914,  June  22;  Mining  J.  1914,  486. 

5b. (Platinum  in  Westphalia.)  (Editorial  note  on 

1914:  5a.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press.  108  (1914),  1001. 

6.  Platinum  deposits.  (Westphalia.)  Pt. 

Sci.  Amer.  110  (1914),  152. 

7.  — Platinum  in  Germany.  (Reported  discovery  in 

Westphalia.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  34,  186,  1252;  from  Mining  J. 

8.  Westphalian  platinum.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  10,  61,  180,  190,  337;  in  part  from  Mining  J. 

9.  P.  Kruscii.  (Possibilities  of  platinum  in  German  Paleo- 
zoic.) Pt. 

Metall  und  Erz,  11  (1914),  545;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  580;  Mining  Sci.  Press, 
109  (1914),  879. 

10.  J.  P.  Hutchixs.  Dredging  in  the  Russian  Empire. 

(Full.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  857. 

11.  J.  P.  Hutchins.  Russian  mining.  (Review  for  1913.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  147.  Pt. 

11a.  A.  Knopf.  A platinum-gold  lode  deposit  in  southern 
Nevada.  (Paper  before  Geol.  Soc.  of  America,  Dec.  29, 

1914.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  109  (1914),  990. 

12.  F.  A.  Hale,  Jr.  Platinum  ore  in  southern  Novada. 

Boss  mine.  Ivt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  641. 


406 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1914:  13. 


Discovery  of  platinum  on  Rock  Creek,  Greg. 


(Note.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  457. 

1914:  13a.  The  platinum  ores  of  the  Boss.  Pt. 

Salt  Lake  Mining  Rev.  1914,  Oct.  30. 

1914:  13b.  Palladium:  its  characteristics,  uses  and  dis- 
covery in  the  Boss  mine.  Pd. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  109  (1914  ),  990;  from  Press  Bui.  4,  Mackay  School  of 
Mines,  Nev. 

1914:  14.  H.  A.  Megraw.  Placer  gold  and  its  recovery.  (Brief 
reference  to  platinum,  p.  369.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mag.  47  (1914),  359. 

1914:  14a.  B.  Streit.  (Recovering  platinum  and  associated  metals 
from  ores  poor  in  platinum  (by  heating  with  NaN03  and 
MgCl2  or  FeCl3  to  330°,  the  vapors  acting  on  platinum  and 
being  cheaper  than  aqua  regia).)  (German  patent  293104, 
Mar.  26,  1914.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1821. 

1914:  15.  R.  H.  Richards.  Placer  recovery  of  platinum.  (Solu- 
tion of  platinum  and  platinum-iridium  in  sodium  amalgam 
and  deposition  on  oxidation  of  the  sodium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  678. 

1914:  15a.  W.  H.  Twelvetrees.  The  Bald  Hill  (Tasmania) 
osmiridium  field.  Os.  Ir. 

Bui.  Tasmanian  Dept.  Mines,  Geol.  Surv.  17,  1914;  Mining  J.  1914, 
Nov.  14. 

1914:  15b.  E.  J.  Dunn.  Tasmanian  osmiridium  fields.  Os,  Tr. 

Austral.  Min.  Standard,  1914,  539. 

1914:  15c.  A.  McLeod.  Practical  instructions  in  search  for  and 
determination  of  useful  minerals,  including  rare  ores.  New 
York,  1914.  (Includes  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

1914:  16.  The  production  of  platinum.  (Including  dis- 
covery in  Nevada.)  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  38  (1914),  56S  (partly  from  D.  T.  Day,  1914:  3). 

1914:  17.  Platinum  production  in  Russia.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914;,  626;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  11  (1914),  344. 

1914:  17a.  E.  de  Hautpick.  Russian  platinum  industry.  Pt. 

Mining  J.  1914,  Mar.  14. 

1914:  18.  Export  of  platinum  from  Colombia  in  1912.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914;,  358. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


407 


1914:  18a. 


Informe  sobre  la  explotacion  del  platino  en  el 

Pt. 


1914 

1914 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 


Choco. 

Bol.  7,  Ministerio  de  relaciones  exteriores,  Bogota,  1914. 

19.  Platinum  excitement  in  Colombia.  (Note.)  Pt. 

Ehg.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  321. 

20.  — Platinum  output  of  the  United  States.  (Brief 

note.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  824. 

21.  — Metal  prices  for  1912  and  1918.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  53. 

22.  Metal  market.  (Weekly  reports  of  prices.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97,  98  (1914).  Pt,  Ir. 

23.  G.  Siebert.  Ueber  das  Platin.  (Vortrag,  Verein  deut- 

scher  Chemiker,  Jan.  30,  1914.)  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  iii  (1914),  152;  Chcm.  Ztg.  Rep.  1914,  184. 

24.  Platinum.  (Editorial  review;  market  and  uses.) 

Eng.  Mining  % 97  (1914),  73.  Pt.  Pd,  Ir. 

25.  R.  E.  Lyons.  Recovering  “rusty”  gold  and  platinum, 
from  ores,  etc.  (LJ.  S.  patent  1118944,  Dec.  1,  1914.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  194. 

26.  — Working  up  platinum  residues. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  530;  from  Mining  Eng.  Rev. 


Pt. 


27.  F.  W.  Clarke,  T.  E.  Thorpe,  W.  Ostwald,  and  G.  Ur- 
bain.  Report  of  the  International  Committee  on  Atomic 
Weights,  1915.  (Reference  to  work  of  Hoizmann  on  iridium, 
1912:  37.)  Ir. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1914),  1585;  Ber.  48  (1915),  8;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  105 
(1914),  2577;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  2;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3138. 

1914:  28.  W.  Peters.  Ueber  Additionen  von  aliphatischen  Ami- 
nen  an  Metallsalzen.  (To  palladium  and  platinum  chlorides, 
cyanides,  and  thiocyanates.)  Pd,  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  191;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915),  504;  Chem. 
Zentr,  1915,  i,  304;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  569. 

1914:  29.  R.  L.  Datta  and  T.  Ghosh.  Indirect  formation  of 
double  salts.  V.  Double  platinic,  cupric,  and  silver  iodides  of 
substituted  ammonium  bases.  (Platinum  pyridin  salts.)  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1914),  1017;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  917; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  729;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii  144;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  2131. 


408  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1914:  30.  A.  Gutbier,  F.  Krauss,  and  L.  yon  Muller.  Studien 
liber  Platin.  (Preparation  of  hexabromoplatinic  acid  and 
salts.)  Pt. 

Sitzb.  Phys.  med.  Soz.  Erlangen,  45,  25;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  663; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1162;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2856. 

1914:31.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  les  chlorures  d' iridium.  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  15  (1914),  231,  267,  438;  Compt.  rend.  158  (1914),  264; 

Chem.  News,  109  (1914),  143;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  209;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1914,  i,  954;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3399. 

1914:  32.  M.  Delepine.  Sur  le  chloro-iridate  et  le  chloro-iridite 
de  lithium.  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  15(1914),  505;  Compt.  rend.  158  (1914),  1276;  J.  Chem. 

Soc.  106,  ii  (1914).  461;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  2149;  C.  A.  (1914),  2538. 

1914:  33.  A.  Gutbier.  Ueber  Verbindungen  von  Iridechlorid  mit 
organischen  Basen.  (Cf.  D.  Hoyermann,  Dissertation,  Er- 
langen, 1911.)  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  340;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915),  585;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1915,  i,  298;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1438. 

1914:  34.  A.  Gutbier  and  B.  Ottenstein.  Zur  Kenntnis  der 
Hexachloroirideate.  (Cf.  B.  Ottenstein,  Dissertation,  Er- 
langen, 1914.)  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  344;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915),  505;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1915,  i,  299;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1438. 

1914:  35.  A.  Gutbier  and  L.  Mehler.  Studien  liber  Hexabromo- 
osmeate.  (Cf.  N.  Pfanner,  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1912; 
O.  Edelhauser,  Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1914;  L.  Mehler, 
Dissertation,  Erlangen,  1914.)  Os. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  313;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915),  505;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1915,  i,  295;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1439. 

1914:  36.  A.  Gutbier  and  L.  Mehler.  Weitere  Beitrage  zur 
Kenntnis  der  Hexachloroosmeate.  Os. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  333;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915),  505;  Chem. 

Zentr.  1915,  i,  297;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1440. 

1914:  37.  L.  Tschugaeff  and  M.  Grigorjew.  Ueber  Komplex- 
verbindungen,  welche  zugleich  Platin  und  Hydrazin  enthalten. 

Pt. 

Ber.  47  (1914),  2446;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1914),  632; 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  20  (1916),  152;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  354; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1032;  C.  A.  9 (1914),  274. 

1914:  38.  M.  Delepine.  Dedoublement  optique  des  iridotrioxa- 
lates.  (Optical  splitting  of  iridium  oxalates.)  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  159  (1914),  239;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  772;  Chem. 

News,  110(1914),  186;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  1048;  Chem.  Zentr. 

1914,  ii,  821;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3763. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


409 


1914:  39.  A.  Werner.  Ueber  Spiegelbildisomerie  bei  Rliodium- 
verbindungen.  (Rhodium  oxalates.)  Rli. 

Ber.  47  (1914),  1954;  Bill.  Soc.  cliim.  [4],  16  (1914),  966;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
106,  i (1914),  921;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  525;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3159. 

1914:  40.  G.  A.  Barbieri.  Ricerche  di  chimica  sistematica:  rute- 
nio,  rodio,  palladio.  (Compounds  with  acetylaceton  and 
double  molybdates.)  Rh,  Ru,  Pd. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  23,  i (1914),  334;  Bui.  Soe.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  683; 
Chem.  News,  109  (1914),  264;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  375;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  i,  1738;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2988. 

1914:  41.  G.  A.  Barbieri.  Palladosalieilati.  Pd. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  23,  i (1914),  880;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  1070; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1102,  C.  A.  9 (1915),  298. 

1914:  42.  A.  Rosenheim  and  II.  Schwer.  Ueber  neunbasische 
Heteropolysauren.  (Constitution  of  Barbieri’s  rhodium  mo- 
lybdates, 1914:  40.)  Rh. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  224;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  468;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  353;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  570. 

1914:  43.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff.  Sur  une  methode  de  preparation 
des  composes  complexes  du  platine  bivalent.  (With  acetoni- 
tril  and  ethyl  disulphide.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  159  (1914),  188;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1914),  174; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  763;  17  (1915),  326;  Chem.  News,  110 
(1914),  174;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  1054;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii, 
694;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3278. 

1914:  44.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  P.  Teearu.  Ueber  Platinvor- 
bindungen  der  Isonitrile,  welche  ein  Cvanradikal  enthalten. 

Pt. 

Ber.  47  (1914),  568,  2643;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1914),  186; 
Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  763;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  392; 
108,  i (1915),  388;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1223;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2704; 
9 (1915),  87. 

1914:  45.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Ciilopin.  Ueber  die  Platin- 
verbindungen  der  organischen  Sulfide,  welche  den  Salzen 
der  ersten  Base  von  Reiset  analog  sind.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  86  (1914),  241;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  892;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  479;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1880;  C.  A.  8(1914), 
1934. 

1914:  46.  P.  C.  Ray.  The  action  of  mercuric,  cupric,  and  platinic 
chlorides  on  organic  sulphur  compounds.  (Merc apt ans.)  Pt. 

Prcc.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1914),  304;  Chem.  News,  111  (1915),  32;  C.  A.  9 
(1915),  2890. 


410 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1914:  47.  G.  Wolf.  Ueber  die  spezifische  elektrische  Leitfahigkeib 
und  Dicbte  von  Palladium  Wasserstoff  Legierungen.  Pd. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  87  (1914),  575;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  809; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  517;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  610;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  2518. 

1914:  48.  A.  Sieverts.  Palladium,  Palladiumlegierungen  und 
W asserstoff . (Paper before  Versamml.  Deutscher  N at . Aerzte, 
Bonn,  1914.)  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27  (1914),  337. 

1914:  49.  A.  Sieverts.  Palladium  und  Wasserstoff.  (Influence 
of  temperature.)  Pd. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  88  (1914),  103;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  18  (1915),  33;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii(1914),  626;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  756;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
2971. 

1914:  50:  A.  Sieverts.  Palladium  und  Wasserstoff.  II.  Die  Ab- 
hangigkeit  der  Wasserstoffaufnahme  durch  Palladiumdraht 
vom  Gasdruck  bei  konst  an  ter  Temperatur.  pd. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  88  (1914),  451;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  268;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1385;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  12. 

1914:  51.  A.  Holt.  The  rate  of  solution  of  hydrogen  by  palla- 
dium. Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  90  A (1914),  226;  Chem.  News.  109  (1914),  149; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  452;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  755;  C.  A.  S 
(1914),  2291. 

1914:  52.  F.  Mylius  and  A.  Mazzucchelli.  Ueber  die  Platin- 
analyse.  I.  Praparative  Reinigimg  des  Platins.  II.  Die 
analytische  Erkennung  der  Platinmetalle.  III.  Quantitative 
Analyse  unreinen  Platin.  IV.  Beleganalysen  und  Beispiele. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. , 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  1;  Analyst,  40  (1915),  474,  J.  Inst.  Metals,  ] 
13  (1915),  356;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  491;  Mining  Sci.  Press,’ 
110  (1915)  481;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1471;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  419. 

1914:  53.  E.  Langstein  and  P.  H.  Prausnitz.  Ueber  den  Nach- 
weis  des  Platins  mit  Zinnchlorur.  (Not  distinguishable  from 
humus  substances.)  Pt  1 

Chem.  Ztg.  38  (1914),  802;  Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  697;  J.  Chem.) 
Soc.  106.  ii  (1914),  680;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  547;  C-.  A.  8 (1914),  3401. 1 

1914:  54.  C.  O.  Bannister  and  G.  Patchin.  Detection  of  plati- 
num metals  in  cupellation  beads.  (Paper  before  Inst.  Min- 
ing and  Metallurgy.)  Pt.  1 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  1007;  J.  Chem.  Met.  Soc.  S.  Africa,  14  (1914), 
478;  Mining  Sci.  Press,  108  (19141,  146;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1257,  3404. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


411 


! 1914: 


1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


55.  A.  M.  Smoot.  Vorschlage  zur  Platin-Palladiumbestim- 

mung.  > Ft,  Pd. 

Oesterr.  Z.  Berg.  Hiittenw.  62(1914),  578;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  14  (1915),  258; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  586;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  220. 

56.  C.  O.  Bannister  and  E.  A.  Dlt  Yergier.  The-  deter- 
mination of  iridium  in  platinum-iridium  alk>3rs.  Ft,  Ir. 

Analyst,  39  (1914),  340;  Z.  angew.  Ohem.  27,  iii  (1914),  597;  Chem.  News, 
109  (1914),  298;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  748;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i, 
506;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3403. 

57.  M.  Schwitter.  The  assay  of  crude  platinum.  (Wid- 
mann  medal  in  Pratt  Institute  chemical  alumni  competition.) 

Ft,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 
Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  1249;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  33  (1914),  751;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  25;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2859. 

58.  F.  P.  Dewey.  Platinum  assay.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  109  (1914),  20;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2859. 

59.  A.  Hanig.  (Platinum.)  (Solution  with  silver  in  assay 

head.)  Pt. 

Oesterr.  Z.  Berg.  Hiittenw.  62  (1914),  203;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2989. 

60.  II.  A.  Jolly.  Method  of  determining  gold  in  by-products 

containing  platinum  and  iridium.  Pt,  Ir. 

J.  Chem.  Met.  Soc.  S.  Africa,  -15  (1914),  51;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  186. 

61.  G.  A.  Burrell  and  G.  G.  Oberfell.  Determination  of 
hydrogen  in  gas  mixtures  by  means  of  colloidal  palladium.  Pd. 

,T.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  6 (1914),  992;  Analyst,  40  (1915),  68;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
108,  ii  (1915),  62;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  913;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  38. 

62.  L.  Brandt.  Ueber  die  Amvendung  von  Diphenylkarbo- 

hydrazid  als  Indikator  bei  der  Eisentitration  nach  der  Bichro- 
matmethode.  (Influence  of  platinum  chloride.)  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  53(1914  , 1;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  71;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
1071. 

63.  W.  Biltz.  Beitrage  zur  systematischen  Yerwandt- 
schaftslehre.  (Valence  of  platinum  and  iridium.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  141;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  440;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  248;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  541. 

64.  M.  Segre.  (The  effect  of  osmic  acid  on  bone  production.) 

Os. 

Policlinico,  21  (1914),  Jan.  25;  J.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.  62  (1914),  819;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  2196. 

65.  M.  Thorscm.  Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Alkohol  und 

Osmium  auf  die  bindenden  Gruppen  der  Bakterien.  (And 
on  blood  corpuscles.)  Os. 

Biochem.  Z.  64  (1914),  230;  66  (1914),  486;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915), 
354;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3592,  3809. 


412 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1914:  66.  F.  G.  Wick.  A spectrophotometric  study  of  the  absorp- 
tion, fluorescence,  and  surface  color  of  magnesium-platinum 
cyanide.  Pt. 

Physic.  Rev.  3 (1914),  382;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2302. 

1914:  67.  F.  v.  Hauer  and  J.  v.  Kowalski.  Zur  Photometrie  der 
Luminescenzerscheinungen.  (Fluorescence  of  double  ruthen- 
ium and  platinum  cyanide.)  Ku,  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  15  (1914),  322;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  320;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1914,  i,  1540;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3751. 

1914:  68.  A.  Classen.  Verfahren  zur  Ueberfulirung  von  Metatlen 
und  Metalllegierungen  in  feinverteilter  Form.  (German  patent 
281305,  Mar.  30,  1913.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  230;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1980. 

1914:  69.  1.  Langmuir  and  G.  M.  J.  Mackay.  Vapor  pressure  of 

the  metals  platinum  and  molybdenum.  Pt. 

Physic.  Rev.  4 (1914),  377;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  263. 

1914:  70.  A.  M.  Tyndall  and  H.  G.  Hughes.  Cathode  disinte- 
gration in  a vacuum  tube.  (With  platinum  cathode.) 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  27  (1914),  415;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1395;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
1695. 

1914:  71.  W.  Schlett.  Ueber  die  Aenderung  der  Dichte  und 
spezifischen  Warme  bei  Met  alien.  Pt. 

Ferrum,  11  (1914),  151;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1812;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1730. 

1914:  72.  F.  Halla.  Bemerkungen  zur  Sorption  von  Whisserstoff 
durch  Palladium.  (Discussion  of  work  of  Andrew  and  Holt, 
1913:  108.)  Pd. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  86  (1914),  496;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  11  (1914),  307;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  178;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  954;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1369. 

1914:  73.  D.  A.  MacInnes.  The  mechanism  of  the  catalysis  of 
the  decomposition  of  hydrogen  peroxide  by  colloidal  platinum. 

Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1914),  878;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  875;  J. 
Chem.Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  555;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  917;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
2516. 

1914:  74.  G.  Dyer  and  A.  B.  Dole.  Catalytic  decomposition  of 
hydrogen  peroxide.  (By  B redig’s  colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1914),  55;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2127. 

1914:  75.  H.  L.  Bassett.  The  decomposition  of  lrjnlrogen  per- 
oxide by  colloidal  platinum.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  29  (1914),  56;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2127. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


413 


1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


1914: 


76.  J.  Groh.  (Measurement  of  the  protective  action  of 

protective  colloids).  (On  colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  88  (1914),  414;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  239;  C.  A. 
9 (1915),  7. 

77.  C.  Paal.  Technische  Verfahren  zur  Hartung  der  Fette 

mittels  Platin  und  Palladium.  (Paper  before  Ver.  deutscher 
Chemiker,  Dec.  14,  1913.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  iii  (1914),  24. 

78.  C.  Paal.  Ueber  katalytisclie  Wirkungen  kolloidaler 

Metalle  der  Platingruppe.  X.  Die  Reduktion  von  Schwer- 
metalloxyden.  Pd. 

Ber.  47  (1914),  2202;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  18  (1915),  50;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106, 
ii  (1914),  642;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  754;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3275. 

79.  J.  S.  Salkind.  Ueber  die  Anlagerung  von  Wasserstoff 

an  7-Glycole  der  Acetylenreihe  in  Gegenwart  von  Palladium 
oder  Platin.  Pd,  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  45  (1914),  1875,  1896;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16 
(1915),  536;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1813;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1419. 

80.  J.  S.  Salkind- and  P.  V.  Pisciitschikoff.  (Velocity  of 

hydrogenation  of  tetramethylbutindiol  in  presence  of  colloidal 
palladium  under  different  conditions.)  Pd. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  46  (1914),  1527;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2067. 

81.  G.  Yavon.  Transformation  du  limonene  en  carvo- 

menthene.  (By  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  15  (1914),  282;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  557. 

82.  G.  Vavon.  (Catalytic  hydrogenations  in  the  presence 

of  platinum  black;  conversion  of  aldehydes  and  ketones  into 
alcohols.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  [9],  1 (1914),  144;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  i (1914),  694;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  2349. 

83.  G.  Vavon.  (Velocity  of  reaction  in  catalytic  hydro- 

genations in  the  presence  of  platinum  black;  fatigue  of 
catalyst.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  158  (1914),  409;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  15  (1914),  287;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  189;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1564,  2148. 

84.  O.  Wallach.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Terpene  und  der  ather- 

ischen  Oele.  CXVI.  Ueber  die  Reduktion  von  Carvoxim 
und  von  Eucarvoxim  mit  Palladium  wasserstoff.  (From  R. 
Klein,  Thesis,  Gottingen,  1914.)  Pd. 

Ann.  403  (1914),  73;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  485;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
106,  i (1914),  65;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1572. 


414  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1914:  85.  H.  Fisher  and  A.  Hahn.  (Bromomesoporphyrin  and 
the  reduction  of  blood  and  bile  pigments  in  the  presence  of 
colloidal  palladium.)  Pd. 

Z.  physiol.  Chem.  91  (1914),  174;  0.  A.  8 (1914),  3658. 

1914:  86.  W.  Normann  and  F.  Schick.  Wirkt  Osmiumdioxyd  ais 
Fetthartungskatalysator?  (Metal,  and  not  Os02.)  Os. 

Arch.  Pharm.  252  (1914),  208;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  18  (1915),  10;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  106,  i (1914),  926;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  442;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3129. 

1914:  87.  R.  Willstatter  and  E.  Sonnenfeld.  Ueber  das  Ver- 
halten  ungesattigter  Verbindungen  gegen  Phosphor  und 
Sauerstoff.  II.  Mitteilung  iiber  Oxydationskatalyse.  (Influ- 
ence of  colloidal  osmium.)  Os. 

Ber.  47  (1914),  2801;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915),  326;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914, 
ii,  1386;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  308. 

1914:  88.  G.  Kail.  Messungen  im  Funkenspektrum  der  Platin- 
metalle:  Ru,  Rh,  Pd,  Ir  und  Pt,  im  aussersten  Ultra violett. 

Ru,  Rh,  Pd,  Ir,  Pt. 

Sitzb.  Kais.  Akad.  Wiss.  Wien,  123  Ila  (1914),  June;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
108,  ii  (1915),  497;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  302;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2481. 

1914:  89.  I.  Malmer.  The  high-frequency  spectra  of  the  elements. 

Ru,  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  28  (1914),  787;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  2;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  127;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1144. 

1914:  90.  E.  Paulson.  Beitrage  zur  Kenntnis  der  Linienspektrum. 
Dissertation,  Lund,  1914.  (Palladium  (and  other  metals?).) 

Pd. 

1914:  91.  H.  Smith.  The  spectroscopy  of  the  electric  brush  dis- 
charge in  weak  acids  and  solutions.  (Spectrum  of  the 
platinum  electrode.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  27  (1914),  801;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1914),  397;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  ii,  193;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2522. 

1914:  92.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  A.  Glebko.  Ueber  die  Absorp- 
tionsspektrum  der  Dioximine.  (Of  platinum  and  palladium.) 

Pt,  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  241;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  391;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  358;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1270. 

1914:  93.  G.  Reboul.  Sur  1’ action  selective  des  metaux  dans 
l’effet  photo- electrique.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  158  (1914),  477;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1143;  C.  A.  8 (19J.4), 
2303. 


1914:  94.  F.  Stumpf.  (The  influence  of  palladium  charged  with 
hydrogen  on  the  photoelectric  effect.)  Pd. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  16  (1914),  989;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1145. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP,  415 

1914:  95.  A.  Stuhlmann,  Jr.  Asymmetric  emission  of  photo- 
electrons  from  thin  films  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Physic.  Rev.  4 (1914),  195;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3748. 

1914:  96.  G.  Jaffe.  Zur  Theorie  der  Lichtabsorption  in  Metallen 
und  Nichtleitern.  Pd. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  45  (1914),  1217;  Them.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  188. 

1914:  97.  H.  Rohmann.  Die  Rontgenspektren  einiger  Metalle. 
(Platinum.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  15  (1914),  715;  0.  A.  8 (1914),  3758. 


1914:  98.  PI.  G.  J.  Moseley.  The  high-frequency  spectra  of  the 
elements.  II.  (X-ray  spectra  of  platinum  metals.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  27  (1914),  703;  J.  t hem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  32G;  them. 
Zentr.  1914,  i,  1869;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2307. 

1914:  99.  H.  Seemann.  Das  Rontgenspektrum  des  Platins.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  15  (1914),  794;  Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  38  (1914),  561;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
108,  ii  (1915),  203;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1144;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  175. 

1914:  100.  M.  de  Broglie.  Sul*  la  speetroscopie  des  rayons  de 
Rontgen.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  158  (1914),  177;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  942;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
1235. 

1914:  101.  L.  G.  Davey.  The  mean  depth  of  formation  of  X-rays 
in  a platinum  target.  Pt. 

Physic.  Rev.  4 (1914),  217;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3758. 

1914:  102.  H.  Kirschbaum.  Intensitat  und  Absorptionsindex 
der  Rontgenstrahlen  yoii  Platin  und  Kohle.  Dissertation, 
Aachen,  1914(f).  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  46  (1914),  85;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915, i,  354;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
1715. 

1914:  103.  C.  G.  Barkla.  Charakteristische  Rontgenstrahlungen. 
(Wave  length  of  rhodium  rays.)  Rh. 

Physik.  Z.  15  (1914),  160;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  942;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1700. 

1914:  104.  W.  H.  Bragg.  The  intensity  of  reflection  of  X-rays 
by  crystals.  (Use  of  rhodium  bulb;  wave  length  of  rhodium 
rays.)  Rh. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  27  (1914),  881;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  292;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 

2308. 

1914:  105.  L.  V.  King.  On  the  convection  of  heat  from  small  cyl- 
inders in  a stream  of  fluid:  determination  of  the  convection 
currents  of  small  platinum  wires,  with  applications  to  hot-wire 
anemometry.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  90  A (1914),  563;  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  214  A 
(1914),  373;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1004. 


416 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1914:  106.  E.  P.  Adams  and  A.  K.  Chapman.  The  Corbino  effect. 
(Current  in  plate  in  magnetic  fluid.)  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  28  (1914),  692;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  187;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
1576. 

1914:  107.  B.  Pogany.  Ueber  einige  Widerstandsmessungen  und 
optische  Messungen  an  dimnen  Platinschichten.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  15  (1914),  688;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  563;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
2621. 

1914:  108.  A.  Riede.  Experimentelle  Untersuchungen  uber  die 
galvanische  Leitfahigkeit  diinner  Metallschichten.  Disserta- 
tion, Gottingen,  1914.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  45  (1914),  881 ; Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  113;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
997. 

1914:  109.  H.  E.  Reilley.  Contact  resistances  of  metals  and 
alloys.  (Pressure  needed  for  good  contacts.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Canada  [3],  8,  iii  (1914),  125. 

1914:  110.  A.  L.  Hughes.  The  contact  difference  of  potential  of 
distilled  metals.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  28  (1914),  337;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1424;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
3744. 

1014:  111.  E.  Newbery.  Overvoltage.  Pt. 

Proc.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1914),  235;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  105  (1914),  2419;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  111;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  176. 

1914:  112.  O.  W.  Richardson.  The  positive  ions  from  hot 
metals.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  89  A (1914),  507;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914), 
161;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1053;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  1535. 

1914:  113.  C.  Sheard.  The  positive  ionization  from  heated 
platinum.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [61,28  (1914),  170;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  702;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1261;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3756. 

1914:  114.  N.  Campbell.  The  ionization  of  platinum  by  cathode 
rays.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  28  (1914),  286;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  701;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1914,  ii,  1385;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3757. 

1914:  115.  G.  Wietzel.  Das  thermoelektrische  Verhalten  der 
Metalle  bei  tiefen  Temperaturen.  Dissertation,  Berlin.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  43  (1914),  605;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1242;  C.  A.  8 (1914), 
1694. 

1914:  116.  R.  W h iddin gton . The  transmission  of  cathode  rays 
through  matter.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  89  A (1914),  554;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  i,  1398; 
C.  A.  8 (1914),  1699. 


1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 

1914: 
1914 : 

1914: 

1914: 

1914 

1914 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


417 


117.  E.  Weinteaub.  Alloy  of  platinum  with  20%-60%  of 

tungsten.  (U.  S.  patent  1096655,  May  12,  1914.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  8 (1914),  2144. 

118.  W.  C.  Heraeus,  G.  m.  b.  H.  Platin-Osmiumlegierun- 

gen.  (U.  S.  patent  1055199  of  Zimmermann  (1913:  163)  is 
preceded  by  German  patent  239704;  British  patent  29723, 
1910;  French  patent  424030  (1910:  96).)  Pt,  Os. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  ii  (1914),  160. 

119.  W.  Guertler.  Zur  Einheitlichkeit  Internation  alen 

Nomenklatur  der  Legierungen.  (Osmiridium  und  Iridos- 
mium.)  Ir,  Os. 

Intern.  Z.  Metall.  6 (1914),  23. 

120.  Arrest  for  stealing  platinum.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  42. 

121.  Rapid  evaporation  in  platinum  crucibles. 

(Note.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  24. 

122.  L.  H.  Adams.  Calibration  tables  for  copper-const  ant  an 

and  platinum-platinrhodium  thermoelements.  Pt,  Rh. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1914),  65;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  94;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  1377. 

123.  G.  K.  Burgess  and  P.  D.  Sale.  A thermoelectric 
method  for  the  determination  of  the  purity  of  platinum  ware. 

Pt. 

J.  Wash.  Acad.  Sc.  4 (1914),  282;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  6 (1914),  452; 
Analyst,  39  (1914),  381 ; J.  Chem.  Soc.  106.  ii  (1914),  585;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1914,  ii,  353;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2539. 

124.  Marconi’s  Wireless  Telegraph  Co.  and  H.  J.  Round. 

Vacuum  tubes.  (Platinum  tube  for  wireless  telegraphy.) 
(British  patent  6476,  May  29,  1914.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  2558. 

125.  Marking  inferior  jewelry 


‘platinum, 


etc. 

Pt. 

Pt, 


(Bill  before  the  New  York  legislature.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  97  (1914),  31. 

126.  “Policeman”  for  platinum  crucibles. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  216. 

127.  G.  P.  Baxter  and  F.  L.  Grover.  The  resistance  of 

platinum  vessels  to  hot  nitric  acid.  Pt. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1914),  1089;  Z.  anorg.  Chem.  87  (1914),  353;  Bui. 
Soc.  chim.  [4],  16  (1914),  942;  Eng.  Mining  J.  98  (1914),  789;  Analyst, 
39  (1914),  382;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  570;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii, 
373,  678;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2856. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 27 


418 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1914:  128.  J.  C.  J.  Cunningham.  Das  System  Bleioxyd-Kupfer- 
oxyd.  (Platinum  crucibles  not  attacked  by  litharge.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  89  (1914),  48;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  458;  Chem. 
Zentr!  1914,  ii,  1324;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  567. 

1914:  129.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  K.  Ritter.  Bestiindigkeit  und 
Oxydationspotential  der  Hypochlorite,  Beitrage  zur  Katalvse- 
und  uber  ein  Hypochlorit-Kohle-Element.  (Stability  toward 
platinum  metals  as  catalyzers.)  Pt,  Ru,  Rh,  Ir,  Pd,  Os. 

Ber.  47  (1914),  2233;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  612;  Chem.  Zentr.  1914, 
ii,  750;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3275. 

1914:  130.  G.  Nikolaus.  (Platinum  plating.)  Pt. 

Elektrochem.  Z.  21  (1914),  193;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  14  (1915),  252;  C.  A.  9 
(1915),  890,  2037. 

1914:  131.  W.  Strzoda.  Verwendungsfahigkeit  von  Ersatzmate- 
rial  fiir  Platin  bei  Konzentrationsapparaten  fur  reine  98-99er 
Schwefelsaure  nach  D.  R.  P.  272158.  Pt,  Sub. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  27,  i (1914),  455;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  3706. 

1914:  132.  S.  Barth.  Bemerkung  zu  den  Ausfuhrungen  des 
Herrn  W.  Strzoda  (1914:  131)  iiber  “ Verwendungsfahig- 

keit von  Ersatzmaterial  fiir  Platin  bei  Konzentrationsappa- 
raten.  ” Pt,  Sub. 

Z.  angew.  Chem  27,  i (1914),  536;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  514. 

1914:  133.  D.  F.  Calhane  and  T.  C.  Wheaton.  . Fine-meshed  brass 
gauze  as  a substitute  for  platinum  in  electro  analysis.  Pt,  Sub. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  12  (1914),  87;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  11  (1914),  324;  C.  A.  8 
(1914),  1397. 

1914:  134.  O.  L.  Barnebey.  A silver-plated  copper  gauze  elec- 
trode in  the  zinc  determination.  (In  the  place  of  platinum. 
Note.)  Pt,  Sub. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  36  (1914),  1144;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  106,  ii  (1914),  579; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1914,  ii,  373;  C.  A.  8 (1914),  2640. 

1914:  135. A substitute  for  platinum.  (Alloy  of  platinum 

45  per  cent,  gold  15  per  cent,  silver  25  per  cent,  copper  15 
per  cent.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Sci.  Amer.  Suppl.  78  (1914),  125. 

1914:  136.  E.  Skriwan.  (Composite  wires  from  metals  of  different 
melting  points,  such  as  platinum  and  copper.)  (Especially 

for  leading-in  wires  for  incandescent  lamps.)  (German  patent 
292376,  Mar.  1,  1914.)  Pt,Sub. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1795. 

1915:  1.  The  search  for  platinum.  (Editorial.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  110  (1915),  751. 


1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  419 

la.  G.  S.  Scott.  The  search  for  platinum.  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  111  (1915),  270. 

lb.  R.  S.  Botsford.  Dredging  for  platinum  in  the  Kytlim 

Valley,  Russia.  (Illustrated  paper.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  110  (1915),  327. 

2.  A.  Duparc,  A.  del  Campo  y Cerdan,  and  S.  Pina  de 

Rubies.  (New  investigations  on  the  black  sand  of  Madagascar 
and  the  platiniferous  minerals  of  Westphalia.)  Pt. 

Anales  ffs.  qmm.  13  (1915),  82;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  268. 

3.  — — — Platinf unde  in- Deutschland.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  21  (1915),  160,  295. 

3a.  S.  Pina  de  Rubies.  (Presence  of  platinum  in  Spain.) 
(Summary.)  Pt. 

Anales  fis.  quim.  13  (1915),  420;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  106;  C.  A. 
10  (1916),  324,  2568. 

3b.  P.  P.  Filipenko.  (Spcrrylite  from  eastern  Siberia.)  Pt. 
Bui.  Acad.  sci.  Petrograd,  1915,  1229;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2566. 

4.  Discovery  of  platinum  in  black  sand  in  Lincoln 

County  and  Jefferson  County  (Deschutes  River),  Oregon.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915)  261,  428. 

5.  A.  KnGpf.  A gold-platinum-palladium  lode  in  southern 

Nevada.  ■ Pt,  Pd. 

Bui.  U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  620-A  (1915),  1;  0.  A.  9 (1915),  1591;  Mining 
Sci.  Press,  110  (1915),  876. 

6.  Mining  in  Nevada  in  1914.  (Discovery  of  plati- 
num in  Yellow  Pine  district;  Boss  Gold  Mining  Co.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  111. 

6a.  S.  W.  Mudd.  The  Boss  mine,  Good  Springs,  Nevada. 
Mining  Sci.  Press,  110  (1915),  297.  Pt,  Pd. 

7.  L.  O.  Kellogg.  The  war  and  our  metals.  (Reference  to 

platinum  and  its  discovery  in  Nevada,  p.  26.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mag.  49  (1915),  18. 

8.  Platinum  in  Oro  Mingo  mine  (Platina),  Clark 

County,  Nevada,  and  Boss  mine.  (Picture  of  Boss  mine, 
p.  784.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  388,  796. 

9.  J.  C.  Kennedy.  Occurrence  of  platinum  at  Boss  mine, 

Nevada.  Pt. 

Mining  Eng.  World,  42  (1915),  939;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1889. 

10.  Platinum  in  California.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  1045. 


420 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1915:  11. Platinum  in  black  sand  in  Del  Norte  County, 


California.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  1137. 

1915:  12.  F.  Michel.  Platin  in  Bleiglatte.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  39  (1915),  6;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  13  (1915),  354;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1915,  i,  337;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1286. 

1915:  13.  J.  Loevy.  Edelmetalle  in  Bleiglatte.  (Colloidal  plati- 
num not  in  rocks.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  39  (1915),  287;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1252;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1881. 

1915:  14.  A.  del  Campo  y Cerdan  and  S.  Pina  de  Rubies.  (Le 

platine  dans  la  chromite  platinifere  de  l’Oural.)  Pt. 

Anales  ffs.  qufm.  13  (1915),  155;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  18  (1915),  495;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  353;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2750. 

1915:  15.  O.  Nagel.  (Geochemical  metal  adsorption.)  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Inch  Kolloide,  16  (1915),  19;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1591. 

1915:  15a.  G.  A.  Roush.  Production,  etc.,  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Mineral  Industry,  24  (1915),  572;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  136. 


1915:  16. Exports  of  platinum  from  Colombia  in  1913.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  ‘99  (1915),  126;  from  Bui.  Pan  Amer.  Union. 

1915:  17.  J.  M.  IIill.  The  production  of  platinum  and  allied 
metals  in  1914.  Pt. 

Min,  Resources  of  U.  S.  1914,  I (1915),  333;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1156. 

1915:  18. Metal  prices  in  1913  and  1914.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  49. 

1915:  18a. Metal  prices.  Pt,  Ir. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  weekly  reports. 

1915:  19. Markets  of  the  minor  metals  in  1914.  Pt,  Ir. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  77. 

1915:  20. The  platinum  market.  (Editorial.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  670. 

1915:  21. Metal  market.  (Weekly  reports  of  prices.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99,  100  (1915).  Pt,  Ir. 

1915:  22.  I.  Langmuir.  Chemical  reactions  at  low  pressures. 
(Oxidation  of  platinum  in  evacuated  bulb,  and  catalytic 
influence  of  platinum  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  37  (1915),  1139;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  518;  C.  A.  9 
(1915),  1562. 

1915:  22a.  E.  F.  Smith.  University  of  Pennsylvania  atomic 
weights.  Monograph,  1915.  (Palladium,  p.  12.)  Pd. 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  2422. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  421 

1-915:  23.  R.  E.  Lyons.  Recovering  platinum  from  black  sand. 
(U.  S.  patent  1126646,  Jan.  26,  1915.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  592. 

1915:  24.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  E.  Fritzman.  (Complex  com- 
pounds of  platinum  with  telluric  ethers.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1914),  588;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915), 
644;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2491. 

1915:  24a.  L.  Mond.  Ruthenium  dicarbonyl.  Ru. 

Report  Brit.  Assoc.  1915,  393;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  443. 

1935:  25.  E.  V.  Zappi.  (Preparation  of  chloroplatinic  acid  and 
of  the  chlorides  of  gold  and  palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Anales  Soc.  qulm.  Argentina,  3 (1915),  68;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915), 
835;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1307. 

1915:  26.  E.  V.  Zappi.  (Preparation  of  potassium  chloroplat- 
inate.)  Pt. 

Anales  Soc.  qiiim.  Argentina,  3 (1915),  186;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915) 
836;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1307. 

1915:  27.  A.  Gutbier  and  F.  Krauss.  Chlorosalze  des  Ruthe- 
niums. Ru. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  91  (1915),  103;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  i (1915),  120;  Chem, 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  474;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2196. 

1915:  28.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff.  (A  new  method  of  preparing 
chloro-  and  bromo-triammino-platinous  haloids.)  (Cleve’s 
salts.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1915),  201;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  107  (1915), 
1247;  108,  ii  (1915),  784;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  1176;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
3181;  10  (1916),  3039. 

1915:  29.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff.  (New  reaction  for  Peyrone’s  salt.) 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1915),  213;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  3039.  Pt. 

1915:  30.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Chlopin.  (Complex  plati- 
num compounds.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1915),  777. 

1915:  31.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Chlopin.  Sur  la  serie  des 
sels  hydro xo-pentamino-platiniques.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  161  (1915),  699;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  106;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1916,  i,  408;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  726. 

1915:  32.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  S.  S.  Kiltuinovicii.  (Elec- 
trical conductivity  of  the  ammoniacal  compounds  of  plati- 
nonitrites.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1915),  757;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  3040. 

1915:  33.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  N.  Wladlmiroff.  (Ammoniacal 
compounds  of  platinonitrites.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1915),  757. 


422 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1915:  34.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Lebedinski.  Sur  deux 
series  de  complexes  derives  du  platine  bivalent  et  corre- 
spondant  a l’indice  de  coordination  6.  (With  acetonitril 
and  ammonia.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  161  (1915),  563;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (191 5 , 
776;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4].  19  (1916),  126;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  i (1916  , 
21;  Chem.  Zentr.  1916.  i,  360;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  432. 

1915:  35.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  M.  Skaxaeff-Gregorieff. 
(New  series  of  complex  platinum  compounds.)  Ft. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1915),  776. 

1915:  36.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  I.  Tscherxaeff.  Sur  les  com- 
plexes hydro xyl-ammonies  du  platine  bivalent.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  161  (1915),  637;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  47  (1915),  201; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1916.  i,  407. 

1915:  37.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  I.  Tscherxaeff.  Sur  la  serie 
de  triamino-aquo-sels  du  platine  bivalent.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  161  (1915),  792;  J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  27  (1915), 
1806;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110.  ii  (1916),  106;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  571. 

1915:  38.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  X.  Wladimiroff.  Une  serie 
nouvelle  de  composes  du  platine  tetravalent.  (Pentamino- 
chloroplatinique.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  160  (1915),  840;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  19  (1916),  40;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  569;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915.  ii,  781;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3181. 

1915:  39.  B.  Beckmax.  L>ber  den  Einfluss  von  Druck  und  Tem- 
peratur  auf  die  elektrische  Leitfiihigkeit  des  Palladiums  bei 
Wasserstoffokklusion.  Pd. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  46  (1915),  4S1;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  14  (1915),  224;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  780;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2026. 

1915:  40.  A.  Sieverts,  E.  Jurisch,  and  A.  Metz.  Die  Loslichkeit 
des  Wasserstoffs  in  den  festen  Legierungen  des  Palladiums 
mit  Gold,  Silber  und  Platin.  Pd.  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  92  (1915),  329;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  244;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  ii,  583;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3006. 

1915:  41.  (Work  of  the  Physikalisch-Technisch  Reichs- 

anstalt  in  1913.)  Includes  the  following: 

Hexxixg  on  resistance  of  some  grades  of  platinum  wires 
at  low  temperatures. 

Hoffmann  and  A.  Schulze  on  electrical  and  optical  tem- 
perature measurements. 

Mylius  and  Mazzuchelli  on  the  analytical  separation  of 
the  platinum  metals. 

Groschl^ff  on  platinum  substitutes.  (For  laboratory 
utensils,  Ta,  W,  nichrome,  Au,  Ag.) 

Huttxer  and  Mylius  on  colorimetric  determination  of 
metals.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru,  Sub. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  21  (1915),  2S6;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3148. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


423 


1915:  41a. (Work  of  the  Physikalisch-Technisch  Reichs- 

anstalt  in  1914.) 

Gehrcke  and  Janicki.  Measurement  of  ejfi.  (Dusting 
of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Henning.  Comparison  of  platinum  and  helium  thermome- 
ters below  — 190°.  Pt. 

H.  Schultze.  Measurements  with  platinum  thermome- 
ters at  Leiden  and  Teddington.  Pt. 

Holburn  and  Scheel.  Comparison  of  mercury  with 
platinum  thermometers  between  0°  and  100°.  Pt. 

Hoffmann  and  Meisner.  Comparison  of  mercury  with 
platinum  thermometers  between  100°  and  300°.  Pt. 

Hoffmann  and  A.  Schulze.  Electrical  and  optical  tem- 
perature measurements.  Pt,  Rh. 

Mylius.  Preparation  of  pure  metals.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh,  Ru,  Os. 

Groschuff  and  Lenz.  Platinum  substitutes.  Pt  (25%) 
Ag  alloy  for  melting  in  glass  for  lamps,  p.  511.  Pt,  Sub. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  21  (1915),  501;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  546. 

1915:  42.  P.  E.  Browning.  A note  on  the  qualitative  detection 
and  separation  of  platinum,  arsenic,  gold,  selenium,  tellurium, 
and  molybdenum.  Pt. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4], 40  (1915),  349;  Chem.  News,  112  (1915),  325;  Analyst,  41 
(1916),  84;  ,T.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  801;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii, 
1263;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3041. 

1915:  43.  L.  Brandt.  Die  Abscheidung  des  Platins  aus  Erzauf- 
schliissen  fur  die  massanalytische  Eisenbestimmung.  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  39  (1915),  553;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  702;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  ii,  491;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2854. 

1915:  44.  K.  Hradecky.  Notiz  liber  die  Loslichkeit  des  Palla- 
diums in  Selensaure  und  liber  Palladoselenate.  Pd. 

Monatsh.  36  (1915),  289;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  472;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1915,  ii,  69;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3183. 

1915:  45.  R.  B.  Sosman  and  J.  C.  Hostetter.  The  reduction  of 
iron  oxides  by  platinum,  with  a note  on  the  magnetic  suscepti- 
bility of  iron-bearing  platinum.  Pt. 

J.  Wash.  Acad.  Sc.  5 (1915),  293;  J.  Iron  Steel  Inst,  91,  i (1915),  623; 
Chem.  News,  111  (1915),  293;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  471;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  ii,  67;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1580. 

1915:  46.  A.  M.  Smoot.  Determination  of  platinum,  palladium, 
and  gold.  Pt,  Pd. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  700;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1441. 

1915:  47.  A.  M.  Smoot.  Determination  of  silver  in  ores  and  con- 
centrates containing  platinum  and  palladium.  Pt,  Pd. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  99  (1915),  701;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1442. 


424 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1915:  48.  I.  Koifman.  Ueber  die  Analyse  einiger  Platine  des 
Urals  und  iiber  die  analytische  Methode  zur  Trennung  der 
Metalle  des  Minerals  der  Platingruben.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Eh,  Os,  Ru . 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  [4],  40  (1915),  22;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  693; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  980;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2629. 

1915:  49.  I.  Koifman.  (Silver-platinum  alloys  and  their  analysis.) 

~ Pt. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  [4],  40  (1915),  509;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1910),  144; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1916,  i,  408;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1026. 

1915:  50.  F.  A.  Crampton.  Platinum  assaying  at  the  Boss  mine. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  111  (1915),  231;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3042.  Pt. 

1915:  50a.  T.  T.  Read.  Platinum  assaying  at  the  Boss  mine. 
(Favorable  criticism  of  Crampton,  1915:  50).  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  111  (1915),  269. 

1915:  51.  A.  C.  Christensen.  Ueber  Trennung  von  Gold  und 
Platin  von  anderen  Met  alien.  (By  hydrazin.)  Pt. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  54  (1915),  158;  Archiv  Pharm.  Chem.  22  (1915),  869; 
Analyst,  40  (1915),  293;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  287;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1915,  i,  856;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1441;  10  (1916),  869. 

1915:  52.  A.  Gutbier  and  C.  Fellner.  Ueber  die  Trennung  von 
Palladium  und  Zinn  mittels  Dimethylglyoxims.  Pd. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  54  (1915),  205;  Analyst,  40  (1915),  334;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
108,  ii  (1915),  493;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1228;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1727. 

1915:  53.  A.  Gutbier,  C.  Fellner  und  R.  Emslander.  Zur 
Trennung  von  Palladium  und  Zinn  durch  elektrolytische 
Abscheidung  des  Palladiums.  Pd. 

Z.  anal.  Chem.  54  (1915),  208;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1229;  Analyst,  40 
(1915),  334;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  492;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1726. 

1915:  54.  G.  Bruhat.  The  rotatory  dispersion  of  potassium 
irido-oxalate.  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  17  (1915),  223;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  658; 
C.  A.  9 (1915),  3220. 

1915:  55.  S.  Valentiner  and  J.  Wallot.  Ueber  die  A#rhangig- 
keit  des  Ausdehnungskoeffizienten  fester  Korper  von  der 
Temperatur.  Pt,  Ir,  Rh. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  46  (1915),  837;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1049;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
2024. 

1915:  56.  K.  R.  Koch  and  C.  Dannecker.  Die  Elastizi tat  einiger 
Metalle  und  Legierungen  bis  zu  Temperaturen,  die  ihrcm 
Schmelzpunkt  nahe  liegen.  Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  47  (1915),  197. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


425 


1915:  57.  Sainte-Claire  Deyille,  H.  Le  Chatelier,  and  others. 
Fusion  du  platine  et  dissociation.  Paris,  A.  Colin.  Pt. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  1874,  2836. 

1915:  58.  A.  Holt.  The  diffusion  of  hydrogen  through  palladium. 

Pd. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  91  A (1915),  148;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  18  (1915),  321;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  88;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  875;  0.  A.  9 (1915), 
877. 

1915:  59.  C.  Paal  and  A.  Schwarz.  Ueber  die  Adsorption  des 
Acetylens  durch  kolloidales  Plat  in,  Iridium,  und  Osmium  und 
durch  Platinschwarz.  Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Ber.  48  (1915),  1195;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  20  (1916),  230;  J.  Chem.  Soc. 
108,  i (1915),  765;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  389;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2615. 

1915:  60.  J.  Eggert.  Zur  Aktivierung  von  H2  und  02  durch 
Platin.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  21  (1915),  349;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  686;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 

3014. 

1915:  61.  C.  Beindl.  Manufacture  of  cyanogen.  (Passing  am- 
monia and  acetylene  over  metals.)  (U.  S.  patent  1144457, 
June  29,  1915.)  Ir,  Pd,  Rh. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  2296. 

1915:  61a.  Badisciie  Anilin  und  Soda  Fabrik.  Catalytic  agents 
for  production  of  nitrogen  oxides.  (British  patents  13297, 

13298,  May  21,  1915.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  528.  (Cf.  also  British  patents  1914,  13848,  and  1915, 
7651;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3338;  10  (1916),  2971). 

1915:  62.  C.  Amberger.  Organosole  von  Metallen  und  Metall- 
hydroxyden  der  Platingruppe.  III.  Os. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  17  (1915),  47;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  41; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  1177;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3159. 

1915:  62a.  J.  C.  Ghosh.  A new  method  of  preparing  colloids. 
(Electrolysis  of  solution  by  platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Rept.  Indian  Assoc.  Sci.  1915,  87;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  563. 

1915:  63.  J.  Donau.  Ueber  die  Bildung  kolloider  Losungen 
mittels  Flammen  oder  elektrischer  Entladungsfunken.  Pt. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  16  (1915),  81;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  19;  C.  A.  9 
(1915),  2170. 

1915:  64.  A.  Skita.  Ueber  die  katalytisehe  Reduktion  von  Alde- 
hyden  und  Ketonen.  Herrn  W.  Ipatieff  zur  Antwort  (Ber. 
45  (1912),  3218).  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  48  (1915),  1486;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  879;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  3249. 


426 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1915:  65.  A.  Skita.  Ueber  die  Reduktion  yon  aromatischen  Al- 
koholen,  Aldehyden  und  Ketonen.  Katalytische  Hydrier- 
ungen  ungesattigter  Stoffe.  X.  Pt,  Pd. 

Ber.  48  (1915),  1685;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  1101. 

1915:  66.  C.  Paal  and  H.  Buttner.  Ueber  katalytische  Wirk- 
ungen  kolloidaler  Metalle  der  Platingruppe.  XI.  Die  Re- 
duktion der  Motybdansaure.  Pd. 

Ber.  48  (1915),  220;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  728;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1883. 

1915:  67.  C.  Paal  and  C.  Hohenegger.  Ueber  katalytische 
Wirkungen  kolloidaler  Metalle  der  Platingruppe.  XII.  Die 
stufenweise  Reduktion  des  Acetylens.  Pd. 

Ber.  48  (1915),  275;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  728;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1184. 

1915:  68.  C.  Paal  and  A.  Schwarz.  Ueber  katalytische  Wirk- 
ungen kolloidaler  Metalle  der  Platingruppe.  XIII.  Die 
Hydrogenisation  des  Aethylens  mit  kolloidalem  Platin. 
XIV.  Die  stufenweise  Hydrogenisation  des  Acetylens  mit 
kolloidalem  Platin.  Pt. 

Ber.  48  (1915),  994,  1202;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  20  (1916),  231;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  638;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  263,  390;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
2380,  2650. 

1915 : 69.  F.  Kruger  and  E.  Taege.  Ueber  den  Einfluss  von  Kata- 
lysatorgiften  auf  die  lichtelektrische  Empfindlichkeit  des 
Platins.  Pt. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  21  (1915),  562;  Chem.  Zentr.  1916,  i,  406;  C.  A.  10 
(1916),  720. 

1915:  70.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  O.  Schneider.  Aktivierung  von 
Chloratlosungen  durch  Osmium.  III.  Trennung  von  Was- 
serstoff  und  Methan,  Katalyse  von  Knallgasgemischen. 

Os,  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Ru. 

Ber.  48  (1915),  1585;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  1088;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  303. 

1915:  71.  E.  Paulson.  Gesetzmassigkeiten  im  Platinspektrum. 

Pt. 

Ann.  Physik[4],  46  (1915),  698;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  197;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  1054;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2030. 

1915:  72.  E.  Paulson.  On  the  spectrum  of  palladium.  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  29  (1915),  154;-  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  34;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1915,  i,  355;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  881. 

1915:  73.  E.  Paulson.  Die  Wcllenzahlensysteme  des  Ruthe- 
niums. Ru. 

Physik.  Z.  16  (1915),  81;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  197;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1915,  i,  827;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2029. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


427 


1915:  74.  E.  Paulson.  Zur  Kenntnis  der  Spektren  von  Ruthe- 
nium, Niobium,  und  Thulium.  Ru. 

Physik.  Z.  16  (1915),  352;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  811;  Chem.  Zentr. 
1915,  ii,  1177;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  850. 

1915:  75.  O.  W.  Richardson  and  F.  J.  Rogers.  The  photoelec- 
tric effect.  III.  Ft. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  29  (1915),  618;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1295;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
1576. 

1915:  76.  A.  Benratii.  Photochemischc  Reaktionen  von  Ver- 
bindungen  seltener  Elemente.  (Action  of  light  on  chloro- 
iridites.)  Ir. 

Z.  wiss.  Phot.  14  (1915),  217;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  725;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
1723. 

1915:  77.  W.  Hallwachs.  Arbeit  von  K.  G.  Kober  liber  das 
lichtelektrische  Verhalten  von  in  bestem  Vakuum  gegllihtem 
Platin.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z . 16  (1915),  95. 

1915:  78.  E.  Wagner.  Spektraluntersuchungen  an  Rontgen- 
strahlen.  Pd,  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  46  (1915),  868;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1048;  C.  A.  9 
(1915),  2033. 

1915:  79.  E.  Wagner.  Bas  Rontgenspektrum  des  Platins.  Be- 
merkungen  zu  der  gleichnamigen  Arbeit  von  H.  Seemann. 
(1914:  99.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  16  (1915),  30;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  600;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1718. 

1915:  80.  H.  Seemann.  Zur  Rontgenspektrographie.  Bemer- 
kung  zur  vorstehenden  Arbeit  von  E.  Wagner.  (1915:  79.) 

Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  16  (1915),  32;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  600;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  1718. 

1915:  81.  J.  Laub.  Ueber  die  durch  Rontgenstrahlen  erzeugtcn 
Strahlen.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  46  (1915),  785;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1048;  C.  A.  9 
(1915),  2033. 

1915:  82.  J.  Laub.  (An  emission  law  for  homogeneous  Rontgen 
rays.)  Pt. 

Ber.  physik.  Ges.  17  (1915),  104;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2033. 

1915:  83.  N.  Campbell.  The  ionization  of  metals  by  cathode 
rays.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  29  (1915),  369;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  874;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
1429. 


428 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1915;  84.  W.  H.  Bragg.  The  relation  between  certain  X-ray 
wave  lengths  and  their  absorption  coefficients.  Pd,  Rh. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  29  (1915),  407;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  871;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
1429. 

1915:  85.  W.  Meissner.  Thermische  und  elektrische  Leitfahig- 
keit  einiger  Metalle  zwischen  20°  und  373°  absolut.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  47  (1915),  1001;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  1128. 

1915:  86.  L.  Fabaro.  (Specific  heat  of  platinum  at  high  tem- 
perature.) Pt. 

N novo  cimento  [6],  9,  i (1915),  123;  J.  Inst.  Metals,  14  (1915),  226;  J. 
Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915),  672;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2346. 

1935:  87.  A.  Magnus.  Die  spezifische  Warme  des  Platins.  CPt  = 
0.03159  +0.0000058468t).  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  48  (1915),  983;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  79;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1916,  i,  459;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1954. 

1915:  87a.  C.  Benedicks.  (Electric  conductivity  of  metals  and 
alloys).  Ru. 

Svensk.  Kern.  Tick  27  (1915),  136,  168;  28  (1916),  26;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  748. 

1915:  88.  H.  Pelabon.  Proprietes  des  piles  thermo- electriques. 
(Platine-seleniures  d’etain.)  Pt. 

Ann.  phys.  [9],  3 (1915),  97. 

3 915:  89.  W.  Frey.  Die  Abhangigkeit  des  Halleffekts  in  Metallen 
von  der  Temperatur.  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik  [4],  46  (1915),  1057,  1094;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  1356. 

1915:  90.  F.  Streintz  and  A.  Wesely.  Schwingungen  von  elek- 
trisch  gliihenden  Platinfaden.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  16  (1915),  85. 

1915:  91.  W.  M.  Jones.  Frictional  electricity  on  insulators  and 
metals.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  29  (1915),  261;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  821;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
2482. 

3915:  92.  G.  K.  Burgess  and  R.  G.  Waltenberg.  The  emis- 
sivity  of  metals  and  oxides.  II.  Measurements  with  the 
micropyrometer.  Pt. 

Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  11  (1915),  591. 

1915:  93.  P.  D.  Foote.  The  emissivity  of  metals  and  oxides.  III. 
The  total  emissivity  of  platinum  and  the  relation  between 
total  emissivity  and  resistivity.  Pt. 

J.  Wash.  Acad.  Sc.  5 (1915),  1;  Bui.  Bur.  Standards,  11  (1915),  607; 
Sci.  Paper  Bur.  Standards,  243  (1915);  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  i,  354; 
C.  A.  9 (1915),  40 4,  2348. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


429 


1915:  94.  • F.  Horton.  The  effects  of  different  gases  on  the  elec- 
tron emission  from  glowing  solids.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  91  A (1915),  322;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  61; 
C.  A.  9 (1915),  2028. 

1915:  95.  O.  W.  Richardson.  The  influence  of  gases  on  the 
emission  of  electrons  and  ions  from  hot  metals.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  91  A (1915),  524;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  1094. 

1915:  95a.  P.  R.  Heyl.  Alloy  for  electric  contact  points.  (Silver 
with  40  to  80  per  cent  palladium.)  (U.  S.  patent  1166129, 
Dec.  28,  1915.)  Pd,  Sub. 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  588. 

1915:  96.  G.  K.  Burgess  and  P.  D.  Sale.  A study  of  the  quality 
of  platinum  ware.  Pt. 

Sci.  Paper  Bur.  Standards,  254  (1915),  J.  Wash.  Acad.  Sc.  5 (1915), 
378;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  7 (1915),  561;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  108,  ii  (1915), 
586;  Chem.  Zentr.  1915,  ii,  314,  633;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2609. 

1915:  97. A test  for  platinum  ware.  (Note.  Cf.  1914: 

123.)  Pt. 

Sci.  Amer.  113  (1915),  267. 

1915:  98.  F.  Hoffmann  and  W.  Meissner.  (Comparison  of  mer- 
cury thermometers  with  platinum  thermometers.)  Pt. 

Z.  Instrumentenk.  35  (1915),  41;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2331, 

1915:  99.  W.  G.  Grant.  Platinum  baskets  for  use  in  combustion 
furnaces.  Pt. 

Chem.  Analyst,  14  (1915),  24:  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2611. 

1915:  100.  C.  J.  Van  Ledden  Hulsebosch.  (Das  Justieren  von 
alten  Platinmilligrammgewichten.  (Mit  AuC13.)  Pt. 

Pharm.  Weekblad,  52  (1915),  1679;  Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  468; 
Chem.  Zentr.  1916,  i,  450;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1803. 

1915:  101.  C.  H.  Weber.  Die  elektrischen  Metallfadengluhlampen 
insbesondere  aus  Osmium,  Tantal,  Zirkon  und  Wolfram. 
Ihre  Plerstellung,  Berechnung  und  Priifung.  Leipzig,  M. 
Janecke.  Os. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  1009. 

1915:  102.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Making  platinum- tipped  nickel  contact 
points.  (U.  S.  patent  1130196,  Mar.  2,  1915.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  9 (1915),  1027. 

1915:  102a.  W.  D.  Coolidge.  Gold  and  platinum  coated  tung- 
sten dental  pins.  (U.  S.  patent  1162342,  Nov.  30,  1915.) 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  169.  Pt,  Sub. 

1915:  102b.  General  Electric  Co.  Leading-in  wires.  (Cobalt- 
nickel  alloy.)  (British  patent  13207,  Sept.  15,  1945.)  Sub. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  424. 


430 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1915: 

1916: 

1916: 

1916: 

1916: 

1916: 

1916: 

1916: 


103.  M.  Kateridge.  Gold  and  platinum  plating.  Pt. 

Metal  Ind.  13  (1915),  108;  C.  A.  9 (1915),  2738. 

104.  J.  Guzman  and  L.  Ulzurrum.  (Electroanalyse  du 

cuivre  sans  les  electrodes  du  platine.)  Pt,  Sul). 

Anales  fis.  quim.  13  (1915),  289;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  18  (1915),  684; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  114. 

105.  J.  Guzman  and  J.  Aleman  y.  (Electroanalyse  de 

F argent  sans  electrodes  de  platine.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Anales  fis.  quim.  13  (1915),  343;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  20  (1915),  282. 

106.  S.  W.  Parr.  An  acid-resisting  alloy  to  replace  platinum 

in  the  construction  of  a bomb  calorimeter.  Pt,  Sub. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  37  (1915),  2515;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  20  (1916),  2S3; 
J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  38;  Chem.  Zentr.  1916,  i,  360;  C.  A.  9 (1915), 
3205. 

106a.  G.  €.  Trabacchi.  (Electrolytic  interrupter  for  alter- 
nating current.)  (Replacement  of  platinum  point  by  alu- 
minum.) Sub. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  24,  ii  (1915),  126;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3179. 


107. Ersatz  des  Platins.  (Work  of  Physikalisch- 

Technisch  Reichsanstalt.  Cf.  1915:  41.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  21  (1915),  160,  293. 

1.  D.  de  Qrueta  and  S.  Pina  de  Rubies.  Sur  la  presence 

du  platine  en  Espagne.  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  162  (1916),  45;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  144;  C.  A.  10 
(1916),  2084. 

2.  L.  Duparc  and  A.  Grossett.  Etude  comparee  des  gites 
platiniferes  de  la  Sierra  de  Ronda  (Espagne)  et  de  l’Oural. 

Mem.  Soc.  phys.  et  hist.  nat.  Geneve,  38,  fasc.  5 (1916),  253.  Pt. 

3.  L.  Duparc.  Le  platine  et  les  gites  platiniferes  de  1’Oural. 

Mem.  Soc.  ing.  civils  franf.  Bui.  Jan.-Mar.  1916.  Pt. 


4. 


Platinum  in  Spain. 


Pt. 


Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  141;  from  Madrid  cientifico,  Nov.  15,  1915. 


5.  Discovery  of  platinum  in  Monroe  Township,  in 

northern  Ontario.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  161. 

6.  Porcupine  and  Kirkland  Lake  news.  (Platinum 

in  Canada.)  Pt. 

Min.  Sci.  Press,  112  (1916),  139. 

7.  Platinum  from  Tulameen  River,  British  Columbia. 


Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  1040. 


Pt. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


431 


1916:  8,  T.  W.  Gruetter.  Platinum  on  the  Pacific  coast.  Pt. 
Min.  Sci.  Press,  113  (1916),  20. 

1916:  9.  Platinum  in  Compton  mines,  Grant  County, 

Oregon.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  1135. 

1916:  10.  S.  Pina  de  Rubies.  (The  presence  of  nickel  in  native 

platinum.)  Pt. 

Arch.  sci.  phys.  nat.  41  (1916),  475;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  442; 
C.  A.  10  (1916),  2566. 

1916:  11.  G.  F.  Kunz.  Platinum.  (A  review.)  Pt. 

Mineral  Industry,  25  (1916),  586;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2874. 

1916:  12. — Platinum  production  in  1915.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir-Os,  Ir. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  780. 

1916:  13. Platinum  production.  Pt. 

Min.  Sci.  Press,  113  (1916),  174. 

1916:  14.  — Platinum  in  Russia.  (Report  from  British 

Government  Board  of  Trade  J.  Oct.  26,  1916.)  Pt 

Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916)  1113. 

1916:  15.  J.  P.  Hutchins.  Mining  in  the  Russian  Empire,  1 9 i 5. 
(Includes  platinum  production  and  prospects.)  Pt, 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  125. 


1916:  16. Increased  platinum  production  (in  the  United 

States).  (Includes  also  world  production.)  Pt. 

Eng.' Mining  J.  102  (1916),  144. 


1916: 


17. Platinum  production  of  the  United  States  in 

1914.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  6. 


1916:  18.  F.  A.  Crampton.  Platinum  at  the  Boss  mine,  Good 


Springs,  Nevada.  Pt. 

Min.  Sci.  Press,  112  (1916)  479. 

1916:  19.  A.  Knopf.  Platinum  at  the  Boss  mine.  Pt. 

Min.  j3ci.  Press,  112  (1916),  623. 

1916:  20.  A.  Knopf.  Economic  geology  in  1915.  (Boss  mine.) 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  103.  Pt,  Pd. 

1916:  21.  — California  mineral  production.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  971. 

1916:  22.  Platinum  Mining  & Milling  Co.  (Rambler  mine, 

Wyoming.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  281. 


432 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1916:  23. Mineral  production  of  Canada.  (From  the 

preliminary  report  b}^  J.  McLeish,  Division  of  Mineral  Re- 
sources, Department  of  Mines.)  (Platinum  from  British 
Columbia.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  484. 

1916:  24. Platinum  production  of  Colombia.  (1915.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  668. 

1916:  25. Commercial  movement  of  the  precious  metals 

(with  chart  of  platinum  fluctuations  in  1914  and  1915).  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  45. 

1916:  26.  Platinum.  (Fluctuation  of  prices.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  46. 

1916:  27. Platinum  market.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  756,  839,  925;  102  (1916),  570. 

1916:  28.  — — - — Metal  prices.  Pt,  Ir. 

Min.  Sci.  Press,  weekly  reports. 

1916:  29.  L.  Quennessen.  (The  platinum  industry  during  the 
war.)  Pt. 

Bull.  Soc.  d’encourage.  indust.  nat.  125  (1916),  327;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  195. 

1916:  30. War  importance  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  385. 

1916:  31. Guarding  the  precious  metals.  (British  em- 

bargo on  platinum,  from  Daily  Consular  and  Trade  Repts., 
Mar.  28,  1916.)  Pt, 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  1000. 

1916:  31a.  G.  M.  Butler  and  G.  J.  Mitchell.  Metals  of  the 
platinum  group.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Oregon  Bur.  Mines.  Geol.  Min.  Res.  2 (1916),  67. 

1916:  32.  — Platinum.  (General  review  of  the  metal  and 

its  uses.)  Pt. 

Engineering,  102  (1916),  163;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2684. 

1916:  33.  — Detection  of  colloidal  platinum  in  ores.  (Can 

be  detected.  Cf.  1915:  13.)  Pt, 

Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  308. 

1916:  34.  H.  Haedicke.  (Separation  of  platinum  by  a dry  proc- 
ess.) (Powdered  ore  passed  between  poles  on  which  the 
platinum  fuses.)  (German  patent  297211,  July  28, 1916.)  Pt. 

1916:  35.  V.  N.  Ivanov.  (New  method  of  precipitating  platinum 
sulphide,  and  analysis  of  platinized  asbestos.)  (Use  of  MgCl2 
with  H2S.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1916),  527;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  766. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


433 


1916:  36.  J.  B.  and  A.  Tingle.  A rapid  method  of  converting 
scrap  platinum  into  chloroplatinic  acid.  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  35  (1916),  77;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  190;  C.  A. 
10  (1916),  1016. 

1916:  37.  N.  Domanicki.  (Reaction  of  sulphur  chloride  with  met- 
als. Catalytic  action  of  ether.)  (No  action  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1916),  724;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917), 
369;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3184. 

1916:  38.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  PIuttlinger.  Rhodium.  Rh. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  95  (1916),  247;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  482;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1916,  ii,  306;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2307. 

1916:  39.  A.  Gutbier,  A.  Huttlinger,  and  O.  Maisch.  (The 
action  of  oxygen  on  rhodium.)  Rh. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  95  (1916),  225;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  483;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  1181;  Chem.  Zentr.  1916,  ii,  306;  C.  A.  11  (1917), 
2307. 

1916:  40.  A.  Gutbier,  G.  A.  Leuchs,  and  PI.  Wiessmann.  (The 
oxides  of  ruthenium.)  (No  Ru205.2H20.)  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  95  (1916),  177;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  483;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1916,  ii,  465;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1379. 

1916:  41.  A.  Gutbier,  G.  A.  Leuchs,  H.  Wiessmann,  and  O. 
Maisch.  (The  action  of  oxygen  on  ruthenium.)  (Ru02  and 
Ru04.)  Ru. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  96  (1916),  182;  Chem.  Zentr.  1916,  ii,  466;  C.  A.  11  (1917), 
1379. 

1916:  42.  A.  Gutbier  and  C.  Fellner.  (Researches  on  palladium.) 
(Organic  chloropalladites.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  95  (1916),  129;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  i (1917),  541;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1916,  ii,  460;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1375. 

1916:  43.  A.  Gutbier  and  C.  Fellner.  (A  new  class  of  palladium 
compounds.)  (Trichloropalladites  and  tribromopalladites. 
X'PdCl3.)  Pd. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  95  (1916),  169;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  i (1917),  542;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1916,  ii,  465;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1378. 

1916:  44.  H.  J.  Mandel.  (Ethylaminochromium  compounds.  II. 
Chloropentaethylaminochromic  salts.)  (Chloro-  and  bromo- 
platinates.)  Pt. 

Ber.  49  (1916),  1703;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  759. 

1916:  45.  F.  Kehrmann,  A.  Robert,  and  M.  Sandoz.  (Dyes  of 
the  methylene  blue  group.  III.  Moderated  action  of  ali- 
phatic amins  on  phenazthionium  salts.)  (Chloroplatinates.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  49  (1916),  2831;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  i (1917),  226;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2783. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 28 


434 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1916:  46.  K.  Lederer.  (m-Tolyl  tellurium  compounds.)  (Ckioro- 
platinates.)  Pt. 

Ber.  49  (1916).,  1071; C.  A.  11  (1917),  §03. 

1916:  47.  A.  Minozzi.  (The  preparation  of  certain  selenocyano- 
platinates.)  Pt. 

Atti  1st.  veneto,  69,  ii,  453;  70,  ii,  693;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1477. 

1916:  48.  L.  A.  Tschugaeff  and  S.  S.  Kiltuinovi:ch,  Ammonia-, 
cal  derivatives  of  platinous  nitrite.  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  109  (1916),  12S6;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  561. 

1916:  49.  L . A.  Tschugaeff  and  W.  Lebedinski.  Sur  une  serie 
nouvelle  de  composes  platiniques  analogues  aux  sels  de 
Cossa.  (With  acetonitril.)  Pt. 

Compl,  rend.  162  (1916),  43;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  i (1916),  204;  C.  A.  10 
(1916),  1144. 

1916:  50.  E.  Biilmann  and  A.  Hoff.  (Complex  combinations 
of  platinum  and  mercury.)  Pt. 

Rec.  trav.  cliim.  36  (1916;,  306;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3036. 

1916:  51.  G.  A.  Barbieei.  (Internal  salts  of  sexavalent  osmium 
and  of  cobalt  and  nickel,  with  salicylic  acid.)  Os. 

Atti  Accad.  Lincei  [5],  25,  ii  (1916;,  74;  J.  Chem.  Sec.  110.  i (1916),,  727; 
C.  A.  11  (1917),  796. 

1916:  52.  A.  Tiberg,  (Some  complex  compounds  of  ethylene  t-liio- 
gljcolhc  acid.)  (Platinum  compound.)  Pt. 

Ber.  49  (1916),  2029;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  950. 

1916:  53.  D.  P.  Smith  and  F.  H.  Martin.  The  occlusion  of  hydro- 
gen by  a palladium  cathode.  Pd. 

J.  Am.  Chem.  Soc.  33  (1916;,  2577;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  8. 

1916:  54.  C.  M.  Hoke  and  R.  J.  Moore.  The  solution  of  platinum 
in  aqua  regia.  Pt. 

Metal  Ind.  14  (1916),  296;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2333. 

1916:  55.  E.  Salkowski.  (Behavior  of  metals  toward  acids  con- 
taining hydrogen  peroxide.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Ztg.  40  (1916),  448;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2559. 

1916:  56.  C.  M.  Hoke.  The  melting  of  platinum.  Pt 

Metal  Ind.  14  (1916),  375,  470;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2634;  11  (1917),  327. 

1916:  57.  G.  Holst  and  E.  Gosterhuis.  (Note  on  the  melting 
point  of  palladium  and  Wien’s  constant,  c*.)  Pd. 

Proc.  Acad.  Sc.  Amsterdam,  19  (1916),  549;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  734. 

1916:  58.  G.  K.  Burgess  and  R.  G.  Waltenberg.  Further  experi- 
ments on  the  volatilization  of  platinum.  Pt. 

Sci.  Papers,  Bur.  Standards,  280  (1916),  365;  J.  Wauah.  Acad.  Sc.  G 
(1916),  365;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  8 (1916),  487;  0.  A.  10  (1916),  1803. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


435 


1916:  59.  P.  P.  von  Veimarn.  (Dispersoid  chlorides  of  potassium, 
sodium,  etc.,  in  aromatic  hydrocarbons  as  dispersing  media.) 
(Undertaking  similar  experiments  on  platinum  metals.) 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1916)  1048;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3143. 

1916:  60.  Kalle  & Co.  Art.  Ges.  (Salves  containing  colloidal 
compounds  of  bivalent  palladium  and  bivalent  platinum.) 
(Austrian  patent  71554.  Apr.  25,  1916.  Of.  191 1 : 82.)  Pd,  Pt. 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  2510. 

1916:  61.  Kalle  & Co.  Akt.  Ges.  (Salve  products  containing 
colloidal  rhodium,  iridium,  osmium,  and  ruthenium  in  lowest 
oxide  forms.)  (Austrian  patent  72138,  July  10,  1916.) 

C.  A.  10  (1916)*  3137.  ' Rh,  Ir,  Os,  Ru. 

1916:  62.  L.  S.  Gurvich.  (Theory  of  heterogeneous  catalysis.) 
(Includes  action  of  “poisons.”)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1916)  837;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1780. 

1916:  63.  G.  Lemoine.  (Catalysis  of  hydrogen  peroxide  in  hetero- 
geneous medium.  I.  Experiments  with  mercury  and  plati- 
num. II.  Experiments  with  platinum.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  162  (1916),  657;  Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  19  (1916),  313;  J. 

Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  309;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1959,  3017. 

1916:  64.  C.  Paal  and  A,  Schwarz.  (Catalytic  action  of  colloidal 
platinum  on  the  union  of  hydrogen  and  oxygen.)  Pt. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  [2],  93  (1916),  106;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  307;  C. 

A.  10  (1916),  2548. 

1916:  65.  C.  Paal.  (Catalytic  action  of  colloidal  metals  of  the 
platinum  group.  XV.  Oxidation  of  carbon  monoxide  in  the 
presence  of  colloidal  platinum,  iridium,  and  osmium.) 

Pt,  Ir,  Os. 

Ber.  49  (1916),  548;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110.  ii  (1916.!,  307;  C.  A.  10  (1916), 

1462. 

1916:  66.  K.  A.  Hofmann  and  R.  Ebert.  (Catalysis  of  hydrogen- 
oxygen  mixtures  at  ordinary  temperature  on  water-covered 
contacts.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Ber.  49  (1916),  2369;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  738. 

1916:  67.  A.  Sieverts  and  E.  Peters.  (Catalytic  oxidation  of 
aqueous  hypophosphite  solution  by  platinum.)  Ft. 

Z physik.  Chem.  91  (1916),  199;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1910),  237;  C.  A. 

10  (1916),  1457. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


436 

1916:  68.  G.  Scagliarini  and  G.  B.  Berti-Ceroni.  (Catalytic 
action  of  palladium  in  oxidation  reactions.)  Pd. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  46,  ii  (1916),  51;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  478. 

1916:  69.  D.  L.  Hammick.  A note  on  tlie  oxy-ammonia  tiame. 
(Nitrites  and  nitrates  are  formed,  even  in  the  absence  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  114  (1916),  285;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  420. 

1916:  69a.  Schuphaus.  (Oxidation  of  ammonia  to  nitric  acid.)  Pt. 

Metall  u.  Erz.  [2],  13  (1916),  22. 

1916:  69b. — (Oxidation  of  ammonia  to  nitric  acid.)  (Dif- 
ferent views.)  Pt. 

Cliem.  Ztg.  1916,  14. 

1916:  70.  J.  Boeseken  (and  O.  B.  van  der  Weide  and  C.  P. 
Mom).  (Catalytic  reduction  in  the  presence  of  platinum  and 
palladium.)  Pt,  Pd. 

Rec.  trav.  chim.  35  (1916),  260;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  239. 

1916:  71.  L.  Bercelles.  (Reaction  between  iodic  and  sulphurous 
acids  under  the  influence  of  catalysts  of  biologic  importance.) 
(Denies  influence  of  colloidal  platinum  on  the  reaction.)  Pt. 

Intern.  Ztsch.  phys.  chem.  Biol.  2 (1916),  444;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916), 
478. 

1916:  72.  F.  Mylius  and  C.  Huttner.  (Platinum  and  illuminating 
gas.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  Chem.  95  (1916),  257;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  482;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Ind.  35  (1917),  1064;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2176. 

1916:  73.  C.  W.  Haas.  (The  catalytic  decomposition  of  formic 

acid  by  rhodium.)  Rh. 

Z.  Elektrochem.  22  (1916),  443;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  739. 

1916:  74.  Id.  Dreyfus.  (Acetic  acid  and  acetaldehyde  from  acety- 
lene. (Use  of  platinum  and  palladium  sponge  as  catalyzers.) 
(French  patent  479656,  Apr.  27,  1916.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  870. 

1916:  75.  A.  Korevaar.  (Theoretical  considerations  on  hydrogen- 
ation as  the  basis  of  velocity  measurements  made  on  the 
hydrogenation  of  fumaric  acid  with  palladium  sol  as  a cata- 
lyzer.)^ • Pd. 

Chem.  Weekblad,  13  (1916),  98;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1002. 

1916:  76.  U.  Grassi.  (Catalytic  reaction  of  Sabatier.)  Pt. 

Nuovo  cimento,  11  (1916),  147;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1779. 

1916:  77.  J.  IIouben  and  A.  Pfau.  (Catalytic  reduction  of  hy- 
droxy- and  amino-benzoic  acids.)  (With  platinum  black.)  Pt. 

Ber.  49  (1916),  2294;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  963. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  437 

1916:  78.  S.  V.  Lebedev  and  A.  A.  Ivanov.  (Polymerization  of 
1-phenol-l,  3-butadiene.)  (Use  of  platinum  as  a catalyst.)  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Cliem.  Soc.  48  (1916),  997;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  787. 

1916:  79.  J.  S.  Salkind  and  V.  Markaryan.  (Addition  of  hydro- 
gen to  acetylene  compounds.  Hydrogenation  of  3,  6-dimcthyl- 
4-octin-3,  6-diol.)  (Use  of  palladium  and  platinum  black  as 
catalyzers.)  Pd,  Pt. 

J.  Russ.  Phys.  Chem.  Soc.  48  (1916),  538;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  584. 

1916:  80.  J.  W.  Terwen.  (Allotrophv  of  cyanogen.)  (Effect  of 
platinum  asbestos  as  catalyst.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  Chem.  91  (1916),  469;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  553. 

1916:  80a.  F.  Muller.  Manufacture  of  active  catalytic  substan- 
ces. (“  Werner  ’ ’ salts  of  platinum  metals  included.)  (German 
patent  307380,  Mar.  26,  1916.)  Pt,  Pd,  Kb. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  37  (1918),  767A. 

1916:81.  N.  Sulzberger.  Regenerating  catalysts.  (A  nickel  sili- 
cate with  palladium.)  (British  patent  105057,  Sept.  13,  1916.) 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  2144.  Pd. 

1916:  82.  A.  Gutbier,  J.  Huber,  and  J.  Krauter.  ( Cetraria 
islandica  as  a protective  colloid.  III.  Colloidal  palladium.) 

Pd. 

Z.  Chem.  Ind.  Kolloide,  18  (1916),  65;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  303; 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  2429. 

1916:  83.  A.  Gutbier  and  A.  Wagner.  (Protective  colloids.  7th 
series.  Semen  cydoniae  as  protective  colloid.  V.  Colloidal 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Kolloid.  Z.  19  (1916),  280;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  168;  J.  Soc. 

Chem.  Ind.  36  (19] 7),  569;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  905. 

1916:  84.  S.  Pagliani.  (The  relations  existing  between  thermic 
properties,  the  molecular  coefficient,  and  the  constitution  of 
some  organic  compounds.)  Os,  Ir,  Rh. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  46,  ii  (1916),  310;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2981. 

1916:  85.  W.  Gerlach.  (The  application  of  lampblack  and  plati- 
num black  as  blackening  agents  for  the  receiver  in  absolute 
measurements  of  radiation.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik,  50  (1916),  245;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  911. 

1916:  86.  M.  La  Rosa.  (Thermoelectric  effect  in  a carbon  plati- 
num couple.)  Ir,  Pt. 

Nuovo  cimento,  12  (1916),  284;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2556. 

1916:  87.  K.  E.  F.  Schmidt.  (Refraction  of  Rontgen  rays  in 
metals.  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  17  (1916),  554;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1360. 


438 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP 


1916:  88.  P.  Cermak.  (Rontgen  ray  spectra  produced  on  curved 
crystal  faces.)  (Reference  to  “many  lined'’  spectrum  of 
platinum.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  17  (1916),  405,  556;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2857. 

1916:  89.  M.  Siegbahn  and  E.  F&iman.  (High-frequency  spectra 
(L  series)  of  the  elements  tantalum  to  bismuth;  arsenic  to 
rhodium.)  Pt,  Rh. 

Ann.  Physik,  49  (1916),  611,  616;  J.  Chein.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  3G2:  C.  A. 
10  (1916),  2664. 

1916:  90.  H.  Seeman.  (Rontgen  spectroscopic  methods  without 
a slit.)  (Spectrum  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Ann.  Physik,  49  (1916),  470;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2437. 

1916:  91.  Y.  Takasaki.  (Substances  in  expired  air  inhibiting  ca- 
talysis of  blood  and  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Mitt.  med.  Fak.  Univ.  Tokyo,  15  (1916),  Nr.  1;  J.  Am.  Med.  Assoc.  66 
(1916),  1666;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1996. 

1916:  92.  H.  F.  Biggs.  Decrease  in  the  paramagnetism  of  palla- 
dium caused  by  absorbed  hydrogen.  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  32  (1916),  131;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  110,  ii  (1916),  412;  C.  A.  10. 
(1916),  3025. 

1916:  93.  P.  G.  Nutting.  Some  quantitative  data  on  cathode 
deposited  metals.  Pt. 

J.  Franklin  Inst.  182  (1916),  115;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  3035. 

1916:  94.  E.  W.  Hobbs.  Change  in  resistance  of  a sputtered  film 
after  deposition.  Pt,  Pd. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  32  (1916),  141;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1787. 

1916:  95.  S.  Weber  and  E.  Oosterhuis.  (The  resistance  (electric) 
of  thin  films  of  metals.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Acad.  Sci.  Amsterdam,  19  (1916),  597;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1355. 

1916:  96.  E.  Newbery.  Overvoltage  tables.  I.  Cathodic  over- 
voltages. II.  Anodic  overvoltages.  (Platinum,  pp.  1055, 
1071;  iridium,  p.  1077.)  Pt,  Ir. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  109  (1916),  1051,  1066;  110,  ii  (1916),  598;  C.  A.  11>(1917), 
12,  316. 

1916:  97.  O.  W.  Richardson  and  C.  Sheard.  Variation  of  the 
positive  emission  currents  from  hot  platinum  with  the  applied 
potential  difference.  Pt. 

Phil.  Mag.  [6],  31  (1916),  497;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2836. 

1916:  98.  G.  K.  Burgess.  Some  problems  in  physical  metallurgy 
at  the  Bureau  of  Standards.  (Quality  of  platinum  ware.)  Pt. 

J.  Franklin  Inst.  182  (1916),  19;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1975. 

1916:  99. Platinum-rhodium  wire  subject  to  (U.  S.)  duty. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  1096.  Pt,  Rh. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


439 


1916:  100.  R.  J.  Peschko.  Alloy  for  jewelry,  scientific  instru- 
ments, etc.  (U.  S.  patent  1169753.  Jan.  25,  1916.)  Pd. 

C.  A.  10  (1910),  881. 

1916:  101.  G.  H.  Whiteley.  Alloys  (particularly  for  pins  for  arti- 
ficial teeth).  (Alloy  of  platinum  (15-20),  palladium  (30-35), 
gold  (45-55),  iridium  less  than  2%,  and  osmium,  ruthenium, 
and  rhodium  may  be  added.)  (British  patent  104025,  Feb.  18, 
1916.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Os,  Ru,  Rh,  Sub. 

G.  A.  11  (1917),  1823. 

1916:  101a.  PI.  S.  Cooper.  An  alloy  for  dental  uses.  (Palladium- 
gold.)  (Canadian  patent  174204,  Dec.  26,  1916.)  Pd,  Sub. 

C.  A.  12  (1918),  134. 

1916:  101b.  W.  D.  Coolidge.  Composite  metal  bodies.  (Tungsten 
or  molybdenum,  core  red  with  an  alloy  of  gold  and  platinum, 
for  dental  uses.)  (Canadian  patent  171441,  Aug.  22,  1916.) 

C.  A.  12  (1918),  472.  Pt,  Sub. 

1916:  102.  Electrometals  Products  Company,  assignees  of  H.  S. 
Cooper,  Cleveland,  Ohio.  (Palladium-gold)  alloy.  (Palla- 
dium 60%,  gold  40%;  for  laboratory  ware  and  dental  pur- 
poses.) (English  patent  109176,  Dec.  8,  1916  (application 
17669  of  1916).)  Pd,  Sub. 

1916:  103. A silver-palladium  alloy  to  replace  platinum  (for 

spark  contacts).  (Silver  98-40,  palladium  2-60.)  Pd,  Pt,Suh. 

Chem.  Trade  J.  Apr.  8,  1916,  from  Electrical  World;  J.  Soe.  Chem.  Ind. 

35  (1916),  474;  Eng.  Mining  J.  102  (1916),  542. 

1916:  104.  D.  Kremer.  Tungsten.  (Tungsten  alloys  with  plati- 


num.) Pt. 

Engineering,  102  (1916),  023;  0.  A.  11  (1917),  1105. 

1916:  105.  C.  M.  Hoke.  Fluxes  in  the  jewelry  factory.  (For 

melting  platinum.)  Pt. 

Metal  Ind.  14  (1916),  191;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2345. 

1916:  106.  H.  D.  Greenwood.  Platinum  vs.  gold  dishes.  (Use 

with  hydrofluoric  acid.)  Pt. 

Eng.  Mining  J.  101  (1916),  780. 


1916:  107.  M.  Bodenstein.  (The  dissociation  of  bromine  vapor.) 
(Use  of  platinum  vessel  and  platinum-rhodium  couple.) 

Z.  Elektrochem.  22  (1916),  327;  0.  A.  11  (1917),  2421.  Pt,  Rh. 

1916:  108.  F.  W.  Horton.  Molybdenum:  its  ores  and  their  con- 
centration. (Better  than  platinum  for  resistance  furnaces.) 
Chem.  News,  116  (1917),  257  (from  Government  publication).  Pt,  Sub. 

1916:  109.  T.  Swenson.  (Potential  changes  by  the  illumination 
of  oxidizing  agents.)  (Platinum  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Z.  phyaik.  Chem.  91  (1916),  624;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  746. 


440 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1916:  110. Method  of  using  the  vacuum  tube  for  plating 

on  glass.  (Use  of  platinum-iridium  cathode.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Electrical  World,  68  (1916),  1205;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  917. 

1916:  111.  O.  L.  Kowalke.  Cobalt  as  an  element  for  thermo- 
couples. (Use  of  platinum-rhodium  couples  as  standards.) 

Pt,  Rh. 

Trans.  Am.  Electrochem.  Soc.  29  (1916),  561;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  918. 

1916:  112.  H.  E.  Ivez.  Platinum  and  the  standard  of  light.  Pt. 

Lighting  J.  4 (1916),  150;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  2170. 

1916:  113.  E.  F.  Barker.  Selective  radiation  from  osmium  fila- 
ments. Os. 

Physic.  Rev.  7 (1916),  451;  0.  A.  10  (1916),  1809. 

1916:  114.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Coating  iron  or  steel  with  platinum. 
(U.  S.  patent  1189194,  June  27,  1916.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  2091. 

1916:  115.  B.  E.  Eldred.  Platinum-coated  wire.  (U.  S.  patent 
1197615,  Sept.  12,  1916.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  10  (1916),  2869. 

1916:  116.  F.  A.  Fahrenwald.  A development  of  practical  sub- 
stitutes for  platinum  and  its  alloys,  with  special  reference  to 
alloys  of  tungsten  and  molybdenum.  (From  Thesis,  Univer- 
sity of  Michigan,  1915.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Bill.  Am.  Inst.  Mining  Eng.  109  (1916),  103,  1000;  Mining  Sci.  Press, 
112  (1916),  136;  C.  A.  10  (1916),  1156,  1744. 

1916:  117.  T.  Yanai.  Leading-in  wires.  (Copper  wire,  first  oxi- 
dized superficial!}7,  then  set  in  glass  and  heated  till  a portion 
of  the  copper  oxide  is  dissolved  in  the  glass.)  (Japanese  patent 


29845,  Aug.  2,  1916.)  Sub. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  425. 

1916:  118.  F.  J.  Guzman  Carrancio  and  T.  Batuecas.  (Electro- 
analysis  of  copper  without  platinum  electrodes.)  Sub. 

Anales  fis.  quim.  14  (1916),  38;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  16. 

1916:  118a.  T.  Batuecas.  (Electro-analysis  of  tin  without  plati- 
num electrodes.)  Sub. 

Anales  fls.  qulm.  14  (1916),  495;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  457. 

1916:  119.  F.  J.  Guzman  Carrancio  and  E.  Jimeno.  (Electro- 
analysis  of  cobalt  without  platinum  electrodes.)  Sub. 

Anales  ffs.  quim.  14  (1916),  250;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2310. 

1916:  119a.  Kraft  end  Steudel  Fabrik  Phot.  Papiere.  (Process 
for  (palladium)  toning  of  silver  chloride  emulsion  papers.) 
(German  patent  302817,  Oct.  3,  1916.)  Pd. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  37  (1916),  351A. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


441 


1916: 


1917: 


1917: 


' 1917: 


1917: 


1917: 


1917: 


1917: 

'1917: 


1917: 


1917: 


1917: 


1917: 


120.  Exportation  of  the  metals  of  the  platinum 

group  from  Russia.  Pt. 

Board  of  Trade  J.  Mar.  30,  1916;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  35  (1916),  474. 

1.  G.  F.  Kunz.  Platinum;  with  especial  reference  to  Latin 
America.  (Historical  and  practical  review;  finely  illus- 
trated.) Pt. 

Bui.  Pan  American  Union,  Nov.  1917. 


2.  E.  T.  Wherry.  The  occurrence  of  the  native  elements 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 
Am.  Mineral.  2 (1917),  105;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2570. 

3.  L.  Quennessen.  Le  platine.  (Contains  list  of  all  occur- 
rences of  platinum.)  Pt. 

L’ Industrie  chimique,  4 (1917),  752,  774;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  798. 

4.  J.  M.  Hill.  Platinum  deposits  of  the  world.  Pt. 

Commerce  Repts.  Apr.  23,  1917;  Eng.  Mining  J.  103  (1917),  1145;  C.  A. 

11  (1917),  2440. 

5.  A new  source  of  platinum.  (Extraction  from 

dunite  in  Nizhni-Tagilsk  mining  circuit.)  Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  714;  from  Bui.  Siberian  Engineers’  Soc. 

6.  Investigation  of  the  platinum  deposits  of  Spain. 

Commerce  Repts.  May,  1917,  476;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  726.  Pt. 

7.  Placer  deposits  in  Ronda  Mountains  (Spain).  Pt. 

Commerce  Repts.  Oct.  1917,  311;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  10  (1918),  86. 

8.  J.  W.  Neill.  Platinum:  recovery  of  platinum  in  gold 

dredging.  (Merced  River.)  Pt. 

Mining  Sci.  Press,  115  (1917),  825;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  10  (1918),  169; 
C.  A.  12  (1918),  261. 

9.  — - Recovery  of  platinum  metals  from  Canadian 

nickel.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

Report  of  the  Royal  Ontario  Nickel  Commission,  1917,  481;  Chem.  News, 
11  (1917),  210;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  10  (1918),  76. 

10.  L.  Addicks.  By-products  in  electrolytic  copper  refin- 
ing. Pt,  Pd. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  169. 

11.  O.  Nagel.  Winning  metals  (etc.)  from  sea  water  or 
other  natural  solutions.  (Precipitation  on  adsorbents,  as 
fuller’s  earth.)  (British  patent  103310,  Jan.  12,  1917.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  653. 

12.  Adirondack  gold  and  platinum  sands.  (No 

platinum.)  Pt. 

- U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Press  Bui.  345,  Dec.  1917;  from  Press  Bui.  N.  Y.  Geol. 
Surv. 


442 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 


13. 


A platinum  “fake”  in  Oregon. 


14. 


Pt 

Pt 


15. 


U.  S.  Geol.  Surv.  Press  Bui.  347,  Dec.  1917. 

— Platinum:  fail  in  the  world’s  output. 

Canadian  Chem.  J.  1 (1917),  129. 

Supply  of  platinum.  (Statistics  and  review.) 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  16  (1917),  708.  Pt 


16. 


J.  M.  Hill.  Platinum  and  allied  metals  in  1916. 

Pt,  Pd.  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Riq  Sub 

Min.  Resources  of  U.  S.,  1916,  I,  1;  J.  lad.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  995 
C.  A.  11  (1917),  2571. 

17.  J.  P.  Dunlop.  Secondary  metals  in  1910.  (Recovery 

from  old  jewelry,  dental  waste,  etc.)  Pt,  Ir,  Pd 

Min.  Resources  of  U.  S.,  1916.  I (Oct.  1917);  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 
(1917),  1154. 

18.  Production  of  platinum  in  Russia  in  1916.  Pt 


Commerce  Repts.  May,  1917,  647;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  726. 


19. 


Production  of  platinum  (in  Russia.) 


Pt 


20. 


J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  906. 

Mineral  production  of  Canada  for  1916. 


Pt 


J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917  . 441;  from  Prelim.  Rept.  by  J.  McLeish 
Can.  Dept.  Mines,  Div.  of  Min.  Resources  and  Statistics. 


21. 


Mineral  output  of  British  Columbia  in  1916.  Pt 


Commerce  Repts.  May,  1917,  Suppl.  23b;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917) 
726. 


22.  R.  F.  Bacon.  Reducing  sulphides  of  metals.  (Dropping 
liquid  hydrocarbons  on  hot  sulphides.)  (U.  S.  patent  1243681 
Oct.  23,  1917.) 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  127S;  C.  A.  12  (1918;,  131 


Pt 


23. 


Estimates  by  Geological  Survey  of  platinun 


in  United  States,  and  annual  requirements. 
Commerce  Repts.  June.  1917,  866. 


Pt 


24. 


The  regulation  of  export^.  (Platinum  on  pro 


hibited  list.)  Pt 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  373;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  1250. 

25.  Additions  to  prohibited  import  list.  (Include! 


platinum  and  iridium.) 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  714. 

Prohibited  exports  (from  Great  Britain)) 


26 


(Order  of  Council,  Nov.  27.  1917.) 
J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  1201. 


pt,  iJ 

•itaiJ 
Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Rd 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


443 


1917:  27. British  control  of  platinum.  (Latter  from  G. 

Sliaw  Scott  to  Chas.  L.  Parsons.)  Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  731. 

1917:  28. Prohibited  exports.  (Sweden.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  1250. 

1917:  29.  — Smuggler  sentenced.  (Smuggling  of  platinum 

into  Germany  from  U.  S.  by  way  of  Holland  and  Belgium.)  Pt . 

Jewelers’  Circular,  75  (1917),  77. 

1917:  30.  C.  L.  Parsons.  Preliminary  report  to  the  Ordnance 
Department  on  the  nitrogen  industry,  with  recommendations 
regarding  the  methods  to  he  used  by  the  IT.  S,  Government 
in  procuring  the  necessary  nitric  acid  required  for  munitions 
by  the  War  and  Navy  Departments.  (Need  of  reservation  of 


platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng’.  Chem.  9 (1917),  <333. 

1917:  31.  C.  M.  Hoke.  Platinum  shortage  and  what  it  means. 
(Includes  description  of  substitutes.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Metal  Ind.  15  (1917),  204;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2059. 

1917:  32.  S.  J.  Johnstone.  The  rarer  key  minerals.  Lecture 
before  London  School  of  Economics,  Nov.  16,  1917.  (Plati- 
num in  war.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  116  (1917),  269. 


1917:  33.  Platinum  situation  in  the  United  States. 

Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Eh,  Os,  Ru. 


Commerce  Repts.  130  (1917) 

; J.  Soc.  Chem 

. Ind.  5 

►6  (1917),  ' 

719;  C.  A. 

11  (1917),  3131. 

1917: 

34. 

The  platinum 

l situation. 

(Edik 

>rial.) 

PL 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917  ), 

544. 

1917: 

35. 

The  platinum 

situation. 

(Edik, 

trial.) 

Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917), 

1085. 

1917: 

36. 

P.  Wooton.  Washington  letter. 

(The 

platinum  situ  a- 

tion.) 

Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917), 

1149. 

> 

1917: 

37. 

Action  of  Ai 

merican  Che 

mical 

Society 

regard- 

ing 

platinum. 

Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917  , 

444. 

1917: 

38. 

Platinum  in 

jewelry.  (( 

km  t air 

is  re  sole 

tie  ns  of 

the  Platinum  Committee  of  the  Jewelers’  Vigilance  Com- 
mittee.) Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  622. 


444 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1917:  39.  M.  Toch.  The  influence  of  pigments  on  rubber.  (State- 
ment of  shipment  of  platinum  to  Germany  by  submarine.)  Pt. 
J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  694. 

1917:40.  R.  Vondracek.  Numerical  relations  between  atomic 
weights.  Rh,  Pd,  Ru. 

Chemicke  Listy,  11  (1917),  33;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  460;  Chem. 
Zentr.  1917,  i,  840. 

1917:  41.  Ruff  and  H.  Rathsburg.  Osmium  dioxide.  Os. 

Ber.  50  (1917),  484;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  323;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind. 
36  (1917),  645;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2644. 

1917:  42.  J.  Milbauer.  The  reduction  of  osmium  tetroxide  by 
hydrogen  chloride.  Os. 

J.  prakt.  Chem.  96,  ii  (1917),  187;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  114,  ii  (1918),  202;  C.  A. 
12  (1918),  2172. 

1917:  43.  J.  S.  Thomas  and  A.  Rule.  The  polysulphides  of  the 
alkali  metals.  (Action  of  fused  alkali  sulphides  on  Pt-Ptlr 
thermocouple.)  Pt,  Ir. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  Ill  (1917),  1063. 

1917:44.  B.  Neumann.  (Black  sulphur.)  (Black  sulphur  of  Mag- 
nus and  Knapp  is  merely  colored  by  carbon  or  metallic  sul- 
phides of  iron  or  platinum.)  Pt. 

Z.  angew.  Chem.  30,  i (1917),  165;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  464;  C.  A. 
12  (1918),  569. 

1917:  45.  P.  Rudnick  and  R.  D.  Cooke.  Preparation  of  chloro- 
platinic  acid  by  means  of  hydrogen  peroxide.  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  39  (1917),  633;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  264; 
J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  545;  Chem.  News,  115  (1917),  259;  C.  A. 
11  (1917),  1101. 

46.  E.  H.  Archibald  and  J.  W.  Kern.  The  solubilities 
of  chloroplatinate,  bromoplatinate,  and  chloriridate  of  am- 
monium, and  the  separation  of  platinum  and  iridium.  Pt,  Ir. 
Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Canada,  11,  iii  (1917),  7;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  116,  i (1919), 
70;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  38  (1919),  40  A;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  1365. 

46a.  P.  Gaubert.  (The  optical  properties  of  magnesium 
chloroplatinate.)  Rt- 

Bui.  Soc.  franc,  min.  40  (1917),  177;  C.  A.  13  (1919),  926. 

46b.  Deniges.  (Microchemical  identification  of  stovain  andj 
cocain.)  (By  character  of  precipitate  with  H2PtCl6.)  Pt. 
Bui.  Soc.  pharm.  Bordeaux,  1917,  No.  4;  Ann.  chim.  analyt.  1 (1919), 
65;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  38  (1919),  198A. 

1917:  47.  A.  Eberhard.  Zinc  platinichlorid.  Pt. 


191' 


1917 


191 


Arch.  Pharm.  255  (1917),  65;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  313;  C.  A.  lljl 


(1917),  3004. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


445 


1917:  48.  M.  Delepine.  The  chlorides  and  chloro-salts  of  iridium. 
(Review  of  previous  work.)  Ir. 

Ann  chim.  7 (1917),  277;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  537;  C.  A.  11  (1917), 
2758. 

1917:  49.  G.  M.  Bennett.  The  crystal  form  and  isomerism  of 
some  ferroeyanides.  (Note  to  effect  that  Levy’s  yellow  and 
green  platocyanides  are  crystaHographically  and  therefore 
chemically  identical.)  (Cf.  1908:  28.)  Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  Ill  (1917),  490. 

1917:  50.  M.  Delepine.  (Complex  salts.  XIII.  Preparation  of 
potassium  irido-trioxalate  and  optical  isomerism  of  the 
iri do-trioxalates.)  (Same  essentially  as  1914:  38.)  Ir. 

Bui.  Soc.  chim.  [4],  21  ( 1917),  157 ; C.  A.  12  (1918),  27. 

1917:  51.  F.  M.  Jaeger.  (Investigations  into  Pasteur’s  prin- 
ciple of  the  connection  between  molecular  and  crystallo- 
nomical  dissymetry.  III.  Racemic  and  optically  active 
salts  of  trivalent  rhodium.)  Rh. 

Proc.  Acad.  Sci.  Amsterdam,  20  (1917),  244;  C.  A.  12  (1917),  887;  J.  Chem. 
Soc.  114,  i (1918),  7. 

1917:  52.  F.  M.  Jaeger,  (Pasteur’s  principle  of  the  relation  be- 
tween molecular  and  physical  asymmetry.  IV.  Racemic 
and  optically  active  complex  salts  of  rhodium.)  Rh. 

Proc.  Acad.  Sci.  Amsterdam,  20  (1917),  263;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  114,  i (1918),  3. 

1917:  53.  G.  A.  Barbieri.  (Internal  salts  of  hexavalent  osmium, 
of  cobalt,  and  of  nickel,  with  salicylic  acid.)  Os. 

Gazz.  chim.  ital.  47,  i (1917),  252;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  1026.  (Cf.  also  C.  A. 
11  (1917),  796.) 

1917:  54.  F.  Ephraim  and  S.  Millmann.  (Nature  of  subsidiary 
valences.  XIV.  Compounds  of  PtCl2  and  Ptl2  with  NH3.) 

Pt. 

Ber.  50  (1917),  529;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  319;  C.  A.  11  (1917), 
2979. 

1917:  55.  K.  G.  Falk  and  J.  M.  Nelson.  Some  comments  on  the 
theories  of  the  structure  of  matter.  (Pt  bases  as  electromers.) 

Science,  n.  s.  46  (1917),  551.  Pt. 

1917:  56.  H.  E.  A(rmstrong).  Obituary  notice  of  Hugo  Muller. 
(Reference  to  his  work  on  palladium  and  to  his  dissertation 
on  the  palladamins  (1853:  1).)  Pd. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  Ill  (1917),  580. 

1917:  57.  O.  P.  Watts  and  N.  D.  Whipple.  Corrosion  of  metals 
by  acids.  Pt. 

Trans.  Amer.  Electrochem.  Soc.  32  (1917)  (preprint);  C.  A.  11  (1917), 
3178. 


446  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

1917:  58.  F.  C.  G.  Muller.  (Electrolysis  of  hydrochloric  acid  in 
Hofmann's  apparatus.)  (Platinum  electrodes  hardly  attacked 

by  chlorine.)  Pt. 

Z.  physik.  chem.  Unterr.  30  (1917),  34;  J.  Chein.  Soc.  112.  ii  (1917 1.  403; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1917,  i,  991. 

1917:  59.  V.  Maori.  (Hydrogen  peroxide.)  (Action  on  platinum 
dish.)  Pt. 

Bol.  chim.  farm.  50  (1917 >,  417;  J.  Soc.  Chem  Ind.  36  (1917),  1271. 

1917:  60.  W.  Foster.  Action  of  potassium  permanganate  on  the 
metals.  (Acid  solution  reduced  by  finely  divided  platinum.) 

Chem.  News,  115  (1917),  73;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2074.  Pt. 

•1917:  61.  J.  H.  Smith.  On  a new  acid  sodium  phosphate  and  its 
action  upon  glass,  porcelain,  silica,  platinum,  and  nickel 
vessels.  (Strong  action  of  fused  Xa4P6017  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  lad.  36  (1917),  419;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  309; 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  2174. 

1917:  62.  K.  Hradecky.  (Action  of  selenic  acid  on  osmium.)' 
(Reduced  at  120°  to  SeO,,  with  formation  of  Os04.)  Os. 

Oesterr.  Chem.  Ztg.  [2],  20  (1917),  43;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  483; 

Chem.  Zentr.  1917,  i,  949;  C.  A.  12  (1918 y 657. 

1917.  63.  M.  Van  Brenkeleveen.  (Microchemical  determina- 
tion of  small  amounts  of  platinum  in  the  presence  of  gold 
and  silver.)  Pt. 

Rec.  tray.  chim.  36  (1917),  285;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3006. 

1917:  64.  R.  Vivario  and  M.  Wagexaar.  (Uro tropin  as  a micro- 
chemical reagent.)  (Characteristic  crystals.) 

Pt.  Pd.  Ir,  Os. 

Pharm  Weekblad,  54  (1917  .,  157;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1385. 

1917:  65.  L.  J.  Curtmax  and  B.  R.  Harris.  The  interference  of 
thiocyanates,  ferroeyanides.  and  ferricyanides  in  the  detection 
of  iodides  with  palladium.  Pd. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  39  (1917:,  266;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917 1,  267; 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  431. 

1917:  66.  T.  D.  Jarrell.  Report  on  determination  of  potash. 
(Use  of  chloroplntinic  acid.  ) Pt. 

J.  Assoc.  Off.  Agr.  Chem.  3 (1917),  107;  C*.  A.  11  (1917  , 2869. 

1917:  67.  V.  C.  Shippee.  Note  on  pure  sodium  chloride.  (Chloro- 
platinic  acid  method  of  determining  potash.)  Pt. 

Chem.  News,  116  (1917),  213;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  255. 

1917:  68.  H.  Pellet.  (Determination  of  potassium  and  sodium 
in  the  ash  of  vegetable  substances.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  analyt.  22  (1917),  14G,  179;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917), 

1109. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


447 


1917:  G9.  B.  Turkus.  (Determination  of  potassium  and  sodium 
in  sulphates  by  chloroplatinic  acid.)  Pt. 

Ann.  chim.  anal.  22  (1917),  101;  J.  Ohem.  So o.  112,  ii  (1917),  385;  C.  A. 
11  (1917),  2312. 

1917:  70.  E.  C.  Walker,  3d.  On  the  substitution  of  perchloric 
acid  for  chloroplatinic  acid  in  the  determination  of  potassium. 
(Cf.  also  C.  Sholl,  J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  30  (1914),  2085.  ) 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  810.  Pt,  Sub. 

1917:  71.  P.  L.  Hibbard.  Estimation  of  potassium.  The  Lindo- 
Gladding  method.  Pt,  Sub. 

,T.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  504;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  384. 

1917:  72.  P.  L.  Blumexthal,  A.  M.  Peter,  D.  J.  Healy,  and  E.  L 
Gott.  Method  of  ashing  organic  materials  for  the  estimation 
of  potassium.  Pt, 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  753;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  507 

1917:  73.  L.  Schneider.  The  application  of  palladium  as  an  indi- 
cator for  silver  titrations.  Abstract  of  paper  read  at  Boston 

meeting  of  American  Chemical  Society.  Pd. 

Science,  n.  s.  46  (1917),  622. 

1917:  74.  W.  D.  Bancroft.  Contact  catalysis.  II.  (Oxidation  of 
gases.)  Pt. 

J.  Phys.  Chem.  21  (1917),  644;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  13. 

1917:  75.  W.  I).  Bancroft.  Contact  catalysis.  I II.  (Poisons:  CO 
on  Pt;  grease  on  Pd.)  Pt,  Pd. 

J.  Phys.  Chem.  21  (1917),  734;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  328. 

1917:  7G.  N.  Sulzberger.  Catalyzers.  (Reduction  of  nickel  sili- 
cate by  hydrogen;  substitution  of  platinum  and  palladium 
for  nickel.)  (Canadian  patent  181287. Dec.  25, 1917.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  A.  12  (1918),  605. 

1917:  77.  J.  T.  Groll.  (Periodic  phenomena  shown  by  enzymes.) 
(Decomposition  of  hydrogen  peroxide  by  colloidal  platinum.) 

Pt. 

Arch,  neerland.  physiol.  1 (1917),  403;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  425; 
C.  A.  11  (1917),  3280. 

19 i 7:  78.  C.  K.  Reiman.  (Absolute  density  of  gaseous  hydrogen 
bromide.)  (Preparation  of  IIBr  by  passing  hydrogen  and 
bromine  over  platinum  at  25G°-300°.)  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.  164  (1917),  44;  C.  A.  II  (1917),  734. 

1917:  79.  W.  S.  Ourpiiey.  Alkali  inspector’s  report  for  1916. 
(Platinum  contact  mass  for  sulphuric  acid.)  Pt. 

Chem.  Trade  J.  61  (1917),  117,  141,  159;  Engineering,  104  (1917),  204, 
C.  A.  11  (1917),  3386. 


448 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS _OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1917:  80.  C.  Bosch,  A.  Mittasch,  and  C.  Beck.  Catalyst  for 
oxidizing  ammonia.  (Bi203  and  oxides  of  iron,  etc.,  or  metal 
of  platinum  group.)  (U.  S.  patent  1211394,  Jan.  9,  1917.) 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  691.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1917:  80a.  H.  R.  Hosmer.  Literature  of  the  nitrogen  industries. 
(Bibliography.)  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  424. 

1917:  80b.  J.  C.  Boyce.  Bibliography  of  the  production  of  syn- 
thetic nitric  acid  and  synthetic  ammonia.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  228. 

1917:  81.  G.  Bredig.  Formic  acid.  (Hydrogen  on  carbon  dioxide, 
with  platinum  or  palladium  as  catalyst.)  (U.  S.  patent 
1235426,  July  31,  1917.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  2580.  (Cf.  C.  A.  11  (1917),  86.) 

1917:  82.  C.  Paal,  F.  Biehler,  and  H.  Steyer.  (Colloidal  metals 
of  the  platinum  group.  IV.  Colloidal  iridium.)  Ir. 

Ber.  50  (1917),  722;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  375;  C.  A.  11  (1917), 
3142. 

1917:  83.  E.  N.  Harvey.  Studies  on  bioluminescence.  VIII. 
The  mechanism  of  the  production  of  light  during  the  oxida- 
tion of  pyrogallol.  (Action  of  colloidal  platinum.)  Pt. 

J.  Biol.  Chem.  31  (1917),  311;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2906. 

1917:  84.  B.  C.  Goss.  Production  of  light  at  low  temperatures  by 
catalysis  with  metal  and  metallic  oxide  hydrosols.  Pt. 

J.  Biol.  Chem.  31  (1917),  271;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  436. 

1917:  85.  A.  Mittasch,  C.  Schneider,  and  H.  Morawitz.  Cata- 
lyst for  hydrogenation  and  for  other  purposes.  (Artificial 
zeolite  (“permutite”)  impregnated  with  palladium  or  other 
platinum  metal.)  (U.  S.  patent  1215396,  Feb.  13,  1917.) 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1280.  Pt,  Pd,  Ir,  Rh,  Os,  Ru. 

1917:  86.  K.Kimura.  Hydrogenating  oils.  (British  patent  113232, 
Aug.  31,  1917.)  ~ Pt. 

C.  A.  12  (1918),  1423. 

1917:  87.  H.  Nomura.  Pungent  principles  of  ginger.  A new 
ketone,  zingiberone,  occurring  in  ginger.  (Reduction  by 
hydrogen  in  presence  of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Sci.  Rep.  Tohoku  Imp.  Univ.  6 (1917),  41;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2662. 

1917:  88.  Y.  Araiiina.  Reduction  of  co-nitrostyrene  derivatives 
(by  platinum  black).  Pt. 

J.  Pharm.  Soc.  Japan,  427  (1917),  785;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  40. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


449 


1917:  89.  A.  Sonn  and  A.  Schellenberg.  The  catalytic  reduc- 
tion of  co-nitrostyrenes  (by  platinum  black  and  colloidal 
palladium).  Pt. 

Ber.  50  (1917),  1513;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  114,  i (1918),  9. 

1917:  90.  C.  Paal.  Hydrogenating  terpene  compounds.  (U.  S. 
patent  1210681,  Jan.  2,  1917.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1019. 

1917:  91.  J.  D.  Edwards.  Effusion  method  for  the  determination 
of  gas  density.  (Orifice  in  Ptlr  plate.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Tech.  Paper  Bur.  Standards,  94  (1917);  Met.  Chem.  Eng.  16  (1917),  518; 
C.  A.  11  (1917),  2554.  (Cf.  also  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1771.) 

1917:  92.  F.  Kruger.  Gas  analysis  by  conductivity  measure- 
ments. (Preparation  of  resistances  by  cathodic  volatiliza- 
tion of  platinum.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  18  (1917),  112;  Sci.  Abstracts  (A)  20  (1917),  251;  C.  A.  11 
(1917),  3008. 

1917:  93.  G.  N.  Lewis,  T.  B.  Brighton,  and  R.  L.  Sebastian.  A 
study  of  hydrogen  and  calomel  electrodes.  (Iridium  elec- 
trodes.) Pt,  Ir. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  39  (1917),  2247. 

1917:  94.  C.  van  Dam.  (Absorption  of  odoriferous  substances  (by 
platinum,  etc.).)  Pt. 

Arch,  neerland.  physiol.  1 (1917),  666;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  i (1917),  607. 

1917:  94a.  Z.  Jeffries.  The  amorphous  metal  hypothesis  and 
equi-cohesive  temperatures.  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Inst.  Metals,  11  (1917),  300;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  1630. 

1917:  95.  E.  W.  Washburn.  Two  laws  governing  the  ionization 
of  strong  electrolytes  in  dilute  solutions.  (Platinum  elec- 
trodes.) Pt. 

Proc.  Nat.  Acad.  Sci.  3 (1917),  569;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3152. 

1917:  95a.  E.  Newbery.  Recent  work  on  overvoltage. 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

Mem.  Proc.  Manchester  Lit.  Phil.  Soc.  61,  ii,  iii  (1917),  9,  20;  C.  A.  12 
(1918),  2496. 

1917:  96.  R.  W.  King.  Electrical  conductivity  of  sputtered  films. 

Phys.  Rev.  10  (1917),  291;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2748.  Pt. 

1917:  97.  W.  L.  Cheney.  The  emission  of  electrons  by  a metal 
when  bombarded  by  positive  ions  in  a vacuum.  (Platinum 
cathode.)  Pt. 

Phys.  Rev.  10  (1917),  335;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3163. 

i 109733°— 19— Bull.  694 29 


450 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1917:  98.  W.  W.  Coblentz  and  W.  B.  Emerson.  The  photo- 
electric sensitivity  of  various  substances.  (Platinum  and 
gold.)  Pt. 

J.  Wash.  Acad.  Sci.  7 (1917),  525. 

1917:  99.  O.  Stuhlmann,  Jr.  The  coefficients  of  emission  and 
absorption  of  photo-electrons  from  platinum  and  silver. 
(Bead  before  American  Physical  Society  Dec.  27,  1917.)  Pt. 

Science,  n.  s.  47  (1918),  569  (title  only). 

1917:  100.  W.  Wilson.  The  complete  photo-electric  emission 
from  the  alloy  of  sodium  and  potassium  (exposed  to  radiation 
from  platinum  wire  of  known  temperature).  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  93  A (1917),  359;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3159. 

1917:  10P.  A.  G.  Worthing.  Attempt  to  detect  a change  in  the 
emissive  properties  of  platinum  and  of  tungsten  at  incan- 
descence with  a change  in  the  method  of  heating.  Pt. 

Phys.  Rev.  9 (1917),  226;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1788. 

1917:  102.  L.  K.  Oppitz.  Optical  constants  of  the  binary  alloys 
of  silver  with  copper  and  platinum.  Pt. 

Phys.  Rev.  10  (1917),  156;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2851. 

1917:  103.  T.  Takamine  and  S.  Nitta.  The  spark  and  vacuum  arc 
spectra  of  some  metals.  Pt. 

Mem.  Col.  Sci.  Kyoto  Imp.  Univ.  2 (1917),  117;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii 
(1917),  402;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2559. 

1917:  104.  B.  A.  Wooten.  An  experimental  investigation  of  the 
characteristic  X-ray  emission  from  molybdenum  and  palladium. 
(Read  before  American  Physical  Society  Dec.  27,  1917.)  Pd. 

Science,  n.  s.  47  (1918),  570  (title  only). 

1917:  105.  R.  Ledoux-Lebard  and  A.  Daxvillier.  (The  L-serie3 
of  the  elements  of  high  atomic  weight.)  (Spectral.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Compt.  rend.  164  (1917),  687;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2297. 

1917:  106.  G.  W.  C.  Kaye.  The  composition  of  X-rays  from  vari- 
ous metals.  Pt. 

Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  London,  93  A (1917),  427;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3175. 

1917:  107.  S.  Kyropoulos.  (Differentiation  of  the  internal  struc- 
ture of  the  different  species  of  silica  by  their  Rontgen-ray 
interference  of  patterns.)  (Use  of  Pt  radiations.)  Pt. 

Z.  anorg.  allgem.  Chem.  99  (1917),  197;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  468; 
C.  A.  12  (1918),  1147. 

1917:  107a.  E.  Wagner.  X-ray  spectroscopy.  (L-series  of  plat- 
inum.) Pt- 

Physik.  Ztg.  18  (1917),  405,  432,  461,  488;  Sci.  Abstracts  21  A (1918),  64; 
C.  A.  12  (1918),  2065. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP.  451 

1917:  108.  V.  Lehner  and  H.  B.  Merrill.  Solubility  of  silica. 
(Use  of  platinum  apparatus.)  Pt. 

J.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.  39  (1917),  2630;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  5. 

1917:  109.  J.  L.  Jones.  A new  electro-analysis  apparatus.  (Use 
of  platinum  gauze  electrodes.)  Pt. 

Trans.  Amer.  Electrochem.  Soc.  32  (1917),  79;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3132. 

1917:  110.  S.  Pagltani.  (The  application  of  electrical  heating  to 
the  concentration  of  sulphuric  acid.)  (Platinum  elec- 
trodes.) Pt. 

Ind.  chim.  min.  met.  4 (1917),  241;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3386. 

1917:  110a.  Y.Kawakita  and  Imowo.  Platinum  plate  electrodes. 

(Japanese  patent  31695,  Oct.  30,  1917.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  12  (1918),  2147. 

1917:110b.  H.  Nishida.  Sulphuric  acid  anhydride  by  the  contact 
process.  (Japanese  patent  31972,  Dec.  22,  1917.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  12  (1918),  2238. 

1917:  111.  J.  F.  Sanders.  Electrodes  for  generating  pure  oxygen 
from  water.  (Palladium  combined  with  rhodium.)  (U.  S. 
patent  1218584,  Mar.  6,  1917.)  Pd,  Rh. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1367. 

1917:  112.  E.  B.  Maxted.  Disodium  nitrate,  an  addition  com- 
pound of  sodium  nitrite  and  sodium.  (Use  of  platinum  elec- 
trodes.) Pt. 

J.  Chem.  Soc.  Ill  (1917),  1016;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  1271. 

1917:  113.  Pyrometers  and  pyrometry.  Symposium  of  Faraday 
Society.  Papers  by  E.  F.  Northrup,  E.  Griffiths  and  F.  H.  Scho- 
field, R.  S.  Whipple,  R.  P.  Brown,  W.  JI.  Hatfield,  C.  R.  Darl- 
ing, etc.  (Includes  discussion  of  Pt-PtRh  pyrometers.)  Pt,  Rli. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  1161;  Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  685. 

1917:  114.  R.  W.  Woodward  and  T.  R.  Harrison.  Note  on  the 
thermo-couple  nichrome-constantan.  (Comparison  with  Pt- 
Ptlr  couple.)  Pt,  Ir. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  16  (1917),  647;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3132. 

1917:  115.  E.  F.  Northrup.  Production  of  high  temperature  and 
its  measurement.  (PtRli  couple.  From  Trans.  Faraday 
Society.)  Pt,  Rh. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  685;  Engineering,  104  (1917),  498;  C.  A.  12 
(1918),  242. 

1917:  116.  PIilliger.  A useful  compound  thermo-element.  (Pt- 
PtRh.)  Pt,  Rh. 

Elect.  Rev.  (London),  80  (1917),  259;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1340;  from  Z.  Ver. 
deutscher  Ing. 


452 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 

1917: 


117.  J.  L.  Haughton  and  D.  Hanson.  Further  notes  on  a 
high- temperature  thermostat.  (Platinum  contacts.)  Pt. 

J.  Inst.  Metals,  1917;  Engineering,  104  (1917),  412;  Electrician,  80  (1917), 
89;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  243. 

118.  American  made  pyrometer  protection  tubes. 

(No  action  on  platinum  wire  at  high  temperatures.)  Pt. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  611. 

119.  P.  Gunther.  (Electromotive  behavior  of  lead.)  (Use 

of  lead  electrolytic  ally  deposited  on  platinum.)  Pt. 

Physik.  Z.  18  (1917),  115;  Sci.  Abstracts  [A],  20  (1917),  256;  C.  A.  11 
(1917),  2990. 

120.  J.  Oblata.  Further  studies  on  the  silver  voltameter. 

vGse  of  platinum  cup.)  Pt. 

Proc.  Tokyo  Math.  Phys.  Soc.  [2],  9 (1917),  129;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2295. 

121.  E.  P.  Hyde,  F.  E.  Cady,  and  W.  E.  Forsythe.  Color 

temperature  scales  for  tungsten  and  carbon.  (Comparison 
with  platinum  and  osmium  filaments.)  Pt,  Os. 

Phvs.  Rev.  10  (1917),  395;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  3158. 

122.  A.  Philip  and  L.  J.  Steele.  Catalytic  detector  of  com- 
bustible gases.  (U.  S.  patent  1224321,  May  1,  1917.)  Pt,  Pd. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  1919. 

123.  E.  T.  Gregg.  An  improved  compensator  for  gas 

analysis.  (With  platinum  contact  wire.)  Pt. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  528;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2287. 

124.  P.  Wooton.  Washington  letter.  (Regarding  plati- 
num substitutes.)  Sub. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  814. 

125.  Substitutes  for  platinum.  Sub. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  454. 

126.  F.  A.  Fahrenwald.  New  alloys  to  replace  platinum 

(Critical  study  of  palladium-gold  alloys.)  Pd,  Sub. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  590;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  882; 
C.  A.  11  (1917),  2442. 

127.  R.  F.  Heath.  Some  substitutes  for  platinum  ware. 

(Comparison  of  suggested  substitutes,  including  “cana- 
dium.”)  Pt,  Pd,  Sub. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  666;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  37  (1918),  40A;  C.  A. 
12  (1918),  244. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


453 


1917:  128. Palladium-gold  crucibles  as  platinum  substi- 

tutes. (Report  of  Bureau  of  Standards  on  “palau.”)  Pd,  Sul). 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  16  (1917),  533;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  070; 
Analyst,  42  (1917),  No.  497;  Chem.  News,  116  (1917),  246;  C.  A.  11 
(1917),  2627. 

1917:  129. Investigations  on  palau  at  the  Bureau  of 

Standards.  Pd,  Sub. 

Commerce  Repts.  May,  1917,  427;  J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  726. 

1917:  130. A substitute  alloy  for  platinum  crucibles. 

(Palau.)  Pd,  Sub. 

Iron  Age,  99  (1917),  1262;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2163. 

1917:  131.  E.  Haynes.  “Stellite”  as  a substitute  for  platinum. 

Sub. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  974;  Met.  Chem.  Eng.  19  (1917),  387;  C.  A. 
11  (1917),  3229. 

1917:  132. Ferro-silicon  analysis.  (Note  on  use  of  iron 

crucibles  with  sodium  peroxide;  from  Herwig:  Stahl  und 
Eisen.)  Sub. 

J.  Ind.  Eng.  Chem.  9 (1917),  1065. 

1917:  133.  F.  A.  Gooch  and  M.  Kobayashi.  Electrolytic  analysis 
with  small  platinum  electrodes.  (Continuation  of  1912: 
92.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [41,  43  (1917),  391;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  334;  J.  Soc. 
Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  945;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  1936. 

1917:  134.  F.  A.  Gooch  and  M.  Kobayashi.  The  use  of  the  plati- 
nized anode  of  glass  in  the  electrolytic  determination  of  man- 
ganese. Pt,  Sub. 

Am.  J.  Sc.  [4],  44  (1917),  53;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  425;  C.  A.  11 
(1917),  2310. 

1917:  135.  J.  Gewecke.  (Electro-analysis  using  silvered  glass 
basins  in  place  of  platinum  cathodes.)  Sub. 

Chem.  Ztg.  41  (1917),  297;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (1917),  334;  C.  A.  11 
(1917),  2758. 

1917:  136.  G.  G.  Grower.  Electrolytic  determination  of  tin  on 
tinned  copper  wire.  (Platinum  cathode  and  tinned  plati- 
num wire  circuit.)  Pt,  Sub. 

Proc.  Amer.  Soc.  Testing  Materials,  17,  ii  (1917),  129;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  256. 

1917:  137.  J.  Guzman  Carrancio  and  P.  Poch.  (Electro-analysis 
of  zinc  and  cadmium  without  platinum  electrodes.)  Sub. 

Anal.  ffs.  qui'm.  15  (1917),  235;  J.  Chem.  Soc.  112,  ii  (191.7),  509;  C.  A.  11 
(1917),  3287. 


454 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


1917:  138.  H.  V.  S.  Taylor.  Electrical  contact  points  of  tungsten,  i 
and  other  metals  (as  molybdenum,  silver,  iridium,  etc.).  (U.  S. 
patent  1232624,  July  10,  1917.)  Pt,  Ir,  Sub. 

1917:  139.  C.  F.  W.  Bates.  Anode  for  vacuum  discharge  tubes.  J 
(Copper  base  around  platinum  shell.)  (U.  S.  patent  1214500, 
Feb.  6,  1917.)  Pt. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  920. 

1917:  140.  H.  S.  Cooper.  Silver-palladium-cobalt  alloy.  (Fori 
contact  points,  etc.  Assigned  Electro-Metals  Products  Co.) 
(U.  S.  patent  1229037,  June  5,  1917.)  Pd,  Sub. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  17  (1917),  140;  C.  A.  11  (1917),  2172. 

1917:  141.  H.  S.  Cooper.  Alloy  of  gold,  silver,  and  osmium.  (For  j 
contact  points.)  (U.  S.  patent  1248621,  Dec.  4,  1917.) 

C.  A.  12  (1918),  361.  Os,  Sub. 

1917:  142.  F.  A.  Fahrenwald.  Gold-coated  tungsten  or  molyb- 
denum articles.  (For  dental  pins;  patent  dedicated  to  U.  S. 
public.)  (U.  S.  patent  1228194,  May  29,  1917.)  Pd,  Sub. 

C.  A.  11  (1917),  2188. 

1917:  143.  P.  F.  Guardiola.  Drawn  filaments  for  electric  incan- 
descent lamps.  (Chromium,  copper,  zinc,  platinum  alloy.) 

(British  patent  108817,  Mar.  1,  1917.)  Pt. 

J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  1041. 

1917:  144.  C.  R.  Darling.  Base  metal  thermo-electric  pyrom-  | 
eters.  (To  replace  platinum.)  Sub. 

Trans.  Faraday  Soc.  preprint;  C.  A.  12  (1918),  241. 

1917:  145.  M.  Neumann.  (High-temperature  measurements  with-  i 
out  platinum  instruments.)  Sub. 

Chem.  Ztg.  41  (1917),  288;  J.  Soc.  Chem.  Ind.  36  (1917),  521;  C.  A.  11 
(1917),  2527. 

1917:  146.  C.  H.  Humphries.  Molybdenum.  (Substitute  for  jew- ; 
elry;  paper  before  New  York  section  American  Chemical 

Society.)  Sub. 

Met.  Chem.  Eng.  16  (1917),  678. 


Note — The  following  reference  was  found  too  late  for  insertion  in  full  in  J 
its  proper  place  on  page  145: 

1873:  27a.  J.  R.  Benoit.  Etudes  experimcntales  surla  resistance] 
electrique  sous  l’influence  de  la  temperature.  Pd,  Pt. 

Compt.  rend.,  76  (1873),  342;  Repert.  phys.  Techn.  (Carl),  9 (1873),  55; 
Phil.  Mag.  [4],  45  (1873),  314. 


AUTHOR  INDEX. 


A. 

A.,  J.,  1845:  3. 

Abegg,  R.,  1907:  77. 

Abich,  H.,  1831:  27. 

Accum,  F.,  1818:  4. 

Achard,  1779:  2. 

Ackermann,  E.,  1900:  1. 

Adams,  E.  P.,  1914:  106. 

Adams,  L.  H.,  1914:  122. 

Addicks,  L.,  1917:  10. 

Adeney,  W.  E.,  1904  : 56. 

Adie,  A.,  1824:  3. 

Adie,  R.,  1855:  24. 

Adie,  R.  H.,  1899:  48. 

Aime,  G.,  1838:  1. 

Akunoff,  J.,  1900:  34. 

Alemany,  J.,  1915:  105. 

Alexander,  H.,  1887:  12. 

Allen,  A.  H.,  1877:  4. 

Allen,  E.  T.,  1910:  48;  1911:  114. 
Alterthum,  H.,  1912:  130. 

Altmann,  R.,  1879:  33. 

Alvarez,  E.  P.,  1905:  24,  31. 

Amand.  See  St.  Amand. 

Amberg,  R.,  1904:  28;  1905:  3. 

Amberger,  C.,  1904:  53;  1905:  58;  1907: 
32,  54,  55;  1913:  121,  174,  175;  1915:  62. 
Ambronn,  H.,  1905:  43. 

Amicus,  1804:  19. 

Anders,  G.  L.,  1884:  22. 

Anderson,  A.  C.,  1903:  14. 

Anderson,  M.  J.,  1913:  168a. 

Anderson,  T.,  1855:  8. 

Andreoli,  E.,  1895:  3. 

Andrew,  J.  H.,  1913: 108. 

Andrews,  T.,  1838:  21;  1852:  9. 

Antipoff,  1863:  la. 

Antony,  U.,  1892:  32,  37,  38;  1893:  14,  15; 
1896:  10;  1898:  22;  1899:  13,  14,  15; 
1900:  6,  18. 

Appleyard,  1895:  38. 

Aquilina,  G.  G.,  1845:  10. 

Arahina,  Y.,  1917:  88. 

Archibald,  E.  H.,  1908:  16;  1909:  6,  7,  20; 
1912:47;  1917:46. 


Arena,  F.,  1909:  69,  71. 

Argyropoulos,  T.,  1890:  61. 

Arkhipoff,  1827:  6. 

Armstrong,  H.  E.,  1917:  56. 

Arndtsen,  A.,  1858: 19. 

Arnold,  H.,  1912:  85;  1913:  183. 

Arons,  L.,  1890:  60. 

Arragon,  C. , 1911:  123. 

Arsem,  W.  C.,  1911:  65. 

Artus,  W.,  1835:  22;  1867:  20. 

Aschan,  O.,  1911:  85. 

Ascoli,  M.,  1907:  63. 

Aso,  K.,  1906:  43. 

Aston,  F.  W.,  1912:  135. 

Atterberg,  A.,  1875:  19;  1898:  37;  1912 
90. 

Aubel,  €.,  1862:  20;  1863:  12. 

Aubel,  van,  E.,  1886:  30,  31. 

Auer  von  Welsbach,  C.,  1902:  60;  1911 
120;  1913:  78. 

Austin,  L.,  1903:  37. 

Austin,  L.  W.,  1911:110. 

Awerkieff,  N.,  1902:  24. 

B. 

B.,  J.,  1839:  11. 

Bach,  A.,  1909:  61. 

Backstrom,  H.,  1897:  27. 

Bacon,  R.  F.,  1917:  22. 

Biideker,  K.,  1907:  74. 

Badische  Anilin  u.  Soda  Fabrik,  1903 
4;  1904:  3;  1910:  56;  1912:  117a;  1913 
131,  131a;  1915:  61a. 

Baerwald,  H.,  1907:  51. 

Baeyer,  A.,  1901:  8;  1902:  19. 

Bailey,  F.,  1913:  7a. 

Bailey,  G.  H.,  1892:  24. 

Bailey,  T.,  1886:  16. 

Baker  & Co.,  1894:33. 

Balard,  A.  J.,  1826:  7. 

Balbiano,  L.,  1891:  18;  1892:  22. 

Ball,  L.  C.,  1905:  2b. 

Balling,  C.  A.  M.,  1881:  29. 

Ballo,  M.,  1883:  26. 

Bamberger,  W.,  1913:  116. 

Bancroft,  H.,  1910:  3c. 


455 


456 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Bancroft,  W.  D..  1917:  74,  75. 

Banks,  W.,  1886:  24. 

Bannister,  C.  O..  1914  : 54,  56. 

Baraduc -Muller,  L.  H.,  1910:  22. 
Baragwanath,  W.,  jr.,  1907:  2. 

Barbieri,  G.  A.,  1914:  40,  41;  1916:  51; 
1917:  53. 

Barbot  de  Marni,  E.-N.,  1903:  lb. 
Bardtholdt,  1887:  39. 

Barfoed,  C.,  1888:  28. 

Bargellini,  G.,  1913:  71 
Barker,  E.  F.,  1916:  113. 

Barker,  H.  C.,  1907:  73. 

Barkla,  C.  G.,  1914:  103. 

Barnebey,  O.  L.,  1914:  134. 

Barnett,  R.  E.,  1895:  9. 

Barnes,  H.  T..  1903:  52;  1912:  136. 

Barr,  L.,  1896:38. 

Barruel,  E.,  1822:  1. 

Barth,  S.,  1914:  132. 

Bartlett,  E.  P.,  1913:  95. 

Bartlett,  J.,  1909:  108. 

Bartoli,  A.,  1883:  33:  1884:  16:  1895:  40. 
Bams,  C.,  1884:  32;  1888:  49,  55  j 1892  : 64. 
Barvir,  H.  L.,  1906:  35a. 

Basset,  H.,  jr.,  1905:  46. 

Bassett,  H.  L.,  1914:  75. 

Bates,  C.  F.  W.,  1917: 139. 

Batuecas,  T.,  1916:  118,  118a. 

Baubigny,  H..  1865:  5. 

Baudisch,  O.,  1912:  110. 

Baudrimont,  A.,  1850:  13:  1851:  12;  1855: 
23. 

Baudrimont,  E.,  1861:  11;  1862:  11;  1864: 
2;  1871:  26. 

Bauer,  A.,  1870:  24:  1871:  24:  1875:  29. 
Bauer,  E.,  1896:  32;  1910:  68;  1911:  73; 
1913:  33. 

Baum,  M.,  1908:  88. 

Baum£,  1758:2. 

Baumann.  E..  1881:  36;  1883:  39. 
Baumert,  F.  M.,  1848:  9. 

Baumert,  R.,  1907:  34. 

Baumhauer,  H..  1907:  41,  42;  1911:  77. 
Baur,  E.,  1913:  115. 

Bauriedel,  F.,  1909:  16:  1910:  12. 

Baxter,  G.  P.,  1908:  87;  1914: 127. 

Beatty,  R.  T.,  1913:  144. 

Bechamp,  A.,  1853:  2;  1861:  16. 

Bechold,  H.,  1907:  61. 

Beck,  C.,  1917:  80. 

Beck,  C.  R.,  1892:  8;  1893: 12. 

Beck,  R.,  1898:  4;  1908:  3. 

Becker,  F.,  1876:  22. 

Becker,  G.  F.,  1880:  2a. 


! Beckman,  B.,  1915:  39. 
j Becquerel,  A.  C.,  1823:  22,  23;  1829:  26; 

1831:  7;  1834:  1:  1851:  13;  1862:  16. 

| Becquerel,  E.,  1846:21;  1859: 18;  1862: 16, 
17;  1883:  37. 

! Beetz,  W.,  1878:  57. 

! Behrens,  H..  1891:  34. 

; Beilby,  G.  T.,  1901:  22;  1903:  36;  1904:  34, 
39. 

i Beilstein,  F.,  1874:  4;  1880:  34. 

I Beindl,  C.,  1915:  61. 

| Beketoff,  N.,  1878  : 54. 

I Bellamy,  F.,  1885:  44. 

I Bellucci,  I.,  1900:  8,  9,  21;  1902:  9,  14; 
I 1903:  6,  10:  1904:  5,  14;  1905:  5,  6,  7,  9, 
;!  11,  15;  1907:  6;  1908:  18;  1912:49. 

• Belowsov,  1891:  la. 

! Beltzer.  F.  J.  G.,  1911:  72. 
j Bender,  C..  1905:  76. 

| Benecke,  1829:  5. 

Benedicks,  C.,  1900:  11;  1915:  87a. 

, Benewolensky,  J.,  1913:  60. 

' Benner,  R.  C.,  1911:  122. 

Bennett,  G.  M.,  1917:  49. 

Bennewitz.  K.,  1910:  89. 

! Benoit.  J.  R..  1873:27a. 

| Benrath,  A.,  1915:  76. 

Bercelles.  L.,  1916:  71. 

Berezowsky,  W.,  1909:  60. 

; Berg,  O.,  1*910:  79. 

! Bergdolt,  B.,  1903:  26. 

| Bergell,  P.,  1905:  60. 

! Berger.  H.  W.,  1904  : 38. 

| Bergholm,  C.,  1913:  133. 

| Bergman,  T.,  1775:  2;  1777:  2;  1780:  1, 
1792:  1. 

; Bergmann,  A.,  1910:  28. 
j Bergmann,  L.,  1909:  42. 

| Bergner.  E.,  1911: 48;  1912: 108;  1913: 106. 

; Bergsoc,  P.,  1899:  18. 

> Berlemont,  G.,  1912:  151. 

Berliner,  A.,  1888:  30,31. 

Berneck.  von,  R.  M.,  1899:  37. 

Berninger.  A.,  1907:  87. 
j Berry.  A.  J.,  1911:  80. 

Berthelot,  M.,1878:  22,  42;  1880:  38;  1882: 
39:  1894:36:  1901:  1;  1904  : 8. 

Berthier,  P.,  1834: 1,  17;  1843:  9. 

Berthiot,  C.,  1890:  57. 

Berthold,  A.,  1901:  21. 

Berthollet,  C.  L.,  1792:  3;  1804:  18;  1805: 
5;  1808:  2. 

Berti-Ceroni,  G.  B.,  1916:68. 

Bertiaux,  L.,  1904  : 23. 

Bertin,  A.,  1857:21;  1878: 17. 


AUTHOR  INDEX. 


457 


Bertrand,  A.,  1876:  49;  1880:  12. 
Berzelius,  J.  J.,  1812: 4;  1818: 5,  6,  7;  1819: 
1;  1821:  2,  3;  1823:  4;  1825:  6:  1826:  15; 
1828:  9;  1829:  9,  12;  1830:  6;  1831:  25; 
1832:  17;  1833:  9,  13;  1834:  14;  1835:  3, 
5, 18; 1841: 10: 1843: 7; 1847: 10. 

Bet  tel,  W.,  1887:  26. 

Bettelli,  C.,  1875:  21. 

Bettendorff,  A.,  1872:  1. 

Bettges,  W.,  1902:  63;  1904:  25. 

Ben  el,  J.,  1912:  100. 

Bhattacharyya,  D.  N.,  1913:  42. 

Bidwell,  S.,  1884:  28. 

Bieler,  F.,  1917:  82. 

Biewend,  E.,  1838:4;  1841:  16. 

Biggs,  H.  F.,  1916:  92. 

Biilmann,  E.,  1900: 14;  1903: 14;  1916:  50. 
Billings,  G.  H.,  1876:  20. 

Billitzer,  J.,  1902:  44;  1907:  56. 

Billows,  E.,  1912:  98,  99. 

Biltz,  W.,  1904:  55;  1905:  29;  1914:  63. 
Bird,  G.,  1838:  24. 

Birnbaum,  C.,  1865:  6,  7;  1866:  7;  1867:  4, 
5;  1869: 12;  1879: 11. 

Bischoff,  G.,  1825:  9, 12;  1832: 18. 

Bitter,  L.,  1912:  97. 

Bjerknes,  V.,  1892:  66. 

Bjorksten,  R.,  1910:  40. 

Blackadder,  T.,  1911:  93. 

Blair,  A.  W.,  1910:  6. 

Blake,  W.  P.,  1854:  1. 

Blanchard,  1890:  54. 

Blau,  F.,  1901:  39;  1905:  81. 

Bleekrode,  L.,  1876:  60. 

Bleekrode,  S.,  1858:  1;  1859:  1. 

Bley,  L.  F.,  1834:  18. 

Bliss,  F.  W.,  1909:  29. 

Blomeke,  C.,  1890:  1. 

Blomstrand,  C.  W.,  1869:  16a,  17, 18;  1870: 
14;  1871:  16,17;  1883:  20;  1888:  15. 
Blond eau,  1774:  2. 

Blond  el,  M.,  1901:  5;  1905:  8. 

Blondlot,  R.,  1880:  43. 

Blumenthal,  P.  L.,  1917:  72. 

Blumer,  M.,  1912:  45. 

Blunt,  T.  P.,  1882:  25. 

Blyth,  J.,  1844:  13;  1848:  8. 

Bobertag,  O.,  1908:  61. 

Bock,  J.,  1904:  35. 

Bocking,  M.,  1855:  1. 

Bode,  F.,  1876:  40,  41,42,46;  1877:  33, 
34;  1878:  39. 

Bodenstein,  M.,  1907:  53;  1916:  107. 
Boedeker,  1860:  7. 

Boeseken,  J.,  1916:  70. 


Boisbaudran,  Lecoq  de,  P.  E.,  1882:  22, 
1883:  7,8,9,27. 

Bokorny,  T.,  1908:  65. 

Boll,  M.,  1912:  42,  43;  1913:  43,  135. 
Bollemont.  de,  E.  G.,  1911:  102. 

Bolley,  P.  A.,  1853:  6. 

Bolton,  H.  0..  1872:  7. 

| Bone,  \V.  A.,  1906:  45. 

Bonsdorff,  von,  P.  A.,  1827:  10;  1828: 
10;  1832:  4. 

Booth.  J.  0.,  1834:  12a. 

Borg.  F.,  1893:  38. 

Borissow,  P.,  1906:  56. 

Born,  von.  1791:  2. 

Bornemann,  F.,  1910:  12a. 

Bornemann.  K.,  1909:  63. 

Borntriiger,  H..  1893:  37. 

Borsche,  W.,  1912:  73. 

| Bory,  1887:  50. 
j Bosanquet,  R.  H.  M.,  1887:  42. 

I Bosch,  C.,  1917:  80. 

| Bose,  E..  1901:  31. 

Bosscha,  J.,  1885:  30. 

Botsford,  R.  S.,  1915:  lb. 

Bottger,  R,  C.,  1831:  18;  1833:  23;  1834: 
10,  24;  1837:  11;  1838:  14,  15;  1840: 
9;  1841:  14,  17;  1843:  10,  15;  1853: 
7;  1855:  13,  19;  1857:  10,  17;  1863:  4; 
1864:  5;  1866:  14,  24;  1867:  18;  1869: 
7,22,30;  1871:  2;  1872:  18;  1873:  25, 
26;  1874:  38;  1876:  48,  56;  1877:  37; 
1878:  20,  21:  1879:  53. 

Bottomley,  J.  T.,  1887:  44,  55. 

Bottone,  S.,  1873:  15. 

Bouchonnet,  A.,  1903:  21. 

Boudon  de  St.  Amand.  See  St.  Amand. 
Bourdakov,  von,  1896:  a. 

Bourkser,  E.,  1913:  154. 

Boussingault,  J.  B.,  1821:  4;  1826:  1; 

1833:  22;  1856:  1;  1876:  15;  1878:  41. 
Bouty,  E.,  1880:  40;  1885:  46. 

Boyce,  J.  C.,  1917:  80b. 

Boy 6,  M.  H.,  1840:  4. 

Brachelli,  1876:  6. 

Bragg.  W.  H.,  1914:  104;  1915:  84. 

Bran,  F.,  1902:  49. 

Brand es,  R,.  1823:  5;  1834:  15. 

Brandt,  L.,  1914:  62;  1915:  43. 

Brauell,  F.,  1849:  8. 

Braun,  0.  D.,  1862:  13. 

Braun,  F.,  1882:  44;  1888:  43. 

Bray,  W.,  1906:  44. 

Breant,  J.  R.,  1823:  20,  21;  1827;  20. 
Bredig,  G.,  1898:  40,41;  1899:  37;  1901: 
24a.  25,  27;  1904:  46;  1910:  59;  1911: 
93;  1917:  81. 


458 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLAT IX UAL  GROUP, 


Breed.  M.  B..  1894:  18. 

Breithaupt.  A..  1826:  4;  1828:  6,7;  1833: 
10,  11;  1840:  1. 

Brenkeleveen,  van.  M.,  1917:  63. 

Bretean.  P.,  1910:  34;  1911:  50. 
Breuning.  E.,  1913:  65. 

Brewster.  D..  1850:  16. 

Brierley,  S.,  1886:  24. 

Briggs, S.  H.  C.,  1908:  24;  1911:  42. 
Bright  Platinum  Plating  Co.,  1887:  35. 
Brighton,  T.  B.,  1917:  93. 

Bringhenti,  A..  1906:  48. 

Brislee,  F.  J..  1903:  48. 

Brizard.  L.,  1895:  7;  1896:  8,  9;  1899:  16, 
17;  1900:  10. 

Broca,  A.,  1905:  67. 

Broch.  O.  J.,  1881:  34. 

Brochet,  A.,  1904:  13;  1905:  71,  73. 
Broesike.  G..  1878:  25. 

Broglie,  de.  M..  1914:  100. 

Bromeis,  C.,  1850:  14. 

Broniewski.  IV. . 1910:  93;  1911:  106 i 

1913:  156. 

Brossa.  G.  A..  1909  : 64. 

Brown,  F.  0..  1909:  85. 

Brown.  J..  1905  : 40. 

Brown.  O.  H..  1904:  45. 

Brown.  R.  P..  1917:  113. 

Browne.  D.  H..  1893:  4a. 

Browning.  P.  E..  1915:  42. 

Brownrigg.  W..  1751:  1. 

Brugnatelli.  E.,  1799:  4. 

Bruhat,  G.,  1915:  54. 

Briihl.  von.  F..  1889:  30. 

Brunck,  O.,  1901:  35;  1903  : 34;  1904:  21; 

1912:  93. 

Brunei,  1891:  42. 

Brunei,  R.  F.,  1911:  86. 

Briinjes,  G.,  1912:  69. 

Brunner,  C.,  1858:  14;  1804:  7. 

Brunner,  E.,  1908:  77. 

Brunton.  T.  L.,  1878:  27. 

Bryant.  E.  G..  1908:  40. 

Buchanan.  J.  Y..  1904:  37. 

Buchner,  J.  A.,  1831:  24. 

Buchner,  K.,  1909  : 33. 

Buchner,  L.  A.,  jr.,  1836  : 6. 

Bucholz,  C.  F.,  1806:  2. 

Buckley,  B.  G.,  1908:  16. 

Buckmaster,  G.  A.,  1909:  76. 

Buckton,  G.  B..  1851:  8;  1852:  8;  1854  : 9. 
Buff.  H.,  1872:  20. 

Buffon,  de,  G.  L.  L.,  1774:  1;  1784:  3. 


Bugge.  G.,  1907:  19;  1908:  33. 

Bullman.  C.,  1893:  3e. 

Bullnheimer,  F.,  1897:  22. 

Bumstead,  H.  A.,  1912:  138. 

Bunsen,  R.  W.,  1837:  5;  1842:  12;  1861: 
7;  1866:  19;  1868:  1;  1870:  33. 
Buntrock.  A.,  1895:  15. 

Burch.  G.  H.,  1891:  52. 

Burdakow,  W.  A.,  1909:  36;  1910:  43. 
i Burdick,  W.  L.,  1912:  92. 

Burg,  van  der.  E.  A.,  1865:  9. 
Burgemeister,  1892  : 51. 

Burgess,  G.  K..  1907:  4S;  1908:  76;  1909: 
53. 102. 103;  1912:  148;  1913:  167;  1914: 
123;  1915:  92,  96;  1916:  58,  98. 
Burkhart,  H.  J.,  1874:  1. 

Burrell,  G.  A.,  1914:  61. 

Burton,  E.  F.,  1906:  52. 

Burton.  W.,  1912:  144. 

Burton,  W.  K..  1891:  47. 

I Burton,  W.  M.,  1888:  39. 

, Bush,  H.,  1881;  31. 

Busson,  B.,  1911:  71. 

Butler,  G.  M.,  1916:  31a. 

Butlerow,  A.,  1851:  10. 

Biittner.  H.,  1915:  66. 

Buttgenbach,  H..  1908  : 4b. 

Buxhoevden.  H.  B.,  1897:  14. 

Buxton,  B.  H.,  1908  : 62. 

C. 

C.,  1841:  15. 

C.  C.,  1823:  1. 

Cady,  F.  E.,  1917:  121. 

! Cahours,  A.,  1856:  4;  1870:  5,  6,  7;  1877: 
14. 

Cailletet,  L.,  1857:  23;  1885:  46;  1S94  : 35. 
Calderon,  L.,  1880  : 33. 

C'alhane,  D.  F.,  1914:  133. 

Callendar.  H.  L.,  1890  : 46;  1891:  35; 
1892  : 53. 

Campari,  G.,  1881:  18. 

Campbell,  A.,  1905:  78. 

Campbell,  E.  D..  1895:  34;  1S96  : 30. 
Campbell,  H.  D..  1898:  25. 

Campbell,  X..  1914:  114;  1915:  83. 
Campbell.  X.  R.,  1906:  61. 

Campbell,  W..  1902  : 53,  54. 

Campo,  del,  A.,  1913:  2;  1915:  14. 
Camsell,  C.,  1910:  3;  1913:  6b. 

Canello,  J.,  1913:  169. 

Cantacuz^ne.  J.,  1893:  35. 

Cantoni,  C.,  1905:  18. 

Caranza,  1S56:  14. 

Card,  G.  W.,  1895:  2a. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


459 


Carlgren,  0.,  1890  : 25,  2G. 

Carlson,  T.,  1906:  26. 

Carmichael,  H.,  1874:  34;  1903:  31. 

Carne,  J.  E.,  1896:  b. 

Carstanjen,  E.,  1867:  8. 

Carthaus,  E.,  1912:  30. 

Casamajor,  P.,  1876:19;  1881:33;  1882: 

30;  1886:  20. 

Case,  W.,  1886:  38. 

Castillo,  J.  C.,  1909:  lc. 

Castoro,  N.,  1904:  47;  1910:  58. 

Catlett,  C.,  1889:  2;  1890:  3. 

Celis,  de,  M.  R.,  1788:  1. 

Cermak,  P.,  1916:  88. 

Certes,  A.,  1880:  21. 

Cesaris,  de,  P.,  1908:  18. 

Chabrie,  C.,  1903:  21. 

Chalmers,  J.,  1868:  11. 

Champion,  P.,  1875:  33. 

Chandler,  C.  F.,  1862:  2. 

Chapman,  A.  C.,  1904:  31. 

Chapman,  A.  K.,  1914:  106. 

Chapman,  E.  J.,  1871:  23. 

Chapman,  J.  C.,  1912:  127. 

Chappuis,  P.,  1883:  32. 

Charitschkoff,  K.  W.,  1902:  31. 

Charlton,  J.  P.,  1821:  11,  12. 

Chatelier,  Le,  H.,  1886:  11,  1887:  53; 

1889:  41;  1890:  62;  1912:  148. 

Chatin,  A.,  1876:  21. 

Chaudet,  1816:  2. 

Cheney eau,  C.,  1909:  52. 

Cheney,  W.  L.,  1917:  97. 

Chenivix,  R.,  1802:  6;  1803:  1,  2,  3;  1804: 
1,  2;  1805:  1. 

Chevreul,  M.  E.,  1811:  6. 

Children,  J.  G.,  1809:  5;  1815:  2. 

Chladni,  1823:  13. 

Chlopin,  W.,  1913:  56;  1914:  45;  1915:  30, 
31. 

Chojnacki,  C.,  1870:  22. 

Chouriguine,  1912:  141. 

Christensen,  A.  C.,  1915:  51. 

Christensen,  O.  T.,  1880:  8;  1891:  13. 
Christiansen,  C.,  1871:  19. 

Church,  A.  H.,  1860:  15. 

Church,  1867:  16,  17. 

Ciamtcian,  G.  L.,  1877:  44. 

Claesson,  P.,  1877:  13. 

Clark,  G.  M.,  1892:  55. 

Clark,  L.,  1890:  49. 

Clark,  N.  D.,  1894:  11. 

Clarke,  E.  D.,  1817:  8,  9;  1819:  3,  4,  5; 
1821:  13. 


Clarke,  F.  W.,  1877:  8,  42;  1878:  18,  30; 
1881:  13,  16;  1882:  12;  1883:  10;  1884: 
8;  1889:  2;  1890:  3,1894:  20;  1896:3; 
1903:  5;  1906:  8;  1909:  4,  5;  1910:  8; 
1913:  37,  38;  1914:  27. 

Classen,  A.,  1884:  14;  1890:  30;  1914:68. 
Claubry,  de,  H.  F.  G.,  1833:  3. 

Claudet,  F.,  1851:  5. 

Claus,  C.,  1844:  4,  5,  6;  1845:  5,  8;  1846: 
7,  8;  1847:  7,  8,  9,  10,  12;  1854:  6,  7; 
1856:  5,  6;  1858:  7;  1859:  8;  1862:  9, 
10;  1883:  1. 

Clavari,  E.,  1905:  15. 

Clay,  J.,  1908:  50,  84;  1912:  134. 
Cleaverley,  L.,  1907:  10. 

Clemence,  A.  13.,  1883:  28. 
dementi, G.,  1855:  6. 

Clerk,  D.,  1879:  36. 

Clermont,  de,  P.,  1878:  24;  1879:  28,29. 
Cleve,  A.,  1902:  11. 

Cleve,  P.  T.,  1861:  15;  1865:  3,  4;  1866: 
12;  1867:  9;  1870:  11,12;  1871:  12,13, 
14,  15;  1872:  6;  1874:  18;  1878:  8; 

1880:  13;  1883:  12;  1885:  3,4;  1890:26. 
Clevenger,  G.  H.,  1913:  79. 

Cloez, S.,  1866:  3. 

Cloud,  J.,  1809:  2;  1818:  3,  9. 

Coblentz,  W.  W.,  1910:  73,  74;  1912:  119; 
1917:  98. 

Coca,  A.  F.,  1908:  46. 

Cochin,  D.,  1878:  9. 

Cock,  W.  J.,  1843:  6. 

Coehn,  A.,  1901:  19;  1903:  45. 

Cohen,  1901:  40. 

Cohen,  E.,  1908:  6. 

Cohn,  P.,  1896:  26. 

Collard eau, E.,  1894:  35. 

Collet-Descotils,  H.  V.,  1803:  10;  1804: 
11;  1805:  6;  1807:  1;  1808:  1. 

Collier,  P.,  1881:  2. 

Collins,  J.  H.,  1885:  la. 

Colson,  A.,  1881:  14a;  1882:  35,36. 

Coma,  P.,  1913:  4. 

Commaille,  A.,  1863:  5;  1866:  16. 
Compton,  K.  T.,  1912:  125;  1913:  137, 
138. 

Coninck,  Oechsner  de,  W.,  1883:  16; 

1900:  13;  1902:  10;  1903,12. 

Connell,  A.,  1831:  6. 

Conroy,  J.  T.,  1903:  55. 

Cooke, E.F.,  1834:  5. 

Cooke,  H.  L.,  1910:  84;  1911:  109;  1913: 
155. 

Cooke,  R.  D.,  1917:  45. 


460 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Cooke,  S.,  1887:  20. 

Coolidge,  W.  D.,  1910:  99;  1915:  102a; 
1916:  101b. 

Cooper.  H.  S.,  1916:  101a;  1917:  140,141. 
Cooper,  J.T.,  1817:  14. 

Cooper,  T.,  1827:  18. 

Coquillion,  J.  J.,1873:  27;  1875:  32;  1876: 
53,  54;  1877:  40,  41;  1878:  46. 

Corbino,  O.  M.,  1913:  145,  146. 

Cornet,  J.,  1908:  4b. 

Correa,  1806:  6. 

Cortinovis,  A.  M.,  1790:  1. 

Cossa,  A.,  1887:  10;  1890:  24;  1892:  21; 

1893:  21;  1894:  15;  1897:  16. 

Costanzo,  1913:  162. 

Cotta,  v.,  1860:  1. 

Cottereau,  E.,  fils,  1845:  11. 

Couquet,  H.  C.,  1900:  28. 

Courtis,  W.  M.,  1912:  2. 

Cowap,  M.  D.,  1910:  21. 

Cowper-Coles,  S.,  1899:  31. 

Crace-Calvert,  F.,  1858:  11,  18:  1861:  20. 
Crafts, J.M.,  1888:  27. 

Crampton,  F.  A.,  1915:  50;  1916:  18. 
Crawford,  C.  R.,  1889:  35. 

Crell,  L.,  1784:  1. 

Croft,  H.  H.,  1867:  7. 

Crompton,  H.,  1895:  39. 

Cronstedt,  A.  F.,  1764:  1. 

Crookes,  Sir  W.,  1864:  9,  10;  1891:  40; 

1908:  82;  1910:  25;  1912:  103. 

Crosnier,  L.,  1846:  14. 

Crosse,  A.  F.,  1913:  80. 

Crossley,  W.,  1860:  17. 

Crova,  A.,  1878:  47. 

Crowther,  J.  A.,  1910:  76. 

Cunningham,  J.  C.  J.,  1914:  128. 

Curie,  P.,  1880:  39. 

Curphey,  W.  S.,  1917:  79. 

Curtius, T.,  1898:  34. 

Curtman,  L.  J.,  1911:  58;  1917:  65. 
Cuthbertson, J.,  1802:  2. 

Czudnowicz,  C. , 1860:  13. 

D. 

Dam,  van,  C.,  1917:  94. 

Dam,  van, W.,  1895:  24. 

Damaret, F.  J.,  1902:  lb. 

Damour,  A.  A.,  1857:  1;  1861:  4. 

Dana,  S.F.,  1824:  4. 

Dangaz,1833:  4. 

Daniel, J.,  1893:  46. 

Daniell,  J.  F.,  1821:  8;  1823:  13;  1830: 
15;  1831:  28. 

Dannecker,  C.,  1915:  56. 


Danvillier,  A.,  1917:  105. 

D’Arcet,  J.  P.  J.,  1814:  7;  1828:  23. 
D’Argy,  1833  : 5. 

Darling,  C.  R.,  1917:  113,  144. 

Dart,  A.  S.,  1911:  63;  1912:  83. 

Datta,  R.  L.,  1913:  44,  45;  1914:  29. 
Daubree,  G.  A.,  1875:  2,  27;  1876:  2; 
1893:  2. 

| Daumesnil,  A.  P.  G.,  1879:  38. 

Davey,  L.  G.,  1914:  101. 

Davidson,  J.  G.,  1907:  69. 

Davis,  R.  O.  E.,  1908:  30. 

Davison,  J.  M.,  1899:  2. 

Davy,  E.,  1812:  2,  3;  1817:  5;  1820:  1; 
1829:  11. 

Davy,  H.,  1810:  4;  1811:  3,  4;  1817:  10; 

1818:  16,  17;  1825:  13. 

Dawson,  G.  M.,  1887:  1. 

Day,  A.,  1899:  42. 

Day,  A.  L.,  1910:  48. 

Day,  D.  T.,  1900:  1;  1906:  3,  3a;  1907  : 2a; 

1910:  3b;  1913:  20a;  1914:  3. 

Debray,  J.  H.,  1857:  3;  1859:  9;  1860:  4, 
5;  1862:  7,  18;  1873:  14;  1874:  6,  27; 
1875:  18,  26;  1876:  10,  11,  26;  1877:  21; 
1878:  4,  16;  1879:  6;  1880:  28;  1882:  5, 
6;  1883:  6;  1887:  14,  15,  16;  1888: 13. 
Debus,  1863:  6. 

Degen,  A.  F.  E.,  1833:  24;  1836:  12,  13. 
Deininger,  F.,  1907:  67. 

Delachanel,  B.,  1875:  15;  1909:  56. 
Delanoue,  1860:  18. 

De  la  Rive,  A.,  1838:  2;  1841:  8. 

De  la  Rue,  W.,  1883:  4. 

DeLaunay,  L.,  1909:  Id;  1914:  la. 
Delepine!  M . , 1895 : 25;  1905:  38, 41;  1906: 
16,  17;  1908:  19,  21;  1909:  26,  32,  35; 
1910:  23,  24;  1911:  33,  34,  40;  1914:  31, 
32,  38;  1917:  48,  50. 

Delffs,  W.,  1863:  7. 

De  ITsle,  R.,  1783:  1. 

Del  Rio.  See  Rio. 

Demarfay,  E.,  1885:  18. 

Dember/H.,  1906:  66;  1911:  112. 

Denham,  H.  G.,  1910:  54. 

Denig5s,  1917:  46b. 

Dennstedt,  M.,  1907:  36;  1908:  4L 
Denso,  P.,  1902:  50. 

Depuis,  1828:  21. 

Desains,  P.,  1872:  19;  1880:  39. 
Desborough,  P.  H.,  1899:  43. 
Descloizeaux,  A.,  1857:  1,  14;  1870:  25; 
1875:  1. 

Descotils.  See  Collet-Descotils. 

Despretz,  C.,  1827:  21;  1829:  27;  1849:  13. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


4G1 


Dessaignes,  J.  P.,  1816:  3. 

Dessau,  B.,  1886:  29. 

Deutsche  GasgliihlichtGesellschaft,  1905: 
80;  1906:  76. 

Deville,  H.  St.  C.,  1852: 12;  1856:  12,  15; 
1857:  3,  15, 16;  1859:  9;  1860:  4,  5;  1862: 
7,  18;  1863:  9;  1867:  14;  1870:  21;  1873: 
14;  1874:  6,  27,  28;  1875:  3, 18,  26;  1876: 
10,  11,  26,  66;  1878:  4,  4a,  16;  1879:  6, 
34,  34a;  1880:  2b;  1881:  34;  1882:  6; 
1915:  57. 

Dewar,  J.,  1869:  9;  1873:  3;  1879:  46;  1881: 
17;  1893:  45;  1895:  44;  1897:  21;  1913: 
147. 

Dewey,  F.  P.,  1912:  79;  1914:  58. 

Dliar,  N.,  1913:  41,  42. 

Dhein,  P.  E.,  1912:  122. 

Diakonow,  C.,  1868:  3. 

Dickson,  C.  W.,  1903:  2;  1905:  2c. 

Dietz,  H.,  1912:  16. 

Dietz,  R.,  1898:  10;  1899:  11. 

Dilthey,  W.,  1903:  13. 

Dinklage,  K.,  1901:  18;  1906:  14. 

Di  Nola,*E.,  1913:  75. 

Dirvell,  P.  J.,  1886:  15. 

Ditscheiner,  L.,  1864:  11. 

Ditte,  A.,  1880:  15;  1882:  7;  1900:  30. 
Dittenberger,  W.,  1899:  11. 

Dittmar,  H.,  1910:  11. 

Dittmar,  W.,  1884:  19;  1887:  13. 
Dbbereiner,  F.,  1835:  9;  1838:  3. 
Dobereiner,  J.  W.,  1814:  9;  1822:  6;  1823: 
6,  7,  8;  1824:  5,  6,  16;  1826:  10,  13; 
1828:  12;  1829:  24;  1831:  8,9,12,13,14, 
15,  16,  17;  1832:  3,  9,  10,  11;  1833:  15; 
1834:  20,  21,  22,  23;  1835:  11,  12;  1836: 
4,  8,  9,  14;  1838:  5,  23;  1839:  5;  1841:  1 ; 
1843:  11,  12;  1844:  17;  1845:  16. 

Dode,  J.  B.  A.,  1865:  13;  1868:  14;  1873: 
19;  1879:  37. 

Doerinckel,  F.,  1907:  80. 

Dole,  A.  B.,  1914:  74. 

Domanicki,  N.,  1916:  37. 

Donald,  J.  F.,  1893:  4. 

Donath,  E.,  1883:  21. 

Donau,  J.,  1904:  19,  20;  1905:  39;  1906: 
32,  51;  1907:  29;  1908:  37;  1913:  139; 
1915:  63. 

During,  T.,  1913:  184. 

Dragendorff,  G.,  1866:  18. 

Draper,  C.  H.,  1888:  56. 

Drechsel,  E.,  1879:  8,  15;  1882:  9;  1884: 
15;  1886:  36. 

Drecq,  M.,  19.12:  33. 

Dreyfus,  H.,  1916:  74. 


I Dublanc,  1828:  28. 

Dubois,  H.,  1854:  2. 

Duclaux,  E.,  1887:  18. 

Dudley,  W.  L.,  1882:  14;  1883:  29;  1887: 
33;  1888:  36;  1893:  29,  39;  1902:  8. 
Dufet,  H.,  1890:  35,  36,  37;  1895:  31,  31a; 
1902:  32. 

Duff  our,  A.,  1909:  39,  40;  1910:  32,  33; 

1911:  35;  1912:  48;  1913:  63. 

Dufour,  A.,  1911:  99. 

Dulk,  F.  P.,  1824:  17;  1825:  16. 

Dullo,  IF,  1859:  10,  22. 

Dulong,  P.  L.,  1818:  18;  1819:  9;  1823: 
9,  10. 

Dumas,  J.  B.,  1872:  11;  1876:  59. 
Dunlop,  J.  P.,  1917:  17. 

Dunn,  E.  J..  1914:  15b. 

Dunnington,.  F.  P.,  1879:  21. 

Dunstan,  A.  E.,  1907:  10,  11. 

Duparc,  L,,  1902:  la;  1903:  1;  1905:  2a; 
1908:  2;  1910:  2,  4;  1911:  2,  3,  4,  14; 
1912:  87;  1913:  5,17;  1914:  4,5;  1915: 
2;  1916:  2,  3. 

Dupont,  G.,  1913:  72. 

Durande,  1777:  1. 

Durham,  C.  B..  1911:  64a. 

Durkee,  F.  W.,  1896:  15. 

Durre,  E.  F.,  1876:  34. 

DuVergier,  E.  A.,  1914:  56. 

Duvillier,  E.,  1877:  24. 

Dyer,  G.,  1914:  74. 

E. 

Easterfield,  T.  H.,  1893:  25. 

Eastick,  T.  A.,  1912:  2. 

Ebelmen,  J.  J.,  1849:  1;  1851:  4. 
Eberhard,  A.,  1917:  47. 

Ebert,  H.,  1888:  60. 

Ebert,  R.,  1916:  66. 

Ebler,  E.,  1902:  29. 

Eder,  J.  M.,  1880:  17;  1889:  33;  1891:  45; 

1892:  56;  1910:  62. 

Edgar,  E.  C.,  1913:  107. 

Edison,  T.  A.,  1879:  14,  45. 

Edlund,  E.,  1865:  19;  1870:  39. 

Edman,  J.  A.,  1894:  6a;  1898:  9a. 
Edwards,  J.  D.,  1917:  91. 

Egbert,  S.,  1896:  42. 

Eggert,  J.,  1915:  60. 

Ehrhart,  O.,  1913:  126. 

Eichfeld,  M.  J.,  1827:  16. 

Eichler,  W.,  1859:  11. 

Eilers,  A.,  1913:  29b. 

Eldred,  B.  E.,  1910:  111;  1912:  156,  157, 
158,' 159  j 159a;  1915:  102;  1916:  114, 115. 
Electrometals  Products  Co.,  1916:  102. 


462 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Elkington,  H.,  1841:  19. 

Ellel . W.  H..  1838:  9. 

Eisner.  I...  1845:  13;  1^6:  16;  165S:  12; 
1859:  23. 

Elster,  J.,  1890:  59. 

Emden,  R.,  18S9:  38. 

Emerson.  W.  B..  1917:  98. 

Emieh.  F..  1892:  30;  1905:  47;  1907:  29; 
1908  : 52. 

Emslander,  R.,  1915:  53. 

End  ell.  K..  1910:  104. 

Enebuske,  <?.,  1885:  12. 

Engel.  R.,  1880:  6;  188S:  4:  1890  : 31; 

1895:  36. 

Engel,  R.  C..  1899:  35. 

Engelhard!,  von,  M.,  1828:  1;  1830:  1,  2.  | 
Engler,  C.,  1902  : 41. 

Ephraim,  1917:  54. 

Erdmann,  1826:  la. 

Erdmann.  H.,  1801:  7;  1S01:  4;  1904:  27; 
1907:  30. 

Erdmann,  O.  L.,  1828:  17,  18,  19;  1860: 

19. 

Erlich,  1887:  36,  37. 

Erman,  P.,  1818:  14. 

Ernst,  C.,  1901:  28. 

Escard,  J.,  1911:  119. 

Estreicher.  T..  1912:  4. 

Euler,  A..  1901:  16. 

Euler.  H.,  1900  : 31:  1904:  16. 

Ewen,  D.,  1913:  101. 

Exner,  F.,  1878:  58;  1888:  58. 


Fabaro,  L.,  1915:  86. 

Faber,  A..  1848:  2. 

Fabre,  C.,  1880:  37;  1896:  29. 

Faget,  V.,  1861:  17. 

Fahrenwald,  F.  A.,  1916:  116;  1917:  126, 
142. 

Fairley.  T.  J..  1875:  25;  1896:  37a. 
Faktor,  F..  1905  : 32,  33. 

Falco,  F.,  1909:  14,  45;  1910:  38. 

Falk,  K.  G.,  1917:  55. 

Faraday,  M„  1817:  12;  1820:  7;  1822:  4: 
1830:  13;  1S34:  19;  1846:  19;  1861:  5. 
Farbenfabriken  F.  Bayer,  1906  : 7. 
Farbwerke  Meister  Lucius  & Bruning, 


1902:  4. 


Farmer,  C.  J.,  1913:  117. 
Farmer,  M.  G.,  1870:  20. 


Farquharson,  R.  A.,  1913:  14. 

Favre,  P.  A.,  1870:  2:  1873:  29;  1874: 
9,  10. 

Fawsitt,  C.  A.,  1879:  36. 


Fawsitt,  C.  E.,  1906:  62. 

Fayrer,  J.,  1878  : 27. 

Fehling,  H.,  1841:  12. 

Feist,  K.,  1908  : 61. 

Fellenberg.  von,  L.  R.,  1S37:  4;  1840:  3. 
Fellner,  C.,  1915:  52,  53;  1916:  42,  43. 
Ferreira  da  Sih-a,  A.  J.,  1896:  14;  1897: 
12. 

Fersman,  A.,  1913:  98. 

Fen*,  €.,  1909  : 52,  81;  1912:  33. 

Feytis,  E.,  1911:  104. 

Ficken.  K..  1912:  53. 

Fiechter,  A.,  1911:  69. 

Field,  C.  W.,  1907  : 38. 

Field,  F.,  1881:  19. 

Field,  J.,  1849:  12. 

Finck.  M.,  1896:  16. 

Finger,  H.,  1909:  77,  78. 

Fink,  C.  G.,  1907  : 53. 

Fink,  E..  1892:  15;  1898:  2L 
Finke,  W..  1909:  83. 

Finkener,  R.,  1S66:  17. 

Firth,  J.  B.,  1913:  107. 

Fischer,  A.,  1904  : 60. 

Fischer.  F.,  1876:  45;  1906:  27;  1911:  116. 
Fischer,  H.,  1914:  85. 

Fischer.  H.  W.,  1908:  61. 

Fischer,  X.  W.,  1S27: 12,  13,  14,  15;  1S23: 
13.  25:  1829:  18,  19;  1830:  9,  19:  1840: 
10;  1841:  18;  1845:  20;  1847:  11;  1848:  5. 
Fizeau,  A.  H.  L.,  1869  : 27;  1874:  32. 
Fleischmann,  F.,  1906:  46. 

Fleissner,  F.,  1896  : 26. 

Fleming,  J.  A.,  1893  : 45;  1895:  44. 

Foek,  A.,  1880:  33. 

Fodor,  von,  J.,  1880:  24. 

Foerster,  F.,  1891:  10,  11;  1892:  26,  27; 

1902  : 47,  48,  58;  1903  : 33;  1909:  SO. 
Fokine,  S..  1913:  112. 

Fontaine,  C.,  1872:  4. 

Foote,  P.  D.,  1915:  93. 

Forbes,  D.,  1868:  13. 

Forbes.  G.  S.,  1913:  95. 

Forchhammer,  G.,  1826:  3. 

Forster,  A.,  1S66:  5. 

Forsterling,  K.,  1913:  134. 

Forsvthe,  W.  E..  1917.  12L 
Fortner.  M.,  1904:  46. 

Foss,  A.,  1906:  42. 

Fosse,  R.,  1909:  19. 

Foster,  W.,  1917:  60. 

Fourcroy,  A.  F.t  1803  : 9:  1804  : 8,  9,  10; 
1S06:  *3. 

Fourtier,  1891:  48;  1S92:  57. 

Foussereau,  G.,  1SS6:  12. 


AUTHOR  INDEX. 


463 


Fox,  R.  W.,  1819:  6. 

Fraenkel,  D.,  1912:  56. 

Fraenkel,  von,  O.,  1913:  51. 

Frank,  H.  H.,  1911:  53. 

Frankel,  L.  K.,  1890:  41. 

Frantz,  1876:  5,  50. 

Franz,  R.,  1853:  12. 

Frauenberger,  F.,  1904:  32. 

Frazer,  W.,  1863:  17. 

Fredenhagen,  C.,  1902:  39;  1913:  152. 
Freedericksz,  V.,  1913:  134. 

Freeman,  A.  E.,  1913:  105. 

Freise,  F.,  1911:  61. 

Fremy,  E.,  1844:  7,  8;  1845:  9;  1850:  6; 

1854:  5;  1855:  3;  1870:  10. 

French,  A.  G.,  1911:  1. 

French,  W.,  1900:  32. 

Frenkel,  M.,  1892:  6. 

Frenzel,  A.,  1874:  2. 

Frerichs,  F.  T.,  1878:  7. 

Fresenius,  C.  R.,  1842:  16;  1846:  13;  1877: 
25;  1882:  23;  1886:  14. 

Freund,  M.,  1888:  17. 

Freundlich,  H.,  1908:  60. 

Frey,  W.,  1909:  10;  1915:  89. 

Frick,  G.  F.  C.,  1833:  26;  1837:  3;  1868: 
15. 

Friedlander,  S.,  1896:  23. 

Friedrich,  K.,  1908:  27,  86;  1909:  97. 
Friedrich,  W.,  1912:  139. 

Friedrichs,  F.,  1898:  44. 

Friend,  J.  A.  N.,  1904:  51;  1908:  25. 
Friessner,  A.,  1902:  47. 

Friman,  E.,  1916:  89. 

Friswell,  R.  J.,  1871:  9;  1877:  18. 
Fritzmann,  E.,  1911:  30;  1915:  24. 
Fritzsche,  J.,  1846:  2,  10. 

Fromm,  O.,  1894:  23,  24. 

Fromme,  0.,  1883:  34;  1887:  58;  1888:  57. 
Frommel,  1878:  24;  1879:  29. 

Fuchs,  J.,  1903:  26. 

Fuchs,  J.  N.,  1831:  2. 

Fuchs,  K.,  1889:  29. 

Fyfe,  A.,  1824:  8. 

G. 

G.,  1786:  3. 

G.,  F.,  1860:  20. 

Gaiffe,  A.,  1877:  28. 

Gal,  H.,  1870:  5,  6,  7. 

Galletly,  J.  G.,  1908:  45.  . 

Garbowski,  L.,  1903:  40. 

Garden,  A.,  1823:  11. 

-Garside,  T.,  1878:  34. 

Gastein,  1890:  50. 


Gaubert,  P.,  1917:  46a. 

Gaudin,  A.,  1838:  22. 

Gaugain,  J.  M.,  1869:  32;  1872:  22. 
Gaultier  de  Claubry.  See  Claubry. 

Gaus,  C.,  1913:  32. 

Gautier,  1886:  37. 

Gavazzi,  A.,  1882:  19. 

Gawalovski,  A.,  1877:  26;  1884:  21. 
Gay-Lussac,  L.  J.,  1818:  12. 

Gaze,  R.,  1912:  81. 

Gebhardt,  H.,  1909:  9;  1913:  64. 

Gehlen,  A.  F.,  1803:  7;  1805: 11,  12;  1811: 
1;  1813:  3;  1817:  4. 

Gehrcke,  1915:  41a. 

Geibel,  W.,  1906:  73;  1907:  80;  1908:  1; 

1910:  5a,  95. 

Geiseler,  1839:  6. 

Geisenheimer,  G.,  1890:  11,  12,  13,  14. 
Geitel,  H.,  1890:  59. 

Geitner,  C.,  1864:  6. 

General  Electric  Co.,  1915:  102b. 
Genersich,  von,  W.,  1904:  49. 

Gentele,  J.  G.,  1864:  3. 

Genth,  F.  A.,  1851:  2;  1852:  2,  3;  1856: 11; 
1858  : 5;  1870:  lb. 

Gerber,  C.,  1910:  16,  17,  18,  19,  20. 
Gerdes,  B.,  1882:  8. 

Gerhardt,  C.,  1843:  8;  1849:  6;  1850:  8. 
Gerlach,  T.,  1888:  23. 

Gerlach,  W.,  1916:  85. 

Gerum,  J.,  1907:  55;  1908:  35;  1909:  41. 
Geseehus,  N.,  1877:  48. 

Gesellschaft  fiir  Elektro-osmose,  1913: 
119.  . 

Gewecke,  J.,  1917:  135. 

Ghosh,  A.  C.,  1909:  17. 

Ghosh,  T.,  1914:  29. 

Gialdini,  C.,  1902:  5;  1907:  27;  1908:  31. 
Gibbs,  W.,  1856: 11;  1858:  5;  1860:  6;  1861: 
6;  1869:  28;  1871:  8;  1873:  7;  1877:  15; 
1881:  7;  1886:  5;  1895:  11. 

Gilbert,  L.  W.,  1805:  9,  10;  1806:  5;  1819: 
2,  8;  1823:  13;  1824:  9. 

Gill,  H.  V:,  1909:  80. 

Gill,  T.,  1818:  15;  1825:  11. 

Gintl,  W.  F.,  1879:  23. 

Gladitz,  C.,  1912:  105. 

Gladstone,  J.  IF,  1854:  11;  1866:  10:  1878: 
53;  1879:  49,  54;  1891:  27;  1895:  33. 
Glaser,  F.,  1903:  47. 

Glebko,  K.,  1914:92. 

Glinka,  N.,  1911:  51. 

Gmelin,  C.  G.,  1823:  12;  1825:  10. 

Gmelin,  L.,  1822:  2. 


464 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Gobel,  F.,  1830:  16;  1833:  21. 

Godeffroy,  R.,  1875:  13;  1878:  5. 

Goecke,  O.,  1911:  78. 

Goldschmidt,  H..  1880:  20. 

Goldschmidt,  T.,  1908:  68. 

Goldstein,  E.,  1904:  33. 

Golochovsky,  1846:  la. 

Golodetz,  L.,  1910:  57. 

Golubkin,  G.,  1910:  15. 

Gooch,  F.  A.,  1878:  33;  1912:  92;  1917:  133, 
134. 

Goossens,  B.  J.,  1882:  45. 

Gordon,  C.,  1870:  13. 

Gordon,  C.  M.,  1897:  32. 

Gore,  G.,  1878:  56;  1879:  52;  1880:  41; 

1883:  18;  188&:  59. 

Gorn,  W.,  1913:  173. 

Gorup-Besanez,  von,  E.  F.,  1861:  21. 
Goss,  B.  C.,  1917:  84. 

Gott,  E.  J.,  1917:  72. 

Gottlob,  K.  O.,  1911:  84. 

Gourdon,  C.,  1873:  23. 

Gouy,  A.,  1879:  47. 

Govi,  G.,  1877:  43. 

Graham,  T.,  1829:  25;  1854:  18;  1866:  25; 

1868:  10;' 1869:  4,  5. 

Grailich,  IV.  J.,  1857:  13;  1858:  17. 
Gramp,  F.,  1874:  25. 

Granger,  A.,  1896:  13. 

Granger,  O.  G.,  1908:  4a. 

Grant,  W.  G.,  1915:  99. 

Grassi,  U.,  1916:  76. 

Gray,  J.,  1913:  84,  85. 

Gray,  J.  H.,  1894:  37. 

Grebe,  E.,  1899:  22. 

Greenaway,  A.  J.,  1877:  18. 

Greenwood,  H.  D..  1913:  82;  1916:  106. 
Gregg,  E.  T.,  1917:  123. 

Greiss,  C.  B.,  1859:  19. 

Grenier,  1875:  33. 

Grieb,  C.,  1912:  132. 

Griess,  P.,  1861:  14. 

Griffiths,  A.  B.,  1885:  10. 

Griffiths,  E.,  1917:  113. 

Griffiths,  E.  H..  1890:  45,  46;  1892:  55. 
Grigorjew,  M.,  1914:  37. 

Grimaux,  E.,  1886:  27. 

Grimm,  C.,  1856:  9,  10. 

Groger,  M.,  1897:  9. 

Groh,  J.,  1914:  76. 

Groll,  J.  T.,  1917:  77. 

Gros,  J.,  1838:  6. 

Groschuff,  1915:  41,  41a. 

Groshans,  J.  A.,  1885:  19. 


! Grosjean,  B.  J.,  1882:  29. 
j Gross,  T.,  1907:  4. 
j Grossett,  A.,  1916:  2. 

; Grossmann,  H.,  1903:  23;  1906:  21;  1910: 

I 27’ 

: Groth,  P.,  1879:  12;  1880:  33. 

| Grotthus,  von,  T.,  1817:  6. 

! Grove,  W.  E.,  1908:  56. 

| Grove,  W.  R.,  1839:  9,  10;  1846:  22. 

I Grover,  F.  L.,  1914:  127. 

Grower,  G.  G.,  1917:  136. 
j Grube,  G.,  1910:  82. 
j Grtiel,  C.  A.,  1863:  13;  1873:  24. 

Gruetter,  T.  W.,  1916:  8. 
j Griinebaum,  1906:  75. 

I Griineisen,  E.,  1907:  46;  1908:  47;  1910: 
| 44,  45. 

j Griinzweig,  M.,  1913:  47. 

Guardiola,  P.  F.,  1917:  143. 
j Guareschi,  I.,  1891:  7. 
j Guasco,  A.,  1912:  91. 

I Guebhard,  A.,  1883:  40. 
j Guerout,  A.,  1872:  8. 

| Guertler,  W.,  1906:  67;  1914:  119. 

| Gueymard,  E.,  1848:  1;  1852:  1;  1861:  3. 

| Guggenheimer,  S.,  1905:  50. 

I Giileher,  R.  J.,  1903:  53. 

! Guldberg,  0.  M.,  1887:  17. 

I Gulewitsch,  W.,  1893:  36;  1894:  28. 

| Gunther,  P.,  1917:  119. 

J Guntz,  A.,  1905:  46. 

I Gurvieh,  L.  S.,  1916:  62. 

Gutbier,  A.,  1902:  43;  1905: 13, 19,  20,  21, 
22,  23,  59;  1906:  11,  12,  24,  25;  1907:  14; 
1908:  23;  1909:  8,  9,  14,  16,  22,  23,  24, 
25,27,45,46,65;  1910:  13,14,38;  1911: 
37,39;  1912:  32,45;  1913:  36,39,40,52, 
64,  114;  1914:  30,  33,  34,  35,  36;  1915: 
27,  52,  53;  1916:  38,  39,  40,  41,  42,  43, 
82,  83. 

Guyard,  A . . 1863:  2;  1876:  14;  1879:  3. 
Guye,  C.  E.,  1906:  74;  1907:  72;  1908:51; 
1910:  46. 

Guyton  de  Morveau.  See  Morveau. 
Guzman.  F.  J.,  1915:  104,  105;  1916:  118, 
119;  1917:  137. 

Gwosdarew,  N.  J.,  1899:  21. 

Gwyer,  A.  G.  C.,  1905:  77. 

H. 

H.,  F.,  1828:  2. 

H.,  F.  D.,  1841:  2. 

H.,  G.  T.,  1885:  29. 

Haagn,  E.,  1902:  57. 

Haas,  C.  W.,  1916:  73. 


AUTHOR  IXDEX, 


465 


Haas,  P.,  1909:  9. 

Haatsick,  de,  E.,  1912:  6, 

Haber,  F.,  1898:  43;  1902:  51;  1906:  46, 
47;  1908:  69;  1910:  55. 

Haherland,  W.,  1888:  20. 

Black  spill,  L.,  1908:  78;  1909:  95;  1911: 
106;  1913:  156. 

Hadow,  E.  A.,  1860:  12;  1866:  13. 
Haedicke,  H.,  1916:  34. 

Haga,  H.,  1887:  45. 

Hagen,  E.,  1908:  73;  1909:  87;  1910:  69,  70. 
Hagenbach-Bischoff,  E.,  1874:  40. 

Hager,  1863:  16. 

Hahn,  A.,  1914:  85. 

Haidinger,  W.,  1846:  6;  1847:  17,  18; 

3849:  7;  1852:  10;  1855:  20;  1859:  4. 
Haidlen,  J.,  1842:  16. 

Haindl,  F.  X.,  1837:  10. 

Hake,  H.  W.,  1896:  6. 

ITalberstadt,  W.,  1884:  7. 

Hale,  F.  A.,  jr.,  1914:  12. 

Hall,  E.  H.,  1880:  44. 

Hall,  R.  W.,  1900:  40. 

Halla,  F.,  1914:  72. 

Hallwachs,  W.,  1912:  118;  1915:  77. 
Halsall,  R.,  1913:  153. 

Halske,  1912:  155. 

Hamberg,  1895:  19a. 

Hammick,  H.  L.,  1916:  69. 

Hampe,  W.,  1888:  24. 

Hanekop,  G.,  188S:  20. 

IIanig,'A.,  1914:  59. 

Hankel,  W.,  1883:  35. 

Hiinle,  G.  F.,  1835:  23. 

Hanson,  H.,  1917:  117. 

Hantzsch,  A.,  1908:  17;  1910:  92. 
Harbeck,  E.,  1897:  25. 

Hardin,  W.  L.,  1897:  42;  1899:  5. 
Harding,  M.  C.,  1899:  26. 

Hare,  R. ,1802: 5;  1820: 6;  1831:21 ; 1838:12; 

1840:  8;  1842:  17;  1846:  15;  1847:  21,  22. 
Harker,  J.  A.,  1905:  45;  1913:  103. 
Harkins,  W.  D.,  1909:  62;  1910:  53. 
Harnack,  E.,  1884:  17. 

Harpe,  de  la,  O.,  1885:  32. 

Harries,  C.  D.,  1911:  84. 

Harris,  B.  R.,  1917:  65. 

Harris,  H.  B.,  1895:  20. 

Harris,  W.  S.,  1827:  22. 

Harrison,  1890:  55. 

Harrison,  T.  R.,  1917:  114. 

Hart,  E.  B.,  1896:  30. 

Hartley,  W.  N.,  1882:  37;  1896:  39;  1902: 
61;  1912:  121. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  G94 30 


Hartmann,  W.,  1909:  41,  75;  1910:  42. 
Hartt,  C.  F.,  1870:  la. 

Harvey,  E.  N.,  1917:  83. 

Harwood,  W.  A.,  1912:  120. 

Hasenclever,  R.,  1872:  12;  1876:  44. 
Hassler,  F.,  1908:  41. 

Hatfield,  H.  S.,  1907:  77. 

Hatfield,  W.  H.,  1917:  113. 

Hatt,  I).,  1912:  60. 

Hauer,  von,  F.,  1914:  67. 

Haughton,  J.  L.,  1917:  117. 

Hautefeuille,  P.,  1874: 7;  1875: 12;  1877:20. 
Hautpick,  de,  E.,  1909:  2b;  1910:  la,  lb, 
5b,  5e;  1913:  5a,  5c,  25. 

Hauy,  1793:  1. 

Haynes,  E.,  1917:  131. 

Hazen,  A.,  1896:  34. 

Headden,  W.  P.,  1905:  1. 

Heald,  W.,  1907:  49. 

Healy,  D.  J.,  1917:  72. 

Heath,  R,  F.,  1917:  127. 

Hebebrand,  A.,  1902:  55. 

Hebert,  A.,  1899:  40,  41. 

Heckel,  W.,  1903:  26. 

Hedin,  S.  G.,  1885:  14. 

Heen,  de,  P.,  1907:  64. 

Hefner- Alteneck,  von,  F.,  1886:  33. 
Heidenhain,  M.,  1913:  96. 

Heil,  A.,  1904:  67. 

Heindl,  A.  J.,  1912:  21d. 

Heinrich,  F.,  1913:  39,  164. 

Heintz,  W.,  1876:  17;  1877:  22;  1879:  9. 
Heldt,  W.,  1863:  10. 

Helmersen,  1841:  a. 

Helmhacker,  R.,  1891:  1;  1893:  3a;  1894: 
5;  1898:  3. 

Helmholtz,  H.,  1872:  23;  1876:  61;  1880:45. 
Helonis,  1873:  18. 

Hempel,  C.  W.,  1858:  8;  1879:  25,  26,  27. 
Hemptinne,  de,  A.,  1898:  42. 

Henderson,  G.  C.,  1901:  22;  1908:  45. 
Henderson,  J.  B.,  1893:  44. 

Hendrikov,  1896:  a. 

Henke,  W.,  1858:  2. 

Hennin,  d’,  1855:  5. 

Henning,  F.,  1902:  33;  1905:  62;  1907: 
43;  1908:  83;  1911:  118;  1915:  41,  41a. 
Henrich,  F.,  1903:  41. 

Henry,  W.,  1800:  6;  1824:  10. 

Henry,  W.  O.,  1835:  24;  1836:  10. 
Heraeus,  W.  C.,  1857:  19;  1862:  21;  1891: 
33;  1892:  48,  49,  50;  1899:  49;  1901:  37; 
1902:  56;  1906:  34;  1907:  89;  1909:  105! 
1910:  96;  1911:  79;  1914:  118. 


466 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Herapath,  W.,  1823:  14. 

Herberger,  J.  E.,  1836:  2. 

Herman,  W.  D.,  1876:  36. 

Hermann,  R.,  1836:  1,  3;  1841:  3. 
Hermbstadt,  S.  F.,  1831:  23. 

Herroun,  E.  F.,  1892:  65. 

Herschell,  J.  F.  W.,  1832:  2. 

Herty,  C.  H.,  1896:  4;  1901:  13;  1908:  30. 
Hertz,  H.,  1892:  62. 

Herwig,  H.,  1878:  59. 

Herwig,  J.,  1913:  141. 

Herzenstein,  A.  M.,  1912:  67. 

Hess,  H.,  1831:  20;  1847:  6,  23. 

Hesse,  O.,  1881:  8;  1902:  12. 

Heuland,  H.,  1818:  1. 

Heuse,  W.,  1907:  45. 

Hevesy,  von,  G.,  1913:  94. 

Heycock,  C.  T.,  1890:  28;  1892:  35;  1894: 
19;  1895:  37;  1897:  36,  37,  39. 

Heyes,  J.  F.,  1888:  21. 

Heyl,  1875:  31. 

Heyl,  P.  R.,  1913:  11;  1915:  95a. 
Hezekiel,  1891:  44. 

Hibbard,  P.  L.,  1917:  71. 

Hibbert,  W.,  1895:  33. 

Hicks,  W,  B.,  1913:  92. 

Hidden,  W.  E.,  1881:  1;  1898:  6. 

Hielm,  1790:  2. 

Hill,  J.  M.,  1915:  17;  1917:  4,  16. 
Hillebrand,  W.  F.,  1911:  114. 

Hilliger,  1917:  116. 

Hillman,  O.  A.,  1913:  31. 

Himly,  1887:  39. 

Himly,  C.,  1842:  11. 

Hinrichs,  G.  D.,  1908:  7. 

Hintz,  E.,  1896:  28. 

Hirsehberg,  K.  A.,  1844:  18. 

Hirshberg,  L.  K.,  1913:  29a. 
llirtz,  11.,  1910:  21. 

Hittorf,  W.,  1847:  19;  1878:  31;  1899:  10. 
Headley,  T.  C.,  1882:  31,  32,  33. 

Hobart,  F.,  1911:  16:  1912:  19. 

Hobbs,  E.  W.,  1916:  94. 

Hober,  R„  1900:  33. 

Hobson,  1911:  5. 

Hochtlen,  F.,  1903:  9;  1904  : 6. 
Hodgkinson,  W.  R.  E.,  1888:  29;  1899: 
43. 

Hoeglund,  O.  M.,  1872:  6. 

Hofer,  F.,  1840:  7. 

Hoff,  A.,  1916:  50. 

Hoff,  van’!,  J.  H.,  1880:  33. 

Hoffman,  G.  C.,  1886:  1;  1889:  3. 


Hoffman,  L.,  1887:  25. 

Hoffmann,  F.,  1912:  149;  1915:  41,  41a,  98. 
Hofmann,  A.  W.,  1851:  7;  1856:  4:  1857: 
9;  1860:  11;  1869:  10,  25. 

Hofmann,  K.  A.,  1897:  18,  20;  1898:  31; 
1900:  16;  1903:  9,  49;  1904:  6;  1907:  19; 
1908:  32,  33;  1909:  33;  1912:  39,  40,  86; 
1913:  126,  127;  1914:  129;  1915:  70; 

1916:  66. 

Hofmeier,  G.,  1905:  59. 

Hofmeister,  F.,  jr.,  1882:  20. 

Hohenegger,  C.,  1910:  61;  1913:  109: 

1915:  67. 

Hoitsema,  C.,  1895:  4. 

Hoke,  C.  M.,  1916  : 54,  56,  105;  1917:  31. 
Holborn,  L.,  1895:  43;  1899:  42;  1902: 
33;  1903:  37;  1905:  62;  1906:  36;  1908: 
83;  1911:  118;  1915:  41a. 

Holden,  E.  L„  1887:  2. 

Holland,  J.,  1881:  15. 

Hollard,  A.,  1904:  23. 

Holleman,  A.  F.,  1892:  43. 

Holman,  S.  W.,  1896:  38. 

Holst,  G.,  1916:  57. 

Holst,  N.  O.,  1873:  11. 

Holt,  A.,  jr.,  1907:  37;  1913:  107,  108; 
1914:  51;  1915:  58. 

Holtz,  H.C.,1 911: 14,  lea;  1912:1;  1914:  2. 
Holzmann,  F.,  1912:  37. 

Holzmann,  M.,  1861:  8. 

Hommel,  W.,  1914:  5a. 

Honda,  K.,  1910:  81;  1912:  128;  1913: 

y ■ 

149. 

Hooze,  J.  A.,  1893:  3d. 

Hopff,  L.,  1835:  4. 

Hoppe-Seyler,  F.,  1877:  38;  1878:  52; 
1879:  50;  1883:  31;  1886:  18;  1889:  25. 
i Horner,  L.,  1839:  2. 

' Horton,  F.,  1913:  150;  1915:  94. 

! Horton,  F.  W.,  1906:  4 , 6;  1912:  13; 
| 1916:  108. 

Horwood,  C.  B.,  1913:  14a. 

Hosmer.  H.  R..  1917:  80a. 

Hostetler,  J.  C.,  1915:  45. 

Houben,  J.,  1916:  77. 

Houllevigue,  L.,  1909  : 55. 

I Houston,  E.  J.,  1887:  30. 

How,  H.,  1854:  13. 

Howe,  A.,  1880:  33. 

Howe,  J.  L.,  1894:  11;  1896:  22;  1897;  43; 
1898:  12,  23,  25;  1900  : 3,  1901:  10; 
1904:  9,  10,  69;  1914:  1. 

Howell,  J.  W.,  1910:  100. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


467 


Howse,  T.,  1819:  7. 

Hoyermann,  D.,  1910:  9. 

Hradecky,  K.,  1915:  44;  1917:  62. 

Huber,  J.,  1916:  82. 

Hughes,  A.  L.,  1914:  110. 

Hughes,  H.  G.,  1914:  70. 

Hulbirt,  E.  R.,  1910:  85. 

Hulett,  G.  A.,  1904:  38. 

Hulsebosch,  van  Ledden,  C.  J.,  1915: 100. 
Humboldt,  von,  A.,  1811:  2;  1817:  1; 
1825:  1;  1826:  1;  1827:  5;  1828:  2;  1830: 
4;  1843:  1. 

Hume,  J.,  1804:  4. 

Humley,  H.,  1896:  36. 

Humphrey,  E.,  1901:  9. 

Humphries,  C.  H.,  1917:  146. 
Hundeshagen,  L.,  1904:  2. 

Hiinefeld,  L.,  1830:  8. 

Hunt,  J.,  1862:  24. 

Hunt,  T.  S.,  1851:  1. 

Huntington,  A.  K.,  1882:  13. 

Hupka,  E.,  1913:  142. 

Husek,  R.,  1904:  52. 

Hussak,  E.,  1904:  1,  1906:  2. 

Huszar,  A.,  1891:  46. 

Hutchins,  C.  C.,  1887:  2. 

Hutchins,  J.  P.,  1912:  5;  1913:  5d;  1914: 
10,  11;  1916:  15. 

Hiittlinger,  A.,  1908:  23;  1916:  38,  39. 
Huttner,  C.,  1911:  66,  83;  1915:  41;  1916: 
72. 

Hyde,  A.  C.,  1906:  79. 

Hyde,  E.  P.,  1910:  71,  72;  1917:  121. 

I. 

Icilius,  Q.,  1847:  4a. 

Ihmori,  T.,  1886:  28,  32;  1887:  41. 

Ikeda,  K.,  1901:  25. 

Ilosvay  de  N.  Uosva,  L.,  1889:  27. 
Imowo,  I.,  1917:  110a. 

Ingenhousz,  J.,  1776:  1. 

Inostranzeff,  A.,  1893:  3;  1894:  1;  1895:  1. 
Inouye,  K.,  1911:  90. 

Ipatief,  V.  N.,  1912:  72. 

Isaac,  E.,  1907:  82. 

Isambert,  F.,  1880:  7. 

Itzig,  H.,  1900:  19. 

Ivanov,  A.  A.,  1916:  78. 

Ivanov,  V.  N.,  1916:  35. 

Ives,  H.  E.,  1916:  112. 

Iwanow,  W.  N.,  1912:  95. 

Izar,  G.t  1907:  63. 


J. 

Jablczvnski,  K.,  1908:  55. 

Jabs,  A.,  1912:  147. 

Jackson,  F.  G.,  1910:  80. 

Jackson,  H.,  1896:  41. 

Jacobi,  E.,  1863:  3. 

Jacobi,  M.  H.,  1840:  13;  1841:  21;  1859: 
6,  7,  29;  1860:  2. 

Jacobsen,  A.,  1907:  35. 

Jacobsen,  J.,  1909:  18. 

Jacoby,  R.,  1906:  80. 

Jacquelain,  V.  A.,  1840:  2. 

Jacquet,  J.  B.,  1893:  3c;  1898:  8a. 

Jaeger,  F.  M.,  1917:  51,  52. 

Jaffe,  G.,  1914:  96. 

Jago.  W.,  1876:  37. 

Jahn,  H.,  1888:  62;  1889:  21. 

Jakob,  W.,  1911:  11. 

Janecek,  G.,  1879:  40. 

Janecke,  E.,  1909:  98;  1910:  94. 

Janicki,  1915:  41a. 

Jannasch,  P.,  1898:  36;  1904:  24,  25,  26; 
1905:  36. 

Janssen,  R.  L.,  1905:  22. 

Jantsch,  G.,  1911:  43. 

Jarrell,  T.  D.,  1917:  66. 

Jassoneix,  du,  A.  B.,  1909:  30. 

Jean,  F.,  1871:  20;  1892:  45;  1902:  30. 
Jeffries,  Z.,  1917:  94a. 

Jenzsch,  G.,  1859:  21. 

Jeremejew,  P.  V.,  1879:  2. 

Jewreinow,  P.,  1849:  4;  1853:  8. 

Jirneno,  E.,  1916:  119. 

Joannis,  A.,  1882:  38. 

Job,  P.,  1912:  42,  43. 

Jochum,  P.,  1885:  8. 

Johannsen,  E.,  1870:  18. 

John,  J.  F.,  1825:  15. 

Johnson,  E.  J.,  1841:  20. 

Johnson,  G.  H.,  1881:  40. 

Johnson,  J.  H.,  1877:  29. 

Johnson,  Matthey  & Co.,  1876:  44;  1885: 
24. 

Johnson,  P.,  1812:  1 
Johnson,  P.  N.,  1837:  2. 

Johnson,  R.,  1858:  11,  18;  1861:  20. 
Johnston,  1846:  3. 

Johnston,  J.,  1912:  106. 

Johnstone,  S.  J.,  1917:  32. 

Jolibois,  P.,  1908.  26. 

Jolin,  S.,  1874:  24. 

Jolly,  H.  A.,  1914:  60. 


468 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Joly,  A.,  1888:  13,  14;  1889:  9,  10,11,  12; 
1890:  19,  20;  1891:  15,  16,  17,  30,  31; 
1892:  20,  33;  1893:  8,  9,  28;  1894:  7a,  13; 
1895:  12;  1898:  24. 

Jones,  H.  O.,  1911:  45;  1912:  57,  58. 
Jones,  J.  L.,  1917:  109. 

Jones,  W.  M.,  1915:  91. 

Jorgensen,  S.  M.,  1867:  11;  1877:  9,  23; 
1878:  6;  1879:  10;  1881:  14;  1882:  10,11; 
1883:  13;  1884:  5,  6;  1885:  5;  1886:  8,9; 
1887 : 5 ; 1889 : 15 ; 1890 : 21,22,23 ; 1891 : 19 , 
20;  1892:  17,  18,  19;  1893:  20;  1894:  16; 
1896:  19;  1897:  15;  1898:  28;  1900:  23; 
1903:  3;  1906:  18,  19. 

Joris,  1814:  10. 

Joslin,  O.  T.,  1883:  10. 

Joss,  J.  R.,  1835:  10,13. 

Jossa,  von,  H.,  1862:  3.  4. 

Jong,  de,  D.  J.,  1913:  30. 

Jouglet,  A.,  1870:  27;  1872:  16. 

Jouko',  I.  S.,  1912:  107. 

Joule,  J.  P.,  1846:  17;  1850:  12;  1862:  19. 
Jungenfeld,  von,  J.  G.,  1913:  143. 
Jungfleisch,  E.  J.,  1879:  5. 

Juptner,  von,  H.,  1878:  19;  1880:  25; 

1889:  22;  1899:  44. 

Jurisch,  E.,  1912:  59;  1915:  40. 

Just,  G.,  1909:  60. 

Just,  J.,  1906:  53. 

K. 

Kaestner,  C.,  1908:  57. 

Kahlbaum,  G.  W.  A.,  1904:  36;  1905:  44. 
Kail,  G.,  1914:  88. 

Kalbfleisch,  F.  W.,  1878:  36. 

Kalischer,  S.,  1882:  34. 

Kalle  & Co.,  1905:  61;  1911:  81,  82;  1913: 
130, 130a;  1916:  60,  61. 

Kallenberg,  S.,  1912:  54. 

Kiimmerer,  H.,  1868:  2. 

Kane,  R.  J.,  1832:  8;  1833:  17,  18;  1834: 
11;  1835:  16;  1838:  7;  1841:  11;  1842:  8. 
Karl,  A.,  1911:  92;  1913:' 125. 

Karmarsch,  K.,  1823:  15;  1834:  25;  1877: 
5. 

Karmroth,  C.,  1852:  6. 

Kassner,  G.,  1888:  35. 

Kastner,  K.  W.  G.,  1824:  11;  1827:  17; 
1828:  24;  1829:  14;  1830:  12;  1834:  16; 
1845:  14. 

Kateridge,  M.,  1915:  103. 

Katterfeld,  A.,  1885:  1. 

Katterfeld,  G.,  1907:  I. 

Kauffmann,  M.,  1913: 171,  172. 

Kawakita,  Y.,  1917:  110a. 


Kaye,  G.  W.  C.,  1907:  66;  1913:  101,  103; 
1917:  106. 

Kayser,  H.,  1888:  32;  1897:  31. 
Keferstein,  W.,  1856:  13. 

Kehrmann,  F.,  1916:  45. 

Keiser,  E.H.,  1887:  21;  1889:  5;  1894:  IS. 
Kelber,L.C.,  1912:  76. 

Keller,  H.  F.,  1890:  39,  40;  1892:  25; 
1912:  28. » 

Kellner,  C.,  1895:  42. 

Kellogg,  L.  O.,  1915:  7. 

Kelly,  A.  A.,  1896:  36. 

Kemmerer,  G.  I.,  1908:  8. 

Kemp,  1841:  13. 

Kemp,  J.  F.,  1902:  1. 

Kennedy,  J.  C.,  1915:  9. 

Kenngott,  G.  A.,  1851:  3. 

Kenyon,  J.,  1906:  15;  1907:  12. 

Keppen,  de,  A.,  1894:  6. 

Kerk,  C.  H.,  1913:  180. 

Kern,  J.  W.,  1917:  46. 

Kern,  S.,  1875:  16,  17;  1876:  24,  25;  1877: 
2,3. 

Kernot,  G.,  1909:  68,  69,  70,  71. 

Kersting,  R.,  1853:  3. 

Kessler,  L.,  1847:  20;  1876:  44. 
Kiltuinovich,  S.  S.,  1915:  32;  1916:  48. 
Kimball,  1912:  8c;  1914:  3a. 

Kimura,  K.,  1917:  86. 

King,  L.  V.,  1914:  105. 

King,  R.  W.,  1917:  96. 

King,  Y.  L.,  1913:  69. 

Kirby,  O.  F.,  1910:  110. 

Kirchhoff,  G.,  1861:  7,  23. 

Kirkby,  P.  J.,  1905:  51. 

Kirmreuther,  H.,  1911:  44. 

| Kirschbaum,  H.,  1914:  102. 

Klaproth,  M.  H.,  1802:  7. 

Klason,  P.,  1895:  17,18,19;  1902:  15,  22; 

1904:  7,  15;  1906:  26. 

Klein,  K.  R.,  1897:  33. 

Klein,  R.,  1914:  84. 

Ivlemencic,  I.,  1888:  41. 

Klinger,  II.,  1888:  7. 

Klinkerfues,  1871:  25. 

Klippel,  C.,  1860:  9. 

Klobbie,  E.  A.,  1898:  35. 

Knapp,  A.  W.,  1912:  94. 

Knight,  R.,  1800:  4. 

Knight,  W.  C.,  1901:  2. 

Knoblauch,  H.,  1885:  40. 

Knocke,  A.,  1909:  54. 

Knoevenagel,  E.,  1902:  29;  1903:  26. 
Knop,  IV.,  1842:  10;  1846:  5;  1852:  11; 
1859:  12,  15. 


AUTHOR  INDEX 


469 


Knopf,  A.,  1914:  11a;  1915:  5;  1916:  19, 

20. 

Knorr,  von,  G.,  1902:  27. 

Knosel,  T.,  1873:  2. 

Knott,  0.  G.,  1876:  62;  1884:  29;  1886: 
34. 

Ko&ayaahi,  M.,  1917:  133,  134. 

Ivobbe,  K.,  1890:  9,  10. 

Kobljanski,  A.,  1913:  61. 

Koch,  K.  R.,  1879:  51;  1892:  67;  1893: 
47;  1915:  56. 

Koch,  von,  R.,  1910:  102. 

Koefoed,  E.,  1888:  19. 

Kohlrausch,  F.,  1898:  17;  1900:  12. 
Kohlsch titter,  V.,  1908:  68. 

Koifman,  I.,  1915:  48,  49. 

Kokscharow,  von,  N.,  1866:  1,  la. 

Kolbe,  H.,  1870:  8;  1871;  5. 

Kollock,  L.  G.,  1899:  30. 

Kolossow,  A.,  1892:  46. 

Koltovsky,  1840:  a;  1842:  3c;  1846:  lb. 
Konen,  H.,  1909:  78. 

Konig,  B.,  1910:  109. 

Konig,  J.,  1905:  10;  1906:  9. 

Konig,  W.,  1883:  19. 

Koninck,  1879:  41. 

Koninck,  de,  L.  L.,  1879:  13;  1888:  33, 
34,  37;  1895:  22;  1910:  41. 

Konowalow,  D.,  1885:  42. 

Koosen,  J.  H.,  1887:  59. 

Kopa,  L.,  1910:  109;  1913:  185,  186. 
Kopetzky,  1847:  3. 

Kopfer,  F.,  1876:  31,  32;  1878:  29. 
Kopp,  H.,  1845:  12;  1864:  13. 

Koppen,  A.,  1880:  1. 

Korevaar,  A.,  1916:  75. 

Korten,  F.,  1907:  13. 

Kositzky,  M.  M.,  1844:  2,  3. 

Kottig,  O.,  1857:  5. 

Kotz,  A.,  1911:  56;  1912:  75. 

Koukline,  E.  V.,  1912:  84. 

Kousnetsof,  M.  I.,  1913:  73. 

Kowalki,  O.  L.,  1916:  111. 

Kowalski,  von,  J.,  1914:  67. 

Kraft  und  Steudal  Fabr.  Phot.  Papiere, 
1916:  119a. 

Krakau,  A.  A.,  1892:  68;  1895:  5. 
Kralovanszky,  L.,  1828:  14. 
Krassnapolsky,  M.  E.,  1890:  2a. 

Krause,  G.,  1874:  26. 

Krause,  M.,  1902:  59. 

Krauss,  F.,  1915:  27. 

Kraut,  K.,  1865:  1,  17;  1887:  40. 
Kriuiter,  J.,  1916:  82. 


Krell,  A.,  1905:  20,21,22;  1906:  12,2-1; 
1909:  8. 

Kremann,  B.,  1912:  137. 

Kremer,  D.,  1916:  104. 

Kretschy,  M.,  1876:  23. 

Kritschewsky,  L.,  1885:  22. 

Kroll,  A.  V.,  1912:  111. 

Krotow,  1888:  lb. 

Krouchkoll,  1883:  36;  1884:  11. 

Kruger,  F.,  1876:  16;  1915:  69;  1917:  92. 
Krumbhaar,  W.,  1910:  51. 

Krusch,  P.,  1914:  9. 

Kriiss,  G.,  1887:  25. 

Kuhlmann,  F.,  1838:  17;  1839:  7. 
Kuhlmann,  F.,  fils,  1880:  36. 

Kiihnel,  R.,  1911:  27. 

Kulibin,  S.,  1888:  1. 

Kulisch,  P.,  1885:  16. 

Kummel,  W.,  1877:  36. 

Kundt,  A.,  1888:  53,  54. 

Kunz,  G.  F.,  1892:  2a;  1898:  4a;  1916: 
11;  1917:  1. 

Kupffer,  A.  T.,  1827:  2;  1829:  1;  1852: 
13;  1854:  17. 

Kurnakow,  N.  S.,  1893:  24;  1894:  26; 

1895:  14;  1898:  20;  1899:  21. 

Kursanoff,  N.  S.,  1898:  18. 

Kwasnik,  W.,  1891:  22. 

Kyropoulos,  S.,  1917:  107. 

L. 

Labonte,  1828:  21. 

Laborde,  A.,  1909:  94. 

Lachtschenko,  P.,  1909:  96. 

Lafay,  A.,  1910:  83. 

Laird,  G.  J.,  1888:  6. 

Lake,  H.  H.,  1886:  23. 

Lakes,  A.,  1910:  3a. 

Lallemand,  A.,  1876:  63. 

Lamb,  T.,  1892:  24. 

Lamont,  J.,  1847:  27. 

Lampadius,  W.  A.,  1796:  1;  1814:  8; 

1829:  16,  17;  1830:  14;  1833:  7;  1837:  2. 
Lamy,  1876:  47. 

Lanaux,  1855:  18. 

Lancien,  A.,  1911:  41,  94. 

Landfield,  J.  B.,  1909:  3c. 

Landois,  H.  EL,  1856:  16. 

Landolt,  H.  H.,  1851:  6. 

Landriani,  R.,  1786:  2. 

Lang,  A.,  1904:  66. 

Lang,  J.,  1861:  9,  10. 

Lang,  von,  V.,  1857:  13;  1866:  28. 


470  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METAI 

Langden,  A.,  1912:  116. 

Lange,  L.  T.,  1861:  12. 

Langmuir,  I.,  1906:  38;  1912:  152;  1914: 
69;  1915:  22. 

Langness,  J.,  1907:  31. 

Langstein,  E.,  1914:  53. 

La  Rosa,  M.,  1916:  86. 

Larroque,  F.,  1885:  37. 

Lasaulx,  von.  A.,  1875:  14;  1882:  1. 

Lasch,  W.,  1854:  14. 

Lassaigne,  J.  L.,  1829:  13;  1832:  5,  6; 
1833:  16,  19:  1835:  17;  1838:  11;  1843: 
5;  1851:  9. 

Laub,  J.,  1915:  81,  82. 

Lauber.  E.,  1909:  90. 

Laudy,  L.  H.,  1875:  11. 

Laugier,  A.,  1814:  3;  1825:  2,  3. 

Laurent,  1890:  2. 

Laurent,  A.,  1847:  16;  1849:  6. 

Lavoisier,  1790:  4. 

Lawrence.  R.  R.,  1896:  38. 

Lawrow,  H.,  1871:  6. 

Lea,  M.  C.,  1864:  1;  1867:  12;  1893:  33; 
1894:  8. 

Le  Baillif,  1824:  1. 

Lebeau,  P.,  1907:  15,  84,  85;  1908:  26. 
Lebedev,  S.  V.,  1916:  78. 

Lebed ew,  A.,  1908:  63. 

Lebedinski,  W.,  1913:  62;  1915:  34;  1916: 
49. 

Le  Bel,  1891:  14;  1893:  13. 

Le  Bel,  J.  A.,  1911:  103. 

Le  Blanc,  M.,  1909:  42. 

Le  Chatelier,  H.  See  Chatelier,  Le,  H. 
Lecremier,  A.,  1888:  33. 

Leder,  F.,  1907:  88. 

Lederer,  K.,  1916:  46. 

Ledoux-Lebard,  R.,  1917:  105. 

Leeds,  A.  R.,  1883:  24. 

Lees,  C.  H.,  1910:  88. 

Lehmann,  F.,  1913:  128. 

Lehmann,  O.,  1886:  13. 

Lehner,  V.,  1917:  108. 

Leidie,  E.,  1888: 10, 11, 12;  1890: 17;  1891: 
30,  31;  1893:  28;  1894: 13;  1895: 12;  1898: 
24;  1899:  4,  12;  1900:  4,  5,  20;  1901:  20; 
1902:  7,  17;  1903:  28. 

Leiser,  1887:  39. 

Leithner,  1813:  2. 

Lemoine,  G.,  1916:  63. 

Lendesen,  G.,  1907:  35. 

Lenhard,  1890:  52. 

Lennsen,  E.,  1858:  6. 

Lenz,  1916:  41a. 


.S  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 

Lenz,  E.,  1833  : 27. 

Lenz,  W.,  1888  : 40. 

Leonhard  i,  1790:  3. 

Lep6z,  C.,  1884:  13. 

Leplav,  M.,  1844:  1. 

Leroux,  A.,  1908:  27,  86;  1909:  97. 
Lessing.  A.,  1902:  46;  1904:  65;  1906:  40. 
Leuchs,  G.  A.,  1909:  28;  1916:  40,  41. 
Leuchtenberg,  von,  M..  1817:  1. 
Levallois,  A.,  1883:  17. 

Levy,  L.  A.,  1905  : 27;  1907:  17;  1908:  28, 
29;  1912:  50. 

Levy,  W.,  1905:  25. 

Lewis,  G.  N.,  1917:  93. 

Lewis,  J.,  1884:  24. 

Lewis,  P.,  1904:  62. 

Lewis,  W.,  1755:  1. 

Ley,  XL.  1912:  53, 

Liebenthal,  E.,  1888  : 52. 

Liebermann,  L.,  1904:48,  49,  50,  54;  1911: 
117. 

Liebig,  von,  J.,  1829:  22;  1830:  7;  1834: 
13;  1835:  21;  1836:  17,  18;  1837:  8;  1907: 
52. 

Liesegang,  R.  E.,  1890:  47. 

Limmer,  F.,  1907:  40. 

Lind,  S.  C.,  1903:  16;  1909:  29. 
Lindemann,  C.  L.,  1912:  101. 

Lindemann,  F.  A.,  1912:  101. 

Lindner,  F.,  1909:  21,  22. 

Lindo,  D.,  1881:  20. 

Lisenko,  K.,  1871:  3. 

L’Isle,  de,  R.,  1783:  1. 

Litton,  A.,  1842:  9. 

Liveing,  G.  D.,  1879:  46. 

Liversidge,  A.,  1897:  26. 

IiOcher,  J.,  1875:  24. 

Lockyer,  J.  N.,  1878:  49. 

Loessner,  F.,  1912:  115. 

Loevenhaut,  A.  S.,  1908:  56. 

Loevy,  J..  1915:  13. 

Loew,  O.,  1890:  32,  33,  34;  1906:  43;  1912: 
109. 

Loewenstamm,  W.,  1903:  19,  24. 
Loewinson-Lessing,  F.,  1900:  la;  1909: 
lb;  1910:  lc. 

Lohndahl,  H.,  1887:  7;  1890:  16. 
Loiseleur,  H.,  1900:  26. 

Lommel,  E.,  1879:  31;  1880  : 31,  32;  1881: 
30. 

Lorenz,  R.,  1897:  7;  1907:  78;  1909:  90,  91. 
Losch,  1890:  2b. 

Lossen,  W.  C.,  1871:  11;  1875:  23. 

Louis,  H.,  1897:  2. 


AUTHOR  INDEX. 


471 


Lovin,  J.  M.,  1883:  11. 

Lowe,  G.  C.,  1861:  20. 

Lowig,  R.,  1855:  7. 

Lowndes,  F.  K.  S.,  1888:  29. 

Lubarsky,  1828:  7a,  7b;  1842:  3a;  1845: 4a. 
Luca,  de,  S.,  1876:  51. 

Lucas,  R.,  1905:  17. 

Lucchesi,  A.,  1896:  10;  1898:  22;  1899: 
13,  14;  1900:  6.  18. 

Luckow,  C.,  1880:  26. 

Liidersdorft',  F.,  1847:  24. 

Ludwig,  H.,  1862:  1. 

Lumiere,  A.,  1912:  160;  1913:  182. 
Lumiere,  L.,  1912:  160;  1913:  182. 

Lunge,  G.,  1892:  54;  1894:  31.  32;  1897: 
25;  1900:  34. 

Luther,  R.,  1903:  48;  1905 : 79. 

Luthy,  O.,  1879:  1. 

Luttig,  O.,  1912:  123. 

Lyons,  1848:  10. 

Lyons,  R.  E.,  1914:  25;  1915:  23. 

M. 

M.,  1758: 1. 

Maass,  J.  A.,  1898:  29. 

Maassen,  A.,  1888:  7. 

Macaluso,  D.,  1874:  43. 

MacDermott,  F.  A.,  1910:  7. 

Macfarlane,  A.,  1884:  31. 

MacGregor,  J.,  1876:  62. 

Maclnnis,  D.  A.,  1914:  73. 

Macintyre,  J.,  1895:  41. 

Mackay,  G.  M.  J.,  1914:  69. 

Macquer,  1758  : 2. 

Macri,  V.,  1917:  59. 

Madinaveitia,  A.,  1913:  66. 

Maey,  E.,  1901:  36. 

Maggi,  L.,  1881:  25. 

Magnus,  A.,  1905:  16;  1915:  87. 

Magnus,  G.,  1828:  11;  1853:  11;  1865: 11. 
Mahon,  R.  W.,  1893:  32. 

Mailfert,  l’Abbe,  1882:  17. 

Maisch,  K.,  1909:  27,  27a. 

Maisch,  O.,  1916:  39,  41. 

Majert,  W.,  1901:  3. 

Makowka,  O.,  1904:  27;  1907:  30;  1908:  34, 
42. 

Malaguti,  F.  J..  1839:  4. 

Malatesta,  G.,  1913:  75. 

Malbot,  H.,  1887:  4. 

Mallet,  J.  W.,  1855:  2;  1860:  10;  1882:  4; 

1898:  1;  1901:  6;  1908:  80. 

Mallet,  W.,  1850:  2. 

Maimer,  I.,  1914:  89. 

Mamyscheff,  N.,  1827:  1. 


Manasse,  E.,  1899:  15. 

Manchot,  W.,  1903:  18. 

Mandel,  H.  J.,  1916.  44. 

Mangin.  L.,  1893:  34. 

Mamzoff,  C.  D.,  1913:  176. 

Marc,  R.,  1906:  63. 

Marcano,  V.,  1868:  5;  1889:  10. 

Marcet,  A.,  1813:  7. 

Marchand,  R.  F.,  1842:  15;  1844:  14. 
Marconi  Wireless  Telegraph  Co.,  1914 
124. 

Maret,  1777 : 1. 

Marggraf,  A.  S.,  1761:  1. 

Margules,  M.,  1898:  38,  39. 

Marianini,  S.,  1826:  16. 

Marie,  0.,  1907:  75;  1908:  9. 

Marignac,  de,  C.,  1855:  17;  1873:  5. 
Marino,  L.,  1901:  11;  1902:  25;  1903  : 20; 
1904:  12. 

Markary  an,  V.,  1916:  79. 

Markovsky,  G.,  1891:  51. 

Marsden.  E..  1913:  161. 

Marsh,  O.  0.,  1863:  1. 

Marshall,  W.,  1832:  15. 

Martens,  M.,  1839:  8. 

Martin,  B.  T.,  1887:  3. 

Martin,  F.,  1908:  13;  1909:  11,  12,  13. 
Martin,  F.  H.,  1916:  53. 

Martini,  T.,  1908:  67. 

Martins,  C.  A.,  1859:  17;  1860:  14;  1861: 
14. 

Marten,  G.  H..  1907:  68. 

Marum,  van,  M.,  1802:  4. 

Marx,  C,  M.,  1828:  4;  1830:  3;  1832:  16. 
Mascart,  E.,  1879:  34. 

Mascazzini.  A..  1877:  30. 

Mascetti,  E.,  1901:  7. 

Masse,  1890:  53. 

Masson.  A.,  1850:  11. 

Mather.  W.  W.,  1835:  14,  15,  20, 
Mathews,  J.  A.,  1902:  54. 

Mathewson,  C.  H.,  1911: 113. 

Matignon,  C.,  1899:  19;  1903:  35. 
Matteucci,  G.,  1838:  25;  1863:  8. 

Matthey,  E.,  1890:  42;  1892;  42. 

Matthev,  G.,  1876:  65;  1878:  3;  1879:  4. 
Matthiessen,  A.,  1858:  20;  1866:  27. 
Maughan,  W.,  1835:  19. 

Maumene,  E.,  1887:  16a. 

Mawe,  J.,  1818:  2. 

Maxted,  E.  B..  1917:  112. 

Mayer,  E.  W.,  1908:  36,  54. 

Mayer,  von,  O.,  1905:  36. 

Mayrhofer,  J.,  1883:  21. 


472 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Mazzucchelli,  A.,  1914:  52;  1915:  41. 
McArthur,  J..  1887:  13. 

McCaskey,  H D.,  1902:  lc. 

McCaughey,  W.  J.,  1909:  106;  1910:  105. 
McCay,  L.  W.,  1912:  153. 

McClelland,  J.  A.,  1905:  75. 

McGoughan,  A.  G.,  1912:  138. 

McIntosh,  A.,  1903:  52. 

McLeod,  A.,  1914:  15c. 

Megerle,  W.,  1899:  20. 

Megraw,  H.  A.,  1914:  14. 

Mehler,  L.,  1914:  35,  38. 

Meier,  W.,  1910:  65. 

Meillere,  G.,  1913:  93. 

Meissner,  W.,  1912:  149;  1915:  41a,  85,  98. 
Meithe,  A.,  1911:98. 

Meitner,  L.,  1907:  65. 

Meker,  G.,  1897:  4. 

Mellor,  J.  W.,  1902:  40. 

Melly,  E.,  1838:  16. 

Memminger,  C.  G.,  1885:  11. 

Menge,  J.,  1826:  3;  1842:  2. 

Mention,  1847:  25. 

Mercier,  P.,  1889:  36. 

Merck,  E.,  1899:  47. 

Merget,  A.,  1872:  21;  1873:  21. 

Mermet,  A.,  1875:  15. 

Merrill,  G.  S.,  1910:  101. 

Merrill,  H.  B.,  1917:  108. 

Merry  weather,  G.,  1831:  22. 

Merz,  G.,  1867:  19. 

Metz,  A.,  1915:  40. 

Meulen,  van  der,  II.  G.  L.,  1882:  18. 
Meunier,  J.,  1909:  58,  59. 


Meunier,  S 

!.,  1894:  2 

; 1898: 

5. 

Meyer,  A. 

R.,  1910: 

49;  1913:  168. 

Mej^er,  J., 

1902:  16. 

Meyer,  L., 

1883:  14. 

Meyer,  V., 

, 1875:  24; 

; 1879: 

19; 

1880:  5, 

16;  1887 

: 19;  1896 

: 37. 

Meyer,  W. 

A.,  1912: 

63,  64. 

,68. 

Meyer,  von,  E.,  187 

'6:  57, 

58; 

1877:  1L 

12;  1878 

: 12. 

Michaud,  G.,  1894:  27. 

Micheels,  H.,  1907:  64. 

Michel,  F.,  1915:  12. 

Miesler,  J.,  1887:  52. 

Miethe,  A.,  1911:  14. 

Mietzschke,  1900:  29. 

Milbauer,J.,  1907: 18;  1911:  87;  1917:  42. 
Miles,  F.  P.,  1886:  4. 

Miller,  E.  II.,  1895:  21a;  1906:  69. 

Miller,  II.  B.,  1826:  9,  14. 

Miller,  W.  A.,  1862:  26. 

Millmann,  S.,  1917:  54. 


Millon,  E.,  1842:  14;  1843;  13;  1863:  5. 
Mill  ward,  1848:  10. 

Milly,  von,  1784:  4. 

Milner,  S.  R.,  1908:  74. 

Minchin,  1842:  6a. 

Mingaye,  J.  C.  H.,  1892:  2c;  1898:  8; 
1909:  2,  44. 

Minozzi,  A.,  1909:  15;  1916:  47. 

Mintz,  S.,  1908:  51. 

Miolati,  A.,  1893:  23;  1894:  17;  1896:  5; 
1897:  10;  1900:  7,  8,  9,  15,  21;  1901:  7; 
1902:  5;  1903:  10,  11. 

Mitchell,  G.  J.,  1916:  31a. 

Mitscherlich,  A.,  1876:  33. 

Mitscherlich,  E.,  1827:  12a. 

Mittasch,  A.,  1917:  80,  85. 

Moeller,  G.,  1912:  149. 

Mohlau,  R.,  1906:  13. 

Mohn,  A.,  1907:  78. 

Mohr,  C.  F.,  1836:  11;  1871:  4. 

Mohr,  F.,  1873:  17. 

Moissan,  II.,  1885:  9;  1889:  8;  1893:  31; 
1896:  11,  40;  1902:  62;  1903:  18;  1906: 
37;  1907:  83. 

Molinie,  H.,  1912:  16. 

Mollien,  1824:  a, 

Molnar,  1847:  2. 

Mom,  C.  P.,  1916:  70. 

Mond,  L.,  1895:  35;  1897:  28,  29;  1910: 
21;  1915:  24a. 

Mons,  van,  J.  B.,  1827:  9. 

Montemartini,  C.,  1893:  11. 

Montizon,  de,  A.  J.  Frere,  1818:  8. 

Moore,  B.  E.,  1908:  66. 

Moore,  R.  J.,  1916:  54. 

Mooser,  J.,  1891:  41. 

Moraht,  II.,  1893:  10. 

Morawitz,  H.,  1917:  85. 

Moreau,  G.,  1909:  57;  1913:  148. 

Morges,  F.,  1878:  32. 

Morin,  1758:  1. 

Morin,  II.,  1874:  3,  6. 

Morley,  II.  F.,  1878:  55. 

Morrell,  T.  T.,  1880:  23. 

Morse,  II.  N.,  1888:  39. 

Morveau,  de,  G.,  1775:  1;  1777: 1;  1780: 1; 
1785:  1;  1786:  1,  3;  1787:  1,  2;  1798:  1, 
2;  1803:  11,  12;  1809:  4;  1810: 1;  1811:  5 
Mosander,  C.  G.,  1857:  18. 

Moseley,  II.  G.  J.,  1914:  98. 

Moss,  H.  W.,  1912:  121. 

Moulin,  M.,  1910:  68. 

Moutier,  J.,  1874:  8. 

Muckle,  A.,  1857:  4. 

Mudd,  S.  W.,  1915  6a. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


473 


IMuhr,  F.,  1891:  29. 

{Mulder,  E.,  1882:  18. 

Mulder,  G.  J.,  1837:  9. 

Mulder,  M.  E.,  1896:  35. 

Muller,  A.  W.,  1883:  4. 

| Muller,  E.,  1901:  34;  1902:  48;  1906:  64, 
65;  1907:  62. 

Muller,  F.,  1916;  80a. 

Muller,  F.  C.  G.,  1917:  58. 

Muller,  H.,  1853:  1. 

I Muller,  J.,  1857:  22. 

Muller,  J.  A.,  1903:  22. 

Muller,  von,  L. , 1909 : 46;  1912 : 46 ; 1914 : 30. 
Murchison,  R.  I.,  1846:  1;  1849:  a, 
j Murray,  A.,  1775:  la. 

Murray,  J.,  1817:  13;  1821;  7,  9;  1822:  3. 
iMuschkjetoff,  J.  W.,  1895:  2. 
j Musler,  1838:  18. 

iMussin-Puschkin,  von,  A.,  1797:  1,  2; 
1798:  3,  4;  1799:  5,  6,  7;  1800: 1,  5;  1803: 
13;  1804:  6,  7,  15,  16. 

Muthmann,  W.,  1904:  32. 

Mylius,  F.,  1891:  10;  1892:  26,  27;  1894; 
23,  24;  1898:  10;  1911:  66,  67,  83;  1914: 
52;  1915:  41,  41a;  1916:  72. 

Mylo,  B.,  1912:  78. 

N. 

jNaamlooze  Yennootschap  “Ant.  Jurgens’ 
ver.  Fabr.,”  1912:  71. 

Nagel,  O.,  1913:  33;  1915:  15;  1917:  11. 
!Nahrwold,  R.,  1888:  61. 

Namias,  R.,  1904:  68;  1910:  107. 

Narbutt,  von,  J.,  1908:  32. 

Masse,  W.,  1826:  12. 

Needham,  C.  A.,  1885:  38. 
j Neill,  J.  W.,  1917:  8. 

Neilson,  C.  H.,  1903:  39;  1904:  45;  1906: 
49,  50. 

Nelson,  J.  M.,  1917:  55. 

Nernst,  W.,  1902:  46;  1906:  35. 

Neue  Photographische  Aktiengesell- 
schaft,  1906:  81. 

Neumann,  B.,  1894:  40;  1910:  5;  1917:  44. 
Neumann,  G.,  1891:  24;  1892:  29. 
Neumann,  K.  A.,  1813:  6. 

Neumann,  M.,  1910:  106;  1917:  145. 
Neundlinger,  K.,  1913:  114. 

Neveu,  E.,  1903:  29. 

Neville,  F.  H.,  1890:  28;  1892:  35;  1894: 
19;  1895:  37;  1897:  36,  37,  39. 
Newberry,  J.  S.,  1880:  2. 

Newbery,  E.,  1914:  111;  1916:  96;  1917: 
95a. 


Newton,  W.  E.,  1858:  13. 

Niccolai',  G.,  1907:  70. 

Nichol,  1892:  60. 

Nichol,  J.,  1904:  41. 

Nicholle,  1893:  35. 

Nichols,  E.  L.,  1879:  48;  1881:  38. 
Nickl^s,  J.,  1853:  4;  1860:  22;  1861:  13. 
Nikolaeev,  A.  V.,  1912:  12b. 

Nikolaus,  G.,  1913:  35;  1914:  130. 

Nilson,  L.  F.,  1876:  12,  13;  1877:  16,  37; 

1878:  13,  14;  1879:  12. 

Nishida,  II.,  1917:  110b. 

Nitta,  S.,  1917:  103. 

Noad,  J.,  1886:  2. 

Noble,  A.,  1862:  6. 

Nogues,  A.  F.,  1858:  10. 

Noll,  K.,  1894:  38. 

Nomura,  II.,  1917:  87. 

Nordenskjold,  A.  E.,  1870:  1. 
Nordenskjold,  J.,  1905:  34. 

Normann,  W.,  1914:  86. 

North,  II.  B.,  1911:  75. 

Northrup,  E.  F.,  1917:  113,  115. 

Norton,  S.  A.,  1870:  3;  1872:  3. 

Norvel,  1791:  1. 

Noss,  F.,  1912:  137. 

Novitzky,  A.,  1907:  15. 

Nowac,  A.,  1907:  24. 

Noyes,  A.  A.,  1906:  28. 

Nutting,  P.  G.,  1910:  75;  1916:  93. 
Nyman,  M.,  1910:  40. 

O. 

Oberbeck,  A.,  1887:  60. 

Oberfell,  G.  G.,  1914:  61. 

Obermaier,  C.  J.,  1910:  26. 

Obermayer,  von,  A.,  3 869:  31. 

Oblata,  J.,  1917:  120. 

Odling,  \V.,  1870:  16. 

Oechsner  de  Coninck.  See  Coninck. 
Oehme,  H.,  1913:  122. 

Oesterreichische  Gasgluhlicht-  und 
Elektricitatsgesellschaft,  1903:  54. 

Olil,  A.,  1911:  43. 

Oldenberg,  L.,  1911:  55. 

O’Neal,  E.  A.,  1898:  23. 

Onnes,  II.  K.,  1908:  50,  84;  1911:  105. 
Oosterhuis,  E.,  1916:  57,  95. 

Opificius,  L.,  1877:  6;  1883:  15. 

Oppitz,  L.  K.,  1917:  102. 

Oppler,  T.,  1857:  7. 

Orelkine,  B.,  3912:  55. 

Orfila,  P.,  1832:  7. 


474 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Orloff,  N.  A.,  1906:  30,  33;  1907:  8;  1908: 
38;  1912:  51. 

Orlowsky,  A.,  1881:  10;  1883:  25. 

Orueta,  de,  D.,  1916:  1. 

Osaka,  Y.,  1903:  45. 

Osann,  G.,  1824:  12;  1826:  5;  1827:  8; 
1829:  6;  1830:  11;  1835:  7;  1845:  6,  7; 
1846:  4;  1848:  11. 

Osmond,  F.,  1887:  22. 

Ospina,  1911:  4a. 

Ostermann,  H.,  1887:  31. 
Ostromisslensky,  J.,  1910:  28. 

Ostwald,  W.,  1889:  19;  1909:  4,  5;  1910: 
8;  1913:  37,  38;  1914:  27. 

Ott,  E.,  1913:  118. 

Ottenstein,  B.,  1913:  64;  1914:  34. 
Oudemans,  A.  C.,  1885:  30. 

Owen,  E.,  1860:  15. 

Owen,  G.,  1913:  153. 

Owen,  M.,  1912:  129. 

Owens,  M.  E.,  1881:  13. 

Owsjannikow,  P.,  1869:  20. 

P. 

Paal,  C.,  1904:  53;  1905:  58;  1907:  32,  54, 
55;  19.08:  35;  1909:  75;  1910:  42,  61; 
1911:  92;  1912:  74;  1913:  70,  109,  122, 
125, 174, 175;  1914:  77,  78;  1915:. 59,  66, 
67,  68;  1916:  64,  65;  1917:  82,  90. 
Pagliani,  S.,  1916:  84;  1917:  110. 
Paillard,  C.  A.,  1886:  21. 

Palmaer,  W.,  1889:  14;  1895:  16,  16a; 

1896:  18;  1899:  46. 

Palmstedt,  C.,  1852:  4. 

Pamfil,  P.,  1910:  4. 

Paneth,  F.,  1913:  94. 

Papasogli,  G.,  1883:  33;  1884:  16. 
Pappada,  N.,  1911:  88. 

Paravey,  de,  C.,  1850:  1. 

Parisot,  1840:  6. 

Parke,  1905:  4. 

Parker,  F.,  jr.,  1913:  117. 

Parker,  T.  J.,  1879:  32. 

Parmentier,  F.,  1892:  61. 

Parnell,  T.,  1904:41. 

Parodi,  G.,  1877:  30. 

Parr,  S.  W.,  1915:  106. 

Parravano,  N.,  1904:  5. 

Parsons,  C.  L. , 1917:  30. 

Partzsch,  A.,  1912: 118. 

Paschen,  F.,  1893:  42;  1894:  39. 

Paschski,  N.,  1908:  81. 

Pastor,  J..  1899:  20. 

Patchin,  G.,  1914:  54. 


Patera,  A.,  1847:  3. 

Patrick,  W.  A.,  1909:  20;  1912:  47. 
Patten,  H.  E.,  1910:  105. 

Patterson,  R.  M.,  1850:  3. 

Patterson,  W.  H.,  1912:  3. 

Paucker,  von,  M.  G.,  1851:  11. 

Paulson,  E.,  1914:  90;  1915:  71,  72,  73,  74~ 
Peachy,  S.  J.,  1907:  28;  1909:  38. 

Pearce,  F.,  1902:  la;  1905:  2a. 

Peddie.  W.,  1886:  35. 

Pedler,  A.,  1878:  28. 

Pelabon,  H.,  1915:  88. 

Peligot,  M.,  1892:  44. 

Pell,  A.  W.,  1892:  36. 

Pellet,  H.,  1873:  22;  1875:  33;  1917:  68. 
Pelletan,  1878:  26. 

Pelletier,  1792:  2,  3. 

Pellizzari,  G.,  1905:  18. 

Pelouze,  J.,  1836: 16;  1860:  21. 

Pendini,  U.,  1903:  10,  11. 

Penfield,  L.  A.,  1902:  2. 

Penfield,  S.  L.,  1889:  1. 

Percy,  1810:  2. 

Perkins,  F.  P.,  1890:  48. 

Perret,  L.,  1912:  8a. 

Perry,  N.  W.,  1879:  24;  1885:  23. 
Personne,  J.,  1862:  15. 

Persoz,  J.,  1833:  12;  1834:  9. 

Peschko,  R.  J.,  1916:  100. 

Petard,  J.  E.,  1912:  120. 

Peter,  A.  M.,  1917:  72. 

Peters,  C.  A.,  1911:  74. 

Peters,  E.,  1916:  67. 

Peters.  W.,  1908:  44;  1909:  50;  1912:  96; 
1914:  28. 

Petersen,  J.,  1892:  16;  1906;  29. 

Peterson,  H.,  1899:  28. 

Petit,  A.  T.,  1818:  18;  1819:  9. 

Petit,  J..  1904:  13. 

Petrenko,  G.,  1904:  63. 
Petrenko-Kritschenko,  P.,  1893:  16. 
Petrzilka.  H.,  1894:  30. 

Pettenkofer,  M.,  1837:  1;  1847:  5^  1848: 
3;  1849:  9. 

Pettersson,  O.,  1873:  13;  1878:  13. 
Pevrone,  M.,  1844:  11;  1847:  13;  1855: 
10.  11. 

Pfaff,  C.  H.,  1821:  6;  1823:  16;  1828:  27. 
Pfau,  A.,  1916:  77. 

Pfeiffer,  P.,  1898:  19;  1902;  13. 

Pfieiderer,  Z.,  1909:  92. 

Pfuhl,  E.,  1907:  39. 

Philip,  A.,  1917:  122. 

Philipp,  J.,  1876:  9;  1878:  1. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


475 


Phillips,  F.  C.,  1894:  21,  22;  1895:  30; 
1901:  14. 

Phillips,  P.,  1832:  13. 

Phillips,  R.,  1832:  8;  1833:  14,  20. 
Phillips,  S.  E.,  1870:  15;  1878:  15. 
Phipson,  T.  L.,  1858:  15;  1862:  5;  1880: 
18. 

Piccini,  A.,  190.1:  11;  1902:  25. 

Pickard,  R.  H.,  1906:  15;  1907:  12. 
Pigeon,  L.,  1889:  6;  1890:  27;  1891:  5,  25, 
26;  1892:  34;  1894:  10;  1895:  6. 

Pikos,  P.,  1908:  59. 

Pilet,  1891:  49. 

Pilipenko,  P.  P.,  1915:  3b. 

Pina  de  Rubies,  S.,  1911:  13;  1913:  2,  4; 

1915:  2,  3a,  14;  1916:  1,  10. 

Pionchon,  1886:  26. 

Pirani,  E.,  1883:  38. 

Pirani,  von,  M.,  1910:  49,  78;  1911:  96. 
Pirngruber,  H.,  1887:  27. 

Pisati,  G.,  1876:  64. 

Pischtschikoff,  P.  V.,  1914:  80. 

Pisko,  F.  J.,  1864:  14. 

Pistschimuka,  P.  S.,  1911:  31;  1912:  44. 
Pitkin,  L.,  1879:  7. 

Pizzighelli,  G.,  1887:  47;  1889:  42;  1892: 
58/ 

Plaats,  van  der,  J.  D.,  1886:  10. 

Planiava,  J.  N.,  1829:  21. 

Plattner,  C.  F.,  1848:  4. 

Plattner,  G.  P.,  1833:  7. 

Playfair,  L.,  1846:  17. 

Pleischl,  A.,  1823:  17,  18;  1825:  7,  8; 
1844:  16. 

Pliiddemann,  W.,  1906:  42. 

Plzak,  F.,  1904:  52. 

Pochettino,  A.,  1905:  42. 

Podkopajew,  N.  L.,  1908:  79. 

Pogany,  B.,  1914:  107. 

*Poggendorff,  J.  C.,  1841:  22;  1844:  19; 
I 1845:  21;  1869:  34. 

Pohl,  R.,  1909:  79. 

Polain,  A.,  1874:  36. 

Poland,  L.  N.  P.,  1890:  44. 

Poloni,  G.,  1882:  43. 

Pomeroy,  J.  0.,  1912:  133. 

Pomey,  E.,  1881:  11;  1887:  6. 

Pond,  J.  A.,  1883:  a. 

Pope,  W.  J.,  1907:  28;  1909:  38. 

Post,  J.,  1882:  24. 

Pouillet,  C.  S.  M.,  1836:  19. 

Pozzi-Escot,  M.  E.,  1900:  28:  1911:  59,60. 
Praetorius-Seidler,  G.,  1880:  4. 

Prandtl,  W.,  1900:  16. 


Pratt,  1889:  40. 

Pratt,  J.  H.,  1906:  5. 

Pratt,  J.  W.,  1885:  28. 

Prausnitz,  P.  H.,  1914:  53. 

Pravdinsky,  Y.  X.,  1910.  5d. 

Precht,H.,  1879:  22;  1885:  20;  1896:  33. 
Prechtl,  J.  J.,  1818:  10. 

Preece,  W.H.,  1887:  56. 

Preiss,  K.,  1870:  19. 

Prentice,  M. , 1877 : 35. 

Prevost,  J.  L.,  1833:  25. 

Price,  T.  S.,  1902:  45;  1904:  51. 
Priestley,  J.,1799:  2. 

Pringle,  A.,  1887:  48. 

Prinsep,  J.,1833:  6. 

Prinz, W.,  1893:  27. 

Prip,  A.,  1887:  31. 

Priwoznik,  E.,  1895:  21;  1899:  32;  1912: 
29. 

Prost,  E.,  1886:  3. 

Proust,  J.  L..  1799:  1:  1801:  1;  1804:  17. 
Pullinger,  W.,  1891:  12;  1892:  7. 

Purgotti,  A.,  1904:  44. 

Purington,  C.  W.,  1899:  1;  1909:  3d. 
Purvis,  J.  E.,  1905:  63;  1906:  57,  58. 
Puschin,  N.  A.,  1908:  81;  1909:  96. 
Puymaurin,  1823:  2. 

Q. 

Quadrat,  B.,  1847:  14. 

Quennessen,  L.,  1901:  20;  1902:  7;  1903: 
28;  1901:  18;  1905:  30,  35;  1906:  77; 
1913:  16;  1916:  29;  1917:  3. 
Quesneville,  G.,  1876:  18. 

Quesneville,  fils,  1830:  5. 

Quincke,  G.,  1863:  18;  1868:  16. 

R. 

R.,  von,  Herr,  1790:  5. 

Rabe,  W.  O.,  1897:  20;  1898:  31. 
Rabuteau,  A.,  1871:  18. 

Raewsky,  1846:  11;  1848:  6,7. 

Ramberg,  L.,  1906:  22;  1907:  20;  1910: 
31;  1912:  54;  1913:  58,59,59a. 
Rammelsberg,  C.,  1837:  7;  1841:  9;  1847: 
15. 

Ramsay,  W.,  1894:  34;  1895:  35;  3897:28, 
29. 

Randall.  W.  W.,  1897:  30. 

Ranier,  L.  St.,  1913:  81. 

Ransohoff,  F.,  1905:  13. 

Raoult,  F.  M.,  1864:  15;  1884:  10. 

Rath,  von,  G.f  1860:  16. 


476 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Rathsburg,  H.,  1917:  41. 

Rauclnitz,  R.  W.,  1901 : 26. 

Rausch, A.,  1913:  40. 

Ray,  P.  C.,  1909:  17;  1914:  46. 

Raymond,  R.  W.,  1873:  4;  1893:  6. 

Read,  H.  F.,  1885:  36. 

Read,  T.  T.,  1905:  2d;  1915:  50a. 

Reboul , G.,  1911:  102;  1914:  93. 
Redtenbacher,  J.,  1865:  8. 

Reese,  L.,  1887:  11. 

Regel,  K.,  1906:  31. 

Regnault,  V.,  1836:  7;  1840:  12;  1856: 
18;  1859:  20:  1861:  22. 

Reh.kuh,  E.,  1888:  47. 

Reich,  F.,  1844:  15. 

Reichard,  C.,  1894:  12. 

Reichardt, E.,  1874:  35. 

Reichinstein,  D.,  1910:  90. 

Reilley,  H.  E. , 1914 : 109. 

Reiman,  C.  K.,  1917:  78. 

Reimann,  M.,1869:  26. 

Reinhardt,  C.,1887:  29. 

Reinitzer,  B.,  1879:  17. 

Reinsch,  H.,1838:  10. 

Reischauer,  C.,1855:  21. 

Reiset,  J;,  1840:  5;  1843:  13;  1844:  12. 
Reitzenstein,  F.,  1898:  26,  27. 

Remont,  A.,  1881:  28. 

Renz,  1910:  10. 

Renz,  C.,  1901:  12;  1903:  15. 

Ressel,  C.,  1909:  107. 

Restrepo,  Y.,  1884:  la;  1886:  la. 

Rever,  F.,1824:  b. 

Reynaud , G. , 1899 : 40.41. 

Reynolds,  1888:  46. 

Reynolds,  J.  E.,  1909:  34 
R eynoso,  A . , 1850 : 10. 

Ribau,  J.,  1877:  10. 

Richard,  A.,  1880:  12. 

Richards,  J.W.,  1893:  41. 

Richards,  P.  A.  E.,  1902:  26. 

Richards,  R.  H.,  1906:  3a;  1914:  15. 
Richards,  T.  W.,  1907:  47;  1910:  80. 
Richardson,  O.  W.,  1903:  42;  1904:  40, 
41,57;  1905:48,64,65;  1906:  59,60; 

1908:  70,  71;  1910:  84,  85;  1911,  109; 
1912:  125;  1913:  137,  155;  1914:  112; 
1915:  75,  95;  1916:  97. 

Richardt,  F.,  1904 : 43. 

Richarz,  F.,  1889:  39;  1890:  63. 

Richter,  D.,  1797:  3. 

Richter,  J.  B.,  1803:  6. 

Richter,  T.,  1863:  11. 

Ridolfi,C.,  1816:  1. 


Riede,  A.,  1914:  108. 

Rieke,  R.,  1910:  104. 

Riemsdijk,  van,  A.  D.,  1880:  29;  1882: 
26;  1885:  21. 

Rienecker,  1829:  5. 

Ries,  A.,  1911:  76. 

Riess,  M.,  1909:  23,  24,  25;  1910:  37. 
Riess,  P.,  1845:  19. 

Rimbach,  E.,  1907:  13. 

Rio,  del,  A.  M.,  1824:  2. 

Rissom,  J.,  1898:  34. 

Ritter,  J.  W.,  1804:  20. 

Ritter,  K.,  1914:  129. 

Rizzo,  G.  B.,  1893:  43. 

Robert,  A.,  1916:  45. 

Roberts,  J.  H.  T.,  1913:  102. 
Roherts-Austen,  W.  C.,  1869:  8;  1872:  2; 

1888:  48;  1896:  25;  1897:  34. 

Robinson,  C.  S.,  1911:  45;  1912:  57,  58. 
Robinson,  J.,  1913:  136. 

Rochon,  A.,  1798:  5;  1800:  7. 

Roessler,  C.,  1897:  38. 

Roessler,  F.,  1895:  8. 

Rogers,  F.  J.,  1915:  75. 

Rogers,  H.  D.,  1840:  4. 

Rohland,  P.,  1897:  8;  1898:  13;  1909:  47; 
1910:  39. 

Rohmann,  H.,  1914:  97. 

Rolla,  L.,  1909:  74. 

Romanis,  R.,  1884:  9. 

Romilly,  T.,  1906:  74. 

Rontgen,  W.  C.,  1873:  20. 

Root,  E.,  1876:  61. 

Rosa.  See  LaRosa. 

Rose,  G.,  1833:  1;  1834:  4;  1835:  6;  1839: 
1;  1841: 5;  1842:  1,  7;  1848:  12;  1849:  10. 
Rose,  H..  1820:  4;  1846:  12. 

Rose,  J.  G.,  1908:  39. 

Rose,  V.,  1803:  7. 

Roseleur,  1855:  18. 

Rosenberg,  I.,  1913:  67. 

Rosenbladt,  T.,  1887:  24. 

Rosenbusch,  R.,  1911:  56. 

Rosenhain,  W.,  1902:  34. 

Rosenheim,  A..  1891:  8;  1898:  29;  1899: 
7;  1900:  17,  19;  1903:  19,  24;  1905:  25; 
1914:  42. 

Rosenstiehl,  A.,  1908:  14. 

Rosenthal,  E.,  1913:  116. 

Rosenthal,  F.,  1912:  41. 

Rossetti,  F.,  1878:  60. 

Rossi,  G.  B.,  1913:  55. 

Rossi er,  H.,  1866: 11;  1876:4;  1885:  27,  35; 
1900:  39. 

Rostosky,  L.,  1903:  32;  1904:  26. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


477 


Roth,  K.,  1908:  35;  1909:  41. 

Rothberg,  P.,  1911:  58. 

Rothe,  E.,  1904:  59. 

Rother,  F.,  1912:  104;  1913:  157. 
Rothmund,  V.,  1904  : 65. 

Rottger,  F.,  1885:  20. 

Roush,  G.  A.,  1915:  15a. 

Rousseau,  G.,  1889:  7. 

Royds,  T.,  1911:  95. 

Rubens,  H.,  1908:  73;  1909:  87;  1910: 
69,  70. 

Rubies.  See  Pina  de  Rubies. 

Rudelius,  C.,  1885:  13. 

Rudnick,  P.,  1917:  45. 

Rudolfi,  E.,  1910:  87. 

Rudorff,  F.,  1888:  26;  1892:  41. 

Ruer,  R.,  1896:  31;  1903:  46;  1905:  72,  74; 
1906:  70,  71,  72;  1907:  81;  1908: 10;  1912: 
124. 

Ruff,  O.,  1910:  12a,  47;  1911:  78;  1913:  53, 
54;  1917:  41. 

Ruhland,  R.  L.,  1814:  5. 

Rule,  A.,  1917:  43. 

Rupp,  E.,  1904:  22. 

Ruprecht,  von,  1790:  6,  7. 

Russell,  E.  J.,  1902:  40. 

Russell,  W.  J.,  1873:  12. 

Rydberg,  J.  R.,  1897:  6. 

S. 

Sabaneef,  A.  P.,  1899:  36. 

Sabatier,  P.,  1892:  31;  1897:  24;  1911:  49. 
Sabine,  R.,  1878:  45. 

Sabine,  W.  C.,  1888:  50. 

Sabot,  R.,  1914:  5. 

’ Sachs,  A.,  1901:  23. 

Sack,  M.,  1902:  51;  1903:  44. 

Sad  tier,  S.  P.,  1871:  7. 

Saillard,  G.,  1872:  5. 

St.  Amand,  de,  B.,  1831:  29. 

St.-Edme,  E.,  1861:  19. 

St.-Gilles,  de,  L.  P.,  1855:  4. 
j St.-Pierre,  C.,  1861:  16,  18;  1862:  14. 

[ Sale,  P.  D.,  1914:  123;  1915:  96. 

Salkind,  J.  S.,  1914:  79,  80;  1916:  79. 

I Salkowski,  E.,  1916:  55. 

[ Salkowski,  H.,  1899:  10. 

'f  Salm-Horstmar,  W.  F.,  1856:  3. 

[ Salvetat,  A.,  1849:  11;  1865:  12. 
j|  Sand,  H.  J.  S.,  1905:  55. 

I Sandberger,  von,  K.  L.  F.,  1875:  4. 

I Sander,  W.,  1912:  142. 

I Sanders,  J.  F.,  1917:  111. 

I Sandoz,  M.,  1916:  45. 


Sasserath,  E.  A.,  1899:  7. 

Savard,  1854:  16. 

Sayno,  A.,  1892:  28. 

Saytzeff,  A.  M.,  1888:  la;  1892:  2b;  1898:2. 
Saytzeff,  M.,  1872:  17. 

Scagliarini,  G.,  1913:  55;  1916:  68. 

Scala,  A.,  1909:  66,  67. 

Schabus,  J.,  1850:  9;  1854:  15. 

Schaeffer,  E.,  1912:  75. 

Schaer,  E.,  1901:  30;  1902:  42. 

Schafarik,  A.,  1855:  12. 

Schaffner,  L.,  1844:  9. 

Schapper,  H.,  1910:  46. 

Scharff,  E.,  1912:  124. 

Scharn weber,  L.,  1885:  33. 

Schatterbeck,  C.  C.,  1913:  28a. 

Scheel,  K.,  1907:  44,  45;  1915:  41a. 
Scheele,  von,  C.,  1898:  16. 

Scheffer,  T.,  1751:  2. 

Scheibler,  C.,  18^:  2;  1869:  19. 
Schellenberg,  A.,  1917:  89. 

Scheller,  A.,  1906:  64. 

Schertel,  A.,  1896:  21. 

Scheuer,  1906:  75. 

Scheurer-Kestner,  A.,  1866:  22;  1875: 
23;  1876:  42;  1878:  40;  1880:  35-. 
Schick,  F.,  1914:  86. 

Schick,  K.,  1910:  52. 

Schiff,  H.,  1S60:  8;  1862:  12;  1885:  17. 
Schiff,  R.,  1894:  29. 

Schimper,  W.,  1877:  27. 

Schinz,  1870:  31. 

Schirikow.  See  Tschirikoff. 
Schleiermaclier,  A.,  1885:  41. 

Schlett,  W.,  1908:  49;  1914:  71. 
Schlossberger,  J.,  1859:  16. 

Schmidt,  1846:  3. 

Schmidt,  A.,  1891:  23. 

Schmidt,  G.  N.  S.,  1904:  17. 

Schmidt,  H.  W.,  1910:  91. 

Schmidt,  K.  E.  F.,  1916:  87. 

Schmidt,  P.  W.,  1824:  13. 

Schmidt,  W.,  1913:  77. 

Schnauss,  J.,  1889:  31. 

Schnedermann,  G.  H,  E.,  1842:  9;  1846:  5. 
Schneider,  C.,  1917:  85. 

Schneider,  E.  R.,  1853:  5. 

Schneider,  J.,  1906:  53. 

Schneider,  L.,  1917:  73. 

Schneider,  O.,  1913:  126;  1915:  70. 
Schneider,  R.,  1869:  13,  14;  1873:  8,  9; 
1874:  23;  1881:  27;  1891:  9;  1892:  14; 
1893:  17. 


478 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Schneider,  von.  W.,  1867:  3. 

Schofield,  F.  H.,  1917:  113. 

Scholtz,  R.,  1880:  11. 

Scholz,  1814:  11. 

Scholz,  1901:  38. 

Schonbein,  C.  F.,  1838:  13,  19,  20;  1839: 
12;  1842:  13;  1843:  14;  1844:  20;  1845: 
17:  1846:  20;  1857:  20;  1858:  16;  1859: 
26,27,28;  1866:  6. 

Schonherr,  P.,  1901:  32. 

Schonn,  L.,  1870:  30. 

Schoras,  J.,  1870:  29. 

Schottlander,  P.,  1866:  8. 

Schou,  D.,  1896:  17;  1897:  17. 

Schroder,  H.,  1873:  30. 

Schrotter,  A.,  1845:  18;  1849  : 5:  1864  : 8. 
Schubarth,  E.  L.,  1845:  1. 

Schubigin.  See  Chouriguine. 

Schiibler,  G.,  1817:  11. 

Schucht,  L.,  1880:  27. 

Schtick,  B.,  1906:  21;  lflO:  27. 

Schulte,  W.,  1909  : 93. 

Schultz,  F.,  1912:  35. 

Schultze,  H..  1915:  41a. 

Schultze,  O.,  1911:  70. 

Schulze,  A.,  1915:  41,  41a. 

Schulze,  F.  A.,  1911:  101. 

Schumpelt,  K.,  1913:  127. 

Schuphaus,  1916:  69a. 

Schurigin,  M.,  1909:  31. 

Schiirmann,  E.,  1888:  22. 

Schuster,  R.,  1907:  87. 

Schiitzenberger,  P.,  1868  : 6:  1870  : 9; 
1872:  4;  1881:  12;  1882:  36;  1884:  3; 
1890:  15. 

Schwartz,  L.,  1828:  26. 

Schwarz,  1865:  15. 

Schwarz,  A.,  1912:  61,  76;  1915:  59,  68; 
1916:  64. 

Schwarz,  H..  1870:  28;  1887:  38. 
Schwarzenbach,  1885:  22. 
Schwarzenbach,  V.,  1857:  8;  1859:  14; 
1867:  13. 

Schweigger,  J.  S.  C.,  1813:  4;  1814:  6; 

1823:  19;  1828:  22;  1831:  19;  1845:  2. 
Schweigger-Seidel,  F.  W.,  1831:  10,  11. 
Schwendler,  L.,  1879:  55. 

Schwer,  EL,  1914:  42. 

Sch witter,  M.,  1914:  57. 

Scott,  A.,  1881:  17. 

Scott,  G.  S.,  1915:  la;  1917:  27. 

Scott,  J.,  1809  : 3. 

Seaman,  H.  J.,  1884:  20. 

Seamon,  W.  H.,  1882:  2,  3. 


Sebastian,  R.  L.,  1917:  93. 

Seebeck,  T.  J.,  1821:  10. 

Seegert,  B.,  1911:  98. 

Seelheim,  F.,  1879:  18. 

Seeliger,  R.,  1913:  158. 

Seemann,  H.,  1914:  99;  1915:80;  1916:90. 
Seemann,  L.,  1899:  29. 

Segewetz,  A.,  1903:  8. 

Segre,  M.,  1914:  64. 

Seigle,  A.,  1908:  5. 

Seliwanow,  T.,  1891:  50. 

Sell,  E.,  1865:  18. 

Sell,  W.  J.,  1893:  25. 

Sella,  A.,  1895:  32. 

Sella,  Q.,  1857:  11;  1861:  2. 

Selini,  F.,  1875:  21. 

Semmler,  F.  W.,  1887:  8;  1913:  67. 
Senarmont,  de,  H.,  1857:  12. 

Senderens,  J.  B.,  1892:  31;  1897:  24. 
Senn,  H.,  1905:  37. 

Senter,  G.,  1905:  52,  53,  54;  1907:  76. 
Seubert,  K.,  1878:  10,  11;  1881:  9;  1883: 
14;  1888:  2,  3;  1890:  9,  10;  1891:  3,  4,  23; 
1903:  5. 

Seybold,  F.,  1912:  38. 

Seyewetz,  A.,  1912:  160;  1913:  182. 
Sharpies,  S.  P.,  1873:  10. 

Sharwood,  W.  J.,  1904:  29. 

Sheard,  C.,  1913:  151;  1914:  113;  1916:  97. 
Shenstone,  W.  A.,  1892:  8;  1893:  12. 
Shepard,  0.  U.,  1847:  4. 

Shields,  J.,  1895:  35;  1897:  28,  29;  1898:  32. 
Shinier,  P.  W.,  1899:  45. 

Shinn,  O.  L.f  1912:  36. 

Shippee,  V.  0.,  1917:  67. 

Shrewsbury-,  H.  S.,  1912:  162. 

Sickingen,  Graf  von.  1782:  1;  1784:  2. 
Siebert,  G.,  1893  : 40;  1902:  3a;  1904:  64; 
1914:  23. 

Sieg,  L.  P.,  1912:  140. 

Siegbahn,  M.,  1916:  89. 

Siemens,  1912:  155. 

Siemens,  C.  W.,  1882:  13. 

Siemens.  W.,  1884:  25. 

Sieverts,  A.,  1907:  50;  1909:  43;  1910:  50, 
51;  1911:  48;  1912:  59,  108,  115;  1913: 
106,  120;  1914:  48,  49,  50;  1915: 40;  1916: 
67. 

Silberberger,  R.,  1904:  30. 

Silliman,  B.,  1823:  3;  1873:  la. 

Silow,  P.,  1889:  17. 

Silva.  See  Ferreira  da  Silva. 

Simon,  J.  F.,  1837:  6. 

Simone,  de,  F.,  1909  : 68. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


479 


Singer,  L.,  1903:  24. 

Sirk,  H.,  1905:  56. 

Sivkof,  1842:  3b. 

Sjollema,  B.,  1897:  23. 
Skanaeff-Gregorieff,  M.,  1915:  35. 

Skey,  W.,  1868:  4;  1869:  21;  1870:  34,  35, 
36,  37,  38;  1871:  27;  1874:  21,  22;  1876: 
28,  29;  1897:  41. 

Skita,  A.,  1911:  53;  1912:  62,  63,  64;  1913: 
110;  1915:  64,  65. 

Skoblikoff,  1852:  7. 

Skriwan,  E.,  1914:  136. 

Smee,  A.,  1840:  14;  1856:  17. 

Smith,  C.  M.,  1876:  62. 

Smith,  D.  P.,  1916:  53. 

Smith,  E.  F.,  1878:  7;  1890:  39,  40,  41; 
1891:  28,  29,  32;  1892:  25,  39,  40;  1894: 
9;  1895:  20;  1902:  28;  1915:  22a. 

Smith,  F.  E.,  1912:  150. 

Smith,  H.,  1914:  91. 

Smith,  J.  H.,  1917:  61. 

Smith,  J.  L.,  1872:  15;  1874:  11,  12,  33; 
1875:  10. 

Smith,  W.,  1879:  20. 

Smither,  F.  W.,  1910:  98. 

Smits,  A.,  1896:  7. 

S moot.  A.  M. . 1913 : 83 ; 1914 : 55 ; 1915 : 46. 47. 
Snelling,  W.  O.,  1909:  99. 

Sobolevsky,  P.,  1834:  7. 

Soderbaum,  H.  G.,  1885:  15;  1888:  18; 
1894:  14. 

Sokoloff,  W.,  1907:  23;  1909:  37. 

Soltsien,  P.,  1897:  40. 

Sommer,  F.,  1910:  59. 

Sommerring.  von,  S.  T.,  1818:  13. 

Sone,  T.,  1913:  149. 

Sonn,  A.,  1917:  89., 

Sonnenfeld,  E.,  1913:  129;  1914:  87. 
Sonntag,  B.,  1913:  6a. 

Sonstadt.E.,1866:  4;  1895:  27;  1898:  14,  15. 
Sorensen,  S.  P.  L.,  1906:  19. 

Soreze,  1859:  5. 

Sosman,  R.  B.,  1910:  48,  86;  1915:  45. 
Souchay,  A.,  1858:  6. 

Sowerby,  G.  B.,  1820:  3. 

Spence*  J.,  1909:  72,  73. 

Spengel,  A..  1910:  60. 

Spiegel,  L.,  1902:  20. 

Spielman,  P.  E.,  1909:  88,  91. 

Spiess,  H.,  1902:  27a. 

Spiller,  J.,  1858:  9;  1897:  35. 

Spitzer,  F.,  1906:  65. 

Spring,  It.,  1905:  2. 

Spring,  W.,  1880:  14;  1882:  28;  1892:  63; 
1894:  25. 


Spruck,  W.,  1899:  20. 

Stahl,  A.  F.,  1897:  1. 

Stahlsehmidt,  C.,  1865:  10. 

Stanley,  G.  H.,  1909:  104. 

Stark,  O.,  1913:  111. 

Stas,  J.  S.,  1878:  4a;  1879:  34a:  1880:  2b; 

1881:  34;  1885:  31. 

Stavenhagen,  A.,  1895:  10. 

Steele,  L.  J.,  1917:  122. 

Stehman,  J.  V.  R.,  1903:  51. 

Steinfeldt,  N.  P.,  1898:  9. 

Steinmann,  A.,  1911:  62. 

Steinmann,  E.,  1900:  38. 

Stenhouse,  J.,  1855:  22. 

Stephan,  C.,  1904:  24. 

Stern.  J.  G.  L.,  1909:  101. 

Stevens,  R.  II.,  1913:  178,  179. 

Steyer,  H.,  1917:  82. 

Stiebel,  A.,  1895  : 29. 

Stieglitz,  A.,  1891:  43. 

Stieren,  1831:  26. 

Stockmann,  1876:  38. 

Stodart,  J.,  1805:  13;  1820:  7;  1822:  4. 
Stoffel,  L.  M.,  1879:  39. 

Stokes.  G.  G.,  1853:  9,  10;  1855:  14. 
Stolba,  F.,  1870:  23;  1873:  16;  1876,  39; 

1883:  23:  1888:  5. 

Storck.  1887:  36,  37. 

Storer,  F.  H.,  1862:  22. 

Stovall,  D.  H.,  1913:  2$c. 

Stracciati,  E.,  1895:  40. 

Stratingh,  S.,  1825:  18’. 

Strauss,  1803:  14. 

Strecker,  \V.,  1909:  31. 

Streicher,  S.,  1913:  46,  48,  49,  50. 
Streintz,  F..  1881:  39:  1882:  46;  1887:  57; 
| 1891:  24;  1900:  37;  1905  : 66;  1915:  90. 

I Streit,  B.,  1914:  14a. 

I Strengers,  T.,  1908:  6. 

Strouhal,  Y.,  1884:  32. 

Struve.  H.,  1846:  10. 

Strzoda,  W.,  1914:  131. 

Stnchlik,  I,.,  1904:  11. 

Studt,  F.  E.,  1908:  4b. 

Stuhlmann,  O.,  jr. , 1 9 L0:  67;  1911:  97; 

1913:  138;  1914:  95;  1917:  99. 

Stumpf,  F.,  1914:  94. 

Sturm,  D.,  1912:  86. 

Sturm,  E.,  1904:  36;  1905:  44. 

Subbotin.  W.,  1910:  30. 

Sudakoff,  A.,  1886:  19. 

Sudborough,  .1.  J..  1891:  21. 

&ule,  O.,  1899:  8;  1900:  35. 

Sulzberger,  N.,  1916:  81;  1917:  76. 


480 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Svanberg,  L.  F.,  1834:  6;  1842:  6; 

1846:  9. 

Svedberg,  T.,  1906:  54,  55;  1907:  57,  58, 
59,  60;  1911:  90. 

Swan,  K.  R.,  1906:  79. 

Swenson,  T.,  1916:  109. 

Swett,  O.  D.,  1909:  100. 

Sy,  1865:  10. 

Symons,  E.,  1913:  140. 

Szily,  von,  A.,  1909:  51. 

Szivessy,  G.,  1907:  71. 

T. 

Taege,  E.,  1913:  159;  1915:  69. 

Tafel,  J.,  190-2:  52;  1905:  68. 

Tagiuri,  C.  C.,  1900:  15. 

Takamine,  T.,  1917:  103. 

Takasaki,  Y.,  1916:  91. 

Tamm,  IL,  1863:  2;  1876:  14;  1879:  3. 
Tammann,  G.,  1897:  14;  1907:  79,  82. 
Tanatar,  S.,  1902:  36,  37;  1913:  154. 
Tangl,  K.,  1913:  99. 

Tarugi,  N.,  1894:  29;  1896:  27;  1899:  27; 

1903:  27,  50;  1906:  20. 

Tatlock,  R.  R.,  1868:  11;  1881:  22. 
Taylor,  II.  V.  S.,  1917:  138. 

Teague,  O.,  1908:  62. 

Teearu.  P.,  1914:  44. 

Teletow,  I.  S.,  1908:  64. 

Tennant,  S.,  1797:  4;  1800:  2;  1804:  12, 
14. 

Teploff,  1835:  2. 

Terreil,  A.,  1876:  1. 

Terwen,  J.  W.,  1916:  80. 

Teschemacher,  J.  E.,  1850:  4. 

Thalen,  R.,  1868:  17. 

Than,  von,  K.,  1858:  3. 

Thatcher,  C.  J.,  1904:  61. 

Thenard,  L.  J.,  1823:  9,  10. 

Thenevet,  J.-V.,  1860:  la. 

Thiel,  A.,  1913:  65. 

Thiele,  J.,  1890:  38. 

Thiesen,  M.,  1908:  48. 

Thiroloix,  J.,  1912:  116. 

Tholdte,  R.,  1905:  69. 

Thoma,  M.,  1889:  26. 

Thomae,  C.,  1911:  89. 

Thomas,  J.  S.,  1917:  43. 

Thompson,  C.,  1887:  54. 

Thompson,  J.  13. , 1872:  14. 

Thompson,  J.  F.,  1906:  69. 

Thompson,  J.  R.,  1913:  113. 

Thompson,  S.  P.,  1888:  42. 

Thoms,  AV.  A.,  1886:  22. 


Thomsen,  J.,  1867:  10;  1869:  16;  1870: 
4,32;  1871:  21;  1874:  13;  1876:  30; 
1877:  7,  46;  1878:  43. 

Thomson,  J.  B.,  1866:  23. 

Thomson,  J.  J.,  1909:  86. 

Thomson,  T.,  1820:  2,  3;  1821:  5;  1826: 
6;  1850:  5. 

Thomson,  W.,  1802:  1. 

Thornton,  W.  M.,  jr. , 1911:  115. 

Thorpe,  T.  E.,  1903:  5;  1909:  4,  5;  1910: 
8;  1913:  37,  38;  1914:  27. 

Thorsch,  M.,  1914:  65. 

Thuringer,  Y.,1912:  88,89;  1913:  1,74, 
88,  89,  90,  91. 

Tiberg,  A.,  1916:  52. 

Tiede,  E.,  1911:  116;  1913:  100. 

Tilden,  A.,  1896:  24. 

Tilden,  W.  A.,  1900:  36. 

Tillet,  1779:  1. 

Tilley,  T.  G.,  1841:  6. 

Tilloch,  A.,  1803:  15;  1805:  7,  8. 

Tingle,  A.,  1916:  36. 

Tingle,  J.  B.,  1916:  36. 

Tivoli,  D.,  1884:  4. 

Toch,  M.,  1917:  39. 

Toczynski,  F.,  1871:  10. 

Tolloczko,  1911:  11. 

Tomasczewski,  A.,  1903:  26. 

Tomlinson,  H.,  1885:  45. 

Tommasi,  D.,  1877:  39;  1878:  50,  51; 

1880:  19;  1899:  34. 

Tonnelier,  1846:  18. 

Toombs,  C.,  1913:  84,  86. 

Topsoe,  H.,  1868:  8,  9;  1869:  11;  1870: 
17;  1871:  19;  1872:  9;  1874:  31,  41; 
1879:  30;  1882:  21. 

Torrey,  J.,  1861:  1. 

Trabacchi,  G.  C.,  1915:  106a. 

Traube,  M.,  1874:  39;  1882:  40,  41,  42; 

1883:  30;  1885:  3£;  1889:  24. 
Traube-Mengarini,  M.,  1909:  66,  67. 
Travers,  M.  W.,  1905:  77. 

Trawitz,  P.,  1903:  8. 

Tremeschini,  1884:  23. 

Trenckner,  C.,  1905:  23;  1912:  82. 

Tribe,  A.,  1878:  53;  1879:  49,  54. 

Trillat,  1892:  45. 

Trillat,  J.  A.,  1902:  38;  1903:  38. 
Trommsdorff,  J.  B.,  1804:  5;  1806:  4; 
1836:  15. 

Troost,  L.,  1863:  9;  1874:  7;  1875:  12; 
1877:  20. 

Trottarelli,  G.,  1890:  5. 

Trowbridge,  J.,  1885:  43;  18S8:  50. 


AUTHOR  INDEX, 


481 


Tsakalotos,  D.,  1908:  53. 
Tschernaeff,  I.,  1915:  36,  37. 
Tschernik,  G.  P.,  1912:  12a. 
Tschirch,  F.  W.,  1913:  54. 
Tschirikoff,  A.,  1881:  26. 
Tschirwinski,  P.  X.,  1913:  97. 


Tschugaeff 

, L.  A.,  1905: 

28;  1906: 

23; 

1907:  21, 

, 22,  23; 1909:  37 

; 1910: 

29, 

30; 

1912:  55, 

, 56;  1913:  56,  5 

7,  60, 

61, 

62; 

1914:  37, 

, 43,  44,  45,  92; 

1915: 

24, 

28, 

29,  30,  31,  32,  33,  34,  3 

5,  36, 

37, 

38; 

1916:  48, 

.49. 

Tschupin, 

1873:  a. 

Tserrener, 

1851:  a. 

Tucker,  S. 

A.,  1907:  86. 

Tuma,  J.,  1888:  58. 

Tunner,  P. , 1863:  14. 

Turchini,  1905:  67. 

Turkus,  B.,  1917:  69. 

Turner,  E.,  1824:  14. 

Twelvetrees,  W.  H.,  1913:  15;  1914:  15a. 
Tyden,  S.,  1911:  46. 

Tyndall,  A.  M.,  1914:  70. 

U. 

Uhl,  J.,  1890:  29. 

Uhlenhuth,  R.,  1900:  24,  25. 

Uhrlaub,  E.,  1852:  6. 

Uklonskaja,  X.,  1912:  77. 

Ulex,  G.,  1881:  21. 

Uljanin,  von,  W.,  1888:  44. 
lllloa,  de,  Don  Antonio,  1748:  1. 

Ulsch,  K.,  1886:  17. 

Ulzurrum,  L.,  1915:  104. 

Urbain,  G.,  1909:  4,  5;  1910:  8;  1913: 
37,  38;  1914:  27. 

Uricoechea,  E.,  1854:  8. 

Uslar,  von,  G.,  1876:  3. 

y. 

Valenta,  E.,  1892:  56;  1899:  50;  1910:  62. 
Valentiner,  S.,  1906:  36;  1911:  47;  1915: 
55. 

Valentini,  A.,  1884:  12. 

Vamossy,  de,  Z.,  1906:  41. 

Van  Allen,  1879:  35. 

Van  der  Weide,  O.  B.,  1916:  70. 

Vanino,  L.,  1899:  29. 

Vanzetti,  B.  L.,  1908:  58. 

Vasserot,  C.  F.,  1859:  24. 

Vauquelin,  L.  N.,  1799:  3;  1803:  8,  9; 
1804:  8;  1806:  1,  3;  1810:  3;  1813:  1; 
1814:  1,  2,  4;  1815:  1;  1817:  2,  3;  1818: 
11. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  094 31 


Vavon,  G.,  1913:  68;  1914:  81,  82,  83. 
Veimarn,  von,  P.  P.,  1916:  59. 
j Veley,  V.  H.,  1891:  52. 

' Venable,  F.  P.,  1892:  1. 

Verein  chemischer  Fabriken  in  Mann- 
heim, 1913:  34. 

Vereinigte  chemische  Werke,  1910:  36. 
Yereinigte  Chininfabriken  Zimmer  & Co., 
1912:  65. 

Verneuil,  A.,  1905:  14. 

Vezes,  M.,  1889:12;  1890:8;  1891:6; 
1892:  12,  13;  1893:  9,  18,  19;  1897:  13, 
19; 1898:  30; 1899:  6,  9,  23,  24,  25; 1901: 
16;  1902:  18,  23;  1903:  25;  1908:  20; 
1909:  39;  1910:  32. 

| Vidal,  L.,  1888:  45. 
j Vidau,  V.  A.,  1875:  20. 
j Vieth,  P.,  1888:  38. 

Vigoureux,  E.,  1896:  12;  1907:  16. 
Villain,  1834:  2. 

Villari,  E.,  1869:  33. 

Ville,  J.,  1910:  35;  1911:  57. 

Villiers,  A.,  1893:  38. 

Villiger,  V.,  1901:  8;  1902:  19. 

I Vincent,  C.,  1880:  22;  1885:  6,  7. 
Violette,  H.,  1872:  10. 

Violle,  J.,  1877:  45;  1878:  44;  1879:  43, 
44;  1881:  37;  1884:  26;  1887:  43;  1889: 
16. 

Vi  tali,  D.,  1895:  28. 

Vivario,  R.,  1917:  64. 

Vogel,  1868:  12. 

Vogel,  A.,  jr. , 1855:  21;  1873:  1. 

Vogel,  E.,  1886:  25;  1888:  45. 

Vogel,  F.  C.,  1813:  8.. 

Vogel,  J.  II.,  1906:  78. 

Vogel,  von,  H.  A.,  1817:  7;  1825: 14. 

Vogt,  J.  H.  L.,  1902:  3. 

Vogt,  T.,  1911:  29. 

Vohl,  H..  1855:  15. 

Volhard,  J.,  1878:  23. 

Yoller,  A.,  1873:  28. 

Volta,  A.,  1879:  16. 

Vondracek,  R.,  1904:  42;  1905:  57;  1917: 
40. 

Vorbuchner,  K.,  1910:  108. 

Vries,  de,  H.  J.  F.,  1907:  33;  1909:  48. 
Vries,  de,  O.,  1908:22,  22a. 

Vulpius,  G.,  1874:  29;  1884: 18. 

W. 

W.,  C.  J.  II.,  1876:  35. 

Wach,  G.  F.,  1830:  10. 

Wagenaar,  M.,  1917:  64. 


482 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Wagner,  1847:  25;  1865:  10. 

Wagner,  A.,  1850:  15. 

Wagner,  A.,  1916:  83. 

Wagner,  E.,  1915:  78,  79;  1917: 107a. 
Wagner,  J.,  1899:  38. 

Wagner,  R.,  1867:  2. 

Wagner,  von,  J.  R.,  1875:  9. 

Wahl,  W.  H.,  1890:  43. 

Waidner,  C.  W.,  1907: 48;  1909: 53, 102, 103. 
Walbinger,  P..  1911:  36. 

Walden,  J.,  1899:  39. 

Walden,  P.,  1888:  25;  1900:  22;  1910:  13a. 
Walker,  E.  C.,  3d,  1917:  70. 

Walker,  P.  H.,  1910:  98;  1911:  114. 
Walker,  T.  L.,  1896:2;  1897:3a. 

Wallace,  D.L.,  1892: 39;  1894: 9. 

Wallach,  O.,  1881:  24;  1913:  123;  1914:  84. 
Wallin,  G.,  1892:23. 

Wallot,  J.,  1915:  55. 

Walsh,  G.  E.,  1909:  3b. 

Waltenberg,  R.  G.,  1915:  92;  1916:  58. 
Walter.  F.,  1891:  39. 

Wanselin,  J.,  1902:  15. 

Warburg,  E.,  1886:  32;  1901:  33. 

Warder,  R.  B.,  1882:  15. 

Waring,  R.,  1899:  43. 

Warren,  H.  N.,  1887:  23;  1889:  18;  1891: 
36,  38;  1892:  47;  1893:  30. 

Wartenburg,  von,  H.,  1910:  63,  64. 
Waser,  B.,  1911:  27,  54. 

Washburn,  E.  W.,  1917:  95. 

'Waterman,  W.  J..  1900:  2. 

Watson,  W.,  1751:  1. 

Watts,  O.  P.,  1917:  57. 

Watts,  W.  M..  1869:  3. 

Weber,  C.  H.,  1915:  101. 

Weber,  H.  C.  P.,  1908: 15;  1912:34. 
Weber.  H.  F.,  1888:  51. 

Weber,  R.,  1867:  6. 

Weber,  S.,  1916:  95. 

Weber,  W.  E.,  1830:  18. 

Wedekind,  E.,  1912:  161. 

Wehnelt,  A..  1904:  58. 

Weibull,  M.,  1888:  9. 

Weide,  van  der,  O.  B.,  1916:  70. 

Weiger,  j.,  1845:  15. 

Weigh tman,  H.  E.,  1913:  104. 

Weil,  1859:  3. 

Weiller,  L.,  1884:  30. 

Weineck,  J.,  1892:  52. 

Weinlig,  1843:  3. 

Weintraub,  E.,  1914;  117. 

Weiskopf,  P.,  1865:  16;  1875:  30. 
Weissrnan,  L.,  1912:  131. 


Welkow,  A.,  1873:  6;  1874:  14,  15,  16,  17. 
Wells,  H.  L.,  1889:  1;  1902:  2. 

Welsbach.  See  Auer  von  Welsbach. 
Weltzien,  C.,  1855: 16;  1856:8. 

Wenzel,  C.  F.,  1782:  2. 

Werner,  A.,  1893:  22,  23;  1894:  17;  1895: 
13;  1896:  20;  1897: 11;  1898: 19;  1899:  20, 
22;  1901:  9,  13,  15,  18;  1902:  21;  1906:  14; 
1907:  25,  26;  1908:  22;  1912:  52;  1914:  39. 
Werner,  M.,  1913:  160. 

Werner,  S.,  1912:  126. 

Werth,  1887:  22. 

Wertheim,  G.,  1844:  21. 

Wertheim,  T.,  1844:  10. 

Werther,  G.,  1859:  13. 

Weselsky,  P.,  1856:  7;  1869:  15. 

Wesely,  A.,  1915:  90. 

West,  B.,  1881:  23. 

Westhaver,  J.  B.,  1905:  70. 

Wetzlar,  G.,  1828:  15. 

Wheaton,  T.  C.,  1914:  133. 

Wheeler,  R.  V.,  1906:  45. 

Wherry,  E.  T.,  1917:  2. 

Whiddington,  R.,  1910:  77;  1911:  100; 
1914:  116. 

Whipple,  N.  D.,  1917:  57. 

Whipple,  R.  S.,  1917:  113. 

White,  G.  R.,  1911:  111. 

White,  W.  P.,  1909:  82. 

Whitelev,  G.  H.,  1916:  101. 

Wick,  F.  G.,  1914:  66. 

Widemann,  M.,  1009:  49. 

Wiedemann,  E.,  1880:  30;  1888:  60. 
Wiedemann,  G.,  1853:  12. 

Wiederholt,  E.,  1862:  25. 

Wieland,  H.,  1912:  70,112,  113,  114;  1913: 
124. 

Wien,  W.,  1895’  43. 

Wiessmann,  H.,  1911:  38;  1916:  40,  41. 
Wietzel,  G.,  1914:  115. 

Wigand,  A.,  1908:  75. 

Wilcox,  W.  G.,  1908:  16. 

Wild,  1859:  25. 

Wilde,  de,  P.,  1866:  26;  1874:  37. 

Wiley,  H.  W.,  1897:  5. 

Wilkinson,  C.  S.,  1890:  2c. 

Williams,  C.  G.,  1854:  10;  1858:  4. 

Willir,  1791:  1. 

Willis,  A.,  1889:  37. 

Willis,  M.,  1892:  59. 

Willis,  T.,  1789:  1. 

Willis,  W.,  1887:  49;  1913:  181.. 

Willis,  jr.,  1874:  42. 

Willows,  R.  S.,  1906:  68. 


AUTHOR  INtfEX. 


483 


Willstatter,  R.,  1903:  30;  1908:  36,  54; 
1911:  54;  1912:  60;  1913:  69,  129;  1914: 
87. 

Wilnr,  T.,  1880:  3;  1881:  5,  6;  1882:  16; 
1883:  la,  2,  3,  5;  1884:  2;  1885:  2;  1886: 
6,  7;  1887:  9;  1888:  16;  1889:  13;  1890: 
18;  1892:  9,  10,  11;  1893:  5,  26. 

Wilson,  G.,  1847:  26. 

Wilson,  H.  A.,  1903:  43;  1908:  72;  1909:  84. 
Wilson,  W.,  1911:  107;  1917:  100. 
Windisch,  E.,  1913:  70. 

Winkelmann,  A.,  1901:  24;  1902:  35;  1905: 
49;  1906:  39. 

Winkler,  C.,  1878:  61;  1889:  20;  1899:  33. 
Winkler,  C.  A.,  1864:  4;  1874:  30. 
Winston,  W.  B.,  1909:  2a. 

Winton,  A.  L.,  1895:  23. 

Wintrebert,  L.,  1900:  27;  1901:  17;  1902: 
5a,  23;  1903:  17;  1905:  26. 

Wischin,  C.,  1893:.  10. 

Witt,  O.  N.,  1895:  15. 

Wittstein,  G.  C.,  1841:  7;  1866:  21. 
Witzmann,  W.,  1907:  7;  1908:  11,  12. 
Wladimiroff,  N.,  1915:  33,  38. 

Woernle,  M.,  1906: 11,  25;  1907:  5;  1909:  8. 
Wohl,  A.,  1912:  78. 

Wohler,  F.,  1822:  2;  1825:  19;  1829:  23; 
1833:  8;  1834:  8;  1839:  3;  1857:  4;  1866: 
2,  9,  15;  1868:  7;  1869:  2;  1874:  19,  20; 
1876:  27. 

Wohler,  L.,  1901:  29;  1902:  6,  41;  1903:  7; 
1904:  4;  1905:  10,  12;  1906:  9,  10,  42; 
1907:  9;  1908:  11,  12,  13;  1909:  10,  11, 
12,  13;  1910:  60;  1911:  32,  68;  1913:  46, 
47,  48,  49,  50. 

Wolf,  G.,  1914:  47. 

Wolfl,  V.,  1903:  49. 

Wollaston,  W.  H.,  1804:  13,  14;  1805:  2, 
3;  1809:  1;  1813:  5;  1829:  7,  8,  20. 
Woodbury,  D.  A.,  1913:  151. 

Woodward,  R.  W.,  1917:  114. 

Wooten,  B.  A.,  1917:  104. 

Wooton,  P.,  1917:  36,  124. 

Worthing,  A.G.,  1917:  101. 

Wrede,  F.,  1910:  97. 


Wright,  A.  W.,  1877:  32. 

Wright,  C.  R.  A.,  1872:  2;  1887:  54. 
Wiillner,  A.,  1892:  67. 

Wunder,  M.,  1912:  88,89;  1913:  1,74,88, 
89,  90,  91;  1914:  5. 

Wurtz,  C.  A.,  1850:  7;  1855:  9;  1869:  6. 
Wyatt,  F.,  1887:  28. 

Wyrouboff,  G.  N.,  1877:  19;  1880: 9;  1905: 
14;  1908:  43. 

Wysocky,  E.,  1857:  6. 

Wysor,  R.  J.,  1913:  165. 

Wvssolsky,  N.,  1903:  la. 

Y. 

Yamauchi,  Y.,  1913:  76. 

Yanai,  T.,  1916:  117. 

Young,  C.  A.,  1880:  42. 

Young,  H.  W.,  1913:  79. 

Z. 

Zakrzewski,  C.,  1910:  66. 

Zanichelli,  L.,  1904:  44. 

Zappi,  E.  V.,  1915:  25,  26. 

Zdrawkowitch,  M.  R.,  1876:  55. 
Zebrikow,  L.,  1907:  72. 

Zeise,  W.  C.,  1825:  4;  1829:  10;  1831:  4, 
5;  1834:  12;  1836:  5;  1838:  8. 

Zeisel,  S.,  1907:  24. 

Zelinsky,  N.  D.,  3898:  33;  1911:  51,  52, 
91;  1912:  66,  67,  77. 

Zeman,  J.,  1876:  45. 

Zenger,  H.,  1875:  22. 

Zenneck,  L.  H.,  1829:  15. 

Zentralstelle  fur  wissenschaftliche-tech- 
nische  Untersuchungen,  1912:  117. 
Zepharovich,  von,  V.,  1865:  2. 
Zimmermann,  F.,  1913:  163. 

Zincken,  J.  C.  L.,  1829:  4. 

Zuber,  J.,  1828:  20. 

Ziiblin,  J.,  1880:  5. 

Zuckschwerdt,  S.,  1881:  23. 

Zulkowsky,  O.,  1884:  13. 

Ziirn,  F.,  1898:  11. 

Z wicker,  H.,  1907:  14;  1909:  14. 


' 

' 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


A. 

Absorption.  See  Hydrogen;  X-rays. 
Acebrompalladium. 

1861:  13  Nickles. 

Acebromplatin. 

1861:  13  Nickles. 

Acechlorplatin. 

1829:  12  Berzelius. 

1831:  4 Zeise. 

1831:  5 Zeise. 

1834:  13  Liebig. 

1836:  5 Zeise. 

1837:  8 Liebig. 

1838:  8 Zeise. 

1839:  4 Malaguti. 

Acetamid,  compound  with  Pt, 

1908:  33  Hofmann  and  Bugge. 
Acetic  acid,  catalytic  manufacture.  See 
Oxidation,  catalytic, 
purification  from  formic  acid. 

1908:  59  Pikos Rh. 

Acetoacetic  ester,  compound  with  Pt  Cl4. 
1903:  24  Rosenheim,  Loewen- 

stamm,  and  Singer. 

Acetonitril.  See  Nitril. 

Acetylaceton  compounds. 

1901:  15  Werner. 

1903:  24  Rosenheim,  Loewen- 

stamm,  and  Singer. 

1914:  40  Barbieri Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

Acetylene,  absorption. 

1910:  61  Paal  and  Hohenegger.Pd. 
1913:  109  Paal  and  Hohenegger, 

Pd. 

1915:  59  Paal  and  Schwarz, 

Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

flame,  action  on  Pt. 

1906:  78  Vogel, 
metal  compounds. 

1908:  34  Makowka. 
reagent  for  metals. 

1906:  78  Vogel... Pd. 

1907:  30  Erdmann  and  Makowka, 
Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  42  Makowka Os. 

See  also  Oxidation,  catalytic. 

Acid,  hexaoxyplatinic. 

1903:  6 Bellucci. 


Activation  of  hydrogen. 

1905:  58  Paal  and  Amberger..Pd 


1915:  60  Eggert, 
of  oxygen. 

1912:  39  Hofmann Os. 

1912:  40  Hofmann Os. 

1915:  60  Eggert. 


1915:  70  Hofmann  and  Schneider, 

Os 

pseudo-catalytic . 

1901:  29  Wohler. 

Addition  compounds  (plato-plati-). 

1897:  13  Vezes. 

Adsorption,  general. 

1908:  60  Freundlich. 
odoriferous  substances. 

1917:  94  van  Dam. 

Affinity,  general. 

1883:  21  Donath  and  Mayrhofer. 
1888:  21  Heyes. 
palladium. 

1804:  20  Ritter. 

1874:  25  Gramp. 

1878:  42  Berthelot. 

1888:  22  Schiirmann. 
platinum. 

1819:  1 Berzelius. 

1874:  25  Gramp. 

1878:  42  Berthelot. 

1881:  10  Orlowsky. 
residual. 

1908:  44  Peters. 

1909:  50  Peters. 

Air  bath. 

1908:  86  Leroux. 

Alcohol,  action  on  K2PtBr4. 

1903:  14  Biilmann  and  Andersen. 
Alkali  chlorides,  electrolysis  of. 

1906:  73  Geibel. 

sulphides,  action  on  Pd  and  Ptlr. 

1917:  43  Thomas  and  Rule. 
Alkalies,  action  on  Pt. 

1825:  9 Bischof. 

1847:  9 Claus Ir, 

1879:  13  De  Koninck. 

1880:  16  Meyer. 

See  also  Analysis. 


485 


486 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Alloys. 

conductivity  of. 

1906:  67  Guertler. 

1906:  68  Willows Ir,  Pt. 

diffusion  of. 

1896:  25  Roberts-Austen  ...Pt,  Rh. 
explosive  metals. 

1882:  6 Deville  and  Debray. 

1887:  22  Osmond  and  Werth. 
general . 

1755:  1 Lewis. 

1817:  8 Clarke. 

1817:  9 Clarke. 

1817:  14  Cooper. 

1821:  9 Murray. 

1826:  11. 

1827:  18  Cooper. 

1829:  17  Lampadius Ir. 

1832:  19. 

1838:  16  Melly. 

1847 : 25  Mention  and  Wagner. 
1853:  6 Bolley. 

1858:  13  Newton. 

1860:  22  Nickles. 

1874:  30  Winckler. 

1875:  26  Deville  and  Debray. 

1877:  21  Debray Ir. 

1879:  4 Matthey Ir. 

1879:  34  Deville  and  Mascart. 

1879:  35  Van  Allen Ir,  Os. 

1881:  31  Bush. 

1882:  5 Debray Ir,  Os. 

1885:  33  Scharnweber Ir,  Os. 

1887:  16  Debray. 

1887:  22  Osmond  and  Werth. 

1887 : 29  Reinhardt. 

1888:  55  Barus. 

1890:  62  Le  Chatelier. 

1894:  23  Mylius  and  Fromm. 

1896:  25  Roberts-Austen.  .Pt,  Rh. 
1897:  34  Roberts-Austen. 

1899:  44  Von  Jiiptner. 

1902:  53  Campbell. 

1907:  79  Tammann. 

1910:  94  Janecke. 
hard  commercial  alloys. 

1910:  96  Heraeus  (pat.)... Os,  Pt. 
thermoelectricity  of. 

1900:  38  Steinmann. 


1910:  87  Rudolfi Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  93  Broniewski Pd,  Pt. 

X-ray  photography  of. 


1897:  39  Heycock  and  Neville. 


Alloys — Continued . 
alkali  metals. 

1909:  95  Hackspill. 

1911:  113  Mathewsoa. 
aluminum. 

1822:  3 Murray. 

1897:  39  Heycock  and  Neville. 

1901:  35  Brunck. 

1902  : 54  Campbell  and  Mathews. 

1912:  141  Chouriguine. 
antimony. 

1819:  6 Fox. 

1822:  3 Murray. 

1909:  97  Friedrich  and  Leroux. 

1912:  142  Sander Pd. 

arsenic. 

1827:  12  Fischer. 

1884:  4 Tivoli. 

1895:  8 Roessler Pel. 

1908:  27  Friedrich  and  Leroux. 
bismuth. 

1895:  8 Roessler Pd. 

boron. 

1859:  17  Martius. 

1909:  30  Binet  du  Jassoneix 
cadmium. 

1838:  14  Bottger. 

1899:  43  Hodgkinson  et  al.Pd,  Pt. 
chromium,  copper,  zinc. 

1917:  143  Guardiola  (pat.), 
cobalt,  silver,  palladium. 

1917:  140  Cooper  (pat.) Sub. 

copper. 

1797:  2 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1798:  3 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1848 : 10  Lyons  and  Mil  ward . Pd.  Pfc 

1873:  18  Helonis. 

1885:  26. 

1886:  21  Paillard Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

1887:  16a  Maumene. 

1887:  30  Houston Pd. 

1897:  36  Heycock  and  Neville. 

1906:  70  Ruer Pd. 

1907:  80  Doerinckel. 
germanium. 

1887:  19  Meyer, 
glucinum. 

1822:  3 Murray, 
gold. 

1796:  1 Lampadiua. 

1802:  3. 

1803:  12  De  Morveau. 

1812:  1 Johnson. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


487 


Alloys — Continued, 
gold — continued . 


1819: 

2 Gilbert. 

1824: 

2 Del  Rio. 

1827: 

13 

Pd. 

1827: 

19 

Rh. 

1828: 

16. 

1845: 

15  Weiger 

..Pd,  Pt. 

1878: 

19  Von  Jiiptner. 

1885: 

27  Roessler. 

1889: 

17  Silow. 

1906: 

72  Ruer 

Pd. 

1907: 

80  Doerinckel. 

1910: 

95  Geibel 

..Pd,  Pt. 

1911: 

80  Berrv 

Pd. 

1911: 

101  Schulze 

...Pd,  Pt. 

1911: 

113  Mathewson. 

, silv 

er,  osmium. 

1917: 

141  Cooper  (pat.). . 

Sub. 

iridium. 

1838:  22  Gaudin. 

1859:  6 Jacobi. 

I860:  21  Pelouze. 

1873:  14  Deville  and  Debray. 
.1874:  3 Morin. 

1874:  6 Deville,  Debray,  and  Morin. 
1874:  32  Fizeau. 

1876:  65  Matthey. 

1876:  66  Deville. 

1878:  4a  Deville  and  Stas. 

1879:  34a  Deville  and  Stas. 

1880:  2b  Deville  and  Stas. 

1881:  34  Broch,  Deville,  and  Stas. 
1885:  30  Bosscha. 

1885:  31  Stas. 

1885:  33  Scharn weber. 

1885:  45  Tomlinson. 

1886:  11  Le  Chatelier. 

1886:  26  Pionchon. 

1888:  41  Klemencic. 

1889:  16  Violle. 

1889:  41  Le  Chatelier. 

1891:  33  Heraeus. 

1892:  48  Heraeus. 

1896:  37a  Fairley. 

1900:  38  Steinmann. 

1901:  36  Maey. 

1910:  95  Geibel. 

iron. 

1775:  1 De  Morveau. 

1820:  7 Stodart  and  Faraday. 

1822:  4 Stodart  and  Faraday. 

1823:  20  Breant * ...Pd. 

1838:  13  Schonbein. 


Alloys — Continued, 
iron — continued. 

1867:  15. 

1875:  3 Deville. 

1875:  27  Daubree. 

1876:  20  Billings. 

1878:  41  Boussingault. 

1887:  16a  Maumene. 

1907 : 82  Isaac  and  Tammann . 

1912:  143 ir. 

lead. 

1819:  4 Clarke. 

1867:  14  Deville. 

1870:  24  Bauer. 

1871:  24  Bauer Pd,  PL 

1875:  29  Bauer. 

1880:  28  Debray. 

1892:  35  Heycock  and  Neville, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1907:  80  Doerinckel. 

1907:  81  Ruer Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  81  Puscliin  and  Paschski. 
1909:  96  Puschin  and  Lachtschen- 
ko. 

magnesium. 

1899:  43  Hodgkinson  et  al.  .Pd,  Pt. 
mercury. 

1797:  2 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1797:  3 Richter. 

1798:  1 De  Morveau. 

1799:  5 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1799:  6 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1799:  7 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1803:  13  Mussin-Puschkin. 

1803:  14  Strauss. 

1805:  1 Chenivix Pd,  Pt. 

1813:  8 Vogel. 

1814:  6 Schweigger. 

[ 1821:  8 Daniell. 

*1830:  15  Daniell. 

1834:  24  Bottger. 

1835:  20  Mather. 

1836:  4 Dobereiner. 


1837 : 11  Bottger Ir. 

1850:  12  Joule. 

1857 : 23  Cailletet. 

1862:  19  Joule. 

1876:  19  Casamajor Pd,  Pt. 

1878:  45  Sabine. 

1879:  40  Janecek. 


1884:  11  Krouchkoll. 

1887:  31  Ostermann  and  Prip. 
1888:  27  Crafts. 

1907:  83  Moissan. 


488 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Alloys — Continued, 
mercury — continued. 

1907 : 84  Lebeau. 

1907 : 85  Lebeau. 

1908:  80  Mallet, 
molybdenum. 

1790:  2 Hielm. 
nickel. 

1814:  8 Lampadius. 

1891:  37. 
noble  metals. 

1900:  39  Rossler Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 

1903:  29  Neveu. 

1904:  23  Hollard  and  Bertiaux. 

1904:  29  Sharwood. 
osmiridium. 

1879:  35  Van  Allen. 

1882:  5 Debray. 

1885:  33  Scharnweber. 
osmium. 

1913:  163  Zimmermann  (pat.). 

1914:  118  Heraeus  (pat.), 
palladium. 

1886:  26  Pionchon. 

1909:  98  Janecke. 

1910:  95  Geibel. 

1911:  101  Schulze, 
palladium  as  platinum  amalgam. 

1803:  1 Chenivix. 

1808:  1 Collet-Deseotils. 

1808:  2 Berthollet. 


phosphorus. 

1792:  2 Pelletier. 

1812:  2 Davy. 

1849:  5 Schrotter Pd,  Pt. 

1882:  14  Dudley Ir. 


1883:  10  Clarke  and  Joslin Gen. 

1896:  13  Granger, 
platinum  as  gold-iron  alloys. 

1774:  1 Buffon. 

1774:  2 Blond eau. 

1784:  3 Buffon. 

1784:  4 Milly. 

1786:  3 De  Morveau. 
potassium. 

1822:  3 Murray, 
ruthenium. 

1885:  30  Bosscha. 
silicon. 

1821:  4 Boussingault. 

1823:  4 Berzelius Pt,  Rh. 

1857:  15  Deville. 


Alloys — Continued . 
silicon — con  tinut  d . 

1864:  4 Winckler. 

1874:  35  Reicliardt. 

1876:  14  Guyard. 

1876:  15  Boussingault. 

1882:  35  Colson. 

1882:  36  Schutzenberger  and  Col- 
son. 

1885:  11  Memminger. 

1886:  4 Miles. 

1893:  30  Warren. 

1896:  12  Vigouroux. 

1903:  18  Moissan  and  Manchot.Ru. 
1907:  15  Lebeau  and  Novitzky. 
1907:  16  Vigouroux. 

1908:  26  Lebeau  and  Jolibois.  .Pd. 
1910:  22  Baraduc-Muller, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Ru. 

silver. 

1796:  1 Lampadius. 

1798:  3 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1812:  1 Johnson. 

1814:  7 D’Arcet. 

1829:  16  Lampadius. 

1845:  15  Weiger Pd,  Pt. 

1878:  19  Von  Juptner. 

1882:  28  Spring. 

1884:  32  Strouhal  and  Barus. 

1897:  35  Spiller. 

1897:  36  Heycock  and  Neville. 
1906:  69  Thompson  and  Miller. 


1906:  71  Ruer. Pd. 

1907:  80  Doerinckel. 

1910:  95  Geibel Pd. 

1911:  101  Schulze Pd,  Pt. 


1915:  41a  Groschuff  and  Lenz. 
1915:  49  Koifman. 

1917:  102  Oppitz. 
thallium. 

1894:  19  Heycock  and  Neville. 
1908:  78  Hackspill. 

1909:  95  Hackspill. 

tin. 

1819:  5 Clarke. 

1819:  6 Fox. 

1820:  3 Thomson. 


1882:  7 Ditte. 

1887:  14  Debray Gen. 

1887:  15  Debray Gen. 


1907:  80  Doerinckel. 
1908:  79  Podkopajew. 
1908:  80  Mallet, 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


489 


Alloys — Continued, 
tungsten. 

1914:  117  Weintraub. 

1916:  104  Kremer. 
vanadium. 

1831 : 25  Berzelius, 
zinc. 

1819:  6 Fox . 

1838:  14  Bottger. 

1880:  28  Debray Gen. 

1882:  6 Deville  and  Debrav.. Gen. 

1897:  37  Heycock  and  Neville. 

1899:  43  Hodgkinson  et  al.  .Pd,Pt. 
zirconium. 

1822:  3 Murray. 

See  also  Analysis;  Substitutes. 

Allyl  alcohol,  action  on  K2PtCl4. 

1900:  14  Biilmann. 

Alpha  rays,  dispersion  of. 

1907 : 65  Meitner, 
retardation  of. 

1913:  161  Marsden  and  Richardson. 


Aluminum.  See  Alloys. 

Alums. 

1898:  23  Howe  and  O’Neal Ru. 

1901:  11  Picciniand  Marino. Ir,Rh. 

1903 : 20  Marino i Ir. 

1904:  12  Marino Ir. 


Amalgam,  action  of  nitric  acid  on. 

1903:  50  Tarugi. 

See  also  Alloys,  mercury. 

Amarillium  (supposed  new  metal). 

1912:  2 Courtis. 

Aminoacetal,  compound  with. 

1912:  55  Tschugaeff  and  Orelkine. 
Amino-acid  compounds. 

1912:  53  Ley  and  Ficken. 

See  also  Sulphaminic  acid. 

Ammins.  See  Bases. 

Ammonia,  action  on  metals. 

1901:  22  Beilby  and  Henderson. 
1908:  45  Henderson  and  Galletly. 
action  on  PdCl2. 

1899:  19  Matignon. 
oxidation  of. 

1916:  69  Hammick. 

1916:  69a  Schuphaus. 

1917:  80a  Hosmer. 

1917:  80b  Boyce, 
synthesis  from  elements. 

1910:  55  Haber. 

1910:  56  Badische  Anilin-  u.  Soda- 


fab  rik  (pat.) Os. 

1910:  57  Golodetz Os. 


Ammonia — Continued . 
synthesis  from  elements — continued. 
1912:  117  Zentralstelle  fiir  wissen- 
schaftliche-  technische  Unter- 


suchungen  (pat.) Ru. 

1913:  132 Ru. 

1917 : 80a  Hosmer. 

1917:  80b  Boyce. 


Ammonium,  amalgam,  action  of  Pt  on. 
1894:  27  Michaud, 
nitrate,  action  on  Pt. 

1831:  24  Buchner, 
persulphate,  action  on  Pt. 

1903:  8 Segewetzand  Trawitz. 
sulphate,  decomposition  in  presence  of 
Pt. 

1905:  38  Delepine. 

1906:  16  Delepine Ir,  Pt. 

See  also  Bromoplatinates,  etc. 
Amorphous  metal  hypothesis. 

1917:  94a  Jeffries. 

Analysis. 

alloys. 

1900:  29  Mietzs'chke Ir. 

1902:  26  Richards. 

1904:  23  Hollard  and  Bertiaux. 
1913:  183  Arnold. 

1913:  184  Doring. 
assay. 

1816:  2 Chaudet. 

1834:  17  Berthier Ir.  Os. 

1837:  10  Haindl. 

1857 : 6 Wysocky Ir,  Os. 

1878:  19  Von  Jiiptner. 

1879:  24  Perry. 

1880:  29  Van  Riemsdijk. 

1881:  29  Balling. 

1882:  26  Van  Riemsdijk. 

1885:  21  Van  Riemsdijk. 

1890:  42  Matthey. 

1892:  42  Matthey. 

1895:  21  Priwosnik. 

1895:  21a  Miller. 

1901:  20  Leidi6  and  Quennessen, 


Ir,  Pt. 

1903:  29  Neveu. 

1904:  29  Sharwood. 

1911:  61  Freise Pd. 

1911:  62  Steinmann. 

1911:  63  Dart  ...Gen. 

1911:  64. 

1911:  65  Arsem. 

1912:  83  Dart Pd,  Pt. 


1913:  79  Clevenger  and  Young. 


490 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


A nal  ysis — Continued . 
asgay-^-continued. 

1913:  81  Ranier. 

1913:  82  Greenwood Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  83  Smoot Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  84  Gray  and  Toombs.. Ir,  Pt. 

1913:  85  Gray Ir,  Pt. 

1913:  86  Toombs Ir. 

1913:  87 Ir. 


1914:  54  Bannister  and  Patchin. 
1914:  57  Sch witter. 

1914:  58  Dewey. 

1914:  59  Hanig. 

1915:  50  Crampton. 
carbon  in  presence  of  Os. 

1902:  27  Von  Knorre. 
carbon,  use  of  Pt  capillary  in. 

1909:  49  Widemann. 
chloroplatinic  acid,  use  in  alkali  anal- 
ysis. 

1799:  3 Vauquelin. 

1821:  6 Pfaff. 

1832:  6 Lassaigne. 

1846:  13  Fresenius. 

1865:  8 Redtenbacher. 

1866:  17  Finkener. 

1868:  11  Chalmers  and  Tatlock. 
1874:  26  Krause. 

1876:  23  Kretschy. 

1877:  25  Fresenius. 

1879:  22  Precht. 

1880:  23  Morrell. 

1881:  20  Lindo. 

1881:  21  Ulex. 

1881:  22  Tatlock. 

1881:  23  Zuchschwerdt  and  West. 
1882:  23  Fresenius. 

1883:  23  Stolba. 

1885:  20  Rottger  and  Precht. 

1887:  13  Dittmar  and  McArthur. 
1888:  37  De  Koninck. 

1892:  45  Jean  and  Trillat. 

1893:  38  Villiers  and  Borg. 

1895:  23  Win  ton. 

1895:  24  Van  Dam. 

1895:  25  Delepine. 

1895:  27  Sonstadt. 

1896:  28  Hintz. 

1896:  29  Fab  re. 

1896:  31  Ruer. 

1896:  32  Bauer. 

1896:  33  Precht. 

1897:  23  Sjollema. 

1898:  37  Atterberg. 


Analysis — Continued . 
chloroplatinic  acid,  use  in  alkali  anal- 
ysis— continued . 

1906:  31  Regel. 

1907:  33  DeVries. 

1909:  47  Rohland. 

1910:  39  Rohland. 

1911:  69  Fiechter. 

1912:  90  Atterberg. 

1913:  92  Hicks. 

1913:  93  Meillere. 

1917:  66  Jarrell. 

1917:  67  Shippee. 

1917:  68  Pellet. 

1917:  69  Turkus. 

1917:  70  Walker. 

1917:  71  Hibbard. 

1917:  72  Blumenthal,  Peter,  Healy, 
and  Gott. 
colorimetric. 

1896:  34  Hazen. 

1915:  41  Hiittner  and  Mylius,  Gen. 
disintegration  of  crucibles.  See  Phos- 
phate analysis, 
electrolytic. 

1880:  26  Luckow. 

1880:  27  Schucht Pd. 

1884:  14  Classen. 

1890:  40  Smith  and  Keller.  . . .Pd. 

1890:  41  Smith  and  Frankel.  . .Pd. 

1891:  28  Smith Pd,  Pt. 

1891:  29  Smith  and  Muhr..Pd,  Pt. 

1891:  30  Joly  and  Leidie Rh. 

1891:  32  Smith Rh. 

1892:  40  Smith Ir,  Pd.  Pt. 

1892:  41  Riidorff. 

1895:  20  Smith  and  Harris Ru. 

1899:  30  Kollock Pd,  Pt. 

1899:  31  Cowper-Coles Pd. 

1902:  28  Smith Pd,  Pt. 

1902:  59  Krause. 

1903:  33  Foerster Ir,  Pt. 

1904:  28  Amberg Pd. 

1904:  60  Fischer Ir,  Pt. 

1907:  31  Langness Pd,  Pt,  Rh 

1912:  92  Gooch  and  Burdick. 

1914:  134  Barnebey Sub. 

1915:  53  Gutbier,  Fellner,  and 

Emslander Pd. 

1915:  104  Guzman  and  Ulzurrum, 

Sub. 

1915:  105  Guzman  and  Alemany, 

Sub. 

1917:  109  Jones. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


491 


Analysis — Continue  d . 
electrol  ytic— con  tinued . 

1917:  133  Gooch  and  Kobayashi, 

Sub. 

1917:  134  Gooch  and  Kobayashi, 


Sub. 

1917:  135  Gewecke Sub. 

1917:  136  Grower Sub. 


1917:  137  Guzman  and  Poch . .Sub. 
See  also  Electrodes, 
elementary,  use  in. 

1829:  23  Wohler. 

1831:  21  Hare. 

1855:  22  Stenhouse. 

1876:  31  Kopfer. 

1876:  32  Kopfer. 

1878:  29  Kopfer. 

1883:  26  Ballo. 

1883:  28  Clemence. 

1884:  13  Zulkowsky  and  Lepez. 
1895:  34  Campbell. 

1906:  34  Heraeus. 

1907:  34  Baumert. 

1907 : 35  Jacobsen  and  Lendesen, 

Pd. 

1907:  36  Dennstedt Pd. 

1908:  41  Dennstedt  and  Hassler. 
gas  analysis,  use  of  Pd  in. 

1857:  10  Bottger. 

1879:  25  Hempel. 

1879:  26  Hempel. 

1879:  27  Hempel. 

1881:  26  Tschirikoff. 

1881:  27  Schneider. 

1884:  18  Vulpius. 

1885:  22  Kritschewsky. 

1886:  18  Hoppe-Seyler. 

1886:  19  Sudakoff. 

1889:  20  Winkler. 

1895:  30  Phillips. 

1896:  30  Campbell  and  Hart. 

1902:  31  Charitschkoff. 

1910:  42  Paal  and  Hartmann. 

1917:  122  Philip  and  Steele  (pat.), 
Pd,  Pt. 

1917:  123  Gregg Pt. 

incineration  tubes. 

1897 : 40  Soltsien. 
iodide,  use  in  analysis. 

1828:  28  Dublanc. 


1853:  3 Kersting Pd. 

1875:  21  Selmi Pd. 

1876:  21  Chatin Pd. 

1881:  19  Field. 


Analysis — Continued, 
iodide,  use  in  analysis — continued. 
1882:  25  Blunt. 

1883:  24  Leeds. 

1884:  17  Harnack Pd. 

microchemical  analysis,  use  in. 

1891:  34  Behrens. 

1900:  28  Pozzi-Escot  and  Couquet, 

Pd, 

1904:  20  Donau. 

1907 : 29  Emich  and  Donau. 

1911:  60  Pozzi-Escot. 

1917:  46b  Deniges. 

1917:  63  Van  Brenkeleveen. 

1917 : 64  Vivario  and  Wagenaar, 

Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Pt. 

quantitative  estimation. 

1835:  9 Dobereiner. 

1869:  19  Scheibler. 


1870:  17  Topsoe. 

1870:  19  Preiss. 

1875:  22  Zenger Pd  . 

1877:  10  Ribau. 

1878:  23  Volhard Pd. 


1879:  34  Deville  and  Mascart.Gen. 
1881:  24  Wallach. 

1885:  30  Oudemans Ir,  Pt,  Ru. 

1891:  31  Joly  and  Leidie. . . .Gen. 


1892:  6 Frenkel Pd. 

1894:  28  Gulewitsch. 

1895:  22  De  Koninck. 

1900:  29  Mietzschke Ir. 

1902:  26  Richards. 

1902:  63  Bettges. 


1903:  28  Leidie  and  Quennessen, 

Gen. 

1904:  22  Rupp. 

1904:  24  Jannasch  and  Stephan. 
1904:  25  Jannasch  and  Bettges. Pd  . 
1904:  27  Erdmann  and  Makowka, 


Pd. 

1904:  31  Chapman Pd, 

1905:  33  Faktor. 

1905:  34  Nordenskjold ,Gen. 

1905 : 36  Jannasch  and  Von  Mayer, 

Gen. 

1906:  32  Donau Pd  , 


1907 : 32  Paal  and  Amberger. . .Os, 

1909 : 45  Gutbier  and  Falco Pd . 

1909:  46  Gutbier  and  Muller... Rh, 
1910:  12a  Ruff  and  Bornemann, 

Os. 

1910:  37  Riess Rh. 

1910:  38  Gutbier  and  Falco.... Pd, 


492 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF -PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Analysis — Continued, 
quantitative  estimation — continued . 
1911:  14a  Holtz. 

1911:  66  Mvlius  and  Hiittner, 


Ir,  Pd.  Pt. 

1911:  67  Mylius Ir.  Pd,  Pt. 

1911:  68  Wohler  and  Spengel. 

1912:  1 Holtz Pt,  X. 

1912:  79  Dewey. 

1912:  80 
1912:  81  Gaze. 

1912:  82  Trenkner. 

1912:  83  Dart Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  84  Koukline Gen. 

1912:  85  Arnold. 

1912:  93  Brunck Pd. 


1913:  74  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Gen. 

1913:  80  Crosse. 

1913:  88  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Gen. 

1913:  89  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Pd. 

1913:  90  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Gen. 

1913‘:  91  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Pd. 

1914:  52  Mylius  and  Mazzucchelli, 

Gen. 

1914:  55  Smoot Pd,  Pt. 

1914:  56  Bannister  and  DuVergier, 
Ir.  Pt. 

1914:  57  Schwitter Gen. 

1914:  58  Dewey. 

1914 : 59  Hanig. 

1914:  60  Jolly Ir,  Pt. 

1914:  61  Burrell  and  Oberfell.  .Pd. 
1915:  41  Mylius  and  Mazzucchelli, 

Gen. 

1915:  46  Smoot Pd,  Pt, 

1915:  47  Smoot Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  48  Koifman Gen. 

1915:  49  Koifman. 

1915:  51  Christensen. 

1915:  52  Gutbier  and  Fellner.  .Pd. 
1916:  35  Ivanov, 
reagent,  uses  as. 

1834:  15  Braudes  (for  tartaric  acid). 

1862:  9 Claus Ru. 

1863:  7 Dellfs  (for  alkaloids). 

1866 : 18  Dragendorff  (for  alkaloids), 

Ru. 

1876:  33  Mitscherlich  (for  oxygen). 


Analysis — Continued, 
reagent,  uses  as — continued. 

1881:  25  Maggi  (in  water  analysis), 
Os,  Pd. 

1888:  28  Barfoed  (for  mercury). 
1888:  35  Kassner  (in  ash  analysis). 
1890:  38  Thiele  (in  Marsh’s  test.) 
1896:  27  Tarugi  (amalgam). 

1896:  34  Hazen  (cobaltite). 


recognition. 

1824:.  1 Le  Baillif Pd,  Pt. 

1826:  8 Forchhammer. 

1828:  13  Fischer Gen. 

1828:  15  Wetzlar Pd. 

1832:  6 Lassaigne. 

1836:  6 Buchner. 

1838:  11  Lassaigne Pd. 

1844:  6 Claus Rh. 

1845:  11  Cotereau. 

1846  : 8 Claus Ru. 

1851:  9 Lassaigne Pd. 

1855:  15  Yohl. 

1858:  9 Spiller. 

1862:  10  Claus Gen. 

1866:  19  Bunsen Gen. 

1867:  12  Lea Ru. 

1867:  13  Schwarzenbach. 

1871:  20  Jean Gen. 

1875:  17  Kern Pd. 

1876:  24  Kern Pd,  Pt. 

1876:  25  Kern Pd. 

1877:  22  Heintz. 

1877 : 23  Jorgensen. 

1878:  21  Bottger. 

1880:  15  Ditte. 

1880:  22  Vincent Pd,  Pt. 

1880:  24  Von  Fodor Pd. 

1881:  19  Field. 

1883:  7 De  Boisbaudran Ir. 

1883:  25  Orlowski. 

1885 : 18  Demar^ay Rh . 

1891:  34  Behrens Gen. 

1894:  11  Howe Ru. 

1894:  22  Phillips Gen. 

1903:  27  Tarugi. 

1903:  28  Leidie  and  Quennessen, 

Gen. 

1905:  24  Alvarez Os. 

1905:  31  Alvarez Rh. 

1905:  33  Faktor. 

1905:  39  Donau Pd. 

1906:  28  Noyes Gen. 

1906:  29  Petersen. 

1906:  30  Orloff Pd. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


493 


Analysis — Continued, 
recognition — continued. 

1906:  33  Orloff Os,  Pd. 

1906:  78  Vogel Pd. 

1907:  30  Erdmann  and  Makowka, 
Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  37  Donau Gen. 

1908:  38  Orloff Pt,  Ru. 

1909:  44  Mingaye. 

1910:  109  Kopa  and  Konig. . .Sub. 

1910:  110  Kirby .Sub. 

1911:  58  Curtman  and  Rothberg, 

Gen. 

1911:  59  Pozzi-Escot. 

1912:  86  Hofmann  and  Sturm, 

Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  87  Duparc Pd. 

1912:  88  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  89  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 


Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  95  Iwanow Ir. 

1913:  75  Malatesta  and  Di  Nola. 

1913:  76  Yamauchi Pd. 

1913:  77  Schmidt Pd. 

1913:  185  Kopa Sub. 

1913:  186  Kopa ..Sub. 

1914:  53  Langstein  and  Prausnitz. 
1914:  54  Bannister  and  Patchin. 
1915:  42  Browning. 

1916:  33. 


1917:  65  Curtman  and  Harries.  Pd. 
.separation  from 
bismuth. 

1887:  24  Rosenbladt. 
cadmium. 

1880:  25  Von  Jiiptner. 
copper. 

1866:  15  Wohler. 

1887:  24  Rosenbladt. 
gallium. 

1882:  22  De  Boisbaudran. 

1883:  27  De  Boisbaudran. 
gold. 

1841:  13  Kemp. 

1887 : 25  Kriiss  and  Hoffmann. 

1887:  26  Bettel. 

1887:  27  Pirngruber. 

1887:  28  Wyatt. 

1899:  29  Vanino  and  Seemann, 

Ir,  Pt. 

1899:  32  Priwoznik. 

1903:  30  Willstatter. 

1903:  31  Carmichael. 


Analysis — Continued, 
separation  from 
lead. 

1887:  24  Rosenbladt. 

1905:  37  Senn Ir,  Pt. 

mercury. 

1887:  24  Rosenbladt. 
sih'er. 

1829:  16  Lampadius. 

1875:  6. 

1903:  31  Carmichael, 
tellurium. 

1876:  22  Becker. 

1898:  36  Jannasc-h Pd. 

thallium. 

1887:  23  Warren, 
tin. 

1911:  68  Wohler  and  Spengel. 
separation  of  H2S  group. 

1845:  13  Eisner. 

1861:  16  Beehamp  and  St. -Pierre. 
1878:  24  De  Clermont  and  From- 
mel. 

1879:  28  De  Clermont. 

1881:  18  Campari. 

1886:  14  Fresenius. 

1886:  15  Dirvell. 

1886:  16  Bailey. 

1888:  33  De  Koninck  and  Lecre- 
mier. 

1892:  38  Antony  and  Nicolli. 

1902:  29  Knoevenagel  and  Ebler. 
separation  of  Pt  group;  general. 

1822:  1 Barruel. 

1834:  9 Persoz. 

1843:  9 Berthier. 

1857:  3 Deville  and  Debray. 

1857 : 4 Muckle  and  Wohler. 

1860:  5 Deville  and  Debray. 

1862:  7 Deville  and  Debray. 

1863:  2 Guyard. 

1864:  1 Lea. 

1877:  6 Opificius. 

1885:  2 Wilm. 

1891:  31  Joly  and  Leidi6. 

1900:  4 Leidi4. 

1900:  5 Leidie. 

1911:  14a  Holtz, 
separation  of  Pt  metals, 
iridium. 

1829:  17  Lampadius. 

1830:  5 Quesneville. 

1833:  8 Wohler. 

1833:  12  Persoz. 


494 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


A nal  ysis — Continue  d . 
separation  of  Pt  metals — continued, 
iridium — continued. 

1837:  3 Frick. 

1844:  3 Kositzky. 

1855:  4 St.-Gilles. 

1866:  7 Birnbaum. 

1874:  6 Deville,  Debray,  and  Mo- 
rin. 

1892:  37  Antony. 

1917:  46  Archibald  and  Kern, 
osmium. 

1814:  3 Laugier. 

1830:  5 Quesneville. 

1833:  8 Wohler. 

1833:  12  Persoz. 

1838:  9 Ellet. 
palladium. 

1818:  4 Accum. 

1843:  5 Lassaigne. 

1896:  26  Cohn  and  Fleissner. 

1903:  32  Rostosky. 

1904:  25  Jannasch  and  Bettges. 
1904:  26  Jannasch  and  Rostosky. 
1904:  27  Erdmann  and  Makowka. 
platinum. 

1818:  3 Cloud. 

1822:  1 Barruel. 

1834:  7 Sobolevsky. 

1866:  7 Birnbaum. 

1868:  11  Chalmers  and  Tatlock. 
1875:  9 Von  Wagner. 

1886:  2 Noad. 

1899:  18  Bergsoe Ir. 

1904:  24  Jannasch  and  Stephan. 

1905:  35  Quennessen Ir. 

1913:  34  Verein  chemischer  Fabri- 

ken  in  Mannheim  (pat.) Ir. 

1917:  46  Archibald  and  Kern...Ir. 
rhodium. 

1901:  11  Piccini  and  Marino Ir. 

volumetric  analysis. 

1898:  35  Klobbie Os. 

1899:  28  Peterson. 

1902:  27a  Spiess. 

1904:  22  Rupp. 

1915:  43  Brandt. 

1917:  73  Schneider Pd. 

Ancient  knowledge  of  Pt. 

1790:  1 Cortinovis. 

1824:  b Rever. 

1845:  1 Schubarth. 

1850:  1 Paravey. 


Anderson’s  reaction. 

1897:  11  Werner. 

Anemometry,  hot  wire. 

1914:  105  King. 

Animal  organisms,  action-  of  ammono- 
bases  on. 

1904:  35  Bock. 

Anodes  for  mercury  arc  lamp. 

1906:  74  Guye  and  Rom  illy. 

See  also  Electrodes. 
Anthrazothionhydrate. 

1817 : 6 Grotthus. 

Antimony,  electrolytic  deposition. 

1909:  93  Schulte. 

Antimony  trioxide,  action  on  H2PtCl6. 

1899:  26  Harding. 

Aqua  regia,  solubility  in. 

1916:  54  Hoke  and  Moore. 

See  also  Solubility. 

Argon,  solubility  in  palladium. 

1912:  108  Sieverts  and  Bergner. 
solubility  in  platinum. 

1896:  23  Friedlander. 

Armor  plate  ore. 

1911:  12 Os. 

Arsenates. 

1820:  2 Thomson Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

1886:  5 Gibbs. 

Arsenic.  See  Alloys;  Analysis. 

Arsenic  halides. 

1890:  13  Geisenheimer. 

Arsenious  oxide,  action  of  Pt  on. 

1817:  4 Gehlen. 

Arsenites. 

1894:  12  Reichard Pd,  Pt. 

1895:  10  Stavenhagen. 

Asbestos,  palladized. 

1903:  34  Brunck. 

1916:  35  Ivanov, 
platinized, 

1916:  80  Terwen. 

Assay,  parting  apparatus. 

1909:  104  Stanley. 

See  Analysis. 

Assay  chemicals,  Pt  in. 

1908:  39  Rose. 

1908:  40  Bryant. 

Assimilation  of  nitrogen,  influence  of  Pt 
on. 

1912:  109  Loew. 

1912:  110  Baudisch. 

Atomic  heat. 

1908:  47  Gruneisen Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

See  also  Specific  heat. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


495 


Atomic  volume. 

1908:  47  Griineisen. 

Atomic  weight, 
general. 

1818:  '7  Berzelius. 

1826:  15  Berzelius. 

1828:  9 Berzelius. 

1833:  13  Berzelius. 

1834:  14  Berzelius. 

1835:  18  Berzelius. 

1846:  17  Playfair  and  Joule. 

1869:  3 Watts. 

1880:  2a  Becker. 

1881 : 16  Clarke. 

1882:  12  Clarke. 

1883:  14  Meyer  and  Seubert. 

1884:  8 Clarke. 

1886:  10  Van  der  Plaats. 

1891 : 3 Seubert. 

1896:  3 Clarke. 

1897:  6 Rydberg. 

1917:  40  Vondracek. 
iridium. 

1826:  6 Thomson. 

1878:  11  Seubert. 

1890:  20  Joly. 

1909:  7 Archibald. 

1910:  9 Hoyermann. 

1912:  37  Holzmann. 
osmium. 

1844 : 8 Fremy. 

1853:  5 Schneider. 

1857 : 3 Deville  and  Debray. 

1888:  3 Seubert. 

1891:  4 Seubert. 

1912:  38  Seybold. 
palladium. 

1847 : 4a  Icilius. 

1889:  5 Reiser. 

1892:  24  Bailey  and  Lamb. 

1892:  25  Keller  and  Smith. 

1893 : 28  Joly  and  Leidie. 

1894:  18  Reiser  and  Breed. 

1894:  20  Clarke. 

1897:  7 Lorenz. 

1899:  5 Hardin. 

1901:  4 Erdmann. 

1905 : 3 Amberg. 

1907:  5 WoernU. 

1908:  8 Kemmerer. 

1909:  8 Gutbier,  Krell,  and 
Woernle. 

1909:  9 Gutbier,  Haas,  and  Geb- 
hardt. 


Atomic  weight — Continued, 
palladium — continued. 

1912:  36  Shinn. 

1915:  22a  Smith, 
platinum. 

1852 : 9 Andrews. 

1881:  9 Seubert. 

1881:  17  Dewar  and  Scott. 

1882:  23  Fresenius. 

1884 : 7 Halberstadt. 

1888:  2 Seubert. 

1890:  28  Heycock  and  Neville. 
1908:  7 Hinrichs. 

1909:  6 Archibald. 

1912:  35  Schulz, 
rhodium. 

1853:  5 Schneider. 

1883:  13  Jorgensen. 

1890:  9 Seubert  and  KobbA. 

1897:  7 Lorenz. 

1910:  10  Renz. 

1910:  11  Dittmar. 
ruthenium. 

1844:  4 Claus. 

1888:  14  Joly. 

1889:  10  Joly. 

1897:  7 Lorenz. 

1911:  29  Vogt. 

Atomic  weight,  relation  to  specific  heat. 
1900:  36  Tilden. 

Atomic  Weights,  International  Commit- 
tee, reports. 

1903:  5 Clarke,  Seubert,  and 

Thorpe Pd. 

1906:  8 Clarke Pd. 

1909:  4 Clarke,  Ostwald,  Thorpe, 

and  Urbain Pd. 

1909:  5 Clarke,  Ostwald,  Thorpe, 

and  Urbain Pd. 

1910:  8 Clarke,  Thorpe,  Ostwald, 

and  Urbain Pt,  Rh. 

1913:  37  Clarke,  Thorf>e,  Ostwald, 

and  Urbain Ir. 

1913:  38  Clarke,  Thorpe,  Ostwald, 

and  Urbain Pd,  Ru. 

1914:  27  Clarke,  Thorpe,  Ostwald, 
and  Urbain Ir. 

B. 

Bacteria,  influence  of  Pt  on. 

1907:  39  Pfuhl. 

1912:  97  Bitter. 

1912:  109  Loew. 

1912:  110  Baudisch. 


496 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Bacteria — Continued, 
influence  of  bases  on. 

1904  : 35  Bock Rh. 

influence  of  csmic  acid  on. 

1914:  65  Thorsch. 
influence  on  catalysis. 

1913:  116  Rosenthal  and  Bam- 
berger. 

Barium  in  Pt. 

1865:  1 Kraut, 
cyanoplatinate. 

1899:  18  Bergsoe. 

1904:  13  Brochet  and  Petit. 

1906:  56  Borissow. 
sulphate,  does  not  retain  Pt. 

1904  : 30  Silberberger. 

Bars  of  metal,  manufacture. 

1912:  105  Gladnitz. 

Bases.  See  also  Constitution;  Theory, 
acetonamin. 

1876:  17  Heintz. 
aliphatic  amins. 

1914 : 28  Peters, 
ammonia, 
general. 

1856:  6 Claus. 

1856:  8 Weltzien. 

1862:  12  Schiff. 

1893 : 22  Werner. 

1895:  13  Werner, 
iridium. 

1852:  7 Skoblikoff. 

1879:  11  Birnbaum. 

1889:  14  Palmaer. 

1895:  16  Palmaer. 

1895:  16a  Palmaer. 

1896:  18  Palmaer. 

1908 : 22  Werner  and  De  Vries. 
1908:  22a  De  Vries, 
osmium. 

1858:  5 Gibbs  and  Genth. 

1860:  6 Gibbs. 

1881:  7 Gibbs, 
palladium. 

1841 : 12  Fehling. 

1853:  1 Muller. 

1860:  6 Gibbs. 

1865:  5 Baubigny. 

1878:  16  Deville  and  Debray. 

1880:  7 Ieambert. 

1890:  39  Smith  and  Keller. 

1898:  27  Reizenstein. 

1899:  5 Hardin. 


Bases — Continued, 
ammonia — continued . 
palladium — continued. 

1905:  19  Gutbier. 

1905:  23  Gutbier,  Krell,  and 
Janssen. 

1906:  24  Gutbier  and  Krell. 

1907:  21  Tschugaeff. 

1907 : 24  Zeisel  and  Nowack. 

1917:  56  Armstrong, 
platinum. 

1828:  11  Magnus. 

1837 : 6 Simon. 

1838:  6 Gros. 

1838:  7 Kane. 

1840:  5 Reiset. 

1841:  10  Berzelius. 

1841:  11  Kane. 

1844:  11  Peyrone. 

1844:  12  Reiset. 

1844:  13  Blyth. 

1846:  5 Knop  and  Schnedermann. 
1846 : 6 Haidinger. 

1846:  11  Raewsky. 

1847 : 12  Claus. 

1847:  13  Peyrone. 

1849:  6 Laurent  and  Gerhardt. 
1850:  8 Gerhardt. 

1851:  7 Hofmann. 

1851:  8 Buckton. 

1852:  8 Buckton. 

1854:  7 Claus. 

1855:  10  Peyrone. 

1855:  11  Peyrone. 

1856:  9 Grimm. 

1856:  10  Grimm. 

1857:  11  Sella. 

1860:  15  Church  and  Owens. 

1864:  3 Gentele. 

1865:  4 Cleve. 

1866:  12  Cleve. 

1866:  13  Hadow. 

1867:  9 Cleve. 

1867:  10  Thomsen. 

1869:  16  Thomsen. 

1869:  17  Blomstrand. 

1870:  11  Cleve. 

1870:  12  Cleve. 

1870:  13  Gordon. 

1870:  14  Blomstrand. 

1870:  15  Phillips. 

1870:  16  Odling. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


497 


Bases — Continued . 
ammonia — continued . 
platinum — continued. 

1871:  12  Cleve. 

1871:  13  Cleve. 

1871:  14  Cleve. 

1871:  15  Cleve. 

1871:  16  Blomstrand. 

1871:  17  Blomstrand. 

1872:  9 Topsoe. 

1873:  10  Sharpies. 

1876 : 30  Thomsen. 

1878:  15  Phillips. 

1879:  15  Drechsel. 

1882:  8 Gerdes. 

1882:  9 Drechsel. 

1882:  20  Hofmeister. 

1883:  20  Blomstrand. 

1884:  15  Drechsel. 

1886:  8 Jorgensen. 

1887 : 10  Cossa. 

1887 : 11  Reese. 

1888:  19  Koefoed. 

1888 : 20  Haberland  and  Hanekop. 
1889:  15  Jorgensen. 

1890:  21  Jorgensen. 

1890:  22  Jorgensen. 

1890:  23  Jorgensen. 

1890:  24  Cossa. 

1890:  25  Carlgren. 

1890:  26  Carlgren  and  Cleve. 

1892:  16  Petersen. 

1893:  23  Werner  and  Miolati. 
1894:  15  Cossa. 

1894:  17  Werner  and  Miolati. 
1894:  26  Kurnakow. 

1895:  13  Werner. 

1895:  14  Kurnakow. 

1895:  17  Klason. 

1895:  18  Klason. 

1896:  17  Schou. 

• 1896:  20  Werner. 

1898:  27  Reizenstein. 

1902:  22  Klason. 

1903:  14  Biilmann  and  Andersen. 
1904:  15  Klason. 

1904:  16  Euler. 

1906:  18  Jorgensen. 

1906:  19  Jorgensen  and  Sorensen. 
1906:  20  Tarugi. 

1907:  21  Tschugaeff. 

1907:  22  Tschugaeff. 

1907:  25  Werner. 


Bases — Continued . 
ammonia — continued, 
platinum — continued. 

1909:  36  Burdakow. 

1909:  50  Peters. 

1913:  58  Ramberg. 

1913:  59  Ramberg. 

1915:  28  Tschugaeff. 

1915:  29  Tschugaeff. 

1915:  30  Tschugaeff  and  Chlopin. 
1915:  31  Tschugaeff  and  Chlopiu. 
1915:  32  Tschugaeff  and  Kiltuino- 
vich. 

‘1915:  33  Tschugaeff  and  Wladimi- 
roff. 

1915:  34  Tschugaeff  and  Lebedin- 
ski. 

1915:  35  Tschugaeff  and  Skanaeff- 
Grigorieff. 

.1915:  37  Tschugaeff  and  Tscher- 
naeff. 

1915:  38  Tschugaeff  and  Wladimi- 
roff. 

1916:  48  Tschugaeff  and  Kiltuino- 
vich. 

1916:  50  Biilmann  and  Hoff. 

1917:  54  Ephrain  and  Millman. 
1917:  55  Falk  and  Nelson, 
rhodium. 

1882:  11  Jorgensen. 

1883:  13  Jorgensen. 

1884:  6 Jorgensen. 

1886:  9 Jorgensen. 

1889:  15  Jorgensen. 

1890:  23  Jorgensen. 

1891:  19  Jorgensen. 

1891:  20  Jorgensen. 

1892:  18  Jorgensen. 

1892:  19  Jorgensen. 

1893:  20  Jorgensen. 

1894:  16  Jorgensen. 

1896:  19  Jorgensen. 

1904:  35  Bock. 

1909:  25  Gutbier  and  Riess. 
ruthenium. 

1889:  HJoly. 

1890:  19  Joly. 

1892:  20  Joly. 

1893:  34  Mangin. 

1893:  35  Nicolle  and  Cantacuz^ne. 
1895:  15  Witt  and  Buntrock. 

1907:  25  Werner. 

1907:  26  Werner. 


109733°— 19— Bull.  694 32 


498 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Bases — Continued, 
aniline. 

1848:  7 Raewsky. 

1870:  12  Cl  eve.  * 
cobalt,  chloroplatinates  of. 

1901 : 9 Werner  and  Humphrey, 
coniin. 

1848:  8 Blyth. 
diamins. 

1899:  20  Werner. 

1899:  21  Kurnakow  and  Gwosda- 

rew Pd. 

1901:  13  Werner  and  Herty. 

1906:  21  Grossmann  and*  Schiick. 
1906:  25  Gutbier  and  Woemle. .Pd. 
1907:  23  Tschugaeff  and  Sokoloff. 
1909:  37  Tschugaeff  and  Sokoloff. 

1912:  52  Werner Rh. 

d icy  and  iarnid  in . 

1910:  27  Grossmann  and  Schiick, 
Pd,  Pt. 

ethylamin . 

~ 1892:  21  Cossa, 
hydrazin. 

1914:  37  Tschugaeff  and  Grigorjew. 
hydroxylamin. 

1871:  11  Lossen. 

1887:  12  Alexander. 

1900:  24  Uhlenhuth. 

1900:  25  Uhlenhuth. 

1910:  26  Ohermaier. 

1915:  36  Tschugaeff  and  Tscher- 
naeff. 
nicotine. 

1848:  6 Raewsky. 
organic  bases  of  Ir. 

1914:  33  Gutbier. 

See  also  Chloroplatinates. 


oxims. 

1906:  23  Tschugaeff Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  29  Tschugaeff Pd,  Pt. 


oxygen  bases,  chloroplatinates  of. 

1901:  8 Baeyer  and  Villiger. 
phosphinamin. 

1902:  15  Klason  and  Wanselin. 
pyrazol . 

1891 : 18  Balbiano. 

1892:  22  Balbiano. 
pyridin. 

1885:  14  Hedin. 

1892:  21  Cossa. 

1893:  21  Cossa. 


Bases — Continued . 
pyridin — continued . 

1895:  18  Klason. 

1896:  20  Werner. 

1898:  27  Reizenstein Pd,  Pt. 

1898:  29  Rosenheim  and  Maass. Pd. 
1910:  28  Ostromisslensky  and  Berg- 
mann. 

1911:  33  Delepine Ir. 

1913:  98  Fersmann. 

1914:  29  Datta  and  Ghosh, 
sulphur  bases. 

1834:  12  Zeise. 

1844:  10  Wertheim. 

1876:  16  Kruger. 

1877:  13  Claesson Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 

1885:  12  Enebuske. 

1887:  7 Lohndahl. 

1888:  15  Blomstrand. 

1890:  16  Lohndahl. 

1895:  19  Klason. 

1895:  19a  Hamberg. 
thiocarbonate  bases. 

1897:  18  Hofmann. 

See  also  Thio-acids. 

Baskets  for  combustion  furnace. 

1915:  99  Grant. 

Benzene,  action  with  Pt  black. 

1900 : 34  Lunge  and  Akunoff , 

Pd,  PL 

Benzhydrol,  action  of  Pd  sponge. 

1903:  26  Knoevenagel. 

Benzidin,  reagent  for  Pt. 

1913:  75  Malatesta  and  Di  Nola. 
Beta-rays.  See  also  X-rays. 

1910:  91  Schmidt, 

Bibliography,  bromo-salts. 

1902:  13  Pfeiffer, 
iridium. 

1885:  23  Perry, 
magnesium  cyanoplatinito. 

1872:  7 Bolton, 
nitrogen  industries. 

1917:  80a  Hosmer. 

1917 : 80b  Boyce, 
platinum  metals. 

1883:  1 Claus. 

1897 : 43  Howe, 
works  of  Joly. 

1899:  51. 

B iol  u minescence . 

1917:  83  Harvey. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


499 


Black,  Pd. 

1910:  61  Paal  and  Hohenegger. 
1912:  70  Wieland. 

1913:  71  Bargellini. 

1913:  72  Dupont. 

1913:  124  Wieland. 

1916:  79  Salkind  and  Markaryan. 
Black,  Pt. 

1800:  6 Henry. 

1804:  17  Proust. 

1829:  22  Liebig. 

1832:  3 Dobereiner. 

1832:  11  Dobereiner. 

1832:  14. 

1834:  18  Bley. 

1835:  9 Dobereiner. 

1835:  12  Dobereiner. 

1.836:  8 Dobereiner. 

1836:  9 Dobereiner. 

1858:  8 Hempel. 

1872:  15  Smith. 

1876:  55  Zdrawkowitch. 

1877:  37  Bottger. 

1882:  18  Mulder  and  Van  der 
Meulen. 

1886:  36  Drechsel. 

1899:  36  Sabaneef. 

1903:  39  Neilson. 

1904:  42  Vondracek. 

1904:  45  Neilson  and  Brown. 

1906:  43  Loew  and  Aso. 

1908:  5$  Grove  and  Loevenhaut. 
1908:  67  Martini. 

1909:  94  Laborde. 

1910:  7 MacDermott. 

1911:  95  Royds. 

1912 : 33  Fery  and  Drecq. 

1912:  119  Coblentz. 

1913:  68  Yavon. 

1913:  118  Ott. 

1914:  81  Vavon. 

1914:  82  Vavon. 

1914:  83  Vavon. 

1915:  59  Paai  and  Schwarz, 

Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1916:  77  Houben  and  Pfau. 

1916:  79  Salkind  and  Markaryan. 
1916:  85  Gerlach. 

Bone  production.  See  Osmic  acid. 
Borax  bead,  coloration  by  colloidal 
metals. 

1904:  19  Donau. 

Borax,  Pt  in. 

1908:  40  Bryant. 


Borneo.  See  Occurrence. 

Boron.  See  Alloys. 

Boss  mine.  See  Occurrence,  Nevada. 
Brittle,  Pt. 

1874:  35  Reichardt. 

See  also  Disintegration. 

Bromates. 

1841:  9 Rammelsberg Pd,  Pt. 

Bromides. 

1880:  5 Meyer  and  Z iiblin. 


1891:  12  Pullinger. 

1892:  34  Pigeon. 

1900:  17  Rosenheim Oa. 

1904:  10  Howe Ru. 

1911:  32  Wohler. 


1912:  56  Tschugaeff  and  Fraenkel. 
tetrabromide. 

1900:  9 Miolati  and  Bellucci. 

1913:  39  Gutbier  and  Heinrich. 

See  also  Halides. 

Bromo-iridates  and  iridites. 

1865:  6 Birnbaum. 

1890:  14  Geisenheimer. 

1909:  23  Gutbier  and  Riess. 

1910:  37  Riess. 

Bromonitrites. 

1900:  21  Miolati  and  Bellucci. 
Bromo-osmates. 

1901:  23  Sachs. 

1909:  27  Gutbier  and  Maisch. 

1911:  36  Walbiuger. 

1914:  35  Gutbier  and  Mehler. 

1914:  36  Gutbier  and  Mehler. 
Bromo-palladates  and  palladites. 

1828:  10  Bonsdorff. 

1894:  9 Smith  and  Wallace. 

1905:  19  Gutbier. 

1905:  20  Gutbier  and  Krell. 

1905:  21  Gutbier  and  Krell. 

1905:  22  Gutbier,  Krell,  and  Jans- 
sen. 

1906:  11  Gutbier  and  Woernle. 
1906:  12  Gutbier  and  Krell. 

1916:  42  Gutbier  and  Fellner. 

1916:  43  Gutbier  and  Fellner. 
Bromo-platinates  and  platinites. 

1826:  7 Balard . 

1828:  10  Bonsdorff. 

1832:  4 Bonsdorff. 

1868:  8 Topsoe. 

1871:  19  Topsoe  and  Christiansen 
1874:  41  Topsoe. 

1897:  4 Meker. 

1902:  11  Cleve. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


500 

Bromo-platinates  and  platinites — Contd. 
1903:  14  Biilmann  and  Andersen. 
1909:  16  Gutbier  and  Banned  el. 
1909:  17  Ray  and  Ghosh. 

1910:  12  Bauriedel. 

1910:  13  Gutbier. 

1911:  76  Ries. 

1912:  34  Weber. 

1912:  45  Gutbier  and  Blumer. 
1912:  46  Yon  Muller. 

1913:  40  Gutbier  and  Rausch. 

1914:  30  Gutbier,  Krauss,  and  Yon 

Muller. 

1916:  44  Mandell. 

1917:  46  Archibald  and  Kem. 
Bromo-rhodates. 

1908:  23  Gutbier  and  Hiittlinger. 
Bromo-mthenates. 

1905:  23  Gutbier  and  Trenkner. 
1907:  14  Gutbier  and  Zwicker. 
Bromo-salts,  list  of. 

1902:  13  Pfeiffer. 

Bronzing,  with  PtCl4. 

1862:  24  Hunt, 

Bumping,  prevention  of. 

1818:  12  Gay-Lussac. 

Burner. 

1884:  24  Lewis. 

C. 

Cacodyl  compounds. 

1842:  12  Bunsen. 

Cadmium.  See  Alloys;  Analysis. 
Calcium  carbide,  action  as  reducing  agent. 

1899:  27  Tarugi. 

Calorimeter  bomb. 

1915:  106  Parr. 

Calorimetry  at  high  temperatures. 

1913:  145  Corbino. 

1913:  146  Corbino. 

Camphene,  catalytic  oxidation. 

1911:  85  Aschan. 

Camphoric  acid. 

1823:  5 Braudes. 

Canadium. 

1911:  1 French. 

1912:  2 Eastick. 

1912:  3 Patterson. 

1912:  4 Estreicher. 

Canadium,  Pt  substitute. 

1917:  127  Heath. 

Capillarity. 

1868:  16  Quincke Pd,  Pt. 


Carbon. 

analysis  in  presence  of  Os. 

1902:  27  Von  Knorre. 
bisulphide,  compound  with. 

1890:  15  Schutzenberger. 
combustion  crucible. 

1899:  45  Shimer. 

1903:  51  Stehman. 
compounds  with, 

1881:  12  Schutzenberger. 

1881:  lla  Colson. 

1885:  10  Griffiths. 

1890:  15  Schutzenberger. 

1896:  11  Moissan Ir,  Pd,  Rh. 

1900:  16  Prandtl  and  Hofmann, 
holder. 

1885:  33  Scharn weber. 
monoxide,  action  on  Pt,  etc. 

1897:  25  Harbeck  and  Lunge. 


1898:  21  Fink Pd. 

1902:  30  Jean Pd. 

1902:  31  Charitschkoff. Pd. 

1903:  22  Muller. 

1905:  39  Donau Pd. 

1912:  91  Guasco. 

1912:  93  Brunck Pd. 

1912:  112  Wieland Pd. 

1916:  65  Paal . 
toximeter. 

1912:  91  Guasco. 

Carbonyl  compounds. 

1825:  4 Zeise. 


1868:  6 Schutzenberger. 

1870:  9 Schutzenberger. 

1891:  10  Mylius  and  Foerster. 

1891:  11  Foerster. 

1891:  12  Pullinger. 

1896:  14  Ferreira  da  Silva. 

I 1897:  12  Ferreira  da  Silva. 

1910:  21  Mond,  Hirtz,  and  Cowap, 
Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

1915:  24a  Mond Ru. 

Care  of  crucibles. 

1912:  121. 

Caro's  acid,  action  of  Pt  on. 

1904:  51  Price  and  Friend. 

Catalog  of  apparatus. 

1894:  33  Baker  & Co. 

Catalyst. 

1916:  80a  Muller Gen. 

1917:  85  Mittasch,  Schneider,  and 
Morawitz Gen. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


501 


Catalytic  action. 

1898:  42  De  Hemptinne. . .Pd,  Pt. 
1899:  37  Bredig  and  Bemeck. 

1899:  38  Wagner. 

1900:  31  Euler. 

1900:  32  French. 

1900:  33  Hober. 

1900:  34  LungeandSkanoff.Pd.Pt. 

1900:  35  Sulc Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Rh. 

1901:  25  Bredig  and  Ikeda. 

1901:  26  Raudnitz. 

1901:  27  Bredig. 

1901:  28  Ernst. 

1901:  29  Wohler. 

1902:  36  Tanatar. 

1902:  37  Tanatar. 

1902:  39  Fredenhagen. 

1902:  40  Mellor  and  Russell Pd. 

1902:  41  Engler  and  Wohler. 

1902:  42  Schaer. 

1903:  38  Trillat. 

1904:  42  Vondracek. 

1904:  44  Purgotti  and  Zaniehelli. 
1904:  46  Bredig  and  Fortner. . .Pd. 
1904:  48  Liebermann. 

1904:  49  Liebermann  and  Von  Gen-  j 
ersich. 

1905:  52  Senter. 

1905:  53  Senter. 

1905:  54  Senter. 

1905:  55  Sand Pd,  Pt. 

1905:  56  Sirk. 

1906:  43  Loew  and  Aso. 

1906:  44  Bray. 

1906:  45  Bone  and  Wheeler. 

1906:  48  Bringhenti Pd,  Pt. 

1906:  49  Neilson. 

1906:  50  Neilson. 

1907:  52  Liebig. 

1907 : 53  Bodenstein  and  Fink. 

1907:  55  Paal,  Amberger  and  Ge- 

rum Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  35  Paal,  Gerum,  and  Roth, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  55  Jablczynski. 

1908:  57  Kaestner  (pat.). 

1908:  58  Vanzetti Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  64  Teletow. 

1908:  65  Bokorny. 

1909:  41  Paal,  Roth,  Gerum,  and 

Hartmann Pd,  Pt. 

1909:  60  Just  and  Berezowsky. 

1909:  61  Bach Pd. 

1909:  62  Harkins. 


1 Catalytic  action— Continued. 


1909:  63  Bornemann Pd,  Pt. 

1909:  64  Brossa Ir. 

1909:  70  Kernot Ir. 

1910:  54  Denham. 

1910:  55  Haber Os. 

1910:  56  Badische  Anilin  u.  Soda 

Fabrik  (pat.) Os. 

1910:  57  Golodetz Os. 


1910:  59  Bredig  and  Sommer, 


Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

1911:  85  Aschan. 

1911:  86  Brunei. 

1911:  87  Milbauer. 

1911:  91  Zelinsky Pd. 

1911:  92  Paal  and  Karl Pd. 

1911:  93  Blaekadder  and  Bredig, 

Rh. 

1912:  61  Schwarz. 

1912:  62  Skita Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  67  Zelinsky  and  Herzenstein, 
Pd,  Pt, 

1912:  68  Meyer Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  69  Brunjes Pd. 

1912:  72  Ipatief Pd. 

1912:  77  Zelinsky  and  Uklonskaja, 

Pd. 

1912:  94  Knapp Pd. 

1912:  112  Wieland Pd. 

1912:  113  Wieland Pd. 

1912:  114  Wieland Pd. 

1912:  117  Zentralstelle  fiir  wissen- 
schaftlicli  - technische  Unter- 

suchungen  (pat.) Ru. 

1913:  66  Madina veitia Gen. 

1913:  68  Vavon. 

1913:  70  Paal  and  WindischPd,  Pt. 

1913:  72  Dupont Pd. 

1913:  73  Kousnetsof Pd. 

’ 1913:  110  Skita Pd,  Pt, 

1913:  112  Fokine Pd,  Pt. 


1913:  114  Gutbier  and  Neundling- 
er. 

1913:  116  Rosenthal  and  Bamber- 
ger. 

1913:  117  Farmer  and  Parker. 


1913:  118  Ott. 

1913:  122  Paal  and  Oehme Pd. 

1913:  125  Paal  and  Karl Pd. 

1913:  131  Ru. 

1914:  73  Maclnnes. 

1914:  74  Dyer  and  Dole. 

1914:  75  Bassett. 

1914:  77  Paal 


Pd,  Pt. 


502 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Catalytic  action — Continued. 

1914:  78  Paal Pd. 

1914:  81  Vavon. 

1914:  82  Vavon. 

1914:  83  Vavon. 

1914:  86  Normann  and  Schick.  Os. 
1914:  87  Willstatter  and  Sonnen- 

feld Os. 

1914:  129  Hofmann  and  Ritter, 

Gen. 

1915:  22  Langmuir Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  64  Skita Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  65  Skita Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  66  Paal  and  Biittner Pd. 

1915:  67  PaalandHohenegger.Pd. 
1915:  68  Paal  and  Schwarz. 

1915:  69  Kruger  and  Taege. 

1915:  70  Hofmann  and  Schnieder, 

Gen. 

1916:  62  Gurvich. 

1916:  63  Lemoine. 

1916:  64  Paal  and  Schwarz. 


1916:  65  Paal Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1916:  66  Hofmann  and  Ebert.  .Gen. 
1916:  67  Sieverts  and  Peters. 

1916:  68  Scagliarini  and  Berti- 

Ceroni Pd. 

1916:  70  Boeseken Pd,  Pt. 

1916:  71  Bercelles. 

1916:  73  Haas Rh. 

1916:  74  Dreyfus Pd,  Pt. 

1916:  75  Korevaar Pd. 

1916:  76  Grassi. 

1916:  77  Houben  and  Pfau. 


1916:  78  Lebedev  and  Ivanov. 
1916:  79  Salkind  and  Markaryan, 


Pd,  Pt. 

1916:  80  Terwen. 

1916:  81  Sulzberger Pd. 

1916:  91  Takasaki. 

1917:  74  Bancroft. 

1917:  75  Bancroft Pd,  Pt. 

1917:  76  Sulzberger Pd,  Pt. 

1917:  77  Groll. 

1917:  78  Reiman. 

1917:  79  Curphey. 


1917:  80  Bosch,  Mittasch,  and 


Beck  (pat.) Gen. 

1917:  81  Bredig  (pat.) Pd,  Pt. 

1917:  82  Paal,  Biehler,  and 
Steyer Ir. 


1917:  122  Philip  and  Steel  (pat.), 
Pd,  Pt. 

See  also  Colloids;  Ferments;  Reduc- 
tion; Sugar. 


Cathode-ray  vacuum  heater. 

1913:  lOOTiede. 

Cathodes.  See  Electrodes;  Polarisation 
Caustic  soda,  action  on  Pt. 

1909:  42  Le  Blanc  and  Bergmann 
Centrifuge  of  Pt. 

1908:  87  Baxter. 

Charcoal,  decomposition  of  chlorides  by 
1900:  13  De  Coninck. 

Chlorate. 

1886:  3 Prost. 

Chlorides, 
general . 

1889:  6 Pigeon. 

1894:  7 Erdmann. 

1916:  59  Von  Veimam. 
iridium. 

1847:  7 Claus. 

1847:  8 Claus. 

1847:  10  Claus. 

1858:  7 Claus. 

1860:  6 Gibbs. 

1860:  7 Boedeker. 

1890:  20  Joly. 

1911:  32  Wohler. 

1911:  34  Delepine. 

1913:  46  Wohler  and  Streicher. 
1913:  47  Wohler  and  Griinzweig. 
1913:  48  Wohler  and  Streicher. 
1913:  50  Wohler  and  Streicher. 
1914:  31  Delepine. 

1917:  48  Delepine. 
osmium. 

1910:  12a  Ruff  and  Bornemann. 
palladium. 

1846:  12  Rose. 

1867:  7 Croft. 

1901:  14  Phillips. 

1901:  40  Cohen. 

1902:  30  Jean. 

1906:  13  Mohlau. 

1915:  25  Zappi. 
platinum. 

1812:  3 Davy. 

18'60:  7 Boedeker. 

1874:  18  Cleve. 

1879:  18  Seelheim. 

1879:  19  Meyer. 

1879:  20  Smith. 

1879:  21  Dunnington. 

1894:  17  Werner  and  Miolati. 

1905:  14  Wyrouboff  and  Verneuil. 
1908:  32  Hofmann  and  Narbutt. 
1911:  32  Wohler. 

1913:  48  Wohler  and  Streicher. 


SUBJECT  INDEX. 


503 


Chlorides — Continued, 
ruthenium. 

1859:  8 Claus. 

1892:  33  Joly. 

1909:  15  Miolati  and  Tagiuri. 

1901:  10  Howe. 

1904:  9 Howe. 

1915:  27  Gutbier  and  Krauss. 
bichloride,  platinum. 

1834:  11  Kane. 

1835:  16  Kane. 

1854:  18  Graham. 

1862:  11  Baudrimont. 

1881:  17  Dewar  and  Scott. 

1888:  4 Engel. 

1800:  27  Pigeon. 

18S2:  8 Shenstone  and  Beck. 

1893:  12  Shenstone  and  Beck. 

1894:  8 Lea. 

monochloride,  platinum. 

1894:  8 Lea. 

1898:  15  Sonstadt. 
tetrachloride,  iridium. 

1890:  13  Geisenheimer. 

1891:  27  Gladstone, 
tetrachloride,  platinum. 

1829  : 10  Zeise. 

1835:  14  Mather. 

1846:  12  Rose. 

1854:  11  Gladstone. 

1870:  3 Norton. 

1871:  6 Lawrow. 

1872:  3 Norton. 

1875:  24  Meyer  and  Locher. 

1830:  15  Ditte. 

1881:  13  Clarke  and  Owens. 

1882:  19  Gavazzi. 

1887:  18  Duclaux. 

1888:  28  Barfoed. 

1891:  23  Seubert  and  Schmidt. 
1891:  25  Pigeon. 

1892:  7 Pullinger. 

1900:  7 Miolati. 

1901 : 6 Mallet. 

1903:  12  De  Coninck. 

1903 : 24  Rosenheim,  Loewen- 
stamm,  and  Singer. 

1913:  39  Gutbier  and  Heinrich, 
decomposition  by  carbon. 

1900:  13  De  Coninck. 
hydrolysis. 

1900:  12  Kohlrausch. 
trichloride,  iridium. 

1866:  18  Dragendorff. 

1899:  12  Leidie. 


Chlorides — Continued, 
trichloride,  rhodium. 

1888:  10  Leidie. 

1888:  11  Leidie. 

1899:  12  Leidie. 
trichloride,  ruthenium. 

1866:  18  Dragendorff. 
action  of  ammonia  on  chloride. 


1899 : 19  Matignon Pd . 

action  of  carbon  monoxide. 

1898:  21  Fink Pt. 


See  also  Analysis;  Chloro-salts;  Elec- 
trolytic behavior;  Halides;  Nitroso- 
chlorides;  Recovery  of  waste. 
Chloro-cyanides. 

1900:  21  Miolati  and  Bellucci. 
Chloroform,  compound  with. 

1900:  16  Prandtl  and  Hofmann. 
Chloro-iridates  and  -iridites. 

1811:  6. 

1814:  4 Yauquelin. 

1834:  16  Kastner. 

1836:  3 Hermann. 

1849:  4 Jewreinow. 

1852:  6 Karmrodt  and  Uhrlaub, 
1856:  13  Keferstein. 

1866:  18  Dragendorff. 

1875:  14  Lasaulx. 

1885:  6 Vincent. 

1890:  12  Geisenheimer. 

1890:  13  Geisenheimer. 

1890:  37  Dufet. 

1891:  27  Gladstone. 

1893:  14  Antony. 

1895:  13  Werner. 

1903:  15  Renz. 

1908:  19  Delepine. 

1908:  20  V5zes. 

1908:  21  Delepine. 

1908:  22  Werner  and  DeVries. 

1908:  22a  DeVries. 

1909:  21  Lindner. 

1909:  22  Gutbier  and  Lindner. 
1909:  23  Gutbier  and  Riess. 

1909:  24  Gutbier  and  Ries3. 

1909:  26  Delepine. 

1911:  35  Duffour. 

1913:  51  Von  Fraenkel. 

1914:  32  Delepine. 

1914:  34  Gutbier  and  Ottenstein. 
1915:  76  Benrath. 

1917:  46  Archibald  and  Kern. 

1917:  48  Delepine. 


504 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Chloro-nitrites  (Ir) . 

1905:  30  Quennessen. 

See  also  Nitrites. 

Chloro-osmates  and  -osmites. 

1836:  3 Hermann. 

1893:  10  Moraht  and  Wischin. 

1901:  18  Werner  and  Dinklager. 
1909:  27  Gutbier  and  Maisch. 

1910:  14  Gutbier. 

1911:  36  Walbinger. 

1911:  37  Gutbier. 

1913:  52  Gutbier. 

Chloro-oxalates.  See  Oxalates. 
Cliloro-palladates  and  -palladites. 

1827:  11. 

1828:  10  Bonsdorff. 

1869:  11  Topsoe. 

1874:  14  Welkow. 

1874:  15  Welkow. 

1874:  17  Welkow. 

1878:  5 Godeffroy. 

1879:  8 Drechsel. 

1895:  13  Werner. 

1905:  19  Gutbier. 

1905:  20  Gutbier  and  Krell. 

1905:  21  Gutbier  and  Krell. 

1905:  22  Gutbier,  Krell,  and  Jens- 
sen. 

1906:  11  Gutbier  and  Woernle. 
1906:  12  Gutbier  and  Krell. 

1908:  18  Bellucci  and  De  Cesaris. 
1916:  42  Gutbier  and  Fellner. 

1916:  43  Gutbier  and  Fellner. 
Chloro-platinates. 

1782:  2 Wenzel. 

1783:  1 De  l’Isle. 

1797:  1 Mussin-Pusehkin. 

1800:  1 Mussin-Pusehkin. 

1803:  10  Collet-Descotils. 

1804:  16  Mussin-Pusehkin. 

1817:  3 Yauquelin. 

1827:  10  Bonsdorff. 

1827:  11. 

1828:  10  Bonsdorff. 

1828:  25  Fischer. 

1830:  8 Hiinefeld. 

1834:  16  Kastner. 

1836:  3 Hermann. 

1838:  3 Dobereiner. 

1843:  8 Gerhardt. 

1850:  6 Fr&ny. 

1850:  7 Wurtz. 

1851:  5 Claudet. 

1851:  6 Landolt. 


Chloro-platinates — Continued. 

1854:  15  Schabus. 

1855:  7 Lowig. 

1855:  8 Anderson. 

1855:  9 Wurtz. 

1855:  16  Weltzien. 

1855:  17  Marignac. 

1856:  2 Scheibler. 

1856:  3 Salm-Horstmar. 

1856:  4 Hofmann  and  Cahours. 
1856:  11  Gibbs  and  Genth. 

1857:  9 Hofmann. 

1858:  4 Williams. 

1859:  15  Knop. 

1860:  9 Klippel. 

1860:  11  Hofmann. 

1861:  2 Sella. 

1861:  7 Kirchhoff  and  Bunsen. 
1861:  8 Holzmann. 

1861:  10  Lang. 

1861:  15  Cleve. 

1862:  13  Braun. 

1863:  4 Bottger. 

1863:  5 Millon  and  Commaille. 
1864:  8 Schrotter. 

1864:  9 Crookes. 

1864:  10  Crookes. 

1864:  13  Kopp. 

1865:  2 Zepharovitch. 

1865:  3 Cleve. 

1866:  16  Commaille. 

1867:  4 Birnbaum. 

1868:  8 Topsoe. 

1870:  4 Thomsen. 

1871:  19  Topsoe  and  Christiansen. 
1873:  5 Marignac. 

1873:  6 Welkow. 

1873:  7 Gibbs. 

1873:  30  Schroder. 

1874:  13  Thomsen. 

1874:  16  W'elkow. 

1874:  24  Jolin. 

1874:  31  Topsoe. 

1874:  41  Topsoe. 

1875:  13  Godeffroy. 

1876:  12  Nilson. 

1876:  13  Nilson. 

1877:  14  Cahours. 

1878:  6 Jorgensen. 

1878:  7 Frerichs  and  Smith. 

1878:  8 Cleve. 

1878:  13  Nilson  and  Pettefsson. 
1878:  20  Bottger. 

1878:  43  Thomsen. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


505 


Chloro-platinates — Continued. 

1879:  9 Heintz. 

1879:  23  Gintl. 

1880:  8 Christensen. 

1880:  13  Cleve. 

1881:  8 Hesse. 

1881:  14  Jorgensen. 

1882:  10  Jorgensen. 

1882:  21  Topsoe. 

1883:  12  Cleve. 

1883:  16  He  Coninck. 

1884:  5 Jorgensen. 

1884:  6 Jorgensen. 

1884:  9 Romanis. 

1884:  10  Raoult. 

1885:  3 Cleve. 

1885:  4 Cleve. 

1885:  5 Jorgensen. 

1886:  12  Foussereau. 

1887:  4 Malbot. 

1887:  5 Jorgensen. 

1887:  8 Semmler. 

1888:  6 Laird. 

1888:  7 Klinger  and  Maaseen. 
1888:  9 Weibull. 

1888:  26  Rudorff. 

1889:  19  Ostwald. 

1891 : 13  Christensen. 

1891:  14  Le  Bel, 

1892:  17  Jorgensen. 

1892:  44  Peligot. 

1893:  13  Le  Bel. 

1895:  13  Werner. 

1896:  4 Herty. 

1896:  5 Miolati. 

1897:  8 Rohland. 

1897:  10  Miolati. 

1897:  11  Werner. 

1898:  13  Rohland. 

1898:  15  Sonstadt. 

1898:  16  Yon  Scheele. 

1898:  18  Kursanoff. 

1898:  34  Curtius  and  Rissom. 

1899:  26  Harding. 

1900:  11  Benedicks. 

1901:  8 Baeyer  and  Villiger. 

1901:  9 Werner  and  Humphrey. 
1902:  10  De  Coninck. 

1902:  11  Cleve. 

1902:  12  Hesse. 

1103:  13  Dilthey. 

1904:  5 Bellucci  and  Parravano. 
1905:  18  Pellizzari  and  Cantoni. 
1907:  10  Dunstan  and  Cleaverley. 


Chloro-platinates — Continued. 

1907:  11  Dunstan. 

1907:  12  Pickard  and  Kenyon. 
1909:  19  Fosse. 

1910:  40  Nyman  and  Bjorksten. 
1911:  31  Pistschimuka. 

1911:  76  Ries. 

1911:  104  Feytis. 

1912:  44  Pistschimuka. 

1913:  42  Dhar  and  Bhattacharyya. 
1915:  26  Zappi. 

1916:  44  Mandel. 

1916:  45  Kehrmann,  Robert,  and 
Sandoz. 

1916:  46  Lederer. 

1917 : 46  Archibald  and  Kern. 

1917:  47  Eberhard. 
magnesium,  optical  properties. 

1917:  46a  Gaubert. 
monoehloroplatinates. 

1902:  9 Bellucci. 
pentachloroplatinates. 

1900:  8 Miolati  and  Bellucci. 
tric-hloroplatinates. 

1903:  11  Miolati  and  Pendini. 
color  of  chloroplatinates. 

1908:  17  Hantzsch. 

1910:  92  Hantzsch. 
decomposition  of  chloroplatinates. 

1909:  17  Ray  and  Ghosh, 
solubility  of  potassium  chloroplatinate. 
1908:  16  Archibald,  Wilcox,  and 
Buckley. 

See  also  Phospho-halogen  compounds. 
Chloroplatinic  acid. 

1804:  15  Mussin-Puschkin. 

1821:  7 Murray. 

1827:  9 Van  Mons. 

1835:  12  Dobereiner. 

1854:  10  Williams. 

1867 : 6 Weber. 

1869:  26  Reimann. 

1870:  32  Thomsen. 

1871:  21  Thomsen. 

1879:  17  Reinitzer. 

1880:  17  Eder. 

1883:  15  Opificius. 

1883:  17  Levallois. 

1883:  18  Gore. 

1887:  52  Miesler. 

1888:  5 Stolba. 

1888:  23  Gerlach. 

1888:  25  Walden. 

1891:  5 Pigeon. 


506  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Chloroplatimc  acid — Continued. 

1892:  43  Holleman. 

1895:  6 Pigeon. 

1896:  6 Hake. 

1896:  7 Smitsr. 

1901 : 7 Miolati  and  Mascetti. 

1803:  10  Miolati. 

compounds  with  phosphine  oxides. 

1906 : 15  Pickard  and  Kenyon, 
influence  of  light  on, 

1912:  42  Boll  and  Job. 

1912:  43  Job  and  Boll. 

1913:  43  Boll, 
influence  on  titration. 

1914:  62  Brandt, 
preparation. 

1908:  15  Weber. 

1915:  25  Zappi. 

1916:  36  Tingle. 

1917:  45  Rudnick  and  Cooke. 

See  also  Analysis. 

Chloroplatinites. 

1850:  7 Wurtz. 

1857:  14  Descloizeaux. 

18-77:  42  Clarke. 

1878:  -30  Clarke. 

1893:  11  Montemartini. 

1895:  13  Werner. 

1895:  27  Sonstadt. 

1898:  18  Kursanoff. 

1898  : 30  Vezes. 

1900:  14  Biilmann. 

1901:  9 Werner  and  Humphrey, 
preparation  of. 

1897:  9 Groger. 

1898:  30  Vezes. 

1904:  7 Klason. 

C'hlororhodates. 

1815:  1 Yauquelin. 

1838:  4 Biewend. 

1856:  13  Kefersteiru 
1875:  14  Lasaulx. 

1883:  5 Wilm. 

1884:  2 Wilm. 

1885:  7 Vincent. 

1886:  12  Foussereau. 

1888:  12  Leidie. 

1890:  10  Seubert  and  Kobb6. 
1892:  11  Wilm. 

1895:  13  Werner. 

1908:  23  Gutbier  and  Hiittlinger. 
1909:  25  Gutbier  and  Riess. 

1910:  15  Golubkin. 

1913:  51  Von  Fraenkel. 


Chloro-ruthenates  and  -ruthenites. 

1847:  10  Claus. 

1857:  12  Senarmont. 

1899:  13  Antony  and  Luccbesi. 
1899:  14  Antony  and  Lucchesi. 
1901:  10  Howe. 

1903:  15  Renz. 

1905:  23  Gutbier  and  Trenkner. 
1907:  14  Gutbier  and  Zwicker. 
1909:  28  Leuchs. 

1909 : 29  Lind  and  Bliss. 

1911:  38  Wiessmann. 

1911:  39  Gutbier. 

1912:  49  Bellucei. 

Chloro-sulphites  (Os,  Pd). 

1901:  23  Sachs. 

Chromates. 

1892:  6 Frenkel. 

Chromous  chloride,  decomposition  by  Pt. 

1908 : 55  Jablczynski. 

Cleaning  Pt  dishes. 

1912:  147  Jabs. 

See  also  Crucibles. 

Cleaning  Pt  wire.  See'Wire. 

Coal  gas,  action  on  Pt. 

1910:  103. 

1911:  83MyliusandHuttner.  Ir,Pt. 
1916:  72  Myliusand  Huttner. 
Cobalt  oxide. 

1799:  4 Brugnatelli. 

1896:  34  Hazen. 

Cocaine,  analysis  of  chloroplatinate. 

1910:  40  Nyman  and  Bjorksten. 
1917:  46b  D enigma. 

Coherer  action. 

1912:  134  Clay. 

Coinage. 

1828:  8. 

1860:  2 Jacobi. 

1872:  16  Jouglet. 

1877:  5 Karmarsch. 

Colloids  of  Pt  metals. 

1901:  28  Ernst. 

1901:  30  Schaer. 

1902:  42  Schaer. 

1902:  43  Gutbier. 

1902:  45  Price. 

1904:  19  Donau Gen. 

1904:  47  Castoro.  -Ir,  Os,  Pt,  Ru. 

1904:  48  Liebermann. 

1904:  49  Liebermann. 

1994:  50  Liebermann. 

1904:  51  Price  and  Friend. 

1904:  52  Plzak  and  Husek, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


507 


Colloids  of  Pt  metals — Continued. 

1904 : 53  Paal  and  Amberger, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1904:  54  Liebermann. 

1904:  55  Biltz. 

1905:  52  Senter. 

1905:  53  Senter. 

1905:  54  Senter. 

1905:  55  Sand Pd,  Pt. 

1905:  58  Paal  and  Amberger, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1905:  59  Gutbier  and  Hofmeier, 

Gen. 

1906:  52  Burton. 

1906:  53  Schneider  and  Just, 

Os,  Pt,  Ru. 

1906:  54  Svedberg. 

1906:  55  Svedberg. 

1907:  54  Paal  and  Amberger.  .Os. 
1907 : 56  Billitzer. 

1907:  57  Svedberg. 

1907:  58  Svedberg. 

1907 : 59  Svedberg. 

1907:  60  Svedberg. 

1907:  61  Bechold. 

1907:  62  Muller. 

1908:  35  Paal,  Gerum,  and  Roth, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  60  Freundlich. Gen. 

1908:  61  Bobertag,  Feist,  and 
Fischer. 

1908:  62  Teague  and  Buxton. 

1908:  63  Lebedew. 

1908:  64  Teletow. 

1909:  41  Paal,  Roth,  Gerum,  and 


Hartmann Pd,  Pt. 

1909:  65  Gutbier Gen. 

1909 : 71  Kernot  and  Arena Rh. 

1909 : 72  Spence. 

1909:  73  Spence. 

1909:  74  Rolla. 


1909:  75  Paal  and  Hartmann ..  Pd . 

1909:  76  Buckmaster Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  60  Wohler  and  Spengel. 

1910:  61  Paal  and  Hohenegger.Pd. 
1911:  88  PappadiL 
1911:  89  Thomae. 

1911:  90  Svedberg  and  Inouye. 

1911:  94  Lancien Rh. 

1912:  64  Skita  and  Meyer.. Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  68  Meyer Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  69  Briinjes Pd. 

1912:  76  Kelber and  Schwarz. . Pd. 
1912:  78  Wohl  and  Mylo Pd. 


Colloids  of  Pt  metals — Continued. 

1912:  116  Thiroloix  and  Langden, 

Pd. 

1913:  111  Stark Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  117  Farmer  and  Parker. 

1913:  120  Sieverts. 

1913:  121  Amberger Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  122  Paal  and  Oehme Pd. 

1913:  123  Wallach Pd. 

1913:  171  Kauffmann Pd. 

1913:  172  Kauffmann Pd. 

1913:  173  Gorn Pd. 

1914:  61  Burrell  and  Oberfell.  .Pd. 
1914:  73  Maclnnes. 

1914:  74  Dyer  and  Dole. 

1914:  75  Bassett. 

1914:  76  Groh. 

1914:  78  Paal Pd. 

1914:  80  Salkind  and  Pischt- 

schikoff Pd. 

1914:  85  Fischer  and  Hahn Pd . 

1914:  87  Willstatter  and  Sonnen- 

feld Os. 

1915:  59  Paal  and  Schwarz, 

Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1915:  62  Amberger Os. 

1915:  66  Paal  and  Biittner Pd. 

1915:  67  Paal  and  Hohenegger.Pd. 
1915:  68  Paal  and  Schwarz. 

1916:  33. 

1916:  59  Von  Veimarn Gen. 

1916:  64  Paal  and  Schwarz. 

1916:  65  Paal Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1916:  71  Bercelies. 

1916:  75  Korevaar Pd. 

1916:  82  Gutbier,  Huber,  and 

Kriiuter Pd. 

1916:  83  Gutbier  and  Wagner. 

1917:  77  Groil. 

1917 : 82  Paal,  Biehler,  and  Steyer, 

Ir. 

1917:  83  Harvey, 
physiologic  action  of  colloids. 

1907:  38  Field. 

1907:  63  Ascoli  and  Izar Pd. 

1907 : 64  Micheels  and  De  Heen. 
preparation  of. 

1898 : 40  Bredig. 

1898:  41  Bredig. 

1902:  44  Billitzer. 

1903:  40  Garbowski. 

1903:  41  Henrich. 

1905:  61  Kalle  & Co.  (pat.). . .Gen. 
1906:  51  Donau Pd. 


508 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Colloids  of  Pt  metals — Continued, 
preparation  of — continued. 

1907 : 60  Svedberg. 

1909:  66  Traube-Mengarini  and 
Scala. 

1909:  67  Traube-Mengarini  and 
Scala. 

1909:  68  Kernot  and  De  Simone, 

Pd.  Pt. 

1909:  69  Kernot  and  Arena Ir. 

1909:  70  Kernot Ir. 

1910:  58  Castoro Gen. 

1911:  81  Kalle  & Co.  (pat.). . .Gen. 
1911:  82  Kalle  & Co.  (pat.).. Gen. 
1912:  63  Skita  and  Meyer.. Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  121  Amberger Pd,  Pt, 

1913:  130  Kalle  & Co.  (pat.). Os.  Ru. 
1913:  130a  Kalle  & Co.  (pat,). Gen. 
1913:  174  Paal  and  Amberger 

(pat.) Gen. 

1913:  175  Paal  and  Amberger 

(pat.) Gen. 

1915:  63  Donau. 

1916:  60  Kalle  & Co.  (pat.). Pd.  Pt. 
1916:  61  Kalle  & Co.  (pat.), 

Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 
Colombia.  See  Occurrence;  Production. 
Color  printing  with  platinum  chloride. 
1834:  16  Kastner. 
theories. 

1905:  29  Biltz Ru. 

See  also  Halides. 

Columbite,  Pd  in. 

1905:  1 Headden. 

Combustion,  fractional,  with  Pd. 

1904:  43  Richardt. 
tubes  for. 

1876:  35  C.  J.  H.  W. 

1876:  36  Herman. 

1883:  28  Clemence. 

1888:  36  Dudley. 

Combustions.  See  Carbon. 

Commercial  metal. 

1900:  40  Hall. 

1910:  98  Walker  and  Smith er. 

1911:  114  Hillebrand,  Walked,  and 
Allen. 

1912:  145. 

1914:  123  Burgess  and  Sale. 

1915:  96  Burgess  and  Sale. 

1915:  97. 

1916:  98  Burgess. 


Compass  points  of  iridosmium. 

1841:  20  Johnson. 

Compensator  for  gas  analysis. 

1917:  123  Gregg. 

Complex  salts.  See  Dioxims;  Nitrites; 

Oxalates;  etc. 

Composite  metal. 

1912:  156  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  157  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  158  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  159  Eldred  (pat.). 
Compounds  of  iridium. 

1902:  5 Miolati  and  Gialdini. 
Compounds  with  nonmetals. 

1899:  49  Heraeus  (pat.) Gen. 

Compressibility. 

1904:  37  Buchanan. 

1907:  47  Richards Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  47  Griineisen Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  45  Griineisen. 

Concentration  apparatus  for  sulphuric 
acid. 

1866:  22  Scheurer-Kestner. 

1872:  12  Hasenclever. 

1875:  28  Scheurer-Kestner. 

1876:  40  Bode. 

1876:  41  Bode. 

1876:  44  Kessler. 

1876:  45  Zeman  and  Fischer. 

1876:  46  Bode. 

1876:  47  Lamy. 

1877:  33  Bode. 

1877:  34  Bode. 

1878:.  36  Kalbfleisch. 

1878:  39  Bode. 

1878:  40  Scheurer-Kestner. 

1880:  35  Scheurer-Kestner. 

1880:  36  Kuhlmann. 

1892:  49  Heraeus. 

1892:  51  Burgemeister. 

1892:  52  Weineck Ir,  Pt. 

1892:  54  Lunge. 

1893:  40  Siebert. 

1894:  32  Lunge. 

Concentration  of  ores. 

1911:  28. 

1913:  17  Duparc  and  Pina  de 
Rubies. 

Condensation  (surface)  of  gases  and  at- 
tendant phenomena.  See  also 
Hydrogen,  absorption  of;  etc. 
For  entries  after  1896,  see-Qatalytic 
action. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


509 


Condensation  (surface)  of  gases,  etc. — Con. 
general. 

1834:  19  Faraday. 

1858:  15  Phipson. 

1874:  27  Deville  and  Debray. 

1894:  35  Oailletet  and  Collardeau. 
1894:  36  Berthelot. 
iridium. 

1823:  9 Dulong  and  Thenard. 

1823:  11  Garden. 

1831:  11  Dobereiner. 

1831:  15  Dobereiner. 

1831:  16  Dobereiner. 

1883:  31  Hoppe-Seyler. 
palladium. 

1817:  10  Davy. 

1817:  11  Schiibler. 

1823:  9 Dulong  and  Thenard. 

1823:  18  Pleischl. 

1825:  19  Wohler. 

1826:  9 Miller. 

1868:  10  Graham. 

1869:  4 Graham. 

1869:  5 Graham. 

1869:  6 Wurtz. 

1869:  7 Bottger. 

1869:  8 Roberts. 

1869:  9 Dewar. 

1869:  10  Hofmann. 

1869:  30  Bottger. 

1873:  25  Bottger. 

1873:  26  Bottger. 

1873:  27  Coquillion. 

1875:  10  Smith. 

1875:  12  Troost  and  Hautefeuille. 
1875:  32  Coquillion. 

1876:  53  Coquillion. 

1876:  54  Coquillion. 

1877:  39  Tommasi. 

1877 : 40  Coquillion. 

1877:  41  Coquillion. 

1878:  46  Coquillion. 

1878:  52  Hoppe-Seyler. 

1878:  53  Gladstone  and  Tribe. 

1879:  27  Hempel. 

1879:  49  Gladstone  and  Tribe. 

1879:  50  Hoppe-Seyler. 

1879:  51  Koch. 

1881:  26  Tschirikoff. 

1881:  36  Baumann. 

1881:  40  Traube. 

1882:  41  Traube. 

1882:  42  Traube. 

1883:  30  Traube. 


Condensation  (surface)  of  gases,  etc. — Con. 
palladium — continued. 

1883:  31  Hoppe-Seyler. 

1883:  34  Fromme. 

1883:  39  Baumann. 

1887:  40  Kraut. 

1888:  30  Berliner. 

1889:  24  Traube. 

1889:  25  Hoppe-Seyler. 

1889:  26  Thoma. 

1891:  24  Neumann  and  Streintz. 
1894:  21  Phillips. 

1895:  35  Mond,  Ramsay,  and 
Shields, 
platinum. 

1817:  10  Davy. 

1817:  13  Murray. 

1818:  13  Sommerring. 

1818:  14  Erman. 

1818:  15  Gill. 

1818:  16  Davy. 

1818:  17. 

1819:  8 Gilbert. 

1822:  6 Dobereiner. 

1822:  7. 

1823:  6 Dobereiner. 

1823:  9 Dulong  and  Thenard. 

1823:  10  Dulong  and  Thenard. 
1823:  11  Garden. 

1823:  12  Gmelin. 

1823:  13  Gilbert,  Chladni,  and 
Daniell. 

1823:  14  Herapath. 

1823:  15  Karmarsch. 

1823:  16  Pfaff. 

1823:  17  Pleischl. 

1823:  19  Schweigger. 

1824:  3 Adie. 

1824:  4 Dana. 

1824:  5 Dobereiner. 

1824:  6 Dobereiner. 

1824:  8 Fyfe. 

1824:  9 Gilbert. 

1824:  10  Henry. 

1824:  11  Kastner. 

1824:  12  Osann. 

1824:  13  Schmidt. 

1824:  14  Turner. 

1824:  15. 

1825:  11  Gill. 

1825:  12  Bischof. 

1825:  13  Davy. 

1825:  14  Vogel. 

1825:  15  John. 


510 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Condensation  (surface)  of  gases,  etc. — Con. 
platinum — continued . 

1825:  16  Dulk. 

1825:  17. 

1825:  18  Stratingh. 

1826:  10  Dobereiner. 

1826:  13  Dobereiner. 

1826:  14  Miller. 

1828:  18  Erdmann. 

1829:  22  Liebig. 

1829:  24  Dobereiner. 

1829:  25  Graham. 

1831:  7 Becquerel. 

1831:  9 Dobereiner. 

1831:  10  Scliweigger-Seidel. 

1831:  11  Schweigger-Seidel. 

1831:  12  Dobereiner. 

1831:  13  Dobereiner. 

1831:  16  Dobereiner. 

1831:  18  Bottger. 

1831:  19  Schweigger. 

1831:  20  Hess. 

1831:  22  Merryweather. 

1831:  23  Hermbstiidt. 

1832:  9 Dobereiner. 

1832:  10  Dobereiner. 

1832:  12. 

1832:  13  Phillips. 

1832:  14. 

1833:  23  Bottger. 

1833:  24  Degen. 

1834:  20  Dobereiner. 

1834:  21  Dobereiner. 

1834:  22  Dobereiner. 

1834:  23  Dobereiner. 

1835:  21  Liebig. 

1835:  22  Artus. 

1835:  23  Hiinle. 

1835:  24  Henry. 

1836:  10  Henry. 

1836:  11  Mohr. 

1836:  12  Degen. 

1836:  13  Degen. 

1838:  17  Kuhlmann. 

1838:  18  Musler. 

1839:  7 Kuhlmann. 

1839:  8 Martens. 

1839:  9 Grove. 

1839:  10  Grove. 

1839:  12  Schonbein. 

1843:  10  Bottger. 

1843:  11  Dobereiner. 

1843:  12  Dobereiner. 

1843:  13  Reiset  and  Millon. 


Condensation  (surface)  of  gases,  etc. — Con. 
platinum — continued. 

1843:  14  Schonbein. 

1844:  17  Dobereiner. 

1844:  20  Schonbein. 

1845:  16  Dobereiner. 

1845:  17  Schonbein. 

1845:  18  Schrotter. 

1849:  12  Field. 

1850:  15  Wagner. 

1853:  11  Magnus. 

1855:  23  Baudrimont. 

1857:  20  Schonbein. 

1858:  16  Schonbein. 

1859:  26  Schonbein. 

1859:  27  Schonbein. 

1861:  19  St.-Edme. 

1861:  21  Gorup-Besanez. 

1862:  25  Wiederholt. 

1865:  17  Kraut. 

1865:  18  Sell. 

1866:  14  Bottger. 

1866:  26  Wilde. 

1867:  19  Merz. 

1867:  20  Artus. 

1868:  10  Graham. 

1870:  35  Skey. 

1871:  25  Klinkerfues. 

1871 : 26  Baudrimont. 

1873:  24  Gruel. 

1873:  27  Coquillion. 

1873:  29  Favre. 

1874:  11  Smith. 

1874:  37  Wilde. 

1874:  39  Traube. 

1875:  10  Smith. 

1875:  25  Fairley. 

1875:  32  Coquillion. 

1876:  27  Wohler. 

1876:  57  Meyer. 

1876:  58  Meyer. 

1876:  59  Dumas. 

1878:  46  Coquillion. 

1878:  52  Hoppe-Seyler. 

1878:  53  Gladstone  and  Tribe. 
1879:  49  Gladstone  and  Tribe. 
1879:  51  Koch. 

1882:  39  Berthelot. 

1882:  42  Traube. 

1883:  32  Chappuis. 

1883:  34  Fromme. 

1884:  12  Yalentini. 

1884:  13  Zulkowsky  and  Lepez. 
1885:  44  Bellamy. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


511 


i Condensation  (surface)  of  gases,  etc. — Con. 
platinu  m — continued . 

1886:  27  Grimaux. 

1886:  28  Ihmori. 

1886:  32  Warburg  and  Ihmoii. 
1887:  20  Cooke. 

1887:  40  Kraut. 

1887:  41  Ihmori. 

1887:  54  Wright  and  Thompson. 
1888:  29  Hodgkinson  and  Lowndes 
1888:  30  Berliner. 

1889:  21  Jahn. 

1889:  24  Traube. 

1889:  27  Ilosvay  de  N.  Ilosva. 

1889:  29  Fuchs. 

1890:  31  Engel. 

1890:  33  Loew. 

1890:  34  Loew. 

1890:  59  Elster  and  Geitel. 

1891:  24  Neumann  and  Streintz. 
1891:  38  Warren. 

1892:  lOWilm. 

1892:  61  Parmentier. 

1895:  35  Mond,  Ramsay,  and 
Shields, 
rhodium. 

1881:  5 Wilm. 

1883:  31  Hoppe-Seyler. 
Conductivity,  electric  (pressed  powders). 
1900:  37  Streintz. 

See  also  Resistance, 
electrolytic. 

1901:  7 Miolati  and  Mascetti. 

1909:  20  Archibald  and  Patrick. 
1912:  47  Archibald  and  Patrick. 
1913:  41  Dhar. 

1913:  42  Dhar  and  Bhattacharyya. 
•heat. 

1828:  25  Fischer. 

1830:  19  Fischer. 

1841 : 18  Fischer. 

1853:  12'Wiedermann  and  Franz. 
1858 : 18  Crace-Cal  vert  and  Johnson . 
1882:  43  Poloni. 

1894:  37. 

1915:  85  Meissner. 

Conductor  of  Pt  wire. 

1875:  33  Champion,  Pellet,  and 
Grenier. 

Conductors,  sealing  in  glass. 

1913:  168a  Anderson. 

Coniin.  See  Bases. 

Constitution  of  inorganic  compounds. 
1869:  16a  Blomstrand. 

1897:  11  Werner. 


Constitution  of  inorganic  compounds — 


Continued. 

1897:  15  Jorgensen Pt,  Rh. 

1897:  16  Cossa. 

1897:  17  Schou. 

1898:  19  Werner. 

1898:  20  Kurnakow Pd,  Pt 

1898:  26  Reizenstein Gen 

1898:  28  Jorgensen Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 

1899:  20  Werner. 


1899:  22  Werner  and  Grebe. 

1900:  23  Jorgensen. 

1901:  13  Werner  and  Herty. 

1901:  18  Werner  and  Dinklage.Os. 
1902:  21  Werner. 

1902:  22  Klason. 

1904:  15  Klason. 

1906:  18  Jorgensen. 

1907:  21  Tschugaeff Pd,  Pt. 

1908:  24  Briggs. 

1908:  25  Friend. 

1908:  43  Wyrouboff. 

1908:  44  Peters. 

1913:  41  Dhar. 

Consular  notes. 

1899:  3. 

Contact  mass. 

1901:  3 Majert. 

1902:  4 FarbwerkeM.  Lucius  (pat.). 
1902:  38  Trillat. 

1903:  4 Badische  Anilin  u.  Soda 
Fabrik  (pat.). 

1904:  3 Badische  Anilin  u.  Soda 
Fabrik  (pat.). 

1906:  42  Wohler,  Foss,  and  Pliid- 

demann Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  52  Schick  (pat.). 

1910:  106  Neumann  (pat.). 

1912:  113  Wieland Pd. 

1916:  81  Sulzberger  (pat.). 

1917:  79  Curphey. 

1917:  110b  Nishida  (pat.). 

See  also  Analysis. 

Contact  points. 

1915:  95a  Heyl Pd. 

1915:  102  Eldred  (pat.). 

1916:  103. 

1917:  117  Haughton  and  Hanson. 
Copper,  platinized  in  Marsh’s  apparatus. 
1906:  41  De  Vamossy. 
refining,  Pt  recovery. 

1917:  10  Addicks Pd,  Pt. 

salts,  oxidation  by  Pt. 

1901:  30  Schaer. 
silicide  of  copper  and  Pt. 

1907:  1G  Yigouroux. 


512 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Copper — Continued . 
thiosulphate,  decomposition  by  Pt. 

1899:  35  Engel. 

See  also  Alloys. 

Corbino  effect. 

1914:  106  Adams  and  Chapman. 
Corpuscles,  separation  of,  in  chemical 
reactions. 

1913:  154  Tanatar  and  Bourkser. 
Corrosion. 

electrolytic,  by  acids. 

1911:  111  White Pd. 

1917:  57  Watts  and  Whipple. 
Counterfeit  Pt  coin. 

1912:  162  Shrewsbury. 

Couples. 

1897:  41  Skey. 

Crawford  Bay,  B.  C.  See  Occurrence. 
Critical  temperature. 

1887:  17  Guldberg Pd.  Pt. 

Crooke’s  dark  space. 

1912:  135  Aston. 

Crucibles. 

1786:  1 DeMorveau. 

1787 : 1 De  Morveau. 

1787 : 2 De  Morveau. 

1802:  6 C'henivix. 

1832:  17  Berzelius. 

1839:  5 Dobereiner. 

1855:  21  Vogel  and  Reischauer. 
1863:  16  Hager. 

1865:  10  Stahlschmidt,  Sy,  and 
Wagner. 

1866:  21  Wittstein. 

1868:  12  Vogel. 

1873:  16  Stolba. 

1873:  17  Mohr. 

1874:  33  Smith. 

1878:  33  Gooch. 

1888 : 39  Morse  and  Burton. 

1889:  22  VonJiiptner. 

1891:  36  Warren. 

1892:  50  Heraeus. 

1894:  30  Petrzilka. 

1896:  37a  Fairley. 

1899:  45  Shimer. 

1903:  51  Stehman. 

1904:  64  Siebert. 

1908:  82  Crookes Ir. 

1909:  48  DeVries. 

1909:  99  Snelling. 

1909:  100  Swett. 

1910:  98  Walker  and  Smither. 


Crucibles — Continued. 

1910:  104  Rieke  and  Endell. 

1911:  114  Hillebrand,  "Walker,  and 
Allen. 

1911:  115  Thornton. 

1911:  121. 

1913:  165  Wysor. 

1913:  166. 

1913:  176  Manzoff. 

1914:  121. 

1917:  132. 
cleaning  of. 

1846:  18  Tonnelier. 

1860:  19  Erdmann. 

1860:  20  F.  G. 

1866:  4 Sonstadt. 

1870:  23  Stolba. 

1876:  39  Stolba. 
coloration  of  melt  by  Ru. 

1913:  78  Auer  von  Welsbach. 
loss  of  weight. 

1880:  34  Beilstein. 

1888:  38  Vieth. 
mending  crucibles. 

1878:  34  Garside. 

1884:  20  Seaman. 

1885:  28  Pratt. 

•1885:  29  G.  T.  H. 

1889:  40  Pratt, 

removing  melt  from  crucibles. 

1876:  38  Stockmann. 

1888 : 34  De  Koninck. 

1905:  76  Bender. 

See  also  Disintegration. 

Crystallized  Pt, 

1 907 : 40  Limmer. 

Crystallography. 

1843:  7 Berzelius, 
iridium. 

1841:  5 Rose. 

1849:  10  Rose. 

1853:  4 Nickles. 

1866:  3 Cloez. 

1893:  27  Prinz. 
osmiridium  and  iridosmium. 

1828:  6 Breithaupt, 

1830:  3 Marx. 

1833:  10  Breithaupt. 

1833:  11  Breithaupt. 

1840:  1 Breithaupt. 

1882:  1 Von  Lasaulx. 
osmium. 

1849:  10  Rose. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


513 


Crystallography — Continued, 
palladium. 

1842:  7 Rose. 

1849:  10  Rose. 

1853:  4 Nickles. 

1856:  13  Keferstein. 
platinum. 

1775:  1 De  Morveau. 

1820:  5 Sowerby. 

1830:  3 Marx. 

1840:  2 Jacquelain. 

1851:  4 Ebelmen. 

1855:  2 Mallet. 

1857:  5 Kottig. 

1858:  10  Nogues. 

1859:  5 Soreze. 

1860:  1 Cotta. 

1862:  5 Phipson. 

1862:  6 Noble. 

1879 : 6 Deville  and  Debray. 
1897 : 26  Liversidge. 

1902:  53  Campbell, 
ruthenium  (synthetic  laurite). 
1879:  6 Deville  and  Debray. 


bases. 

1857:  11  Sella. 

1895:  16  Palmaer Ir. 

1895:  16a  Palmaer Ir. 

1895:  19a  Hamberg Ir. 

1895:  32  Sella. 

1897:  27  Backstrom Ir. 

1913:  98  Fersmann. 
cyanides. 

1856:  13  Keferstein Pd. 


1857 : 13  Grailich  and  Lang. 

1857:  14  Descloizeaux. 

1864:  11  Ditscheiner. 

1866:  28  Lang. 

1872:  6 Cleve  and  Hoeglund. 

1874:  31  Topsoe. 

1879:  31  Lommel. 

1880:  11  Scholtz. 

1895:  31  Dufet Os,  Ru. 

1898:  25  Ilowe  and  Campbell. Ru. 
1911:  77  Baumhauer. 

1913:  97  Tschirwinski. 
halogen  salts. 

iridium  and  rhodium. 

1856:  13  Keferstein. 

1875:  14  Von  Lasaulx. 

1890:  37  Dufet. 

1912:  48  Duffour. 
palladium. 

1869:  11  Topsoe. 

109733.° — 19 — Bull.  G94 33 


Crystallography — Continued . 
halogen  salts — continued, 
palladium — continued. 

1895:  31a  Dufet. 

1901:  23  Sachs. 

1910:  43  Burdakoff. 
platinum. 

1854:  15  Schabus. 

1855:  16  Weltzien. 

1855:  17  Marignac. 

1857 : 14  Descloizeaux. 

1861:  2 Sella. 

| 1868:  8 Topsoe. 

1871:  19  Topsoe  and  Christiansen. 
1873:  5 Marignac. 

1874:  31  Topsoe. 

1874:  41  Topsoe. 

1877:  27  Schimper. 

1882:  21  Topsoe. 

1888:  9 Weibull. 

1911:  76  Ries. 
ruthenium. 

1857 : 12  Senarmont. 

1890:  36  Dufet. 

1894:  11  Clark. 

1901:  23  Sachs Os. 

nitrites. 

1879:  12  Groth  and  Nilson. 

1879:  30  Topsoe. 

1880:  33  Groth. 

1902:  32  Dufet. 
osmates. 

1895:  31a  Dufet. 

1902:  32  Dufet. 
oxalates. 

1890:  36  Dufet. 

1902:  32  Dufet. 
ruthenates. 

1890:  35  Dufet. 
selenocyanates. 

1912:  99  Billows, 
thiocyanates. 

1856:  13  Keferstein. 

1877:  19  Wyrouboff. 

1912:  98  Billows. 

Cup  for  voltameter. 

1917:  120  Oblata. 

Cupellation.  See  Analysis. 

Current  in  Pt-Pt  black  cell. 

1908:  67  Martini. 

Cyanides. 

general. 

1860:  14  Martius. 

1893:  22  Werner. 


514 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Cyanides — Continued, 
iridium. 

1834:  12a  Booth. 

1837:  7 Rammelsberg. 

1852:  10  Haidinger. 

3907:  13  Rimbach  and  Korten. 
osmium. 

1895:  31  Dufet. 

1901 : 18  Werner  and  Dinklage. 
palladium. 

1822:  2 Gmelin  and  Wohler. 
1837:  7 Rammelsberg. 

1852:  10  Haidinger. 

1853:  2 Bechamp. 

1856:  13  Keferstein. 

1866:  11  Rossler. 

1869:  15  Weselsky. 
platinum. 

1822:  2 Gmelin  and  W’ohler. 
1836:  4 Dobereiner. 

1 837 : 7 Rammelsberg. 

1842:  8 Kane. 

1842:  10  Knop. 

1842:  16  Haidlen  and  Fresenius. 
1847:  14  Quadrat. 

1847 : . 15  Rammelsberg. 

1847:  16  Laurent. 

1847:  17  Haidinger. 

1847:  18  Haidinger. 

1848:  9 Baumert. 

1849:  7 Haidinger. 

1850:  9 Schabus. 

1850:  16  Brewster. 

1852:  10  Haidinger. 

1853:  9 Stokes. 

1853:  10  Stokes. 

1855:  12  SchafaKk. 

1855:  13  Bottger. 

1855:  14  Stokes. 

1855:  20  Haidinger. 

1856:  7 Weselsky. 

1857:  8 Schwarzenbach. 

1857:  13  Grailich  and  Lang. 
1857:  14  Descloizeaux. 

1858:  17  Grailich. 

1859:  12  Knop. 

1859:  13  Werther. 

1859:  14  Schwarzenbach. 

1859:  18  Beequerel. 

1859:  19  Greiss. 

I860:  12  Hadow. 

1860:  13  Czudnowicz. 

1860:  16  Yon  Rath. 

1861:  12  Lange. 


Cyanides — Continued . 
platinum — continued. 

1863:  6 Debus, 
f 1863:  7 Delffs. 

1863:  18  Quincke. 

1864:  11  Ditscheiner. 

1865:  9 Yan  der  Burg. 

1866:  11  Rossler. 

1866:  28  Lang. 

1867:  8 Carstanjen. 

1868:  3 Diakonow. 

1869:  15  Weselsky. 

1869:  17  Blomstrand. 

1869:  18  Blomstrand. 

1870:  19  Preiss. 

1870:  29  Schoras. 

1871:  9 Friswell. 

1871:  10  Toczynski. 

1872:  6 Cleve  and  Hoeglund. 

1872:  7 Bolton. 

1873:  li  Holst, 

1874:  18  Cleve. 

1874:  24  Jolin. 

1874:  31  Topsoe. 

1874:  40  Hagenbach-Bischoff. 

1875:  19  Atterberg. 

1875:  20  Vidau. 

1877 : 18  Friswell  and  Greenaway. 
1878:  17  Bertin. 

1879:  31  Lommel. 

1880:  11  Scholtz. 

1880:  12  Richard  and  Bertrand. 
1880:  30  Wiedemann. 

1880:  31  Lommel. 

1880:  32  Lommel. 

1881:  30  Lommel. 

1883:  12  Cleve. 

1S83:  19  Ivonig. 

1885:  3 Cleve. 

1886:  6 Wilm. 

1886:  7 Wilm. 

1886:  13  Lehmann. 

1887:  9 Wilm. 

1887:  39  Himly,  Leiser,  and  Bard- 
tholdt. 

1888:  16  Wilm. 

1888:  17  Freund. 

1888:  25  Walden. 

1888:  26  Rudorff. 

1889:  13  Wrilm. 

1S93:  26  Wilm. 

1895:  13  Warner. 

1895:  41  Macintyre. 

1896:  21  Schertel. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


515 


Cyanides — Continued, 
platinum — continued . 

1896:  41  Jackson. 

1897:  14  Buxhoevden  and  Tam- 
mann. 

1899:  18  Bergsoe. 

1899:  40  Hebert  and  Beynaud. 
1899:  41  Hebert  and  Reynaud. 
1900:  11  Benedicks. 

1900:  21  Miolati  and  Bellucci. 

1901:  12  Renz. 

1902:  11  Cleve. 

1902:  19  Baeyer  and  Villiger. 

1903:  22  Muller. 

1904:  13  Brocket  and  Petit. 

1905:  27  Levy. 

1905:  42  Pochettino. 

1906:  56  Borissow. 

1907:  17  Levy. 

1907:  18  Milbauer. 

1907:  19  Hofmann  and  Bugge. 

1907 : 41  Baumhauer. 

1907:  42  Baumhauer. 

1908:  28  Levy. 

1908:  29  Levy. 

1909:  34  Reynolds. 

1910:  25  Crookes. 

1911:  42  Briggs. 

1911:  43  Jantsch  and  Ohl. 

1911:  78  Ruff  and  Goecke. 

1911:  104  Feytis. 

1912:  50  Levy. 

1912:  51  Orloff. 

1912:  81  Gaze. 

1912:  100  Beuel. 

1913:  97  Tschirwinski. 

1914:  66  Wick. 

1914:  67  Von  Hauer  and  Von 
Kowalski . 

1917:  49  Bennett, 
rhodium. 

1900:  20  Leidie. 
ruthenium. 

1895:  31  Dufet. 

1896:  22  Howe. 

1898:  25  Howe  and  Campbell. 

1914:  67  Von  Hauer  and  Von 
Kowalski. 

Cyanogen,  synthesis  of. 

1915:  61  Beindl lr,  Pd,  Rh. 


D. 


Davyum. 

1877:  3 Kern. 

1877:  4 Allen. 

1898:  1 Mallet. 

Decomposition  of  Pt  by  electricity. 

1907:  4 Gross. 

Density.  See  Specific  gravity. 

Density  determination  of  gases. 

1917:  91  Edwards. 

Dental  pins,  substitute  for  Pt. 

1916:  102  Electrometals  Products 
Co.  (pat.). 

Deposition,  electrolytic. 

1899:  31  Cowper-Coles Pd. 

See  also  Analysis;  Electroplating, 
on  glass. 

1828:  18  Erdmann,. 

1828:  22  Schweigger. 

1829:  24  Dobereiner. 

1853:  7 Bottger. 

1859:  22  Dullo. 

1859:  23  Eisner. 

1859:  24  Vasserot Pd,  Pt. 

1865:  12  Salvetat. 

1865:  13  Dode. 

1865:  14. 


1865:  15  Schwarz. 

1865:  16  Weiskopf. 

1867 : 18  Bottger. 

1869:  22  Bottger. 

1869:  25  Hoffman. 

1870:  27  Jouglet. 

1873:  19  Dode. 

1873:  20  Rontgen. 

1877:  32  Wright. 

1887:  34. 

1888:  44  Von  Uljanin. 

1889:  23. 

Detection.  See  Analysis. 

Detector  for  gases. 

1917:  122  Philip  and  Steele  (pat.). 

Pd,  Pt. 


Diamin  bases.  See  Bases. 
Dicyandiamidin  compounds,  action  on. 
1910:  27  Grossmann  and  Schuck. 


Pd,  Pt. 


Dicyclopentad  iene. 

1908:  32  Hofmann  and  Narbutt, 


516 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Diffusion  of  hydrogen  through  Pt. 
1863  : 8 Matteucci. 

1863:  9 Deville  and  Debray. 
1866:  25  Graham. 

1876:  61  Helmholtz  and  Root. 


1894:  34  Ramsay Pd. 

1895:  34  Campbell Pd. 

1901 : 24  Winkelmann Pd . 

1902:  35  Winkelmann. 

1904:  17  St.  Schmidt Pd. 

1904:  40  Richardson. 


1904:  41  Richardson,  Nichol,  and 
Parnell. 

1905:  48  Richardson Pd. 


1905:  49  Winkelmann Pd. 

1906:  39  Winkelmann. 

1906:  40  Lessing Pd. 

1907:  50  Sieverts. 

1908:  53  Tsakalotos Pd. 

1915:  58  Holt Pd. 


of  ions  in  metals. 

1909:  57  Moreau, 
of  light. 

1912:  33  Drecq. 

Digestor. 

1874:  34  Carmichael. 
Dimethylglyoxim  compounds. 

1912:  87  Duparc Pd. 

1912:  88  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  89  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  62  Tschugaeff  and  Lebe- 
dinski  Rh. 

1913:  88  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Gen. 

1913:  89  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Pd. 

1913:  90  Wunder  and  Thuringer, 

Gen. 

1915:  52  Gutbier  and  Fellner.  .Pd. 
Dioxim  compounds. 

1905:  28  Tschugaeff Pd,Pt. 

1906:  23  Tschugaeff Pd.  Pt. 

Diphenylcarbohydrazid. 

1914:  62  Brandt. 

Discovery. 

iridium. 

1803:  9 Fourcroy  and  Yauquelin. 
1803:  10  Collet-Descotils. 

1804:  8 Fourcroy  and  Yauquelin. 
1804:  12  Tennant. 

1805:  9 Gilbert. 

1805:  10  Gilbert. 

1805:  11  Gehlen. 


! Discovery — Continued, 
osmium. 

1804:  12  Tennant. 

1805:  9 Gilbert, 

1805:  10  Gilbert, 

1805:  11  Gehlen. 
palladium. 

1803:  1 Chenivix. 

1803:  2 Chenivix. 

1803:  3 Chenivix. 

1803:  4. 

1803:  5. 

1803:  6 Richter. 

1803:  7 Rose  and  Gehlen. 
1803:  8 Yauquelin. 

1804:  1 Chenivix. 

1804:  2 Chenivix. 

1804:  3. 

1804:  4 Hume. 

1804:  5 Trommsdorff. 
1804:  6 Mussin-Puschkin. 
1804:  7 Mussin-Puschkin. 
1805:  2 Wollaston. 

1805:  3 Wollaston. 

1805:  4. 

1S05:  5 Berthollet. 

1805:  9 Gilbert, 

1805:  11  Gehlen. 

1805:  12  Gehlen. 

1806:  5 Gilbert, 
platinum. 

1751:  1 Watson. 

1755:  1 Lewis. 

1758:  1 M 

1805:  6 Collet-Descotils. 
1805:  7 Tilloch. 

1880:  1 Koppen. 
rhodium. 

1804:  9 Fourcroy. 

1804:  10  Fourcroy. 

1804:  11  Collet-Descotils. 
1804:  13  Wollaston. 

1805:  6 Collet-Descotils. 
1805:  7 Tilloch. 

1805:  9 Gilbert, 

1805:  11  Gehlen. 
ruthenium. 

1844:  4 Claus. 

1844:  5 Claus. 

1845:  5 Claus. 

1845:  6 Osann. 

1845:  7 Osann. 

1845:  8 Claus. 

1845:  9 Fremy. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


517 


Dishes. 

1902:  55  Hebebrand. 

1916:  106  Greenwood Sub. 

1916:  107  Bodenstein. 

1917:  108  Lehner  and  Merrill. 
Disintegration, 
crucibles. 

1902:  56  Heraeus. 

1902:  61  Hartley. 

1907:  89  Heraeus  and  Geibel. 
electrodes. 

1902:  51  Haber  and  Sack. 

1914:  70  Tyndall  and  Hughes. 


high  temperature. 

1905:  47  Emich Ir. 

1908:  52  Einich Ir. 

1913:  102  Roberts Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 


1913:  103  Harker  and  Kaye.Ir,  Pt. 
See  also  Dusting. 

Dispersion,  in  cyanoplatinites. 

1907:  42  Baumhauer. 

1915:  54  Bruhat Ir. 

See  also  Optical  constants;  Spectrum. 
Dispersoids.  See  Colloids. 

Dissociation,  chloroplatinates. 

1898:  15  Sonstadt. 
oxides. 

1908 : 12  Wohler  and  Witzmann . Ir. 
1908:  69  Haber. 

1909:  10  Wohler  and  Frey. 
Distribution  in  nature. 

1902:  1 Kemp. 

Dithionat.es  of  ruthenium. 

1900:  18  Antony  and  Lucchesi. 
1902:  16  Meyer. 

Double  refraction  of  cyanoplatinites. 

1907:  42  Baumhauer. 

Dredging  for  Pt. 

1917:  8 Neill. 

Dunite. 

1910:  4 Duparc  and  Pamfil. 

1911:  13  De  Rubies. 

1911:  14  Duparc  and  Holtz. 
Durability  of  Ptlr  vessels. 

1896:  37a  Fairley. 

Dusting  of  metals. 

1902:  33  Holborn  and  Henning, 

Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 

1903:  37  Holborn  and  Austin, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 


1905:  47  Emich Ir. 

1908:  52  Emich Ir. 


1908:  68  Kohlsoh utter  and  Gold- 
schmidt. 


Dusting  of  metals — Continued. 

1912:  104  Rother Ir. 

1913:  133  Bergholm. 

1915:  41a  Gehrcke  and  Janicki. 

E. 

Egypt.  See  Occurrence. 

Eighth  group.  See  Periodic  system. 
Elastic  double  layer  on  metals. 

1913:  158  Seeliger. 

Elasticity. 

1844:  21  Wertheim.. Pd,  Pt. 

1852:  13  Kupffer. 

1854:  17  Kupffer. 

1865:  19  Edlund. 

1876:  64  Pisati. 

1877:  48  Gesechus. 

1887:  42  Bosanquet. 

1888:  47  Rehkuh. 

1907:  46  Griineisen.Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 


1912:  106  Johnston Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  140  Sieg Ir,  Pt. 


1915:  56  Koch  and  Dannecker, 
Pd,  Pt. 

Electric  conductivity.  See  Resistance, 
furnace.  See  Resistance  furnace, 
light.  See  Filament;  Lamp, 
oscillation. 

1890:  61  Argyropoulos. 
properties. 

1804:  18  Berthollet. 

1816:  3 Dessaignes. 

1911:  106  Broniewski  and  Hack- 
spill Ir,  Rh. 

1913:  156  Hackspill  and  Broniew- 
ski  Ir,  Rh. 

1915:  41  Hoffman  and  Schulze, 
resonance. 

1892:  66  Bjerknes, 
wire  for  light. 

1899:  47  Merck Os. 

Electricity,  frictional. 

1915:  91  Jones. 

Electrodes,  for  analysis. 

1899:  33  Winkler. 

1902:  59  Krause. 


1903:  33  Foerster Ir,  Pt. 

1914:  134  Barnebey Sub. 


1915:  104  Guzman  and  Ulzurrum, 

Sub. 

1915:  105  Guzman  and  Alemany, 

Sub. 

1917:  109  Jones. 


518 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Electrodes — Continued, 
for  analysis  — continued. 

1917:  133  Gooch  and  Kobayashi. 
1917 : 134  Gooch  and  Kobayashi. 

1917:  135  Gewecke Sub. 

1917:  136  Grower. 

1917:  137  Guzman  and  Poch. 
capacity  for  polarization. 

1897:  32  Gordon. 

See  also  Polarization, 
depolarization. 

1897:  33  Klein, 
general. 

1879:  15  Drechsel. 

1881:  39  Streintz. 

1883:  33  Bartoli  and  Papasogli. 

1884:  15  Drechsel... Pd,  Pt. 

1884:  16  Bartoli  and  Papasogli. 
1886:  36  Drechsel. 

1888:  60  Wiedmann  and  Ebert. 

1902:  58  Foerster Ir,  Pt. 

1902:  59  Krause. 

1903:  33  Foerster. Ir,  Pt. 

1904:  65  Rothmund  and  Lessing. 
1905:  79  Luther  and  Stuer.  .Ir,  Pt. 
1906:  66  Dember. 

1907:  72  Guye  and  Zabrikow, 


Pd,  Pt. 

1907:  77  Abegg  (pat.) Ir,  Pt. 

1908  : 74  Milner. 

1908:  77  Brunner. 

1909:  89  Foerster .Ir,  Pt. 


1909:  90  Lorenz  and  Lauber. 

1909:  91  Lorenz  and  Spielmann. 
1909:  92  Pfleiderer. 

1911:  117  Yon  Liebermann. 

1912:  92  Gooch  and  Burdick. 

1917 : 95  Washburn. 

1917:  110  Pagliani. 

1917:  110a  Kawakita  and  Imowo 
(pat.). 

1917:  111  Sanders Pd,  Rh. 

1917:  112  Maxted. 
hydrogen  electrode. 

1907:  78  Lorenz  and  Mohn. 
influence  of  material  on  sparks. 

1913:  159  Taege. 
manufacture. 

1001:  37  Heraeus  (pat.). 

1909:  105  Heraeus  (pat.), 
oxygen  electrode. 

1909:  90  Lorenz  and  Lauber. 

1909:  91  Lorenz  and  Spielmann. 
1910:  82  Grube. 


Electrodes — Continued, 
platiniridium,  resistance  of. 

1902:  49  Bran. 

1902:  50  Denso, 
platinized  electrodes. 

1902:  47  Foerster  and  Friessner. 
1902:  48  Foerster  and  Muller. 

1906:  73  Geibel. 

1913:  178  Stevens  (pat.). 

1913:  179  Stevens  (pat.) Ir. 

platinum  sulphide  electrodes. 

1908:  75  Wigand. 
solubility. 

1903:  48  Luther  and  Brislee.lr,  Pt. 
1909:  93  Schulte. 

1917.:  58  Muller. 

use. 

1898:  43  Haber Ir.  Pt. 

1899:  33  Winkler. 

Electrolysis. 

1878:  31  Hittorf. 

1878:  32  Morges. 

1884:  10  Raoult. 

1886:  12  Foussereau Pt,  Rh. 

1886:  13  Lehmann. 

1887 : 52  Miesler. 

1888:  24  Hampe Gen. 

1888:  25  Walden. 

1888:  26  Rudorff. 

1889:  19  Ostwald. 

1894:  24  Mylius  and  Fromm.. Gen. 
1898:  17  Kohlrausch. 

1898:  23  Howe  and  O’Neal. 

1899:  10  Hittorf  and  Salkowski. 
1899:  11  Dittenberger  and  Dietz. 
See  also  Deposition;  Oxidation;  Re- 
duction. 

osmium  tetroxide. 

1876:  60  Bleekrode. 

1878:  31  Hittorf. 

Electrolytes.  See  Solubility  in. 
Electromers. 

1917:  55  Falk  and  Nelson. 
Electromotive  force. 

1823:  23  Becquerel. 

1826:  16  Marianini. 

1838.:  19  Schonbein. 

1838:  20  Schonbein. 

1840:  13  Jacobi. 

1840:  14  Smee. 

1841:  21  Jacobi. 

1841:  22  Poggendorff. 

1845:  21  Poggendorff Pd,  Pt. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


519 


Electromotive  force — Continued. 


1851:  13  Becquerel. 

1864:  15  Raoult. 

1869:  32  Gaugain. 

1869:  33  Villari Pd. 

1869:  34  Poggendorff Pd. 

1870:  36  Skey. 

1870:  38  Skey. 

1870:  39  Edlund Pd,  Pt. 

1871:  27  Skey. 

1872:  22  Gaugain. 

1873:  28  Yoller. 

1879:  52  Gore Gen. 

1882:  44  Braun. 

1882:  45  Goossens. 

1883:  34  Fromme Pd,  Pt. 

1883:  35  Hankel. 

1883:  36  Krouchkoll. 

1883:  37  Becquerel. 

18.84:  31  Macfarlane. 


1885:  42  Konowalow. 

1886:  37  Gautier. 

1886:  38  Case. 

1887:  52  Miesler. 

1888:  55  Barus. 

1888:  58  Exner  and  Turner. 


1888:  59  Gore. 

1893:  42  Paschen. 

1894:  40  Neumann Pd,  Pt. 

1895:  36  Engel. 

1906:  48  Bringhenti Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  82  Grube. 

1917:  119  Gunther. 

Electron  atmosphere  of  metals. 

1913:  157  Rother Ir. 

Electroplating. 

1862:  16  Becquerel  and  Becquerel. 
1886:  22  Thoms. 

1887:  33  Dudley Ir. 

1887:  35  Bright  Plating  Co.  (pat.). 
1888:  42  Thompson. 

1890:  43  Wahl. 

1893:  39  Dudley Ir. 


Electrum. 

1790:  1 Cortinovis. 

Emanations  from  Pt. 

1903:  36  Beilby. 

Embargo,  British,  on  Pt. 

1916:  32. 

Emission,  by  alpha-rays. 

1912:  138  Bumstead  and  McGou- 
gan. 

1917:  97  Cheney. 


Emission — Continued, 
electric,  from  hot  Pt. 

1888:  61  Nahrwold. 

1905:  64  Richardson. 

1905:  65  Richardson. 

1906:  59  Richardson. 

1906:  60  Richardson. 

1907:  67  Deininger. 

1907:  68  Martyn. 

1908:  70  Richardson. 

1908:  71  Richardson. 

1908:  72  Wilson. 

1908:  73  Rubens  and  Hagen. 

1909:  80  Gill Pd. 

1909:  84  Wilson. 

1909:  85  Brown. 

1909:  86  Thomson. 

1909:  87  Hagens  and  Rubens. 

1910:  84  Richardson  and  Cooke. 
1910:  85  Richardson  and  Hulbirt. 
1911:  107  Wilson. 

1911:  109  Richardson  and  Cooke, 

Pd. 

1912:  131Weissman. 

1912:  132  Grieb. 

1312:  133  Pomeroy. 

1913:  102  Roberts Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  103  Harker  and  Kaye.  Ir,  Pt. 
1913:  150  Horton. 

1913:  151  Sheard  and  Woodbury. 
1913:  152  Fredenhagen. 

1913:  153  Owen  and  Halsall, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  155  Cooke  and  Richardson, 
Os,  Pt. 

1914:  112  Richardson. 

1914:  113  Sheard. 

1914:  114  Campbell. 

1915 : 92  Burgess  and  Waltenberg. 
1915:  93  Foote. 

1915:  94  Horton. 

1915:  95  Richardson. 

1916:  97  Richardson  and  Sheard. 
1917:  101  Worthing. 

See  also  Photo-electric  effect, 
light. 

1912:  120  Harwood  and  Petavel. 
Entropy,  change  of, 

1899:  19  Matignon Pd. 

Enzyme  action,  similarity  to  catalysis. 

1906:  50  Neilson. 

Enzymes,  action  of  salts  on. 

1910:  16  Gerber. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


520 

Enzymes,  action  of  salts  on — Continued . 
1910:  17  Gerber. 

1910:  18  Gerber Pd. 

1910:  19  Gerber Ir. 

1910:  20  Gerber Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Errors  in  Pt  assay. 

1913:  81  St.  Ranier. 

Estimation.  See  Analysis. 

Ether,  use  in  separations. 

1911:  66  Mylius  and  Hiittner. 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1911:  67  Mylius Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

Ethyl  compound. 

1852:  11  Knop. 
cyanoplatinite. 

1858:  2 Henke. 

1858:  3 Yon  Thann. 

1902 : 19  Baeyer  and  Viliiger. 
Ethylene. 

action  on  Pd  and  Pt  (nil). 

1897 : 24  Sabatier  and  Senderens. 
compounds  with  halides. 

1861 : 14  Griess  and  Martius. 

1867:  5 Birnbaum. 

1870:  22  Chojnacki. 

1871:-  7 Sadtler Ir,Pt. 

nickel  compound. 

1898:  18  Kursanoff. 

Evaporating  pans,  composite. 

1912:  159a  Eldred  (pat.). 
Evaporation,  rapid,  in  crucible. 


1914:  121. 

Excess  potential. 

1909 : 62  Harkins Pd , Pt . 

1910:  53  Harkins Pd,Pt, 


Exhibits  at  expositions. 

1862:  23. 

1863:  1 Marsh. 

1863:  4 Tunner. 

1867:  2 Wagner. 

1873:  4 Raymond. 

1874:  4 Beilstein. 

1878:  2. 

1894:  31  Lunge. 

1895:  3 Andreoli. 

Expansibility. 

1851:  11  Paucker. 

1858 : 11  Crace-Cal vert  and  Johnson 
1861:  20  Craee-Calvert,  Johnson, 
and  Lowe. 

1866:  27  Matthiessen Pd,  Pt. 


1869:  27  Fizeau Gen. 

1881:  38  Nichols. 

1889:  41  Le  Chatelier Ir,  Pt. 

1891 : 50  Seliwanow. 


Expansibility — Continued. 

1907:  43  Henning Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1907 : 44  Scheel Pd,Pt. 

1907:  45  Scheel  and  Heuse. 

1908:  47  Griineisen Ir,  Pd,Pt. 

1908:  48  Thiesen. 

1908:  50  Onnes  and  Clay. 

1910:  44  Griineisen. 

1915:  55  A'alentiner  and  Wallot, 

Rh,  Ir,  Pt. 

Explosion  of  ruthenium  tetroxide. 

1898:  12  Howe. 

Explosive  metals. 

1908 : 6 Cohen  and  Strengera. 

1909:  18  Jacobsen. 

Exports  and  imports. 

1911:  19. 

1912:  24. 

1913:  24. 

1916:  120. 

! Extraction  from  ores,  etc. 

1841:  2 F.  D.  H. 

1898:  11  Ziirn. 

1906:  6 Horton. 

1906:7  Farbenfabriken  F.  Bayer 
(pat.) 

1908: 1 Geibel. 

1908:  5 Seigle. 

1910:  5 Neumann. 

1912:  23. 

1913:  29. 

1914 : 10  Hutchins. 

1914:  11  Hutchins. 

1914:  14  Megraw. 

1914:  15  Richards. 

1914:  25  Lyons  (pat.). 

1915:  23  Lyons  (pat.). 

1916:  34  Haedicke. 

F. 

Fats,  hydrolysis,  reduction,  etc. 

1903:  39  Neilson. 

1910:  36  Yereinigte  chemische 


Werke  (pat.) Pd. 

1913:  128  Lehmann Os. 

1914:  77  Paal Pd,  Pt. 


1914:  86  Normann  and  Schick. Os. 
See  also  Catalytic  action. 

Ferments,  inorganic. 

1899:  37  Bredig  and  Yon  Berneck. 
1901:  25  Bredig  and  Ikeda. 

1904:  54  Liebermann. 

1905:  60  Bergell. 

1909:  64  Brossa Ir. 

1910:  59  Bredig  and  Sommer, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


521 


Ferments,  inorganic — Continued. 

1911:  93  Blackadder  and  Bredig, 

Rh. 

See  also  Catalytic  action. 

Ferric  chloride,  action  on  Pt. 

1878:  51  Tommasi. 

Filaments  for  incandescent  light. 

1901:  38  Scholz Os. 

1901:  39  Blau  et  al.  (pat.). Os,  Ru. 
1902:  60  Auer  von  Welsbach. ..Os. 

1903:  53  Giilcher Ir. 

1903:  54  Oesterreichische  Gasgltih- 
licht-  und  Elektricitatsgesell- 

schaft  (pat.) Os. 

1916:  113  Barker Os. 

See  also  Lamp. 

in  preparing  active  hydrogen. 

1912:  152  Langmuir Pd,  Pt. 

Films,  preparation  by  volatilization. 
1909:  55  Houllevigue. 

1917:  92  Kruger. 

1917:  96  King. 

See  also  Dusting. 

Filters. 

1857 : 18  Mosander. 

1876:  37  Jago. 

1881:  33  Casamajor. 

1882:  29  Grosjean. 

1882:  30  Casamajor. 

1884:  21  Gawalovski. 

1886:  20  Casamajor. 

1888:  40  Lenz. 
tiltration  of  colloids. 

1907:  61  Bechold . 

Flame,  acetylene,  action  on  Pt. 

1906:  78  Vogel, 
action  on  Pt. 

1881:  28  Remont. 
cells. 

1913:  148  Moreau. 

Fluorescence  of  cyanoplatinites. 

1908:  28  Levy. 

1908:  29  Levy. 

1912:  lOOBeuel. 

1914:  66  Wick. 

Fluorides. 

1823:  4 Berzelius. 

1877:  8 Clarke. 

1885:  9 Moissan. 

1889:  8 Moissan. 


1913:  53  Ruff Gen. 

1913:  54  Ruff Os. 

Forceps. 


1868:  13  Forbes. 


Formaldehyde  as  precipitant. 

1902:  24  Awerkieff. 

Formic  acid,  action  of  Pt  on. 

1874:  27  Deville  and  Debray, 
catalytic  destruction. 


1908:  59  Pikos Rh. 

1916:  73  Haas Rh. 


Fractional  combustion.  See  Gases. 
Freezing-point  curves.  See  Alloys. 
Fulminates. 

1812:  3 Davy. 

1820:  1 Davy. 

1829:  11  Davy. 

1878:  12  Von  Meyer. 

Fulminating  metals.  See  Explosive  met- 
als. 

Furnace.  See  Resistance  furnace;  Hel- 
berger  furnace. 

Fusibility  and  fusion, 
general. 

1847:  21  Hare. 

1847:  22  Hare. 

1847:  23  Hess, 
iridium. 

1810:  5. 

1837:  5 Bunsen. 

1842:  17  Hare. 

1846:  15  Hare. 

1879:  43  Violle. 

1881:  15  Holland. 

1882:  14  Dudley. 

1882:  15  Warder. 

1885:  24  Johnson,  Matthey  & Co. 
iridosmium. 

1870:  20  Farmer, 
palladium. 

1818:  9 Cloud. 

1849:  13  Despretz. 

1862:  17  Becquerel. 

1879:  43  Violle. 

1892:  35  Heycock  and  Neville. 
1895:  43  Holborn  and  Wien, 
platinum. 

1775:  .1  De  Morveau. 

1775:  2 Bergman. 

1777:  1 De  Morveau  et  al. 

1779  : 2 Achard. 

1784:  1 Crell . 

1784:  2 Von  Sickingen. 

1789:  1 Willis. 

1790:  6 Ruprecht. 

1790:  7 Ruprecht. 

1791:  2 Born. 

1800:  3. 


522 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Fusibility  and  fusion — Continued, 
platinum— continued. 

1802:  4 Van  Marum. 

1802:  5 Hare. 

1803:  15  Tilloeh. 

1804:  19  Amicus. 

1806:  6 Correa. 

1809:  5 Children. 

1810:  5. 

1813:  7 Marcet. 

1815:  2 Children. 

1817:  8 Clarke. 

1817:  9 Clarke, 

1817 : 12  Faraday. 

1818:  9 Cloud. 

1818:  10  Prechtl. 

1819:  2 Gilbert. 

1819:  3 Clarke. 

1820:  6 Hare. 

1826:  12  Nasse. 

1827:  16  Eichfeld. 

1835:  19  Maugham. 

1838:  12  Hare. 

1839:  6 Geiseler. 

1840:  8 Hare. 

1842:  17  Hare. 

1844:  15  Reich. 

1845:  19  Riess. 

1849:  13  Despretz. 

1852:  12  Deville. 

1856:  15  Deville. 

1857:  16  Deville. 

1859:  7 Jacobi. 

1860:  4 Deville  and  Debray. 

1862:  17  Becquerel. 

1862:  18  Deville  and  Debray. 

1862:  20  Aubel. 

1862:  21  Heraeus. 

1863:  11  Richter. 

1863:  12  Aubel. 

1869:  21  Skey. 

1870:  21  Deville. 

1871 : 23  Chapman. 

1872:  10  Yiolette. 

1872:  11  Dumas. 

1875:  7. 

1876:  34  Diirre. 

1879:  43  Yiolle. 

1882:  13  Siemens  and  Huntington. 
1892:  35  Hey  cock  and  Neville. 
1894:  19  Heycock  and  Neville. 
1894:  25  Spring. 

1895:  43  Holborn  and  Wien. 

1896:  37  Meyer. 


Fusibility  and  fusion— Continued, 
platinum — continued . 

1896:  38  Holman,  Lawrence,  and 
Barr. 

1896:  39  Hartley. 

1915:  57  Deville,  LeChatelier  etai. 
rhodium. 

1818:  9 Cloud. 

1846:  15  Hare. 

G. 

Gadolinium,  Pt  salts  of. 

1900:  11  Benedicks. 

Gallium.  See  Alloys;  Analysis. 

Gas  element. 

1900:  33  Hober. 

Gases,  fractional  combustion. 

1903:  34  Brunck Pd. 

reaction  with  Pt  metals, 
iridium. 

1892:  32  Antony, 
osmiridium. 

1846:  22  Grove, 
palladium. 

1838:  15  Bottger. 

1842:  15  Marchand. 

1879:  16  Volta. 

1881:  6 Wilm. 

1882:  17  Mailfert. 

1890:  29  Uhl. 

1892:  29  Neumann. 

1892:  31  Sabatier  and  Senderens. 
platinum. 

1829:  27  Despretz. 

1836:  7 Regnault. 

1838:  15  Bottger. 

1842:  15  Marchand. 

1846:  22  Grove. 

1847:  26  Wilson. 

1861:  11  Baudrimont. 

1864:  2 Baudrimont. 

1864:  6 Geitner. 

1866:  14  Bottger. 

1870:  34  Skey. 

1876:  26  Deville  and  Debray. 

1877:  20  Troost  and  Hautefeuille. 
1879:  16  Volta. 

1880:  20  Goldschmidt. 

1881:  6 Wilm. 

1885:  9 Moissan. 

1890:  29  Uhl. 

1891 : 21  Sudborough. 

1892:  29  Neumann. 


SUBJECT  INDEX. 


523 


Gases— Continued . 
reaction  with  Pt  metals — continued, 
platinum — continued. 

1892:  31  Sabatier  and  Senderens. 
1896:  35  Mulder, 
rhodium. 

1881:  6 Wilm. 

See  also  Condensation;  Diffusion;  also 
under  specific  gases. 

Gauze.  See  under  Substitutes. 

General  treatises. 

1805:  3 Wollaston. 

1806:  4 Trommsdorff. 

1828:  9 Berzelius. 

1829:  9 Berzelius. 

1854:  6 Claus. 

1855:  3 Fremy. 

1859:  8 Claus. 

1859:  9 Deville  and  Debray. 

1861:  5 Faraday. 

1861:  6 Gibbs. 

1866:  5 Forster. 

1878:  1 Phillipp. 

1878:  2. 

1883:  1 Claus. 

1892:  2a  Kunz. 

1893:  3e  Bullman. 

1904:  69  Howe. 

1911:  27  Waser  and  Kiihnel. 

1912:  16  Molinie  and  Dietz. 

1912:  28  Keller. 

1917:  16  Hill, 
iridium. 

1814:  1 Vauquelin. 

1854:  8 Uricoechea. 

1877:  21  Debray. 

1885:  23  Perry, 
osmium. 

1814:  1 Vauquelin. 

1833:  9 Berzelius. 

1833:  11  Breithaupt. 

1844:  8 Fremy. 

1859:  11  Eichler. 

1863:  3 Jacobi. 

1866:  9 Wohler. 

1876:  10  Deville  and  Debray. 

1899:  7 Rosenheim  and  Sasserath. 
palladium. 

1813:  1 Vauquelin. 

1814:  2 Vauquelin. 

1827:  13  Fischer. 

1842:  8 Kane. 

1843:  6 Cock. 

1847:  11  Fischer. 


General  treatises — Continued, 
platinum . 

1758:  1 M. 

1758:  2 Macquer. 

1780:  1 Bergman. 

1782 : 1 Von  Sickingen. 

1799:  1 Proust. 

1801:  1 Proust. 

1803:  9 Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin. 
1842:  8 Kane. 

1881:  5 Wilm. 

1912:  29  Priwoznik. 

1912:  30. 

1914:  23  Siebert. 

1916:  11  Kunz. 

1916:  32. 
rhodium. 

1813:  1 Vauquelin. 

1814:  2 Vauquelin. 

1868:  1 Bunsen, 
ruthenium. 

1846:  7 Claus. 

1876:  11  Deville  and  Debray. 

1899:  13  Antony  and  Lucchesi. 
Geologic  relations  of  occurrence. 

1885:  la  Collins. 

1893:  3a  Helmhaeker. 

1902:  1 Kemp. 

1903:  1 Duparc. 

1907:  1 Katterfeld. 

1908:  2 Duparc. 

1908:  3 Beck. 

1909:  2 Mingaye. 

1910:  4 Duparc  and  Pamfil. 

1911:  2 Duparc. 

1911:  3 Duparc. 

1911:  4 Duparc. 

1911:  5 Hobson. 

1911:  13  Pina  de  Rubies. 

1911:  14  Duparc  and  Holtz. 

1913:  4 Pina  de  Rubies  and  Coma. 
1913:  5 Duparc. 

1915:  14  Del  Campo  and  Pina  de 
Rubies. 

1915:  15  Nagel. 

1916:  2 Duparc  and  Grossett. 

1916:  3 Duparc. 

Glass.  See  Deposition. 

Glow  reaction  for  Pt  metals. 

1911:  58  Curtman  and  Rothberg. 
Glycerol  compound. 

1892:  23  Wallin, 
effect  of  metallic  oxides  on. 

1897:  22  Bullnheimer. 


524 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Glycollic  acid,  reduction  from  oxalic 
acid. 

1913:  115  Baur. 

Gold.  See  Alloys;  Analysis;  Dishes, 
ore  treatment,  influence  of  Pd. 

1911:  61  Freise. 

Government  control. 

1917:  27  Scott. 

Government  estimates. 

1917:  23. 

Government  reservation. 

1917:  30  Parsons. 

Guaiac  reaction,  action  of  colloidal Pt. 

1904:  50  Liebermann. 

1909:  76  Buekmaster Pd,  Pt. 

H. 

Halides. 

1888:  24  Hampe. 

1893:  22  Werner. 

1893:  33  Lea, 

1894:  10  Pigeon, 
mixed. 

1868:  2 Kammerer. 

1879:  7 Pitkin. 

1896:  4 Herty. 

1896:  5 Miolati. 

relation  of  color  and  constitution. 


1898:  20  Kurnakow Pd,  Pt, 

1902:  13  Pfeiffer Gen. 

1905:  43  Ambronn Pd,  Pt, 


1907 : 13  Rimbach  and  Korten . Ir. 
See  also  Bromo-salts;  Chloro-salts. 

Hall  effect, 

1912:  130  Alterthum. 

1915:  89  Frey. 

Halo  on  glass  around  heated  Pt. 

1904:  34  Beilby. 

See  also  Dusting. 

Hardening  Pt. 

1911:  79  Heraeus. 

Hardness. 

1904:  39  Beilby. 

Heat,  action  on  chlorides. 

1887:  18  Duclaux. 
conductivity. 

1911:  101  Schulze Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  85  Meissner. 

See  also  Conductivity, 
convection. 

1914:  105  King, 
measurement. 

1828:  26  Schwartz. 


Heat — Continued . 
measurement — continued. 

1878:  60  Rossetti. 

1880:  39  Desains  and  Curie. 

1885:  41  Schleiermacher. 

1887 : 55  Bottomley. 
of  expansion. 

1872:  20  Buff, 
of  fusion. 

1877:  45  Yiolle Pd,  Pt, 

1895:  39  Crompton, 
of  reaction. 

1824:  16  Dobereiner. 


1870:  32  Thomsen. 

1871:  21  Thomsen. 

1876:  30  Thomsen. 

1878:  43  Thomsen. 

1880:  38  Berthelot Pd,  Pt. 

1882:  38  Joannis Pd. 


1890:  27  Pigeon. 

1891:  25  Pigeon. 

1891:  26  Pigeon. 

1892:  34  Pigeon. 

1894:  10  Pigeon, 
reflection  of. 

1872:  19  Desains. 

See  also  Specific  heat. 

Helium,  solubility  in  Pd. 

1896:  24  Tilden. 

1912:  108  Sieverts  and  Bergner. 
Hellberger  furnace  for  melting  Pt. 

1912:  102. 

Heteropoly-acids.  See  Molybdates. 
Hieroglyphic  inscription,  Pt  in. 

1901:  1 Berthelot. 

History. 

1751:  1 Watson. 

1806:  3 Fourcroy  and  Vauquelin. 
1814:  1 Vauquelin. 

1845:  2 Schweigger. 

1850:  5 Thomson. 

I860:  18  Delanoue. 

1907:  3. 

1912:  29  Priwosnik. 

1912:  144  Burton. 

1914:  1 Howe. 

1917:  1 Kunz. 
in  Russia. 

1827 : 1 Mamyscheff. 

1880:  1 Koppen. 

Holder,  for  spatula. 

1898:  44  Friedrichs, 
for  wire. 

1899:  46  Palmaer. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


525 


Hydrazin,  catalysis  of. 

1902:  3J5  Tanatar. 

1902:  37  Tanatar. 

1904:  44  Purgotti  and  Zanichelli. 
1905:  58  Paal  and  Amberger. . .Pd. 
1913:  114Gutbierand  Neundlinger. 
use  in  analysis.  See  also  Analysis. 
1904:  24  Jannasch  and  Stephan. 
1904:  25  Jannasch  and  Bettges. Pd. 
1905:  36  Jannasch  and  Von  Mayer, 

Gen. 

1909:  16  Gutbier  and  M tiller... Rh. 
1915:  51  Christensen. 

Hydrazoic  acid,  reaction  with  chloride. 

1898:  34  Curtius  and  Rissom. 
Hydrochloric  acid,  action  on  Pt. 


- 1893:  29  Dudley .....Gen. 

1901:  6 Mallet. 

1903:  35  Mat.ignon Gen. 

1904:  8 Berthelot. 
electrolytic  action. 

1902:  49  Bran Ir,  Pt. 


1909:  92  Pfleiderer. 
Hydrogen, 
absorption  of. 

1823:  7 Dobereiner. 
1823:  8 Dobereiner. 


1824:  5 Dobereiner Pd. 

1833:  22  Boussingault. 

1836:  4 Dobereiner. 

1868:  10  Graham Pd,  Pt. 

1869:  4 Graham Pd. 

1869:  5 G raham Pd . 

1869:  6 Wurtz Pd. 

1869:  7 Bottger Pd. 

1869:  8 Roberts Pd. 

1869:  9 Dewar Pd. 

1869:  10  Hofmann Pd. 

' 1870:  2 Favre Pd. 

1871:  2 Bottger Pd. 

1871:  3 Lisenko Pd. 

1871:  4 Mohr Pd. 

1871:  5 Kolbe Pd. 

1872:  2 Roberts  and  AVright. . .Pd. 

1872:  17  Saytzeff t Pd. 

1873:  3 Dewar. 

1873:  21  Merget, 

1873:  22  Pellet, 


1874:  7 Troost  and  Hautefeuille, 


Pd. 

1874:  8 Moutier Pd. 

1874:  9 Favre Pd,  Pt, 

1874:  10  Favre Pd,  Pt. 

1874:  12  Smith Pd. 


Hydrogen — Continued, 
absorption  of — continued. 

1874:  38  Bottger. Pd. 

1875:  10  Smith Pd,  Pt. 

1875:  11  Laudy Pd. 

1876:  56  Bottger Pd. 

1880:  18  Phipson. 

1880:  19  Tommasi. 

1883:  4 De  la  Rue  and  Muller.  P.3. 

1884:  29  Knott Pd. 

1885:  17  Schiff Pd. 

1885:  22  Kritschewsky. 

1885:  37  Larroque Pd. 

1885:  39  Traube. Pd. 

1886:  34  Knott Pd. 

1887:  21  Keiser Pd. 

1892:  68  Krakau. 

1895:  4 Hoitsema Pd. 

1895:  5 Krakau Pd. 

1895:  35  Mond,  Ramsay,  and 

Shields .^....Pd. 

1897:  21  Dewar Pd. 

1904:  17  St.  Schmidt Pd. 

1904:  18  Quennessen Pd,  Rh. 

1905:  49  \\Tinkelmann Pd. 


1905:  58  Paal  and  Amberger, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt, 

1907:  49  Heald. 

1907 : 50  Sieverts. 

1907:  51  Baerwald Pd,  Pt. 

1909:  68  Kernot  and  De  Simone, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  42  Paal  and  Hartmann.  .Pd. 
1910:  49  Pirani  and  Meyer. 

1910:  50  Sieverts Rh. 

1910:  51  Sieverts  and  Krumbhaar, 

Pd. 

1911:  47  Valentiner Pd. 

1911:  48  Sieverts  and  Bergner.Pd. 

1911:  80  Berry Pd. 

1912:  59  Sieverts  and  Jurisch, 

Pt,  Rh. 

1912:  104  Rother Ir. 

1912:  107  Joukof Pd. 

1913:  64  Gutbier,  Gebhardt,  and 

Ottenstein Pd. 

1913:  65  Thiel  and  Breuning.Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  66  Madinaveitia Gen. 

1913:  105  Freeman. 

1913:  107  Holt,  Edgar,  and  Firth, 

Pd. 

1913:  108  Andrew  and  Holt.  . .Pd. 
1913:  119  Gesellschal’t  fur  Elektro- 
osmose  (pat.). Pd. 


526 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Hydrogen — Continued . 
absorption  of — continued. 

1914:  47  Wolf Pd. 

1914:  48  Sieverts Pd. 

1914:  49  Sieverts Pd. 

1914:  50  Sieverts Pd. 

1914:  51  Holt Pd. 

1914:  61  Burrell  and  Oberfeld.Pd. 

1914:  72  Halla Pd. 

1915:  39  Beckman Pd. 

1915:  40  Sieverts,  Jurisch,  and 

Metz Pd,  Pt. 

1916:  53  Smith  and  Martin Pd. 

1916:  92  Biggs Pd. 

See  also  Diffusion;  Occlusion, 
action  on  benzene. 

1900:  34  Lunge  and  Akunoff, 

Pd,  Pt. 

hydrogen-oxygen  cell. 

1906:  46  Haber  and  Fleisclimann. 
1906:  47  Haber. 

1909:  75  Paal  and  Hartmann... Pd. 
1909:  88  Spielmann. 
oxidation  of  hydrogen. 

1899:  36  Sabaneef. 

1900:  32  French. 

1905:  51  Kirkby. 

1906:  45  Bone  and  Wheeler. 

1913:  113  Thompson Pd,  Pt. 

1916:  64  Paal  and  Schwarz. 

1916:  66  Hofmann  and  Ebert. Gen. 
palladium-hydrogen. 

1901:  19  Coehn Pd,  Pt. 

1904:  31  Chapman. 

1906:  27  Fischer. 

1908:  35  Paal,  Gerum,  and  Roth. 
1914:  94  Stumpf. 
union  with  chlorine. 

1902:  40  Mellor  and  Russell Pd. 

See  also  Fats;  Reduction. 
Hydrogenation.  See  Reduction. 
Hydrogen  peroxide. 

1904:  45  Neilson  and  Brown. 

1904:  46  Bredig  and  Fortner.. .Pd. 
1904:  48  Liebermann. 

1904:  49  Liebermann  and  Yon 
Genersich. 

1905:  52  Senter. 

1905:  53  Senter. 

1905:  54  Senter. 

1906:  33  Orloff Os. 

1908:  63  Lebedew. 

1908:  64  Teletow. 

1909:  63  Bornemann. 


Hydrogen  peroxide — -Continued. 

1909:  64  Brossa Tr. 

1909:  69  Kernot  and  Arena Ir. 

1909:  70  Kernot Ir. 


1909:  71  Kernot  and  Arena.  . .Rh. 
1914:  73  Maclnnes. 

1914:  74  Dyer  and  Dole. 

1914:  75  Bassett. 

1916:  63  Lemoine. 
action  on  Pt. 

1916:  55  Salkowski. 

1917:  59  Macri. 

Hydrolysis  of  chlorides. 

1900:  12  Kohlrausch. 

1909:  29  Lind  and  Bliss, 
osmates. 

1908:  14  Rosenstiehl. 

Hydrolytic  action  of  Pt. 

1908 : 56  Grove  and  Loevenhaut. 
Hydrosulphites,  action  on  Pd  salts. 

1904:  21  Brunck. 

Hydroxide,  colloidal.  See  Obesity. 
Hydroxylamin,  catalysis  of. 

1902:  37  Tanatar. 
use  in  analysis. 

1903:  27  Tarugi. 

1905:  36  Jannasch  and  Von  Mayer. 
1910:  26  Obermaier. 

See  also  Analysis;  Bases. 
Hypochlorites,  reaction  of  Rh  with. 

1905:  31  Alvarez. 

H y pophosphi  tes . 

1880:  6 Engel. 

1909:  61  Bach Pd. 

1912:  115  Sieverts  and  Loessner, 

Pd. 

1913:  120  Sieverts Pd. 

1916:  67  Sieverts  and  Peters. 
Hypophosphorous  acid,  reduction  by. 

1909:  43  Sieverts Pd,  Pt. 

I. 

Imports.  See  Exports  and  imports. 
Impurities. 

1877 : 26  Gawalovski. 

1879:  23  Cxintl. 

1890:  30  Classen. 

Incandescence  in  gas. 

1909 : 58  Meunier. 

1909:  59  Meunier. 

Incandescent  lamp.  See  Lamp. 
Incineration  tubes. 

1897 : 40  Soltsien. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


527 


Indium  See  Cyanides. 

Industry,  Pt. 

1898:  9 Steinfeldt. 

1909:  1. 

1916:  29  Quennessen. 

Inhibition  of  catalysis  by  expired  air. 

1916:  91  Takasaki. 

Ink,  indelible. 

1869:  26  Riemann. 
sympathetic. 

1887:  39  Himly,  Leiser,  and  Bard- 
tholdt. 

Inoculation  with  colloidal  Pt. 

1907:  38  Field. 

International  committee.  See  Atomic 
weights. 

Iodates. 

1831:  6 Connell. 


1845:  10  Aquilina. 

Iodic  acid,  reaction  with  sulphurous  acid. 


1916:  71  Bercelles. 
Iodides. 

1814:  5 Ruhland. 

1823:  3 Silliman. 

1825:  7 Pleischl. 

1825:  8 Pleischl 

....Pd,  Pt. 

1829:  13  Lassaigne. 
1832:  5 Lassaigne. 

1832:  6 Lassaigne. 

1832:  7 Orfila. 

1832:  8 Kane. 

1833:  16  Lassaigne 

Pd. 

1833:  17  Kane. 

1833:  18  Kane. 

1833:  19  Lassaigne. 
1833:  20  Phillips. 

1835:  17  Lassaigne 

Ir,  Pd. 

1855:  6 dementi. 

1856:  12  Deville 

Pd. 

1857:  7 Oppler 

Ir. 

1875:  22  Zenger 

Pd. 

1905:  24  Alvarez 

Os. 

1909:  44  Mingaye. 
1911:,  32  Wohler. 

action  on  osmic  acid. 
1907:  8 Orloff. 

See  also  Analysis, 
double  iodides. 

1832:  5 Lassaigne. 
1835:  15  Mather. 

i 

i 

‘ 

1836:  6 Buchner. 
1856:  12  Deville. 
1868 : 8 Topsoe. 

Iodi  des — Continued, 
double  iodides — continued. 

1875:  21  Selmi. 

1913:  44  Datta. 

1913:  45  Datta. 
tetraiodides. 

1860:  7 Boedeker. 

1902:  14  Bellucci. 

1909:  20  Archibald  and  Patrick. 
1912:  47  Archibald  and  Patrick. 
Iodimetry  of  Pt. 

1902:  27a  Spiess. 

Iodonitrites  of  Pd . 

1900:  19  Rosenheim  and  Itzig. 
Iodo-salts,  list  of, 

1902:  13  Pfeiffer. 

Ionization,  produced  by  hot  Pt. 

1903:  42  Richardson. 

1903:  43  Wilson. 

1904:  57  Richardson. 

1904:  58  Wehnelt. 

1905:  64  Richardson. 

1905:  65  Richardson. 

1906:  59  Richardson. 

1906:  60  Richardson. 

1907:  67  Deininger. 

1907 : 68  Marty n. 

See  also  Emission, 
of  thiocyanates. 

1900:  22  Walden. 

Iridosmium. 

1903:  28  Leidie  and  Quennessen. 
See  also  Analysis;  Occurrence. 

Irite.  See  Occurrence. 

Iron  compounds,  action  of  Pt  on. 

1893:  32  Mahon, 
plated  with  Pt. 

1912:  156  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  157  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  158  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  159  Eldred  (pat.). 

Isomerism. 

1910:  28  Ostromisslensky  and 
Bergmann. 

1910:  30  Tschugaeff  and  Subbotin. 
1911 : 44  Kirmreuther. 


1911:  91  Zelinsky Pd. 

1912:  52  Werner Rh. 

1914:  38  Delepine Ir. 

1914:  39  Werner Rh. 

Isomorphism,  chloro-salts. 

1912:  48  Duffour Ir,  Rh. 

Isonitrils.  See  Nitrils. 


528 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


J. 

Jewelers’  Vigilance  Committee. 

1917:  38. 

Jewelry. 

1914:  125. 

1916:  100  Peseliko  <pat.). 
1916:  105  Hoke. 

Jcly,  list  of  works  of. 

1899:  51. 

scientific  works  of. 

1894:  7a. 

K. 

Kjeldahl  reaction,  influence  of  Pt. 

1905:  38  Delepine. 

Kryptol  ovens. 

1908:  86  Leroux. 


Laboratory  ware,  alloy  for. 

1916:  102  Electrometals  Products 
Co .......Sub.  ! 

t : j * * i 


Lamps,  incandescent. 

- 

1885:  34. 

1890:  44  Poland 

Ir. 

1899:  47  Merck 

Os. 

1891:  39  Walter. 

1901:  38  Scholz 

Os. 

1902 : 60  Auer  von  W elsbach . . . Os. 

1903:  53  G ulcher 

Ir. 

1903:  54  Oesterreichische  Gasgluh- 

licht-  und  Eiektricitatsgesell- 

schaft  (pat.  '> 

Os. 

1904:  66  Lang 

1904:  67  Heil 

Os. 

1905:  80  Deutsche 

Gasgluhlicht 

Aktien  Gesellschaft 

(pat.). . .Os. 

1905:  81  Blau 

1906:  76  Deutsche 

Gasgluhlicht 

Aktien  Gesellschaft 

(pat.). . .Os. 

1907:  87  Berninger  and  Schuster, 

Os. 

1907:  88  Leder 

Os. 

1910:  71  Hyde 

1910:  72  Hyde 

1910:  74  Coblentz. 

1910:  75  Nutting 

Os. 

1910:  99  Coolidge. 

1910:  100  Howell 

Os. 

1910:  101  Merrill 

Os,  Pt. 

1910:  102  Von  Koch.. 

Os. 

1911:  119  Escard 

Os. 

1911:  120  Auer  von  W elsbach 

(pat.) Ir,  Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

j Lamps,  incandescent — Continued. 


1913:  168  Meyer Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1913:  169  Canello Os. 

1913:  170. 

1915:  101  Weber Os. 

1916:  113  Barker Os. 

1917:  143  Guardiola Pt. 


mercury  arc,  with  Pt  anode. 

1906:  74  Guye  and  Romilly. 

See  also  Filaments. 

; Laurite.  See  Occurrence. 

; Lead,  separation  from  Pt  and  Ir. 

1905:  37  Senn. 

See  also  Alloys;  Analysis. 

Leading-in  wires.  See  Substitutes. 

I Leptynol.  See  Obesity. 

Light,  absorption  of. 

1888:  50  Trobridge  and  Sabine. 
1893:  43  Rizzio. 

1909:  81  Fery. 

1911:  96  Pirani. 

1914:  66  Wick. 

1914:  96  Jaffe. 
action  on  chlorides. 

1887 : 18  Duclaux. 

1898:  14  Sonstadt. 

See  also  Photochemical  action, 
emission. 

1905:  62  Holborn  and  Henning. 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 
1910:  68  Bauer  and  Moulin. 

1910:  69  Rubens  and  Hagen, 

Pt,  Rh. 

1910:  70  Rubens  and  Hagen, 

Pt,  Rh. 

polarization. 

1876:  63  Lallemand. 


1885:  40  Knoblauch Pd,  Pt. 

production. 

1910:  71  Hyde Os,  Pt. 

1910:  72  Hyde Os,  Pt. 

refraction. 

1888:  53  Kundt. 

1888:  54  Kundt. 

1891:  27  Gladstone Ir. 


1895:  33  Gladstone  and  Hibbert. 
standard  unit. 

1870:  31  Schinz. 

1879:  55  Schwendler. 

1884:  25  Siemens. 

1884:  26  Violle. 

1884:  27. 

1885:  43  Trowbridge. 

1886:  33  Von  Hefner- Alteneck. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


529 


Light — Continued, 
standard  unit — continued. 

1888:  52  Liebenthal. 

1912:  120  Harwood  and  Petavel. 
1916:  112  Ives. 

1917:  121  Hyde,  Cady,  and  For- 
sythe  .Os,  Pt. 

Lightning-rod  points. 

1876:  51  Luca. 

Lime,  action  on  Pt. 

1902:  62  Moissan. 

Litharge,  (no)  action  on  Pt. 

1914:  128  Cunningham. 

Lithia,  action  on  Pt. 

1817:  7 Vogel. 

1818:  11  Vauquelin. 

1828:  14  Kralovanszky. 

1884:  19  Dittmar. 

1910:  104  Ricke  and  Endell. 

Loss  of  weight  on  heating. 

1900:  40  Hall. 

Low-temperature  resistance. 

1911:  105  Onnes. 

L-rays.  See  Spectrum. 

Luminescence,  catalytic. 

1917:  84  Goss, 
low  temperature. 

1906:  56  Borissow. 
metallic  vapors. 

1904:  62  Lewis. 

Luminosity. 

1910:  75  Nutting... Os. 

M. 

Magnesia  rod,  substitute  for  Pt  wire. 

1912:  161  Wedekind. 

Magnesium.  See  Alloys;  Cyanides, 
action  on  saline  solutions. 

1899:  34  Tommasi. 

1905:  32  Faktor. 

1905:  33  Faktor. 

optical  properties  of  chloroplatinate. 
1917:  46aGaubert. 

Magnetic  field,  influence  on  spectrum. 

1905:  63  Purvis Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

1906:  57  Purvis Ir,  Pt. 

1906:  58  Purvis Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

measurements. 

1909:  83  Finke Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

ores.  See  Occurrence, 
susceptibility. 

1915:  45  Sosman  and  Hostetter. 

1916:  92  Biggs Pd. 

109733°— 19— Bull.  694 34 


Magnetism. 

1775:  1 De  Morveau. 

1775:  la  Murray. 

1776:  1 Ingenhousz. 

1784:  2 Von  Sickingen. 

1830:  16  Gob  el. 

1846:  19  Faraday. 

1847:  27  Lamont. 

1866:  1 Kokscharow. 

1880:  44  Hall. 

1883:  la  Wilm. 
of  complex  salts. 

1911:  104  Feytis. 

Magnus’s  salt,  conductivity  of. 

1913:  41  Dhar. 

Malleability,  including  working  of  Pt. 
1792:  3 Berthollet  and  Pelletier. 
1800:  4 Knight. 

1800:  5 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1804:  6 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1804:  15  Mussin-Puschkin. 

1804:  16  Mussin-Puschkin. 

1805:  8 Tilloch. 

1813:  2 Leithner. 

1813:  3 Gehlen. 

1813:  4 Schweigger. 

1813:  5 Wollaston. 

1814:  11  Scholz. 

1829:  20  Wollaston. 

1831:  27  Abich. 

1832:  15  Marshall. 

1832:  16  Marx. 

1836:  17  Liebig. 

1836:  18  Liebig. 

1841:  15  £. 

1841:  16  Biewend Pd. 

1860:  4 Deville  and  Debray. 

1860:  18  Delanoue. 

1862:  22  Storer. 

1875:  7. 

1885:  24  Johnson,  Matthey  & Co. 

Ir. 

Manufacture  of  Pt. 

1871:  22. 

1913:  35  Nikolaus. 

See  also  Malleability. 

Margules,  sulphate  of. 

1904:  11  Stuchlik. 

Marsh’s  apparatus,  use  of  Pt-copper. 

1906:  41  De  Vamossy. 


1909:  62  Harkins Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  53  Harkins Pd,  Pt. 


530 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Matrix  of  Pt. 

1830:  2 Engelhardt. 

1834:  4 Rose. 

1839:  1 Rose. 

1857:  1 Damour  and  Descloizeaux. 
1861:  3 Gueymard. 

1875:  1 Descloizeaux. 

1875:  2 Daubree. 

1893:  2 Daubree. 

1S93:  3 Inostranzeff. 

1894:  1 Inostranzeff. 

1894:  2 Meunier. 

Melting  of  Pt. 

1916:  56  Hoke. 

1916:  105  Hoke, 
with  arsenic. 

1779:  2 Achard. 

See  also  Fusibility. 

Melting  point. 

1905:  45  Harker. 

1905:  62  Iiolborn  and  Henning, 
Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 
1906:  35  Nernst  and  Von  Warten- 

berg Pd,  Pt. 

1907:  48  Waidener  and  Burgess, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1909:  52  Fery  and  Cheneveau. 
1909:  53  Waidener  and  Burgess. 

1910:  47  Ruff Ir,  Pt. 

1910:  48  Day,  Sosman,  and  Allen, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  lOOTiede. 

1916:  57  Holst  and  Oosterhuis.  .Pd. 
Mercury,  reaction  with  Pt  and  salt. 
1911:  74  Peters. 

Mercury  iodide,  reaction  with  Pd. 

1906:  30  Orloff. 

Merkaptid  compounds. 

1897 : 20  Hofmann  and  Rabe, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1898:  31  Hofmann  and  R,abe. 

1910:  30  Tschugaeft  and  Subbotin. 
Mesityl  oxide,  compound  with. 

1900:  16  Prandtl  and  Hofmann. 
Metals,  influence  of  gases. 

1905:  50  Guggenheimer Pd. 

1908:  45  Henderson  and  Galletly. 
Methyl  sulphide,  compounds  with  Pd. 
190!:  14  Phillips. 

Microchemical  reactions.  See  Analysis. 


Microcosmic  bead  for  detection  of  Ptl 
metals. 

1903:  37  Donau. 

Micropyrometer. 

1913:  167  Burgess. 

1915:  92  Burgess  and  Waltenberg. 
Microscopy,  osmic  acid  in. 

1911:  70  Schultze. 
ruthenium  red  in. 

1913:  96  Heidenhain. 

Milk,  action  of  salts  on  enzymes. 

1910:  16  Gerber. 

1910:  17  Gerber. 

1910:  18  Gerber Pd. 

1910:  19  Gerber Ir. 

1910:  20  Gerber Os,  Rh,  Ru. 

Mining  of  Pt. 

1863 : la  Antipov. 

1897:  3. 

1898:  9 Steinfeldt. 

1912:  5 Hutchins. 

1912:  6 De  Haatsick. 

1913:  3. 

1916:  15  Hutchins. 

See  also  Occurrence. 

Mining  laws,  Colombia. 

1911:  10. 

Russia. 

1897:  3. 

1913:  19. 

Mixed  halides.  See  Halides. 

Molecular  weight  of  osmium  teiroxide. 

1910:  13a  Walden. 

Molybdates,  double. 

1790:  2 Hielm. 

1877:  15  Gibbs. 

1886:  5 Gibbs. 

1895:  11  Gibbs. 

1914:  40  Barbieri. . . .Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 
1914:  42  Rosenheim  and  Schwer, 

RU. 

Molybdenum.  See  Alloys;  Resistance 
furnace. 

as  Pt  substitute. 

1917:  142  Fahrenwald  (patA 
1917 : 146  Humphries. 
Monochloroplatinic  acid.  See  Chlorides. 
Monroe  crucible. 

1909:  99  Snelling. 

1909:  lOOSwett. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


531 


N. 

Neutralization  of  chloroplatinic  acid. 

1901 : 7 Miolati  and  Maseetti. 

New  elements. 

1852:  3 Genth. 

1862:  2 Chandler. 

1883:  2Wilm. 

1879:  3 Guyard. 

1907:  4 Gross, 
canadium. 

1911:  1 French. 

1912:  2 Easticlc. 

1912:  3 Patterson. 

1912:  4 Estreicher. 

1913:  8. 
davyum. 

1877:  3 Kern. 

1877:  4 Allen. 

1898:  1 Mallet, 
new  element  of  Holtz. 

1912:  1 Holtz. 

1913 : 1 Wunder  and  Thuringer. 
1913:  2 Del  Campo  and  Pina  de 
Rubies. 

1914:  2 Holtz. 

ruthenium  (I),  polinium,  and  plura- 
nium. 

1826:  5 Osann. 

1829:  6 Osann. 

1845:  5 Claus. 

1845:  6 Osann. 

1845:  7 Osann. 

1845:  8 Claus. 

1845:  9 Fremy. 

Nichrome  as  Pt  substitute. 

1911:  122  Benner. 

Nickel,  ethylene  compounds.  See  Chlo- 
roplatinates. 
in  native  Pt. 

1876:  2 Daubree. 

1916:  10  Pina  de  Rubies. 

See  also  Occurrence, 
plated  with  Pt. 

1912:  156  Eldred  (pat.) 

1912:  157  Eldred  (pat.) 

1912:  158  Eldred  (pat.) 

1912:  159  Eldred  (pat.) 
silicate  as  catalyst. 

1916:  81  Sulzberger Pd,  Pt. 

Nikolaja  Pawdinsk.  See  Occurrence  in 
Russia. 

Niter,  action  on  Pt. 

1797 : 4 Tennant. 


Niter,  action  on  Pt — Continued. 

1798:  2 De  Morveau. 

1800:  2 Tennant. 

Nitrates. 

1886:  3 Prost. 

1911:  41  Lancien Rh. 

Nitric  acid, 
action  on  Pt. 

1914:  127  Baxter  and  Grover, 
action  on  Pt  amalgam. 

1903:  50  Tarugi. 
contact  mass  for  making. 

1910:  52  Schick  (pat.) 
detection. 


1912:  95  Iwanow Ir. 

Nitric  oxide,  action  of  Pt  metals  on. 

1892:  30  Emich. 

Nitrils,  double  salts  with. 

1906:  13  Mohlau Pd. 


1906:  14  Werner  and  Dinklage.Os. 
1907:  19  Hofmann  and  Bugge. 

1907 : 20  Ramberg. 

1913:  57  Tschugaeff  and  Teearu. 
1914:  43  Tschugaeff. 

1914:  44  Tschugaeff  and  Teearu. 
1915:  34  Tschugaeff  and  Lebedin- 
ski. 

1916:  49  Tschugaeff  and  Lebidin- 
ski. 

Nitrites. 

1848:  5 Fischer. 

1861:  9 Lang. 

1869:  18  Blomstrand. 

1871 : 8 Gibbs Ir. 

1876:  13  Nilson. 

1877:  7 Thomsen. 

1877:  16  Nilson. 

1877:  17  Nilson. 

1878:  13  Nilson  and  Pettersson. 
1878:  14  Nilson. 

1879:  12  Groth  and  Nilson. 


1879:  30  Topsoe. 

1889:  12  Joly  and  Vezes Ru. 

1890:  17  Leidie Rh. 

1890:  18  Wilm Rh. 

1891:  6 Vezes. 

1892:  12  Vezes. 

1892:  13  Vezes Pd. 

1893:  18  Vhzes. 

1893:  19  Vkzes. 

1894:  13  Joly  and  Vbzes Ru. 

1895:  12  Joly  and  Leidie Ir. 

1898:  24  Joly  and  Leidie Rh. 

1899:  16  Brizard Ru. 


532 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OP  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


N itrites — Continued . 

1899:  24  Vezes. 

1899:  25  Vezes. 

1900 : 19  Rosenheim  and  Itzig. . Pd. 
1900:  21  Miolati  and  Bellucci. 
1901:  16  Vezes. 

1902:  17  Leidi£ Ir. 


1902:  18  Vezes. 

1902:  32  Dufet Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1903:  25  Vezes. 

1905:  26Wintrebert Os. 

1905 : 30  Quennessen Ir. 


1908:  22  Werner  and  De  Vries.. Ir. 
1908:  22a  De  Vries. 

1909:  33  Hofmann  and  Buchner. 

1910:  32  Vezes  and  Duff  our Ir. 

1910:  33  Duff  our Ir. 

1913:  55  Scagliarini  and  Rossi.  Pd. 
1913:  56  Tschugaeff  and  Chlopin. 
1915:  32  Tschugaeff  and  Kiltuino- 
vich. 

1915:  33  Tschugaeff  and  Wladimi- 
roff. 

1916:  48  Tschugaeff  and  Kiltuino- 
vich. 

See  also  Crystallography. 

Nitrogen  and  hydrogen,  action  of  Pt  on. 

1881:  40  Johnston. 

Nitrogen  industries,  bibliography. 

1917:  80a  Hosmer. 

1917:  80b  Boyce. 

Nitroso-chlorides. 

1840:  4 Rogers  and  Boy£. 


1867:  6 Weber. 

1888:  14  Joly Ru. 

1889:  9 Joly Ru. 

1890:  8 Vezes. 

1890:  36  Dufet Ru. 

1894:  11  Howe Ru. 

1894:  11  Clark Ru. 

1895:  7 Brizard Ru. 

1896:  8 Brizard Ru. 

1896:  9 Brizard Os. 

1900:  10  Brizard Os,  Ru. 

1903:  16  Lind Ru. 


a Nitroso-/3  naphthol.  reagent  for  Pd. 
1913:  77  Schmidt. 

1913:  91  Wunder  and  Thuringer. 
Nitrostyrene,  catalytic  reduction  of. 

1917:  88  Arahina. 

1917:  89  Sonn  and  Schellenberg, 
Pd,  Pt. 

Noble-metal  alloys.  See  Alloys;  Analy- 


Nomenclature  of  iridosmium. 

1914:  119  Guertler. 

North  America.  See  Occurrence. 

Norway.  See  Occurrence  in  nickel  ores.  | 
Notes  on. 

1896:  7 Ir,  Pt. 

Nuggets,  crystalline  structure. 

1897 : 26  Liversidge. 


Obesity,  colloidal  Pd  as  remedy. 

1913:  171  Kauffmann. 

1913:  172  Kauffmann. 

1913:  173  Gorn. 

Occlusion  of  gases.  See  Condensation. 
1897:  28  Mond,  Ramsay,  and 
Shields. 

1897:  29  Mond,  Ramsay,  and 


Shields Pd. 

1898:  32  Shields Pd. 


1909:  56  Delachanel. 

Occurrence. 

associations. 

barium. 

1865:  1 Kraut, 
chemicals  for  assaying. 

1908:  39  Rose. 

1908:  40  Bryant, 

1914:  4 Duparc. 

1915:  12  Michel. 

1915:  13  Loevy. 
copper. 

1847:  1 Leuchtenberg. 
gold. 

1839:  3 Wohler Ir,  Os. 

1843:  3 Weinlig Ir,  Os. 

1849:  9 Pettenkofer. 

1887:  3 Martin Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

irite. 

1836:  1 Hermann. 

1841 : 3 Hermann. 

1851:  3 Kenngott. 


laurite. 

1866:  2 Wohler Os,  Ru. 

1869:  2 Wohler Os,  Ru. 

magnetic  ores. 


1866:  1 Kokscharow. 
1875:  27  Daubree. 

1876:  1 Terreil. 

1883:  laWilm. 
matrix  of  Pt.  See  Matrix, 
meteorites. 

1835:  7 Osann. 

1890:  5 Trottarelli 
1899:  2 Davison... 


...Pd. 
Ir,  Pt. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


533 


Occurrence — Continued, 
associations — continued . 
nickel. 

1876:  2 Daubr6e. 

1902:  3 Vogt. 

1903:  2 Dickson, 
osmiridium. 

1913:  16  Quennessen Ru. 

osmite. 

1836:  1 Hermann, 
silver. 

1836:  2 Herberger. 

1837:  1 Pettenkofer. 

1848:  3 Pettenkofer. 

1848:  4 Plattner. 

1852:  4 Palmstedt. 


1875:  6 Pd,  Pt. 

1876:  4 Rossler Pd,  Pt. 

sperrylite. 


1889:  1 Wells  and  Penfield. 
1889:  3 Hoffman. 

1896:  2 Walker, 
sun. 

1878:  49  Lockyer. 

1887:  2 Hutchins  and  Holden, 
wollastonite. 

1904:  2 Hundeshagen. 

See  also  Geologic  relations, 
general. 

1792:  1 Bergman. 

1793:  1 Haiiy. 

1802:  1 Thomson. 

1806:  2 Bucholz. 

1823:  1 C.  C. 

1826:  3 Menge. 

1827:  5 Humboldt. 

1828:  5. 


1835:  6 Rose Ir. 

1835:  11  Dobereiner Ir,  Os. 


1842:  5. 

1847 : 5 Pettenkofer. 
1854:  3. 

1870:  37  Skey. 

1877:  1. 

1879:  2 Jeremejew. 
1880:  2 Newberry. 
1890:  1 Blomeke. 
1908:  1 Geibel. 

1913:  20a  Day. 

1914:  3 Day. 

1917:  2 Wherry. 

1917 : 3 Quennessen. 
1917:  4 Hill. 


Occurrence — Continued, 
geographic  occurrence. 

Adirondacks. 

1917:  12. 

Africa. 

1913:  14a  Horwood Ir,  Os. 

Algiers. 

1838:  1 Aime. 

Alps. 

1848:  1 Gueymard. 

Australia. 

1896:  1. 

1913:  13. 

Ava. 

1833:  6 Prinsep. 

Borneo. 

1839:  2 Homer. 

1855:  1 Booking. 

1858:  1 Bleekrode. 

1859:  1 Bleekrode. 


1866:  2 Wohler Os,  Ru. 

1893:  3d  Hooze. 

1912:  12a  Tschernik Gen. 

1912:  12b  Nikolaeev Ir,  Os. 

Brazil. 

1809:  1 Wollaston Pd,  Pt. 

1811:  1 Gehlen Pd,  Pt. 

1818:  2 Mawe. 

1825:  1 Humboldt Pd,  Pt. 

1833:  7 Lampadius  and  Plattner. 
1837:  2 Johnson  and  Lampadius, 

Pd. 

1837:  4 Fellenberg Pd. 

1870:  la  Hartt Pd,  Pt. 

1882:  3 Seamon Pd. 

1882:  4 Mallet Pd. 

1904:  1 Hussak.... Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1906:  2 Hussak Pd,  Pt. 


British  Columbia. 

1900  : 2 Waterman. 
1910:  3 Camsell. 

1911:  9. 

1913:  7. 

1913:  8. 

1916:  7. 

1916:  23. 

Burma. 

1848:  2 Faber. 
California. 

1849:  2. 

1850:  4 Teschemacher. 


1852:  2 Genth Ir,  Pt. 

1854:  2 Dubois Ir. 


534 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Occurrence — Continued, 
geographic  occurrence — continued. 
California — Continued. 


1859:  3 Weil. 

1861:  1 Torrey Ir,  Os. 

1862:  1 Ludwig. 

1873:  la  Silliman Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1879:  1 Luthy. 

1894:  6a  Edman. 

1912:  13  Horton Ir,  Pt. 


1915:  10. 

1915:  11. 

1916:  21. 

1917:  8 Neill. 

Canada. 

1851:  1 Hunt. Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1867:  1 Ir. 

1886:  1 Hoffman. 

1887:  1 Dawson Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1889:  2 Clarke  and  Catlett. 

1889:  3 Hoffman Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1890:  3. 

1892:  4. 

1893:  4 Donald. 

1893:  4a  Browne. 

1916:  6. 

1917:  9 Gen. 

Caucasus. 

1893:  5 Wilm Pd. 

Colombia. 

1824:  a Mollien. 

1826:  1 Humboldt. 

1882:  2 Seamon. 

1884:  la  Restrepo. 

1886:  la  Restrepo. 

1906:  3 Day. 

1908:  4. 

1911:  10. 

1913:  6. 

1915:  16. 

1916:  24. 

Colorado. 

1911:  6. 

Delaware. 

1913:  12. 

Egypt. 

1901:  1 Berthelot. 

France. 

1833:  3 Claubry. 

1833:  4 Dangaz. 

1833:  5 D’Argy. 

1834:  1 Berthier  and  Becquerel. 
1834:  2 Villain. 

1834:  3. 

1849:  1 Ebelmen. 


Occurrence— Continued, 
geographic  occurrence — continued. 
Germany. 

1829:  4 Zincken Pd. 

1829:  5 Benecke  and  Rienecker, 

Pd; 

Guiana. 

1861:  4 Damour. 

Harz  Mountains. 

1829 : 5 Benecke  and  Rienecker, 

Pd. 

1835:  3 Berzelius. 

Hungary. 

1847:  2 Molnar. 

1847:  3 Kopetzky  and  Patera. 
Ireland. 

1850:  2 Mallet. 

Lapland. 

1870:  1 Nordenskjold. 

Madagascar. 

1914:  4 Duparc. 

1914:  5 Duparc,  Sabot,  and  Wun- 
der. 

1915:  2 Duparc,  Del  Campo,  and 
Pina  de  Rubies. 

Mexico. 

1811:  2 Humboldt. 

1874:  1 Burkart. 

1875:  4 Sandbergef. 

1876:  3 Uslar. 

1912:  12. 

Missouri. 

1859:  2. 

N evada. 

1914:  12  Hale. 

1914:  16. 

1915:  5 Knopf Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  6. 

1915:  7. 

1915:  8. 

1915:  9 Kennedy. 

1916:  18  Crampton. 

1916:  19  Knopf. 

1916:  20  Knopf Pd,  Pt. 

New  South  Wales. 

1890:  2c  Wilkinson. 

1892:  2c  Mingaye. 

1893:  3b. 

1893:  3c  Jacquet. 

1895:  2a  Card. 

1896:  b Carne. 

1898 : 8 Mingaye. 

1909:  2 Mingaye Gen. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


535 


Occurrence — Continued, 
geographic  occurrence — continued. 
New  York. 

1881 : 2 Collier. 

New  Zealand. 

1883:  a Pond. 

1913:  14  Farquharson. 

North  America. 

1900:  1 Day. 

1912:  9. 

North  Carolina. 

1847 : 4 Shepard. 

1881:  1 Hidden. 

1892:  1 Venable. 

1898:  6 Hidden. 

1913:  11  Heyl. 

Ontario. 

1903:  2 Dickson. 

1912:  11. 

1916:  5. 

Oregon. 

1854:  1 Blake. 

1860:  la  Thenevet. 

1869:  2 Wohler Os,  Ru. 

1906:  5 Pratt. 

1911:  8. 

1914:  13. 

1915:  4. 

1916:  9. 

1917:  13. 

Pennsylvania. 

1851 : 2 Genth. 

Peru. 

1821:  1. 

Rhine. 

1835:  4 Hopff. 

1841 : 1 Dobereiner. 

1841:  2 F.  D.  H. 

Russia. 

1826:  1 Humboldt. 

1826:  la  Erdman. 

1826:  2. 

1827:  2 Kupffer. 

1827:  3. 

1827:  4. 

1828:  1 Engelhardt. 

1828:  2 F.  H. 

1828:  3. 

1828:  4 Marx. 

1828:  7a  Lubarsky. 

1828:  7b  Lubarsky. 

1829:  1 Kupfier. 

1829:  2. 

1829:  3. 


Occurrence — Continued, 
geographic  occurrence — continued. 
Russia — Continued. 

1830:  1 Engelhardt. 

1831:  1. 

1831 : 2 Fuchs. 

1833:  1 Rose Ir,  Oa 

1833:  2. 

1835:  1. 

1835:  2 Teploff. 

1840:  a Koltovsky. 

1841 : a Helmersen. 

1842:  2 Menge. 

1842:  3. 

1842:  3a  Lubarsky. 

1842:  3b  Sivkov. 

1842:  3c  Koltovsky. 

1843:  1 Humboldt. 

1843:  2. 

1844:  1 Leplay. 

1845:  4a  Lubarsky. 

1846:  1 Murchison. 

1846:  la  GolochoArsky. 

1846:  lb  Koltovsky. 

1849:  a Murchison. 

1859 : 4 Haidinger. 

1863:  lb. 

1866:  la  Von  Kokscharow. 

1873:  a Tschupin. 

1874:  2 Frenzel. 

1877:  2 Kern. 

1881:  3. 

1882:  1 Lasaulx Ir,  Os. 

1884:  1. 

1888:  la  Saytzeff. 

1888:  lb  Krotow. 

1890:  2 Laurent. 

1890:  2a  Krassnapolsky. 

1890:  2b  Losch. 

1891:  1 Helmhacker. 

1891:  la  Belowsov. 

1892:  2b  Saytzeff. 

1893:  1. 

1894:  3. 

1894:  4. 

1895:  1 Inostranzeff. 

1895:  2 Muschkjetoff. 

1896:  a Bourdakov  and  Hendrikov. 
1897:  1 Stahl. 

1897:  2 Louis. 

1898:  2 Saytzeff. 

1898:  3 Llelmhacker. 

1898:  4 Beck. 

1898:  5 Meunier. 


536 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Occurrence — Continued . 
geographic  occurrence — continued. 
Russia — Continued . 

1899:  1 Purington. 

1905:  2 Spring. 

1906:  6 Horton. 

1907:  1 Katterfeld. 

1908:  3 Beck. 

1910:  1. 

1910:  2 Duparc. 

1911:  2 Duparc. 

1911:  3 Duparc. 

1911:  4 Duparc. 

1911 : 13  Pina  de  Rubies. 

1911:  14  Duparc  and  Holtz. 

1911:  14a  Holtz. 

1912:  5 Hutchins. 

1912:  6 De  Haatsick. 

1912:  7. 

1912:  8. 

1912:  14 Ir,  Os. 

1913:  1 Wunder  and  Thuringer. 
1913:  3. 

1913:  5 Duparc. 

1913:  17  Duparc  and  Pina  de  Ru- 
bies. 

1914:  10  Hutchins. 

1914:  11  Hutchins. 

1915:  14  Del  Campo  and  Pina  de 
Rubies. 

1916:  2 Duparc  and  Grossett. 

1916:  3 Duparc. 

1916:  14. 

1916:  15  Hutchins. 

1917:  5. 

Santo  Domingo. 

1751:  1 Watson. 

1755:  1 Lewis. 

1810:  1 De  Morveau. 

1810:  2 Percy. 

1811:  lGehlen. 

1870:  lb  Genth Rh. 


1873:  1 Vogel. 
Scotland. 

1869:  1. 

Siberia. 

1912:  8. 

1915:  3b  Pilipenko. 
Siebengebirgen. 

1854:  4. 

South  America. 

1748:  1 Ulloa. 

1788:  1 Celis. 

1792:  1 Bergman. 


I 

i 

i 

\ 


l 

i 

I 

i 


Occurrence — Continued, 
geographic  occurrence — continued. 
South  America — Continued. 

1793:  1 Haiiy. 

1802:  1 Thomson. 

1809:  1 Wollaston. 

1817 : 1 Humboldt. 

1917:  1 Kunz. 

Spain. 

1806:  1 Vauquelin. 

1818:  1 Heuland. 

1885:  la  Collins. 

1915:  3a  Pina  de  Rubies. 

1916:  1 De  Orueta  and  Pina  de 
Rubies. 

1916:  2 Duparc  and  Grossett. 

1916:  4. 

1917:  6. 

1917:  7. 

Sudan  and  Senegal. 

1906:  1 Ackermann. 

Sumatra. 

1904:  2 Hundeshagen. 


Tasmania. 

1912:  15 Ir,  Os. 

1913:  15  Twelvetrees Ir,  Os. 

United  States. 


1850:  3 Patterson Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1913:  10. 

1916:  8 Gruetter. 

Victoria. 

1907 : 2 Baragwanath. 

Westphalia. 

1914:  4 Duparc. 

1914:  6. 

1914:  7. 

1914:  8. 

1914:  9 Krusch. 

1915:  2 Duparc,  Del  Campo,  aDd 
Pina  de  Rubies. 

1915:  3. 

Wyoming. 

1901:  2 Knight. 

1902:  2 Wells  and  Penfield. 

1905:  1 Headden. 

1911:  7. 

1911:  28. 

1912:  10. 

1916:  22. 

Oenanthic  acid. 

1837:  9 Mulder. 

Optical  activity  of  complex  6alts. 


1917:  50  Delepine Ir. 

1917:  51  Jaeger Rh. 

1917:  52  Jaeger Rh. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


537 


Optical  activity  of-  complex  salts — Con. 
constants. 

1910:  63  Von  Wartenberg, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 
1910:  64  Von  Wartenberg, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

1910:  65  Meier. 

1910:  66  Zakrzewski. 

1913:  134  Forsterling  and  Fr^eder- 

icksz Ir,  Pt. 

1914:  107  Pog&ny. 

1915:  41  Hoffmann  and  Schulze. 
1917:  102  Oppitz. 

isomers,  action  of  Pd  hydroxide  on. 
1899:  39  Walden. 

See  also  Isomers, 
properties  of  crystals, 
bases. 

1846:  6 Haidinger. 
colloids. 

1907:  62  Muller, 
cyanides. 

1847:  17  Haidinger. 

1847:  18  Haidinger. 

1849:  7 Haidinger. 

1850:  16  Brewster. 

1852 : 10  Haidinger. 

1853:  9 Stokes. 

1853:  10  Stokes. 

1855:  13  Bottger. 

1855:  14  Stokes. 

1855 : 20  Haidinger. 

1858:  17  Grailich. 

1859:  18  Becquerel. 

1859:  19  Greiss. 

1860:  16  Von  Rath. 

1863:  18  Quincke. 

1870:  29  Schoras. 

1874:  40  Hagenbach-Bischoff. 

1880:  30  Wiedemann. 

1880:  31  Lommel. 

1880:  32  Lommel. 

1881:  30  Lommel. 

1883:  19  Konig. 
halides. 

1852:  10  Haidinger .......  Pd,  Rh. 

1854:  11  Gladstone. 

1871:  19  Topsoe  and  Christiansen. 
1895:  33  Gladstone  and  Hibbert. 
1917:  46a  Gaubert. 
oxalates. 

1847:  17  Haidinger. 

1847:  18  Haidinger. 
sulphides. 

1864:  14  Pisko. 


Ores,  analysis  of. 

1912:  83  Dart Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  84  Koukline ...Gen. 

See  also  Analysis, 
composition  of. 
general. 

1826:  6 Thomson Ir 

1829:  6 Osann. 


1835:  9 Dobereiner. 

1842:  6 Svanberg. 

1842:  6a  Minchin. 

1844:  4 Claus. 

1844:  5 Claus. 

1845:  7 Osann. 

1885:  2 Wilm. 

Alps. 

1852:  1 Gueymard. 

Canada. 

1886:  1 Hoffman. 

France. 

1833:  4 Dangaz. 

Russia. 

1825:  2 Laugier. 

1825:  3 Laugier. 

1826:  4 Breithaupt. 

1826:  5 Osann. 

1844:  2 Kositzky. 

1876:  1 Terreil. 

1911:  14a  Holtz. 

Santo  Domingo. 

1910:  3 Vauquelin. 

South  America. 

1834:  6 Svanberg. 

1835:  5 Berzelius, 
concentration  of. 

1911:  8a. 

1911:  28. 

decomposition  of. 

1804:  8 Vauquelin  and  Fourcroy. 
1804:  9 Fourcroy. 

1804:  14  Tennant  and  Wollaston. 
1807:  1 Collet-Descotils. 

1827:  6 Arkhipoff. 

1834:  8 Wohler. 

1835:  10  Joss. 

1846:  2 Fritzsche. 

1847:  6 Hess. 

1854:  5 Fremy. 

1860:  5 Deville  and  Debray. 

1873:  2 Knosel. 

1883:  3 Wilm. 

1885:  2 Wilm. 
electrolytic  extraction  of. 

1898:  11  Ziirn. 


538  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Organometallic  compounds. 

1907 : 28  Pope  and  Peachy. 

1909 : 38  Pope  and  Peachy. 

Origin  of  ores. 

1908:  2 Duparc. 

See  also  Geologic  relations. 
Osmates. 

1908:  14  Rosenstiehl. 

Osmiamates. 

1846:  10  Fritzsche  and  Struve. 
1869:  20  Owsjannikow. 

1891:  15  Joly. 

1899:  17  Brizard. 

1900:  10  Brizard. 

1901:  18  Werner  and  Dinklage. 
1902:  32  Dufet. 

Osmic  acid. 

1849:  8 Brauell. 

1851:  10  Butlerow. 

1874:  28  Deville. 

1878:  25  Broesike. 

1878:  26  Pelletan. 

1879:  32  Parker. 

1879:  33  Altmann. 

1880:  21  Certes. 

1898:  35  Klobbie. 

1899:  8 Sulc. 

1899:  9 Vezes. 

1907:  8 Orloff. 

1908:  46  Coca. 

1909:  51  Yon  Szily. 

1910:  13a  Walden. 

1911:  70  Schultze. 

1911:  71  Busson. 

1912:  39  Hofmann. 

1912:  40  Hofmann  (pat.). 

1912:  41  Rosenthal. 

1914:  64  Segre. 

1914:  65  Thorsch. 

1917:  42  Milbauer. 

Osmite.  See  Occurrence. 

Osmium,  dioxide. 

1917:  41  Ruff  and  Rathsburg. 
hexa  valent. 

1903:  17  Wintrebert. 

Osmonates,  nitrilo-bromo. 

1906:  14  Werner  and  Dinklage. 
Overvoltage. 

1914:  111  Newbery. 

1916:  96  Newbery. 

1917:  95a  Newbery.  .Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 
Oxalates. 

1833:  15  Dobereiner. 

1847:  17  Haidinger. 


Oxalates— Continued. 

1847:  18  Haidinger. 

1858:  6 Souchay  and  Lennsen. 
1859:  16  Schlossberger. 

1885:  15  Soderbaum. 

1888:  18  Soderbaum. 

1890:  36  Dufet. 

1894:  14  Soderbaum. 

1896:  20  Werner. 

1897:  19  Vezes. 

1898:  30  V5zes. 

1899:  22  Werner  and  Grebe. 


1899:  23  Vezes. 

1899:  24  Vezes Pd. 

1899:  25  Vezes. 

1900:  26  Loiseleur Pd. 

1900:  27  Wintrebert Os. 

1901:  16  Vezes. 

1901:  17  Wintrebert Os: 

1902:  18  Vezes. 

1902:  23  Vezes  and  Wintrebert. Os. 

1902:  32  Dufet Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1903:  25  Vezes. 

1907:  21  Tschugaeff Pd,  Pt. 

1907:  27  Gialdini Ir. 

1908:  31  Gialdini Ir. 

1909:  39  Vezes  and  Duffour Ir. 

1909:  40  Duffour Ir. 

1910:  32  Vezes  and  Duffour Ir. 

1910:  33  Duffour Ir. 

1911:  35  Duffour Ir. 

1911:  104  Feytis. 

1913:  63  Duffour Ir. 

1914:  38  Delepine Ir. 

1914:  39  Werner Rh. 

1917:  50  Delepine Ir. 

1917:  51  Jaeger Rh. 

1917:  52  Jaeger Rh. 


Oxalic  acid,  reduction  of  chloroiridate. 

by. 

1908:  19  Delepine. 

1908:  20  Y&zes. 

1908:  21  Delepine. 

Oxidation,  general. 

1802:  2 Cuthbertson. 


1908:  9 Marie Ir,  Pt, 

1915:  22  Langmuir Pd,  Pt, 

anodic. 


1903:  45  Coehn  and  Osaka. Pd,  Pt. 
1904:  61  Thatcher. 

1907 : 75  Marie. 

1908:  10  Ruer. 
catalytic. 

1903:  7 Wohler. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


539 


Oxidation — Continued . 
catalytic — continued, 

1903:  35  Matignon Gen. 

1905:  16  Magnus Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1905:  17  Lucas Ir,  Pt. 

1912:  114  Wi eland Pd. 

1912:  115  Sieverts  and  Loessner, 

Pd. 

1913:  112  Fokine Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  124  Wieland Pd. 

1913:  126  Hofmann,  Ehrhart,  and 
Schneider Os. 

1913:  127  Hofmann,  Schumpelt, 
and  Ritter Os. 

1913:  129  Willstatter  and  Sonnen- 
feld Os. 

1913:  131Badische  Anilin  u.  Soda- 
fabrik  (pat.) Ru. 

1914:  87  Willstatter  and  Sonnen- 
feld Os. 

1918:  67  Sieverts  and  Peters. . .Pd. 

1916:  68  Scagliarini  and  Berti- 
Ceroni Pd. 


1916:  74  Dreyfus Pd,  Pt. 

1917:  74  Bancroft. 

Oxides.  See  also  Catalytic  action, 
action  of  glycerol.  See  Glycerol, 
general. 

1868:  7 Wohler. 

1878:  4 Deville  and  Debray. 

1905:  15  Bellueci  and  Clavari. 
iridium. 

1847:  9 Claus. 

1890:  11  Geisenheimer. 

1907:  7 Witzmann. 

1908:  11  Wohler  and  Witzmann. 
1908:  12  Wohler  and  Witzmann. 
osmium. 

1844:  7 Fremy. 

1846:  9 Svanberg. 

1860:  10  Mallet. 

1892:  46  Kolossow. 

1893:  10  Moraht  and  Wischin. 

1910:  12a  Ruff  and  Bornemann. 
1912:  32  Gutbier. 

See  also  Osmic  acid, 
palladium. 

1813:  8 Vogel. 

1826:  9 Miller. 

1829:  18  Fischer. 

1833:  21  Gobel. 

1869:  14  Schneider. 

1874:  19  Wohler. 

1892:  9 Wilm. 


Oxides — Continued, 
palladium — continued. 

1905:  10  Wohler  and  Konig. 

1905:  11  Bellueci. 

1905:  12  Wohler. 

1906:  9 Wohler  and  Konig. 

1906:  10  Wohler. 

1907:  6 Bellueci  and  Clavari. 
1908:  13  Wohler  and  Martin, 
platinum. 

1802:  2 Cuthbertson. 

1812:  3 Davy. 

1812:  4 Berzelius. 

1813:  8 Vogel. 

1817:  2 Vauquelin. 

1817:  14  Cooper. 

1820:  1 Davy. 

1820:  4 Rose. 

1821:  2 Berzelius. 

1821:  5 Thomson. 

1826:  10  Dobereiner. 

1830  : 6 Berzelius. 

1830:  7 Liebig. 

1832:  2 Herschel. 

1832:  3 Dobereiner. 

1833:  15  Dobereiner. 

1833:  21  Gobel. 

1835:  11  Dobereiner. 

1838:  2 De  la  Rive. 

1841:  7 Wittstein. 

1841:  8 De  la  Rive. 

1842:  13  Schonbein. 

1844:  9 Schaffner. 

1846:  4 Osann. 

1847:  19  Hittorf. 

1868:  9 Topsoe. 

1870:  10  Fremy. 

1870:  18  Joliannsen. 

1875:  15  Delachanel  and  Mermet. 
1876:  28  Skey. 

1876:  29  Skey. 

1877:  9 Jorgensen. 

1882:  16  Wilm. 

1886:  3 Prost. 

1887 : 29  Reinhardt. 

1889:  7 Rousseau. 

1891:  22  Kwasnik. 

1902:  6 Wohler. 

1903:  6 Bellueci. 

1904:  4 Wohler. 

1905:  5 Bellueci. 

1905:  6 Bellueci. 

1905:  7 Bellueci. 

1905:  14  Wyrouboff  and  Verneufl. 


540 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Oxides — Continued, 
platinum — continued. 

1908:  69  Haber. 

1909:  10  Wohler  and  Frey. 

1909:  11  Wohler  and  Martin. 

1909:  12  Wohler  and  Martin. 

1909:  13  Wohler  and  Martin. 

1910:  82  Grube. 
rhodium. 

1818:  6 Berzelius. 

1916:  38  Gutbier  and  Huttlinger. 
1916:  39  Gutbier,  Huttlinger,  and 
Maisch. 
ruthenium. 

1875:  18  Deville  and  Debray. 

1888:  13  Debray  and  Joly. 

1890:  35  Dufet. 

1891:  16  Joly. 

1891:  17  Joly. 

1898:  12  Howe. 

1905:  13  Gutbier  and  Ransohoff. 
1916:  40  Gutbier,  Leuchs,  and 
Wiessmann. 

1916:  41  Gutbier,  Leuchs,  Wiess- 
mann, and  Maisch. 

Oxim  compounds.  See  Bases. 
Oxychloroplatinates. 

1899:  10  Hittorf  and  Salkowski. 
Oxygen.  See  Occlusion. 

Oxygen  removal. 

1904:  33  Goldstein. 

Ozone,  no  reaction  with  Pd  chloride. 
1913:  76  Yamauchi. 

P. 

Palau. 

1917:  128. 

1917:  129. 

1917:  130. 

Palladium  black.  See  Black. 

Parting.  See  Analysis. 

Parting  apparatus. 

1909:  104  Stanley. 

Passivity. 

1863:  10  Heldt. 

1904:  32  Muthmann  and  Frauen- 


berger Ru, 

1908:  10  Ruer Ir,  Pt. 


1910:  89  Bennewitz. 

Pentachloroplatinates.  See  Chloro-plat- 
i nates. 

Periodic  system,  problems  of  eighth 
group. 

1900:  3 Howe. 

1911:  73  Bauer. 


Permanganate,  action  of  Pt  on. 

1917 : 60  Foster. 

Permeation  by  gases. 

1897:  30  Randall. 

See  also  Condensation. 

Persulphuric  acid  and  salts. 

1902:  45  Price. 

1903:  8 Segewetz  and  Trawitz. 

1904:  63  Petrenko Ir,  Pt. 

See  also  Caro’s  acid. 

Pflug’s  Platinanstrichmasse. 

1876:  52. 

Phenanthrene.  See  Reduction. 
Phenylenediamin  in  toning  bath. 

1899:  50  Valenta. 

Phosphate  analysis,  crucible  disinte- 
gration. 

1902:  56  Heraeus. 

Phosphates. 

1830:  9 Fischer. 

1895:  9 Barnett. 

Phosphinamin  bases.  See  also  Bases. 

1902:  15  Klason  and  Wanselin. 
Phosphin  oxides. 

1906:  15  Pickard  and  Kenyon. 
Phospho-halogen  compounds. 

1870:  5 Cahours  and  Gal. 

1870:  6 Cahours  and  Gal. 

1870:  7 Cahours  and  Gal. 

1870:  8 Kolbe. 

1870:  9 Schiitzenberger.  • 

1870:  25  Descloizeaux. 

1872:  4 Schiitzenberger  and  Fon- 
taine. 

1872:  5 Saillard. 

1876:  18  Quesneville. 

1878:  9 Cochin. 

1881:  11  Pomey. 

1885:  16  Kulisch. 

1887:  6 Pomey. 


1890:  14  Geisenheimer Ir. 

1892:  15  Fink Pd. 


1903:  19  Rosenheim  and  Loewen- 
stamm. 

1905:  25  Rosenheim  and  Levy. 
1908 : 30  Herty  and  Davis. 
Phosphopalladic  ethers. 

1896:  16  Finck. 

Phosphorous  acid,  reduction  by. 

1909:  43  Sieverts Pd,  Pt. 

Phosphorus,  compounds.  See  Alloys, 
halides,  action  on  Pt. 

1909 : 31  Strecker  and  Schurigin. 
luminosity,  influence  of  Pt  on. 

1846:  20  Schonbein. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


541 


Phosphorus — Continued, 
potential  fall  of  wire  in. 

1905:  64  Richardson. 
Photochemical  action. 

1904:  8 Berth elot. 

1908:  58:  Vanzetti Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  42  Boll  and  Job. 

1912:  43  Job  and  Boll. 

1913:  43  Boll. 

1913:  135  Boll. 

1915:  76  Benrath Ir. 

See  also  Light. 

Photoelectric  effect. 

1909:  79  Pohl. 

1910:  67  Stuhlmann. 

1911:  97  Stuhlmann. 

1911:  112  Dember. 

1912:  124  Ruer  and  Scharff. 

1912:  125  Richardson  and  Comp- 
- ton. 

1912:  126  Werner. 

1913:  136  Robinson. 

1913:  137  Compton  and  Richard- 
son. 

1913:  138  Stuhlmann  and  Comp- 
ton. 

1914:  93  Reboul. 

1914:  94  Stumpf Pd. 

1914:  95  Stuhlmann. 

1915:  69  Kruger  and  Taege. 

1915:  75  Richardson  and  Rogers. 
1915:  77  Hallwachs. 

1917:  98  Coblentz  and  Emerson. 
1917:  99  Stuhlmann. 

1917:  100  Wilson. 

See  also  Emission. 

Photography,  use  in. 


1856: 

14 

Caranza. 

1872: 

21 

Merget. 

1874: 

42 

Willis 

1879: 

41 

Koninck. 

1879: 

42. 

1880: 

17 

Eder. 

1880: 

37 

Fabre. 

1881: 

35, 

1885: 

38 

Needham. 

1886: 

25 

Vogel . 

1887: 

46, 

1887: 

47 

Pizzighelli. 

1887: 

48 

Pringle. 

1887: 

49 

Willis. 

1887: 

50 

Bory. 

1887: 

51, 

1888: 

45 

Vidal  and  Vogel, 

Photography,  use  in— Continued. 

1888:  46  Reynolds. 

1889:  28. 

1889:  30  Von  Briihl. 

1889:  31  Schnauss. 

1889:  32. 

1889:  33  Eder. 

1889:  34. 

1889:  35  Crawford. 

1889:  36  Mercier Ir,  Os,  Pt. 

1889:  42  Pizzighelli. 

1890:  47  Liesegang. .Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Pt. 

1890:  48  Perkins Pd,  Pt. 

1890:  49  Clark. 

1890:  50  Gastein. 

1890:  51. 

1890:  52  Lenhard. 

1890:  53  Masse. 

1890:  54  Blanchard. 

1890:  55  Harjison. 


1890:  56. 

1890:  57  Berthiot Ir. 

1890:  58  Ir. 

1891:  42  Brunei. 


1891:  43  Stieglitz. 
1891:  44  Hezekiel. 
1891:  45  Eder. 
1891:  46  Huszar. 
1891:  47  Burton. 


1891:  48  Four  tier Pd.. 

1891:  49  Pilet Pd. 

1892:  56  Eder  and  Valenta. 

1892:  57  Fourtier Pd. 

1892:  58  Pizzighelli. 

1892:  59  Willis. 

1892:  60  Nichol. 


1896:  36  Kelly  and  Haumley.  .Pd. 
1899:  50  Valenta. 

1906:  80  Jacoby. 

1906:  81  Neue  photographische 
Aktiengeseilschaft  (pat.). 

1909:  108  Bartlett. 

1910:  107  Namias. 

1912:  160  Lumi&re  and  Seyewetz. 
1913:  181  Willis  (pat.). 

1913:  182  Lumiere  and  Seyewetz. 
Photometer.  See  X-rays. 

Photophone. 

1885:  37  Larroque. 

Physiologic  action. 

1825:  10  Gmelin. 

1833:  25  Prevost. 

1840:  7 Hofer. 

1849:  8 Brauell 


Os. 


542  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Physiologic  action — Continued. 

1851:  10  Butlerow Os. 

1869:  20  Owsjannikow Os. 

1871:  18  Rabuteau Pd. 

1874:  28  Deville Os. 

1878 : 27  Brunton  and  Fayrer. 

1878:  28  Pedler. 

1882:  20  Hofmeister. 

1892:  36  Pell. 

1904:  35  Bock Pth. 

1908:  46  Coca Os. 

1909:  51  Yon  Szily Os. 

1912:  41  Rosenthal Os. 

Pigment  for  porcelain  painting. 

1802:  7 Klaproth. 

1821:  11  Charlton. 

1821:  12  Charlton Ir,  Pt. 

1822:  5. 

1828:  24  Kastner. 

1831:  29  St.  Amand. 

1833:  26  Frick Ir. 

1847:  24  Liidersdorff. 

1849:  11  Salvetat. 

1857:  22  Muller. 

1868:  15  Frick Ir. 

1870:  28  Schwarz. 

1875:  31  Heyl. 

1876:  52. 

1877:  36  Kummel. 

1885:  35  Roessler Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1887:  36  Erlich  and  Storck. 

. 1887 : 37  Erlich  and  Storck. 

1887:  38  Schwarz. 

Pinene,  catalytic  isomerism. 

1911:  91  Zelinsky Pd. 

Pins.  See  Dental  pins;  Substitutes. 
Plated  apparatus. 

1866:  20. 

Platinates. 

1901:  5 Blond  el. 

1904:  5 Bellucci  and  Parravano. 
1905:  8 Blond  el. 

1905:  9 Bellucci. 

See  also  Oxides. 

Plating  with  platinum. 

1803:  14  Strauss. 

1805:  13  Stodart. 

1811 : 5 De  Morveau. 

1819:  7 Howse. 

1828:  20  Zuber. 

1828 : 21  Labonte  and  Depuis. 

1830:  14  Lampadius. 

1840:  9 Bottger. 

1840:  14  Smee. 


Plating  with  platinum  - Continued. 
1841:  17  Bottger. 

1841:  19  Elkington. 

1843:  15  Bottger. 

1843:  16. 

1850:  14  Bromeis. 

1853:  8 Jewreinoff. 

1854:  16  Savard. 

1855:  18  Roseleur  and  Lanaux. 
1855:  19  Bottger. 

1856:  16  Landois. 

1856:  17  Smee. 

1859:  25  Wild. 

1863:  15. 

1864:  IS. 

1865:  11  Magnus. 

1866:  20. 

1866:  23  Thomson. 

1866:  24  Bottger. 

1867:  16  Church. 

1867:  17  Church. 

1868:  14  Dode. 

1869:  23. 

1869:  24. 

1872:  14  Thompson. 

1874:  36  Polain. 

1875:  30  Weiskopf. 


1876:  48  Bottger. 

1876:  49  Bertrand Pd. 

1876:  50  Frantz Pd. 

1877:  31. 

1878:  61  Winkler. 


1879:  36  Clerk  and  Fawsitt. 

1879:  37  Dode. 

1879:  38  Daumesnil. 

1879:  39  Stoffel. 

1887:  32. 

1904:  68  Namias. 

1906:  79  Hyde  and  Swan  (pat.). 
1908:  88  Baum  (pat.). 

1909:  106  McCaughey. 

.1909:  107  Ressel. 

1910:  105  McCaughey  and  Patten. 


1913:  177. 

1913:  178  Stevens  (pat.). 

1913:  179  Stevens  (pat.) Ir. 

1913:  180  Kerk  (pat.) Sub. 

1914:  130  Nikolaus. 

1915:  102a  Coolidge  (pat.) Sub. 

1915:  103  Kateridge. 

1916:  93  Nutting. 

1916:  114  Eld  red  (pat.) Sub. 

1916:  115  Eldred  (pat.) Sub. 


See  also  Composite  metal;  Electroplat- 
ing; Glass;  Tubes. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


543 


Platinid,  a nickel  alloy. 

1891:  37. 

Platinized  electrodes. 

1902:  47  Foerster  and  Friessner. 
1902:  48  Foerster  and  Muller. 
Platinum  blue. 

1908:  33  Hofmann  and  Bugge. 
Platinum  red.  See  Purple  of  Cassius. 
Platinum-silver  resistance,  superheating 
of. 

1912:  136  Barnes. 

Plato-cyanides.  See  Cyanides. 
Pluranium.  See  New  metals. 

Poisons.  See  Catalytic  action;  Ferments. 
Polarization  phenomena. 

1838:  24  Bird. 

1838 : 25  Matteucci. 

1839:  11  J.  B. 

1844:  19  Poggendorff. 

1845:  20  Fischer. 

1857:  21  Bertin. 

1859:  28  Schonbein. 

1872:  23  Helmholtz. 

1874:  43  Macaluso. 

1877:  30  Parodi  and  Mascazzini. 
1878:  55  Morley. 


1878:  57  Beetz Pd,  Pt. 

1878:  58  Exner Pd. 

1878:  59  Herwig Pd. 

1879:  53  Bottger Pd,  Pt. 


1879:  54  Gladstone  and  Tribe, 

Pd,  Pt. 

1880:  45  Helmholtz. 

1882:  46  Streintz. 

1883:  38  Pirani. 

1883:  40  Guebhard. 


1887:  57  Streintz Pd,  Pt. 

1887:  58  Fromme Pd,  Pt. 

1888:  56  Draper. 


1888:  57  Fromme. 

1889:  39  Richarz. 

1890:  60  Arons. 

1890:  63  Richarz. 

1891:  51  Markovsky. 

1891:  52  Burch  and  Veley. 

1892:  67  Koch  and  Wiillner. 

1893:  44  Henderson. 

1893:  46  Daniel. 

1893:  47  Koch. 

1897:  33  Klein. 

1901:  19  Coehn Pd,  Pt. 

1901:  31  Bose. 

1901:  32  Schonherr. 

1901 : 33  Warburg. 


Polarization  phenomena — Contin  ued . 
1901 : 34  Muller. 

1902:  46  Nernst  and  Lessing, 

Pd,  Pt. 

1903:  44  Sack. 

1904  : 59  Rothe .Pd,  Pt. 

1905:  68  Tafel. 

1905:  69  Tholdte. 

1906:  64  Muller  and  Scheller. 

1906:  65  Muller  and  Spitzer. 

1910:  90  Reichinstein Pd,  Pt. 

Policeman  for  Pt  crucibles. 

1914:  126. 

Polinium.  See  New  metals. 

Polonium,  precipitation  on  Pd  and  Pt. 
1913:  94. 

Polymerism,  influence  of  catalysts. 

1916:  78  Lebedev  and  Ivanov. 
1916:  80  Terwin. 

Polysaccharides,  hydrolysis  of. 

1900:  3b  Sulc Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Rh. 

Polysulphides.  See  Sulphides. 

Porcelain  painting.  See  Pigments. 
Potassium,  analysis  of.  See  Analysis, 
chloroplatinie  acid, 
chlorate,  action  on  Pt. 

1857 : 17  Bottger. 

action  on  Pt  with  hydrochloric 
acid. 

1905:  56  Sirk. 
activation  by  osmic  acid. 

1913:  126  Hofmann,  Ehrhart,  and 
Schneider. 

1913:  127  Hofmann,  Schumpelt, 
and  Ritter. 

chloride,  action  on  Pt. 

1798:  1 De  Morveau. 
chloroplatinate.  See  Chloroplatinates. 
cyanide,  solubility  of  Pt  in. 

1903:  47  Glaser. 

ferricyanide,  reduction  by  iodine  in 
presence  of  Pt. 

1909:  60  Just  and  Berezowsky. 
nitrate,  action  on  Pt. 

1797 : 4 Tennant. 

1798:  2 Morveau. 

1800:  2 Tennant. 

permanganate,  catalytic  effect  on. 

1899 : 38  Wagner. 

1905:  40  Brown, 
persulphate,  catalytic  effect  on. 

1909:  70  Kernot Ir. 

See  also  Bromo-;  Chloro-;  Cyanides. 


544 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Potential,  variations. 

1906:  62  Fawsitt. 

1913:  95  Forbes  and  Bartlett. 
1914:  110  Hughes. 

See  also  Emission. 

Praseodymium.  See  Chloroplatinates. 


Precipitation  by  formaldehyde. 

1902:  24  Awerkieff. 

Preparation  of  metal. 

1905:  4 Parke Ir. 

1913:  36  Gutbier Os. 

1914:  52  Mvlius  and  Mazzucehelli, 

Gen. 

1915 : 41a  Mylius Gen . 

Price. 

1823:  2 Puymaurin Pd. 

1831:  3 Ir,  Os. 


1834:  5 Cooke. 
1857:  2. 

1857:  19  Heraeus. 
1876:  7. 

1892:  3. 

1892:  5. 

1911:  23. 

1911:  24 

1911:  25. 

Ir,  Pt. 

1911:  26 

1912:  25. 

Ir,  Pt, 

1912:  26 

Ir.  Pt. 

1912:  27 

1913:  26. 

Ir,  Os. 

1913:  27 

Ir. 

1913:  28 . 

Ir.  Pt. 

1914:  21 

Ir,  Pt. 

1814:  22 

Ir.  Pt, 

1914  : 24 

..Ir.  Pd.  Pt. 

1915:  18 

Ir,  Pt. 

1915:  19 

Ir.  Pt. 

1815:  20 

Ir.  Pt. 

1915:  21 

Ir,  Pt. 

1916:  12 

1916:  13. 

1916:  25. 

1916:  26. 

1916:  27. 

Gen. 

1916:  28 

Production. 

1828:  7 Breithaupt. 
1830:  4 Humboldt. 

Ir,  Pt. 

1832:  1. 

1835:  8. 

1841:  4. 

1842:  1 Rose. 
1842:  4. 

j Production — Continued. 
1843:  4. 

1845:  3 J.  A. 

1845:  4. 

1849:  3. 

1852:  5. 

1860:  3. 

1862:  3 Jossa. 

1862:  4 Jossa. 

1871:  1. 

1873:  4 Raymond. 
1874:  5. 

1876:  5 Frantz. 

1876:  6 Brachelli. 
1885:  1 Katterfeld. 
1888:  1 Kulibin. 
1889:  4. 

1890:  2 Laurent. 
1890:  4. 

1890:  6. 

1891:  1 Helmhaeker. 
1891:  2. 

1892:  2. 

1893:  6 Raymond. 
1893:  7. 

1894:  3. 

1894:  4. 

1894:  5 Helmhaeker. 
1894:  6 Keppen. 
1906:  4 Horton. 

1906:  5 Pratt. 

1909:  3. 

1911:  15. 

1911:  16  Hobart. 
1911:  17. 

1911:  18 
1911:  20. 


1911:  21 Ir,  Os 

1911:  22 Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh 


1912:  17. 

1912:  18. 

1912:  19  Hobart. 
1912:  20. 

1912:  22. 

1913:  20. 

1913:  21. 

1913:  22. 


1913:  23 Pd,  Pt 

1913:  25  De  Hautpick Ir 

1914:  16. 

1914:  17. 

1914:  18. 

1914:  19. 

1914 : 20. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


545 


Production — Continued. 

1915:  15a-  Roush. 

1915:  17  Hill. 

1916:  12 Gen. 

1916:  13. 

1916:  14. 

1916:  15  Hutchins. 

1916:  16. 

1916:  17. 

1917:  14. 

1917:  18. 

1917:  19. 

1917:  20. 

1917:  21. 

Prohibition  of  exportation. 

191.3:  18. 

1917:  24. 

1917:  25 Ir,  Pt. 

1917:  26 Ir,  Os,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

1917:  28. 

Properties,  general. 

1751:  1 Watson. 

1751:  2 Scheffer. 

1755:  1 Lewis. 

1758:  2 Macquer  and  Baum6. 

1761:  1 Marggraf. 

1764:  1 Cronstedt. 

1777:  2 Bergman. 

1798:  1 De  Morveau. 

1801:  1 Proust. 

1804:  15  Mussin-Puschkin. 


1809:  2 Cloud Pd. 

1811:  3 Davy Pd,  Pt. 

1827:  14  Fischer Pd,  Pt. 

1828:  12  Dobereiner. 

1836:  14  Dobereiner. 

1905:  3 Amberg Pd. 

physical. 

1751:  2 Scheffer. 

1755:  1 Lewis. 

1761:  1 Marggraf. 


1775:  1 De  Morveau. 
1776:  1 Ingenhousz. 
1798:  1 De  Morveau. 
1800:  7 Rochon. 


1809:  2 Cloud Pd. 

1811:  3 Davy Pd,  Pt. 

1836:  14  Dobereiner. 

1851:  12  Baudrimont. 

1891:  33  Heraeus. 

1893:  8 Joly Ru. 

1893:  9 Joly  and  V^zes Os. 


109733°— 19— Bull.  694 35 


Protection  from  silica  and  iron. 

1845:  14  Kastner. 

Protective  colloids.  See  Colloids. 
Pulverization  of  metals  and  alloys. 

1914:  68  Classen Gen. 

Purification  of  metal, 
general. 

1872:  1 Bettendorff. 

1876:  9 Phillipp . 

1878:  3 Matthey. 

1879:  4 Matthey. 

1898:  10  Mylius  and  Dietz. 

1911:  64a  Durham, 
iridium. 

1855:  5 Hennin. 

1867:  3 Schneider. 

1879:  5 Jungfleisch. 

1883:  29  Dudley. 

1899:  4 Leidie. 
osmium. 

1829:  8 Wollaston. 

1913:  36  Gutbier. 
palladium. 

1829:  7 Wollaston. 

1835:  9 Dobereiner. 

1880:  3 Wilm. 

1881:  5 Wilm. 
platinum. 

1798:  4 Mussin-Puschkin. 

1816:  1 Ridolfi. 

1836:  17  Liebig. 

1838:  3 Dobereiner. 

1867:  3 Schneider. 

1876:  8. 

1879:  49  Gladstone  and  Tribe. 
1881:  32. 

1892:  26  Mylius  and  Foerster. 
1892:  27  Mylius  and  Foerster. 
1892:  47  Warren. 

1899:  18  Bergsoe. 
rhodium. 

1903  : 3 Jorgensen. 

Purity,  determination  of. 

1914:  123  Burgess  and  Sale. 
Purple  of  Cassius,  Pt  analog. 

1907:  9 Wohler. 

1910:  60  Wohler  and  Spengel. 
Pyridin,  action  on  Ir  sulphate. 

1910:  24  Delepine. 

1911:  40  Delepine. 

See  also  Bases. 


546 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Pyrometers. 

1803:  11  De  Morveau. 

1825:  20. 

1825:  21. 

1831:  28  Daniell. 

18G2:  17  Becquerel. 

1878:  47  Crova. 

1882:  31  Hoadley. 

1882:  32  Hoadley. 

1882:  33  Hoadley. 

1884:  23  Tremeschini. 

1888:  43  Braun. 

1890:  45  Griffiths. 

1890:  46  Callendar  and  Griffiths. 
1891:  35  Callendar. 

1892:  53  Callendar. 

1892:  55  Griffiths  and  Clark. 

1895:  37  Heycock  and  Neville. 
1895:  38  Appelyard. 

1895:  43  Holborn  and  Wien. 

For  later  entries  see  Resistance 
thermometers, 
protection  tubes. 

1917:  118. 
substitutes  for  Pt. 

1917:  144  Darling. 

1917:  145  Neumann. 

Pyrostencil. 

1906:  75  Grunebaum  and  Scheuer. 
Pyrosulphates  and  salt,  action  on  Pt. 
1900:  30  Ditte. 

Q. 

Quartz,  joining  Pt  to. 

1912:  151  Berlemont. 
platinized. 

1884:  13  Zulkowskyand  Lepez. 
vessels  and  wire  as  Pt  substitutes. 

1910:  108  Yorbuchner. 

1911:  123  Arragon. 

1913:  186  Kopa. 

R. 

Radiation  from  Pt. 

1879:  44  Violle. 

1879:  48  Nichols. 

1881:  37  Violle. 

1887:  43  Violle. 

1887 : 44  Bottomley. 

1888:  51  Weber. 

1889:  38  Emden Pd,  Pt. 

1894:  39  Paschen. 


Radiation  from  Pt — Continued. 

1906:  61  Campbell. 

1907 : 48  Waidner  and  Burgess, 


Pd,  Pt. 

1907:  88  Leder Os. 

1910:  72  Hyde Os,  Pd. 


measurements  of.  See  Black,  plati- 
num. 

selective  radiation.  See  Filaments. 
Radiator  for  crucibles. 

1911:  115  Thornton. 

Radioactivity,  transmission  to  metals. 
1903:  49  Hofmann  and  Wolfe, 

Pd,  Pt. 

1905:  75  McClelland. 

1913:  162  Costanzo Pd. 

Radium,  action  on  cyano-platinites. 

1905:  42  Pochettino. 
influence  on  photoelectric  effect. 

1911:  112  Dember. 

Radium  emanation,  condensation  on  Pt. 
1909:  94  Laborde. 

Rambler  mine.  See  Occurrence,  Wyo- 
ming. 

Rare  earths,  complex  Pt  compounds. 

1905:  14  Wyrouboff  and  Verneuil. 
Reactivating.  See  Contact  mass. 
Recovery  of  waste  Pt. 

1912:  31 Ir. 

1913:  31  Hillman. 

1913:  32  Gaus. 

1913:  33  Baur  and  Nagel. 

1917:  17  Dunlop Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

of  waste  Pt  chloride  residues. 

1897:  5 Wiley. 

1901:  21  Berthold. 

1910:  6 Blair. 

1913:  30  De  Joug. 

1914:  26. 

Recrystallization  of  metals. 

1902:  33  Holborn  and  Henning, 

Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 


Reduction,  electrolytic. 

1902:  52  Tafel Pd,  Pt. 

in  presence  of  metal,  catalytic. 

1898:  33  Zelinsky Pd. 

1904:  31  Chapman Pd. 

1908:  35  Paal.  Gerum,  and  Roth, 
Pd.  Pt. 


1908:  36  Willstatter  and  Mayer, 

Pd,  Pt. 

1908 : 54  Willstatter  and  Mayer. 
1909:  41  Paal,  Roth,  Gerum,  and 
Hartmann Pd,  Pt. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


547 


Reduction — Continued . 
in  presence  of  metal,  catalytic— contd. 

1910:  34  Breteau.  Pd. 

1910:  54  Denham. 

1911:  49  Sabatier Pd,  Pt. 

1911:  50  Breteau Pd. 

1911:  51  Zelinsky  and  Glinka.  .Pd. 

1911:  52  Zelinsky Pd. 

1911:  53  Skita  and  Frank Pd. 

1911:  54  Willstatter  and  Waser, 

Pd,  Pt. 

1911:  55  Oldenberg Pd. 

1911:  56  Kotz  and  Rosenbusch. 

1911:  57  Ville Pd. 

1911:  87  Milbauer. 

1912:  60  Willstatter  and  Hatt. 
1912:  61  Schwarz. 

1912:  62  Skita ...Pd,  Pt 

1912:  63  Skita  and  Meyer. Pd,  Pt.* 
1912:  64  Skita  and  Meyer.. Pd,  Pt. 
1912:  65  Vereinigte  Chininfabriken 

Zimmer  & Co.  (pat.) Gen. 

1912:  66  Zelinsky Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  67  Zelinsky  and  Herzenst.ein, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  68  Meyer. 

1912:  69  Briinjes Pd. 

1912:  70  Wieland Pd. 

1912:  71  Naamlooze  Venootschap 

“Ant.  Jurgens”  (pat.) Pd. 

1912:  72  Ipatief Pd. 

1912:  73  Borsche Pd. 

1912:  74  Paal Pd. 

1912:  75  Kotz  and  Schaeffer. . .Pd. 
1912:  76  Kelber  and  Schwarz. .Pd. 
1912:  77  Zelinsky  and  Uklonskaja, 


Pd. 

1912:  78  Wohl  and  Mylo Pd. 

1912:  114  Wieland Pd. 


1913:  67  Semmler  and  Rosenberg. 
1913:  68  Vavon. 

1913:  69  Willstatter  and  King. 
1913:  70  Paal  and  Windisch.Pd,Pt. 


1913:  71  Bargellini Pd. 

1913:  72  Dupont Pd. 

1913:  73  Kousnetsof Pd. 

1913:  111  Stark Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  122  Paal  and  Oehme.  ...Pd. 

1913:  123  Wallach Pd. 

1913:  125  Paal  and  Karl Pd. 

1913:  128  Lehmann Os. 

1914:  78  Paal Pd. 

1914:  79  Saikind Pd,  Pt. 


Reduction — Continued . 
in  presence  of  metal,  catalytic^ — contd. 
1914:  80  Saikind  and  Pischtschi- 

koff ....Pd, 

1914:  81  Vavon. 

1914:  82  Vavon. 

1914:  83  Vavon. 

1914:  84  Wallach Pd. 

1914:  85  Fischer  and  Hahn Pd. 

1914:  86  Normann  and  Schick.. Os. 

1915:  64  Skita Pd.  Pt. 

1915:  65  Skita Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  66  Paal  and  Biittner Pd. 

1915:  67  Paal  and  Hohenegger.Pd. 
1915:  68  Paal  and  Schwarz. 

1916:  70  Boeseken Pd,  Pt. 

1916:  71  Bereelles. 

1916:  75  Korevaar Pd. 

1916:  77  Houben  and  Pfau. 

1916:  79  Saikind  and  Markaryan, 
Pd*  Pt. 

1917:  86  Kimura  (pat.). 

1917:  87  Nomura. 

1917:  88  Arahina. 

1917:  89  Sonn  and  Sehellenberg, 
Pd,  Pt. 

1917:  90  Paal Pd,  Pt. 

iron  oxide  by  Pt. 

1915:  45  Sosman  and  Hostetter. 
to  metal. 

1821:  13  Clarke. 

1827 : 15  Fischer. 

1829:  14  Kastner. 

1829:  19  Fischer. 

1830:  lOWach. 

1831:  8 Dobereiner. 

1833:  14  Phillips. 

1835:  12  Dobereiner. 

1835:  13  Joss. 

1840:  6 Parisot. 

1841:  14  Bottger. 

1847:  20  Kessler. 

1850:  10  Reynoso Pd. 

1858:  8 Hempel. 

1861:  16  Bechamp  and  St.  Pierre. 
1861:  17  Faget. 

1861:  18  St.  Pierre. 


1862:  14  St.  Pierre Pd,  Pt. 

1862:  15  Personne Pd,  Pt. 

1864:  5 Bottger. 

1864:  7 Brunner Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1872:  18  Bottger Pd,  Pt. 

1873:  12  Russell Pd,  Pt. 


548 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Re  duction — Conti  nued. 
to  metal — continued. 

1875:  23  Lossen. 

1877:  24. 

1882:  24  Post. 

1893:  36  Gulewitsch Os. 

1893:  37  Borntrager. 

1895:  28  Vi  tali Pd,  Pt. 

1895:  29  Stiebel. 

1897:  23  Sjollema. 

1909:  43  Sie verts Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  35  Ville Pd. 

1911:  50  Breteau Pd. 

Refining,  electrolytic. 

1911:  64a  Durham. 

Reflection  of  light. 

1910:  73  Coblentz Ir,  Rh. 

1911:  95  Royd. 


1912:  118  Partsch  and  Hallwachs. 
1912:  119  Coblentz. 

Refraction  of  light. 

1906:  35a  Barvir. 

1909:  72  Spence. 

1913:  133  Bergholm. 

Relation  between  properties. 


1818  : 8 Montizon. 

1826:  15  Berzelius 

1827:  8 Osann. 

1845:  12  Kopp 

Gen. 

1846:  17  Playfair  and  Joule. 

1860:  17  Crossley. 
1867 : 11  Jorgensen. 
1873:  13  Pettersson. 
1873:  15  Bottone. 
1882:  34  Kalischer. 
1883:  21  Donath  and 

Mayrhofer, 

Gen. 

1884:  28  Bid  well. 

1888:  48  Roberts-Austen.  .Pd,  Rh. 

1892:  28  Sayno. 

1898:  20  Kurnahow... 

Pd,  Pt. 

1900:  36  Tilden. 

1916:  84  Pagliani 

..Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

Resistance,  effect  of  magnetism  on. 
1912:  130  Alterthum. 
electric. 

1824:  17  Bulk. 

1827:  21  Despretz. 

1827:  22  Harris. 

1828:  19  Erdmann. 

1828:  27  Pfaff. 

1833:  27  Lenz. 


1846:  21  Becquerel Pd,  Pt. 

1858:  19  Arndtsen. 

1858:  20  Matthiessen Pd,  Pt. 


Resistance — Continued, 
electric — continued. 

1859:  29  Jacobi. 

1869:  31  Obermayer. 

1873:  27a  Benoit Pd,  Pt. 

1881:  38  Nichols. 

1884:  29  Knott Pd. 

1884:  30  Weiller. 

1885:  45  Tomlinson. 

1885:  46  Cailletet  and  Bouty. 

1886:  34  Knott Pd. 

1886:  35  Peddie. 

1887:  56  Preece. 

1887:  59  Koosen. 

1887:  60  Oberbeck. 

1890:  62  Le  Chatelier. 

1892:  65  Herroun. 

1893:  45  Dewar  and  Fleming, 


Pd,  Pt. 

1902:  49  Bran Ir,  Pt. 

1902:  50  Denso Ir,  Pt. 

1905:  66  Streintz. 

1905:  67  Broca  and  Turchini. 

1906:  27  Fischer Pd. 

1906:  67  Guertler. 

1906 : 68  Willows Ir,  Pt. 

1907:  70  Niccolai. 

1907:  71  Szivessy. 

1907:  74  Badeker Pt,  Rh. 

1910:  83  Lafay. 

1911:  105  Onnes Pd. 

1914:  47  Wolf Pd. 

1914:  107  Pogany. 

1914:  108  Riede. 

1914:  109  Reilley. 

1915:  39  Beckman Pd. 

1915:  41  Henning. 

1915:  85  Meissner. 

1916:  94  Hobbs Pd,  Pt. 


1916:  95  Weber  and  Oosterhuis. 
1917:  96  King, 
furnaces. 

1902  : 57  Haagn. 

1907:  86  Tucker. 

1911:  116  Fischer  and  Tiede.Ir,  Pt. 
1912:  102. 

1916:  108  Horton Sub. 

thermometers. 

1903:  52  Barnes  and  McIntosh. 
1905:  78  Campbell. 

1908:  83  Holborn  and  Henning. 
1908:  84  Onnes  and  Clay. 

1908:  85 Pt,  Rh. 

1909:  101  Stern. 

1909:  102  Waidner  and  Burgess. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


549 


Resistance — Continued, 
thermometers — continued. 

1909:  103  Waidner  and  Burgess. 
1910:  97  Wrede. 

1911:  118  Holbern  and  Henning. 
1912:  148  Burgess  and  Le  Chatelier. 
1912:  149  Moeller,  Hoffmann,  and 
Meissner. 

1912:  150  Smith. 

1913:  167  Burgess. 

1914:  122  Adams Pt,  Rh. 

1915:  41a  Henning,  Schultze,  and 

others Pt,  Rh. 

1915:  98  Hoffmann  and  Meissner. 
1917:  113  Northrup  and  others, 

Pt,  Rh. 

1917:  114  Woodward  and  Harri- 


son  Ir,  Pt. 

1917:  115  Northrup Pt,  Rh. 

1917:  116  Hilliger Pt,  Rh. 

1917:  117. 


See  also  Pyrometer;  Thermo-element; 
Temperature  scale. 

Resistance  to  chemicals. 

1811:  4 Davy. 

Resistances  for  gas  analysis. 

1917:  92  Kruger. 

Rietfontein  mines.  See  Occurrence. 

Rio  Tinto.  See  Occurrence,  Spain. 
Ronda  Mountains.  See  Occurrence,  Spain. 
Rotating  anode,  use  of. 

1907:  31  Langness. 

Russia.  See  Mining;  Occurrence;  Pro- 
duction. 

Ruthenium,  I.  See  New  elements, 
red. 

1905:  29  Biltz. 

1911:  72  Beltzer. 

1913:  96  Heidenhain. 
tetroxide. 

1898:  12  Howe. 

1909:  14  Gutbier,  Zwicker,  and 


Falco. 

S. 

Salicylates. 

1914:  41  Barbieri Pd. 

1916:  51  Barbieri Os. 

1917:  53  Barbieri Os. 

Salts  of  osmium. 

1899:  6 V&zes. 


1899:  7 Rosenheim  and  Sasserath. 
1902:  5a  Wintrebert. 

1903:  17  Wintrebert. 


Scandium  cyanoplatinate. 

1910:  25  Crookes. 

1912:  51  Orloff. 

1913:  97  Tschirwinski. 

*Scharding’s  reaction Ir,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

1910:  59  Bredig  and  Sommer. 
Selenates. 

1827:  12a  Mitscherlich. 

1915:  44  Hradecky. 

Selenic  acid,  action  on  Os. 

1915:  44  Hradecky. 
solubility  of  Pd  in. 

1917:  62  Hradecky. 

Selenides. 

1818:  5 Berzelius. 


1830:  9a Pd. 

1895:  8 Roessler. 

1903:  21  Chabrie  and  Bouchon- 

net Ir. 

1909:  15  Minozzi. 

1915:  88  Pelabon. 
organic. 

1911:  30  Fritzmann. 


Selenium,  influence  of  Pt  on  properties. 

1906:  63  Marc. 

Selenocyanates. 

1878:  18  Clarke. 

1912:  99  Billows. 

1916:  47  Minozzi. 

Selenostannates. 

1891:  9 Schneider. 

Senegal.  See  Occurrence. 

Separations.  See  Analysis. 

Sheet  metal,  Ir. 

1909:  105  Heraeus  (pat.). 
Shipment  of  Pt  to  Germany. 

1917:  39  Toch. 

Shortage  of  Pt  in  1917. 

1917:  31  Hoke. 

1917:  33 Gen. 

1917:  34. 

1917:  35. 

1917:  36. 

1917:  37. 

1917:  38. 

Silica,  action  on  Pt. 

1845:  14  Kastner. 

1874:  35  Reichardt. 

Silicides.  See  Alloys. 

Silicon,  action  on  Pt. 

1889:  18  Warren, 
organic  base,  cliloroplatinate  of. 

1903:  13  Dilthey. 


550  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Silver.  See  Alloys, 
chloride,  action  of  Pt  on. 

1878:  51  Tommasi. 
chloroplatinate,  hydrolysis  of. 

1909:  18  Jacobsen, 
iodide,  reaction  with  Pd  chloride. 
1906:  33  Orloff. 

Similkameen.  See  Occurrence. 
Siphon. 

1827:  20  Breant. 

Skinner-Case  element. 

1912:  137  Kremann  and  Noss. 
Smuggling  Pt  into  Germany. 

^ 1917:  29. 

Soap,  precipitate  with. 

1790:  3 Leonhardi. 

Sodium  chloride,  action  on  Pt. 


1900:  30  Ditte. 
electrolysis  of. 

1902:  50  Denso Ir,  Pt. 

peroxide,  action  of. 

1902:  7 Leidie  and  Quennes- 

sen Gen. 

1902:  8 Dudley Pd,  Pt. 

phosphate,  action  on  Pt. 

1917:  61  Smith. 


pyrosulphate,  action  on  Pt. 

1900:  30  Ditte. 

thiosulphate,  electrolytic  oxidation. 


1904:  61  Thatcher. 

Solubility,  anodic. 

1846:  16  Eisner. 

1904:  60  Fischer Ir,  Pt. 

1905:  70  Westhaver Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 


1907:  76  Senter. 
general. 

1755:  1 ^ewis. 

1779:  1 Tillet. 

1782:  2 Wenzel. 

1799:  2 Priestley. 

1810:  4 Davy. 

1842:  14  Mi  lion. 

1854:  13  How. 

1854:  14  Lasch. 

1859:  10  Dullo. 

1866:  6 Schonbein. 

1875:  25  Fairley. 

1878:  22  Berthelot Pd,  Pt. 

1879:  14  Edison, 
in  electrolytes. 

1898:  38  Margules. 

1898:  39  Margules. 

1903:  46  Ruer. 

1903:  47  Glaser. 

1904:  13  Brochet  and  Petit. 


Solubility — Continued, 
promotion  of,  by  Pt  metals. 


1829:  15  Zenneck. 

1838:  23  Dobereiner Ir,  Os. 

1854:  12 Ir,  Os. 

1870:  30  Schonn. 

1873:  23  Gourdon. 


See  also  Chloroplati nates;  Cyanides; 
Sulphuric  acid. 

Soot  on  Pt  vessels. 

1908:  85. 

Spain.  See  Occurrence. 

Spatula,  holder  for. 

1898:  44  Friedrichs. 

Specific  gravity. 

1775:  1 De  Morveau. 

1791:  1 Willir  and  Norvel. 


1830:  11  Osann. 

1841:  5 Rose Ir. 

1842:  7 Rose Pd. 

1844:  14  Marchand. 

1845:  12  Kopp Gen. 

1848:  11  Osann. 

1848:  12  Rose. 

1849:  10  Rose Ir,  Pd. 

1853:  4 Nickles Ir,  Pd. 

1856:  13  Keferstein Pd. 


1858:  10  Nogues. 

1859:  5 Soreze. 

1860:  1 Cotta. 

1862:  5 Phipson. 

1862:  6 Noble. 

1866:  3 Cloez Ir. 

1879:  6 Deville  and  Debray. 

1893:  27  Prinz Ir. 


1904:  36  Kahlbaum  and  Sturm. 
1905:  44  Kahlbaum  and  Sturm, 

Ir,  Pt. 

1908:  49  Schlett. 

1914:  47  Wolf Pd. 

1914:  71  Schlett. 

Specific  heat. 

1818:  18  Dulong  and  Petit. 

1819:  9 Dulong  and  Petit. 


1830:  18  Weber. 

1836:  19  Pouillet. 

1840:  12  Regnault Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1856:  18  Regnault Ir,  Os,  Rh. 

1859:  20  Regnault Ir. 

1861:  22  Regnault Gen. 

1864:  13  Kopp Ir,  Pt. 

1870:  33  Bunsen Ru. 

1877:  45  Violle. 

1878:  44  Violle Pd. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


551 


Specific  heat — Continued. 


1878:  54  Beketoff Pd. 

1879:  43  Violle...^ Ir. 

1882:  31  Hoadley. 

1886:  26  Pionchon Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1893:  41  Richards Gen. 


1895:  40  Bartoli  and  Stracciati. 
1900:  36  Tilden. 

1908:  48  Thiesen. 

1908:  49  Schlett. 

1909:  82  White. 

1910:  80  Richards  and  Jackson, 

Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  147  Dewar Gen. 

1914:  71  Schlett. 

1915:  86  Fabaro. 

1915:  87  Magnus. 

See  also  Atomic  heat. 

Specific  volume. 

1901;  36  Maey Ir,  Pt. 

Spectrum. 

1850:  11  Masson. 

1861:  23  Kirchoff Gen. 

1862:  26  Miller. 

1863:  17  Frazer Os. 

1868:  17  Thalen Gen. 

1869:  28  Gibbs. 


1877:  44  Ciamician. 

Pd,  Pt. 

1879:  46Liveing  and  Dewar. Pd, Pt. 

1879:  47  Gouy. 

1882:  37  Hartley 

Pd,  Pt. 

1897:  31  Kayser 

1904:  56  Adeney. 
1905:  63  Purvis 

..Pd,  Rh,  Ru. 

1906:  57  Purvis 

Ir,  Pt. 

1906  : 58  Purvis 

1908:  66  Moore 

Os. 

1909:  77  Finger. 

1909 : 78  Konen  and  Finger . 

1910:  62  Eder  and  Valenta. 

Os,  Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 
1910:  66  Zakrzewski. 

1911:  98  Miethe  and  Seegert, 


Ir,  Pt,  Rb. 

1911:  99  Dufour Rh. 

1912:  121  Hartley  and  Moss.Ir,  Pt. 

1912:  122  Dhein Pd. 

1912:  123  Ltittig Pd. 

1913:  140  Symons. 

1914:  66  Wick. 

1914:  88  Kail Gen. 

1914:  89  Maimer Pd,  Ru. 

1914:  90  Paulson Pd. 

1914:  91  Smith. 


Spectrum — Continued. 

1914:  92  Tschugaeff  and  Glebko, 


Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  71  Paulson. 

1915:  72  Paulson Pd. 

1915:  73  Paulson Ru. 

1915:  74  Paulson Ru. 

1917:  103  Takamine  and  Nitta. 
X-ray  spectrum. 

1913:  141  Herweg. 

1914:  89  Maimer Pd,  Ru. 

1914:  97  Rohmann. 

1914:  98  Moseley Gen. 

1914:  99  Seemann. 

1914:  100  De  Broglie. 

1915:  78  Wagner... Pd,  Pt. 

1915:  79  Wagner. 

1915:  80  Seemann. 

1915:  81  Laub. 

1915:  82  Laub. 

1915:  84  Bragg Pt,  Rh. 

1916:  87  Schmidt. 

1916:  88  Cermak. 


1916:  89  Siegbahn  and  Friman, 

Pt,  Rh. 


1916:  90  Seemann. 

1917 : 105  Ledoux-Lebard  and  Dan- 


villier Ir,  Pt. 

1917:  107  Kyropoulos. 

1917:  107a  Wagner Pt. 

Sperrylite. 


1889:  1 Wells  and  Penfield. 

1889:  3 Hoffman. 

1896:  2 Walker. 

1898:  6 Hidden. 

1902:  2 Wells  and  Penfield. 

See  also  Occurrence,  Sudbury,  Siberia. 


Sponge,  Pt. 

1826:  10  Dobereiner. 

1826:  13  Dobereiner. 

1829:  21  Planiava. 

1830:  12  Kastner. 

1830:  13  Faraday. 

1833:  23  Bottger. 

1844:  18  Hirschberg. 

1858:  14  Brunner. 

1874:  29  Vulpius. 

1890:  32  Loew. 

1903:  26  Knoevenagel  and  others, 

Pd. 

for  Gooch  crucible. 

1909:  48  De  Vries. 

Sputter  films.  See  Dusting;  Films. 


552 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Stability  of  colloidal  solutions. 

1907:  56  Billitzer. 

1907:  57  Svedberg. 

1907:  58  Svedberg. 

Standard  kilo. 

1862:  8. 

Stannate. 

1884:  3 Schiitzenberger. 

Starch,  inversion  by  Pt. 

1906:  49  Neilson. 

Steel,  armor-plate  ore  (Os). 

1911:  12. 
iridium  steel. 

1812:  143. 

Stefan’s  law. 

1910:  68  Bauer  and  Moulin. 

1912:  33  Fery  and  Drecq. 

Stellite.  See  Substitutes. 

Stovain,  analysis  of. 

1917:  46b  Deniges. 

Sublimation. 

1905:  46  Guntz  and  Basset. 

See  also  Films-,  Volatility. 

Substitutes. 

alloys. 

1830:  17. 

1836:  20. 

1914:  135. 

1916:  100  Peschko  (pat.) Pd. 

1916:  116  Fahrenwald. 

1917:  126  Fahrenwald. 

1917:  127  Heath. 

1917:  128. 

1917:  129. 

1917:  130. 

1917:  140  Cooper  (pat.). 

1917:  141  Cooper  (pat.). 

1917:  143  Guardiola(pat.). 
brass  gauze. 

1914:  133  Calhane  and  Wheaton, 
calorimeter  bomb. 

1915:  106  Parr. 

concentration  of  sulphuric  acid. 

1914:  131  Strzoda  (pat.). 

1914:  132  Barth, 
contact  points. 

1915:  95a  Heyl  (pat.). 

1915:  102  Eldred  (pat.). 

1916:  103. 

1917:  138  Taylor  (pat.). 

1917:  140  Cooper  (pat.). 

1917:  141  Cooper  (pat.), 
electrodes. 

1912:  92  Gooch  and  Burdick. 

1915:  104  Guzman  and  Ulzurrum. 
1915:  105  Guzman  and  Alemany. 


Substitutes — Continued, 
electrodes — continued. 

1916:  118  Guzman  and  Batuecas. 

1916:  119  Guzman  and  Jimeno. 
evaporating  pans. 

1912:  159a  Eldred  (pat.), 
general. 

1830:  17. 

1911:  124. 

1917:  124  Wooton. 

1917:  125. 

1917:  126  Fahrenwald. 

1917:  127  Heath, 
gold  dishes. 

1916:  106  Greenwood, 
jewelry. 

1916:  100  Peschko  (pat.). 

1917:  146  Humphries, 
laboratory  ware. 

1916:  102  Electrometals  Products 
Co.  (pat.), 
lamp  filaments. 

1917:  143  Guardiola. 
leading-in  wires. 

1915:  41a  Groschuff  and  Lenz. 

1916:  117  Yanai. 

See  also  Wire, 
lightning-rod  points. 

1836:  20. 
molybdenum. 

*1916:  108  Horton. 

1917:  138  Taylor. 

1917;  142  Fahrenwald  (pat.). 

1917:  146  Humphries, 
palau. 

1917:  128  Bureau  of  Standards. 

1917:  130. 

1917:  181. 
pins,  dental. 

1913:  180  Kerk  (pat.). 

1915:  102a  Coolidge  (pat.). 

1916:  101  Whiteley. 

1916:  102  Electrometals  Products 
Co.  (pat.). 

1917:  142  Fahrenwald. 
pyrometer. 

1917:  144  Darling. 

1917:  145  Neumann, 
quartz  dishes. 

1910:  108  Vorbucliner. 

1911:  123  Arragon. 
silver  gauze. 

1914:  134  Barnebey. 
stellite. 

1917:  131  Haynes. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


553 


Substitutes — Continued, 
triangle  of  nichrome. 

1911:  122  Benner, 
utensils  for  laboratory. 

1915:  41  Groschuff. 

1915:  107. 

i 

wire. 

1910:  109  Kopa  and  Konig. 

1910:  110  Kirby. 

1910:  111  Eldred. 

1912:  161  Wedekind. 

1913:  185  Kopa. 

1913:  186  Kopa. 

1916:  114  Eldred  (pat.). 

1916:  115  Eldred  (pat.). 

I Sudan.  See  Occurrence. 

Sudbury,  Ontario.  See  Occurrence. 

Sugar  inversion. 

1904:  52  Plz&k  and  Husek, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1905:  57  Vondracek. 

Sulphaminic  acid,  compounds  with. 

1911:  44  Kirmreuter. 

1912:  54  Ramberg  and  Kaltenberg. 


[Sulphates  of  Ir  (and  of  Pt). 

1812:  3 Davy Pt- 

1883:  8 De  Boisbaudran. 

1883:  9 De  Boisbaudran. 

1886:  3 Prost Pt- 

1904:  11  Stuchlik. 

1904:  12  Marino. 

1906:  17  Delepine. 


1907:  13  Rimbach  and  Korten. 
1909:  32  Delepine. 

1909:  35  Delepine. 

1910:  24  Delepine. 

1911:  40  Delepine. 

1913:  47  Wohler  and  Streicher. 


| Sulphides. 

1812:  2 Davy. 

1812:  3 Davy. 

1812:  4 Berzelius. 

1813:  8 Vogel Pd,  Pt. 

1817:  2 Vauquelin. 

1821:  3 Berzelius Pt,  Rh. 

1825:  6 Berzelius. 

1834:  10  Bottger Ir,  Pt. 

1838:  10  Reinsch. 

1840:  3 Fellenberg Gen. 

1846:  14  Crosnier. 

1860:  8 Schiff. 

1864:  14  Pisko. 


1869:  13  Schneider. 

1869:  14  Schneider Pd,  Pt. 


Sulphides— Continued. 

1872:  8 Guerout. 

1873:  8 Schneider. 

1873:  9 Schneider Pd. 

1874:  23  Schneider Pd,  Pt. 

1877T  10  Ribau. 

1877:  11  Von  Meyer. 

1877:  12  VonMeyer Os. 

1879:  28  De  Clermont. 

1879:  29  De  Clermont  and  From- 
mel. 

1883:  6 Debray Rh. 

1888:  12  Leidie Rh. 

1892:  14  Schneider. 

1893:  10  Moraht  and  Wischin.  .Os. 

1893:  14  Antony Ir. 

1893:  15  Antony Ir. 

1893:  16  Petrenko- Kritschenko. Pd. 
1893:  17  Schneider. 

1894:  29  Schiff  and  Tarugi. 

1895:  8 Roessler Pd,  Pt. 

1896:  10  Antony  and  Lucchesi. 
1896:  15  Durkee. 

1900:  6 Antony  and  Lucchesi. . Ru. 
1903:  9 Hofmann  and  Hochtlen, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1904:  6 Hofmann  and  Hochtlen, 

Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  81  Gaze. 

1916:  35  Ivanov, 
organic. 

1912:  56  Tschugaeff  and  Fraenkel. 
1913:  60  Tschugaeff  and  Benewo- 
lensky. 

1913:  61  Tschugaeff  and  Kobljan- 
ski. 

1914:  43  Tschugaeff. 

1914:  45  Tschugaeff  and  Chlopin. 
1914:  46  Ray. 

See  also  Bases, 
reduction  by  hydrocarbons. 

1917:  22  Bacon  (pat.). 

Sulphites. 

1838:  5 Dobereiner. 

1842:  9 Litton  and  Schnedermann. 
1843:  9 Berthier. 

1847:  7 Claus Ir,  Os,  Pt,  Ru. 

1861:  9 Lang. 

1865:  7 Bimbaum Ir. 

1866:  7 Birnbaum. 

1869:  12  Birnbaum. 

1874:  20  Wohler Pd. 

1878:  10  Seubert Ir. 

1890:  10  Seubert  and  Kobb6, 

Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 


554 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


Sulphites — Continued. 

1900:  15  Miolati  and  Tagiuri.  .Ru. 

1900:  17  Rosenheim Os. 

1900:  18  Antony  and  Lucchesi. Ru. 

1901:  23  Sachs Os,  Pd. 

Sulphocyanides.  See  Thiocyanates. 
Sulphur,  black,  colored  by  Pt. 

1917:  44  Neumann, 
chloride,  no  action  on  Pt. 

1916:  37  Domanicki. 
dioxide,  absorption. 

1913:  106  Sie verts  and  Bergner. 
action  on  Ru  sulphate. 

1898:  22  Antony  and  Lucchesi. 
1899:  13  Antony  and  Lucchesi. 
1899:  15  Antony  and  Manasse. 
1900:  18  Antony  and  Lucchesi. 
Sulphuric  acid, 
action  on  Pt. 

1878:  40  Scheurer-Kestner. 

1880:  35  Scheurer-Kestner. 

1892:  48  Heraeus. 

1899:  48  Adie Pd,  Pt. 

1903:  55  Conroy. 

1905:  41  Delepine. 

1905:  71  Brochet  and  Petit. 

1905:  72  Ruer. 

1905:  73  Brochet  and  Petit. 

1905:  74  Ruer. 

1906:  16  D.elepine Ir,  Pt. 

1906:  77  Quennessen. 

1912:  153  McCay. 

1912:  154. 

anhydride.  See  Contact  mass, 
barium  sulphate,  Pt  not  retained. 


1904:  30  Silberberger. 
concentration. 

1914:  131  Strzoda  (pat.) Sub. 

1914:  132  Barth '....Sub. 


See  also  Concentration  apparatus. 
Sulphury  1 chloride,  reaction  with. 

1911:  75  North. 

Supply  and  demand. 

1911:  18. 

1917:  15. 

Surface  tension  of  Ir  chloride. 

1913:  50  Wohler  and  Streicher. 

T. 

Tantalum,  plated  with  Pt. 

1912:  155  Siemens  & Halske  (pat.). 
Tariff,  U.  S.,  on  Pt-Rh  wire. 

1916:  99. 

Telephone,  Os. 

1884:  22  Anders. 


Telescope,  mirror  of  Pt. 

1800:  7 Rochon. 

Tellurium,  compounds  with. 

1897 : 38  Roessler. 
ethers. 

1915 : 24  Tschugaeff  and  F ritzmann 
Temperature  measurement  and  scale. 
1905:  77  Travers  and  Gwyer. 

1906:  36  Holbom  and  Valentiner 

Pd 

1910:  78  Yon  Pirani. 

Tenacity. 

1809:  4 Be  Morveau. 

1834:  25  Karmarsch. 

1850:  13  Baudrimont Pd,  Pt. 

1912:  101  Lindemann. 

Terpenes,  decomposition  by  hot  Pt. 
1911:  84  Harries  and  Gottlob, 
reduction. 

1917:  90  Paa! Pd,  Pt. 

Testing  quality  of  utensils. 

1910:  98  Walker  and  Smither. 
Tetrabromides.  See  Bromides. 
Tetrachlorides.  See  Chlorides. 

T etraf ormal-trisazin , precipitant  for  Pd 
and  Pt. 

1912:  86  Hofmann  and  Sturm. 
Tetroxide,  ruthenium,  explosion  of. 

1898:  12  Howe. 

Theft  of  Pt. 

1890:  7. 

1914:  120. 

Theory  of  Pt  bases. 

1869:  16a  Blomstrand. 

1902:  20  Spiegel. 

Therapeutic  action. 

1840:  7 Hofer. 

P(1  compounds. 

1901:  40  Cohen. 

1913:  171  Kauffmann. 

1913:  172  Kauffmann. 

1913:  173  Gom. 

Thermoelectric  phenomena. 

1829:  26  Becquerel. 

1855:  24  Adie. 

1876:  62  Knott,  MacGregor,  and 


Smith ...Pdl 

1877:  46  Thomsen Pd,  Pt. 

1878:  56  Gore Pd,  Pt. 


1880:  40  Bouty.  1 
1880:  41  Gore. 

1880:  42  Young. 
1880:  43  Blondlot. 
1887:  45  Haga. 


SUBJECT  INDEX, 


555 


Thermoelectric  phenomena — Continued. 


1887:  53  Le  Chatelier Gen. 

1888:  62  Jahn. 

1892:  64  Barus Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 

1894:  38  Noll. 


1895 : 44  Dewar  and  Fleming. 
1899 : 42  Holborn  and  Day, 


Pd,  Pt,  Rh. 

1900:  38  Steinmann Ir,  Pt. 

1907:  73  Barker. 

1907:  74  Badeker Pt,  Rh. 

1908:  76  Burgess Ir,  Pt,  Rh. 

1910:  81  Honda Gen. 

1910:  86  Sosman Pt,  Rh. 

1910:  87  Rudolfi Pd,  Pt. 

1910:  88  Lees .....Pd. 

1910:  93  Broniewski -Pd,  Pt. 

1913:  160  Werner. 

1914:  115  Wietzel. 

1914:  122  Adams Pt,  Rh. 

1914:  123  Burgess  and  Sale. 

1916:  86  La  Rosa Ir,  Pt. 

Thermoelement. 

1911:  110  Austin. 

1912:  137  Kremann  and  Noss. 

1915:  88  Pelabon Pt,  Rh. 

1916:  107  Bodenstein Pt,  Rh. 

1916:  111  Kowalke Pt,  Rh. 

Thermomagnetic  properties. 

1910:  81  Honda Gen. 

1912:  128  Honda Gen. 

1912:  129  Owen Gen. 

1913:  149  Honda  & Son6 Os. 

Thermometer,  nitrogen. 


1910:  48  Day,  Sosman,  and  Allen, 
Pd,  Pt. 

See  also  Resistance  thermometer. 
Thio-acid  compounds. 

1906:  22  Ramberg. 

1906:  26  Klason  and  Carlson. 

1910:  31  Ramberg. 

1911:  45  Robinson  & Jones. 

1911:  46  Tyd4n. 

1912:  57  Jones  and  Robinson  . .Pd. 
1912:  58  Jones  and  Robinson.  .Pd. 
1913:  59  Ramberg. 

1913:  59a  Ramberg. 

1916:  52  Tiberg. 

Thio-carbonate  bases.  See  Bases. 
Thiocyanates. 

1854:  9 Buckton. 

1856:  5 Claus. 

1856:  13  Keferstein. 

1867:  7 Croft Pd. 


Thioc  yanates  — Continued. 

1868:  4 Skey. 

1868:  5 Marcano. 

1869:  14  Schneider. 

1869:  18  Blomstrand. 

1874:  21  Skey. 

1874:  22  Skey. 

1875:  16  Kern ...Pd. 

1877:  19  Wyrouboff. 

1877:  42  Clarke. 

1880:  9 Wyrouboff. 

1880:  10  Marcano. 

1881 : 13  Clarke  and  Owens. 

1891:  7 Guareschi. 

1900:  21  Miolati  and  Bellucci. 
1900:  22  Walden. 

1903:  23  Grossmann Gen. 

1904:  14  Bellucci. 

1907 : 13  Rimbach  and  Korten. . Ir. 
1912:  98  Billows. 

Thio-ethers. 

1913:  56  Tschugaeff  and  Chlopin. 
Thio-glycollic  acid.  See  Thio-acids. 
Thio-lactic  acid. 

1883:  11  Lovin. 

Thio-oxalic  acid.  See  Thio-acids. 
Thio-stannate. 

1892:  14  Schneider. 

Thiosulphates. 

1842:  11  Himly. 

1866:  8 Schottlander. 

1885:  8 Jochum. 

Thio-ureas. 

1893:  24  Kurnakow. 

1893:  25  Sell  and  Easterfield. 
Thomson  effect. 

1910:  79  Berg. 

Thorianite,  Rh  in. 

1911:  11  Jakob  and  Tolloczko. 
Toning  bath.  See  Photography. 

Toura.  See  Occurrence. 

Toxicity  of  Pt  to  bacteria. 

1912:  97  Bitter. 

Transmutation  of  Rh  into  iron. 

1841 : 6 Tilley. 

Transparency. 

1786:  2 Landriani. 

1827:  17  Kastner. 

1877:  43  Govi. 

1886:  30  Van  Aubel. 

1886:  31  Van  Aubel. 

Treatment  of  ores. 

1897 : 2 Louis. 

1897 : 4 M6ker. 


556  BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP. 


Triangles. 

1859:  21  Jenzsch. 

1885:  32  De  la  Harpe. 

See  also  Substitutes. 

Tuberculosis,  Pd  chloride  as  remedy. 

1901:  40  Cohen. 

Tungstates. 

1877:  15  Gibbs. 

1886:  5 Gibbs. 

1891:  8 Rosenheim. 

1895:  11  Gibbs. 

Tungsten,  absorption  by  Pt. 

1897:  42  Hardin, 
contact  points. 

>1917:  138  Taylor  (pat.) Sub. 

dental  pins. 

1917:  142  Fahrenwald  (pat.).. Sub. 
wire. 

1910:  99  Coolidge. 

1910:  101  Merrill Os,  Pt. 

U. 

Ultramicroscopy  of  colloids. 

1906:  53  Schneider  and  Just, 

Os,  Pt,  Ru. 

1911:  89Thomae. 

1911:  90  Svedberg  and  Inouye. 
Ultraphosphate . 

1912:  111  Kroll. 

Ultraviolet  light, 
discharge  of  wire. 

1907:  69  Davidson, 
influence  in  catalysis. 

1913:  11-7  Farmer  and  Parker. 
Uralium.  See  New  elements. 

Urals.  See  Occurrence. 

Uranium  Rh  nitrate. 

1911:  41  Lancien. 
sulphate,  action  on  Pt  chloride. 

1903:  12  De  Coninck. 

Urea  compound. 

1881 : 13  Clarke  and  Owens. 
Urotropin,  reagent  for  Pt  metals. 

1917:  64  Vivario  and  Wagenaar. 
Uses,  general. 

1798:  5 Rochon. 

1800:  7 Rochon. 

1828:  17  Erdmann. 

1836:  14  Dobereiner. 

1836:  15  Trommsdorff. 

1836:  16  Pelouze. 

1840:  11 Pd... 

1846:  3 Schmidt  and  Johnston. Pd. 


Uses,  general — Continued. 


1872: 

13. 

1881: 

4 

Ir 

1881: 

32. 

1883: 

29  Dudley 

Ir. 

1885: 

25. 

1907: 

3. 

1908: 

1 Geibel. 

1912: 

144  Burton. 

1912: 

146. 

1913: 

27 

Ir,  Pd. 

1913: 

29. 

1914: 

24 

...Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1916: 

32. 

See  also  Concentration  apparatus;  Com- 
bustion tubes;  Crucibles;  Filters; 
Laboratory  utensils;  Pigments; 
Pyrometers;  Telescopes;  Vessels; 
Wire. 

V. 

Vacuum  tubes. 

1914:  124  Marconi  Wireless  Tele- 


graph Co.  (pat.). 

1916:  110 Ir,  Pt. 

1917:  139  Bates Sub. 

Valence. 

1913:  49  Wohler  and  Streicher, 

Ir,  Pt. 

1914:  63  Biltz Ir,  Pt. 


1917:  54  Ephraim  and  Miliman. 
Vanadium  sulphate,  action  on  salts. 

1902:  25  Piccini  and  Marino. 
Vapor  pressure. 

1914:  69  Langmuir  and  Mackay. 
Vessels  of  Pt. 

1785:  1 De  Morveau. 

1787 : 1 De  Morveau. 

1787 : 2 De  Morveau. 

1790:  4 Lavoisier. 

1790:  5 R. 

1792:  3 Berthollet  and  Pelletier. 
1813:  6 Neumann. 

1814:  9 Dobereiner. 

1814:  10  Joris. 

1821:  10  Seebeck. 

1828:  23  D’Arcet. 

1830:  13  Faraday. 

1831:  26  Stieren. 

1832:  18  Bischof. 

1844:  16  Pleischl. 

1870:  26. 

1877 : 35  Prentice. 

1878:  35. 

Vibration.  See  Wire. 


SUBJECT  INDEX. 


557 


Viscosity. 

1888:  49  Bams. 

1908:  51  Guye  and  Mintz. 

1910:  46  Guye  and  Schapper, 

Pd,  Pt. 


Volatility. 

1802:  5 Hare. 

1858:  12  Eisner Ir,  Pd,  Pt. 

1877:  20  Troost  and  Hautefeuille. 
1879:  18  Seelheim. 

1879:  19  Meyer. 

1879:  20  Smith. 

1879:  21  Dunnington. 


1879:  45  Edison Ir,  Pt. 

1886:  29  Dessau. 

1888:  31  Berliner Pd,  Pt. 

1888:  32  Kayser. 

1891:  40  Crookes Pd,  Pt. 

1891:  41  Mooser.  • 

1892:  63  Spring. 

1893:  31  Moissan. 


1896:  40  Moissan. 

1899:  8 &ulc Os. 

1899:  9 Vezes Os. 

1904:  38  Hulett  and  Berger. 

1906:  37  Moissan Gen. 

1906:  38  Langmuir Pt,  Rh. 

1909:  54  Knocke. 

1909:  55  Houlevigue. 

1911:  102ReboulandDeBollemont. 

1912:  103  Crookes Gen. 

1913:  34  Verein  chemischer  Fabri- 
ken  in  Mannheim  (pat.)..Ir,  Pt. 
1913:  48  Wohler  and  Streicher.  .Ir. 

1913:  101  Kaye  and  Ewen Gen. 

1916:  58  Burgess  and  Waltenberg. 
Volatilization,  cathodic. 

1917:  92  Kruger Os, 

Volumetric.  See  Analysis. 


W. 

War  and  Pt. 

1916:  29  Quennessen. 

1916:  30. 

1917:  32  Johnstone. 

See  also  Embargo. 

Watch  springs. 

1809:  3 Scott. 

Water,  decomposition  by  Pt. 

1907:  37  Holt. 

by  magnesium  and  Pd  chloride. 
1912:  94  Knapp. 


Wave  detector. 

1904:  65  Rothmund  and  Lessing. 
Weights,  correcting. 

1915:  100  Von  Ledden  Hulsebosch. 
Welding  Pt. 

1863:  13  Griiel. 

1878:  35. 

1880:  14  Spring. 

1884:  20  Seaman. 

1886:  23  Lake. 

1913:  104  Weightman. 
to  other  metals. 

1912:  156  Eldred  (pat.), 

1912:  157  Eldred  (pat.), 

1912:  158  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  159  Eldred  (pat.). 

1912:  159a  Eldred  (pat.). 

Werner’s  theory. 

1908:  25  Friend. 

1912:  49  Bellucci Ru. 

1912:  96  Peters. . .Pd,  Pt,  Rh,  Ru. 

Wire. 

1823:  22  Becquerel. 

1877:  28  Gaiffe. 

1899:  47  Merck Os. 

cleaning  of. 

1910:  41  De  Koninck. 
for  singeing. 

1886:  24  Banks  and  Brierley. 
for  telescopes. 

1885:  36  Read, 
holder  for. 

1899:  46  Palmaer. 
sealing  in  glass. 

1913:  168a  Anderson, 
self-heating  of. 

1911:  103  Le  Bel. 
strings  for  musical  instruments. 

1825:  22. 

1840:  10  Fischer, 
substitutes  for. 

1910:  109  Kopa  and  Konig. 

1910:  110  Kirby. 

1910:  111  Eldred. 

1913:  185  Kopa. 

1913:  186  Kopa. 

vibration  when  electrically  heated. 

1915:  90  Streintz  and  Weseley. 

See  also  Tariff. 

Working  of  Pt.  See  Malleability. 
Wyoming.  See  Occurrence. 


558 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  METALS  OF  PLATINUM  GROUP, 


X. 

X-rays, 
absorption  of. 

1907:  66  Kaye. 

1910:  77  Whiddington. 

1913:  142  Hupka. 

1913:  143  Jungenfeld Ir,  Rh. 

1914:  102  Kirschbaum. 
specific,  by  metallic  salts. 

1899:  41  Hebert  and  Reynaud. 
composition  of. 

1917:  106  Kaye, 
cyano-platinites,  use  of. 

1895:  41  Macintyre. 

1896:  41  Jackson. 

1899:  40  Hebert  and  Reynaud. 
1905:  42  Pochettino. 
depth  of  formation . 

1914:  101  Davey. 
emission  of. 

1912:  127  Chapman. 

1912:  139  Friedrich. 


1915:  82  Laub. 

1917:  104  Wooten Pd. 

energy  of. 

1913:  144  Beatty Pt,  Rh. 


X-rays — Continued, 
ionization  by. 

1915:  83  Campbell, 
photography  of  aluminum  alloys. 
1897:  39  Heycock  and  Neville. 
See  also  Spectrum, 
properties  of. 

1911:  100  Whiddington. 
transmission. 

1892:  62  Hertz. 

1896:  42  Egbert. 

1910:  76  Crowther. 

1914:  116  Whiddington. 


wave  length. 

1914:  103  Barkla Rh. 

1914:  104  Bragg Rh. 

Z. 

Zeeman  effect. 

1911:  99  Dufour Rh. 

1912:  123  Ltittig Pd. 

Zinc.  See  also  Alloys, 
chloroplatinates. 


1917:  47  Eberhard. 


o 


DEPARTMENT  OF  THE  INTERIOR 

I Franklin  K.  Lane,  Secretary 

United  States  Geological  Survey 

George  Otis  Smith,  Director 

*■  — * — 

BULLETIN  694 


BIBLIOGRAPHY  OF  THE  METALS  OF 
THE  PLATINUM  GROUP 

PLATINUM,  PALLADIUM, 

IRIDIUM,  RHODIUM,  OSMIUM,  RUTHENIUM 

1748-1917 

BY 

JAS.  LEWIS  HOWE 

AND 


H.  C.  HOLTZ 


WASHINGTON 


GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1919 


